《Small upgrade system》


 Chapter 1 1 - New World And A New Journey(Edited)

    It was raining outside. Sam was ying a game on his mobile, but out of nowhere, his mobile glowed, and this is thest thing he can remember.


    Sam doesn''t even understand what just happened to him. Thest thing he remembers is that his mobile suddenly glowed, and then he felt the pain.


    An unknown timeter, Sam opens his eyes. He can only see rocks around.


    "Am i still alive? "


    "Is this a hospital ?"


    Sam was trying to lift his head to see around, but his head hurts like hell. He became unconscious.


    Sometimeter, he regains his consciousness. He can feel an unknown memorye to his mind. He starts absorbing all the memory.


    "So, I just crossed over to a different world, and this body is not my original body."


    Sam doesn''t even know what he is going to do now. He sighed in his heart, he sat down near a stone wall, and was observing all the details of the surrounding area.


    This was apletely different world filled with monsters and dungeons. This world is called Eden Blue.


    Hundred years ago, it was the same as earth. Then suddenly, many dungeons appeared, and many monsters came from dungeons and attacked the humans.


    The human hot weapons were useless against those monsters, and many people died, and they also wiped out many cities.


    But then, some people gained supernatural abilities through absorbing the crystals that were dropped by the monsters, when they killed them.


    [A/N: There are five types of crystal : strength, agility, physique, spirit, and intelligence.]


    They fought against the monsters, cleared the dungeons, and built new cities.


    Like games, monsters not only dropped crystals, but they also dropped a variety of fighting techniques, absorption techniques, materials, etc.


    The dropped rate of various techniques was very low, and absorb techniques were the rarest among them.


    Now all the people who fought with monsters were called warriors. They divided warriors into two groups: physical warriors and spiritual warriors.


    Physical warriors use their physical strength to fight the monsters. Spiritual warriors use their spirit to perform magic fighting techniques like a fireball and water bullet.


    We can also divide Warrior into many grades, such as S, A, B, C, D, E, and F. F is the lowest level, and S is the greatest level.


    The dungeons were also divided into many floors. If you go deeper, you will face more powerful monsters, but on the surface level, you only face low-level monsters.


    The more advanced the crystals, the more it is difficult to absorb them, and if you forcefully want to absorb them, you will get bacsh. Because of this F grade, warriors cannot absorb E-grade crystals.


    Now they build many guilds, warriors schools, warriors colleges, warrior associations, cksmith associations, and Alchemy associations.


    Sam receives all the information about the world from his memory. He also receives his predecessor''s information. His name is Sam Kainer, an 18-year-old teenager who lived in Base city with his parents and elder sister.


    Sam was a slothful warrior, and because of his low potential, he could only learn low-level techniques.


    Sam''s parents are C-grade warriors and his elder sister is a genius. She is only 21 years old, but recently she has broken through the C grade.


    Sam''s parents loves him. They don''t force him to be a warrior, and he also didn''t want to be a powerful warrior. His familycks nothing.


    The previous day, his school called Base school, arranged a tour to the Base city dungeon''s surface floor, where you can find only F-grade monsters to gain some fighting experience before the college examination.


    With the teacher''s help, Sam killed ten to fifteen grade F monsters with difficultypleting his assignment.


    After the battle, he fully exhausted himself. So he found a corner to sit on but ended up sleeping. Because of this, he got separated from his group and ended up going deeper. The big mouse-type monsters attacked him, and he died.


    "Sigh !....."


    "He didn''t even get time to escape"


    "And now the worst thing is that now I''m in this new body, and I don''t even know what floor this is."


    "Sigh, bro, why the hell are you sozy? And you separate from your group. "


    He was just thinking about his predecessor''s carelessness when suddenly a blue screen appeared in front of his eyes.


    "What the hell !....."


    "Is this my golden finger? "


    Sam gets very excited, but the pain makes him calm down. He then looks at the blue screen and only sees two options and the name of the system.


    "


    Name: Small upgrade System


    ? Status


    ? Inventory"


    Then Sam selects the status option.


    "


    ? Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (9/100)


    Strength: 15


    Agility: 12


    Physique: 10<novelnext></novelnext>


    Intelligent: 08


    Spirit: 10


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 750


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragons devour (grade F) (+)


    [Low-level absorb technique. Only 5% of energy essence can be absorbed. It''s trash among the trash.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing (grade F) (+)


    [Low-level boxing technique, only can punch pillow]


    Fast sword (grade F) (+)


    [Low-level sword technique, only can help you to cut a paper]


    [Note: You are just trash.] "


    Sam was trying to ignore the systemment. He knows his predecessor was azy man who doesn''t even practice.


    His parents bought him many crystals but he can''t improve his grade because of his low-level absorb technique and his low potential.


    Sam also learns this absorb technique because of its cool name and he can choose his second absorb technique after he improves his grade.


    "If he just learns any normal technique that his parents bought him, at least his grade can improve, but this idiot chooses a trash technique, which can only absorb 5% essence "


    "Why the hell, my soul came to this body? "


    "Sigh, at least I receive my golden finger, "


    Sam got curious about the (+) sign. He taps the (+) sign near absorb technique.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (9/100)


    Strength: 15


    Agility: 12


    Physique: 10


    Intelligent: 08


    Spirit: 10


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 550,


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade E) (+)


    [Low-level absorb technique. Only 25% of energy essence can be absorbed. It''s a special technique among ordinary absorb techniques. ]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing (grade F) (+)


    [Low-level boxing technique, only can punch pillow]


    Fast sword (grade F) (+)


    [Low-level sword technique, only can cut a paper]


    [Note: You are just trash.] "


    After absorbing the technique, and upgrading to grade E, Sam felt some type of shackles leave his body.


    "It took 200 points to upgrade its grade and I think the next upgrade will need a lot more points."


    Sam thought. He quickly took the energy crystal out of the bag and put it in his hand. He now tries to absorb the strength type crystal, feeling it''s a lot easier to absorb now.


    [


    Author''s note:


    Normal F grade absorb techniques absorb 10% essence, E grade absorbs 20%, D grade absorb 30%, C grade absorbs 40% to 45%, B grade 50% to 55%, A grade 60%, S grade 70%, SS grade 90%, SSS grade 100%. ]

 Chapter 2 2 - Golden Finger And First Kill (Edited)

    He now tried to absorb the strength type crystal, he feels it''s a lot easier to absorb now.


    "Now, this is cool. Previously, I needed nearly twenty crystals to gain one status point, but now I only need four crystals to upgrade my status. "


    "My absorb technique is also strange. Previouslypared to other same-grade techniques, it only absorbs 5%, but nowpared to others it absorbs 5% extra. It''s a mysterious technique. "


    "But I will think about itter. My primary goal is to heal myself and go home. "


    Sam looks around and tries to understand where he is now. Thest thing he remembers, his predecessor was sent flying by the monster attack and hit the wall. Suddenly, the rock walls copsed, and he was under those rocks.


    "I should heal myself and gain some strength. Only then I can make a way to the surface. "


    Sam brought nothing other than crystals and some dry food. He didn''t want to tire himself, so he brought many crystals.


    Sam once again took all the crystals out of the bag. He has ten physiques, fifteenth strength, ten agility, eight spirits, and eight intelligence crystals. Sam didn''t rush to absorb the crystals. He first tapped the (+) sign of the absorb technique.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (10/100)


    Strength: 15


    Agility: 12


    Physique: 10


    Intelligence: 08


    Spirit: 10


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 150


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade D)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 35% of energy essence can be absorbed. It''s getting special.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing (grade F) (+)


    [Low-level boxing technique, only can punch pillow]


    Fast sword (grade F) (+)


    [Low-level sword technique, you can only cut a paper with this technique.]


    [Note: You are just trash.] "


    Sam once again feels some shackles removed from his body.


    "So, if I want to upgrade any techniques to a higher grade, I need more upgrade points. I get upgrade points through killing monsters. "


    "For now, the absorb technique''s level is ok, and I should focus onbat techniques. "


    "I don''t want to fight the monsters with bare hands, so my only choice is sword technique. "


    After deciding, Sam upgrades the sword technique to grade E.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (10/100)


    Strength: 15


    Agility: 12


    Physique: 10


    Intelligence: 08


    Spirit: 10


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 0


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade D)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 35% of energy essence can be absorbed. It''s getting special.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing (grade F)


    [Low-level boxing technique, only can punch pillow]


    Fast sword (grade E)


    [Low-level sword technique. You can cut any tree branch within a second.]


    [Note: But still you are trash.] "


    Sam can feel a vast experience of sword techniqueing to his mind. He feels like he experiences the battle.


    "So different techniques need a different amount of points."


    Sam finally understands what is different between low-grade and high-grade.<novelnext></novelnext>


    If using the grade F technique, you can kill a goblin soldier with difficulty, then you can kill them easily using the grade E technique.


    After being done upgrading the technique, Sam absorbed crystals. He can''t fight monsters without sufficient strength.


    Sam absorbed the essence from the crystals. Because of his weak body, it took him a long time to absorb all the crystals. He can feel his body healing himself quickly.


    After full recovery, he tried to feel his body, and he felt he became stronger, and his mind became clear. He looked at his status and became very excited.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100/100)


    Strength: 20


    Agility: 15


    Physique: 13


    Intelligence: 10


    Spirit: 12


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 0 "


    "Finally, I got some strength to protect myself and my foundation also improved."


    "I don''t know how much time passed by. It''s time to go home."


    Sam decides in his heart. He stands up and looks around the rocks to find his cheap iron sword. Thanks to the glowing rocks, he can see. He finds his sword, but it''s full of crack.


    Sam doesn''t rush and calmly thinks of a way to remove the rocks without getting crushed under them.


    Suddenly, one ideaes to his mind. Until now, he didn''t use his inventory option. If his idea is correct, like in-game, his inventory also can store any nonliving things.


    Sam walks up to the front wall and ces his hand on a rock wall.


    '' Store''


    Sam thought in his mind. Instantly, the rock wall vanishes. Sam quickly checks his inventory and finds rock''s option.


    "So it''s the same as the game "


    Sam bes very excited because he moves the rocks with no hassle.


    "Now the first step isplete and I just have to find which floor is this "


    Sames out of the Rock cave made from falling rocks.


    He tried to conceal his presence as much as he can because he wasn''t sure which floor he was right now and how powerful the enemy was.


    While walking, Sam heard a roar from a monster. Sam carefully went to the sound''s source.


    Sam found arge tree and hid. Sometimeter, he hears some footsteps approach his direction. They get near and, after some time; they be visible.


    "Aren''t those goblin captains only spawn on the second floor? So I am now on the second floor near the entrance of the first floor."


    Sam was watching the goblin captain and his goblin soldier''s squad. He thought about how he could get out of this situation. He is not sure that he can fight with the goblin captain, but he has taken the risk, but he first has to solve the goblin soldiers.


    "So now the only way is to wait for the right time and kill them one by one. Then I can fight alone with the goblin captain."


    After deciding on the n, Sam went into hiding. Sam kills no one, but he knows if he wants to live, he has to kill these goblins.


    Dungeons have a special type of crystals that replicates the sun and moon. It''s now nighttime in the dungeon.


    The night is getting dark, and he is hiding in the trees like a predator looking at his prey.


    After a while, he saw two goblins going toward the forest and he started following them.


    Their distance is getting closer and closer. With their distance of only one meter, Sam with a one-hit cut the two goblins without making a sound.


    At first, Sam was nervous, but after killing the goblins, he was full of courage. Sam picks up the crystals, hides their bodies, and gets back to his hiding ce to wait for the right moment to kill them.


    It takes 4 hours to kill all the goblin soldiers. At first, he was quite slow to kill them, but after some time, his movement became faster, like a professional assassin. He kills them, making no noise. He kills forty of them.


    Now Sam just has to recover his energy and kill thest boss. Sam went back to his hiding ce and looked at his inventory to check his loot.


    "


    ?F grade strength crystals x 5


    [You can increase your strength.]


    ? F grade agility crystals x 8


    [You can increase your agility]


    ? F grade physique crystals x 7


    [You can increase your body''s physique.]


    ? Leaf of life tree (green*) x 10


    [You can make a low-level life potion by extracting its essences ]


    ? Raw Crystone x 10


    [It''s like iron. Weapons made with it are twice as hard as iron. ]. "


    Sam didn''t feel sad after getting just ordinary loot. He can kill them and collect many loots.


    Sam looks at his status. Now he has a 3000 upgrade point.


    "So early grade goblin soldiers only give me 50 points."


    After finding out the fact, he bes excited and thinks if he can kill this captain, he will get much more upgrade points than a goblin soldier.


    Sam once again can see the (+) sign on the absorbing technique. With no hesitation, he upgrades his absorb technique.

 Chapter 3 3 - Killing The Goblin Captain And Loot. ( Edited)

    It took 2000 points to upgrade the technique to grade C.


    '' Sigh, I don''t know how many points I need for the next upgrade.''


    Sam thought in his mind. He was now quite tired. He has been killing the goblins since the night with no sleep.


    After upgrading, Sam can now absorb at least 45% from the crystal. With no dy, he absorbs physique crystal because if his physiques were good, his healing factory of the body also be good. With a superb physique, you can absorb the crystal''s essence faster.


    Sam''s physique increase to 16. He can feel he recovered his energy much faster than before.


    "I can''t see the goblin captain. Where is he now?"


    He hides far from the goblin camp, so he didn''t know where the captain of the goblins was right now.


    Sometimeter, he recoverd his full energy. Then he absorbed other crystals because he knows he can''t fight with the goblin captain right now.


    Sam''s agility also increases to 19 and his strength increases to 22. It only takes a half-hour to absorb all the crystals. Right now Sam can feel with one punch he can break a mountain.


    Sam also upgraded his two techniques. It takes 500 points to upgrade the sword technique and 200 points to upgrade the boxing technique.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100/ 100 )


    Strength: 22


    Agility: 19


    Physique: 16


    Intelligent: 10


    Spirit: 12


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 300


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing (grade E)


    [Low-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade D)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great Swordmaster. It increases your speed when using a sword.]


    [Note: But still you are trash.] "


    Now Sam feels like he can cut the goblin captain with one swing and he can now kill the goblin soldier with bare hands.


    In this dangerous world, he has just gained some power, but it''s just the beginning.


    Sam, right now, was ready to fight the goblin captain, so he walked toward the camp''s direction.


    When he''s getting closer and closer, he can hear the monster''s roar.


    When Sam reached the camp, he saw some people fighting with the goblin captain. It''s a five-person team. Three boys and two girls.<novelnext></novelnext>


    The three boys are the physical warriors. One of the three boys is using a sword, one is using two small daggers, and one is using a bow.


    The two girls are spiritual warriors. One of them uses the fireball technique, the other one uses a healing technique to heal her teammates.


    The goblin captain swings his gigantic sword downward to cut the Swordsman. The swordsman also swings his sword upward to block the goblin sword.


    There two swords shed, and the impact was so strong that a one-meter area cracked.


    But the strength of the goblin captain is more powerful than the swordsman. He coughs blood after the impact. He underestimates the goblin captain''s strength.


    Suddenly, the dagger using guy appears behind the goblin captain using his fast movement technique. He tries to cut the goblin''s neck, but the captain of the goblins notices him.


    The Goblin captain suddenly turns around and punches the warriors. The dagger user can''t even block the punch and send flying. It crushed him against the wall.


    The bow user shoots his arrow. The arrow went quick and hit the goblin''s eyes. As a result, the goblin bleeds through the eyes. He gave an angry roar and ran in the bow user''s direction. One girl suddenly fired a big fireball. It hit the goblin, but its damage rate is very low.


    The goblin captain became angrier. He increases his speed. The bow user sees the goblin get closer and closer. He gets paralyzed by the fear of death. He wants to move, but he can''t even lift his finger.


    The healer girl healing the sword guy with trembling hands. She and others felt despair. They can only see the goblin captain getting closer to their friend and going to kill him and they know, after killing him, it will be them who will die by his hand.


    They thought they could clear the 2nd floor easily, but they underestimated the monsters on the 2nd floor. They can only wait for their death.


    Sam was silently watching all of this. The bow user standing near his hiding ce. He was not a hero, but he knows this was the best chance to kill the goblin captain and he can save the bow user from the goblin.


    Sam first covers his face with red soil. He grasped his sword and dashed out of his hiding ce.


    Sam doesn''t have any movement technique, but with the recent increase in his agility, he became faster than before.


    He appears in front of the goblin captain in less than five seconds.


    Sam''s fast sword technique increases his cutting speed and, with his increased speed, it even bes faster.


    Less than a second before the goblin captain cut in half, he didn''t even have the chance to react.


    The bow user shut his eyes and waited for his death, but after waiting some time, he didn''t feel any pain. He opened his eyes and was so surprised to see what was in front of him. He sees a guy standing in front of him and the goblin captain cut in half.


    His other teammate also bes surprised to see this guy. He came out of nowhere in less than a second and cut the goblin.


    Sam ignores them, his only focus on the loot.


    Sometimeter the goblin captain''s body disappears, dropping two books and a Crystal.


    He with no hesitation, collects them and leaves the ce.


    The warrior group didn''t even have time to talk. They stare at each other dumbfounded.


    "Max, do you know the person?"


    The swordsman asks the bow user.


    "No Alen, I only saw his back "


    Max said, while sitting down heavily. This near-death experience, he can''t forget and he needs some time to calm down.


    "Ron, Emily, Juli. Did you see him?"


    n said to the other three teammates.


    They shake their heads. They also didn''t see him.


    "I think he is a grade E warrior, and he is going back to the surface floor."


    Emily, the healer, said.


    "Right. We also should get back to the surface floor. I don''t want to face a second goblin captain."


    Juli said to her teammates.


    They also agree.


    They didn''t want to face a second goblin captain. They quickly left the second floor.

 Chapter 4 4 - New Sword

    Sam finally reaches the surface floor.


    After some searching, he finds a nice hiding spot. He hides in that spot.


    Right now, Sam can''t control his excitement. He quickly took out the technique books and the crystal.


    "


    Light walk (grade E)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spirit concealment (grade E)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Limit break (special crystal) (green)


    [it helps you to break your body''s limit .] "


    Sam can''t believe his luck was so good. Now he needs these two techniques the most.


    Sam put the special crystal in his hand and became speechless because of the limit break. You needed this special crystal when you reach your grade''s limit and you can reach the next grade. With the help of these crystals, you can make a breakthrough easily, and reach the next grade.


    Sam put the crystal in his inventory.


    Normally, warriors learn techniques through reading and practice. But when Sam touches the book, his system screen appears.


    "Do you want to learn light walk (yes/no)"


    "Do you want to learn stealth (yes/no)"


    Sam can''t believe his eyes. He rubbed them and looked again, but only saw the same word.


    Sam chooses ''yes'' nervously.


    A new option appears.


    "Use 100 upgrade points to learn each technique (yes/no)"


    Sam clicked "yes" and it debited 200 points from his upgrade point.


    Two new techniques came to his mind, and the books disappeared.


    Sam roughly understood that if he wanted to learn any techniques, he could use an upgrade to learn any technique faster.


    ''Open status''


    Sammands in his mind.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100/ 100 )


    Strength: 22


    Agility: 19


    Physique: 16


    Intelligent: 10


    Spirit: 12


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 300


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade E)


    [Low-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]<novelnext></novelnext>


    Fast sword (grade D)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed when using a sword.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade E)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade E)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    [Note: you are a trash warrior ]. "


    '' so I got 200 upgrade points after killing the goblin captain.''


    Sam thought in his mind.


    After recovering his energy, Sam started walking toward the dungeon''s exit. He feels quite lightpared to before.


    These surface-level monsters don''t pose any threat to him.


    Sam brings out his sword and starts his hunting.


    Normally, any warriors need one day to travel from the entrance of the 2nd floor to the dungeon''s entrance.


    But Sam, with his fastest Speed, needs only 6 hours to appear in front of the dungeon entrance.


    Sam uses his stealth technique to hide his presence.


    Sam is not in the mood to chit-chat with anyone. He quietly left the dungeon.


    He bought new shirt, new pant, new shoes, one face mask, and one mobile phone by exchanging some materials.


    He went to a public bathroom to fresh himself. After finishing wearing his new clothes. He put his old sim card on his new mobile. He dialed his father''s number. It went through, but after ringing sometimes nobody answered the phone.


    "So, they are not home. I think they went to the dungeon with his sister. Sisters want to show them her power."


    Sam suddenly felt sad, but after some thinking, he became rxed.


    "It''s a good thing that they are not home." Sam doesn''t want his family to be tense for him and do something reckless. He still didn''t meet them, so he was also quite nervous about meeting them.


    He went out of the shower room to search for a restaurant.


    He quickly found a restaurant. Sam ordered some food, and after finishing eating fully, he left the restaurant. Now his primary target is to sell some materials without revealing his identity. If you are asking why he needs to sell his loot because he didn''t have that much money. Because he was going to the dungeon with his ssmate, he didn''t bring that much money.


    So, Sam wears a cloak and puts on a face mask. Wasting no time, he went to the nearest warrior association.


    He enters the association. He can see many people. Some of them select missions, some of them submit their missions, etc.


    He came in front of a receptionist''s desk and asked the receptionist, "Hello, miss."


    The receptionist looked at him and also said, "Hello sir, how can I help you ?"


    "Miss, I want to sell some materials that I loot from the monster."


    "Yes, sir, no problem. You can just get all the materials here and I will give you a price," the receptionist said with a smile.


    Sam ces all his raw crystone and Leaf of life tree on the table. The receptionist counted them, checked their quality, and finally said the price.


    "Sir, one raw crystone''s price is 1500 dor coin and the leaf of the tree''s price is 2000 dors. So, you get 3500 dors."


    "Ok" Sam knows their price, so he says nothing, just receives the money and leaves the association.


    He needs a better sword because his previous swords got damaged by hunting.


    He came to the weapon shop and looked for an excellent sword. Right now he doesn''t need any Epic weapon, he just needs a suitable weapon.


    After searching, he found an excellent sword. The sword is an E-grade sword, but currently, Sam is only an F-grade warrior, so he didn''t need any high-grade weapon. So he bought the sword for 1000 dors and left the weapon shop.


    After some walking, he went to an alley and examined his surroundings. After checking that no one was near, he quickly put all of his things into inventory. Well, he didn''t have any storage ring with his, because of this, he was so secretive.


    He then came back to the restaurant to order one cup of coffee and thought about what he should do now.


    While drinking his coffee, he opened his phone and dialed his teacher''s number. Hepletely forgets about them. After ringing two times, his teacher picks up the phone.


    Sam quickly informs his teacher that he is currently safe and resting. He will meet them tomorrow because they are going back to school. His teacher is quite angry at him. They were thinking about how they should tell his parents about him.


    His homeroom teacher sighs in relief and ends the call. They finally found him.

 Chapter 5 5 - Preparing For The Battle

    Sam ended the call with his teacher.


    He booked a taxi and ordered the taxi driver to drive toward his house.


    He was tired, both physically and mentally. He was just thinking about how he should interact with his new family.


    While he is thinking, the taxi driver stops the car.


    " Sir, we reached our destination."


    " Uhh.... "


    Suddenly the taxi driver''s sound wakes him from his dream.


    " Yes, thank you."


    He then pays the taxi driver his money and walks toward the front door of his house.


    No one was in the home. Sam opens with his key and enters the house. He went into his room. He needed to take a fresh bath.


    After taking a bath, he justy down in his bed and immediately fell asleep.


    The next day, Monday, Sam wakes up to the rm sound. He gets up from the bed and walks toward the bathroom.


    After freshening up, he came to the kitchen and sat down, and wondered what he would do today.


    He needs to raise his level but has to be low-key. He doesn''t want to attract any powerhouse''s attention. His stealth skill should be good enough for now. He just needs a skill that can hide his power level.


    His mom and dad are not home. It will take at least 1 week to clear the C-grade dungeon.


    After deciding what to do today, he simply makes two omelets and pours the milk into a ss for his breakfast.


    After finishing his breakfast, he wore his school uniform.


    He started walking towards his school. From his house to school the distance is 2 km, so he normally didn''t take any ride to reach his school.


    When he reached his school, he saw one expensive car entering the school.


    The car door opened, and a beautiful girl got out of the car. She has long silver hair, silver eyes, and a curvy figure.


    She is Elena Martin, the Ice Princess. The leader of elite students, a peak E grade student.


    Normal students don''t even dare to look directly into her eyes, well it was because of her status. Once a guy tried to look at her and also tried to talk but the next day school management told them the guy was leaving the school.


    Because of his sister''s achievement, the Base school became famous and many genius students came here.


    Sam doesn''te to school very often, so he doesn''t care about anyone.


    Sam also doesn''t care about them, but he wants to be low-key. So he waited outside the school gate for Elena and her friends to go to their ss, then he will enter the school. Because of his sister''s identity, he was also famous in school as a loser.


    After Elena gets out of the car, she meets with her ssmates, one handsome guy with blond hair and one handsome girl with red hair. They started walking towards their ss.


    When Sam saw this, he entered the school and also started walking toward his ss.


    Normal students and elite students have different sses. Any school''s treatment of its elite students differs from any other normal students. Elite means to have better treatment from the schools.


    School management hired experienced D-grade warriors to teach the elite students, but normal students don''t have those facilities.


    Sam is a normal student. Because of his low potential, he was born to be a normal warrior.


    He entered the ss and sat in thest seat of the ss.


    Everybody in the ss is jealous of him, envying him. They think he doesn''t deserve to be the brother of a genius. He is just trash.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam doesn''t care about them. He was used to people behaving like this.


    So he doesn''t talk to anyone in the ss and sits quietly in his seat.


    After a while, the rest of the ss slowly entered the ssroom and sat down in their seats.


    Their ss teacher, Mr. Fin, enters the ss. He is quite handsome and has short ck hair and ck eyes. If he is looking at someone with his sharp gaze, that person feels pressure. It''s called warrior pressure.


    He looked at all the students in the ss at once and started teaching. Mr. Fin mainly teaches about the battle. Once he was also a warrior, but because of an ident, he retired from being a warrior and became a teacher.


    Today Mr. Fin is talking about the previous day''s battle.


    "You all think that you are some sort of special person because of the previous day''s fight. But I just want to say you all are wrong. Those goblins are not even intermediate F-grade monsters. They are just early F-grade monsters. Elite students can kill any early E-grade monsters. Some of them even can fight with the intermediate E grade monster. So, just focus on your battle techniques and improve your grade." Mr. Fin said to the students.


    ''I think the previous day''s goblin captain is an intermediate F grade monster and I should be now a near peak F grade,'' Sam murmured inwardly.


    He doesn''t want to expose his strength, so he didn''t want to tell anyone about his strength. So he just practiced normally and didn''t do any extra movement.


    After finishing his ss, Mr. Fin walked forward to the door. He turned around and said, " Sam,e to my office".


    Sam expected this, so he got up from his seat and started following Me. Fin to his office.


    They came to Mr. Fin''s office. As a warrior, Mr. Fin has his office, which normal teachers don''t have.


    Mr. Fin sat down in his chair and he looked at Sam with his sharp gaze. He asked, " Sam, where were you the day before?"


    "I am very sorry Mr. Fin. previously I forgot to inform you after fighting. I became very exhausted. So, exit the dungeon ande home." Sam said to Mr. Fin. Even after experiencing Mr. Fin''s warrior pressure, he didn''t show any anxiousness. At this time, Sam just hoping that Mr. Fin, believe him.


    "Howe no one saw you leaving the dungeon?" Mr. Fin asked Sam. He carefully looked at Sam''s expression. He is trying to see if Sam is telling the truth or lies.


    "Mr. Fin, I am very exhausted and didn''t want anyone to make fun of me. So, I hide my face when leaving the dungeon." Sam calmly answers the questions. He knows if he bes anxious while talking, Mr. Fin will suspect him.


    Sam doesn''t know if Mr. Fin realized he had been lying. He saw Mr. Fin sigh and look at him normally.


    "Sam, I know that your basic foundation is quitecking. You should now strengthen the basic foundation of your body. You have six months free before the college exam. Don''t give up without trying. If you face any problems and need help, you can tell me." Mr. Fin suggests Sam.


    He knows this boy is quitezy, and his potential is quite a mess. So, he wants at least Sam to have the strength to protect himself.


    Sam knows Mr. Fin wants to help him. So he nodded, and after thanking Mr. Fin for his suggestion, he left the office.


    While walking, he was thinking about two main things. First, he should buy a technique to conceal his strength. Second, going to the previous dungeon and clearing the floors.


    Sam entered the ss and sat down in his seat. From tomorrow, everyone will start taking exam preparations. So the school will be closed from tomorrow and if you have any problem, you can contact your teacher.


    Elite students will spend their days in the dungeon with their battle instructors. Experienced warriors will also guide them.


    After thest ss, wasting no time, he left the ssroom with his bag. He has to go to the warrior association if he wants to buy the technique. So, he quickly wants to go there.


    He entered the warrior association. He came in front of thedy receptionist and said, " Can you show me the F grade concealment technique scroll and many F grade crystal boxes ?"


    "Yes, sir." The receptionist said this and went to look for the scroll. After a while, she came back with a scroll.


    "Sir, this is the best F-grade concealment technique, and sir, these are the crystals." The receptionist said to Sam. She brought her hand to the table, and many boxes appeared.


    [A/N: Each crystal box has 10 crystals.]


    After paying 5000 dors for the technique and 400 thousand dors for the 8 boxes, he left the association. His savings from childhood were almost finished. He needs to make some money.


    He didn''t want to take any money from his parents. From childhood, every month his parents give him and his sister pocket money. Sam used to save that money for future use.


    He has almost finished with his preparation. With this new concealment technique, nobody can tell his grade and he finally levels up his grade. His parents will take some time to return home so he can freely go to the dungeon.

 Chapter 6 6 - Massive Upgrade Points

    Sam, through meditation, absorbing the crystals. His strength reaches the maximum value for the F grade, so he now can''t absorb the strength crystals anymore. By bing an E-grade warrior, he can once again absorb the crystals.


    Normally, if you reach strength, agility, physique, intelligence, or any of these basic status maximum values, you can upgrade your grade. But Sam wants to maximize all of his basic status points. His sister also did the same things.


    After absorbing all the crystals, he felt powerful.


    " Open Status," he said.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100 / 100)


    Strength: 25


    Agility: 21


    Physique: 18


    Intelligent: 12


    Spirit: 12


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 50


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade E)


    [Low-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade D)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade E)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only any warrior with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade E)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade E)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    [Note: you are a trash warrior ]. "


    100 upgrade points for learning the technique and 150 points for upgrading the technique.


    He is ready for the dungeon.


    The next day, Sam woke up early. After finishing his exercise, Sam feels energetic. He finished his breakfast and checked the things in his inventory.


    Everything is ready. So he called a taxi and started his journey towards the dungeon. He has his own car, but he didn''t want to drive his car.


    He got out of the car and after doing the payment; he walked toward the dungeon.


    He enters the dungeon using his concealment techniques. So no one can feel his power and presence. Because of being an E-early grade dungeon, few high-level warriors came here.


    He can see other warriors also hunting the monsters but he just minds his own business and doesn''t interact with anyone.


    Sam started killing those early F-grade monsters. It took a little time to clear the first floor. Sam walks towards the next floor.


    After walking downward, he reached the second floor, where intermediate and peak F grade monsters spawned.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Intermediate monster is also not his match, only a peak F-grade monster can give his tough fight.


    He easily killed the intermediate F-grade goblin captains and some other monsters. It took him 5 to 6 hours to kill all the intermediate monsters and some early F-grade monsters.


    Sam''s sword was pretty durable. It didn''t damage after this much killing.


    He took some rest, then continued his journey. So he climbed the tree and sat down. He didn''t want to take any risks while he was in a dungeon.


    He can hear the monster''s roar. Some warriors should fight monsters.


    Sam didn''t see many people in the dungeon. Because of the low level, many warriors didn''te to this beginner dungeon. They normally go to a medium or high-level dungeon with their teams.


    Now, this is time to check his loot and status.


    '' Open Status, '' Sam said in his mind.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100 / 100)


    Strength: 25


    Agility: 21


    Physique: 18


    Intelligent: 12


    Spirit: 12


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 7550


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade E)(+)


    [Low-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade D) (+)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade E) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade E) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade E) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    [Note: you are a trash warrior ]. "


    After killing nearly 70 early grade, and 20 intermediate grade monsters, Sam gets 7500 points, which is not bad. Now he was thinking about which techniques he should upgrade.


    Sam clicks the (+) button beside his fast cut technique. Instantly, 4000 upgrade points were debited from his system. A good deal of knowledge about the techniques appears in his mind.


    ''I can reserve the remaining 3550 points for the future,'' he thought.

 Chapter 7 7 - Status Upgrade

    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100 / 100)


    Strength: 25


    Agility: 21


    Physique: 18


    Intelligent: 12


    Spirit: 12


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 3550


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade D) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    [Note: you are a starter warrior ]. "


    '' inventory'' after upgrading his techniques, Sam murmured. He wants to see the loot.


    "


    F grade strength crystals x 30


    [You can increase your strength.]


    F grade agility crystals x 28


    [You can increase your agility ]


    F grade physique crystals x 29


    [You can increase your body''s physique.]


    F grade intelligent crystals x 30


    [You can increase your intelligence]


    Leaf of life tree (green) x 30


    [You can make a low-level life portion by extracting its essences ]<novelnext></novelnext>


    Raw crystone x 20


    [It is like iron. Weapons made with it are twice as hard as iron. ].


    Goblin''s tooth x 10


    [Material for weapons]


    Poison


    [It can kill any F grade monsters]


    Limit break (special crystal) (green)


    [it helps you to break your body''s limit with no resistance .] "


    Pretty much as he expected. He brings out dry food from the inventory for dinner.


    After eating his dinner, he started absorb the crystals. Before fighting peak F grade monsters, he wants to maximize all of his statuses.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100 / 100)


    Strength: 25


    Agility: 25


    Physique: 25


    Intelligent: 25


    Spirit: 12


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 3550 "


    9 agility crystals, 16 physique crystals, and 29 Int crystals are needed to maximize his status. He put all the extra crystals into his inventory.


    Spirit crystals are rare crystals. Only ghost-type monsters or monsters with spiritual power can only drop the spirit crystals.


    If he wants, he can upgrade his grade with the limit break crystal, but he wants to see what will happen if he also maxes out his spirit.


    His sister''s spirit and potential were very high since birth and because of this, she can use the high-grade absorb technique. If your potential is low, you can only learn low-grade techniques.


    Sam is thinking about going to a ghost dungeon where only ghost-type monsters spawn. If he wants to upgrade his absorb technique to a higher level, he has to maximize his spirit.


    But his first goal is to kill the peak F-grade monsters. Then he can go to the ghost dungeon. After maximizing his spirit status, he can break through.


    It will be better to fight the monster tomorrow. So he just rested for the night.


    The next day, Sam looked for peak F-grade monsters. Using stealth, he looks for the monsters. He found 10 to 15 peak F-grade monsters. Goblin Lord, Org lord, Rat lord, and other monsters.


    He can fight with the peak F grade monsters easily but didn''t won''t risk his life fighting all the monsters at the same time. He should fight the monsters one by one.


    After looking around, he found hordes of peak F-grade monsters. They spawn around the inner area of the forest.


    Sam silently walked toward the monsters. He started running towards the goblin monsters. He swings the sword using the fast cut technique with his full power.


    The goblin lord didn''t even have time to react. He then stabbed the next monster in the head using his maximum agility. The monsters also didn''t change to react and died.


    After killing these two monsters, Sam runs back to hide. Out of 10, the remaining 8 monsters saw someone killing them. They roared and started looking for their enemy.


    " I was thinking these monsters will be powerful, but they aren''t that powerful. Most likely because all of my status is max. So, no F grade monsters are my enemies. "


    Sam murmurs, and once again runs towards the monsters with full confidence. Using his sword technique, he kills the peak F grade monsters and their minions.


    Even though they are no match for Sam but because of their number, it took some time to kill them. After killing them, Sam watches the monster''s corpses that turn into dust.


    He collected all the loot and started walking towards the exit. He can go to the next floor and fight the early E-grade monsters. But he has only one life, so didn''t want to take risks.


    His primary goal is now to find any low-level ghost dungeon and collect the spirit crystals. Then he will be perfectly ready to upgrade his grade.


    So, using his concealment technique, he left the dungeon. Ghosts can use spiritual power, so he first wants to buy some technique that can help him fight ghosts.

 Chapter 8 8 - Spirit Crystals

    After leaving the dungeon, he started walking toward the motel area. He wants to rx and eat some food.


    While walking, he brings out his mobile from the inventory. He wants to see the time. It''s three o''clock in the afternoon. It''s taken him 8 hours to leave the dungeon.


    While watching time, he finds a message from his father. He opens the massage. It informs him they wille home tomorrow.


    ''How should I interact with them? If they found out I am not their actual son?'' Sam is thinking seriously. He can''t let them find out about anything, even his recent breakthrough.


    ''Calm down, calm down. They have found nothing and I should reveal my power slowly,'' Sam murmured after calming down his mood.


    He finds a motel. He rents a room for 2 hours and orders some food. After a nice shower, he felt quite good. After waiting some time, his lunch came to his room.


    After finishing the meal, he lies down in the bed.


    '' Inventory,'' he said in his mind.


    "


    F grade strength crystals x 60


    [You can increase your strength.]


    F grade agility crystals x 35


    [You can increase your agility ]


    F grade physique crystals x 37


    [You can increase your body''s physique.]


    F grade intelligent crystals x 30


    [You can increase your intelligence]


    Leaf of life tree (green) x 39


    [You can make a low-level life portion by extracting its essences ]


    Raw crystone x 40


    [It is like iron. Weapons made with it are twice as hard as iron. ].


    Goblin''s tooth x 25


    [Material for weapons]


    Poison


    [It can kill any F grade monsters]


    Wolf ws x 15


    [Unique crafting materials ]


    Leaf of life tree (yellow) x 15


    [You can make a medium grade life portion ]


    Limit break (special crystal) (green)


    [it helps you to break your body''s limit.]


    Green crystone x 5


    [Unique materials for weapon crafting. ]


    Ironwood (blue),


    [Rare materials ]


    Tri sword technique (grade E)


    [Low-grade Tri master''s sword technique] "


    "After killing this much, I only got 3 good items. Sigh, I expected this," He mumbled.


    Low-level monsters rarely dropped any good loot. His luck should be very good in this hunt and previous hunt because he gets 2 techniques and some excellent materials and above all, he got a limit break. The previous day, he didn''t know the importance of limit breaks.


    When any warrior reaches his grade''s limit, he can break through to the next grade naturally or by using a limit break. If you want to break through naturally, you need to wait until you feel the next grade''syer. You need to use your own power to break theyer to reach the next grade.<novelnext></novelnext>


    But using a limit break, you can easily break through. For this reason, it''s one of the rare materials like absorbing techniques. Ifdy luck loves you, you can find this limit break.


    "I even heard that no warriors could find the blue, red, ck limit break. Some said these three limit breaks didn''t even exist, but I believe they exist. You needed to have the luck to find them," Sam murmured.


    He brings out the sword technique and learns it using points.


    " Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade E)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]"


    He learns the sword technique using 200 points. He closes his status window and closes his eyes, trying to sleep.


    [2 hourster ]


    He wakes up from his sleep in a rxed mood. Now it''s time to go to the Warrior association. He wants to find out about the ghost spawn dungeon, and also wants to sell the extra loot. Also, because of the reason he doesn''t want extra money from his parents, he wants to sell all the extra lots which he doesn''t need.


    He came out of the motel and started walking toward the Warrior association by covering his face.


    He enters the association and starts looking for a receptionist. Coincidentally, he saw the pink hair receptionist from which he brought the sword.


    "Hello miss" he came in front of the pink girl''s desk and said.


    " Yes, wee, sir. How may I help you? " The receptionist girls greet him with a sweet smile and ask.


    The receptionist girl looked at the boy carefully who she met some days ago. She still remembers the boy and his weird mask-wearing fashion. The boy''s growth surprised her.


    2 days ago she still can feel his power was very low, but now the boy was much stronger.


    Sam didn''t know, the receptionist thought. He just look at her and asked,


    " Can I sell my loot ?"


    " Obviously," she said, hiding her shock.


    Sam extended one of his hands. He was wearing a low-grade stora6 ring in his hand, which was a birthday gift from his mom. He didn''t want anyone to find out about his inventory, which can store infinite objects, so he pretended to bring out the monster''s loot from the storage ring.


    Many boxes appear on the desk. He previously prepared these boxes and put all his loot in different boxes which he was going to sell.


    The pink hair receptionist checked all the boxes carefully and finally said the price for all his loots.


    " Sir, for these crystals boxes you will get 810 thousand dors, for the raw crystone 60 thousand dors, for normal grade lead of life tree you will get 75 thousand dors, for this special grade leaf of life tree you will get 78 thousand dors and for Wolf ws, goblin tooth, poison you will get total 25 thousand dors. After calcting all these prices, you will get 1 million 48 thousand dors," she informs Sam while trying to hide her shock.


    She didn''t expect this boy would be pretty lucky to get a special grade life tree leaf. After putting Sam''s loot in her space ring, she transfers the money directly to his bank ount.


    "Also, miss, do you know about the low-level ghost dungeon? I also need some spirit crystal, and I will be grate to you if you tell me about the low-level ghost dungeons," Sam asked.


    " Mmm... North City has a ghost dungeon," the receptionist told Sam after some thinking.


    Sam became disappointed. If you go to North city from base city, it will take 2 day''s train. North City is pretty far from the base city and his parents will not permit him.


    "So, do you have any spirit crystal box?" Sam asked.


    "Yes sir," the receptionist told Sam, and retrieved a crystal box from her storage ring.


    " Miss, give me 2 crystal boxes and 9 extra spirit crystals," Sam said. He right now needed 29 spirit crystals to maximize his spirit.


    The receptionist retrieved 2 boxes and 9 extra-low-level spirit crystals.


    Spirit crystals are very rare, so they have a high price from normal crystals. For these 29 low-level spirit crystals, he paid 435 thousand dors.


    " Thank you, miss... " He put these things in his inventory and wanted to say '' thanks'' but didn''t know the girl''s name.


    " Aria... Aria m " Aria said her name to Sam. This boy was quite interesting, so she didn''t mind telling her name to the boy. She also wants to know about this interesting boy.


    " Ahh..... Yes, thank you, miss Aria m and you can call me Mask" Sam said. He didn''t tell her his name. She pretty much helps him, but still, he didn''t want to revel his name to anyone. Because his parents and sister were pretty much famous, many people know him. He didn''t want to leave any evidence.


    After saying ''thanks'', he started walking towards the exit of the association. After reaching home, he can absorb the spirit crystals and finally upgrade his grade.

 Chapter 9 9 - Finally Breaking Through.

    Now it was 8 p.m. It took him an hour and a half to reach home.


    After simply freshening up and changing his clothes, he was ready to absorb all the spirit crystals. He came to his room and then sat on his bed in a lotus position. He started circting the absorb technique.


    One by one, spirit crystals turned into stones and Sam was absorbing their essences.


    It''s quite a pleasant feeling to absorb the crystals. Hepletely forgets about his surroundings and only focuses on his cultivation.


    [5 hourster]


    Sam woke up from his pleasure cultivation and saw his status.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (100 / 100)


    Strength: 25


    Agility: 25


    Physique: 25


    Intelligent: 25


    Spirit: 25


    Grade: F


    Potential: Mortal


    Upgrade point: 3550 "


    "Finally, all my status was maximized. Oh yea....baby, haha hahaha " seeing his status, he became so happy and startedughing like a fool.


    "Now I am perfectly ready for my breakthrough. But first I should eat something... Ugh. " After iming down his excitement, he wanted to upgrade his grade but felt quite hungry.


    He brings out food from his inventory, which he buys from a restaurant. Sam doesn''t know what happens, but after his spirit upgrades to the maximum value, his hunger level increases.


    ''I think it''s because of my spirit always being low and suddenly its value upgrades to its maximum value. So my body reaches its limit and I need more food than before,'' Sam thought while eating his dinner.


    After finishing his dinner, once again he sat in the lotus position on his bed and looked at the limit break crystal carefully.


    He knows, previously his potential was as low as his spirit, but now his spirit maximizes.


    It will be a very painful process. Normally warriors who have high potential didn''t feel pain but low potential warriors feel pain while breakthrough.


    He knows " No pain, no gain". So he is ready to take pain for power. He doesn''t want to be a warrior who lives at other warriors'' mercy.


    Sam took the crystal in his and started absorbing its essence. While absorbing, he started feeling some kind of thickyer of his body breaking apart slowly. He feels suffocating. Slowly, the pain gets bigger. First, it didn''t hurt that much, but the pain increased with time.


    " Ahh....." He started screaming with all of his power. The pain is just getting bigger and bigger. He started losing consciousness, but the extreme pain brought him back. He once again starts screaming.


    This process just repeated itself. Sam lost count of the time. He doesn''t know how much time passes. But he feels the pain getting lower and lower and sometimeter he doesn''t feel the pain.


    When he started feeling rxed, he just lost consciousness. This breakthrough process puts a lot of pressure on his body. He became tired both physically and mentally.


    [Next morning]


    Sam wakes up from his sleep. He felt quite nice and breathed loudly, but very nasty smells hit him.


    He almost vomited in his bed, but held himself. He carefully looked for the source of this smell, but found some kind of ck liquid covering his body.


    Sam quickly got up from bed and, with his bed cover, he started running toward the bathroom. He put the bedsheet on the washing machine and he took a bath.


    After a long bath, he exits the bathroom and looks himself in the mirror. Previously his height was 176cm, but now it''s almost 180cm. Previously, he has thin body, he didn''t have any six-pack abs, but now his thin body transformed into a muscr body with six-pack abs.


    "I think this ck liquid was the wasted things from the body. After releasing this ck liquid, my body felt quite nice and powerful."


    ''Status'' after putting on a new dress, hemands his mind while sitting in a chair. He ordered some food for his breakfast and he waited for his breakfast.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer<novelnext></novelnext>


    Health: (250 / 250)


    Strength: 00


    Agility: 00


    Physique: 00


    Intelligent: 00


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 550,


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade E)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]"


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade D)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade D)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade D)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ]. "


    While checking his status, he bes very surprised and the coffee mug slips from his hand.


    " What the hell...? My potential also increases in grade, and what happened to my upgrade points?" He heard no news regarding potential upgrades and what the hell happened to his upgrade points.


    "I think... I think the system uses the upgrade point to upgrade my potential." He realized this after a long time of thinking.


    "So now finally, I can officially start my journey as a warrior," Sam said loudly in excitement and startedughing like an idiot.


    " So my health also increases and my status bes zero. No problem, hell yea... I will start over," he said after analyzing his new status.


    He was now pretty pumped up, so wasting no time, he started walking towards the training ground in his house for his daily workout and sword practice.


    Previously he didn''t care about any weapon, but now he is nning to use a sword or a bow. He also has the materials to make a fine bow. But that doesn''t mean he will neglect his closebat.


    " I think it''s time to buy a good closebat technique like Balor boxing." while walking towards the training, he thinks about this.

 Chapter 10 10 - Family Time

    After finishing his workout and sword practice, he went to the bathroom for a nice bath.


    Previously, when he used any of his upgrade techniques, his body felt quite pressured. He knows it''s because of his low potential.


    Previously he couldn''t use D-grade techniques or c-grade techniques for very long, so he had to take a rest. So he always finished his hunting pretty fast. From then on he trained in Saitama''s workout routine (whichprises 100 sit-ups, 100 pushups, 100 squats, and a 6.2-mile (10-km) run.)


    But after upgrading his grade and also his potential, his body feels less pressure and also he can maintain C or D grade techniques far longer than previously.


    After finishing his bath, he came to the hall room and sat on the sofa. He takes out some light food from his inventory, which he ordered some time ago, and starts eating.


    He rested for the day because his parents and sister wille back home today and he was nervous about that. He wants to build his courage.


    After finishing his food, he came to the balcony of his house. While sitting in a chair, he thinks about his parents.


    For previous Sam, his parents were one of the best things god gifted him. In his childhood, due to forcefully trying to learn a higher technique, he received a bacsh. From that moment, his dream to be a powerful warriorpletely lost its meaning, but his parents always supported him, and never hated him for not being able to be a true warrior.


    Our new Sam also respects them for being great parents. His father''s name is Victor Kainer and his mother''s name is Hina Storm.


    His father is a master swordsman, and his mother is a master Archer.


    And now he was thinking about his sister. She is the most talented person in the base city. Her potential and spirit were quite high from childhood. The brother-sister rtionship between them was quite awkward.


    She was always busy with her training while he was busy dreaming.


    His sister''s name was Gloria Kainer, one of the genius spiritual warrior masters in ice magic.


    So, yea, if he can act like the previous Sam, nothing bad will happen. Also, he wants them to know about his breakthrough, but he can''t say it immediately about this. He should slowly reveal his potential upgrade.


    While lost in his thoughts, a sudden question came to his mind, '' why don''t my parents buy a bigger house?''.


    After reviewing his memory, he found the answer. His dad once said this to him " Listen Sam, money means nothing in front of your dream. This house is the dream of your mother and mine. We both built this dream house when we didn''t even have that much money. We didn''t lose hope and with our hard work, we could make our dream house. Now we have money from before, that doesn''t mean we leave our dream house for a bigger house. "


    Sam was then only 8 years old. He didn''t understand this, but now he understands those lines. '' Money can''t buy a dream. Be able to dream about your goal, then you can seed.''


    " Hahaha... Dad, now I understand your words. " Sam smiled and said while looking toward the sky.


    He was again lost in his thoughts about the future. He felt sleepy and didn''t even know when he waspletely lost in his dream.


    In the afternoon,


    3 people (2 women and 1 man) Open Sam''s house door with a key and enter.


    The man is quite tall, muscr, with ck hair and eyes. On his left side is a woman also the same tall as him, slender figure with silver long hair and eyes. On his right side is a girl. She also has a slender figure, silver hair in a ponytail style, and a pair of silver eyes.


    The man is Sam''s father, the woman on the left is his mother, and the girl on the right is his elder sister. They are back from their dungeon hunt.


    " Sam, Sam, where are you? " Hina asked but didn''t get any response.


    " I think he will be in his regr ce and lost in his dream," Victor said to Hina while they were walking toward the hall room.


    Gloria also checked all the hall rooms but didn''t find Sam. She looks pretty disappointed.


    She did not sit in the room, and she directly went toward her room.


    Sam and her rooms are on the 1st floor while her parents'' rooms are on the ground floor.


    As she walked, her eyes fell on the balcony and found Sam was sleeping while sitting in a chair.


    She quickly looked to the right and left. After confirming no one here, she walks toward Sam. She came in front of his face and took his sleeping photo.<novelnext></novelnext>


    She once starts walking towards her room but with a radiant smile.


    She loves her brother very much but didn''t know how to express her love.


    Before Sam''s potential check, their rtionship was quite good, but after the potential check, their rtionship became like this.


    Her attitude towards other people was freezing but toward her brother was very warm, but they didn''t get to interact with each other that much. Because she is always busy in her cultivation or dungeon hunting with her team. She just hopes one day Sam will understand that she also loves him.


    About three o''clock he woke up. After getting up from his seat, he started walking to the bathroom. He needs to fresh himself.


    Aftering out of the bathroom, he walks toward the kitchen. He needs to eat something. Now he didn''t have food in his inventory. So, he needs to cook something for himself.


    While he was walking toward the kitchen, he smelled something nice and he finally came to the dining room. He saw his mother in the kitchen and his father sitting in his chair and reading the newspaper.


    " How are you darling?" Hina asked Sam when she saw himing.


    " Very good, mom," Sam answered with a cheerful smile.


    " Son, has something good happened to you?" Victory asked Sam, seeing his cheerful smile.


    " Yea dad, I will tell you about itter..... hihi," Sam answered in a mysterious tone.


    Victor hears his son''s mysterious tone.


    " Ok boys, wait for a little, the food will be ready," Hina said to them and went back to cooking.


    Sam sits down near his father and asks about their adventure in the dungeon. Sam heard because of his elder sister''s breakthrough, this time his sister and parents went to a higher grade dungeon.


    Victor slowly describes what type of monsters they faced, their abilities, and their weakness. But theypletely lost against the boss monsters, when his sister''s mysterious teacher saved them and easily killed the monster.


    " O son, your sister''s teacher wille to our home tomorrow. So, tomorrow don''t bezy." Victor said suddenly.


    " Ok, Dad," Sam answered and started thinking about the dungeon''s boss monsters. He''s pretty sure the boss monster is higher than the C grade monster or his parents won''t lose this battle.


    Previously, he didn''t meet any boss monsters, because the F-grade dungeon doesn''t spawn a Boss monster. He is thinking about looking at the inte about the dungeons and monsters.


    Because his warrior dream was scattered, previously hepletely lost interest in the dungeons and monsters. He updates himself with knowledge about the dungeons.


    While he was in his thoughts, Gloria came to the dining room and sat down near Sam.


    " Hello sister, how are you?" He asked Gloria, finding her sitting near his seat.


    " Good," Gloria answered, and went back to her silent mood.


    The atmosphere between them was pretty awkward. Sam is a talkative person, but Gloria is a silent person. So, talking between them is always pretty awkward.


    Gloria was always busy with her practice, so he didn''t get that much chance to talk to her.


    " Gloria darling, can you help me carry the dishes?" Hina said to Gloria. Gloria got up from her seat and went to the kitchen.


    They came back with many dishes. Gloria helped Hina by putting the tes on. Hina served the food.


    The full family started eating food. It''s one of the joyful things that Sam didn''t want to lose.


    His mom asked him various questions, and he calmly answered them.

 Chapter 11 11 - I Have To Become Powerful

    Sam is walking towards the cksmith association. He wanted to know if they can make him a good bow and arrow from ironwood.


    He walked towards association with a cheerful smile. He is happy now because his parents finally permit him to go dungeons but only in low grades dungeons.


    [shback]


    While eating, he told them about his breakthrough from early to intermediate F grade.


    After listening to his achievement, both Victor and Hina became happy and worried at the same time. Sam once forcefully tried to breakthrough using limit break, but he lost consciousness due to pain extreme pain. He was in aa for 1 month.


    Hina hugged Sam tightly and started asking many questions about his health. Gloria also became worried and almost hug him but didn''t seed because of her mother.


    After showing them he was perfectly fine now. Also, he was not an idiot who directly wants to breakthrough while he was only in early F-grade.


    After checking that he was perfectly fine, they finally rxed. Suddenly, his father startedughing and give him a thumbs up. His sister gives thumbs up with a rare cheerful smile. It''s the first time Sam sees his sister''s smile.


    In these happy moments, he asked about going dungeon. They agreed, but one condition. He can only hunt on the first floor. Sam immediately nodded.


    After finishing food, he immediately left the house, informing them that he was going to the cksmith association.


    [shback End]


    While thinking, Sam came in front of the association. He entered and saw a reception room just like the warrior association, but didn''t have that many people like the warrior association. But one thingmon among them is prettymon that they always appointed girls as receptionists.


    " Hello, miss. Can I ce an order?" He came in front of a receptionist and asked her.


    " Yes, sir," the receptionist said with a smile.


    " So, I want to make a bow from this. Is this possible?" Sam bring out the ironwood and ce it down on the table and asked.


    It surprised her to see the ironwood. It''s a quite rare material. She didn''t think that he will bring outs rare ironwood.


    [A/N: Well, if you have luck, then sometime, you can get the rare materials in low-level dungeon.]


    "Yes sir, this is possible but you have to talk with our chief." She said while maintaining her smile.


    " No problem." Sam answer casually. He knows that if he brings out this type of rare and orders something, then he has to talk with the chief cksmith.


    "Please wait a moment sir, I will inform the chief." The receptionist said and went towards the chief''s office.


    After some time, she came with an old man. The old man is quite tall and muscr. He has brown hair with a pair of sharp eyes. If you don''t know the old man''s actual age, you will think he is not that old.


    The old man is called Henry Gastuv, a 65-year-old man but looks 50 or 55 years old. Best cksmith of Base city.


    " So, young man, you want to make a bow from this?" Henry asked Sam while checking the ironwood carefully.


    "Yes," Sam answered the old man.


    " Come back 2 dayster to collect your bow," Henry said and went back to his room while taking the ironwood.


    Both the receptionist and Sam looked at each other andugh awkwardly. They didn''t think old man will behave like this.


    After paying an advance payment of 1000 dors, he received a token. After putting the token in his inventory, he left the association.


    Sam looked It''s now 6:00 pm. He walks towards his home.


    30 minutester, he reached his house. After telling his mom that ''he came back, he went to his room.


    After a quick fresh up, hey down in his bed and started searching about dungeons and monsters'' details on his phone.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He finds many articles about dungeons. He clicks on an article.


    ''It''s said about the history of the dungeon. They didn''t appear at first when monsters first appeared on earth but after 2 yearster they appeared.''


    Sam became surprised, he thought from the first day when monsters appeared on earth dungeons also appeared on earth.


    Sam continues his reading.


    "


    When monsters first appeared on earth, they didn''te from dungeons but came from portals. 2 yearster dungeons appeared in the same ce as portals.


    So, some people believe those portals and dungeons are the same, but no one knows the truth.


    Some also believe that these dungeons can send you to a different world.


    At first, few dungeons appeared on earth, but they appearedter. Humans build their city around dungeons.


    If you want to stabilize any dungeon, you need to kill thest boss of the dungeons. Then the monsters can''t be able to break free from the dungeon barrier and attack the human city.


    So, warriors always have to kill the dungeon''sst boss. But the earth didn''t have that many high-level warriors.


    We have around 50 A-grade warriors and only 15 S-grade warriors. So, we humans weren''t able to clear all the dungeons because of the limited number.


    Many S-grade dungeons have been unclear until now.


    So, when warriors could clear the dungeons, they build their citys.


    Earth is now divided into two zone: safe zone, and danger zone. The safe zone is where dungeons have stabilized, and the Danger zone is where they weren''t able to clear the dungeons.


    It''s our luck that there is no dungeon higher level than S grade and we only have 10 S grade dungeons.


    If supreme dungeons like SS grade or SSS grade appeared on earth, then we all will be doomed, Earth will be destroyed. "


    Sam became shocked by reading this.


    [A/N: No one knows if those dungeon higher level then S-grade exist or not. It is just a guess.]


    After finishing reading the 1st article, he clicks on the 2nd article which is about the monsters.


    " They came to the earth suddenly and started their rampage. Some believe some kind of mastermind behind them, some believe they want to take over Earth. At first, people had little power to fight the monsters, but that changed when dungeons appear on earth. If you kill any monsters that didn''t spawn in the dungeon, their body will not turn into dust, and also they didn''t drop any loot. And most interesting thing is that if any dungeon''s monster kills another monster, the dead monster''s body doesn''t turn into dust. They satisfy their hunger by eating other monsters or humans. "


    Until now, he didn''t know about any of this. He had headaches. He needs time to digest all of this.


    Previous Sam thought he can livezily doing nothing. He also thought he would have time to level up, but after reading all of this, he understands he had little time.


    What if Danger zone''s monsters attacked the humans? Many will die and he can be one of them.


    Sam closed his eyes while digesting all of this information. It even shocked him that his parents, his sister doing this dangerous hunt.


    Sam knows dungeons are dangerous but didn''t know they are much more dangerous.


    " What will I do if one day a supreme grade dungeon appears on earth and my parents, my sister, have to fight those monsters for humanity?" Sam asked himself this question while silently lying in the bed.


    "No. No, I can''t let this happen. I have to be powerful. I have to protect my family." He got up from bed and vowed to his hearth. Even they aren''t his actual family, but after spending some time days with them he thinks of them as his own family. So, he wants to protect his family.


    [A/N: Hey guys, I want to set a goal for him. "Protecting his family and bing stronger" will be his goal. I know it will be a prettymon goal, even so, I want to create this goal for him. He also guess that the supreme grade dungeon exist.]

 Chapter 12 12 - Night

    [2 dayster ]


    Sam was practicing his sword techniques. He wants to see if he can level up his new sword technique through practice without using the system point.


    After finishing his practice, he sat in the training field and started reviewing his sword techniques.


    In these 2 days, many things happened.


    Sam increases the difficulty of his training. During these 2 days, his only daily routine was sleeping, training, reading, and eating.


    He also convinces his parents about his hard training, saying he was pretty fired up from the previous breakthrough he wants to train.


    He became more familiar with his techniques in these 2 days through practice. Now he only needs an actual battle to check his achievement.


    Also, he was thrilled about his sister apanying him when he reads about monsters or dungeons while sitting next to him.


    Something Sam asked about his sister''s adventure and Gloria described them like she was telling a story.


    Victor also gives him an excellent sword. He also gives Sam instructions about sword practice.


    Sam also practices archery by shooting arrows. But he didn''t have any archery technique, so he wanted to buy a technique.


    He also reads many new things that he doesn''t know, like those warriors, who have high potential, they can level up their techniques quicklypared to any low potential warriors through practicing and battle.


    Sam can upgrade any technique easily. This was a plus point. But if he upgrades any techniques without practice, his grasp of those techniques will be limitedpared to those who upgrade the techniques through practice. He recently found that.


    So, Sam decided not to upgrade techniques without understanding the techniques properly.


    So in these 2 days, he increases his practice; he wants to learn his techniques.


    He once again starts his practice. He knows pretty much that upgrading all of his battle techniques in a rush was a big mistake, and his knowledge of these techniques was pretty shallow. So, he wants to fill the gap between practice.


    From 4.00 am to 10.00 am, he was practicing. So he felt hungry. He realized that after his breakthrough, his hunger level also increased.


    So he stopped his practice and started walking towards the bathroom for a fresh bath.


    " Mom, is the breakfast ready?" After a fresh bath, he came to the kitchen and asked his mother.


    "Yes, son, give a minute," his mother''s voice said from the kitchen.


    Gloria and Victor also came after they finished absorbing the crystals.


    Gloria broke through, so she is the only early C grade warrior where his parents are peak C grade warriors. His parents are nearing a breakthrough to the next grade, but because they can only break through naturally, they are still stuck at c grade.


    If they can find any red limit break, they can easily break through, but a red limit break is very rare. So, they have to break through naturally.


    They started eating food when Hina finished serving them the food.


    After finishing his breakfast, Sam went back to his room and changed his dress.


    " I think the old man has finished crafting my bow and also I need to go to the warrior association to buy an archery technique," he thought while leaving the house.


    30 minutester, he finally came to the cksmith association.


    Sam went inside the association. He looks around the reception room for the previous day''s receptionist.


    He finally found her and came in front of her desk.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Hello miss, has the old man finished crafting my bow?" Sam asked her.


    " Ye... Yes, sir, your bow is ready. Wait here sir, I have to tell the chief that you are here." At first, she wasn''t able to recognize Sam, but then she remembered and answered him immediately. After telling him, she went to the chief officer to tell him.


    Sometimeter, Old man Henry and the receptionist came.


    "You came boy," Henry asked while looking at him.


    " Yes, old man, " Sam answered Henry.


    Henry didn''t get angry listening to the ''old man'' word. Many warriors called him that, so he didn''t mind.


    Henry put the thing on the table. After a long time, someone brought rare materials, so Henry put his heart into making this masterpiece.


    " Her name is Night. My masterpiece," Henry said with a proud voice.


    " Wow, old man, I can''t believe you can make this. " When Sam held the bow in his hand, a status window suddenly popped up. Sam became shocked after seeing and saying the old man.


    "


    Weapon: Bow


    Name: Night


    Grade: C


    Attack: (100 - 150)%


    Durability: (50 - 100)%


    Flexibility: (100 - 120)%


    [Remark: the wind blesses this weapon.] "


    He didn''t even imagine that he would get a C-grade weapon with wind blessing.


    He has to admit that if the cksmith didn''t have the capability, no matter how rare materials he has, he can''t craft an excellent weapon.


    Previously, Sam didn''t even think that this old man had that capability.


    " Hahaha... Young man, you didn''t even see my real capability. After a very long time, someone brings a rare material, so I put in just a little extra effort. Hahaha," Henry said this to Sam whileughing. He must say he liked Sam''s reaction after receiving the bow.


    After hearing Henry, Sam nodded. He knows this old man has the real capability, and therefore his parents rmend him for crafting any weapons.


    " Thank you, old man, for this beautiful gift," Sam seriously said.


    " Hahaha... Boy, I am quite happy that you liked my work. So, what is your name, boy? You look familiar?" He asked Sam.


    " My name is Sam Kainer. You must have met me in my childhood. I always came to your association with my parents." Sam answers him.


    " Hahaha... My boy, so you are Victor''s son. Nice hahaha. " Henry was surprised by hearing Sam''s answer. So, he said this and startedughing.


    Sam''s parents are one of the oldest customers of this association. They always came here and in his childhood, Sam also used toe here.


    " I remember you are that small, annoying brat who always used toe here with your parents. Hahaha, brat now became a fine warrior." After thinking about something, Henry said this to Sam.

 Chapter 13 13 - Unexpected Encounter

    Sam put the night in his inventory after paying the full price.


    He said goodbye to the old man and left the association.


    He now was ready for the E-grade dungeons but he has to be careful because his parents think he will only clear the first floor of the Base City''s dungeon. For this, he has to be careful. He can''t reveal that he will go to the third floor.


    " At first, I can spend some time on the first floor, then I can start my real hunting," he was thinking. He knows his parents wille to watch him, so he wants to waste sometime on the first floor, after that he can start his real hunting.


    Now he started walking toward the warrior association. He needs to buy an archery technique.


    He called a taxi and told him to go toward the warrior association. It takes 2 hours to reach the association from the cksmith association.


    He got out of the car after the payment and started walking to the association without covering his face. Without covering his face, it will be his first time in the association.


    But he didn''t expect that after entering he will meet someone he doesn''t want to meet. His ssmate from the special ss is Elena Martin. Now he regrets it. Why didn''t he wear his mask?


    But he can''t do anything in this situation. He started walking towards Aria''s desk with his head lowered. But life is sometimes full of bad luck. Elena is also walking toward Aria.


    " Damm..... Who the hell is messing with my life?" Sam said slowly, in an annoying mood.


    " Don''t worry, it''s just a coincidence. They didn''t even want to talk to someone like you." He tried to assure himself while walking.


    " Miss, Can you show me F-grade archery techniques?" Sam asked Aria. When he previously came to association with wearing a mask, he talked with everyone in a deep voice. So he asked Aria in his normal voice.


    " Sure sir, wait a minute," Aria answered and went to a room.


    She came back after a minute and brought out 5 F- grade archery techniques.


    Sam checked the techniques through the system description.


    "


    1. Rapid shot (F-grade)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    2. Double shot (F-grade)


    [with this you will learn how to shoot the double arrow.]


    3. Multi shot (F-grade)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    4. Power shot (F-grade)


    [Help you learn how to shoot with your maximum power.]


    5. Invisible shot (F-grade)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.] "


    Sam is wondering what techniques he should buy. They all are pretty good, but he doesn''t need all of them.


    Sam didn''t notice that while he was choosing his techniques, Elena also came to his side and watched him.


    " Excuse me," she said to Sam while watching him. He looks pretty familiar to her, so she wants to ask his name.


    " Yes," Sam answered unconsciously. But after seeing the person, he became shocked.


    '' How the hell miss ice Princess talking to me.'' He thought inwardly.


    " Are you Sam Kainer?" She asked, while trying to remember him.


    " Yes," Sam answered with a smile. He was surprised but didn''t show his face. He knows pretty much everyone in his school knows him as a loser. So, it''s pretty shocking for him that someone is saying his full name instead of a loser.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " OOO, nice to meet you, Sam. How are you doing?" she said in her crisp voice.


    But this shocked Sam. This was the firsy time, Miss ice Princess talked to him. But he didn''t lose his smile and answered, " Nice to meet you, Elena Martin, and I am fine."


    While talking, Sam decides which techniques he will buy. He buys the three techniques he wants to buy. Each technique cost him 15 thousand dors.


    He also thanks Aria for the techniques, but he tries to talk less with Aria.


    " A happy day to you, Elena Martin. My work is done and I need to go home. So, Goodbye" After saying he left the association pretty quickly. He didn''t even give her a chance to talk.


    " Elena, who was him?" After Sam left the association, two girls came to Elena and asked her.


    " Sam Kainer, Brother of the genius Gloria Kainer," Elena answered them while looking at the exit. She didn''t have time to talk to him freely.


    " So, he is the loser. Hahaha," One girl said with augh.


    " Don''t judge anyone because of the rumors. You never know when they will surprise you. Now let''s go." Elena told them with an indifferent attitude and started walking toward Aria.


    Her two friends looked at each other and sighed. They know Elena was angry. So, they didn''t talk and silently followed her.


    After leaving the association, Sam didn''t waste time and booked a taxi to reach his home. It will take two to three hours to reach his home.


    [3 hourster]


    He reached his home. Then he finally rxed. When he was in the taxi or association, he was pretty scared because he didn''t want to encounter Elena or any other girls.


    From his previous life, Sam understands one truth about the world: '' Never talk with beautiful girls or any other girls who have a powerful background, or you will face disaster. Beautiful girl means disaster.'' So Sam wants to maintain his distance from any beautiful girls or any girls who have powerful backgrounds.


    After telling his mom that he came home, he went to his room. After freshening up, hey down on the bed and looked at the system window. He looked at his new techniques.


    "


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade E)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (F-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (F-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (F-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot an arrow continuously.] "


    Sam doesn''t need the other techniques at night now. He can buy themter.


    Now he is perfectly ready for tomorrow''s hunt.

 Chapter 14 14 - I Cant Be Reckless.

    [ Next day ]


    Victor and Hina dropped Sam at the dungeon entrance. They also came here to see their son''s hunting. Gloria wasn''t able toe due to her meeting with her teacher.


    Sam pretty much know this would be happening and he was pretty much thankful to Gloria''s teacher that she wasn''t able toe with him.


    If Gloria came with him that would be attracted much attention and he didn''t want to get in this type of trouble.


    Her teacher was pretty cold, like her. When she came to his house, she always had a cold expression.


    Sam was able to know her first name but didn''t get to know the full name. Her name is Alena, Vice principal of the Royal Academy, an peak A-grade warrior.


    But yea Sam didn''t interact with her and now for her his sister wasn''t able toe, so he was pretty thankful to her.


    Sam walks towards the entrance with his parents. He wants to hunt these F-grade monsters until his parents satisfy then he can send them home and start his real hunting.


    Victor gives him a pretty good D-grade sword. He can use this sword until he meets any D-grade monsters. But that''s for the future.


    Due to a Low-grade sword, he doesn''t have any name. Samst time checking his sword''s status before hunting.


    " weapon - Sword


    Name: None


    Grade: D


    Attack: (50 - 100)%


    Durability: ( 80 - 120)%


    [ Remark: A pretty good weapon for hunting low-grade monsters.] "


    Today he wears a full ck leather Armor. With this Armor and his sword, he feels excited.


    They entered the fast floor. After finding a good spot his started parents standing there. Sam on the other hand started his killing.


    This floor''s monsters didn''t pose any threat to him. They are normally goblin soldiers or Rat type monsters.


    Sam can kill them easily but he didn''t do that. He was taking his time to kill these monsters.


    [ 3 hourster ]


    His parents satisfy with his hunting and know that their son will not face any danger on this floor. So, they decided to go back home.


    Sam just waiting for this moment after his parents left the dungeon, he started running towards the 2nd floor. His destination today was the third floor.


    While he ruining toward the third floor, he saw many warriors doing many things, some of the hunting monsters, some of them resting, some of them also having trouble in their fight. Sam was not a hero and he doesn''t want to be one. He ignored everyone. They are not in any dangerous situation.


    After his breakthrough his speed also increases, So he traveled with much speed than before.


    It takes 4 hours to go to the second floor. The monsters on the 2nd floor wasn''t his matches, so Sam wants to avoid the fight and quickly wants to reach the third floor.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Even he wants to avoid monsters but monsters will not avoid him. So, he has to fight with some Peak F-grade monsters before reaching the third floor.


    It took him nearly 6 hours to reach the third-floor entrance. So, he wants to fill his stomach then start his hunting. He brought out the food that his mother cooked for him and started eating.


    While eating he looked around but didn''t see anyone around. Normally, not many people came to the third floor but he can''t see anyone.


    " I think it''s due to my good luck. Hahaha," Sam said inwardly and startedughing.


    After finishing eating, he started walking towards the third-floor entrance. Every dungeon''sst floor is different from other floors.


    Sam waspletely shocked after entering the third floor. The previous two-floor look like some type of cave but this floor ispletely different because it looks like a garden with many trees rather than a cave.


    But Sam quickly Calm down because two monstersing towards him. They don''t look like a goblin, they look like reptiles but they walk on their two feet instead of four feet. They are some kind of mutation between humans and reptiles.


    They called kobold, one of the bloodthirsty monsters.


    Sam didn''t waste his time quickly summoned Night and shot two arrows at the same time. You can say his hard work paid off because of his arrow Pierce through their head.


    But it''s his bad or good luck many monsters started running in his direction.


    Sam quickly took down five monsters with Night then put the Night in the inventory. He summoned his sword and started running in the monster''s direction.


    At least 10 monsters running towards him. He took down three monsters instant using fast cut, they didn''t get a chance to react.


    A kobold ready to attck him from behind, but Sam notice him, so he just jumps and create some distance. it''s a pretty close call.


    Now using his fast movement he took two more monsters down.


    But he started to feel his body reaching his limit due to using the fast-cut technique, he have to quickly finish those monsters.


    These monsters aren''t very strong but their vicious way of fighting was dangerous.


    Sam quickly retreat from them and came to a 20 m distance from them. He once again brought his Night and shoot multiple arrows. Those five monsters became dead bodies.


    Kobold was known for their vicious way of fighting, so Sam have the advantage of his agility, and using this he killed them.


    Sam panting heavily. He used all his strength in thest move.


    " I didn''t think fighting with them will be this hard," Sam said while sitting down in a tree.


    Sam tried to recover his stamina while sitting on a tree, but even after time passed he didn''t hear any other monster''s sound.


    " So these 12 are the main monsters of this floor." Sam thought.


    " I need to train more. Icked stamina. What If any monsters show up right now, I don''t even have the strength to fight them." Sam thought while clenching his fist. He was not arrogant, he knows he has to train more.


    " Sigh, I have a pretty long way to go." Sam thought while sighing. He knows he was pretty reckless, breaking through he thought no early E-grade monsters pose threat to him but he was wrong.


    " I can''t do any reckless things. I will never underestimate any monsters." He murmured while recovering his strength and energy.

 Chapter 15 15 - Weird Rock And Patterns.

    After recovering his strength Sam jump from the tree. He starts collecting all the loots. But he didn''t find any technique this time.


    " Sigh, My luck is getting bad," Sam sighed inwardly while collecting the loots.


    He knows he can''t be always lucky and get rare loots or techniques, So, he didn''tin because his system is his best gift.


    " Inventory" Sam murmured,


    "


    Strength crystal ( E-early-grade) x 12


    Agility crystal ( E-early-grade) x 10


    physique crystal ( E-early-grade) x 13


    Intelligent crystone ( E-early-grade) x 10


    Firestone (Yellow) x 3


    [ Crafting materials. Allow any weapon to gain fire affinity.]


    Reptile skin(green)


    [ Unique materials for Crafting.] "


    After checking his loots he also checks his upgrade point.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (250 / 250)


    Strength: 00


    Agility: 00


    Physique: 00


    Intelligent: 00


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E ( early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 3550 "


    " So, killing kobold gives 250 points. Nice," Sam thought while looking at his status.


    He first wanted to upgrade his Techniques but decided against it. He want to first synchronize with these techniques, he didn''t want to rush things like previous techniques.


    " Usually, one day will take to respawn those monsters, So I have time. I should look around before going back." Sam thought inwardly.


    He began to look around all the areas of the third floor.


    The third floor is not that bigpared to other floors, so it didn''t take much time topletely look around the area.


    He didn''t find anything which Is pretty obvious. So, he found a nice spot and sit down there. He wants to absorb those crystals before going out of the dungeon.


    Due to increasing his potential, he needed less time to absorb the crystal. It takes 4 hours to absorb all the crystals.


    " Status," He said.


    " Status<novelnext></novelnext>


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (260 / 260)


    Strength: 05


    Agility: 04


    Physique: 05


    Intelligent: 04


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E ( early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 3550 "


    After checking his status he put the extra crystals in his inventory. Now he feels quite powerfulpare to before. His health also increase 10 points, which surprised him.


    '' Now I am a proper E- grade warrior, but I have a long way to go,'' He thought. inwardly.


    While he was busy in his thinking an unexpected things happen. He discovered some kind of pattern underneath the rock he was sitting on. Due to one side of the rocks getting destroyed, the pattern became visible.


    Sam gets up from the rock and tries to move the rock from the pattern. But even with his strength, he can''t able to move the stone.


    It''s pretty weird rock. He even used his Boxing technique and sword technique with his full power. He wants to smash the rock into dust or he wants he cut the rock into small pieces but even using his techniques with all of his power he got no result.


    " How the hell is this rock didn''t get destroyed," Sam thought while looking at the rock carefully. He even his all his strength but no result which is pretty confusing for him.


    " Previous I thought this side of the rock got destroyed by me, but I think this is not possible. Maybe it got destroyed by old age or any unknown phenomenon." Sam murmured. Now he just wants to go home and ask his parents about this weird rock.


    He didn''t waste any began to run towards the exits. But when he is out from the third-floor entrance he can see a team going in his direction, but after seeing himing from the entrance they stop their journey and look at him with their questionable eyes.


    " You all shoulde tomorrow," Sam said this and vanished from the spot.


    He didn''t want to interact with anyone. So, he just simply inform them and used his concealment technique. He is pretty thankful for his mask, it saves him from a lot of trouble.


    It took him 10 to 11 hours to leave the dungeon. Due previous battle he still didn''tpletely recover his stamina, so he have to take a rest while he was running. Also due to continuous use of the concealment techniques his body sometimes reaches its limit. So, he has to rest.


    When hepletely left the dungeon he saw an unexpected group. This is the group of warriors he first saw help them but yea, he doesn''t want to meet them so he uses his concealment technique and gets away from them.


    Sam looked at the time, it''s 10:30 a.m. It will take 3 to 4 hours to reach his home so he wants to fill his stomach. He came to the motel area and enter a motel and booked a room for 1 hour. Before going to his room he ordered food.


    After a nice shower, he felling fresh. He also received his food. After filling his stomach he left the motel. He also changes his dress. He has to buy a new Armor because his leather Armor got damaged, but he can buy thatter from the cksmith association.


    '' Dammmm it... I am the dumbest person, Why didn''t I use my inventory to move the rock. Ahaaaaaa..... stupid Sam, you are No 1 stupid in this whole world.'' He suddenly realized he didn''t use the inventory to move the rock and started to me himself while pulling his hair.


    " Mom, look, that big brother is pulling his hair," a little girl said while pointing his fingers toward Sam.


    " Stay away from them, he is a mad man. You understand." Her mom said to her and the little girl nodded very seriously.


    " Now even any random person calling mad, I don''t know should Iughed or cry" After hearing their talking Sam doesn''t know what should he do. He just sigh and calm himself down and started walking toward the taxi stand.


    [ 4 hourster ]


    He reached his home but didn''t see anyone in the house.


    " This Sunday mom and dad have to go to a dungeon with their team. So, I think they went to the cksmith association. Today is Friday. So, after 2 days they will be once again entered high-grade dungeons." Sam started to feel sad that 2 dayster his parents will be going to a dungeon and he don''t how much time they will take to clear the dungeon.


    But he knows it''s prettymon in this world, so, he cheer up his mood and went to his room.


    He needs a pretty good rest. He fell asleep as soon as hey down on the bed.

 Chapter 16 16 - New Dungeon

    [Next day ]


    Sam wake up from his sleep and went to the bathroom to wash his face.


    While he Brushing his teeth, he keeps thinking about the weird rock and the pattern.


    Previously, he asked his parents casually if they know anything about the pattern and weird rock, but they didn''t know about the weird rock and pattern.


    He also searches about rock on the inte but didn''t get any results.


    He just got to know how to activate any spiritual pattern. He has to channel his spiritual power through it, then it will activate, but he also finds out the downside of this spiritual pattern. The moreplex the pattern, the more spiritual power needs to activate them.


    Sam is pretty sure that the pattern he saw in the dungeon is one of the mostplex patterns.


    "I think this pattern has something to do with the portal that fast appeared on the Eden Blue. Either this pattern will bring something good or bad and I think I am not ready to face this pattern. I can''t let affect my reckless move bring disaster for humankind," Sam thought and decided not to tell anyone about this pattern. When he became powerful, then he can find out what will the pattern do.


    After finishing freshening up himself, he left the bathroom and went to the kitchen.


    His mom was preparing breakfast. He sat down in his chair and started looking at today''s news on his mobile.


    His dad also came and sit down on his chair and started reading a newspaper.


    Sometimeter, his sister with her teacher came to the kitchen and sit down. Her teacher stayed here for the next 2 days. Sunday with his parents and sister, she was went to the dungeon.


    Alena went to the kitchen to help Hina in preparing breakfast. She rxed for 2 days in her student''s or you can say her personal disciple''s house. She rarelyes to Base city, so she stayed.


    She liked it here. Her disciple''s family is pretty friendly, so she likes to stay here. Even with her indifferent attitude, they treat her friendly. Her disciples'' parents are also pretty excellent warriors. They have good potential to be a B-grade or A-grade warrior.


    She also liked them except Sam. She feels this boy is pretty Weird. Gloria once said that his brother''s potential is the lowest and he can''t be a warrior, but she can feel that Sam doesn''t have the lowest potential and he is already an E-grade warrior.


    She wanted to ask Gloria about it but decided against it because she didn''t want to interfere with their family matter. Even he doesn''t have the lowest potential, but with this potential, he can''t be a higher grade warrior. So, Alena lost her interest in him.


    Sam doesn''t know about Alena''s thoughts. If he knows about it, he will be more serious about concealing his grade. He right now watching today''s news.<novelnext></novelnext>


    What makes him excited is that a new D-grade dungeon discovers near the base city. When his parents and sister will enter the dungeon, he ns to visit this new dungeon.


    Except for this news, other news is pretty boring, all the news about various geniuses and their breakthrough. He didn''t want topare him with those geniuses, so he kept scrolling.


    Hina and Alena bring out the food. Gloria helps them to serve the dishes.


    " Dad, how long will take you and mom this time to clear the dungeon?" Sam asked Victor while eating his food.


    " Don''t know son, but I think roughly 3 weeks." Victor doesn''t how long this time they will take. So, he tells Sam an approximate number.


    '' So, I have 21 days. Nice, I can go to this new dungeon.'' Sam thought in his mind. After clearing Base city''s dungeon, it became pretty boring for Sam. He can go there first, then he can go to the new dungeon. He also wants to go to the dungeon where he can find spirit crystal.


    He finish his breakfast and directly went to his room. He has to make some ns about going into these dungeons.


    After a serious thing, he finally decided what to do. He will first spend 2 to 3 in Base city''s dungeon, then he will go to the new dungeon, and finally, he can go to the North city''s ghost dungeon.


    His n is perfect, but he has to buy many things before going to the dungeons. He needs to buy new armor and spiritual attack techniques, which he previously forgot to buy, and he wants to upgrade his new techniques. He will practice with them until Sunday to be more familiar with them and then he will upgrade them.


    He realized one thing, that his system directly helps him understand the techniques or the techniques that he will upgrade, unlike others who need time to understand those techniques. So, he wants to use this advantage to be more familiar with his techniques.


    Sam knows his system is not that op that makes him instantly powerhouse. He knows if he wants to be a powerhouse; he has to work hard and this system will help him passively.


    He decided on this n. He sat down in his bed and searches for any news rted to this dungeon.


    Previous news only said that warriors only find this dungeon, but don''t know which type of dungeon is this. So, he wants to know the type of this dungeon. If it''s a ghost-type dungeon or a spiritual monster''s dungeon, he will be in luck. Then he doesn''t need to go to North City.


    While he looking at the news rted to this new dungeon, a piece of breaking news suddenly popped out on his mobile. Sam clicks the news and a live video stat to y.


    In this video, he saw a reporter interviewing a girl. The girl looks quite beautiful with her sky-blue eyes and hair. Sam doesn''t know her, but after listening to the news reporter, he knows who is she. She is the daughter of the current guild leader of Legend guild Jeni Caafy, who recently reached the peak E-grade.


    After watching for some time, Sam lost his interest. He knows they have many resources for their breakthrough, but he has a system, so he didn''t feel jealous. Previous Sam can feel jealous, but not the current Sam.

 Chapter 17 17 - The Part Of The Weird Rock.

    Sam was practicing his new techniques. His understanding of the Tri sword technique reaches his limit. Now he can upgrade it.


    His archery techniques are only F-grade techniques. Sam understands them pretty easily. He can upgrade all his techniques tomorrow.


    '' Status'', Sam murmured,


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (260 / 260)


    Strength: 05


    Agility: 04


    Physique: 05


    Intelligent: 04


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 3550


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade E)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (F-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (F-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (F-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only the warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:<novelnext></novelnext>


    Light walk (grade D) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ]. "


    " First, I should upgrade all of my lowest techniques," Sam murmured.


    He looked it''s now 4:00 PM. He finish his practice and went back to his room.


    Later he left his house, he went toward the cksmith association.


    He needs to buy a new Armour and previously he also didn''t sell his loots, so, he can sell them in there.


    He entered the association and went towards the receptionist''s desk. As always, he came to the receptionist he was familiar with.


    "Hello, miss, can you show me some D-grade armor?" He asked the receptionist.


    " Yes sir, please follow me," she told him to follow her while she walked towards Armour''s room.


    Sam follows her and enters the Armour room. Every Armour in this room is D-grade. He can also see three types of Armour, Heavy, light, leather.


    Previous Sam''s parents brought him an E-grade leather Armour but thus time San bought a heavy Armour but he will need time to adjust himself with it. Heavy Armour is pretty heavy and slows down your movement.


    [A/N: He still wasn''t sure which armour will suit him best. Because of this, he will buy havy armour at first.]


    Even after knowing this, Sam still wants to buy heavy armor. Sam wants to use armor heaviness in his training. He knows at first he will face a problem after sometimeter he adjusts his body with the heaviness of the Armour.


    He brought the armor with 200 thousand dors. He also sells the reptile skin and got 5000 dors.


    Sam left the association after thanking the receptionist. He always likes to thank them for their hard work. He didn''t get to know her name but yea, next time he will ask her name.


    " I don''t want to go to the warrior association night now. So, I should order the technique online." Sam ordered online the spiritual technique.


    He called a taxi and order him to go toward the Market; he wants to see the market and anything that could interest him.


    Sam finally reach the market but didn''t go to the center area. The Center area has all high-quality shops, and he didn''t want to go there.


    He wants to see if he can find anything good in this area. He also learns from his father that he found rare materials in these footpath shops.


    He also finished ordering two spiritual techniques while he was in the taxi.


    At first, he found nothing good, all of them are F-grade materials or just trash. But when he got bored not finding anything good thing and went back home, he found a small shop in the corner of an alley.


    An old man was sitting in the shop and looked like he was sleeping.


    He came to this small shop and looked at all the things in the shop. While he checking all the things, he saw a thing that surprised him.


    He saw a small part of the rock. If any other people see the rock, they only think it useless, but Sam knows it. It was the same rock part that Sam saw in the dungeon.


    " Old man.... Old man, wake up!!!" he said the old man loudly, trying to wake him up.


    " Hm... ah, young man, what happen?" the old man asked when suddenly wake up from his sleep.


    " I what this rock. How much is it?" Sam asked while pointing to the rock.


    " Hahaha... young man, you want to buy this useless rock." The old man said whileughing. He was pretty surprised that someone want to buy a useless rock.


    Sam just nodded. He knows that nobody could tell the value of this rock that can handle any type of his attack.


    " Well, give me 10 dors and you can have the rock. Hahaha," the old Sam said whileughing. He still didn''t believe that someone would buy a rock. He thought that this young man telling him a joke.


    Sam didn''t talk, just ced a thousand dor note, pick up the rock, and vanished from the shop.


    " What.... young man, young man. You don''t have to give me you can have it free. Young mam." The old man got pretty shocked by seeing a thousand-dor note. He called while running outside his shop, trying to find Sam. He thought Sam just joking with him but didn''t think Sam will give him a thousand-dor note.


    Sam could tell that the old man didn''t think he want to buy the rock. So, he just put the thousand dor note and went toward the market''s exit while putting the rock''s part in his inventory. He knows the value of this weird rock, so thousand dors was nothingpared to this part of the rock.


    He wants to find about this weird rock.


    " I didn''t think I will be this lucky and find a part of the Weird rock," Sam thought while sitting in a taxi. Now he was going toward his home directly. He just wants to reach his home and start his investigation.

 Chapter 18 18 - Finally, Knowledge About The Rock.

    After reaching home, Sam quickly entered his home and informed his mother that he was back. Then went back to his room quickly.


    Hina and Victor were talking with Alena about tomorrow''s dungeon that they will be entering. They were pretty surprised by seeing Sam this much busy. They be surprised because Sam rarely got busy with his work. Before, previously, he was always busy in his sleep.


    They think that something happen to him while they were in the dungeon.


    While Sam''s parents were busy thinking about him, he was busy with his research.


    After freshing up, he started his research.


    First, he tries to melt the rock with heat, tries to smash the rock with a hammer, but nothing happens to the rock. It''s a shockproof, heatproof material.


    Sam doesn''t know what should he do with this rock. Suddenly, he remembers if he ces anything in his inventory, his system will show its status.


    Sam put the rock in his inventory and looks at the status details that his system shows him.


    "


    Nuclear rock (Red)


    [One of the world''s strongest materials. You can''t break with just normal strength. You need arge amount of spiritual power of high-grade to make anything out of this.] "


    " Oh, my god... I didn''t think it''s a legendary material and I need arge amount of spiritual energy to do any damages to this thing. Who the hell put a legendary material in the dungeon''s floor, what is the purpose of this thing."


    Sam thought in his mind. He knew nothing, and that was a headache for him.


    He justy down on his bed and looked at the ceiling. He just thinking about what should he do now, should he talk with his sister''s teacher? But decided against it. Even she was good to his family, but he still didn''t trust her fully.


    Sam thought about something and started channeling his spiritual energy into the rock. This rocks a bottomless pit that just absorbs all Sam''s spiritual energy. He didn''t give up; he channels all of his spiritual energy to the rock.


    Sometimeter, Sam almost faints because of using all the spiritual energy, but he controls himself and stops channeling the energy.


    A tiny part of the rock melted. After seeing this, Sam became thrilled. Finally, he did some damage to this weird rock.


    " I... I think I need massive spiritual energy like D-grade or C-grade spiritual warriors have. Then I can damage these rocks." Sam thought while panting. He needs to recover his strength.


    Sam put the rock in the inventory, and once againy down on the bed. He became asleep as soon as he touch the bed. Because of channeling all of his spiritual energy, he became pretty tired mentally. He needs some good rest.


    When the dinner was ready, Gloria came to his room and saw him sleeping. She tries to wake him up. She became busy because of this she didn''t get to chance to talk with Sam.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Their brother-sister rtion getting better. These few days feel like a dream to her. She gets the chance to improve her rtionship with her brother. But happy days didn''tst long. She needed to go back to her college and prepare for the Annual Warrior tournament.


    Sam wakes up by hearing his sister''s call.


    " Let''s go, Sam. Dinner is ready," Gloria told Sam.


    " Ok sis, give a second," Sam said while he went to the bathroom.


    After some time, they both came to the kitchen and sit down in their chair.


    " Dad, ever you or mom find any legend grade or mythical grade loot in dungeons?" Sam asked his parents while they were eating their food.


    " No, son. They are super rare loot. I think anyone can find them in A-grade or S grade dungeons," Victor became very surprised by hearing Sam''s questions. He answers Sam.


    " Ooh," Sam said while thinking something about the rocks. He didn''t want to tell his parents or anyone about the rock, so he kept his silence.


    " No, even A-grade monster didn''t droop legendary loot that much. Only if you are lucky, you can find any legendary loot and I think if you can kill an S-grade or even higher grade dungeon boss (which is impossible) you can find mythical grade loot or material but I''m not sure about that because our 15 sage didn''t tell anybody about their fight within in S-grade dungeons," This is the first time Alena answer Sam while looking toward him.


    " Oh... okay. " Sam was pretty surprised by Alena''s response. He didn''t expect any response from her.


    " So, only A-grade dungeons where you can find legendary loot, but then why do I find a legendary loot in an E-grade dungeon?" Sam thought and tries to find the answer.


    After some serious thinking, he concludes either they don''t know about the rocks or they didn''t want to reveal this news to anybody.


    " I should stop thinking about the Weird Pattern and rock. I don''t have enough spiritual energy to do anything to damage or activate the rock, and who knows what will happen if I activate the pattern?" Sam thought and stop thinking about the rock and the pattern while finishing eating his food.


    He ced the te in the kitchen''s basin and start walking towards his room. While walking he thinking about what should he do now. He got a legendary material and doesn''t know what should he do with it.


    He thinking about visiting the old man cksmith. He wants to ask him if he can make anything from it. But on second thought, he should not reveal the rock.


    What if the 15 sage knows from the start about the rock but didn''t reveal it to the public? And what will happen if they find out that Sam has a part of the rock? What should he do then? He is not that powerful to face the sages.


    So, he decided not to reveal anything about the rock.


    He entered his room and directlyy down in his bed. He started looking at the news.

 Chapter 19 19 - New Techniques

    [Next day]


    Sam woke up very early in the morning.


    After freshening up, hees to the training grounds. From the outside, his house lookspletely normal, a two-story house, but they have 3 underground training fields, one for him, one for his sister, and another one for his parents. So, they didn''t disturb each other while practicing.


    He first started his Saitama''s upgrade workout routine, after that he will start hisbat training.


    He got a full 6 months of practice before the college entrance exam. He wants to use this time fully.


    After finishing his workout routine, he started practicing his Tri sword technique. He reached the limit of understanding of this E-grade technique. He also reached the limit of his archery techniques.


    Today he will upgrade them. His fast sword technique is a series of fast sword movement techniques where you increase the sword speed suddenly. He didn''t reach the limit of this technique but you can say his familiarity with this technique reaches 30%. Still a long road ahead.


    His familiarity with Balor boxing and other D-grade techniques reaches 60% to 70%.


    He knows he needs to increase his practice time to practice these techniques and strengthen his body.


    He brings out his new two spiritual techniques and quickly learns them.


    " Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    Sam checks the status of these two techniques. He always tries to learn fire control techniques. He liked the fireball technique most, so he brought this technique.


    He also bought energy recovery, it will help recover his energy faster than before. Now, normally he needs 1 day to recover his spiritual energy. When he will be a higher grade warrior, he also needs much more time to recover his energy. Because he has a small amount of spiritual energy, he needs less time, but when he will have more spiritual energy, he will need more time.


    So, he bought this technique. It will help him recover his energy faster. When it will be a higher grade technique, energy recovery will be much faster.


    He also learns from the inte that every warrior has an energy recovery technique.


    If any spiritual warrior fights monsters learning no energy recovery technique, they will face a major problem that any spiritual warrior doesn''t want to face. They will face an energy loss problem that could be the reason they lost their life. So, this is the reason every spiritual warrior learns energy recovery techniques.


    Like spiritual warriors, physical warriors also need to recover their stamina and strength. So, they also learn recovery techniques to recover their energy faster.


    The previous time, he also faced this problem, so he knows he needs this technique the most.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He didn''t want to face this problem once again. Because previous time, if any extra monster was there, he didn''t even want to imagine what could happen to him.


    He now practicing his me control technique, but it was harder than he thought. First, he has to sense the spiritual energy, then convert the spiritual energy to fire. Now he only knows the fireball technique, because fire technique is pretty hard to learn. [A/N: He think that.]


    But he needs much more time to cast a single fireball. He knows he can''t fight a monster with this. He has to cast fireball faster if he wants to face any monsters.


    So he is practicing more seriously than before. When he is low in his spiritual energy, he also practices his recovery technique. Like this he spends all his morning, he also forgets to eat his breakfast.


    At 11:00 am he finished his practice because he felt hungry. After practicing this, he needs food to recover his energy because on an empty stomach he can''t recover his energy even with the energy recovery technique.


    But today his mom was in the best mood, so he didn''t want to disturb her. He orders food online. He went to his room to fresh up.


    After eating his food he felling well. He needs some rest, so went to his room andy down on his bed.


    His parents and sister will leave home at 4 pm. He still has time, so he wants to take a quick nap.


    Sam wakes up after 2 hourster. He went downstairs; he notice his parents, his sister, and her teacher talking to each other in the hall room.


    He also sits on the sofa near his sister. His parents discussed with Alena the strategy while he and his sister listened quietly.


    This time, the group leader is Alena, and she will lead an enormous group to enter the dungeon. Sam thinks they will enter a B-grade dungeon.


    His sister won''t go this time, because it can be dangerous for her. So, she will go back to college and prepare for thepetition.


    After finishing discussing their n, his mom went to the kitchen. While he talking with his father and his sister was talking with her teacher.


    He discussed with his father about going to F-grade dungeons.


    At first, Victor wants to refuse, but after thinking, he allows him.


    He knows his son wants to reach the peak F-grade before the college entrance exam, so he supports him and F-grade dungeons will not pose any threat to Sam.


    Hina finished cooking and called them over. Everyone went to the dining room and start eating food. They will go to the dungeon and don''t know when wille back, so Hina makes a special dish for Sam.


    She knows Sam is a responsible child who didn''t throw tantrums after being left alone. She wants to spend more time with her son, but this is not possible. Because this time it''s a request from Alena to go with her, to clear this dungeon.


    While Sam was eating his food, his mother told him to be careful not to spend much time in the dungeon and practice, they will try toe back quickly, etc.


    He nodded with a smile.


    He also wants to spend more time with his family, but this is not possible because they have to go to the dungeon while his sister has to go to her college.


    But for this, he didn''t get sad. He knows he has to be powerful. He has to clear dungeons, be familiar with his techniques, also upgrade his techniques and grades. When he will be powerful, he can spend more time with his family.

 Chapter 20 20 - Watching The News Is Important.

    Sam spends his time with his parents and sister until they leave the house. It will take them 5 to 6 days to reach their destination.


    He is nowying down in his bed and thinking about his next move. He needs to be more familiar with his new spiritual before going to any Ghost dungeons or any other dungeon where he can find spirit crystals.


    He needs to increase his casting timing. So, he thinking about the training n.


    After some thinking, he ns to go to the Base city''s dungeon. He can be more familiar with his techniques while fighting monsters.


    First, he upgrades all of his archery techniques and Tri sword technique.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (260 / 260)


    Strength: 06


    Agility: 05


    Physique: 05


    Intelligent: 04


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 2750


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade D) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade)(+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ].  "


    He used 800 upgrade points to upgrade all the techniques


    He can feel new knowledgeing to his mind.


    His strength and agility also rose. After knowing that his training is not useless, he became more determined to train in Saitama''s workout routine.


    He wants to spend his evening and night practicing his techniques and the next day he will go to the dungeon.


    He came to his room and sit down on the balcony. He wants to feel today''s wind because the light wind is blowing today. This type of weather Sam likes the most. It will help you calm down your mood and rx.


    He watches the news on his mobile. He wants to stay updated about every big and small news because you can''t tell which news is important or unimportant.


    So yeah, he always updates himself by watching the news.


    Today''s news is about this year''s college participants. This year, many geniuses appearedpared to previous years.


    Some geniuses are already ready to break through to D-grade. Even many geniuses from the sage family appeared this year.


    One of the news telling about monsters rampage outside the safe zone. Suddenly monsters started attacking the border with an enormous force but our Warriors solved the problem but some people guessed that someone doing all of this because for no reason monsters didn''t attack the border.


    One of the news is about this year''s Annual Warrior tournament. He is also excited about it because his sister will take part in thispetition.


    He watches all the news and notes down some of them he thinks are useful.


    He then went to the training grounds. He didn''t want to lose his focus.


    He practiced his new upgraded techniques. He has to spend most of in his sword than his archery techniques because of being E-grade techniques.


    If any other people see Sam''s practice, they will think he is a battle genius, but its system helps him. The system directly sends him all the knowledge about the techniques, he just has to make them familiar with him like bing his muscle memory through training.


    His concealment techniques are almost ready for the next upgrade.


    Usually, anyone needs more to be familiar with any techniques, but Sam, with the help of his system, can be familiar with his techniques faster, but he still needs to work hard.


    Just his absorbing technique is the only technique that doesn''t need him to be familiar with it. He can upgrade it anytime but decided not to. Because of his low potential, higher grade techniques pressure him when using them.


    So, Sam wants to first upgrade his physique, then he will upgrade his absorb technique.


    After doing hard work on his sword technique and archery techniques, he took a brief rest.


    " Tomorrow I will go to the dungeon and spend some time in it, sharping my techniques and skills," he thinks about tomorrow''s n.


    " I should also buy those weight-increasing bands (gravity bands). It will be a great help in my training and I should also buy some health portion," he murmured.


    After finishing his training, he left the training ground and went to his for fresh up. Now he needs to go eat the food his mother cooked for him.


    After finishing his dinner and cleaning the dishes, he left the kitchen toward his room and directlyy down in the bed upon reaching his room.


    Because of the sudden increase in the training program, he is mentally tired and needs some rest.


    But he didn''t directly sleep. He once again read articles about dungeons and monsters. Others will think that it is wasting your time reading these articles, but no, they will increase your understanding about dungeons, monsters types, their special power, weakness, etc.


    So, he likes to read these articles.


    Today he reading about a dungeon that is a B-grade dungeon and somedayter a warrior''s party will go to this dungeon because the dungeon boss will awake again.


    Previously he didn''t know that a dungeon''s boss needs more time to respawn, like this B-grade dungeon''s boss that in every 6 months respawn and the higher level you go the more time will increase.


    After reading this article, he thinks about his parents because, after a while, his parents also enter a high-level dungeon. He just wish that they didn''t hurt themselves.


    He didn''t know when he became asleep while he was busy in his thinking.


    [A/N: Hey guys, I am pretty sorry for not releasing new chapters daily because I have to do my colleges assignments. But doing I will try to release more chapters. Please tell me how you like my novel and if you have a suggestion, tell me. Thank you, guys.]

 Chapter 21 21 - Meeting Aria Once Again

    [Next day ]


    As usual, Sam wakes up early and starts practicing his techniques, but today he wearing his heavy armor.


    Previously, he didn''t wear it because his parents were at home. If they saw this armor, they will question him '' Why are you wearing heavy armor? We told you not to push yourself hard. Your physique is not good, and what will if you hurt yourself? Why are wearing a D-grade armor being an F-grade warrior?'' like this of questions and Sam didn''t want to face such questions.


    Today he will go to the dungeon, so he is trying to familiarize himself with this armor weight. It was quite heavy. At first, he wasn''t even able to move properly, but now he can move normally but slow. He can''t able to use his movement technique properly but despite being unable to use his movement technique properly, he trying hard, because if he familiarized himself with this weight, he will gain strength and his familiarity with movement technique also will increase.


    Sam n stay 5/6 days in this dungeon, so he prepared a lot of food for him. He didn''t like dry food. He also prepared 2 tents. Sam stores all of them in his inventory.


    Now he is practicing his movement technique.


    He finished his training and sat down on the ground while panting. He brings an energy drink and drinking.


    After recovering his energy, he fresh up and came to the dining room. He starts his breakfast, ten bread omelets, a ss of milk. He likes to eat light food for his breakfast.


    Now it''s time to go to the dungeon.


    He ordered a taxi, so he waited for it. After some time taxi came in front of his house. He left the house after locking all the gates and sit down in the taxi. The taxi driver drove.


    The taxi didn''t directly go towards the dungeon, because two people booked this taxi. One was him, and the other one needed to be picked up. So, the taxi driver went in the other person''s direction.


    Sam notice that the taxi approaching the cksmith association.


    The taxi driver stopped the taxi and called someone with his mobile phone.


    Some time Sam notices that old man Henry and a girling in his direction or specifically theying toward the taxi.


    At first, he did not recognize the girl, but when theye closer, he recognized the girl; she is Aria m, the receptionist girl of the warrior association.


    '' Why did the old man walk with her? I don''t think the old man will be this much free to walk with this receptionist girl, '' Sam thought in mind but didn''t express in his face.


    He didn''t want to be recognized by Aria.


    Aria talked with Henry while she was walking towards the taxi. She discussed with Henry about the Sword and armor that she wanted for her younger sister. Her sister will take this year''s college exam.


    Aria is the daughter of the leader of the warrior association. The hair of the m family, one of the sage family. Her grandfather is a sage, who is an S-grade warrior.


    Every sage family maintains the order of warriors.


    Sometimes when she gets bored, she passes her time being a receptionist in the association. Why she using a taxi? Well you can say because this was also fun.


    " Don''t worry Aria, I will make them in a week. You can rx." Henry told her with a confident tone. After crafting'' Night '', his confidence rises to another degree. He is not being overconfident, but Aria giving him only yellow grade material.


    Aria got into the car and saw a boy sitting next to her. She finds this boy familiar but didn''t remember. So, she just didn''t think that much and sit down.


    The taxi moved, now without stopping the taxi going toward the dungeon.<novelnext></novelnext>


    No one talks with each other. Sam looking at the news while Aria thinking about her sister.


    But when once again she looked at Sam she once again, have that feeling that she knows him. She thought hard to remember him but no result. So, without wasting time, he asked him,


    " Hello, do we know each other? I have that feeling that I know you"


    Sam gets shocked by hearing her. He didn''t wear his mask, but how could she tell that she knows him?


    '' Women instinct pretty dangerous,'' Sam thought.


    " Sorry, I don''t know you. I think you saw me in the dungeon or near association. Ie here many times," he answered with maintaining a sharp look.


    He didn''t want to talk with her, so he maintain a sharp look, and previously he had many times with his parents in the association, so he told her that.


    ? " Ooh, sorry for the disturb," Aria response with a smile. She didn''t know why he talk with her with this haughty look, but she didn''t think that much.


    You don''t know, but she is a B-grade warrior, but she is not arrogant, so everyone likes her. So, she was a little surprised by Sam''s cold behavior but didn''t think that much, because she previously talked with many people who always have a cold behavior on their faces.


    " No problem," Sam said and once again focus on the news.


    He watched the news that saying that this year, from every sage families a genius appeared and they will take this year''s college exam. He was pretty surprised by the news because it is fast time that from every sage family a genius appeared and they will take this year''s exam.


    " I think this year''s college exam will be Pretty hard. Sigh, I think I need to prepare more seriously, it can be dangerous." He said with a sigh.


    " Are you also taking this year''s college exam? I heard many geniuses will take this year''s college exam," Aria asked him after hearing him say about the College exam.


    " Sigh.. yes I also taking this year''s college exam. I don''t know what will happen if these geniuses take the exam. I just wish I can get to admit any good warrior college." He talked to her with a sigh.


    " Don''t worry, you will do good on the exam. I have a feeling about that," Aria told Sam with a smile. She has a feeling that this boy is also a genius.


    " Thank you for the support," Sam tanked her with a smile. He forgets to maintain his cold behavior and smiles at her.


    " Hahaha... I knew you can smile," Aria said after looking at Sam''s smile.


    Sam bes stiff being forgetting to maintain his cold behavior. He bes embarrassed and looked turn his face to another side.


    " Hahaha.... don''t be shy," she said whileughing, but this time he didn''t respond to her.


    Aria tries to talk with him many times, but Sam stays silent and sometimes he responds. He maintains his cold behavior. Like this, they didn''t even realize that they reached their destination.


    " It''s good to meet you and you should smile," Aria said to him. She also reaches her destination, so after saying goodbye, she left the car and went in the association''s direction.


    Sam also reaches his destination, so after nodding to Aria''s goodbye, he also left the car and walked toward the dungeon.

 Chapter 22 22 - Earthquake

    Sam finally enters the dungeon. Not that it is his first time, but wearing this heavy armor and with new determination, you can say it is his fresh approach. Previously, he didn''t have any obvious goal about his warrior''s path, but now he has some goal and a desire to protect.


    His first goal is to be at least a D-grade warrior before the college exam.


    He was only using his Tri sword technique to fight these F-grade monsters. Sam knows they didn''t pose any threat to him, but you can say they are a pretty suitable target to practice your technique. He was pretty surprised that he can be more familiar with his sword technique.


    " I knew this as I read in other novels when you fight with monsters and your life will be in life and death situation, you can be familiar with your technique. Also, I felt that the heavy armor is now not that heavy. I think because my brain thinks that I am in danger, so befortable with the heavyweight became faster." Sam thought about all of this.


    He spends more time on the 2nd floor. When he bes satisfied with himself, he uses his Fire control technique. Compare to a fast time, he can cast fire spells faster, still, it is not enough to fight E-middle or peak-grade monsters. They will be much faster.


    He is now facing 15 F-peak-grade monsters at the same time only using his Fire control technique.


    He is maintaining a distance from them, using his movement technique. Today, Sam is mostly using his movement technique. It''s should not be very long, when he will upgrade his movement technique.


    He is trying to cast his spell faster, but it will take time. Mastering spiritual techniques is one of the hardest things and, because of this, humans don''t have that many spiritual warriors.


    " I think in one week I can decrease the casting time," Sam was thinking about his casting time while burning the monsters. It will take him 3 minutes to cast a spell. He wants to reach the level where he can cast instantly.


    Sam was moving continuously while casting the spell.


    He can feel that his stamina running low, so from time to time he also using his energy recovery.


    He almost finished his battle with only 3 remaining when suddenly the earth shook. Everything is shaking.


    Sam is now in a rocky field, so many rocksing in his direction. He avoided them, but the monster''s luck was not good. They smashed by the huge rocks.


    Sam was running for the open area. He doesn''t want to stay here where big rocks can hit him anytime.


    The earthquakested for five minutes


    In this life and death situation, he unequips his Armor and runs with all of his strength.


    When he was running and also avoiding the rocks, he finally saw an open area. He quickly went there.


    When he came to the open area, he can see many warriors, some of them crying, some of them bleeding and he also thinks that many warriors will be dead because they all are F-grade warriors and they rarely have any Higher grade movement techniques.


    Five minutester, everything calmed down.


    Sam looks toward the forest where he can see many trees have fallen.


    "What the hell is happening?", " Where the hell are those warrior association warriors?", " Aren''t they responsible for helping us in a situation like this?" Many warriors were asking this type of question loudly. They want to release their frustration, their helplessness by asking this type of question.


    He did nothing, just sat down and wait for the warriors.


    " Mom, Dad, and sister, please be safe... please. " Sam is now worrying about his family. Now he just wants to do two things, call his family members, and to investigate the reason behind the earthquake.


    He can hear many crying voices in the forest. They are the unfortunate warriors who aren''t able to reach here.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam isn''t a selfish person, so after hearing all the crying voices, he wants to help.


    Nobody notices him missing because he is using his Concealment technique and also he wears his mask. He didn''t want to reveal his identity.


    He is carefully approaching the forest because, after this type of big earthquake, many small aftershocks happened. So, quickly wants to finish his work. He doesn''t want to be smashed by any of these gigantic trees.


    He looking for the people when he hear a voice, he quickly went there.


    When he approaches the voice, he can see in this ce many trees have fallen.


    " I think someone buried under a gigantic tree or something like that. Quickly I need to there." Sam thought and increase his speed.


    He doesn''t want to see a dead person; he wants to save them.


    When he reached he saw a tragic scene. A girl''s legs pressed under a broken tree. She is crying and asking for help and another girl is bleeding from her head and unconscious.


    He quickly approach the unconscious girl to see if she was dead, but after feeling her slow heartbeat, he sighed. He quickly used the health potion to stop the bleeding or the girl will be dead by blood loss.


    When the crying girl saw someone healing her friend''s bleeding, she stops her crying and endured the pain.


    After sessfully being able to stop the bleeding, he quickly approaches the next girl. He can feel that the girl enduring much after seeing him helping her friend, she stops crying.


    He quickly removes the tree from the girl''s legs. The tree was quite heavy. He used his full strength.


    He can see the terrible shape of the girl''s leg. He doesn''t want to imagine how the hell this girl enduring this much pain.


    Sam, with no thinking, bring out the C-grade healing porting and hand over the girls and said,


    " Quickly drink this,"


    The girl, with no dy, gulps the potion. She suddenly felt a cooling sensation.


    Sam''s sister gives him this potion. It can help anything except growing new limbs.


    He can see that the girl''s legs recovered.


    " Has your leg pain decreased? I will carry you and your friend," Sam asked her.


    The girl nodded. She doesn''t have the strength to talk. So, just nodded.


    He quickly picks her on his back and the unconscious girl in a princess carry.


    " Hold on tight," Sam said and ran toward the safe area.

 Chapter 23 23 - Finally Safe

    Sam quickly came to a wide area. He also wants to find other people who need his help. He doesn''t want to hero, but that doesn''t mean he will not help others.


    When he finally reached the wide area, he saw many new warriors appear and help all the injured warriors.


    " So, they are finally here. Sigh," He said with a sigh. Finally, the association sends warriors.


    He quickly approaches the healing team. He ced both of the girls in the tent.


    All the warriors at least peak E-grade warriors and also some D grade warriors came here.


    Sam quickly went to a corner and sit down. Now all the warriors are here, so now he can rx.


    After a while, many injured warriorsy down on the ground, and the healing team helped them. They want to stabilize the injury so that all the injured warriors can leave the dungeon.


    One of the good things is that nobody died, but they are pretty badly injured.


    It''s also quite hard work for the healer warriors. They are all E-grade spiritual warriors who can use healing spells, but they are not high grade, so they also need to take rest.


    Those D-grade warriors carrying a team of 5 warriors while approaching the tent.


    Sam thinks they are warriors who went to the 3rd floor.


    Sam doesn''t know what happens but after the earthquake no monsters respawn and the most interesting thing is that nobody notices that.


    Many of the injured warriors have broken legs or broken hands and couldn''t walk properly. They have 30 warriors. Out of the 15 warriors injured pretty badly, 13 were sightly injured.


    All warriors who remain unaffected also were busy helping others.


    They helped all the badly injured warriors to walk towards the exit. Sam also helping the injured warriors.


    Because of injured people, they need more time to reach the exit. When night came, they all build tents for camping. They needed to take rest, most of all the injured people needed to take rest.


    He thinks that all the warriors who came to help know from the first that something this could happen or specifically warriors association knows from the first. So, they came prepared.


    Sam also build his tent and sit down in it. He brings out food from his inventory and ate.


    When he eating his food, two girls approach his tent. Sam recognizes them. They are girls that Sam saved before.


    " Excuse me, thank you for saving us," both of them said to Sam at the same time.


    " No problem," Sam said while maintaining a rough voice. He always used this type of voice to talk while he was wearing his mask.


    Previously he didn''t see their face clearly but now he saw, they are quite beautiful.


    He asked them to sit down; they started talking about various things to rx their mood. He also asked about their name.


    Kylie Wener is the girl who previously bleeding from his forehead. She was quite thin, but with her pink hair and round face, you can say she looks quite cute.


    Daina Crin is the other girl''s name. She was quite muscrpared to Kylie. Despite being muscr, she is quite beautiful.


    Kylie was an archer, and Daina was a swordsman on their team. They got separated. Sam thought that their other teammates were on the first floor.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam also told them his name.


    After saying goodnight, they went to their tent. Samy down in his sleeping bag.


    " Why can''t I use the inte here? Damm... I want to know why the hell is this reason for this sudden earthquake," Sam murmured in an irritated tone.


    " It''s a pretty good thing that the source of the earthquake is not here. I don''t even want to imagine what could happen to us if the source was here," Sam thought with fear in his heart. They can fight monsters but they cannot fight the natural disaster.


    Sam rx his mood and closed his eyes, trying to sleep.


    [Next day]


    They after having breakfast start their journey to the first floor.


    Sam can see many warriors have dark circles around their eyes, many of them can''t sleep after thinking about the earthquake. They are looking quite tired.


    After a long walk, they finally reach the first floor. One thinks is that this association''s warriors came to them by teleporting, but now because of the injured warriors, they all need to walk to the surface floor. You should not use a teleportation device while you have an injury.


    Compared to the second or third floor, the first floor''s warriors don''t have that much casualty.


    After having lunch and taking some rest, they once again started walking toward the exits.


    It''s also taken them 12 hours to reach the exit.


    The warriors association also arrange ambnces to take all the injured warriors to the hospital. They arrange buses to drop all the uninjured warriors at their homes.


    Kylie and Daina also reunited with their team. After saying goodby to them, Sam sat down on a bus.


    The bus started moving after it was full of people.


    Sam gets down from the bus before reaching his house. He then walks towards his house.


    He reach his house and after a fresh bath; he came to the hall room and sit down on the sofa.


    He switches on his mobile phone. He can see many miscalls from his parents and his sister.


    He calls his father. He need to tell them he was safe and also need to know how were they.


    After talking with Father and mother and assuring them he was safe, he can finally rx. From the previous day, he was quite worried about his parents, now he can rx.


    He also calls his sister and tells her he is safe. After taking some time with his sister, he ends the call.


    He brings out a lot of food. He is now feeling quite hungry. Previously he didn''t feel this but now when he rxed he can feel that he can eat 4 person''s food.


    He ate dinner while watching the news on tv.


    The reporter showed them the casualty rate. They didn''t enter the dungeon, but they interviewed some warriors, asking them about the damages.


    A/N: Hey guys I am writing on my phone, so sometimes spelling mistakes happen. I am trying to improve my English. Thank you, guys.

 Chapter 24 24 - Thinking About A New Way To Use Spiritual Power.

    "


    Casualty rate :


    Dead: 150 (Total)


    Heavily injured: 500 (Hospitalized)


    Lightly injured: 700 (In their home) "


    Sam saw the casualty rate and felt pretty bad for those dead warriors.


    One sage held a press interview. So, the news channel shows the interview.


    Sam can see a huge 200cm old maming to the stage. He wearing a ck kimono (A/N: Japanese style). Also, one thing is that all the sages don''t hire any bodyguards, because no one can harm them.


    " Hello everyone one I am John Markus, One of the S-grade warriors. I know everyone is very sad about losing our 150 warriors. I am also sad, but we will take their revenge. So, today you all know I am here to talk about the reason for the sudden earthquake. It''s because of the emergence of a new S-grade dungeon. But you all don''t have to worry. All the S-grade warriors already killed the dungeon boss. We will support the family of these dead warriors. We will support any member of these families if they want to be warriors. Thank you," After saying all of this, the old man left the stage. He seems to vanish from his ce.


    " So, it''s due a new dungeon emerge. I don''t know when I can able to enter the dungeon once again. Seriously, in this dangerous world, you can''t be a peerless guy. Sigh," Sam thought in his mind while realizing a sigh.


    He needs to be powerful.


    '' Tomorrow I will once again increase the practice. '' After deciding to increase his practice session, he goes to his andys down in his bed. He falls asleep.


    [Next day]


    You can see a teenager practicing his sword technique. It''s our Sam. He was training in his new routine.


    He was swinging his sword. He decided he will increase his sword swinging training.


    He felt his hand be numb as he stop his practice and sat down on the ground. He needs to recover his stamina, then once again start his practice.


    Suddenly, one thought came to his mind.


    " Can I use my fire control while using the sword?"


    He can see that he will need more to increase his cast timing, so he just thought aboutbining his sword technique with fire control.


    '' I know there are many things like Firestone, ice stone, which can produce fire, ice, or any other element, but there is a difference between them. The fire produced by Firestone can''t able to harm spiritual monsters or ghost-type monsters, theyck the spiritual energy to damage those monsters. So, I should try it,'' Sam thought in his mind while also thinking about a training n for this new idea.


    Spiritual energy is a type of energy that came from you. When someone uses spiritual techniques to produce elements like fire or ice, they use their spiritual energy, which was converting to the power of the elements.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Like when Sam uses his Fire control, he converts his spiritual energy to the fire element. Because of this, spiritual techniques take more time, but when you master the techniques, you can increase your time.


    " I should try to see if I can transfer my spiritual energy to the sword or any other weapons. For this, I should need an excellent control in my spiritual energy." Sam murmured and thought about buying a spiritual energy control technique. It doesn''t actively help someone in battle, but it is helpful to control your energy and also helps to increase the converting process.


    Sam thought about this sword and spiritual energybination when suddenly an anime scene from his past life came to his mind.


    The anime is Naruto, where you can channel your chakra to any weapon and make it very Sharpe and powerful.


    Sam doesn''t have chakra, but he has spiritual energy, so he wants to use that chakra channel concept.


    After recovering his stamina, he once again starts his training.


    Once he feels hungry, he stop his training and went to his room for a bath.


    After finishing eating his breakfast, he came to the hall room and sit down.


    Today he needs to go to many ces. He first needs to buy some gravity bands, then he will buy energy control techniques, but suddenly he remembers he doesn''t need to buy the bands.


    He also thought about searching for any material where he can channel his energy easily. He thinks that in a normal weapon, he can''t channel his spiritual energy.


    The previous night, he asked his sister about the artifact or ruin association. He tells her he wants to buy a gravity band, so he wants to know where he can find the gravity band or he should go to artifact association.


    Artifact association doesn''t have that many branches, so Sam has to travel if he wants to go to the association.


    His sister told him not to worry, and he didn''t need to travel. He remembered that the capital city has an Artifact association.


    So, his sister told him to wait, in 2 days someone will bring the gravity bands to him. She will send them in fast courier service.


    So, today he will go to the warrior association and cksmith association.


    From warrior association, he will buy the technique and in cksmith association, he wants to meet the old man. He wants to ask him if knows any material that can endure the spiritual energy.


    He is now searching on the inte about any warrior who uses the sword a simr way, but no result. He knows the reason spiritual warriors aren''t physically that strong, and they don''t use swords normally, and any sword user doesn''t have that much spiritual energy.


    So, yea nobody tries Sam''s idea before, and because of the existence of the Firestone or ice stone or any other stone, warriors never thought about channeling their power through weapons and producing any element of energy.


    He also searches for materials that can endure or don''t reject spiritual energy.


    He finds many materials that artifact associations used to make artifacts. But you can''t make weapons from all these materials, only from some of them you can make swords and for this reason, Sam wants to talk with the old man. He is sure that old man Henry knows about this type of material and can make swords or any weapons from them.

 Chapter 25 25 - Mytheno

    He came to the warrior association.


    He wants to buy an E-grade spiritual energy control technique. Now he most likes to buy E-grade techniques because his body can handle them.


    He doesn''t know what is the reason but when he tried to learn a C-grade technique, he almost fainted from the pain. From then on, he knows he can only handle higher-grade techniques if he upgrades it from any lower-grade techniques, but he can''t directly learn any higher-grade techniques.


    He also tried D-grade techniques but had no result. He felt something crush his body.


    So, he only brought E-grade techniques from a shop or association.


    After entering the association hall, he didn''t see Aria. He sighs in relief. He didn''t want to meet her, and he thinks she was someone important in the association because if she can directly talk to the old man Henry, she wasn''t a simple person. Old man Henry only talk like this when he was talking with someone familiar or important.


    Sam didn''t think about it and walk toward the receptionist''s desk.


    He asked the receptionist girl to bring the Spiritual energy control techniques. He first wants to see those techniques, then he can decide which techniques he will buy.


    Sam noticed that the receptionist girl didn''t have a High-grade space ring. He previously thought, every receptionist had a High-grade space ring, but he was wrong.


    The receptionist girl brings out several Energy control techniques.


    Sam first saw details of these techniques and afterparing them he decide, which technique he should buy.


    After buying the technique, he left the association. He now needs to go to the cksmith association.


    [After a while]


    He reaches the cksmith association.


    He first search for the receptionist girl which he was familiar. He found her and walked toward her.


    " Hello, can you tell old man Henry that Sam Kainer wants to meet him?" he asked her.


    "Y-Yes" she responds. At first, she didn''t remember him but suddenly She remember him.


    She walks toward Henry''s room.


    ? Sam curiously looks at the receptionist girl because he noticed that except for her nobody goes directly enter Henry''s room, they all need to take permission to enter the room.


    Sam didn''t think that much and just continue to wait for the old man.


    " Hohoho... brat how are you?" Old man Henryes toward him whileughing.


    " Did you find another rare material and want to build a new weapon?" He asked Sam.


    " Good afternoon old man and No I don''te here for a weapon. I want to know about materials through which I can transfer spiritual energy and we can make swords or any other weapons with it.," wasting no time, he directly asked.


    Henry became surprised by Sam''s question. He never thought Sam was interested in this type of material.


    Normally, artifact or rune masters asked about this type of materials because they make their things with it, but he never imagined Sam asked him about these materials and Sam also want to make a weapon from it.


    Henry thought about it.


    Sam curiously looked toward the old man, because after listening to his question, Henry didn''t respond to him.


    He can see the old man was in deep thought, so he didn''t disturb him and continued to wait.<novelnext></novelnext>


    The receptionist girl who keep standing beside the old man after hearing Sam''s questions also became surprised. She thought Sam once again bought a rare material.


    After serious thinking, Henry came to his senses and answer Sam,


    " I don''t think there are many but their 3 material which through you can channel your spiritual energy and also we can make weapons from them. But I must warn you if you want to search for these materials you should be careful." Henry told him with a serious face. He was sure that Sam wants to find them, so he warned Sam.


    "Thai is ok old man and don''t worry, I promise myself that I will never be a reckless fool. I am always on my guard." He said this to the old man.


    Old man Henry nodded and start telling about the materials,


    "


    Eterno: You can only find these materials in Graycio city''s dungeon, which was a C-grade dungeon.


    Mytheno: You can only find these materials in the capital city''s dungeons, which are C-grade or even higher-grade dungeons.


    Zetheno: Nobody knows the exact location, but I think you can find them outside the safe zone, for this nobody knows the exact location. "


    After hearing all the details, Sam thought about his next n, what should he do.


    He expresses his gratitude to the old man, to which the old man responds withughter. He left the association.


    He knows he doesn''t have enough strength to enter a C-grade dungeon.


    He reach his house and went to his room.


    After a fresh up, he sits in the hall room. He brings out his mobile phone and called his sister.


    After some ringing, someone picked up the phone.


    " Hello, Sam?" Gloria asked.


    " Hello, sister. What are you doing?" He responded and asked a simple question.


    " Nothing Sam, I am currently resting," she told him.


    " Sister, do you have mytheno?" Sam didn''t waste time and directly asked her.


    Gloria became surprised by hearing Sam''s question. She didn''t think his little bro will ask something like this.


    " Yes, little bro. I have some mytheno. The previous day I went to the dungeon and collect some myths no and other loot." She told him.


    " Good, good. Sister, can you send me some mytheno? I need them to make something," he asked with a cheerful smile. He didn''t think his luck will be this good.


    " No problem, bro," she said. She didn''t ask him about the use of these materials because she trust him.


    After talking sometimes, they hang up their phone.


    Sam went back to his room and Gloria walked toward the training grounds because she needs to get strong. When she previously went to a dungeon with her parents and faced an A-grade dungeon boss, she felt very weak. She doesn''t want to experience that again. She was training harder than before.


    [A/N: My college exams are going on so I couldn''t write these few days. I will try to write more chapters guys, don''t worry.]

 Chapter 26 26 - Spiritual Control

    Sam learns the new technique.


    '' status ''


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (260 / 260)


    Strength: 08


    Agility: 06


    Physique: 06


    Intelligent: 04


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 2750


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade D) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade D) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade)(+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (E-grade)(+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]<novelnext></novelnext>


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ] "


    Sam looks at his status. His strength, agility, and physique rise. He didn''t use the E-grade crystal but he rise his status through his training.


    When your grade grows higher, you will have a hard time increasing your strength, agility, physique. Sam now facing this problem. So, he mainly focused on his techniques. He can upgrade his status by absorbing the crystals, but he can''t do that with his techniques.


    [Next day]


    As always, he wakes up pretty early and starts his training.


    First, he practices his sword technique, then he practices his archery and his spiritual techniques.


    When he runs out of stamina, he also uses his energy recovery technique.


    He is now sitting on the grass. He recovered his stamina, spiritual energy through his energy recovery technique.


    In just two hours, he went back to his peak shape. Previously, he used all of his spiritual energy, and because of this, he exhausted himself.


    He can be familiar with his energy recovery technique faster than any other of his techniques. He was thinking of upgrading this technique. It is pretty helpful.


    Now he has finally started practicing his energy control technique. For this technique, he needs to sit cross-legged and start meditating.


    He starts his meditation. At first, he felt nothing inside of him, but sometimeter, he felt his spiritual energy.


    It''s a very weird feeling. He can feel that his control over his spiritual energy is pretty weak. His spiritual energy wasn''t synchronized. It''s feel like a balloon that isn''t perfectly round.


    Now he needs to work hard to make this ballon (spiritual energy) in perfect round shape.


    He was meditating and forgot about the surrounding.


    He tried many times to control his spiritual energy until he became mentally tired. He stop his practice and justy down in the grass.


    After recovering some of his mental energy, he went bathroom for a fresh bath.


    Sam went to the dining table and sat down. He brings out food from his inventory. He didn''t want to cook, so he previously order food and put them in his inventory.


    Sam went back to his room after finishing his lunch. He wants to take a quick nap. He needs to recover his mental strength so he can once again start his training.


    He is nning to upgrade his concealment techniques because he has almost reached the max familiarity level.


    [4 hourster ]


    Sam wakes up from his sleep and looks. It is six o''clock in the evening.


    He went to the bathroom to wash his face and fully wake up from his sleep.


    He sits down in the hall room. He also orders food for his dinner while drinking tea.


    Sam switches on the tv. He watches today''s news. He didn''t have time to watch the news in the morning, so every evening he watched the news when he was home.


    You can say in every news channel, they are showing the victim''s name and their families. Since sages decide to help this family, they will have a pleasant life. But doesn''t want his family to be one of them.


    " Ring.....Ring...Ring "


    " Who is this?" Sam said when he heard the doorbell ring.


    He opens the door after seeing the food delivery boye.


    He put the food in his inventory and walked towards the training ground.


    He practiced until his body can''t take it.


    He is nowying down on the grass and recovering his energy.


    He can also rise control over his spiritual energy. He was happy about this.


    Sam also ns to learn new closebat techniques. He has only Balor boxing for his closebat; he needs some more techniques.


    Normally, any warriors only take one profession, but Sam wants to master multiple professions. He knows if he was like any other warrior, then he can only master one profession, but with system help, he will master multiple professions.'' You never know when other professions can be lifesaving. ''


    After recovering his physical energy, he practices his spiritual techniques. He finishes his practice 4 hourster. It''s now 11: 00 PM. He needs to eat something.


    He fresh up and went to the dining room.


    He eats 5 to 6 people''s food. He was eating food until he became full.


    After done washing, he went back to his room. As soon as hey down in his bed, he became asleep.


    [A/N: Good day guys. Enjoy the chapter.]

 Chapter 27 27 - Good Day

    [ Next day ]


    As always he wakes up early and starts his practice.


    He stop practicing when he heard the doorbell. He quickly approaches the door.


    He opens the door receives the box from the delivery boy. Sam is quite excited. He open the box and saw 4 small bands and 1 belt.


    These 4 bands are for his hands and foot and the belt is for his waist.


    He quickly equips them.


    Sam remembers his sister warning, '' Don''t use the maximum gravity, when you are using it for the first time.''


    So, he didn''t use the maximum value.


    He can activate the bands or the belt mechanism with his spiritual energy. He just needs to send small energy into the bands or the belt and they will activate.


    He first minimize the gravity value to 1%, he can feel like he was carrying some weight, but this much gravity didn''t affect him.


    Gradually he increased the gravity. When the gravity value reaches its 5% value, Sam stops increasing the gravity. Because he was at his limit.


    He is now feeling that he is carrying a mountain in his body. He wasn''t even able to move that much.


    If youpare this gravity with his Armor, you can say he was wearing 5 like those Armor at the same time.


    He needs time to adjust his body with gravity.


    He is now unable to practice his techniques, so he uses this gravity for his basic practice like push-ups, sits ups.


    At first, he wasn''t even able toplete 1 push-up, then he take some time to rest and try again. Like this, he continues his practice.


    You can say that he ispletely focused on his training that he forgets about the surrounding.


    After continuing his training, he is now able to do 10 push-ups, 10 sit-ups, 10 squats, and 100m miters running.


    He is now resting on the ground. He needs to recover his energy. He uses his energy recovery technique to recover his energy faster.


    Now his body is in a rxed state, so he started to feel hungry, very hungry. He didn''t eat anything since morning, now it''s afternoon.


    He waits some time to recover his energy. He will not remove those weights from his body, he wants to wear them all the time. He just decrease the gravity value by 4%.


    He can now move freelypare to before.


    First like always he went to the bathroom to fresh up, then went to the dining room. He brings out much food from his inventory and starts eating. He was quite hungry.


    Now after finishing his breakfast or lunch, he was feeling quite satisfied.


    Sam decided to take some rest. He knows that he needs to take some rest. He can''t do his training all the time.


    He decided toy down in the hall room''s sofa.


    He switches on the tv and sits down or we can sayy down on the sofa.


    Now it''s time to watch the breaking news.


    Today is a good day for him because the warrior association announces that from 2 dayster we can again enter the dungeons.


    It''s a piece of good news for him because without fighting the monsters he can''t get powerful.<novelnext></novelnext>


    While watching the news he also calls his sister and tells her about the gravity bands. His sister also told him that tomorrow he will receive the Mytheno.


    He is now very excited, after making his weapon he can start applying his theory to the weapon.


    He is now pretty fired up and he decided to start his training.


    He starts his practice using only 4%of the gravity. His movement getting faster and faster. He can feel that his agility and physique have been upgraded.


    He didn''t use any crystals but used his training to upgrade his agility and physique. He was very happy about it.


    He was nning to upgrade his concealment techniques today. He is now 100% synchronized with his concealment techniques.


    And he can feel that it will be not very long when he will be upgrading his energy recovery technique.


    Compare to yesterday he is now pretty good at controlling his spiritual energy.


    Sometimes he thinks '' How the hell I am improving so fast.'' Because he didn''t think he will able to improve that much in controlling spiritual energy. He can only think about the system. He doesn''t know who send him here and why he gives Sam this system.


    Sam shook his head, he was thinking about other things but he shouldn''t think about other things.


    He once focused on his training.


    It''s a pretty bad situation for him right now. He waspletely exhausted mentally and physically.


    He was exhausted mentally because he was practicing his control in spiritual energy.


    And he was exhausted physically because he was using 5% of the gravity instead of 4%. Previously he felt that he can freely use 4% of the gravity so he used the 5 % gravity.


    Now he isying down in the grass and recovering his energy.


    Whileying down he was nning to absorb the crystals tomorrow.


    After recovering his half energy he left the training ground and went to the bathroom.


    [ After a while ]


    Done finishing his dinner he left the dining room. He needs to take some rest.


    But he didn''t n to take off his gravity bands. He is using the 5% gravity butpared to before he didn''t feel that much pressure while using this much gravity.


    He directly fell asleep as soon as hey on the bed.


    ( But unknown to anyone, )


    The weird pattern that Sam saw previously is now glowing.


    After the light faded, you can see many monsters appear suddenly. But not only on the third floor but all in all the floor monsters have been increasing.


    And not only just monsters increases but the dungeon has also been restored.


    You can''t even find any damages in the dungeon.


    All the warriors thought it''s a not very big deal that the dungeon restore itself but they didn''t know the reason and who knows what will they do after when they know the reason.


    [ A/N: Sorry guys but I am unable to release more chapters. I have a fever so I am unable to write. I thought I released this chapter but I didn''t and sorry about that. Don''t worry guys I ampletely corona negative... lol. Enjoy the chapter and doment about your thoughts about this novel. Thank you, guys. ]

 Chapter 28 28 - Energy Mode

    [ 2 dayster ]


    Sam is practicing his spiritual energy control technique. Today he will be going to the dungeon.


    Yesterday, he also received the Mytheno. Without wasting any time he directly went to the cksmith association.


    Old man Henry was surprised by him. He didn''t think Sam will bring this material and even it''s a yellow grade material.


    Old man Henry''s curiosity kicked in, he wants to know how will Sam use this weapon. He had never seen anyone using this kind of weapon before.


    So, within one day he sessfully makes a D-grade sword. You can expect that from Henry. He is the best cksmith.


    Finally, once again he will be able to use his techniques in a real fight.


    He finishes his training of the spiritual energy control technique. He is now resting on the ground. Now it''s time to practice his new move and because of this, he needs to recover his full stamina and energy. So he is rested and recovering his energy.


    Compare to before now he has better control over his spiritual energy but he didn''t know if he can seed in his new move or you can say his new technique.


    Because of his spiritual energy control getting better he was also able to cast his spell faster.


    After a while a recover his energy fully. It''s now the time, and he is very excited about that.


    He brings out his new sword. Compare to normal swords, his sword ispletely different. Normally any swords have a Battel aura around them but his new sword didn''t have any battel aura.


    It''s feel like a newborn baby, who doesn''t know its purpose.


    " Don''t worry little friend we will be the strongest team together. I will make your name spared through the world. From today your name will be'' REAPER ''. You will be feared by the world." Sam said to his sword.


    And it looks like Reaper acknowledges Sam''s word. It''s beginning to release an exciting battle aura.


    Sam can feel his sword''s aura and he is also happy about that.


    He closed his eyes. He is now only focused on his spiritual energy. He slowly controlled his spiritual energy and channeled his spiritual energy to his sword.


    It''s not the hard part, so he sessfully did it. But it''s time for the hardest part. He has to maintain this while battling.


    He opens his eyes and starts swinging the sword. After 10 swings he is unable to maintain the spiritual energy.


    He once again channels his spiritual energy to the sword and tries to maintain this state while he once again starts swinging. But he was unable to maintain this state after 10 swings. It''s very taxing for him, but he didn''t give up.


    He once again starts his training. He wants to know the reason for his failure.


    '' Why is he unable to maintain the spiritual energy in control after 10 swings'' He wants to know the reason.


    When he channels his spiritual energy to the Sword and swings it, he feels the sword be lightweight. He uses this energy mode sword on a dummy and the result is that the dummy was split in half without any resistance.<novelnext></novelnext>


    '' Energy mode'' he also came up with this name while practicing.


    Now he knows only two things about the Energy mode. One is it reduces the sword weight ( Sword made with Mytheno), Two is it increases the sharpness of the sword.


    " But what will be the result if I am using a sword which was made from Etherno or Zetheno." Sam thought about it, but until he get those materials he can''t say anything for sure.


    [ After a while ]


    Sam is panting heavily. He didn''t think that this mode will be giving him this much mental pressure.


    He also wants to change the form of the spiritual energy nature to the me control. But now he doesn''t think he will be able to do it. You can say, it''s out of his league.


    After recovering his mental energy he once again starts his training.


    At first, he was able to maintain this mode for only 10 seconds. He is now able to maintain this energy mode for a full 1 minute longer than the first time.


    It''s a great improvement for him. He was also able to figure out the reason behind his not being able to maintain this mode longer.


    The main problem is the focus, he unable to maintain focus while battling monsters. Because it''s pretty hard for the human brain to do multitask at the same time.


    Another problem is his control over his spiritual energy. He has to improve his control over his spiritual energy if he wants to maintain the energy mode.


    And if you want to know how he can improve his energy mode this much faster you can only say it''s help from his system. He doesn''t know it but his system continuously helps him to learn any techniques faster and also helps him to adjust his body with that techniques.


    He also tried to use me control on his sword but no result. And the bad thing is that he almost fainted because when he tried to use his me control he almost empty his all spiritual energy.


    He needs to improve his spiritual energy control. When he will be able to control his spiritual energy he didn''t have to worry about this type of problem.


    Normally when he uses his me control technique, he uses more spiritual energy than he needs. Without having control over his spiritual energy he can''t prevent it.


    Now he is resting and recovering his energy.


    He needs to eat something because he was feeling hunger.


    After recovering his energy and a nice bath he came to the dining room.


    He eats food that he brings out from his inventory. He needs to resupply his food stocks because he is really low on his food.


    One thing is that from yesterday he continuously used the 5% gravity because now in 4% gravity, he didn''t feel that much pressure. He didn''t even stop using these bands when he was focused on his new skill or technique.


    Yesterday he also absorb the E-early-grade crystals. Today he is going to the dungeon, so he is fully preparing for it.


    [ A/N: Hey guys good day to you. Thanks to you guys I recently got a contract offer for a webnovel. If you have any suggestions about it do tell me. Love you guys.]

 Chapter 29 29 - Only Gona Use Flame Control.

    He is now in front of the dungeon.


    He is wearing his heavy Armor. Compare to before, now he didn''t feel that ufortable while wearing this heavy Armor. Not only he is wearing his heavy Armor, but he also wearing his gravity bands with 5% gravity.


    '' Status ''


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (280 / 280)


    Strength: 10


    Agility: 12


    Physique: 10


    Intelligent: 06


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E ( early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 350


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D)


    [ Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword ( grade C)


    [ Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D)


    [ Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot ( E-grade)


    [ Help you to learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot ( E-grade)


    [ Help you to learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot ( E-grade)


    [ With this technique you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth( grade C)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only with higher grade observed technique, anyone can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C)


    [ You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk ( grade D)


    [ You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:<novelnext></novelnext>


    me control (E-grade)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (E-grade)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (E-grade)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [ Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ] "


    After seeing his status you can tell that he is very happy. The previous day he also absorb the crystals, So his status increase in number. He order that E-early-grade crystals and also sold the previous loots that he got from those F-peak-grade monsters.


    And his familiarity with his concealment techniques reaches its limit, so he upgrades those. You can tell, he pretty much always use those concealment techniques.


    His health also increases in number. Originally he didn''t know how he can increase his health, but he thinks it''s due to his physique.


    Now it''s not the right time to think about the extra things, now he should only focus on the dungeon. Because one small mistake can kill him.


    So, he sighed, took a deep breath and only focus on his uing battle.


    He enters the dungeon. He is looking around the first floor, but he didn''t see that many warriors. He can only see a very few warriors.


    '' I think they still have the fear about the previous earthquake '' Sam thinks in his mind while walking towards the second floor. He has some fear about the dungeon, but that doesn''t mean he will stop increasing his power.


    The previous day he called his parents. They inform him that today they also will enter the dungeon.


    He told his parents about his journey to the dungeon. They tried to stop him from entering the dungeon right now. He told them that he wants to be powerful and without entering a dungeon, you can''t be powerful.


    He strat walking toward the second floor.


    He previously decided that today he gonna only use his me control technique.


    He is pretty good with his sword. So, he decided to use his spiritual technique today. He isn''t good with his spell casting and he needs to practice more with his me control technique. So, he decided to only use his me control technique.


    He has finally reached the second floor.


    After looking around the second floor, he finally sees some huge dog-like monsters. Sam doesn''t know this monster''s name. It''s a new type of monster.


    He silently walked toward them. When he reaches thefortable distance to cast his spell, he stops moving and strat casting his fireball.


    It''s not your small fireball, it''s a huge fireball and it needs more time to cast. It''s his first time to use this spell, so he is pretty excited about that.


    it took him 5 minutes to cast this huge fireball. Without any dy, he throws the fireball toward those monsters.


    After throwing the fireball he began to run in different directions.


    You shouldn''t stay in one ce if you are a spiritual warrior. You should continuously move to different locations while casting spells. Elite spiritual warriors always do this. He learns this trick from his sister.


    If you are a noob spiritual warrior, you shouldn''t stay in one location. Because you can''t be sure that you can kill the monsters in one attack and if you fail to kill monsters, they will be able to be aware of your location at the moment when you attack them.


    So, this is one of the most important reasons spiritual warriors should change their location the moment they release their spell. It will confuse the monsters.


    And the other reason is that the spiritual warriors are physically weak, so they will have a pretty hard time in closebat fights. Those spiritual warriors who can cast their spell instantly don''t have to face this type of problem.


    They can attack while moving and also they can cast multiple spells at the same time. So, yea they didn''t have to worry about this type of problem.


    Sam wants to reach this stage, where he can cast spells instantly, but he has a pretty long way to go.


    That fireball did huge damage to those dog-like monsters. Out of the 5 dogs, 3 of them are dead only 2 two dogs are alive.


    Without any dy, he once again started casting his spell, but this time, not a huge fireball only two small fireballs.


    This time it only takes 2 minutes to cast these two small fireballs.


    He immediately throws the fireballs at the monsters.


    One dog was able to dodge the fireball and start running toward Sam''s direction, but Sam using his Concealment technique came to a different direction.


    He once again cast a small fireball and throw it towards the monster. This time the monster wasn''t able to dodge and get burned by the fireball.


    " Stupid monsters. Almost use all of my spiritual energy. " He mumbled while using his energy recovery technique. He is just an E-grade warrior and didn''t have that much spiritual energy to cast many spells. He needs to increase his spirit.


    [ A/N: Hey guys a very good day to you all.]

 Chapter 30 30 - Decide To Use Energy Mode.

    After recovering his full energy, he once again began his hunting.


    By wearing those gravity bands and heavy armor, he can''t use his full agility. But that doesn''t mean he will stop using his gravity bands. He wants to face this kind of pressure, where he can grow stronger.


    He also spotted a group of goblins. A goblin captain with 15 goblin soldiers.


    Sam silently walked towards them. If he can kill the goblin captain in his first attack, then he doesn''t have to worry about all the goblin soldiers.


    When he came to a suitable location for throwing a fireball, he cast his huge fireball. It also takes him full 5 minutes toplete the huge fireball.


    He quickly jumps in the sky from his ce and throws the fireball with his full strength.


    The huge fireball was going so fast that the goblin captain didn''t even get the chance to react. The huge fireball crushed him.


    The fireball was releasing so much heat that the area around the huge fireball melted by its heat.


    The goblins captain and some other goblin soldiers were burnt by the huge fireball that they had no remnant.


    You can say that it was a painless death for them. They didn''t even get the chance to make a sound.


    After taking some time, the goblin soldiers finally react. It takes some time for them to understand the situation.


    They started roaring and started running towards the location where the fireball came from. But Sam changes his position before Goblin''s troops respond.


    He has already made 5 small fireballs and thrown them in the middle of the Goblin troops.


    Now he can only make 5 more small fireballs or 1 huge fireball*. He doesn''t have that much spiritual energy. He needs to absorb some spirit crystals to increase his spiritual energy.


    This time, those fireballs didn''t go that fast, but even with that speed, these fireball burners all those remaining goblin soldiers. Those 5 fireballs were enough to kill them.


    Sam was panting heavily. He needs to take some rest and recover his energy. He quickly put all the loots in his inventory and start searching for an enormous tree. Sam found an enormous tree and start iming.


    He found a suitable spot to take some rest, so he sat down and used his energy recovery technique.


    After recovering some of his energy, he realizes he is feeling quite hungry. Previously, because of the battle, he felt nothing, but now he is feeling quite hungry.


    He quickly brings out some food from his inventory and starts eating. But he is always on his guard. In the dungeon, you can''t be careless or overconfident. One slight mistake can take your life.


    After recovering his full energy, he once again starts his hunting.


    [4 hourster ]


    He resting on the same enormous tree branch. It''s gettingte, so he stopped hunting. Because at night, monsters got powerful.


    But Sam doesn''t worry about that, he just wants to take some rest. He was pretty tired.


    Tomorrow he will enter the third floor, so he wants to be in his best condition.


    Sam noticed that the number of monsters had increased.


    He sessfully decreases the time to cast his fireball spell. He can now cast a huge fireball in 4 minutes, and he needs only one minute to cast a small fireball.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam was excited about his improvement. He knows he has a long way to go if he wants to cast his spells instantly. He was happy about his slight improvement.


    Tomorrow he will face those E-early grade monsters once again. He is pretty excited about that.


    Tomorrow Sam used the " Energy mode". He knows it will be a perilous move. Still, he wants to use it.


    [Next day ]


    Sam is now standing in front of the third-floor entrance.


    He enters the floor while using his concealment techniques. He wants to see if his fireball can damage them or not.


    He silently looked for the monsters. After looking for some time, he found two kobolds who were eating something.


    Sam is also curious. What are they eating? So, he silently walks toward them. But he didn''t expect to see this scene. They are eating another kobold. He knows the kobolds are pretty bloodthirsty; he didn''t expect that.


    Wasting no time, he casts a huge fireball. While the two monsters are busy with their food, Sam sessfully casts a huge fireball. He throws it toward the monsters with no dy.


    The fireball did significant damage to those monsters. Like those F-grade monsters, they didn''t turn into ashes. Still, you can say they are half dead. They aren''t in condition to fight.


    Sam quickly finish them with his sword and after quickly collecting the loots he went to hide. Because he can feel that many monsters are approaching from his direction.


    After sometimeter, he can see that 13 kobolds are approaching the spot where he kills those two kobolds.


    " So even their number also increases. Previous they were 12 in number, but now they are 15 in number." Sam murmured.


    He makes a quick decision. He casts a huge fireball. After sessfully casting the huge fireball, he throws it towards those kobolds with all of his strength.


    The kobolds didn''t even get the chance to react before the huge fireball hit them.


    The fireball could kill 3 kobolds and also did damage to those other kobolds.


    Sam knows that it''s the right time to attack when those kobolds are in confusion.


    He silently jumped from the tree and start running toward the kobolds. He brings out his sword and uses his fast cut. With one cut, he could kill four kobolds. Because they let their guard down, Sam could do that.


    Still, he has to kill the remaining 7 kobolds.


    He quickly backed away from there and start channeling his spiritual energy to the sword.


    The kobolds are now roaring and running towards him.


    But Sam didn''t lose his focus in his energy mode. It will take some time to enter the energy mode, so he didn''t want to lose his focus.


    [A/N: (* 1 huge fireball = 5 small fireballs. )


    Hey guys, I know I made many mistakes in the first 5 chapters, but give me some time I will correct them. And please tell me if I make any mistakes. I am not that good at describing the battles but I am trying to improve my skill.


    But still guys, I want to say thank you for your support and tell me how you like my novel this far. A happy day for you guys. ]

 Chapter 31 31 - Finally Able To Damage The Weird Rock.

    He takes 1 minute to start his Energy mode. It''s a pretty good thing that he is pretty far away from those kobolds. Because of this, he could enter his Energy mode.


    It''s not that he gets a power boost after entering his Energy mode, but he gets a boost in his sword sharpness. And if he can also use his me control, then he will get a fire boost in his sword. We can say that in Energy mode he can easily channel his spiritual energy to the sword and can maintain it. In this mode, his mind does multiple works at the same time easily.


    Sam also starts running in the monster''s direction. He quickly came to them and start using his sword technique. He is using his fast-cut technique because it''s his most powerful sword technique and using this technique with his Energy mode it became a very destructive technique.


    He easily cut through the kobolds. He didn''t even feel any resistance when cutting them.


    He is going in a zig-zag line. The kobolds also trying to kill Sam but he still killed them. Because of using Energy mode, his fast-cut technique became even faster than before.


    Sam knows he can''t his Energy mode for that long, he needs to finish them quickly. Because he can feel his spiritual energy running out.


    But those monsters were pretty intelligentpared to those mindless fools. After knowing that they won''t be able to kill him, they change their strategy. They attack him from various directions. You can say that they know that Sam''s spiritual energy was running out and for this, they want to dy.


    But you can''t also underestimate our Sam. He quickly stops using his gravity bands. Instantly he gets an agility boost. He quickly uses his full speed with his Energy mode and sessfully kills the remaining kobolds.


    He stops using his Energy mode and instantly he is stuck by a powerless feeling. He almost fainted, but still could hold on. You can say that he almost uses his all energy.


    To maintain Energy mode, he uses not only his spiritual energy but also uses his mental power. Because of this, now Sam is mentally tired.


    He can''t feel any other monsters, so hey down in the grass.


    " Hahaha.... this mode is pretty cool. When I will increase my spirit and intelligent''s status, then I will maintain this mode longer," Sam said whileughing. He is pretty satisfied with his Energy mode.


    He decided that the present move of Energy mode will be called the 1st move of the Energy mode. He also has an idea for the 2nd move of his Energy mode. But first, he has to master his 1st move and spiritual energy control, then he can experiment with his 2nd move.


    He isying down in the grass but that doesn''t mean he will let down his guard. As previously said, never let down your guard in the dungeon.


    A kobold was still alive, he hide in the middle of those dead bodies of kobolds. Sam could see him.


    Sam cut his legs and because of this, the kobold wasn''t able to run in direction. The kobold crawls towards Sam. He thought Sam has fainted from exhaustion.


    Sam recovers some of his energy. So, after sensing that one kobold is still alive, he prepares a small fireball. The kobold is also in hisst breath and one small fireball was enough for him.


    The kobold also preparing his attack to kill Sam but Sam has already finished preparing a fireball. He throws the fireball toward the kobold.


    The fireball burned the kobold.<novelnext></novelnext>


    This is the reason you shouldn''t let your guard down in the dungeons. You never know when something unexpected happens.


    He once again uses his recovery technique.


    It takes 1 hour to recover from his exhaustion. He only recovers his spiritual energy, but he still needs a night of good sleep to recover his mental fatigue.


    Sam stands up and puts the loot in his inventory. He walks towards the weird pattern direction. He has an interesting idea that he wants to know its result.


    But he didn''t forget to once again start his gravity. He set the gravity to 5% and now he was ready to go.


    He runs toward the pattern direction.


    He came in front of the weird rock and the weird pattern. He brings out his sword from his inventory and starts channeling his spiritual energy into the sword.


    Yes, you all guess it right, he wants to try his Energy mode''s 1st move. He wants to know whether his new technique can damage the rock.


    He quickly attacks the rock with his powerful techniques (Which means his energy mode and his fast-cut technique together).


    A loud sound of metal-shing, you can hear. It feels like two heavy metal swords sh with each other.


    Sam not only heard it, but he also felt it. When his sword hit the rock, he felt like he was hitting something very hard.


    He backed away immediately. Now you can''t see anything, because of the strong sh in the area filled with clouds of dust.


    Previously he didn''t notice, but he notices that the area around the weird rock was filled with sand.


    " How the hell is this area became like this? What the hell happens here?" he thought in his mind while looking around the rock.


    "It looks like something or someone sucked dry all the life force from here." he thought after checking the area around the rock. He doesn''t know what happens, but he thinks that it all happened because of this weird pattern.


    After the area became clear, hee in front of the rock. He became surprised by the result he see in front of him. Because he can see that he can finally do some damage to this weird rock. It''s not that he could do some extensive damage to the rock he can see a cut mark on the rock.


    Finally, he could do some damage to this rock, and he was happy about it.


    [A/N: Hello guys, a wonderful day for you all. Guys, I am now trying to correct all the grammatical mistakes and after that, I will try to correct all the odd spelling mistakes. I just need some time. ]

 Chapter 32 32 - Never Let Your Overconfident Control Your Action.

    Sam notice one thing that, the colour of the pattern became darker. Previously, its colour was red, but now it''s changed to a dark red colour.


    "Why suddenly the colour changed?" Sam thought in his mind, but nobody answered his question.


    He sat down near the rock and thought about what could happen.


    He also needs to recover some of his strength so he can quickly leave the dungeon.


    He looked at his system inventory.


    "


    *E-early grade strength crystal x 10


    [Helps you to increase your strength.]


    *E-early grade agility crystal x 09


    [Helps you to increase your agility.]


    *E-early grade physique crystal x 12


    [Helps you to increase your physique.]


    *E-early grade intelligent crystal x 08


    [Helps you to increase your intelligence.]


    *F-grade strength crystal x 30


    [Helps you to increase your strength.]


    *F-grade agility crystal x 35


    [Helps you to increase your agility.]


    *F-grade physique crystal x 34


    [Helps you to increase your physique.]


    *F-grade Intelligent crystal x 31


    [Helps you to increase your intelligence.]


    *Goblin''s toot x 25


    [Material for crafting.]


    *Goblin''s eye x 30


    [Material for potion making.]


    *Wolf fang x 26


    [materials for crafting.]


    *Wolfskin x 25


    [Material for crafting.]


    *kobolds bone x 10 (Yellow)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Unique material for crafting.]


    *Raw crystone x 20 (green)


    [Materials for crafting.]


    *Leaf of life tree x 30 (Yellow)


    [Unique material for making life potion.] "


    You can say, Sam, luck this time was quite bad. He didn''t get this time any rare materials or techniques.


    Sam was quite disappointed after seeing all the loot, but he quickly cheer up his mood. Not that every time he will be lucky. In the dungeon, you never know when someone will be blessed bydy luck.


    It was his first time getting goblin''s eye and kobolds bone. Goblin''s eye helps in making portions for skin disease or helps in making poison. He read in a book that the goblin eye had some type of chemical that was quite useful in both of the factors.


    Kobold''s bone is also a suitable material for making weapons from it. They are quite strongpared to normal raw crystone. Sam can use them to make himself some weapons.


    After closing his system window, he closed his and only focused on his energy recovery technique.


    Sometimeter, he recovers most of his energy. So, he quickly stands up and looked at the rock for thest time. Then he started walking. He still needed one day to leave this dungeon.


    At night, he was now resting on a tree, and he was now on the second floor. He is eating some food that he brings out from his inventory.


    Sam needed some rest. He just now wanted some sleep, but he can''t do it because he was now in the dungeon.


    "I should increase my mental power. If I want to use Energy mode freely, I really needed mental power." Sam thought.


    After today''s battle, he understands one thing that he needed to increase his mental power and spirit. But it''s not that he will not upgrade his other status.


    He really wants to increase his status point right now, but after some thinking, he decided against that. Because he didn''t want to let down his guard, even he was now in the second where monsters didn''t pose any threat to him.


    But he can''t say anything in the dungeon. What if a great number of monsters suddenly attack him? He will not have a problem if he faces only some monsters like he was facing 20 F-grade monsters at the same time. He then will not have any problem, but if the monster''s number get increases from 20 to 50, then he will have a problem facing them.


    As monster numbers increase in the dungeon suddenly, what if it happens when he was facing those F-grade monsters?


    One thing he tells himself every time when he enters the dungeon is that ''Never underestimate your enemy, even they are low-grade monsters.''


    Sam finished his food and sit in a quiet, rxed manner. He never let his guard down, but he still rx sometimes while maintaining his guard. He thinking about a sensory technique that can help him spot any enemy in the distance. The sensor technique actually enhanced someone''s sixth sense.


    Sam notices that some monsters roaming around his hiding area. He thinks they were searching for him because he previously bring out the food. He can hide, but he can never hide the food''s smell. And like you guessed, some monsters are quite good at smelling sense. It was quite a good thing he already finished his food.


    Sam didn''t fear them, but he didn''t want to fight any unnecessary fight. If he can avoid those unnecessary fights, he dly avoids them. You should also learn when to fight and when to avoid those unnecessary fights. You can''t only think about fighting monsters, you also have to learn about saving your energy.


    His parents and his sister remind him many times about avoiding unnecessary fights. If Even they didn''t remind him, he still going to avoid the unnecessary and save his energy.


    Everyone has only one life, and Sam doesn''t want to risk his life fighting every monster in the dungeon. He still remembers the news that some time ago, some high-ranked warrior died in the dungeon because he fought all the monsters in the dungeon with no rest. Eventually, he used all of his energy and died from an E-peak grade monster''s attack, and was a D-peak grade warrior.


    The news tells that the warrior makes a bet with his teammate; he wants to show them his power. After the warrior die his teammate also got punished by the warrior associations.


    Sam thinks the warrior was quite overconfident about his power that he forgot about the basic rule of the dungeon.


    ''Never let your guard down in the dungeons.''


    The warrior let down his guard and let his overconfident control his action. And this is one reason you never should be overconfident or arrogant about your strength and let yourself control by your overconfident or arrogant thinking.


    [A/N: Hello guys, it''s your newbie writer. If you find any spelling mistakes or grammar mistakes, tell me, I am still improving. I needed all of your help and don''t hesitate to correct my mistake. Good day to you all.]

 Chapter 33 33 - Why Does The Number Of Monsters Increases In Dungeons?

    [Next day]


    You can see a boy walking toward the entrance of the second floor. One thing that is pretty unique is that nobody notices him like he is some kind of air.


    Yes, it is our Sam; he was using his concealment technique to avoid the monsters and warriors.


    He is still on the second floor and needs 2 to 3 hours to reach the second floor.


    While walking, he notices warrior number has increased. Still, there are few warriors, but like Sam, they also realize that if they don''te to the dungeon, they will not grow stronger.


    There are many warriors who didn''te to the dungeon because they fear the previous incident. Those warriorsck the will to be stronger. Those warriors who came to the dungeon have the will to be stronger.


    This world bing dangerous and to protect yourself you need strength.


    [2 hourster]


    Sam left the dungeon. He needs 2 hours to reach the first floor and then 2 hours to leave the dungeon.


    Sam was now exhausted, so he will go to the warrior''s associationter. He just wants to go home. He really needs some sleep.


    Sam called a taxi and start going toward his home.


    Sometimeter,


    He was standing in front of his house. He opened the door and, wasting no time, went to his room. After a good bath, he directlyy down in his bed and fell asleep.


    [Next day]


    He wakes up from his sleep. The day before he was so tired that he only wake up today. But yeah, he wakes up very early, and the first thing he feels was hunger. Yesterday he was so tired that he forget to eat something.


    Sam didn''t waste his time and directly went to the bathroom, and after freshening himself, he went toward the dining room.


    He brings out a lot of food. He was quite hungry because he ate nothing yesterday. Like a hungry beast, he eats all the food.


    Sam knows the manner, but he was starving, and besides, no one in the house except him. So he eating like this.


    (A/N: You all should try eating like this.)


    After finishing all the food, he went to the hall room. He switched on the tv and started watching the news. He looked toward his phone and find one message from his father. Sam open the phone and read the message.<novelnext></novelnext>


    They told him they will enter the dungeon yesterday. Because of the previous earthquake, they also dy their hunting. They also told him to be safe and not go toward the second floor on his own. If he faced any problem, then he should contact his sister.


    He worried because he hadn''t received messages from his parents previously. He thought they entered the dungeon, and because of this, he didn''t receive any message or call from them. But they only enter the dungeon yesterday. So, he thinks they also waited for the dungeons to be stable.


    But one thing that worries him is that what if in every dungeon monster''s number has increased? He knows that his sister''s teacher was with them but, still concerned about them.


    He rxes a little. He doesn''t think Alena, his sister''s teacher, will let anything happen to his parents.


    He releases a deep sigh and looks at the news. He wants to know what happens in those two days when he was in the dungeon.


    They are now showing the report about the increased rate of dungeon monsters. In every dungeon, the monster''s numbers have increased.


    They are also showing some warriors'' opinions about this matter. News reporters aren''t that lucky to meet the sages. Sages are very busy with their work, so they didn''te to the public that much and it was very hard to meet them.


    So news channels were only showing the other high-grade warriors'' opinions. They think that it all happens because of the appearance of the new S-grade dungeon. Because of this, the spiritual energy in the dungeons increased and also monsters'' numbers increased. We all know that monsters came when Blue star''s spiritual energy recovered.


    But Sam didn''t feel satisfied by the answer. He still has many questions. "Like we know monsters came when Blue star''s spiritual energy recover, but we also know that theye from portals."


    So Sam''s question was that ''are there any portals open in the dungeons? If those portals originally open in the dungeons, why didn''t the warriors'' association take any action?'' like this, he has many questions in his mind. He also thinks that it all happens because of the weird pattern and he also thinks someone connected this pattern to the monster''s world.


    Right now, he really wants to know if all the dungeons have that kind of weird pattern?


    Sam really wants to find about the pattern, but not that fast. He will find about them slowly. He didn''t want to rush things. You can''t rush things like this which risk your life.


    The reporter also showed them the photo of the new S-grade dungeon.


    You really can''tpare the S-grade dungeon to any other dungeon. The entrance of the S-grade dungeon is so big, or, we can say, majestic. No low-grade dungeons have this kind of entrance. Even A-grade dungeons didn''t have that kind of entrance.


    But it''s a good thing that our S-grade warriors sessfully killed thest boss and stabilize the dungeon situation.


    He gets up from his seat and switches off the tv. It''s time for training and after finishing his training he also has to go to the warriors association to sell those extra loots.


    Right now he didn''tck any technique, so he didn''t want to buy any technique right now. He wants to buy the spirit and intelligent crystals. Especially the spirit crystals. He has intelligence or Int crystal, but he didn''t have any spirit crystals. If he wants to improve his Energy mood, he needs both of them. Now his spirit was quitecking, so he needs to increase his spirit.


    While walking toward the training room, he receives a message from his sister. He read the message instantly.

 Chapter 34 34 - Shadow-Practice Method.

    His sister tells him she wille home tomorrow. She will go to the North city day after tomorrow because of this she wille home tomorrow.


    "I think they are going to the North city''s C-grade dungeon." Sam thought while walking. North city not only has a ghost-dungeon but also has a C-grade dungeon.


    Sames to the training field. He first started doing all the basic exercises. When he will finish his basic training, he will start his real training.


    His basic training is all about the Saitama training routine. In this world, where spiritual energy means everything and you gain straight from absorbing crystals, this type of workout didn''t increase your strength that much. But Sam still practices them. This type of workout helps you to maintain your body from being rusty, and this type of workout makes your mind fresh.


    (A/N: Guys, let''s exercise. Let''s be Saitama, but don''t be bald. L.O.L.)


    After finishing his basic exercise, he practices his sword techniques. He bes 75% familiar with his fast-cut technique. Just a little more, then he can upgrade his fast-cut technique. But he also needs to increase his strength and physique because using a higher grade technique will put pressure on his body.


    His Tri sword technique''s familiarity reaches 55%. He is also aiming to upgrade this technique. Thi technique was low gradepared to the Fast-cut technique, he just needs to practice seriously for 1 week to bepletely familiar with the technique.


    Previous some days he didn''t practice this technique because he only focused on his Fast-cut technique. In his Energy mode, he only can use his Fast-cut technique with the spiritual energy-coated sword. Because his Fast-cut technique is one of his most destructive and most favorite techniques, so he only uses that technique.


    Now he ying to use the Tri technique in his Energy mode. So he started practicing this technique.


    He was practicing both his sword techniques. He was using his shadow-practice method to practice his sword technique. In this method, he visualized the enemy and try to kill that enemy. He also visualized their attack and defense pattern. It is like having a ghost enemy which you can only see and you have to defeat him.


    Today is his first day to practice this method. Previously, he only has an idea but didn''t really practice this method. He thought about this method because in his previous life he read manyics and novels or even watch anime, where fighters practiced like this visualizing their opponent. He also wants to try this method and today he finally practicing using this method.


    (A/N: Hey guys, I am not good at naming things like this. So, if you have any suitable names for this method in your mind, tell me.)


    At first, he can''t even visualize any enemy, but after some serious focus on visualizing the enemy, he visualizes a goblin soldier. He needs to keep the focus on visualizing the enemy, then he will visualize the enemy.


    It takes 2 hours to just sessfully visualize an enemy. The reason is that he didn''t know how to do it. Sam tried various methods and finally; he found the right method to visualize the enemy. Sam can''t just visualize any enemy and it also costs his mental energy to maintain the virtualized enemy.<novelnext></novelnext>


    To visualize the virtual enemy, he needs to follow some rules.


    First, he only can visualize the enemy he fought before. He wasn''t able to visualize any enemy that he didn''t fight. That doesn''t mean it will be impossible, but he will try thatter.


    Second, he needs to use mental his mental energy to visualize. He also has an idea to use his spiritual energy In this method to make it even better, that is for the future.


    Third, he needs to maintain his focus. If he lost his focus, his virtual enemy also disappeared. Like his Energy mode, where he always needs to maintain his focus in both energy coating and his technique, this Shadow-practice method also is the same where he needs to maintain his focus.


    Right now, he could only find out these three rules. He found a good thing about this practice method. Like his Energy mode, in this practice method, he needs to use his mental energy, but he only needed a small amount of his mental energy. Suppose Sam uses 70% to 80% mental energy in his Energy mode but In Shadow-practice he needs to use only 20% to 30% of his mental energy.


    He needs to use the mental energy based on the visualized enemy''s strength. Suppose when he was thinking about an E-early grade monster, he need to use 30% mental energy but when he was thinking about an F-early grade monster, he only need to use 20% or even 10% of his mental energy.


    He was now fighting a visualized goblin captain. Now he can only visualize one monster at a time. He now only using his 20% to 25% mental energy. Even though he needs to take some rest from time to time to recover his mental energy, he was using this method continues to practice his sword techniques.


    He didn''t know if he can use his Shadow-practice method to practice archery techniques. He can find this outter.


    Right now, he only focuses on his sword technique. He wants to upgrade at least one sword technique in one week.


    He also wants to see if he can use this method while he will use his archery technique. Archery and swordsman are two different professions and their practice method is different. So he wants to see would he needs more mental energy when using archery, but that is forter.


    He was feeling quite excited because he feels like he was facing an actual monster. If he can practice like this, then he will not need one week to be familiar with his Tri sword technique. He will need more time in case of his Fast-cut technique.


    Now he is using 5% gravity, but he felt that in one or two days he will need to increase the gravity. His body is bingfortable using 5% gravity.

 Chapter 35 35 - Full-Day Training.

    He finishes his sword practice and now he was resting on the ground. He was using his energy recovering technique to recover his mental energy faster.


    He can feel his improvement in his sword technique. It would have been better if he had a teacher who can guide him in his sword practice. Sam can also feel that.


    Sam has a system, but he still needs guidance from an experienced warrior. He has a C-grade sword technique, but a warrior still can defeat him with a D-grade technique, who has vast experience in battle. High-grade technique alone doesn''t make you an outstanding warrior, you also need actual battle experience. An actual battle can teach you a lot where there is the possibility of losing your life.


    Even Sam wants to stay low, but he still wants to learn from an experienced warrior.


    After recovering his energy, he was now eating food, because he still is a human and he can''t ignore his hunger. Sam misses his mother''s handmade food. These days he only ate restaurant food because he didn''t have time to cook. He was only busy on his training and dungeon adventure.


    He was nning to cook today''s dinner but after some thinking; he decided he will cook tomorrow because his sister will alsoe tomorrow.


    Now he was watching some news. The news reporters were showing various reports from warriors about the reason behind the increasing monsters, but they still didn''t able to find the actual answer. The warriors are only telling what they think. Their statement can be right or can be wrong.


    Sam thinks, the sages know something, and they didn''t want to tell anyone. Monster''s number increase isn''t a small matter, but the sages still didn''t show themself and kept silent.


    Sam just hopes that no danger wille to his parent. They are going to a high-grade dungeon and who can tell what will happen there? In dungeons, anything can happen. He just hopes that Alena will keep them safe.


    He inhales some fresh air to make his mind clear. Worrying about them will do nothing. If now he was a high-grade warrior, then he didn''t have to worry that much. Sam needs to be powerful and for this; he didn''t have time to waste. He gets up from his seat and starts walking toward his training field.


    " Yosh, it''s time to continue my training," he said while walking toward the training field.


    He once again starts his training.


    [At night]


    You can see a teenager meditating in a dark room. In this dark room, the only light source is the moon, and the moonlights areing through the open window. This teenager was our Sam. Sam was now absorbing the crystals. He has already finished his training in the evening and after a fresh bath and eating some food; hees to his room and starts absorbing the crystals.


    Sam didn''t turn on the room''s light because he see moonlight ising into his room through the window. This darkroom with this moonlight creates a perfectly rxed environment to meditate. So, he didn''t turn on the light and let the moonlighte to his room while he began absorbing the crystals.


    [A/N: Hey guys, you have any chance you should also try this. Turn off your room''s light, let the moonlightse, and just rx and fall asleep.]


    Sam slowly opens his eyes. He was now feeling pretty powerful. He can feel that now he really needs to change the gravity.


    ''Status'', hemands in his mind.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 300)


    Strength: 14


    Agility: 16


    Physique: 15


    Intelligent(mental power): 10


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 8350,


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Medium-level boxing technique. You can be a beginner boxer.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade D) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ] "


    It surprised Sam to see that his health increase. His other status also increased except spirit. So Sam was nning to go to the warrior association to buy spirit crystals and some int crystals. He knows E-grade spirit crystals are very pricy, but he still wants to buy some spirit crystals.


    He also needs to sell his extra loot. At first, he was nning to go today but then decide to go tomorrow, because he has been pretty fired up and wants to train all day.


    He gets up from his bed and went to the bathroom, and aftering from the bathroom, he went towards the dining area. He was now feeling pretty hungry.


    Sam finish his dinner and after cleaning he directly went towards his room. He is now quite tired, both physically and mentally. He needs a good night''s sleep. Because of this, he didn''t sit down in the hall room to watch the news. Recently, Sam makes a habit of watching the news after dinner, but today he was pretty tired and didn''t have the mood to watch the news.


    Hees to his room. Wasting no time, he directlyys down in his bed. He is now feeling this dark room with moonlights creates a perfect environment to fall asleep. So he falls asleep as soon as heys down on the bed.


    [A/N: Hey guys (https://discord.gg/C5kUjxVwMC), this is my discord link. If you have any suggestions, tell me. I will wait for you guys. And if you enjoying this novel, you give me some power stone (the shameless author is here). Good day guys.]

 Chapter 36 36 - Selling All The Loots.

    You can see our Sam was resting on the ground. Some time ago he finishes his training and now he recovering his lost energy.


    Sam already finished upgrading his recovery technique, so now the process became much faster. He didn''t want to train all day because his sister wille and he also had to go to the warrior association. He also needs to go to the market to buy some vegetables.


    He recovered his energy, so he stands up and walk towards the bathroom. He is not a clean freak, but he still likes to take a bath after he finishes his training.


    After finishing his bath and finish eating some food, he was now going towards the warrior association.


    It will take some time to reach the association, so he was watching the news on his mobile. He got bored after some time watching the news because the news channels showed them the old news. He keeps scrolling and trying to find any interesting news. After some scrolling, he really found interesting news about the C-grade dungeon in North City.


    In the northern city''s dungeon, because of the previous phenomenon, some C-grade spiritual monster spawned. And because of this, many C-grade warriors starteding to the north city. Previously, North city was only famous because of the Ghost-dungeon, but it looks like it will even more famous for this unknown phenomenon.


    ''I think sister alsoing for this. She was a spiritual warrior, and she needed the spirit crystals the most.'' Sam thought in his mind.


    Few dungeons that can drop spirit crystals, it''s amon problem for all spiritual warriors. Physical warriors didn''t face this problem because they rarely relied on their spirit. Sam also didn''t have to face this problem if he relied on his physical path, but he became a mixed warrior, so he also has to face this type of problem.


    " When I will be a C-grade warrior, I should also visit this dungeon." Sam wants to visit this dungeon when he also became a C-grade warrior, but he now wants to go to the North city''s E-grade ghost dungeon.


    [2 hourster],


    He reaches the warrior association and, wasting no time, he went approached the reception area. He wants to find Aria but didn''t find her.


    "I think today she didn''te." Sam thought and went toward the receptionist that always sits next to Aria.


    "Excuse me, miss, I would like to sell my loot. " Sam came in front of the receptionist and said.


    "Yes sir, please bring out your loot for inspection." The receptionist told Sam with a smile.


    Sam, wasting no time, brings out all the loot that he wants to sell.


    "Give me a minute sir," the receptionist said and began inspecting the loots.


    The receptionist girl inspects the loots and a minuteter she told total he would get 600 thousand dors. Sam knows he could get more if he had killed all the F-grade monsters, but he didn''t do it. He only fights some of them when he wants to practice his techniques, and when he usually travels, he avoids all the monsters because he wants to travel faster and wants to save energy.


    Sam, wasting no time, sells all the loots. He immediately receives his money.


    "Miss, do you have an E-early grade spirit and int crystals box?" Sam asked her after receiving the money.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Yes sir, we have E-grade spirit and int crystals box. Just give me a minute," the receptionist answer Sam and went towards the crystals box rack. She took a box and approach Sam.


    "Sir, this is the E-early grade spirit and int crystals box." she put the box on the table. Sam inspected the crystals and after seeing the crystals were original, he asked her about the price.


    " Sir, you have to 1 million 100 thousand dors." She told Sam.


    Sam, after paying the money, put the box in his inventory and leave the warrior association. He now only has 100 thousand dors. In his previous world, 100 thousand dors would have been a lot of money for him, but in this new world, this money is nothing.


    He was now going towards the shopping mall to buy some meat and vegetables for his cooking. He wants to make something special for his sister, so he needs all of this.


    [Sometimeter],


    You can see Sam was now cooking in the kitchen. Hees home some time ago and after fresh up; he went to the kitchen and start cooking. Sam also called his sister. She still needs some time to reach home because of the traffic jam.


    Not only her many other C-grade warriors also approaching the North city and because of this traffic jam happens. It will take some time to free from the traffic jam.


    In his previous life, Sam learns how to cook, so he is now making one of his favorite dishes from his previous world. It''s called Keto Butter chicken. He already finished cooking rice.


    He is now preparing the ingredients. It will take him at least 1 hour to make this dish.


    [1 hour 30 minutester]


    He finished his cooking. He thought he only needs 1 hour to make the dish but the dish take 30 minutes extra to cook.


    His sister alreadye home. She came home 10 minutes ago, so told her to fresh up.


    Gloria, after a quick fresh up,es to the kitchen to help Sam. Sam had already finished cooking, so he asked her to carry the dishes while he went to the bathroom.


    They ate when Sam came back from the bathroom. While eating, Sam talks with his sister. He asked her about her training. He also asked her about the North city''s dungeon.


    Gloria told him about the dungeon. Previously, the dungeon was a normal C-grade dungeon and wasn''t that famous, but now, because of the spiritual monsters, it be famous.


    She and some of her friends will go to the dungeon. Her friends also looking for the spirit crystals. She nning to go to the dungeon 2 dayster. Her friends wille to their house tomorrow. They will stay tomorrow at their house.


    [A/N: Hey guys, a good day for you. If you like the novel, give some power stone. (shameless author)]

 Chapter 37 37 - Cooking Food.

    Sam was now in his training room, practicing his spiritual control. He wants to improve his spiritual control faster. He feels it will take 2 to 3 weeks, then he can upgrade his spiritual control technique. Sam also feels that in a few days he can also his spiritual control technique, movement technique, and his archery techniques.


    He finishes his training and went towards his room and after washing himself with cold water; he walks toward the kitchen.


    Sam made today''s lunch, so Gloria wants to cook today''s dinner. He was nning to help his sister.


    [A/N: You should also help your sister in cooking.]


    Hees to the kitchen and saw his sister cutting some vegetables. Sam approaches her and told her to give him the knife, while she can start his cooking.


    Gloria, seeing Sam, wants to cut the vegetables, gives him the knife, and she walks towards the oven.


    So like this the brother-sister duo, making their dinner. You can see the little smile on Gloria''s face, but Sam didn''t get the chance to see her sister''s smile.


    After sometimeter, Gloria finishes her cooking. Sam then told her to fresh up herself then they can start eating.


    Gloria went towards her room while Sam take all the food to the dining room. He sat down in his seat and waited for his sister. Gloria didn''t take that much time toe back. She sat in her seat near Sam and start eating food.


    Sam asked about the new dungeon that was spotted near Base city. He wants to go there next, so he wants to collect information about the dungeon.


    Gloria tells him what she knows about the dungeon. The warrior association confirmed this dungeon was a D-early grade dungeon. In this dungeon, you need to clear 4 floors. On the first floor, you will face E-early grade monsters and on the fourth floor, you will face a D-early grade boss monster.


    Sam totally forgets about the boss monster. Now, after listening to his sister, he remembers the boss monsters.


    Sam thinks this dungeon is a perfect dungeon for him. Now he is an E-early grade warrior, he can grow stronger while fighting these monsters and when he will reach the next grade, then he will try to kill the boss monster.


    Gloria also tells him that a team of E-peak grade has already explored this dungeon. They found this dungeon has 3 new species of monsters. One wolve type, one tree type, and one human type monster.


    Sam was thinking about should he directly go to the dungeon? Or for thest time, he should go to the Base city''s dungeon?


    Both brother-sister finish eating and cleaning the tes, so they are now walking toward their room. Sam today wants to sleep early, so he walks towards his room. He can watch the newster. Now it''s time to sleep.


    Hees back to his room and directlyys down in his bed, but he didn''t fall asleep as soon as hey down in his bed. He was thinking about the dungeons.


    Sam ns to approach the Base city''s dungeon. He wants to gain more strength before approaching this new dungeon.


    "Status," Sammand.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 300)


    Strength: 14


    Agility: 16


    Physique: 15


    Intelligent(mental power): 10


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 7850,


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade D) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (D-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ] "


    He closes the system window after finishing checking his status. He can feel that in a few days, he should be able to upgrade some of his techniques.


    He doesn''t even realize when he falls asleep while he is busy in his thinking.


    [Next day,]


    As always, Sam wakes up pretty early, and after finishing brushing his teeth, he approaches the training field. Today he wants to practice those techniques which he feels like he should be able to upgrade in a few days. First, he practices his basic exercise and after finishing his basic exercise, he will start his main training.


    Sam was practicing his movement technique and only stops when he run out of stamina. He continues to practice like this.


    He was panting andying down on the field. He was using his recovery technique continuously.


    Sam increases his band''s gravity to 6% and because of this, he was losing his stamina faster. This new gravity puts a heavy load on his body and he needs time to adjust with this new load. Sam previously didn''t think that increasing 1% gravity will put this much load on his body.


    He stays like this,ying down in the field and letting the energy recover. Now, as he rxed, he felt hungry. So, Sam stops his training and after recovering his energy, he went to the bathroom.


    It took little time to finish his bathing. He wears ck t-shirts and ck pants and walks towards the kitchen. But when he was approaching the kitchen, he heard many voices from the hall room. He became curious and start walking towards the hall room.


    [A/N: Hey guys, good day to you all. If you like the novel, you can send some power stone, (Yea, I know I am a shameless author. Lol). You can also give some reviews about the novel. Bye, guys.]

 Chapter 38 38 - Towards The Dungeon.

    Sam found Gloria and her three friends talking with each other in the hall room. Mainly her friends talking.


    Sam after finding out that his sister''s friends were talking, turned back and went towards the kitchen. He didn''t have any interest in meeting them. Previously, theye here many times, but Sam rarely talks to them. Gloria also knows that.


    He went to the training room after finishing his food. He was nning to absorb those crystals. Sam will go to the dungeon tomorrow and because of this, he was nning to absorb the crystals.


    Sam sits down on the ground and brings out the crystal''s box and starts absorbing.


    It''s take him some time to absorb all the int and spirit crystals.


    "Status," he said in his mind.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 300)


    Strength: 14


    Agility: 16


    Physique: 15


    Intelligent(mental power): 14


    Spirit: 04


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 5850


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (D-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ] "


    He gains 4 points in both intelligence and spirit. Now, he feels much clear-minded than before. It will be a great help in his Energy mode and shadow practice.


    Sam also upgrade his movement technique. Previously, he thought he needed more days to upgrade his movement technique, but after the previous day and today''s training, he finally be 100% familiar with his movement technique. The 6% gravity also helps him with that.


    He gets up from the field and starts his training. He needs to adjust his body with his new power and his upgraded movement technique.


    Sam finishes his training when only Gloria calls him for lunch. Sam went to the bathroom and took a fresh bath, and then he approach the kitchen. He saw his sister serving their food. He approaches the dining table and sits down.


    Even Sam didn''t talk with her sister''s friends, still knows their names. The light blue hair girl is Fina Herson, the raid hair girl calls Jenny Brun, and the ck hair girl calls Kenny Luis. Like his sister, they are also geniuses and they also have the same teacher.


    Sam hears from his parents that his sister''s group calls the queen''s group by the other students in their college. You can say that Gloria and her friends are the top geniuses.


    Sam previously didn''t talk to them because they release an aura of proud geniuses. It''s not that they are arrogant, but this is one reason Sam didn''t talk to them that much, and the other reason was that he didn''t want to embarrass his sister in front of her friends. He was a pathetic loser where they were a genius.


    Sam said hello to them, showing his manners. They began eating their food.


    Sam went towards his room. He wants to help her sister with cleaning, but she said her friends will help her, so he does not need to help.


    Sames back to his room andys down. Sam started watching today''s news but after not finding any good news; he closed his mobile and closed his eyes. He will sleep sometime, then he will start his practice again.


    [Next day]


    Sam now standing at his house''s front door. He watches his sister leaving with her friends. Their destination is North city. They are leaving very early because they want to avoid traffic jams.


    Sam will also go to the dungeon, but he will go to the dungeon in the afternoon.


    Now he went to the training room. He still wants to train himself before going to the dungeon. Today, he mainly focuses on his spiritual technique. He wants to improve in his energy coating and for that; he needs to improve in his spiritual control.


    He also working on a theory for the second style of his Energy mode, but he knows it will take time. He can''t improve instantly. Sam needs to work hard for that.


    He starts his training by meditation. He was in a deep meditative state that forgot about the time., but he wakes up from his mediation by the sound of the rm. Sam previously predict that this could happen so he prepare an rm clock.


    Sames to the kitchen after fresh himself and starts eating. He has already called a taxi and told the taxi toe at 1 P.M.


    When he saw the taxi, he leave the house and approach the taxi. He sat down in the back seat, and start moving towards the dungeon.


    Sam was feeling very excited. He wanted to know how much he improves in these 2 days. This time he will use his Tri sword technique. His body was adjusting with the 6% gravity. In a few days, he thinks he will need to once again increase the gravity.


    To be continued...

 Chapter 39 39 - Improvement.

    You can see a teenager killing an enormous group of goblins with his sword. He was killing those goblin soldiers easily.


    It''s our Sam who was hunting those Golbin soldiers on the second floor. He was using his Tri sword technique. Suddenly, Ten goblin lords run towards him.


    Sam vanishes from his spot and appears in a different location. He was doing this trick by using his superior movement technique. He was actually using his moment technique to travel from a location to a different location, but these F-grade monsters'' eyes can''t detect his movement.


    Sam wants to finish the monster quickly. So, he quickly activates his Energy mode.


    A one-third of his spiritual energy moves towards his swords. He coated his sword with his spiritual energy. With his Tri sword technique and his movement technique, he ran quite fast and cut those goblins'' loads without giving those monsters a chance to react. Now he upgrades his movement technique. He has the advantage of speed in front of these goblins.


    In 5 minutes, he sessfully killed those monsters. He deactivates his energy mode and starts panting. Not like the previous time. Still, this mode consumes one-third of his stamina, mental power, and also his spiritual power.


    In perfect condition, he can activate this mode 3 times for 10 minutes.


    Sam collects all the loot and starts approaching arge tree. In this dungeon, you can''t find any flying monsters and because of this, arge tree is a safe ce to rest.


    He was near the entrance of the third floor. After recovering his energy, he will go there.


    [After a while]


    You can see Sam was now fighting the kobolds on the third floor. He previously killed 5 monsters whose corpses now tuning into dust slowly.


    Sam was using his Energy mode. He wants to finish his fight quickly. He was slowly reaching the limit of his Energy mode.


    Previously, 20 kobolds attack him together. He already killed 15 kobolds, now only 5 monsters remain.


    Sam was using his movement technique continuously beside his Energy mode. He jumped in front of the monsters and cleanly cut the first monster into two parts, then quickly lowered his head to avoid the iing attack. He then quickly jumped backward and throw two knives towards the kobolds that were about to attack him. The two knives pierced kobold''s eyes.


    The blind kobold roar and attack him madly. Sam easily avoided the blind kobold attack and killed him easily.


    Reaming three kobold attacks from 3 different spots. One kobold to his left, one to his right, and thest onees towards him straight.


    He punches the kobold thates straight and sends him backward, then he moves backward, easily avoiding the right kobold attack, while killing the left kobold using his Fast-cut. Sam didn''t give them any chance while appearing in front of them and killed them.


    He deactivates his Energy mode and starts panting. He almost reaches his limit. Still, he can activate his Energy mode one more time. You can easily see his improvement.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Until now, this was his faster record of killing those kobolds. He was very about his improvement. Previously, after using his Energy mode, he always be dead tired but now he can still activate the Energy mode one more time. You can say that he really improved himself.


    He sat down on the ground and start using his recovery technique.


    Sam wants to recover fast and leave this dungeon. In this dungeon, hepleted his goal, so it was time to go to the next dungeon.


    He brings out some food. Sam always bes pretty hungry after a battle, so it''s time to eat. If now he is still on the second floor, then he will not eat his food while sitting on the ground, but he was doing this on the third floor because he knows it will take 1 day to respawn those kobolds.


    He finished his food. Foods really him to recover faster. It took little time to recover. He got up from his spot and went towards the weird rock.


    He inspects the rock, and the pattern for some time, then he runs. He was now going towards the third floor''s exit.


    If he uses his fastest speed, then he needs 8 hours to leave the dungeon, but he can''t do that. He isn''t alone in this dungeon. Even he avoids fighting the unnecessary fight, he still needs to kill some monster thates towards him, and also if he uses his fastest speed then he will be dead tired.


    He didn''t want that, so he didn''t use his movement technique continuously. Still, his speed was quick. He didn''t use movement techniques continuously but only uses his improved speed to travel.


    With this speed, Sam will need 11 hours to leave this dungeon.


    Sam sometimes takes a rest and also eats food and also sometimes helps some new warrior without showing himself. He also didn''t travel in the night. Not that he will face any danger, still he wants to take some rest. One reason was that he has to recover his mental energy.


    Using recovery techniques, he didn''t fully recover his full mental energy; he needs to sleep, or he has to meditate. While meditating, his mind bes very clear and he can easily recover his mental energy, but in the dungeon, he didn''t want to sleep or didn''t want to meditate.


    The best thing he can do right now is that he will rest and use his recovery technique. It will be slow, but he will recover his mental energy. Unlike the previous times, he wasn''t that mentally tired. You can say that because he increased his mental power or int, he wasn''t that mentally tired.


    Sam can still run at his fastest speed even he didn''t recover his mental energypletely, but if needed, he can still fight. This results from his hard work. Hard work never fails.


    Sam started his journey when he saw the first ray of the sun.


    After a long 5 hours'' journey, he finally reaches the exit of the dungeon.


    To be continued...


    [A/N: Hey guys, I want to tell you I will be not able to publish for two days because I will go to my friend''s house and it will take a long 24-hour journey. Once again, I will publish a new chapter 3 dayster. Sorry, guys. Still, guys you like the novel, give some review. Bye, guys. ]

 Chapter 40 40 - Once Again, Something Terrible Happens.

    Sam finally reaches his home. He went to the bathroom, wasting no time. Sam needs to eat some food and then he can rest.


    Sam was nome resting his bed after finishing his food. He was thinking about going to the new dungeon tomorrow.


    [Sometimeter]


    Sam wakes up from his sleep. He got up from his bed and went to the bathroom to wash his face, then hees to the kitchen. He started making a cup of tea for himself.


    Today, he didn''t want to practice. You should not train every day, you should also rest your body some time. So, for today, he ns to rest.


    Hees to the hall room while holding a cup of tea. He switches on tv and sits down.


    Suddenly, the news channels start showing that many F-grade and E-grade warriors, who have serious injuries. They are now going towards the hospital.


    The monsters injure them. This happens in the capital city. Those warriors belonged to the same group. Those warriors went to a D-grade dungeon. On the first floor of the dungeon, you can see peak F-grade monsters, and because of this, those F-grade warriors went there.


    After clearing the first floor when they went to the second floor, this happened. On the second floor, many E-early and E-middle grade monsters attack them continuously. It all happens because of the increase of the monsters. The warrior''s group also didn''t expect that they will attack by this many monsters. Normally on this dungeon second floor, you can only find 20 to 30 monsters maximum and some E-middle grade monsters, but this time because of the monsters increasing, this warrior''s group attacked by 50 to 60 E-early grade monsters and also 10 to 15 E-middle grade monsters attack them.


    Nobody would expect this. They tried to fight those monsters, but in the end, they got seriously injured. It was a good thing that nobody was dead because some D-grade warrior helped them.


    The warriors association''s warriors now helping in sending them to the hospital.


    After seeing this news, Sam worries about his parents and his sister. Nobody knows the number of the increased monsters and it was a terrible thing.


    He knows his sister and his parents are powerful, and he just hoped that they can stay safe in this situation. He also needs to think about his safety because he will go to a new dungeon tomorrow and he doesn''t know about the number of the monsters.


    The number of injured warriors was 25. 15 warriors had a serious injury and 10 warriors had a light injury. Nobody would expect that this team of warriors will have to face those monsters.


    It all happened yesterday and today the news channels showing the reason for the injury. They also show that the doctors sessfully stabilized the injury of the warriors. Some warriors have broken legs or broken hands, but it was a good thing that nobody lost his/her hand or leg.


    Previously, many warriors survive monsters, but they lost their hands or leg. They didn''t die, but losing one of your hands or legs was a terrible thing. It can be the end of your warrior profession.


    Sam hopes that his family will not be in such a situation. He needs to grow strong so he can prevent things like this.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He also wants to apany his parents in their dungeon, and for this, he needs strength.


    Sam took a deep breath and calm himself down. He will not grow strong in one day. He needs to work hard to be strong.


    "I think this month was the most terrible month for the warriors. Two terrible incidents like this happened in one month and it was pretty bad news for us," Sam said in his mind.


    He once again watched the news. Now there is one question in everyone''s mind, "Why did the sage''s still didn''t show themself in the public? What are they trying to hide?"


    Sam also has those questions in his mind, because these increase monsters were not a good thing and warriors even got injured because of these increased monsters. But the sage''s still said nothing about this.


    Sam was feeling something bad approach towards the human and the sages were now trying to protect the humans and because of this, they didn''t show them in the public.


    Sam switch off the tv and went towards the balcony. He needs some fresh air to cool down in mind.


    Now it was evening, and you can find our Sam, who was busy absorbing the crystals. Sam wants to rest today, but that doesn''t mean he can''t absorb the crystals. He wants to reach the peak grade quickly and for this; he needs to absorb the crystals.


    Sam didn''t even reach the limit of his E-early grade, he need to absorb many crystals to reach the limit, and for this; he needs to go to the dungeon where he can find many E-early grade monsters, and the new dungeon was the perfect ce for this.


    So, before going to this new dungeon, he wants to absorb the crystals as much as he can. He needs strength to protect himself. Who knows how many monsters he will find in the new dungeon. You can say for sure that you remain uninjured in the dungeon, and aging strength wasn''t a bad thing.


    Sam can''t always use his Energy mode. He needs to upgrade all of his statuses so that even without the energy mode, he can easily fight with those monsters.


    He was nning to sell all the loot tomorrow and buy crystal boxes from it as much as he can, before going to the dungeon. Besides increasing his int and spirit, he also needs to increase his strength, agility, and mainly physique. Like previously, Sam could only use those C-grade techniques because of his system. Without the system, he won''t be able to use them. But even with system help, using those high-grade techniques puts a lot of pressure on his body and mind.


    Besides having a high potential, only a high physique can help Sam in decreasing the pressure from his body while he using his high-grade technique.


    He also needs to find a limit break, but he still has time, because he is now only an E-early grade warrior. Sam believes he will find a limit break before reaching the peak stage, he just some help fromdy luck.


    To be continued......

 Chapter 41 41 - Entering The New Dungeon.

    Sam finally reaches the new dungeon. This dungeon differed from his Base city''s dungeon. Yesterday he fall asleep after absorbing the crystals.


    Base city''s dungeon wasn''t a proper E-grade dungeon, because base city''s dungeon only spawned some E-early grade monster. No E-grade warrior wants to go there, but in this new dungeon, you will find many E-grade monsters from early grade to peak grade and you can also find D-early grade monsters.


    Sam didn''t enter the dungeon directly. He went towards the warrior association. Sam wants to sell his loot and then he wants to buy some crystal boxes before entering the dungeon.


    In every dungeon''s location, you can always find a warrior association''s branch.


    Sam enters the association. He search for the receptionist area and after finding it he went there.


    Sam bes surprised when h got closer to the receptionist area because he finds a receptionist that looks like Aria.


    Sam believed this was really Aria, so went there.


    It surprised Sam when he finds Aria here because he didn''t expect that she wille here. He didn''t find her previously when he went to warrior association. Sam thought she stopped working. Fortunately, Sam was wearing his mask and armor, so nobody can find his surprised look.


    Hees in front of her desk and told about selling his loots. He also brings out his loots.


    Aria looks towards the teenager that telling about selling his loots. She finds him familiar. After searching in her memory, she remembers him. This was the teenager thate warrior association wearing a mask. Wasting no time, she inspect the loots and told him the price.


    Sam sold the loots and collected the money. He also buys crystal boxes from her using this money. He leaves the dungeon after putting all the crystals boxes In his inventory. Now it is time to enter the dungeon.


    Sam didn''t notice, but Aria was looking in his direction. Aria, find the teenager quite interesting because he always surprised her with his improvement. She didn''t expect that Sam will grow this much in such a short time.


    If she wants, she can find his real identity, but she didn''t do that, because everyone has their privacy. Sam always wears a mask, which means he wants to hide his real identity. She still finds him interesting. She thinks that his age and her sister''s age are simr. One day, she will find about his identity.


    Sam never would expect that wearing a mask can bring him problems. He also didn''t think that Aria wants to find out his real identity.


    While Aria thinking about Sam already left the dungeon and he was in front of the entrance. He knows it will be risky, but he still wants to enter the dungeon solo.


    He looks around and finds many warriors. Some of them looked nervous, some of them also looked quite excited, and some warriors didn''t show any expression.


    Sam was also quite excited and also nervous. He was excited because he was entering a new dungeon, and he was nervous because he didn''t know the danger that he will have to face in this dungeon.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He entered the dungeon. He looked at his surrounding. This first floor looks like a big tunnel that was connected by 3 small tunnels and he needs to walk through those roads to find monsters.


    Sam selects a direction and starts walking. He didn''t see any monster even after walking this much. By looking, he thinkses to the center of this road but he still didn''t see any monsters.


    Sam suddenly feels danger from his back. Sam quickly jumped to another side. He looks at his previous spot and finds many arrows on the ground. He releases a sigh. Thank god he always stays alert in the dungeon. If he was even one secondte to jump, these arrows will definitely hit him.


    Sam looks around, trying to find the archer. He finds many humans like monsters, at the distance, who were pointing their bow and arrow in his direction and ready to shoot another round of arrows.


    He once again changes his location and quickly brings out his Night and shoots arrows continuously using his rapid shot.


    These arrow travels quite fast and hit them. The monsters didn''t have time to shoot the arrows when they be dead bodies. Sam knows he won''t be able to kill all those monsters. So, he runs in their direction using his movement technique just after he shoots arrows towards them.


    You can say, this is thanks to his superior agility, he could react this fast.


    Hees in front of the monsters and starts swinging his sword. Sam finds this monster wasn''t good at closebat, because he was easily killing them when those monsters tried to run.


    While Sam killing these monsters, more monsterse and shoot arrows towards him from a distance. Sam quickly avoids those arrows by jumping backward, but the remaining monsters who were busy in escape didn''t get the chance to react and those arrows hit them.


    Sam sees those monsters that were hit by the arrow, starts screaming. It looks like they were in pain, so they were screaming. They be dust after screaming for some time.


    "it looks like these arrows have poison. I need to avoid these at any cost." Sam thought as he was going towards this new group of humanoid monsters.


    Sam at first didn''t get the chance to see how those monsters look like. Now he looks at them seriously and finds those monsters have human-like features, but their body covered fully in hair. Sam didn''t know the name of those monsters. Sam can find their nameter, but now he needs to focus on killing them and avoid their poison arrow.


    He used his concealment technique to vanish from those monsters and run towards them. He knows this technique won''t be useful to those monsters who have high-grade observation techniques. Sam still uses this technique. He wants to take a chance and see if these monsters have a high-grade observation technique or not.


    Sam''s primary goal was to fight these monsters in closebat.


    To be continued...

 Chapter 42 42 - First-Time Life-Threatening Situation.

    Sam was now resting in a dark corner of the tunnel. He was fighting those monsters continuously. Those monsters form a group of 10 monsters and attack him one after another. You can say these monsters have intelligence. When Sam fighting a group, then another group will attack him. Until now, Sam killed 3 groups of monsters, but he didn''t think that this will be the end.


    Sam thinks he still has to fight 2 to 3 more groups of monsters. He previously hears from his sister on this first floor you need to face 30 to 40 monsters. This was before the monsters increased, but now he thinks he will have to face 50 to 60 monsters.


    Sam thinks these monsters can go through any of these small tunnels without going through the big tunnels that you say see in the dungeon''s entrance. He just wants to know, if he went in the other direction, then what will happen? Will he have to face the same number of monsters or he will face fewer monsters?


    Sam was now near the big tunnel and he will go to other small tunnels after recovering his energy. He didn''t find any exit in the direction he walk. He didn''t find any road ahead after walking for a while. Only finds big rocks that were blocking the road from advancing, and because of this, he came to big tunnels direction from where he started his journey.


    "I think one of the other two tunnels will be closed and the other will be open. So, only one small tunnel was open, and those monsters blocked the other two tunnels, and I just came to the blocked tunnel. This was a trap set by those monsters. Sigh, it was a relief that I have a high-grade concealment technique." Sam thinks in his mind. He releases a deep sigh. He didn''t want to fight those monsters continuously.


    Sam walks toward the big tunnel after recovering his energy while using his concealment technique. It was a good thing that he didn''t meet any monsters. He safelyes to the big tunnel from where he started his journey.


    He sees all the warriors going in only one direction with no hesitation. Sam thinks this group of warriors knows the actual road. In these big tunnels, you can see three small tunnels. One was on the left side, one was straight, and one was on the right side.


    Those warriors going towards the right side, where Sam previously chose the left tunnel. He wants to know if he goes to the right side''s tunnel, will he still have to face those monsters?


    Sam didn''t rush. He was still standing there and thinking about something. He was using his concealment technique, so nobody feels his presence while he was standing there.


    Sam was nning to go straight. He knows it will be risky, but he wants to go straight. Sam almost recovers his full strength. Because of this, he wants to go straight. Sam wants to know how many monsters will attack him if he goes straight. If the same number of monsters attack him as in the previous tunnel, then he can handle it.


    Sam goes straight, wasting no time. While he was going straight, he was very cautious about his surrounding. Even he was in his full strength, he won''t be able to fight many monsters at the same time. He knows his limit very much, so he was very cautious while he was going towards the tunnel.


    Sam has reached the very end of the tunnels. Like previous tunnels, he saw many big rocks blocking the road. He also didn''t see any monsters.


    ''I think because I was using my concealment technique, they didn''t feel my presence,'' Sam think in his mind. He was using his concealment technique, but he won''t be able to maintain this technique longer, because this technique puts a lot of pressure on his body.


    Sam reactive his concealment technique and waited in a corner of the tunnel. He also wants to find from where those monstersing.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He didn''t have to wait long, because many arrowsing in his direction. Sam avoids all those arrows bying in a different direction using his maximum agility. You shouldn''t risk your life hitting by all those poisonous arrows. He also brings out his Night and shot arrows continuously while running towards those monsters. The arrows hit 4 monsters and they be dead bodies.


    Sam still didn''t stop shooting arrows. He kills one more monster when hees close to them. Within a second he switch his Night with his sword and fought all those monsters. Sam wants to kill these monsters quickly because he knows the second group of monstersing towards him.


    Sam quickly used his deadlybo, Energy mode with his Fast-cut technique. He didn''t give these monsters to react.10 fast swings from his sword; he kills all those monsters.


    Sam deactivate his Energy mode and runs straight because he saw the second group of monsters that was ready to shoot him.


    Sam quickly activates his concealment technique, then runs towards the monsters. This time he didn''t activate his Energy mode, still, he kill two monsters using his agility. He avoids the monster''s attack, moving zig-zag.


    [After a while]


    Sam was now outside of the dungeon and panting heavily. He was leaning against a tree while recovering his energy. After fighting the second group, a third group monster attacked him. Sam fights those monsters, but when he sees the fourth group of monsters, he wastes no time and runs towards big tunnels using his concealment technique.


    Sam almost uses all of his energy when he was fighting the third group of the monster and, because of this, he quickly leaves the dungeon.


    You can say this was the first life-threatening moment he faces in the dungeon. He never faced this many monsters at the same time.


    "So, this was the reason those warriors didn''t go straight and left side," he thought.


    This time, he was really lucky that he didn''t have to face any monsters that were good at closebat.


    To be continued......

 Chapter 43 43 - Neo-Human.

    Sam was now sleeping in a motel that was near the dungeon. This type of motel you can always see near the dungeons.


    Sam bes very exhausted after battling the monsters. He doesn''t want to go home this early, so he rested for the day, and tomorrow he will once again go to the dungeon.


    [After a while],


    Sam wakes up from his sleep and fresh up. He brings out some food from his inventory and ate. He was thinking about his first life treating battle. You can say even he was afraid because this was his first life treating battle. Sam could have lost his life.


    In the previous dungeon, he faced a tough battle, but he didn''t face any life treating battle, where he could have lost his life.


    Sam was not a coward, but he belonged to earth where he didn''t have to face this kind of battle. From the first day, he knows he will face this type of battle, but he needs time to adjust to this type of battle. You can''t adjust yourself instantly.


    He finishes his food and starts meditating. Sam needs to calm down himself.


    Sometimeter he wakes up from his meditation and starts looking at his today''s loot.


    "


    *E-early grade strength crystals x 51


    [Helps you to increase your strength.]


    *E-early grade agility crystals x 48


    [Helps you to increase your agility.]


    *E-early grade physique crystals x 52


    [Helps you to increase your physique.]


    *E-early grade intelligent crystals x 43


    [Helps you to increase your mind''s power.]


    *Raw crystone x 49 (Yellow)


    [Materials for weapon making or any other things.]


    *Leaf of life tree x 40 (Yellow)


    [With this you can make life portion.]


    *Neo-bone x 45


    [This Neo-bone was from the Neo-human. It was wonderful material for crafting.]


    *Light-wood x 42 (Yellow)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [This wood was a suitable material for making arrows. It was very light.]


    *Eagle-eye technique (E-grade)


    [This technique helps you to increase your eye power.] "


    This time Sam was happy because he got a technique this time. You can say this time his luck was better thanst time. This technique will help his eye''s range to see a long distance. It will help him while using his bow.


    Sam didn''t rush to learn the technique. He first wants to absorb the crystals, then he can learn the technique. This will help him get familiar with this technique faster.


    Sam also leans the name of those humanoid monsters. We call them Neo-human. The sages give them this name. This monster has a human body structure, but its body full of hair. They not only use bows, but they can also fight closebat. Mainly high-grade Neo-human can fight closebat. They also have a very high intelligencepared to other monsters. They can learn faster than any other monster. Sam also finds Neo-humans always stay in group.


    Sam has to prepare himself to face these monsters, and he thinks when he will go to the second or third floor, he will face the Neo-human who can fight at closebat battle.


    Sam brings out the crystals and starts absorbing their essence. It will take some time to absorb all those crystals.


    At night, Sam stops absorbing the crystals. While absorbing these crystals, he notices one thing that he can''t absorb a lot of the same crystals at the same time. Not that he reached his E-early grade limit, but he still didn''t able to absorb many crystals at the same time. It was like his body had a limit of absorbing crystals. He can''t cross the limit.


    Other things he notices were that he can still absorb other crystals even when he reaches the limit of absorbing the same crystals.


    Sam noticed he can only absorb 25 same crystals, then his body needs to adjust with the new strength. After adjusting, he can once again absorb the crystals. So, he takes more time to absorb all those crystals.


    You can say he still has a second group of crystals he still needs to absorb. Even without absorbing the second group of crystals, it takes 4 hours to absorb all the first group of 25 crystals.


    Sam stands up from his ce and does some basic exercise.


    He was doing this because he need to adjust to this new strength faster. After adjusting, he will start absorbing the second group of crystals.


    Sam finishes his practice and fresh up himself. He walked out of his room and went towards the food area. He was feeling hungry, so now it was time to eat his dinner.


    Sam came back to his room after finishing his dinner. When he ns to lie down on the bed when his mobile suddenly rang. Sam see that was from his sister, so he quickly picked up the call.


    Sam and Gloria some talk with each other, then Sam cut the call. His sister inform him they finally reached North city and tomorrow they will go to the dungeon. Sam also inform Gloria that he was now in the dungeon but didn''t tell her which dungeon and after saying goodbye, they both cut the call.


    Sam lies down on the bed and thought, what will he do tomorrow. He didn''t n to go to the second floor because he knows he wasn''t ready for it. When he will reach the limit of early grade or around it, then he will go to the second floor.


    Sam also knows he didn''t have that much time, because his parents wille back soon. So, he wants to use all this time to reach the limit of his early grade through battle and gaining experience.


    San knows there are many E-early grades that could easily kill him. He can only kill those Neo-human because they suck at closebat. You can say it was his luck that helps him this time.


    Sam wanted to go to the right tunnel. He wants to know what will happen if he reaches the exit of the right tunnels.


    [A/N: Hey guys, now because of my college sometimes chapter release will dy. I try to write faster, but I need time to learn how to type fast. I hope you guys enjoying the novel. Bye guys.]

 Chapter 44 44 - System Upgrade

    You can see a teenager running towards the Neo-human. It was our Sam; he was fighting these Neo-human. This was the third group he was fighting.


    Sam this timepletely relies on his concealment technique to fight these monsters. This time, he wants to save most of his energy. Today, his primary goal is to collect as many crystals as he can.


    Sam onlyes to the straight tunnels. He knows he can not clear the two-block tunnels solo, because he didn''t reach the limit of his E-early grade. Sam can clear the two tunnels solo if he could use his concealment technique continuously, but that was not possible. His body feels pressure while using his concealment technique, and he has a limit of how much time he can use his concealment technique.


    ? Sam thinks if his potential rises once again when he will breakthrough, then his body limit of using concealment technique also will increase.


    He shoots two arrows towards the Neo-human after deactivating his concealment. Those two arrows sessfully pierce through two monsters'' skulls. Sam puts down his bow (night) into the inventory and brings out his sword while running towards the monsters.


    Sam, using his speed, cut 5 monsters in half. Only two monsters remain. One monster tries to attack him from his back. Sam quickly avoids the attack and punches the monster. The monster sends backward. Sam didn''t give him a chance to stabilize himself and attack him.


    Sam didn''t see thest monster near him, so he examine his surroundings. He doesn''t want to be hit by the poisonous arrow.


    Suddenly, an arrowes towards his head. Instantly, Sam crouches down and rolls over from that ce. He stands up and looks in the direction from which the arrowes towards him.


    Sam saw thest Neo-human standing on the top of a big rock and ready to shoot. Sam quickly uses his concealment technique and vanishes from his ce.


    The monster suddenly lost his target so he roar and tried to find Sam. While the monster was busy searching, Sam bring out his bow and shoot an arrow towards the monster. The monster didn''t move from his ce while searching for Sam, so the monster became an easy target for Sam. The arrow easily pierced through the monster''s skull.


    Sam releases a deep breath after killing thest monster. He sessfully kills four groups of monsters and he still has the strength to fight 3 more groups of these monsters. Sam was just now mentally tired because he used his concealment technique many times while fighting these monsters. You can say he was now physically fit but mentally tired.


    Sam went outside of the dungeon. Because he didn''t go that deep into the dungeon, so he can easily leave the dungeon and you shouldn''t rest in the dungeon when you have the chance to rest outside of the dungeon. In a dungeon, you shouldn''t only worry about the monsters, but you should also worry about the humans. Some humans are very greedy about your loot.


    Sam came back to the motel and went to his room. He will rest sometime, then he goes back to the dungeon.


    Sam bring out some food and ate after freshening up himself. He quickly finishes all the food and sits down on the bed.


    Sam brought out today''s crystals and absorbed them. He will go to the right tunnels this time, so he ns to increase his power as much as he can. He can just kill the monsters in the left tunnel and straight tunnel, but he wants to know what will happen if he goes to the right tunnel.


    Sam knows if he faced any powerful monsters in the right tunnel, he can still run away from there. He has faith in his concealment technique for that.


    Sam finished absorbing the crystals and preparing to go back to the dungeon.


    "Status," He said. Sam wants to know his status.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 300)


    Strength: 40


    Agility: 38


    Physique: 40


    Intelligent(mental power): 35


    Spirit: 04


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 21850 (Now you can upgrade the system)


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (D-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ] "


    It surprised Sam after seeing all the upgrade points he gets. Now, he was an E-grade warrior, so he rarely got a high upgrade point if he kills any F-grade monsters. Every Neo-human gives 200 upgrade points and until now he killed 80 Neo-human. Sam thought they will give more points, but he was wrong about that. He doesn''t know how those monsters give him those upgrade points, because of this he was don''t know why he only got 200 points for those monsters.


    Sam also notices that (+) only appears on the movement and concealment technique. His absorb technique and Fast-cut technique didn''t show any sign to upgrade. Also, he notices the line where mentions that he can upgrade the system. It was the first time he saw this line, so he knew nothing about it.


    Sam bes very curious about this system upgrade.


    To be continued....


    [A/N: Hey guys, I am sorry about not releasing any chapter these few days. I am doing my college assignment these few days and still need more days toplete the assignment. Because of this, I wasn''t able to release more chapters these few days. Also, guys, I know I made many mistakes in Chapter 1 and also other chapters. I will edit the chapters soon. Good day to you guys, Bye guys.]

 Chapter 45 45 - Moon Wolves And Bloody Trees.

    Sam was trying to find the upgrade option from which he can upgrade his system but found nothing.


    "Sigh, how the hell I can upgrade my system?" he asked himself. A piece of information suddenly came to his mind.


    Sam was now digesting the information. It took him some time to digest the information.


    It tells him he needs 5 days to upgrade the system. His system also needs 15000 points to upgrade. While upgrading his system, he won''t be able to upgrade any of his techniques, but the good thing was that he will be able to his inventory.


    Sam was nning to upgradeter his system. When he will go back home, then he will upgrade his system.


    He shifts his focus to his status. Sam can feel that he was near the limit of his early grade, then he can be an E-middle grade warrior.


    Sam closed his system window andy down on the bed. He ns to sleep for a while, then he will go back to the dungeon.


    [After a while]


    You can see Sam was now going toward the dungeon. He enters the dungeon. Now one thing Sam noticed was that nobody was going towards the straight or left tunnels, everyone going towards the right tunnel.


    Sam previously didn''t notice this. He also now going toward the right tunnel. Will he find new monsters? or will he reach the 2nd floor of the dungeon?


    Sam wants to find about that, so he also walks towards the right tunnel.


    It was a pretty big road. Sam was walking for a while still didn''t reach anywhere. He can only go straight or turn back.


    " Hey bro, why are you stopping? Let''s go, we just need to walk a little, then we will be outside of this tunnel." A warrior said to Sam when he was busy thinking.


    Sam turn back and see the warrior who was talking to him. He didn''t look like an old warrior, you can he has the same age as Sam.


    " Hey man, do you know how much we still need to walk?" Sam greet him and asked the question.


    "Hmm.... you can say we still need to walk 1 km, then we will reach the outside." the warrior answers Sam.


    " Thanks, man, for telling me. I am getting really bored." Sam said the warrior with a smile.


    " No problem bro," the warrior also replies with a smile and walks towards his teammate.


    Sam actually getting bored, because in this right tunnel he just walking through this long road. He didn''t find any monsters in this right tunnel. This was the reason for his boredom.


    [Sometimeter]


    Sam finally reaches the outside of this tunnel. He can seerge trees everywhere.


    "So, if you walk through this right tunnel, your final destination will be this forest." Sam thought in his mind.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam activates his concealment technique and imed in arge tree. He wants to find about how big was this forest.


    Sam looks around from therge tree but only finds trees and trees.


    Sam sits down on the tree''s branch and brings out some food. Sam roughly guess the tunnel was 10 km long and because of this, he sat on the tree. Not that it tired him or he was hungry, he just wants to observe the forest.


    Sam finds a team of warriors fighting some monsters. The monsters looked like Neo-humans. The warrior''s team was fighting them in closebat.


    Sam also heard many monsters'' roars from other directions.


    You can say on this floor every team fighting monsters. Sam also thinks that this was still the first floor because he didn''t cross any door that lead to the 2nd floor.


    Sam finished eating and jumped from the tree and start running. He didn''te here to rest; he came here to hunt.


    He also finds that in this forest you not only need to fight Neo-human, but you also need to fight two more different monsters.


    One was Moon wolf, and another one was Bloody tree. Moon wolves became much strong at night when you can find the moon in the sky. They also have a moon-like mark on their forehead and because of this, their name became Moon wolf. Bloody trees were a species of muted tree that can walk and suck blood from living things.


    Sam wants to avoid those wolves right now because right now Sam can see the sun going down and he didn''t want to fight those Moon wolves at night.


    So, Sam was running while observing his surrounding. He finds a group of Neo-humans in a tree that was ready to shoot arrows towards a team of warriors who were fighting a group of Bloody trees.


    Sam quickly brings out his bow and shoot five arrows continuously. This was his limit. He can only shoot five arrows continuously.


    Out of 8 monsters became dead bodies, while the remaining monsters shift their focus to Sam. They roar and were ready to shoot arrows, but Sam didn''t give them any chance to react. He quickly shoots three arrows towards them. They also became dead.


    He put all those loots in his inventory and once again start searching for monsters while avoiding the Moon wolves.


    Sam stops walking because he can feel some monsters were following him. Sam activates his concealment technique and bes invisible. He quickly came in front of those monsters and finds that they were the Bloody trees. 5 Bloody trees were following him.


    Sam didn''t that much and activated his Energy mode and coated his sword with spiritual energy and attack those monsters. Previously, he learns that these bloody trees were good at defence. So, Sam didn''t want to take any chance and activate his Energy mode.


    He was still using his concealment technique, so those Bloody trees didn''t react in time and because of this Sam easily cut down three monsters.


    The remaining two monsters roared after finding their teammate was dead. They spread their branches to find the invisible attackers, but Sam was one step ahead of them. He alreadyes to their backside and attack using his Fast-cut. The Spiritual energy coated sword passed through those monsters'' bodies like those monsters'' bodies has no resistance.


    To be continued....


    [A/N: Sorry for thete guys.]

 Chapter 46 46 - Killing Monsters As Much As He Can.

    Sam quickly collects all the dropped items and puts them in his inventory. He can hear some noise from a distance. He thinks that while he was fighting with those bloody trees, their fight attack more monsters.


    Sam activates his concealment technique and left that ce. He already deactivated his Energy mode.


    Sam was running towards a different ce. He just hoped he didn''t attract any moon wolves in his previous fight. Moon wolves are usually good at locating their prey and, because of this, Sam quickly left the fighting area.


    Sam was now running towards the right side because he can feel that if he goes straight or left, he will meet Moon wolves. Sam always believes in his instinct.


    Sam didn''t know that but his instinct was right, because if he really went straight or left side, then he will really meet the Moon wolves. On the straight road and the left road, many warriors now fighting the Moon wolves. These warriors are basically unlucky to meet those Moon wolves at night. These warriors also want to avoid the Moon wolves at night, because at night these Moon wolves be 4 times stronger and nobody wants to face them right now.


    Sam didn''t know about the Moon wolves. He was now searching for the Neo-humans or Bloody trees. He wants to kill these monsters as much as he can because tomorrow he will leave the dungeon.


    He predicts his sister will return in 2 to 3 days and because he didn''t tell her, he woulde to the new dungeon; he needs to go home before Gloriaes back from the dungeon. So, he has only today to collect crystals as much as he can.


    Now he really wants to be an E-medium grade warrior. He wants to fight those Moon wolves at night, but now he knows he didn''t have that much power. Sam can fight them in the daytime, but he can''t fight them at night. You can say these E-grade monsters be power as an E-middle or E-peak grade at night.


    Sam wille back here after he sends his sister back to her college.


    Sam find 3 Bloody trees were now sucking blood from some dead Neo-humans. Neo-humans didn''t have any high-grade observation technique and because of this, they most of the time became prey to those Bloody trees. These Neo-humans looked like humans and also have red blood and because of this, they were the favorite prey of those Bloody trees.


    [A/N: Bloody trees like to suck blood that has hemoglobin. Like humans, Neo-humans have hemoglobin in their blood.]


    Sam was walking silently towards those monsters. He didn''t want to rm them. He didn''te that close to those monsters. Sam brought out his bow and quickly shoots three arrows using rapid shooting technique. Those monsters were still sucking blood from those Neo-humans and were still unaware of the arrows. The Bloody trees weren''t good at observing their surroundings and because of this, they got killed by the three arrows.


    Sam collects the loots, puts them in his inventory, and left the ce. Sam saw a group of Neo-humans. So, he went towards them.


    Sam shoots five arrows from some distance, and after that, he quickly runs towards them. He already put away his bow and brings out his sword and also activates his concealment technique. He didn''t want to give them any chance to react.


    Sam''s arrows already kill three monsters while he kills the remaining two monsters using his sword. Like this, he continues killing monsters.


    [Day time]


    Sam was now outside of the dungeon and going towards the Inn. The previous night, he didn''t have any good sleep, so he needed to sleep and because of this, he didn''t directly go back to his home. He first wants to sleep sometime, then he will go back.


    The previous night, he mainly kills the Neo-humans and bloody trees while avoiding the Moon wolves.


    Sam already booked a room to sleep. Wasting no time, hee to his room andy down on the bed. Sam quickly falls asleep.


    [Sometimeter]


    Sam wakes up from his sleep. He only wakes up from his sleep because now he was feeling very much hungry. Sam freshened up and quickly bring out foods from his inventory and ate.


    ''Status'' While eating, he said in his mind.


    " Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (240 / 300)


    Strength: 40


    Agility: 38


    Physique: 40


    Intelligent(mental power): 35


    Spirit: 04


    Grade: E (early )


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 24500 (Now you can upgrade the system)


    Techniques:


    Absorb technique:<novelnext></novelnext>


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (E-grade) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (E-grade) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (E-grade) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Nobat techniques:


    Energy recovery (D-grade) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: You just enter the low stage of warriors ] "


    Sam looks at his status. He mainly looks at his upgrade point. He was nning to upgrade his system when he will go back to the house and he thinks this upgrade point will be sufficient.


    To be continued...

 Chapter 47 47 - System Upgrade And Intense Training.

    Now Sam was going towards his house because his sister wasing back tomorrow. While he was in the taxi, he kept thinking about the dungeon. He found one thing strange that why nobody goes towards the left road or the straight road. This made him very curious, and he wants to find the reason behind it.


    Sam at first thought about asking his sister, but if his sister asked him how he know about this. For this reason, he decided not to ask his sister. But then he didn''t have any warrior connection from where he will find anything rted to a dungeon.


    Warrior connection formed by the warrior association, where many warriors stay connected to each other by a social media app. there you will find many warriors from new warriors to pro warriors. But to join this warrior connection app you need to have a college id or a high-rank warrior id. Because of this, many low-grade warriors who didn''t able to join any college can''t join this warrior connection.


    Sam search online but didn''t find any satisfying answer. Now his only option was to ask his sister about this or ask Aria about this.


    Sam reaches his house at 5 pm. He went to his house after paying the bill. After this long journey, Sam was feeling quite tired and hungry, but first, he need to fresh up.


    [After a while]


    Sam was now practicing with his sword. He can feel that after visiting this dungeon, he improves in his swords technique. Sam was also using 10% gravity of the bands. He also improves in his physique.


    Sam keeps practicing until he bes fully tired. He stop his practice and went towards the bathroom. After fresh up, hees to the kitchen and brings out his dinner.


    Sam came to his room after dinner. Now he wasying down in his bed and looking at his system window. Now it was time to upgrade the system. Sam thought about upgrading the system, but know-how, because he didn''t any option from which he can upgrade the system.


    Sam releases a deep sigh. It was quite frustrating for him when he wants to upgrade his system but didn''t know-how.


    "How the hell I am going to upgrade the system if the system didn''t provide any option. It was not like the system will upgrade aromatically if Imand (upgrade the system)," Sam said, but the next moment he be surprised because he can see anything in his system window. Sam can only see a loading bar.


    " System upgrading-1%"


    Sam can only see this in his system window and he doesn''t know how much time will need to upgrade the system. Sam can feel the upgrade speed of the system was quite slow. He closes the system window. He can just only wait for the system to upgrade. In the meantime, he will train harder.


    Sam closed his eyes after nning what he will do next. Now he needs to sleep.


    [Next day]


    Sam wakes up from his sleep at the sound of his mobile phone. He checks the mobile and see it was a call from his sister. He quickly picked up the call.


    " Hello," Sam said.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Hello, Sam. What are you doing?" Gloria asked.


    " Nothing, sis. Just wake up from sleep." Sam replied.


    "Ok. Fresh up yourself and eat something. I wille back home today. Probably I will reach home at the night," Gloria said to him.


    Like this, they keep talking sometimes, and after that, Sam cut the call. They finish talking so now it was time to fresh up. Sam walks towards his bathroom.


    Sames to the kitchen after freshening up. Now he was nning to cook some food for his breakfast and lunch because he will be busy in his practice so he cannot cook after the training. For this, he wants to cook his lunch with his breakfast. After cooking his lunch, he can store it in his inventory, so he didn''t need to worry.


    After simply making his breakfast and storing his lunch in his inventory, he was not eating his breakfast. While eating, he was nning to visit the warrior association after the training. Sam was nning to ask Aria about the new dungeon. It was the best option for him now. He just doesn''t know if Aria will help him or not.


    [After a while]


    He starts his hard training. He also increases the gravity of the bands. It was now 11% gravity. Sam can feel that even without absorbing the crystals, he improved his physique. Sam knows it was because of his constantly using the gravity bands, even when he was fighting the monsters in the dungeons. Today he was nning to train in all of his techniques, from swords techniques to spiritual techniques.


    Like this, he continuously trains in his techniques. Even when he bes dead tired and exhausted, he just rests sometime to recover his stamina and when he recovers his stamina, he once again starts his training.


    At 2 pm he stop his practice because he can feel he was starving. He was training since 8 am and because of this; he was starving.


    Sam got up from the training ground and went back to his room because now he needs a fresh shower to rx and because of summer he drenches in sweat and he can only feel fresh if he took a nice shower.


    Sam was now eating his pre-prepared lunch while watching the news. After finishing his lunch, he was now resting on his bed. Because of today''s intense training, he was quite tired, both physically and mentally. It was the first time that he train like crazy, but Sam knows if he needs to grow stronger, then he needs to train like this. He needs to reach his limit and try to break it.


    But all of this he can doter. Right now, his only goal was to rest his body and mind. So he just closed his eyes and fall asleep.


    To be continued.......


    [A/N: Hey guys, I am back and I will try to release the chapter daily. Guys, I also need some time to edit all of my previous mistakes. Good day guys.]

 Chapter 48 48-Extreame Danger.

    Sam wake from his sleep and looked at the clock. Now it was 5 pm. He should get ready and go to the warrior association.


    Sam got out of the bed and went to the bathroom to wash his face with water. He also needs toe back before 8 pm because his sister wille, so he wants to cook something for her.


    Sam wore ck pants and a ck shirt and he also folded his shirt''s sleeves. You can say Sam was looking handsome in this ck dress. Now he didn''t have a thin body. You can say he was now quite muscr. Also, his sky-blue eyes and ck hair were a perfect match for this situation.


    Sam came out of his house and sit in a taxi that he previously called. While he was in the taxi, he opens his system window to see the progress of his system upgrade. He didn''t worry about anyone to find about his system''s window, because no one able to notice this system window.


    "System upgrading- 20%"


    After looking at the progress, he closes his system window. If his guess was correct, then his system still needs one day or two days to upgrade. His system was currently unable, but his inventory function still working. Now he was looking outside of the car''s window while listing to the song the driver was ying. Like this, he finally reaches the warrior association.


    Sam came here only to find Aria. He just hoped he will find her in the association or he needs to return home without the answer and because he was busy in his training so he didn''t even look at his loot and now because his system was currently unavable he didn''t know about the loot. Sam always relied on his system for counting his loot or telling him the details about the loot. You can say he was very at this side and for this, he didn''t want to do that manually. He will look at his loot when his system will be avable.


    He previously took out some of the raw crystone all put them in his low-grade storage ring. He can''t just go there and directly ask about the dungeon, for this, he previously prepares this.


    Sam also wore his mask before going towards the association. He enters the association and starts searching for Aria. You can say it was his bad luck because he didn''t find her after searching. He even went towards the receptionist area and ask about her, but nobody could answer him.


    "I think today was my bad day. Sigh," Sam release a deep sigh and dejectedly went towards the sitting area of the association. He will wait some time, then he will go back. While he was sitting in a chair, he also keeps looking at the request board. They filled this request board with many F and E-grade requests.


    Sam just looking at the request board casually. He just passing his time looking through these requests.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Unknowingly to Sam while he was busy looking through those requests, some people keep monitoring him. These people all are the shadow guard that Aria''s father assigns to protect her from any danger. When Sam was searching for Aria, from then they monitor his every action. They just want to find about Sam''s purpose. If they find any suspicious action from Sam, they will kill him. Luckily, some of the shadow guards know him, so one guard immediately informs Aria about a masked boy that was searching for her.


    While those shadow guards keep monitoring him, Sam tried to keep his cool and did nothing suspicious. Previously, when he faced the life treating situation in the dungeon, you can say he learned he has a superior sense or something like that. When he was in the dungeon, he just ignores this, but after today''s intense training he be sure that his sensory ability has improved. He tried to find the reason behind it but didn''t find it, so he guessed that because of the life treating battle, his sense improve.


    Now back to the topic, because his sense bes sharp, his danger perception ability also improved, and now if anyone asks him what was he feeling right then Sam will answer him extreme danger. That right, Sam was feeling extreme danger at the moment. Sam wants to find the reason behind but he knows if he does anything suspicious behavior then he will lose his life. Curiosity wasn''t a good thing. You can also lose your life because of it. So, Sam did nothing suspicious and kept observing the request board.


    Sam was waiting for the time when he will out of the danger, then he will immediately leave the association. He was trying to act calm. Still, you can see a rough breathing pattern.


    Sam doesn''t know this, but he was seriously were in an extremely dangerous situation because 9 B-grade warriors kept monitoring him and he really shows any suspicious behavior then they will kill him instantly. These shadow guards will kill you, then ask your dead body for the reason, and because of this, shadow guards differ from any normal bodyguard.


    Sometimeter, Sam finally didn''t feel the danger. He took a deep breath and release it with a sigh. Finally, he avoids the danger; he didn''t know what happen, but he didn''t have the interest to know the reason. Now, he just wants to leave the association quickly.


    Sam got up from his seat and drink some water, then he walk towards the exit of the association showing no suspicious behavior. He was just about to leave the association when he heard someone was calling him. Sam turn back and find that it was Aria who called him and waved her towards him. Now, Sam doesn''t know what should he do, should he be happy because he could finally meet Aria or he should worry because he didn''t leave the dungeon quickly?


    To be continued...


    [A/N: Enjoy the chapter, guys, and have a good day.]


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 49 49- Knowing About The Dungeons Mystery.

    Sam can''t just ignore Aria, so he went towards her. He knows he was in an extremely dangerous situation, but in front of Aria, no one will dare to harm him. Sam didn''t know her original identity, but he guessed she belongs to a powerful family.


    Sam also notices that Aria came down from the upper floor of the association. Normally, no low-level warrior has permission to go to the upper floor, because on the upper floors of the association, you can find the resting area for the high-ranked warriors, premium shops, and many other things that you can''t find on the lower floor.


    Thankfully, he has the mask, because Sam was sweating hard and without the mask, you can his nervous face. Sam releases a deep breath and tries to calm down his nervousness.


    " Hello, miss Aria," Sam said after iming down himself.


    "Hello, Mr, Sam. I heard you were searching for me?" Aria said while observing Sam. Actually, Aria was on the upper floor of the association in her personal room and talking with her teammate. Aria will go to a dungeon in next week with her team, so she was busy talking with her teammate. But, suddenly one of her shadow guards called her and said that one masked kid was searching for her. Aria be curious, and she quickly came downstairs.


    "Yes, miss Aria. Today I specially came here to get information about our Base city''s new dungeon. I didn''t know anyone who can give the correct information and I also couldn''t find any information on the inte, so myst hope was you." Sam, waiting no time, directly told her the reason he was searching for her.


    Aria got curious. She also wants to know what information Sam needed. She invite Sam to follow her to the upper floor because this was not the best ce to talk.


    Sam nodded and silently start following her. This was his second time going to the upper floor of the association. Previously, when Sam came here with his parents.


    They arrive in front of Aria''s room. Aria took out an id card. The room''s door automatically opens and they enter the room. Sam knows it was some kind of scanner that scanned her id card, it was just he didn''t see any scanner.


    Sam sat down on a sofa with Aria, who also sat down in front of him on a sofa. Sam, wasting no time, exins to her what he wants to know.


    Aria silently listens to him. She also became surprised hearing his questions, because she didn''t think that he didn''t know about this. Previously, she saw him in the new dungeon, and now he was asking these questions. She didn''t expect that someone will go to the dungeon not knowing any important detail and because of this; she be quite surprised. Aria knows Sam was a solo warrior, still, she didn''t expect that. She thought Sam will ask her another thing but after she listen to him she smiled.


    Sam took his time to exin the questions, but when he finished exining, he saw Aria was smiling at him. He didn''t know why she was smiling, but he knows for sure that she was smiling after he finished his questions.


    "Hahaha.... sorry about that, but I didn''t expect you will ask me this question. You are correct that you will find nothing on the inte, so listen to what I was about to tell you." Aria told Sam after calling down herughter with a serious face.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam had alreadye back from the warrior association and now he was cooking food for him and his sister. He finishes cooking the food, so he took off the apron and went towards the bathroom. Sam, fresh up himself ande to the hall room. Now he just needs to wait for his sister. When she wille, they can start eating.


    Now Sam was thinking about things which Aria told him. Aria told him that at first those two tunnels (left and straight) weren''t closed. When the dungeon first appears, the warrior association sends 3 warriors team for exploration.


    Those 3 teams choose 3 different tunnels. Like Sam, many monsters attacked the warriors who choose the left and straight tunnel, but they still keep going. They didn''t find any end to the tunnels, but then they notice that until now they were walking through some kind of maze. It makes those two roads much more dangerous because monsters keep attacking them. Fortunately, one C-grade and two D-grade warriors were present on each team. Because of this, those two teams coulde back from the dungeons. They also blocked the left road and straight road from where you will enter the maze.


    Finally, Sam knows the reason, why no one goes to the left and straight tunnel because the association informed them previously. Sam like to enter the dungeon solo, so this was the reason he knew nothing about it. Sam knew it was his fault for not asking anything about the dungeon to the dungeon guard or any receptionist.


    Samughed bitterly and sighed. He thought this was something mysterious and because of this, you can''t find anything about it on the inte, but now he knows the reason because the warrior association told the warriors to say nothing about it. This maze can make some people very curious and they will risk their lives to solve the maze and the warrior association didn''t want that.


    While Sam was busy with his own thinking, Gloria enter the house. She saw Sam, who was looking towards the T. V but she can tell he was not focusing on the T.V.


    Gloria walked towards him and called him.


    " Sam, what are you thinking?"


    Sames back to reality with Gloria''s voice.


    "OO... Sis sorry about that. How are you, Sis? I thinking about the dungeons. You don''t have to worry about that." Sam said to Gloria while observing her because he can tell that she was in a good mood.


    To be continued.....

 Chapter 50 [Bonus ] 50- New Feature Of The System.

    [One weekter]


    Sam was now training with his sword, but this sword differed from his previous sword. You can see, when Sam swinging the sword, mes were igniting from the sword. Gloria gifts him this sword. You can see a me stone on the sword''s handle, but this me stone wasn''t just some ordinary stone. This me stone was a C-grade material. His sister named this sword phoenix. Sam also inspect the sword and the result shocked him.


    " Weapon: Sword


    Name: Phoenix


    Grade: C


    Attack power: (200-250)%


    Durability: (150-200)%


    me power: (50-100)% "


    In one word, this sword was outstanding. Sam can''t always use his other sword, which was a disadvantage for him. His other sword only be strong only when he coated the sword with his spiritual energy, but when he didn''t use his spiritual energy, the sword''s quality stay like a normal E-grade sword. Sam also called his other sword yer.


    You guess it right, Sam''s system upgraded sessfully 4 days ago. Now he can see many new features in the system, and he loves this new feature. The system debited 10000 upgrade points to upgrade itself.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 300)


    Strength: 48


    Agility: 42


    Physique: 49


    Intelligent(mental power): 40


    Spirit: 05


    Grade: (E-)


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 500


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (1/3)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (85%) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (75%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (80%) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (50%) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (D-grade) (39%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (D-grade) (40%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (69%)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (65%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (76%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (D-grade) (40%) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (D-grade) (35%) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (E-grade) (80%) (+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Other techniques:


    Energy recovery (D-grade) (84%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: Now you look like a warrior.] "


    You can say that his status screen upgraded. Now Sam can see the mastery rate of the techniques easily. Previously, Sam only guessed the mastery rate of his techniques before upgrading them, but now he didn''t have to face this problem. Also, his energy mode was now showing on the status. Sam now can upgrade his energy mode with his upgrade point, and this was great news for him.


    The thing that made Sam very excited was his supreme upgrade technique. With this technique, he can upgrade anything. Sam can only use this technique 3 times, after that he has to wait 6 months to use this technique again.


    Sam now can upgrade his sword or bow anytime. He just needed upgrade points, because he can tell he will need a massive amount of upgrade points to upgrade his Bow or his new sword. The only bad thing was the cooldown limit of this technique.


    Sam already uses the supreme upgrade technique to upgrade his sister''s technique. Gloria got a spiritual shield technique, which was a C-grade technique and rare to get. You need to be very lucky to get something like this. With this technique, she can cover her entire body with an invisible spiritual shield. You can say, this was a good defense technique for his sister, which can save her life from many dangers. Sam, wasting no time, upgrades the technique.


    At first, Sam didn''t feel any change in the book, but after checking the book by his system, he can finally see that the technique really got upgraded to B-grade. To upgrade this technique, he uses 12000 upgrade points, but he didn''t have any regret.


    Sam now can only two-time use this technique. After that, he has to wait 6 months. So, Sam didn''t rush to upgrade anything, and even he wants to upgrade anything, he didn''t have that many points now. First, he needs to collect upgrade points, then he will think about what to upgrade.


    Sam had already finished his training, and now he was resting on the ground. He was already very closed to upgrading his Tri sword technique. He just need some days then he will upgrade his technique.


    Sam already upgraded some of his technique (like his me control technique). His me control and spiritual energy control techniques already reach the 100% mastery, so with no dy he upgrades those techniques. Now, he can cast me control technique easily and quickpare to before. Like his me control, his spiritual control also bes very easy. Now his control over his spiritual energy also increases.


    He also upgraded his rapid shot and multiply shot technique. With this upgrade rapid shot technique, his shooting speed also increases. Previously, he needed 15 second shoot arrows but now he only needs 10 second.


    Sam after some time, recover his energy and get up from the ground. He went towards the bathroom and after fleshing up; he went to the kitchen and call him to give him some food. You guess it right, his parents already return from their hunting 3 days ago.


    To be continued...

 Chapter 51 51- Now It Was Time To Hunt The Monsters.

    Sam was now going towards the dungeon. He already got permission from his parents to go to the dungeon. At first, his parents didn''t give him permission, but after showing them he already reached F-peak grade, they give him permission to go to the dungeons. He wants to stay low-key character, but something you needed to reveal your power.


    Like anyone guessed, Sam''s parents be shocked by him. His parents never thought that Sam will be an F-peak grade warrior this quick. They know their son''s potential very and because of this; they were worried about him.


    They were ready to visit the hospital to check Sam''s condition, but Sam stopped them and exin them carefully. He didn''t tell them all the truth. He told them he didn''t feel any pain or difort when he used his techniques. Because of this, he could use his absorb technique easily and be an F-peak grade warrior.


    At first, they want to agree to his request, but after hearing his exnation, they be surprised and decide to test his potential once again, because if only his potential increases, this could happen. They again check his potential and, as anyone can guess, they be speechless by seeing his result. It was a great shock for them to see Sam potentially be a special grade.


    They know how sad was Sam when he found out his potential. It was very painful for them. Now, his potential increases, so they were happy for him. So, they approve of his dungeon adventure. They know they can''t keep Sam home forever; he needs to go to those dungeons and fulfill his dream.


    Now, back to the present, he already reached the dungeon. Sam gets down from the taxi and after paying the money; he walks towards the association. He learns from his previous mistake, so he first wants to learn about the danger of this dungeon, and yes, he was now in the new dungeon.


    Sam told his parents that he will go to this dungeon with his new team. He knows if he told them he will go to the dungeon solo, then they will never give him permission. This was the reason his sister gave him the new swords to protect himself.


    Sam walks towards the dungeon guide and asked him many questions. The association appointed this dungeon''s guide to help the new warriors. The guide calmly answers him. Sam, after saying thanks to the guide, left the association.


    The guide was also quite happy to help Sam. The guide was only an F-grade warrior, and because of this, many warriors didn''te to him to learn about the dungeon, and with no information, those warriors entered the dungeon. It was quite hurtful for him because, as a guide, he wants to help those warriors as much as he can, but they didn''t want his help.


    ...


    Sam already wears his armor and mask. He activated the concealment technique and silently entered the dungeon. Sam, wasting no time, directly went towards the right tunnel. Sometimeter, he finally reached the monster forest. Now, he can start his hunting and collect upgrade points as much as he can. This time, Sam''s goal was to collect upgrade points as much as he can and be an E-intermediate grade warrior. Sam also already sold all loots and brought the crystals boxes.


    Now he finally got permission from his parents, so he didn''t have to worry about histe return and he can fully focus on his hunting.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam wants to examine his surroundings, so he was now standing on a top branch of a tall tree. He was inspecting the forest and looking for the monsters. He can see many warriors who were fighting with the moon wolves and bloody trees. Sam didn''t want to snatch other prey, so he was looking for a group of monsters, which he can hunt without disturbing other hunts.


    Sam didn''t continue to stay in the same ce. He was now jumping from tree to tree. He had already killed some bloody trees, but they were a small group, so it didn''t satisfy him. Sam was looking for a sizeable group of monsters.


    Sam was now going towards the left side of the forest. He already found a sizeable group of moon wolves. Sam brings out his bow and starts shooting arrows continuously. Sam didn''t know the exact number of wolves, but he guessed there were 30 wolves. His arrows already killed 10 wolves.


    The leader of the wolves roared after seeing the dead wolves. He orders others to search for the enemy. The wolves began their searching. Sam uses this chance to kill 5 more wolves and change his location. Like this, he kept killing the wolves and then changing his hiding ce.


    [After one hourter,]


    Only the leader and five wolves remain. Sam put back the bow in the inventory because he didn''t have any arrows. He already used all the arrows. He needs to collect the arrows, but first, he has to kill these remaining wolves.


    These wolves were only E-early grade monsters. Because of this, Sam didn''t face any problem while killing them, but Sam knows he will face E-intermediate or even E-peak grade monsters when he will go deeper in the forest or when he will go to the next floor.


    Now it was time to test his new sword''s power. He brings out his sword and started running towards the monsters. He throws two knives towards the wolves, which pierced two of the wolves '' eyes. It made them distracted and Sam use this chance to cut the heads.


    Sam suddenly crouches down and swings his sword towards his right side. The sword sessfully killed the wolf, which was trying to attack him. The other two wolves came in front of him. Sam quickly takes out the sword from the dead wolf''s body and swings the sword towards them. In this swing, he also uses the firepower of the sword. It was to burn them.


    (A/N: Hahaha... I will burn all of them. I am the fire lord. Hahaha.....)


    To be continued.......

 Chapter 52 52- Killing The Wolf Leader.

    Sam burns the two wolves to ashes using his maximum fire control. Now only the leader of the wolves remains. The leader kept staring at him with a furious gaze.


    Sam can tell this wolf was much stronger than those previous wolves. Sam doesn''t know if he can handle this guy, because he can feel this wolf was an E-intermediate grade.


    Sam knows that eventually, he will face them, but he didn''t think he will face them this quick. He was near breaking through. Still, he didn''t have the confidence to face an intermediate monster. Sam can only put the me on his luck because now he can''t back down from this fight.


    Sam puts down the phoenix and brings out his yer and activates his energy mode. You can say Sam was feeling excited about facing a powerful monster. Sam runs towards the wolf leader with his full speed and swings his sword when hees in front of the wolf. The wolf leader predicted his attack and tried to avoid the attack. Sam wasn''t able to finish him with one attack, still a cut mark appear on the wolf''s body.


    The wolf roared and instantly attacked Sam with his sharp w. Sam wasn''t able to react quickly and got hit by the wolf''s w. Sam sent backward. You really can''t underestimate an intermediate-grade monster. Sam quickly stable himself and instantly runs towards the wolf, but this time, he didn''t instantly attack the wolf. Sam activates his concealment technique and silentlyes towards the wolf. He swings his sword silently, but the wolf felt his and tries to avoid it. But this time, Sam didn''t want to make the same mistake, so he stops his sword midway and instantly swing in his left side with all of his power.


    The wolf leader didn''t even get the chance to react and his head fell down from his body. Sam deactivates his Energy mode. You can say the previous attack from the wolf''s w did heavy damage to his body. Sam was feeling pain in his abdomen and he can also see a crack in his armor. If the wolf leader hadnded a second attack on his abdomen, then he was sure his armor would break. Sam quickly collect all the loot and the arrows and left the ce.


    Sam needs some time to rest and recover his lost health and energy.


    ..........


    Sam was currently sitting on a tree''s branch and observing his surrounding while eating some food. He has already recovered his lost health and energy. The health portion really came in handy, he just took 10 minutes to recover his full health.


    Sam finished eating and get up from his seat. Now, it was once again time to hunt. He was now jumping from tree to tree. (A/N: Herees our Monkey-Man. Lol)


    Sam will hunt some more time, then he will need to find a ce for camp. So, didn''t want to waste any time. His goal was to reach the center of the forest because only then he will find the entrance of the next floor. Sam knows with his current strength he will surely die if he goes to the next floor. Still, he wants to see the entrance and also wanted to see the monster''s strength that spawns in the center area of the forest.


    Sam spotted a group of warriors group who were losing against a moon wolves group. Sam didn''t feel the aura of an intermediate-grade monster among those wolves. So, his excitement died down and he was ready to leave the ce. Suddenly, he stops his movement and thinks about something. He brings out his Night (A/N: his bow.) and looks towards the wolves.<novelnext></novelnext>


    A wolf came backward of a warrior and he was ready to attack while the warrior was fighting other wolves with his sword. Suddenly, the warrior feels danger from his back and looks at his backside. He saw a wolf who jumped towards him and was ready to bite down with his sharp teeth. You can say for a second the warrior''s mind gets into a nk state and wasn''t even to think anything. He just knows he will die from the wolf''s attack, but he can''t do anything at this moment.


    He can only just close his eyes and ready himself for the pain, but after waiting some time he didn''t feel any pain. He quickly opens his eyes and sees the wolf''s dead body and an arrow that prated through the wolf''s head. As you guessed, it was this time Sam shoot his arrow and kill the wolf. (A/N: Haha... Headshot baby.)


    Sam not only kills this wolf, but he also shoots down the wolf which the warriors were previously fighting. The warrior still didn''t see the second wolf''s dead body. He was currently busy searching for the warrior who help him, but the scream from his teammates brought him back to reality.


    Sam kills more monsters that help those warriors. You can say a huge load has been relieved from their solder. Previously, they were losing against the monsters, but with the help of the mysterious archer, they now think they can win against these monsters. They didn''t know who was this mysterious archer, but they were very grateful to him.


    (The Warrior''s group: Who is the mysterious archer?


    Author: Monkey-man.)


    Sam didn''t know any of these, but even he knows then he will onlyugh because he was now busy killing these wolves. He continuously shoots arrows and kills these wolves. After sometimeter, Sam and the warrior''s group sessfully kill all those wolves.


    If you all are thinking, why the hell did Sam decide to help them? Was this because he wanted to be a hero? Then you all are wrong. Sam just wanted to test his shooting skills and uracy from this distance. Sam was currently 600m away from the warrior''s group. He just wanted to check how many monsters he will kill and the result you can see. The training increased his uracy, and he was happy about this. If you all are thinking Sam was selfish, then you all are wrong. Sam wasn''t a selfish person and also wasn''t a kind person.


    Sam will help others if the other party''s life was in a danger but he never put his life at risk when helping others except for his family and friends.


    (A/N: But he didn''t have any friends, hahaha hah....)


    To be continued...

 Chapter 53 53- Entering The Inner Area Of The Forest.

    Sam was now going towards the loots activating his concealment techniques. He will only take his loot and arrows.


    The warrior''s group wanted to meet the archer, but Sam wasn''t like that. The warrior''s group didn''t notice but Sam had already collected all the loots from the monster he killed and left that ce.


    Sam was nning to go deeper into the forest, but it will take him some days. He once again starts his journey. Sam still has some time to hunt those monsters before the night came.


    ....


    Sam was now in a cave, and he ns to spend his night here. He found this cave sometime ago when he was searching for a ce to camp. Sam also blocked the cave entrance with a big rock that he found near this cave.


    You can say he exhausted himself and needs time to rest. After helping those warriors, when Sam goes deeper and deeper, he meets some small groups of monsters. Sam kills them, collects the loots, and left the ce. Like this, he continued his hunting of those small monster groups. This small group of monsters contains a maximum number of 20 monsters. He also meets and hunts some bloody trees, neo-humans. He didn''t meet any enormous monster group, nor did he meet any intermediate monster.


    "Usually, those E-intermediate monsters spawn in the center area, but why the hell do I meet an intermediate wolf in these outside areas of the forest? Who can answer me? Was my luck this bad?" Sam released a frustrated sigh. He knows no one will answer him. He can only ept his bad luck.


    Sam was now eating food. He can hear many roars of the wolves and also can hear the sounds of fighting. As you know, those moon wolves got strength and stamina boost in the night. Sam didn''t want to fight them at night because it will be a very exhausting hunt for him. He didn''t afraid of those moon wolves still; he didn''t want to exhaust himself because, as you know, exhausting yourself in the dungeon means putting your life in danger. Sam wants to stay in perfect condition when he will fight tomorrow morning.


    Sam finishes eating and enters his sleeping bag. Now it was time to sleep, but first, he wants to look at his loots, because he hopes he will get something good after killing the intermediate wolf. Previously, he didn''t check his loot, so now it was time to check the loot, then he will sleep.


    "


    *E-early grade strength crystals x 40


    [Helps you to increase your strength.]


    *E-intermediate grade strength crystals x 5


    [Helps you to increase your strength.]


    *E-early grade agility crystals x 46


    [Helps you to increase your agility.]


    *E-early grade physique crystals x 39


    [Helps you to increase your physique.]


    *E-early grade intelligent crystals x 36


    [Helps you to increase your mind''s power.]


    *Raw crystone x 50 (Yellow)


    [Materials for weapon making or any other things.]


    *Leaf of life tree x 40 (Yellow)


    [With this you can make life portion.]


    *Neo-bone x 45


    [This Neo-bone was from the Neo-human. It was wonderful material for crafting.]


    *Light-woods x 10 (Blue)


    [This wood was a suitable material for making arrows. It was very light.]


    *Wolf''s ws x 40


    [Materials for weapons.]


    *Wolf''s skin x 35


    [Materials for crafting.]


    *Teeth of bloody tree X 20


    [Crafting materials.]              "


    You can say he finally got something good. This rare light wood beast materials to make arrows from it. This will help Sam greatly. With this number of woods, Sam guessed he can probably make 20 arrows from it.


    Sam closed his window and close his eyes. It was now time to sleep. (A/N: Good night.)


    [Two dayster]


    You can see Sam kill thest wolf he was facing sometime ago and now he collecting all the loots. He left the ce after finishing collecting the loots. These two days he just continues to hunt these monsters. At first, when he was still in the outside area of the forest, he only faces some small group of monsters, but when he entered the inner area of the forest, he faced many sizeable groups of monsters. He also faced two E-intermediate monsters.


    Sam didn''t directly attack them because he knows how much dangerous it was when you faced an E-intermediate monster. Sam first kills those E-early grade monsters, then he faces those leaders.


    Sam was now in a cave and drinking health potions. He previously, lure out all the cave''s monsters outside and killed them. The bad thing was that his armor now had a hole in the abdomen area. It all happen when he was fighting the Bloody tree''s leader. He was now needed good armor or without good armor, he can''t those tough monsters.


    Until now, he hadn''t left this dungeon because he needs some more crystals, then he will reach the limit of an E-early grade warrior. He also ns to go to the ghost-dungeon next because, before the breakthrough, he wants to maximize his spirit.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 300)


    Strength: 50


    Agility: 46


    Physique: 50<novelnext></novelnext>


    Intelligent(mental power): 47


    Spirit: 05


    Grade: (E-)


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 10500


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (1/3)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (85%) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (75%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (80%) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (50%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (D-grade) (39%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (D-grade) (40%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (69%)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (65%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (76%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (D-grade) (40%) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (D-grade) (35%) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (E-grade) (80%) (+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Other techniques:


    Energy recovery (D-grade) (84%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: Now you look like a warrior.] "


    Sam already notice that the 50 point was the limit for the E-gard warrior and Sam just needs some more agility and intelligent crystals, then will reach the limit.


    To be continued.....

 Chapter 54 54- Two Leaders Battle.

    Sam was now watching a fight between two E-intermediate monsters. One monster was Neo-human and the other one was Moon wolf. They are fighting with each other over territory. The winner will take over the territory and they will kick the loser out. They have been fighting among themself for about two hours.


    Sam didn''t even move an inch from his ce because he didn''t want to be part of this fight. These two monsters were far more dangerous than you think. Just feeling their aura can make you feel fear. Sam won''t be surprised if anyone tells him to these two were close to bing E-peak grade monsters. They were out of his league. Compared to these two monsters'' fights, other monsters'' fights were looking like child''s y.


    Sam was silently looking at them and if you are asking why? Because he was looking for the perfect chance to finish them, he just needs to wait for the right time.


    The wolf leader suddenly howls. This wasn''t a normal howl because Sam, for a second, lost his hearing ability and he also sees that everything around the wolf leader send flying by a shock force. He can also see the ground around the wolf leader cracked. Sam was feeling dizzy. It takes some seconds to recover from the dizziness.


    The neo-human leader also wanted to resist this attack. Still, this attack sent him some steps backward and his head filling dizziness. Like Sam, the neo-human leader also needed just some seconds to recover, but the wolf leader didn''t give him any chance and instantly attack him. The neo-human leader send flying backward and knocked on an enormous tree.


    The neo-human gets up. He was bleeding from his head and had a w mark on his chest. He roared towards the wolf leader and start running towards him. This neo-human leader uses a gigantic sword to fight the wolf leader.


    "How the hell were these monsters got their weapon? Who gave them these weapons?" Sam thought of this question when watching their fight. You can say this was a pretty interesting question. Sam will ask his parents about this question, but he can do itter, but now he once again focuses on the battle.


    You can say the battle was itsst moment. Anytime one will drop dead by other. The wolf leader''s condition was also not very good. He also bleeding from one of his eyes. They both were at theirst moment.


    They both start towards each other. The wolf leader jumped and bite down the non-human''s neck and instantly the neo-human leader also punched him. He keeps punching the wolf leader, but the wolf leader didn''t let go of his neck.


    Sam also brings out his Night and prepares to shoot many arrows. He just needs to wait a little more time, then he will have his perfect chance to attack. Under Sam''s observation, he sees the perfect chance because the neo-human was hisst moment. He struggles sometimes under the wolf leader''s bite, but now he was hisst breath. He will die at any moment.


    The wolf leader releases the neo-human leader and starts roaring. He wants to tell everyone about his dominance. This was the perfect chance to attack them and didn''t let got this chance, he shoot arrows after arrows. Sam was using his Rapid shot and multiple shot at the same with a quick speed. He didn''t want to give them any chance to react and, as you can guess, those two leaders didn''t even get the chance to react when many arrows hit them continuously.


    Sometimeter, Sam stops his attack and sees those two leaders'' bodies turning into ashes. Sam releases a deep sigh and starts shooting the other monsters.


    .............


    Sam was now running towards the outside area of the forest. He still needs one day to reach the outside area of the forest. Previously, after collecting the loots he left that ce quickly because this type of battle attracts many warriors and he didn''t want to ruin his mood encountering this type of warrior.


    The good thing was that Sam gets two techniques from the leader and also a limit breaker. Finally, a limit breaker.


    ''Thank you,dy luck for these wonderful gifts,'' Sam said in his mind while looking towards the sky.


    (A/N: Lady luck is great.)


    Sam still didn''t check those techniques because he was in a hurry, he can check those techniquester. He keeps running towards the exit at his faster speed. He also keeps activating his concealment while he was running.


    Sam also stops sometimes to take some rest and eat food. He also avoids the unnecessary fight because he wants to reach the exit of the dungeon as quickly as he can. His next goal was the ghost dungeon, and before going to the ghost dungeon, he needs some preparation. Against ghosts, any type of physical attack won''t work and these ghosts can also affect your mind, because of this he needs some preparation.


    [3 dayster]


    Sam finallyes out of the dungeon and went towards the motel. He will need to clean himself and also needs a lot of food. Sometimeter, Sam was nowying down on a bed and staring at the screen in front of him. He was looking at the loots he got from the dungeon because he will sell the unnecessary loots to buy the spirit crystals.


    "


    *E-early grade strength crystals x 45


    [Helps you to increase your strength.]


    *E-intermediate grade strength crystals x 15


    [Helps you to increase your strength.]


    *E-early grade agility crystals x 46


    [Helps you to increase your agility.]<novelnext></novelnext>


    *E-intermediate grade agility crystals x 10


    [Helps you to increase your agility.]


    *E-early grade physique crystals x 39


    [Helps you to increase your physique.]


    *E-early grade intelligent crystals x 36


    [Helps you to increase your mind''s power.]


    *Raw crystone x 50 (Yellow)


    [Materials for weapon making or any other things.]


    *Raw crystone x 3 (Blue)


    [Materials for weapon making or any other things.]


    *Leaf of life tree x 40 (Yellow)


    [With this you can make life portion.]


    *Neo-bone x 45


    [This Neo-bone was from the Neo-human. It was wonderful material for crafting.]


    *Light-woods x 10 (Blue)


    [This wood was a suitable material for making arrows. It was very light.]


    *Wolf''s ws x 40


    [Materials for weapons.]


    *Wolf''s skin x 35


    [Materials for crafting.]


    *Teeth of bloody tree X 20


    [Crafting materials.]


    *Sonic st technique


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    *Strength buff technique


    [helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    To be continued..........

 Chapter 55 55- Buying A New Armor.

    You can see Sam was leaving the association. He finally brought crystal boxes as many as he can. Some time ago, Sam sold all the unimportant loot and brought the crystals boxes. He sold all the E-early grade crystals because now they weren''t important to Sam. When he will be an E-intermediate grade warrior, then those early grade crystals will be useless. Sam won''t be able to absorb those E-early grade crystals when he bes an E-intermediate grade warrior.


    Sam won''t be going back home because he was nning to go to the ghost dungeon. He has already talked to his parents that he will go to the ghost dungeon with his team. Sam needs to prepare because of this. He was now going towards the cksmith association. Sam still has some money and with this money, he was nning to buy good armor, but this time he didn''t want to buy heavy armor. Sam always wanted to finish his enemy as quickly as he can and for this, he relied on his speed, but wearing this heavy armor sometimes he felt ufortable while he uses his agility with full force. This was the reason. This time he wanted to buy something that will have a good defense and also it will not hinder his movements. Sam this time going into a ghost where he will have to depend on his agility to avoid those ghosts.


    Sam also needs to buy some arrows. He has a mind defense technique. This technique was a gift from his mother when told his parents that he will go to the ghost dungeon. She gave him this technique. It was only an E-grade technique, but Sam didn''t mind because of the system. He can upgrade it anytime.


    Sam reached the cksmith association and start walking towards the receptionist hall. He wasn''t sure if he will talk with Henry. Old man Henry was busy and didn''t have time to talk with everyone. Still, he wants to try his luck. He came to the receptionist''s hall and asked the familiar receptionist girl if he can meet Old man Henry?


    The receptionist went to Henry''s room, and sometimeter she came back with Henry following her. Sam was very curious about this receptionist. If someday he gets a chance, he will discover this girl''s true identity, but now was not the time. He didn''t have that much time if he want to go to the ghost dungeon.


    " Oi brat, what do you want? Quickly tell me I don''t have that much to waste." Henry said with an irritated tone. Sam can see that old man Henry''s mood wasn''t that good right now. Sam, wasting no time, told the old man his purpose.


    "Old man, I want to buy armor, which shouldn''t be heavy and have a good defense."


    Henry, after hearing Sam''s condition about the armor, bes busy in his thinking. Sam didn''t want to disturb him and just silently stand there. Sometimeter, the old man told Sam to follow him. Henry leads him to a big room. In this room, Sam can see many armors.


    Henry told him to wait and began searching. After some time, Henryes to Sam with two armor. One was metal armor and the other one was leather armor.


    "This metal armor made from the meta iron, which was lightweightpared to other metal armor, but it was very strong, and armor made from the meta iron has a good defense. I made this leather armor from the skin of rhinoceros. You should know that the skin of these rhinoceros was tough, and armor made from their skin has a good defense. Now you can choose any of these armors." Henry said to Sam.


    Sam looks at the armors and starts thinking. Both of the armors were good and perfectly fit for him. So, with no choice, he inspects the armors.


    "


    Type: Amor


    Name: Lightweight armor


    Materials used: Meta iron


    Grade: D


    Defense capacity: (100-200)%


    Durability: (100-150)%<novelnext></novelnext>


    Special ability: None


    ...................


    Type: Armor


    Name: Leather armor


    Materials used: Skin of rhinoceros


    Grade: D+


    Defense capacity: (125-200)%


    Durability: (100-180)%


    Special ability: None      "


    After inspecting the armor, Sam, without wasting time, choose the leather. Compared to the Metal armor, this leather armor has good durability and its grade also was ''D+''. Sam didn''t know what was this ''D+'' meant, because he never heard of any early grade, intermediate-grade, and peak-grade armor. Weapons, armors didn''t have intermediate rank in their grade (example: early grade, intermediate grade, peak grade.). This ''D+'' means D-peak grade. So, this leather armor was D-peak grade armor.


    ''I think I can see this hidden feature of this leather armor because of his system upgrade,'' Sam said in his mind. Since he ns to buy the leather armor, he asked Henry about the armor''s price.


    Sam bought the armor after giving the old 3 rare raw crystone. Sam actually didn''t want to sell this rare raw-crystone, but since he didn''t have 10 million dors right now, he sold this rare raw crystone to the old man. He also told the old man to take arrows from the light wood after giving those to the old man.


    Sam left the association. He was now going towards the train station because he will go to the North city and these trains were the fastest transport avable. It wasn''t like he has any supercar, so his only choice was this train. Previously, when his sister goes to North city, they were traveling in a supercar.


    .........................


    [At night, 11:30 PM].


    Sam finally reaches the North city. He wasying down on a hotels bed. Fortunately, he already booked a room in this hotel. After freshening up and finishing his food, he was nowying down on the bed and thinking about tomorrow''s adventure. He finally going to the ghost dungeon tomorrow. Sam also needs to absorb the spirit crystals, but he can do that tomorrow. Now it was time for a good night''s sleep. (A/N: Good night.)


    To be continued..........

 Chapter 56 56- Invitation.

    Sam was now absorbing the spirit crystals. He previously bought 4 crystals boxes means he bought 40 spirit crystals. Sam wakes up in the early morning, and after some light exercise, he absorbs the crystals. Sam will go to the ghost dungeon in the afternoon and before he needs to finish the process.


    Sam opens his eyes. He finished absorbing the crystals. It took him 4 hours to finish this process. Compare to other crystals, these spirit crystals take much time to absorb. Sam get up from the bed and went to the bathroom. He needed to fresh up himself, then will go to eat food.


    Sam finish eating and he was now going towards the dungeon. The dungeon was 500n away from the hotel where Sam was staying, so he was walking towards the dungeon. After sometimeter, Sam finally reaches the dungeon. He came in front of the dungeon and search for the guide. It was his first time in a ghost dungeon, so before going he wants to learn about the danger from the guide.


    Sam finds a middle-aged man who was talking with some warriors. Sam went towards him and wait for his turn to ask questions. He observes the warriors group while listening to the guide. Sam can tell they were also the same age as Sam and they were also preparing for the college exam. In this group, you can see 3 girls and 2 boys.


    [Sometimeter]


    The warriors finish asking their questions and were ready to leave. One girl saw Sam, who was waiting for his turn to ask questions. She didn''t see anyone besides Sam. So, she walked towards him and asked him some questions, because it was rare to see someone alone. Nobody wants to go to the dungeon alone.


    "Hey, are you alone?"


    "Yes," Sam said to her. Sam looked at the girl that suddenly came in front of him and asked him the question. She has sky-blue hair with a short hairstyle, wearing blue leather armor, and caring a wand. Yes, some spiritual warriors use wands for a long-distance attack. This girl has a cheerful aura around him.


    "Then why aren''t you searching for any team? You know you can''t go to the dungeon alone," she asked him.


    "Yes. I will search for themter." Sam answers her. Sam wants to ask his questions quickly, so he was walking towards the guide while ignoring the girl''s questions. He thought if he ignore the, then she will leave him alone, but he was wrong. The girl quickly once againes in front of him.


    "Hey, why are you ignoring me? So, like I was telling you can join our team, and we loved to have an extra member. By the way, my name is Rina. What is your name?" Rina asked him. Sam observed Rina carefully.


    "No, thanks and I don''t tell strangers my name," Sam said to her and came in front of the guide. Sam asks his questions to guide.


    (A/N: Hahaha ..... sorry girl.)


    Rina still wants to ask him once more time when a ck hair girl calls her back.


    "Rinae back. We don''t need that guy in our team."


    "Hey no-name guy, we will go to the dungeon 1 hourter. You can still join us then if you didn''t find any team." She told him and went towards her team.


    "Hey boy, join their team. They aren''t bad people. You shouldn''t go to the dungeon alone." The guide said to him.


    "I will think about thatter," Sam said to the Guide. This was the reason he had previously avoided talking to the guides.


    The guide releases a sigh and continues telling him about the danger.


    ..............


    [10 minutester]


    Sam was now in front of the dungeon while activating his concealment techniques. Now he didn''t want to hear lectures from others.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 300)


    Strength: 50


    Agility: 50


    Physique: 50


    Intelligent(mental power): 50


    Spirit: 23


    Grade: (E-)


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 15500


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (1/3)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:<novelnext></novelnext>


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (85%) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (75%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (80%) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (50%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (D-grade) (50%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (D-grade) (60%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (71%)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (75%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (85%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (D-grade) (49%) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (D-grade) (46%) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (E-grade) (81%) (+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Other techniques:


    Energy recovery (D-grade) (87%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, strength.] "


    [Note: Now you look like a warrior.] "


    He closed his status and enter the dungeon. It was time to be a ghost hunter.


    To be continued.......


    [A/N: Hey guys, if you thinking that I was making a romantic scene then you are wrong...... Hahaha. No romance, no girlfriend, no harem. If you are asking why? Because I am single and didn''t have a girlfriend. I am not a romantic guy, so my Mc is also is not a romantic guy. Haha hahaha...]

 Chapter 57 57- Dogs Who Like To Absorb Spiritual Energy.

    Sam enters the dungeon. This first floor of the dungeon was looking like an abandoned graveyard. You can only find dead trees in this ce. Only entering this ce gives you a chill. He was pretty sure that if he was the previous Sam, then just entering this ce will make him faint. Previously, he didn''t have any weak heart but it just this ce has some kind of negative energy that affects the human mind. If you didn''t have any kind of mind protection, then this negative energy will immediately affect your mind.


    Previously, the guide told him it was always night in here. Sunlight was the weakness of these ghosts. Sam knows physical attacks won''t be able to affect them, only spiritual attacks will harm them. Sam, this time, needs to depend on his spiritual technique and his energy mode.


    Sam notices many white things approaching him. These things approached him at a fast speed. When they came near him, he could see them. These things have a dog-like feature but have a scary look. They had red eyes, big teeth, and they were also bigger than a normal dog. They were the ghost dogs, F-early grade monsters.


    A red circle appears in both of his hands. Sam already casts his spell because he wants to finish them as quickly as he can.


    ''Damm .... dogs, because of you I will have a nightmare in my dream. Let''s see how long you all will survive under my me,'' Sam said in his mind. He can see 20 ghost dogs were approaching him. He throws two normal fireballs at them.


    Under these two fireballs, all the monsters got killed, or you can say they just vaporized. Sam collects the loot and advances. A question came to his mind suddenly.


    "Why were so many suddenly attacked him? Very weird."


    If Sam''s knowledge was right, then he heard theserge number of monsters attack no warriors just when they enter the dungeon. But then he remembers something that the guide told him.


    ''Beware of the ck dog. They can absorb your spiritual energy. It was their favorite food.''


    ''The guide told me this previously, but these weren''t the ck dog and I don''t think the guide was telling me about the first floor,'' Sam thought. He suddenly stooped his track, because he saw 5 ghost dogs who were approaching a warriors group. While looking at them, a very interesting thought came to his mind.


    "What if these white dogs/ghost dogs and the ck dog have simr power?" If it was something like this, then he knows the reason. Because he hasrge spiritual energy and it attracted these monsters and he thinks that many warriors also faced this situation but it just they inform no one. Because of this, he found nothing on the inte.


    " Sigh, I think in warrior connect I can only find this type of news. Let''s see how they absorb spiritual energy." Sam releases a deep sigh because he still needs to wait for 5 months, then he can be a part of this warrior connection.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam observed the fight between the warriors and monsters. If he saw the situation wasn''t looking good, then he can help them. He can tell these warriors were all F-grade warriors. There were two F-intermediate warriors and four F-early grade warriors. But, the monsters were all F-intermediate grade. It will be a tough fight.


    These warriors all were spiritual warriors. They cast spells as they notice these monsters. Their casting speed wasn''t that first. Still, those two F-intermediate warriors'' casting speed was better than others. One of these two warriors cast a big fireball, and the other one cast a wind cutter. Two F-early grade warriors also cast fireballs while the other two cast energy recovery on their teammates.


    It took 2 minutes toplete casting all of their spells. They release the fireballs and wind cutter towards the ghost dogs when they havee closer to them. Those two F-intermediate warriors were using wands.


    When the attacks hit the dogs, those dogs roar in pain. They sessfully killed two dogs and also injured the other three dogs. Those warriors backed away at this team. It was an excellent strategy because they were long-range fighters. They should maintain their distance from the monsters or they will be in a dangerous situation.


    When these warriors went to a suitable distance, they once again start casting. Those at this moment, these monsters still roaring. You can say these attacks from those warriors stooped those monsters'' track. But after sometimeter, those monsters were now howling in rage. It feels like their red eyes were glowing. They run towards those warriors at a fast speed.


    Those two F-intermediate warriors had already finished casting their spells, but the others warriors weren''t. Those two warriors had already released their spells while others were still casting.


    Those two warriors'' attack injures two dogs while the other dog still running towards them. All the warriors stop casting and start running separately in various directions. The ghost dog was still running straight because one warrior running in this direction. These spirituals weren''t that fastpared to these monsters. The ghost dog didn''t take long to catch up to the warrior. He suddenly jumped towards the warrior. The warrior wasn''t able to avoid the dog, so he crossed his hand to protect himself.


    The ghost dog bites down his hand. Sam saw this ghost dog absorbing the spiritual energy from the warrior. Sam knows if he didn''t interfere then the warrior''s life will be in a danger. So he instantly cast a mini fire ball and trows it towards the Dog. Sam didn''t cast a big fireball because it can harm the warrior. This mini fireball hit the dog and, by its impact, the dog sted away from the warrior. Instantly, Sam throws a big fireball towards the dog. The dog faded away while dropping the loot.


    [A/N: These ghosts are born from the spiritual energy, so like any other monsters they didn''t turn into ash, they just faded away.]


    To be continued ...........

 Chapter 58 58- Next Floors.

    Sam was now advancing towards the next floor''s entrance. He still didn''t reach the entrance because this graveyard was pretty big and he wasn''t using his fastest speed. He was thinking about the previous incident. Sam noticed the ghost dog was previously sucking spiritual energy from the warrior.


    "So, this is how they absorb spiritual energy from the warriors. These dogs were like a vampire, they just suck spiritual energy." Sam thought.


    Sam should be more careful from now on and avoid those dogs'' bites. He finally understands the danger of these dogs. Because those ghost dogs were only F-grade, Sam didn''t face any danger, but what happens when he will those ck dogs? If his guess was right, then those ck dogs will be at least an E-intermediate grade monster.


    Sam can see the next floor entrance. Many warriors also going towards it, like Sam, they also going to the next floor. He went towards the entrance.


    ..........


    Sam was now killing some ghost with his sword. These ghosts have the humanoid feature. You can only see the of those ghosts. They were floating in the air while fighting with the warriors. They were looking like a human spirits.


    This second floor was looking like a dark forest where the sun will never rise because he had previously made a fire torch he could see in this dark forest. Sam didn''t have night vision, so this was the only thing he can do right now. Sam never guessed that there will be no light in this dungeon, so he didn''t learn the night vision technique.


    Sam finishes killing the 5 ghosts that were tried to attack him. He collects the loot and starts advancing. Sam didn''t know the right path, so he can only advance based on his guess. He walked towards the left side of the forest because he can hear many warriors'' voices from this direction.


    While walking, he also thinks about the humanoid ghost. They were also F-grade ghosts but intermediate level. These ghosts can possess any warrior''s body who has a weak mind and doesn''t have any mind protection. They can make any weak mind warrior into a ve, and because of this, they were very dangerous.


    ''So, these dogs and the humanoid ghost were the only ghosts I can see in this dungeon. Thankfully, I have the mind protection technique or without it, I will be in a seriously dangerous situation. The guide previously only tells me about these two ghosts, so I think there will be no other ghosts, but he also tells me sometimes many warriors face a ck humanoid monster. I think that the ck humanoid ghost was more dangerous than the ck dog. Sigh, I need to be very careful on thest floor.'' Sam thought all of this in his mind while walking.


    After some time walking, he finally saw the warriors whose voices he previously heard. They were talking about how many ghosts they killed, how powerful they were, and some other bullshit. (A/N: They have the superiorityplex.)


    Sam quickly understands their character. They belonged to some rich family and they think they were the better. Sam sigh inwardly seeing their behavior and he was ready to leave while activating his stealth. It was better to avoid these kinds of people; you don''t want to ruin your mood for them. He activates his stealth mode and disappears from this ce using his light walk movement technique.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam was running towards where he saw some ghost. He didn''t want to waste time, so he quickly brings out his sword (yer) and killed those ghosts. Like this, he advanced towards the next floor''s entrance. He also meets some E-early grade humanoid ghosts and dog ghosts, but he killed them quickly and, after collecting the loot, he advanced towards the entrance.


    In this dungeon, you need to clear four-floor but Sam will not go to thest floor because he hasn''t reached the peak grade but if he goes to thest floor, he will face the E-peak grade ghosts. First, he will break through to intermediate grade, then he will try to kill E-intermediate ghosts as much as he can.


    After killing the humanoid ghost, he came in front of the entrance. He can see many warriors, some of them were going through the door and some of them exiting the floor. Sam can see some warriors whoe back from the next floor had paled faces, some of them shivering. Their teammates supported them while walking.


    Sam doesn''t know what happens, but one thing he was sure that he has to be careful or his condition also bes like them. Sam took a deep breath. He needs to calm down his mood. On the next floor, he will face E-grade ghosts from the early stage to the intermediate stage. Even sometimes, many warriors also face peak stage ghosts/monsters on this floor. Because of this, he was nervous. He wasn''t ready to face a peak stage ghost/monster.


    Sam walks through the entrance. He will not directly teleport to the next floor, but he needs to walk towards it. He needs to walk through these stairs and go upwards. In some dungeons, you need to go upward, and in some dungeons, you need to go down to reach the next floor.


    ...................


    Sam was now resting. In this dungeon, you can''t sleep openly, you can''t sleep in a tree, you need to some cover ce like a cave or you need to make one, and you need to make a firewall around it. These ghosts can pass through any solid object because of this you need fire around your creating ce. These ghosts fear fire.


    Sam didn''t find any cave around him, so he made a simple base. He simply makes a big hole in the ground, then with the help of trees breaches and leaves, he covers the hole. He then makes two holes in the cover area. You were all thinking that it was an idiotic idea. What happens if any warrior walks through your cover? He will fall down. But that won''t be happening, because Sam ces many fire torches around the cover area.


    (A/N: I watch a video where I saw a guy making an underground base and from there I got the inspiration. Hahaha.)


    To be continued....


    [A/N: Happy hug day guys. Those who have girlfriends should hug their girlfriends and those who don''t have girlfriends like me can only do one thing, they can only hug their pillow while reading some novels. Hahaha.]

 Chapter 59 59- E-Intermediate Grade Warrior.

    [2 dayster]


    You can see 3 ghosts were attacking a warrior. They tried to use their mind attack, but it didn''t work against the warrior. This humanoid ghost also tried to process him, but the warrior quickly jumped from his ce and trows two fireballs towards them. This was our Sam, who was fighting 3 E-intermediate humanoid ghosts. Those ghosts were very agile. They avoid the two fireballs using their agility, but Sam previously predicted this. He instantly throws a fireball on his right-hand side.


    The fireball hits a ghost, and 10 secondster the ghost faded away. You can say the fire was the natural enemy of these ghosts.


    The remaining two monsters attack him from his backside and left side. He instantly jumped from his ce and while he was in the midair, he turned around. Sam throws two fireballs instantly, but it didn''t hit the ghosts. Samnded and instantly brought out his sword while going towards the ghosts. He quicklyes in front of the ghosts and swings his swords. Sam kills the two ghosts.


    Sam deactivate his energy mode and panted. This was a tough fight for him because this time he almost uses all of his spiritual energy. Sam also fought 10 E-early grade ghosts before fighting these 3 E-intermediate ghosts. They all were very agile and because of this, Sam uses many fireballs.


    Sam drinks a health potion. This health potion was a low-grade portion, so it didn''t recover his full health. He quickly collect all the loot and left the ce. In these two days, he was continuously hunting E-early grade and intermediate ghosts, and as you guessed, he had already breakthrough. Now, he was an E-intermediate grade warrior, and because of his breakthrough, he could fight those intermediate ghosts.


    Sam was now resting in a cave. He found this cave sometime ago. You can say, this cave was unique because it wasn''t a natural cave. Some warriors build this cave using their earth spells. He found this ce while fighting ghosts.


    Sam ced fire torches around the cave because it was time to rest. You won''t be able to tell if it was a day or night. He brings out the food and starts eating.


    In these two days, many good things happen to Sam. He became an intermediate warrior, upgraded his Energy mode and energy recovery. He also upgraded his mind protection technique, and he was quite close to upgrading his me control.


    "


    Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (300 / 400)


    Strength: 55


    Agility: 51


    Physique: 52


    Intelligent(mental power): 51


    Spirit: 53


    Grade: (E) (intermediate)


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 8500


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (1/3)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can absorb from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (85%) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (87%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (85%) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (50%) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (D-grade) (39%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (D-grade) (40%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (86%)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (75%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (84%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (D-grade) (90%) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (D-grade) (85%) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (D-grade) (20%) (+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Mind protection: (D-grade) (41%)


    [It protects your mind from mind attacks.]


    Passive techniques:


    [A/N: I am changing the other technique into the passive technique.]


    Energy recovery (C-grade) (34%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.] "


    [Note: Now you look like a warrior.] "


    Sam uses 4000 points to upgrade his energy recovery while he uses 2000 points to upgrade his Energy mode. This Energy mode was only a D grade technique, still, it needs 2000 points to upgrade. Sam uses 800 points to upgrade his mind protection technique.


    Sam will leave this dungeon tomorrow because he needs some good sleep. In this type of dungeon, he wasn''t able to sleep, so you can say he was mentally tired. Sam also needs to collect other crystals because he didn''t have that many intermediate crystals. Right now, he wants to collect the spirit crystals as many as he can, because when he will leave this dungeon, he won''t be able toe back here instantly. Sam only has two more days'' worth of food. It was also one reason he wants to leave the dungeon.


    Sam finish eating and he was now meditation. Through meditation, he wants to recover from his mental fatigue. Suddenly he heard a voice of a girl who was screaming. Sam instantly got up from his ce and runs towards the voice. He felt that the voice was quite familiar, so he, wasting no time, runs towards it.


    Sam wants to think about voice, but it was not the correct time. Because if you heard the scream, you can also tell the person was in a dangerous situation. Sam was running at his faster speed, he wants to reach there quickly.


    The closer he gets, the more he heard many voices. Sam can also see many fireballs. He really needs to reach the ce quickly. One minuteter, hees to the open ground and saw.....


    To be continued...

 Chapter 60 60- The Great Fireball

    Sam hase to an open area and he can see warriors who were fighting ghost dogs. He can see there were ten warriors, but only six of them were fighting while four warriors wereying down on the ground.


    Sam quickly approaches the four warriors. He saw the four were unconscious. He didn''t see any familiar warriors. Sam quickly checks their pulse. He notices that their pulse rate was very low and they also bleeding. Sam can see w marks in their armor. In those four warriors, three were male and one was female.


    Sam quickly brings out the health portion and fed them. He needs to stop their bleeding or they will die of blood loss. Sam fed their medium-grade health portion, because of this, their bleeding stop after some minute. Now their life wasn''t in danger, so he can focus on the others.


    Sam sees odd things about these dogs. Five dogs weren''t properly white. He can see ck color in their body like their tail was ck, their head was ck and he can also see many ck spots in their body. Sam heard nothing about these dogs but he can see that these mix color dogs were more powerfulpared to normal white dogs. These dogs were E-intermediate grade ghosts where he can see only two E-intermediate warriors and the others were E-early grade warriors. Because of this, these warriors were facing the problem.


    Sam can see at least five mixed dogs and six white dogs were attacking these warriors. The intermediate warriors were fighting those mixed ghost dogs, while others were busy fighting white ghost dogs.


    Sam was approaching these warriors because he can see they were in a dangerous situation. When he got closer to these warriors, he saw two familiar people. He saw Rina and the rick boy. Rina was the girl who had previously invited him to join their group, and he remembers this rich boy because this one can make anyone irritated.


    Sam also finds other members of Rina''s group. They were all E-early grade warriors. He also sees the girl blond hair girl who previously called him arrogant fighting those mixed dogs. She was an E-intermediate warrior. The rich boy was also an intermediate warrior. These two were warriors fighting the mixed ghost dogs whereas Rina and her other teammate were fighting the White dogs.


    Sam quickly cast two huge fireballs and throws them towards the white dogs.


    "Quickly bend down you all," He also warned the warriors.


    The fireballs hit those white ghosts. It creates a gigantic explosion. Those warriors send backward by the shock created after the explosion. It surprised Rina and the others that Sam''s fireballs have this much power. Sam recently upgrade his fire control technique because of this he has this much power in his fireballs.


    "Idiots, why the hell you all are standing there? Now is the chance to attack them." Sam said to them. They just stand there doing nothing. They should use this chance to attack.


    Rina and the otherse out from their shock and realize their mistake. They were wasting their chance to attack those ghosts. Sam fireballs already killed three ghosts, now they only need to kill the others three ghosts. They cast their spells.<novelnext></novelnext>


    While Rina and other E-early grade warriors were casting their spells, Sam shifted his focus from those white ghosts to those mixed ghost dogs. He can see that the blond hair girl and the rich boy having a hard time fighting those intermediate ghosts. These two warriors were powerful, especially the blond girl was powerful, but because of the ghost''s number, they were having a hard time. Both of them use fire spells to fight those ghosts.


    Sam approaches them while casting his spell. He was also this time casting a new spell that he learned after upgrading his fire control technique. The spell was called the great fireball. This wasn''t like a normal fireball. This new move needs a significant amount of spiritual energy. Sam wanted to finish this fight quickly because of this, he want to use this move.


    Sam stops advancing when hees to a suitable distance. He put his hands together and a small fireball appeared between his hands. He was now moving hands in the opposite direction. The more he moves his two hands in the opposite direction, the more the fireball got bigger. The fireballs stop getting bigger when it reaches the size of a ser ball. Normally it looks like a medium fireball, but these fireballs contain much more powerpared to a big fireball.


    "You two quickly leave. You don''t want to be hit by this fireball." Sam said to them.


    These two warriors at first got surprised after hearing Sam''s voice suddenly, but then they saw a dark red fireball between Sam''s hands. So, they quickly stop fighting and run away from those ghosts. They didn''t want to be hit by the fireball because they can feel the dangering from this fireball.


    Sam, seeing them, runs away from those ghosts throws his great fireball towards those ghosts. The fireball hits a mixed dog, who cried loudly after hitting the fireball, send backward towards the other ghosts.


    "Release," Sam said loudly when he saw the fireballs go to the middle of those ghosts. Instantly, with a loud sound, a massive explosion urs. This explosion was so powerful that it send all those warriors, including Sam, flying backward from their ces. It was that powerful that it send Sam flying towards the forests from his previous ce. Sam felt pain after hitting a tree.


    After some time, he could stand up. He got up runs towards the previous ce. He wanted to see to end the result of his new move.


    Sam saw a massive hole in the ground where the explosion urs previously. He didn''t see any ghosts, which means they all got killed in these attacks. Sam expected that result because he felt previously that almost uses all of his spiritual energy. He guessed that previously; he uses almost 75% of his spiritual energy.


    Sam was now needed to recover his spiritual energy or he cannot fight any ghosts. He suddenly remembers about the injured warriors.


    To be continued.......

 Chapter 61 61- Outside Of The Dungeon.

    Sam notices that the explosion also sent those injured warriors flying in the forest. He quickly approached them. He needs to see their condition.


    They didn''t get injured by the explosion. Sam, after seeing this, releases a deep sigh. He thought they all got injured by the explosion. Sam also needed to see the condition of other warriors, but first, he collected the loot that he got from those ghosts. Sam didn''t take other loot, he only took the loot that he got after killing the ghosts.


    Rina and others weren''t hurt that much, they were feeling dizzy after being hit by the shock wave. The blond-haired girl and the rich boy were only slightly hurt. He brings out two health portions and tossed towards them. Both of them were feeling dizzy. Still, they saw that someone was in front of them and tossed something towards them.


    Sam saw them drinking the health portion and left the ce. Now they were out of danger. He doesn''t need to stay here because he knows if he stays here, then everyone will ask him various questions. Sam doesn''t want to deal with this type of situation, quickly leaves the ce, and goes towards his previous base. Now he needs to rest because he was feeling tired mentally after using almost all of his spiritual energy. Before leaving, he also told the blond-haired girl to leave this ce because her teammates need medical attention.


    Sam finally came back to his base. He sat down, leaning against the wall. He will stay like this for some time until he recovers some of his spiritual energy. Sam also brings out the food and starts eating.


    "I can''t believe I will get a technique." Sam thought when he was thinking about the loot he got from those ghosts. He also didn''t take all the loot that he gets after killing all those mixed dogs ghosts because he knows he won''t be able to kill those ghosts if those two warriors didn''t help him. Those two already did a lot of damage to those ghosts and, because of this, Sam easily killed those mixed ghosts.


    Sam knows his limits. He just recently broke through and wasn''t that powerful. Those two warriors were powerful because they could keep up those ghosts, even when they were in a tight situation. Still, he took the technique. (A/N: Haha, sorry about that.)


    [Next day]


    Sam was now on the second floor, and he was running towards the exit of this floor. He still needs three to four to reach the exit of this floor. He keeps activating his stealth. It was one of his favorite techniques.


    Sam still didn''t recover from his mental fatigue. Because of this, he was sprinting towards the exit. He also saw Rina and his team, but he didn''t see the rich boy''s group with them.


    "How the hell did they attract those ck and white dogs previously?" Sam wants to ask this question, but he doesn''t know-how. But the most interesting thing was that he could see Rina''s group, who were also rushing towards the exit.


    ''I think the previous day their healer got injured, and because of this, they were rushing towards the exit,'' Sam thought in his mind. Not everyone can cast a healing spell.


    Sam can see them but they didn''t notice because Sam was in his stealth mode.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter, Sam was eating food. He was running continuously for three hours because of this he needed some rest. Sam now can''t see Rina''s group because they were still approaching the exit. While he was running towards the exit, he avoided fighting those F-grade ghosts. Those F-grade ghosts didn''t drop any good loot because of this he wants to avoid them.


    "Sigh, I hope I at least reach the peak stage of E-grade before the college exam," Sam said inwardly. He shook his head. Now wasn''t the time to think about this. He continued his wasting.


    [Five hourster]


    Sam finally exits the dungeon. He can see it was nighttime on the outside. So, he quickly searches for a motel to sleep in. Sam also wants to eat some good food. He also needs to take a good bath because he can smell an unpleasant smelling from his body.


    Sam, after sometimeter, finds a motel, but the thing was that this motel wasn''t that good. Because all the good motels were full, he didn''t find any vacant rooms. After a long and fresh bath, he was now sitting in his room and waiting for the food that he had previously ordered.


    While waiting for his food, he also called home. He talks with his mom and dad. As anyone can guess, his mom just keeps asking questions. She didn''t even give him a chance to talk while she kept asking questions. If not for his father, who stops his mom, then he can guess he will not get any chance to talk.


    Sam told them he was safe and he would tell them about his adventure when he would reach home. He also asked about his sister, but his father told him that Gloria wasn''t at home. She was now in her institute and preparing for the annualpetition.


    "Good night Dad, goodnight Mom," Sam said to them and finish the call.


    Sam also called his sister. He talked with her sometime, then he cut the call. His sister was practicing seriously for thepetition, so he didn''t want to disturb her. Thispetition was very important for her because this year she wants to win. The previous year she was a semifinalist, but this year she wants to win.


    Until now he didn''t see his loot but he can do thatter because his ordered food just came. Now it was time to eat. When you are eating, you should only pay attention to your food.


    (A/N: Yup, only pay attention to your food while eating.)


    To be continued.......

 Chapter 62 62-Just A Normal Day.

    Sam was now going towards the warrior''s association. He needs to sell all of his unnecessary loot. Sam had many F-grade loots, like F-grade crystals and many other things. He also doesn''t need those E-early grade spirit crystals.


    " inventory"


    "


    *F-early grade spirit crystals x 16


    [Helps you to increase your spiritual energy.]


    *F-intermediate grade spirit crystals x 24


    [Helps you to increase your spiritual energy.]


    *F-peak grade spirit crystals x 26


    [Helps you to increase your spiritual energy.]


    *E-early grade spirit crystals x 40


    [Helps you to increase your spiritual energy.]


    *E-intermediate grade crystals x 19


    [Helps you to increase your spiritual energy.]


    *Ghosts dogs'' skin x 34 (green)


    [A special crafting material you got from spiritual monsters. It gives you some protection against spiritual energy.]


    *Ghosts dogs'' skin x26 (yellow)


    [A special crafting material you got from spiritual monsters. It gives you some protection against spiritual energy.]


    *Ghosts eye (Blue)


    [Special item that gives you the ability to see through any illusion.]


    *Sonic st technique


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    *Strength buff technique


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    *Mind control technique


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.] "<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam knows that those spiritual monsters always dropped lootpared to other monsters, but still he got two special loot this time. This mind control technique was an E-grade technique that will help him greatly and the Ghost eye was also a good item. If you equip the ghost eye as a locket or as a ring, then you will get the ability to see through illusion. As you can guess, it was a significant item.


    Sam, until now, didn''t learn any technique. He was nning to learn them when he went home.


    Sam reaches the warrior association. This association''s hall room was bigpared to Base city''s hall room. He approached the reception area. He can see many warriors in this reception area.


    ''Sigh, I need to wait. Still, this is my first time seeing this many warriors in a hall room. Haha ...pared to this, our Base city''s hall room was quite empty. Haha,'' Sam said in his mind. He then finds a seat and sits down. He will wait for his chance. Sam brings out his mobile and starts watching the news. These few days he was in the dungeon, so he wants to know if anything happened in these few days.


    Sam watched the old and new news, but he didn''t find any big news. Still, because he needed to wait some more time, he continued to watch the news.


    [After sometimeter]


    Sam finally got the chance to sell his loot, and after receiving his payment, he left the association. Now, he nned to eat something, then he will go to his house.


    It took him 5 hours to reach his home. He was resting in his room and waiting for dinner. Sam previously forgot to buy the crystal boxes, so he was nning to go to the warriors'' association tomorrow.


    "Samm .... dinner is ready," His mom said to him.


    "Coming, mom," Sam answered and quickly got up from the bed. He missed his mom''s cooking. Now it was time to eat fully.


    Sam came back to his room after finishing eating his dinner. Hey down in his bed and thought about something. Sam was thinking about how he should tell his parents that he was now an E-intermediate warrior. If he suddenly told them he was now an E-intermediate stage warrior, then his parents would grow suspicious of him. Sam knows it was a normal reaction. If someone tells you he became an E-intermediate stage warrior, where you know he was only an F-peak grade warrior, then anyone will get suspicious.


    Sam previously didn''t reveal this news because he didn''t know how he should tell his parents. Even as he exined to them, it happened because of his new potential. They will still suspect him. He has special potential and they know it, but they don''t know that he has a C-grade absorb technique and because of this, they will suspect him. You can''t break through your grade easily even if you have special potential, but where you have only an F-grade absorb technique and Sam''s parents know their son doesn''t have that much money to buy a higher grade absorb technique.


    "Sigh, I can''t tell them I was an E-intermediate grade warrior, but I can tell them I was an E-early stage warrior. Hmm..... now you think about it, it was an eptable n. So, yup it decided that I will tell them I was an E-early grade warrior." Sam thought about this. Sometimeter, he fell asleep.


    [Next day]


    Sam was now eating his breakfast with his family. Today, he was nning to rest his body. He won''t be training today, but he still finished doing his morning exercise.


    " I hope this year my baby girl wins the annualpetition," Hina said to them.


    " Don''t worry darling, I have full confidence that this year Gloria will win thispetition," Victor assured Hina.


    " Yes mom, don''t worry. I also have confidence that this year, sis, will win thispetition." Sam also said this to Hina, agreeing with his father''s words.


    "We all will go to thispetition like next year and support our Gloria," Hina said to them.


    "Yes, darling/ Yes mom." Both Victor and Sam said at the same time.


    Sam was now resting in his room. Sometimeter, he will go to the warrior association to buy intermediate crystal boxes. He was now just digesting his food. (A/N: Hahaha.)


    Sam suddenly called Gl¨®ria because he needs some Mytheno. He previously forgets about this, he suddenly remembers this. He needs Mytheno because he has some arrows from this Mytheno. Sam wants to see if he can use his Energy mode when he uses his bow and arrow.


    To be contained.....


    [A/N: Sorry guys for thete release, but my college was open and because of this I wasn''t able to release daily..]

 Chapter 63 63- Just A Normal Day (2)

    Sam finished practicing, and now he was eating his breakfast.


    Sometimeter, he was now going towards the association. He needed to buy intermediate-grade crystals. He was nning to go to the dungeon four dayster. Sam wanted to spend time with his family. Sam reaches the association, and he approaches the association hall room. This time, he wasn''t wearing his mask.


    Sam didn''t see Aria, but this time he wasn''t here for Aria, so he didn''t think that much and went towards a receptionist.


    "Excuse me, I want to buy some E-intermediate grade crystals," Sam said to the receptionist.


    "Yes, Sir. Sir, which crystal boxes do you want to buy?" she asked him.


    "Strength, agility, physique, intelligence crystals," Sam said to her.


    "Ok, sir, wait a moment," she said to him and brought out four crystal boxes.


    "Sir, each crystal box''s price is 100 thousand dors," she said to him after she brought out those crystal boxes.


    Sam, after thinking, brought eight crystal boxes. He brought two of each crystal box. After paying 800 thousand dors, he left the association.


    Sam decided he will walk sometime because today was the best weather for a walk, not that hot or cold, and also sometimes you can feel the light wind that makes your mind fresh.


    Some of his previous memories he remembers while walking. In his previous life, he and his friends liked to sit near a river and feel the light wind while they talked about various things. They also like to walk in this kind of weather.


    ''Sigh, good old memories.'' Sam sighs lightly after remembering his previous life memories. He missed his previous friends because in this life he didn''t have any close friends. In his school, everyone always likes to avoid him or make fun of him. They alwayspare him with his sister because of this he didn''t have any friends. Sam wasn''t an antisocial person. He just didn''t want to talk with them because of their behavior.


    Sam approaches the market area. He rarelyes here. Sam didn''t have any specific target; he just walked around aimlessly.


    After walking aimlessly, Sam was feeling a little hungry. So he walked towards a coffee shop and ordered a cake and a normal coffee. In this, he didn''t see many customers but from Sam''s memory, he can tell that this was a good coffee shop.


    Sam started eating his cake with his coffee while he watched the news on the shop''s tv. He didn''t find any interesting news, so he quickly lost interest in the news.


    Sam went back to his home. Today also, he doesn''t want to train. You can say he wants to rx for a few days.


    20 June 2122, this was today''s date. After ten days this month will end and he then only has five-month before his college exam. During this five-month, he wants to increase his grade to D-grade. If you are thinking this will be easy, then you all are wrong, because he first needs to be an E-peak grade warrior, which was also difficult.


    While thinking about all of this, Sam fell asleep.


    He wakes up when his mom calls him for dinner. After finishing his dinner, hees to his room and looks at his inventory. He has many techniques that he previously didn''t learn, now he was nning to learn them.


    " Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (1/3)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade D) (85%) (+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (87%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade D) (85%) (+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (E-grade) (50%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (D-grade) (39%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (D-grade) (40%) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (86%)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (75%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (84%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (D-grade) (90%) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (D-grade) (85%) (+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (D-grade) (20%) (+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Mind protection: (D-grade) (41%)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Sonic st technique: (E-grade) (+)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Strength buff technique: (E-grade) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    Mind control technique: (E-grade) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.] "


    Passive techniques:


    [A/N: I am changing the other technique into the passive technique.]


    Energy recovery (C-grade) (34%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.] "


    [Note: Now you look like a warrior.] "


    Sam learns the three E-grade techniques. Because he just learned the technique, it didn''t show any (%) of the techniques.


    Sam also tried to use his supreme upgrade on his dragon devour technique, but then he got a warning from his system that his body won''t be able to handle a B-grade technique properly. It would be great if he could just directly upgrade his potential with this supreme upgrade, but it was also impossible.


    Sam was nning to upgrade his bow and his sword or he can upgrade his energy mode. The best thing about this supreme upgrade was that if he upgraded any of the techniques that he already learned, then he will get a (100%) familiarity with the technique, then the technique will be upgraded in grade.


    Sam sighs lightly. He was watching the beautiful sky while thinking about his next dungeon. If he wants to be a D-grade warrior, then he has a tough road ahead.


    ........... End of the volume-1...............


    [A/N: Hey guys, sorry about that if you find many simrities with other novels. I also wrote this novel after getting inspired by some novels which are my favorite and I am trying to improve. And also sorry about the dy.]

 Chapter 64 64- Five Months Later.

    Five monthster,


    You can see a boy who was fighting an E-peak grade moon wolf. This was our Sam, who was fighting the moon wolf. In these few months, he bes a peak-grade warrior. He was fighting on the new dungeon''sst floor. Sam was fighting in the outside area of thisst floor''s forest because in this forest''s inner area he can meet a D-grade monster if he was unlucky.


    Previously, he went to the inner area of this forest. At first, many E-peak-grade monsters attacked him, but then one day he met a D-grade warrior. He thought he could fight the monster, but after fighting, he realized how wrong he was. D-grade monsters were no joke, even a D-early grade monster was more powerful than an E-peak grade warrior. He had no choice but to run from there to save his life. Because of this, he only fights with the monsters in the outside area and even when he went to the inner area to fight those monsters, he didn''t go that much deeper into the inner area.


    Sam quickly kills the moon wolf with one swing of his sword. Previously, He was fighting five moon wolves. Finally, he kills all of them. Suddenly, all the monster''s loot started floating and went towards Sam. This was because of his Telekinesis technique. One month ago, he got this technique from the ghost dungeon. It was nearly an F-grade technique, but Sam upgraded this technique to an E-grade technique. This technique was very helpful to him.


    Sam put all the loot in his inventory. He needed to leave the dungeon because his food stock was almost empty. He only has two days'' worth of food in his inventory. Sam has been on this floor for ten days. Previously, he brought one month''s worth of food but because of his increasing hunger, he almost empties his food in these ten days.


    .......


    One dayter,


    Sam was finally out of the dungeon. After cleaning up himself in the public bathroom, he went towards the restaurant area. From this morning to this afternoon, he ate nothing. He didn''t have any food in his inventory and, as you guess; he was hungry. Sam quickly went to a familiar restaurant.


    Sam left the restaurant after finishing earthing his food. After that, he went to the warrior association to sell his unwanted loot. After selling his loot and collecting the money, he left the association.


    Sam was now going towards his house.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally reaches his house. After greeting his parents, he went to his room. He needs to fresh himself and he needs to sleep. These few days he didn''t sleep that much and as you can guess, he was mentally tired and needed a good rest.


    Sam wakes from his sleep in the evening. He got up from his bed and went towards the bathroom. He washes his face with water to wake himself fully.


    Sam approached the hall room and saw that his parents were preparing to go out.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Where are you going, dad?" Sam asked his parents.


    "To the warrior association and also to the cksmith association. We will meet our old friends in the warrior association and then we will go to the cksmith association to upgrade our weapons." Victor answers Sam.


    "Dear, if we werete, eat without waiting for us. We are meeting our old friends, with whom we will go to the next dungeon. Because of this, we need to discuss our move." Hina said to him.


    "Sure, mom," Sam said to his mom.


    After saying goodbye to Sam, they left the house. Sam, after seeing off his parents,es to the balcony and sits down in his chair. Sam was thinking about going to the ghost dungeon next. Because he also needs the spirit crystals. These few days, Sam noticed that in the association they don''t have many E-grade crystals currently. Sam guessed it was because all the students were buying all the crystals.


    Sam can also buy them if he told his parents, but he doesn''t need them because he will go to the ghost dungeon. Sam can feel he was near the maximum limit of the peak grade and after that, he can breakthrough.


    Sam will go to the dungeon two dayster. His parents will go to the dungeon tomorrow. This time he knows the reason for their going. Three months ago, his dad sessfully became a B-grade warrior after finding a limit breaker in this dungeon. He heard from his dad that they got this limit breaker after killing the dungeon boss and the dungeon boss needs three months of respawn. It was a B-grade dungeon. Sam wishes for their sess. His parents were C-grade warriors for three years. Because they were trying to break naturally, they needed this much time. Sam doesn''t know how much time they will still need if they still want to break through naturally.


    Suddenly, he remembered something, and heughed. Some months ago, his parents told him ?they wanted to meet his team. At first, Sam was in a trouble situation, because until now he didn''t tell his parents about his solo hunting. After a serious thinning, he got an idea, and applying this idea, he got out of this troublesome situation. ''He will hire a team and go on a hunt with them, and after the hunt, he will show them to his parents,'' these ideas he thought about previously.


    Sam knows it was a dumb idea still he applies it and after the sessful hunt, he shows them to his parents. The most difficult situation was this time. What if his parents suddenly wanted to ask them questions about him and their previous dungeons? Sam previously told his parents that he has a great team. Fortunately, his parents only asked them some simple questions. Remembering this, Sam wasughing like an idiot.


    Some time ago, Sam reveals to his family that he was an E-peak grade warrior. They be speechless after hearing Sam, but then he told them some bullshit, that he meets an alchemist who knows his parents but didn''t tell his name. He gives Sam a pill that will solidify his foundation and he can easily be an E-peak grade warrior.


    At first, no one wanted to believe him, but then Sam told them more bullshit. [A/N: He bes a bullshit king.]


    To be continued..........

 Chapter 65 65-Unexpected Guest

    You can see that Sam was currently busy absorbing the crystals. Sam only has twenty more days before his uing exam.


    Two hourster,


    Sam opens his eyes. He sessfully absorbed all the crystals. Sam just needs a little more push to upgrade his grade.


    "Status," Sam said in his mind.


    "Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 198


    Agility: 194


    Physique: 195


    Intelligent(mental power): 197


    Spirit: 190


    Grade: (E +) (peak)


    Potential: Special


    Upgrade point: 28500


    " Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (Cooldown: 3 months)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (15%)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (100%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (20%)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (D-grade) (70%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (19%)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (20%)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (100%)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (75%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (100%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (40%)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (C-grade) (55%)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (35%)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade) (10%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Strength buff technique: (D-grade) (16%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    Mind control technique: (D-grade) (18%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.]


    Telekinesis: (E-grade) (+) (50%)


    [Helps you to control objects around you.]


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (C-grade) (34%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.]


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (4%)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade) (1%)


    [This technique helps you to increase your vision power and also gives you a pair of spiritual eyes. It also helps you to see many things that you can''t see with your normal vision. ]


    [Note: Now you are a low-grade warrior.] "


    As you can guess, when Sam''s status point will reach the mark of 200, then he can try to break through. He just needs a little more crystals.


    Sam also uses his supreme upgrade to upgrade his Energy mode technique and his sword. He previously thought of not using the supreme upgrade, but then, after serious thinking, he used it. Because he only needs to wait six months, then he can once again use his upgrade technique.


    Sam upgrades his energy mode because it was his most powerful technique.


    Sam also learns a new eye technique. Previously, Sam got an eagle eye technique which he didn''t learn at that moment because at that moment he doesn''t need that technique. So, he just keeps the technique in his inventory. But a few months ago, he got this spirit eye technique from his mom.


    When his mom gave him this technique, it was only an E-grade technique, but now, as you can see, he upgraded this technique to C-grade. Not only that, as you can see, he almost upgraded all of his techniques to C-grade.


    You can say these few months were beneficial for him. Now, he just needs to reach the limit of this grade.


    Sam also now has arrows that were made of mytheno, and as you guess, he can coat the arrows with his spiritual power. Now, with the help of these new arrows, he easily kills powerful monsters from a distance.


    Sam also worked on his Energy mode''s second move, but until now he wasn''t sessful. Spiritual power is one of the most mysterious things on the, so, naturally, it will take time to make new techniques that involve spiritual power.


    Sam also now uses the 40% gravity of the gravity bracelet. You can say he improves a lot.


    Sam finished absorbing the crystals and closed the system window. He got up from his seat and went to the kitchen to eat some food.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam was watching the news when he heard the doorbell. After opening the door, Sam bes speechless after seeing the person, because the person was Alena, his sister''s master.


    Sam quickly came back to his senses and asked her, " Hello, miss. What are you doing here?"


    A direct question, but after saying that, Sam realized he was too direct. So he quickly changed the question,


    "No, no, no.... miss, I mean, do you want to see my parents? But they weren''t home at the moment. You cane inside and wait for them."


    "Indeed, I came here to talk with your parents," Alena said this and, wasting no time, went inside the house.


    ''Did mom and dad call her for this dungeon raid?'' Sam thinks in his mind. He also went to the hall room, where Alena was currently sitting down on the sofa and watching the news.


    This was a very awkward moment for Sam. Previously, he didn''t talk with her that much, so he didn''t know her that much.


    "Miss, do you like to eat or drink something?" Sam asked her.


    "Tea," Alena answers him without looking at him. Her only focus was on the tv. Hearing her direct and emotionless answer, Sam can onlyugh bitterly.


    To be continued_______________________

 Chapter 66 66 - Coming Back To The Ghost Dungeon.

    Sam was now in his room. He needs to absorb the remaining crystals except for the spirit crystal. He will go to the ghost dungeon for the spirit crystal. Sometime earlier, his mom and dad returned from their meeting, and because of this, he could leave the awkward atmosphere. Alena didn''t talk that much and Sam also didn''t talk with her that much.


    He absorbed the crystals one by one. You can see light particles from those crystals entering his body. This process didn''t take that long because two hourster, he finished absorbing the crystals.


    Sam opens his eyes and gets up from his bed. He was feeling powerful. Wasting no time, he goes to the training field and starts exercising to get used to his new power. He can feel the barrier that he needs to break to be a D-grade warrior.


    After finishing his training, hees to the bathroom to freshen up himself. Now he was feeling hungry. He needed to eat something. He went to the kitchen for the food. If his mother didn''t make any food, then he needs to cook it himself because he forgets to order food online.


    Sam saw no one in the kitchen. So, he went towards the hall room. He saw his mom, dad, and Alena were busy talking about the dungeon.


    "Mom, did you make any food? I am feeling quite hungry right now and I also forget to order food." Sam asked his mother.


    "O Sam, sorry darling, I forgot about the time. Just wait some time. I will make you some food." His mom told him and quickly got up from his seat. She directly went towards the kitchen.


    Sam was also about to go toward the kitchen when his father called him. Sam went towards his father. He sits down on the sofa.


    "Sam, how was your preparation for the exam? You were previously busy in the dungeon adventure, so I didn''t get the chance to ask you." Victor asks him.


    Sam previously told his family that somehow he could break the barrier and be an E-grade warrior. So, Victor takes him to the hospital to check up on his body''s condition because he has only mortal grade potential. But after that check-up, Victor, his wife, and also his daughter be shocked because the Dr told them that Sam didn''t have a mortal grade potential, but has a special grade potential. Sam''s full family bes happy. Previously, because of this mortal grade potential, Sam lost his wish to be a warrior, but now he can be one.


    "I am confident dad, I will pass this exam with a good number." Sam confidently said to his dad.


    "Good, that you have confidence, but you should never underestimate your enemy in the field," Victor said to him andughed.


    "Yes, Dad," Sam said to his father. Like this father and son duo continuously chatting about various things that they encounter in the dungeon. He was talking about his team to his dad, and how they faced monsters in the dungeon. He can''t say to his family that he was a solo hunter and the teammate they previously mate only was a temporary team for him.


    Sometimeter, his mom called them for dinner. Alena previously went to the kitchen to help his mom. Father and son duo went to the dining area and sat down.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ______________________________________________________________


    Two dayster,


    Sam was preparing food for his adventure in the ghost dungeon. Aftering back from this dungeon, he can finally be a D-early grade warrior. Except for his spirit status, his other status was in their highest number. He was taking as much food as he could. Right now, it was time to go to the dungeon.


    Sam finally reaches the dungeon, and after paying the money, he approaches the dungeon. After showing his id to the dungeon guard, he enters the dungeon.


    Wasting no time, he speeds up. This F-grade ghost wasn''t his target. His primary target was those E-peak grade ghosts and for this, he needs to go to the fourth floor.


    Because all his techniques reached C-grade, they became powerful. He activated his concealment technique and, like a phantom, he was traveling. No warriors and no monsters noticed him.


    After eight hours of journey, he reaches the third floor. He still needs to cross this floor, then he can reach the fourth floor. Before that, he needs to rest. So he searches for a cave or something like where he can rest. Previously, many times hees here and because of this, he knows the location of the caves on this floor where he previously rested.


    But you say Sam''s luck was quite bad today because warriors upied those caves. But he didn''t give up. He went to the other caves to see if someone also upied those caves. After a long search, he finally found an empty cave, but this cave was smallpared to other caves. But for Sam, this was perfect. He lights up the fire torches and puts them around the cave and outside the area. These fire torches will keep the ghost away from the camp.


    Sam sat down on the floor and brought out some food to eat. In this dungeon, you can only find nighttime. So you can''t guess the time in the dungeon. He was eating food when suddenly he heard some footsteps. Sam bes alert. He brings out his sword while looking toward the cave''s entrance. He was ready to attack anytime.


    Those footsteps are getting closer and closer. Sometimeter, Sam can see three shadows that were getting closer and closer to the entrance, and sometimeter he can three-person who were standing in front of the cave entrance.


    "Anyone here? We didn''t have any ill intentions. We just want to rest in the cave for some time." Sam hears a girl''s voice who asked him this question. He doesn''t know why, but he has a feeling that he knows this voice.


    _______________To be continued _________________


    [A/N: Hey guys, sorry for theter update. Hope you guys enjoyed this chapter.]

 Chapter 67 [Bonus ] 67 - Black Dog

    This cave doesn''t belong to anyone, so Sam lets them enter. But he didn''t drop his guard. He sat in a corner of the cave and silently watched them. You shouldn''t let your guard down because some warriors harm other warriors for their loot and other things.


    Sam brings out his unfinished food once again and eats. He previously didn''t get the chance to finish his food. So, now he can finish his food.


    While Sam was eating in a corner of the cave, one warrior brought out food and shared it with the other. They also started eating. They didn''t talk that much while eating.


    Sam thinks they are also keeping their guard up against him. It was a natural thing to do. He doesn''t know why, but he was feeling odd after seeing these three warriors. They were wearing long coats that covered their face and because of this; he didn''t get the chance to see their faces. But if you see their body features, then you can tell that these three warriors were girls.


    Sam was silently observing them, but sometimeter, he closed his eyes to get some. His primary goal was to get some rest, then he will leave the cave.


    "Where are you going?" suddenly one girl asked him. Sam opens his eyes and looks toward the girl, who asked him the question. He can''t really see her face, but he can tell she has a curious expression on her face.


    "Fourth floor," He said to her and once again closed his eyes. He wasn''t interested in talking.


    "Then you should be careful because recently some D-grade ghost came towards the outside area of the dead forest on the fourth floor," One girl said to him. After that, no one talked to each other.


    __________________________


    Somethingter,


    "So, goodbye and thanks for the information," Sam said to them and left the cave. He still has a long way to go to reach the fourth floor.


    He once again activates his concealment and goes towards the fourth floor. He needs to go to the end of this floor, only then he will find the gate to reach the fourth floor.


    Sam can see many warriors who were fighting with those ghost monsters. While going towards the fourth floor, he sometimes helps the warriors who have disadvantages against the ghost monsters.


    Five hourster,


    He finally reaches the fourth floor. Just when he was about to enter the dead forest on the fourth floor, he heard a roar of a ghost monster. And it mixed this roar with a fear aura. It was a D-grade monster.


    Sam can feel the fear aura, but he has a C-grade mental protection technique. Because of this, he wasn''t that affected.


    He quickly went towards the source of the roar. Who was fighting with this D-grade monster and why the hell this D-grade monster was in the outside area of the dead forest?


    He saw ten peak E-grade warriors fighting with a ck Dog, who was a D-grade monster. fifteen intermediate E-grade warriors were on their knees. The fear aura affected them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam instantly didn''t help them, because he needed to understand the situation. Why was there D-grade fighting with the peak E-grade warriors? Usually, you only find them in the inner area of the forests.


    Five warriors were casting spells while the other five warriors protected them using their light-shield spells. Any type of Light spell was effective against the ghost but the light shields were only an E-grade spell. Because of this, they weren''t that effective against the ck-dog.


    "Quickly crouch down," one warrior, who was casting the spell, suddenly yelled. Those warriors who were protecting them instantly crouch down and instantly the other five warriors release their attack on the monster.


    All the warriors cast fireballs, and those fireballsbined with each other and made a big fireball. It directly hit the ck-dog monster.


    The ck-dog instantly let out a painful cry.


    Hearing the painful cry, these warriors thought they finally could defeat the monster, and they started celebrating. But Sam knows that the ck dog wasn''t dead, it was just seriously injured and this was a bad thing.


    ''I think these warriors don''t know that when a D-grade monster gets seriously injured, they went into a berserk state,'' He murmured. In this state, the monster''s power will double, and also its recovery time will increase.


    Under Sam''s spiritual eye, he saw the ck dog recovering at an inhuman speed. Its eyes were glowing red.


    ''I need to help or they will die this time.'' Sam wants to help them. He quickly took out his bow, which was made by the mytheno, and coated the arrows with his spiritual energy. But this wasn''t the end. Sometimeter, the arrows be me arrows which contain a massive amount of firepower.


    Sam discovered this attribute changing things recently after he upgraded his Energy mode to a C-grade technique. But he didn''t release the arrow. He needs perfect timing to shoot the arrow and for this; he needs to wait. Sam needs to kill this monster with this one shot.


    Those warriors also realized that the ck-dog wasn''t dead. They once again prepared their spell. Five warriors were casting fireballs while other warriors were casting light walls.


    Except for these ten warriors, the other warriors had already be unconscious. They didn''t have that much willpower or they didn''t have any high-grade mind protection technique that can prevent the fear aura from affecting them.


    The ck dog roars loudly and starts running towards them. From his mouth, he shoots a dark ball toward those warriors. These dark balls were filled with full of dark energy. If this dark ball hit any warriors and if the warrior didn''t have any powerful body, then they would be immediately affected by the dark ball. They will lose their vision and hearing, and at the final stage, their heart will stop working.


    A big dark ball hit the light shield, but because of these low-grade spells, the dark ball immediately broke the light shield.


    __________________To be continued_________________


    [A/N: Hey guys, I hope you will like the chapter.]

 Chapter 68 68 - Killing The Black Dog.

    The dark ball breaks through the light shield and creates an enormous explosion. It sent those five warriors flying.


    The other five warriors release their fireballs. Those small fireballsbined with each other and created a big fireball. It directly hit the monster. But this time, this fire didn''t leave a scratch on the ck dog''s body. But you can say that it angered the monster.


    The ck dog once againunched a dark ball toward the warriors. Those warriors weren''t able to react quickly and got hit by the dark ball. Instantly, they let out a painful cry. Blood flowed from their mouth. The dark energy was affecting their lungs.


    Sam shoots his ming arrow. This Dark dog has weakness in its forehead and Sam was targeting his forehead.


    The me arrows silently and quickly travel towards the dog. It pierced through the ck Dog''s forehead and then it pierced through its brain. Instantly, the fire appeared on the dog''s forehead. He burned from inside and outside.


    The arrow traveled so fast that no one noticed it until it pierced the dog''s forehead. Those warriors only saw a me that pierced through the dog''s forehead.


    The ck dog instantly let out a cry and fell down to the ground. It kept struggling for some time, but some timeter it was finally dead.


    Sam let out a sign seeing this scene. He knows he could kill this ck dog because it was in the berserk form. In the normal state, the difference between the ck Dog was quite high and his attack power was low, but in the berserk state, the attack power of the ck Dog increased and its defense decreased in the forehead area.


    The ck dog slowly turned into Ash and dropped the loot. Sam instantly went towards the drop and quickly collected it. He puts the loot in his inventory and brings out ten high-grade health portions. He wasn''t that selfish, who would snatch others'' loot. Because of this, he brings out ten high-grade health portions and puts them in front of those warriors.


    "These are the high-grade health portions. It will help you recover faster. It also will recover your stamina and power. So, you all should drink this. After recovering from your injuries, you all should leave this area." He said this to them and left the ce.


    His primary goal was to kill those Peak E-grade ghost monsters and at the same, he will investigate the reason for these D-grade monstersing towards the outside area.


    Sam travels around the outside area while searching for those Peak E-grade ghost monsters. He founded many Peak E-grade back dogs and Peak E-grade Ghost humans. He instantly killed them. Like this, he spent four hours traveling.


    Now he wanted to rest for some time. So, he searches for a suitable area where he can camp. He found an area of trees covered by three sides. In this ce, he camped.


    While eating some food, he was thinking about an odd thing that he recently discovered. Recently, these monsters dropped low loot, and sometimes they didn''t drop any loot. Because of this, he wasn''t able to collect that many spirit crystalspared to the monsters he killed.


    He also asked his parents about this, but they also weren''t able to give him a straightforward answer. Now he has free time. He wants to know about the technique scroll he previously got from the ck dog. He brings out the scroll and reads his description.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Berserker (D-grade)


    [This technique will help you increase your power for five minutes. You will enter a berserk mode. But, your body defense will decrease. This technique has a cooldown of 12 hours. To learn this technique, you needed to be at least a D-early grade warrior. Only then your body can handle this technique.] "


    Sam read the description, and after that, he put the technique into his inventory. It was a good life-saving technique but he will only be able to learn when he will reach D-grade.


    He finished eating his food, and after that, he sat in a meditative position. He activated his recovery technique to recover his stamina and spiritual power. This will take something, but that doesn''t mean he will let down his guard.


    While Sam was busy in meditation, a group of five warriors who were in the peak E-grade approached his camp.


    "Hehe boss, he doesn''t have group members. Most likely he was a solo warrior," One warrior covered in a ck coat said to the muscr man who was also wearing a ck coat.


    "Boss, I can take him alone. Haha, you don''t need to make any move," one warrior who was short in height, and was also wearing a ck coat, said to the muscr warrior whileughing like a maniac.


    They silently walked towards the camp. Those five warriors went toward the camp in different directions. They want to block Sam''s escaping root.


    These warriors don''t know, but Sam already knows about their arrival and he was already ready to attack anytime. If his guess was right, then these five warriors were mainlying toward him, intending to kill him and collect his loot.


    He previously heard this type of warrior kill their victim and then snatch their loot. These types of warriors mainly go towards the weaker groupspared to them or go towards the solo warriors. Now they find he was a solo warrior, so they intend to kill him.


    But one thing they didn''t know was that Sam was one way much stronger than them. Because previously he maximized all of his status points, then he became an E-grade warrior. Compared to normal warriors who only maximize their two to three status, Sam was way stronger than them.


    He can easily kill these five warriors, but he also wants to give them a surprise that they will never forget, even after their death. He was like a predator waiting for his prey.


    _____________To be continued_____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, your author here. I hope you all enjoyed this chapter.]

 Chapter 69 69 - Predator And Prey

    These five warriors slowly approach Sam. They also used special boots that didn''t make any sound or leave any traces behind. The assassins mainly used this type of boots.


    In these five warriors'' groups, three warriors were chanting spells, while the other two warriors brought out their weapons. They want to finish Sam quickly or they can face problems. Because sometimes many solo warriors carry an SOS sending device. If the warrior faces any life-threatening situation, they use this device. With this device, you can instantly send an SOS signal to the warrior association.


    Many times, this type of killer faced the warrior association because of this device, and for this reason, they like to kill the victim as quickly as they can. They didn''t want to give any type of chance to the victim.


    But they guessed wrong because Sam doesn''t have this type of device, not that he needed that kind of device. He can kill them easily, but he wants to torture them. A quick death was not for them, their punishment should be a slow death.


    During these five months, Sam faced this kind of situation many times and he has the experience of killing a human being. Because of this, he can remain calm.


    You can''t show kindness to them because this type of person previously already killed many humans and they can still kill many more, feeling no guilt.


    Those three warriors finished casting their spells and were ready to attack anytime. They were waiting for their boss''s signal.


    The boss of this first calmly looked left and right then said " Attack".


    Those three warriors instantly release their fireballs toward Sam. They attack Sam from his left, right, and from his behind. This was their strategy. Now, he only has one way to escape, which was on his front side, but the group''s boss was waiting for him with his sword. Even if he can escape the fireballs, he won''t be able to escape from the boss.


    The fireballs hit the tent, and instantly it burned. Now they just need to wait for him to escape outside while their boss finishes him.


    But the strange thing was that even after the tent turned into ashes, they didn''t hear any voice and also didn''t see any movement from the warrior. It was like the warrior didn''t have any wish to live.


    Suddenly, the warrior who was standing beside the boss threw a water ball toward the tent. What if the warrior''s body also turned into ashes? Then they will gain nothing?


    After the water ball, sessfully stops the fire. They immediatelye towards the tent. They need to find the warrior''s corpse. But they didn''t find any corpse in the ashes.


    This scene made them speechless. They only looked at each other. They want to know how the hell the warriors previously escaped. The boss felt that something was wrong here.


    While they were busy thinking, they suddenly heard a painful cry from behind. They instantly turned around and saw that the warrior who had previously thrown the water ball was nowying down on the ground and shouting. Because someone cuts his left leg and right hand.


    This scene made all the group members full alert. Someone was hunting them. They instantly bring out their weapon and survey their surroundings.


    "Everyone!! stay together and don''t leave the group. We don''t know where the hunter is, because of this we must stay together," the boss said to his group members.<novelnext></novelnext>


    They slowly walked towards their fallen member. Because they need to stop the bleeding or he will be dead from blood loss.


    One person brings out a health portion and gives this to the victim. He drinks the potion and instantly the blood stopsing out.


    After giving the portion, when he was about to get up from the ground. He suddenly feels the wind that passes through him and the next moment he suddenly feels pain in his left leg and right hand. He also lets out a painful cry and fell down to the ground.


    Instantly, this scene made the other three warriors afraid. They were staying together, but even after that, one of their teammates became a victim.


    "Who the hell are you? You coward, why don''t you show yourself? And why the hell are you killing us?" The boss suddenly shouted. Previously, he was also afraid, but now he is furious. His two teammates turned into victims of someone''s cowardly move.


    The next moment, the boss feels a tap from behind. He instantly turned around but got hit by a punch and sent flying.


    The other two warriors looked in the direction. They saw a person who was wearing a mask standing there, while you can see a sword in his hand that was covered in blood. Fresh blood was dripping from the sword.


    Yes, you guessed it right. This was our Sam, who was like a predator hunting his prey in the dark. He instantly didn''t kill them because he will show them hell.


    "Me coward? Haha.... fool I am always standing beside you while you all are looking everywhere like clowns. Because of your pathetic power, you all weren''t able to see me," Sam said whileughing.


    At this moment, the Boss of this group got up from the ground while coughing some blood. He looks at Sam and then at his two teammates.


    " You idiots, why are you in a daze? Attack him together. He was only one person. I don''t think he will handle all of us," the boss said loudly to his other teammates while he was running toward Sam.


    His other teammates also gain confidence and attack Sam.


    Sam quickly crouches down to avoid the attack, but he instantly throws two throwing knives toward these two warriors. The knife instantly pierced through their eyes. They let out a painful cry. But Sam didn''t let go of this chance. He instantly cuts their hands and legs like he was cutting paper.


    "Now it is your turn to see the hell. Hahaha," Sam said to the boss whileughing like a madman.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 70 70 - Hexa Guild

    Sam and the bandit group leader''s sword sh together. But instantly the normal sword turned into a me sword. This was the sword that his sister gifted him.


    The bandit''s boss didn''t expect that this was a me sword. He instantly jumped backward. He doesn''t have a fire-resistance technique.


    Sam didn''t let go of him. He instantly came toward the bandit and attacked him. The bandit''s boss wanted to block the attack, but the sharpness of Sam''s sword was greater than the bandit''s sword.


    The bandit leader''s sword split into two parts. Sam also uses this chance to cut the bandit leader''s hand and leg. He didn''t kill him because he would ask him some questions that he was curious about.


    Those other bandit warriors were crying while lying down on the ground. He burned them with his fire spell. He only needs one person to find the answer.


    "Now, everything is clear. So we can start the investigation." He looked at the bandit leader and said with a calm smile. But for the bandit leader, this smile was looking like a devil''s smile.


    "What... What do you want? Do you know who I am? How dare you treat me like this?" the bandit said with a shaky voice. This was the first time he was afraid this much in his entire life. He was terrified of Sam. Sam was like a great demon king to him. Previously, the other warriors were afraid of him, but now he was afraid of Sam.


    "Idiot, I want to know. Now, tell me who you are? From which guild do you belong? And don''t lie. The more you lie, the more you will suffer," Sam said to him.


    The bandit leader saw the emotionless eyes of Sam. These eyes were the Predator eyes, who were waiting for his prey to move. The moment he will make any movement, he will be dead. The group leader gulped down and started telling about his origin. He didn''t dare to lie, because he was terrified of Sam.


    "My name is Frank Yasu. I am from the Hexa guild. This guild is full of criminals. The warrior association doesn''t know about this guild, because we recently built this guild. Our base is on the Geon mountain. As you can see, I am only a low-grade member of the guild. But we have many powerful warriors in our guild. I don''t know the guild master''s name, but I think he was a peak A-grade warrior. Our vice guild master was an intermediate A-grade warrior. We also have five early A-grade warriors, twenty Peak B-grade warriors, and many more powerful warriors."


    Sam silently listens to all of this. He also didn''t hear about this guild. But Sam heard this type of guild previously. This type of guild was full of vicious criminals. Warrior association many times wiped out this type of guild but this type of criminal guild just kepting. Because of this, the warrior association wasn''t able to wipe out all the criminal guilds.


    "So, you all are the members of this Hexa guild, but you don''t know your guild master?" Sam asked while looking at Frank with his emotionless eyes.


    "Yes, sir, I am telling you the truth. Low-grade members like me weren''t qualified to meet the guild master. Even when there is a serious matter, we can only meet the vice guild master," Frank answered. Frank was very terrified to look at his emotionless eyes of Sam.


    "At least you aren''t that useless. So tell the details of your vice guild master and the other strong guild members," Sam said to him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Yes, sir. The vice guild master was an old man, he is sixty years old. I think you know him or saw him on the tv. He was the famous lunatic killer, Joe Han. Only one time did I get the chance to meet him. Other than him, we have five early A-grade warriors who were also famous criminals. Tony Yang, Ruk Vaan, Gary Kiato, Mia Han and Jin Han." Frank said these details to him.


    Sam really knows these people. You can see they were famous criminals who killed humans for fun. These five warriors were alwaysmitting crimes in groups. They called their group, " The Killers". It is simple and short, but that can make you feel scared.


    This Joe Han is also a monster. He has many bad achievements in his name. Like killing an entire family for fun, killing warriors, etc. Some time ago, the warrior association published a criminal list. Joe was the second most dangerous criminal.


    "As I promise, I will let you go if you tell me everything truthfully. So you can go," Sam said to Frank.


    "Really, you let me go. Thank you, sir. I promise I will never do bad ever again." Frank said this while he was ready to activate his teleportation stone.


    This teleportation stone was a life-saving stone. So you immediately leave the dungeon with its help. But these stones were pretty rare. Sam also has two teleportation stones. One stone he finds after killing a monster, while the other stone his parents gifted him.


    "I think you misunderstood something. I said to you I will let you go, but I never said that I will spare your life. After killing you, I will let you go," Sam said to him while he calmly walked toward him.


    "Sir, you can''t do this to me. You can''t kill me," Frank said while looking at Sam. He needs some time to activate the teleportation stone, but Sam will not give him that time.


    "You aren''t qualified to tell me what I should do and what I shouldn''t do. Criminals like you don''t have permission to live." After saying this, Sam directly killed him and burned him with his ming sword, then searched every warrior''s body. He finds many storage bad and storage rings.


    He puts all the storage rings and bags in his inventory. Now, he has three things to do. First, he needs to collect the spirit crystals, second; he needs to erase all the traces of him, and thirdly he needs to inform the warrior association about this Hexa guild.


    The good thing was that he previously recorded all of this in a voice recorder. He just needed to send this to the warrior association. With this, he will not reveal his identity and the warrior association will get the information about these criminals.


    ___________To be continued____________

 Chapter 71 [Bonus ] 71 - Monstrous Roar From The Inner Forest.

    Sam was now fighting with Peak E-grade dog ghost. It was not pure ck or pure white. It was a mix between ck and white.


    He runs toward this dog at his full speed and attacks him with his sword. He previously activated his energy mode and coated the sword with spiritual energy. The dog instantly split in two.


    Sam, after collecting the loot, left the area. He once again searches for the ghost monster. Until now, he only got 14 spirit crystals. You can say he killed at least thirty ghosts but only got fourteen spirit crystals.


    This was a headache for him. He doesn''t know how many monsters he needs to kill to get the ten more crystals. He decided that when he goes out of the dungeon, he will ask his sister about him or he can ask Gloria''s teacher about this.


    Because he was using his spiritual energy continuously, he also needed to recover his spiritual energy.


    "Seriously, I need some teammates." Sam sighed inwardly. He also wants to join a team, but he didn''t find any good teammates until now. He just hoped he would get some friends at his college.


    He was traveling quickly while searching for the monsters. After upgrading his movement technique, his speed also increases. This C grade technique wasn''t just for show.


    After not finding any monsters, he was nning to rest. Because he wasn''t alone on this floor, other warriors were also hunting this monster, but he didn''t find any monsters. He just needs to wait for those monsters to respawn, then he will once again start his hunting.


    Sam finds a suitable ce to camp. So, bring out his tent and fire torches. He set up his tent and then put all the fire torches around his tent.


    ''Next time, I should buy a defense artifact to keep away these monsters. These fire torches bring unnecessary trouble,'' he thought. His mom, dad, and sister use this type of artifact to keep away from those monsters.


    Victor also told him to buy this artifact butter he doesn''t know what happened, but he forgets to buy the artifact. Actually, this wasn''t his fault, because, in the previous dungeon, he doesn''t need these fire torches. He mainly rests on the top of a tree or in a cave. He only needs these fire torches in the ghost dungeon.


    Sam sighed and brought out his food. He can only cheer up his mood by eating this food.


    "This time I will definitely buy the defense artifact." He promises himself not to forget about the defense artifact.


    _____________________________________


    Five hourster,


    Those monsters finally respawn. So he started hunting them. He wanted to collect those spirit crystals as quickly as he could. Then he will leave the dungeon.


    He saw a group of Ghost humans in a ce. So, with no dy, he brings out his bow and his special arrows. He coated those with spiritual energy and, wasting no time, he shoots. Using his multiple shot and rapid shot, he quickly kills all the monsters. Those monsters didn''t even know how they died.<novelnext></novelnext>


    But from his behind, a dark balles toward him. Fortunately, Sam could avoid the attack at thest moment. At first, he didn''t even notice the attack, but then he didn''t know why, but his instincts told him to crouch down. Sam always rys to his instincts to survive in these dungeons.


    He spun around and saw a ck dog standing not very far away from him. Fortunately, this dog was a peak E-grade monster, but these ck dogs were always dangerous. Every ck dog can activate berserk form when its health is low.


    Sam instantly brings out his sword while putting back the bow in the inventory. He also quickly coats the sword with spiritual energy and runs toward the ck dog.


    The ck dog, after seeing the humaning toward him, lets out a roar and shoots another dark ball. Sam tries to deflect the dark with his sword. His sword and the dark ball sh together.


    The dog didn''t let go of this chance because at this he let out a mental attack on Sam. Fortunately, Sam has a high mins protection technique. So, the dog''s mental attack was useless against him.


    Sam sessfully deflects the dark ball. He throws two normal knives toward the dog to buy him some time. As he guessed, the dog, seeing the two knivesing toward him, instantly jumped backward.


    But Sam didn''t let go of this chance; he instantly appeared beside the dog and attacked him. The dog didn''t get the chance to avoid the attack. But he tries to defend his head with his paw.


    Sam easily cuts the dog''s paw. The moment he cuts the dog''s paw, the dog enters spiritual mode and tries to enter his body. This was one of his special attacks. Not every low-grade monster can use this technique.


    Sam didn''t expect this. He instantly turned the spiritual energy''s attribute into a fire attribute to deflect the dog''s attack. The dog, seeing the fire, instantly stops his attack. This was not a normal fire. This fire had spiritual energy, which was very harmful to him.


    He instantly backs down, but Sam doesn''t let go of this chance. He instantly attacks the dog. This time, the dog wasn''t able to react in time. Sam burns the dog.


    He finally got the chance to collect the loot. He collects all the loot. You can say his luck was good this time because from those human ghosts he got crystals and from the dog, he got five more crystals.


    These ck dogs always drop something good. Previously the D-grade dog dropped a technique. Now, peak E-grade Dog drops give him spirit crystals that he really needs time. With this, he sessfully got everything he needed. Now he just needs to leave the dungeon, and after absorbing the spirit crystals, he can be a D-grade warrior.


    But the moment he was nning to leave the dungeon, a monstrous roar spread out from the inner area of the dead forest. This roar was much stronger than any other early D-grade monster. This roar waspletely dominating. Like someone telling his superiority with this roar.


    ________________To be continued_______________


    [A/N: Hey guys, I hope you liked the chapter.]

 Chapter 72 72 - Humanoid Monster.

    Sam also got affected by the roar. Sometimes, he feels dizzy. He wasn''t expecting this attack. He doesn''t know what happens, but he can guess that something terrible appears in the inner area of the forest.


    Wasting no time, he went towards the inner area. While he was approaching the inner area, he saw monsters who were in the peak E-grade were kneeling on the ground. They didn''t even lift their heads to check the warriors. It was like they were afraid of someone.


    Not only Sam, but many other warriors were approaching the inner area of the forest. They also want to know the reason for those monsters'' strange behavior. Normally, they wouldn''t approach the inner area if they didn''t have any D-grade warriors in their group, but this time was different.


    The closer they approach, the stronger spiritual suppression they fill. Something that was in a whole other league appeared in the inner area. Sam also thinks about that, previously he felt this suppression when his sister revealed her power. But the main thing was that why the hell did something like this appear in this dungeon? This was only an early D-grade dungeon. Until he didn''t reach the area, he won''t be able to know his answer. So, wasting no time, he increases his speed.


    All the warriors came to the innermost area of the area. Because all the other monsters were now kneeling, they didn''t face any obstacles.


    They saw a destroyed inner area where you can only find destruction everywhere. Previously, you could see many dead trees in this area, but now the forest bes a destroyed area where you can''t find any trees. Then, in the middle of the area, you can see the throne. On the throne, someone was sitting and looking toward all the warriors.


    They could not understand what he was saying. He reveals the strength of the peak D-grade warrior. He was wearing a ck dress that has a unique style and also has red hair and red eyes. But those weren''t normal eyes. By looking into his eyes, you can tell that he wasn''t a human, he was a monster.


    Sam wasn''t standing with those other warriors. He was maintaining a distance from those warriors and he already activated all his concealment techniques.


    This new humanoid monster was very dangerous. He just hoped that the warrior association would quickly send someone. Because all the warriors that were standing here weren''t able to fight.


    But while he was observing the surrounding area, he saw some familiar figures. He saw those three girls that he had previously met in the cave. But this time, they weren''t alone. He saw five more warriors beside them.


    No one moves from their own ce. They all silently watch the monster. But suddenly those warriors started approaching the monster. In those warriors, Sam only knows the three girls. They all start approaching the monster. If you inspect them, then you can tell that a girl was leading the warriors. She was the leader of this group.


    All the warriors be curious about this group. When no one wants to dare to approach the monster, this group of warriors approaches the monster. ''Why the hell is this group going towards their death?'' Everyone now has this question.


    Sam also examined this group of warriors. He finds out that the girl who was previously talking to him in the cave was the leader of the group. He also wanted to know about the motive of these groups of warriors.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He previously guessed that this girl was not simple, but after seeing this, he confirmed this girl wasn''t a normal girl.


    He guessed it was right because that wasn''t your normal girl. Her name is Lisa Gen, the warrior association appointed her to investigate the monster''s strange behavior in this ghost dungeon.


    ''Why the hell were those early D-grade monstersing out to the outside area of the dead forest?'' She was in charge of investigating this matter.


    They had previously searched the full dead forest but found nothing, but now they finally found the culprit. This humanoid monster was the reason for those monsters'' strange behavior. But they also cannot understand why such powerful monsters spawn in this dungeon. You can say, in this dungeon, the highest grade monster was the early D-grade monster.


    Many warriors tried to send SOS signals to the warrior association, but something was blocking thework. Also, Sam thinks that this floor exit also will be closed. It was like a novel scene where you need to kill the boss monster to leave the dungeon, and where they need to kill this humanoid monster to leave this floor.


    Unknown to anyone, Lisa had already sent a distance single to the association. Compared to other warriors, she has an advanced device that can send distance signals through the void. Warrior association didn''t reveal this device to the public, this device was only for the workers of the association. She and her team can handle the monster, but they were worried about the other warriors'' safety. Because of this, she sends a distance signal to the association.


    Suddenly, the monster moves from his ce. He instantly teleports in front of Lisa''s group. He was feeling a dangerous auraing out of Lisa and wanted to finish this girl quickly. So, he instantly appeared at Lisa and was ready to attack.


    But Lisa suddenly moved and punched the monster. The monster was sent flying by the punch. Upon seeing this, all the warriors be stunned. No one thought this girl had the power to rival the monster.


    The monster also didn''t think that this girl had this much power. He thought that on this floor, every warrior was weakling. He instantly rose up from the ground and called for his subordinates with a roar. Because he knows he won''t be able to have the girl and his teammates alone.


    Instantly, you can hear many monsters'' roarsing toward them. Now, this was bing aplete fight, and Sam didn''t like it. He just hoped that the girl would quickly finish the monster.


    ___________________To be continued_____________________

 Chapter 73 73 - Monsters Vs Warriors

    You can say all the monsters on this floor wereing towards them. The humanoid monster called them to fight with the warriors.


    All warriors be tense after seeing this many monsters. They can fight with those monsters one by one, but they want to know if they can fight with this many monsters at the same time.


    A ck dog also wasing toward them. This ck dog was the previous dungeon''s boss, but now the humanoid monster has be the new boss. This ck dog was much darkerpared to other ck dogs. His eyes were also much redder in color.


    All the warriors know the fact that if they want to survive, they need to fight these monsters. They all brought out their weapons and were ready to fight a deadly battle.


    Sam also brought out his bow, and he was ready to shoot anytime. He also saw many ck Humanoid ghosts that can control the humans who have weaker mind power. They were also immune to any physical attack. The only spiritual attack can burn them. He coated the arrows with spiritual energy and also changed the attribute of the spiritual energy. All the arrows be me arrows.


    Lisa was also only focusing on the boss of this floor. She cannot lose her focus. Any slight mistake can harm her. Only these warriors can fight with those monsters until help from the association arrives. Because this floor exit was locked, warriors from the association needed some time to crack the lock and enter the floor.


    She already casts a blue fireball and shoots toward the boss. This blue me was the upgraded version of the normal fireball. To learn this technique, you needed to buy the C-grade me technique.


    The boss also makes a dark ball and short towers the blue fireball. Those two attacks instantly sh with each other and instantly an enormous distraction appears. A tremendous crack appears on the ground beneath those attacks. The sh also created an enormous shock wave.


    Those two didn''t waste their time. They shot one more fireball, and the dark ball towered over each other. The sh created one more shock wave. Lisa didn''t make any fireball, she just brings out her sword and runs toward the boss. They both know that there won''t be any result if they fight in a long-distance attack. Because of this, Lisa ns to fight closebat.


    This boss monster wasn''t a spiritual monster or a ghost monster. So a physical attack will work against him.


    Lisa, with an insane speed, instantly appears in front of the boss and attacks with her sword. The boss monster also prepares for the attack. He blocks the attack with his ax. Yes, the boss monster''s weapon was an ax. He also instantly swings his ax with full force.


    But fortunately, Lisa crouches down and avoids the attack. She twisted around and kicked the boss. This time he wasn''t able to react in time and got sent flying.


    When Lisa and the boss were busy in their fight, other warriors were also fighting the monsters. Many warriors who didn''t have strong mind protection got affected by the mind attacks. The ghost also possessed many warriors and now they were like walking zombies who were fighting against the warriors.


    In this ghost dungeon, warriors mainly used light magic or fire magic. Those warriors know the fact that they won''t be able to fight this many monsters. One of Lisa''s teammates told a n.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Twenty warriors stand side by side, and instantly they attack those monsters with fireballs and light balls. After that, they once again start casting spells. When they were busy casting, another team of twenty warriors stood side by side and attacked those monsters. Like this, they were fighting those monsters.


    Sam was also killing the monster, but he didn''t join the twenty warriors team. He was using his concealment technique, because of this, he was invisible in the monster''s eyes. Using his invisible state, he was attacking those monsters with arrows and fireballs, and sometimes, when the monsters got near, he killed them with his sword.


    Now he was making a great fireball and instantly shot toward the monsters. It creates a big distraction, and many monsters get killed by it. Many warriors notice that someone was killing those monsters, but they find the person. Most likely, he wasn''t interested in showing himself. They can only say thanks to the person. Because he was helping them very much. Every time when this person shorts fireballs, it creates an enormous distraction and kills many monsters.


    Sam was now sitting behind a gigantic tree while recovering his energy. Those great fireballs consume much spiritual energy. He needs to recover his energy and then will fight once again.


    While he was recovering his energy, he looked at Lisa. She was fighting the boss. The thing was that nobody has an upper hand over the other. They both search for weaknesses in each other.


    But Sam suddenly saw that the ck dog who was the previous boss of this floor was preparing a dark ball and his target was Lisa. If they can take her down, then they won''t be having any problems with the others.


    Sam didn''t recover his full energy, but he needs to help her, or she will be in danger. He quickly brings out his bow and also prepares a me arrow. His Target was the dog''s eyes. The ck dog had a pretty good defense in a normal state, so his only choice was the dog''s eyes.


    Sam took a deep breath and calmed himself down. He focuses on the dog''s eyes and shoots his arrow. This time he shot the arrow with all the strength he had because he didn''t recover fully and the dog was pretty far away from his ce.


    The me arrow was silently and quickly approaching the dog. Many warriors saw that a me was approaching the dog. Only then did they notice that the ck dog was ready to shoot a powerful dark ball at Lisa. But fortunately, the me arrow pierced through the dog''s eyes, and the dark ball got canceled. All warriors release a sigh after seeing this because they know the importance of Lisa.


    No one noticed but Sam wasying down on the ground.


    ______________To be continued_____________


    [A/N: For a few days, I will be free, so I will try to write a chapter daily. I hope you all like this chapter and continue to support this novel.]

 Chapter 74 74 - Finally Reinforcement Arrive.

    No one noticed but Sam wasying down on the ground


    Because in this attack, he uses almost just all of his power. He could not move, so he could only lie down on the ground. Sam knows this was pretty dangerous for him, but it left him with no choice. He was in a weak state. He just hoped no monster would notice him and attack him.


    The ck dog let out a very painful cry. His left eye got pierced through by an arrow, and not only that, but he has a burning sensation from inside. He also has a bacsh. He got interrupted when he was about to shoot the dark ball, and because of this, he was having a bacsh.


    _________________________________________


    Right now, you can see that every warrior was exhausted. They were continuously fighting for five hours. This was a tough time for them. They were tired, both mentally and physically. They needed to rest, but those monsters just kepting. Usually, this floor didn''t have that many monsters, but they didn''t know what happened. Those monsters just keeping. It was also something to do with the boss.


    Lisa and the boss were also in an intense fight. They both were injured. You can see her damaged armor and ax mark on it. She wants to use her most powerful technique, but that will affect the surroundings. Because of this, she keeps fighting with the boss.


    The boss also got injured by her. Many sword marks appear on his chest. He wanted to finish the fight quickly, but this human girl was powerful. Because of this, he kept struggling.


    Lisa was looking at all the warriors and after seeing their condition, she knows she needs to end this fight quickly. With no hesitation, she cast his most powerful attack. She only needs twenty seconds to cast this spell.


    The boss monster wasn''t staying idle. He didn''t want to give her time. He was approaching her direction to kill her. But suddenly he was hit by a fireball. This fireball wants your normal fireball, it was your great fireball. The fireball hit the boss and sent him backward.


    He wasn''t prepared for this attack, and because of this, he went backward. The boss monsters didn''t receive that much damage from this attack, but he still guards up against this unknown enemy.


    Sam forms a me arrow with all the powers he has. This time he uses all of his 80% power to form this arrow. He was ready to shoot down the boss. He wanted to buy time for Lisa and he hoped this attack does some damage to the boss.


    Sam clears his mind and releases the arrow. If you saw the arrow, you can see an illusion of a ming bird who was traveling quickly toward the boss. Lisa also finished her casting. She was casting a great blue fireball. Wasting no time, she shoots it toward the boss.


    The blue fireball also was traveling quickly toward the boss. But suddenly something unexpected happens. The me arrow and the great blue fireball Marge together and from a magenta me. It formed the shape of a ming bird and hit the boss.


    The boss tried to save himself from this attack, but the firebird still hit him. It pierced through his skin defense. This magenta me was so powerful that the moment the me hit the boss, he burned. He tried to save himself, but everything was useless. The me was burning him from inside and outside. It was just a matter of time before he would be dead.<novelnext></novelnext>


    I think the boss also understands the fact that he will be dead in just a few minutes. So he suddenly unleashed an attack, thest attack of his life and the most powerful attack.


    Suddenly a spell diagram appeared in the sky and instantly all the ghost monsters roared. Within a few seconds, all the monsters'' power hours increased, and also their number increased. This was thest attack from the boss.


    After seeing this, all the warriors felt despair. Now, this was out of their capability. If they were at full strength, then they could still try to fight these monsters, but now they didn''t see any hope. Lisa and Sam were also in a weak state. In the previous attack, they used all of their power.


    But all the warriors feeling despair, they suddenly hear many footsteps. That wasing toward them. All the warriors look in the footstep''s direction. They saw many figuresing from the outside area. Instantly, they knew that their support had arrived.


    Finally, they can rx. All the warriors release a deep sigh.


    "All the warriors, you all can rx. From now on, we will fight these monsters," a warrior from the association said to them.


    The association sends five early C-grade warriors and twenty-five Peak D-grade warriors. They all released their powerful aura and hunted those monsters. It was just a matter of time before all those monsters will be dead. This time, they didn''t have their boss, so they won''t spawn instantly.


    While the warriors from the association were fighting those monsters, all the other warriors were taking a rest. Some of them wereying down on the ground, and some of them were sitting down.


    Sam was alsoying down on the ground. He will need some time to recover. Like him, Lisa and her teammate also were taking a rest. One of her teammates was using a healing spell to stabilize her wounds.


    While her teammate stabilizes her injuries, she looks toward the gigantic dead tree. Behind this tree, Sam wasying down. Unknown to him, she had already noticed him. Previously, when he shoots the me arrow, she notices him. Because Sam almost used all of his strength, his concealment technique got deactivated, and Lisa noticed him.


    She has a feeling that she knows this person. She also wants to know his contribution, because she can tell like hey, the warrior also uses almost all his power.


    "Tani, can you go toward the tree? I think there was a warriorying there. You just need to check his condition," Lisa said to the girl who was the healer of her team.


    _______________To be continued______________

 Chapter 75 75 - My Name Is Mask

    Tani immediately got up and went toward the tree. She doesn''t know why Lisa was showing interest in this warrior, but she just needs to check his condition. If he was in a serious condition, then she can heal him.


    Sam already felt that someone wasing toward him, and he thought it was from the association. Because all the association warriors were now helping the injured warriors. So he just rxed and closed his eyes.


    When she came to the tree, she saw a man lying there. She immediatelyes to his side and checks his condition. After checking his pulse, she notices because of exhaustion, he falls asleep.


    Tani looks carefully at this masked warrior. She wants to know what was special about him, so Lisa notices him. She wants to take off his mask but decides not to. Everyone should respect other identities. If he doesn''t want to show himself, then she won''t take advantage of him.


    Unknown to her, Sam wasn''t asleep. He is just using his recovery technique. This person was curious about his mask. He knew that. The moment this warrior wants to take off his mask, he will attack the person. But nothing happened. He just felt that someone was healing him.


    This was better for him, so he did nothing. He just let the person heal him.


    Sometimeter, Tani left the ce and went toward Lisa. She had already healed him, and it was a matter of time before he would wake up.


    Sam, at this moment, thinking about the loot. When he will recover fully, he will go to collect some good loot. He wasn''t that good person who let the warrior association take all the loot.


    When he feels he recovers some of his energy, he takes out a high-grade heath portion and drinks it. It immediately shows its effect. He instantly recovers his 70% health. He got up and sat downfortably while bringing out food to eat. This much fighting makes him starve. If someone saw him this time, they would immediately be speechless because no one would eat in this kind of situation.


    _____________________________________________________


    One dayter,


    Sam finally reaches his home. They got out of the dungeon quickly, because they had directly teleported into the association. During this five-month period, the warrior association also upgraded its teleportation system. Previously, they can only enter the dungeon by teleporting, but they can enter our exit anytime.


    His parents were in the dungeon, and his sister was busy training. Because of this, they didn''t hear any news regarding the ghost dungeon. But it was just a matter of time before his sister and parents would know about this matter. He also needs to prepare for this.


    Sam, after freshening up, cooked some food. He previously forgets to order food, so he can only cook. After finishing his food, he came back to his room andy down. He didn''t want to rush. After a good night''s sleep, tomorrow he can absorb those spirit crystals. While lying down, he was about the previous day''s matter.


    "shback"


    Previously, after they got teleported to the association, they got checked by the doctor. Sam wasn''t that injured and because of this, he has permission to go home. After saying thanks to the doctor when he was about to leave the association hall, he got stopped by Lisa.


    For the first few minutes, no one talked to each other, but then Lisa opened her mouth and said, "Thanks. My name is Lisa, a special officer from the association." After finishing talking, she extends her hand for a handshake.


    "You are wee. You can just call me Mask. A nobody who is trying to avoid the problem," After saying that, he also extends his. He didn''t deny the fact that he was the one who fired that me arrow. Because he knows it was useless, at thest moment his concealment techniques got deactivated and he thinks Lisa noticed him at that moment because he felt someone''s gaze at that moment.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Mask is a weird name. Still nice to meet you. Without you, I wouldn''t be able to kill the boss." She said with a smile.


    "No problem," Sam said while maintaining his calm.


    "Are you a college student?" She asked, while looking at him. He was wearing the mask because of this you can''t guess his age.


    "No," He said but didn''t mention that he will take this year''s college exam.


    "Wonderful. If you are taking this year''s college exam, then you shoulde to the Golden Dawn. I am a student of the Golden Dawn. We can team up some time," she said with a sweet smile.


    "I will think about it," Sam only said. He didn''t mention any other thing.


    "Ok and sorry to waste your time. Goodbye Mask."


    "No problem. Goodbye, " after saying that he left the association.


    "shback end"


    Until now, he was not sure which college he wanted to choose. Royal Academy, Golden Dawn, and the White tiger were the Top academy. He didn''t want to go to the Royal Academy because he could be a burden to his sister. Either the Golden Dawn or the White tiger academy is where he can go. He also has the choice to go to any Other Academy which wasn''t as good as these three academies. But the problem was that those academies won''t be able to provide him with as many resources as those Top academies.


    Sam stopped thinking about college because he was feeling sleepy. So, wasting no time, he closes his eyes and sometimeter he falls asleep.


    "Next day"


    Sam was tanning with his techniques. "Practice makes you perfect." he follows this rule. He didn''t rush to absorb the crystals. Before absorbing, he wants to practice. After finishing his training, he will absorb the crystals. When all the status will reach the maximum number, he will break through and be an early D-grade warrior.


    Just a matter of time, then he finallypletes a small goal of his. But to reach his major goal, he needed a lot of time. Not that easy to be the world''s strongest warrior. But with the system''s help, he has a hope to reach the goal.


    __________________To be continued_____________________


    " [A/N: Hey guys, I hope you all like the chapter. If you like the Nobel, give some reviews about the novel, also give some power stone (Shameless author).]"

 Chapter 76 76 - Breakthrough

    A strange blue aura was circting around Sam''s body. It was the spiritual energy. He was now absorbing the spirit crystals. Even with his C-grade absorbing technique, he needed one and a half hours to absorb those crystals.


    He got up from the ground and started punching in the air. He was feeling full of energy and wanted to release this energy. Now, he originally reached the peak stage of his current grade. When he bes an early D-warrior, he will be stronger than the other early grade warriors. This was one reason he wanted to maximize all of his status points.


    He clears his mind, and once again sits down. Because now it was an important time for him. He brings out a yellow color crystal. It differed from the crystals that you got from the monsters. Because it was the limit breaker. He was very fortunate that he got the limit breaker because, without this limit breaker, he would have a hard time breaking the barrier of the D-grade.


    Sam tries to break the barrier of his grades. But despite using his full strength, he wasn''t even close to breaking through. Suppose he was standing at the bottom of a staircase. If he can climb a hundred steps, he will be a D-grade. But the problem was that the more steps he will climb, he will feel spiritual pressure. It will be harder for him to climb up.


    Fortunately, he has the limit breaker. With this, you still feel spiritual pressure, butpared to before, you only feel a small amount of pressure.


    So, Sam once again tried to break through, but this time, he was using the limit breaker. He was iming up but slowly. Compared to before, he was only feeling a little pressure from the barrier. It was just a matter of time before he would reach the top of this stairway. Only then he will be a D-grade warrior.


    This was not a great process. All warriors need much time to break through. Some warriors even take many months to break through the barrier. The higher your grade, the more time you need to break through. But Sam didn''t have that much time. He just hoped he would reach the top quickly. He only has fifteen days before the college exam starts.


    He finally reached the 90th step but thest 10 steps were the real challenge for him. Previously, when he broke through from F grade to E grade, he didn''t feel this much resistance, but this time he was feeling the resistance.


    Sam took a deep sigh, and once again climbed the step. He has reached the 95th step, but he was under intense pressure, even with the limit breaker, he was feeling it. Sam didn''t know, but it was happening because he was breaking through after maximizing all of his statuses.


    Just when he was about to give up, a strange energy surrounded him. He also heard the system''s voice.


    "Seeing the host is about to fail, the system awakened the supreme upgrade. The system will upgrade the limit breaker to a higher grade. "


    "Because of the force awakens, supreme upgrade needed 5million points to upgrade the limit breaker. "


    " Sessfully debited 5 million points..."


    " Upgrading the limit breaker.....1%"


    " 10%"


    "...."


    " 50 "


    "..... "


    " 100"


    "Process done. "


    Suddenly, the limit breaker glowed and a few secondster, the glow faded away. When the light faded away from the limit breaker, only then did he see the change. The yellow crystal turns into a blue crystal. Instantly, the interest pressure he felt faded away. With that, he reaches the top.


    Instantly, his body glowed, and a few minutester, the light faded away. Sam opened his eyes from his meditative state and instantly he felt the power. He finally bes a D-grade warrior.


    As you imagine, he instantly feels excitement. He wants to fight. But he took a deep breath and calmed down. It was not the right time to be excited. He first needs to stabilize his grade, then he will do other things.


    "Status," Sam said in his mind.


    "Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 0


    Agility: 0


    Physique: 0


    Intelligent(mental power): 0


    Spirit: 0


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Special (+)


    Upgrade point: 1milion


    " Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (Cooldown: 4 months)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C) (+)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (35%)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]<novelnext></novelnext>


    Fast sword (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (70%)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (D-grade) (90%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (49%) (+(


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (70%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (95%) (+(


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (80%)(+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (C-grade) (85%)(+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (75%)(+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade) (50%)  (+)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Strength buff technique: (D-grade) (66%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    Mind control technique: (D-grade) (58%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.]


    Telekinesis: (E-grade) (90) (+)


    [Helps you to control objects around you.]


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (C-grade) (94%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.]


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (54%) (+)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade) (71%) (+)


    [This technique helps you to increase your vision power and also gives you a pair of spiritual eyes. It also helps you to see many things that you can''t see with your normal vision. ]


    [Note: You finally be a medium-grade warrior.] "


    _____________To be continued_______________

 Chapter 77 77 - Finally Caught Up To Those Genius Prodigies

    After seeing his status, Sam closes the system window. Previously, he collected up to 6 million upgrade points. It used 5 million points in the upgrading process. Also, this time, his body potential didn''t upgrade automatically. He can see a plus sign beside the potential status.


    ''So, it means I can upgrade my potential anytime,'' Sam murmured in his mind.


    Because his system forcefully activated the supreme upgrade, the courier time also increases. Now, he needs to wait for a month, only then he will use it again.


    He can also see plus signs beside all of his C-grade techniques. Finally, he can upgrade his techniques. But Sam decided not to upgrade right now. Meaning because he didn''t want to upgrade his potential right now. Fifteen dayster, he has the college exam. In this exam, the examiner will check your potential and he didn''t want to face the situation when they will find out that he didn''t have a special grade potential but a rare grade potential. It will bring trouble to him.


    ''I just need to wait. After finishing I will upgrade his potential, then my skills.'' Sam thought in his mind. He knows if he upgrades his techniques right now, then they will only bring pressure to his body. To use a high-grade technique, you need to have a high-grade potential. But that doesn''t mean he can''t upgrade his D-grade techniques.


    Now, his n was to be familiar with those techniques and then upgrade them to D-grade. He also has three new technique scrolls he wanted to learn. With these three new techniques and also with his berserk technique, now he has four new techniques. He already has some Early D-grade crystals. He can also absorb them to stabilize the grade.


    "Now I finally catch up to those genius prodigies." Sam was feeling proud because of this.


    Today was such a great day, and because of this, he wants to celebrate. He orders a lot of food to celebrate. After getting up from the ground, he went to the bathroom. He wants to freshen up, only then he will feel rxed.


    ___________________________________


    In the evening,


    Sam was nowing back from the association. He sold all the extra loot that he didn''t need. Like the Peak E grade crystals, he doesn''t need them, so he sold all of them. He also has many low-grade materials he doesn''t need.


    Sam was now going toward the cksmith association. He needed to repair his armor because his armor got damaged previously. He liked this armor, so he didn''t want to change it.


    He left the cksmith association after giving his armor to the old man. He didn''t know why, but these associations were pretty busy. Because of this, Sam wasted little time there. He quickly goes toward a familiar receptionist girl and hands over the Armor and, after announcing his requirement, he leaves the cksmith association.


    Now, he wasing back to his home. He will go to the Alchemy association tomorrow. He wanted to buy high-grade portions from them. You can also buy the portion from the warrior association but they were costly, but if you buy the portion from the Alchemist Association, then you will get a 5% discount.


    The only problem was that not everyone can buy from the Alchemy association. Those who have VIP cards can buy from the Alchemy association. Sam also has a VIP card. His father gives him this card.


    He finally reached his home. When he was about to enter the house, he felt that someone was in the house. He quickly enters the house and sees it was his sister.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Did you get injured anywhere?" She asked him, wasting no time.


    " shback"


    Unknown to him, the news about the dungeon got released. Instantly it spread everywhere and Gloria also heard the news.


    Gloria was basically busy these days because of the Annualpetition. She was the youngest C-grade warrior, and because of this, she was under a lot of pressure these days. She recently reached the intermediate stage. When she was resting after her tanning, she heard the news about the ghost.


    At first, she didn''t give importance to the news, but then suddenly she remembered Sam telling her he was going to the ghost dungeon with his teammates. Wasting no time, she instantlyes back home to check his brother''s condition. Gloria already called the association, and they told him that Sam didn''t get injured, so they released him from the association.


    When she came back to her home, she didn''t see her brother. Instantly, she got nervous, but then she took a deep breath and calmed herself down. Because this morning he talked with her brother and his brother wasn''t in the house, that means he went to the association. Sam already told her he was nning to go to the association. So, she calms down and stands in front of the door. She wants to wait for her brother.


    One hourter, she suddenly felt her brother''s aura and instantly saw her brother, who had just entered the house. Wasting no time, she came in front of him and asked the question.


    "shback end"


    Sam looks at his sister. She was worriedly checking his condition. He smiles after seeing his sister''s childish behavior. He caught his sister''s hands and said, "Sis, I am fine. I didn''t get badly injured. Calm down, yourself."


    Gloria, after listening to her brother''s voice, calms down. She looked at her brother and said, "Wee back" with a sweet smile. Sam also smiled and said, ''Thank you to Gloria.


    Sam already prepared food for his dinner, but now needs to prepare food for Gloria. He knows his sister was busy these days because of thepetition. She will go back to college tomorrow.


    After finishing his dinner, he was lying down on his bed. He wanted to do many things, but first, he wanted to check the three new techniques.


    __________To be continued_________


    [A/N: Hey guys, Hope you all liked this chapter. Leave some of your reviews,ment, and vote. It is your shameless author. ]

 Chapter 78 78 - Day Before The College Exam (1)

    "Light control (Grade D)


    [This technique taught you how to control light energy. The more you be familiar with this technique, the more you can able to use the light energy easily.]"


    " Dark energy control (Grade D)


    [This technique teaches you how to control dark energy. The more you be familiar with this technique, the more easily you can use this technique.]"


    " Battle cry (Grade C)


    [Using this technique, you and your teammate''s power will double. It has a cooldown time of 7 days.]"


    Sam these three new techniques details. Compared to the first and their technique, the second technique was the most dangerous technique. Dark energy wasn''t that easy to control. If you make any mistake while using dark energy, it can also harm you.


    "I will learn the dark energy control when my spiritual control bes better. " Sam decided. He didn''t want to learn this now. One reason was that a few dayster, he had his college exam. If anyone notices dark energy in him, then it will bring trouble to him, and didn''t want that.


    This light control was a pretty excellent technique, but this battery cries that he was most curious about. If he wasn''t wrong then, he got this technique from the boss. He didn''t want to learn any of these new techniques right now. He will learn them after he stabilizes his stage.


    Sam has early D-grade crystals he looted. He will use them to stabilize his stage. He also now has 15 million dors. With them, he will buy many more crystal boxes.


    Sam also orders many Mytheno because previously he lists many arrows in the dungeon to kill the ghosts. With them, he will make many more arrows.


    First things first, today he needed to sleep, then from tomorrow, he will start his training.


    _______________________________________________


    Fourteen dayster,


    Sam was now absorbing the crystals. These few days, he continuously absorbed the crystals and then practiced his techniques. Other than that, he did nothing. He also orders many Mytheno and when he receives them, then he orders the cksmith association to make arrows and throw knives.


    You can say these few days that Sam has already stabilized his grade. So, he learns the light control technique and the Berserker technique. He will learn the other techniquester.


    "  Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 15


    Agility: 13


    Physique: 16


    Intelligent(mental power): 18


    Spirit: 09


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Special (+)


    Upgrade point: 975k


    " Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (Cooldown: 4 months)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C) (+)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (65%)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (80%)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (D-grade) (94%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (59%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (82%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]<novelnext></novelnext>


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (99%) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (90%)(+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (C-grade) (89%)(+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (69%)(+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade) (80%)  (+)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (0%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (01%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.]


    Telekinesis: (D-grade) (89%) (+)


    [Helps you to control objects around you.]


    Berserker (D-grade) (50%)


    [This technique will help you increase your power for five minutes. You will enter a berserk mode. But, your body defense will decrease. This technique has a cooldown of 12 hours. To learn this technique, you needed to be at least a D-early grade warrior. Only then your body can handle this technique.]


    Light control (Grade D) (50%)


    [This technique teaches you how to control light energy. The more you be familiar with this technique, the more you will use the light energy easily.]


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (C-grade) (99%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.]


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (60%) (+)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade) (90%) (+)


    [This technique helps you to increase your vision power and also gives you a pair of spiritual eyes. It also helps you to see many things that you can''t see with your normal vision. ]


    [Note: You finally be a medium-grade warrior.] "


    As you might have guessed these few days, he mainly focused on his strength buff technique, mind control technique, light control, and Berserker technique. That doesn''t mean didn''t he didn''t focus on the other techniques but he just practiced these four techniques more.


    Sam opened his eyes and got up from the ground. He was feeling hungry and needed to eat something. Sam was also busy today. He needs to go to the cksmith association to retrieve his armor and arrows.


    Wasting no time, he went towards the bathroom. After freshening up, he came to the kitchen and started eating food. His mom had already prepared food for him. Yes, you guessed it right, his parents were back. They came back five days ago with good news. They finally found a limit breaker, now with this his mom finally can Breakthrough.


    His mom didn''t rush to breakthrough, because her son will take the exam. How will she miss that? She needs to cheer him up.


    Gloria was alsoing back today. She already informed her teacher that she wille back. She also didn''t want Miss Sam''s exam. Like when she took the college exam, all of her family supported her and cheered for her. Now it was fine to cheer for her brother.


    If you ask, "Is Sam nervous because of the exam?" Then ''yes'' he was very nervous, but he just didn''t show his nervousness. Because his mom and dad were more nervous than he.


    Tomorrow was a special day for him. He was also excited about the exam. This is the one reason he was going to the cksmith association. He needs some fresh air to calm down.


    After finishing his food, Sam guesses out of the house. He was nning to walk. While walking, he also hears many people talking about the college exam. It also made him more nervous, but he took a deep breath and calmed down.


    ________________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 79 79 -Day Before The College Exam (2)

    Sam finally reached the cksmith association. He entered and went towards the receptionist area and came in front of Jenny, the receptionist he was familiar with. Previously, he got to know her name. As he guessed, she also has the samest name as Henry, the old man.


    "Hello Jenny, is everything ready?" Sam asked her. He needs arrows and those knives for his College exam.


    "Yes, Sam, wait a minute." After she said that, she went towards the old man''s room.


    While Jenny went to the Old man''s room, Sam looked around. Compared to other days, he saw many people today. He also saw many warriors of the same age as him. Most likely they are also taking part in the College exam. Because of this, they came here to buy armor and weapons.


    Not every warrior can request the old man to make something good for them. There were many cksmiths who were the old man''s students. Usually, they take the order to make something from the warriors, and the older man Henry was busy and the old man only took a request from the people he knew or the VIP people. Previously he didn''t know that, but recently he told him this. Fortunately, the old man was the one who was making his weapons and armor.


    One minuteter, Jenny came back from the old man''s room. She came to her table and ced a storage ring on the table. All the things he had previously ordered were in this ring. Sam took this and checked it with his spiritual sense. After confirming all the things were done, he left the association. He already paid in advance.


    Sam just quickly went to go home and test this new armor, arrows, and throwing knives. He wants if this time the Old man did anything special with his weapons. Old man Henry likes to experiment with his weapons. Sometimes it upgraded the quality of the weapon or someone, it decreased the quality of the weapons. He just wants to know if any of his weapons got upgraded.


    It didn''t take him much time to reach home. He went to his room and after a quick fresh up, he directly went toward the training ground.


    "Sam, do nothing dangerous. Tomorrow is an important day for you. You should rest today. What will happen if you injure yourself?" Hina asked him.


    "Don''t worry, mom. I will be extra careful. I just wanted to try my new arrows. So, don''t worry." saying that he quickly went towards the taking ground.


    Hina can only sigh after hearing his answer. She was pretty nervous for him, and because of this, she told him to rest. But seeing Sam''s excitement, she didn''t pressurize him.


    Sam quickly brings out his armor to see the details.


    "Type: Armor


    Name: Leather armor


    Materials used: Skin of rhinoceros


    Grade: D+


    Defense capacity: (150-240)%


    Durability: (170-230)%


    Special ability: None.        "


    After seeing the description, Sam bes speechless. His armor grade didn''t increase, but the Defense capacity and the durability of the Armor got increased.


    "Haha..... Old man, you really are the best cksmith." Sam said whileughing. Now, with this armor, his defense will be more solid than before.


    He also brings out the arrows and the throwing knives to see their description.


    " Type: Arrow


    Name: Spiritual arrow


    Material used: Mytheno


    Grade: D-<novelnext></novelnext>


    Attack power: (90% -120%)


    Durability: (100% - 150%)


    Special ability: You can channel your spiritual energy into this weapon.            "


    "Type: Knives


    Name: Throwing knives


    Material used: Mytheno


    Grade: E+


    Attack power: (30% - 80%)


    Durability: (40% - 90%)


    Special ability: You can channel your spiritual energy into this weapon.        "


    After seeing the description of the arrow and the throwing knives, Sam knows that they have the same status as the previous one. But it wasn''t a problem for him. When he channels his spiritual energy into those weapons, their power will increase, and also their sharpness also will increase.


    It will be better if he can try them while fighting monsters, but he can''t do anything about it. So, he can only try those on the dummy.


    He brings out his bow. Now it was time to test the power of these new arrows. Sam didn''t coat the arrows with his spiritual power. He would like to use them normally. He can use the spiritual powerter.


    _______________________________________


    One hourter,


    Sam was now collecting all the arrows and knives. He already tried them. After collecting the arrows and knives, he left the training grounds and went to his room. He needs to freshen up.


    Sam came to the kitchen after fresh up. He was hungry. He needed some food.


    Sam can see that Victor was watching the news. Victor was trying to find any clue that could help his son, for this he was watching the exam-rted news.


    The warrior association and the college organized this college exam. No one except the warrior association''s head and the College''s head know about the exam. Even if you are an A-grade warrior, you can''t know anything about the exam using your authority. Because the college and the association want to make the college examination fair.


    Previously, many unknown geniuses came out from the college exam, and now they have be the powerhouse, who protected humanity from monsters. As you know, not every warrior was an excellent warrior who fought for humanity. If they allow those families to interfere with the exam, then those unknown geniuses will never have the chance to join a good college.


    While Sam was eating food, his sister came back. She went to her room. She needs to freshen up. After finishing his food, Sam came to the hall room and sat beside his father. Sometimeter, his mom and sister also came into the hall room and sat on the sofa. They are all watching the news.


    Sam looked at his family, who were beside him. They were all more nervous than him. But they didn''t show him their nervousness. You can say in this atmosphere that Sam''s nervousness vanished entirely. Heughs happily while confusing his family.


    _______________To be continued________________


    [A/N: Hey guys, After this chapter we can finally begin our College exam ark. I hope you all liked this chapter.]

 Chapter 80 80 - The Journey Begins.

    At 7 am, Sam wakes up from his sleep. He went directly to the bathroom. Today was the special day he was waiting for. After freshening up, he came to the dining room. His mom had already prepared breakfast for him and was about to go to his room to wake him up. But after seeing Sam, she just smiles and tells him to sit down. Victor and Gloria also came and sat down.


    " Sam, are you feeling nervous? Don''t worry too much. Just rx, " Gloria said to him. She was also nervous, but she knew she needed to cheer up her brother.


    " Don''t worry, sis, I am not nervous. I am just excited about the exam." Sam said to her with a smile.


    Victor and Hina look at each other and just smile. They were happy that they had wonderful children. They were also nervous, but they didn''t show their nervousness.


    Sam needs to go to his school. When all the students wille to the school, then the school bus will take them to the exam area. His parents can directly go to the ce where the exam will be held.


    This year''s exam will be held in Lais City. in Lais City, you will not find any citizens. Because this city was near the outer zone. You can only find the army or the warriors in this city who fight with the monsters that are roaming outside of the safe zone. An early D grade dungeon was in this city.


    All the candidates will have a written exam first, then they will have a survival test in the dungeon. Those candidates can kill monsters as much as they can. Killing the monster will give you a point. The higher your point, the much more attention you will get from the best institute.


    Sam, before going to the school for thest time, checked all of his things. He didn''t want to miss any of the equipment which could save his life. In the dungeon, he will need all of his things.


    Victor and Sam left the house. Sam will go to the school with his father, then his father will directly go to Lais City. His mom and sister will go separately.


    After saying goodbye to his mom and sister, Sam starts his journey toward school. Sometimeter, when he came near the school, he could see many cars were also going towards the school. Many studentse to school with their parents like him.


    After saying goodbye to his dad, he also enters the school. He can see all the students waiting on the ying ground. They were waiting for the bus to take them to Lais City. You can see the nervous faces of all the students. Sam walks toward his ss and stands in a corner. Everyone was busy with their own things, so no one noticed him. It is also thanks to his concealment technique.


    He didn''t see the elite ss''s students. They didn''t have to wait like them for the bus, they could wait in their ssroom. It was not like he wanted to talk to them, so it didn''t matter.


    Almost all the students were present here, so they can now start their journey. Sometimeter, many buses enter the school''s yground. Every ss teacher guides their students to enter the bus which was assigned to them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Mr. Fin also guides Sam''s ss to a bus. One by one, everyone enters the bus and sits down. Sam also sits down. Fortunately, he got a seat near the window. He brings out his earphone and connects with his mobile. It will be a long journey, but he can pass his time hearing music. All buses start moving. Finally, the journey began.


    These school buses have a logo of their school, with this, they can tell everyone where they were from and which school. Many warriors from different schools will give the exam. Every school has its own unique logo. In a circle, you can see the word B. It was their school logo.


    Unknown to him, but everyone was talking about him. Compared to before, he changed very much. Now you can see the muscr body he has. You can say,pared to before this, Sam was much more attractive to them. But they still think he was a loser.


    Sam looked outside the window. He saw other buses and also the bus of those elite students. Their bus differedpletely from theirs. On their buses, they didn''t have AC, or any defence system but those Elite students have those on their buses and also their bus has a defense shield that the other buses don''t have. Not that he was jealous of them, he just chuckled seeing their bus.


    When he was looking at their bus, Elena, the head student of the elite ss, also looked towards his bus. Coincidentally, they make eye contact. Sam didn''t know what to do at this moment, so he just nodded and stopped looking at the bus.


    Elena saw Sam nod at her, and then he stopped looking. She won''t know what happens. This Sam was is pretty weird to her. Previously, he had a thin body, but now he had a muscr body. Also, she previously tried to talk to him about Gloria, but Sab just ignored her. Now, she doesn''t know what happened, but she also stops looking at his bus. She needs to focus. She also wants to create miracles like her idol Gloria and enter the Royal academy.


    Sam didn''t know what he should do, closed his eyes and a few minutester, he fell asleep. It will take them five hours to reach the city.


    ___________________________________________


    Five hourster,


    They finally reached the city. Their school bus stops in front of a hotel. Every ss teacher told their students to follow them to the hall room. They will revive the key to their room. Sam also got the key to his room. He didn''t share a room with others. He previously told his parents that he didn''t want to share his room with others. Because of this, his parents made this arrangement for him.


    Sam entered the room and went to the bathroom. He had to freshen up after this kind of journey. After freshening up, he will go to the food area, where you can eat any food.


    ______________________To be continued__________________

 Chapter 81 81 - Written Exam

    Sam was now walking towards the dining area of this hotel. Everything will be free for the students, so he wants to eat as much as possible. He sat down at an empty table and told the waiter his order. Basically, Sam wants to try every dish on the menu.


    While Sam was waiting for the food, he heard many voicesing toward the dining room. He saw many students enter the dining room. Sam didn''t know any of these students, but he noticed the school''s logo that was on their dresses. They were students of the Royal school from Royal City.


    "Brother, you are powerful. This time you will get the first ce in three college exams, " a boy was telling another boy. Sam can just see the dress that they were from the Royal academy. Sam saw a familiar figure in the group. He didn''t actually meet this person, but he previously saw him on the tv. His name was Tony Taylor. His grandfather was an S-grade warrior.


    This Tony Taylor also was a genius prodigy. He could also reach the early D-grade stage before the college exam. Just by looking at him, you can tell that he doesn''t care about the students that were talking with him.


    When Tony was looking around the dining room, he saw Sam. They keep staring at each other. Sometimeter, Sam stops looking in Tony''s direction. Because the waiter brought his food.


    From Tony''s point of view, he has a feeling that the guy that was staring at him wasn''t weaker than him.


    "Interesting," He said slowly and went toward a table to sit down.


    After finishing his food, Sam left the room. He wanted to be familiar with this city and he also wanted to see his family. They were also staying in a hotel in this city.


    Tomorrow they will have the written exam and the day after tomorrow the real challenge begins. You need to kill the monsters in the dungeon. The more you kill the monster, the more points he will get. The warriors who will kill the boss will get the 1000 points.


    Sam was walking on the city''s street. He heard from his father that at a normal time, you won''t see any shops in the city but because of the exam, you can see many shops in the city. He saw many Street food shops and tried all the foods.


    [A/N: Our Sam was a food lover.]


    He finally reached the hotel where his family was staying. He also brought Street foods for his family. His sister loves street foods.


    At 9 pm, he came back to his hotel. Because before 10 Pm they need toe back to the hotel. Sam saw many students from various famous schools. They were talking to each other. Some warriors were also trying to fight with each other. But it doesn''t matter to him, he just wants to go toward his room.


    _________________________________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Next day,


    Finally, the exam began. At 9 am, all the students came to a School that was mainly prepared for the students. They will give the written exam in this School. In this school, you won''t find any students on normal days, because no students like to study in this dangerous situation. They mainly built this school for the college exam.


    Sam came to the ssroom no A1. In this ssroom, he will give the exam to other students. You can see the nervousness in the faces of many students except some students.


    At 10 am, the exam will begin. Sam just needs to wait one hour. It may not look like it, but Sam was knowledgeable. Previously, when he didn''t have the hope of bing a warrior, he shifted his full attention to studying. So, as you can guess, Sam wasn''t worried about this written exam.


    One hourter, the teacher came to the ss and one minuteter, distributed the question papers to everyone. All the students have 3 hours to finish answering the question.


    Sam also got the question paper, but he didn''t rush to write the answer because he followed some rules when he was in a written exam. First, he will read the question paper carefully, second, he will mark the question which he is sure that he can answer, then andst, he will start writing. [A/N: You should also follow this rule.]


    He read the question paper carefully and Markdown the question that was easy. Finally, he writes.


    While he was writing the answer, the teacher who was in charge of this room looked at all the students. Except for some students, all of them panicked about getting the questions. You can say, for the students who prefer battle over normal study, won''t be able to answer this question. This year, the question was quite hard for the students. You won''t be able to answer them if you don''t read books seriously. There were many tricky questions. Such as, ''Who was the fourth warrior to reach the S-grade? Who was the sixth warrior to reach A-grade? '' Usually, no one will answer them if he doesn''t study hard. Because they all remember only the first warrior who reached the S-grade or A-grade. Nobody remembers the fourth warrior''s name or the sixth warrior''s name.


    The teacher released a sigh, after watching these students'' condition. Now, nobody likes to study hard except some students. They only focused on the dungeon. These books were also important for them, they shouldn''t care less about studying. No students dare to cheat on college exams because of strict rules. ''If the teacher catches you cheating, then you can never take part in the college exam.'' Because of this, nobody likes to take risks.


    The teacher now looked toward three students who were continuously writing the answer. It was like an easy exam for them. Just looking at them, he can tell these were students who also study hard. [A/N: Guys, you should also study hard.]


    Sam was also one of the three students who continuously wrote the answer. After reading the question, he feels like he can answer almost all the questions. It was like an easy question paper for him.


    ___________To be continued____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, finally I finished my exam. Haha ??.]

 Chapter 82 82 - Friends

    Three hourster, finally, the exam was finished. The teacher was collecting the answer sheet from the students. Some students sigh in relief. They left the ssroom one by one. Sam also left the ssroom after giving his answer sheet to the teacher. They will get to know their mark after they finish the next exam.


    Their hotel wasn''t that far from the school. When he was going towards the school gate, he saw his family. They were waiting for him. Sam smiled softly and approached them.


    "How was your exam? Is the question very hard? We heard from the students that the question was very hard this year," His mom asked him.


    "No mom, the question is quite easy for me. I almost answered all the questions," Sam said with a smile.


    "Haha... that is my son," after hearing him, his fatherughed. They know their son is very good at studying. So, they didn''t think that much about this written exam.


    They all get into the car. Victor starts the car. Sam was quite hungry now, so they were going to an excellent restaurant. This time Gloria didn''te with her mom and dad, because she also knows that her brother was intelligent and for this reason, she wasn''t that worried. She also needed to practice. So, she stayed in the hotel room. Now, in every hotel, you will find a training room for the warriors. Gloria also went to the training room to practice.


    After finishing eating, his parents drop him in front of his hotel. He said goodbye to his parents and went towards his room. After freshening up, hey down on the bed. Tomorrow will be the main exam. They all will go to the dungeon and need to kill the monsters. Before that, he wants to rest properly. He needed to do his best in the dungeon. He will sleep for some time and after waking up from his sleep, he will go to the training room to practice.


    ____________________________________________


    At 5 pm, he woke up from his sleep and went to the bathroom. For all the students who were giving the college exam, the training room was free, and also the hotel was giving them free energy drinks.


    Sam didn''t want Miss. So, he went towards the training room. He can see that many students were going anding from the training room. In this hotel, you will find fifty training rooms that were underground. Sam also went towards training that was basically for one person.


    This training room was smallpared to the other room. There were ten training rooms where basically only one person could train. It was fortunate for him to get an empty training room.


    He trains his sword techniques. At 7 pm, he left the training room because one person can only use the training room for two hours. Sam went towards his room. After freshening up, he went to the dining area. Unfortunately, he didn''t find any empty tables, and he didn''t want to be with anyone. He can see many of his ssmates in the dining room, but he can tell they didn''t want to share a table with him. He can only order them and then he will go to his room.


    "Excuse me, are you Sam Kainer, brother of Gloria Kainer?" a girl asked him.


    "Yes, who are you? " Sam asked the girl because he didn''t know this girl.


    "Hello, nice to meet you. I am Aliya Hance from Sky school," Aliya said to him and extended her hand for a handshake.


    "Hello," Sam also extended his hands for a handshake.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Are you done ordering your food? You can sit with us," Aliya said with a smile.


    "If your friend doesn''t mind," Sam said and went toward a table where he saw two students. One was a boy and the other one was a girl.


    "Guys, meet Sam Kainer, brother of Gloria Kainer," Aliya said to her friends happily.


    "Hello," Sam said, and sat down beside the boy.


    "Let me introduce you. This is my friend Niya Keon and David Adam," Aliya happily introduced her friends.


    " Hello Niya and David," Sam said hello to them.


    " Hello, Sam. She heard a lot about your sister," they both said to him.


    Usually, Sam didn''t talk that much with strangers. But he knows he can''t be like this. He wants to make friends. Because of this, he wanted to change. In college, he wants to make friends who can be his teammates and he can tell that Aliya and his friends were friendlypared to his ssmates who were jealous of him. Because of this, he sat with them.


    Sky school was also one of the three best schools that were in York City. Many geniuses graduated from this school. Because of his sister, his Base school also became one of the best three schools. Royal School, Sky school, and Base school were the three best schools.


    "You don''t know. We three are fans of your sister. She bes the youngest C-grade. This is something nobody has achieved until now," Aliya said.


    Any genius student can reach a D-grade after our before the college exam. But to reach C-grade from D-grade was the real challenge. When you reach the C-grade, you will be a high-grade warrior. Also, to reach C-grade you needed to break through threeyer. Some warriors were to stay in the D-grade even when they graduated from college. It was very hard to break the threeyer. Even geniuses could not breakthrough as quickly as his sister. Gloria has the potential to reach the S-grade, because of this she was famous.


    "Thank you," Sam said with a smile. He feels proud when someone praises his sister. If you think he will hate his sister because everyone likes topare him to get a sister, then you were wrong. He loves his sister. He won''t be jealous of his sister because of her achievement.


    Like this, they talked about many things. Well, basically things where the sister was involved. Previously, Sam also found that on the inte Royal College posted about his sister''s achievements. Which college didn''t want to show off when they had a genius like his sister.


    ____________To be continued_______________

 Chapter 83 83 - Head Examiner

    Next day,


    Sam woke up early. Today he will go to the dungeon. Before he goes to the dungeon, he needs to be sure about his preparation. But one thing that he wasn''t able to understand was that there were many students who were taking the test, and he didn''t think that all these students would enter the dungeon at the same time.


    They just know that in the next exam they will need to kill monsters. But yeah, it wasn''t a problem for him. The college and the warrior association will handle this matter. This time Twenty thousand students were giving the college test. Compared tost year, this was a huge number. Last year, only eight thousand students attended this exam.


    At 10 am, they will need to be present at the school. He still had two hours. He doesn''t need to rush. Sam was looking at his inventory to double-check.


    " Extra clothes - Check


    Swords - Check


    Throwing knives - Check


    Bow - Check


    Arrows - Check


    High health portion - Check


    Medium health potion - Check


    Tents - Check


    Foods - Check


    Waters - Check


    Mask - Check


    Armor - Check


    Boots - Check


    High-grade spirit recovery portion - Check


    Monsters repelling device - Check


    Fire torches - Check "<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam almost had everything that he always carried in the dungeon. You can say he always stayed ready. He put everything in his storage rings. Before going to the dungeon, the teachers will check their storage rings. Also, before going to the dungeon, they will check everyone''s potential. Because of this, Sam previously didn''t upgrade his potential.


    Sam orders some food from the cafeteria. Before going to the next exam, he wants to eat as much as he can. In the cafeteria, he also meets Aliya and the others, so he sits with them. You can see the nervousness on their faces. Sam, after seeing their nervousness, tries to cheer them up. He didn''t need to wait long when he got his food. They eat.


    "Don''t worry that much. If you get nervous, then you won''t be able to kill monsters. Just rx, stay calm, and believe in yourself. Finally, best of luck guys," He said to them happily. Don''t know if Sam''s words affected them, but they now feel some confidence. After saying that, he left the cafeteria.


    At 10 pm, every student was present at the school. They were standing in the yground. Some students show their superiority but it doesn''t to Sam or the teachers. Because in the exam, the teacher will not care about your background. In the exam, you were only a student, and they were the teachers who would decide if you had the qualification to enter a college.


    All students were waiting for the head examiner. The head examiner was an A-grade warrior from the association. His name was Fredrick Vance, brother of Leon Vance, the S-grade warrior. But you can say Fredrick didn''t depend on his big brother to be the head examiner. He became the head examiner because he has the capability of killing a dragon. He was a famous dragon yer.


    The head examiner with the other teachers approached the students. They stand in front of these students.


    "Good morning, my dear students. I know you all are waiting for the hunting exam and are also excited about that. But don''t let your emotions affect your judgment. Many monsters look weak, but actually, they were strong. So, you need to stay calm in every situation. Before the exam, our teachers will check your potential and rank. After checking your rank, we will tell you where you will kill the monsters. We also provide you with a teleportation bracelet that will immediately teleport to us when your life will be in danger. "


    "This is our invention because the previous year we lost many students who underestimate monsters'' power and went for the powerful monsters. I hope you all won''t do this. Everyone had only one life, so you shouldn''t underestimate monsters'' power. Also, killing your ssmate is a serious crime. You will be under surveince every moment, so things about before doing anything like this. If you use the teleportation bracelet, then that means you have finished your exam. So, also things about this before using the bracelet. Now, everyone, your assigned teacher, will call you to check your potential and rank."


    With these, the head examiner finishes his speech. Then he left the area. They gave students a number and, based on this number, the teacher called them. As you can guess, those elite students will get the first chance to check their potential and rank.


    The number he got was "102". He sighs because he needs to wait before he will be called by the teacher. Sam left the yground and searched for an area where he can take a nap. Sam will get notified when the teacher will call him, so he doesn''t need to worry. He found a perfect area. Heys down on the green grass and brings out his earphone, and connects with his phone to listen to music.


    Sometimeter,


    Suddenly, the phone rang. He opened his eyes and checked that his father was calling him. Sam answers the phone.


    " Sam, where are you? We are at the school entrance," Victor said to him.


    "I am taking a nap, father. Wait for me, I will be there in a minute, " Sam said and got up from the ground. He also checks that the teacher only called the number " 50". He still has time.


    A few minutester, he finally reached where his parents and also his sister were waiting for him. He greets them. Today Sam was wearing the dress that his school provides him. A white jacket with a logo on the back of the jacket, a ck t-shirt, and white pants. All the students were wearing their school''s dress today. It wasn''tpulsory, but he still wore the dress because white and ck were his favorite colors.


    Hina brings out some food. She knows her son was a food lover. He loves eating the food that she makes. So, today she especially makes food for him. Seeing the food, Sam bes happy. He loves his mom''s cooking. They sit in the waiting area, which was specially made for the family members of the students, who wereing to watch their children perform.


    Gloria today came here while wearing a mask. She doesn''t want great trouble for her brother. Because she knows if someone were to recognize her then they will create trouble for Sam in the exam. No one can interfere with the exam except the teachers. Sam''s family won''t be able to help him if someone creates trouble for him.


    ____________To be continued_______________

 Chapter 84 84 - Potential And Rank

    Sometimeter,


    Sam got called by the teacher. It was now his turn to check his potential and rank. Sam got up from his seat, said goodbye to his family, and went toward the teacher. They were using a device to check the student''s potential and rank.


    ''I don''t know if this device can tell my true rank, '' Sam thought in his mind. He was concealing his rank. He just hoped that this device wouldn''t be able to detect his true rank.


    "Sam Kainer," the teacher called him.


    "Yes sir," he responded as he came in front of the device.


    "Put your hand off the screen and start releasing your power. Don''t hold back, or the device won''t be able to judge your true rank," he told Sam.


    Sam nodded after hearing the teacher''s words, but he still has some doubts about this device. Because, if this device only tells about your rank, then what happens if someone wants to conceal his/her rank, then the device won''t be able to tell.


    Unknown to Sam, this device not only judges based on the power that the students release. It also checks if any students were to use some concealment technique to suppress his/her rank. If anybody uses any kind of concealment technique, then the device uses spirit checking to judge the person''s true rank. It was fortunate that it was only a medium-grade device that can only judge the person''s rank as D-grade. If the person''s rank was C-grade or the person was using some kind of C-grade concealment technique, then the device won''t be able to detect his true rank.


    Sam doesn''t know about this. He just hoped that his true rank won''t be revealed. Because his family knows that he was only a peak E-grade warrior. But if they found out that he was a D-grade warrior, then it would shock them because previously Sam didn''t lie to his family and his parents trusted his every word. Also, Sam doesn''t want to reveal his rank because many people will suspect him to use some kind of evil technique to rank up quickly. There were many evil techniques used by the dark organization. Using those techniques, you can easily be a D-grade warrior. Butpared to normal D-grade warriors, those warriors were less powerful.


    Sam ced his hand on the screen and closed his eyes. He carefully releases his power. He doesn''t know, but you can say everyone in the school was looking in his direction. Because he has the same surname as Gloria Kainer, who makes a record of students'' history. Because of this, everyone looked in his direction.


    Sometimeter, Sam opens his eyes and puts away his hand from the screen. They will need to wait to give minutes to see the result. The device was currently processing and judging his rank. He stands there and looks toward the big screen where he will get to know his result.


    Some of his ssmates, who were in the same ss as him, spread rumors about him being trash and only rely on his sister and family toe here. Almost every student who was taking part in the exam heard these rumors. Some teachers also got to know about this rumor, so they immediately took action and warned every student to not be spared this kind of rumor, because if Sam''s sister got to know about this rumor then the students who were spared this rumor, will lose their life or something terrible will happen to them. Gloria Kainer has two titles that were given to her, "Ice Princess" and "Princess of Hell".


    She will be very if she hears this rumor. It also bes a problem for the association. Because of this, if Gloria did something to these students, then they won''t be able to do anything to her. Because she had the backing of two S-grade warriors. She also has the potential and talents to reach the S-grade.


    Victor, Hina, and Gloria also were looking toward the big screen. They were actually very nervous. ''What if the device didn''t work properly and showed the wrong data? '' They have this kind of question in their mind. You can say they be easily nervous when it was Sam''s matter. Sam didn''t tell anyone but his family how much he was in pain when he got to know that he had a trash potential. Now he once again wants to be a warrior. So, they wanted to support him and didn''t want their son to once again be a broken man.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Five minutester, finally, the result came out.


    "Name: Sam kainer


    Potential: Special


    Rank: E-grade (peak)


    Remark: Qualified. "


    After seeing the result, his family finally sighs in relief. They don''t know, but Sam also sighed in relief. Thankfully, the device didn''t show his true rank. He noticed and happily went toward them.


    Unknown to Sam or his family, this result was very shocking for the students who thought that he was the only trash who relied on his family toe here. They all thought that he only had a mortal grade potential, which was a trash potential, but seeing the special potential, they all got shocked. Also, his rank also wasn''t that low.


    Many students and teachers from the Base school for shocked after seeing the result. You can say it was a pretty normal thing for them because previously they expected nothing from him. They didn''t give importance to Sam even though he was Gloria''s brother. Now, after seeing the result, they be speechless. Mr, Fin the ss teacher of Sam''s ss also got shocked by the result, but he smiled and looked at Sam. He already predicted that Sam will never stay as trash, he will be someone great. He was happy for his student.


    Sam happily came toward his family.


    "Didn''t I tell you not to be nervous?" Sam happily said to his mother.


    His mother only nodded while you could tear in her eyes. She was very happy, and that made her cry. "Finally, my son can go to some good college and be an excellent warrior." Victor and Gloria only smile, seeing Sam''s joyous reaction.


    _________To be continued________


    [A/N: Hey guys, have a good day guys. I hope you will enjoy this chapter. ??]

 Chapter 85 85 - The Hunt Begins.

    They take four hours to check all the students'' rank and potential. Finally, you can see the result. There were many early D-grade warriors. As you can guess, they were genius prodigies. 90% of these prodigies belong to some powerful families and only 10% of prodigies belong to normal families. Sam only knows a few of them because he saw them in the news.


    The head examiner once again came in front of the students when the result was finally out.


    "So, finally, you all were done with the test. Now it is time to hunt. I know you all want to know more about the hunt. So, wasting no time, I will tell you about your main exam. As you all know, all of you need to kill monsters in the next exam. In this city, we only have one D-grade dungeon, which you all won''t be able to enter at the same time. Because of this reason we all decided that this year we will organize the exam in the Dark forest. As you know, it was in the middle of the safe zone and the outer zone. You don''t need to worry that high-ranked monsters won''t be entering this forest because we will guard the forest and prevent the high-grade monsters from entering the forest. In the forest, the highest grade monsters were Medium D-grade. With this I am finishing the speech and also I hope ?you won''t be doing anything reckless that will cost you your life," the head examiner said and left the area.


    "Students, please get on your buses. We will drop you near the forest and from there, your exam will begin. Also, we will watch you through a monitoring device, so do nothing reckless," One teacher said.


    Slowly, all the students get on the buses. Sam also said goodbye to his family and approached the bus. He saw Aliya and her friends.


    "Best of luck," he said to them and get on the bus. After all the students sit down, the buses move. It will take them one hour to reach the Dark forest. This exam willst for seven days.


    Victor, Hina, and Gloria also left the area and went toward the hotel. For these seven days, they will stay at the hotel. They watch their son''s performance on the tv because the College exam is the most important exam in a warrior''s life. So, they telecast the exam on the tv. They will show everyone''s performance.


    Sam''s family didn''t worry about him, because they know Sam wasn''t a reckless person who will do something that will harm his life.


    ____________________________________________


    One hourter,


    They finally reached the get off the bus and one by one they entered the forest. Almost 90% of students entered the forest with their team. Only 10% of students enter the forest without a team.


    Sam also didn''t have any team. He enters the forest alone. He looks. It was now 4:15 pm. Sam will first search for a suitable area where he can camp. After a while, it will be night. Because of this, he wants to search for an area where he can camp.


    Sam found a spot surrounded byrge trees. He took out his tent and ced it. Then brings out the monster''s repelling devices and ces them around the area. He also brings out a life detector device and puts it in the tent. Previously, he didn''t have a life detecting device. Gloria gifted him this device. Before the enemyes toward his tent, this device will alert him.


    Now his tent was set. It was time to hunt. He will not go far away from his tent to hunt. Because, if he went far away from his tent, some other student would seize his tent.


    This forest was called ''Dark forest'' because in this forest sunlight clearly wasn''t able to enter, because of this many monsters whose weaknesses were sunlight, live in this forest.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam observes his surroundings when he hears a voiceing from a tree. With his spiritual vision, he saw that there were two poison bats. These poison bats were the creature of the night. They will attack with a deadly poison that will kill within five minutes. They like to stay in the highest ce. This was also why Sam didn''t make his camp at the tree''s top.


    Sam quickly brings out his bow and shoots down. Two arrows silently and quickly went towards the bat and killed them. These two bats were only F-grade monsters. These two bats didn''t get the chance to react and fell down from the tree. He quickly went towards the bats and collected the body. Because this wasn''t the dungeon, these monsters won''t be dropping any loot, but warriors can collect the body of these monsters and sell themter.


    This wasn''t a dungeon where you only find limited monsters, but this was the outside zone where you will find many monsters. Because of this, he keeps up his guard every time.


    After searching for some time, he found a group of Vicious dogs. These dogs were bigpared to any normal dog, and they were bloodthirsty. They always hunt in groups. Sam checks their grade. There were only F-grade. He quickly shoots five arrows toward them. These five arrows didn''t give them any chance to react and killed them. He collected the body and left the area.


    Sam checked the watch that was given by the association to check their point.


    " Name: Sam Kainer


    Grade: E-grade (peak)


    Potential: Special


    Point: 07.            "


    Like this, he hunts a few more F-grade monsters andes back to his tent. He didn''t find any E-grade monsters because he was only in the outside area of the forests. He will find them in the inner area.


    He sat down in the camp and brought out the food. He was feeling hungry and needed to eat.


    While Sam was eating his food, the association was showing all the students'' performances from all over the world. They also show Sam when he was killing the F-grade monsters. His mom, dad, and sister also were watching the program on the tv. Seeing Sam killing the monsters easily, they were feeling proud.


    __________To be continued____________

 Chapter 86 86 - Moonflower

    Sam finished eating his food when he heard a fighting sound outside of his tent.


    "Someone should be fighting, but the life detector didn''t alert me. That means they didn''t enter the range in the life detector," Sam murmured. The range of the life detector was one kilometer.


    Sam silently went outside of the tent and, making no sound, approached the sound. A few minutester, he was standing behind a tree and watching two warriors fighting with each other. Sam wasn''t able to see their clear figure because they were fighting, but he saw one warrior has blond hair and the other warrior had blue hair. Also, one important thing was that they both were wearing the royal school''s dresses.


    "So, they are both from the royal school, but why were they fighting? Are theypeting to test out their power against each other?" Sam thought in his mind.


    They both were unarmed. They were fighting with their fists. Just looking at their fighting, Sam can tell that they weren''t F-grade warriors. They should at least peak E-grade warriors. Because they both didn''t use their full strength.


    Sam doesn''t know what happens, but he just hoped that they would continue their fight here and didn''t disturb him. He didn''t have any n to interfere. He slowly backed away when he noticed a white flower that was not far away from him.


    In the moonlight, this flower was glowing slightly. Seeing the flower''s uniqueness, he checked the details of this flower with his system.


    " Moonflower (Grade D)


    [This flower absorbs the moon''s essence, and stores it in her body. If any warriors eat this flower, it will increase their spiritual power of the warriors and if the warriors have any kind of ?injury, this flower will heal them. The more the moonflower stores moon energy, the more it will glow. ] "


    After seeing the description, Sam bes shocked. He didn''t think he would find the moonflower one of the rarest things. He had previously heard about this flower but had never seen it. You can say because sunlight didn''t enter the forest clearly, the moonflower was born here. Previously, he read in the book that moonflowers like to grow in dark ces where they can absorb the moonlight.


    You all should think about how this flower can absorb the moonlight when the sunlight isn''t able to enter the forest? Then the answer was Moonflower doesn''t need clear moonlight to absorb the moon''s essence. Even if you put the moonflower in a box where no light can pass through, the moonflower will absorb the moon''s essence. The process he doesn''t know, but it was quite an interesting thing if you think about it. Humans weren''t able to absorb the essence from the sun or moon directly, but because of the spiritual energy, manys mutated and can now absorb the essence directly.


    Sam turned around in the direction where those two warriors were still fighting.


    "I don''t know why you two were fighting, but thanks to you, I found a moonflower. I am very grateful for that. You two should stop fighting and be friends. Many, many thank you, " Sam said in their direction and approached the flower. He carefully picks up flowers and puts the flower in his inventory. After that, he leaves the ce. He will stay in the tent until dawn, then he will start hunting.


    As you guess, he was in a cheerful mood after finding the flower. But unknown to him, these two warriors were fighting for the moonflower.


    "shback"


    Sometime ago Jack the blue hair warriors came to these ces to pee. After finishing his work, when he was about to return, he noticed the flower. He happened so happily he startedughing and that was the wrong thing he did. After hearing hisughter, one of his teammates came toward him to check why he wasughing. His name was Ron. He was the blond hair warrior.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He was approaching Jack when he also noticed the moonflower. Greed filled his eyes. He also wants the flower. So, when he saw ?Jack was about to pick up the flower, he quickly attacked him with his fist. He didn''t use weapons because what will happen if he damages the flower?


    Jack, with his instincts, dodged the attack and saw that it was Ron who attacked him.


    "Ron, what the hell are you doing?" Jack retorted.


    "Jack, my friend, don''t be angry, but I also want the flower. So I cannot let you pick up the flower," Ron said, and attacked Jack once again.


    "If you think I will let you have it, then you are also wrong," Jack said, also attacking Ron. With this, they start their fight. Thest one standing will be the winner. They also didn''t use any weapons and only used their fist to fight. Also, they didn''t use any powerful attack that would damage the flower.


    "shback end"


    One hourter, finally, Jack was thest one standing. He finally wins the fight. Now he can have the flower. He looks at the unconscious Ron.


    "Stupid fellow, didn''t I tell you I was stronger than you? Haha," Jack said and startedughing. He approached the direction where he saw the flower. But he didn''t know why he was feeling ufortable. He quickly went towards the flower. But no matter where he searched, he didn''t find the flower.


    "No! my flower..... Who was it that stole my flower? Come out, you coward!" he angrily shouted.


    " Which flower? " He heard a girl''s voice from his back. He instantly turned around and became scared because he saw his captain with his other teammates standing there. His captain gave him an icy stare.


    "Captain," he gulped down. He knows he messed up pretty big. Also, knowing his captain, he just hoped he wouldn''t be punished pretty badly.


    Sam, the culprit, was resting in his tent, unaware of what was happening outside. He turned on the tent''s concealment before resting. This was also one product of the association that helped Warriors in the dungeon to rest.


    ____________To be continued_____________


    [A/N: Hope you guys like this chapter.]

 Chapter 87 87 - Becoming Famous

    Next day,


    Sam was now killing some F-grade monsters and approaching the inner area. He needs to increase his point. He didn''t use the moonflower. Sam was nning to use this when he will upgrade his potential.


    He saw ten F-grade warriors fighting with a group of Vicious dogs. Still, they were at a disadvantage. Not every warrior was an expert inbat. The captain of the team was running towards the vicious dog. You can say he was only decent, while you can say that others weren''t decent fighters.


    Still, it was impossible for them to win against those vicious dogs. Sam can see some of the vicious dogs were near the breaking point when they will be E-grade. If that really happens, then those warriors will be injured heavily.


    Sam helped, and also he was nning to increase his point by killing those monsters. He brings out his bow and shoots arrows toward dogs using his techniques. Fifteen arrows were now going towards the dogs. Your can shooting fifteen normal arrows wasn''t that hard for him.


    Those arrows travel quickly and silently. They pierced through the dogs'' skulls. They were not in the dungeon because of this. Those monsters didn''t drop and loot. Sam knows this, still, he forgets about it sometime. It bes his habit to wait for the loot after killing any monsters.


    This time, he didn''t collect the dead bodies and left the ce. He didn''t want to reveal himself.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Grade: E-grade (peak)


    Potential: Special


    Point: 37.              "


    Until now, he has only collected 37 points. You can say not that bad or good. When he enters the inner area, then he will increase his point.


    Wasting no time, he was approaching the inner area as quickly as he could. He can see many warriors fighting monsters, but he didn''t want to interfere with their hunt.


    Outside of the Dark Forest,


    Everyone''s focus now was on the tv. They all were watching this year''s college participant''s performance. Association mainly shows the best students'' performance. They also released the list.


    " 1st ce: Alexa m, Point: 50, School: Royal school


    2nd ce: Tony Taylor, Point: 48, School: Royal school


    3rd ce: James Danish, Point: 44, School: Sky school


    4th ce: Jeni chaffy, Point: 43, School: Royal school


    5th ce: Elena Martin, Point: 40, School: Base school


    6th ce: Gustav Kyle, Point: 39, School: Sky school


    7th ce: Aliya Hance, Point: 38, School: Sky school<novelnext></novelnext>


    8th ce: Sam kainer, Point: 37, School: Base school


    9th ce: L Majur, Point: 35, School: Base school


    10th ce: Pijus Oron, School: 34, School: Royal school. "


    The association released the top 10 participants'' names. Which shocked many teachers from the Base school. Because seeing Sam''s name in the 8th ce, they never thought about it.


    They watched how those warriors were killing the F-grade monsters easily, and now they were traveling towards the inner area.


    Alexa, Tony, James, Jeni, and Elena were the five warriors who had be early D-grade warriors before the college exam. For them, killing those F-grade was nothing. They, with their teammates, were advancing towards the inner area. It was rare to see someone hunting solo in the Dark forest. Most of the warriors like to hunt in a team.


    Watching Sam''s name on the list, both Victor and Hina were feeling proud. It was their son. Normally, they will feel proud of him. They also feel worried about him after seeing that he was hunting solo in the forest.


    The previous day, they saw their son get a moonflower. Which makes themugh. They saw how two students from the Royal school were fighting with each other for the moonflower. But in the end, Sam suddenly came to the spot and got the moonflower. It was quite funny.


    "Back to Sam"


    Sam was unaware that the previous day''s incident made him famous. He was now fighting a ck monkey. These monsters were quick, and they had potent power. But their defense was quite low. They were early E-grade monsters. As you can guess, Sam finally reached the inner area of the forest.


    He doesn''t want to waste his time with these monkeys. So, he brings out his me sword, and with his superior movement technique, he fights with those monkeys. These monkeys were very agile, but Sam was much faster. With his me sword, he quickly killed those monsters. Unfortunately, he was using the me sword which burns all the corpses of these monsters. Each early E-grade monster gives him 2 points. Previously, those F-grade monsters only gave 1 point. He got 10 points after he finished killing 5 monkeys.


    He left the ce and went deeper into the forest. Don''t know if his luck was good or not, but he actually found one more rare nt. "Healing mushroom" He found this mushroom.


    "Healing mushroom (Grade: E)


    [This mushroom heals your injuries instantly. This is like a lot of grade healing potion.] "


    "In this dark forest, you will find many natural resources. I should also collect these natural resources besides hunting monsters," Sam said after putting the mushroom into his inventory.


    "I am such an idiot. Why didn''t I read about this dark forest carefully?" San thought and released a deep sigh. Previously, he guessed they wouldn''t be given the hunting exam in the dungeon and thought they would give the exam in other big dungeons. Hepletely forgets about the dark forest.


    Sam was unaware of the fact that in this dark forest you not only find resources but there are also many dangerous things you will find. Fortunately for them, their teachers were blocking those high-grade monsters from entering the inner area from the core area. In this core area, all the high-grade monsters like to stay because here the spiritual energy was thick.


    Sam was unaware of this. He was now searching for an area where he can rest. It was gettingte and a few minutester or it would bepletely dark everywhere. Before that, he needs to find a ce to stay.


    After searching for some minutes, he finally found a ce which was near a waterfall. Near this waterfall, he finds a cave. When he first examines the cave, he finds some monster''s footprint. So, this means he first needs to kill those monsters before anything else.


    _________To be continued_________


    [A/N: Hey guys, sorry for not releasing the chapter these two days. Unfortunately, my little bro damages my mobile screen and I cannot do anything with this damaged screen. Now, I upload this chapter from my elder sister''s mobile.]

 Chapter 88 88 - Finally The Cave Is Mine.

    The cave was enormous. He enters the cave and activates his spiritual vision, which has the function of night vision. He was following the footprint of the monster. A few secondster, he finally heard the monster roar.


    "I think the monster sensed that someone was invading his base. I need to prepare for the iing attack. The thing is, I just don''t know which type of monsters I was facing?" He thought in his mind.


    Sam brought out his sword, and he was ready to attack anytime. He heard footsteps getting closer and closer. In no time, he saw a monster. The monster has a crocodile-like figure, but his size was bigpared to a normal crocodile. He also has blue eyes.


    Sam knows about them, they were called Cold crocodiles. They can release ice beams from their mouth and freeze anything. They like to stay near the water and they can reach the A-grade. Because of this, they were very dangerous. Fortunately, this cold crocodile was only an intermediate E-grade monster. So, he can kill him with no risk to his life. But even if it was an E-grade monster, you should be careful around them, because they can enter a berserk state when their life is in danger. This berserk state will make them four-time stronger than before and make their ice energy powerful.


    Using his movement technique, he instantly vanishes from his ce and approaches the crocodile quickly. Less than a secondter, he appeared in front of the crocodile and attacked the monsters with his me sword.


    The monster let out a painful roar after getting cut by the me sword. The me was their natural enemy. Sam didn''t give him a chance to react and instantly punch him. It sends the crocodile monster flying. The crocodile crashed into the wall. At this moment, Sam has already finished casting a fireball and throws it toward the crocodile.


    When everything became clear, he finally saw that the crocodile was dead. Previously, he realized how reckless his move was. He shouldn''t use a destructive spell in the cave. Fortunately, the wall of the cave didn''t fall.


    He sighs deeply and goes towards the dead body of the monster. He put the body in his inventory. Finally, he can use this as a base until the exam is finished. He quickly came out of the cave because he needed to ce the monster repelling devices around the cave. Also, he will make some around the cave. In these, five-month Sam already knows how to set tattoos traps. At first, he learned from the online, but then his sister and father helped him to learn better.


    After everything was finished, he decided he would take a bath in the river. If he was in his house, then he would at least freshen up two to three times a day. But here he didn''t get a chance, so he cleans up and after that, he will eat food.


    It was a small river that was made from a waterfall. After refreshing up, Sam went to the cave. He also hides the entrance of the cave with bushes and trees. Now it won''t be able to tell that it was an entrance of a cave.


    Sam brings out the food and starts eating. Now after that will take some rest to recover his energy. Then he will go back to his hunting.


    " Name: Sam Kainer


    Grade: E-grade (peak)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Potential: Special


    Point: 50.        "


    Previously, he got term points after killing those early E-grade monsters, and now, after killing this intermediate monster; he got 3 points.


    In the Lais City''s association hall, you can see many screens where they were watching all the students. The principals of the top three schools are also present today. They were all watching these students'' performances. Because no one wants to lose to each other, if they find any students that have good potential and capability, then they will rmend them for their college. Not only the top three but other College principals and vice-principals were also present here.


    The principals of the Royal Academy, Golden Dawn, and White tiger were constantly looking toward the screen where our five early D-grade warriors were killing monsters.


    Alexa was now with her teammate, going deeper into the forest. She was still in 1st ce on the list. She now has 70 points, and it was constantly rising because she was killing a group of elephant beetles. This beetle has the size of an elephant. They have solid defense Armor around their body and their favorite attack was to attack the enemy with their horn.


    Tony was also not far away from her. He was still in 2nd ce and he now has 65 points. With his five teammates, he was now fighting with 10 peak E-grade vicious dogs. They could already kill three dogs. Now only 7 dogs were left. It will take some time, but they will kill them. Fortunately, his teammates were not that bad at fighting. Because of this, they can fight these monsters easily.


    Jeni Chaffy now is in 3rd ce. She overtook James and got 3rd ce. Now she has 64 points. She, with her four teammates, was now resting near a river. Some time ago they finished a group of Vicious dogs. She was in the early D-grade and her teammates were in the Peak E-grade. Also, all of them were decent fighters, and because of this they easily finished those Vicious dogs with no serious injuries.


    Elena also overtook James and got the 4th position. With her teammates, she had 62 points. She was now fighting with 5 peak E-grade Cold crocodiles. She has 4 members on her team. But only Elena and her two teammates were good in battle, but the other two were the only burdens. Because of them, she was in the 4th or with them, she will be in the higher ce.


    James was now in the 5th position. He has 60 points. Previously, he and his teammates faced 15 peak E-grade monsters. As you can guess, it was a tough fight for him and his teammates. Now they were resting and recovering from their injuries.


    __________To be continued___________

 Chapter 89 89 - Betrayal

    Next day,


    Sam was silently traveling through the forest. He was searching for the peak E-grade monsters. He needs to increase his rank.


    As you can guess now, he wasn''t in the top 8th. His rank decreased, and he was in the 10th position. What can you say? It was his fault that he wanted to be low-key and didn''t want to reveal his full power.


    The association didn''t reveal the top 10 list for the students. Because many students, after seeing the top 10 list, do something reckless that costs their life. They didn''t want that.


    Sam finds two Peak E-grade vicious dogs. He did nothing recklessly. First, he searches for those dogs'' other teammates. He didn''t see any other dog beside them. It was not like they were some intelligent monsters who can hide and ambush someone. The only thing they could do was attack the Prey.


    ''Thank you,dy luck,'' he said this in his mind while he brought out his bow and two spiritual arrows. He previously didn''t use his energy mode, but now he was going just like that. These spiritual arrows'' color was back and nobody would suspect anything if he attacked with these arrows after coating them in his spiritual energy.


    Those two dogs were eating some rabbit monster. It was the perfect chance to attack them. Wasting no time, he shoots arrows toward these two dogs. These two don''t even get to know how they died.


    Sam collected his arrows and the monster''s bodies. He decided he will now return to his base because he was feeling hungry and needed to eat. He came back to his base and went towards the river to clean himself.


    He was quite lucky these days because today he once more gets a spiritual nt. Because of this, he was thinking about searching for those spiritual nts and fruits besides hunting monsters. If luck is better, he will get many spiritual nts. Just thinking about getting many rare spiritual nts and fruits makes himugh. "Hahaha, while others were busy killing monsters, I will be busy collecting those rare spiritual nts. Haha...."


    He left the river after finishedughing. But when came in front of his cave, he was speechless. Previously, he didn''t notice, but now he clearly saw three different footsteps going towards his cave. He instantly bes alert. He had previously not sensed anyone, but now he guessed that the other party was hiding. Because of this, he didn''t sense them.


    He activates his concealment technique and enters the dark cave. He didn''t light up the torches. Making no noise, he slowly advances. He doesn''t know the other party''s motive. If they want to harm him, he will instantly attack them.


    This cave was enormous, and there were big rocks where anyone could hide. Because of this, he needed to be extra careful. After searching for a few minutes, he finally found those intruders. Three ck figures were now behind a big rock. He slowly went behind them. Those three intruders were now watching toward the entrance.


    Sam brings out his knife and presses against one intruder.


    "Who are you? What are you all doing in my cave? What is your motive?" Sam asked them.


    Those three intruders be surprised that someone, without them sensing, appears behind them. They instantly bring their two hands in the air.


    "We didn''t mean to invade your cave, but we just didn''t have a choice. My two teammates betrayed us and joined the other team. They attack us. I alone can only face them, but because there were 10 warriors against us, my one teammate got injured and we are now waiting for my teammate to recover from his injury." One girl exins to him their situation. By hearing her, it looks like she was the leader.


    " Who are you?" Sam asked her.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "My name is Jeni Chaffy. I am from the Royal school. These two are my friends and teammates. She was Tina Hance, and she was Kenny Rem. Kenny is who got injured and we are waiting for her to recover," Jeni introduces herself and also introduces her friends to Sam.


    Sam inspected the girl called Kenny. After he was sure that Kenny was seriously injured. He put down his knife. He lit up the fire torches.


    Now the dark cave wasn''t dark. Those three finally got to see Sam''s figure.


    "Hello, my name is Sam kainer. I am really sorry for my rude behavior, but I think you can understand," he said to them.


    "No problem. We also understand. If someone invades our base, we also do something like this," Jeni told him.


    "Did she take a health drink?" Sam asked her while he sat down on the ground.


    "No, we are just about to feed the health drink when we hear your footsteps and hide behind the rock," she said, embarrassingly.


    "Then what are you waiting for? Quickly feed her the health potion," Sam said seriously.


    "Yes," she said, and wasting no time, she quickly fed her the health potion. Tina was supporting Kenny and Jeni to feed her the potion. It was a quite high-grade potion because in just a few minutes her condition got better.


    One thing that made him speechless was Kenny''s willpower. Even with such injuries, she didn''t get unconscious.


    Sam brings out the food. He looked at them and asked, "Want to eat something?"


    Those three girls look at each other and sit down beside him. They be speechless after seeing him eating. Just a few minutes earlier, he was about to attack them, but now he was eating without caring about the world.


    Sam offered them food but Jeni rejected him telling them they also have food. Jeni also brings out the food and with her teammates, they eat. Don''t know what happened but after seeing Sam eating they also feel hungry.


    [A/N: This is the superpower our foody Sam has. If anyone saw him eating food, they would also be hungry. Haha.. this was the power of food.]


    "If you all don''t mind, you can share your story with me," Sam told them. He was quite interesting. Who dares to attack her?


    _________To be continued___________

 Chapter 90 90 - Dark Association

    Saw remembered why he felt familiar when he heard Jeni''s name. So, she was Jeni Chaffy, her grandmother was an S-grade warrior. He previously saw her in the news. She was the first person to reach the peak of E-grade.


    "Who has the courage to attack the granddaughter of Vena Chaffy, the fire queen?" Sam thought.


    "I didn''t know what happened, but my other teammates who betrayed me weren''t like that previously. We went to many dungeons together. They are my most trusted teammates and friends. But yesterday I don''t know what happened but suddenly Max and Zen behaved strangely. We didn''t know what happened. We also asked them, but Max and Zen also said that they didn''t know what happened to them, but they felt pain in their head. Sometimes they scream like that, but a few minutester, they stop screaming. We thought everything was over. After that, we also fought with a group of Vicious dogs."


    " Then we came near the river to take a rest. We were continuously fighting. Because of this, Kenny and Tina needed some rest to recover their energy. When we ate, Max and Zen suddenly got up from the ground and told us they would go to the toilet. We suspected nothing. But you can say sometimeter, I felt ufortable, like something bad was about to happen to me. I can surely tell you that, when I feel like this, it never goes wrong. Because sometimeter, Max and Zen came back, but they weren''t alone. They came back with 8 more Warriors, whom I didn''t recognize. They also wear some unknown school uniform. Just looking at that situation, you can see they wereing for me. I tried to talk with Max and Zen, but I feel they weren''t the Max and Zen I know. Just looking at them, you can tell they weren''t in their senses. It felt like they became someone''s puppet."


    "As you can guess, what happens after that? Me with Kenny and Tina fighting with them. I injured 4 of their warriors, but Kenny got injured badly. Because of this, I escaped from there with Kenny and Tina. Today we found this cave and hid here. When we heard your footsteps." Jeni finishes her story.


    Sam said nothing. He only silently heard her story. He already guessed that if only someone had a mental problem, they would attack Jeni. But now, after hearing her story, he felt someone was behind these attacks. Someone who controls her two teammates and their primary target was Jeni. It means one thing that someone wants to harm her despite knowing who she is.


    '' If someone can control them, despite knowing that the association was watching them. It means the man who was controlling her two teammates isn''t any low-grade warrior. A high-grade warrior is interfering in the college exam. I don''t know if the association will take action and will Jeni''s grandmother take any action?'' These were questions Sam was thinking about right now.


    Sam doesn''t know, but in the association, a serious discussion is going on. In the discussion, all the principals of the college, the head of the association, many high-grade warriors, and also Jeni''s grandmother were present. Many more S-grade warriors are alsoing towards Lais City. She was furious after watching that someone wanted to harm her granddaughter. When she will get to know the identity of the person doing all of this, they will face the wrath of the fire queen.


    "I actually think that someone from the dark association is behind this. He didn''t want to harm Jeni but wanted to kidnap her, then use her to ckmail us," the Principal of the Golden Dawn told everyone.


    " I also think this is the case," the Principal of White Tiger also agrees with him.


    "If this is the real reason, then we need to stop the exam," the Principal of the Royal academy told.


    "No, we can''t stop the exam because if we stop the exam, then those warriors from the dark association will think that we were afraid of them. We feared them because of this we stopped the exam," Markus m the head of the warrior association told everyone. Everyone nodded after hearing Markus.


    "Maria quickly came here," Markus called his student.


    "Yes, master," Maria Cristi, the student of Markus, asked him.


    "Maria quickly sends some A-grade warriors into the dark forest. Also told them to inform the top 10 students to keep careful. I don''t think those dark association warriors will attack the warriors who aren''t on the top 10 list. Because they know we will not give importance if they weren''t on the top 10 list," Markus told her. Maria, after hearing his order, nodded and quickly left the meeting room.


    "Sorry everyone, I think it was my fault. I shouldn''t release the top 10 list. Because of the list, now they were attacking those students," Markus said to them with deep regret. Now he was feeling guilty.


    "Shut up, old man," Vena mmed her fist on the table.


    " This is not your fault. Those Damn dark associations will pay for that. Just if I get to know their location, then they will know the wrath of this fire queen," she retorted.


    "I think because we aren''t that active nowadays, those small fries have got the courage. They don''t know what they are facing," she said while trying to calm herself down.


    "Markus, I don''t think they will control those students if they weren''t in the city. Lock down the city, then search for those Damn mosquitoes," Vena said, to which everyone agreed.


    Immediately, Markus orders his trusted warriors to lock down the city and search for those warriors from the dark association.


    Many warriors came to know about this incident. They also help the association search for those warriors from the dark association. Victor, Hina, and Gloria also came to know about this. Alena informed them and also asked them to help the association.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Hina, after hearing all of this, cried.


    "My baby, after so much struggle, could finally pursue his dream. But now someone wants to harm him," she was saying all of this while crying. She wasn''t a soft person who cried easily, but just thinking about Sam once again bing a broken man made her cry.


    Gloria trying to calm down her mother. She was furious at those warriors from the dark association.


    ''If they dare to touch his brother, I will make sure that I will send them to hell,'' Gloria thought while trying to calm down her mother.


    Victor said nothing, he just went to his bedroom and a few minutester, he came back wearing his Armor. He will search for those warriors and hunt them down. "Nobody messes with my family."


    It is actually not only Victor''s thought but also the thought of many fathers who also get to know that their children''s lives were in danger. They can''t tolerate this.


    In an unknown room.


    Two warriors were watching the tv. Suddenly, his mobile phone rang.


    "Hello, did you seed?" he asked immediately.


    "Sorry boss, but the girl got away," he replied.


    "Damn it. Useless people," He throws his phone in anger.


    " Calm down. It wasn''t their fault, but you should understand who she was. From the first, it''s not that easy to harm her with those weaklings," the other warrior who was watching TV replied.


    "Now the key problem is that the warrior association will be on alert. I think they have already locked down the city. We needed to be careful. You should carefully, even if you got caught by the association, don''t tell them about our big boss''s n. Even if it costs your life. This world needs peace and we will give them peace. Haha..." He said that and startedughing like a maniac.


    "Don''t worry, boss. Even if I get caught, my mouth will be closed," the warrior that smashed his mobile replies to the other warriors while he was kneeling on the ground.


    If you look carefully, then you can see that all the top 10 rank photos were on the wall and have a cross Mark on them.


    ____________________


    All the students were unaware of this. They were hunting monsters when the top 10 students were informed by the teacher that they needed to be careful. Because someone wants to harm them.


    If you were thinking what Sam would think because just when he came to the limelight, he got targeted by some dark association warriors, then Sam thought nothing. He wasn''t a coward that will get scared but some unknown warrior. If they target him, then he will show them the hell.


    When Jeni and Sam were talking suddenly, they heard footstepsing from outside. They instantly be alert.


    Sam nces at his life-detecting device. It showed only one person was approaching them. Sam doesn''t know who he was, but if it was the enemy, then did a mistakeing here. It was easy to enter the cave, but it was very difficult to leave without his permission.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 91 91- Making Everyone Speechless

    Sam activates his concealment technique and in front of Jeni''s eyes, he bes invisible. It was like he merged into the darkness.


    Jeni and her teammates also react quickly and hide. The sound of footsteps gets closer and closer. Sam and the girls were now looking toward the entrance. They saw a person slowly enter the cave.


    "Sam, Jeni, don''t worry. I am a warrior from the warrior association. You can see my badge. You cane now. Saint Markus sent me to tell you something," the man said, seeing no one in the cave. Most likely, they were hiding. Sometimes they got attacked by a group, so it was a natural thing for them to hide.


    Seeing the badge was real, Jeni sighed in relief. Thankfully, it was the warrior from the association. She and her teammates finally came out from their hiding ce.


    The warrior looked around, but he didn''t see Sam.


    "Mr. Sam, you can alsoe out. I am seriously from the warrior association," He said after not finding Sam.


    " You don''t need to worry about me. You can continue with the exnation. Why association sends you here, tell us," Sam said to him while making his voice echo through the cave. With this, no one can tell where he was.


    The warrior sighed after seeing that Sam still didn''t believe him.


    Wasting no time, he exined.


    "Saint Markus, send me to inform you that someone from the dark association was behind the previous attack. He/She controls those students who have weak mind protection. Saint thinks that their primary target was the students from the top 10 list. So, Ms. Jeni and Mr. Sam, you two also are on the list. I came here to alert you about them. Don''t let your guard down," He slowly exined the situation.


    "Also Miss Jeni, your grandmother sent you this," He said and brought out a ne.


    Jeni equips the ne. This ne has a shield-like pendant. The shield was blue and green.


    "Miss wearing this ne, your defense and healing power will be 4 times stronger than before," the warrior exins about the ne.


    .........


    " Also Mr. Sam, Miss Alena, send something for you," He said while bringing out a bracelet.


    " Oh, thank you for the hard work," Sam suddenly appeared behind him and said. He wears the bracelet in his right hand. The bracelet was ck, but it had red stripe lines.


    Seeing Sam''s sudden appearance surprised him. Because previously he didn''t even sense him, now he suddenly appeared behind him. Just thinking about that if he was an enemy, what will happen to him, made him gulp down. He was a peak D-grade warrior. Still, Sam''s sudden appearance makes him scared.


    "Nice to meet you, Mr. Sam. It was a gift from Miss Alena. This bracelet can double your attack power and also increase your speed. Also, the important ability of this bracelet was that it increases your control over fire," the warrior exins the bracelet''s ability to Sam. But one thing was confusing, ''Why did someone like Miss Alena give this bracelet to him?'' He had this question in his mind but said nothing.


    "Mr. Sam, Saint Markus, and Saint Vena want you two to stick together until they solve this matter. Mr. Sam is hunting solo and Ms. Jeni''s one teammate is injured. It will be quite good for both of you to stick together," He said to them. Actually, it was not only Saint Markus and Saint Vena''s ideas, but Sam''s family, Alena, and Jeni''s father also agree on this matter. They should stick together and help each other until they solve the matter.


    The warrior left the cave after finishing his exnation.


    San was now eager to try his new powers. Just wearing the bracelet makes him feel stronger than before.


    "Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 17+5


    Agility: 16+5


    Physique: 16


    Intelligent(mental power): 19


    Spirit: 09


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Special (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Upgrade point: 984K. "


    Seeing his strength and agility that increased by 5 points made him surprised. He didn''t even think this bracelet could increase his strength and agility. Just looking at you can tell it wasn''t Your regr medium-grade artifact. It was actually a high-grade artifact that made him speechless.


    "Wait a moment," Sam said to them and left the cave. A few minutester, he came back. He actually went outside to check if he could sense anyone near his cave. Even with the life detector, he didn''t sense anyone. But be doubly sure he also makes many traps around his cave.


    "Don''t worry, everything is alright. I didn''t find anyone near the cave. The main thing is you all should rest. I will be on guard," Sam said to them. He can tell those didn''t even rest from yesterday. Jeni was betterpared to other girls.


    Jeni looked at her teammates and nodded toward Sam.


    "Wait, don''t sleep on the ground. Here, let me set up my tent. You can rest there," He said to them when those girls were about to sleep on the ground and bring out his tent.


    Seeing that he brought out a tent made the girl speechless. Seeing how many things he brought out made them speechless. It was like Sam wasn''t here for the exam; he came here for a pic. But saying nothing to him, they enter the tent. They know it was his personal matter.


    Sam sat down in a corner of the cave. He will also take some rest. But even when he was taking a rest, he didn''t let go of his guard. It was a habit he developed in the dungeon. He always goes to the dungeon solo because of this. He developed this type of habit.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Grade: E-grade (peak)


    Potential: Special


    Point: 60. "


    Sam looks at his points. He finally collects 60 points. Now that he got some free time, he thought it suddenly came to his mind.


    "A few minutes ago, that warrior said that I and Jeni were on the target list. The warrior also said that only students from the top 10 list were on the target list. That means I am also on the top 10 list."


    "..."


    " How the hell did this happen? Where have all the geniuses gone? I didn''t even collect that many monsters. Even with that, I am on the top 10 list," Sam thought. He didn''t know what he should do in this situation? Should he be happy because he was on the top 10 list? Or should he be sad because some high-grade warriors are targeting him because he was on the top 10 list? He releases a deep sigh.


    "But if I am on the list, then mom, dad, and sister saw that. Did I make them proud? " He thought while thinking about his family. Just imagining his mother, father and sister were proud and smiling. Imagining their smiling face improves his mood.


    "So, what if I am on their list? What can they do to me? Are they wanting to control my mind? Haha, I also like to see if they can break my mind''s protection. I don''t think those grade warriors can enter the dark forest. That means only the students who were controlled by them will attack him. Haha, just let theme," Sam murmured and smiled slightly. He will enjoy fighting with them. Just thinking about the fight makes his heart pumped up.


    _______________________________________


    In the Lais City''s hall room,


    Seeing the smile on Sam''s face makes everyone in the room speechless. Everyone in the room was worried about them, but here Sam was,ughing like a fool. He also brings many foods and also brings a tent. Like he came to a pic. Seeing this, everyone in the room didn''t even know how to react.


    "Haha hahaha... Hahaha," Markus suddenlyughed.


    "This boy was calmpared to other students. Haha, Alena, where do you find this weird boy? I would dieughing," Markus said while heughed. In this tense moment, Sam''s behavior makes everyone''s mood light.


    "Granduncle, he was Gloria''s brother. Please forgive him," Alena said to him.


    "Don''t worry, don''t worry. We aren''t angry at him. It''s just we should be thankful to him. He makes our mood light. Haha, what an interesting boy," Markus said while waving his hand. He really didn''t get angry at Sam, he just got interested in him.


    " Hahaha... Gloria''s brother is funny. Also, I think he was very good at hiding himself," the Principal of the Royal academy said to her. He also got interested in him because anybody can tell that Sam was a master at hiding himself. A perfect assassin-type warrior. It was just that his potential was not that good.


    "Hmmm..... I hope this boy does nothing to my granddaughter," Vena said with a haughty expression.


    "Don''t worry Vena. I think this boy is more powerful than Jeni. I don''t know why he is hiding? But I have a feeling that we will get to see his power," Markus said while looking towards the screen. On the screen, Sam wasughing like a fool.


    ______________To be continued____________

 Chapter 92 92 - Killing Elephant Beetles.

    "Sam..... Sam, wake up," Jeni said to Sam while she was trying to wake him up.


    "Don''t worry, I am not sleeping. Usually like this, I recover my energy while using my recovery technique." He opened his eyes and told her.


    "I think you all are now ready to hunt monsters. Then let''s go. I want to increase my points," Sam looked at them and said.


    "Hmm, I also agree. Let''s go," Jeni also agrees with him. She also doesn''t want to fall behind.


    All four of them came out of the cave. Sam decided on a direction and all of them went in that direction. Just a few minutester, they spotted 5 cold crocodiles. Those crocodiles were now drinking water from the river.


    Sam, wasting no time, brings out the bow. He also coated the arrows with his spiritual energy and shot them. He shoots three arrows toward the crocodile and sessfully kills them.


    Jeni already behind him. She attacks two crocodiles with her thunderbolt. These electric bolts contain 10k volts of electricity, and because the crocodiles were in the water, they became dead bodies. The remaining crocodile also got injured by the thunderbolt. Kenny and Tina attack the remaining crocodile with their sword and sessfully kill him. You can say this all happens within one minute. Now, you can imagine how fast they were.


    Their speed also impressed Sam. Previously, he felt that they would be a burden to him, but watching their teamwork, he was now feeling embarrassed. But what can you say? Was it his fault to underestimate them?


    He doesn''t know, but Jeni also had the same thought as him. She also thought Sam cannot maintain his speed. He will be the burden, but yea, she knows she was wrong.


    Nobody tells anyone anything. After putting the body of the monster in the inventory, they left the ce. Because in his life detector, he could detect monsters. Just a few miles away from them, those monsters.


    This life detector wasn''t his. Jeni gives him this device, seeing his life detector is only a medium-grade device. Sam''s life detector has a range of 1 km, but this new device has a range of 5km. In the 5km area, they can detect any life. Previously, when Jeni entered the tent to rest, a few minutester, she came out from the tent and gave him this new device. Jeni was grateful and because of this, he gifted him with this device. It was like saying thanks to him and also they were now together as a team.


    Sam suddenly signal them to stop. Because in front of them were 15 elephant beetles. With those monsters, a group of five warriors were fighting. Just looking at them, you can tell that no one in the team reached the D-grade. Even two of the members of the team were intermediate E-grade.


    "How the hell do they get the courage to fight with those dangerous beetles? Even a peak E-grade warrior will have a hard time fighting against them," Sam thought, seeing their fight. Those beetles have a monstrous defense. It was like they were wearing some kind of Armor, also their attack power was insane.


    Jeni suddenly came beside him and whispered.


    "Should we help them?"


    "Not now. We will wait for some time. I think you forget that we all have the bracelet that will teleport us if our life is in danger," Sam also whispered. He wasn''t a saint who always helped others. He also needed points.


    She nodded and looked at Kenny and Tina. They also nodded and agreed with him. It was the college exam where the more points they collect, the more benefits they will get. If those monsters send those warriors to back the association, then it will be helpful for them. Because theirpetitors were decreasing.


    All five warriors were closebat fighters. Because of this, the battle wasn''t in their favor. These beetles have the strongest defense. Their attack did minor damage to these beetles. If they want to damage their beetles'' defense, then their attack power needs to be stronger than those beetles'' defense.


    As you guessed, these beetles weren''t their favorite. Those two intermediate E-grade warriors try their hardest to fight against those beetles, but their bracelet gets activated and teleports them. Those other three warriors were still trying to fight those beetles.


    "Why aren''t you helping them? Looking at their dress, I can tell they are also from the Base school," Kenny asked Sam with a low voice.


    " Haha... Those students belong to the elite students from my school. I am just nobody at school. I think they will feel humiliated if I help them," he said to them. Those five also belong to the Base school, but Sam wasn''t nning to help them. In this exam, everyone was hispetitor.<novelnext></novelnext>


    It surprised Sam and the girls because those warriors could kill three beetles. But the next moment they got teleported to the warrior association.Sam doesn''t know where they will teleport, but it doesn''t matter to him. Because he wasn''t nning on getting eliminated like this.


    "Now girls, it was our time. Kenny and Tina wait for my signal. When I will give you the signal, only then you two will attack them. Understand," San told them. Kenny and Tina nodded after hearing Sam''s order.


    "I will attack them with my arrows and Jeni, you will attack them with your thunderbolt spell. Understand," Sam said to Jeni. She also nodded after hearing Sam''s order.


    They didn''t know why after hearing Sam''s order, they all agreed to him. It was like Sam became their leader and they also epted that fact.


    Sam already coated five arrows with his spiritual energy, and he was ready to shoot. He looks at Jeni and she looks at him. They both nodded.


    Sam released those five arrows continuously toward those five beetles. Quickly and silently, these arrows went toward the Beatles, and they pierced through their skull. Which surprised all the girls. They all know how powerful the defense these beetles have, but those arrows are still easily pierced through their skull.


    Jeni was speechless, but she still attacked those beetles with her thunderbolt. But these aren''t your normal thunderbolts. Previously, the thunderbolt was yellow, but now this thunderbolt is white. This was the white lighting which contained 50k volt electric Power. Which instantly killed three beetles. Their insane defense also can''t win against 50k volt electric Power.


    "Now, attack," Sam blurted. Instantly, Kenny and Tina attacked those beetles. Only four more monsters remain. Kenny and Tina attacked them with their strongest techniques. Sam and Jeni didn''t interfere with their fight, but they were ready to help them. It was Kenny and Tina''s fight. It took some time, but they could kill them.


    "Nice," he said and showed a thumbs-up sign to them.


    He didn''t notice, but Jeni was looking at him all this time. This Sam was the first interesting warrior she has ever seen. He keeps bringing surprises. Even when being a peak E-grade warrior, he instantly killed 5 of those beetles. How did he do it? It was still a mystery to her. Until now, he met many warriors, but no one was as interesting as him. They like to befriend her because of her grandmother. They all were afraid of her. But this Sam was different. He didn''t even care about her identity. He only cares about eating.


    "Well done, you two," Sam said happily. He always wanted this type of teammate. This was the fun of hunting when you hunt with your teammates. He already vowed that he will find good teammates like these girls. They really were good teammates. Previously, he thought they would never listen to his order, but he thought it was wrong. They said nothing unnecessary when he was giving the order. Because of this, Sam was happy.


    "Well, girls, we will take some rest. We all need to recover our energy. The deeper we will go, the more danger we will face. Also, remember we need to beware of those warriors from the dark association," Sam said to them while he was collecting his arrows and those five monsters'' bodies.


    Jeni, Kenny, and Tina all agreed with him. Previously, they used much power to finish those beetles, and now they needed to recover those energies.


    ''What happens if they continuously fight monsters and use almost all of their energy, then suddenly those warriors from the dark association attack them?'' These were questions they were thinking about right now. Fortunately, they weren''t in that kind of situation. They all sit down near the river.


    But unexpectedly, Sam brings out the food. Which makes all the girls once again speechless. They roll their eyes and focus on recovering their energy. After seeing that no one was interested in eating, he ate alone.


    "Food is the love of my life. Without food, I can''t do anything," Sam suddenly said this while he was enjoying his food. After hearing these lines, the girls once be speechless.


    [A/N: What did you expect from a foodie?]


    ''Is he only thinking about food and hunting? Like how can someone eat this much food?'' they asked themselves, after seeing the quantity of the food that Sam was eating.


    They don''t know, but when Sam broke through the grade and became an early D-grade warrior, his eating capacity also increased.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 93 93 - Poison Bats

    Sam was eating food, and the girls were resting, but suddenly they heard many noises from the sky. They saw two groups of poison bats fighting with each other.


    "Everyone, quickly leave this ce!" He suddenly said this to the girls. Because of those poison bats attacking each other with their poison, the air bes poisonous. It was very dangerous to inhale this poisonous air.


    These poisonous bats were the peak E-grade monsters. For this reason, their poison was also a lot stronger than those F-grade poison bats. This poison can kill any warriors who were still in E-grade within a few minutes. As you can guess, how deadly was this poison?


    The girls didn''t ask him ?questions. All of them quickly covered their mouth and nose with a face mask and left the area quickly. They needed to get as far as they could.


    Not only Sam and his teammates were running, but many other warriors were also running for their lives. Sam also spotted Elena and her teammates who were also ruining in a different direction from him.


    D-grade warriors or even early D-grade warriors can resist the poison, but it still harms them. If they don''t take antidotes on time, it can also harm their life.


    After running for a few minutes, they finally came to a safe ce. This ce was far away from the poison bats, so they should be safe from the poison.


    Just looking at the situation, everyone wants to hunt to kill those piston bats. Why the hell do those poison bats start fighting each other? Many warriors cast their spells. Sam and Jeni are also ready to shoot those piston bats. Why should they miss this chance?


    You should know that the lighting attack was faster than those other elemental attacks. The light attack was the fastest, but in this situation, the light element attack won''t do anything to those poison bats.


    Sam and Jeni look at each other and smirk. Instantly, they attack those poison bats. Sam attacks with his arrows, but he not only coats the arrows with his spiritual energy, but he also changes the attribute of the spiritual energy. Yes, you guessed it right. He attacked those bats with his ming arrows.


    In the sky, you can see 30 poison bats fighting with each other. Sam continuously shoots 10 arrows toward them. Those arrows made an illusion of a phoenix while they were going towards the bats. This phoenix was ready to hunt those poison bats.


    Jeni also attacks those bats with her thunderstorm attack. A? powerful attack that contains 500 k volt of electricity. It was her strongest spell. This attack was an area damage spell.


    Sam could kill 10 poison bats, and Jeni could kill 8 poison bats.


    "Nice," Sam said while he was panting. He really uses a lot of spiritual energy this time, but he was happy. Jeni is alreadyying down on the ground. She uses almost all of her energy in the attack.


    Kenny quickly brings out two spiritual energy potions and has them. Sam and Jeni gulp the potion. The spiritual energy potion was a rare potion. Only high-grade warriors get that. No one below B-grade gets those potions.


    A few minutester, Sam recovered some of his energy. Jeni is stillying down on the ground and it will take more time to recover her full energy.


    "You two wait here. I will collect our loot," Sam said to the girls, and left the area. He needs to collect the body of the monsters that he killed and also needs to collect the arrows.


    Sam activated his concealment technique and went towards the monsters. He quickly collected the loot and left the area. Jeni recovered almost half of her energy.


    "Let go, our work is done," he said to them. They all agreed and left the ce.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Rank: Peak E-grade


    Potential: Special


    Point: 140.   "


    Sam looks at this point. After this much killing, his points became 140. Which was good for him.


    "Name: Jeni Chaffy


    Rank: Early D-grade


    Potential: Rare


    Points: 145.  "


    Jeni also checked her rank. She didn''t know if she was still on the top 10 list or not.


    "Name: Kenny Rem<novelnext></novelnext>


    Rank: peak E-grade


    Potential: Special


    Points:105. "


    ____________


    " Name: Tina Hance


    Rank: Peak E-grade


    Potential: special


    Points:104. "


    Kenny and Tina also checked their points. Even though they didn''t get points like Sam and Jeni, they were still happy getting the points they had.


    "I know, just something ago we took a rest, but as you can see, Jeni needed to recover her full energy. So, we will take a brief rest, until Jeni recovers her energy," he said to them.


    He doesn''t know why, but he was feeling something fishy. ''Like why the hell are those poison bats fighting with each other?'' He thought about this question. It was umon in the outer zone where monsters would fight each other. Here, those monsters had only one goal in their mind, which was to kill those humans. He guessed that someone from the dark association was behind this.


    "I needed to be very careful. Who knows what those criminals will gain doing these?" This was a question that he now only has. It was a very tough decision, because what will those warriors from the dark association do? He needs to be ready for any sneak attack.


    ___________________?


    The Warriors association was busy searching. They fully lockdown the city. No one could leave the city. At any cost, they need to find the culprit.


    Not only did Jeni get attacked by the dark association, but other students also got attacked by them. Some time ago, Elena and her teammates got attacked by students whom she didn''t know. They all were wearing the Base school uniform, but she didn''t remember them. But one thing was that those warriors were unafraid of pain. It was like until they fulfill their goal, they won''t stop, even if you injure them or even cut their hands or feet. They were like zombies and someone was controlling them.


    In the meeting room,


    Everyone has a serious expression. Two more S-grade warriors joined the meeting. They all were now pretty angry at those dark associations. Because those students whom they were controlling were in a very dangerous situation. They became like zombies, which was very dangerous for everyone. It can harm those students'' potential. They can also lose their life. Because of this, everyone in the room was furious.


    They had already attacked L, Aliya, and Gustav. One of L''s teammates got eliminated when they were fighting with those students. Aliya got injured when she was fighting with those students. She wasn''t that seriously injured. Still, it affects her. Gustav''s two teammates were eliminated.


    The major problem is that those warriors who were attacking them were the same as them. They were also students; it was just someone controlling them. Warriors from the association have already informed all the students from the top 10 list about this. Because of this, those top 10 students didn''t want to injure those warriors who were attacking them.


    "Damn it¡­.. How long will it take to catch those warriors from the dark association?" Vena asked angrily.


    " Don''t worry, they already have some clue about them. It was just a matter of time," Markus said with a sigh. He was also furious at those dark association''s Warriors.


    As S-grade warriors, they usually can observe the entire city. It was just someone or something blocking their observation. It was like an invisible, enormous wall was blocking them. Which was very frustrating for them. They were the S-grade warriors, and now some small organizations blocked their observation power.


    "Ring¡­ Ring¡­ Ring," Markus'' phone rang. He quickly picked up the phone.


    "Sir, we found the room where those warriors from the dark association were staying previously. By looking at the evidence, we can tell they were two warriors staying in the room. Also, sir, we found a strange device. We never send this type of device. But this device is the reason your observation power didn''t work. Sir, it was just that we could not do any damage to the device, and we also could not switch it off," the warrior said to him. Just hearing the warrior''s words instantly improves his mood.


    " Quickly send the device, using the teleporting," Markus said quickly. He didn''t want to dy. Just what was that device that can block their power? He is also curious about it.


    "Guys, good news. My warriors already found the device that was blocking our observation power," he blurted. He knows not only he but the other S-grade warriors were also frustrated about this, that someone could block their observation power.


    A few minutester, Maria entered the room and handed over a strange device. The device looked like a baseball.


    ________________To be continued_________________


    [A/N: Guys, I hope you will like this chapter. Have a good day guys.]

 Chapter 94 94 - Lepris.

    Sam and the girls were now going deeper into the forest. Jeni almost recovered all of her energy, so they once again start their journey toward the forest.


    While they were going towards the forest, a group of people were following them. They were all covered in a ck dresses and followed them.


    Sam and the girls werepletely unaware of the fact that someone was following them. Those warriors also maintain a safe distance. Because of this, the life detector also could not detect them.


    Sam suddenly signals them to stop. Because in front of them, they see a group of Lepris. These monsters looked like leopards. Butpared to the leopards, these Lepris were bigger, and also they were one of the fastest monsters.


    They saw that 13 Lepris were ahead of them. They all know if they use their normal way to hunt those Lepris, then they are bound to fail. Compared to these monsters, their speed wears slower, they won''t be able to keep up with those monsters. These monsters were in the peak E-grade. Still, their speed was faster than most of the early D-grade warriors. In one word, even if you reach the D grade, you won''t be able to kill them if your speed is lower. They also have a good amount of attack power, but their fatal weakness was that their defense was low. Just one good attack from a peak E-grade warrior can kill them.


    "Now guys, as you know, we won''t be able to hunt them if we hunt them normally. So, if anyone has any ns, tell me," he said to them. He is also thinking about a hunting n. The girls don''t know but, if he uses his full strength, then he can easily kill them. His speed wasn''t slower than that monster, but he didn''t want to reveal his full strength. Because of this, he was thinking about a hunting n.


    Those monsters were now eating something, so they won''t be leaving this area soon. Because of this, Sam and the girls were discussing the hunting n in no hurry.


    Sam silently hears the n from them. All of theme up with unique ns.


    "Sam, we can try to cast the Energy wall, and trap those monsters," Tina suggested.


    "Yes, we can do that. But, the major problem is who will kill them. As you know, to cast the energy wall we need four people and we also have only four people. Do you think we can sessfully kill them?" Sam asked her. Casting an energy wall was a good idea, but it was just they didn''t have any extra members.


    To cast an energy wall, you need four people. Then all of them needed to synchronize their spiritual energy, and then they all needed to form the wall at the same time. Like this, you can cast a spiritual energy wall. This energy wall has the highest defense Power. Suppose, 4 peak E-grade grades cast an energy wall. Then even a warrior who was in the peak D-grade won''t be able to damage this energy wall. But this energy wall also has a fatal weakness. Those warriors who were casting the energy wall can''t lose their focus. If one of them loses their focus, then the energy wall will disappear. Also, to maintain the energy wall, you needed an exorbitant amount of spiritual energy.


    "Sam, I cast the confused ray. I cast attack them with the confused ray then, we will attack them," Kenny said to him. Confused ray was one attack from light elements. For some time, you can confuse your enemy with this.


    "This is a good idea. But, when you use the confused ray, those monsters will be alert. Even if we confuse them, they can still run away and we won''t be able to kill them," Sam said to her.


    " Sam, we can also do it like this. Suppose if we somehow bring those lepris to the water, then use my thunderbolt. We can kill them," Jeni suggested. If you were thinking,'' Why is there a river?'' They advanced towards the deeper area along with the river. This river came from the Yank mountain that wasn''t far away from the dark forest. Because of the spiritual energy, many impossible things were now possible. Like this, Yank mountain always stays covered in ice, and because of this Yank mountain, the temperature of the dark forest is also low. But yea, because these spiritual energies of the human body have improved and they won''t feel cold at this temperature. In the dark forest, the temperature was now 14¡ãc.


    "It was a good idea. Wait, let''s think something," Sam said while he thought of a better n.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " So girls, I think of a better n to hunt those monsters. This n has three steps. I will attack those monsters. Then will attack to take revenge. Now at this, Kenny will use his confused ray and hide. I will jump into the river. When those monsters recover, I will once again attack them. I am damn sure they wille to attack me. To this, they will also jump at the river to attack. But Jeni, you will attack those monsters with a thunderbolt. Don''t worry about me. Just when you''re about to attack them, I will jump out of the river. So, the thunderbolt won''t be doing any damage to me. Jeni''s attack will kill some of the lepris and the others will get stunned by the lighting. At this moment, we all will attack them and kill them quickly. We need to do this quickly or they will escape. Understand," Sam said, his entire n to them. The girls nodded after hearing the n.


    "Ok, everyone move," He said and went towards those Lepris. For thest time, he looked toward the girls. After seeing all of them were ready, he cast a big fireball. He shoots the big fireball at those monsters. It instantly hit those monsters. It also creates big destruction on the ground. 3 of the monsters got killed by the attack. Instantly, the other looked at Sam and roared. Now they were furious.


    Before the fireball hits those monsters, he leaves the ce and runs toward the river. All the monsters saw he was going toward the river. Seeing this, they roar and are ready to approach him. But, suddenly they got attacked by a sharp light. It was Kenny''s attack, the Confuse ray. Instantly, those monsters lost their sense for a minute. Yes, this confusion ray can only hold them for 1 minute. But Sam also needed just 1 minute to reach the river.


    He directly jumped at the river. The river wasn''t that deep. The water only reaches his knees. But that wasn''t a problem for them. Instantly, Sam cast a fireball within a few seconds and shot toward those monsters. Because it was a normal fireball, it only takes a few seconds to cast the spell. This time, the fireball didn''t hit those monsters. But it angered them. Seeing Sam was once again attacking them, wasting no time, they approached him.


    He looked toward Jeni and nodded. Jeni already was ready to attack those monsters. The moment they touch the water, she will attack them. It took a few seconds for those monsters to reach the water and they were about to attack Sam with their sharp ws when suddenly Jeni attacked them.


    Sam didn''t even think about anything. The moment those Lepris touched the water, Sam jumped away from the water. Fortunately, he was wearing rubber boots, or he also got hit by lightning. Jeni''s thunderbolt hit them. It instantly killed 4 Lepris, and the others got injured and were stunned by the lighting.


    After shooting the thunderbolt, Jeni, wasting no time, brings out a sword. She, Kenny, and Tina quickly approached the monsters. They need to finish them as quickly as they can. Sam at this momentnded on a tree''s branch. He quickly backflips andnds in the middle of those monsters.


    He also brings out his sword and, with the girls, attacks those monsters. Because those monsters were now stunned by the lightning, they could not move. Sam and the girls didn''t miss this chance. They killed the remaining 7 monsters.


    Sam killed two Lepris, Jeni also killed two monsters, Kenny also killed two monsters, and Tina killed thest monster.


    "Nice work everyone," Sam said to them and high five them. Hunting with your teammates was the best experience. But, yea, for this to need that type of teammate whom you can trust.


    "Let''s find a suitable ce to stay at night. I don''t want to hunt at night," Sam said to them. They also agreed with him and nodded. They were about to leave when Sam heard footsteps. He frowns after hearing the footsteps. He looks at Jeni and sees she also bes alert.


    "Guys, be ready. We have some uninvited guests. Brings out your weapon and quickly hides," Sam told them. He didn''t even sense them, which made him curious. If those footsteps were of their enemy, then the moment they wille here, he will attack them.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 95 95 - Trouble

    The sound of footsteps was getting closer and closer. Suddenly, Sam''s life doctor began to vibrate. He looks at the detector. It was showing 20 life signs that wereing toward them.


    "So, herees the trouble. Sigh, guys, how are you? We will have a tough fight. If you are low on energy and health, bring out a health potion and a spiritual energy potion. We all need to start in our peak condition. I don''t think those warriors from the dark association cane here. So, it only means these warriors were students like us. But they aren''t in their senses. Those dark association warriors are controlling them. We need to defeat them, not kill them. Understand," Sam said to them. The girls nodded after hearing his words. They also agreed with them. Their two teammates were also there. They needed to bring them to their senses.


    Wasting no time, they all brought out potions and gulped down the potions. With this, they will be in their peak condition. After that, they quickly hide. Sam also activated his concealment techniques. He has already ?cast fireballs. He will attack them with a fireball. But he used little of his spiritual energy when he was casting them. With this, those warriors won''t get killed by him.


    Kenny and Tina are also ready with their weapons. The moments those warriors will get closer to them, they will attack. Jeni also casts thunderbolts, with this she can stun them and knock them out. Actually, their primary goal was to knock them out.


    Sam looked at his life detector. With this, he was observing the enemy''s position. His n was to knock them out as quickly as he could. After finishing this problem, he wants to rest and eat some food.


    He shook his head and came out of his fantasy. Those enemies already reached their ce and now they were searching for Sam and Jeni.


    Most of the students were unaware of the fact that many of their ssmates were bing their puppets, except for the warrior association. Those disgusting warriors were now also attacking the students who weren''t on the top 10 list. They were mainly attacking them to make them their puppet.


    Those 20 warriors now came very close to them. It was just a matter of time before Sam and the girls would attack them.


    "Guys, if you have a concealment technique, then use it. We need to y it safe. Those warriors aren''t our enemy. We will silently attack them. Our primary aim was to send them to the association. We need to activate their bracelets. But for this, we first need to capture them," Sam said to them while using his telepathy power.


    It surprised the girls after suddenly hearing his voice. Yea, it was natural. If you suddenly hear someone''s voice, you will also have the same reaction. The girls calm down. After hearing Sam''s words, they all nodded.


    Sam this time wasn''t nning to use his sword or his fire control. He is gonna only use his fist to solve the problem. He also ordered the girl not to use any lethal move.


    Fortunately, those warriors didn''t have life detectors.


    "Jeni, you and I will attack those peak E-grade warriors. Kenny and Tina, you two will attack those other warriors. We two will try to finish quickly so that we can join you," he said to them. Becausepared to the peak E-grade warriors, they have lower-grade warriors. In the warrior''s group, they have 5 peak E-grade warriors, 7 intermediate E-grade warriors, and 8 early E-grade warriors.


    Sam told Jeni that he will go for 3 warriors while she will go for the remaining two warriors.


    "Guys, attack." Just when those warriors came closer to them, he mentallymanded those girls to attack. Sam vanished from his ce. He instantly appears behind a warrior and gives a karate chop to the warrior in the neck. With this, the warrior bes unconscious. Sam instantly vanishes from his ce. The next moment, an arrow hit the ground where, a few seconds ago, Sam was standing.


    One of the peak E-grade warriors was an archer. He is the one who attacks him.


    Sam, sensing an arrowing towards him, vanishes from his ce and the arrow misses him. He looks toward the archer. First, he needs to take down this archer.


    Sam''s previous attack alerts those warriors. They were now inspecting the surroundings. Jeni also attacks a warrior. She directly punched the guy''s stomach. It made the warrior unconscious. She also quickly reacted and left the ce. Because an arrowes towards her.


    Wasting no time, Sam silently went towards the archer who was hiding in a tree. Making no noise, he appears behind the archer. Sam gave him a karate chop. He quickly ces the unconscious warrior on the ground. Now just one more guy.


    He looks toward the other warrior, who is now trying to fight with Jeni. Jeni, at this time, is facing two opponents at the same time. One warrior was her target and the other one was Sam''s target.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam silently came behind one warrior and also gave him a karate chop, but this time, the warriors reacted quickly. The warrior suddenly crouched down and instantly tried to kick him. Our Sam also wasn''t slower. He also instantly reacted and jumped backward.


    Sam once again dashed toward the warrior, but this time he prepared a slight surprise for the warrior. After seeing Sam, the warrior was about to punch him. But? Sam released a bright light, which instantly blocked the warrior''s vision.


    He didn''t want to miss this chance and punched the warrior. Because of the intense light, the warrior''s vision was blocked, and he wasn''t even able to sense Sam, which let him get hit by Sam''s punch. The warrior bes unconscious.


    Jeni also made the other warrior unconscious, after pping the warrior on his cheek.


    [A/N: This is the special attack they know from their birth. Be careful about this attack, it is very dangerous.]


    Sam and Jeni high five. Now it was time to help Kenny and Tina. By looking at it, you can tell Kenny and Tina already knocked out the early E-grade warriors and now they were fighting with the intermediate E-grade warriors. But fighting those intermediate warriors was giving them a hard time. It wasn''t easy for them to fight with these many intermediate warriors at the same time.


    Sam and Jeni, seeing that they were having a hard time, quickly approached them. They quickly came to Kenny and Tina''s side.


    "Guys, I am nning to use a special attack. But you need to cover your ears and crouch down or you will also get affected by the attack," Sam said to them. As you can guess, he was nning to use the sonic st technique.


    Instantly, the girls covered their ears and crouched down. Sam releases a sonic st attack. This sonic st wasn''t as powerful as his other techniques. Still, for this situation, it was sufficient.


    If you are thinking, why did he suddenly attack them with this attack? Because they all needed a rest. If they ?fight with these warriors, then it will take some time to finish, and Sam can sense the monster''s auraing toward them. So, he uses this technique, which not only knocks out these warriors but also makes those monsters flee from here.


    The attack was so intense that even after covering their ears, the girl for some time wasn''t able to hear anything. It takes some to recover their hearing. After recovering from their attack, they all re at Sam, to which he responds with a forced smile.


    After that, they did their work. They activated the emergency on those warriors'' bracelets. It takes some time to finish the work. Finally, they can rx, ?and the warrior association will help those students.


    "Let''s go guys. Finally, we can rest." With that said, they approached the cave where they had previously stayed. They now didn''t have the energy to search for a ce, and the cave was to be a safe ce. So, they were approaching the cave.


    Fortunately, no one was in the cave. They didn''t want to fight again. Sam quickly set everything up. After finishing his work, he sat down on the ground. Today was the most tiring day for him. He needed some rest.


    He brought out a lot of food and ate. The girls apanied him while eating. They all ate. It was very tiring for them and they needed some good food because they were low on energy.


    " Hey Sam, To which college you were nning to go?" Jeni suddenly asked him.


    "I know you will think I am weird, but until now I didn''t decide on any college. Haha," he said whileughing.


    The girls at each other, they didn''t know what to say. In the end, they alsoughed with Sam.


    To be continued_____________________

 Chapter 96 96 - Present Situation.

    Warriors association, Lais City.


    All the warriors were busy taking care of the students. Not only Sam''s group but also the others did the same. They all send those warriors who attacked them to the association.


    "Sigh. Fortunately, no one lost his life. Still, how much time does Mira still need? We really needed her at this moment," Markus said while signing. He was very grateful that nobody was dead. Still, those students who were controlled by the dark association were in a dangerous situation.


    Those students can die at any moment. It was one attack of mind control. This attack was called "Dead mind". Basically, who was controlling them can easily forcefully shut those students'' brains. Also, because of this, Markus and the others didn''t take any action until now. What if they take action and the criminal kills those students? This is the reason they were waiting for Mira.


    Mira Stain, an S-grade warrior. She specialized in psychic attacks. Only she can stop the mind control of these students. The moment she will arrive, they will be free from the tension.


    "Did you guys see how sharp Sam''s instinct is? Also, how good of a good leader''s quality?" Suddenly the principal of the Royal academy said to them, Previously, he didn''t think that Sam had this much goodbat ability. Now he was shocked after seeing Sam''s battle ability.


    "Yes, this boy is quite interesting. He is an excellent archer and an excellent swordsman, and he can also use spells. This boy is quite mysterious," Markus said to everyone. Everyone nodded after hearing his words. They also agreed with Saint Markus.


    "I know why you three have a question in your mind. Because he only has a special grade potential, you didn''t think he could be a high-grade warrior. But I think you all were wrong. I think he will be a great warrior in the future," he said to the principals of the top three colleges.


    Because those warriors who had the special grade potential, they in future only reached peak D-grade or early C-grade. They won''t be able to increase their rank any further. This was the reason those principals were looking at him with pity.


    Vena also nodded after hearing Markus''s word. She also feels that way. She saw no one as powerful as Sam when they were only p E-grade. It is also quite interesting how her granddaughter is following his order. Jeni was the girl who doesn''t like to hear anyone''s order, but now her behavior differspletely from her usual behavior.


    But not only Sam and his group only performed this well. The other warriors are also doing well.


    Few warriors also attacked her some time ago. She and her teammates, wasting no time, fought with those warriors. 15 warriors attacked them, but with her 6 teammates, they sent those warriors to the association.


    Now they can see a group of warriors now going toward Erina and her teammates. Erina and her teammates are also doing well in the exam. They were easily killing those monsters, but how would they respond when they noticed those warriors?


    Seeing this, all the warriors in the room just hope Mira quickly arrives on the spot. They really need her.


    _________________________


    At this time in the sky, a person is traveling ?quickly. Mira Stain was her name. The youngest warrior was her age. She was 35-year-old, had blond hair with a slim figure. Her armor was white. She was rushing from the Royal City to Lais City as fast as she could.


    Sometime ago, she came from the dungeon and was informed about the incident. She didn''t change her clothes and quickly went towards Lais City. It still took some time, even when she was traveling as fast as she could.


    _________________________


    ''Back to the warrior association,''


    " Ring.... Ring.... Ring." Suddenly Markus''s phone rang.


    He quickly looks at his phone. It was his student, Pijus, who called him. Pijus was the captain of the searching party of those dark association warriors.


    "Tell me Pijus, any good news?" He said directly.


    " Yes, sir, I have two pieces of news. One is good and one is bad news. Good news is that we could sessfully catch one warrior. The bad news is that the other warrior who is with this man ran away. We didn''t know where the other one went. We will bring this man to the association for further investigation," he exined the news to Markus.


    After cutting the call, he spun around and excitedly told everyone that one dark association warrior got captured and warriors from the association will bring him to the association.


    "Finally, I''m gonna kill that warrior," Vena got up from her seat and a red aura wasing out of her body. She wanted to release the frustration that she is enduring these days.


    "Don''t be impulsive, Vena. We needed the other warrior''s location," Markus said.


    "Ok, you interrogate him first and after that, the warrior is mine," Vena said to him.


    ''Sigh, Mira, I hope you will reach here before something bad happens,'' he thought in his mind.


    _______________________________


    ''Back to Sam,''


    Sam was now fighting with 2 cold crocodiles. He was alone at the moment. One crocodile suddenly attacks him with a cold beam, but Sam dodges the attack and throws a knife toward the monster. The other monster came to him behind and was ready to bite down, but he had already sensed the monster and jumped away from the ce.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam suddenly used the confusing light to distract the crocodiles. He took this chance to finish those crocodiles quickly.


    "Sigh, finally," he sighed.


    If you are thinking, '' Why is he alone? Where the hell did Jeni and the others go? Did they separate?'' Then the answer was, "No, they didn''t separate. It was just Sam tools them. He happens to find something interesting in the forest, so he was given to retrieve the things and they didn''t need to follow him."


    As you can guess, Sam once again finds a rare nt. So he was approaching the nt. But these damn monsters keep attacking him. He just hoped no other students would find the nt.


    He quickly came to a location near where he previously fought with those warriors yesterday. After searching for some time, he finally found the nt.


    "White Lilith


    [A mutated nt. White Lily mutated after absorbing the spiritual energy into this. It was a special flowerpared to other nts because it can stabilize the spiritual energy in your body.] "


    Finding this nt, Sam became shocked. This was a rare nt, which was very helpful to all warriors. Sam pit away from the nts. He decided to use this nt after he upgraded his potential.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Rank: Peak E-grade


    Potential: special


    Points: 200."


    After seeing his points, he smiled. He finally gained 200 points. He didn''t know if he still was on the top 10 list, but he was happy.


    Sam quickly came back to the cave. He saw the girls were in meditation. Sensing him, they open their eyes and get up from the ground.


    "Did you finish your work?" Jeni asked him. She was bored, and because of this, she started to meditate.


    " Yup, I finally got the thing I was looking for," he said happily.


    " Ok guys, let''s go. Today, our goal is to go deeper into the forest, and I don''t think we will being back to this cave," Sam said to the girls. They also needed to get ready to leave.


    _______________________


    Unknown to anyone in the dark forest, in a cave,


    A warrior who was covered in a ck coat and mask, sitting on the ground. There is a weird symbol beside him. This weird symbol looks like a summing symbol, but the most dangerous part was the warrior making this symbol with blood. He made the symbol whileughing like an idiot.


    "Just a little more, then I can meet the lord. Hahaha," he said whileughing like a maniac.


    ___________________________


    " Markus hands over the warrior, I will make him talk," Vena said furiously. They for some time tortured the warrior to learn about their n, but the warrior was so stubborn that he didn''t even talk.


    " No, Vena. Don''t make more trouble. Wait for Mira toe here. She will then interrogate this warrior," Markus said to Vena.


    " Ring¡­.. Ring¡­.. Ring"


    Suddenly, Markus'' phone rang. He received the call. It was from Maria.


    "Teacher, we have a big problem. Suddenly, many powerful monsters came towards the dark forest. Our warriors were now fighting with those monsters, but those monsters just kepting," she exined the situation directly, wasting no time.


    "Sigh, Maria told me that many powerful monsters were nowing towards the dark forest. Maria and the others were fighting those monsters, but those monsters kepting," he briefly exined the situation to everyone.


    _____To be continued___________


    [A/N: Hoped you like this chapter. Have a good day guys.]

 Chapter 97 97 - Helping

    Chapter 97- Helping


    Sam and the girl''s finale were now traveling deeper in the forest. Compared to yesterday, they went deeper into the forest because some time ago they faced an early D-grade monster and some peak E-grade monsters. It means they were near the core area.


    Sam signals them to stop. Not far away from them, they saw Elena and Tony with their teammates fighting with 27 Lapris. Butpared to the previousprises Sam and the girls fought, these groups ofpris were different. There are 2 early D-gradepris leading the team. These two were the king and queen of this group ofpris.


    The male Lepris was dark red ?and had a fire symbol on his head. The female Lepris was Green and had a wind symbol in her head. Sam previously read about this, when a Lepris Breakthrough and bes D-grade monsters, they be proficient in one element. But, normally they be proficient in wind element but sometimes somepris bes proficient in other elements. So, the king was proficient in the fire element and the queen was proficient in the wind element.


    "Sigh, trouble," Sam sighed and said.


    He saw that the condition of Elena and Tony wasn''t that good. They have potent power, but in front of lepris''s speed, they cannot do anything. Their teammates also were getting beaten by the other Lepris. Because of the king and queen, Elena and Tony weren''t able to help their teammates.


    "Sam, we need to help them," Jeni quickly said to him.


    Sam nodded and agreed with her. He also wants to help them. Not because they were from a powerful family; he wants to help. No, he wants to help them because he has a good impression on both Elena and Tony. He knows about Elena. She was a big fan of her sister, also she belonged to a family of A-grade warriors.


    Sam also has a good impression of Tony. Even after reaching the early D-grade, he didn''t show any arrogant behavior to him.


    "Yes, we need to help them. But we need a solid n. If we just attack those monsters with no n, then. It can make the matter more dangerous," he said to them. They also agreed with him.


    "Then what should we do? Their teammates won''tst long," Kenny said to him.


    "Kenny, you attack them with a confused ray. Jeni will use this chance to reach the ce where Elena and Tony are fighting. I know you cast even when you are running. So, while you approach them, use this chance to cast a powerful attack and try to kill the queen first. Kenny and Tina, we three will attack those other monsters. If we can finish them quickly, then we can help the others. I know it will be difficult for you two and me to fight those agility-based monsters, but we still need to do our best. Oh¡­ I suddenly remember Kenny and Tina. You two still have the invisibility cloak?" Sam was exining to them his n when he suddenly remembered about the cloak.


    The invisible cloak was a product of the artifact association. It can hide your sura and make you properly invisible. But the downfall was that you can only use this cloak for a limited time. After that, it bes a normal cloak.


    "Good, Kenny and Tina then use that cloak to silently reach the towers of the warriors. Making minimum movement, try to kill those monsters. You two still need to try. I know it was hard. I will attack them with my arrows," Sam exined to them. He had a technique that would be helpful in this situation. As you can guess, he was nning to use the invisible arrows'' skill to hunt those monsters. With this technique, those wouldn''t even know how they died.


    "Ok, also Jeni, don''t make a powerful attack that will make you use most of your spiritual energy. I don''t think we will ?kill those monsters with just one hit," he said to Jeni. She nodded after hearing him. Previously, she was thinking about casting her most powerful thunder attack thunder dragon. It cost her all the spiritual energy she has but after listening to Sam, she wasn''t nning to use it. She will now cast white lighting. Which will not cost her many spiritual energies.


    "Ok, guys. Let''s go," Sam said quickly while they approached towers of warriors who were fighting with those peak E-grade or intermediate grade monsters. He instantly vanished from his ce and appeared in a branch of arge tree. He will use his bow to shoot from here.


    The girls immediately bring out those invisible cloaks, and Kenny instantly hit those monsters with a confusing ray. It will make those warriors stop their fight for 1 or 2 minutes. But it will be sufficient time to reach those warriors and kill many monsters.


    Kenny instantly attacks those monsters with a confusing ray. Suddenly a light appeared on the hunting ground, which shocked those warriors. Also, because of this intense lighting, those monsters also stop fighting. Elena and Tony looked at the monsters and saw those monsters behaving weirdly. Their eyes were in a daze. If you are thinking why those warriors weren''t affected by the light, that is because Kenny only targeted those monsters. The warriors only saw a light ball floating in the air.


    Tony and Elena looked at each other and nodded. They need to use this chance to fight with the king and queen. The fast they can kill the king and queen, the faster they will be able to help their teammates.


    At this moment, Jeni quickly went towards Elena and Tony at her fastest speed. She also starts casting her spell. The moment she reached there and finished casting her spell, she attacked the queen.


    The queen released a painful cry after getting hit by the white lightning. It made her body paralyzed for some time and she was bleeding from her mouth. This white lighting was very dangerous, because of this Jeni doesn''t use the spell that much.


    The lepris queen''s painful cry made Elena and Tony surprised. They only see a white light hit the queen and the monsters suddenly ?let out a painful cry.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "How are you two?" Jeni stood beside them and asked.


    "J-Jeni!!" both of them said at the same time.


    " Why are you here?" Elena asked.


    "Stupid, obviously to you guys," Jeni said to her.


    "Jeni, ?help our teammates. They are in a tough situation," Tony said to her. He was anxious about his teammates.


    " Don''t worry, we will save them. My teammates will help them. Now only focus on these two," she said to them. Elena and Tony nodded and agreed. Now, Jeni''s teammates would help their teammates so they can rx and focus on their fight.


    Elena and Jeni, wasting no time, attacked the queen. The king was still in a dazed state. He only heard the painful cry of the queen, but wasn''t able to do anything. Elena was a sword fighter. She attacks the queen with her special move, ''FIRE SLASH'' and Jeni attacks the queen with her white thunderbolt. As you know, the defense of these lepris was low. With thebined attack of the girls, the queen finally died.


    The lepris king was furious after hearing the painful cry of the queen, but he couldn''t see anything and he guessed he was in danger, so he escaped from there. Tony was going to attack the king when the monsters suddenly escaped from there using his agility.


    Because he could see nothing, he didn''t know which direction he was going. He didn''t enter the forest, but he escaped in Sam''s direction.


    ___________________________


    In the association,


    Mira finally reached the association and now she was busy recovering the students from the mind control. She was disconnecting the control which was controlling the students. With this, all the students'' lives won''t be in danger. Finally, all the warriors from the association sigh in relief.


    Now it''s only a matter of time until they can save all the students who were in mind control. Now it was time to take action. But first, Mira will interrogate the dark association warrior. Even the warrior said nothing. Mira can just search in his brain.


    [A/N: Scary power of the mind.]


    "How many students are still there who are under the control of the dark association?" Vena asked Markus.


    " There are still 100 students who are in control of the dark association. We needed to save them," Markus said with a sad tone. It was aplete failure of the association that those dark Association warriors could harm these students.


    ________________________________


    Victor, Hina, and Gloria were in the association. Alena was also standing beside them. They finally heard the warrior from the dark association finally get captured. Still, one warrior escapes, but with the help of Saint Mira, they can finally rx.


    __________To be continued_________


    [A/N: You can also help me by sending some gifts. Thank you. Your shameless author.]

 Chapter 98 [Bonus ] 98 - The Real Losers.

    Victor, Hina, and Gloria were in the association. Alena was also standing beside them. They finally heard the warrior from the dark association finally get captured. Still, one warrior escapes, but with the help of Saint Mira, they can finally rx. With the help of Saint Mira, now they can make their move against those dark association warriors without no worry.


    They were now watching the screen where they saw Sam with the girls fighting with the lepris. At first, they were very anxious when they saw Sam decide to fight with those monsters, but Alena said they didn''t need to worry as he already previously fought with those monsters and also had won against them. Sam''s family was busy helping the association in searching. Because of this, they also missed Sam''s fight.


    Seeing how easily Sam kills those monsters with his bow makes them proud. As they already know, Sam was interested in the sword and bow, both ?weapons. His father helped him with his sword training while his mother helped with his bow training. Sometimes Gloria also helped him with his spell training.


    They saw Sam exining his n to the girls and the girls, with no objection, agreed with him. He told them his n and their role in this n. When he finished exining his n, he jumped to a tree''s branch and brought out his bow.


    "Don''t worry aunty. I previously Sam him,manding his team. You can say he was good atmanding. This is the sign of a genuine leader," Alena said to Hina, seeing her anxiousness. But this was natural. Sam was facing the lepris, one of the dangerous animals in the wild. After hearing her words, Hina rxed a little.


    ___________________________


    Back to Sam,


    He was shooting the monsters with arrows using his rapid shoot technique and the invisible arrow technique. Fortunately, he has this technique. With this technique, it bes much easier to kill those monsters. While those monsters were focused on Kenny, Tina, and the others, he used this opportunity to kill them. You can say he bes a silent killer. Making no noise, he was killing them. Those dead monsters didn''t even know how they died.


    But he wasn''t able to kill many monsters that easily because seeing the dead lepris, the other lepris became alert. Now, it was hard to kill them. Even though they didn''t see the arrows, they still dodged most of the arrows using their instincts. Now, it was where Kenny and the others helped. Kenny and the others will attack them and shift those monsters focused on them.


    Kenny and Tina, using their invisible cloak, came toward the warriors and exined their n. After they finished exining, they once again vanished using their invisible cloak. They bring out their weapons. Kenny brought out a Balck Katana and Tina brought out a saber. These two weapons were powerful. Sam also previously checked their status.


    " Type: Weapon (Katana)


    Name: Yumi


    Grade: C+


    Attack power: (150% - 280%)


    Durability: (100% - 220%).  "


    " Type: Weapon (Saber)


    Name: Lohan


    Grade: C+


    Attack power: (140% - 260%)


    Durability: (110% - 230%).  "


    Both of the swords were powerful, and also Kenny and Tina were good at using them. They did it with their hard work.


    Now back to the present,


    Kenny and Tina were attacking those monsters with their weapons. They have already killed 5 to 6 monsters and also, because of this, those other monsters be more alert. Those monsters now attacked the warriors using their speed. These lepris aren''t that intelligent, but they still understand that something that they can see is attacking them. They needed to avoid the attack using their speed and instincts.


    Sam also shot them, but because of those continuously moving, he wasn''t able to kill them directly, but he could still injure them. With these injuries, many lepris weren''t able to use their full speed, and it gave the chance to those warriors to attack them.


    Like this Sam, and the warriors fighting with those monsters. But suddenly he feels something and looks in Jeni''s direction.


    He saw how easily Jeni and Elena killed the queen. Tony was about to attack the king when the king escaped and because of the blindness, the monster didn''t go toward the forest but came towards him. Now, it was troublesome.


    If you are thinking why the king monster still wasn''t able to see, then it''s all because when Kenny attacked those monsters with the confused ray, unknown to them, Sam used the '' blind sight'' attack toward the king and queen. It was one trick he learned recently.<novelnext></novelnext>


    He looked at the king, who came in his direction quickly. Wasting no time, he jumps from the tree, because if he is just one secondte, then he will get affected by the king''s attack. The lepris king directly hit the tree and demolished it.


    Sam didn''t waste any time. The moment hended on the ground, he attacked the monsters with a spiritual arrow. The arrow directly pierced through the monster''s leg and the monster hit the ground. Sam shoots one more arrow and kills the king sessfully.


    "Sigh" he sighed. Because he knows he will need to answer many questions from his family and also from his teammates (temporarily). More troubleing towards him. It was that he didn''t want to reveal himself, but someone was ying a game with him.


    [A/N: it''s me, hahaha.]


    As he expected, he saw Jeni, Elena, and Tony looking at him with a shocking expression. They didn''t think Sam would kill that monster. They were having trouble evennding one attack, but Sam easily killed him. It was an unbelievable thing. He can only sign after seeing their expression.


    ''I didn''t want to reveal my energy mode to anyone,'' Sam thought in his mind. It was his own special technique. He won''t reveal it easily. He was thinking of good excuses.


    Jeni and others calm down and go toward their teammates to help them. Sometimeter, they killed all the lepris.


    _______________________________


    In the association,


    Seeing how Sam easily killed the early E-grade lepris made everyone speechless.


    "Gloria, did you know the technique that your brother used? Also, how did he keep up with the speed of the king?" Alena asked Gloria.


    "No, master. He didn''t tell me anything about this technique, and I don''t know how he kept up with the lepris," she replied to her teacher.


    " I know my baby boy is good at using a bow. But I don''t know that he improved this much," Hina also said with a surprised expression.


    " Hahaha... What did I tell you previously? See, I was right. That boy is full of mystery," Markus said to everyone whileughing.


    " He could kill those monsters easily. That means he was at least in early D-grade, but why didn''t his result show that he is only a peak E-grade warrior?" Vena asked Markus.


    " I also think that San was an early D-grade warrior. But don''t know what he is hiding his rank? Also, how did he escape from the device that measures their rank?" Markus was also confused about it.


    " Even his family doesn''t know about the technique he used. So it seems like he didn''t want to tell anyone about this technique, even though he didn''t want to tell his parents," he says while looking at the scene.


    ________________________________


    Sam and others were now resting in a ce. After killing those monsters, they decided to rest here and recover their energy. Jeni was talking with Elena and Tony. She was curious why they were together facing those monsters.


    While Sam is eating food. After this fight, he was feeling hungry. Students from the Base schools were looking at him with weird expressions. They didn''t know how they should feel? Previously, they all thought that he was just a loser, but seeing how easily he killed those monsters made them feel ?they were the original losers.


    Tony''s teammates didn''t know any of this, so they were continuously talking with him. They want to know about him, his rank, his techniques, etcetera¡­ etcetera.


    Sam calmly answers them, which he wants to answer, and stops taking what he didn''t want to answer. He feels that someone is looking at him. So, he also looked in that direction and saw Tony and Elena staring at him.


    "Elena and Tony, you should know, he is Sam Kainer, the brother of Gloria kainer. Because of some circumstances, we were together. Also, don''t look down on him because of his rank. I think he was more powerful than me," Seeing these two people staring at Sam, she said to them. But, in thest part, she told them with a low voice. She doesn''t want anyone else to hear her voice except Tony and Elena.


    "Now, you two stop staring at him and tell me why your team is together?" She said to them. She was very curious about it. Hearing the question, Sam also became interested. He also wants to know the reason.


    _________To be continued________

 Chapter 99 99 - A-Grade Monster.

    Now, you two stop staring at him and tell me why your team is together?" Jeni said to them. She was very curious about it. Hearing the question, Sam also became interested. He also wants to know the reason. Kenny and Tina also focused on Elena and Tony. All of them want to know the reason.


    Sam didn''t know Tony that much, but Jeni and the girls know him very much. He wasn''t arrogant, like most geniuses, but he just didn''t talk to everyone. You can say he didn''t care about anything. He never involves himself with anything, but when he finds some matter interesting, he will interfere. Now imagine someone like him training up with someone who also wasn''t his ssmate. Something fishy right, this was the girls got curious. But Sam wasn''t very curious because of this. They both were powerful warriors and their teammates weren''t useless. They all were excellent fighters.


    " Sigh, I don''t know what will happen. My teammates and I were going deeper into the forest, like everyone. But then suddenly, out of nowhere, a strange monster attacked us. He had to be an A-grade monster because he was releasing an aura of an A-grade monster. As you can guess, he crushed us. But then suddenly 3 teachers appeared, but they still didn''t win against him easily. We don''t know what happened to those teachers because we used this chance to run away. "


    " I don''t know why someone like those monsters was in the forest? Or why the hell did those warriors from the association not help us? But we escaped from there and went in the other direction of the forest. We suddenly heard the sound of fighting. We saw that Elena and her teammates were fighting with some warriors. As you guess, those warriors were students who got controlled by the dark association. So, I and my teammates helped them to send those warriors to the warrior association and were about to leave them. Suddenly those monsters attacked us out of nowhere," Tony exined his story to everyone.


    Hearing his story made everyone shocked because he told them an A-grade monster was in this forest. Now, this was terrific news. They are just hoping that association warriors will solve this problem.


    "Sigh, I don''t know how many problems I still need to face. Why the hell is all of this happening this year? Previously, some like this never happened. Me and my bad luck, " Sam sighed. He doesn''t know why all these things are happening and who is messing with his life. He just wanted a trouble-free exam, where after collecting sufficient points, he will leave the area. But now nothing like this is happening.


    [A/N: Sorry about that Sam. Hahaha...]


    "We didn''t face any high-grade monsters, but some time ago, many warriors attacked us. There were at least 20 of them attacking us. We fought continuously but sometimeter, we felt fatigued. Those warriors didn''t even feel pain or fear. They were just attacking us. We injured them, but they still didn''t back down and just came toward us. Fortunately, Tony and his teammates helped us. After that, you all know out of nowhere those monsters attacked us," Elena said to everyone.


    "We know that. Some time ago, we also got attacked by those warriors. As you can see, my two teammates also got controlled by these dark associations, and because of this I and Sam got together as a team," Jeni told them. She told them about their situation when she and Sam got together as a team.


    "So, what will you do after this?" For the first time, Sam opened his mouth and asked them. He doesn''t want to be part of a group where he can feel trouble.


    "Also, girls, if you want, you can go together with them," Sam told the girls. He doesn''t know why, but just after finishing his question, he felt that dangerous auraing out from the girls. He was feeling ufortable being started by the girls.


    "No, we won''t," Jeni said with a smile. But that wasn''t your normal smile. Seeing the smile, Sam was feeling ufortable.


    " Sam, I think you forgot about it. But, my grandmother told you that we will hunt together as a team. Are you ignoring her order?" she said while intensely staring at him.


    "No, no. I never said that. I am saying this because you are familiar with them, while we met just a few days ago. If you all feel ufortable around me. That is why I am saying this," Sam quickly exined. He doesn''t want to anger Saint Vena, the fire queen.


    "Sigh, you don''t need to worry about that," Jeni said while signing. Kenny and Tina also agreed with her.


    ________________________________


    In the association,


    Everyone was nowughing seeing Sam''s scared expression. His parents and sister were also smiling at him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "So, what about the monsters? Did you solve the problem or not? Why does something like that monster appear in the dark forest?" Markus asked Maria.


    "Yes, master, we solved the problem. We don''t know how the hell that monster entered the forest, even when our teachers were guarding the forest entrances. It was like that monster suddenly appeared in the forest out of nowhere. Also, mastering this monster was quite weird. We didn''t find any blood in the monster''s body. It was like someone sucked all of his blood." Maria told him. She was also confused. His hell that monster entered the forest.


    "Sigh, another problem. Why the hell like this happening in the exam this year?" Markus sighed and said to them.


    "Also, did I find the other guy? Any clue about it?" He asked Maria." No, sir, we searched everywhere but didn''t find any clue," she said to him while lowering her head. It was quite shameful for them that they still didn''t find the other guy.


    "Ok, you don''t need to feel guilty. You aren''t the only one who didn''t find him. Also, Mira, how long will it take to extract the information from the warrior?" He first said this to Maria, then turned around and asked Mira.


    "Grandpa, I still needed some more time topletely extract the information. That damn warrior has a mind shield in his head. Because of this, it is taking that long. If I carefully don''t extract the information and try to use force, then all the memories will be lost," Mira said to Markus. She already had good permission from him to call him grandpa. Markus was 96-year-old but didn''t look like it. As you guessed, it is also because of the spiritual energy. Because of the energy, every human''s lifespan increased. Their lifespan will be bigger the more they breakthrough. As an S-grade warrior, Markus can live for 500 years.


    "Ok. You will be alright, so don''t worry." He said to her, He knows how hard it was to extract the information from the unconscious warrior.


    _____________________


    In an unknown cave,


    A man was now coughing blood. He was the man the warrior''s association was searching for. Some time ago, he created an A-grade monster and attacked the students with him. But those damn warriors from the association decide to interfere with his n. He badly injured two warriors, but thest one killed the monsters. Because he was controlling the monsters, he also got affected by the attack.


    "Damn you, warriors association. Just a little more than the Lord wille here. Haha hahaha..... Then I would like to see who will face him? Hahaha," he said whileughing like an idiot.


    ____________________________________


    Elena and Tony decided today they will stay with Sam and the girls. Because some of their teammates were injured. They needed some time to recover. They all search for a nice ce to stay, and they find a big cave. But, the problem is that they saw two D-grade cold crocodiles and 15 peak E-grade cold crocodiles in the cave.


    These types of monsters like to stay in this type of ce. They didn''t like the sun that much. There was a small pond in the cave, which was their most suitable ce to stay. This cave was like a haven to them.


    A teammate of Tony found this cave. He recklessly did nothing. First, he called everyone. He was only a peak E-grade warrior. He won''t be able to handle those D-grade monsters. Because they were near the core area, they were facing many D-grade monsters. In the core area, they will only ding those D-grade monsters. Also, no students know if any boss monsters were in the forests. Previously, they thought they would go to the dungeon where they would eventually meet the boss monsters, but in the beginning, everything waspletely different.


    A few minutester, everyone came near the cave except the injured warriors. They all see the monsters that were in the cave. It''s a good ce to rest, but they first need to kill those monsters.


    _______________To be continued________________

 Chapter 100 100 - Dark Cobra

    "So, me, Elena, and Jeni will attack those early D-grade crocodiles while the others will attack those remaining monsters," Tony said to everyone.


    Sam at this talked nothing hearing him. He will just kill those monsters. But one thing was confusing to him. "Why are Jeni, na, and Tony looking towards him? Did they expect me to say something to them?" He doesn''t know what he should do. So, he only nodded after looking at them.


    Jeni, Elena, and Tony had different thoughts in their mind. Jeni wants to know Sam''s opinion about this n. Sam was a leader to them, so basically she wants to know about his opinion. Now Tony was suggesting a n, how Sam would react?


    Tony, at this moment, is thinking about Sam''s strength. Like, he previously felt that Sam wasn''t weaker than him, but when he got to know that Sam''s rank was only a peak E-grade, he lost interest. But, when he saw how easily he killed king lepris, he knew Sam was really powerful. He just knows what Sam''s opinion was about the n he told them. Will he agree to his n or will he suggest another n?


    Elena, at this moment, wants to know what Sam will do after hearing Tony''s n. Will he cooperate with him or act alone? Basically, when someone got powerful, they didn''t like to hear other opinions if his opinion didn''t favor him. When she had previously met him, she didn''t expect that he was this powerful. He was the brother of Gloria. But, because of his low potential, in school, he got the nickname "Loser". He was the brother of the genius Gloria. Because of this, many people like to mess with his reputation. They can''t do anything to him, face to face, but they can mess with his reputation. Not that she looks down on him. Because she knows the fact that underestimates no one. Humans can make the impossible possible with their hard work and talent.


    Sam didn''t know about their thoughts. Even if he gets to know their thoughts, he will be speechless. Did they exalt him? He just wanted to finish the fight quickly, nothing more than that. He wasn''t a showoff, who liked to show his power to everyone.


    Tony gave the signal, and instantly, those warriors attacked the cave. Tony, Elena, and Jeni directly went toward the D-grade monster, while others went toward the peak E-grade monsters.


    Sam, at this moment, doesn''t enter the cave. He thinks with this power, they will solve the problem in no time. While they were busy fighting those monsters, Sam checked his surrounding area. Using his life detector, he also searches for the monsters. He doesn''t want any monsters near his camp. After getting sure that no monsters were in that area, he instantly brought out those monster repelling devices and set them. Double protecting. Now, it was just a matter of time before they will finish their hunting. Until then, he can search for a rare nt.


    You can say it became his habit to search for some spiritual nt when he got some free time. This forest was filled with those nts. He just needs to search for them.


    You can say his luck was good today. He found a Blood rose tree. By consuming this flower, your blood cirction in the body will be better, also your internal body defense system will benefit from this flower.


    He was approaching the nts carefully. He doesn''t think near this flower he won''t find any monsters.


    He slowly and carefully approached the nt. If he doesn''t find any monster, then he will just grab the nt and then he will go back to the cave.


    Suddenly, he stopped advancing because he saw two snake-like monsters. Instantly, he didn''t recognize them. It takes some time to recognize those monsters. They were the ck Cobra, the deadliest snake. They could kill any early D-grade warriors even if those monsters were only in the peak E-grade. As you guessed, how dangerous they are.


    One monster was in the early D-grade and the other one was in the peak E-grade. It will take him time to finish them. Because these monsters also have powerful defenses in their body.


    Fortunately, they have a fatal weakness. They were afraid of fire. But it didn''t help Sam. He won''t be attacking them with his spell, because it will damage the nt. That means he can only use his bow to fight them. Fighting with those monsters in closebat was a most stupid thing to do. It won''t be a problem when you have a strong immunity against poison. But, sadly, Sam didn''t have it. He also won''t be using his normal arrows. Sam didn''t think he could kill them with those normal arrows. He didn''t know the defense power of those monsters, but he didn''t think he would easily kill them with his arrows.


    Sam never fought with any monster after bing an early D-grade warrior. So, he is also not sure that he can kill them easily. Still, he will use his spiritual arrows to kill them. But, he didn''t know the defense power of the snake, so he will use most of the 40% of his energy to attack the early D-grade monster. As you can guess, his first target was to eliminate the D-grade monster, then he will kill the other monster.


    He didn''t know how much energy he should use, but previously he heard that this early D-grade ck cobra has the same defense power as a recently reached peak E-grade elephant beetle.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam easily killed the elephant beetles who just recently reached the peak E-grade, only using his 40% power. Because of this, he used only 40% power to finish them.


    He calms down and focused on the early D-grade snake. Instantly, the fire appeared on the arrow. As you can guess, he was changing the spiritual energy attributed to fire spiritual energy. Instantly, he shoots the arrow. The arrow approached the snake quickly and quietly. It instantly pierced through the snake''s eye.


    [A/N: Headshot.]


    Just looking at the scene, he can guess the power of the D-grade monster. Because the arrow didn''t pierce through the snake''s headpletely, but this was enough to finish him. Instantly, the fire appeared on the snake''s body.


    "Hiss... Hiss... Hiss," the snake let out a hissing sound. The other snake, seeing this, also began to hissing. He galloped in the direction where the arrow came from.


    You can say, its speed is also not bad. The snake quickly approaches Sam and instantly sprays poison at him. This type of creature has a thermal vision in its eyes. The snake is also 7 feet long. Sam previously didn''t notice that, but after seeing that, he was surprised. Suppose a 7 feet long snakees toward you quickly. What will you do?


    The poison spread through the air. Sam knows he needs to finish this monster quickly or he won''t be able to get the nt. Because this poison can also damage the nt. Dark cobra has two types of attack, Patten. They release poison in two forms, "Liquid and air".


    Sam quickly jumped away from the tree where he was standing, because the snake shot a poison ball toward him. The ball hit the tree. Instantly they burned.


    ''How dangerous,'' he thought.


    The poison in the air creates a fog in the area. It was also one of the snake''s skills ''the poisonous fog''. You won''t be able to see in Thai fog. They will take this chance and finish you. But fortunately, Sam has the spiritual vision technique. He quickly activated his spiritual vision and saw the snake was a few meters away from him.


    Instantly, he jumped away and left the ce. Once again, a poison ball hit the area where previously he was standing. If he uses his concealment technique, then it will be useless against them. Because he will still be visible in the snake''s eyes even after activating his concealment technique. These snakes didn''t have normal eyes, they had thermal vision.


    He knows he needs to finish this monster quickly. He cast a big fireball. Now the snake wasn''t near the nt, he can now attack him with his spell.


    He was casting the snake''s attack while he was casting the fireball. Because of this, it took 3 minutes to cast the fireball. He instantly shoots the fireball toward the snake.


    The snake saw with his thermal vision that a red thing was approaching him quickly. This red thing was emitting heat, which was very dangerous to him. He wanted to avoid the attack but could not do it and the fireball hit him. He let out a hissing sound. The fire burned his body and a few minutester, the firepletely burned the snake.


    "Sigh," he let out a sigh. Finally, he can rx. He quickly approached the nt. What if the poison damages the nt?


    __________________To be continued _______________

 Chapter 101 101 - Danger

    Sam sighed in relief when he saw the nt was ok. He carefully picked up the nt and put it in his inventory. Now it was time to go back.


    He went back towards the cave. A few minutester, he finally reaches the cave. He saw all of them were clearing the dead bodies of the monsters.


    "So, they already killed all the monsters? Well nice," he thought while walking in the cave.


    "Sam, here!!" Jeni called to him while waving her hand after she found him.


    "Done with your work?" She asked him. These few days, Sam continuously goes somewhere for some time. She didn''t question him about this. Because everyone has their own secret.


    "Yes," Sam said smilingly. It thrilled him that he found a rare nt.


    "Well, let''s go. We found a secret in this cave," she whispered to him. She doesn''t want anyone to hear them.


    Sam didn''t talk any nonsense and nodded. He silently walked with her. They went together to a corner where he also saw Elena, Tony, Kenny, Tina and also 3 more students. Other than them, all the warriors are busy clearing the dead bodies.


    Sam walked toward them and stood there. He needs to know what happened here. Why do all of them have serious faces?


    She looked towards them. He also wants to know what happened here.


    "Sam, some time ago when we were already killing all the monsters and then clearing the dead bodies of the monsters. These three warriors found a strange pattern here," Jeni said to him while pointing her finger toward a strange pattern.


    " At first, we thought some other students made it. But then we noticed a strange thing: the pattern was made of blood. Because of this, we were here. We didn''t tell the other about this. Only 9 people know about this. Sam, I think it is rted to the dark association. What do you think?" Jeni said to him.


    Sam crouches down and looks at the patterns carefully. He wasn''t an expert in the pattern, but previously because of the weird pattern he found in the dungeon; he did some research on the patterns.


    "By looking at the pattern, I can tell it was a summoning pattern. We can summon monsters that usually summoners use. But I don''t think any of these summoners use blood to summon the monsters. Also, just looking at the pattern, you can tell not that old. That means it was made recently. The summoner I think escaped from here when he saw we wereing toward this cave. Look here, you can see drops of blood that were fresh. I think he was nning to make one pattern. I don''t know which monsters wille out from this summoning pattern, but I can tell you it won''t be a good monster," Sam said to everyone. One thing he didn''t tell everyone was that whoever made this pattern already used it. He can see a light spiritual auraing from the pattern. If he didn''t focus on the pattern, then he won''t be able to see this. This aura can fade anytime. It means it has been 12 hours since the pattern was used.


    "Also, everyone looks here carefully. If you carefully look at the pattern, then you will find five small patterns in this big pattern. It crashed into five circuit patterns. I can tell you only one thing: whoever made this pattern has to be at least in B-grade or even in A-grade. This five-circuit pattern needs arge amount of spiritual energy to activate. Only B-grade or above warriors can activate it," Sam told them.


    Hearing Sam''s exnation, everyone bes surprised. They didn''t think that he would be able to talk about the pattern. Also, hearing Sam''s exnation, they were thinking about the danger.


    ''Who are the warriors who made this pattern? Why the hell does someone like him in the forest? Why the hell did nobody from the warriors associatione here?'' This type of question now they were thinking. If the person still were in the cave, then it could be dangerous for them. Fortunately, that person had already left the cave.


    "Jeni, Tina, and Kenny quickly check the surroundings and search for the camera bots. Previously, the head examiner told us that in this forest, they install many camera bots to monitor us. So, it means someone also installed them here. Search for it." while the others were busy in their own thinking, Sam suddenly told the girls.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Also, wasting no time, the girls and the others also went to search for the camera bots. They don''t know why suddenly asked them to search for it but they didn''t question him.


    A few minutester, they all returned with 5 broken camera bots. Which instantly made Sam''s expression pale. Seeing him like this, the girls came to him. They were asking him what happened, but Sam didn''t hear any of the questions, because he was busy calcting something.


    He told the girls that he was okay. After calming down himself, he told them about his prediction.


    "So, listen here. I think we are in a dangerous situation. Now, as you can see, those broken camera bots. Which means someone could break them, but the warrior association didn''t notice it. I don''t think they will ignore something like this. I also think that it was the warriors from the dark association who are the culprit that controlled the students'' minds with their mind control technique," Sam told them about his prediction, which shocked them. Finally, they are able to understand why Sam told them to search for the camera bots. It is also now clear to them how dangerous the situation was.


    "It''s okay. Fortunately, we weren''t thatte. Don''t forget, we also have invisible camera bots that were following us from the start. I think the warriors association is already aware of this. They will send someone. Also, don''t forget we can contact the association. So, stop panicking, you three. Calm down, yourself," seeing the three warriors panicking, Sam told them. In this situation, all of them need to stay calm. Panicking won''t help them. He quickly tapped the red button on the watch given to them by the association. On this watch, they have two buttons, Red and Blue. The blue button was to show their status, and the Red meant they were in a dangerous situation and needed to contact the warrior association.


    ____________________________


    In the association,


    Sam and the other students were unaware that the warrior association had already sent their warriors toward the cave. As Sam previously predicted, when Sam and the others came to the cave, the warrior associations became aware of the strange pattern, also with no dy. Alena, Maria, and 3 more A-grade warriors went towards the forest. They were traveling quickly toward the cave. Their destination was the cave.


    Markus, Vena, and the others'' moods were now terrible. They never expect under their watch that someone will have the courage to do something like this. It was an insult to them. Also, looking at the pattern, they can guess which monsters areing from that pattern. They didn''t need to be present in the cave to see the spiritual aura that came out of the pattern. They can watch it from here.


    "The weird monsters that attacked Tony''s group most likely were summoned monsters. Because of this, we didn''t have any information about these monsters," Markus said to them.


    "Also, grandpa, don''t forget about the blood. I think it was a dark summoning technique," Mira said to him. The dark summoner who uses the forbidden dark technique to summon monsters used dark summoning. Compared to normal summoning, you needed blood to create the pattern and also whose blood also will be in danger. After it summons the monsters, it will go toward the person to eat his life force at any cost. Because of this, the warrior''s association forbids it.


    "We didn''t know about his blood, but we guess the warriors most likely use Tony''s blood. Because of this, monsters attacked him. Fortunately, our warriors could stop the monsters. Also, as you can see, the fresh blood drops. So, like Sam said, most likely that the dark association warrior once again tried to create a pattern to summon more monsters. Also, most likely the blood was from the students. We need to ensure our student''s safety." Markus said with a dark expression.


    If the dark summoning monsters didn''t eat the life force of the sacrifice whose blood was used to make the pattern, then the blood from the monster''s body will evaporate. It is also one reason Markus thinks that the dark association warrior used Tony''s blood to summon the monsters.


    "Guys, if what I was thinking was true, then those students'' lives were in grave danger," he said to them.


    ______________ To be continued _______________


    [A/N: Hope you guys will like this chapter. Have a great day.]

 Chapter 102 102 - Forbidden Summoning

    Sam contacted the association. A few minutester, he could contact the association.


    "Hello, is this the association? I am Sam kainer. My teammates think we were in a dangerous situation. So, we wanted to know, what should we do?" Sam wasted no time saying this to the person who picked up the phone. He is also in danger that can kill him anytime.


    "Hello brat, don''t worry. We already sent our warriors toward your cave," Sam heard a woman''s voice. She told him that. At first, he didn''t recognize the voice of this person. Well, you can say it was normal for him not to recognize the voice. But Jeni immediately recognized the voice.


    "Grandma, is that you?" Jeni asked excitedly.


    "Hahaha..... Darling, you guessed it right. Don''t worry darling, Maria, Alena, and the others are going toward your cave. Wait a few minutes, they will reach you," Vena said to Jeni.


    " Ok, Grandma. Grandma, did you see the strange symbol? Can you tell us about this strange pattern? " She asked her grandma. She was curious to know about the symbol. Not only she but the others were also curious about the symbol.


    "Yes, we saw the strange symbol. Like your friend Sam said, it was a five-circuit summing pattern that summons monsters. Butpared to the normal summon symbol, this is a dark symbol. The dark association warrior used the blood to create the symbol, to summon a Vicious monster. Like the weird monster Tony faced some time ago. We forbid this summoning symbol to use, but those warriors from the dark association use this technique," Vena exins the symbol to everyone.


    Hearing that this symbol was a dark symbol that summons a vicious beast makes everyone afraid. But, then when Saint Vena said the monster Tony faced before was a summon monster, everyone''s expression paled. That means the warrior who makes this symbol already used this symbol. Now, this is a serious matter. Sam didn''t want to tell them that the symbol was already used. He knows this will make everyone panic. He was about to tell Vena about this but, yea, as you can guess, it was toote.


    Kenny, Tina, and the other three new students were now panicking. Kenny and Tina were still ok, but the other three were terrified after hearing her. This was the reason he didn''t want to tell anyone about this. But it also surprised him it was the forbidden symbol he had previously read about. Previously, when he was reading about the symbol in various books he found a book that tells about the danger of this forbidden summoning technique.


    Sam suddenly remembered something and was about to ask Vena for his confirmation in front of everyone, but then he stopped. Because if he asked about the danger which was written in the book, then he thinks nobody will be able to calm down. But just thinking about the danger makes him scared. His facial expressions paled.


    "


    ?Mainly human blood was needed to draw the symbol.


    ?If the warrior has a high potential for whose blood was used, then the powerful monsters will spawn.


    ?The more potential the warrior has, the more powerful monsters will spawn.


    ?The summoning monsters needed to eat the life force of the warrior, whose blood was used to draw symbols.


    ? At any cost, that monster wille to the person whose blood was used.


    ?You cannot kill those monsters easily. Even if you killed them, they still wille to life and try to attack the warrior whose blood was used.


    ?You can only have two ways to stop these monsters.


    A. One is to attack them with holy light, the most powerful light element attack which can kill any evil monsters.


    B. If the caster reverse summons the monster. Which will cost his life. "


    These were things that were written in the book. Just thinking about it makes Sam afraid. But he didn''t show it to anyone. Seeing his condition, everyone came to him and asked what happened.


    "Nothing, just remember something," Sam said with a forced smile.


    "Jeni, is your grandma still on the line? If she was, can you give me the watch? I needed to confirm something," he asked Jeni. Jeni, hearing Sam, nodded. She also feels ufortable after seeing Sam''s pale expression. There was something happening that he didn''t tell them. Sames to a corner in the cave. He didn''t want to ask about the forbidden summoning in front of everyone.


    "Thank you," Sam said after she gave him the watch.


    "Hello mam, are you still there?"


    "What''s up brat? What is the thing you want to confirm?" Vena said to him with an irritated tone. He was the person who was stopping her from talking with her granddaughter.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Mam did you read the book written by Mark Andrew? ''The symbols'' was the name of the book," he asked her.


    Hearing his question, Vena bes serious. Because she read this book, and it mentioned the forbidden symbol. She guessed what question he was about to ask her.


    "Yes," she answers.


    "So, ma''am, they wrote the things in the book. Can you confirm that all of them are real?" He asked after a pause. He is also trying to calm down his heart.


    "Yes," Vena with no-nonsense answers him. She can guess his condition. How much courage does he need to be asked of her? By hearing his tone, she can tell he was under great pressure. She can also see his condition on the monitor.


    "Then what will happ...." Sam was about to ask one more question, but Vena didn''t let him finish his question when she answered.


    "Don''t worry about it. Previously, the caster didn''t fully use his blood because of this, the monster wasn''t that desperate. Don''t worry about that," Vena assured him. She knows he was worried about Tony. So she instantly answers him.


    Just looking at his pale face, you can tell he knows about the danger of this dark summoning. He wasn''t just showing it.


    _______________________________


    At this moment, in the association room,


    Everyone has a serious expression. Because they thought no students would know about the forbidden summoning. ''The symbols'' was a rare book written by Mark Andrew. One of the symbol masters.


    They all silently heard Sam and Vena talking. They also saw his pale face when Vena first told them about the forbidden symbol and forbidden summoning. The other students didn''t know about the forbidden summoning, you can tell by seeing their faces. They only panic, because they get to know this forbidden summoning needed blood and summon dangerous monsters. If they get to know about the danger. Then what will happen to them?


    "Vena, pass me the line. I will talk to him," suddenly Markus told her. He was feeling guilty after seeing Sam''s pale expression. He just guessed how scared was. Sam still didn''t show this, and he also didn''t tell about the forbidden summoning. Sam is just bearing the pressure alone. Because of this, Markus also feels guilty.


    "Hello Sam Kainer, I am Markus Galm, the head of the warrior association. I know how much pressure you are under, but don''t worry, child, believe us. We will solve everything. Just calm down yourself, don''t give yourself this much pressure," Markus said to him. He wants to assure Sam that he doesn''t need to worry. Just leave everything to the warrior association.


    "Y-Yes sir," Sam answered him. Sam didn''t think he would talk to 2 S-grade warriors in one day. After this, he cut the connection.


    "How many warriors do we have who can cast the Holy light spell? Also, how much time the other will take to get here?" Markus asked his assistant.


    "Sir, we have 20 warriors who can cast the Holy light spell. Of these 20 warriors, 5 warriors were in A-grade while the other was a B-grade warrior. Also, sir, we contacted the other Saint. They told us they still needed some hours to reach here," his assistant replied.


    _____________________________________


    Back to Sam,


    Sam was calming down after hearing Saint Markus. He looks toward the others and, seeing their worried expression, he knows he can''t reveal about the forbidden summoning. He just smiles and assures them they don''t need to worry. Warrior association already sends their warriors. In just a few minutes, they will reach here.


    With this, he told everyone to rest. After this long fight, he felt fatigued. He needed some rest. He can predict that they needed a tough fight to face. For this, he wants to prepare. He sat in a corner of the cave while supporting his back in the cave wall.


    He was also mentally tired and needed to release his stress. He closed his eyes and tried to clear his mind.


    Sam was unaware of that fact, but Jeni and the others were looking toward him from time to time. Jeni, Kenny, and Tina were mostly worried about him. They know his habits. Whenever they take a rest, Sam was the first one to bring out the food. But today seeing this condition they feel worried. They don''t know what happens; they hoped he was okay. The girls want to talk to him, but they decide to leave him alone for some time, seeing he was resting.


    _________________To be continued__________

 Chapter 103 103 - Monster From Hell

    Sam and the others were waiting for the warriors from the warrior association. Sam still didn''t open his eyes. He was still resting, because he was feeling tired mentally. Jeni and the others were also resting. Some time ago, they finished eating their food, now they were resting. While they were eating, Jeni tried to call Sam, but seeing him not responding to her, she didn''t force him. Just looking at his situation, she can tell he needs some sleep to release the stress he built up in him.


    A few minutester,


    Alena, Maria, and the other warriors finally came to the cave. They traveled at their fastest Speed to reach the cave. They also know about the dangers of the forbidden summoning. Because of this, they didn''t want to waste any time.


    "Miss Maria and Miss Alena, you are finally here?" Seeing them, Jeni said to them that she was also worried about the forbidden summoning. Jeni doesn''t know the danger, still just looking at the symbol. She was feeling ufortable, and she knows her prediction never went wrong.


    "Don''t worry. Leave everything to us," Maria assured them. All of them went toward the symbol.


    Elena and Tony''s other teammates, who didn''t know about the forbidden summoning, were now confused. They went towards Elena and Tony to ask them. ''What is happening here? Why do warriors from the associatione here?''


    Jeni, Elena, and Tony look at each other. They were thinking, what should they do? Should they tell them about the forbidden summoning or not? Not everyone has strong willpower. If after hearing about the forbidden summoning they panicked and did something reckless, then it will be dangerous for them.


    "Don''t worry. You should tell them. If they don''t know about the danger, then they won''t be able to prepare themselves. And we are here, so don''t worry," Marks said to them.


    After hearing Maria''s words, Elena tells the others about the forbidden summoning. She told them how they found a weird symbol in this cave after the battle. Someone from the dark association draws the symbol with blood. It was a Forbidden summoning pattern that can summon Vicious monsters. The monster which Tony and his teammates faced was a vicious summon monster. She also tells them she also found evidence that the summoner already used that pattern to summon the monster. Also, they found some evidence that the summoner was here before they came here, and once again he was nning to draw a forbidden summoning pattern to summon the monster.


    It took her some time fully to exin the matters to them. All the warriors were silently listening. It also takes them some time to digest all the matter.


    They panicked. It was a normal matter to panic. Tony''s teammates were bing scared just thinking about the monster. They saw anything like that monster and it was their first time experiencing a near-death situation. It was the reason they were scared. They didn''t want to face that monster again.


    "Do you know where is Sam? I can''t see him here," Alena asked them.


    "Oh, he is now sleeping. When grandma told us about the forbidden summoning, Sam''s expression paled. I don''t know what happened but, I think he was scared. He also didn''t tell us about it. I tried to find out and asked him, but he said nothing." Jeni pointed her finger in Sam''s direction while she was telling Alena about Sam. Before Sam fell asleep, she tried to ask him, ''Why is he scared?'' But he said nothing.


    Alena looks at Sam. He was sleeping. Seeing that she didn''t disturb him. When she was about to enter the forest, Victor, Hina, and Gloria told her to look at his condition. They were worried about him. Fortunately, she didn''t tell them about the forbidden summoning. But then suddenly when she, Maria, and the others came toward the cave, she received a call from her grandpa. He told her about the student''s condition and Sam''s condition.


    Sam was the only person there who knew about the forbidden summoning. It was normal for him to be afraid. He also didn''t tell others about the forbidden summoning and bore the immense pressure alone. She won''t know what she should do? Should she be happy that he didn''t tell others about the forbidden summoning? Or should she be angry? But one thing was obvious: she was also worried about him.


    Previously, she stayed at their house. Victor and Hina were very good to her. She also enjoyed the atmosphere in their house. This was the feeling she missed after her mom and dad passed away. Her grandpa, always busy in his work. Only she and her sister stay in the with their grandmother. So we can say she enjoyed herself there. She also sees Sam as a little brother. So, it was natural for her to worry about him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Alena went toward him. She ced her hand on his forehead. Seeing that he didn''t have any fever, she sighed in relief. Suddenly, she activates her healing hand technique. A green light appeared around her right hand. She patted his head. It will make him rx and he will feel mentally refreshed.


    While she was patting his head, the others were too looking at her. Now they have two questions in their mind, ''What rtion do they have? Why did she suddenly pat his head?''


    Alena didn''t mind that questionable look. Sam was like a little brother to her. She needed to heal her brother before answering their question.


    Maria and the other warriors came in front of the symbol. She also looks in Alena''s direction and then focuses on the symbol. She knows Gloria was Alena''s student and Sam was Gloria''s brother. So, it was natural for Alena to look after her student''s brother. They need to discover which type of forbidden summoning was this.


    Jeni suddenly remembers who Sam was. Sam is Gloria''s brother and Alena is Gloria''s teacher. Now, she understood why Alena looked after him and why she previously gifted him that bracelet. She also told others about this, so they don''t have any misunderstanding about Sam and Alena''s rtionship.


    When Alena saw he looked rxed, she stopped the healing hand technique and got up from the ground. She went towards the symbol. Now their key priority was to search for the type of this symbol and also find the culprit. But only them, but sometimeter, many warriors will enter the forest. Tomorrow is thest day of the exam and all the Saints think that the dark association will attack these students tomorrow.


    "Anything about the symbol?" Alena asked.


    " Yes, it was an ox summoning pattern. Which will summon the vicious ox from hell. Fortunately, the culprit didn''t use didn''t draw this full symbol with Tony''s blood. I think he used two students'' blood to draw this. But Tony was near the monster, so he got attacked by the monster. We don''t know the other person whose blood they used here. But we can tell the culprits didn''t have that much control and spiritual energy. Because of this, he used two types of blood in the symbol, so that less spiritual energy can be used. It was a hybrid monster between a low-grade and high-grade monster." Maria told her what they found about the symbol.


    "Any clue about the culprit?" She asked.


    " Yes, look closely at your spiritual vision. You can see that spiritual aura leaking from those blood drops. I think he used his spiritual energy to refine the blood so that he can summon powerful monsters. Because of this, these blood drops had spiritual energy. If we can just follow this blood, we can find that culprit. But one thing is unclear, will these blood drops lead us to that culprit or not? Because I don''t think the culprit was an idiot to leave a clue about him. When all the warriors reach here, then we will begin our search," Maria told Alena. Even if these blood drops didn''t reveal the exact location of the culprits. Still, it will help them.


    _____________________________________________


    At an unknown location,


    "Damn those students. There are many ces for you to camp, but those damn bratse to my cave. I think the association was now aware of the Forbidden symbol. Damn brats, this all happens because of you. Tomorrow, the world will witness the power of the lord. Hahaha..... " the warrior said. He was nning to summon his lord tomorrow and let the world witness his lord''s power. He was now clearing the clue about him. Previously because he left the cave quickly, blood dropped on the ground from his paintbrush. He knows with this blood, the warrior association can locate him. So he needed to clear the clue.


    Previously, he was thinking about summing 2 to 3 of these types of vicious monsters before summoning her lord. But because of these brats, he wasn''t able to do it. Which made me very unsatisfied.


    _________________To be continued___________

 Chapter 104 104 - Finally Relief

    Sam woke up from his sleep. He slowly opens his eyes. Alena and the other warriors from the warriors'' association were busy with the discussion. He observes everything.


    ''So finally, the warrior from the association came. Sigh,'' he thought and released a sigh. He finally calms down. Previously, he mostly worried about the forbidden summoning because he doesn''t know if the warrior from the dark association has his and the girls'' blood or not. If he has their blood, then without help from the warrior association, Sam and the girls won''t be able to defeat the monster. Seeing the warriors from the association, the pressure he felt was finally decreasing.


    "Sam, how are you feeling?" Jeni, seeing that he woke up from his sleep, asked him. The girls think of him as a true teammate, so they were worried about him. They never saw him like that. In their eyes, he was the person who stayed calm in every situation.


    Sam saw the girls looking at him with worried looks. What can you say? He feels happy in his heart. It really feels good to have teammates who are worried about you.


    "Don''t worry. I am feeling better now. Sorry for worrying you all," Sam said to them. Now thinking about the previous behavior, he really feels ashamed. He should believe in the warrior association. Because of this, he also apologizes to the girls. He really made them worried. But it was a natural reaction for anyone who suddenly got to know that an enemy was targeting him, or his ssmate, using forbidden summoning.


    "No... No, it wasn''t your fault. We just hoped you don''t bear the pressure alone. We are your teammates. You can also share your thoughts with us," Jeni said with a smile. Jenny, Tina, and Kenny are finally relieved seeing Sam is ok.


    " Growl.... growl..... growl..." Suddenly Sam''s stomach makes this sound.


    "..."


    "Hahaha" the girls, unable to hold theirughter,ughed.


    "Hahaha ... It''s just I am starving," Sam said to them while trying to hide his embraced face.


    "Then you should eat some food." Suddenly, Alena came to him and said to him,


    Sam bes startled hearing Alena''s voice. He didn''t expect that she would be here.


    "How are you? Feeling good? Your mom sends you some food thinking you almost ate all of your food," she said to him.


    "Oh... Thank you. Hahaha.. yea, I almost finished all of my food," Sam replied to her with an awkward smile, while trying to joke with her. But seeing her serious face, he can onlyugh awkwardly. She always talks to him like this, which he doesn''t mind.


    Alena brings out food from her storage ring and puts it in front of him. Sam put all the food in his inventory except for the food he was going to eat.


    "Your family was worried about you. So, do nothing reckless. Understand.." she said to him.


    Hearing her words, Sam smiles and says, "Thank you, and don''t worry, I love my life, so I won''t be doing anything reckless."


    With this, Alena nodded at him and Jeni, then went in Maria''s direction. They have many things to do. It was just they thinking that the culprit won''t be that stupid and that he won''t be tried to clear the evidence. So, they can follow the clues and try to capture the culprit.


    Now they were discussing, should they wait for others or should they start without waiting for them? They needed to decide quickly because what if the culprit uses this chance to remove all the evidence?


    "What if one of us stayed here, and the others went to search? He will start here and wait for the other warriors. When all the warriors from the association will be here, he will go with them." One warrior suggests that.


    "Nice idea. But who will stay here?" Maria asked.


    " Tom suggests the idea, so he will stay here. Let''s not waste time." Suddenly, Alena came to them and said,


    "So Tom, as Alena said, you will stay here and look after these kids. When all the warriors from the association wille here, you will go with them." Maria said to Tom.


    " Yes mam," Tom said while saluting her. She was the head of the investigation team. Because of this, everyone shows her respect.


    "Everyone, we decided that one of us will stay here, while the others will go to find the culprit. So, you don''t need to worry about the forbidden summoning. He is Tom. He is an expert in light magic and sword fighting. So, don''t worry, even if the culprit summons a Vicious monster and the monsteres to you, Tom can easily solve that. And don''t worry, one day the culprit will only be able to summon 2/3 monsters. So, don''t worry, the culprit won''t be able to summon many monsters." Maria told them. She can see the panic in these students because of this, she said to them. It will be dangerous if they panic and do something reckless that they shouldn''t do. They needed to stay calm.


    After everything was done, Maria and the others left the cave.


    Before going, Alena once again said to Sam, "Don''t do anything reckless and leave everything to us. We will solve this matter. Don''t worry."


    Sam nodded and said, " Don''t worry about me. You should also be careful. If the enemy was very powerful, then you should leave the ce quickly. The saints will handle them, " Sam said to Alena. Alena nodded and left the cave, but at this time, one thing he didn''t notice was that Alena smile sightly herring his concern. ?


    " Now, Sam, you should eat your food. I think you told us you are quite hungry," Jeni said to him.


    " Yes, now you said I am really feeling hungry. Yos, Time to eat." He said with excitement. While eating, he decided to check his status, which he didn''t check for many days.


    "Status


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 15+2


    Agility: 13+2


    Physique: 16


    Intelligent(mental power): 18+1


    Spirit: 09


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Special (+)


    Upgrade point: 986K


    " Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (Cooldown: 4 months)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C) (+)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (71%)(+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (89%)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (D-grade) (97%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (70%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (89%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (99%)(+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (C-grade) (97%)(+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (80%)(+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade) (86%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (15%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (19%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.]


    Telekinesis: (D-grade) (97%) (+)


    [Helps you to control objects around you.]


    Berserker (D-grade) (59%)


    [This technique will help you increase your power for five minutes. You will enter a berserk mode. But, your body defense will decrease. This technique has a cooldown of 12 hours. To learn this technique, you needed to be at least a D-early grade warrior. Only then your body can handle this technique.]


    Light control (Grade D) (75%)


    [This technique teaches you how to control light energy. The more you be familiar with this technique, the more you will use the light energy easily.]


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (C-grade) (100%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.]


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (70%) (+)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade) (99%) (+)


    [This technique helps you to increase your vision power and also gives you a pair of spiritual eyes. It also helps you to see many things that you can''t see with your normal vision. ]


    [Note: You finally be a medium-grade warrior.] "


    ________________To be continued_________


    [A/N: Sorry guys, but these three day, I am busy with college work. So, I won''t be able to upload any chapters. Sorry about that guys.]

 Chapter 105 105 - Rescued

    Looking at his status, Sam is feeling well. Almost all of his important techniques be 100% familiar to him. He just needed to finish the exam, then upgrade his potential, and finally, upgrade his techniques. Still, this forbidden summoning was the most worrying thing for right now. You can''t tell how did the warriors from the dark association get the blood of the students, but they used that blood to summon vicious monsters to harm or even kill the students.


    He knew that between dark association and dark association, a huge war was going on. It was just because all the saints were supporting the warrior association, the dark association back down from the war. He just hoped that the warrior from the warrior association solved the matter before the culprit got to time and summoned more monsters.


    "Jeni, did they tell us anything about the symbol?" Sam suddenly asked her. He suddenly remembered that he didn''t know which type of summoning symbol was this. He needed to know that.


    "No," she said to him. Alena, Maria, and others told nothing about the forbidden summoning type.


    "We tried to ask them, but they didn''t tell us," she said to him. Well, it was normal for them not to tell the students about the forbidden summoning type to the students.


    "But when they were discussing their n, I got to hear that they were talking about ox summoning. I don''t know if it is rted to the forbidden summoning, but this is the only thing I heard from them." She told him. Which made Sam surprised. He sighed in relief. No, it doesn''t mean that the ox monsters weren''t powerful.


    You can say it waspletely different. These ox-type monsters were powerful. Their power allowed them to do everything. They were extremely dangerous, but it was just that this type of monster didn''t use its brain in a fight. They didn''t follow any strategy to attack their enemy. The only thing they believed in was their strength. The warrior association can use their weakness to kill them. These types of ox monsters have a powerful body, which makes it hard to kill them. Only mental attacks or attacks that damage their mind or soul only work against them. The other spiritual or physical attack didn''t work that much against these monsters (except Holy light).


    ? Sam just hoped that by using their weakness, those warriors from the association solved the problem.


    "Hey kids, don''t worry, have some faith in us. Hahaha... Just see how we kill those monsters," suddenly Tom came toward him and said this.


    "shback"


    Until now, he was observing the near area of this cave. Then he went back to the cave. Because there were some important people that he needed to protect. Jeni, Tony, Elena, and Sam, four of them were important people. Sam didn''t know this, but he also became an important student. He was Gloria''s brother, also Alena saw him as a little brother, and also he was the student who entered the forest solo, and also became a top 10 student. This was all the fact that made him important.


    When Tom entered the cave, he saw Tony and Elena talking with their teammates. They tried to calm down their teammates who were scared.


    "You all know, the moment we decide to be a warrior, our life can lose at any time. We needed to fight many dangerous monsters to protect humans from the monsters. At any moment, we can lose our life. After knowing this, we all still decide to be warriors. So guys, don''t give up. Warrior association will help us solve the problem. So, don''t lose your courage," Elena said to her teammates. Hearing her speech, her teammates calm down. They also know the moment they decide to be a warrior, they can lose their life any moment. They should believe in warrior association.


    Don''t know if Elena''s word did the miracle, but one by one all the students who lost their courage became confident. Yea, they have Saint in their back. They didn''t need to worry.


    Elena''s speech also impressed Tom. It was a brilliant speech that brightened everyone''s morale. Then, when he was going to praise her, he saw Sam, Jeni, Tina, and Kenny discussing something. He knows previously Sam got affected after hearing the forbidden summoning name. Also, he knows it was a normal thing to be scared of after hearing forbidden summoning. Even he was also afraid of this summoning. What if the culprit uses his blood to summon the next monsters? This type of thought makes him scared, but he believes in the warrior association and the Saint.


    So he walks towards them when he hears Jeni talking about some ox monsters. He guessed Sam was asking about the type of the summoning symbol. So, he went towards them and said this.


    "shback end."


    "Don''t worry, Mr. Tom, I also believe in the warrior association," Sam said with a smile.


    " Mr. Tom, did you guys find any clue about the culprit?" He asked.


    " Yes, we found some clues. Maria and the others followed that clue," Tom replied.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Mr. Tom, do you know what the condition of the other students is?" Sam asked. This is the question he wanted to ask the most. Because he didn''t know the other students'' conditions. What is their situation? Have they also faced this kind of monster? Are they aware of the fact that dark associations are targeting them using the forbidden summoning? These are some questions he wanted to ask.


    "Don''t worry about them. Some time ago, we got to notify that Aria Galm also faced an unknown monster, but because the warriors of the association are always staying alert, that monster wasn''t able to do anything. Except for Tony and Aria, no other students got attacked by the summoning monsters. Also, your ssmates whom the dark association was controlling, we almost heal all the students. Unfortunately, they needed to leave the forest," Tom exined the situation.


    Hearing that the warrior association rescued their ssmates made them sigh in relief. Finally, they don''t need to worry about hurting their ssmates.


    "Are they ok? Also, how many warriors were here from the dark association?" Sam asked. Because he didn''t know exactly how many students got controlled by the dark association warriors. Also, how many warriors were there who controlled the students?


    "Don''t worry about them. Those students just needed some rest. Now they were feeling dizzy. It will take 2 days forplete recovery."


    " Also, the clue we got we think only two members of the association were behind this. We already caught one warrior. Now he is in prison. Thanks to Saint Mira, we could rescue these students from mind control. The warrior we caught was the mastermind behind this. Fortunately, Saint Mira appears before something bad happens to those students. This summoner was the teammate of the warrior, who we are searching for. We are searching for him in the City, didn''t expect that he woulde to the dark forest." Tom said all this to him.


    Hearing Tom, Sam was surprised. He previously thought there were at least 10 warriors there who controlled their ssmates. But he got to know there was only one warrior who was the mastermind behind all this. Not that it was impossible to control these many E-grade students, but that warrior has to be at least a B-grade warrior.


    "Mr. Tom, then can you tell us the warrior''s grade? I think he has to be at least a B-grade warrior," suddenly Tony said to Tom. He previously listened to his reply. He also sighed in relief at hearing that his ssmate was out of danger. Now, he got to know only one person was controlling their ssmates.


    "Yes, you all guessed it right. The warrior is a peak B-grade warrior. We also got to know from him that his teammate is an intermediate A-grade warrior." Tom replied to him. This answer shocked everyone. Sam and the others weren''t able to understand why a High-grade warrior wanted to harm them, which made them shocked. They never thought in their college exam they would get attacked by a peak B-grade and an intermediate A-grade warrior.


    Sam can onlyugh after hearing, "He and his bad luck."


    "Then is it not dangerous for Miss Maria, Miss Alena, and the others?" suddenly Jeni asked.


    "Don''t worry Miss Maria, and Miss Alena are peak A-grade warriors and the others were early A-grade warriors. Also, many more warriors from the association areing. So, don''t need to worry about it." Tom assured them.


    " Beep... Beep... Beep" suddenly his life detector sounded.


    Sam quickly checked the life detector. Saw many 10 life forcesing towards them quickly.


    "Guys, I don''t know if they are warriors from the warrior association or monsters or warriors from the dark association. So, everyone gets ready. If they were monsters or enemies, then kill them," Sam said to them.


    They all hide in the cave. They were in full alert mode. The moment they will find something wrong, they will attack. Tom also hides.


    __________To be continued_____________


    [A/N: Hope you guys, enjoying the chapter. Hey guys, sorry for thete update. these few days, I was busy with the semester exam. So, sorry for thete update.]

 Chapter 106 106 - Ready To Fight

    Sam once again looks at the life detector. After carefully looking at the detector, he can tell that those weren''t monsters but humans. They were approaching the cave.


    Sam, with his telepathy, told everyone that some humans were approaching their cave. They should be too ready to fight when those humanse here.


    A few minutester,


    You can hear footsteps. They were getting closer and closer.


    "Leader, is this the cave which our boss is talking about?" Sam and they hear this. They saw 10 warriors that entered the cave. Suddenly, one warrior asked the warrior who was in the front. You can tell he was the leader of this team. They were all wearing some kind of green bodysuit and mask. Just looking at them, you can tell they weren''t from the warrior association. Then who were they? Why did theye here? And who is the boss they were talking about? These are some questions that Sam was thinking about.


    "Just looking at the cave. I also think this is the cave that our boss is talking about," the leader of these warriors replies. He has a rough voice and a muscr body. Sam wasn''t able to look at their faces clearly because they were wearing a mask and sunsses.


    Suddenly, they stop advancing because their leader signals them to stop and he told them that Sam wasn''t able to hear. All the warriors, after hearing their leader''s words, touch their sunsses. Sam and the others don''t know, but these sunsses have night vision and thermal vision features. They instantly activated the thermal vision. Previously, their leader said to them he could see many warriors were binding in the cave. So, instantly, he told them to activate their thermal vision and then throw a poison bomb in the cave.


    Sam doesn''t know why they all of the sudden touched their sunsses, but the next thing they did left him speechless. They instantly threw something in the middle of the cave and they left the cave.


    "Leader, who are they?" One subordinate asked his leader.


    " I think they were the students that the boss was talking about. But the poison bomb will do its things. I don''t think all of them can resist the poison bomb, and if they left the cave, we will finish them. Also, all of you, be careful warriors from the warrior association could be near us. We needed to quickly finish our job and then leave the cave." The leader said to them.


    Back to Sam,


    He didn''t know about the baseball thing that those warriors throw in the middle of the cave. So, he asked Tom about this.


    "Mr. Tom, do you know what this is? Just looking at the thing, you can tell it wasn''t a good thing," Sam asked Tom.


    " Wait, let me remember. Previously, I saw something like this in the association," Tom replied and began to think.


    " Guys, be careful. I don''t know what this thing is, but I can tell you it wasn''t a good thing," Sam said to all the warriors. They all nodded and became fully alert. They were all waiting for Tom to tell them about the baseball-like things.


    " Tutu... Tutu..... Tutu... Tutu." Suddenly, the ball began to sound.


    " O my god!!! Everyone, I remember. This is the poison bomb that the dark association use. Everyone, if you have an air cleaner mask, then wear it quickly and don''t inhale the poison gas. The poison bomb will release the poison gas. Everyone quickly leaves the cave. We don''t have time. It can harm you all if you inhale the poisonous air." Tom quickly told everyone. Hearing his warning, everyone was shocked. Those warriors who have the air cleaner mask quickly equipped the mask, and those who don''t have the mask quickly came out of their hiding ces and began to run toward the entrance.


    "Control room. This is an emergency. Some warriors from the dark association came to the cave and throw a poison bomb in the cave. We needed help." He quickly contacts the control room of the warrior association.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Guys, be careful. Prepare your weapon. I think those dark associations already know about us and because of this, they throw the poison bomb and left the cave. I can see that they are outside of the cave. They are ready to fight us, guys. We also need to be ready for a fight. The moment we leave the cave, they will attack us. So, be ready." Sam told everyone to be ready for a fight. He saw these warriors outside of the cave. Clearly, they were waiting for them. They already predict that if they throw the poison bomb, we will force them to leave the cave. Because of this, they were ready to fight and waiting for them.


    All the students bring out their weapons. Now, they weren''t afraid like previously. They will fight those damn warriors without holding back. While running, students who were physical warriors were ready with their weapons. The moment they left the cave, they would attack them. Spiritual warriors also already prepare their spells. The moment they leave the cave, they will attack them. In one word, everyone was ready to fight. You can say, previously Elena''s speech had a huge effect on them.


    Sam previously didn''t get the chance to observe them and their grade. But he guessed they were at least D-grade or they could be a higher grade. He also didn''t n to hold back. He will fight them with his strongest techniques.


    He wasn''t nning to use his great fireball. It is also a powerful technique, but it will also damage the surrounding area, which can harm his ssmates and teammates. Instead, he will attack them with his strongestbo attack. Energy mode and fast sword technique. This was his deadliest and most powerful technique. Because he didn''t want to hold back, he was nning to use this.


    Sam activated his energy mode and coated his sword with his spiritual energy. Instantly, the sword turned ck. Tony, Tom, and the girls instantly felt a difference in him. His aura bes very sharp, like a sword that can cut anything. They are in front of the group together, with Sam going toward the entrance. Because of this, they feel a difference in him. The other didn''t feel it. They didn''t ask Sam about this. Because it wasn''t the right time to ask him about this. This was time to fight those warriors.


    Previously, when he used the bow he also used the energy mode but because he needed little of his spiritual energy to coat those arrows, nobody at that time felt the difference in him, but this time to coat his sword he used a lot of spiritual energy because of this, they could feel the difference.


    Tom already informed Alena and the others about this. He just hopes that the warriors from the association quickly came here. Sam and the others weren''t able to feel the grade of those warriors from the dark association, but he clearly can tell their grades. He previously used his observation technique to know their grade. 5 of them were in Peak B-grade, 3 of them were in early B-grade and the remaining 2 were in Peak C-grade. The students won''t be able to fight them longer. They have a vast difference in their grade. So, he was hoping the help woulde here.


    Fortunately, all the students have the teleporting bracelets and they were fighting humans instead of summoned monsters that came from forbidden summoning. The teleport bracelet can teleport the students when life will be in danger. Which was a plus point. Also, they were fighting humans, which was a good thing. Fighting these humans when their life will be in danger, they will teleport to the association which will save their life, but if it was a summoned monster that came from forbidden summoning while using their blood, then it will be very dangerous for them. Because then, even if the students are sent back to the association, those summoned monsters that were summoned using their blood will chase after them even in the association.


    They got closer and closer to the entrance when suddenly the poison bomb made a big sound and green and purple gas began to spread through the cave. Those students who didn''t have the masks instantly hold their breath, just a little more, then they will be outside of the cave.


    ________________________________________


    After leaving the cave, Alena, Maria, and the others were following the clue of the culprit. But after going like that, they stopped advancing because they didn''t find more blood drops. It means that the culprit has already cleared the clue about his hiding ce.


    So Maria and the others spared through the forest the search for the culprit. When they were busy searching, Alena and Maria''smunicator rang. They received the call. Tom told them about their situation.


    Instantly, Alena calls Maria.


    "I will go toward the cave. Can you handle the thing here? It won''t take too much time," she told Maria.


    " No problem," Maria replied.


    Instantly, Alena went toward the cave. She just hoped nothing serious would happen.


    __________________To be continued____________

 Chapter 107 107 - Fighting Against A Peak D-Grade Warrior

    Everyone was running toward the entrance of the cave, and finally, they were out of the cave. But then 5 warriors suddenly appeared in front of them and released their aura.


    Feeling their aura, all students'' faces be grim. They needed to fight warriors who were out of their league, but it didn''t mean they would back down. All of them were ready and just ready for the signal.


    "Hehe..... Guys, see the rats are out of their home. These rats want to fight us. Haha... It will be fun killing them," one warrior to the other warriors.


    "Haha..... Let''s go brothers," one warrior said and started walking toward Sam and the others. They were feeling confident. It wasn''t a fight, but fun for them.


    "I will take care of those 3 early C-grade warriors. You guys fight with these D-grade warriors. Divided into two groups and fought them," suddenly Tom told them. He knows the students won''t be able to keep up with these warriors, and because of this he was nning to fight 3 C-grade warriors while he tries to finish them quickly, then he will solve the D-grade warriors. He just hoped that Sam and the others would fight with those two D-grade warriors, even if they can''t win, then just needed to fight until he finished with these C-grade warriors.


    " Tony and Elena, you and your teammates will fight one warrior, while Jeni and I will fight the other one. Understand, now go," Sam suddenlymands them with his telepathy. He doesn''t want to team up with others who won''t be able to keep up with him. He wasfortable with the girls because they know his fighting style better than others. So he naturally fights with them.


    Suddenly Tom appeared in front of them and went towards the 3 C-grade warriors. Instantly, all the students also went toward the other two warriors.


    "Jeni, you aren''t good at closebat. Fight with him using your spells. Kenny and Tina, let''s go," Sam told them in their mind.


    Seeing Tom, all the warriors from the dark association be shocked. They never thought that someone from the association would be here. But yea, they don''t need to fight much longer. The moment they achieve their goal, they will leave the ce.


    Sam, Kenny, and Tina were going toward the warrior, while Jeni prepared her spell. She needs at least 1 minute. Sam signals the girls. He will attack him first, then they should attack him.


    Sam, with his full speed, vanishes from his ce and instantly appears in front of the warrior. He with no dy attacked the warrior with his sword.


    The warrior whom Sam''s team decided to take on at first didn''t care about the students who wereing toward him. In his eyes, they were only children who didn''t know when to back off. But he suddenly saw the boy, who wasing towards him, vanish from his ce. He felt danger but didn''t know why he felt danger? But then he bes shocked because the boy that vanished from his ce instantly appears in front of him. Unable to react on time, he can only cross his arms and try to defend against the attack. But unfortunately, Sam was using the energy mode and fast cut technique. The sword cut through the Armor of the warrior.


    Sam jumped away, and instantly Kenny and Tina attacked the warrior with their technique. Unable to respond in time, the warrior sends backward. He didn''t expect that some students would injure him.


    When the warrior was about to get up from the ground, Jeni attacked him with her thunderbolt. Instantly, the warrior bes paralyzed for some second. But, this some second, enough for Sam to attack the warrior. With no dy, he instantly attacked the warrior with his full strength. Sam could cut into one of the warrior''s arms. Because the warrior was paralyzed, he wasn''t about to respond, but 10 secondster, when he was out of his paralyzed state, he cried. But Kenny and Tina didn''t waste any time. They instantly attack the warrior. The warrior once again sends flying.


    "Did we defeat the warrior?" Time asked. Because she thinks the peak D-grade warrior wasn''t that powerful. They could quickly hurt the warrior.


    "No, we still needed to fight the warrior. Because we still haven''t defeated the warrior," Sam replied. He knew better than anyone how powerful a peak-grade warrior was. He knows because of the carelessness of the warrior, they avoid injuring him. But now, the warrior will fight them seriously and he didn''t think that they could win against him.


    The girls still had some questions and were about to ask him, but then suddenly they saw the warrior suddenly get up from his ce. Instantly, all of them be serious. Finally, the girls understand why Sam said that. Now they will have a tough fight.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Ahhh... Enough is enough," the warrior said furiously. Instantly all the wounds in his body recovered, but he didn''t grow back his left arm that he lost. Only the wounds in his body healed. Previously, he didn''t bring out his weapon, but now he knows he needs to fight these students seriously or he can lose his life. He brings out a sword. Yes, you guessed it right, he was a swordsman. Even after losing his left hand, hisbat ability didn''t decrease. He with an insane speed approached Sam and the girls. He just needed a few seconds to reach them.


    Sam already predicted this, so he was already prepared for this.


    "Move," he said to the girls when he also attacked the warrior. Their swords sh together. Sam sent backward. This was the power of a peak-grade warrior. Jeni once again shoots a white thunderbolt toward the warriors, but this time, the warrior was prepared for this. He jumped backward, and the thunderbolt missed him.


    Kenny and Tina also tried to attack him, but the warrior with a back kick sent Kenny flying and afternding on the ground, he crouches down instantly to avoid Tina''s attack and punches her in the stomach. The punch was so powerful that Tina couched blood from his mouth and sent him flying.


    Sam had already gotten up from the ground and was ready to fight the warrior, but then he saw Tina''s condition, so he instantly changed his direction and went toward Tina and Kenny.


    "Jeni, try to keep him busy. I will check the condition of Kenny and Tina," Sam said to her. After hearing his word, Jeni nodded and cast a yellow thunderbolt (lower version), and attacked the warrior. Because she didn''t cast the white thunder blot, it takes less time to cast the yellow thunderbolt. Because of this, she continuously attacked the warrior. She was also worried about her friends.


    These yellow thunderbolts didn''t do that much damage to the warrior. Still, he got irritated by the spell caster who attacked him with this spell. He needed to finish this caster first, then he would finish the boy.


    Sam, at this time, ces Kenny and Tina behind a tree. Both of them were unconscious. He sighs in relief that they didn''t have serious conditions. He put them there, and he went towards the warrior.


    The warrior was going towards Jeni. He can''t let that happen. He quickly brings out his bow and shoots an arrow toward the warrior. After that, he started casting two big fireballs.


    The warriors who were going toward Jeni got hit by an arrow. This time, Sam didn''t use the spiritual energy to coat the arrow, so the arrow didn''t do that much damage to him. The warrior turned his head and looked in the direction from where the arrow came. He saw two fireballsing toward him. He instantly jumped backward and tried to avoid the fireball, but he could not do that. Those two fireballs hit him.


    The warrior screams in pain after the fireballs hit him. The me was burning him. While the warrior was busy screaming, Sam took this chance to move away from the ce. He also signals Jeni to get away from her ce. Kenny and Tina won''t be able to fight, so only Jeni and he can fight. He doesn''t want Jeni to get hurt.


    He knows these two fireballs won''t kill the warrior, it''s just stopping the warrior for some time. Sam wanted to use this chance to attack the warrior.


    Sam ns to fight the long-distance fight because he won''t be able to fight closebat because the warrior was more powerful than him and also the warrior''s speed was also greater than him. Because of this, he was nning to fight the warrior from a long distance. Jeni also can attack the warriors with her thunder spell.


    Jeni got away from her ce and came very far away from her previous ce. She can attack the warrior from this distance. It was just that she didn''t know if her attack would affect him because the warriors were quick. He can dodge her attack quickly.


    __________________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 108 108 - Helps Arrived

    Sam and Jeni already cast theirst attack. They had little spiritual energy, so it was theirst attack. If this attack can stop the enemy, then they will be safe or they will be doomed.


    While Sam and Jeni were preparing for theirst attack, Elena and Tony also had a tough fight against the other peak D grade warriors. The enemy defeated almost all of their teammates and sent them back to the association. It was just them and 4 of their teammates who could still fight the enemy. It wasn''t like that the enemy wasn''t injured. As you can guess, this peak D grade warrior also underestimates Tony and Elena''s power. Butpared to the warrior condition Sam was facing, his condition was better.


    Elena and Tony were also at their limit. They won''t be able to fight for very long. It was their willpower that prevented them from giving up.


    "Hahaha... Genius child, give up. I will give you a slow death," the enemy said to them.


    " Shut up!!! You scoundrel," one of Tony''s teammates replied to the enemy.


    "Guys, it will be ourst attack. Don''t hold back. Use your full strength." Tony told them with a serious face. Everyone nodded. They also n to use theirst bit of power in this attack. It was a do-or-die situation.


    At this time,


    Tom easily dominates his enemies. It was just that he needed some time to finish them. Only then will he be able to help the students. The students didn''t know, but he can tell these warriors from the dark association were most likely bait who were in charge of stopping these students while their teammates finished their work.


    He can easily finish them but some time ago, these three warriors took out some kind of pill and ate that. After that, they be fighting machines. They could not feel fear in this state and their wounds got healed faster. Because of this, Tom needed some time to finish them. He didn''t want to kill them because these warriors were very useful. If he takes them to the association, he can extract information about their goal. Now Tom was hoping that the help quickly arrived or all the students would be sent back to the association with serious injuries. If they directly go back to the association, then it won''t be a problem. But, while fighting these warriors, they will be injured seriously.


    _____________________________________


    Unknown to them,


    The other five warriors at this time were inside the cave. They previously didn''t leave the cave, but hid themselves. When they saw all the students leave the cave, they finally worked. They mainly came here to activate the forbidden summoning symbol. It needed them to send their spiritual energy toward the symbol to activate it. The moment they finish their work, they will leave the ce. Because they needed to leave the forest.


    _____________________________________


    Back to Sam and his team,


    Jeni had already finished casting the white thunderbolt. She almost used all of her spiritual energy in this attack. Wasting no time, she attacks the enemy.


    The enemy stopped screaming, and now he was looking at them. He needed to finish these two rats, then he would help the others.


    He didn''t want to give them a simple death; he nned to make them suffer. These students dare to hurt him, they will pay for that. It was his mindset at this moment. His focus was on Sam. This boy''s fair hurt him the most. He needed to finish this boy first. But at this moment, he saw a white light.


    He didn''t know what this was, but tried to avoid the light. But the thunderbolt traveled quickly toward him, and he didn''t even get the chance to react when the thunderbolt hit him. He once again screams after getting hit by the thunderbolt. The previous fireballs didn''t hurt him that much, they only burned his clothes, but this time, this attack hurt him very much.


    Sam also finishes casting his great fireball. In just 2 minutes, he finishes casting it. Previously, he never had 3 minutes to cast this spell, but he improved in his casting. Wasting no time, he also sends the fireball toward the enemy.


    The enemy at this moment was screaming painfully while his eyes were closed because he wasn''t aware of Sam''s attack. The great fireball hit him. Instantly, he feels like someone throws him in the sun. His skin burned from the attack.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ? Sam, at this moment, arrives in front of Jeni. He saw she was unconscious. It was normal because when you use it, most of the spiritual energy will be unconscious. It was willpower that made him still awake, or he also became unconscious after using almost all of his spiritual energy.


    He carries Jeni to a safe ce. Now he didn''t know if they were sessful or not? But he knows one thing now. He was the only one that could fight if the enemy still didn''t get defeated by them. He had little strength now, now he can only rely on his berserk technique to fight the enemy if the enemy still attacks him. This was his trump card.


    Sam was panting and looking at the enemy to confirm if they had defeated the enemy. He saw a personing out of the fire. He didn''t have any dress on his body; the fire had already burned all of this. His skin also got burned by the fire. A skeleton-like persones out of the fire.


    Sam was shocked even after this. The enemy was still alive. He was about to activate his breaker technique to fight the enemy when he saw a lighting toward the enemy and hit the enemy. It instantly made the enemy turn into ash.


    Sam looked in the direction from where he realized came. He saw a person with long hair. She wasing towards him. After seeing the person, he was relieved and finally became unconscious. Yes, your guess was right. She is Alena. She finally reached the cave.


    Alena quicklyes in Sam''s direction and checks his condition. She sighs in relief because he didn''t have that many serious injuries. She also sees Jeni and the other girls. They also check their condition. Seeing that no one was seriously hurt, she was relieved.


    Alena got up from his ce and looked in the other students'' direction. She saw the serious condition of the students. Wasting no time, she went towards them. She needs to help or it will be bad for those students. She instantly cast a ''Sun ray'' and attacked the enemy. It was one of her attacks. She also previously used this attack to kill the enemy that Sam was fighting.


    Tony, Elena, and their 2 teammates were seriously hurt. Even after attacking the enemy with their fun power, the enemy can still fight them. But they didn''t have the strength to fight the enemy. Because of this, they were seriously hurt. Just when they felt that their death was near, they saw a light hit the enemy. Instantly, the enemy let out a painful cry and a few secondster, turned into dust. They saw a personing toward them. After seeing it was Alena, they were finally relieved and became unconscious.


    Alena quicklyes toward them. Seeing their serious condition, she quickly uses a healing ray. It will heal their injuries. After some minutester, she finally sighs in relief because finally Tony and the others were improved. They just need some rest, then they will fight once again.


    Tom had already killed two warriors and was about to kill thest warrior. He killed thest enemy quickly and quickly searched for the students. He finally can help the students. He just hoped nothing bad would happen to them. Tom saw Alena, who was healing the students.


    He sighs in relief. Finally, Alena came and saved the students. He also quickly went towards her. He saw she had already finished healing Tony and the others and was about to get up.


    "Finally, you came. These damn warriors are using pills that made them quickly heal, which made them difficult to kill," he said to her.


    " So, how are their condition? I can see fewer students here. It means many students already teleport to the association," he asked her. Tom was also worried about the student''s injury.


    " Don''t worry, I already stabilized their condition. They just need some good rest," Alena answers him.


    While they were talking, 10 warriors appeared. It made them alert, but after seeing that they were the warriors from the association; they were relieved. Finally, they were here.


    "Harry, Lina, and Fin, you three will stay here and look after these students. Others will go with us to search for the other five enemies. Previously, I felt a five presence in the cave. We need to search in the cave." Tom said to them.


    " Yes sir," all the warriors respond after hearing his words. Instantly, Lina went in Sam''s direction. They were unconscious, and Harry and Fin will carry them toward Tony and Elena.


    The others were already gone to the cave. It wasn''t time to waste. Tom can already guess why these warriors came here.


    ________________To be continued_________________

 Chapter 109 109 - Killing The Ox Monster

    Tom and the others enter the cave carefully. Just the moment they entered the cave, they were feeling something ominous. Alena and Tom looked at each other and nodded. They quickly signal all the other warriors to pursue them.


    They quickly came to the center of the cave where they had previously seen the symbol. But, the thing they saw shocked them. Because they saw a big ox-like monstering out of the symbol.


    Instantly, the temperature of the room bes cold. This monster wasn''t born from positive energy. It is born from dark energy.


    But Alena, Tom, and the other warriors didn''t feel scared seeing the monster. It was only an intermediate A-grade monster. Alena and Tom were professional warriors who faced many dangerous monsters, and the warriors from the association were highly trained warriors. They won''t be scared so easily. All of them were calm at this moment because they needed to know which student''s blood was used in this pattern. Those students'' lives can be in danger. They needed to finish the monsters quickly.


    They finally found the five enemies they were searching for. Those five warriors were near the symbol. They were channeling their spiritual energy toward the symbol.


    Alena and Tom jotted them. The other two warriors also didn''t waste their time, and with Tom and Alena, they also went toward the enemy. It was the best chance to finish the enemy. Because the enemies were busy channeling their spiritual energy toward the forbidden symbol and at this time, they could not move from their ce.


    They didn''t waste their time and quickly attacked the enemy. Because the enemy cannot move, they easily finish them. Tom sighed in relief. They are able to stop the enemy from summoning the dangerous monster.


    But, suddenly they saw that even after their death, spiritual energy from that enemy was going toward the symbol. Which install summons the ox monster. Previously, this enemy was very close to summoning the monster. Because of this, the monster appears after getting thest bit of spiritual energy he needs to appear. The body of those five warriors turned into dust the moment the monster appear.


    It made Tom and the others alert. They never thought that even after killing this enemy, the monster was still summoned here.


    "Ken, and Ria, attack," Alena instantly said to those warriors who were also good at using light elements.


    Alena instantly cast a holy ray and attacked the monster. They needed to finish this monster as quickly as they could. Ken and Ria also cast the holy ray spell and attack the monster.


    The monster just appeared and didn''t notice them. Three holy ray spells instantly hit him. It instantly burned his skin, his blood, and his bones.


    This monster was only in early A-grade. But Alena was a peak A-grade warrior, and Ken and Ria were early A-grade warriors. So, in front of theirbined attack, he was unable to defend himself. Even when his super regeneration factor was working and trying to heal his body, he could not defend himself.


    The roar he let out was a painful roar. He didn''t think the moment he appeared in this ce he would get hit, but this powerful holy ray. He was a creature of dark energy. The Holy ray was their natural enemy. The holy ray tried to continuously purify the blood of the monster, which was the same as killing him.


    "Keep this up. We almost killed him. Just a little more," Tom said to them. He also watches how the monster that just appears instantly gets hit by the powerful holy ray. He didn''t even defend himself.


    Just a few minutester, the body of the monster turns into dust. Everyone released a deep sigh. Finally, the trouble was gone.


    Tom sat down on the ground. Finally, he can rest. He wasn''t tired; it was just these few hours he was worried about the students. Finally, he can rx. Tom just hopes that the six students who were sent back to the association weren''t in some serious condition, or it can leave an enormous impact on their life.


    "Good work," Alena came closer to him and said. Tom nodded, hearing her words.


    "Let''s go outside. But before that, we needed to destroy this symbol. It was our mistake we previously didn''t destroy this symbol," Alena said to them. Because if they had previously already destroyed this symbol, then something like this never happened to them.


    Tom gets up from the ground, and with the others, they leave the cave. They alle toward the ce where Harry, Lina, and Fin were with the students and looking after them.


    Alena saw that Sam, Jeni, Elena, and Tony were already awake. They were talking with Harry.


    They all turned around and looked toward the cave. They saw Alena, and the others were back. But where was the enemy? Why can''t they see the enemy?<novelnext></novelnext>


    Alena and the others appear in front of them. They saw the questionable look on their face. They understand it confuses all of them because they can''t see the enemy with them.


    "Lady Alena, where is the enemy? Why can''t we see them? Did you already kill them?" Fin asked them. The others also focused on her. They were waiting for her answer.


    "Yes, they are already dead. We previously thought we could bring one of them to ask, but their body turned into dust when they summoned the monster through the forbidden summoning," she calmly answered them.


    " What!!!!!!!!!," all the students at the same time eximed. The moment they hear about the monster thates out from the forbidden summoning, they be scared except for Sam. He knows Alena and others were here with them and talking with them calmly. It means they already solved the problem.


    "Don''t worry. We already killed the monster. You don''t need to worry about the monster," seeing the student''s scared look, Tom suddenly said to them.


    "Sigh. Thank God, the monster was dead," all of them sigh after hearing his word.


    _________________________


    A few minutester, they were inside the cave, resting. Elena and Jeni already asked Alena about the condition of their teenaged m teammates. Tony was talking with Tom about the monster and the enemy. Sam, at this time, is sitting in a corner of the cave. He was feeling hungry and needed to eat. So, wasting no time, he brings out the food and starts eating.


    The other students also woke up one by one. Ken and Ria gave them a healthy potion and a spiritual energy potion. It will help the students to recover faster from their injuries.


    It was now nighttime,


    All the students and the warriors were now feeling hungry. The students faced the toughest enemy in their life. While facing them, they all almost use all of their spiritual energy. Because of this, all of them were hungry. So, energy one brings out the food and starts eating.


    "Ahh, yes. Why did you guysete? You can just directly teleport to the ce," suddenly Tom asked the five warriors who were from the association. This question is also in Sam''s and other students'' minds. They also wanted to ask about that. They all focus on the warriors to know the answer.


    " Sir, before we came here, we were with the other warriors who teleported us to another ce. They teleported us to the ce where Miss Alexa, Mr. James, and also other warriors were facing a summoning monster. They were facing the summoning monster that was also summoned by the enemy, using forbidden summoning. Because of this, Saint Markus told us to go there. We were fighting the enemy when we got the news that these students also got attacked by a group of enemies. Because of this, we came hereter." Harry exins this to Tom and the others.


    "How was the situation, then?" Tom instantly asked them.


    " Don''t worry sir, before we came here, we already sessfully killed the monster. It is just that many students got seriously injured and sent back to the association." Harry said to them.


    Hearing that the monsters injured the many students, the students be worried.


    Seeing their worried face Harry quickly said, " Don''t worry about them. We already talked about the association. All the students were immediately treated by the best healer. So, you don''t need to worry about them. "


    ''Sigh, just one day, then the exam will be finished. Why is something like this happening at this moment? How the hell are we gonna finish the exam?'' Sam has these questions in his mind. He just didn''t understand the motive of this dark association. Why are they suddenly interfering with the college exam and attacking the students?


    He can only sigh. He didn''t know what was going to happen tomorrow? Because of this, he sighs. He didn''t even know if he was going to pass this year''s college exam or not, and what would happen to the students who were controlled by the enemy or sent back association after being injured by the dark monster?


    _______________To be continued_________________


    [A/N: Hope you guys will like the chapter. Have a good day guys.]

 Chapter 110 110 - Lets Go The Central Area Of The Forest

    The next day, in the association,


    All the Saints were now watching the screen and the students. Today will be thest day of their exam. They all were ready to take action if anything bad happened that the A-grade warriors won''t be able to solve. Usually, the saints were very busy, but because of the dark attestation association, many saints were now here and watching the students.


    The dark association mainly attacked these students from the top 10 list. But the other students also get affected by this. Those students who were very close to the top 10 listed students also got affected.


    Dark association attacked them, trying to control them, and even those students got attacked by the dark summoner creature. Fortunately, those monsters weren''t summoned by the forbidden summoning.


    The Saints were nning to take care of this dark association after the exam was over. Because all the people in the world also watched the student''s performances, saints didn''t interfere with the exam.


    Many people from all over the world now had a question, "who wears those warriors that were attacking the students? Why didn''t the association stop that high-grade monster from attacking the students?"


    Markus and the other Saint got to know that these enemies were from the side branch of the dark association. They weren''t from the main branch. The location of the main branch no one knows. Still, they could know the location of the side branch.


    He was just about to kill himself when saint Mira was interrogating him. Fortunately, Mira stops the enemy before hemitted suicide. She knocks down the enemy and searches his mind. From there, she got to know the location of the dark association''s side branch.


    "Guys, all you need to be prepared. After the exam, we will visit this dark association," Markus said to everyone. He will find them to pay for what they did.


    -----------------------------------------------------------------------


    Back to Sam,


    Sam, Jeni, Elena, and Tony were now discussing what they should do today. Tom, Alena, and others have already left the cave to search for the enemy. Because the enemy was very dangerous for the students. They need to find him first. Today was thest day and they think today will do something that will harm all the students.


    Elena and Tony''s previous n was that after they will take a rest in the cave, they will go their separate ways, but now Elena, Jeni, and Tony think it will be best for them if they stick together. Sam didn''t have any problem with that. He already showed his strength previously, and he can guess that Jeni and the others, even the association, were now guessing that his rank was early D-grade. You won''t be able to fight a peak D-grade warrior, even if you are a powerful peak E-grade warrior. He still didn''t want to show all of his trump cards.


    "Sam, did you have any problem if Elena and others were joining us?" Jeni asked him. She can see that Sam was silent the entire time while they were discussing.


    "No, I didn''t have any problem with this," Sam replied to her. He always goes to the dungeon alone, but that didn''t mean he was a lonely person. It was just that he didn''t get good friends who were trustworthy. At first, in his school, he made some friends, but those friends weren''t trustworthy. Because of this, he was alone in school.


    "Great. If we can stick together, then there won''t be any problem. We don''t know what will happen today. So, we should support each other," Tom said to them.


    Sam just nodded after hearing his word. He also thinks that it was better for them. Now, they don''t know what will happen today, but he can guess because today was thest day, the enemy will try to do something to them today.


    "We were near the central area of the first. Let''s go there," Elena said to them. They can find the bosses of the forest in that ce. Even though those monsters won''t be as powerful as the monsters which wereing from the Forbidden summoning. Still, those bosses can give them a point.


    So, they all start going towards the central area. They can also meet the other warriors there and even when the enemy attacks them, they can defend themself.


    ------------------------------------------------------


    In a cave near the central area,<novelnext></novelnext>


    A man was drawing some type of symbol. He was using red liquid to draw the blood. Yes, you guessed right; he was the person who was wanted by the warrior association. He was drawing the ultimate symbol for summoning his lord.


    The students'' blood was being used to draw a small symbol. He connected these small symbols to a big symbol. He was drawing an eight-circuit pattern. For this first, he needed to draw 8 unfamiliar patterns around the main pattern. We should draw those eight unique patterns using fresh blood from the students. After he finished them, he needed to draw the main pattern using his own blood. It was the requirement to summon a lord using forbidden summoning from theher world.


    "Haha... Just a little more, then the dark lord will be here. Hahaha..... Those saints also won''t be able to do anything to the lord. Hail to the dark lord," he was saying this while he wasughing like a crazy person. His name was Fredrick. He doesn''t have a surname. Those who were from the dark association didn''t have any surnames. Even his name was given by himself. In the dark association, they didn''t have any name or surname, they only had a code name. His code was G-50.


    [A/N: G represents the word Gama. It was a team of the dark association. I will tell you about thister.]


    It took him 20 years to learn the summoning technique. Because of this, he had previously never interfered with the college exam. But this year he could finally use the forbidden summoning, because of this, he was attacking the students.


    Previously, with the help of his teammates who were controlling the students with his mind control to attack the other students, he used this chance to collect the blood of 8 students.


    "Hahaha... Little rats just wait a little longer. When my lord wille to the earth, you all will be a meal for my lord. Haha,"


    -----------------------------------------------------


    Right now, Alena, Maria, Tom, and the other warriors were continuously searching for the enemy. Even after using the life detector, they weren''t able to find the enemy. Like previously, those warriors from the dark association found something that can block the life detector''s signals.


    Nobody knows how the dark association found these methods. But all the Saint can guess that they connected the dark association to some kind of other world force, who were helping them.


    "Guys, search around the central area. I think the enemy will be there. His primary motive was to do something big today, and he also wanted to harm these students. Today, most of the students will be in the central area, and I think the enemy will be there. Guys, don''t waste time," Tom suddenly said to all the warriors. They almost searched all the areas in the inner area of the forest, only the central area was left.


    " Guys, also try to search for any kind of cave. The enemy won''t do something like this in an open area. So, he can only do this to a cave. The central didn''t have that many caves or ces where he could hide. So, trying to search for that type of ce," Tom also said that to them. It was confirmed that if the enemy wants to attack the students using forbidden summoning, then he will need to hide from the warrior association.


    Wasting no time, all the warriors went towards the central area. The more time they will waste, the more the situation will be bad. What if the enemy summons a kind of monster who can control and block the teleportation? Then the students will be in a dangerous situation.


    --------------------------------------------------


    Back to Sam,


    Sam and the others were now going towards the central area. While they were going, they also got attacked by some elephant beetles, cold crocodiles, and other monsters. But because now the number of warriors has increased, they take care of those monsters quickly. It is also one of the best things about having teammates.


    But suddenly they stop advancing because they hear some warrior''s voice. They were very near the central area.


    "Guys, we first need to confirm if they were enemies or students like us," Tony said to them. All of them nodded. They also like to check if they are enemies or students. What if the enemy already attacked them and it won''t be surprising if the enemy once again came near the central area to attack the students?


    ________________________To be continued__________________


    [A/N: Have a good day guys.]

 Chapter 111 111 - Meating Alexa

    Sam signals them to stay silent while he will check. His stealth technique was the best among them, so it was natural for him to go there.


    Sam activated his concealment technique and silently went toward the source of the voice. He was eager to know the identity of those voices. Today was thest day and it won''t be surprising if the enemy attacked today.


    He saw 6 people (Three girls and three boys) discussing something among them. He wasn''t able to see the faces of those people. Because he was facing their backside. But these warriors were wearing the dress of the central academy. Still, Sam wants to confirm their identity. The enemy also can wear the school dress of various schools to fool the students.


    Sam didn''t know the name of every warrior who was taking part in the college exam, but he knew the names of the students who were early D-grade warriors and some warriors who were peak E-grade warriors. He wants to find out if he can meet someone familiar.


    Sam hides behind a bush and looks at them. He has confidence in his concealment technique. He silently looked at them and heard their discussion.


    "... Those warriors from the association had the guts to attack us even when the Saints were watching us. It was unexpected. Today, we needed to be careful. Today was thest day of the exam. It was very possible for that dark association to attack us today. Previously, Mr. Jerry solved the summon monster. We don''t know if those dark association warriors will once again summon those monsters. But remember Mr. Jerry''s words that those monsters were very dangerous. So, guys, be careful," Sam heard a girl''s voice telling her teammates. He wasn''t able to hear the first few lines, but he can guess that these warriors were discussing the dark association warriors.


    Most likely these people were students the same as him. Still, there was a chance that they were the enemy. To fool the students, they were talking about the dark association. With this word, they can present themself as the students and when the other students will approach them, they will attack those students.


    Sam still looked at them. Sometimeter, he finally found a familiar face. He could finally see the face of the girl, who was previously talking to her teammates. She was Alexa Galm. Sam remembers her because her title was the same as Aria. He thinks these two girls were siblings, and one interesting thing was that Aria and Alexa''s surname was the same as that of Saint Markus. It is also possible that these girls were rted to Markus.


    Sam shook his head. He can think about this matterter. Right now, the important thing was that these people weren''t enemies, they were students like Sam and his team. Sam silently turned back and went toward his team.


    At this moment, Jeni and the others were making no sound, looking in the direction where they heard the voices. Finally, Sam was back. They had previously been worried about him. They knew how strong Sam was, even so, they were worried about him.


    Sam finally saw his team and went towards them. He saw the girls were having a worried look, while Tony and the others had a questionable look.


    "Don''t worry, I am fine. Previously I could not see the faces of those people, but after waiting some time I finally saw a familiar face. I think Tony and Jeni are also familiar with the girl and her teammates. Her name is Alexa Galm, but I don''t know the name of her teammate. Still, I think you two know her better than me. So, yea, I confirmed they aren''t enemies. If you guys want to approach them, then I don''t have a problem or if you don''t want to approach them, even then I don''t have any problem," Sam said to them. While he brings out a water bottle and starts drinking.


    Elena, Jeni, and Tony look at each other. Sam doesn''t have a problem with Alexa, but you can say that she won''t have a problem if they approached her. Still, they don''t know if they should contact her or not.


    "Tony, I think we should contact her. Now, the situation wasn''t the same as before. Even if she didn''t want toe together, we can alert her about the forbidden summoning." Jeni said to Tony. They also came from the Royal school, so naturally, they know her. Even Jeni and Alexa were good friends.


    "I think you are right. Let''s go, we should contact her," Tony also agreed with Jeni. Even if Alexa didn''t want toe together with them, they can tell her about the dark association and the forbidden summoning.


    Tony previously asked Harry, " Are there any students except them who know about the forbidden summoning?"


    " No, only you guys know about the forbidden summoning. The others only know that dark association warriors were attacking the students using summoned monsters, but they didn''t know about the forbidden summoning," Harry previously said to him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    With that, he can understand that even Alexa didn''t know about the forbidden summoning. If they didn''t tell Alexa about the forbidden summoning, it can be quite risky for her. They know Alexa wasn''t a reckless person, but what if her teammates do something reckless? It can be quite risky for them. Because of this, it was better to alert them about the forbidden summoning.


    Tony, Jeni, and Elena went toward Alexa and her teammates. Elena is also Alexa''s good friend, so it was natural to go toward her.


    Alexa and her teammates were discussing the dark association warriors. Some time ago they got attacked by a summon monster. If the monster was in the same grade as them, they can fight with it, but if the monster was an A-grade. It was a whole other level. Fortunately, the warriors from the warrior association take care of the monster.


    They also hear not only then but even Tony, Jeni, James, and many other students get attacked by this type of monster. Because of this, they were discussing what they should do next. Like Sam and the others, Alexa also can guess that today those enemies do something that can harm the students or even the students to lose their life. Because of this, they were extra careful.


    Suddenly Alexa signals her teammates to stop talking and hide. Because she heard footsteps. Her hearing was quite sharppared to others, so she could hear the footsteps before any of her teammates heard them.


    Her teammates, wasting no time, quickly hide. They always believe in her. She was giving them the signal to hide. It means something was wrong. So, it was natural to hide, wasting no time.


    Alexa also hid, but her focus was on the forest, from where she heard footsteps. If they were the enemy, then she wouldn''t waste any time and attack them. But if they were enemies and were powerful, then she and her teammates would retreat. They needed to analyze their strength.


    Finally, her teammates could also hear footsteps. They also looked in the direction from which the signal wasing.


    "Guys, be ready to attack them. But if they were enemies, and they were stronger than yours, then guys don''t waste any time and retreat into a safe ce. Understand?...," she said to her teammates in their minds. Yes, your guess was right. She also knows little of telekinesis. With this technique, shemunicated with her teammates.


    Everyone nodded after hearing her n. They also agreed with her. Previously, they also heard about a group of enemies who attacked Jeni, Tony, and their teammates some time ago. Those enemies belonged to the dark association.


    They were silently waiting and looking in the direction where they heard the footsteps. After some time of waiting, they finally saw three figuresing out of the wood.


    "Sigh," Alexa''s teammates sigh in relief. They know these three people. They were Elena, Jeni, and Tony. Alexa also rxes after seeing them. She thought they were enemies, but no, they were her friends. These three were her good friends. Alexa and her teammates came out of their hiding ce.


    "Hey guys, how are you? " Jeni asked them. Seeing theming out from the hiding ce, Jeni suddenly asked.


    "We are fine Jeni. How are you? Are you together? I never thought Tony would form a team with anyone," Alexa said. It also surprised her to see them together.


    "Yeah, something happened, and we formed a team. Many of our teammates got attacked by the enemy from the dark association and sent back to the warrior association. Because of this, we formed a team," Tony said. Hearing him, Alexa also nodded. She also heard that they got attacked by a group of warriors from the dark association and also they got attacked by the summoned monster. So, it was natural that many of their teammates would be sent back to the association because not everyone was like them as early D-grade warriors.


    ______________To be continued____________

 Chapter 112 112 - Found A Drop Of Blood

    "Yea, I also heard that you all got attacked by the enemy from the dark association," Alexa said to them.


    " Yes. It is a long story. But we also heard that you and your teammates got attacked by a summoned monster." Jeni said that. Alexa and her teammates nodded.


    "Actually, guys, we came here to alert you. Guys, do you know about the forbidden summoning?" Elena asked them.


    Alexa and her teammates looked at each other with a questionable look. They didn''t know about the forbidden summoning.


    "Yea, like we guessed. You don''t know about the forbidden summoning. Sigh," Elena sighed. Then Elena told them about the forbidden summoning and dark association. It took some time to tell them about the whole thing. When Elena finished talking, she looked at Alexa and her teammates. Their expression was very pale. Alexa didn''t have any spiritual warrior who can light a spell, or even if she or her teammates can use the light spell, they don''t think they can handle those summoned monsters. She was only an early D-grade warrior, but the monster was an early A-grade dark monster. Normal attacks only damage him slightly. You can fight against the dark monster only using their natural enemy, the "power of light".


    "Actually, we also don''t know that much about the forbidden summoning. Miss Maria or Miss Alena, don''t know why? But they didn''t want to tell us about the forbidden summoning. Also, we think Sam knows about it, but he also didn''t want to talk about the Forbidden summoning. I didn''t know why, but I felt an ominous feeling when I saw the symbols. Jeni or others didn''t feel it. Only I felt that. I think you also heard that they also attacked me and my teammates with the dark monster. I think that something connected the monster and the symbol in the cave to each other. Fortunately, that time helps arrive," Tony said to them. Previously, when he first saw that symbol, he felt ominous. He also asked others. But no one felt that. Because of this, he guessed that the symbol and the monster who had attacked him previously were connected.


    Jeni and Elena nodded. They also guessed it. Alexa and her teammates were listening to his words with attention. If the information somehow in the future saves their life. Alexa was in deep thought, but suddenly, she had a question.


    "Wait.... wait..... wait. Guys, who is Sam? You also mention him and Elena also previously mentioned him. Is he a warrior from the warrior association?" Alexa asked them. ''Nowe to think of it, who is this, Sam? Why are they all mentioning him?'' these types of questions now she was having in her mind.


    Jeni, Elena, and Tony looked at each other. For some time they kept looking at each other''s faces, then suddenly they began tough. " Hahaha... Hahaha."


    "Haha... Sorry about that. I totally forgot about it, that you don''t know him." Tony said to her while he wasughing.


    " Well, now I calm down, I will tell you about Sam. No, he wasn''t a warrior from the warrior association. He was a student like us. You can say Sam is an interesting and also mysterious character. You should also know him. He was Sam Kainer, brother of the genius Gloria Kainer. If you look at him from the outside, then you won''t feel the difference in him. You get to know him, then you will see how interesting he is."


    "He talks less, but when facing the enemy, he guides his teammates properly. If you are thinking why we are saying this because he had the aura of a leader. You can say, he is a low-key character. He doesn''t like to show off. But one thing was obvious: never go on his bad side because we think he is way stronger than us. I think he is even stronger than you. Previously, we heard the rumor of Sam being a loser despite having a genius sister. Even Elena can tell about what is reputation previously in school."


    " I think he didn''t like to show off because of this. He didn''t reveal his power. If he reveals his power in the school, then nobody can call him a loser," Tony said to her. Elena and Jeni kept nodding after hearing his word.


    Now it was interesting because these three friends of hers were talking about an interesting student. Now she is also interested in meeting Sam. She wants to know why her friends found it interesting to Sam.


    "So, where can I meet Sam? I can''t see him here? Are you guys together with him?" Alexa asked.


    " Yea, we are together. Don''t worry about him. I think he is near us but hiding. You can say he is always extra careful," Jeni said. She and Sam were a team. Compared to Elena and Tony, she knows him better.


    "Sam, are you here? Come out please, they aren''t the enemy. They are friends. She is Alexa, you know her. She wants to meet you," Jeni said while searching for him.


    Jeni, Elena, and Tony all know Sam was better at hiding. So, it was tough to find him when he was hiding.


    While they were searching for him, they felt something. They turned around and saw that a person was beside them. It was Sam, who silently came beside them. It didn''t surprise them very much, but Alexa and her teammates were deeply shocked. ''How did he arrive beside them with no one noticing anything?''


    "Haha... Alexa, this is Sam, and Sam this is Alexa," seeing him appearing like this, Jeni smiled awkwardly and introduced him to Alexa.


    Sam looked at Alexa and just nodded. Alexa was about to greet him, but seeing him nodding at her, she also nodded at him. Jeni and the othersugh awkwardly.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Well, what did I tell you, but Sam was best at hiding? You won''t even notice his presence anymore when he hides. Also, I don''t think you know, but Sam is the first one to confirm that you are Alexa and you aren''t an enemy, then he told us," Tony said that to Alexa. Alexa, at this time, looking at Sam.


    "Ok, let''s go to the central area. I don''t think standing here will solve anything. So let''s go. Alexa, wanna join us?" Tony asked her. It was natural that standing here won''t solve the matter. So, it was better that they go to the central area, then if they can see any boss they will hunt him down and the exam will be finished.


    " Can you give me minutes to think? I need to discuss it with my teammates." Alexa said. Jeni and the others just nodded.


    "Also, we needed to call our team," Tony said to his team.


    "Don''t worry about them. They are nearby." Sam said. While their teammates areing, they can look in Alexa''s direction. They can only wait for her decision. Alexa and her teammates were now discussing what they should do at this moment.


    Sometimeter, Alexa finally agreed with Jeni and the others to go with them.


    Sometimeter, when Kenny and others finally reached them, they went towards the central area. They were very near the central area. The monsters in the central area will be much stronger than the other area. They also needed to be extra careful about the monster in the central area beside the enemy from the dark association.


    -----------------------------------


    At this time,


    Alena and the others finally reached the central area and started searching for the enemy. They were now searching ces like caves or something like that. The enemy wasn''t a stupid person to do something like this openly. He obviously searches for a ce where he can''t be noticed by the warrior association.


    They are all searching in various directions. They also asked the association to keep monitoring the central area, or its nearby area. It was sure the enemy was here. They just needed to find it.


    "Hello, hello..... It is Fin. I found some blood drops. I am now near the river." Fin, report to everyone.


    " Wait, there we areing," Maria suddenly said to him through the phone and started going towards the riverside.


    They all took some minutes to reach the riverside.


    "Where did you see the droop of blood?" Maria asked Fin. Fin, wasting no time, quickly shows them the ce where he saw blood drop.


    The drop of blood was still there, and it was fresh. So, it means someone who was injured came here. They don''t know if the enemy was injured or not. But they guessed the enemy was here, and it was his blood or the blood of the students, which he was using to draw symbols.


    "Hello, hello... It''s me, Maria. Quickly, tell me if you find any suspicious movement in this area?" Maria quickly contacts the association.


    ______________To be continued____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, have a good day.]

 Chapter 113 113 - Footage

    "You all search the ce and see if you can find a cave type of ce. Don''t waste your time and go," Alena suddenly said. Like Maria and others, she wasn''t a warrior from the association, but she was a peak A-grade warrior. Because of this, those warriors from the association listen to her. She and Maria are also good friends and if anyone dares to disobey her then, you can say it was a bad day. Maria will show him hell.


    "Yes,dy Alena." After saying that, all the warriors went searching. While Maria and Alena were waiting for the association''s report. It is just a matter of time before they will find the enemy. They don''t think that the enemy could escape the time.


    ______________________


    Back to Sam,


    They finally reached the central area of the forest. Compared to the inner area, this central area has fewer trees so sunlight can enter this area.


    Sam and others just needed to search for the boss. The boss will be the peak D-grade monster. They also meet some intermediate D-grade monsters in this area. To make thepetition fair, the warrior association didn''t add many intermediate monsters or peak D-grade monsters.


    Sam and the others were walking in this area. They were extra careful because here they will face powerful monsters. When they were walking, Alexa and Sam suddenly heard many voices. They instantly be serious. Sam quickly signals his team to be alert. Seeing Alexa and Sam this serious, Jeni and others also be alert.


    Sam and Alexa heard the voices of five humans that wereing from the left side of the forest. Not that they weren''t cowards that just Harding hearing voices will make them scared and they will retreat. Because of this, they were waiting for those humans.


    A few minutester,


    Five peoplee out from the woods. Jeni, Tony, Alexa, and others who were from the royal school didn''t know these people, but Sam and Elena knew them. It was L and her teammates. L Majur is also a peak E-grade warrior from base school. It was natural for Sam and Elena to know her. This L, also an elite student like Elena, when they were in school. Elena and L were quite good friends. L was better than her other friends, who looked down on the people whose strength was lower than theirs. She didn''t look down on people.


    "Elena, talk to her and her teammates," Sam said to her. He wasn''t familiar with her.


    Elena nodded and walked toward L and her teammates. Seeing that Elena was walking toward those five people made everyone rx. Now they were in the central area, so everyone knew it was just a matter of time before students came here or many students had alreadye here.


    ''I think the enemy is waiting for all the students toe here. When all the renaming studentse here, he will attack them.'' Sam was thinking about the motive of the enemy. If the enemy wants, he can already attack them, but his guess can be wrong. What if the enemy didn''t have enough to finish the symbol? What if the enemy had little spiritual energy?.


    Sam shook his head and stopped thinking those useless thoughts. He looked in Elena''s direction. She was now talking with L. She and Elena were from the same ss and they were good friends. Sam didn''t know what happened, but L wasing toward them with Elena. ''What did Elena tell her?'' he was thinking about that.


    "shback"


    "Hey L, how are you?" Elena walked toward them and asked. At first, L and her teammates get startled, but after seeing that it was Elena, they rx.


    "Fine. Also, how are you? Why are you alone?" L asked Elena. L can''t see any of her teammates.


    "It''s a long story, but you can tell that almost all of my teammates are sent back to the association. Now, I am a part of another team." Elena said that.


    It surprised L after hearing her words. She never thought that Elena, the genius of the Base school, joined a team. If she is willing, then many students will be her teammates. But she didn''t do that and joined another team.


    " Who else was on the team? And how many students do you have in your team?" L asked Elena.


    It took some time to finish exining her team. L got surprised after he heard that Sam, the loser of their school, was a part of the team. Also, Elena said that Sam was like them, an early D-grade warrior. It was also quite shocking news for her. Who thought that the famous loser of their school was actually hiding his power?


    "Ok... Stop thinking about those useless thoughts. Actually, I came here to ask you something. Answer me honestly," Elena said seriously. Seeing her serious look, L and her teammates nodded.


    "Do you know about the dark Association? Previously, many of our teammates got controlled by the enemy who belonged to the dark association." Elena said to them. L and her teammates were seriously listening to her. When they heard her question, they all nodded. They also know about the dark association and also know that many of their ssmates got controlled by the dark association''s warriors.


    "Ok. It was good that you know about the dark association. I don''t need to tell you about them. So, my next question is, do you know about the Forbidden symbol and summoned monster?" She asked, but didn''t get any answer from them. L and her teammates with questionable looks looked at her.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Ok... ok..... I will tell you about the forbidden summoning and the summoned monster," she said and exined about the Forbidden summoning and the Summoned monster.


    After exining everything, Elena asked them if they wanted toe with them. L agreed instantly and because of this, they were nowing to Sam and the others.


    "shback end"


    _____________________________


    At this moment,


    "Mam, some time ago, three of our camera bots in that area suddenly malfunctioned. We quickly sent other camera bots to that area, but they saw nothing. Because of this, we thought it was just those three camera bots that were damaged somehow." One warrior in charge of monitoring the camera bots reports it to Maria and Alena.


    "Also, mam we got something that might help you. Before the camera bots malfunction, one of the camera bots captures a shadow of a person. If we didn''t see the footage carefully, then we also missed that." He also said to them, Alena and Maria, at this time, silently listened to the report.


    "Quickly, send the footage," Maria said.


    " Yes, mam." The warrior replied and instantly sent the footage to Maria.


    She instantly opens the footage. She and Alena watched the footage.


    "In the footage, it was showing a normal picture. Everything is normal in the footage. The camera bot is in a tree''s branch. From there, the bots look at the surrounding area. It had a 180-degree camera view. The camera bot was capturing the footage of the right side of the river, then just when it was about to turn around to capture the left area''s footage, the screen became ck. It means at this moment the camera malfunctioned."


    Maria once again ys the footage and pauses the footage when the camera bot turns around on the left side. Now it was showing the footage before it malfunctioned.


    Alena and Maria look at the footage carefully. At first, they see everything was normal, but then they once again look at the footage carefully with more focus.


    It was then they discovered a person''s shadow on the footage. Previously, they ignored it, thinking it was the tree''s shadow. But it wasn''t.


    ? Maria zoomed at the shadow. It was clearly a human shadow that was near the river. Maria ys the footage and the next moment, the footage bes ck.


    So, it was only the capture of the human shadow who was near the river before it malfunctioned.


    " Did you check the other camera bots?" Alena asked.


    " Yes mam, we also checked the other camera, but they also captured nothing," the warrior replied.


    " Ok, continued searching in the area when the shadow was showing in the footage," Alena said, then cut the call.


    "Maria, what did you think?" She asked.


    "Alena, now seeing this footage, I have some questions. Whose shadow is this? If it was the shadow of the enemy, then what is he doing here? Why the hell was the other camera not able to capture him? How didn''t he know where the camera was? These are questions I am having. But, sigh, I know that nobody will give me an answer. I need to find the answer."


    "Alena, look here. I think the enemy came from the river. If you are thinking why, then think if the enemy came here by walking or running, then one camera will capture his figures. But no other camera captures his figures, which means he came from the water. Also, I think the enemy is aware of the camera''s position. If not, then how did he avoid all the cameras?" Maria said that to Alena. Alena nodded, hearing her words.


    ______________To be continued______________

 Chapter 114 114 - Secret Road

    Alena also agreed with Maria. If the enemy wasn''t aware of the camera bots, then how did he avoid them? It means two things. The enemy has something which can detect the camera bots, or there was a traitor inside the warrior association who was helping the enemy.


    But Maria didn''t think there was a traitor inside the warrior association, because those warriors who work for the warrior association needed to face tough interrogation. Not only that, there are many procedures the warrior needs to pass before he can join the association. So, it was unlikely that there was a traitor inside the association.


    Maria quickly contacted all the warriors and asked them about the clue, if they found any. But no one finds any clue.


    "Ok, you don''t need to search. Quickly,e back to the riverside. I have some important things to tell you all," Maria said to them.


    It didn''t take them much time toe back to the riverside. One by one, every warrior stands in a line.


    Maria went in front of them and started talking.


    "So, you all check your phone? I will send you a picture. A camera bot takes it before it malfunctions. If you look carefully at the photo, then you all see a shadow of a person in the footage. Most likely, it belongs to the enemy. Now the question is, what is the enemy doing at the riverside? So, I want you all to search the area where we find the footage. As you know, our camera bots can''t enter the water. Most likely the enemy is also aware of this and taking advantage of this. So, search the area carefully."


    " Yes ma''am," every warrior said and searched the area carefully. First, they discover the exact location when the shadow of the enemy was seen. Then the warriors searched the surrounding area. Alena and Maria also didn''t stay ideal and searched.


    "I don''t think we will find anything on the surface. We needed to search in the water. Harry, Fin, and Jerry, you guys take some warriors and search in the water. Most likely, there is an underground cave in the waters and the enemy hiding there." Alena said that after seeing that there is no clue here.


    "Yes, miss Alena," those warriors responded at the same time and jumped into the river. In this area, the river was pretty deep. They all searched.


    "Ring... Ring..... Ring." While they were busy searching, suddenly Maria''s phone rang. She quickly taps the answer button.


    "Ma''am, there is something strange we found in the inner area of the forest. Previously when we were searching in the inner area, we found a peculiar spot. From the outside, it looks like a normal cave. At first, like every other cave, we also think this cave is also a normal cave. But to search for the clue of the enemy, we sent some of our camera boats to this cave. From the look of the cave, you can tell it was quite old. It''s full of cracks and holes. At first, we ignored those cracks and holes because it was natural that the old cave would be full of cracks and holes. But, when we were searching, we found a hole that was quite weirdpared to others."


    "Still, then we thought it was a normal hole, but in curiosity, we sent a camera bot in that hole. We didn''t expect that we would find anything there. But, ma''am, you won''t believe what you found in that cave. We found a narrow road which was quite long. So with our camera bots, follow the road. After an hour, we finally found the exit. If the exit was still in the dark forest, we wouldn''t feel anything special about this cave, but when we exited the cave, we found we were outside of the dark forest and we were quite far away from the dark forest."


    " Mam, I think this is a secret road. Somehow those warriors from the dark association found the secret road and from this secret road, they entered the dark forest. Because of this, we cannot detect them when they are in the dark forest. Also, I think previously those dark association warriors came from this cave."


    "Also mam we didn''t think that this secret road was a normal road that was made naturally. We think it was those dark association warriors who made this road previously to attack those students." The warrior from the warrior association reports this to Maria. When the warrior reported Maria and Alena, they didn''t talk and listened to him silently. When the warrior finishes reporting, Maria and Alena have shocked expressions on their faces.


    They never thought that those dark associations would use this type of secret road to enter the dark forest to attack the students. Now Maria has a question in her mind, "If those warriors from the dark association can use this type of secret road to enter the dark forest then why can''t they use this type of secret road to enter the central area from the inner area?" This type of secret road will prevent those camera bots from noticing their movement.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Ma''am.. ma''am... Ma''am, we found one more this type of cave in the inner area. This cave was quite near the cave where Miss Jeni and the other students found the Forbidden symbol. We also found some drops of blood in that cave. So we can guess that the enemy previously was here. When those dark association warriors attack the students, the enemy uses this chance to escape from here. Because of this, I am unable to find any clue even after searching this much." The warrior from the warrior association quickly reports this recent news to Maria.


    "Ok. Continue monitoring," after saying that, Maria cut the call. This report makes her very serious. Because those warriors from the dark association make the secret roads without alerting the association. So it was natural to make Maria look serious.


    "Maria, after listening to this report, I am 100% sure that there was a cave in the water. In this case, the enemy is hiding and preparing to attack the students." Alena said that Maria. She is also seriously thinking about this matter. But one thing which Maria and Alena, both of them, were like to know was, "when did the enemy get this much chance to make a road?" It was the question they were having right now, but nobody knows the answer.


    "Right now, we can only wait for Harry and the others toe back. When theye back, we will ask them if they find anything in the water?" Alena said.


    _______________________________


    In the association,


    Right now Markus, Vena, and others are discussing the secret roads that they have discovered in the dark forest. They were the saints who protected the earth but they didn''t even know about these secret roads. How did those dark association warriors build something like this alerting no one?


    "Markus, I am sure that this dark association found something that can help their height from our reader, and because of this, we didn''t notice them. But now the crucial question is, where did they find something like this? I guess this thing wasn''t from Earth, it was from anothernd." Vena said this to Markus. Markus is also thinking about this right now.


    _________________________________


    Back to Sam,


    Sam and the others were resting. An Intermediate D-grade elephant beetle attacked them some time ago. It took all the students (we can say Sam and his teammates,) full strength to defeat that elephant beetle. As we know, the elephant beetle is the strongest defense in its body. You won''t be able to easily break that difference and because of this, Sam and his teammates needed to use their full strength to defeat this elephant beetle.


    Same at this time was eating some food, while the others were discussing the monsters among them. Alexa, L, and their teammates were looking at Sam. Alexa and her teammate were looking at him because they didn''t think that Sam was this powerful. But L and her teammate while looking at Sam with a shocked expression on their face. L and the others belonged to the Base school. So they naturally know about Sam, even though some of them always make jokes about Sam.


    After seeing Sam''s strength, L, and her teammates, have be silent. They didn''t know, How should they face him right now? Previously, when the device that checked all the students'' ranks, revealed that Sam was a peak E-grade warrior. They didn''t believe that device; they thought the device was malfunctioning. All of them sigh, and theye out of their thinking. Because right now they have to rest themselves to recover, their physical and mental energy.


    Sam finish eating his food and he was about to get up from the ground to search the nearby area of central area. Yes, as you can guess, he wants to search this area for obtaining any rare nt or something like this.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 115 115 - Going Underwater.

    Sam finished eating his food, and he was about to get up from the ground to search the nearby central area. Yes, you can guess, you want to search this area for obtaining any rare nt or something like this.


    But, suddenly, his life detector vibrates. Sam quickly looks at his life detector. He saw 15 life signs near them. Elena, Tony, and Jeni quickly came to him and looked at the life detector. They also saw 15 life signs near them. But those 15 life presences weren''t together. Because in those 15 life presences, five of them were monsters.


    Compared to humans, monsters have a different type of life presence. The monster''s life sign will glow red in the detector, while the human life sign will glow in green color. So if you look carefully at the life detector, then you can tell that those 10 warriors were fighting those 5 monsters.


    "It looks like other students also arrive in the central area. And also I think these 10 warriors are like us, forming a team with other students. Because I never hear about a team who has 10 warriors. So basically, there are two different teams who are working together to defeat those monsters." Tony said this to everyone. Sam alsoes to this conclusion after seeing the result in the life detector.


    They still haven''t recovered their full strength, so they didn''t have the interest to interfere with others'' fights. This time, they were sure that those ten warriors weren''t the enemy, so they didn''t look for them. So they just go back to their spot and circte the energy recovery technique to recover their lost energy faster.


    Sam still didn''t stop looking at the life detector. It took those 10 warriors some time to defeat all those monsters. He guessed those warriors were facing vicious dogs.


    If you are wondering why Sam didn''t use his energy recovery technique to recover his energy, then he was using the recovery technique all this time, even when he was talking with others.


    Sam can see that the Warriors have the upper hand against those five vicious dogs. It was just a matter of time before those warriors will finish all those Vicious dogs. He was curious about those warriors'' identities. They cane to the central area first, which means they are powerful.


    Sometimeter, you can see that those 10 warriors finally killed all those vicious dogs. Suddenly, one thing alerted him that those warriors wereing toward his team. Sam quickly alerts all of his teammates. He didn''t tell them to hide, he just told him to always be on their guard.


    5 minutester, Sam finally saw 5 people who wereing toward them. He instantly activated his spiritual vision to see the face of those warriors. They were Gustav Kyle, Aliya Hance, and Pijus Oron. Gustav and Aliya belong to the Sky School, whereas Pijush belongs to the Royal School. But the three of them were together, which was a shocking scene.


    Pijush belongs to the Royal School, so naturally Tony and the others who also belong to the Royal School know him.


    "Guys, it is me or you guys who also can''t see any of his teammates. What happened to them? Are his teammates sent back to the warrior association?" Tony asked Jeni and the others.


    "Don''t know what happened, but it was most likely because of those dark association warriors his teammates got sent back to the warrior association. But we can only know the obvious answer if we ask him about this," Jeni said. Then she turned around and looked at Sam. Sam just nodded, but it was enough for Jeni to understand that he didn''t have any problem.


    Jeni signaled Tony to go toward Pijus and asked him about this. They can see his miserable appearance. So you can guess, he already faces some powerful monsters or enemies. Also, because of this, his teammate got sent back to the association.


    Gustav and Aliya, at first, got alert and ready to attack the person who wasing toward them. But when they saw the face of the person, they stopped. It was Tony from the royal school. Most likely he wasing here to talk with Pijus.


    "Hi Pijush, how are you?" Tony asked him.


    " Oh... Tony, yes, I am fine." Pijus said with a forced smile.


    " Sigh, rx. Don''t force yourself." Seeing his forced smile, Tony can only sigh.


    "Actually, some time ago, we fought with five vicious dogs. Because of this, we are exhausted and need some rest." Suddenly, Aliya came to them and said, Tony looks at her. He also knew that they were tired.


    "You can rest with us. My teammates and I also fought some powerful monsters, and right now we are recovering our energy," Tony said to them. Hearing him, Aliya didn''t know what to do, so she looked at Gustav. Gustav nodded at her. He agreed with Tony. In a normal situation, they won''t be doing this. But right now, the situation is unique.


    _______________________


    Sam and the others were still looking at Tony and those warriors. They saw Tony was talking with them and sometimeter; he walked back toward Sam and others while those warriors followed him.


    Gustav and the others at first didn''t see Sam and the others because of these trees. But when they came closer to them, they finally saw Sam and the others. All of them were looking at them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Guys, he is Gustav, and she is Aliya. Both of them are from the Sky School. And this is Pijus from our school. They are teammates of Gustav and Aliya," Tony introduces them to his teammates.


    "Hi/Hello," Jeni, Kenny, Alexa, Elena, and others said hello to them, but Sam only nodded at them.


    [A/N: Our cool Sam ??]


    "Hello," Gustav, Aliya, and others also greet them. Then they sit down on the ground and start circting their recovery technique.


    ______________________________


    Back to Maria,


    Maria, Alena, and the others were waiting for Harry and the others, who were searching in the water. Maria was sure that there was a cave or something like this in the water.


    They just needed to wait some time until Harry and the others wereing back to the water''s surface.


    Maria previously told them that if they found something like this, then they should retreat and immediately report it to her because it can be dangerous for them. She just hoped they found anything in the water.


    A few minutester, Harry and the others finally came to the surface. They sit on the ground and panting.


    " What happened? Why are you panting? Take a deep breath and rx, then tell us," Maria quickly asked them.


    " Ma''am, as you said, we finally found a cave in the water. We decided we will check the cave. At first, we saw nothing, but when we walked deeper into the cave. We finally found the enemy. He is drawing a weird symbol. We know ?they will use the weird symbol in the forbidden summoning, so quickly stopped him. But when we were just about to go toward him, we saw 5 ox monsters. Those monsters, naturally, are the dark monsters that came here by the forbidden summoning."


    "They are protecting the enemy. Because of this, we cannot do anything. So we retreat. But I don''t know how one of the dark monsters found us and attacked us. Naturally, we are out of the cave, we are in the water. The monster suddenly attacks us, but because we are in the water, we cannot do anything. We try to fight back, but in the water, we are very slow. So we can only avoid those attacks. We try to retreat quickly, but the monster still chases us. But at thest moment, we are about toe out of the water. We throw some light balls that blind the enemy for some time and we use this chance to escape. Don''t know if the enemy is still chasing us or not," Harry exins to them about their encounter and why they are panting.


    After hearing the report, Maria and Alena became serious. The enemy is drawing something where 5 dark monsters are guarding him. Naturally, it is not a good sign. The enemy is something very dangerous.


    Maria and Alena looked at each other and nodded. They didn''t have time to waste. They quickly need to go towards the enemy to stop him, or it can bring disaster.


    "Hello, hello..... Saint Markus, it is Maria. We finally found the enemy, sir. But the enemy is doing something very dangerous. We quickly need to stop him. The enemy even has 5 A-grade dark monsters guarding him. Sir, we are nning to go toward the enemy," Maria said to him.


    " Okay, you can go. But you should be careful. If the situation is out of your hand, then you all should quickly retreat." Markus said that.


    " Yes master," Maria replied, and cut the call.


    " Prepare yourself. We are going underwater to fight monsters and the enemy. As you can guess, we need to stop the enemy." Maria said.


    -------------------To be continued----------------------


    [A/N: Hey guys, check it out my new novel: Mystery Solver.]

 Chapter 116 116 - Dangerous Situation

    Maria, Alena, and the other warriors were quickly prepared to go underwater. Wasting no time, they quickly drive underwater. Harry was leading them. He pointed toward the underwater cave.


    In just a few minutes, they quickly came in front of the entrance of the underwater cave, where the enemy made the forbidden symbol. Maria signals them to silently enter the cave. They sessfully enter the cave. The cave was pretty. Maria and the other things that if they search carefully, then they also will find the secret road in this cave.


    The cave wasn''t fully underwater and because of this, now Maria and others were standing on solid ground. They slowly and silently move. Their goal is to stop the enemy.


    Alena and the other warriors, who were good at using the light spell, already cast the holy ray. There were five dark monsters guarding the enemy. Before going to the enemy, they obviously need to finish those monsters.


    It didn''t take too much time and they finally could see the enemy and also those 5 dark monsters. Maria and Alena looked carefully and saw that they were very close to finishing the forbidden symbol. They needed to finish the 5 monsters.


    Alena looks toward the warriors, who were also casting the holy ray spell. They all nodded and instantly attacked the dark monsters who were near them.


    Those two monsters who were hit by the holy ray instantly let out a painful cry. They are painful cries that attract the other three monsters'' attention. They also roared angrily and quickly approached Alena''s direction. Those monsters instantly make three dark balls and throw them toward Alena. Alena dodges these dark balls easily while she still maintains the holy ray.


    Maria and the other warriors instantly attack those three monsters. They know that a physical attack won''t do that much damage to them. Even so, Maria was a peak A-grade warrior and her attack will affect them. As you can guess, she sent one monster flying backward.


    Alena and other Holi ray, caster maintaining the holy ray, and a few minutester those monsters turned into dust. At this time, the others who can use the holy ray spell attack those three monsters. Even physical attacks didn''t do that much damage to those monsters, but receiving those attacks from peak A-grade warriors and many early A-grade warriors made those monsters injured.


    Alena and the other caster use this chance and once again start casting the holy ray spell. In just 1 minute, they finish casting the holy ray spell and attack those dark monsters.


    Those dark monsters weren''t together because of this holy ray only hit one monster. That monsterte out a painful cry in just a few seconds he turns into dust. This time because they only attacked one monster, it took only some seconds to kill him. Now only two monsters were left.


    Fredrick already noticed them. But he was busy drawing the Forbidden symbol. He could do nothing. He cannot lose his focus while drawing the Forbidden symbol or it will cost his life. Still, seeing the dark monsters were getting killed by the association''s warriors, he knows he needs to speed it up or his lord could only be able toe here.


    After seeing that only two monsters were left, he speeded up his work. He just needs a minute to finish the drawing, and then he can finally summon his lord.


    ________________________________________


    Warrior association,


    Right now, all the Saints were ready to move anytime. Fortunately, Maria and the other warriors bring some camera bots to the underwater cave, and because of this, they could see the pattern. After looking at the pattern carefully, they finally understand what the enemy is aiming for.


    This was an 8-diagram pattern to someone the dark lord. In this 8 diagram pattern, the caster needs a different person''s blood to draw the pattern, and also he needs his own blood to draw the big pattern that connects all those small 8 patterns.


    This dark lord is very differentpared to other monsters. If the dark lord saman is here, you will instantly go toward the 8 people whose blood was used to draw the small 8 patterns. The dark lord needed to absorb their life energy.


    The more he absorbs their life energy, the more he will get stronger, and if he can finally absorb all of those 8 warriors'' life energy, then the strength of this dark lord will be higher than the Saint. This means the lord will be a SS rank monster. This was the thing that nobody knew except the Saints. Because of this, the Saints are ready to take action anytime.<novelnext></novelnext>


    They guessed that the enemy was using the blood of those students, which meant those students'' lives were in danger.


    _________________________________________


    Back to Sam,


    Sam and his teammates were finally recovering their lost energy. Now, they will start waking. All the data from the ground and one by one started walking. They weren''t in a hurry, because of this they were walking, not running. Also, one thing is that Gustav, Aliya, and Pijus, also their teammates, are also going with them.


    "shback"


    Some time ago, while they were resting, Tony asked Pijus about his condition.


    "It all happened when my friends and I were facing an elephant beetle. The elephant beetle was a peak E-grade monster, because of this, we were having a hard time killing this monster. But after a long flight, we could finally kill that beetle. It took us two hours to finish the beetle. You can say we were panting heavily. As you can guess, we almost don''t have any physical or spiritual energy. We put almost all of our energy into killing this monster. So we found a ce to rest. While we were resting, we heard the sound of a monster. We have never heard this type of sound before. Me and my teammates don''t have the power to fight, so we hide. We were waiting for the monster to reveal himself."


    "I was curious about the monster. So, we all were waiting silently. After sometimeter, we finally saw the monster. It was a monitor. It has an ox''s head, but the body wasn''t. Me and my teammates thought that this monster was searching for something, but we never thought that this monster was here to attack us. Even when we were hiding, the monster still found us and attacked us. As you know, we don''t have that much power and because of this, we cannot run away from there. I don''t know if you believe me or not, but when this monster appears, I am feeling something ominous is going to happen."


    "The more the monster gets closer to me, the more this feeling bes stronger. His only focus is on me. He didn''t even look at my teammates while defeating them. He easily sends all of my teammates to the warrior association. Now there was only me and the monster. Don''t know what happened but I can see the craziness in that monster''s eyes, which made me terrified. Fortunately, the warriors from the warrior associations instantly appear in front of me and then attack the monster with holy rays. It took them some time, but eventually, that monster turned into dust. Then what can I do? I be a solo warrior ande toward the central area alone. But when I was near the central area, I found that Gustav, Aliya, and their teammates were facing 10 vicious dogs, and they were in critical condition. At first, I didn''t want to interfere with their battle, but then I helped them. Like this, I meet them." Pijus exins all of this that happened to him.


    "shback end"


    "Ring... Ring..... Ring." Suddenly Jeni''s watch vibrated. It means someone from the association was trying to contact her.


    Wasting no time, she quickly taps the answer button.


    "Jeni, darling, how are you?" She heard a familiar voice. It was her grandmother''s voice.


    "Grandma, I am fine. What happens, grandma? Why are you contacting me?" Jeni asked directly. Her grandmother contacted her like this, saying that something bad happened or was going to happen. She has a bad feeling about this.


    "Darling, don''t worry and try to stay with your team. Don''t go separately anywhere. We finally found the enemy, but he is going to summon a powerful enemy. Maria and others were trying to stop him from doing this, but k don''t they will be sessful, and also Maria and others won''t be able to take the enemy. But don''t worry about it, I aming also Markus and Mira areing to you, and also try to stay calm," Vena said to her. After talking, Vena cut the call.


    Jeni, Kenny, Tina, Tony, Alexa, Sam, and others had now be very shocked after hearing her word. Maria and the others won''t be able to defeat that summoning monster, so it means the monster that the enemy wanted to summon this time was more powerful than Maria, Alena, and the other A-grade warriors.


    ______________________To be continued____________________

 Chapter 117 117 - The Incoming Danger.

    Now, many warriors are panicking. When they know that Miss Maria and the others won''t be able to fight the summoned monster, they begin to panic.


    Seeing the situation getting worse, Alexa came forward and told them, " All of you stop panicking. Didn''t you hear the Saints wille here, so why are you all panicking? Did you think our Saints would get defeated by that monster? So, stop panicking, it only makes the situation worse. You all should be ashamed of your behavior. Even knowing that the Saints wille here, you all are still panicking and making the situation worse."


    Hearing Alexa''s words, you can say all the students who were panicking calmed down and thought clearly. Why are they panicking? The saints will be here. They didn''t need to worry about the monster.


    "Well done Alexa. You easily solved the situation." Jeni said to her. Which Alexa responded with a smile.


    "Sam, what should we do?" Jeni suddenly asked Sam about this. She believes in him more than others. Kenny and Tina also looked at him. They were waiting for his decision.


    "Ok, now the situation is terrible. I should tell you about the forbidden summoning that you don''t know. But I don''t think that I should talk about the forbidden summoning to those warriors who easily got scared." Sam said to them. Until now, he didn''t tell anyone about the forbidden summoning, but as you can see, the situation wasn''t in his favor. Because of this, he thought that he should at least alert his teammates and friends about the forbidden summoning.


    Jeni, Elena, Kenny, Tina, Tony, Alexa, Gustav, L, Aliya, and Pius are the students who were going to know about the forbidden summoning.


    "You all never heard or read about this Forbidden summoning, because the warrior association banned this summoning technique. This was a very dangerous technique, which can bring disaster to this world. I think Tony already told you that when we see the weird symbol in the cave, we find that the enemy draws that symbol with blood. And this is the most dangerous thing about this technique."


    "The summoner''s power and summoned monster''s power will be the same. But the main thing about this technique is that the monster will attack those warriors whose blood was used to draw the forbidden symbol. The monster will attack you because they want your life force. Yes, you guys heard it right. They were after your life force. This monster will do anything to observe the life force of the warrior whose blood they use in the drawing. This is the reason the warrior association banned this technique. Now I hope you guys understand how dangerous the monster that wille out of the forbidden summoning is," Sam said to them.


    " Now the Saints are making their move, so it means the situation is terrible. We need to hide. Also, Jeni, please tell those warriors who can use the light spells. They should prepare themselves. We will cast holy ray spells. Only this spell can kill those dark monsters. I know that even though we all use that holy ray spell to attack the monster, it will only do some minor damage to the monster. But we can stop the monster until the saintse here. This is the only choice we have." Sam said to them the only choice they have. Even if they hide, the monster will find them and kill them.


    ______________________________________


    Jeni, Tony, and others were shocked after hearing the details of this forbidden summoning. They never thought it would be this much dangerous. Suddenly Tony, Elena, Jeni, Tina, and Kenny remember one thing. When previously Maria told him he was the forbidden symbol, Sam''s expression got very pale.. everyone thought something happened to him but now they understand why he reacted like that.


    " I didn''t want to tell anyone about this, but the situation wasn''t in our favor. Because of this, I am telling you about the forbidden summoning. You should also realize that this type of information you shouldn''t reveal easily to anyone. Also, I hope you won''t reveal this information to others, or the situation will worsen. Also, you should now realize why previously, Tony and Pijus feel ufortable when the monster attacks them. Now it is not time to be scared. We need to think with a clear head," Sam exined to them why he didn''t want to reveal this information to anyone. Tony and the others nodded after hearing him. They also agreed with him. If they were in his position, they were also doing the same thing.


    "Right now we need to hide, and then all the warriors who can use the lights spells needed to cast holy ray spells, while the others also need to prepare their strongest attack for the monster," Sam said to them. The others nodded.


    Wasting no time, they went toward the other and told all of them to hide and prepare their strongest attack for the monster.


    "All of you who can use the lights spell should start casting the holy ray spell. If you don''t know how to cause the holy ray, then you should cast your strongest light attack. But it doesn''t mean they should stay still. They should also prepare their strongest attack." Tony said this to all warriors.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _________________________________


    All the students went into hiding. They are all preparing for their strongest attack on the monster. They don''t know when the monster will appear in front of them, but from the tone of Saint Vena, they can tell that it won''t take too long when the monsteres to them.


    Suddenly the life detector begins to vibrate. It shows many life signsing towards them. Sam and his teammates didn''t hide together because of this. Many warriors don''t know that the life detector shows many life signs. Also, he did not activate his concealment technique, also because of this, those warriors who were near him also saw the life detector vibrating.


    Jeni, Kenny, Tina, Elena, and Tony were near him. So, naturally, they saw the live detector vibrating. It means many humans are near them. But now the crucial question is, " are the enemy or students like them?"


    "I don''t think they are the enemy. Why am I sure about that? Because if you consider that some time ago Saint Vena told us, Be careful, don''t get separated from your team. A powerful monster going towards you." She mentioned that a powerful monster wille toward us, but she didn''t mention any enemy. Also, I don''t think that at these stages they won''t be mentioning us about the enemy."


    "So it means they aren''t enemies. They are students like us. Why did you forget that, like us, the Saints could also contact the other students and tell them about our location? They didn''t want us to stay separately because when the monster wille, I think it will go toward those warriors whose blood the enemy used in the drawing. If we stay together, then the monster will directlye toward us, but if we stay separately, then the monster will attack all those students separately and this will be very dangerous for the student." Sam exins this through telekinesis.


    Jeni and the others nodded after hearing his exnation. They also agree with him.


    Sometimeter, they can now finally hear the footsteps of those studentsing toward them. Those who don''t know about them instantly be alert, and they are ready to attack them. But suddenly Alexa told all the students about the students who wereing toward them. Previously, Sam already told Alexa about this and told her to exin this to everyone. He didn''t want to do that.


    ___________________________________________________


    Maria, Alena, and the other warriors wanted to stop the enemy from summoning the monster. Now some of them wereying down and some of them were sitting on the ground. They were bleeding from various ces. They never thought that the new monster would be so powerful that all of them would be defeated. Now they are healing themselves and recovering their lost energy. Now the monster is going toward the students. They don''t have the time to waste because they need to save the students.


    "shback"


    When Maria and the others finally defeated thest two dark monsters, wasting no time approaching the enemy quickly. At any cost, they want to stop the enemy.


    Alena directly attacked the enemy with her sun ray. The enemy had already finished the drawing, now he was channeling his spiritual energy toward the forbidden symbol. But one thing weird was that the enemy was bleeding from his hand and the blood went towards the central symbol. Maria Alina and others don''t know about this, "why the hell he was bleeding? And why the hell are those blood drops going toward the central symbol?"


    _____________To be continued____________


    [A/N: Hope you guys like this chapter. Have a good day guys.]

 Chapter 118 118 - Mega Fireball

    In the association,


    Markus, Vena, Mira, and the others were observing on the screen where the screen showed the students.


    They already saw that Maria and the others were defeated by the monster. Fortunately, the monster knows that even if he can defeat them, he won''t be able to kill them. Because of this, he let them go and bounced out of the cave. He needed to absorb the life energy of the warrior whose blood the enemy used in this pattern. He didn''t want to dy this.


    If you are thinking about the enemy, then Alena already killed the enemy with her sun ray. When they can kill the enemy, they thought that they sessfully stop the summoning process, but we have thought that they won''t be able to stop the summoning process.


    The enemy already predicted that the warriors from the association will kill you, so he is already prepared. He fills his blood cell with spiritual energy as much as he can. Because of this, even after his death, the summoning process still continues. The enemy already cut his hand and blood is going from there and going to the Central pattern of the forbidden symbol. This blood work as a spiritual energy container.


    The monster was quick, but the Saints could still see the monster. Naturally, the monster goes toward the students.


    Even when the students were hiding, the monster went toward them, using their blood as a tracker.


    Mira and Vena already wanted to attack the monster, but Marcus stop them. Because you wanted the students are the first that face the monster. It did not mean that the Saint won''t interfere in the battle when today''s life was in danger. Marcus just wanted that the students experience the power of this monster. It will be a great help for their growth. But when they will see that the situation wasn''t good for the students, they immediately interfere.


    "Ok, old man. This time I will listen to you. But if anything happens to my darling, then...." Vena said and shifted her focus on the screen.


    "Don''t worry, nothing bad will happen," Markus said with a confident tone.


    __________________________


    Sam, Jeni, and their teammates got other warriors''pany. Alexa talks with them through telekinesis. Like them, they also got informed by the association to stay together and they have also given the location of Sam and his teammates. If the student didn''t stay together then, it will increase the chance to get injured.


    If you are asking why? Supposed the monster to attack a student and their teammates, but the Saints came in time and save them. But the monster escapes from there and attacks other students. The saints first need to find the monster''s direction and then they will fly at their maximum speed to catch the monster. As I previously mentioned, the warrior association still developing the teleporting device. These teleportation bracelets that all the students were wearing were only a prototype. Because of this, they won''t be able to directly teleport in front of the monster.


    Sam also sees some familiar faces among the students. James Danish is thest student who is an early D-grade warrior. Except for him, he also sees some familiar faces who were peak E-grade warriors.


    Alexa told all these students to hide and prepare their strongest attack for the monster.


    __________________________________


    You can say this time, not only Sam''s parents, but many other students'' parents were watching the tv, with a worried look. Victor, Hina, and Gloria were anxious because on the screen they saw, except for a few students who still could not reach the central area, all the other students were now hiding.


    It was looking like they were afraid of something or someone. Previously, when Sam got attacked by the dark association warriors, the warriors association didn''t let them telecast the fight. It can be harmful to Sam if they casually show something like that. These dark association warriors were vicious. What if they hold a grudge against him, and attacked him and his family? Because of this, the warrior association didn''t telecast the fight.


    Now, you can say that many people were watching the performance focus on the screen. They all wanted to know what enemy can make all the students behave like this? Why the hell they can feel that the students were very anxious? These types of question, now everyone has.


    "Don''t worry darling, our Sam will be alright. I know he wasn''t a reckless person, and you previously saw how powerful he was. So, don''t worry," Victor tried to assure Hina that Sam will be alright.


    Hind only just nodded. Gloria told nothing at this moment, she only silently watching the tv.


    ____________________________________


    Back to Sam,


    "Rourrrrrrrrrr!!!!!!!!!!!"


    Sam and the other warriors were casting their attack when they suddenly hear a monstrous roar. Just hearing the roar makes anyone scared.


    Some warriors started to panic, but Alexa told them not to recklessly do anything. So even though they are scared, they did nothing. There is nothing they can do at this moment.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Now, all warriors were waiting for the monster to appear. Just but hearing the roar, you can tell that it wasn''t your normal monster.


    Suddenly, many monsters big into and run toward the inner area of the forest. All of these monsters were D-grade. They mainly stay in this central area, but now the dark lord war hears they can''t stay in the central area. All of them were running toward the inner area of the forest.


    Sam and the other warriors already predicted this could happen, so they hide carefully. Many monsters passed them, and even many monsters found them, but they did nothing to them. They were only running.


    A few minutester, everything became normal and now they can''t see any monsters that were running toward the inner area of the forest. So, every monster in the center area already went towards the inner area.


    Everything bes very silent, that you can''t even hear the wind flowing or any other noise. It was an ufortable feeling. It was looking like the calm before the storm. Even the wind stops flowing.


    "Roarrrrrr!!!!!!!" Suddenly, once again, they heard the monster''s roar. Now, the monster was getting closer and closer.


    A few secondster, they saw an enormous body of a monster. The monster should be at least 13 feet long. All the students looked at the monster seriously. If you see the monster carefully, then you see the monster looking like a minotaur. But this minotaur differed from the other minotaur.


    Sam heard those minotaurs were only 8 to 9 feet long. They also were red. But now this new minotaur was fully Balck in color and his deep red color eyes made this minotaur more dangerous.


    It was slowly walking towards them. He also has a massive ax in his hand. Just looking at this monster will make you feel scared.


    After seeing the monster, all the students be scared, but Sam said then, " Don''t lose your focus. At any cost, we needed toplete the spell to attack the monster. Also, those warriors who aren''t good at distance fighting shouldn''t attack the monster. It can be perilous for a closebat fight."


    All the warriors nodded, hearing Sam''s word. Don''t know why, but if you look at the monster''s face, then you can tell that he was smiling at the students. But stilling close up to the student slowly. The aura this monster released was a peak A-grade, and it is very close to breaking through.


    In just a few seconds. The spell will be ready.


    _____________________________


    In the underground cave,


    Maria and the other warriors were already almost recovering most of their strength and energy. Now they were going out of the underwater cave, they never to reach the students as quickly as they can.


    "Hello... Hello .. control room. Send me the location of the monster." Maria quickly contacts the control room.


    "Ma''am, the monster already reached students. Now the monster slowly walking towards the students," a warrior from the association told her.


    "Let''s go. We don''t have time to waste," Alena said to them quickly. Now the monster reaches the students, it means that students are in danger.


    Wasting no time, they quickly leave the underwater cave. A few secondster, they came to the surface area and hurried. As fast as they can, they need to reach the area.


    __________________________


    Back to Sam,


    They already finished their spell and attacks. Wasting no time, they quickly attacked the monster. Sam told the warriors who were casting the light attack to attack the monsters after when the others finished attacking the monster. Now, they were waiting for Sam and others to finish their attack.


    Sam wasn''t good at light attacks, so he was using the fire attack. He was using his new and most powerful spell, "Mega fireball".


    _____________To be continued____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, hoped you like this novel. Did you read my new novel? If you didn''t read that. You should read it.]

 Chapter 119 119 - Flame Queen Vena

    This Mega fireball was the most powerful technique that he learned recently. He shoots the fireball toward the monster. Compared to his other fireball, your normal me did not make this mega fireball, the blue me made it. Yes, you guessed it right. His fire control technique reached the realm where he can use the blue me. But as a side effect of this technique, he needed to use almost all of his spiritual energy.


    Like Sam, others also attack the monsters with their most powerful technique. Mega fireball and those other spells hit the monster.


    Sam didn''t want to waste time so he quickly signaled the other warriors, who were waiting for his signal. Instantly, they attack the monster with their most powerful light spell.


    Sam, at this time, had already brought out an energy portion and gulped down. But he constantly focused on the monster. He knows that their attack won''t be able to defeat the monster. But he hoped that at least they injured the monster.


    They weren''t able to see the monster''s condition. Those attacked created smoke around the monster. They needed to wait for the smoke to clear before they could see the monster.


    A few secondster, the smoke began to clear. Every student hehe their breath. They wanted to know if their attack did any damage to the monster.


    A few secondster, finally, the smoke faded and all the students got a clear view of the monster. The monster was bleeding from his head and his hands. At first, the dark lord ignores the attack of these students. For him, they were his food. He underestimates these students and lets down his guard. Because of this, he got injured. The mega fireball and the other spells''bined attack did a good deal of damage to him.


    "Roarrrrrr!!!!!" The dark lord roared while looking at the students. Just hearing the sound of the roar, the students can tell that the monster was angry.


    Suddenly, much spiritual energy goes toward the monster''s mouth. [A/N: time for the tailed beast ball. Lol.]


    An energy ball began to create in his mouth. At first, he thought, he would first eat those humans whose blood the enemy used in the drawing. Then, after bing powerful, he will eat the others. But now, he is preparing a dark ball to kill those students.


    More and more energy was going toward the energy ball. It''s even getting bigger and bigger. The dark energy ball''s Collier getting darker and darker. A few secondster, the dark ball bes enormous, at least 9 ft tall. Also, looking at the dark ball, you will get the feeling that the whole world''s darkness was in these dark balls.


    With no dy, the monster shoots the dark energy balls toward Sam and his teammates. An incense speed the dark balles tried Sam. For a moment, his mind went nk. He didn''t even have the strength to move his body.


    "So, this is how I will die?" Only this thinking was in his mind at thest moment. He closed his eyes and was ready for his death. But, even after waiting some time, he got nothing. He was also confused, why didn''t he feel anything?


    He slowly opens his eyes and sees Saint Markus in front of him. Markus turned and looked at him.


    "Are you okay, my boy? Did you get injured anywhere?" Markus asked him with a concerned voice.


    At this time, Sam was in a daze. He still wasn''t able to believe that he was still alive. For him, it was like a dream. Hearing Saint Markus''s question, he came out of his daze.


    "Ye... Yes, Saint Markus, I am okay. Fortunately, you saved me," Sam told him with a sincere voice.


    " Don''t worry about that, boy. It was my duty to save people''s lives. Now, boy, go to a safe ce. We will deal with this monster." Markus said this and shifted his focus on the monster.


    "Yes," with that saying, he left the ce. He also saw Sanit Mira, Saint Vena, and the principles of the top three colleges. All of them saved the students. They also told them like Markus to go to a safe ce.


    Sam, Jeni, Elena, and others came far away from the previous ce. They can still see that monster and the Saint were now looking at each other. But what happened to the dark ball? This was what Sam was thinking when suddenly an explosion happened outside of the dark forest. Even though the explosion happened far away from the dark forest, a massive repulsive force hit all the students. Now, you can see how dangerous that dark ball was? All the students get up from the ground. No one gets seriously injured. All the students rx and focus on the uing battle between The Saints and the dark minotaur.


    __________________________


    When the Saints and the dark lord looked at each other, Maria, Alena and the other warriors finally reached her. They rushed toward the students at their fastest speed.


    Vena, Markus, and the others have already noticed their arrival.


    "Maria, this battle is about to get very rough. Protect the students," Markus quickly said to Maria.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Yes, master," Maria answered.


    _________________________


    At this moment, the dark minotaur suddenly roared, and a cracking sound came from him. If it was like that he was getting out of his shell.


    Suddenly all the students felt an unbearable pressure. This pressure suffocates them. It was getting hard for them to breathe. Noticing their miserable situation, Alena, Marka, and the other warriors who were protecting them, cast an energy repulsion shield. Every warrior from the warrior association knows this spell. It helps them block the spiritual energy.


    The students are finally able to breathe, and they finally rx. Some of them fell to the ground. They all were panting.


    ________________________


    At this time, Markus, Mira, Vena, and others were looking at the dark minotaur with serious expressions. They never thought that the monster would break through at this moment. They all know it was happening because the monster absorbs the dark association warriors'' blood at the beginning. His blood work is a limit breaker.


    But even though the dark lord became the S-grade, he was still an early grade whereas the Saints were in the peak grade.


    _________________________


    "Haha.... Markus let me handle this creature. I need to vent my anger on something," Vena said and went toward the monster. Markus didn''t stop her. He also knows that she was enduring her anger for some time, and she needed to vent her anger.


    Suddenly, ck mes appear around her body. It was her Special move. This ck me is called the hell fire. It can burn anything.


    With an insane speed, she appeared in front of the monster and punched her. It wasn''t a normal punch. Hellfire surrounded her fist.


    For some time, the monster didn''t react. It looked like he felt nothing. Some students even started to panic. But then, with a loud roar, the monster let out a painful cry.


    Saint Vena''s punch didn''t send the monster flying, but it was a Special move, " internal destruction". It kills the enemy internally. When she hid the enemy, the hellfire entered the body and started burning the enemy. Also, the dangerous thing about the hell fire is that the more it wille in contact with the spiritual energy, the more powerful it bes.


    Saint Vena once again punches the monster. This time the monster flew backward. Vena is a spiritual warrior, but that doesn''t mean she is weak. She trained both in physical and spiritual techniques.


    She didn''t want to give any chance to the monster. Because of this, wasting no time, she quickly cast a fireball and attacked the monster. But this wasn''t your normal fireball, this fireball was made of hell me.


    He didn''t even get the chance to recover from his previous injuries. He was still roaring from pain. But, suddenly he got hit by a fireball. Instantly, a me appears on his body.


    He feels more pain. Still, after this much, he didn''t be dead. After bing an S-grade, your body finally gets free from the mortal grade and bes a special grade. This thing, except for the Saints, nobody knows.


    "Huhuhu.... Look at him. How tough his body is. Looks like he needed still more beating. I will dly beat you to death. Hahaha," Vena said while she wasughing. She was enjoying this fight. Finally, she can beat someone.


    "These women..... Markus thought while he looked at her friend warily. He knows hey friend better than anyone. She is a hot-tempered person, and the hellfire is an example of her personality. She was the first person whose normal fire became a hellfire.


    At this time, the dark lord knows the fact needed to defeat this woman. Only then he will be free from this pain. So he stood up even when he was feeling pain.


    "Roarrrrr!!!!!!!" He roars at Vena loudly and runs toward her.


    ______________________To be continued__________________

 Chapter 120 120 - Finally, The Monster Is Dead.

    The monster instantly came in front of Veena and attacked Vena with his ax. At this time Saint Vena only smiled slightly, then instantly.


    The ax passed through her body. She didn''t even receive any damage.


    "Are you done?" She asked the monster. Then instantly hellfire appeared in her body. It looked like she had be the hellfire herself.


    "Then it is my turn." after saying that, she instantly attacked the monster with her fist. This time, she didn''t hold back. Because of this, hellfire appears in the body. But this time was different. Previously, when she attacked the minotaur, that time only the monster''s upper body got burned by the hellfire. But this time, the monster''s whole body is on fire. The hellfire burned his full body.


    This hellfire just keeps increasing in power. All The spiritual energy that the monster has, gets absorbed by the hellfire, and the hellfire keeps getting stronger and stronger.


    All this time, nobody moved from there. They all watched the fight between Vena and the minotaur. They also show how Saint Vena dominated the monster. Most of the warriors didn''t even get the chance to attack her. But even if the monster gets the chance to attack, then he won''t be able to injure Saint Vena.


    Previously, when Markus saw ?Vena was about to attack the monster without holding back anything, he instantly signals Mira to retreat from there.


    The top three college principals have already retreated. They aren''t S-grade warriors, so they naturally retreat before Vena fights with the monster.


    ______________________________


    I know you all have the question. Why was the principal of these three colleges not at S-grade? It was because they weren''t owners of these three colleges. Three saints built ?these three colleges, but they were busy with their work, so they normally didn''t attend college. Right now, all those Saints were in the S-grade dungeon. Because of this, they weren''t able toe here.


    _____________________________


    Markus and Mira also came to the ce where students were standing. They not only retreated, but when they came beside those students, they instantly protected the barrier around the students.


    ? Markus already knows how destructive those mes are. Those mes are even dangerous for him.


    After casting the protection barrier, they all look toward Saint Vena and the monster. No one said anything at this moment. They all silently looked at the fight.


    They all saw how hellfire appeared on the monster''s body and the monster began to roar. For some time he kept roaring like this, but eventually, he fell down to the ground. Right now, he didn''t even have the strength to make a sound. It was just a matter of time.


    The hellfire is getting intense. Almost all the dark spiritual energy these monsters had, all the spiritual energy, was getting absorbed by the hellfire.


    "Sigh, this woman. She should calm down," Markus said with a tired expression.


    A few minutester, the monsters finally died. It turns into dust. Fortunately, they arrive on time and prevent the monster from absorbing the life force of the students or it can be pretty dangerous for all the humans.


    Nobody knows, but the Saints know how dangerous it was.


    If the monster could somehow absorb the life of those warriors, whose blood the caster used as a sacrifice, then humanity once again needs to face an enemy that can wipe them out anytime. Also, because of this, Markus sighs.


    Fortunately, they get to know quickly about this, and they could prevent something like this from happening. Actually, they all didn''t need toe here to deal with this type of monster. Vena was an expert in dealing with this type of monster. But they still came because they want to increase the morale of the students. It was pretty hard for these students. They only came here to give the college exam, but instead of that, they got targeted by the dark association. Even their life was also in danger all the time.


    This time, it was really a blessing for them. Before the exam, they could finally make a prototype teleportation bracelet. Mainly because of this no one is dead. It is a tremendous achievement for humanity. They just needed to make more good teleportation bracelets, then the warrior association could prevent many bad things from happening.


    ___________________


    Finally, the ck me faded away. It means the monsters are already dead. Markus and Mira finally disable the barrier.


    They were waiting for the fire to fully fade away, then they would approach her. After some timeter, the ck smoke cleared and we could finally see Vena.<novelnext></novelnext>


    She waspletely fine and didn''t even have any injury. With that, you can guess how powerful she is.


    "Vena...¡­." Markus was about to say something. But suddenly Vena runs toward her granddaughter, after seeing her in the crowd.


    She instantly came in front of Jeni and hugged her. She was her most precious granddaughter. So, naturally, all this time when she was in the association, she always worried about her granddaughter.


    "Baby, darling, how are you? Are you injured anywhere? Do you have any ufortable feelings? Did the boy Sam not protect you?" She nonstop asked Jeni questions.


    " I am fine, Grandma. Can''t you see I am not injured? And Sam is a ?powerful warrior. He protected us," Jeni said with a smile.


    " Oh¡­ is that so? Then I need to talk with that boy, to take care of darling," Vena said with a smile.


    Sam, at this time, silently sits in a corner. He needed to recover his energy. He is out of spiritual energy. It was his willpower that made him awake. Also, the worst thing was that he was out of the spirit energy potion.


    Because of this, he was sitting in a corner and circting his energy recovery technique. It slowly recovered his spiritual energy. He suddenly chills in his back. Sam quickly turned around to see why he was feeling this chill. He only saw Saint Vena looking at him with a smile. But that smiling face gave him a coldness.


    Sam didn''t know why he was feeling like this. He tried to remember if he did something bad. But, no nothing came to his mind. Now he was mentally tired and didn''t want to deal with anything.


    "How is your situation?" Alena came in front of him and asked him. Suddenly, hearing a girl''s voice, he was surprised. He turned around and saw it was Alena.


    "Nothing serious. I am just out of the Spirit potion," he told her.


    Alena nodded and brought out some spirit potion.


    "No, Miss Alena, I can''t ept this. These are the high-grade spirit potions," Sam said to her, seeing her bringing out 3 high-grade spirit potions.


    "Don''t worry about anything. I promise your sister that I will take care of you. So, don''t worry and ept these spirit potions. If I wasn''t able to fulfill my student''s wish, then how can I be a good master?" Alena said to him. Seeing there is no way to reject Alena, Sam epts the potion.


    "Thank you, Miss Alena," Sam thanked her.


    " Don''t worry about it. Just focus on your recovery," Alena said and left the ce. She is willing towards Maria.


    Some warriors from the association were now checking the condition of the students. They heal those students who need medical attention.


    "Please pay attention, students. I know you all faced a tough fight. The warrior association likes to apologize to you because we weren''t careful that dark association warriors interfere with the exam. Now, the main thing I want to tell you is that, finally, the college exam is finished. You will be returning to the city. We will escort you all to the city, so don''t worry about anything. Now, be ready. We are going back," with that Markus finishes his speech.


    Hearing him, all the students finally sigh in relief. Finally, they can go back. They don''t know their result, now they just want to go back to the city and have a good night''s rest. When Sam, Jeni, and their teammates get attacked by the dark association warriors, they stop watching their result. Because, at that time, they were thinking about how to avoid or fight those warriors from the dark association.


    Saint Mira, at this moment, checked the whole forest. She wants to know if all the students are here or not. What if anyone leaves behind in the inner area of the forest?


    She finds 25 people still in the inner area. They were fighting monsters. She quickly told Maria and Alena about it.


    Maria nodded and quickly ordered some warriors to go toward the students. These were students who weren''t able to reach the central area. They stayed in the inner area, but now the monsters from the central area went to the inner area. Size naturally those students need to fight these monsters. But, against these D-grade monsters, they can''t win, but they try to fight.


    "Ok, students, after all the students came here we will leave the forest." Saint Markus told everyone.


    ______________To be continued____________

 Chapter 121 121 - Going Home

    A few minutester,


    Harry and the other warriors came back. With them were the other students who were in the inner area. Finally, all the students were there.


    "Now, all the students are here. We are going back," Markus said. All the students, with the warriors from the association, followed the Saint towards the exit of the dark forest.


    While they were traveling toward the exit. Many monsters tried to attack them, but Markus simply release his aura, and those monsters instantly ran away.


    When they were in the outside area of the forest, all the warriors from the association and Saints vanished from their spot.


    "You can work from here toward the exit. We won''t be going with you," All the students only heard this.


    These students didn''t stop, they all walked toward the exit. Sam, Jeni, Tony, Elena, Kenny, Tina, and the teammates of Elena and Tony were together walking toward the exit. Compared to other warriors, they build wonderful friendships.


    They all face a hard battle together, so it is natural they be good friends. They all respect Sam, because of his decision, his leadership, the way he stays calm even in a serious situation, and most of all, he wasn''t an arrogant person.


    They all decide that if they go to the same college, then they will be teammates. But, they all thought this in their mind, nobody told each other.


    Finally, they can see the exit of the forest. It took them 2 hours to reach the exit. One by one, they left the forest.


    All the students, after leaving the forest, saw many reporters, and also many people who came to receive their children.


    If it weren''t for the warriors from the warrior association who maintained the order, those reporters and the parents already rushed toward their children.


    Everyone didn''t know about the dark association. They only know that many students suddenly attacked the other warriors because of a powerful monster controlling them. Warrior association blocked the news about the dark association. Except for the parents who were warriors and got the news about the dark association, the others didn''t know.


    Even with that, all the parents were worried about their children.


    Finally, when the warriors let parents go toward the students, all the parents rushed toward their children. Sam also saw his parents and sister. He, with a smile, walked toward them.


    When he got closer to them, instantly his mother rushed toward him and hugged him. She cried. Sam said nothing, only patting his mother''s back. He knows his whole family was anxious about him.


    Sam looked at his father with a smiling face and nodded at him. He can feel that his father also hugged him, but he let his mother. He also saw his sister, who wasn''t crying at the moment but just looking at her red eyes. You can see she also cried.


    Sometimeter, Hina finally stopped hugging her son. She started checking him carefully by talking to him. She was trying to find out if he was injured anywhere.


    "Mom, I am fine. I am not injured anywhere," Sam told his mother. But Hina didn''t listen to him. Gloria and Victor also came closer to him.


    "Hello, father. Hello sis," he greeted his father and sister.


    "How are you, son? Did the monster injure you anywhere? How are you feeling right now?" Victor asked him.


    " I am fine, dad. Your son was ?powerful," he said to his father, trying to cheer up the atmosphere. At this Gloria stops checking him. Seeing he wasn''t injured anywhere, she stop checking.


    " Hey, sis. How are you?" Then he turned around and asked Gloria.


    Gloria said nothing, just directly going toward her brother and hugging him.


    "Hey, sis. I am fine, so don''t need to worry. Cheer up, sis." He tried to cheer up his sister''s mood. But Gloria is still hugging him. She didn''t want to stop hugging her brother. These few days she was anxious about her brother and now finally seeing her brother, she just wanted to hug him.


    Sometimeter, they were finally in a car and heading toward the hotel. Not just them, all the students are now going toward their homes.


    The warrior association told all the students that they will inform them about the result in 7 days. Also, because of these unexpected events, many students got controlled by the dark association warrior or the face of those summoned monsters. The association also told the student that the student who got teleported here because of those unexpected events, they will get the chance for an exam once more. There is no will to inform all the students.


    Sam and his family were now going to the hotel. They needed to check out from that hotel after that they would go home. Sam also informed his ss teacher that he was going home with his parents.


    They reach the hotel. Vector quickly got out of the car and went to the reception area. A few minutester he came back, and now finally they can go home. But suddenly Sam''s stomach made a sound, " Growl... Growl,"


    Sam looked at his family and said, "HaHa, it looks like I am pretty hungry". Hearing Samugh, Gloria, Hina and Victor cannot control themselves and they also startughing.


    " Don''t worry son, before we go home we should go to the restaurant," his father said to him. Sam, with a smile, agrees with him.


    A few minutester, they were in front of the restaurant and entered. This is the best restaurant in this city. This restaurant is called "The Ortho".


    Sam was thrilled at this moment. He can finally eat as much as he can.


    ________________


    While they were eating, Sam remembered something and looked at Gloria.


    "Sis, did you see Miss Alena? I want to thank her. She said I should thank her properly. After she vanished from the dark forest, I didn''t see her. I think she is now in the association or her home." Sam asked his sister about Miss Alena and exined why he was looking for her.


    "Don''t worry darling, we are already nning to invite her to our house. We need to thank her properly. She is very helpful." His mother told him. Hearing his mother''s words, Sam nodded.


    _____________________


    At 5:00 p.m. They finally reached their home. Sam was exhausted at this moment and he needed a good rest. Some got out of the car and went toward his room. Before he took a rest, he needed to clean himself. These few days he wasn''t able to shower now he can finally clean himself.


    After freshening up himself, he came to his and, without further dy,y down on his bed. In Just a few seconds, he fell asleep.


    ________________________


    At 10:00 p.m., his mother called him for dinner. Sam woke up and went to the bathroom to wash his face. After that, you went to the kitchen.


    When he came to the kitchen, he saw his father and sister already there. They were all waiting for him. Sam also sat down.


    ______________


    While they were eating, Victor asked about his choice. The college exam was finally finished, so which colleges he was aiming for, his father wanted to know.


    "I am not sure about it, father. I still haven''t decided which college I''m going to choose," he told his father.


    " Okay. don''t pressure yourself. You can choose any college you are in. We will always support you," Hina said to him. Gloria and Victor also agreed with her. Seeing this scene makes him happy.


    A few minutester, they finished eating. Sam was now resting in his room. As his family said, he can choose any college he wants. Previously he did not search for the college but now he is going to search. Sam doesn''t know if he can enter the top three colleges with the score he has on the exam. Still, he will search for all the colleges.


    There were many colleges. He can''t read about all the colleges. He read about some specific colleges.


    A few minutes after writing the College''s name, he was nowying down on the bed.


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 15+2


    Agility: 13+2


    Physique: 16


    Intelligent(mental power): 18+1


    Spirit: 09


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Special (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Upgrade point: 995K


    " Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (Cooldown: 4 months)


    [This was a special technique from the system. With this, you can upgrade anything (like any material, any weapon, any technique, etc.) using your upgrade point.]


    Absorb technique:


    Dragon devour (grade C) (+)


    [Medium-level absorb technique. Only 45% of energy essence can be absorbed from crystals. It can devour a dragon.]


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (71%)(+)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (93%)(+)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Invisible shot (D-grade) (98%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (89%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (95%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.]


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (100%) (+)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (100%)(+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (C-grade) (100%)(+)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (80%)(+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade) (86%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (15%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (25%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.]


    Telekinesis: (D-grade) (98%) (+)


    [Helps you to control objects around you.]


    Berserker (D-grade) (59%)


    [This technique will help you increase your power for five minutes. You will enter a berserk mode. But, your body defense will decrease. This technique has a cooldown of 12 hours. To learn this technique, you needed to be at least a D-early grade warrior. Only then your body can handle this technique.]


    Light control (Grade D) (75%)


    [This technique teaches you how to control light energy. The more you be familiar with this technique, the more you will use the light energy easily.]


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (C-grade) (100%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.]


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (70%) (+)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade) (99%) (+)


    [This technique helps you to increase your vision power and also gives you a pair of spiritual eyes. It also helps you to see many things that you can''t see with your normal vision. ]


    ______________To be continued________


    [A/N: Hey guys, I have a question. Recently I started writing my recent novel in 1st person POV. So, my question is, should I also write this novel from here, in (first person and 3rd person POV) mixture POV?]

 Chapter 122 122 - Result

    7 dayster,


    Sam, Jeni, Tony, Elena, and many other students or we can all the students who take this year''s college exam were now present in the capital city.


    Today, the association will tell them their results. So every student who took part in the college exam was here. They are all waiting for the warrior association to tell them their results.


    Sam came here with her sister. She didn''te with the association because she needed to go to her college. She also needs to prepare for the annual battle. She only apanied her brother to the warrior association, then she left the association and went to her college.


    When some entered the warrior associations'' headquarters, he saw that his friends Jeni, Kenny, Tina, Tony, and Elena were present here. He saw ?they were talking with each other. Not only them, he also saw many other students, or we can say basically all the students were present here.


    When some enter the association hall room, many students look in his directions. Jeni and the others also look in his direction. Seeing that it was Sam, Tony waved his hand and called him.


    Sam saw that it was Tony who called him. So, also waved his hand toward him and with a smile approached them.


    Seeing that it was Tony who called Sam with a smile and Sam also approaching them made many students shocked. Many students still don''t know who Sam is, so it surprised them to see this. Those who know Sam''s identity, like his school ssmates, were lost for words. They didn''t know what to say about this. Previously, they all mocked him as a loser, but now is he a real loser?


    In the second phase, they all get to know his grade. That time they revealed that his grade was peak E-grade, which shocked them. Now, Tony, Jeni from the Royal School, and even Elena from his school were now happily talking with him. It is basically a shocking thing for everyone.


    At this time, Sam and others were talking about the dark association, unaware of the fact that everyone has a shocking expression while looking at him. But even he knows he would just ignore it.


    "Guys, my grandma told me ?they will go to the dark association tomorrow. Haha¡­. Those dark association warriors should pray," Jeni said to them whileughing. Jeni also knows how hot-tempered her grandmother is, and not only her grandmother but also Sanit Markus, Saint Mira also will visit the dark association base.


    "Haha¡­ you are right. They should pray for themselves," Elena said whileughing. Kenny and Tina areughing.


    Sam and Tony didn''t talk, but you can see a smile on their mouths. It was time to pay. Those dark association warriors will pay for what they did.


    While they were talking, suddenly they heard an announcement, " All the students pleasee to the auditorium room. Please maintain order and walk toward the auditorium room. Our warriors will guide you all toward us."


    A few minutester, 5 warriors came into the hall room.


    " Students, we will take you to the auditorium room. So, don''t worry and make lines so we can maintain the order." One warrior said.


    Sam, Jeni, Tony, and others instantly make a line. A few minutester, all the students were now standing in lines to maintain order.


    Those five warriors were now leading the five lines. It took a few minutes before they reached the room. In order, they enter the room and sit down.


    This auditorium room is enormous. 50000 seats were here. All the students sit down. Sam is now sitting with his friends. He looked around the auditorium room.


    While he was looking around, he also saw his friends from the Sky school, Aliya, Jenny, and Devid. They didn''t notice him, but he noticed them. He also saw a familiar face. It was Rins who once invited him to go with her. She is also taking this year''s college exam.


    A few minutester, all the students hear footsteps. 4 to 5 warriors were approaching the stage. Because everyone was maintaining the silence, they all heard the footsteps clearly.


    Sam, it was Saint Markus, Saint Mira, Saint Vena, and Saint Leon Vance. Along with his brother Fredrick Vance. Leon sat down where the other S-grade were sitting.


    Every student was looking at them. They can finally know their result. All the students were waiting for this.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Now the head examiner came in front of the mic and said.


    "Hello, congrattions on finishing your exam. We know this year many things happened, many unexpected situations urred. Because of this unexpected situation, many of our students didn''t even get the chance to fight and were eliminated. But don''t worry, those students who got affected by this unexpected situation will have the chance to take part in the exam once more. As you can guess, we have arranged for them to take the exam once more."


    " Because the association is busy these days, we cannot take the exam in these 7 days, so we are nning to take the exam tomorrow. So those students who got affected by this unexpected situation don''t worry you got a second chance."


    " Now today''s main point is to announce the result. We are going to announce the names of our top 10 students. Before announcing their marks, I am going to tell you something. These are the students who did not back down, even when their life was in danger. Even though they know that the enemy was powerful, they still have the courage to fight with them. The belief in our warrior association, our saints, and our warriors from the association. The belief that our warrior association will save them. So I want everyone present here to apud them, for their courage, and for their belief."


    With that, everyone present in the auditorium room started the apuse. Students, media, teachers, warriors from the association, and Saints everyone started the apuse.


    A few minutester,


    "Okay, now I am going to finally tell you the top 10 students'' names."


    " In the 10th ce, we have our student L Majur, from Base school. Her total point is 370. Everyone please pp for her." The head examiner finally reveals the name of the student who is in the 10th position.


    L got up from his seat and started walking toward the stage. Every year, the warrior association awarded those students who got the top 10 positions. Because of this, when the head examiner told her name, she got up from seed and walked toward the stage.


    Everyone pped for her. What can you say? It was an outstanding achievement to get a top 10th position.


    "We would like to say thanks to student L for believing in our warrior association. Also, congrattions to student L for getting the 10th position. It wasn''t easy to get the top 10th position, but you did it with your power and courage." The head examiner said to her and after that, he gave her a box with a certificate. Once again, everyone pped for her.


    This certificate was an achievement certificate, and the box is the reward from the association. Nobody will be able to find what is in the box. Because every year the association changes its reward for the top 10 candidates.


    After receiving the reward, L said, ''Thank you to the head examiner and also to the audience. With that, she left the stage and came back to her seat.


    "Now in the 9th position, we have our student Pijush Oron. He is from the Royal School. His total score is 370." The head examiner revealed the name of the students who got the 9th position.


    This time, Pijush got up and began to approach the stage. Once again, everyone pped for him. Pijush at this time with a serious expression going toward the stage.


    "We would like to say thanks to our student, Pijush. He was very brave. Even after losing all of his friends, he didn''t back down. We would like to congratte him. He gained the 9th position with his power, courage, and hard work." Like previously this time also, the head examiner praised Pijush. After saying that, the head examiner gave him a box and a certificate of paper. When Pijus was receiving the reward, everyone pped.


    Pijush also says thanks to the head examiner and leaves the stage.


    "In 8th position, we have our student from the sky School Aliya Hance. Her total score is 420," the head examiner revealed the name of the 8th position holder.


    Aliya got up from her seat and started approaching the stage. Everyone pped for her.


    "We would like to congratte student Aliya Hance for getting 8th ce. She also previously faced a monster who was much stronger than her. But she didn''t back down. Because of this courage and willpower, she got the position," the head examiner praised her.


    __________To be continued_________


    [A/N: Hey guys, hope you guys are enjoying the novel. I added a PayPal link to my synopsis. If you want, you can support me here. I will be very grateful. (From your Shameless author)]

 Chapter 123 123 - Result (2)

    The head examiner gave Aliya a certificate and a box. Everyone pped at this moment. Aliya after receiving the reward left the stage and came back to her seat.


    "In 7th position, we have our student, Gustav Kyle. His total score is 450, and he is also from Sky School." The head examiner said. Gustav, hearing that his name is called, gets up from his seat and starts walking toward the stage. Everyone pped for him.


    "Congrattions, student Gustav, for your courage, your leadership, and your willpower. You sessfully lead Aliya and Pijus. Also, you did not back down when facing monsters that were out of your league." The examiner said. The head examiner gave him a gift box and a certificate. Everyone pped for him. After saying thanks to the head examiner and the audience, Gustav left the stage and came back to his seat.


    "Now, in 6th position, we have our student James Danish. His total score is 480, and he is also from Sky School. What can I say? This year, we have many excellent warriors from the Sky School." The head examiner said. James, hearing his name being called, got up from his seat and started walking toward the stage. Everyone pped for him.


    "We like to congratte our student, James. We all see his bravery, his willpower, and his leadership. He and his teammate face monsters who are more powerful than him. James at that time showed his leadership and bravery." The head examiner praised him. He gives James a box and a certificate.


    "Now we have finally reached the top 5 candidate list. So in 5th ce, we have our student Elena Martin. She is from Base school and her total score is 510." The head examiner said.


    Elena, at this time, was sitting with Sam and the others. Hearing she was being called, she got up from her seat and walked toward the stage. Everyone pped for her. Sam and the others also begin to p for her.


    "I like to congratte a student, Elena. I don''t think I need to tell her achievement to you. Even so, I like to point out some facts that I think everyone should have. When previously she was fighting Lepris, and their team was almost defeated, she still didn''t show any weakness. Also, when everyone in her team began to panic, it was her brilliant speech that made everyonee down," the head examiner said. He gave her a certificate and 2 wooden boxes. Normally for the top 5 candidates, the reward is better. Everyone pped for her. After saying thank you to the head examiner and the audience, she left the stage and came back to her seat.


    "In fourth ce, we have a student, Tony Taylor. His total score is 520, and he is from Royal School." The head examiners said the fourth-ce holder''s name.


    Tony, after hearing that he is being called, quickly gets up from the seat and starts walking toward the stage. Everyone pped for him.


    "I don''t think I need to tell you about our student, Tony. When facing a monster that is out of your league, he did not back down. He also stays calm in serious situations when we can''t make reckless decisions. He is also an excellent leader and an excellent fighter. So I would like to congratte student Tony." The head examiner praised him. He gave him boxes and a certificate. Everyone pped for him. Tony said thanks to everyone and left the stage.


    "Feww!!... so we finally reached the top 3 candidate list. I know everyone is waiting for this."


    " Without further dy, let''s start. In the third position, we have our student Jeni Chaffy. Her total score is 535, and she is from Royal School." The head examiner said, and he pped with the other audience.


    Jeni got up from his seat. She approached the stage.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "She also didn''t need any introduction about her achievement. I can say that she is a great teammate you can have on your team. Even when she was facing an enemy, she still thought about her teammates'' condition. From here, we can see that she always cares about her teammates. Not only does she have great willpower, but she also is a lightning spell master." The head examiner praised her. The head examiner gave her three boxes and a certificate. Everyone in the room pped for her. After saying her thanks to everyone, she left the stage and came back to her seat.


    "In our second position, we have our student, Alexa m. Her total score is 540 and she is from Royal School." The head examiner reveals the name of the second position holder. Alexa got up from her seat and began to approach the stage.


    "Alexa is known as the genius of the Royal School and she has already proven it. She is a prominent leader, a great teammate, and a sword master. She knows very well that she is a warrior who can''t back down in a fight even when she is facing a monster that is out of her league." The examiner told everyone about her. He gave her three boxes and a certificate. Everyone started pping for her. After saying thanks to everyone, she also left the stage and came back to her seat.


    "Now our main star who got the first position is Sam Kainer. His total score is 560, and he is from the Base school." The head examiner finally reviews the name of the first position holder.


    Sam, who got up from his seat, couldn''t believe that he got 1st position. He never thought about revealing his full power in the exam, but because of those warriors from the Dark association, he had to reveal his full power, and now he got 1st position. Sam doesn''t know what he should do. Should he be happy because he got the 1st position or should he be sad because his n to stay low-key wasn''t possible now?


    ''Because of those dark association warriors, I am now in this situation. I will never forgive them. Just you wait, you dark association. I will pay you for what you did to me,'' Sam at this time med the dark association while he was walking towards the stage.


    "I think everyone knows about his achievements. At first, you went to the dark forest alone. But, because of the unexpected situation, he and Jeni be teammates. From there, we got to know about his great leadership. Even in a dangerous situation, he tries to stay calm. He always makes the right decision in the serious movement."


    " Even when he is facing the monster who is out of his league, he never backs down and tries to stay calm and think carefully. And he is a very good Archer, a good swordmaster, and a spiritual warrior. With his hard work, he became good at these three. I don''t think anyone couldpete with him in concealment. So everyone, please p for our Sam Kainer," the head examiner finished praising him. "We are proud of you, boy," after saying that he gave him a storage ring and a certificate. At this time, everyone present in the auditorium room was now standing and pping for him. They were showing their respect to the first position holder. Many people here still can''t believe that Sam got the first position, but they are still standing and pping for Sam. Others respect every student who can get a fast position in a college exam.


    Sam sees everyone were standing and pping for him. He feels proud at this moment. He is feeling he achieved a great thing. What can he say? Could he still stay unhappy that his n to stay low key wasn''t sessful? No, at this moment, he feels happy. He can think about thoseplicated matterster but now he should enjoy this atmosphere.


    "Boy says something," the head examiner gave him the mic and said to him.


    "Hello, everyone. I am Sam kainer. I don''t think I can achieve this fast position if I don''t have my teammates. As you know, when I entered the forest I was alone at that moment. If you are asking why? Because I don''t have any friends at my school and nobody wants to be my teammates. But here I meet my first friends, or you can say, my first teammates Jeni, Tony, Kenny, Tina, and Elena. Without them, I don''t think I could achieve 1st position. At first, I didn''t think I could be friends with them, but what can you say? We are now good friends. They are the best teammates you can have. Thank you guys," With that, Sam finished talking. Everyone in the room once again started pping. Sam left the stage and went toward his friends.


    He is happy he meets them. He really wants to make friends with others, it is just the others didn''t want to make friends with him.


    __________________To be continued______________

 Chapter 124 124 - Feast

    "Also, I would like to say if it wasn''t for the unexpected situation, we don''t think we could see the student''s bravery. They are our future. If they be stronger, our humanity also bes stronger. Also, for those students who didn''t get the top 10 positions, it doesn''t mean we aren''t aware of your bravery and your achievements. We just you all continue to grow strong and protect our humanity," with that, the head examiner finished talking.


    Everyone pped after the examiner finished his speech.


    Now it is time for a feast. Every year after the result announcement, the warrior association organized a feast for the students.


    "Everyone, please go outside of the auditorium room because we are organizing a feast for all of you. We organized the faces outside in our field so everyone please go there and enjoy." After saying that, the head examiner with the Saints left the auditorium room.


    Everyone got up from their seats and left the auditorium room. Sam and the others still didn''t get up from the seat. Now everyone wanted to leave, so the entrance of the auditorium room was crowded. They will leave when there will be fewer people.


    "So, how did you feel after getting 1st position?" Tony asked me.


    Elena, Jeni, and the other girls instantly stopped talking and looked at him. They all wanted to know how he felt right now.


    " Haha¡­ to tell you the truth. I never thought that I would get the first position. Even at thest moment, I never thought I would get this position." I said to them whileughing. What can he say at the moment? Should he say that he didn''t want to be the No 1? If he said that, then anyone can think that he wanted to show off. So, he onlyughed.


    "Congrattions, Sam. I never know that someone can overtake me. But when previously I saw your fight, I predicted that something like this could happen, and now you can." Alexa suddenly came to him and said that. Hearing her words, you ? think ?she was arrogant, but she wasn''t. This year, nobody canpete with her except Sam.


    "Thank you. Also, congrattions to you. It is all luck that I got 1st position." He replied to her with a smile. Seeing him smiling makes Alexa shocked. Previously in the forest, he never smiled like that.


    "So, you really can smile," Alexa said with a smile.


    "Yea!! As Alexa said, are Sam you smiling? Previously in the forest, you only had a serious face. Now, seeing you smiling, it''s kinda weird." Elena said with a smile. Three others also nodded, hearing him.


    Hearing her, Sam didn''t know what he should do. Should he cry orugh?


    "You guys¡­.. Sigh, just forget it," Sam wanted to argue, but then it was true that he always had a serious face in the forest. So, he only sighed.


    "Hahaha," seeing him sighing like this, everyoneughed.


    "Okay, stopughing. Let''s go, we also need to go to the field," Sam saw that there was less crowd, so he said to them.


    "Sam, don''t ?change the subject. Hahaha¡­..," Kenny suddenly said, which made everyoneugh once again.


    Sam only sighs and sends them behaving like. What can he say? He just lets them enjoy themselves.


    _________________________


    In the field, you can see all students are now eating food. The warrior association really organized a significant event for them. Here you won''t see only the students, you can also see the teachers, many reporters, and many warriors from the association. They all were rxing.


    If you are thinking, why are the reporters here? It is because they are all broadcasting the announcement of the top 10 candidates.


    Every person in the world today watches the announcement.


    Also, there was a second reason. They still needed to interview the top 10 students. During these 7 days, they did not disturb any students for the interview because they also know that every student needs rest after this much battle. So today they will interview the students.


    _______________________


    Victor and Hina also watch the result announcement. They are also very shocked that some be the number one position holder. It was like a dream to them. After some time theye out of shock and be thrilled. They are proud of their son. What can they say? Both of their children make them proud and it''s a fortunate thing for them.


    ______________________________


    In the Royal College, Gloria and Alena also watch the result announcement. When they saw ?Sam was the one who got the no 1 position, both of them became happy.<novelnext></novelnext>


    They didn''t be shocked like any other person. Because Alena had seen how powerful Sam was and how good he was in leadership. She also told her student about Sam. Because of this, they both aren''t shocked.


    ___________________________


    Base city,


    All the people in the city were now shocked. Because almost everyone in the city knows that Gloria''s brother was a loser. Now seeing the result, they all be speechless. They did not even know how they should react.


    All the teachers of the Base School who didn''t go to the warrior association''s headquarters now have shocked expressions. Previously, some ?teachers told them that Sam''s grade was E-grade. At that time, they be shocked after hearing the news, but now seeing that Sam got the number one position makes them speechless.


    ______________________________


    Sam and the others also came to the field. They also show how every student enjoys the food. So they also didn''t waste any time and went toward the food stall.


    Jeni, Tony, Kenny, Tins, and Elena weren''t that hungry, but they stille to the food stall only for Sam. They all know that Sam was a food lover. Even when they needed to take a rest, Sam preferred to eat first. They only came here to apany Sam.


    And our food lover, Sam, as everyone guessed, was thrilled at this moment. It was the best gift for him.


    His friends quickly went to the food stall. It''s a buffet system. He takes as much food as he can on his te.


    "Hahaha..." Seeing him taking this much food on his te, they allughed. He really is a food lover.


    All of them sit down in chairs while putting down the food on the table. They all were enjoying their food. They don''t know where they will go, but with the friendship they build during the exam, they will never forget about it.


    It also thrilled Sam today. Because it was the first time he was enjoying his time with his friends and second, the warrior arranged this much food. [A/N: Our food lover.]


    _______________________


    All the students who got the top 10 positions were now going to the meeting room. The reporters wanted to interview them. So, the warrior association arranges the meeting room for their interview. Now they all were going to the room.


    They entered the room and saw that there were many reporters and cameras in the room. Also, many warriors are guarding the room.


    After entering the room, one warrior pointed to their seat. Their seats were on the stage. All the students went to their seats and sat down. Even after all the students sat down, the reporter didn''t start interviewing them because they were all waiting for Saint Markus. Actually, those reporters wanted to interview the warrior association, so Markus agreed with the interview.


    A few minutester, Markus finally came to the room. He sat down beside Sam. Now the interview will finally start.


    Every reporter will get the chance to ask a question. But they can''t ask the students any personal questions. Also, the warrior association already informed all the students not to talk about the dark association.


    Sam and others also understand that if they mentioned dark associations, then the situation will be veryplicated. Because some people will question the association about their responsibility, and the main reason is that if they mention the dark association, the dark association n will be sessful.


    The dark association wanted to tell all the people over the world that they were greater than the warrior association, and if the students mentioned them, then the dark association would be the real winner.


    "Now, you can start the interview. But as you know, don''t ask the students any personal questions or the question that will make them ufortable," Saint Markus said and signaled the reporters to start the interview.


    "I like to ask all the students about their feelings when they face a monster, who is many times stronger than him/her," One reporter said.


    "When I faced the monster, I felt like I was in front of an enormous wall. I would never cross the wall. And when the monster stared at you still like he was staring at your soul. It will take your willpower...."


    ___________To be continued___________


    [A/N: Hey guys, don''t forget to join on my discord: https://discord.gg/C5kUjxVwMC. Also, you can support your me in paypal.me/SmallOtaku by sending something. It will be very helpful to me.]

 Chapter 125 125 - Interview

    "I like to ask all the students about their feelings when they face a monster, who is many times stronger than him/her," One reporter said.


    "When I faced the monster, I felt like I was in front of an enormous wall. I would never cross the wall. And when the monster stared at you still like he was staring at your soul. It will take your wheel power to maintain a clear head at that time." Tony said that. The other students just nodded. They also agreed with Tony.


    "Miss Alexa, how are you after not getting the no1 position?" Someone asked Alexa.


    "Well, to tell you the truth, if it was before I would be very mad, but now I know that the person who gets the first position is qualified to be the number one. I don''t know how much you see in the broadcast or on TV, but we all see him fighting the monster and I think every student here will agree that he has the power to be the number one," Alexa replied.


    " Miss Jeni, you be the teammate with Mr. Sam. Can you tell us about him?" One reporter asks Jeni about Sam.


    " Well, I like to say that I was fortunate that Sam and I became teammates. He has the ability to maintain his calm. Even when we are in a dangerous situation, he calmly thinks about the n to fight the monster. He makes no reckless decisions, where his teammates will get injured. Also, I like to say he was a food lover," Jenny replied. She wanted to joke, so said thest line with a funny tone.


    "Mr, Sam, we would like to know how you did after getting the First position?" Someone asked him.


    "Actually, I am still surprised that I got the first position. I never thought that I would get this position. And you can say it was because of all of my teammates that I got a fast position." Sam simply answers them.


    " Mr. Sam, we would like to know about your experience when you face thatst monster."


    " To tell you the truth, I was pretty scared. Thest monster wasn''t like your normal monster. It has an aura that will make you fear him. If your willpower is not strong won''t even look in his eyes. Fortunately, we have our saints who kill that monster. My teammates and I always believe in the Saints." Sam answers them.


    " Mr. Sam, which college do you take?" one reporter asked him.


    " I still cannot decide which college I should take, so I won''t be able to answer this question," Mark replied.


    " Mr. Sam, do you know how those monsters appear in the forest?" one reporter asked him.


    " Sorry, but I knew nothing about it. I also like to know about this. Why did those monsters attack us?" Sam answered.


    " Mr. Sam, we heard you had a nickname loser in your school. But you be first in the college exam. Did you purposely hide your power in school? " One reporter asked him.


    " Actually, I didn''t hide my grade in school. I think many of you get the report that I had a mortal grade potential. At that time, I was unable to level up. Because of this, everyone called me a loser. But it all happened one year ago and I feel warm from my body. I don''t know what happened, but it wasn''t ufortable. After a few minutes, the feeling vanished. But I can tell that something is different. But I don''t know what is different. Eventually, I forgot about that matter."


    " I think you all know that when a warrior with mortal grade potential tries to break through from F-grade to E-grade, they will feel pain. Don''t know what happened but suddenly one day I tried to break through. I noticed I wasn''t feeling any pain. At that time I thought it was a gift from God!! So from then I went to the dungeon and collected the crystals to absorb and eventually reach this stage. At first, I didn''t even notify my family about this because I was thinking that they would think I was a wired person. I still tell them that I level up. Guess what? They didn''t even ask how I level up? They only worry about my condition. I am also fortunate that I have this loving family."


    " Only recently I got to know that my potential has be a special grade. I also asked the doctor about this. This all happened because at first, my body wasn''t able to handle the true potential of my body, but then after my body became tough, my potential increased. So, you can guess if I decided to hide or not." Sam exins to them.


    It surprised every student when they heard his story. They never thought that this fast grade was a mortal grade.


    So, like this, all the news reporters asked the students many questions. An hourter, they finally finished interviewing the students.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Saint, we would like to know what happened in the forest? Why do so many powerful monsterse into the forest?"


    One reporter asked Saint Markus. Now it is time to interview Saint Markus.


    "We found a keep that is connected to the outside area of the dark forest. Previously I didn''t know about this because many monsters from outside entered the forest. It took some time to find out about those caves. You know that it is our worried association''s fault for not finding out about the cave before the exam. Also, some people who are our humanity''s enemy wanted to use the chance to attack the students." Markus exins to them what''s happening in the forest. Yes, Saint Markus waspletely telling them some made-up story.


    After 2 to 3 more questions, the interview finally finished. So it is time to go home.


    Sam and the others were getting ready to leave the association. Suddenly a warrior came towards Sam and told him that Saint Markus wanted to talk to him. Hearing the warrior''s word, Tony and the others weren''t that surprised. It can be that San Markus wanted Sam to join the warrior association. If a warrior like Sam joins the warrior association, then the power of the warrior association will increase.


    Sam nodded and told his friends to wait. After saying that, he followed the warrior, who took to Saint Markus.


    A minuteter, Sam came in front of a room. He knocked on the door.


    "Come in."


    After getting permission, enter the room. After entering the room for two people, one is Saint Markus, and the other is Saint Vena.


    Sam gives them a military salute. Both of them nodded.


    "Sam, my boy, congrattions on getting the first position. You did a great job. All are proud of you. The way you handle the situation, the way you calmly make decisions even when you are in a dangerous situation, is really outstanding." Saint Markus said to him.


    " Thank you, sir," Sam said with a smile. He was really feeling proud when Saint Markus praised him.


    "Why are you praising him that much? And boy, don''t be proud. I told you to take care of my granddaughter. But what did you do to my granddaughter that now she happily talked about you? My granddaughter, who never liked to talk to any boy, is now happily talking about. If I find you did anything to my granddaughter, I will make you pay. Humph," suddenly Saint Vena said this to him.


    Hearing her words, Sam bes very confused. As she said, he takes care of Jeni and her teammates. Now, she is telling me he did something to Jeni. How did shee to this conclusion, and the crucial question is, how can he do something to her? The warrior association continuously monitors them. How will he do something?


    '' Sigh, women. I really can''t understand them.'' Sam can only sigh.


    "Hahahaha... don''t mind her words. Actually, son, we want to examine your grade once more. I don''t know how you hid your result, but we want to test once again. Also, this time don''t use your technique." Markus said. He was really excited to know about his result. Markus also wanted to know which technique Sam used to the height of his grade from the machine. But he did not ask Sam. Everyone has their own secrets. They didn''t want to tell anybody about them.


    It did not surprise Sam after hearing him. He already knows the fact that the Saint will ask him about this. The moment he reveals his full power, he knows the Saint will ask him about this. So Sam said nothing, only agreeing with him.


    Seeing that Sam agreed makes Markus smile. So, with no dy, Markus quickly told Sam to follow him. They are going to the examination room. Sanit Vena also went with them. She also wants to know Sam''s result.


    ______________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 126 126 - Re-Examine

    Markus, Sam, and Venae to the examination room. Those staff who were working in that room, after seeing Vena and Markus, gave them a military salute. Markus and Vena nodded at them.


    "Is everything ready?" Markus asked.


    "Yes, sir, everything is ready," one of the staff answered him.


    Markus nodded after hearing that, then turned around and looked at me.


    "Ok, son. Now, we will check your rank." Saint Markus said. Sam after hearing him just nodded and walked toward the device that will check his grade and potential. It is the same that he saw in the exam field.


    "Don''t try to use your technique. Just let the device check your grade and potential," Saint Markus said.


    Sam only nodded. Now, he was standing on the device.


    Then the device switches on. Instantly, Sam can feel the device checking his spiritual energy and his body.


    A few minutester, the device finally shows the result.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Grade: Early D-grade


    Potential: Special."


    Everyone saw the result. Sam left the device and came beside Sanit Markus. He looked at Saint Markus and Saint Vena, looking at the results. He doesn''t know what they were thinking.


    A few minutester, Markus and Vena Stop looking at the result. Markus looked at him with a smile.


    "You quit something, son. You can fake your result. Not that many people can do that. Even those people who could do that were high-rank warriors." Saint Markus said while pping his back.


    Sanit Vena said nothing. She maintains a serious face all the time.


    "Now let''s go back to the meeting room," Saint Markus said to him. They came back to the meeting room. Markus and Vena sat down while Markus told Sam to sit down. So Sam also sat down.


    "Now son, I have something to tell you, but before that send, did you think about your future? Do you think about which college you want to go to or what you want to do after graduating from college? Did you think about this?" Markus asked him.


    At first, hearing the question, Sam bes quite shocked, but then he controls himself and answers him.


    "To tell you the truth, sir, I did not think about this. Until now, I didn''t know which college to choose, and I didn''t think about what to do after graduating from college." Sam answered him.


    " Why is that, son? I think normally students who take part in the college exam already have thought about the college they want to go to. Can you tell us why you didn''t think about this?" Markus asked him.


    " Haha...¡­ what can I say, sir? I think you got the report about me. When I was a child, I wanted to be a great warrior, but then when I got my result, the dream of bing a warriorpletely broke. So I decided to stop thinking about bing a warrior and focus on my studies."


    "It''s just one year ago I suddenly felt warm in my body. At first, I didn''t know why. But then one day when I tried to break through using a limit breaker, without feeling any difort, I broke through and became an E-grade warrior."


    " Even at that time, I didn''t know that my potential would increase and be a special grade. At that time, I just thought that this time I was able to increase my greatness. Can I do that once again? And to find that I brought many early E-grade crystals."


    "After absorbing the crystals, when I see that I can easily increase my grade from early to intermediate, that means I can still be a warrior. From then on I begin to once again start practicing and going to the dungeon."


    " I just broke through this month some days ago before the exam, and haha... I never thought something like that could happen in the exam and I became the first. This is the reason I never thought about any college. I just only focused on my adventure,"


    Sam exined to the Saints the reason why he didn''t think about any college before the exam. If any other person here his reason, then they will think that he waspletely stupid, but what can we say? This is our Sam.


    "Hahaha¡­.. reading your report, I thought you had some difficulty in your school life or something like that. Because of this, you didn''t want to join any college or something like that. Hahaha¡­.." Saint Markus began tough while saying this.


    " Vena, you heard this¡­. Hahaha," He also said this to Vena whileughing.


    "Hmmm¡­. Stupid brat and stupid reason," Saint Vena only said this. But if you look carefully, then you can see a smile on her face.


    But Sam didn''t notice that he only sighed after seeing her reaction.


    ________________


    A minuteter, When Saint Markus finally stoppedughing, he said to Sam.


    " Well, my son, something to ask you? Do you want to join the warrior association after your graduation?" Markus asked him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    At first, Sam could not understand why Saint Markus suddenly asked him this. So, he only looked at him with a questionable look.


    Seeing his questionable look, Saint Markus knows that he needs to rify so that Sam understands.


    " Recently the number of the monsters was increasing in the outside area and also the dungeon''s number was increasing. So we needed as many outstanding warriors as we could. Don''t know why, but I can tell that you will be a great warrior in the future, so I want to ask you to join our association after you graduate," Markus exined to him.


    Sam did not answer instantly, and he began to think about this. Actually, Sam doesn''t like to work for anyone. He has a secret that he doesn''t want to tell anyone. So he prefers to work alone, but he knows that he won''t be able to go solo in the higher great dungeon, so he needs teammates, who he can trust.


    "Sir, I really can''t give you the answer now. Because I don''t even know what to do? So if you don''t mind, I needed time to think about it." Sam said to Markus with a guilty tone. His mind was a mess right now, so he really can''t decide anything right now.


    Understanding his situation, Markus said to him with a smile,


    " Hahaha... son, don''t worry. You can tell us your answerter."


    "Thank you, sir," Sam said thanks to him.


    " I think it is time to leave. Because I can, some of your friends were getting impatient," Markus said with augh.


    " Also, before you go, I would like to say something that we already know Grade, we just use that device to examine your grade, so that we can upgrade your information officially. So, don''t get confused about that." Just Even Sam, about to leave Markus, said that.


    " Thank you, sir, for exining," Sam thanked him. It really confused him all this time. Because today he wasn''t using his concealment technique, so the saints can already notice his grade, but then why did they ask him to examine his grade? This is the thing he was confused about. After getting the answer, he is really grateful to Saint Markus.


    _______________________


    Just when he left the office room, he saw his friends who wereing towards the office room with an impatient look.


    " Dude, you arete," Tony said that


    "Sorry about that. I need to re-examine my grade and potential. Because of this, I amte. Sorry about this," Sam apologized to them.


    " What?? Why did you need to re-examine your grade? " Tony asked him.


    " I knew it. I already guess that they will tell you to re-examine your grade," suddenly Jeni said.


    "But why?" Tony asked her.


    " You don''t know?" Jeni asked him.


    " What?" He asked her.


    " You don''t know that Sam''s information shows that he was a Peak E-grade warrior?" Jeni asked.


    " What? Are you serious..... Haha, if he is a peak E-grade warrior, then I am an intermediate E-grade warrior. Hahaha." Tony said in a joking manner.


    " Haha¡­ is it true, Sam? The thing that the Jeni said, is it right?" Tony asked Sam.


    " Yes," Sam only nodded.


    " Haha¡­. How did you do that, bro? I mean, how did you fake your result?" Tony asked him while stillughing.


    Kenny, Tina, Elena, and Jeni also wanted to know about this, so they also became interested.


    "Hmmm¡­. Using the concealment technique when the device is trying to examine my grade" seeing that his friend is interested to know about this doesn''t even know what to do? So he told them this.


    "Hahaha¡­.." hearing the answer, Tony began tough more. The others also could not control themselves and began tough.


    "Haha¡­ bro, are you serious?" Tony asked him.


    "Yes," Sam answered him.


    "Hahaha," Tony onlyughed when he heard Sam''s answer.


    "Bro, what can I say? I think you are the first person to do that. Hahaha," Tony said to him whileughing.


    ______________To be continued__________

 Chapter 127 127 - Rare Grade Potential

    Next day,


    Sam was now in his sister''s house. Yes, you hear it right, his sister has a house in the central city. Because of her achievement, the Royal College gave her a house.


    His sister is currently busy in practice. In December she has the annual fightingpetition or we can say the annual collegepetition.


    Sam decided to stay here for 2 days. He needed to decide which college he wanted to go to before next month. Because from next month the college will start.


    If it was before, then he can decide on any college he wants to go to. But now he got the first position in the collegepetition, so he needed to choose between these top three colleges. Actually, he also wanted to go to the top 3 colleges. It''s just that he wanted to go there as a low-key person. But now that wasn''t possible. Everyone knows his name.


    "Sigh, which college should I choose?" He is thinking right now. He cane to the Royal College like his sister or he can go to the other two colleges.


    "Well, I still have time. I can think about itter." He decided to think about itter.


    Today he has a n to tour the city with his friends. Jeni, Kenny, Tina, and Tony were from the central city. So Elena and he will go with them.


    But before that, he wanted to do something. Now the exam is finished, we can finally upgrade his potential. Actually, he just can''t wait to upgrade his potential. He was very excited about it.


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 15+2


    Agility: 13+2


    Physique: 16


    Intelligent(mental power): 18+1


    Spirit: 09


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Special (+)


    Upgrade point: 995K. "


    He looked at his status. He doesn''t know how much he will need to upgrade his potential. With no dy, he quickly taps on the (+) button beside potential.


    Instantly, white light surrounded him. At this time, he was feeling warm, like some shackle leaving his body. He thought he would feel pain, but no, he did not feel any pain. He was feeling veryfortable. So, he closed his eyes and enjoyed thefortable feeling.


    A few minutester, thatfortable feeling begins to fade. When thefortable feelingpletely faded away, he opened his eyes. Instantly, he smells something bad, which almost makes him puke.


    It is like the first time when his potential got upgraded, his body released this kind of ck liquid. Now again, when he upgraded his potential, this type of ck liquid came out of his body.


    With no dy, he quickly went to the bathroom. A few minutester, he finally came out of the bathroom. Finally, the foul smell was gone.


    He sits down in his bed and looks at his status once again.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 17+10


    Agility: 15+10


    Physique: 16+10


    Intelligent(mental power): 19+1


    Spirit: 09+5


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 495K. "


    It needed 500k upgrade points to upgrade the potential. He also can see that his strength, agility, and physique had a massive increase. These three statuses increase by 10 points. Because of this, he was feeling much stronger than before.


    Now, he was very excited because he can finally upgrade his techniques. Wasting no time, he decided to upgrade "Dragon devour". It was his most important technique. So, he decided to upgrade it first.


    He clicks the (+) button beside the "Dragon devour". Instantly, his technique got upgraded.


    "Dragon devour (grade B)


    [High-level absorb technique. Only 55% of energy essence can be absorbed from crystals. It can devour a dragon.] "


    Finally, his "Dragon devour" got upgraded. He looked at the upgrade point. He got speechless after looking at the points.


    It took his 200k upgrade points to upgrade his absorb technique. He doesn''t know what to say? These upgrade points he collected after so much hard work, but now most of his upgrade points are gone.


    "Why did it need 200k points to upgrade the absorb technique?" Now he had this question in his mind.


    [A/N: What did you expect? A B-grade absorb technique was very rare.]


    Nobody can answer him. He only sighs. He can''t change the past, so he decided to forget about it. Actually, he guessed an answer, previously all of his techniques were low-grade and then became medium-grade techniques. But now, after upgrading them, they will be a high-grade technique.


    These high-grade techniques were very rarely found in the dungeon. A high grade was the technique that everyone wanted. His techniques were bing high-grade techniques, so it was natural to need more points than before or something like that.


    He doesn''t know how many points he will need to upgrade the other techniques. He just hopes that the point he has right now would be enough to upgrade at least two techniques. He can still see the (+) point beside his other techniques. So, it means those techniques didn''t need more than 200k upgrade points.


    ________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam was now eating some food. He decided that he will upgrade his other techniquester. At 1:00 p.m. he will go with his friends. They wille to his house to pick him up.


    It is now 10:00 a.m. He still has a lot of time. So he decided to test his new strength. Gloria has a training room in the house. She was now training in her school with her teacher, so Sam can use that training room.


    Sam already sold all the monsters that he collected in the dark forest. But he didn''t sell the moonflower, healing mushroom, blood rose and the other nts he got in the dark forest.


    He also already checked the storage ring that the head examiner rewarded him with. In the storage ring, he found 6 things.


    First, armor.


    "Type: Armor


    Name: Leather armor


    Materials used: Skin of Snake demon


    Grade: C+


    Defense capacity: (400-500)%


    Durability: (400-450)%


    Special ability: strength +5 (equipping it will add +5 points to your strength status.). "


    Second,


    Neo-style sword technique. (Grade - D)


    [A sword technique created by master Neo.]


    Third,


    Weapon


    "Name: Twin dragger


    Grade: C -


    Attack Power: (250 - 300)%


    Durability: (200 - 260)%


    Special power: none."


    Fourth,


    Blood red color healing potion. (Grade - A+)


    [Supreme grade healing potion made by a master potion maker. If you still have breath in you, even if you don''t have your leg, hand, and other body parts. This potion can heal you instantly. ]


    Fifth,


    "Name: Sky boots


    Grade: D+


    Type: Boots


    Durability: (90 - 100)%


    Special ability: Add +3 points to your status. "


    Sixth,


    Fighting Bot


    [A robot, when you still didn''t activate it. It will look like a ser ball, but after activating it will be a 6ft height fighting robot. You can''t destroy this robot until you are a B-grade warrior.]. "


    These were things he got rewarded by the association. Fighting Bot was his favorite thing right now. Because with it he can train himself better. Also, when you activated the fighting bot, it won''t hold back against you until you tell that robot to stop. What can you say? These things were best for training and fighting experience. Also, this robot knows many fighting styles and you can also learn many more styles after downloading the style from the inte.


    So, with this Fighting bot checking his new powers was the best. Because right now, to check his power, he doesn''t need to go to the dungeon.


    He went to the training room. He brings out the fighting boat and activates it. Instantly a 6-foot height robot appeared in the field. Now just needed to give themand to fight, when the fighting bot will attack him.


    "Attack" is thement and to stop the robot he needs it to say " stop".


    The robot won''t be the first one to attack you. You need to attack the robot first. Sam decided that he will fight using his boxing technique. He didn''t want to use his sword.


    ____________To be continued_____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, have a good day guys. Today I have something to discuss with you.


    First,


    Many of you I think have the question of why didn''t Sam''s mom, Hina Strom didn''t have thest name, Kainer. Well, it has another story. I will write about itter. Not now, so I don''t want to give a spoiler.


    Second,


    If you are thinking about why Sam didn''t feel hungry when the ck liquid that prevented his growth left his body. Well, this is mainly because of his system. His system prevents that from happening. The system didn''t let that happen, but it increased hunger and eating capacity. Previously, he needed at least 5 people''s worth of food to satisfy his hunger, but now he will need 10 people''s worth of food to satisfy his hunger.


    Third,


    Even in the dungeon, those higher grade techniques (like B-grade, and A-grade techniques) were very rare. Whereas Sam just needed to upgrade his techniques. Because of this, I decided to increase the point he will need to upgrade his techniques.


    Haha¡­ I forget the other things I wanted to discuss. When I remember them, I will tell you.]

 Chapter 128 128 - City Tour

    Sam jumped and punched the robot. The robot also hit him. These two punches sh together. Sam went backward. What can you say? The robot has more power than Sam.


    "Stop! " Sammands the robot to stop. Instantly the robot bes frozen. Sam approached the robot and deactivated it. Instantly, that robot turns into a ser ball. Then he put the ser ball in his inventory.


    He looked at the time. It was now 12:00 p.m., and from 10:00 a.m. to 12:00 p.m., he continuously fought the robot. At 1:00 p.m., his friend wille. So before that, you want to take a rest and eat something. In these 2 hours, he gets fully familiarized with his new power.


    Sam was now walking toward the washroom to freshen up. Also previously when he was at his home, he usually didn''t use a training suit to train, but yesterday his sister gave him a training suit. So he was wearing that suit while practicing, or we can say fighting.


    This training suit was skin tight and to make this suit the association used some kind of light materials because if you wear this suit you won''t feel ufortable. Also, the interesting facts about this suit were that this suit will automatically absorb your sweat, so you won''t feel sweaty.


    Yes, you hear it right; the association was the inventor of this training suit. But the main thing was that they still didn''t release this training in public. His sister told him that the association will release this suit in December.


    ______________________


    After changing into a normal dress, he came to the kitchen. He can feel that his hunger level has increased. Fortunately, he already ordered food. 10 people''s worth of food he ordered. Previously, he only needed 5 people''s worth of food to satisfy his hunger. But, now he doesn''t know why, but he has a feeling that he needs 10 people''s worth of food to satisfy his hunger.


    Wasting no time, he began to eat food. A few minutes, he finished eating his food, and after washing the dishes; he went to his room.


    He looked at the time. It was now 12:25 p.m., so he still had time. He wanted to use this time to rest sometime, then he would go out with his friends. Because you should rest, sometime after finishing eating.


    ____________


    "Hey, Sam!!!! Are you ready?" Tony asked. He, Elena, Jeni, Kenny, Tina, and Alexa were there. Previously, when Alexa was talking with Jeni, she got to know that Jeni, Tony, Elena, Kenny, and Tina will be touring the city with Sam. Sam never came to the central city, so they decided to introduce him to the famous thing of the central city. Alexa was getting bored in her home, so she also tagged along.


    "Come," Sam said to them, and open the door and leave the house. He was wearing a full sleeve gray t-shirt and blue jeans.


    "Hey guys, good afternoon," he said to them. Jeni and others also greet him.


    " Sam, Alexa will alsoe with us," Jeni said to him.


    "No problem," he replied with a smile.


    "So, guys, how do we find touring the City?" Sam asked them. Because I can''t see any car outside of his house.


    "What do you mean by how we are touring the city? Obviously, we are gonna tour the city by walking." Jeni answered him.


    Hearing her answer, Sam was shocked. He looked at them with a shocking expression. He never thought that they would want to tour the city by walking.


    Jeni and the others also notice his shocked expression. Unable to control herself, Jeni asked him,


    "Why are you shocked? Did I say something weird?" She asked him.


    " No¡­ haha nothing. It is just I never expected that you all would want to tour the city by walking. Because of this, I am surprised." Sam exined to them why he was surprised.


    " Hahaha," instantly everyone began tough.


    "Haha¡­ Why would you think something like that?" Whileughing, Kenny asked him.


    " Well!! How should I put it? Previously, I never saw Elenae to school walking. She always used a car when came to school or left school. So, from that I thought like her you''re also used to going everywhere. Also, I don''t think your family will allow you to walk in the street without any bodyguards." He told them the reason.


    " Hahaha," once again everyone began tough.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Haha¡­ Sam, I will need one hour to reach my home if I want to go home on walking. Because of this, I used to go to school." Whileughing, Elena said that.


    " Sam, the most important thing is who can do anything to us in the central city? I think you don''t know but here, in the central city, the security is very tight because of this. The crime rate in the city is very low." Tony said to him.


    " Ohh¡­ my bad, I didn''t know about this," Sam said to them. What can he say? Should he say that previously he wasn''t interested in the central city so he didn''t read the details of this city?


    ____________


    A few minutester,


    " Well, forget about it. Let''s start our tour," Tony said. Everyone nodded, hearing him.


    They start their tour.


    First, they go to the Hero za. It was like a museum. Here you can find the statue of many warriors. These warriors are the heroes who fight with the monster for humanity. You also see the achievements of the warrior, written beside the statues in a stone or something like that.


    He can see the statue of the 12 Sages/Saints. Someone also wrote about their achievements beside them. He also saw so many other warrior statues and their achievements. All of these warriors are the warriors who fight for humanity, even when their life is at risk. They are the great heroes of humanity.


    Sam was amazed after seeing the hero za. He previously saw pictures on the inte of this hero za. Now he was standing in the hero za. He has to say that the real thing is outstanding. One by one, Sam all saw the statues and also sometimes read the achievements.


    Sam was now standing in front of the saints'' statues. All 12 saints'' statues were here.


    Sam noticed two things.


    One, in the stone where the achievements of the saints were written, he noticed that in the achievements; the saints weren''t mentioned by their original names. They were mentioned here as the Nickname they got from the humans.


    Two, you won''t find simrities between many saints'' statues with their current figures. Because the saints were always busy with their work and they didn''t like to show themself in public. So, because of this, many people weren''t aware of the current figure of the saints.


    It took them some time to leave the hero za. Now they were going toward the "Tower of Beginning". When the humans were first able to defeat the monsters and were able to secure their home ground, they established this "Tower of Beginning".


    [A/N: This "Tower of Beginning" will be the same as the "Eiffel Tower". Hahaha.]


    The height of this tower is 500m. When Sam first saw the "Tower of Beginning" he felt that he was seeing the "Eiffel Tower". Because this "Tower of Beginning" is the same as the "Eiffel Tower". It is just that the "Tower of Beginning" is taller than the "Eiffel Tower".


    Sam and his friends went to the top floor of the tower. The view from there will make you blessed. You will think that you are in paradise.


    They took a group photo there and then left the tower. They also needed to go to many other ces.


    "Sam, this is the research center where the scientists from the association invent many things," Jeni said to him. They were now in front of the research center. They weren''t allowed to enter the research center, so they only saw the research center from the outside.


    "This is the headquarters of the warrior association, as you know." She said that. The headquarters of the warrior association wasn''t far away from the research center.


    "This is the central library. You will find everything here. This library has five floors. You can go to the ground floor and the first floor with no pass but if you want to go to the next 3 floors, you will need permission." Jeni said to him. Sam nodded after hearing. They weren''t interested in reading right now, so they saw the central library from outside and then left the area.


    They were currently on a public bus. They were going toward the Royal academy. 15 minutester, they get off the bus because they finally reach the Royal academy.


    "So, Sam, this is the Royal Academy," Kenny said to him. They were allowed to enter the college. So, with no dy, they enter college. They weren''t allowed to go inside the area of the college; they were only allowed to stay in the outside area of the college.


    ______________To be continued____________

 Chapter 129 129 - City Tour (2)

    "So, Sam, this is the Royal Academy," Kenny said to him. They could enter college. So, with no dy, they enter college. They weren''t allowed to go inside the area of the college; they could only stay in the outside area of the college.


    "Sam, your sister also read here. Why didn''t you evere to the central city?" Tony suddenly asked.


    "Actually, I don''t really like to travel that much," Sam replied to him with an awkward smile. Should he tell him that his rtionship with his sister wasn''t that good previously? And the main thing was that he wasn''t the original Sam.


    "Oh¡­ " Tony replied.


    "Why don''t you tell your sister that you are here?" Tina suddenly asked him.


    Sam shook his head and told them," She is now busy with her training because the annual collegepetition ising."


    " Oh yes, Ipletely forgot about that," Tina replied.


    " Ok let''s go guys. I am suddenly feeling thirsty." Alexa said to them. They all came out of the college campus and approached a cafe.


    "Six cold coffees, please," Tony said to the waiter. They sit down.


    " So, guys, which college do you want to go to?" Sam asked them.


    "Royal College," all of them said with no hesitation.


    " Oh.. guys, you answer that with no hesitation," Sam said to them with a speechless expression.


    "I am going to this college because it is near my home. Also, Miss Gloria is a student here. Because of this, I decided to join here." Jeni exins to him the reason. Tony, Kenny, Tina, and Alexa all nodded after hearing her. They also have the same reason to join here.


    "Well, I think Sam knows that my idol is Miss Gloria. She is the reason I wanted to join Royal College," Elena exined.


    At this time, the waiter came toward them with 6 cold coffees.


    While drinking, Tony suddenly asked Sam, " Previously, you said that you don''t have any friends in your school. But didn''t you have teammates when you entered the dungeons? Or do you go to the dungeons alone? "


    " Actually, you guessed it right. I actually don''t have any teammates. I always went to the dungeon alone." Sam answered him.


    " Guys, I have an interesting idea." Sam suddenly said to them.


    " What?" Everyone said that.


    "Only I have only known you for a few days. I don''t really know about you guys or your likes or dislikes. So why not introduce yourself with an interesting process? First, you should tell your name, then your aim, andst, your likes and dislikes." Sam suddenly remembered an interesting introduction process that he saw in an anime in his previous life.


    [A/N: I know you can already guess the Anime.]


    "Yes, quite an interesting process to introduce yourself," Alexa said.


    " So, who will be first to introduce?" Tony asked.


    " Don''t worry, I suggested this idea, so naturally I am going first," Sam said to them. Now everyone is looking at him.


    " Hello, my name is Sam. Currently, I have only one aim, which is to protect my family. Currently, I don''t have any other aim. I like many things, for example, food, cooking, reading interesting stories, training with my sister, etc. I hate many things, for example: traveling, working under someone, people backstabbing their friends, etc." Sam said to them.


    " So like this, you should also introduce yourself," he said to them.


    " Hello, my name is Tony. My goal is to be as powerful as my grandpa and then protect humanity. I like to talk with my grandpa, listen to his stories from the old days, sleep, etc. I hate those people who are abusing their power. The power they should use is to protect humanity. They are using it to harm other people." Tony said.


    " Hello, my name is Jeni. My goal is to be someone like my grandma. I like my grandma the most, and I like to spend time with my friends. I mainly hate when someone I don''t know tries to disturb me or when I see someone try to abuse their power," Jeni said.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Hello, my name is Elena. My goal is to be someone like Miss Gloria. I like to follow in Miss Gloria''s footsteps, then spend time together with my friends, cooking and singing. I hate the people who said something bad about Miss Gloria, also those people who have the power to help humans, but didn''t use that power to protect or help them." Elena said. What can you say? She is really a hard-core fan of Gloria.


    "Hello, my name is Alexa. My goal is to be the number one warrior. I like adventure, action, and spending time with my family and with my sister. I hate when my sister doesn''t stay at home or grandpa works all day." Alexa said. She was the girl who loved her sister.


    " Hello, my name is Kenny. My goal is to be an S-grade warrior. I like to spend my time with Jeni and my friends. I hate when someone says anything bad about my friends," Kenny simply introduced herself.


    "Hello, my name is Tina. My goal is to be someone like Saint Mira. My favorite thing is to follow in Miss Mira''s footsteps. I said when someone says anything bad about her or my friends." Tina said. Once again, a fangirl of Saint Mira.


    Finally, everyone stopped introducing themselves. They had already finished their coffee, so they left the cafe. They were currently going to theke vi. It is one thing that was from 100 years ago. Like this Lake vi, there are many buildings like this that were from a hundred years ago.


    A few minutester, they were now in front of the Lake vi. Nobody could enter this vi. So they can only see the vi from the outside. It is an exquisite vi with a beautifulke. In history, they read that this vi belonged to a princess 100 years ago.


    They were now going toward the clock tower. This clock tower was in the middle of the city. You can also go inside of this clock tower.


    All of them will be inside of this clock tower. You can go to the top of this clock tower, but you need to use the steps. Everyone began to climb. A few minutester, they were now at the top of this clock tower. This Clock Tower has the same height as a six-story building.


    A few minutester, they climb down. Sam was feeling hungry, so he told them to go to a restaurant.


    "Hey guys, let''s go to the Eon restaurant. This is a five-star restaurant that is owned by my uncle. My uncle was a B-grade warrior, but he has another hobby, cooking, so he opened this restaurant." Jeni said.


    Nobody said anything. They all agree to go to the restaurant.


    " Haha¡­ Jeni, your uncle should satisfy Sam''s appetite." Tony said,ughing. The others alsoughed.


    "Don''t worry about it," Jeni assured them.


    A few minutester, they were now in the restaurant. With no dy, they enter the restaurant. Jeni was the leader, and they were the followers.


    A waiter, after seeing that it was Jeni, led them toward a private room.


    "This was the room that was only for me and my friends," she says to everyone.


    After giving our food order, we began to wait. It took some time to prepare the food. We all begin to eat.


    30 minutester,


    If you look, then you can see the time is 6:00 p.m. Sam is now at his home. A few minutes ago, he came back and went directly to the bathroom to freshen up. He decided to take some rest. He wasn''t that tired, but he just wanted to take a rest.


    _______________________


    At this time, in the association,


    "How is the situation, our warriors?" Markus asked. He has already sent a team to attack the branch of the dark association. Still didn''t go there because the warrior can handle this alone. But he still was ready. What if suddenly a powerful enemy came toward the warriors? For this type of situation, he was ready to help. He wanted to finish this work as soon as he could.


    They get to know about three branches of this dark association. Markus already sent one team to attack one of the branches. His other two teams while going toward the other two branches of the dark association. They still hadn''t reached the base.


    In these branches, the most powerful warriors should be a peak B-grade warriors or an early A-grade warriors. Because of this, Markus was sure that the warriors from the association could easily handle the situation.


    The one Alpha team who already attacked the base. Everyone warriors carrying camera bots. So, Markus was able to see the fight. The most powerful warrior in this base is a peak B-grade warrior. An early A-grade warrior easily handles that guy.


    _____________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 130 130 - School.

    30th September, 3022, Base city, 8:00 a.m.


    Sam was now in the training room. The Neo-style sword technique is something he has already learned. The technique was being practiced by him. This technique was used to fight the robot. This technique was most suitable for surprise attacks. He thinks the saints thought he will be an assassin-type warrior, so they give him this technique.


    Many dayster he learned something new. So he wants to be familiar with this technique as soon as he can so that he can upgrade it.


    At 10:00 a.m., he stopped practicing. He was now panting heavily. He has to say, the power of this robot was great. This robot was really a great practice partner.


    He went to the bathroom and unequipped the training suit. After freshening up he left the training room wearing a normal dress.


    He came to the kitchen and started cooking. Victor and Hina weren''t at home. They went to the dungeon. So, Sam was alone in the house.


    After finishing eating, he was now in his room and rest. He was now thinking about his n. He needed to choose a college this October. Before he went to the college, he wanted to clear the 2 dungeons he wasn''t able to clear. The ghost dungeon and the New dungeon.


    He will go to the new dungeon tomorrow and after clearing it, he will go to the ghost dungeon. After finishing these two unfinished works, he will decide on his next n.


    Before going to the dungeon, he decided to upgrade his techniques. He doesn''t know how many techniques he will be able to upgrade. But he just hoped that he could at least upgrade 2 techniques.


    He looked at the status screen and upgraded his fast sword technique and stealth technique. He doesn''t know if he can upgrade his other technique, he just hoped he could upgrade this. He clicks the (+) button beside these two techniques.


    Status"


    "


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (71%)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade B) (00%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (93%)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Neo sword style (Grade D) (19%)(+)


    [Low-level sword style. Used by master Neo. He is also the person who created this technique.]


    Invisible shot (D-grade) (98%) (+)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (89%)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (95%) (+)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    Conceal technique:


    Stealth (grade B) (00%)


    [You can conceal your presence. Only warriors with higher grade observed technique can notice your presence.]


    Spirit concealment (grade C) (100%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique.] "


    Instantly, his Fast sword and stealth technique be B grade. He finally had two techniques that were B-grade techniques. He looked at his point, which shocked him.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 17+10


    Agility: 15+10


    Physique: 16+10


    Intelligent(mental power): 19+1


    Spirit: 09+5


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 95K. "<novelnext></novelnext>


    Previously, he had 295k upgrade points, but he has only 95k points. So, to upgrade these techniques, he needed 100k points. He can''t upgrade any other C-grade techniques with his 95k upgrade points. So, it was confirmed that he needed 100k points to upgrade any technique from C-grade to B-grade.


    "Sigh, poor me," he eximed. He needed to collect many points to upgrade all of his techniques.


    "Oh¡­ I also needed to go to school to collect the graduation certificate." He suddenly remembered that he needed to go to his school to collect the graduation certificate.


    "Sigh, well let''s go," he got up from his seat and went toward his room. After changing up, he was about to leave the room when suddenly his phone rang. He looked at the phone screen and see that it was Elena who was calling him.


    He previously give all of his friends his phone number and also their phone was in his phone contact. So naturally, Elena has his phone number.


    "Hello, Sam," she said.


    "Hello, Elena," Sam responded.


    " Are youing to school?" She asked.


    " Yes, I nearly forgot about this. Fortunately, I remember," he said to her.


    " Ok, meet you in the school," she said.


    "Hmm," he responded and hung up. He was really confused.


    ''Did she call him to only say this? Weird girl,'' he thought.


    "Well whatever," he shook his head and went toward the garage. Yes, you guessed it right, he didn''t want to go to school by waking so today he was taking his car to his. The previous year his dad gave him the car, but the previous Sam didn''t want to show off so he didn''t want to bring his car to school. But, everything was different. He wasn''t afraid of trouble and nobody would call him a loser.


    Sam starts his car and starts going toward his school. He will need 15v minutes if he goes at this speed. Well, also you need to consider the traffic.


    15 minutester,


    Sam was now in front of the school gate. The guard of the school, after seeing his car approaching the gate, opened it.


    "Thank you uncle," Sam thanked the guard. After that, he entered the school. He saw many students present on the school grounds. Today not only the students who were graduating from the school were present but also the junior year students also present here.


    Sam parks his car in the parking section and gets out of the car. Then he approached the school''s building.


    Suddenly students who were talking with each other stopped talking. All of them were looking in Sam''s direction. He was the person who was given the loser nickname by them and was now the person who got first ce in the college exam.


    Mainly, the students from Sam''s ss were looking downward. They didn''t have the courage to look at him directly.


    Sam did not mind any of them. He just minding his own business. Not that he was familiar with them. But he noticed one weird thing: that everyone was making a road for him. Sam smiled awkwardly. He never expected that he would get so popr that everyone would make a road for him.


    He sighed and, with no dy, advanced toward the teacher building. Actually, he wants to meet his ss teacher, Mr. Fin. Mr. Fin helped the previous Sam very much. So, he wanted to show his gratitude to his ss teacher.


    Many teachers and staff also noticed him. Sam also notices their weird behavior.


    Sam doesn''t know, but these teachers were having a mental fight. They don''t know how they should talk to Sam. Previously, they did not show any favorable behavior toward Sam and didn''t help him. Because of this, they were having this problem.


    Sam did not mind them, he just directly went to Mr. Fin''s office room. He knocks on the door.


    "Come in," he gets permission to enter.


    "Hello, Mr. Fin. How are you?" Sam enter the office room and saw that Mr. Fin was busy with paperwork. So he asked him.


    Hearing his voice, Mr. Fin got started and stopped doing his paperwork, and looked in Sam''s direction.


    "Ohh¡­ Sam, you are here. Haha¡­ I am fine. How are you?" After seeing that it was Sam, he got up from his seat and went toward Sam. He smiled happily and asked Sam this question.


    "I am fine Mr. Fin." Sam also happily answers him.


    Mr. Fin came toward Sam. Then he looked at him carefully and sometimes looked like this, he startedughing. He patted Sam''s shoulder.


    "Well done, boy. You make me proud. Hahaha... you should notice everyone''s face. No one ever thought that you could be first in the college exam. Well done boy," while patting on his solder Mr. Fin said to him. He was thrilled for him.


    " Mr. Fin, you don''t know, but I am very grateful to you. You are the only person who supported me in school. Many students or even many teachers sometimes called me a loser, then never thought I could do anything. But you are the only person who supported me in this entire School. Because of this, I am very grateful to you." Sam sincerely expresses his gratitude to his teacher.


    "Don''t worry about that, boy. I am just happy that you could achieve 1st ce in the college exam." Mr. Fin said to him.


    " Now, spend time with your friends. I think our principal will give some speech, then you will get your certificate." Mr. Fin said.


    " Hahaha... teacher you know me very well, and you should know that I don''t have any friends," Sam said to him.


    " I know you didn''t have any friends previously, but I saw on the tv that you and Elena are bing good friends. So, she should be your friend, right?" Mr. Fin said.


    " Haha¡­ you are the right teacher," Sam replied with a smile.


    " Now go,"


    " Ok, see youter, teacher,"


    After saying that, Sam left the office room. He was now searching for a less crowded ce.


    _____________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 131 131 - Graduation Ceremony

    " Ok, see youter, teacher,"


    After saying that, Sam left the office room. He was now searching for a less crowded ce. He knows the ce with less crowd. It was the rooftop of this school building. Today, most of the students were on the ground floor, so the rooftop should be less crowded.


    Sam doesn''t know when the principal will give his speech, so to pass his time, he approaches the rooftop. He can also wait on the ground like other students, but there he will feel ufortable.


    He saw how the other students were scared of him, so he wanted to avoid those students. It wasn''t like he had any friends.


    He approached the rooftop. As he guessed, the rooftop was empty. This was his favorite ce in school because from here he could see the full view of the school.


    Sam brought a chair from his inventory. If you are asking why he has a chair in his inventory? Then why not? He has an infinite inventory, and also a storage ring, so why not use them?


    Hefortably sits down and looks down. The yground was in front of this school building, and most of the students were in the yground. So, he can almost observe all the students from here.


    Sam didn''t have any work to do. So, he looked at all the students and their activities. He even has sunsses in his eyes and a popcorn cup in his hand. You can say he was enjoying this life. [A/N: Lol.]


    But suddenly his mobile phone rings. He unlocked his phone and saw that it was Elena calling him. He answers the call.


    "Hello,"


    "Sam, where are you? I cannot find you in the yground." She said,


    "Haha¡­ you don''t find me because I am not there. I am on the rooftop of the central building." Sam answered her.


    "What are you doing there?" She asked.


    "Nothing, just chilling," Sam answered.


    " So, what do you want?" He asked.


    "Hmm¡­ nothing. I thought you would be alone because you don''t have any friends in school," she said.


    " Don''t worry about me. I am enjoying my life. You should spend time with your friends." Sam said to her.


    " Hmph¡­ stop enjoying your life ande to the auditorium room. The principal will give his speech, then we will get our certificate." She said in an angry tone and Hugh up the call.


    ''what is her problem? Why the hell did this principal want to give a speech?'' Sam only sighs. He wanted to go home as soon as he could.


    After putting the chair in his inventory, he walked toward the stairs. He did not rush toward the auditorium room. Sam walked at his normal speed.


    He never interacted with this principle, or you can say the principal didn''t want to interact with him. Sam only saw this principle two times. First, when he was first admitted to the school and when his sister graduated from this school. This time also this principal gave a boring speech.


    But he was thinking of something interesting. When his sister bes the first in college exam, the principal gives a speech that how they all believed in her from the start, how they care for her, use their all resources to help her, etcetera. Now he wants to see what the principal will say about him. It will be quite interesting.


    We needed toe to the ground floor. He saw an empty yground. Almost all the students went to the auditorium room. So he was also now walking to the auditorium room.


    Suddenly, his phone rang. He saw it was his teacher Mr. Fin called him. He answered the call.


    "Hello, Sam, where are you?" Mr. Fin directly asked him.


    " I am currently going toward the auditorium room," Sam answered.


    " Quicklye. Everyone is waiting for you." He said that.


    " Ok," Sam answered and hung up the call.<novelnext></novelnext>


    '' Well, let''s speed up,'' now Mr. Fin asked to go there quickly, so he increased his walking speed.


    A few minutester,


    He was now in front of the auditorium room. He pushed open the door and entered the auditorium room. Instantly, he heard someone say,


    "Now wee our star, our school''s pride, Sam Kainer."


    Instantly, all the students, teachers, staff, and even some reports look in his direction. All of them start pping.


    "Sam, we would like you toe to the stage." It was a teacher who said that to him.


    Sam nodded and walked toward the stage. He can feel that everyone is looking at him. His ssmates, his juniors, and also his teachers of them looked at him. Sam can feel everyone looking at him.


    But Sam didn''t feel ufortable. He didn''t show any rashness in his behavior and calmly walked toward the stage. Sam can also see that Elena is already on the stage, waving her hand toward him.


    Sam nodded at her and walked toward her.


    "So, how are you feeling after getting so much attention?" Elena whispers to him when he stands beside her.


    "Umm¡­ nothing much. I don''t really care about this. Previously, when I was in school, nobody gave me any respect. Jealousy and hatred, two weremon that I got from them. They were jealous because my sister is Gloria and they hated me because even if Gloria is my sister, my potential is trash, so how could I be the brother of Gloria Kainer?"


    " And now when I somehow became the first position holder in the college exam, they were showing me respect. They are treating me like their idol. But inside they were asking themselves how trash became the first position holder?"


    " Suppose I lose my potential and my potential once again bes a mortal grade. Do you think then this all people still respect me or even helped me? No, they will literallyugh at me. Yes, some of them will show pity on me, but that''s all. In this world, this is the universal truth that if you have the strength, then you will be respected by everyone. By if you don''t have strength, then you will be aughingstock."


    " This is the reason I didn''t care about these people. These are the same people who previously mocked me and gave me the loser''s name. Now, these are the people who are showing respect to me."


    Sam said all of this to Elena through telekinesis. Elena, hearing all of this, bes silent. She knows that what Sam was saying was the truth in this world.


    They didn''t talk after that and silently listened to the teacher''s speech.


    "Well, as you know that our student Sam is the first position holder and student Elena is the fifth position holder. We are very fortunate that Sam and Elena belong to our Base school. It is really proud of our school. Now, everyone, our principal, Mr. Giri, wanted to present his speech. So everyone, please wee our principal, Mr. Giri." The teacher said and instantly, all the students began to p.


    A middle age man, age should be around 47 to 50, waking toward the mike. He has ck hair and his height should be around 5 foot 6 inches. The teacher gives the mike to the principal, Mr. Giri.


    Mr. Giri, after getting the mike, began to talk.


    "Wee everyone. First, I would like to thank all of you for attending today''s graduation ceremony. I know that many students are bing impatient because of thete. But this is our school''s rule that every year we organised a ceremony."


    "It is our good luck that this year we have students whose names are in the top 5 students. As you all know our student Sam got the first position and student Elena got the fifth position. It makes our school proud."


    " As you all know, before, our school wasn''t that famous, and we weren''t in the top three positions. But after student Gloria''s outstanding performance, our school became famous and be one of the top three schools."


    "Now this year, once again student Sam and student Elena''s outstanding performance, our school be once again famous. Currently, our school is in the third position, but I think after my student''s outstanding performance, our school will be the first."


    " Now I want to talk about these two students. Student Elena is a genius. The moment she entered our school, we predicted that she would be a great warrior, like a student, Gloria. She is a hardworking student. She didn''t waste her time like any other students."


    "Elena always prefers her training more important than anything. She is also the president of the elite ss. If you are thinking that anybody can be the President of the elite ss, then you are wrong. They need that qualification to be the President. From the first day, we know that she will do something that will make us proud, and as we expected, she really makes us proud. So everybody please pped for our student Elena," the said principal praised Elena. Everyone started to p for her.


    _____________To be continued____________

 Chapter 132 132 - Plan

    "Elena always prefers her training more important than anything. She is also the president of the elite ss. If you are thinking that anybody can be the President of the elite ss, then you are wrong. They need that qualification to be the President. From the first day, we know that she will do something that will make us proud, and as we expected, she really makes us proud. So everybody please p for our student Elena," the said principal praised Elena. Everyone started to p for her.


    A minuteter, when everyone stops pping, the principal once again begins to talk.


    "Now, I don''t think I need to tell anyone about student Sam Kainer''s achievement. He is the first position holder in the college exam. He is the pride of our school and our city."


    "As everyone knows, it isn''t easy to get a fast position. But student Sam makes that impossible, possible, like his sister. Student Sam never likes to show off his strength, because of this we never find out about his strength. He achieved that strength with his own hard work."


    " Actually, I should really apologize to student Sam because he never showed off his strength. We didn''t find out about it and we didn''t treat him properly. He got mocked by his own ssmates, and many teachers also mocked him. But student Sam didn''t mind any of their words and he just only focused on his training. Now you can see the result of his hard work. I think many students still think that students aren''t qualified to be first. For those students I want to tell you, student Sam is the most qualified student to get first ce, and I don''t think that everyone knows student Sam''s grade is early D-grade."


    " Haha¡­ Sanit Markus called me some time ago and told me his results. If you are thinking how did he fake his result before? Because he uses this concealment technique when checking his grade. Now, if you think that you can also do that, then you are most wee to try. You need excellent technique and excellent control over your technique. Many students can get powerful techniques but they mostly like the control over the technique. Now with this, you can guess how good a student Sam is. He achieved that with his hard work." With that finished his speech.


    Instantly, everyone began to p for Sam. Sam was surprised after hearing the speech. He never thought that the principal would admit that they didn''t treat him properly and apologize to him openly.


    "So everyone, now we are starting our ceremony." Principal Giri said that and gave the graduation certificate and gift box to Sam. Everyone began to p. After Sam, principal Giri gives the graduation certificate and a gift box to student Elena. At this time also began to p.


    After receiving the reward and graduation certificate, both Elena and Sam came down from the stage and searched for free seats. After finding a seat, they sit down. At this time principal, Giri gave certificates to other students who weren''t on the top 10 list but some of them on the top 20 or top 30 list. One by one, principal Giri rewarded them.


    An hourter, principal Giri finished rewarding the students. Finally, the graduation ceremony finished. Instantly, many reporters want to interview Sam. But when they tried to find him, they didn''t find him. Because Sam and Elena had already left the auditorium room.


    They were going to the parking section.


    "So, what is your next n?" Elena suddenly asked him.


    Sam got confused hearing her sudden question. He didn''t understand the question.


    " I mean, we have one month before college. So, did you have any ns for this one month?" She exined.


    " Oh, I am nning to go to the new dungeon and the ghost dungeon. Previously, I didn''t clear those dungeons. So, I want to clear those dungeons before doing anything." Sam said to her.


    " Which ghost dungeon?" She asked.


    "North City," I replied.


    " Ohh¡­ North City. I don''t think you will need much time to clear those dungeons with your speed," she said.


    " Hmm¡­ You are right, but. I almost cleared all the monsters previously in these two dungeons. Now, I only need to fight the boss of these two dungeons." Sam said to her.


    " Do you have any ns after you clear those two dungeons?" She asked him.


    " No," Sam shook his head. Currently, he doesn''t have any ns right now. He can ask his parents or sister to go with him to a dungeon where he will meet peak D-grade monsters. Now that everyone knows about his strength, so for him now he can use this situation to his advantage.


    He got in the limelight because of this dark warrior association. Because he was in the limelight, everyone talked about him. But how long? Everyone has an expiry date. If he didn''t stay in the limelight, then one day everyone will forget about him, and you can say he wanted that.


    "So, when will you start your adventure?" Elena asked.


    "Tomorrow I will go toward the new dungeon and after clearing it, I will go to the ghost dungeon." He replied. Now that the E-grade monster was useless to him, he won''t waste his time killing those monsters. He will directly go to the boss.


    "Then I think you will probably need 10 days to clear these two dungeons. After that, you would be free. Jeni and the others were now thinking about entering a Peak D-grade dungeon. So, I want to invite you. Probably, Jeni will call you to tell you about this." She exined.


    " Which dungeon?" He asked.


    " Oron city''s dungeon." She answers. Oron city was near the central city. You will only need to travel one hour to get there from the central city.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Oh, okay. Why not? I don''t have any ns after clearing the dungeons. So I am probably free at that time." Sam said to her.


    "Okay, great. Then I will inform Jeni and the others." She happily replied.


    Sam was now in front of his car and about to get in the car when suddenly she asked him.


    "Want to drink coffee? I know a great coffee shop that is not far from here."


    "Ummm...¡­ Sorry, but another time. I am pretty busy today." Sam said to her and got in his car. " Bye, see youter," after saying he left the school campus. He knows that it seems quite rude, but he still follows his policy. Try to maintain as much distance as you can from beautiful girls. Beautiful girls mean trouble. [A/N: Lol. She doesn''t know Sam''s policy.]


    Elena was currently staring at the school gate. She never thought Sam would reject her offer. It made her speechless.


    "Hmph... stupid guy." She murmured angrily.


    " Miss Elena, what are you doing here? We are finding you in the auditorium room." Suddenly he heard someone''s voice from her backside. She turned around and saw an old man wearing a butler suit. He was her grandfather''s butler, Zuben Carl. An A-grade warrior.


    "Nothing, just talking with a friend." She said to him,


    " Oh, is your friend a boy?" He asked him while they were going toward their car.


    " Hmm. I think you know him. He was Sam kainer." She says to her.


    " Oh, Sam kainer. The boy who got first ce this year. Gloria Kainer''s little brother." He eximed.


    " Hmm, him," she said.


    " Oh, nice. It is good, Miss Elena, that you had a boy friend," Zuben said. [A/N: Not boyfriend ok! It means a friend who is a boy.]


    "Hmph¡­ you are saying like this that I don''t have any friends?" She angrily asked.


    "I know that you have friends, but miss all your friends are girls. And it is also quite good that you are friends with him. Now you can meet his sister easily." He knows that Elena likes to follow in Gloria''s footsteps. She always wanted to talk to her. Now, she is friends with Sam, so can now freely meet her idol.


    ________________________


    Association headquarters,


    Markus was drinking coffee while looking at the report files. The warriors from the association sessfully destroy those branches of dark associations. They also capture many warriors years from the dark association. Before killing those dark association branches, the warriors from the warrior association collected all the files or any important thing they found there.


    As he expected, those branches did not have the location of the headquarters of the dark association. But he found out about the identity of many warriors from the dark association, who were hiding in the city. Now he gets to know their identity. So, he can capture them easily.


    He had already ordered some of his warriors to capture them. He wants to capture those warriors from the dark association because what if you know some important news or those warriors know about the location of the headquarters?


    ___________To be continued ________


    A/N :


    [#Hey guys, check out my new novel: Mystery solver]


    [ #Hey guys, check out my new novel: The Journey Of A Treasure Hunter. ]

 Chapter 133 133 - Once Again In The Dungeon

    1st October, Monday.


    Sam was now in a taxi. He was going toward the new dungeon. He has only one goal in his mind, this was to kill the boss. The boss should be an early D-grade monster. Because of this, he did not have that much tension.


    Half an hourter,


    Sam got off the taxi, and he was going in the dungeon''s direction. He was wearing his new Armor. Now everyone knows about him so he did not want to hide. Because of this, he wasn''t wearing his mask. But already activated hisplement technique. Because of this, nobody could sense his presence.


    Sam quickly enters the dungeon. If his guess was right, then he will need two days to reach thest floor, which means the boss''s room.


    So, wasting no time, he went to the right tunnel. He did not want to waste his time going in another direction. So he went directly into the right tunnel. He did not deactivate his consignment technique. So nobody noticed him and the same passed through them quite easily.


    When he came to the open ground, he saw many warriors with their teammates going deep into the forest. Many of them are alsoing toward the tunnel.


    4 hourster,


    Sam was now not far away from the second floor''s entrance. He decided to eat some food before going to the second floor. He found a good ce and sat down there. Then he starts eating his food.


    While he was eating, he noticed a group of warriors. He became interested in these warriors after seeing their perfect teamwork. Two closebat fighters were in the front, two spell casters were not far away from them, and one archer was on everyone''s back. Sam saw with his spiritual vision that the archer was hiding in an enormous tree. He was helping his teammates from the tree.


    They were fighting with 5 moon wolves. Those two closebat fighters were fighting with those wolves while preventing them froming toward their other teammates. Those two spiritual warriors attacking those wolves.


    A few minutester,


    They could already kill three wolves. Now only two wolves were left. It did not take that much time to finish the two remaining wolves.


    "Nice work," all the warriors high five. They have cheerful smiles on their faces. Sam also smiles after seeing this. Well, he got up from the ground and once again began to approach the entrance.


    Like on the first floor, he noticed many warriors when he entered the second floor. He did not mind any of them and advanced toward the next floor entrance. The boss will meet him on the fourth floor.


    2 dayster,


    Sam was now on thest floor. He was resting and eating some food. On this floor, he notices only peak E-grade monsters. This floor also was a forest. He thinks that if he will go toward the center, then he will meet the boss. He also saw many warriors on this floor. Like him, they also came here to kill the boss.


    But Sam can''t find any D-grade warriors among them. Well, it is normal because no D-grade warrior wants toe to this dungeon where they will only find one early D-grade monster.


    But it was like he wouldn''t feel rxed until he killed the boss of this dungeon. Because of this, he came here, and next, he will go to the ghost dungeon.


    After finishing his food, he now once again advanced toward the center of this forest, where he will meet the boss. These E-grade monsters were the subordinate of this boss.


    A few minutester, when he was advancing toward the center, he suddenly heard a monster''s angry roar. Wasting no time, he quickly went in that direction.


    It did not take him that much time when he finally found the source of this roar. Yes, you can guess it was the Boss monster''s roar. He not only saw the Boss monster but also saw many E-grade monsters, at least 20 E-grade monsters. 10 warriors were fighting with them. 4 peak E-grade? warriors and 6 intermediate E-grade warriors.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Just looking at them, you can tell that they were exhausted. It looked like they were fighting these monsters for some time. Because of this, they were tired.


    For some time, Sam decided not to interfere with their fight. Because even though warriors were exhausted, all these warriors didn''t give up. They still have the will to fight those monsters.


    Sam became quite interested. He was already using his concealment technique and advancing toward the boss. His concealment was so strong that those monsters didn''t notice him.


    Sam decides not to interfere with their fight. But that doesn''t mean he won''t kill the boss. [A/N: Haha¡­]


    Among those 4 peak E-grade warriors, 2 of them were swordsmen and the others 2 were spiritual warriors. One was using wind control and the other one used the earth control technique.


    Those monsters surrounded them from every direction. These 4 warriors were feeling heavy pressure right now. They underestimate the Boss monster. They thought they would meet the boss alone. But they never expected that this boss monster would kill these monsters. The boss monsters are now looking toward these warriors with a look of superiority. It was like he was the king and he was now watching some ants.


    Those intermediate warriors were having a very hard time killing those peak E-grade monsters. At first, the Boss monster only has 10 monsters, but then he has more monsters. Because of this, they were having a hard time. They don''t know how long they will be able to hold on.


    All the warriors fighting those monsters while making a circle pattern. Middle of these circles were the light element users who continuously healed their teammates. 3 warriors were in the center of the circle. So, obviously, these 3 warriors were light element users.


    "Zen, how long can we hold on like this?" One warrior swings his sword toward a moon wolf while the wolf is about to bite him. He sent the wolves flying while the warrior asked another warrior who was beside him.


    "Don''t know man, I don''t know how long we will be able to hold on." The warrior named Zen said to him. Looking at the situation, he doesn''t know how long they can still hold on.


    Those 4 warriors could kill 5 moon wolves, but 3 of their teammates got injured. Now they were bleeding from their hands. Most likely, they won''t be able to fight. Now you can say the pressure has doubled. Two healers were continuously trying to heal the wounds of these 3 warriors. They were out of health potion because of this. They were in the most dangerous situation.


    Those two spiritual warriors are also able to kill 3 monsters. They were to cast the spell as quickly as they could. Because they know that if they dy their life, they can be in danger. But even though they tried to cast quickly, those monsters were faster than them so many times they got attacked by those monsters. Fortunately, their teammates were there to help. All people know that not every spiritual warrior was good at closebat. They were bleeding from their hands. But fortunately, those healers were healing their injuries.


    Now all the spiritual warriors were mentally exhausted, whereas those physics warriors were physically tired.


    "Ahhh!!!!" Suddenly once again one of their teammates got injured heavily. Fortunately, the healers were there. They heal those warriors. But, the question is long, can they heal their teammates? They were continuously using healing. So they will not have that spiritual energy and they will be mentally tired.


    "I think this is ourst day, guys. Sorry about it. All because of me, you all were in danger." One person said. By looking at him, you can see that he was the leader of this group.


    "Don''t feel guilty, leader. We were also, that time shows interest, because of this we are here. Even if we are killed by this monster, we won''t me you," one warrior said to their group''s leader.


    Sam, all this looking at those warriors while he was standing beside the boss. Now you can imagine how amazing his concealment technique is. Even when he was standing beside the monster, they could not find his presence. Only those monsters who had good sense or the monsters who were high-grade monsters could detect him.


    Some all this time finally looking at those warriors. Now he can see that those warriors were on the verge of losing the battle. So he decided to help them. He won''t be killing all the monsters, but you will kill some of them, which will decrease the pressure on the warriors.


    He brings out his Night. His beautiful partner. To kill those moon wolves, he didn''t need spiritual arrows. He can easily kill them using the normal arrow.


    ___________To be continued _____________

 Chapter 134 134 - Power Of The Mega Fireball

    He brings out his Night. His beautiful partner. To kill those moon wolves, he didn''t need spiritual arrows. He can easily kill them using a normal arrow.


    With no dy, he shoots five arrows using the rapid shot. Five arrows with an insane speed going toward those monsters. But those monsters didn''t even notice it. Those monsters didn''t even get the chance to react, and those arrows priced through their heads.


    Those remaining 6 monsters and those warriors for a second stop moving. They stood still in their ce and looked toward those fallen monsters. For a second nobody understands what was happening?


    Those 4 warriors quickly came back to their senses. They understand the situation quickly. Someone was helping them. This was the chance to finish those monsters. Those other warriors also came back to their senses.


    "Quick everyone, this is our chance to finish these monsters," the leader of this group said to his teammates.


    At that time, those monsters also came back to their senses. They understand that someone killed their teammates.


    "Aw!!!" Instantly all 6 remaining wolves howl angrily. These warriors were killing their teammates, they needed to take revenge on their teammates.


    They all jump toward those warriors. But all the warriors are also ready to kill those wolves. The moment those wolves were ready to jump at them, they also attacked those wolves.


    Now the situation was different. It did not take that much time for those warriors to kill the six remaining wolves. After killing those five wolves, Sam did not take any further action. He knows that now those warriors will be able to handle the remaining monsters.


    The boss of this dungeon was a big silver-colored wolf. At first, he did not take any action, but suddenly he noticed that someone helped those warriors, and now the situation was different. Now those wolves were on the losing side.


    For the first time, the boss takes action. Unaware of those warriors and wolves, the boss began to prepare his attack. It did not take that much time. He had already finished preparing his attack, and he was ready to attack those warriors.


    Just as he was about to attack them, he felt that someone was near him and about to attack him. He quickly canceled the attack and evaded the attack from the unknown enemy.


    "A!!!!!!" He howled angrily. Who the hell attacked him with this cowardly method? He couldn''t see the enemy, but his senses told him about the danger. He was examining his surroundings. But suddenly, out of nowhere, he saw a human appearance. The human was looking at him.


    Actually, Sam was feeling headaches from using his concealment technique for a long time. After upgrading his potential and grade, He can now use the concealment technique with no problem for 8 hours. But after 8 hours, if he still continues using the concealment he will get a headache. This was the reason for his headache. Now he needed to take some rest until his headache was gone. Only then can he use this concealment technique again.


    "Well, sigh. I really forget about this while watching those warriors fight. I can easily finish this, boss." He sighs and thinks about all of this. He knows that it was his fault. Now he can''t do anything about it. So, he brings out his yer.


    As you guess, he already activated his energy control and instantly he coated the sword with his spiritual energy.


    The moment he activated his energy control, the wolf was able to feel his aura. The wolf understood that he was facing a powerful enemy. This human was very powerfulpared to those humans.


    Sam was ready to attack the wolf, but the wolf''s action surprised him. This wolf didn''t attack him when he saw him. That means this wolf wasn''t a mindless beast. He was quite smart. Because Sam can tell that the wolf was right now observing him. So, Sam also didn''t attack the wolf. He was also observing Wolf''s actions. Like this, a human and a Wolf were observing each other. Nobody made their first move. They were waiting for the other party to make the first move.


    Add this time, those warriors have already killed all the monsters. After killing thest monster, they sigh. Some of them also sat down on the ground. You can easily tell that they forget about the boss. After finishing those monsters, they be very exhausted that some of them could not stand.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Guys!!!!!!! Look," suddenly one warrior screamed and pointed his finger in a direction. The other got startled after hearing his scream. They quickly looked in the direction that the warrior was pointing.


    They saw a man and a wolf looking at each other. No one moves from his ce. Everyone stands still. Finally, those warriors remembered the wolf. Immediately, they were drenched in sweat. How can they forget such a big thing? What would have happened to them if the wolf had attacked them? They are lucky that Sam was there. He interfered. Because of this, they were still alive.


    "Guys, why don''t I feel like I have seen that warrior?" Suddenly, one warrior asked his teammates.


    "Sam''s here. I also feel the same." Another warrior said that. The other nodded. Actually, Sam and the wolf were quite far away from those warriors, and because of this, those warriors could not see his face clearly. They clearly understood that he was the person who helped them some time ago. They did nothing and silently looked in Sam''s direction.


    When Sam and the wolf were observing each other, Sam didn''t let the chance go to waste. He had already taken one of his hands back so that he could cast a spell. He was all this time casting the mega fireball. The monster wasn''t able to feel that; he was just observing him.


    "A!!!!!!!" Suddenly he howled and began to shine. Seeing this, Sam got startled. Why suddenly does the wolf begin to shine? It only happens when the moon rises in the sky. Then why is it happening right now? Only then did he notice the moon in the sky. Only then did he understand.


    "No, I can''t wait like this. I can''t let that wolf absorb the moon essence from the moon and increase his power. I need to finish him," Fortunately, no one disturbs him. In just a few seconds, he can attack the wolf with the mega fireball.


    Those warriors, at this moment, looked in Sam''s direction with a worried look. They are all praying that the warrior quickly makes his move and finishes the monsters. They also understand seeing after the wolf suddenly shines. The wolf was collecting the moon essence from the moon and he was getting stronger.


    In this intense situation, Sam could finally finish casting the mega fireball. Wasting no time, he threw the fireball toward the wolf and escaped from that ce. He knows the impact of this mega fireball. That blue fireball, with an intense speed, hit the wolf. The wolf didn''t even get the chance to react. He only saw a blue light hit him.


    In the next moment, destruction urred. The wolf and the area around the wolf were destroyed. Everyone''s vision got blocked by the dust, that was like a cover blocking everyone''s vision. Nobody was able to tell what was happening, but they knew that a tremendous explosion urred in the area where the wolf was.


    This was the effect of the great fireball. The moment it touches the enemy, it will release its destructive power fully and, like a nuke missile or any other powerful missile, it will explode. A massive explosion urs.


    Sam was already quite far away from the explosion area. He already knows the danger of his attack. Because of this, the moment he throws the mega firewall toward the wolf and he escapes from there.


    He was trying to see what happened to the wolf, using his spiritual vision, but even his spiritual vision got blocked by the dust. He needed to wait for the dust to be clear. Only then he could know what had happened to the wolf.


    Sam began to wait like those warriors. He can still feel the intense power of this mega fireball. It takes some minutes for the area to be clear. Only then he can finally see.


    He once again uses his foot technique with his maximum speed and an inhuman speed he came to the area where the wolf was standing before. Previously, this area was filled with trees and the ground was t ground. But, now he can''t see any trees and a big hole in the ground. He doesn''t need to guess. This all happened because of the mega fireball. Sam got sure that the wolf was dead.


    _______________To be continued____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, I hoped you like this chapter. As well, don''t forget to join my discord.]

 Chapter 135 135 - New Technique And Second Exam.

    He once again uses his foot technique with his maximum speed and an inhuman speed he came to the area where the wolf was standing before. Previously, this area was filled with trees and the ground was t ground. But, now he can''t see any trees and a big hole in the ground. He doesn''t need to guess. This all happened because of the mega fireball. Sam got sure that the wolf was dead.


    He turned around and looked in those warriors'' direction. He saw those warriors looking at him with a shocking expression. They were shocked after seeing the power of the mega fireball.


    Sam didn''t mind them and looked at the destructive ground. He was looking for the loot. After looking for some time, he finally found the loot. He found a technique book, 10 crystals, and some materials. He quickly collected them and left the ce. Because he felt those warriors were approaching his direction.


    Even for some time, he can''t activate this concealment technique, but with his speed, vanish from that ce. Those warriors who wanted to meet him were now only looking at the empty ce. They only saw the person who helped them suddenly vanish from his ce.


    ________________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam already left the fourth floor, and now he was on the third floor. He was looking for a ce to rest. He needed some rest to recover from the headache. He came to the ce where he previously rested.


    He doesn''t know what technique he got, but he can see it now. So, with no dy, he brings out the book.


    " The power of the moon. (Grade: F)


    [This technique will increase your power in the moon''s presence. It is a passive technique that will work automatically.] "


    After reading the description of the technique, he became thrilled. Even though this technique was only an F-grade technique, that wasn''t a problem for him. If instead of it were any other person, they will immediately be sad when they get to know about the technique. Well, he also didn''t think that he would only get a grade F technique. But he wasn''t sad about it.


    As you know, humans weren''t able to absorb the moon essence directly, they can only absorb those moon essence with the help of this type of technique.


    Well, with no dy, he learned the technique. Now, it was nighttime. He could easily use the technique right now. Just the moment he learned the technique, he was feeling that the temperature of his body decreased, but he wasn''t feeling any cold or ufortable.


    He quickly opened his status to check his status.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 17+10+5


    Agility: 15+10+5


    Physique: 16+10


    Intelligent(mental power): 19+1


    Spirit: 09+5+5


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 95600


    It surprised him after seeing the increase in his Status Points. His strength, agility, and spirit increased by 5 points. He also got 800 points after killing the early E-grade boss. His 100 points got debited by the system when he learned the technique and 100 points got debited when he learned the new sword technique.


    He closed the status window, brought out his food from the inventory, and started eating.


    _________


    2 dayster,


    He finally left the dungeon. This time, he did not kill those E-grade monsters, so he did not have any loot to sell. At night, he exits the dungeon. First, he went to the public bathroom to freshen up. After freshening up, he went to the restaurant to eat food.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam knows that if he went like this with no mask, many people will notice him. He didn''t want that. So, he wore his mask and went to the restaurant he was most familiar with.


    Previously, whenever he came to this dungeon, he went to this restaurant, so you can say that he became familiar with this restaurant and the restaurant. The restaurant''s owner was an old man, and Sam was familiar with this old man.


    "Hello, grandpa. How are you?" After entering the restaurant, he saw the old man sitting at a table. So, I went toward him and asked him. This was a small restaurant, so you can''t find that many customers here, which was perfect for Sam. He doesn''t like that crowd.


    "Oh, Son you are here. I am fine. How are you?" The old man asked. His name was Kevin Gion. The owner of this small restaurant.


    "Oh, I am also a fine grandpa." After saying that, he sits down. Kevin was the head chef, and he had 2 waiters to help him. Because many warriors weren''ting right now, all of them were resting.


    "What do you like to have?" The old man asked.


    " Like usual, but increase the amount," San said to him whileughing.


    " Hahaha¡­ wait for some time, I need to prepare your food." With that said, Kevin got up from his seat and went towards the kitchen whileughing. Sam also smiles at seeing the old man.


    Until the old man came back, Sam decided to watch the news. The headline on the news was about the college exam. The warrior association already released the date of the second exam. It will be held in the central city. 16th October was the date. This second was for those students who previously got eliminated because of the dark association''s interference. It still wasn''t sure where the association would hold the exam, but this time the association promised all the people that they would check the ce more carefully so another incident would happen.


    While Sam was watching the news, one waiter approached him with the food.


    "Sir, enjoy. Chef Kevin is still making your food, so he sent you this to start eating." The waiter said. Sam, hearing him, nodded at him and said thank you.


    He started eating. Because there weren''t that many people, it created a rxed atmosphere. Sam was enjoying the atmosphere.


    "We also ask most of the students about their choice. Most of them wanted to go to the Royal academy. Well, you can say that because it was because of the influence of Gloria kainer. But that doesn''t mean no student wanted to go to the White tiger and the Golden dawn. We are just unaware of the choice of this year''s 1st position holder Sam kainer. He was the only person that didn''t tell anyone about his choice."


    " Now, many people have the question: will he go to the Royal academy because his sister was there and his friends were also there or will he be choosing another academy? This was the question people are having right now." The news reporter was saying. He was telling many more things when suddenly Sam heard someone calling him. He turned his head and saw it was old man Kevin, who was calling him.


    "Haha¡­ son you are very busy listening to the news that you didn''t even hear my voice. I am asking you how the test was? But seeing you looking at the news, I can tell you are interested in this. Did you take part in the exam this year?" The old manughing said to him, then he asked the question.


    " As I said before, it was wonderful. I didn''t even know how you make this delicious food? Yes, I will also give the college exam." Sam calmly answers him.


    " Hahaha¡­ hearing praise from a food lover like you really makes me feel wonderful." Hearing the first statement, the old manughed and said,


    " Oh, good, good. How did it go?" He asked.


    " Nothing much, just got a passing score." Sam casually answered him.


    For a second, the old man stare at Sam and told him while patting his shoulder.


    " Don''t worry, you will also be a wonderful warrior. Don''t think that I was joking. I am really telling you the truth. Because when I first saw you, I got this feeling. Let me tell you something, my feelings about this type of matter never be wrong." The Old man said to me.


    Sam didn''t talk, just smiled hearing the old man''s words.


    "Speaking of the exam, did you meet Sam Kainer?" Same got startled suddenly hearing this question from the old man. But he quickly calmed down and said,


    "Yes, Previously I saw Sam Kainer once before the unfortunate incident happened." He gave him the wrong answer. Actually, he prepared me for this type of question.


    "Oh, nice, nice. He was really an outstanding warrior. I saw him on TV when he was fighting those monsters and the enemies. He really was good at leading his team and thinking calmly, even when facing very dangerous situations. Previously Gloria and now Sam, both of them, really make Base city proud." The old man was saying. I don''t even know how I should react. Should I tell him about my identity? But that can bring trouble?


    ___________To be continued__________


    [A/N: Well guys, I need your suggestion. What college should I choose?"]

 Chapter 136 136 - 4th Floor Of The Ghost Dungeon

    "Oh, nice, nice. He was really an outstanding warrior. I saw him on TV when he was fighting those monsters and the enemies. He really was good at leading his team and thinking calmly, even when facing very dangerous situations. Previously Gloria and now Sam, both of them, really make the Base city proud." The old man was saying. I don''t even know how I should react. Should I tell him about my identity? But that can bring trouble?


    __________________________


    2 dayster,


    Sam was now getting ready to leave the house. He was going to the North City. After 2 days'' full rest, he once again became fully active. Now it was time to go.


    He can use his car to go to the North City but then it will take time to reach the north city and he didn''t want to drive a car that long. Because he was going toward the train station.


    ______________


    It takes 12 hours to reach the north city. After reaching the birth city. He went outside of the train station and then got in a taxi that would take him toward his hotel. He had already booked a hotel.


    Sam can directly go to the dungeon, but he didn''t want to do that. He will rest for a while, then he will go toward the dungeon.


    4hourter, at 5:00 p.m.,


    Sam was now going towards the dungeon. It didn''t matter when he entered the dungeon. He will only find the night inside of the dungeon.


    When he reached the dungeon, he got out of the taxi and started walking toward the dungeon. Now, this time he was wearing a mask, so nobody recognises him. If you are asking why he is wearing a mask? Then because like previously, he didn''t want to use his concealment technique that long. Because of this, he was wearing a mask.


    Sam can see many warriors in that area. Some of them also like him going towards the dungeon, some of theming back from the dungeon, and many more. He also saw guides from the association standing beside the dungeon entrance. Many warriors, before entering the dungeon, like to hear the instructions from the guide. Well, Sam already previously talked to a guide, so now he doesn''t need to.


    He was going towards the dungeon when he heard something. A guide was talking about the boss. What happened to the boss? Unable to control his curiosity, he went toward the guide. The guide was talking with a team. Sam didn''t go that close to the guide, he can hear from this distance.


    " Recently, many warriors said that they fight two bosses. Yes, you heard it right, those numbers of bosses increased. Previously, it was only a ck dog but, this time it was a ck Humanoid ghost. As we know, the more they be powerful, the more they keep changing color. The ck dog is only an early D-grade monster, but some said that this new boss has some red marks on his body. That means this new boss was much stronger than the ck dog. So, you all should be careful. Not to fight carelessly with the boss."


    Sam left the ce. The guide was still talking to those warriors, but Sam wasn''t interested in them. He left as he got to know what he wanted to know.


    " Now, this is interesting. A new boss alongside the ck dog." Sam murmured,


    This new boss was a Humanoid monster, and he also has red marks on his body. That means when he has enough energy, he can evolve into the red ghost. These red ghosts were more powerful than the ck ghosts. The ghost''s possession of power also increased. The power of the dark ball also increased.


    Sam, with no dy, enters the dungeon. Wee to the ghost dungeon. Well, it doesn''t matter to him. He speeded up. This dungeon also has the 4th floor and he will meet the bosses on this 4th floor.


    5 hourster he had already entered the 2nd floor. He was now resting. He is also feeling hungry. So, with no dy, he found a ce to sit and then bring outs his food to eat. If you are thinking about the monsters, then those monsters won''t be going near him. He kept releasing his aura. So, no monster approaches him.


    Well, when he previously came to the dungeon, he wanted to fight as many as he could, but he only wanted to fight the boss and didn''t want to waste his time with another monster.


    A few minutester, he once again started his journey. He saw many warriors, and also monsters, but he just avoided them and advanced. If he keeps going like this, then it will take him 2 days to reach the 4th floor.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Sigh, when will the association be able to develop the teleporting device? It would be really helpful if I went directly to the 4th floor." With a sigh, Sam thought.


    2 dayster,


    He is finally on the 4th floor. Previously, he didn''te to this floor. The floor was looking like a big room made of rocks. He also sees a second door inside this room. In that room, I didn''t see any monsters. That means all the monsters will be inside this second door.


    Seeing no monster, he decided to eat something and then enter the second door. Also, one thing that is interesting is that he didn''t see any warriors in this room. Why is that? He doesn''t know. He can ask his sisterter.


    Finishing his food, he went toward the second door and opened it. The moment he opened it, he saw a dark alley without any light. But it doesn''t matter to him. With his spirit vision, he can also see in the dark. Really good things.


    He also activated his concealment technique. He didn''t want to fight with those unnecessary things. So, in the dark, he kept advancing. After 30 minutester, he finally can see a light source. With no dy, he quickly went toward the light.


    Sometimeter, he noticed that he was outside of the alleyway and he could finally see the light source. It was a huge door. This big door has a skeleton drawing, and beside the door, you can see two fire torches.


    When he looks at the door, he hears some sound. It came from the direction he came from. But, surprisingly, he was there a few minutes ago, but he didn''t hear any sound in the alleyway. But just leaving the alleyway, he heard a voice. Hearing the sound, you can tell it was warriors fighting with monsters wholeing in his direction.


    Well, he didn''t want to wait for anyone. So, with no dy, he pushed the door and opened it. He can see the inside of this door. It was also a room, but he couldn''t see any monsters.


    "Quite interesting things," Sam said and once again activated his concealment technique. He has the feeling that this was a trap by those monsters. So what if those monsters think they were smart? Then Sam is over smart.


    Well, keep aside jokes. He entered the room and still didn''t see anyone. But he had the feeling the moment he deactivated his techniques, he would see those monsters. The most surprising thing was that he never heard about this. This was probably because of this new monster.


    "Sigh, I should listen to the guide. Why did I leave early?" He thought.


    " If this continues like this, I will only waste my time." He thought and deactivated his concealment technique. Instantly, he began to hear sounds in the silent room.


    A minuteter, he notices monsters. A lot of monsters. He finally sees the monsters. They all were in peak E-grade. There were many monstersing toward him. Anybody can be scared seeing the number. But our Sam wasn''t.


    He brings out his yer and activates his energy mode. It was time to use his newly upgraded Fast sword technique. This was the right time to use this.


    Ghost humans and ghost dogs wereing toward him, but why can''t he see the bosses? Are they still hiding and waiting to attack him from his back?


    Sam stopped thinking about other stuff and began to find the ghost monsters. He swung his sword towards the monsters. This instantly created a sword sh that went towards the monsters and hit them. Instantly, 10 monsters died.


    "It is gonna be an interesting fight," Sam smiles and once again runs toward the monsters. Right, left, and on his back, he keeps swinging his sword. Every time he swung his sword, some monsters died. Like this, he began to fight with those monsters.


    Now, probably only 30 monsters remain. 80 monsters attacked him previously, but now only 30 left. Sam, who was fighting with them, suddenly felt danger from his back. He instantly twisted around and avoided the iing attack. It was a dark ball that someone shot toward him.


    ________________To be continued_______________

 Chapter 137 137 - Run

    Now, probably only 30 monsters remain. 80 monsters attacked him previously, but now only 30 left. Sam, who was fighting with them, suddenly felt danger from his back. He instantly twisted around and avoided the iing attack. It was a dark ball that someone shot toward him.


    Sam jumped from that ce. He saw two figuresing in his direction. One human figure and the other one dog.


    "So, finally, the bosses arrive." Sam thought. Now, this is getting tough for him. He was powerful, but he was just the only person. 80 peak E-grade monsters and 2 early D-grade monsters, fighting with this many monsters, really makes you tired. He needs to recover his full energy, only then he can once again fight with them.


    Sam looks at the peak E-grade monsters and the early D-grade monsters that wereing toward him. He didn''t dy and activate his concealment technique. Instantly, he vanished from his ce and those monsters instantly listed their target.


    "Roar!!!!!!" Those two monster boys suddenly roar angrily. They thought they could easily capture Sam, but who knows, this could happen.


    ________________________


    "I never thought that this could happen. Sigh," Sam murmured. He was now hiding behind a big pir of the room. Those monsters were in the opposite direction, so no one noticed him. He saw how those two boss monsters were roaring angrily.


    "Did the warrior association know about this? I don''t think so? Only one month ago, this was a normal dungeon. Big, in just one month, it changed suddenly. I can''t even imagine how many warriors died by these boss monsters'' hands." He thought. He already circted his energy recovery technique and also brought out healing potions and spiritual energy potions.


    He wanted to recover his Power as much as he could. If his guess was right, one more warrior''s team ising toward this room. Previously, when he was outside, he heard the voice of those warriors.


    Those monsters were searching for him in the room. Previously, he tried to open the big gate to go outside but was unable to open the big gate. So, until he defeats the enemy, he can''t go outside. Many times monsters came close to his ce to search for him, but after not finding anything he left, they left the ce.


    6 minutester,


    After not finding Sam, they suddenly went somewhere. Sam didn''t know what happened, but they quickly went somewhere. He almost recovered his 90% strength. Just a little more, then he will fully recover.


    But, at this moment, he suddenly heard a sound on the door. Someone opened the door from the outside. Sam quickly gets up from the ground. He knew he needed to stop those warriors.


    He quickly discovered his concealment technique. At this moment, the gate was fully opened. Sam, instantly using his light walk technique, approached them. He can see that it was a big team.


    5 warriors entered the room and 10 warriors were outside. They are also about to enter. At this moment, he suddenly appeared in front of them.


    "Guys, leave this room." He instantly warned them.


    Seeing that someone suddenly appears in front of them makes all that warrior alert. They all were in the fighting position and pointing their weapons toward Sam.


    "Who are you? How did you suddenly appear here?" One person suddenly asked him.


    Sam looked at the person. Looking like this person was the leader.


    " Look, I don''t have time to waste. This room is trapped. Those monsters set up this trap. I just came here to warn you all. Don''t enter the room. You can only open the door from outside, but if you all went inside, then you can''t open the door." Sam instantly said them.


    " Like, we would believe you. To me, you are the most suspicious person. Guys, I think he found something in the room and didn''t want to share it with anyone. Now, we are here. He wanted to scare us and then collect all the good loot alone." One warrior said to him and sneered at him.


    Sam rolled his eyes to the other side. Here he wanted to warn them and they thought he wanted to hide something. Can''t they see the situation?


    "Well, I don''t have time to waste. I don''t want to talk with idiot people." With that said, Sam went outside.


    All the warriors were now looking at him.


    " Guys, should we believe him?" Suddenly one person asked the others. They all looked at each other, then the person who previously sneered at Sam said, "Nah... I have seen this type of person many times. They wanted to scare you so that you would leave the floor. So, that only he can enjoy the profit."


    " But he himself went out." Another warrior said.


    " Well, it''s probably for show. If he stays here, then we won''t believe him. So, to show that he was talking the truth, he left like this. I also think he was probably telling us lies." The person once again said with a sneer.


    " Mike, what should we do?" Someone asked Mike. Mike was their leader. He was looking in Sam''s direction all this time.


    "Let''s go," he said nothing, just pointing his finger toward the dungeon with attitude. It became clear to everyone that he wanted everyone to enter the room. He didn''t care about Sam''s words. They all enter the room.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _________________


    5 minutester,


    Sam finally recovers his full strength. He was not far away from the room. He can see that those warriors didn''t care about his warning and went inside this room.


    "Sigh, this much tension." He was now worried about those warriors.


    ____________________


    Inside the dungeon,


    In these 10 minutes, many things happened. As Sam previously faced, those warriors also were facing those monsters. They thought about their attitudes before. That warrior tried to warn them but they just didn''t listen.


    5 minutes earlier,


    "Huh? Where are the monsters? See there are many loots. I think these are the loot that the liar wanted to collect, but because we came here, he didn''t get the chance." The person said mockingly.


    " We can collect the lootter. Search for those monsters." Their leader, Mike, said. He also can see the loot, but he can''t see any monsters.


    All the warriors started to find those monsters, but even after finding this many times, they didn''t find anything.


    "Mike, did you think that the warrior from before had already finished all the monsters?" Someone asked Mike.


    " No, I don''t think so. Those types of people never had the courage to fight. I know this type of person very much." The person that was mocking Sam earlier once again said.


    " Mike, hey don''t we collect the loot? We should leave the loot like this." He said to Mike.


    Mike thought sometimes, then agreed with him. Almost everyone excitedly approached those loots. How could they not want to collect it? But they miss noticing one thing. Many red eyes were staring at them. From their left and right side.


    Those monsters didn''t attack them instantly. They were waiting for the right moment to attack. They can feel that these warriors were weakpared to the warriors they fought previously. The moment those warriors let down their guard, they will attack them.


    Actually, these weren''t these monsters'' ns. These all are the ns of this new boss. Aftering to this floor, he became the true boss of this floor. Everyone listens to him. Because of him, these monsters still didn''t attack those warriors.


    When he previously saw this many warriors, he became worried. Previously, that one warrior was so powerful that he didn''t think he would win against that warrior that easily. Now, if that warrior brings his team to these rooms and all of them are as powerful as him. Then the monsters won''t attack them.


    But, after searching, they didn''t see that warrior. So, they were ready to attack these warriors. That warrior wasn''t with them, so they easily attacked these warriors.


    The moment all the warriors were busy collecting the loot, those monsters started approaching them. At first, those warriors didn''t feel anything. They all were busy collecting.


    But, suddenly a girl warrior suddenly felt something and looked at her right side. She was the girl who previously tried to talk with in Sam''s favor.


    "Monsters!!!!!!!!" she instantly shouted.


    Hearing her sudden screaming, all the warriors came to their senses and looked at her. They all see that she was pointing to their right side. They all see on the right side. Instantly, they feel like their blood bes cold.


    Many monsters areing toward them. They suddenly heard a sound from their left side. They also see their left direction. Monsters and monsters. Monsters surrounded them from the left and right sides.


    "Everyone!!!!! run toward the door. We won''t be able to fight this many monsters." Mike said all of them.


    All the warriors came back to their senses and began running toward the door.


    ____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 138 138 - Time To Finish The Bosses.

    Everyone began to run toward the exit. 30 peak E-grade monsters were chasing them. Well, not only that, but there were also those two bosses.


    Among those warriors, only 5 of them were peak E-grade warriors, and the remaining warriors were intermediate E-grade.


    If you are wondering why there is no D-grade warrior. Well, D-grade warriors didn''te to this dungeon because they won''t gain any benefit from this dungeon. Who wille to the dungeon where he will only get a lower-grade item?


    So, those warriors reached the door and tried to open it. But the door didn''t even move from his ce. Only then do they understand how bad their situation was. They suddenly remember the previous warning of that warrior. He already told them not to enter the room. But they thought he was only telling them because he wanted to collect those loot alone. Now, they finally understand how wrong they were.


    "Look like we won''t be able to open the door until we clear the monsters," Mike said to his teammates.


    " Mike, you should never believe Fry''s words. You should trust the warrior''s word. If you trust him even a little, then we won''t be in this situation," a girl said. She was the one who previously trusted Sam''s word. Freon, the person who didn''t leave any chance to mock Sam, was now frightenedly looking at those monsters. Now, he didn''t even have the strength to talk. He was only an intermediate E-grade warrior, so seeing this many peak E-grade ghost monstersing toward him makes him scared.


    "Ahhh!!!!!!!!" Suddenly, three warriors began to scream. Hearing their sudden screaming, everyone at first got startled, but then they noticed that 3 warriors of their team fell to the ground, screaming in pain. They already know what happened. It was the Ghost dog''s special attack.


    Well, these ghost dogs previously wanted to attack Sam with this, but Sam has the higher mind protection technique. So, those attacks don''t really matter to him.


    "Everyone, activate your mind''s protection. Those ghost dogs were attacking us. Try to stay alert," Mark quickly said to them. Everyone nodded. At this time, 3 healers of these teams crouch down and begin to use healing rays toward those warriors.


    Mark and the others were looking at those monsters with full alert. Seeing those warriors stand like those monsters instantly increases their speed and quickly approaches them. Mike and others know that they won''t be able to escape without a fight.


    Everyone brings out their weapons and is ready to fight those monsters. Instantly, those spiritual warriors started casting spells, and within 2 minutes, they finished casting. In these 2 minutes, those monsters came very close to them.


    With no hesitation, those spiritual warriors attacked those monsters with their attack. All of them cast fireball spells. 6 of them were spiritual warriors. Among those spiritual warriors, 3 of them were healers. So, only 3 warriors attack those monsters with their strongest techniques.


    Those 3 fireballs hit those monsters. Instantly, those monsters roared. These fireball attacks killed 3 monsters. All the remaining monsters were angry at seeing that. They instantly prepared a dark energy ball. Seeing this, all the warriors'' faces be pale.


    "Prepare to defend," Mike shouted.


    Those monsters didn''t need that much time casting the energy ball. In just under one minute, they were done and instantly they shot toward those warriors. [A/N: These spiritual monsters, or we can say ghosts, were created by dark spiritual energy. They can use the dark balls.]


    Those physical warriors bring out their shields to protect them from the attack. Normally, physical attacks didn''t do that much damage, but all those physical warriors had fire swords. It was like the sword Sam has. Well, at first Sam also thinks with his fire sword he can''t damage these spiritual monsters. But, in these five, he realized how wrong he was. His sister didn''t give him any low-grade sword. The phoenix has high-grade fire crystals that can damage spiritual monsters. But, well, you know he uses his yer all the time. Because of this, he got to know thister.


    Now, back to the main point, the shields those warriors ced in front of them have high-grade light crystals. So, that can defend them from the dark ball. This attack happened so quickly that those spiritual warriors didn''t get the chance to cast another spell. They can only helplessly look at the scene.


    Those dark balls hit those shields. The warriors use their strength to fight back. Those dark balls were so powerful that almost all the warriors were sent flying. But they still hold on. There are only 6 warriors who defend those many dark balls. It just matters of time before those warriors were hit by the dark balls.


    They were using so much strength that now they were bleeding from their mouth. The power of these dark balls was so intense.


    "Light shield." Those 3 light element users cast the light shield. Instantly, a light aura covers them. Finally, those warriors can rx a little.


    "We won''t be able to hold much longer." One light spell user said. It once again despairs those warriors. They don''t think they can win against these many monsters at the same time.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ___________________________


    Sam, at this moment, silently enters the room. Nobody noticed him. He also already activated his concealment technique. Just seeing the situation, he can tell he needs to help those warriors or they will be dead.


    Now, what should he do? He can''t use his mega fireball or great fireball. Those warriors were very close to those monsters. So, he brings out his night and a spiritual arrow. He will attack those monsters with his firebird arrow.


    He began to focus on sending spiritual energy into the arrow as much as he could. Those warriors were waiting for their death, those monsters were preparing for another attack, and Sam focused on his arrow.


    Well, Sam was the first one toplete his attacks. Instantly, the arrows quickly go toward those monsters. Those monsters and warriors suddenly saw a fire bird-like thinging toward those monsters at very high speed. They just only get a nce at the bird when the arrows hit those monsters. It instantly creates destruction, but not like his mega or great fireball.


    Dust covers the view of everyone. Those warriors are unable to tell what''s happening. They can only look at the scene while standing like a statue. But Sam didn''t waste his time like them. He instantly brings out his yer, and he coated the sword with spiritual energy. He approached those monsters.


    He knows his attacks very well. It can kill hardly 10 monsters, and for those remaining monsters, he needs to deal with them personally.


    Those warriors who were in a daze instantly felt something or someone passed them. They weren''t able to see anything in this situation. Well, Sam already deactivated his concealment technique. He wanted to use this technique to deal with those bosses.


    As he thought, only 10 monsters were dead. But the remaining monsters were in a confused state. They didn''t even feel well if someone attacked them. Only then did they see a figureing toward them. The figure was getting closer and closer to them. They knew this figure. It was the warriors who had already killed their 50 teammates. Now, he is back once again. It makes them angrier.


    "Roar!!!!" They roar and run toward Sam. He was fastpared to those monsters because of this. Those monsters didn''t have time to attack him with a dark ball. The two bosses also see him, and they begin to prepare their dark ball.


    Wasting no time, Sam began to kill those monsters. Right, left, he began to swing his sword and kill those monsters. Those monsters were trying to attack him, but he easily avoided them.


    The dust began to clear and those warriors finally saw a warrior fighting with those monsters. 17 monsters were already dead, now only 10 monsters remained. Seeing that scene, they once again recover their confidence.


    "Guys, attack!!!" They began to run towards the monster. Well, Sam didn''t need their help, he can easily finish these monsters. But, at this moment, he felt danger from his right side. Instantly, he jumped backward. Two dark balls hit the ce where he was previously, and destruction urred. Instantly, dust speared and blocked the vision. These two dark balls power so much that the ce where Sam was standing previously was now gone. The ground was destroyed and you can see a big hole in it.


    Sam didn''t need to guess he already knew that these two dark balls were from those bosses. He looks in the right direction and sees far from his ce that the monster was standing there. Those two were the boss of this room.


    Hidden turned around and looked at the peak E-grade monsters and those warriors.


    "Can you handle them?" He asked those warriors. He doesn''t think they will be any problem now; those warriors can now easily handle these 10 remaining monsters.


    Those warriors also know that Sam wants to deal with those to the Boss. So, Mike replied to him, " don''t worry. We can handle them. You can focus on the bosses."


    Sam only nodded and vanished from his ce. Using his full speed was going towards bosses. Now it was time to finish the boss.


    ____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 139 139 - Killing The Two Boss

    Sam only nodded and vanished from his ce. Using his full speed was going towards bosses. Now it was time to finish the boss.


    He directly went toward the boss. Those two bosses were ready to attack once again, but how could Sam let that happen? He instantly casts two fireballs and throws them toward those two monsters. Seeing the fireballsing toward them, those two monsters quickly avoided them, and their spell got canceled.


    "Roar!!!!!!" the ck dog roared and attacked with mind control. Well, Sam doesn''t worry that he was just simply advancing toward them. These monsters'' mind control wasn''t that strong and could control Sam''s mind. Because of this, he didn''t worry about that.


    That ck dog and the Humanoid ghost also understand the fact. The ck dog got angry because of that. He started running toward him. But, the Humanoid ghost didn''t leave his ce. He was still standing there.


    Sam just nced at him once and then shifted his focus on the ck dog. Like a wolf, these ck Dogs also have strong w power and bite power. Sam needs to be careful about it. Also, he needs to be careful about the Humanoid ghost. This monster seems very intelligentpared to the other monsters. He seems to be standing there and letting the ck dog fight Sam so that he could attack Sam with a dark ball or try to process him.


    Sam also understood that, so he was still aware of his surroundings. He and the ck dog get closer and closer. When they came very close, the dog jumped at him. His ws were shining and got bigger. With this, he tried to attack Sam. Sam also saw that the dog jumped at him to avoid the dog''s attack by shifting to the left side.


    This ck dog was also quite fast, but not like the Lepris, so Sam can handle them. The dog missed his target andnded on the ground. Just when his ws touch the ground, it pierces through the ground and makes two ?deep w marks. This was really a dangerous attack.


    Well, how could Sam let this chance? He instantly attacks the dog with his yer. The dog seemed to feel it and wanted to dodge it, but the attack still cut his one leg. Well, it didn''t really cut his leg, it just injured him.


    "Roarr!!!!!" the dog roared. Instantly, Sam felt dangerous from his left side. Wasting no time, he jumped away from that ce. Instantly, a dark ball hit the ground.


    Sam looked at them, then vanished from the ce. He activated his concealment technique. The humanoid ghost and the ck dog looked around. This sudden move surprised them. How did their enemy vanish? The ck dog even wanted to smell Sam''s smell to find him. But Sam''s stealth technique also hides his smell. So the ck dog was unable to locate him.


    The ck dog suddenly felt danger from his right side. He tried to dodge, but he was slow to dodge. Yes, you guessed it right. Sam attacked the ck dog. Instantly, one of the legs of this ck dog got cut by the attack.


    "Roar!!!!" The ck dog roars in a painful cry. He jumped from that ce. The humanoid ghost didn''t attack at this time, because unable to locate the enemy. He only sees that some invisible enemy attacks the ck dog. He was still searching for the enemy.


    Both of these monsters don''t know, but Sam was already very close to the ck dog and ready to attack him. This time, he would not miss. His target was the head of the ck dog. He did not want to give that ck dog any chance, so he used his fast-cut technique.


    Once again, the dog felt danger, but this time he could not dodge the attack. Sam swings his sword at incense speed with his newly upgraded fast-cut technique. The ck dog could only change the danger but can do anything. He did not even get the chance to make any sound and his head got separated from the body. The body fell down to the ground. ck blood came out from the body of this ck dog and a few secondster, the body turned into dust.


    The humanoid ghost, seeing this scene, got very alert. Someone who he can''t see or feel killed the ck dog. This was a really dangerous thing.


    __________________________


    At this time,


    Those warriors were fighting those monsters. They were already able to kill 5 monsters and now only 5 monsters remain.


    Mike did not want to give those monsters any chance. So, hemands everyone to attack and doesn''t stop. They need to finish these monsters as soon as they can so that they can help the warriors fight with the bosses.


    All those warriors were now very confident. No one can guess by seeing them that a few minutes ago, their situation was very miserable. Also, because of this, they were fighting this monster with their full strength. Some time ago, because of these monsters, they were very scared. They even thought it was theirst day in the dungeon. You can say that these warriors were releasing their anger through their attack.


    Those remaining 5 peak E-grade dogs were cast five dark balls and shot toward these warriors. But the warriors were one step ahead of these monsters. Those 3 light element users already cast light shields the moment they saw those monsters casting dark balls.<novelnext></novelnext>


    These 5 dark balls weren''t able to break the 3yers light shield. Mike and his teammates are very close to these monsters, so they did not waste any time and instantly attacked those dogs. Those 5 dogs try to defend themselves from those warriors'' attacks, but in the end, they die.


    "Yess!!!!!!" some warriors instantly shouted with excitement. But the next moment, they got scolded by Mike.


    "How can you be so happy? There are two who are alive. We need to help our savior. He is fighting with the monster alone. So how can you be so happy?"


    Instantly, all those warriors felt guilty. Yes, how can they be happy when those two bosses are still alive?


    " Let''s go, we need to help our savior," Mike said to them and they started running toward the direction where Sam went.


    Well, while fighting, they came very far away from their previous ce. So they did not see the fight between Sam and the bosses and thought that the two bosses were alive.


    They were going there at their full speed, so in no time they reached their previous ce. From here, they can see only the humanoid ghost standing there alone. They can''t see the ck dog or their savior.


    Not just them, but also Sam and the Humanoid monsters notice those warriors.


    Seeing them, the humanoid ghost roared, "Roar!!!!!" and starts to cast dark balls. Those warriors were still far from the boss, so they won''t be able to stop the boss from casting the spell.


    " Everyone, prepare to defend." Mike quickly said to everyone. He and the other physical warriors bring out their shields, while those spiritual warriors start to cast shield spells. [A/N: Only the light element users. Those fire users are just standing there.]


    They all know thatpared to those E-grade monsters, this dark ball from the boss was very dangerous. Those fire element users also started casting their most powerful fireball.


    But no one knew the fact that Sam was behind the humanoid ghost. Now the monster focuses on those warriors, so Sam uses this chance to attack. With an incense speed, he swung his sword.


    Only at thest moment, the humanoid ghost feels the danger, but he couldn''t do anything at that time. He didn''t even get the chance to react when Sam''s sword sliced the ghost''s body into two parts.


    Those warriors were nervously waiting for the dark ball. Some of them even prayed to God to save them. But, well, the dark ball never came. They only saw that the humanoid had suddenly vanished from his ce.


    What happened? Why did the boss suddenly vanish from his ce? Is this a new strategy or not? For some time, they didn''t even move from their ce. But they saw a figure appear in the boss''s ce.


    At first, they thought it was the boss who appeared once again, but then noticed that this figure was wearing Armor and also had a sword in his hand. They instantly know that it was the warrior who saved them earlier.


    Sam, at this time, deactivated his concealment technique. So, those warriors were able to see him. He ignores them and collects the loot he got from the bosses.


    With that, he vanished from his ce. Those warriors didn''t even get the chance to talk to him. Well, they don''t know, but Sam still didn''t leave the room. He was actually checking the loot he got after killing those 50 E-grade monsters. He was searching for any good loot.


    _____________To be continued ____________

 Chapter 140 140 - Informing Aria About The 4th Floor.

    With that, he vanished from his ce. Those warriors didn''t even get the chance to talk to him. Well, they don''t know, but Sam still didn''t leave the room. He was actually checking the loot he got after killing those 50 E-grade monsters. He was searching for any good loot.


    After collecting the loot, he left the room silently. All those warriors at this time understood that their savior did not want to meet them. Because of this, he vanished from there. Well, they were not even aware of the fact that Sam was still there and collecting all his loot.


    "Guys, collect all the loot, then let''s go. Fortunately, we are alive. It is just that we did not get to meet our savior. In the future, if we meet him anywhere, we should apologize to him. Understand," Mike told all the warriors. All of them nodded. They also realize their mistake and want to apologize for that.


    _______________________


    Sam, at this time, had already left the room. He finally cleared these dungeons. Jeni and the others were also invited to join them. But, he still had time, so he did not worry about that.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam left the fourth floor, and currently, he was resting. After fighting those two bosses, he felt some fatigue, and because of this, he wanted to rest. And also he was hungry. He found a ce and then brought out the monster repeller device. He wanted to rest so that he did not want to still use his concealment technique.


    It did not take that much time to finish his food. So it was time to go back.


    2 dayster,


    Sam was finally out of this dungeon, and he was now going toward the warrior association. The matter about the 4th floor should be revealed to everyone, and because of this, he was going to the warrior association to inform them about the 4th floor.


    He thinks that recently no one from the warrior association visited this dungeon, and because of this, they weren''t aware of the fact. As a responsible warrior, it was his duty to inform the warrior association.


    It did not take that much time to reach the warrior association. He entered the association and walked toward the reception area. He thought ?he would meet no one familiar here, but coincidentally, he saw Aria.


    Recently, he did not visit the warrior association, so he did not meet Aria. But he saw her. So, wasting no time, he approaches her.


    Sam wasn''t aware, but these few days, she was very busy. She was an A-grade warrior and the daughter of a saint. She can''t ignore her duty. She was helping her father in the headquarters for the past few days. Yesterday she got free and to rx she came back here. The warrior association branches beside the low-grade dungeon weren''t that busypared to others. Because of this, she came here.


    While she was working as a receptionist, she saw a familiar figure. It was the masked warrior named Sam. Recently she did not sew him that much in the warrior association.


    "Did he also take part in the college examination? I think so. Because he did not have ess to the warriorwork, it means he wasn''t a student of any college, nor did he be part of any guild." She murmured.


    Seeing him in front of her desk, she greeted him.


    "Hello, Sam. Nice to see you again. How are you? Recently, I didn''t see you in the warrior association." She told him.


    "Well, hello Miss Aria. I am fine, Miss Aria. Yea, because I was busy these days, so I wasn''t able toe to the dungeon." Sam lied to her with a straight face. Well, you can''t tell that it was a lie. He was naturally busy with college exams, so he did note to the warrior association. Did not mention the college examination. His second identity as a masked warrior, he wants to keep that.


    He did not want anyone to know his original identity. Also, those who take part in the college examination have their name registered in the warrior association. Because of this, he mentioned nothing about the college examination because there was no person in the college examination who was wearing a mask.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Oh, did you take this year''s college examination?" She asked him.


    "No, I did not take part in the examination. I was busy with other work. Sorry, but I cannot tell you about my work." Sam said to her with an apologetic tone. Well, she always treats him friendly, but he did not want to reveal his identity.


    "Ohh, no, problem. So, do you want to buy anything or sell anything?" She asked.


    "I want to sell the loot I got from the dungeon. But, before that, I want to give you important information about this dungeon''s 4th floor," he said. Hearing that he wants to give important information, she bes serious. In these few months, she got a general idea about his character. Sam wasn''t a person who liked to joke. He always stays serious. She can feel the seriousness in his voice, so she bes serious.


    "I think everyone knows that this ghost dungeon has a new boss. But I think you don''t know there was a trap set by his new monsters. When you enter the 4th floor, you won''t be able to see any monsters. When you go deeper into the floor, you will see the boss''s room. In this room, they set that trap. When you enter that room, you won''t be able to open the door from inside until you kill all the monsters. Also, 80 peak E-grade monsters and those two bosses will attack you at the same time."


    " I don''t think you know about this matter. Also, I think it could be dangerous for the warriors. This could be very dangerous for any warrior to face all those monsters at the same time. You should check the fourth floor and inform every warrior to go to the 4th floor," Sam briefly described the danger on the 4th floor. He thinks that recently those monsters set that trap. Because, if those monsters did not set the trap recently, then many warriors could lose their life and the warrior association already sent warriors for investigation.


    "What!!! Are you telling me the truth?" She asked me. It shocked Aria to hear the information. If what he said was true, then this was really dangerous.


    " 100% true. You should send some warriors to the 4th floor, then you will know the truth. Today, I and a group of warriors faced those monsters. It was our luck that we were still alive." He said. Hearing that, she became more shocked. It was natural for a warrior who was in peak E-grade or even in early D-grade to lose their lives there.


    " I am really sorry about that. We really know nothing about it. It is our mistake. Really sorry about it." She apologized to him with her sincere attitude. He faced those monsters on the floor. He could have really lost his life there.


    " Don''t worry about it. But you should inform everyone." Sam said to her.


    Aria nodded and dialed a number on her phone. She began to tell the information and then said to send warriors into the dungeon quickly. Also, she said to inform every warrior who was in the dungeon or preparing to enter the dungeon. After finishing her talking, he hung up the call and said to him, "Thank you very much. Your information really saved many lives. The warrior association will reward you for that."


    " No, problem. Now I would like to sell my loot," Sam said.


    " Obviously," she says with a smile. It took him some time to sell all his loot. After receiving the money, he said goodbye to her and left the warrior association. Now his destination was the restaurant. So our food lover Sam approached the restaurant. As you know that you always like to approach the restaurant he was familiar with. So, he approached his familiar restaurant.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam has now left the washroom after freshening up. He also changed his clothes because he did not want to leave any trace of himself. The moment he left the washroom, he activated his concealment technique.


    He was searching for a crowd-less area where he can bring out his car from his inventory. Yes, you guessed it right. Sam put his car in the inventory. But he cannot just bring out his car in front of everyone. This will make everyone speechless. Because even if everyone has a storage ring, they cannot store cars in the storage ring. For this, he was searching for a crowd-less area, where he could easily bring out his car.


    When he was searching for the crowd-less area, he crossed the dungeon. He saw so many warriors entering the dungeon. But they weren''t your normal warrior, just by feeling their aura, you can tell they were from the association. They all were going to the dungeon.


    _______________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 141 141 - Call From The Friends.

    It is likely that those warriors are members of the warrior association. It is likely that Aria informs the association about this, and therefore, the association sends these warriors.


    Sam sighs in relief when he sees those warriors. Because now he was free from having to worry about the warriors who wanted to kill the boss on the fourth floor like him. These warriors will handle the matter from the association.


    Then Sam went to a less crowded area and picked up his car from the inventory. It''s time to go home. In any case, he hadn''t intended to drive all the way home because doing so would exhaust him. Upon arrival at the train station, he will be taken to the train station to continue his journey.


    _____________________


    1 dayter,


    He was now awake from his sleep. He reached his home early in the morning and then he went to sleep. Look at the time. It was now 12:00 p.m. and he was feeling hungry. So he got up from the bed and went to the bathroom to wash up his face.


    His parents have not yet returned from the dungeon. A B-grade dungeon was their destination this time. His father and mother had now be early B-grade warriors. Previously, because of his exam, they did not go to a dungeon, but now they wanted to adjust to their new strength. It probably still takes time for them toe back.


    He did not have any ns today, because he wanted to rest for the day. After finishing eating his food, he was now on the balcony while sitting on the chair and thinking about the dungeon. He never expected something like this to happen in the ghost dungeon. He doesn''t know what''s happening, but for a few months, many unexpected things have been happening in the dungeon. The drop rate of the good loot also decreased, the number of the monsters increased, and many intelligent monsters started to spawn in the dungeon.


    Fortunately, the trap on the foot floor was just created recently, and he thinks he is the first one to enter the trap. Now the question is, what about the other dungeons? Are those also the same as in this ghost dungeon? He did not know any of this, but he knew that we needed to be extra careful in the dungeons.


    Nowing to the main point, he was now looking at the Orons city''s dungeon. Jeni, Tony, and the others were thinking of going to this dungeon, and Jeni also called about inviting him. Sam epted that. This was his first time entering the dungeon with his own teammate.


    Now he was searching for the details of this dungeon. He knows that he won''t get that much important information on the inte. But still, you wanted to find the details about this dungeon.


    This dungeon is mainly called the Goblin dungeon. Because the only monster you can find here was Goblin. But those goblins were differentpared to the lower grade Goblin he faced before. Those Goblin wires were very intelligent and also more powerful.


    Goblinmander, Goblin spell caster, Goblin king, and Goblin soldier were in this dungeon. The Goblin king was the most powerful here, and he was the final boss.


    This dungeon has 3 floors. On the first floor, you only face the early D-grade monsters, in the end, the floor you will face the intermediate D-grade monsters, andstly, the 3rd floor where you will meet the peak D-grade goblins and the boss.


    For now, their n was the first floor. The second and third floors were pretty dangerous for them and so for now they wanted to go to the fast floor.


    Some were looking at the news on their mobile about this dungeon. He gets to know about the floors and the monsters.


    So well, it will be a tough situation there. Those early grade goblins were very powerful. It was like their status point, as the early grade monsters were full. They were just waiting to break through to the next grade. This monster did not have to face the difficulty as the humans when they wanted to break through. They did not feel any force that prevented their breakthrough. Fortunately, those intermediate monsters won''t be able to stay on the first floor. If anyone suddenly breaks through instantly, they will go to the next floor.


    After reading all of this, he switched his focus to the current news. Currently, the news channels are showing the new dungeon of Bese city.


    "Hey guys, we are in the Base city. From here hours a great genius was born. Gloria Kainer and Sam Kainer were born in this city. But in this city some month ago, this new dungeon suddenly appeared. Well, for a few months, there weren''t any casualties. But yesterday, someone informed the warrior association about the trap that the new boss monster set. Fortunately, no one died."<novelnext></novelnext>


    " We also interviewed a warrior''s team. They were the ones who gave us the whole detail of this trap. After entering the fourth floor, you won''t see any monsters. You need to go to the center to meet those monsters. This center room was the previous boss''s room, which was now the trap room. If you enter the room, then you will be trapped in there. You won''t be able to leave until someone opens the door from outside or you kill all the monsters. Only then you can leave the room."


    " These team members entered the room and instantly saw many peak E-grade monsters. A team of 5 people or 10 people or even 15 people wasn''t enough to kill all those monsters. Because at least you need to face 80 peak E-grade monsters and also the 2 bosses. Those Bosses will not attack you first. While you are busy fighting the other monsters, those bosses will sneak attack you with a dark ball or even try to control your body or mind."


    "Just imagine how dangerous that was. It was fortunate that those warriors didn''t lose their lives. They were saying that it was because someone helped them. This warrior was the first one to enter the room and those various things he alone had already killed 50 monsters. Because of this, those warriors only needed to face 30 monsters. But still, it was too much for them to handle. They ran toward the door and tried to open it, but even after trying so many times, they were not able to open the door. After knowing that they can''t run away from the monster, they decided to fight. Sometimeter, they already knew that it was theirst day, but fortunately, their savior had already saved them. He also previously informed them about that room before they entered the room."


    " But I did not believe him and entered the room. Also, those who say that their saviors alone killed the two bosses. They wanted to apologize to him, but their savior instantly vanished from his ce. Their savior always wears a mask, so they didn''t recognize his face. Also, we got the report from the branch of the warrior association, which was beside this dungeon. This mask-wearing warrior was the one who informed the warrior association about the fourth floor. We don''t know who this masked warrior is, but one thing we know is that we should thank him. If no one still knows about the fourth floor, then we can lose many warriors."


    One warrior posted this article, and Sam finished reading.


    Suddenly, his phone vibrated. He unlocked the phone and saw that it was Elena calling him. He answered the phone.


    "Hello,"


    "Hello, Sam. Where are you right now?" She asked.


    "Home, why?" Sam said.


    "I saw the news. Did you go to the ghost dungeon?" She asked.


    " Nah, I recently came back from the other dungeon. I suddenly got busy because of this I wasn''t able to enter the new dungeon in the base city on the 1st of September. What happened?" Sam asked. Well, he already expected a call from his friend. He previously told Elena and Jeni that he will be going to the new dungeon and ghost dungeon. So he expected their call.


    "Did you see the news about the 4th floor of the ghost dungeon?" She asked. Hearing Sam''s serious tone, she already believes him.


    " Yes, before your call, I was reading the news about that," Sam said.


    "Few!!! I thought you went to the dungeon. It is good that you didn''t go there. I know you are powerful, but handling 80 monsters alone isn''t easy." She said,


    " Umm, you are right. I can fight with 20 peak E-grade monsters easily, but fighting 80 of them will tire me out. I would probably be low on spiritual energy. In that state, I won''t be able to fight those boss monsters." He said to her, Well, he was telling the truth. Previously, when he killed those 50 peak E-grade monsters, used his 60% spiritual energy. Fortunately, his recovery technique was in C-grade and he also had a spirit potion. Those things made him recover quickly, and he was able to fight once again.


    After some more talking, some hung up the call. But just when he hung up, Jeni called him, and like this, other friends also called him.


    ___________To be continued __________

 Chapter 142 142 - Teaching Children

    14th September, Central City.


    Sam was now in his sister''s house. Tomorrow, he and his friends will start their journey to Oron city. Now he was practicing with his practice partner.


    Sometimeter,


    He came out of the training room and went to the kitchen. He wasn''t alone. His sister and Alena were with him. Today Alena told his sister to take a rest. Because of this, she was resting. His sister was very hardworking and because of this, she can achieve what was impossible to others. Well, he knows that his sister idol was Saint Mira, the youngest S-grade warrior. Because of this, she works hard.


    Breakfast was ready, so he went to the kitchen to eat breakfast. His sister was making breakfast for them. He reached the dining room and sat down. They start eating their food. Well, for him, she cooks many foods because she knows his appetite.


    "Did you check the information about the Goblin dungeon?" Alena asked him. Both Gloria and Alena knew that he was going tomorrow to Oron city for the Goblin dungeon.


    "Yes," Sam answered.


    "Good, you cannot be careless there. Those goblins like to sneak attack. So you should stay alert every time and always observe your surrounding area." She said to him, Well, she saw him as a little brother, and because of this she was worried.


    Sam nodded after hearing her word. He also knew that Gloria and Alena were worried about him.


    " Sis, how is your preparation for this year''spetition?" He asked Gloria. Previous year Gloria wasn''t able to get a fast position, but this year everything is different. She has already broken through and bes a C-grade warrior. Sam did not think that anyone could be herpetitor. But she still did not stop practicing. Her goal wasn''t small. If she wanted to be like Mira, the youngest S-grade, or Alena, who was very close to a breakthrough, then she needed to continue to work hard.


    "Everything is fine. I have the confidence to win this year''spetition," Gloria said with a confident tone.


    " Did you decide which college you want to choose?" She suddenly asked him.


    " No." Sam shook his head.


    " Don''t bete, on 25th September you need to submit your college choice." She said, On 25th September he needs to choose his college.


    Sam didn''t talk that much and nodded.


    After finishing his food, he went back to his room. Because he now has 115K upgrade points. So, he can upgrade one of his techniques.


    Now the main thing was which technique was going to be upgraded. Previously, he upgraded his absorb technique, concealment technique, and his fast-cut technique. So this time he would not upgrade his attack technique or his concealment technique. So now he was thinking about what to do.


    After so much thinking, he finally decided to upgrade the energy recovery technique. This passive technique is really helpful, so he decided to upgrade this.


    He opens his system screen and taps the plus button (+) beside the energy recovery technique. Instantly, his upgrade points be 15k from 115k.


    " Status"


    "Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (00%) (+)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.]


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (90%) (+)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade) (100%) (+)


    [This technique helps you to increase your vision power and also gives you a pair of spiritual eyes. It also allows you to see many things that you can''t see with your normal vision. ]


    The power of the moon. (Grade: F) (60%) (+)


    [This technique will increase your power in the moon''s presence. It is a passive technique that will work automatically.]


    [Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    Now his energy recovery technique has been upgraded. He looks at his status but ignores the remark. His strength also increased after absorbing the crystals he got from killing the bosses.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 27 + 2 +3


    Agility: 25 + 1 + 2<novelnext></novelnext>


    Physique: 26 + 2


    Intelligent (mental power): 19+1


    Spirit: 16 + 2


    Grade: (D-) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 15k"


    The crystal he got from the New dungeon and the ghost dungeon, he already absorbed, and the result was pretty clear. His power once again increased.


    He closes the window and gets up from the bed. He decided to walk. Well, he wanted to be familiar with this royal city. Except when he came to receive a reward, he never came to the central city. Even the previous year, when his sister checked part in the annual warriorpetition, he did note to the central city. Now he was here, so he wanted to be familiar with this city.


    When he came outside his room, his sister saw him and asked about his destination. Sam just told me that he wanted to walk around. She just nodded, hearing him.


    After saying goodbye to his sister, he left the house. He did not call any of his friends. They were probably busy in preparation for tomorrow, so he didn''t want to disturb them.


    Where his sister lived was the safe area. There were many houses of warriors. Even if anyone has money, they easily cannot buy a home here. To have significant credit to buy a home here.


    Sam did not go that far from the house. He was walking because at home, he was feeling bored. He can''t just practice all day. So, he decided to walk. There were many trees in this area and also a beautifulke. He walked toward thatke.


    He was now standing near theke and looking at the beautiful scenery. But, suddenly he heard some sound. He tries to search for the source of the sound. After looking carefully, I finally found it. Not far from theke they are a public training ground, and he can see many children practicing there.


    Sam bes interested and approaches there. After reaching the ground, he noticed that those children were probably 8 to 9 years old. The old man teaches them some boxing techniques and those children follow the old man''s moves.


    Watching all of this brings back memories of his previous life. In his previous life when he was a child, after watching martial arts movies, he always wanted to be like them. For this, even join a day martial art training camp. But then he noticed that his master''s art teacher didn''t fly in the sky or see any lighting out of his master''s punch.


    Seeing all this, little Sam became confused and asked his teacher, "Teacher, why aren''t you flying in the sky?"


    Instantly, all the parents, his teacher, and even his parents began tough. Well, that was a pretty awkward moment for him. When he got bigger, he understood those movies weren''t real.


    But now in this new world, those things aren''t impossible. Samughs slightly remembering the past. He turned back and was just about to leave the ce. Suddenly the old man called him, "Hey boy!! Are you Sam Kainer? "


    Sam did not expect that someone would recognize him. He turned around and smiled.


    "Yes, grandpa," he said to the old man.


    "Haha,e here boy," the old man said with a smile.


    Well, he had nothing to do, so he went toward the old man.


    When he came beside the old man, the old man started tough and said, "You really are Sam Kainer. Did youe to your sister''s house?"


    "Yes," Sam said to him. Sam observes the older man. Looking at the old man, he can''t tell how strong he was, because he wasn''t releasing his aura.


    The whole time, those children were looking at Sam. When they heard it was Sam Kainer, they stopped practicing and looked at him. From children to old men, probably everyone knows his name. So, it was natural for those children to know him.


    "Ha-ha, little guys, see he is Sam Kainer. You should all know how strong he is, and he is the 1st position holder," the old man said to the children. Hearing all the children nodded. All of them were pretty excited after seeing him.


    " Little guys, do you want to see his moves?" The old man asked.


    " Yes!!!!! " All the children said with excitement. For them, they were looking at their idol, and who doesn''t want to see his move?


    " Sam, sorry for causing you trouble. Can you show some of your moves to these children? It will motivate them," the old man asked in a guilty tone.


    Well, Sam didn''t want to show his moves, but after looking at the excited faces of those children, he just smiled and nodded.


    "No problem," he said to the old man.


    "Yay!!!!!" Hearing he agreed, all the children became very happy.


    "Okay guys, I will show you my sword technique, so watch carefully," after saying that he brought out his phoenix and started to show it, then his sword moved. All the children looked at all the movements very seriously. It was like they wanted to learn those moves from him.


    _______________To be continued________________

 Chapter 143 143 - Entering The Dungeon

    15th September,


    Sam was now with Jeni and the others. They were finally going toward Oron city. All of them were excited about this dungeon journey. Jeni, Tony, Kenny, Tina, Elena, Alexa, and Sam were on the team. Well, Alexa was also going with them. Previously, Jeni invited her, and she epted the invitation. Kenny and Tina were still in the Peak E-grade, but they went with them. They were very close to breaking through, so they were going with them in search of a limit breaker. Also, the loot they will get in the dungeon, they save them. When they be D-grade warriors, they could use those loot.


    They were going in a car toward Oron city. It would not be that much to reach the dungeon if they didn''t have any traffic jams.


    "Hehe, I am very excited about this. This is our first time going into a dungeon as a team." Tina said. Everyone smiles at hearing her. Well, they were also excited.


    Sometimeter,


    At 1:09 p.m., they finally reached the dungeon. Everyone got out of the car.


    "Finally, we are here," Tony said with a smile. Everyone nodded, hearing him. But, after getting out of the car, they didn''t directly enter the dungeon. Well, you can say, this was mainly because they were hungry. Before they came here, they only ate their breakfast, so everyone was hungry.


    They went to a restaurant and ordered their food.


    It didn''t take that much time to finish their food. They were now in front of the dungeon. Well, everyone was excited to enter, but before that, they wanted to talk with the guide. This was mainly Sam''s suggestion.


    They went towards a guide. Many guides were talking with many warriors. Well, they didn''t see any free guides. Because of this, they needed to wait for some time.


    Sometimeter, finally, a guide was free. They went toward him and asked about the first floor.


    "On the first floor, you will mostly meet those Goblin soldiers and Goblin captains. Stay alert every moment. Those goblins like to sneak attack their enemy." The guide told us many things about the 1st floor.


    It took them some time, but now they were finally entering the dungeon. Sam thinks many warriors also recognized us because many warriors were looking in their direction. Well, he and the others didn''t care about the other; they just entered the dungeon.


    After entering the big gate, they finally saw a forest on the first floor. Like them, many warriors were also there.


    "Let''s go this way." Tony suddenly said and pointed his finger in a direction. Well, they didn''t have any particr direction, so they decided to go in that direction.


    They didn''t even walk that much when suddenly, a group of 15 goblins came in their direction. All of them have swords in their hands.


    "Everyone, let''s attack," Jeni said, and all of them instantly nodded. All of them instantly bring out their weapons and are ready to attack those monsters.


    "Jeni, Tony, Elena, and Alexa, each of you will face 2 goblins. I will face three monsters, and Kenny and Tina will face one monster. Now go," Sam said to them. Everyone nodded, hearing hismand. Sam was stronger than them, so he decided to face 3 monsters.


    Sam brings out his Phoenix and attacks the monsters. One monster swings his sword toward him. Sam quickly avoids it and swings his sword upward. The monster defends the attack with his sword. But he got flying. It wasn''t too easy to handle Sam.


    The other two goblins quickly attack him from both sides. Sam quickly jumped from the location. These monsters were pretty good.


    "Chi!!!!" They made this sound, and one after another came to Sam. They all attack Sam at the same time. Sam also attacks with his sword. Sam''s sword shes with their sword. Well, thosebined attacks were pretty powerful. Sam got sent backward. But he didn''t lose control. He quickly controlled himself, and jumped away from the ce, because those three goblins had already attacked him.


    Just afternding on the ground, Sam used his full agility and instantly came in front of them. With an insane speed, he attacked. Those monsters didn''t even sense him.


    His sword cuts one goblin''s chest, but he instantly jumps, avoiding the other two goblin sword attack.


    "Chi!!!" The one goblin, whose chest got cut by Sam''s sword, made that sound. Blood wasing out from the cut mark. The Goblin gets angry and once again runs toward Sam. His other twopanions were also with him.


    Sam with an insane speed attacks the goblins. The Goblin who was in the front was unable to react, and once again, Sam''s sword hit him. But the sword attacks not only just hit him, but the fire also appeared. Yes, Sam used the fire stones'' power.


    "Chi!!!" The Goblin, let out a painful cry. The other two goblins didn''t stop and attacked him. But Sam was already prepared. He instantly kicked one goblin. The Goblin didn''t expect a kick and then sent backward, while Sam attacked the other goblin with his sword.<novelnext></novelnext>


    The Goblin that got cut by him was already sent flying. His body was on fire. He keeps struggling and tries to save his life. But Sam didn''t let go of this chance and attacked him. Those other two goblins didn''t get the chance to attack when Sam''s sword hit the Goblin. This time, Sam''s sword hit the Goblin and the goblin''s body was covered in fire.


    "Chi!!!!!" The goblin began hisst struggle and a few secondster turned into dust. At that time, those two other goblins had already gotten up from the ground and attacked him. Sam avoided their attack and attacked those two Goblins with his sword. Those two goblins already predicted this and avoided the attack.


    _______________________


    At this time,


    Jeni attacks the goblins with her thunder spell. She maintains a distance between her and the goblins. She attacked one goblin with her white lightning, but suddenly the other goblin attacked her from behind. Fortunately, she sensed the attack and jumped away from the ce. She was a spiritual hunter, but that doesn''t mean she doesn''t know any physical move.


    She instantly cast a normal thunder spell and attacked the goblin. It got the Goblin. They''re going to fly. But, she knows this normal thunderbolt wasn''t that powerful, so probably this goblin wasn''t that much injured. Well, the previous one got hit by the white lighting, and he was pretty injured.


    He was stunned all this time, but he could now finally move. He instantly runs toward her.


    __________


    Kenny and Tina fighting one goblin. Still, this goblin was an early D-grade monster. Both of their timing was pretty perfect. If Kenny attacked the monster first, then instantly Tina attacked. It was their strategy. They know they won''t be able to fight on their own, so they use thisbination. And you can say thisbination was pretty good. They also injured the goblin pretty badly.


    ________________


    Tony attacks those two goblins with his sword. Both of the goblins decided to attack him from two sides, but, tong already predicted this and jumped away. He avoided the attack. He then did a backflip in the air and kicked one goblin. The goblin sent flying, and hended on the ground. Just afternding, he didn''t have the chance to react to the goblin and swing his sword.


    The Goblin, seeing the iing sword, also swings his sword. Both the swords sh together. Tony once again kicks the Goblin, wasting no time.


    _______________


    Alexa already seriously injured one goblin, and she wasn''t. Well, she was pretty powerful. As expected from the no 2 holders. She was giving the monsters quite a hard time. It was just a matter of time before she killed the monsters.


    ________________


    Elena attacked one monster with a light spear. It directly hit the Goblin. While the other goblin tried to attack her from behind. But she was pretty quick and jumped away. As the guide said previously, these monsters like to sneak attack.


    Not only her, but all of them were always on guard, even while fighting the goblins. Other goblins could appear when they were fighting and decided to sneak attack them. So, because of them, they were always on guard.


    ____________


    Back to Sam,


    He killed one more Goblin. Only one goblin remained. You can also see a very cut mark in the goblin''s body. Green blood wasing out of the goblin.


    "Chi!!" He let out a cry and once again rushed toward Sam. These goblins also persistently attack him. Even though he was injured, he still attacked Sam.


    Sam suddenly uses a confused ray, and the goblin gets in a daze. Sam used this chance and instantly attacked the goblin and burned him to death.


    He finally sighs in relief. Previously, he could just use the concealment techniques, but then it would create a chance for those monsters to go after others. Because of this, he didn''t use his concealment technique this time. Also, he rarely used his phoenix. Because of this, he didn''t use it today.


    _________To be continued__________.

 Chapter 144 144 - Helping.

    Finally, they killed all the monsters. No one except Kenny and Tina was injured. Well, they also didn''t get that much injured. They were just slightly injured. They didn''t get injured, but they were pretty exhausted. Well, they were facing monsters in their own league, so it wasn''t easy to kill those monsters easily. They decided to rest, then once again they will continue hunting.


    Sometimeter,


    They once again continued advancing. They will kill as many monsters as they can. So, they will get good loot.


    Suddenly, Sam signals them to stop. A group of 5 warriors and a group of 10 monsters were fighting each other. But the warriors were powerful, so they were dominating those Goblin soldiers. It''s just a matter of time before all the goblins will die.


    But, suddenly, sometimes unexpected things happen. More suddenly, 10 more Goblin soldiers ambushed those warriors. Those warriors didn''t expect to be ambushed, so they weren''t able to defend against the sudden attack. Two warriors get badly injured. Now it was 3 against 15 monsters. Those warriors already killed 5 monsters. Two of their spiritual warriors got injured. Well, the situation was pretty bad for them.


    Previously, it wasn''t a problem for them, but now the situation waspletely different. 3 against 15 monsters. Sam and the others were looking at this scene.


    "We should help, or they will be killed," suddenly Jeni said.


    "Don''t worry, we will save them, but don''t make any reckless moves. Jeni, Elena, and I will first attack those goblins from a long distance, and after that, everyone will go to them. Elena and Jeni will help us from a long distance. Also, like those warriors, don''t forget about your surroundings. Now only 10 monsters suddenly ambush them, but who can guarantee that more monsters won''t ambush them? So, always stay alert or our condition could be like theirs." Sam said to them. Everyone nodded after hearing him. They also do all of that. Like how those warriors didn''t stay alert every time about their surroundings. Fortunately, they were here so they could help those warriors. But what could happen if they weren''t here? Only death.


    Sam signals Elena and Jeni to cast their spell. Both of them loaded and started to cast their powerful spell. Sam also brought out his night and started to gather spiritual energy at the arrow. While they were preparing to attack from a long distance, the others were ready to go anytime.


    In just 2 minutes, they already prepared their spell. Sam just nodded in their direction, and instantly, all three of them attacked the monsters.


    Those monsters and those three warriors were unaware of this. Now those three warriors were regretting their earlier decision. If they did not forget about their surroundings, then nothing could happen to them. They could just escape after seeing that the situation wasn''t that good. But now they can''t even escape. Two of their teammates were very injured. They can''t escape right now. They can only fight.


    But suddenly they saw a thunderbolt and a light spearing toward them, or we can say,ing toward the monsters. They did not see the arrow because Sam did not change the attribute of the spiritual energy.


    In just a few seconds, those attacks hit the monsters. Jeni''s thunderbolt instantly killed one monster while some got injured by it. Elena''s spear also killed one monster. Sam''s arrow pierced through a goblin''s head.


    But it did not stop here because all the warriors saw 4 warriorsing in their direction. All this time they were in a daze, so they weren''t able to reach properly.


    Tony, Kenny, Alexa, and Tina rushed toward them. Previously, they weren''t that far from those monsters, so they appeared to be beside those monsters pretty quickly and attacked them. So now it was 10 warriors vs. 12 monsters. Sam, this time, decided to fight from a distance. So, he, Jeni, and Elena will attack from a distance, while Tony and the others will fight at close range.


    Sam once again brings more arrows and coats them with spiritual energy. Well, the previous arrow he shot was differentpared to this coated arrow. Previously, he gathered almost 20% of his spiritual energy in the arrow, but in this simply coated arrow, he was using only his 5% spiritual energy. He called the previous attack, " The spirit attack." He can create those powerful arrows 4 more times, but he can coat these simply 20 times.


    The only letdown of the simple coated arrow was that those monsters''s body''s defenses were pretty tough and sometimes those simply coated arrows won''t be able to pierce through their body''s defense.


    But Sam still decided to use the simplest spiritual energy-coated arrows. Because if he used those powerful arrows, then he could only use them 4 more times, which was pretty dangerous for him. He will use all of his spiritual energy in those five attacks. Because of this, he decided to use the simply spiritual energy-coated arrow. The power of this simply coated arrow will grow when his spiritual energy also grows.


    After seeing these warriors fighting those goblins, those three warriors came out of their daze and instantly attacked those monsters.


    Sam and the other two girls were helping Tony and the others. Sam mainly attacks those monsters'' weak spots. Elena and Jeni also now use normal spells. Like Sam, they weren''t using their powerful spell. Because if they use it, then in the end they will lose their spiritual energy. And in the dungeon, this will be a pretty dangerous situation for them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    So, like this, Tony and the others were attacking those monsters close, and Sam and the other two girls helped them from a distance. Sometimes Tony or the others were getting ambushed Sam shot his Arrow toward the Goblin. Also, like him, Jeni and Elena also were shooting their spells toward the goblins.


    15 minutester,


    Finally, all the monsters were dead. Sam and the two girls approach Tony and the others. Now it was time to collect their loot. They were good people, but they will collect the loot that they deserve.


    ? Ellen first treated those two warriors, who were pretty injured. Only when their situation was stable did she go to collect her loot. Well, those three warriors didn''t stop any of them from collecting their loot. If this was before, then those three warriors will never let anyone take the loot, but the situation wasn''t in their favor. Also, Sam and the others saved their life, so it was naturally time to pay them.


    "Thank you very much for helping us," those three warriors said sincerely. They were pretty arrogant, and overconfident earlier, but not now. In this overconfidence, they forget to stay alert about the surrounding area. Fortunately, Sam and others were there to help them and Save their lives.


    When they all collected their loot, they decided to leave the ce. This ce will attract many more goblins, so it was to leave the ce. But, before leaving, Jeni suddenly came around and told those warriors,


    " I don''t know why you let down your guard, but don''t do this in the future. You can lose your life today. You don''t have to be so reckless. Also, you should also leave the ce. Many monsters will get attracted to this ce, so it will be best if you leave the area quickly." With that said, she turned around with her teammates and left the ce. Those three nodded after hearing Jeni''s words.


    ___________________


    Outside of the dungeon, Central City,


    The warrior association already finished many branches of this dark association. The most frustrating thing was that they still didn''t find the head association of these dark warriors. It was like there wasn''t any dark association headquarters to begin with. If they really exist, then howe those branch associations didn''t have any clue about the headquarters?


    Well, back to the main matter. Today is thest day of the second examination.


    Markus strictly said to everyone to stay alert, and everyone followed that. They were in the capital city because the warriors association decided to take the exam here.


    The most powerful monster grade was peak D-grade. And they were on the fourth floor. On the first floor, they will meet peak E-grade monsters. You will only meet peak E-grade monsters and some early D-grade monsters. On the second floor, you can instantly get attacked by the early D-grade monsters.


    The warriors from the warrior association had already carefully checked this dungeon. They didn''t want anything bad to happen this time.


    All the students who previously got sent back to the association because of the dark association warrior''s ambush.


    Warriors from the association already checked all the floors and, after confirming they didn''t find anything. This means this time there was only little chance those dark association warriors will attack those students today.


    ___________To be continued _____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, hope you are doing well.]

 Chapter 145 145 - Goblin Captain

    "Chi!!!!!!!" A goblin captain roars and attacks Sam and Tony. They tried to defend themselves, but the power was so powerful that Sam and Tony were sent flying.


    Yes, you guessed it right. Right now, they were facing a goblin captain and goblin soldiers. Sam and Tony fight the captain in closebat. Alexa, Jeni, Kenny, and Tina were fighting the soldiers. This time, the Goblin captain is so powerful that Sam wasn''t able to handle this monster alone. So, he and Tony fought the Goblin captain.


    Instantly, a thunderbolt hit the Goblin captain. Jeni killed fighting those soldiers, but seeing that Sam and Tony sent flying, and the goblin captain was about to attack them, she cast a normal thunderbolt and shot toward the Goblin captain.


    The thunderbolt didn''t do that much damage to the monster, but it wasn''t her purpose to injure the captain. Her purpose was to attract the Goblin captain to focus on her. Thanks to that Sam, and Tony got the chance to stabilize their situation.


    Both of them were injured and bleeding. But, it doesn''t mean they will stop. Sam was using his yer, but still, it wasn''t able to cut through the goblin captain''s body''s defense. It only leaves small injuries in the monster''s body. With this, you can think how powerful the goblin captain was. Also, the Goblin captain wears armor.


    Sam channels more spiritual energy to his sword so that the sharpness of the sword increases. Both of them once again rush toward the Goblin captain. This goblin captain was very close to breaking through to the next grade. Because of this, he was so powerful.


    Sam attacks the monster with an instant speed, and finally, he can cut the armor. He instantly backed off, and that time Tony quickly attacked with his sword. This time the Goblin captain wasn''t able to stop Tony''s attack, and the attack hit him. He went backward.


    Tony was panting. Sam came beside him, but his focus was still on the goblin captain.


    "Do you think we get the monsters?" Tony suddenly asked.


    "I don''t think so," Sam said to Tony. He did not think that it would be that easy to kill the Goblin captain. Yes, he can cut the Armor of the Goblin captain, but that doesn''t mean he will win.


    As he predicted, the Goblin captain stood up from the ground and looked at them with his red eyes.


    "Chi!!!!" He roars angrily. In his chest area, you can see a cut mark and blooding through that mark. Sam''s attack cannot cut through the armor, but he was able to also cut the monster''s chest.


    The monster roars, and an overpowering auraes out of him. This aura was many times more powerful than Sam. Sam and Tony were once again ready to attack the goblin captain.


    This time the Goblin captain ?quickly came to them and attacked with his big sword. But Sam and Tony were prepared this time. They quickly jumped to the side to avoid the attack. This time, the attack of the monster was so powerful that the ground got destroyed after getting hit by the monster''s big sword.


    Now it was a tough situation for Sam. He won''t be able to maintain the energy mode that long. He already used half of his spiritual energy fighting this Goblin captain. But still, the Goblin captain wasn''t that injured. He needed to think of a n, as it could be dangerous for him and Tony.


    Elena, Jeni, Alexa, Kenny, and Tina were fighting 10 goblin soldiers. All of them were injured. Kenny and Tina this time were very injured. They were bleeding, but still fighting with these monsters.


    They never expected that their situation would be like this. Well, some time ago, after healing those warriors, they left the ce and advanced through the jungle. After finding a suitable spot, they decided to rest. But, who thought out of nowhere, a goblin captain and 10 goblin soldiers attack them? If it was just goblin soldiers then, it won''t be that much of a problem, but this goblin was also with them. Just feeling the aura of the goblin captain, they could tell that they weren''t his match. So, Sam and Tony attacked the goblin captain together.


    Well, now back to the present, Jeni instantly casts a normal thunderbolt and attacks the monster that is about to attack Kenny from behind. She was panting. After continuously casting this many spells, now she was very tired. Those monsters didn''t give her the chance to cast the white lighting. So, she can only cast normal thunderbolts. She was continuously fighting those monsters and also helping the others. Because of this, she was feeling pressure.<novelnext></novelnext>


    The condition of Elena was also the same. She was continuously casting light shields and light spears. Because of this, she was feeling so much burden in her body. Also, the main thing was that she was low on spiritual energy.


    Alexa''s situation also wasn''t that good. She was fighting these monsters in closebat. Those monsters were continuously attacking her from every side. So, she didn''t get the chance to back off. If you can get armor also damaged by the monster''s attack.


    "Alexa, Crouch!!!!!!!," Suddenly Jeni shouted at her. Alexa, without any dy, crouches down, and the monster that is about to attack him from behind wasn''t able to be sessful. That monster instantly got hit by a thunderbolt. Alexa didn''t let this chance go and quickly swung her sword upward. Instantly, the head of the monster fell down.


    He noticed one monster was about to attack her, so he instantly jumped away and avoided the monster''s attack. That monster instantly got hit by the light spear. It pierced through his body''s defense and now the monster was dead. Finally, only 4 monsters remain out of 10 monsters.


    Kenny and Tina''s situation weren''t that good. They pant heavily and at any moment, they will lose the strength to fight.


    Jeni gets to cast white lighting, because Alexa Fighting two goblin soldiers, whereas Elena was fighting one. So, she got the chance to cast the white lighting.


    In less than two minutes, she finished casting and, with no dy, threw toward the goblin that was about to attack Tina and Kenny.


    "Kenny, and Tina, quickly jump," Jeni shouted at them. Kenny and Tina, hearing Jeni''s word, instantly jumped to the side, and the monsters got hit by the white lighting. The monster was finally dead. But, Jeni didn''t rx, she once again cast the white lighting.


    After finishing casting, she didn''t dy and instantly attacked the goblins that were fighting Alexa. One goblin seemed to predict this and jumped away. So, only one goblin got hit. But Alexa didn''t let go of the chance and quickly attacked the goblin with her most powerful attack. Triple sh. In less than a second, she will be able to sh three times. The goblin soldier wasn''t able to avoid the attack this time and his body split into three parts.


    Jeni at this time throws a normal thunderbolt at the goblin that Elena was fighting. The goblin saw the thunderbolting toward him and jumped away. But this was enough time for Elena to make a spear and throw it toward the goblin. The goblin was finally dead. All the girls were able to kill all the goblin soldiers.


    Kenny and Tina instantly fell down to the ground. Jeni, Elena, and Alexa quicklye to them. Jeni quickly brought out two health potions and gave them. Kenny and Tina still weren''t unconscious, so they drank the potion. Well, it was a high-grade health potion. They will recover quickly. Jeni, Elena, and Alexa also bring out health potions and spirit potions. But they were still on guard. More Goblins cane to them, so because of this, they were prepared and drank the potion to recover their strength. They were now looking in Sam and Tony''s direction.


    Both of them were covered in blood and fighting the goblin captain. The goblin captain was also seriously injured. He also lost one of his hands.


    Sam attacks the captain, but the goblin captain seems to predict the attack and avoid it. But Tony instantly appears beside him and attacks. The goblin captain also swings his sword. Both Tony and the goblin captain''s sword shed. This the goblin captain wasn''t able to attack properly because of this the attack wasn''t that powerful. Sam used this chance to attack the monster.


    But the goblin captain also wasn''t ideal. He kicked Tony and sent him flying, and jumped away to avoid Sam''s attack. Well, Sam wasn''t at his full speed because of this the goblin captain was able to dodge the attack.


    "Chi!!!!" the goblin captain once again roared and was about to attack Sam. Sam and Tony were once again ready to defend, but at this time, suddenly, a white thunderbolt and light spear hit the Goblin captain and sent him flying.


    _______________To be continued______________

 Chapter 146 - 146 - Berserker Technique

    "Chi!!!!" the goblin captain once again roared and was about to attack Sam. Sam and Tony were once again ready to defend, but at this time, suddenly, a white thunderbolt and light spear hit the Goblin captain and sent him flying.


    Sam and Tony turned around and saw that it was the girls who wereing toward them. The girls recover some of their strength, so theye to Sam and Tony to help them kill the captain.


    Elena came beside them and instantly cast a healing ray. Both Sam and Tony''s injuries were getting healed. Jeni and Alexa look at the monster seriously. Jeni already started to cast her spell, and Alexa was ready with her sword. Kenny and Tina didn''te because their injuries were pretty serious, so they will need some time to heal properly. They were still lying down on the ground.


    Finally, Sam and Tony stopped bleeding. Their injuries were now stabilized. Sam quickly brought a spirit energy potion. He was very low on spiritual energy and needed to recover. Fortunately, previously he already upgraded his energy recovery technique to B-grade. He was already using that technique in his power.


    At that time, the monsters were already getting up from the ground and looking at them with their red eyes. He was badly injured, but you can notice that slowly, his injuries were getting better. It was like he had a healing technique.


    Sam already knows about this, so he wasn''t surprised. Previously, the guide also said this. It was happening because this dungeon was helping those goblins to recover. The more powerful the goblin, the more power quickly he will get healed.


    "Don''t give him any chance. Attack¡­ " Sam quicklymanded. Well, he didn''t want to give time to the monster to recover.


    Jeni, hearing hismand, instantly shoots her white lightning toward the goblin captain. Alexa also wasn''t slow. She uses her triple sh.


    He wasn''t able to dodge the white lightning. The white lightning quickly came to his side and hit him. The goblin captain let out a painful cry. This time, Alexa already came beside him and attacked him. The previous attack already stunned him, so he wasn''t able to move, also after getting hit by the triple sh. He got very injured and once again sent flying.


    "Did we get him?" Jeni suddenly asked.


    Sam came beside him and said, " No, the defense of this monster is pretty tough. This wasn''t able to kill him. To kill him, we needed to attack together. Everyone get ready."


    Sam told them and, hearing this, everyone got ready with their most powerful attack. Jeni and Elena were ready with their most powerful spell. Sam, Tony, and Alexa were also ready for their powerful attack.


    Sam channeled as much spiritual energy into the sword to make the sword sharpest. In this attack, he wanted to finish the goblin captain.


    "Chi!!!!!!!!," The goblin captain gave an angry roar and with his big sword rushed toward them.


    Jeni and Elena wasted no time shooting the spells. It instantly hit the Goblin captain. The goblin captain let out a painful cry after being hit by these two spells. Sam, Tony, and Alexa didn''t let go of this chance. They came beside the monster and instantly attacked him from three different directions. Finally, the goblin captain got cut by theirbined attack, and he was dead.


    Until the goblin captain didn''t be dust, nobody rxed. But the moment they saw the body of the goblin captain bing dust. Sam and the other finally sigh in relief. They fell down to the ground. In this attack, they used all of their power. So, they fell down and panting.


    "Haha, we finally did it. Guys, we finally killed that goblin captain," Tony suddenly said with a smile. Well, he and San fought this Goblin captain from the start, and now they are able to kill him. So, he was naturally happy. They also knew that it was risky to lie down like this. They didn''t have the power to move. When they recover some of their strength, only then will they move from this ce.


    They were unaware of the fact that 20 goblin soldiers wereing toward them. It''s just a matter of time. Those Goblins make no sounding toward them.


    Well, if this was before, then Sam and the other would probably already sense them. But now they weren''t in that condition.


    "Guys!!!!!!!!" Kenny and Tina suddenly called them. Instantly, all of them sit down. They wanted to know the reason behind this call. But they were shocked. More Goblinsing out from the forest.


    These scenes made everyone frightened. This was the thing they were afraid of previously, but this was happening. More Goblinsing toward them.


    Jeni and the others didn''t even have the strength to stand up. They can only look at the goblins with their scared eyes. How could they fight this goblin now? They didn''t even have the strength to stand up. Is this the end for them?


    "Haha, I never expected that one day I will be killed by the goblin. How pathetic I am." Tony mocked himself.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Kenny and Tina were rushing toward them. They recovered a little, so they were rushing here to fight.


    "Don''te guys. You two escape." Jeni suddenly said. But Kenny and Tina didn''t stop. They are still rushing here.


    All of them got up from the ground with their shaking legs. Even though they will die, they didn''t want to die in a pathetic way. They will fight them until theirst breath.


    "Haha, let''s fight until ourst breath," Tony said.


    But, suddenly, Sam started to walk past them and went toward the goblins with his sword.


    "Sam!!!!! What are you doing?" Jeni suddenly called him. But Sam didn''t stop. He just turned around and said to them with a smile,


    "Guys, don''t worry, I will handle them. It just saves me after that."


    He once again turned around and looked at those. Jeni and the others didn''t understand what Sam meant. But they were getting a bad feeling.


    Sam looked at the goblins and released a deep breath. He mentally prepared himself to use hisst trump card. He didn''t want to use this, because it has pretty bad side effects. But he has no choice.


    Sam was nning to use the Berserker technique. Yes, you heard it right, his Berserker technique. Previously, one time he used it, but after he deactivated the technique, he felt so much pain that he almost became unconscious. Today he doesn''t know what will happen, and because of this, he didn''t want to use this. But, looking at the situation, he needed to use it. Unfortunately, this was still the day, so he can''t use the moon technique.


    After activating the technique, he will have 5 minutes to get them off. Wasting no time, he activated the technique. Instantly, he felt so much strength that he couldn''t imagine.


    Jeni and the others who were looking at him instantly get shocked by the scene. Some time ago, Sam didn''t have any strength, but suddenly he released the aura of an intermediate D-grade warrior. What happened? Why did Sam suddenly be like this? They all wanted to know. But they didn''t make any sound and looked at Sam.


    Sam already appeared beside the monsters and attacked them. He can''t waste any minutes. Every minute is valuable for him.


    Those 20 goblin soldiers also didn''t back down and attacked him from every direction. Left, right, straight, and even backside. Sam, with his superior speed, dodged the attack and killed those goblins. He can''t get hit by the goblin. His defense, after activating the Berserker technique, decreased. So he needed to be careful about that.


    He was like a savage beast killing those goblins. He cut those like he was cutting paper. 3 goblins attack him from behind. He jumped away and back flipped in the air and attacked those 3 goblins.


    Just after hended, 2 goblins attacked him from his left and right side. He instantly crouches down and avoids the attack. Instantly, swung his sword to the left side and punched the other goblin.


    Jeni and the others were silent, watching this scene with a shocked expression. This was the first time they saw someone fight like this. Sam was just dominating the monsters.


    "Hahaha, who can expect that he still has this much strength? But why didn''t he use this strength earlier?" Suddenly Tony asked.


    " I don''t think he was hiding his strength. There is something odd if you like him. His eyes were red and you can also see his blood vessels. It was looking like they wereing out of his body. I don''t think it is normal. Guys, don''t know why, but I am feeling ufortable." Jeni said suddenly. Only then does everyone notice Sam''s condition. As she said, Sam''s eyes are really red.


    ____________To be continued _____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, I hope you like the chapter.]

 Chapter 147 147 - Wake Up

    " I don''t think he was hiding his strength. There is something odd if you like him. His eyes were red and you can also see his blood vessels. It was looking like they wereing out of his body. I don''t think it is normal. Guys, don''t know why, but I am feeling ufortable." Jeni said suddenly. Only then does everyone notice Sam''s condition. As she said, Sam''s eyes are really red.


    If you see right, then you can tell he wasn''t his right kind while attaching those goblins. Sometimeter, blood came out of his mouth and body.


    Jeni and the others shout at him to stop, but it was like Sam right now wasn''t able to hear him. He only kills and kills.


    Like this, 3 minutester, Sam finally killed all the monsters and finally stopped. Everyone sighed in relief and quickly rushed toward him. Sam was still bleeding from his body. He suddenly fell down to the ground.


    "Ah!!!!!!!" When everyone came beside him, everyone was stunned after hearing his screaming. Sam suddenly screamed. It was like he was feeling pain in his body. Everyone tried to call him, but no response. He only screams. Elena quickly crouches down and starts using the healing ray. She recovered some of her strength, so using that to cast healing rays. Jeni quickly brings out a healing potion and spreads it all over his body.


    But still, he was screaming. His eyes were white and looked like he didn''t have any life signs in them. Tony, Kenny, Tina, and Alexa tried to call him. But no response.


    Sometimeter, he lost consciousness. Jeni quickly checks his pulse. Tony and the others are looking at her. They wanted to know the result.


    "His heart is still breathing." With that said, tears came out of her eyes. Not only Elena, but the other girls also started crying. Tony wanted to cry, but he was a man. How can he cry in front of the girls?


    Tony carefully picks him up and said to the girls,


    "Stop crying. He isn''t dead. We need to get out of here. He needs medical attention." Tony said to everyone. All the girls nodded and got up from the ground. They also know that they need to leave this ce.


    They also picked up the loot and left the ce. They won''t be going into this forest. There they can meet the goblin captain, who was going to the outside area. There, they will face only goblin soldiers.


    All of them are drinking a health potion and spirit energy potions. So that they can recover quickly.


    3 hourster, they found a suitable spot to camp. All three sides were blocked by the big trees, and only one side was open. They decided to rest there. After this tough battle, they really needed some rest.


    Because of the potions and Elena''s healing ray, Sam''s condition, you can say, was now stable. But he still didn''t wake up.


    "Did anyone bring themunicator?" Tony asked. Jeni and the other girls looked at each other. They shook their heads. This time, they didn''t bring anymunication devices. This time, they thought they were all going to the dungeon, so there wouldn''t be any problem. Well, this was a mistake they made. They didn''t know if Sam had themunication device. He was unconscious, so this was out of the question.


    It was now nighttime. Tomorrow, if Sam still hasn''t woken up, they will walk toward the entrance of the dungeon. They will need to leave the dungeon.


    All of them brought out the food. It was like they didn''t want to eat their food, but they still were eating because it would help them recover their energy. After finishing their dinner, they decide who guards the ce and when they will guard.


    Kenny and Tina will be the first person to guard, while others will sleep. The othery down to sleep. But no one noticed that spiritual energy was going to Sam. He was absorbing the spiritual energy when he was unconscious.


    ____________


    Next day,


    They were going towards the entrance of the dungeon. Sam still didn''t wake up and for this, they all were anxious. They wanted to go out as quickly as they could.


    "Chi!!!!" Suddenly, they heard many goblin voices. Instantly, they be alert. They can''t be careless. Sam still didn''t wake up and because of this, he won''t be able to help them.


    Tony signals them to stay silent. All of them make no sound, focus on the monster''s sound. It did not look like those monsters wereing toward them. But still, they needed to be alert.


    But they did not know how wrong they were. Because sometimeter they suddenly got ambushed by the goblin soldier. Fortunately, there weren''t any goblin captains this time.


    "Kenny, and Tina. You two protect Sam. We will fight these goblins," Jeni said to them.


    Tony puts Sam down on the ground, and instantly both girls stand beside him. Even if they lost their lives, they would protect Sam.


    Tony, Elena, Alexa, and Jeni were ready to fight. Alexa and Tina were ready with their swords, and Elena and Jeni were ready with their spells. They can now easily fight them, but they need to worry about the goblins and Sam.<novelnext></novelnext>


    At that time, Sam still didn''t wake up. He opened his eyes suddenly and found that he was floating in the air.


    "Where am I?" This was the question he has right now. He can''t see anything around him. Only darkness. He tried to use his power, but he could not do it. Suddenly, a person appeared in front of him.


    This person was ady who looked at Sam. Her full body was glowing because of this. Sam was unable to see her face.


    "Be careful, you need to hide from the Geon Army. You weren''t strong enough to fight with them." With that said, thedy extended her hand and touched Sam''s head. This was the only thing he remembered when woke up. This time, he was originally awake and wasn''t dreaming. He can see Kenny and Tina in front of him. They were probably protecting him, then looked at the distance. He saw Tony, Jeni, Alexa, and Elena fighting those goblin soldiers.


    It didn''t look like they would need his help this time. So, now he began to think, "Who was thatdy? Why did she suddenly appear in my dream? What is the Geon force?


    But now the key question is, was that a dream? But he clearly felt touched by someone when thedy touched his hair.


    He suddenly opens his status window.


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade D) (00%)


    [You can erase your presence. Nobody will be able to find you if they didn''t have the superior observed technique. Their observed technique needed to be higher grade than yours.]


    Superior spirit concealment (grade D) (0%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique. Until the other party has superior observed technique.] "


    He noticed that his stealth and spirit concealment technique became normal to superior stealth and also it became grade D. But the main thing was that only with superior observed technique anyone will be able to find them. Sam is confused about this part. He never heard about this superior observed technique.


    Thatdy said that he wasn''t strong enough to protect himself, so he needed to hide. This lights up a fire inside of him. He needed to be powerful. Only then he would get to meet thedy and learn about the Geon Army.


    A few minutester, Jeni and the others finished killing the monsters and came toward him. Until now, no one noticed that he woke up. When they came closer, Sam suddenly said to them,


    "Nice job."


    All of them were startled and looked in his direction. Kenny and Tina also turned around and looked at him.


    "Haha, why are you looking at me like that? Did you see any type of ghost?" Sam told a joke. He knows they were probably worried about him. The previous day, he only remembered the pain he felt and the voice of his friends. He heard his friends calling him, but he didn''t have the power to respond. In the end, everything became ck for him.


    Hearing his joke, everyone came back to their senses and rushed at him. They all hug him. They were very worried about him. If something happens to him, then what would they answer about his sister Gloria? Also, the main thing was that he became like this when he was protecting them.


    After somethingter, everyone stopped hugging.


    "How are you feeling, right? Any difort?" Tony asked.


    "No," Sam shook his head. He was feeling fine now.


    "Haha, bro, you don''t even know how worried we were yesterday? After killing all those monsters, you suddenly started to scream. You are also bleeding from your whole body." Tony tells him about his situation.


    __________ To be continued __________


    [A/N: Hey guys, I am really sorry about my grammatical mistake. But I am trying to improve and also using the Grammarly app (free version). But still, there were many grammatical mistakes. Just give me some days. I will buy the premium version and then edit all the chapters from the beginning.]

 Chapter 148 148 - Home

    "Haha, bro, you don''t even know how worried we were yesterday? After killing all those monsters, you suddenly started to scream. You are also bleeding from your whole body." Tony tells him about his situation.


    Sam just listened to his exnation silently and nodded. He knows seeing his situation, they should be really worried yesterday.


    "I am really sorry guys for making you worried." He apologized to everyone.


    " Haha, don''t worry about it, bro. We are the ones that should say thank you. If you are not there, we don''t know if we are still alive right now," Tony said to him. Everyone nodded, hearing him. They all agree with him. Because Sam was there and used that technique to kill those monsters, they were still alive. One by one they said thank you.


    "Don''t worry about it, guys. Now our main focus should stay on the outside area of the forest. Here we will meet only the Goblin soldiers and we won''t be meeting any Goblin captains. This is the best solution for us. We are not ready to face the Goblin captains. So because of this, I am saying this." Sam told everyone. All of them heard his words and nodded. They agree with him. Currently, they were not powerful enough to face the Goblin captains.


    Fortunately, they were in the outside area of the forest. Sam felt hungry after waking up, so all the others decided to take some rest while they also ate their food.


    This time, they found a suitable ce to camp and rest. Everyone brings out their food and starts eating. Sam doesn''t know why, but he was starvingpared to other days. He had already eaten a lot of food, but still, he was feeling hungry.


    "Is this because of thedy?" Sam thought in his mind. But who can answer his question?


    A few minutester, they were now searching for the monsters. Well, they weren''t alone in the outside area. Like this, there were many people who were hunting goblins from the outside area. Because of this, in the outside area, there were many monsters. They needed to go to some quiet ce where the warriors weren''t fighting the goblins.


    Sometimeter,


    They finally found a group of 10 goblins.


    "Well, guys, what are we waiting for? Let''s go. Let''s kill the monster." Sam said to others. All the others nodded hismand.


    __________________


    23rd September,


    Sam and the others finally came out of the dungeon. These few days, they are all fighting those goblins in the outside area of the forest. They did not try to approach the inner area because there they can meet many Goblin captains.


    Now, if you were wondering why they did not absorb all those crystals that they got from those goblins? Well, this was because, in a dungeon, you cannot carelessly absorb crystals. While observing the crystal, you won''t be able to keep your guard. Because of this, you can get attacked by the monsters. Because of this, all the warriors did not absorb the crystals inside the dungeon.


    Well, they cane hereter when they be a college student. Because of this, they weren''t in a hurry. All of them went to the warrior association to sell the unnecessary loot. After everything was done, they left the city and wereing toward the central city.


    It will only take one hour to reach here because of this. They did not want to waste that time in Oron city. All of them were tired, but they did not want to rest there. They can rest when they reach their home.


    1 hourter,


    Sam finally reaches his sister''s house. He got out of the car and said goodbye to them. Tony and the others also said goodbye to him and left. Sam started walking toward the house. He didn''t know if his sister was at home or not. But fortunately, he has a spare key to her house.


    When he reaches the front door of the house, he notices ?the door was locked from the inside. It means his sister was home. He clicks the calling Bell, and a few secondster, Gloria opens the door.


    Sam noticed that his sister was in her training clothes. That means the sister was training while he came.


    "Hello, sis. How are you?" Sam entered the house and asked his sister.


    "Fine. How was your hunting?" She asked Sam.


    "Well, not that bad. We mostly stay in the outside area of the forest. We realize that our power is not enough to face the goblin captains. Because of this, we decided to stay in the outside area. Here we can get the loot and also kill the Goblin soldiers. We will go to the dungeon another time, when we be more powerful." Some exin his hunting. Well, he did not talk about the Berserker technique or his side effects. This will make her worry about him and she won''t be able to pay attention to heart training.


    Sam went to his room and went to the bathroom. He needs to freshen up, then he will eat and finally will rest. Gloria, at this time, is cooking food for her brother. Well, she knows that her brother is quite tired right now. So, she was making lunch for him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    She was practicing from 6:00 a.m. and now the time is 1:00 p.m. This was the reason that she cooked food for her brother. She also wanted to rest for some time, then she will once again start her training.


    "Sis, did mom and dad, still in the dungeon?" Sam asked her when they were eating.


    " No, they are outside of the dungeon. They wille here tomorrow," Gloria answered him. Sam just nodded.


    "Did you get injured in the dungeon?" Suddenly she asked him.


    "No, no. We didn''t go that deep inside the forest. So we only fight some goblin soldiers. It wasn''t that difficult to handle those goblins." Sam quickly said that. He didn''t want to lie, but still, he didn''t tell her the truth. For some time, Gloria looked at him. It was like she was trying to see if he was telling the truth or not. Then she just nodded, and once again focused on eating.


    After finishing eating their food, Sam was now in his room. He wasying down in the bed and looking at his system window.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600 / 600)


    Strength: 27 + 3


    Agility: 25 + 2


    Physique: 26 + 1


    Intelligent(mental power): 19+1


    Spirit: 16 + 2


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 30k "


    He still did not have that point to upgrade his other technique, but that won''t be a problem for now. He can go to the dungeon many times as he can collect upgrade points. Then he will upgrade all his techniques.


    While thinking all of that, he fell asleep. These few days, he wasn''t able to sleep peacefully. Also, after that side effect, he really needed a good rest, that he really didn''t get in the dungeon.


    At 5:00 p.m., woke up from his sleep. After washing up his face with cold water, he went to the hall room. He can''t see his sister. It means she wasn''t home, and probably she was with her teacher. Sam previously also noticed that sometime Alena and Gloria went somewhere. He thinks they would probably go to the dungeon. Because his sister can''t just practice at home, she also needed to go to the dungeons to kill those monsters.


    He just sits down on the sofa and turns on the TV. Let''s watch some news. The moment he turned on the TV, and saw the headline of the news that the second examination was alsopleted and they also already published the result.


    In the news, there was a showing of the results to everyone whileparing those results with the previous students'' results. Sam can also see those results. Those warriors who got a second chance did pretty well. They also had pretty good numbers, so they can join a good college. If everything went normal while he was giving the exam, then his result should be like theirs. He really never wanted to show his two strengths to anyone.


    Well, it doesn''t matter, people only remember him for a few days, then they will forget him if he achieved nothing big. We can enjoy this for a few days, then he will once again be a low-key character. That was his n right now.


    If you were asking why he wanted a Low key character? Because he did not really like the attention of other people. Also, with his system, he can grow stronger fasterpared to others, so if he really didn''t hide his power, then everyone will be suspicious of him and want to know his secrets. It can even harm his family.


    _____________To be continued______________

 Chapter 149 149 - College Booth

    If you were asking why he wanted a Low key character? Because he did not really like the attention of other people. Also, with his system, he can grow stronger, and faster than others, so if he really didn''t hide his power, everyone would be suspicious of him and want to know his secrets. It can even harm his family.


    Also, there was the Geon Army. That mysteriousdy told him to hide from them because he wasn''t strong enough. Well, he just cleared his head. Enough thinking, let''s go for a walk. Well, I think those children were practicing this time. Let''s go there. Sam came out of his house and started walking toward the training grounds.


    The sun was going down. Well, what beautiful scenery. He was going toward the training while he looked at the sunset. After that, he reached the training ground and as he expected, many children were there and practicing. Well, the old grandpa was also there. He watched all their practice. This grandpa didn''t take money to teach these little kids. He was teaching these kids because he was bored. Previously, Sam asked him about this, and the old grandpaughingly said that he was teaching these kids because he was bored.


    Well, Everyone has their own reason and Sam didn''t want to find out about it. He approached the field.


    _____________________


    25th September,


    Finally, the day when everyone will join a college. There were students like Sam and the others who can choose their own college, and also there were some students, who were waiting for college to choose them.


    Sam wakes up early in the morning and does some light exercise. Well, these 2 days he decided to rest his body. He got up from his bed and walked to the bathroom to wash his face with cold water.


    After everything is done, he walks toward the kitchen. His mom and dad already came here yesterday. His mom was cooking in the kitchen. While his dad was sitting in the chair and reading the newspaper. He can''t see his sister. She should be training.


    "Good morning, Dad. Good morning mom,". Sam greets both of his parents and sits down in the chair. Well, you have to say, this house that Gloria got was really very big. There were many rooms, a big kitchen, and a dining room.


    "Good morning Son." His dad and mom also greet him.


    " Wait just sometimes. I need some time to make your breakfast." Hina said to her son, Sam. He just nodded, hearing his mom''s word.


    " Did you decide which college to choose?" Victor suddenly asked him.


    "Yes," Sam answered.


    " Good. You can decide on any college, we won''t give you under any pressure. It is your own decision. We will always support you," Victor also said to him.


    " Thanks, Dad." Sam smiled and said to him, He really has a good family in this life.


    A few minutester,


    Sam finished his breakfast and got from his seat. He walked toward his room. He still had time to go to the warrior association and submit the college joining form.


    Now he was thinking about those two new concealment techniques. They both be superior concealment techniques, and only people with Superior observation techniques can know their location or know their grades.


    So that if the person had normal observation technique, even if the power was an S - grade, still the warrior won''t be able to find Sam. Only a Superior observation technique is needed. Also, he doesn''t know if the saints know about the superior technique or if they have any. But he can''t just ask them about it.


    He sighed and opened his status window.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600/600)


    Strength: 30 + 7


    Agility: 27+ 6


    Physique: 27+ 7


    Intelligent(mental power): 20+6


    Spirit: 16 + 2


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 30k "


    His status also increased after absorbing all the crystals He got from the dungeon. Well, he didn''t get any spirit crystal so; it stayed the same.


    _________________________


    A few minutester,


    Sam and his family were now heading toward the headquarters of the warrior association. Well, they will submit their college name and from this, they will be college students.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam can see many people outside of the warrior association headquarters. Like them, they also park their car and walk into the association. All of them came here to apany their child or the students who came here to choose the college.


    The moment they got out of the car, all the people in the outside area halted and looked at them. Now, this was awkward. Both Victor and Hina see thisugh awkwardly. They really have wonderful children and, coincidentally, both of them were genius. They were really proud of their children.


    Gloria came here to apany her brother and also to meet her teacher. This was why all the people looked at them like this. Two geniuses appear at the same time. This brother-sister duo will shake the world.


    Gloria and Sam didn''t mind the public and directly entered the association. Like the outside area where they also can see many people. Well, the association still hasn''t started the process. So, they needed to wait.


    Gloria decided to take us to the waiting room. All the A-grade warriors have their own cabin. Alena also had a cabin. Gloria takes them there. She came here often, and she always went to her teacher''s cabin when she needed to wait. Alena had already given her permission to use the cabin.


    " Sam!!! Here," suddenly he heard someone calling him. He turned around and saw it was Tony calling him.


    "Go l, talk to your friend. We will be at the cabin." Victor said to him. Sam nodded and started going toward Tony. Tony wasn''t alone. With him was a tiny little girl standing there. The little girl holding Tony''s hand and looking in Sam''s direction.


    "Hey, buddy. How are you?" Tony said.


    "Fine," Sam said and looked at the girl.


    " Let me introduce you. This is my little sister, Ang." Tony introduces her sister.


    Sam crunched down and said to the little girl.


    " Hello, little Ang," Sam said to her with a sweet smile. Little Ang instantly hides behind Tony. She was pretty shy.


    "My name is Ang Taylor," suddenly Sam heard a sweet voice. Little Ang introduced her.


    "Nice to meet you, little Ang. I am Sam Kainer." Sam said to her.


    Little Ang peeks at him, seeing him smile. Sam stood up.


    "Where are you waiting?" Sam asked Tony. Tony pointed to him. He and his family are waiting there.


    "So, did you decide which college you want to join?" Tony asked him. Previously, when Sam''s friends asked him, he didn''t tell anyone about this. Only said that he wasn''t sure.


    "Yes," Sam said to him. Tony nodded, hearing him. He didn''t ask about the college. He can see what college he will attendter.


    "Did you see the others?" Sam suddenly asked.


    " No, I only saw Alexa. She went to her cabin. But I don''t see the others." Tony said. Sam nodded.


    They talked some more and went to their own cabin after that.


    ______________


    Sometimeter,


    "Attention, Every student. Come into the hall room. We will be starting college admission." Suddenly, Markus informs every student.


    Everyone startsing into the hall room. Sam left the cabin and started walking toward the hall room. He was on the 2nd floor and the hall room on the ground floor. Victor, Hina, or Gloria didn''t apany him. Well, this was just a simple matter, so they only waited in the cabin. Sam also meets Tony and little Ang. They are also going to the lift.


    "Why are you bringing her?" Sam asked him.


    "Sigh, she didn''t want to leave. So mom told me to bring her alone." Tony said.


    " Sam and Tony, wait," they both suddenly hear voices from behind. They turned around and saw it was the girls. All of them came here.


    Sam and Tony wait in front of the lift for them.


    Sometimeter, they were in the hall room. Many students were there. The moment they enter, all the students start ncing at them. Sam and the others didn''t care about them. All of them looked in front of them. A warrior suddenly walked there and started to tell,


    "Hello, students. The booth of every college is outside in the field. We didn''t have that big ce here, so we organized the college there. I don''t think I need to tell you what to do. Still, the college you wanted to choose at that college booth registers your name. The College will decide if they want to admit you to their college. 1 dayter you will get to know what the result is. So, students go to the field, but don''t rush. Also, the Top 10 will be the first to go." With that said, the warrior finishes his speech.


    Sam, Tony, and the girls were now walking toward the field. Everyone makes a way for them. Well, this was the respect that top 10 students get.


    ______________To be continued _____________

 Chapter 150 150 - Once Gain Going Into The Goblin Dungeon

    Sam and the other top 10 students left the hall room and came to the field. They can see many college booths there. Well, students can register their names in any of the college booths. After registering their name, in two days they will get the result if their name was on the college candidates'' list.


    Jeni, Tony, Elena, and Alexa, all of them went toward the Royal academy booths. Pijus, L, and Gustav went to the White tiger academy. James and Aliya went toward the Golden Dawn academy. Only now Sam was standing there and still didn''t go to any booths. Well, he was just thinking was right or wrong.


    "Sigh." After so much thinking, he decided to forget about it and just choose. He walked toward his friends. Yes, you guessed it right, he was going to the Royal academy. This was the final decision he made. Teacher Alena, his sister, and his friends also joined the Royal Academy, so he decided to register his name in the Royal academy. He thought about the futureter. Right now, the main thing was to register his name.


    Well, at this Tony and the others became happy after seeing Sames to the Royal academy. For a few minutes, they were disappointed that Sam wouldn''t being to the Royal academy. But seeing himing toward them, they be happy.


    "Haha, bro, for a minute you make us worried. I thought you would choose another college." Tony said,ughingly. Sam just smiles, hearing his words.


    A few minutester, after sessfully registering his name, Sam and the others were now in the hall room of the association. Sam''s mom and dad already left the association while Gloria was still in her cabin with Alena. Well, she has something to do with Alena.


    "So, the college will start on the 1st of October," Tony said. Well, they were discussing what they should do after entering college. In college, they also needed to choose their course and teacher. Also, when they get free time, they will enter the dungeon. Also, they needed to collect credit points in college. You can collect credit points bypleting missions given by the college. You can also collect credit points through your loot.


    You just need to give your good loot to the college, and they will give you credit points. If you were asking about the uses of the credit points, then inside of the college you can only use credit points. If you have credit points, then you will get a good training facility, also to buy food on the college campus. You need credit points. These were some basic things that Gloria told Sam.


    Also, you can also choose your own teacher or the teacher will choose you if your performance is better. Choosing your teacher still needed 6 months. In these 6 months, the college will observe you and your achievements. Based on this, you can also get good credit.


    After taking a while, they left the association. Tony dropped Sam at his house. Well, Sam didn''t want to drive a car, so he told Tony. After saying goodbye to Tony, he entered the house. Just entering the house, the aroma of delicious food suddenly hit him.


    "Growl¡­ Growl," suddenly his stomach made this sound. Just smelling the aroma. He was feeling hungry. His mom was cooking. He quickly went to his room and freshened up. After that, he came to the dining room and told his mom that he was hungry.


    "Haha, darling, you always stay hungry," Hina said,ughing at her son.


    " For many days, I still haven''t eaten the food that you make. I really miss the test, mom." Sam said with a smile.


    ________________________


    A few minutester,


    He was now in his room and thinking about his next n. He and his family shifted to Central City. Because both Gloria and Sam will be staying in the central city from now on, Victor and Hina were also nning to stay in the central city. Well, this will be good for Sam.


    Nowing to the second part, Sam was nning to go to the previous dungeon. Well, this time he was nning to go alone. Well, the main thing was that he wanted to test his superior stealth technique. He wanted to know how those monsters would react. The good thing was that his superior stealth and concealment techniques now needed less spiritual energy than before. Well, this was a good thing. So he wanted to try these new techniques in the dungeon.


    Sam decided that he will go tomorrow to the dungeon and then, before 1st October, he wille back and attend college.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ___________________


    The next day, 26th September,


    He was now going toward the dungeon. He already told his mom and dad that he will be going to the dungeon. Now, he has the strength to protect himself, so Victor and Gloria didn''t stop him. They also know that they can''t stop him. They just told him to stay careful in the dungeon. Gloria yesterday enter a dungeon yesterday. She will need some time to return from the dungeon. Because of this, he was unable to meet his sister. He also told his friends that he was going to a low-grade dungeon.


    Well, the main thing was that he didn''t tell anyone about his destination. Well, he knows if he tells his family and his friends that he was nning to go to the goblin dungeon alone, then his family won''t allow him, or his friends want to tag along with him. He just told them he was going to a low-grade dungeon in the central city to train his sword.


    It didn''t take that much time to reach the Oron city''s goblin dungeon. He put the car in his inventory and started walking toward the dungeon. This time he was wearing his old Armor and wearing a mask. He goes there with his identity as the mask.


    As you can guess, he already activated his stealth techniques and easily entered the dungeon without being noticed by anyone. This time he was nning to use his sword techniques and wanted to be familiar with those techniques faster. Like his other two sword techniques, the Neo sword style was a great technique for assassins. The best surprise attack.


    After going into the forest, he saw a group of goblin soldiers. Well, no warriors near them, so those goblins will be his prey. He already brought out his yer and already coated the sword with 30% of his spiritual energy. Using his movement technique, he quickly appears beside those monsters and instantly attacks them. sh after sh as quick as he can.


    For some time, those goblin soldiers didn''t even know what happened. They didn''t even feel that they were attacked by someone. But suddenly those 5 goblins froze in their spot, and instantly cut marks appeared in their body. Green blooding out from those cut marks. A few secondster, all the goblins fell down and turned into dust. They didn''t even know how they died.


    Well, yes. You can say those monsters didn''t even get the chance to react. After collecting the loot, he left. He still needed to find many goblins so that he could collect as many crystals as he could.


    Five hourster, Sam was now resting. In these few houses, he killed many goblin soldiers and collected their loot. Well, after continuously using his spiritual energy, he decided to take a rest and recover his spiritual energy.


    He already activated the monster repeller and the life energy detector. This time his power was increased, and he also used his 30% strength. Because of this, he was able to kill those goblins easily. Previously, he only used 20% of his spiritual energy. Well, to maintain his stealth, he also needed spiritual energy. So, he finishes the goblins as quickly as he can.


    Until now, he hadn''t met the goblin captain. They were in the outside area of the forest. When he reaches the inner area of the forest, he will meet them. Well, if he meets any goblin captain, he will use 40% of his spiritual energy. Previously, when he used 30% of his spiritual energy, he was able to injure the goblin captain, but still, he hasn''t injured the goblin captain that seriously.


    After finishing eating his food and a spirit energy potion, he also must recover his 89% spiritual energy. So, well, it was time to hunt once again.


    "Ring¡­ ring¡­ ring," suddenly his life sign detector began to vibrate. He quickly saw that it was showing 10 red signs of life. They were very close to him. Well, then if the prey came to him, it was his duty to hunt them. He quickly put everything in his inventory and went in those monsters'' direction.


    Suddenly, he heard some human voices when he came close to those monsters. So, those goblins attack some warriors. Well, Sam doesn''t want to step on other prey, but still, if those warriors cannot handle them, then he will hunt those monsters.


    ? _____________To be continued ____________


    [A/N: Hey guys, you can check out my new novels: Mystery Solver: Solving the Unknown, and The Journey Of A Treasure Hunter. I am also updating those stories daily.]

 Chapter 151 151 - Mask Once Again.

    Suddenly, he heard some human voices when he came close to those monsters. So, those goblins attack some warriors. Well, Sam doesn''t want to step on other prey, but still, if those warriors cannot handle them, then he will hunt those monsters.


    Sam was in his invisible mode and watching all these warriors fighting those Goblin soldiers. By looking at the warriors, you can say they were pretty good at fighting and they also had goodmunication as a team.


    This time, they weren''t any spiritual warriors. All of these warriors are physical warriors. Two of them are archers and the remaining 3 are using swords. Also, all of them were men.


    Those two archers kept their distance from those monsters and attacked those monsters with their arrows. Those three swordsmen fighting those goblins in closebat. Well, they also had shields in their other hand.


    A Goblin suddenly attacks one warrior, but the warrior protects him with his shield and then instantly swings his sword. Goblin seems to have predicted that, and he backs off. While other warriors also fight those goblins while protecting themselves with their Shields from those goblin''s attacks.


    Those 5 warriors fighting 5 goblins. You can say they are evenly matched. Those remaining goblins try to sneak attack those three warriors, but instantly those towards them shoot Arrow towards those goblins. One Goblin seems to sense the attack and avoids it. But the other one got hit by the arrow.


    Those two archers once again shoot arrows toward the Goblins. Two swordsmen already sense the arrow and instantly crouch down. Those two arrows hit the goblins. But it did not kill them. But those swordsmen use this chance and cut the goblins.


    A few secondster, they had already killed all those goblins, and they were collecting their loot. All of these warriors were early D-grade warriors. They all just recently broke through in D-grade, so they came to this dungeon. They all were college students.


    "Nice job, guys. Keep up the good work." One warrior to the others. He seems to be the leader of this group,


    " Yes," the other warrior responded with excitement. But none of them were aware that many goblins surrounded them. All of those goblins silently watching those warriors. There were at least 20 goblin soldiers.


    "All right guys, let''s go," the leader of the warriors said, and they were just about to leave the ce. Suddenly, out of nowhere, many goblins came out from the bushes. They all surrounded those warriors.


    Instantly, all the warriors be serious. Now, this is a very dangerous situation for them.


    "Guys, be ready." The leader of the warrior said to others. All of them nodded, but still, they were pretty nervous. In front of 20 goblins, it was normal to be nervous.


    "We need to make an opening for our retreat," the leader suggested to the other warriors. All of them were ready with their swords. Those two archers also bring out their swords. At this close distance, they won''t be able to their bows. They bring out their swords.


    "Attack," instantly all those warriors attack the goblins. Their n was to somehow make an opening and escape from here. But the reality pped them hard. All of them get injured pretty badly. They were able to kill 5 goblins, but those other 15 goblins really injured them seriously. They were bleeding from their bodies. The situation of those two archers was pretty badpared to those 3 swordsmen. Their armor waspletely destroyed, and they weren''t in the situation to fight. All the warriors looked at those goblins with their pale faces. They never thought that this Goblin dungeon would be this much dangerous. They just wanted to hunt some monsters while testing their new strength.


    _______________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam, at this time, watching those warriors. Previously, when those 20 goblins were prepared to attack those warriors, Sam already noticed them. Still did not interfere with the fight. If those warriors could not kill those goblins only, then he would help those warriors. There were many people who were very ungrateful. After helping them, they will me you. This is the life lesson Sam got from his previous life. Because of this, he did not help them previously. But now the situation is different.


    He was already in his stealth mode, so nobody could sense him, even when he came out of his hiding ce. Well, today he wanted to use his dragger, so he did not bring out his yer or night. He was unable to coat these two draggers with his spiritual energy, but that won''t be a problem for him. Well, he did not have any dragger technique. He can still use those daggers while using his sword technique.


    But still, Sam needed to use his 80% strength while swinging the draggers. They weren''t as sharp as his yer. Because of this, he needed to use so much of his strength. Well, you can say that after using his yer almost always it has be his habit to kill the monsters quickly. So with these daggers, he also wanted to do the same, so he was using this much of his strength. It has been 5 months since he did not use his full strength while swinging his swords.


    Using his full speed and those two daggers, he shes six goblins instantly. He still did not stop his movement. In this situation, he turned around and shed all the other goblins. It all happened in less than a minute. Just imagine how fast Sam was. After shing all those goblins, he suddenly appears in front of those warriors.


    These warriors, at this time, had already closed their eyes and were ready to fill the pain. They already know that in front of these Goblin soldiers, they won''t be able to escape. So they are just waiting for their dead and ready to feel the pain. But even after waiting a minute, they did not feel any pain.


    It made them curious, so they all opened their eyes and got shocked by the scene. An unknown person was standing in front of them, while those monsters did not even move from their ce. All those warriors look around and check all those goblins. All those goblins were standing there without moving. It was like those goblins became statues. But suddenly various shes appear on those goblins'' bodies.


    Instantly, all those goblins fell down on the ground, and a few secondster, their bodies turned into dust. It shocked all those warriors. Because they don''t know what happened. An unknown warrior suddenly appeared in front of them and goblins, who were ready to attack them, did not attack them. They just stood in their ce like a statue and after a minute, all those goblins fell down on the ground and their bodies turned into dust. This scene was so shocking that all of those warriors were standing there in a daze.


    Sam, after confirming that all of those goblins were dead, instantly collected all those loots. He did not touch the loot that those warriors get after killing those 5 goblins. He wasn''t that greedy, and also there wasn''t any good loot in them. After collecting all that loot, he turned around and saw that all those warriors were looking at him with a shocking expression. After seeing their shocking expression, Sam just smiles awkwardly. But nobody was able to sew that, because he was wearing a mask.


    "You should treat your injuries first. Also, your two friends need medical attention. So, don''t just stand there like an idiot. More goblins came to attack you once again. Quickly collect all your loot and go toward the exit. In this situation, you won''t be able to survive on this floor." Sam said all of this to those warriors in a rough voice.


    All of those warriors came back to reality after hearing his words. Now, they were pretty ashamed. They know that it can be dangerous for them, but still standing there like a fool.


    "Thank you, sir," suddenly the leader of the warriors, said thank you to Sam. Those two remaining warriors also said thank you. They instantly bring out health potions and give them to those arches. Also, drink a health potion. Sam, at this time, still did not leave that ce. He was observing the surrounding area.


    Those warriors, after finishing drinking the health potion, quickly collect their loot and pick up those two injured warriors. After drinking the health potion, those two warriors seemed to be ok right now, but they still didn''t have the strength to walk. Because of this, those three swordsmen supported them. They were about to leave the ce, but suddenly their leader once again said thank you to Sam.


    At this time, some still did not say anything to them. He just stood there like a statue. But the leader didn''t get angry. He even asked his savior''s name.


    "Mask," Sam only said that, and he suddenly finished from his ce.


    ______________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 152 152 - Everything Turned Into Dust.

    Sam was currently hiding and observing those goblin Soldiers and the goblin captain. He did notpletely go to the inner area of the forest. He was on the border of the outside area and the inner area. When he was resting, he suddenly saw goblins. They came from the inner area of the forest. It was like this scouting the border of the inner forest and the outer forest.


    Sam had already activated his concealment techniques, so those goblins weren''t able to sense him. He silently observes them and searches for a chance to attack them. Sam doesn''t know if his mega fireball will do any damage to the Goblin captain. The Goblin captain is very close to breaking through his grade. You can tell that by sensing their aura. But previously he was able to injure that S-grade summoned monster. Not that he seriously injured those monsters, he just slightly injured that monster, but still, that was an S-grade monster. So he has the confidence that his mega fireball would do serious damage to the goblin captain. Because the blue me wasn''t easy to handle. Even the blue me wasn''t that powerful, but a higher warrior was careless. He could get injured by the me.


    One thing Sam notices about the Goblin captain and the Goblin soldiers. The previous Goblin captain and this goblin captain were equally powerful. It was like all the Goblin captains were very close to a breakthrough to the next grade. So he guessed that, most likely, those Goblin Soldiers were very close to breaking through and he turned into a Goblin captain. He cannot think of any other reason other than that.


    Sam has already started casting his mega fireball. But one thing you should know about his concealment technique is that when he casts any spell that any monster can notice who is good at spiritual energy sensing. Actually, he will not be noticed by the monster, but the monster will notice the spell. Because when he cast any spell, a huge amount of spiritual energy went toward him. There were many monsters that could feel the change of spiritual energy. Those monsters could easily spot him, but fortunately, these goblins couldn''t feel the change of The Spiritual Energy so they did not spot Sam.


    Sam was hiding in a gigantic tree. From here, he can easily spot those goblins, but those goblins won''t be able to spot him. He needs some minutes to finish the mega fireball. Even when casting the mega fireball, he did not shift his focus to any other thing. He only looked at those goblins. He did not want those goblins to suddenly finish from his sight.


    Fortunately, there weren''t any warriors here, or it can be dangerous for those warriors when he throws his fireball toward those monsters. You already know how powerful his mega fireball is.


    Sometimeter, he already finished casting his mega fireball, but now those goblins were far from his ce. But that would be any problem for him while throwing his fireball toward those monsters. Wasting no time, he threw the fireball, using his full strength.


    The fireball went toward the goblins quickly. If you saw that right now, you will think that someone fired aser gun toward those monsters. In the end, the Goblin captain seems to feel the danger. There was a blue thinging toward him. He doesn''t know what this thing was, but he can sense the danger from that blue thing. He wanted to avoid the blue fireball, but he wasn''t that fast. Very quickly, the fireball hit the Goblin captain. Instantly, destruction appeared. All the surrounding areas where the fireball hit got destroyed.


    Sam wasn''t sure if he already killed that Goblin captain because he was unable to see what was happening. It was like a firewall appeared in that area. Everything is burning in the area. The trees around that area be dusted by the blue me instantly.


    Sam was panting. Really making a mega fireball was really exhausting for him. He almost needed to use all of his spiritual energy to cast a single mega fireball. His concealment technique already got deactivated. He quickly brings out a spirit energy potion and drinks it. He also uses his energy recovery technique also at full speed. But even in this situation, he only focused on those monsters.


    The fire slowly started to fade away, and he was able to see clearly what happened to those goblins. He did not see any goblins there. It means they have already turned into dust by the mega fireball.


    "Sigh," Sam sighs in relief. For a moment, he thought the Goblin captain was still alive. You can say he already recovered his 60% energy. So he once again activated his concealment technique and became invisible. Well, he was able to recover quickly because of the high-grade spirit energy potion. Even using his energy recovery technique, he still needed 15 to 20 minutes to fully recover, but while using the recovery technique, if he drank a potion, then the process became very fast. The more powerful the potion is, the more you will recover.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam quickly came to the ce and collected all the loot. After that, he did not waste any of his time and left the ce.


    Sam doesn''t know, but just when he left the ce, a group of 10 warriors appeared there. If you see their clothes, then you can tell they were from the Royal academy. They were also releasing a peak and intermediate D-grade warrior''s power. Well, in the dungeon, normally warriors did not hide their power. The main reason behind it is that it can scare those lower-grade monsters. Actually, no one wanted to deal with a lower-grade monster that won''t give them any good loot.


    "Fiona, what do you think? What happened here?" A warrior suddenly asks the girl standing beside him.


    "Zen, I think someone uses a blue fireball to kill goblins. We already saw that the area turned blue for a moment. So naturally, someone used a blue fireball, and that fireball made this destruction. Also, if you try to observe them, you can feel the huge spiritual energy fluctuations in this area." Fiona told the boy.


    " The thing I was most interested in was to know the person who uses the blue me. It wasn''t easy to reach that kind of me control. Someone should be very powerful here who uses this fireball. And by looking at the situation, I could tell he had already left the area. I really wanted to meet that person who uses the blue fireball." Fiona said to everyone. She was the captain of this group. They were from the Royal Academy and all of them were 3rd year like Gloria. They also were participating in the annual collegepetition, so because of this, they came here to practice.


    "Well, don''t waste any time. Let''s go. We needed to reach the 3rd floor." She said to everyone. No one in the group said anything to her and all of them just nodded hearing her. Well, she was the second-best student at the Royal Academy. Previously, she and Gloria werepetitors, but when Gloria broke through, Fiona was no longer her opponent. Now Fiona also wanted to break through so that she was once again able topete with Gloria.


    Our main culprit is Sam. At this time, we are very far away from that ce. He won''t go to the inner area, he will only travel around the border of the inner area and the outside area. There were two reasons behind this. First one, in the inner area, he could meet many Goblin captains at the same time. That could be really dangerous for him. The second, he only had 3 days, then he needed to leave the dungeon. Because of this, he did not want to go to the inner area where his life could be in danger.


    4 dayster,


    In these 4 days, he traveled around the border, found many monsters, and killed them. His luck also was good because he got the technique from those monsters and he also got many suitable materials from those monsters. Those excellent materials could help him to gain credit points from the college. The good quality loot can give you many credit points from the college. But he won''t sell any of the technique scrolls. Well, if he got a useless technique, then the matter was different, but the techniques he got from killing the goblins were really good. He will learn then when he leaves the dungeon. And the good thing was that those two techniques were D-grade techniques. He also gained many crystals and now he just needed to absorb those crystals.


    Sam was currently outside of the dungeon and eating some food. This time, he did not sell any of his loot. Even though the loot was useless, he kept them. He will exchange those loot in the college for credit points.


    ________________To be continued ____________

 Chapter 153 153 - Upgrading A New Technique.

    Sam was currently in his house, and he was absorbing the crystals. A few hours ago he came back from Oron city, and after resting he was now absorbing the crystals. Tomorrow was his first day at college. So before going to college, you wanted to absorb those crystals.


    Sometimeter, he opened his eyes. He finished absorbing all the crystals he got from the Goblin dungeon. He can feel more powerful than before.


    He opened his status screen.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (600/600)


    Strength: 37+ 20


    Agility: 33 + 17


    Physique: 34+ 16


    Intelligent(mental power): 26 + 19


    Spirit: 16 + 2


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 102k "


    You can say that this time his status points increased by a huge number. And also the good thing is that he already had 100K points, so he can once again upgrade his techniques. He wasn''t sure which technique he should upgrade now. He will think about thatter.


    Right now, his only concern was to upgrade his spiritual energy. His strength, agility, physique, and intelligence have already increased by many points, but his only spiritual energy remains the same. It was a really bad thing for him. He needed to go to a spiritual monster''s dungeon or a ghost dungeon, but he also needed to go to the college from tomorrow. Because of this, he was thinking about how he should go to the ghost or spiritual dungeon.


    Well, until he doesn''t go to college, he won''t be able to think of any ns. Sam got up from his bed and went outside of his room. Previously, his mom and dad thought about buying a house in the capital city, but then Gloria told them why wasting money she already had. So his mom and dad decided to stay here. Not that he had anyints. He also likes this house and the neighborhood area.


    He went outside of the house and started walking around the colony. He didn''t even know how he reached the public training area. Well, he was busy thinking, so he did not realize when he came here. He looks at the training area. He saw that the kids were practicing their techniques, and the old man was watching over them.


    He went toward the old man and greet him,


    "Hello, grandpa, how are you?"


    "Well, hello my boy. I am fine. How are you? These 4 days I didn''t see you." The old man said to him.


    " Yes, grandpa. I went to the dungeon these 4 days. Before going to the dungeon, I wanted to collect the crystal and increase my power." Sam exined to the old man.


    " Good, good, it was good that you wanted to increase your strength before going to college." The old man bes happy after hearing that Sam went to the dungeon to increase his strength. Well, after registering his name in the Royal Academy, he met the old man and told him ?he would go to the Royal academy.


    "You will meet many geniuses in the academy. There was a genius named Fiona, who was previously your sister''spetitor. But after your sister broke through, Fiona wasn''t able topete with her. But still don''t look down on her. She was the second-best student at the Royal academy. Not only her, but you will meet many other geniuses in that academy. The most important thing is that you don''t let your achievement go to your head and you be arrogant about that." He told Sam all of this. Sam, at this time, silently listened to the old man and nodded.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Big brother, Sam, you are here. Please show us the sword technique that you showed us earlier. We wanted to learn your sword technique." Suddenly, those children notice him and ask him to show his sword technique.


    Sam just smiles at them. Well, these were very hardworking, he saw that. He came in front of them and started to demonstrate his technique. Well, he would not demonstrate theplicated moves, he was just showing them the basic moves of the fast cut technique.


    _______________________


    Sam was now in his house and eating dinner. Well, Gloria still did note back from the dungeon. She will still need some time toe back from the dungeon. But Sam and his mom and dad did not worry about her because her teacher, Alena, was with her. This time, she went to an Early B-grade dungeon. The lowest level of the monster in this engine was early C-grade and the highest level was Early B-grade. Sam was somewhat disappointed because he hoped that his sister would be in college on his first day at college. Well, not that it was a big matter. He wasn''t a kid anymore.


    After finishing his food, he came to his room andy down on his bed. He opened the status window and looked at his status. Well, he wanted to decide which technique he should upgrade right now. So he keeps looking at all of his techniques.


    He wanted to go to a ghost dungeon, so right now he should upgrade his me control and the spiritual energy control technique. Upgrading his me control will make his me more powerful, and while upgrading his spiritual energy control will help him control the spiritual energy in his body. Right now, he just needs to decide which technique he should upgrade first. Both of these techniques are important. After thinking, sometime he decided he will upgrade his spiritual energy control.


    "Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (100%) (+)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade) (00)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.] "


    Well, he can upgrade his me controlter, but spiritual energy control was an important technique for him. Not only does this technique help him cast faster spells, controlling the spell''s power. This technique also helps him while costing his yer or those spirit arrows. With that technique, he can coat the sword faster and also control the spiritual energy faster. Because of all of this, he decided to upgrade this spiritual energy control technique first.


    He began to circte his spiritual energy and suddenly felt that it had be easier to circte the spiritual energy. It was just if he could absorb the spiritual energy from the air, then he wouldn''t need any crystal. Unfortunately, there wasn''t any technique that could make his wish possible.


    Well, he stopped circting the spiritual energy, because right now he was feeling sleepy so he decided to sleep. He really needed a good sleep. Also, tomorrow at 10:00 a.m. He needed to reach the college.


    _______________


    Next day,


    At 9:30 a.m. Sam was now eating his breakfast. He has already freshened up and wears the college uniform. This will be his first day at college, so his dad decided that he will bring him to the college.


    Well, if you asked him if he was scared or not, then Samuel said that he wasn''t nervous or anything like that. In his previous life, you already went to college. So college is nothing new to him. The main thing he was nervous about was because he was going to the warrior college. This wasn''t like his previous college life. Not only him, but other students who were also going to the college for the first day were nervous. Victor seems to feel his son''s nervousness, so he decides to take him to college.


    Tony and the others already called him and told him that they will wait for him at the entrance of the college. Well, from his house, college was in that form. The college was only a walking distance from his house, but still, Victor drove him to the college in his car. Well, Victor also had some things to do in the City so he was driving the car. After taking Sam to the college, he will go to his new office. Victor and Hina weren''t part of any guild, they just had good teammates. All of his teammates enter the dungeon every time. The main reason behind not joining the guild was that they weren''t interested in working with anyone. And like Sam, Victor also didn''t like to listen to orders from anyone.


    After finishing his breakfast, Sam and his dad get in the car and his dad drives the car toward the college. Sometimeter he can see the college. Previously with his friends, he came here, so he was not unfamiliar with the college entrance. From a distance, he can also make friends that I am waiting for at the entrance.


    All of his friends saw him when his dad stopped the car in front of the college entrance. Sam got out of the car and said good morning to all of his friends. They all also said good morning to him and his dad. Well, they weren''t arrogant people who didn''t respect their seniors. Victor smiled at them and after saying goodbye to them, he left the college area.


    ____________To be continued ____________

 Chapter 154 154 - First Day College.

    Sam and his friends were now going toward the auditorium hall of the college. Before starting their sses, they needed to go to the auditorium hall. You can say today the principal and some of the best students of this college will give a speech to all the new students. Sam gets to know this because his sister already told him about this. If his sister was here, she would also give her speech.


    "Man, I don''t enjoy listening to speeches. It always makes me bored," Tonyined about the speech. Well, even though heined, he still needed to go to the auditorium hall. It is mandatory for all the news today to go to the auditorium hall.


    A few minutester, they finally reached the auditorium hall. Just entering the auditorium hall, they can see many students already present there. Mostly those students were second-year and third-year students. 4th-year students were mostly busy with their dungeon hunting.


    Sam and his friends went to the first row of the seat. They sit down there. 1st-year students will sit down in the front seat, 2nd-year students will sit down in the middle portion and 3rd-year students will sit down in thest portion. Well, you can say that when they enter the auditorium hall, everyone keeps looking at them. Well, those stares did not bother Sam.


    They sit down in their seats. One by one, all the first-year students sit down. Now everyone was looking at the stage. They were all waiting for the program to start.


    Sometimeter, a teacher came to the states with a mic in his hand.


    "Good morning to all of my students. It was a pleasure to have all of you here. I think everyone was waiting for the program to start. Well, don''t worry, we will start the program soon, but before that, I want to wee our new students. Everyone, please p for our first-year students." The teacher said that and everyone pped for them.


    "Also, all the students who were new here, I don''t know if you know that our 4th-year students weren''t present here because they were busy dungeon hunting. The second-year and the third-year students were mostly present here. I don''t want to pressure anyone but I think all the first-year students will get to know how busy our 4th-year students were. Well then, I won''t be wasting any time and would like to wee our principal to the stage," the teacher said, and the principal came to the stage. Every student at this time pped for him.


    "Well, thank you to all of my students. It was a pleasure to have all of you here. We have our new students and our old students here. So I will be starting with the important thing I want to say to all the first year. All the first-year students don''t think that I will give you some boring speech but this thing you should know. Normally you won''t be able to learn this thing when you are not a part of a college or a guild. I think all of you know that we needed to kill all the monsters in the dungeon and also needed to kill the Boss monster. But I don''t think many of you know the reason. The reason we killed those monsters wasn''t only for loot, but also to keep away from human society. Every year all the dungeon''s boss monsters have the ability to leave the dungeon ande to the human society."


    " Everyone, those boss monsters gather weird energy in them, which can help them to leave the dungeon. Unfortunately, we were still unable to identify that weird energy. Because that weird energy wasn''t from our world, we still could not identify that weird energy. But that you were energy will make the monster stronger and also give him the power to leave the dungeon. Because of this, we needed to kill the Boss monster every time they spawned. Because you cannot guess when they will gather that weird energy, so we can''t take the risk."


    " I think everyone has a question in their mind about the Saints and their busy schedule. Well, I think you don''t know, but those monsters who were in the S-grade had that weird energy in them every time they spawned. So, as you can guess, our saints were busy killing those S-grade monsters. Because of this, every saint was very busy. As you know, Saint Leon Vance established our college. But most of the time, he wasn''t able toe to college. Now I hope you all understand why all the saints were busy. Except for our 12 Saints, we did not have any other new Saints. This was one reason they were busy. To break through from the A-grade to S-grade was very tough. You will only get to know this when you will reach the peak A-grade."<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Well, now, I want to ask all the first-year students. Do you know every year a monster''s parade wille out of the dungeon?" Suddenly the principal asked all the first-year students.


    Hearing this sudden question, Sam became startled. He never knows this. He turned around and saw that his friends were also surprised. So they also didn''t know about that. Not only them, but every 1st-year student was surprised to hear this question.


    The Principal looked expressions of all the first-year students for some time, then he begins to talk,


    "Well, by looking at your expressions, I don''t think any of you know about this. Well, this was natural because those who know about this did not tell anyone. This was the rule made by the warrior association. Your seniors know this, they didn''t tell anyone. Well, we told him not to tell anyone and now I am also telling all of you not to tell anyone about this. As you can guess, this can cause a disaster. Those normal people, if they get to know this, can make any rash decision, which can lead them to death."


    " When you reach the D-grade, you need to participate in the hunting quest. Everyone, when the monster paradees, all the warriors will fight with them. I think you also notice that every year, for some days, nobody was allowed to go toward the dungeon. Well, most probably those normal people and those warriors who were only in F-grade or E-grade. We prevent them. We don''t want anyone to get hurt. But this only applied to those normal people and those low-level warriors. Now you are in college, and I think you want to be a good warrior. It was our duty to protect all the normal citizens. So those monsters won''t be able to harm them."


    " Many of you also notice that every year at a particr time, your family members who were high-grade warriors be busy. As you can guess, they be busy killing those monsters. At least you can say 4 to 5 monster waves came out from the dungeon. Even though we killed those monsters but somehow at a particr time, those monsters get out of the dungeons. But those boss monsters didn''te alone from the dungeon. They also take some of their minions with them."


    " Now I am asking you, do you think you can risk your life for humanity? If you want to back down, you can still have the chance. But you won''t have a chance to leave tomorrow. From tomorrow, you will officially be our students. So I am giving you the chance that you can still go back." With that said, the principal became silent and kept looking at all the 1st year students. Probably he wanted to see how many students will leave today.


    It has been 5 minutes, but nobody leaves the auditorium hall. You can say nobody was willing to leave the college because of the danger. Many first-year students were nervous, but also at the same time, they were excited. Sam and the others did not have any expression on their face. You were unable to tell if they were nervous or excited by looking at their face. But if you look at their eyes, then you will notice that their eyes are burning. They weren''t afraid of the monsters. You can say after hearing the principal''s words, their fighting spirit increased.


    " Haha, looks like nobody is a coward here. Well then, to all of my first-year students, I want to say one thing that wille to our Royal academy. If you will work hard and want to grow stronger, then you will get help from us. We only wanted those students that wanted to work hard and wanted to grow stronger. We didn''t want any student who only wanted to be a warrior for fun. The moment you be a warrior, that moment, you put your life at risk. So now I wanted to ask all the second year and 3rd year students to please p for your juniors." The principal said that. All the third-year and 2nd-year students begin to p for those first-year students.


    ___________To be continued_______

 Chapter 155 155 - First Day College (2)

    "Well, now you don''t want to leave and want to be part of the Royal Academy, so first years I want to tell you something. In our college, there was a top 10 students list. 2nd year, 3rd year, and 4th year, they all have their top 10 students. So, in the 1st year, you all will have your top 10 students. Now it''s your confusion about this, then let me tell you the reward that top 10 students get."


    " Every top 10 students will get credit points every month. The student who was in 10 positions will get 100 credit points every month, and the student who was in the first position will get 1000 credit points every month."


    " I think many of you still did not know about the credit points. Well, in our Royal academy credit points mean resources. You can buy any resources with credit points. Like various techniques, potions, weapons, armors, etc. To get all of this, you need to have credit points. You won''t be able to use the money to buy all these things. Now for those students who are not in the top 10 positions, if you are wondering how you will get the credit points. Well, you can get the credit point through your achievement. I think you know that in every guild, they have a mission board. Where you can pick any mission and, afterpleting the mission, you will get a reward. So, in our academy, we also have that type of the mission board. We have low-level missions, we have medium-level missions and we have high-level missions."


    " After picking up the mission, if youplete the mission and submit it to the college, you will get credit points. Also, you can get credit points after selling your good loot to the college board. But I must warn you cannot get any external help. Suppose you are only a peak E-grade warrior, but get the loot from a B-grade warrior and try to sell that on the college board to get the credit point. Then you won''t be able to get any credit points. You have to earn that loot on your own. But I am not telling you that you cannot ask for help when you go to the dungeon. I just want to tell you that you cannot bring those loots that weren''t yours."


    " Now one more important thing I want to tell all of you is that the top 10 students'' names won''t always be fixed. I want to mean that any student can challenge the top 10 students. And those who are in the top 10 students needed to ept that challenge. Well, I did not want to be in need of epting all the challenges. But in two weeks, they needed to ept at least one challenge. Well, that would be another matter if no one wants to challenge you, but if anyone challenges you and the top 10 students did not ept any challenge in 2 weeks, then they will lose their position. Also, if any top 10 students werepleting the mission, or they were in the dungeon, then they won''t be needed to follow this rule."


    "Also, those top 10 seasons think that they will always stay in the dungeon so that they don''t need to follow this rule. Then they were wrong. If you are a top 10 students and you did not ept any challenge in 2 weeks because you are in the dungeon, then when you came back from the dungeon, you needed to ept the challenge of the other students. The same thing would happen if you were on a mission and because of this, you could not ept any challenge in 2 weeks."


    "Also, don''t worry if you get injured while you are on a mission or dungeon, then you won''t need to ept challenges immediately. You can ept that challenge when you arepletely recovered. With that, I hope everyone understands the value of the top 10 students and the credit points."


    " Now,ing to the study part. Like those normal colleges, we have regr subjects that you can attend. Well, now many of you are wondering how you can be a personal student of any teacher. Well, there are two processes. The first is that any teacher on their own came to you and asked you to be his or her student. The second is that you can apply to be a personal student of any teacher. At the end of the first 6 months, if you weren''t able to be a personal student of any teacher, then the college will arrange for you to be a normal student of any teacher. 6 monthster you can once again apply to be a personal student of any teacher, so don''t give up that easily."


    " Now there is a difference between a normal student and a personal student. The teacher will guide both of the students. But every teacher will mostly help them as personal students. That doesn''t mean a normal student won''t be able to get help from any teacher. He just won''t be getting that much guidance from that teacher or any other teacher. So I hope everyone works hard. Because through your various achievements you can also be any teacher''s personal students."<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Now it''s time for ourst part. At the end of every year, we hold exams. A theory collection and a monster hunting exam. As you can give, it was like your college admission examination. You needed the minimum score points on that exam to pass the exam. And if any of you failed that exam, then you needed to repeat a year. So I am telling all the first year to be the second year you need to pass that exam. Also, one more important thing is that those students who will get the top 10 positions will be awarded by the college. All the first-year students will get to know about the top 10 students from the first year."


    " Every year before the annual collegepetition where various colleges take part, our Royal academy holds an inter-collegepetition. In the inter-collegepetition every year, students can take part. In this inter-collegepetition, we decided on the top 10 students that will take part in the annual collegepetition every year. You can challenge your seniors, or they can challenge you. If a senior wins against a junior, then he will get nothing, but it will be a different matter if a junior wins against a senior. If a junior can win against his senior, then the junior will get a reward."


    "Also, we had an annual gradepetition. Like the annual collegepetition, in thispetition, various colleges take part andpete against each other. But in thispetition, the participants are divided by their grades. I want to tell you that our College''s early D-grade warriors will fight with other College''s D-grade warriors. You will be facing an enemy who has the same grade as you. But in the annual collegepetition, the rule ispletely different. In the annual collegepetition, our 1st year will face off against other College''s 1st year. The rule is like this."


    " Before the annual gradepetition, we selected the best warriors of that grade through apetition. Thispetition is also called the Inter College gradepetition. Any student can take part in thispetition. They will face others that have the same grade as him. It can be his ssmate or senior or junior. Those students who will get the top 10 positions in this inter College gradepetition will only be able to take part in the annual college gradepetition. So I wanted to say to all the first-year students that they should get ready for thispetition. You won''t be disappointed after receiving the rewards. Also, I like to tell all the other students that they should prepare themselves for the challenges. With this, I would like to finish my speech." after exining all things about the college, the principal finally finished his speech. Every student began to p for him.


    The principal went back to his seat. Once again, a teacher came to the stage.


    "Well, I would like to thank our principal for this great speech. I hope every 1st-year student understands about the college. So I would now like to call some of your senior students on the stage. They will share with you their experience. So I would like to call all the top 10 students from the 3rd year." The teacher said that 10 students from the back row stood up and walked toward the stage. Everyone at this time pped for them. You can say all of these 10 students were famous. Sam, at this time, looking at a particr student. She was the second base student of The Royal Academy. She is Fiona Cris, a peak D-grade warrior who was very close to a breakthrough.


    ______________To be continued___________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 156 156 - First Day At College (3)

    One by one, the top 10 students begin to share their experiences with all the first year. Sam, all this time listening to their experience with focus. Because all of his seniors tell them about the monster invasion, and also their adventure in many dungeons. Not only some but Jeni and the others also listened to their seniors'' experiences. Until now, no one knew about those many monsters, so they wanted to gather as much information as they could.


    From the 10th number of students in the top 10 candidate list to the 2nd number students already told their experience. It was now finally Fiona''s turn. Every student at this time bes serious. Well, not that they weren''t serious when other students told them about their experiences. It was just that she was the second-best student at the Royal Academy. Because of this, normally everyone bes so serious.


    "Well, I would like to wee all of my juniors to our Royal academy. I hope you all will work hard to achieve your dream and be powerful. All of my ssmates already told you about their experiences while facing those monsters. So I won''t be telling you about the types of the monster that came out of the dungeon. I will tell you about the monster''s behaviors. You don''t know, but when those monsters came out of those dungeons, their behavior became very violent. I think they have only one thought in their mind, which is to kill all the humans. Even the intelligent monster became violent. They have only one thought: to kill the humans and to achieve that they can sacrifice themselves. It was like they did not feel any pain or fear. Suppose you are a D-grade warrior and you are facing F-grade monsters. Normally in a dungeon just releasing your aura, those monsters will run away from you. But when those monsters came out of the do, then their behavior wasplete. Even when they were facing high-grade warriors, they did not back down. They are like mindless beasts attacking anyone and they fear no one. This is the most dangerous thing about those monsters." Fiona saying all of this. Sam and the other students listen to her words very seriously.


    Sam was surprised when he heard about the violent behavior of the monsters. He never knew that those monsters could be like this. Well, those low-level monsters did not have that much intelligence, but those high-level monsters were naturally very intelligent. He never expected that those monsters could be violent.


    Only then does Sam understand why every year his mom, dad, and sister went to the dungeon hunting, and it almost takes 2 months for them toe back? At this time, no reuse reporters, no normal citizens, and no low-level warriors were permitted to go near the dungeon.


    Fiona also told them about her experience in many dungeons and the various monsters she fought. She also told them about the weakness of some monsters.


    "Right now you all are Students Of The Royal Academy. If you don''t work hard, then your ssmate will be leave you behind and you will be a loser. So don''t be a loser, work hard and be powerful. I think everyone knows that I and Gloria were apetitor. We fought many times and alsopeted with each other. Finally, she broke through, and right now my strength isn''t enough topete with her. But I still did not give up. This also motivates me to break through. This also motivates me to work harder so that I can catch up to her and we once again bepetitors. Those students who were in the early D-grade, I want to tell you that you will be facing many difficulties while breaking through, but don''t give up. This is one of the hardest grades to break through. I think everyone knows about this, but still; I wanted to tell you. Well, many of you are wondering how I can give you a lecture when I still did not break through. Well, I did not reveal it to anyone, but I am now an early C-grade warrior. In my previous dungeon exploration, luckily I got a limit breaker and now finally I am an early C-grade warrior." Fiona said that which makes everyone shocked. Every student and teacher gets up from their seed and begins to p for her. It was a really proud moment for the Royal academy. They now have two C-grade students who still haven''t graduated from college. Sometimeter when everyone stop pping Fiona once again began to talk.


    " In this Royal academy, if you work harder, then the college will reward you. They will give you many resources for your growth. But if you want to ck off and don''t want to work hard, then you won''t get anything from the college. It wasn''t just our college, but this is the reality."


    "Now I heard that Gloria''s brother is here. He is also a genius like his sister. " Sam got startled when Fiona suddenly mentioned him. His friend and all the first year when now looking in his direction.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Well, I would like to call Sam Kainer on the stage. I want everyone to p for Sam, " with that said she looked in Sam''s direction. In this kind of situation, Sam knew that he needed to go onto the stage. If he refuses to go onto the stage, then it will be because he was very arrogant and did not respect his seniors. Sam just sighed and then got up from his seat. He began to walk toward the stage while every student began to p for him. Aftering onto the stage, he greets Fiona. She also great him with a smile, then she turned around and begin to talk.


    "He is Sam. Like his sister, he is also a genius. But I think many of you know that at first, he was not that powerful. I also learned from Gloria that her brother wasn''t that powerful warrior, but he worked hard. And today he is the first position holder for the college admission exam. So I wanted to tell all the first year that you should also work hard so you can be like him. You need to surpass him. That should be your goal. But I don''t think he will wait for you; he also works hard and continues to grow strong. To surpass him, you need to double work hard. When I was in the first year, I was only a peak E-grade warrior. But my eyes at that time were set on Gloria. The only thought I had at that moment was to surpass her. And that thinking makes me grow stronger and eventually we both bepetitors."


    "I was only the 10th position holder in the college admission exam, but Gloria was the first position holder. But I did not back down and challenged her many times. I can even count how many times I challenge her. I continue to grow strong and begin to surpass those other candidates and divisively be the second position holder in the first year. So I wanted all the students to challenge him. I don''t think he will back down if you challenge him. But I must warn you, don''t use any tricks in a warrior fight. Our Royal academy did not allow anyone to cheat when they were in the warrior battle. That year, many students wanted to cheat in the warrior battle, but eventually, they got expelled from the college." After saying that, she stopped talking and then turned around. She looked at Sam, then she said, "Thank you, Sam, foring here. I hope you also achieve many things like your sister. I don''t think you know, but your sister faced failure many times, but she did not back down. Every time she faced failure, her fighting spirit grew stronger. So if you face any failure, don''t give up. If you need help, then you can ask your seniors or teachers."


    " No, problem seniors Fiona. Really, thank you for the suggestion, " Sam said as he left the stage and came back toward his seat. Everyone was pping for him.


    "Well, thest thing I wanted to tell all the first year is that if you face any failure or if you need any help, you can ask your seniors for help, or you can ask teachers. No one will let you down. Thank you so much for listening to my speech," after seeing that Fiona stopped talking and left the stage. Every student and teacher at this time pped for her.


    Sometimeter, everyone began to leave the auditorium hall. Today''s program was finally finished. From tomorrow, all the first years will start their first ss. Today they will go to their ssroom and after that, they can leave the college.


    Sam and his friends are now looking at the ssroom list. Fortunately, they were in the same ss. They were now walking toward their ssroom.


    _____________To be continued__________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 157 157 - Challenge

    Sam and his friends were now going toward their ssroom. It was on the 2nd floor. Not only them, but all the students were now going toward their ssroom. They didn''t have any ss, or they just wanted to see their ssroom.


    Sometimeter, Sam and his friends were now in their ssroom. This was a big ssroom. The seating capacity of this ssroom was 80.


    Well, after checking their ssroom, they already left the college ssroom. They were visiting all the ces in the Royal academy. These were the ces that only the students could enter. Library, cafeteria, training area, etc, visited all of this ce.


    "Man, I am really exhausted," Tony said. They were now in the cafeteria. Only today they can buy lunch or food from the cafeteria with their money. From tomorrow, they won''t be able to buy anything from the cafeteria without the credit points.


    "I never thought that senior Fiona would call Sam. Haha, I thought she wanted to challenge Sam." Kenny said whileughing.


    " Haha, not only you, but I also think the Same." Tony also said whileughing.


    " Still, I think after senior Fiona''s speech many students will challenge Sam. Sam, I think you will be very busy when you are at the Royal Academy. I think every day, someone will challenge you. Haha, " Alexa said with a smile.


    " Guys, what do you think will get the first position in the top 10 candidate list?" Elena suddenly asked them while she was looking in Sam''s direction.


    " Haha, it is obviously Sam. We don''t need to think about this. This is one of the reasons I am telling you that he will be very busy tomorrow. Actually, I am thinking that you will get a challenge today, but I think everybody wants to wait for another day." Alexa said that we just smile. Everybody nodded after hearing her. They were also thinking the same. Sam, at this time, only looked at his friend with a smile. He did not care if anyone was challenging today or tomorrow. He will ept that challenge.


    Suddenly, a waiter came to them with their food. All of them receive their food and start to eat their food while suddenly they hear footsteps behind them. All of them looking in that direction.


    They saw that it was a boy. Just seeing him, you can tell he was like a first-year student. He wasing toward them. He came and stood in front of them while he started to talk.


    "Sam Kainer, I wanted to challenge you to a fight. I am the 13 position holder in the college admission exam. Dare you to ept the challenge?"


    Tony, Alexa, and Kenny started to cough, and everyone startedughing. Just a few minutes earlier, they thought Sam wouldn''t be challenged by anyone today, but now someone already challenges him.


    I think that boy did not understand what was happening and thought that everyone was making fun of him. It made him angry, and he was about to say something when suddenly Sam epted the challenge. Sam did not order that much food, so he quickly finished his food and got up from his seat.


    "Okay then, let''s go to the fighting area. I don''t want to fight in the cafeteria," he said to the boy. Tony and the other ones again startedughing. This time they wereughing because it was obvious that they needed to go out of the cafeteria to fight.


    The guy still was not able to process what was happening. Suddenly Sam epted his challenge and then he also told him to go toward the fighting area. It is obvious that he won''t be fighting in this cafeteria. But then he saw that Tony and the other ones again startedughing. Once again, he thought that they were making fun of him. It made him angry.


    Well, after paying the bill, all of them left the cafeteria, and they were now going toward the fighting area. The fighting area was beside the training area. This fighting area was mainly made for warrior fights.


    Sometimeter, they reach the fighting area. But after reaching the fighting area, they were surprised because there were so many students in the fighting area. All of them were sitting in the audience seats. Just looking at their expression, you can tell they were waiting for that boy and Sam to fight. Well, news travels very fast. It''s only just a few minutes, but the news is that Sam epts someone''s challenge and he will be fighting that person, traveling very fast. In these few seconds, every 1st year came to the training area and sat down in the audience''s seat. They all wanted to see the power of the first position holder.


    "Yo, Sam, I think you are pretty popr. Just look at the crowd. It is obvious that they all are waiting for your fight. Also, I can see not only the first year but many seniors also here."Tony said to Sam while he was looking toward the audience.


    Well, they weren''t aware that not only the students, and many teachers, were also looking at the fighting area. They all wanted to see Sam''s power. Sam and that boy went to the fighting area while his friends went to the audience''s seats and sat down.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Don''t know from where but a referee suddenly came to the fighting area. Well, that doesn''t matter to Sam.


    He also wasn''t interested in that fight because the boy that challenged him was only a peak E-grade warrior. He will finish this fight as quickly as he can.


    "Start," suddenly the referee gave them the signal to fight. Instantly, the boy ran toward Sam and tried to punch him. Well, but you weren''t even about tond a hit. Sam already shifted and avoided the attack. The speed of this boy wasn''t that good, so he can dodge his attack pretty easily.


    Sam still did not attack that boy. I think the boy''s main weapon was his fist. Because he did not use any weapon except his fist. Well, someone did not bring out his sword. He just dodged those attacks from that boy and when you felt that it was finally to finish the fight, he vanished from his ce.


    "Haha, well, this is a nice fight. The guy did have power and good control over his technique. Too bad his opponent is Sam," Tony said. He and the others get up from their seats the moment they see Sam vanish.


    "Hmm, you are right. Move like this won''t be working against Sam, and I think they forget that Sam is an expert in hiding." Jeni also agreed with him.


    Suddenly some appear behind that boy. The boy spent all this time searching for Sam, but he did not see anyone. He did not expect someone to appear behind without making any sound. After appearing behind that guy, Sam put one of his hands on the boy''s neck and said,


    "You lost,"


    "The winner is Sam Kainer." Instantly the referee announces the name of the winner. "Good fight," after saying that, some left the stage and came toward his friends.


    "Haha, good fight." Tony and the others said to him. Sam just smiled at them. At this time all the first year and the other students who were present in the fighting area all of them have shocking expressions on their faces. Who would have thought that Sam would suddenly appear behind that boy and defeat him? Nobody even feels anything when he appears behind that boy. Seeing the power of Sam, all the students be shocked.


    Well, at this time those teachers who also were present there have shocking expressions. They weren''t shocked because he suddenly appeared behind that boy; they were shocked because of how fast he was. You guess it right that Sam this time did not use his concealment technique to suddenly appear behind that boy. Sam used his full speed to appear behind that boy.


    "Haha, Sam looks how all the students were surprised after seeing your strength," Tony told Sam. Sam already noticed that.


    "Well, let''s go. I don''t think anyone will challenge me today," Sam told all of them. They all nodded and were just about to get up from their seats. Suddenly, a girl walked toward that fighting area. After seeing this, Sam and the others did not leave their seats. They were also curious about that girl. Is she also going to challenge Sam?


    The girl came to the fighting area and looked toward the audience.


    " I would like to challenge Alexa Galm," she suddenly announces the name of the person who she wants to challenge.


    "Good luck Alexa," Jeni said to Alexa. After seeing that someone wants to challenge her, Alexa just smiles. Well, she did not expect that someone would challenge her. Alexa and the others were sure that many would challenge Sam, but they did not expect that someone would challenge Alexa.


    She gets up from her seat and starts walking toward the fighting area. All the students who were about to leave instantly sat down in their seats. Alexa was the second position holder in the college admission examination. They also wanted to see the strength of Alexa.


    ________________To be continued_______________

 Chapter 158 158 - Fight

    Alexa and that girl were now in the fighting area. Dev both looking at each other. At this time begin to announce,


    "Alexa Galm and Kira Yeon, are you both ready to fight?"


    Both Alexa and Kira said ''yes''. Instantly, the referee gives them the signal to fight. Alexa and Kira already bring out their weapons. Both of them are using swords, so it is going to be a sword fight.


    Alexa did not move from her ce. She just calmly stands there and looks at Kira. But Kira was already running towards Alexa. When she saw that Alexa still did not move from her ce, she instantly used her technique to attack her.


    Well, Alexa was very fast at responding. She easily dodges the sword. Well, she uses that chance to attack. Kira wanted to block that attack, but she was unable to block it. The power behind that attack was so much that she got sent flying out of the fighting area.


    "Winner Alexa," the referee said at this moment.


    Well, it wasn''t a difficult fight for Alexa. She just simply knocked out her opponent and after that, she put down the sword in her storage ring. She began to walk out of the fighting area, came to her seat, and sat down.


    "Nice fight. You did not look down on your opponent and also did not give her that much chance to attack you. If you look down on your opponent and give her a chance to attack, then she can use her dangerous technique to attack you." Sam told her. Hearing Sam''spliment, Alexa smiled. Well, this was the first time heplimented her.


    "Haha, nice fight. Really, a quick and clean fight." Tony said to her. Elena, Jeni, Kenny, and Tina, one by one, everyone congrattes her.


    After that, everyone looked at the fighting area. They wanted to know if anyone wanted to challenge them or not. Tony, Jeni, Elena, Kenny, and Tina were eager to know if someone wanted to challenge them or not. Sam and Alexa already get challenged by the student, so they also wanted to know if anyone will challenge them or not.


    Well, God listens to their wishes, because one more person is walking toward that fighting area. The main thing was whether or not this person would challenge them.


    That person looked at Tony and the others, then he said something to the referee. Well, it''s probably the name of the person he wanted to challenge. Well, they are thought to be right because that person was actually telling the name of that person he wanted to challenge.


    The referee looked at Tony and the others and then said that the person wanted to challenge Tony.


    "Haha, it is now my turn." Tony quickly gets up from his seat.


    "Good luck. Also, don''t underestimate your opponent," everyone said to him. Well, Tony had that bad habit of underestimating his opponent. Because of this, everyone reminds him not to underestimate his opponent.


    "Okay, okay. Don''t worry. I don''t want to lose." After saying that, begin to walk toward the fighting area. Well, if you looked around in the audience area, then you will see that it was filled with many students. Previously, only some first-year students, some senior students, and three teachers were watching the fight. But now the area is full of people. All the first years were nowhere. They all looked at the fight. Not only 1st year but 2nd year and 3rd-year students also here. Also, if you look around carefully, then you can see that many teachers are also there. Now all of their focus is on the fighting area.


    "Fight," the referee said. Instantly Tony went to that guy. He also wanted to finish the fight as quickly as he could. That guy did not expect that Tony would run toward him. Well, in the previous match, Sam and Alexa did not go toward their opponent. Because of this, he thought that he would attack Tony with his most powerful technique. But Tony did not give him that chance and attacked him. That guy wanted to defend himself from those attacks, but he failed. Well, the guy can block Tony''s first two attacks, unable to block the other attack. He also sent flying off the fighting area.


    "And the winner is Tony," the referee announced the name of the winner. Tony shows a victory sign toward the audience. Well, actually showing the victory sign to his friends. He came to his seat and sat down.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Nice fight." Sam and the other side of Tony at the same time. Well, it was a really good fight.


    "Jeni or Elena, what do you think, Sam? Who will get the challenge first?" Tony suddenly asked Sam. Elena, and the others were also looking at him. They also wanted to know his answer.


    " Most probably Jeni, then Elena," Sam said to them. Hearing that, they also got surprised because he is sure that Jeni will be challenged next. This saw that Sam was looking toward the fighting area. They also saw the fighting area and noticed a person besides the referee. He was also telling the referee the name of the opponent.


    With that, it was proven that Sam''s guess was right. Because that person really challenged Jeni. By looking at that person, you can tell that he was a spiritual warrior. Because of this, you wanted to fight Jeni the thunder.


    After the referee gave the signal, both of them backed down and made a distance between themselves. Both of them were spiritual warriors, so they wanted to maintain their distance. Wasting no time, both of them started casting their spells.


    Well, you can see that the guy wasn''t that fast to cast his powerful spell. But on the other hand, Jeni has already finished her yellow thunderbolt. Wasting no time, she attacked that guy with her spell.


    In that situation, that guy was not able to continue casting his spell. Because he needed to dodge the attack. But Jeni won''t be giving him that time to dodge. If she was using her white lightning, then probably she won''t be able to cast this fast, but she can instantly cast yellow lightning or yellow thunderbolt. She continuously shoots 5 yellow thunderbolts toward that person. The person wanted to dodge the thunderbolt, but in the end; he was unable to dodge and got hit by the thunderbolt. She also did not use that power to make the thunderbolt. So it did not hurt that much. These thunderbolts only made that guy paralyzed for 1 minute.


    "And the winner is Jeni," the referee said. She got off the stage and went to her seat.


    " Good fight." Sam and the others said to her at the same time. This made her smile.


    Sometimeter, like everyone, Elena also gets challenged by someone. When they started fighting, Elena didn''t give her opponent a chance. The moment the referred said start of the fight, she attacked her opponent with a confused ray, and then came toward her. She ced a knife at the opponent''s neck. When her opponent came back to sense, she saw that a knife was near her neck. With that, Elena became the winner. She got out of the stage and went toward the sitting area.


    Well like this, Kenny and Tina also get challenged by opponents. Both of them were 11th and 12 position holders. Because of this, they also get challenges. Well, you also should not understand them because both of them are very close to breaking through naturally. Both of them easily defeated their opponents and after that, they left the stage.


    "Well, nice job. Let''s go. I don''t think anyone will challenge us again." Sam said that and got up from his seat. Tony and the others also get up from their seats.


    Well, as he predicted, nobody will challenge them again. Also with this, anyone can predict who will be the top 10 position candidate in the first year. All the first-year students now realize how strong Sam and his group were. They need to work hard to reach up to them. Those third-year and 2nd-year students also realized how strong they were.


    At this time, nobody noticed that all the teachers had already left the area. All the teachers were now in the teaching office room and they were talking about Tony and the others, except Sam. They also discussed the top 10 candidates of the first year. Andstly, they are discussing who they want to take as a student. But nobody talks about Sam. Because Alena already told him that she will take him as a student so everyone did not speak about him. Alena is the vice principal of this academy and she is the most potent and most dangerous teacher here. Nobody wants to mess with her. Because of this, everybody did not want to take Sam as their student.


    _______To be continued______


    [A/N: Hey guys, I have already started editing the chapter. The first 15 chapters have already been edited. Still, if you find any mistakes, do tell me. Well, sorry because of the other work I am unable to edit all the chapters that fast.]

 Chapter 159 159 - First Day In The Classroom

    Next day, 2nd October


    Sam was going to the Royal College, but this time he was going alone. Today, his mom and dad will once again go to the dungeon. So his dad won''t be able to apany him.


    He was walking from his house. Well, as you know, his house and the Royal College were close. Sometimeter, he already reached the Royal Academy, and he went toward his ssroom.


    He entered the ssroom but didn''t see anyone in the ssroom. It was now 9: 20 a.m., and still, no one came to the ssroom. He did not care about that. He already called his friends. They still need 10 minutes to reach here. Well, to pass the time, he brought out his earphones and began to listen to music. Well, the ss didn''t start, so there won''t be any problem.


    10 minutester,


    Sam, all this time, listening to music while looking outside of the window. So he did not notice but now the ss is full of students. Every student in the ss nced in his direction. They all wanted to talk to him, but nobody had the courage to talk. So they just keep sitting in their seats.


    Well, Sam wasn''t aware of that. If he gets to know what they are thinking, then Sam will be confused. ''Why would they be afraid of him? Did he do something terrible to them?'' But Sam looked outside of the window and the training area. Well, from their ssroom, the training area was very close so they could look at the training area from their ssroom.


    Suddenly 6 students entered the ss. Just when they entered the ss, everyone in the ss was focused on them. Yes, you guessed it right; it was Tony and the girls. They finally reach the Royal Academy and enter their ssroom.


    Tony and the girls, after entering the ssroom, look around and try to find Sam. After noticing where he was, they also went there. Fortunately, everyone in the ss knew that Sam and his friend would be sitting together, so no one was around Sam.


    When they came closer, they noticed that Sam was looking at the training area while listening to the music. Sam already sensed that someone was near him, so when they got close, instantly turned around, and saw that it was his friends.


    "Good morning guys," he said to them while putting back the earphones in his inventory.


    "Good morning," they also said to him. All of them sit down. Tony sits down beside Sam. While the girls sit down in front of them. They were now waiting for the teacher toe to the ssroom. Sometimeter, you can say all the students were present in the ssroom. At this time a funny thing happens, two students after not finding any free seat except the seat behind Sam and Tony. They went toward them and asked them, ''Excuse me, can we sit down in the seats behind you?''


    Hearing the question, Sam doesn''t know what to do. Why the hell were they asking permission from there? You don''t know if he shouldugh or cry. Tony, hearing their question, started tough. He also did not expect that someone would ask him this type of question.


    "Haha, sure. Why are you asking us for permission?" Heughingly said to them. Hearing this, both of them looked at each other and said, "No, we thought that you didn''t want anyone to sit behind you."


    " Hahaha," Tony once again began tough. Sam also smiles, hearing the answer. Who would ever think that they will think like this? Both of the students, seeing themughing like this, get embarrassed and sit down.


    "Haha, bro, what did you do when we still didn''te to the ss?" Tony asked. Sam also looks around so that everyone in the ss looks in his direction curiously.


    " Nothing, just listening to music," Sam answered him. The girls are also listening to all of this and they are smiling at this time.


    Now you can say all the seats are full of students except for the seat beside Alexa. She was sitting at the front and no one else upied the seat beside her. Behind Alexa, Jeni and Elena were sitting, and Kenny and Tina were behind them. Finally, Sam and Tony.


    Well, sometimeter, a girl entered the ssroom. But she did not see any unupied seat except the seat beside Alexa.


    When she entered the ssroom, Sam already looked in her direction. He recognized this girl. She is the girl from yesterday who challenged Alexa.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam, seeing this, started to smile. Tony, at this moment, was talking to him, but suddenly he saw that Sam started to smile while looking at the entrance. He also looks toward the entrance and he also notices that girl. Only then did he understand why Sam wasughing.


    Not only them but Kenny, Tina, Elina, Jeni, and even Alexa also notice that girl. Except for Alexa, all the other girls were smiling. Alexa was looking at the girl with curiosity. Where she wanted to know what that girl would do.


    Kira at this did not see anyone upying the seat except the seat beside Alexa. So she started to walk towards that. Well, she wasn''t afraid of them and she already challenged Alexa yesterday. But still, when she came in front of the seat, she asked Alexa for permission.


    "Haha," Tony once again began tough loudly. Well, this makes that girl embarrassed.


    "Shut up, Tony!!!" After seeing this, Alexa told Tony to shut up. Well,l heard her tell me, and instantly stopughing. He was afraid of Alexa. Previously in the royal School one day he made fun of Alexa, but the next day he was not able to get up from the bed. Alexa beat him very badly that day. From that day on, Tony was a little afraid of Alexa.


    "Sure," Alexa said to the girl with a smile. The girl nodded and sat down. Alexa, Jeni, and Elena suddenly started to talk with that girl. Kenny and Tina also get up from their seats and go there to take part in it. Well, girls talk.


    Seeing all of this, Tony was surprised. Well, not only him, but Sam was also surprised.


    "Really, these girls surprise me," Tony said. Sam nodded.


    Suddenly Tony and Sam notice someone''s gaze at them. They looked behind and saw that those students who, a few minutes ago, asked their permission, were now looking at them. Just when they noticed that Sam and Tony looked behind, they instantly looked in another direction.


    The funny thing is that the student who was right behind Sam was now facing the white wall. Sam, just seeing all of this, started tough. Tony also notices that and he also begins tough.


    "So, funny guys, what are your names?" Tony asks them while he is stillughing. Hearing the sudden question of those guys, just about to tell them their names, but at this moment a teacher enters the ssroom. Kenny and Tina sit down in their seats.


    "Good morning, Sir," every student in the ss greeted the teacher.


    "Good morning students," he also said with a smile.


    " Well students, this will be our first meeting. My name is Nitin Omar. You can just call me teacher Nitin. I will be the ss teacher of this ss." With that said, he looked around the ss. After that, he once again began to talk.


    "Well, in a few days, all the teachers will choose their personal students or students will choose their teachers. If you think that after taking the personal student, those teachers won''t be teaching you, then you all were wrong. Our job is to teach you. The personal student that wille under us will just have the extra privilege. But that doesn''t mean the teacher won''t be teaching you."


    " I will be your battle instructor. So as you can guess, our ss won''t be a theoretical ss. We will have mock battles in our ss, then we will go to the dungeon. We also focus on your technique and I will try to help you to improve your technique. So this is the battle ss."


    " As you know, 2 monthster we have the annual collegepetition and before that, we have the inter-collegepetition.1st-year students can also participate in thatpetition. Well, if you want to enter thatpetition you can tell me, and those who want to enter thepetition should prepare themselves. Well, I think you also participate in thatpetition so that you can learn from that fight. You will get to know anything and also gain some experience which will be better for you."


    " Well, now I have a list that you also guessed." Teacher Nitin after saying that to bring out a notice paper. Seeing that notice department of the student, guess what this notice paper was about.


    ____________To be continued_________

 Chapter 160 160 - The Top 10 Students Of The First Year.

    " In 10th ce, we have student Saara Fris,


    In 9th we have student Dan Dion


    In 8th ce, we have student Kira Yeon


    In 7th ce, we have student Tina Hance


    In sixth ce, we have student Kenny Rem


    In 5th ce, we have student Elena Martin


    In 4th ce, we have student Tony Taylor


    In third ce, we have student Jeni Chaffy


    In the second ce, we have student Alexa m


    In the first ce, we have student Sam Kainer. "


    " I think many of you already know this result. So these are the names of the top 10 students from the 1st year. As our principal said yesterday, all the top 10 students will be receiving credit points every month. The 10th ce student Saara will receive 100 credit points every month. Our 1st ce student Sam will receive 1000 credit points every month."


    " Those students who aren''t in the top 10 positions will only receive 50 credit points every month. You won''t be receiving any credit points more than that. Like our principal told you how to collect credit points. You can receive credit points through your various achievements. You can also visit the mission board and ept any mission to collect credit points. But there are many students who like to be reckless and ept many dangerous missions. But I don''t want my students to be that reckless who will ept dangerous missions that are out of their league."


    " Now I have good news for all the warriors who wanted to go to the dungeons. Because the inter-collegepetition is near, I want all of my students to prepare themselves for the battle. So 1 monthter, we will be going to the dungeon. This month we will be training as hard as we can. Also, as you know that you need to attend some theory sses. Many students ignore the theory ss, but you shouldn''t do that. In theory ss, you get to learn many things about monsters, dangers, and many more things. Also in the annual exam, you will also give a theory exam and after that battle exam. So we prepare for the theory exam."


    "Now everyone, can you bring out your mobiles? Now you already are a student of the Royal Academy, so I will send you the link to join the warriorwork. As you know, we didn''t reveal much information on the inte that can cause any harm to normal citizens. From here, you all will be the true warriors of human civilization. You will get to know a lot of news in the warriorwork that you won''t be able to find anywhere. Also, I don''t think that I needed to tell you about the warriorwork. As you already know. Many powerful warriors are also in the warriorwork."


    After saying that, teacher Nitin gave everyone a link. Through that link, all the students will be able to join the warriorwork. Sam, at this time, smiling. E finally was a part of the warriorwork where he can know anything about the dungeons and monsters.


    It took some minutes for all those students to join the warriorwork. After that teacher, Nitin told everyone the details of this warriorwork. All the students at this time silently listened to his exnation.


    "Now everything is almost done. As you know, I am your battle instructor, so I will hold our ss in the training room. So everyone changes into your training clothes andes to the training room," Nitin said to all the students.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Every student nodded and got up from their seats. They need to change into their training clothes and then go to the training room. Well, Sam and the others already know where the training room is. Yesterday they already visited those training rooms. You can say the training room in the college was very big. It wasn''t like the training room that is in their house. In those training rooms, Sam noticed many things that he has never seen before. All of them quickly got up from their seats and went toward the changing room.


    Sometimeter, all the students were in the training room. When all the students arrived, teacher Nithin began to speak.


    "At first, I would like to see all of your techniques. After that, I will guide you. So for this, you will fight robots. Don''t worry, the robot will be at the same level as you. So let''s go to the fighting area." After saying that, teacher Nitin brought all the students to the fighting area. The fighting area, or we can say the fighting stadium, where mainly every battle takes ce. Well, they also have an outdoor battle stadium where previously Sam and his friends fight with their challengers. But now they were going toward the indoor battle stadium. This was the main stadium where every battle took ce. It wasn''t that far from the indoor training room. So they did not take that much time to reach the indoor battle stadium.


    "Now the top 10 students will be fighting those robots at the end. So that you won''t lose your confidence. Now in this box, I put all the numbers. So now you just need to take out that and based on that number, you will be fighting those robots. You should only use your battle technique so that I get a proper understanding of your technique. That doesn''t mean you shouldn''t use your other techniques. I am just telling you that you give me a proper view of your technique and your power. Okay then, don''t waste your time and begin." After teacher Nitin finishes talking, every student begins to take out a number from the box, except the top 10 students.


    It takes some time, but finally, all the students have a number.


    "So we will start our battle from the student who gets number one. At this time, all the other students will be in the audience area. We don''t want to disturb it so we will be in the audience area." Teacher Nitin said that and signaled all the other students who will be fightingter to go to the audience area. Only the student who will be fighting that robot stays in the battleground.


    Well, the student who got the number 1, was pretty nervous. Well, he didn''t expect that he would get the number one and you would be that robot first. He thought he would first observe other''s matches, then he would fight the robot.


    Teacher Nitin seems to notice his nervousness, so he said to him,


    "Don''t worry, take this fight as training. I don''t tell you to defeat the robot. I just want you to show me your capability and your techniques. So just rx and fight the robot," he told the student. The student seems to rx a little after hearing teacher Nitin''s words. After saying that, teacher Nitin also went toward the audience area and then signaled for the battle to start.


    A ck color robot enters the battleground. Sam, just seeing this robot, was surprised. He also has a training partner like this robot, but his robot seems to not be as powerful as this robot that he is currently seeing. Well, it was his guess, so he didn''t ask anyone and just silently looked at the battle area.


    In that battle area, they had a big battle ring. The rule in this battle ring is simple. Whoever first steps out of this ring will be the loser. Well, if your opponent was powerful, then you can also surrender. Well, just a simple rule.


    All the students saw that the robot came to the battle ring. As teacher Nitin said, they will adjust the power of the robot. So, the power level of the robot was the same as that warrior.


    That warrior had already brought out a sword. He was ready to fight anytime. Just when teacher Nitin gives him the signal, he instantly runs toward that robot with all of his speed and swings his sword toward the robot. The robot already senses the attacks and dodges them. Instantly, the robot throws a punch toward the students. The student seems to notice that punch, so he quickly tries to block that punch while holding his sword with both of his hands.


    Like this student fought that robot but in the end, he still lost against that robot. He made a great mistake and because of this; he lost the fight. Like some, students also wanted to use concealment techniques and attack that robot. But even after using his concealment technique, the robot seems to notice him and attack him. Like this came to an end.


    "I think you know where you made the mistake. These robots weren''t humans or monsters. They are only just metal things that are made with many advanced devices. They can easily discover you if your concealment technique wasn''t strong enough. So this type of mistake doesn''t repeat. I already understand your technique and your fighting styles. Next student, pleasee to the battle ring."


    ______________To be continued___________

 Chapter 161 161 - Fighting With The Robot

    Already all the students, except the top 10 students, fought with the robot. Now it was time for the top 10 students to fight with these robots.


    "Students Saara Fris, came to the battle ring." Teacher Nitin announced that.


    Saara gets out of her seat and begins to walk toward the battle ring. Every student present here was now looking at the battle ring. Well, you can say all the students are waiting for the top 10 students to fight. They also wanted to know how powerful those top 10 students were.


    Saara was now standing on the battle ring while the robot wasing toward the battle ring. She was already at the peak of E-grade, so teacher Nitin also set the power of the robot to the same as her.


    Well, previously, Saara challenged Elena to a fight. But Elena finishes the file very quickly and because of this, no one knows about her power that much. Saara, at this time, started casting her spell. Well, she was a spiritual warrior. Also, she was a water spell caster.


    "Began" teacher Nitin signals for the fight to start.


    Instantly, Saara attacks the robot with a water spear. The robot already senses that and avoids the attack. After that, the robot quickly went to Saara and threw a punch at her.


    But Saara also wasn''t that slow. Seeing the robot was about to punch her, she instantly made a water shield in front of her. The robot hit the water shield. The water shield trembles for some time after getting hit by the robot. But it still didn''t break. The robot keeps punching the water shield. If Saara doesn''t do anything, then she will be at a disadvantage.


    Saara also knew that she needed to quickly do something or she would lose. Until now, she controlled the water shield with her two hands, but now she was controlling the water shield with one hand while, with the other hand, she began to cast a water ball.


    This time, she only used one hand to control the water shield. Because of this, the water shield wasn''t as powerful as before. Well, previously she used her two hands and constantly focused on the water shield, so it was obvious that time the shield was powerful.


    It only takes a few more punches from the robot for this water shield to break. But Saara was waiting for this moment. Previously, she also stopped circting spiritual energy in the water shield. She uses all her spirit to make that water ball powerful. The moment the robot is able to break the water shield, she instantly attacks the robot with her water ball.


    They were very close and because of this; the robot could not dodge this surprise attack. The robot gets hit by the water ball. Well, you have to say that the water ball was very powerful. It sends that robot flying. The Robot fell down from the battle ring.


    "The winner is Saara," instantly teacher Nitin appears in the battle ring and announces the result. Then he turned towards Saara.


    "Well, Saara, good fight. Also, that was an excellent strategy. But you have to make your casting time shorter. Also, I can see that you don''t have any closebat experience. You already know that the major weakness of spiritual warriors is a closebat fight. You did not need to be a master at closebat fights. When the enemy is close to you, you need to learn how to defend yourself. Still, it was a good fight." Teacher Nitin said all of this to her.


    " Thank you, teacher," she thanked teacher Nitin. After that, she gets off the battle ring and once again walks toward the audience area.


    "Student Dan, pleasee to the battle ring." Teacher Nitin instantly called the next student. Dan was already near the battle ring. Well, he knows that after Saara, it will be his time to fight.


    He came to the ring. The robot that previously Saara sent flying with her water ball once again came to the battle ring. Nobody knows how powerful this robot is. All the students all this time are fighting with this robot but you cannot see any scratch on that robot.


    Dan already brought out his bow. You guessed it right; he was an archer. He was already ready to shoot his arrow.


    Now, this was interesting. Sam previously didn''t see that many people use a bow as their main opening. Well, the bow wasn''t any weak weapon, but it was just not everybody could master the bow. Fortunately, Sam was taught by his mother, so he can learn quickly.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Well, not only Sam but his friends also be interested in Dan. Until now, so many students were using bows, but their technique wasn''t good and their posture wasn''t good. But this time, looking at Dan''s posture, you can say he was good. And looking at him, Sam can see that he was also using the rapid shot technique. Dan was just waiting for teacher Nitin to give a signal.


    "Began," Nitin quickly gave the signal. Instantly, Dan begins to shoot arrows toward the robot. But the robot seems to sense all this because he keeps dodging those arrows using his speed. But the robot''s power was only at peak E-grade. Still, there was a chance for Dan to defeat this robot.


    He quickly stopped using rapid shots. He was at his limit. But Dan also knows that if he stops right now, then the robot will attack him instantly, and he won''t be able to dodge that attack. So, he needed to use his powerful move. He stopped for a second, then took a deep breath and focused on the robot. The robot at this time was already running toward him. The robot was about to attack him, but he didn''t give the robot any chance and instantly shot the arrow toward the robot. This time, this arrow''s power was unique. Well, mainly because it was many times faster than before. This time, the robot was unable to dodge the arrow and was hit by the arrow. The robot was once again sent flying after being hit by the arrow.


    Once again, teacher Nitin came to the battle ring and said to Dan,


    "Good fight. But you still made some mistakes. You continuously use rapid short and because of this, you are now low in stamina. Thest technique was excellent, but you needed to learn how to use it continuously." Nitin said to him.


    Dan, after saying thank you, left the battle ring.


    "Student Kira, pleasee to the battle ring." Teacher Nitin called Kira. Well, Kira was already going toward the battle ring.


    When she came to the battle ring, teacher Nitin instantly got down from the battle ring. Once again, that robot came to the battle ring with no scratch. Previously, the arrow did nothing to him.


    She already brings out her sword and is ready to face that robot. The moment teacher Nitin gives them the signal, she instantly runs to the robot and attacks him. Well, she wasn''t like a reckless fool running toward that robot.


    The robot also punched. Both are swords and the robot''s punch shes with each other. But the power behind Kira''s sword sends the robot back. Well, because she runs toward the robot and attacks, she gets momentum in her attack.


    She did not want to give that robot any chance to attack her. She once again swung her sword toward the robot. This time, she used her powerful sword technique. Well, she wanted to send that robot out of the Ring. The robot tried to dodge that attack, but in the end; he failed. He was sent back again. But still, the robot didn''t fall down from the battle ring. Kira once again swings her sword. But this time, it was a fake attack. The robot tries to dodge this attack, but instantly Kira punches that robot. The robot was already very close to the corner of the Ring. That punch sent him out of the Ring.


    "The winner is Kira," once again teacher Nitin came to the battle ring and announced the winner''s name.


    "Good fight. I can see that you are good at using your techniques and sword. But I also notice that the previous technique you used before wasn''t that powerful enough. The technique was wonderful, but the power behind that technique wasn''t good. You need to work on that so you can use that technique to its full potential." Nitin said got her.


    " Thank you, teacher." Kira nodded at him and said thank you. She then left the battle ring.


    "Student Tina, pleasee to the battle ring," Nitin calls Tina to fight. Well, Tina was also on her way toward the battle ring. She was already ready to face that robot.


    She came to the battle ring and that robot once again got up from the ground and came to the battle ring.


    "Tina¡­ Tina¡­ Tina," instantly Tony, Elena, and Kenny began to cheer for her.


    ______________To be continued______________

 Chapter 162 162 - Fighting With The Robot (2)

    Well, Tina just nodded at them, then she fully focused on the robot. She had already brought out her sword and was ready to attack.


    "Began," Nitin signals for the fight to start.


    Tina didn''t go toward the robot like a reckless fool. She was observing the robot. Every time, that robot gave everyone a handicap. He didn''t attack anyone at first. He let them attack him first, but in this case; the robot noticed that this time, this human didn''t attack even after the fight started.


    So this time, the robot was going toward Tina. He was always ready to punch. Tina, at this time, looked at the robot who wasing toward her. She also didn''t waste her time, and instantly attacked the robot with her sword. Both the sword and the punch sh with each other. But this time, the power behind the sword was greater, so the robot was sent backward. Well, Tina was very close to bing an early D-grade warrior. So you can say she was in peak condition.


    But Tina didn''t waste her time, quickly ran to the robot and swung her sword. The robot was unable to defend himself this time. Because all this happened so quickly that he was unable to bnce himself. In the previous attack, he was sent backward because of this, he lost his bnce and Tina used the situation to attack the robot. It sends the robot out of the battle ring.


    "The winner is Tina," Nitin announced the winner''s name. He also came to the battle ring and walked toward Tina.


    "It was a good battle. You perfectly use your sword, and your control over the sword is good. It was just that you needed to increase your speed. Previously, the robot was very close to you because of this you have to attack the robot quickly, but if the robot was far from you, then you won''t be able to attack that robot this quickly. Well, other than that, everything is fine." Nitin said to Tina. Tina nodded and thanked him.


    " Next student, Kenny, pleasee to the ring," Nitin announced the student''s name.


    Kenny was already beside the battle ring. When Nitin called, she immediately went to the battle ring.


    "Kenny¡­ Kenny¡­ Kenny," once again Tony, Elena, and Tina began to cheer for her.


    Kenny, look at them and smile. After that, she only focuses on that robot. The ck robot once again came to the battle team, and he didn''t have any scratches on his body. Really, this robot was very tough.


    "Began," Nitin gave them a signal to fight.


    Kenny has already finished casting a light spear (not powerful as Elena''s). The moment Nitin gives them the signal to fight, Kenny attacks the robot with her light spear.


    [A/N: Kenny can also use spells, but she wasn''t strong at this. Her main weapon is a sword.]


    This attack wasn''t that powerful and wasn''t that quick. So the robot is able to dodge the attack very easily. But at this time, Kenny is already very close to the robot and attacks the robot using her strongest sword technique. That robot didn''t expect that and because of this, he was sent flying.


    From the first, it was Kenny''s n. To make a light spear and attack the robot. But this won''t be her main attack, it was just a fake attack. She will use that chance when the robot dodges the light spear, to attack the robot. As she expected, her n was sessful.


    "The winner is Kenny," Nitin at this moment appears on the battle ring and announces the winner''s name.


    "Well, your n was very good. You waste some of your time casting the light sphere. If this was a real enemy, then you won''t be able to use this n. Also, because of casting the light spear, the power behind your sword attack wasn''t that powerful. So you need to work on that." Nitin said to her.


    Kenny, after listening to Nitin''s words, nodded and then thanked him. She left the battle ring.


    "Next student, Elena, pleasee to the stage," Nitin said. Sometimeter, Elena was now on the battle ring. From here, the tough better will start. Because now the power level of the robot is in early D-grade. All of her friends were cheering for her. Elena nodded at them and then looked at the robot. She needs to attack that robot from a distance. She was a long-distance warrior.<novelnext></novelnext>


    She has already started casting her spell. She wasn''t only casting one light spear, but she was casting multiple light spears.


    "Began," Nitin gave them the signal for the fight.


    At this time, Elena has already finished casting 30 light spears. She almost used 60% of her spiritual energy to make this. Elena, these few days really improved her casting time.


    The moment Nitin gives the signal for the fight, she attacks that robot, wasting no time. One after another, those light spears were going toward the robot. The robot, at this time, uses his increased power to dodge these spears. But dodging 30 light spears wasn''t possible for the robot just because he was now in early D-grade. The main thing about this robot is that it has bnced power. This means that his strength and agility were the same. Because of this, the robot wasn''t that fast enough to dodge those 30 light spears.


    At first, he dodge some of those light spears but then he got hit by one light Spear. What do you expect? From this moment on, that robot just got hit by those light spears one after another. Unable to defend himself against those light Spears. Facing all those light Spears the robot just goes backward. Sometimeter, the robot was now finally out of the Ring and only Elena was in the battle ring.


    "The winner is Elena." Nitin appears on the battle ring and announces the result.


    "Your strategy was good, your casting time was also good, and the power behind the attack was also good. But the main thing is that you use half of your spiritual energy to cast all the light, Spears. If this was a real fight and you''re fighting many enemies at the same time, then you won''t be able to use this strategy. Losing your spiritual energy is really dangerous. You need to improve your strategy. But it was an excellent fight," Nitin said to her. Elena, after nodding his word. After that, she thanked him and left the battle ring.


    "Next student, Tony, came to the battle ring," Nitin called Tony toe to the battle ring.


    Tony was already walking toward the battle ring. Sometimeter, he reached the battle ring. At this time Nitin got out of the battle ring.


    "Tony¡­ Tony¡­ Tony," Sam, Kenny, and Tina cheer for him.


    You can say, hearing his friends cheering, he was fired up for the fight. He had already brought out his sword, and he was ready to attack that robot at any time.


    "Began," Nitin gave him the signal for the fight.


    The moment Nitin gives the signal, Tony rushes toward that robot. He already started his fight using his most powerful sword technique. The robot seems to feel the power behind the attack and because of this, the robot crosses his hand and tries to defend himself. Well, the robot didn''t feel any fear or any other emotion. But they had sensors that could tell them which attack was powerful and which was not. The robot wasn''t fast enough like Tony, so he can only defend himself.


    The attack was so powerful that the robot flew outside of the Ring. Well, Tony uses 90% of his strength in this attack. So it wasn''t easy to defend against this attack. If the robot''s power was a few times higher than Tony''s, only then the robot would be able to defend itself. But because the power level is just only at early D-grade like Tony. When someone recently became an early D-grade warrior, the power level he had at that time, the robot had that power level at this time. Well, Nitin didn''t want a student to be injured, so he adjusted the power level like this.


    "The winner is Tony," Nitin appeared on the battle ring and announced the result.


    "Well, it was a good fight. You decided to use your most powerful technique at the beginning to finish the fight quickly. It is an excellent strategy, but the downfall is that you almost use all of your strength. If right now any other enemyes to you, you won''t be able to defend yourself. We need to work on that. But it was an excellent fight." Nitin said to Tony.


    Tony nodded at him. Well, he also knows the downfall of this attack. Because he was tired right now because of using his full strength. Well, if he was facing real enemies, he wouldn''t use this strategy. He just wanted to finish the fight quickly because of this, he used this strategy. Also, to use his most powerful technique, he needed to use this much power. Because of this, he rarely uses this technique.


    _______________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 163 163 - Fighting With The Robot (3)

    "Next student Jeni, pleasee to the battle ring," Nitin called the next student.


    Jeni was already on her way toward the battle ring. She was ready to fight. Like Tony, she was also nning to finish the fight as quickly as she could. Well, the main advantage she has in this fight is that the robot won''t be attacking her and this will give her the time to prepare her attack.


    "Jeni¡­ Jeni¡­ Jeni." Tony and the others were cheering for her. Well, except for them, nobody was cheering for anyone. But who cares? They will just cheer for their friend.


    Jeni came to the battle ring. Nitin already went out of the battle ring. The robot once again came to the battle ring. There wasn''t any power difference from before.


    Jeni already started to cast her strongest spell.


    "Battle began," Nitin gave them the signal.


    Instantly a lightning Dragon appeared and with an insane speed went to the robot. Instantly, the robot gets hit by the spell and sent flying outside of the ring. This time, everyone thought that this attack would damage the robot. Because of the dust everywhere, they are unable to see the robots'' condition.


    At this time, Nitin appeared in the battle ring and announced the winner''s name. Then he turned around and said to Jeni,


    "I can see that it was a very powerful spell. You also have good control over lightning. But you needed to cast a powerful spell. You can instantly cast a yellow thunderbolt, but while casting powerful spells, you need some time to cast. So you need to work on that. Other than that, it was a very good match," Nitin said to her.


    Jeni, at this moment she was panting. Well, in the previous attack, she almost uses all offers of spiritual energy. This is the new powerful spell she learned recently. But the downfall of this attack was it needed so much spiritual energy to cast this spell and it also needed 3 minutes to cast. Fortunately, she was only facing the robot, but if she was in a real fight, then it could be dangerous for her. She knows that she needs to work on her casting time. She also needed to work on her spiritual energy control because if she became good at spiritual energy control, then the casting time would increase.


    Jeni nodded at Nitin and left the ring. At this moment, the dust around the robot bes clear and you can see clearly the condition of the robot. Almost everyone was very surprised except Nitin. Well, Jeni''s attack didn''t damage this robot. The Robot was still fine. This really confused all the students. What can damage this robot? How much power do they need to have to damage this robot?


    "Next student Alexa, pleasee to the ring," Nitin called Alexa. Well, it was her time to fight the robot. Alexa already left the audience area, and she was walking toward the battle ring.


    Sometimeter, she was in the battle ring while on her opposite side, the robot was also standing. Alexa had already brought out her sword. She will also attack that robot with her most powerful technique - The 10 shes. She was just waiting for the signal.


    "Began," Nitin gave them the signal. Instantly, Alexa ran toward that robot. The robot was also in his fighting position. He was also ready to fight Alexa with his fist. Well, one thing everyone noticed was that the robot only fights with his fists. This robot didn''t use any type of weapon to fight.


    Jeni quickly came in front of the robot and attacked the robot. With this technique, she will be able to sh the robot 10 times in a second. The robot tried to defend himself, but all those sword strikes were so fast, and he was unable to defend and he was sent outside of the ring.


    "The winner is Alexa.," Nitin came to the battle ring and announced the name of the winner. Then he turned around and told Alexa,


    "It was a good fight. The technique you used is very powerful and fast. You can sh the robot 10 times in a second. It is really a powerful technique. But I can see that you still aren''t ready to use this technique. This technique of your suit consumes your stamina and strength. Well, because of this you are currently panting this much. We need to work on that. Also, you need to increase your strength and physique. It is a really good fight," Nitin said to her.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Well, this time panting very much. Well, this technique of hers really consumed her whole stamina and strength, which left her with no strength to fight. She just recently learned this powerful technique. It was a B-grade technique. Because of this, while using this technique, her strength and stamina consume this much.


    She nodded at Nitin, and after saying thank you; she left the ring.


    "Well, now our final participant and number one position holder, Sam, pleasee to the stage. This is your time to fight this robot." Nitin said this to Sam and told him toe to the battle ring. Well, Sam has already brought out his yer and is ready to fight.


    At this time, every student was seriously looking at the battle ring. Previously, they weren''t able to watch his fight because Sam finished that fight very quickly. But today their teacher said that they should not use the concealment technique in front of the robot. They already know that Sam was very good at concealment. So today they hope that they will get to see Sam''s full power.


    Sam at this time unaware of this thought. Currently, he is looking at the robot and thinking about what technique he should use. Should he use his technique, archer technique, or fire control? All of them were his strongest. This time, he didn''t n to use his concealment technique.


    Previously, teacher Nitin says to them that the robot is made with various devices that can track them even if they used their concealment technique. But he thinks that even if he uses the concealment technique, the robot could notice him. His concealment technique wasn''t normal. Because of this, he didn''t want anyone to find out about his concealment technique. As everyone knows, he has potential only in special grades. So they will think that he can only learn a D-grade technique, he won''t be able to learn any technique farther than D-grade. Well, because those who have the special grade, only can learn D-grade. It was natural because if those who had only a special grade try to learn c grade or higher grade technique, they will face side effects. Because of this, he didn''t want to use his concealment technique in front of this robot.


    [A/N: Don''t worry, he will still use his concealment technique.]


    In the end, he decided to use his sword technique and bring out his sword. Yes, you guessed it right. He will use his Energy mode. He really wanted to see if his attack would be able to damage that robot or not.


    _______________


    "Increase the power." At this time, Nitin suddenly gives a voicemand to the robot. Nobody noticed that or heard anything. Previously, he didn''t tell the robot to increase its power, but just when Sam appeared on the battle ring, hemanded the robot to increase his power. When someone reached the stage of early D-grade where he reached the next grade, at that time, the robot now has the same amount of power as the warrior.


    Well, he knows that he should not be doing that, but he had a feeling that it would be a very easy fight for Sam. Because of this, he was hesitating to increase the power of the robot to the intermediate D-grade. But in the end, he decided against it.


    Nitin was now looking at Sam. He knows that Sam can use a sword and bow, even he can cast spells. So what will Sam use this time to fight the robot? He was thinking that when he saw that Sam had brought out his ck sword. This was the same sword that some used in the examination most of the time. At that time, many warriors thought that this was a special sword. But now, looking at the sword carefully, he didn''t feel any special powering out of the sword. Was this really a special sword? He thought about it.


    Well, it was natural for them to know about this. No one used a sword like Sam. No one previously tried to send their spiritual energy toward the sword. So they only thought that sword was powerful and because of this, he easily cut his enemies. Many of the warriors also wanted to know about the details of Sam''s sword. In the dungeon, they didn''t get any sword or any other weapons. So that means it was made outside of the dungeon. Because of this, they wanted to know about the details of Sam''s sword. If it was a really special sword, they will try to build their special sword with material that Sam''s sword was made off with.


    [A/N: Hahaha¡­ Those warriors will get a heart attackter.]


    ________________To be continued___________

 Chapter 164 164 - Fighting The Robot (4)

    Sam went towards the robot. But he wasn''t running, he was just calmly walking toward the robot. But suddenly he disappeared from his spot.


    All this time, the robot was looking in his direction. He was also ready to fight Sam, but after seeing Sam suddenly disappear, unable to detect him. Using his advanced scanner, he scanned all the area but still did not find Sam.


    While the robot was searching for Sam, he had alreadye behind the robot. The robot was finally able to detect Sam once again, but it was prettyte. Sam already attacked the robot, and the robot did not get the chance to avoid the attack. The robot was unable to defend himself in front of Sam''s insane sword speed. He shes the robot ten times in less than a second.


    This attack creates a massive force and sends that robot flying. But the robot still did not go outside of the battle ring. At this time, all the students were looking at the battle ring in surprise. They all became surprised when they noticed Sam suddenly vanished from the battle ring. At first, they thought that the robot could detect him because teacher Nitin said to them that the robot was made of an advanced device that can easily detect life signs even if you were using concealment techniques. But then the main question was how did Sam suddenly sneak attack the robot? They also said that the robot could not defend against that attack. That means that the robot previously could not detect Sam. This was an amazing thing for them.


    Well, not only all the students but teacher Nitin were also surprised after seeing this. He was also present here, but you also did not detect Sam''s life sign when Sam suddenly vanished from the battle ring. Did he use some kind of high-grade concealment technique? Or did he use another method? These questions were in Nithin''s mind.


    Well, you all must be wondering why some decided to use the concealment technique, even when they decided not to use this technique. Sam decided to use this technique because he also wanted to see if that robot could detect him or not. He also already thinks about what he should tell the teacher if teacher Nitin asks him about this. He will tell teacher Nitin that it was his teleportation technique that made him very fast and because of this, the robot was unable to detect him. Using this technique suddenly appeared behind that robot and because of this, the robot was unable to detect him. Even this answer did not satisfy teacher Nitin, but he was unable to do anything to him.


    _______


    Back to the main fight,


    The robot instantly turned around and was ready to approach Sam. But when he turned around, Sam was already in front of him. Sam did not want to give any chance to this robot because of this he used his movement technique and full speed and instantly appeared behind that robot.


    He was surprised that even after using the energy mode and fast cut; he could not leave a scratch mark on that robot. This really surprised him because he thought he could leave at least a scratch mark on the robot. Because of this, Sam uses much spiritual energy in the sword. He wanted to see what could happen if he used 80% of his spiritual energy.


    When he circted his 80% spiritual energy to coat that sword, the color of the sword changed. It is now much darker than before. It was like no light could pass through this darkness. But the main thing was that nobody noticed that. Everyone at this time thought about how Sam appeared behind that robot without alerting the robot. Event teacher Nitin also thought of this question. Because of this, nobody noticed the change in his sword.


    He once again uses his fast-cut technique to attack the robot. The robot once again fails to defend himself against Sam''s attack. Once again, the robot flew. This time the robot was very near to the corner of the Ring, so he flew outside of the battle Ring. Like this, Sam defeats the robot.


    Once again, everyone became surprised to see this. They are unable to keep up with Sam''s speed. He was really fast. They are unable to notice when Sam suddenly appears behind that robot once again and attacks that robot. They only just see that Sam vanishes from his ce and instantly appears behind the robot.


    Tony, Jeni, Elena, and the others weren''t that surprised. They already know how fast he really was. But nothing that surprised them was when previously Sam suddenly disappeared in front of the robot and the robot was unable to detect him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam, at this time, looks at the robot. Hey wanted to know if this time he was able to leave a scratch mark on that robot. All the students notice that Sam is seriously looking at the robot because of this they also looked at the robot. They wanted to know why he was looking at that robot with a serious expression. Nitin already appears on the battle ring but instead of announcing the result, he looks at the robot.


    At first, when the robot was on the ground nobody was able to notice anything but when the robot got from the ground everyone became shocked after seeing the robot. Because they can notice cut marks on the robot. Finally, someone was able to leave a scratch mark on the robot.


    Seeing this, Nitin bes very surprised that he doesn''t know what he should say right now. This robot was made of a strong material called Crystone (Balck). You guessed it right, this robot was made of a mythical material. You won''t be able to find these materials unless you go to the S-grade dungeons. But Sam manages to leave cut marks on the robot.


    Sam, at this time, wasn''t as surprised as others. He already predicted that this robot was made of some kind of material. You can only damage that material if you use spiritual energy. But when Elena and Jeni attack that robot using their spell, they are unable to leave any scratch marks on the robot. So that means you won''t be able to damage that robot even if you use your spiritual technique to cast spells and attack the robot. Because of this, Sam decided to use his energy mode and coat the sword. He wanted to see if he could damage that robot or leave scratch marks on the robot if he used this process. And the final results he was able to leave cuts marks on the robot.


    Nitin, who was in a daze, suddenly came back to reality and then announced the winner''s name.


    "Winner is Sam Kainer, the no 1 student."


    Well, Sam was now the number one student in the first year. The top 10 results decided this.


    At this time, many students were now thinking if they should challenge Sam after this or not. Previously, many thought that they could win against him, or even if they were unable to defeat him, at least they would be able to injure him. But right now, all of their dreams are broken. They got pped by the harsh reality. How could they enjoy that man who could leave cut marks on the robot, who could suddenly appear behind the robot while the robot was unable to detect him? You can say this was really hit hard.


    __________


    "Student Sam, this is a really excellent fight. You were able to use your technique perfectly and also you did not tire yourself. You have perfect control over your strength and speed. I can see why everyone calls you a genius. You are like your sister, aplete monster. But can you tell me how you are able to ignore the detection of the robot? Why was the robot unable to detect you when you suddenly disappeared?" At first, Nitin praised him, but then he asked Sam this question. Nitin was really curious to know. You can say not only him but all the students were really curious to know the answer.


    "Haha, thank you teacher for thepliment. Well, previously I used a teleportation technique that I got from the dungeon. It is a D-grade technique. Using this technique I can tell about anywhere. But this has a limit. This technique will work only in a 500 m radius. I am unable to teleport more than that. So you can say this was a short teleportation technique. Previously, I used that technique to appear behind that robot. I think also because of this, the robot is unable to detect me," Sam calmly answered Nitin. This was the best way to answer someone''s question so that the opposite party won''t suspect you.


    Hearing the answer, Nitin bes silent. Sam looks at his teacher, Nitin. He doesn''t know if Nitin believes him or not. But he still maintains a calm expression.


    _______________To be continued_________

 Chapter 165 165 - Get To Know About New Things.

    "Ok," Sam still didn''t know if Nitin believed him or not. But he saw teacher Nitin nodding at him. Well, he seems to believe him.


    "Haha, I never expected that you would use teleportation techniques. Your sword technique was very excellent. You have excellent control of your sword." After saying this, Nitin turned around and said to all students that the fight was finished. They should go back to the training room.


    All the students get up from their seats and start working toward the training room. Sam also gets out of the battle ring and walks toward the training room.


    At this time, Nitin suddenly called someone,


    "Sir, did you see that?" He asked someone.


    "Yes, I see that. I don''t even know if he uses the teleportation technique or not." The other party answered.


    " Same, sir," Nitin said to the other party. After that, he talked to that man for some time and hung up the call.


    Nitin gets out of the battle ring and also starts walking toward the training room. Entering the training room, he saw that all the students were there and waiting for him. After he went in front of them and start talking,


    "I presume everyone gets an idea of their own weakness. We will be working on that. Our teacher Samantha, will teach those who are spiritual warriors. Unfortunately, teacher Samantha is busy and because of this unable toe today. But don''t worry, she wille here tomorrow. I will guide all those physical warriors and teacher Samantha will guide those spiritual warriors. I know there are many students who are physical warriors but they can also use spells. Don''t worry if you guys want to join the ss teacher Samantha, you can join it. We held our ss at the same time. Because, as I say, I will be teaching those spiritual warriors how to defend themselves if they face an enemy in close range." Nitin said that to them.


    All the students nodded after hearing him.


    " Now, back to the main matter. All top 10 students from 1st year will get a personal training room. They will also get a robot like that previous robot for their practice partner. This is the reward all the top 10 students will get. Those who aren''t in the top 10 positions will practice here. Don''t worry, we have many robots for your practice partner. With that, our ss for today is finished. From tomorrow, we will start our training. Tomorrow I will also tell you about the annual collegepetition. Now everyone changes your clothes and goes back to your ssroom. I will inform you there about your theory ss." Nitin said that and left the training room. All the students also left the training room and went back to the changing room.


    After changing into the college uniform, they all came back to the ssroom.


    "Haha, Sam, bro, that was a really good fight. But I never knew that you had teleportation technique," Tony said to Sam.


    " Haha, I just recently bought this technique. Because of this, you don''t know about this." Sam told him. Well, what can he say? He just needed to lie to his friends. But one thing was that something about really buying a teleportation technique. This will be good for him to buy a teleportation technique.


    Sam and Tony were talking while teacher Nitin once again entered the ssroom.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "As you know, I already told you that in 1 month we will go on our first adventure. But that doesn''t mean you cannot ept any mission from the mission board. Even when you arepleting your mission, you need toe back before you go to the dungeon. Also, you need to carefully choose your mission. Don''t choose any mission that is out of your league. Nowe back to our theory ss. Don''t worry, we don''t have that much theory ss. Our primary focus is battle. Still, we have a discussion ss. Here you will get to know about all the dungeons that you have never visited and also about the weakness of many monsters. After that, you had a spell theory ss. It wasn''t for the physical warrior, only those spiritual warriors should attend this ss."


    " Now I wanted to ask you, what is spiritual energy and what is the use of spiritual energy? Can anyone tell me?" Nitin suddenly asked all the students this question.


    "100 years ago, our world suddenly started to produce spiritual energy. After research found that from the ancient age, our earth had spiritual energy but it wasn''t active at that time. The spiritual warriors mainly used spiritual energy while they cast spills." Alexa stood up from history and told Nitin.


    " You are right, student Alexa, but you are also wrong. Now I know if you are confused why she is wrong. What if I told you that physical warriors can also have spiritual energy? What do you think? Also, don''t think that physical warriors will use that spiritual energy to cast spells. Let me demonstrate to you," teacher Nitin said, bringing out his sword.


    Sam at this time was very surprised to hear teacher Nitin''s words. He never knew something like this. Sam can feel that teacher Nitin is circting his spiritual energy and instantly swings his sword. A blue shing out from the sword hit the wall. Instantly, everyone can see a crack mark on the wall. After seeing this, Sam was very surprised. Using his energy mode, he can create an air sh, but what is this blue sh? This was his first time seeing this. Because of this, he was very surprised.


    "Haha, I know that you all are surprised. Don''t worry, I will teach you about this, but there is a restriction. You cannot tell anyone about this who was not a part of the college. Also, only those warriors who are early D-grade can learn this. For those other students, don''t worry about this. When you also be D-grade, you also learn this. Actually, only when you reach this stage, your body is able to handle the pressure. Even low-grade spiritual warriors can cast spells, but only warriors who were D-grade can learn this. For now, those students who are D-grade will be learning this technique."


    "But I can give you a basic lesson about this. While casting spells, you use the spiritual energy and through your technique, you change the nature of the spiritual energy. Like this, you cast a spell. In this matter, we won''t be able to directly use spiritual energy. Also, because of this, it was really hard. Fortunately, we got a technique that will help us in this case. This technique will directly circte your spiritual energy and send it to a weapon. In this, you are able to make this blue sh. In this way, your attack power will be doubled. Well, you can say this was a special attack."


    " Now all the students who are in the D-grade pleasee forward and take this technique." After saying that, teacher Nitin brings out five technique books and puts them on the table. Only 5 people in his ss were D-grade warriors.


    Sam, Tony, and all of his friends were now very excited. If really this is the case, then their power will double. At this time, Sam wasn''t thinking about his power. He was thinking about the technique. He wanted to know if this technique is simr to his self-created energy mode. But previously he did not notice teacher Nitin''s sword changing color. That means they did not coat the sword with spiritual energy. Now the main question is, can he use this new technique with his energy mode?


    While thinking, he got up from his seat and went toward the teacher, Nitin. One by one, teacher Nitin gave all five of them their techniques and also told them not to tell any other people about this. " We Don''t want any person from the dark association to get to know about this. Our Saint just recently discovered this. Because of this, not everyone knows about this. Also, this was very hard to learn and not everyone can use this technique. Even many high-grade Warriors fail to learn this technique. So even you are unable to use your spiritual energy when using your sword and sword technique. "


    "Actually, you need to have excellent control of your spiritual energy to be able to use this. But physical warriors didn''t waste their time controlling their spiritual energy. Also, even physical warriors, so as you can guess. When our Saint first time revealed this, I was already trying to learn spiritual control techniques and began to control my spiritual energy. Fortunately, with the help of our Saint, I already had some sess in spiritual energy control. I was able to learn this. "


    _________To be continued_______


    [A/N: I will make this technique very hard so that only some warriors can learn this technique. Because of this, when those warriors previously came to help Sam and the other student in the college examination, they could not use this technique.]

 Chapter 166 [Bonus ] 166 - Training Room

    After knowing the new information, Sam gets surprised. He can''t wait for tomorrow. He really wanted to learn this technique. Well, he needed to wait for tomorrow. Teacher Nitin told them not to practice this technique until he didn''t tell them about this.


    After telling all of them, Nitin left the ssroom. Sometimeter, a new teacher came to their ssroom. This teacher will tell them about the new monsters and their weaknesses and many more things. All the students did not neglect this ss, because they can learn many things from this ss.


    At 1:30 p.m., Sam and his friends were now in the cafeteria. They all were eating their lunch in the cafeteria.


    "Seriously, even my grandpa did not tell me about this. Even physical warriors can use spiritual energy; this was a really interesting thing." Alexa said to them. Tony and the others nodded after hearing him. Well, Sam was surprised that Tony and the others didn''t know about this. He thought they already knew about this. Learning this technique can be dangerous for them because their family did not tell them.


    Some really wanted to know the difference between his energy mode and that technique or we can say the process where he can use the spiritual energy while using his sword technique.


    "I am pretty excited about learning this new technique. Previously I thought that college life would be boring, but who thought I would get to know about this?" Tony sides with them in an excited tone.


    After this, they did not have any ss, so they thought about going to the training room. They wanted to see their personal training room and the robot. Sam already had a robot with him, but the robot that the college provided him was in a whole different league.


    All of them got up from their tables and went outside to the cafeteria. Also, the main interesting thing is that they were on the 2nd floor of the cafeteria. Only the top 10 students can use this floor while the other only I will use the ground floor and first floor. On this floor, all those top 10 Warriors will get food that is made out of spiritual monsters. These monsters contain spiritual energy in them and this can help them.


    Suddenly a student went at them. Sam and the others have already noticed that student. Just looking at the student, they can tell that the student wasing here to challenge them. But the main question was who he was going to challenge.


    The student came in front of them and then looked at them carefully. After that, he said, "Tony Taylor, I wanted to challenge you in a battle,"


    "No problem," the moment that student challenges Tony, he quickly epts his challenge. Well, they already predicted that someone will challenge them to fight. Because everyone wanted the resources that were provided to the top 10 students.


    So they were now going toward the fighting grounds. They will fight in the outside fighting area.


    That student and his friends, all of them going with him. But Sam can notice the nervousness in them. He really wanted to know why those students were nervous. But, didn''t ask them.


    Tony and that student went to the battle ring. Today they did not have any referee, so Sam decided to act as a referee.


    Tony already brought out his sword and looked at that student seriously. That student is also doing the same. Both of them are waiting for Sam''s signal.


    "Began," Sam quickly gave them the signal to fight.


    __________________


    They are now heading toward the mission room. Well, here they can see the receptionist taking the mission order from the student, also many students came back after finishing their missions, so they were receiving their rewards.


    After the fight, they decided that they will go to the Mission area first, then they will go to the training area. They wanted to know if there were any easy missions that they could easilyplete.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam, at this time, looking around. He can see many powerful swords hanging around this room. Not only swords, but many other weapons were in this room. This was really like the warrior association. It''s just that you won''t get any money after giving the loot to the college stuff.


    In the middle of this room, there was a huge mission board. Sam looked at all those missions carefully, but no mission was interesting for him.


    So, like this, we are looking around the mission board. Sam and the others did not notice, but many seniors were now looking in their direction. Well, you can say Sam and his friends are pretty famous in this school. Because of this, even senior students seem to know him.


    Also previously, Tony easily wins against that boy. He sent that boy outside of the Ring in just one hit.


    After not finding any mission, they left the ground floor and headed toward the next floor, as the top 10 students had permission to enter the second floor. When they went to the second floor, they were surprised. Because it waspletely different from the ground and the first floor. On the previous two floors, they always saw a mission board, but on this floor, they were unable to notice any mission board.


    They went toward the receptionist area. They wanted to talk about this. Aftering in front of the receptionist, Kenny asked the receptionist about this.


    "For the top 10 students, we have this watch. With this watch, you can look at the mission anytime, anywhere. You can also ept any mission." The receptionist girl told them.


    All of them nodded and take the watch. All of them went to the sofa and sat down. They did not see any other students on this floor. That means those second years or those third years weren''t here. All of them start looking at the watch. Just pressing the power button, a holographic scene came in front of them. On this screen, they noticed many missions. From low grade to high grade, all the missions are present here.


    Well, they have so many missions and some of them are also interesting to solve, but they did not want to ept any mission. They get up from their seats. It was time to leave the mission hall. Sometimeter, they were now outside of the mission hall and they were going toward the training rooms. They all wanted to look at their training rooms.


    Sometimeter, they were now in their training rooms. Each of them has their own room, so they all have their own training room one by one. Alexa and the others were surprised to notice Sam''s training room. His room is very bigpared to their own room. Also in his training room, they saw much more training equipment. Well, the most interesting thing in this training room was the gravity chamber.


    Well, right now they had nothing to do, so they all decided that they will train in their room. At this time, Sam looked at the robot carefully. Well, he wanted to know the full power of this robot. But looking at the details, he was surprised. Because the full power of this robot was early A-grade. Really, he did not expect this. Well, his previous robot was only at B-grade, but this new robot was at A-grade. Well, he also brings out his other robot. He will fight both of them. At first, they adjust the power level of those two robots. He set the power level at Intermediate D-grade. After that, he began to fight with these two robots.


    At 5:00 p.m., Alexa and the others were out of their training room. They all came here at 3:00 p.m. and now the time is 5:00 p.m., so they train here for 2 hours.


    "Guys, where is Sam?" Jeni suddenly asked them after not noticing Sam. Only then did others also notice that Sam wasn''t there.


    "I think he is still in the training room," Tony said that quickly went to Sam''s training room. The others also came to Sam''s training room.


    Well, they won''t be able to enter the training room until Sam does not give them permission. But suddenly the door of the training room automatically opens. So it means some have already given them permission to enter his training room.


    After entering the training room, Alexa and the others were shocked. Because all of them notice that Sam was fighting two robots at the same time. Sam wasn''t using any other technique, he was only using his sword techniques. He also wasn''t using his energy mode.


    Really looking at his fight, all of his friends were shocked. They can also see the power difference between the robot and him. These robots have the upper hand, Sam still fighting them easily. Sometimes he also gets beaten by the robots, but he also keeps up with those two robots.


    _______________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 167 167 - Checking The Technique

    Sometimeter, Sam finished his teaming. He was panting at this moment. Jeni, at this time, went toward him and gave him an energy drink. Sam took the energy drink and gulped it down. At this time, all of his friends were standing beside him.


    "Bro, that was a really intense fight. Just keeping up with those two robots is really very difficult. Also, you don''t even use any other technique except your sword technique. If it was me, I don''t think I would be able to fight those two robots at the same time." Tony said to him. Sam just smiled at him.


    "Did you increase the power of these robots earlier?" Elena asked him. Sam gets up from the ground. He then said," Yes, I will increase the power up to intermediate D-grade."


    " Ohhh," herring, everyone became shocked. Well, it was natural for them to be shocked. They were unable to keep up with the robot at early D-grade if they only used their sword technique or only one technique like him. Previously in the battle ring, they just needed to throw the robot out of the battle ring, but while they were practicing with the robots, they were fighting with the robots. Only this time, they get to see how powerful those robots were.


    "Wait, sometimes." After saying that, Sam went to the bathroom. He needed to freshen up because he was full of sweat.


    It didn''t take that much time for him toe out of the bathroom. He also changed his training suit to a college uniform. After that, all of them left the training room, and they were now going to the cafeteria. After so much training, all of them were hungry.


    While they were going toward the cafeteria, there were so many people also going to the cafeteria. Not only the fast year but other year''s students are also there. When they enter the cafeteria, many students look at them. But Sam and the others did not mind them and just ignored them. They were going toward the second floor. Also, one more important thing is that the food for the top 10 students was free. This really saves Sam from trouble.


    When they reached the second road, they also saw 10 students from the 2nd year also present there. They were the top 10 students from the second year. Well, all the second-year students look toward them. But nobody said anything to them. Sam and his friends also did not say anything to them. They just went toward the free table and sat down.


    "Want to take any mission?" Tony suddenly asked them.


    "Well, I am also thinking about epting a mission, but not right now. Even if I ept a mission, I will do that a weekter. I need to adjust to this college then I will do that. Also, don''t forget we also needed to look for teachers," Sam said to them.


    " Hmmm¡­. you are right," Tony answered. After that, they started eating their food, and sometimeter they left the cafeteria.


    Sam said goodbye to his friends, and he walked toward his house.


    "Mom and dad should be talking to their teammates. They are already nning to go to dungeons," Sam thought inwardly while going toward his house. While Sam was going toward his house, he noticed that on the public training grounds, all those children were once again practicing their moves while the old man was looking at the children. That old man seemed to notice him, so he turned his head and looked toward him. Sam just smiles at the old man and then once again starts walking toward his house.


    After reaching his house, he saw no one inside the house. As he guessed, his mom and dad were busy with their teammates. After washing his hands and legs with water, he came to his room andy down. He was tired. He wasn''t a training maniac who just always thought about training. He decided to sleep for some time.


    Around 7:00 p.m. he woke up from his sleep. After washing his face with cold water, he left the room and went to the kitchen. He likes to make some snacks for himself. While he was going to the kitchen, he still did not see anyone in the house. His mom and dad still did note back.


    He just simply made some food for him, then started eating. While eating his food, Sam looks at the news. On the news channel, he did not see any interesting news, so he decided to stop watching the news. Now he opens the warriorwork. Here he will find many details that he can find on the inte.


    After looking at the warriorwork for some time, he stopped looking. Suddenly, he heard the ringing of the house bell. Someone should be pressing the calling Bell. Sam got up from his seat and cleaned his hand. After that, he went to the door.


    She opened the door, and he saw it was his mom and dad. Finally, they were back from the meeting. Both of them enter the house.


    __________________


    The next day, at 5:00 a.m. Sam has already woken up from his sleep. He was now doing some light exercise. Well, before fighting the robot or training his techniques, he does some light exercise. So you can say it has be his habit.


    The previous day, he did not bring that ck robot to his house, but he brought his own robot. He was now trying to defend himself from the Robot attack. Well, he increased the speed of the robot and he also used his movements technique this time. Only his movement technique. He wanted to upgrade his movement technique because of this. You are focusing on the movement technique.


    Around 9:00 a.m. he finished his training and went to the bathroom to freshen up. After that, you went back to his room. He wore the college uniform and went toward the dining room. He saw his mom in the kitchen. She was preparing food for him. Also, they will be going to the dungeon today. Sam doesn''t know how long it will take them toe back home.


    "Mom, where is dad?" Sam asked his mom.


    "He was still in the training room. Don''t wait for him. You also need to go to college, so finish your food quickly." Hina told him. Sam just nodded and started eating.


    Sometimeter, he finished eating food and said goodbye to his mom. He was now walking toward the Royal Academy. It was 9:30 a.m. so he could see many studentsing into the Academy.


    Sometimeter, Sam came to his ssroom. He saw that his friends were already in the ssroom. He went to his seat and sat down.


    "Good morning," all of his friends told him good morning. Sam also said good morning to them. After that, they begin to talk about various things.


    Teacher Nitin still did note to the ssroom, so at this moment some decided to look at this status. Well, he wanted to know how much you be familiar with all of his techniques. Well, he wanted to know which techniques were ready to upgrade.


    "


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (81%)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade B) (29%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed when using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (100%)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Neo sword style (Grade D) (30%)


    [Low-level sword style. Used by master Neo. He is also the person who created this technique.]


    Invisible shot (D-grade) (98%)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (100%)


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (100%)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    " Conceal technique:<novelnext></novelnext>


    Superior Stealth (grade D) (18%)


    [You can erase your presence. Nobody will be able to find you if they didn''t have the superior observed technique. Their observed technique needed to be higher grade than yours.]


    Superior spirit concealment (grade D) (17%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique. Until the other party has superior observed technique.] "


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (100%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (100%)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade) (016%)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (100%)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade) (98%) (+)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (35%)


    [Helps you to learn how to increase your strength for some time.]


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (55%)


    [Helps you to learn how to control someone''s mind, but you only control the mind of those people who have less mind power than you.]


    Telekinesis: (D-grade) (100%)


    [Helps you to control objects around you.]


    Berserker (D-grade) (97%) (+)


    [This technique will help you increase your power for five minutes. You will enter a berserk mode. But, your body defense will decrease. This technique has a cooldown of 12 hours. To learn this technique, you needed to be at least a D-early grade warrior. Only then your body can handle this technique.]


    Light control (Grade D) (95%) (+)


    [This technique teaches you how to control light energy. The more you be familiar with this technique, the more you will use the light energy easily.]


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (27%)


    [Help you recover your spiritual energy, stamina, and strength.]


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (90%)


    [It protects your mind from mental attacks.]


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade) (100%)


    [This technique helps you to increase your vision power and also gives you a pair of spiritual eyes. It also helps you to see many things that you can''t see with your normal vision. ]


    The power of the moon. (Grade: F) (95%) (+)


    [ This technique will increase your power in the presence of the moon. It is a passive technique that will work automatically.]


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    After looking at his technique, he can see that he can upgrade many of his D-grade techniques to C-grade. He didn''t have enough points to upgrade his C-grade technique. Well, he really needed to go to the dungeon to collect upgrade points.


    Sometimeter, Nitines into the ssroom.


    "Good morning students."


    "Good morning, sir," all the students also greet him.


    "I hope you all are excited about today''s lesson." Nitin excitedly said to everyone.


    ____________To be continued__________


    [A/N: Hey guys, don''t worry, I will remove the details of all the techniques in the next system upgrade.]

 Chapter 168 168 - The Process

    "Okay then, let''s go to the training room. We will have our sses in the training room every time. Okay then, let''s go to the training rooms," Nitin said to them.


    After that, every student got up from their seat and went towards the training room. Everyone was really excited about this battle ss.


    Sam and his friends were most excited about learning the new technique, except for Kenny and Tina. Both of them still didn''t break through.


    When they reach the training room, they change into the training ss, then Nitin tells them to start their training. While everyone was practicing, Nitin called Sam, Alexa, Jeni, Tony, and Elena to a different room. Well, Nitin told them toe because he will teach them about the new techniques.


    "I hope you don''t try to use this technique yesterday. Without any guidance, don''t try to use this technique because it can harm your body. Because of this, I previously told you not to try this technique on your own." Nitin said to them.


    Everyone nodded, hearing his words. Well, they were very curious to try this technique, but they controlled themselves and didn''t try this technique. Well, Sam at this time was thinking differently. Using his system, he can easily learn that technique, but then the book will disappear. After that, if teacher Nitin asked him about the book, then he won''t be able to answer anything. Because of this, he did not try to learn the technique yesterday.


    Nitin started to tell them about the technique,


    "Well, while you cast any spells, you directly use your spiritual energy and change their nature. You turned the spiritual energy''s nature into a different element. But in this case, you won''t directly use this technique. Well, this wasn''t actually a technique, but it was a process. While you are using your weapons and techniques, at this time you need to control your spiritual energy and gather them into your center. After that, when you try to use your sword or any other technique, you need to synchronize your technique with spiritual energy. This is the most difficult process you have to face. You need very good control over your speech on energy to synchronize your spiritual energy with your technique. At first, you will take much time to do this, butter you will be very fast."


    " Also, I think you all know that against those spiritual monsters like those ghosts, only spiritual technique only works. But if you are able to learn this technique, then you can also hunt those spiritual monsters using this technique. Also, I need to tell you that we don''t have that many warriors who can use this technique. Not every physical warrior is able to be good at controlling their spiritual energy like those spiritual warriors. As you know, spiritual warriors were born with good spiritual control and spiritual energy. But physical warriors did not have that advantage and because of this, they faced this problem."


    " Now, Jeni and Elena are spiritual warriors who naturally have the advantage. But Tony and Alexa don''t have that advantage. Also, I can say that you never try to control your spiritual energy because you think you won''t be needed. Also, as you know that we cannot count Sam in this case because he was good at sword and also good at spells." Teacher Nitin said thest sentence in a joking manner. Alexa and the others nodded while smiling.


    "So for Tony and Alexa, you two first needed to learn spiritual energy control techniques and needed to work on controlling your spiritual energy. Whereas Jeni and Elena work on their bodies. Oh yes, I forgot to mention to you that, to synchronize your technique with spiritual energy, you needed to have a tough body. When a physical warrior reaches early D-grade, they already have that tough body but are spiritual or you did not have that strong body. So before learning that technique, you needed to work on strengthening your body. I also know that you two were wondering why I am telling you to learn this technique. Well, many times this can be your lifesaver. As you are spiritual warriors and aren''t good at closebat, this technique can save your life." After saying that, Nitin turns his head toward Sam.


    " Sam, we can start our practice today. You already have a strong body, and you also have good control over your spiritual energy. So from today, you can try to learn this technique. I will be watching over you, so you don''t need to worry about any side effects. Also, if you face any problem, just ask me and I will tell you the answer." Nitin said to Sam. Sam nodded at him. Nitin then turns his head towards Tony and Alexa.


    " Well, I hope you have already learned the spiritual energy control technique that I told you about. A few hourster, teacher Samantha will take her ss. So if you face any problem while controlling your spiritual energy, you can ask her about this. So right now let''s go back to the training room and focus on practicing your techniques for now." Nitin said to them. Everyone nodded and got up from their seats. After that, they all came back to the training room with every other student practicing.


    Nitin went toward those students and told them about their mistakes. He also guided them and told them the correct way to use their technique.


    At this time, Tony and Alex also bring out their weapons and start practicing their technique. Nitin already told him about the weakness, so they will now try to work on that. Nitin gives Jeni and Elena a task. So both of them are doing those tasks. Actually, Nitin gave them a training method. To have a strong body, they also needed to absorb strength crystals and physique crystals. Most of the spiritual warriors ignore the strength part and because of this, they did not have that strong body like those physical warriors.


    Nitin did not say anything to Sam, so he was now reading the process. Well, he can just as easily learn that using his upgrade point, but he is now in public and doesn''t want to use your system power. Because of this, he was learning the technique manually.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter, after finishing reading the book, he put that book in his inventory. He finally understands the process of doing this. Sam gets up from the ground and brings out a normal sword. He then took a sword fighting position and closed his eyes. At this time, he was gathering spiritual energy in his center. Well, to do this, he did not face any problems. He had already done this when he first learned this spiritual energy control technique. After gathering almost all of his energy in a center, he was now trying to synchronize his spiritual energy with the sword technique. At first, he did not feel any connection between them. But he did not get disappointed and once again tried it. Like this, Sam began to try this.


    _______________


    In his 50th try, he finally was able to sense a link between spiritual energy and his sword technique. But the link wasn''t that strong, so it instantly broke apart. This gives him confidence. Sam once again tried. This time, you once again feel the connection between his spiritual energy and his sword technique. This time, he did not rush to use his technique. He slowly opens his eyes and swings his sword. But nothing happened. Sam did not get dejected. He once again tried.


    So like this, all the students are practicing their techniques. It was now 1:30 p.m. so Sam and his friends were now going to the cafeteria. Sam was already feeling so hungry. Not only he, but his friends were also feeling hungry.


    "Dude, how is the process? Were you able to synchronize your spiritual energy and your sword techniques?" Tony suddenly asked him.


    " I can feel a brief connection between those two, but still I can''t use it. It will probably take me some time to master this technique," Sam said to him.


    "Hmm¡­ Well, I first needed to control my spiritual energy. Only then can I learn the technique. Sigh, I still have a long way to go." Tony said with a dejected tone.


    " Don''t worry about it. You won''t take that much time to master the spiritual energy control technique." Sam said to him.


    They finally reach the capital area. Sometimeter, they left the cafeteria after finishing their food. All of them are going back to their ssroom because teacher Samantha wille to the ssroom. Teacher Nitin already said to them that after finishing their lunch, they should go back to the ssroom.


    Well, when they were going back to the ssroom, they suddenly noticed that their 3rd-year seniors and 2nd-year seniors were going toward the battle area.


    This scene makes them curious.


    "What could happen?" Kenny suddenly asked.


    "By looking at the scene, it seems someone is going to fight," Alexa told her. All of them nodded, hearing her. All of their seniors were going toward the battle area, so it naturally seemed to be the case.


    ___________To be continued_______

 Chapter 169 169 - The Fight

    All the students came to the battle area. Sam and his friends also came to the battle area and sat down in the audience seat. They were curious to know who would be fighting. Still, the fighters did note to the battle ring, so they waited for the fighters toe to the battle ring.


    Sometimeter, a referee came to the battle ring. After that, he became to announce,


    "Wee everyone, I know that everyone is very excited about the fight. So, wasting no time, let''s call out fighters. Please wee the Challenger, Amelia Halder," the referee announced, and a girl started walking toward the battle ring. Sam already knows this girl. She was the third position holder in the third year''s top 10 list. She was also at the peak D-grade.


    "Now let''s wee our fighter, Fiona Cris." The referee once again announced the fighter''s name. Once again, a girl walked toward the battle ring.


    Sam, at this time, looking at Fiona. She was the second person to break through to C-grade when she was only in the 3rd year, like his sister. Normally 4th year students were able to break through to C-grade. Well, it was normal for the 4th year to break through. They will get an extra reward that year. When anyone reaches the 4th year, the guilds will approach them. They will give you various rewards if you join their guilds. So, many 4th year students can break through using those rewards. Well, but this year still no one breakthrough into C-grade because of this Gloria was the first one to break through.


    Both of the fighters came to the battle ring and stood opposite each other. Both of them looked at each other. They were ready to fight anytime. They are just eating for the referee''s signal.


    Fiona was a physical warrior, while Amelia was a spiritual warrior. Fiona already brought her sword. Whereas Amelia already started casting her spell.


    "Both fighters are ready?" The referee asked. Both of them nodded.


    "Began," instantly the referee gives the signal to start the fight.


    Instantly, Amelia created 5 water spears and shot toward Fiona. Fiona, using her agility, quickly dodge all those attacks. While dodging those attacks, she wasing toward Amelia. Suddenly, Amelia created a water wall in front of Fiona. She created a water wall in every direction for Fiona. It looked like she wanted to trap Fiona in a water prison. Fiona already guessed what Amelia wanted to do to her. She instantly swung her sword at the water wall. In this attack, she easily cut down that water wall.


    Amelia had alreadye to a different ce. She knows that those water walls weren''t enough to trap Fiona. Fiona looked around but did not find Amelia. She was now in Fiona''s opposite direction. Because of those water walls, Fiona was unable to notice her.


    Fiona instantly turned around and began to swing her sword towards the water wall. Instantly, many blue color sword shese out of the sword and hit the water wall. Within a few seconds, all those sword shes cut those water walls.


    Sam and his friends were surprised after seeing the power of those swords sh. It easily destroys the water walls. Really, this was very dangerous.


    "OMG, is this power the spiritual energy when we are able to synchronize with techniques?" Tony at this time eximed after seeing the power. Not only him, but others were also very surprised. Sam at this time suddenly thinks of something. Not looking at all of this, he started to feel that this technique didn''t make the sword sharper, but this technique increases the power when you use a sword technique. At this time, spiritual energy is released from the sword, and because of this, the sword can easily cut through anything. Well, this was apletely different thingpared to his energy mode. His energy mode makes the sword sharper and more powerful. Because of this, he can easily cut through anything, but he is unable to release that spiritual energy through his sword. After watching his senior Fiona''s fight, he really wanted to learn how to release spiritual energy after connecting your spiritual energy with your technique. He also wanted to see how powerful those sword shes can be.<novelnext></novelnext>


    After destroying the water wall, Fiona quickly runs toward Amelia. Amelia, at this time, quickly created more water spears and threw them toward Fiona. Even those water Spears were fast, but Fiona easily dodged those. She quickly came in front of Amelia and swung her sword toward her. Amelia knows that she won''t be able to dodge that attack, so she instantly casts a water shield in front of her. Quickly, the sword and the water shield sh with each other.


    Fiona was still using her spiritual energy at this time, so she easily cut through that water shield. But Amelia had already escaped from there. She knows that she won''t be able to win against Fiona if she fights in closebat. She used her water escape technique. Because of continuously using her water technique, the ring was now full of water. So Amelia easily can escape using her water escape technique. But the main problem is that she still hasn''t mastered this technique, so unable to use this water escape technique that much.


    She came in the opposite direction of Fiona and started to cast her spell. But at this time, anyone can tell that she was casting a powerful spellpared to those water spears.


    Fiona, at this time, already noticed that Amelia had started casting a powerful spell. Instantly begin to circte her spiritual energy with her full power. She also won''t back down and she will use all of our power. Now both of the fighters were preparing for their ultimate attack. Nobody moves from their ce. In the audience seat, the audience was silent. Nobody talked to anyone, all the audience was now silently looking at the battle ring.. it was a very tense moment for them. All of them are curious to know who will win the fight. 90% of the audience voted that Fiona will be the winner. She already reached the early D-grade. Even if Amelia had the strength to defeat Fiona previously but right now, she did not have that strength.


    In a few minutes, both of them were never ready to attack each other. Many small water spears started to float around Amelia. Previously those water spears which she used to attack Fiona were 3m in height. But right now all these Spears were only 0.5 m in height. Amelia at least summoned 15 water spears.


    Seeing this, Sam was very surprised. Becausepared to previous water spears, these water spears were very powerful and very fast.


    Sam, at this time, looked at Fiona and saw that she was still in a fighting position and looking at Amelia. Sam decided to use his spiritual eye. Well, he wanted to see how those attacks looked while he used his spiritual eyes.


    When he used that technique and looked at Fiona, he was surprised. Previously he did not notice it, but right now he can see this properly. From Fiona''s body, blue color energy was released. That energy forms a shield like this around her body. He didn''t know how this was possible, but he was very surprised. He naturally knew that it was spiritual energy, and she seems to have connected this spiritual energy with her body type technique. Any of her techniques release her spiritual energy from her body and form a shield around her. Well, he can ask herter or you can ask his sister about this. He deactivated his spiritual eye and saw that he was unable to notice that blue aura around Fiona in his normal eyes.


    Amelia cast 20 water spears. This was her limit. Also, the color of these water spears was different. Previously, those 3m long water spears were sky blue, but right now all those water spears are colored dark blue. Instantly, she shoots all those water spears toward Fiona. Fiona is already ready at this time. She also uses her spiritual energy, strongest sword technique, and strong body technique. Using the spiritual energy with this strong body technique, she can create a spiritual energyyer around her body. Now seeing those water spearsing toward her, she didn''t stay ideal. Instantly, she began to swing her sword toward those water spears. sh after sh, she just keeps swinging her sword toward those spears.


    Those spiritual energy shes and those water spears instantly sh with each other. Both of these attacks were very powerful. When those two attacks shed with each other, instantly the whole battle ring got covered by the smoke. Nobody was able to see anything. So finally, who is the winner? Nobody is able to guess anything. All of them were just waiting for that smoke to fade away, then they could get to know the answer.


    Sam and his friend are also very curious to know the winner. All of them now are just waiting for that smoke to disappear. Slowly, that smoke started to disappear and everything in that ring cleared. Within a few minutes, all the smoke disappearedpletely, and finally, everyone was able to see the result. Fiona was still standing in the battle ring, with no injuries, whereas Amelia was nowying on the ground and she was unconscious. Well, in the previous attack, she uses all of their spiritual energy, and because of this, she faints.


    ______________To be continued_______

 Chapter 170 170 - Teacher Samantha

    Sam and his friends left the battle area and came back to their ssroom. Teacher Samantha already was in the ssroom. Unfortunately, she did not punish them for beingte for the ssroom. Well, she also knows why they werete.


    Sam and his friends went back to their seats and sat down. At this time I am looking at teacher Samantha. She has ck hair, a slim body, and a beautiful face. She was telling all the students about spiritual energy. Well, she was a spiritual Warrior, so she knows many things that normally students don''t know.


    Sam also seriously listens to her exnation. She was telling me how to be very good at casting spells. If you have good control over your spiritual energy, then your casting time will increase. Controlling spiritual energy wasn''t that easy. Like this Samantha telling all the students about spiritual energy. Most of the students know the basics of spiritual energy, but they do not know the details.


    30 minutester,


    All the students are going toward the training area. Well, even those physical warriors are also going to the training area. All those physical warriors'' main target was to learn to control their spiritual energy. Teacher Nitin already told them to learn that new technique they needed to control their spiritual energy.


    All of them came to the training room. Teacher Samantha told all the students who are spiritual warriors to show her their moves. Previously, she wasn''t present, and because of this; she didn''t know their spells and their power.


    One by one, All The spiritual warriors show her their spells. Teacher Samantha at this time looked at the students seriously. Well, she was also observing the problem.


    One by one, all the students show her their moves. Now it was Sam''s turn to show her his move. Well, she already knows about Sam''s spell. He was very good at casting fire. He can cast fireballs instantly, the great fireball and the mega fireball. In one word, she can say that Sam was very good at fire control, and also his spiritual energy control was also good.


    Sam shows her that he can cast fireballs instantly. He also cast the great fireball and the mega fireball. Well, he did not use those to fireball because he knows the power of those two fireballs. When he casts those two fireballs, everyone in the room can feel the power behind those two fireballs. Well, Sam wasn''t that good at controlling the light element, so he did not show it to her.


    "Okay, I finally got to know about your power and your spells. Now I will be guiding you so that you can increase your power behind the spells and also increase the casting time." Teacher Samantha told all the students.


    After that, every student begins to practice. Samantha guides them in their practice. She also guides those physical warriors to learn the spiritual energy control technique. Alexa and Tony were now in a Lotus position. They both were practicing their spiritual energy control.


    "Sam, I can see that your great fireball and the mega fireball are very powerful. Butpared to these two fireballs, your normal fireballs werepletely weak. Right now, you need to focus on increasing the power of your normal fireballs." Samantha said that to him. Sam nodded at her. Then he begins to practice while Samantha guides him.


    2 hourster, finally, their ss was finished. Teacher Samantha left the training room. But all the students were still in the training room and they were practicing their moves. Sam and his friends were in their personal training room. Sam, at this time, fights the ck robot using his new fireball. Well, he was the first learner. On his 10th try, he was finally able to increase the power behind his normal fireball. Now using his normal fireballs to fight the robot.


    The robot came very close to him, but Sam, at this time, quickly hit the robot with a fireball. The fireball sent the robot backward. Sam uses that time to retreat; he once again casts fireballs and attacks the ck robot. He said the robot powers at intermediate D-grade. So, the robot was quick, and he was able to avoid Sam''s fireballs. But not all the fireballs. So like this, Sam fights the robot using his fireballs for some time. Then he sat down on the ground and closed his eyes. He once again tried to connect his spiritual energy with his techniques. He can feel the connection, but he is unable to draw his spiritual energy while using his sword technique. So, like this, he was practicing.


    At 5:00 p.m. Sam finally left his training room. When he came outside of his training room, he noticed that his friends also came out from their training rooms. He greets them and all of them begin to walk toward the exit of the training room. Right now, they will be going to the cafeteria. Well, Sam was feeling very hungry and needed to eat something. His mum and dad have already gone to the dungeon, so he won''t be able to find any food in the house.


    He and his friends went to the second floor. All of them order their food and sit down. They can also see their seniors also eating their food. Sometimeter, they also arrived and all of them began to eat.


    Suddenly, a girl walked toward Sam. Sam had already noticed that, but he thought she was going toward the stairs. Well, behind him were the stairs. But the girl didn''t go toward the stairs and came toward him. She was now standing behind him. Sam lifted his head and saw that all of his friends were looking in his direction. That made me curious, so he also turned his head. He saw that it was his senior Fiona, who was standing behind him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Good evening, senior. Did you need something?" Sam greeted her and asked her if she needed anything.


    "Good evening, Sam. Well, I just wanted to know if you know about your sister. When will shee back from the dungeon?" She asked him.


    " Sorry, senior Fiona. I also don''t know when my sister wille back from the dungeon." Sam answered him. Finally, all of his friends understand the reason behind Fiona''s approach. Well, she wanted to know about Sam''s sister. Most likely wanted to challenge her because she was now also an early C-grade warrior.


    "Oh¡­ sorry about disturbing you." She said to him,


    "No problem, senior," San answered her. After that, she went back to her seat.


    "Sigh, for a moment I thought she came here to challenge Sam." Tony sighs and tells them. After that, all of them begin tough. Well, not only him, but others also thought the same. Sam also smiles hearing his words, then once again focuses on his food.


    Sometimeter, they left the cafeteria. Right now, they were going toward the parking area. They will go back to their house. Sam, at this time, was also walking with them. Well, he just apanied them.


    "So guys, did you think of any mission that you want to take?" Tony suddenly asks them.


    "Yes, the Goblin hunting mission. Let''s ept that." Jeni instantly said. Sam and the others agree with her. Actually, the reason she wanted to ept the mission was that she wanted to take her revenge against those goblins. Compared to before, she was now more powerful and because of this, she wanted to take that mission. Well, not only her, but others also think the same, except Sam. He has already taken his revenge.


    "So it is decided that we will take the Goblin hunting machine," Tony told them. All of them nodded. Sometimeter, all of them left the college grounds. Sam was also walking toward his home. When he was going toward his home, he once again noticed those children on the public training grounds. It was really refreshing to see all the children practicing their moves. At this time, he was thinking about his sister. What was she doing right now?


    ___________


    In a B-grade spiritual dungeon, Kyel city,


    Gloria was killing the spiritual monsters. These monsters were utterly different from those normal monsters. All of these monsters have a transparent body and you can see a ck film inside those monsters. Gloria was fighting against those spiritual dogs. All of these dogs were in Early C-grade.


    Gloria made many ice spears and shot toward those monsters. Those monsters try to avoid those spears, but Gloria already freezes the ground. Because of this, those monsters are unable to move quickly. Instantly, all five spiritual dogs get killed by her spears. After that Gloria went toward their dead body. Those monsters'' dead bodies begin to fade away and finally, she can see the loot. She picked up the loot and put them in her spiritual ring.


    _____________To be continued_______

 Chapter 171 171 - Once Again In The Goblin Dungeon

    1 weekter,


    Sam and his friends were now heading toward Oron city. They already epted the mission to kill the goblins and, because of this, they were now going toward the dungeon. Teacher Nitin and teacher Samantha have already given them permission to go to the dungeon. So they did not need to worry about their ss.


    1 hourter, they finally reach the dungeon. All of them get out of the car and walk toward the dungeon. Well, this time, they did not need to talk to the guide, so they went directly toward the entrance of the dungeon. This time their n was to stay some time in the outside area, then enter the forest.


    Unlike Sam, Tony and the others did not fight with any monster after increasing their strength. These few days, they also brought many crystals using their credit points and absorbed them. Because of this, they first wanted topare their new strength against those normal goblins.


    All of them enter the dungeon. In this outside area, you still can see trees everywhere, but this area wasn''t as deep as the inner area. They also can see many other Warriors.


    "Let''s go this way. I don''t want anyone to disturb us while we are fighting," Sam said to them. Tony and the others nodded, hearing him. Well, they also did not want anyone to interfere with their fight while they were fighting.


    They all begin to walk in the north direction. Sometimeter, suddenly Sam signals them to stop. Instantly, all of them notice that 10 Goblin soldiers areing in their direction. Somehow, those Goblin soldiers already noticed them, so they were running in their direction.


    Tony, Alexa, Tina, Kenny, Jeni, and Elena are already ready to fight. Also, one thing is that Kenny and Tina already broke through. 4 days ago, they finally broke through to early D-grade using the limit breaker. Kenny and Tina almost use all of their credit points to buy this limit breaker.


    Instantly, Tony, Alexa, Tina, and Kenny started to run toward those monsters. Elena and Jeni began to cast their spells. At this time, Sam did not participate in the fight. Well, he already knows his strength, and he also knows that his friends wanted to test their strength against those goblins. He just stood there silently and watched his friends who were fighting against those goblins. You can say it is aplete domination. Tony and the girlspletely dominate those Goblin soldiers. Those Goblin soldiers did not even have the chance to fight back.


    Sam was watching all of this when he suddenly noticed something. He noticed somethinging toward him from behind. That thing came toward him very fast. But still, it wasn''t as fast as Sam. Sam easily avoided getting hit by that thing and then turned around and instantly grabbed that thing. Only then did he notice it was an arrow. Also, one thing to notice was that it was a poisonous arrow. Wasting no time, he already activated his spiritual vision and observed his surroundings. He looked in the direction from where that arrow came toward him.


    He noticed something. A kilometer away, he noticed some movement. He quickly took out his bow and shot an arrow in that direction. A momentter, a cry was heard, "Aaaah!!!"


    Sam''s friends immediately became alert. They already finished their fight and after putting those loot in the inventory, they wereing toward Sam. Suddenly they heard screaming. It makes them very alert. They all notice Sam looking in the south direction. They also heard the screams from this direction.


    They quickly came beside Sam. Tony asked him, "what happened, bro?"


    "I think some people are targeting us, or you can say they are targeting me. A few seconds ago, someone shot an arrow toward me. Fortunately, I was very quick to respond and avoid the arrow. Using my eye technique, I saw some movement 1 km away from here. So, wasting no time, I shot an arrow in the direction." Sam exins the situation to them. Everyone was shocked after hearing his exnation. They never thought that they would get attacked by someone.


    All of them quickly came to the location where previously Sam saw the movements of someone. But unfortunately, now they did not see anyone. But Sam noticed some blood on the ground. He crouches down and looks at the blood carefully. Well, there were many monsters whose blood was also red, so he wanted to confirm if it was monster blood or human blood. Tony and the girls focus at this time on Sam. They also wanted to know the result.


    "Human," after carefully inspecting the blood, Sam finally told them that it was human blood. This makes all of them alert. Some humans targeted them. So they need to be extra careful. Sam signaled them and all of them instantly went in various directions to search for the enemy.


    10 minutester,


    All of them came back with a disappointed look. None of them were able to find the enemy. But Sam wasn''t dejected. Tony and the girls also notice that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "What happened? Did you find any clue?" Jeni asked him.


    Sam nodded at them and then showed them the clue. All of them notice that on the ground beside therge tree where they are now standing, have footsteps.


    "Well, the enemy and his teammate jump from here and escape toward the inner forest. If you notice that, they try to avoid leaving any clues. But still, using my spiritual vision, I can see that they are foot marks going toward the inner forest." This makes them surprised. So because of this, they weren''t able to find anything in the outer forest. The enemy had already gone to the inner forest.


    "What should we do, Sam?" Elena asked him. Well, all of them and now in a dilemma. They don''t know what to do at this moment. Well, they cannot just recklessly go toward the inner forest.


    "Right now, I am thinking that we should forget about those people. Because recklessly going to the inner forest can be dangerous for us. I also don''t think that we would be able to find those enemies even after we go to the inner forest. So now our best choice is to stay in the outer forest and stay alert. We don''t know if they will attack us again or not, but it is better to stay alert," Sam told all of them his n. Actually, he can easily go to the inner forest using his concealment technique, but what if those enemies try to attack his friends? It wasn''t that he did not have trust in his friend, but what would happen if there was an enemy who was in the intermediate D-grade? Because of this, he did not want to go to the inner forest.


    Tony and the girls nodded. They also agree with him. Recklessly, going toward the inner forest can put them in danger. So, it was better to stay here and stay alert. All of them once again begin going toward the North side.


    __________________


    Inner Forest, Goblin dungeon,


    Right now, to figure running through the inner forest. One of them was injured and the other one was supporting him. Sometimeter, these two people finally meet their teammates. One thing was that all of them were some strange ck clothes. It was like they belonged to some group or guild. They also have a hexagonal pattern in their cloth.


    The injured person quickly came in front of a muscr man who was holding a big sword. The injured person quickly kneel down and said,


    "Sorry my lord, I am unable toplete my mission. I thought I could easily kill that brat, but who would have thought that brat was that fast? He quickly avoided my arrow and instantly brought out his bow. I was trying to escape from there, but that brat instantly shot an arrow toward me." The injured man told his situation to the muscr men. The muscr man this time was silent. He was only silently listening to the exnation. Then he signals the injured warrior to get out of here. The injured warrior bowed down and then left the ce.


    "So our enemy wasn''t as weak as we thought. He seems to have good sense and a good reaction time. He can easily award the arrow and even instantly shoot the arrow toward Kapi. It seems I personally needed to deal with the enemy. Well, for now, he won''t do anything because he has a guess that his enemy will enter the inner forest. Only then will he show that brat his true power and the reason makes everyone scared.


    _______________


    Back to Sam,


    He waspletely unaware of that. He was now focusing on killing the Goblin soldiers with his friends. They were facing 20 Goblin soldiers who were running toward them.


    _____________To be continued________

 Chapter 172 172 - Fighting Goblin Captain

    Sam and his friend were now advancing toward the inner forest. Well, they already killed many Goblin soldiers, so right now they wanted to go to the inner forest and wanted to test their strength against those Goblin captains.


    When they went toward the inner forest, they also made many Goblin soldiers. They easily killed those Goblin soldiers. Right now they were searching for a goblin captain. Even though their strength was increased, they did not want to fight many Goblin captains at the same time. All the Goblin captains were on the limit to break through to the next grade. So even if they increase their strength, they still did not reach the limit where they can break through to the next grade.


    After walking, they decided to take a rest for some time. Well, aftering to the forest, they nonstop just walking in the forest. Because of this, they decided to take some rest. After finding a good spot to take a rest, they sit down there. But one thing was that, even though they were taking a rest. They were fully alert about their surroundings. They still did not know about their enemy, so they did not want to be reckless.


    While they were eating some food, they could hear many soundsing from the forest. They can hear many goblin''s roars and also many warriors'' voices. Well, many warriors were fighting goblins.


    Sam, at this time, thinking about the previous incident. Well, seriously, he noticed something. When you first noticed the enemy, he saw something, but at that time he did not think that it could be important. But right now he was thinking carefully, so he suddenly remembered something.


    Well, many days ago, he met some people who wanted to kill him in the dungeon. But they got killed by his hand. At this time, he noticed a strange hexagonal pattern on their clothes. This time, he once again noticed something like that. Sam doesn''t know if it was a coincidence or not. But he thinks that there was something between these two things.


    Tony and the girls at this time noticed that Sam was seriously thinking about something. Because of this, they did not disturb him. They can naturally guess what he was thinking about. Sam should be thinking about the enemy that had previously attacked him. Well, not only him, but they were also worried about that enemy. Not that they were scared, it was just that they wanted to know why someone suddenly wanted to attack them. But they know until they do not meet the enemy, they won''t be able to know anything.


    Sometimeter, Sam, Tony, and the girls get up from their resting ce. It was time to search for the Goblin captain. With this thought, when they were about to advance, they suddenly hear something. They heard footstepsing toward them. Well, this time, some did not activate the life sign detector. Because of this, he was unable to tell this previously. All of them be very alert and instantly hide.


    Sam quickly brings out his life sign detector. He quickly noticed some red dots approaching them. It means monsters wereing toward them. Instantly tell everybody using his telekinesis.


    Sam did not need to wait that long when he suddenly noticed a group of goblinsing in their direction. But one thing he was happy about was not only just Goblin soldiers, but one Goblin captain alsoing toward them. They finally find a goblin captain.


    "Listen everybody. First, we need to kill those Goblin soldiers, then we will attack the goblin captain. I, Elena, and Jeni will attack those goblin soldiers from a distance while Tony, Alexa, Kenny, and Tina always stay ready to fight anytime." Sam quickly told them his n. Everyone nodded after hearing his n.


    Sam quickly brings out his night while Jeni and Elena already started to cast their spells.


    "Attack," Sam quickly gave them the signal, and instantly he shot an arrow toward those Goblin soldiers. He was using his rapid shot. This time, he wasn''t using his spirit arrows. His normal arrows were enough to kill them. Jeni and Elena also waste no time continuously shooting their spells. For Jeni and Elena, casting Yellow thunderbolts and light spears was easy. They can instantly cast them. All three of them continuously attacked those Goblin soldiers.


    Tony and the other girls were ready to attack the Goblin captain anytime. At least 20 Goblin soldiers came here with the Goblin captain. But all those goblin soldiers got killed by Sam Jeni and Elena.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Attack," Sam instantly signals Tony and the girls to attack the goblin captain. Instantly Tony and the girls Run toward the Goblin captain. That Goblin captain at this time was very confused by the previous attack. When he came here with his subordinate to find those humans, suddenly many attacks starteding in his direction or you can say his subordinate''s direction. But none of the attacks hit him. In less than one minute, all of his subordinates got killed. He was still unable to process what had happened. Also, dust was everywhere, so he was unable to see in the distance. But he suddenly hears 4 footstepsing toward them. Only then did he understand that humans wereing toward him. Still, he was toote to notice Tony and the girls.


    Tony and the girls already came very close to him. They did not waste any time and one by one day attacked the Goblin captain. They did not give the Goblin captain any chance of counterattack.


    Sam, Jeni, and Elena were now looking in the Goblin captain''s direction. They were ready to help their friend anytime. Sam can easily use the concealment technique and appear behind the goblin captain, then attack him. But he did not want to do that. This was his friend''s fight. He did not want to steal the prey that his friends wanted to kill. But Jeni and Elena already started to prepare their spells to attack the goblin captain. This time, they weren''t preparing their normal spells. Because they can see that even after Tony and the others attacked the goblin captain simultaneously, the goblin captain was still trying to fight back.


    Sam suddenly told Tony and the others to dodge because Jeni and Elena had already shot their attacks. Tony and the others quickly jumped away from there.


    The Goblin captain for a second thought that those humans were finally retreating but in the next second noticed white lighting in his direction. He did not even get the chance to dodge and get hit by the white thunderbolt and sun ray.


    Instantly the Goblin captainte out A painful cry. This attack was really painful for him. But this wasn''t finished. He was once again attacked by those humans who were attacking him with swords.


    Sam was watching all of this when he suddenly noticed something. This time, he was more alert than before, so he noticed in the distance that some more goblins wereing. Instantly, he vanished from his ce. He also notified Goblin captains with 30 Goblin soldiersing in this direction. This can be really dangerous for his friends, so he decided to take action.


    Using his movement technique, he quickly came very close to the second group of those goblins. He is already using his concealment techniques so those goblins are unable to detect him. Sam already brought out his yer and coated the yer with his spiritual energy. He still wasn''t perfect at releasing spiritual energy through his sword attack, so he used his energy mode. A danceyer of spiritual energy coated the yer. Now, this is going to be fun. Wasting no time, he quickly began to kill those Goblin soldiers.


    Those second groups of Goblins suddenly stop. Because all the goblins suddenly saw that 5 of their subordinates suddenly got killed by someone. This made all the goblins very alert. All of those goblins were now carefully looking at their surroundings. They are also very confused because they can see that those humans were fighting when the other Goblin captain wasn''t near them. So how did the five Goblin soldiers die?


    Sam, at this time, silently kills those Goblin Soldiers one by one. He did not give those goblin soldiers any chance to react. He is just like a professional assassin, killing those Goblin soldiers. Those two Goblin captains and the Goblin soldier are very alert at this time, but they still find nothing.


    Sometimes Sam is also resting. Because he almost used his 50% spiritual energy while coating the sword. So he also needed to take a rest. Fortunately, those Goblins were very confused at this time, and also they were very angry. They cannot find them anyway, but they have already killed many of them.


    Those two goblin captains at this time, swinging their swords in all directions. Because they weren''t able to find the invisible enemy, they decided to act like this. But Sam did not focus on those two Goblin captains. He was now busy killing those Goblin soldiers.


    _________To be continued_______

 Chapter 173 [Bonus ] 173 - Helping

    Sometimeter, Sam already killed all those Goblin soldiers. Those two Goblin captains were still trying to find their enemy. But they didn''t even notice that Sam was behind them.


    Sam quickly brings out a spirit recovery potion. Well, killing all these 30 Goblin soldiers takes him some time. Also, he needs to recover his spiritual energy.


    Fortunately, these two Goblin captains didn''t go toward Tony and the others. They were still in that ce while searching for him. Sam at this time quickly deactivated his concealment technique. Well, you are slow on spiritual energy, so he could not maintain the concealment technique, and also he wanted to bring these two Goblin captains far from this ce.


    ? The moment he deactivated his concealment technique, those two goblin captains suddenly sense him. They suddenly looked behind and saw Sam. Sam waves his hand toward them, then quickly begins to run. Those two Goblin captains instantly roar loudly and then begin to chase after him. Those two goblin captains finally found their enemy, so how can he let them escape from here? Because of this, they also begin to chase after their enemy.


    Sam, at this time, was still recovering his spiritual energy. Just a little more time than he will fully recover spiritual energy. So he did not fight those two Goblin captains and began to run. As he expected, those two Goblin captains were now chasing after him.


    Sometimeter, Sam suddenly stopped and then turned around. He looked at those goblins'' captains. At this time, those two Goblin captains also stop chasing after him and look at him with their red eyes.


    Suddenly, Sam once again waves his hand toward the two monsters and then, wasting no time, vanishes from his ce. Those monsters suddenly be very angry because Sam suddenly vanished from his ce. They thought their enemy escaped, and because of this, they roared. Still, they try to find their enemy, but with no result. Once again, they focus on Tony and the others. But unable to sense that Sam was already about to attack them. Sam almost uses 90% of his spiritual energy and swings the sword using all of his strength. In less than 2 seconds, he attacks those two Goblin captains, not only that, but he also shes each of the monsters 3 times.


    When he finishes attacking those two goblin captains, only then do those two goblin captains sensed him. But it was already toote. Sam already uses his full strength behind this attack. In less than a second, those two monsters'' bodies split apart and fell down to the ground. Slowly their bodies turn into dust and Sam picks up the loot.


    After that, Sam did not waste any time, and quickly went toward his friends. When he reached the previous ce, he noticed that the goblin captain was in hisst breath. Tony and the girls were now looking at the goblin captain. He quickly came beside them and said, "Good work."


    Tony and the girls for a moment get startled, but then they see it was Sam.


    "Dude, stop scaring us like that. For a moment I thought my heart was gonna stop," Tony said while sighing. Sam just smiles at them.


    They picked up the loot and then left the ce. You can say Tony and the girls were right now low on energy. They need to recover their energy and strength.


    Sometimeter, they were in a big three. They decided to rest in the three. In this Goblin dungeon, they did not find any monster that could fly so it was safe to rest in the tree. Tony and the girls were recovering their energy while Sam kept looking around. This time he already brings out his life sign detector so that no monster sneak attacks them. Also, these Goblins like to sneak attack their enemy, so because of this, Sam keeps looking around. Well, not only that, but he was also trying to find clues about the enemy. Previously, that enemy came to the inner forest, which means the boss of the person wasn''t weak. They can hide themselves in the inner forest, which means they are strong.


    Sometimeter, it was time to leave this tree and once again begin their hunting. Sam, at this time, looking at his inventory. Well, he was looking at the loot and trying to see if he found any good or rare loot. But the Goblin soldiers and those two Goblin captains only gave him crystals and some materials. Other than that, they did not give him any rare things or techniques. Well, you can say these few days his luck was good. He found nothing good after killing the monsters. Sam looked at the watch he was wearing right now. Well, this watch was from college. This watch will keep a record of your hunted monsters and the monster''s type. Well, this watch they got from the mission hall previously.


    Well, sometimeter they once again now adventure through the forest. They did not need to walk that much when once again they suddenly met a group of monsters. But this time they did not see any goblin captain. Once again, they begin to fight and kill those Goblin soldiers.


    ______________________


    Unknown to them, a group of 10 people was now in the previous location where they rested. In this ce, Sam, Tony, and the girls rested before facing the goblin captain.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Looks like they have already left this area. Most likely they had already recovered their energy and once again, they started hunting. " The muscr man told his subordinates. All of them nodded. Then the muscr man signals all of them. All of those other warriors instantly started looking in various directions. Well, because they wanted to find which direction Sam went into. Sometimeter, one warrior came in front of the muscr man and told him that he found the clue about Sam and his group.


    "Haha¡­ guys, let''s go. We need to kill some brats," the muscr man said while smiling.


    _____________


    Back to Sam,


    He was unaware of that. With his friends, he was now facing some Goblin soldiers. Well, he still wasn''t in the inner forest properly and because of this, they still didn''t meet any goblin captain.


    Suddenly, all of them stop. Because not far from them, they are a group of warriors fighting goblins. Not only that group of people facing 3 goblin captains and 40 goblin soldiers. Just looking at those people, Sam and the others can tell that those groups of people were in a bad situation. Well, facing 3 Goblin captains wasn''t easy.


    Just looking at those people, Sam can tell that one one of them was an intermediate D-grade warrior while the remaining members were early D-grade warriors. That intermediate warrior fights with two goblin captains, while the others fight with those goblin soldiers and the remaining goblin captain. But they were in a bad situation.


    Those warriors have broken armors, and they are all also bleeding from their bodies. Well, fighting this many monsters wasn''t that easy. That remaining Goblin captain joins the other Goblin captain. So right now, the intermediate warrior is fighting 3 Goblin captains while the remaining warriors are fighting those Goblin soldiers.


    "Sam, should we help them?" Suddenly Jeni asked. Sam, for a second, didn''t say anything and just brought out his night.


    "Well, we did not need to help them that much. Just wait here. I will try to help that warrior who was fighting those three goblin captains. You guys just recovered, so it will be better if you don''t fight and save your energy." After saying that, Sam brings out 2 arrows. Well, he didn''t want his friends to help those warriors because they will get nothing from helping those warriors. Because of this, he didn''t allow them to help those warriors. You will try to kill two goblin captains, then every problem will be solved.


    Sam was using his spirit arrows. He used his 50% spiritual energy to coat these two arrows. A denseyer of spiritual energy was in these two arrows.


    Tony and the girls didn''t say anything to him. They also didn''tin to him. Because they knew Sam was right. If they always help other people in the dungeon, then their life can be in danger.


    Sam shoots those two arrows. He also used the invisible arrows technique this time. Those two arrows very quickly went toward those Goblin captains and instantly pierced through two goblin captains'' heads. That Warrior and the remaining Goblin captain did not even get to know what happened. They only saw that suddenly these two Goblin captains fell down to the ground. The remaining goblin captain and the warrior at this time looked at these two goblin captains, whose bodies were now turning into dust.


    The warrior got out of his daze. He instantly understands that someone helps them. So he can waste his time. At this time, the remaining goblin captain also came out of his daze. He tried to attack the warrior, but the warrior''s power was greater than the Goblin captain. The warrior easily killed the Goblin captain, then without wasting any time, started killing those Goblin soldiers.


    ______________To be continued___________

 Chapter 174 174 - Careless Tony

    Sam and his friend had already left that area after helping that warrior. Using his telekinesis, he already collected all of his arrows. Right now, they still did not go that deeper into the forest. What could happen if many Goblin captains attacked them at the same time? Also, the sun was going down, so they needed to find a ce to rest for the night. Hunting at night was very dangerous. Those goblins were very sneaky, so it was risky to fight them at night.


    Suddenly, they saw some Goblin soldiers. Tony and the girls decided to kill them. Using their full speed, Tony and the girls quickly came beside those goblin soldiers and killed them. But suddenly Sam notices something and shouts at his friends,


    "Guys!!!! Be careful, two goblin captains are going toward you,"


    Instantly, Tony and the girls be very alert. They quickly look behind and two Goblin captains run toward them. Jeni and Elena already cast their spells. Wasting no time, they quickly shoot the spells at goblin captains. Well, they weren''t able to cast any powerful spells, so the damage behind these two spells wasn''t that much. But because of these two attacks, those two goblins quickly stop. It gives Tony and the other girls the chance to attack the goblins.


    Wasting no time, they quickly Run towards two Goblin captains.


    "Guys, close your eyes." Suddenly Kenny told everyone. Instantly, all of them close their eyes. Kenny casts confused Ray and attacks the goblin captains with them. For some second, those problem captains won''t be able to see them.


    Kenny and Tony went toward a goblin captain, while Alexa and Tina went toward the other. Jeni and Elena were behind them. Jeni was helping Tony''s team, while Elena was helping Alexa''s team. Sam, at this time, did nothing. He was watching his friends fighting those goblins.


    Fortunately, Kenny already attacked those two goblins with a confused ray, so it gave Alexa and the other the chance to attack the goblins with their strongest attack. One after another, they just keep attacking those two goblins.


    10 secondster, those two goblins were already able to see once again, but because Tony and the girls continuously attacked them, they weren''t able to do anything.


    Sam was looking at the fight when suddenly he noticed many Goblin soldiersing in this direction. Instantly, he started casting fireballs. One after another, many fireballs appeared and floated beside him. He quickly shot all those fireballs toward those Goblin soldiers.


    You can say 20 Goblin soldiersing in this direction so cast 20 fireballs. Those goblins got burned by the fireballs. Sam signed in relief and once again focused on his friends. Well, now he was standing on the top of a tree. From here, he was watching over his friends.


    We can see that his friends were on the winning side. But suddenly something unexpected happened. Well, you can say that because of continuously attacking, the Goblin captain Tony somewhere got careless and the goblin captain used this chance to counterattack Tony. Tony flies backward. Jeni shoots white lightning toward the goblin captain, but the goblin captain dodges the attack and attacks Kenny. She tried to defend herself, but the power behind the goblin captain''s attack was so powerful that she also got flying. With this, you can expect how powerful these Goblin captains were. Even after getting hit by that many attacks, he still has the power to fight back. Suddenly, that goblin turned around and threw his big sword toward Alexa and Tina.


    "Watch out!!!" Jeni warns them. She once again cast many yellow thunderbolts and shot them toward the goblin captain. Previously, this Goblin captain used his huge sword as a shield to deflect the thunderbolt. But this time he did not have his sword, so he got hit by the thunderbolts. The good thing was that this Goblin captain wasn''t that fast. Because of this, the Goblin captain was unable to dodge all those thunderbolts.


    Alexa and Tina, hearing Jeni''s warning, quickly turned around and saw a huge swording toward them. They quickly jumped away to avoid the huge sword. This gave the goblin captain a chance, and he also attacked them. But at this time Elena already prepared her sunray attack and wasted no time attacking the goblin captain.


    This Sunray was like aser beam very quickly went at the goblin captain and hit him.


    "Chili!!!" Just after hitting by the sun ray, that goblin captain let out a painful roar. Well, this sun ray was quite powerful because Elena almost used all of her spiritual energy in this attack. This Sunray quickly pierced through the goblin''s left shoulder. You can also see green blooding out of the hole that was created by the sun ray. Alexa and Tina used this chance to stabilize themself and once again attack the goblin captain.<novelnext></novelnext>


    On the other side, getting hit by those thunderbolts, the Goblin captain cried out loud. These many thunderbolts really damage his body. You can say Jeni almost created 50 thunderbolts. She also uses all of her spiritual energy. Tony, at this time, already gets up from the ground and runs toward the goblin captain. He won''t get careless like before. He uses his strongest sword technique - the hurricane strike. Well, this was quite a powerful technique. This can create a small tornado full of air des. But this technique doesn''t need spiritual energy. The more strength you will use, the more powerful the tornado will be. Kenny also wasn''t that behind. She also attacks the goblin with her most powerful technique.


    Jeni and Elena previously almost used all of their spiritual energy, so they were now drinking the spirit recovery potions.


    Sam, at this time, already brings out his night and spirit arrows. He was ready to shoot anytime, but then he saw Tony and the others stabilize themself and once again attack those goblin captains. Sam previously already noticed that Tony got careless. Well, he also knows why Tony got careless. Previously Tony and the girls fought one goblin captain, so that time they did not face any problem to kill that one Goblin captain, because all of them attacked one Goblin captain. But this time they were fighting two goblin captains, because of this Tony suddenly made a mistake. Even so, they were able to kill those goblin captains.


    Sometimeter, Sam and the others were right now looking at the Goblin captain''s body, which was turning into dust. Tony and the girls pick up the loot. After that, they sit down on the ground. Well, they were pretty exhausted after fighting these two goblin captains. Sam told him that he would search for a ce to rest.


    "Sorry guys, because of me all of you are in a dangerous situation," Tony suddenly apologized to them. He already knows that he made a mistake because of this. His friend can be in danger.


    " Don''t worry about it," Alexa said to him. The others were also told not to worry about it. Anyone can make a mistake, but they need to realize their mistake so that they won''t once again make that mistake.


    Suddenly, Sam appeared beside them. Well, previously he went to search for a good ce to rest. So after finding a ce to rest, he came beside his friends.


    "Ahh!!" Noticing his sudden appearance, the girls for a moment got scared. Seeing this, Tony began tough.


    "Sam!!! How many times have we told you not to appear suddenly? Do you want to give us a heart attack?" All the girls told him angrily. Well,l all of them already know about this, but still, they weren''tfortable with this.


    " This!¡­ haha, sorry next time I won''t do it." Seeing all the girls'' angry looks, Sam let out a forced smile and told them he won''t do this next time. Hearing this, all the girls sighed. Because previously Sam was there all the time, but at the next moment he once again did that.


    [A/N: Even though they were warriors who have great powers. But, they are still scared of ghosts. Well, they were afraid of real ghosts, not like ghost monsters from the dungeons.]


    Sam told him about the resting ce. All of them get up from the ground. Well, it wasn''t safe to stay here like this. Those sneaky goblins can attack them anytime. Because of this, they need a good ce to rest.


    Sam already secured that ce using his monster rappelling device. Well, this device can repel those Goblin soldiers but is unable to repel those goblin captains. This monster rappelling device only works on those monsters who did not have that much intelligence. This device worked on those Goblin soldiers because those Goblin soldiers did not have that much intelligence.


    Well, Sam also activated the life sign device so if any monster or human tries to enter the range of this life sign device, he will get notified.


    _______________To be continued__________

 Chapter 175 175 - Enemy

    Tony and the girls were now sleeping. Well, all of them were pretty tired after fighting the Goblin captains. Because of this, they quickly fall asleep. Right now, only Sam was awake. He was now guarding his friends. At this time he can hear many monsters'' roars. These monsters, or you can say goblins, were pretty much active at night. He can also notice many monsters were near his ce. Fortunately, the monster rappelling device prevented those Goblin Soldiers froming near his base. Until now, any Goblin captain hase here.


    At this time, Sam once watching his inventory,


    "


    *Early D-grade strength crystal x 60


    [This can increase your strength.]


    *Early D-grade agility crystal x 58


    [This can increase your agility.]


    *Early D-grade physique crystal x 57


    [This can increase your physique.]


    *Early D-grade intelligence crystal x 50


    [This can increase your intelligence.]


    *Goblin skin (yellow) x 48


    [Crafting material.]


    *Raw crystone (Blue) x 59


    [Crafting material.]


    *Leaf of life tree (blue) x 50


    [Material for making health potions.]


    *Goblin tooth (Yellow) x 50


    [A suitable material for crafting arrows.]


    *Hilton (Yellow) x 48


    [A good material for crafting knives.]


    *Firestone (yellow) x 5


    [A special stone that can produce fire.]. "


    [A/N: I am only showing the good loot he got from those Goblins.]<novelnext></novelnext>


    These were the good loot that he got from those goblins. Besides these, he also got many useless loots that wereplete trash.


    This Hilton was a material like the raw crystone. This was usually used while making short knives. You can say this was quite powerful material. Also, the Goblin tooth was very strong. He can use this material to make more arrows. You can say, he was pretty unsatisfied because for many days he did not get any technique after killing the monsters. It was like hepletely used his luck previously and because of this; he did not get any technique or any other rear material.


    "Sigh," he sighed. Suddenly, the life sign detector vibrated. It showed that many life signs were near him. He thought it was the Goblin captain that could enter the area even after using the monster rappelling device. But when he checks the life sign detector, it shows him that those weren''t Goblin captains. Those were the life signs of humans.


    Sam saw in the device 20 green dotsing in his direction, or you can say just that they were searching around. This instantly makes Sam very alert. Suddenly many humans came near you and also searched around your ce. It was normal for you to be very alert. Now the main question was, are they enemies of just normal Warriors? It was possible for normal Warriors who wanted to find a ce to rest. But still, seeing those green dots, Sam was pretty alert.


    "I needed to check. What are these humans up to?" Sam thought about that and quickly used his concealment technique. They were now at the top of an enormous tree, so nobody could discover them that pretty easily. Because of his friends getting attacked by the enemy, his chances were very low.


    Using his movement technique, he gets down from the tree and runs toward those humans. Also, the best thing about his concealment technique was that this also concealed the sounds of his footsteps. Because of this, he didn''t worry about making noises.


    Using his full speed, he quickly came very close to those humans. He has already activated his spiritual vision and because of this, he can see even in the darkness. Sam noticed that 20 Warriors were there. Just looking at them, you will feel suspicious about them. Because the Warriors were behaving pretty suspiciously. It was like the Warriors trying to make less sound while searching around this ce.


    Sam didn''t do anything and just looked at those Warriors. He wanted to know this warrior''s motive. He can also see that the Warriors were wearing some kind of wired clothes. Even though it wasn''t that cold, the Warriors were wearing long coats that also covered their faces. Also, one suspicious thing was the symbol of the hexagon that San can see on those warriors'' backsides.


    So right now, two things would be possible. The previous person who attacked him also belongs to this group of people. These people belonged to some kind of new guild. Because of this, Sam wasn''t familiar with these people. New guilds and the new Warriors weren''t that umon things. So Sam made no sound, silently looking at those Warriors. He suddenly notices a warrior going toward the muscr man. This muscr man seems to be the captain of this group.


    "Well, Vion, if you find any clues about those brats. I am pretty sure those brats came here." The muscr man asked the warrior who went toward him.


    " Yes, boss I found something, but I don''t know if this belongs to any other warrior or those brats." After saying this, he took the muscr man toward a tree. Previously, when his friends were fighting those Goblin captains, he was standing in the tree and looking over them. Well, you can say Sam forgot about his footprints. Well, he never got in trouble because of this, and he didn''t remember that. The fortunate thing was that even if those people discovered his previous footprints, they wouldn''t be able to catch him.


    Sam once again came very close to them. Because these two Warriors came near the tree, Sam was unable to hear them, so he once again changed his potion.


    Only aftering next to them was he finally able to hear them. He saw that muscr man smelling the footsteps.


    "Why the hell are the Warriors smelling the footsteps? Is he a human or a dog? Did she have any technique that makes his smell sense powerful? " Sam thought of all of these questions. Well, actually, he wasn''t wrong. That muscr man who was smelling the footsteps actually had a smell technique. This technique makes his nose sharper. Like the dogs, he can also use this technique to track down anyone. But even this technique failed against Sam. Because he was not standing very close to them, but still those Warriors were unable to detect him.


    "You are right. These footsteps really belong to Sam Kainer. I can also smell his scent. Most likely, he was very near. Not only that, but I can also smell many others. Most likely they were the teammates of Sam Kainer." After saying that, the muscr man quickly turned around toward the warrior who was standing behind him.


    " Quickly summon everyone. We finally found our target. We quickly needed to finish our target, then we needed to get out of here," the muscr man quickly told Vion. Vion nodded and quickly left the ce. He left the ce to contact all of their teammates. Well, they weren''t using walkie-talkie or the contact device because what if Sam and his teammates have devices that could detect radio signals? Also, these Warriors didn''t have any telekinesis techniques.


    Sam, at this time, also left the ce. He finally understands the motive behind these warriors. All of these Warriors were his enemy. He was the target that these Warriors wanted to kill. But one thing confused him, ''he didn''t know these Warriors. Also, he didn''t have any conflict with them. So why the hell were they targeting him?'' He needed to find out about this. Well, the muscr man seems to be the captain of these Warriors and most likely he knows everything. So, Sam was thinking about interrogating that muscr warrior. But before that, he needed to finish those other warriors. Because of this, he quickly left the ce. He was now chasing after the Vion person.


    Using his full speed, he already came in front of that Vion person. But that person still didn''t feel Sam. He was about to advance when suddenly Sam attacked him using his yer. He already coated the yer with his spiritual energy. Not only that, but he also uses his fast-cut technique. So now, in front of his deadly attack, Vion didn''t even realize when his head got separated from his body. Sam didn''t even hesitate to separate that person''s head from his body. He was already very vicious against his enemy. A good enemy was the dead enemy.


    After killing this Warrior he quickly went toward the other Warriors. Using his life detector device, he can pretty easily track those enemies. Sam was like a predator going after his prey. Right now, if anyone sees him, they will notice his merciless eyes. One by one, he was killing all of his enemies. He didn''t even give his enemies the chance to make a sound. In front of his attack, his enemies didn''t even realize that they died.


    ___________________


    At this time, the muscr warrior was waiting for his subordinate toe here. His name was Nikon. He was a part of the Hexa guild. Previously in his killing, he saw a mission that required the head of Sam Kainer. He and his subordinate take that mission. But the main problem, Sam was a student of Royal Academy, they won''t be able to enter the Academy. And he also got to know where Sam lived. But it was a protected area. So he also won''t be able to enter there.


    _______________To be continued__________

 Chapter 176 176 - Catching The Enemy

    Nikon knows he can only attack Sam when he will go outside of the central city. Because of this, he and his subordinate waited for Sam to go outside of the central city. They didn''t need to wait that long, because one weekter, they finally saw Sam leaving the central city with his friends.


    Nikon and his subordinate also started to follow Sam. Like Sam, they also came to Oron city and went to the goblin dungeon. So this was how he came to the Goblin dungeon.


    __________


    "What happened? Why are they wasting so much time?" He was getting impatient. His subordinate still didn''te, which made him very impatient.


    "I really needed to show them what happens when you waste my time," he inwardly thought. But still, he didn''t see any sign of his subordinate. Now, this is getting pretty suspicious. Even after waiting this long, he didn''t see any sign of his subordinates.


    He also didn''t waste any time and quickly started running. Right now he was getting pretty suspicious, so because of this, he wanted to know what happened. Now he remembers that his subordinate never wasted his time. Definitely, something happened to them and because of this, they were wasting his time.


    He can track his subordinate using their smell. But at this time, he smells something different in the air. This smell makes his expression pretty serious. He smelled blood in the air. This instantly makes him pretty alert. He quickly brings out his sword. He needed to find out what had happened. Why was he smelling blood? Did any of his subordinates get injured? He quickly needed to find out what had happened here.


    He didn''t need to go that far because just after going in that direction; he saw something in front of him. He saw a personying down on the ground. But suddenly, looking at the person, he felt the person was very familiar to him. He slowly came closer to the person. The more he came closer to the person, the more he felt that he was very familiar with that person. Well, because of the darkness, he was having trouble recognizing the person. Even using night vision, it was pretty hard to recognize someone from a distance If you were using a low-grade technique.


    When he came very close to the person, he finally recognized him. It was Vion. His right-hand man. He quickly checks his condition of Vion. But after checking the condition, he got pretty startled. Because the person was dead. Now he was looking at the ground clearly and he could see blood. Not only that previously he didn''t notice, but right now he saw that Vion has no head. Previously, he didn''t notice that because Vion''s upper part was covered by some leaves of the trees. This made him very shocked. Who could do that to his subordinate?


    Nikon quickly gets up from the ground. He needed to check his other subordinates. What was their situation? He really wanted to know. Seeing the dead body of his subordinate and right-hand man makes Nikon pretty angry. He really wanted to kill that person who killed his right-hand man.


    "Don''t worry, Vion. I will take your revenge." Onest time, he turned and so did his subordinate. After that, he quickly turned around and started running in a different direction.


    Sometimeter, he once again saw two dead bodies of his subordinates. He quickly came closer to them so that they were also headless. Someone pretty quickly cut their head that they didn''t even get the chance to struggle. Now, this was making him very angry. Who was the person who targeted his subordinate? Did his subordinate provoke someone? He didn''t know, but he needed to get the answer.


    After that, he one by one got toward all of his subordinates and saw that all of them were done. Some of them even split in half. Now he was feeling afraid. Someone killed his subordinate without his subordinates seeing that person. This really makes him afraid.


    Now he was looking at his surroundings carefully. What if that person wanted to attack him right now? Because of this, he was pretty alert. But even after waiting some time, no one attacks him. Seeing this, he sighed a little. But in the next moment, he was startled. Because he suddenly hears a voice from his behind.


    "Who sent you here?" Someone asked him this question.


    He quickly turns around to see who was that person but spot no one. Just when h thinking that he hallucinates the voice, a knife was around his neck. This makes him very frightened. He didn''t even have the strength to move for a moment.


    "Don''t try to move or like your subordinate, you will also lose your head," Nikon once again voices from his behind. Someone was now standing behind him and holding a knife against Nikon''s neck.


    It was someone who was standing behind Nikon. He already killed all the enemies except Nikon. He needed to know the answer because of this. He still didn''t kill this man.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Now don''t waste my time and talk," some once again said to him in a threatening tone. This won''t make Nikon pretty scared.


    "Who are you, sir? Why are you killing my subordinates? Did they somehow provoke you?" Nikon at this time asked Sam with his shaking tone.


    "Who am I? This isn''t important at this moment. You also don''t need to know about me. Just answer me, why are you here? Who sent you here?" Sam once again asked him.


    " Si¡­ Sir, I belong to the Hexa guild. 7 days ago, I and my subordinate got on a mission to kill Sam Kainer. In the Hexa guild, we saw this mission and decided to kill him. This is the reason why we came here. Believe us, sir, we did note here to provoke you," Nikon told Sam in his shaking tone. He was pretty scared at this moment.


    " And why do you think that you did note here to provoke me? " Suddenly Sam asked Nikon. This suddenment startled Nikon. Nikon really wanted to know why the person was saying that.


    "Turn around," Sam suddenly said to Nikon. Only then did Nikon get the confidence to turn around. But after looking at his behind, he was pretty shocked to see the person. Because it was the same who was standing behind him all this time. He also noticed that Sam was smiling at him.


    "Yo¡­ you, you. How could you be here?" After recognizing the person who was standing behind him, Nikon was startled. Because how could Sam suddenly bes so strong that he killed all of his subordinates? This makes him very scared at this moment.


    "Why couldn''t I be here? You wanted to kill me, so it was natural for me to kill you and your subordinate. So why the hell are you so surprised?" He asked Nikon with a smiling face. But right now Nikon feels Sam''s smile was a creepy smile.


    Suddenly, Sam used his punch technique. Well, he was using this technique many timester. But still, the power behind the punch wasn''t low. Even though Nikon was an intermediate D-grade warrior, he was unable to block that punch. That punch sent him flying backward, but our Sam still did not stop. Using his speed, he once again came beside Nikon and once again punched him in the stomach. Like this, for some time Sam kept punching Nikon.


    Only when someone noticed that Nikon was now won''t able to fight back did he stop punching him. Nikon was lying down on the ground while blood came out from his face.


    "Now listen here, don''t waste my time and tell me who was the person that released the mission? Why did he want to kill me?" Sam quickly asked him.


    " Sur¡­ sir, it was the guild master who issued the mission. After seeing your performance in the college entrance examination, he issued that mission. Sir not only you but he also issued an emission to kill your sister but still, now no one is able to kill her," Nikon with a scared tone told him.


    " So it was the guild master. Where will I find this person?" Sam suddenly asked him about the location where he will find that guild master.


    "I don''t really know, sir. Even in the guild, we rarely see our guild master. Some time ago I heard a rumor that our guild was connected to the dark association. So I think the guild master stays in the dark association," Nikon said. Sam, hearing this, nodded. Now, this was really interesting. If he was telling the truth, then it was a very important thing. When previously got attacked by the Hexa guild member, he did not report that to the warrior association or his sister. Actually, he heard this Hexa guild was a pretty small guild that didn''t even have a C-grade warrior. He did not inform his sister or family because he thought he could handle this matter alone. But right now, he already knew that he needed to inform the warrior association.


    "Tell me the location of your guild," Sam asked Nikon about the location of their guild. Nikon nodded and told him about the location.


    After hearing the location, Sam suddenly hit the backside of Nikon''s head and made him unconscious. Well, he wanted to kill him, but he thought that he should inform the warrior association and hand this person over to them.


    _____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 177 177 - Informing The Warrior Association

    Sam picked up the enemy and went toward his friends. All of them were sleeping and still didn''t wake up. They were very tired, so Sam did not want to wake them up.


    _________


    Next day,


    Tony and the girls wake up from their sleep. But after waking up, they all get startled by the scene. They saw a person beside Sam, who was unconscious. Sam already noticed them and said good morning.


    "Good morning, bro. Who is this person?" Tony also greeted him and then he asked about the person who wasying down beside Sam.


    "He was the mastermind behind the attack." Sam directly tells them about yesterday''s incident, after they fall asleep. All of them were pretty shocked, hearing the exnation. They all were now looking at the person. This was a very shocking matter. Someone targeting their friend. How can they not be angry about this? Sam also told them about the Hexa guild and the connection between Hexa and the dark association.


    "We should quickly inform the warrior association about this. This was a very important matter," Alexa told them. Everyone agreed with her. She wasn''t wrong. This was a really very important matter and they should inform the warrior association as quickly as they can.


    Alexa quickly brings out a walkie-talkie. Well, this was a special walkie-talkie that connected to the warrior association, even when you were in an area where you won''t get any signal. She quickly informs all the details of the warrior association. Hearing the person who received the call, everyone can guess who it was. That was Saint Markus.


    __________


    ? Warriors association,


    Recently, after clearing an S-grade dungeon, Markus came back to the warrior association. When he wasn''t around, his assistant and the other members took care of the warrior association.


    He was looking at many files when suddenly his walkie-talkie vibrated. He was startled. He gave her granddaughter the same walkie-talkie as this. He told her when she was in danger she could contact him with this walkie-talkie. Now she was contacting him using the walkie-talkie. '' Is she in danger?'' He was now thinking about this question while he received the walkie-talkie.


    "Hello, Alexa. What happened? Are you in danger?" He quickly asked her. If she is in danger, you will use his full power to reach there.


    " Hello, grandpa. No, I am not in danger, but I have very important news to tell you. Recently, my friends and I epted a mission to kill the goblins. Because of this, we came to the goblin dungeon. But aftering here, Sam got attacked by someone. At that time, we were busy fighting the goblins. Because of this, we were unable to help him and also we were unable to catch the enemy. But yesterday, those enemies once again came close to our base to attack Sam. All of those enemies belong to the Hexa guild. Sam already killed the other member and only caught the mastermind, or you can say the group leader. He also interrogates him and finds out that the Hexa guild releases a bounty on his head." Markus listened to his granddaughter''s exnation.


    " Is Sam alright? Did he get injured somehow? " After hearing the exnation from his granddaughter, he thought that Sam was injured and because of this, his granddaughter contacted him. Well, he was also worried about Sam. Sam was a pretty good warrior, like his sister. So he doesn''t want anything to happen to Sam.


    "Don''t worry, grandpa. Those enemies were unable to injure him. I am telling you this because when he interrogates the group leader of the enemy, he gets to know that the guild leader of the Hexa guild is connected to the dark association. Because of this, we all thought that we should quickly contact the warrior association," Alexa exined the whole situation to him. Hearing Sam was alright, Markus sighs in relief, but then, when he heard that the guild master of the Hexa guild connects to the dark association, he quickly gets up from his. He knows about this small guild. This guild was built recently, and they did not have any powerful warriors. Markus already heard that the guildmit many crimes, but he didn''t think that much about the Hexa guild at that time and let his student Maria handle the matter. But now he was very surprised because his granddaughter told him the Hexa guild was connected to the dark guild. It was really important information.


    "Are you sure?" Markus asked her.


    "I don''t know, grandpa but Sam told me this. I don''t think he will lie about this type of information," Alexa said. This made Markus be serious. He quickly needed to confirm if it is true or not. While thinking, he remembers something,


    "Did Sam kill the group leader of the enemy?" Markus asked her. He also wanted to interrogate that enemy. What if that enemy had no more information about this, so he really wanted to interrogate that enemy?<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Don''t worry, grandpa. Sam just made the enemy unconscious. He also thought that the Warrior assistant wanted to interrogate the enemy, so he still did not kill him." Alexa quickly told him that Sam he still did not kill the enemy.


    Hearing this, Markus rxes.


    " Nice job, you guys. Don''t worry, I am sending some Warriors to your location. They will take care of the enemy." He weakly told his granddaughter. After that, he hung up the call and quickly summoned his student, Maria.


    Maria was in the training room in the warrior association. Two dayster, she will go to an A-grade dungeon with her team. Because of this, she was training. As you know, she was a peak A-grade warrior, and she was very close to a breakthrough to S-grade like Alena. So, she was most focused on breaking theyer. But suddenly she got a telepathy message from her teacher. Her teacher quickly told her toe to his office. Hearing her teacher''s voice, she can tell her teacher will tell her something important. So she quickly got up and went to the bathroom to freshen up.


    Sometimeter, Maria was now in the office room. Markus, after noticing Maria, came to his office room to signal her to sit down. Maris nodded at him and sat down. After that, wasting no time, he began to tell her the reason why he called her.


    Maria silently listened to her teacher''s exnation. You can say she was also pretty shocked at hearing the details about the Hexa guild. She previously got the responsibility to handle matters about the Hexa guild. It was a small guild where no high-rank Warriors were present. Previously, she was about to handle the Hexa guild, but then the college entrance examination happened and she got busy finding the location of the dark association. Because of this, she didn''t deal with the Hexa guild. But, now suddenly hearing that the Hexa guild could be a part of the dark association, really startled her.


    Maria quickly got up from her seat. Markus told her to go to the goblin dungeon in Oron city and bring that person that Sam had caught. Markus wanted to interrogate that person. She was now going toward the teleporting room. This will quickly send her to the goblin dungeon.


    ___________


    Back to Sam and his friends,


    Alexa put back the walkie-talkie in her storage ring and told her friend that her grandpa will send some Warriors from the association. Everyone nodded. Well, everyone knows that this matter was rted to the dark association, so naturally, Saint Markus will send someone here quickly.


    "Well, until no onees here, we shouldn''t fight with the goblins," Jeni said. Everyone nodded.


    After that, all of them clean their faces and sit down in the tree. They bring out some food. They need to wait sometime until the Warriors from the warrior associatione here.


    Sometimeter, suddenly, Alexa''s walkie-talkie vibrated. Well, she already has the walkie-talkie in her hand. She quickly answered the call. This call was from her sister Maria. Alexa told her about their location. Well, still, it was pretty hard to find someone in the dungeon if the person did not have any tracker. So, Maria will also need some time to find them.


    A few minutester, Maria, with some other warriors, finally found some and the others. Sam and his friends already noticed them when they entered the range of life detectors. All of them had already gotten down from the tree and they waited for Maria to arrive. Maria didn''t take that much time to reach them.


    When Maria came close to Sam and the others, she finally noticed a person who was on the ground. Well, the person was probably unconscious. She quickly came towards Sam''s group.


    Alexa, after seeing Maria, quickly went toward her and hugged her. After that, they talked for some time and finally, Maria was now in front of the person who was on the ground. At first, she checked the person carefully. After finding there was no problem, she signals other Warriors to pick this person.


    ___________To be continued__________

 Chapter 178 178 - Home

    4 dayster,


    Sam and his friends were now 3 goblin captains. Well, they were resting when suddenly, 3 goblin captains attacked them with the goblin soldiers. Fortunately, they already killed those Goblin soldiers before fighting the captains. Those Goblin soldiers can disturb their fight, which can be very risky. So, Sam told them to kill all those Goblin Soldiers before fighting the Goblin captains.


    Like previously, Jeni, Tony, and Kenny were a team. Alexa, na, and Tina were on the other team. Both teams were fighting one Goblin captain. Sam was fighting the remaining Goblin captain. Well, he did not want to waste any time, so he quickly came behind the Goblin captain using his supreme stealth. Instantly swing his sword toward the Goblin captain. The Goblin captain did not even get the chance to react before he got killed by Sam.


    With this attack, Sam already used his 95% spiritual energy, so instantly his concealment technique got deactivated. Well, if he uses the remaining 5% spiritual energy, then it can be very dangerous for him. Because he can be unconscious. Wasting no time, Sam quickly brought out a spirit recovery potion and gulped it down. He was also using his recovery technique at full speed. He still needs 10 minutes to fully recover.


    Sam was panting at this time. But he quickly calmed down and then looked at his friends. He sighs in relief. Becausepared to the previous case, all of them were now fighting those Goblin captains without making any mistakes. Not that his friends weren''t injured, but the goblin captains were seriously injuredpared to them. It was a wonderful thing that all of his friends learned from their previous mistakes. By looking at the scene, Sam can guess that it won''t take that long to kill those Goblin captains. But that doesn''t mean he will rest and let down his guard. As you know, these goblins were very sneaky. What would happen if suddenly they got attacked by more goblins? Because of this, Sam was very alert.


    Sometimeter, Sam''s friends finally killed those Goblin captains without Sam''s help. But they were pretty injured. So all of them quickly bring out health potions and spirit recovery potions. Finally, after taking the potions, their bleeding stopped. After that, they get up from the ground and go toward those monsters'' dead bodies. Well, those Goblin captains'' bodies were right now slowly bing dust. After the Goblins'' bodiespletely be dust, Sam and his friends take the loot.


    "So, guys, it is time to go back," Sam said to them. All of them nodded, hearing him. All of them already knew that it was time to leave the dungeon. Well, if they want to stay, they can stay, but staying here won''t make them powerful. This will only put their lives in danger. Right now, there was a shortage of potions and other items. Because of this, they needed to leave.


    "We will rest for some time, then start our journey toward the exit," Sam said to them. After that, all of them were right at the top of a tree. Well, this is the best ce to rest. Previously, they were resting on the ground and because of this, those sneaky monsters suddenly attacked them. They did not want to make the same mistake.


    After resting some time and recovering their energy, they were now finally starting their journey toward the exit. This time, Sam already told them they will try to avoid fighting those Goblin soldiers or Goblin captains because this can be perilous for them. They were extremely short on potions. Because of this, Sam told them this n. Everyone agrees with him. Even though they wanted to fight those goblins, they knew their situation very well. Because of this, they thought Sam''s idea was very good.


    It will take 1 day to get out of here. Well, they did not go very deep into the forest. They did not want to face 4 to 5 Goblin captains at the same time.


    1 dayter,


    After finally leaving the dungeon, you can say they finally rx. Inside the dungeon, they were on alert mode all the time. They can get attacked by the enemy anytime, from anywhere. Because of this, they always need to keep up their guard. But now they were outside the dungeon, so they finally rxed. All of them went to the parking section and got in their car. They did not want to waste any more time here and wanted to go back to their house.


    1 hourter,


    Sam finally reaches his home. When he was about to open the door, he noticed that it was locked from the inside. It looks like his mom and dad or his sister finally came back. He quickly pressed the calling Bell. Sometimeter, he finally heard some footsteps that wereing closer to the door. A minuteter, finally, the door is open. Sam saw that it was his sister who opened the door.


    "Good morning sister," well it was just 8:00 a.m. Sam also notices the sweats on her body and the ck body suits. Most probably she was practicing in a training room and came here after hearing the calling Bell. She also greeted him. Sam entered the house and, wasting no time, quickly went toward his bedroom. He will take a rxing bath and after that, he will sleep. Actually, he wanted to talk with his sister some more, but she was pretty busy with her training so he could talk to herter.


    At 1:00 p.m. Sam finally wakes up from his sleep. But after waking up, he was feeling very hungry. He quickly got up from his bed and went to the bathroom to wash his face. After that, he came to the kitchen room and saw that Gloria was cooking food. We also went toward her and then helped her.


    Sometimeter, once again, he came back to his room. Right now he was looking at the status and decided to upgrade a few techniques. He will upgrade all the D-grade techniques he can, after that, he will upgrade those C-grade techniques. Sam upgraded all of those techniques one by one.


    "Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (99%)


    [Medium-level boxing technique.]


    Fast sword (grade B) (59%)


    [Medium-level special sword technique made by the great swordmaster. It increases your speed when using a sword.]


    Tri sword technique (grade B) (00%)


    [Low-level technique of swordmaster Tri.]


    Neo sword style (Grade D) (70%)


    [Low-level sword style. Used by master Neo. He is also the person who created this technique.]


    Invisible shot (C-grade) (00%)


    [Help you learn how to shoot an invisible arrow.]


    Multiple shot (B-grade) (00%)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Help you learn how to shoot multiple arrows at the same time.]


    Rapid shot (B-grade) (00%)


    [With this technique, you will learn how to shoot arrows continuously.]


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade D) (18%)


    [You can erase your presence. Nobody will be able to find you if they didn''t have the superior observed technique. Their observed technique needed to be higher grade than yours.]


    Superior spirit concealment (grade D) (17%)


    [You can conceal your grade through this technique. Until the other party has superior observed technique.] "


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade C) (100%)


    [You will feel much lighter. Your speed will be twice as high,]


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (100%)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade) (016%)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (100%)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (00%)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.] "


    Sometimeter, he got up from his bed and went toward the training room. Right now you will try to synchronize his spiritual energy with his sword technique. Because he still was not able to release the spirit while using his sword technique. So he knows that he really needs to practice this technique.


    [A/N: Hey guys, can you suggest to me any good name for this technique where he will synchronize his spiritual energy with his sword technique?]


    At 6:00 p.m. he stopped his training. Like before, he was able to fill the spiritual energy and also able to connect his spiritual energy with the sword technique. But he was still unable to release the spiritual energy through his sword.


    "I need to talk with teacher Nitin. I don''t know where I made the mistake," he was thinking. He still was not sure where he was making the mistake. He really needs to know that.


    After freshening up, he was now in his room. Well, he was about to absorb the crystals. But suddenly his phone rang. He saw that it was a call from Saint Markus. Well, previously he got Saint Markus''s number. He quickly picked up the phone.


    "Hello,"


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 179 179 - Nickname

    Sam finally hung up the call. Previously, Saint Markus called him. At first, Sam thought something happened and because of this, Saint Markus contacted him. But then he gets to know the real reason. Well, actually Saint Markus informed him that the matter about the Hexa guild was over and he also didn''t need to worry about the bounty.


    Hearing this news, Sam was happy, but then he heard the guild master of that guild had already escaped. Well, he escaped before Maria reached the guild. But how can she give up this easily? They already found many clues about the guild master and now they were using those clues to chase after him. Not only that, but Maria also gets the evidence. From seeing that evidence, you can naturally say that this Hexa guild was really connected to the dark association. Except for the guild master, every warrior present in that guild was arrested. These were the things that Saint Markus informed him. He said thank you to Sam, because of his contribution. So like this, Sam and Saint Markus talk for some time and then hang up the call.


    Sam sighs and looks outside of his room. It was nowpletely dark outside. You can also see stars and the moon in the sky. Sam was relieved that the warrior association had captured all the members of the Hexa guild. So like this, for some time he looked outside, but then remembered that he was about to absorb the crystals. He quickly came back to his senses, and he was once again ready to absorb crystals. He has already brought out all the crystals and then he sits down in a Lotus position.


    ____________


    Next day,


    Sam had already woken up from his sleep at 6:00 a.m. He was now in the training room and fighting with the robot. He needed to stabilize his strength and get used to it. Sam can feel more powerful and lighter than before. Two stabilize his strength, his agility, and the other status needed to stabilize. He also uses his upgraded technique to test their powers.


    So, like this, he was training. At 8:30 a.m., he stopped training. Well, he also needed to go to the academy, so before going to the kitchen, he needed to clean up himself. Also, one thing is that he was feeling hungry. Sam quickly went to the bathroom and freshened up. After that, he went to the kitchen. He saw his sister was already in the kitchen. She was almost done making food. After she noticed Sam, she told him to sit down.


    At 9:00 a.m. Everything was done. Sam was helping his sister to clean the dishes. Even though she was busy training, she still makes food for him. Because of this, Sam also helps her sometimes. Around 9:30 a.m. they will go to the new academy. This time Sam wasn''t going alone this time, because his sister was also going to the Royal Academy. Previously, because she was in the dungeon and she was unable to go to the Royal Academy, but now she wasn''t busy. Gloria also heard that his friend and rival Fiona also became a C-grade.


    Hearing this news, Glory was very happy for her friend. Normally, only those fourth-year students get the chance to break through into C-grade because they get many resources in the 4th year when they join a guild. But the 3rd year did not get that resource. So you can say that Fiona breaking through into C-grade wasplete Fiona''s hard work. In the Royal Academy or any other Academy, those guilds were unable to interact with first-year students to 3rd-year students. There was a return rule that those guilds should not disturb those students at this time. They can contact those students when they be 4th-year students. But unfortunately this year, no 4th year was able to break through even after using those resources.


    Well, Gloria currently doesn''t know the current situation of her seniors. But when she became the C-grade, nobody from the 4th year broke through. Because of this, she became the youngest C-grade warrior.


    Sometimeter, both brother and sister left the house, and they were walking toward the Royal Academy. At first, when they left the House everything was normal, but then when they came closer to the Royal Academy, Sam noticed many people were looking at them. You can say almost all the students who were also going toward the Royal Academy just stopped advancing and looking toward them. But Sam or Gloria, just ignore them. They enter the Academy and walk toward their ssroom. But suddenly Sam noticed his friends. He waved his hand toward them. All of his friends were also looking in his and his sister''s direction.


    When they came closer to Sam''s friends, Sam introduced his friends to Gloria. You can say all of his friends were very nervous when Sam was introducing them in front of Gloria. Tony and the girls know they were geniuses, but in front of Gloria, they were nothing. The achievement, she has, they won''t be able to achieve that. Gloria called the ice queen. So now some were introducing them in front of the ice queen, so it was natural that all of them were nervous. Gloria just nodded at them and then she left the area.


    "Sigh, bro, what a dominating aura. For a moment, I thought I could not breathe," Tony said to them. Well, not only he, but the girls also agrees with him. Sam just smiles at them. He naturally knew his sister''s behavior when she was in front of other people.


    "Haha, you will get used to it," Sam said to him. After that, all of them also went to their ss. But all of them were unaware of the fact that today, when all the students noticed Sam and Gloria together, they just kept murmuring their nicknames. Sam also got a nickname from his ssmate, and now all the Royal Academy students know his nickname. Sam is called the Assassin king. Today''s hot topic was,


    ''Ice queen and Assassin king came together in college.''<novelnext></novelnext>


    ''The Ice Queen of the Royal Academy finally back,''


    ''How strong is the ice Queen right now?''


    These were the hot topics right now at the Royal Academy. Fiona still didn''te to the Royal Academy, and because of this, she didn''t know that her rival was back. If she gets to know this, then she already would have challenged her.


    Sometimeter, Sam and his friends were in their ssroom when Kenny suddenly told them to check the Royal news. Well, this royal news was an information site. Here you will find every hot topic and news that''s happening at the Royal Academy. Sam and the others quickly opened that site and saw today''s hot topic. Seeing all the headlines, Sam was thinking, ''who the hell gets that much free time to write these articles?''


    After that, Sam left the site. He wasn''t that interested in the hot news. All of that was about his sister.


    "Haha, still you have to say, senior Gloria is really an ice queen," Tony said to Sam while smiling.


    __________


    Like this day we were talking. A few minutester, finally, teacher Leo came to the ssroom. Well, he was the teacher who told them about the dungeons and the monsters.


    1 hourter,


    Teacher Leo finally left the ssroom. At this time, every student gets up from their seat. Because they needed to go to the training room. Teacher Nitin already told them to go to the training room. So all of them were now going toward the training room.


    Aftering to the training room, they did not see teacher Nitin, but that doesn''t mean they will waste the time. All of them quickly start their practice after changing their clothes. Sam and his friends also went to their training room. As you can tell, Sam was still practicing the process of releasing his spiritual energy. Alexa and Tony also made great progress in their training. Previously, with the help of teacher Samantha and teacher Nitin, both of them really progressed in controlling their spiritual energy. They will still need to increase their control. Jeni and Elena also made very good progress in their spell casting and they''re also working on strengthening their body. Kenny and Tina also became early D-grade, so they also practiced controlling their spiritual energy. So like this, all the students were now practicing in the training room.


    Sometimeter, teacher Nitin finally entered the training room and noticed that all the students were now practicing. Seeing this, he was very happy. His students weren''tzy, all of them working very hard. When some students made mistakes, Nithin helped them. Like this, all the first-year students were practicing in the training room until it was 1:00 p.m.


    __________To be continued__________

 Chapter 180 180 - Gloria Vs Fiona

    Sam was training his spirit sword technique. Well, this was the name of this technique. The original name of this was Spirit technique, he was synchronizing this technique with his sword so the name became spirit swore technique.


    Current teacher Nitin was guiding him. He already told teacher Nitin about his problem. Nitin already told him that it was normal for him that he was unable to release the spiritual energy that quickly. In this matter, he needed to calcte the spiritual energy alongside his sword technique. This is a really hard matter because. Even though he was able to connect his spiritual energy with his sword technique, he was unable to release the spiritual energy.


    Like this, he was practicing this technique until it was time to eat. He left the training room and met up with his friends. All of them went to the cafeteria.


    ______________


    In the cafeteria,


    "Bro, so how is the result?" Tony asked Sam. Well, Tony and Alexa still were training their spiritual energy control technique. So, he was interested to know about the technique. Well, not only him, but you can say the others were also interested to know. Because right now only Sam was practicing that spirit technique while they were strengthening their control and bodies. So they were interested to know about this technique.


    "Still, no progress. I am still unable to release the spiritual energy while using the sword technique. Teacher Nitin said that it was normal. It will probably take me some time." Sam said with a sigh. Well, it was really a hard technique to learn. All of them nodded, hearing his words. Well, teacher Nitin already told them that not that many Warriors are able to learn this technique.


    All of them were eating when suddenly they noticed everyone in the room became silent. Sam and his friends were busy eating, so they did not notice anything. But they suddenly noticed that everyone stopped talking. All of them lift their heads and look toward their seniors. All the second-year and 3rd-year students were now silent and looking toward the entrance. Sam and his friends also look toward the entrance.


    At this time, they noticed two people at the entrance. They instantly recognize these two people. One was Gloria and the other one was Fiona. Both of them are nowing to this floor. Gloria also seems to notice Sam. She waves her hand toward him, and Sam also waves her hand toward her sister. Gloria and Fiona order their food and then Gloriaes in her brother''s direction. Fiona was following her. At this time, Sam once again focused on eating so he did not notice his sister was approaching him. But Tony and the girls notice that. Tony quickly told Sam that his sister was approaching them.


    Also, not this sister was approaching. There was still some space left beside Sam. Gloria and Fiona approach them. Gloria, wasting no time, sat beside Sam. Fiona, also without talking, sits beside Gloria. Tony and the girls were very nervous at this time. Even though they belonged to the Saints'' family, they were still nervous around Gloria. Gloria has the potential to reach S-grade. They also heard that Gloria has a chance to be an S-grade warrior. Because of this, they were nervous.


    "Sis, they are my friends, as I already told you their name," Sam said to Gloria. Gloria nodded and smiled at them.


    " Hello, senior Gloria and senior Fiona," Tony and the girls suddenly greet them. Fiona also nodded at them. After that, both Fiona and Gloria started talking about their experience. Sometimes Sam and the others also asked them questions.


    Sometimeter, Sam and the others were already finished and got up from their seats. After that, all of them were going toward the battle ring. Well, Fiona and Gloria will fight against each other, and because of this, Sam and his friends are going to the battle ring to see their fight. Gloria informs them about their fight. It was natural that Sam and his friends were very interested in seeing their fight. They weren''t the only ones who were interested in the fight, because you can say almost every student right now is going toward the ring. You can say not only the students but many teachers also were going toward the battle ring. They also wanted to know the strength of the number one and number two students. Both of them were now early C-grade, so it was natural for them to be interested.


    Sometimeter, Sam and his friends are now on the battle ring. They went toward the audience area and sit down. This audience area was full of people. Almost every student of the Royal Academy was now present in the battle area. All of them were very interested in knowing the power of Gloria and Fiona. Sam and his friends had already seen Fiona''s fight before. But that time she did not use her full power and because of this nobody was able to guess her limit. The power of C-grade Warriors, they are very interesting to know.


    Gloria and Fiona at this time came to the battle ring. A referee is also present in the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Warrior Gloria, are you ready?" The referee asked her.


    "Yes," Gloria nodded. After that, the referee turned his head toward Fiona and ask,


    "Warrior Fiona, are you ready?" Fiona also nodded.


    "Then, began," the referee gave them the signal to fight.


    Instantly, the ground of the battle ring began to freeze. Gloria uses her ice power to freeze the ground. But Fiona had already jumped away from that ce. Afternding on the ground, she swings her sword toward Gloria. Instantly, a blue sword sh is created and approaches Gloria.


    But that attack was unable to hit Gloria because in front of Gloria an ice wall suddenly appeared. Gloria was very fast while casting her spells. She just instantly cast an ice wall. This protects her. But Fiona wasn''t done. She kept swinging her sword and blue sword shes approaching Gloria. All those sword shes hit the ice wall. You can see the crack in the Ice wall. These sword shes were powerful and were able to break the ice wall. Suddenly, the ice wall disappears. At this time you notice that it was very far away from her. Gloria already used this chance toe very far away.


    Gloria, at this time, noticed that Fiona was stilling at her. Instantly Gloria created many ice spears. Wasting no time, she quickly attacks Fiona with those ice Spears. These ice spears were so fast and powerful that Fiona needed to use her full strength and speed to avoid those attacks.


    But this doesn''t stop Fiona from approaching Gloria. She was avoiding those Spears while approaching Gloria. Suddenly Fiona swings her sword. This time, she used a different technique. This time, it created a blue tornado. The tornado was approaching Gloria.


    Gloria had already noticed the tornadoing toward her. Suddenly, the temperature began to fall. Gloria was using her powerful technique, freezing ray. Using this, she can freeze anything or anyone. A white color ray going toward Fiona. This is the Freezing ray. While using this technique, a white color ray will be created and go toward the enemy.


    The ray went toward the tornado and hit that tornado. Instantly the tornado got frozen by the freezing ray. But Gloria did not stop here. She once again uses this freezing ray and attacks Fiona. Fiona was very close to Gloria, but when she noticed the freezing Raying toward her, she knew that she wouldn''t be able to dodge that attack. So she quickly used the tough body technique, also using her spiritual energy. Instantly, a blue light came out of her whole body. This blue light wasn''t that intense that will make everyone blind. The blue lighting out from Fiona''s whole body.


    Sometimeter, the freezing ray hit her. It went Fiona backward, but she still didn''t get frozen by this attack. The moment the attack was finished, Fiona used this chance to attack Gloria, using her quick sh. This technique was like Sam''s fast cut. But this was an A-grade technique. Well, like Gloria, she also has legendary potential. Because of this, she also breaks through this quickly. Using this technique, she instantly creates 10 sword shes in less than a second. All of these sword shes went toward Gloria. Gloria this time once again cast an ice wall in front of her. But she used more spiritual energy while casting this wall.


    Those 10 shes hit the ice wall. This time, those 10 shes hit the wall and cracks appear, but this time the ice wall didn''t break. But Fiona had alreadye very close to the ice wall and attacked the ice wall. This time the ice wall waspletely broken by her attack. Gloria jumped backward.


    "Gloria, let''s start our real fight." Fiona suddenly said to Gloria while smiling. Well, both of them all this time didn''t use their full strength. This earlier fight was just a warm-up for them. Now the real fight began.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 181 181 - Winner

    Gloria and Fiona were looking at each other. The aura began to release from them. Now every student presents in the battle area can feel the pressure that wasing from them. Seriously, Sam previously expected that both of them did not use their full power. So right now, both of them will seriously fight.


    Once again, the ground began to freeze. But this time the color of the ice wasn''t just only white. The color of the ice changes into a deep blue color. Fiona already jumped away, and she was in the air. Suddenly, her whole body glowed blue. Fionands on the Frozen ground and instantly the ground beneath her foot begins to crack. She was using her spiritual energy to not get affected by ice.


    Gloria, at this time already created many deep blue colored ice spears. Wasting no time, she quickly shot all those spears toward Fiona. Fiona seems to already predict that because she once again swings her sword. In just two swings, she created 20 air shes mixed with spiritual energy. All those shes hit those ice spears. This attack was so powerful that those ice spears got destroyed even so, 5 ice spears went toward Fiona. Using her speed, Fiona dodges those attacks.


    She also did not waste her time and quickly used her speed toe toward Gloria. This time, she quickly came beside Gloria and attacked her. But Gloria also wasn''t slow, her whole body also began to glow in blue color. She got hit by Fiona''s sword. Every student thought that would injure Gloria, but it shocked them because Gloria did not receive any injury. At this time Gloria punches Fiona. This wasn''t your normal punch because you can see blue lighting out of her punch. While using her punching technique, she also used her spiritual energy.


    Fiona, at this time, crosses her hand and tries to defend herself. But the power behind the punch was so powerful that she got sent backward. But she quickly stabilized herself. Once again, she ran toward Gloria. They were very close, so Gloria quickly created an ice wall in front of her. Fiona, after seeing the ice wall, quickly attacks the wall. Even when she uses her spiritual analysis, unable to break the dark blue ice wall that quickly. But she was non-stop attacking the Ice wall. So finally she was able to break that wall. But at this time, Gloria was already far away from her. She already uses this chance to increase the distance between her and Fiona. Gloria can attack from a close distance, but as a spiritual warrior, she likes to attack from a distance.


    Gloria releases a dark blue ray. It was going toward Fiona. Fiona notices this attack but she waste and knew that she wouldn''t be able to dodge this attack. So she quickly brought her sword in front of her. The sword begins to glow in blue color. Using this word, she tries to defend herself from the attack. The dark blue ray finally hit Fiona''s sword. This attack once again sent her backward. Just imagine how powerful this attack is. If you look carefully, you can see the ice in Fiona''s sword.


    Fiona once again stabilized herself. Even in this situation, she quickly swings her sword. 10 shes created by her swing and went toward Gloria. This happens very quickly that Gloria knows she won''t be able to dodge. So she quickly cast an ice wall in front of her. But this time Fiona used a lot of spiritual energy in this attack, so the Ice world quickly got destroyed and Gloria was sent backward. The impact of this attack was powerful and sent Gloria backward.


    Gloria also quickly stabilizes herself. She noticed that Fiona came very close to her. But Gloria did not be nervous; she quickly cast ice spears and attacked Fiona. Fiona, who was very close to Gloria, saw those ice spearsing toward her. Using her sword, she attacks those ice spears. Very fast that she did not let those ice spears hit her. One by one, she destroys those ice spears. But while she was busy destroying those ice spears, she did not notice that Gloria had already created a freezing ray and was about to attack her. Wasting no time, Gloria quickly released the attack. You can say this time Gloria almost uses her 75% spiritual energy in this attack. So you can just imagine how powerful this attack was. When Fiona noticed that freezing ray, it was veryte. She is unable to avoid the attack. She once again uses strong body techniques while channeling her spiritual energy. Once again, her body began to glow. But when the freezing ray hit her, she got sent flying outside of the battle ring. This time, she was unable to defend herself.


    "And the winner is Gloria Kainer," at this time suddenly the referee came to the battle ring and announced the winner''s name. Every student in the room stands up from their seat and begins to p. Many students have already seen high-ranking Warriors fight, but also many students'' first time watching a fight between two high-ranking Warriors. In one word, all the students showed their respect toward the fighters that were present in the battle ring.


    Fiona already was in the battle ring, and she walked toward Gloria with a smile on her face. When she came beside Gloria, both of them shook their hands once again.


    "It was really a great fight. You be so powerful that I am still unable to defeat you. But one day I will defeat you," Fiona said to Gloria.


    "I will be waiting for you," Gloria just replied to her with a smile. Gloria was also in a happy mood because her friend also became very powerful and both of them now can fight each other again.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter, one by one, all the students begin to live in the battle area. Many of the students were discussing the previous fight and the power of those two C-grade warriors. You can say many students became so motivated that they really wanted to train and reach that level.


    Sam and his friends did not leave the area quickly because he wanted to congratte his sister. He walked toward her sister and came toward the battle ring. At this time, Gloria and Fiona had already left the battle ring. Both of them noticed Sam and his friends.


    "Congrattions, sister, for winning the fight. Senior Fiona, it was really a good fight. My friends and I wanted to say thank you because both of you showed us the true power of early C-grade warriors." Sam said to them. While his friends also nodded. Fiona and Gloria just smile at them. They were happy that their juniors liked their fight.


    After that, all of them left the battle area. Those teachers who were previous to the present year already left the battle area. Tony and the girls were discussing the fight and many things with Gloria and Fiona.


    Sam, at this time, is thinking about something. When previously he saw Gloria punch Fiona, while her fist was glowing, it motivated him to do something. Well, now, he was thinking, what if he can coat his fist with spiritual energy like his sword, where he doesn''t need it to connect his spiritual energy with his technique and he can just as easily coat his fist? Then that will be good. He really wanted to try this new theory, but before that, he also needed to do some research.


    Because, as you know, normally humans were unable to release their spiritual energy if they didn''t use any spells. So he was thinking, what if, like the Mytheno, he gets a material and with this, he can make gloves? In this way, he will channel his spiritual energy towards gloves and coat those gloves with spiritual energy like his sword. This will be the second movement of his energy mode. But for this, he needed to search for that kind of material from which he can make gloves.


    He didn''t even realize it when he reached the training room. It was Tony who called him and because of this; he came back to reality.


    "Oh, sorry, guys. Actually, I was thinking something, so I did not realize that we had already reached the training room," he said, saying sorry to all of his friends. Tony and the girls just smile at him. This kind of behavior wasn''t new to them because they also previously noticed that when Sam was busy thinking, hepletely forgot about his surroundings.


    They did not voice anytime and entered the training room. Teacher Samantha still wasn''t in the training room. So all of them went to their own training room, leaving the public training area. When teacher Samantha will be here, they will get notified, so they don''t need to worry.


    ____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 182 182 - Hyber

    Currently, Sam was in his bedroom. He was now searching for materials simr to the mytheno. He doesn''t want to use mytheno, because it was solid material. Sam didn''t want metal gloves, so he was searching for leather-type materials. This can be any monster''s skin or a simr thing.


    After searching for some time, he finally found some materials. These were the materials that the Artifact association needed to make various artifacts.


    " Gen snake''s skin


    [You can channel your spiritual energy through this skin. The Summoner mainly used this material.]


    Hyber


    [A material that is used in crafting storage bags. This also can easily contain spiritual energy or you can channel your spiritual energy through this material.]. "


    Well, these were the two materials he liked the most. There are still many materials, but he likes these two materials because the summoner used one material while the other materials were used to make a storage bag. The storage bag was like a storage ring.


    After thinking for some time, he decided to use the Hyber material. So tomorrow he will need to buy this material and then he also needed to make gloves using these materials.


    After everything was done, he got up from his bed and walked toward the kitchen. It was 9:00 p.m. so he needed to make dinner. His sister was busy with her training, so today he decided to make dinner for them. His mom and dad still did note back from their dungeon adventure.


    ______________


    Next day,


    Sam was right now practicing the spirit sword technique in the training room. Today was Sunday, so it was a holiday. Because of this, he did not show any hurry to go to college. He wanted to master this technique as quickly as he could. Previously, he was amazed by the power that senior Fiona was shown using this technique. You have to say; that it was a very powerful technique. So right now he is focusing on this technique.


    He can feel the spiritual energy and is also able to connect that with his sword technique, but now the main part. It was to release that spiritual energy. He swung his sword. Like his previous failure, he thought that this time he will also fail, but he was wrong. Because this time when he swung his sword, a little blue light came out of the sword. You can neglect that small light, but this instantly makes Sam happy. He is finally able to release spiritual energy from his sword. Even though this blue light didn''t do any damage, he could finally release the spiritual energy. This instantly motivates him.


    Sam took a deep breath and calmed himself down. He once again focused on the technique. So like this, he once again began to practice this new technique.


    Sometimeter, Sam was sitting on the ground and looking at his status screen.


    "Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (100%)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade) (016%)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (100%)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (00%)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Spirit technique: (E-grade) (+) (05%)


    [With this technique, you can synchronize any of your attack and defense techniques with your spiritual energy. Not only that, but you can also release that spiritual energy,]. "


    Finally, he can now see the technique on his status screen. He can also see the sh button beside the spirit technique. This makes him very excited because now he can easily upgrade this technique using his upgrade points.


    After drinking an energy drink, he gets up from the ground and once again starts his training. He wanted to increase that percentage to 100% as quickly as he could. After that, he will upgrade that technique.


    This time he decided to fight the robot using this spirit technique. He brought out his robot and set the power limit to E-grade. After that, he began to fight the robot using this technique. He has to say that even though he was unable to release the spiritual energypletely, this still was quite powerful.


    Around 12:00 p.m., Sam finally stops his training. After this much training, he was not feeling very hungry. So he went to the bathroom and freshened up. After that, he went to the kitchen. You can already see food in the kitchen. Gloria probably already made lunch for him. Wasting no time, Sam quickly began to eat.


    ________________


    After finishing his food, he was now in his bedroom. Well, he was resting right now while he was looking at the warriorwork. Here, he also found a special feature. We can buy anything in this Warriorwork. So he quickly ordered Hyber. After sessfully fleeting the order, it shows him that the product will reach him within 4 hours.


    Sam was quite happy right now. Finally able to release spiritual energy and also able to learn the spirit technique. He also doesn''t need to worry about finding the materials to make his gloves. This is the reason for his happiness.


    4 hourster,


    Sam was sleeping right now, but he suddenly woke up from his sleep hearing the sound of a calling bell. He quickly got up from the bed. Well, he remembered that some time ago, he ordered Hyber into the warriorwork. Probably the staff from the warrior association brought the product.


    A few minutester, he was now in his bed and looking at the Hyber. It was a leather-like material, but wasn''t leather. Well, this is perfect to make gloves. Now he just needs to go to the cksmith association and order them to use this cloth and make gloves with it. Well, the cksmith association also makes leather armor, so they naturally would be able to make gloves using this material.


    Sam quickly changed his clothes and informed his sister that he was going out. He informs her that he will go to the cksmith association. Gloria didn''t have any problem with that.


    Currently, Sam was now driving his car and going toward the cksmith association. It did not take that much time because the cksmith association wasn''t that far from his home. It only takes him 6 to 7 minutes to reach the cksmith association.


    He entered the cksmith association and went toward the receptionist. He wasn''t familiar with this cksmith association. But still, he went towards the receptionist and told her his order. The receptionist was quite surprised because nobody had previously ced such a weird order. But still, she notes down the order. When she looks at Sam, she feels like she has seen this boy before, but she was just unable to remember where.


    Sam was quite happy that it went smoothly. He was expecting that the receptionist would ask him why he ced such a weird order. But in the end, she did not ask him.


    Currently, Sam left the cksmith association, and he was now going back to his home. But when he was going towards his home, he suddenly spotted someone familiar on the road. He saw Alexa with anotherdy. Both of them are in a car beside Sam''s car. They are waiting for the traffic signal to be green. He knows that otherdy. She was Aria of the Base City''s warrior association. It was a very long time since hest saw her. She is now with Alexa. This makes him quite surprised, but then he suddenly remembers that one day she told him that she also has a sister who was also taking this year''s college exam.


    That time she was probably talking about Alexa. So both of them are rted. I am also a stupid idiot. I should have guessed this earlier. Aria''s full name is Aria Galm. She is naturally rted to Alexa. That means she also belongs to the Saint family. But then here is the main question. If her grandfather really was Saint Markus, then why the hell did she work in the warrior association as a receptionist?'' Sam was naturally confused about this.


    Alexa, at this time sitting in her car with her sister. Naturally, her sister was the driver while she sat beside her. These few days her sister was really busy and only recently, she came back to the central city. Because of this, Alexa really wanted to spend her time with her sister. They both went to the shopping mall to shop. Currently, they are going to a restaurant to eat some food. But because of the traffic signal, they are now waiting for the traffic signal to be green. At this time, Alexa suddenly noticed someone''s gaze on her. She quickly looked around. She was trying to find who was looking at her.


    Alexa found out it was Sam who was looking at her. He also was beside her car.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 183 183 - Meeting Aria

    Alexa found out it was Sam who was looking at her. He also was beside her car.


    "Hey, Sam!" Alexa waved her hand toward Sam.


    "Hey, Alexa!" Sam also waves back his hand.


    Aria got curious about the person. She also looked at Sam. She instantly recognized the person. It was Sam kainer. She previously met him in Base city.


    "Where are you going?" Alexa asked him.


    "Going home." Sam simply answered that.


    "Oh¡­ did you go somewhere? " She asked.


    " Yes, the cksmith association," Sam answered.


    Alexa nodded hearing at him. At this time, she noticed that Sam was also looking at her sister, confusingly. So, she quickly introduces her sister,


    "Sam, she is my big sister, Aria. She just recently came back to the central city." Alexa introduced her sister.


    " Oh¡­ nice to meet you, Miss Aria. It is good to see you once again." Sam greets Aria.


    " Well, hello Sam. It is nice to meet you once again. Who would have that I get to meet Sam Kainer? Haha," she said in thest sentence in a joking manner. Well, she wasn''t familiar with Sam, but after seeing her sister casually talking with Sam, she decided to joke with him.


    "Sister, do you know Sam?" Alexa suddenly turned around and asked Aria. Because she can feel that Aria knows him.


    "Yes. Did you forget that I was in the Base city? I saw him in the Base city many times." Aria told Alexa. Only then. Alexa remembered that her sister recently was in the base city.


    "Sam, do you want toe with us? We are going to the New Dawn restaurant," Alexa suddenly said to him. Well, now she remembers, she never really thanked Sam.


    "Yes, Sam, let''s go. It will be fun." Suddenly Aria also told Sam to cane with them.


    Sam, at first hearing Alexa''s offer, wanted to reject it, but then Aria also told him toe with them. Now it will be awkward if he rejects the offers. So, he just nodded at her. At this time, the traffic signal had already turned green. So both of the cars were now heading toward the new dawn restaurant.


    Sometimeter,


    They were now finally in the restaurant. They were now in the VIP section while a waiter took their order.


    "Just wait a few minutes," after telling them to wait, the waiter left.


    Sam, Alexa, and Aria now began to talk with each other. Alexa asked him why he went to the cksmith association.


    "Nothing, just looking for leather gloves," Sam told her.


    " Oh," Alexa nodded. After that, she asked him,


    "How is your training going?"


    "Good, finally able to release the spiritual energy," Sam said happily.


    "Good. Sigh, I am still stuck controlling my spiritual energy. Until I do not be good at spiritual control, I won''t be able to learn that technique," Alexa said with a sigh. Well, like some, she also wanted to learn this new technique as quickly as she can but before that, she needed to be good at controlling her spiritual energy.


    "Don''t worry about it. I am here. I will help you in this case," Aria suddenly said to her.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Thank you, big sis," Alexa suddenly became excited because her sister was also a spiritual warrior, so she can have natural help in this case. Like this, the three of them begin to talk about various things.


    ____________


    40 minutester, Sam finally reached his home. He still can see his sister, so she naturally was in her training room. Sam went back to his bedroom. After freshening up, he came to the kitchen.


    Sometimeter, Sam and Gloria were now eating their dinner. At this time, Sam also told Glory that she should also rest her body. Excessive training can also harm her body, so she should need to rest. Because some always saw her sister training. It seems that she never takes a rest. Because of this, Sam was worried that she would damage her body.


    Gloria nodded, hearing her brother''s advice. She told him that tomorrow she will take a rest, so he did not need to worry about her. Sam nodded, hearing her. After that, both of them focused on their food.


    "Sister, do you know when mom and dad will being back?" While eating, Sam suddenly asked her this.


    "Well, I am also not sure. Mom and dad probably went to a B-grade dungeon. So it will naturally take them some time to clear the dungeon," Gloria replied. Sam nodded, hearing her. Well, he also knows that his mom and dad went to an early B-grade dungeon. His mom and dad were also early B-grade warriors, so they will naturally go to the early B-grade dungeon.


    Sometimeter, after finishing his dinner, Sam was now in his bedroom. At this time, he was looking at his mobile phone. He was looking at the news on the warriorwork. You can say it became his habit to read about many Dungeons in the warriorwork.


    In Warriorwork, he can read many details about the Dungeon. He was currently reading about a ghost dungeon that was in Venus City. Like the central city, this city is also a big city. But it will take him 2 days to reach that city. But still, he was reading about the details.


    After that, he searched for a ghost dungeon that was near the central city or in the central city. After searching for some time, he finally found a ghost dungeon in Tion City. This city was very near to the central city. If Sam wanted to go to the city, then he would only need 2 hours to reach the city in his car. He quickly read the details about this dungeon. This ghost dungeon has human ghost monsters. You won''t find any other ghost except the human ghost. Probably because of this, this Dungeon is called the human ghost Dungeon. It was a peak D-grade dungeon.


    Looking at the details, Sam was very interested. Because he can now finally go to that dungeon to collect spirit stones. Recently, he started to feel that even though his control was good, his power behind the spiritual attack wascking. This was most probably because of his low spiritual energy. Sam also read the review about this dungeon that the Warriors write in the warriorwork. Reading all of this, Sam was now very excited to go to that dungeon. But he wasn''t in a rush. He just recently came back from a dungeon and he doesn''t know if his teacher will allow him to go to another dungeon. Teacher Nitin also said to them that in a few days, he will take all the students to a dungeon. So Sam decided that you will go to the ghost dungeon after that.


    Sam was feeling sleepy, so he switched off the mobile phone and closed his eyes.


    ___________


    Next day,


    Sam already woke up early in the morning and he was now in the training room. After finishing his warm-up, he was now practicing the spirit sword technique. He did not try to connect his spiritual energy with other techniques. Because previously, teacher Nitin told him that the sword technique was the easiest to synchronize with spiritual energy. So Sam first wanted to master this spirit sword technique. After that, he will try to synchronize spiritual energy with other techniques.


    Like previously, he was now fighting with the robot using the spirit sword technique. Sam was still only able to release a small amount of spiritual energy. But this was still a happy thing for him. The power limit of the robot was E-grade. This is the best for him right now. So, like this, he was practicing until he noticed that it was time to go to college.


    Sam quickly freshens up and then changes his clothes into the college uniform. He then walked toward the kitchen room and saw that his sister was cing all the food on the dining table.


    "Good morning, sister." After greeting her sister, Sam sat down at the dining table. Gloria also greeted him back, and she also sat down. Both of them started eating their food.


    Around 9:25 a.m. Sam and Gloria were now going toward the Royal Academy. As you know it they only needed 5 minutes to reach the Royal Academy if they walked.


    5 minutester,


    They finally reach the Royal Academy. Like the previous day, all the students are not looking at him and his sister. Sam did not mind them and after saying goodbye to our sister, he started walking toward his ssroom.


    After reaching the ssroom, he sat down in his seat. Tony and the girls, a few minutester, also enter the ssroom and sit down in their seats.


    "Good morning, guys," Sam greeted them.


    "Good morning, Sam," they also greet him back.


    Sam and Tony begin to talk about various things when suddenly, a boy enters their ss. All the students looked at the boy because he wasn''t from their ssroom. Right now, all the students who are curious why a boy from a different ssroom came here.


    __________To be continued______

 Chapter 184 184 - Challenge

    After entering the ssroom, the boy at first looked around, and then he looked toward Sam and Tony. After that, he started walking toward them. Everyone in the ss was looking at the person. Previously, they didn''t notice, but now when they saw the uniform of the boy, they could tell it was a 2nd-year student. But, now the main question is, why does a second-year studente to their ssroom? Did he want to challenge someone? All of them were now thinking about this. Well, it wasn''t that 2nd year students won''t be able to challenge the first year, but still, they will not get the top 10 positions in the first year. So, why would a second-year student want to challenge them?


    "Bro, see, he is looking at us. I think he wanted to challenge you or me," Tony whispered to Sam. Sam just nodded while his focus was on that second year.


    Jeni, Kenny, and the others were looking at their seniors. The second-year boy, without saying anything, just walked toward Sam and Tony. He just ignores the stares of the others. He just has only one goal in his mind.


    He was now in front of Sam and Tony, while looking at them. Well, Sam and Tony were also looking at the person. For a moment, nobody talked. Sam and Tony look at the person and try to guess the motive of this person.


    "Sam Kainer, I wanted to challenge you. I hear you are the strongest student in the first year. So, don''t be a coward, and let''s fight. I also wanted to know how you could be the most powerful early D-grade warrior." That person suddenly challenges Sam. Hearing that a second-year student wanted to challenge Sam, all the students present in the ssroom were shocked. Even Sam and his friends were also shocked. It was just Sam who didn''t show his shocked expression. He keeps a poker face.


    "So, who are you?" Sam suddenly opened his mouth and asked the person.


    "I am June Keon. I am the number 10 position holder in the 2nd year. I am also an early D-grade warrior. So, I hope you won''t be scared and ept my challenge. If you be scared by me, then I can also give you a handicap while fighting." He said with a smirk.


    Hearing someone insulting their friend, Tony and the others wanted to open their mouths. But Sam signals them not to do anything. He just smiled and looked at the person who was standing in front of him.


    "Did you think that I will be scared by your challenge? Or did you see me shaking in fear?" While maintaining the smile, he just asked about the second year.


    "You¡­ good, good. I hope you can keep that smile while we fight. At 1:00 p.m. don''t forget toe to the battle area," hearing Sam''s response, June became very angry. After telling Sam about the time and location, he left the ssroom.


    "Wow¡­ what an arrogant guy. Sam, did you know this person? Why do I feel that June guy hates you?" Suddenly Tony asked him. Well, in his previous school he also was a prideful person but he never underestimate other people or behaved like this arrogantly. You can also say because Tony and the girls weren''t arrogant, Sam became friends with them.


    "No, this is my first time seeing this guy. Also, I don''t think that I hear about him. Don''t know why he hates me." Sam shook his head. He never really made any person whose name was June or whosest name was Keon.


    "Well, who cares about this second year? I just hope he did not cry after experiencing the power of Sam. Haha," suddenly Kenny said whileughing. They all know how powerful Sam was. Even they didn''t have the confidence to win against him. But they were pretty excited to know the reaction of that senior after he found out that he didn''t have the chance to defeat Sam.


    After that, the teacher Leo, entered the ssroom. As usual, you once again begin to talk about dungeons and monsters. Without any disturbance, all the students listened to his exnation.


    _______________


    Sam wasn''t aware, but the news already spread to the whole college. June from the 2nd year challenge 1st year''s top student, Sam Kainer. You can say every student and even every teacher was aware of the fight. Many students and teachers were surprised by hearing this news. Who would ever think that a second year will challenge the first year? No one can guess the motive of this second year''s June. He will not get the benefit of bing the number one position holder, so why the hell does he challenge Sam? Nobody was able to guess that. Some people thought that the second year wanted to humiliate the first year''s Sam. Many also thought that Sam was arrogant, so the second year was unable to control himself and challenge Sam. But these were just rumors nobody can guess the original reason for.


    At this time, in the 3rd year''s ssroom,


    Gloria and Fiona were talking with each other when they suddenly heard the news. They quickly open the collegework. Just opening the website, they read the headline. It was telling them about a 2nd year student who challenged Sam from the first year.


    It surprised Gloria and Fiona when reading the news. They are also unable to believe that a second year will challenge Sam. They did not look at thement below.


    "So Gloria, what do you think? Who will win this fight?" Suddenly Fiona asked Gloria.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Sam," Gloria just answered in one word. She wasn''t a talkative person. Gloria is already aware of her brother''s power. So she already has 100% confidence that Sam will win this fight easily.


    Fiona did not mind her straightforward answer. She bes used to Gloria''s behavior. But she was also surprised to hear the confidence in Gloria. Fiona can see that Gloria has full confidence that Sam will win the fight.


    "Haha¡­ I also think so. Sam will easily win the fight." Fiona also agrees with Gloria.


    ______________


    Alena was in her office room in the Royal Academy. She was thinking about the next dungeon they should go to when she suddenly got the news. She was also surprised that the second year wanted to challenge the 1st year.


    "I hope this second-year student will endure the impact that he will receive," she thought. Well, she really doesn''t know this 2nd year''s student, but she knows the power of Sam and his super stealth technique that she is even unable to see through. So she naturally has 100% confidence that Sam will win. There is no chance for that second year to defeat Sam. If Sam did not want to win, only then can the second year win against Sam. She also became curious about the fight so she decided to go to the battle area where the fight would start.


    _________________


    "Sigh, what a reckless kid. I told him not to be hot-headed." Hearing the news, Nitin just sighed.


    "Yes, how can he be so arrogant and hit head that he epts a second year''s challenge?" A bald person beside teacher Nitin said with a smug smile.


    Nitin looked at the person, then said, " Teacher Gallen, I am not talking about Sam. I am talking about the second-year student. He is so hot-headed that he challenges Sam."


    At this time, the smug smile already disappeared from Gallen''s face. He just with his shocking expression looked at Nitin. He never thought that Nitin would talk about the second year. Is Nitin so confident in that first year?


    " Why are you saying this teacher, Nitin? Do you think that Sam will be able to defeat the second year?" Gallen asked Nitin.


    " Well, teacher Gallen. I am not just thinking but I am 100% sure that the same will win the fight. I am just worried about this second-year student. Will he be able to endure the impact that you will receive when Sam will defeat him? " Nitin said that. Nitin was naturally worried about the second year''s June. He just hopes that the second year won''t do anything that breaks the rule of the Royal Academy. Nitin already knows the characteristics of this June. June wanted to be praised by everyone. He always wanted to stay in the limelight. Well, too bad for him. Because he will fight Sam.


    _________________


    Around 12:30 p.m., teacher Leo left the ssroom.


    "Well, guys let''s go to the cafeteria. I wanted to eat something before the fight. In a hungry stomach, I won''t be able to fight." Sam got up from his seat and said that.


    "Haha... you are right. How can someone fight when they are hungry," Tonyughingly said. After that, all of them left the ssroom and they were now heading toward the cafeteria. But when they were going to the cafeteria, they noticed something was wrong.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 185 185 - Showing His Power.

    In the battle area full of students and teachers. Almost all the students from all the years were present today. All of them were very excited to watch the fight between the second year and 1st year. Not only the students, but even the teachers are also present here. Alena is also present here. She was sitting with her student, Gloria. Both of them looked at the battle ring.


    June Keon was already on the battle ring. It was just Sam still did note to the battle ring. So all of them were waiting for Sam.


    It was 12:55 p.m. so they still had 5 minutes before the fight started. No one was able to spot Sam.


    ''Where is Sam right now?'' This was the question that everyone was thinking about.


    Tony and the girls are already in the battle area and sitting in the stadium. They were also confused about why Sam wasn''t here. They already came to the battle area 10 minutes ago. That time, Sam told him they should go to the stadium where he would go to the battle ring. But Sam still did note to the battle ring. Because of this, all of them are very confused.


    Gloria, Fiona, and Alena are also confused about this. Gloria already asked Tony about Sam. But after hearing their exnation, Gloria became confused. She knows her brother was powerful and he can easily defeat this second year, but then why still he didn''t? He was on the battle ring. Did something happen to him? Right now, she was thinking about this and getting very anxious. She was above to get up from her seat and search for Sam when Alena held her hand and told her not to worry.


    At this time, those second years were moving Sam.


    "Haha¡­ June looks like the first year didn''t have the courage toe. He bes scared of you. Haha,"


    " Haha¡­ Genius first year. Haha, he can only talk big," June also mocked Sam.


    " Tick.. tock¡­ tick¡­ tock," now only 30 seconds left before the match starts. If Sam still hasn''te to the battle ring, then June will win the fight by default.


    All of them looked at the entrance but still did not see any trace of Sam. Gloria, Alena, Tony, and the girls were getting anxious. Why did Sam still note to the battle ring? Did those second years do something to him and because of this, Sam could note to the battle ring? Nobody knows the answer, but if he did note 30 secondster, then Gloria and the others would immediately take action.


    The referee that was present on the battle ring looked at the time. When there were only 10 seconds left, he started to count.


    "10"


    "9"


    "8"


    "7"


    "6"


    "5"


    "4"


    "3"


    "2"


    "1"


    "The winner is¡­" 10 secondster, when the referee was about to announce the winner''s name, suddenly a person appeared in the battle ring. He was standing beside the referee. The referee did not even get the chance to announce the winner''s name because he got frightened. Not only the referee, but you can say everyone present in the battle area was startled.


    Instantly, all of them recognize that person. It was Sam who suddenly appeared on the battle ring. Gloria and others who were supporting Sam finally smile. They already know that the same wasn''t a person who was a coward. All of them know that Sam will appear on the battle ring.


    "This boy¡­ really¡­ For a moment, I thought something happened to him," Alena finally sighs after seeing Sam.<novelnext></novelnext>


    In the battle ring,


    The referee and June were looking at Sam with their wide-open mouths. After seeing their reactions, Sam justugh and told the referee,


    "Well, Mr. referee, let''s start the fight," Sam said to the referee. Finally, the referee came back to his senses. Not only he, but June also came back to his senses. The referee quickly nodded, hearing Sam.


    "As the fighter, Sam was present in the battle ring, the battle will be started," after saying that the referee left the battle ring.


    Instantly, once again, Sam vanished from his ce. June became very alert after seeing this. Currently, he is unable to detect Sam, so Sam can attack him from any direction. Because of this, he was fully alert. But even when he was in alert mode, he was unable to sense that Sam was already behind him. If he was a real enemy of Sam, then he would have already died by Sam''s hand. But it was only a small battle, so Sam did not attack him while having a killing in a tent. Sam just casually walked toward the 2nd year and ced a knife in June''s neck.


    It happened so quickly that nobody was able to react and understand what happened there. They only saw that Sam had once again suddenly vanished from his ce. At this time, June bes very alert but still unable to react when Sam suddenly appears behind him while holding a knife to his neck.


    Suddenly, everyone became silent. They wanted to know what would happen now. This was clearly Sam''s victory, but still, all of them were waiting for the referee''s decision.


    "Well, as you can see, I can easily win the fight if I use my full power. But then you will say that but get the chance to fight. So I will give you a handicap. This time I won''t vanish," at this time Sam suddenly opened his mouth and told June. He already knows that even if he wins like this, June and his friends willin that June didn''t get the chance to fight properly. Well, why not give him the handicapped while Sam will try to use his new spirit sword technique? This second year''s senior will be his training partner.


    At this time, the referee finally came back to his senses.


    "Fighter Sam once again gives a chance to fighter June. So the fight will once again start," quickly announce that. June, at this time, was very angry. A junior humiliated him in front of everyone. He angrily looked at Sam.


    "I will make you pay for this humiliation," He suddenly said to Sam. Sam, hearing his warning, just smiled. Who cares about this empty threat?


    "Began," the referee once again gave the signal to fight.


    Instantly, June runs toward Sam. But Sam just silently stands there while holding his sword. He also closed his eyes at this time. It looked like he wasn''t nning to move from his ce.


    This time, Tony and the girls be confused. Why the hell Sam suddenly closed his eyes? They are unable to understand this. But Gloria, Fiona, Alena, and the other teachers were different. They can easily feel the cirction of spiritual energy in Sam. All of them were familiar with this cirction because spiritual energy only moves like this when someone uses the spirit technique. Sam''s mastery over this technique was still low level. Because of this, he still could not control the spiritual energy when he connected the spiritual energy with his sword technique.


    June also saw that Sam closed his eyes. But this time, he did not underestimate Sam. June knew that Sam was nning something, so he was very alert, but still, he did not decrease his speed. June reaches in front of Sam and swings his sword at Sam. But suddenly, Sam also opened his eyes and swung his sword.


    Both of their swords were about to sh with each other but before the swords shed with each other suddenly something unexpected happened. Suddenly, the blue light came out from Sam''s sword. Instantly, both of the swords shed against each other. But then an explosion urred. June was unable to control himself and was sent flying backward by the impact.


    Sam was still standing in his ce. He was now calcting the power behind the previous attack. He did not show that hard, but using his spiritual energy, he could easily send June backward.


    At this time, all the students and teachers present in the battle area were shocked. All of them instantly recognize that blue light that came out from Sam''s sword. They were just unable to believe that someone was able to release the spiritual energy who didn''t even practice that much. This was shocking news for everyone.


    Gloria, Alena, Fiona, Tony, and the girls were smiling at this moment.


    "Haha¡­ Gloria, I never thought that your brother would have this much genius." Fiona said with a smile. Gloria didn''t say anything, but you can notice the smile on her face.


    "Hahaha¡­ well-done, bro. But please control your power, so that the second year doesn''t die by your hand." Tony said to Sam loudly. Saying this, he instantly began tough. Not only he, but Alexa and the others were alsoughing.


    Sam, who was present in the battle ring, suddenly heard Tony''s words and he just smiled. He can really joke.


    ____________To be continued________

 Chapter 186 186 - Winner

    June, who wasying down on the battle ring, quickly got up from the ground. You can see the injuries on his body. Fortunately, Sam did not use his full power previously and because of this, the injury in his body was light. But June was still bleeding.


    Sam, after seeing him getting up from the ground, just coldly looks at him, saying nothing. Well, while fighting, Sam did not want to say meaningless words to his enemy. It is just a waste of time and it can also give the enemy to count down your attack. You should not give your enemy any chance to attack you.


    Sam, at this time, once again concentrating on the spirit sword technique. He was ready to attack anytime. June is also at this time looking at Sam and thinking about his next move. Even though he was surprised that Sam was able to use the spirit technique, he did not want to give up. After deciding his next move, June once again runs toward Sam.


    Well, Sam also did not stay ideal. He also started running towards June. But this time, June did something that surprised Sam. Suddenly, June increased his speed using his movement technique. Well, this was his special move. But it doesn''t matter to Sam because he can still spot him. Sam was just curious what June''s next move will be.


    Using his fast speed, June quickly jumped from his ce. He was not floating above Sam''s head. But then he started to fall down. This was his special move, the elephant sh. This move will create a huge impact. When he was a few meters away from Sam, he swung his sword toward Sam.


    But what did you expect? Sam also wasn''t slower. He used his spirit technique with his fast-cut technique. Also, this time, he did not hold back. With his full strength, he swings the sword toward June. The moment Sam swings his sword, a blue light covers the sword. A few secondster, both of the swords shed against each other. As a previous sh, an explosion appeared.


    Everyone was in the stadium, unable to see anything because of the explosion and the smoke on the battle ring. All of them curiously looked at the battle ring. They were very eager to know the result. Not only those students but all the teachers are also eager to know the result.


    Gloria, Fiona, Alena, Tony, the girls, and even Sam''s whole ss, were eager to know the result. All of their focus was on the battle ring. Slowly, slowly, the smoke began to clear and all of them were able to see.


    Sometimeter, when the smokepletely faded away, finally all the students and all the teachers got to know the result. They saw that June wasying down on the battle ring unconsciously while Sam was still standing on the battle ring. Sam was at this time panting heavily. Well, he still wasn''t that good at spirit technique and because of this, it was very hard for him to control. In his previous attack, he used all of his power, and because of this; he was now exhausted.


    Sam noticed that all the students and all the teachers were now silently looking in this direction. Even the referee was also very silent. Sam noticed Gloria and the others. He showed them a victory sign. This instantly makes Gloria and the otherse back to reality. Instantly Tony and the girls begin to cheer for him. Their cheer brought those other students into reality. One by one, all the students begin to p for Sam.


    The referee also came back to his senses. He quickly came to the battle ring and checked June''s condition. He sighs after seeing that nothing major happened. June was just unconscious. He had light injuries. The referee quickly called the medical team.


    "The winner of this challenge is Sam Kainer," the referee announced the winner''s name. Same at this time, say thanks to all the students who were pping for him and left the battle ring. He was exhausted, and he needed to rest. But before that, he will meet his sister and the others.


    Sometimeter,


    "Haha¡­ that was really cool and powerful." Tony excitedly said to Sam. Tony really wanted to learn this technique as soon as he could. Even without this spirit technique, he knows Sam was very powerful. But now, Sam knows this new technique. Tony didn''t even imagine how powerful he was right now. Because of this, Tony really wanted to learn this new technique as soon as he could. He did not want to be left behind by Sam. He wanted to keep up with his friend. Well, it wasn''t only his thoughts right now. Elena, Alexa, Jeni, Kenny, Tina, and even Kira, all of these girls also think the same. Well, if you are wondering about Kira, then she also joined their group a few days ago. But because she was still in the peak E-grade, she didn''t go with them to the Goblin Dungeon. But she also knew that Sam was very powerful even without this very technique. Some time ago, Sam told all of his friends that he will fight them. Well, not that Sam fights them at the same time, but he fights them one by one. Only at that time, Kira realized how powerful Sam really was.


    [A/N: Even though Sam was very powerful, he won''t be able to fight all of his friends at the same time. Well, while fighting his friends, he did not use his concealment technique.]


    Also, know that not only Sam but Tony and the others also were very powerful. So to keep up with them, she also began to train very hard. Right now she has only one goal to reach there as soon as she can. Now, looking at Sam''s fight, Kira, once again, is motivated to work hard. She also wanted to learn the spirit technique as soon as she could. Her potential wasn''t that bad, but because she was a physical warrior, she also needed to learn how to control her spiritual energy.


    "Hmm¡­ it was really a great fight. You are finally able to learn this spirit technique. Good," Alena praised him. She was naturally happy that Sam was able to learn this technique. To her, Sam was a little brother, while Gloria was a little sister. Now her brother was stronger than before, so she was naturally happy. Not only her, but Gloria is also very happy for her brother. She already knew that her brother was very powerful, but still, she was very happy. Previously, when those 2nd-year students mocked her brother, she wanted to take action against them. But now she calms down. Because her brother showed them who was powerful. Those 2nd-year students who were mocking him before won''t be able to mock him. Now, before mocking Sam once again, they will think twice.


    Alena quickly gives Sam a spirit recovery potion. She saw that Sam was very low on spiritual energy. So she gave him this. This will make him feel better.


    "Thank you, teacher Alena," Sam thanked her. Alena just nodded.


    " Now all of you go back to your ssroom," Alena told all of them. After saying this, she turned around toward Sam and said to him," Sam, today you can take a rest. I can see that you are already very exhausted. So I don''t think you will be able to continue your ss."<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam nodded, hearing her suggestions. Well, he was already thinking about taking a rest in the resting room. The Royal Academy day also has a resting room where usually students take a rest. Also, because he was a top 10 student, he also has a personal room. So, after saying this, he said goodbye to Gloria and the others, and he started walking toward the resting room.


    After he left, Tony and the girls also said goodbye to Alena and Gloria. They went toward the training. Right now, all of them are full of fighting Spirit. They will use this spirit to train hard.


    ______________


    Sometimeter, Sam finally rests in the resting room. After freshening up, hey down on the bed. Whileying down on the bed, Sam was thinking about a previous fight. He already knew that he needed to work on his spirit technique. Because he did not want to face today''s situation, where he would lose his power quickly.


    He also looks at his status.


    "Spiritual techniques:


    me control (C-grade) (100%)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade) (016%)


    [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (100%)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (00%)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Spirit technique: (E-grade) (+) (45%)


    [With this technique, you can synchronize any of your attack and defense techniques with your spiritual energy. Not only that, but you can also release that spiritual energy,]. "


    ___________To be continued________

 Chapter 187 187 - Going Toward The Dungeon.

    Sam was checking his inventory because today he will go to the dungeon. Well, today was the first of November and they will go to the dungeon today. So, before going to the Dungeon he was checking his inventory.


    He was really excited about going to the dungeon. Because you can say he was very close to upgrading his spirit technique. These few days Sam just only practices this spirit technique and now he has 95% familiarity. Previously, he had to focus on maintaining the connection between his spiritual energy and his sword technique. But right now, you can say he did not need to maintain that much focus. He was expecting that when he upgraded this technique, he could easily release his energy.


    In his inventory, you can also see those special gloves. Yes, you guessed it right, he already has those special gloves that were made by Hyber. He was also practicing his second move of energy mode these few days. But he wasn''t that sessful. He wasn''t able to coat his fist with spiritual energy. But he wasn''t disappointed. Sam already knew that,pared to the weapons, maintaining the spiritual energy in his body part was much tougher. He has a feeling it won''t be that long when he masters this move. These few days, he also focused on this new move.


    After checking that everything was alright, he left the room. When he came to the hall room, he saw his family waiting for him there. Well, his mom and dad came back from the Dungeon a few days ago. And his sister was training at home. She will also go to the Dungeon with her teacher.


    His mom asked him if he was ready or not. Sam just answered her. A few minutester, Sam left the house and walked toward the Royal Academy. There he will meet his ssmate and teacher Nitin and teacher Samantha. Both of these teachers will go with them to the Dungeon.


    Aftering to the yground, he noticed his friends and walked toward them. Compared to a few days ago, Tony and the girls be powerful. All of them were practicing very hard. Alexa, Tony, Jeni, and Elena start practicing the spirit technique. Now they are qualified to train in this technique. Alexa and Tony have sufficient control over their spiritual energy. While Jeni and Elena, now have enough strength to practice this technique. Kenny, Tina, and Kira were the ones who were still practicing energy control. But it won''t take them that long to have sufficient control over their spiritual energy. Also, Kira reached early D-grade.


    "Good morning guys," Sam greeted them.


    "Good morning, Sam," all of them also greeted him. Sam nodded at them.


    All the first-year students were waiting in the yground. There are a few students who still have note to the yground, so all of them are waiting for them. Teacher Nitin and teacher Samantha will go with Sam and his ssmate. But Sam can see mini other teachers also present in the yground. Well, probably they will also go with their ss. There wasn''t only one first-year ss. At the Royal Academy, they have three first-year sses. So six teachers will go with them.


    A few minutester, almost every student was present in the yground. At this time the teacher, Nitin, came for what and told,


    "Good morning students. I hope everyone was excited to go to the Dungeon. But like I previously told you, don''t underestimate your enemy, even when your enemy is very weak. Today we are going to a Peak D-grade dungeon. This Dungeon has four floors. You will meet peak E-grade monsters on the first floor and peak D-grade monsters on thest floor. So don''t get reckless there. In the Dungeon, we won''t help you while you fight the monsters. We only help you when the situation bes very bad. So you must fight carefully with those monsters. Don''t get reckless because teachers were with you. Also, those Warriors who reach early D-grade will directly go to the second floor with one teacher. But I must tell you that D-grade monsters were different. Even if you and the monster were in the same grade, don''t get reckless and fight the monster carelessly. Because when monsters reach D-grade, they be intelligent and they also have a huge amount of power boost. Now everyone, please maintain order and get up on the bus."


    Every student nodded after hearing him. After that day, they went to the buses and got up in the bus one by one. After confirming that all the students were on the buses, those teachers also got up. Finally, they start their journey.


    Sam and Tony at this time sitting together. Sam was at this time looking outside of the window and thinking something. He was thinking about the inter-collegepetition that will be held when theye back from the Dungeon. They will stay there for 7 days. During these 7 days, those teachers will observe all the students'' battles. This will give them an understanding of their students. One more thing was that after they came back from the Dungeon, they needed to select their teachers. Because the annual collegepetition ising and for that, they need to prepare themselves. Sam was thinking about which teacher he should approach. Well, his first choice is to approach teacher Alena. But Sam wasn''t sure if she would ept him. Because he previously heard that, his sister was the first andst student she epted. So Sam wasn''t sure if she would ept him or not. Other than her, approach teacher Nitin or teacher Samantha.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Sigh," Sam just sighed. He stopped thinking about those things because right now, even if he thinks about those things, he won''t be able to do anything. When he faces those situations, he will think about those things. Right now, thinking about those future things is useless.


    Tony, who was sitting beside Sam, asked him,


    "What happened? Why are you sighing?"


    "Nothing, just thinking about the future," Sam casually answered him.


    "Oh¡­ hahaha, just rx, and enjoy the present," Tony said to him while smiling. Sam just nodded at him while smiling.


    The Dungeon they were going to be in the central city so they wouldn''t take that much time to reach the Dungeon. 30 minutester, they finally reached the Dungeon. One by one, all the students get out of the buses. Sam and his friends also get out of the bus. Aftering out of the bus, Sam noticed many Warriors were looking at them. But then they just focus on their own work. Well, it should be pretty normal for those Warriors because Sam here that every year, all the first years, came to this dungeon.


    After getting out of the bus, all the teachers brought out bracelets and gave them to all the students.


    "Well, you must be wondering about the bracelet. With this bracelet, we can easily track you, and if in the dungeon you face any life-threatening situation, you can easily contact us with this bracelet. Previously, we used a walkie-talkie, but this time the Warrior association invented this bracelet. So now everyone makes your team. Those students who are in the early D-grade pleasee to this side." Teacher Nitin said that. Sam and his friends came toward teacher Nitin. Well, there weren''t that many students who reached early D-grade. But one thing was first that all the top 10 students from the first year were in the early D-grade. But don''t think that breaking through from the early grade was that easy. As you know, the D-grade was the first barrier all the warriors needed to face to be high-grade warriors. Until they did not reach the C-grade, they were only called middle-grade Warriors. Also, because of this, many second-year students were still in the early D grade.


    ______________


    Sam and the other top 10 warriors were going toward the guide of the dungeon. Saara and Dan also became familiar with them. But it was just that both of them still weren''t that close to Sam and his friends. Only they were able to reach early D-grade, because of this, teacher Nitin told them to stick together. Sam told them that before going to the Dungeon they should gather information about the dungeon from the guide. Saara and Dan also didn''t have any problem with that. So all of them are going toward the guide.


    All of them came in front of the guide. The guide started to tell them about the monsters that they will meet in the dungeon. They will meet big rat-type monsters, wild dog monsters, Snake type monsters, and tree-type monsters. That guy told him all the details he knows about those monsters and their weaknesses. Sam and others were silently listening to all the details and the weakness of those monsters. They also asked many questions about the dungeon. The guide normally answers them. Finally, sometimeter, Sam and others were going toward the dungeons. Teacher Samantha and teacher Nitin were waiting for them at the front gate of the Dungeon.


    ____________To be continued_________

 Chapter 188 188 - 2nd Floor

    Sam, and the others, with teacher Nitin and teacher Samantha, enter the dungeon. Only they were the early D-grade warriors, and they will go to the 2nd floor directly. But, the teleportation device still wasn''t open to the public, and Sam and the others won''t be able to use it. So, they needed to go to the 2nd floor by walking.


    Sam''s ssmates and the other 1st year students already were on the first floor with those other four teachers. Those four teachers will protect them. Because of this, Nitin and Samantha go with them to the 2nd floor.


    While they enter the dungeon, Nitin and Samantha are released from their aura. So that those peak E-grade monsters won''te closer to them. In this way, they can quickly reach the second floor. Sam and the other students followed them silently. All of them wanted to reach the second floor quickly so that they could also fight.


    3 hourster,


    They were now finally in front of the gate that will take them to the second floor. Even though they travel wasting no time, they need 3 hours to reach here. They can reach here in 2 hours, but for that, they need to use their full speed. But Nitin told them not to use their full speed because it can exhaust them. Because they came here at their normal speed, it took them 3 hours.


    "Okay guys, we will take a 10-minute break, then we will enter the second floor," teacher Nitin said to all of them. They were running non-stop because their teacher Nitin told them that they will take a 10 minutes break. Sam and the others nodded. Sam did not have any problem with that, so he simply sat down on the ground and ate some food. Well, it was lunchtime, so he was feeling hungry. Tony and the others also sit down beside him.


    "Well, did you have any idea about this dungeon?" Sam suddenly asked while looking toward Tony and the others. He wasn''t from the central city and didn''t really know about the dungeons that were in the central city.


    "Well, I previously came here one time." Suddenly Alexa answered that. Well, when she reached the peak of the E-grade warrior, she came here one time with her sister.


    Sam, Tony, and the others were looking at Alexa eagerly. Jeni is also looking at Alexa at this time because she also did note to this dungeon previously. All of them wanted to know about this dungeon because previously, when they wereing toward the second-floor entrance, they did not meet any monsters on the first floor. It was probably because teacher Nitin and teacher Samantha released their aura, because of this, monsters always run away from them when they feel the aura.


    "Well, previously I did note to the second floor because I was only a peak E-grade warrior. I hunt monsters on the first floor. So I have basically no idea about the second floor. As the guide said earlier, you will meet mouse-type monsters, dog-type monsters, and snake-type monsters. The mouse-type monster is called the ground mouse. They are masters at digging holes. They can instantly make a hole in the ground. It was their specialty with this attack on all the Warriors. The warrior didn''t even get the chance to know when arge hole appeared beneath him. Other than that, they are also very proficient in using their ws."


    " Those dog-type monsters are called fire dogs. They were read in color and they also had a fire-like symbol on their forehead. As you can guess, they were very good at using the fire element. Instantly, they can make many fireballs and attack the warrior. Andstly, those next monsters. Those snake-type monsters are called venomous snakes. They are very poisonous. They can also release poison gas from their mouth. Not only that, they can also release acid balls and poison balls from their mouths. This acid ball can easily melt anything. And that poison ball can easily kill anything."


    "But peak E-grade monsters weren''t that great. Even though I recently reached that grade, I can easily kill them, but I don''t know anything about those early D-grade monsters. If any of these monsters were like those Goblin captains, then it would be a very difficult fight. You cannot even tell how hard it will be. So we need to be careful," Alexa finished her exnation. Well, previously, the guide already told them about this monster''s power and other things. But now, after hearing the details from Alexa, all of them were quite alert. They really needed to stay careful on the second floor. If those monsters were like goblin captains, then they would be in very big danger.


    Sam was thinking about those monsters at this time. For him, those snake-type monsters were the deadliest. He quickly looked at all the students and then asked, " Did you guys bring your protective mask?"


    " Yes," all of them quickly responded. Even if Kira, Saara, and Dany didn''t bring the protective mask, Sam, Tony, and the girls will bring it all the time. They did not want to face the same situation that they face in the dark forest. Because of this, they always bring masks.


    "Good," Sam nodded, as all of them brought masks. It can save them from the poisonous gas.<novelnext></novelnext>


    __________________


    10 minutester,


    They were now on the second floor and observing their surroundings. Teacher Nitin and teacher Samantha already vanished from there. Well, they will hide themselves so that their students don''t rely on them to fight those monsters. Sam and the other 9 students are on the second floor right now. All of them were waiting for Sam''s n. Even Saara and Dan were waiting for his n. All the students know that they won''t be able to fight alone in the dungeon. They also know that Tony and the others are waiting for Sam''s n. Sam was their leader and because of this, both of them were also waiting for his n.


    Sam was thinking about what he should do in this situation. Sam wanted to avoid the snakes, so he quickly activated his spiritual vision. Just activating the technique, he can see the spiritual aura. Tony and the others were releasing their aura that they didn''t even know. Well, it was a big matter. The main thing was now he was looking at the forest.


    From his left direction, he can see that brown color aura. Probably those ground mice. Well, that means if they go in the left direction, they will meet those ground mice. In his right direction, he can see the deep green aura. It was probably from those venomous snakes. While in a straight direction, he can see a red aura. Probably from those fire dogs.


    Sam quickly deactivated the spiritual vision and then turned around toward his friends.


    "From here, we will go straight. I don''t want to meet those ground mice because they can easily make a hole beneath our feet. Also, I don''t want to meet those venomous snakes. So our best choice is to fight those fire dogs. If we go straight from here, we will meet those fire dogs." Sam quickly said to them. All of them nodded. They didn''t have any objection.


    After that, they begin to walk in a straight direction. They did not even have to go that far when they met some fire dogs. Well, they weren''t alone in the Dungeon, because of these they could see that some Warriors were fighting 8 fire dogs. Sam signals them to stop their movement because he wanted to observe the power of those fire dogs.


    Four fire dogs were far away from those 10 warriors. Those dogs quickly begin to create a big fireball in their mouth and shoot those fireballs toward those warriors. Well, this wasn''t finished because the other four fire dogs were very close to those warriors. Those dogs quickly jump toward those Warriors. At this time, Sam saw that fire wasing out of those dogs'' ws.


    Fortunately, those Warriors were prepared for this. Three warriors quickly cast a light Wall in front of them. Because of this, those four fire dogs were unable to attack them. But at this time, many fireballs also hit the light shield. These shields were tripleyer shields. Because of this, this still didn''t break. Those four dogs were also attacking the shields with their ws.


    But Sam can see that those warriors didn''t panic at this time. They were calmly looking toward those dogs. Suddenly, the leader of their grounds gave them the order to attack. Instantly two, 2 Warriors started to cast water spears while the other 5 warriors were ready with their weapons to attack those dogs. Looking at them, you can tell they were waiting for those attacks to stop.


    Well, they didn''t need to wait that long because, 30 secondster, those fireballs stoppeding. It seems those dogs were out of spiritual energy. Those 4 dogs who were in front of the Shields were ready to attack them with fireballs, but instantly the light shields vanished and many water spears hit those monsters. Not only that, wasting no time, those 5 warriors also quickly went towards those monsters and attacked them.


    ______________To be continued________

 Chapter 189 189 - Hunting Dogs

    Those 4 dogs who were in front of those warriors got killed by them. Those 4 dogs that were in the distance still needed some time to recover their spiritual energy, then they could attack once again. But those warriors didn''t give them that much time. After they killed those 4 dogs, they didn''t waste any of their time and started running toward those remaining dogs.


    Those 5 spiritual warriors already prepared their spells and quickly shot toward those dogs. Those 4 dogs were unable to dodge all those attacks at the same time, and they got hit by the spells. These attacks did not kill them, but it injured them very much. At this time, all those five physical Warriors already came near these dogs. They did not waste any time and quickly attacked those dogs.


    Sam and his friends were looking at this fight from a distance. Looking at the fight, all of them now have a clear understanding of those fire dogs. These fire dogs like to attack you with their fire attack, but they cannot just nonstop attack you. They attack you for 5 minutes. After that, they will need to recover their spiritual energy. They have the spiritual energy to attack you again. This was a huge amount of information that Sam and his friend could use in the fight. Also, they found out that their own attack will be unable to hurt them. But Sam wasn''t sure if he used a fire attack against them. Then will it be able to hurt them?


    Those Warriors still did not notice Sam and his friend, so Sam signaled his friends to move away from this ce. Well, he did not want to create any misunderstanding. So he decided to move away from this ce. Tony and the others also agree with him.


    ____________


    Light spears and white thunder hit the dogs. But this wasn''t the end, because not long after that, you can see water spears and also arrows going toward the dogs. It instantly killed the five dogs. Well, sometimeter, Sam and the others were now fighting 15 fire dogs. Sam, Tony, and the other physical warriors were fighting in the front while Jeni, Elena, Saara, and Dan attacked those dogs from a distance.


    Suddenly, Sam signals them to stop attacking and instantly creates a firewall in front of them. As you know, his fire control also reaches B-grade. So now he can easily create a firewall in front of them. Also, one thing is that those fire attacks from the dogs were unable to damage this firewall. It was like his firewall absorbing the other fire attack and getting stronger. But the main problem was the stronger this firewall got, the more it consumed his spiritual energy.


    5 minutester,


    Nobody knows what is the situation in front of them because they cannot see in front of them because of the firewall. But then suddenly Sam turned around and said to them,


    "Guys, are you ready?"


    All of them nodded, and then instantly the firewalls disappeared. Tony and the others did not waste any time and attacked those dogs. Jeni and the others also weren''t slow. They already prepared their spells and then instantly the firewalls disappeared. They instantly attacked those dogs. Sam, at this time, did not attack. He just brought out a spirit recovery potion and gulped it down. He was also using his energy recovery technique. It will probably take him 2 to 3 minutes to recover 70% of his lost spiritual energy. He just calmly looked at his friends. Because he was confident that they would be able to kill those dogs. And he wasn''t wrong because his friends were able to kill the remaining 5 dogs.


    After collecting the loot, they once again begin to advance. Well, if you are wondering why only Sam protects his friends from those fire attacks, then because in their team, they did not have any strong defense spell caster. Elena can create a light barrier but that barrier is only able to prevent these dogs from attacking for only 3 minutes. Whereas, Saara''s water wall was only able to hold on against those dogs for only 2 minutes. Because of this, Sam told them that they didn''t need to worry about the defense because he will handle that. Well, not that he did not get the chance to fight those monsters. He was also fighting those monsters using the spirit sword technique.<novelnext></novelnext>


    A few minutester, Sam already told him to stop. Because in front of them he can see 10 fire dogs. They seem to have already noticed Sam and the others. Well, he already expected that, because like any other dogs, these dogs were also good at smelling smells. I think they already get Tony and the other''s smell. Nobody did anything for a moment. Those dogs were looking at Sam and others, whereas Sam and others were also doing the same. But 2 minutester, those dogs suddenly open their mouths and release fireballs toward Sam and others.


    This time, Sam did not create a firewall to protect his friend because they can easily back away and protect themselves, so why waste his spiritual energy? All of them quickly backed away from that ce. Sam and others already know how dangerous the fire was because they can easily see that in front of them, those trees got burned by those mes. The green forest turns into the ash forest.


    Sam quickly brings out his Night (bow) then he focuses on those dogs. Because those monsters were still attacking them, Tony and the others were unable to see their location. But Sam was different. He quickly activated the spiritual vision. In front of his eyes, everything lost its color. The trees, the sky, and even those fires lost their color. Only then Sam was able to see the aura of those monsters. Wasting no time, Sam quickly shot his arrows toward those dogs. He knows that a normal Arrow won''t be able to do anything, so he uses his spiritual arrows. One after another, Sam shoots 5 arrows. Those spiritual arrows did not get damaged by the fire and directly went toward those 5 dogs that were in the front.


    Sam previously noticed that, while attacking them with their fire, those dogs were unable to move. This was a plus point for Sam and the others. This time also those 5 dogs didn''t move from their ce and they did not even get the chance to react because they also did not expect that they would get attacked by arrows at this time.


    But even after those 5 monsters died, those mes didn''t stop. Because 5 remaining dogs are still attacking them from a distance. But it won''t be long before those dogs will be out of their spiritual energy. Sam quickly signals Jeni and others to prepare their spells. Also, Signal Tony and the others prepared themselves to attack. All of them were waiting for those mes to disappear.


    1 minuteter,


    Finally, those dogs are out of spiritual energy. The me finally stops, and Jeni and the other spiritual warriors, wasting no time, attack those dogs. In front of their quick attack, those dogs are unable to dodge those attacks. All of them get hit by those attacks. But this didn''t stop there. Because Tony and the others had already reached them and attacked them. Actually, Sam and the others did not want to give those dogs any chance to recover their spiritual energy. They wanted to finish the fight as quickly as they could.


    After collecting the loot, they search for a good ce to rest. After finding a good ce, all of them sit down in that ce. Alexa suddenly brings out a perfume-like thing. Sam and the others look at that thing with confusion. After seeing the confusion, Alexa just smile and then exins,


    "Well, as you know, I already came to this dungeon, and I also know about this dungeon. I already know that those dog''s spot us by smelling our smells. So this was a special perfume that would hide our smells from those dogs. Well, while fighting, I did not want to use this because at that time we can easily defend ourselves, but while resting, I wanted to use that because I don''t want to get attacked by those dogs while resting. It is also gettingte because we can see that the light will be going down and the night wille. And as Sam already told us, hunting at night wasn''t that good for us. That time our vision is limited and we also won''t be able to do anything if any other monster suddenly wants to attack us." Alexa exins all of this to everyone. All of them nodded and agreed with her. Well, not only her but the others were also aware of the fact that Sam did not like to hunt in the nighttime.


    ____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 190 190 - Leader Sam

    Tony and the others were resting except Jeni and Sam. Both of them were guarding the ce. The perfume really worked. This really hides their smalls from those dogs. They were now in a tree. Fortunately, in this dungeon, they didn''t have any flying monsters, but they still had one problem. Those snakes could easily reach their ce, but fortunately, they weren''t in the ce where those snakes lived. At this time then all the monsters have their own area where they lived. You can say, the dungeon has already decided which area which monsters will take. But even though here you will find fire dogs mainly, sometimes those other monsters alsoe here and attack the warriors. Because of this, Sam already brings out the life detector device.


    Sam was looking at the device. He saw that many monsters were near their base, but nobody was able to find them. Because of this sand did not want to fight with those monsters or this can alert those monsters. He just looked at the live detector with focus.


    _____________


    Next day,


    Suddenly, a firewall appeared in front of Sam and the others. If you looked at them, then you can see all of them were wearing the protector mask at this time. Two green-colored balls instantly hit the firewall but were unable to do anything to the firewall.


    Yes, you guessed it right; they were fighting two venomous snakes. Well, actually previously they were fighting 5 snakes, but they already killed three monsters. Now only 2 snakes remain. These two snakes also already lost 60% of their health.


    Sam keeps activating the firewall because those 2 monsters keep attacking them with poison balls and acid balls. They also already spared poison gas in the air. But fortunately, Sam and others were wearing protective masks.


    "Guys, only 30 seconds." Well, 30 secondster, those snakes will stop attacking, so Sam told all of them to get ready to attack the snakes. All of them nodded hearing Sam. Fortunately, Sam created the firewall in all directions, and because of this, they didn''t get attacked from behind. But it was just these spells that really cost him spiritual energy.


    Jeni, Elena, and Saara already started casting their spells while the others were also ready with their weapons to attack those two snakes.


    30 secondster, finally, those two snakes stop attacking. Well, they were out of spiritual energy and it will take them 2 to 3 minutes to recover. But how can Siam and his friends let this chance go? The moment those snakes stop attacking, some instantly deactivate the firewall. Tony and the others wasted no time. They rush toward those two snakes. Jeni and others had already attacked those two snakes. This instantly makes those two snakes roar in pain. Once again they lost 30% of their health. But Sam and others weren''t that slow. The moment Jeni and others stop attacking those two snakes, Tony and others alreadye in front of them and attack them.


    Sometimeter, after collecting the loot, Sam and his friends were advancing. Well, previously, suddenly 5 snakes came near them and attacked. Fortunately, Sam''s reaction speed wasn''t that slow before those poison balls hit them. He instantly cast a firewall around them. Because of this, they did not get affected by the poison ball or anything like this.


    Even though this area was the area of dogs, sometimes the snakes and those mouse monsters came here and attacked warriors. Now they have only 6 days left to return to the Royal academy. So before that, they wanted to kill as many monsters as they could so they could get good loot and sell them to the college association for credit points.


    __________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Nitin and Samantha at this were looking at their students. They always stay close to their students but aren''t that close where they will easily spot their students. They were keeping a minimum distance where they would not get spotted by their students even when their students were using the life detector device.


    From yesterday, they saw how easily all the students are thinking of Sam as their leader. Well, Tony and the girls were different. Tony and the girls were already with some when they were in the college entrance examination. So this wasn''t a surprise for them to think of Sam as their leader, but Saara, Dan, and Kira were different. These three students weren''t with Sam and his group, but they still chose Sam as their leader.


    Well, Nitin and Samantha already notice how calmly Sam gives his order and suggestions while they battle. He naturally has the ability to be a leader. Also, Nitin and Samantha were surprised after seeing their improvement in Sam. Both of them already know that Sam already knows how to use the spirit technique. But seeing how easily Sam used that technique really surprised them. When some for the first time use that technique, he is only able to release a little of spiritual energy, but now while fighting those monsters, he is able to release power sh using the spiritual energy. This really surprised them. Improving the spirit technique was very hard. This wasn''t your regr technique. Because of this, improving this technique was very hard. But seeing how easily Sam improves his technique really surprised them.


    "He really is the brother of Gloria. Both of them were monsters." Samanthaments after seeing Sam''s power.


    " Yes, you are right. Sigh, I really wanted to take him under me. But our Vice Principal wanted to take him as her disciple so we cannot interfere with this." Nitin sighed. Well, he really wanted to take Sam as his personal student, but Alena wanted to take Sam as her student, so he cannot do anything.


    "Well, don''t be sad about that. Alexa, Tony, Elena, and Jeni also were geniuses. 4 of them already started training in the spirit technique. You can take any of them as your personal student." Samantha said to him.


    " Yes, you are right. But you have to say, we really have many geniuses this year," Nitin said with a smile.


    After that, both of them once again looked at Sam and his group. All of them were now advancing in the forest. Under Sam''smand, they really performed better in the forest. Those fire dogs weren''t able to harm them because Sam''s firewall-protected them. Not only that, the moment those fire dogs ran out of their spiritual energy, Sam and his team instantly reacted to this. It was a good strategy, but if Sam wasn''t here, then it wouldn''t be possible. Elena is able to cast light shields, but is only able to prevent those attacks for 3 minutes, then Saara is only able to maintain the water shield for only 2 minutes. So they are naturally unable to hold on for 5 minutes on their own. But Sam is easily able to hold that firewall for 5 minutes, and because of this, both of them think that this strategy is only possible because Sam was here.


    Right now, Sam and his teammates were fighting 20 firedogs. 10 dogs were attacking them from the front and 10 dogs were attacking them from a distance. But this time, Sam had already prepared a great fireball. Wasting no time, he shot that great fireball toward those dogs who were attacking them from a distance. Well, the great thing was that while those dogs attacked someone with their fire attacked, they were unable to move. So you can say it was in Sam''s favor while that fireball went toward dogs. Well, he can also create the mega fireball, but that will consume all of his spiritual energy. Then he won''t be able to maintain the firewall. Well, as he maintained the firewall, his spiritual energy was only 60%. Because of this, he only created the great fireball. These only consume his 20% spiritual energy, so it won''t be a problem for him to maintain the firewall.


    Those dogs who were attacking them from the front were continuously attacking the firewall with their fire ws. But still, they were unable to damage the firewall. The great firewall quickly went toward those 10 dogs who were in the distance. Those dogs seem to notice the firewall. They quickly canceled the fire attack and wanted to escape from there. But not all of them were sessful because five dogs were hit by that great fireball. Even though they have resistance against fire, they still got injured by the impact of that fireball.


    Because all 10 dogs cancel their fire attack, Sam also cancels the firewall. Tony and the others did not waste any more time; they quickly attacked those 10 dogs who were in front of them. Sam also wasn''t slow the moment he canceled the firewall and quickly rushed toward those dogs. His sword was glowing in blue color. As you can guess, he was using the spirit technique. He quickly swung his sword toward those dogs.


    ____________To be continued_______

 Chapter 191 191 - Improvement

    3 dayster,


    Sam quickly went in front of 5 dogs and swung his sword. When he swung his sword, a blue color also came out of the sword. As you know, that was the spiritual energy. Sam was fighting 5 fire dogs. Using his fast-cut technique quickly swings the sword 10 times in less than 5 seconds. All this time you also used the spirit techniques, so, as you can guess, all this swing was full of spiritual energy. Those 5 dogs didn''t even get the chance to react and instantly their bodies split apart.


    Sam, at this time, looks at his behind. He saw all of his teammates were fighting. Tony, Alexa, Kira, Kenny, and Tina were fighting in closebat, while Jeni, Elena, Saara, and Dan supported them from behind. You can say in these 4 days Kira, Saara, Dan, Kenny, and Tina improved. Well, a few days ago they just recently broke through to early D-grade. But that time they did not get a chance to stabilize their strength. But right now they were already stabilizing their strength and you can see they were fighting those dogs using their full strength. Well, not only them, but Tony and the others improve greatly. They did not absorb the crystals, but their techniques improved greatly. They were now able to bring out more strength using their improved techniques.


    Sam suddenly heard some food steps that wereing from his front side. He quickly looked in that direction.


    ''It seems more monsters areing in this direction.'' Sam thought that and then vanished from his ce. He used his concealment technique and then advanced. Well, he wasn''t wrong because in front of them he can see many ground mice. At least 10 ground mice were there.


    Just looking at those ground mice, Sam reacted quickly. Like those venomous snakes, Sam wanted to avoid this ground mouse because you won''t even realize when this monster suddenly dug a hold underneath your foot. Without realizing anything, you just suddenly started to fall. He quickly came toward those mice and used his fast cut to attack those mouse monsters. Those mouse monsters didn''t even realize when they got suddenly attacked by someone? Well, even though Sam attacked all these 10 monsters, it did not kill them at the same time. Sam is only able to kill 6 monsters. But he quickly reacted before those monsters realized that their friends were killed by him. He quickly came behind them and then attacked. This time, he was sessfully able to kill the remaining four monsters.


    '' Well, this spirit technique was great. But the problem is this technique doesn''t increase the sharpness of my blood like my energy mode. Because of this, I still wasn''t able to finish the monster on my first try. Well, on the other hand, this spiritual energy creates the spiritual sword sh that heavily damages the monster who is in the front but the monster who wears in the backside doesn''t receive that much damage. It seems I needed to put more spiritual energy to increase the damage. Right now 10% was my limit.'' Sam thought about all of this in his mind.


    After collecting all the loot, he came toward his friends. They also already finished those monsters, and they were right now collecting the loot.


    "Status,"


    "Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade) (20%)


    [This technique helps you learn how to control the me.]


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade) (16%)


    ? [With this technique, you can master controlling your spiritual energy faster.]


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (100%)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    [You can coat the special weapons with your spiritual energy.]


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (00%)


    [Helps you to learn to make a sound attack through your roar.]


    Spirit technique: (D-grade) (+) (35%)


    [With this technique, you can synchronize any of your attack and defense techniques with your spiritual energy. Not only that, but you can also release that spiritual energy,]. "


    As you can see he already upgraded his me control and his spirit technique.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (737/737)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Strength: 68


    Agility: 66


    Physique: 67


    Intelligent(mental power): 60


    Spirit: 20


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 30k "


    Not only did he upgrade his technique, but he also upgraded his status. Butpared to his other status, his spirit was quite low. He really needed many spirit crystals. But unfortunately, even in the warrior association or in the Royal Academy, he cannot find that many spirit crystals. Well, as you know that the higher level the warrior got, the crystals be less. When he was in E-grade or F-grade, he did not face that problem, but right now when he was in D-grade; he was facing this problem. Even after killing many monsters, he only gets fewer crystals. Well, you can say this is also one of the reasons not many Warriors wanted to sell their crystals in the warrior association.


    ''sigh'' Sam sighed and then went toward his friends. All of them were looking exhausted. Well, this time Sam did not block the fire attack of those dogs with his firewall, because of this Tony and the others needed to avoid the me attack from those dogs using their own strength. Well, two days ago, their teacher suddenly appeared in front of them and told them not to rely on Sam that much. If they rely on Sam''s firewall, then they won''t be able to improve. So you can say from that moment Sam did not use the firewall except in critical situations.


    Tony and the others already bring out the health potions and spiritual recovery potions. Sam quickly brings out the life detector device. He can see that Tony and the others need to be raised for some time so that they can''t recover, and in the meantime, he will guard them.


    You can say that Sam''s decision to use the spirit technique to fight these monsters was the best decision. Because of this, he can improve this quickly, and not only that, he can also use the spirit technique while using his archery technique. Compared to the sword technique, using spiritual energy with other techniques was very difficult. Well, nobody knows the reason because only the saints know the reason, but they did not tell anyone. Well, Sam was guessing because the person who created this technique was focusing on his/her sword technique at that time. But then he decided to connect his other techniques with the spirit technique. Because of this, he modified the technique but still, there are some mistakes and because of this using the sword technique you can easily release your spiritual energypared to other techniques.


    As you hear, he was able to use the spirit technique, while using his archery. He is only able to release his 1% spiritual energy. Yes, it wasn''t that powerful but still, this was a really great improvement for Sam.


    30 minutester,


    Finally Tony and the others recover. They are 85% spiritual energy so they get up from the ground and once again ready to hunt monsters.


    You have to say this was a really big forest. Because they already came very deep into the inner forest, but still, they did not meet any powerful early D-grade monsters. Well, except a few times. They only met three times of the powerful monster of early D-grade. That time, Sam fights 1 versus 1 with a monster while Tony and the others fight 2 monsters. Those monsters were really powerful. Because if Tony and the others did not use their full strength and made any mistakes, that could be really bad for them. Fortunately, they were able to kill those two monsters. Most likely, those powerful monsters lived near the entrance of the next floor.


    _____________________


    "Tony, Jeni, Kenny, Tina, and Saara, you all take care on the right side. Alexa, Elena, Kira, and Dan, you guys take care of the left side. I will take care of the front side. Also, don''t let those monsters surround us from behind." Sam quickly told them. As you can see, they were surrounded by monsters from three sides. Fortunately, they were not surrounded by these monsters from behind.


    All of them know that. Wasting no time, they quickly react, all of them can see that those dogs were above to attack them with their me. It could be bad for them if those dogs can attack them using their me from all these three directions.


    Jeni, Elena, and Saara, wasting no time, quickly cast their spells. Jeni cast white lightning, Elena sun ray, and Saara cast Water''s bullets. As You can see, they have already improved their casting technique. Wasting no time, they already shoot all those spells toward those dogs. Dan also wasn''t slow. Like Sam, he also uses rapid shots. Even though he wasn''t as good as Sam, he was better than the other Archer that Sam saw at his college. Well, he wasn''t sure about those second-year, third-year, or fourth-year students.


    Sam at this time, quickly casts a confused ray. This instantly stops those 15 fire dogs from attacking with their me attack.


    ___________To be continued__________

 Chapter 192 192 - Killing The Fire Dogs.

    Sam instantly appeared in front of those dogs. He quickly swung his sword. Those dogs, even though they were blind, seemed to sense the danger. They quickly tried to get away from that ce, but Sam''s sword was faster. His sword sh instantly hit 3 dogs. Those 3 dogs instantly got killed by the sword sh. Well, even though using the spirit technique, Sam''s sword did not increase in sharpness that muchpared to the energy mode, but those monsters who get directly hit by the sword will receive the most damage. So, these 3 dogs got a direct hit by his sword and because of this, they instantly died from the attack.


    The remaining 12 monsters avoid getting hit by the attack. At this time, they were already once again able to see. But Sam wasn''t slow; he instantly vanished from his ce and then appeared near the nearest dog. He quickly swings his sword and kills the dog. At this time, those other dogs already noticed Sam, and they also attacked with their me toward him. But Sam has already sensed the attack. Using his speed, he avoids those attacks and instantly appears behind the nearest dogs. He once again killed the dogs. Those dogs who were far away from him once again attacked him, but once again, Sam vanished from that ce. Their me only hit the tree. So, like this, Sam was killing those dogs.


    Sometimeter, Sam was panting right now. Well, continuously using his spirit technique and sword technique really makes him exhausted. He wasn''t using the concealment technique because he didn''t want these monsters to focus their attack on his friends. That could be dangerous for them. Because of this, he wasn''t using the concealment technique.


    Right now, only 8 monsters remain. You can say like some of those monsters were also exhausted. Because of continuously using their me attack, they were now out of spiritual energy. But they were running towards him. Even though they cannot use their fire, they still can use their ws to attack Sam.


    Sam was exhausted, but he was already using his energy recovery technique at full speed. Also, he already gulped down a health potion and a spiritual energy recovery potion. Because of this, he was recovering his energy and power quickly. Sam did not move from his ce and looked at those dogs that wereing toward him.


    Sam tries to calm down. When the dog''s w was a few centimeters away from him, he instantly disappeared from that ce. But the dogs didn''t even get the chance to react because instantly a sword split him in half. Not only that, but suddenly Sam extended his left hand toward those dogs. Suddenly those dogs stop moving for a moment. Well, as you can guess, he was using his telekinesis power. Sometimes he forgets that he also has this technique. But he still did not upgrade this technique to C-grade and because of this, this technique was not that powerful. But it still can prevent those dogs from moving. Well, this technique only can stop those dogs'' movement for 1 minute. For Sam, this one minute was enough. Wasting no time, he quickly appeared beside those dogs and one by one killed all of them.


    1 minuteter,


    "Sigh, finally," Sam sighs in relief. He finally finished all these 15 fire dogs on his own. The dead bodies of those dogs became Ash and then they dropped loot. Sam suddenly picks up those loot.


    ____________


    While Sam was killing those dogs on his own, Tony and the other students were also killing the dogs that surrounded them from their left and right side.


    Jeni and Saara quickly cast their spell and attack the dogs that were preparing to attack them with their me attack. Both of their attacks hit those dogs. This instantly killed those five dogs who were preparing to attack them with their me. At this time, Tony, Kenny, and Tina were fighting the dogs in closebat. Three of them swung their sword toward those monsters. Well, those dogs also were attacking them with their fire ws. So they needed to be careful about those fire ws. The power behind ws was so powerful that it could send anyone flying backward. You can see their damaged armor and w marks on them.


    Tony quickly crouches down and avoids getting hot by the w. But instantly a dog attacked him from behind. But before that dog attacked him, Kenny quickly attacked that dog. Her attack quickly killed that dog. At this time Tina also appears beside them and attacks that dog that was in front of Tony. But this time she wasn''t able to kill that dock that only injured the dog. Tony already gets up from the ground and then swings his sword. That instantly killed the dog.


    But they did not rx and quickly jumped away from their ce. Fortunately, they were able to jump away because the me hit their previous ce. At this time, Jeni already shoots thunderbolts toward those dogs. That did not kill them, but that injured them and canceled their me attack.


    Jeni and Saara maintained a distance between them and those dogs. Even though they can fight in closebat, they did not want to risk it, so they maintained a distance.


    "Tony, are you okay?" Kenny suddenly asks Tony because she can see that he was bleeding from his hand. Previously fighting those dogs, Tony got hit by the w. There wasn''t any time to defend himself, so he crossed his hand to defend himself, but he got injured.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Don''t worry about it. It is just a small wound," Tony assured her that he was okay. Kenny nodded.


    Without wasting any time, they once again started to attack. Unfortunately, Tony still was not able to release the spiritual energy from his sword. If he can release his spiritual energy, then it could be an easier fight for him to fight these dogs. Even though these dogs weren''t as powerful as him, they were great in number and because of this Tony and the others got injured by them. But fortunately, only seven dogs remained.


    You can say they were fighting at least 25 dogs. Fortunately, they already killed many dogs and only seven dogs remained. It seems a big group of fire dogs surrounded them.


    _______


    Elena quickly attacks 3 dogs with her sun ray. The attack was more powerful than before, so it instantly killed those three dogs. Dan also wasn''t slow. He kept rapidly shooting the arrows. Even though he wasn''t able to kill the monster, we just had one arrow he was still shooting toward. Who cares? Even if he wasn''t able to kill the monster with one arrow, he can just keep shooting arrows toward that monster.


    Alexa, at this time, kills that monster using her sword. You have to say if Sam wasn''t here then Alexa could be the no 1 student in the first year. She easily kills those monsters while also dodging the me attack.


    Alexa quickly jumped away and then threw her sword at that dog that attacked her with me. That sword split the dog. Afternding on the ground, she instantly went toward that dog and picked up her sword. She suddenly crouches down and avoids the fire w. But instantly she showed the sword behind. That instantly killed the dog that attacked her. Kira also wasn''t slow. She was also fighting those monsters using her full strength. Even though she wasn''t able to kill multiple monsters at the same time, she was still killing those monsters one by one. But the main thing was to be exhausted.


    Somehow, a monster appeared behind Elena and was about to attack her. But she already sensed the monster and instantly jumped away. At this time quickly Arrow came toward that monster and hit him. Elena also wasn''t slow. She instantly created light spears and attacked the dog. That finally killed that dog.


    Like Tony and his team, Alexa and her team are also facing 20 to 25 dogs at the same time. But fortunately, they were able to kill 19 dogs. So right now only 6 monsters are remaining.


    __________________


    Samantha and Nitin were watching their students fight from a distance. They already noticed those fire dogs when they surrounded their students. But fortunately, their students weren''t stupid because they instantly reacted. Sam instantly divided teams and went straight to face 15 monsters alone. Those on the team are also facing at least 20 to 25 monsters at the same time. Compared to the venomous snake and those ground mice, these fire dogs were easy to kill but you just need to avoid getting hit by the me of this dog.


    But seeing they are students, handling the situation easily makes them really proud because this year they really have some good students who will be powerful warriors in the future. If you see Samantha and Nitin right now, you can see that both of them are writing something at this time. Well, they were keeping notes about their students. Well, this is also one reason all the teachers apanied their students toe to the Dungeon.


    They will submit this report to the college and the college will send the report to all the teachers. This report would help the students gain a personal teacher.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 193 193 - Home

    Sam and his friends were now going toward the entrance of the 1st floor. Well, you guessed it right; it was already time to leave the dungeon. They already finished their dungeon hunting. Also, they didn''t have any conditions to fight. Not that they were injured, it was just their Armor was damaged, and they were also low on potions.


    Samantha and Nitin were also apanying them while they were going toward the first floor''s entrance. While they were going toward the entrance, they got to see many of their ssmates. Many of them were in better condition and also many of them were injured. All of their ssmates were also going toward the entrance. Sam and the others also noticed the four teachers who stayed on the first floor to protect their ssmates. Those four teachers came to Samantha and Nitin. Sam doesn''t know what they were talking about, but he can guess that they were talking about the performance of all the students.


    Suddenly, Sam noticed the students. These two students always sat behind them in their ssroom, so Sam was familiar with them. One of them was injured and you can see bandages on his hand. His armor was badly damaged. The name of this student was Mithun Arun. With him, he can also see many students, most likely they were his teammates. Beside him was the other student. His name was Soten Sium. He wasn''t that injuredpared to Mithun. But his armor was also damaged. Most likely, both of them also noticed Sam and his group. Sam just nodded at them. After that, he wants to again focus on the entrance. Not only them, but many of their ssmates also notice Sam and his group.


    Some hourster,


    They are finally outside of the Dungeon. Instantly, many medical teams appeared and started the treatment of those students who needed treatment. Well, even after using the health potion, many students still were injured because not everyone can support high-grade potions. Also, the health potions did not instantly heal anyone. It just increases the regeneration process of your body. This one will be able to cure your injurypletely.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam and his friends while currently sitting on the bus. It did not take that much time when the bus started moving.


    ____________


    Sam finally came back to his home. His mom and dad were back. They were in the hall room. After greeting them, Sam went back to his room. After freshening up himself, hey down in bed. Well, he needed a good rest.


    At 5:00 p.m. Sam woke up from his sleep. But he was currently feeling very hungry. He quickly washed his face with water and then went to the kitchen. He did not see his mum and dad in the hall room and most probably they were in their room or they were in the training room. Sam after reaching the kitchen so that food was already ready. Hina probably already prepared food for him because she knows that Sam will be hungry after he wakes up from his sleep.


    Sometimeter, Sam finally finished all the food, and he was finally full. After that, he went outside of his house. He wasn''t in the mood to stay at home, so he went out for an evening walk.


    Because it is November, the sun goes down pretty quickly. Now it''s only 5:30 p.m. but you can see that it was already dark outside. Sometimeter, when he passed through the public training grounds in his colony. He saw that all the children were going home with their parents. Most probably, they will finish training and now they are going back to their house. Just looking at these children''s hard work, you will feel motivated to work hard. Sam just smiles, looking at those children, and then leaves the area. Well, he did not have any destination. He was just walking aimlessly. Sometimeter, he was now sitting beside the big pond. Today and tomorrow you will take a rest and after that, he once again starts training. Well, as you know, you also need to give rest to your body. Because of this, he was thinking about what to do tomorrow. They also did not have college tomorrow, so after thinking about it, Sam decided that he will tour the city.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter, he came back to his home. At this time, he saw that his mom and dad were already in the hall room and they were watching the TV. He also sat beside them because he had nothing better to do right now. On TV, the news reporter was talking about this year''s annual collegepetition.


    "In this year''s annual collegepetition, the Royal Academy has the highest chance to win the final round. As you know the ice princess or you can say the ice queen Gloria Kainer already reached the early C-grade. I don''t think anyone is her opponent. The previous year, for some reason, our ice Queen wasn''t able to win the final round, but this year she has the highest chance to win thepetition. Not only that, but we also get the news that Fiona Cris, the sword princess, also reached the C-grade. With this, we can easily guess that this year the Royal Academy has the highest chance of winning thepetition. But the Golden Dawn and the white Tiger also have many Elite Warriors. We still did not get any report on a student who also reached the early C-grade, but they will probably be ready to face Gloria and Fiona. As you know that this college didn''t reveal, they are secret Trump cards that easily, so we cannot be sure if they were no C-grade warriors this year. Well, in one word, this year''s annual collegepetition will be the Epicpetition."


    "Not only that, but we also have many talented 1st year students who most likely also take part in thispetition. This year''s first position holder of the college entrance examination, Sam Kainer, most probably also took part in this annual collegepetition. As we already know his strength, I think the other colleges also needed to prepare their students to face Sam Kainer. As you know, Sam most likely used his concealment technique, and even those high-grade Warriors have difficulty finding him. So all the other colleges needed to prepare themselves to face him. Not only him, but Alexa, Jeni, Tony, and Elena. This was also the name of the genius who is in the Royal Academy. They will also take part in this year''s annual collegepetition, so all the colleges need to prepare themselves to face these prodigies."


    The news reporter was telling all of this. Sam, who was looking at the news after hearing the news reporter talking about him, didn''t know how to react.


    "Haha, son, it looks like you''re famous. This year, all those other colleges most likely prepare themselves to face you. But you also need to be careful and don''t get overconfident," Victor said to him. Well, he is proud that his son was a genius, but that also worried him. Because there are many Warriors who get overconfident after they get famous.


    " Don''t worry. Our son will never get overconfident." Hina suddenly said to him, She has full trust in her son and that he won''t get overconfident after bing famous.


    Sam, after listening to his parents'' words, just smiles at them. He assures them that even when they get more famous, he won''t get overconfident because he knows that there are many things that could easily kill him. While talking about this, he suddenly remembered that dream. They are that girl who suddenly appeared in his dream and told him that he should hide from people. Sam still did not have any idea who that girl was, and about whom she was warning him. Sam still did not have any idea, but one thing he was your dad, the girl, was rted to his sister because she can easily upgrade his normal concealment technique to supreme concealment technique.


    Sometimeter, he came back to his room. Whileying down in the bed, he was thinking about his new idea of his energy mode. Now he has free time so he can finally start the training for his second move of energy mode. He wanted to coat his arm with spiritual energy. But as you know that it was very difficult to maintain the spiritual energy in his hand like that, so he was using gloves. Because of using the spirit technique, you can say his spiritual energy control also gets better. So he most probably won''t have any problem while training that technique. But tomorrow he wanted to take a rest so he will start the day after tomorrow.


    Sometimeter, after eating dinner, Sam once againy down in bed. This time he was watching a fight between the saint and an S-grade monster on his mobile. Well, this was a fight that happened 20 years ago. That time you can say suddenly an S-grade monster came out of the Dungeon and started killing and destroying. Fortunately, Saint Markus was able to stop the monsters.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 194 194 - New Move Of Energy Mode

    November 13, Sunday,


    You can see in the training room Sam was fighting the robot using his fist. The most interesting thing was that he was already wearing his gloves. Also, you will notice an additional ckyer. As you can guess, Sam already coated his fist with spiritual energy. But the ckyer of the spiritual energy was very thin. Well, he still was not able to increase the amount of spiritual energy in his hand. It will take him some time to master this. But stillpared to before now, his punches were very powerful. After coating his feast with spiritual energy, the power behind the punches increases very much. So now, besides his spirit technique, he is also practicing this second move of his energy mode.


    Today is Sunday, so he did need to worry about college. Because of this, he just fights this robot in the morning. Even though he did not have college, he was in the college and using the training room in the college. Becausepared to his house, the training room in the college was very advanced. He wasn''t fighting one robot, but two. He fights these two robots at the same time. Sam set the power limit of these two robots to intermediate D-grade.


    Suddenly wondering what to punch him, but Sam suddenly crouches down and avoids the punch from the robot. But instantly, the other robot appeared behind him and was about to kick him. He instantly jumps away from that ce and avoids the kick. Just after learning on the ground, he quickly went after those two robots. Not wasting any time, he starts punching those two robots. It wasn''t that those robots did not counterattack him. But Sam was defending him while he punched those two robots. Instantly, the ck robot was sent flying backward while the white robot was about to punch Sam. But Sam quickly blocked that punch. He counterattacks that punch and also sends flying the white robot. Thankfully, none of the robots receive any damage or you cannot see any crack marks on them. He still could not increase the amount of spiritual energy. Like his first move, he also needed to master this second move, but it will take him some time.


    Sometimeter, when he was out of his stamina, he stopped fighting those two robots and sat down on the ground. Right now, Sam was panting heavily. To maintain this coated fist, he is still facing some problems. He was only able to maintain this for 30 minutes. You need to increase the time. So he can maintain the coated fist longer.


    After drinking an energy drink, Sam was thinking about his previous fight. Well, he was trying to find the fault that he did in the previous fight so that he won''t make the same mistake again. After recovering his energy, someone again got up from the ground and then the battle between a human and two robots once again started.


    2 hourster, around 1:00 p.m. Sam finished his fight. Well, after this long fight, he was now hungry and needed to eat something. After freshening up, Sam left the training room, and he was not working toward the cafeteria. Like him, many students also came to the college to practice here. But one thing is that none of his friends came to the college today. So Sam went to the cafeteria alone.


    You can say right now every student is busy with the annual inter-collegepetition. Because of this, everyone is practicing. Every year, they will select only 10 students to participate in the annual collegepetition. Because of this, every student wanted to give their all in the annual inter-collegepetition.


    Sometimeter, Sam was already eating his food. Aftering back from the Dungeon he already sells all the loot that he doesn''t need. He also already absorbed the crystals. Also, because of this, he was practicing to adapt to the new strength.


    While he was eating, he suddenly felt that someone was approaching him. Turned around and so that it was Kira and Dan. Both of them wereing toward him.


    "Hey, guys. Good afternoon," he greeted them. Even though they weren''t that close to him like Tony and the girls, they had previously fought alongside him in the dungeon. So, you can say, Sam thought of them as friends. Also, their character wasn''t that bad and most because of this he became their friend.


    "Hey, Sam. Good afternoon," both of them also greeted him. After that, they also sit down beside him. Previously, they also thought that Sam would be an arrogant person because he was number one. But after fighting alongside him, they already get to know him better. They know that Sam did not talk that much, but he cares about his teammates. Also, not only Sam but Tony, Alexa, and the others were also good to them. For the first few days, Dan didn''t talk to anyone, but after the previous dungeon''s fight, he also thought of Sam and the others as their friend.


    "Did you guys alsoe here to train?" Sam asked them. Hearing Sam''s question, both of them nodded. They also came to the college because they wanted to train more.


    Sometimeter, both of their food also arrived on the table and both of them also started eating. While eating, some ask them about their training and also if they started the spirit technique training. Both of them told him about their training schedule and also answered that they were currently practicing the spiritual energy control technique. Like most physical warriors, they were also not good at controlling their spiritual energy and because of this, they also needed to learn that technique. Only after that, they would be able to practice the spirit technique.


    Kira and Dan also asked about Sam''s training. Sam told them that he was mostly focused on his technique, but he did not tell them about his energy mode. Well, he did not want to tell anyone about his energy mode. As you can guess, this was his trump card.


    "Well, Sam, can you help me improve my archery technique? The most Icked in my archery technique was that I wasn''t able to increase the power of my arrow. Previously in the Dungeon, I wasn''t able to kill those monsters in one shot." Suddenly, Dan asked Sam to help him in his training. Well, he knows that Sam was very good at archery, besides his sword and spell.


    [A/N: One question guys. Should Sam tell his family about the Energy mode and teach them?]


    Sam didn''t mind helping him. Sam gave him some tips that he learned from his mom. You can say that Hina was one of the best archers for Sam. You can say because of her, Sam improved in his archery.


    "Thank you very much, Sam," Dan quickly thanked Sam. He was very grateful to him because those tips were pretty useful. If he is able to pull the string as Sam said to him, then the power behind the arrow will be improved.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Mention, not," Sam just smiled at him.


    Sometimeter, 3 of them left the cafeteria. Sam was going toward the warrior shop that was in the college. They are able to buy anything rted to the Warriors. Sam mainly wanted to buy some crystals, mainly spirit crystals. Also, one thing was that he needed to select a personality that would guide him to increase his power. Two days ago, teacher Samantha and teacher Nitin informed them that it was time to select a personal teacher. He wasn''t sure which teacher to select. Well, he can search for that tomorrow.


    Sometimeter, Sam left the store. He already brought some spirit crystals and other crystals. But he did not get that much crystal in this store. If he wanted to get many crystals, then he needed to go to the dungeon.


    Sam once again went back to the training room. Aftering back to the training room, he did not start training. Before starting his training, he wanted to absorb the crystals he brought from the store. So he sat down in a Lotus position and started absorbing the crystals.


    "


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (759/759)


    Strength: 75


    Agility: 70


    Physique: 69


    Intelligent(mental power): 67


    Spirit: 35


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 90k "


    This was his current status. Also, one good thing was that next month the supreme upgrade will also unlock. He can one-second upgrade using the supreme upgrade. It took him some time to absorb all the crystals he had brought from the store. He looked at the time. It was 3:00 p.m. He was nning to go home at 5:00 p.m. so in these 2 hours he will fight with those two robots. So, wasting no time, he quickly gets up from the ground and then fought hose two robots.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 195 195 - Meeting An Old Friend.

    At 5:00 p.m., Sam left the training room. Outside of the training room, he also meets Kira and Dan. Both of them also finished their training, and they were heading toward the cafeteria. After seeing Sam alsoing out of the training area, they greeted him. After that, 3 of them went toward the cafeteria.


    "Sam, thank you very much. The tricks you told me earlier really work. Somehow, I managed to increase the power behind my arrow." Dan said this to Sam with a grateful tone.


    "Don''t worry about it," Sam said with a smile. Well, he was happy that his tips really work for him. Sometimeter, they finally came to the cafeteria. After cing their order, they sit down. It did not take that much time to prepare their food. While eating, they also talk about various things. Well, everything was rted to the Dungeon.


    After finishing their food when they are about to leave the cafeteria, they suddenly hear some loud noiseing from the first floor. Because 3 of them were on the first floor, they also noticed many students were standing. It looked like something was happening there.


    Well, Sam, Kira, and Dan weren''t interested in other affairs, but at this time some suddenly stopped moving because he suddenly heard three familiar voicesing from that crowd. Sam is still unable to remember the owner of those voices. So he unconsciously began to go toward that crowd. Kira and Dan, who were behind him, looked at each other. Then they also started to follow Sam because they were also curious as to why Sam paused. Because they know that Sam wasn''t interested in other affairs except if that was his friends. So they wanted to find out why Sam was going in that direction.


    When Sam came closer to the crowded area, he finally heard something and understood what was happening. It was like someone was challenging. But it wasn''t the important thing. Because he finally remembered why he felt that voice familiar, because he already knew that person. She is Aliya Hance. You can say she was the first friend he made before the college exam. He thought that she did note to the Royal Academy because she cannot see her in his ssroom. Beside her, David and Niya are also seated.


    All three of them looked at the student in front of them. It was a boy who had spiky ck hair and you can also see a tattoo on his neck. So the boy was challenging Aliya for a fight. She didn''t back down after hearing his challenge. She immediately epted the challenge. She was feeling irritated by this boy because he always likes to show off his wealth. Even though she wasn''t as beautiful as Alexa or Jeni, or Elena, her age was still beautiful. Because of this, this boy always tries to impress her. But Aliya always rejected his proposal and because of this, he challenged her today. You wanted to humiliate her in front of everyone so that she knows her ce.


    Aliya already guessed that this boy wanted to humiliate her after defeating her in a fight. But she won''t back down from a fight. She wasn''t a coward. But this time she was worried about one thing because she previously heard that this boy always likes to use tricks against the enemy to win the match. She had confidence in her strength, but if this boy used any tricks while fighting, then she could lose. Because of this, she was worried.


    "I don''t have any problem with the challenge, but the thing was that I hear you always like to cheat or you streak against your enemy to win. So I wanted a fair fight." She quickly told the boy. Hearing that, the boy started tough.


    "Don''t worry about winning against you. I did not need to use any tricks or cheat," he said in an arrogant manner.


    But you can see that Aliya was still worried that he would use some kind of cheat or tricks against her. See about to say something when suddenly she hears a voice.


    "Don''t worry about the fight. I will be the referee so the fight will be fair and nobody will be able to cheat," not only Aliya but all the students present there suddenly hear that voice. This voice came from behind, so everyone turned around to see who that person was. But when everyone turned around, they were shocked because it was Sam Kainer standing there. He was the one who said that. Sam once again begins to advance. After seeing that, all the students make a way for him. Sam came in front of Aliya and that boy. After that, he once again told them,


    "Don''t worry, I will be the referee so you do not need to worry about cheating or some kind of thing like that," Sam said to Aliya with a smile. Aliya, for a moment, wasn''t able to believe but then after seeing his smile, she also smiled. She nodded at him, then looked toward the boy who was watching Sam with a scared expression.


    "When will we fight? Today or tomorrow?" She asked the boy. The boy, who was looking at Sam with a scared expression, suddenly came back to his senses.


    "Hmph¡­ I did not want to take advantage of you so we will fight tomorrow at 1:00 p.m." after seeing that, he instantly left that ce. This time, he didn''t have the courage to be arrogant in front of Sam. So he and his friend quickly left that ce. Not only them but all the other students also clear the area.


    Only at this time, Aliya was looking at Sam. Not only her, but David and Niya were also looking at him. After seeing their surprised expression, Sam justugh and said,<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Haha, why are you so shocked? It looks like you see a ghost in front of you," Sam asks them.


    Only this time, those three came back to their senses. At this time David side to him that,


    "Well, we never thought you woulde here. Because of this, we were so surprised," he said with a surprised expression.


    " Haha, why do you think that? " Hearing his answer, Sam asks him once again with an amused expression. He did not think that because of this reason, they were surprised.


    "Well, I thought you did not join the Royal Academy and because of this, I also did not search for you guys. Also, I don''t have your contact information and because of this, I am unable to contact you. It was good to see you again Aliya," at this time Sam gave his reason and then set thest word to Aliya. She also smiled after hearing him.


    "Thank you. It is also good that we are finally able to meet once again, "


    After that, he sat down beside her. Kira and Dan also came toward them. At this time, Sam introduces Aliya and her friend to Kira and Dan. After that, Aliya and her friends start talking with Sam while Kira and Dan just stay there silently. Both of them really wanted to know the identity of this girl because she was talking with Sam casually. Only when Sam told them about them, they understood.


    After talking for some time, Sam got up from his seat. Well, today they won''t fight so he was nning to go back to his home but suddenly he noticed that Aliya seemed to want to talk about something but she did not have the college to tell him.


    "So what do you want to ask?" Sam suddenly asks her. Hearing his sudden question, Aliya doesn''t know if she should tell Sam to help her. But after thinking but sometimes she decided to tell him,


    " Well, I wanted to test my strength against an early D-grade warrior. So, could you fight with me?" She quickly said all of this to him and then looked downward. She thought that Sam would reject her because she only knew her for only one day. So, he didn''t have any reason to help her.


    "So, why are we still sitting here? Don''t waste any time and let''s go to the training area," since she was asking for his help, so he naturally wanted to help her.


    "But before we start our fight, one thing I want to make clear is that I did not hold back against my enemy. You should be prepared to get beaten," Sam said with a smile.


    " Don''t worry about that. I also did not want you to hold back while we fought. I wanted to improve myself so don''t hold back," she said. If you look at her face right now then you can see the determination in her eyes. Even though she knows that she will get beaten by him, she still wants to fight against him. Because fighting against a team will increase her power and understanding.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 196 196 - Fight.

    After finishing their eating, all of them were now heading toward the training area. Kira, Dan, Devid and Niya, all of them also go with them. The other students who also heard their talking earlier wanted to go with them, but then they didn''t want to anger Sam. Because of this, they didn''t go with them.


    Sometimeter, they were now in the training area. Kira and the others are also present there. All of them were now looking toward Sam and Aliya. Both of them had already brought out their weapons and were ready to fight. Well, Sam obviously will hold back against her. Sam did not attack first. He will give this chance to Aliya to attack first.


    "Began," Dan said.


    Instantly, Aliya went toward Sam and swung her sword. She knows that Sam was giving her the first chance to attack. So without holding back, she showed the sword with her full strength.


    The sword very quickly approached Sam, but he easily avoided the attack. But instantly he also swung his toward her. Aliya quickly brings her sword to counter Sam''s attack. Even though Sam was holding back, the impact behind his sword was so great that it sent Aliya backward. But Sam didn''t go toward her to attack. He was giving her time to stabilize herself.


    Aliya quickly stabilizes herself. Just with one attack, she already guessed the power of Sam. But that did not decrease her Fighting Spirit. She once again approaches Sam to attack him. Using her full speed, she quickly came in front of Sam and then swung her sword from his left side. But for Sam, she was still slow. Because of this, he easily jumps away from that ce to avoid the attack.


    Aliya didn''t stop there; she once again went toward Sam. She used her Miraj attack. This instantly created the illusion of three swordsing from Sam on his three sides. Well, this is an unexpected move from her that Sam did not expect, so he was surprised. But still, he easily avoided the attack by jumping backward. But then instantly came in front of her, using his speed, and punched her. The punch sent her backward. Well, Sam used his sword to counter her sword''s attack. To attack her, he will use his punch. Becausepared to his punch, his sword was the most dangerous.


    This time, Aliya didn''t even see him when he instantly came in front of her and attacked her. Fortunately, she wasn''t injured that much. She knows that it was because Sam held back. So she was disappointed in herself because she wasn''t even able to fight Sam. Sam was easily avoiding her attack.


    "Don''t get disappointed. You needed to believe in yourself. Your sword technique was good. It was just that you needed to increase the sword swing speed. Also, try to stay alert every time in front of your enemy. Because they will never give you a chance to predict their next attack." After seeing that she was pretty disappointed herself, Sam quickly gave her some suggestions.


    Well, hearing him, Aliya''s mood improved, and then she nodded at him. So she once again began to attack Sam, while Sam was easily dodging her attack. Like this, they started fighting andpletely forgot about their surroundings.


    Kira, Dan, Devid, and Niya were watching their fight. Well, Kira and Dan weren''t that surprised after seeing Sam was easily dodging her attack. But Devid and Niya were mostly surprised. They know that he was powerful, but they never expected that he would be this powerful. Well, it waspletely normal because both of them had never experienced Sam''s power. They previously watched his match, but that time unable to guess Sam''s power. But now, when they see him from this close distance, they can easily feel the aura that Sam was releasing was pretty intense. But none of them wanted to interfere with the match because they already knew that Sam was holding back his power so that he wouldn''t injure her.


    ________________


    At 8:00 p.m. Sam finally told him that the match was finished. Well, after fighting this much, he can already see that Aliya was pretty exhausted, and she was also likely injured. Right now, she needs to rest.


    Hearing his word, Aliya put her weapon in her storage ring. After that, she sat down on the ground to recover her lost energy. It will take her some time to recover all the energy, but then again, it was apletely good fight for her. Because she gets many pointers on her weaknesses. You can say that Sam was pretty good at observing others.


    Sam gives her an energy drink and then goes toward the other.


    "Sorry about it guys, because of us, you are alsote. Well, you can say that previously Ipletely forgot about you all while I was fighting her." Sam said to them with an apologetic tone.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "No, problem. You don''t need to worry about that because we experience a wonderful fight in front of us. After watching both of your fights, we are also pretty inspired and wanted to practice more," Dan said to him, while the other nodded.


    "Don''t worry about that. When we get free time, I can also fight against you. Also, training is good, but you also need to learn how to rest your body. You cannot just train nonstop. That will make you sleep and you won''t be able to stay alert all the time. Your body will also suffer from the side effects of continuous training. Because of this, I always prefer to rest my body after intense training," Sam said to them.


    All of them were full of Fighting Spirit but after hearing his words, they decided that today they will rest and from tomorrow, they will start practicing. Because as said to them, they also need to rest their body to adjust their new strength. Because of this, they are now nning to go back there home and then rest for the day. Sam already informed his house that he will bete today so that his mom and dad did not worry about him.


    Right now, all 6 of them are going to the cafeteria. Well, there are many students who live in the college dormitory and because of them, the cafeteria stays open. The cafeteria stays open until 11:00 p.m.


    All of them ce their order and then sit down. Well, except for the top 10 Students no one was allowed to sit on the 2nd floor. But because they were with Sam, the guard on the 2nd floor didn''t tell anything to Aliya and the others. All of them sit down. You can say that it was Sam''s first experience staying in college thiste.


    Sometimeter, their food arrived, and they began to eat. As usual, Sam needed a lot of foodpared to others. Sometimeter, when they finish their food, they go toward the cafeteria. After saying goodbye to all of them, Sam was going toward his house.


    When he came back to his house, he saw that his mom and dad were in the hall room. He greeted them and asked about Gloria. They informed him that she was still in the training room. Sam nodded and then went back to his to change clothes. After changing his clothes, hey down in his bed.


    You can say tomorrow is a big day for all the first-year students because from tomorrow all the first-year students can choose to be their personal teacher or any teacher can invite any student to be their personal student. So Sam was thinking about what he should do tomorrow, but then he didn''t know anything about all the teachers that were in the Royal Academy. Well, he can ask his sister about this but then he just forgets about that. While thinking about all of this, he didn''t realize when he fell asleep. He only wakes up hearing his sister''s call. She was in her normal clothes and calling her because the dinner was ready.


    Sam woke up and then went to the dining room with his sister. Gloria this time asked him about his training. Sam just told him about his improvement and also today''s incident. Gloria, after hearing his exnation, was pretty shocked. Because she never knows that her brother also has friends besides Tony and the others. She knows that he became friends with Tony and the others because together they face that dangerous situation. But she never expected that Sam would also have a friend except for them.


    ______________


    _________


    _______________


    The next day, Sam was going toward the Royal College when he met Tony. Sometimes Tony came to the parking area of the college and after parking his car, both of them were now going towards their ssroom together.


    When they entered the ssroom, almost every student was present in the ss. Sam and Tony went to their seats and sat down. The girls were still not there. But at this time Tony suddenly heard something while Sam was busy looking outside of the window.


    _________To be continued________

 Chapter 197 197 - Personal Teacher

    Tony was listening to the conversation that his ssmates were talking with each other. After some time hearing, he finally understood what they were talking about. So, he quickly turned toward Sam and asked,


    "Sam, is it true that you will be a referee today?" Tony asked Sam. Well, it was surprising for him because Sam doesn''t involve himself with other students if the student wasn''t his friend or if he was familiar with that student. So after hearing that Sam wanted to y the role of referee, Tony was surprised.


    Sam, who was looking outside of the window, suddenly here Tony''s question and then answer,


    "Yeah, bro. Actually, she is a friend of mine. The person who challenges her most likely will cheat in the challenge, so I will be present there as a referee so that the match can be fair," Sam told Tony.


    " Oh¡­" Tony finally understands why Sam wanted to y the role of referee. As he guessed, Sam wouldn''t be involved himself with another student if the person wasn''t his friend or he wasn''t familiar with that person.


    "So, what is your friend''s name?" Tony asked.


    "Her name is Aliya. I met her while we were in Lais City." Sam told this to Tony.


    " Ohh¡­" Tony nodded.


    At this time, the girls arrived in the ssroom. One by one, they came to their seats and sat down.


    "Good morning, guys." Sam and Tony greeted them.


    "Good morning," the girls also greeted them.


    A few secondster, teacher Nitin finally came to the ssroom. Aftering to the ssroom, he started to talk,


    "Good morning students. As you know, today is a big day for you. From today on, you will be able to select a personal teacher for you or a teacher can select you as their personal student. So, you need to select your teacher or you can also wait for the teacher to invite you to be their personal student. Now, I am giving you the list of the teachers." After saying that, teacher Nitin gave them a list.


    Sam, Tony, and the girls received the list. Sam looked at the list. He can see all the teachers'' names on the list. Even the principal''s name was also there. Sam was thinking about which teacher he should but then suddenly teacher Nitin suddenly said,


    "Sam and the other top 10 students have the invitation letter from the teacher. I will give you those invitation letters after the lunch break. You can select those teachers as your personal teacher." Teacher Nitin said that.


    Sam, after hearing that, became a little surprised, but then it wasn''t that unexpected that a teacher would invite him. But he just wanted to know which teacher invited him to be his/her personal student. But he will only learn that after the lunch break, so he needs to wait for that. Tony and others were surprised. They also already know that some teachers will invite them because they have confidence in their strengths.


    After saying the teacher Nitin started the ss.


    ________


    At 1:00 p.m.,


    Everyone was leaving the ssroom. Sam and his friends were going toward the cafeteria. He also needed to go to the battle area after eating his lunch. When Sam and his friends entered the cafeteria, he saw Aliya, Devid, and Niya were on the 1st floor and eating their food. Sam looks toward them. Aliya also seems to notice him. Sam just nodded at her and then went to the second floor with his friends.


    After cing their order when they sit down in the seat Tony suddenly asked him,


    "When will you go to the battle area?"


    " Well, after finishing my lunch," Sam answered him.


    The girls seem to surprise after hearing this, so they suddenly asked him,


    " Sam, why are you going to a battle area? Did someone challenge you to a fight?" Jeni asked him.


    " No, he will be the referee," at this time Tony answered the question. Sam just nodded.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Hearing the answer, all the girls be surprised. Really, they didn''t expect this. They looked at each other then once again looked toward Sam and asked him,


    " Who is fighting that you wanted to referee in that fight? Is your sister fighting? But I don''t think you need to be the referee in that match. Then who is fighting?" Kenny and Tina suddenly asked him.


    Sam shook his head, then answer him,


    " No¡­ No, Sister wasn''t fighting. One of my friends was fighting. The boy she is fighting against will cheat on that fight. So, I will be the referee in that fight. So that the boy didn''t cheat in that fight." Sam answered them.


    " Ohh¡­" all the girls nodded, then again they be surprised because Sam never told them that he has friends except for them. Elena was the most surprised. Because in the Base school, Sam didn''t have any friends. Because of this, she was surprised.


    "Haha¡­ No, they weren''t my school friends. I met them before the college entrance exam. " Sam noticed their confused faces. Because of this, he quickly told them. Well, when they previously talked about their school life, Sam told them that he didn''t have any friends at his school. All of them nodded after hearing him. At this time, their food had already arrived at their table.


    __________


    Sometimeter, around 1:20 p.m. they left the cafeteria. All of them were going toward the battle area. When they reached the battle area, they saw most of the first-year students present there. But they didn''t see the second-year or third-year students. Well, they weren''t that interested in this fight. All of them were now busy preparing for the annual college interpetition.


    Sam directly went toward the battle ring while Tony and the others went toward the sitting area.


    Aliya and the boy were present in the battle ring. They seem to be waiting for him. Previously, he got to know this person''s name. He is Temon Fand.


    Aftering to the battle ring, Sam nodded at Aliya, who was looking at him. Aliya smiled at him. After that, he looked toward the Temon. Don''t know why, but when Sam looked at him, he noticed that Temon was quite nervous.


    '' Is he nervous because he won''t be able to cheat?'' Sam thought in his mind. Then said,


    " Both of you are ready?"


    Aliya and Temon nodded, hearing him.


    "Then, start the fight," Sam said and then quickly left the ring.


    Instantly, Temon started approaching Aliya. Aliya wasn''t slow. She quickly also went toward him. Aftering in front of him, Aliya swung her sword toward Temon. Both of them were swordsmen. Temon also swung his sword toward Aliya. Both of the swords shed. For some second, both of them stayed like that, but then Temon sent backward. Aliya didn''t want to give him the chance to stabilize himself. So she quickly went after him. She quickly used her Mirage sh. One Aliya bes three Aliya. All three of them attack Temon together. Temon seems to be unable to find the real Aliya. Because of this, he was unable to defend himself, and was hit by her sword. Well, both of them were wearing their armor, so he didn''t get wounded by the sword sh. But he went backward once again.


    Once again, she appeared in front of him and attacked him. This time, Temon quickly rolled down to the opposite side to dodge the attack. Because of this, the sword did not hit him, but Aliya quickly once again swung her sword toward him. But before her sword hit him, a light suddenly began to glow that instantly blocked Aliya''s eyesight.


    Well, Temon was using a light device to block her eyesight. As you can guess, this was because in sword fights, you can only use swords. Other than the sword, you cannot use any other device in the fight. Well, if you can cast spells, that will be legal, but if you suddenly used a device that could harm the opponent, this is illegal. Well, this light device won''t be able to harm her, but this will block her eyesight and he can use that chance to harm her.


    Instantly, Sam appears on the battle ring.


    "Stop the fight," he suddenly told them. At this, Aliya tried to block the light while Temon was about to attack her. But he suddenly froze in his spot. Because instantly he started to feel an intense pressure that hit him.


    Sam quickly came in front of him, and then quickly grabbed the device. It was a box-like thing that was attached to his armor. But some easily grabbed that device and wasted no time in breaking it. If you see Sam''s face at this time, you can see that he was very angry.


    ________


    In the audience area,


    "It seems that person really angered Sam. This was my first time seeing him this much angry," Jeni suddenly said to the others. The other nodded, hearing her. Well, this was their first time to see Sam''s angry face.


    ____________To be continued_________

 Chapter 198 198 - Invitation Letter

    "Temon, it seems you see me as a joke," Sam said to Temon. He already told them not to cheat in the fight, but this Temon, even after his warning, decided to use a device that could block the opponent''s eyesight. It Was uneptable.


    Aliya, who was now able to see, came beside Sam and looked toward Temon, who was on the ground panting heavily. Sam solely releases the pressure on him. Because of this, the other is unable to feel the pressure.


    Temon, who was on the ground and panting, only now realized how much he was in. He wasn''t even able to breathe under this intense pressure. Previously, he thought, even if he used this on Sam will just give him a warning, but he never thought he would be in a situation like this.


    "I¡­ I am sorry. Please forgive me," in this situation, he begged Sam to forgive him.


    "Sam, forgive him." At this time, Aliya also told him to forgive him.


    "Sigh, be happy that you get a second chance, or right now you will be in hospital," Sam said to him and stopped releasing his pressure.


    "Cough¡­ cough." Temon began to cough when Sam released him. This was his first time in a situation like this. Well, because in his previous fights, he never faced a situation like this where the referee will stop him from cheating. In all of his previous fights, he told one of his followers to be the referee or any other ssmate to be the referee, but the thing was that they did not have the courage to stop him from cheating. But Sam was different. He was this year''s number one student and Saint Markus also seems to like him. So even though his family was powerful, he won''t be able to harm Sam.


    "The match will start again 2 minutester," after saying that Sam left the battle ring. Aliya also went to a corner and sat down on the ground. She wanted to recover her lost energy. She started to meditate to recover her lost energy.


    2 of the followers of Temon quickly came to the battle ring and helped him sit down. They also give him a health potion and a spiritual energy recovery potion.


    Sam was outside of the battle ring and looking toward Temon and his followers. If this time they decide to cheat once again, then he will cancel the match and send that cheater to the hospital.


    ___________


    In the audience area, all the students were very surprised after seeing Sam''s anger. Because Sam did not release his pressure on them, they are unable to tell what kind of situation Temon faced earlier, but they can feel that it wasn''t that good. They also know that if Temon wanted to cheat once again, then he needed to go to the hospital.


    "Haha, I never thought he could be this angry," Tony said with a smile.


    " Well, it is natural for him to be angry. Aliya was his friend and someone fought with her while cheating." Jeni said.


    " Hmm¡­ I just hope that person didn''t cheat again." Tony said once again with a smile.


    ___________


    2 minutester,


    Both Aliya and Temon once again face each other. Aliya has a serious expression this time. She will try to finish the match as quickly as she can.


    You can see Temon also has serious expressions at this time. He knows this time he won''t be able to cheat, so he was thinking about how he should fight. He knows that he was weakpared to Aliya.


    "Began," Sam once again told him to start the fight.


    Instantly, Sam left the battle ring. Aliya quickly approached Temon. Once again, three Aliya appear and attack Temon. This time, from the start, she wanted to use her full strength to finish the fight. Temon was very alert this time, but in the end, he was unable to detect which was the real Alya. He wanted to back away from that to avoid the sword. But in the end, he still got hit by Aliya''s sword. That instantly sent him backward. Aliya, not giving the chance to counterattack and quickly once again approaches. She quickly appeared in front of him and attacked him once again. Temon tried to defend himself, but he was unable to defend himself from her attack. This time, he was very close to the end of the battle ring, and after getting hit by Aliya''s sword, he was outside of the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Temon wasying down on the ground outside of the battle ring while coughing blood. This time he was really injured by her sword.


    ______


    In the audience area, instantly David and Niya got up from their seats and started to cheer for Aliya. With this, everyone can tell who is stronger and who is the loser. Aliya can easily defeat him while Temon wasn''t even able to defend himself from her attack. One by one, every student started to p for Aliya.


    __________


    At this time, Sam once again appeared in the battle ring and then announced the winner''s name. He already told Temon''s friends to bring him to the medical unit. Well, he wasn''t injured that much, he just had light injuries.


    Sam and Aliya high-five and then leave the battle ring. Those students who were in the audience areas started to leave the battle area one by one. Sam meets with Tony and the others outside of the battle area. Tony, Alexa, and others came toward Aliya and said congrattions to her. Aliya seems to be happy after getting their congrattions. Niya came to her and hugged her whole Sam and the others smiled at them.


    "Well, guys, let''s go back to our ssroom. Don''t forget that we also needed to select our personal teacher. We just now have only 15 days before the annual college interpetition." Sam said to them. Everyone nodded, hearing him.


    At this, Aliya looked at them and said,


    " I know that right now I wasn''t your opponent, but don''t underestimate me in the fight. I will use my full strength to defeat you, so be ready for that," Aliya said to them. Sam and the others smiled after hearing him and then Kenny said to her,


    " Don''t worry, we''ll also use our full strain to fight our opponent."


    After that, all of them went to their ssroom. Sam and other top 10 candidates will get the invitation letter from the teacher of the Royal Academy today. So you can say that they were very excited about that. Fortunately, Aliya was able to quickly finish the fight, and because of this, they weren''t thatte in the ssroom. Even if they werete, teacher Nitin wanted to say anything to them because they were watching a fight.


    When they came to the ssroom, they already saw that teacher Nitin was in the ssroom. After greeting him, they went back to their seats and sat down. Not only Sam and his friend, but many other students were alsoing to the ssroom one by one. All of them wereing back from the battle area.


    Sometimeter when all the student was present in the ssroom, teacher Nitin started to talk,


    "As I said earlier, from today, you can select your own personal teacher and I already give you the list of our teachers'' names who are present at the Royal Academy. So if you did not get any invitation letter, you can go toward the staff room to register your name under the teacher who you want to take as your personal teacher. After you register your name, the teacher will look at your profile at your achievement, then they will decide if they want to take you as their personal student or not."


    " Now please, all the top 10 candidates from the first year. Pleasee toward me and I will give you the invitation letter that the teachers send you," teacher Nitin said to Sam and the others. Instantly Sam and all the other top 10 candidates from the first year get up from their seats and approach teacher Nitin.


    Now they were standing, and in front of them was teacher Nitin. One by one, teacher Nitin started to give them the invitation letter. Every one of them received many letters that were from the teacher of the Royal Academy, except Sam. He only received one letter, which made him very confused. Why did he only receive one letter?


    Teacher Nitin seems to read his mind and not that he was thinking about this question. He quickly answers him,


    "Well, the person who gave the invitation letter was special. Because of this, the other teacher did not give you their invitation letter." Teacher Nitin said to him. Sam became very confused after receiving the letter. Because he doesn''t know who the person that sent him this invitation letter was and who could also prevent those other teachers from sending him their invitation letter.


    _________To be continued__________

 Chapter 199 199 - Alena Mayer

    Sam sat down in his seat and then opened the invitation letter. He was very curious to know the name of the person who sent him the invitation letter. He opened the letter and started to read the letter.


    "Dear Sam, I would like you to be my personal student¡­ ¡­


    From your vice principal, Alena Mayer. "


    He finished reading the letter, and he was quite surprised to receive this letter from Alena. She was his sister''s teacher and now she has invited him to be her personal student. Also, previously he didn''t see her name on the list that the teacher Nitin gave to him. Because of this, he was quite surprised. But then he thought for some time and decided to ept it. Well, the reason was he knows that Alena was most proficient at Light control but she was good with the sword. So, it won''t be a problem for him to learn from her. He doesn''t know if she knows how to use a bow, because previously on the inte he didn''t find anything like that. He quickly brings out his mobile and searches in the warriorwork.


    After searching for some time, he finally found that there were some people who revealed the fact that she also knows how to use a bow. It was just that she never used weapons like swords and bows that frequently. He won''t have any problem, so he decided to ept that. It also saves him from going to a teacher who has many personal students. He didn''t want to go to arge group. Most probably Gloria was her first student, so it was good for him.


    ___________


    While Sam was busy looking at his invitation letter, Tony and the other top 10 students were also looking at the letters they got. Many teachers invited them to be their personal students. Alexa received the most letters from the teachers. All of them were reading their letters. Those students who didn''t receive the invitation letter were curiously looking at Sam and the others. They also wanted to know the name of the teachers that sent the invitation letters. They also needed to register their name under the teacher''s name, whose personal student they wanted to be.


    Tony and the others read all the letters. They needed to decide which teacher would be best for them. Also, they didn''t know the details about all the teachers, so they also looked at the warriorwork to search for the details of their teachers. With this, they get to know their teacher''s power.


    __________


    At this time, teacher Nitin said to all the students who didn''t receive the invitation letter,


    "Well, there are many students who got the invitation letter from teachers. You will receive the invitation letter tonight. Those students who didn''t receive the invitation letter can register their names under their favorite teachers from tomorrow. Also, those students who will receive the invitation letter tonight or the students who already got the invitation letter can already choose your teacher today or tomorrow." Teacher Nitin said that while looking at all the students. Previously, he can see that many students were quite depressed that they didn''t receive the invitation letter, so he said this to them.


    "Ok, sir," all the students responded to him. Nitin nodded and then left the ssroom. Well, he knows that all the students were now very interested in searching for all the details about all the teachers whose name was on the list that he gave to them.


    __________


    Sam already decided what to do. So he kept that invitation letter in his inventory, then turned his head toward his friends. He can see that they were busy looking at the letter. So, he silently stayed there and looked at the scenery outside of the window.


    Sometimeter,


    Tony and the others had already finished reading the letters. They were also already finished looking at the details of those teachers who sent them the letters. Right now, they just need to decide which teacher they should choose.


    "Finish deciding which teacher you want to choose?" Sam asked Tony when he saw that Tony put down all the letters in his storage ring.


    " No, bro. 10 teachers send the invitation letters. I am not sure which one to choose. I need to think about it. " Tony said to Sam with a sigh. Well, it was quite a headache to choose a teacher from those 10 teachers. Well, not only him, but the others also released a deep sigh. They also need to choose a teacher.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "We don''t worry about it. Take your time and then choose your favorite teacher that could help you to be stronger," Sam said to him. He wanted to cheer up his friends.


    "Yea, sigh. Well, let''s go to the cafeteria. I need to drink some cold drinks to clear my mind." Tony said to him. Sam nodded at him. Both of them got up from their seats.


    "Where are you going, guys?" Jeni asked them.


    " Going toward the cafeteria. I need some refreshments," Tony said to her.


    " Let''s go together," Jeni and the others also got up from their seats and all of them left the ssroom. They were going to the cafeteria while talking about the invitation letter. Tony was telling Sam about the teacher''s name that gave him the invitation letter. Sam was silently listening to him. Well, he wasn''t familiar with most of these teachers. So he doesn''t know anything about them and cannot give him any suggestions. Tony needed to choose his teacher on his own. Sam can''t help him with that.


    "Sam, who sent you the invitation letter?" Jeni suddenly asked him. Well, she was very curious to know the name of the teacher who sent Sam the invitation letter. Not only her, but the others were also very curious to know the name of the teacher. Previously, teacher Nitin told him that it was a special letter and because of this, the other teacher did not send Sam their invitation letter. With this, you can give that the person who sent Sam the invitation letter was a powerful person and also a respected person.


    "I think you know her. She is teacher Alena. She is my big sister''s personal teacher." Sam told them the name. This instantly makes all of them very surprised.


    " You mean our vice principal?" Jeni asked in a surprised tone.


    " Yea," Sam answered them.


    Tony and the others were very surprised because previously they also wanted to be the personal student of their Vice Principal. Their vice principal, Alena, was also a genius. She was very close to bing an S-grade warrior. She also was the granddaughter of Saint Mayer. He was the founder of their college. She also had the chance to be the principal of their college, but then she refused to be the principal because she won''t be able to give her full time in the college. Because of this, Tony and the others were very surprised. But then again, she was Gloria''s teacher. So she naturally had no Sam, and it wasn''t surprising that she wanted Sam to be her personal student.


    Previously, when they were in the dark forest, Jeni already noticed that Alena was caring for Sam. So it was natural.


    "Haha, I never expected this. I also wanted to be the student of our Vice Principal, but then I did not see her name on the list that the teacher Nitin gave to us. Well, 2 years ago our Vice Principal also said that she won''t be taking any personal students after epting Sister Gloria." Tony said to Sam. The others also nodded. Sam, Kira, Kenny, Tina, Saara, and Dan didn''t know that much about Alena. But Jeni, Elena, Alexa, and Tony know about the achievement that Alena achieved. Even though belong to a saint''s family, she did not rely on her family to be strong. She is also very close to bing an S-grade. Because of this, everyone respected her.


    _____________


    While they were talking, they already reached the cafeteria and went toward the second floor. Because this wasn''t lunchtime, they did not see that many students in the cafeteria. After giving their orders, they sit down. After eating something, they will go to the training area. Because they also wanted to train themselves.


    "Sam, could you fight with me? Actually, I wanted to know how much strength I have recently gotten these days. Aftering back from the Dungeon I absorbed many crystals, but then I did not have any opponents to fight against." Suddenly Tony said this to Sam. Well, he wanted topete against Sam so that he could know how strong he gets these days. Sam was the most ideal opponent that he could have.


    "Sam, I also wanted to fight." Instantly Jeni, Alexa, and others also said to Sam that they also wanted to fight. All of them wanted to fight for the same reason. Sam was the most ideal opponent that they could have.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 200 200 - Vs Kenny, Dan, Kira, And Tina

    After finishing their food, they came to the battle area. Well, they just simplypare their strength with Sam so you cannot say it was a challenge. No one was present in the battle area except them.


    "Everyone will fight against Sam one by one because if we fight against him at the same time, then it would be cheating. And also Sam, please don''t use your concealment technique. If you use that technique, then you can easily win the fight, even if we fight you at the same time." Alexa said this to Sam. Sam just smiled and nodded at her. Well, she didn''t need to tell him that, because he won''t use his stealth technique.


    Keny will fight against Sam first. So now, in the battle ring, only Sam and Kenny were present while the others were outside of the battle ring.


    "Began," Tony suddenly said to them.


    Instantly, Kenny begins to approach Sam. She was approaching him very quickly while holding her sword. Sam still did not bring out his weapon because this time he will just use his fist to fight against her. He was already wearing his gloves. With this, you can guess that he will use his second move of energy mode to fight against her. Well, he knows that it will be overkill, but this will be a challenge for him. He also wanted to improve in his second move of energy mode.


    Tony and the others were surprised after seeing this. Previously, they fight against him anytime, but never Sam used his fist to fight with them. Because of this, they are very surprised. All of them looked at him curiously. They also wanted to know how he would fight using only his fist. Is Sam using his spirit technique while using any fist technique? Is he able to connect his spiritual energy with his fist technique? They don''t know that, but they know that this fight will be very interesting.


    Kenny also seems to be surprised after seeing Sam still did not bring out his sword, but then again, while she looked at his fist, she felt danger. Because of this, she was very careful while approaching him. A few secondster, she was already in front of him, instantly attacking Sam with a confused ray and then sewing her sword at him.


    As you can guess, Sam already coated his gloves with spiritual energy. Even though she used the confusion against him. Sam is still able to defend himself. He quickly punched her sword that wasing toward him. His fist and her sword shed against each other, but then she sent backward. The power behind the punch was very powerful. Even when he set the limit of his training robot to intermediate D-grade, he can easily send them flying. But he still was not able to damage them.


    Sam did not go after her. Kenny once again went toward Sam. This time she was using her most powerful sword technique - Zuver sword style. But Sam still did not panic. He once again punched her. She already predicted his attack, so she tried to avoid his attack, but in the end, she got sent back. This time, she was outside of the fight. She also coughs some blood. Elena quickly came toward her to check her condition. Sam also quickly left the battle ring and came toward her to check her condition.


    "Don''t worry. I am alright." Kenny quickly assured them that she was alright, and that they didn''t need to worry.


    "I am sorry, Kenny, that I didn''t hold back." Sam suddenly said to her. Well, he also did not think that this could have injured her. Well, this time he used 2% spiritual energy while previously he was using 1% spiritual energy.


    "Don''t worry about it. If you held back your strength to fight against me, then that could be disappointing. I am happy that you didn''t hold back." Kenny said to him. Elena was using her light control to heal her. Well, she wasn''t that injured. Elena easily healed her. Well, this time she did not get the chance to use the light control technique fully.


    After that, Sam once again came back to the battle ring. This time, Dan came to the battle ring. Tony and the others went back to their seats. They finally get to see that Sam''s punches were also powerful, like his sword technique. This instantly lit up fighting will in them. Sam can easily use a sword, fist, spell, and bow. He not only could use them, but he also was a master at using them.


    ___________


    While Tony and the others were very eager to fight against Sam using their full power, Sam and Dan were looking at each other. Dan already brought out his bow. Sam also brings out his bow. They will fight against each other using their bows. But this time, Sam was not using his spirit arrow. He was using his normal arrows.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Begain," Tony gave them the signal to start the fight.


    Instantly, both of them started to shoot arrows against each other using their rapid shoot technique. Arrows after arrows were shing against each other. But if you look at them clearly, you can easily see that Sam''s arrows were still intact, but the arrows from Dan were breaking apart while shing against Sam''s arrows. Sam was not using his spirit arrow, but the power behind his normal arrow was greater than Dan''s.


    While shooting arrows, Sam suddenly uses his multiple shooting techniques and the rapid shooting technique together. Instantly, the number of Arrow increased that went toward Dan. Then he noticed that the number of Arrow was greater than the previous. You also know that he won''t be able to defend himself if he doesn''t avoid it. He quickly jumped away from his ce. But Sam, using his full speed, was already in front of him and punched him. That instantly sent Dan flying outside of the ring.


    ____________


    Dan went back to the audience area while drinking the health portion. Kira got up from her seat and went toward the battle ring. Even though she knows that she won''t be able topete against Sam even if she used her full strength. But that does not mean that she will give up and run away from the fight. Also, this wasn''t a real fight. You can say that it was a practice fight against Sam to know their own strength and weakness.


    A few second letter, she was already in the battle ring and looking toward Sam.


    "Begain," once again Tony gave them the signal to start the fight.


    Kira mostly uses quick attacks to fight against her enemy. This time she also used his speed to instantly appear in front of Sam and then quickly swing her sword towards him. But she was quite slow in front of Sam. Sam easily dodges the attack and instantly punches her. Kira was not able to react in time and got hit by Sam''s punch. This also sent her backward, but she was still in the battle ring and wasn''t sent outside of the battle ring. Sam did not use this chance to attack and give her the chance to stabilize herself.


    It took her some time to stabilize herself. Then she looked at him. She once again used her speed to instantly appear in front of him and swing her sword toward him. But this time, instantly, in one second, she swung her sword 4 times. This was an attack like the fast cut or Alexa''s quick attack. At this time, Sam felt some dangering from the swing. So he instantly reacted. He also punched the sword. That instantly creates a big impact and both of them send it back. But Sam only backed away 5 steps while Kira was outside of the ring. She instantly started to cough blood. Elena once again came toward her and started to use the healing ray.


    ________


    Sometimeter, Sam was on the battle ring while opposite him was Tina. Instantly, Tony gives them the signal to fight. This time Tina did not trust Sam because she wanted to take her time to analyze Sam and attacked him. Seriously, she already fights against him, so she already knows that she cannot rush toward him mindlessly.


    After some time thinking, she finally started to go toward Sam. But this time, she was not going straight toward him. She was going in a zigzag way. The n is to attack Sam in this way. But Sam was faster than her. He already waited for her toe in front of him. He waited for her, and when she was already ready to attack him, Sam instantly reacted. Using the zigzag way, she came behind Sam to attack him, but Sam instantly turned around and punched her.


    Tina wasn''t able to react in time and got hit by his punch. This time, his punch sent her outside of the battle ring. But she was alrightpared to Kira and Kenny.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 201 201 - Tony And Alexa

    Tina drank a health potion while she went back to the audience area to sit down. At this time, Sam was slightly exhausted because of these continuous training fights. Even though he was powerful, because he used his energy mode continuously, he was slightly exhausted.


    Sam signals them to stop for some time because he will need to recover his full energy. Obviously, so one said anything to him because they knew even though he was, he won''t be able to fight with them nonstop. He also needs to rest like most of them.


    Sam also went toward Tony and the others to rest. At this time, Kenny, Dan, Kira, and Tina were discussing their own experience and what they were able to learn about themselves while fighting Sam. Tony and the others were telling them about their mistake. Sam just silently listened to all of that while he was using his recovery technique.


    _______


    Sometimeter, he once again came back to the battle ring. Opposite him was Tony. Both of them looked at each other seriously. No one will hold back in this fight. Sam this time brings out his sword. Not his yer. Well, he won''t be using the energy mode. As you can guess, he was going to use the spirit technique.


    Both of them instantly vanished from their spot and instantly both of their swords shed against each other. You can see the blue light that wasing out from Sam''s sword.Tony was using his full strength to hold on to Sam''s sword. He knows that the behind the sword will increase when someone uses spiritual energy. He was still trying to fight against that force using his physical power. Well, like Sam''s previous problem, he was also able to connect his spiritual energy with his sword technique, but he was unable to release that energy from his sword. Because of this, he previously told Sam to use the spirit technique. He was hoping that while fighting Sam, He could get some inspiration or something like this that could help him to bring out his spiritual energy from his sword.


    Sam naturally agreed with him and because of this, he was using the spirit technique. Previously, both Tony and Alexa talked about the process of releasing spiritual energy. But at this time, Sam was unable to help them. Because when he releases his spiritual energy through his sword, he doesn''t do anything different or feel anything different. He used the same process as them and felt the same as them. But one thing was that he also felt something that he cannot describe with words. That could be the reason, but how could he describe this to them? So, he just told them while connecting their spiritual energy with their sword technique, except the normal feeling if they felt something different in their heart, only then they would be able to release the spiritual energy.


    So right now Tony was trying to find that feeling in his heart. Even after holding himself against sams6sword for some time, he still sent flying backward. But he was able to stabilize himself. With this, both he and Sam continuously swing their sword against each other. All of these shes created a huge impact that sent Tony backward all the time. But he was still in the ring.


    He once again connected his spiritual energy with his sword technique and attacked Sam, but like previously, he wasn''t able to bring out the spiritual energy from his sword because of the impact he was sending outside of the battle ring.


    Instantly, Elena appears in front of him and gives him the health potion. Tony, who was bleeding from his body, instantly gulped down the potion. This stops the bleeding. At this time, Elena uses her healing ray to heal him. It only takes Tony 5 minutes to recover from the injuries that he received from Sam''s sword. But if you see his face right now, then you will see a happy smile. He should be depressed that he wasn''t able to bring out the spiritual energy, but instead of the depression, he is now smiling brightly. Jeni and the others were also confused about his smile, so Jeni asked him,


    "Why are you smiling at Tony after getting injured by Sam? Are you a masochist?" Jeni asked him in a joking manner. Well, he is ok now, so she can joke with him. Instantly, everyone started tough at him.


    Instantly, Balck''s line appears on Tony''s face. Instantly, his happy mood turns into an angry mood. He said in an angry tone.


    "What the hell are you saying, Jeni? When did I be a masochist?"<novelnext></novelnext>


    Once again, everyone began tough. It took them some time to calm down. Only ten Alexa asked him why he was smiling. Only at this Tony told them the reason.


    " Previously, in myst attack, when my sword shed with Sam''s sword, I already knew that I wouldn''t be able to hold back. But still, I fully focused on the connection between the spiritual energy and the sword technique, at that time. But I don''t know why both of our swords shed. I felt a feeling in my heart. I don''t know how to describe that, but it was like something wanted toe out of my heart. I don''t know if this was the feeling that Sam was talking about, but if this was the feeling, then it won''t take me that long to bring out the spiritual energy using my sword." Tony exins to them the reason behind his smile.


    Instantly, all of them except Sam be very surprised. Except for Kira, Dan, and Saara, all of them practiced the spirit technique. But like Sam, they are also unable to release the spiritual energy from their sword. Tony and Alexa previously asked Sam about the process, then both of them told others about this. So, they already know about it. So when they hear that Tony finally felt something in his heart while using the spirit technique, they were very surprised. So, most likely, like Sam, Tony also could release the spiritual energy from his sword. They were very surprised and happy for him. But no one was jealous 9f him. Because he achieved that with his own hard work. And they also have the confidence to achieve that, so they weren''t jealous of Tony or Sam.


    "Sam, let go." Suddenly Alexa turned and looked at what Sam said seriously. Sam can notice the serious expression she has right now. Most likely, she was very eager to fight Sam. She was now full of fighting will.


    Sam just smiled at her and then both of them went toward the battle ring. Like Tony, she also wanted to feel that feeling. Because of this, she did not waste any more time. The moment they got the signal to fight, Alexa quickly connected her spiritual energy with her sword technique. Sam also wasn''t slow. Both of them quickly approach each other and then quickly swing their swords. A huge impact appeared. The power of this impact was greater than the previous impact. But one thing was that none of them moved from their ce.


    Right now, if you look at Alexa, you can see that blood wasing out of her mouth, but she was still able to hold on against Sam. Sam was using 1% spiritual energy all this time. Both of them wanted to learn something, but if he used his full power, then they wouldn''t be able to learn anything and they would get injured. So, he was using his 1% spiritual energy.


    But Alexa didn''t back down. She tried to kick him, but Sam quickly jumped. So, she wasn''t able to injure him. But instantly she appeared in front of him and attacked him. Sam was still in mid-air, so unable to dodge the attack. He quickly brought the sword in front of him to defend himself with this sword. Alexa''s attack hit him. But nothing major happened. He just send 5 steps backward. But he quickly stabilizes himself. At times Alexa once again came behind him and she was ready to attack. But Sam already predicted that. He quickly turned around and swung his sword while using the fast cut. She was using her quick attack to attack him, so he also used his fast cut to attack her.


    In just one, he was able to react and also able to attack her. With this, you can easily guess how fast He was. This time, Alena didn''t see the attack, she wasn''t able to avoid the attack. But because of her sharp instinct, she was able to react, but still, it was toote to dodge. But she doesn''t give up. She uses her full strength to dodge and she able to dodge but It still injured her. Her left hand got injured by his sword.But She was still in the condition to fight.


    Alexa was bleeding at this times. She brought out a health


    portion and gulped it down. This will increase her recovery power.


    ______To be continued_____

 Chapter 202 202 - Genius Alexa

    It will take her some time to recover from her injuries. At this time, Sam did not attack her. He also brought out a spiritual energy recovery potion and gulped it down. It took him 5 minutes to recover his 80% spiritual energy.


    Sometimeter, Alexa once again approaches Sam. She wants to again connect her spiritual energy with her sword technique. Both his and Alexa''s swords shed against each other. Because Alex''s sword was in A-grade, her sword still didn''t get broken after getting hit by Sam''s sword.


    Tony and others from the audience area so that this time Alexa once again swung her sword towards them while he also did the same. As the previous saw, Sam''s sword started to glow in blue color while it shed with Alexa''s sword. At this time, everyone thought that Alexa will once again get sent backward. But something unexpected happened.


    "Ahhh¡­ " Alexa begins to shout and if you focus on her sword at this time, then you can see a blue lighting out of her sword. Well, as you can guess, she finally felt the same feeling as Tony. This time she decided to give her all in this attack. The light in her sword started to get brighter and brighter. Previously Tony and the others did not notice that, but when the blue light got brighter and brighter, they finally noticed and got shocked by this. Who would ever think that she will be able to release the spiritual energy this easily? But Sam was not that surprised because he expected that. Even after using 1% of his spiritual energy, Alexa was able to hold her ground for some time, so it was natural that she could easily release her spiritual energy. If it wasn''t for him, then Alexa will be the number one student this year.


    Suddenly Sam started to feel the power of her attack, so he also instantly increased the power from 1% to 5%. Alexa still wasn''t able to control the spiritual energy in her sword and because of this, minutester she started to feel that she was losing her spiritual energy. Sometimeter, when she was very low on his spiritual energy, Sam got the upper hand and she got sent outside of the battle ring. Elena was already present outside of the battle ring and instantly went word Alexa and started to use her healing Ray. Previously, Alexa had already healed herself, so she did not have that much injury.


    "Nice fight Alexa. I already expected that you will be able to release the spiritual energy faster than anyone except Sam." Suddenly Jeni came toward her and hugged her. She was happy that Alexa was finally able to learn this. Seeing all of this, Sam just smiled. One thing that was good about his friend was that they were not jealous of each other. They also have confidence in their strength and they know that they will also learn this. It will take some time to learn this. If it was any other student, then they would be Very jealous of her.


    "Nice fight, Alexa." Sam also went to her and then said to her.


    ______________


    Sometimeter, they were right now going toward the cafeteria. Today, before starting the fight, they decided that Sam will only fight against those physical Warriors, and tomorrow you will fight against the spiritual Warriors. Because of this, only Tony, Alexa, and the other physical warriors only fight against him. Tomorrow Sam will fight against Jeni, Elena, and Saara.


    After the fight right now, Sam was very hungry, so they were going to eat at the cafeteria. Right now it is 5:00 p.m. There were not that many students in the cafeteria. Well, most likely many of them go back to their home or dormitory or they can also be busy with their training. Most likely, every student from every year was busy preparing for the annual inter-collegepetition.


    Aftering to the 2nd floor, they give their order and sit down. On the second floor, they also have a personal room and also have an open area. Most of the second-year and third-year students use that personal room to eat while Sam and his friend use the open area. They will just eat. Why the hell should they use the personal room to eat? It was not like they were doing something.


    Sometimeter, their food was ready. They started to eat their food. They don''t know if it was because of Sam or not, but all of their hunger levels increased and they also needed a lot of food to satisfy their hunger.


    While they were eating, Sam suddenly felt a familiar aura from the room. The auraing from his left side. He looked in that direction and saw that it was the senior Fiona and his sister. They just arrived on the second floor and were probably going to ce their orders. Previously Gloria told him that right now she and Fiona are just fighting every day. This was really good training for them. Both of them were in the same grade and fighting against each other will really improve their understanding of their power.


    Sam still did not know about the 4th-year students because he did not even see them in the cafeteria. Previously, he also asked Gloria about this. But then she informs him that every year this happens because right now, the fourth year ispleting their assignment. But when it was time for the annual college interpetition, they woulde back and participate in thepetition. Because in the 4th year all the students got invited from the guild, so many students use the annual collegepetition to show their strength to the world. So they got invited by a good guild that could provide them with good resources.


    ___________


    Gloria and Fiona already noticed Sam and waved their hand toward him. Sam also waves his hand toward them. Both of them came toward him. Tony and the others also noticed that their senior Fiona and senior Gloria wereing toward them. When Fiona and Gloria came beside Sam, they instantly greeted them. Sam also greeted them.


    Fiona smiles while Gloria just maintains her cold look.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "How was your preparation for thepetition?" Fiona asked Sam and his friends.


    "Very good. My friend and I are making progress in our training," Sam answered her. Fiona nodded. He looked toward Gloria and asked,


    " Sister, did you fight with senior Fiona today?"


    "Yes, why?" Gloria answered him and then asked him why he was asking about that.


    "Well, nothing but I can still feel your Aura that you were releasing unconsciously. This only happens after a fight. Most likely you just finished your fighting and then came to the cafeteria." Sam exins to her the reason.


    " Haha¡­ you are right, Sam. I never thought about this," Fiona suddenly started to smile, hearing his exnation. After that, both of them sat down beside him.


    _______________


    At 8:00 p.m.


    Sam was right now in his room while resting. Only some time ago, he came back from college. All this time, he was in the college training room and fighting with his robots. He wanted to improve his speed technique and the second move of energy mode. Previously, while fighting with his friends, he did not release his full power or they would get injured by that. So aftering back to the training room, Sam started to fight with the robots using his full power.


    Hina was preparing their dinner. While Victor was in the hall room and looking at the news, Gloria was in the training room. Gloria was busy in meditation at this time. Well, this helps her to calm down her mind.


    Sam, at this time, was thinking that he should go to a dungeon to kill some ghost monsters or spiritual monsters. Right now only his Spirit status is at the lowest point, so he knows that he needs to increase that and for that, he needs to go to a ghost dungeon or a spiritual dungeon. He was thinking that one dayter, he will go to a dungeon. He also did not have that much time because the annual collegepetition wasing. Tomorrow, he will approach Alena and be her personal student. After that, he will tell her that he wants to go to a spiritual dungeon.


    Sometimeter, his mom told him that the dinner was ready, so he went toward the dining room.


    _____________


    Next day,


    Sam and Gloria came back to the Royal Academy when they went toward their ssrooms. Well, Sam doesn''t need to go to the ssroom but teacher Nitin previously said that today he will tell them something about the other colleges, and because of this they were going to the ssroom. He wanted to know about the opponents from the other college that he will face. Actually, Nitin wanted to pressure all the students so that they will train.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 203 203 - Teacher Alena

    Sam and his friends were in the ssroom. Today he will fight against Jeni, Elena, and Saara. So they also prepared themselves for the fight. If you look at Tony and Alexa right now, then you noticed that both of them had confident looks on their face. Well, they were confident that they were able to catch up with Sam. At this time, all of them were waiting for teacher Nitin toe to the ssroom. After that, they also needed to go toward their personal teacher.


    Sometimeter, teacher Nitin finally came to the ssroom.


    "Good morning students. As I already told you, many students also get invitation letters from the teachers of our Royal Academy. So right now I will call all those students'' names one by one and you wille here and receive your invitation letter." After that, teacher Nitin begins to call the names of those students who also receive the invitation letter from the teachers of the Royal Academy. Except for the top 10 students, they have 60 students in the ssroom. 20 students received the invitation letter from teacher Nitin. If you look at those other students right now, then you can see they are very depressed. Well, it was natural because they also expected that they would receive the invitation letter, but they did not receive any invitation letter.


    "Congrattions to all the students who received the invitation letter. But those students who still did not receive any invitation letter don''t get depressed by it. In our college, all the teachers have a limit of sending the invitation letter. Because of this, they cannot send any invitation letters or this can break the bnce. So those students who still did not receive the invitation letter should register their names. The teacher had a limit of sending the invitation letter, but they did not have the limit to ept the students. So, as you can see, they could ept as many students as they can."


    Teacher Nitin said all of this to all the students who still did not receive the invitation letter. Well, after listening to his exnation, you could say that all those students who were depressed sometime ago, right now, were quite cheerful. Teacher Nitin looks at them and then smiles.


    "Okay, right now I want to discuss the opponents that you will face in the annual collegepetition." After saying this, Nitin begins to tell all the students about some students from the other colleges who are also able to break through to early D-grade. As you know that teacher Nitin wanted to pressure all the students so that they could practice seriously, but looking at all the students, Sam and his friend did not be serious. They are already working hard seriously, so they did not need to worry about the other.


    __________


    Sometimeter, when teacher Nitin left the ssroom, Sam and his friends also left the ssroom. At first, all of them will go toward the teacher''s building and then go toward the teacher they wanted to select as their personal teacher. All of them are now going toward the teacher''s building.


    Aftering to the teacher building, all of them separated and went in many directions. Sam was right now going toward the top floor of this teacher''s building. Previously, Gloria told him that Alena''s office was on the top floor of the teacher''s building. So right now, Sam was going toward the top floor.


    Sometimeter, he was now in front of the office room of teacher Alena. He was about to knock on the door, but suddenly he heard a voice. It was Alena who told him toe inside of the office room. Sam opened the door and then went inside. Aftering inside of the office room, he saw that Alena was sitting on the sofa while she was preparing tea. She lifted her head and told him to sit down.


    Sam went toward her and then sat in the opposite direction of her. Alena finished making the tea, she signaled Sam to pick up a teacup. Sam picked up a teacup and started to drink. Well, if you think that Sam was right now nervous, then you arepletely wrong. Sam was very rxed right now. She was not unfamiliar to him, so he wasn''t that nervous.


    "So, did you decide what to do?" Alena suddenly asked him this question after finishing her tea.


    "Yes. I decided to join," Sam directly told her his opinion. Well, he likes to talk directly.


    Instantly, hearing his world, you can see a little smile on Alena''s face. She was happy that Sam decided to join her, but then she quickly controlled herself and stopped smiling.


    "We will start our practice from today. So, let''s go to the training room." Alena suddenly got up and told him. She doesn''t want to waste any more time. Actually, she wanted to observe Sam and wanted to know his true power. Previously Gloria already told her about Sam''s power, so right now she wanted to feel that Power.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam just nodded, hearing her, and he also got up from the sofa. After that, both of them are going toward the training area. While they were going toward the training area, many students already noticed them and looked at them. Right now, all those students have shocked looks on their faces. Because who does not want to be a student of the Vice Principal of the Royal Academy? It was just that she already announced a year ago that student Gloria was her first student and after that, she won''t receive any other students. But right now, all of them see that Sam was with their Vice Principal. It was natural that she was already epted as her personal student. Instantly many students became jealous of him but they cannot do anything to him.


    Sam, at this time, was already aware of those stares. It was just that he was very expert at ignoring others. He just ignored all those students and their jealous looks.


    ___________


    Sometimeter, Sam was in his personal training room. Alena was standing opposite him while she was wearing the training cloth. Sam is also wearing his training clothes. Well, if you look at Sam right now, then you can see that he was seriously looking at her while maintaining a fighting position. Previously, Alena told him to fight against her and because of this, both of them were ready to fight. Well, normally Sam will attack her while she will defend against his attack.


    Sam decided to attack her with his punch. He was already wearing his gloves and already coated those gloves with his spiritual energy. Using his full speed, he instantly appears in front of Alena and punches her. But unexpectedly, Alena just easily avoided the punch and caught his fist. This instantly shocked Sam. He never thought that she would be able to catch his fist this easily. He was coating his fist with spiritual energy, so he did not think that she could catch his fist this easily.


    Alena seems to notice his shocking expression. So she just smile and told him,


    "Well, don''t be that shocked. It was not that hard to catch your fist. If you wanted that nobody could catch your fist, then you need to increase the power behind your punch and also increase the speed so that it was not visible to others. You probably recently started to use your punch technique, so you still were not very good at punching. You need to learn how to control your punch." Alena exins this to him. Sam just nodded. Well, he already deactivated the energy mode when Alena caught her hand. So she did not notice any difference in his hand.


    Sam once again starts fighting against her. At first, he was using his punch, but then he also started to use his sword, then bow, and spells. This was the first time Sam felt like he was facing a mountain.


    _____________


    3 hourster, Sam was right now panting on the ground. All this time, he was fighting Alena. If you look at him right now, then you can also see that he has many small injuries. Well, at first Alena was defending against his attack, but then she started to attack him and he was defending against her attack. At this time, he received all those injuries.


    Sam wasying down on the ground while Alena went toward the bathroom. Sometimeter, he recovered some of his energy. He sits down on the ground and then drinks the energy drink that Alena puts beside him. After drinking the energy drink, Sam brings out the health potion. He gulped down. All the small injuries in his body got healed by the potion.


    Sam was right now thinking about the previous fight. Sam was busy thinking Alena left the bathroom and went toward him. She already changed the training clothes to her previous normal clothes.


    "For now, rest. At 5:00 p.m. came to my office room," Alena said and left the training room. Sam didn''t even get the chance to respond while she left the training room. He just sighs and gets up from the ground and goes toward the bathroom to freshen up.


    ___________To be continued_______

 Chapter 204 204 - Going Toward A Ghost Dungeon

    Around 5 p.m.


    Sam was currently going toward Alena''s office. Right now he is slightly tired because he just finished fighting Jeni, Elena, and Saara. This time, he only used his spell technique. Because of this, he was tired. Well, he didn''t have that many good spells. He cannot use mega or great fireballs in a fight. He can only use fireballs, firewalls, and fire guns, these types of spells. Because of this, he was tired. This time, none of them were fighting in closebat. They were fighting from a distance, and because of this; it took him much longer to finish the fight.


    ''Sigh,'' Sam sighs while going toward the office room. He wanted to rest for some time, but previously teacher Alena told him toe to her office at 5:00 p.m. and because of this, he did not get the chance to rest. Well, he can also tell his friend not to fight today, but he already promises them to fight and he cannot break his promise. His friends told him that they were also already choosing their personal teacher. The teacher informed them that from tomorrow, they will start their training. But on the other hand, the teacher Alena started to train him today. Well,l not that he has anyints. Those other teachers did not start teaching their personal students, most likely because they were busy looking at the registration. All those teachers were not like teacher Alena. All of them are now busy looking at the registration and then also the students'' details. After doing all of these, they will decide if they want to select the student as their personal student or not.


    While thinking about all of this, Sam already came in front of the office room. He did not even have to knock on the door because he suddenly heard a voice.


    "Come in."


    Sam enters the office room. In the ssroom, he saw his sister Gloria also present there. She and Alena were talking about something when Sam entered the office room. He nodded at Gloria and then sat on the sofa. Gloria passed him a teacup.


    Sometimeter, both Gloria and Alena finished talking. Sam, all this time, just silently listening to all of this. His sister was talking about going to a dungeon. Alena thought this was the right decision, but she also needed to guide Sam. Because of this, she was now in a dilemma. But then Sam told her that she should go with her sister because that could be dangerous for her sister. He is also nning to go to a dungeon, so she does not need to worry about that because he can easily protect himself using his stealth technique. For some time, Alena stays silent and then decides to go with Gloria. She also knows that Sam can avoid danger using his concealment technique. So she decided to go with Gloria, but then before that, she told Sam to go toward the training area. Previously, when she was fighting with him, she noticed some ws in him, so she wanted to give some pointers to Sam so that he could improve himself.


    Sam did not say anything and just left the office room. He was going toward the training area. Gloria and Alena were still in the room. They probably needed some time because they were still talking about the Dungeon. They were probably deciding what dungeon they should go to. Well, this also gives Sam a chance to rest.


    Aftering to his personal training room, he changes into training clothes and then sits down in a Lotus position and uses the Energy recovery technique. This will recover his energy quickly. While he was in this position, hepletely forgot about his surroundings and because of this, when Alena came to his room, he didn''t even notice. Aftering to Sam''s training room, Alena noticed that he was busy meditating. So she went to the bathroom to change into her training clothes. But even aftering from the bathroom when she noticed that Sam was still busy meditating, she decided to wake him up.


    ________________


    Around 7:30 p.m.


    Sam has now finally left the Royal Academy and is going toward his home. All this time, he was busy with his teacher. Sam was very happy right now because all this time, teacher Alena was telling him about the ws in his sword technique. Sam was very surprised when she first told him about his mistake. But then he remembered that, like his teacher, Alena also mastered various things. So all this time she was telling him about his mistakes and then telling him how to improve that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Aftering back to the house, Sam went to his room. You can say that he was very tired right now. He just wanted to rest for now. After changing his college uniform tofortable cloth, Sam freshens up and thenys down on his bed. He did not even realize when he fell asleep.


    _________________


    Next day,


    Sam was getting ready to go to a Dungeon. Well, today he doesn''t need to go to college because yesterday teacher Alena told him that he could go to the dungeon. Because of this, Sam was now free to go to the Dungeon on his own. Well, he also informed his friend about this, but they won''t be able toe with him because from today their teacher will start teaching them. So they will be busy with their teacher and won''t be able toe with him. Well, not that it did matter to him because, as you know, Sam was a solo warrior.


    He already informed his mom and dadst night when he was eating his dinner that he will go to a dungeon today. His sister is also going to a dungeon today with teacher Alena. If he wants, he could also go with them, but that won''t be any helpful to him because they were going to a C-grade dungeon and that won''t be helpful to him because they won''t find any early D-grade monsters. Sam was going toward a ghost dungeon because he needed the spirit crystal. At the same time, he also needed to search for the limit breaker because without the limit breaker, he won''t be able to break through from early grade to intermediate D-grade. As you know, D-grade and A-grade were the most difficult grades. Here you also need many status pointspared to the other grade and also even if you wanted to break through from early grade to intermediate grade, you will face a barrier. Because of this, he needed to search for a limit breaker. Previously, he also searched at the warrior shop but did not find any limit breaker.


    So now his main n is to collect the spirit crystals and then also search for the limit breaker. He was very close to reaching the limit of the early grade. Most likely if he asked teacher Alena, then she can easily give him that, but he wanted to search for that thing on his own.


    ____________


    Around 9:00 a.m. Gloria and Sam both left the house. Gloria was going toward the Royal Academy, while Sam was driving his car to go toward the Dungeon. Previously, he thought about going to the ghost dungeon that was in the central city, but teacher Alena told him to go to the then that was in Venus City. From the central city needed to travel 130 km to reach Venus City. It probably took him much time to reach there in his car, but then he could find a lot of good loot there and because of this, he was going there. Previously, he also told teacher Alena he could feel that he was very near the limit of the early D-grade and because of this, he wanted to find the limit breaker. Hearing all of this, teacher Alena told him to go to Venus city. Like the central city, this Venus City is also very big and the White Tiger college was in Venus City.


    It took him 2 hours to reach this city. Well, he can reach this city in 1 hour but then there was a traffic jam. Because of this, it took him some time to reach this city. He directly went toward the Dungeon. This dungeon was also a ghost dungeon. Here you will find ghosts from early D-grade to peak D-grade. Also, the Boss monster was in early C-grade. Because of this, killing the Boss monster was very difficult in this dungeon.


    After parking his car in the parking area, Sam went toward the guide of this dungeon. The guide was near the Dungeon entrance. But unexpectedlypared to the other cities here, the guide was very busy. Most likely all those warriors before entering the Dungeon wanted to know about the Dungeon from the guide. This is a good sign. But he just needs to wait some time to talk with the guide.


    ________To be continued_________

 Chapter 205 205 - Inside Of The Ghost Dungeon

    "Inside this dungeon, you will find the humanoid ghost, the skeletons, and the Zombies. These types of monsters were in this dungeon. So you need to be careful about them. If you think that you can easily defeat the skeleton, then you are wrong. Those skeletons can reattach themselves. So, you need to be careful about that. Those zombies were also not easy to kill. They weren''t your normal spiritual monsters. One thing you need to be careful about is that this thing has very hard defence. Also, don''t let zombies bite you. This won''t turn you into a zombie, but their bite was very poisonous. Also, with a bite, they can easily absorb your spiritual energy, so this was dangerous. I think previously if anyone went to the ghost and they already know about the humanoid ghost. Well, this type of spiritual monster looks like humans and they always float in the air. Their favorite attack was the mind attack, also they can pass through physical things. You need to be careful about that. If you wanted to know the weakness, then obviously fire or light type attack was a weakness to all the ghost types or spiritual monsters. Also, you will find all these monsters were ck. If your fire spell was powerful, then you can easily kill them but one thing you need to remember is that when you advance from the 1st floor to the other floors, the difficulty you will increase because you won''t be able to kill those monsters in those floors that easily also one more thing was that in thest floor you will find the boss is red color. I hope you already know why the red color spiritual monster was dangerous," the guide exined all of this to Sam. Sam just nodded at him.


    After that, he also asked some questions about those monsters to the guide. Sometimeter, he finally finished talking with that guide and now he was going toward the dungeon. He was already wearing his mask, and before entering the Dungeon he already activated his concealment techniques.


    _________________


    He was now on the first floor. Most likely, he was inside a forest. But because everywhere was dark, you cannot see anything that clearly. Sam quickly activated his spiritual vision and instantly he was able to see clearly. As he predicted, he really was inside of a forest but one thing that was strange about this forest is that those trees were also dark and those trees released some kind of energy. Most likely, that energy will make you feel fear or hallucinate. Fortunately, Sam was able to find this, so he will be careful about this.


    Due to the dense trees, he cannot understand whether there is moonlight in the sky or not. Well, as you already know that in the Dungeon there was some crystal that could replicate the Sun or moon. But due to all these dense trees, he was unable to see the sky clearly. Wasting no time, he began to advance.


    _____________


    After some time of walking, Sam suddenly stopped. He suddenly hears some noise, and because of this, he stops advancing. Well, he doesn''t need to wait that much because a few minutester, he finally saw a group of ck skeletonsing in this direction. If you look at those skeletons right now, then you can also see that they have a bow in their hand. Those skeletons like to attack the Warriors using their bows and arrows. The strange sound wasing from those skeletons.


    Sam, after looking at those skeletons, did not waste any more time and started to cast a great fireball. But this was not your normal fire because the color of this fireball turned blue. Well, as you can give that after upgrading his fire control to B-grade, he can now easily control the blue me. So he created great blue fireballs. In front of him, he saw that 10 skeletons wereing in this direction, most likely they were going toward the warriors that he saw previously. He quickly shoots the fireball toward the skeletons.


    You must need to be careful because this skeleton was not your zombie. This skeleton was very fast as well. As the guide said earlier, they can reattach their body, so you also need to be careful about that. Because of this, Sam uses the great fireball. Those skeletons weren''t that far from Sam and because of this, those skeletons didn''t even get the chance to react. The great fireballnded in the middle of those skeletons and instantly a huge explosion appeared. Sam was already very far away from that ce, so he could not be affected by the impact. He looked toward that explosion and the destruction appeared after that.


    ''I should not use the great fireball or the mega fireballs,'' Sam thought about that because he didn''t want that explosion to appear every time he used his spells. Sometimeter, he was now in front of that ce where the explosion appeared. If you look at the ce right now, then you will see that everything around that ce got destroyed. There was a big hole in the ground and the trees around the ce were also destroyed. So right now, Sam can see the moonlight.


    Looking at the destroyed ce, Sam just sighed and then collected the loot. After that, he left that ce. But not long after he left that ce, a group of warriors came toward this ce and got surprised. These were the Warriors that Sam noticed previously and most likely those skeletons were going toward this group of Warriors. Also, if you look at them, then you can see that they were wearing their Armor, but in the armor, you can notice a logo of white tiger Academy. Well, many students did that. They feel proud to show their academy to others, but Sam did not do that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Prion, did you know what happened here?" A girl suddenly asked the person that was in front of them. He was the leader because of this, the girl asked him.


    Prion look at the girl and said, "Tiya, why are you asking me this stupid question? I was also with all of you previously, so how could I know what happened here? What if my guess was correct? Then, most likely, someone used a powerful spell to kill the monsters. Also, most likely he got attacked by many monsters at the same time and because of this, used this type of big spell." He told all of them about his prediction. Well, he could be right, but Sam did not use this because of the number. He just wanted to use that spell, so he used that.


    _____________


    The students from the white Tiger Academy looking around the destroyed ce Sam already came very far from that ce. Because he was using his superior concealment technique, no monster was able to spot him. Sam takes advantage of this and has already killed three groups of humanoid monsters and skeletons. This time, he just used a normal blue fireball that killed those monsters. But because he has low spirit, to cast 10 blue fireballs, he almost needed 90% of his spiritual energy.


    Sam quickly brings out a spiritual energy recovery potion. Just now, he once again killed 5 skeletons. So he was now very low on his spiritual energy. It took him 5 minutes to recover his lost spiritual energy. Wasting no more time, he once again advanced.


    After advancing, he found a group of warriors fighting with 20 zombies. Well, previously he did not find any zombies, so he looked at those zombies very curiously. Those Warriors attacking those zombies with their spells instantly did not kill those zombies. The zombies got seriously injured by their spells, but still, they were alive. And the most interesting thing was that even in that kind of situation, they were advancing toward those Warriors.


    But due to the zombies being very slow, those Warriors have an advantage. They did not stop and continuously attacked those zombies. But instantly something happened, and those zombies went inside the ground. Well, it was like the guide said that these zombies were slow, but they have the power to go inside the ground easily. This instantly alerts all those 10 Warriors.


    "Everyone, be ready to attack those zombies," the leader of those warriors said to them. All of those Warriors are very alert. Because right now those zombies can appear from anywhere and attack them, so because of these they are very alert. Also, one more thing that you should know about this zombie monster was that they can split poison from their mouth. That poison could melt iron. With this, you can guess how dangerous that poison was.


    Sam at this time was looking at the ground, those Warriors did not move from their ce and they also tried to find the zombies and because of this, you can say that it was silent in that ce. In that silence, Sam and those warriors tried to hear the sound of those zombies.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 206 206 - Ghost Monsters

    All those warriors were very alert right now. All of them tried to spot those zombies that went inside of the ground. Suddenly, the leader of those warriors hears something.


    "Everyone, jump," he suddenly screamed at all of his teammates. Instantly, all the warriors, without any question, quickly jump away from their ce. When all those warriors jumped away from that ce, instantly the ground beneath their feet cracked and zombies came out from that. Fortunately, all the warriors previously jumped away from the previous ce.


    "Attack," instantly the leader told all those Warriors to attack those zombies. Those Warriors already prepared their attack and instantly attacked those zombies. Some of them attack those zombies with their fireballs and some of them attack them with their light attack. Look like all those warriors here present there were spiritual warriors. Well, it is also possible that they were physical warriors who could use the spells. But one thing was that everyone attacked all those zombies at the same time. This time, those zombies were unable to dodge their attack. Because all of them attack those zombies so quickly that they are unable to react.


    "Good job everyone," finally the leader of those warriors said to all of them. Finally able to kill all the zombies. Fortunately, those zombies did not get the chance to attack them with their poison attack. The poison of these zombies was very dangerous. It could easily kill anyone. Those Warriors went toward the loot and collected that.


    Sam at this time already left the area because he already got to know the power of this zombie. The main thing he should follow while facing the zombies was that he shouldn''t let those zombies have any chance to attack because that would be dangerous for him. Also, those zombies were very proficient at hiding in the ground, so he should kill the zombie as quickly as he can.


    ______________


    Sometimeter, right now, Sam was looking toward the 10 zombies that were in front of him. Sam wanted to finish them as quickly as he could, but he also did not want to use his fire spell. Because this time he wanted to use the spirit technique. Well, he wanted to use this technique because he wanted to find if this technique was useful against those spiritual monsters or not. Previously, many people told him that this technique is also useful against those spiritual monsters. So he wanted to find out about that and he also wanted to find how useful the spirit technique waspared to his energy mode against these spiritual monsters.


    He quickly brings out his normal sword. Well, as you know that he only uses his yer when he uses his energy mode. Because of this to use the spirit technique, he brought a normal sword. Well, this was a C-grade sword, so it won''t break that easily, while he was fighting against these Early D-grade monsters.


    Sam calms down his mind and then concentrates on his spiritual energy. He easily connected his spiritual energy with his sword technique. Previously, he could only connect his spiritual energy with his one sword technique, but right now he could easily connect his spiritual energy with his fast cut and tri sword technique. He can now easily use his two sword technique while also using his spiritual energy at the same time.


    Instantly, a blue light appeared on his sword and Sam vanished from his ce. As you can tell, he was still using his concealment technique, so those zombies did not sense him. Sam did not waste any more time and killed those zombies one by one. Fortunately, while using the spiritual energy, the sharpness of the sword increases, but not as much as his energy mode. But still, it increases, and using this increased sharpness, Sam easily kills those zombies. Those zombies didn''t even get the chance to react.


    After killing all those zombies, Sam, at this time, looked at his sword, which was covered in green blood. That blood was from the zombies. But one thing he notices is that the green blood from the Zombies seems to be damaging his sword. Westing no time, he quickly clears his sword. He did not want to get damaged by those zombies'' blood.


    '' Who could have expected that the blood from the Zombies would also be poisonous that could damage my sword?'' Sam thought in his mind while you were collecting the loot from the Zombies. But the most disappointing thing was that he did not get that many spirit crystals, even after killing all these spiritual monsters or ghosts.


    Sam just sighed, and then once again advanced. The bad thing about this ghost dungeon was that you will lose track of time. In this type of dungeon, you will only find darkness. So you won''t be able to tell if it was morning outside of the Dungeon or not. But fortunately, the moonlight was present here and because of this, Sam can use the moon''s essence to increase his power.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ____________


    He was now resting. Well, for 5 hours we continuously killed those ghosts or you can say those spiritual monsters. So he was feeling hungry and also because of continuously using concealment techniques, he needed to rest his body.


    Sam was resting on the top of a tree, but still, there was a risk that those humanoid ghosts could appear here. But fortunately, Sam has the monster rappelling device that could repel those humanoid ghosts. But there was the main thing you should note down this device also has a limit. This monster repairing device only seems to work against the ritual monsters, or you can say the ghost monsters. Because of this, against those skeletons and zombies, it won''t be that useful. Because of this, he also uses the life-detecting device.


    _________________


    Sometimeter, something unexpected happens and many ghost monsters at the same time begin to walk in Sam''s direction. Well, it was not that they sensed Sam, but it was that behind Sam there was a big group of Warrior approaching. Because of this, all those ghost monsters are also going toward those Warriors. You can say that Sam was in the middle of these ghost monsters and those Warriors. You will still not know how these monsters got to know about the Warriors, even when they were very far away from those monsters. It is most likely the Dungeon was helping those monsters to find those Warriors.


    Sam, who was resting at this time, suddenly became alert after his life detector device began to vibrate. He quickly looked at the device and saw that many monsters were approaching his direction. Not long after that, the device once again began to vibrate. This time it shows him that there are many Warriors ( at least 30 warriors) alsoing toward these directions. He already understands that because of those Warriors this many ghost monsters also appear. He was already using his concealment techniques, so there wasn''t a chance for those warriors and those monsters to sense him.


    Quickly putting everything in the inventory, Sam quickly hid himself. Most likely, a fight will happen between those Warriors and these monsters. He can see ck humanoid ghosts that were floating in the sky. There are also many skeletons and zombies. All of them are going toward those Warriors to kill them. Well, not want to take part in this battle, but he wanted to see why so many monsters appeared at the same time. You can say at least 60 monsters appeared here. Most likely there was a reason for this, and Sam wanted to find that reason.


    ''Did those Warriors do something that angered all those monsters?'' he thought in his mind while looking in this direction. It did not take that much time for this party to meet. Right now, both those spiritual monsters and those Warriors were looking at each other. All of them were ready to attack each other anytime.


    Sam, at this time, fully focuses on those Warriors. Because you wanted to know why this was happening, so he came very close to those Warriors.


    "Hey, Benny, why the hell did this many ghosts appear here? Is this because of that thing you did back there? I already told you we should not break that statue. Look like breaking that statue angers all those monsters," Sam saw a girl talking with the boy beside her.


    " Ohh Shut up, Dani. It was normal to get attacked by the monster in the Dungeon so why the hell are you worried about those monsters? We can easily kill those monsters, so don''t worry about that," this was the response that girl got from that boy. Most likely that boy did something and because of this all of this happened. Sam heard all of this, but did not understand what they were talking about. What statue were they talking about? Was there a statue on this floor? Previously did not find any statues and because of this, he didn''t know everything about them.


    __________To be continued___________

 Chapter 207 207 - Dangerous Situation

    Sam didn''t know about the statue. So he decided to silently observe this group of warriors. Those monsters wereing in their direction while those Warriors were getting ready to fight the monsters.


    Suddenly, those skeletons shoot them with their bone arrows. Instantly, all those spiritual Warriors use the light control technique to cast the light barrier in front of them. It prevents those arrows from reaching those warriors. But the skeletons just shoot those bone arrows nonstop. Previously, Sam also faced this type of skeleton many times, but he wasted no more time and quickly finished those skeletons. Because of this, he did not know that these skeletons could shoot non-stop arrows. Those skeletons just keep shooting their arrows nonstop toward that light barrier.


    At this time, all the other monsters like this humanoid monster and the Zombies came very close to those Warriors. Those humanoid ghosts were floating in the air while those zombies were walking on the ground. Dost skeletons staying behind to attack those Warriors with their arrows. Suddenly those humanoid Ghosh attack those Warriors with their mind attack. Instantly, many Warriors begin to scream. Looking at those Warriors, you can easily tell that many of the warriors just recently broke through to early D-grade. Also, not everyone has the strong mind power to resist those mind attacks. You can say at least 6 to 7 Warriors fell down on the ground after getting hit by the mind attack.


    As you already know that the favorite attack of the humanoid ghost was a mind attack. They also like to take control of other bodies and kill them. Fortunately, there are many warriors present who can use light elements. They quickly cast a holy ray to protect those fallen warriors. Well, this holy ray can prevent those ghosts from taking control over those Warriors. Not only that it can also kill them. But those light element warriors weren''t that strong; most likely they also recently became early D-grade warriors, and they didn''t have good control over the holy ray.


    At this time, all the other Warriors already created many fireballs and light Spears. Wasting no time they shoot all toward those monsters that wereing toward them. These attacks created a huge explosion and everything was covered by the smoke. But they already know that they won''t be able to kill all those monsters with this attack. As they predicted, when the smoke began to clear, they saw that they only killed some of the monsters while the other wasn''t there. Those humanoid ghosts fly higher in the sky while those zombies go inside of the ground.


    "Stay alert, everyone. As you know, the Zombies like to attack from the ground. They can appear from anywhere, so be alert," the leader of this group suddenly told all those Warriors to stay alert. Sam previously thought that a boy named Benny was the leader, but he was wrong. He wasn''t the leader.


    After hearing their leader''s word, all those Warriors be alert. The leader of those Warriors divided his team into 3 teams. One will attack those skeletons, while the other one will focus on those humanoid ghosts and thest one will focus on those zombies. Those skeletons once again attacked those Warriors with their bone arrows. Fortunately, those warriors already noticed that and they once again created a barrier in front of them that defended them from those arrows.


    At the same time, 5 warriors created fireballs. Now they were waiting for those skeletons to stop shooting them with the arrows. It took those skeletons 5 minutes to stop attacking instantly. Those 5 Warriors shot those fireballs towards skeletons. This instantly created an explosion, and it killed many skeletons.


    At this time, the group that was looking toward the humanoid monsters was under attack by those ghosts. Those ghosts were attacking them with their mind attack. But even under this powerful mind attack of this many ghosts, many warriors are still standing. These Warriors were the ones who had strong willpower and mind power. They quickly cast their attacks and head toward monsters. Who was attacking those Warriors Instantly deactivated their attacks to save themselves? But still, not everyone is able to dodge those fireballs and light spears. Many of those ghosts got hit and killed.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Those who were previously suffering from the mind attack from the humanoid ghost finally sigh in relief. Previously, they were under huge pressure and continuously felt headaches that they weren''t even able to think about anything clearly. But finally, they were now free from that huge pressure and they can now think clearly. Those humanoid ghosts were once again about to attack them with a mental attack, but this time all these Warriors were ready. Those didn''t give those humanoid ghosts the chance to attack, every one of them attacked those ghosts.


    At this time, those 10 Warriors who were focused on the Zombies were already in a very bad situation. Because previously, when the Zombies win inside of the ground, these Warriors arepletely unable to find those Zombies. Sometimeter, those zombies appeared behind them and attacked them. Fortunately, none of the Zombies are able to bite them, but those warriors still get attacked by the poison. That poison did not kill them, but they still got affected by it. If you look at those Warriors, then you can see that some of those Warriors'' armor got damaged. This all happens because they got affected by the poison. Well, you can say that poison wasn''t normal, it was acid poison. Those armors that were low-grade Armor, got damaged by the poison. Even though this poison was dangerous, this still wasn''t able to damage those D-grade armor or those high-grade Armor. But still, those that are there do not give up, and they quickly cast their spells and attacked those zombies. They also know that the Zombies were very expert at hiding in the ground, so they wanted to prevent the Zombies from going inside the ground. To do this, they need to quickly attack those zombies.


    So like this, all of those Warriors fighting with those monsters. They already killed many monsters, but still, there were many monsters that were attacking them. Sam, at this time, looked at all of this without doing anything, but one thing he was confused about was why he had a feeling that those monsters, at any cost, wanted to kill all those Warriors. Well, the monster inside of the Dungeon always wanted to kill the Warriors or humans, but this time Sam can feel that those monsters have the killing inte around them. This really confused him because he had never seen something like this.


    ? The 30 people were previously able to fight those monsters easily, but right now they were at a disadvantage. Because the number of these monsters increased. So, even though those warriors previously killed many monsters, it did not help their situation. Many of those Warriors get injured seriously. Right now you can say only 10 Warriors were fighting those many monsters while 3 Warriors healing those other injured Warriors. So only 13 were in a better condition, while the others didn''t have the condition to fight. Also, one more thing was that those monsters already surrounded them from every site, so you can expect that it was a very bad situation for them.


    Sam was looking at all of this. Even though Warrior was in a difficult situation, he did not help them because he wanted to know why those monsters were so aggressive against those Warriors. But he knows that you won''t be able to find anything like this, so he wanted to ask the leader of those Warriors about this. So, doing this, he needed to save him.


    "Sigh, and here I thought. I won''t need to face anyplicated situation," Sam thought while he was casting his blue fireballs. Well, he wasn''t casting one or two fireballs, but he was casting many fireballs at the same time. He saw that those Zombies attacking those Warriors were not only, but those skeletons were also shooting their arrows toward the Warriors. At this time those 2 Warriors have cast a light barrier in front of them that defended them, but now the main question was how long they will be able to survive because these Warriors were very low on spiritual energy. Previously both of them were busy treating those injured Warriors and because of this, they were very injured.


    "I already told you, Benny, this wasn''t a good idea to break that statue. We already know that that statue was used by the dark association and you know we should not touch something that is from the dark association. But still, you need to touch that statue, and more than that, you break that statue." The girl Dani yelled at Benny at this time. Well, Benny, this time, said nothing, just lowered his head, and looked toward the ground. He also knows that previously he should listen to his teammate and should not break that statue from the dark association.


    _________To be continued_______


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 208 208 - Sam Appeared

    "Guys don''t fight against each other. Right now, our main focus should defeat all those monsters. Now we are in a terrible situation, so try to think of a way to escape from the situation," the leader of this group suddenly yelled at them. Even though they were in the situation, his teammates were fighting against each other and because of this, he was very angry. Both Dani and Benny said sorry to him and then focused on those monsters.


    But suddenly they hear a cracking sound. All of them look toward the light barrier and notice that it cracks. Those two 2 light element users have pale expressions on their faces. Right now they are extremely low on the spiritual energy and they won''t be able to maintain that very long. This instantly made all the other Warriors very anxious. The remaining light element user was healing those other teammates, but seeing this, she also wanted to help maintain the light barrier. She is also very low on spiritual energy after healing this many Warriors, but still, she knows that if the light barrier breaks, then they can lose their life.


    It didn''t take that much time, and the barrier started to break. Instantly the girl cast the light barrier, to prevent that barrier from breaking. But still, because her spiritual energy was very low, the barrier still cracked.


    "Sasha, cancel your spell. Try to save your spiritual energy. You won''t be able to maintain the barrier that long." At this time, the leader quickly told her to cancel the spell.


    "But, leader¡­," She wanted to tell him something. But the leader told her,


    "No, save your energy. If someone gets injured, you can heal him." He told her. Sasha finally nodded and then canceled the spell. At this time, the other 10 warriors already prepared their spells. The moment the barrier got canceled, all those Warriors attacked those monsters. But still, in front of these many monsters, they are still unable to win.


    Sometimeter, they were in a very difficult situation. Now only 4 warriors were standing while the others were seriously injured and unconscious. Sasha was trying to heal them. While those 4 warriors are still struggling to fight those monsters. You can see at least 60 monsters surrounding them. Even their situation was good because they were very injured at this time. They also have very low spiritual energy and at any moment, they can also be unconscious due to low spiritual energy.


    At this time, those 4 warriors were about to get attacked by those zombies. Because suddenly many zombies came in front of them and were about to attack them with their poison. But at this time, suddenly many blue fireballs attack those monsters. Those 4 Warriors who are preparing to die also get surprised. You can say that at least 20 fireballs hit those monsters and not only that, this instantly burns those monsters.


    But those Zombies still did not get affected by those attacks, and they were about to attack those Warriors. At this time, suddenly a firewall appeared in front of those Warriors. That fire all covered all those 30 Warriors from every side. Those 4 Warriors who were still conscious finally fell down to the ground after seeing the firewall. Because at this time they thought that someone hade to their rescue. They were still conscious, but their situation wasn''t that good. At this time, suddenly they saw that someone appeared in front of them.


    As you can guess, it was Sam who appeared in front of them. Previously, he already noticed that those Warriors were in a very dangerous situation, and, wasting no time, he quickly attacked those monsters. Not only that, but he also created firewalls around those Warriors to save them. He also quickly appeared in front of those Warriors and noticed that only 5 warriors were now conscious. Looking at those four Warriors, he can tell that they were the Warriors who used the fire control, so Sam went toward Sasha. His n is to heal her so she can use her power on others.


    Sam quickly approaches her and gives her the health potion. Sasha looked at him cautiously. When she saw that he was approaching her, she became more alert, but then when she saw that person giving her the health potion, she thanked him and took that potion. By looking at the potion, she can tell it was a high-grade potion. So quickly take it and gulp it down. Also, not only, but Sam also started to use his light control spell to cast the healing ray toward her. After he saw that her condition was better, he quickly approached those others for Warrior and also healed them. All those who Warriors thank him when Sam heals them. Sam at this time is still wearing his mask so the Warriors are unable to see his face. Sam did not say anything to them, he just nodded and then stood up.


    Right now, Sam was fully focused on those monsters who were outside of the firewall. At this time, all those monsters try to break that firewall, but they are unable to seed. At this time, suddenly, Sam brings out his yer and coats the sword with his spiritual energy. He quickly turn-round and went toward those Warriors because suddenly in front of those Warriors many zombies came out from the ground. When those zombies see that they won''t be able to damage the firewall, they use their power to go inside of the ground and approach all these Warriors. But Sam was faster than them even before they came out from the ground. He came to decide them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam did not waste any more time and quickly swung his sword and killed those zombies. You can say that at least 15 zombies approach here. But Sam was faster than them and quickly killed all of them. You have to say that his power of energy mode increased. While killing those zombies, he didn''t even feel any resistance.


    Those 5 Warriors were very surprised, or you can say they were very shocked at this time. They are even unable to react when they notice those zombies suddenly appear in front of them, but then they also notice that the warrior who helps them instantly appears in front of the Zombies and kills them. They were about to thank him, but he noticed that the warrior wasn''t there.


    "Rafik, what do you think? Do you know who he is? I don''t know why, but I feel that this person was familiar," Sasha asked the leader.


    Rafik shook his head, and said," No, I also don''t know anything about this person. But you are right, I also feel that this person is familiar. But I am sure about one thing: this warrior doesn''t belong to the warrior association because I never saw him in the audio association because I never saw him in the warrior association."


    " We should help him to fight those monsters," she quickly said to him because she knows that this person went outside of the firewall to fight those monsters on his own.


    "You are right. We should help him, but before that, we need to recoverpletely. Right now, if we went outside of this firewall to help him, we will only be a burden to him," he quickly said to them. All of them nodded and thenpletely focused on recovering their energy and strength.


    _________


    While they were recovering their energy and strength, Sam was already outside of the firewall. The moment he came outside, he shot a great fireball toward the monsters. This instantly creates a big explosion. At this time, Sam quickly used his concealment technique to disappear. Because of this, those monsters lost track of him. Sam uses this chance to attack those monsters with his yer. Well, casting those blue fireballs really cost his spiritual energy. Because of this, he decided to use his sword to fight them.


    Using his full speed, he was killing those monsters with an incense speed that those monsters weren''t even able to react to. For Sam, those monsters were like butter that he just cut with his sword. Sam, at this time, targeted those humanoid monsters that were floating in the air. Because those monsters can easily go inside of the firewall. At first, he killed all those monsters that were very close to the firewall and then he focused on those humanoid monsters.


    This time, Sam knows that he needs to use his spells or his bow. Sam decided to use his fails because he doesn''t have that many arrows to kill those humanoid monsters. So, wasting no time, he quickly begins to shoot fireballs toward those humanoid ghosts as quickly as he can. After killing 20 humanoid ghosts, Sam quickly brings out a spiritual energy recovery potion. He was low on spiritual energy because of using these many blue fireballs. It took him 5 minutes topletely recover his spiritual energy, but fortunately, at this time, his concealment technique didn''t get deactivated. After 5 minutester, he once again shoots fireballs toward those humanoid monsters and kills the remaining 10 humanoid ghosts.


    _________To be continued_______

 Chapter 209 209 - Asking Questions

    Those humanoid ghosts didn''t even get the chance to react. They also weren''t even able to spot the enemy that was attacking them. Sam was at this time very close to them and because of this, the speed of the fireballs was high. Also, because he was using the concealment technique, those ghosts were unable to spot him and because of this, they were unable to dodge the attack.


    After killing all those humanoid ghosts, Sam did not rx and focused on those 18 zombies. Those skeletons were very far away from him, so he decided to kill those zombies before killing them. He quickly once again brought out his yer, then went toward those zombies. One after another, he quickly killed all of those zombies. While he was killing the Zombies, those skeletons were very confused because they were unable to find the enemy who was killing those zombies, but they still shot arrows at those zombies. Well, not that exactly toward the Zombies, but ahead of those Zombies. As you know, when a monster reaches D-grade, his intelligence increases. Because of this increased intelligence, they thought that someone was attacking those zombies from ahead of the Zombies, and because of this, they shot arrows in that direction.


    But those skeletons were wrong because Sam was beside the Zombies while he was killing them. Killing those Zombies only takes him 5 minutes. Some zombies try to escape using their ground technique, but Sam did not give them the chance to escape.


    After everything, they quickly approached those skeletons who kept shooting their arrows, but none of them went toward Sam. While approaching those skeletons, he also brings out an energy recovery potion. He gulped down and focused on those skeletons. Compared to the Zombies and humanoid Ghosts, these skeletons are agile, but they still did not move as fast as Sam. Sam also uses his full speed to attack those skeletons. Well, he was thinking that if he dyed any longer, many monsters coulde in this direction. Because of this, he wanted to finish this fight as quickly as he could.


    _____________


    While Sam was approaching the skeletons, Rafik and many of his teammates were now conscious. They were still injured, but they became conscious when Sasha and her teammates heal them. Shasha, after recovering her spiritual energy, decided to heal those light element users first so that when they be conscious, they could also heal the others. In their team, they have 12 light element users, including Sasha. Because of this, she decided to heal them first.


    Sometimeter, many of those Warriors became conscious. Well, previously Sasha already used her power to stop them from bleeding, and because of this, they didn''t bleed right now. But still, they were very weak right now because of the injuries. All of them quickly brought out their health potion and gulped down. This will heal their body.


    When all those Warriors became conscious, they finally noticed that firewall that was surrounding them from every direction. At this time Benny, who also was conscious, went toward Rafik, to ask him about the firewall.


    "Leader, what happened? Why is there a firewall surrounding us from every direction? Leader, did you cast this firewall that protects us from those monsters?" He asks Rafik about the firewall.


    " Haha¡­ do you think I can change the color of my fire to blue? I still did not reach that level. If I could cast this type of firewall, then why did I not use that to protect ourselves from those monsters? This firewall was cast by another warrior who came here to save us. I am still not sure if he belongs to the warrior association or not, but one thing was clear: he came here to save us. Just to feel the power of this firewall, I just recently learned to cast the firewall, but still, my firewall wasn''t that strong enough to defend itself from those attacks. Because of this, I did not cast the firewall." Rafik exined all of this to him and his other teammate.


    "Try to recover your energy as quickly as you can because that or your was fighting those monsters on his own. We need to help save you, so focus on recovering your energy," he also told them.


    After that, it took them some time to recover their health and energy. Well, they did notpletely recover their health or energy. But still, they have the condition to fight. Also, all of thempletely became conscious. Even though many of them still did not have the condition to fight, they were still ready to fight with those monsters. But when they were ready to use the hole, suddenly the firewall started to disappear. Well, previously they tried to destroy the firewall but after seeing that it wasn''t working, they decided to use the hole that was made by those Zombies when they came inside of the firewall.


    "Prepare everyone. It looks like our savior was in danger. We need to help him," Rafik quickly told everyone when he was ready to attack anytime. All those Warriors hearing his word are also ready. All of them started to cast their spells. It took some time for that firewall to disappearpletely. Rafik and her teammates were finally able to see what was happening outside of those firewalls.


    ___________


    At this time, Rafik and all his teammates have shocking expressions. When previously that firewall disappeared, they finally noticed that they could not find any monsters. Instantly it made them very confused because they never thought that one warrior could kill all these monsters at the same time. Rafik and his teammate quickly searched everywhere around that ce but still did not find any trace of those monsters and also their savior. Because of this, they are very confused.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ________


    Well, at this time Sam was busy collecting those loot. He also used the concealment technique, and because of this, those warriors weren''t able to find him. This takes him some time to collect all that loot. Only when he finished collecting those loot did he notice all those Warriors. Well, after killing those skeletons, he already deactivated the firewall because to maintain the firewall he needed to use his spiritual energy. Also, because the firewall was made of blue me, it needed 30% energy to maintain the firewall this long. Also, because of this, he quickly finished all those monsters so that he did not have to maintain the firewall that long.


    Sam, at this time, quickly went toward those Warriors because he wanted to know about the statue that they were talking about. He was very curious to know what statue they were talking about. So he quickly deactivated his concealment techniques and then went towards those warriors.


    ________


    At this time, those Warriors who were busy looking around suddenly got shocked because out of nowhere, a person suddenly appeared. Well, that person still has some distance from them, but they already looked and searched in the direction previously and they did not find anything there, but how the hell now a person suddenly appeared there? For a moment, all of them instantly became alert and they were ready to attack that person, but at this time Rafik and Sasha quickly told them to stop. They already recognize that warrior. He was the one who had previously helped them.


    "Don''t need to alert everyone. He is our savior," Rafik quickly told them. Only then do all those Warriors rx.


    They also start walking toward Sam while Sam wasing too much to them. Sometimeter, Sam was in front of them while Rafik came toward him and extended his hand for a handshake.


    "Thank you very much. If you weren''t here, we would be dead. Thank you very much." He said to Sam.


    Sam also extended his hand and both of them shook hands.


    " No problem," he said to him in a rough voice.


    Only then do those who still did not fully recover quickly sit down on the ground. Right now, they need to focus on recovering their energy. It was fortunate that those light-element Warriors weren''t that seriously injured. Because of them, those Warriors quickly recover. Previously, many Warriors were also poisoned by the Zombies, but because of the holy ray, they were able to detoxify the poison. Well, if you imagine that those Warriors will be turned into zombies if they get bitten by the Zombies, then you were wrong. Those zombies have poison in their mouths. When they bite you, that poison will enter your body, and then quickly your blood will be solid and it won''t be that long before you will die. Fortunately, those health potions are also able to detoxify the poison effect.


    "I have a very important question to ask you. Can you tell me the reason why the hell all those monsters were ready to kill you guys on any coast? I know that all the monsters present in the Dungeon really wanted to kill the humans, but still, those monsters were very aggressive toward your group. So I am very curious to know about the reason. I never saw something like this." Sam did not waste any more time and directly asked Rafik this question.


    _______To be continued__________

 Chapter 210 210 - Home

    5 days before the annual inter-collegepetition,


    Sam left the dungeon. Well, previously his teacher Alena told him toe back before the exam, so it won''t be a problem for him. Aftering out from the Dungeon Sam first went toward the restaurant to eat something good. Well, not that the food was finished that he brought previously in his inventory, but still he wanted to try something different aftering out from the Dungeon. You can say that it became his habit to eat in a restaurant.


    After finishing eating, he left the restaurant and went to his car. He was going toward the parking area when suddenly he noticed some people that wereing from the dungeon. He notices Pijus and L. Pijus was from the royal School while L was from the base Scholl. She is also Elena''s ssmate and friend. But he cannot see Gustav here. Probably didn''t go with them to the dungeon. L and Pijus weren''t alone with them; he saw 6 other people. Most likely, those are their teammates. Well, but still it didn''t matter to him, so he turned around and once again went to the parking area. As you know, Sam only has no Pijus because he is also from the Royal School and Jeni knows him. On the other hand, he knows L because she was a friend of Elena and she is from Base school.


    Sam ignored them and went toward the parking area; he was unaware of the fact that Pijus had already noticed him previously. When Sam looks toward them, Pijus notices him. But when he saw that the person just turned his head and went to the parking area he also lost interest. But at this time he doesn''t know why but he has a feeling that he knows this person but he cannot just remember where. But then his friends started to talk to him so hepletely forgot about that person.


    Sam, who was now in the parking area, went toward his car. Beforeing to the parking area, he already wears a mask. Because previously when he parked the car in the parking area, he did not wear a mask at that time. So he unequips the mask.


    ___________


    He finally started his journey toward his home. It will probably take him two hours to reach his home. While going toward his house, he was thinking about something. Well, he was thinking about the statue that those Warriors told him about. Someday ago when he saved those Warriors and then asked them about the reason for the aggressiveness of the monsters, they told him about the statue and the reason.


    ______shback_____


    "Those dark association Warriors made this statue. They can make those statues in various shapes. Well, most people knew nothing about this statue but we already saw that statue earlier and then we learned about the statue from the warrior. So this time when we entered the Dungeon we went directly toward that statue. Well, before telling you why I want to tell you the details of this statue. As I told you earlier, this statue can be in various shapes. But all of them have the same function. Those dark association Warriors made statues like this to college negative spiritual energy from the spiritual dungeon, or you can say ghosts dungeon."


    "This type of statue is called the dark statue because those dark association Warriors made them. Those statues mainly collect negative spiritual energy. Also, because of this, those monsters were attracted to this type of statue. Because when they get near this type of statue they can absorb negative energy quicklypared to the normal situation. And as you know that absorbing the negative energy could break through into the next grade. Because of this, this type of statue was the favorite of those spiritual monsters, or you can say those ghosts."


    " The dark association Warriors also ce this type of statue in the spiritual or ghost Dungeon to collect the negative spiritual energy. Most likely they can also absorb the negative spiritual energy, but they won''t be able to openly collect the spiritual energy from the Dungeon that easily without altering the warrior association. Because of this, those dark association Warriors like to ce this type of statue in the spiritual dungeon or ghost dungeon."


    " So previously my friend and I searched about this statue and we were surprised after reading the description of the statue. We were surprised and then without that, we could bring that statue outside of the Dungeon. If we could give that statue to the Warrior association or college association. With this, we can get many resources. Because of this, we wanted to take that statue but who would ever think that just touching that statue, will crack it? Benny was the one who approached the statue to put the statue in the storage ring, but just when his hand touched that statue that cracked. Well, from then you can say that those monsters started to chase us. To those monsters, we steal an elixir from them because these monsters became aggressive to kill us, so they could just take that statue back, or you can say the elixir." Rafik told him all of this.


    After hearing all of this Sam became shocked for some time because he never heard about this. Who would ever think that those dark association Warriors needed negative spiritual energy?


    __________shback end_______


    Sam thought about that but he will only get to know about that when he will search for it in the warriorwork. But before that, he needed to reach his home.


    [2 hourster]<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam finally came back to his house. His mom and dad weren''t in the house because they were in the dungeon. He already gets their message on his phone. Also, his sister Gloria didn''te back from her Dungeon adventure. Most probably she wille back before this inter College examination.


    Fortunately, Sam doesn''t need to eat right now. He directly went toward his room and went to the bathroom. After freshening up, hey down in his bed. Only then does he open his mobile and then open the warriorwork. Where can we search for that statue?


    After searching for some time, he finally found that statue. This statue was called the dark statue. Statue was made of a material that collected negative spiritual energy from the air. The material''s name you won''t be able to find here. Most likely, they only found this material in a high-grade dungeon. And the warrior association also did not want to share this type of material that could harm anybody. So those dark association Warriors made this type of statue.


    The warrior association still doesn''t know the reason behind making these types of statues, but they are guessing that those dark association Warriors are using some method to absorb the negative spiritual energy. Even though they try to stop those that association Warriors, the warrior association won''t be able to always present in the dungeon, and because of this, you can find this type of statue in the ghost Dungeon or spiritual dungeon.


    Also, because this type of statue absorbs negative spiritual energy, the monster who also absorbed the negative spiritual energy likes to stay near this type of statue.


    ________


    Sam sighs and puts down his mobile phone. He finally found out about the statue and its details, but this was just gettingplicated. Who knows why those dark association Warriors wanted to collect negative spiritual energy?


    Sam always likes to avoidplicated things, but it looks like he won''t be able to avoid thoseplicated things. He always somehow gets involved in this type ofplicated thing. He just hopes that he doesn''t get in this case.


    ___________


    The next day, 21 November,


    Sam gets up from the training ground. As always, I woke up early and then started absorbing the crystals. As you know, aftering back from the Dungeon he always rests for one day and because of this today he wouldn''t train or fight with his robot. After getting up from the ground, he did some light exercise and then left the training ground.


    Right now, he was going to the kitchen to make something for his breakfast. But when he went to the kitchen, suddenly the doorbell rang. So Sam went to the door to see who it was at this time. Right now, the time is only 7:00 a.m. so he was curious to know who it was.


    When he opened the door, he saw that it was his sister and teacher. Both of them were still wearing their armor, so most likely they came back from the dungeon. Both of them enter the house when Sam says good morning to them. After that, he went to the kitchen to make breakfast for himself, his teacher, and his sister.


    It took him some time to make the breakfast and after that; he called them into the dining room. While he was cooking, Gloria and Alena were already freshened up. So after hearing Sam''s call, both of them went toward the dining room.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 211 211 - Trap

    Finishing their breakfast, Sam went back to his room. Gloria also went back to her room while Alena left the house. She was going back to her house. Previously, she was here to see if he came back from the dungeon or not.


    This time came back to his room and sat down in the chair. He was thinking about the previous incident. Well, some time ago, when Alena was here, he informed her about the statue and the incident that happened in the Dungeon. Hearing the incident, Alena became surprised. She then told him that this was most likely done by some low-grade Warrior. Because those high-grade dark association Warriors like to ce this type of statue in the high-grade Dungeon. But she was surprised because who could have expected that someone put the dark statue in Venus city''s dungeon? Because the white tiger college was in that city like the central city, the security in Venus City was also very good. Because of this, she gets surprised when she hears that.


    "


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (880/880)


    Strength: 90


    Agility: 85


    Physique: 80


    Intelligent(mental power): 79


    Spirit: 53


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    ? Upgrade point: 400k "


    Sam looks at his status. His strength already reached the limit. So he only needed to increase his other status, then he could try to break through. You also quickly use 200k upgrade points to upgrade his Ballor boxing and spirit eye techniques. For now, you will save that 200k upgrade point.


    After that, he closed his system window. Right now he was very happy because, as you can see, he already got the limit breaker. After killing that many monsters, he gets a limit breaker. This time, he got a technique from that dungeon.


    " Poison Hand ( D-grade)


    [Using this technique, you can turn your hand into a poisoned hand that could poison anyone. Only those people who have high poison resistance won''t be affected by this.] "


    Well, it wasn''t that bad of a technique. Most likely he got this technique from the Zombies. Well, it could be better if he gets any technique that helps him fly in the sky, but what can he say? Now he was thinking about what he should do. Should he learn this technique or not? As you know, he already has many techniques so he was not sure what he should do.


    [A/N: Should he learn this technique?]


    Well, he decided to put this technique inside of the inventory, he can decideter if he should learn this technique or not. Right now, he was thinking about what we should do right now. Well, he doesn''t need to go to the academy today. He also knows that he needs to rest. Because of this, he was feeling bored and didn''t know what to do. Well, after not knowing what to do, he just opened the warriorwork and searched for the previous year''s annual collegepetition. Today he doesn''t have anything to do so he can watch the previous year''s collegepetition. As you know, he did note to the annual collegepetition to see his sister''s fight the previous year.


    _______________


    When Sam was busy looking at the previous year''s collegepetition, Alena was at her house. Also at this time, she already informed the warrior association about the previous incident. Because she wasn''t sure if those students who were with Sam in that dungeon informed the warrior association or not. So she informed the warrior association.


    Well, when she was in the warrior association about that, she got to know that those students already informed them because when they came out of the Dungeon they were very weak and injured. At this time, warriors from the warrior association helped them and that time those students informed them about this incident.


    "So did you send some warrior into the Dungeon or not?" Alena asked Maria. Maria was the one who picked up the phone, or you can say Alena directly called Maria to inform her.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Don''t worry about that. I already sent some warriors who will stay outside of the Dungeon and some more years who will go inside of the Dungeon. We already got to know the ce of that statue, so those warriors will stay near that ce." Maria informs her.


    " Good. I also think that those dark association warriors wille to that ce to collect their statues. Also, I wish you not to publish this news because if those who were here from the dark association get to know this news they won''t go to that dungeon." Alena said to her.


    " Don''t worry about that. Fortunately, me and 3 of my colleagues were present at that time when those students told us about the incident. I haveplete trust in my colleague that they will never publish this news. I also told those students not to tell anyone about this until we did not catch those dark associations of Warriors." Maria told her.


    ______________


    At this time, a group of 5 warriors going toward the ghost Dungeon in Venus City. Well, as you can guess that they were the warriors from the dark association that ce the statue in this dungeon. But because those Warriors and those students did not publish that news about the statue, this dark association''s warriors werepletely unaware of the fact that the statue waspletely gone.


    They were going toward the Dungeon but suddenly one warrior ask their leader,


    "Boss, is it just me, or do you also feel that the security in this dungeon has increased? " He asked his leader.


    " Hmmm¡­ I also notice that, but that doesn''t affect us. Be sure not to make any suspicious moves. Just act like normal Warriors who came to the dungeon to hunt monsters." The leader said to his team. All four of his teammates nodded after hearing him. With that, they were going toward the entrance of the Dungeon.


    But at this time they werepletely unaware of the fact that the Warriors from the Warrior association were observing all the Warriors that wereing toward the Dungeon very carefully. Also, 10 Warriors are already in that ce where the Warriors from the dark association put the statue. All of them were hiding and waiting for the warriors from the dark association.


    _________________


    It is now 5:10 p.m.,


    Sam already finished watching the video of the previous year''s annual collegepetition. Well, not that he watches all the matches, but he only watches his sister and some other interesting matches. But even that takes him a lot of time.


    He was now going for an evening walk. Because it was November, you can already see the moon in the sky. Still, Sam went outside of his house and began to walk around his colony. With this, you wanted to pass the time. Today, he did notpletely absorb all the spirit crystals. There were still 3 crystals left to absorb.


    [A/N: Haha.]


    ___________________


    Next day,


    Suddenly, a punch wasing toward Sam''s face, but he quickly responded and dodge the attack. He also wasn''t slow because he also, at this time, quickly punched the robot. But the robot easily avoided his punch and jumped backward. But suddenly, at this time, a robot came behind Sam and attacked him.


    Sam already senses that robot. So he quickly responded and tried to defend himself from the attack, but still, the speed of the robot was greater than him and because of this, he got hit by the punch. Well, he previously set the limit of those robots'' power to peak D-grade. Because of this, the speed and the power of the robot were greater than his. When he said those robots had the power to intermediate D-grade, that doesn''t give him that much pressure and because of this, he decided to increase the power. Right now, as he expected, the power of the robot already increased very much and it was very hard for him to defend himself.


    Well, even though he can fight with the intermediate D-grade robots, it waspletely different when he set the limit of those robots to peak D-grade. This was giving him a hard time, but this kind of pressure Sam really wanted.


    Sometimeter, Sam finishes his fight. He quickly brought out a health potion and gulped it down. He was badly beaten by those two robots. Because of this, he quickly gulped down the health potion to heal all those injuries.


    Sam looked at the time. It was 10:00 a.m. well, at first easily remembered that he needed to go to the college but then he remembered that because of the inter-annual collegepetition they didn''t need to go to the college right now. Their teachers already informed them that they could stay in the house to practice for the inter-collegepetition. So every student was busy practicing for the internal collegepetition.


    ''Haha,'' Sam smiled after remembering that he didn''t need to go to the college and left the training room. Right now he was hungry and wanted to eat something, so he was going toward the kitchen. Yesterday he had already prepared a lot of food for him. Because like him, his sister was also busy practicing, both of them didn''t have time to cook.


    _____To be continued______

 Chapter 212 212 - The Day Before The Competition

    3 dayster,


    Sam was now fighting with his friends. Well, tomorrow was the annual inter-collegepetition. So, you can say that they were very excited about this. These few days, all of them were busy with their training and increasing their power. Tomorrow was thepetition and because of that, they wanted to face Sam, so that they can understand how much their power has increased. But then still unable to win against Sam. Today, none of them were using their full power because they did not want to get injured.


    "Haha¡­ I just can''t wait for thepetition tomorrow. I also hear that those fourth-year seniors also came back and they will also participate in tomorrow''spetition. Don''t know if there were many other seniors who breakthrough to early C-grade like sister Fiona and sister Gloria." Tony said to his friends. Jeni and the others also nodded after hearing him. Well, you can say that they were also very excited about tomorrow''spetition.


    " Not only that, but I also hear that many of our ssmates also break through to early D-grade. It looks like tomorrow we will face many powerful Warriors." Suddenly at this time, Elena said that.


    " Well, I am not sure about that because even though those ssmates break through to early D-grade, that does not mean that their power increases that much. So I am not sure about that," Kira suddenly said to them. Everyone agreed with her. Well, he was telling the truth even though ssmates of their reach early D-grade, they won''t be able to increase their power that much in this short time.


    Sam didn''t say anything. He was just listening to his friend''s conversation silently. But he was also excited about tomorrow''spetition. He doesn''t know if anyone will give him a tough fight or not.


    ____________


    Sometimeter, they were right now resting on the ground. Well, they weren''t in the Academy. Right now they are in Alexa''s house and using her training room to fight against each other. After continuing fighting, they were now exhausted and, because of this; they were resting.


    Sometimeter, a butler enters the training grounds. He was not alone with him; many other workers also entered the training ground. All of those workers were holding some tes. Most likely, they were bringing some food for them.


    ____________


    Sam and the others were eating the food that the worker brought here for them. Right now it was 2:00 p.m. and you can say that they were very hungry. So when those workers brought them food, they did not waste any more time and quickly started to eat. All of them were training here from 7:00 a.m. and because of this, they were very hungry.


    ________


    "Sam, what do you think about those fourth-year students? Will there be any fourth year that could break through to early C-grade?" Tony suddenly asked him.


    " Well¡­ I am not sure about that. But previously my sister told me that there are many Warriors from the fourth year that were very powerful. When my sister was in the peak D-grade, she also fought with one of them and the results were a draw between them. So don''t underestimate our fourth year. I think there will be some seniors that breakthrough to early C-grade. Also, as you know that when the student reaches the 4th year, the guild will approach them. And the meaning is that if you join the guild then you will get many resources. So I won''t be surprised if tomorrow we get to know that many of our 4th-year seniors have already be early C-grade warriors. " Sam told all of this to his friends.


    Tony and the others nodded. They also agree with him. They already know that when someone gets approached by a guild or joined a guild, they will get many sources from the guild that will increase their power. Instantly they understand that they should not underestimate their 4th-year seniors.


    ______


    Right now, Sam is fighting against Tony and Alexa. Well, you guessed it right; he was fighting against both of them at the same time. All of them were using their spirit techniques to fight against each other.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Suddenly, Tony attacks Sam from behind, but Sam already senses him. So he quickly dodge but in the next moment, Alexa, who was very close to him also attacked him. Sam quickly brings his sword in front of him, to use that as a shield to defend against Alexa''s swing. Right now, if you look toward their sword, then you will notice that both of their swords were glowing in blue color.


    Sam suddenly jumps away from that ce because at this time Tony has already attacked him once again. He suddenly looked toward Tony and went toward him to attack him. But Tony wasn''t alone, both Alexa and Tony were at the same time also attacked him. But they still got sent backward. In front of the swing from Sam, they were not able to hold on.


    "The winner is Sam," at this time Jeni suddenly announces the result. Both Tony and Alexa were outside of the mark. So naturally, Sam was the winner.


    Tony sighed and sat down.


    "Haha¡­ still wasn''t able to defeat him. Even though he was fighting opponents at the same time, he was still winning the fight." Tony said.


    " Yes. Previously I thought that I could reach up to him but right now I think that is impossible. Even though we were in the same grade, Sam was always strong enough to defeat us." Alexa said to Tony. At this Jeni and others who were near them also nodded.


    ____________


    Sometimeter, Jeni and Elena were now fighting Sam at the same time. This will be thest fight. Because in this fight they were using their spells to fight against each other, all of them were maintaining a distance from each other.


    Suddenly, 5 lightning bolts went toward Sam from his left side. white many light spears were going to inform his right side. But Sam wasn''t slow. Instantly, a firewall appeared in front of him. Sam wasn''t using his blue me because that would be very dangerous. Also, he was just fighting with his friends, so he didn''t need to use his full strength. Also, Jeni and Elena weren''t using their full strength. As you know, they did not want to injure anyone or injure themselves. Because of this, they are using a limit of their power that is only harmful to their friends.


    Recently Jeni mastered her white lighting, but right now she is still using her normal yellow lighting. Like her, Elena also already masters the light spear and many other light spells, but they don''t use that much power.


    Sam quickly deactivated the firewall, and then instantly threw a fireball toward Jeni and Elena. Jeni and Elena were at this time about to once again attack, but before they attacked Sam, Sam was faster and he attacked them. Instantly counterattack that fireball. But at this time, Sam once again begins to create many fireballs. At this time, both of the girls quickly jumped away from their ce and avoided the attack.


    But Sam already vanished from his ce. He was now in front of both girls and about to attack them with his sword. At this time, suddenly, both of the girls bring out their swords and also attack Sam. Both of the girls'' swords were also glowing blue. Both of the girls were also already able to use the spirit technique, but it was just that, as you know, while using the sword technique, using the spirit technique was easier. But previously teacher Samantha told them that they could also merge their spirit technique with their spell technique. It was just that it was very difficultpared to the sword technique. Both of the girls just recently were able to use the spirit techniques, so they still weren''t able to use the speed technique while using their spell. Also, you know that while they were casting spells, they directly used the spiritual energy and while they were using the spirit technique, they were using spiritual energy. Both in this factor, they were using spiritual energy and because of this; it was very difficult tobine both techniques.


    Both of the girls wanted to defend themselves but weren''t able to seed. Both their swords broke after getting Sam''s sword. But that doesn''t mean both of them will give up. Instantly they put the broken sword in their storage ring and instantly something unexpected happens. In their hands, once again, two swords appeared, but this wasn''t your normal sword. Jeni used her lighting technique to create a lighting sword, while Elena was using her light technique to create a sword. Instantly, both of them attack Sam.


    Sam got surprised for a few seconds but when he noticed both of them were about to attack him, he quickly jumped away from that ce to avoid their attack.


    "Haha¡­ Sam, how is it? This is our new move that we are learning these days." Suddenly Elena asked Sam.


    __________To be continued_______

 Chapter 213 213 - The Start Of The Competition

    "Good Move. I never thought we could make swords using the spells. Because of this, I am very surprised," Sam said to them.


    " Haha¡­ well, we also don''t know about that, but recently, after we were able to use the spirit technique, we found out about this. Some Days ago, me and Elena practiced together. Our primary focus was to use the spirit technique while using our spells. We did not seed that time, but that time using the spirit technique, I was suddenly able to make a sword using my spell. Before that, I want to tell you that when you sessfully connect your spiritual energy with your spell technique, then your spell technique will upgrade every time you use the spirit technique."


    "This means if I use the normal thunderbolt at this time, but if I use the spirit technique while using the normal thunderbolt, my thunderbolt will change into a white thunderbolt automatically. It was a good technique, but it also needed a lot of spiritual energy. Previously, teacher Samantha says that if right now we were able to sessfully use the spirit technique while using the spells, then we almost needed 90% of our spiritual energy to use that move. Well, this will happen because we forcefully upgrade the power."


    " So that day we focused on that, but even though I did not seed, I was suddenly able to make that sword using the spell. Well, you can say that while using the speed technique, I can solidify the element that I was using. So, using that solid state, I begin to change the safe and finally make the sword. After that, I also told Elena about this and she was also surprised. Both of us then focus on that. We called this technique the elementation." Jeni exins all of this to her friends. Most of our friends were surprised to hear her exnation. Who would ever think that she woulde up with a move like this?


    Sam also at this time was shocked. Well, he never thought of using the spirit technique like this also previously he only focused on his sword while using the spirit technique. As he realized that using the spirit technique while other techniques was very hard and because of this he first wanted to strengthen his base while using the sword technique.


    "Well, let me also try that," Sam said to them and then began to focus on using the spirit technique while using his fire control. But he was feeling a barrier that prevented his spiritual energy from connecting his fire control. But that didn''t disappoint him because this wasn''t his motive. He wanted to solidify the fire element so that he can also make a sword. But even after trying for some time, he was unable to make a sword. He can only solidify a small part of the fire element, but that wasn''t enough to make a sword.


    While Sam was trying, his friends were silently looking at him. They also wanted to know if he could do that on his one try. Sometimeter they only saw a ball appear in Sam''s hand, but no sword appeared. Only that ball appeared in his hand.


    Sam open his and told them,


    "Well, it looks like it will take me some time to master this because right now I can only solidify a small amount of fire energy, and that wasn''t enough to make a sword. Jeni and Elena are able to make that sword in their one try because both of them always focus on their spells instead of physical techniques, while I mainly focus on my physical techniques, and because of this, I amgging in my spiritual techniques." Sam said all of this to his friends. All of them nodded. They also know that Sam these days only focuses on his physical techniques.


    ______________


    After finishing their conversation, Sam once again begins to fight Jeni and Elena. Both of them had already healed at this time and right now they were using that elemental sword to fight Sam. Also, with those elemental swords, they can also send attacks from a long distance. Like Jeni can send thunderbolts toward while Elena can send light Spears toward Sam. Also, one more thing is that using this elementation technique, they only use 40 to 50% of their spiritual energy. They still did not master this technique properly and because of this, it cost them so much spiritual energy.


    Both of the girls attack Sam with their attack, but Sam easily dodges them using his full speed. Even though he wasn''t using his full power, he still needed to use his full speed to dodge those attacks that were continuouslying toward him. Using that full speed, he instantly came in front of those two girls and then punched them. It sent those two girls outside of the mark.


    "And the winner is Sam," Tony announces the result.


    ___________


    7:00 p.m.


    Right now, all of them are leaving Alexa''s house. Some time ago they already finished their training and right now it was time to go back there home. Tomorrow is a big day for them and because of this, everyone wants to be in their peak condition tomorrow.


    Sam was driving his car while going back to his house. Victor and Hina still did note back from the Dungeon. Only he and his sister were in the house. In these few days, Gloria always fights with Fiona. Well, like some and his friends, they were also fighting with each other. Aftering back to his home, he noticed that Gloria still had note back.


    _____________


    Around 7:20 p.m., Gloria came back. At this time, Sam was cooking in the kitchen. Right now, he was making some snacks for himself and also dinner. After everything was done he sat down at the dining table and then began to eat the snacks. Sometimeter Gloria also joins him and both of them then eat their snacks. At this time, Sam asks her about her preparation. She replies to him that she will win this fight. If any other person hears that, then they will call her overconfident, but Sam knows his sister wasn''t overconfident. It was her confidence.


    Sometimeter, Sam went back to his room andy down in his bed.


    "Name: Sam Kainer<novelnext></novelnext>


    Health: (935/935)


    Strength: 90


    Agility: 87


    Physique: 85


    Intelligent(mental power): 85


    Spirit: 60


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 150k."


    At this time he looked at his status. Right now, his strength was already at its peak condition. So most likely he needed to increase his other status points and then he could try to break through to an intermediate grade.


    ________________


    Next, on 25th November, 10:00 am,


    At this time you can see that every student from 1st year to 4th year is present in the training ground. Not only that, but even every teacher is also present there. Well, today is a big day for all those students because today is the annual inter-collegepetition.


    Right now, if you look at those students, then you can see that they were very excited. Well, those first years were the most exciting while 2nd year and the others mostly maintained their calm expression. It was natural for the first year to get excited about this because if they get chosen in thispetition, then their resources will be doubled, and you can say that day will also get famous.


    Sam and his friends were also standing on the training grounds. At this time, all the students were waiting for their principal to give them a speech before starting the annual inter-collegepetition. But at this time, If you look at Sam''s face then you can see that he was also calm. Also, one more thing was thatpared to those other first-year students, he doesn''t want to get that famous, but he won''t give up in a fight where the opponents will be weaker than him. So right now he was thinking about this, or you can say that he was in a dilemma.


    ''Sigh, who cares about that? It isn''t like that I was afraid of trouble,'' something that and decided to think about thister.


    Even after waiting some time, their principal did note to the stage. But instead of his teacher Alena, the Vice Principal of the Royal Academy, came to the stage.


    "Well, good morning to every student. Our principal was busy in a dungeon and, because of this, he wasn''t able to attend thispetition. But don''t worry about that. I will be here to monitor all of your performance. I know that most of the students here are very excited about thispetition but still remember that even though you know about your ssmates and their weaknesses, don''t let your guard down against your ssmates when you face your ssmates in the ring. Also, one more thing was that don''t get overconfident or arrogant if you face weak opponents. Most of the students often make mistakes when they get overconfident or arrogant. So don''t get overconfident or arrogant."


    " Also, as you know that the 10 students that will choose from every year will be the representative of their year in the annual collegepetition.


    ______To be continued______

 Chapter 214 214 - Inter-College Competition Day 1

    " Also, as you know that the 10 students that will choose from every year will be the representative of their year in the annual collegepetition. Also, those students will also get double the resources before the annual collegepetition to prepare themselves. "


    After saying that, teacher Alena finished her exnation and then left the stage. But before she left the stage, she looked toward Gloria and Sam and nodded at them. She knows her students'' strengths very much, and she has confidence in them.


    ______________


    All of them now were going toward the outside fighting area of the Royal Academy. Compared to the inside fighting ring, this area was much bigger. When all those students and teachers reach the fighting area, there are so many people already present in the stadiums. Well, it was natural because the inter-college annualpetition was really popr in the central city. Even many people from outside of the central city also came to the stadium to watch their match.


    At this time many 1st year students get nervous after seeing this many crowds. Well, those 2nd years and the other students have the experience in this and because of this, they were calm. But for those first-year students, this is a new experience for them and because of this many of them were nervous. Because even when they were giving the college entrance examination, they didn''t need to face this many people in front of them.


    Suddenly teacher Nitin says to them,


    "Don''t get nervous. This is nothing. You all need to get used to it because when you go to the annual collegepetition, then you will face a crowd muchrger than this. So it will be a good experience for all of you. Now calm down and be ready for your match." Teacher Nitin said all the first year. All of them nodded. They also know that in the annual collegepetition, they will face a crowd muchrger than this.


    _________________


    Sometimeter, the teachers at this time decided on the opponents. It will take some time. All the students at this time were now waiting in the stadium except those first-year students. Because like every year, the first-year students will fight at first and then the second year, and at the end those 4th year students. So except for those first-year students, all the other year''s students were now in the stadium.


    Sam and his friends were now with all other of their ssmates. They were now waiting outside of the battle ring because they were waiting for the teachers to decide on their opponents. Right now, they have 320 students in their first years, and most likely 160 students will face another 160 students. It will take some time. Also, because they have only 5 days to decide on the 10 students, the Royal Academy also set a time limit. So all of them needed to finish their fight this time. This could be 5 minutes or 10 minutes or even 15 minutes. But most likely Sam was guessing that the time limit would be 5 minutes. Because previously when his teacher talked about this she already told him that this year the time limit could be 5 minutes.


    _______________


    Sometimeter, the teacher already decided on the opponents. At this time, a person came to the main stage and then started to talk.


    "Hello everyone, I hope you all are excited about the start of this match. As you know, every year we start the match with our first-year students, and this year the rule will be the same. Our first-year students will start the match. We already decided on the opponents, so wasting no time let''s start our match," after finishing telling everyone that person left the stage.


    Everyone then looks at the big screen where the teachers review the opponent''s name. All 320 students were divided into 10 groups. In all these 10 groups, 32 students will fight against each other. After the fight, only 16 students will remain in that group. So like this, only one person will be selected from that group who will be the winner of that group. When those 10 winners from those 10 groups will be selected, only then those 10 Warriors will fight against each other.


    Sam and his friends are looking at the screen right now. Looking at the group he was in, Sam just smiled. He was in group A. While his friends were in other groups. The most interesting thing was that many of his friends will face each other until they be the winner. Sam just smiled. Because he already expected that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Guys, best of luck. Most likely, we won''t be facing each other if we don''t win the group fight. So best of luck all of you and don''t lose," Sam at this time set this to his friends. They also smiled at him and nodded. None of them also wanted to lose.


    " Haha¡­ bro, don''t worry about that. The fight will most likely begin with group A so you will be fighting the first match. What should I say? Should I say good luck to your opponents or you? Haha¡­" Tony suddenly said to him in a joking manner. Hearing his job, everyone begins tough. After that, they left the training grounds, and right now they were going toward the stadium. They already have a vacant seat for them. So they didn''t need to worry about their seats.


    ____________


    "So let''s call our first two students in the stadium. Also, I wanted to tell all the first-year students one rule. You have only 5 minutes to finish your fight. As you know that we have many students and because of this you need to finish your fight as quickly as you can. So, wasting no time, let''s start our fight." After saying that, the teacher called the first opponent on the stage. Install the audience and begin to p for those first-year students. Well, all the people in the stadium wanted to give motivation to these students and because of this, they were pping for these students. At this time, two students came to the battle ring. At this time, a referee was already present in the battle ring. Both of the students came to the stage. The referee signals both of them to a handshake.


    "Students, are both of you ready?" The referee asked those two students. Those two students nodded and then the referee signaled them to fight. Instantly, both of those students begin to approach each other. At this time, a timer is also shown on the big screen. They need to finish their fight in 5 minutes.


    ___________


    45 minutester, it was now Sam''s turn to fight his opponent. Well, previously on the screen it was shown to him that his fight will be thest fight of group A. Just when the referee announced Sam''s name instantly, a loud cheer came from those in the audience. Even Sam''s friends for him. Sam just smiled and wave his hand toward all of them.


    '' Well, this is not a bad feeling,'' Sam murmured while walking up to the stage. At this time, his opponents also came to the stage. Then both he and his opponent shake their hand. Well, Sam decided to finish this fight as quickly as he could. Previously, some matches were boring to him, but then he noticed many of his ssmates showing good power. The current opponent he was facing also wasn''t a weakling. Just looking at this person, you can tell that he just recently became an early D-grade warrior. Sam was quite excited to feel the power of his opponent.


    At this time, the student who was facing Sam was quite nervous. He was now facing Sam Kainer. This person can defeat 2nd year easily and because of this, even after bing an early D-grade warrior, he did not have that much confidence in defeating Sam.


    After that, the referee asked them if they were ready or not. Both of them nodded, and the referee gave them the signal to fight. At this time, the student saw Sam suddenly disappear from his ce. Instantly, that student became very alert because he already knew about the special or you can say, his favorite technique of Sam. He became very alert and tried to look around his surroundings, but still, unexpectedly, he suddenly experienced pain in his stomach and then he only saw darkness in his eyes.


    As you can guess, Sam uses his full speed to quickly appear in front of his opponent and wastes no time punching his stomach. Even though Sam did not use his full strength, the punch was powerful enough to make that student unconscious by one punch.


    The referee who was present in the stadium just stood there in a daze. He didn''t even know what happened and why that boy suddenly became unconscious. Because previously when he gave the signal for the fight, Sam suddenly vanished from his ce using his full speed.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 215 215 - Inter College Competition (2)

    Sam''s opponent fell down on the ground. The referee came back to his senses and went toward him. After checking that he was just unconscious, he quickly announces the name of the winner.


    "The winner is Sam Kainer." Instantly many people present in the stadium begin to p for Sam. For a moment, they were also in a daze, but when the referee went toward Sam''s opponent, they came back to their senses. After that, the referee announces the winner''s name and all of them begin to p for Sam.


    Sam smiled at those people who were pping for him and then left the ring. Well, for today he already finished his fight so he can go toward his friends.


    ____________


    While Sam wasing toward the stadium, many people present in the stadium were also talking about Sam. Among those people, many people belong to the other college. All those people came here to know about the details of the students of the Royal Academy. They were also very shocked after watching Sam speed. At first, all the people thought that Sam used his concealment technique, butter they noticed that he only used his movement technique to travel fast. Because of this, many people from those other colleges were very shocked.


    "It looks like our college will have a hard time against him. Sigh," a person who was sitting in thest row of the stadium said to the other person that was sitting beside him. He came from the white Tiger Academy while the other person came from Golden dawn. They were sent by their academy here to know the details of those students who will fight in the annual collegepetition.


    "Yes, you are right. I also heard a rumor that Sam defeated a 2nd-year student a few days ago. Just imagine how powerful this boy is. I don''t even know if anyone in the first year could defeat him or not," the other person said.


    Like this, both of them then once again focus on the match while talking about the students that were fighting in the battle ring. At this time, they did not have any doubt that Sam will be the person who will go to the annual collegepetition. So right now they were thinking about which of the other nine students will take the annual collegepetition from the first year. Because of this, they were now focusing on the uing matches in the battle ring. Not only them but many people from the0 other colleges were also present here, and they also looked at the battle ring to know about those people.


    ____________


    Sam at this time was already with his friends. Butpared to his friends he was now sleeping. Previously because he was very excited, for a whole night he just only practiced even when his sister told him to rest his body. But to calm down, he fights those two robots for someone. Because of this right now he was tired and he was sleeping at this moment. The most important thing was that all of this fight was boring for him and because of this, he was not sleeping. Not that he was feeling bored because he was very overconfident, he was feeling bored because those Warriors were pretty weak.


    Right now in the battle area, all the students from group B are present there. Alexa was in group B and she was also present in the battle area, but her fight is at the end. Because of this, you can say that she has a lot of time before her match. Now she was concentrating.


    _______________


    "Well, Aliya is very good at fighting. Who could have thought that she could improve this much in this short time?" Sam said with a smile. Well, not only Alexa, but Ali was also present in that group B. She already finished her fight against her opponent. Like those other students, she did not waste any more time and quickly finished that fight as quickly as she could. From the first, she started to use her strong technique. You can say that she did not give any chance to her opponent to react and within a few minutes quickly defeated her opponent.


    When the referee announced the winner''s name, once again, many people began to p for her. Sam and his friends were also pping for her because she was a friend to him and his friends. Alexa, also at this time, looked at Aliya and also pped for her. They already know each other and Aliya even challenges her and the others many times. Because of this, she was familiar with Aliya.


    Aliya left the battle ring,ing toward Alexa. She saw Alexa was pping for her, which made her quickly embarrassed. She wasn''t a shy girl but still, when she saw Alexa pping for her she became quite embarrassed.


    "Nice match. This was a good strategy that you did not give any chance to your opponent to move," Alexa said to her. Aliya nodded and after sitting down beside her. It will still take some time for Alexa to go toward the battle ring. For a few minutes, Alexa looked toward the battle ring, but she did not get any excited after watching all those fights, so she once again closed her eyes and began to concentrate. While concentrating, she was only thinking about the best way to fight in the battle ring. The easiest way will be to attack the opponent with all of her full power. From the beginning, she did not give her opponent any chance to move. In this way, she could easily win the fight quickly.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _________


    60 minutester,


    Even though most of them almost needed 5 minutes to finish the fights, there are still some Warriors who in less than 1 minute finished their fight and left the battle ring. Aliya is also one of them.


    Right now, Alexa was in the battle ring while she was facing her opponents, who were also a girl. But the most interesting thing was that she knew this girl because this girl was also from the same school as Alexa. The name of this girl is Meena. Also, don''t underestimate her because she was an early D-grade warrior. Because of this, Alexa did not make any mistakes while fighting her. Even though she had confidence in her strength, Alexa still did not want to make any mistakes while fighting her.


    Wasting no time, Alexa quickly used her strongest sword move while using her spirit technique. Previously, she thought she could easily defeat her opponent. Because of this, she did not want to use the spirit technique. But now she understands that if she wants to finish this fight quickly, she needs to use that technique against her opponent.


    Her sword started to glow in blue color. With that, she attacked Meena with her full strength. Meena, who was fighting against Alexa at first, did not realize that Alexa was using the spirit technique, but when the sword was only a few centimeters away from her, she suddenly remembered that it was the spirit technique that their teacher told them. She was using a shield and sword at the same time.


    When Alexa''s sword was only a few centimeters away from her face, she quickly brought that shield in front of her face to defend herself. But still, the force behind Alexa''s attack was very powerful. Instantly a cracking sound nearby many people hear. All of them looked at her. How easily Alexa had broken that shield with just one swing. That installment shocked many people because that shield wasn''t your normal shield. It was a shield made by the grandmaster of the central city. Also, it was a peak D-grade shield. But Alexa is still able to break that with just one attack. This instantly made many people very curious about her.


    At this time, Alexa quickly punches Meena. She did not give her any chance to move and quickly punched her and made her unconscious. That referee quickly came to Meena and checked her. When he noticed that she was only unconscious, he quickly announced the name of the winner. Instantly, the whole stadium was filled with pping. She was thest person to fight and after that; it was time for those groups c to fight.


    ____________


    "Most likely this Alexa will be the winner from group B. That girl Aliya was good, but I don''t think she was as strong as Alexa. So most likely Alexa will be the winner," the person from the white Tiger Academy once again said to the other person that was sitting beside him. The other person hearing him nodded.


    __________


    Both Aliya and Alexa already came back to their seats in the stadium while Tony went toward the battle area. Well, now, it was his time to fight.


    "Haha¡­ guys wish me luck. I will try to finish the fight as quickly as I can," before going to the battle area, he said to his friends. Sam and the others just smile at him and wish him good luck.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 216 216 - Inter College Competition (3)

    The opponents that Tony was facing right now, quickly approached him. But Tony also wasn''t slow the moment the referee gave them the signal he was already preparing his attack. That''s right, he was using the spirit technique. Like Sam and Alexa, the opponents, he was facing also were early D-grade warriors. But like those other students, this person also recently broke through and because of this, he wasn''t that powerful to defeat him. Tony did not want to waste that much time and, because of this, he decided to use his powerful technique from the beginning.


    Both the opponents were now in front of each other and both of them quickly swung their swords toward each other. At this time, everyone present in the stadium already noticed that Tony''s sword was glowing blue.


    __________


    Right now in the audience, except for some people, the other people are very surprised. The students from the Royal Academy and those people from the other collegese here to know the details. These were the people who weren''t surprised. Because they naturally know about spirit technique and because of this, nobody is surprised. But those ordinary people who just came here to watch the match were very surprised. They know that the Royal Academy teaches their students this special technique, but not every student can master it. But they did not know about the special technique that much and the reason they were surprised was that they never saw these many students from the first year who can use spirit techniques. Every year there are only a few people from the first year who can use this technique. So after seeing three people using this technique, all of those people were surprised.


    ____________


    At this time, Tony had already attacked his opponent. The warrior who was facing Tony at this time tried to defend himself from Tony''s attack. But this was not your normal attack. If Tony did not use the speed technique, then this warrior could have had the chance to defend, but after using the spirit technique, the power behind the attack and the sharpness already increased. Because of this, Tony''s opponent already was outside of the battle ring. Quickly the medical team came toward that person because he was already unconscious. Seriously, look at his condition but sometimeter the referee signals that it wasn''t that serious. Only then did the referee announce the name of the winner. As you can guess, Tony was thest one to fight in group C.


    "The winner is Tony Taylor," the referee announced his name as the winner. Instantly, the whole stadium was filled with the sound of pping. This made Tony smile. After that, he left the ring.


    This time also this group''s fight only needed 45 minutes to finish. Tony, at this time, was going toward his friends. Sam and the others noticed me begin to p for him. Tony just smiles at them and sits in his seat. Jeni got up from her seat.


    "Best of luck,"


    "Don''t go easy on them."


    "Just use your full power to finish the fight quickly."


    Right now, the teacher called those students who were in group D. Jeni also was in that group and because of this; she needed to go to the battle area. When all those students begin to go toward the battle area, the people in the stadium begin to p for them. Well, everyone knows these students are under great pressure, so they wanted to motivate these students and because of this day, were pping for them.


    ___________


    Like the previous matches, Jeni''s match was also in thest. She needed to wait for her time. She was now sitting outside of the battle ring and looking at the match that was happening in the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    She was looking at the fight while also concentrating on her spiritual energy. She wanted to use her powerful technique that could easily defeat her opponent (not killed). Because of this, she was now concentrating on her spiritual energy, but that does not mean that she will ignore the match that was happening in the battle ring. Even though this ssmate of hers was weak, that does not mean that she will ignore them or underestimate them. You will never get to know when suddenly someone powerfules out of these weak people.


    Right now, this to students who are fighting in battle doing was using spells and swords. Well, one student used a spell while the other one used a sword. With this, you can easily guess that one student is a spiritual Warrior while the other one is a physical Warrior. But the most interesting thing was that they were fighting against each other. Those spiritual Warriors normally have disadvantages in a closebat match, but they have advantages in long-distance attacks. On the other hand, those physical Warriors have an advantage in closebat, while they have a disadvantage in long distance.


    Well, not only she but many people present in the stadium were also looking at the fight with interest. Well, this was a normal thing, but still, those people are interested in this fight. Right now, all of them are thinking about what that physical Warrior should do at this moment because that spiritual Warrior continuously maintains a distance between them while attacking that physical Warrior. That physical warrior was trying to get close to that spiritual warrior. Because of this, you can say that everyone was very interested in this fight.


    That spiritual warrior was a water user. Right now, she was throwing water spears toward that physical warrior. But the physical warrior is able to dodge all those attacks using his speed. But that does not mean it was easy for him. After continuously dodging all this attack he was exhausted, but he knew that it wasn''t time to rest. At any rate, he needed to decrease the distance between himself and the opponent. Because of this, he was dodging all those attacks while trying to get close to his opponent.


    Sam also, at this time, looked at the fight with interest. He easily noticed the motive of that physical warrior, but it seems that the spiritual warrior was busy attacking that warrior continuously. Because of this, Sam can feel that the spiritual warrior was low on spiritual energy because he continuously attacked his opponent.


    Sam''s guess was right, because sometimeter the spiritual Warrior already noticed that he was very low on spiritual energy. It has already been 3 minutes; they have only 2 minutes left to finish their fight. At this time, the spiritual warrior suddenly stops attacking. After that, he closed his eyes and began to prepare for his most powerful attack. In this attack, he will use all of his spiritual energy and after that, even if he lost, then he will think that the other guy was powerful.


    At this time, the physical warrior already notices that the spiritual warrior stops attacking him. He did not waste any more time and quickly, using his full speed, appeared beside that spiritual warrior. The spiritual warrior did not Dodge or make any movement. But that does not matter to the physical warrior, because he was already about to attack his opponent with his strongest attack.


    But at this time suddenly that spiritual warrior opened his eyes and then said, "water prison," Instantly that spiritual Warrior and that physical Warrior were now inside a round water prison that was filled with water.


    [A/N: Well, like an aquarium, but it was round. Hahaha¡­.]


    Instantly, the expression of the physical warrior turned pale. He already knew that he was now inside of a trap and if he wasn''t able to break that trap, then he would lose the fight. Even inside that water prison, that physical warrior tries to attack that spiritual warrior. Because this was the only way to get away from that water prison. But that physical warrior seems to forget that the spiritual warrior has full control in that water prison. He instantly turns the physical warrior into a sharp Spear. At this time, the physical warrior noticed his situation wasn''t good, so he quickly raised his hand. He was giving the sign to the referee that he was giving up on the fight.


    Instantly the referee appears in the battle ring and makes the water prison disappear using his power. That physical warrior, aftering out of the water prison, started to cough. That spiritual warrior at this time was panting. Because in this water prison he uses all of his spiritual energy and because of this right now he is exhausted mentally. But still, he did not be unconscious because he was waiting for the referee to announce the winner''s name.


    Well, the referee didn''t waste any more time and quickly announced the name of the winner. Instantly all the people in the stadium begin to p for the winner. At this time, the referee suddenly heard a sound from behind. When he turned around, he saw that the spiritual warrior had already be unconscious. At this time, the medical team quickly came toward them and quickly checked both of the warriors.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 217 217 - Inter College Competition (4)

    At the time, everyone present in the stadium began to p for the spiritual warrior for his outstanding performance. At first, they did not think that the spiritual warrior would be the winner. When he stopped attacking that physical warrior and that physical warrior used that chance toe in front of him, everyone present in the stadium thought that the spiritual warrior was most likely going to lose in this fight. But no one thought that a spiritual warrior was gonna do something like this. Because of this, everyone in the stadium pped for him.


    Jeni, who was outside of the battle, was surprised when she saw the move that the spiritual Warrior came up with. That was a superb move that no one expected. At this time, the medical team had already finished checking up on these two warriors. Both of them are okay. Both of the warriors left the battle ring and the next opponents came to the battle ring.


    This is when students who came to the battle ring begin to look at each other. Right now, both of them are spiritual warriors. Wasting no time, both of them begin to prepare their spells. They were mostly waiting for the referee to give them the signal to fight.


    That also did not dy that much and quickly give them the signal to fight. Instantly, both of the students begin to attack each other with their spells.


    __________


    At the stadium,


    "Guys, seriously, I never thought that my ssmate woulde up with that move. If it was before I learned the spirit technique, then I also did not have the chance to win against that move. Because who would have thought that you would suddenly find yourself in a water prison and your opponent could control the water in that prison?" Tony said with a sigh.


    " Well, the moment that spiritual Warrior closed his eyes and began to concentrate, that moment I knew that he was preparing for something big that would defeat his opponent. But one thing you also notice is that he was very low on spiritual energy and after casting that water prison, most likely that Warrior only had 5% of his spiritual energy. If that physical warrior could hold on for a minute, then he could win that fight because that spiritual warrior couldn''t maintain the water prison that long. But it seems that the physical warrior also panicked after finding himself in the water prison," Alexa told them. Everyone nodded, hearing her.


    "Well, most likely these two ssmates also needed 5 minutes to finish their fights. I just hope that they can quickly finish their fight." Tony said, while looking toward the stadium.


    Sam, at this time, said nothing to his friends. He alsomented nothing about all these matches. Right now he was observing the stadium and the people that were present in the stadium. He already saw the second-year, third-year, and 4th-year students. But even right now he cannot see his sister or senior Fiona. Most likely they didn''te here. You also look at those normal people that were present in the stadium.


    _________


    50 minutester,


    10 thunderbolts went toward the boy that was present in the battle ring. As you guess, Jeni was fighting this guy. Finally, it was her fight. For 50 minutes, she just kept waiting for her match. That boy also was a spiritual warrior. He instantly cast a water barrier in front of him. But after seeing that water barrier, Jeni just smiled.


    "Is this boy dumb or what? I am using a lightning element and he was using the water element against it?" When she notices the boy using the water barrier to defend himself from her lightning attack, Jeni instantly bes shocked after seeing that. Well, not that she can do anything. She just smiles and finally, those thunderbolts hit that water shield or you can say water barrier.


    "Ahhh!!!!" Instantly, she heard a painful cry. That water barrier got deactivated, and she saw that the thunderbolts already hit the warrior who was using the water element. Well, this is natural because this water is unable to prevent lightning. Right now, you can see the Burn mark on that warrior''s body. Not only that, her lighting already paralyzes that student. Jeni did not waste this chance and quickly went toward that warrior. This type of chance you will never receive once again, so she quickly wanted to finish this fight. At this time, she quickly created a ball in her hand. This was the lightning ball. Wasting no more, she quickly throws that ball toward that warrior. That ball, with an incense speed, went toward that warrior and hit him.


    Previously, that warrior was only paralyzed by Jeni''s attack, but this time, when he got hit by the ball of thunder, he was unable to defend himself and lost consciousness. Outside of the battle, the medical team was all ready to enter the battle ring. The moment they saw that Warrior falling down on the ground, they quickly entered the battle ring and checked the condition of the student.


    Sometimeter, they told the referee that the student was unconscious because he was just unconscious. Well, Jeni did not use her full power in this attack and because of this Warrior did not receive that much injury. The referee, who also was in the battle ring, quickly announced the name of the warrior.


    Instantly, Tony, Alexa, and the others begin to cheer and p for Jeni. Aftering to the battle ring, she just quickly finished that fight. She only needed 2 minutes to finish this fight. With this, those people present in the stadium can guess how powerful this girl was.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Jeni just smiled after seeing those people cheering for her. She also did not use that much spiritual energy and because of this, she wasn''t that exhausted. She calmly left the battle ring and started walking toward the stadium.


    ___________


    "Most likely, Jeni will be the winner of this group. If you are wondering how I can tell that. Well, this is easy, because if you look at her right now, then you can see that she did not have an exhausted look on her face. That means she was still in her peak condition. Most likely she just used 20% of her spiritual energy to cast that attack." At this time, people from the white Tiger Academy discussed this thing among themselves. Not only he but those people from the other college were also discussing her. Those people were recording all this fight because this could be helpful for their college students.


    Well, if you are wondering why Royal Academy waste, those people take videos of their students. Well, because Royal Academy has confidence in their students and also they know that their best students weren''t using their full power in this fight.


    ________________


    "Miss Jeni is cool. Did you notice how calm she was when facing her opponent? With this, you can imagine how powerful she is." At this time, many of Jeni''s fans were talking about her. If you are wondering how she has fans, then you don''t know anything because not only Jeni, there are many students who also have fans and fan clubs. Alexa, Tony, Elena, and even Sam have a fan club. This fan club was formed when they were giving exams in the college entrance examination.


    Right now all Jeni''s fan club members were cheering for Jeni. All of them were shouting her name.


    ______________


    ______


    Dan quickly shoots thest arrow. Compared to his previous arrows, he increases his power while pulling the string on the bow. That Arrow quickly hit the opponent. The opponent didn''t even get the chance to react and dodge the attack. He fell down on the ground. Dan uses this chance to approach that student and quickly brings out a knife and holds the knife to his opponent''s neck.


    The referee quickly announced that Dan was the winner of this fight. Instantly, those people present in the stadium begin to cheer for Dan. This was a wonderful fight.


    Dan smiled when the referee announced his name as a winner. He also smiled at those people that were cheering for him. After that, he left the battle ring.


    ____


    A teacher came to the battle ring at this time and began to talk.


    "Well, what a wonderful fight from our first-year students. Please, everyone p for our first-year students. Before the fighting, many students were very nervous, but right now all those fastest students are full of fighting energy. Well, as you know, this all happened because all of you are supporting them. So I don''t want to waste your time and let''se to our 2nd year. In Just a few minutes we will start our 2nd-year students'' matches. Also, like every year except for the first year, the other students will fight in a battle royal. Like those first years, they were also divided into groups. When we call the group on the stage, every student in that group needs toe to the stage and they will fight against each other. Only one person will be the winner¡­"


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 218 218 - Inter College Competition (5)

    "Well, what a wonderful fight from our first-year students. Please, everyone p for our first-year students. Before the fighting mini was very nervous, but right now all those fastest students are full of fighting energy. Well, as you know, this all happened because all of you are supporting them. So I don''t want to waste your time and let''se to our 2nd year. In Just a few minutes we will start our 2nd-year students'' matches. Also, like every year except for the first year, the other student will fight in a battle royal. Like those first years, they were also divided into groups. When we call the group on the stage, every student in that group needs toe to the stage and they will fight against each other. Only one person will be the winner. I wanted to tell all the first year that from tomorrow you will also need to fight the battle royal. Every year except the first year, the other year''s students fight in the battle royal. With this, we can save time and also find powerful students among them." After saying that the teacher left the stage or you can say the battle ring.


    Instantly, all the crowd at this time begin to scream and p. Well, all of them are waiting for the battle royal. Like every year, this year for those first year''s first matches, the college did not arrange the battle royal. But for those other year''s students, they needed to fight in that battle royal. Also, from tomorrow, those first years also needed to fight in that battle royal.


    "Group J, pleasee to the battle ring," the teacher announced the name of the group that was going to fight. Instantly, 10 students one by one came to the battle ring and everyone was looking at each other. They will all fight against each other at the same time and in the end, only one will be the winner. Right now, all of them were waiting for the referee to give them the signal to fight.


    "So, this is the battle royal," Tony eximed at this time. They already know about the battle royal, because they already watched the previous video on the warriorwork. But it was quite interesting how all those fighters fight against each other at the same time, and only one who remains in the battle ring undefeated will be the winner.


    "Began," wasting no time when the referee gives them the signal. Instantly, all the students begin to attack each other. The audience at this time began to cheer loudlypared to before. Well, they have been eating for this. So, they naturally cheer loudly.


    At this time,


    Right now, in the battle ring, you can see that none of the students were holding back. They all have been using their full power from the beginning because all of them know only one will be the winner, so every one of them wanted to be the winner.


    In this group, you can also see physical warriors and spiritual warriors. Those spiritual Warriors also did not hold back. From the beginning, they have been using spells to attack physical Warriors. But you cannot also ignore those physical warriors because all those physical warriors use their speed to avoid the attack from the spiritual warrior. Using their speed, they also came in front of those spiritual Warriors.


    At this time Sam was looking at the fight very carefully because tomorrow they also will have to face this kind of battle.


    Sometimeter, right now, 10 Warriors were left in the battle ring except John and the others. All the other students already got eliminated by the referees and now the medical team was cheating all those students. Sam still didn''t know the name of the 2nd year student who challenged him a few days ago.


    Sam did not find anyone familiar in this group and after watching for some time he started to feel bored, but at this time those 10 Warriors didn''t waste any time. All of them quickly began to prepare for their final attack and attack.


    Right now 6 spiritual warriors and 4 physical Warriors were present on the stage. Most of the students were still in the early D-grade stage. Only 3 students were in the intermediate grade. With this, you can naturally guess what could happen. Those three warriorspletely defeated all the other 7 Warriors. All those seven warriors were outside of the battle ring and the medical team was checking their injuries.


    In the battle ring,<novelnext></novelnext>


    One Warrior was a physical warrior, while the other two were spiritual Warriors. Right now, both spiritual Warriors were working together to defeat the physical warrior. But that physical warrior wasn''t a weakling. He also uses his full power to dodge those attacks. Not only that, he is also searching for a chance to get close to those spiritual warriors and attack them. But even though he was very careful, he still got defeated by those two spiritual Warriors.


    But those two spiritual Warriors did not rx. Right now, only two of them were in the battle ring, so they were looking at each other. Both of them are very exhausted after fighting these many of their ssmates, but they still have the energy to fight. Both of them started to prepare their spells.


    Sam and his friends already feel the power behind those two spells. Most likely both of them wanted to finish this fight with this attack and because of this, both of them were preparing this attack using their full strength. This attack will decide who will be the winner and who will be the loser.


    You can say that it was a very tense moment for everyone. Even those people in the audience were silent at this time because it was a very serious situation. 2 minutester, both of the warriors already prepared their spells.


    One Warrior used a fire spell while the other was using a water spell. Well, you can say that day we are pr opposites to each other. So right now they just need to see the result. Who will be the winner? Could that fire be able to evaporate the water, or that water will destroy the fire? All the people present in the stadium were excited and curious about that.


    The fire element user created a big fireball. Most likely, it was a great fireball while the water users also created a great water ball. Like the great fireball, the water ball could also create big destruction. Instead of burning everything, this water ball will summon a big tsunami. Fortunately, the audience was safe because the teacher had already created a barrier around the stadium so that no attack would reach the stadium.


    At this time, everyone was looking at the battle ring. Both of the warriors shoot their attack toward each other. Well, in this desperate situation they forget to hold back and because of this could be a very serious situation. Many teachers who watched this already wanted to stop the fight, but then Vice Principal Alena told them not to interfere. Because there will be no serious harm in this. The referee was already prepared to interfere with the match if he saw the situation wasn''t right.


    Both of the attacks collide with each other, and instantly an enormous explosion appears. Everyone present in the stadium heard a loud sound created by the destruction. The battle ring was now covered with fog. Nobody is able to tell what''s happening in that battle ring. Sam instantly activated his spirit eye technique to see what was happening in the battle ring. Not only Sam, but those Warriors who have the eye skill also activated their skills or technique to see through that fog.


    Everyone was now focusing on that battle ring. Sometimeter, the fog began to clear. At this time, all the people present in the stadium saw the referee was already in the ring. Not only the referee, but those medical teams are also present in the battle ring. But still, none of them interfere in the match. Right now, all the people can see that both of the warriors are still standing in the battle ring.


    So right now the main question was, who is the winner? Everyone was now thinking about this question, but suddenly one warrior fell down on the ground. It was the water ball user who fell down on the ground. The fire element user was also going to be unconscious, but he was still holding because the referee still did not announce the name of the winner. After seeing the situation, the referee finally announced the result, and only then the fire user fell down on the ground. Instantly, all the crowd present in the stadium cheer and ps for their match. This was a wonderful match and both of them really performed better than those other students. The medical team was already checking their condition. Fortunately, none of them were seriously injured. In theirst attack, both of the attacks were evenly matched, but the water user was very exhausted and fell unconscious.


    The medical team brought those two students outside of the battle ring while the teacher finally came to the battle ring.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 219 219 - Inter College Competition (6)

    "As you can see, the winner of the battle is Royal. This was a very wonderful fight. All of these students perform brilliantly, but the winner will be the only one person who will still remain in the battle ring at the end. I was really thankful to all the people that came to our stadium to watch thepetition. Thank you, everyone, for supporting our students. Our students were very motivated after getting your support. So for today, the match is finished. Tomorrow at 8:00 a.m.we will once again start ourpetition. Until then, everyone, please rest for today." After saying that, the teacher left the battle ring while those people began to leave the stadium one by one. For today, thepetition was finished and because of this, everyone was leaving. Right now it was 6:00 p.m.


    Sam and his friends also left the stadium. All of them were going toward the cafeteria because they were very hungry.


    _____________


    "Those twost attacks were very powerful. I don''t even know if I could survive those two attacks. Haha¡­ after Sam defeated the second-year student I thought nobody in the 2nd year would be this powerful, but I was really wrong. If I was fighting in that match, then both of those seniors would be able to defeat me easily." Tony eximed with a sigh. Previously, he really underestimated those 2nd-year students. But he knew that he was very wrong.


    After that, all of that enters the cafeteria. You can say thatpared to the other day, today the cafeteria was fully crowded. Many students were in the cafeteria. They also came here to eat something. When Sam and his friends entered the cafeteria for some time, everything became silent on the first floor. Because right now every student is present on the first floor looking toward them. Even those seniors were also looking toward them. You can say that Sam and his friends didn''t mind that. They just ignored them and went toward the stairs. But at this time, suddenly someone called Sam.


    Sam turned around and saw that it was Aliya and her friends. All of them were also present on the first floor and they were also eating their food. Sam waves his hand toward them.


    "Talk to youter," after saying that Sam and his friends approach the second floor.


    _____________


    Today the first floor was very crowded, but the second floor was also very crowded because those fourth-year students were also present on the second floor. So it was natural that it would be crowded. Those top 10 students from the 4th year are also present on the second floor. When he and his friend came to the second floor, they already noticed those fourth-year students were looking at them, but they did not mind them and ordered their food.


    Sometimeter,


    "Sam, what happened to sister Gloria? I did not see her in the match. Also, I did not like my sister Fiona," suddenly Jeni asked him.


    "I also don''t know what happened. Previously my sister told me that she will bete, but I don''t know where she is right now. Most likely they also did note to the cafeteria because if they came here, we would already notice them. " Sam said to them.


    " I think both of them are busy with their training. Sister Gloria and sister know that today they won''t be fighting and because of this day did note to the battle ring." Elena said that.


    " Well, actually, you all were wrong. Because I previously noticed sister Gloria and sister Fiona in the teacher''s area. Was fighting both of them present there but after that, Ipletely forgot about them so I don''t know if they are still present in that stadium or not," Alexa said.


    " Well, guys, nowe to the main thing, tomorrow''s match or we can say in our next match we will also fight in the battle royal. " Sam said to them. This was the main thing that was now important because in their next fight they will also fight in the battle royal.


    " Yes, you are right. Right now, this is the most important thing because we will fight in that battle royale and don''t know what will happen in that match. I have confidence in my strength, but still sometimes something unexpected could happen. What happens if suddenly a person who we thought was a weak person turns out to be a strong person? Because of this, we should be careful in that battle royale. We should also never show our full power." Tony said to them. Hearing him, everyone nodded. They should never reveal their full power.


    " Tony was right. We should never reveal our full power. Also, don''t forget that many people from other colleges are also present here. They all came here to know about our strengths and weaknesses. So you should be careful about that and never reveal your full power." Sam said to them. Everyone nodded, hearing him.


    ______________


    8:00 p.m.,


    Sam left the cafeteria with his friends. Right now, all of them will stay in the college quarters. Well, because they are the top 10 students, they already have their own personal room. Until the collegepetition, none of them will leave college.


    After saying goodbye to them Sam also left the college and started walking toward his home. When he came to his home he noticed that both of his parents had alreadye back from their adventure and his sister was also present in the house. He greeted his mom and dad. After that, he went to his house to freshen up.


    ____________<novelnext></novelnext>


    "How is today''s match, son?" Victor asked Sam.


    "Well, my opponent wasn''t that powerful, so I won the fight easily. But don''t worry, I won''t be careless and underestimate my opponent." Sam said to him.


    " Hmm¡­ good. Never underestimate your opponent, because sometimes even your weak opponent could do something that could harm you." He said to Sam.


    Well, both father and son were talking with each other. Hina and Gloria came to the dining room carrying food. After serving the food, both of them also sit down.


    "Sister, did youe to the stadium? I did not see you," suddenly asked Gloria if she was present in the stadium.


    " Hmmm¡­ when it was your time to fight, I and Fiona went to the stadium to see the match. After seeing that you already defeated your opponent, we left that area. Both of us were talking with our teacher about something, so we were unable to be present in the stadium all the time." She exined all of this to him.


    " Ohh.. don''t worry about that. Most likely, you and your ssmates will fight tomorrow. Also, mostly those fourth-year seniors also fight tomorrow," Sam said to her.


    " Hmm¡­ yes," Gloria nodded.


    " Also sister, those people from the other college are present in the stadium and watching over us. Did those peoplee every time?" Sam asked her. He was very curious to know if those people came here every time there was a match in their college.


    "Oh¡­ don''t worry about them. Not only them but our college also do something like that. With this, we can also get to know our opponent. Well like us those people also did not use their full strength, still, we have some idea about our opponent. Because of this, even though they came here to observe us and try to find our weaknesses, our college never stopped them," Gloria exined to him.


    __________


    The next day, 26th November


    Around 8:00 p.m., you can see that the stadium was fully crowded. Most people from the central city came to the stadium to watch the match. Sam and his friends were also already in the stadium. Right now, everyone was looking toward the battle ring because it was time for thepetition to start.


    Not long after that, a teacher came to the ring and begin to say,


    "Wee back everyone. It was nice to see that everyone was very excited about thepetition. Well, don''t worry 5 minutester thepetition will start. So I hope everyone will cheer for our students so that they will get motivated." after seeing all of this, the teacher left the battle ring. At this time, all the people present in the stadium begin to p. It was a very good speech from the teacher and because of this, everyone was pping.


    ___________


    5 minutester,


    Already 30 people were present in the stadium. All of them now have very serious expressions and they were already prepared to fight against each other. They were just waiting for the referee to give them the signal to fight. Right now, those people present in the stadium also did not make any sound. It was like silence was flowing inside the stadium. Everyone was very curious and excited to see the battle royal.


    "Began," the referee did not wait that long and quickly gave them the signal to fight. Instantly all those 30 students begin to fight against each other. Some of them were using their swords to fight while some of them were using their spells. Not only swords but spears, bows, daggers, and other weapons were also used by those students.


    __________To be continued__________

 Chapter 220 220 - Inter College Competition (7)

    All 30 students present in the battle were fighting each other. All those spiritual warriors were attacking those other warriors from a distance. Those spiritual warriors seem to havee up with a n. All of them know that they won''t be able to win against this physical warrior if they fight with them in closebat. Because of this, those spiritual warriors want to eliminate all those physical warriors first, and then they will fight with each other.


    All those spiritual warriors were attacking those physical Warriors, but don''t underestimate those physical Warriors. They also seem to understand the n of those spiritual warriors. Because of this, those archers were targeting those spiritual warriors. So you can say that all those students are now divided into two teams: a physical warrior''s team and a spiritual warrior''s team.


    _____________


    "Haha¡­ who could have expected that they would be decided into two teams? Haha¡­ it was quite interesting," Tony said with a smile. Watching the fight in the battle ring, he was very surprised and having fun. He did not expect that all those seniors will divide into two teams.


    "Well, those spiritual Warriors weren''t that wrong because they knew that they wouldn''t be able to win against those physical warriors in that battle ring because the battle ring wasn''t that big and they knew they needed to finish those physical warriors first. Because of this, those seniors were divided into two teams," Alexa said to them. All the others nodded, hearing her exnation.


    _________________


    Well, even though those students were divided into two teams, when they noticed that many of them had already gotten eliminated, they quickly started to attack their nearby ssmates. So you can say that all of them once again started to fight against each other without making any team.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, only 15 Warriors were present in the battle ring while the others were already eliminated. At this time, you can already see that many of them were very exhausted, but one thing was that none of them wanted to give up. Because of this, those students are still fighting.


    After fighting like this, many of them already got eliminated. Still, there were students who still have the strength to fight. Sam and his friends have already noticed that those Warriors still did not use their full strength while fighting their ssmates. But right now, all of their ssmates got eliminated and only 5 of them were present in the battle ring. All of them were now looking at each other and wasting no time as they approached each other while also preparing their strongest attack. Even though they still did not use their full strength, they were still low on a spiritual energy or physical energy. Because of this, all of them wanted to finish the fight as quickly as they could.


    All of their attacks shed with each other, and that created a big explosion in the battle ring. Sometimeter, when the smoke began to clear, all the people present in the stadium got to know the result. Right now, only once today was standing in the battle ring while the other four were already unconscious. That Warrior, who was still conscious, was already about to be unconscious, but he was still holding on because the referee still did not announce the name of the winner.


    At this time, the referee already noticed that the other four Warriors were already unconscious and only one person was standing in the battle ring. Wasting no time, he announced the name of the winner, and only then those medical teams quickly went to the battle ring to check all the students'' conditions. They already checked the student''s condition and none of them were seriously injured. Well before fighting, the teacher already told them not to use any dangerous attack that would harm their ssmate seriously.


    ____________


    "Well, like yesterday, thest attack was very powerful. All of their attacks shed with each other. This really created a big explosion. What can you say this battle royal was really something," Jeni said to them. All of them noted after hearing her words. Really, they never experience this type of battle. Even though they already saw battle royale on their TV or mobile, this was their first time-fighting in a battle royale. Because of this, you can say that all of them are very excited.


    "Haha¡­ well, our match will be tomorrow, I think. Because I don''t think that today we will get the chance to fight. So I am really very excited about tomorrow," Tony said in an excited tone. Just hearing his tone, you can say that he was very excited about this match. Well, this wasn''t his fault because not only he, but the others, were also very excited about this fight.


    ___________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Around 11:00 p.m.,


    Right now, all of them were focused on the battle ring. It was the final match of those 2nd years. Right now, only two students were present in the battle ring, while those others were already eliminated. One student was an early-grade student, while the other one was an intermediate D-grade warrior. So naturally, the intermediate-grade Warriors have the advantage in this fight. But still, that early-grade warrior did not give up in this fight and he was fighting that other warrior holding nothing back. Even though that other warrior was an intermediate D-grade warrior, he still was getting hit by his opponent. With this, you can imagine how powerful that early-grade warrior was. Even though his opponent was stronger than him, he can keep up with him and he also had the chance to win this fight.


    Because of this, every person present in the stadium was now silent and looking at the battle ring with focus. No, what do you want to see in this type of exciting match? Because of this, all the focus is on the battle ring.


    Both those Warriors were sword fighters. And both of them also already master the spirit technique. Right now, both of them are using their swords, while they are also using their spirit technique. Both of their swords were covered in blue. That was the spiritual energy that both of them used, while also using their sword techniques.


    Both of them continuously swing their sword toward each other. Because of this, many small explosions have already been created by that. Fortunately, those teachers already protected those stadiums and because of this, those normal people did not get affected by this type of attack. But they can still hear the sound of the explosion and they can also see the power behind those attacks.


    Sometimeter, both of the warriors were exhausted. But none of them seem to give up in this fight and they also understand that they won''t be able to continue fighting like this. Because of this, right now both of them are standing far away and preparing their final attack. This will be their final attack and they will put everything into this attack.


    Both of them were swordsmen and naturally, they wouldn''t use other techniques like those spells. Both of them quickly approach each other and attack each other. Thest attack was so powerful that after the sh, a very big explosion appeared in the battle ring. Compared to those previous explosions, this was a very big explosion. Because of the explosion, everything was covered by smoke.


    Sometimeter, the smoke already began to clear and all the people present in the stadium finally knew the result of this fight. One Warrior was still standing while the other one was already unconscious. The default did not waste any more time and quickly announced the name of the winner while those medical teams quickly went toward them to check their condition. In theirst attack, they already use their spirit technique while also using their sword technique. Also, those attacks weren''t weak.


    Sometimeter, both of them already left the battle ring while the referee and the other also left the battle ring. At this time, the teacher came to the battle ring and started to say,


    "Well, water wonderful match and with this, the 2nd years were already finished. Right now we will take a 30-minute break and then we will once again start our match." The teacher said that to everyone. Most medical staff, the referee, and others were tired and because of this, they wanted to rest for 30 minutes.


    Sam, Tony, and his friends were also standing up from their seats. All of them started to walk toward the cafeteria. Because they already came here in the morning and ate nothing and because of this, they wanted to go to the cafeteria to eat something. Well, not only them, because many other Warriors were also going to the cafeteria.


    _________


    "Finally, it was time for sister Gloria and sister Fiona to fight. Those second years were also wasn''t weak and most likely many of them were already stronger than us. So you can say that I am very interested to know about those 3rd-year students. Most likely they will be stronger than the second-year students and because of this I am very interested to know about that," Tony said with an excited tone. His other friends are also curious about this. Because of this, they will quickly finish their food and go back to the stadium.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 221 221 - Inter College Competition (8)

    "Hello, everyone now wees Group-J from 3rd year." The teacher said to everyone. Everyone started to p after hearing the announcement.


    Sam and his friends were also pping. They already know that Gloria was in group A while Fiona was in group B. So you can say that it will take some time for their match. But Gloria and Fiona already told them not to underestimate those other 3rd years. Even though they didn''t break through to grade C, they were still powerful and very close to a breakthrough. Sam and his friends were now fully focused on the battle ring. They won''t underestimate these third-year seniors. Gloria and Fiona also said that there were many students in the third year who can also use the spirit technique and they already master that technique like them.


    Sam, at this time, thought that he should teach her sister his energy mode after this inter-annual collegepetition. He already decided that he won''t teach that many about this technique because you can say that it was his trump card and he did not want to tell that many people about this technique.


    ______________


    All the students in group J came to the battle ring one by one. All of them had already brought out their weapons, and they were ready to fight. Also, one more thing was thatpared to those 2nd-year students, these 3rd-year students have much more experience in fighting. The moment all those students entered the battle ring, their aurapletely changed. Sam and his friends already feel that, and this made them serious.


    "Began," the referee did not waste any more time and quickly told them to start fighting.


    Instantly, all those 30 students begin to fight with each other. Some students were using swords, while some of them were using spells. Many students also maintain a distance and use their bows to shoot arrows toward their opponents. If you look at those arrows right now, then you can notice that those arrows weren''t normal. Most likely, all those arrows provided by the college won''t seriously injure those students. Because of this, the archers used those arrows without holding back.


    Sam and his friends are looking at the battle ring. But looking at those seniors, Tony and the others were very surprised because 5 of them in that group were using spirit techniques. Just looking at that, they can tell those seniors still did not master that technique, but still, they were using it to defeat their opponent. All of them use their sword to eliminate their opponents. They were also using their ability to approach their opponents. Compared to them, those 3rd years were greater. Natural because Sam and his friends while still in the early D-grade.


    In the battle royal, all the students have only 10 minutes to finish their fight. So, they already know that they need to finish their fight as quickly as they can.


    Right now, you can only hear metal shing in that battle ring. Those 5 students who are using the spirit technique already eliminated many of their ssmates easily. They were using their speed and sword technique while using the spirit technique. Because of this, they easily eliminated many of their ssmates. Those other students who still did not master the spirit technique, they are still fighting their ssmates, holding nothing back. In this fight, those spiritual Warriors have a disadvantage. As you know, like Sam, many of those spiritual warriors have some powerful skills that have affected the whole area. But in this match, they won''t be able to use that type of spell. Because of this, you can say that those spiritual Warriors have a disadvantage.


    Sam already noticed that disadvantage but didn''t worry about that. He already knows that even if his sister did not use this type of area destruction spell, nobody would be able to harm her. Sam and his sister have already spar many times. In that sparring, Gloria did not use that type of powerful spells and she was still able to win against him without using any powerful skills. With this, you can imagine how powerful she was.


    ___________


    Sometimeter, only 12 students were left in the battle ring. At this time, nobody stops and continues fighting their opponent. But as you know, those 5 Warriors who were using the spirit technique had the advantage in this fight. One more thing was that those 5 Warriors were attacking each other because before attacking each other wanted to finish all of their opponents. Even though their opponents weren''t able to use the spirit technique, some of them were still fighting those 5 Warriors, while holding their ground against them. They did not show any weakness against those 5 Warriors.


    Right now, you can say that the battle was between 5 warriors who were using the spirit technique and 5 warriors who weren''t using the spirit technique.


    At this time, Sam noticed that one student who wasn''t using the spirit technique quickly crouched down and avoided the sword. He quickly gave up the upper punch toward his opponent. The opponent has a good reflex and is able to dodge the attack, but instantly he kicks him. This time his opponent wasn''t able to dodge this attack, because he punched in a blind spot of his opponent. This kick was quite powerful enough to send his opponent outside of the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Instantly, everyone present in the stadium began to cheer for him. Because this student wasn''t using the spirit technique but he was able to eliminate a student who was using the spirit technique. Because of this, you can say that everyone was very excited about it.


    At this time, the Warriors did not rx. He once again used his super reflex to dodge the attack from his opponent. The student who was nearby quickly attacked him. Fortunately, that student also has a good reflex, and using that, he was able to dodge the attack. He jumped backward. But at this time a student was behind him. He already sensed this and because of this, he quickly turned around in the mid-air and quickly kicked that guy.


    The student who was behind that student did not expect that this person would suddenly turn around and kick him. He already knows that you won''t be able to defend himself at this close range and because of this, he quickly crosses his hands in front of his face to defend himself. But the kick was so powerful that it made him unbnced for some time. And his opponent used that chance to kick him once again. That kick was powerful enough to send that student outside of the battle ring.


    ________


    "Yea¡­," instantly, everyone present in the stadium began to cheer and p for that warrior. Because he wasn''t using the spirit technique, he was using his own strength and intelligence to eliminate a student that was using the spirit technique. That student already proved to others that he was already a capable 3rd year.


    "I did not expect that senior would be so powerful that he would eliminate those other seniors who were using spirit techniques. Even I still did not have the confidence to eliminate a student who was using the spirit technique," Tony eximed. It was a really unexpected thing for him.


    "Not only you, but we also did not have the confidence to eliminate two warriors who were using spirit technique, while we won''t be using spirit technique. Sister Gloria and sister Fiona really tell us the truth. Compared to the second year, this 3rd year was very experienced and also very powerful. I think before they went to the 4th year, many of the third-year seniors will already break through." Jeni said to them. Tony and the others nodded. They also have the same idea as her.


    ______________


    Sometimeter, in the battle ring, you can only see two students present while the other was already eliminated. In those warriors, one was using the spirit technique, while the other wasn''t using the spirit technique. But you should not underestimate that warrior who wasn''t using the spirit technique. Even though he wasn''t able to use the speed technique, he already eliminated 3 Warriors who can use the spirit technique.


    Right now, both of them were fighting with their swords. In this sword fight, the Warrior who was using a sword technique had the advantage. But still, the other warrior wasn''t showing any weakness and using his body strength, he was fighting that warrior. Fortunately, the sword he was using was a high-grade sword. Because of this, the sword still did not split into two parts. But if you look at his sword right now, then you will notice many scratches on his sword.


    At this time, both of them are already exhausted, but none of them are showing their faces. But if you look at them right now, then you will notice that both of them are preparing for their final attack. This attack will decide who will be the winner and who will be the loser.


    "Ha!!!" Both of them suddenly made this sound while approaching each other.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 222 222 - Inter College Competition (9)

    "Boom!!" Both of their swords sh with each other and this creates a shing sound. Both of them moved very quickly and now both stood without doing anything while both of their backs were facing each other.


    Everyone in the stadium was also silent. Everyone wanted to know the result. Who will be the winner? This question was now everyone thinking about.


    For some time, both of the warriors did not move, but suddenly the warrior who was using the spirit technique knelt down and you can see that his hands were bleeding. Instantly everyone thought that the other warrior would be the winner because the situation of that warrior wasn''t good, but a few secondster, the other warrior suddenly fell down on the ground. Not only that, but the sword he was holding also started to break down.


    That Warrior who was using the spirit technique was still kneeling down, but he was still awake and because of this, the referee announced his name as the winner. Only then do those medical teams quickly approach both of the students and quickly check their condition. That Warrior who wasn''t using the spirit technique was also injured, and his arm also has a deep sword. Mark it. Other than that, he was just slightly injured and unconscious. While on the other hand, the warrior who was using the spirit technique, was injured in his hand and bleeding from it. Not only that, he was very exhausted and about to fall unconscious. The medical team quickly brings out a spiritual energy recovery potion and gives him. After drinking that potion, that warrior seems to rx a little. After that, with the support of those medical teams, he left the battle ring.


    At this time, all the audience was very excited after seeing the result. For a moment, all of them thought that the warrior who was inducing the speed technique would be the winner, but it was here who was using the spirit technique that proved them wrong. Instantly, all of them begin to cheer and p for him. This was a wonderful match and because of this, everyone was excited. The name of the warrior who was using the spirit technique was Lucan krun. He was the 10 position holder of the top 10 list in 3rd year. Even his ssmates thought for a moment that he would be losing this match, but he proved all of them wrong. But still, that ssmate of his who wasn''t using the spirit technique was a really tough opponent. If he did not use the spirit technique, then he would be the loser.


    At this time, the construction team came to the battle ring and began to repair the damage of the battle ring. Well, it did not take them that much time and only took 5 minutes to repair all those damages.


    When the repairing wasplete, the teacher once again came to the battle ring and started to tell,


    "Well, that was a wonderful match. I hope that everyone will realize how powerful 3rd-year students are. So, wasting no time, let''s wee our next group. Everyone please cheer and p for them so that they will get motivated," after seeing that the teacher left the battle ring and all the audience begin to cheer and p.


    At this time the next group, group - I, enter the battle ring one by one. The 9th position holder of the top 10 candidates from the 3rd year is also present in this group. But that doesn''t scare all those other ssmates of his. If you look at them right now, then you can see that they have a confident look on their face.


    _______________


    "Compared to the previous year, Lucan is really powerful. He will be a tough opponent for our students." The person thates from the white Tiger Academy murmured. Well, not only him, but those other people from the other colleges are also thinking about this. All of them were recording this match and also writing the strong points and weaknesses of those Warriors. But still, if you think this data waspletely right, then you are wrong. They also know that those students who were fighting in this match weren''t using their full strength; they were still holding back because they did not want to show their full strength to them. It is also surprising that many students master the spirit technique. Now they wanted to know if there were any students who mastered the technique while using other techniques except the sword technique.


    [A/N: Those people who did not belong to the college knew nothing about the spirit technique. They just know that it was used by all the college students which have a destructive power.]<novelnext></novelnext>


    ____________


    "Really, all the seniors were very powerful. They also use the spirit technique very easily. What would have happened if I had fought them? Most likely I would bepletely eliminated by them. Sigh, we still have a long way to go to reach that level," Tony eximed. After watching the match, the seniors really impressed him. Those third-year seniors are very powerful. Even if he did not have the courage to attack someone without caring about his defense while that person was using the spirit technique. But that seniorpletely ignored his defense and used all of his strain to attack senior Lucan. But that doesn''t mean he was afraid after seeing the seniors fight, he waspletely fired up to train harder and achieve that type of strength.


    "Well, you are right, even though I don''t have the courage to fight with anyone who was using the spirit technique without caring about my defense. Even if I have a high grade of armor, I will still hesitate to fight someone like this," this time Jeni said all of this. Everyone nodded except Sam. Well, if he wasn''t able to use the speed technique while fighting someone who was using the spirit technique, he would just use his energy mode. You can say that he is also curious to know what will happen when he will fight someone that is using the spirit technique while he will use energy mode. Well, he did not tell anyone about that.


    "Guys, most likely all the seniors that were in the group will also show us a good fight and their strength. I also think that many seniors in that group could use the spirit technique." Kenny said to them. Everyone nodded and agreed with her. They also thought that many seniors in this group use the spirit technique.


    __________________


    "Began," the referee gave all the students the signal to fight. Instantly, all the students begin to attack their opponents or you can say their ssmates. At first, none of the students who can use the speed technique used that technique because all of them wanted to reserve their spiritual energy. All of them use their normal technique to fight. But that does not mean that they were weaklings. Even without using the speed technique, they were eliminating many Warriors and sending them outside of the battle ring. In this group, 7 people were present who can use the spirit technique. Also, the most interesting thing of the two of them was the spiritual area while one was a boxer. Not only that, you can see that one was using Spears. While the remaining people used swords.


    With this, you can imagine how talented those spiritual warriors were because they could use the spirit technique while casting their spells. But none of them use their spirit technique right now.


    7 minutester,


    Right now, only 12 students are left in the battle ring and they are fighting with each other. None of them showed any weakness or scared expression. They are using their strength fully to win this fight. After fighting like this, sometimeter, only 4 students were present in the battle ring while they were fighting each other. Attack after attack, all of them fighting like this, and none of them showing any weakness. Right now, those two students who were fighting in the battle ring were the students who can use the spirit technique. Two students were spiritual warriors, while the other two were physical warriors. Now they were fighting in them. One physical Warrior versus one spiritual Warrior. With this, they were fighting.


    Once again, sometimeter, you can see that only two students remain in the battle ring. The spiritual warrior was a girl, while the other one was a boy. But like his sister, don''t underestimate this girl because she was the 9 position holder of the top 10 list. Without even using the spirit techniques quickly created a blue fireball but then some noticed that the blue fireball quickly turned into a purple fireball. This only happens when you have solid control over your spiritual energy and fire control technique. Even Sam did not reach this type of control in the fire control technique and the spiritual energy control technique.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 223 223 - Inter College Competition (10)

    Both of the warriors were now facing each other. Salina Cent was the name of the girl. She was the 9th position holder of the top 10 list. She and the other warrior were not facing each other and both of them began to prepare theirst attack. Wasting no time, the other warrior began to approach her. He was ready to attack her, but she also wasn''t slow. Her fireball was already ready, and wasting no time, she quickly threw that purple fireball toward that warrior.


    The warrior was already expecting that fireball, so he also attacked the fireball with his sword. Normally it was very hard to attack such a fireball, but because he was using the spirit technique while using his sword technique. Also, as you know, this spirit technique uses spiritual energy and with that, you can also attack such spells.


    The Warrior uses all of his strength while he attacks that fireball. Surprisingly, the sword and that fireball were now shing. For a moment everyone thought this Warrior would be the winner but a few secondster everyone noticed that even though he was able to attack that fireball he wasn''t able topletely stop that fireball from moving and because of this, that fireball was still advancing.


    "Haaaa!!" That Warrior begins to shout like this and the blue color of the sword begins to glow. Well, he was using more spiritual energy. For a moment, nobody could tell who would be the winner. But a few secondster, something unexpected happened. The blue color of his sword begins to fade away. And because of this, that fireball once again started to advance toward him. This happened because most likely that Warrior was very low on spiritual energy.


    Just when that fireball was about to hit him, suddenly a barrier appeared in front of him. Only then, that warrior sighs in relief. That fireball hit the barrier, but it was unable to break the barrier. But you can still see the crack mark on the barrier. Only then did everyone notice that it was the referee who cast this light barrier in front of that warrior. Well, it was the rule of the match that if the referee noticed the students'' life was in danger, he would interfere in that match.


    "The winner is Salina Cent." Wasting no time quickly to announce the name of the winner of this match. Instantly, all those in the audience begin to cheer and p for her. Once again, the top 10 list candidates prove themselves in front of this many people. If the referee did not cast that barrier that time, then that warrior could be in danger. Most likely you know the danger of the blue fireball, but the danger of the purple fireball was greater than the blue fireball.


    Salina, at this time, was smiling. All those cheering and pping made her very excited. Well, she uses almost 80% of her spiritual energy, but still, that was worth it. Because her opponent wasn''t that weak so she didn''t want to waste her time against this type of opponent. Well, while everyone was cheering and pping for her, she began to walk toward her opponent. Aftering in front of him, she extended her hand for a handshake. The opponent also extended his hand and both of them shook hands.


    "Really, it was a brilliant match. For a moment, I thought you would be the winner. Unfortunately, you have low spiritual energy or you will originally be the winner in this match," she said this to him and then left the battle ring. Well, it was actually true. As you know, most of the physical warriors did not increase their spiritual energy that much. This was the reason she was able to win against him. If he also has that much spiritual energy like her, then you will most likely win this match.


    ____________


    "Few¡­ that purple fireball really was dangerous. Did you see that? When that purple fireball hit that light barrier, it instantly cracked that barrier. With that, you can imagine how powerful that purple fireball was. She was still a peak D-grade warrior, but the referee was an intermediate C-grade warrior. Even still, she was able to damage that light barrier. Really, I did not have any confidence in winning against that fireball. Really, the purple firewall was the dangerous fireball. But still, how could the referee not tell her not to use this type of technique?" Jeni said to everyone.


    After hearing her words, everyone nodded and agreed with her. Even Sam did not have the confidence to win against that fireball if he did not use any of his other techniques to escape from there. He could be turned into ash by that fireball.


    "Well, the referee should already tell her about this but when your opponent was in front of him who was using the spirit technique very easily, she will ignore the rule and attack him with her strong technique to win the match. The referee also knows that and because of this, nobody tells her anything or nobody disqualifies her. Also, she already knows that the referee will interfere in this match, and because of this, she most likely uses that spell and the fireball." Sam exined to them why she most likely used that technique, even after that technique was so dangerous. Only everyone understands why she doesn''t get unqualified.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "But with that, we get to know one thing. If in our match we identally used so much power that could kill the opponent, the referee will interfere in that match and save that opponent. But one thing you should notice is that the referee already gave a warning. So you cannot just use your technique to harm your opponent every time," Sam said all of this to them. Everyone nodded, hearing him. Well, the thing he told him was actually true.


    __________


    Around 12: 37,


    Right now, the students from group C were fighting in the ring. Sam just needs to wait a little more before he will be able to watch her sister''s match. His mom and dad also told him they wille to the battleground. But because he was in the student''s sitting area, he could not spot them. But still, the best thing was that all those seniors from the 3rd year who fought until now were really powerful. Everyone from the top 10 positions could use the spirit technique and not only that, but they are also very proficient in using that technique.


    Right now, four students were present at the battle ring. But the most interesting thing was that three students made a team fight with the other student. He was James Lenox. The third position holder of the top 10 positions from the third year. He was fighting those 3 ssmates at the same time. Most likely, his opponents already realize that they won''t be able to win if they do not eliminate him. But they did not have the confidence to defeat him if they fought on their own and because of this, the three of them decided to eliminate James at first, and then they would fight against each other.


    But the most interesting thing was that even after the three of them were fighting James at the same time, they did not have the advantage against him. He was fighting against those three easily. But then he realized that he needed to finish this fight quickly because he did not have that much time.


    Suddenly, he vanished from his ce. He instantly appears behind one warrior and then punches him. That Warrior was very close to the battle ring and because of this right now he was outside of the battle ring. Instantly, the remaining two opponents became very alert. They quickly try to attack him, but once again, James vanishes from him.


    Well, actually, James wasn''t using any type of invisible technique to vanish. Actually, he was using his full speed to vanish from one ce and then instantly appear in another ce. As you can see, it was the same strategy that was used by Sam when he didn''t use his concealment techniques.


    He once again appeared in front of one warrior and then quickly swung his sword toward that warrior. Also, his sword is glowing blue in color. His opponent was very startled but still able to react in time and quickly brought the sword in front of his face to defend himself from James''s attack. Even though he was also able to use the spirit technique but this time because James suddenly appeared in front of him, he did not get to activate that technique. So as you can guess, at the end, the warrior''s sword gets destroyed, and that warrior gets punched by James. That Warrior became unconscious. All of this happens in less than a minute.


    The remaining warrior was already behind James and already attacked him. But James already senses him and quickly crouches down. With this, he dodges that attack, but then James quickly kicks that warrior. Because that warrior was very close to James, he wasn''t able to dodge that kick.


    ________To be continued__________

 Chapter 224 224 - Inter College Competition (11)

    "The winner is James Lenox." The referee finally announced the name of the winner. Instantly, the whole audience began to cheer and p for him. James at this time started working toward his opponent, or you can say his ssmate. After that, both of them shake hands and leave the battle ring. Compared to his previous two ssmates, thisst ssmate of his was quite powerful. Both of them fight for some time, but then he breaks his opponent''s sword and then ces the sword on his opponent''s neck.


    After that, the teacher once again came to the battle ring and begin to say,


    "Well, that was a wonderful match. Also, student James shows us why he is the third rank holder. Well, I don''t want to waste any more time and I know that everyone was waiting for this next match. So let''s wee our next students in this battle ring," the teacher said, and those students began to approach the battle ring.


    As you can tell, it was Fiona and her ssmates who came toward the battle ring. The construction team had already repaired the battle ring. One by one Fiona and her ssmates came to the battle ring.


    Right now, most of the audience was now cheering for Fiona. Well, you can say that she was quite famous and because of this, many people were cheering for her. Not only her, but all the top 10 students from the 3rd year were famous.


    Sam and his friends were now looking toward the battle ring. All of them were also very excited to see this match. Well, Sam, Tony, and the others who already watch Fiona''s fight with Gloria have confidence in her. All of them have confidence that she will win this match easily. They just wanted to know how long it would take for her to win this match.


    At this time, Sam noticed one thing in the battle ring. All those students from the 3rd year maintain a distance from Fiona. While Fiona just ignored them and right now, she closed her eyes for some reason. That confused Sam because he was unable to guess why she closed her eyes.


    "Began," well he didn''t need to think that much because the referee already gave all those students the signal to fight. At this time, Sam notices something interesting. Well, not only Sam but all the other people present in the stadium notice that thing.


    Right now, all the students present in the battle ring did not attack each other. Before the referee gave them the signal, all of them were looking toward Fiona. When the referee gives them the signal, all of them, wasting no time, approach her. Most likely, all those 29 students decided they will fight Fiona as a team. All those 29 students wanted to eliminate Fiona at first and because of this, they were going toward her at the same time.


    But on the other hand, Fiona still did not open her eyes. Her eyes were still closed and because of this, many people present in the stadium began to worry about her. Even Jeni and the girls worried about her.


    "Why is senior sister Fiona still not moving? Those ssmates are just about to attack her but then why isn''t she moving?" Jeni asked in a worried tone.


    "Hmm¡­ don''t worry about it. Look at her expression right now. She is still calm. I think she is nning something, so don''t worry about that. Also, have some confidence in her. Do you think senior sister Fiona will lose in a battle like this," Sam said to them at this time. All of them nodded. They also think it is impossible for senior Fiona to lose a match like this. After that, nobody said anything and all of them just focused on the battle ring.


    ____________


    Already many students were in front of Fiona and just about to attack her. But at this time, finally, Fiona opened her eyes. But not only that, but instantly the pressure was released from her. It wasn''t your normal pressure, but this pressure was released from an early C-grade warrior.


    Fiona, just after opening her eyes, instantly releases the full pressure of an early C-grade warrior. Instantly, many of the students were about to attack her. They suddenly kneel on the ground. Those students were still intermediate D-grade warriors or early D-grade warriors. Unable to endure the pressure of an early D-grade warrior. Because of this, those Warriors instantly kneel down. Those other warriors were still standing, but you can see that they were fully sweating. Handling the pressure of an early C-grade warrior wasn''t easy.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Fiona, at this time, wastes no time and brings out her sword and attacks them. She did not use the spirit technique. She just normally swings her sword, but doesn''t underestimate that swing. The warrior who was in front of her tried to block the sword, but Fiona''s swing sent her outside of the ring. After bing an early C-grade warrior, her strength increased so much that even when she used only sword technique without using spiritual energy, that swing created much destruction. This was the power of an early C-grade warrior.


    When those other Warriors see that student send outside of the ring with just one swing of her sword, they instantly be very alert and most of them are already able to stabilize themselves. Wasting no time, those Warriors begin to attack Fiona. Fiona was very close to them and they thought they could easily injure her. But they were wrong.


    ? Fiona also wasn''t slow the moment she saw her ssmates were about to attack her. Wasting no more time, she also attacked them. At this time, she used the spirit technique because she wanted to finish this match as soon as she could. That moment when her sword and those students shed with each other, it created an explosion. Well, this wasn''t your type of explosion that appeared from a boom. When they attack ss with each other, a loud sound and the surrounding area instantly starts to break. The impact of her attack already sent many of her ssmates outside of the battle ring. Those students who were still in early grade or intermediate grade were the first to get eliminated by this.


    Those peak D-grade warriors are able to hold on. And if you look at them, then you can see that at least 09 to 10 Warriors were using the spirit technique. Right now only 16 were present in the battle ring except Fiona. All 16 Warriors were peak D-grade warriors. 10 Warriors are able to use the spirit technique, but not everyone masters that technique. They were countering her attack.


    But Fiona quickly begins to use fast attack and in less than a second, she swings her sword 5 to 6 times. At this time, she is also using the spirit technique and with that, you can imagine how powerful this attack could be. Even though her ssmates try to defend themselves, in front of this attack, they are unable to defend themselves and many of them once again send them outside of the battle ring. Well, the impact of this attack was greater and that could send them outside of the battle ring.


    The remaining warriors try to fight back, but in the end, they are also sent outside of the battle ring. When Fiona eliminated all the warriors, the referee quickly announced her name as the winner. Instantly, all the audience began to cheer and shouted her name. Really, that was a great match. With this match, they could see the power of an early C-grade warrior. Those people who came from the other college were also very speechless after seeing the power of Fiona. They recently got to know that other than Gloria, Fiona was from the 3rd year, and was able to break through to early C-grade. But right now, after watching the power of Fiona, all of them were very speechless.


    "Sister Fiona!!!!!" Jeni and the others are also cheering for Fiona. Sam, at this time, was just smiling. It was really a great match. But one thing he was sure of was that senior Fiona didn''t even use her half of strength. From first tost, she dominated that battlefield. Also previously when she released the pressure of her, he wasn''t able to feel that pressure because he was now in the stadium. But he knew how powerful the pressure of an early C-grade warrior was. Even he had a tough time enduring that pressure.


    "Haha¡­ senior sister Fiona didn''t even take 5 minutes to finish the match. I already expected this from her, but I also think that she didn''t even use her half of strength while fighting those other seniors. I really wanted to break through to C-grade." Tony said with an excited tone.


    ______________


    While every person in the stadium was cheering for Fiona, the teacher once again came to the battle ring.


    "Hello everyone, please keep silent. I know that everyone was very excited about our student, Fiona. As you see how powerful a student you know is, it is natural for all of you to be excited. But our next group is also about to appear on the battle ring, so please cheer for them. And also our number once today Gloria will fight in this group." The teacher said that and left the battle ring.


    Once again instantly those people begin to cheer, but this time cheering for Gloria. The cheering was much louder than before.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 225 225 - Inter College Competition (12)

    One by one, all 29 students approach the battle ring. All the audience cheered for them, but when Gloria started toe toward the battle ring, everyone began to cheer for her. You can say that almost everyone present in the stadium began to cheer for her.


    Sam, at this time, looking at her sister. Well, she was still maintaining a cold look on her face. Sam can tell that at this time, she waspletely focused on the match. Right now, the match was the only thing on her mind. Tony and the others were also cheering for her.


    _______


    The moment she enters the battle ring, every other student begins to feel pressure. Well, it wasn''t that Gloria released her pressure of an early C-grade warrior, but still, all the students present in the battle ring begin to fill the pressure. Right now, all those students have only one thing on their minds. Will they be able to fight against her? All of them know that it was impossible to win against her, so because of this, they are feeling the pressure.


    "Begin," the referee, wasting no time, give them the signal to fight. Instantly, all the physical Warriors begin to approach Gloria, while those spiritual Warriors begin to prepare their spells. But Gloria also wasn''t slow. The moment she got the signal, she also began to prepare her spell.


    All the students present in the battle ring suddenly began to feel the temperature was decreasing. At first, they did not care about that because all of them right now focus on Gloria, but then when they notice that the temperature decreases very quickly, all of them quickly understand that it was Gloria who was casting her spell. She was known as the ice queen. This instantly alerts everyone.


    Those spiritual Warriors already prepared their spells and shot those toward Gloria. But if you look at her now, you can see that she was still calm. Those attacks weren''t that difficult for her to handle. At this time, you can see that both of her hands are glowing white color. Well, she was casting her spell.


    " Zero," she softly said, and instantly most warriors present in the battle ring turned into ice sculptures. Don''t think that she killed them. They were still alive. Only some of them were still not turned into ice sculptures, but they were feeling very cold right now. But Gloria did not give them any chance and instantly attacked them. Suddenly, out of nowhere, many ice Spears came out from the ground and surrounded them from all directions. Those students know they won''t be able to win against her in this situation, so they instantly give up. The referee came to the battle ring and announced her name as the winner of the match. The moment the referee announces the winner''s name, Gloria cancels her spell. Instantly, all those students who were turned into ice sculptures began to move. But if you look at them right now, then you can see that all of them are shaking. The referee quickly called the medical team.


    At this time, Gloria already left the battle ring. All the audience present in the stadium at this time was now speechless. For some time, no one made any sound because all of them were trying to understand what happened. But then, when they noticed that Gloria had already left the battle ring, they began to cheer. All of them shouted her name and pped for her. No one ever thought that Gloria would finish her match this quickly. She just finished her match in less than a minute. Well, not only all the people, but even those students from the other year were also speechless. All of them finally saw the power of Gloria. Even those 4th years were now speechless.


    Sam was quite surprised by this. Even he did not expect that she would finish this match this quickly. Well, he already knows what spell his sister used. Even though this was a powerful spell, this won''t kill her opponent. Most likely, she used her 40% spiritual energy to cast that spell and only 5% spiritual energy to cast the other spell.


    "Wow!!!! I never thought that sister Gloria was this powerful. She just instantly turned all those seniors into ice sculptures. Can you really believe that? Almost all those seniors were peak D-grade, but she still easily turned them into ice sculptures. Really, we really can evenpare ourselves to her." Tony sides with this with a speechless tone. Well, not only he, but Jeni and the others were also speechless. Previously, they thought they could reach up to her level, but right now, all of them are thinking if they were even able to reach her level. Well, at this time, Sam was just silently listening to his friend''s words, but he said nothing. Because he did not want to tell them that it won''t be that long before his sister will break through to intermediate grade.


    Everyone in the stadium was shouting her name. She was really famous at the Royal Academy, or you can say that in the central city. Also, those people who came from other colleges just don''t know what to do right now. All of them were very speechless after watching the power of Gloria. Previously, after watching Fiona''s power, they thought Gloria would be at her level, but right now, they know they werepletely wrong. Now all of them are thinking if their students have the strength to fight against them.


    _______________<novelnext></novelnext>


    After that once again, Sam and the others left the battle area. Well, it was time for all those fourth years to fight, but before it was time for lunch. Because of this, everyone was now going toward the cafeteria.


    At this time, Sam also already met his mom and dad. Both of them were right now leaving the college. Because they weren''t interested in watching the fourth year''s match.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam and his friends were already in the cafeteria, eating their food. But he cannot find senior Fiona or his sister in the cafeteria. Almost every top 10 students from the 3rd year are present in the cafeteria but still, he cannot see his sister or senior Fiona. Did they decide to leave the Royal Academy or did they already finish their lunch? Well, he did not think that much and only focused on his food.


    ____________


    Right now, every one of them is once again going back to the battle area. They still have 20 minutes before the match starts. At this time, he suddenly got a message from his sister. She informed him that she won''t be present because right now she is busy. Well, he doesn''t know why she was busy after just finishing her match but he just simply replied Ok. After that, he and his friends begin to walk toward the sitting area. Right now, those fourth-year seniors will fight and all of them want to know how powerful those seniors are. They didn''t show them previously or get to know they are powerful and because of this, you can say that they were very curious.


    All those 4th-year seniors have the most experience in this Royal Academy and most likely they were more powerful than those third-year students. Also, Sam was curious to know if there was any fourth-year student who was able to reach C-grade. Because of this, none of them wanted to miss this match and quickly came to their seats and sat down.


    ___________


    "Hello everyone. As you already know, it was time for our 4th-year students to fight. I know that many of you are very excited to know the power of our 4th-year students, so wasting no time, let''s start the match of our 4th-year students. Group J, pleasee to the stage." The teacher said that and left the battle ring. After that, one by one, all the fourth-year students from group J begin to approach the battle ring. Right now, if you look at them, then you can feel something was different about them. It was like they were releasing some kind of different aura from those other students. This instantly made Sam very curious. Well, not only him, but all the other first years who already felt their aura were very curious.


    When all those students came to the battle ring, the referee gave them the signal to fight. Those students instantly wasted no time to begin to fight their opponents using their powerful attacks. Right now you can see that even though 4th-year students were using normal techniques, that created much destruction.


    This instantly made Sam and his friends very curious because as they can see that those seniors were only at peak D-grade. Even though they weren''t using the spirit technique, their technique was very powerful. All of them have already eliminated many of their ssmates. Not only that, many of those fourth-year students are using the spirit technique. It was the most surprising thing.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 226 226 - Inter College Competition (13)

    1 hour and 30 minutester,


    Right now, two men are fighting in the battle ring. One of them is using a spear while the other one is using a sword. Both of them continuously sh with each other. Both of them were also already masters in the Spirit technique.


    When their weapons were shing with each other, they created big waves. Also, one thing was that the warrior who was using the sphere was an early C-grade warrior. Yes, you guessed it right. Someone from the 4th year also managed to break through. But he was just able to break through recently and because of this, he wasn''t as powerful as Gloria or Fiona. He is Zugan Tial, the number one position from the fourth year. Recently, he was able to break through, and because of this, he still wasn''t that familiar with his new strength and you can say that this inter-collegepetition was a perfect training ground for him to adjust his strength. Not only him, but other Warriors from the fourth year are close to breaking through.


    All this time, Zugan was trying to be familiar with his new strength. Because of this, all this time, he wasn''t using his full strength. After eliminating all of his other ssmates now he and his ssmates of his only remain in the battle ring. Also, he did not understand this person. Because even though this ssmate of his wasn''t a C-grade warrior, he was still able to fight with him while also being able to injure him. But Zugan wanted to finish this match as soon as possible and because of this time, he used all of his strength while attacking the other person with his spear. This time, the other person was unable to handle the impact of the attack and sent it backward. The impact force of this water was very powerful and because of this, that person suddenly began to cough blood. But Dugan did not give him any time and wasted no time quickly approaching him. Aftering in front of that Warrior he quickly attacked that warrior.


    That Warrior already saw Zugan, but he was veryte to react. He tried to defend himself from his attack, but it was aplete failure and this attack finally hit the warrior and made him unconscious. The referee and the medical team wasted no time, quickly approached the battle ring, and went to that warrior. They begin to check the condition of the person and after seeing that it wasn''t that serious; they signal to the referee. Well, this inter-collegepetition has a rule that you cannot kill your ssmates in the match or you cannot seriously enjoy your ssmate.


    Finally, the referee announced his name as the winner and Zugan began to smile at those Warriors and the audience who were cheering for him and also pping for him. What can you say? The cheer from all those cheers from the audience really could make anyone very excited. He was waving his hands toward them. With that, he left the battle ring.


    Once again, the teacher came to the battle ring to announce something. Most likely, he was here to announce that it was time for all the first years to advance again. Because from tomorrow the battle between those 10 students will start and because of this, all of them want to finish the fight as quickly as they can.


    "Hello everyone. As you so previously said, that was a wonderful fight and I know that you all are excited to know the power of our 4th-year students. Wellte, don''t waste our time and start the next match. Next, the first year will once again fight, but this time they will fight in a battle royal." The teacher said that and he once again called group J toe to the battle ring. Instantly, all the members that were in group J started to walk toward the battle ring.


    Sam and his other friends were in the sitting area in the stadium. This time, Dan came to the battle ring with 15 other students. Right now they will fight in a battle royale. One by one, all of them came to the battle ring and all of them were ready to fight each other.


    "Began," the referee wasted no more time and quickly gave them the signal to fight.


    _______________________


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, only 3 students were present on the battle ring. Dan and the others already eliminated those other students, and only three of them remained in the battle ring. Right now, both of those students are attacking Dan at the same time.


    Dan was currently busy dodging. Both of them didn''t give him any chance to react and, because of this, Dan was waiting for a moment toe when he would attack them. Well, he didn''t need to wait that long because sometimeter he already got that chance and instantly attacked both of them. Both of them already saw that Dan was about to attack them, but right now, both of them were very exhausted and unable to react in time. With that, as you can guess, Dan became the winner of this match. Instantly, all the audience begins to cheer for him and also p for him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Dan left the battle ring while he was smiling. Well, because this is also a battle royale, this match also has a 10-minute time limit. But Dan finished this match in only 8 minutes.


    After the construction team repaired the battle ring, the teacher called the next group.


    Hearing the announcement, Saara got up from her seat and began to walk toward the battle ring. Sam and the others said good luck to him.


    __________________


    _______


    "Jeni, Jeni, Jeni," all the audience began to cheer for her. Right now, she was standing on the battle ring while waving her hand toward the audience. She eliminated all of her ssmates and became the winner. Well, no one is surprised about it. She also did not show them her new technique. Well, both she and Elena wanted to keep secrets about the technique until they did not go to the annual collegepetition. Well, even without using that technique and only beating her white lightning, she easily wins this match. Right now, if you look around the battle ring, then you can see that the medical team was now checking all the 15 Warriors that were paralyzed by her attack and lying down in the battle ring. Yes, you hear it right.


    Jeni easily paralyzed all those 15 Warriors the moment she attacked them with her white lightning. But still, she did not use her whole power and because of this, those students were now only paralyzed. Well, her control over the lightning is just getting better and better. Not only Jeni but Elena''s control over the light element is also getting better. She also likes Jeni. The moment she gets the signal after entering the battle ring, cast a confused ray and then quickly casts light spears. With that, she also easily won her match. Jeni left the battle ring.


    At this time, those medical teams carried those students out of the battle ring. After that, the construction team came to the battle ring and began to repair it. At this time Alexa had already left her seat, and she was approaching the battle ring. Not only she, but Aliya also got up from her seat and went toward the battle ring. Sam and his other friends said good luck to both of them. Looking at both of them, Sam already predicts that thest fight will be between them. Well, he didn''t need to predict because both of them also have the same idea to eliminate all the other students before fighting each other.


    ___________


    "Well, I really can not control myself. It was very exciting that both of our friends will fight in this match. Well, I know that Aliya wasn''t that strong like Alexa, but she is a hard-working person. She was also able to break through to early D-grade recently. Even though she won''t be able to win, it will be a great match between them." Tony said all of this with excitement. Well, they already became friends and Aliya always came to them for a match. With this, all of them already noticed how hardworking person Aliya was and she also improved very much these few days. But that wasn''t enough to defeat Alexa because she also was a hardworking person and only Sam can defeat her. But still, it will be a very interesting match.


    At this time, the crowd began to cheer for all the students that were approaching the battle ring. They already noticed Alexa and Aliya and began to cheer for them. Well, you can say that both of them performed better in their previous match and because of this, those crowds remember them. One by one, all of them came to the battle ring.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 227 227 - Inter College Competition (14)

    You can see all the students present in the type ring have serious expressions on their faces. All of them know Alexa was very powerful and because of this, all those other students were very serious about this match. Right now, all of them were waiting for the referee to give them the signal.


    "Begin." The referee wasted no more time and gave them the signal to fight. Instantly, all those students begin to attack each other. Unfortunately, Aliya, just recently became an early D-grade warrior and because of this, she still was not able to use the spirit technique. But she was still powerfulpared to those peak E-grade warriors.


    Both Aliya and Alexa were eliminating their opponents. But it was still quite difficult for Aliya. Because even though she was an early D-grade warrior, and she was powerfulpared to those other peak E-grade warriors when she was fighting many peak E-grade warriors at the same time, it was quite difficult for her. On the other hand, Alexa fully uses her Spirit technique and eliminates her opponents. You can say that Alexa eliminated 9 students, whereas Aliya eliminated 5 opponents.


    So, right now, only Aliya and Alexa were present in the battle ring. Both of them were right now facing each other. Wasting no time, both of them attack each other. Alexa was using her spirit technique with her short technique, while Aliya was using her powerful sword technique. Aliya knows that it will be very difficult to win against Alexa, but that does not mean she will give up. She will use her full strength to win against her.


    Both of their swords sh with each other. That instantly created a ssing sound. Fortunately, Aliya was using a high-grade sword and because of this, it still did not break after getting hit by Alexa''s sword. But the impact still sent her backward. Fortunately, she was able to stabilize herself because of this. She was able to quickly react on time and dodge Alexa''s attack. Alexa was quite fast just after sending her backward. She instantly used her speed to approach her and attack her once again.


    Aliya Rolle down to dodge the attack, and then quickly stand up for her ce. At this time, Alexa had already turned toward her and was about to attack her. But Aliya also wasn''t slow. She also reacted in time and counter-attacked her. Once again, both of their swords sh against each other. This time, Alexa wasn''t able to use her spirit technique. Because of this, she wasn''t able to send Aliya backward. Sometimeter, both of them are sent backward by the impact of their sword. But at this time, Alexa was already able to stabilize herself and quickly connected her spiritual energy with her sword technique.


    Wasting no time, Alexa once again used her full-speed approach to Aliya. Aliya was also able to stabilize herself and she had already reacted quickly. Just when Alexa was about to attack her, Aliya also attacked her. Both of their swords sh against each other once again. But this time, because Alexa was using the spirit technique, Aliya sent backward once again. Alexa once again used her speed to approach Aliya. She doesn''t want to give her any chance to stabilize herself and quickly finish this match.


    Aliya quickly stabilizes and jumps away from that ce to avoid Alexa''s attack. At this time, you can see that she was bleeding from her mouth. Well, the impact behind Alexa''s sword really did some damage to her. You can also see that her sword has scratches. All of these scratches and damages were received from Alexa''s sword. On the other hand, Alexa was still okay, but that does not mean she did not receive any injuries. Butpared to Aliya, she did not receive that many injuries.


    Wasting no time, both of them once again approach each other. This time, Aliya uses her powerful sword technique. Instantly one Aliya bes three Aliya. On the other hand, Alexa also used the full power of her sword technique while using the spirit technique.


    At first, Alexa was unable to guess who was the real Aliya. But then she attacks 3 of them at the same time. Well, she could do this because all 3 Aliya wereing toward her from the same direction. With this, it was possible to attack 3 of them at the same time.


    At this time, all the 3 Aliya also attack her instantly. All 3 swords sh with Alexa''s sword. This instantly created a big impact, and the impact was so powerful that the stage also cracked. Aliya is sent outside of the battle ring. Finally, Alexa won this match.


    At this time, the referee quickly came to the battle ring. With him, the medical team also came to the battle ring. They quickly started to treat Aliya. At first, they stop the bleeding so that Aliya will be okay.


    At this time, the referee announced Alexa''s name as the winner. At this, Alexa already left the battle ring and went toward Aliya. After that, both of them shook hands and left the area. Aliya will be going toward the medical room so that those medical teams will be able to help her to recover.


    At this time, the whole stadium was shouting Alexa''s name. After this match, Alexa''s power surprised all those in the audience. Because of this, those audiences were supporting and cheering for Alexa. Alexa was drinking a health potion while she was approaching the sitting area.


    _______________<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Really, this first year was very powerful. To win against them, our students also needed to prepare themselves." Those people who came from the other college were now talking with themselves. Well, after watching the power of Alexa, you can say that it quite startled them. They understand that if they are students who want to win against her, then they also need to have that strength to win against her.


    Well, not only them, but all those people present in the stadium were talking about that. The power Alexa shows them wasn''t weak. Even those second years were very started after watching her power because even some of them now questioning themselves could win against her.


    _______


    "Haha, congrattions Alexa." Sometimeter, after changing herself, Alexa came to the sitting area where everyone congratted her. After that, all of them sit down and look at the battle ring.


    At this time, the construction team was repairing the battle ring. Sam had already left the sitting area, and he was now in the changing room and already finished changing into his battle suit.


    It doesn''t take that much time for the construction team to repair the battle ring and at this time the teacher once again to the battle ring,


    "Hello, everyone. This will be ourst match for today. I know that many of you were waiting for this match to see the power of the number one position holder from our first year. So let''s wee our group A, wasting no time." The teacher already told all those students from group A toe to the battle ring. After that, all the students that were in group A begin to leave their changing room and approach the battle ring.


    At this time, the audience in the stadium began to cheer for all those students. One by one, all the students came to the battle ring. But when Sam was approaching the battle ring, all the people in the stadium began to shout his name. Sam, maintaining his calmness, began to approach the battle ring. Right now, he was only focused on the match.


    All the students that were present in a battle ring were right now looking toward Sam. Because all of them know that he was the most powerful among them. You don''t even need to guess that they will work as a team and try to defeat him.


    _______________


    "Begin," the referee gives them the signal to start the fight. Instantly, all the students wasted no time approaching Sam. All of them were ready to attack Sam with their powerful attack. But then, when they were just about to attack Sam, he vanished from his ce. That instantly alerts everyone in the battle ring. Well, not only them but those people in the stadium also be surprised after seeing this. All of them thought he would fight them like his sister, but you can say that theypletely forgot about his concealment techniques.


    "Careful everyone," instantly one of the students shouted at everyone. Now they also have a big question. Is Sam using his super speed to vanish from this ce, or is he using his concealment technique? But then they becamepletely sure that Sam used his concealment technique.


    Sometimeter, suddenly, one student was sent outside of the battle ring. This instantly alerts those other students, but then once again 2 more students are sent outside of the battle ring. Well, Sam was right now using his punch to eliminate those students.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 228 228 - Final Day

    3 dayster,


    Right now, in the battle ring, two students were fighting each other. One was a boy, and another one was a girl.


    You can see that both of them were using swords as their weapons and also using Spirit techniques. Well, it was a pretty intense match.


    At this time, all the audience present in the stadium were now silently watching this match. All of them can see that both of the students only focused on the match and because of this, they did not want to distract them.


    The girls suddenly swing her sword toward the male warrior. In less than a second, she swung 3 times, and also because she was using the spirit technique, the power behind these swings really increased. But the male warrior also wasn''t slow. The moment he noticed her swinging her sword toward him, he vanished from his ce. When the girl noticed that his opponent suddenly vanished, she quickly jumped away from her ce. Instantly, she felt danger from behind. Wasting no time, she once again jumped away from that ce.


    Well, it was Alexa who was fighting Sam. Yes, you guessed it right. Today was the final, and this was their final match and with that, they will get to know the winner. Both of them already defeated their other friends and only two of them were fighting in the final.


    Sam cancels his concealment technique and appears far away from her ce. After seeing this, Alexa just smiled and once again began to approach him. Sam also smiles and begins to approach her. He quickly used his fast-cut technique to swing his sword 10 times in less than a second. On the other hand, Alexa also used her skill to swing her sword 9 times in less than a second. All of those strikes sh with each other. But the power behind Sam''s swing was greater than Alexa''s and because of this, when his sword shes shed with Alexa''s shes with each other, some of those shes easily destroyed Alexa''s shes and then went toward Alexa. Those shes were really fast. Even though Alexa reacted very fast, she still got hit by 3 shes.


    After getting hit by those shes, she got sent backward. But fortunately, she was quickly able to stabilize herself. But Sam did not want to give her any chance to react and because of this, he was already in front of her and already attacked. But this time he did not use his fast cut. He used his tri-sword technique. This time Alexa was not able to react in time and got hit by his sword. Fortunately, Sam did not use the spirit technique at this time, and because of this, Alexa wasn''t seriously injured. But she once again got sent backward. Also, if you look at her condition right now, then you can see that she was coughing blood and had many injuries. Well, fortunately, she was wearing high-grade armor and fortunately, Sam did not use his energy mode. Compared to the speed technique, the energy mode was powerful.


    This time also she did not get sent outside of the battle ring and she was able to stabilize herself. Just after stabilizing herself, she quickly jumped away because Sam once again was about to attack her. But even with her injuries this time, she was already ready to dodge his attack.


    "Cough¡­ cough," she coughed blood, but her full focus was on Sam. At this time, she also started using as much spiritual energy as she could because she was preparing for a final attack at this time. She already noticed that she was very low on spiritual energy and if she continued to fight like this, then she won''t be able to win this fight. More than that, she knows that Sam was not using his full power while fighting her. Sam was an expert in his concealment technique, but he wasn''t using that while fighting her, so she can imagine Sam wasn''t using his full power. Well before they fight, Sam already told all of them that he will not use the stealth technique while fighting against them. That was a really powerful technique. If he used that technique from the start, then Sam would have already won this match.


    Less than a minuteter, she was already prepared for her attack and was already ready to attack Sam. Wasting no time, she quickly ran towards Sam and attacked him. Well, Sam also wasn''t slow. He is also ready to attack her.


    Both of their swords sh with each other. This time Alexa wasn''t able to handle that and finally seemed to be the winner. The referee and medical team quickly came to the battle ring. The medical team quickly started to treat Alexa while the referee announced the name of the winner.


    At this time, all the people present in the stadium begin to cheer and begin to p for him. Well, not only that, but many of those audiences were also cheering for Alexa because this was really a great match for them. When the medical team is finally able to close her wound, Alexa gets up from his ce and walks toward Sam. Aftering in front of him, both of them shake hands and then leave the battle ring.


    __________________


    "Really, that was really a good fight. This first year is really very powerful. Even while fighting Alexa, he didn''t use his full strength. He did not use this concealment technique this time." The people that came from the other colleges were talking with each other about Sam and his power. They have the confidence that they have students who will be able to defeat Alexa, but to defeat Sam they did not have a powerful student like him. Because of this, they were worried.


    Well, but who cares about them all? The other audience was now very happy. At this time, you can also see Victor and Hina present in the audience area. Both of them are also cheering for Sam. They were really proud of their son.


    ____________


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (800/957)


    Strength: 90


    Agility: 90<novelnext></novelnext>


    Physique: 87


    Intelligent(mental power): 84


    Spirit: 59


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 180k "


    Sam was right now looking at his status in the changing room. His strength and agility already reach the limit of an early C-grade warrior. He just needs to increase his other status then he could try to break through. After closing the status window, he freshens up and then changes into different clothes.


    Sometimeter Gloria would fight Fiona, and he didn''t want to miss that. Because of this, he quickly left the changing room and went toward the cafeteria. Before going to the stadium, he needed to eat something and fortunately, the teacher already announced that the fight would start 30 minutester. He also already informed others that he was going toward the cafeteria.


    While going to the cafeteria, he was thinking about the previous match. He has to say that Alexa was really powerful. Most likely, she is also very close to the limit of an early C-grade warrior.


    ____________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam and his friends were finally back at the stadium. Alexa was also already recovered from her injuries and now sitting in the stadium, because no one wanted to miss this match between Gloria and Fiona. Both of them were very powerful and nobody wanted to miss this match.


    "Guys, what do you think? Who will win this match?" Suddenly Tony asks them.


    "Well, probably senior Gloria. As you know, that sister Gloria was already breaking through early C-grade even before senior Fiona, so she probably won this match." Kenny said to them.


    "Sam, what do you think?" Suddenly she asked Sam.


    "Hmm¡­ I am not sure about that. Well, don''t worry, we will get to know the answer in just a few minutester," he said to them while smiling. Well, actually he wanted to tell them that his sister will win this match because she could be an intermediate Warrior at any moment but for thispetition, she did not break through on the other hand senior Fiona was powerful but not that close to breaking through intermediate C-grade. But he did not tell them.


    After that, all of them became silent because Gloria and Fiona already came to the battle ring. Both of them have serious expressions on their faces and look like teachers. You can see that both of them were ready to fight anytime, and they were just waiting for the referee to give them the signal.


    The referee looks at both of them and then quickly gives them the signal to fight. Instantly Fiona swung her sword and blue shes created by the sword were going toward Gloria. But Gloria also wasn''t slow. She instantly created an ice wall in front of her and not only that, but she also began to freeze the ground.


    __________To be continued __________

 Chapter 229 229 - Final Match

    Gloria begins to freeze the ground. Fiona noticed that and quickly jumped away from that ce. She already knew that it was one of her moves that could easily freeze her. At this moment, Gloria already deactivated the ice wall and quickly created many ice Spears and threw them towards Fiona.


    But Fiona also wasn''t slow. She also noticed that those ice Spears wereing toward her. At an incense speed, she begins to swing her sword toward those ice spears. With that, she destroys all those ice Spears. But even after destroying all of these, she did not rx because Gloria was already preparing for her next move. Gloria shoots an ice ray toward Fiona. Fortunately, Fiona already noticed that and quickly reacted. Wasting no time, she quickly used her full strength to dodge that attack. This was a very dangerous attack that could easily freeze her.


    But this time, before she jumped away, she swung her sword toward Gloria. Once again, a blue sh went toward Gloria. Gloria also reacted quickly and created an ice shield and, with that, she defended herself from that attack.


    At this moment, Fiona alreadynded on the ground and instantly used her full speed to approach Gloria. In less than 10 seconds, she approaches her and quickly swings her sword toward her. Fortunately, Gloria already created the ice shield. The moment she sensed Fiona was already in front of her, she quickly used that to defend herself from Fiona''s attack. Because Fiona was using the spirit technique, the attack was very destructive. But Gloria also knows that and because of this she also already uses her speed technique and instantly that ice shield became a ck ice shield. Gloria already could turn the normal ice into blue ice. And while she used her spirit technique, she could easily turn those blue ice into ck ice.


    Fortunately, Gloria was very fast. Because if she did not turn that ice shield into a ck ice shield, then Fiona would have already destroyed that and already injured her. But because it was the ck ice, Fiona, even after using the spirit technique, wasn''t able to be destroyed and Gloria used this chance and attacked her with this shield.


    The moment her shield shes with Fiona''s sword, that shield instantly starts to release a ck ray. Well, actually Gloria was trying to freeze Fiona''s sword. On the other hand, Fiona also uses her full spirit technique with a sword technique. So with that, both of them are using their techniques to fight against each other.


    Sometimeter,


    The fight between them was still going on. Both of them attacked each other nonstop, and this already destroyed most of the battle ring. Fiona was also injured. Previously she got this injury from Gloria. It wasn''t that Gloria wasn''t injured, but the injury was quite lightpared to Fiona. Gloria was attacking her from a distance while on the other hand, Fiona tried to fight her from a distance. But Gloria knows that she won''t be able to take advantage if they fight at a close distance. Because of this, she always tries to maintain a distance between them.


    At this time, Gloria once again created an ice ball and threw it toward Fiona. Fiona is able to react quickly, and using that, she dodges that attack. But in the end, she still got hit by that ice ball in her hand. That hand instantly turned into ice, but fortunately, she was able to react quickly and used her spirit technique to make a blue bodyyer around her body. Fortunately, because of this, she did not turn into an ice sculpture.


    Fiona quickly jumps away from that ce. This time she tried to advance toward Gloria, but Gloria was already prepared to attack her. But then when Fionanded on the ground, Gloria instantly froze the ground beneath her food. With that, Fiona''s leg also turned into ice. But Gloria didn''t finish there. Fiona could easily break that Ice just using his spirit technique. Because of this, the moment Gloria froze her leg, she also created many Spears and all of them were in front of Fiona. Now with that, if Fiona still did not give up, then Gloria will attack her with that.


    "I gave up," fortunately Fiona knows her condition and situation right now. She was already at a disadvantage and won''t be able to win against Gloria and because of this, she instantly gives up. It was quite sad, but she was still motivated to work harder and grow stronger than Gloria and then defeated her.


    At this time, the referee already came to the battle ring and told the name of the winners. Fiona''s injuries weren''t that serious and because of this, just after drinking a health potion, quickly recovered. At this time, Gloria went in front of her and then extended her hand. After seeing this, Fiona also extended her hand and both of them shook hands. After that, they left the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ____________


    From the first tost, the audience was very excited to see this match, and the moment the name of the winner came, all the audience began to cheer and p for Gloria. This didn''t matter to them even when Gloria did not show them except for her cold look. But those audiences are still cheering for her.


    "Who thought both of them were this powerful? Compared to the previous year, they have already increased their strength very much." After seeing the fight, those people from the other college were discussing this. Well, the moment they saw the ck ice and when they also saw Fiona was able to cover her whole body with spiritual energy, you can say that all of them were very startled. Already both of them were C-grade, not only that, but they also improved. Because of this, you can say that they were very shocked.


    Well, at this time, not only those audiences and people from other colleges, even the students from the Royal Academy, were amazed. Many students from the first year and 2nd years were very motivated after seeing the fight. There are many people who think of Gloria and Fiona as their idols and after seeing their power, all of them are very shocked and motivated to work so that they can also reach the level of their idols. Elena, Jeni, and the others are also very motivated after watching this match. But they also already know that none of the seniors used their full power in this match because they did not want to injure each other seriously. Sam already told them that Gloria could use a spell that could easily freeze the 1km area. Everything in that 1 km area will freeze. But in this case, she did not use that.


    "I know that senior sister Gloria and senior sister Fiona are powerful, but to reach their level we will need much time. We won''t be able to reach that Power level in a short time. Haha, here I thought just after mastering the spirit technique I could reach their level. Haha, what stupid I am? Sister Fiona could easily cover her whole body with a spiritual technique. With this, anyone can guess how much she mastered the spirit techniques. On the other hand, senior sister Gloria could easily turn the nature of the eyes and make that very destructive. On the other hand, I am still unable to maintain the spirit technique for a long time," Alexa said all of this with a sigh. Everyone nodded at her after her words. Kenny, Tina, Kira, Dan, Saara, and Aliya were not even able to use the spirit technique while on the other hand Alexa, Tony, Jeni, Elena, and Sam could use the spirit technique but they still did not master that technique very much like their seniors. None of them know how long it will take to master that technique, but after watching this fight, they were very motivated to train harder.


    _________________


    At this time, the construction team had already repaired the battle ring and the teacher once again came to the battle ring to announce something.


    "Hello everyone. I know that everyone was very excited because that match was very exciting. Our students, Gloria and Fiona, have already shown us how powerful they were right now. With that, we have the confidence to win this year''spetition. Well, we will talk about itter, but let''s now wee our 4th year in the battle ring. This will be our final match for this day. And with this match, we will finish our inter-collegepetition. So please everyone p and cheer for our 4th year and let''s wee them in the battle ring," after saying that the teacher left the battle ring. Two students begin to approach the battle ring while everyone present in the stadium begins to cheer for them. After watching the battle between the third years, all the audience was very excited to see the power of the fourth-year students. And because of this, they are very excited to see the match.


    [A/N: I am nning to finish the inter-collegepetition with this chapter.]


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 230 230 - Dungeon

    Next day,


    Sam was now eating with his family in their house. Yesterday finally the match was finished and because of this he and Gloria were resting right now. You can say that his sister was very busy these few days, and she rarely took a rest. Well, right now her main goal is to win the annual collegepetition and because of this, she was very busy.


    While eating with his family, Sam asked his mom and dad about their next dungeon adventure. Well, both he and his sister will be busy in their training or dungeon, so because his mom and dad naturally will be in the dungeon so they won''t get bored at home. Both of them talk about going to a peak B-grade dungeon. Well, right now they are very close to bing intermediate grade and because of this, they will go to the B-grade Dungeon.


    Sam just nodded after hearing them and also told them that he was nning to go to the Dungeon with his team. He was nning to go to the spiritual Dungeon or you can say ghost Dungeon and after that, he will go to the Goblin dungeon. Right now, he wanted to increase all of his statuses to his maximum point. After that, he also needed to try to break through.


    His mom and dad did not have any problem with that, so they naturally agreed with him. He told him that he will go to the dungeon with his team 2 dayster.


    ________________


    Sometimeter, after finishing his food, Sam was right now in his room and looking at the news. Right now, all the news articles were releasing the news about the previous inter-collegepetition of the Royal Academy. All of them talked about how powerful the students from the Royal Academy were. They also highlight the battle between Fiona and Gloria. You can say that it was the main headline of their news. Not only that, but they also show the battle between fourth-year students. After scrolling down the news, Sam finds that they also show them the fight between him and Alexa. Because this year both of them were famous, you can say that it was also quite good news. The news reporter told how powerful he and Alexa were right now. Other first-year students didn''t have the chance to defend against them.


    After reading all of this, Sam just smiled. Well, he did not care about all those praises. It doesn''t matter if they praise him or mocked him. He was already used to people when they mock the team as a loser and right now there was praise like he was some kind of genius.


    "Sigh," Sam just sighs and then closes his eyes for an afternoon nap.


    ____________


    At 5:00 p.m.,


    Sam left his house and went toward the Royal Academy. Tony and the girls areing to the college and he will meet them in the college. Sometimeter he reached the college and met with his friends. All of them were present in the yground. Sam walked toward them and after that, all of them went to the cafeteria. Right now they will be discussing what dungeon they should go to. Like Sam, all of them also needed to increase their spirit and because of this, all of them were thinking about going to the spiritual dungeon or ghost dungeon.


    At this time, Sam told them they should go to Venus City. He already was familiar with that ghost dungeon, and it won''t be a problem for them to handle those monsters. Alexa, Tony, and the others think for some time and then agree with him. But they are also a problem that Tina did not know to use the spirit technique. Can you know how to use the light control but still she wasn''t perfect at this technique? This will be a problem for people in the ghost dungeon. But then they told Sam and others that they have swords that have high-grade fire stones and they will be helpful in the ghost dungeon. So right now they should not have any problem in that dungeon and all of them decided to go to the Dungeon 2 dayster. Well, this was because Sam told them to rest tomorrow and today so that all of them could take a good rest.


    _______________


    After that, all of them went to the college shopping area. There they will find everything from weapons to potions, everything. They could also use their credit points to buy anything or they could also use the money. You can use those things to buy things from here.


    Sam and the others did not have anything to buy; they were going toward the cksmith area because they needed to repair their damaged armor and swords. That cksmith area was near the shopping area. In their previous match, their swords and armor got really damaged and because of this, they need to repair that. Well, except for Sam, he did not need to repair his Armor or sword. He was just apanying his friends.


    Sometimeter, when they came to the cksmith area, they saw that already many students were present there. Well, like them, all those students also came here to repair the armor and swords. Fortunately, as the top 10 students and the final candidate for the annual collegepetition, they did not need to wait in line to enter the cksmith''s shop. The moment all the students notice them, they make their way for them to enter the cksmith''s shop. Alexa and the others quickly ced their things on the table and told the cksmith to repair them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ____________


    "Who thought the cksmith would be this busy?" Tony said while smiling. Really good surprise after watching the crowds that were outside of the cksmith''s shop. Fortunately, not everyone came to this shop or they wouldn''t have a ce to stand. After pleasing their sword and armor to the cksmith, they left the shop. They will receive all of this by tomorrow.


    "Hey guys, let''s tour the city once again. We really get free time," suddenly Elena said to them. Instantly, all the girls became very excited because it was really true that they did not get that much time to rx or enjoy time with friends. Sam and Alex also agree with them. So after that, they left the Royal Academy and began their tour in the central city.


    ___________


    2 dayster,


    Finally, Sam and others were right now going toward Venus City. It won''t take them that much time to reach the city. They were already preparing themselves for the Dungeon and also brought much food and other items for the Dungeon. Kenny, Tina, and Kira have also brought high-grade fire swords. This is the only way to damage or kill the spiritual monster for them. But Sam knows it won''t be that long when all of them will learn the spirit technique. You can say that they were very close to releasing spiritual energy from their body.


    Sometimeter,


    They finally reached the Dungeon, and after parking their car, they were going toward the guide. Well, Sam already knows about the monster in the dungeon, but still, he decided it would be better if they went toward the guide and knew about the dungeon''s monsters.


    The guy once again told him about the monster that they will find in this dungeon. The skeletons, zombies, and humanoid ghosts. These three types of monsters they will find in the dungeon. Well, Sam already knew about that, but he asked the guide if anything new happened in the dungeon.


    ____________


    "Let''s go, guys," finally all of them enter the Dungeon. Just after entering the Dungeon they already meet the skeletons. A group of 20 skeletons wasing toward them. Sam and the others weren''t that slow. The moment they noticed those skeletons, they quickly took action against them.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, Sam and his friends were now fighting a group of humanoid ghosts. Jeni and Elena were attacking them with their spells, while Sam and the others were attacking them with their swords. Well, Tony, Alexa, and Sam were using the spirit technique. Only Kenny, Tina, and Kira were using high-grade fire swords.


    Fortunately, all of them have a good mind defense technique and that was preventing those humanoid ghosts'' mind attacks. But one thing they also need to worry about is that those humanoid ghosts can also possess anyone. They also need to worry about that. Even though people who have strong willpower won''t be possessed by ghosts, but still have some disadvantages. Because of this, all of them are very careful about that.


    It did not take that much time to finish all those monsters. Sam already killed 15 monsters. After collecting all those loot, all of them went to a safer ce. Well, they were fighting for some time and they also did not eat anything when they came to the Dungeon. Because of this, they wanted to eat some food and they will once again start fighting.


    _____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 231 231 - Enemy

    While they were eating, Sam also told them about his previous encounter with the dark association warrior. After listening to all of this, all of them were very surprised. They never thought that the dark association would also put something like that in this dungeon. Fortunately, right now, everything was fine. The warrior association already told Sam that they had already checked all the ghost dungeons very carefully and everything was now fine.


    "This dark association''s Warriors were really bad. Even when we are giving our college entrance examination, they attack us for what? Most likely they attacked us because they wanted to show everyone that the warrior association didn''t even have the strength to protect students." Tony said, all of this while sighing. Well, everyone agrees with him because they also get to know that those dark associations really wanted to show the world that they were powerful, while the warrior association was unable to protect their students from them.


    "Don''t worry about them. When we have the strength, we will defeat them. But right now we need to collect as much spirit crystal as we can. So let''s go," Sam said to them and told them to get up. After that, all of them get up and they are once again ready to hunt.


    ___________


    Sometimeter, Sam and his friends were now facing 20 zombies. Sam already killed 6 Zombies, while the others were fighting those other zombies. For Tony and Alexa, it wasn''t that hard to cut those zombies. They were using the spirit technique and, as you know, that it increases the sharpness of the de. With that, they easily kill them. On the other hand, Jeni and Elena were now using their new technique to fight those monsters. They were using the elementation technique to fight those zombies. Because they did not use the normal sword, their attack easily damaged those zombies. Well, both of them are fighting using this technique because both of them wanted to master this technique. Well, it doesn''t mean that they stop trying to master the spirit technique.


    On the other hand, Kenny, Tina, and Kira were using their swords to fight these monsters. As you know, high-grade element crystals could damage those spiritual monsters. Westing now time they keep attacking those monsters and sometimeter they already finish all those monsters. After collecting the loot, they once again begin to advance. Like this, they keep hunting those monsters until it is time for dinner. Well, inside of the dungeon, you can''t say if it was morning or night. But fortunately, they are still working in the dungeon.


    All of them are now eating their food while they can keep hearing many voices of monsters. Heading all the sound, you can tell that those monsters were fighting some Warriors. Well, it doesn''t matter to them.


    _________________


    Sam, Jeni, and Kenny decided to stay awake while the others were sleeping. Sam already ced the monster rappelling device. It will prevent those humanoid monsters from approaching them. But it doesn''t mean that Sam will keep his guard down. He is always keeping his guard because you can''t say for sure when some monster approaches them.


    But sometimeter, Sam instantly became very alert. Because he saw in the life sign detector that some people were approaching them. Most likely, a group of 15 people was going toward their location. Because of this, Sam instantly became very alert. Wasting no time, he quickly signals the others and then quickly vanishes from his ce. Well, he used his concealment technique and then went toward those people. He wanted to know the motive of those people. Those people weren''t that far away from their ce and, because of this, he quickly approached them and then listened to their conversation.


    "Boss, are you sure that our targets were in this direction?" A person asks the person beside him. Instantly, the other person red at him.


    "Don''t talk any nonsense. I got this information some time ago and from whatever source I get this news, they always give me the right information. So you don''t need to worry about it. Right now, we also focus on our targets. There were 8 of them and we had four targets. Make sure not to make any sound and silently finish our work." After saying that, he brought out a box. You can also see a red button on that box. After that, he looked at all of his subordinates.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "As you know, one of our targets was very proficient in concealment techniques. Because of this, we should not allow them and use this to finish them. I bring this new thing. Well, look here. The moment we press this red button, poisonous gas will spread out of the box. If you inhale this poisonous gas for a minute, then that willpletely stop your heartbeat. So after finding the resting ce we will ce four boxes in four directions and then spread out the poisonous gas. With that, it will be easier to finish them very quickly." The boss of those Warriors told them his n. All of them quickly reacted and agreed with him. After that, the boss quickly brought out 3 more boxes like the previous one. After that, he gave three of his subordinates those boxes. After that, he signals them to stay quiet and advance. Well, but none of them knew that Sam was already beside them and he also heard them.


    Wasting no time, he decided to take action because, from the look at it, the poisonous gas was very dangerous, and this could be very dangerous for Tony and others. He doesn''t want to make any mistakes and because of this Tony and the others get harmed by that.


    All of them are still far away from his resting ce. Because of this, some decided to finish those people one by one. But before that, he needed to make sure that these people wereing for them. Because of this, he went toward the nearby person and then silently knocked him out. After that, he ced his hand on that person''s head. Well, he was using his mind control technique to know about the information he wanted to get from this person.


    Sometimeter, after knowing all the information that he wanted to get from this person, he finished the person. He killed him silently. After that, he looked toward all those people that were still advancing. Those people didn''t even realize that one of their teammates got missing. So Sam, wasting no time, once again went toward them. He already brought out his yer to y all those enemies. He already covered his yer using his spiritual energy. The boss of those enemies was an intermediate D- grade warrior. Because of this, Sam was alert.


    But still, none of those people realized that someone was following them. Because of this, Sam uses this chance to kill his enemies one by one. While killing those people, he also made sure not to make any sound. He did not want to alert anyone. Because this could be very dangerous. What will happen if the boss realizes that someone was following them and decided to spread the poison? Because of this, he didn''t make any sound.


    Right now, only four of those people are alive. All those four people have the poison box, and they were going together and because of this, Sam didn''t make any movement. He was waiting for the right time to finish them.


    All those four people still keep advancing. But sometimeter in front of them has ake. The boss signals his subordinate to stop. After that, he told one of them to go in the right direction while he went in the left direction. But then he realized something was missing because he did not feel any other presence except for the four of them. Not only he, but those other three people also realize that. So they were just about to turn around to see what was happening.


    Sam, who was following those people, also saw that they had already reached theke. He already knew that he needed to take action very quickly because the other side of thiske was their resting ce. Wasting no time, he began to prepare the confusing Ray. He was now waiting for those people to turn around in his direction. Well, he didn''t wait that long because sometimeter he already saw that those people were about to turn around, so wasting no time, he quickly used his confusing ray toward them.


    Those 4 people were about to look behind, but they instantly saw a light, and that instantly made them dizzy. And as you know, the speed of Sam. Wasting no time, he quickly used his full speed, and then, in less than a second, he killed those 3 enemies and only one person remained. He quickly punched that person and knocked him out.


    __________To be continued__________

 Chapter 232 232 - Information

    Right now, Sam was with his friends. Aftering back to his base, he already wakes up everyone and then he informs them about these people. After listening to all the exnations from Sam, they sigh in relief because Sam is able to take action before those enemies attack them. If some did not take action at that time, then those enemies already would have spread the poison, and that poison would definitely kill them.


    After they calm down, they focus on that unconscious person, or you can say the enemy. Sam did not kill him because he wanted to know the information from this person. Also, he previously heard that this person has some kind of connection with an information source that told him about his location. He also wanted to know about that source. Which information source was giving all those enemies their location? This was very important information he wanted to know from this person.


    Tony spread some water on this person''s face. That person begins to regain consciousness. Sometimeter, he slowly opened his eyes. For a moment, he waspletely confused. He was unable to understand where he was right now, and who were these people that were looking at him? But then sometimeter, after watching all those people, he remembered that previously he and his subordinate came to this ghost dungeon to hunt some people.


    "Ahhhh!!!!" Suddenly he felt a pain in his hand. He looked at his hand and saw that one hand was missing. He began to scream out loud because of the pain. But suddenly someone grabbed his neck. Only then he came back to his senses.


    "Now shut up. I will ask you some questions and you need to tell me the answer truthfully or else you will feel more pain," Sam said all of this to that person. Well, this person was an intermediate D-grade, and because of this, Sam did not want to take any. So he cut one of his hands.


    After listening to the threatening word from Sam, the person became silent. Because he already recognized Sam and he was also able to guess how he came here. He was about to tell something to some, but then he noticed Sam was still holding his cutting hand. That made him very scared, and he then looked at Sam and nodded.


    Sam smiled at him and then ask his first question,


    "Did you alsoe from the dark association after finding our bounty?"


    "Y-Yes," that person answered the question with a shaking tone.


    " Good. Other than me, which other four people did you want to kill?" After that, Sam asked him this question.


    ? This time that person did not say anything, but he pointed his finger toward Jeni, Elena, Tony, and Alexa. Other than Sam, all those enemies wanted to kill these four people.


    "But you wanted to use the poisonous gas to kill us, so that means you wanted to kill all of us and then bring our heads to the bounty section to collect the money," Sam told him this. That person only nodded while looking downward.


    ______________


    Sam already told all of his friends not to make any rash decisions. Because of this, all of them were still maintaining their calmness. They did not want to kill this man before they did not get all the answers. But when Sam finishes getting all the answers, they will surely kill this man. Also, that was their first time to know that they also have a bounty on their head.


    Right now, Tony and the others were silently listening to the conversation between Sam and that man. Slowly, Sam was asking about all the details that he wanted to know from that man. At this time, Tony and the others saw how Sam mentally tortured that person. If that person did not give him a satisfying answer or the truth. This was their first time seeing Sam''s this look. Sam was, at this time, smiling while talking to that person, but you can see that wasn''t your normal smile.


    "Now tell me about the information source from where you get our location." After getting the answers, he finally asked this question to him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    At this time, the person who was previously telling the answers suddenly became quiet. Because he also did not expect that Sam would ask him this question. But he instantly did not answer this question because right now he was in a dilemma. If he tells Sam and his friends about the information from the information source, then that person will kill him, but if he does not give Sam the answer, then Sam will kill him. Because of this, he decided to tell Sam all the information.


    _________________


    Sometimeter, that person had already finished talking about the information source from where he got Sam''s location. When that person finished talking about all that information, Sam did not waste any time and quickly killed that person. That person didn''t even get the chance to know when he died. Well, actually, Sam did not want to leave his enemy alive. This type of enemy could be really dangerous for him in the future and because of this, he did not leave any of his enemies alive.


    Right now,


    Sam, Tony, and the girls were talking about their next move.


    "Actually, I also previously faced this situation, but I already informed the warrior association with that. They told me that every year if they found any people that could be dangerous for them, they put a bounty on their heads. Also, we killed many dark association Warriors when they decided to attack them. You can say that because of this, we are now on their radar and they put a bounty on our heads. I still don''t know how much they put a bounty on my head, but it looked like it wasn''t low. Also looks like they already got the information that I previously found that strange statue and informed the warrior association with that. Because of this, my bounty also increased. So right now, we have two main issues."


    " First, right now we need to always stay alert about all those dark association people. Well, most likely not only the warriors from the dark association, but many criminals also have a connection with the dark association and most likely they will alsoe after us because of the bounty."


    " Second, this Jemmy information source is likely quite dangerous. Because when this person was talking about that, he was quite scared. Most likely that information source has rules that people who got the information from that source won''t be able to talk with other people about them. Most likely this type of rule they have and because of this none of them wanted to talk about that information source. Also, most likely they know that we came to this dungeon and we kill all those people that came from the dark association. Most likely, our bounty will increase once again."


    " We also needed to keep our guard against Jemmy''s information source. Most likely, they had many people that were spread all over the city and they were keeping information about many people. So we need to also alert them," Sam told them. All this time, Tony and the girls were very serious. All of them know how dangerous this could be. What if there were some high-grade people who decided to take the bounty mission and came after them? Because of this, all of them now have serious expressions on their faces.


    "Well, guys, from now on we can use masks to hide our faces," Tony suddenly told them his suggestion. Hearing his suggestion, all of them suddenly smile and agree with him. Well, this wasn''t a bad idea and because of this, they were now smiling. They could really use the mask to hide their face from that person.


    Sam also agreed with him, but then he thought that he already has a second identity where he always kept a mask on his face. And he did not want to reveal that second identity as the mask to everyone. So he needs to be careful about that so that he won''t mix his identity with his second identity.


    "Okay, guys, go to rest. We will leave this area one hourter, so until then, you can rest." Suddenly, Sam told them that they will leave this area 1 hourter. Well, those people already know about their location and because of this Sam wanted to leave this ce. Most likely, those information sources also have some people in this and those people give their location to those enemies.


    After that, Sam told all of his friends that he had something to do and left the base. Well, he wanted to make sure that no one was near their base and he also wanted to remove all the traces that pointed them as the killer of those enemies.


    ______________To be continued__________

 Chapter 233 233 - Skeletons

    Right now, Sam was looking around the ce where he killed those people from the dark association. After removing all the traces, he left that ce and came back to his base. Tony and the girls were ready to leave the ce. Well, it wasn''t that they were afraid of those people that will being after them, but still, they wanted to avoid those people. They also have one risk. What would happen if a peak D-grade warrior came after them? Because of this, they quickly left that ce.


    "Sam, did you find anyone near our base? Or did you find anyone near us right now? " Jeni asked Sam.


    Sam shakes his head.


    " No, I did not find anyone near us. Most likely, those people maintain a distance from us or they stop following us. Also, don''t worry, I already have the life-detecting device so if theye near its range, then we will get to know that," Sam told them about this. Previously, he did not always activate the life sign-detecting device, but right now, he decided to keep activating that device.


    Sometimeter, the device began to vibrate. Sam quickly checked that device and saw that not far away from them was a group of monsters. Unfortunately, you cannot say for sure what type of monsters were those, but you can still identify if that was a monster or human or any other living being.


    "Guys not far away from us, a group of monsters roaming around. Most likely 20 monsters were in that ce, so be ready to fight." Sam quickly turned around and exined this to his friends. He told him to get ready to fight those monsters. Everyone nodded after hearing him.


    Sam leads them toward those monsters. Sometimeter, they noticed that it was a group of skeletons. 20 skeletons were in that ce. Nobody knows what they are doing in that ce, but Sam signals Jeni and Elena to prepare their spells. Both of them nodded and quickly began to prepare their spells. Sam also already brings out his bow and arrow. After that, he also signals Tony and the others to get ready to ambush those skeletons. They also nodded.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam, Jeni, and Elena already shoot their attack toward those skeletons. Very quickly, those attacks approach those skeletons and hit those skeletons. Well, that doesn''t kill every skeleton, but still, 8 skeletons were already dead. At this time, Tony and the others were already approaching those skeletons.


    A few minutester, they already finished all those skeletons but out of nowhere, more skeletons began to approach them. For a moment, everyone became very startled after seeing those skeletons, but Sam quickly told them to maintain their calmness. After that, he and the others once again begin to attack those skeletons.


    But one thing was that while fighting the skeletons, Sam suddenly felt that something was wrong here. He quickly activated his spirit vision to know what was wrong here. But the moment he activated that spirit vision, he saw a big, dark spiritual energy approaching them from a distance. He wasn''t sure what type of monster released that much dark spiritual energy, but one thing he was sure of was that it was very dangerous.


    Sam quickly told everyone about this. Tony and the girls are busy fighting those skeletons, but suddenly, after hearing Sam''s alert, they also became very serious. Sam quickly told him to finish all those skeletons as quickly as they could because the thing that was approaching them wasn''t a good thing. Sam was already very close to breaking through, but still, he was feeling that the thing approaching them would be a tough opponent. He stops attacking the skeletons. Right now, he wants to save his spiritual energy and because of this; he stops fighting those skeletons. Most likely Tony and the others also have the same idea, but all of them know they needed to kill those skeletons first, then they could do anything.


    Sam quickly begins to prepare a great fireball. Well, the mega fireball will create match destruction, because of this he did not create a mega fireball. Even though the great fireball also damaged the whole area, its destructive power wasn''t as strong as the mega fireball. He did not take that much time to create the great fireball. Now he was just waiting for that thing that was approaching them.


    Tony and the girls already finish all the skeletons that came after them and also collect all the loot. After doing all of that, they quickly bring out the health potion and the spiritual energy recovery potion. They gulped down these two potions to recover their energy. After that, they came beside Sam and also looked in the direction from where Sam was feeling the monster wasing toward them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Suddenly the life sign detector began to vibrate and Sam already noticed a big ck light was approaching them. That monster was full of dark energy and because of this, it showed a ck color. They were approaching them at a very fast speed, but suddenly that thing stopped.


    Sam, Tony, and the girls were looking toward the life sign detector device. You can say that this sudden change is because they did not understand why that monster suddenly stopped moving. Also surprised them. But he didn''t know why, but suddenly he felt danger was approaching them. He quickly cancels his spell and turns toward his friends.


    "Guys!!!!!! Jump," suddenly he told all of them to jump away from that ce. Tony and the girls did not question him and, wasting no time, they quickly jumped away from that ce. Well, fortunately, they were able to react quickly because the moment they jumped away from that ce, many arrows came to that ce. Also, they were not your normal arrows because they were filled with poison. Fortunately, Tony and the girls were able to react quickly, and they avoided that attack. If Sam did not ask them to jump away from that ce, then most likely they will get hit by those arrows. Fortunately, Sam has a superior sense.


    Tony and the girls already run far away from that ce and hide themselves. At this time, Sam already activated the concealment technique and went toward that ce from where those Arrows came toward them. He also previously saw that the monster also was in that direction. It could be that the monster was the Archer that was shooting arrows toward them. Well, until he did not reach that ce, he wouldn''t get any answer.


    ______________


    Sometimeter, Sam had already reached that ce. Right now, he was looking toward the monster that was in front of him. In front of him was a skeleton monster that was about to shoot an arrow toward the ce where Tony and the others were now hiding. Sam didn''t waste any time, and quickly brought out his yer and wasted no time attacking that skeleton. That skeleton who was about to shoot arrows did even realize when someone appeared in front of him and also attacked him. Well, Sam, wasting no time, quickly appears in front of him and swings his sword toward that monster. Well, you have to say that the power behind Sam''s energy mode already increased and because of this, he could damage this skeleton with just one swing.


    But, then you have to say this skeleton has a strong defense. Because Sam is only able to damage his bones but unable to finish that skeleton. But right now, the skeleton was already very alert. But he wasn''t able to spot Sam, and Sam used that chance to keep attacking that skeleton from every direction. Sam was using his full speed while attacking that skeleton. That skeleton didn''t get the chance to react because he was unable to guess from which direction the next attack woulde after him. He tries to punch in the year, but those punches are unable to hit Sam.


    _______


    At this time, the skeleton had already lost both of his legs and, because of this, he instantly fell down to the ground. That created a sound. Tony and the girls who were far away from that ce also hear that noise. They quickly start approaching that direction from where they hear that sound. They already know that Sam has already gone in that direction. Because of this, they are also approaching that direction.


    Sometimeter, they already reached that ce. They saw that a big skeleton had fallen on the ground. Well, still, it wasn''t that big, butpared to those normal skeletons, it was big. This skeleton was ck and you can also see many dark red spots on those bones. This skeleton was fully ck and also had dark red spots on its bones.


    But at this time they also so that out of nowhere a big fireball hit that monster. At this time, Jeni and Elena also weren''t slow. They already prepare their spells and also attack that skeleton. They all know that Sam shot that fireball. Because of this, they also did not waste any time and attack that skeleton.


    ______________To be continued__________


    [A/N: Hey guys, currently I am facing a problem on webnovel. I am unable to log in to webnovel on my mobile phone. Because of this, I am unable to see your messages. ]

 Chapter 234 234 - Finishing The Skeleton

    "Why is this skeleton so powerful?" Suddenly Kira asked them this quotation.


    Previously, when all of them attack that skeleton, they are unable to kill that monster, and sometimeter, the skeleton once again is able to recover his legs. You can say that previously Sam got distracted for a second and, because of this skeleton, got the time to recover. Wasting no time, Sam once again uses the concealment technique and approaches that skeleton. He already instructed all of his friends to disturb that skeleton while he will finish that skeleton. So right now Tony and the others were attacking that skeleton, or you can say that they were distracting while Sam already approach that skeleton.


    Sam also already prepare a mega fireball. But he did not immediately attack that skeleton because that would affect his friends. He quickly told all of his friends to quickly run away from this area. Tony and the girls did not ask any questions and they stop attacking that skeleton and begin to run away from that ce. Sam uses that chance to shoot that mega fireball toward that skeleton. After that, he also did not waste any time and used his full speed to run away from that ce.


    At this time, Kira asked them this question.


    "Well, I think you already notice that this ck skeleton has red marks on his bones. Well, sometimes there were some spiritual monsters that have those types of marks, which will give them more strengthpared to the other monsters who were also in the same grade. You can say that there are also mutations in that type of monster. With that type of mutation, they are able to absorb more energy and are able to increase their strength," Alexa exined all of this to her. At this time, Sam already approached them and he also heard Alexa''s exnation.


    "Well, not only in this spiritual Dungeon but you can also see those types of mutation inside of many spiritual dungeons or ghost dungeons. Because of this, those types of monster were very powerful and dangerous."Sam also said that to her. After listening to all of this exnation Kira finally understood. She nodded toward them.


    That mega fireball already hit that skeleton, and that also created a huge explosion. Fortunately, Sam and his friends already were very far away from that ce, but still, they feel the shockwave that was created by that explosion. Right now, they did not know if some sessfully killed that monster or not, but they were sure that this attack would clearly do serious damage to that monster.


    "Everything is alright but still, I am very surprised that we get to see this type of monster in this ce because we didn''t go very deep in this dungeon. Seriously, we underestimate the danger inside this dungeon. Fortunately, Sam was present here or if we fight that monster then we would be seriously injured right now," Jeni said to them. Really, it was natural because right now there were only on the first floor and they did not think that they would meet this type of monster in this ce.


    " Well, you cannot say for sure what will happen inside of the Dungeon even when we are on the first floor," Sam said to her. She nodded, hearing this.


    _______________


    Sometimeter,


    The ce where the explosion happened has already begun to clear. Sam and his friends once again were able to see what was the condition of that ce. But after seeing the condition of the monster, they all sigh in relief. Only then do Tony and the girls smile. Well, they had confidence in Sam, but still, they were quite worried about that monster. Because they already know that while attacking that mega fireball, Sam most probably uses his 70% to 80% spiritual energy. Right now, even if he uses the spiritual recovery potion, he won''t be able to recover his full spiritual energy this quickly, and that could be very dangerous.


    But fortunately, the skeleton was already dead. All of them saw how the body of that skeleton began to fade away and turn into ash. Sam was wasting no time approaching that ce and already saw the loot. This time you can say that it was very lucky for him because he saw a technique book and also a limit breaker. Wasting no time, he collected the loot and then left the ce. Well, it also is not like he will take all that loot for himself.


    ______________


    2 hourster,


    Right now, Sam and the others were once again resting. This time Tony, Alexa, and Kenny were watching over them while Sam and the others were sleeping. For 2 hours after killing that big skeleton, they just continue to kill more monsters and because of this right now they are very tired and resting. Before resting, Sam also already set the monster rappelling device and also the life sign-detecting device. Well, right now they already know that there are many people who were watching their location and their moves and because of this, none of them wanted to be careless. Even when they were killing those monsters, they were alert about their surrounding area.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter, suddenly the life detecting device began to vibrate. Tony quickly checked the device, and he saw that some monster was entering the range of this device. Not only that, he can also 15 warriors also present in that area. Most likely, both parties were fighting against each other.


    "Guys, what should we do?" Suddenly Kenny asks Tony and Alexa.


    "We should not interfere with others'' fights. And they are very far away from our best, so we did not need to worry about that, but if they decided toe near our best, then we immediately took action against them." At this time Alexa said this to them. Well, right now she didn''t want to disturb her friend''s sleep.


    "Yeah, I think we should do that. I don''t want to fight any meaningless fight." Suddenly Tony alsoments on that. Alexa and Kenny nodded on and all of them once again began to look at the detecting device. Right now, they were watching over those monsters and humans. They were still far away from their base.


    ___________


    Right now Tony and the girls are watching over the moment of those people. Sometime ago, those Warriors already killed all those monsters that were attacking them. But they did not leave that area. For a moment Tony and the girls didn''t understand why they did not leave that area, but then Tony said,


    "Most likely, they were nning to take a rest in that area. Don''t forget that area was full of big rocks and in the area, you can also find many caves. Most likely, they also found a cave and decided to rest there. Well, still it will be good that they only rest in that ce and did not n to approach us," Tony said to them. Well, sometimeter, Sam and others will naturally wake up from their sleep, then they will leave this ce. It wasn''t that they were ying to go to the next floor, but they were nning to kill as many monsters as they could, so that they could get many spirit crystals from this dungeon.


    _________________


    "What happened, guys? Why are you looking at the life sign-detecting device?" Sometimeter, Sam and the others wake up from their sleep, and then they notice that Tony, Alexa, and Kenny were busy looking at the life-detecting device. At this time Tina suddenly asked them.


    Sam already guessed that they found something and because of this, he instantly got up from his bed and went toward the life detecting device. He saw 15 human signs. But fortunately, they weren''t near them. Sam, at this time, looks toward Tony to get the details about this.


    Tony quickly told them about those people. After hearing that those people most likely rested in that ce, Sam and others did not think that much because it wasn''t that they own this area and they could prevent other warriors from resting. Sam quickly told him to pack up everything and they will leave this area.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam suddenly signals all of his friends to stop moving. Tony and the others quickly stop moving. At this time, Sam signals them in a direction. When all of them looked in that direction, they saw that a group of Warriors was fighting many monsters. At this time, some told him that most likely that monsters'' signal that they were following all this time belonged to these monsters. Most likely before Sam and his group reach those monsters, some other Warriors reach them and start to fight with them.


    "Well, let''s go out from here. I don''t want any misunderstanding. If that group of Warriors saw them right now, then they would think that we came here to steal their prey," Sam told them and after that all of them left the area.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 235 235 -Once Again System Upgrade.

    Right now in the training room, you can see that Sam was meditating. Well, actually he was absorbing all the crystals that he collected from the Dungeon these few days. Not only did hee back from the ghost Dungeon, but he also came back from the Goblin Dungeon. Today he was only focusing on increasing his status points. It took him some hours to fully absorb all the crystals and now he was looking at the status screen.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (880/880)


    Strength: 90


    Agility: 90


    Physique: 90


    Intelligent(mental power): 90


    Spirit: 79


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 1m (You can upgrade the system.)


    Well, you can see that he is almost already at the limit of an Early D-grade warrior. Right now he just needs to collect some more spirit crystals and then he will try to break through. Also, one more thing was that you can see that he already collected 1 million upgrade points. With this, you can imagine how many monsters he already killed.


    One thing Sam did not notice at first, but when he was able to close the system window, he noticed he can once again upgrade his system with these upgrade points. This surprised him because previously he thought he wouldn''t be able to upgrade the point, but it looks like he will once again upgrade the system. But then he started to think.


    ''If I just upgrade my system right now, then I won''t be able to use the system for some time. I think it will be good if I upgrade the system after I be an intermediate D-grade warrior.'' Sam thing about that. Actually, he won''t be able to look at his status if he upgraded his system right now, because previously when he upgraded the system he was unable to open the status point or any other thing except his inventory. Because of this, he wanted to upgrade the systemter, and at the same time, he could collect more system points so that after upgrading the system, he could upgrade his techniques. Well, right now he wanted to upgrade many of his techniques, but after seeing that he could upgrade the system, he decided to upgrade those techniquester.


    Sam once again noticed a very good thing in his system window that he could once again use the supreme upgrade in the next month. Well, he just needs to wait a few more days, then he will be able to use that. Now, after thinking about the technique, he remembers that when he previously upgraded the system, he got this supreme upgrade, so what he will get this time when he will upgrade his system once again? Thinking about that, he was very excited because the system will give him something good that could make him powerful.


    Well, he won''t be able to get the answer until he did not upgrade the system, so he did not want to think about that and closed his system window. Previously at the ghost dungeon, he got a technique book and a limit breaker, but he did not need that technique book or the limit breaker because he already had a limit breaker and that technique wasn''t interesting. Because of this he sells the technique book while only keeping the limit breaker. But the thing was that this limit breaker wasn''t your high-grade limit breaker. Because of this, he wanted to also sell this, but then he thought that he could upgrade these limit breakers using his supreme upgrade and because of this he still kept that limit breaker in his inventory.


    Sam got up from the ground and then went to the bathroom. After that, he went to the kitchen because right now he was very hungry. While eating, he was thinking about what he should do next. After thinking for some time, he decided to go back to the training room because he needed to be familiar with his new power. But before that, he will rest sometime.


    ____________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter,


    After finishing his food, he was right now in his room. Today no one was in his house. His sister and parents were inside of the Dungeon. Teacher Alena also went with her sister. Well, this gives much time to go back to the ghost dungeon once again. Well, if you are thinking that Alena wasn''t paying attention to him, then you are wrong because she already ns to take him to a high-grade dungeon when shees back. Even though he won''t be able to use those high-grade crystals, he could use them in the future. The most important thing was she wanted to bring him to the high-grade dungeon because she wanted Sam to be experienced in fighting those monsters.


    Tomorrow, Sam will once again go back to the ghost dungeon. But this time none of his friends will go with him because all of them were busy with their teachers. Right now Jeni and Elena are mainly focused on spirit technique. Also, like them, Alexa, Tony, and the others were also busy in mastering that technique. Don''t think that Sam also ignored that technique because he was right now focusing on that spirit technique while using his archery technique. He also already got a lot of help from Alena in this, but still, it was quite tough to use that speed technique while using the archery technique. But if he is able to use that technique while using his arrows and bow, then it will be one of his deadliest attacks.


    Well, when he was in his bed, his phone suddenly began to ring. He opened his mobile and saw that it was old man Gustav from Base city calling him. Sam quickly picks up the phone.


    "Brat, your order will be ready in 2 days. Do I need to send you the package or you wille to get those?" he asked Sam.


    " Hello, old man. You don''t need it to send that package because a few dayster, I will go there and collect them." He answered the old man. After that, they talked for some time and then hung up the call.


    "Finally, those swords are ready," Sam said with a smile on his face. Well, if you were wondering which swords he was talking about, then he was talking about the swords like his yer. He already ordered those three swords for his family. Well, he still did not teach them his energy mode, but he told them that when they came back from the Dungeon, he would teach them something that was very powerful. Well, he previously did not teach them because he did not have any other swords like his yer. Because of this, he did not teach them previously.


    ________________


    With a kick, Sam sent the robot backward, but at this time once again, the other robot was already beside him and was about to attack him. But Sam wasn''t able to react in time and get hit by the punch. This Sam sent backward. At this time, the ck robot was already able to stabilize himself and with the other robot, both of them were approaching Sam. Well, as you can give that Sam was practicing or you can say sparing with his two robots to get familiar with his strength. He also set these two robots'' power limits to peak D-grade. Because of this, he was having a very hard time while fighting those two robots.


    Fortunately, he has this type of robot to train. If he did not have this type of robot, then to get familiar with his strength, he only needed to go to the Dungeon. But right now, he did not need to do that.


    Sometimeter, Sam was right now sitting down on the ground while those two robots were standing in front of him. He alreadymands those robots to stop fighting while he will rest. He was pretty badly injured by those robots, but fortunately, he has the health potion. If you are wondering why he pushed himself this far because he quickly wanted to get familiar with his new strength. Also, this was his style to get powerful.


    ____________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam left his house because he was feeling bored in his house. From morning he was training and right now he wanted to rest his mind for some time. He also wanted to rx before going into a dungeon. He was right now going toward the public training area where the old man taught those children fighting. You can say that it was a rxing ce for him where he will get to watch those children practicing their moves.


    When he reached the public training area, he saw that all the children still did note to the training area. Most likely, it wasn''t the time. Well, after finding a sitting ce, Sam went down and looked at theke beside this training area. He didn''t need to wait that much time because sometimeter he can holiday here with many voices of children.


    _______To be continued______

 Chapter 236 236 - Once Again Big Skeleton

    Sam, who was using the concealment technique right now, killed the Zombies that were in front of him. Well, you can say that at least 20 zombies were in front of him. He did not want to waste anymore and because of this, he just killed them as fast as he could, using his energy mode. Sam still was not able to use the energy mode while also using the spirit technique. He was still working on that besides his other technique, but that will need him much time to master. As you know, the fastest way for him to kill those monsters was by using his energy mode while using his fast-cut technique.


    But while killing those zombies, he noticed one thing: his yer had already received many scratches. Most likely he also needs to upgrade his yer using the supreme upgrade. Well, he did not want to rece his sword with another sword and because of this, he decided to upgrade this sword using the supreme upgrade. But for that, he needed to wait for the next month when he could once again use the supreme upgrade.


    Sometimeter, he already finished all those 20 Zombies, and he collected all those loot. Well, as you can see that his speed was faster when he came to the Dungeon alone, but when he came to Dungeon with his friends, he had extra safety while he rested or killed the monsters. Because of this, he still prefers toe to the dungeon with his friends. Also, beforeing to the Dungeon he was already very alert because previously he already got to know that there were many people who were watching over his move and location. Those people could be inside of this dungeon or outside of the Dungeon and because of this, he was using his second identity mask.


    After killing all those zombies, he once again begins to advance. He could hear many fighting soundsing from those Warriors that were fighting those monsters inside of this dungeon. Well, he did not want to disturb them and because of this, he just left that area and began to advance. Beforeing to this dungeon, he heard the bad news. Well, seriously, some people died in this dungeon. The only survivor of that group told them that it was because they faced a big skeleton who also had red spots on his body. Most likely that was the skeleton who he also faced previously. Well, that monster was very powerful and normally those early D-grade warriors won''t be able to face that monster alone. Those groups of people only had five Warriors and four of them died in that battle. After hearing this news, Sam became very sad. He knew that it was natural for people to lose their life inside of the Dungeon but still it was a very sad thing.


    Previously, when they went outside of the Dungeon, they informed the warrior association about that skeleton, but it looks like there were some Warriors who did not know about that skeleton, and because of this, something like this happened. So he just hoped that the warrior association would tell all the warriors about this so that no more life could be lost inside of this dungeon.


    After advancing, he already found a group of humanoid ghosts that were floating in the sky. Wasting no time, Sam quickly used his bow and arrow to shoot toward those ghosts. Well, he was using his spirit arrows and because of this, it did not take him that much time to kill all those ghosts. After that, using his telekinesis technique collected all those Arrows. If you are thinking that he did not use this technique, then you are wrong because while fighting the monsters, he uses this technique to stop their movement.


    _______________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam was now eating his food. It has been 5 days since he came to this dungeon. If you are thinking that he already collected those crystals that he needed to increase his spirit status, then you are wrong. Because, as you know that the high-grade monsters you will kill, the drop rate of the crystals will decrease. And because of this, it was taking him that much time to collect the required spirit crystals.


    While he was eating his food, he heard some fighting noise that was near him. Well, he had already finished his food, so he looked in the direction using his spiritual vision. He did not expect to see someone familiar in this dungeon, but he saw that there were some people that he was familiar with. Those people were from his previous school; because of this, Sam still remembers their faces. Sam was interested in interfering in the fight, but he was still looking at their fight. Most likely, those people really improve in their fighting technique. If you are wondering how he knew that, because they were friends of Elena.


    After watching, Sam lost interest and got up from the ground to leave the area. They are 15 Warriors that were fighting 10 skeletons. Even though those Warriors were unable to kill those skeletons that easily, they still had the advantage and because of this, Sam lost interest and was about to leave the area. But suddenly the life sign detector began to vibrate. Look at the device and saw that a big red mark was approaching those Warriors. Sam already understands who that big red mark was. Yes, you also guess that is right. It was that big skeleton.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam did not waste anymore time and quickly used the concealment technique and went toward that big skeleton. Even though there were 15 warriors, Sam didn''t know if they were able to fight with that big skeleton. The power of the big skeleton was much greater than any early D-grade monsters. Most probably, that big skeleton has the same power as the intermediate D-grade monster. Because of this, they decided to interfere in their fight to stop that skeleton. He did not want any people to die in front of him while he could prevent that.


    ___________


    Sometimeter, Sam already noticed that big skeleton. He quickly brings out his bow and arrow. He began to prepare his most powerful attack with his arrows. He begins with as much spiritual energy as he can in that arrow, and then he also changes the nature of that spiritual energy and turns that into fire energy. Yes, you guess that, right? He was using the me arrow. When he already gathered much spiritual energy in that arrow, he quickly shot Arrow toward that monster.


    After leaving the bow, Arrow begins to shine in blue color. As you can guess, it was due to the natural change of that spiritual energy. At this time, those Warriors also saw a blue light in the sky. That light was going far away from them. For some time, they became confused, but then they guessed it was some kind of spell that was shot by a warrior toward the monster. So they once again focused on their own fight.


    That me arrow quickly approaches the skeleton monster and hits him. Sam almost uses 50% of his spiritual energy. With that, you can guess how powerful that arrow was. The moment that arrow hit that skeleton, it created an explosion. Those dead trees around that area got blown away by that explosion.


    Right now, Sam was looking in the direction to know the answer. But then he predicted that it wouldn''t be enough to kill that skeleton and, because of this, he began to prepare one more arrow. Well, because he was using the energy recovery technique, he already recovered 10% of spiritual energy. He once again uses 50% of his spiritual energy in that Arrow and then changes the nature of that spiritual energy. Wasting no time, he quickly shot that arrow toward that monster. Instantly, he began to feel weak. Wasting no time, he brought out one spiritual energy recovery potion and gulped it down. With the help of this potion and the energy recovery technique, he began to recover his spiritual energy and the headache he was feeling before wasn''t there.


    ________________


    "Boom!!!" Once again, an explosion appeared in the ce where that skeleton was before. Well, Sam really predicted right, because if he didn''t use that second Arrow, then he would be unable to kill that skeleton. With these two blue me arrows, that skeleton finally gets killed. Even though he did not get killed by Sam''s first arrow, but seriously injured him and with that second arrow, Sam sessfully killed that monster.


    Sometimeter, when that area became clear, Sam, so that there was no sign of the monster and he became sure that he sessfully killed that skeleton. Wasting no time, he quickly approached that area and saw the loot. After collecting the loot, he left that area and began to advance.


    ______To be continued______

 Chapter 237 237 - Intermediate D-Grade

    Central city, Royal Academy,


    Currently, Sam is meditating in his training room. Two days ago he came back from the Dungeon. After that, he took a rest the next day and today he came to the college. Right now, his only focus was to absorb all those spirit crystals and then increase the spirit status to its limit.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (880/880)


    Strength: 90


    Agility: 90


    Physique: 90


    Intelligent(mental power): 90


    Spirit: 90


    Grade: (D) (early)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 1.1 m (You can upgrade the system.) "


    After looking at his status, Sam finally smiles. Finally, he could try to break through. But before that, he needs to eat something. So he left that training room and right now he was going toward the cafeteria. Today you can say that he was alone because his friends were busy. They still did note back from the Dungeon. Because of this, he was now alone.


    _____________


    Sometimeter, when he was now eating in the cafeteria, he suddenly heard some seniors were talking about other colleges. Those seniors were from the second year. Sam became interested after hearing that they were talking about other colleges. Actually, he also heard from teacher Alena that they also send people to other colleges. All those people went to the other college to note down the details of the students. But Sam previously only focused on collecting the crystals and because of this, he did not ask her about this. So when he heard that the seniors were talking about other colleges, he became interested.


    "Did you hear that Jimmy from the 3rd year is also quite close to breaking through? He was from the white tiger. Most likely before the annual collegepetition, he could break through to early C-grade."


    " Well, don''t worry about that. If he is able to break through to early C-grade, he won''t be able to win against senior Fiona or Fiona Gloria."


    " Yes, she is right. Jimmy from the white Tiger Academy won''t be able to win against our senior Fiona or senior Gloria. But I am worried about Sonia from the 2nd year. She was from the Golden Dawn. She was already a peak D-grade warrior. I am very worried about that."


    " Don''t worry. Jack will win against her. He was also a peak D-grade warrior. So don''t worry that we are not weak."


    " Haha¡­ you are right. Our Jack will definitely win against her."


    All those second-year students were talking like this about those students from the other college. Sam was just silently listening to all of this. Unfortunately, he did not hear anything about the first-year from the 2nd year students. Most likely he needed to ask teacher Alena about this.


    _________________


    Sam came back to the training room. Right now you can say that he was very excited because he will use the limit breaker to break through to intermediate D-grade. Sam sit down in a Lotus position and brings out the limit breaker. Wasting no time, he quickly channels his spiritual energy toward the limit breaker and then tries to feel the barrier inside of him.


    It did not take him that much time to find that barrier. Wasting no time, he quickly used his power to attack that barrier. That barrier was hit by his attack. Sam did not rx and just continuously attacked that barrier. Under that continuous attack, that barrier begins to shake violently. For sometime Sam thought that he won''t be able to break through this barrier, but then suddenly he saw a crack mark on that barrier. It instantly made him very excited. So, wasting no time, he once again uses his full power to attack that crack mark. Under his continuous attack, that barrier slowly began to be bigger.


    Sam instantly begins to feel the power that he didn''t feel before. Right now, if someone came to his training room, then they would see that Sam was releasing the power of an intermediate D-grade warrior. But Sam quickly controls that aura. Right now, he did not want anyone to find out about this. Because of this, he quickly uses his concealment technique. After that, he opened his eyes. But if you saw his face right now, then you can see that he was smiling.


    "Name: Sam Kainer<novelnext></novelnext>


    Health: (880/880)


    Strength: 00


    Agility: 00


    Physique: 00


    Intelligent(mental power): 00


    Spirit: 00


    Grade: (D) (intermediate)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 1.1 m (You can upgrade the system.)"


    After looking at the system window, he can see that all of his previous statuses went back to 0. But that doesn''t mean he became weaker. He finally became an intermediate warrior.


    Sam quickly calms himself. Because right now, he needs to be familiar with his new strength. Wasting no time, he quickly brought out those two robots and set the power limit of those two robots to peak D-grade. He begins to fight those two robots.


    ______________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally finishes his fight. He can even imagine how powerful he became when he broke that barrier. Fortunately, he has that limit breaker or it will be very hard for him to break through that barrier. Because when he was previously attacking that barrier, he already felt how powerful that barrier was blocking his breakthrough. But one thing was that the next barrier will be more powerful than this. Well, he did not think about that because he could think about theter, because right now he needed to eat something. While trying to fight that barrier, he uses all of his strength and because of this, you can say that he was very hungry.


    Sam, at this time, looked toward the clock and saw that it was 5:00 p.m. previously. He came back from the cafeteria at 3:00 p.m. but he did not think that it would take him two hours to break through. For Sam, it was only a minute, but he never expected it would take two hours.


    _____________


    Sam finally came back to his house, and he was now resting on his bed. But suddenly his phone vibrated. Quickly saw that it was a message from his sister. His sister was telling him that she wille back home today. Well, it was a good thing that she finally came back from the Dungeon. Not only Gloria but his parents were alsoing back from the Dungeon tomorrow. They were already out of the Dungeon but because today was already veryte, they decided to rest near that dungeon.


    Well, if you are wondering why Sam was happy, because he can finally teach them the energy mode technique. The moment he got to know that every year in a particr time a monster came out from the Dungeon and attacked humanity, Sam became very restless. Because he was starting to worry about his family and because of this, he decided to teach them about the energy mode. Those three swords were already with him.


    _______________


    Next day,


    "Mom, Dan, and sister. These three swords are for you. I know that normally this sword is very weak and you won''t be able to hunt any powerful monster with that, but the technique I am going to teach you will be useful only when you will use this sword." After that, Sam gave those three words to them. Even though Gloria did not use swords, she still epted the gift. Actually, Sam already ordered a different thing for his sister, but because old man Henry was very busy, he needed some time to make that.


    "Sister, I think you already remember when I previously told you that I needed Mytheno for something," Sam told Gloria about this, and Gloria nodded. She remembered that because at that time she did not know why Sam needed that material.


    "So, these three swords were made by the mytheno. I know that it was a very weird material to make a sword, but this is the only way to use my special technique. Before I tell you about the technique, I want to tell you something. The technique I was about to show you, was simr to the spirit technique or not. You can say that it was quite powerfulpared to the spirit technique, but it won''t be able to release sword shes like the spirit technique. As you know, it was very hard to gather the spiritual energy in our bodies. At that time I did not know about the spirit technique and because of this, I made this technique. This technique was called energy mode." Sam exins all of this and then suddenly brings out his yer and begins to spiritual energy toward his yer.


    All this time, Victor, Hina, and Gloria didn''t say anything. They were just silently listening to his words. They also know that it was natural for Sam to not know about the spirit technique before he joined any college. But then they became very interested when Sam told them that this technique was very simr to the spirit technique. They became very surprised when they saw that the sword Sam was holding began to change color.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 238 238 - Training

    Sam was now looking at his parents and sister. All of them are now practicing the energy mode that Sam recently taught them. All of them were very interested in Sam''s technique and because of this, they were practicing the technique very seriously. Well, this energy mode wasn''t as hard as the spirit technique, but it also wasn''t easy to learn. To master this technique, one needs to have good control over spiritual energy. If you don''t have good control over your spiritual energy, then you won''t be able to control the spiritual energy when transferring the spiritual energy to your sword.


    Butpared to Sam, when he first learned this technique, his parents and his sister were much better. Previously, after mastering the spiritual control, Sam needed at least one or two days to use this energy mode, but his mom and dad, or even his sister, were much better than him. All of them can already use that technique, but they are unable to maintain that. But most likely this won''t take them that much longer. Well, this was natural because when he first learned this technique, his potential was only at a special grade. But his mom and dad were much better than him because both of their potentials were rare grades and Gloria had legendary grade potential. So, as you can guess, it was much easier for them to learn this technique.


    Well, it wasn''t that he was jealous of that because he could easily upgrade his potential. He was also nning to upgrade his parents'' and sister''s potential using his supreme upgrade. He was still looking over them and if his parents or sister did anything wrong; he told them to correct that. At this time, suddenly his phone rang. He looked at his phone and said that it was old man Henry. Sam quickly picks up the phone. After that, both of them talk for some time and then Sam hangs up the phone. Actually, Sam already told old man Henry to make a bow for his mom and throw daggers for his sister. His sister was very focused on her spill technique, but she was also good at throwing daggers and because of this, he told the old man handy to make those. Old man Henry informs him that tomorrow he willplete those things and he will send them.


    ''Well, it is a good thing that my sister and mom are already very close to learning the energy mode.'' Sam thought about that. The funniest thing was that his parents and sister also thought that he had some kind of special sword, but when he told them his secret, all of them were very speechless. Looking at their expression, Sam justughed.


    ___________________


    5 hourster,


    Three of them are already able to use the energy mode. Even though they need to practice more to strengthen the technique, it was still good for them. You can say that right now his dad could release 8% of his spiritual energy, while his mom 6% and his sister 5%. Well, even though his sister has legendary potential. She wasn''t good at swords and because of this; she was only able to release this much spiritual energy.


    Right now, all of them were in the kitchen and Hina was cooking lunch for them. His mom and dad already told him not to tell anyone about that technique because this was really a powerful technique and if any bad guys get to learn about this taking that could be very dangerous for all the humans. Sam already assured them that he won''t tell anyone, but he also told them they should also not tell anyone about this. After hearing that, his father just smiled. Well, Sam did not have the n to tell anyone about this technique except his family. He already knew that his mom, dad, and sister were always fighting with the monster and, because of this, he was very worried. They already know these techniques and this could be their Trump cards when their life will be in danger.


    "So, how is your preparation for the annual collegepetition? I learned from your teacher that the white Tiger Academy and Golden Dawn Academy also have many geniuses in their 1st year. This will be a very tough fight for you," Victor told him.


    " Don''t worry about that, Dad. I am not worried about that." Sam said to him.


    " Hahaha¡­ if you talk like this in front of anyone, then they will definitely think that you are very arrogant. But don''t worry, we have confidence in you because we know how hard you work." His dadughingly said to him. Hearing this, Sam was very d that he got a family member like this.


    "Oh, now I remember that Alena already said that she will bring you to a peak D-grade dungeon. She wanted you to have the experience of fighting monsters that were higher grades than you. I know that she will always be by your side to protect you, but still try to gain as much experience as you can. That experience will help you to be good over here." Suddenly, his dad told him that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam nodded, hearing that. He already guessed that his teacher wanted to bring him to the peak D-grade dungeon to gain experience while fighting higher-grade monsters. But as you know him, he doesn''t care about that. She will be there to protect him and because of this, he could fight those monsters without a warrior about anything. But at this time, he doesn''t want anyone to know that he already broke through. That could once again bring poprity to him, and Sam doesn''t want that. Right now, he is already very popr, and he doesn''t want to be more popr. So he decided that when he goes to the Dungeon with his teacher, he will only use early D-grade power. But when this is done, it will be very helpful for him because suddenly doesn''t have any intermediate crystals, and going to that peak D-grade dungeon will be very helpful to him.


    _________________


    Sometimeter, Hina and Gloria brought their food to the dining table, and then all of them started to eat their lunch. While eating their lunch, some asked Gloria about her adventure. Gloria did not hide anything and told her brother about her adventure when she went to the Dungeon. She told her that teacher Alena this time brought him to a peak D-grade dungeon. This time it was very helpful for her in that dungeon because she also got a limit breaker in that dungeon. More than that, she also fights a peak C-grade monster in that dungeon. She exins to Sam the difference between an early C-grade monster and a peak C-grade monster. If an early C-grade warrior was a leaf, then the peak C-grade was the whole tree.


    After hearing all of this, Sam was already very shocked. He already guessed that, unlike the other grade, the higher grade ( From C-grade to A-grade) will be different, but he never expected that. Because in the other grade like his D-grade, even though he was in the early grade, he could still fight with the peak D-grade monsters for some time. But most likely when he will be in the higher grade, he won''t be able to do that.


    _______________


    Next day,


    Currently, Sam was in his training room and fighting with his training partners. On the other hand, his parents and his sister were busy with their practice. All of them were practicing the energy mode. Gloria was practicing very hardpared to her parents because a few dayster the annual collegepetition will be held and before that she wanted to master this energy mode. But still, it was very hard for her because this wasn''t her regr technique. It was apletely different technique, simr to the spirit technique. But it also has a difference. In the spirit technique, you need to connect your spiritual energy with your technique, but here you need to transfer your spiritual energy to your weapon, and then you need to maintain that spiritual energy in your weapon. That was a really very hard thing. But one thing was thatpared to her mom and dad, her spiritual control was already very good and that was her advantage.


    All of them are busy in their training and suddenly Sam got notified by the worker from the courier office that his delivery was already outside of his house. Sam quickly stopped his training and then went outside of the training room to get his things from the courier worker.


    Sometimeter,


    He was now already handing over the bow to his mom and those daggers to his sister. He already has many spirit arrows and because of this, he did not tell old man Henry to make more arrows. He also gave many arrows to his mom so that she could practice with them. After receiving the gift from him, his mom and sister were very happy and both of them were busy with their practice in the training room.


    __________To be continued___________

 Chapter 239 239 - Dungeon

    Right now, both Sam and Alena were going toward the peak D-grade dungeon. Fortunately, they did not need to go outside of the central city because the Dungeon was inside the central city. While going toward the Dungeon Sam was observing his surrounding area. Actually, he wanted to know if there was any spy around him watching over his movement. Also, his teacher Alena was with him, so he wanted to know if those people from the dark situation would still dare toe. Sam doesn''t know, but Alena is also observing her surrounding area. She already gets to know from Sam that when he went to the ghost Dungeon in Venus City he got attacked by the dark association Warriors because they put a bounty on his head. Because of this, she also observed her surroundings, and she also wanted to know if those people still dare toe toward Sam even though she was with him.


    It did not take them that much time to reach the Dungeon. Before going to the Dungeon Sam went toward the guide to know the details about this dungeon. It took some time to know all the details. All this time Alena is also with him, but she already hides her face so no one can recognize her. After that, both of them enter the Dungeon.


    This dungeon also has three floors. On the first floor, you will meet early D-grade monsters and on thest floor, you will meet peak D-grade monsters and the boss. Also, one more important thing was that Sam did not tell anyone about his breakthrough, so Alena naturally thought that he was still on in the early D-grade. Because of this, she told him to kill as many monsters as he can on this floor. Actually, she wanted him to collect as much as crystal he could on this floor. Sam did not say anything and just nodded at her word.


    The monsters you will find on this first floor were ck Scorpion, Sand Golem, and Sandworm. These three types of monsters you will find in this dungeon. Also, with this, you can guess that the environment around these Dungeons was dessert. Fortunately, the original Sun wasn''t here but still, the atmosphere was very hot.


    You can say that it was Sam''s first experience in this desert Dungeon. Previously, he only went to the dungeon, where he only found the forest environment. So it will take him some time to adjust to this dungeon. He wasn''t alone because he could see many people near this area.


    "Well, many like to make their camp near the entrance because, with that, they could easily leave this ce. Not everyone could adjust themselves in this dungeon. As you can see that this wasn''t your forest where you can find any cave or any big trees to rest. Because of this, many people don''t like to stay here that much." Alena exined to him why many people were near the entrance.


    Sam nodded at her and then began to advance. Well, they didn''t even advance that much when he suddenly saw that a person not far away from them was running toward the entrance. Also, he wasn''t alone because Sam saw 5 ck scorpions chasing that guy. For a second, Sam became confused because he never saw something like this. At first, he thought that the guy was a solo Warrior but then he noticed the guy was running towards some people that were near the entrance.


    "Well, this was the strategy those people are following. All of them will stay near the entrance and one of them will be the bait. That person will bring monsters toward his group so that other Warriors could kill those monsters. But this n did not work every time because to follow this n, the warrior who became the bait needed to be quick. I am telling you because those desert worms were quick." Alena exins all of this when she notices a confused look on Sam''s face. Only then Sam understands.


    But those ck scorpions did note toward them and just chased after that guy. Because of this, Sam and Alena ignore them and continue to advance.


    _______________


    Suddenly, Sam vanishes from his ce. Not far away from his ce, you can see 5 Scorpions. Suddenly, one scorpion got split in half. As you can guess, it was Sam who killed that Scorpion. Some time ago, he noticed these scorpions and decided to attack them. Even though the body shells of these Scorpions were very tough, Sam was using his energy mode while using 30% of his spiritual energy. With that, you can guess how much sharper his sword got. Because of this, he could easily cut that Scorpion in half. Sam did not waste time and also attacked the other 4 Scorpions.


    Not far away from his ce, Alena was watching all of this. Even though she knows Sam has a special concealment technique, even she could not detect him. But still, it was very surprising for her to see how easily Sam was killing those Scorpions. Also, one more thing was that even though she could not detect him when Sam uses the concealment technique, she could detect the energy fluctuation when he uses his technique, like energy mode.


    Right now, because Sam was using the energy mode, Alena was able to detect him with that. It took him only a few minutes to kill all those Scorpions and, right now, he was collecting all the loot. But he did not get anything good because he only got some normal loot from this. Well, it seems he was out of luck.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam did not get disappointed and once again, with his teacher beside him, began to advance. Both of them once again begin to search for the monster in this desert.


    Sometimeter,


    Suddenly, Alena told Sam to stop moving. After that, she pointed her finger in a direction and told some that there were many sandworms in that ce. Only then Sam looked at that ce carefully. But still, he could see nothing. Well, this was natural because those sandworms hide themselves in this and very easily and it was very hard for anyone to detect them if they did not observe their surroundings all the time. Sam also all the time, but he is still unable to detect them.


    Suddenly, Alena threw something in that ce, and instantly Sam noticed many movements around that area. Previously, she threw a piece of meat in that area, and instantly those sandworms began to go toward that piece of meat. With that, you can guess that those sandworms like to eat meat. They were one of the most dangerous monsters you will find in the desert area. They could travel in the desert very fast and they could also hide themselves easily and because of this, they became one of the most dangerous monsters in the desert.


    At this time, Sam did not say anything and once again vanished from his ce. He uses the concealment technique to hide himself and then uses his full speed to reach those monsters. He did not want those monsters to leave this area and because of this; he used the telekinesis power. That will prevent their escape. Sam also wasn''t slow; he began to kill those monsters very quickly. At least 20 sandworms were in that ce but some already killed 18 of them. While he was about to kill the remaining, suddenly, he felt a movement in the sand. He quickly jumped away from that ce. Instantly 5 sand worms came out of the sand. Even though they cannot see Sam, they could still feel the moment when Sam walks in the sand. But some did not give them the chance to once again use his power to stop those 5 sand worms. These monsters were very fast. Fortunately, he has this type of technique that could prevent this monster from moving.


    Also, the weakness of this monster was that it did not have powerful defenses. Because of this, Sam could easily kill them even without using the energy mode. Wasting no time, Sam began to kill those monsters. After collecting all the loot, he came beside Alena. Both of them once again begin to advance. Most probably, they will need one day to reach the next floor''s entrance.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, both of them were inside a tent and they were eating their food. Sam will rest for some time and after that, you will once again begin to hunt those monsters while going toward the entrance of the next floor. It has been a very long time since he did not go toward the second floor of any dungeon.


    ________________


    While Sam was resting, and Alena was meditating, he suddenly heard a noise from outside. He quickly looked outside of his tent and saw that not far away from his ce, a golem was fighting some people.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 240 240 - Inside Of The Dungeon.

    Currently, Sam was fighting 5 sand golems while only using his spirit technique. Well, some time ago, Alena told him to fight those golems only using his sword technique and spirit technique. Actually, she thought that Sam most of the time relied on his concealment technique, and because of this, she asked him to do this without using the concealment technique. Well, Sam did not have any problem with that. But one thing was that the defense of those sand golems was much greater than those of the ck scorpions. If this was before, then it would be a problem for him, but right now he has already broken through, and as you can guess, his power and his spiritual energy also increase.


    Sam quickly jumped away from his ce. Because of this, he was able to dodge the rocks that were created by the sand golems. This was their special attack. They could create rocks using the sand. A golem was already behind him and about to punch him, but Sam already sensed that. He quickly crouches down and dodges the punch. Not only that, but instantly he also swung his sword toward the golem that was behind him.


    Even though the golem tries to protect himself, this attack quickly damages him. The golem already lost his left hand. Right now, because of the damage, Sam already saw the big crystal that was inside of the golem. If Sam wanted to kill the golem, then he needed to destroy that crystal. If he did not destroy that crystal, then the golem will alwayse back to his perfect shape. Right now you can see that the golem very quickly started to recover, but Sam did not want to give that golem any chance and because of this, he once again attacked that golem.


    "Boom!!" This time, the golem wasn''t able to protect himself and the crystal got destroyed by Sam''s attack. But he did not rx and instantly jumped away from that ce because one more golem was still alive and that golem was throwing rocks toward him. Fortunately, Sam has good reaction speed and because of this, he is able to dodge that attack. Well, you should not underestimate those golems.


    Sam also did not waste any more time. Using his full speed, he was going toward that golem. At this time, the golem was continuously attacking Sam. But Sam was dodging those attacks while going toward that golem. In just a few seconds, he was already in front of that golem and, wasting no time, he quickly attacked that golem.


    ______________


    "Nice battle, but previously you underestimated those golems. Because of this, you needed this much time to finish those golems." At this time, Alena told Sam this. Sam already finished thest golem and, after collecting the loot, he came in front of Alena. After hearing her word, Sam only nodded. He actually underestimated those golems. These golems weren''t like the golems that he fought previously. Previously, those golems did not have this type of crystal and because of this, Sam needed this much time to finish those golems.


    "You should rest some time then we will enter the next floor," well both of them were already in front of the entrance of the next floor, but before going to the next floor, Alena wanted Sam to recover his full energy. Sam did not say anything and just sat down in that ce and began to meditate. Well, he already activated the energy recovery technique and because of this, he was recovering very quickly. It won''t take that much time to recover his energy. Well, if he uses the potions, then he could recover much quicker than this, but Alena also told him not to rely on potions that much. What would he do if right now he was in front of a boss monster and he was out of potions? Because of this, Alena told him not to use those potions until the situation was very serious.


    _____________


    10 minutester,


    Sam and Alena already reached the second floor. Just aftering to this floor, he felt the difference between the first floor and the second floor. Well, on the first floor you only have normal heat even though the environment was a desert environment. But on the second floor, it waspletely different. Right now the temperature was at least 45 degree Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius.


    Well, it will take him some time to adjust to this hot weather, but he doesn''t worry about that. Both of them started to advance to search for the monster on this floor. Well, like the previous floor on this floor, they also saw many Warriors near the entrance. Most likely, those Warriors are also following the same n as the warrior on the first floor.<novelnext></novelnext>


    It did not take Sam that much time to find some monster in this ce. Right now he already noticed 10 sandworms. Those monsters were right now hiding themselves inside of the sand and waiting for their prey toe toward them. Fortunately, Alena watches with him and because of this, he is quickly able to notice them. Well, it wasn''t that he won''t be able to notice them, but because those monsters were out of his range, he was unable to notice them quickly.


    This time Alena did not say anything to him and because of this, Sam decided to use his fire control at this time. He quickly created a mega fireball. Right now, you can see a blue fireball that was floating in his hand. Wasting no time, he threw that firewall toward those sandworms. After that, he ran away from that ce. Alena also came from that ce because she also knows the destruction that we created by that spell. Well, it wasn''t that she was afraid of that, but this could dirty her clothes and because of this, she decided toe far away from the ce.


    Those sandworms weren''t able to notice the blue fireball that wasing toward them. Just after the fireball touched the ground, this instantly created destruction appeared in that ce. The total area was destroyed by that. Because of the dust right now, Sam wasn''t able to see anything. It took some time, only then he could see. Well, he saw that only 5 sandworms got killed by that, and 5 sandworms were still alive. But they were still very injured.


    But right now Sam was shocked by one thing, even though he uses the mega fireBall that did not kill all those monsters. You can say that it was the first time that he saw something like this. His mega fireball was one of his powerful spells. So he thought that when he used the mega fireball, then he could kill all those sandworms, but only now how wrong he was. But he quickly came out of his daze and quickly went to those remaining sandworms. He did not want to give them any chance and quickly killed them. After collecting the loot, he came toward his teacher and sat down on the ground. In the previous attack, you could say that he almost uses 60% of his spiritual energy and because of this, he also thought that he could kill all those monsters using this mega fireball.


    Alena, after seeing his expression, said to him,


    "Did you be surprised that your attack did not kill all of them at the same time? Well, it was very natural because even though your spell was very powerful, that doesn''t mean that you could kill all the monsters in intermediate D-grade. But still, it was quite surprising that you were able to kill 5 monsters. Normally I thought that you would only be able to kill three monsters maximum. It looks like I also underestimate you," Alena said to him.


    Sam nodded and then thought about his previous fight. Well, after bing an intermediate D-grade warrior, he still did not absorb any intermediate crystal and, because of this, you can say that his spiritual energy is only above that of an early D-grade warrior. Like his teacher Alena told him, if he was only in the early D-grade then he would be only able to kill a maximum of 3 monsters but because he just recently breakthrough he was able to kill 5 monsters.


    ____________


    "Be careful. Compared to those early D-grade sand golems, these intermediate D-grade golems were most powerful and also very fast. I don''t think you could feel it but those golems were very close to breaking through to the next grade, so you must be careful while fighting them. Also, their defense was very highpared to those early D-grade golems." Alena exins all of this to him. Sam just nodded after hearing that and then vanished from his ce. He did not want to take any chances and, because of this, he quickly used his concealment technique and then started going toward those golems. He already bring out his yer and also activated the energy mode. He will attack those golems with his full power.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 241 241 - Bad Guy

    2 dayster,


    Currently, Sam was fighting 13 sand golems. Well, as you can guess, this was a very tough fight for him. Fortunately, Alena was with him. She already saved him two times when he was in danger. Well, the defense of these golems increased because of this he was having problems killing them.


    Sam didn''t want to risk and because of this, he was using the concealment technique. Also, Alena, this time, didn''t tell him to kill those monsters without using the concealment technique. Because she also knows the difference between an early D-grade and an intermediate D-grade monster. It wasn''t that Sam won''t be able to kill them, but he won''t be able to kill all of them. Because of this, she didn''t say anything this time.


    Sam was currently behind a golem. All golems were now standing in a ce while doing nothing. Most likely, they were trying to sense humans. Sam uses this chance to attack them. He already came behind a monster and swung his yer toward the golem. As you can guess, he was using the energy mode. Not only that, he was using 30% of his spiritual energy. With that, you can guess how powerful the sh was. This instantly breaks the defense of that golem. Even though the golem has a very strong defense, Sam is able to destroy that golem''s defense and then quickly destroy the purple crystals that were inside of that golem.


    ________


    ''Few. These were the most powerful monsters that I have ever fought. I never thought that the intermediate D-grade monsters had this much power.'' At this time, Sam was resting on the ground while Alena watched over their surrounding area. Right now, if any person decides to approach their area with a malic expression, then they will immediately get killed. At this time, Sam was recovering his energy.


    "Teacher, how long will it take us to reach the entrance of the next floor?" Sam asked Alena.


    "We are very near the entrance, so don''t worry about that. Actually, we still didn''t go toward the next floor because I want you to adjust yourself while fighting these intermediate D-grade monsters. I know that most of the time you fight with your robots while setting the power limit to intermediate D-grade or peak D-grade. Butpared to fighting these real monsters, those robots were nothing. It waspletely different. Because of this, I want you to have experience while fighting them. Probably we will wait here for two more days and then leave this floor." Alena exined to him why they were still on this floor. After hearing the exnation, Sam nodded because he also knew that she was correct. It is actually very different when he fights those intermediate D-grade monsters.


    Sometimeter, Sam once again gets up from the ground and both of them once again start searching for monsters. Well, they didn''t need to find that much because 10 minutester they already ground ck scorpions that wereing in their direction. Actually, those monsters weren''ting for them, but they were chasing a guy. Well, most likely that guy was bait that brought those scorpions toward his team. But unfortunately, right now, that guy was bringing those monsters toward Sam and Alena.


    If this was before then Sam and Alena could ignore this, or if that warrior didn''t see them, then both of them still could ignore this, but, unfortunately even after noticing Sam and Alena, that warrior still decided toe toward their direction. For a minute, Sam thought, what if that warrior lost his other teammates and after seeing theming in their direction?


    "No, his teammates didn''t die, nor did he help." Suddenly, Alena said that to him. Sam was surprised after hearing that. It looks like teacher Alena could guess what he was thinking just by looking at his face.


    "How did you know, teacher?" Sam asked this question.


    "I already observed all this area very carefully when you were recovering your Energy. That time I didn''t feel any fight near this area. With that, you can easily guess that." Alena said that to him. Well, Sam knows that as a spiritual warrior, Alena''s observation range was very high, even though he doesn''t know. So with that, she could easily tell that. So he did not ask any more questions and silently looked toward that warrior who was bringing those scorpions in their direction.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Don''t worry about him, teacher. I will handle that guy and those Scorpions." After saying that, Sam quickly vanishes from his ce. Sam is also already bringing out his bow and arrow. Right now, he was already ready to shoot that warrior and those scorpions. Even though like those golems, these scorpions'' defense also increased but still it wasn''t as strong as those golems. Because of this, he could still kill them using his spirit arrows. Right now, he was only focusing on that warrior and those scorpions.


    Alena Did not react when she saw Sam disappear from his ce. Because instantly she could feel the energy fluctuation beside her and with that she already knew that Sam had decided on her and also he was already ready to shoot towards that Warrior and the Scorpions. Right now, both of them are looking toward that guy and those Scorpions.


    That warrior who was bringing those Scorpions toward Sam and Alena quickly got shocked because suddenly, he saw that one of them had disappeared from his ce. Actually, he was bringing these Scorpions toward his group. But then he suddenly noticed Sam and Alena and instantly a n appeared in his mind. Why won''t he bring those Scorpions toward them? After that, using his stealth technique, he could escape from that ce while the scorpion will attack those two warriors. After that, he could bring his team toward this ce and hunt those scorpions who will be busy hunting these two people. You can say that it was a good n and most likely it would also work if he didn''t bring those scorpions toward Sam and Alena.


    ''Where did the other warriors go? Did he run away using some kind of escape technique? Well, what a coward. He did not even bring his partner with him while escaping from there. Well, but who cares about that? It was actually a good thing for me,'' he was thinking when he suddenly saw Sam vanish from his ce. Right now, he could only see Alena, and he thought that she was very afraid that she had lost the ability to move. Because of this, he started to grin while going toward her.


    Sam and Alena already noticed his grin. With that, both of them confirmed that the person had bad intentions and because of this, he decided to bring those scorpions in their direction.


    ''Most probably the spirit Arrow Will instantly kill him so I should use the normal arrow.'' Sam thought that and he also brought out two normal arrows. Well, he doesn''t want to kill that warrior instantly.


    When those Scorpions and that Warrior already reach very close to them, Sam instantly shoots using his multi shot technique and rapid shot technique. That warrior who was still grinning and those scorpions instantly got attacked by the arrows. None of them were able to react and were hit by the arrows.


    That warrior who was grinning sometime ago instantly fell down on the ground. For a second, he did not even realize what happened, but after that, he carefully looked toward his legs. Only then did he notice that both of his legs were pierced by two arrows and blood alsoing out from that ce. Instantly, he began to feel the pain.


    Sam and Alena just ignore him and then only focus on those scorpions. Sam was still using his rapid shot technique and continuously shooting his arrows toward those scorpions. Even if his first and second arrows weren''t avable to pierce through that scorpion''s body defense but with the third arrow, he was able to do that. Because of this, Sam just continuously shoots Arrows toward those monsters. In every arrow he almost used his 10% of spiritual energy and because of this he was almost out of spiritual energy. But fortunately at the same time he was also using the energy recovery technique that recovered his spiritual energy quite quickly and because of this he was able to shoot many arrows toward those monsters.


    5 minutester, right now Sam was panting heavily. Previously, he was using three techniques ( Energy mode, Rapid shot, and energy recovery) at the same time and because of this right now he was mentally very tired. But still he gets up from his ce and collects all the loot. Only then Alena told him to rest. She can also see that Sam was very tired.


    Sam just nodded and instantlyy down on the ground. Right now he was suffering from a headache. You know that every time he got mentally tired he felt this headache, and he needed to rest to recover from this headache.


    ____________To be continued.______________

 Chapter 242 242 - Peak D-Grade

    Alena was looking at the warrior that was on the ground. She has already healed his leg so that he won''t die because of blood loss. She had already informed the warrior association to send warriors here to arrest the warrior. Sam, at this, had already recovered his spiritual energy, and he was now looking around the ce. Well, he was looking out for those monsters. Until those warriors didn''te, they needed to look after that warrior, also if it was possible, they could also try to catch the other teammates of this warrior.


    Well, they needed to wear that much. Because, sometimeter, 3 warriors appeared in their location. Most likely, they use one-way teleportation. They salute Alena and then take that warrior away. Sam and Alena, after that, once again began to advance.


    ___________


    2 dayster,


    Finally, Sam and Alena were now near the entrance to the next floor. Well, it was time to go to the next floor. In these two days, Sam hunts those monsters as much as he can. Well, he wanted to stay on the 2nd floor more, but then he coulde to thister. So, right now, they were going toward the next floor.


    "Be careful. These peak D-grade monsters were more intelligentpared to these other monsters. Like those intermediate monsters, you will also see the difference while fighting these peak D-grade monsters. Also, the sandworm will be much bigger than those other sandworms. Not only those sandworms, but those ck Scorpions and those golems will also be bigger on this floor." Alena exins this to Sam.


    Sam nodded after hearing the exnation. Sometimeter, they finally came to the 3rd floor or thest floor. Compared to those other floors, Sam didn''t see that many warriors near the entrance of this floor. Even those warriors who were near the entrance weren''t as cowardly as those other warriors. Most likely some warriors were returning, or they had also juste to this floor.


    "Boom!!!" Suddenly an explosion appeared because of Sam''s mega fireball. Right now, he is facing 5 ck Scorpions. He already uses the concealment technique and then attacks those Scorpions. He knows that he won''t be able to kill them with this one attack. Because of this, he began to prepare a great fireball this time. He didn''t want to use all of his spiritual energy and because of this, he didn''t use the mega fireball. But still, he now only has 15% spiritual energy left. He needs this much spiritual energy to maintain his concealment technique.


    Right now, because of the dust, he is unable to see anything and because of this; he began to wait for the dust to clear. One after another, because of this big explosion, you cannot see anything because of theyer of dust. Well, Sam already activated the energy recovery technique. Sometimeter, the dust begins to clear and Sam is able to see. He saw that he was able to kill only 3 Scorpions, even after using his two powerful techniques. He thought that even though he wasn''t able to kill the other two Scorpions, he should be able to injure them seriously. But when the dustpletely faded away, only then he noticed that the other two remaining Scorpions weren''t that seriously injured. That surprised him very much. Fortunately, he has already recovered his 35% spiritual energy. So, wasting no time, he quickly activated his energy mode and then ran toward them. Fortunately, he was in stealth mode. So, those monsters still weren''t able to sense him. But it looked like they seemed to feel the danger.


    After reaching very close to them, he already attacked those remaining Scorpions. Well, he did not hold back and used his full energy. Fortunately, with that able to injure one of the scorpions seriously, but still, that scorpion wasn''t dead. Sam quickly came far away from that ce because he could feel that he was low on the spiritual energy and if he still decided to use the energy mode, then he wouldn''t have the spiritual energy to continue his energy mode. Because of this, he retreated from that ce.


    This time, he quickly brought the spiritual energy recovery potion and gulped it down. While he was recovering from the spiritual energy, he was only focused on those scorpions. One of the scorpions was seriously injured while the other one wasn''t that much injured. He won''t fight those two until he doesn''t recover his full energy. Because of this, he was now only focusing on those two Scorpions.


    __________


    While Sam was focusing on those two Scorpions, Alena was flying in the air, looking in his direction. You guessed it right, even though she hadn''t mastered the wind control technique like her light control, but still, it was enough for her to fly in the sky. So, right now, using that wind control, she was flying in the air while looking in Sam''s direction. She already saw how Sam shoots two of his most powerful spells, but with that, he is only able to kill 3 Scorpions while these two scorpions are able to save themselves. They also weren''t that injured because previously, after sensing the danger, they quickly retreated from their ce.<novelnext></novelnext>


    She wasn''t able to see the surprise expression of Sam, but still, she guessed that right now Sam should be so surprised by the result. After that, she saw that suddenly one Scorpion got attacked out of nowhere and this made that Scorpion seriously injured. The 2nd Scorpion was already all around his surroundings because he also thought that he would also attack that unknown attacker. But then, even after waiting for something, he didn''t receive any attack. With that, Alena guessed that Sam was very low on his spiritual energy and right now he was recovering his spiritual energy far away from that ce. Well, she knows her student''s behavior. Also,pared to Gloria, Sam was more cautious.


    Sometimeter, she suddenly felt an energy fluctuation, some far away from those two Scorpions, who were still busy searching for the enemy. She also felt that energy was familiar and with that, she already guessed that it was Sam. Most likely, Sam once again preparing his attack for those two Scorpions, and also, judging from the energy, he should use more energypared to before


    _____________


    Well, you can say that her guess was correct. Sometimeter, after recovering his full energy, Sam was already ready to attack those two Scorpions that were still searching for him. Previously, he used 50% spiritual energy while casting the mega fireball, but this time he was using 80% spiritual energy. With that, you can guess how powerful this attack was. More and more spiritual energy ising toward his ce. Most likely because of this, those two Scorpions also noticed that energy fluctuation was in ce. With that, they already guessed that something or someone was there and, because of this, those two Scorpions quickly began toe in this direction.


    After seeing that, Sam didn''t panic. He just calmly looked toward those two monsters. A few secondster, his spell was already ready. Wasting no time, he quickly shot that fireball toward those Scorpions.


    "Boom!" Instantly, once again, an explosion appeared, and this was much bigger than the previous explosion. Once again, ayer of dust appears and, because of this, Sam is unable to see anything. He is already using his energy recovery technique to recover his spiritual energy at this time. It took some time for thatyer of dust to be clear. But the good thing was that the Scorpions died.


    "Sigh," Sam finally signed in relief and after that, he went toward the ce where the explosion appeared. Aftering toward that ce, he finally saw how much damage he did when he used 80% spiritual energy to create the mega fireball. The whole 1 km was destroyed by this and now you can see arge hole in that area. Fortunately, Sam was able to find the loot and after collecting the loot, he began to look for his teacher Alena.


    _________


    After seeing that Sam is able to kill the remaining two Scorpions, Alena also sighs in relief. Well, she has the full trust that until Sam doesn''t meet a big group of monsters or the boss monsters, Sam will be able to win. But still, thatst attack really surprised her. She didn''t think that this would be this powerful. But then she quickly calmed down. Well, she shouldn''t underestimate Sam, because she knows Sam still has some secret that he didn''t tell anyone. Well, she thinks that previously Sam never revealed his full power, even when he was fighting with her.


    Well, Sam wasn''t aware that Alena thought of him as a mysterious student, who was hiding many secrets like his own strength. If he gets to know that, then he will be surprised by the powerful woman''s instincts.


    _________To be continued__________

 Chapter 243 243 - Bad Luck

    Currently, Sam was facing a big sand golem. Using his energy mode, he was trying to cut down that sand golem, but the defense of that golem was very high and because of this, he was unable to reach the crystal of that golem. The golem quickly recovers and once again attacks Sam. Sam quickly jumps from that ce. Fortunately, right now, he was facing only one golem. Right now, he wasn''t using a huge amount of spiritual energy because he wasn''t sure when more monsters would attack him, and because of this; he did not want to risk that. Also, because he already uses the concealment technique, you can say at least 9 hours right now, he wasn''t using that technique. Even though that technique did not pressure him, there was still a limit for his body to use that technique.


    Wasting no time, he once again quickly went to that golem. That golem also already punched him but some also weren''t slow and instantly Crouch down. After dodging the attack, Sam instantly swung his sword upward. That instantly cut down the chest area of that golem and, with that, he also saw the crystal. He did not want this chance to miss and because of this, he quickly reacted and punched that crystal. Well, he was already wearing the gloves. So, as you know, that punch was also felt with spiritual energy that instantly breaks that crystal.


    That golem slowly began to fade away, and sometimeter, Sam collected the loot. After that, he sighs in relief. Fortunately, he previously absorbed some intermediate-grade crystals, and that increased his power and because of this, he was also able to fight that golem. While absorbing the crystal, he was very careful, so Alena did not realize that he was absorbing the intermediate-grade crystal. Compared to those other monsters, fighting the sand golem was very tough. They could recover quickly and they also reacted quickly. Until you do not break the crystal, you won''t be able to kill them and because of this, these golems are very dangerous. It wasn''t that the ck Scorpion or the sand warm was less dangerous butpared to them, Sam wanted to avoid this sand golem.


    After that, Sam once again begins to advance and search for the monsters. Right now, Alena was floating in the air and watching over him. Sam already knew that and because of this, he did not search for her.


    _____________


    Because of the heat right now, Sam was resting for some time while drinking water. But suddenly he felt a vibration in the ground. For a moment he was unable to tell what was that but then he gave that move, likely some people were fighting some monster nearby and because of this, he felt that vibration in the ground. That vibration should be created by the attack of those Warriors. But he wasn''t interested in other''s fights and because of this, he decided to ignore that and once again begin to advance.


    You can say that Sam wanted to avoid the trouble but trouble seems to follow Sam. Because the direction he was advancing was the direction where those Warriors were fighting five sand golems. After noticing them, Sam quickly stops his movement and looks at them. Most likely those Warriors were very powerful because they were able to fight those 5 golems. That made him very curious, and he decided to watch their fights. Like those five golems, he can also see 5 Warriors. All those Warriors were fighting those 5 golems separately. Most likely all those Warriors were peak D-grade warriors and because of this, they were able to fight those golems.


    After looking over the fight for some time, Sam knows that even though those Warriors were powerful, they were still unable to kill those that easily. Right now, all those Warriors were searching for the chance to destroy the crystal. 2 Warriors suddenly seed in destroying the crystals of the Golems that they were facing. Those two Warriors did not rest and suddenly went toward their other teammates to help them. Well, right now this will be an easy fight and because of this, Sam decided to ignore that and once again begin to advance in another direction.


    But most likely, Sam''s luck wasn''t that good today. He didn''t even advance that much, but suddenly he felt many vibrations in the ground and he instantly turned his head toward those Warriors. Instantly he saw that 20 more golems appeared out of nowhere. After seeing that, those warriors stop fighting and begin to retreat from that ce. After seeing this many Golems, they already know that they won''t be able to kill all those Golems and because of this, they decided to retreat. But coincidentally, those Warriors were running in Sam''s direction and after seeing that, Sam just caused his bad luck. He also did not waste any more time and quickly increased his speed to get away from that ce. Right now he was having trouble facing only one Golem, so how could he dare to fight this many Golems at the same time? Fortunately, because of his increased ability, he was able to get away from that ce.


    ''sigh,'' he sighs, and after rxing himself, he once again begins to advance, but this time he was more cautious. If this time you will feel that kind of vibration, you will quickly avoid that ce.


    __________


    Currently, Sam doesn''t know where he is. He decided to rest for some time. Sometimeter, when he was eating his food, he suddenly felt a vibration in the ground. Wasting no time, he quickly got up from the ground. He thought that once again some warrior was most likely fighting some monster and because of this; he wanted to get from that ce. But this time he was wrong because in just a few seconds you already noticed that this vibration wasing from the fight, but this vibration wasing from the ground where he was standing. It didn''t even take him that much time to guess what it was.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Wasting no time Sam quickly got away from that ce and instantly many sandworms came out from the ground in his previous ce. Well, these sandworms have the ability to travel through the sand.


    Right now, Sam could see 10 sandworms. Fortunately, this monster has the weakest defense and because of this, he decided to fight those 10 sandworms. Wasting no time, he quickly brought out his bow and arrows and then began to shoot arrows. Well, he was very fast and because of this, those monsters were unable to react in time. Also, Sam was using the spirit arrow and because of this he was already able to kill 7 sandworms but those remaining 3 sandworms already went inside the ground.


    Sam once again jumped away from his ce, because he knows that those remaining 3 monsters wille toward him. After learning on the ground, he also quickly brings out a spiritual energy recovery potion. He was very low on spiritual energy and because of this; he decided to drink this potion. Well, as you can say that his guess was right because 10 secondster already those 3 monsters came out from the ground in that previous ce. After that, those monsters realized the human that was attacking them wasn''t there, and he was right now in a different ce. So they once again used their technique and went inside of the ground and started going towards Sam.


    Because Sam did not recover spiritual energy, he did not attack those monsters previously, but he didn''t know that they wereing toward him, and because of this, he again jumped away from that ce. After that, he already focused on the location where he was standing previously and was ready to shoot. This time he already recovered 30% spiritual energy, and this was enough to kill those monsters.


    ____________


    30 secondster,


    Sam was collecting the loot while Alena came down from the sky.


    "You should rest for some time. I can see that you are exhausted. Also, tomorrow we will leave this dungeon because I think you have enough experience while fighting these monsters. I don''t think after that you will be having problems breaking through because I can see that you are very close to breaking through to the next grade." She told him that. Sam just nodded after hearing all of this.


    At this time, Sam decided to rest. While resting, he was thinking about something. Even if they left these Dungeons tomorrow, he still had some time before that annual collegepetition and he wanted to use that time to collect as many intermediate crystals as he could from the Dungeon. Well, he was familiar with the monster in this dungeon, and because of this; he decided that he wille back to this dungeon a few dayster. He also decided that before the annual collegepetition, he will reveal his breakthrough to Alena.


    __________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 244 244 - Boss

    Right now, Sam was going toward the Boss monster. Today was thest day he will hunt in this dungeon before going out of this dungeon. To find the Boss monster, he needed to go to the center of this floor. While going toward the center, he also saw many Warriors and warriors also going there. Most likely, they could be one big team or some other team. Just looking at those Warriors, you can tell that right now all those warriors were only interested in hunting the Boss monster.


    Sam did not say anything or ask anything from anyone and, just silently, he also went toward the center area of this floor. While he was observing his surroundings, he only found some familiar faces that he saw earlier in this dungeon. He also saw those 5 Warriors that previously met those sand Golems on this floor. Well, not only that, he also found some students that were also from the Royal Academy, like him. Well, only Sam noticed them, but those warriors did not notice Sam, or even if they noticed Sam, they wouldn''t be able to recognize him because he was very far away from those people.


    ____________


    "Hey, do you know anything about the Boss monster?"


    "To tell you the truth, this was my third time facing this boss monster."


    " What!!! Are you serious? Then did you kill the boss monster previously?"


    " Sigh, that was the saddest thing about this that I and my teammate never killed that boss monster. That was once there was a ck golem. This golem has an insane defense that you won''t be able to break easily and also this Golem can control the surrounding sand. So without you can give how dangerous this boss monster was. The first time we were able to get away from that ball monster just after we noticed his power, but the second time we weren''t that lucky. You can say that it was fortunate that many other warriors were also there or we will be killed by that monster."


    Currently, Sam was listening to all of this conversation between those Warriors. Well, not everyone was giving him this much information. So that boss monster was a golem that was different from this Sand Golem. That boss was also ck and they could also control the sand. With that, Sam decided that he won''t be going very close to that golem. Even though he could hide from that monster, what if that monster, after not finding the attacker, decided to attack in every direction using his sand? Then naturally Sam will get affected by that. He still doesn''t know how to fly and because of that, he will naturally get affected by that.


    At this time, Alena was flying in the air. None of those Warriors noticed her. She can see that this many Warriors most likely wanted to kill the Boss monster today, but she knows that it was very hard. That wasn''t the normal boss monster that you could kill easily. Compared to the other monsters on this floor. The Boss monster has an insane defense. Not only that, the Boss monster could control the sand around him and the range was 1 km. So the safest way to fight the Boss monster was to attack that monster from far away. So that the Boss monster is unable to control the sand around that warrior. She wasn''t worried about Sam, because she knew that he wasn''t a reckless fool who would recklessly go close to that monster. Because of this, she did not worry about him.


    She saw that same already get to know about the Boss monster from those people around him. Right now, Many Warriors were discussing that boss monster. Sam, at this time, just listened to all of those conversations between those Warriors, and with that, he already had a general idea about the Boss monster. But one thing was that he was not able to know the exact range of that monster from those Warriors. Some people say that the range of the Boss monster was 1 km, while some people say that it was 2 km. Because of this, he is unable to know the exact range of that boss monster. But still, Sam decided that he will maintain a 3 km distance between himself and that monster.


    __________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    2 hourster,


    Right now, every warrior that wanted to kill the Boss monster was now looking at the big giant, or you can say the Boss monster. Between them, that monster has a distance of 2 km. But still, with that, everyone could easily see the huge body of the Boss monster. Some people already decided that day to attack from this ce, while some decided to advance. Well, those people who advance know the exact range of that boss monster and, because of this, they decided to advance.


    Compared to those Warriors, Sam maintains the three km distance between himself and that Boss monster. You already saw that many people decided that they will attack that boss monster from two km away while some people still decided to advance. Everyone was going very slowly so that they wouldn''t get noticed by that Boss monster but it seems their luck wasn''t that good because the Boss monster if you secondter already noticed all these Warriors. After that, the eyes of the Boss monster instantly became very red and instantly every warrior heard a loud roar from that Boss monster.


    "Be careful guys, the Boss monster already noticed us. Don''t get very close to that boss monster. As you can guess, they could easily control the ground and the range was 1 km. So maintain the distance between you and that monster. Spiritual Warriors and archers are ready to attack that monster," suddenly a person says to all those Warriors. Most likely, he was the leader of the Warriors. You can say that right now Sam can see 30 Warriors were present in this ce except him.


    After hearing that person, the spiritual Warriors team and the Archers had already attacked the Boss monster the moment they heard the word from their leader. Instantly, many attacks hit that golem. That instantly blocked the view of the golem because all those attacks went toward his head and those Warriors who are very close to that golem used this chance toe more close to the golem and attacked him. Those Warriors are able to destroy one leg of that golem and instantly that golem falls down in the sand.


    Those Warriors did not get the chance to celebrate because the next second they could feel the sand beneath their feet start to move. Instantly, the leader of the Warriors told them to jump away from that ce. Those Warriors did not say anything, and they also jumped away from that ce. At this time, those spiritual Warriors and archers once again attacked that golem, who had already recovered his leg in just a few seconds. With that, you can imagine how fast that golem could recover.


    This time, those attacks hit the chest area of that Golem. But this time, that golem did not fall down once again. He was able to stabilize himself and quickly get up from the ground. After that, the golem looks toward all those Warriors and once again roars very loudly. After that, he quickly created some sand spears and then shot toward those Warriors. Fortunately, those warriors were already ready, and instantly, those spiritual warriors cast the surrounding shield. You can say that in this fight, those physical Warriors, who were only using swords and other weapons except a bow, were at a disadvantage. Because they did not go very close to that column or they will get affected by the sand. Well, still, if your speed was very fast, then you could easily get away from that ce even after attacking that Golem.


    So those spiritual Warriors were preparing their attacks while some of those physical warriors who were good at movement techniques decided to attack the golem. They did not waste any more time and, using their full speed, they went toward the golem and attacked him once again. The golem already noticed them and he already attacked them with his leg. But those Warriors dodge that attack and then attack his leg once again.


    At this time, suddenly, those spiritual Warriors attack that golem once again. This gives those physical Warriors once again one more chance, and with that, they quickly attack the chest area of that golem that just fell down on the ground. But still, with their attack, they are unable to see the crystal on that golem and they quickly get away from that ce, because they could easily see that the golem begins to recover very quickly and he will attack them once again. Wasting no time, those Warriors already maintain the distance between themselves and the golem. Also like they expected if you secondter, all the sand in the ground suddenly makes many sand spears. Just imagine if those warriors were slow to get away from that area even just a second, then from the ground, a spear would appear instantly and they would get hit by that. Fortunately, those warriors are fast and already get away from the range of that golem.


    ______________To be continued____________

 Chapter 245 245 - Killing That Boss

    Suddenly, the sand beneath those Warriors begins to move. Only at this time did those warriors notice that the golem already came very close to them. All of them are already in the range of that golem and, because of this, the golem could control the sand beneath their feet. After realizing that all those Warriors instantly begin to retreat at their full speed. But at this time, some warriors already got captured by that sand. Those Warriors are unable to move right now.


    Fortunately, those spiritual Warriors weren''t in the range of that golem, and because of this, when all of them notice that some of the physical Warriors already get captured by that sand, they quickly attack that golem. All those attacks quickly hit that golem, but this time, that golem was already ready. Before those attacks could hit him, he already created a wall using the sand. That attack only hit the wall but was unable to touch the golem. Because of this, those Warriors were unable to get free from that sand prison.


    Sam was watching all of this from his ce. At first he thought these Warriors could kill that boss monster, but right now, when he saw that those seven Warriors got captured by that sand, this instantly alerted him. Because previously he also did not realize when Golem came close to those Warriors. He instantly shoots his me arrow toward that golem.


    Well, there is also a possibility that the golem, after noticing his arrow, created a wall in front of him like previously. Because of this, Sam uses one of his techniques that he rarely uses. You guessed it right. He uses that invisibility Arrow technique and with that for 1 minute he could turn his normal Arrow invisible. But for his spirit arrows, or you can say that mainly if it was his film arrow, then he could only maintain that invisibility for 20 seconds. Right now, fortunately, that golem was close to him. You can say that the distance between him and that golem was 1.9 km. Because of this, it was possible to maintain that invisibility until that arrow did not hit that golem.


    Those Warriors who got captured by that sand and also those warriors who were able to escape from that sand when now in despair. They could already see that their teammate who got captured by that sand is most likely going to die. They are unable to get close to them because that golem controls the sand, while also those spiritual warriors are unable to hit that golem because that golem instantly creates a wall to prevent them from attacking to reach him.


    This was a very dangerous thing because the sand was covering those Warriors slowly. Those other Warriors were already trying their base to attack that golem, but that golem was also in very alert mode. Because of this, it was very tough to attack that golem. Nobody noticed that, but that golem was also advancing slowly. But suddenly, out of nowhere, something hit that golem, and also an explosion appeared in his chest area. Finally, that golem once again got hit by an attack and this instantly freed those Warriors who were about to be fully covered by the sand.


    But one thing was that those warriors, after getting far from that sand, were unable to move because previously that sand was continuously absorbing their spiritual energy. Right now, they are almost low on spiritual energy. Not only that, but previously those Warriors were struggling to get free from that sand. After seeing their condition, those other Warriors quickly came toward them and after that they picked them up and got away from that ce.


    Sometimeter, all those warriors saw that the chest of the golem got destroyed by that explosion and they could also see fire around that area. That wasn''t your normal fire because they could see that it was a blue me. This blue film was preventing that golem from recovering quickly. At this time, all those Warriors also saw the crystal in his chest area and with that they decided to attack. They don''t know who has them but they did not want to meet this chance and because of this, those spiritual warriors, without wasting any more time, quickly attacked their spells toward that golem.


    At this time, that golem also already noticed that those Warriors were already sending their attack toward him. He instantly created a big wall in front of him. But some spiritual Warriors already expected that and because of this, they already came to the other side from where they could see Golem. From that area, they once again attack that golem.


    Well, in those warriors they have only 15 spiritual Warriors. 8 spiritual Warriors were attacking that golem from the front while 7 warriors already came to the other side and they also attacked that golem. That golem was busy maintaining the wall and because of this, he quickly did not notice those other attacks. A few secondster he noticed that it was already veryte and once again that golem got hit by those attacked.


    Once again, an explosion appeared, but those Warriors did not stop attacking that golem. From two directions, those spiritual Warriors keep attacking that golem. But suddenly, the leader of those Warriors quickly told them to stop attacking because he did not want those spiritual warriors to use their full spiritual energy. That will be a very risky move and because of this he wanted those spiritual warriors to save some of their spiritual energy.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Because of the sand created by that explosion, nobody was able to see anything. They did not know if they already killed that golem or if they did not do anything to that golem. Right now, all of them were looking in that golem''s direction.


    Some far from there, Sam was recovering his lost spiritual energy. Previously, he almost used 80% of spiritual energy to that arrow and make that arrow very strong and with that, he was able to hit that golem and also destroy the chest area of that golem. Right now, he already brings out the spiritual recovery potion. Right now, he needs to recover his spiritual energy as quickly as he can because what if he did not get killed by all those attacks?


    Suddenly, teacher Alena told him to attack that golem. He was startled after hearing his teacher''s voice, but then he reacted quickly because if his teacher told him to attack, then it meant that the golem did not die from all of this and he was recovering. Sam already activated his spiritual vision. Some of that dust is already because of this. Using this skill, he was able to see the condition of that golem. You also saw that the golem was recovering quickly. Right now he has only his bodyying down on the sand but he is recovering quickly. That hole in his chest area still did not recover. But the fire was almost gone and because of this, it won''t be that long before that golem will recover fully.


    Sam quickly used his full speed toe close to that golem and quickly bring out his bow and spirit arrow. His focus was on that crystal in that golem''s chest area. He did not waste any more time and used his 30% spiritual energy in this arrow. This time he did not use the invisible skill and with that he shot that arrow. This time those Warriors who were focusing on thatyer suddenly saw a blue ray going toward that dust. They don''t know what that was. But it did not take that long when they once again heard an explosion. With that, all those are guessing that someone attacks that golem.


    After that explosion, once again ayer of dust appeared and because of this, nobody was able to tell why that explosion appeared and what was the condition of that golem. But it had been 3 minutes but still they did not feel the movement of that golem and because of this, they already knew that the golem was already dead. Well, not that they exactly know the result, but they guess it.


    At this time, nobody notices, but Sam is already going toward thatyer of dust. Aftering inside of thatyer of dust, he saw that the body of that golem began to fade out slowly. After that, the loot appeared in that area. He saw many crystals and many other materials also appear, but his only focus is on that technique. Wasting no time, he quickly picked up that scroll and left that area.


    _________


    Sometimeter, you can see that Sam was now painting. Because previously he did not recover all of his spiritual energy and he already used 30% of spiritual energy in that spiritual arrow. Not only that, he used the remaining energy to maintain the concealment technique and because of this, he was now out of spiritual energy. Not only his spiritual energy but his stamina also was very low and because of this, he was panting while he was feeling pain in his head.


    ___________To be continued___________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 246 246 - Sudden Situation

    Currently, both Sam and Alena were resting on the 3rd floor. Well, mainly Sam was resting while he was recovering his lost spiritual energy. You can say that right now he was very thrilled that he could kill that boss monster. Well, this all happened because those Warriors were fighting that boss and because of this, the Boss was low on spiritual energy. All those sand Golems were made with sand and spiritual energy.


    So you can say that when their spiritual energy gets low, their defense also gets low. Previous because that Golem was attacking those Warriors with his sand control. Because she was continuously using that skill, he was quite low on spiritual energy. The monster did not have infinite spiritual energy and because of this, they also needed some time to recover their spiritual energy. In the case of the sand golem, his body is made of sand. So you can guess that because of the spiritual energy, the defense of that golem was high. Unlike other living creatures, this type of golem is only created because of spiritual energy.


    So previously, Sam used that chance to finish that golem. If the golem was in his peak condition, then even if he used his 90% or 100% spiritual energy, even then he won''t be able to damage that golem. Sam knows this. Because of this, he also did not take all those rude. He only took the technique scroll and left that area. Right now, he is recovering his spiritual energy and after recovering his spiritual energy, both of them will start going toward the entrance. Well, you guessed it right now it was time to leave the Dungeon. You can say that they were in this Ranjan for at least 10 days and because of this, it was now time to leave.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam and Alena were now going to another entrance. Also, one more thing was that Sam needed to repair his armor. Because he came to this high-grade Dungeon, his Armor got damaged after getting hit by those monsters. While he was thinking about that, he and Alena were advancing toward the entrance, but suddenly, Alena signaled him to stop. At first, Sam did not know why she told him to stop, but then he noticed that in front of them he could see 10 Warriors. Those Warriors were beside the entrance and the more interesting thing was that they were checking all those Warriors who wanted to use that entrance to leave this floor.


    Sam, using his spiritual vision, saw those Warriors, and he saw some familiar faces. He knows 10 Warriors because he has already seen them previously. Those Warriors were also part of the group that was hunting that boss monster. Most likely those other Warriors also will be very close to them. So right now, the main question was why those 10 Warriors were doing all of this to those Warriors who wanted to leave this floor.


    At first, he did not understand, but then he suddenly realized that it was most likely because they wanted to find that person who stole their loot from them or they were thinking that. Sam didn''t know if his guess was right or not, but then he also asked Alena about this. She also answered in the same way that he was thinking. So most likely this will be the case.


    _________


    Right now, a group of 5 Warriors was going to the entrance because they wanted to leave this floor. They already finished their hunting but because they were very low on resources and also injured, they wanted to leave this floor. But when those 5 Warriors went toward the entrance, suddenly 10 Warriors appeared in front of them. Those 10 Warriors suddenly appear in front of them and also block their path.


    "Why are you blocking our path? I don''t think we did anything to you or we know you. Can you move aside? We needed to leave this floor. My friend was injured, so we needed to leave this dungeon," the leader of those 5 Warriors told those 10 Warriors that were blocking their path.


    "It wasn''t that I wanted to block your path, but before you wanted to leave this floor, would you like you to show the loot that you got from this dungeon? If you don''t show your loot to ask, then you won''t be able to leave this dungeon or this floor," suddenly Warrior told all those 5 Warriors.


    " What!!? Why would I show you the loot that I got from this ce? Also, these Dungeons weren''t your personal property, so just move aside." The leader of those 5 Warriors got angry after hearing this, so he told them once again those various to move aside.


    " Haha¡­ looks like someone doesn''t know what is good for him and his teammates." Suddenly, one person began tough after hearing the reply.


    Those 5 Warriors got very angry after hearing that because right now they quickly need to leave this floor. One of their friends was seriously injured and they are also out of health potion. But right now, out of nowhere, some people appear in front of them and block their path. Not only that, but they also demand that they reveal their loot to them. No one will ept this type of demand and because of this, all those 5 Warriors got angry.


    "I don''t want to deal with some stupid people. Don''t think that I won''t attack you, so this will be myst warning." Once again, the leader said to those Warriors. But even after hearing his warning, those guys did not move from their ce and suddenly one of them attacked the leader of those 4 Warriors.<novelnext></novelnext>


    This was an unexpected attack, but fortunately, those 5 Warriors were able to react quickly. One of them was very injured and because of this except him, the other, wasting no time, began to attack those 10 Warriors. Those 10 Warriors also did not dy and began to attack those Warriors. At first those days, no Warriors thought that they could easily finish these 5 Warriors, but then they realized that those Warriors weren''t weak. Because of this, suddenly one person fired a re gun into the sky. This was apletely unexpected move, but then those 5 Warriors ignore that re gun and still Warriors.


    But in 2 minutes, all those 5 Warriors noticed that more 15 Warriors came toward them and all of them surrounded them.


    "What happened?" Suddenly, one person asked.


    "Frank, these five guys did not want to show they were looting us and because of this, we wanted to teach them some lesson. But we did not expect that they would be this powerful," one person of those 10 Warriors said to Frank.


    "Hmm," Frank nodded, and then he looked toward those 5 Warriors who were very alert. Right now, those 5 Warriors are very serious. Even when they were facing the 10 warriors, they were at a disadvantage, but right now they were facing 25 warriors. Because of this, all of them are very worried right now.


    "I will tell you just once to show your loot to us," Frank says to them with a threatening time.


    After hearing his word, those 5 Warriors were now looking at each other. They never face this kind of situation and because of this, they don''t know what to do at this moment.


    _____________


    Sam and Alena were seeing all this from some distance. They were also quite surprised after seeing all of this because none of them also saw this kind of situation. Who could have expected that suddenly some people would appear in front of you and demand to show your loot to them? Those 5 Warriors were only fighting those 10 Warriors. Even though those 5 Warriors were at a disadvantage, they were still able to fight the 10 Warriors. But suddenly, Sam saw that one warrior fired a re gun in the sky.


    Sam instantly guessed that the Warriors were signaling his other teammates. It did not take that much longer before 15 more Warriors appeared. You can say that Sam''s guess was right. Those Warriors who are very close to them just were resting and, because of this, Sam previously didn''t notice them.


    After looking at those 5 Warriors, Sam could tell that those 5 Warriors were in a very terrible position. Even if those 25 Warriors did not kill them, but they could have injured them very seriously and that could destroy their warrior''s life.


    So Sam was about to make his move, but suddenly he felt a hand on his shoulder. He saw that Alena ced her hand on his shoulder and told him to rx. Instantly, Sam realizes that most likely she will make her move. Well, you already know that she did not like this kind of thing, but unfortunately, those 25 Warriors were doing something that she really hates.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 247 247 - System Upgrade

    Right now, Sam has alreadye to his house and is resting. After waking up from his sleep, he went to the kitchen to eat something. Fortunately, his mom had already cooked for him.


    While eating, Sam was thinking about the previous incident. When he was on that third floor and about to make his move toward Warriors who are blocking the path and telling other Warriors to show their loot to them. At this time, Alena told him that she will make her move. After that, she instantly vanished from her ce and appeared behind those 5 Warriors.


    This instantly startled all those other Warriors who were surrounded by those 5 Warriors. Well, suddenly someone appeared, and it was natural for them to be surprised. But Alena did not give them any chance and instantly released her pressure on all those 25 Warriors. She didn''t even need to make any move. With her pressure, all those 25 Warriors instantly started panting because they were feeling that someone ced a mountain on their heads or something like that. For a moment, they were even unable to breathe.


    But Alena did not stop releasing her pressure. She really hated this type of warrior who thought that they were great and the others should follow their order. Because of the intense pressure, all those 25 Warriors, one by one, became unconscious. Fortunately, Alena did not kill them. Well, it wasn''t that she was very kind or did not want to kill them, but this 25 Warriors Steel did not cross the limit and because of this, she still didn''t kill them. But she instantly called the warrior association and told them to send some Warriors to capture these 25 warriors.


    ''Really, if not for that teacher Alena did not want to attack me with her pressure, then most likely, like those other Warriors, I would also be unconscious. Really, the power of a peak A-grade warrior was unimaginable. Sigh, I really have a long way to go to get that kind of power,'' Sam thought all of this while he finished his eating.


    After that, he went back to his room. Today he didn''t want to train because he wanted to rest. Also, one more thing was that he also needed to absorb those other intermediate-grade crystals that he collected when he wasing back from the Dungeon.


    _____________________________


    Next day,


    Right now in the training room, Sam was sitting in a Lotus position. Right now you can see the blue glow that wasing from his body. Actually, he was absorbing the crystals.


    Sometimeter, Sam finally opens his eyes and feels his strength.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (1056/1056)


    Strength: 10


    Agility: 07


    Physique: 06


    Intelligent(mental power): 05


    Spirit: 02


    Grade: (D) (intermediate)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 2 m (You can upgrade the system.) "


    Sam looks at his status window. Well, after thinking about it, he decided to upgrade his system. So when he said upgrade instantly, his status bar changed and a new panel appeared in front of his eyes.


    " System upgrading (0.1%)<novelnext></novelnext>


    [You needed two months to upgrade your system. Until then you won''t be able to use the features of this system except for the inventory.]"


    Well, after seeing this, he just sighs. So for 2 months, he won''t be able to use his system to upgrade his techniques. But then he quickly recovered because in these 2 months he could try to be familiar with most of his techniques so that he could upgrade them quickly 2 monthster.


    He got up from the ground. Right now, he needs to be familiar with his new strength and because of this; he is going to fight with his two training partners. Wasting no time, he quickly brought out his two robots and then set the power limit to peak D-grade.


    _____________________


    5 hourster,


    Right now, Sam was resting in his bed while looking at his mobile phone. Right now he was looking at the news about the Dungeon. Well, he was mostly searching for the news of an intermediate D-grade dungeon. Before going on the journey, he wanted to know about the intermediate D-grade dungeons as much as he could. You can say that in these 5 hours he just 5 those to the robot continuously and with that, he became familiar with his new strength and you can say that he was ready to go to the new dungeon the previous dungeon.


    Sam already had the n about the dungeons. At first, you will go to the previous dungeon and then he will go to the goblin dungeon. In the end, he will go to the ghost dungeon to collect some intermediate-grade crystals. She wanted to power up as much as he could for the annual collegepetition. Because of this, you will go to the Dungeon tomorrow. You already talk with his parents and also with his teacher. Everyone agreed with him and gave me permission to go to the Dungeon. Well, it wasn''t that they would prevent him from going to the Dungeon. He will go to all of this dungeon on his own. Right now, all of his friends were busy with their own training and he did not want to disturb them.


    Before that, he also needed to go to the cksmith association to repair his armor. Not only that, but he also needs to buy many resources like health potions and spiritual energy recovery potions. So Sam did not waste any more time and quickly left the house. He was going toward the cksmith association.


    _________________


    Next day,


    After saying goodbye to his mom and dad and also his sister, Sam left his house and started his car. Right now, he was going toward the desert dungeon. As you know, he wanted to go there first because he was familiar with that dungeon and the monster inside of the dungeon. It did not take him that much time to reach the Dungeon. After parking his car, he starts going toward the guide of the Dungeon. Finally, Mask once again appears and is going to start his solo hunting. But before that, he still needed to ask the guy about the second floor.


    After learning from that guide that there wasn''t that much change on the second floor, Sam did not waste any more time and started going toward the dungeon. As you know, his usual behavior, he already activated his concealment technique and vanished from his ce.


    Suddenly, some people who were looking in his direction became shocked. They did not be shocked because they watched Sam vanish. The reason why they became shocked was that they thought that he already noticed them when he came toward them. As you can tell these people were from an information guild. Like them, many other information guilds send their minions toward the Dungeon to look over all the Warriors.


    Previously when they saw that suddenly someone appeared in the Dungeon who was wearing a mask, they became very interested in that person. Well, because this was rare, not many people came to the dungeon wearing masks. And if you want to know why those people from the information guild were interested in him, then because previously the dark association released a bounty of a masked warrior, who revealed their n about the dark statue that they nted in Venus City''s ghost Dungeon. Because of this, they release the bounty. So from then, this information guild was looking over all the warriors who came to the Dungeon wearing masks.


    Sam, at this time who used the concealment technique and finally entered the Dungeon, didn''t know anything about those people from the information guild. But even if you get to know about them, he would not care about them. Because those people won''t be able to keep up with him and they also won''t be able to track him when he uses his concealment technique, so he did not have to worry about them.


    Just aftering to the first floor, Sam did not waste any more time and increased his speed. He needed one day to reach the entrance of the next floor, and because of this, he wanted to go to that entrance as quickly as he could.


    __________


    Well, when Sam was going toward the entrance he waspletely unaware of the fact that those people from the information guild after seeing the masked warriorpletely vanish and most likely enter the dungeon, those people instantly told all of this to they are boss and their Boss also already told this news to the dark association. Well, the dark association originally paid them. The warrior from the dark association said if they found any clue, even a small clue, they should tell them immediately. Because of this, the boss of the people from the information guild quickly told all of this to the person who released the bounty.


    After hearing the news, those people from the dark association also were preparing. They will also go to that dungeon. Sometimeter, those people from the dark association already left their base, and right now, all of them were going toward the desert dungeon in the central city.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 248 248 - Hunting

    Right now you can see a person was fighting some ck Scorpion. Those ck Scorpions tried to attack that person with their poisonous tell, but that person quickly jumped away from that ce. After that, that person quickly created a fireball and shot toward those Scorpions. The person was fighting the Scorpions, and that fireball hit the Scorpions. Instantly, those Scorpions receive damage by that blue fire Ball. But that warrior wasn''t done. He quickly appeared in front of those Scorpions and used his sword toward those two Scorpions. The remaining three Scorpions were behind those two Scorpions. After noticing the warrior, they also attacked, but that warrior was very fast and quickly dodge their attack.


    As you can guess, it was Sam who was fighting those five Scorpions. Using his fast-cut technique, he quickly attacks those two Scorpions in less than two seconds. You can say that in less than two seconds, he attacked both of the Scorpions 10 times with his sword. Currently, he was using a normal D-grade sword while using his spirit technique. He also wanted to get better at this technique as quickly as he can and because of this, besides his energy mode, he was also using this technique.


    Even though he wasn''t able to kill those two Scorpions, after receiving his attack, those two Scorpions were seriously injured. Also, one more great thing was that the Scorpions did not have the recovery technique like those sand golems. Sam did not rest and quickly created a confused Ray and attacked those Scorpions with it. This will confuse those Scorpions for some time and that time was enough for him to attack those Scorpions.


    If you are wondering why he wasn''t using his concealment technique, then he was already fighting for 9 hours continuously, and because of this, he is currently deactivating his concealment technique. Also, one more thing was that he did not want to rely on that technique very much and he had the confidence that he could kill these Scorpions without his concealment technique.


    He sessfully killed those two Scorpions and, after that, he also attacked the other three remaining Scorpions. He also injured those three Scorpions, but not as seriously as these two Scorpions. Sometimeter, when those Scorpions came to their senses, he jumped away from that ce. He maintains a distance between himself and the Scorpions. At this time, he did not want to give those Scorpions any more channels and, because of this, quickly created two Blue fireballs and, wasting no time, quickly shot those fireballs toward those Scorpions.


    The moment those Scorpions came back to their senses, they got hit by those two fireballs. Previously, they had already got injured by Sam''s attack, but now they got hit by the blue fireballs. Even though Sam wasn''t using his great fireball or mega fireball, still these normal blue fireballs were also very dangerous. Instantly, those 3 Scorpions begin to roar. Well, because Sam already damaged their shell, the blue fire was able to reach their inner skin and started to damage that. Because of this, those three Scorpions let out painful roars.


    Sometimeter, those three Scorpions now started to fade away. After that, Sam quickly picks up the loot and then once again begins to advance. Right now, he was searching for a ce to rest. As you know that he was fighting continuously for 9 hours and because of this right now he was very tired or you can say that he was very low on energy. But here in the desert Dungeon, you won''t be able to find any safe ce. Sam also knows that and because of this, he is already prepared for that. He already said the monster rappelling device and also the life sign-detecting device. With that, he built a tent and then brought out his food. After finishing his food, he also started to meditate. Well, you can say that right now Sam was already an experienced warrior and because of this, he wasn''t feeling that sleepy.


    _____________


    At this time, when Sam was busy in his meditation, some warriors were already on the fast floor. 5 hours ago they entered the first floor, and right now they were searching the first floor for that mask warrior. Well, as you can guess that these people are from the dark association and they also receive the mission to kill that mask warrior.


    "Boss, I don''t think that mask warrior is on the first floor. We already searched every corner on the first floor, but still, we did not find any clue about that mask warrior. Most likely, that warrior already went to the next floor." One Warrior told this to his boss.


    " Hmm¡­ most likely you are right. But still, we will search for an hour, and then if we still did not find that warrior, then we will go to the next floor. As you know, the information guild already told us that the masked warrior suddenly vanished from his ce. Most likely, that mask warrior has an invisible technique. But he won''t be able to maintain that much and only then we will get to know about his location, so keep searching," the boss of those Warriors told them.


    "Yes, boss," after saying that those warriors once again begin to search around the first floor. At this time, the boss did not go with them. Actually, he was thinking about something. After that incident in Venus City, they already found 10 mask warriors, but after interrogating them, they got to know that none of them was the real culprit. So right now he was thinking, what if this person also wasn''t the real culprit? So most likely this will be frustrating for him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Sigh, why the hell did the leader give me this mission? I just really wanted to rx for some time. But because of this damn mask warrior, I wasn''t able to rx for some time. The moment I will find this mask Warrior I will give him a painful death only then I will rx from this frustration," the boss murmured. After that, he began to wait for his subordinate toe back to him and report to him.


    Well, unfortunately, they won''t be able to find anything because right now, Sam has already finished his meditation, and once again, he has already activated the concealment technique. Previously, while he was meditating, his life detector device gave him the signal that some monster was near him and that quickly woke him up from his meditation.


    The moment he activated this technique, those monsters who wereing toward him quickly lost his location. They were sandworms that wereing towards Sam''s location while traveling inside the sand.


    Right now, Sam looks at his life detector and sees the exact location of those monsters. But when he saw that ce, he did not find any monsters. That means those monsters could be inside the sand and most likely they were the sandworms. At this time, Sam quickly created a mega fireball and shot toward that ce. Instantly, that blue mega fireball with incense speed reaches that ce and quickly hits the ground.


    "Boom!!!!" The moment that fireball hit the ground, an explosion appeared in that ce. Well, Sam had already gone very far away from that ce, but still, he was hit by the shockwave that was created by that explosion. Sometimeter, when the dust around that area began to clear, Sam came to that ce and saw in his life sign detecting device. Previously he saw 5 sandworms but right now after this explosion, he could not find any sandworms in that ce. Most likely this big explosion already killed those sandworms, as you know that the defense of this monster wasn''t that great and they were the easiest to killpared to those ck Scorpions or those sand golems.


    Because of the dust, at first, he was unable to find the loot. But after searching for some time, he found the loot. So, wasting no time, he quickly picked up the loot and then left that area. Well, most likely many Warriors wille to this ce because of this big explosion.


    ____________


    Next day,


    The previous day, Sam did not continue to hunt in the nighttime. Even though he has night vision, he still did not prefer to hunt in the nighttime. So previously, after finding a good ce to rest, he was waiting for the sun.


    Currently, Sam has already found some Sand golems that weren''t far away from his ce. Those monsters were looking around and searching for the humans. But Sam already activated his concealment technique and because of this, these monsters could not find his trace. Sam uses this chance toe to a better position and then brings out his bow and arrows. Previously he already found a trick to kill sand golems faster. But for that, he needed to attack one monster at a time. After clearing his mind, he focused on that Sand golem that was facing in his direction.


    _________To be continued_______

 Chapter 249 249 - Killing Rock Golems

    Continuously, 5 arrows went toward a rock golem. Sam didn''t attack all the golems at the same time. He knows that he won''t be able to kill all those golems. Even if he could kill all the golems at the same time, for that he needed to use almost 100% of his spiritual energy, and that would be very dangerous for him. Right now, Alena wasn''t with him and so if he uses 100% spiritual energy, then for almost 1 hour, he will need to recover from the headache. At that time, he won''t be able to fight monsters properly and that will be very dangerous for him. Because of this, he decided to kill the golems one by one.


    One after another, those 5 arrows hit the chest area of that golem. The first four arrows after heating the same ce instantly destroy that area and thest arrow hits the crystal. So like that he was able to kill that golem easily. Some decided to recover some of his spiritual energy and then once again attack the golem. You can say that in these 5 arrows he almost uses 40% of his spiritual energy and because of this he wanted to recover his spiritual energy first.


    While Sam was recovering his spiritual energy, those four remaining golems instantly got started when all of them noticed that one of them got attacked by someone and got killed. This instantly made them very alert. Instantly they quickly created a sand wall in front of them. Not only that, but they also started to control the sand around them so that nobody could approach them. Until now, they did not find any trace of their enemy and because of this; they were doing this to protect themselves.


    After looking at those, Sam just sighs. He already expected this. Well, right now, if you wanted to kill any golem, he needed to destroy that sand wall first. Most likely, he will be needed to use his 50 to 60% spiritual energy to kill one golem.


    10 minutester, right now, he is once again focusing on a golem and waiting for the right time to attack that golem. Right now, all those golems still maintain the sand walls even when they are traveling around. Right now was using his spiritual vision while focusing on that golem. He wanted to be sure about the chest area of that golem because he did not want to miss it.


    1 minuteter, he already found the chance and quickly shot the arrows one by one. He shoots 8 arrows one by one and those arrows go toward that golem at an incense speed. The best thing was that these golems weren''t that fast enough and their reaction speed also wasn''t that fast. Because of this, the golem is unable to react when an arrow hits that sand wall. Well with one arrow he was able to damage that Wall but when the next Arrow hit the same ce that instantly created a hole around that ce. After that, one arrow hit his chest area. That only did some damage, but when the next three arrows hit that same ce one after another, that also instantly made a hole around that area. Because of this, thest arrow only hits the crystal and destroys that crystal.


    At this time, those other three golems became angry, and they began to create sand Spears and rocks by the sand and began to throw in every direction. None of them still found any clue about the enemy and because of this, they were very mad. They wanted to find this invisible enemy and kill him.


    Fortunately, currently, Sam was maintaining a 3 km distance between him and golems. Before shooting arrows, he went close to those golems but when he did need to recover his energy; he maintained the 3 km distance. But even after maintaining this much distance, he could see the sand spears and the rocks were alsoing in his direction. He already senses those attacks and quickly dodges them. Right now, he was once again recovering his lost energy while looking toward those golems and their rampage.


    _________________


    40 minutester,


    Some shoot the 10 arrows toward thest golem. Right now, thest golem created 2 sand walls in front of him. After not finding the enemy, that golem did this to save himself from the enemy. But Sam also already predicted this and, because of this, he was ready. One by one, his arrow hits those walls and makes holes in that ce.


    "Sigh," finally after killing thest golem, Sam sighs in relief. He really did not want to face these golems because, for that, he needed to use this much of his power. Because of this, he wanted to avoid the Sand golems. Compared to these monsters, those Scorpions and sandworms were easiest to kill. Even though Scorpions have a hard shell around their body, that is still easier to damagepared to the hard body of the sand golem. So don''t get confused after thinking that it was sand and that you could damage the sand easily.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Looks like I also need to learn the water control technique. If I could change the nature of my arrows from me to water, then that could be used against these sand golems." Sam murmured. After collecting the loot, he left that ce and began to search for some Scorpions or the sandworms. Also, as you know, it was white dangerous to absorb the crystal when you were inside of a dungeon and you also don''t have any friends around you.


    __________________


    When Sam was busy looking for the monsters, those people from the dark association already came to the second floor. They already searched every corner of the first floor, but even after waiting this long, they did not find any clue about the enemy, and because of this; the boss was sure that the enemy already came to this floor. He also did not want to take any chance and because of this he also left two Warriors at the entrance of the dungeon. Those two Warriors will observe everyone that wants to go outside of the dungeon. The dark association did not have a clear picture of that masked warrior and, because of this, they wanted to check if anyone wanted to leave the dungeon.


    "Boys start to search in every direction of this floor. Also, try to maintain a low profile so that no warrior could notice any unusual behavior around you." The boss of the Warriors told them and instantly those subordinates of his began to go in every direction. If someone sends a notice to that Warrior association, then those warriors from the warrior association will directlye to this ce to eliminate the enemies.


    The Boss also did not stay ideal, and he began to advance. They also begin to stay here for 10 hours and even after that, if they did not find anything, then most likely that warrior already went to the next floor.


    ____________


    Right now, Sam was also on the second floor. He waspletely unaware of the fact that people from the dark association Warriors were already searching for him and they also already came to the second floor. Well, even if he gets to know about them, then he will just ignore them and only focus on those monsters in this. Except for that Boss, the other Warriors were very easy to kill. Only that boss was in the peak D-grade.


    Currently, Sam was resting and eating some food while he was observing his surroundings. Right now hepletely focuses on his life sign-detecting device. With this device, you can find if there was any monster that came close to this device. One more thing was that his teacher Alena already told him that she will make sure to give him a better life sign-detecting device. Because of this, you can say that he was also happy. If his teacher really gives him a better life sign detector device, then it will be very good for him to show if any monster was nearby or not.


    Sometimeter when he still noticed that none of the monsters came within range of that device. He decided to change the ce. A few minutester, it will be nighttime and before that, Sam wanted to hunt as many monsters as he could. Fortunately, he already found some sandworms. Wasting no time, he quickly went toward those monsters.


    When he came very close to the monster, only then he noticed 5 Warriors. Those 5 warriors were fighting those 25 sand golems. Also, one more thing was that those warriors were most likely new to this dungeon because those 5 Warriors were having trouble while they were finishing the sandworms. Sam, at this time, did not make any move. He just silently looked in their direction.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 250 250 - Time To Capture Some Warriors

    "Boos, some time ago, I noticed a warrior. For a moment, he suddenly appeared, but the next moment, he disappeared. Unfortunately, I was unable to see the full figure of that warrior, but I could guess that warrior was wearing a mask at the time. Unfortunately, I was also unable to follow his trail because when that warrior vanished from his ce, I did not find any trace of him." One warrior from the dark association suddenly came toward the boss quickly and told him this. After hearing this news, the mood of that boss suddenly lit up.


    A few hours ago, the boss of the group that came from the dark association was in a depressed mood. Because one by one all of his subordinates began toe back and tell him. At first, the boss thought that someone had already found the clue about that mask warrior on this floor or like the previous floor. If they did not find anything, then most likely they need to go to the next floor. But when he heard the result from those subordinates, his mood went downward. As you can guess, all the subordinates were telling him that they did not find anything, even after searching very carefully.


    All the subordinates found many Warriors in this ce but they did not find any warrior that was wearing a mask. After hearing all of this, the boss was right now in a depressed mood. But at this time suddenly one of his subordinates suddenly came toward him and told him that he found or you can say he saw someone for a moment that most likely could be the masked Warrior. Also, when he heard that warrior suddenly vanished from his ce, the boss became sure that he was the masked warrior that they were searching for.


    The boss once again became very happy and instantly asked that subordinate about the location where he had previously met that person. That subordinate did not waste any more time and quickly led all of those Warriors toward the ce where hest saw that warrior before that warrior suddenly vanished from his ce.


    That ce wasn''t far away from their previous ce and because of this in just 10 minutes, they already appeared in that ce. Aftering to this ce, the boss saw thatpared to those other areas, this ce was quite different. Most of all he could notice that the Dungeon was repairing this ce so with that he could tell that most likely some time ago someone fought some monster in this ce and while fighting that monster, that Warrior did much damage to this ce. As you know, if you damage an area inside of the dungeon, the Dungeon will repair that ce on its own.


    "Boys quickly spread out. I''m sure that the Warrior most likely fights with some monsters in this ce and after collecting the loot, that warrior vanishes from this ce, or you can say that he begins to advance from this ce." The boss quickly exined all of this and told all of his subordinates to spread out around this area so that someone could find a clue about that warrior. Right now, even if someone finds a very little clue, even that would be helpful for him.


    All those subordinates quickly left that area and all of them began searching in that ce very carefully. They also find the clue, even if it was a very small clue.


    _______________


    20 minutester,


    All the subordinates once again begin toe back to their boss. They search around this area. But unfortunately, none of them could find anything in this ce and they told this to the air boss. The Boss, who was in a great mood, suddenly once again became very depressed because he thought that this time all of them will give him the clue about the masked warrior. But as you can see, he was very unfortunate.


    At this time, once again, the warrior who previously saw that warrior who suddenly vanished from his ce, came toward the boss and said to him,


    "Boss, I found something, but I am not sure if that was the clue of that warrior or not."


    That Warrior thought that his boss would just scold him. But the moment the boss heard this from his subordinate, he quickly went to the ce where his subordinate found that clue.


    When the boss came to this ce, he finally saw the clue that his subordinate was talking about. Well, it was actually a mark of a leg. The Dungeon was removing that footprint.


    ''Fortunately, I came here quickly or I won''t be able to find something like this,'' the boss thought. After taking a picture of that footprint, the boss was thinking of which direction he should go right now.


    ____________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Unfortunately, those people from the dark association. They did not know, but actually, Sam wasn''t that far away from the ce where those people from the dark Association were searching for Sam. Right now, Sam was looking toward the monster that was fighting some people. Those monsters were the ck Scorpions that were attacking those 4 years with their tail.


    A few minutester, suddenly Sam saw that one person was about to get attacked by the tail of that Scorpion. Fortunately, he reacted quickly and instantly shot an arrow toward that ck Scorpion. But he did not finish there because after that he once again shot another Arrow toward that scorpion. Well, to kill the Scorpions, he at least needed two arrows. While attacking the Scorpion Sam maintains a distance between him and that monster, and also because he was using the concealment technique so that the warrior who was able to get attacked was now confused.


    Previously, when that Scorpion was about to attack him, an Arrow quickly hit the Scorpion. This instantly gives him the time to move away from that ce. After that, he looked behind where that arrow came from. But he did not find anyone, but he noticed one thing: suddenly an arrow came out of nowhere and went toward that Scorpion. Because of this, he was very confused. This desert dungeon wasn''t like the forest dungeon. Because of this, it was very hard for any warrior to hide in this desert.


    At this time, when that Warrior was looking around and trying to search for the warrior who helped him, that Warrior or we can say Sam alreadye toward the loot that the Scorpion dropped. After collecting the loot, he left that ce. Now only two more Scorpions are alive and he can tell that those warriors will be able to kill those two Scorpions.


    _______________


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, Sam was resting and eating his food. Suddenly, his life-detecting device begins to vibrate. He quickly looked at that device and saw that some humans were appearing in that ce. At first, Sam decided to ignore them because it always happens, but then he noticed those Warriors seemed to being toward his ce.


    After looking at this, Sam quickly put all the food in his inventory and then activated the concealment technique. It was a very strange thing because it looked like those Warriors already knew where he was and because of this; they wereing toward him. Most likely, those people also have life-detecting devices, and using that, they found his location and came toward him.


    Actually, Sam was right. All those Warriors were from the dark association and they also have the life detecting device. A few minutes ago they saw in the life-detecting device that a person was in that ce. So using that device, they were going toward that person to see if that person was the Mask warrior or not. But suddenly that person quickly vanishes, even the life-detecting device is unable to locate that person.


    "Boss, most likely this was the masked warrior." One person told their boss.


    "Quickly, let''s go to that ce. I don''t think that person went that far away," the boss quickly told all of his subordinates and they quickly increased their speed. But none of them was aware of the fact that Sam was already close to them and he also listened to their conversation.


    Well, those Warriors increase their speed and because of this, Sam also increases his speed and the following name. But at this time, he had a question in his mind.


    '' Did these Warriors were searching for him? He is also wearing a mask and most likely it could be him. But here is the main question: why the hell were they searching for the masked Warrior? Did all these Warriors alsoe from the dark association or something like that?" Sam was having all of these questions in his mind, but he knew that until he did not Interrogate these Warriors, he wouldn''t be able to find an answer. Because of this, he decided to capture these Warriors. He still wasn''t sure if these Warriors were after him, and because of this he decided not to kill them.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 251 251 - Capturing All The Enemies

    All those Warriors from the dark association were advancing toward the ce where previously they saw that warrior. It did not take them that much time because they are going very fast. Aftering to the ce, the boss started looking around very carefully. Actually, he was looking for any footsteps that the warrior left behind.


    "Did you find anything, boss?" One Warrior asked the boss if he found anything or not. Unfortunately, the boss only shook his head and said that he had found nothing.


    ''Sigh, this damn mask warrior,'' the boss murmured.


    "Boys, try to look around this ce," the boss told his subordinates to look around this ce. All the subordinates begin to search around the ce. At this time, when the boss looked at all of his subordinates, he felt something odd. He didn''t know what the problem was, so he decided to ignore it. But right now, if he only counted the number of his subordinates only then he could find the odd thing. Previously, he had 25 subordinates, but right now, if he counted the number of subordinates, then he could find that only 23 Warriors were with him and two Warriors did note with him.


    Well, sometimeter, one by one, all those warriors once again came back and then told they were Boss that they did not find anything. It took some time, but you can say that sometimeter, everyone was already back. Right now the boss was busy talking with his subordinate and because of this, he did not notice once again an odd thing that right now only 20 Warriors were present in that ce. Well, not only the boss but even those subordinates of his didn''t notice the strange thing that happened to their group.


    But sometimeter, one warrior was looking around his group because he was searching for his friend, but even after looking around carefully, he did not find anyone. Only then he noticed that not only his friend, but he cannot find four other warriors. This instantly make him very alert and he quickly shouted at the boss,


    "Bosss!!!!!" Hearing his shout, the boss quickly looked toward him and then he quickly told the boss about the matter. Just after hearing his word, all the Warriors present in that group became very alert, and they also started to look around. Only then did all of them notice that 5 Warriors were missing from their group.


    "Boss, previously they wereing with us, but right now there wasn''t a present here," one warrior quickly told the boss. But right now, all of them saw a seriousness on their boss''s face. At this time, the boss was thinking about the odd thing that he had previously felt. But that time he did not think about that and because of this now he was thinking if he missed anything previously.


    Sometimeter, after thinking all of this time only then he found out that previously there were only 23 Warriors present and two Warriors already missing beforeing to this ce. After that, three more Warriors vanished when they started to look around this ce.


    "Now listen, most likely we have an enemy that is following us. Right now, we need to be very careful because we don''t know where the enemy is." At this time, the boss seriously says all of this to his subordinates. After listening to their boss''s words, all those Warriors also became very serious because right now they were in a very difficult situation. None of them know where the enemy was, but they know that the enemy already attacked them, and because of this, five of their subordinates were missing.


    After that, the boss decided that they should go in the direction in which his 3 subordinates had previously gone. All those Warriors were divided into 3 groups and all of them went in three different directions to look for their subordinates.


    ____________


    Well, as you can give that it was Sam who was doing all of this. Previously, when those Warriors wereing toward his ce, he, after finding a good chance, instantly decided to attack and capture two Warriors. After that, he once again followed those other Warriors.


    When he noticed that even though two of their subordinates were missing, none of those Warriors noticed anything. Sam just smiled after noticing that after that he once again started to follow a warrior when their boss told them to search around this ce. At this time, he also used this chance to quickly capture three more Warriors. All those Warriors were intermediate D-grade warriors and, because of this, Sam did not have any problem capturing them. But he had to be careful around that because the boss was a peak D-grade warrior.<novelnext></novelnext>


    So like this, he previously captured 5 Warriors, and right now he was following a group that was heading in the direction and searching for their subordinates. There were 7 Warriors present in this group. Because of this, Sam decided to attack.


    He is already very close to one warrior and quickly punches that warrior using his spiritual energy-coated punch. Just after receiving the punch, the Warrior became unconscious. He didn''t even realize what happened to him or how he became unconscious. But at this time his other teammates became very alert when they heard his voice and so he suddenly became unconscious.


    All the warriors already know that the enemy was very near them, but they still cannot find the enemy. At this time, they once again hear voices from behind. When they turned around, they once again realized that one of their teammates was already unconscious.


    "Stupid coward. Why didn''t you show yourself? Why the hell are you attacking our friends? If you really wanted to fight why you wanted to use this cowardly method," suddenly at this time one warrior shouted angrily. But still, there was no response. At this time, something unexpected happened. The warrior who previously said all of this suddenly became unconscious. This instantly makes all those other Warriors very alert; they quickly jump away from their ce.


    One by one like this, Sam quickly made all those Warriors unconscious. Even though it was very slow because he did not want to kill them, he could only use this method to make all those Warriors unconscious. After he made all those Warriors unconscious, he tied them and went in the other direction. Like these seven Warriors, he also needed to make all those other Warriors unconscious. Only then he and the boss could fight.


    1 hourter,


    Right now you can see that many Warriors were on the ground and all of them were unconscious. Only the boss of those Warriors was still standing. The boss tried to attack the invisible enemy but because he was unable to trace the location of his enemy, his attack also did not do any damage to Sam. Sam also did not waste any more time and started to punch the boss continuously. You have to say that the punch was very powerful because it did very damage to the boss. In front of this continuous punch, the boss could not do anything and he also became unconscious.


    Sam once again tied all those and also the boss and only then he sprayed water toward the boss to make him conscious. When the boss came back to his senses, only then he realized that someone was standing in front of him while he had already tied him up. The boss tried to look toward his enemy, and only then the enemy was the masked Warrior that they were searching around.


    "Right now, if you don''t want to tell me why you are after me, then you can say goodbye to your life," Sam said and then quickly broke one finger of that warrior.


    " Ahh!!! " All this time the boss was unable to process what was happening, but when he felt the pain only, then he came back to his senses and realized that he was captured by the enemy. The enemy also did not give him any chance and quickly broke his second finger.


    "Stop, stop, please stop. I will tell you everything," almost with a crying face the boss said to Sam.


    "We are actually after a masked warrior who came to this dungeon. I don''t know if it was you or any other masked warrior that also came to this dungeon. We are from the dark association, and a few days ago I received this mission to capture or kill a masked warrior that previously interfered with a mission." The boss said all of this. Sam, at this time, hears all of this and then asks him about the mission. The boss, without hiding anything, quickly told him about the mission and only then Sam realized that they were actually after him. Because the mission was about the dark statue that he was find in Venus city''s ghost dungeon.


    _______To be continued______

 Chapter 252 252 - Before The Annual College Competition.

    Currently, in his training room in the Royal Academy while fighting his two robots. He quickly jumps toward the ck robot and tries to punch, but at this time the white robot is already attractive from his left side. Instantly, a shield appeared in his hand that defended him from that punch. If you are wondering about the shield, then he could now create a shield like this with his light control technique. Even though he is right now unable to use his system, he still could progress in his techniques.


    Sometimeter, Sam was panting and resting on the floor. Two dayster, finally, the annual collegepetition will be starting and because of this, he was preparing for that. If youpare him to the time when he just broke through to intermediate D-grade, then you will notice a huge difference in his strength. Well, because in these few days, he was busy hunting the monster in the Dungeon and he also collected many crystals from the dungeons. Previously aftering back from the desert Dungeon, he also went toward the Goblin dungeon and alsoing back from that Goblin Dungeon he went toward Venus city''s ghost dungeon. With that, you can easily guess that he already absorbed all those crystals and because of this, he was now more powerful than before.


    Not only Sam was practicing in his training room, but his other friends were also practicing. All those students who got selected from the first year were practicing very hard for thepetition. None of them know what they will get if they win the annual collegepetition, but their teacher already told them that it will be an S-grade thing. Because every year the warrior association gives the winner this type of gift. Well, because of this you can say that everyone wants to win thepetition.


    Sam and his friends already get the information about their opponents, but like them, those students were also not used to their full power and because of this, nobody knew how powerful their opponents were. Because of this, everyone was practicing very hard.


    _______________


    After finishing his training, Sam was right now going toward the cafeteria. Because two dayster, thepetition will start and it will be held at the Royal Academy. Right now, you can see many people at the Royal Academy. All those people are preparing the stage for thatpetition. Not only the people from the central city but also the people from the different cities wille to thispetition to watch them fight and because of this, it was needed to prepare.


    Aftering to the cafeteria, he already ordered food and right now, he was waiting for his food. Sometimeter, he also saw that Tony and the others also came to the second floor and they also ordered their food. When they sat beside him, Sam asked them about their training. Well, after the inter-annual collegepetition, everyone focused on their training and because of this did not have any idea about his friend''s power. Actually, he only came back from the Dungeon 2 days ago, and before that he only focused on hunting in the dungeon. Because of this, he did not get that many chances to talk to his friends.


    Well, not only some, but Tony and the girls were also busy. Their personal teacher also took them to the Dungeon while they also went with them. Because of this, all of them were able to gather many crystals and they could also hunt many monsters.


    All of them are now discussing their training. Tony and Alexa told them that they have already mastered the spirit technique. It means right now they could instantly activate that technique without any problem. Not only that, but they are also right now focusing on the body technique while using the spirit technique. Well, it was very hard, but still, they were trying that.


    Elena and Jeni told them that they were also already able to use the spirit technique while using their spell. Not only that, but they also improve their elementation technique. As you know, alll spiritual Warriors have the weakness of being closed in the fight and because of this, both of them also focused on their elementation technique. After hearing that, you can say that the others were happy for them because with that they could protect themselves when the enemy decided to fight a closed range with them.


    Tina and Kenny told them right now they could also use the spirit technique. Even though they still did not master that technique, they were very close to that. In the few days when they went to the Dungeon with their teacher, their teacher only told them to focus on the spirit technique while fighting the monsters. Because of this, you can say that everyone improved very much.


    Sam also told him that he is also able to right now use the spirit technique while using his movement technique. Actually, previously Sam wanted to use the spirit technique while using his punch technique or body hardening technique. But then his teacher told him that he should focus on his movement technique because if he was able to do that, then his speed would increase very much and that could be helpful for him. Also, as you can give that, he could already use the spirit technique while using his movement technique. But still, he did not master it and because of this, he still needed some time to use the spirit technique while using movement technique.<novelnext></novelnext>


    [A/N: Sam still didn''t learn anybody''s hardening technique, but he was nning to learn that type of technique. Also, nobody knows that some have already broken through because still, nobody asks him about his breakthrough.]


    While they were talking, they noticed that the second-year students were alsoing to the second floor. While those second-year students noticed Sam and his friends, they tried to show their strength. Because of this, they released a little of their intermediate D-grade power. But even after sensing their power, Sam and the others did not react or you can say that they justpletely ignored those 2nd years. But one thing all of them were surprised about was the fact that all those second years were able to be intermediate D-grade warriors. Previously, only the top 7 Warriors were the intermediate D-grade warriors, but right now, everyone was the intermediate D-grade warriors. Well, Sam was counterattacking their power while releasing his own power.


    "Most likely not only but those second-year seniors are also practicing very hard. Well, it was natural because I think they already feel straightened when they notice someone like Sam was present in the first year." At this time Tony suddenly said to all of his friends while smiling. After hearing that, Alexa and the others were alsoughing.


    ________________


    Right now, Sam was going back to his training room with his friends. Today he will just fight with his robots because his teacher already told him that he should not practice tomorrow and he should only rest tomorrow. Actually, before thepetition, all the teachers wanted their students to rx. Well, Sam did not have any problem with that.


    ______________________


    Alena was now going toward Sam''s training room. All this time, she was with Gloria while fighting with her. She already knows that her student did not like to fight with the robots and because of this, most of the time Gloria asks her to be her fighting partner. As you know that all those robots did not have any intelligence of their own and because of this Gloria did not like that. Those monsters in the Dungeon have intelligence on their own and they could think of new tactics while fighting the Warriors.


    Sometimeter, she was now already in front of Sam''s training room. Well, she already knew how hardworking both of her students were. And because of this, she wanted to check on Sam and so if he was injured or something like that.


    When she entered the training room, she saw that Sam was lying down on the floor and trying to recover his lost energy. He was fighting those robots for at least 4 hours. Not only that, but he also focuses on his spirit technique while using the movement technique. Because of this, right now, he was out of his stamina. While he uses the spirit technique and the movement technique, at the same time, which consumes his stamina. Fortunately, he is already able to collect many crystals and already absorb them and because of this he already has a high stamina.


    Sometimeter, Sam once again got up from the ground. He is once again ready to fight the robots, but at this time suddenly Alena tells him that she will be fighting the instate of those robots. After hearing that, Sam already became happy and quickly agreed with her. Well, his teacher was powerful and because of this, he did not have to worry that anybody could have injured her.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 253 253 - Strat Of The Competition

    25 December, 10:00 a.m.


    Today is a special day for the central city and the Royal Academy. Well, not only the Royal Academy, but all the colleges. Yes, you guess it right from today the annual collegepetition will be starting and you can say that for every college this was a big event.


    Since yesterday, the central city was very busy but today in the morning every person in the central city is trying to finish their work as quickly as they can because thepetition will be starting at 11 a.m.


    Right now you can see many people were going toward the stadium beside the Royal Academy. Those peoples are not only from the central city but many people from other cities also came and were also going toward the stadium. Well, you can say that nobody wanted to miss thispetition.


    Well, not only those colleges, but the warrior association is also very busy today. They needed to increase the security of the central city. Because Warriors from the dark association, or those who wanted to harm all the citizens, could target this ce, and because of this, the security was very tight today.


    Now all the people slowly go toward the stadium while maintaining the peace. If right now you came toward the stadium, then you can see that the stadium was already full of people. All of them were very excited about this match. They just need to wait one more hour, then thepetition will finally start.


    Right now, if you are wondering where all the students that will be participating in this match are, then all of them are waiting in their own dressing rooms. They were also waiting for the signal to go toward the feel. Before thepetition starts, they will have a wee ceremony. So you can say that all the students are preparing for that.


    __________


    30 minutester,


    "Good morning everyone!!!! Wee to the annual collegepetition. I know that everyone was very excited about the match but before that you know every year we held a wee ceremony before starting the match. So, wasting no time, let''s wee our participants. I hope everyone present in the stadium will wee them with huge ps,"


    After that, everyone present in the stadium begins to p. One by one, many students began toe toward the field. Every student was making a line and the person who was in front of that line was holding their college g.


    One by one, many students from different colleges came toward the field. All the audience weed them with ps. Right now, you can also see the students from the Royal Academy, Golden Dawn, and white tiger Academy.


    From the Royal Academy, Sam was holding the g because he was in front of the first-year batch, while his sister also held the g because she was in front of the third-year batch. Right now, every student was feeling very excited. They just really wanted to fight.


    _______________


    Sometimeter, the wee ceremony finally finished, and every student went back to the waiting room. The Royal Academy and also the Warrior association already made preparations for that and because of this, you can say that every college has its own waiting room. So right now, all the students were going toward their own waiting room. They need to wait until the first match starts.


    At this time, all the organization teams were deciding how they should start the match. Should it be a battle royale or it should be a one vs one match? In the end, they decided it will be a team match. From every team, 8 students will fight, and to win the match, five students need to defeat their opponent. Sometimeter, every student was informed about their opponent''s team. Sam and his team also look at the name of their opponents. It was Mayuri college. With Royal Academy and Mayuri college, there were 20 more colleges in group A. Sam saw that there were 4 groups, and in every group, there were 20 teams. Also, one more thing was that only first-year teams will fight against the first year, so yea, 2nd year and the other year have their own opponent.


    Royal Academy and the Mayuri college weren''t the first to fight. They will fight in the 6th number. Also, Sam noticed one more thing: the organizer team didn''t put all the major colleges in the same group. Well, it was expected because no one wanted the major colleges to fight against each other this early. Also, the organizer''s team already prepared 4 different stages for the fight. So, at the same time, 4 teams'' fights could start.


    First, the first year will fight. Because of this, the 2nd year and the other year''s students were now resting in the waiting room. Well, they were focusing on the tv that was showing the match.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Right, the teacher is already called the first 8 teams on the stage. So, two teams from every group were going toward the stage. Instantly, everyone in the stadium begins to p for those students. Group A, group B, group c, and group D, for this group the four battle rings, were already prepared, and right now everyone was waiting for the team captain to send their first teammate into the battle ring.


    Right now, from the waiting room, Sam and his friends are focusing on the battle ring where the two teams from group A will fight. Well, it was better to know about your opponent that you will fight in the future.


    Sometimeter,


    Both of the teams send their first teammate into the battle ring that will fight each other. Not only this to the team, but the other team from the other group also sends their first teammate into the battle ring.


    ____________


    "Ladies and gentlemen, it looks like all the team has already decided to send their teammate to the battle ring. So, let''s not waste any more time and start the battle!!!!" Instantly the announcer gives the signal to all the students to start first. Instantly you can hear many cheering voices from the crowd. Wasting no time, all those students begin to fight each other without holding back anything. For thispetition, they were preparing for and because of this, no one wanted to lose.


    ___________


    40 minutester,


    One team from the group already got 5 wins and because of this, they became the winner in this match. Well, you have to say that it was a very tough match. Well, this team was able to get 5 wins, but their opponent was also able to get 3 wins. Because of this, you cannot say that the opponent was weak. Well, not only teams from group A but sometimeter, those other groups also have their winner. Right now, all the audience once again begins to p and cheer for the winning team. Those teams who lost in this fight did need to worry because they still had one more chance before elimination.


    After that, all those teams left the battle ring and went toward the medical tent. The medical team is already ready to check their health so that they once again recover to their peak stage. On the other hand, the next group of fighters had alreadye to the stage, and they were already ready to fight.


    ______________


    2 hourster,


    Right now, the first-year team from the Royal Academy was going toward the battle ring. Sam was leading his team while going to at the battle ring. Not only the Royal Academy but the Golden dawn and also the white Tiger also going toward the battle ring. Most likely, the organized team set the match like this, all the major teams will fight at the same time in different battle rings.


    The moment there enters the field, all the crowds in the stadium be crazy. Right now, you can even hear your voice properly in front of this cheering. Some people hear about the Royal Academy while some people cheer for the other Academy. It was expected because the Royal Academy, the Golden dawn, and the White Tiger were the three kings. Now everyone present in the stadium was very excited to know the power of the three kings. Well, at this time, the opponents of these three kings were in a tough spot. Those teams are now feeling the pressure, but that doesn''t mean they were giving up. Every other college just has one goal in its mind: that they need to defeat The Three kings.


    Sam already decided to send Saara to the battle ring first. After looking at the opponent''s team, he could tell that they will also send their weak teammate at first to observe the power of their opponent. Well, you cannot say that Saara was weak. Compared to her opponent, she was strong. Right now both of them waiting for the signal to battle start.


    __________To be continued_______

 Chapter 254 254 - Start Of The Competition (2)

    Saara instantly created water spears and shot toward her opponent. Her opponent after seeing those water spears tried to dodge them, but Saara was faster than her opponent. Those water spears suddenly turned around in the mid-air and went toward her opponent. Well, it was her new move. Right now, she can also control the water spears in mid-air and with that, she could easily hit her enemy. Well, also her opponent wasn''t that first and because of this, she could easily move those water spears toward her opponent.


    "Boom!!!" Instantly, those Spears hit the opponents, and it also created a loud noise. At this time, Sam and the others were focusing on the battle ring. Everyone was now waiting to know the result because of this, they were focusing on the battle ring.


    Sometimeter, everyone saw the opponent of Saara was now unconscious andying down on the battle ring. Instantly, the referee came to the battle ring, and with him, the medical team also entered the battle ring. The medical team takes away the unconscious student, while the referee announces Saara as the winner.


    Instantly, Everyone began to cheer for her. Royal Academy also had its cheering team. They were now cheering for Saara. Saara with a smile gets down from the battle ring. Well, she was happy that she didn''t waste any time, and instantly finished her opponent as quickly as she could.


    _________


    "Wow, Saara!! That was nice. Suddenly those water spears changed their direction and went toward the opponent. Your opponent didn''t even expect that. Just looking at his face, anyone can tell how shocked he was. Really it was a great fight." At this time Tony suddenly came to her and said all of this. Normally, he was very happy for Saara. Not only Tony but the others also came toward Saara and said their congrattions.


    After that Dam went toward the battle ring. Instantly, once again the cheering team from the royal Academy began to cheer for him. But Dan at this didn''t maintain a serious expression. His opponents were also in the battle ring. Both of them already bring out their weapons and now look at each other.


    Dan was already ready with his bow to continuously attack his opponent. Like the spiritual Warrior, he also had weaknesses when he fought closebat and because of this, he needed to finish his opponent as quickly as he could. On the other hand, his opponent was using a sword. So, you can say Dan has the advantage when they will fight from a distance.


    The referee gives them the signal to fight. Instantly the opponent began to approach Dan and but Dan wasn''t slow. He instantly began to shoot arrows toward him continuously. Even though his attack power and speed weren''t as good as Sam''s but still, it was enough for him to handle his opponent.


    In front of these many arrows, his opponent was now trying to protect himself. Dan didn''t give him any chance to get close to him. He was already able to hit his opponent two times. Those two arrows already did their work and he can see right now the movement of his opponent getting slower and his opponent once again got hit by his arrows.


    _____________________


    "Tony¡­.. Tony¡­ Tony," right all the audience who wrote supporting the royal Academy began to cheer for Tony. He was thest member of his team that will fight for today''sst match. Well, he doesn''t need to fight because they already have 7 wins in their favor but still, he wanted to fight. Sam and Alexa decided that they won''t be fighting today.


    Not only the Royal Academy but the audience were also supporting the golden Dawn and white tiger. Both of the colleges also have 7 wins in their favor and now like the royal Academy, they also send theirst member into the battle ring. Sam and the others were focusing on their battle ring and because of this, they didn''t pay attention to them.


    Now back to the main fight, Tony is already in the battle ring.


    "I like your team''s attitude. Even after losing this many matches you still didn''t give up. My teammates and I respect that." He said to his opponent. Right, the captain of the opposing team''s captain came to the battle ring. After hearing Tony''s words, his respect for the Royal Academy increased. From the start, they know it will be tough to win against the Royal Academy but still, they give their 100% in their fight. But, even after giving their 100%, they were unable to win. Because of this, they thought People from the Royal Academy would mock them, but after hearing Tony''s words his respect increased.


    "I really appreciate that. I will give my 100% in this fight. So try to hold back or underestimate me." He said to Tony.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Hearing him Tony just smiled and said,


    " Don''t worry. I never underestimate my opponent," after saying that both of them were waiting for the referee''s signal. Well, it didn''t take that much longer and the referee gave them the signal to fight.


    Instantly, both of the warriors approach each other with their swords. Both of them approach each other. You can say that none of them are holding back. Both of them use their strongest moves. You guess it right Tony was using his strongest moves, which means he also used the spirit technique while using his sword technique. His opponent also uses the spirit technique while using his sword technique. But if you look at his opponent then you will notice that he still didn''t have mastery over this technique. Both of their swords were covered in blue rays butpared to Tony, the spiritual energy that covered his sword wasn''t that strong enough.


    Both of them sh against each other. Instantly an explosion appears on the battle ring. Because of this explosion you cannot see anything, and this created ayer of smoke. Everyone now excitedly was focusing on the battleground. Even those other college teams also focus on that battleground. Golden Dawn and white Tiger Academy had already finished their battle and because of this, they were focusing on the Royal Academy''s battle ring. Both the college team didn''t meet any opponents who can use the spirit technique and because of this, they also focused on this battle ring.


    It did take some time for the smoke to fade away. When the smoke faded away only then everyone could see the result. They can say that Tony was still standing while his opponent was nowying down on the ground unconsciously. Also, if you look at Tony right then you can say that his Armor was damaged. But still, he wasn''t injured.


    "Yes!!!! Tony¡­ Tony¡­ Tony," instantly everyone in the audience began to cheer for Tony. At this time, the referee and the medical teams also came to the battle ring. The medical team after checking the unconscious Student''s condition and then they take away him from the battleground. His condition wasn''t that serious, he was only exhausted from his spiritual energy and he was slightly injured.


    Tony thanked everyone in the audience and then left the battle ring. Tony greeted everyone. Sam and the others congratted him and then all of them left the field. Today their match was finished so they can go back to their waiting room. So, all of them were now approaching their waiting room. Well, it will take some more time to finish the first year''s match. Only then the 2nd year''s match will start.


    ___________


    After 10 matchester, Sam and his teams were going toward the cafeteria. Well, finally the match of the first year was finished. Previously they didn''t go to the cafeteria because they wanted to watch all the matches to know about their opponents. Also, those losing teams from the first year will have one more chance to fight. But this rule is only for the first year. So, the 2nd year and the other year''s team will ideally get disqualified if they lose their match. Because of this, you can say thatpared to the 1st year the other year was very serious about their match. They won''t be held back in their first match.


    ___________


    "Well, the 2nd years were very serious. Well, it was natural. I also hear that the Golden Dawn and the white Tiger Academy also have strong 2nd year teams. Compared to them I don''t know how powerful our 2nd year was. But I hope they win their match." At this time while eating Tony suddenly said that. Hearing him everyone also agreed with him.


    "Well, I don''t know. Even though some of the seniors could lose their match, I have confidence that not everyone was like them. So, I don''t think it was easy to take down the Royal Academy''s 2nd-year teams." Sam suddenly said that. Everyone nodded after hearing him.


    ___________To be continued___________


    [A/N: Hey guys, this and the previous chapter still not edited fully. If you find any mistake do tell me. Guys, I also found a editor. She will start editing for somedayster.]

 Chapter 255 255 - March Between 3rd Years

    Well, the first year''s match almost needed 20 hours to finish and because of this, the organization team told everyone that once again the match will start 10 hourster. They wanted to give the time for everyone to get rest. Well, in the annual collegepetition, this is normal for one-day continuous matches to happen. All those in the audience that went to the stadium also know that.


    10 hourster,


    Once again, people starteding to the stadium after resting for 10 hours. 5 minutester the match started and because of this before that, everyone wanted toe to the stadium. Sam and his friends were also present at the stadium. Well, today they did not have their match and because of this they just came here to watch their senior match.


    5 minutester,


    Once again, the match started and the announcer already told the 8 teams toe to the battle ring. They also did not need to waste much more time because the referee also gave them the signal to fight and like this, the fight between the second years finally started. Sam, his friends, and all the students from the first year were also present in the stadium to support their college. Also, as you know, if any team loses in this match, then it will be the final and their team won''t be able to advance. Because of this, from the first match, everyone was fighting very seriously.


    ______________________


    You can say that at least 20 hourster the match finished. At this time, you can see that 10 teams and their supporters left the stadium dejectedly because these 10 teams were unable to advance and because of this, they were sad. But still, their supporters supported them and also pped for them so that they could ovee this. All those 10 teams also show their respect for those supporters.


    Sam and his friend also were leaving the stadium. Well, the Royal Academy was able to advance to the next match and, because of this, none of them were sad. The second year from the Royal Academy shows their opponent their dominating form. From the first to thest, they dominate their opponents without holding anything back. Not only the Royal Academy but also the Golden dawn and the white Tiger also show their dominating form to their opponents. All these three colleges one second shows everyone why they were the three kings.


    "Well, I am very surprised that,pared to the previous inter-collegepetition, our seniors have already be very powerful. Most likely trained very hard for thispetition. Well, not that I care about that because like us everyone is also practicing for that, but most likely someone from the second year once again challenges Sam if they did not like Sam. Haha," Tony said while he started tough. Well, hearing his words, others also begin tough.


    "Well, I don''t think so. They will challenge Sam. They were busy with their own thing and I was busy with my own thing. So I don''t think anyone from the seniors will challenge me and also they already break through while I still did not break through. So I don''t think that they will challenge me," at this time Sam said to them.


    " I also support some of this because I also don''t think that the senior will challenge him. They are Warriors and we have the pride that we cannot use our power against weak Warriors. We Warrior wasn''t like the warrior from the dark association and because of this, I also don''t think so the senior will challenge him. Well, this could only happen when some also break through to the next grade." Alexa said this to them.


    " Chill guys¡­ I am only joking. Why are you getting serious? " At this time Tony said to them. After hearing his word, Sam and the others looked at each other, and then they started tough.


    " Well, forget about that. I was very excited about the next match. Sister Gloria''s team will fight in this match. Now the question is, will sister Fiona and sister Gloria take part in the first match? Because I don''t think they needed to take part in the first match because the opponent will be weaker than them and Sam already told us that sister Gloria didn''t like to show up her power against a weak opponent." At this time, Elena said that.


    " I also think that sister Gloria and sister Fiona only participated in the first match." Jeni also nodded, hearing Elena.


    _______________


    10 hourster,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Finally, the match once again started. For today''s match, the 3rd year will participate in this match. Compared to the other day, you can see the number of people in the stadium also increased. Well, actually everyone was excited to know the power of the 3rd year students. When these third-year students were in the first year, they already showed everyone how powerful they were and now, after bing the third year, the audience wanted to know their power.


    Sam and his teams were also present at the stadium. Fortunately, they came early and because of this, they will get free seats. Nobody wanted to miss this match.


    Sometimeter all the people are able to see in which number which colleges will fight against each other. Royal Academy, Golden Dawn, and the white Tiger Academy will fight in the 8-number match. Sometimeter, the referee once again gave the signal to start the fight.


    ________________


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, the Royal Academy was fighting their opponent. Gloria already sends her teammates to fight their opponents. He was able to sessfully defeat his opponent and then return from the battle ring. After that, Gloria sent Salina to the battle.


    Salina nodded toward them and then approached the battle ring. Her opponent was also already present in the battle ring. Like her, her opponent also was a spiritual warrior. So you can say that this will be her and then go toward her opponent. Her opponent was also already ready to face that and because of this he instantly created a sand wall in front of him. You guessed that right, her opponent was able to use the sand control technique.


    At first, Salina''s opponent was all ready to attack her with his sand control technique, but she did not give him any chance and instantly attacked him with five blue fire balls. Because of this, her opponent only focused on the wall. At this time Salina once again created a blue fireball, but then that blue fireball instantly turned into a purple fireball. You guessed it right that she was using the spirit technique to increase the level of her fire control.


    Wasting no time, she quickly shot her opponent with that. At this time, her opponent had already built a big sand wall in front of him to defend himself. That Wall has almost 10yers of sand. But still, that purple fireball instantly burned thoseyers one by one while the sand started to melt.


    Her opponent at first thought that he could defend himself from her purple fire, but right now he knows that he was wrong and because of this, he quickly uses his sand control to get away from that ce. The moment he got away from his ce, that ce was instantly hit by that purple fireball. That fireball instantly destroyed that area and made a hole in the area. You can imagine how powerful this purple fire bowl was because the organization team already makes your dad nobody able to destroy the battle ring that easily, but her purple fireball already made a hole in that battle ring.


    At this time,


    Salina''s opponent quickly attacked her with sand. But she instantly created a firewall in front of her. After seeing that, her opponent has a smile on his face. Because from the start, his main motive wasn''t to attack her, but he only wanted to spread his sand on the battle ring. After that, he quickly made a fist in his hand. Instantly, all the sand was going toward Salina, and, wasting no time, quickly used his powerful sand prison technique. Using this technique, he was able to cover Salina with sand while she wouldn''t able to react.


    When he was able to cover her with his sand, everyone present in the stadium, even the referee, also thought that Salina would lose this match and because of this, he was about to go toward the battle ring. But suddenly the temperature around that area began to rise. Only then everyone saw that the sand that covered Salina from head to toe started to melt.


    Her opponent tried to send more sand to that sand prison but still, he did not receive any result. The sand started to melt. Only then did everyone know what was happening inside that sand prison. They saw that Salina at this time was covered by firewalls from every direction. Well, actually when she was about to be caught in that sand prison she instantly created firewalls around her and with that the sand wasn''t able to reach her.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 256 256 - Fight

    Salina finally defeated her opponent. Instantly, the audience cheered for her. This was a really impressive match. Both of the opponents have their 100% in this fight and finally, Salina defeated her opponent. Salina looked at the audience and then said thanks to them for their support. It wasn''t like that she wasn''t injured, butpared to her opponent, she was slightly injured. Also, one more thing was that her opponent wasn''t good at using the spirit technique, and also because of this, she easily won this fight.


    At this time Gloria, Fiona, and the others say congrattions to her. After that, Gloria sent James toward the battle ring. You will be thest Fighter from the 3td year''s batch. Salina currently was the 4th position holder, while James still was the 3rd position holder in the top 10 list from 3td year. With that, you can easily tell that she really improved herself. But it doesn''t mean that James did not improve, but in front of Gloria and Fiona he could not win and because of this, he was still the third position holder.


    James, with a serious expression, was going toward the battle ring. His only goal was to finish the fight as quickly as he could because he could easily feel that he was stronger than his opponent. But it does not mean that he was underestimating his opponent. Well, from his experience, he never underestimated his opponent, even though the opponent was weak. Those weak people knew they were weak, and because of this, sometimes they prepared a trump card that could also defeat stronger opponents. Because of this, James really wanted to finish the fight as quickly as he can so that his opponent won''t be able to use any trump card against him.


    _________________


    5 minutester,


    The referee came to the battle ring and finally announced the name of the winner. As you can guess, James was the winner. His opponent gets the chance tond any hit. For 5 minutes, James waspletely focused on attacking his opponent and sending him outside of the battle ring or making him unconscious. In front of this continuous attack, his opponent was unable to react, and finally got sent outside of the battle ring. Right now, the medical team was bringing that student toward their tent. Right now, if you look at this student, then you can see various scratches and crack marks on his arm and he is also bleeding from his hand. But fortunately those injuries weren''t that serious.


    The moment James wins the fight, all the audience that supports the Royal Academy begins to cheer for him. After they get to know the power of James, all of them are very interested in knowing the power of Gloria and Fiona. But they know they won''t be able to get to know that today. When James went back to his waiting room, everyone in the audience began to wait for the next match.


    _______________


    "Really, senior Salina and senior James are powerful. Both of them haveplete mastery over the spirit technique and they could also use that technique using their various techniques. I really wanted to reach that level as quickly as I can." Kenny said that. Right now, she and her friends were at the cafeteria and they were eating food. 10 hourster The Final Fight of the fourth year will start and after that, the real match will begin. Right now, all of these matches are elimination matches. Only teams who win this elimination match will be able to advance to the next match.


    "Not only you, but I also wanted to reach that mastery in Spirit technique. Senior Salina could easily use the spirit technique and change the nature of her fireballs. I and Elina could use the spirit technique, but we did not have that much mastery over that technique. Just imagine how tough it was to master the technique, but those third-year seniors could easily use the spirit technique. With that, you can imagine how much experience they have." Jeni said this. After watching the 3rd year seniors match right now, she was very motivated to train harder. Not only she but the others were also very motivated to train hard because they also wanted to reach that master level where they could use the spirit technique very easily.


    _________________


    ___________


    2 dayster,


    "Ladies and gentlemen. Thanks for your patience. As you know, every year we have this elimination match and only the team who qualifies in this elimination match is able to advance to the next match. 1st year to 4th year, every year students work very hard and they give their all in their match. We are really proud of them because in the future we will have strong Warriors that will defend humanity from monsters. Please, everyone, p for our Warriors," a teacher at this time said all of this to the audience. After hearing that person, everyone present in the audience begins to p for those students who qualify for the next match.


    "The next match will be different from the normal team battle. Previously, you saw that every team had to send their 8 warriors to the battle ring to fight their opponent. But from now on from every team, just one person coulde to the battle ring and could challenge the opponent team''s students. Like the previous match, you also need to have 5 wins in your team to qualify for the next match." The teacher told everyone about the rules of the next match and after hearing that you can say that you ept those first years. The other did not have that much reaction, but after hearing that, the first year was very exciting.<novelnext></novelnext>


    If they could only just send one Warrior and that Warrior could defeat the 5 wins from the opponent team, then the referee would announce the name of that Warrior group in the next match.


    _______________


    Sometimeter, the referee already told the first-year students to get ready. Because they will be fighting at first and after that, like the previous day, those other year students will fight.


    From the first year, 15 teams will fight against each other while from the second year and the other year students, only 10 teams will fight against each other. Because of this, the referee told the first year to get ready because it will take some time.


    Sam and his teammates were also in their waiting room and they were waiting for the announcer to release their position, in which number they will fight. Right now everyone was looking toward the Sometimeter, the organizer team finally decided the position of those colleges will be fighting and they quickly released that. Royal Academy and the other two kings will fight in the 9th position. At this time, the referee already called the first 8 teams into the battle ring.


    _________


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, it was time for the Royal Academy to fight. Sam and his teammates were going toward the battle ring. Before going to the battle ring, he already decided to send Dan first in the battle ring. So, wasting no time, Dan just started going toward the battle ring. Aftering to the battle ring, he and his opponent only looked at each other and waited for the referee to give them the signal to fight. Also, one more thing was that suppose only one Warrior was fighting the third opponent from the other college, but at this time, if that warrior suddenly wanted to give up or the team leader wanted to change the warrior then it would count as a loss.


    "Began," the referee did not waste any more time and gave them the signal to fight. Dan starts the battle with arrows raining toward his opponent. At this time, his opponent was in a spiritual area, and because of that, he knew that his opponent could use the long-distance spell toward him. Because of this, he did not want to give any chance to his opponent and because of this, he just continued shooting arrows toward his opponent.


    Dan''s opponent was a water spell user. But in front of these arrows get the chance to create a water wall. Right now, he was searching for a chance to create a water wall that could protect him because those arrows were really giving him damage.


    Dan was unable to continuously shoot arrows because sometimeter, he was now out of arrows. This was the chance his opponent was searching for. Instantly, his opponent created water spears and threw them toward him. Dan quickly jumped away from his ce.


    Right now, if you look at Dan''s opponent, then you can see that he was now bleeding after getting hit by all those arrows. But even after getting hit by all those arrows, he has the strength to attack Dan. But Dan also wasn''t slow. Right now, he was using his telekinesis technique to gather the arrows.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 257 257 - Fight (2)

    "Well, right now, because of the speed technique, you have a good control over your spiritual energy. You can now try to learn the telekinesis technique. It doesn''t matter if the technique was a low grade or a high grade. In your matter, this technique will be very helpful because using the technique, you can collect all of your Arrow once again. I also use this technique to collect my arrows and then use them once again." This was the suggestion that Sam gave to Dan previously. Dan, also hearing that suggestion, decided to learn that technique. He did not learn any high-grade technique, but it was just a D-grade technique. But this was enough for him to collect all of his arrows once again.


    Currently on the battle ring,


    Dan was dodging his opponent''s attack while using the telekinesis technique to collect his arrows. It will take him some time to collect all those Arrows and because of this, his opponent gets the chance to attack him continuously. But Dan also has good speed and because of this, he was dodging all those water spears. Also, one more thing he noticed was that those water spears weren''t that fast like Saara''s. Also, because of this, he was able to dodge all those water spears.


    At this time, all the audience and all the students from the Royal Academy also saw the fight between him and his opponent. Right now, all of them can see that Dan was collecting his arrows while dodging those water spears. At first, when they saw that he was out of Arrow, they thought that most likely he would be defeated by his opponent, but then he showed them he could use the telekinesis technique to collect his arrows. This once again brings excitement to those audiences. Actually, this was a prettymon problem for all the archers; they became very valuable when they were out of arrows.


    "Nice. Dan was doing great. Also, I noticed that those water spears weren''t as fast as Saara''s. It was a very good thing that he was also already able to use telekinesis techniques and able to collect all those arrows. It was just a matter of time before Dan will once again start to attack his opponent," at this time after watching the match Tony suddenly said that. Alexa and the others also agree with him because they could see that Dan was easily dodging those attacks.


    "Well, this was themon problem for the archers that they needed a huge supply of arrows. But using this type of technique, we can collect all those used Arrow once again and use them. But really, if there was any technique that would help us create an arrow, then no Archer would face this kind of situation. Well, it was good that Dan not only focused on his shooting practice, but he also focused on his speed." at this time, Sam said.


    ________


    Sometimeter,


    Dan already collected all those arrows and once again started his rain of arrows toward his opponent. He just continuously started to shoot his arrows toward his opponent. His opponent also tried to shoot his water Spears, but the speed of those Arrows was faster than those of water Spears, and because of this, his opponent once again started to get hit by those arrows. Well, Dan also did not need to continue his attack because sometimeter, after receiving this much damage, his opponent finally became unconscious.


    Right now, the medical team brings his opponent out of the battle ring while the referee announces the name of the winner in this match. After that, the referee also asked Dan if he wanted to continue the fight.


    After hearing the referee''s question, Dan thought for some time and then told him that he did not want to continue. Because most likely his other opponent will try to defend themselves and wait for the chance when he will be out of Arrow. Only then they will attack him and this could make him lose the match. Because of this, Dan did not want to continue the match.


    Dan was now going toward his waiting room while in the stadium. Those audience members began to p for him and also to cheer for him. Even though he did not continue with his match, he was a powerful warrior and the audience respected that.


    When he came to the waiting room, Tony and the others came to him and said congrattions to him. They also were surprised by his decision, but then they supported him because he did not make any reckless decision that could bring shame to his team and college.


    At this time Tony and the others said good luck to Kira. She will be going to the battle ring next. Kira just smiled and then, with full confidence, she started going toward the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    The moment those in the audience noticed that it was Kira who would be fighting next, they instantly became very excited and began to cheer once again. She already previously showed them her power and because of this, everyone was very excited when they noticed her.


    She and her opponent came to the battle ring at the same time and then started to get serious. Right now, both of them are looking at each other with serious faces. The referee also did not waste any more time and quickly signaled for them to fight.


    The moment Kira got the signal, using her full speed, she approached her opponent. Compared to Kira, her opponent was quite slow, and Kira used this weakness of his opponent to defeat him. She just continues to attack her opponent from every direction. Her opponent wasn''t even able to block all those attacks, and he was getting hit by all those attacks.


    Kira''s opponent did not realize, but while getting hit by her attack, he was going toward the edge of the battle ring. When he was very close to the edge only then he realized but it was toote to do anything. Kira, at this time, swings her sword toward his opponent with her full power and that sends her opponent outside of the battle ring.


    After watching this match, those audiences instantly became very excited and then began to cheer for her. Everyone was very excited after seeing how easily and fast Kira defeated her opponent. She did that without receiving any hit from her opponent. With this, she once again showed everyone how powerful she was.


    At this time, the referee and the medical team quickly came to the battle ring. The medical team quickly brings her injured opponent into the medical tent while the referee announces her name as the winner of the match. Also like previously, the referee asked her if she wanted to continue with the battle. Kira did not think that much and instantly agreed with the referee, because right now she didn''t even use her full power and because of this she was in a great condition to fight more students.


    When all those in the audience heard she wanted to continue with the battle, they once again began to cheer for her. Kira just smiled at them and she once again focused on the opponent team. They were sending their next teammate to the battle ring. Kira was looking at her opponent very seriously.


    _________


    Instantly, one Kira suddenly became 3 Kira, and not only that but all those three Kira''s swords begin to glow in blue color. She did not waste any more time and quickly attacked her opponent. Right now, this was her most powerful move. She was facing her third opponent right now while using her full power becausepared to his other opponent, this opponent was very powerful and because of this, she was using her ultimate move to finish her opponent. Right now, both she and her opponent were injured, and Kira wanted to finish this match with her ultimate move.


    Her opponent tried to defend himself from her attack but in the end, that attack was so powerful that it made him bleed from his mouth and also made him unconscious. At this time, the medical team and the referee quickly came to the battle ring. The medical team, wasting no time, quickly began to check her and her opponents'' condition. Right now you can see that both of their armors were damaged and both of them were also injured.


    Medical team members quickly use the healing Ray spell toward her and that quickly helps her to recover from her injury. At this time, the referee once again announced her name as the winner of this match and then he also asked her if she wanted to continue with the battle. But this time Kira directly said that she did not want to continue with the battle because right now she knows her condition and she knows that she won''t be able to beat her next opponent. Because of this, when her condition was stable, she left the battle ring and started going toward her waiting area.


    All the audience and the cheering team of the Royal Academy begin to cheer for her. She was really a great warrior, and she already shows everyone how powerful she is right now.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 258 258 - Quarter Final

    Sam and his friends were going toward the cafeteria. Some time ago they finished their match and right now because it was free time they are going to the cafeteria. Right now, in the first year, only 8 more teams were left. They will have their quarter-final match some dayster. After that, they will have their semi-final and finally the final match. But before the quarter-final match, the organized team told everyone that they will have 2 days to prepare for the quarter-final.


    Sometimeter, the match between the second year will also start, so before that same and his friends wanted to finish their food as quickly as they can so that they did not miss the match between their second year.


    ______________


    2 dayster,


    Today is the final match between the groups. It means who will be the winner in their group will be decided today. From group A, the Royal Academy and the Tyru Academy will fight against each other and only one team will be the winner of group A. Like this group B to group D will have their winner. Also, one more thing was that only the first year will be fighting today because the other year will be resting today. The fight will be starting at 1:00 p.m. Before that, everyone was busy preparing.


    Right now it was only 12 p.m. so you can set that as 1 hour before the match starts. Right now, Sam and his teammates were in the training room. Well before the match, they wanted to decide which teammates they will send into the battle ring today. From their team, only Sam and Alexa still did not participate in the match. Like them from the Golden Dawn, James and Aliya still didn''t participate in any match, while from the white Tiger Gustav and Pijus didn''t participate in any match.


    Also, one more thing was that James was the captain of Golden Dawn''s first-year team and Aliya was the vice-captain while Gustav was the captain of the white tiger and Pijus was the vice-captain. So in today''s match, the audience wanted to know if those captains and vice-captain will participate in this match or not. Everyone was really interested to know the power of the captain and vice-captain of these three kings.


    ___________


    " Tyru Academy was also a strong Academy. Because the captain and the vice-captain are early D-grade warriors. Also, the main thing was that both of them could use the spirit technique." Right now, Sam was telling everyone about their opponents. Tony and the others were listening to his exnation right now.


    "Well, I think I should participate in this match. Today is the quarter-final match and if the captain in the vice-captain still did not participate in the match, then the Academy will think that we are very arrogant." At this time, while Sam was telling them about the opponent team, Alexa said this to him.


    After hearing her words, everyone also agrees with her. Really, if the captain and vice-captain still did not participate in the quarter-final match, then it would really show everyone that they were very arrogant.


    "Well, I don''t have any problem with that, so then it is decided that Alexa will participate in this match and she will fight from the start tost. We should show everyone the power of our Royal Academy so that nobody will underestimate us. Also, I think you already know that the dark association already puts bounties on our heads, so we should also show those people how powerful we are so that beforeing at us, they think twice. Not only the dark association they are will be many people from the information guilt will be present in this match. Because of this, I wanted Alexa to participate in this match from first tost." At this time, Sam suddenly announced his n to them. After hearing his n, none of them have any objection so it was finally decided that only Alexa will participate in today''s match.


    ______________


    1:00 p.m.,


    Right now, if you look at the stadiums, then you can see that today all the stadiums were full of peoplepared to the other days. Today was the quarter-final of the first year and because of this, everyone was very excited about it. Today they were expecting that from those three King colleges, their captain or their vice-captain will participate in their match. Right now the organization team already told everyone that the second-year to the 4th year students will have four days'' rest before their quarter-final. Because of this, right now everyone was excited to see the match of the first-year students.


    At this time, the head announcer already announced that it was time for the battle.


    "Hello everyone. I know that everyone was very excited about today''s match because today was the most important match before the semi-final and final match. So, wasting no time, let''s wee our teams in the battle ring." When the announcer said that, every team began to walk toward the battle rings.


    "Before starting the match, I want every captain in the vice-captain from your team to pleasee forward. I want every audience to cheer and p for them." When that announcer says that, the audience begins to p for them and they also begin to cheer for them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _____________


    Sometimeter it was decided that group D, will be the first one to fight. In group D, the Eagle academy and the Neptune academy will be fighting against each other. Those audiences once again pped for these two academies. This academic sent their first teammate into the battle ring. Just looking at them, you can tell that they are very serious about this match and none of them wanted to lose this match. They will give their 100% to win this match and qualify for the semi-final.


    The referee did not waste any more time and finally gave them the signal to fight. Instantly, both of the teams begin to fight. Without holding back anything, they were fighting to win this match.


    Right now, the other academies were also looking at them. When those other students saw how seriously both of the teams were fighting, it instantly created a strong will to fight. Those students just really wanted toe to the battle ring and wanted to fight. Right now, even Sam and his friends are looking at the fight.


    ______________.


    Most likely, the Golden Dawn and the white Tiger Academy also decided to send their vice-captain in today''s match.


    It takes some time to finish the height between these two academies. But finally, we have the winner. It was Neptune Academy who was able to win this match. But don''t underestimate Eagle Academy, because the Neptune Academy was very close to giving up. Previously they already lost four matches and if the opponent Academy wins one more time from them, then they will be unable to participate in this match. But fortunately, their captain was powerful and because of him they won this match and they were qualified to fight in the next match.


    __________


    Sam, Alexa, and the others needed to wait. Because before their fight, group B and group C will fight, and because of this, group A will fight in the end. So you can say that right now all of them were watching the match between group B. In group B, the Golden Dawn was fighting their opponent.


    Well, the first three matchester, Sam and the others finally met someone familiar that was going toward the battle ring. She was Aliya. Sam met her previously when he was giving the College entrance examination. Not only she but James, Pijus, and Gustav, he is also familiar with these 3 people. Previously in group C''s fight, Pijush participated because he was the vice-captain and right now Aliya also participated because she was the vice-captain.


    "Most likely our decision is correct because every other college is sending their vice-captain to the battle ring." After seeing this, Sam suddenly said this to everyone. Hearing him, everyone nodded.


    After that, all of them once again focused on the battle ring. They all wanted to know how powerful she was right now.


    ____________


    Aliya came to the battle ring and focused on her opponent. She was the vice president, and she knew she needed to show her power to everyone. Because of this, the moment the referee gives them the signal to fight, holding nothing back, she attacks her opponent.


    Only 30 secondster, her opponent was already outside of the battle ring. After seeing this instantly, the audience begins to shout her name. In just one match, she showed everyone how powerful she was. Well, after that, one by one, those other opponents came to the battle ring, and she defeated them one by one and also as quickly as she could. Right now, she was facing the vice president of her opponent''s team. Both of them continuously attacked each other.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 259 259 - Quarter Final (2)

    "Aliya¡­ Aliya¡­ Aliya." Right now, everyone in the audience was cheering for her when she finally defeated her final opponent. She single-handedly defeated five opponents and with this, she proved to everyone how strong she was. Right now, everyone was cheering for her and also pping for her. Those students from Golden Dawn also cheered for her. All those students are proud of their vice captain. They were proud of their vice captain.


    Sometimeter,


    When the construction team already repaired the battle ring, one person once again begin to announce,


    "What a great match presented by the vice captain of Golden Dawn. Even though she was a first year and she was a girl, she showed everyone that you cannot underestimate her. In just 1st year, she became a powerhouse. This wasn''t easy for anyone to win against 5 powerful opponents. But she showed us that it was possible.." When that person finishes saying that everyone in the audience once again begins to p.


    "I know that everyone is now waiting for thest match. So let''s waste no more time and start our final match between the Royal Academy and Tyru Academy."


    At this time, both of the Academy''s teams enter the field. Even though Sam and the others only participated in this match, they will wait outside of the battle ring. At this time, all those in the audience weed them while pping.


    From the Tyru Academy, they send their first teammate in the battle ring. Right now, everyone was focused on Sam and the others. Now everyone wants to know who will be going toward the battle ring from the Royal Academy. They thought that Jeni, Elena, or Tony would go to the battle ring, but unexpectedly, it was Alexa who started walking toward the battle ring.


    Just after seeing this, all the 1st year students from the Royal Academy begin to cheer. Not long after that, all the audience also began to cheer. Compared to those other people, those students from the first year knew that after Sam, Alexa was the most powerful person. Sam was called the invisible monster, while Alexa was called the sword princess. Previously, many students challenged her, but she just dominated all those students with just one strike from her sword. No one from Challenger is able to make her serious and because of this like Sam, they also begin to avoid her.


    At this time, the Tyru Academy''s teammates were looking at Alexa. Right now, they were having a serious expressions on their face. They also don''t know the true strength of Alexa. The person who was in the battle ring was already panicking when he saw that his opponent was Alexa. He was mentally prepared to face Tony or the others, but he did not expect that his opponent would be Alexa. Sometimeter, when Alexa just entered the battle ring, his expression became very serious because he began to feel the pressure that wasing from her.


    ____________


    Alexa, after entering the battle ring, quickly brings out her sword. She did not want to show up and wanted to finish the fight as quickly as she could. Because of this, she already activates the spirit technique. Instantly her sword began to glow in blue color. Her opponent at this time was mentally preparing himself to face her, but when he noticed the blue glow in her sword, he once again began to panic.


    At this time, the referee did not waste any more time and quickly gave them the signal to fight. Alexa, wasting no time using her full speed, instantly appears in front of her opponent and quickly swings her sword toward her opponent. Her opponent wasn''t able to react in time and because of this, with just one strike, he was already outside of the battle ring. Previously, she did not expect that she woulde in front of him instantly and would also attack him. Because of this, he wasn''t ready to defend himself from her attack. But Alexa quickly came in front of him and then quickly attacked him. Only then he felt the power of her attack, but it was already toote to defend himself. The force behind the attack was so great that it instantly sent him outside of the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Instantly, all the audience began to cheer for her. They never thought that she would finish this match this quickly. Well, nobody was expecting that. This was really a very powerful move from her.


    The medical team went toward the student from Tyru Academy while her next opponent was going toward the battle ring. This time it was a girl who was going toward the battle ring. She also was a spiritual warrior, and she was preparing herself to face. She was thinking of a n in her mind to avoid Alexa''s powerful attack. She won''t react slowly and made the same mistake as her teammate.


    The moment that girl enters the battle ring, she begins to prepare her spell. She was a light element user, and she already created a light shield in front of her and also created light Spears that were ready to attack Alexa. But at this time, if you look at Alexa, then you can notice that she is still calm.


    The moment they got the signal from the referee, Alexa once again vanished from her ce. Instantly this alerts her opponent, but Alexa was already in front of her and also already sewing her sword toward her. In just one second, Alexa swung her sword five times. In front of this 5-powerful attack, her opponent''s shield wasn''t able to protect her. Itpletely broke into many pieces. Fortunately, she created that shield and was able to Jump away from there. But Alexa was faster than her and because of this, she already knew where her opponent went. She also used her full speed toe in front of her and once again attack her. Previously, her opponent was able to defend herself because of that light shield, but this time, she did not get the chance to create the light shield. Because of this, Alexa once again sends her opponent outside of the battle ring.


    Butpared to her previous opponent this time, this girl''s condition was badpared to the previous. Quickly the medical team went to her and quickly began to stabilize the wounds. Because of this powerful attack, she was also bleeding from her mouth while ying down on the ground unconsciously. The medical team brings her opponent into the medical tent, while the Tyru Academy''s team has already sent their next opening in the battle ring. Like the previous girl, he was also a spiritual warrior.


    _______________


    Right now Alexa was fighting the vice-captain of the Tyru Academy. The voice captain was also very fast, butpared to Alexa, he wasn''t fast. Right now, he is just barely dodging the attack from Alexa. Previously, he already received 7 to 8 attacks from Alexa, and you can see that his armor waspletely damaged. Suddenly Alexa swung towards him and instantly a blue sh was created by that and directly went toward him. He was very close to that attack and right now he knows that it was unable to dodge. Because of this, he tried to counter that attack. But in the end, he became unconscious. He tried to defend himself while attacking that blue sh, but that was aplete failure and while trying to defend himself, he also used almost all of his power and because of this right now, he became unconscious.


    The referee and the medical team came to the battle ring. After stabilizing his condition, the medical team brings the vice-captain out of the battle ring while the referee announces Alex as the winner of the match. Just after hearing that, all those audiences began to cheer for her. Because she already single-handedly defeated 7 of her opponents. Also, because of this right now, even she decided to not to fight The Last Fight, which won''t leave any effect on her team. The Royal Academy already became the winner in this match. But it seems that she wanted to fight The Final Fight. The captain of the Tyru Academy at this time came to the battle ring. He also knows that he won''t be able to defeat her, but he will use his 100% to fight with her.


    The referee quickly gave them the signal to fight. Instantly both of them quickly vanished from their ce. Both of them were using their full speed to approach each other. Aftering in front of each other, they quickly attack. The captain of the Tyru Academy also uses the spirit technique. Because of this, when both of their swords sh against each other, that instantly created an explosion. Also at this time, if you look you can see that the captain of the Tyru Academy already sent 10 steps backward while Alexa was still in her previous ce.


    ___________To be continued_________

 Chapter 260 260 - Quarter Final (3)

    "Boom!" Explosions appear on the battle ring. Everyone present in the stadium was looking at the battle ring to know the result of this match. You can say that it was a very tense moment. Everyone was silently looking at the battle ring.


    Sometimeter, when the smoke faded away, only then all those people were able to see the result. Right now, only Alexa was standing in the battle ring while her opponent was on the ground. He was lying down on the battle ring without any movement. For a moment, everyone thought that he was dead, but, at this time, the referee and the medical team entered the battle ring. The medical team quickly checked the condition of the student and after that told the referee that the student was only unconscious.


    All this time, the audiences were silent. Only when the referee told everyone that the student was unconscious and the winner of the match was Alexa, only then were those people begin to cheer loudly. Everyone was very excited after seeing Alexa''s power. Because of this, they were cheering for her. Right now, you can say that it was a very proud moment for the Royal Academy. The whole stadium was full of pping and cheering.


    Alexa smiled at the audience and also said thanks to them. After that, she begins to walk toward her team. Jeni, Elena, Kenny, Tina, Kira, and Saara quickly came in front of her and then hugged her. Sam, Tony, and Dan just smile at her and also show thumbs up to her. You can say that their mission was sessful because from the first they wanted to show everyone the power of the Royal Academy''s 1st-year team. After hearing those pping and cheering, everyone can tell that their mission was sessful.


    At this time, the announcer once again went to the battle ring.


    "Hello everyone. I know that everyone was very excited after watching our powerful students. I am also very excited to know that this year we have many powerful students that will be powerful Warriors and also will protect our humanity. Alexa was a really powerful girl. Royal Academy is really proud of Alexa. She single-handedly defeated it, Warriors, without getting seriously injured. I know that all of you are now very excited to know the power of the captain of the three kings. But unfortunately today we won''t be able to see the power of the captains. But don''t worry, 5 dayster, in the semi-final match, most likely those captains will also participate in the match, and in that match we would be able to see the power of the captains. But still, I want all of you to p for every team that participated in today''s match."


    "All those teams from the various colleges participated in this match to win this match. Even though many of them already got eliminated from the match, they always fight with their 100% in every match. Because of this, we also really cheer for those teams. Even when they faced powerful opponents, no one backed down or surrendered. They still decided to fight with their 100%. Even though they were unable to win the match, from this match, they got the experience and this experience was a very important thing. This battle experience could make any average fighter into a good fighter. I hope those teams who got eliminated from this match don''t get depressed. I know that they won''t get depressed because their willpower wasn''t weak. They will practice very hard and try to win the next year''s match. This is the most important thing. We should really appreciate that. "


    The person was from the organization team that organizes this annual collegepetition. After hearing his speech, everyone present in the audience begins to p for every team that participated in this annual collegepetition. Really, after hearing his speech, many students who were very depressed because they were unable to advance in this match, get their willpower back to fight once again. This time they were weak and, because of this, they got eliminated. But the next time they needed to improve, they were strong so nobody could eliminate them. Not only that, but when they also saw that the audiences were also pping and cheering for them, they really appreciated that.


    __________________


    "Really, what a great speech. It looks like even my willpower got increased after hearing this speech. Most likely next year we will be facing many powerful teams." After hearing the speech, Tonymented on that.


    "You aren''t wrong. Everyone will improve themselves and will be powerful. But we won''t be staying ideal. We also needed to work hard and improve ourselves so that we did not get eliminated." After hearing his words, Sam also said that.


    "Haha¡­ you are right. We all also won''t be staying ideal. We will also improve ourselves," Tony said with a smile. At this time, Alexa and the others just smiled after hearing all of this.


    ______________


    Sometimeter, everyone present in the stadium begins to leave the stadium one by one. For today the match was finished. But they did not need to worry because one dayter the second year would have their quarter-final match and the next day the 3rd year and again the next day would be the fourth year''s quarter-final match. So you can say that back-to-back full action. After all those quarter-final matches, all the teams get 5 days'' rest to prepare themselves for the semi-final and after the semi-final, they will once again get 3 days'' rest for the final. So you can say that there was still time for this annual collegepetition to finish.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _________________


    Sam and his friends were going toward the cafeteria. Hina and Vector also came to the stadium to watch the match of Royal Academy. Sam already informs them that he will go to the cafeteria with his friends.


    While going toward the cafeteria, Sam also got a call from his sister and also senior Fiona. Both of them congratted him for winning the match. Really, the 1st year Royal Academy''s team really performs well. Until now, they have just dominated their opponents from first tost. Not only that, even his teacher Alena also told him that it was a really beautiful fight.


    Sam told everyone that his teacher, his sister, and also sister Fiona congratted everyone. After hearing that, all of them are very proud. Because all three of them were the powerhouse of the Royal Academy and hearing congrattion from their mouth, really was a huge achievement.


    _____________________


    "My mom and dad were really happy. They also congratted us. They also said that if we win this match, they will arrange a party for everyone," at this time Tony suddenly said that after finishing talking with his family.


    "Haha¡­ my mom and dad also say the same thing," Elena also said.


    "We didn''t even win thepetition, but they were still proud of us. So right now we should make them more proud after winning thispetition. And for this, we need to work hard. Tomorrow we will rest, but the day after tomorrow we will once again start our training. Like that, we will train for 3 days continuously. We also need to analyze our next opponent''s power and weakness. They will also analyze our power and weakness." At this time Sam quickly told everyone what will be their routine for these 5 days. Even though they wille to the stadium to watch the match, after that, they will only focus on the training for 3 days.


    After hearing his words, everyone agrees with him. Right now, they know that the next opponent will be very powerful and because of this, they will train hard. Dan, Saara, and Kira know that they were the weakest member of their group. Even Kenny and Tina are also able to use the spirit technique, while the three of them were unable to use that. Because of this, right now they are very motivated to practice art. Well, it was natural because they just recently became early D-grade warriors, but still, if their friends were able to learn that technique that quickly, they have that trust in themselves that they will be able to learn that. But for that, they needed to work hard.


    ________________


    Right now, you can see 10 people are at a table. They were in a dark ce and, because of this, unable to see anything around. Also, all of them were wearing dark clothes and also wearing masks and because of this, you were also unable to recognize any of them. In the middle of the table, there was a candle. All those 10 people were discussing something. Nobody knows what they were discussing but if you look at their cloth and also if you look at the table then you can see in the center of the table there was a symbol, like the symbol that they have in their cloth. That symbols belong to the dark association. Also, one more thing was that only the founding members of the dark association used this symbol. Because of this, not everyone also knows about this symbol.


    _________To be continued______

 Chapter 261 261 - People From The Dark Association

    Sam was now going toward the battle ring. Today was the 2nd year''s quarter-final. Because of this, everyone was going toward the stadium one by one. Right now not only the people from the central city but also people from the other city are also going toward the stadium. Who wanted to miss this type of exciting match? While they were going toward the stadium,aaaa Sam also noticed many people from other colleges alsoe. Most likely those people came here to support their college.


    Sometimeter,


    The stadium was now full of people. Everyone was waiting for the match to start, but there was still some time before the match started.


    _____________


    While everyone was looking forward to watching the exciting match, there were three people wearing masks and also looking at the battle ring. Butpared to the other people, these three people were different. If right now anyone looks toward them with spiritual vision, then they will be able to see that these three people were releasing a dark aura from their bodies, and because of this those people who were sitting close to them, feel very chill. You guessed it right, these three people were the spy that the dark association sent. Their main goal was to observe all the students that will be participating in this match.


    If the warrior association gets to know about this, then it won''t take that much time to find out about this spy. But unfortunately, nobody knew that people from the dark association were here. Also, you can say that almost every year many spies from different associations came, also because of this the warrior association decided to ignore all of them. Most of the time, those spies, or you can say those people, came from various guilds. They came here to find genius students so that in the future they will invite those students to their guild.


    _______________


    10 minutester,


    The match has already begun. You can say that everyone present in the stadium was cheering for their favorite team. Because right now it wasn''t the fight of the Royal Academy, Sam and his friend were just silently watching this match. But at this time, unexpectedly, Sam noticed something.


    He noticed that three people not far away from him were behaving strangely. Previously, he felt that those three people were looking toward him, but instantly they shifted their focus to the match. At first he didn''t think anything about that, but he kept feeling that gaze. This made him very interested because don''t know why his instinct was telling him that those three people weren''t normal. Also, you know that Sam always believes in his instincts. Because of this, right now he focused on those three people.


    But still, those three people were from him and because of this, some instantly activated his spiritual vision. The moment he activated his spiritual vision, he got startled. Because when he looked at those three people, he installed them so that a dark aura surrounded those three people. He wasn''t able to remember where he saw this type of aura previously, but he just kept thinking about that. Not only did he notice the dark aura, but you also noticed that the people besides those three people were getting affected by that dark aura.


    Tony and the others at first didn''t notice his strange behavior, but suddenly Tony noticed that.


    "What happened Sam? What are you thinking about?" He asked Sam after seeing that Sam was busy in deep thinking.


    But he did not get any response from Sam because Sam was very busy in his thinking. Alexa and the others also noticed his strange behavior.


    Right now, you can say that Sam is unable to hear anything because he is fully focused on remembering where he previously saw that type of dark aura. Fortunately, the match between the Royal Academy and their opponent still hasn''t started.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter, Sam finally remembers where he saw that type of aura. He did not waste any more time and quickly brought out his phone and called Alena. Tony and the others were very startled by his behavior. They don''t know what happened and because of this, they were waiting for Sam to tell them.


    "Teacher, three people from the dark association are present in the stadium. Also, most likely they were A-grade or B-grade warriors. As you know, I have a spiritual vision. Using my spiritual vision, I was able to see the dark aura that wasing out of their body. I remember that previously when the warrior that attacked us in the college entrance examination had the same dark aura." Wasting no time, he quickly told all of this to his teacher. At this moment, all of his friends who were listening to him get very startled.


    At this moment, all of them were looking at Sam with questionable gazes. They wanted to know everything in detail. On the other hand, Alena, after hearing that, also gets very serious. She already knew that many people from various associations came to the annual collegepetition and she also suspected that the people from the dark association also came to thispetition, but they never found any trace of those dark association warriors. It was like those dark association Warriors were very alert.


    "Where are you? Don''t move from that ce. I will be there in a minute." She quickly hung up the call after saying that. Instantly she made a phone call and then she started to go toward Sam''s ce.


    _________


    After informing about his location, he finally hung up the phone. Only then did he notice the questionable gaze of his friends. Before telling them, he once again quickly looked in the direction where he saw those 3 people. Fortunately, those people were still there. Only then, Sam sighs in relief. Because there was a chance that those Warriors from the dark association already realize that people from the warrior association were after them. In that situation, they could also harm those other people and then escape.


    Sam, at this time, looks toward his friends and thenmunicates with them with his mind. He quickly exined to them all the details. Tony, Alexa, and the others were just listening to all the exnations and after they got to know about all the details, they were very startled. Sam already warns them not to make any suspicious move that would alert those three people. Also, one more thing was that those three people could also have many subordinates in this stadium and that would be very dangerous for all the people that were present in this stadium.


    Tony and the others nodded. They also know that if they made any suspicious move, that could harm the people. Fortunately, Sam already told him that he already informed his teacher and teacher Alena was alreadying here. But they are also something that is bothering Sam. What if those people also noticed his teacher and decided to act that time? But he decided to calm down because he has confidence in his teacher. So, he calmed down and focused on the match on the battleground. Right now the golden Dawn and their opponent were fighting each other. After that, the white tiger and at the end the Royal Academy will fight. So there was still time.


    ______________


    Right now, the vice-captain of the royal academy''s 2nd-year team, Lina, was fighting her opponent. Her opponent was the captain of the opposite team. So you can say that the second year also only sends their vice-captain to the battle ring to fight their opponent. Actually, they wanted to show all of them that they were also powerful like in their first year. You have to say that Lina was very powerful. She also single-handedly already defeated seven warriors from her enemy team and right now he was fighting the captain. But in this fight, she had the upper Hand.


    As expected, sometimeter, she already sent her opponent outside of the battle ring. At this time, the referee enters the battle ring and finally deres her the winner. All the people present in the stadium begin to cheer for her because once again the Royal Academy proves that they weren''t weak. Sam and his friend were also pping for their seniors. Sam already knew that the vice-captain and the captain of the second-year team were very powerful, and as he expected, the vice-captain already showed them.


    _________________


    Because the match was finished, all the audience began to leave the stadium one by one. At this time, Alena suddenly calls him. Sam quickly picks up the phone. She instantly asked him about the location of their enemy. Sam, at this time, was still looking toward those three people that were busy leaving the stadium. He quickly informs her about their location and instantly Alena hung up. Well, she is also very close to that entrance or you can say exit.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 262 262 - Dark Teleportation Technique

    Those people seemed to notice something was wrong and because of this, they quickly left the stadium. Alena also wasn''t slow. She and 5 other Warriors from the warrior association went after them. Fortunately, those people decided not to attack those normal people. Alena and the others were chasing after those three people, but suddenly, those three people stopped moving. Right now, they were in an alleyway. Because both sides were full of buildings, you can say that this alleyway did not have that much light. Instantly their whole body is covered in dark color.


    Alena and those other Warriors did not even have the chance to react because those three Warriors suddenly vanished from their ce. Actually, this was the dark teleportation technique. Not everyone could use this technique, only A-grade Warriors from the dark association used this technique. Alena doesn''t know the details about this technique but she knows that this technique has a side effect and because of this, normally those people didn''t use this.


    At this time, she instantly brought out her phone and called the warrior association. She needed to inform them that they were unable to catch those 3 people from the dark association. Markus picked up the phone and then she told him everything.


    _________


    "Ok," after saying that Markus hung up the phone. After listening to all the exnations from Alena, he was now very serious because nobody knows when those people from the dark association did something unexpected that could harm the other people. Because of this, he was very serious about this. Nobody knows about the motive of those dark association Warriors, but most likely they were nning to do something.


    Instantly, Markus called some Warriors and told them to be alert and increase the security around the battle area and the stadium. It was fortunate that today Sam was able to discover these people, but most likely they also came to the stadium previously. It was really dangerous because what would happen if those people decided to attack normal people at that time? After listening to his instruction, those Warriors from the warrior association instantly became very alert and increased the security around the stadium.


    _________


    "Don''t worry about them. Previously they used a unique teleportation technique and because of this we are unable to catch them, but the Warriors already increase the security and most likely those people won''t dare toe back." At this time, Alena came back to the stadium and quickly told Sam and his team about this.


    When Sam and his team get to know that Alena and those Warriors from the warrior association are unable to catch those three people from the dark association they get serious for a moment but when they get to know that the warrior association increases the security around the stadium only then they sigh.


    "Right now, don''t worry about those people from the dark association. You also focused on yourpetition right now and left everything to us," Alena said to them. Right now, they should focus only on their match. They will face strong opponents in the next match and because of this, she wanted everyone to focus on their practice. Sam and his teammate nodded after hearing her and then they left the stadium. They decided to go to the cafeteria and after that, they will go to the training room.


    __________________


    1 dayter,


    Right now everyone once again came back to the stadium because today is the quarter-final of the 3rd year''s team. Today also you can see that everyone was very excited. Also, they wanted to know the power of the number one genius. Because of this, everyone was very excited.


    Sam and his friend were also already in the stadium. The match will be starting 1 hourter but everyone can feel the excitement in the air.


    "Everyone wanted to know the power of sister Gloria and sister Fiona. Well, I also wanted to know what those other colleges will do if they face sister Gloria and sister Fiona. I hope Golden Dawn and white Tiger Academy also show their real power in this match. Both sisters Gloria and Fiona were early C-grade warriors. If both of the colleges did not have anyone who was in the C-grade, then most likely it would be their easy defeat." Tony said that.


    " Yes, you are right. But also don''t forget what sister Fiona told us earlier. White Tiger Academy and the Golden Dawn also have geniuses in their college. Most likely they also have students in the third year who have already broken through to C-grade." Jeni suddenly said that after hearing Tony''sments.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _____________


    Sometimeter, the match finally started. Like the first year of the second year, the Royal Academy''s 3rd year team will also only fight in the end. The two colleges from group D begin their fight. 50 minutes to have the final winner from Group D.


    After that, the two colleges from group C went to the battle ring. The white Tiger Academy and their opponent were in the battle ring. Most likely, all of them wanted to show their power to everyone and because of this from the White Tiger Academy, only one person went to the battle ring. He was the vice-captain of the white Tiger team. The white Tiger team also wanted to show that only their vice-captain was enough to defeat their opponent.


    One by one, the vice-captain defeated his opponents easily. He was very close to breaking through to C-grade and because of this, you can imagine his power. On the other hand, his opponent team did not have any warriors who were very close to breaking through. Because of this, he easily defeated all those Warriors. It only took him 40 minutes to defeat all those Warriors from his opponent.


    Instantly all the people present in the stadium begin to cheer for him and also p for him. Really, this year every college was showing its full power. Also, one more thing was that the three kings also decided to show off. Previous year in the quarter-final no captain or vice-captain participated. But this year after watching their juniors'' match, they seem to have decided that they will also participate.


    "Sam, what do you think? The vice-captain of the white Tiger team did not reveal his true power while fighting his opponents. So I am not able to tell if he was a C-grade Warrior or not." Suddenly, Kenny asked Sam about this.


    "Well, I am also not sure about this. If anyone decides not to reveal his/her true power, then until we do not have strong observation techniques, we won''t be able to say anything. So I am also not sure if he was a C-grade Warrior or not." Sam replies to her. Well, it was natural because the vice-captain of the white Tiger team was hiding his true power, and none of them have any observation technique.


    ____________


    Sometimeter, group B also entered the battle area. From the golden dawn, their vice-captain also went to the battle ring to fight their opponent''s team. Most likely they were also following the same thing and because of this, only the files captain will participate in this match. Well, it also did not take that much time when the vice-captain of Golden Dawn easily defeated all the students from her opponent''s team.


    When the referee came to the battle ring and announced her as the winner, the audience once again began to cheer for her. Really, these are geniuses. But once again, nobody was able to tell if she was a C-grade warrior or not. Sam and his teammates decided to forget about guessing about their grades. Sometimeter they will naturally get to know about this, so they did not worry about that. Right now, they were waiting for the team of the Royal Academy to enter the battle area. At this time, the construction team was repairing the battle ring. Because only one team was fighting in this battle ring,pared to the previous four battle rings, this one battle ring was Much bigger.


    ______________


    Sometimeter, the moment Gloria started toe toward the battle area, everyone present in the stadium began to cheer for her and her team. Right now, everyone from the Royal Academy was maintaining a serious expression on their face. They were only focused on their opponent''s team and because of this, those cheering sounds did not reach them.


    At this time, Sam and the others were guessing about the warrior who will fight from the Royal Academy. If Fiona went to the battle ring, then their opponent won''t be able to win this match. You can say that those opposing teams won''t have the chance to win the match. Because of this, Sam and his teammates were guessing.


    Most likely his sister was also following the Trend. Because only sister Fiona, as the vice-captain of the Royal Academy team, went to the battle ring to fight their enemy. The moment her opponent''s team saw her, they became very anxious, but they did not back down.


    _______To be continued______

 Chapter 263 263 - Dont Underestimate Anyone

    Fiona didn''t even use her C-grade power, but still, she easily defeated all of her opponents. Instantly, all the audience began to cheer for her. Many of them were disappointed because they were unable to see the full power of Fiona. Mainly, those other college teams were disappointed. Golden Dawn and white Tiger Academy were waiting to see the real power of Fiona. But all of them got disappointed because none of them were able to make Fiona reveal her full power for early C-grade.


    "Fiona¡­ Fiona¡­ Fiona,'''' right now everyone was cheering for her. Fiona leaves the battleground while smiling at those in the audience. Thest fight was quite intense. The captain of the opponent team is really good at using spirit technique and sword. So, you can say that the previous fight was a match between two sword users. Both of them were very good at their own sword technique. At that time, Fiona didn''t use her power of C-grade, because she was enjoying the fight. In the end, she defeated her opponent.


    ____________


    "You take too much time to finish the fight." When Fiona came back toward her friend, suddenly James told her.


    "Well, the captain of our opponent team was really a powerful warrior. I don''t know what would happen if you met him. But unfortunately, he met me." Fiona told them.


    " Hmm, I also noticed that. He was really a powerful warrior. But, most likely, his sword master wasn''t as good as Fiona. Because of this, he was defeated by her. I hope you all, after watching this fight, can understand the fact that you can''t underestimate anyone in thispetition," at this time Gloria opened her mouth and told everyone. After hearing that, everyone nodded. After that, they began to leave the battle area because for today the match was finished.


    At this time, all those spectators also began to leave the stadium. Sam and his friend were also leaving the battle area and after that, they will go to the cafeteria.


    While going toward the cafeteria suddenly Alexa said,


    "Sister Fiona''s opponent was really powerful. He really mastered the spirit technique. Unfortunately, it looks like sister Fiona has more experience than him and because of this, she wins that match easily. I don''t think I would have the chance to win against him right now. It really looks like we need to master the spirit technique while also bing good at our sword technique. I don''t know how powerful our opponents were, but one thing I could tell is that like us, they also train very hard for thispetition and it won''t be easy for us like those previous matches."


    " You are right. The team we will face in the semi-final will be our first powerful opponent and because of this, no one should be careless in that fight. We all have our weaknesses and most likely the opponent will search for those weaknesses. So our focus should be to improve ourselves so that no one could target our weaknesses to defeat us." At this time, Sam also said that after hearing Alexa''s words.


    Tony and the others agree with them. They also know that they weren''t invincible, and it wasn''t that nobody could defeat them. They all have weaknesses and they need to improve in that area. And because of this, after eating food they will go back to the training area to train. At this time, Sam also told him that he would fight them. He needed to know about his teammates'' power and because of this; he suggested that idea. Nobody has any problem with that and it is also good for them because while fighting Sam they will get to know about their weakness.


    _________________


    Well, right now, not only Sam and his teammates but also those other teams were also fully motivated to train hard. Until now those teams who were qualified for the semi-final only fought those teams, but all of them knew that in the semifinal match they would fight against powerful opponents, and because of this everyone wanted to prepare for that.


    Fortunately, the warrior association already prepared training rooms for all those teams who came here only for thepetition. The warrior association knows that it was very important to prepare the training room for all those teams.


    At this time,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam and his friends were at the cafeteria. While they were eating their food, suddenly they noticed that Gloria and her team had alsoe to the cafeteria. Gloria seems to notice Sam and because of this, after ordering her food, she starts toe toward him. Fiona is alsoing with her.


    "That was a very impressive match, sister Fiona. You really master your sword technique. We didn''t even reach that kind of level in our spirit technique. After watching your match, we all are very motivated to train hard." Jeni said that to Fiona.


    " Haha¡­ don''t worry about that. It was good that I was able to motivate your team to train hard. As you know what I already told everyone, never underestimate your opponent. Also, Golden Dawn and white Tiger Academy have strong teams. Most likely, your team will fight one of them and that will be a very tough match. Previously you just only fought those weak teams but from now on you will fight strong teams and right now if you are very careless then you could also lose." Fiona at this time said all of this to them.


    ______________________


    Right now, you can see that Markus was very busy. Actually, he was listening to all those reports that his subordinate was giving him about the dark association. Really, from this year the dark association is doing something unexpected that nobody could have expected. Nobody would have ever thought that they could attack those students in the college entrance examination. So he won''t be surprised if those dark associations decided to attack those students in the annual collegepetition. Because of this, he was now very busy.


    This time, Maria entered his office room. He asked her if she found anything, but the answer was negative. She and her team did not find any trace of the dark association in the central city. Most likely after the previous encounter, the dark association already called back their warriors, or they also told them to hide. But she told him not to worry because she and her team were always on alert mode. The moment they notice something suspicious, they will act immediately. They also increased the security in the stadium so that those dark association Warriors could not get the chance to attack those normal people.


    After hearing her words, Markus rxed a little. Well, he has full trust in his students. And also he knows that Maria hates the dark association.


    _______________


    Even though the security around the central city increased, those Warriors from the warrior association did not check all the houses in the central city. If they really check that, then they will notice that in the South colony of the central city, those three suspicious Warriors finally appear. They were going toward a house. This South colony wasn''t that crowded and because of this, it was a perfect ce to hide for those dark association Warriors.


    After entering the house, one of them quickly brings out a strange device. After cing the device on the ground when he channels his spiritual energy on the device, that device suddenly lights up and a projection of a person appears in front of them. That person was fully covered in ck clothes and also hiding his face. You can see the symbol of the dark association in those ck clothes. Most likely he was an elite member of the dark association and these three people were his subordinates. Unfortunately, the warrior association did not send that many warriors to this colony, and because of this, three people could hide.


    "Sir, the warrior association has already increased the security in the central city. Today we were unable to win the stadium and because of this, we were unable to collect information about those students. But don''t worry, we have already appointed some people who are under our mind control. They are also just normal people and those Warriors from the warrior association won''t suspect those people." Suddenly one person told that to the person who appeared in that projection.


    ______________


    At this time, Sam and his friends are going toward their training room. But while going to the training room, they saw that the stadium was still full of people and many people were still in that area. Well, you can say that this annual collegepetition was a festival. Because of this, many small shops were built around that stadium and many people were in the shops. Sam just smiled after seeing all of that and then was about to tell Tony something to Tony. But suddenly he noticed something unexpected.


    _______________To be continued______________

 Chapter 264 264 - Mental Energy Fluctuation

    As you know, Sam has the telekinesis technique, and he also upgraded that technique to C-grade. So you can say that it is also one of his powerful techniques. But because he did not usually use that technique, nobody knows that he has a C-grade telekinesis technique. Everyone only knows that he has a low-grade telekinesis technique.


    Now,ing back was the main matter. While Sam looked towards the audience leaving the stadium, he suddenly felt a mental energy fluctuation. When someone uses mental techniques like mind control techniques or something like that, they convert their spiritual energy to mental energy, and only then are they able to use that technique. Also, he did not feel any low mental energy and because of this, he suddenly became very startled. Who was using the mental energy and for what purpose they were using that technique?


    Because of this, Sam suddenly became very serious and tried to find the person who was releasing this mental energy. But because of therge crowd, he was unable to find the person. At this time, Tony and the others also looked toward Sam and suddenly saw his serious expression. They instantly became very alert because they thought that Sam once again noticed the Warriors from the dark association. They also begin to look toward those crowds and try to find those people.


    ? "Sam, did you notice those people from the dark association? It was very difficult to find them if they tried to blend in thisrge crowd," Suddenly Alexa asked Sam.


    Sam, who was seriously looking toward that crowd only at this time, came back to his senses after hearing Alexa''s question.


    "Guys, I did not find those people from the dark association, but suddenly I feel strong mental energy. Right now I am trying to find that person who was using that mental energy." Sam quickly exined to them why he became so serious and what he was finding.


    After hearing his exnation, Alexa and the others were also surprised. Well, it was natural because why would anyone use strong mental energy out of nowhere? Also, it seems that the person who was using the mental technique wasn''t a weak person because then Sam would not be this much serious. They also seriously started to look toward those crowds.


    __________________


    20 minutester,


    Sam found the person from whom he can feel the mental energy. At first, Sam thought that this person was using some kind of mental technique, but right now, when he was looking at that person seriously, he became sure that this person wasn''t using mental energy. Still, he wasn''t sure and because of this, he and his teammate right now are going toward that person.


    Also, if you look at that person, then you can notice his strange behavior. Right now, that person was sitting on the ground and if you look at his expression, then it looks like he was in pain. Because of this, Sam and the others were sure that something was wrong with this person.


    They quickly came toward that person. The age of this person should be 25 to 28, he has average height and average face. Also, you can easily see that this person was only an early E-grade warrior. But then the question was how he was releasing this much powerful mental energy.


    _____________


    "Hey, are you okay? Did something happen to you?" At this time, Tony suddenly asks that person.


    Previously, that person did not notice them. Sam and the others really guessed it right because this person was in so much pain that he was feeling it in his head. He was trying to remember why he was feeling this much pain and also one more strange thing was that he did not remembering here. Because of this, he was also confused about that, but the headache did not give him any time to think about those matters. He wasn''t even able to find his phone. The headache was so painful that he just sat on the ground because right now he was unable to do anything because of this pain.<novelnext></novelnext>


    But, he suddenly became startled after hearing the sudden question, and only then did he notice that some people were in front of him. But when he looks toward those people, only then he remembers who they were. They were students from the Royal Academy. Instantly he became happy because he was thinking that the students would know something that could help him. The headache was so much pain that he did not have the strength to talk, but still, he told them,


    "Can you help me? Suddenly I felt this headache. I felt like my head was going to explode. Please, guys, help¡­" just after saying that, that person became unconscious. He didn''t even get the chance to finish his word.


    Sam and his team, who were looking at this person, suddenly became surprised after seeing that. Because right now that person was bleeding from his nose. Sam instantly signals Elena. She nodded and quickly started to use the healing ray. They don''t know what happened, but it looks like this person was in pain. Something was happening in his mind.


    At this time, suddenly Sam''s phone begins to ring. Sam looked at his phone and saw that it was his sister who was calling him. Only then remember that previously he told his sister that he wanted to have a mock fight with her. She naturally agreed with him and most likely because of this she was calling him.


    "Where are you? I am in front of your training room, but still, you did note to the training room?" At this time, Gloria asked him about his location. Sam quickly exins everything to her. Gloria, after hearing his exnation, quickly told him to look over that person because she will try toe quickly. She was also surprised after hearing that.


    "Sister said she will try toe here as quickly as she can. Until then she told us to look over this person," after hanging up the call, quickly told his friends. All of his friends nodded. Elena, at this time, has already stabilized the situation of this person but she told him that something was happening in his mind and because of this, he bled from his nose. Because his brain was unable to handle that matter, he was bleeding previously. Most likely, his brain is fully overloaded and unable to process any other thing. After hearing her exnation, all of them were surprised because this was the first time they heard something like that.


    ___________________


    It did not take Gloria that much time toe toward their location. She also wasn''t alone. Alena and Fiona are also with her. All three of them came towards his friend and only then noticed a person on the ground. Gloria quickly asked them about this person and Sam told her everything.


    Alena and Fiona previously didn''t know about this person, but after hearing Sam''s exnation, they quickly came to know about this matter. Fiona was surprised after hearing that, but if you look at Alena, then you can see that she was very serious. Because she had already seen something like that previously.


    "If you really feel strong mental energying out from this person but this person was only an E-grade Warrior, then it means someone who was a high grade Warrior was using their mental energy in this person. Most likely, that person is trying to control this person. But as you know that the strongest will you have the most, it bes difficult to control you. Previously, I also saw something like this. One of my colleagues tried to control a warrior from the dark association but the willpower of the person was strong and because of this, sometimeter my colleague was having difficulty controlling that person. At that time, the person releases mental energy from the mind that was stronger than him. Because at that time my friend was an early D-grade warrior and the person was in peak E-grade."


    " With that, I can tell that someone also tried to control this person but because of the willpower of this person the control started to lose, and because of this you feel that mental energying out of this person," Alena exins all of this to them.


    After hearing their vice principal''s exnation, all of them were surprised because they never face this kind of situation. They know the fact that stronger willpower makes it difficult for your enemy to control your mind.


    "Right now, the only thing we can do is to take this person to the training room and wait for this person to wake up," Alena said. At this time, she also used her healing Ray toward that person. If this person was really controlled by someone, then this will prevent that from happening. Actually, using this healing power, she wanted to recover this person''s brain in its previous state. So that this person won''t be under the control of someone and also he will recover from the headache. After that, Tony picked up the person and all of them started to go toward the training room.


    ____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 265 265 - Semifinal

    2 dayster,


    Right now, once again, all the audience is going toward the stadium. Today was the semi-final of the first year and because of this, there was an intense atmosphere between those teams. Even those people who just came to the stadium to watch the match also can feel the intense atmosphere. Because of this, those people are bing more excited about today''s match. Today every team will give their best in their fight. All of them wanted to qualify for the final and because of this, no students would be careless in their fight.


    Right now, you can also see the security around the area also increased. The warrior association was already very alert about those who were here from the dark association and because of this they already increased the security around the central city. No one knows the real motive of those dark association Warriors. But one thing was clear: those Warriors wanted to do something with the students, who were participating in thepetition. Because of this, all those Warriors from the warrior association were on alert.


    Alena informs all the other teachers from the Royal Academy to be alert. She already told them about all those things that she found these few days and after hearing her exnation, all those teachers became very alert. Because many of the students were participating in thispetition and if those Warriors from the dark association were targeting their students, then it could be dangerous for their students. Not only the royal academy''s teachers, but she also informs all the other college teachers. No teacher wanted their student to face those dangerous dark association Warriors. But nobody informed those students about this matter because right now all of them should focus on their match and because of this, all those College teachers and those Warriors from the warrior association were on high alert.


    One by one, everyone came to the stadium. Right now you can see that the stadium was full of people and everyone was very excited to see today''s match. Well, they did not need to wait that much time because only 20 minutester, the match would begin.


    All those four teams are already in their waiting room. Right now, everyone was very serious about their match. Everyone was discussing their n for this semi-final match. Sam also discusses his n with his friends about today''s match. Today, Sam decided that Dan and Saara won''t be fighting. Well, both of them were strong but because today Sam and Alexa will participate in this match and because of this, Dan and Saara won''t be fighting. Dan and Saara didn''t have any problem with that because from the start they knew that even though they were strongpared to Sam and the others, they were weak except Kira. It did not discourage them, but it made their will stronger. Right now, they know that their main focus should be increasing their strength, and only then will they be able topete with them.


    Tony and the others also did not have any problem with his n. So it was decided. Suddenly said to them,


    "Well, don''t worry about anything, just give your all in your fight, and even if you lose the fight, you don''t need to worry about that because I am still here."


    Well, after hearing this, you can say that Sam was overconfident, but to his friend, he was telling them not to worry about their fight. Even if they make any mistake in their fight, they should not worry about that because he is still there and he will take care of everything. After hearing this for a moment, no one knows what to say, but then everyone begins tough. Really, after hearing Sam''s words, they rx a little. From the moment they came to the battle area today, they were feeling intense pressure because of thispetition, but after hearing Sam''s words, they finally rxed.


    15 minutester,


    Finally, the organization team shows them that the first match will be between Golden Dawn and Falcon academy. This Falcon Academy team also was strongpared to those other teams. So because of this, you should not underestimate them. You can say that in thest few years, the Falcon Academy has already be very famous. They already make their position as the fourth strongest college after those three kings.


    When Sam and his friend get to know that they won''t be fighting first, instantly they focus on the screen that they have in their waiting room. Because the winner of this match will be fighting their team or the white Tiger Academy''s team in the final. Because of this, this match also was very important for them to watch.


    2 minutester,


    The announcer already came to the stage and begin to announce,<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Wee everyone. Looking at you, I can tell that everyone was very excited about today''s semi-final match. Well, not only you, but I am also very excited about today''s match. Today was the semi-final between that first year''s team, and we know that in this match everyone will give their hundred percent in their match. This match was very intense because no one wanted to lose."


    " So, wasting no time, let''s wee our first time. Their college was also part of the three kings. Like their seniors, the first year''s team also proved to everyone that they really have the capability and strength to represent their college as part of the three kings. So wasting no time, let''s wee them," after saying that the announcer begins to p and at the same time all those in the audience also begin to p and cheer.


    At the entrance of this battleground, suddenly white smoke appeared. Also at this time, a BGM also began to y in the background. You can say that this was a grand wille for them. Only it was natural because this was the semi final match.


    From the smoke, everyone saw the first year''s team from the golden dawn slowlying toward the battleground. The excitement in those audiences instantly increased. James was leading his team while everyone in his team was following him with a confident expression. But everyone in the audience can feel the intense battle pressure that their team was releasing.


    "Well now, as you can see, it was that Golden Dawn. Now their opponent will be the fourth-strongest college. They were called The Dark horse that only just in a few years came to the limelight. But aftering to the limelight, they proved to everyone that their position as the fourth strongest college, they really deserve. As you can tell, this will be the Falcon Academy," the announcer once again announced the name of the other team. Once again, with a grand wee, the Falcon Academy''s team enters the battleground. Also, after seeing their team and all those audiences once again begin to cheer loudly for their team.


    Right now on the battleground, both of the teams are looking at each other while every one of them is releasing their intense battle aura. Every one of them is ready to fight with their hundred percent. Just looking at these intense situations, the audience was very excited because right now no one knew who would be the winner in this match and everyone was very excited to know the result.


    _______________


    From both of the teams, their first teammate came to the battle ring. Both of the students, after entering the battle ring, started to prepare for their attack. From the start, they will attack their opponent with their full power. As you know, nobody wanted to lose this match and because of this, all of them were ready to attack their opponent from the start with their full strength.


    The moment the referee gives the signal to fight, both of the students instantly move from their ces. Both of them were physical warriors and also used swords as their main weapons. So you can say that this will be a fight between two swordsmen. But unfortunately, both of them did not know how to use the spirit technique and because of this, they weren''t using that technique. But that doesn''t mean that they will be weak. Even without that technique, they will show everyone their full power.


    "Boom!!" Both of their swords shed with each other and instantly it made a loud sound. Both of the students were still in their ce while both of their swords were shing with each other. None of them moved from their ce, but the impact created by their attack was so powerful that sometimeter it sent both of them backward. Both of them quickly stabilize themselves and once again win after their opponent.


    sh after sh, both of the students were continuously attacking each other and because of this, also many explosions appeared in the battle ring. But it looks like both of the students werepletely affected by the impact because both of them mainly focused on attacking each other. Both of the students were looking at their opponent and waiting for the opportunity when their opponent will make some mistake and they will take advantage of that.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 266 266 - Semifinal (2)

    Sometimeter, both of the students were sent flying backward by the impact that was created when both of them shed their swords with their final. You have to say, both of their final attacks are powerful and because of this, a huge explosion also appears. Not only that, if you look toward both of their swords, then you will notice that both of their swords were also damaged, but thisst sh.


    Right now, both of the students are lying down on the battle ring. Because of this, no one could tell who will be the winner and who will be the loser. The audience in the stadium, all those college teachers, all those people who were watching this match on their TV or their mobile, and also those students who are participating in thispetition, everyone was focusing on the battle ring. Both of theirst attacks were very powerful and because of this, nobody could tell who would be the winner.


    At first, both of the studentsy down in the battle ring without any movement, but sometimeter, the student who was from the Falcon Academy started to move. He was using all of his strength to get up from the ground. After some struggle, he was finally able to get up from the ground, but on the other hand, the student from the golden dawn was still on the ground. Right now, if you look at the student from the Falcon Academy, then you can see that he was bleeding from his mouth. Well, previously nobody noticed that but right now everyone notices that.


    The referee at this time came to the battle ring and then checked the condition of the other student who was still lying down in the battle ring. Right now, nobody from the audience makes any noise. The student from the Falcon Academy also silently looked at his opponent.


    "He is unconscious. So isn''t in the condition to fight." After checking his condition, the referee finally said. After that, he came to the other student and then announced him as the winner of the match. Those in the audience, who all this time were, instantly began to cheer very loudly. This was a very intense match and nobody expected that the first winner would be the Falcon Academy. Instantly, the medical team enters the battle ring and begins to heal both of the students. Those other students from the Falcon Academy also begin to cheer loudly. It was really unexpected that the first winner will be from their Academy.


    ______________________


    "The fight was really intense. Also, I never expected that Golden Dawn would lose the first match." Tony suddenly eximed after watching the match. Alexa and the others also nodded after hearing him. It was really unexpected for everyone that Golden Dawn would lose the first match.


    "From the first, I am telling you that in thispetition, never underestimate your opponent. This match is an example of that. You will never expect when you will face an opponent who you thought was a weak opponent, but unexpectedly, he turned out to be a Strong warrior." Sam said this to them. Everyone after hearing that nodded. They also agree with him. Because, like them, many other students still didn''t reveal their full power in front of the public.


    At this time, Sam and the others can look at the screen that the next students from the Golden Dawn and the Falcon Academy are going toward the battle ring. If you look at the team of Golden Dawn, then you can notice that they were still calm. It looked like they were still confident about winning this match. The first loss did not do anything to them. Most likely, all those next matches will be very intense and everyone will get to see the full power of those students.


    _____________________


    1 hourter,<novelnext></novelnext>


    The first six matches have already been finished. From the Golden Dawn right now, Aliya was going toward the battle ring. Well, from the Falcon Academy, they are vice-captains alsoing toward the battle ring. This will be the fight between two vice-captains. Right now, the Golden Dawn has 3 wins. So you can say that right now both of their colleges have a draw. So it looks like the next two matches will be very important for both of the teams. Also, one more thing was that the quarter-final match in this semi-final match has the same rule where one student can challenge their whole opponent team. But it looks like Golden Dawn and the Falcon Academy did not have any interest in doing that.


    Aftering to the battle ring, both of the vice captains were looking at each other. This match and the next match will be very important for both of the teams and both of the teams will give their 100% to win these matches. Aliya was a spiritual warrior, but her opponent was a swordsman. So this will be the fight between the spiritual warrior and the physical warrior. Well, many will think that in this matter, the physical warrior has the advantage because the spiritual warrior is only able to fight that good at a close distance. But all those teams knew that it wasn''t that easy. You won''t be able to tell when a spiritual warrior turns out to be good at closebat, or a physical warrior is also able to use spells. You will never get to know that and because of this, nobody will underestimate anyone.


    The referee did not waste any more time and quickly gave them the signal to fight. Aliya instantly attacks her opponent with her fire control. One after another, she started to create many fireballs and shoot them toward her opponent. In front of this attack, her opponent also wasn''t showing his weakness but using his full speed, he was dodging those fireballs. He was trying to get close to Aliya, but in front of these fireballs, he knew it would be quite difficult and, because of this, quickly activated the spirit technique and swung his sword toward her.


    Instantly, a blue sword sh was created by that and quickly went toward Aliya. That sword sh cuts those fireballs very easily while going toward her. Aliya already noticed that sword sh and before that attack reached her, she instantly created a firewall in front of her. But that wasn''t your normal firewall, because this firewall was created by the blue me. Well just looking at this firewall you can tell that she also used the spirit technique to create this firewall and because of this, her normal firewall turned to a blue firewall.


    Her opponent sent his sword sh one after another while he was alsoing toward that firewall. But that sword sh wasn''t able to do anything to that blue firewall. But this firewall won''tst that long and because of this Aliya is also preparing for that. Her opponent also knows that she won''t be able to maintain this firewall for that long and because of this, he was already in front of that firewall and attacking that firewall continuously.


    Suddenly that firewall started to decrease in size. Aliya''s opponent thought that she didn''t have the spiritual energy to maintain this firewall and because of this, this firewall was decreasing in size. But he waspletely unaware of the fact that Aliya was decreasing in size because she had a n in her mind. Her opponent at this time was still attacking the firewall, and he was waiting for the chance when the firewall wouldpletely disappear. But unexpectedly, that firewall attacked him. It looks like the firewall suddenly became alive and decided to attack him. Well, as you can guess, this was one of Aliya''s spells - the fire prison. This will create a prison around her opponent.


    But most likely her opponent was also expecting these and because of this, the moment he noticed that the firewall wasing toward him, wasting no time, he quickly started to attack that firewall. While attacking, he also backed away from that ce. This fire prison also has a weakness. Aliya''s opponent needs toe close to her only then she will be able to use this, but if her opponent maintains a certain distance, she won''t be able to use this spell.


    Her opponent seems to know this matter and because of this, he was backing away. Well, after looking at this, she instantly stopped her attack and created many blue fireballs around her. Wasting no time, she once again shoots those blue fireballs toward her opponent. This time, the speed of the fireball was also increased. All those fireballs quickly went toward her opponent. After looking at those blue fireballs, her opponent also tried to dodge those fireballs, but because of the increased speed, he wasn''t able to dodge all of them. But, he didn''t panic, those fireballs that came in front of him got cut down by his sword.


    _____________To be continued_________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 267 267 - Semifinal (3)

    While shooting those fireballs continuously, Aliya can feel that her spiritual energy was decreasing rapidly, and but likely she has right now only 28% spiritual energy. She knows that she won''t be able to maintain these continuous fireballs for that long. But not only that while she looks at her opponent, but she also has the feeling that after getting hit by her fireballs and trying to defend himself from her attack, her opponent also was quite low on his health and, most likely, his strength also decreased. Because right now her opponent was continuously trying to dodge her attack, while also trying to send his attack toward her. Because of this, she decided to take a risk, and suddenly attack her opponent with her powerful attack.


    Right now, you can see that Aliya was continuously shooting fireballs toward her opponent while her opponent was busy defending himself. But suddenly, instead of the fireballs, a big fireball appeared in her hand. Sam, who was looking at this match, already guessed this attack. This was a great fireball. So he already knew how powerful this attack was and also because she was using the spirit technique, that great fireball turned into a great blue fireball. This will create heavy damage, and if her opponent got hit by this attack, then most likely he will be seriously injured. This was a very dangerous move for her opponent and also for her. Because if her opponent was able to dodge this attack then, he will easily win this fight because after that Aliya won''t have any strength to fight back.


    Aliya also knew this risk, but she decided to take this risk. She did not give her opponent any chance and instantly shot that great fireball toward her opponent. Her opponent also already noticed this great fireball, but the speed of this attack was much greater than those previous fireballs. He already knows that he won''t be able to dodge this attack. Because of this, he already prepared himself to face this attack.


    He quickly channels all of his spiritual energy using the spirit technique toward his sword. This will be hisst chance. Right now, he did not panic and calmly waited for that fireball to reach him and he will attack that. When the fireball was only 10 m from him, he decided to attack that fireball. Right now, his sword was glowing blue colorfully. Only one secondter, his sword and the fireball shed with each other. This time, he wasn''t able to cut that attack. He can already feel the impact behind that blue fire Ball. But he also did not back down and used his full stand to counter that attack.


    All of this happens only in a few seconds. Because of the shes, there was also an explosion. Right now, the Falcon Academy was using his full strength to resist that attack, but only a few secondster, he started to feel that his strength was leaving his body. And after that he got sent outside of the battle ring by the impact.


    The medical team already prepared themselves, and the moment he got sent outside, they quickly went in his direction. They already know that if he got hit by that great fireball, then he will be greatly injured. When the medical team came toward him, they saw his bad condition. Right now they can see that his Armor was badly damaged and he was also bleeding from his body in various ces. Really that great fireball was really dangerous. Wasting no time, they begin to heal him. Somehow, they needed to stabilize his condition so that he did not die.


    On the other hand, some of the medical team also went toward Aliya. She already used all of her spiritual energy and because of this she was also about to be unconscious, but she still held on because the referee did not announce the winner of the match. The referee who was looking at both of them finally decided to announce her as the winner of the match. At this time, the medical team already came to the battle ring and when Aliya was about to be unconscious after hearing the result, those medical teams quickly helped her.


    _________


    "Aliya¡­ Aliya¡­ Aliya," At this time, all those audiences were cheering for her. Everyone was very excited after watching both of their wonderful fights. All this time, many unexpected things happened, but even though unexpected things, both of them already showed everyone that they weren''t weak. Nobody should underestimate them.


    Aliya did not leave the battleground and went to her opponent. The medical team was still healing him. When she came in front of him, only then did she notice that her opponent was still awake even after receiving that much damage. When she came close to her opponent, both of them shook hands. Not only did those audiences enjoy this match, but both of them also enjoyed this match because both of them know that their opponent was powerful and because of this they already give their 100% in their fight.


    ______________________


    Under the cheering, Aliya left the battle ring. Right now, she also has a smile on her face because she was able to win this match. On the other hand, James, the captain of the Golden Dawn, was already going toward the battle ring. He was going toward the battle ring while Aliya wasing toward the waiting room and both of them just smiled at each other. After that, James only focused on the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    __________


    "Really, thatst attack was so powerful. It looks exactly like Sam''s great fireball, but I don''t know why, but I am feeling that it wasn''t as powerful as Sam''s great fireball." At this time Jeni said that to everyone. Tony and the others also agree with her because really thest attack was very dangerous. But fortunately, it wasn''t as destructive as Sam''s fireball. Because of this, they sigh in relief. But the next moment they became serious because right now if Golden Dawn wins this match and they also win the match, then they will face them in the final and their opponent will be very tough.


    ___________


    Sometimeter, the fight between the two captains were already started. Both of the captains from the first showed their full power to everyone. Both of them also use the spirit technique. Right now, the interesting thing was that both of them were using swords. So as you can imagine, sh after sh was created by them. Both of them are also fully using the spirit technique.


    Right now, everyone in the stadium was looking toward them. Nobody knows who will be the winner was, but one thing was clear: both of the captains were very strong. This Falcon Academy was really a Dark horse Academy. Every year, they show everyone that they also canpare themselves with the three kings. But unfortunately, they weren''t able to win any match against the three kings. Because of this, those audiences who were supporting the Falcon Academy had thought that this year something different could happen. This year, the Falcon Academy could defeat the three kings. But right now everyone is silent and looking at the battle ring. Attack after attack, none of the captains were backing down and continuously attack each other.


    James suddenly jumped away from his ce, but in the next moment, he quickly swung his sword toward his opponent. A blue sword sh went toward his opponent. But his opponent also wasn''t slow because he also quickly jumped away from his ce. Both of them know that if they get hit by their opponent''s attack, then that will make them lose the match. So both of them were very careful.


    _____________


    1 hourter,


    Both of the captains were still fighting. They continuously fight for 1 hour, but still none of them back down. If you look at them, you can see that both of them were injured and their armor also damaged. But they still have the strength to fight and nobody knows how long they will continue to fight. But right now, if you look toward the audience, then you cannot see the bored feeling in them. All this time, all those audiences were enjoying this intense match. Nobody made any sound all this time, they only focused on this match. They are also very interested to know who will be the winner of this match after this intense battle.


    Right now, both of the teams were looking at their captains. Both of the teams have the confidence in their captains that they will win the match, but they also know that their opponent was also very powerful and because of this they were praying for their captain. For both of the teams, this match was very important, and they needed to win this match. If the Falcon Academy wins this match, then they could get a draw match, but if the golden dawn wins this match, then they will be the winner of thispetition.


    _____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 268 268 - Semifinal (4)

    Both James''s and his opponent''s swords sh with each other. The moment both of their swords shed, an explosion appeared. Both of them used the spirit technique at their maximum capacity. Because of this, the explosion was also very big. Even those people in the stadium can feel the impact that was created by that explosion. But still, both of the students were in their ce. Even after being hit by that impact, they did not move from their ce. Both of them are still holding onto their ground. If you look at them carefully, then you can see that both of them also started to bleed from their mouth because of the impact. But one thing was clear to them: who would first give up would be the loser. Because of this, even though they did not have the strength, with their willpower, they were still holding. You can say that this was theirst and final attack and in this attack, they already give their all strength and power.


    Everyone who was watching their match was now silently looking at this match. They could see that both of them started to bleed from their mouth, but none of them moved from their ce. They are also already seriously damaged and you can also see various cuts on their body. Those normal people won''t be able to tell, but those teachers could tell that both of the warriors were at theirst limit. But because of their strong willpower, they were still holding onto their ground.


    Both of their teammates were now praying for them. Golden Dawn and Falcon Academy, both of these colleges, know that this match is very important to them and they need to win this match. They have confidence in their captain and because of this, they only have confidence in looking at their captains. From the first to thest, they already saw how their captains give their all in this fight to win this match.


    It did not take that much longer to finish the fight because sometimeter both of the warriors were about to lose consciousness but suddenly James held on and didn''t be unconscious. But on the other hand, his opponent already became unconscious and fell down on the ground.


    The referee did not waste any more time and quickly entered the battle ring. Everyone knows that none of the warriors had the strength to fight once again, and this will be thest result of this fight. Not only the referee but also the medical team entered the battle ring and quickly went toward both of the warriors. At this time, the referee did not waste any more time and announced James as the winner of the match. Instantly, a sad and joyous moment appeared in both of the colleges.


    As you can guess, Golden Dawn was in joy, because they won this match. It means they already qualify for the final. Instantly, all those people that were supporting their college began to cheer for their team and also for James. On the other hand, the Falcon Academy was right now feeling sad because they did not win this match. Many of the teammates already begin to cry. Because they were unable to qualify for the final.


    Just looking at them, all those people who are supporting their college could feel sadness. It was really painful that even after giving their 100% they were unable to win this match. But all those people knew that they needed to support this team and because of this, all those people began to p and try to cheer them up. Not only those people but all those other people who are supporting Golden Dawn, also know that day needed to support the other team. Everyone now started to p and the Falcon Academy.


    All the first-year team members suddenly saw that all those in the audience were now trying to cheer them up. So those students who are crying also stop crying. They knew that it wasn''t time to show their weakness. They should learn from this match and try to improve themselves. You can see that their eyes be red because of crying, but they have already stopped crying. They begin to thank all those people that were supporting their team.


    At this time, the captain of the Falcon Academy already became conscious. He could also see that everyone in the audience was also trying to cheer their mode. He was really thankful for that because right now he is also feeling depressed. Suddenly at this time, James came in front of him. He looked towards James and saw that he extended his hand toward him. He also did not hesitate and also grabbed his hand. Both of them then had a handshake.


    "It was a really wonderful match. If we get time in the future, let''s fight once again. I will be happy to fight against someone strong like you," at this time James said this to him.


    " Sure, no problem. I will also be happy topete against someone strong like you," he also said to James.


    After that, both of them started going toward their own team.


    __________________


    Sam and his teammate right now see on the screen that the audience was cheering for James. He and his team won this match, and it meant they qualified for the final. At this time, everyone was thinking about what they would do if they were in the position of the Falcon Academy.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Well then, it was decided that Golden Dawn qualified for the final. Right now, we have our match. In that, the second team will qualify and will fight in the final. You get to see the power of Golden Dawn, so even if we qualify for the final, we have a strong opponent ahead. Also, we should not underestimate the White Tiger Academy. We didn''t know their full power, but I can tell that they are also strong like the Golden Dawn. So, right now, everyone should prepare themselves for the match." Sam told this to everyone. Alexa and the others listened to his words and nodded. They also know that they will have a tough match ahead.


    ___________________


    Right now, there will be a 1-hour break before the next match. At this time, the construction team was repairing the battle ring while all the people in the audience were leaving the ground to eat their lunch. Everyone wanted to finish lunch as quickly as they could so they did not miss the next match. The next match will also be an intense match. This next fight will be between the Royal Academy and the White Tiger Academy. Both of the colleges were very strong, and also in the Royal Academy, the number one genius of this year, also admitted. Because of this, this match will also be an intense match between these two powerhouse colleges.


    Even the Golden Dawn and the Falcon Academy wanted to attend this match. Not only this to college, but all those other college''s 1st-year teams didn''t want to miss this match because everyone wanted to know the power of the number one genius of this year.


    ______________________


    1 hourter,


    Right now, you can see that the stadium was full of people. Everyone already came back after finishing their lunch. Right now, all of their focus was on the battle ring. Now everyone was waiting for the referee to call both of the teams into the battle ring.


    Not only those people in the stadium but also all those teachers from the Royal Academy and The White Tiger Academy were also very excited. Right now, you can see that Alena was with her friends. From white Tiger Academy and Golden Dawn, she has friends and both of them were with her. Maria is also with them. She was in the charge of security.


    "Alena, what do you think about your student? Do you think he will win this match or not?" Suddenly Rita from the White Tiger Academy asked Alena.


    "Well, I have full confidence in him. Because he is full of surprises and he is quite mysterious. Even I have difficulty understanding him sometimes. Also, I want to tell you to beware of his concealment techniques." Alena said this to her friends. After hearing her, everyone bes very serious because they know Alena won''t joke with them. If she was telling this, that means it was true. Many people already know about Sam''s strange concealment technique and because of this, he did not try to hide his concealment technique. Also, Alena didn''t fully say anything to her friends, she just gave them a hint. So that nobody will underestimate him.


    But Sam not only has strange concealment techniques, but he also has a strange sword technique. He was also a very powerful spiritual warrior; he was also a powerful Archer, and he was also very good at spirit technique. So, Alena has full confidence in her student that he will win this match.


    ____________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 269 269 - Semifinal (5)

    "Let''s wee our previous year''s winner, one of the three kings - The White Tiger Academy." The first year''s team of The White Tiger Academy enters the battleground with a grand entrance. Everyone in the audience instantly began to p for their team. The previous year, The White Tiger Academy''s 1st-year team won the match. Because of this, right now everyone in the audience was loudly cheered for them. Because this year also they have the chance to win thispetition. Also like the previous year, this year''s first-year team is also a powerful team.


    Gustav, Pijus, and their team enter the battleground with confident gazes. They also have the confidence that they will win this year''spetition like their seniors.


    "Like their seniors, this year the first year''s team is also a very strong team. They also have the chance to win thispetition. Now, as you can see, Captain Gustav is leading his teammates into the battleground. Just looking at their confidence, you can tell that they were ready to win this match and then qualify for the final."


    ____________


    "Now let''se to our second team. Let''s wee one of the three kings, the Royal Academy. The previous year, they, unfortunately, were unable to qualify for the final, but this year don''t underestimate their team. They are a very strong team and they also have a high chance of winning this match. From the first tost, they are also able to maintain the undefeated record. Now they have the chance to stay undefeated in this match and qualify for the final. So, now let''s wee captain Sam and his team into the battleground," the announcer says and instantly, you can see that with a grand entrance, the first-year team of the Royal Academy enters the battleground.


    Sam was leading his team into the battleground. Sam, Alexa, Tony, Jeni, Elena, and the others also have a confident look at them. They weren''t looking down on their opponent, but they had the confidence to win this match. But more than that, they also have confidence in their captain. Even if they lose any fight, then their captain will back them up. But that does not mean that they were going to lose any match. They will give their hundred percent in their fight and will maintain their undefeated record.


    The moment Sam and his team enter the battleground, everyone in the audience once again begins to cheer for their team. Alexa, Tony, Jeni, Elena, and the others already have their fan group. Those people were fully cheering for their idols. But most of the audience was focusing on the captains. Both of the team''s captains still didn''t take part in any match because they didn''t need to. But one thing they were sure of, today both of the captains would take part in the fight and everyone was waiting for that match.


    Right now, both of the teams were looking at each other. You can say that there was an intense atmosphere between these two teams. And the audience, after feeling that intense atmosphere, also be very excited.


    ____________


    The referee did not waste any more time and quickly signaled both of the teams to send their first teammate into the battle ring. Sam signals Kira. She nodded and started to go toward the battle ring. Not only the Royal Academy but the white tiger Academy also sent their first fighter into the battle ring. Kira, after entering the battle ring, looked at her opponent. Her opponent also was a girl, but the most interesting thing was that her opponent''s main weapon was a spear. On the other hand, Kira already brought out her sword. One thing was that both of the fighters were physical warriors and both of them were ready to unleash their full power from the start. Both of them were waiting for the referee''s signal.


    The referee also did not waste time. He was already outside of the battle ring and quickly gave them the signal to fight. Instantly, both of the fighters approach each other at full speed. Both of them went very fast and because of this, it looked like both of them had vanished from their ces.


    Kira''s opponent was using a spear and because of this, she could attack her from a distance. Kira wasn''t even able to reach that close, but her opponent already attacked her. But Kira''s reflex wasn''t slow. She quickly reacted, and she also attacked her spears.


    The sword and the spear sh against each other. That instantly created a loud sound, but that wasn''t finished. Both of them, after that, begin to attack each other continuously. None of them wanted to give their opponent any chance to fight back and give their opponent the chance to find out about their weakness. Right now, Kira''s main motive was to get close to her opponent. But on the other hand, her opponent''s main motive was to injure her opponent from a distance and prevent her from getting close to her. Well, you can say that both of them were aware of each other.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Suddenly, Kira instantly jumped away. Right now, she can feel that the speed of our opponent is already increasing. But that doesn''t mean she will be scared. She once again used her full speed to approach her opponent, but this time she suddenly became three. It was her sword Mirage technique. All three Kira approached their opponent. Her opponent, at this time, looked at the three of them very seriously. She already knew about this technique and she was trying to find the real Kira.


    But Kira only gave her that chance. The three of them attack her from three directions. Her opponent to save herself jumped away from that ce. But Kira didn''t want to give her any chance. The real Kira, already close to her opponent and wasting no time, instantly attacks her. Just when her sword was about to reach her, but suddenly her body even though she was in the air. With that, you can see the fast reflex of her opponent. Right now, both of the teams were looking at them. They could see that their teammates were giving their all in this fight.


    Like this, their fight was still going on for at least 30 minutes. Right now, you can see that both of them have already received damage from each other. You can also see the scratch mark or you can see the crack mark on their Armor. Fortunately, their Armor was high-grade Armor and because of this, their Armor still didn''t break. But even though they did not receive any damage, they were still injured because of the impact that was created by their sh.


    Kira still didn''t know how to use the spirit technique and because of this, she wasn''t unable to use it. Most likely her opponent was also unable to use the spirit technique because she also wasn''t using this technique from the start. But even though they weren''t using the spirit technique, their attack was still dangerous. With these, they already prove to everyone how powerful they were.


    ________________


    10 minutester,


    Suddenly, Kira already came in front of her opponent and instantly attacked her. Her opponent also reacted, but Kira already guessed that. She also quickly reacted and suddenly moved that sword toward her. Well, previously she only fakes attacked her opponent, but this time it was real. Her opponent this time was unable to react. She still tried to defend herself, but in the end, she got hit by that and sent backward. Kira, at this time, quickly reacted and instantly went toward her once again. She did not want to give her opponent any chance and before she reacted; she wanted to attack once again.


    2 minutester,


    Right now you can see that Kira was now standing in the battle ring, but on the other hand, her opponent was already unconscious. Well, these 2 minutes she just continuously attacked her opponent and did not give her any chance to react.


    The referee and the medical team already came to the battle ring. The medical team quickly went toward the fallen student. She was unconscious and also bleeding. They quickly stabilize her condition. The referee at this time came toward Kira and announced her as the winner of the match. Instantly, Kira suddenly sits down in the battle ring. It wasn''t that she did not receive any damage. She also received damage and was just waiting for the referee to announce the winner. Fortunately, the medical team had already reacted, and they also began to treat her. Instantly, the audience who were supporting the Royal Academy began to cheer for her. Except for those people who were supporting the White Tiger Academy, all the other people began to cheer for the Royal Academy.


    After getting treated by the medical team, Kira already left the battle ring and approached her teammates. Sam and the others instantly begin to congratte her. That was a really wonderful fight. Like Kira, her opponent also knows about her weakness, and many times she uses that to attack her. But Kira didn''t back down because of that. She also counterattacks her opponent.


    _____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 270 270 - Red Lightning

    Right now, Jeni was fighting her opponent. Her opponent was a physical warrior and all this time, he was trying to approach her. Basically, he was trying to fight with her in closebat, but she didn''t give him any chance. Right now, you can see that red lightning was going at her opponent. Well, as you can guess, she was using the spirit technique and because of this, her lightning also upgraded. It turned red from the White lightning. Not only the color changes, but also the power of that lightning also changes.


    Red lightning was very dangerous and destructive. If you look at the battle ring, then you will notice the destructive power of this lightning. Right now, her opponent was fully focused on dodging her attack. At any cost, he did not want to get hit by that lightning. He was trying to attack while using the spirit technique, but because of the continuous lightninging in his direction; he didn''t get the chance to send his attack toward Jeni.


    Jeni was attacking him with her electro ball. This was a new move she had just recently learned. Compared to the thunderbolts, this consumes less spiritual energy but still doesn''t underestimate these electro balls. When those electro balls hit the battle ring that was creating a hole in that ce. Just imagine how powerful the red lightning was. Because of this, her opponent also only focuses on dodging.


    Even though her opponent was dodging her attack, he still wasn''t as fast as Sam. Because of this, already many times he gets hit by her attacks, and because of this, his armor is also already about to break. It won''t be that long before his armor willpletely break. Because of the lighting control, Jeni''s speed was very fast, and not only that, all this time, she was preparing for her final attack. She continuously attacks her opponent to distract his attention and to prevent him from attacking her.


    She and her opponent were fighting for at least 30 minutes, and because of this, she can also feel that now she only has 30% of her spiritual energy left. Well, not only her, but her opponent is also at his limit. From the first to thest, she did not give any chance to her opponent to attack her. Because of this, her opponent is also very injured right now.


    Suddenly, Jeni brings her two hands toward her opponent and then instantly releases her final attack. Her opponent, who was dodging all this time, did not get the chance to react. She already saw that suddenly she extended both of her hands but before he could guess what would happen or Jump away from his ce, he saw a red lightning dragon was only 50 meters away from him. Also, in no time, that hit him. He didn''t even get the chance to react or get the chance to realize that he already got hit, because after that he was now in a temporarily paralyzed state. He cannot feel anything. It was like because of the lightning, his body system had just turned off.


    But it did notst that long because 5 secondster, he started to feel pain. His full body was in pain. Well, he did not realize, but he was nowying down outside of the battle ring, also at the same time, his armor was already broken, and you can see the injuries on his body. By thest attack, he was very seriously injured.


    Fortunately, the medical team quickly reacted. Five medical team members begin to use their healing in his body to heal him as quickly as they can. Well, suddenly when you receive pain that your body could not handle, then for a second, your nervous system will shut down. For some seconds, you won''t be able to feel pain, but that is only temporary. After that, you will begin to feel the pain. Fortunately, the medical team was ready, and they wasted no time and began his treatment.


    Well, all of this happened in only 10 seconds. Previously, when Jeni extended both of her hands, she instantly released her attacks in less than a second, and also the speed of this technique was very high. Less than a second it already appeared in front of her opponent and only one secondter, now her opponent was outside of the battle ring, and not only that, he was also seriously injured because of her attack. Now she has only 5% of her still spiritual energy.


    Right now, she was waiting for the referee''s call. Well, the referee didn''t dy. He also quickly came to the battle ring and wasted no time, announcing her as the winner of this match. Instantly, all those in the stadium began to cheer. Really, from first tost, she just dominated her opponents. Her opponent didn''t even get the chance to counterattack. All this time, he was just focusing on dodging. Also, everyone saw how powerful those red thunderbolts were. The moment those thunderbolts hit the ring, it just destroys the ground.


    They also saw how easily she just broke that Armor. Jeni''s opponent''s armor just got destroyed only after getting hit 5 times. Well, not only Jeni was fast, but also her opponent was fast. Because of this, he was able to dodge her attack all this time. But even with that, he got hit 5 times and his Armor broke from that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Jeni¡­ Jeni¡­ Jeni." You can now only hear this name in the stadium. Also, her fans were the loudest ones cheering her name. Jeni smiles at those people and leaves the battle ring. She was also injured, but the medical team had already healed her. But even with that, she was very low on spiritual energy and needed some time to recover. Well, in thispetition you cannot use the potion, and because of this, everyone was facing this problem.


    When she came to her teammates, all of them congratted her. Elena, Kenny, and Tina also hugged her. Jeni shows everyone how powerful their royal academy was and also their group was. They were ready to win thispetition and their opponents needed to face this kind of power. Sam at this time also congrattes her. With that, they already have 5 wins. Well, it wasn''t that one of them lost. But Tina and her opponent drew their match because both of them became unconscious at the same time. Other than that, everyone wins their matches. So you can say that they have already won the match, but still, there is a chance that the opponent''s captain will challenge everyone and because of this, they will fight every match.


    Well, if you are a captain and your team has been losing, then you can challenge your opponent''s team. In the challenge, you will fight your whole opponent''s team on your own. This was the advantage that any captain will get in the semifinals or final. Also, because of this, Sam told his teammates that they should only focus on their fight and did you need to worry about winning or losing. But one thing was that, if you really challenge that match, then you cannot lose any match. You need to win every match, which means you need to defeat 8 of your opponent''s team members, and only then will you win that match.


    But still, those people who were supporting the white Tiger Academy still have some hope. But still, no one from the White Tiger Academy was still able to win against the Royal Academy. And the Royal Academy maintained its invincible status. This thing really worried those people who are supporting The White Tiger Academy. No one thought that the Royal Academy''s team would be so strong that the white tiger Academy won''t even win one single match. But still Tony and the others didn''t worry about that because they know that or you can say that, they have the confidence that Sam could easily single-handedly defeat the whole opponent team.


    Now the next match will be between the vice-captains. Also, most likely if the captain of the white tiger Academy wanted to challenge the whole Royal Academy, then you will do that after this match.


    _______________


    The repairing teammates were right now busy repairing the battle ring because it was badly damaged. On the other hand, the injured student from the White Tiger Academy was right now resting in the medical team''s camp. Well, even though he did not have any risk right now, he still needs to rest for some time. Only after that, he will be able to leave the camp.


    Right now, you can see that Alexa was preparing herself for her match by meditating. Well before any match, she did this to control her emotion and increase her focus. This technique was really helpful to her. Because of this, all of her teammates were maintaining silence so that she could meditate. But even though they are maintaining the silence, the audience in the stadium was now loudly cheering for their team. You can also see that Sam''s ssmates were also present in the stadium and they were also loudly cheating on their team. But fortunately, Alexa didn''t break her meditation because of those noises.


    __________To be continued________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 271 271 - Alexa Vs Pijush

    Sometimeter, when the construction team had already finished repairing the battle ring, the referee finally called the next fighters on the battle ring. Alexa at this time finally opened her eyes and then started going toward the battle ring. Tony and her other teammates already said good luck to her. Also, at this time, when all those people who were supporting the Royal Academy saw her, they instantly began to cheer for her. You can say that the poprity of Alexa was much higher than any other student from the Royal Academy.


    "Now, let''s wee our vice captains from each team. From Royal Academy our vice-captain Alexa, and from the white tiger Academy our vice-captain Pijush." When both of the fighters already came to the battle ring, the referee once again introduced them. Once again, all the people present in the stadium begin to p for both of the vice-captains.


    "Before the fight started, I want to tell you that both of the vice captains were very powerful. We know that one of them will and one of them will lose in this fight, but we are very fortunate that we got to the powerful Warriors. In the future, they will be more powerful and will protect our humanity from those monsters. So I want everyone to please p once again for our vice captains," the referee finally finished his speech and left the battle ring. Those audiences once again begin to p and cheer for both of the vice-captains.


    Right now, both Alexa and Pijush were looking at each other. If it was before the college entrance examination, then Pijush would have already given up, but now he has the confidence that he could also win against Alexa. In these few months, he just gave his all to increase his strength for thepetition. Both of the students didn''t say anything to the other and only just looked at each other. They were ready to reveal their full strength, and they were just waiting for the referee to give them the signal.


    The referee also did not waste any time and quickly gave them the signal to fight. The moment they got the signal, both of them had already vanished from their ce. Instantly, shes appear on the battle ring. You can also hear the loud noise that was created by that sh. That sh created A huge impact. But both of them were using the spirit technique. Because of this, a huge impact was created. But both of the students are still holding their ground. The impact sent none of them backward.


    Suddenly, Alexa increased the amount of spiritual energy and because of this, her sword began to glow in a deep blue color. Only at this time was Pijush sent backward. But Alexa did not miss this chance to attack him. She was already in front of Pijush. With an incense speed, she quickly attacked him. Pijush didn''t even get to see her sword. He only saw a blue lighting to our team. He knew that he wouldn''t be able to defend himself and, because of this, he quickly brought his sword in front of him to protect himself.


    All of this happened in less than 5 seconds and Pijush was once again sent backward after getting hit by her sword. But this time he quickly reacted and quickly stabilized himself. Fortunately, this time Alexa did not attack him once again. But the moment he saw in front of him, a sword sh wasing toward him. Wasting no time, he quickly jumped away from that ce to dodge that attack.


    Right now, even though Pijush maintains a calm face, inside he was thinking about how powerful Alexa was because the mastery she has over the spirit technique has already surprised him. Previously, he already noticed how easily she increased her spiritual energy and instantly turned the glow of her sword into a deep blue color. But fortunately, he still wanted to fight with her because being good at spirit technique doesn''t mean that she has already won this fight.


    Both of them once again begin to approach each other while also sending sword shes. Both of their swords shes continuously sh with each other, and that creates a huge impact. At this time, when Alexa is already in front of Pijush, she instantly uses her cross-sword technique. Instantly, a plus-shaped sword sh appeared. She decided to attack Pijush with this technique from this close distance. Pijush also did not expect that, but fortunately, he was able to react quickly. He decided to counterattack with his own sword sh. Both of the sword shes sh with each other and at this time, both Alexa and Pijush already jump backward. Because that sh created a strong impact and they did not want to get caught in that impact.


    Even though Pijush''s sword sh was powerful, it wasn''t able to cancel Alexa''s sword sh. On the other hand, Alexa''s sword sh was able to cancel Pijush''s sword sh and then went toward him. But fortunately, he had already moved away from that ce. Only at this time do those audiences feel the power behind that sword sh. Because that sword sh already came very close to them before it got by the protective barrier that was created in front of them to protect them. But even though it got canceled by that barrier, those audiences felt the impact.


    But if you thought that this would make those audiences scared, then you were wrong. The result was exactly the opposite. After feeling the power behind that sh, those people just be very excited and once again begin to cheer for Alexa.


    In the battle ring,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Both of the warriors once again shed with each other, but this time Pijush got sent backward. Because this time Alexa uses her full power. Previously, she did not use her full power because she was using arge amount of spiritual energy, but this time, she only uses some amount of her spiritual energy when using her full strength. This already shows everyone how powerful she was, even if she did not use the spirit technique.


    Alexa, at this time, did not give Pijush any chance and already used her quick movement toe in front of him. Pijush wasn''t able to stabilize himself and because of this, he once again got hit by her attack. It once again sent him backward, and he was about to fall out of the battle link, but instantly he pierced his sword into the ground to stop himself from falling from the battle ring. He quickly stabilized himself and once again stood up. Fortunately, at this time, Alexa did not attack him because she already thought that he would be sent outside of the battle ring, but she didn''t expect that he would stabilize himself this way.


    Right now, if you look at Pijush, then you can see that he was also bleeding from his mouth. Well, actually after getting hit by those many sword strikes, even though he did not get injured outside, the impact was already showing his effect.


    Pijush was looking toward Alexa, and Alexa had already started to approach him. But suddenly he did something that nobody expected except his teammates. Alexa, who was going toward him, suddenly got hit by a strong light. As you can guess, Pijush attacked her with his confused Ray attack. He also already learned how to use the spells and he is already able to use the confused Ray technique. Previously, he wasn''t nning to use this technique, but right now he knows that he won''t be able to win against Alexa if he fights like this and because of this, he decided to use this technique.


    For 15 seconds, Alexa will remain confused, and that was enough time for him to attack her. Wasting no time, he already uses his full speed toe in front of her and begin to attack her non-stop with her sword.


    Tony and the others who are watching this match are also suddenly very surprised when Pijush suddenly uses this move against Alexa. Who would have thought that he could also use the spell and he will use that against Alexa? At this time, you can see that Kira, Saara, and Dan were very worried about her. But suddenly Sam told them only one thing:


    "Don''t worry. Even using those types of techniques, you cannot defeat Alexa. Well, she did not expect that and because of this, she is just confused, but it won''t take that long before she will start her counterattack."


    Tony and the girls who already know Alexa better than those 3 just smile at them and then once again focus on the battle ring.


    For the first five seconds, Pijush just continuously attacks Alexa without any stops, and at this time Alexa is unable to defend herself. This already did some damage to her, but that wasn''t that serious.


    ____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 272 272 - Captains Privilege.

    8 secondster,


    Alexa finally moved from her ce. Well, the confusing ray, you can say that it was blocking her sight, and not only that, it also impacted on her senses. But Alexa was already used to this, because previously she and her teacher already fought like this, and with this, she gained experience. For the first 8 seconds, she was trying to control her senses and, because of this, seemed unable to defend herself from Pijush''s attack. But right now, she already controls herself and because of this, she quickly jumps away from that ce.


    Well, even though she is still unable to see anything because the effect of that confused ray was still affecting her sight, she is already able to control her senses and she can sense. Pijush already came in front of her and was about to attack once again. But at this time, suddenly Alexa moved her body to dodge the attack. But Pijush did not stop attacking her. He just continuously swung her sword toward Alexa. But right now, even though Alexa is unable to see anything, she was able to dodge those attacks.


    Well, it also did not take that much time for her sight to return. She once again is able to see everything clearly. The moment she opened her eyes, he already saw her opponent''s sword just about to reach her. But before that reaches her, she dodges her body to dodge the attack. At this time, Alexa also didn''t let go of this chance, and she also quickly attacked him. Because of this, an unexpected thing happened. Pijush tried to dodge this attack. Even though he just got hit by one attack that already sent him outside the battle ring. Well, previously, he was very close to the battle ring and Alexa used this chance toe very close to him and attack him. Pijush right now is outside of the battle ring and he just doesn''t know what happened just now.


    Well, actually, because Alex had already recovered some of her sights, she did not waste any more time and quickly spotted her opponent, and when she noticed that he was already very close to the corner of the battle ring. With that condition, she decided to finish this match, and because of this using her full speed, she instantly came in front of Pijush and attacked him with her full strength. You can say that in this attack, she already used her full spiritual energy, also her full strength, and her full speed. So you can imagine with these threebinations, it has already be a very powerful attack.


    Pijush tried to block that attack, but he was unable to react in time and got hit by that attack. Also, while fighting, hepletely forgot to notice that he was already very close to the corner of the battle ring. So with this, after getting hit by her attack, he got sent outside of the battle ring.


    Right now you can see that Pijush wasying down on the ground with an unexpected expression. Because he is still unable to believe that he was just defeated like this. But while lying down on the ground, he suddenly began to feel pain in his chest area. Only then he came back to his senses and noticed that his armor was already damaged and arge wound was created in that area. Blood was alsoing out of that wound.


    The medical team already starteding toward him. Like those other people, they were also watching the match. So when they saw that unexpectedly Pijush had just been sent outside of the battle ring, they weren''t able to react on time. But a few secondster, when they noticed that he was bleeding andying down on the ground with arge wound in his chest area, only then those medical team members reacted quickly and, wasting no time, started going toward him.


    Those people in the stadium also have the same situation as those medical team members. They are also unable to react on time when they notice that out of nowhere Alexa is able to react quickly and send her opponent outside of the battle ring. Everything happened so quickly that no one was able to react on time. Only when those medical teams started going toward Pijush and the referee entered the battle ring to announce the winner, only then did those people in the audiencee back to their senses. Instantly the whole stadium was full of cheering except for those people who were supporting The White Tiger Academy.


    Tony and the others also started cheering for Alexa. They also didn''t expect that she would defeat her opponent like this. But well, who cares about that? Because of this, all of them are now cheering for her. The referee already came to the battle ring and announced Alexa as the winner of the match. The whole stadium was now full of pping and cheering for her.


    What at this time? If you look at the white Tiger Academy''s teams, then you can see the worried look on their faces. Until their vice-captain was not defeated, they didn''t have any tension on their face, but right now all of them were now very worried. At this time, they all were looking toward their captain. Now all of them were waiting for their captain to make the decision for their team. Because until now they did not win any match against the Royal Academy. Right now, if the white tiger academy wanted to win this match, then they needed to challenge the whole royale academy team and only their captain would fight this match. But the main question was, will he be able to defeat the whole team on his own? This was the question that everyone was thinking about right now.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Gustav, who always has a serious expression on his face, finally made his decision. He signals to the referee that he wanted to use his authority as the vice-captain to challenge the whole Royal Academy team. The referee nodded instantly and announced that the captain of the white tiger Academy wanted to use his authority as the captain to challenge the whole Royal Academy team. Well, right now, if he wants to win thepetition, then he needs to defeat all the team members of the Royal Academy''s team.


    Instantly, the excitement of those audiences once again increased. They were just waiting for something like this, and finally, when Gustav decided to fight Royal Academy on his own, the whole stadium was now full of cheering. Well, in this match everyone will get to see the power of the captain of the white tiger Academy.


    ___________________


    Well, right now, the construction teams are repairing the whole battle ring. Thest attack from Alexa already split the corner part of the battle ring. With this, you can imagine how powerful that attack was. Also, because Gustav will fight against all the team members of the Royal Academy, the referee also gave the Royal Academy to prepare for this. Well, he actually gave the Royal Academy the time to recover their full strength.


    Right now, Tony and the others are trying to recover their full strength. They already take the health potions and spiritual energy recovery potions, but that won''t recover their full health or energy this quickly. And because of this, they are now in a meditation position and circting their energy recovery technique. With this, they will be able to recover their health as quickly as they can and get ready to fight their match. Except for Sam, Dan, and Saara, everyone was meditating. Only three of them still did not participate in the match.


    Right now, Sam was thinking of one thing: should he send Kenny, Tina, Tony, and Elena for the battle? All four of them were injured and still did not recover fully from their injuries. Well, not only four of them, but you can say that every 7 of them were injured and still did not recover their full strength and health.


    After some thinking, he already decided who he will send into the battle ring first. He decided that he won''t send Kira and Tina this time. Both of them were the most injured ones on his team and it wasn''t good that they would fight in this match with those injuries. Instead of them, he will send Dan and Saara. Also, one more important thing was that Gustav will get the time to recover after he will win one match. He doesn''t need to fight back to back so that he could recover his strength and health if he gets injured. Even if he was stronger than them but due to his low on spiritual energy or health, he could still lose the match to prevent the organization association from already deciding that this privilege should be given to all those captains if they challenge their opponent''s teams.


    Right now, even Alena, Gloria, Fiona, Hina, and Victor are also watching this match. All of them already wanted to see the power of Sam, but it seems it will take some time. Also, there was a possibility that he didn''t need to fight. Because right now if anyone from Royal Academy could defeat the captain of the white tiger Academy, then Sam doesn''t even need to fight this match. Well, if this happens, then they will be quite disappointed.


    ____________To be continued_________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 273 273 - Angry Sam

    Finally, 30 minutester, the construction team had already repaired the battle ring and Gustav was ready for the fight. Well, not only he, but on the other hand, Alexa and the others were also ready for the fight. Even though Alexa and the others still didn''t recover, they are at full strength or energy, but you can say that they at least recover 70% of their strength and energy.


    When all of them wake up from their meditation, Sam already told them about his n. Alexa, Tony, and the others didn''t have any problem with that because they knew that Sam was doing that for their benefit. Also, Tina and Kira already fought previously, and right now, if Dan and Saara went to the battle ring instead of them, then they didn''t have any problem. So with that, you can say that everyone was ready for the fight. Alexa, Tony, Jeni, Elena, and the others didn''t know how powerful Gustav was, but one thing there was that he won''t be as powerful as Sam.


    At this time, everyone was looking at the battle ring. The referee at this time came to the battle ring.


    "I know that everyone present in this battleground was very excited about this match because this match is very exciting and we will get to see the power of a captain. As everyone knows that in the semi-final and final match, every captain gets the privilege. Using that, they could challenge the opponent teams. But one thing was that he needed to win against all those 8 fighters from his opposing team. If he loses one match, then his team will lose the semifinal match. On the other hand, we have our Royal Academy team. They already showed their power to us and we know that they were also very powerful. It will be a very intense match between The White Tiger Academy and the Royal Academy. All the team members of the Royal Academy will try to defeat the captain of the white tiger Academy. So, wasting no time, let''s wee our captain from the White Tiger Academy, Gustav Kyle."


    When the referee finished his speech, everyone in the stadium was looking at the White Tiger Academy''s team. Everyone can see that, finally, captain Gustav was walking toward the battle ring. Even though previously his teammates were unable to win any match, he still has confidence in his eyes. The moment those people who supported The White Tiger saw him, they just started to cheer loudly. Right now, everyone in the stadium can feel the powerful aura that he was releasing. Well, actually, Gustav also didn''t know that he was releasing his aura. Because he was now also very excited about this match because he will fight the whole royal academy on his own and he also needs to win against them.


    "Wonderful. Captain Gustav is already showing his power to everyone. Now everyone wees the first fighter from the Royal Academy." The referee said that and, once again, everyone looked toward the Royal Academy. From the Royal Academy, Saara started going toward the battle ring. People who thought that Kira will once again fight this match got slightly disappointed, but then they started to support her. They also know that Kira got injured in her match and most likely because of this, Saara will be fighting in this match.


    Right now, you can see that Saara was fully serious about this match. She already knows that she wasn''t as powerful as her opponent, but that doesn''t mean that she will give up. The moment she entered the battle ring, she started to prepare her attack and waited for the referred to give them the signal to fight. Not only Saara, but Gustav was also very serious about this fight.


    The referee also did not waste any more time and gave them the signal to fight. The moment Saara gets the signal to fight, she instantly releases her attack - The Water ground. Well, as the name tells you, this move will fill the ground with water. Well, with this attack, she wanted to fill the ground with water, and then, using her water control, she wanted to stop Gustav from moving.


    But Gustav also wasn''t slow. The moment he saw Saara was already released from her attack, he quickly jumped from that. Not only that, he already brings out his weapon and throws it toward Saara. He also used the spirit technique from the start and because of this, the speed of his attack was very fast. But fortunately, Saara already noticed that and she quickly jumped away from that ce. Because of this, her attack was canceled and the water from the ground disappeared.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Previously, those people in the audience were unable to see the weapon of Gustav, but they were finally able to notice that. He was using a throwing knife. Right now, you can see that the knife was pierced through the battle ring. Also, you can still show the blue color that wasing out of that knife.


    Saara was about to attack him once again, but Gustav was quicker than her. At first, he throws 2 more throwing knives toward her, and then he vanishes from her ce. Actually, those two more knives were to distract Saara. After throwing those two knives, he uses his movement technique to quicklye toward her. Well, you can see that his n was sessful because when he threw those two knives toward Saara, she had already canceled her spell and dodged the two knives. But suddenly Gustav appeared behind her and then instantly attacked with his sword. She wasn''t able to react to this because she just dodge those two knives and out of nowhere; he appeared behind her and attacked her.


    His sword hit on her Armor. By the impact,` she sent backward, not only that but blood already started toe out from her mouth. She already knows that she will only be able to take 5 more of this type of attack. After that, she will be very injured by that. Well, because all of this happened in a short time, she was unable to react on time. She was just about to drop to the ground, but Gustav once again appeared in front of her and once again attacked her. Previously, she wasn''t able to stabilize herself and because of this time also she wasn''t able to react. With these two continuous attacks, Saara was already injured, and she was now outside of the battle ring. Right now you can see that she wasying down on the ground motionlessly. Actually, she still had a level to process what was happening. But then she started to cough blood.


    The medical team was already in front of her and quickly started to stabilize her injuries. Alexa and others were very worried about her. The moment they saw herying down on the ground motionlessly, they became very worried, but originally the medical team already started to heal her. Well, actually until the referee did not announce the winner, they won''t be able to go toward her or it could have seemed that the Royal Academy was breaking the rule. Because of this, they still didn''t approach her. But one thing was for sure, all of them were very angry. Sam was the angriestpared to his teammates. Gustav could easily finish that fight while making Saara unconscious. We just had one more, but he decided to injure her this badly. Because of this, he was very angry.


    Tony, Alexa, and the others were also angry because of this. They already know that Gustav can easily make her unconscious just one more time, but he still decided to do this and because of this, they were very angry. Fortunately, nothing happened to their friend or they will just break the rule. At this time, Tony, Alexa, Jeni, and Elena started to worry about Kenny and Dan. Because most likely when they will go to the battle ring to fight Gustav, most likely he will once again do this to them. And because of this, they became worried. They instantly look at each other andmunicate with each other in their mind. Right now, in the team, except for Sam and Alexa, Tony, Jeni, and Elena, were at the same level. All three of them were at the same level of power. Well, Alexa was stronger than them, but she still had a hard time winning against them.


    ``


    Now, 4 of them are deciding who will be going to the battle ring after that because they did not want to send Dan and Kenny to the battle ring. Because of this, they also quickly look toward Sam. Only at this time do they notice something different about Sam. They don''t know why, but when they look at Sam; they see a very cold look on his face. That even makes them very worried. Even looking at that face, they even be afraid and gulp down.


    ____________To be continued____________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 274 274 - Sam Making His Move

    Sam was about to start walking toward the battle ring. But suddenly, Alexa came in front of him.


    "Sam, let me fight. You don''t need to fight him. He won''t even be able to fight against you," Alexa quickly said to him. When Sam Alexa suddenly came in front of him only then, he came to his senses and felt how angry he was feeling. Suddenly, he saw Alexa trying to exin herself. Only then did he realize how strangely he was behaving.


    He released a deep breath and calmed himself down. Then he smiled at Alexa and said,


    "You don''t need to exin. I know how strangely I was behaving. I am really sorry about that and don''t worry I am ok. If you want to fight, I don''t have any problem." Sam said to them.


    After hearing his word and finally, when they saw that he was smiling, Tony and the others were finally sighing in relief. Actually, they never show Sam bing this angry. All of them are thinking, what would he do in that state if he went to the battle ring? Because of this, Alexa quickly came in front of him and said to him that she wanted to fight.


    Well, actually Alexa and the others didn''t know this, but Sam was still angry at this time and he still wanted to do the same thing that previously wanted to do in his anger. Actually, he wanted to give Gustav a good medicine that he would never forget. But Alexa said to him that she wanted to fight, and because of this, he just gave up on this matter. Because he knows that Alexa would be enough to defeat him. Previously against Pijush, Alexa did not use her full strength. Most likely, she will use that in this fight.


    ___________________


    Right now, nobody knows that Gustav just dodged a bullet. All of them were looking at the battle ring. When the referee finally announced the result, those people who were supporting the White Tiger Academy finally began to cheer loudly. On the other hand, those people who were supporting the Royal Academy now only look at the medical team.


    Right now the medical team is still treating Saara. All of them are very worried about her. They also saw that the moment the referee announced the result, Sam and others quickly came toward the battleground to see their friend''s condition. Fortunately, nothing happened and the medical team was already able to stabilize her condition. But, Saara already became unconscious because of the previous pain. At first, she didn''t feel any pain, but then suddenly a pain hit her and made her unconscious. Just looking at her condition, everyone was already ready to get her revenge. But they need to wait 30 minutes. Only after that, the next fighter will be Gustav.


    Right now, Sam was looking toward the battle ring. Gustav walks down from the battle ring. Both of their eyes meet, and Sam can see the smugness on Gustav''s face. Well, it looks like he was trying to tell Sam that if he dared to fight him, then his condition would be the same as Saara''s. Not only that, but Gustav also releases his aura when his eyes meet Sam. He wanted to show Sam how powerful he was.


    Finally, Sam wasn''t able to hold back himself. All this time he was trying to control himself, but this time he finally released all of his anger through his pressure. Instantly, he also released his aura and only focused on Gustav. Because of this, no one other than him will feel the full pressure of his aura. Gustav, who was showing a smug smile for a moment, instantly became breathless because he was unable to breathe. A sudden huge pressure was on him and that pressure was trying to press him down. He was trying to resist that pressure using his full strength, but he wasn''t sessful.


    "Sam, calm down. Calm down, or you will kill him. You are also making everyone scared of you." Suddenly, he heard Alena''s voice in his mind. Only then Sam stops that. Previously, when Gustav released his aura, Alexa and the others also felt that, but then instantly they saw that Sam did not hold back and he also released the pressure. But they did not feel that much pressure on them, but they could see that instantly Gustav became breathless. His face became very red, and it looked like he wasn''t able to breathe. This time, none of them went to Sam to stop him because they also wanted to do the same.


    ____________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    The audience, from the first tost, noticed everything that was happening in the battle ring. When Gustav released his pressure, the audience was able to feel that, but that wasn''t that powerful. That will affect them. But when Sam finally released his pressure, everyone present in the stadium felt that, and also they got affected by that. Their situation wasn''t like Gustav, it really made them very scared. Those people who were supporting the Royal Academy and those people who were supporting The White Tiger Academy became silent. Every single one of them now didn''t have the strength to, or you can say that they are very scared to make sounds while Sam was still present on the battleground.


    Gloria, Hina, and Vector were also very surprised because that was the first time that they saw Sam this much angry. Fiona, Gloria, and Alena became worried. Because only three of them know the power of Sam and they know that he could easily defeat Gustav. They were just hoping Sam did not do something in his angry state. Fortunately, Alena quickly told Sam to calm down.


    Sam, at this time, did not say anything to his friend and just left the battleground. The condition of Saara already has stabilized so there was no need to worry about her. At this time, the medical team takes her to the medical tent and because of this, Tony and the others were also left at the battleground. Gustav, who was previously about to be crushed by the pressure, also left the battle ring. He needed some time to stabilize himself. When he came back toward his team, all of his teammates were looking at him with a worried look. They never thought that Sam could do that to their captain without even fighting.


    ___________________


    "Fortunately, Sam didn''t do anything. I already thought that he would just crush Gustav with his pressure." Fiona said that while sighing. Well, she also knows the power of Sam because previously Sam and she fought. Obviously, winning all those fights was only because Sam wasn''t that experienced in real battle while fighting people, and also she was already breaking through. Because of this, she was able to win those fights. Fighting people and fighting monsters weren''t the same thing. Well, it waspletely another matter if you arepletely focused on killing your enemy, but in this type of match, that waspletely a different thing.


    "Don''t worry about that because I have full confidence that he won''t do something like that even though he became angry. But it was very normal for him to be angry because Gustav could easily defeat Saara, but he decided to be defeated like this and this will naturally make anyone angry. But one thing I waspletely sure of is that if the next fighter will be Sam, it will be very bad for Gustav." Gloria said that. She knows her brother better than anyone. And she can also feel the pain that her brother was feeling. She was also angry at Gustav.


    "Hmm¡­ it is possible that in the next fight, he will go to the battle ring." Alena also nodded, hearing them. She also knows his character. Sam did not like any travel and if anything troubled Sam, then he would solve that thing instantly or you can say as fast as possible. Now, in this case, the trouble was Gustav, so naturally, Sam could try to solve him in the next match.


    _________________


    Right now, Alexa has once again started meditating because next she will be fighting and she will use her full stain to win against Gustav. Previously she didn''t use this move because she didn''t think that she needed to use that technique, but this time she knows that changed to use this technique.


    Right now, if you are thinking how Sam just with his pressure makes Gustav breathless. Well, it is possible because, while releasing his pressure, he also uses the telekinesis technique on Gustav. Because of this, the result became like this.


    On the other hand, Gustav and his teammates knew that there was someone who was stronger than Gustav. In their college many times previously, many of them challenged him, but he just defeated them instantly. Because of this, they were also very confident in their captain that he would be able to defeat even the opponent team''s captain while also being very powerful and even he can make their Captain breathless.


    ____________To be continued________

 Chapter 275 275 - Winning The Semi-Final

    30 minutester,


    It was trying to begin the match once again. Gustav, once again in his confident gaze, went toward the battle ring. It was looking like he didn''t even face anything previously and he has full confidence that he will win this match. On the other hand, Alexa also started going toward the battle ring.


    Right now, those audiences who were supporting the Royal Academy instantly began to cheer for Alexa the moment they saw her. Well, previously when Sam first time came to the battleground and also made his move, all those audiences became silent, but now the excitement once again returns and all of them begin to cheer..


    Right now, if you look at Alexa, then you can see that she did not have any anger on her face. She was now fully focused on this match and only showing her serious face. Many people thought that this would be a match between two captains, but unexpectedly, Alexa once again starteding toward the battle ring. Well, not that they were disappointed because they knew that she was also very powerful and, most likely, she could also defeat Gustav.


    After both of the warriors entered the battle ring, the referee went out of the battle ring. He did not waste any more time and quickly gave them the signal to fight.


    In the battle ring, Alexa and Gustav didn''t waste any more time, and at full speed, approached each other. Less than 5 secondster, they were already in front of each other and started their attack. Both of them were using swords. From the beginning, Alexa and Gustav were using their full strength because they knew that if they did not use their full strength, then they could lose this match.


    When both of their swords shed with each other, that created a huge impact, but both of them did not stop and continuously attacked each other. Right now, both of them are using the full power of their spirit technique and because of this, their swords were glowing in a deep blue color. With this, you can imagine how much they master the spirit technique. Well, also one more thing was that both of their reflexes were very good so that they could easily avoid each other''s attack. Also, because of this, none of them got hit, but that does not mean that they could continue like this.


    ? After continuously attacking her opponent, Alexa already knew that like this she won''t be able to win against him and she decided to use full power. Suddenly, the swing speed of Alexa increased. Well, actually, right now she could swing her sword 20 times in less than a second. This was her ultimate attack because with this intense swing, when she also used her full spiritual energy through the spirit technique, it really became a destructive technique.


    The moment her swing speed increased, Gustav already got hit by her attack, and that really damaged his armor. He didn''t even expect that suddenly her swing speed would increase in this match and because of this; he was unable to protect himself against that. Well, it was natural because how could he protect himself in front of these intense swings where Alexa was attacking him with her sword 20 times in less than a second? Previously, both of them intensely swung their swords 10 times in less than a second, and because of this previously they were evenly matched and unable to injure each other, but right now when the swing speed of Alexa''s sword increases, he is unable to protect himself.


    Instantly, he jumped away from this ce to protect himself. But Alexa did not give him any chance to run away. With her full speed, she once again came in front of him and began to attack. Right now, Gustav is also trying to counter-attack, but still, he is unable to block all the swings. Right now he was wearing an Armor of B-grade, but even a high-grade Armor like this won''t be able to resist all the attacks of Alexa. Because of this, you can already see the sign of breaking down in his armor. Right now, he could do only one thing, which was to protect himself. Previously, he did not think that Alexa would be this powerful because previously, when she fought with Pijush; she did not use this move and because of this; he thought that he could win against her.


    Well, actually Alexa wanted to finish this match as quickly as she could and she did not want to give any chance to her opponent that he would make any move against her. Well, if she gave him that chance to react, and he did something unexpected, then she could lose this match. Because of this, she was attacking him continuously, even using her full strength.


    Right now, Tony and the others were looking at the fight that was happening in the battle ring. The moment they saw Alexa unleash her full strength, they began to cheer loudly. They could also see Gustav wasn''t expecting that, and he was unable to protect himself. With that, they were already sure that he would be defeated in no time. Well, not only Tony and the others but those white tiger Academy''s team also really did not expect that. Pijush, who was looking at this match, was also got startled. He previously thought that he and Alexa were evenly matched, but now he can tell that Alexa didn''t even use full strength against him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ________________________


    20 minutester,


    Suddenly, Alexa appears behind Gustav and instantly attacks him. She did not attack him with her sword, but she just punched him. But even with that punch, she makes Gustav unconscious. Right now, you can see that Gustav was bleeding, and he has many wounds on his body. His arm already got destroyed and because of this, Alexa did not use her sword to attack him because that could easily cut him. On the other hand, Alexa only has light injuries and only some scratches in her armor.


    Those audiences saw the moment when Alexa makes Gustav unconscious. Wasting no time, they begin to cheer loudly as much as they can. Previously, those audiences were also surprised when they saw that Alexa did not use her full strength against Pijush, but she decided to use her full strength against Gustav. On the other hand, those audiences who were supporting The White Tiger Academy got disappointed when they saw how Alexa defeated Gustav. No one expected this, but Alexa already did that.


    The referee and the medical team also did not waste anymore time and quickly came to the battle ring. The medical team already started to heal Gustav, while the referee, on the other hand, began his speech.


    "Ladies and gentlemen, right now we have finally our winner, vice-captain Alexa, from Royal Academy. Who could have expected that she was this much powerful and in her previous fight she did not use her full strength? So we have already got one more finalist, the Royal Academy, who will be fighting the Golden Dawn in the final. Please, everyone, p for our vice-captain Alexa." When the referee finished saying that, all the audience was already beginning to p and cheer for Alexa.


    Right now, both the white tiger and the Royal Academy team are present on the battleground. The moment Alexa came out of the battle ring, Jeni and the other girls went toward her and then hugged her. They were really happy that Alexa defeated that arrogant man. On the other hand, The White Tiger team was already crying that they lost this semi-final match. Suddenly, when Tony and the others were celebrating, they notice Pijush starteding toward them. They all were focused on him.


    He came in front of Alexa and then said,


    "I really underestimated you. Previously, I thought that we were evenly matched, but right now I already realize how much my mistake was. I really want to improve my strength and only then can I reach your level. Also, I want to tell all of you that I am really sorry about my captain''s arrogant behavior. I know that he could easily defeat Saara, but he decided to be defeated like that and I am also really ashamed because of this. But still I hope you will forget us and finally I really wanted to congratte your team. I just hope that you will win this year''spetition."


    Pijush said all of this and then once again said sorry to all of them and left that area. Not only that, when Sam and the others were also looking toward The White Tiger team, they could see that everyone in the white tiger team was also saying sorry to them. Well, this is really an expected but same just signal to them that they already forgive them. At this time, the whole Royal Academy team looked toward those excited audiences and said their thanks to them for their support. They finally won this semi-final match, and they were really happy about this.


    ___________To be continued__________

 Chapter 276 276 - 3rd Years Matches

    2 dayster, on 12th January,


    Today was the 3rd year''s semifinal match. Because of this, everyone once again went to the stadium excited. 10th January was the first year''s semifinal match, the next day was the second year''s semi-final match and now today was the third year''s semi-final match. As you know that previously from the first year the Royal Academy and Golden Dawn were the winner and they will be fighting in the final. On the other hand, from the second year, the Royal Academy and The White Tiger Academy were the winners.


    But one thing was that the second year''s team didn''t face the Golden Dawn or The White Tiger Academy. This is the Keyon Academy. Andpared to the Golden Dawn or the White Tiger, or the Royal Academy, this Keyon wasn''t that powerful, and also because of this, the Royal Academy''s 2nd-year team were able to win that match easily. Actually, in the second-year team you can say that we just only have 5 powerful warriors, but other than them all the other students weren''t that powerful. Because of this, many people thought that if they faced the Golden Dawn or the white Tiger Academy, then there would be a 50% chance of winning or losing the match.


    Well, forget about all the things because today was the match between the third years. And you can say that 80% of the people were very excited to see Gloria in the battle ring. She was the number one genius and also was the youngest warrior who was able to break through to C-grade. Because of this, everyone was very excited to see the power of this genius. In the previous year, Gloria''s team was also the finalist, but unfortunately, something happened and they lost that match. And because of this, they weren''t able to win the previous year''spetition, but this year everyone knows that she and her team have the best chance to win this match.


    Right now, Sam and his friends are alsoing toward the stadium. Obviously, he and his friends were very excited to see the match between the third years because, unlike the second years, all the third-year seniors were very experienced and also very powerful. And these matches will be different from the others. Sam already said good luck in his mind to the team who will be fighting Gloria because she doesn''t need good luck but the opponent team will be needing good luck. Because, except for him or his teacher or Fiona, no one knows the true power of Gloria.


    Well, now back to the present matter. The stadium was already full of people. No one wanted to bete for this match and because of this, everyone already came to the stadium as early as they could.


    All four teams who will fight in the semi-final were also present on the battleground. They were now waiting in their waiting room for the call. When the announcer calls them to the battleground, only then they will go to the battleground. Right now, if you look at the meeting room of every team, then you can see that every team was serious about this fight. All of them knew that this was a very important match and that they would win to qualify for the final and because of this, they were very serious about this fight.


    Right now Gloria and Fiona were talking about something. They were talking about the strategy that they will follow for this semi-final match. Well, right now they don''t know who will be their opponent. And also one more thing was that was there any other student who was able to break through to C-grade? They don''t know anything about this because not everyone wanted to reveal their true strength, and because of this, both of them were nning for their match. Well, actually, not only them, but those other teams are also nning for this semi-final match. The match will be starting at 11 a.m. but right now it was only 10:30 a.m. so you can say that they were still 30 minutes before the match started.


    Right now, the construction team is checking the battle ring before the match and if they see any damage, it will be repaired quickly. The medical team had alreadye to the battleground, and they had already set up their camp. You have to say that the medical team was also an important thing in thispetition because if any student gets seriously injured, then the medical team is the one who will be treating them. Because of this, the medical team, they also have higher experience and skillful warriors who have good control over their light control technique.


    Even though there were 30 minutes remaining for the match to start, still you can see that the stadium was full of people.


    30 minutester,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Finally, after waiting for 30 minutes, everyone can see the announcering toward the battle ring. Aftering toward the battle, the announcer finally started his speech. After giving his speech, he finally revealed the opponents. Right now on the big screen, everyone can see that the Royal Academy will be fighting the Golden Dawn, while the white Tiger Academy will be fighting the Falcon Academy. As you can guess, the Falcon Academy once again qualified for the semi-final and they will be fighting The White Tiger Academy. Because of this, they were called The Dark Horse. Unfortunately, only the second-year team from the Falcon Academy was unable to qualify for the semi-final, but other than that, every one qualified for the semi-final. Well, still they did not call the fourth King because they still did not qualify for the final and win the final and this was the reason they still call the Darkhorse not the fourth king.


    Well also the most interesting and intense fight will be held in the second half and the fight between the file can Academy and The White Tiger will be the first fight. No one has any problem with that because the intense fight will be thest part and everyone will enjoy that. But it doesn''t mean that the first flight won''t be intense, because even The White Tiger Academy and the Falcon Academy were also very powerful and their match will be an intense match that everyone wanted to see. There was a high chance that they could also defeat The White Tiger team.


    Well, so the announcer right now finally announced the name of the teams and called them into the battleground. Both of the teams came to the battleground with a grand wee. Both of the teams are confident and looking serious about this match. No one knows what strategy they will follow for this match, but one thing they know is that this match will be very interesting. All the audience wee both the teams with cheering and pping. Both of the team came to their tent and sat down. After that, the announcer called the first fighters on the battle ring. From both of the teams, their teammates started to go toward the battle ring.


    ________________________


    It was now 1:30 p.m. and the first match was finally finished. Unfortunately, the Falcon Academy is still unable to win against The White Tiger Academy, but if you look at the wins and losses, then the Falcon Academy has three wins in their favor and five losses. Well, their captain also decided to use privilege to single-handedly challenge the White Tiger team, but he once again lost the match against the captain of the white tiger team. But except for the captain, he almost defeated everyone. Even the vice-captain of The White Tiger Academy got defeated by him.


    Right now everyone was cheering for both of the teams because both of them gave their hundred percent in this match. And their fight was wonderful and because of this, the audience appreciated it. Right now, you can see that the Falcon Academy''s team was crying, but hearing those cheering and pping, they stopped pping and finally got back their willpower to fight. This year they were unable to win, but next year they will win this match.


    _____________________


    Well, right now it is tiffin time and after that, once again, the second match or you can say thest match will be starting. Sam and his friends were also going to the cafeteria to eat something. The next team who will be fighting in the match didn''t need toe out of their waiting room because the association will provide them with food. Sam also noticed his mom and dad, who were with Alena. They were also going to the cafeteria, but most likely they will be going to the teacher quarter in the cafeteria. Well, in the cafeteria, the teachers have an extra ce where they will eat their food.


    "I am very excited about the next match. Sam, what do you think? Will sister Gloria fight in this match or only sister Fiona will be fighting in this match? Because both of them already break through to C-grade, and I also have a feeling that just one of them will be enough to handle the other team." Tony asked Sam.


    __________To be continued_______

 Chapter 277 277 - Royal Academy Vs Golden Dawn

    " I also don''t know what their strategy is, but I know my sister would never underestimate any team. So you can say that forget about using the privilege or any other thing. Most likely, she will be fighting in a normal way with her opponent''s team. Also, you cannot be sure about the opponent team''s power. What if the captain of the opposing team had also already broken through to C-grade? You cannot be sure, so I think my sister won''t be taking any risk," Sam said to them.


    After hearing that, everyone also agrees with him because they know that sister Gloria wasn''t the type of person who is overconfident. And most likely she will fight in the match normally.


    ___________


    ? 2 hours and 30 minutester,


    Everyone was already in the stadium and looking at the battle ring because there was a fight going on in the battle ring. The fight was between the two vice-captains. But if you carefully observe the fight, then you will notice that in front of Fiona her opponent wasn''t able to do that much damage to her. She was already using her early C-grade power, whereas her opponent only used the peak D-grade power. Most likely her opinion still wasn''t able to break through and as you can guess that her opponent wasn''t able to do anything in front of her. Even though you can tell that her opponent also wasn''t weak and had rich experience in fighting, but still because his power was lower than hers, he wasn''t able to do anything.


    Right now, Fiona, with her full power, just continuously attacked him while he was only busy defending himself from those attacks. If you look at his arm, then you can see that those attacks already damaged it, and not only that, but he also was bleeding from various ces where he received injuries. Fiona is not only faster than him but also stronger than him and because of this he wasn''t able to keep up with her and just got injured by her attacks.


    Suddenly Fiona appears behind and instantly attacks him. He wasn''t able to react on time and because of this; he got sent flying. But he quickly tries to stabilize himself even though he can feel the pain. But most likely Fiona did not want to give him any chance and because of this, she already continued to shoot blue sword shes toward him. Those blue sword shes were full of spiritual energy, and they very quickly came toward him. He previously did not notice those sword shes, because he was trying to stabilize himself but just those attacks about to reach him, he already noticed those. But it was already toote to react, and he knows that he won''t be able to dodge those attacks. He quickly brings his sort in front of him and uses that as a shield to protect himself from those attacks.


    He wasn''t using your normal sword, but he was using a two-handed great sword. Fortunately, he was already able to stabilize himself and quickly bring that sword in front of him. sh after sh, he just got attacked by those sword shes continuously. It looked like Fiona didn''t have any n to stop her attack. Fortunately, the opponent''s sword was a high-grade sword and because of this, that sword still did not break. But he can still feel the impact that he was getting from those attacks. Even though he was trying to hold on to his ground, he was sliding backward after getting hit by those attacks. Right now he is just hoping that Fiona will stop her attack and give him some time to recover. Because he was now using his full strength to hold onto his ground.


    Well, he did not notice but while Fiona was attacking him; she was also approaching him. Also, one more thing was that she wasn''t using her full strength while attacking her open and because then she could easily defeat her opponent or, in front of her full power, her opponent would get badly injured. Because of this, when she realized that her opponent wasn''t on the same level as her, she decided not to use her full power.


    A few secondster, she already came very close to her opponent. Suddenly, she stops attacking and vanishes from her ce. Her opponent didn''t get the chance to realize what was happening because for a moment she feels that Fiona stop attacking him but the very next moment he feels pain in his back. This is the only thing he remembers because after that he became unconscious.


    Well, as you can tell, when Fiona came very close to her opponent, she instantly stopped releasing the sword sh and then used full speed to approach him. He was only busy protecting himself and because of this; he did not realize when Fiona already appeared behind him. Well, at this time she did not use her sword, but she used her punch technique while using the speed technique and attacked him. All of this happened in less than a second and because of this nobody was able to react on time but those people present in the stadium who were Warrior were only able to react and they already saw when her punch was about to hit him, that moment her full hand was glowing in deep blue color. Even if she uses her normal punch technique without using the spirit technique, then she could damage very much and just think about what will happen when she uses that technique while using the spirit technique.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Her opponent didn''t even realize what happened and just suddenly felt a pain in his back and the pain was so much that it made him unconscious. Well, not only that right now. If you look at his backside, then you can see a mark of her punch on his armor. Also, not only that, but suddenly his armor began to break.


    The medical team already came back to their senses and then reacted quickly. They quickly came to the battle ring to check the warrior while the referee also came to the battle ring the moment he saw that. Aftering to the battle ring, the referee already announced Fiona as the winner of the match.


    Instantly, those people present in the stadium just started to cheer loudly. Right now in the whole stadium, everyone was shouting just one name that was Fiona. Fiona, at this time, just gets treated by a medical team member. She did not receive that many injuries and because of this, she was already healed. At this time when she noticed everyone in the stadium was shouting her name, she just smiled at them and also said thanks to them.


    Right now, Tony and the others were also cheering for their seniors. From the first, all of them know that she will win this match because her opponent is only a peak D-grade warrior, while she was an early C-grade warrior. Also, she didn''t break through recently. She already broke through many months ago and as you can imagine, she already stabilized herself and already absorbed many crystals to power up.


    Fiona, at this time, left the battle ring and started to go toward her team. When she came to her team, they quickly congratted her. Gloria also smiles at her, and after that, she once again focuses on the battle ring that was being repaired by the construction team.


    Right now, the Royal Academy already has four wins, while Golden Dawn has three wins. So you can say that the next match was very important for the Royal Academy, but right now no one from the Royal Academy was worried about the next match because in the next match Gloria will be fighting. But now everyone was thinking about what the golden Dawn''s captain would do in this situation. Because even if he wins the next match, then his team won''t be able to win thepetition. Because of this, he could only use his privilege as a captain to challenge the whole Royal Academy team. Now everyone from the Royal Academy was thinking about what their opponent would do in this situation. Well, not them, but even many of the audience were also thinking about that.


    Sometimeter, when the construction team already repaired the battle ring, Gloria did not waste any more time and quickly started to go toward the battle ring. She was going normally toward the battle ring, but for those people who were looking at her felt that the moment she started going toward the battle ring the temperature started to go down. Well, even those people from the Golden Dawn can feel that.


    At this time, everyone was focusing on the Golden Dawn. Suddenly they notice that the captain of the Golden Dawn also started to go toward the battle ring. Most likely he won''t be using his privilege and fighting her normally. Most likely, he already knows that even if he uses the privilege, then he won''t be able to win against Gloria or Fiona.


    ____________To be continued_____________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 278 278 - What Is Dark Association Planning?

    "Gloria¡­. Gloria¡­ Gloria¡­ Gloria." Right now everyone in the stadium was cheering for her because she had finally defeated the opponent team''s captain and with that, she finally won this match and which means Royal Academy qualified for the final. From the first to thest, she just dominates her opponent. And most likely she is also the fastest warrior who defeated her opponent this quickly. The moment she came to the battle ring, she wasted no more time and attacked her opponent. Her main goal was to defeat her opponent as quickly as possible.


    The captain of the Golden Dawn didn''t even get the chance to react. At first, he was still able to react for some time, butter suddenly Gloria just froze his body. Like this, she defeated him quickly. Well, from the day he knows that he won''t be able to win against her or Fiona. Because he was still in the peak D grade, he needed just some more days to break through, but unfortunately, he didn''t have that much time.


    When the referee announced the name of the winner, he went toward Gloria and then both of them shook hands. Well, the medical team had already healed him, so he wanted to congratte Gloria. Even though Gloria was always cold to others, she was a true warrior. When he came in front of her for the handshake, Gloria also didn''t reject and attar the handshake she left for the battle ring.


    At this time, all those in the audience were cheering and pping for her. Many people came today to watch the power of the number one genius, and when they saw how easily she defeated her opponent, everyone became speechless at first, because no one thought that she would defeat and dominate her opponent like he didn''t get the chance to defend. But when they came to their senses, they began to cheer for her.


    Gloria looked toward all the people who were cheering for her. She looked at them and just nodded at them. After that, she went toward her teammates. All of her teammates congratted her. Fiona came in front of her and also said congrattions.


    "Haha, as I expected that you will finish your fight as quickly as you can. Haha¡­" Fiona said this to her.


    Gloria, after hearing that, just looked at her, but then said nothing. After seeing this, Fiona once again began tough. With this, all the teammates of Royal Academy begin to leave the battleground, and not only them, but all those are also starting to leave the battleground. One by one, everyone was leaving the stadium. Sam and his friends were already outside of the stadium and they were going toward the cafeteria.


    While going toward the cafeteria, his sister with her teammates. He started to go toward his sister. Not only he, but his friends are alsoing towards Gloria to say congrattions to her and her teammates.


    ________________


    "How much data did you gather about these two people?" A person suddenly asked while showing two pictures to a person. If you look at these two pictures, then you will be surprised because these two pictures belong to Fiona and Gloria. The person who was asking this question, you cannot see his face because he was now covering his face.


    "We did not have that much data about these two people. We have already given you the data about them and other than that, we didn''t have any data. They never openly reveal their power and, because of this, it was very difficult to know their true power. Even when they were going into the dungeon, they always stayed alert. They already know that many people were scouting at them and because of this, they stay very alert. Previously, many times we tried to approach them to see their real power, but all those people who tried to approach them got killed by them. And right, many people didn''t want to scout them." A person said all of this. He was short and wearing a ck suit. The most noticeable thing was his teeth were golden. But on the other hand, the person he was facing was fully covering himself. One thing that you will see in that person, that was the logo of the dark association.


    The person from the dark association thought for some time and then once again brought out a photo. But this time it wasn''t Fiona or Gloria, but this time it was the photo of Sam.


    "Tell me everything you know about him. Thought that he wasn''t a threat to us, but like his sister, he is also a threat. He already killed many people from the dark association that went after him for the bounty."<novelnext></novelnext>


    Facing one of the leaders of the dark association, the guild master of the information guild started to check his database for data on Sam. Sometimeter, he showed all the data to the dark association leader. The person from the dark association began to look at the data. But after reading the data sometimeter, he became very disappointed. He didn''t get any satisfactory data about Sam. He just got all the information that he already knew about Sam and, because of this, he was pretty disappointed. This guild was one of the allies of the dark association and they were also one of the best information guilds. But even then unable to find anything about Sam, Gloria or Fiona that much. They only have basic information about them.


    "Sir, actually, he is more mysterious than his sister. Until the college entrance examination, he did not show his power to anyone, and also after the examination he also didn''t reveal his true power in front of anyone. Also, because he was very good at hiding himself even though we sent many people to scout him, those were useless in front of him. Because of this, until now no information guild is able to find anything about him urately. But one thing was that he also mastered the spirit technique. Only we are able to find this, except this, nobody is able to find anything about his weird sword technique or weird hiding technique." The guild leader of the information guild said to the warrior from the dark association.


    The person from the dark association nodded. Previously, he was also trying to find Sam many times, but even if he sent many people after him, they returned without gaining anything, or even many times they didn''t even return.


    "Also, sir, one more thing was that the Warrior association was already trying to find the warrior from the dark association and because of this, they also increased the security of the battle stadium. They even caught many of my people. So it was best to lie low for some time. I don''t know what you are nning, but it would be good if those warrior associations did not find anything about this." The guild leader said while the person from the dark association nodded. Suddenly, without saying anything, the person from the dark association vanished from his ce, only leaving a card on the table of the guild.


    The guild leader finally sighs in relief and happily takes the bank card. He also doesn''t know the main n of the dark association, but he could tell that they were telling something very dangerous. Who cares about whether it was dangerous or not until he can benefit from it?


    ______________


    Right now, Sam and his friends are going back to their house. Also, one more thing was that Alena told him that she had something important to say to him. He was very curious to know what the important thing was that his teacher wanted to tell him tomorrow. After thinking for some time, he decided to forget about that because right now he cannot think of anything that his teacher wanted to tell him.


    He wasing back to his house with his sister. Their parents already went back and now both of them are also going back. As you know, their house wasn''t that far away from the royal academy. Because of this, both of them were walking toward their house from the stadium. The stadium was also very close to the Royal Academy.


    While both of them were going back to their house, Sam was asking many questions to Gloria. She was answering all of those questions. Actually, Sam was asking her about the Falcon Academy. He was very curious about that Academy because they are also strong. But why did he not previously hear about them? He was asking her all of these questions. Gloria was answering all of these questions.


    After getting all the answers about the Falcon Academy, Sam suddenly asks her about the white Tiger Academy''s team. Because they were the previous year''s winner, who won against Gloria''s team. Because of this, he was very interested to know about them. Gloria also shares all the things he knows about the White Tiger Academy''s team.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 279 279 - Dark Associations Elder.

    In an abundant factory in the central city,


    Right now, you can see that there were five people. All those 5 people were Warriors, and they were just silently sitting. The whole room was dark and only a candle was glowing in the middle of the table. Suddenly, a person appeared in the room out of nowhere. But those 5 people didn''t get surprised by that, most likely they were expecting that person.


    The moment those people saw that person, they quickly kneel down on the ground and said,


    "Wee, Elder,"


    Well, he was the elder of the dark association. Because of this, those five people were showing their respect to him. The person nodded to those 5 people after seeing them kneeling down in front of him. He told him to stand up and also sit down. He also signaled those five people to sit down.


    After all of them sit down, they finally begin their discussion.


    "Elder, we already collected all the things that you need." A person suddenly said that and after that, he brought out a box from his storage ring. The elder got happy after seeing that box, he praised him and then took the box.


    "It is good that you collect all these things, but right now, your important work will start." After saying that, he sent them a file on their mobile phone.


    All those 5 people quickly open that file and begin to look at the information that was inside that file. When they open the file, they see that inside this file, there were many people''s information about their photos. All those 5 people quickly look at the elder with curious gazes.


    The elder seems to understand their question and because of this he began to answer,


    "I cannot tell you our main n, but one thing I can tell you is that this will bring disaster to the Warrior associations. Also, these are the people that I specifically wanted to kill in that disaster. As you can see, I already collected their data. But there were still some people whose data I was unable to collect. Those people are dangerous people for our association and because of this, I wanted to end them in this disaster. Right now, you and your teammate only needed to do one thing, which was somehow to collect all those people''s blood who are mentioned in that file. You''re just here to collect their blood and leave everything to me. I know that this will be very challenging because there are many warriors who are very strong and also very alert. But I hope that you could collect their blood somehow and then give it to me."


    The elder exined the mission details to those 5 people. After hearing about the mission, all of them nodded. They also know that this will be very challenging because they saw many names in that file who are very powerful warriors. But they will try their 100% to achieve their blood. Well, all of these five people were different, but one thing ismon between them. All those 5 people really hated the warrior association and because of this, they also joined the dark association to bring disaster to the warrior association and the other humans.


    "Well, I hope you will seed in this because with this we could spread more disaster and also eliminate all the threats of our dark association. As you know, there are many students who still did not be powerful, but they were the future threats that our dark association will face, and because of this, I wanted to eliminate them as quickly as I can."<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Don''t worry, Elder, we will try our hundred percent to achieve their blood." All those 5 people say that at the same time and hear that the elder nodded. After that, it suddenly vanishes from that ce. When those five people saw that their elder was already gone, they also nodded to each other, and they also left the abundant factory.


    ______________________


    Next day,


    Sam was going to the Royal Academy for training. He also already called his teammate in the academy for training. The next match will be the fighter match for them because in this match it will be finally decided who will be the winner of thispetition and who will be the loser. Because of this, as a captain, he wanted his team to be ready for that match.


    Sometimeter, he was already in his training room and fighting his two training robots. As you can guess that he already said the limit of those two robots to peak D-grade. He needed to get used to the new strength that he recently gained. Well, even though he was unable to go to that and that does not mean you only get the crystals. He can get the crystals, but the amount will be low. That''s okay because when he is once again able to go to the Dungeon he will collect as much as he can. But for now, this amount is enough for him. So the previous day after going back to his house, he decided to absorb those crystals and increase strength. He had previously bought all of these crystals using his second identity and because of this, nobody could trace him.


    Between Sam and his two robots, an intense match was going on. None of them were using their weapons. Well, even though Sam knows that he won''t be able to damage it even if he uses his full power against the robot, he still decided not to use his sword. Instead of using the sword, he was using his punch technique. He has already be good at using the second move of his energy mode. Compared to the sword, using the spiritual energy while channeling the spiritual energy toward his gloves was really difficult. But still, he was able to master that and right now he wasn''t having that much problem doing that, but while doing this, he needed to be in his focus zone. And as you know that he is in energy mode and always maintains his focus zone.


    If you were wondering what was doing these few days, then he was focusing on mastering this, and also he was focusing onbining his energy mode with his spirit technique. Because of this, he still did not master the spirit technique while using his spell or any other technique other than his sword technique. But Alexa, Tony, and the others were focusing on this, and they were also able to connect the technique with their other technique but still unable to release the spiritual energy. But still, it was a huge improvement for them, and Sam was still unable to do that.


    But Sam did not mind that because he was also focusing on his own technique. He knows that if he is able tobine both of these techniques, then it will be a very powerful technique. Both of the techniques mainly use spiritual energy and using that, he wanted to be able tobine both of the techniques. But it was still a very difficult task for him and he needed time for that.


    Suddenly, the ck robot came behind while Sam was about to see the white robot. Sam already senses the robot behind him and, because of this, he jumps away from the ce and avoids the punch. But those two robots did not want to give you many chances and because of this they also jumped toward him. After seeing this, some already know that he needs to counterattack because right now he does not have any other way to dodge the attack.


    When those two robots were about to punch him, Sam also did not anytime and he also punched them. As you know that he was already wearing two ck gloves, but when he was using his energy mode, those two gloves gave the feeling that they became more dark and no light would be able to go through that darkness. Their punches shed. The impact was so useful that it sent those two robots and Sam backward. Not only that Sam can also feel his hand be numb. Really, it was a very powerful move, but at the same time, it was also dangerous. Even though he was able to use this move, he still wasn''t able to control the power.


    Like this, he and those two robots were exchanging many moves. 2 hourster, Sam finally stops fighting those two robots. He was now at his limit and he was now panting heavily. While fighting those two robots, Sam justpletely forgot about all the other things and because of this, he also did not notice when his friends also came to his training room. All of them saw the fight between Sam and those two robots, and they know that they still have a long way to go to reach the same level as Sam.


    ______________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 280 280 - Sam Vs. His Friends

    Sam finally, since all of his friends who are inside the training room. He was not drinking the energy drink while looking at his friends. All of them started to approach him.


    "Brother, how can you be so powerful? Give me some tips about that so that I can also be powerful quickly." Suddenly Tony says that to him.


    Sam did not say anything to him and just smiled at him. He still did not recover his full energy and, because of this, he was still panting. He was already using his energy recovery technique. In just 20 minutes, he had already recovered his full energy and once again stood up from the ground. He signals his friends to get ready because they will fight with him. With this, he can also know about their weakness and also can give some tips to improve their weak side.


    Well, Tony and the others can also improve and also get to know about their own weakness while fighting Sam. That was a great help to them, so they were always eager to fight. Wasting no time, all of them get ready to fight Sam. Unfortunately, they won''t be able to fight the team at the same time. Not that if they fight him at the same time, they would be able to defeat him, but it was just when they fight with no one''s interference, they get to know about their strengths and weaknesses.


    Sam did not have any problem fighting them one by one because, while fighting them, he also trained himself to control his power. While fighting them, he restrained his power and fought with them. Today, he didn''t decide to use his sword and only fought with his punch.


    __________________


    4 hourster,


    Suddenly Alexa sends swords shes toward Sam. Those swords sh glowing in a deep blue color. But Sam already reacted in time and already punched all those sword shes one by one. He was destroying all those sword shes with his punches. Suddenly, he disappeared from his ce. Alexa was not able to react because he already appeared behind her and also punched her. She instantly felt pain in her back. Not only that, but the impact of the punch watch is very powerful that sends her flying. Also, if you look at her, then you can see that blooding out of her mouth. With that, Sam defeated all of them. Elena already went toward Alexa and started to heal her.


    "Haha¡­ Sam didn''t hold back while fighting." Tony suddenly said that while he was also recovering his health and energy.


    "As I already told you before, fighting that I won''t be holding back because this is very essential for all of you to gain experience. We need to prepare for our next match. I don''t want any of you to lose any match against our next opponent. The title we gained I wanted to keep the title until we finish thepetition and win thepetition. And to maintain the title, we need to win all the fights without any loss." Sam suddenly said that seriously.


    " Sam is right. I also don''t want him to hold back while fighting us. Because of this, we can gain experience and also get to know about our weaknesses. I know that, like me, everyone wasparing their opponent in the fight with Sam. And I also know everyone already realizes how they werepared to Sam. So as you can see how much this helps us," suddenly Jeni said. After hearing that, all the others also agree with her. Well, because not only Sam but their teachers also did not hold back when they were sparring with them.


    At this time, Alexa already recovered and also came toward them.


    "That was a very good fight, Alexa. I also feel that you are also bing stronger. Also, did you seed in your experiment?" Suddenly Tony asked Alexa about her experiment. Well, Alexa was now experimenting with the spirit technique to her tough body technique. This tough body technique could make anyone''s skin as hard as metal. So right now she is trying to use the spirit technique while using this technique because if she bes sessful, then her defense will increase so much that it will be very difficult for anyone to hurt her.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Well, as I told you earlier. I was already able to link my spiritual energy with that technique, but as you know that I was facing the problem where I was unable to release my spiritual energy. This was the same problem I face when I fast try to release my spiritual energy while using my sword technique. I still don''t know how much time it will take for me to master this technique. So what about your experiment? Did you seed in that experiment.?"


    Alexa asks Tony because he also experiments with his spirit technique while using his movement technique. Well, as you know, Tony always likes to use his movement technique while attacking his enemy. Because of this, he wanted to use his spiritual energy while using his movement technique. But like Alexa, he also wasn''t able to release the spiritual energy while using that technique. He could connect his spiritual energy with the technique, but was unable to release that spiritual energy.


    Jeni and Elena were already very good at using the spirit technique while using their spell. They are already able to upgrade their spell using this technique and will not only that but they also improve in their elementation technique. Unfortunately, they are still unable to use the elementation technique in thepetition because they still did not face any opponent who will force them to show them this technique. So you can say that they are very good at using the spirit technique and currently they are also trying to connect their spiritual energy with their body technique or their movement technique.


    Tina and Kenny were already able to release the spiritual energy, but they still did not master it and because of this, both of them were mainly focusing on that. On the other hand, Kira, Dan, and Saara were still unable to use the spirit technique. But Kira was very close to releasing her spiritual energy, while Dan and Saara weren''t even that close. Dan uses a bow and Saara uses a spell. So with that, you can guess that for both of them it was very hard to connect their spiritual energy with their techniques, and even if they are able to connect that they will be easily able to release that.


    ______________


    Sometimeter,


    All of them came out from the training room and right now they were going toward the cafeteria. After training all this time, they became very hungry and because of this, they were going toward the cafeteria. Right now, other than them, they are unable to see any other students in the Academy because during thispetition there will be no ss and this means those other students most probably win back to their houses. But while they were going toward the cafeteria, suddenly they saw the second-year team also came to the Royal Academy to fight because they wereing back from the cafeteria. Most probably, they have already finished eating.


    Suddenly, Sam''s eyes meet with the captain of the second year. Both of them were the first position holders in their year. Well, if you thought that a conflict would break out, then you were wrong, because Sam just nodded at him. The captain of the 2nd year also did the same. After that, both of them focused on their own work. Most popr this time all the other second-year students or even Sam''s friends also thought a conflict would break out but when they saw that both of the captains just nodded and then ignored, it quickly made it clear that none of them wanted to fight.


    __________________


    "Haha¡­ I thought that those second years would cause trouble for us. But it seems they were also only focusing on their training right now, because I can feel the seriousness of them." Tony said that. Well, all the second-year teammates also know that they won''t be able to win if they stay like this in the final. Because of this, they wanted to use the full time to prepare for the final.


    "Well, not only us, but our opponents were also very serious, so you have to be careful about that. In these few days, they will try to think of a n to counter our attack and also use our weakness in us to win against us. Like us, they have also already seen the data about us where they will get to know about our most powerful attack. But like them, we can also see that and we will try to counterattack in the match." Sam exins all of this to his friends while they already order their food.


    ______________To be continued____________

 Chapter 281 281 - Catching People

    Sam and his friends have alreadye back to the training room and they once again begin their training. This time, Sam wasn''t fighting with them. This time, Tony and the others were fighting with their own training robots. All of them were focusing on their own technique that they wanted to improve and, on the other hand, Sam was also focusing on his punching. It will still take him some time to master this second move. He still wasn''t able to control the power of his punch.


    While all of them were practicing, Alena was also going toward their training room. Compared to the other''s training room, Sam''s training room was much bigger and because of this, all of them were easily practicing in that room. Well, Sam didn''t mind that, and while training, if they needed his help, then he would also help them.


    When Alena came to the training room, she saw Sam and all of his friends were training, or you could say they were fighting with their training robots. At this time, she also saw that Sam was now busy in meditation. So she didn''t disturb anyone and just sat down in a corner. She needed it to tell something important to Sam, so she was waiting for him to wake up from his meditation. Well, actually, Sam was now circting his energy recovery technique.


    It took him some time to recover all of his energy. When he finally opened his eyes, he noticed that his teacher was in front of him and she was reading something. He got up from the ground and drank an energy drink while going toward her.


    Alena noticed him, and she closed the book that she was holding. She signals the same to sit down beside her. After Sam sat down, she began to talk. Before talking to Sam, she also created a silent barrier around them so that nobody could hear their voice.


    At this time, Tony and the others had already noticed that Sam and Alena were talking about something, but they weren''t able to hear anything. Most likely, teacher Alena created a silent barrier around them so that nobody could hear their voice. It really makes them very curious, but they know that they won''t be able to hear that until Sam or Alena want to tell them. So they just give up on knowing and once again focus on their training.


    Alena and Sam talked for some time, and after that, she deactivated the silent barrier. After that, she got up from her seat and left the training room. Sam was still sitting down in his seat while thinking about something. At this time, nobody came to our team to know about the thing that the teacher Alena told him. Because they could see his serious face and they knew that he was now seriously thinking of something.


    ___________________


    Around 5:00 p.m., all of them are now going back to their homes. For today, the training was over. Sam is also going back to his home. When he came back to his house, he didn''t see anyone. Most likely, his sister was busy with her training while his parents were busy with their own training. Aftering back to his room, he freshens up and thenys down on the bed.


    1 hourter, Sam woke up from his sleep. While resting, he fell asleep. After washing his face, he began to change his clothes. After everything was done, he left his room and began to walk toward the door. Still, he didn''t see anyone in the house. He just left the house and then started his car to go somewhere. While he was driving his car, he was very alert about his surroundings because right now he could feel many people looking at him. Well, you cannot say just looking, but you can say that they were scouting at him.


    Suddenly his car and he disappeared from their ces. Because of this, those people who were scouting at him suddenly lost their trace of him because they weren''t able to see any trace of his car. As you know that Sam was using his supreme still technique to cover his trace and his car''s trace. Sometimeter, when he came to a road where he didn''t feel many people. He suddenly appeared, but this time you were driving a different car and he was also already wearing his mask.


    Sometimeter, he had already reached his target. As you can tell, he was using his second identity and going to the warrior association. The most important thing was that he wanted to buy the crystals of intermediate D-grade, other than that he also had his second goal and for these, he needed to use his second identity.


    Sometimeter, he left the warrior association dejectedly, because he did not find that many crystals in the warrior association. Right now, those crystals were in high demand and many students were buying those crystals. Because of this, they were very low on the crystal and this was the reason why he did not get that many crystals. But he quickly recovered and then vanished from that ce. He was going back toward his house, but this time he was using his second identity and also using the concealment technique.<novelnext></novelnext>


    If you wanted to know why he was doing that, then he was doing this to catch those people who were scouting at him. As he already said that there were many people around his house who were looking at his house. But those people didn''t have the courage to get close to his house because that would be very dangerous for them. Because of this, they were looking at his house from a distance.


    Suddenly, Sam appeared behind a person who was also looking at his home. He suddenly held his mouth with one hand and with his second hand, he slightly attacked the neck of that person. That instantly makes that person unconscious and after that, he quickly disappears from that ce while holding that person. He needed some information from this person and because of this, he was taking this man to an interrogation room. While Sam was taking that person toward the integration room, all those other people didn''t realize that one of them suddenly vanished from that ce.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, you can see that blood wasing out of Sam''s fist. But those weren''t his blood. For 1 hour he was trying to get information out of this person, but the person was so stubborn that he did not want to tell anything. Because of this, Sam uses this torture technique to know the information. You can say that it was sessful because finally, the person begins to tell him everything that he knows.


    "I am a warrior from the information guild. The name of the guild is, "The Xavier". This was the guild where I work. I am just your normal early D-grade, while on the other hand, the guild leader of the information guild was an early A-grade warrior. We did not get that many chances to interact with him, but a few days ago he suddenly came to us and told us that in a few days we will receive some important work. Yesterday suddenly he came to ask and give the task to follow those peoples whose name was on his cklist. Other than that, he did not say anything to us and we just thought that it was a normal mission to collect data about those people that we were following." The person said all of this to Sam.


    Sam, after all of this, began to think. Collecting data on him and his sister wasn''t new to him. Because, many people already tried that many times. But this time it was different, because of the number of people who were scouting for him. Previously, it was only 1 or 2 people scouting him, but this time he already saw that 10 people were watching over him except the person he caught.


    "Did you know anything about those other people who were with you?" Sam asked this question.


    " I did not know anything about them because they aren''t from our information guild. But one thing I could tell you is that they were from the dark association. My guild and the dark association were allies and because of this, today suddenly our guild leader came to us and said that like them many other people from the dark association wille with us. This is the only thing I know and other than that, I was not able to get an answer from those people."


    This time, after getting the answer, Sam became very serious. Whenever the dark association involved themselves in any case, then the situation would be very bad and dangerous for everyone. Because of this, Sam became very serious about this because she wanted to know why those people from the dark association were also looking at him or his home. Also, if you are wondering why this person from the information guild told all of this to Sam, or if he told the truth or not, then it all happened because Sam was using his mind control technique while asking the question. Because of this, the person revealed all the things without hiding anything.


    "Look like I need to catch more people," Sam thought and once again vanished from his ce.


    ____________To be continued____________

 Chapter 282 282 - Catching All The People

    After making that person once again unconscious, Sam once again prepares to catch people from the dark association. He already activated his concealment technique. He once again came toward his house and looked for those people who were scouting at his house. They were hiding themselves perfectly, but still Sam could find them. Wasting no time, he quickly approached those people. Previously, he didn''t think about catching all the people, but after knowing that these people were from the dark association, he decided to catch them all. Nobody knows the main motive of the dark association and this was a very dangerous thing because who knows what they were nning?


    Sam silently and quickly made those people unconscious, one by one. It took him some time to make all those 10 Warriors unconscious and after that; he brought all those people in his integration room. He did not wake all of them, he just only woke one person.


    The person previously just felt a slight pain in his neck and after that, he did not remember anything. Right now, suddenly, he felt that someone was spraying water on his face. His eyes tremble and sometimeter he wakes up. The moment he opened his eyes, he saw that he wasn''t in the dark association or his home. For a moment he did not remember what he was doing before, but sometimeter he remembered everything, and only then did he begin to panic. Right now, he cannot see anything because of the darkness. Suddenly someone switched on the light and finally he saw that in front of him was a masked warrior. At first, he did not recognize this person. This made him panic more and only then he realized that he was tied up by something and not only that his other teammates were also beside him and they were also tied up by something and they were unconscious. This makes him more anxious. Because right now he was thinking that he got captured by the warrior association and most likely they will use their technique to get information out of him.


    At this time Sam seems to understand his anxiousness, and because of this he said to that person in a rough tone,


    "If you are worried about the warrior association, then you don''t need to worry because I am not from the warrior association."


    When that person from the dark association hears this, only then he sighs in relief when he hears the next sentence of the person that was in front of him, he bes scared.


    "Also, don''t think that I won''t do anything to you because I am not from the warrior association. Right now I will ask you some questions and if you don''t give me the correct answer, then I will give you a very painful death that you remember, even after your death. Don''t think that it was a prank or joke. It was my promise that I will give you that type of death," Sam said this word with a serious expression. In this tense atmosphere, after hearing about Sam''s words that person feared that Sam wasn''t a human, he was just a monster.


    "Now my first question is, are all of you from the dark association?" Sam asks him.


    A person did not say anything and quickly nodded.


    "Are they your friends? teammates from the dark association?" Sam once again asked this question and the person once again nodded. After hearing Sam''s rough tone, the person was now very scared and because of this, he told Sam as quickly as he could. He doesn''t know, but Sam already used his mind control on that person and made him more scared of him. Because of this, the person from the dark association was very scared of Sam.


    After that, Sam asked him many questions and the person from the dark association quickly answered all the questions. It almost took him 30 minutes to get all the answers out of this man. When he finally gets all the answers from him, he makes him unconscious.


    Once again, Sam changes his clothes and then calls the warrior association to pick up all those people from the dark association. The warrior association did not waste any more time and quickly sent the Warriors toward Sam''s location. All this time, Sam just waits for those people from the warrior association.


    __________________


    Sometimeter,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam has nowe back to his room and is seriously thinking of the thing that he got to know about from the dark association''s Warrior. Even those people don''t know the main n of the elder of the dark association. He just got to know that previously when they were about to leave the dark association for their mission, suddenly an elder came to them and gave them this mission. He just only said one thing to everyone from the dark association, which is to collect the blood of the person whose name was in his file. When Sam heard that, he also quickly took the file from that person and, after opening that file, he could serve many names in that file.


    Gloria, Tony, Alexa, Jeni, Fiona, Elena, etc. He could see all of these names in that file. Not only did he see the name, but he also saw the details about all of them and the elder also provided pictures of everyone.


    What will the elders of the dark association do with their blood? But Sam cannot take any chances. He still didn''t forget about the matter where he faced that forbidden symbol and the monster that came out of that symbol. What is the dark association once again nning to use the forbidden symbol to finish off all the people whose names were on his cklist?


    Wasting no time, he also quickly called all of his friends. Quickly he told them to stay careful because people from the dark association were scouting at them. The main motive of these people was to collect blood. Most likely, they were once again nning to use the forbidden summoning. Sorry quickly told all of them everything he knows about this and also told them to be careful.


    After that, he also called sister Fiona and his teacher. He also quickly told all of them about the dark association. He also told them to stay careful after that he hung up the phone. As he expected, after hearing all of this, everyone became very serious. Most likely, they were now looking outside of their house and trying to find those people who were scouting at them.


    Sam also quickly informs Gloria about this and tells her to stay safe. Gloria, also after hearing all of this, became very serious, and he quickly checked Sam''s condition. She thought that Sam got injured by those dark association Warriors. But after checking when she found he wasn''t injured, she finally sighs in relief.


    Alena already informs Markus of all of this and not only that, but she also quickly told him to increase the security around all those persons whose name was on the dark association''s list. She also fears that if the dark association once again begins to use the forbidden someone in using those blood, then it will be very dangerous for all the people whose name was on the cklist.


    Markus also agrees with her, and he instantly makes arrangements for that. Really, this dark association was a headache for him and the warrior association. Even after finding them carefully, they did not find the main base of the dark association. Even if they capture the dark association''s Warrior, they are unable to find the real location of the base because when they try to mind control that person, they could see a special symbol in those people''s minds. That symbol was preventing those people from telling the real location of the dark association. If they try to forcefully get the answer, then the person from the dark association will die instantly. Markus sighs and also tells the Warriors to call all those people whose name was on the cklist and tell them to stay safe and alert.


    ______________________


    4 hourster,


    Sam was now in his training room, and he was now meditating. Well, he was absorbing the crystals while meditating. He still cannot use his system, but he could tell he was still far away from the limit of the intermediate D-grade warrior. Also, this was one of the big reasons why people call the D-grade rank the prison of the warrior.


    It took him some time to absorb all of those crystals. He could feel the power after absorbing all those crystals. After that, he opens his eyes and brings out his robots. He needs to get used to this new power and because of this, he will fight his robots. This robot is really a great fighting partner, but the only thing they needed was intelligence, like humans. So, wasting no time, he quickly starts fighting with his robots.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 283 283 - Strange Dream

    In an abundant factory in the central city,


    Once again, those 5 Warriors from the dark association came to this abundant factory, and they were waiting for the elder of the dark association to appear there. All the five Warriors hide their faces but if you are able to see their faces then you can see that all of them have very serious expressions on their faces because somehow the warrior association gets to know about their n and they already catch the meaning of their subordinate who was watching over the targets. Because of this, all of them once again wanted to talk to the elder.


    In the middle of that abundant factory, if you look at the floor, then you can notice a weird symbol was drawn on that floor. Well, it was the dark teleportation symbol. The dark association Warriors using their dark power, they can travel through these teleportation symbols. Not everyone from the warrior association knows about this teleportation symbol.


    They did not need to wait that long, because sometimeter, finally the elder of the dark association came to this abundant factory. The elder of the dark association also hides his face and because of this, nobody can guess his expression right now but those 5 Warriors thought that the elder would be very mad at them because the warrior association somehow got to know about their n.


    The elder of the dark association aftering to the abundant factory looked at those 5 Warriors who were now kneeling down on the ground.


    "Elder, we are very sorry. We don''t know how the Warrior association got to know about this matter. We already told our subordinates to stay careful when they watch over those targets, but still, those association''s Warriors were able to know about this matter and they caught many of our subordinates. We know that we are very useless because we weren''t even able toplete your simple work. Elder, can you give us one more chance? This time, we won''t fail. If needed, all 5 of us will go there personally to collect the blood of those targets."


    The leader of those 5 Warriors says this to the elder. All of them were thinking that the elder was very mad at them and he would punish them. For a moment, nobody talked to each other. All five Warriors were kneeling on the ground while the elder looked at them with his red eyes. Nobody knows what he was thinking.


    5 minutester, the elder finally open his mouth,


    "I hope this time you won''t fail me. I will give all of you just one more chance and if this time you still weren''t able toplete the work, then you did not need toe back to the association. Also, while you were collecting the blood of the targets, you should also search for that mysterious mask warrior. He was the one who first got the warrior from the dark association and after that, he told the warrior association about this. Previously I did not write the name of that mysterious warrior on the target list. But it seems he was also a threat to our dark association and you should also search for that person. He was very good at hiding, not only that, but most likely he was already a peak D-grade warrior. You 5 won''t have any problem while fighting, but you still remember that person was very good and hiding. Most likely he was an Assassin type of warrior."


    "Also, most likely the warrior association hired that assassin to fight the dark association''s Warriors. Also, moves likely only those Saints know about this assassin because even those other Warriors from the warrior association did not know anything about this. The spy we have in the warrior association also wasn''t able to find anything about this person."


    The elder said all of this to all the five Warriors. When those 5 Warriors hear that the elder will give them one more chance toplete his task, instantly they be very excited and finally sigh in relief. Because previously all of them thought that they would get killed by the elder. Also, after that, when the elder told them about the masked warrior, it made all of them startled and angry. Because of this person, they weren''t able toplete their task and because of this; they were very angry at him.


    At this time, the elder of the dark association already vanished from that ce after exining all of this to those 5 war warriors. Those 5 Warriors all this time were kneeling down on the ground. When the elder finally left the abundant factory, all five of them finally sigh in relief. But in the next moment, all 5 of them be very serious. They need to catch that masked warrior to get their revenge on him. Because of that person, they weren''t able toplete the task. All of them begin to discuss their n for this. This time, they cannot lose and break their promise. They need to somehow collect all those students'' blood that wasn''t on the list.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Quickly tell all our subordinates to find the identity of that masked warrior." The leader of those 5 warriors quickly says to all of them. After hearing him, all the others nodded, and they also agreed with that. Not only their leader, but they also wanted to capture that person who prevented them from doing their work. Also, one more thing was that all those four warriors were intermediate B-grade warriors, and the leader was a peak B-grade warrior. Because of this, the elder previously said that they won''t have any problem while fighting that mask warrior.


    ____________________


    Right now, Sam was busy with his training and he waspletely unaware of the fact that 5 B-grade warriors were searching for the mask. Well, even if he somehow gets to know about that, he won''t panic and calmly think of a n. Because he has his trump card that those other warriors didn''t have.


    Sometimeter, he finally finished his fight with those two robots. He was resting on the ground while thinking about the dark association. The previous day, he captured those dark associations'' Warriors, and also handed them over to the warrior association. Warrior association reacted quickly and because of this, he got to know that they captured many people from the dark association. Previously, Sam also got the list of the names of those Warriors, who were the targets of the dark association. He also gave that list to the warrior association and, most likely, following that list, they were able to capture this many Warriors.


    ''Still don''t know why, but I am feeling that this time the dark association was nning something big. If they are able to sessfully get those blood, then it will be a disaster for all those people whose blood was collected by the dark association. Most likely the dark association wasn''t nning for the forbidden ceremony because then they will be very careful about this. I don''t know why I feel that these few days will be very troublesome for everyone. Unfortunately, my system also got upgraded and because of this, I was unable to use my system.'' Sam thought all of this while he sighs deeply. He could feel that danger was approaching them, but in front of the danger, he was weak. Right now, even if he tries to absorb many crystals, he won''t be able to get stronger in a short time. Because of this, he was sighing.


    Sometimeter, after freshening himself and also finishing his dinner, he went back to his room. Hey down on his bed and, in just a few minutes, he fell asleep.


    While sleeping, he suddenly started to have a very strange dream. Right now he was seeing that he was now standing over a destroyed ce. Suddenly, looking at all of this, he didn''t panic. Sam knows that if he panics in this case, then he won''t be able to do anything.


    After calming down, he started to observe his surroundings. He was now in a destroyed ce. Most likely it was a building that got destroyed by something because he can still see the remains of the building. He started to work around the ce to find out about this ce. While looking around this ce, he didn''t know why, but he was feeling that this ce was very familiar to him. Also, one more strange thing was that the sky was now red and a red moon was in the sky.


    He needed to investigate carefully to find out about this ce. The more he was walking, the more he could see the destroyed buildings everywhere. Cars, buildings, and everything were destroyed by something and also one more thing was that he cannot find any humans in this ce. Suddenly he doesn''t know why but his heart begins to beat very fast. His feeling was getting stronger that he knows this ce very much. The more he was approaching, the more he was feeling that.


    _________________To be continued_______________

 Chapter 284 284 - A Danger Is Approaching

    Sometimeter, he finally came in front of a destroyed building, but when he looked at the building only then he realized why it was very familiar to him. The building he was seeing in front of him was his house. He was now in the Base city and this was his old house that was in the Base city. For a moment, his mind went nk. He was unable to think properly. It takes him some time to calm himself down.


    After looking at the destroyed building, he started to think seriously. Thest thing he remembered was that after everything was done, he went to his bedroom andy down on the ground. This is the only thing he remembers and after that, he suddenly came here.


    ''Did someone put me in some kind of illusion? Did the dark association behind all of this?'' Sam thought about this. Because, looking at all of this, he can tell that it was some kind of illusion. Most likely he was still sleeping in his bed, but someone put his mind on this illusion. Now, this is a very dangerous thing because he already upgraded his mind protection technique to a C grade, but still, someone is able to put him in an illusion. Most likely, who put him in the illusion was an S-grade warrior.


    Well, his guess was right because suddenly the scenery in front of him changed. For a moment, he once again became confused because at first, he wasn''t able to guess the ce that he was right now. But he did not panic and once again began to observe the surrounding area carefully. Sometimeter, he finally found out about this ce. This was the Royal Academy, and it had already been destroyed. Not only that, but he was now only seeing the destroyed ground, buildings, etc.


    ''Who is doing all of this? Why did he/she want to see this illusion? Did he or she have some kind of motive behind this?'' Sam thought about this.


    "Who are you? Why did you put me in this illusion? Is anyone there? I know that you are watching me, so just answer me." Sam suddenly asks this question.


    But even after waiting for some time, he did not get any reply from anyone. This is really frustrating for him because he cannot get out of this illusion and, on the other hand, the person who put him in this illusion wasn''t replying to him.


    While he was frustrated about this, he was still looking at his surroundings. Suddenly, out of nowhere, the ground began to shake. Sam quickly tries to get away from that ce because it could be dangerous for him. Aftering to a safe ce, he was looking toward the ce that was the source of the earthquake. The ground was still shaking and those destroyed buildings once again got destroyed. At this time, Sam suddenly doesn''t know why Sam suddenly begins to feel a chill in his back. He was very familiar with this kind of feeling. Previously, when the monster came out from that forbidden summoning, only then did he feel this kind of chill in his back. But one thing was a trance that this time the feeling was much greater than that time.


    Sam quickly tries to find the source of this chilliness. But even after looking around him, he wasn''t able to find anything that gave him this chilliness. At this time, he didn''t know from where, but he suddenly heard a voice that told him to look into the sky.


    "Who are you? Why are you putting me in this illusion?" like this, Sam suddenly asked many questions, but still, he did not get any reply from that voice. So Sam just sighs. He knows that he won''t get any information from that voice, so he just looks at the sky like that voice told him to do. At first, when he looked at the sky, he did not find anything, but a few secondster, his whole body froze. The thing he was seeingpletely made him very afraid, and he lost his ability to move. He was not feeling a great pressure that was greater than the pressure of those Saints and pressing him down.


    If you are wondering what you are saying, then he was now seeing the red moon. Well, at first it looks like a normal red moon, but suddenly the red moon blinks. At first, Sam thought that it was also some kind of illusion, but then suddenly the red moon turned into an eye. Right now he was seeing in front of him a big red eye. Not only that, but the eyes were also looking in his direction. This made himpletely scared and the pressure he was feeling was really making him unable to breathe. You can say that it was the first time that he became this much scared.


    ''Who could have this big eye? Which type of monster and what is his level? '' This was thest question he thought and after that Sam saw that his surroundings changed. Right now, he wasn''t in the destroyed city. Right now, the only thing he can see is the darkness. He was not feeling that he was floating in this darkness. He didn''t have the strength to move.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Suddenly, out of nowhere, he saw a strong light in front of him. The light was so strong that made his eyes close forcefully. Some timeter, when he opened his eyes, the strong light was already gone. But when hepletely opened his eyes, he was once again surprised because right now a person was in front of him and looking in his direction. She has a very beautiful face, and she has green hair and green eyes.


    He never saw her or he wasn''t familiar with her, so then why? After seeing her, he doesn''t know why, but he was feeling that he saw this girl previously somewhere. He just cannot remember where he saw her previously.


    All this time, nobody talks to each other. The girl was now observing Sam while Sam was busy thinking.


    "You must be wondering who I am and why I am putting you in this illusion?" Suddenly, Sam hears a girl''s voice in his mind. That made him very startled, but then quickly he calmed down. He looked at the girl and nodded.


    When the girl saw Sam was nodding after hearing her questions, she just smile and then begin to answer,


    "My name is Kartara. I am the creator of your system, the small upgrade system. I am also the one who helps your soul toe to this ce. Now if you are wondering about all of those destructions and the red eyes, then all of these are your future. Not just yours, but the whole of humanity''s future."


    When Sam heard the answer for a moment, he just once again went into daze mode. Sometimeter, he came back to his senses, but still, he was very much surprised that the creator of his system was standing in front of him. Not only that, she was also telling him that the thing he saw previously was the future of him and the other humans.


    "Most likely you still weren''t able to believe that could be your future. You still did not be powerful and qualified to know the details of all of this, but the only thing I can tell you is that the universe is very big and you cannot even imagine how powerful monsters were in the whole universe. I think you probably remember that some days ago I came to your dream and told you to be powerful as quickly as you can. Not only that, but I also upgrade your concealment techniques to supreme grade. Most probably, you also have questions about that, but the only thing I can tell you is that I did all of this to save you from those monsters. Only those monsters and people who have the supreme observation technique will be able to notice your presence and find you."


    "You need to be powerful as quickly as you can because a dangerous thing is approaching the earth. The eyes you saw earlier were the eyes of that monster that was approaching your. Most probably you have two years in your hand to prepare yourself to fight that monster. Also, one more warning was that the monster wasn''t like those S-grade monsters or those SSS-grade monsters. This monster was out of their league. Unfortunately, I won''t be able to directly interfere in this case and because of this, I came here to warn you about that monster."


    "This is thest time I will help you, so you need to be powerful as quickly as you can. 10 dayster your system movie finishes upgrading, only then you will be able to see the gift I left for you. Also, one more thing was that from now on you do not need to be familiar with any of your techniques because the moment you upgrade them you will be 100% familiar with that technique. Only this much I could help because there are some restrictions that prevent me from helping you more. Goodbye Sam and try to be powerful as quickly as you can." after exining all of this and saying goodbye, the girl in front of him suddenly became a strong light that once again forced Sam to close his eyes.


    ______________To be continued__________

 Chapter 285 285 - Informing Aria

    Sometimeter when Sam opened his eyes, he saw that he was now in his bed and his whole body was full of sweets. Who could expect him to experience this? He never thought the girl he was previously in his dream was the creator of his system and not only that, but he finally got to know why she always told him to get stronger as quickly as he could. A dangerous monster was approaching and the power of that monster was much stronger than an SSS-grade monster. Just thinking about this really makes him scared. Because right now everyone in the Eden Blue S-grade monster, for everyone, was the most dangerous monster. But now if someone tells him that there was an SSS-grade monster, and also the monster who was approaching Eden blue was much stronger than that.


    For a moment, he did not even know what he should do. The creator of the system gives this much responsibility, and he is curious if he would be able to defeat that monster or if he would be able to be that much more powerful to face that kind of monster. But one thing was that he clearly remembered every detail that he saw in his dream and because of this, when he remembered those eyes that were as big as the moon, that really made him afraid.


    Sometimeter, he headed to the bathroom and washed his face with cold water. At this time, he looks at himself in the mirror while thinking,


    ''I still don''t know if I would be able to be that much powerful, but the creator of my system told me about that monster in advance and right now I cannot just stay ideal. I need to be powerful as quickly as I can. If I am not able to be powerful, then everything will be killed by that monster.'' After thinking all of this, he just sighs, only then he remembers something.


    ''Oh yes, Ipletely forgot that Kartara also told me that she gave me some gifts. She said that from now on I don''t need to be familiar with my technique to be able to use 100% of it. The moment I will upgrade my technique, it will instantly be 100% familiar to me. It is really a very great gift for me. With this, I can quickly maximize my techniques. And she also told me that there was one more gift that I was only able to know when my system would finish upgrading. I really cannot wait for that moment.'' At this time Sam thought all of this with excitement because he cannot wait for his system to finish upgrading. He quickly wanted to know what gift Kartara had left for him.


    Right now, the supreme concealment technique was his most powerful technique, this technique was also given to her to protect himself and avoid getting noticed by those monsters. Because of this, he was very excited because he wanted to know this time what technique or which giftdy Kartara left for him.


    Sometimeter, he left the bathroom with a calm face. He was finally able to rx. Right now, he only just needs to wait for his system to finish upgrading. So before that, he should focus on thepetition. Also, one more thing was that dark associations were nning something, and that could be very dangerous for him and his friends. He also needs to be ready for that.


    ___________________


    Sometimeter, he left his house while activating his concealment techniques. His parents or his sister weren''t there, most likely they were busy with their training. So he just quickly left his house. Sometimeter, he changed his clothes and also equipped his mask.


    He suddenly became visible and not only that, but he also had a bike with him. In that, he started his journey toward the warrior association. Now his n was to buy all the crystals from the warrior association. Well, because of the demand, there wasn''t much crystal in the warrior association, but the previous day he already told the receptionist girl to bring him as much as intermediate D-grade crystals as they could. He also already gives them advance money for that. He already gave her 20 million dors.


    A few minutester,


    He was still on the road and going toward the warrior association, but suddenly his instincts told him that he was in danger. His instincts never went wrong. Because of this, he became very alert and started to observe his surroundings. Only then he realized that some cars were following him.


    ''Who are they? Why are they following me? '' Suddenly he thought of this question, but he knew that it wasn''t the time to think about those matters. Most probably, those people still did not realize that Sam had already noticed them. Because of this, Sam also behaved normally and went toward the warrior association. Even though three cars were following him, he did not feel any fear. He could easily be invisible. But he did not want to do that in this ce because he wanted to find out about those people.


    Sometimeter, right now, Sam was going through a tunnel. He can still sense that those cars are following him and not only that, but the number of cars is also increasing. Suddenly, out of nowhere, smoke appeared in that tunnel and Sam quickly finished from his ce. He already ced his bike in his inventory and already activated his concealment techniques. So right now, it was time to hunt.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _________________


    "How the hell smoke appears in the Tunnel?" Suddenly a person asked this question.


    "Don''t know how it appeared, but quickly try to find that person. We cannot lose his trace," the other person said and instantly came out of his car and tried to look around the tunnel.


    At this time, from the other direction, 5 cars also came here, and many people came out from those cars and they also tried to look around. But even after looking everywhere in the Tunnel, they were unable to find that person.


    "How the hell does he vanish from our eyes? Even after using the observation technique, we were unable to find him. The data said that he most likely is a peak D-grade warrior, but then why are you unable to find him? Dammit, I thought that we hid very carefully, but did not expect that this person would still sense us." A person said this while showing his frustration.


    "Most likely, he did not win that far away from this tunnel. Quickly try to find him," after saying that person and everyone win back to their car and start looking for the trace of Sam.


    At this time, Sam was observing those people. He previously wanted to make his move, but then he realized that in those warriors there was also one Peak B-grade warrior, 2 early B-grade warriors, and the others were early C-grade or intermediate C-grade warriors. So you can say that everyone was much stronger than him. But one thing was, first you have the full confidence that he will be able to take down those early C-grade or those intermediate C-grade Warriors. But he was worried about those other Warriors. It was confirmed that they wouldn''t be able to sense him. There was still a risk. What if those B-grade Warriors were spiritual Warriors and when he was trying to attack them and at this time suddenly those warriors used their area damage technique like electric field. Then it will be very dangerous for him.


    Because of this, he needed to stay alert. Fortunately, he also noted down the number of those cars. He quickly informs Aria about this. Also previously, he informs her when he captures those Warriors from the dark association. Fortunately, he also has her contact number and with that, he contacts her. He quickly sent a message to her and told her everything. Give the number of the cars where those B-grade Warriors were sitting. If Aria will take off those B-grade warriors, then he could take care of those C-grade warriors.


    _____________


    Aria, at this time busy in the warrior association. She and many other Warriors were having a meeting with her grandfather. Well, their main aim was the dark association. But at this time, suddenly her mobile phone rang. She quickly looked at her phone. Well, not everyone has her contact number and those people who have her contact number were the most important to her. Well, she also thought Sam was interesting and because of this, she gave him her contact number.


    When she looked at her phone, she saw that it was a message from the masked warrior. He was the one who previously informed her that he captured some people from the dark association. Because of this, wasting no time quickly opening the message because she thought this time he once again caught the people from the dark association.


    _______________To be continued___________

 Chapter 286 286 - The Hunts Start

    "Some people are following me. One Peak B-grade warrior, 2 early B-grade warriors, and 41 were an early C-grade or intermediate C-grade warriors. I could take care of all those early C-grade warriors. Can you help me take care of those B-grade warriors and those intermediate C-grade Warriors?" At this time, Aria finishes reading the message, and she instantly bes serious. She instantly guessed that those people who were following him could be the people from the dark association, and this could be very dangerous for that masked warrior.


    At this time, the other people who were in the meeting room also became very curious when they looked at her. Suddenly, all of them stop talking and focus on her. All of them saw her serious face.


    Markus quickly asked, " What happened Aria? Did something happen to anyone?"


    After hearing his question, Ariaes back to her senses. For a moment, she forgot that she was in the meeting room. Wasting no time, she quickly exined everything to everyone. After hearing that, those other peoples also be very serious because they also guess that those people must be from the dark association who were following that mask warrior. Most likely the dark association already knew that previously this masked warrior was the person who helped the warrior association to catch those people from the dark association and because of that, the Warrior association was able to catch many people from the dark association.


    "Listen, everyone, we need to save that mask warrior. As you can guess that most likely the dark association got to know that he was the person who helped us previously. If we did not help him, then it could be dangerous for him and he could also lose his life. Most likely the dark association wanted to finish because of him they weren''t able toplete their target previously." Markus told everyone. After hearing that, everyone present in the meeting room also became serious.


    Maria, Aria, and the other warriors quickly reacted. Fortunately, the masked warrior also sent her the number of the car of those people. With that, they could easily track those cars. Not only that, at this time Maria also already informed the Warriors who were close to that tunnel.


    _________________________


    Right now in the Tunnel, Sam was still in his stealth mode. Not only that, but the funniest thing was that he was in the car of those people who were following him. Actually, right now those people left the car and searched around the tunnel trying to find him, but he was sitting in the car and thinking about what he should do right now.


    After something, he decided to execute his n. He saw that one person wasing toward the car. Wasting no time, using his full speed, he approached that person. He already activated his energy mode. If you are wondering why he wasn''t using his spirit technique, well even though while using the spirit technique the sharpness of the sword increases but when he uses energy mode, it bes sharper not only that his reaction speed also increases in his energy mode.


    In less than 5 seconds, he was already in front of that person, and wasting no time, he used his fast cut and swung his sword 20 times in less than a second. The person in front of him was an early C-grade warrior. He was also wearing his armor, but in front of that attack his Armor already got destroyed and he also already got seriously injured. But one thing was that he was still alive. The armor he was wearing wasn''t that good. It was only D-grade armor, and because of this it easily got destroyed by Sam''s attack, and the person also got injured by those Swings.


    All of this happened so quickly that the person wasn''t even able to react, but when he realized that his armor already got destroyed and he was now bleeding, he quickly jumped away from that ce. Only then did he realize how serious his injury was. But he did not have the time to care about that because he was not looking for the enemy that attacked him, but he could not find the enemy. At this time, those other people who were also with him got alert and they were also trying to find the enemy that attacked their subordinate. At this time, one person who was a light element user approached the person who was seriously injured.


    But Sam did not want to give any chance to that person and because of this, he was once again already in front of that person. Even though the person was very alert, he could not sense Sam. Sam once again uses his deadly move and once again that person wasn''t able to react. Naturally, how could someone react if they suddenly got an attack that didn''t even give them the chance? Also, at this time, one more thing happened while Sam was swinging his sword. He also changed the nature of his spiritual energy and turned that into fire. So with that, you can guess that naturally the person gets attacked and after that his body starts to burn from those wounds.<novelnext></novelnext>


    That person once again realized after some secondster that he had once again got attacked, but not only that this time he suddenly felt a burning sensation that just kept increasing and suddenly he noticed that his whole body was now in blue fire. He started to scream loudly, and not only that, but he also already fell to the ground.


    Sam already cut his hands and one leg. Because of this, that person did not have any support, and he fell down. Sam did not give him any chance and one a second attack and this time he killed that person. All of this happened so quickly that those other people didn''t get the chance to react. That person who wasing toward this person to hell with him also got startled. This instantly indicates to those people that they are in a very dangerous situation because they cannot sense their enemy, but their enemy is attacking them. Not only that, but the enemy must be very powerful because all of them notice how easily their subordinate got killed and his body is also now getting burned by the blue me.


    Sam did not waste any time, and he was already in front of that person who could use the light element. But before attacking him with his sword, he did one more thing. He attacked those people with a strong, confused ray. Even that person who could use the light element got affected by that. This will keep all those Warriors busy for 10 seconds, but this was enough time for the same to finish 2 to 3 warriors. But one thing was that the person who could use the light element will be the first one to recover from that and because of this wasting no time, Sam attacked that person.


    In less than 5 seconds, he already swung his sword 100 times. With that, you can imagine how dangerous this attack was. He was swinging at a very intense speed and every one of those swung full of spiritual energy, and not only that but the same also already changed the nature of the spiritual energy.


    This time, it took 60 swings to destroy the Armor of that person, and with those 40 swings, the warrior was already in a very serious condition. After that, he left that ce because the warrior will die automatically. When he uses this move while changing the nature of his spiritual energy, then the monster or his enemies will start to burn after they receive the wounds from his sword. Those wounds were full of me spiritual energy and the moment that spiritual energy got contact with the blood, it started to burn. So this was a very dangerous attack as you can guess because it firstly injured you from the outside and then started to burn you from the inside. Also,pared to those physical warriors, killing a spiritual warrior was much easier. They did not have that much body difference if you ignore the armor in their body.


    ___________________


    While Sam was busy killing those people, Aria and Maria with their people, and also fighting with those other people? Both of them already seriously injured those B-grade warriors and not only that, but they also made them unconscious. Right now, those other people from the warrior association were handling those other Warriors from the dark association. It did not take them that much time to capture all those people.


    After capturing all those people, Aria was now going inside the tunnel to search for the masked warrior. Most likely, he was inside of this tunnel and fighting those people. So she was approaching him using her full speed. 20 secondster, she was already in front of those dead bodies that Sam had previously killed. At this time, she started to observe those dead bodies. She can tell that someone just killed them. Most likely it was the Mask warrior because she still remembers that he told her that he could take care of all those early C-grade warriors.


    [A/N: Don''tpare these early C-grade warriors with Fiona or Gloria.]


    ___________To be continued__________

 Chapter 287 287 - Exited Sam

    "Thanks for the help. I already take care of all the early C-grade warriors. I hope you don''t mind. Also, I have some suspicion that those people belong to the dark association. If you find anything about those people, let me know. I have something to do in the warrior association so see you there." This was the message that Aria received at this time from the masked warrior. Looking at the message, she just smiles and then looks at all those dead bodies. She told her subordinate to clean the area.


    Actually, she was very curious to know the real identity of this masked warrior. But she did not want to forcefully get the answer from him because everyone has their own secret that they did not want to reveal. She just hopes that one day, Mask Warrior will reveal himself. Well, she also has some suspicions that Sam Kainer was the Mask warrior, but she cannot wish you until she does not get any proof.


    ____________


    At this time, the masked warrior, or you can say, Sam, was going toward the Warrior association while driving his car. After taking care of all those Warriors he just left that area and started his journey. While going toward the Warrior association, he was thinking about something. Previously, when he was fighting those early C-grade warriors, he noticed that they were weakpared to the senior Fiona. Also, this was one reason he was able to kill them this quickly.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam was now inside of the warrior association and waiting for the receptionist girl to bring him his order. Today, he will use all of his money to buy as many crystals as he can. Because of this, he waited for the receptionist to bring them. At this time, he looked at his mobile and saw that he got a message from Aria.


    "Well, it is confirmed that those people are from the dark association. It will take some time to know their motive. I don''t know why those dark association people are targeting you, but most likely they are targeting you because previously you helped us catch those people from the dark association. I hope you will keep your guard up because those from the dark association could attack you once again." This was the message that Aria sent him.


    " Okay," Sam replied, and then started to think.


    ''Most likely Aria''s guess is right. Those people are getting me because I help the warrior association to catch many people from the dark association. Most likely they wanted to kill me because I am also on their target list right now. Most likely, I need to be careful. Also, they seem to kill me, not wanting my blood. Fortunately, I have my supreme concealment techniques, but still, I need to be careful because those B-grade or A-grade Warriors could sense the energy fluctuation. Most likely when my concealment techniques will reach B-grade or A-grade, only then they won''t be able to sense my energy fluctuation.'' Sam was thinking all of this. At this time, the receptionist girl already brought his order.


    _______________________


    1 hourter,


    He was now inside his room, and he was absorbing those crystals. But at this time, he notices something different while absorbing the crystals. At first, he thought it was only his illusion, but the more he was absorbing the crystal, the more he was feeling that. Actually, he was feeling that he was easily able to absorb 100% spiritual essence from those crystals. After absorbing 10 crystals, he became sure that this was the case. At this time, he suddenly had the desire to look at his status screen, but unfortunately, he needed to wait for his system to upgrade.


    But still, at this time, he was feeling very excited that he was about to jump from his bed andugh loudly. But he controls himself. This wasn''t the time to waste. He should use this chance and absorb as many crystals as he could.


    ''I don''t know what happened with my absorb technique, but most likely Kartara helped me. Did she also upgrade my absorb technique? Sigh, I will only get to know this once my system will finish upgrading,'' Sam sighs and then once again focuses on absorbing all the crystals. Most likely now absorbing one crystal was giving him 1 status point. With this, you can naturally guess why he became this much excited. If he could absorb the 100% essence from the crystals and every crystal could give him one status point, then it was a very exciting thing for him because with that he could be powerful quickly.


    Right now he has 42 power crystals, 38 agility crystals, 40 physique crystals, and 25 spirit crystals. So, wasting no time, he began to absorb all those crystals one by one. Also, if you are wondering why he has only this many spirit crystalspared to his other crystals, then the demand for the spirit crystals was much greater than any other crystals and not everyone sells the spirit crystals to warrior associations. This was the reason why in the Warrior association they have only this many spirit crystals.


    _______________________


    3 hourster,<novelnext></novelnext>


    He finally finished absorbing all those crystals. And naturally, he was feeling very strong right now. Right now, he was stabilizing himself and bing familiar with his new strength. Sometimeter, he left his room and began to walk toward the training room. He needed to see how strong he became and because of this, he will be fighting the robots in his training room.


    Aftering to the training room, he brings out his two robots and begins his fighting. As usual, he wasn''t using his sword; he was only using his fist to fight these two robots. While fighting those two robots, he can naturally feel how powerful he was right now and also how much his Instinct became stronger.


    ________________


    While Sam was busy fighting his two robots, Aria, Maria, and the other Warriors from the warrior association were in the interrogation room. They were now trying to get the information out of those people that they have captured. One person already confirms that they belong to the dark association and gets the order to kill that masked warrior. Also, as you guess, the reason why a Warrior from the dark association wanted to kill that masked Warrior, was because of him, their leader failed in their first mission and because of this, they wanted to kill him.


    Sometimeter,


    All of them leave the interrogation room because they already get all the information that they could get from that warrior of dark association. All of them also know that in every Warrior from the dark association they have some kind of restriction bound to the life that prevents them from revealing the location of the dark association. Because of this, none of them ask those Warriors about the dark association''s location.


    Now all of them are nning what they should do right now. Not only the Mask warrior but also those warriors whose name was on the dark association''s list. The warrior association also wasn''t slow because they already sent Warriors that will protect those people from the dark association until the body association didn''t find out about the motive of this dark association. It was 100% sure that the dark association was nning something big, and because of this, the Warriors from the warrior associations were this serious.


    _____________


    In the abundant factory, in the central city,


    Right now, those 5 Warriors from the dark association once again gather in that factory.


    "Our Warrior once again got captured by this Warrior association while they were searching for the mask Warrior." Suddenly, one warrior says that to everyone. After hearing this, all those 5 Warriors became depressed. All of them thought that they could easily kill that masked warrior, but right now it''s since they need to make their move to kill that person.


    "Leader, what do you think? This person is very cautious. Even when those many people from the dark association followed him, he didn''t panic and just calmly solved the problem. Until we did not make any move, most likely it will be quite difficult to kill him. Most likely you will run away or ask for help from the Warrior association." At this time, one person said to their leader.


    At this time, the leader of them was just staying silent and thinking about something. He was thinking about whether he should make a move or not. Because right now they have one task that they needed toplete, which was to gather the blood of those people whose name was on the list.


    At this time, suddenly his phone rang. He looked at his phone and saw that it was his subordinate who was calling him. He picked up the phone and asked for the report. His subordinate did not waste that much time and quickly gave him the report of the mission. They are already able to sessfully collect blood from many Warriors but still; they need to collect blood. Most likely, it will take some time. Also, they have already sent the collected blood into the dark association.


    After hearing all of this, the leader became very happy. Finally, they have made some progress in their mission. They are subordinates already able to collect blood from many Warriors.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 288 288 - Final

    Right now in the stadium, you can see that all the seats were full. The stadium was fully crowded because today is the final. From 1st-year to 4th-year students will be fighting today. Because of this, all the audience was fully excited about this.


    Those teams who will be fighting in the final match were already present in the battleground. Right now, every team was waiting in their waiting room. Sam and his teammates were also waiting in their waiting room. They were now waiting for the announcer to announce the start of the battle. As usual, the first year will be fighting first and the fourth-year students will be fightingst.


    Alena, Hina, Victor, Aria, Maria, and even Markus, Mira, and Vena were also present in the stadium. Well, they have their own private room and from there they will be watching the match. As you can say, even the saints were excited about the final. But unfortunately, not every saint coulde to the stadium to watch the match. They need to watch over those S-grade dungeons. Not only that, even the defense of the central city already increases. Because of the dark association, the warrior association cannot take any risks. They need to ensure the safety of those normal people who cannot fight against the dark association. Many Warriors from the warrior association also wanted to watch today''s final but they know that they have a bigger duty to protect the central city.


    "Ladies and gentlemen, wee to today''s final match. I know that all of you are very excited about this match. To tell you the truth, I am also very excited because I can feel the intense atmosphere between those teams. Who will be the winner? No one can tell that, but one thing is for sure, we will get to watch a very exciting match. Every student will be fighting with their hundred percent. So let''s not waste any more time and let''s wee our first-year teams to the battleground."


    " From our left side, let''s wee our Darwin city''s king, the Golden Dawn''s team." The moment the announcer finishes talking, everyone is looking toward the left side. Instantly, with a grand entrance, the Golden Dawn entered the battlefield. Right now, every one of them was releasing their aura. All of them have a confident look at them. They already equip their Armor and hold their weapons while entering the battlefield. In front of them, the captain of the Golden Dawn, James, was holding the g of the Golden Dawn.


    At this time, the cheering team from the Golden Dawn begins to y drums and music for their team. Also, the audience who were supporting their team began to cheer loudly for them. Sometimeter, everyone became silent once again because it was time to wee the second team.


    "Now, from our right side, let''s wee the central city''s king, the Royal Academy''s team on the battlefield." Well, the announcer finished saying that everyone was now looking toward the right side. Even the Golden Dawn''s team is also looking in that direction.


    Instantly, BGM begins to y in the background, and the entrance begins to fill with smoke. After that, with a grand entrance, the team of the Royal Academy begins toe to the battleground through that smoke. The cheering team from the Royal Academy also began to y drums and music to support the team. Also, people who were supporting the Royal Academy began to cheer loudly to support their team. One by one, Tony and the others came out through that smoke. In front of them was Sam, who was also holding the g of the Royal Academy whileing to the battlefield.


    Except for Sam, who wasn''t releasing his full Aura, Tony and the others fully released their aura. They wanted to show in front of everyone that they were also ready to fight. Everyone maintains their confident look whileing to the battlefield. Right now, both of the teams were releasing their aura and trying to provoke each other. At this time, all the audience present in the stadium also can feel the aura that wasing from both of the teams. It excited those audiences once again because they can tell that both of the teams are powerful. Most likely they also only train continuously in these few days and because of this their power should also increasepared to before.


    "What an intense atmosphere. We can see that both of the teams were already ready to fight each other. We don''t know which team will be the winner, but it will be a very intense match. I know that everyone is already aware of the rules, but still I want to remind everyone. In the final, all 10 students from a team will fight with their opponent. The team needed at least eight wins to win thepetition. The captain can also use their captain''s privilege to challenge the opponent''s team. But he needed to challenge the whole team and needed to win every match to win thispetition. Killing is not allowed and also using illegal drugs or potions to power up is also not allowed. So let''s not waste any more time and start our 1st fight." The announcer, after telling the rules, gives both of the teams the signal to send their first warrior into the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Both of the teams already went to their tent. From both of the teams, their first fighters went toward the battle ring. From Golden Dawn it was Aviking toward the battle ring, from the Royal Academy, Dan wasing toward the battle ring. Right now, all the audience was cheering for both of the students. Aftering to the battle ring, both of the fighters looked at each other with an intense gaze and waited for the referee to give them the signal to fight. After that, the referee also did not waste any more than and quickly gave them the signal to start their fight.


    __________


    Wasting no time, both of the students started fighting. From the first, Dan started using his continuous arrow attack. But his opponent also wasn''t slow and the most interesting thing was that both of them were archers and as you can see, both of them were fighting while shooting Arrows. Also if you are wondering if they got seriously injured by those then you didn''t need to worry about what the arrow that the warrior association prepared for the student. With this, no one will get seriously hurt but they will still feel the pain.


    Not only Dan, but his opponent also uses the continuous technique to continuously shoot Arrow towards him. While both of their attacks go to a teacher, many arrows already sh with each other and get destroyed. At this time, both of them know that if they continue like that, then they won''t have any winner in this match. Both of them started to think.


    Suddenly Avik shoots a me arrow toward Dan. Yes, as you can guess, this type of archery technique is also present, but it was just Sam did not buy those techniques. But one thing was that the me arrow that Sam shot in his energy mode was more stronger and destructive than this me arrow. Fortunately, Dan was able to react in time and jumped away from that ce. Very quickly that me Arrow hit the ce where Dam was previously standing.


    The moment Arrow hit the battle ring, it instantly burned that area. Fortunately, Dan was able to react in time. He is already able to stabilize himself and already prepares for his attack. Very quickly, he shot his arrow, but the audience and his opponent only saw that he only just pulled the string of his bow and then released it. Did he forget to use the arrow? But Avik already senses the danger. The moment he sensed the danger, he also jumped away from his ce.


    As you can guess, Dan was using the invisible arrow to attack his opponent. Because of this, nobody previously saw the arrow. Every moment when he activates this technique, Arrow will be invisible. This technique was a very dangerous technique but fortunately, Avik''s instinct was very good and because of this, he was able to dodge. Also, one more thing was that the invisible Arrow will not make any sound. So with that, you can guess how dangerous this attack was. Only those people who are able to see those invisible arrows were the people who had high-grade observation techniques or eye techniques that use the invisible thing that the human eye is unable to see. Because of this, Sam is also able to see this type of invisible arrow using his spiritual vision.


    At first, those audiences were very confused about why Avik jumped away from his ce, but when they saw the ground where Avik was standing previously got destroyed, only then they understood that Dan should be using the invisible Arrow technique. Instantly, those audiences became very excited because the match kept getting intense.


    ______________To be continued__________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 289 289 - Saara Vs Oliver

    Dan quickly moves from his ce and dodges the me arrow once again. But he also wasn''t slow, and while dodging, he didn''t lose his focus and shot his arrows toward his Avik. Avik wasn''t able to sense the arrow and got hit in his right hand. Even though these arrows could not be pierced through anything, they could still give you pain. Avik, at this time, feels pain in his right hand. Because of the sudden attack, his bow also fell from his hand.


    Dan didn''t let go of this chance and, using his movement technique, he appeared behind him and held a knife on Avik''s neck. At this time Avik knows that if this was the real fight, then he would already be dead, and because of this he just surrendered. Dan extended his hand toward him. Avik at first did not expect he would do that, but he still held his hand and then stood up.


    "Nice match. Your me arrows are really powerful. I almost got burned by that," Dan smilingly said to Avik.


    "Haha¡­ but still you win this match, man. I did not expect that those invisible arrows would be this powerful. I previously thought that I could at least sense those invisible arrows and Dodge them, but that was my mistake. I really underestimated those invisible arrows." Avik sighs and says that.


    " Still, it was a good match. Let''s fight against each other if we get time," after saying both of them handshakes. Right now, if you look at both of their armor, then you can see that Dan''s armor has burn marks on it. While Avik''s armor had scratches on it.


    At this time, the referee and the medical team had alreadye to the battle ring. The medical team quickly went to both of the fighters and started treating them. Fortunately, none of them got seriously injured and because of this, it did not take that much time to heal them.


    The referee also at this time announced Dan as the winner of the match. Instantly, you can hear the cheering and pping sounds of the stadium. Not only that, but you can also hear the drums. Those people who were supporting the Royal Academy instantly cheered for him. The cheering team from the Royal Academy also cheered for him.


    Dan became happy when he saw that those people were cheering for him. He just smiled at them and also said thank you. After that, he left the battle ring and started to go toward his team. Tony and the others were also very excited and when he came toward them, they instantly came to him and said their congrattions. Sam smiled and nodded at him. He is happy that one of his friends is able to improve himself at archery. As you know, it was Sam who suggested that he learn the invisible arrow technique.


    Avik also went back to his friends. He did not smile when he came toward them because he was unable to win this fight. But his friends quickly tried to cheer him up, saying that he did not need to worry because they would win the match and their captain could make up for his loss. Avik rxes and smiles at his friends. James just nodded at him. It was like he was saying don''t worry about anything, I will take care of everything. After that, he sent his next fighter toward the battle ring. Sam also wasn''t slow because Saara also started to go toward the battle ring.


    She was a spiritual fighter, while her opponent will be a physical fighter. So she already prepared herself to face her opening. She cannot get very close to her opponent because her opponent was very good at closebat. She needs to maintain her distance opponent. Only by maintaining the distance will she be able to attack her opponent. While going toward the battle ring, Saara was thinking about his n that she will follow in the battle ring. Not only her, but Oliver, her opponent, is also thinking the same thing that you will follow in the battle ring. He also knew that his opponent was a spiritual warrior and so it was natural that she would try to maintain a distance between him and her. Unfortunately, he still was not able to learn the spirit technique and because of this, he could only attack from a closed distance.


    After both of the fighters came to the battle ring, they didn''t say anything and only just focused on each other. Both of them are ready to fight. The referee had already left the battle ring when both of the fighters came to the battle ring. Wasting no time, he quickly gave them the signal to fight.


    The moment both of the Fighters receive the signal to fight, both of them attack. Saara instantly created some water Spears and attacked Oliver with them. But Oliver also wasn''t slow, because the moment he noticed those water spears he started to use his sword to cut those water spears. The main n of Saara wasn''t just to attack him, but she wanted to use this chance to get away from that ce.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Oliver already destroyed all those water Spears and right now he was approaching Saara. He was about to attack her with his sword, but instantly a water wall appeared in front of him. His sword hit that water wall but didn''t touch Saara. She already made a distance between him and her.


    At this time, Oliver did something that surprised everyone. His sword suddenly started to burn, and that vaporized the water well. Naturally, as you can guess, Oliver was using a fire crystal in his sword. He already did his homework on her and because of this, he knew that she was a water element user. Even though he wasn''t able to use the spirit technique, this was his trump card, and by using that, he will fight against her.


    _________________


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, if you look at those in the audience who are present in the stadium, then you can see that they have shocked expressions. They are all very shocked at how Oliver could use that much power using his sword while releasing the me. Yes, right now in the battle ring you can see that Saara was continuously shooting her attack toward Oliver, but Oliver also wasn''t slow. He quickly countered those attacks with his fire. He just continuously swung his sword and from that fire wasing out and made a wall in front of him.


    Even though both of the fighters did not get seriously injured, they were now already exhausted mentally. For Saara, she was exhausted because she was continuously using her spiritual energy, while on the other hand Oliver was exhausted because he was also using his spiritual energy to bring out the fire from his sword. This type of firestone did not need that much spiritual energy, but still, it needed spiritual energy to release the element of power from it.


    Even though both of the Fighters are exhausted, none of them stop. They just continuously attack. Oliver is already able to hit Saara. But Saara also wasn''t behind because she was also able to injure him. So you can say that both of them injured each other but none of them are seriously injured.


    Suddenly, arge amount of spiritual energy started going toward Saara. She was preparing her strongest attack to attack Oliver and finish this match. She also already makes the water spread in the battle ring. With that, she slows down Oliver''s movement. Suddenly, the water around the battle ring started going toward Oliver and instantly covered him from the front and behind. Well, as you can guess that it was the water prison spell. She already improved the spell, and because of this, she also became powerful.


    Right now, the only focus is on maintaining the water prison until Oliver does not give up. Right now the Golden Dawn academy, and those people who were supporting the Golden Dawn, be very worried about Oliver. But at this time some people notice something. They quickly told others to also focus on the water prison. Only then does everyone notice that? They could see that the water around the water prison started to get vaporized. No one knew what was happening inside the water prison, but one thing they could tell was that Oliver still did not give up.


    Actually, if you look inside of the water prison, then you can see that Oliver was holding his sword with both of his hands and he was channeling his spiritual energy toward the sword. Like the Royal Academy, the Golden Dawn also teaches the fastest students to control their spiritual energy. Because of this, he could do that. The moment the fire crystal got spiritual energy, it started to release mes around him. When that me got touched by the water, it was vaporizing that water.


    ____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 290 290 - Saara Vs Oliver (2)

    Saara, after noticing that, used more Spiritual energy. At this time, more water went toward Oliver. But Oliver also wasn''t slow because he also used his full spiritual energy to charge the me stone. So, that me stone also releases full me and tries to vaporize the water. That me also created ayer around him and prevented the water from reaching him.


    Sometimeter,


    Inside of that water prison, you can see that the meyer that Oliver created to protect himself from the water and also to vaporize the water, decreases in power. Well, it was natural because the spiritual energy of Oliver was very lowpared to Saara''s. So it was natural that Oliver would feel exhausted after trying to maintain the meyer around him. But it doesn''t mean that he gave up. He was just searching for a chance to break through from this prison and attack Saara.


    At this time, Those people who are watching this fight saw the struggle of Oliver. He was a physical warrior and it was natural for him to have low spiritual energypared to a spiritual warrior. So the thought is that Saara will naturally win this fight if the fight goes on like this. All of them could see that Oliver was struggling very hard to break free from that prison but was still unable to do anything.


    But at this time nobody noticed that Saara was also panting. It is also exhausting for her to maintain a powerful water prison like this. But sometimeter, she saw that the meyer just kept decreasing in power. So she naturally thought that Oliver was at his limit and he wouldn''t be able to maintain the meyer like that for a long time.


    At this time, in the Royal Academy''s tent, Tony, Alexa, and the others were also having happy smiles on their faces because they can also see that the meyer just keeps decreasing in power so it won''t take that long for that meyer to vanishpletely. But, Alexa and Jeni suddenly notice that Sam wasn''t smiling. He has a serious face right now while looking at the battle ring. So it was natural for them to be curious,


    "Sam, what happened? Why is your expression so serious?" Both of them asked him. Suddenly hearing their question Tony and the others also notice his expression and they also be curious.


    "The situation isn''t looking good. Most likely her opponent is nning for a big move and because of this, he is decreasing the power of the meyer. He is saving his spiritual energy for a big move. I think you have already noticed that Saara''s spiritual power is very low." Sam is still looking at the battle ring but he exins the reason for his seriousness.


    Hearing his words every one of them also bes serious. All of them at this time noticed Saara was panting heavily and her head was full of sweat. While they were observing her, they suddenly noticed that the meyer suddenly vanished. All of them can see that inside of that water prison Oliver wasn''t struggling. He was now keeping his eyes closed while holding his sword. A few secondster, He suddenly opened his eyes and Once again me appeared in his sword. This time it did not make a meyer. He likely was about to make his move. He began to shout and swing his sword with his full strength toward Saara.


    Instantly a me sh is created by that and directly passes through the water prison and starts going toward Saara. At this time, she already felt the dangering from that sh and because of this she instantly deactivated the water prison and instantly created a water wall in front of her. That me sh hit the water wall. She was using her full energy to counter that sh. After that me sh hit the water wall, it instantly vaporized the water but the water kept appearing on the water wall and because of this it still did not get vaporizedpletely.


    All of this happens in only 10 seconds. 30 secondster, the me shpletely disappeared but she did not rx. She instantly deactivated the water wall and created water spears. At this time she could see that her opponent was about to reach her. So wasting no time he shoots all those water Spears toward her opponent.


    "Boom!" The sh between Oliver and those water Spears created a loud sound and not only that it created a vaporizing wateryer around it and because of this nobody could tell what was happening inside of theyer. Saara was panting heavily. Right now she only has 10% spiritual energy. So you can say that she was mentally exhausted. But at this time she was just looking toward the ce where a vaporizing wateryer was created. She also wanted to know the result.


    After some timeter the vaporizing wateryer faded away and everyone could see the result. Right now, Oliver wasying down on the ground unconsciously, not only that but he was also bleeding. Instantly, the medical team and the referee appear in the battle ring. The medical team quickly went toward Oliver to check his condition. They already saw that he was unconscious and not only that but he was also bleeding. But fortunately, the wound is not serious. Somehow the armor around his hand got destroyed and from there he was bleeding. They began to heal him and after stabilizing his condition, they took him away toward the medical tent.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Ladies and gentlemen, we finally have a winner. She is the only water element user on her team. She always gives her best in every fight and always tries to win. She is the Saara Fris, also known as Lady Aqua." The moment the referee finished saying that, everyone in the stadium began to p for her. Instantly, the cheering team from the Royal Academy begin to cheer for her. Right now in the stadium, you can only hear her name being shouted by everyone.


    Finally, Tony and the others sigh in relief. Saara was able to win this fight finally. For a moment, they thought she wouldn''t be able to win. Previously when she was protecting herself from that me sh, they saw Oliver approaching her. If she doesn''t react on time, she will lose this match. Fortunately, she was able to hold her ground and also attack him on time.


    When they saw hering toward them, they went toward her and said their congrattions. It was naturally a very intense fight. From the first tost no one was able to guess correctly who could be the winner. Sometimes it seems Saara will be the winner, but in the next moment, it seems that Oliver will win this fight. Jeni, Kira, Elena, and Alexa also hugged her. Sam nodded at her while smiling. He is also happy that she won this fight.


    A few minutester,


    The next fighter once again came toward the battle ring. It was Kira and her opponent. Once again everyone in the stadium became excited. Once again an intense fight was about to start. Who would be the winner and who would be the loser? Nobody can predict that. But who cares about predicting? They will enjoy the intense fight.


    ______________________


    2 hourster,


    Tony quickly swings his sword. A blue sh was created by that and it went toward his opponent. His opponent, after seeing that sh, created an earth wall in front of her. As you guess his opponent was a spiritual Warrior and she was an earth element user. So, it is once again a fight between a physical Warrior vs a spiritual Warrior.


    Tony, didn''t waste time, when he saw her jumping away from her ce, he used his full agility and went toward her. He quickly appeared in front of his opponent and already his sword was about to hit his opponent. But, his opponent also has good instincts and because of this she reacted quickly and dodge that attack. But still, because she was very close to that attack She wasn''t able to dodge properly and her hand still got hit by that attack. Fortunately, she has C-grade armor, which protects her hand.


    The next moment, Tony feels a vibrationing from the ground. He wasted no time and jumped away. The moment he jumped away from his ce, the ground beneath his foot suddenly got covered by earth elements. Fortunately, he was able to react in time and dodge that attack. Who could expect that she will attack this fast?


    But it seems she didn''t want Tony to escape from there. Because of this, she quickly controls that earth element and a big hand created by that. That big hand quickly tries to catch Tony but he already counterattacks with his sword.


    __________To be continued_______

 Chapter 291 291 - Winner

    Tony, us ing his full agility, instantly appears in front of his opponent and attacks with his full strength while using his full spiritual energy. His opponent instantly created an Earth wall to protect herself but still, she wasn''t able to protect herself. You can say that she wasn''t able to create that wall in time and because of this she got hit by his attack. Just after being hit by that attack, she coughed blood from her mouth and also got sent flying. You cannot imagine the impact that she faced after Tony''s attack.


    Tony this time did not go toward his opponent because he is now circting his energy recovery technique. On the other hand, he also wanted to know the result. His opponent fell down on the ground. She tries to get up but she once again coughs blood. A few secondster, she just instantly became unconscious. Instantly the medical team appeared beside her and started their healing. The referee also came to the battle ring after seeing that Tony''s opponent won''t be able to fight. Right now if you look at his opponent then you can also see her armor got destroyed by thisst attack.


    The referee announced Tony as the winner of the match. The moment the referee finishes announcing once again everyone in the stadium begins to shout Tony''s name. Tony also smiles when the referee finishes announcing. After saying thank you to all those people he started to go toward his team. Alexa and the others congratted him. Right now the Royal Academy has 4 wins while they lost three matches. Kenny, Tina, and Kira lost against their opponent. It wasn''t that they did not give their 100% in the fight but they still lost. Kenny would have won her match if she knew the spirit technique because her opponent was able to use that technique and because of this she lost. Right now the three of them are very depressed but Sam just told them not to worry about that. At the end of the match if both of the teams did not have 8 wins in their favor then the captains of both of the teams would fight against their opponent. That time the captain didn''t need it against everyone. They just needed to win against 5 people and their team would be the winner.


    Well, you can say that the captain will bear the pressure of their team if their teammates lose any match. You can say that it was a bit cruel for the captains but it was also a chance for the captains to show their power in front of everyone. In this, they will show everyone why they became the captain of the team. The moment they became the captain, it was decided that they would bear this pressure of their team. Well also before the final match any captain could use their privilege to challenge their opponent team but in that matter, they will challenge the whole team and need to win against the whole team.


    ? Sometimeter,


    Alexa was going toward the battle ring. The moment those people who were supporting the Royal Academy saw her, they instantly started to shout her name. She gained the nickname sword princess. On the other hand, Aliya also came toward the battle ring. She is also the vice-captain of Golden Dawn. Those people who were supporting the Golden Dawn were cheering for her. So you can say that in the whole stadium right now you can only hear two names.


    Both of the vice captains came to the battle ring. Both of them looked at each other. They cannot be careless in this fight. They will use their everything to win this fight. The moment both of them came to the battle ring, everyone could feel the intense atmosphere between them. Both of them are ready to fight anytime.


    The referee also didn''t waste any more time and quickly gave them the signal. The moment both of them saw the signal, they approached each other. Aliya was using a spear while Alexa was using a sword. Both the spear and sword shed. From the first, they were using their full strength and because of using their full spiritual power in this attack, that sh created a huge impact. Even audiences who were protected by a barrier could feel the impact. None of the vice captains moved from their ce. They were trying to push their opponent backward.


    Suddenly both of them jump backward and once again approach each other. They once again shed. Like this, they just keep fighting. Both of them also used their strongest technique while fighting each other. Alexa instantly appears beside her opponent and she swings her sword 15 times in less than a second. But Aliya also wasn''t slow, instantly she jumped in the air to protect herself. But she wasn''t finished, the moment she jumped in the year she threw her spear toward Alexa. Alexa also did not back down, she swung her sword toward that spear. You have to say that that spear was powerful because Alexa backed away 2 steps while counter-attacking that spear. At this time, Aliya alreadynded on the ground and instantly went toward Alexa.


    The moment Alexa cut that spear in half, she jumped away from her ce. She already noticed her opponent. Aliya at this time already brought out a new spare. The moment she notices Alexa jumping backward, she quickly swings her spear toward her. Instantly this created a blue sh that went toward Alexa. Alexa once again dodges that and she also swings her sword toward her opponent.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Instantly, Aliya uses her sword to counterattack those shes. But Alex was already approaching her and was about to attack her. This time Aliya wasn''t able to react on time and got hit. That attack sent her backward. Not only that, but she also coughs blood after getting hit. But she quickly stabilizes herself and removes the blood from her mouth using her hand. Like this, they were fighting.


    ______________________


    1 hourter,


    Right now, both of the vice captains were still fighting. But at this time you can see that Aliya was already injured and her armor also started to break. On the other hand, Alexa wasn''t injured. Even though she also has scratches and crack marks on her armor, she did not get injured. If you are wondering why she didn''t get injured then the reason was that she was finally able to use the spirit technique while using her body technique. This made her defense stronger and because of this, she did not get injured.


    At this time Tony and the others were watching this match with surprised expressions. They did not think that Aliya would be this strong. It was not that they did not have the confidence to defeat her, but it really surprised them. Tony has the confidence that he could also defeat her but it was just that he will also get injured. But they did not worry about Alexa because they have full confidence that Alexa will easily win this fight.


    At this time Alexa already appeared in front of our opponent and swung her sword toward her opponent. She was using Zen sh this time. This technique increases the strength behind her swing and also increases the sharpness. Aliya also uses her full power to defend against that but her spear got cut in half, and she got hit. She once again coughed blood and was sent backward. Alexa did not want to give her any chance and because of this, she went toward her opponent again. Before Aliya could stabilize herself, Alexa appeared in front of her, and this time she punched her. Aliya coughed blood and then fell to the ground. Alexa was once again about to punch her but then she noticed that her opponent wasn''t moving. Because of this, she did not punch her and backway from that ce.


    The medical team already appeared in the battle ring when they saw that one of the fighters wasn''t moving. The medical team quickly checked her condition and found that she was unconscious and won''t be able to fight. At this time the referee already came to the battle ring and announced Alexa as the winner of the match.


    "Ladies and gentlemen, what an intense fight that both of our vice-captains showed us. From the first to thest both of them use their 100% power to defeat each other. But in the end, our sword princess was able to defeat the spear princess and became the winner of this match. Please everyone pped for both of the vice-captains." The moment the referee finishes saying that the audience begins to p and cheer for both of the captains. It was really an intense fight that really made them very excited. At first, many people thought that Alexa would easily win this fight but then they saw how powerful Aliya was. She also shows everyone why she is the vice-captain. Alexa still maintains her serious face while nodding toward those people. After that, she went toward her teammates.


    ___________To be continued__________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 292 292 - Sword Devil VS Mysterious Swordsman

    "Ladies and gentlemen. Finally, it is time for the battle of captains. Until now, the Royal Academy and the Golden Dawn academy''s 1st-year team have fought very intensely. Now it is up to their captain''s hand if they will win thepetition or lose thepetition."


    " First wee our sword devil, James Danish from Golden Dawn academy. In his previous match, he already showed why he was called the sword devil. Like a devil, he likes to hunt down his opponent. So let''s wee our captain of the Golden Dawn."


    The moment the referee finishes saying that instantly you can only hear one name in the stadium. The Golden Dawn''s cheering team is also cheering for their captain. At this time James started to go toward the battle ring with his confident gaze. Even though the Royal Academy was leading the fight you cannot see any worry in his eyes. He has full confidence that he will win this fight. After looking at his confident look, the people who were cheering for him started to cheer more loudly. Everyone knows how powerful he was and they also have full confidence that he will win this fight.


    Sometimeter, when everyone in the stadium calms down, the referee once again begins to give his speech,


    "As I expected everyone was very excited after seeing our captain James. As we know how powerful he is, it will be hard for his opponent to win against him. But like him, our next captain is also very powerful. He previously did not participate in any matches. It is not that he is not powerful but it is just that his teammates were enough to finish those matches and because of this, he didn''t get the chance to participate. But here in the final he finally participated in the match. We don''t know how powerful he is right now because he never shows us. But one thing is that he was called the number one genius of this year. He is full of mystery, and he also calls the Mysterious swordsman. Haha¡­ this nickname was weird but it was given by his ssmates. I hope in this match he will get a better nickname. So wasting no time, let''s wee our next captain, Sam Kainer."


    When the referee finishes saying that, Sam finally gets up from his seat and begins to walk toward the battle ring. This was his first time participating in this match, but in his face, you cannot see any other expression other than a calm face. Nobody could guess what he was thinking while looking at his expression.


    At this time those audiences who were supporting the Royal Academy once again began to cheer for Sam. Even though they don''t know the power of the captain of the Royal Academy, one thing was for sure he will be more powerful than Alexa because he is the captain. Because of this, the audience supported him. But the cheering team from the Royal Academy knows the power of Sam and because of this the moment he starts to go toward the battle ring they begin to show their support for him. Right now nobody knows that just after admitting to the Royal Academy he defeated a second-year senior except his ssmates or other Royal Academy''s students.


    Hina, Victor, and Alena also watched the match right. The moment they also saw Sam going toward the battle ring they also showed a happy smile. Finally, Sam is going to participate and he will show in front of everyone how powerful he is right now. Gloria and Fiona are also looking at the screen from their waiting room. They also both smiled when they saw some going toward the battle ring.


    "What do you think Gloria? How long will this Beast take to finish his opponent?" Suddenly Fiona asks Gloria. Well, she had a sparring match with some and knows how powerful he is. Because of this, she asked this question to Gloria.


    "I don''t know. If he wanted to finish this fight quickly then he would defeat his opening in just 5 minutes but if he did not want to finish this fight quickly then it would be a long fight." Gloria says that while her focus is still on the screen. Well not only her but others were also looking at the screen. Everyone from the Royal Academy knows this person could defeat a second-year senior just after admitting to the Royal Academy. So he could win this fight easily.


    At this time both of the captains were right now in the battle ring. Both of them looked at each other and observed each other. James already brings out his sword. But at this time his ssmates, his friends, and even those people who know about his fighting style get very surprised. Because right now no one can see a sword in his hand. Everyone knows how powerful his sword techniques were. So it was natural for everyone to be surprised.


    "What happened to him? Why did she still not bring out his sword? Did something happen to his sword?" Suddenly Fiona asks Gloria.


    "I also don''t know why he still didn''t bring out his sword," Gloria also was very surprised after seeing his action. She just shook his head while she was still focusing on the screen.<novelnext></novelnext>


    This same question Hina also asked Victor and Alena. They can also see that Sam still did not bring out his weapon. But suddenly Alena said to her,


    "Don''t worry aunty. He is also very good at his punch technique and most likely he wanted to win this fight only using his fist." Alena assured her. She has full confidence in her students. But unexpectedly, Alexa, Tony, Jeni, and Elena, didn''t get surprised that much. At first, they were surprised but that was it. Their expressions quickly became normal and they also began to smile. Because they remember how previously Sam was only fighting those two robots only using his fists. At this time Alexa also told the others not to worry about him.


    ________________________


    "You did not want to bring out your weapon? Did you underestimate my power? Is this your arrogance or overconfidence? I know that in the college entrance examination I was weaker than you but right now everything has changed. If this is your overconfidence or arrogance then I will make you regret this." At this time, James, who was in the battle ring, suddenly asks Sam.


    "Haha¡­ don''t misunderstand me. This is not my arrogance or overconfidence. I think you don''t know but I am also good at using my fists. So I am going to use that. Also, one more thing is that I never underestimate any of my opponents." Sam finishes saying that and instantly approaches James. The referee already gave them the signal to fight. James also wasn''t slow; he also instantly began to approach Sam using his full speed.


    Those normal people were  unable to see the fight if the warrior association did not help them. Besides the battle ring, they also have a big screen where because of a slow-motion camera everyone in the battleground can see the fight between them on that big screen. On the big screen, they were seeing how quickly both of them were already in front of each other and they already attacked each other.


    Sam is already wearing his gloves and not only that he also already activated his energy mode and coated his gloves with his spiritual energy. One more good thing was that in the energy mode while he coated his sword or fist with the spiritual energy nobody could since the energy fluctuated. Because of this for all those people this was one of Sam''s mystery


    "Boom!" Instantly a loud sound you can hear that was created when James''s sword and Sam''s fist shed with each other. James also used his spirit technique and because of this, a huge impact was created by this. Fortunately, Sam also did not use his full power and because of this James was still in the battle ring. For this match, he decided not to use his intermediate D-grade warrior''s power. He will only use the early D-grade warrior''s power. But still, he already became so powerful that James can feel the power behind his fist. But that does not mean he will give up. Both of them still did not move from their ces but sometimeter James sent five steps backward.


    Sam already uses this chance to once again appear in front of him and punch him once again. But fortunately, James was very quick to react and avoid that. He is also very quick and instantly swings his sword toward Sam. But Sam already reacted and once again punched that sword. Once again his fist and the sword shed. At this time James tried to kick him but some already reacted and jumped backward.


    All the audience who are watching this match get very surprised when they see how easily Sam sent James backward with his first move. This instantly excited all the people who were supporting the Royal Academy. They once again begin to cheer loudly for him.


    ____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 293 293 - Sam VS James

    "Boom!" Sam''s punch hit the sword. Instantly, that created an explosion. And the impact sent James backward. But James also wasn''t slow he quickly stabilized himself and then gate away from that ce. The moment he got away from that ce, Sam''s punch hit the battle ring. That instantly cracked the battle ring. But still, both of the fighters did not stop fighting. James quickly attacks Sam with his sword. Sword sh and sh wereing towards Sam.  Sam also wasn''t slow; he quickly used his punch to counterattack those sword shes.


    At this time, a big sword sh suddenly appeared in front of Sam. But, Sam dodged that attack. That sword sh was unable to heat Sam but it hit the barrier that was protecting those audiences. Instantly all those audiences can feel the power behind that sh. For a moment all the audiences get scared then they once again focus on the battle. James is already about to attack and Sam is also about to punch. But suddenly out of nowhere, a second sword was in James''s left hand. Instantly swing his sword upward. Fortunately, it is unable to hit Sam once again because Sam already notices that and jumps away from that ce.


    At this time those audiences also were very surprised when they saw the second sword in James''s hand. Nobody could have expected that James would use a sword. Dual sword use wasn''t rare, but it was very hard to learn and most of the people were unable to use dual swords at the same time. Because of this, all those people got very surprised when those people who were supporting Golden Dawn instantly started to cheer loudly.


    Even though those people were cheering, both of the fighters present in the battle ring did not say anything to anyone and just silently observed each other. Sam also gets surprised when he sees that second sword in James'' hand. But he can also use a dual sword. Also, that wasn''t important at this moment. Both of them once again approach each other. James started to attack Sam, using his dual sword. Both of the swords were now glowing in blue color. Not only that but the swing speed of the sword also increased.


    If you were curious why James did not use this move previously, Well because previously he thought that he could defeat Sam without using his trump card, right now after fighting Sam he knows that he won''t be able to defeat him like this and because of this he finally reveals his dual sword technique. With intense speed James was swinging his swords, and Sam was dodging those attacks. Suddenly Sam quickly punched James but James also wasn''t slow, he also attacked that punch with his sword. Both the punch and one sword sh with each other while James uses the other sword to attack Sam.


    Sam already notices that attack and because of this he quickly kicks James and gets away from that ce. This time his kick only sent James one step backward. But James quickly stabilized himself and once again, and started swinging his swords toward Sam. sh after sh just going towards Sam, while he was busy counterattacking.


    _____________________


    Right now the teacher from Golden Dawn was smiling. Previously when they saw that the Royal Academy has The upper Hand they worried about the team but they still have confidence in their student. All the teachers from the Golden Dawn know that James knows how to use a dual sword. So the moment he brought out his second sword, all of them started to smile. They also looked toward the room where the teachers from the Royal Academy were also watching the match. Not every teacher from the Royal Academy knows the full power of Sam or his trump card. Because of this some of them started to worry about Sam but those teachers who knew about him did not worry about anything. Because that teacher knows that Sam still did not use his full power. Even they have problems finding Sam while he uses the stealth technique. So they have full confidence that James was also unable to find him if he wanted to use the stealth technique. But Sam was using that so it means he has the full confidence to win this fight without using his best technique.


    "Don''t worry about him. Most likely he wanted to defeat his opponent this way and because of this, he wasn''t using any other technique," at this time, Alena, Hina and Victor started to worry about Sam so she quickly exined that Sam could easily win this fight but most likely he wanted to win this fight this way.


    After hearing her, Hina and Victor rx. They also know that their son was powerful but they don''t know how powerful he was. Actually, Sam never reveals his full power in front of his family. Because of this, they worried about him. When they rx a little, they remember that Sam still did not use his final move that he taught them previously. You can say that that was a very powerful technique and it could even match or surpass the spirit technique. After remembering all of this, they finally rxed and just focused on the battle ring.


    Well, right now not only his parents but many other people were also worried about Sam. Teacher Samantha and teacher Nitin also talk about Sam. But they also have full confidence in their students so they just silently look at the match. At this time if you look at Gloria or Fiona then you can say that both of them are normal ones other than his friends or teacher. Because both of them also know how powerful he is and he wasn''t using his full power. Even they had problems defeating him when he used his stealth technique.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ____________________


    Back to the battle ring,


    James quickly swung his swords upward. This time some did not expect that attack but that does not mean he will get injured. Even though he is unable to counter-attack he already brings his hands and protects his body with his hands. The moment both of the swords hit his hands, it created once again a big explosion.


    Many people already thought that this attack will seriously injure Sam but they all quickly get startled, because they can see that even after getting hit by that attack he did not get injured by that, even though he did not receive any cut mark on his hand and he wasn''t bleeding. With that, anyone can imagine how powerful his body is and how powerful his armor is. Even though that attack was unable to injure Sam, even though because of the arma he did not get the injury he still could receive the damage from the impact but none of that happened. Sam already reacted and quickly punched James. For a moment James lost his focus and because of this Sam used this chance to attack him.


    Because both of them were very close this time James was unable to watch this attack and got it in his chest. The impact was so powerful that sent James once again backward and not only that at this time James started to cough blood. That previous attack''s power was so much that injured James. James quickly stabilizes himself and once again begins to attack using his sword shes.


    So like this, both of them fight for at least 2 hours. Right now if you look at both of the Fighter then you can say that both of them are exhausted. Even though none of them receive any serious injuries,pared to Sam, James receives most of the injuries. Not only that, his armor has already been destroyed by Sam''s punch.


    Right now both of the fighters are looking at each other. James splits blood on The battle ring, then wasting no time quickly approaches Sam. This will be his final attack and this will decide if you will be the winner or you will lose this fight. It wasn''t that he couldn''t fight longer but he was also near to thinking about the next fight and because of this he wanted to finish this fight as fully as he could. Not only he but Sam also decided to end this fight. He quickly gathered 15% spiritual energy in both of his gloves and then he also started to approach James.


    "Boom!" Once again both the swords and fists shed. This time this created a huge explosion and also created a smokeyer around them. Even those people present in the stadium can feel the impact created by this attack. At this time nobody in the stadium makes any sound. They just silently looked at the battle ring. Right now in that battle ring, they can only see the smoke and they did not hear anything. Everyone was very eager to know the result.


    But then they quickly saw a figure that wasing out from that smokeyer. Sometimeter The finally so that it was Sam. But at this time they did not see James. So did San finally defeat him? Nobody knows the result. Because of this everyone was focused on Sam.


    ___________To be continued______________

 Chapter 294 294 - Winning The Competition

    Right now everyone can see that Sam was only standing on the battle ring without doing anything. So what happened to James? This is the main question that everyone has right now. But it did not take that much long for everyone to know the result. Because theyer of smoke already faded away and everyone can see that James was now kneeling on the ground. Not only that but one of his swords was also destroyed and he was now bleeding from his mouth.


    For a moment nobody from the audience made any sound. They just look at the battle ring. The medical team is already approaching James and the referee is alreadying toward the battle ring. But at this time all those in the audience were focusing on Sam because he didn''t receive any damage. Also he wasn''t showing any sign of panting. Just looking at this scene it looks like an unbelievable thing but he was standing there and it seems he could still fight.


    "Sam¡­ Sam.." a few secondster those audience members came back to their senses, and they began to shout his name loudly. The whole stadium was full with the sound of pping and his name. The cheering team from the Royal Academy is now cheering for him. Tony and the others were also celebrating this moment. Even though they already know that Sam could easily defeat the opponent team''s captain, it was still a moment to celebrate.


    The medical team already came toward James and began to heal him. On the other hand the referee already came to the battle ring and after seeing that James won''t be able to continue to fight, he started to say,


    "Ladies and gentleman, we finally have a winner. The Mysterious Swordsman, Sam Kainer. He is also called the number one genius of this year. He is a master swordsman, a master archer, a master spellcaster, and now it seems he is also a master in closebat. He is the mystery that we are unable to solve right now. But in this battle ring he shows the power and he proves in front of everyone why he is the captain of the Royal Academy. I want everyone to please p for our winner, the captain of the Royal Academy, Captain Sam," the referee finishes his speech and instantly the whole stadium once again begins to p and cheer for Sam.


    Hina, Victor, Alena, Gloria and Fiona also smile after seeing this. Sem finally participated in this match and he also won this match without receiving any serious injuries. This was a proud moment for his parents and his sister. He was the boy who sometime ago waspletely broke because he didn''t have the capability to be a powerful Warrior but then suddenly something happened and he is now this powerful. They were very happy for him. Hina begins to cry happily for her son. Not only in the Royal Academy but the whole world was watching this match and because of this many people who know him were also very happy for him and they were also celebrating for him. Old man Henry from the cksmith association, Mr. Fin from Base school, and many other people are also happy for him.


    Samantha and Nitin were also celebrating because their student finally defeated his opponent. Not only them but those other teachers from the Royal Academy also celebrated this moment because finally the captain from the first year won his match against the captain of the opposing team. It was a proud moment for everyone. Even those students who are his ssmates and were very afraid of him, now they are also celebrating for him. He was their ssmate and he is the captain of the first year so it was natural for them to celebrate for him.


    Everyone knows that the Royal Academy still did not win the final but if he could defeat the opponent team''s captain without receiving any serious injuries then it means that he could also defeat those other teammates. Because of this, everyone is also very happy and celebrating for him. Sam smiles towards the audience and then says thank you to everyone. After that he began to walk toward his friends. Tony and the others instantly came toward him and they hugged him.


    "Guys, I can''t breathe¡­" sometimeter Sam said this to his friends and his friends let him go, but they instantly began tough. Naturally Tony and the others were very happy because he was their captain and their friend who can easily defeat The other team''s captain. So they already knew that they would be the winner and because of this they were very happy.


    Right now not only those in the audience but those Saints who were also present in the stadium were looking at him with a smile. This boy is just making them surprised one after another by his new moves. This boy was very good at concealment technique, he also has a weird sword technique, he was also very good at archery, his spells were also very destructive and now he shows that he is also good at punching. How much surprise will you give? It was good that a talent like Sam will be a very powerful Warrior who will be fighting against those monsters to protect humanity. Even though he only has a special grade potential, those Saints had the feeling that this boy will also be a S-grade warrior.


    After some timeter everyone calmed down, and the construction team began to repair the stadium. Sam will fight against the whole team of Golden Dawn. So before that they needed to repair the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    On the other hand, the Golden Dawn are very depressed because their captain lost against Sam. Also they get to see how powerful Sam was and they know that they won''t be able to defeat him. Because of this everyone was very depressed. But at this time James came in front of them. Previously he did not be unconscious and because of this the medical team let the team go toward his team. Right now they already stabilize his condition and he is now circting his energy recovery technique.


    "Haha¡­ we still underestimated this person. From the college entrance examination we knew that he was a monster and we won''t be able topete with him but it seems even after we came this powerful we still won''t be able topete with him. Hey guys don''t be this depressed. It was a nice experience and it will also give us motivation. Just don''t worry about anything and fight against him using your full power. It will be a good experience for all of us so that we can prepare for him in our next match." James gave his speech to his teammates. After hearing the speech of their captain everyone from the Golden Dawn were once again recovered. It was right that from the first they knew that the captain of their enemy team was the most unknown factor they needed to worry about. Nobody knows his strength and if you look at the college entrance examination then anyone can see that he was very powerful that timepared to them.


    "Don''t worry about that captain. We know that we won''t be able to win against him but we will fight using our 100%. Like our teacher said that to be a good Warrior we need a goal. It seems everyone in the team has already found that goal. Now our goal is to reach the same level as him or even surpass him," at this time, the vice captain of the Golden Dawn said this. The others also agree with her. Really after thispetition all of their goals will be to reach the same level as Sam.


    _______________________


    1 hour 30 minutester,


    Right now both of the finalist teams were standing opposite to each other. Everyone was shaking their hand with theirpetitor team. Even though Golden Dawn lost the final, now they have a clear goal in their mind. Also some of the teammates from the Golden Dawn thought that the Royal Academy''s team would be arrogant but after talking to them they realized they weren''t like that. Everyone also promised that if they got free time they could spar against each other. It will be very helpful for everyone because this will keep motivating everyone to train hard.


    The referee already announced Royal Academy as the winner of this final. The whole team of the first year is now holding the trophy while showing it to everyone. It was a proud moment for them that they finally won thepetition. Everyone present in the stadium is now pping for them. Those people who were supporting the Royal Academy and even those people who were  supporting the Golden Dawn were also pping for Sam and his team. The Royal Academy shows everyone the power that they have. Not only just those audiences but even those teachers from other academies were also pping for Sam and his teammates. Markus, Vena, and Mira also pped for them.


    __________To be continued__________


    [A/N: Hey guys, I am in a tour with my friends. Because of this, I unable to edit this chapter and previous few chapters.]


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 295 295 - Kristin VS Navin

    Right now, everyone once again became very excited because in the battle ring the captains of the second year will be fighting. Both of the captains from the White Tiger Academy and the Royal Academy are present in the battle ring. Unlike the first-year team, both of the captains know each other''s strengths. So you can say that it will be a very intense and exciting match. Right now The White Tiger Academy has five wins while the Royal Academy has four wins. So as you know that after this match the winner will be fighting the whole opponent''s team on his own. Also in that match, he needed to win against everyone and only then will be the winner.


    Now if you are wondering what happens if a captain wins the match but if he loses any match while fighting the whole opponent team on his own, in this case, the association will hold a battle of 3 people. In that battle, from every team, three people will be able to participate and those teams who win two times will be the winner.


    Nowe back to the battle ring,


    The moment the referee gave them the signal to fight, both of the captains wasted no time and approached each other. The captain of the Royal Academy is Kristin Jain while the captain of the white tiger Academy is Navin Tiyon. Kristin was a spear user while Navin was a Spiritual Warrior. Navin was an air element user. Because he could use the air to create sharp air des, the opponent will have a hard problem reaching him. Those air des circte around him to protect him, not only that while going toward Kristin he already shoots many air des toward him. But Kristin also wasn''t slow, he also started his counterattack. Even when he was counter-attacking those air des, he did not slow down and still maintained his speed while approaching his opponent.


    At this time many people just had one question in their mind that was, why is a spiritual Warrior approaching the physical Warrior? Well, Navin already gave them the answer. Kristin already appears in front of him and is just about to sh his spear, but at exactly that moment Navin jumps in the air. It wasn''t that he was able to fly but using his hair control technique he could jump higher than normal people. Also after using the spirit technique he already upgraded air. Normally you won''t be able to see that but when he created those air des only then you can see the changes. Normally those air des have transparent color but when he used the spirit technique the des turned blue in color. Compared to normal this air was very destructive.


    Kristin already expected that and because of this the moment he saw Navin jumping in the air, he shot his spear toward him. But the moment that spear is about to hit Navin, he instantly creates an air barrier around him that protects him from that spear. But still, because of the shes, an impact was created and that sent Navin backward. Fortunately, he was already preparing himself and quickly stabilized himself in the battle ring. But Kristin did not want to give you any chance and because of this, the moment he received his spear he attacked his opponent once again.


    Navin already expected that and because of this, he once again created many air des and sent them toward his opponent. Kristin also wasn''t slow the moment he saw those air des he shot his spear toward his opponent and quickly brought out his second spear and started counterattacking. The first spear glowed in blue color while approaching Navin very quickly. Those air des in front of him already got destroyed by this. It is directly going toward Navin. But Navin already prepared himself and instantly created an air barrier once again in front of him. The spear shed against that barrier and created a loud sound of crashing. Even though this was an air barrier, if you touch that and try to attack that barrier then it feels like it was some kind of metal barrier.


    Navin tried to protect himself using that air barrier, on the other hand, Kristin was attacking those air des that wereing to our team. Even though the first spear already destroyed 10 air des, there are still 50 air desing toward him. Fortunately, he has very good reflexes, and using that he was dodging those and also attacking those air des. But still, it was impossible to dodge all those air des. He also got hit by many of those air des but he did not back down and was still attacking those air des.


    Suddenly, Navin jumped away from his ce because Kristin had already appeared in front of him. He wanted to maintain a distance from his opponent but Kristin did not want to give him any chance to escape and because of this he already shot many blue shes and sent them toward his opponent. Even though Navin also had good reflexes, this time he wasn''t able to protect himself and was hit by this attack, which sent him flying backward. Navin already felt the impact that he received from that attack. This already makes him bleed. But he tries to stabilize himself because he can sense that his opponent was already about to attack him once again. The moment he was able to stabilize himself he instantly created an air barrier once again but this air barrier was more powerful than before.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Boom!"The blue spear hit that blue transparent air barrier. This instantly created a loud sound but if you look at the very right now then you can see that it still did not break. But at this time instantly the barrier vanished and once again many air des went toward Kristin. All of this happens in a very short time. Kristin already prepares him for that and because of this he already jumps away from that ce. This time his opponent did not send 50 air des and because of this, he could easily Dodge them. But still, the speed of those air des was much quicker, and because of this, he got hit by 5 air des. This time while creating those air des Navin uses more spiritual power and because of this those air des also became very strongpared to before. This attack also created a huge impact and sent Kristin backward.


    ____________________________


    2 hourster,


    Right now, Kristin wasying down on the ground while his armor was destroyed and you can see many serious injuries on his body. On the other hand, Navin was still standing even though his legs were shaking until the referee did not announce the name of the winner. He will try to stand like this. Also if you look at him right now then you can see that he is also destroyed and he is also very seriously injured. So you can say that both of the captains were seriously injured and both of them need medical attention right now. Because of this the medical team already appeared in the battle ring and started to heal both of the fighters.


    The referee sometimeter also appears in the battle ring and announces Navin as the winner of this match. What an intense battle between both of the captains. Until the end of the match, nobody could tell who would be the winner of this match because both of the captains were very powerful and both of them continuously fought each other. But in the end, Navin uses all of his spiritual energy to create a blue tornado and shoot it toward his opponent. Even though Kristin tried to cut that tornado but his spiritual power wascking and because of this he lost this match.


    At this time all the audience begins to p and cheer for Navin. Kristin on the other hand lies down on the battle ring while trying to hide his tears. Even after giving his 100%, he was unable to win this match. Not only him but all those other teammates of the Royal Academy were also very sad. From the first, the second-year team knows that they are weaker than their opponent but they try to improve themselves. But still in the end, unable to get The Upper Hand.


    Sometimeter, Kristin gets up from the battle ring and then both of the captains Shake hands. He left the battle ring and started to go toward his teammates. But those people who were supporting the Royal Academy at this time started to p and cheer for him. They also tell him not to get depressed. After hearing their cheer and support, he recovers his mode and smiles at those in the audience. After thanking those in the audience, he finally came toward his teammates. He can also see that all of his teammates'' eyes were red like his. Most likely they also cried.


    _____________To be continued_____________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 296 296 - Warriors From The Dark Association

    Sometimeter,


    Finally, the 2nd year match wasplete. The white tiger Academy won thepetition. Even though the Royal Academy fought very hard and was still unable to win at the end of this match. Right now, the white Academy was celebrating their win, while the Royal Academy dejectedly came back to their waiting room. Right now the whole stadium was cheering for the white tiger Academy and the members of this team. On the other hand, those people who were supporting the Royal Academy and you can say those second-year students from the Royal Academy were also very sad. But they still tried to Cheer up the team that was dejectedly going toward their waiting room.


    "Except our captain Kristin, vice-captain, and those 2 seniors, those other seniors needed to increase their power. I think you all noticed that all of them werecking in strength or spiritual energypared to their opponents. Well, most likely they didn''t think that their opponent would be this much powerful. But still, you cannot expect anyone to reveal their full power before any important match. Not only that, all six of them also needed to master the spirit technique, but only three of them could use the spirit technique while the other three were unable to use that. Before learning this technique you can say that we did not know its importance, but right now you can see how powerful that spirit technique is. It is not that I am telling you topletely focus on your spirit technique but you should be able to use that technique without any problem, only then will they be more powerful," at this time Sam exins all of this to his friends.


    Sam and his friends were in their waiting room and looking at the match previously. When the white tiger Academy finally defeated the Royal Academy Sam told all of this to his friends. He knows that learning the spirit technique was very tough and not everyone could do that. But right now after using that technique he already realized how powerful it was and how helpful it was. Right now if anyone could use the spirit technique, they can also kill the ghost-type monsters. Nobody needed any type of high-grade Firestone or any other element stone to kill the ghost-type monsters. It will be helpful for the physical Warriors to collect the spirit crystals.


    Right now there will be 1-hour rest and then the next team will start their fighting. The construction team has already begun to repair the battle ring. Sam and his friends or you can say that not only them but all the other teams who are the finalists don''t need to leave their waiting room. The association will provide them with food. Even though the 1st year match is already finished, the association will still provide them with food.


    ____________________


    Right now, while everyone is busy eating their lunch there are some people who are making their move toward the Central area of the central city. In the central area, the warrior association built its association. They don''t look like normal people because everyone is hiding their faces and you can feel a strange aura from them. If you were guessing that they were from the dark association then you are correct. These people were from the dark association. Today everyone will be focused on the stadium because today was the final match so today was the day they will make their move that they were nning.


    Right now if you are wondering, was there no one that could capture them because the warrior association already increased the security? All of the people most likely were B-grade warriors, and as you can guess that not everyone on the security team was high-grade Warriors. Most likely all those people from the dark association know in which direction they will meet those weak security members from the Warriors. Also because they did not want to wastethat much time and because of this they were using some kind of spell that instantly made all those weak warriors, the moment they got in contact with that. This spell was releasing some kind of ck gas and the moment anyone got hit by that gas, they became unconscious.


    Like this, they were going toward the central area of the central city. Right now if you are wondering why they were going toward the central area, then nobody could answer that except those dark association''s Warriors. There could be two reasons for that, one was that they wanted to attack the warrior association, or they wanted to attack the central defense system that was in the central area of the central city. This defense system will release a barrier around the whole central city if any monster tries to attack the central city.


    Right now those dark association Warriors are carefully going toward the central area. They were very careful because they did not want to get noticed by those high-grade warriors and they also didn''t want to get involved in any fight right. Because of this, they were carefully going toward that area.


    ? ____________


    Suddenly sometimeter,<novelnext></novelnext>


    A group of Warriors from the warrior association were doing their work while they were talking about today''spetition. But they did not even advance that much when they suddenly saw some peopleying down on the ground. This instantly startled them because all of them knew those people who wereying down on the ground. Instantly the day approaches toward them. Only when they came closer to them did they know the reason. Why were they feeling that they knew those people? Well, they actually know everyone. They were also from the warrior association but something definitely happened because they wereying down on the ground unconsciously. Instantly three Warriors begin to search around while two warriors begin to check their conditions.


    After checking that those Warriors are only unconscious they rx a little but then all of them are thinking how did these Warriors be unconscious? Most likely something happened or someone made them unconscious. Instantly they begin to contact other warriors.


    Sometimeter,


    They already inform all the Warriors and also their captains. They also find out that not only these Warriors but in many ces many Warriors like them became unconscious and the most important thing was that those Warriors who became unconscious were at D-grade or just early C-grade. No intermediate C-grade or B-grade warriors became unconscious or got attacked by someone or something. This is a very serious thing. Instantly begins to search around the whole area.


    Maria and her many colleagues also get the news that suddenly many Warriors from the warrior association became unconscious. This instantly makes everyone very serious. Wasting no time they already left the stadium. They need to protect the safety of those people who are in the stadium and because of this, they increase the security around the stadium while Maria and her colleague were going toward the warrior association. They quickly need to find out the reason behind this only then they will be able to rx. Markus, Vena, and Mira also already got the news. This also makes them very serious because they already guess that the dark association was behind all of this and most likely they were doing something dangerous.


    "Mira, you stay here. Me and Vena will be going toward the warrior association. As first as we can we need to find out the reason behind this. Don''t know why but I am feeling that something very dangerous is about to happen. We needed to prevent that from happening," after Markus and Vena left the battle ring and they were going to the warrior association.


    While all of them wereing toward the warrior association, the Warriors from the dark association already started working on their n. Right now a very intense white was happening between the warrior association and the dark association''s Warriors. Fortunately those B-grade Warriors present in the warrior association and because of this, those dark associations Warriors are unable to make them unconscious.


    While both of the party were fighting, 5 dark association Warriors were now already in front of the security system. They instantly bring out some weird devices and ce them in the security system. Just as they were about to press the button to start those devices, those 5 Warriors suddenly crashed down under the pressure of the S-grade warriors. Yes, you guess it right Markus was already in the warrior association with Vena. Both of them use their full power to reach here and aftering here while they find those 5 Warriors from the dark association they instantly release their pressure toward them.


    Instantly those 5 Warriors got captured. Markus didn''t kill them because he needed to get some answer and only then he would finish them. But suddenly at this time something happened and weird devices started to glow.


    ____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 297 297 - Serious Matter

    Suddenly those devices began to glow. Markus instantly became very cautious. He doesn''t know anything about those devices but one thing he can tell is that those devices will do something that will bring disaster. He instantly used his power. He tried to cut those devices. But until he cut all those devices, some devices already did their work. If you are wondering how, then instantly the defense system began to ring. It means something happened to the defense system of the central city. Not only Markus, Veena and the other warriors were also alert.


    All of them came toward Markus to see what''s happening. When they reached the area, Markus already destroyed all those devices. But those unknown devices already damaged the defense system, because of this, everyone was very anxious. Warriors already try to fix the damage, but even after trying to fix the problem they are unable to do anything.


    "Sir, we are unable to do anything right. It will take us sometime to understand the problem. We are trying our best but those devices are unknown to us and because of this we are unable to solve the problem." One warrior said to Markus. Markus nodded after hearing that. He also knows that it will take some time to understand the problem.


    "Markus, did you find anything about those strange devices? Still now, I don''t know how the dark association was getting those strange devices. Did anyone give them or they made those devices on their own." Suddenly Veena asked Markus.


    Markus shook his head and said,


    "No, even after interrogating those dark association''s Warriors we were unable to find anything. We just only get to know that the elders of the dark association are the one who provide all them with those strange devices. Except for those elders, we don''t know anything." Markus said with a sigh. He also wanted to know how those dark association''s elders were getting those strange devices but until they didn''t Interrogate any elders they wouldn''t be able to find anything.


    Even though they were S-grade warriors they were unable to find the real location of the dark association. Those elders were very cautious because they were like this that even the Saints were unable to find their location. Right now, Markus, Venna and the others were looking for those warriors who were trying to fix the problem of the defense system.


    Sometimeter,


    Markus once again became very serious. He just hung up his call. Sometime ago, many Warriors from the warrior association who were in many cities, just called him. They told him that some time ago, their branch got attacked by some warriors. Those warriors mainly attacked the defense system of that city. After hearing that Markus became very serious. Well, it was natural for him to be serious. The defense systems of every city got attacked by the dark association and it was naturally not a good thing.


    "What happened to Markus? Why did you suddenly be this serious? Did something happened once again?" Veena asked Markus. Markus who was in deep thought, only then Markus came back to his senses and he then exined everything. After hearing all of this Venna also became very serious. Right now, nobody knows why the dark association is attacking the defense system for every city, but one thing they are sure of is that they are nning to do something that will only happen when the defense system of every city gets damaged. Because of this he instantly told all those warriors to increase the security around all those cities whose defense system got attacked.


    Alena, Maria, and many other Warriors who were in the stadium also got infrom by Markus. Alena and Maria stayed in the stadium while those other Warriors went outside of the stadium. Both of them stayed in the stadium to watch over the security of those people who were in the stadium. She already informed all those other teachers who were present in the stadium. She even informs Sam''s parents about all of this. Right now nobody knows what the dark association will do and because of this she will indeed alert everyone so that if the dark association attacks them all of them will be ready for that. Except for all those teachers she did not inform any students about this. She also told all those teachers not to inform their students about this right now. He has the full confidence in Sam and Gloria, but there are still many students who will start to panic after hearing that the dark association wanted to do something.


    Because of this, she did not want to inform any student about this. But after some thinking she decided to inform Sam and Gloria about this so that they could also prepare for that. She also told all those teachers to inform them that they are students in which they have the confidence that they will not start to panic after hearing that. Right now the situation is very dangerous and most likely the target association will attack them very quickly. Because right now if the warrior association gets time then they will fix the defense system and the dark association wouldn''t want that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    __________________


    Right now Sam and many friends have already finished their food and are once again going to the stadium. But suddenly he got a call from his teacher. At first he thought that Alena was calling him to say congrattions but when he finished hearing the exnation from her, he became very serious. He already felt that something dangerous was approaching them because his teacher told him that the dark association had already made their move. The dark association already damages many cities'' defense systems. It will take the warrior association some time to repair that and because of this, right now it is a very dangerous moment for everyone.


    Sam wastes no time, informs all of his friends. As he expected, after knowing all of this his friends didn''t panic. They became very serious but they did not panic after hearing all of this. He also told everyone to get ready to face the dark association''s Warriors. His teacher already told him that not only his team but many other teams will get informed by their teachers. But those teachers will only inform all those students who will not panic. She will also inform his sister about this. Sam doesn''t have problem with that. Because he knows that his sister will win her match even if she gets informed about all of this.


    _______________


    "Ok, master. Didn''t worry, I am always prepared for them." After saying that Gloria hung up the call.


    "Gloria, what happened? Why are you looking so serious? Haha¡­ Did the opponent team make you afraid?" At this time, Fiona suddenly asked this while joking. Gloria didn''t waste any time and directly told her everything that Alena told her. After hearing all of this, Fiona stops smiling and she also bes very serious. Sometimeter, They have theirfinal match but before that they are getting this type of serious news. Because of this right now they are very serious becausepared to the final match this matter was very important. Just Fiona was about to say something when Gloria said to her not to tell anyone right now anything about this. Right now everyone was focusing on the final match and she didn''t want anyone to start to worry about this. Fiona didn''t say anything, and just nodded.


    Sometimeter,


    Once again the stadium was full of people. They were very excited to watch the next match. Right now the third year will be fighting against each other and it was their final match. The Royal Academy and the Golden Dawn will be fighting against each other. The referee did not waste anymore time and quickly came to the battle ring. He then began his speech. At first he was weed to the Golden Dawn''s team. The captain of the Golden Dawn was leading his team toward the battlefield. Sometimeter, he weed the Royal Academy''s team. Gloria was leading her team while she was holding the banner of her college. All the audience present in the stadium began to cheer for both of the teams. Right now in the whole stadium you can only hear the name of both of the colleges.


    Sometimeter the referee told both of the captains to send their first teammate in the battle ring. Both of the captains send their teammates in the battle ring. Both of the fighters are very serious. The moment they got the signal they began to fight. Everyone from the Royal Academy''s team wanted to win every match without losing. With that they will keep their invincible status. Sam and his teammates were able to keep their invincible status until the Quarter final, but Gloria and her team were able to hold this status till semifinal. Because of this they wanted to keep that status.


    ______________To be continued____________

 Chapter 298 298 - Already Taken Action

    It was now Fiona''s time to fight her opponent. Right now the Royal Academy has 6 wins and two loses. So you can say that this next match will be very vital for the Royal Academy. If the Royal Academy is able to win these two matches then they will be the winner and the opponent''s team captain would not have the chance to challenge their team using the privilege.


    Everyone from the Royal Academy has the confidence that they could win every match against the Golden Dawn, because of this, two fighters from the Royal Academy underestimated their opponent and lost the fight. Because of this, they were unable to win every match and unable to maintain their invincible status. Now if you are having the question, if those two fighters who lose their fight, once again fight the same opponent, then what will happen?  Well this time it could be different because this time they won''t underestimate their opponent. Also the Golden Dawn Academy wasn''t weak, because Gloria''s four teammates already got seriously injured while fighting against their opponent. But they still did not give up and used their 100% to win their matches. So you can say that the result could be different if the team of the Royal Academy didn''t have the willpower to fight.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Fiona and her opponent are already present in the battle ring. Both of them are waiting for the signal to fight. Even though she still did not break through to early C-grade, she won''t underestimate her opponent. She knows that her opponent is a very powerful Warrior and like her she is also very good at using swords. Also the main thing was that previous year she lost against the vice captain of the Golden Dawn. Because of all of these, Fiona won''t underestimate her opponent. There are many Warriors who can fight against warriors who had higher grades than them. She knows this type of person because her best friend''s brother was that type of person.


    The moment both of them get the signal they vanished from their ces. Instantly a sh happened between both of the Warriors. Because of the impact both of the Warriors sent backward. Butpared to Fiona her opponent sent 10 steps backward. But both of them quickly stabilize themselves and once again approach. sh after sh, in the whole stadium you can now just only hear this sound. At this time you can see that even though Fiona''s opponent wasn''t able to break through, she was still dodging her attacks while also attacking her.


    Suddenly, La, the vice captain of the Golden Dawn, turns around and swings her sword toward Fiona. But Fiona was first enough to respond and she also attacked her. This time La did not get the chance to react and got hot by attack. But before that sword hit her, she already used her spirit technique to increase the defense of her body. Before she could circte more energy, that sword hit her. The impact was so much that she instantly coughed blood and she also sent many steps backward. Because Fiona did not want to give her any chance to move she did not let go of this chance and before her opponent could stabilize herself, she once again attacked her. After getting hit by the second attack, the blue glow of her body finally disappears. It means she already deactivated the body protection technique.


    ___________________


    At this time all the audience who were looking at the fight just got excited and excited. Everyone thought that Fiona could easily defeat her opponent while her opponent won''t even get the chance to fight. Right now they all know that they were very wrong. La didn''t break through, but she was already a very powerful warrior. Also don''t forget that like Fiona she also has experience in battles. So you can say that to defeat an experienced Warrior like La, was very hard.


    Came back to the battle ring,


    Suddenly La swung her sword toward Fiona. A blue sh was created by that and went toward Fiona. Not long after that many more shes were going toward Fiona. But you know, they are already ready to counter attack. One by one she already attacked those shes. But at this time La already came in front of her and was already attacked. This time Fiona wasn''t able to dodge, and got hit. But even after getting hit she did not send it back. She can feel the impact but after bing the early C-grade warrior, it wasn''t enough to defeat her. Instantly, she punched La. All of this happened so quickly that La wasn''t able to react. She went backward and started coughing blood. Fortunately she still has her armor and because of this she did not get that match injured. But most likely her armor won''t take much more attack like this.


    While both of them were fighting, La did not notice that they were very close to the edge of the battle ring, but Fiona noticed that she decided to finish this fight while sending her opponent outside of the battle ring. She gathers spiritual energy in her sword as much as she can. After seeing this La also gathered her spiritual energy in her sword. Most likely both of them are nning to finish their fight with thisst attack.


    Less than a secondter, both of them once again shed. This time a very powerful impact was created by that. If you look at the battle ring right now then you can see that the battle ring started to crack. Both of the fighters still did not move from their ces but some timeter La wasn''t able to resist the pressure and sent flying. This time because both of them are very close to the edge, La got sent outside of the battle ring.<novelnext></novelnext>


    For a moment, nobody from the audience made any sound, even the referee and the other staff did not make any sound. But a few secondster, everyone came back to their census when they saw La trying to get up from the ground but unable to do that because of her injuries. The medical team already started going toward her to treat her. She was bleeding from her mouth and she was fully injured. Her armor already breaks and because of this she receives many injuries. On the other hand, Fiona was still fine. She was just slightly injured but that was it, she still had the confidence to fight.


    At this time all the audience now begin to cheer for her. It was confirmed that she already won the fight and because of this everyone was celebrating for that. The referee quickly came to the battle ring and finally announced Fiona the winner of this match. Instantly, the celebration of those audiences became louder. In the whole city you can only hear one name right now that is Fiona. Everyone was cheering and pping for her. A few minutester, both of the vice-captains shook their hand and then went back to their teammates. La fights a very intense match and she is also a very powerful Warrior. Because of this everyone from the audience showed respect to her, while also trying to cheer up.


    __________________


    While everyone was celebrating, there were some students who were staying alert all the time. They observed their surroundings very carefully so that they would easily support the warrior from the dark association. Not only them, all those teachers are now cautious. They also observe their surroundings very carefully. Nobody can tell if the dark association will attack them or not, but they wanted to prepare for that.


    ___________________


    "Sir, when will you take action?" In the abundant factory of the central city once again those 5 Warriors were talking with the elder of the dark association. Before anything you should know that nobody knows the name of any elders. Every elder has their own nickname. The elder in front of those 5 Warriors, also has his nickname. Elder G, was his nickname.


    "You don''t need to worry about that. I have already taken action. Less than 5 hours, every City will be attacked by monsters. At this moment I will use the blood of those students or the threat of the dark association. While the monsters will attack every city. You all five needed to make sure that none of our people got injured and you should need to hide somewhere." The Elder said all of this to those 5 Warriors.


    "No, problem, elder. The moment our subordinate notices those monsters, we will immediately retreat." One warrior said that.


    "Also one more thing is that, try to stay close to the battleground of the central city. There are still some people whose blood I am unable to collect or you are unable to collect. I want all of you to kill those threats of the dark association," the elder said and disappeared from his ce.


    ___________To be continued__________

 Chapter 299 299 - Ice Queen

    Finally the final match is about to begin. Fiona won her match, so right now they have 7 wins in their favor. The referee already calls the next fighters in the battle ring and because of this Gloria and her opponent already begin going toward the battle ring. Both of the captains maintained their serious look and observed each other. Both of them were experienced Warriors and then how to find someone''s weakness. Gloria and her opponent are already present in the battle ring. At this time the whole stadium you can only hear the voice of cheering. This is thest match and every audience was very excited about that.


    The referee also did not waste any more time and quickly gave them the signal to fight. The moment Gloria got the signal she already used her spell. Less than a second, the whole battle ring froze. Fortunately her opponent was able to jump away from that ce. Right now her opponent was trying to find a good ce to attack but Gloria did not want to give him any chance and because of this suddenly ice spikes came out from the ground. All of those going toward her opponent but it seems he already has to face that because the moment he saw those spikes he also used his attack. He was a sword user. So as you can guess that he was very good at closebat. The moment he saw those spikesing toward him he also started to swing his sword toward those spikes.


    Right now Gloria''s opponent was in a tough condition. If he stayed long in the ground then he would freeze, so he just continuously needed to Jump. While jumping he also needed to face glorious other attacks and because of this he was in a tough condition. But still he did not give up and continuously counter attacked those attacks that Gloria sent toward him.


    Sometimeter he suddenly got a chance and instantly he swung his sword toward her. Less than a second he swung his sword 20 to 30 times. So, instantly 20 to 30 sword bs were created by that and went toward Gloria. But he didn''t stop there. Because, instantly he also started to approach her.


    Gloria, after seeing those sword shes, instantly created an ice wall in front of him. She is already using the dark ice. Because of this, even those powerful sword shes hitting the wall are unable to break through. To break that ice wall, the opponent needed to use his 60% spiritual energy in his attack. The dark ice was very tough.


    Gloria''s opponent already reached behind her and was about to attack her, but instantly, Gloria jumped away from that ce. Instantly, an ice tform was created and she was now standing on that. Her opponent instantly began to swing his sword toward her continuously. But Gloria also wasn''t slow. She easily counter attacks those shes.


    Sometimeter, suddenly Gloria used her one powerful spell that nobody was able to react to. But suddenly snow started to fall from the sky and only then did everyone get to know that she used some kind of spell. She did not use this spell that much and because of this not many people know about this. Because of this some people thought it was due to Gloria continuously using her ice element but all of them are wrong. Right now her opponent is also looking at those snow falling from the sky. He didn''t know why but suddenly he felt danger wasing toward him. Instantly begin to observe his surroundings and try to find that danger. But he was toote to react because the snow was dangerous.


    Her opponent also got to know that after he got hit by that. The moment that snow fell on him, he instantly got know from where he was feeling danger. That snow was very dangerous because it can freeze you the moment it touches you. He also got to know that because he already froze in his ce. Only then Gloria stops attacking. Right now if she wants she could kill him any moment, but she just started to melt the ice, or her opponent will die.


    The medical team and the referee are already in the battle ring. All of them were now waiting for Gian to recover. Gian is the captain of Golden Dawn academy. Gloria quickly melted the ice and instantly the medical team began to treat Gian. Right now you are in a critical condition because for some time blood cirction has totally stopped. Fortunately because of the spiritual energy, he won''t die that easily. Today''s humans are very strongpared to the humans who didn''t have the spiritual energy in their body.


    "Ladies and gentleman, we finally have the winner of this match and thepetition. Please p for our Ice queen Gloria Kainer. She didn''t even need to fight that intensely, and she easily defeated her opponents. She is called the number one genius, she is also called the youngest C-grade warrior or the limit breaker. Her enemies called her the Ice devil, but for us she is the ice queen." The referee finished his speech and instantly all the audience began to p and cheer for her. The whole stadium was full with her name.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Also please p for our vice captain Fiona and the others from the Royal Academy. They win this match with hard work and power." The referee once again told this and at this time. Fiona and the others also came to the battle ring. The whole Royal Academy''s team began to thank all those people who were supporting him. Not only that, the referee also told everyone to p for the Golden Dawn, even though they lost this match but still showed everyone how powerful they were. At the end both of the team shook hands and then went toward their waiting room. At the end of the fourth year''s match the organizer team will give them their trophy and prizes.


    Just when Gloria and the others came back to their waiting room Gloria decided to tell her teammates about the dark association. Everyone was celebrating because the final won the match but this suddenly noticed seriousness in Gloria and Fiona. This confused everyone. They just won this match so howe both of them be this serious? At this time Fiona also understands that Gloria wanted to tell everyone about the dark association. She also thinks that it was a good decision because with that everyone could prepare for the dark association.


    Gloria begins to exin to everyone about the dark association. As expected, after hearing the exnation everyone stops smiling and they be serious. They all know how dangerous the dark association was and because of this they are very serious. Fortunately, Gloria didn''t tell anyone that the dark association was collecting many people''s blood to do something. It will instantly cause everyone to be anxious. Not only Royal Academy''s team but Golden Dawn, White Tiger, Falcon academy and the others teams also get informed. At first, the warrior association thought they would be able to handle this case, but right now it seems impossible and because of this, they decided to inform many students. But those students who don''t have strong will power, or they quickly get anxious don''t get informed because it will make them panic. Right now everyone needs to know the motive of the dark association and then they can counter attack.


    _______________


    Right now outside of the safe zone you can see that the number of monsters keep increasing. At first those Warriors who were guarding the border area did not notice anything but when the monsters kept increasing they finally noticed that. Instantly inform the headquarter about this. As you know, every year The monster will try to attack the human cities. So this was a very serious matter and because of this they did not want to bete to inform the warrior association.


    Markus, after hearing that the number of monsters kept increasing, also became more serious about this. Sometime ago, he kept thinking about what could be the dark associations n but after hearing this news he seems to guess the n of the dark association. Most likely their n was to destroy the defense system of every city so that those monsters could easily attack. He instantly told all those Warriors to be more careful and he also sent more warriors toward those borders. But one thing is still unclear to him. Why did they want to damage the defense system of the central city? Near the central city there was no border and even if those border cities got attacked the warrior association would notice that and take care of that so why they wanted to do that. There was definitely something that required the dark association to damage the defense system.


    Markus instantly told all of his friends about this. Not only that he also told every warrior to be ready to fight the monsters. Anytime those monsters can attack. Suddenly don''t know why but he has the feeling that monsters could havee from those Dungeons and because of this he also told some warriors to watch over all the dungeons.


    ___________To be continued____________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 300 300 - First Wave

    Right now, every Warriors were watching over those monsters that kept increasing outside of the safe zone. Nobody knows if those monsters will attack the human cities or not but they still need to be careful about them. They could attack any time.


    On the other hand, Sam and his friends were still in the stadium and now they were looking at the final match of the 4th year. The Golden Dawn and the White Tiger Academy were now fighting in this match. Well, as you can guess, the Royal Academy didn''t qualify for the final. But still everyone was very excited about this match because they wanted to know the full power of those fourth year students. Already 5 warriors from the White Tiger and 6 warriors from the Golden already break through to C-grade. It wasn''t that any Warrior from the Royal Academy did not break through but they still lost the match.


    Right now both of the team were fighting in the battle ring. Both of the Warriors who were fighting in the battle ring were C-grade warriors. Because of this the impact created by their attack was much more powerful. Both of them continuously attacked each other. Both of them were sword users and because of this, right now in the battle ring you can see the sparkle that was created by their shes. Not only that if you look at the battle ring then you will notice, it is already damaged by their fighting. With that you can imagine how powerful their attack was.


    Everyone present in the stadium, looking at the fight with great interest. Who will win? nobody knows that, but one thing was for sure that both of them were very powerful. But at the same time many students were also very alert. Even though they were in the stadium, they could not focus on the matchpletely. Who knows when the dark association would attack them and this was why they were very alert.


    _________________


    2 hourster,


    Right now both of the captains were fighting each other. But at this time, Sam suddenly sensed that something dangerous wasing toward them. Instantly, this makes him very alert. He didn''t even need to alert his friends because suddenly a siren began to ring. This instantly makes everyone present in the alert. Those high grade warriors instantly became alert and left the stadium. They needed to find out what happened. On the other hand many warriors from the warrior association came to the stadium. They will escort those normal people toward a safe ce.


    Those normal people didn''t know what happened but one thing they were sure was that something dangerous happened and because of this, they began to panic. Fortunately those Warriors from the Warrior association were able to control the situation. It was also a good thing that nobody from those normal people knew what was happening because it could increase the panic rate and it will be very hard for those warriors from the Warriors to control the situation. Somehow they managed to convince those peoples and right now they were escorting those peoples toward a safe ce. Not only that instantly the warrior association also announced in every TV, mobile, etc, to those people who were watching the match. They told everyone to stay in their house and did note outside because the situation could be dangerous for everyone. You can guess that it will bring panic and anxiety in everyone but they did not have any other way to alert those normal people.


    Sam, Alexa, Tony, Jeni Gloria, Fiona, and everyone who previously got informed previously, also came out side of the stadium. Outside of the stadium there were some Warriors who were exining to everyone the reason for this siren. This siren means danger. Sam didn''t know about this, but now he knows the meaning.


    "Some of you already know that the dark association is nning something. But previously we weren''t able to guess that, but now we already know what they are. Somehow they manage to increase the number of monsters outside of the safe zone and those monsters already attack the human cities. Sometime ago, the dark association already attacked every city''s defense system and damaged it. With that those monsters won''t have any problem attacking our city. All the border cities had already been attacked by them and because of this, we gave that signal. I know that many of you are from various guild or you are still students, but we needed to fight those monsters and because of this, we also needed your help." The warrior from the warrior association exined this.


    "What happened to those people who are in those border cities?" Suddenly one person asked.


    "Fortunately, we are able to evacuate those people sessfully. So you don''t need to worry about them. Right now, we will go toward the warrior association and then use the teleportation device to go toward those border cities." The warrior once again exined and after heating everyone nodded.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam and his friends were listening to the exnation. Suddenly his phone rings. He saw that it was the call from his parents. He quickly picked up the phone.


    "Sam, we are going toward the border city. You will experience this for the first time, so don''t get nervous. Your sister and your teacher will help you. So you don''t need to worry. Most likely you and your friends will go toward the warrior association, and use the teleportation device. So, I won''t be wasting your time. Stay safe and alert every time when you will be in the danger zone. You can''t not predict what will happen in the area. Well, you can suddenly get attacked by high grade monsters. So, you can''tpare those danger zone''s monsters with the dungeon''s monsters." His dad told him this and then hung up the call. Sam didn''t even get the chance to talk. Well, he didn''t get the chance but one thing was sure that even if a high grade monster came in front of him, he could escape easily.


    Not only Sam, his friends and the other students were also getting calls from their parents. They told them to stay alert and careful all the time. Gloria also got infromby Hina and Victor. She just nodded, she already had experience in this.


    Right now, everyone were going toward the warrior association. They will use the teleportation device. Right now Sam can see many familiar faces in the warrior association but one thing is for sure to him. Those 4rth year who were fighting previously also present in the warrior association. This was a very surprising thing for him. Those 4th years already recovered their energy and power. Sam can also see Gloria and her teammates. Not only the royal Academy, but every other college''s students, teachers are also present in the warrior association. In the warrior association, Markus was the only present. Veena and Mira already went toward the border area to fight those monsters.


    "I hope everyone already knows what''s going on right now. Those monsters already attack the cities. We don''t know if we will be able to handle them or not. Because those were just increasing in number and it was a very dangerous situation.


    Sometimeter, Alena already talks with Sam and Gloria. She has the full confidence that her students won''t need any help. Sometimeter, they finally sent toward the border area. Not everyone wille to this area. Using that device you can go toward any ce. Sam and his friends decided to go randomly. Not only them but many other Warriors also present in the border area. Just aftering to that area he can see that many Warriors are already fighting those monsters that were in the danger zone. Tony and the others already bring out their weapons.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now everyone is already fighting with the monsters and killing them. Fortunately right now no high grade monster was attacking them and because of this everyone could easily kill those monsters but one thing was that the number of this monster just increased and this is a very dangerous thing. But it seems, they already exhausted their luck. Because one hourter suddenly a C-grade monster attacked them. At this time, Sam and the others did not waste any more time and used their full power to attack the monster. With theirbined attack they easily kill that but now the main question is how long could they keep doing this? Because many monsters like them will attack them once again. Nobody knows that but they will not give up in this matter.


    __________To be continued__________


    [A/N: Hey guys , as you know that I am not in my home and because of this, we are unable to treat the injuries. Ao, i hope everyone will fight with their 100%. I am now In a tour aftering back from this, I will edit all those chapters. ]

 Chapter 301 301 - Monsters

    The moment Sam and his friends came to Lais City this saw that many monsters were already attacking the Warriors. So wasting no time they also bring out their weapons and begin to fight those monsters. Because there were no high grade monsters they wouldn''t have any problem while fighting them.


    Saara, Jeni and Elena are already preparing their spells and continuously attacking those monsters. They were fighting from a distance. Dan also with them because he was not continuously shooting his Arrow toward those monsters. Alexa, Tony, Kira, Kenny and Tina were fighting those monsters in closebat. But at this time you cannot find Sam. He already uses his concealment  technique and activates his energy mode. He was killing monsters with that. He can see that some monster was about to kill some Warriors. Using his full speed he came toward those monsters and did not waste any time to kill them.


    Those Warriors who were about to be killed by those monsters also got confused because suddenly the monsters in front of them split into two parts. But even though they were confused it did not stop them from attacking those other monsters. This wasn''t time to rx. So like this everyone was fighting those monsters. Goblins, Kobolds, Vicious Wolves, Golems, etc. This type of monster is now fighting with those Warriors.


    Sam at this time already killed many monsters and he was going toward the outside of the safe zone. He wanted to use his spell but if he used that in the city then it could also harm those Warriors and because of this he was advancing. Sometimeter, right now if you look behind then you can see many dead bodies of these monsters that split into two parts. Even though some monsters'' defense was very high, Sam easily killed them using his energy mode. In front of he saw many monsters who were advancing toward the city. Westing no time he quickly created a mega fireball and threw that toward those monsters. The moment that fireball hit one monster it instantly created huge destruction and the whole area got destroyed by that.


    Those Warriors who are close to that ce previously saw a blue ball going toward those monsters. At first they did not understand what was that, but right now they know that it was a very powerful spell created by a spiritual Warrior. Also at the ce where that fireball hit, got destroyedpletely and many monsters got killed by that attack. In that area you can also see arge hole.


    But, Sam at this time did not stop there. You also created many fireballs and threw them toward those monsters. Not only that he once again activated his energy mode and went toward the other side to kill monsters. Tony and the others were still fighting inside of the city and because of this they did not see this. But they also suddenly had a loud destruction and only that time they realized that Sam wasn''t with them. They do not know if they are sure or not but they guess that this attack was created by Sam. All of them already know the power of the blue fireball and the blue mega fireball. If they also get hit by that attack, they will die immediately. Nobody could figure out who was helping them but it wasn''t time for that.


    Sam, at this time already killed 50 monsters and right now he was facing rock golems. They have the tough difference but Sam was using 70% of his spiritual energy in his energy mode and because of these the sharpness of the sword increased and without it he could easily kill those golems.


    _____________


    One Warriors was trying to fight The Rock golem outside of the safe zone. But even though he was able to destroy the body of that golem he was unable to destroy the core of that golem and because of that the golden once again came back to life. He wasn''t able to react on time and right now he saw a big mouth was approaching toward him. He was sure that this was his end and because of this he quickly closed his eyes. But even after waiting 5 minutes he did not feel anything and quickly opened his eyes. In front of him he saw the remains of that golem. With that it was confirmed that someone killed that golem.


    At this time Tony and the others were also wasn''t slow. They also already killed many monsters. It wasn''t that they were not exhausted but because of the potions, and the energy recovery technique, they quickly recovered and once again started to fight those monsters. They don''t know until now how many monsters they killed but it was you that Sam killed much more monsters than them.


    Blue sword shes when now going toward those monsters continuously. Tony, Alexa and those other Warriors who could use the spirit technique were now attacking those monsters with that. Jeni, and Elena already increase the power of their spell using the spirit technique, on the other hand Saara uses her most powerful attacks to kill those monsters. She still wasn''t able to use the speed technique but right now while fighting those monsters she has the feeling that she could learn that while killing those monsters.


    _____________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    3 hourster,


    Right now, Sam who was fighting outside of the safe zone already started to panting. He was continuously fighting those monsters and because of this he already became very exhausted. Right now if you look behind and the area beside him then you can see so many dead bodies of those monsters. Because of his concealment technique and his full speed he did not give those monsters any time to react and quickly kill them. But still, to maintain the energy mode he needed to use his mental energy and because of this he was now exhausted. well not only him but there are many Warriors who were also resting to recover quickly and kill those monsters once again.


    Right now some only have 5% spiritual energy left in his body and because of these his concealment technique also got deactivated and he became once again visible to everyone. But still nobody noticed that or you can say nobody knew that he was the warrior who was killing those many monsters while helping those Warriors.


    At this time Sam was observing The monster and he found out that the number of those monsters were very lowpared to before. This means new monsters did note. It was a very good thing because with that it was only just a matter of time before those monsters got killed. Right now Sam doesn''t know but many Warriors are already killed by those monsters and many cities have already been destroyed. Not every Warrior is very powerful and because of this they get killed while fighting those monsters.


    _____________________


    Very far away from Lais city, you can see that once again many monsters are approaching that city. But at this time there were many high grade monsters and also flying monsters. B-grade monsters are also present there. Poisonous bats, Poisonous snakes, and many other monsters are also present there. Those monsters are going towards the city while the warriors who were fighting in the area werepletely unaware of that.


    Not only that, right now every Dungeon Warrior from the dark association was present. If you look at their hand they were holding some type of stone or something like that. The stone wasn''t that big but it was glowing in ck color. Right now the warrior association was busy fighting those monsters and because of this nobody noticed this. What will they do with that stone? Nobody knows that but one thing was sure that it will be very dangerous for the warrior association and those normal peoples. Fortunately right now many Warriors from the warrior association already bring those normal peoples toward the strong shelter that will be used to protect the normal people from the monsters.


    Right now if you are wondering what those Saints were doing, then they were also fighting monsters. But they are fighting peak A-grade monsters. Also some Saints going toward that area where those monsters killed many Warriors and were able to destroy the cities. Fortunately right now there was no sign of any S-grade monsters, and because of this, those S-grade warriors could focus on other work.


    ___________________


    At this time Sam already recovered his full strength and he once again began to kill those monsters. While killing those monsters he also advanced. He wanted to find the source from where those monsters keeping. But suddenly he felt the presence of many strong monsters in front of him. This instantly makes him very alert because he can feel that those monsters wereing toward this city. So you can guess that it was a natural thing for him to be this alert.


    ___________To be continued_________

 Chapter 302 302 - Monsters Attack

    1 dayter,


    Sam instantly began to advance to check the condition. After advancing sometimeter he finally saw many monsters that wereing to Lais city. Not only that but those monsters are very powerful so there will be many casualties. He did not Waste anymore time and instantly informed his friends about this. Fortunately there is no problem contacting his friend and because of this he is able to contact them instantly.


    Tony and the others were fighting monsters but they were suddenly contacted by Sam. After hearing the news from Sam, they be startled after hearing that news because until now they only fight those D-grade monsters and if suddenly many high grade monsters came toward them it will be very difficult for them to defeat those monsters because they did not have that many high grade Warriors. Alexa did not waste anymore time and quickly informed other Warriors about this. As expected everyone got very startled after hearing that. 10 Early A-grade warriors, 5 intermediate A-grade warriors were present there. Other than that 50 peak B-grade warriors also present there. Because of this everyone became very serious because they got the information that there were many A-grade monsters also present there and it was a very big reason to worry.


    They instantly inform the warrior association. At least 50 A-grade monsters were present there and because of this it will be very difficult for them to handle that matter. They immediately needed reinforcement for that so that they could minimize the casualties. Because there were not only those A-grade monsters present, there were also many B-grade and C-grade monsters so normally those Warriors weren''t enough to handle that matter.


    But after informing the warrior association they got the news that it will take some time for those high grade warriors or the Saints toe there. Because not only in Lais city, but there are many cities where those high grade monsters already attack. Right now those high grade Warriors are handling that matter. There were many casualties because already many Warriors died. Everyone after hearing that started to worry. But at this time suddenly one A-grade warrior said,


    "Why suddenly your fighting will go down. This isn''t our first time that we are facing those monsters and our life is in danger. Previously we faced this type of situation. It is natural for many Warriors to die by the monsters but they died fighting those monsters and while trying to protect humanity. We should respect all those Warriors and we should use all our strength to fight these monsters. We already handle these monsters and everyone should recover quickly to their full strength. As you know that more monsters areing toward us. They are powerful and dangerous so we should also prepare like that so that we can fight those monsters." That warrior finished his speech.


    You can say that after hearing his speech every warrior who started to worry about their situation once again feels full of will. This was right that it wasn''t their first time while they were facing a situation like this because every year monsters suddenly try to attack the human cities and fight them. Many Warriors die. There are many Warriors present there who lost their closest person in this type of fight. Tony and the other Warriors who were still college students or it was their first time to face a situation like this, naturally were more anxious than those experienced Warriors. But after hearing that speech they also got the will power to fight. The moment they became Warriors, that moment their life wasn''t in their hands. They could lose their life at any moment while fighting those monsters.


    _________________


    Right now Sam was in front of those monsters. He was already ready to attack them. But still he did not decide to attack those high grade monsters at first. Even though they could attack them, it was very hard for him to kill them and because of this he decided to kill all those monsters that he could kill easily and after that he will handle those other monsters. Wasting no time he began to attack those D-grade monsters. You have to say that because of his superior stealth technique he could easily kill those monsters, while those monsters won''t be able to react.


    He already prepared a mega fireball and threw it toward those monsters that were flying in the sky. The moment that fireball hit one monster it instantly created a big explosion and by that explosion those monsters beside that monster also got killed. Sam did not stop there and created two more mega fireballs. He also threw those two fireballs toward those flying monsters.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Once again 2 big explosions appeared and because of that many monsters got killed. Right now you can see that dead bodies were dropping down from the sky. Sam did not focus on those dead bodies. Right now he already takes a spiritual recovery potion and has already recovered his full spiritual energy. At this time If you look at those monsters then you can see that they were trying to find the person who attacked them. They were going toward Lais city, but suddenly out of nowhere three fireballs hit them and instantly killed many of their subordinates. Right now those A-grade monsters and other monsters are trying to find that person but even after searching carefully they did not find anything.


    All this time Sam did not attack them because he was recovering his spiritual energy. Because of this those monsters also were not able to find him and also were not able to find any energy fluctuation. After recovering his full energy Sam one second begins to attack those monsters continuously. Every monster present in that please got very angry because some unknown enemy attacked them and they weren''t able to find that enemy. That unknown enemy already killed many of their supporters and because of this they became very angry. As expected those high grade monsters were able to feel the energy fluctuation created by the energy mode while Sam was attacking them. While reacting to those energy fluctuations they try to attack but in the end they just fail. Well you should not forget that Sam was very good at his reflex. Also he has the advantage of being invisible.


    ____________


    While Sam was attacking those monsters Tony and the other Warriors were waiting for those high grade monsters. But after waiting for some time they still did not find any monsters and because of this some people began to doubt. They already asked Alexa if the information was right or wrong. But Alexa told them that the information waspletely right because that information was given by Sam and she knows that he won''t give them any wrong information. They could be a reason because those monsters still did note toward the city. Alexa and her other friends don''t know the reason but they could guess the reason. Everyone already knows that Sam was very good at hiding himself and most likely he was attacking those monsters while using his concealment technique. But they started to worry about him because right now he was facing any low grade monsters. So his life would be in danger and because of this they started to worry about him. But they have the confidence in him and they also know that if his life was in danger he would be able to escape from that.


    Also right now if you have the question why those high grade Warriors didn''t leave the city and advance toward the danger zone, then the reason was that if they leave the city it will be very difficult for those other Warriors to handle the monsters. Even though they were fighting low grade monsters but because the number was very high it was difficult for everyone to handle those monsters at the same time. And because of this they also ask for reinforcement from the warrior association.


    Right now not only Sam and his friends but every other college student is also fighting in the border cities. Cities like the central city did not get attacked by the monsters, because those cities were very far from the border area but if the warriors weren''t able to kill those monsters in the border City then the cities would also get attacked by those monsters and many people would die. The warrior association did not want to take any risk and because of this they already take those normal peoples in a safe ce where they will be safe from those monsters.


    Right now Gloria, Alena, Fiona, Maria, Hina and Victor are also fighting monsters in different cities. They were high grade Warriors and they have the most pressurepared to those other Warriors who still did not be the high grade Warriors. They are fighting those monsters non-stop. They still did not face any high grade monsters but they got informed by the warrior association that high grade monsters were also approaching them and because of this they were already ready to attack.


    __________To be continued_________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 303 303 - Monsters Attack (2)

    Even though Sam was killing monsters, while trying to stop them from advancing toward Lais city. But if you look at him right now, you can see that he was bleeding. His armor was also seriously damaged. Even though those monsters weren''t able to see him, they could feel the spiritual energy fluctuation, with that they were attacking him and because of this, he got seriously injured. He also didn''t get the time to rest and recover his health.


    Right now, he stops attacking those monsters. He was very low on health. You can say it was his first time getting seriously injured. He can already feel that he is also very close to reaching his limit using the stealth technique. Sometimeter, it will be deactivated. He was very low on his spiritual energy and because of this, he also stopped attacking those monsters. He was now focused on recovering. But those monsters didn''t stay ideal. When they notice that unknown enemy stops attacking them, they think they are finally that enemy and because of this, they once again start advancing toward Lais city.


    Sam already informs his friends that those monsters start advancing toward Lais city, and they should prepare for that. Tony and the others heard him and nodded, but then they asked about his condition but Sam told him they should not worry about him they should be ready to face those monsters. He is now taking rest and sometimeter he will once again join them to fight those monsters. Until then they should take care of all those monsters and they should be careful because there were many high grade monsters approaching the city. At this time Tony also informs Sam that they already told the warrior association about this and ask for the reinforcement but it will take some time for those reinforcements toe to the city. After hearing that Sam nodded. He can understand that not only this city, but many cities like this were getting attacked by those high grade monsters and because of this every Warriors were busy.


    After talking, he hung up the call. He has already recovered half of his spiritual energy and his health. After carefully looking around he deactivated the stealth technique. As you know that the longer he will activate that technique the longer he will put pressure on his body. Because of this, he also needed some time to recover from that. But now he has already recovered half of his health and energy and with that he could protect himself. Fortunately he already hid himself from those monsters.


    ___________


    Tony after hanging off the call also informs all those other Warriors about this. Everyone nodded  after hearing that. Previously they thought that Tony and the others were joking with them but then this wasn''t the time for the joke and because of this everyone became serious about this. It did not take those Warriors to feel those high grade monsters that were approaching them. Instantly they inform those other Warriors that still didn''t feel the energy of those monsters. Already those long range Warriors prepare their attack and the moment they see those monsters they release their attack toward them.


    Those spiritual Warriors and archers continuously attacking those monsters. Some of those Warriors attacking those flying monsters while some of these warriors attacking those other monsters. Even though they cannot kill those monsters easily, if they continuously attacked them they could kill them and because of this, they attacked those monsters continuously.


    At this time, those monsters also did not stay ideal. The moment they approach the city they get attacked and this instantly makes them angry. They also instantly started to charge toward the city. Those warriors also did not stay ideal; they also started to charge toward those monsters. Instantly the ss between the monster and the warrior happens. Those A-grade Warriors already told those students that they came to this border City to fight this monster to attack those low grade monsters because fighting those high grade monsters will be dangerous for them. They will try to take care of all those high grade monsters.


    Sometimeter,


    If you look at the situation then you can say that those Warriors wire at these advantages. Already many Warriors got seriously injured by those monsters and even some of the Warriors died. Tony and the others were very startled by that because it was our first time to see people dying in front of them. Not only them but those other students also get startled. They never face a situation like this and because of this they are very shocked.


    Right now still the reinforcement did note and because of these the situation is getting worse. At this time Tony and the others were fighting those D-grade monsters but it was getting tough for them to handle these monsters. At this time Alexa was fighting a monster, but suddenly that monster counter-attacked her and made her unbnced. The monster used this chance to appear in front of her and was about to attack her. Har situation was very bad because her Armor already got damaged and most likely if she got hit by these attacks she would die.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Alexa!!!!!" While Jeni and others shout her name, they are also helpless because they cannot help their friend. But at this time If you look at Alexa then you can see that she did not close her eyes because even if she died, everyone will remember her as a warrior who died while protecting humanity.


    But suddenly something unexpected happened. That monster stopped. This instantly confused Alexa but then she saw a Arrow that pierced through that monster''s head. With that the monster died. Alexa instantly jumps away from that ce and the monster falls down on the ground.


    "Are you okay?" At this time she suddenly hears a voice from behind. That startled her. But then she saw that it was Sam and that instantly made her relieved. Not only her but Tony and the others also got to rx after seeing him. Sam just smiled toward them and instantly shot his arrows at those monsters that they were facing. His Arrow instantly kills those monsters. But Sam did not rx; he continuously shot his arrow towards other monsters. Alexa and the others also did not stay ideal; they also started attacking those monsters once again. They don''t know why but the moment they saw Sam they got their confidence back to fight those monsters. Also as you can guess that Sam was using his energy mode while killing those monsters and because of this his Arrow easily pierced those monsters.


    Sam quickly took a spiritual energy recovery potion and also used his Energy recovery technique. Right now spiritual energy was the only thing that could help him while fighting those monsters. While he was recovering his friends were covering him so that those monsters did not attack him. It did not take that much time for him to recover once again and at this time he suddenly saw an early B-grade monstering toward them. This instantly makes everyone very serious. Nobody is confident enough to take down a B-grade monster. But suddenly Sam told him in their mine to attack that monster at the same time. Right now he already channels all of his spiritual energy toward his arrow, not only him but everyone was also ready to attack that monster with their full strength. There was still a huge gap between a B-grade monster and them, but it did not make them scared.


    Wasting no time, everyone attacked that monster. The monster was charging toward them but suddenly he saw those attacksing toward him. He tried to protect himself while using his hand as a shield but after those attacksbined that instantly created a very powerful attack and that attack when hit him, it instantly made a hole in his chest. Fortunately it was a vicious wolf, and this type of monster did not have a strong regeneration power. They finally kill that monster sessfully but they do not stop and instantly take their Energy recovery potion.


    Not only them but many other warriors also attacked those high grade monsters with theirbined attack and you can say that it was very sessful because with that they could kill those monsters but this also bought them a risk because they were right now low on their strength and energy and right now they could lose their life. But this is the only way they could fight those monsters. So right now everyone was fighting like this. Everyone is now just hoping for the reinforcement to quickly appear and fight those monsters.


    20 minutester,


    Right now even though those Warriors already killed many monsters, their condition wasn''t that good and many of them already died. They were already exhaustedpletely but they still needed to fight those monsters until the reinforcement did note and because of this day was still holding on to their ground.


    ________To be continued_________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 304 304 - Dark Fireball

    Finally, the reinforcement came. When they finally reached the city they saw the serious condition of those warriors. Wasting no time, they instantly began to take action. Sam was still focusing on fighting and because of this, he didn''t sense them. But, suddenly he saw the monster in front of him get killed by someone, only then he noticed that the reinforcement finally arrived. Not only him, but Alexa and the others also noticed them. They finally sigh in relief.


    "Jeni, are you okay?" Suddenly someone asked this to Jeni. Alexa, Tony and the others then looked at the sky and they saw that it was Saint Veena. She asked Jeni this question.


    Jeni just smiles after seeing her grandmother. At this time, Venna wasn''t smiling because she could see the injuries in her body. Instantly, she looks toward those monsters and dash toward them. Those A-grade Warriors and those Warriors who were about to attack those monsters, suddenly stop. Because they also saw Saint Veena. She was going toward those monsters and looked like she was very angry. Because of this, they didn''t advance. Most of them know that when Saint Veena bes angry, it will be best if they maintain their distance from her.


    Veena already noticed that those warriors didn''t advance toward those monsters. Well, she didn''t mind because she also didn''t want anyone to interfere while she hunted monsters. Suddenly, fireballs started to appear. But those weren''t your normal fireballs, because the color of those fireballs were ck. The most dangerous level you can reach in fire control. One by one those fireballs were created and one by one those fireballs approaching those monsters. With one fireball, she could kill 5 peak A-grade monsters. With this you can imagine how powerful those fireballs were.


    Every warrior present in that ce, now looking at the scene with shocked expression. Because, the gap between them and those Saints were really very big. They fought those monsters using their 100%, but still they got seriously injured, but on the other hand Saint Veena didn''t even move her finger and she already killed those many monsters. Most likely she didn''t even use her 10% Spiritual energy.


    Venna after those monsters that already invaded the city. But after killing all those monsters, she didn''t stop, outside of the city monsters still roaming around. She didn''t want to take any risk and because of this, she was now going toward those monsters. The moment she came out of Lais city, she saw many monsters. These monsters were approaching Lais city. Wasting no time, she began to attack. Right now, those warriors who can use the light element, already started to treat those seriously injured warriors. Finally, those warriors could sigh in relief. At this time, if you looked at Sam then you could see that he was clenching his fist while looking toward Veena. He also needed to reach this power level, not only that he only needed to surpass this. But for that she needed to work hard.


    _____________________


    30 minutester,


    Veena came back to the city. She killed every monster. But when she came back to the city, only then did she notice the casualties rate of the Warriors. 15 early D-grade warriors died by those monsters. Well, if you are thinking that they were from college, then you are wrong those warriors already graduated from college. No college students this time died. But many of them got seriously injured. Alexa and the others were also injured. They are already using their 2nd Armor. Right now, they are recovering their strength and energy.


    At this time Veena came toward them and asked about their situation. They told her about their situations. At this time Jeni asked her grandmother about those monsters and their sources. But after hearing that question, Veena''s mood became very serious because even though she went to the danger zone she did not find the source and the reason for the increasing number of monsters. Still those students and many Warriors did not know the fact that in the danger zone there were still portals appearing and monsters came out from that portal. This is one of the reasons why they still did not talk about the danger zone. Not only that in the danger zone the Dungeons were more powerful than those Dungeons present in the safe zone. Nobody knows the reason but because of this they did not take over the danger zone.<novelnext></novelnext>


    But when she and her teammates begin to search for the reason in the danger zone they find the fact that somehow more portals started to appear in the danger zone. But those new portals weren''t like those other portals that appeared in the danger zone. If those other portals that normally appear in the danger zone connected to the monster world then those new portals most likely connected with other things because it did not release the same energy fluctuation like those other portals. This thing really surprised everyone and they already knew that it was due to the dark association. Right now they need to find out the source of those new portals. Also one more thing was that the monstering out from those new portals most likely lost their thinking ability and right now they have only one thought that was to attack the human cities and kill humans.


    "Really, out of nowhere this dark association is getting this kind of power. How the hell are they getting this? Did anyone help them with this? Most likely we need to catch that elder who is the main haid of this case. They already get to know from those direct association Warrior that this time only one elder from the dark association ns all of this. This dark association previous year did not have this kind of power but suddenly this year out of nowhere gained this kind of power. This is the most confusing thing about that dark association." Veena murmured while thinking about the dark association.


    Sam was recovering his energy right now thinking about something. He still cannot understand why the hell dark association needed the blood of those Warriors. If they only n about the monster''s attack, then those most likely weren''t necessary but those dark association Warriors use their all to collect blood of those people whose name was in that cklist of their elder. So right now he was thinking that most likely the elder of the dark association was still nning something that nobody would guess about. He wanted to ask Veena about this but after looking at her serious face he decided against it. Most likely all the saints right now were busy attacking those monsters and he did not want to disturb them.


    At this time he once again focuses on the danger zone. He doesn''t know if monsters will once again attack the city or not but he will prepare for that. Unfortunately at this time his system was upgrading, because using his system he could upgrade his so that those monsters won''t be able to break that. Sam always uses 3 armor, one for his mask identity, two he used as Sam. One of the gifts from his college  and another one he bought from the cksmith association. The second armor already got damaged and because of this he was now using the armor he got from the college. Fortunately this Armor was much tougher than that previous are not and only those B-grade and A-grade monster''s could break this armor.


    At this time, Veena told every warrior to take rest because she already killed those monsters that were approaching this city. But it does not mean that once again those monsters won''t attack this city. But it will take some time for those monsters to attack this city once again and because of this she told everyone to rest until then.


    Right now, the whole city of Lais is empty. No normal people were there except those warriors. Those warriors didn''t want to get that far away from the border because of that, so they brought out tents and set them near the border. Not only one warrior, but everyone did that. So that they could watch over the border and if monsters appear then they could react quickly. Sam and his friends also set their tent near the border. Veena didn''t say anything to them and just nodded. This was a good decision but at the same time, it was a risky decision. Because, right, they will get attacked by the monsters at first. But, Sam and friends already set the life detecting device so they won''t be having problem detecting the monsters.


    After checking that everything was okay, Veena left that city. Right now the Saints were checking every city. They were killing monsters if needed and while also searching for the dark association. None of the Saints didn''t forget that those dark association Warriors collected blood of their many students and Warriors and because of this they were very alert.


    ______________To be continued______________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 305 305 - Weird Energy Fluctuation

    Right now, Markus, Mira, Vena, Leon, John and the other Saints were already able to stabilize the condition in those border cities. Even though they had casualties, it wasn''t that big. But still, every Warrior will have a proper burial by the Warrior association. Everybody who died fighting those monsters will be respected by every Warrior. They were the heroes who protect humanity without caring about their life.


    "Did any of you find the reason for this monster''s attack?" John asked this to everyone.


    " Well previously when I went to the danger zone I found that a new type of portal started to appear in the danger zone and all these monsters wereing from that portal. Also one more thing was that those portals are very differentpared to those normal portals because the energy they are releasing arepletely different. As all of you know, those portals and those dungeons had the same energy fluctuation but these new portals did not have the same energy fluctuation. Dark association most likely behind these new portals." Vena said this to everyone.


    " Well I also found the same thing when I went to the danger zone. Nobody knows how that dark association is doing all of this. This dark association is nowpletely bing a headache for us. They were preparing all this year to attack like this. Also we aren''t sure if they just wanted to think about monster attacks. No one should forget that they also have the blood of many students, most likely they are also nning something with that blood." Markus said that. After hearing him everyone nodded.


    Markus is about to say something but suddenly his phone rings. He quickly answered the phone. Because he already told all those Warriors that unless it was any serious matter they should not contact him, so it should be some serious matter and because of this they contact him.


    "Sir, the captain of the Alpha team is speaking. As your instruction we are already watching over every Dungeon. Previously we already told all those who wear inside of the dungeon to get outside of the dungeon. So normally all the Dungeons should be empty but a few minutes ago we noticed a movement inside of the dungeon. A human is still inside of the dungeon. We are now waiting for your instruction. Should we capture him or let him go? " The captain of the Alpha team exined all of this to him.


    After hearing all of this Markus also startled. Because it was natural for every Dungeon to stay empty at this moment but how the hell a warrior went to that Dungeon. He quickly told the captain of the Alpha team to capture that person and also they should careful because if that person from the dark association then he could suicide so that we won''t be able to know any information.


    "Roger, that." After saying that the captain of the Alpha team hung up the call. He and his teammates instantly made theirs. Instantly a person attacks that warrior with a confused ray. After that a lightning element user attacks that warrior with his lightning attack. Well he did not want to kill that person and because of this the power of that lightning attack wasn''t that high. But that lightning attack was enough to paralyze that Warrior and also make him unconscious.


    __________


    At this time,


    Markus already told those other teams to check inside of the Dungeons. He wanted to know if there were any other Dungeons where right now they will find any warrior. Right, Vena and the others were also in a heavy mood. They are also very curious to know why suddenly a person appears inside of a Dungeon. No normal person will go inside of the Dungeon in this kind of situation.


    At this time suddenly Mira feels energy fluctuation. Right now they were in the central City''s Warrior association. So she suddenly feels the energy fluctuation of a high grade Warrior. Previously when she came to the central city she covered the whole city with her spiritual power so that if suddenly a monster attacked the city or tried to attack the city she would get to know fast. Suddenly she felt an energy fluctuation. This energy fluctuationes from the end of the central city. Instantly that energy fluctuation made her alert because she was already very familiar with this type of energy fluctuation. When someone teleports from another ce to another ce they reveal this type of energy fluctuation. Because of this she was very familiar with this type of energy fluctuation.<novelnext></novelnext>


    But the main question was who was using the teleportation right now because only the warrior association could use the teleportation device and also to do this they needed the approval of any Saint. They were still developing this so that everyone could use the teleportation device but it will take some time. Instantly she asked those other sayings if they knew about this or if they gave their permission to someone to use the teleportation device.


    But instantly all of them shook their heads. They did not give their permission to any Warrior to use the teleportation device right now. Previously they gave their permission to those students and those other Warriors to go toward the border cities and also while sending reinforcements they gave their permissions but right now they did not give the permission to anyone.


    After hearing all of this, Mira suddenly became serious and told everyone what she found. She told everyone that she suddenly felt the energy fluctuation, the same as teleportation. You should know that those spiritual Warriors are very sensitive toward the energy fluctuationpared to those physical Warriors.


    Not only her but those other Saints became serious. They did not waste anymore time and instantly started to approach that ce. While they were approaching they also contacted all the warrior associations and asked them if they could use the teleportation device to send someone in the central City. But none of those Warrior associations use the device.


    Right now if you are wondering who could be that person that uses the teleportation technique right now then it was the elder of the dark association who once again came to the abundant factory to make those 5 Warriors. Those 5 Warriors from the dark association already send them are subordinate to those Dungeons. Right now all 5 of them came to this abandoned factory to talk with their elder about the summoning ritual. Well this was not your forbidden summoning in but it was your blood summoning. In this process, you will need blood from a person whose life you want to sacrifice in this process. A monster wille out from this summoning and then he will take the life of that person. After that the monster will also vanish.


    As you can see that this blood summoning process was weakpared to the forbidden summoning but this was still enough for the elder and those 5 Warriors to kill their enemies. Also one more thing was that the monster that wille out from this process will be at B-grade, so this technique was useless against B-grade warriors or higher warriors. The monster that wille out from this process will take the sacrifice of life at any cost. If someone wanted to prevent that from happening then The monster would also kill that person.


    "We are already ready to use the technique. Right now everyone is busy fighting those monsters. Even those Saints were also busy stabilizing the situation. This will be the perfect moment to use the blood summoning." The leader said that to the elder. Like the elders of the dark association, they were also very excited to eliminate their enemies. Right now those enemies should be busy protecting and fighting those monsters and their power will be very low and they won''t be able to fight a B-grade monster. So you can say that it was the perfect time to use that technique.


    The elder nodded.


    "I also know that it was the perfect time to use that technique. But before using the technique I should tell everyone that most likely those Saints were already able to stabilize the situation and they should being back. So we should leave this central city and only then..." the elder didn''t get the chance to finish his word because he instantly lost the ability to speak or move. Not only him but those other 5 Warriors also lost their abilities.


    Well as you can guess that Markus and those other Saints already appear there. The moment they appeared they instantly did not charge. All this time they were hearing the conversation between those 5 Warriors and that elder. The moment they heard that he was an elder of the dark association they wanted to attack but they waited for their conversation to finish. Because of this they are finally able to know the situation. He was the elder who was the mastermind behind all of this. Not only that he is also nning to use the blood summoning technique. Just hearing that those Saints could tell how dangerous their n was.


    ____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 306 306 - Capture

    Mira before appearing in front of them uses her power to control those 6 Warriors from the dark association. The elder of the dark association was only a peak A-grade warrior, while those 5 warriors were early A-grade warriors. So you can say that Mira did not have that much problem controlling their body using her mind control. Because of this, suddenly those 6 Warriors from the dark association were unable to move or do anything. Right now, even if they wanted to suicide so that the warrior association unable to know anything, they won''t be able to do anything. None of them have the strength to even move their lips.


    At this time, all those 6 Warriors get very startled at first because suddenly they are unable to move their body. But then they saw that suddenly out of nowhere those Saints appeared in front of them. This instantly makes them very startled. At this time the elder when saw those Saints, he quickly thought about using his dark teleportation technique to escape from there but only then he realized that right now he cannot use any of his techniques. Not only him but those 5 Warriors also feel that they cannot use any of their techniques right now. This instantly makes all 6 of them despair. They did not want to get captured by the warrior association, or they did not want to give those Warrior association any information about their dark association. Because of these they also wanted tomit suicide but only then the realise that they can''t even do that.


    "Look like you all realise that you cannotmit suicide. We already know that you and those other Warriors from the dark association has the habit tomit suicide. But you won''t be able to do anything until Saint Mira doesn''t release you from her control." Markus said that and then signaled Mira. Mira just nodded and then instantly made all 6 of them unconscious. This wasn''t the right ce to interrogate them.


    "Right now we should not tell anyone about this that we capture an elder from the dark association. I don''t know if you all realize or not but I think that we have a traitor in our Warrior association. He was the one who gave the dark association about our information." Markus told this to everyone. They all nodded. Well, not only him, but they are also suspecting that. Because they previously realized that somehow the dark association already got to know about their n and moved their base. So they are 100% sure that they have traitor among their subordinates.


    "Sigh, fortunately Mira is able to feel them and we are able to stop them before they use the blood summoning." Vena said that with a sigh. Well not only her but every other Saint was sighing in relief. If they sessfully use the technique then even the Saints would not be able to protect those students whose blood was used in that process. Unlike the forbidden summoning, the monstering out from this summoning won''t waste his time and directly approach his target.


    Suddenly, Markus gets informed by many of his subordinates that they capture many people in the Dungeons. Not only in one dungeon, in many other Dungeons after searching for some time they finally found people and without wasting any time they captured them. After hearing that Vena, Mira and the others started hoping that the monster attack would finally stop after this. But they cannot be sure about this.


    Today they got a big harvest because they were able to capture an elder from the Dark association. Most likely the elder won''t have any seal in his brain that will prevent the warrior association from knowing the real location of the dark association. Also they wanted to get a lot of information about this attack. They also wanted to know who was the mastermind behind this. So you can say that right now everyone has many questions that they wanted to get the answer from that elder.


    ______________________


    Right now while every Saints were busy interrogating those people from the dark association, Gloria and her teammates were also fighting monsters in border cities. Gloria and Fiona both were sent to the same city. Previously both of them already fought all those monsters with their 100% and with that they also killed many of those monsters but when suddenly those high grade monsters started to appear it instantly put pressure on both of them. Even after both of theirbined attacks they are unable to kill any A grade monsters. While fighting those A-grade monsters they also get injured. Right now both of their armor got damaged but it did not make them stop fighting. In the situation Gloria also needed to fight in closebat, because sometimes many monsters already came very close to her and as you know that any spiritual Warriors would be able to attack any monster in closebat that easily. But fortunately Sam already teaches them the energy mode and because of this she is able to kill those monsters or injure those monsters.


    Not only her but right now Hina and Victor were also fighting monsters. Both of them already advance to the B-grade warriors, and because of these they have very high responsibilitypared to their children. Not only them but Alena, Maria, and Aria were also fighting those monsters using their 100%. Even when they faced those high grade monsters at the same time they did not back down and fight back with those monsters.<novelnext></novelnext>


    But fortunately those Saints helped them and right now they are able to rest for some time and prepare for those monsters once again. They already send their scouts to the danger zone. Those scouts will look over  monsters in the danger zone and if they once againe toward their City then they will immediately alert those other Warriors. Unfortunately while killing the monster from the danger zone they did not receive any loot but right nowpared to the loots protecting the humans were the most responsible thing for any Warriors but that does not mean that day could not sell the dead bodies of those monsters. Right now some students and some low grade Warriors are doing that thing.


    _________________________


    "Did the scout team find any monsters?" Suddenly Kenny asks that question to Sam. Right now they don''t know if those monsters will attack right now orter and because of this they were waiting for those monsters. Right now all of them were resting in their tent. But as you know that because they wanted to observe the border all the Warriors were now resting near the borders.


    At this time Sam was meditating. Actually he wanted to recover from his mental exhaustion because of this he was meditating. Today he already crossed the using time of his concealment technique and because of this he was now suffering from headache. Not only him but many other people are also suffering from mental headaches because of this. So some people were sleeping while some people stayed awake while looking at the borders. Right now the scout teams still did not send them any news about those monsters and because of this everyone of them are very alert right now.


    But sometimeter the scout team already sent them the news that they wereing back. They already found 10 km areas from their city but they did not find any monsters near that area. Even though some monsters once again appeared in that ce, those monsters did not advance toward their City. Because of this right now they areing back. Not only the scout team but they also looked at their life sign detecting device. But even in the device the right now did not find any monster that was approaching their City. Because of this right now many Warriors already sigh in relief. Right now nobody knows if those monsters will finally stop attacking the cities or not but they were getting some time to rest and this was enough for them.


    While at this moment Warriors were fighting those monsters, right now those normal peoples that already escaped from their cities were hiding themselves in the safe house that was created by the warrior association. This prevents any monster from approaching them or notice their location. As you can guess the warrior associationpletely wanted to prevent any ident where any monster attacked those normal peoples. Not only those normal peoples but even those F-grade and E-grade Warriors were also at those safe ces. They were very weak to appear in this kind of ce. Nobody wanted any burden while they would fight those monsters and because of these F-grade and E-grade Warriors did note to the border City.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam has already recovered from his headache and he is once again ready to fight. At this time he gets to know that the scout team already came back after scouting the danger zone but they did not find anything in that zone. Most likely it will take them sometime. And because of this, those scout teams also wanted to rx a little. But at this time Sam suddenly suggests to everyone that he will go to the danger zone once again and watch over those monsters.


    __________To be continued________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 307 307 - Portal

    Markus was getting contacted by many of the team leaders of the warrior association. All of them inform him that they capture some people from Dungeons that they are searching for. Nobody knows the reason and because of this, all of those captains bring those people to the warrior association. It will take them some time to reach the warrior association''s headquarters. After hearing that Markus nodded and then hung up the call. He also wanted to know why those people went to the Dungeon at this time. Were those people belonging to the dark association? He wanted to know that answer.


    _____________


    At this time, Sam already entered the danger zone while using his concealment techniques. Even though the scout team is already in the danger zone, he still wants to enter the danger zone. Right now he has some questions that he needs answered and he will only get the answer if he searches in the danger zone.


    Right now Sam was silently advancing in the danger zone. You can see many destroyed buildings, many other things in the danger zone. Actually before the Dungeon appeared this ce was also a city where humans lived but right now it has turned into a dangerous zone. Right now the danger zone was full with trees, mountains, sea, desert and many dangerous monsters. Well, you hear the right because arge part of the Eden Blue was the danger zone that still the warrior was unable to control.


    While Sam was advancing in the danger zone he already saw many monsters but he did not feel any hostile auraing from those monsters. He also did not find that many monsters in the same ce. So he became very confused because these monsters weren''t showing any interest in attacking the city, so why the hell did they attack the cities previously?


    ''Did the saints know anything?'' Sam thought about this because he previously noticed that when Vena came back from the danger zone his mood was more seriouspared to before. Did she find anything in the danger zone that he did not find previously? Well even though he came to the danger zone he still has not reached the ce where he will see those portals appear and from those portals monsters appear. Also Sam still did not find any Dungeon in the danger zone. From the dungeon that was in the danger zone monster came out from the Dungeons and attacked anyone and because of this, those Saints still did not take over the danger zone.


    Previously Sam heard from his teachers that in the danger zone monsters came out from the Dungeons and because of this he was now searching for those Dungeons from where those monsters wereing out. But he didn''t know that those monsters weren''ting out from the Dungeons but they wereing out from those weird portals. Actually not only Sam but many other Warriors also don''t know this thing because this could make everyone panic and scared. Because in their history book everyone already knows the danger of the portals. Compared to those Dungeons, many warriors were scared of those portals. Nobody knows when they will appear and nobody knows how powerful monsters wille out from those portals. Fortunately in the safe zone no portals appear.


    [A/N: Actually there is a reason behind this. Sam will get to know thister.]


    5 hourster,


    Right now Sam was resting while eating his food. He was still in the danger zone and he already found many monsters but none of those monsters showed any interest to attack the city. So this really confused him right now because he didn''t know if the danger was finally gone or not.


    Sam just sighs and then stands up from his ce. He had already finished his food and was about to advance. But suddenly he felt an energy fluctuation. This instantly made him very alert and wasting no time he went toward that direction. It did not take him that much time to reach that ce from where he was feeling that energy fluctuation.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Right now in front of Sam was a green portal. For a second he was unable to give what was that but then he became sure that it was a portal that he read about. Because suddenly he saw that green monster wasing out from that portal. This really made him very shocked because he never thought that he would see a portal in the danger zone and not only that but monsters alsoing out from that portal. Sam quickly calms himself. Right now it wasn''t the time to panic.


    One by one many green monsterse out from that portal. Between him and those monsters there was still distance and because of this at first he wasn''t able to recognise those monsters but then when he came closer he already recognised those monsters. They are the goblins thate out from the portal. But those goblins weren''t that powerful because they were only E-grade monsters. This instantly made him want to take action but then he held back. He wanted to know if that portal would vanish when all the Goblin came out from the portal. Because of this without taking any action he just silently looked toward that portal.


    After those normal goblins, the Goblin captains also starteding out from the portals. And after those Goblin captains, Goblinmanders also came out from the portal. Those Goblinmanders were C-grade monsters, while those goblin captains were D-grade monsters. Right now he can see that at least 20 Goblinmanders and 100 Goblin captains, and at least 2000 Goblin soldiers were in front of him. At this time he also noticed one thing thatpared to those previous monsters that he saw in the danger zone, these goblins were releasing a nasty aura. When all those goblins came out from the portals, the portal suddenly started to disappear and the nasty aura also started to disappear. After that portalpletely disappeared, that nasty aura also disappeared.


    That instantly made him think about this matter because he was very familiar with that aura. If you wanted to know how he was familiar with that aura, they needed it because he already saw that type of for aing out from the monster that came out from the forbidden summoning. Well because of his spiritual vision he could see the aura, and both of the aura was the same. This type of aura came out from The monsters that use dark energy. You should know that not every monster uses dark spiritual energy. Normally only those ghost type or spiritual type monsters use dark energy. And because of this this makes Sam very confused and alert. Also one more thing was that when that portalpletely disappeared, at this time when he once again checked those goblins, at this time he felt those monsters'' aura were normal. Because of this he was right now very confused. He decided to inform his teacher and only then will he get to know any answer.


    ___________________


    Right now, Alena was checking around the city and looking at the condition of the city. Not only this border city but many other border cities have already been damaged by those monsters. Normally it was very dangerous for those citizens that live in the border cities. She wanted to know if there were any casualties or any citizen still in the border City or not. What if previously Warriors from the warrior association did not bring all the citizens into the safe ce. Because of this she was checking the condition of the city and searching for any citizen. But suddenly her phone rang.


    She looked at her phone and saw that it was Sam who was calling her. He quickly answered the call. Even though she knows that nothing will happen to her students, she is still worried about him.


    The moment she answers the call Sam begins to tell her everything without wasting any time. At this time she also did not say anything to him and just silently listened to his exnation. When Sam finishes exining everything to her, her mood bespletely serious. He already knew that in the danger zone they were still a portal appeared and a monster came out from those portals. But she never faced this kind of situation that a student was facing. She quickly told Sam to be careful.


    Sam, after hearing that, just smiled and told her teacher not to worry about him. He will try to take care of all those goblins, but even if he wasn''t able to kill all those goblins, then his friends will take care of that. He will inform his friends about this. So that they will also be ready for fighting. Alena after hearing that just nodded and then hung up the call. She wasn''t that worried about Sam, because she knew that he could escape from that kind of situation easily so she did not need to worry about him. Right now wasting no time she already informs Markus about this. Saint Markus and those other Saints were discussing the monsters, so this information could help them.


    ____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 308 308 - Killing Goblin Commanders

    2 hourster,


    Right now Sam was fighting those goblinmanders. He already killed tho se Goblin captains and right now he wanted to finish all these Goblinmanders. Killing those gobbing captains did not take him that much time, he only needed 1 hour topletely kill all those Goblin captains but right now while he was fighting those Goblinmanders it became very tough for him to fight them. Compared to the Goblin captains the defense of these Goblinmanders also increased. So you can say that to kill them he almost needed to use 70% to 80% of his spiritual energy to sharpen his sword. Because of this, it takes him this much time to kill all those Goblinmanders.


    But even though it took him much time to kill all those Goblinmanders there was a good thing that those Goblinmanders were unable to sense him or the unable to sense the energy fluctuation. You can say that it was a plus point for him and because of this, he was also able to rest. Right now if you look at those Goblinmanders and those Goblin soldiers, then you will notice that all of them right now are really searching their surroundings and trying to find the enemy that is attacking them. He still did not attack those Goblin soldiers because he did not want to waste his time killing them. His main target was those goblinmanders.


    Right now those goblins are unable to find them and because of this, they are attacking their surroundings aimlessly. Fortunately, Sam already brings many energy recovery potions. With those and using his Energy recovery technique, he was able to recover his energy quickly.


    Once again he recovers his full energy and this time he brings out his bow and arrow. Right now because those goblins were very alert and they just attacked their surroundings aimlessly even though they were unable to sense him. Because of this, he did not want to get close to those goblins. If he wanted to attack them from a distance then he had two options, one was using a spell and the other one was using his bow and arrow. If he used his mega fireball or great fireball, then he wasn''t sure if he would be able to kill those monsters. Well, it will definitely kill those Goblin soldiers but most likely he needed to use more than one mega fireball to kill one Goblinmander. With that, you can imagine how powerful their defense was. Because of this, he decided to use his Arrow and bow.


    He already reloaded the Arrow in his bow and right now he is channeling his spiritual energy toward his arrow. To be able to damage those Goblinmanders he needed to use his 70% to 80% spiritual energy and because of this right now he is also channeling 70% of his spiritual energy toward that arrow. This Arrow will shift their focus in another direction and with that, he will attack them with a confused ray. That will confuse all those Goblinmanders for some second, and that will be enough time for him. You can say that this was his n.


    Right now he was waiting for the right moment to shoot his arrow. Sometimeter when he saw two Goblinmanderse beside each other wasting no time he shot his arrow. Instantly that arrow very quickly appeared in front of one Goblinmander and pierced through his skull, but not only that that also pierced through the second Goblinmander''s skull. So you can say that one arrow has two targets.


    As expected this instantly shifts all those other Goblinmanders'' focus in this direction. It once again makes them very angry because some unknown enemy just attacks them when they are unable to find that enemy. But Sam did not waste any more time and when those Goblinmanders looked in his direction, he instantly used his confused ray toward those monsters. After that, he quickly drinks his potion and uses the energy recovery technique. It will take 5 minutes for him to recover his full energy. For that 5 minutes, he needed to continuously use his confusion toward monsters. For 10 seconds he was able to make those Goblinmanders confused. Also, one more thing was that while he used that technique it did not cost him that much spiritual energy and because of this he can use this technique continuously.


    5 minutester,


    All this time the moment those Goblinmanders were able to recover from their dazed state Sam once again attacked them with a confused ray. Finally, when he recovers his full energy he attacks those Goblinmanders for thest time and instantly approaches them. He already channels 70% of his spiritual energy toward his yer. Instantly his yer became darker. With that, he begins to attack those Goblinmanders. Right now those goblinmanders were unable to react and this was his best chance. While if you are thinking why those Goblin soldiers did not attack him then he was pushing away those Goblin soldiers using his telekinesis power. Until he does not kill all these Goblinmanders he will keep away those Goblin soldiers. Fortunately, those Goblin soldiers were only E-grade monsters.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ___________________


    Right now when some were busy killing those goblins, the scout team had already returned back to the border City because they had already found that once again monsters started to appear. Even though they did not find out about the portal, they already saw how many monsters have been increased and they once again begin to advance toward the border City. Because of this, the scout team did not waste any more time and already came back to the city. They also inform all the Warriors about this and this instantly makes all the Warriors very serious. Once again those monsters areing toward their city and most likely they once again will fight them with their hundred percent.


    Right now if you ask any Warrior if he/she was scared or not, then the answer would be that they were very scared right now but at the same time, they also know that if they suddenly fail in their mission then many normal people will die by that. Because of this, even though they were scared they did not show this to anyone. Every Warrior once again gets prepared and begins to walk toward the entrance or exit of the danger zone.


    The Spiritual Warriors and the archers were already to attack them. Not only that, but those other Warriors were also ready. The moment those spiritual warriors and those Archers saw the figure of those monsters, without thinking anything they began to attack them. Some of them are taking those flying monsters while some of them attacking those ground monsters. But at this time If you look at Tony and his group then you can see that they were very worried about their friend. He also went to the danger zone and he still did note back to the safe zone. Because of this, they were very worried about him but at the same time, they have the confidence that nothing will happen to their friend because if he wanted to escape then no one can stop him.


    Jeni, Elena, Saara, and Dan also did not miss this chance and they also attacked those monsters with their bow and spells. But Tony, Alexa, and the others weren''t slow. The moment these monsters get closer to them they are instantly attacked by those physical Warriors.


    ____________


    Right now in the central city in the warrior association, all the saints were discussing the matter that just now they heard from Markus. Alena already told him everything and this instantly made him very serious. Previously even though they went to the danger zone and found those weird portals but they did not feel any different aura in those monsters. Well, it is probably that because they were busy killing those monsters and because of this they were unable to focus on that. But if the thing was true then they can be sure that behind Those weird portals, the dark association is working.


    While they were talking about these weird portals, Markus suddenly remembered that some time ago the dark association was collecting dark energy from ghost dungeons. Finally, he understands why those dark associations wanted to collect those dark spiritual energies from the ghost Dungeon. Probably they were using that dark energy in those portals. Probably they will get to know everything when they will interrogate that elder. Previously they were about to go to the integration room when suddenly Markus got a call from Alena. He quickly told everyone not to dy anymore and everyone went to the interrogation room. Fortunately, Mira was there, and with that, they will get to know everything from the elder and he won''t be able to hide anything. Right now the most important thing was knowing the information about all of this from the elder of the dark association. They also wanted to know the location of the dark association so that they could attack the dark association.


    __________To be continued___________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 309 309 - Information

    Right now, Markus and the other Saints were interrogating the elder of the dark association. They already interrogated those 5 Warriors from the dark association and now it was the time for the elder to reveal everything. While interrogating those 5 Warriors, Mira feels that barrier around their heads that prevents them from revealing any information about the dark association. Because of this, she is unable to know the location of the dark association. But she was able to know the other information.


    Mira and the others are able to know that this elder was the mastermind behind all of this. Except for the theme those other elders did not directly participate in this but they held their subordinates in this matter. If the elder from the dark association did not want to show themselves nobody would get to know about them. Unfortunately, those 5 Warriors did not know any information about these elders. Not only these 5 Warriors but most likely all the Warriors from the dark association did not know anything about these elders or their information. Every elder has their code. This elder is called elder S. This is the only thing they know about this elder.


    Those 5 Warriors did not know anything about those devices. Every time those elders give them these weird devices. This time also elder S gives them the task to gather the dark spiritual energy from the ghost dungeon. He told them that he is able to know a technique where he will be able to control the monsters in the danger zone. But for that, he needs dark spiritual energy. This is the only thing the elder told them previously, and they also did not dare to ask him about this. At that time, Sam also exposes one Dungeon where they were collecting dark spiritual energy. Because of this, they also targeted him that time but in the end, they were unable to finish him. Fortunately, at the time they already gathered the minimum dark spiritual energy they needed for this operation. Because of this, they quickly hid those things so that the warrior association did not find anything about this. Also recently while the annual collegepetition was going on, elder S suddenly gave them the task to collect the blood of those students whose name was on his cklist. At that time he did not tell anyone why he wanted those blood but when he was somehow able to control those monsters in the danger zone only then he told them what he would do with those blood.


    __________


    Right now Mira was in front of the elder S. All this time he was unconscious and because of this, he did not struggle when Mira used her mind control power. Using the mind control power she will control his mind and make him tell everything. Also because he was only a peak A-grade warrior, he wasn''t Mira''s match. She could easily control his mind.


    Mira nodded toward Markus and the others and then instantly used her power. At this time, it looks like the elder is able to be conscious and he starts to struggle but in the end, Mira gains full control of his brain. At this time If you look at the elder then you will notice that the elder became like a doll. Right now in this condition, he won''t be able to do anything. His brain is under the control of Mita.


    Mira nodded toward Markus. She gave them the signal that she already gained control over his brain. After getting her signal, Markus and the others smile. With that, they can finally start the interrogation.


    "What is your name?" Markus started to ask some basic questions at first. He did not instantly ask anything about the dark association or his n.


    "My name is Simon." At this time the elder also started to answer their every question. One by one he was answering every question and sometimeter finally Markus started to ask him about the dark association and the recent incident. Simon did not hesitate and he started to answer all of those questions one by one. At this time If you look at those Saints, then you will notice that their mood is just getting serious.


    During the college entrance examination, elder D was the mastermind behind that forbidden summoning. He was the one who gave everything to his subordinates and also made that n to attack those students who were taking the college entrance examination. They wanted to spread destruction and wanted to tell everyone how powerful their dark association was, that even the warrior association scared them. But at this time those students somehow manage to survive and with that, they are unable to spread any fear and destruction. Because of this every one of those students enters the cklist of the dark association.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Now back to this recent incident. He was the mastermind behind that. At this time Mira is unable to know the real location of the dark association where those elders leader of the dark association was. Because even the elders did not know the real location of that ce. But at this time she gets to know one thing that makes her very startled. Because she is able to know that those elders and the leader of the dark association have a connection with the other world. She wasn''t properly able to get the image of the other world''s people but she got to know that this dark association has a connection with the other world. But even after reading Simon''s mind, she is unable to know how the hell the dark association established the connection with the other world.


    When those other Saints got to know about this they also became very startled. Who could have expected this dark association to have a connection with another world? Unfortunately, they are unable to get any information about the other world. This Simon did not go to the other world that much and because of this he did not have that much information about those other worlds and the main headquarters of The Dark association.


    At this time they are also able to realize why they are unable to find the real headquarters of The Dark association even after searching everywhere. The main headquarter of The Dark association wasn''t in this Eden blue. The real headquarters was in the other world but nobody from the dark association knew about the other world and their main headquarters except the leader of the dark association and those elders who had higher authority. Even though they are unable to get information about the other world and the main headquarters, Mira is able to know the other headquarters that are present in Eden blue. In that ce, they will find 4 more elders from the dark association and the Warriors of the dark association.


    Except for these five elders, the dark association also has 5 more elders who also have higher authority and higher power like the leader of the dark association. Every one of them stays in the other world. Because of this not everybody knows about them. Also, Mira is able to know why they are unable to get any information about the dark association from those Warriors of the dark association. When someone joined the dark association those elders ced a barrier in their mind so that they were unable to reveal any information about the dark association but fortunately those elders did not have those barriers  in their minds. Actually, with that barrier, they could also control the mind of those dark association Warriors.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    Sometime years ago, he received some devices that can control the monster and the portals in the danger zone. But for that, you needed the dark spiritual energy. Also, he could control those monsters who did not use dark spiritual energy.


    That device attacks the portals and ayer of dark spiritual energy covers that portal. So when monsters came out from that portal, they got attacked by that dark spiritual energy. That dark spiritual energy when entering their body attacks the normal spiritual energy and takes control over their body. Also if you are wondering how he could control that then at this time that device takes his action. Actually that was amanding device where he or anyone could put anymand. So when the dark spiritual energy invades those monsters and controls the mind of those monsters, at that time those monsters will try to fulfill thatmand.


    Markus and others are finally able to know why they feel different about those portals when they previously saw those portals. Also they realize why Sam said that he feels those portals were simr to the previous forbidden summoning portals. Everything is connected to the dark spiritual energy. This is really a very shocking matter for everyone. Actually, these saints already know about those other worlds but those other world''s people wanted to take over Eden blue and because of this they never contacted them. But who can expect that the dark association established the rtion with the other world.


    __________To be continued________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 310 310 - Explanation

    Right now in the danger zone Sam was killing those Goblin soldiers. Well as you can guess, he already killed those Goblinmanders. It took him at least 2 hours to do that because the defenses of those monsters were strong and he also needed to recover his spiritual energy before killing those Goblinmanders. But fortunately he was lucky today because all this time those Goblinmanders and those Goblin soldiers did not advance toward the city. Everyone got angry because of that invisible enemy that was just attacking them. At any cost they wanted to kill that enemy and because of this, those Goblins did not go toward the city.


    While Sam was busy killing those goblins Tony and the others were waiting for those monsters to appear but even after waiting this long they did not see any monster approaching. But then just when they thought that no monster woulde toward the city, they instantly got attacked by monsters. Instantly all of them get very alert because in front of them they can see many monsters like goblins, vicious wolves, moon wolves, etc. They don''t know the exact amount of those monsters but fortunately there weren''t any high grade monsters. Those A-grade Warriors already observe those monsters and sigh in relief because they did not find any high grade monsters in those monsters. With this everyone can easily handle those monsters. Even though there weren''t any A-grade monsters, there seemed to be B-grade monsters, fortunately they could handle them easily.


    Nobody wastes any more time and everyone began to charge towards monsters. The spiritual Warriors and those archers already started their attack toward those flying monsters. At this time you can see Jeni, Elena, and Saara, also with those spiritual Warriors who are attacking those monsters. You have to say that three of them already improve very much while attacking those monsters. Saara in this situation was very close to using the spirit technique while on the other hand Jeni and Elena already master the spirit technique and also they can use their strong technique while using the spirit technique. Jeni summons a lighting Eagle, while Elena attacks those monsters with a vaporizing ray. Both of the attacks became very dangerous because it instantly killed those early D-grade monsters. Not only that it can also kill those intermediate D-grade monsters. But they seem to increase their spiritual energy at that time.


    At the front you will notice Tony, Alexa, Kenny, Tina, and kira. Kenny, Tina and Kira already grasped the spirit technique. While on the other hand Tony and Alexa master the spirit technique and just looking at their killing Speed you can imagine how powerful they have be. Kenny, Tina and Kira just needed some experience with that they could also easily use the spirit technique. Even though they are able to grasp the spirit technique, they are still unable to use that technique for that long. Even though this battlefield was very dangerous and already many Warriors lost their lives, there are also many Warriors who got their first experience in this type of field. Those Warriors will grow strong after this experience. Because right now everyone of those Warriors knows that even though they were living in afortable environment but to protect that environment all the Warriors are ready to sacrifice their life in this type of battlefield.


    ______________


    "Guys, did Sam contact anyone?" At this time Alexa suddenly asked everyone. After fighting for 2 hours they finally killed all those monsters and once again they could rx because right now they cannot see any monster in front of them. So at this time when she and the others begin to rest she suddenly thought about Sam who said to them previously about those monsters.


    Tony and the others after hearing that shook their heads. Because right now he did not contact any of them. With that they study to worry about him because he was in the danger zone and anything could happen in the danger zone. Previously they also wanted to follow him in the danger zone but at this time Sampletely disagreed with them. He told him that even though he will face any high grade monster he could easily escape from that but if they went in the danger zone with him then that situation will be very dangerous. Because of this Tony and the others did not follow him in the danger zone.


    At this time, suddenly Tony''s phone began to ring. He quickly picked up the phone and saw that it was Sam who was calling him. Wasting no time, Sam quickly told him that they didn''t need to worry about those goblins because he already takes care of all of them. And most likely no more monstering toward the city because after killing those goblins he once again started to scout around the danger zone but did not find any monsters that were very aggressive and going toward the city. Still he could see many monsters in the danger zone, but he did not feel any type of aggressiveness from those monsters. Actually what you wanted to mean with that aggressiveness was that those monsters did not release the feeling that they wanted to Lais city. With that Sam concluded that most likely these monsters won''t attack the city right now.


    After hearing that Tony and the others rx a little. Because if this was the real case, then they would be very rxed. At this time they also asked about his situation. But Sam just smiled at them and told him that he will alsoe back sometimeter. Beforeing back to the city Sam once again wanted to look around the danger zone and became sure that no monster will attack today. One most important thing was that Sam did not go that deeper in the danger zone. He knows he is limited and he also knows how dangerous the danger zone is. Even suspected that he could see the S-grade monsters in the danger zone. Because of this he did not want to advance further in the danger zone. Also fortunately previously any S-grade monsters didn''t attack any of the city. He doesn''t know but previously those Saints were also ready to face S-grade monsters, but fortunately nothing like that happened. Because of this everyone could sigh in relief. They escape from a disaster.


    After hanging up his phone Sam was about to advance but suddenly his phone rang. He looked at his phone and saw that Saint Markus was calling him. So wasting no time he quickly picks up the phone. This instantly made him very shocked because why suddenly Saint Markus called him? He wanted to know that and because of that, he quickly picked up the phone.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Hello, Sam I wanted to tell you some important news so listen carefully. I think like everyone you also wanted to know the reason behind this incident and also wanted to know why you previously feel those monsters releasing the same aura as those ghost monsters. "


    " So listen carefully. The mastermind of all of this was the elder of the dark association. His name is Simon. He with 5 more Warriors from the dark association nted all of this but he was the mastermind. But fortunately because of Mira we were able to capture all of them. It was very good news for everyone. Also we already interrogate all those 5 Warriors and the elder of the dark association. With that we get to know everything that the dark association nned previously."


    With that Saint Markus begins to exin everything to Sam while Sam listens to him very seriously. Right now if you are wondering why Saint Markus only informed him, then it was because he was the warrior who discovered that previously, and it was natural that he got information about that from the warrior association.


    Sometimeter,


    "Also those monsters wouldn''t have attack us but somewhere the Simon able to found a device that could use the dark spiritual energy and that dark spiritual energy invaded the brain of those monsters and control them. At this time the dark spiritual energy give them themand and to attack the city. Because of this, those monsters aggressively attacking the cities. Also not only that we also found out that dark spiritual energy could mutated those monsters and make them more powerful. It also increase the recovery factor of many monster, also make monster powerful, etc."


    " Also just sometime ago we already capture many people from the dark association that went to the Dungeons at this time. Fortunately we take quick action because if we did not do that then those Warriors from the dark association have the motive to mutated those monster in the Dungeons so that the monster from the Dungeon also break out. Also not only that we also prevent Simon from using the blood summoning technique."


    At this time, Markus was exining all of this to him. After sometimeter he finally finish exining everything and then he also told some that most likely once again they will get attack by the monsters but that will best time. Even though they catch many of the dark association Warriors but they are was some Warriors who still did not got by the warrior association and most likely day will do that. Because Simon already give them the instruction previously that if they got captured by the warrior association then those were here will be take over this and use the full power of the device.


    ______________To be continued_____________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 311 311 - Incoming Danger

    At first when Sam heard that the saints caught the masterminds behind this incident he became happy because he thought that he did not have to face most monsters but then when he heard thest sentence of Saint Markus, he instantly became worried about that. Because Saint Markus told him that the elder already gave all of his subordinates the instruction that if he somehow gets captured by the warrior association, then they will use the device in its full power.


    It really makes him worry because he doesn''t know what will happen if the dark association Warriors use that device in its full power. Like the Saint told him that that device uses the dark spiritual energy to take control over the mind of those monsters and give them themand to attack the human cities. With that you can imagine how dangerous those devices were. He was also very curious to know from where the dark association got this type of weird device because it wasn''t their first time to use this type of weird device. Even asked Saint Markus about this but he did not tell him anything about this. Actually it was normal for Markus not to tell him anything because right now the warrior association did not want to tell anyone about this. If this information somehow got spread by the warrior association, then you can spray the fear among those normal peoples. More than that, many people will get to know about the other world and this will make the situation more dangerous.


    All Saints already fight many times with those people in other world''s people to send them back to their world and to protect their humanity. And because of this, they did not want anyone to know about this matter. Because of this they did not want to tell anyone about this.


    Sam sighs in relief and right now he is going back toward his base. Like Saint Markus tol him, most likely those people from the dark association will use the device for ast attack and this can be dangerous for everyone. So he wanted to go back to his base and prepare to face thatst attack. Right now he wasn''t sure if thest attack will affect those S-grade monsters or not but he needed to prepare for that. Because of this he quickly went back toward his base. Actually not only him but Saint Markus already informed every Warriors who right now was in the danger zone to go back toward their base. Right now everyone gets to prepare to face thest attack and because of this everyone is going back to their base.


    At this time, Sam already informs Tony and the others and also tells them to inform the scout team toe back. Right now they did not want the scout team to stay in the danger zone because this will be dangerous to stay in the danger zone. Most likely those Warriors from the dark association already started their work and because of this Sam also felt ufortable in his heart. It was like his instincts were telling him that something dangerous was about to happen.


    _______________


    While Sam was going back toward his base, Markus already informed every Warriors and those Warriors who were in the danger zone to fall back to their base. Everyone right now should prepare for thest attack and it is very dangerous for everyone because most likely those Warriors from the dark association who still did not get caught by the warrior association will use their everything in this attack. Fiona, Gloria, Alena, Hina, Victor, Maria and the other Warriors who are fighting monsters in the danger zone also starteding back toward their base. Everyone got information from the Warrior association about the dark association and their motive. Actually at this time Markus already knows that most likely sups from the dark association present in the Warrior association and they present between those students but he did not tell anything about that.


    Right now nobody knows what his n was. And he also did not want to share his n with anyone other than his teammates. Actually while, Mira, Vena and others were also preparing for the final attack that was done by those dark association Warriors. After that they were nning to visit the headquarters of The Dark association that was in the Eden blue. Even though it was very tough for them to know about the other world where the real headquarter of The Dark association was present, they could still minimize the casualties after destroying the headquarters of The Dark association that was present in the Eden blue. Not only that, they also nned to capture all those four elders that were present in the Eden blue. Also one more thing that he got to know from the elder of the dark association. The leader of the dark association most likely was a S-grade warrior. Actually he never showed his power in front of anyone but everyone or you can say every elder unable to fight with him and most likely he was a S-grade warrior.


    ___________


    "Tick¡­ tock¡­ tick¡­ tock," right now everyone was waiting for the monster''s to appear. Their base had already been attacked by monsters previously, but all those monsters were medium grade monsters and they easily handled them. Because of this, they were waiting for those high grade monster''s to appear. At this time Sam also already came back to his city and he was now with his friends. Right now they are focusing on the outside of Lais city. They already ced the life detection device so that they could easily know about the monster if they came toward Lais city.<novelnext></novelnext>


    8 hourster,


    Right now if you look at the surroundings then you can only see darkness and in the darkness because of the moonlight you will be able to see the surrounding area. Well you guess it right everyone was waiting for those monsters for 8 hours and still did not see any monstering at them. It is already night time and they don''t know if those monsters will attack them or not but they did not let down their guard.


    Sam looked toward the moon and then activated his technique - The power of the moon. Before upgrading his system he upgraded this technique to D-grade. so you can say that it really became a powerful technique. This will increase his overall power and that will be very good for him in this situation.


    He was eating something but suddenly he felt a massive energy fluctuationing from the distance. Instantly all the life detecting devices begin to vibrate and they give them the signal that someone wasing toward the city. This makes everyone very alert and they stop doing their work and instantly be very serious. Not only Lais city, every other border City also felt this and every Warrior became very serious right now.


    You can easily tell that some powerful monster is alsoing toward them because of the energy fluctuation. Also as you know that Sam was very sensitive to those energy fluctuations and without he could tell that a monster whose power was beyond A-grade, was alsoing toward them. This instantly made him anxious but he did not lose his calm. He instantly informs his friends and those other Warriors. After hearing the news everyone became very scared. Who could expect that S-grade monsters also wille to the city. Even though they previously faced many monsters, they never faced something like this and this really made them very scared. But then they quickly stabilize themselves because they know that it wasn''t time to be scared. They need it to protect the city and also to stop those monsters.


    Tony and the others were also very scared right now because they never expected that someday they would face S-grade monsters. But it wasn''t time to be scared and at this time they looked at Sam and saw how serious he was. Looking at his face they once again came back to their senses. Right now the only thing they can do is to fight those monsters without caring about their life. At this time those Warriors also did not waste anymore time and also from the warrior association about this. The warrior association also informs them that the Saints were on their way so they just need to hold on for sometime. This instantly relieved some Warriors and they once again got the fighting power back. At any rate they needed to stop those monsters so that the Saints came and killed them.


    At this time every spiritual Warriors and the archers got into the position and started to prepare their strongest attack for those monsters. This time Sam also decided to use his full spiritual energy and make a mega fireball that contains all of his spiritual energy. This wasn''t enough power to kill those A-grade monsters or those S-grade monsters. But it is enough for him to injure those other monsters.


    ________To be continued___________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 312 312 - Monsters Attack

    Vicious Wolves, goblins, poisonous bats, poisonous snakes, Kobolds, Golems etc. These were the monsters that wereing toward Lais city. At this time every Warrior was looking toward those monsters. From low grade to high grade, every monster was going toward the city. Right now the number of those monsters arerger than before. Most likelypared to before the dark association, Warriors use the full power this time and because of this the number of the monster also increases.


    Right now nobody can tell the exact number of those monsters but they can estimate that there are at least 5000 monsters. Still, it was just an estimated number and they did not know the exact number. But still this really made all those Warriors gulped down. There were 500 Warriors present in Lais city. So, 500 vs 5000, just after thinking that many Warriors already became scared. A few moments ago every Warriors was full with energy to fight with the monsters but right now many of those Warriors begin to panic. All of those Warriors started to feel that they were hopeless and they wouldn''t be able to win this fight.


    Many of those Warriors already started to think to escape from there. But suddenly at this time someone already releases an attack toward those monsters. That instantly started all those Warriors. Right now everyone can see a giant purple fireball going toward those monsters. Instantly everyone looks toward the person who shoots his attack. Only then everyone said that it was Sam who shot his attack toward those monsters. Even after looking at the number of those monsters he did not feel any fear and right now he was calmly recovering his spiritual energy to attack once again. This instantly woke up The spiritual Warriors who were beside him. Jeni, Elena and Saara were also panicking sometime ago, but they also came back to their senses. Everyone looks towards Sam.


    Sam at this time didn''t look toward them but he could tell that everyone was looking toward him.


    "Even if I did not have the chance to win against this many Warriors, I still wanted to fight with those monsters. I will kill as many monsters as I can. I will fight monsters alone even if nobody wants to fight them. I will fight them until I did not die. I don''t want to be called a coward who runs from the battlefield after looking at the number of monsters. I promise that even if I die, I will at least kill 10 monsters before that." Sam at this time only said this thing loudly.


    Every Warriors who are looking at him right now once again feeling the will power to fight those monsters once again. His speech really works and those Warriors once again feel the power to fight against those monsters. Even if they die on this battlefield, they still won''t run away from this battlefield.


    "Boom!" Instantly a huge explosion appeared and the surrounding area fell with the purple light. It all happens because of the purple mega fireball. As you can guess that Sam already could use the spirit technique while using his spell. So he uses that to upgrade the fireball. Not only that he also uses his 99% spiritual energy in that attack and because of this that created a big explosion. Not long after that explosion a big wave was created by that.


    At this time If you look at Sam then you can see that he was panting heavily. Not only that he was feeling headache because he uses almost 99% of his spiritual energy. Because of this, he quickly took the spiritual recovery potion and activated the energy recovery technique. The more quickly you will recover his energy the more quickly he will be able to attack once again. But even at this time you can see the serious look on his face. Even for a second he did not shift his focus from those monsters. He also wanted to know how much damage he was able to do with his power.


    Instantly at this time you can hear many Roarsing from the distance. Some of those are painful roars and some of them are angry roars. He doesn''t know how much damage he did with his attack but right now he can see many monsters falling down from the sky because of the impact. Well, even if he won''t be able to do that much damage to those high grade monsters but he could at least kill those medium grade monsters.


    At this time, those other spiritual Warriors and those archers also did not waste any more time and quickly attacked those monsters. They also wanted to kill as many monsters as they could. They also release all those attacks with their full power. One by one you can see that those powerful attacks were going toward these monsters.


    Once again those attacks created much destruction and because of that, many explosions appeared and also many air waves created by that. But not long after that you can also hear the monster''s roar.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter,<novelnext></novelnext>


    ? At this time those spiritual Warriors were recovering their spiritual energy while on the other hand those archers were continuously attacking those monsters. But even though they needed some time to recover their energy. Also because of the huge smokeyer they are also unable to see anything clearly. And because of this they also needed to wait for that smokeyer to vanish.


    At this time those other fighters were ready at the frontline. The spiritual Warriors and archers were attacking those monsters from a distance and right now it was that time to attack those monsters from the front line. Not long after those attacks they could already hear many footstepsing toward them from that smokeyer. Sometimeter they can see that one by one many monsters areing out from that smokeyer. You can also see that many of them already were very injured but even in that condition they wereing toward those Warriors. Fortunately, those S-grade monsters didn''t attack this time or it could be over for those Warriors. Alexa, Tony, and those other Warriors were already ready and they also started running toward those monsters. Instantly a sh between those monsters and those Warriors happened.


    __________________


    Sam already contacted the warrior association and told them to send reinforcement because he can feel 2 S-grade monsters. Right now those two monsters were looking at the fight from a distance. He still doesn''t know why he didn''t join the fight. Most likely those monsters observing those Warriors or those monsters thinking that the Warriors were weak, who did not have the capability to fight them.


    Sam at this time already recovered his 80% spiritual energy and because of this he already brought out his bow and arrows. Instantly he began to shoot his Arrow toward those monsters. He was mostly focusing on those flying monsters. One by one he was shooting his spirit arrows towards monsters. Yes you can guess that he already activated his energy mode while still using his recovery technique. Even though this gave pressure to his body when he used multiple techniques at the same time but right now he did not have any choice. He was right now using the spiritual vision technique, archery technique, energy mode and Energy recovery technique. With that you can tell that he was feeling much pressure but with that he was at least able to continuously attack those monsters. Fortunately beforeing to this fighting ground he already bought many potions.


    _____________________


    Vena is already on her way toward Lais city. Mira and the others went toward different cities. She already got the information that two S-grade monsters and many other high grade monsters appeared in Lais city. Well fortunately she wasn''t going there alone she already called many other Warriors and everyone of them going toward the city.


    _________________


    Alexa, Tony, Kenny, Tina and Kira already continuously swing their sword at those monsters and kill them. All this time they were facing D-grade monsters. Because of this they were able to kill them but still it was that easy. Because handling those peak grade monsters and those intermediate grade monsters was really difficult. Fortunately they weren''t alone; many Warriors were present there. Together every one of them fights those monsters and because of this they are able to kill those monsters. You have to say that in this battlefield all of them were supporting each other. This is the only thing they can do to fight those monsters. Nobody will be able to fight those monsters on their own.


    Currently those A-grade Warriors are attacking those powerful monsters. They were handling those powerful monsters that those other Warriors won''t be able to handle. Right now they were the support pir of those Warriors. Only they could fight those powerful monsters while those other Warriors killed those other monsters.


    _________To be continued__________

 Chapter 313 313 - Serious Situation

    Those two S-grade monsters still hadn''t made their move, but this made every Warrior worry about them. Nobody will be able to kill us monsters and this is the main thing to worry about. Even those peak A-grade warriors won''t be able to kill them even if they fight with those S-grade monsters. They could only fight with them for sometime.


    Right now, those A-grade Warriors were fighting with those A-grade monsters. While those B-grade warriors were handling those B-grade monsters. Only those D-grade warriors were in charge of handling those lower grade and medium grade monsters. This is the fighting strategy themander of the military told them and this was actually a good status because with that those high grade Warriors could only focus on those high grade monsters.


    ________________


    Currently, Sam already came down from his ce and he was fighting in the front line. Compared to fighting from a distance, he prefers to fight those monsters in closebat. Right now, he was using his energy mode mobile using his fast cut technique. As you know how deadly thisbo technique was. With that he is easily able to kill those early grade and intermediate D-grade monsters. He was using his full speed to kill those monsters and because of this he could easily kill those monsters and at the same time he didn''t have any chance to react.


    Sam wasn''t alone. Other Warriors were also fighting alongside him. But still it really surprised those other Warriors because they could see how easily he was able to kill those monsters. Tony and the others weren''t also falling behind. They were fighting those early D-grade monsters and those E and F grade monsters.


    Sometimeter,


    You can already see many warriors already injured. They also didn''t get the time to recover. Right now, the only thing they can do is recover their health and energy while they fight those monsters. Unfortunately nobody has unlimited potions. This was also a very big thing to worry about. But fortunately because of those light element Warriors those injured Warriors could recover from there injury quickly without using potions. It was decided that in this situation even though they could attack those monsters, it would be good if they only focused on healing the injured Warriors. With that those other Warriors will give them their potions and with that those light element users could recover their spiritual energy quickly. Elena uses her power to recover those injured Warriors. Sam, Tony, Alexa and the others already gave some of their spiritual energy recovery potions to Elena. She will be incharge of recovering them. Elena also did not feel disappointed because they asked her to heal them. In this situation she also knew this was a very good strategy. In this matter all the Warriors only needed to worry about their spiritual recovery potions. Right now everyone is hoping that the reinforcement quickly arrives so that their burden will decrease. They also ask the warrior association to send them the energy recovery potions and the health recovery portions.


    At this time, in front of Sam was standing 5 peak D-grade monsters. But you cannot see any fear in his eyes. Use the concealment technique and vanish from his ce. This instantly confused all those 5 monsters but in the next second they saw that one of them got split into two parts. Instantly all those 5 monsters became very alert because everything happened so quickly that they didn''t react. But Sam did not give them any chance to observe their surroundings or attack any other warriors. He once again attacked another monster and easily cut that monster.


    At this time the remaining 3 monsters instantly became very angry because some unknown enemy that they weren''t able to see attacked them and already killed their two subordinates. They instantly let out an angry roar. But in the next second one second one of them got killed. And not long after that Sam already killed those remaining two monsters.


    After killing all those 5 monsters Sam became visible and right now you can see that he was sweating. Using his energy mode while using his stealth technique was really putting pressure on his body. Not only that because of him using his spiritual energy continuously, he was unable to maintain the stealth mode that long. He already gulped down an Energy recovery potion. Not only that he also used his Energy recovery technique so that he could recover his spiritual energy quickly. But even with that he could see the situation wasn''t good for the Warriors. Even though the night time his status increases, it wasn''t enough to deal with those monsters. At this time he was thinking that he should activate his berserk technique so that he could deal with these low grade and medium grade monsters quickly. But even with that he wasn''t sure if they would be able to win this fight or not.


    Sam decided that you will activate that technique when the reinforcement will arrive. Right now using that technique he did not want to increase the burden to his friends. After recovering his energy he once again advanced word those monsters.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ____________________


    Vena and those other Warriors already went toward the teleportation circle. This wasn''t time to waste and because of this they quickly needed to arrive in Lais city. It was one of the major border cities and they already got the report that two S-grade monsters were in that city. But not only in the Lais city but in many other major border cities they also got this report. Because of this every Saints were also busy. Aftering to the teleportation circle you can see that there were at least 1500 warriors. These were the Warriors who came back from those small border cities that did not get attacked in the situation because right now every monster was focusing on the major border cities.


    Also at this time suddenly good news came to the warrior association. That was the defense system already being repaired and because of this those small border cities already activated their defense system. Right now the condition of those major cities were very dangerous and because of this the defense system also got destroyed by these monsters. Right now the only thing they could do was to kill those monsters. Only then were they able to install New defense systems in those major border cities. Nobody knows why those monsters are targeting those major border cities but you can still guess those major cities were the defense line and destroying them means destroying the defense line. The small border cities aren''t that important at this moment.


    Vena quickly activated the teleportation device and instantly everyone present in the teleportation circle got covered by white light and they vanished from that ce.


    ________________


    At this moment the conditions of the Lais city were very intense because many of the Warriors already died by those monsters. Even those other Warriors feel sad for those Warriors but they did not have the time to waste. Right now the situation was do or die. Some Warriors lost their friends, their wife, husband, family members, etc. But even with that they did not stop fighting the monsters. Those Warriors only think about Revenge from those monsters. But still with that everyone can see that their situation was and that good.


    Sam at this moment already activates his berserker mode. Right now he did not have the time to think about those reinforcement because the situation wasn''t good for any of them. Tony, Alexa and his other friends already got seriously injured by those monsters and he needed to prevent them from dying in this battle. Because of this he already activated that technique and right now he was busy killing those. You have to say that right now he was the only person who was killing those medium grade and lower grade monsters. He wanted to give those other Warriors time to recover from their injuries. Right now everyone can feel his determination and because of this right now they are busy recovering their health and energy. They can see that he was already seriously injured but still he is fighting those monsters single handedly. They know that you wanted to give them the time to recover from their injuries.


    Tony, Alexa and others were very anxious about Sam''s condition. Previously they got seriously injured by those monsters and just about to lose their life but it was some who suddenly activated this technique and saved them from dying. Everyone of them was very familiar with this technique because previously he used this technique to save them. It was a very good technique that increased the power of the Warriors but at the same time it was a very dangerous technique that will give him a very bad side effect. Because of this they were very anxious about Sam. They quickly wanted to recover from their injuries and wanted to apany him but the situation wasn''t that good to help him. Everyone can see how powerful he became right now. He single handedly killed those D-grade, E-grade and their F-grade monsters.


    _________To be continued________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 314 314 - Critical Condition

    When Vena finally arrived in Lais city, she saw that the situation of those Warriors wasn''t that good. She can see those injured Warriors without caring about the life fighting those monsters. At this time she quickly tries to find her granddaughter in those Warriors. She finally noticed Jeni. But when she looked at her she saw how seriously injured she was right now. Fortunately, Elena was healing her and her friends. And she can see that those injuries begin to recover slowly. At this time she also notices Tony, Alexa and the others but suddenly she begins to feel ufortable. Wasting no time she quickly went toward her granddaughter. Only aftering toward her granddaughter does she notice that every Warrior present there looks straight. She also looked toward that and finally she understood why she was feeling ufortable.


    In front of her she saw Sam who single handedly fought with those low-grade and medium grade monsters. She can also see how many monsters he had killed because that ce was full of dead bodies of those monsters. And she also noticed that almost all those medium grade and low grade monsters were killed by him. Wasting no time she was about to make her move but instantly something unexpected happened. Suddenly out of nowhere a thunderbolt appeared and hit Sam. Instantly everyone present in that ce here A painful roar that came out from Sam''s mouth. Tony, Jeni, Alexa, Elena and the others also got startled by all of this. They instantly became anxious and were about to run towards. Suddenly out of nowhere a thunderbolt hit Sam, and by hearing his voice they can tell he was in pain.


    But before anyone could make their move, Vena already came to that ce and she instantly took Sam away from that ce. Only then did those other Warriors notice that the reinforcement had already arrived and Saint Vena also already arrived in that ce. Those other Warriors who came with Vena, already began to fight with those monsters. Not only them, some of them also begin to give those potions to those warriors.


    But currently Tony and the others did not focus on that. They were now worriedly looking toward Saint Vena who took Sam from that ce and instantly appeared in front of them. Only then will they see the condition of Sam. Right now his body is full of deep injuries. His blood wasing out from those injuries and not only that because of the previous thunderbolt the right side of his body was already burned by that. Jeni, Elena, Saara and Kira instantly begin to cry. Tony was looking at him but if you look at him then you can see that his eyes were full of tears. Everyone of them has a helpless look after looking at the condition of Sam. He was the person who always protected them from danger. Even in the situation he activated that dangerous technique to give them the chance to recover from their injuries but in the end he is suddenly hit by that powerful thunderbolt and his condition became like this. They tried to wake him up but Sam did not respond.


    "Right now he is in a very critical condition. Elena quickly uses your healing Ray at full power. In any condition we need to stabilize his condition so that we can save his life." Vena told that to Elena. Elena, even though she was crying, she did not waste anymore time and quickly used all of her power to use the healing ray.


    "You take care of him, I will take care of those monsters," but the situation wasn''t good and Vena needed to take care of those monsters. She also already knew how sad her granddaughter was right now. You can say that Sam was her first friend and right now in front of her she could be her friend in this condition so it was natural for her to be hurt by that. Instantly after thinking about Sam''s condition an anger begins to rise in her. Instantly she used a full part to kill all those low-grade and medium grade monsters.


    At this time not only Vena, but Tony and the others were feeling helpless and angry at themselves. Because they were weak Sam needed to risk his life and because of these they began to be angry. They became too angry at themselves and also angry at those monsters.


    Right now, not only Elena, those other light element users also came toward them and they began to heal Sam. Everyone can see how the condition is right now. At any rate they need to stabilize his condition. Everyone of them are very anxious about Sam right now because he is now in a critical condition. Tony and the others are looking at the situation and feeling very helpless right now. In this situation they are unable to do anything other than praying for Sam. Previously Sam already took care of at least 90% of those monsters and Vena killed those remaining 10% monsters. So you can say that those D-grade warriors didn''t have the opponent to fight right now and because of this everyone of them were praying for Sam.


    ___________________


    Vena, after killing those low grade and medium grade monsters, also helps those high grade warriors. But while helping them she gets attacked by those S-grade monsters many times but she avoided those attacks. Because of the reinforcement the situation was not stable and those Warriors will be able to handle those remaining monsters. Because of this, she did not have to worry about them and with that she could finally focus on those S-grade monsters.


    She left that ce and came to that ce where she was not facing those two S-grade monsters. Both of those monsters are looking at her but if you look at their expression then you can say that both of them still did not take her seriously. For them those humans wear and who won be able topete with them. Because of this arrogance they also did not participate in those fights. Even though the dark spiritual energy is able to take control over their mind, they already release that dark spiritual energy from their body and right now they are not in control. So in this situation if you are thinking why they were attacking the most probably it was because they were thinking this was interesting.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ___________________


    Hina and Victor were in another border city, while Alena, Aria and Maria were in different cities. Gloria and Fiona are also in different cities. So you can say that all of them were in different cities while fighting with those monsters. But a few minutes ago Hina, Alena, and Gloria suddenly feel very ufortable while fighting with these monsters. Instantly that makes them very alert because they don''t know what is happening but while fighting those monsters they suddenly feel that. But those monsters did not give them the time to think about it. So they once again focus on fighting. Already Saints have arrived in their ces and are fighting with those S-grade monsters. At this time those other Warriors were fighting those high grade monsters without worrying about those S-grade monsters. But still that ufortable feeling did not go out from their heart and because of this, they started to think that something must happen to someone.


    _________________


    1 hourter,


    Elena and the others are finally able to stabilize the condition of Sam. They were able to close those wounds so that right now he wasn''t bleeding but even that he already lost much blood and because of this right now he was looking very pale. But even though they are able to stabilize his condition, they are unable to heal that burn ce.


    Fortunately the medical team already started doing their work at this time. Elena and the others already stabilized his condition and because of this he wasn''t in critical condition right now. Because of this the medical team began to take care of him. Right now they need to give him blood so that he will feel better. Not only that, they need to take care of that burn ce right now.


    Tony and the others did not make any sound. Right now they just worriedly looked at Sam while he was being taken care of by those medical teams. They were now giving him blood and they were also clearing that burn ce. Tony and the others were helplessly looking at the situation. Even though their friend risked his life to save them, they are unable to do anything in this situation that makes them very angry.


    ''This isn''t the time to cry. Even if we try we are unable to do anything.'' this is the only thing right now they were thinking about. They know that even if they cry right now they won''t be able to do anything. Because of this they already stopped crying. Right now the only thing they are thinking about is to get stronger so that they do not need to face this kind of situation a third time.


    Right now on the other hand those high grade monsters are already being killed by those Warriors. After the reinforcement arrived the fight became very easy and because of this those Warriors were able to kill those monsters easily. It has been 1 hour but it will still need some time to kill all those monsters. But at this time everyone present in that ce suddenly felt a powerful presence from a distance. They instantly saw the sky became dark. Everyone of them was familiar with that.


    ____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 315 315 - Killing S-Grade Monsters

    Right now Vena was covered by that ck fire. This was her strongest attack. She already increases her fire element and because of this, the fire turned ck. Right now both of her hands were covered in that ck fire. In front of her, you can see two S-grade monsters staring. One of them was a Wolf Emperor, and the other one a snake emperor. Both of them now angrily looks at her. Previously they thought they could easily destroy this enemy but they underestimated her and because of this you can see that both of them received injuries for her. As you know, all the monsters have a good healing factor and because of this, they have already started to recover from those injuries.


    "How dare an ant like you try to injure us." At this time the wolf emperor said that to her. Well, actually when a monster became an S-grade monster, they were able to talk in humannguage. So this wasn''t umon and because of this none of the warriors got surprised after hearing The monster was able to talk. But after hearing that Vena did not respond she just increased the power. Right now both of the monste rs, after looking at the dark me that covered both of Vena''s hands, be very solemn. They know how dangerous that ck me was and because of this they will be careful while attacking her.


    Vena did not waste any more time and instantly vanished from her ce. She appears in front of that wolf emperor. But you can say that those two monsters also weren''t slow. They also reacted quickly and the moment she appeared in front of that wolf Emperor, that snake Emperor instantly attacked her with his tail. But the moment that tell me to attack her, it passed through her body. It feels like she wasn''t even present there. But it wasn''t right because she already moved away from that ce and that was just her reflection. But both of the monsters did not get confused about that and they already turned toward the direction where Vena appeared. She is right now floating in front of that snake and about to punch him.


    At this time the wolf Emperor reacted quickly and instantly a red thunderbolt went toward Vena. Not only that, but the snake Emperor was also already trying to move away from his body so that he did not receive any attack. But Vena wasn''t slow; she alreadynded the punch to the snake Emperor and instantly got away from that ce and because of this she did not receive any attack. But it didn''t stop because the next moment you can see that a big punch created by a dark me went toward that wolf. But that would already react and get away from that ce. But that does not mean he did not receive an attack because right now you can see that one of his legs got attacked by that. Before anything you should know that even though Vena was a spiritual Warrior but that does not mean she was weak at closebat.


    Right now that snake Emperor has a burning ce in his body. The most interesting thing was that that ce did not heal and you can see that the fire was still burning in that ce. But at this time the snake emperor Roared in pain and with his tail he cut that ce. He cut the whole area with his tail and after that, he finally began to heal in the area. Finally, new cells began to reappear in that area.


    Right now the snake Emperor angrily looks at Vena. In the next moment, you can say that a green gas begins to appear in that area. Not only green gas but purple gas also appear in that area. Instantly the whole area was covered by that green and purple gas.


    Vena already got away from that ce the moment she noticed the snake Emperor finally attacked. She already knew how dangerous that attack was and this could easily have killed her. Well, not only her but the wolf Emperor also got away from that ce because he also knew how dangerous that attack was. But that does not mean he won''t attack Vena. Attacker from a distance and instantly many red lighting bolts starteding at her.


    Right now after looking at those attacksing toward her, Vena extended her hand and a ck me began toe out from that. She attacked thatyer of green and purple gas with that ck me, but that didn''t stop there because she also created a wall above her head that will protect her from those red lightning bolts. At this time you can easily see the ck me burning away thatyer of gas. The ck me was the most dangerous attack of fire control and this could burn anything.


    The snake emperor was using his full power at the same time the wolf Emperor noticed that his attack was unable to hit Vena. He stops attacking her and instantly moves away from that ce. A few secondster, he already came behind Vena. He was about to bite her but Vena already noticed him and because of this, instantly the whole area started to burn from that. She can set fire a kilometer away from him. Because of this, she was able to burn the Wolf Emperor. But the wolf Emperor reacted quickly and jumped away from that ce. At this time the snake emperor was 2 km away from her and because of this, she was unable to burn him.<novelnext></novelnext>


    But the next second a huge Tiger appeared and started going toward that snake. Vena created the tiger with her me element. At this time the snake emperor was busy attacking Vena and because of this, she was unable to react that quickly. But at this time the huge Tiger already bites that snake Emperor and instantly the whole body of that snake Emperor begins to burn. Not only that because of the bite the ck me also began to burn the snake from the inside.


    "Hiss!!!!" Instantly that snake Emperor began to release that voice in pain. Right now his whole body was in ck mes and he couldn''t do anything. From inside and outside he was burning.


    At this time you should not forget about that wolf Emperor because he already attacked. Right now the whole sky is covered by a big ck cloud. And in the next second a red thunderbolt begins to fall from that cloud. All those thunderbolts were going toward Vena.


    But Vena wasn''t slow. Right now she covered herself with a ck me barrier. And not only that, she began to fly in the sky. Not long after that she already came close to that ck cloud and instantly used her ck me to burn away that ck cloud. But she did not stop there and after burning away the whole ck cloud, all those ck mes suddenly turned into Arrows. Right now 1000 of the arrows can see in the sky.


    All those Warriors and the emperor also see that. Just looking at those 1000 arrows you will feel the danger thates from those arrows. Most likely the wolf Emperor also felt that and because of this he wanted to run away from that ce using his full speed. But Vena did not give him any chance to escape and instantly released all those Arrows toward that Wolf Emperor.


    Thousands of arrows begin to fall from the sky. The wolf Emperor is now trying his hardest to escape from those but he cannot get away from those thousand Arrows. One after another he got hit by those arrows. Instantly, he let out a painful roar. His whole body was not covered in that ck me and not only that but he was also burning from the inside. At this time the snake Emperor who was trying his base to save himself also got attacked by those arrows. Not only that but those remaining monsters also get attacked by those Arrows. Instantly every monster began to burn. Those A-grade and other high-grade monsters did not even get the chance to struggle and they turned into Ash. Both of the S-grade monsters are struggling and trying to save themselves but everything is pointless. 15 minutester right now you can see that both of those monsters'' bodies, turned into Ash. In the next moment, everybody present on that battlefield begins to Roar in excitement. All of them begin to shout in excitement.


    "Sigh," Vena also sighs in relief after killing those remaining monsters. Finally, the fight was finished and those Warriors could rest. Also in this intense battle, she uses 80% of her spiritual energy. So she also needed to recover her full energy and because of this she came down to the ground and started walking toward her granddaughter.


    ______________To be continued___________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 316 316 - Current Situation

    Gloria and Fiona were fighting in Zen city. As you know, it was one of the border cities and it is near Ion city. Also, this is a major border city and is very close to the central city. Because of this from the start, many Warriors were present here. Also, the number of those high-grade Warriors was highpared to those other cities. At any cost, they will defend that city. As you know, the central city is the capital of human civilization and because of this, at any cost, everyone wants to defend their capital.


    Most likely because it is very close to the capital city the number of monsters is also very highpared to those other cities. You can say at least 10000 monsters were attacking this city. Not only that, but even 2 S-grade monsters were also with those other monsters. But fortunately, Saint Markus fought those two monsters and because of this those other Warriors were able to focus on those other monsters.


    Fiona and Gloria are already focusing on those C-grade monsters. Before anything you should know that Gloria is already able to break through to intermediate C-grade. So she was handling those intermediate C-grade monsters whereas Fiona was fighting those early C-grade monsters. At this time because they are teammates unable to break through to C-grade, they were handling those medium-grade and low-grade monsters. Not only them but many other college students were also present in that city and everyone was using their 100% to fight those monsters.


    It wasn''t that no one died. They already lost many Warriors while fighting those monsters but it did not stop anyone from fighting those monsters because right now it wasn''t the time to feel sad.


    In front of Fiona, a huge rock golem was about to attack her. But she also wasn''t slow instantly she also punched that monster. She already uses the spirit technique and because of this her punch also glows in a deep blue color. Instantly that punchpletely crushed that rock golem. But she did not stop there and began to punch those other rock golems. While attacking those Rock golems she also got attacked by those rock golems. Fortunately, before those attacks hit her she already activated the body defense technique while using the spirit technique and this instantly increased her body defense. Even though she did not get injured that much, the impact of that once really sent her backward.


    After learning on the ground Fiona quickly stabilizes herself. She looked toward those Golems and then split the blood from her mouth. Westing no time she once again went toward those Golems.


    At this time while Fiona was fighting those golems, Gloria was facing wind eagle monsters. This monster has the ability to control the wind because of itsrge wings. They could create an air de with their wings. Not only that, but their speed is also very fast. Gloria was facing those bird monsters.


    Right now around Gloria, you can already see many bird monsters that have already turned into ice statues. But still, you can see in front of her many monsters looking at her with angry looks. Once again they are about to attack her with theirrge wings. But Gloria is already faster than them because instantly dark clouds appear above those birds and snow begins to fall from those clouds. Those birds already know how dangerous the snow is and because of this, they attack those clouds with theirrge wings. They begin to send air attacks toward those dark clouds. But even in that situation many of those bird monsters already got hit by the snow and that instantly turned them into ice sculptures. But that instantly did not kill them. The moment they are about to fill into the ground suddenly ice Spears appear and pierce through those birds'' statues. It instantly killed all those birds.


    Gloria quickly drinks an energy recovery potion, then tiredly looks at those monsters. In front of her, you can see many monsters. She needed to kill many more monsters and because of this, she cannot rest. Fortunately, she wasn''t alone; those other Warriors were also attacking those monsters and it gave her some time to recover her full spiritual energy. But at this time she doesn''t know why but she was feeling that something happened to someone. She doesn''t know what happened but she just hopes that nothing happened to her family and friends. She quickly clears her mind and begins to focus on her recovery.


    At this time every warrior suddenly heard a roar. Even those monsters also stop fighting and look in that direction. Those monsters and those Warriors saw that one of the S-grade monsters already died and the other one was very seriously injured. Instantly all those monsters begin to Roar in anger and they once again attack those Warriors. The dark spiritual energy that controls their mind makes them very angry after looking at the scene and because of this all of them angrily attack those Warriors.


    For a moment those Warriors are unable to react but that does not mean that they won''t be able to counterattack. Everyone knows that it was their mistake to ignore those monsters and because of this they once again concentrate on fighting those monsters. Their Saint already killed one of the S-grade monsters and it won''t take him that long to kill the other one. Right now everyone can see that those S-grade monsters weren''t that powerful and something was wrong with those monsters. You can say because of this Markus is able to kill one of the monsters easily and is able to injure the other one.<novelnext></novelnext>


    __________________


    Right now, Alena, Maria, and Aria were also fighting those monsters. Because 3 of them were A-grade warriors, they were fighting those A-grade monsters. They weren''t alone. Right now you can also see the white tiger Academy students present on that battlefield and not only that but even some teachers also present on that battlefield. Everyone is busy fighting those monsters. Everyone was following the same rule that those high grade warriors will take care of those high grade monsters. On the other hand, D-grade warriors will handle those medium and lower-grade monsters. With that everyone can focus on their role and they could quickly finish the fight.


    Saint John and Saint Mira were in this city and they were fighting 4 S-grade monsters. As you know, one Saint wasn''t able to handle that and because of this both of them came to this city. Right now both of the saints and those monsters were busy in an intense fight. Both of the Saints could see that these four S-grade monsters are weakpared to the monsters that they have faced in the Dungeon. Because of this, they have full confidence that they could kill those four monsters.


    Saint Mira attacks one monster with her mind sword while The other monster tries to attack her but she instantly gets away from that ce. That monster who got attacked by the mind sword was now roaring in pain. As you should know that dark energy also attacks those monsters'' minds and because of this the moment that mind sword hits the monster''s brain it instantly seriously damages the monster''s mind. Most likely Mira also notices that and because of this, she quickly vanishes from her ce and instantly appears in front of the second monster. She also attacks that second monster with her mind sword. The second monster also instantly fell down on the ground and began to roar in pain.


    After killing both of the monsters Saint Mira sighed in relief. At first, she wasn''t even able to attack both of those monsters'' minds but most likely after fighting this long those monsters also lose protection from their mind and because of this she is able to attack them. Actually, that dark spiritual energy also works as a shield that protects their mind from any type of mental attack. Quickly turn toward Saint John. But he also already takes care of both of the monsters and he just nodded to her. Finally, both of the saints focus on those other monsters.


    Alena, Maria, and Aria with their subordinates already killed many of those high-grade monsters. While fighting those monsters, they also got injured but they did not care about their injuries. They just quickly wanted to finish the fight and then check the condition of those other Warriors. But in front of them, they can still see many monsters. But suddenly every Warrior saw that both of the saints had already killed those 4 S-grade monsters and they quickly came toward other monsters. Wasting no time both of them started killing those other monsters.


    _________________


    Hina, Victor, the principal of the Royal Academy, and many other Warriors are also present in the border City. Many  college students are also present in that city. Fortunatelypared to those other border cities they did not face that many monsters. But still, the first 3000 monsters and those Warriors were already able to kill 2500 monsters and right now only 500 monsters were left. If you are wondering why no saints were in this city then it was because previously Vena came to this city first and after killing the S-grade monster she quickly left the city and went toward the Lais city.


    ____________To be continued____________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 317 317 - Hospital

    2 hourster, 8:00 a.m.,


    Finally you can say that all Warriors already take care of all those monsters and right now everyone is resting. They were recovering their energy. Alena, Maria, Aria, Gloria, Fiona, Hina, and Victor. Everyone was now resting finally and they were recovering their energy. Compared to them those Saints were that injured or they weren''t that exhausted and because of this, they went toward the dangerous zone. Right now there were some people from the dark association still in the danger zone and the saints wanted to capture all those Warriors from the dark association. All those Warriors were the subordinate of Simon. So you can say that all of them are dangerous because they have that device in their hand that they could once again collect the dark spiritual energy and once again use them to control those monsters.


    While resting everybody gets notified that those other Warriors alsopleted their mission. They also get the news about the casualties that they have. They lost 100 Warriors in this fight and most of the Warriors were seriously injured. You can say that the casualty rate of this year was low, so you can say that every Warriors already improved themselves and with their experience they handled this matter. Well this year also many college students joined the fights and many students already lost their lives. Even though everybody was sad for them, all those students died as a hero and their name will be spread as a hero of humanity. You can say that this is the highest honor given by the warrior association.


    Alena, Gloria, Hina and Victor, all of their mobile phones begin to ring suddenly. They quickly looked at their mobile and saw that it was Tony and the others who were calling them. Just looking at the phone their expressions turn serious. Normally Sam would call them but suddenly why did his friends call them? They don''t know what happened but one thing was for sure that something must happen to Sam. They didn''t want to guess anymore and because of this they quickly picked up the phone.


    Tony, Alexa, Jeni, and Elena called them. They did not waste anymore time and quickly told them toe to the Central hospital in the central city. Right now the condition of Sam was very critical. Even though previously those light element users were able to stabilize his injuries but right now he still did not be conscious and the doctor told his friends that right now Sam was in aa. Because of this Tony and the others decided to inform Gloria and the others.


    Gloria and the others who were listening to their exnation quickly get up from their seats and wasting no time they begin to run. Everyone of them wanted to use the teleportation device in the warrior association and because of these they were going toward the warrior association. Maria, Aria, Fiona, and Gloria''s friends were very surprised by their actions. No one knows why they suddenly begin to run toward the warrior association but everyone of them could guess that something must have happened and because of this they were going toward the warrior association. Because of this Fiona and the others also did not waste anymore time and they quickly went toward Gloria and the others.


    [A/N: They weren''t in the same ce.]


    Fiona and the others did not ask anything to Gloria in the others because they can see the worried look on their faces. So because of this they just silently follow them. Sometimeter, all of them came to the warrior associations and quickly told the Warriors present there to activate the teleportation device. They already told the Warriors to send them to Central hospital. Normally no one could use the teleportation device until they did not get permission from the saints. But those receptionists present in the warrior association suddenly saw that Saint Vena and Saint Markus had already given their permission to them so that they could use the teleportation device.


    _____________


    Right now in the Central hospital, central city,


    Tony and the others were looking at the ICU. Those doctors" checking the condition of Sam and only then were they able to give them the final answer about Sam''s condition. Right now all of them are looking at that ICU. They already inform Gloria and the others. Right now in the central hospital you can see that Tony and the others weren''t alone because those other ssmates that went to the Lais city also present in the central hospital.


    Suddenly, suddenly the space in front of them began to glow. This instantly made everyone very alert. They already bring out their weapons and are ready to attack. But sometimeter they quickly notice that it was Gloria and the others that came out from that white light only then they understand that most likely they use the teleportation device and because of this they appear here like this.<novelnext></novelnext>


    At this time suddenly Aria went toward Alexa not only that Gloria and the others also went to Tony and the others. Tony and others after looking at them did not say anything and just pointed their finger toward the ICU.


    "The doctor did not say anything to us. They previously told us that Sam was in a serious condition. But because of the injuries to his body already taken care of, they just now wait for Sam to gain his consciousness." Tony suddenly exins this to Gloria and the others. After listening to the exnation everyone became very serious and they quickly went to the ICU. Aftering to the ICU they could see that inside a patient was lying down in the bed while the doctor was checking his condition. It was Sam who wasying down in the bed.


    Hina the moment she saw Sam''s condition, she began to cry. Gloria did not start crying but you can see tearsing out from her eyes and if you feel seriously then you can notice that the temperature around her is quickly dropping. Alena also did not start crying but she just looked at Sam with an expressionless face. Nobody could get what she was thinking but while looking at her hand you can say that she was also very anxious about Sam''s condition. Fiona and the others also weren''t in good condition. The moment they heard the exnation from Tony, they also quickly came in front of the ICU and after seeing the condition of Sam they also became very shocked.


    Alena after sometime suddenly came in front of Tony and the others. Right now you can see that Tony and the others have red eyes. They also cried after seeing the condition of Sam. Because of this you can see the red eyes. Alexa, noticed Alena. Alena also noticed the condition of Tony and the others and because of this she did not want to give them any pressure. But right now she wanted to know how Sam became this much injured.


    Alexa after hearing that did not hide anything and she began to tell everything that happened to Lais city. She told how the situation was in Lais city. Every Warriors present in the city tried to fight those monsters but while fighting those monsters, they already used all of their resources and because of this already many Warriors got injured. Alexa and the others also get injured by the monsters. But none of them gave up from the fight and they are still fighting with those monsters. Sometimeter the situation became like this: Alexa and the others used all of their spiritual energy and they did not have any power to protect themselves.


    At this time suddenly something happened and Sam somehow became very powerful. Wasting no time he single handedly began to fight with those lower grade and middle grade monsters. Sam wanted to give those Warriors the time to recover from their injuries and to recover their energy. Alexa said that most likely Sam used the same technique that he used previously in the Dungeon where his strength suddenly increased and he could fight like this. But at this time Alexa and the others were very worried about Sam because they already know that something will happen to Sam after this. Most likely this technique has some kind of side effect.


    So Sam continued to fight like that with those monsters. You can say that he almost killed 90% of those monsters until Saint Vena didn''t appear. But when she appeared suddenly something happened and Sam got attacked by something. Previously everyone thought that he got attacked by those S-grade monsters but sometime ago Saint Vena confirmed that it wasn''t those monsters that attacked him. Because if those S-grade monsters were to attack him then most likely he would be dead at this time. Something attacked him that was weaker than those S-grade monsters. She suspected that most likely the dark association Warriors were present at the ce and he attacked Sam at that time. The power of that attack wasn''t that great but because Sam was already pretty injured and he did not have the strength to protect his body he got affected by that. You can say that the doctor also confirmed that Sam wouldn''t be in aa. Even if he used his dangerous technique that had the side effect, then most likely he would be exhausted and his body would be in much pain. But right now the doctors were removing the dark spiritual energy that was affecting Sam''s mind.


    Alexa exins all of this to Alena. After hearing all of this exnation Alena and the others became very angry. If Sam got injured by the monsters, then probably they won''t be this much angry. But right now the doctor was telling them that it most likely happened by those dark association Warriors. So naturally they will be very angry after hearing that.


    Right now in that hospital you can see that the white tiger Academy''s team and also the Golden Dawn''s team are also present. They also went to Lais city previously. So they came here naturally because of Sam''s condition. But at this time if you look at those bodies carefully then you will notice that one person was smiling after hearing all those exnations from Alexa.


    __________To be continued___________

 Chapter 318 318 - Sam Wakes Up

    1 monthter,


    The monster''s invasion was already over and the warrior association already handled the matter. Also, the destruction caused by those monsters was already handled by the warrior association. They already repair all those things that are damaged by those monsters. Right now those normal people have already returned to their cities. The Saints already told everyone that they already handle those matters and they already capture the mastermind behind all of this. Also in this month the warrior association already destroyed the remaining dark association present in Eden blue. They also capture those other 4 elders of the dark association. Even though those dark association Warriors try to cause destruction but they are unable to fight back against those Saints.


    The Saints were also already interrogating those elders and those Warriors from the dark association. They already get to know a lot of information about the other dimension and the main leader of the dark association. Most likely the leader of the dark association already became an S-grade warrior, but he naturally did not be an S-grade warrior. He got help from that other dimension and because of this, he promised those other dimension people he would help them to take over Eden blue.


    ? You can say that the Saints already collected all those things that the dark association got from the other world. You can say the day even got surprised after getting all that information about those devices that they never saw. Most likely the other dimension was very advancedpared to the Eden blue and because of this, they have this type of advanced device.


    Also, those Warriors who died one month ago while fighting those monsters, get the hero of humanity title. Right now the family of these Warriors did not have to worry about anything, the warrior association will help them in every condition. Not only that if someone of those people has the potential to be a warrior then the warrior association will give them the resources.


    So you can say that already in this one month everything was handled by the warrior association and those Warriors. You should not forget about those Warriors because they were the reason that humanity was still alive. Even though they got injured while fighting those monsters, that still did not stop them from fighting. Fortunately Alena and the other Peak A-grade Warriors using their healing ray,pletely heal all those Warriors. There were many warriors who lost their arms or legs, but right now theypletely recover their arms and legs.


    ________________


    Every college student goes back to their cities. Because of the monster invasion, the prize ceremony also got canceled. 1 month ago the warrior association decided that after they sessfully handle all The other matters they will organize the prize ceremony. One day ago the warrior association decided that 10 dayster they will hold the prize ceremony and because of this they once again invited all those colleges and their teams to the central city.


    Many Warriors were very happy because everything was over but there were some Warriors who weren''t happy. Tony and Sam''s other friends were very worried about him because he still did not gain consciousness. Gloria, Fiona, Alena, Hina, and Victor. These were the people who were very anxious about Sam''s condition. Not only that, the teachers from the Royal Academy were very worried about Sam.


    You can say that every day they will visit the Central hospital to check the condition of Sam. They also visit the central hospital today to check the condition of Sam. Previously the doctor told everyone that because of the dark spiritual energy invaded his mind, he was right now in aa. Because of this, they are very worried about him.


    ________________


    Tony and the others once again came back to the central hospital after finishing their college. When they enter the hospital room they notice that senior Gloria is already present there. They also sit down beside Sam. They started to talk with him and tried to tell him how their day was. Previously the doctor said to everyone that they should try to cheer him up so that he could recover from that. Because of this, they always try to cheer him up.


    Around 7:00 p.m.,


    Tony and the others notice the time. They knew that it was time to go back to their home. Heena and Victor already came to the central hospital and they also told Gloria to go back to home so that she can rest. Everyone nodded and was just able to get up from their seat but suddenly something unexpected happened. Gloria, who was holding Sam''s right hand, suddenly felt something. She suddenly feels that Sam''s hand moves on his own. That made her very startled. Because of this, she began to call his name. Tony and the others who were about to get up from their seats also suddenly got confused after seeing her behavior. But then they saw that she was crying but had a happy smile on her face while she called Sam''s name. Victor and Hina also got confused by their daughter''s sudden behavior.


    Right now everyone was looking at Sam anxiously. But at this time something miraculous happened and they noticed that Sam''s eyes were moving. At this time nobody makes any sound and they silently look at him. Sam slowly opened his eyes. After opening his eyes when Sam saw Gloria and the others he just smile and said with his shaking voice,<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Good evening everyone,"


    Instantly Gloria, Hina, Jeni, Tina, Elena, Kenny, Kira, and Saara, began to cry. When Sam saw them suddenly start crying, he became startled. You don''t know how to handle this situation and because of this he worriedly looks at his father. He saw that his father was also crying but when he looked at him, Victor also looked at him with a smile.


    ___________


    Saint Markus, Saint Vena, Saint Mira, Saint John, and the other saints were discussing something when they suddenly got notified by Alena that Sam woken up from hisa. Right now, she, Aria, and Maria were going toward the hospital. After hearing the news everyone present in the room got very happy. It was natural for them to be happy because Sam was a genius and even though he had only special grade potential, but most likely he would be a B-grade warrior. Not only that Vena already told them how briefly he fought with those low-grade and medium-grade monsters alone on the battlefield. So it was natural for them to be happy after hearing this news.


    Even though everyone wanted to go to the central hospital, they won''t able to go to the Central hospital. Even though they already handle all the destruction created by those monsters, they still have many duties  and because of this, they won''t be able to go to the Central hospital. Vena and Mira have the responsibility to protect the central city and because of this only they will be able to go to the Central hospital. It was decided that after finishing their meeting, both of them go to the Central hospital.


    _______________


    Right now in the Central hospital,


    In the room where Sam was staying in the hospital, you can see that right now Sam was busy eating his food while his mom was ready to serve him more food. Right now only Victor and Hina were present in the hospital. Gloria and the others already went back. Right now Sam was eating his food like there is no tomorrow. Actually, after waking up from his sleep he felt very hungry and because of this he just kept eating. Fortunately, his mom was already prepared for that.


    Sometimeter, when Sam finished eating his food, his mum and dad told him that they wille tomorrow. They also got informed that Saint Mira and Saint Vena wille tomorrow. Alena already came here to meet him. For today nobody wanted to ask him any questions and because of this, they wille tomorrow to ask him some questions.


    After saying goodbye to them Sam justy down on his bed. Right now he was thinking about the experience he got in this one month. For everyone, it was just one month but for Sam, it was 1 year. For him, it was a surprising adventure.


    "shback,"


    1 month ago, while fighting those monsters, he suddenly felt something on his back. Suddenly in his back, a particr ce beside his neck begins to release heat. But at that time some were busy fighting those monsters and because of this, he was unable to focus on that. He didn''t know what was happening to him but at that time he did not think that much about this.


    But while he already killed 90% of the low-grade and middle-grade monsters, suddenly that sensation already was at his limit and at this time suddenly he got hit by a thunderbolt. At that time Sam thought he would feel pain and because of this he also tightly closed his eyes.


    _____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 319 319 - Where Am I?

    But even after waiting some time he did not feel any pain and because of this he slowly opened his eyes. In front of him he saw a scene that he will never forget. He saw that everything in front of him got destroyed. At first he thought that he was in some kind of illusion or he was just dreaming. But then he remembered that sometime ago he was on the battlefield. Then how the hell he came to this ce. Sam carefully begins to observe the surroundings. He was unable to find any humans in this ce but he was 100% sure that it was a city that he was saying in front of him. He can see those destroyed buildings and those destroyed cars, etc.


    Sam needed to observe carefully and because of this, he needed to observe his surroundings. Sometimeter when he finished observing his surroundings, he was 100% sure that it was the central city.


    ''Did I once again have some kind of dream? Am I dreaming of the future?'' he thought of this question while looking around the destroyed central city. Even after searching carefully he did not find anyone in this city.


    5 hourster,


    You can say that all this time he searched around all the city and trying to find any clue that would give him some information. But he did not find anything. He also checks those Dungeons. But unexpectedly he did not find anyone nor did he find any monster. Because of this, right now he was thinking what to do. He also tried to call the system but he was unable to do that. It was a hellish experience for him. Looks like every living being got destroyed from this Eden blue.


    "Roar!!!!!!" While he was thinking about his next move he suddenly heard this roar. Instantly he jumped away from his ce. You can say that he was very familiar with this roar. He began to look around but then he did not find any monster. At this time he doesn''t know why but he has the feeling and because of this he suddenly looks toward the sun. Only at this time was he something that he was very familiar with. He saw that instead of the Sun he could see a big red eye that was looking toward him. That gaze made him very terrified. You can say that he did not get scared this much aftering to this new world. This was his first time to get scared this much. Somehow he managed to calm down, but all this he was looking at the eyes that were looking at him.


    Slowly he saw that a gigantic face appeared in the sky and after that he also saw a gigantic body of that monster also appear in the sky. Most likely this creature was looking at him from the outside of the Eden blue''s atmosphere. But right now Sam was feeling that the monster was looking at him.


    Sam this time did not get scared and he already equipped his armor. He was prepared to attack that monster that was looking at him. For sometime The monster and Sam did not attack each other. The monster kept looking at Sam while maintaining his attack posture. But suddenly The monster opened his mouth and a big fireball came out from his mouth. Just looking at that big fireball you will get terrified. But Sam also wasn''t slow because he already created a massive firewall using his full power. Not only that he can feel that he won''t be able to defend against that fireball and because of this he also already activated the bersarker technique. Not only that, you can say that he already activated the spirit technique. Because of this right now the blue firewall has already turned purple. Yes, a few days ago he was able to connect his fire control technique with his spirit technique.


    Instantly that massive fireball and that firewall shed against each other. While maintaining the firewall Sam is already running away from that ce. He knows that he won''t be able to defend against that fireball for long. Because of this he decided to escape from that ce and high himself. But he could feel that the monster was still looking at him. He doesn''t know if he will be able to save himself or not but he won''t give up.


    The firewall was able to stop that fireball for 1 minute and after that itpletely got destroyed by that big fireball. Fortunately he was already very far away from that ce. But the moment that fireball hit the ground it instantly created a huge destruction that almost destroyed the whole area. The shockwave created by that destruction almost destroyed those remaining buildings.


    At this time Sam already came very far away and he was trying to hide himself from that monster. You can see that because of using the full spiritual energy he was now suffering from the headache. It almost killed him but because using the Energy recovery technique, he was recovering his energy. At this time he notices that he is unable to use his inventory because of this he won''t be able to use his potions. Even after hiding himself he can feel that the monster is still looking at him. That feeling was really scary.


    Sometimeter when he recovers some of his spiritual energy, he instantly uses his concealment techniques. Only at this time he has the feeling that the monster is unable to find him. Sam finally let out a sigh.


    '' Everything is destroyed, a big monster is alsoing out of nowhere, what should I do in this situation? '' You can say that for the first time he wasn''t unable to maintain his calmness. Don''t know why but suddenly If this came to his mind that almost made him think useless. But fortunately he has a good mental defense ability. Sometimeter after thinking like this he was once again able to regain his calmness.


    "Sigh, I don''t know what is happening. But the only thing I can do right now is to stay alert every time. I will try to look away everywhere and try to find some clues." Sam murmured after that he left his hiding ce. Even though right now he wasn''t able to feel the gaze of that monster, he still wanted to stay alert and because of this, he did not deactivate his concealment techniques.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now Sam was staying in a tall building. From this building he could see everything around the central city. He began to look around the ce from that building. Like this when it was 8:00 p.m. Sam suddenly notices something. Out of nowhere a hand started toe out from the ground. One by one many hands came out from the ground. This instantly makes him very alert. Right now he''s fully focused on those hands.


    Sometimeter he finally got to see the full body of that thing that came out from the ground. If you look at that thing carefully then you will notice that it was like a human being but his whole body is green and most likely he did not have any consciousness. He also wakes up in a very weird way. With that some became 100% sure that those were zombies. But at this time you will see that he was very surprised because those zombies didn''t belong to the monsters. Just looking at them you can tell that they were the Warriors that turned into zombies. Right now you can also see those Armor on the body of the zombies and with that Sam became 100% sure that those zombies were the Warriors. Somehow dost Warriors turn into these zombies.


    '' did the zombiese out because it was night time. '' some thought that because previously he wasn''t able to find any monsters but suddenly he found this many zombies. Fortunately he was at the top of the devilding and those zombies weren''t unable to fly away so you can say that they have the disadvantage in this condition. Sam can use this as his advantage to kill those monsters. Because of this he already brings out his bow and begins to shoot Arrow toward those zombies.


    Fortunately those zombies weren''t that powerful. Most likely they were early D-grade monsters. Because of this he began to kill those monsters that were very close to his building. Actually he was killing those zombies but he was still very alert about his surroundings because right now he still didn''t know if any other monster was around his ce or not. Right now he did not want to meet any high grade monsters. Also one more thing was that he wanted to know what happened to his family and friends. Most likely he needed to find out about that. As you can see, it wasn''t his bow and arrow. Actually he was unable to use inventory and because of this he previously collected this bow and arrows from a shop.


    ___________To be continued_________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 320 320 - Systems Response

    Sam collected those Arrow once again using his telepathy. Actually he could use those Arrow as weapons while using his telepathy but it won''t be that much powerful when he will use those Arrow using his bow. Because of this, he use Arrow with his bow. But that does not mean that he did not use his telepathy.


    After killing those zombies Sam was now resting on the top of that building. You can say that he killed all those zombies easily because those zombies wear E-grade or D-grade. But here was the main question: how the hell did these zombies suddenly appear? He didn''t know anything about this but one thing he was sure of was that most likely those zombies were the Warriors who lived here previously. Suddenly a question came to his mind,


    ''What happened to my family and friends? Did they also be zombies?''


    Right now nobody could answer him and because of this you can say that he was in a bad mood right now. He doesn''t know why he was there right now, and how the hell he came to this ce. On the other hand he was talking about the destruction that appeared in the central city and not only that he also saw that big monster that he previously saw in his dream. You can say that all of this is apletelyplicated thing. He needed to find out what was happening to him.


    Sometimeter when he was resting on the top of the building he suddenly felt arge energy fluctuationing from the distance. He instantly gets up from the ground and looks toward the direction using his spiritual vision. In the direction he suddenly saw more zombies but this time the zombies were powerful. Most likely all those zombies were C-grade. Fortunately they did note toward him and because of this Sam observed those zombies. All the zombies are going somewhere. This instantly made him very curious and because of this he also decided to follow those zombies but from a distance. Right now he did not have his inventory and because of this he did not want to fight those powerful zombies.


    He once again used his concealment techniques, and decided to follow the zombies. Sometimeter all those zombies right now gather in front of the Warrior association. Right now if you look at the warrior association then you won''t believe that it was the warrior association because it was looking like a castle. All of the zombies were right now standing in front of that castle and most likely they were waiting for someone.


    Suddenly at this time Sam instantly felt the energy fluctuation of the saints. But when you feel that energy he was definitely sure that most likely the Saints were also bing zombies or something like that. Because he can''t feel the dark auraing from their energy. All those zombies a few minutester started to enter the castle and they came to the hall room. Sam also followed them and came to the hall room. He can see that it was a big hall room and a big chair was also present in that hall room. That wasn''t your normal chair because it was made out of human bones. At this time suddenly someone is going toward that chair while those other zombies instantly kneel down.


    Sam is unable to see the face of that person and because of this he bes very curious. Right now his only focus is on that person who was going toward that chair. Sometimeter that person aftering in front of the chair, wasting no time, sits down on that chair and only then Sam is able to see the face of that person. But the moment he saw the face of the person he became very shocked that he was unable to believe the scene that he was seeing in front of him. If you are wondering what he saw then it was himself. You hear that right the person that right now sitting in that chair that was made out of bone was Sam himself. But it wasn''t your normal Sam because right now he was releasing the dark energy from his body and also if you look at the eyes of the person then you will see that both of the eyes were red like those other monsters.


    For a moment Sam became speechless that he didn''t know what to do but then he was able to calm himself down, and decided to observe what would happen in the room. Right now that zombie Sam was sitting in the chair, observing his surroundings and observing those zombies that were kneeling in front of him. But suddenly at this time his eyes went toward the ce where our Sam was hiding. Instantly a smile appeared on his face.


    On the other hand Sam who was hiding, instantly felt chill in his body. He was using supreme stealth and knew that until those monsters did not have the supreme observation technique they wouldn''t be able to find him. Because of this he was standing in that ce fearlessly but who could have thought that the zombies Sam would notice him. If you were wondering how he can tell that, it was because right now he can see that the zombie Sam was looking at him while smiling. Most likely that Sam knows that he was in that ce. Suddenly that zombie Sam extended his hand and instantly a dark Ray came out from his hand and directly went toward our Sam. Sam didn''t even get the chance to react and instantly got killed by that.


    _______________


    After getting killed by that zombie Sam, he once again came back to the ce from where he started his journey. Most likely he will start once again. But right now if you look at him then you will notice that he was sweating very hard. Because previously the experience made him hard to believe and also when that zombie Sam extended his hand instantly our Sam felt that his body was unable to move.


    So like this he wants to start his journey. This time he decided to take another route but in the end he once again got killed by some monsters. Like this he has tried many different routes in this one year. In this one year he got to know many things that he did not know previously. He is also able to read the memory of the zombies and with that he gets to know many things about all this distraction. A few days ago suddenly many monsters came to this ce. They were so powerful that even those Saints were helpless against them. Those Saints got killed by those monsters. Even though he got this type of information, he did not get to know how the hell he became like that.


    You can say that in this one year he fought those zombies many times and died in his hand also many times. But in this one year he already became an S-grade warrior. Killing those zombies gives him the crystals and with that he is able to be powerful. But even though he wasn''t able to defeat that zombie Sam.


    Right now you can see that our Sam once again got killed by that zombie Sam. Before he got killed he thought that he would once again go to that starting ce but this time something and expected happened.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "System online. Host is right now getting attacked by the dark spiritual energy. That dark spiritual energy is trying to control the host body and because of this right now the host came to this illusionary ce that was created by that dark spiritual energy. This is not a real ce, this is a loop created by the dark spiritual energy."


    " System is destroying the loop."


    " System helping host to absorb the dark spiritual energy with that host will be able to leave this ce,"


    " Absorbing dark spiritual energy... 1%


    ..


    ..


    Absorbing dark spiritual energy ¡­ .. 50%. "


    Suddenly, he heard his system voice. Right now you cannot describe the feeling that Sam was feeling. All this one year he was fighting the zombies and those monsters. You can say that he got very lonely all these years and suddenly after hearing the voice of the system he finally got relief.


    ''So, for 1 year I was trapped in this illusionary world. How the hell the dark spiritual energy invaded my mind.'' while a system was absorbing the dark spiritual energy Sam was thinking all of this.


    Sometimeter, he suddenly saw that the world began to crack. But not long after that the whole world got destroyed and at this time Sam woke up from hisa.


    "shback end,"


    After waking up from his, Sam first saw his parents and then his sister and his friends. Right now nobody can describe the feeling, the happiness that he was feeling right now. Fortunately he controlled his emotions and because of this he did not cry. With a smile he greeted all of them. He finally came out from that lonely world.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 321 321 - New Updates

    Because of thea Sam needed a few days to recover from his weak state. Actually even though the system already absorbs the dark spiritual energy it still leaves some damage to his body and to recover from that he needs some days. Right now some already came back to his house and he was now looking at his status screen,


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (1500/1500)


    Spiritual energy: (2500/2500)


    Strength: D/175


    Agility: D -/ 146


    Physique: D / 173


    Intelligent(mental power): D - / 138


    Spirit: E + / 97


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D) (intermediate)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 2.5 M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade D) (+)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C) (+)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (+)


    Neo sword style (Grade C) (+)


    Invisible shot (C-grade) (+)


    Multiple shot (C-grade)(+)


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (+)


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade C)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade D)(+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Energy mode: (C-grade) (+)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    (*) Second move: Hand coating


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade)(+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (D-grade)(+)


    Berserker (D-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade D)(+)


    Spirit technique ( Grade D) (+)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade E) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (C-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade)(+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: D)(+)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    When Sam looks at his status screen he can see that many things have already changed after the upgrade.


    As you can see that right now he did not have the normal Dragon devour technique. He has the original version of dragon devour technique. Not only that he also has a new special technique called Fusion. Also, he gets the spirit technique and the dark spiritual energy control technique.


    "


    Original Dragon devour (Grade D)


    [ This is the original Dragon devour technique. With that you do not need to worry about absorbing your crystal because you will be able to 100% absorb the essence of the crystal. Not only that but you will be able to absorb the crystals that have one level higher grade than you. Also using this technique you can absorb The spiritual essence for any dead monster. Currently you can only absorb the essence of E-grade and F-grade monsters.]


    Fusion technique


    [Using this technique you can fuse many techniques that have the same property and make one ultimate technique. Except those techniques that have the same properties you won''t be able to use this technique. Well, not only you can use the techniques but you will be able to fuse other things that also have the same property.]


    Dark spiritual energy control


    [With this technique you will be able to control the dark spiritual energy without any side effects. You will be able to change the property of the dark spiritual energy into normal spiritual energy. Not only that, using this technique you will be able to increase the power of your other technique while using the dark spiritual energy like your spirit technique.]. "


    What can Sam say right now? Just looking at all of these techniques he became speechless. His absorb technique really became an op technique. Not only that he also gets a new special technique called fusion and with that he will be able to fuse techniques that have the same properties and make one ultimate technique. Also the dark spiritual energy control technique really surprised him. You can use this technique to observe the dark spiritual energy and convert the dark spiritual energy into normal spiritual energy. Not only that he will be able to increase his other techniques power while using the dark spiritual energy control technique same as the spirit technique. All of these techniques were really powerful.


    But Sam quickly calmed himself down. He already knew that he did not have much time to waste because many monsters that were more powerful than those SSS grade monsters were approaching Eden blue. He needed to be powerful as quickly as he could so that his condition would be like that zombie Sam that he saw in his dream. Really that illusion really made him think about his future. With that he already knows that he won''t be able to waste any time.


    At this time suddenly something he notices in his Dragon devour technique. With the technique he could absorb the 100% spiritual essence from the crystals that were the same grade as him but at the same time he will be able to absorb the crystals that were one level higher than him. It means that right now he was an intermediate D-grade warrior so with that you will be able to absorb those peak D-grade crystals. Most likely that also has a 100% absorption rate. Really all of this makes him very speechless. He really wanted to try this right now but unfortunately he did not have any crystals right now.


    He calmed down and began to think about the other matter. Currently he does not get to be familiar with his technique and he can instantly upgrade that technique and the moment you will upgrade his technique you will be 100% familiar with that technique. Really this is one of the best things that he got after the system upgrade. With this 100% familiarity he would be able to release the full power of the technique.


    Sam calmed down and then came back to the main menu of his system and in that you can see three applications present in the system screen.


    "Status


    Shop


    Inventory."


    Yes you hear it right he finally has the shop option in his system. Wasting no time he quickly opened the shop option. When he opened the shop option he saw that all the things were divided into many categories. Like the sword and the other weapons were showing into the weapon option. So like the weapon option he has armor options, essories, potions, crystals and techniques. All of this option was present in the shop option. Sam right now really cannot believe that he will be able to buy all this thing from his system and he did not need to find this thing in the Dungeon. But one thing was that to buy all this thing he needed a gold coin and he will find a Gold coin in the Dungeon or he can get those gold coins after selling his loot in the shop. Not only that he can also turn his dor into gold coins.


    "1 Gold coin = 10000 Dor."


    Well you can say that the gold coin was really expensive. After that he began to look at his inventory option. All this time he wasn''t able to use the system and he also wasn''t able to sell all the things that he got on the battlefield. Right now in his inventory he has a lot of loot. He also can see his damaged armor and his damaged sword in his inventory.


    Wasting no time Sam quickly began to sell all those things in his system shop. One by one he was selling all of this and 30 minutester he finally finished selling all of his loots and finally you can say that he had an empty inventory except some important loots. After selling all of this thing right now he has 10000 gold coins. With that he could buy many things from a shop. But most likely he won''t be able to buy those good things because they are very expensive.


    Suddenly when Sam was busy looking at the shop and his inventory his system screen turned ck and after that a word appeared on the screen.


    "Host, the system has already reached its highest point. With that you cannot upgrade the system anymore with normal energy. If you wanted to upgrade the system for ultimate upgrade you needed to use the cosmic energy. Until you do not collect the required cosmic energy you won''t be able to upgrade the system. Also, because this is your first time selling your item in the system shop you are getting a discount in the shop option but after using it when you try to use the second time in your shop you won''t be able to use the discount option."


    After that once again he was able to see his shop option. But after reading that sudden notice Sam bes speechless because he doesn''t know anything about the cosmic energy that the system was talking about. Where he will find the cosmic energy. Well he did not know. He was now having a discount in a system shop and because of this he did not waste and quickly bought many things from the shop. Right now Sam needed good armor, with shoes and gloves. He also bought a sword, repaired his Night, bought potions, and bought many crystals. Currently you can say that he did not buy any technique right now because she already has many techniques. It was a good thing that he could buy crystal from a shop and because of this, he did not worry about the crystals. Most likely the system is also helping him to be powerful as quickly as he can.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 322 322 - Fusion

    Sam did not sell the area that he used in his second identity and also he didn''t sell the armor that he got from after winning thepetition. Both of the armor were very good and because of this he did not want to sell them. Everything was done right now he was very excited to use his new feature of the system. As you can guess you wanted to use the fusion feature of a system. There wasn''t any limit and because of this he wanted to check this with his throwing knife first.


    "Throwing knife


    Attack power - E


    Grade - 40


    Durability - 50/50. "


    This is the normal status of his 3 knives and he already brought out 3 of these knives and ced them together. After that he opens his fusion option and it tells him to select the thing that he wanted to fuse together. With that Sam selected these 3 knives. Instantly all these three nice disappeared and went inside of his system. At this time suddenly one more option appeared on the screen that was to start fusion. Not only that he can also see that all these three items have an 80% chance to fuse together. Sam did not waste anymore time and quickly started the fusion.


    Instantly all these three knives fuse together and be one knife. But to use the fusion option he also needed the Dungeon and to fuse these three knives together. 2k points were needed to fuse these three knives to fuse together.


    " Throwing knife


    Grade - D-


    Attack power - 100


    Durability - 150/150. "


    Just looking at the description of this new knife you can say that Sam became very excited. Fusing these 3 knives instantly upgrades the power of the knife and also increases the durability. So with that he can increase the power of his loot and his techniques that have the same category. Sam calmed himself down. Right now he cannot fuse anything because he does not have unlimited Dungeon points. He also needed to upgrade his techniques and because of this he needed to think about what he wanted to upgrade and what he wanted to fuse.


    Because of this, he decided that you will think about thatter. Right now he also wanted to try one more thing that was to absorb crystals. He already knows that he could absorb 100% essence of same grade crystals. Right now he wanted to know if he will get the 100% essense of the crystals that were higher grade than him. Because of this, he also brought a box of crystal of peak D-grade. So he did not waste anymore time and quickly brought out one crystal and then using his absorption technique he began to absorb that crystal. Slowly slowly you can see that the crystal turns into dust and all the essence gets absorbed by Sam. All this time Sam was enjoying the feeling of absorbing the crystal. And finally when he noticed that the crystal had already turned into dust, he already understood that he had already absorbed all the essence of the crystals. He already checked his status and saw that he already got 2 points after absorbing this crystal in his agility. Previously it was 146 but right now it already became 148 but it is still showing D-. Most likely after crossing the mark of 150 it will show him D.


    But still you can say that Sam was very excited right now. With that he is able to be stronger. He did not waste anymore time and quickly absorbed all the crystals that he bought from the system. His mom and dad already restrict him from going out of his house. Right now he won''t be able to go to Dungeon. He was only able to go to the Dungeon a weekter. So before that he wanted to upgrade his status as much as he could.


    ________________


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (1500/1500)


    Spiritual energy: (2500/2500)


    Strength: C- / 200


    Agility: D+/ 189


    Physique: C- / 201


    Intelligent(mental power): D / 174


    Spirit: D- / 148


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D) (intermediate)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 59 K


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade C)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade C)


    Neo sword style (Grade C)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Invisible shot (C-grade)


    Multiple shot (C-grade)


    Rapid shot (C-grade)


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade C)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade C)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Energy mode: (B-grade)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    (*) Second move: Hand coating


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade)


    Berserker (C-grade)


    Light control (Grade C)


    Spirit technique ( Grade C)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade D) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: C)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    As you can see, he already absorbed many crystals. Right now he was looking at his status screen. Not only did he absorb all the crystals but he also upgraded all of his important techniques. After upgrading all of this right now he had only 59k Dungeon points left in his system. Now with that remaining Dungeon points he wanted to see how many things he would be able to fuse.


    Right now if you look at his status screen then you will notice that he did not upgrade his sword techniques or his archery techniques. Well as you can guess that he wanted to fuse those techniques and make one ultimate sword technique and one ultimate archery technique. The main thing was he didn''t know how many Dungeon points you would need for that. He just not only wanted to fuse techniques but he also wanted to fuse his sword and Armor. But the Dungeon points were the main thing. He doesn''t know if you will be able to upgrade them or not.


    Well Sam was busy in his thinking but suddenly he realized that he was hungry and because of this he went to the kitchen to eat something. Even though the warrior association already takes care of all the casualties caused by those monsters, because of the dark association all the Dungeons also get affected. Because of these right now all the high grade warriors were busy killing those monsters until they did not get released by the dark spiritual energy. Well in the case of those Dungeon''s monsters, many of them already got affected by those dark spiritual energy but when you kill them the dark spiritual energy wille out from his body and because of these the Warriors were busy killing those monsters. Really who could have thought that the dark spiritual energy that most likely used by those ghost monsters were these must dangerous and they would use like this to cause destruction. Also one more thing was that the warrior association already announced that 10 dayster they will organize the pricing ceremony and because of this day also 1 second invited all those colleges that participate in the annual collegepetition.


    ______________________________


    One weekter,


    Sam was going toward the hospital for the final check up. Well the doctor already told him that he was very healthy but still they wanted to check if there was any remaining of the dark spiritual energy in his body. In this week his friends came to visit him many times and not only that many other Warriors also came to visit him. It was a happy moment for Sam that all those Warriors worried about him but while those Warriors came to visit him he also observed them very carefully.


    As you know that right now Sam wanted to investigate how the hell he got the dark spiritual energy in his body. Those monsters won''t be able to do that because if they are able to do that then many of the Warriors will be like him. Most likely it was done by someone that was working for the dark association. Sam wanted to find that person. He also told his parents, his sister, his teacher Alena and Saint Vena about this. They also after hearing this question be very serious because they also know that it was a very serious matter. Sam already told them that from the first he was very careful and he did not get close to other people and most likely he did not get contact with any warrior from the dark association. Previously the doctor told him that he got that spiritual energy in his body by food.


    So with that Sam bes sure that most likely someone from those students that he faced in the stadium most likely working with the dark association. As you should know that Sam did not participate in many matches and because of this he did not meet that many people. Also he mostly avoided those outside food then how the hell he got that dark spiritual energy in his body.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 323 323 - Prize Distribution Ceremony

    After a weekter Sam finally got out of his house. He finally got permission from his parents to leave the house. The main thing was that today was the prize distribution ceremony. So you can say that this is an important day for every student who participated in the annual collegepetition. So you can say that right now Sam was going to be at the stadium once again because the prize distribution ceremony will be held there. Tony, Alexa and the others were also going toward the stadium with Sam.


    Sometimeter, everyone once again came back to the stadium and you can say that the stadium was once again full with people. Even though they faced those monsters recently, it did not stop anyone from bing excited about this because you can say that every year this is the most joyous thing for everyone to celebrate. Even though many of them already lost their close person in that battle, it won''t stop them. On the other hand It motivated everyone of those people who participated in the battle against those monsters to be powerful so that humanity didn''t need it to face that kind of casualties.


    Sam who was going toward this stadium was also thinking about the previous battle and about those monsters. Even though he was able to kill those D-grade monsters, he did not have the strength to fight those high grade monsters. So you can say that it was a very frustrating thing for him because if he was not able to fight this kind of monster then how the hell would he face those monsters that wereing toward his home. They will be so powerful that they can destroy his home without any pressure. So you can say that thinking all of this Sam was beginning to feel frustrated but then after thinking about his system and the new update he finally calmed down.


    This week he was unable to go to the Dungeon and because of this right now you can say that he did not have that many Dungeon points, nor did he have any gold coins right now because he already used all of them. Also one more thing was that he already fused his two Armor. One armor he bought from the system and the other one that he got from after winning the college entrance examination. Not only that he also fuses his yer with his new sword that bought from the system shop. Before anything you should know that the things you will get from the system aren''t normal. Even the cheapest thing in the system was very powerful.


    "


    ck Geon armor


    Grade - C


    Defense Power - 250


    Durability - 240/240


    Special effects - It will increase your body defense while adding 20 points on your defense. Not only that, it also increases the recovery factor of your body."


    As you can see that the new armor waspletely ck in color and not only that it was very powerful. Not only does it give his body extra defense, but it also increases the recovery factor of his body. So you can say that it was very good. Also to fuse this to Armor  he almost uses 19k of his dungeon points. On the other hand, he uses the remaining point to fuse those two swords. But you should not underestimate that sword that he brought from the system because it was a special sword like his yer. Also the special feature of this sword was that it was made of some kind of spirit material and not only that spirit material was able to channel spiritual energy through it but it also has a strong property and because of this, the weapon made from that material is also very strong. So you can say that both of the swords have the same property and because of this he is able to fuse this to the sword.


    "


    yer


    Grade - C+


    Attack power - 293


    Durability - 280/280<novelnext></novelnext>


    Special feature - This also increased your strength by 10 points. With that you can easily channel your spiritual energy. Not only that but it is also made from a very mysterious material and because of this it is also very powerful."


    ____________________


    Sometimeter they already reached the stadium and they saw that the stadium was full of people. Fortunately they needed to go toward the waiting room and because of this they went directly in that direction. Also one more thing was that while going toward their waiting room Sam and the others already saw Pijush and the others. They also already arrived here and they are also going toward the waiting room. After they noticed Sam they quickly came to him and asked him about his condition. Many of them already know the achievement of Sam, but those people who were present in the Lais city, only know how much pressure he needed to face in that situation. To buy all those Warriors more time some handle those monsters on his own and you can say that it was one of a big achievement.


    ___________


    Sometimeter,


    Saint Vena, Saint Markus, Saint John and also Saint Mira present in the stadium right now. They will be giving the prize to those students. You can say that every student after hearing that got very excited because everyone wanted to meet Saints. It is a big achievement for everyone.


    "Ladies and gentlemen. Once again wee in the stadium. Few days earlier, when we held our annual collegepetition, we suddenly got attacked by those monsters. But fortunately our brave Warriors already handle all those matters and because of this once again we are safe from those monsters. Because of this we are once again able to heal the ceremony of living the prize. Please wee our Saint Markus on stage. Before starting the ceremony we want Saint Markus to give us a speech." After saying that the announcer went to the site and at this time everyone present in the stadium was now looking at Saint Markus. He already got up from his seat and began to work at the center of the stadium.


    Markus aftering to the center of the stadium he began to observe everyone present in the stadium. After that he begin his speech,


    " As you know, some days ago it was like hell for us. We lost many Warriors while fighting the monsters. But I am proud of those Warriors who risk their lives to protect humanity. They are the heroes that we should respect. You all should respect all those people who risk their life to protect you. Because of them you are able to live happily. They are the heroes of our humanity. But this is not enough. Everyone so early that suddenly dark association names appear and they begin to target everyone to spread their name. The dark association''s main target was to be famous. But fortunately we were able to destroy the dark association so you did not need to worry about them. But most likely this wasn''t enough. We needed a more powerful fighter so that those Warriors that belong to the dark reaction won''t be able to cause destruction. Not only the dark association but those monsters. If we have many powerful Warriors then it will be easy to take down those monsters. So I am hoping that every student present in the stadium will be a worker and be a strong warrior." After saying that Saint Markus finished his speech and went back to his seat.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally it was time for the prize distribution. Saint Markus, Saint Vena and Saint Mira will distribute those prizes to those students. At first the referee announced the college name of the third position holder from 1st year. It was the white tiger Academy who got the third position, at this time Gustav with his teammates began to walk toward the battle ring to receive the prize. After they were done they called the golden dawn academy in the battle ring to receive their prize. James was leading his teammates in the battle ring. All this time all the audience were supporting each team. Finally the referee called the name of the Royal Academy.


    "Ladies and gentlemen, please wee our winner of this year from the first year of the Royal Academy. We have our captain Sam. He is leading his team toward the battle ring. Beside him we also have our vice captain Alexa. Most likely everyone knows how powerful she was. Also you can just look at them and tell them that they did not waste all this time." After that the referee one by one began to introduce everyone from the Royal Academy in front of everyone.


    Saint Markus, Saint Vena and Saint Mira, smiled. They already saw how confident Sam and his friend were. Most likely after fighting their first battle all of them must be very confident. All of them are practicing non-stop so that they can surpass one person. As you know, their target was Sam.


    _________To be continued_______

 Chapter 324 324 - Searching For The Culprit

    "Finally, let''s wee the captain of Royal Academy''s 1st year team, Sam Kainer. He got the title Ultimate Fighter. Many of you don''t know that previously when those monsters attacked to give his friend some time, he battled those low grade and medium Grade  monsters on his own. He proved himself that he was the number one genius of this year. Please everyone wee our champion Sam," the announcer finally said and instantly all the people present in the stadium began to p for Sam. Not only those audiences but those other teams present in the battleground also pped for him. Right now if you look at those students then you will see that all of them have respect for him.


    Sam at this time smiled toward those in the audience and started to walk toward the battle ring. In the battle ring Saint Markus came with his medal and prize.


    "I know that everyone was thinking that they won''t be able to reach the same level as Sam. But that does not mean you will ignore your training. Even if you are a genius, if you don''t work hard then you won''t be able to be powerful. I don''t think so any of you know but the hard work that Sam went through was unimaginable. I hope everyone will learn from him to work hard. Everyone can see that there are many dangers that could harm our humanity but we as the Warriors have the duty to protect humanity." At this time Saint Markus began to give his speech before giving Sam his prize.


    Everyone present in the stadium right now is listening to his speech with focus. What can you say, his speech was really working because it already motivated all those other Warriors who got eliminated early to work hard and win thepetition next year.


    _______________


    Sometimeter after receiving the prize from Saint Markus, Sam left the battle ring. He once again standing in the battleground with his friends. The prize ceremony for the first year already over and it was time for the second year to receive their prize.


    At this time Alexa who was looking at the battle ring suddenly notice that Sam was continuously observing his surrounding. This make her very curious.


    "Sam did something happen? Are you trying to find something or someone?" Suddenly she asked him.


    Sam who was observing his surrounding carefully came back to his sense after hearing her voice. Well after that he shook his head and smile.


    "Well, you are right I am searching for someone. As all of you know that previously I got attack by the dark spiritual energy. But I am 100% sure that I did not get that dark spiritual energy in my body while fighting those monster in the Lais city. So that means I received that dark spiritual energy before going to the border City. Don''t know why but I have a feeling that the the culprit most likely present today in this battleground with us. So I am searching for that person." Sam exin all of this to them.


    You can say that after hearing that Tony and the others also became serious because they also wanted to find the culprit. The previously already so how the serious situation Sam had. It was fortunate that he was able to came out from hisa. Because of this, they also begin to observe those other students around them.


    Sam at this time already activated his spiritual vision. Without his spiritual vision he won''t be able to trace any clue about the dark energy and because of this, he was using his spiritual vision. As you know that with this he could saw the difference between the normal spiritual energy and the dark spiritual energy. So because of this he was using this technique to observe those other students.


    After sometime observing those students he became sure that every student present here uses the normal spiritual energy. So because of this it once again became tough for him to find the culprit. But that does not mean you will give us.


    "Guys you wait here sometime, I need it to go somewhere. " After saying that Sam leave the battleground. Well actually he needed to interrogate some people who could be behind all of this or they should know something that will give you some clue. Tony and the others didn''t even get the chance to react. They only so that after saying that Sam vanis from his ce.


    ___________________


    1 hourter,<novelnext></novelnext>


    The announcer was calling the 4th year team in the battle ring. Tony, Alexa, and the others still in the battleground but Sam still did not came. Nobody knows where he went and because of this they could only wait in the battleground. Fortunately they didn''t need to wait that long because Sam already came back to them.


    When Sam came back to his friends he notice that it was time for the 4th year to receive their prize. So most likely his sister already received her prize.


    "Sorry for thete guys," well he suddenly came side his friends they did not notice him and because of this he suddenly said that. You have to say that suddenly hearing his voice all of them got startled, but they notice it was Sam only then they rx.


    "Where you went previously? Did you find something?" Suddenly Tony ask him. Everyone of them also very curious to know if he find something or not.


    ? Sam smiled and just about to answer them but suddenly the hear a voice,


    "Sam where you went previously? I did not saw you here?" It was Gloria who suddenly said to him. Well you can say that from the moment when some recover from the dark spiritual energy Gloria be overprotective.


    "Haha¡­ sister don''t worry about it. I just went to investigate something. It is good thing that you also came here so that I could share the thing I found after the investigation." Sam said to them.


    Gloria, Fiona and her teammates also be very curious after hearing this. They also wanted to know what was they were talking about.


    "Actually as you know that the doctor previously told me that I somehow eat something that was rted to the dark spiritual energy and because of this I got attack by the dark spiritual. But while I was in the battlefield I did not eat anything so I am 100% sure that I did not receive that dark spiritual energy in the battlefield. With that I came to a conclusion that most probably I received that dark spiritual energy before going to Lais City. The doctor also said that most probably I received that or you can say it that thing between 24 hours, so because of this, I begin to investigate all the ces that I went before going to the Lais city."


    Sam exin all of this to them. You can say that after hearing all of this exnation everyone be very shocked. They already know that Sam attack by the dark spiritual energy but they did not know anything about this. So it was a very serious matter.


    "I went to the cafeteria and the ces from where I bought food previously. In the cafeteria I went to the kitchen and begin to ask about this. Only then I got a interesting news. The day when we got attacked by those monsters, before going to the battlefield me and my friends went to the cafeteria to eat something, so because of this I went to the cafeteria to ask around. There I get to know that when me and my friends order our food, that time I did notice but suddenly someone new was working there. While also giving us our food that person came to us and serve our food. Actually that time we was discussing about the monsters and the dark association and because of this me and my friends did not notice him. But after looking at the CCTV camera I be sure about this. So I already ask the staff of the cafeteria to find about that person,"


    After exining all of this Sam finally stop. At this time you can say that everyone present in that area, were be very serious. Because if they remember correctly when Sam and his friends were about to leave the cafeteria, Gloria and his friends also enter the cafeteria, they also order their food but they unable to eat that because that time they got the notification that monster was attacking the border City. Now the main thing what if they also eat their food that time? If that new waiter was the culprit, then he could also poison them and their condition also became like Sam''s. Just thinking about this make them very ufortable.


    Well you can say that not only them but Tony and the others were also very serious about this. Previously they also eat with some but fortunately the culprit did not poison them. What if they also got poison by that culprit? But now the most important thing was that how a new waiter came to the cafeteria without anyone''s notice.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 325 325 - Searching For The Culprit (2)

    After the ceremony was over everyone was now going back to their house. Finally the prize distribution ceremony of the annual collegepetition is over. Many colleges also participated in this year but only one of them won thispetition but it did not let down the confidence of those other college''s students. You can say that it was exactly opposite, right now every student that was going back toward their college or house, has a motivation in their mind. Everyone of them wanted to work hard and be powerful so that when they came back here next year they would win thepetition.


    Sam and his friends were still in the cafeteria. Because they needed the information from the cafeteria and it would take some time to get the information and because of this they were waiting. Gloria and her teammates also wanted to wait here but they were called by their teacher for something and because of this only Sam and his friends were waiting there.


    All this time Tony and the others were telling Sam about their training these few days. Well you can say that everyone was very excited to fight with Sam once again because this time they also wanted to see how much they improved themselves in these few days. Well Sam also did not have any problem with that and because of this he also agreed with them but he will do that aftering back from the Dungeon. He also told them if they wanted to go with him or not. But unfortunately they were busy with their teacher.


    Actually aftering back from the battlefield they told their teacher to increase their training routine. Because of this, all of them are very busy with their training schedule. Right now they only follow the same routine regrly - Training, Dungeon adventure with teacher, resting, once again training. So you can say that this was their routine that they were following these few days.


    _____________________


    "I don''t think so you will have any problem in the dungeon, but still you just recently recovered from thea, because of this you should be careful in the Dungeon." Alexa says that to him. Sam nodded. Well he always stays alert in the Dungeon.


    On the other hand, finally one person appeared in front of them. He was the manager of this cafeteria. Previously Sam told him that he wanted to see the CCTV footage and also wanted to find out about that person. Sam already saw the CCTV footage so right now he just wanted to know the identity of that person that was shown in the CCTV footage.


    Tony and the others also look toward the manager. But if you look at him right now then you can see that he was sweating hard.


    "What happened to the manager? You did not find anything?" Suddenly Tony asked him this.


    "Sigh, No i didn''t find anything," at this time the manager sighs and says that with a difficult expression. Actually he was also in trouble because of that new person. He was unable to find the identity of the person. Can anyone easily enter the cafeteria and leave the cafeteria? If this news suddenly spreads then he will lose his job. Because of this he was sweating very hard.


    "Actually, that day suddenly that person came to the cafeteria. I also asked my subordinates but they are also unable to tell me anything about that. It is like they are unable to remember anything. Also when I show them the picture they are unable to tell anything about that person it was like their memorypletely got erased. Because of this I am having problems finding the identity of this person. I am sorry sir, but give me some time, I will find out about that person," after exining all of this the manager began to tell them to give him some time with what he could find about that person.


    Sam and the others when they heard the exnation from him they became serious because the manager told them that he and his subordinate did not remember anything about that person. Even after showing them the picture and the video they were unable to tell anything so it was naturally a very serious matter. Most likely someone has a memory of that person and because of this nobody is able to remember anything. But then it creates a serious problem, who could be that person? And who erased the memory of these people?


    Right now all of them are thinking about this. At this time, Sam noticed the manager was still sweating hard. Most likely he was thinking that they willin about him and that he can lose his job.


    "Mr manager, you don''t need to worry about anything. You are telling the truth then you don''t need to worry about anything because most likely it was done by some powerful Warrior who can control the mind. He or she after doing the erase the memory from all of your mind and because of this you are all unable to remember anything. So you don''t need to worry even if the Saints get to know about this they won''t punish you." Sam assures the manager that he won''t get punished.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ________________


    ''Who could be after my life? It could be the dark association or some unknown enemy that I don''t know anything about. But I need to find out about this and most likely I need to ask the teacher to help me in this case. Sigh, most likely she and sister will go to the Dungeon today. But still I should have told her about this before she went to the dungeon. What if the culprit gets to know about this and decides to erase all the clues about him or her.'' Sam thought about all of this and finally decided to tell Alena about all of this.


    __________________


    Well today Alena will be going to a Dungeon but previously Gloria told him that she also wanted to tag along and because of this she will also bring her student while going to the Dungeon. This was an A-grade Dungeon, but the lowest monster in this and will be C-grade. Because of this he decided to bring Gloria with her in this dungeon. She won''t be going alone in this Dungeon, she has the full confidence that she will defeat those monsters while protecting her students.


    She already called Gloria and her other teams for a meeting. She was busy in a meeting but suddenly she got a call from Sam. It instantly made her curious. Wasting no time she quickly picked up the phone. On the other hand Sam instantly begins to exin everything without wasting any time. Alena already knew about this but after hearing the exnation from Sam she became serious because Sam told her that during thepetition some unknown person came to the cafeteria and he also left the cafeteria. After that, an unknown person poisoned Sam and finally left the cafeteria. The most serious thing was that before leaving he/she most likely erased all the memories of those cafeteria''s staff, so right now nobody is able to remember anything. It was a really serious matter.


    After hanging up, she became serious about this and began to think about what she should do at this moment. At this time Maria asked her what happened, she did not rest any more time and quickly exined all of this to his teammates and asked them what should be the next step. At this time Maria said that he will appoint some warriors that will take over the cafeteria. Most likely the culprit will try to silence those people that previously saw him. So we should be careful about this.


    _____________________


    Sam already came back to his house. He was now resting in his room while thinking about the previous matter.


    ''Most likely from now on I also need to be careful about the food. I also need to buy a technique that will increase the poison immunity in my body. Right now I don''t need to worry about the dark spiritual energy but the poison is still deadly for me.'' Sam at this time was thinking what he will do at this time. He decided that he should buy a poison immunity technique, with that he did not have to worry about poison.


    ___________________


    "What should I do? The dark association got destroyed by the warrior association. Even all those dark associations were also captured by the Warrior association. If someone revealed my name then I would be dead. What should I do? What should I do? "


    At this time, in a hotel room you can see a person who is thinking what he should do at this moment. He did not think the dark association would get destroyed by the warrior association. If he knew that earlier then won''t help them. But right now the situation ispletely different.


    _______________To be continued___________

 Chapter 326 326 - Desert Dungeon

    Next day, Sunday,


    Today Sam once again visited the cafeteria and saw that some Warriors were guarding that ce. Most likely his teacher appointed those Warriors here so that those people who work in the cafeteria did not get harmed by anyone. Well, he mainly came here to talk with the manager. Sam told him to stay careful because the culprit could be trying to harm him.


    After finishing talking with the manager he left the second floor. While he was about to leave the cafeteria he noticed students from Golden Dawn present in the cafeteria. Most likely they still have not left the central city. They were eating on the first floor so Sam went toward them. Well some warriors from the Golden Dawn also went to Lais city, also when he was in the hospital they came to the hospital to talk with him. So you can say that he has a good impression on those students and because of this he went toward them to talk.


    James and Aliya also present there. When they noticed Sam they greeted him and asked him about his health. Even though they weren''t with Sam in Lais city, they hear from their teammates how Sam single handedly started to fight with those monsters so that they can get some time to rest. It was really unimaginable, that someone wanted to put himself at risk to give others some time to rest.


    Sam also greeted them and then sat down with them. They begin to talk about various things. Sam gets to know that they will leave the central city today. Not only them, but many other colleges are still in the central city. While talking with them, Sam actually has a motive. Actually he wanted to get the information from them that if they know anything about that day or if they have some connection with that. But after talking with them it became clear that they did not have any connection with that. But one thing was for sure that they also saw that person in the cafeteria that day. But unfortunately they were also unable to see his face because he was wearing a mask.


    Sometimeter Sam left the cafeteria. At this time James and his teammates were talking with each other.


    "Guys did you notice that most likely some wanted to get some information from us about that person that he was talking about. Did that person do something?" At this time Aliya said that.


    "Hmm¡­ I also noticed that. At first Sam was cautious around us but after he became sure that we did not have any connection with that person only then he became rxed. I don''t know what the reason is but most likely that person did something to Sam." James said that. The others nodded after hearing that. They also notice that previously.


    While they were talking about this, suddenly one more group entered the cafeteria. It was Pijush and his teammates from White Tiger Academy. James noticed him and nodded toward them. Pijush and the others also noticed James and his teammates, so they also nodded. But at this time James noticed that their captain Gustav wasn''t present there. Well he did not think it was an important matter and because of this he once again started to talk with his teammates.


    On the other hand Pijush and the others also sit down after ordering their food. But he was confused at this moment because sometime ago he called Gustav, but he did not pick up his phone and just sent him a message that he wasn''t feeling good and because of this he won''t be going with them. Well if you think about it wasn''t an important matter but actually yesterday at night he saw Gustav leaving his room around 2:00 a.m. this is really surprising and because of this he wanted to ask him today but he did note with them.


    _________________


    Sam after leaving the cafeteria went toward his home. His sister and teacher already went to the Dungeon and today he has the n to go to the Dungeon. Tony and the others went free at this moment so as usual he will go to the Dungeon alone. So after changing his clothes he once again left his house and started going toward the dungeon. He will enter the desert Dungeon once again.


    But this time when he went toward the desert Dungeon he did not feel anyone around him that was watching over him. Most likely after the dark association got destroyed by the warrior association those information  guilds also be careful. But still he was quite careful. This time he wasn''t using his second identity. Actually he was very eager to try his new strength and also try his new sword and armor. He wanted to see how much their power had improved.


    _________________


    Sometimeter, he already reached the Dungeon and after parking his car he started to go toward the dungeon. But before entering the Dungeon he will ask the situation of this Dungeon to the Dungeon guide. As you know, before entering the Dungeon he always talks to the Dungeon guide.<novelnext></novelnext>


    After talking with the Dungeon guide he gets to know that previously because of the dark spiritual energy The monster inside the Dungeon became violent but fortunately, right now the situation was in control. After saying thanks to the dungeon guide, he started going toward the Dungeon.


    After entering the Dungeon he did not waste his time anymore and quickly used his concealment technique. He directly wanted to go to the second floor to fight those intermediate D-grade monsters. Because of this he did not want to waste his time here. While going toward the second floor he avoided those other monsters in the first floor because he did not want to fight them and waste his time. But one thing he has to say is thatpared to before he did not see that many bodies are in the dungeon. Most likely because of the previous incident many Warriors were waiting for everything to calm down, only after that they will once again start toe to the dungeon.


    _____________


    6 hourster,


    Sam was right now on the second floor and he was eating some food. After this long journey he started to feel hungry and because of this he was now resting. He was very close to the entrance but still he did not see that many Warriors present on this floor. Even those Warriors who use their unique hunting technique also weren''t present here.


    Well who cares about them after finishing his food he gets up from the ground and deactivated his concealment technique. He already equipped his new Armor and already brought out his new sword. So why should he waste his time here. He instantly began to advance.


    He did not need to advance that long because he can already see 5 sand Golems in front of him. He already activated his energy mode and coated his sword with spiritual energy. While he did that he felt that the spiritual energy smoothly went to the sword. It was like a different feelingpared to before.


    Golems also notice him and they have already started to approach him. But at this time Sam already used his confused ray and then telekinesis to stop those golems from moving. At this time using his movement technique, he was now already in front of the golem. Wasting your time he quickly attacks that Golem. With his first attack hepletely destroys the defense of the monster and quickly destroys the core of that monster. It was a different feeling from before because previously he did not feel this smooth while fighting this Golems.


    But he did not stop there and began to finish those other Golems. Also at this time you should know that he is using 30% of his spiritual energy. If it was before then using his 30% energy he won''t be able to kill those golem this easily or you can say this smoothly, but right now it waspletely different.


    It took him 10 minutes to finish all those golems. After collecting the loot he once again began to advance. Right now he just has only one motivation, which is to collect crystals as much as he can. Currently he has enough technique and all those techniques were powerful, he also didn''t need any other thing from this Dungeon, except those crystals.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam quickly jumped from his ce. Instanally the ground beneath his feet suddenly Vanished and his mouth came out from the sand. As you can guess it was the sandworms that came out from the sand. But he wasn''t alone because at this time Sam already noticed many other sandworms. All of them alsoe toward him while they are traveling through the sand. Previously it was quite difficult for him to defeat them but right now it waspletely different. He quickly jumped away from that ce once again but while he jumped away from that ce he installed a fireball to that ce. Even though that fireball won''t kill them, it will bring those sandworms outside of the sand.


    ____________To be continued____________

 Chapter 327 327 - Desert Dungeon (2)

    Currently Sam was facining sand Golems at the same time. This time he did not attack them from close distance because after killing 5 of those golems the remaining columns be very alert and right now they are trying their best to kill him. But fortunately Sam was maintaining the distance between him and those Golems. Because of this, their sand attack is also unable to hit him.


    As you know, the attack range of those sand golems was 1 km. Right now, he was using his night to kill those Golems. Because of his spiritual energy and strength, the power behind the arrow also increases. One after another he shot 5 arrows that directly went toward one sand Golems. One after another those arrows break the defense of the sand golem and finally destroy the core of that sand Golem. One more thing was that he wasn''t using his spirit arrows. This time he wanted to rely on his normal arrows while also using his spirit technique.


    Well you heard it right. Right now he can use the speed technique while using his bow and arrow. Not only that he can also use his speed technique with another technique. You can say that after upgrading the spirit technique this thing happened. Not only is he just able to use that but he has the feeling that he already mastered the spirit technique and because of this he did not feel any difort while using those other techniques while using his spirit technique.


    ''Really, this new future was really helpful. After upgrading the technique it will install it became 100% familiar with me. What can I say? This is awesome,'' Sam thought. But at this time he already shoots five more arrows toward those other monsters. Until now you can say he already killed 13 monsters and right now only seven Golems remain. But right now it can be difficult because suddenly those golems be intelligent and instantly create a sand wall in front of them. You can say that for a moment Sam bes speechless because those golems previously never used this move. It wasn''t that they wouldn''t do that but it wasn''t their normal behavior and because of this Sam was shocked.


    But at this time, the arrow that Sam was preparing to shoot, began to glow. It was glowing very brightly in blue color. Actually Sam was channeling more of his spiritual energy. He just kept doing that until he did not reach the limit of the arrow. This Arrow won''t be able to hold spiritual energy more than that. Sam already transfers 60% of spiritual energy in this Arrow and you can guess how powerful this arrow bes.


    He looks toward that Earth wall and wasting no time he quickly shoots his Arrow toward that well. Very quickly that Arrow already came toward the earth wall and already hit that earth wall. But instelly that earth wall got destroyed by that arrow. It got destroyed like it was made out of paper. Not only that, three golems also got killed by this arrow. Because when that Arrow hit one golem it instantly created destruction and instantly killed two more golems. Sam did not give any chance to those other columns to move and because of this he just now continuously began to shoot his Arrow toward those Golems. One by one those Arrow start hitting those golems without giving them any chance to move. Finally sometimeter Sam killed all those golems.


    __________________


    "Really I did not think that this golem would be this intelligent. Is this the side effect of dark spiritual energy? Well who cares about that but most likely from now on I need to be more careful in the Dungeons." Sam Murmured while collecting those loot.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam already set up his camp. It was now night time and because of this he was resting for sometime. He already activated the life scan detecting device, so if any monster came close to his camp then he would get notified by that device. He was eating his food while he was thinking about his energy mode and the spirit technique.


    As you know that both of the techniques were simr but at the same time they were different. So right now he was thinking if he could fuse both of these techniques and see what happened after that. .


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (1500/1500)


    Spiritual energy: (2500/2500)


    Strength: D+ /185


    Agility: D  / 150


    Physique: D / 173


    Intelligent(mental power): D - / 138


    Spirit: D- / 100


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D) (intermediate)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 100k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade D)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade C)


    Neo sword style (Grade C)


    Invisible shot (C-grade)


    Multiple shot (C-grade)


    Rapid shot (C-grade)<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade C)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade D)(+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Energy mode: (C-grade)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    (*) Second move: Hand coating


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade)(+)


    ? Strength buff technique: (C-grade)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade)


    Telekinesis: (D-grade)(+)


    Berserker (D-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade D)(+)


    Spirit technique ( Grade C)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade E) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (C-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: D)(+)


    [ Remark: A weakling who got some strength to protect himself.] "


    Right now as you can see, he has 100K dungeon points. But it wasn''t enough to fuse both of the techniques. Most likely the stronger the technique was, the amount will be needed based on that. Right now he needed 1 million Dungeon points to fuse both of the techniques. Well most likely he needed to wait sometime and only then he could do that. But it wasn''t finished there because at the same time he also needed to collect points to upgrade his absorb technique. Right now his original Dragon Devour needed 1 million to be a C-grade. As you can see that it needed morepared to those other techniques. Most likely because it was the supreme technique.


    After looking at all of this Sam just sighs. He still needed much time to be stronger. But you have to say that recently hisck wasn''t that good. Because he did not get that much good loot after killing those monsters. Really it makes me feel that his luck was bad today.


    _______________


    At this time, when Sam was busy improving himself in the Dungeon, the culprit that previously gave him the poison was now trying to invade the cafeteria at night. But only at this time did he realize that he was a stupid, right now because of the previous incident the security around the cafeteria got increased. It was now 1:00 a.m. and the cafeteria stayed closed at this moment. Because of this he thought that he could easily go inside of the cafeteria and delete all those clues about him. But right now unfortunately he can see those warriors guarding the cafeteria.


    Also one more thing was that those who were guarding the ce were C-grade warriors, also because of this he did not have the confidence to go inside of the cafeteria. He was the culprit who mixed that dark spiritual energy with Sam''s food but even that poison has a limit it could only affect those Warriors whose level was lower than C-grade. Only because of this he could poison Sam. After poisoning him he also is the memory of those people that work in the cafeteria using the device that he got from the dark association.


    .


    But right now the main thing was that the dark association already got destroyed and many of the dark association Warriors got captured by the warrior association. Also those Warriors who were able to escape when right now did not want toe into LimeLight so that they could hide from what is association. Because of this he cannot get help from those Warriors.


    Understand that the culprit was not aware of the fact that someone was watching him from a distance. From the moment he appeared near the cafeteria that person was looking at him with interest and curiosity. But the person did not do anything and just used his power to limit the tracker mark on the culprit. After doing that he vanished from his ce. But one thing was sure that for a second the culprit felt a chill on his back but when he saw there was no one behind him he thought that he was feeling that because of the cold.


    ________________


    Sam on the other hand ispletely unaware about this matter. But even if he gets to know about this then he won''t care about that because he will just directly catch the culprit and make him pay for that. Nowing back to the main matter, he has already left his previous hiding ce because in front of him he can see ck scorpions. There were 10 ck scorpionsing toward Allen.


    ___________To be continued________

 Chapter 328 328 - Going To Next Floor

    Sam quickly jumps away from his ce. Instantly the tale of the scorpion hit that ce. But at this time some already throw his knife toward that ck scorpion. His target was the eye of that Scorpio. Unfortunately the scorpion wasn''t able to react in time and because of this that knife hit his eyes and instantly that scorpion let out a painful roar. But at this time, Sam did not waste anymore time and quickly came beside that scorpion.


    Sometimeter,


    After collecting the loot that he got from killing those scorpions Sam begins to advance. You can say that it has been 5 days since he started to kill those monsters on this second floor. He already collected many crystals but still did not absorb them. He also tries to absorb the monster corps but only then he realizes that he won''t be able to absorb monsters in the Dungeon. In the Dungeon when you kill those monsters they will immediately turn into ash so it was impossible for him to absorb those monsters.


    ''Fortunately previously I did not sell all those monster corpses.'' as you know that the monsters in the danger zone did not turn into ash. Previously after killing monsters he put many of the dead bodies in his inventory and because of this right now he has some of this dead bodies of those monsters.


    Even though previously sold most of those corpses, he still saved some of these corpses. Because of this he was able to try his new function of the absorb technique. He is able to absorb the corpses of those E-grade monsters. The most interesting thing was that peak E-grade monster was giving him 0.5 Status points. In this matter he he can use that status for in any of his status. Really the new function of the absorb technique make him speechless. But then he can only use that function in the danger zone.


    ___________________


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    Sam already came very close to the entrance next to the floor. Right now he was just thinking about whether he should enter the Dungeon or not. But then he has the confidence that he could fight with those peak D-grade monsters. Because of this he decided he will enter the next floor.


    But before anything, he wanted to do something that would increase his status. He knows that he wasn''t close to breaking through to the next grade, and that those monsters will be more powerful than these intermediate grade monsters and because of this he wanted to increase his status. But there was one thing that he will follow. If fighting those monsters makes him feel powerless then he will escape from there and immediatelye back to this floor. But previously in the battlefield he already fights a menu of these peak D-grade monsters, because of this he has the confidence that he will be able to handle himself.


    "


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (1500/1500)


    Spiritual energy: (2500/2500)


    Strength: C- /200


    Agility: D+ / 190


    Physique: D+ / 196


    Intelligent(mental power): D / 169


    Spirit: D- / 100


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D) (intermediate)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 750k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade D)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade C)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade C)


    Neo sword style (Grade C)


    Invisible shot (C-grade)


    Multiple shot (C-grade)


    Rapid shot (C-grade)


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade C)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Superior spirit concealment (grade D)(+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Energy mode: (C-grade)


    (*) First move: Weapon coating


    (*) Second move: Hand coating


    Sonic st technique: (D-grade)(+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade)


    Telekinesis: (D-grade)(+)


    Berserker (D-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade D)(+)


    Spirit technique ( Grade C)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade E) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (C-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (C-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: D)(+)


    [ Remark: A weakling who got some strength to protect himself.] ".


    As you can see that he already increased his status point and not only that he also already collected 750 k Dungeon points. Right now the most important thing you wanted to do was to upgrade his absorb technique. But most likely he needed many points to upgrade that technique.


    After closing his system window, he finally began to walk toward the entrance. Actually previously with his teacher he came to the next floor and also felt the power of those peak D-grade monsters. But thenpared to those robots all the monsters were different and alsopared to those monsters who are controlled by the dark spiritual energy, these monsters were more dangerous because the dark spiritual energy wasn''t present in their body that would affect their intelligence. So even though the dark spiritual energy could boost their power,pared to a monster who is stronger but at the same time intelligent, that type of monster was more dangerous.


    _______________


    He finally came to the next floor. The first thing he saw aftering to this floor was some people were leaving this floor and going toward the entrance. If you look at them then you can see that they were seriously injured and not only that they were also bleeding.


    After looking at their condition Sam could tell that most likely all these Warriors already finished using all of their resources and because of this right now they did not have any health potions. At the same time when Sam was looking toward them those people were also looking towards Sam.


    Suddenly after seeing him Some of them sigh in relief. Actually previously fighting those monsters they already used all of their resources and right now they did not have anything that will help them to recover their help and because of this they were helpless in this situation. Three of their Warriors were seriously injured but they did not have anything that would help them. Unfortunately when they came toward the entrance they did not find any Warriors and because of this all this time they were in an anxious state. But suddenly all of them notice that someone is turning this floor and in the next movement they see a person.


    The person was wearing some kind of ck armor. Don''t know why but when they look at his face they feel like they know this person but it was only that they cannot remember. The leader of their team begins to walk toward Sam and aftering in front of him he exins their situation to Sam and also asks if he could help them. The leader already told Sam that they will exchange their loot with the resources so Sam did not needed to worry about that.


    Sam did not immediately agree with them but then when he noticed the condition of those 3 people, he just sighs, and agrees with them. After that he brings out 3 high grade and 3 medium Grade health potions. He gives that person all of this while the person immediately gives him a scroll of a passive technique, and also gives him some crystals.


    Sam at this time did not reject any of this and after taking all of this he left that ce. After walking sometime he once again felt that most likely that many Warriors weren''t present in the Dungeon. In the previous floor even after traveling the whole floor he did not see that many Warriors and now in this floor he also has the same feeling. Sam shook his head to clear his mind. And after that he began to advance.


    ___________________


    Right now while Sam is busy in the Dungeon, something already happened in the cafeteria in Royal Academy. Even though those Warriors from the warrior association get the duty to look over this ce but even after 2 dayster they found no one suspicious they begin to ck off from their job and because of this something major happened.


    One day ago the manager got attacked by someone but fortunately he also had Warrior that was protecting him from the shadow. Only because of this the manager was able to save his life and the culprit got killed by those shadow bodyguards. So after that attack the manager was very scared right now because he also thought previously that he was only getting attacked by anyone and because of this he also started to rx andpletely forget about the warning that Sam was given to him before going to the Dungeon.


    Unfortunately right now Sam or Alena weren''t still out of the Dungeon and because of this they won''t be able to help him. The Warriors from the warrior association are already trying to search for that mysterious person who attacked the manager first. After listening to all of this the warrior association already posted the wanted list and already told all those to capture that person. Saint Markus was also very interested in this case, he also wanted to know who was the culprit of this. He already appointed more Warriors to find out about the real culprit. He also already punished all those warriors who ck off previously.


    __________To be continued__________

 Chapter 329 329 - Clue About The Culprit

    "Did anyone find anything?" Alena asked this. Gloria, Alena, and the others alreadye back from the dungeon. This day in the Dungeon for 15 days and after that they came back from the dungeon. The good thing was that Gloria already progressed in her grade. As you know, Gloria already became an intermediate C-grade Warrior before the annual collegepetition, but that time she did not get that many crystals to improve her grade.


    Alena, Maria and Aria were right now in the warrior association. You can say that three of them were friends, because of this three of them decided to investigate this matter. Maria and Aria know that Alena was very angry because someone poisoned her student previously and that could be threatening for him. Fortunately he was able to wake up from hisa, so because of this all of them wanted to find that culprit and kill that person.


    Alena already told them that Sam told her that he did not think that the dark spiritual energy enter his body in the battlefield because in the battlefield he was most cautious, not only that he also always alert about his surrounding so because of this he was 100% sure that he did not get contact with the dark spiritual energy in the battlefield. On the other hand 15 days earlier he also told her that after investigating in the cafeteria he find out that someone new work as a stuff in the cafeteria but when he decided to find about the identity of that person he did not find anything and the most serious thing all that nobody who were working in the cafeteria remember anything about that person. So Sam suspected that person could be the real culprit behind all of this.


    So you can say that three of them have already appointed some Warriors to find out about the identity of that person. Because of this, they came to the warrior association to know if they found anything or not.


    "We were able to find something, but something unexpected happened. Previously the manager of the cafeteria got attacked by someone but fortunately we were present there to protect him. Most likely the culprit decided to kill that manager. After that we once again interrogated the manager but he did not know anything so at this time we decided to read his mind or you can say that we wanted to find if anything rted to the matter was in his mind or not. That time we suddenly found something unexpected in his mind. Even though we are unable to see the face of that person even in his memory,pared to those other workers, this manager has some memories rted to that person in his mind. Most likely that culprit wasn''t able topletely erase all of the memory from his mind. It was because the manager was an Early D-grade warrior, while those workers were normal people."


    "Don''t know if we are wrong or right but we think that most likely that corporate was a student. Because when that person first came to the cafeteria the manager greeted him with a polite smile. After that we weren''t able to see any memory in his mind but suddenly we saw that person while wearing the worker clothese in front of the manager and suddenly we suddenly glimpse a strange device and that was it. After that we did not find anything in his mind."


    At this time the person told all of this to them. Alena, Maria and Aria turned very serious after hearing all of this. Instantly they ask that person about the device. Not only that, at this time Alena shows that person some picture of the devices that they previously found in the dark association previously. Don''t know why but she has the feeling that this person could be rted to the dark association. But the most serious thing was that if that person really was a student then it was very dangerous for everyone.


    At this time the warrior who previously read the mind of that manager, was now looking at those pictures. At first he did not find anything but suddenly he saw a picture and instantly he felt that it was the same design he saw earlier in the manager''s mind.


    "Miss Alena, this is the device I saw earlier in the memory. Even though I have to use some doubt, I am 90% sure that this was the device I saw earlier," at this time that Warrior point is finger to picture and show that to them.


    Alena, Aria and Maria also looked at the picture and they also saw the picture of the device. This is one of the devices that the Warrior association did not know anything about. As you know that all these devices were dangerous and because of this the warrior association did not try all those devices. Because of this, there were still some devices whose uses nobody knew.


    "So this device could be the memory of anyone." Maria murmured. Really it was a surprising thing that the dark association also had this kind of device. But most likely this device also has some kind of limitation and because of this, they are able to find the clue in the manager''s memory. At this time Aria instantly informs all of this to her grandfather, Saint John.


    "Sigh, miss Alena, mostly we still need some time to figure out who that person is."<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Hmm¡­ if you are telling me the truth then this is a very serious thing. If a student from our Warrior Academy was part of the dark association or rted to the dark association then it was a very dangerous thing. Because if a person rted to the dark association was able toe to our warrior association, then it was a very dangerous thing. Right now we only know about one person but what if there were many people also present in our Academy and in our Warrior association, then it was very dangerous. We needed to search about this." Alena said this with her serious tone. Maria and Aria also nodded. It was really a serious matter.


    Right now Alena, Maria, Aria and many other Warriors ordinary got informed by the Saints that the main headquarter of the Dark association is present in another dimension and The lord of The Dark association and the main elder of the dark association also present in that dimension. So even though the Warrior association already destroyed all the dark associations present in the Eden blue, there was still a chance that the dark association once again established their base Eden blue once again. With that they could once again try to harm humanity.


    _____________________


    Right now, a person was present in front of a destroyed ce. From head to toe, he was covering himself so that nobody could see his face or recognise him. Also if you look around his surroundings then you will see this ce was inside of a very deep forest and in front of him you could see those destroyed buildings. Looking at those buildings and the destruction you could tell that all of this happened recently.


    "Haha¡­ these humans were really interesting. Even though they destroy the dark association, they didn''t know that the dark association is the blood demon''s subordinates. Sigh, they didn''t have that many Epic level power houses, nor did their technology advance. They didn''t even know about the real situation outside of theirs. Sigh, still why the Queen told us toe here. I really did not want to stay here with these humans. Sigh, me and my hard life." That person sighed deeply and then turned around and left that ce. But at the time when he turned around suddenly one thing you can see was that that person has pointy ears.


    __________________


    Outside of the desert Dungeon,


    You can see Sam who was leaving the dungeon. But at this time he was quite surprised when he came outside of the Dungeon. Because 14 days ago, he did not see many Warriors outside of the Dungeon but was suddenly able to see many Warriors. Most likely the situation was not stable and because of this once again all these Warriors began toe to the Dungeon.


    "Well, let''s go back," after saying that he went to the parking area. He left the Dungeon in his car. He was now going to his house. Right now he doesn''t know if his mom and dad or his sister came back from their adventure. But still at this time he was thinking about the culprit. For these 14 days he just continuously collected loot and killed those monsters. He came out of the Dungeon because he had already finished all of his resources. After resting for 2 days, he will once againe back here or go to a new Dungeon. On the other hand he also wanted to know if his teacher knew anything about the culprit or not.


    _____________To be continued______________

 Chapter 330 330 - Time Skip

    5 monthster,


    Central City, Desert Dungeon, 3rd floor, Boss room,


    Right now, inside of the Boss room you can see many Warriors fighting with that boss and his subordinates. But even with that they were unable to get the upper hand against that Boss. This boss was a ck scorpion and alsopared to those other ck scorpions this ck scorpion was different because it was 10 meters tall and its tail was red in color. The Boss releases a me poison that could instantly burn anything.


    All those 20 warriors were peak D-grade but they were still unable tond any attack on the boss. On the other hand the boss already injured 8 of those Warriors, fortunately their armor was able to protect them from that fire poison. But the poison was so dangerous that their armor turned into Ash after getting contact with that me poison. With that you can guess how dangerous that poison was.


    All of those Warriors even though they were injured, the Steel attacked the Boss monster with their full power but the difference of that Boss monster was so strong that they were only able to injure that monster slightly. Compared to their injuries, that injury was nothing. Right now the situation was very dangerous for those Warriors. The leader of the group can feel that the situation keeps getting dangerous; he can see that his teammates already got injured by that Boss monster. Even after fighting this long he can see that the Boss monster wasn''t exhausted nor did he show any sign of weakness. So you can say that right now in front of those 10 remaining Warriors this monster keeps getting dangerous.


    "Tiona, right now only you can use the light element so try to heal Liyan and the others. We need to escape from this. " The leader quickly shouted toward the girl who was healing those injured Warriors. Those other light element users already got injured by that scorpion and only she was now able to heal those other Warriors. After hearing the word from her leader she did not say anything and nodded. She also knew that the situation kept getting dangerous for them to stay in this Boss room. But who can expect that the boss will be much strongerpared to those other monsters on this floor.


    ____________


    10 minutester,


    Right now those 10 Warriors are carrying their teammates trying to run away from the Boss room. They already give up fighting that Scorpio and use their full power to escape from that room. Fortunately Tiona already stabilized the condition of those injured Warriors and with that they did not have a life threatening situation right now except that Scorpio. The boss Scorpio wasn''t alone; you also kept calling his subordinate to attack those Warriors.


    You can say that right now every Warrior was very serious. They did not even turn down to see what was happening in their behind because right now they were only focusing on escaping from here. For non stop 2 hours they were fighting that Boss monster but even with that they were unable to enjoy that Boss monster seriously and the healing factor of this monster was greater than them. Because of this it was quite dangerous for them to stay here and they decided to escape from here.


    The boss room on the third floor was underground. This was present on the third floor. Because of this they were now running in the underground and trying to find the exit that will lead them toward outside of this underground tunnel. Who knows how the hell a boss room was created in the Dungeon or who created all this Boss room.


    While they were very close to that exit they suddenly sigh in relief. Even though they did not get out of the underground tunnel, it was still great that they found the exit. But suddenly when they reach that exit they suddenly hear something that almost makes them scared very much but suddenly they realize that sound wasing from a warrior who was now sitting in the boss room behind that exit and was eating food.


    "Friend, the Boss monster is chasing after us so it should be good if you leave this ce as quickly as you can," after saying that the leader did not waste anymore time and quickly left that ce. Even though he previously did not want to tell that person but after seeing him he decided that he can not be that heartless. While all of them came out of the boss room They did not waste anymore time. They quickly started going toward the exit of this floor. Right now the best decision will be to leave this ce and go to the hospital for the treatment of those 10 injured Warriors. Right now nobody knows if they got affected by the me poison or not because of this everyone also wanted to check their body.


    ____________


    As you can guess, inside of the boss room, Sam was now eating his food. Previously suddenly a sand tornado appeared in this desert and because of this to protect himself he entered the cave. All this time he had already killed many monsters on this floor and because of this he was also hungry and previously trying to find a good ce to rest but suddenly he noticed that the Sand tornado appeared in the desert and to protect himself after finding this path.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Previously, Sam did not see clearly but right now he already became sure that it was the boss room. Previously when he came here with his teacher, the teacher was the one who dragged that monster out of his cab only then he killed that monster previously.  But right now his teacher wasn''t with him so he needed to take care of that monster on his own. We can see outside of the tunnel he was in.


    ''Most likely the sand storm has already faded away and right now I can go outside of this tunnel but let''s check out this boss monster. In these 5 months you can say that the same makes himself stronger and because of this you can say that he has the confidence that he will be able to fight the Boss monster on his own. Because of this he wanted to find that Boss monster and try his new power against that Boss monster.


    Sam didn''t even need to advance that long because he already can hear some heavy full steps and not only that he can also hear the role of some kind of monster. With that some became sure that it was the Boss monster and he also started to approach that Boss monster.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now, Sam quickly punches that Boss monster and instantly you can see some crack appear on the outer shell of that scorpion. The defense of this scorpion was so great that even when those 20 warriors attacked that monster previously it did not ever affect him that much.


    _____________


    Suddenly, The Sword of Sam begins to glow in blue color. If you are wondering about then then it was the color of his spiritual energy that he recently was able to change this way. Actually in this 5 months have already be very powerful and because of the fact that he only focus on hunting the monster he collected many done in points and many loots and with that he able to fuse many techniques and because of this right now even though he had some less techniquespared to before but all of the were powerful.


    "Supreme Spiritual energy control (Grade - B)


    [Using this technique your spiritual energy will be able to turn into purest Spiritual energy. Using this technique you are only able to absorb the purest spiritual energy and also be able to control them on your own.]  "


    As you can see that this was his new technique that he got after fusing his spirit technique, his energy mode and his energy control technique. So all these three thingsbined into one and after that this new technique created by that. Two days ago he created this technique and after that he instantly came back to the Dungeon to taste out the power of this technique.


    What is the supreme spiritual energy? Most likely this was the purest spiritual energy that you can get from the crystals. He never really knew that the spiritual Essence he previously absorbed wasn''t the purest form of The Spiritual energy. Now back to the practical matter. Right now when he uses any technique rted to spiritual energy then his body does not feel that much pressure and also the power behind this purest spiritual energy is much greater than his previous spiritual energy. Beforeing to this Boss room you can say that some already killed all the monsters present in this floor. While killing those monsters he just felt that he was killing some weak monsters. With that you can guess how powerful this purest spiritual energy is.


    Actually using this technique and his absorb technique at the same time he could absorb the purest spiritual energy from the crystals. He still doesn''t know if he couldbine both of his absorb techniques and this technique or not. But if he is able to do that then it will be very helpful because with that while absorbing the spirit crystal he won''t feel that much pressure. Yes actually when he used the purest spiritual energy he did not feel any pressure but while using that technique while using the absorb technique it put pressure on his body.


    __________To be continued___________

 Chapter 331 331 - Killing Boss

    Using his supreme spiritual control technique he quickly uses his pure spiritual energy to coat his sword and approach that boss.


    Right now in front of Sam you can see that ck scorpion. The ck scorpion was already about to attack Sam but Sam also wasn''t slow; he quickly attacked that ck scorpion with his sword. His sword and the tail of that ck scorpion shed against each other.


    Previously Sam thought that he was able to damage the tail of that ck scorpion but surprisingly it was not able to damage the tail of that ck scorpion. Most likely this ck scorpion was different from those other ck scorpions and because of this he still wasn''t able to damage it.


    Sam jumped away from that ce. At this time the ck scorpion was already releasing the me poison from his tail. Even though Sam has confidence in his body, still he did not have any poison resistance technique, because of this he decided to avoid me poison.


    But Sam also wasn''t slow just after avoiding the attack he quickly counter attacked. He attacked that scorpion with his fireball. Actually getting close to that ck scorpion could be dangerous and because of this he did not want to get close to that scorpion. It could be dangerous because he still doesn''t know if other than he still could release poison from his mouth or not.


    "Roar!!!" Just after getting hit by that fireball that scorpion begins to Roar. But at this time Sam didn''t let go of this chance, he quickly uses his fast attack with his coated sword. Less than a second he attacked the tail of that scorpion, 20 times.


    All this time because of that previous attack the scorpion wasn''t able to see properly and because of these he was unable to react on time. Sam uses this chance to attack his tail and because of this right now you can see, he is already able to cut down the tail of that scorpion.


    Instantly once again that ck scorpion begins to Roar in pain. Sam already jumped far away from that scorpion and already started to prepare a maga fireball. Butpared to his previous mega fireball this fireball was different because it was made by pure spiritual energy and because of this the power behind this mega fireball already increased. To create this firewall you can say that Sam already uses his 80% spiritual energy.


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    Sam did not waste anymore time and shot that fireball toward that ck scorpion who was now roaring in pain. Just after that fireball hit that scorpion it createdrge destruction in that ce. Instantly a powerful impact was created by the destruction and the area around that destruction already got crushed by that explosion.


    Fortunately Sam already used this chance to get away from that underground ce or he could be in danger.


    "I am really a stupid. I should not use the mega fireball in an underground ce," at this time Sam was panting. He did not get the chance to recover his spiritual energy because previously just after shooting the fireball he ran away from that underground ce. So he did not get the chance to recover. He quickly brings out a spiritual energy recovery potion and gulps down.


    The underground ce already got destroyed by the destruction and right now you can see a big destroyed ce in front of Sam.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam now wanted to confirm if he already killed that boss monster or not. But it was quite hard for him to find the answer. But he did not give up, because if he already killed that Boss then the loot should be under this sand. Because of this he was using his full power to search for that monster or those loot. Well he did not need to find that long because sometimeter he already found loot that the Boss monster dropped after getting killed by Sam.


    Just looking at the loot Sam already bes very happy because in front of him he can see a scroll. Not only that, but he can also see many other good loot in front of him. Sam quickly picked up all those loot and wasted no time to leave that ce.


    __________________


    "I really should not underestimate the power behind pure spiritual energy. Compared to normal spiritual energy this was really very powerful. Sigh, I need to practice more with pure spiritual energy." Sam thought that while he was now eating some food.


    Sometimeter after finishing his food some decided to leave the Dungeon. He already killed the boss of this Dungeon and already collected many crystals from this Dungeon. Right now after leaving this Dungeon he wanted to go back to the ghost Dungeon to collect more spirit crystals.


    "


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (1500/1500)


    Spiritual energy: (2500/2500)


    Strength: C+ / 410


    Agility: C+ / 405


    Physique: C+ / 409


    Intelligent(mental power): C / 400


    Spirit: C/ 402


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D+) (peak)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 15M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (+)


    Neo sword style (Grade C) (+)


    Invisible shot (C-grade) (+)


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (+)


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (+)


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade C) (+)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade C) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Supreme Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade D) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: C) (+)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    At this time Sam was looking at his status and as you can see that he already became a peak D-grade warrior. Not only that he already uses his supreme upgrade to upgrade his absorb technique. He also uses that to upgrade his sword, and finally upgrade his Armor. So because of this right now you can say that both of his Sword and armor were very powerful and because of this they did not receive any injuries even after getting hit by the Boss monster.


    Right now he has 15 million upgrade points and he was thinking using these points he should fused all the archery techniques aur he could fuse the supreme spiritual control technique with the dark spiritual energy control. But before that he needs to upgrade the dark spiritual energy control technique to grade B. Only then will he be able to do that.


    So right now while looking at his status he was thinking what he should do right now. After thinking for some time he decided that he will first upgrade the dark spiritual energy control technique to B-grade and only then will he try to fuse both of the techniques if it is possible.


    Also you should know that previously he tried to fuse his both up supreme concealment technique but to do that he needed many upgrade points. Even when he had 20 million upgrade points he was unable to fuse both of the techniques so it was like they require more Dungeon points. Not only that, Sam also ns to fuse all of his sword techniques and his archery techniques. With that he will just have one technique that will be much more powerful than those techniques.


    ________________


    Sometimeter,


    "Supreme pure Spiritual energy


    [With this technique you could turn the normal spiritual essence into pure spiritual energy. This pure spiritual energy will strengthen your body and mind. Not only that, this pure spiritual energy is very strongpared to any normal spiritual energy. You could turn any spiritual essence like the normal spiritual essence or the dark spiritual essence into pure spiritual energy.]"


    Right now as you can see, he once again has a new technique. Even though it looked like the previous supreme spiritual control technique, it waspletely different. Sam already feels that because right now The Spiritual energy in his body is turning into pure spiritual energy. Previously the supreme spiritual control technique only turned spiritual energy into pure spiritual energy while absorbing the crystals. But right now he does not have that type of limitation because now he can turn any spiritual essence into pure spiritual energy in his body.


    Sam quickly got up from the ground because this wasn''t the ce to rx. He needs to get from this ce and only after going outside of the Dungeon will he feel rxed.


    ''Sigh, I really wanted to know about this pure spiritual energy. I still did not know how after fusing those techniques I was able to create this pure spiritual energy. It would be good if someone could give me the answer but unfortunately nobody was present here to give me the answer.'' Sam was feeling disappointed because he really wanted to know about this pure spiritual energy. But unfortunately he cannot get any answer from anyone and because of this he was not feeling disappointed.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 332 332 - Trying To Breakthrough

    5 June, Sunday, 11:00 a.m.,


    You can see that Sam was now busy fighting his robots. Two days ago he came back from the Dungeon and yesterday after resting today he finally decided to train once again. He now said the power limit of this robot''s early C-grade. But it was like the difference between peak D-grade and early C-grade werepletely different. Even after fighting for this long he wasn''t able tond any hits. You can say that it was exactly the opposite of those two robots all the time beating him. He was not even able to fight back with both of the robots.


    If you are wondering why he set the limit of both of the robots to early C-grade, then it was because he wanted to know the power behind early C-grade warriors and monsters. Actually the next Dungeon he will be going to is a C-grade dungeon. The next Dungeon has 5 floors and from the third floor he will meet C-grade monsters. Because of this he decided to get familiar with the power of C-grade.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam already stopped fighting both of the robots and now he was recovering from the injury. After fighting this long he got injured by those two robots and because of this he stopped fighting to recover from those injuries.


    ''Haha¡­ I really underestimate the power of early C-grade warriors. The difference between this grade was veryrge. I should not fight any C-grade monsters right now. After breaking through to early C-grade I will be able to fight those monsters.'' Sam sighs and thinks this.


    Today his sister will being back from the Dungeon. Previously, she did not go to the Dungeon with teacher Alena. She went to the Dungeon with her team and most likely they will being back today. On the other hand his teacher Alena was now trying to break through to S-grade.


    As you know, she is already a peak A-grade warrior and she has already reached the limit and right now she just needs to break through to the next grade. Not only her teacher but Maria, and Aria are also trying to break through. As you know, like the D-grade, A-grade is also the final barrier that one needs to face to break through to the next grade. Compared to other grades it was very hard. But she has full confidence in her teacher.


    Hina and Gloria, were now intermediate B-grade warriors, and both of them are very close to breaking through to peak grade. Gloria on the other hand is already a peak C-grade warrior. Really she was a genius injust 5 months she had already reached this stage. Compared to Sam who has the help from the system Gloria was a real genius. But some were not jealous about that. You can say that he was very extremely happy that his sister was able to be this powerful.


    Sometimeter after freshening up himself Sam was now going toward the Royal Academy to meet his friends. Tony and the others also came back from the Dungeon yesterday and because of this he wanted to meet them. Tony, Alexa, Jeni, and Elena already be intermediate D-grade warriors and Kenny, and Tina are very close to breaking through. Saara, Kira and Dan also be early D-grade and most likely they were also reaching the limit.


    Most likely this year Sam and his friends already motivated those other years students. Because if you look at their ss then you will notice that many students already break through to early D-grade. Not only that but right now many fourth year students have already be early C-grade. Not only the fourth year but even some of the third year students also became C-grade. So you can say that it was this year''s annual collegepetition that motivated everyone to be strong.


    ___________________ Sometimeter, Sam came back to the Royal Academy. Right now he can see many students going toward the training ground or some of them also going toward the ssroom, etc. Well it was like every student was busy with their own work. But the most important thing was that every student most likely had the wish to be strong after that Monster invasion.


    When he was heading toward the training grounds he suddenly saw that in the indoor stadium a match was going on. He instantly became interested and went toward the stadium to see the match. The match was between the second year. In the top 10 position, the second position holder student challenges the first position holder and the fight between them goes on in the stadium. So right now you can see all the second year students also present in the stadium and not only that he also notices most of the first year students and third year students also present in the stadium. Everyone was very excited.


    ''Nowe to think of it, in these 5 months I did not receive any challenge from anyone. Tony and the others already received many challenges but why didn''t I receive any challenge from anyone?'' Sam suddenly thought about this. It was really surprising that in these 5 months he did not receive any challenge from any of ssmate nor did his friend also try to challenge him. Sam sighs after thinking that.


    Sam began to watch the match. He can tell that both of the students have already be peak D-grade warriors. But they were still far away from the limit. But still you can see that both of them are really strong warriors. Not only that they also master the spirit technique. They can now use the spirit technique with their other techniques.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ______________


    "Sam, where are you?" Sometimeter Alexa called Sam to ask about his location. Sam told her that he was in the stadium and watching the match. Sometimeter Tony and the others also reach the stadium and they can also see the fight that was going on in the stadium. But the fight was already in thest phase.


    "Really, all of our seniors also became very powerful in these 5 months. But still breaking through to early C-grade will be the real challenge for everyone. Did you know that previously in the Dungeon I was always hoping that I will find a limit breaker that will help me but really my bad luck I did not find anything," Tony said all of this to them.


    Alexa and the others also nodded. You can say that all of them now have a small goal to break through to early C-grade. For now this will be their goal. For this, they were practicing hard.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter,


    The match was finally finished and one by one every student was leaving the stadium. Sam and his friend were also leaving the stadium and right now they were going toward the cafeteria. After the previous incident you can say that the security around the cafeteria also increased. This is the ce where you can say that every student from the Royal Academy eats their food, so if suddenly someone poisoned your food then it would be dangerous for the students. Because of this the security around the cafeteria increased.


    "Did you find any clue about that person?" Tony asks Sam this. They are also very interested to know about this. You can say that all of them are very serious about this matter because someone tried to poison their friend and it was a very serious matter.


    " Sigh, still didn''t find any clue. Previously because of the monster invasion that person used that chance to erase all those clues about him. He was really from the dark association because he already used the device from the dark association to clear all the clues about him. But nothing I was worried about was that that person could be from our Academy or any other Academy. He is the most dangerous thing because we don''t know who this person is but he could harm us," Sam said with a serious expression.


    Really it was a very serious matter. Even the Saints were serious about this. But because they also need to handle other serious matters they did not get that much time to be involved in this case. But fortunately they are subordinates already trying to find the culprit.


    ____________________


    "Well, guys, next month once again we have the annual college gradepetition. Don''t forget about that. Most likely all the students who participated in the annual collegepetition will be there. We can search about the culprit in thatpetition. Most likely the warrior association will search for that culprit," suddenly at this time Jeni said that. Only then does everyone remember that next month they really have thispetition. Like the annual collegepetition, thispetition is also a grandpetition. Every year thispetition was organized between June or July.


    Sam and the others nodded after hearing her. They did not forget about thispetition. Like the annual collegepetition thispetition is also a grandpetition but the most interesting thing about thispetition was that there is no restriction on thispetition. Means anyone can participate in thispetition as long as he was a college student.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 333 333 - Sam Vs Tony

    Tony swings his sword toward Sam. But Sam also wasn''t slow. He also swung his sword and both of the swords shed against each other. Instantly both of them jumped backward and once again started going toward each other. Both of them already coated their sword with their spiritual energy. But at this time you could look at the difference between Sam and Tony. Tony''s sword was glowing a deep blue color. It represents how much spiritual energy he was channeling and how powerful his spiritual energy was. On the other hand if you look at San then you will notice that right now his sword was coated with his white Spiritual energy.


    Butpared to Tony, Sam wasn''t using that much spiritual energy on his sword. As you know, the power behind the pure spiritual energy was much greater than the normal spiritual energy and because of this, he did not use the full power of his spiritual energy. They were just sparing because of this he did not want to injure Tony that much. Actually, Tony suddenly asked him toe to the training ground and then told him that he wanted to spar with him. Sam also did not have any problem with that and because of this as you can see that both of them were fighting like this.


    Sometimeter,


    "I have to say that you have already be so powerful and have already reached my level. Your master over The Spirit technique was greater than me. Haha¡­ I don''t think so I will be able to win our next match, " after finishing their match both of them were now resting and at this time Sam said this to Tony.


    "Ooh¡­ shut up!!! Haha¡­ I know that you were holding back while fighting me, so don''t say something like this. Don''t worry, it won''t be that long when I will bear you," at this time, Tony Told this to Sam.


    After seeing that both of them looked at each other and a few secondster both of them started tough. It was true that Sam was holding back but you still cannot underestimate Tony, because he really improved very much. These few months Sam and his friends were busy only in Dungeon and training and because of these they did not get that much chance to hangout together and also they did not get that much chance to spar against each other. Because of this Sam wasn''t sure of their power level but he had to say that he was really surprised after looking at the power of Tony. Like him Tony also did not show his full power while fighting because it wasn''t required.


    Both of them were now resting in the training room when suddenly some people entered the training room. At this time some who wereying down on the ground looked toward the door and saw that it was Alexa, Jeni and Elena. Sam smiled at them and once again went back to resting.


    On the other hand, Alexa, Jeni and Elena after entering the training room get surprised when they see that both of the boys are nowying down on the ground. Not only that when they look at the sword marks on the training room, they be speechless.


    "Why didn''t any of you inform us that you will being to the Academy." Jeni said that with her angry voice.


    "Haha¡­ sorry sorry. I am just too excited to fight with Sam. Ipletely forgot to inform you. Haha¡­" Tony said that. Only then Jeni smiled. She also knows that every one of thempares themselves to Sam every time and because of this, you can say that they really wanted to fight him to know about their limits and how much they improve.


    Sometimeter,


    Tony and Sam have already recovered from their exhausted state. They were now going toward the cafeteria with the girls beside them. Actually the girlse here to inform them that they will be going to the Dungeon today. Actually their teachers decided that all of them will be going together in the Dungeon and these Dungeons will be a C-grade dungeon. Kenny, Tina, Saara, Dan and Kira are already going to the Dungeon today and because of this right now you cannot see anyone.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Also one thing you should know is that after every student gets their personal teacher, they don''t need toe to the ssroom for sses. Not only them but teachers like Samantha or Nitin also did note to the ssroom. Right now every teacher is busy with their students. Every student needs to know some basic knowledge and they already learn all those in the first few months. Because of this right now they could only focus on their grinding in the Dungeon.


    "Ahhh¡­ teacher Jack told me to rest two more days and only then will he bring me to a new Dungeon. Most likely he already went to a higher Dungeon with my seniors. Sigh, he also told me not to enter Dungeon." Suddenly Tony said that to everyone. His teacher was Jack. You are also one of the best swordsmen you will find in the Royal Academy.


    "What about you, Sam? Will you go to any Dungeon with teacher Alena?" Alexa asked this to Sam. But at this time Sam informs them his teacher was busy and because of this she won''t be able to go with him. But at this time he also told him that he did not have any restriction so he can go to any Dungeon. After hearing that the girls be happy they also told him that if he did not have any problem then he coulde with them. But unfortunately Sam already had a n and because of this he rejected them.


    ________________


    Around 5:00 p.m. Sam came back to his house. He can see his mum and dad and also his sister present in the house. Most likely everyone already came back from their Dungeon adventure and right now everyone was resting in their room. Because of this, Sam did not disturb anyone and he also went back to his room.


    Before anything he wants to rest for sometime and because of this he alsoys down on his bed. Afterying down on his bed he began to look at the news on his phone but he couldn''t see any interesting news so he was just getting bored. Because of this he began to look at the information about Dungeons around him. As you know that he already said he already decided that he will go to the ghost Dungeon that was present in the Venus City. There he will find a peak D-grade ghost. So that was enough for him. But still he wanted to look at the information of other Dungeons and also wanted to see if any strange thing was happening or not.


    Sometimeter after finish looking at the description of the Dungeons he switch off his phone and then begin to look at the system shop. Even though right now he did not have that much gold coin but still he already saved 150 k gold coins. He had more than this but previously he use them to buy something from the shop and because of this right now he only had 150 k. But it does not matter because right now he did not see any interesting thing that you wanted to buy from the system other than the crystals. Also one more thing was that the scroll he get from the boss scorpion was really useful for him. From that scroll he gets the poison resistance technique and because of this you can see that he now doesn''t need to be against poison.


    Well right now he can see many things that you wanted to buy but the price of those things were really high and because of this he didn''t even want to look at them. But at this time he rxed his mind and then he began to look at his inventory. He wanted to see if he had any extra things that he did not need. But unfortunately other than his necessary things he did not put anything in the inventory or he already sold those extra things.


    After buying some crystals from the system shop he finally closed the system window. Right now it was done, he began to absorb all these crystals. Really it was fortunate that his system now has the shop function and with that he could easily buy crystals from his shop. It was really one of the best things that he could expect from his system.


    Sometimeter Sam finally opens his eyes after finishing scvmmmmm¨ªierving the crystals. Previously he already bought many crystals from the shop and because of this right now he did not bought that many crystals from the shop. Because one box of crystal''s price was highepared to those normal spiritual crystals box you will find in the shop.


    _______To be continued_________

 Chapter 334 334 - Ghost Dungeon

    Sam after saying goodbye to his parents, he left his house with his sister. Well Gloria is also going toward a Dungeon and because of this, she takes alone with Sam. Sam was going in the same direction where she will go and because of this she was going with him. Right now Sam was driving the car while Gloria was sitting beside him.


    Right now both of them are talking about their recent adventure in the dungeon. Also the technique or you can say energy mode that Sam taught her was really useful. In her previous dungeon adventure she needed to use that technique because monsters were alreadying very close to her and because of this she used that technique and surprisinglypared to the spirit technique she was able to kill those monsters easily using the energy mode.


    ''Will I be able to teach them the new technique where they can also absorb pure spiritual energy?'' He needed to know the answer. If he can teach his family those new fuse techniques then everyone of them will be powerful and it can assure Sam that his family was safe. He decided to try that aftering back from this Dungeon. Well you can say that recently he is only busy hunting monsters and training. Even though he wanted to rx, he knew that he did not have the time to rx because the danger was approaching toward Eden blue.


    Sometimeter,


    Near the Kobold Dungeon, he stops his car because he can see his sister''s teammates. Fiona and the others were waiting for Gloria. They also so him and begin to walk to our team. Gloria this time gets down from the car. After saying goodbye to her sister he left that ce and began to drive his car toward Venus City. You can say that in the central city you will find five different Dungeons, it was one of the most important things about the central city.


    1 hourter,


    Sam at this time already came near the ghost Dungeon of the Venus City. After parking his car he started to go toward the dungeon guide to know about the situation of this Dungeon.


    __________


    Sometimeter, Sam finally started to go toward the Dungeon. The guide already told him everything and because of this he was now going toward the dungeon. You will find your mostly humanoid ghost. But all of them were ck ghosts and each of them had a different power. As you know the mostmon humanoid ghost can use the mind control attack but other than that they have two types of humanoid ghosts. One of them is very fast and they can also attack you with their long hands. Don''t think that it was a normal attack because the name of this ghost was poisonous ghosts.


    The ghost''s Full body was full of poison, and as you know that it can also possess your body and also attack you with their mind control attack. There was one more humanoid ghost that had two head. This humanoid ghost attacks you with their fear aura. You still those Warriors who did not have strong will power will be affected by that and they will lose their ability to fight. Not only that, the mostmon thing about all these ghosts was that every ghost could absorb The Spiritual essence from your body and it can also kill you. This is also one of the reasons the ghost monsters were very dangerous and not everybody wanted toe to the ghost Dungeon.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now you can see that Sam was now in a dark forest. Other than the moonlight you won''t be able to see any light in this forest. Like every other ghost Dungeon, you will never be able to see the sun in this ghost Dungeon. But Sam did not have any problem with that but also because of the moon or you can say the simr thing like the moon already increased the power of Sam. He was using the power of the moon technique to increase his power. Not only that he also already activated his spiritual vision technique. Instantly he is able to see around himself clearly.


    Right now can see that he wasn''t alone in this ce because he can also spot many warriors. But Sam did not care about them and he just only focused on his own work. Wasting no time he was advancing in that dark forest. Nobody knows how deep this forest was from the outside of the forest so to know about this forest you need to go deeper.


    Sam didn''t even advance that much, but suddenly he began to hear some sound. It was like a horror movie where he was now in the forest and he suddenly heard the voice of a girl who was crying. But Sam maintains his calmness and with his spiritual vision he tries to locate the position of that voice. It did not take him that long to locate the position of the voice.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Right now in front of Sam, he can see a small girling toward him. But Sam did not waste any more time and quickly attacked that little girl. Instantly that little girl began to Roar in pain and suddenly her body began to change and it instantly changed into its real appearance. Right now he can see a ghost in front of him, but his me wears enough to kill that.


    Not long after that he can also hear many voices. Most likely all those voices belong to those Ghosts. At this time Sam was already very alert and he was now trying to spot those ghosts. Not only that but his attack was already ready. The moment he found those ghosts he did not waste anymore time and quickly shot his fireballs toward them. One by one he attacked all those ghosts and finally killed them. All this you can only hear the loud scream that wasing out from those ghosts after getting hit by his attack.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam is still advancing in this forest to find more monsters. In this floor he will mainly face those early D-grade and intermediate D-grade monsters. Because of this, Sam did not waste anymore chances and quickly killed them. He is still working two more hours to reach the central area of this forest where he will find the entrance of the next floor. He could have directly gone to that ce just after entering the fast floor but those crystals he will get in this floor also work for him so because of this he was now collecting those crystals while going toward the entrance of the next floor.


    Sometimeter once again Sam was not facing 20 ghosts at the same time. All of them tried to attack his mind but unfortunately it did not have any effect on him. On the other hand he gets to know the location of these ghosts, so wasting your time he also attacks them with his fireballs.


    ______________


    6 hourster,


    After fighting for 6 hours continuously Sam was not feeling exhausted. He decided to raise it for sometime but before that you already prepared safety for his tent. He also ced fire torches around that ce and he also already activated the Monster repealing device. With both devices most of the monsters won''t approach his tent. Well Sam has already activated the life sign detecting device. So with that he can also stay safe from any ghosts or any Warrior who wanted to kill him.


    ''Sigh, this creepy ce and the creepy voices.'' Sam sighs. Really all the ghost Dungeons were very creepy. If most of the Warriors have the chance to choose them they will never choose the ghost Dungeon. But unfortunately other than the ghost Dungeon you won''t be able to find spirit crystals. Because of this you can tell that all those Warriors need toe to the ghost Dungeon.


    Currently Sam has alreadye to the next floor. Previously after hunting those monsters on the first floor he decided to go to the next road directly and because of this he did not waste anymore time and quickly used his concealment technique. With this, he was able to move so quickly ande to the 2nd floor. Right now, here he is mainly fighting peak D-grade monsters. Sam will spend his time here while those monsters. Right now he has the n to collect as many spirit crystals as he can on this floor. Only after collecting sufficient spirit crystals he will leave this dungeon. Actually you can say that right now Sam was preparing to reach the limit of peak D-grade. Because of this he was now collecting all of this.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now Sam was facing 5 two headed ghosts. Everyone of them is trying to attack him with their fearful aura. But all of them were ineffective in front of Sam. Suddenly one of them attacks Sam with dark Ray. But Sam is able to react on time and Dodge that attack.


    ________To be continued_________

 Chapter 335 335 - Who Are They?

    Sam quickly shoots one ghost with his blue fireball. After that he got away from that ce. Those four remaining ghosts tried to attack him, but he avoided their attack. But he wasn''t slow and instantly turned around and fired one more fireball. Only two ghosts were able to react quickly and avoided that attack and the remaining got hit by the fireball. Instantly those two ghosts began to scream and at the end they got turned into Ash.


    Sam at this time quickly shoots more fireballs toward those remaining two ghosts. Even though they were able to react on time, they did not escape from all those fireballs and at the end they got killed by that. You have to say that the fireball made out of pure spiritual energy was really very powerful. It did not even take a second to kill the ghosts.


    Sam, after collecting the loot once again begins to advance. He will not leave this floor until he doesn''t have enough crystals and loot. As you know, killing the monsters did not give him any gold coin and because of this he wanted to get loot from the Dungeon and after selling them he could get gold coins.


    ________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam was now resting. After fighting this long he was now feeling exhausted and he also felt hungry and because of this he was now resting. Like usual he already set up a life detecting device. It already gives in signals that many Warriors are entering the range of the device. But some did not worry about that because he can see that every Warriors were busy with their own work. One thing he noticed in these few days was that there were many Warriors who most likely came to this dungeon without any teammates like him. Well solo Warriors weren''t umon.


    ''I should visit the danger zone.'' Sam thought about this. Well he knows that it was risky, but as you know that he eagerly wanted to try a new feature of his system. In these few months he never went to the danger zone. He only focused on leveling up but he was very curious. Because of this, he decided that he will visit the dangerous zone next. Also at the same time he wanted to check the location of the base of the dark association.  The headquarters of The Dark association wasn''t in the safe zone but it was present in the danger zone and because of this previously the saints did not find the base of the dark association in the safe zone even after searching.


    On the other hand, he also did not find any clue about the culprit who poisoned him earlier. But he did not give up on this and he was still searching for that. He was 100% sure that the person was rted to the college and also rted to the dark association. Because of this he wanted to find out about this person.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam once again got up from the ground and it was time for him to find monsters. But suddenly at this time he looked at his life detecting device and it showed him some peopleing toward his direction. Wasting no time he quickly hid himself. A few minutester he finally met some people that came in his direction. But one thing really startled him. Right now in front of him he can see 20 people going somewhere. But the most interesting thing was that all of them hid themselves and because of this Sam did not get to see their faces.


    Don''t know why but Sam was feeling that something was different with these 20 people and because of this he decided to follow them. If someone gets to know then they will say that he was a stalker, Sam always trusts his instincts. His instincts already saved many times and right now his instance was telling him that something was wrong with these 20 people. He already looked over those people with his spiritual vision but he did not say any abnormality but still he decided to follow them.


    "So, this is the ghost dungeon you were talking about. Really the dark spiritual energy created all of this and all the ghosts. If I am not wrong then those humans still did not know the side effect of getting in contact with the dark spiritual energy. Most likely those people who will spend their time in this type of dungeon will have some problem in their body if they aren''t strong enough." Suddenly at this time Sam heard someone saying this. This instantly made him curious. What are they talking about? What is the side effect of staying in the ghost Dungeon? He already knows that the dark spiritual energy could harm anyone''s mind and health, are they talking about this? Right now Sam has all of this question in his mind while he follows them.


    "Yea, really all these humans still didn''t know anything." One again someone said that.


    " Shh!! Keep quiet. We did note here toin about the humans. We came here to observe all these ghosts. So just focus on your work and stopining about those humans." Suddenly one of them said that with his angry voice. Most likely he was angry because all of them did not pay attention to their own work.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "You are the right boss. But still, why did King Arthur want us toe here? Compared to our this Eden blue didn''t even have that much power or resources." Suddenly one of themined about this.


    " Shh!!!! You fool. Why are youining about the king''s decision? He naturally has his reason for sending us here. Right now everyone should know that we need to only focus on our main mission and other than that don''t get involved with those humans and their business." Most likely at this time the leader said this to all those people. Everybody nodded after hearing that. Nobody wanted to get involved with the humans.


    " Well, you should n''t know but I previously heard from the king that something very precious was present in this Eden blue. Even though King Arthur did not say anything about that thing but he told me that that thing was very precious that many other races can fight for that and most likely they will also send their people in this Eden blue. So right now our main focus should be finding that thing before those other races." At this time the leader said that.


    Sam, who was hiding himself near those people, got very shocked after hearing all of this. What are they talking about? What is this precious thing that they were talking about? Who is King Arthur that sends these people to search for that precious thing? Like this right now some has many question that nobody could able to answer them until he did not Interrogate these people


    But the main problem was that he did not know any evidence against them and also without any evidence he wouldn''t be able to interrogate these people. At this time wasting no sound he still deserted to hear what they were talking about.


    " Don''t worry, leader. Those other people won''t be able to find that thing before us." Suddenly one of them said to their leader with their assuring tone. The leader nodded after that and began to advance in the dark forest.


    All this time Sam was following them without making any. Most likely all of them came to this Dungeon to find something here but until now they did not find anything. Because of this you can say that the leader was getting desperate. Even after searching for this long from Dungeon to Dungeon that did not find any clue about that thing. But it does not mean that they were given up. The main thing was that their king was given them because of this, all of them know that it was very important for them to know about the precious.


    Sam was getting more curious about all of this. You can say that at this time Sam was ready to use his full power to kidnap one of them and then Interrogate one if them. But most likely it will be this key and because of this he did not decide to take the risk.


    ______________


    Sometimeter,


    These 20 people were now fighting ghosts. Right now 30 ghosts were in front of them. But most likely after seeing those ghosts all of them did not think that much and decided to fight them. At this time he can tell that all these 20 people were Elite. It did not take them that much time to kill all those 30 monsters easily. After seeing all of this you can say that Sam has already be very alert. Who are they? Why are they so powerful? Right now Sam was thinking all of this type of question in his mind.


    ______To be continued_______

 Chapter 336 336 - Follow Them

    "Leader, we almost searched half of this floor and we still did not find anything. It looks like we need to advance to the next floor, but I still did not think that we will find anything in this Dungeon. Sigh, it would be good if the Queen told us what we are searching for. But even after asking her she only told us that she will tell us when it was the right time," one of them sighed. All this time they were searching on the second floor but still they did not find anything abnormal. Because of this one of them got bored and he quickly wanted to go to the next floor to search.


    "Shh!!! Don''tin. If somehow the Queen gets to know about this then she will kill all of us. As you know that she already sent her special force also in this Eden blue. So don''tin about our queen and king." Suddenly at this time the leader told him to shut up because if somehow the Queen''s special force got to know about this then all would die. Even though they were powerful, they weren''t as powerful as those special forces of the queen.


    All this time Sam was following them using his concealment technique and because of this, none of them were able to find anything wrong about their surroundings. All this time Sam was following them and he already saw the weird behavior of these people. Just looking at them you can tell that they did note here to kill those monsters but it looks like they came here to search for something. What are they searching for? He really wanted to know about this, but he did not care. Because most likely those people were powerful and they still did not use their full power. They also talk about going to the next floor and with that Sam bes sure that all of them were powerful.


    Sometimeter,


    All of them already came close to the entrance of the next floor and wasting no time they began to go toward the next floor. Sam also follows them. Because of his superior concealment technique he did not need to worry about those monsters and with that he could go to those higher floors.


    Sometimeter aftering to this next floor sem can see many Warriors also present in this floor. Some of them also juste to this floor while some of them leave this floor. But at this time Sam still focused on those weird people. Those people also wait there for sometime and at this time they are looking at those Warriors. It was like they were observing those Warriors but most likely they got disappointed and they once again began to advance.


    Like the previous floor this floor also has a forest or you can say a dark forest. Most likely those people also have some kind of night vision and because of this, they did not have any problem with the darkness.


    Actually if you are wondering why Sam was following them, then it was because he was trying to find out about the identity of this person and also trying to find out about them. Just hearing their words he can tell they did not belong to the Eden blue. So, the question is now how they came to the Eden blue? Also the most important question is what are the searches? What is special about the Eden blue is that they came to this ce and even many other species also came to this ce to search about that. All of this really made him very curious.


    ''Most likely the danger was also approaching Eden blue because of that precious thing that was present in the Eden blue. Most likely this thing will help that danger to be more powerful and because of this it was targeting the Eden blue. Sigh, I need to interrogate one of them to get to know all of this answer.'' Sam thought about this.


    But still there was a problem because he didn''t know how powerful those people were and he did not want to carelessly attack them. Because of this, you can say that Sam was following them. He wanted to find out about the real power of these people and also tried to find a chance where he could have kidnapped one of them.


    [A/N:- Herees the kidnapper Sam.]


    In this floor they once again get attacked by the ghost but they easily take care of all those ghosts. But at this time Sam noticed one thing that these people did not take those loot. It looks like they didn''t even care about those loots. They just ignore those loots and only focus on searching around.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sometimeter,


    Sam already reached the limit of his concealment technique. He needed to rest for sometime and because of this he also needed to search for a good ce to hide. Now on this floor he needs to worry about those monsters and at the same time he needs to hide himself from those people. But he could not lose those people and because of this he also needed to hide from where he was still able to look over these people.


    Fortunately at this time those people decided to rest. Even though they weren''t humans, they still felt exhausted after walking and fighting this much. They also decided to rest for sometime. This floor and thest floor need to be searched but still if they did not find anything in this dungeon then they can only leave this Dungeon. Actually the queen specifically did not tell them anything about that important thing present in the Eden blue and because of this nobody has the information about that. The queen only told him that in the Eden blue the Core was present. Now that is a really confusing thing for them. What was the core that the Queen was talking about?


    Because of this all of the thought that it could be rted to the monster core and because of this they decided to search in the Dungeons. But they got disappointed because still now they did not get any core from the monsters.


    If Sam gets to know about all of these then you can say that he will be confused. Monsters present in the Dungeons did not have any type of core and only the monsters present in the danger zone will have that kind of thing. But because those people only juste to the Eden blue they did not know anything about it.


    "Leader, I think we can only find about the cores in the Royal dungeon. In this Eden blue you can only find 10 Gama grade Royal dungeons. Other than that you won''t find anything rted to the beta or Alpha. Most likely because of this all the humans still did not know anything about us or those other things. But nowing back to the main matter, most likely we will find all the information in that ce," at this time one of them said all of this to their leader. After hearing all of this, their leader thought for some time and he also thought that most likely he would find information rted to this in the royal Dungeon even though it was a Gamma grade.


    "Even if you are right, we still need to search all thesemon Dungeons carefully. As you know, the queen did not exin anything to us and because of this we need to search everywhere carefully." The leader said that. At this time the leader also thought that after leaving this dungeon he would once again contact the Queen. It would be better for them if the queen decided to tell them some information why all of them will have a clear idea about the thing that they were searching for.


    "Also all of you should know that we aren''t alone. Even though humans present in this Dungeon weren''t as powerful as us, I still don''t want any conflict between us, so we try to avoid them. Also be careful because if somehow those humans get close to us and get to know about all of this from us, then we could be in danger. So you should also be alert about your surroundings." At this time the leader said that.


    At this time Sam was maintaining a distance between him and those people and because of this, he was not able to hear all of this thing at this time. At this time even though Sam was focusing on the people, he was also alert about his surroundings. The ghost in this floor was very powerfulpared to the previous floor and it could be dangerous for him. Fortunately, still no ghost attacked him, and also after resting for sometime he can once again use his concealment technique. So until then he needs to be careful about those ghosts and also he should not lose those people.


    _________To be continued__________

 Chapter 337 337 - Informing Markus

    Right now, those people are on thest floor. They already came to the boss room after searching around the floor. This is the final ce they will search but if they still did not find anything rted to the core, they will leave this dungeon. Sam doesn''t know but these people have many of their subordinates, they were also searching in different Dungeons.


    Everyone right now came to a big dark room. Because of the hole in the ceiling, moonlight is able to enter this room and with that moonlight you can see around but still it was clear. Sam also follows those people this time and he also enters the boss room. He can feel the creepy feeling while he enters this room. Right now a pin drop silence was present in this room and he cannot see any Monster around this room but don''t know why the moment he entered this room he was feeling cold.


    "Quickly, find that monster. We did not have that much time to waste," suddenly at this time the leader of that group said that. Only at this time Sam noticed those people. Even though he wasn''t able to see their faces, one thing was clear that all of them were calm in this situation. Well Sam can already guess the reason behind all of this. All those people are powerfulpared to the Boss monster and because of this they did not want to waste any more time in this ce.


    Suddenly two of them extended their hand and a light ball began to appear. But it wasn''t there. One after another the light balls began to appear and the whole room was now full with those light balls. Only at this time Sam finally notices the Boss monster. But most likely those people did not want to waste their time. Suddenly those light balls quickly went toward that was Monster and out of nowhere they began to attack the boss monster.


    The Boss monster wanted to avoid those attacks and you can say that he was sessful but unexpectedly more of those light balls appeared and right now the Boss monster was surrounded by those light balls. Wasting no time those light balls begin to attack that Boss. Sam waspletely and familiar with that attack and because of this he doesn''t know anything about this. But one thing is clear that this attack was very powerful. It only take those people 5 to 6 minute to kill the Boss monster.


    "Sigh, leader, we did not see anything rted to the core. Most likely we just waste our time." After killing that Boss monster those people begin to search around the room but they did not find anything rted to the core.


    Their leader also sighs after hearing that.


    "Sigh, we just waste our time here. Let''s get out of this Dungeon. Let''s check out the others, if they found something or not." After saying that the leader suddenly brings out a scroll. He quickly crushed that scroll and instantly all those people began to glow in white color. Less than a secondter, all of them vanished from that room.


    Sam who was just hiding all this time was really surprised very much after seeing all of this. These people were really very powerful. Only two of them were able to kill the Boss monster in just 5 to 6 minutes. Not only that, they also have something that teleports them from here to their next destination. You can say that Sam was very much shocked after seeing all of this and he was now feeling an urgency in his heart. He quickly wanted to leave this Dungeon and contact saints. You wanted to know if the Saints know anything about it or not.


    Sam quickly put all the loot in his inventory and then left the room. He was now using his full speed to go toward the exit of this floor.


    __________________


    12 hourster,


    Finally Sam once again came back to the second floor. Right now he is resting. You can say that after activity the concealment technique for at least 12 hours it really put pressure on his body. Because of this right now you can say that Sam was mentally exhausted. Before continuing on his journey he wanted to rest for sometime. Even though following those people he did not find any clue about their origin but you can say that he got a lot of good loot while following those people. Those people weren''t interested in the loot, so Sam just collected them and stored them in his inventory.


    Around his base he already set the monster repealing device and also set the life sigh detecting the. Because of this he can rx while resting. He was now looking at the loot that he got from those people. Everyone of those loots are good but the most good thing was that in the boos room he found a limit breaker. It is also a special Grade limit breaker. Using his supreme upgrade he could upgrade this limit breaker to the next grade and then his sister could use this.


    ____________________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Next day, 2 p.m.,


    Sam is finally out of the Dungeon. Westing no time he quickly contacted Saint Markus. You can say that because of the previous incidents he already has a very good connection with Saint Markus. Actually if it was before then he did not want to disturb those saints and wanted to inform his teacher first. But right now his teacher is in a critical condition and he did not want to disturb her. Because of this, Sam decided to directly contact Saint Markus.


    Saint Markus is alsoing back from a S-grade dungeon. He went to the Dungeon to kill the Boss monster. After killing that, he finally came out of the Dungeon. Compared to other Dungeons you can say that the S-grade dungeons were really different. All the monsters inside of this Dungeon were very intelligent and not only that but this type of dungeon had only one floor. It was like you will directly go to the boss room and you will face the Boss monster with his subordinates.


    He was now floating in the sky while looking at those Warriors that were on duty. Actuallypared to those other Dungeons, entering a S-grade Dungeon was really different. Before entering the Dungeon every Warrior who guards the Dungeon gate checks the requirement of a warrior or his group. Every group of Warrior should have 10 people of peak A-grade warriors, or if someone wanted to solo, then he needed to be a S-grade warrior. Only when the Warriors fully feel this criteria can they enter the Dungeon.


    Markus was looking at those Warriors while thinking something but suddenly at this time his phone began to ring. Westing no time he quickly looked at his phone and saw that it was Sam who was calling him. He begins to get confused because he isn''t able to guess the reason for his calling. But quickly pick up the phone.


    "Hello, sir, this is Sam Kainer. I just wanted to ask you if you know anything about other people in the world''s people?" Sam did not waste anymore time and directly asked him this question.


    On the other hand, Markus after hearing his question for a moment wasn''t able to think for a moment. But a secondter, he finally came back to his senses and only then did he realize that Sam was asking him if he knew about any other world people or not.


    "Why is this sudden question Sam? Did you see anything?" Suddenly instead of answering the question Markus asked him this question.


    "Yes sir, because of this, i am asking you this question." Sam directly says that he found some clue about the other world people and because of this, he asks him this question.


    "Sigh, Well, I will tell you about itter. Wait for me, I need to finish my work first. Also, don''t tell anyone anything about this. Not even your family." After saying that Markus hung up the call.


    Sam on the other hand gets more confused after hearing the order from Saint Markus. Even though he did not give him any answer, that reaction was enough for Sam to say that he most likely knew nothing about those other world''s people.


    Sam put the phone in his pocket and then walked toward the parking section. He wanted to go back to his house and after freshening up he will think about all of this. But still while going toward his home Sam just only thinking about those weird people and also thinking about Saint Markus. He told Sam to wait for sometime because he was busy. Because of this, Sam goes back to his house. But still, Sam can feel that most likely Saint Markus knows something about this. But he just didn''t want to tell me. Most likely before giving me any answer he wanted to talk with his teammates.


    ''Sigh, what aplicated life I am living,'' Sam sighed.


    _________To be continued_______

 Chapter 338 338 - Information About Other Worlder

    Sam finally came back to his house. He can see that neither his sister nor his parents did not came back from their adventure. Fortunately Sam already prepared for that and he already ordered his food. Well Saint Markus told him that he will inform him about the ce where he will meet him.


    ''Sigh, it would be good if Saint Markus told me all the details or all this really makes me very curious. I don''t even know what was happening and what I was searching for. Really I am living aplicated life.'' Sam thought that while he was eating his food.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam was now resting in his bedroom. Saint Markus already told him that he will meet him around 8:00 p.m. so you can say that he had enough time to rest and recover his mental health. Really while following those people Sam overused his supreme concealment technique. Because of this, you can say that he was having that headache earlier. After bing a peak D-grade warrior the capacity of his body also increased but still it was very hard for him to maintain the concealment technique for at least 24 hours without deactivating it. Because of this, he needed to rest his mind for some time to recover his mental energy.


    4 hourster, 7:00 p.m.


    Sam finally wakes up from his sleep. He still has 1 hour before meeting Saint Markus. So right now he was now looking at his system window and already brought out all the crystals that he got from this Dungeon. Wasting no time he quickly begins to absorb all the crystals and at the same time if you look at his status screen then you can see that the number of his status begins to increase rapidly. Sam still needed some time to reach the limit of the peak D-grade. But still he wanted to break through as quickly as he could.


    Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (210p/2100)


    Spiritual energy: (3400/3400)


    Strength: A- / 439


    Agility: A- / 438


    Physique: A- / 439


    Intelligent(mental power): A- / 440


    Spirit: A- / 445


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D+) (peak)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 35M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (+)


    Neo sword style (Grade C) (+)


    Invisible shot (C-grade) (+)


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (+)


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (+)


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade C) (+)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade C) (+)


    Movement technique:<novelnext></novelnext>


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Supreme Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade D) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: C) (+)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    As you can see after using all the crystals this was his status right now. Compared to his other status he was able to increase spirit status to 445, that means A-. When he is able to increase that and be able to break through to S, his spiritual energy will increase once again by 300 points.


    Right now he has enough points and he could try fusing his Sword techniques. But then after some thinking he decided he will do thatter. Because right now he won''t be able to fuse his fast cut with his other Sword technique. If he wants to fuse those three then he needs to upgrade his other two techniques to B-grade and only then will he be able to fuse those three techniques.


    At this time he was now looking at the inventory and he was selling all the useless things in his inventory in the system shop. Those unnecessary roots will give him the required gold coins. Even though right now he did not want to buy anything from the shop but still he wanted to save gold coins.


    ___________


    Around 8:00 p.m.,


    Sam was now going toward the warrior association. Well he previously thought Saint Markus would tell him toe to another ce but still he decided to tell him toe to the warrior association. So he was just now going toward the warrior association. You have to say that the weather was very hot today. Even though it was 8:00 p.m. he was still sweating.


    It did not take him that long to reach the warrior association. After parking his car he began to walk toward the reception area. Just when he asked the receptionist about Saint Markus, she smiled at him and then told him to follow her. So Sam, wasting no time, begins to follow her. It did not take them that much long and right now they were in front of the office room.


    Sam did not directly enter the door and knock on the door. At this time, Saint Markus gave him permission to enter and only then Sam entered the office room. But after entering the office room Sam was very surprised because Saint Markus wasn''t alone in the room. Saint Vena, Saint, Mira, Saint John, and the others Saint also present in that room. Almost every saint was present in the room. And right now all of them are waiting for him and sharing his experience with them.


    Sam  really gets surprised for a minute but then he is able to calm down. Most likely Saint Markus told him toe because of this serious matter. Even though Sam right now did not know anything but he can still till that it was most likely a very important matter for everyone and because of this almost everyone was present in this room.


    Saint Markus, after seeing him, smiled at him. Sam finally sits down and they can finally start their meeting. Saint Markus did not waste anymore time. He directly asked him about his experience. How did he get to know about those other world people? What is their motive? Right now, Saint Markus asked all these questions. Not only him but those other people were also very interested and very curious.


    Sam also did not waste any more time and quickly began to exin everything from the first tost. He did not leave any details.


    He told everyone how he met those people and after that how he followed them. Well he did not say anything about his concealment technique, but everyone present in the room already knew that Sam was very good at concealment.


    It took some time to finish his exnation. After finishing the exnation right now is the heavy atmosphere present in this room. All Saints were very serious right now. Except Saint Mira, Saint Markus and the others were very serious about this. What was the motive of those other people? Everyone of them were curious to find out about that and on the other hand they were also curious about the core. What is the core that they were searching for?


    "This is top secret information but because you already meet people from other countries I don''t want it to hide anything from you. Actually, when monsters suddenly starteding to our through those portals , some people from the other world also came to our. It was those people who told him that if they kill those monsters they will get resources from that and with that they could be powerful. Not only that at the time we already asked about the motive of those people but none of them trailers anything. They just only said one thing that in future if the core hatches sessfully then it will be very good for the Eden blue.


    After that we began to search around those people but until now we did not find anyone nor did I find anything rted to the other world. But one thing was for sure thatpared to asking the other world, people were much stronger. So as you can see why we are very serious right now. If you are telling us the truth then most likely those people will now attack those Royal Dungeons. Because of this we are right now very serious. We just recently were able to solve everything and a new problem once again appeared. Sigh, we still did not even know how the hell those people vanished from the dungeon."


    At this time, Saint Markus exined everything to him. He also tells him why he did not want anyone to know about this because this could make many Warriors curious and they can do any reckless thing that could make them lose their life. Unfortunately Sam was not able to see their faces and because of this he won''t be able to help them find those people. But one thing was that while previously he was observing those people using his spiritual vision, he noticed that those people most likely weren''t humans.


    _____To be continued_____

 Chapter 339 339 - Improvement

    Saint Markus already takes action. He increases the security over those supreme Dungeons. Not only that he also appointed many Warriors from all over the world to watch over all the cities. Right now all those Warriors only have one mission, that is if they somehow get to notice some weird people in the city or near the Dungeon they should quickly inform the warrior association. Well, Saint Markus did not inform anyone clearly what they need to find for but he just told him that they just need to find some weird people and if they notice they should immediately inform the warrior association.


    What is the reason for all of this? You can say that this question was circting in the mind of every Warrior. Right now all of them are very confused by the action of the Warrior association. Who are those people and what do they do? Many of them wanted to ask the warrior association this question but they did not get any answer from the association. The Warrior association only told them that those people were dangerous. Other than this they did not say anything. So you can say that everybody was very curious about this. But still after hearing that it was dangerous all of them were also on alert.


    Right now, Markus, and the others were going toward the supreme Dungeons. Everyone of them were going toward different Dungeons. They wanted to check inside of the supreme Dungeons. At the same time they will enter 5 Dungeons while 2 saints will enter the same dungeon. This is for safety. Even though nobody knows but all the saints except Mira knows how powerful the other world''s people are.


    _________________


    Well at this time Sam was in his house. He was now going toward the Royal Academy. Even though he has the training room in his house,pared to the training room provided by the Royal Academy, this training room was smaller and because of this he liked to practice in the Royal Academy.


    As you know that he just recently increased his strength and you wanted to find out how much stronger he has be. As you know that he still did not tell anyone that he was already about to reach the limit of a peak D-grade warrior. Right now his parents, sister, teacher and friends only know that he was in the breakthrough to intermediate D-grade. Wellpared to 1 year ago right now you can say that his thinking was different. If it was before then he would have thought to hide his power but right now his thinking was different and he did not n to hide his power. It was just that he did not show his full power in front of friends and the others.


    It has been many days since he fought with his teacher or his sister, because of this, none of them are aware of his power. On the other hand you also know that he did not like to show off his strength in front of others and because of this nobody knew about his full strength.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam already came to his training room and already brought out his two robots. Wasting no time he began to fight those two robots. Sam also uses his fist to fight those two robots.


    While fighting those robots Sampletely forgot about his surroundings and only focused on the robots but at this time suddenly one person entered the training room. After that while he was going toward his one training room he suddenly began to hear soundsing out from Sam''s training room. With that he naturally guesses that Sam is most likely fighting the robots. Well it was Tony who did recentlye back from the Dungeon and came to the Royal Academy for practice.


    At this time he did not n to disturb some and because of this he went toward his own training room. He also brings out his training robot and then begins to fight that robot to increase the fighting experience. So like this you can say that everyone was practicing, even those other students also practicing in the training room. They just only have a few more days and after that they will have the chance to participate in the annual college gradepetition. This is thepetition where any student can participate in thepetition. So every one of them is very excited about it. Compared to the annual collegepetition, this is the biggestpetition.


    Not only those first years but those other years students also only focus on their training. Everyone of them wanted to fight and win the match. Because of this you can say that once again an intense atmosphere created in the Royal Academy because of thatpetition. Right now every student is practicing their own or also asking their teacher to help them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Right now if you look at the students of the Royal Academy then you can see that every one of them has already be powerful. Previously it was only some people from the 4 th year who were able to break through into early C-grade, but right now you can say that almost 50% of students are able to break through. With that you can say that the reputation of the Royal Academy has already increased. Not only the fourth years but those 3rd year students are also able to break through to C-grade. Most likely this is the influence of Gloria. She was the youngest C-grade warrior, so it was natural that she increased the fighting power in all those Royal Academy''s students.


    Nowing back to the training room, Tony was fighting his robot while using his sword. You can say that he was a natural genius because he was already able to master the spirit technique and right now he can use that technique while using his movement technique. Previously he was trying to use that technique while using the movement technique and finally he seeded. Not only the movement technique but right now he was also trying to use spirit technique while using his body protection technique. When he is able to sessfully do that the defense of his body will increase once again.


    Well not only him but the others were also already powerful. Alexa also likes him. She first tried to use the spirit technique while using her body protection technique and you can say that she finally seeded on that. She was not trying to use the speed technique while using her movement. On the other hand, Jeni and Elena already master the spirit technique while using the spells. Right now they did not have any problem using both of the techniques at the same time. Not only that but right now they were working on their body protection technique.


    On the other hand, Saara is finally able to use the spirit technique while using her spell. Kira can also use the spirit technique and Dan is also able to use the spirit technique while using his archery technique. So you can say that all the top 10 students from the first year became this powerful. But those other students from the first year also weren''t that behind. Most probably Sam and his friends influence all those people. As you know, Aliya, Sam''s First friend, is also able to break through early D-grade warriors, and right now she is already very close to the limit of early D-grade.


    Because of the influence all the first year students wanted to be powerful like the top 10 students. As the principal previously said, all of them when they get the chance they all challenge the top 10 students except Sam. Everyone knows how much power he possesses and they also know that it was meaningless to challenge him and because of this nobody challenges him that much.


    Right now almost 95% students from the first year became early D-grade warriors. Also one more thing was that there was a rule in the annual college gradepetition. Even though any student can participate in that match, that student should have at least early D-grade power. Only then that student could participate in thepetition.


    _____________


    Sometimeter,


    After freshening up, Sam left the training room. But coincidentally Tony also leaves the training room at this time and both of them are able to see each other. Tony smiles andes towards some and then begins to ask him various questions. Well Tony also finished practicing and now he was going toward the cafeteria but unexpectedly he met Sam. Tony smiles toward Sam, and then both of them go toward the cafeteria.


    Both of them came near the cafeteria, they could still see the security around the cafeteria. Fortunately the security was still there. Both of them quickly order their food and then sit down. At this time both of them begin to talk about various things. But still while talking Sam did not mention anything about those other World''s people. That was a top secret thing that the Saints would announce if it was only needed.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 340 340 - Serious Discussion

    Two dayster,


    In the Goblin Dungeon of the Ion City,


    You can see that two people are fighting the goblins. Suddenly one of them jumps backward and instantly turns around. Wasting no time, he quickly swung his sword. On the other hand, the other one was facing goblins at the same time but he did not have any problem with that. He also swung his sword toward one Goblin. Because of the incense Speed the Goblin was even able to react and got split into two. On the other hand that other Goblin was about to attack that person but suddenly that person reacted and punched that Goblin.


    Well these two people are Sam and Tony. Right now both of them came to this Dungeon. Alena was still busy in her break through while Tony''s teacher was also busy with his other students. Because of this, Tony got the time toe to the Dungeon with Sam. They came here yesterday and from then they have been fighting these Goblin monsters.


    While fighting those goblins Tony also looks at Sam and he can tell that Sam was way more powerful. Sam didn''t have any problem handling these intermediate D-grade goblins. But on the other hand Tony was having some problems because he was facing these monsters without using his spirit technique. Well this is one type of training for him because after learning the spirit technique hepletely depends on that and because of this his teacher told him to not to use that technique for someday.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now both of them are eating some food. They were fighting those goblins continuously and because of this, they were feeling hungry.


    "Those girls and Dan, most likely still did note back from their Dungeon adventure. Sigh, everyone is very busy. It has been a very long time since we came to the Dungeon together as a team. I really miss our team." Tony sighed after saying that.


    " Yea, you are right. It has been very long since we came to the Dungeon together. But on the other hand, it is a very good thing that all of you focus on increasing your strength. With that we won''t be able to have any problem if suddenly we face a monster invasion." Sam also replies.


    But not only Sam and his teammates but those other students were also very busy in their training and then adventure. Right now, the annual college gradepetition ising. So it is a very good thing that everyone is preparing for that. As you know that everyone will participate in the fight so you can say that it will be a tough fight for everyone. In thispetition there will be no team or something like that. If your grades are the same, then you and your teammate will fight against each other. This is the rule of thispetition and because of this everyone was preparing for it.


    Right now in this Goblin Dungeon you not only only see Sam and Tony, but at the same time you can also see many students from the Royal Academy and the other Academy. Each of them has only one goal, collect as many crystals as you can.


    Sam on the other hand was thinking about when he will go to the danger zone. As you know, he was nning to go to the danger zone but two days ago Tony suddenly asked him to go to the Dungeon with him. Because of this he came to the Goblin Dungeon with Tony.


    Sometimeter after finishing their food both of them once again started to fight those Goblin monsters. After killing the Goblin monsters they also divide their loot. But at this time while Sam was fighting those monsters he was also observing his surroundings because he wanted to know if those other world people came to these Dungeons to investigate or not. Because of this he was alert about his surroundings.


    ''Sigh, what should I say? Life is reallyplicated. I still did not even find the name of the culprit, but on the other hand I got involved in this matter of other world''s people. Are these people also rted to that Monster that was approaching the Eden blue. Sigh, seriously goddess did not tell me anything about the danger that was approaching.


    _____________<novelnext></novelnext>


    While both of them are busy in their Dungeon adventure in the central city in a restaurant you can see 10 people eating their food. All this time people are very beautiful. It was like all of them were girls but if you look at them carefully only then you will see the difference. 6 of them were girls while four of them were boys. Also the most interesting thing was that if you look toward their ear, then you will see that their ear was pointy. Yes, your guess was right, they were from the other world. Right now because they were in a private room They did not have any problem removing their mask.


    "Well the information is true. All the human saints seem to get the information about us. Because of this day, the security in every city and in everyday Dungeon increases. Sigh, it has be quite difficult to search for the core." Suddenly one of them said that while signing. They came to this 15 days ago. Just aftering to this they begin to search for the core. These 10 people were the special guard of the elven queen. She sends her special guard also in this world to find the core. The core wasn''t your normal monster core, because they were searching for the.


    Actually, the elven queen already feels that most likely the core of the Eden blue will appear and because of this she sent many people to search for it. Previously one time she came to this but that time the condition of this was very different. That time she feels it won''t be long when the core of the Eden blue will appear.


    Actually because of the spiritual energy the core of the Eden blue also begins to get powerful. Right now it is still at the bottom of this, but in the future it will appear on the surface to absorb spiritual energy as much as the core could absorb. That time if someone is able to bond with the core or able to absorb the core, then that person will be very powerful. You will have the power of a in him. With that you can naturally guess why the Elven Queen sent her subordinate to this world. She wanted to absorb that core of the Eden blue and then became the absolute ruler of the elven.


    But you should know that if the core of the Eden blue got absorbed by someone or left the Eden blue, then the condition of this will be different. Every living being on this will begin to die and the also begins to die. You can say that the humans still didn''t have that much knowledge about all of this. Because of this, still no human knows about the Dungeon makers and many other things.


    Well now came back to the present,


    Because of the increased security right now it was quite difficult for those people from the other world to search for the core or the ce where that core will appear. You will get the hint if you get near the ce where the core of the Eden blue will appear. The Spiritual energy of that ce will begin to decrease but then it will suddenly increase. Something strange will happen in that ce. Sopared to those other guards, the special guard of the queen knew all of this and they were searching for the ce.


    On the other hand,


    Warrior association,


    Right now, every Saints are present in the meeting room. Their mood was very serious because they did not have any information about those other people and their motives. Markus tries to contact the Prime Humans. These prime humans also belong to the other world. Previously when Eden blue faced the monster for the first time and all the humans lost their hope to survive, suddenly these prime humans appeared on the Eden blue. They help Markus and his teammates to get powerful so that they could protect the Eden blue. After that those prime humans did dy and left the Eden blue. That time the leader of those prime humans gave Markus a pendent. He told them that it was amunication pendant if in future they suddenly faced any danger they could contact them.


    So right now you can say that all the saints were discussing if they should contact them or not. Even though those prime humans weren''t different from any normal humans, still until it wasn''t theirst hope they didn''t want to contact them.


    ___________To be continued___________


    [A/N: Hey guys, sorry that I unable to upload for two days. My uncle just died because of this, I just didn''t get the motivation to upload.]

 Chapter 341 341 - Killing Goblins

    Sam and Tony are still in the Goblin dungeon. Both of them fighting Goblin soldiers who were intermediate D-grade monsters. Sam was fighting 10 goblins at the same time while Tony was fighting 5 Goblins.


    Compared to those previous goblins these intermediate D-grade goblins wererge and they also wore strong armor and also had Weapons. From where they get all of this nobody knows the answer but one thing was for sure that when you kill those goblins those Armor and those Weapons also will Vanish.


    Sam quickly using his movement technique came in front of those goblins and then sewing his sword toward them. This time he wasn''t using his spiritual energy while using his sword technique. But you should not underestimate his attack because with this attack he killed 2 Goblins. Suddenly those other goblins move away from that ce. Not long after that they attacked him from a different direction. Not only that, those long Ranger goblins already went to the distance and quickly attacked Sam with arrows.


    But Sam wasn''t ideal all this time. He had already moved away from his ce and already attacked those goblins who were about to attack him. Right now, his sword and those Goblins'' sword are shing against each other but the power behind Sam''s sword was more powerful than them and with that he already sent those goblins backward. He also did not give them any chance and once again already came in front of them and attacked them. Just when his sword was about to attack those goblins, Sam suddenly noticed arrowsing towards him.


    Sam reacted quickly and dodge one arrow. He also attacks another Arrow that ising toward him. But Sam did not stop there; he quickly turned toward those goblins who decided to escape from that ce, wasting more time once again in front of those goblins and quickly attacking them. This time those five goblins were unable to react or counter attack, so they finally got killed by him. At this time Sam once again reacted quickly and dodge those arrows that came toward him.


    He quickly put his sword back in his inventory and then quickly brought out his bow and arrow. Using his spiritual vision he already found the location of those goblin archers, so wasting no time he quickly shot his arrows toward them. As you know, in front of his rapid attack, those goblins were unable to dodge The attacks and finally got killed by him.


    On the other hand, Tony already killed three goblins and he already injured those two other goblins. Those to injured goblins let out their angry roar and then once again started to approach him. But Tony wasn''t slow, he quickly dodge their attack, and he also counterattacked them.


    Well while both of them were fighting those goblins they did not notice that hearing the previous angry roar many goblins soldiers also started to go toward their direction. Most likely hearing the previous roar all those goblins understand that someone attacked their subordinate and because of this they were going toward that ce. Not only the Goblin soldier but the Goblin captain also started to approach Sam and Tony.


    Sam at this time waspletely unaware of any of that. He just finished thest Goblin and then collected the loot. Well even if he gets to know about those goblins then he will just calmly face them. This time his main motive foring to this Dungeon was to help Tony. So even though these intermediate D-grade crystals will only give him 0.5 status points he did not worry about that. At this time he also looked toward Tony and saw that Tony also finished thest Goblins.


    Tony finally sighed in relief, after that he began to collect the loot. Sam at this time smiles toward Tony but then suddenly he can be serious. He has a life detection device. Suddenly that device began to vibrate and instantly Sam looked at the device and saw that both he and Tony got surrounded by the goblins from every direction.


    Suddenly he came in front of Tony and informed him. Tony after hearing that also became very serious because it is a really serious matter. Even though he can fight 5 goblins at the same time or even 10 goblins at the same time, he won''t be able to fight 15 or 20 goblins at the same time.


    "Don''t worry, stay calm. The moment those goblins wille near us I will attack them with the confused ray. After I attack them, you need to react fast and then begin to kill those Goblins. " Tony naturally did not have any problem with this n and it is also good that he will get the chance to kill all these goblins.


    After that nobody moves from their ce and silently begins to look around their surroundings. Even though all this time they did not notice any goblins but both of them know that those goblins are very intelligent. Because of this both of them think that the goblins will attack them sneakily. Because of this both of them are very serious.


    1 minuteter,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam finally feels the energy of those Goblins and wasting no time he quickly uses his confused ray. Those goblins already came very close to them but suddenly all of them saw a white light in front of them. After that many of them were able to react on time and all of them now stood in their ce without doing anything. Tony at this time uses this chance to attack those goblins.


    You can see that most likely more than 25 goblins were present in this ce. So he just wanted to kill as many as he could. On the other hand Sam also wasn''t slow. Instantly he begins to attack those goblins soldiers with his fireballs. Less than a second he was able to cast fireballs and with that he attacked those goblins one by one.


    Because Sam previously upgraded his light control technique so the confused state of those Goblins will be held for 1 minute. But this is enough time for him to attack those goblins.


    When they almost kill 70% of those goblins, these goblins wake up from their dazed state. After that they finally noticed many of their subordinates had already been killed by these two humans. Because of this, they became very angry and wasted no time in approaching them.


    Sam previously did not use all of his spiritual energy and because of this he wants again to cast fireballs and then shoot them toward those goblins. Tony also wasn''t slow. Using his spirit technique he was now creating air shes and one by one sending them toward those goblins.


    5 minutester,


    Finally both of them almost kill all the goblins. Even though Sam can easily handle these monsters, this time he held back to help his friend. But suddenly Sam senses some powerful aura. Most likely those aura belong to the Monsters who already reached the limit of intermediate D-grade. Because of this,pared to the Goblin soldiers, the aura was very powerful. At this time Sam feels that those monsters seem to be approaching their direction and most likely they were also attracted by the Goblins'' voice.


    "Tony, handle those remaining soldiers. I will handle those new guests." After saying that Sam quickly left that ce. Tony did not have any problem so he just nodded. He can also feel those powerful aura that was approaching their direction. Even though he did not fear those Monsters, if those new Monsters attack him right now then it will be very difficult for him to handle the situation. So he did not mind, Sam went toward those new Monsters, so he can handle those remaining 15 Goblin soldiers.


    At this time Tony suddenly brings out the spiritual Energy recovery potion. He needs to recover his spiritual energy to use the spirit technique. It did not take him that much time to recover his full power and after that he once again started to use the spirit technique while fighting those Monsters. On the other hand Sam at this time already attacked those new Monsters. If it was before Sam did not break through to peak D-grade, then it could be difficult for him but right now the situation ispletely different. Sam decided to finish all these Monsters as quickly as he could.


    Sam quickly brought out his yer and then coated that with his pure spiritual energy. Instantly his sword turns into a white sword. Using his full speed he already appears in front of Goblin Captain and then attacks that Goblin captain. The Goblin captain was not even able to react or do anything. In front of Sam''s attack, the Goblin captain only got killed by him. But Sam did not stop there, and he won by one and began to attack those five goblin captains. When Sam killed the first Goblin captain those remaining four goblin captains already became very alert. They quickly jumped backward and maintained the distance between them and Sam.


    But Sam was faster than them, so using his full speed he already appeared in front of one of the goblin Captain and then quickly killed that monster. Not long after that he began to kill those remaining three captains one by one.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 342 342 - Upgrade Stealth Technique

    Sam and Tony finally came out of the Dungeon. It has been 15 days since they went to the Dungeon. Aftering out of the Dungeon some looked at the time and it was 3:00 p.m. so after saying goodbye to each other both of them went their separate ways. They were going toward their house. At this time while going toward his house Sam looked at his phone and saw that Gloria and the others tried to contact him many times. Well most likely due to the annual college gradepetition, because today is the first of July and from 15 July thepetition will start.


    Most likely his teacher Alena still did note out from her breakthrough. Well it was expected because to break through to A-grade to S-grade, it needed many days. Even with the help of a limit breaker it was quite hard to break through. At the same time the ck color or the higher grade limit breaker was not found in the Dungeon and because of this it was quite hard for everyone to break through to S-grade. You can say that only the Epic grade limit breaker exists in the S-grade dungeon.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam came back to his house and saw that his parents and his sister had alreadye back. His sister went to the Royal Academy while his parents rested in the house. After greeting his parents Sam went to the bedroom. Even though these 15 days he only faced those intermediate D-grade monsters still it was quite exhausting for him.


    ___________________


    While Sam was resting Gloria and her friends were in the training room. Gloria and Fiona were fighting each other. Well Gloria already breakthroughs to peak C-grade while Fiona breakthroughs to intermediate C-grade. Because of this, only both of them are fighting. You can see how talented both of them were because they are only in their third year but still they are already able to reach this state that even those in their 4th year did not reach. With that you can say that they were the strongest in the Royal Academy.


    On the other hand, all of their 8 teammates were able to breakthrough to early C-grade. You can say that this is the influence of Gloria and Fiona or you can say that this is the influence of Sam and his friends. Because of this, all the students in the Royal Academy were able to advance much.


    Both Gloria and Fiona were fighting. But still you can see that Gloria wasn''t using her full strength while on the other hand Fiona was using her full strength to fight Gloria. There wasn''t any inter college gradepetition and because of this, this time nobody will be able to collect any information about other college students. So you cannot say for sure how much all those students improve.


    "Haha¡­ even after using my full strength, I am unable to defeat you. As I expected you already broke through." Fiona said that while panting. She will need some time to recover.


    On the other hand, all of their teammates are still fighting each other. Well actually because Gloria was the number one holder in the third year, because of this, her training room was much bigger than anyone and because of this like Sam and his friends, Gloria and his friends were also fighting or you can say train in this room. Actually everyone of their teammates came to this training room with only one Motive to challenge Gloria. But when they came to the training room they saw that Gloria and Fiona are fighting and because of this none of them disturb them.


    Sometimeter,


    "Gloria did you find any clue about that person who poisoned Sam. I really wanted to find that person as quickly as I could so that I could kill that person with my own hand. How could a person from the dark association hide himself as a warrior association''s Warrior. Really this dark association was like a parasite that was very hard to remove." After saying all of this Fiona sighs. Well not only her but all of the students from the Royal Academy were very angry. Because what would happen if they also get poisoned by that person.


    Gloria shook his head.


    "I still did not know anything about it. Most likely the teacher found something but before she told me anything she went to close door training. But I am expecting that most likely in this year''spetition we will find something about this. Because I think that that person will alsoe to thepetition. It is just we need to be careful in thepetition so that this time nothing happens," Gloria says.


    Well they only had 15 days before thepetition and because of this everyone of them wanted to be familiar with their new strength. You can say that this time even though all of them went to the same dungeon, Gloria and Fiona went to their floor solo. Fiona was an intermediate C-grade Warrior, while Gloria was a peak C-grade warrior so they will fight the monster with the same grade.


    "Did you know that I learned from my grandfather that some mysterious people begin to walk around the city? Because of this day it also increases the security of the city. I asked about those people but still he did not say anything, he just only said one thing that they were dangerous and we should be careful about those people. Sigh, why he did not want to tell me I really don''t know," Fiona said that while sighing. She tried to ask him many times but her grandfather did not say anything more than that.


    ? _______________


    At this time,


    In a big training room you can see a person meditating. If you look at that person with your spiritual vision then you will see that blue auraing out from that person. That person is Alena. She was trying to break through. She has already begun to attack theyer of the A-grade. And the good news is she is very close to breaking through. Previously she found two epic grade limit breakers and with that she got the help to break through.


    Actually not only her but Aria and Maria are also trying to break through. Actually Alena, Aria, Maria and Mira were ssmates and friends. But Mira is able to break through very quickly and be S-grade. You can say that this is the motivation for three of them to break through.


    ___________________


    Warrior association,


    Right now all the Warriors were very busy because a few dayster the annual college gradepetition will be organized by them and because of this everyone was very busy. If you are wondering what the Saints were doing, then they found some leads about the people from the other world and because of this, they tried to find those people. As a Saint of humanity they have the responsibility to protect everyone from any harm.


    Well you can say that this year it was veryplicated for everyone because they were facing manyplicated things this year. Most likely this was a signal for something. But still nobody knows about that.


    _______________


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2100/2100)


    Spiritual energy: (3400/3400)


    Strength: A / 450


    Agility: A- / 448


    Physique: A- / 449


    Intelligent(mental power): A- / 447


    Spirit: A- / 449


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D+) (peak)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 20M


    Techniques:<novelnext></novelnext>


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade C) (+)


    Neo sword style (Grade C) (+)


    Invisible shot (C-grade) (+)


    Multiple shot (C-grade) (+)


    Rapid shot (C-grade) (+)


    " Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade C) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Supreme Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade D) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: C) (+)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    After absorbing all the crystals he already improved and also with the upgrade points he upgraded his superior stealth technique. To upgrade this technique he almost needed 30 million upgrade points. But just after upgrading this technique you can say that he was feeling that a lot of information suddenly came to his mind and also he finally understood the thing where he can blend with the shadow. It was like a new thing about his superior stealth technique. With this you can say that he can be the shadow.


    ''Sigh, I really have many questions about all of this. But, sigh, most likely the goddess won''t appear again.'' He wanted to ask about all of this to the goddess but all this time the goddess didn''t appear and he also guessed that most likely there was a reason behind all of this. But you are still thankful because the goddess helped him very much but at the same time he also had a question. Why is she helping him so much?


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 343 343 - Queens Motive

    15 dayster,


    Today you can see that Venus City was full of people. One by one many people areing toward Venus City. Well, as you can guess today was the annual college gradepetition. Because of this, the whole city was full of people and more and more people wereing toward Venus City. Like the previous annual collegepetition everyone was excited about thepetition. Royal Academy, Falcon academy and the other Academy also already came to Venus City. Everyone was ready for thispetition.


    In the center of the Venus City you can see therge stadium and the stadium was full of people. Everyone was waiting for thepetition to start. Well before starting thepetition there will be some steps and every student needs to pass through those steps. So right now the students of the first year are going through that process. Before anything the warrior association will check everyone''s grade and only after that they will be able to participate in thepetition.


    The warrior association will try to check the grade of the warrior with their advance device so that nobody could cheat in thepetition. So you can say that every 1st year student went through that process. When the first year students will finish their test, the second year student will go through that process and like that in the end the 4th year student will go through that process. Wellpared to the annual collegepetition, the annual college gradepetition will need many days toplete because in thispetition almost all the students participate in the fight.


    _____________


    "Let''s go!!!! Haha¡­ I am ready to fight. Most likely we will be fighting together, Sam." Tony said that. Both of them already finished their test and their result was intermediate D-grade warrior. Well as you can see that Sam did not show his full power to everyone because if he shows his full power right now then it will be a surprise for everyone. He did not want to do that and because of this he decided to hide his power.


    Alexa, Jeni and the others also finish their test one by one. So they also came toward them and after that all of them started to leave the stadium. Well you can say that it will almost take 4 hours to 5 hours to finish the test of the first year. Well after that the second year will start their test.


    "Sam, how is your preparation? Haha¡­ I will show you how much I have improved these days." Tony said that excitedly. Well he was also very excited to fight in thepetition because in thepetition they will have no friends or teammates. Everyone who will be present in the battle ring will be your enemy and you need to defeat your enemy to win thispetition. Because of this, Tony was also excited because he will not hold back against his friends.


    "Hmmp¡­ before fighting him you need to defeat us. So you should be careful because we also won''t hold back," Jeni, Elena and Alexa said. After that everyone started tough.


    Sam, Tony, Alexa, Jeni, and Elena were intermediate D-grade warriors, while Kenny, Tina, Saara, Kira, and Dan were early D-grade warriors. Even though Kenny and the others were not able to break through to intermediate D-grade, they worked very hard to reach the limit and you can say that it won''t take them that much time to reach the limit.


    But at this time nobody noticed that Sam was very alert about his surroundings. From the moment he entered the stadium he was using his spiritual vision. If there was any Warrior who used the dark spiritual energy then he would instantly spot that person. Because of this, he was using his spiritual vision all this time but the result is negative. Until now he did not find anyone suspicious. But that did not make him give her and he was cautious about his surroundings.


    Actually not only him but the warrior association is also very serious about this matter and they already increase the security very tight around the city. This time they did not want anything like the previous case and because of this the security was this tight. This time If the culprit really came to thispetition then he won''t be able to escape from here.


    "Sam!!! Hello, what are you thinking?" Suddenly at this time Sam came back to his senses after hearing Alexa''s voice.


    "Sorry about this. Well I am thinking about security. Did you notice that the security around Venus city has already increased very much." Sam told them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    " Well, yea, we also noticed that. Most likely the warrior association didn''t want something like the previous thing to happen. Even though the dark association was already destroyed by the warrior association, we are still unable to destroy the main headquarters of The Dark association. Also you should not forget that the main headquarters of The Dark association was in another world. I am really very curious about this other world. Even my grandpa did not tell me anything about the other world. I really try to ask you many times but every time he just ignores my question." Alexa said that. Tony and the others nodded.


    __________________


    Right now, you can see that even though the Venus city was full of people and the warrior association was maintaining the crowd of the Venus city, at the same time they were also trying to find clues about those other world people. But none of them expected that the people they were searching for were already present in the stadium. This annual college gradepetition is a really interesting thing for them and because of this, they came to the stadium to see thepetition. Almost every person from the other world guesses that most likely the humans already know about them and because of this, they try to search for them but those people from the other world also have their own n and with that they could hide from those warriors and the warrior association.


    Right now you should know one thing that those people from the other world even after searching you can say almost all over the Eden blue, they did not find any clue about the core. But at the same time they also noticed that there wasn''t any ce where the core could appear. With that one thing was that it still took some time for the core of the Eden blue to appear on the surface. Because of this, those people from the other world decide to rx because they have the time.


    Not only the elves, but many other people from many different worlds are also present in the Eden blue. Actually only the humans in the Eden blue did not know that outside their universe there were many things that they needed to know. But unfortunately the Eden blue was still unable to get connected with the outside world and because of this, they did not know anything.


    ______________


    "It is really interesting how these humans decide to fight with each other. Most likely they were checking their level and only after that thepetition will start." A person said. If you look at the person right now then you will notice that the person was very handsome. He was a person from the Elven world. But right now he and his teammate were using the disguise ring, with which they were able to hide from the warrior association.


    "Yes,,, I still don''t think that thispetition will be as exciting as the Gcticpetition. I really don''t know why this human still did not contact the Gctic station. Well that isn''t our problem. It is already confirmed by the queen that most likely only the saints of the humans know about us and most likely she will also contact them. She will try to negotiate with those people so that the humans could also help us. Well I really don''t understand why we needed the help of these lowly people. Compared to those prime humans, these humans were nothing." Right now a girl who is beside him also said that.


    "I also agree with you. When it will be time for the core to appear, we will automatically feel that. So why did we need the help of these humans?" One more person said that.


    " Well I am guessing that most likely the Queen wanted to recruit those saints. Compared to those other humans only those saints were useful to the queen and because of this, most likely she wanted to control those saints. Haha¡­ when she will take the core this will automatically be a dead zone. With that we did not need to worry about those lowly humans." Suddenly that girl said once again.


    Actually right now 20 people from the other world are sitting in the stadium and looking at thepetition. All of them were using the disguise ring. And they alsomunicate with each other with their minds and because of this nobody from the outside could tell the difference about these people.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 344 344 - Start Of The Competition

    ? 2 dayster,


    Finally, today was the first match between early D-grade warriors. Students from the Royal Academy, white Tiger Academy, Golden Dawn Academy, Falcon Academy and many others Academy are already present on the battlefield.


    You can say that this was an interestingpetition because thispetition has three steps. Before the start of the fight the students needed to check their grade, and after that the fight would start. All the students will fight in two steps. For the first steps every student will face Monsters with the same grade as them. Like those D-grade warriors will face D-grade monsters. Only after that is thest process where every student will face each other.


    Right now if you are wondering how the warrior association will manage those Monsters then they will bring those Monsters from the danger zone so there won''t be any problem. But as you can guess this will be a long process.


    Right now you can see in the battlefield 20 Warriors can face 20 Monsters at the same time and like that thepetition was going on. Already 20 Warriors came to the battlefield and they already went to a separate battle room. Just after entering the battle room, they can see the Monsters in front of them that have chains on their body which prevent them from moving. But just looking at them you can see that everyone of those monsters were very angry and this angrily looked at the Warriors who just entered the battle room.


    Everybody will have 20 seconds before the warrior association will release the monster and the student needed to fight that Monsters. Also you should know one more thing, the fight wasn''t organized in only one stadium because it will take a longer time than every stadium present in Venus City has this set. Well right now in the whole of Venus City, there were 10 stadiums. So, 200 students can fight at the same time.


    15000 early D-grade students participated in this match. Wellpared to the other students you can say that the number of the early D-grade students were higher. With that you can guess it will take much time toplete thispetition.


    _____________


    Now came back to the stadiums,


    All of those 10 stadiums were full of people. You can say that people from different countries were also present in the Venus city and everyone was very excited for this match. Also you can see many big screens present in the stadium where you will see the battle that was going on in the stadium.


    On the other hand in the main room,


    All the teachers were present there and all of them while looking at all those big screens that showed them the battle. In this control room there weren''t that many teachers present, only the head teacher of the college present in this control room. Not only those head teachers but many guild leaders also present in that room. Actually everyone of them are looking for the talent that they want to invite who will work for them.


    "Really, most likely every student after the annual collegepetition improves themselves and also because of the previous incident all of them became very serious. Just looking at their fight you can say that they have improved very much." Suddenly one person said, The other people nodded after hearing that.


    " Hmm¡­ you can say that the previous incident was also a good thing for all these students because all of them became very serious. Most likely because of the saints all those students be very rxed and think they will not have that much risk. But after the previous incident all of them became serious and they began to take their student career seriously." Suddenly once again one person said that.


    " Haha¡­ seriously all these students thought the previous incident was the worst case in their life but they still did not know the horror of those S-grade monsters. Previously when those monsters tried to invade the cities¡­ sigh, forget about that. I really don''t want it to remember those bad memories." Another person said that.


    All these people were from the guilds. They were the guild masters. Just looking at them you can tell that all of them have already reached the limit of A-grade. But unfortunately nobody is still able to break through the barrier. Right now all of them are talking to each other while looking at the fights on the screen. Even though they were watching the fight between those first years with excitement, their main target was the 3rd year. Because after thispetition they will immediately contact those third years that they will select for their guilds.


    It wasn''t that after entering the guilds you won''t be able to contact the warrior association but it was just you did not need to work for the warrior association. Every guild has their own territory and Dungeons. So in those Dungeons before entering you needed the permission from those guilds.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _______________


    "Sam, I am really excited about this. But, sigh, it would be a waste of time for you when you will fight those Monsters. Haha¡­ most probably you will only need a second to kill the monster that you will face." Tony said that with augh. Jeni and the others also began tough. Everyone of them agrees with Tony that mostly Sam will kill the monster as quickly as he can.


    "Well, don''t say that. Not only me but you all also have the strength to finish the fight as quickly as you can. Most probably it will take only one minute to finish the fight. Haha.. so, don''t say that." Sam said that to his friends. Right now most probably not everyone knows the power of his friends. All this month like him they also focus on their fight and training. So you can say that it was easy for everyone to face one monster and kill that Monster in just 1 minute.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now Sam and his friends were looking at the big screen that was showing the name of those Warriors who were able to qualify for the next match. Actually those students who are unable to win against the monster are unable to advance for the next match. In the next match, every student will go to a dungeon in Venus City, where they will face the monsters. They will gain the battle points and those battle points will determine the winner of thispetition so all of this going on for the battle point. Right now those students who are able to qualify for the next match already gain one battle point.


    In the Dungeon those students can make their own teams and they can go solo in the Dungeon. But all of them will have the same goal: to kill as many monsters as they can to gain the battle point. The more battle points you will have the more quickly will win the match. Also after that Dungeon adventure thest phase of thispetition will be held where anyone can challenge anyone for a fight. In the fight they needed to bet on their battle point, and the winner would get the total battle points.


    But at the same time it didn''t mean that the loser who just lost the match would be disqualified. The loser will have one more chance to challenge someone and if he wins that match then he can once againe back but even if he loses that time then he will be disqualified from this match.


    ______________


    "Actually, I am more excited for the Dungeon match. This term we can go solo in the Dungeon and see who can kill more monsters. Most likely many students will make teams when they go to the dungeon, but this time I wanted topete against you all." Suddenly at this time Alexa said that. It instantly increases the fighting will of everyone. Even Sam was excited. Everyone instantly agreed with her.


    "Hey, guys, what are you talking about?" Suddenly at this time Sam and the others hear a question from behind. They quickly turned around and saw that it was Aliya, James and their teammates from the Golden Dawn.


    "Oh.. hi guys. How are you guys?" Tony asked that question.


    " We are fine and ready to battle. Haha¡­ you also need to prepare this time for the defeat." Aliya said that with excitement.


    " Haha¡­ don''t worry, we are also ready to battle anytime." Tony also answers that while showing his excitement.


    "Haha¡­ hi guys, we are talking about that we will go to the dungeon solo andpete against each other and see who will kill the most of the monster and he will be the winner. Most likely many students will make a team and win against the danger but we wanted to go to the Dungeon solo." Alexa said that.


    "Hmm¡­ really it was an interesting idea to go to the dungeon solo. Then it was decided that we will also go to the Dungeon solo andpete," instantly James also agreed with Alexa after hearing the n.


    ___________To be continued________________

 Chapter 345 [Bonus ] 345 - Kenny, Tina And Kira, Showing Their Power.

    Kenny, Tina, Dan, Saara and Kira all of them are going toward the battle room in the battleground. Well as you know that all of them were early D-grade warriors, and because of this, it was time for them to fight.


    "Haha¡­ good luck guys!!!" At this time, Kenny said to everyone. Dan and the other girls after hearing that also smile and all of them show their thumbs up to everyone. You can say that none of them were scared. On the other hand, all of them were excited to show their power.


    All of them with excitement going their separate ways.  Well which type of Monster they will face? nobody knows that. Because of this you can say that this is also an exciting thing for them. Some of them were bad at fighting ghost Monsters while some of the wire fighting bad at many other Monsters. In one word, you can say that many of them have many shorings. The warrior association will try to find that and they will set that type of Monster, so that it can be a challenge for that student.


    One by one every student enters their battle room. Just after entering the room the door got automatically locked, so that no student could run away from the fight. Also at this time if you are wondering what will happen if the life of the student will be in danger, then because of that two guardians also present in the battle room but they were hiding themselves. They were present there to protect the student if the situation got out of control.


    Tina, Kenny and the others did not know about the Warriors who present in their battle room to protect themselves, but at this time everyone of them is seriously observing their monster that they need to face. Tina, Kenny, and Kira will be facing Ice Wolf. This type of Monster was very good at controlling ice and they can attack their enemy from a long distance. So you can say that for these three girls who like to fight in closebat this will be a challenge.


    Kenny sighs and clears her mind. It wasn''t that she was scared after seeing the monster but it was exactly the opposite, she was very excited to face this Monster because she also wanted to know how she will fight in a one vs one fight against a Monster, who will fight from a close or long distance.


    Right now, she is already in her focus state and she already channels Spiritual energy with the help of spirit technique into her sword. So her sword already begins to glow in blue color and at the same time if you look at her left hand then you will see she is also preparing to cast a spell at this time. Well this is the mastery she and her friend already reach where they can attack multiple attacks at the same time.


    Well as you know before joining the Royal Academy she was already able to use the light control technique and after joining the Royal Academy in thest few months she had already improved her light control technique and she was going to use that. Right now she is just waiting for the referee to give her the signal.


    "Start,"


    The moment she got the signal she instantly saw the chain of the ice wolf instantly Vanished and instantly the wolf began to charge at her with full speed. Less than a secondter, the wolf already came in front of her and was just about to attack her but suddenly a white light suddenly appeared in front of that Monster and that instantly made that monster stop his movement.


    Well as you can guess Kenny already attacked that wolf with her confused ray. This instantly makes that Monster confused for 30 seconds. And after that she already begins to attack that wolf non-stop. sh after sh, like that she was attacking that wolf. Her sword was already full of spiritual energy and because of this, the power behind Those shes was unimaginable.


    30 secondter,


    The wolf already came back to his senses and quickly jumped away from his ce after seeing the situation. Right now if you look at the monster then you will see that he was bleeding from all over his body and the white wolf already turned into a red wolf.


    "A!!!" Instantly that wolf began to howl and the ground beneath his foot began to freeze. He was very angry right now. He was just about to use her power to attack that human but at this time Kenny had already moved from her ce and once again in front of that wolf. At this time the wolf did not get the chance to react and suddenly his head got separated from his body. After that the body of that wolf fell down on the ground. Kenny didn''t look at the monster and just began to walk toward the entrance.


    Right now the audience and even the Warriors who were hiding in the battle room were surprised. Because nobody thought that she would finish her fight this quickly. You can say that it takes some time for the audience to process this thing while at this time Kenny has alreadye out of the battle room.


    "Kenny!!! Kenny!!" Instantly those Warriors begin to cheer for her aftering back to their senses. Well as you know that because of the previous annual collegepetition Sam and his teammates already got famous and because of this many of those audience members already know her name. Kenny just looks at them and smiles at them and she begins to wait for her friends toe out from their battle room.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _______________


    Tina also became very serious just after entering the battle room. She can also see the ice wolf and she is already preparing to fight that monster with her own style. Like Kenny, she also began to channel her spiritual energy toward her sword.


    The moment that ice wolf got free from the chain it instantly began to approach toward Tina, but she did not give that Monster any chance to attack and instantly began to attack that monster with that spiritual sh. sh after sh, she began to send those towards that wolf.


    At this time you can hear the sound of a painful roaring out from that wolf. He did not get any chance to attack but in front of those attacks he was unable to react and already got seriously injured.


    On the other hand 1 minuteter,


    Tina stopped attacking, the wolf most likely thought it was the perfect chance to attack and you''re just about to look at his target but he saw nobody in front of him but at this time he already felt a presence behind him. Well you guess that right it was Tina who already came behind that wolf and her sword already about to touch that wolf. That Monster did not even get the chance to react and he got split into two parts.


    After that she left the battle room and came out of the battle room. Just aftering out from the battle room she heard the sound of cheering from those in the audience. Many audience members begin to cheer and p for her and this instantly makes her happy. At this time she also noticed Kenny who was already weaving her hand toward her. Tina also smiled at her and began to walk toward her.


    Actually, previously after Tina stopped attacking that wolf for a second, she already used the spirit technique to use the spiritual energy with her movement technique. Because of this, instantly her speed got doubled and she appeared behind that wolf using that speed. Even though she wasn''t good at using the spirit technique while using her other technique, this was enough for her to kill that monster.


    ________________


    Kira, also the moment enter the battle room, got serious. But she already cleared her mind and was already ready to face the monster in front of her. She also began to channel her spiritual energy toward her sword and after that she was already prepared to fight that monster with her strongest move.


    The moment she got the signal, she didn''t waste anymore time and instantly attacked that monster with her star sh attack. Just with one swing she created a start like sh that instantly went toward that wolf. At this time, the wolf who just got free from the chain and was about to go toward that human just instantly saw a star appear in front of him. That Monster did not even get the chance to react.


    Sometimeter,


    The Warriors and the audience finally saw what happened in that room. They saw that the wolf was already killed by her and not only that but you can also see the star mark in the Wall of that battle room. With that you can guess how powerful was the attack that already killed that monster. After killing that monster she also did not waste anymore time in the battle room and instantly came out of the battle room.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 346 346 - The Power Of Dan And Saara

    "Roar!!!!" You can see a big monster just look like a leopard but it was very bigpared to a normal leopard. It had red eyes and now it was showing a very furious expression. Well, it was called Vicious leopard.


    Opposite to that leopard you can see a person who instantly dodges that attack. He was Dan, he was facing this Vicious leopard. Well as you know that he was an Archer and the most important thing was that he always preferred to attack the enemy from a distance and because of this, the warrior association arranged this leopard. It was like a natural enemy for him.


    But, Dan didn''t panic. He calmly looked at the leopard and instantly dodge that attack. Wasting no time he needed to think of a way to attack that monster. But, like the normal leopard this leopard Monster also has unimaginable speed and raw power in their body. With that they could travel very fast and they can instantly appear in front of their enemy and attack them. Because of this it was quite hard for Dan. But fortunately Dan wasn''tpletely helpless. Like his other friends in these few months he also improved very much and you can say that right now he is also already able to use the spirit technique very easily and with that he is also able to use the spirit technique while using his body protection technique.


    Because of this right now you can see a blueyer now covering the whole body of Dan. As you can get that it was the spiritual energy that was covering his body and also increasing the power of his body. Because of this, the leopard Monster still wasn''t able to damage his armor or injured him.


    But at the same time you should know that because of continuously using the full speed the leopard monsoon also needed some time to recover his stamina and Dan was waiting for that chance. Finally after 20 minutes he finally got that chance. Instantly wasting no time he quickly brings out his bow, and begins to continuously shoot that leopard. Because of using the spirit technique while using his archery technique all the arrows were now covered by a blueyer.


    All of those arrows continuously began to attack that leopard and at this time that leopard was recovering his stamina and because of this he was unable to dodge. Even though that leopard tried to dodge those arrows but because of low stamina he was unable to react that quickly and in the end in front of those arrows, he was unable to do anything and finally died.


    Dan sighed and then smiled. After that he left the battle room and aftering out of the battle room he saw Kenny and the others who were waiting for him. He already knows that most probably he was thest one who left the battle room but it does not matter because the monster he was facing was naturally the natural enemy of him. Only because of this he needed this much time to finish the monster.


    Most probably, Saara seems to understand his inner thought and because of this she instantly said to him,


    "Don''t worry, I also came out of the battle room just a few minutes ago so you don''t need to be embarrassed about that."


    _________________


    As Saara said, she just came out of the battle room a few minutes ago. Like Dan she also faced a monster that was very good at closebat. This time she faced a Vicious wolf. As you are already familiar with this Monster, they were white fast and also very powerful and because of this she also needed this much time to finish that monster.


    Previously just after entering the battle room she saw that monster in front of her. From that moment she began to prepare her spell for that monster. The moment the match started and that monster got released from the chain, she instantly attacked that time. Instantly water began to gather around that wolf. As you can guess it was the water prison attack. That wolf did not even get the chance to react and instantly got in that prison.


    But even with that attached she is unable to kill that wolf properly and somehow that wolf manages to escape from that prison. Fortunately she did not use her full power previously and because of this she once again used spiritual power to cast another spell that was water Spears. Unexpectedly water Spears begin to appear above her head and she already shoots those water Spears toward that monster. Even though the Vicious wolf tried to counter attack and Dodge those attacks but in the end he was unable to do that and finally got killed by her.


    _____________________


    Now came back to the battlefield,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Currently you can see that many more students begin toe out from the battle room. Some of them were injured while some of them did not receive any injuries. Some of them got disqualified from thispetition while some of them qualified for the next match. Most probably it will take much more time for the result of this round.


    30 minutester finally everyone present in the stadium can see the result of this round. One by one the name of the winner is shown on the big screen. Even though all the audience already knew the results, they did not know the result of other stadiums and this helped them to know the result of every stadium. With that all the audience once again began to cheer and p for those Warriors who qualified for the next match.


    Right now between those audiences you can see Sam, Tony and the girls were also cheering for Dan and the others. Well from the first they have the confidence that everyone will qualify for the next match and because of this they did not worry that much. But still it was quite surprising for them to see that the warrior association decided to bring this type of Monster for the Warriors. It was like they wanted those students to face their natural enemy or The Monster that could use their weak point to win against them.


    But just after seeing that you can say that Tony and the others were already fired up. Not only them but James and the others were also very excited. They just can not wait for their match. They also wanted to see which type of Monster they would face.


    "Haha¡­ I am really very excited to know about the monster that I will face. I really wanted to know which type of Monster the warrior association will appoint to fight against me? Haha¡­ this really makes me very excited." Tony said that.


    " Haha¡­ not only you, but I am also very excited and I also really wanted to know about the monster that I will face in the match." James suddenly said that. Most likely like Tony, James also very much battles Manick and because of this both of them just really cannot wait for their match.


    "Okay, okay, now calm down. And also James in which stadium your teammates were fighting? I did not see them before?" Suddenly Elena said that.


    "Oh.. they will be fighting in the next match so you will see them in this stadium." At this time James calms down and answers the question.


    _____________


    "Haha¡­ it is really good to see how those humans are fighting those Monsters. Some of them were able to finish the match very quickly while some of them needed a lot of time to finish their match. But stillpared to us orpared to any other civilization, these humans were trash. Haha¡­ even a newborn child of ours will have the battle power of their F-grade warrior. But in the case of humans they need to absorb those crystals and only then will they be able to be Warriors. Haha¡­ what a pathetic life form they were. If it was in the protection of those prime humans most likely we would already conquer this." Right now one of the other world people  said with a sigh.


    Fortunately all those other world''s people municate in their mind and because of this, these humans are unable to hear them. But still you can see in their eyes those humans were pathetic little ants. Even the most powerful of these humans were only able to reach S-grade, and the most important thing was that all the humans did not have any information about the powerhouse behind the S-grade. Because of this, those people from other worlds thought that humans were really pathetic.


    "Well, you cannot expect anything from these humans, because they still have not got contact with the world outside of their and because of this, they were like this. But still it was quite hard to understand why those prime humans were protecting this." One of them said that.


    _____________To be continued____________

 Chapter 347 347 - Next Stage Of Competition

    5 dayter,


    Well it has been 5 days since the match started and finally the firstpetition was finished. Today every student who qualified for the next match was going toward the Dungeon where they will fight the Monsters to gain the grade points. Right now you can see the students from the first year to the 4th year, all of them were present in front of their Dungeons.


    Before anything you should know that in Venus City there were many dungeons like the central city. It was just that the number wasn''t the same as the central city. But still the Venus city was famous for its ghost Dungeons and right now you can see that seven Ghost Dungeons present in the Venus City and other than that 5 other Dungeons present in the Venus City. But it was just that the level of those Dungeons wasn''t the same. Because of this, the warrior association won''t be able to send those students to all those Dungeons.


    Right now 3 ghost Dungeons and two normal Dungeons will be book for thepetition. But still you can say that all the students won''t be able to participate at the same time because if that happens then all of them won''t be able to get necessary points. So while thinking that the warrior association decided not to send all the students at the same time.


    _____________


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Right now you can see Sam and many other students standing in front of the ghost Dungeon that he was very familiar with. Unfortunately he wasn''t with his friend in this dungeon. But still it wasn''t that he did not meet any familiar people because many people from his Royal Academy also present with him in this dungeon. Right now every student was waiting for the referee to give them the signal for the fight.


    At this time keeping his distance from those other students because he did not want to talk to anyone and maintain his distance from them. But at this time he was observing his surroundings. He wanted to know if the culprit was present here or not. Because of this, you can say that he was very alert from the start. At this time he also noticed that as he previously thought many students already make their team and most likely they will enter the Dungeon like that. Many students from the second year or even 3rd year also present here. The highest grade monster you will face in this dungeon was early C-grade. Because of this, Sam already notices those third year and 4th year students who already break through to early C-grade.


    It did not take that much long and finally the referee gave them the signal to enter the Dungeon after telling them the rule. Also like the college entrance examination every student will have a camera following them that will record everything and it will also record the number of Monster kills that the student will kill in this dungeon. So like that no student would cheat in thispetition and also they did not need to worry about counting the number of those monsters that they would kill. But still the Warrior association already sent many Warriors in the Dungeon and told them to hide themselves so that they could protect the students if that was required.


    The moment all the students get the signal they did not Waste anymore time and begin to walk toward the entrance. Sam did not show any excitement or any other expression, he just maintained a n expression and went toward the dungeon. He knows that not only him but many others were very familiar with this dungeon, they were like him. They are also going toward the Dungeon calmly.


    Sometimeter,


    After entering the Dungeon he already saw the dark environment and the dark forest. But he did not dy any more and already used his supreme stealth technique. After that he began to go to the entrance of the next floor. Even if you are an early C-grade warrior, you still need to walk from the bottom floor to get to their destination.


    Even though Sam can easily kill those intermediate D-grade monsters, still, he maintains the seriousness because anything could happen in the Dungeon and you will never be able to know that. Also one more thing was that those other world people  could alsoe to this dungeon. Even though the warrior association already restricts other Warriors, what if those other world people use some of their weird things ande to this dungeon.


    8 hourster,<novelnext></novelnext>


    This time Sam did not use his full speed and because of this he needed almost 8 hours to reach the next floor. But just aftering to this floor, he noticed many other students already present in this floor and most likely toe to this floor they use their full speed. But Sam wasn''t in a hurry and because of this he did not use his full speed.


    Sampletely ignores those students and because of this he is still using his supreme stealth technique; those warriors won''t be able to see him. So at this time ignoring those Warriors he is going toward the ce where he will find the ghosts. In this Dungeon you will see zombies, Headless Humans and Big eye ghosts. Those headless humans were the ghosts that were like normal humanoid ghosts but they were very strongpared to them and also they were very fast. On the other hand Big Eye ghosts are the humanoid Ghost that has very big eyes and they always attack you with their eyes. Just with their eyes they could control anyone''s mind who did not have necessary mind protection techniques. Not only that they were very good at telekinesis technique and because of this, it was quite dangerous to kill them.


    _______________


    Sometimeter,


    You can see that Sam was fighting some zombies. Zombie dogs were attacking him but Sam did not waste anymore time and easily killed them. Even though they were intermediate D-grade Monsters, they weren''t that powerful. Because of this it was quite easy to kill thempared to those other zombies. But one thing was that even after killing the zombies you could get affected by the dark spiritual energy that came out from their body when you kill them.


    After collecting the loot Sam once again begins to advance. He already has 10 points. Well you can say that because there were many students present on this floor he was unable to find that when he Monster even after finding it all this time. Well this is the minus point of this many Warriors present on this floor at the same time. Compared to the normal days there was an increase in the number of those Warriors. Because of this it was quite hard in this situation to find monsters that any other Warrior wasn''t targeting.


    Suddenly Sam stops moving because in front of him he can see five headless humans. But those five headless humans weren''t alone. Right now they were attacking one person and most likely the life of that person was in danger. At this time Sam did not waste anymore time and began to run toward that person saving and also at the same time to kill those Monsters. Even though he is already aware that the Warriors from the Warrior association already present near them and most likely they were also ready to enter the fight between the person and those monsters anytime to save that person but still he is going toward that person to save him. Well, actually the main Motive was to kill those monsters because when those Warriors from the warrior association will interrupt they will immediately kill those Monsters and it will be just a waste of points.


    __________


    At this time, you can see a boy fighting headless humans at the same time. Before entering the dungeon, many others also try to make a team with him but he rejects all of them because you can say that he has the confidence in his strength that he doesn''t need any teammates. Also because he was very familiar with this done he did not want any teammates. The boy was from the White Tiger Academy.


    But reality was very cruel. Right now just looking at the situation you can tell that he almost lost the confidence to move his body. He just now with his frightened and shaking body looking toward the Monsters that are approaching him. Suddenly all those headless humans just about to attack him with theirrge and ck hands. Just looking at those ck hands you will feel chillness in your heart. Those hands were very poisonous.


    "Don''t kill Me!!!!! Save me!!!!!" He began to shout while closing his eyes. Right now you can say that he lost the will power to fight. But suddenly something strange happened because he was already ready to face the pain but even after waiting some time he did not feel any pain or any touch on his body. But instantly he did not open his eyes and you waited for sometime and only then he opened his eyes to see the situation.


    _____________To be continued___________

 Chapter 348 348 - Coming Out From The Dungeon

    That boy from the White Tiger Academy slowly opened his eyes and so that in front of him stood someone. Instantly he thought that it was a warrior from the warrior association but then he realized that it wasn''t a warrior from the warrior association. Because that Warrior who was standing in front of him wasting no time began to attack those Monsters. Just looking at that person you can tell that that person wanted to kill those monsters to gather points.


    Well as you can guess that it was Sam who was standing in front of that boy from the White Tiger Academy. Just when that Monster was about to attack that boy he quickly appeared in front of that Monster and then quickly counter attacked that Monster and killed him. But Sam did not stop there; he began to approach those Monsters.


    At this time those Monsters are also in a confused state for a second because they are also unable to understand the motive of that person, but then they quickly realize that this person seems to kill them and because of this all of them instantly became angry and they were about to attack him but suddenly something unexpected happened. All those monsters realize that they are unable to move their body or you can say that someone is preventing them from moving.


    Well as you can guess it was Sam who was using the telekinesis technique to stop the movement of those ghost Monsters. If you previously thought that he did not use that technique then you were wrong because in this type of fight he uses this technique very much. Also one more interesting thing was that because some of those ghost Monsters have the spiritual body it was easy to control them using the telekinesis techniquepared to those Monsters who did not use the dark spiritual energy or did not have the spiritual body.


    5 minutester,


    Sam finally kills all those 20 monsters. As you know that previously there weren''t that many monsters but while he was killing those previous monsters suddenly many more monsters appeared in that ce and because of this he needed to kill many more monsters than before. After killing those Monsters, Sam focuses on collecting the loot and only after collecting the loot, does he look toward that boy who is still looking in his direction with a confused gaze. Just looking at that boy you can tell that he is still very confused about his situation. But when that boy noticed that Sam was looking toward him only then he came back to his senses and suddenly pointed his finger toward Sam.


    "You¡­ who are you?"


    After hearing that question you can say that Sam was confused. He wasn''t using any type of mask to hide his face. Then most probably the night vision technique that this student was using wasn''t that good. Sam did not answer any question and just left that ce. But before leaving he said something to that boy so that that boy did not die in this dungeon,


    "I don''t think you should continue. A warrior must realize the fact that the Dungeon was the most dangerous ce and you cannot be overconfident in the Dungeon. At the same time the warrior should prepare themselves to face every kind of situation. Just looking at you and thinking if you are ready to face this kind of situation or not." After saying all of this Sam finally leaves that ce.


    ________________


    Outside the Dungeon,


    Warrior association branch near the dungeon,


    As you know, beside every Dungeon all the warrior associations built their base so that they could see the situation of the Dungeon every time. So right now inside of that association you can see that many teachers and even all the head teachers and the event organizers are also present in that room. Even though all the Saints were unable toe to thispetition, you can still see John, Mira, and Vena. These three Saints are present in that room and they are also looking at the big screen where they can see the condition of every student through that monitor. As you know, before entering the Dungeon the Warrior''s already told by the warrior association that they should carry the camera that will fly beside them.


    So you can say that because of that camera right now in that big screen that covered the full room, all those Warriors and teachers were looking at the performance of those students. After entering the Dungeon many Warriors got eliminated. Really it was disappointing but still in this situation all those people present in that room show some student whose performance was outstanding.


    Well actually not only those people present in the room but those people who were in their house or present in the stadium or watching the TV also are able to watch the performance of the students because the warrior association is broadcasting all of this.


    All those people already saw that many students make teams before entering the Dungeon but most of them decided to enter the Dungeon on their own. In this Dungeon all those Warriors needed to collect their individual points and because of this many of them decided against making a team. Some of them already got eliminated because of their overconfidence and that boy from the White Tiger Academy was one of them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Right now all the people present in that city or the stadium or even present in that room got really disappointed in that boy from the White Tiger Academy. Because before entering the Dungeon the boy was showing his attitude to everyone and also showing his overconfidence. But when he faced a situation like this he justpletely lost the will power to fight so it was really disappointing for everyone and the head teacher of The White Tiger Academy was very disappointed in that student.


    Now came back to the main matter, those Warriors and those teachers right now discussing those students whose performance was outstanding. If you are wondering why the warrior association told all those students to go inside of the Dungeon to collect points then it was because the warrior association wanted to create an opportunity where they can notice the individual strength of a student. Even though many students still decided to make teams, it wasn''tpletely unexpected. Because there are many students who will do that to collect the points safely. But at the same time there were some students who like to challenge themselves and Sam was one of them.


    "I really did not expect Sam to be strong like this in just these few months. Just a few months ago they faced a disaster and after that you also received serious injuries but still he was able to recover and improve himself." The head teacher of The White Tiger Academy said that To The head teacher of the Royal Academy.


    "Haha¡­ Max doesn''t say something like that. I can see that your students also improved very much and they became very powerful. So I can also say the same thing that your student also really improved very much in these few months." The head teacher of the Royal Academy said that after hearing that the head teacher of The White Tiger Academy began tough.


    Suddenly at this time the head teacher of the Golden Dawn said that,


    "Well actually I should thank you for that previous incident because of our students being able to improve this much. Because I can see that many students that previously did not perform will be avable to improve themself very much in these few months. Most likely before the 3rd year we will get many Elite students."


    " Haha¡­ Jonathan you are right we should thank the previous incident." Suddenly Max said that and one second began tough.


    ______________


    Now came back to the Dungeon,


    Tony, Alexa and the others also already killed many Monsters. As you know, all of them decided that they willpete and who will have the most points will be the winner and because of this everyone of them only focuses on killing the Monsters in the Dungeon. Like any other normal day, those students did not have that much time in the dungeon. They only have a one day time limit and because of this, they need to kill as many as they can in one day.


    ___________


    One dayter,


    Finally all the students that went to the Dungeon the previous day begin toe out from the Dungeons. You can see that the condition of many students was very serious but immediately the medical team began to handle the situation. But at the same time some of the students did not have that many injuries, it was like they only came back after some serious exercise or training. At this time Tony and the others also came out from their Dungeon. All of them did not go to the same dungeon and because of this, they will only be able to meet each other when they go back to their hotel.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 349 349 - Second Stage Complete

    Sam and his friends finally came back to their hotel. After that it was time for them to look at all of their points and only then the winner would be decided. Not only them but even the Golden Dawn''s team was present in their room. As you know that previously James also became quite interested in thispetition.


    "I hope you all give your all in the dungeon. Wasting no time, let''s look at everyone''s points and only then can we decide the winner of thispetition. " Tony said that everyone and after that one by one everyone started to talk about the points that they collect in the Dungeon.


    Like this one by one Tony, Alexa, and others begin to show their points. Finally it was decided that Alexa will be the winner of thispetition because she has the most points above everyone. Well you can say that for a second everyone was surprised because everyone thought that Sam would be the winner but he was the winner of thispetition. This is apletely unexpected thing for everyone but then what can they do because Alexa has the most points. Sam did not say anything about this, he just smiled and also congratted Alexa.


    Actually when Sam was in the Dungeon, he didn''tpletely focus on hunting the monster. Wall hunting the monster he also focuses on finding any clue about the other world people. But in the end he did not find anything nor did he find any clue about the core. Also one more reason was that he did not want to show off that much of his power and because of this he decided to kill not many monsters.


    ________________


    Currently in the warrior association,


    Those saints, teachers, and the guild leaders discuss the students and their performance in the Dungeon. But at this time you can say that the mostmon topic was that they did not think that Sam would only kill this many monsters in the Dungeon. As the brother of Gloria everyone of them expect him to collect many points in the Dungeon but actually he is only able to collect 300 points.


    Compared to him, Alexa is able to collect 500 points in this dungeon. So you can say that between those intermediate D-grade warriors, Alexa was the clear winner because she has the most points.


    "Seriously I thought that this boy will once again be the winner of thispetition but it seems the previous incident did leave some side effects." The head teacher of the Royal Academy said that.


    " Natural but still he was able to collect this many points and it was a very good thing. But still it still surprised me that he had that surprising technique that even we were unable to locate him. Michael, do you know anything about that stealth technique?" Max as that to Michael, teacher of the Royal Academy.


    " Haha¡­ sorry to say that guys but I am unable to answer that because I did not get to contact that boy very much because Alena is his teacher. But actually I am thinking that his technique is most probably given to someone, who got the technique from some high grade dungeon or even the supreme Dungeon." Michael said that. After hearing that everyone agreed with him because it wasn''t possible to get this technique in the low grade dungeon. So it was natural for everyone to think that someone would give him this technique that he got from some high grade Dungeon or even the supreme Dungeon.


    After that they shifted their forecast to the 3rd year because this year''s 3rd year improved very much after that incident. Almost 60% of the third year students were able to break through and it was a very good thing for everyone. Because of this, those saints, those guild leaders and even those colleges are also looking for these students. If they are able to recruit these students then they can strengthen their power.


    Actually even though every Dungeon has a warrior association beside them, not every Dungeon was watched by the warrior association because those guilds, even those schools, also have Dungeons that they own. In that type of dungeon not everyone can enter until they did not get the permission from the owners and also at the same time those guilds and those colleges also needed to ensure the safety.


    So you can say that because of this everyone wants to recruits students so that they can increase the power of their forces.


    "Really most likely Gloria will be the youngest Warrior who will be able to reach the S-grade. She is a true genius." At this time suddenly a guild leader said that. After hearing that everyone present there agreed with him because it was true that in those 3rd year''s students, Gloria was the most genius student that they have. Not only that she also has the most probability to break through S-grade.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ________________


    "Really even though I did not have any interest in the students, still some of these humans were geniuses. But unfortunately they were not born here and because of this they are unable to get the opportunity that we get in our world. " At this time a person from the other world said that. Beside him you can see five more people and most probably all of them were from the other world.


    "Well if the king wanted to conquer this then we can take these humans and make them our ves. With that you will give them some opportunity to be a true powerful ve who will work under us." Another person said that.


    " Well actually this is a really good idea." After hearing that those other four people agree with him.


    Actually these people weren''t from the Elven world. They were from the Onix vige. These people were like humans but they had one horn in their head. Not only that butpared to normal humans they also have more strength from the moment they are born. Because of this, like those elves, they also look down on these humans. They also came to the Eden blue with a one purpose that was to collect the core of this. But like those elves they also did not find any clue about that and finally they came to understand that most probably they still have some time before they will find the clue. Because of this, almost everyone left the but still the king ordered that some of them should stay here so that they can inform them if they find any clue.


    "Really, when will the core appear? I hope the core will appear quickly so that we can also go home. Compared to our world The Spiritual energy here was very low and with that I can understand why all those humans were this much weak." One of them said that.


    ________________


    2 dayster,


    Finally the second stage of thepetition wasplete and the students got 5 days to prepare for the next and final stage. At this time the organizer team looks at the points that all the students collected and between them they will select the winner of this second stage. Actually those people who will be the winner in this match will have the advantage in the final match. Also the most interesting thing was that if they are able to win every fight in the next match then they will have more additional points beside the points that they will collect after defeating their opponent. Tomorrow they will release the name of the students who will be the winner of the second stage.


    Right now those students who are in their hotel didn''t know when the organizer team will publish the result. They also know that the winner of this stage will have the advantage in the next match and even if those people get eliminated they will get a second chance toe back in thepetition. Because of this you can say that every student gives their all while fighting those Monsters.


    Like everyone Sam is also resting in his hotel. Even though in the hotel they did not have any training room, fortunately they could still train in the warrior association because the warrior association has the training rooms that the students can use. You can say that the training room in the warrior association was the most advanced training room and it was very hard to use those training rooms until anyone did not get permission from the warrior association. All the students were very lucky because they were able to use the training rooms of the Warrior association.


    Actually if it was before then the warrior association won''t give the permission to anyone but this time the situation was different. Because of this, they wanted to provide the necessary support to the student so that they could be powerful as quickly as they can.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 350 350 - Start Of The Final Competition

    Finally it was time for the finalpetition. Because of this, one second in Venus city was full of people. One by one all the stadiums became full of people who were very interested about thispetition and because of this all of them came here to watch thepetition.


    Right now, the Early D-grade warriors will fight first. Because of this, those other grade students did note to the battlefield. They were still in their training room or in their hotel room. All of them are busy preparing for their match but at the same time they are also interested in this match. Fortunately the warrior association broadcast this and because of this, they could watch thepetition even when they were in their training room or hotel room. Almost 90% of people all over the Eden blue are watching thispetition.


    Dan, Saara, Kira, Tina, and Kenny also present in that battlefield. Sam, Tony and the girls right now stop training and looking at the TV. Previously they wanted to go to the stadium but unfortunately the whole stadium was booked and because of this day decided to watch the match from the training room. Thepetition still has not started. Right now before starting thepetition the organizer team decided to check the condition of those battle rings and also at the same time they need to make sure that no student could cheat in thispetition.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally one by one the announcers started to announce in every stadium.


    ? "Weedies and gentlemen. Wee to the most famouspetition. I don''t want to waste anymore time so before anything I wanted to say the rules of thispetition to those warriors.


    1. You cannot kill your opponent or if you did that then you will face a serious punishment from the warrior association.


    2. In thispetition if you try to cheat using some other method then you will be punished seriously.


    3. The winner of this previouspetition will have the advantage and if they manage to win every match then they will get bonus points.


    4. Also the winner of the previouspetition coulde back to thepetition event if they get eliminated. Well they will have only one chance toe back.


    5. After winning 5 matches you can challenge anyone.


    6. As in the previous annual collegepetition you cannot use potion while fighting against your opponent."


    Well these are the main important rules and other than that there are some less important rules that the announcer said to everyone.


    After that, finally one by one the first batch of people came to the battle ring. All of these students get their opponent randomly so some of them get quicker opponents while some of them get tough opponents.


    Wasting no time the referee gave the signal to start thepetition and instantly the students present in the battle ring began to fight each other. All of them used their full power to defeat their opponent. Even if the fight is tough, they need to use their brain to win this type of fight.


    Unfortunately Kenny and the others will be fightingter, and because of this, they need to wait. But right now they were seriously looking at the match that was happening in the battle ring. Right now nobody is looking down on their opponents because nobody could tell how powerful their opponent was or if their opponent decided to hide their strength or not.


    ________________________


    2 hourster,<novelnext></novelnext>


    Finally this time Saara and Kira went to the battle ring because it was finally their time to fight. Well you can say that because of the previous collegepetition both of them were quite famous and because of this, the moment they enter the battle ring many people present in the stadium begin to cheer for both of them.


    Saara and Kira went to the different battle ring and their opponent also already came to the battle ring. Right now both of the girls only focused on their opponent. The moment the entire battle rings the full alert about their opponent. The moment the referee gives them the signal, both of them waste no time and attack their opponent.


    Saara instantly summons water Spears and sends them toward her opponent. But most likely her opponent also prepared and he was able to react quickly and Dodge those Spears. He was approaching her so that he could attack her from close distance but she did not give him that chance and instantly created a wall in front of her. Her opponent instantly jumped backward. He knows that she could use the water prison skill and it was quite dangerous.


    One by one many Sword shes started to go toward the wall. Well as you can see that her opponent was using the spirit technique and because of this he could create those shes. Saara also wasn''t slow because she also used that technique and instantly upgraded the quality of a water control. Instantly the sky blue color of the water turned into a deep blue color. Not only that instantly that water world turned into water spheres.


    Once again trying to dodge those attacks and also try to counterattack. Some of them already reached Saara, and you can say that she already received some injuries because of that but at the same time she was able to injure her opponent. Even though because of the armor both of them did not get seriously injured. Saara already tries to capture her opponent in water prison but her opponent also quite first and every time he dodge those attacks. Well most likely everyone knows that her water prison skill was really dangerous. Because of this, the moment he notices the water prison he backs away from that ce instantly.


    Sometimeter,


    Saara uses her most powerful technique. The water particle technique. Those waters that are present in the battle ring begin to fly in the sky and after that they are divided into many small parts. Those small parts of those waters became so small that with your normal eyes you won''t be able to see them. But if you use your special eye technique then you can notice that the whole battle ring was felt with that. Not only that, those small water parts also became small Spears.


    At this time her opponent already uses his technique but he is unable to see anything. For a moment he thought that she was still casting her spell, because she wasn''t showing any sign of low spiritual energy and because of this he thought that. He decided to use this chance to attack her so that she did not get the chance to finish her spell. Using his full speed he decided to approach her. He was about to attack her and was one hand away from Saara, but at this time suddenly something unexpected happened.


    Out of nowhere, his body gets hit by something. That instantly made him very confused and tried to look around but he did not see anything. But not long after that one by one he began to receive that type of attack and sometimeter you can see the crack mark on his armor. He already came very far away from her but still he received those invisible attacks. This instantly makes him very confused because he knows that his opponent did not have that type of technique. From his head he was already wearing armor and because of this, he still wasn''t able to understand what was that attack.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally you can see that the condition of that body is also serious because his arm finally got fully cracked and because of this he already received those attacks from her. It wasn''t that she did not receive any injuries butpared to him she received some minor injuries.


    Suddenly at this time a huge amount of those small water Spears went toward Her opponent, and that attack already made him lose consciousness. Instantly the medical team came to the battle ring to stabilize the situation of that person.


    ______________


    On the other hand, Kira, the moment she enters the battlefield, uses spirit technique to coat her sword. The moment she got the signal she instantly sent sword shes toward her opponent. Her opponent was also quite fast but in front of those many sword shes he received some injuries. But it did not stop him from approaching her. But you can say that at this time Kira also wasn''t slow and after sending those shes she also moved from his ce and approached her opponent.


    Instantly both of their swords shed against each other. That instantly made a huge impact. But still even with that impact none of them move from their ce. They were using their full power against their opponent. But sometimeter in front of that impact both of them got sent backward. But both of them quickly stabilize their condition and once again approach each other.


    _______To be continued_________

 Chapter 351 351 - Finishing The Fight In Just 2 Minutes

    Kira instantly sent her opponent backward. Har opponent unable to maintain his bnce and send backward in front of that impact created by their shes. She did not let go of this chance and instantly approached her opponent. Her opponent wasn''t able to regain his bnce when she attacked him once again. This time her opponent was unable to block her attack and her sword hit her chest. Instantly you can see the crack appear on the armor of her opponent. Not only that, because of the impact her opponent already became unconscious.


    With that she also won the fight and came down from the battle ring. At this time you can say that many people were present in the stadium cheering for her and Saara. Because of the previous annual collegepetition all of them became famous, because of this naturally people supporting them.


    _________________


    1 hourter,


    Finally it was time for Dan to fight. Both he and his opponent already came to the battle ring and both of them were already using their spirit technique. They are ready to attack anytime and just waiting for the signal.


    The moment they got the signal both of them started to release Sword shes toward each other. Because of this, you can see many impacts were created by the sh of those sword shes. While releasing their sword shes, both of them also get closer to each other and sometimeter finally theye in front of each other and attack.


    Once again a huge impact was created and both of them sent backward because of the impact. But both of them quickly stabilize themselves and then once again approach each other.


    So, Like this both of them are fighting but you can see clearly that in this fight Dan has The upper Handpared to his opponent. It wasn''t that his opponent was weak butpared to him his opponent wasn''t that strong. It takes almost 25 minutes for Dan to defeat his opponent. At this time, the medical team already came to the battle ring to check the condition of his opponent. Not only that, the referee also came to the battle ring and announced him as the winner of this fight. Once again many people started to p and cheer for him. You can say that every one of them has their fans.


    ________________


    Sam, Tony and the girls were going toward the cafeteria because it was lunchtime so for 1 hour the match will be stopped. At that time everyone could eat their lunch and after 1 hourter the match would once again start. Dan, Saara, and Kira were resting, while Kenny and Tina were busy preparing for their match and because of this, they did note with them.


    Naturally before eating anything outside they were very careful. Well on the other hand this cafeteria is specially made for the students who will be participating in the battle. Around these cafeterias you can see a number of Warriors guarding that ce not only outside but you can find Warriors inside of this cafeteria. Actually the Warrior association wanted to prevent the previous incident from happening. Because of this they increase the security around the cafeteria. But even with that it was natural for Sam and the others to be careful while eating food outside.


    But fortunately a few days ago Sam bought a technique that will help him identify if there was poison or any other thing in his food or not. With that he has the confidence and because of this he also decided to go to the cafeteria to eat food.


    Tony and the girls were talking to each other while Sam was busy in his own thoughts. Actually he was observing his surroundings while going toward the cafeteria. He still did not forget his main Motive that was to find the culprit who had previously poisoned him. At any cost he wanted to find that person and punish him. Don''t know why but his instincts were telling him that that culprit will also present in thispetition and because of this he was carefully observing the people around him. All this time he used his spiritual vision to observe all those people but until now he did not find anything suspicious about those people and because of this he was quite disappointed.


    "Sam!!! What are you thinking about?" Suddenly the same came back to his senses after hearing Jeni''s voice. Only then did he realize that they were already in front of the cafeteria. He just smiled toward her. After that all of them enter the cafeteria. The moment they enter the cafeteria they can see the entire cafeteria was full of people. They did not even have any empty space, fortunately they could also go upward. So they went to the next floor and fortunately they found an empty spot and sat down.


    ________________


    "Sigh, I am really very excited about this match. Don''t know when it will be my time to fight, sigh." Tony said that while sighing. After hearing hisint Sam and the others begin tough. All of them know that he was a battle maniac and he just can''t wait to fight.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Well even though I was curious and excited about the match, I am not a battle maniac like you." Suddenly at this time Jeni mocked Tony. Once again everyone began tough.


    "But still guys after looking at the number I can tell that for today we won''t be able to fight. Most likely we will only be able to fight tomorrow." Alexa said that. After hearing her Sam and the others also nodded. They also agree with him because it wasn''t like the annual collegepetition where you only have some students who participate in the fight. In this annual college gradepetition, any student could participate. Because of this, it takes this much time.


    "But guys, what do you think about those students from the white Tiger Academy, Golden Dawn and Falcon academy? Compared to those other colleges these three colleges have powerful students. Most likely we need to be careful around those students so that they cannot take advantage," Elena said. After hearing that, everyone also agrees with her. Because they also think that only these three colleges will give them the challenge.


    "Haha¡­ most likely Alexa will be challenged by many students. Haha¡­ even I will also challenge her." Suddenly at this time Tony said that whileughing. Alexa was the winner of the previous match and because of this she has the advantage of the points. So it was natural that many people were already nning to Challenger so that they could take the points from her.


    "Hmm¡­ don''t expect me to lower my strength because it was you." Suddenly at this time Alexa said that. After hearing that you can say that everyone also smiles because they also did not expect or want her to lower her strength because of them. They also wanted to Challenge her and fight her with their full power.


    ________________________


    1 hourter,


    Finally once again everyone came back to the stadium because the match will start once again. If you look at the time then you will see that it was 3:00 p.m. the match started from 10:00 a.m. and most likely it will finish around 10:00 p.m. the organizer team already decided that after the first battle of every Grade, there will be some change in their n. But before announcing that n they need to wait for the first match of every Grade student to finish.


    Come back to the battlefield you can see that Kenny and Tina also enter the battlefield. The moment both of them enter the battlefield you can see that many people started to cheer for them and also p for them. Both of them went their separate ways.


    Kenny and Tina already enter the battle ring and opposite to them you can see their opponents also present there. Both of them did not say anything and also already activated the spirit technique. They were ready to attack anytime.


    The moment Kenny got the signal from the referee instantly she created a confused ray and shot that word at her opponent. That instantly confused her opponent and she took that chance toe in front of her opponent and begin to attack her continuously. She did not give any chance to her opponent to fight back.


    1 minuteter her opponent finally came back to her senses but you can see that she already became seriously injured. Kenny''s opponent was a spiritual warrior and because of this, she did not want to give any chance. She already once again came in front of her warrior and attacked her once again. Finally in front of those powerful attacks are opponents unable to maintain her consciousness.


    At this time the medical team already came to the battle ring and quickly began to heal her. On the other hand the referee also came to the battle ring, after that he announced her as the winner of this match. You can say that you can most probably be the fastest one to finish her fight. All those audience, when saw that she finished the fight in just 2 minutes and began to loudly cheer for her.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 352 352 - Mysterious Pills

    Tina on the other hand did not finish her fight that quickly because she didn''t learn the light control technique. But on the other hand she can use her spirit technique while using her movement technique. With that she gets an additional speed.


    Tina is also ready to attack her opponent the moment she enters the battle ring. The moment she gets the signal from the referee, she uses her full speed and attacks her opponent from every direction. It was like 4 to 5 Tina attacking her opponent at the same time from every direction. Well because of her high speed you are almost unable to see her.


    Her opponent was also ready to attack her but he did not get that chance. He can also use the spirit technique and he was ready to use that to attack her but in front of her speech, he was unable to do anything. Right now in front of those continuous attacks from every direction he can only try to defend himself. Even with that you can see that his armor has already begun to crack and he was also receiving injuries because of those continuous attacks.


    5 minutester Tina finally stopped while maintaining the distance between her and her opponent. Well, using the spirit technique while using his movement technique really puts a lot of stress on her body and because of this he can only maintain this for 5 minutes. But even with that you can see her opponent was badly injured. But most likely he was waiting for this chance and because when he suddenly noticed that Tina stopped attacking her he tried to locate her and when he saw her, he did not waste anymore time and instantly began to release sword shes toward her. Even though it was very hard in his condition to release those attacks, he still wanted to fight back.


    On the other hand Tina was recovering her stamina and spiritual energy but she already expected her opponent to attack her and she also prepared for that. Even though right now she won''t be able to use speed technique, that does not mean you won''t be able to dodge those attacks. Instantly using her full strength, she jumped away from that ce.


    Unfortunately nobody could use potion at this time, or the situation could be different. She can see that because of the blood loss the situation of her opponent begins to worsen. She just needs to give a final blow to her opponent and she will win this match. She already recovered some of her stamina and spiritual energy, so she decided to use that. Once again she instantly appears in front of her opponent and gives him the final attack that sends him outside of the battle ring.


    The medical team already came toward her opponent while the referee went to the battle ring and announced her as the winner of this match. Once again those people who support her begin to cheer for her. Right now she was very low on her stamina and spiritual energy but she wasn''t showing that. She was smiling toward those in the audience while leaving the battle ring. Fortunately, Kenny was present there to support her.


    In those audiences you can see Tony and the others also cheering for her. With that all of their friends ready to qualify for the next battle. Sam at this time is also happy for his friends but at this time she is still focusing on the battlefield. Because right now in the battlefield you can see Aliya was fighting. Well in these few months not only Tony and the others but she also improved very much. Before she went to the battle ring Sam already said good luck to her. Right now he can see that she has improved very much in these few months and most likely she could give her friends a tough fight.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally Aliya won against her opponent and at this time, same decided to leave the training room. Well most likely today they won''t be able to fight and because of this he wanted to go back to his hotel. All this time they were training and fighting with their robots. They only stop fighting when it is time for their friends to fight and because of this all of them are quite tired.


    ____________________


    "Guys, most likely something happened to the first year''s white tiger team. I already noticed Pijush and the others but I did not notice Gustav all this time. Do you think something happened to him? " Jeni asked when they were going back to their hotel. Well, they almost already meet the familiar people that they previously met in the annual collegepetition, but the only person they still did not see was Gustav. Because of this it was really strange.


    "Most likely he was still busy with his training. But if he bes my opponent then I will really show him the difference between us. He really makes me very angry," Tony said while maintaining a serious face. Actually not only him but the others were also very angry at him because of his previous behavior.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Just forget about him. Most likely he will be fighting in a different stadium and because of this we did not see him. As you can see, only some students from the White Tiger Academy were present in the stadium and most likely they were fighting in a different stadium." Alexa said that. As you know the warrior association was helding the match in every stadium present in the Venus city, and it was really possible that they were fighting in a different stadium. After hearing her words, all of them nodded. Right now they should forget about him and those other unnecessary things and they should only focus on their next match. Nobody knows which type of opponent they will face in their next match. The opponent could be very powerful or very weak. Still  they will maintain their seriousness in every fight.


    _________________


    Right now in the training room of The White Tiger Academy you can see a person was practicing. He is Gustav. He was practicing for tomorrow''s match and you can see that he also improved very much in these few months. But the most surprising thing was that he was eating something that instantly made him very powerful and after that to release that Power he practiced very hard. Nobody knew about this, he did not tell anyone about this. While you are taking that feeling you can see that he is almost going into a berserker mode, where it was very difficult to surpass the anger. Nobody knows about those pills or even he did not tell anyone about them. But right now if someone observes those pills with their spiritual vision then they will notice the dark energy that was present in those pills.


    So like this he was practicing in his training room and he also prevented those other Warriors from entering his training room. Tomorrow most probably from 10:00 a.m. the match will start and before that he wanted to prepare himself.


    How did he get those pills? Nobody knows the answer, but one thing was for sure that definitely those pills have some kind of connection with the dark association. Because only the dark association uses the dark spiritual energy to increase their power. So it is quite possible that he also has some kind of connection with the dark association.


    _________________


    Next day,


    Already you can see that the people were going toward the stadium with excitement. Once again today they will see interesting matches. Also today will be the match between intermediate D-grade warriors, because of this, those people are excited. Almost every first year''s main member of the three kings and even the Dark horse will be present in this match and because of this, it was making them very excited. You can say that even the Saints were very interested about today''s match because children from their family will be participating in this match.


    Sam, Alexa, Tony, Jeni and Elena, already started to go toward the stadium. When they will go to the stadium the referee will shuffle their name and only then will they see the name of their opponent. But one thing was that Sam and the others were probably fighting students from the other colleges. Because even though the referee will be shuffling their name, the chances are very low where they will fight against students from their college.


    So one by one everyone already came to the battlefield and the referee already started to shuffle their names. It only takes 1 minute and they are already able to see the name of their opponent. Just looking at the name some of them became excited while some of them became scared. Because right now some of them will face strong opponents while some of them will face weak opponents. But you can say that Sam and his friends did not celebrate after seeing the name. They will never underestimate their opponents.


    ______________To be continued__________

 Chapter 353 353 - Finish The Flight As Quickly As You Can

    Tony, Elena and Alexa going toward the battle ring. Finally after waiting for hours it was their time to fight. Because of this, they went toward their own separate battle ring. Also as Sam expected no one will face their ssmates in this first match. Everyone was facing students from other colleges. You can say that this is already fixed before the shuffle that every student will face students from other colleges in the first match. But after that you can even match against your own ssmate in the next match.


    Also one more thing was that James and the other students from the three kings or the Dark horse were present in their stadium. It was like that the organizer team did not want those students to face each other this quickly and because of this everyone of them fighting in different stadiums.


    All three of them already came to the battle ring and their opponent was already present in the battle ring. But one thing was that the moment 3 of them started to go toward the battle ring almost everyone present in the stadium began to cheer for them. All three of them are very famous and those people were excited to see their match once again. Actually not only those people but even those teachers who were observing the match were also very excited. All three of them are the elite students who already showed their power in the previous annual collegepetition. So because of this everyone is also excited to know about their power right now. How much they increase their power after the annual collegepetition after the incident.


    ________________________


    Currently Alexa was looking at her opponent seriously the moment she entered the battle ring. She already activated the spirit technique and also covered her body with the spiritual energy. She was ready to attack her opponent at any moment and she was just waiting for the signal from the referee.


    The referee also did not waste anymore time and quickly gave them the signal and instantly Alexa Vanished from her ce. She did not want to waste anymore time and quickly wanted to finish this fight. Because of this she quickly used the movement technique while using the spirit technique and instantly her speed became so fast that even her opponent was unable to spot her. Well you can say that in these few months not only her but Tony and the others also already master the spirit technique and right now they could use many more techniques while using the spirit technique. So it was easy for her to use the movement technique while she was using the spirit technique.


    Har opponent is also already ready to attack the moment he enters the battle ring. He also already covers his sword with spiritual energy. But unfortunately he still did not master the spirit technique and because of this he was unable to use the spirit technique other than his sword technique. The moment he saw Alexa Vanished from her ce he became instantly alert about his surroundings. But even with that he was unable to react on time and instantly a huge force attacked him from behind.


    Alexa''s opponent was unable to defend himself in front of that attack and was already sent flying. But Alexa did not stop there. She once again moved from her ce and came in front of her opponent and once again attacked that person. This time her opening seems to already be aware of her intention and try to differentiate himself. But he underestimated the force behind her attack. Like that Alexa continued to attack her opponent and did not give him any chance to fight back.


    5 minutester,


    Right now if you look at her opponent then you will see that he is already unconscious and already bleeding from his body. She alreadypletely destroyed his armor and not only that his sword also got crushed by her attack. Fortunately the medical team was very quick to react and they already came to the battle ring and began to heal him. On the other handpared to her opponent she did not even receive any injuries and with that he shows everyone how much improve in these few months.


    You can say that all the people or even those teachers and those guild leaders were shocked after watching her battle. Who could have expected that she became so powerful that a normal intermediate D-grade warrior wouldn''t be able tond any attack on her. For a moment those in the audience did not know what to do but a few secondster, they came back to their senses and finally began to cheer for her. At this time the referee already came to the battle ring and announced the winner of this match. Alexa did not waste anymore time in the battle ring and quickly left the battle ring. Even though all those people thought that she became this much powerful, she did not think like that. Because even after bing powerful she was unable to defeat Sam. She only considers herself powerful when she would be able to defeat him.


    ____________________


    Tony also became very serious the moment he entered the battle ring. As you know that before mastering the spirit technique, he seems to focus on his movement technique. Right now after mastering the spirit technique his speed has already increased so much that you cannot see him with normal eyes. His speed was even greater than Alexa.<novelnext></novelnext>


    So as expected he also began to continuously attack his opponent from the moment he got the signal from the referee. Like Alexa he also wanted to quickly finish the fight and because of this he did not give any chance to his opponent to attack him. His opponent was a spiritual Warrior and he did not give her any chance to prepare her spell. In just 3 minutes his opponent send outside of the battle ring.


    Once again all the audience became excited after watching the power of Tony. As expected he also became so powerful that he could defeat his opponent in just 3 minutes. All those in the audience began to loudly cheer for him.


    ___________________


    Elena was now facing a physical Warrior. The moment she enters the battle ring she begins to use the spirit technique and is already ready to attack her opponent with her light Spears. In these few months, only her power has also increased but right now she can cast any spell in just 0.5 second. With that the moment she entered the battle ring, she cast her spell. But until the moment the referee did not give them the signal to fight, she did not make those light Spears visible.


    But the moment both of them get the signal, har opponent already begins to approach her but she also wasn''t slow and already shoots those light Spears that appear out of nowhere and directly go toward her opponent. But it wasn''t just one light spear. You can say almost 50 light Spears going toward her opponent. Her opponent who approached her very quickly also almost stopped his movement. But then he quickly reacted and began to save himself from those Spears. But in front of those attacks he was unable to defend himselfpletely. Not only that but suddenly he saw a bright light in front of his eyes then hepletely became dazed.


    As you can guess Elena also attacked him with a confused ray attack. With that he is unable to dodge those attacks and get heat by those attacks one by one. Even though in the situation he was unable to tell what was happening he could still feel the pain and because of this you can hear the crying voice. Unable to tolerate the pain he quickly gave up on this match. Only then Elena made those light Spears disappear and he came back to his senses. At this time the medical team already came toward him and began to heal his wounds. Right now if you are wondering why the armor of these people breaks this easily, then it is normal because even though you are wearing high quality armor, if you get attacked continuously then it is natural that your armor will break apart.


    _____________________


    She came down from the battle ring and then met Tony and Alexa. At this time they did not quickly go back to the resting room because they were also interested in those other matches and because of this, they began to watch those other matches. Some of them also finished the fight very quickly while some of them took their time to defeat their opponent because their opponent was as powerful as them.


    30 minutester,


    Tony and the girls go back to their resting room. All this time they were watching the fight and finally it was finished. Right now the new students wille to the battle ring. When three of them came to the resting room Sam and Jeni waited for them and also congratted them. All three of them beautifully finish their match as quickly as they can.


    _____________To be continued____________

 Chapter 354 354 - Strong Opponent

    A lighting Eagles were created and quickly flew toward the person that was standing opposite Jeni. But her opponent also wasn''t slow. The moment she noticed those lightning eagles, she also instantly created a firewall in front of her to protect herself from those lightning eagles. Right now Jeni was facing her opponent and the most interesting thing was that both of them were spiritual Warriors. Butpared to her opponent, Jeni already mastered the spirit technique and because of this she could easily use the technique while using her spell and increase the power of her spell.


    Right now her opponent seems to underestimate the power of those lightning eagles. She can use the speed technique while using her spell but it wasn''t as strong as Jeni. This is the reason why those lightning eagles easily destroy the firewall and then quickly attack her. She almost uses her full power to maintain the firewall but in the end, it was useless against those lightning eagles. In the end, she got hit by those lightning eagles and instantly it damaged her and also made her paralyzed.


    Jeni on the other hand already came close to her opponent who was now paralyzed and unable to move. At this time she was quickly about to punch her opponent. Well, she knows the power of those lightning eagles and if she once again uses that type of technique then she could kill her opponent. Because of this, she decided to use her fist to send her opponent outside of the battle ring.


    _____________________


    Well right now on the battlefield not only Jeni but also Sam is present in the battle ring. He and his opponent were facing each other. His opponent was a Spear user. Right now both of them are observing each other and both are maintaining their calm. But you cannot say that to other people. Everyone knows how strong Sam was and because of this, all the people present in the stadium be very excited. They were just guessing how long it would take for him to eliminate his opponent. But at the same time, many of them also became surprised when they noticed that the opponent also maintained a calmness in the battle ring.


    But you can say that Sam did not be surprised after seeing it. On the other hand, he was feeling something strange about his opponent. He didn''t know why he was feeling something like that but he could tell that his opponent was strange. But he cannot answer why he feels like that. Well, he was thinking all of this in his mind and because of this from outside everyone can see he was still calm. Sam deserted to find out why he was feeling strange while facing his opponent. Also because he was fighting against an intermediate D-grade warrior, because of this, he also already lowered his power to intermediate D-grade.


    The moment the referee gave them a signal, both of the students Vanished from their ce, and instantly a huge impact was created because of the sh between them. Right now everyone can see that both of the students are holding onto their ground and nobody is moving from his ce.


    ? Sometimeter both of them once again sh against each other. Right now everyone in the audience can tell that both of the students most likely have the same power and because of this, nobody has the advantage in this match. But you have to say that Tony and the others be very surprised when they notice that someone is able to fight against Sam. Previously they thought that his opponent would be sent flying when both of their weapons shed against each other. But nothing like that happened and with that, it became sure that Sam and his opponent most likely have the same strength and because of this, nobody has the advantage in this match.


    Sam also felt the oddness about this; he did not think about that and only focused on his match. Right now both of the fighters are continuously attacking each other. Because of their sh, many impacts were created and everyone present in the stadium can also feel the impact. Those impacts were really powerful, fortunately, the barrier was present in the stadium and because of this, nobody got hurt by those impacts.


    Most likely nobody could expect that someone like this would appear in this match who can match against Sam. Most likely even the ssmates of this person were quite surprised because they also did not think that you would be able to match against Sam. But instantly they wille happy and begin to cheer for him.


    Sam, who was attacking his opponent, already knows that if he wants to win this match then it will be quite hard for him. Most likely this was his first time facing an opponent like this who can match against him. Even though he was counseling his full power, he can tell that his opponent also seems to be doing exactly the same as him. But Sam did not worry about it, and he won''t lose because right now he still did not use his full power and he also did not use  pure spiritual energy all this time. All this time he was only fighting his opponent, only using his strength and not using spiritual energy.


    On the other hand, from the first his opponent was using spiritual energy. So without you can tell that even though people thought Sam will have a hard time this match but that wasn''t the case. Previously he just did not want to use the pure spiritual energy but looked like he did not have any other way.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Instantly he became serious and his spiritual energy coated his yer. Not only his opponent but many other powerful Warriors suddenly feel that Sam''s aura suddenly changed. Not only that they can also feel the danger thates out of him. Sam once again Vanished from his ce but this time his opponent was unable to react on time and instantly he got attacked by both his left and right side. But he did not stop there and continuously attacked his opponent from every direction while at this time his opponent was only trying to protect himself from those attacks.


    You can say that his opponent also became surprised when suddenly the aura of Sam changed. Who could have thought that all this time he wasn''t using his full strength. He is also unable to match Sam''s speed. Right now the only thing he could do was to protect himself from those attacks.


    Sometimeter,


    You can see the serious condition of his opponent. He already lost his better or more and not only that his spear already got damaged by those attacks. But the strange thing was that his opponent still did not give up and even after losing that much blood he got up from the ground and once again looked at Sam.  Wasting no time once again both of the students sh against each other, while both of them fight using their fist. Sam already destroys the spear of his opponent and because of this he was also fighting empty handed.


    But still you should not underestimate those punches because even when both of their punches shed, and huge impact was created by those punches. It wasn''t that Sam did not receive any injuries butpared to his opponent his condition wasn''t that serious. He was slightly injured and his armor also did not break after getting hit by Those attacks. But you have to say that the power of the pure spiritual energy was much greater than any other thing because from the moment begin to use the pure spiritual energy he has the advantage over his opponent.


    Because of the danger he wasn''t using his full power while using his pure spiritual energy. This could hurt his opponent or even kill him and because of this, he wasn''t using his full power. But something was weird about that person because when he realize that he won''t be able to defeat Sam in normal way he suddenly increase his power and you can say that he already touch the limit of a peak D-grade warrior


    ___________________


    3 hourster,


    Right now you can see that only Sam and his opponent are present in the battle ring and other than that the whole battlefield was empty. Even those other students were also interested about their match and because of this they also looked at the fight with interest. Right now you can see that the battle almost got crushed by both of the warriors. But fortunately Sam suddenly uses 50% of his power and instantly sends his opponent outside of the battle ring. With that he was the winner of this match. But still he doesn''t know why but his opponent was smiling all this time and he could tell that his opponent also did not use his full power against him.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 355 355 - Looking For The Mysterious Student

    "This will be my first time seeing an intense match like this where Sam needs this much time to defeat his opponent." Tony said that. Actually not only him but Alexa and the others were also very surprised right now. Most likely this is their first time seeing an opponent powerful like this who can fight against Sam. Because of this, everyone was very surprised. But still it wasn''t impossible. With that they came out from there daze and then began to p for Sam because he won this match.


    On the other hand Sam was looking at his opponent who was outside of the battle ring with his spiritual vision. Well as you know that from the beginning he was feeling something odd about his opponent and because of this, he decided to observe his opponent right now. Well previously because of the intense battle he did not get the chance to activate his spiritual vision technique.


    Instanally his eyes change and right now he can see the things that normally anyone is unable to see. At this time he looked at that opponent and only then he found that strange thing about that person. Normally if you look at any human then you will see that every human releases a blue spiritual aura from their body, but at this time when he looks at that person he bes surprised because he can see that that person was releasing green aura from his body. Instantly this makes him very surprised but at the same time he instantly bes alert.


    ''So, this is the odd thing about this person.'' Sam thought that and one thing was that he was very familiar with this type of aura. Previously when he encountered those people from the other world he observed those people with his spiritual vision and that time he also saw those people releasing green aura from their body. With this it did not take him that much time to understand the fact that this person most likely rted those people from the other world.


    Because of this he became very alert at this time and he quickly left the battle ring. But if you look at him from the outside then you cannot find his alertness. He maintains calmness while approaching the resting area. Right now his main priority is to contact his teacher or Saint Markus and tell him about this. But still one thing really confused him: why did those people from the other world decide to take part in thispetition? Also one more thing was that he knew that those people who came from the other world were very powerful and it really confused him. How was he able to defeat that person if he was from another world? Right now Sam was thinking all of this while he was approaching the resting area.


    Jeni already went to the resting area before him and when he came to the resting area he found his friends always present there. They quickly came in front of him and said congrattions to him but only then they realized that something was wrong with him. Instantly they asked him why he was looking this serious. But Sam did not say anything to them because previously those Saints told him not to reveal any information about the other world to anyone. It could be dangerous for his friends to know about the people from the other world and because of this, he did not say anything to them. He only smiled at them and said that he was okay.


    ___________________


    "I am not 100% sure but I can tell that most likely that person is rted to people from the other world. Previously when I follow those people from the other world I look at their aura, it shows me a green aura. This time I was feeling very odd but that time I was unable to tell what it was. But after my match was finished I looked at my opponent with my spiritual vision and only then I was able to see that he was releasing a green aura like those people from the other world. Because of this, I think that student was rted to the people from the other world." Sam said that to Markus.


    Currently Sam was talking with Markus and he did not waste anymore time to exin everything to him. Markus, who was busy in his office, also became very startled. Because if what Sam was saying is true then it was really dangerous for the students who participated in thepetition. At the same time he also got confused: how were those people from the other world able to enter the battlefield as a student?


    He also did not waste anymore time and quickly informed everyone that was present in the stadium to interrogate that student and also try to search around the stadium. Fortunately, Vena was present there and he told her everything. She also became serious after hearing that and already began to observe all the people that were present in the stadium. But she gets the report from her subordinate that mysteriously that student has already finished from the medical room. Previously after the battle the medical team already brought that student to the medical room. But when har subordinate went to the medical room to interrogate that person they did not find that student. This instantly made her very alert and he already told all of them to spread around the stadium and try to find that student at any cost.


    _________________


    Currently outside of the stadium you can see five people eating something in a restaurant and suddenly one more person joins them. But something was odd about that person who just joined them because you can see that he was wearing some kind of uniform but suddenly that changed into a different cloth. Well he is the one who previously transformed himself as the student and participated in the match.<novelnext></novelnext>


    "Did you enjoy the fight?" Suddenly a girl beside that person asked him.


    "Haha¡­ I did not expect that person to hide his strength and participate in that match. I previously thought that I could easily defeat him while only using that much power but I was wrong and I got defeated by him. Sigh, unfortunately I didn''t even get to reveal my full power. But still it makes me surprised that someone like him exists in this world whose spiritual aura is white. Moment I thought that he was also from another world but then I realized he wasn''t. Because of this, I got confused for sometime and did not get the chance to release my full power. " He exined all of this to his friends.


    But just after hearing that everyone began tough at him because he just got defeated by an earthling who was much weaker than him. But then it also surprises them that someone like that person exists on earth whose aura is white. Who could have expected that. Well everyone of them can tell that most likely between those students only Sam was able to release that white aura.


    Actually some time ago, because their friend wanted to take part in thepetition, they kidnap the main student and their friend transforma into that person and takes part in thepetition. But who could have thought that he would face an opponent like this. This already makes all of them very curious to know about that person but suddenly something they noticed. They noticed that some humans started to search around outside of the stadiums. It was like they were searching for someone.


    "Levi, let me ask you one thing, did you reveal your identity to them? Because I am feeling that they were searching for you," suddenly that girl beside Levi once again asked.


    But hearing that question he also became confused because he was sure that he did not reveal anything to anyone. But when he looked outside of the restaurant and saw those people he could also feel that they were searching for him.


    "Well just forget about them. Even if they try to search for me they won''t be able to do that." Levi said to them. He has the full confidence that those people won''t be able to find them and because of this, he said this to his friend. His friends also agreed with him and they once again focused on their food. They have to say thatpared to the food they eat in their world, the food in this human world was delicious.


    ________________________


    Vena, sometimeter once again gets the report from har subordinate that they found that student but most likely something happened to him. They found that boy unconscious near a Store room in the stadium. Because of this they find it a very confusing thing. Right now they already take that boy into the medical room and inform her. Vena did not Waste anymore time and quickly left the VIP room and started to go toward the medical room.


    ___________To be continued____________

 Chapter 356 356 - Half Broken Barrier

    The name of the student was Axel. Saint Vena was already looking at that student. Currently he was unconscious andying down in the medical room while those medical teams were trying to heal him. Fortunately nothing big had happened. After checking the student the medical team already told them that he just only became unconscious other than that he was healthy.


    At this time Saint Vena was already observing that student but she did not find any green auraing out from that boy. Because of this, she became very confused. She knows that Sam won''t give any wrong information, then why she is unable to find the green aura or any other clue that is rted to the other world''s people. Right now the only thing she can do is to Interrogate Axel, after he bes conscious.


    It did not take much time for him to be conscious. He slowly opened his eyes and for a moment you can say that he was very confused. Suddenly seeing that unfamiliar ceiling almost made him startled. But suddenly at this time the nurse beside him tried to calm him down. Only then Axel realizes that he was in the medical room and Saint Vena also presents there. At this time he quickly tries to ask the nurse what happened to him. The nurse told him that he was unconscious and because of this, Warriors from the warrior association brought him to the medical room.


    All this time, Saint Vena observed this boy but she did not find anything strange about him. But the confusing thing was that the moment that boy became conscious he was very confused.


    "Student Axel, how did you be unconscious?" Vena asked that.


    "Saint, I also don''t know how I became unconscious. The only thing I remember is that it was my time to fight and because of this, I was preparing in the training room. But at this time out of nowhere I suddenly smell something. Instantly I only saw darkness and after that I woke up here." He exined all of this to them.


    As expected, just after hearing that everyone present in the medical room became surprised because he was telling them the truth. But then here is the main question, if he was unconscious then who went to the battle ring, who exactly looked like him and also fought with Sam? Even Vena was very confused.


    Axel feels that something is wrong with them after seeing their expression. Because of this, he instantly asks them. Only then he gets to know that even though he was unconscious, someone who exactly looks like him went to the battle ring and also fought Sam.


    "Student Axel, can you try to remember any clove before you be unconscious. If you remember anything with that we can try to find that culprit who makes you unconscious." Vena said that to him.


    Axel calmed down after hearing that. He began to think very hard. But still he was unable to remember any clue or anything strange. Because previously when he was in the training room he only focused on his training but after hearing the call from his teammates he was going toward the bathroom to freshen up. This is the only thing he remembers. Just when he was able to tell them that he did not know anything he suddenly remembered something.


    "I don''t know if it was a clue or not but I remember something that I saw previously. When I was going toward the bathroom to freshen up at this time I suddenly noticed a shadow in the mirror. If I remember correctly then I saw a shadow of a human but the strange thing about that human was that her ear was pointy. This is the only thing I remember before losing my consciousness." Axel told these details to Saint Vena after thinking very hard. He almost forgot about this but after thinking very hard he finally remembered.


    _______________________


    "Markus, it looks like those people from other world''s people came to his training room and then made him unconscious. After that someone took his ce and fought with Sam." Vena exins all of this to him. This is a really serious matter. What if more of their students got attacked by people from other world''s people. But at the same time they were helpless because they were unable to find any clue about those other world''s people. Even those saints were helpless.


    "I think we should really consider our n. We should contact those prime humans. Right now we don''t know the motive of those people from the other world who came to our. If all of them really have a bad motive, then it is really dangerous for all humans." Saint John said that. The saints also agree with him. Saint Mira don''t know anything about those prime humans but she also thinks that in this situation the only thing they can do is to contact those prime humans who once help them.


    " Sigh, I also feel the same. Currently I think only they can help us. I never realized that we would be contacting them and asking them for help." Markus sighs. Well not only him but those other 9 Saints were also sighed. They also did not think that a situation like this would appear where they once again contacted those prime humans for help.<novelnext></novelnext>


    __________________


    Currently when all of this thing was happening, you can see in a big training room someone meditating. Not only that beside her you can already see many stones. Actually they are not stones they were the crystals but after absorbing the essence from them all those crystals turned into this.


    Well, it was Alena who was trying to break through with the help of a limit breaker. If you look at her both hands then you will see that two limit breakers were present in both of her hands. With the help of these limit breakers she was using her full power to attack thest barrier of the A-grade. She is already able to break that barrier but she is only able to break half of that barrier. She still needs it sometime to break the barrier fully and only then will she be able to level up.


    You can say that this always takes her 2 months. But after the intense fight between her and the barrier, she was very close to breaking through.


    Right now inside of her mind space,


    You can see that Alena was floating in the year while she looked at that half breaking barrier that was in front of her. Previously she was exhausted because of using her full power and she took some time to recover her full energy and once again then gather the energy from those to limit breakers and once again attack that barrier.


    She was attacking that barrier continuously and you can see that under those continuous attacks the barrier was breaking but very slowly. You should not think that breaking thest barrier was very easy. Fortunately she was using two limit breakers and because of this she was able to do that.


    At this time she doesn''t know why but she has a feeling that she needs to break through as quickly as she can. Something will happen if she doesn''t break through quickly. She doesn''t know what will happen but she has this feeling. Because of this she was trying to break through as quickly as she could. She waspletely unaware of what was happening in the outside world. But she knows that most likely the annual college gradepetition has already started and her students will participate in that match. She has full confidence in both of her students.


    _______________


    Sam is going toward the cafeteria with his friends. He was also unaware that the opponent he faced previously wasn''t his real opponent. Someone from the other world already takes his ce and fights with him. Because of this, he saw the green auraing out from fake Axel''s body. Markus decided not to tell anyone about this. They also did not want to tell Sam. Right now, all the saints were busy contacting the prime humans. Other than the saints nobody knows that.


    "Haha¡­ it really surprised me that someone as strong as him also participated in the match. But don''t worry I also have the full confidence that if I use my 100% strength then I could defeat that person." Tony said that. Actually they were discussing fake Axel. Even though they can feel that Axel was very strong, they also have confidence in their strength that they could also defeat him if they use their full power.


    Sam was smiling at this time. He did not tell anyone about his opponent. But he has the feeling that most likely he can lose that fight if he did not react that quickly. As he wanted to finish that fight as quickly as he could, he used his 50% power and only then was he able to send his opponent outside of the battlefield. But at the same time he feels that his opponent also did not use his full power while fighting him. Most likely his opponent seems like looking down on him.


    __________To be continued___________

 Chapter 357 357 - Strongest Students Of The Royal Academy

    2 dayter,


    Finally it was time for the intermediate C-grade students to fight. Many fourth and 3rd year students will be fighting in this match. Butpared to those other grades the number of the intermediate C-grade Warrior were very low. Well it was natural that not that many students were able to break through. Also the most interesting thing was that because no one was able to breakthrough to peak C-grade, Gloria needed to fight the intermediate C-grade students while lowering her power to intermediate C-grade.


    Right now as usual you can see that the whole stadium was full of people. Well you can say that from 1st year to 4th year every student from the Royal Academy fights in this stadium. Same thing also happened with the other two kings and the Dark horse. It was a good thing but at the same time because of this, you won''t be able to see the power of those other people with your own eyes. Not that you cannot get the information but still watching with your own eyes was a really different thing.


    Now came back to the battlefield,


    The fight had already started and one by one many students already qualified for the next match while many of them were also disqualified from thispetition. Except Gloria and Fiona you can say almost everyone from the Royal Academy''s 3rd year, win their matches and qualify for the next match. Not only the third year but those fourth year students also qualify for the next match. As usual no one from the Royal Academy faced their ssmates or their seniors.


    The referee finally called the next batch toe to the battle ring. Everyone from the audience instantly became excited because it was finally time for Fiona to battle. Most likely Gloria will fight in the end. The moment those people who support the Royal Academy notice Fiona they begin to cheer loudly for her. As you know, after Gloria she was the most talented student in the Royal Academy and also the second strongest Student of The Royal Academy.


    If you are wondering why she was called the second strongest, because before thispetition many fourth year or even 3rd year student Challenger after they became intermediate C-grade warriors. But nobody was able to win against her and after that she got that title.


    Fiona came to her battle ring and at the same time her opponent was also already present in the battle ring. Both of them are already observing each other while both of them have already begun to use their spirit technique. Even though Alexa and the others master the spirit technique,pared to Fiona they did not master this technique that much.


    Right now if you look at her then you can notice that her whole body is glowing in blue color. From head to toe she covered herself with the spiritual energy. This instantly increases her power and at the same time increases her difference. But not only her who did that because if you look at her opponent at this time then you can see that he also did the same thing. But still there was a difference between them.


    Right now the blue color of The Spiritual energy suddenly disappeared from her body. It was like she stopped using the spiritual energy. But it wasn''t the case because Fiona controlled that spiritual energy and created ayer of spiritual energy in her body. Because of this, thatyer did not release the blue color while on the other hand most likely her opponent was unable to do that and because of this, he was glowing in blue color. To create this type ofyer you need to have the perfect control over your spiritual energy and only then can you do that.


    ____________


    "She really is the second strongest student of our Academy. The control she has in her spiritual energy really surprises me every time. Even those fourth years really had a hard time to create this type ofyer but senior Fiona easily did that." Jeni said that.


    Sam and the others were in the stadium and looking at the battle ring. At this time when all of them saw Fiona they were really amazed by her control.


    "Well don''t forget like sister Gloria, sister Fiona also has a massive experience. I heard from my grandfather that she spent most of her time in the Dungeon. Even those 4th year students are unable to do that. So it was natural that she had this much experience." Alexa said that. Tony and the others also agree with her. Because they also know that after senior Gloria, senior Fiona was the most hard working student of the Royal Academy.<novelnext></novelnext>


    _______________


    Finally the referee gave them the signal to fight. Instantly both of the warriors Vanished from their ce, and a huge impact was created instantly. Both of their weapons shed against each other. But her opponent was unable to hold his ground and was sent backward. Fiona was stronger than him and because of this he was unable to hold his ground.


    It seems Fiona already expected that and because of this, the moment he got flying backward she already moved from her please and once again got close to him and attacked him. Even though the defense of his body already increases because of the spiritual energy, he still receives damage from that attack.


    Her opponent hit the ground and instantly you can see the crack in the battle ring. He began to cough blood. But Fiona did not want to give him any chance and because of this she already once again came in front of him and was about to attack him. At the same time her opponent who was coughing blood tried to counter attack but he was unable to do that and this time he got sent outside of the battle ring. With that Fiona finished the match in just 1 minute.


    Those audience instantly begin to cheer for her. What can you say her ssmates, seniors, juniors and even the teacher of the Royal Academy did not be surprised. Well it was natural. Most likely she was very close to the next grade while her opponent just one month ago broke through to intermediate C-grade.


    _____________________


    Not only her but when it was time for Gloria to fight she also finished her match in less than a minute. Even though Gloria surpassed har strength to intermediate C-grade, but still, in front of her powerful ice attack, Her opponent was unable to defend herself and got defeated by her.


    With that the match was finished. Right now you can say that almost 50% of Royal Academy''s students qualify for the next match while 50% of students were from different Academy. With this you can naturally say that not only just Royal Academy but those other students from those other Academy''s also improved themselves and already became very strong. After the match was finished one by one everyone began to leave the stadium. From this every student who qualifies for the next match will have 5 days to prepare for the next match.


    Sam and his friends were also beginning to leave the stadium. Right now they were discussing their seniors. But none of them know that from the first tost Sam was observing those students who participated in this match with his spiritual vision. Suddenly he still did not get any information from the warrior association and because of this he decided to investigate on his own. But unfortunately he did not find anything unusual with those students who participated in the match.


    So, Sam just sighed. He won''t give up on his investigation. But at the same time he won''t neglect his training. He can go to any Dungeon but he decided not to do that. Previously he noticed a technique that he really wanted to buy and because of this he was saving gold coins. Finally he can buy that but at the same time he can also buy many crystals from the system shop. He decided to go with this n for these 5 days. As you know that he still cannot ignore the threat that was approaching toward his.


    __________________


    Currently when Sam was thinking about his next n, in the warrior association, all the saints were having a meeting. They are already able to contact the prime humans and from them they get to know all the truth and why those people from the other world started toe to their world. They get to know that the core of the Eden blue will appear on the surface. This happens to every where you can find spiritual energy. The core of the will observe The Spiritual energy and while it will reach the limit the core will appear on the surface and at that time many things will happen to that. The Spiritual power of the will increase and at the same time all living beings on the will get rewarded by that core.


    ________To be continued_________

 Chapter 358 358 - Going To Dungeon

    For 5 days Sam just absorbed the crystals he brought from the system shop. Fortunately, he had enough gold coins to buy this many crystals. Currently he already uses all of his gold coins. So he needed to go back to the Dungeon to gather more gold coins. On the other hand the regeneration technique was really surprising. You can say that with this new technique he can easily heal himself. After upgrading the technique to C-grade He can now also grow body parts if he lost that. But still it will take him sometime to regenerate. He just needed 10 minutes to recover.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2300/2200)


    Spiritual energy: (3700/3700)


    Strength: A / 470


    Agility: A / 469


    Physique: A / 469


    Intelligent(mental power): A / 467


    Spirit: A / 459


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D+) (peak)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 35M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade B)


    Neo sword style (Grade C) (+)


    Invisible shot (C-grade) (+)


    Multiple shot (B-grade)


    Rapid shot (B-grade)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Supreme Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Dark spiritual energy control ( Grade B)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: C) (+)


    Regeneration (Grade C) (+)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    Sam slowly opens his eyes and looks at his status. He can see that he already became very powerful and not only that he also upgraded some of his technique to B-grade. He just needed to update the Nei sword technique to B-grade, only then he was able to fuse all these three techniques and created a powerful technique.


    At this time, he also tried to fuse the supreme spiritual control and dark spiritual control, but it almost needed 30 million upgrade points to fuse these two techniques. Previously he thought that he would do thatter because that time he did not need to fuse these two techniques, but currently he is thinking of fusing these two techniques.


    Sam doesn''t know what will happen when both of the techniques fuse with each other, but one thing he was sure of is that it will create a stronger technique. Previously he only focused on upgrading those other techniques and he did not think about fusing these two techniques, but currently the situation is different. So he was nning to do that.


    So wasting no time he quickly uses his fusion technique to fuse those two techniques. Instantly 30 million upgrade points are used in that process and only then Sam can see the new technique in his system.


    "


    Origin spiritual energy control


    [With this technique you can control all types of spiritual energy, and turn those spiritual energy into Origin spiritual energy. Even if it was dark spiritual energy, you can control that turn that dark spiritual energy into Origin spiritual energy.]. "


    He looked at the description of his new technique and as he expected, with this new technique he can control all types of spiritual energy and turn those spiritual energies into true spiritual energy. Westing no time he quickly covers his sword with his new spiritual energy. He thought that his sword would show a white color after being coated by his spiritual energy, but surprisingly it released a golden color.


    ''Why is the color different from before? Is it because I am absorbing all types of energy?'' Sam begins to think that after looking at the color.


    He wanted to try that new technique and because of this he quickly activated one of his robots and then began to fight with that robot. But something unexpected happened. As you know, the white robot he got after winning the College entrance examination has the power of a B-grade warrior, and it''s body was really hard to damage. But this time something unexpected happened because the moment he attacked that robot with his new spiritual energy, that instantly cut one hand off his robot.


    Just looking at this Sam was very shocked that he didn''t know what to say. Even when he previously used his supreme spiritual control technique he was unable to damage the robot but this time he just instantly cut off the hand of his robot. With that you can guess how powerful was this original spiritual energy.


    He became very excited but then suddenly a thought came to his mind. Right now he needs to get familiar with this new origin of spiritual energy, because if he is unable to control the power of spiritual energy then he could kill those students who will be fighting him. But at the same time he did not want to fight with his robot because he did not want to destroy those robots and because of this the only thing he could do was go to the Dungeon.


    Sam looked at the time and said that it was 1:00 p.m. so he had time because tomorrow at 10:00 a.m. the next match will start.


    ''I need it to go to the Dungeon ande back before 10:00 a.m.'' with that Sam did not waste anymore time and quickly left his training room. Well his friends and family could worry about him so he also left a message to them and then he went to the dungeon.


    __________________


    "Isn''t that the boy who defeated you earlier?" At this time one of those people from the other world asked the person beside him. As you can guess he was Levi, who previously got defeated by Sam.


    Currently all those five people were in a restaurant. Surprisingly the Kobold Dungeon wasn''t far from that restaurant. While they were discussing, they suddenly saw that Sam was going toward the Dungeon and because of this, all of them became very curious.


    "If I am not wrong then tomorrow is the next phase of theirpetition. Then why the hell is that human going toward the Dungeon? " The girl beside Levi asked that. But nobody could answer that question.


    "Well most likely he was short on crystals and because of this, he went to the Dungeon to gather some crystals and increase his power." Levi guessed that.


    " Hmm¡­ I also think that. Haha¡­ most likely he was scared. Previously after fighting Levi, he wanted to prepare himself to fight strong opponents like Levi. Haha.. even though you got defeated by him, your power really makes him scared. Haha," one of them said after he began tough. Not only him but after hearing his word those other four also began tough. They also think like that.


    Actually not only those people from the other world, even those Warriors from the warrior association got confused by his action. Who could have thought that sam6 will enter the Dungeon at this time.


    ________________


    Sam without care about those people he just entered the Dungeon. This is a C-grade dungeon where he will face intermediate D-grade monsters to peak C-grade monsters. As you can guess , this Dungeon has five floors. Sam wasted no time quickly using his full strength going toward the second floor. Using his full speed he only needed two hours to reach that floor. After that he brought out a sword and then started attacking those monsters.


    Compared to other days, you cannot see that many people, because almost everyone was excited about thepetition and because of this, they did note to the Dungeon. Because of this, currently he can find many monsters on this floor and he just attacks them and kills them very easily. In front of his sword, those monsters defend themselves. All of them instantly split into two parts.


    You can say for a minute Sam just forgot that he came to this Dungeon because he wanted to control the origin spiritual energy. But sometimeter he remembered that and only then was he trying to control that technique. Fortunately it did not take him that much time. 4 hourster you can see that he was fighting those Monsters but this time those Monsters did not get instantly killed by his attack. Even though they were getting seriously injured, none of them got killed by his attack.


    After killing thest Monster and picking up the loot, Sam stops fighting. He was feeling hungry because from morning he did not eat anything and it was now 7:00 p.m. so you can say that he was extremely hungry.


    ''Few, fortunately I am able to control the power of this origin spiritual energy. With that I did not need to worry about the life of my opponent. But still who could have expected that the origin spiritual energy will be this much more powerful than the true spiritual energy. I am feeling that with this technique I could also kill a powerful Monster if I go to the next floor.'' Sam thought all of this while eating his food.


    Even though he wanted to go to the next floor, it wasn''t the right time. He can do that after finishing thepetition.


    __________To be continued_________

 Chapter 359 359 - Dark Aura

    Well, there weren''t many warriors present in the Dungeon and because of this, Sam, using this opportunity, killed almost every Monster present on the floor. You can say that it almost takes him 5 to 6 hours topletely master his origin spiritual energy. Right now, he can use that spiritual energy easily. With that he did not have to worry about killing his opponent by mistake.


    For these four days he just killed those Monsters without stopping and also collected many crystals except those spirit crystals. With that he decided to leave the Dungeon. Well even though he wanted to go to the next floor, he did not have time because tomorrow he has to go back to the stadium because of thepetition.


    Sometimeter, Sam came out from the Dungeon and started to go toward his hotel room. His hotel wasn''t far away from the Dungeon. At this time when he brought out his mobile phone he saw that many miss calls from his parents and also from his friends and sister. Previously he just only informed them that he was going to the Dungeon for training but most likely it still worried them. Well, it was natural, normally nobody will go to the Dungeon at this time. Sam one by one called them and told him that he was already out. So they did not need to worry.


    ______________


    3 hourster, around 10:00 p.m. Sam wakes up from his sleep. Aftering back from the Dungeon he fell asleep in his bed. Well he was very tired because of the continuous killing.


    After freshening up, he sat down on his bed. He began to look at the loot that he got this time. But he did not get any good loot this time and because of this, he decided to sell all of those loot in his system shop. Well you can say that he only received materials after killing those Kobolds. Because of this, he was interested in those loots and decided to sell them. After selling those loots he received 700 gold coins.


    ''As expected. I did not get any good loot.'' after looking at the gold coins he thought that. Well if he will get any rare or special grade item that will give him more gold coins than those normal loots. But unfortunately this time he did not get any of those.


    But still it is okay. With that he clears his mind and then brings out those crystals. He begins to absorb all those crystals.


    __________________


    While Sam was absorbing those crystals, Tony and the others were busy in their training room. Well you can say that Tony, Alexa, Jeni and Elena have the advantage because they did not need to worry about the crystals at this time. Their family already sent them crystal so that they could increase their power. So right now all of them are fighting their training robots to get familiar with their new strength. Not only that they also use their spirit techniques while fighting those robots, it will increase their master over their spiritual energy and also spirit technique.


    If you minutes ago they were already notified by Sam that he already came back from the Dungeon and you can say that all of them were relieved after hearing that. They don''t know why he suddenly went to the Dungeon but it is good that he already came back from the Dungeon or he could have missed tomorrow''s fight. You can say that from tomorrow the real match will begin.


    _______________________


    Next day,


    Today only 5 stadiums were full of people. In these five stadiums thepetition will be going on. For every grade their stadium was different. It means all the early D-grade warriors, intermediate D-grade warriors and peak D-grade warriors will be fighting in different stadiums. In this way they could quickly finish thepetition.


    Unfortunately Sam, Tony, Alexa, Jeni and Elena will be fighting in different stadiums while Kenny and the others are only fighting in different stadiums. But still Sam did not worry about that because he had full confidence in his friends that they would win this match.


    Currently Sam, Tony and the girls are already present in the battleground. At this time they already saw many students that they were familiar with. They can see James, Aliya, Gustav and the others. But not everyone was present because not everyone was an intermediate D-grade warrior. The number of second year students were greater than those 1st year students.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Around 10:00 a.m. thepetition finally began. Sam and his friends are waiting on the battlefield for their number to fight. At this time James, and Aliya already came toward them. All of them were excited about thispetition and they also started to discuss thispetition with Tony and others except Sam. He was busy observing those students that were present in thispetition.


    He is already using his spirituality to observe those students that present in this battlefield. Don''t know why but his instincts were telling him that something could happen in thispetition. Because of this, he was seriously alert and observing all the students present in this battlefield.


    Suddenly he saw something that made him startled. He suddenly saw a person who was releasing a dark aura from his body. Instantly he focuses on that person and he bes sure that it was the same aura as those Warrior from the dark association released from their body. That almost made him jump out from his seat but he calmed down.


    Only at this time he was able to recognise that person. Well even though that person was hiding his face, Sam still recognised that person and he was very familiar with him. He is Gustav from the white tiger Academy. The moment he realizes this, Sam bes very shocked. Instantly many questions suddenly came to his mind.


    ''Is he rted to dark association? Why is he releasing that dark aura from his body? I still remember that previously when I looked at him, I did not see this dark aura. Then what could have happened?'' like this many questions came to his mind. But suddenly one more question came to his mind,


    ''If he really rted to the dark association, then should he be the one who previously poisoned my food?'' Sam thought of this question. It is possible that Gustav was the one who previously poisoned his food.


    ''At any cost I need to find out the truth. If he really rted to the dark association then he needed to be punished.'' Sam decided to find out the truth. If after finding the truth it really shows him that Gustav was rted to the dark association, then Sam wouldn''t waste anymore time and kill him.


    Most likely Tony and the others also noticed his seriousness. They also look toward the direction where Sam was looking and they are also a person. They also recognise that person because he was Gustav. As you know, almost everyone wanted to punish that person. But still, herees the main question, why did Sam was looking at him seriously? They decided to ask Sam.


    _________________


    On the other hand Gustav was also sitting with his ssmates and waiting for thepetition to begin. After taking that dark pill he already reached the limit of an intermediate D-grade warrior. So you can say that he has pretty much confidence to win thispetition even if he faces Sam Kainer.


    Also if you are wondering why he suddenly started to release a dark aura, then it is because of that dark pill. That pill uses the dark spiritual energy and increases the power of the user. Not only that, all the normal spiritual energy will be turned into dark spiritual energy. So you can say that because of this right now he did not have any normal spiritual energy in his body.


    Well if you were wondering if he was using the dark spiritual energy than how the hell those Saints didn''t notice him. Well then it is because every Saints were busy because of the people from the other world and because of this, they did not get the chance to observe all the students.


    Gustav, who was looking at the first fight in the battle ring, suddenly felt that someone was looking at him. He quickly looked in that direction and saw that it was Sam who was looking at him. It wasn''t only some but Tony and the others also looking at him. For a moment he thought that all of them would find out about his secret but then he realized that he did not have to worry about his secret. Most likely they are looking at him because they can feel his power. He just smirks at them. He already has the confidence that in thispetition if he faces them then he will just crush them.


    _______To be continued_______

 Chapter 360 360 - Clues

    2 hourster, finally it was Sam''s time to fight in the battle ring. Tony and the others already finished there and also won their matches. Not just only Tony and the girls but James, Aliya or even Gustav won their matches.


    From the first Sam kept observing Gustav. He needs to find out the truth of this matter and because of this, he is observing him. Well currently he knows that all the saints were busy with those people from the other world. Because of this, Gustav was able to participate in thispetition without any problem.


    Most likely to be able to see the ck aura you needed high grade observation technique or spiritual vision technique. Unfortunately it was very real and not everyone could learn that. Because of this, still now, nobody was able to notice the ck aura that wasing out from Gustav.


    Now back to the main matter, Sam went to the battle ring. His opponent was also already present in the battle ring and surprisingly it was his senior from the Royal Academy. Even though it was his senior year, he will fight seriously. Most likely his senior from the 2nd year also knows that and he is also very serious. As the whole Academy knows how powerful Sam was when he was just an early D-grade warrior. So you can say that nobody underestimated his power.


    Both of them quickly brought out their weapons and they were ready to fight. Surprisingly his senior was using a shield and sword. Both of them begin to approach each other the moment they get a signal from the referee. Both of their swords shed, but because of the impact you can say his senior lost his bnce. Sam uses that chance to attack his senior.


    Even though his senior lost his bnce, the moment he noticed the iing attack he tried to protect himself with his shield. Sam''s sword instantly hit the shield. Instant impact was created by that and his seniors can feel the power behind Sam''s attack. He was just barely able to defend himself from his attack. After gaining his bnce he quickly backed away from that ce. But Sam did not want to give him any chance and because of this, he once again came in front of him and attacked him.


    But his opponent already expected that and because of this he also came to attack. This time he uses more power than before to counter Sam''s attack. This time after the sh nobody sent backward or nobody lost bnce. His senior wanted to attack Sam with his shield. But Sam wasn''t slow; he quickly reacted and then kicked that shield.


    You should know that from the start Sam still did not use spiritual energy. On the other hand his opponent from the start was already using the spirit technique. But still he was unable to gain The upper Hand against Sam. With this you can guess how powerful Sam was right now.


    This time his senior thought that he would gain The upper Hand but he was very wrong, the power behind the kick was very strong that sent him backward. Sam once again uses this chance to attack him continuously using his fast attack. Even though his senior tried to defend himself using the shield but he was unable to do that and finally you can see the crack on his shield. Naturally you can see the power behind Sam''s attack.


    Most likely after seeing the crack on his shield, he lost his focus for sometime, but Sam did not let go of this chance and he quickly punched his opponent and this time he also uses more power than before. His senior lost focus for a moment, unable to defend himself and got sent outside of the battle ring. He fell to the ground and after that he began to cough blood. Thest attack was so powerful that it almost made him bleed. Fortunately the medical team already came toward him and then began to heal him. On the other hand the referee already came to the battle ring and then announced Sam as the winner of this match. Because he wasn''t using his full power it took him 10 minutes to finish the fight. But it wasn''t slow.


    Sam leaves the battle ring and goes toward the resting room but he doesn''t know that those people who are looking at his fight already know that if they wanted to win against him then they needed to work very hard. Because none of them was sure if they were able to take Sam''s punch or his sword attack. They also saw that from the first tost, Sam did not use The Spiritual energy and that really shows everyone how powerful he was right now. But that does not mean all those people who wanted to find him will be afraid. It just makes me more excited. James, Tony, Alexa and others also wanted to fight Sam using their full strength.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ? But at this time If you look at Gustav, then you can see that he has a fierce expression on his face. Not only that if you look at his hand right now then you can see that his nails have already turned ck while looking at Sam''s fight. If you ask him who was the person he hated most then he will tell Sam was the person that he hated the most. He also tried to poison Sam so that he could lose his life against those Monsters but fortunately Sam was able to survive. But this time you will use everything he has to kill him. Even though he got punishment from the warrior association after killing him, he did not care about that because from the start he had this motive.


    He forcefully calms down and then his hand turns normal. After that he left the battlefield because for today he won''t have any other matches. But Gustav wasn''t aware that someone was already observing him from the start and he also noticed when his hand turned ck for a moment. As you can guess it was someone who was observing him and he already discovered that suddenly Gustav''s hand turned ck. Without Sam, it bes sure that this person has some connection with the dark association. It was just that he did not have any clue that could immediately prove that Gustav had some connection with the dark association.


    __________________


    Sam and his friends went The other stadium because they also wanted to know about the result of their friends. But he did not need to worry about that because aftering toward the stadium where the early D-grade students were fighting, he already knew that Tina and the others had already won their matches. They were just nning to go toward the stadium where Sam was fighting. So this changed their n and after that they began going toward the stadium where intermediate C-grade Fighters were fighting.


    Sam already knew that his sister was a peak C-grade warrior, she was just fighting with those intermediate C-grade students because still now no student was able to break through to C-grade. So he was 100% sure that his sister would win this match but at the same time he also wanted to see the fight of those other students. Senior Fiona was also a very strong Warrior and he wanted to watch her match. Not only that, their fourth years were also participating in this match and he wanted to look at their strength at this time.


    Sometimeter, they reached that stadium. Fortunately for those students who participated in this match they could watch the match from the VIP rooms if they did not get any seat in the stadium. Because the whole stadium was full, they went toward the VIP room where you can see those guild leaders and not teachers. Normally any student will get anxious after seeing those famous guilds leaders, but except Dan, Kira, Saara, Kenny and Tina, Sam and the others didn''t be anxious after seeing them. They just calmly looked at them and then after finding some empty seats they sat down.


    Currently in the battle ring they can see their 4th year students fighting. Fortunately his sister or sister Fiona, still didn''t fight their opponent. With that they could watch their matches. Well it became a habit of Sam to observe all the audience and those fighters with his spiritual vision. This time you also did that but he did not find anything. Only after that he focused on the battle ring.


    He can see that those 4th year students already improved very much and they became very powerful. Three fourth year students from the Royal Academy fight in the battleting and they have the upper hand against their opponent. None of them give any chance to their opponent to counter attack and with that in just 15 minutes they are able to win their matches.


    _________To be continued__________


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 361 361 - The Power Of The 3rd Years

    Right now senior Salina is fighting her opponent in the battle ring. The moment she got the signal from the referee she instantly created 5 big fireballs and sent all of them toward her opponent. As you can tell, it wasn''t your normal fireball because she already increased the grade of the fireball. Because of this, you can see that the color of the fireball was Green. It has already been upgraded from blue to green.


    But her opponent also wasn''t slow. He already dodge those attacks and already came in front of Salina. But most likely she is also able to predict that, and instantly a fire wall will appear in front of him. At the same time his attack only hit the firewall. But he was unable to break that wall. On the other hand Salina suddenly turns that firewall into a fireball and instantly shoots toward her opponent.


    This time her opponent was unable to react on time and got hit by that fireball. Instantly the opponent begins to roar in pain. Well the green fireball was really dangerous like that blue fireball. Even though it did not fully get contact with his skin, he was still feeling pain. The pain was so much that he was unable to maintain his calmness. Salina uses this chance to get close to him and instantly attack him and send him outside of the battle ring.


    At this time the medical team already came close to that person and then began to heal him. Only then you can say that he began to rx a little. At this time If you look at his arm then you can see that it was melted in some part. With that you can imagine how powerful that green me was. Fortunately nobody uses their powerful technique in thispetition so that they did not kill their opponent.


    Finally the referee came to the battle ring and then announced her as the winner of this match. Not only her but James from the 3rd year also won the match. Sam knows them very well because both of them are teammates of his sister.


    ___________________


    Finally after waiting so long it was time for senior Fiona to fight in the battle ring. Not only them but all those other audiences we are also begin to shout out loud the moment they saw Fionaing toward the battle ring. She wasn''t alone because the vice captain of white Tiger Academy and the vice captain of Golden Dawn also came with her because it was also their time to fight their opponents.


    Three of them go to their separate battle ring. Their opponent is also already present in the battle ring. Fiona aftering to the battle ring already became very serious and already covered her whole body with the spiritual energy. But as you know normally you cannot so her body glowing in blue color because she was already able to turn that spiritual energy intoyers and her whole body was over by that spiritual energyyer. Well not only her but if you look at the other two vice captains then you can say that both of them are also able to do that.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    The moment Fiona got the signal from the referee, she finished from her ce and instantly a sh happened. Her opponent was using a big great sword while she was using a normal sword. But after their sh, because of the impact her opponent almost got sent backward. Fortunately he was able to stabilize his bnce and quickly jumped away from that ce.


    But at this moment Fiona was already in front of him and already her attack was about to reach him. Fortunately he also wasn''t slow. But even though he was able to dodge that, his shoulder got hit by her attack and you have to say that he instantly realized how powerful Fiona was. Fortunately because of the armor he wasn''t bleeding or his bones did not break because of the impact but still you can feel the power behind her attack.


    But it doesn''t mean you will give up and at this time he wanted to counter attack and already punch toward Fiona. But Fiona already predicted that and moved away from that ce and instantly came behind her opponent. This time her opponent was unable to do anything and he got knocked out by the impact of Fiona''s attack.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Well as expected she quickly finished her match. Even if nobody was able to tell, some could tell that she was very close to breaking through to the next grade and it was natural that she would finish her match this quickly. Well sometime Fiona came to their house and that time Fiona and Gloria fought. With that he normally gets to see their power.


    Instantly, many people begin to cheer for Fiona after seeing that she quickly finishes her battle like this. Also the most interesting thing was that she was fighting against a fourth year. But unfortunately this fourth year was unable to react on time and got defeated by her. Many people suddenly begin to cheer because at this time, the vice captains from the White Tiger Academy and Golden Dawn also win their matches and because of this, all those people begin to cheer for them. Fiona also smiles toward them and after that three of them begin to leave the battlefield at the same time.


    1 hourter, instantly 70% of the audience get up from their seats and begin to cheer. If you are wondering why they are cheering like this, it was Gloria who came toward the battle ring. Finally it was her time to fight in the battle ring. At this time Tony and the others also begin to cheer for their sister. Sam is also looking at his sister. He can tell that most likely she was getting bored because she wasn''t getting any powerful opponent. Actually she did not want to participate in this match, but Alena told them to participate and only because of this she participated in thispetition.


    But one thing was for sure that even though she was bored, the moment she entered the battle ring she instantly became different. The referee and the opponent present in the battleting already feeling the temperature going down.


    The referee leaves the battle ring and then gives them the signal to fight. Instantly the whole battle ring covered by ice and snow begins to fall down from the sky. Har opponent who was just about to attack her also instantly became startled. Well he was also surprised because using the moment technique on this ice was very different. Because of this, he forcefully stops his movement. But at this moment he did not care about the snow falling down from the sky. You can say that it was his big mistake because the moment those snow hit him it instantly began to freeze him. In just 1 minute the whole person got frozen by the ice.


    Most likely the referee already predicted that and the moment he saw the condition of Gloria''s opponent, he quickly came to the battle ring and announced Gloria as the winner. Only at this time Gloria released her opponent from the frozen state. If you look at her opponent then you can see that he was fully wet and shaking. Fortunately the medical team already came to him and then began to heal him. Gloria this time did not waste anymore time and quickly left the battle ring.


    At this time in the VIP rooms if you look at the faces of those Guild leaders and even those teachers you can say that all of them are very shocked after watching the power of Gloria. Who could have expected that even when she was suppressing her power, she was able to please her opponent in just 1 minute. Really it was a shocking matter for everyone. Under that attack her opponent didn''t even get the chance to fight back.


    Sam and his friends just smile after seeing the shocking face of those people. At this time those Guild leaders and those teachers came back to their senses. Well most likely there will be a battle between those guilds and the colleges or even the warrior association. Everyone wanted Gloria to join them because who did not want a powerful and genius person like her to join their team. But it wasn''t the right time and because of this, they just calmed down.


    "Haha¡­ as I expected, senior sister Gloria will finish her fight in just one minute," Elena said with excitement. As you know that from the first she was a fan of Gloria and it was natural for her to be excited after seeing the power of Gloria. Actually not only her but almost every student from the Royal Academy were excited after they realized the power of Gloria. As you know, many people join the Royal Academy because of Gloria and all of their goals were to reach the same power level as Gloria.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 362 362 - Prime Dragon

    "Boom!" An explosion happened. Instantly you can see that a big hole appeared on the ground and everything around it got destroyed by that explosion. But after the dust faded away a person went to that hole and he quickly took all the roots and put that in his inventory.


    As you can guess it was Sam who put all those loot in his inventory. If you are wondering where he was, then he was in the Kobold dungeon. Well after the previous match waspleted they were once again given 5 days to prepare for the next battle. Also the interesting thing was that in the next battle then you had to fight 3 to 5 battles. Because of this, all the students have been given 5 days rest before thepetition will start.


    As usual Sam directly came back to the Dungeon after informing his parents, his sister and his friends. Currently the Warrior association did not have that many intermediate D-grade crystals, also he wanted to save his goal coins and because of this, the only thing he could do was toe to the Dungeon. Actually not only the intermediate D-grade crystals, you can say that almost for every crystal the situation was the same. Because of this not only him but many other students also came to the Dungeon.


    Currently Sam was on the third floor. Well if it was before getting the origin of spiritual energy, then he wouldn''t havee to this third floor but right now the situation was different. Well you can say that while killing those early C-grade monsters, he did not feel that much resistance from their body and because of this, he was killing those Monsters. His superior stealth technique Plus his origin spiritual energy, really a dangerousbo. Also one more thing was that while using that origin spiritual energy he was able to increase the power of his normal spell. Previously he used a mega fireBall and then shot it toward those Monsters.


    But you have to say that the energy consumption after using the mega fireball was greater than before. Because of this, he decided to bring out his night and then started searching for those Monsters. He did not know anyone about him and because of this, he was using his second identity to hunt those Monsters.


    While Sam was searching for those Monsters he can also see many other people present in the Dungeon. You can say almost everyone of them were students who came to the dungeon to gather crystals. Well, Sam did not interact with them and he was just busy with his work.


    He did not need to search for that long because right now in front of him he can see 20 Kobolds that just respawn. Sam did not want to waste anymore time and because of this, using his rapid shot, he began to shoot toward those Monsters. The moment he upgraded his spiritual energy to the origin spiritual energy, you can say that his whole body only has the origin spiritual energy. Because of this, right now he did not need those spirit arrows to coated spiritual energy. He can coat any arrows with his spiritual energy.


    With that one by one all those arrows without making any sound going toward those Monsters. All this time Sam did not stop shooting. He just continuously uses his rapid shot and shoots his arrows.


    Those Monsters just respawn and they were searching for their prey. But unexpectedly one of them got hit by an arrow. But it did not stop there because one by one all of them also started to be hit by those arrows. It almost takes 3 Arrows to kill one Monster, and to kill 20 he almost needed 60 arrows.


    Sometimeter, Sam panting. Previously he used all of his spiritual energy and because of this, he was mentally exhausted. Sam quickly brings out the high grade spiritual energy recovery potion. But he almost needed 5 of these potions to recover his full energy. After recovering his spiritual energy he quickly went to that ce and then collected all the loot. After that he got a from that ce and once again started searching for those Monsters.


    Previously Sam did notice but the moment he went away from that ce suddenly some people came to that ce. All of them had a shocking expression on their faces.


    "Boss, why do I feel danger when I try to feel The Spiritual energy of that ce?" Suddenly a girl asked the person beside her. Actually not only her but all of them also feel the same when they try to observe the ce where Sam previously killed those Monsters. Even after collecting all the arrows he left that ce but the spiritual energy that was used by him was still in that ce. That energy will take some time to fade away.


    "How can I know? This is also my first timeing to this and I did not know anything about this. Most likely I need to contact the elder and tell him about this," he said to them.<novelnext></novelnext>


    As you can guess, all of them were from another. Even though almost everyone from their went back to their home, ten of them decided to stay on this and enjoy their time. If you look at their face then you can see that they have beast-like eyes and they also have ears that look exactly like a Wolf''s ear. Well, they called the beast humans. Like those elves they have alsoe to the Eden blue.


    "I also think that we should really contact elders as quickly as we can. As you know that many other people from differents also came to this because of the same purpose so we cannot say for sure that they won''t attack us. Even though it will take some time for that core to appear, what if they wanted to attack everyone and then kill everyone. We should contact and tell the elders about this." One of them said that. Natural because all of them have the same goal and what if suddenly some people decided to attack others so that only they were able to get the core.


    ___________________


    Sampletely unaware  the fact that if he waits there for sometime he could meet those people from another. He was resting for sometime. It has been 2 days since he came to this dungeon and all this time he only killed those Monsters. You can say that he was tired and because of this, he wanted to rest for sometime.


    While eating his food he was thinking about his parents and his sister. Actually he was thinking if he should tell them about the other world people. He did not want anything to happen to his family and because of this he was thinking what he should do. One thing he previously got to know was that not everybody could use the origin spiritual energy. Not only they could use it but it could be very dangerous for them when they touch the origin of spiritual energy. Because of this, he was thinking that he should teach his family and his friends about true spiritual energy. With that their power will increase and they could protect themselves.


    ''Suddenly those people from the other world did not seem to be active. So most likely my guess was correct. Only after 3 yearster the core will appear on the surface and because of this that terrifying Monster is alsoing toward Eden blue. Unfortunately I did not know anything about that terrifying monster. What if those people from the other world know about that monster? Sam began to think about all of this.


    It was possible that those people from the other world knew about that Monster but how would he contact those people and Know about the monster that was approaching. Even after thinking so hard he did note up with a way and because of this, he can only sigh.


    ''Sigh, it will be very difficult to contact those people. Right now the only thing I could do is to improve my strength and power. Only then I could fight against that monster.''


    _____________________


    Well, Sam guessed it was right. Those elves, beast humans and even those prime humans know about that beast that was approaching the Eden blue. But unfortunately nobody knew that that Monster was approaching that. You can say that almost every one of them fears that Monster because the monster has the ability to destroy a. Not everyone could fight against that monster. Nobody knows where that Monster came from but they know that if their got marked by that Monster then it could be over for them. The name of that Monster was Prime Dragon. Unfortunately almost everyone of those people thought that the monster was dead because for many years they did not find any trace of that monster.


    _______To be continued_________

 Chapter 363 363 - Alexa Vs James

    20 dayster,


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2500/2500)


    Spiritual energy: (4000/4000)


    Strength: S- / 530


    Agility: S- / 520


    Physique: S- / 528


    Intelligent(mental power): S- / 521


    Spirit: S- / 510


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D+) (peak)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 10k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (2 chance)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade A)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Nion sword technique (Grade B)


    Hion archery technique (Grade B)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Origin spiritual energy control  (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)<novelnext></novelnext>


    Water control (Grade D) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: C) (+)


    Regeneration (Grade B)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    Tomorrow will be the semi final match and Sam just came back from the Dungeon. After the quarter final match he went back to the Dungeon and this time you can say that he just focused on increasing his strength.


    As you can see, he is already very close to breaking through. Not only that he also uses his supreme upgrade to upgrade his absorb technique. With that he was now able to absorb even D-grade monsters. He also fuses all of his tree sword technique and archery technique. Other than that he also gets the water control technique.


    Well if you look at his status screen then you can see that there are many techniques that he did not use that much inbat. But what can he do? Because of this he did not upgrade them.


    Currently he was resting, while thinking about the opponent that he will face in his next match. It will be Gustav. Yes you can hear it right, it was him who will be his next opponent. Well this time someone let him go because he did something that really made him very mad. Previously Gustav fought against Jeni and Tony. While fighting against Jeni he almost broke one of her arms. This really makes everyone very angry. While he was fighting against Tony, Tony was very close to defeat but suddenly he cheated and defeated Tony.


    Nobody could tell how he cheated but Sam can tell easily. While he was very close to getting defeated by Tony he suddenly released some of the dark spiritual energy that instantly affected Tony and because of this, was able to win against him. So because of all of this reason you can say that Sam wanted to teach that person that he should not be overconfident because he was using the dark spiritual energy. Most likely only fighting him he could reveal that Gustav was rted to the dark association.


    _____________________


    Actually not only him but at the same time Gustav is also preparing for tomorrow''s match. He knows that tomorrow''s match will be most difficult because he will be fighting against Sam. Sam was the most powerful person between all those students and because of this, he was preparing for that. Gustav was taking more of those dark pills, with that dark spiritual energy increasing inside him.


    "Haha¡­ Sam Kainer, just you wait. I will make you crippled. The moment I was able to do that I can finally be the elite member of the dark association," Gustav began tough well thinking about Sam.


    _____________________


    Well Sam was not aware of anything. Even if he gets to know about it he just doesn''t care about him. He is already nning how to reveal that Gustav has something to do with the dark association. But before anything he should also contact the saints and tell them toe tomorrow''s match. You can feel that currently those saints were busy with something, because of this he did not want to disturb them but he knew that it was an important matter and because of this he wanted to inform them.


    Actually Sam was aware that not only him but many other people also know that Gustav has some connection with the dark association. All of them are people from the other world. Using their observation technique they can also feel thatpared to any other human Gustav has a different aura. With that everyone bes sure that he has some connection with people from the other world. They just did not care about him or those humans. But at the same time all of them are also quite interested.


    ___________________


    Next day,


    The stadium was full of people as usual. Not only that but this time you can also see those Saints present. Yesterday Sam told them that he has something to show them and because of this, all of them came to thispetition. All the Saints were busy searching about those people from the other world and because of this for a few days they did note to thepetition.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    10 semi finals will be held between the two parties. James and Alexa, while Sam and Gustav. The winner of this match will fight in the final.


    Currently everyone is looking at the battle ring because Alexa and James were fighting. As you can see, it was a very intense match. Both of the warriors were sword users and both of them mastered their spirit technique. Because of this, they also create very powerful impacts when their swords sh against each other.


    Both James and Alexa send backward. But both of them quickly stabilize their condition and once again approach each other. Suddenly at this time one Alexa bes ten Alexa and attacks James. On the other hand lightning began toe out from James''s sword.


    Both parties sh once again. But this timepared to James, Alexa''s attack was stronger and because of this, he got hit by her attack. The attack was so powerful that you can see the crack mark on his Armor. Fortunately it did not break but James still coughed blood from his mouth. He suddenly reacts and then dodge the next attack  fo Alexa.


    Like this both of them are fighting for 45 minutes but in the end he gets defeated because of his low strength. With that everybody present in the stadium began to cheer for Alexa. James who got defeated was disappointed in himself but at the same time he was smiling because he was given his all and he can tell that it won''t be long, when he will be able to win against her. Actually not only him but all the other people who were familiar with Sam and Alexa, decided to forgetpeting against Sam. So all of them said their goal toward Alexa.


    From the stadium, Elena, Jeni, Tony and the others were cheering for Alexa. Even though Jeni has a broken hand previously but right now she already recovered that. Not only her but Tony also recovered from his injury. Actually,pared to Alexa''s match, all of them were waiting for Sam''s match.


    Finally they did not needed to wait that long because Sam and Gustav begin to going toward the battle ring. Actually not only them you can say that almost everyone present in the stadium were excited about this match. Almost 70% of the people present in the stadium wanted Sam to defeat Gustav and teach him some lesson. Almost all of them did not like the attitude of Gustav.


    Right now both of them facing each other while observing each other. Sam already activated his spiritual vision and observing him. He can tell that the dark spiritual energy inside of him already increase. But still it wasn''t increase that much and Sam did not care about that. Both of them were waiting for the signal from the referee.


    Well they did not needed to wait that long because they already got the signal and instantly both of the warrior Vanished from their ce. Suddenly both of them shed against eachother. Butpare to other day Sam this time uses more strength and because of this, Gustav got sent backward. But Sam did not use this chance to attack him once again. He decided to not to finish this match that quickly. He was going to break that confidence of Gustav.


    Sam just signal him toe toward him. Looking at his signal Gustav became more angry and he angrily went toward him. But still he unable to attack Sam. Sam just dodge his attack and then punch him. That punch once again send him backward. You can say that for this match he decided not to use his sword. Most likely this behaviour of him make Gustav more Angry.


    "Cough¡­ cough." Gustav begin to cough blood but he once again went up from the ground. But this time he did not recklessly went toward Sam.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 364 364 - Sam Vs Gustav

    If someone focuses clearly then they can see that the nails of Gustav already turn dark. Most likely he is already ready to use the dark spiritual energy. With his spiritual vision Sam can see that Gustav is releasing more and more dark spiritual energy. Not only that you also coated his Sword with that. Most likely he was nning to injure Sam with that. Because the moment dark spiritual energy will get contact with anyone it will try to attack them internally and most likely Gustav was searching for that moment.


    Previously when fighting with Tony, Gustav used this move and because of this, he was able to win against him. Fortunately is unable to absorb that dark spiritual energy from Tony''s body.


    Gustav once again disappeared from his ce and then he instantly came behind Sam and attacked him. But Sam also wasn''t slow; he already reacted quickly and moved away from that ce. But why moving away he turned back and then quickly clicked him. Gustav already predicts that and he protects himself using his Sword as a shield. This time he did not get sent backward because Sam did not get the chance to use more power kicking him.


    But it didn''t end there. Suddenly Sam vanished from his ce and he attacked Gustav with a punch. Previously he thought he wouldn''t be using his spiritual energy but looks like he needed to use that because Gustav already increased using his dark spiritual energy. But in front of his origin spiritual energy the dark spiritual energy is unable to do anything.


    Once again Gustav got sent backward, but this time Sam did not let him go and he once again using his speed came in front of him and once again punched him. That punch directlynded on his face. You can see a tooth flying. It was Gustav who already lost his one tooth because of the punch that hit in his face. But Sam did not stop there, he just kept punching on his face and 1 minuteter you can see a bloody Gustavying down on the ground. Just looking at him you can see that he already fainted after being unable to tolerate the impact of Sam''s punch.


    Sam wasn''t satisfied but what can he do? He already defeated his opponent and because of this, he just sighs and stands. At this time the medical team was already on their way toward Gustav. On the other hand, Sam just ignored that unconscious person and looked toward all the audience that started cheering for him. Not only them but you can say that his friends are also cheering for him because all of them are very rxed when they see how Sam takes revenge.


    The medical team was already in the battle ring and they started to heal Gustav. On the other hand the referee already came to the battle ring and just about to announce that Sam was the winner of this match but at this time something unexpected happened. Everyone present in this stadium suddenly hears an angry roar that almost seems like a roar of a beast. For a second everyone got startled after hearing that.


    Sam and the referee also heard that and they quickly turned around to see what was happening. Only then did they notice that all those medical team members were struggling because something or someone grabbed all of their necks. On the other hand Gustav was already standing and with Sam''s spiritual vision he saw a crazy amount of dark spiritual energy was releasing from his body and controlling them Gustav grabbed all the medical team members.


    "Student Gustav, what are you doing? Release all the medical members." Suddenly at this time looking at the situation, the referee told this to him. But Gustav just ignored him and only then he opened his eyes and looked toward them.


    At this time If you look at him then you will feel that he wasn''t a human was like a humanoid beast that was looking at you. His eyes already turn red and not only that a vicious aura with a killing intent already started to release from his body.


    "Roar!!!!" He once again let out a roar only then Sam started to feel the danger. Right now, Sam is already feeling the power of Gustav just keep increasing and increasing. He already became a peak C-grade warrior. At this time Gustav is only focusing on Sam. Right now he has only one n in his mind: to kill Sam. He wasn''t nning to use this move while he was in thepetition but most likely he needed to use that to kill Sam. He already knew that he needed to finish him and then quickly needed to escape from this battlefield.


    Using his full speed Gustav vanished from him and instantly came in front of Sam. Aftering in front of him, he punched him with his hand that was coated with the ck spiritual energy.


    This time Sam was unable to react on time and got hit by that punch. That punch already sent him flying backward. At this time Sam can feel that the dark spiritual energy that came to his body from that punch already trying to poison him. One unfortunately for that because he already activated his origin spiritual energy and absorbed that dark spiritual energy that came to his body. All of this happens in less than a second.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam was already able to stabilize himself but at this moment once again the punch was just about tond on his face. Fortunately this time Sam was able to react on time and he dodged that punch. He already knows that you won''t be able to defeat this new Gustav if he does not get serious.


    Sam let out a sigh and looked toward Gustav. Most likely Gustav even though he became a humanoid beast but he seems to be confused when he sees a smile on Sam''s face. Unexpectedly Sam vanished from his ce. Instantly Gustav became very alert and thought that Sam using his speed did that. But unfortunately he was wrong because Sam already activated his superior stealth technique.


    Gustav with full alert observing his surroundings but even after waiting this long he did not get attacked by Sam. For a moment he thought Sam already escaped but only then he noticed that those medical team members and the referee were now outside of the battle ring. Previously he already made them unconscious using his dark spiritual energy so with that means, Sam moved them from this battle ring. Instantly Gustav became more angry because Sam just ignored him and helped those pathetic humans to move from this battle ring.


    "Roar!!!" He once again let out an angry roar but in the next second a sword hit his body and he backway. But it did not stop there suddenly from every direction he began to attack. Previously he thought that Sam won''t be able to injure him, only right now he realizes how wrong he was. Because every attack from Sam makes him injured. In front of those continuous attacks his Armor already got crushed and right now his body is also getting injured because of those continuous attacks. He didn''t even get the chance to counter attack in front of those continuous attacks.


    At this time, Sam was using 90% of his origin spiritual energy while attacking Gustav. Not only that he also used his new powerful sword technique and because of this, as you can see that Gustav already was seriously injured because of those continuous attacks. After attacking him for 5 minutes continuously Sam quickly returns from that ce because he is already very low on spirit and because of this, his superior stealth also gets deactivated. Only then can everyone see that the figure of Sam once again appears on the battle team.


    Wasting no time Sam already used the Energy recovery technique and the energy recovery potion. Only then everyone can see the serious condition of Gustav. He was bleeding from all over his body and already lost much of his blood. But he seems to not care about that. The moment he realizes that Sam stops attacking him he quickly observes his surroundings and only then he sees that Sam once again appears.


    Gustav vanished from his ce using his full speed and once again behind Sam. Not only that this time he also used his full dark spiritual energy in his sword so that with this attack he could kill him. He was using his full dark spiritual energy with his most powerful attack. But the attack was just about to hit Sam, Sam disappeared from his ce. Gustav underestimated the six senses of Sam and because of this, he thought that someone won''t be able to react on time.


    But unfortunate for him, Sam already reacted quickly and then  he moved away from that ce. Unfortunately he still did not recover full of his spiritual energy. But it doesn''t mean he won''t be able to protect himself.


    _____________________


    Those Guild leaders, those saints and those college teachers right now looking at the battle stadium with curiosity also the same time they were ready to take action.


    ________To be continued_________

 Chapter 365 365 - How Is This Possible?

    All of them present in the VIP room ready to take action the moment when they notice that the aura of Gustav suddenly became strange. All of them quickly used these techniques and instantly they got to see that Gustav was releasing dark aura from his body. With that it made all of them very alert and they were ready to take action. But at this time Saint Markus and Saint Vena stop them.


    It instantly made all of them very confused why they were stopping them, but only at this time all of them noticed that Sam, who was still in the battle ring, didn''t panic. He still maintains a calm look. With that everyone understands that most likely Saints Markus and Saint Vena still believe in Sam, and because of this, they stop them. So everyone right now focuses on Sam.


    But unexpectedly at this time they saw that Sam Vanished from his ce. For a moment they thought that Sam was using his movement technique, but only then they remembered that Sam has a very strange technique with that even though they could not find him even if they tried to observe him. Instantly it made them very interested because most likely it was Sam''s first time to use his concealment technique in thepetition.


    Everyone of them thought that Sam would directly attack Gustav, but unfortunately Sam did not attack him but he decided to rescue those medical team members and the referee. Only after doing that Sam begins to attack Gustav. Gustav wasn''t avable to react facing those invisible attacks from every direction.


    Few minutester, they saw that Gustav had already be seriously injured and he was bleeding seriously. Who can think that Gustav''s situation will be like this injust a few minutes. But unexpectedly at this time Sam figures appear. All of them can see that most likely Sam was very low on spiritual energy. It was natural because Sam was facing an opponent who was a peak C-grade warrior. But still it makes all of them curious that how can Sam be able to injure him like this.


    At this time all of them saw even though Gustav was seriously injured but hepletely ignored his injuries and then he quickly approached Sam. To big dark balls quickly going toward Sam. But fortunately Sam already prepared for that and he was able to react on time and Dodge those two big dark balls. The moment those two dark balls hit the ground, it instantly created a big explosion and not only that you can see the power behind those two dark balls. That part of the battle ring that was hit by those two dark balls, already melted, not only that you can also see that it already turned purple because of the poisonous dark spiritual energy.


    Tony and the others sigh in relief. They wanted to help, they are friends but they know that if they try to interfere in their battle that it could only increase the burden of Sam. Because of this, they are still in their ce and just hoping that nothing happened to Sam. But it really surprised them that Gustav was rted to the dark association. Everyone is very familiar with those dark balls. Only those Warrior from the dark association could use this type of so it naturally points out that he has some type of connection with the dark association.


    ________________


    Gustav was seriously injured but he still did not stop attacking Sam. He did not want to give him any chance to recover. Because he can see that even though he was more powerful than him, Sam can still make his condition like this. Because of this, Gustav did not want to give Sam any chance to recover and quickly wanted to finish so that he could escape from this ce. He was still surprised that those saints and those other peoples still did not take action against him. He doesn''t know the reason but it gives him the chance to finish his work and then escape from this ce.


    But he is currently unaware of the fact that Sam is already using his Energy recovery technique and has already recovered half of his spiritual energy. He just wanted to recover 70% to 80% of his spiritual energy before making any move. At this time Sam was sure that most likely those teachers and those other people already sense his power level. Most likely will be disqualified from this match but he did not care about that. Right now he only focused on recovering his spiritual energy and while dodging the attack of Gustav.


    Gustav was very fast and his attacks were very dangerous but fortunately Sam was able to react on time and able to dodge those attacks. As you know,pared to a normal Warrior Sam has the advantage because every time he only breaks through after making all of his status points to its maximum limit.


    Suddenly two big fireballs appeared and he quickly sent it toward Gustav. It waspletely unexpected that at this time Sam will create two big fire balls. But the most interesting thing was that those two fireballs werepletely deep green. Normally even if anyone uses the spirit technique to increase the grade of their fire control, the color of the fireball only turns into normal green from blue. But Sam''s fireball turned into deep green. With that it shows everyone how powerful those two fireballs were.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Gustav became very startled, but he was able to dodge two fireballs. But after that when he tries to look for Sam, only then he notices that Sam once again disappears. One second makes him very alert and he instantly releases dark balls around him. He wanted to protect himself from Sam''s attack. But in front of the origin spiritual energy, those dark balls weren''t able to protect Sam.


    Once again Sam started his continuous attack. Gustav was already very injured previously, and right now once again while facing those continuous attacks his condition became very serious and you can say that he is almost one step away from bing a dead body. This time Gustavpletely became unconscious.


    _________________


    "What!!!!! How the hell Sam was able to defeat Gustav, who was a peak C-grade warrior? " Well at this time you can say that everyone of those teachers and even those guild leaders became very confused. Who can expect Sam able to defeat a peak C-grade warrior. One more thing they noticed previously that Sam was realizing the aura of a peak D-grade warrior. But only for a minute he released that aura, after that his aurapletely Vanished. With that everyone can tell that Sam suppressed his power and joined the intermediate D-gradepetition. Most likely he is already able to reach the peak D-grade.


    It makes them very surprised, but still even if he was a peak D-grade warrior, how can he defeat Gustav. But at this time Saint Markus told them,


    "Well, most likely it was because the aura of Gustav wasn''t stable. Because he forcefully became a peak C-grade warrior he wasn''t able to control the spiritual energy and it became a burden for his body. I think you already noticed thatpared to a normal peak C-grade warrior, the power of Gustav was very low.  Most likely his power level was the same as an early C-grade warrior, it was just his spiritual energy increase and with that we feel the aura of a peak C-grade warrior."


    After hearing the exnation everyone seems to understand. Well they also previously notice that but right now they understand why Sam is able to defeat him this easily. Even though Gustav was releasing the aura of a peak C-grade warrior, it was only because of the spiritual energy. While the real power of Gustav was only an early C-grade warrior.


    ____________________


    Suddenly at this time those saints and those other A-grade warriors suddenly feel some space fluctuation. It was like someone using techniques rted to space maniption, but fortunately this time those saints didn''t stay ideal. They immediately take action and immediately stop that space fluctuation. Most likely it was Gustav''s Trump card. He wanted to use this to get from this ce after killing Sam but unfortunately everything did not go as he nned. He wasn''t able to kill Sam nor was he able to get away from this ce using his trump  card.


    They quickly came to the battle ring and then took the unconscious Gustav from that ce. He needed to interrogate that student. At this time Sam already left the battle ring and went to the resting room where his friends were waiting for him. By the rules it will be possible that he will get disqualified from this match but he did not care about that. Right now he was thinking about that terrifying aura that he previously felt when that space fluctuation happened. That terrifying aura almost made him freeze in this ce.


    ___________To be continued____________

 Chapter 366 366 - Interrogation

    Sam was now thinking about the aura that he felt when that space fluctuation happened. He felt that someone suddenly started to observe him when that fluctuation happened and the power behind that person was really so much that it almost made him freeze. Fortunately, Saint Markus and the others already take care of that space fluctuation.


    Sam sighs in relief. Fortunately nothing happened but really it was a very dangerous encounter. Who could have thought that just after defeating Gustav he will face something like that. Fortunately he already notified those Saints previously. Right now we can only hope that they will get every information out of Gustav. Because if he wasn''t wrong then when he was in the college entrance examination Gustav still didn''t join the dark association at that time but something most likely happened after that.


    When he came back to the resting room his friends quickly came in front of him and began to ask about his condition. He assured them that he is okay and they did not need to worry. Most likely his sister and his parents also got the news and because of this, they also called him and asked about his situation. But Sam assures them that he is okay.


    "Sigh, who can expect that Gustav will be the other who joins the dark association. Why the hell he decided to join that dark association?" Tony said that with a disappointed tone. Well, it really disappointed everyone that Gustav decided to join the dark association.


    "Well there could be a reason behind this. Just wait for the saints to get information out of him. Only then could we get the answer to this." Alexa said that. Everyone agrees with her. Right now they can only wait for the saints to get the information.


    ? Sometimeter,


    All of them are going toward the cafeteria right now. For today they did not have anything to do. Because of this they were going toward the cafeteria because Kenny and the others were waiting for them in the cafeteria.


    __________________


    When Sam and his friends were going toward the cafeteria, the saints also already left the stadium and they had alreadye to the warrior association. Right now they quickly wanted to Interrogate Gustav. Even though the doctors did not want to, they already stabilized the condition of Gustav. With that he did not have any life threatening situation.


    Right now, saints Mira on her way toward the warrior association. She will be the one who will use her mind power to get the information out of Gustav. It was now a serious situation because a student from the warrior association has connections with the dark association and it is really thought to worry. Who knows how much students like him are present in the warrior association who have a connection with the dark association.


    It did not take Saint Mira toe to the warrior association of the Venus City. Aftering to the warrior association she did not waste anymore time and quickly began her interrogation. She begins to read his whole memory and also begins to loop for the memory where he has the connection with the dark association.


    "Sigh, the dark association most likely still wanted to mess with the humans. Sigh, after the previous incident this time once again they wanted to mess up." Markus said with a sigh. They were really very exhausted because they were handling the case of those people from the other world but who can expect that the dark association would also make their move at this time. Fortunately everything is okay right now and they are also able to stop that space fluctuation from happening.


    Even though none of them feel any auraing out from that space crack but one thing was that it was most likely if they did not stop that space fluctuation, then most likely many people wille out from that space fluctuation.


    Even though none of the Saints the aura who was behind all of this and also who was about toe to the Eden blue because of the space fluctuation but right now he is unable to do that. Even though human saints are unable to feel the aura, those people from the other world also feel the aura previously. Fortunately that did not target them.


    "Why did a powerful existence like that be devised to target this?" Someone asked that question but unfortunately nobody was able to answer it. Nobody knows why a powerful existence like him decided to target Eden blue. Did he also target because he also wanted the Eden blue''s core.


    ______________<novelnext></novelnext>


    Currently Saint Markus, Saint John and the others are waiting for Mira to finish her interrogation. She directly gets all this information from Gustav''s mind. Because of this you cannot be impatient in this type of case. You need to get all the information very carefully so that you don''t identally kill him.


    "Sigh, previously I was very happy that we have many young people like Sam who could be the future pir of our humanity but it really disappointed me that students like Gustav were also present. Who is really needed to find if any other student like him is also present in our colleges." Saint John said that. Actually not only him but everyone was very disappointed.


    On the other hand Saint Mira did not take that much long to get all the information out of Gustav''s mind. Only after getting all the information did she leave the interrogation room and finally went toward all the other Saints.


    " Grand Markus, this student Gustav quickly contacted the dark association after the end of the college entrance examination. That time he did not care about the dark association but after he realized that he was much weaker than Sam, Alexa and others, he decided to contact the dark association. This is how he got in contact with the dark association but I am feeling something was wrong in his memory. It was like I was seeing an edited memory. All those weren''t his real memories."


    " Well now back to the main matter, he was the one who previously poisoned Sam so that he could kill him slowly. But when he got the news that Sam was okay he became more confused and angry. But also when we destroyed all the dark associations he became very scared and decided to Lay low. But sometimeter he once again get his confidence back because the main lord of The Dark association from another world already contracted him."


    " I already tried to get the information why the dark lord wanted to contact him but I was unable to do that. It was like the dark lord wanted him to do something that would create chaos. But unfortunately he was unable to do that because of the increased number of the Warriors. So he was very disappointed but then he remembered about thispetition and he wanted to mess up in thispetition."


    " He also gets many dark pills from the dark association. This type of pill will increase the dark spiritual energy in your body. It could make you go berserker, and your foundation will be damaged after taking this type of pills. The dark spiritual energy will be unstable and it will be very hard to control that."


    " The most disturbing thing was that he already created many summoning patterns in the whole of Venus city. This type of pattern will immediately bring out many dangerous Monsters from the danger zone into the city. After thepetition or after killing some he wanted to escape from this ce and after that he would activate all those patterns."


    " Also if you''re thinking about that space fluctuation previously then it was because he received a device that could immediately open a temporary portal. With that, an elder from the dark association wille to Eden blue to help him. Fortunately we quickly handled that matter."


    Mira exins all the information that he got from Gustav. Really after knowing all of this all of them became very startled. Who could have expected that Gustav would want to do something like this.


    Markus quickly sent his subordinate towards all those patterns to destroy them. Not only that he also sent many of his subordinates to capture all those students who also like Gustav. At any cost they needed to capture all those students. Really it waspletely unexpected that the dark association would still try to harm the people of Eden blue.


    __________


    Sam, who is currently unaware of any of that, has alreadye back to his room. Right now still he did not get notified by anyone that he was disqualified from the match and because of this he wasn''t sure about this. Right now he was thinking about that person and that aura. Who could be that person? Why was he targeting him? Sam was now thinking all this type of question. But at the same time it already shows him how dangerous the situation was. He needed to get powerful as quickly as he could.


    __________To be continued______

 Chapter 367 367 - Wont Participate

    Sam was now looking at the message that he suddenly got from the warrior association. Well it was a message for re-examination. He needed to re-examine or he won''t be able to participate in the match. Well it seems really they already found out his grade. Sam just sighs. He just really wanted to hide his strength and then enjoy the fight. Who could have thought that something like that would happen.


    At the end, Sam decided to forfeit from thepetition. He knows that even if he goes to the reexamination, then he won''t be able to hide his strength, he needs to show his peak D-grade power. Because previously when he was very low on spiritual energy his concealment technique got deactivated and most likely because of this everyone was able to feel his power.


    With that thought he decided not to participate in the match. So he informed the warrior association that he would like to forfeit from thispetition.


    Right now Sam was in his hotel room and thinking about the previous incident. Really even though all the base of the dark association in the Eden blue got destroy by the warrior association but those people still have a base that was their main base and that was present in differents. But those people could stille to the Eden blue and Spread chaos. He really wanted to know what type of information those saints get from Gustav. But unfortunately nobody told him anything about that.


    So right now, Sam wasn''t sure if you will get the information or not.


    ''Sigh, I am really a teacher.'' he thought while sighing. Sometimeter he finally decided what to do. He decided that you will go to the Dungeon for these 5 days, because 5 dayster it will be the final match between those finalists.


    Even though he will not participate in this match, that does not mean he won''t increase his power. He needed to get stronger as quickly as he could so that he could protect humanity from those people from the other world and that creature that was approaching the Eden blue.


    With that decided Sam first decided to absorb all the remaining crystals and after that he was already ready to leave the room. Actually not only him but many other students also decided to visit the dungeon to collect resources. Most likely all the crystals from early D-grade to intermediate C-grade, already sold by the warrior association. As usual it is normal that he won''t find those crystals in the shop because every student was anxiously waiting for those types of rewards that could help them to be powerful and because of this almost everyone buys the crystals from their shop.


    One by one Sam was now absorbing the full essence of the crystals. With that all of the status points begin to increase. It takes him 1 hour to absorb all those crystals.


    _____________


    When Sam was busy absorbing those crystals, the organizer team already got his message and they became very surprised. Who could have thought that Sam decided to forfeit from thepetition. Really it was a surprising thing but what can they do? Most likely Sam already knows that he needs to re-examine and even if he did that he won''t be able to participate in the final as an intermediate D-grade warrior.


    So right now they were discussing what they should do after that. They needed one more finalist who will fight Alexa in the final. Fortunately, Saint Markus gave them the idea of what they should do after that.


    Wasting no time the organizer team quickly informed James and Tony. Well as you can guess, right now Saint Markus gave them the idea that they should hold a match between these two people. The winner of this match will be the finalist and fight Alexa in the final. Well really it was a great idea and because of this, they decided to go with this n.


    __________


    Like everyone, James and Tony were practicing. Even though they are unable to qualify for the final, that does not mean they won''t practice. Not only that they were also preparing to go to the Dungeon but suddenly unexpectedly they got notification from the warrior association. They quickly looked at the message and really got very surprised because it was telling them that they should prepare themselves because tomorrow will be a match between them. Tony and James were very surprised after reading the message.


    "What!!!!! Sam decided not to participate in thepetition?" The moment they got this information they were very surprised and at the same time very confused. Why would he do that? Is it because he got injured somehow while fighting Gustav. Instantly wasting no time, both of them quickly contact Sam.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Sam at this time already finished absorbing those crystals and he was nning to go to the Dungeon. But suddenly James and Tony called him and asked him why he wanted to forfeit frompetition.


    Well for a second Sam also got confused but only then he understood. Most likely because he decided not to participate the organizer team already decided how they should pick the finalist. They decided to hold a match between James and Tony and the winner of this match will be fighting Alexa in the final.


    Sam also told them his reason. He told him that even though he was perfectly fine, it seems someone was targeting him and because of this, he wanted to increase his power as quickly as he could. Because of all of this he decided not to participate in the next match. Actually, as he expected, his friends did not know that he was a peak D-grade warrior. Most likely they were not able to feel that. So he also decided not to tell them about this.


    Tony and James after hearing his reason also agree with him. It really seems someone is targeting him. In the previouspetition he got poisoned by someone and in thispetition he got attacked by someone. And both of these have a connection with the dark association. So they naturally agreed with him that he needed to be careful at this time and he should increase his power so that he could protect himself.


    ''Sigh, it seems the dark association really sees me as an enemy of them. Haha¡­ it is natural for them to see me as an enemy because from the college entrance examination, I am the reason that their n failed. But, still I need it to be powerful so that I can protect myself and my family. Fortunately the dark association still didn''t target mom and dad. But who can give me the assurance that they won''t do that?'' currently Sam was thinking all of this.


    It was really fortunate that the dark association still did not attack his family and his friends. But they can do anything so it was a serious matter.


    ''Sigh, I really wanted to destroy this dark association. Every time they will try to interfere. From the college entrance examination to the annual college gradepetition, always those dark associations interfere with thepetition.'' Sam just sighs after thinking that. But this time not only those dark associations but even people from the other world also decided to participate. Who can tell him why those people from the other world also decided to participate in this collegepetition?


    Well, Sam just decided to forget about that. He already informs both Tony and James that he was going toward the Dungeon and because of this he won''t be able to attend tomorrow''s match. So he already said good luck to both of them. Also he won''t just go to the Dungeon for 5 days. Most likely he will spend some days inside of the Dungeon and try to increase his power as much as he can.


    With that he already checked his inventory. After everything was ready he also already equipped his armor and then left the hotel. He also already informs his parents and sister that he will go to the Dungeon and won''t participate in the next match. As expected all of them were also very shocked the moment they heard that he wouldn''t participate but Sam calmly told them his reason and they just agreed with him.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam is already inside of the Kobold Dungeon. Not only that, he is also on the third floor. He decided that he will take the risk and decided to kill those early C-grade monsters. This will give him those crystals that will increase his power more than those peak D-grade crystals. With that using his concealment technique, he decided to kill those Monsters. Fortunately with the original spiritual energy, he could kill those monsters easily.


    On the other hand Alexa and his other friends also get surprised the moment they hear that Sam won''t participate in the next match. At first he also thought that he was injured but fortunately Tony told them his real reason.


    ___________To be continued___________

 Chapter 368 368 - Winner

    In Front of Sam you can see 10 Kobolds. Those Monsters just respawn. But Sam didn''t dy, he began to shoot Arrows toward them using his archery technique. Everyone of those arrows very quickly came toward Monsters and hit them. Using his new archery technique you can say that the speed of the arrow already became faster and also the power behind the arrow also increased. Also using his origin spiritual energy, his arrows are able to easily pierce through those monsters.


    But surprisingly even those monsters got pierced by those arrows they did not die. All of them howling in pain and you can also see blue blooding from their body. But none of them died. Well, Sam  did not be surprised after seeing that because he once again began to shoot his arrows. He already knew that the defense and the regeneration ability of those monsters were greater than those other Monsters, and because all those monsters were early C-grade they weren''t easy to kill.


    This time Sam once again targeted the head of those Monsters. With insane speed those arrows once again came in front of those Monsters and pierce their skull. Fortunately this time those monsters finally died.


    After collecting the loot Sam leaves that ce. He doesn''t know why even after piercing their skull they won''t die. Fortunately beforeing to this Dungeon he already read about this and he already got to know that this Monster has the ability to heal their brain if it got attacked. To kill those Monsters you needed to hit their head once again before it fully healed.


    The easiest way to kill them was to injure their heart but the defense of their body was very highpared to their head and because of this, Sam only targeted the head of the monster.


    While Sam was searching for the monster he already noticed a few people inside of the dungeon. Most likely until thepetition does not finish, not many people wille to the Dungeon. Also surprisingly the warrior association and many other shops that sell those crystals took this chance to hunt monsters to collect the crystals so that they could sell them to the students. Sam already noticed many warriors who came to the Dungeon for that purpose.


    Well he did not care about that. Also most of the time he had his concealment technique activated because of this not many Warriors were able to find him.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam came back to his hiding spot. He built this hiding spot in a big tree so that those monsters were not able to reach him. But he was still very alert because they could damage the tree and then find his hiding spot.


    He was feeling exhausted. So he decided to rest for sometime but before doing that he already set the life detecting device. With that he could rest for sometime.


    _________________


    While Sam was resting inside of the dungeon, Tony and James already came to the battle ring. Compared to the previous day today you can see many more people present in the stadium where the match was going on. Yesterday the organizer team already released the news that a match between James and Tony will happen tomorrow. Because of this the whole stadium was full of people. Because today no otherpetition was going on, the number of people increasedpared to the other day.


    Right now Tony and James already came to the battle ring. The moment they got the signal from the referee they started their fight.


    Both of them were unexpectedly sword users, so a sh happened between their swords. A big impact was created by that sh. Both of the students got sent backward by that impact but both of them instantly stabilized themselves and once again approached each other.


    ? Both of them are already using their spiritual energy while attacking each other. They were continuously attacking each other and because of this, many powerful impacts were created by that. Everyone can see that both of the warriors dodge each other''s attacks while also attacking each other.


    Sometimes Tony is able to hit James, while sometimes James is able to hit. Because of this sometimeter you can see that both of them have crack marks on their armor. But none of them stop attacking each other.


    Surprisingly both of them also use the spirit technique while using their movement technique and because of these both of them evenly match with power and agility. Because of this intense atmosphere was created between the two of them and nobody could guess who would be the winner of this match.<novelnext></novelnext>


    Because of their incense speed you can also see them also creating Mirage of their shadow. Well it was a simple method to them but those people present in the stadium got excited after seeing that. Right now you can only hear two names of those people.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Tony suddenly jumped away from his ce, James instantly appeared on that ce but unfortunately he was unable to hit him. But at this time Tony already sent many sword shes toward James. James already prepares for that and he begins to swing his sword with those sword shes. But this time he did not notice that Tony suddenly appeared behind him and just about to attack him.


    Tony was about to attack him but unexpectedly James kicked backward and Tony got hit by that. It waspletely unexpected for Tony that James would be able to react. James on the other hand did not let go of this chance he once again finished from his ce and came behind Tony and attacked him once again. Tony, who lost his bnce, did not get the time to stabilize himself and because of this he was continuously getting attacked by James.


    But sometimeter Tony finally gets the chance to escape. Right now you can see that blood wasing out from his mouth because of those impacts. But he did not care about that and just calmly looked toward James.


    Suddenly his sword began to glow in a deep blue color. Well he was preparing for his final attack. But actually not only him but James also preparing for his final attack. Both of them were injured and both of them exhausted. They have been fighting for 6 hours and still now no winner has been decided. They could still continue to fight but unfortunately none of them could use their deadly move and also they can feel that they were low on their spiritual energy. Because of this, they decided to use their final attack and with these the winner will be decided.


    Both of them begin to approach each other and finally a big explosion happens because of their sh. You can see that both of the students are still standing. None of them move from their ce. But sometimeter suddenly Tony fell down and became unconscious. Well the impact was very powerful that made him unconscious. But don''t think that James wasn''t affected by that because the moment he saw Tony fall down he also fell down on the ground and became unconscious. But because Tony was the first one to fall down he lost this match and James was the winner of this match.


    The medical team and the referee quickly came to the battle ring and the medical team took both of the warriors out of the battle ring. At this time the referee announced James as the winner of this match.


    The whole stadium began to cheer loudly for James and Tony. Really it was a wonderful fight between two Warriors that made them very excited. For these 6 hours none of them moved from their ce because the match was so interesting that they did not want to miss the match.


    _______________________


    On the other hand,


    Sam woke up from his sleep because his life detection device began to ring. It''s signaling to him that some people are near his hiding ce. Sam quickly wakes up from his sleep and then bes very alert. But fortunately those Warriors did note toward his hiding ce and just left the ce.


    Sam was feeling refreshed after a good rest and because of this he was not feeling hungry. So he brings out his food and begins to eat. At this time he was thinking about thepetition that will happen today between James and Tony. Unfortunately he wasn''t able to attend the match because he wanted to grow stronger very quickly and because of this he needed toe to the Dungeon. But he already promised everyone that he will go back before the final.


    Sometimeter after finishing his food Sam was now looking at his inventory. He did not have the time to leave the ce and then absorb those crystals and because of this he decided to bring out those crystals and then absorb it here. Fortunately even while absorbing those crystals he could keep activated his concealment technique. With that he did not have to worry about his aura leaking.


    __________To be continued______

 Chapter 369 369 - Explanation

    Before the final,


    In the warrior association,


    Currently you can see many warriors present in the warrior association. All of those Warriors were A-grade warriors. Other than the A-grade, no other Warriors present in their. But it is also impossible for all the A-grade warriors, all over the world to present here. But fortunately they could also participate in the meeting using thetest technology.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    All of them present in the warrior association because some days ago all the saints told them that they will hold a meeting  between. Also the saints told them not to inform anyone about this. With that anyone can tell it will be an important matter and because of this, all those Warriors gather in the warrior association.


    All the saints one by one also appear in the meeting room. Well only saints Markus here other than him those other saints also using their projection devices to present here. Well currently the situation of the Eden blue is very serious and because of this every one of them are very busy. They were unable to leave their City so they could only use this device for this meeting.


    Saint Markus aftering to the warrior association observed all those Warriors present here. Don''t know why but all those A-grade warriors feel an intense atmosphere created in the meeting room. But, they didn''t get the chance to guess, because Saint Markus finally began to talk,


    "Well, you are all able toe here, it is a very good thing. I know that all of you are very confused about today''s meetings. So wasting no time I will directly tell you the reason. Actually you can say, except for the saints, nobody knows that our wasn''t the only one who had warriors or dungeons. There are manys that also have simr situations like us. And most likely every one of thoses were very advancedpared to us."


    " Previously, when those monsters first appeared on our, myrade and I got help from some people. They were humans, but weren''t normal. They were the prime humans. You can say that because of their help we are able to be powerful and kill those Monsters. From that moment we get to know that we aren''t the only one in this universe."


    Saint Markus said that instantly all the warriors present in the meeting room became shocked. You can see those confusing and shocking expressions of those Warriors. So, he just sigh and once again begin to tell them,


    "I know this sudden news is most likely very shocking to all of you but it is true. They also told us that most likely we are the weakest among those other people. Even though we did not have that much information about those people from other worlds, the prime humans told us something about them. Almost everyone of thoses got attacked by the Monsters 500 years ago while we only just got attacked by them 100 years ago."


    " Many of you most likely have the question about those prime humans. Actually we also did not know anything about those prime humans except that they lived on the Earth. And you can say that they were the first humans who were attacked by those Monsters and were able to survive that and became powerful. Other than this we did not know anything about them."


    " Most likely all of you are confused why I am telling you all of this right now. Actually this is the main reason why we call for a meeting. Actually you don''t know but our has a core in the center of this. But that core will appear on the surface of our. Actually, that core absorbs The Spiritual energy and when it is time for the evolution the core will appear on the surface and the will evolve. If our is able to evolve sessfully then it will be good for us. You can say that every living being present in the Eden blue will be rewarded by that. But unfortunately the defense of the core that time was very weak, and anybody could snatch that core."


    " Yes you hear it right. Anybody good snatch that core. Not only that if they are able to sessfully observe that code then they will have the power to destroy a. Now if you have the question what will happen when that core is snatched by others, well, you can say that if that really happened then it will be over for us. Everything will god destroy in our."


    " I think you don''t know but right now because of that core our is safe from the strong Monsters. But when that core won''t be present on the, the protection barrier will go away and those monsters will attack us. Every living being will get affected by that and you can say destruction will appear. Apocalypse will be in our world."<novelnext></novelnext>


    Once again after exining all of this Markus became silent for sometime. He can see that those Warriors are most likely digesting this news. Actually this is normal because after hearing this sudden news anyone will be confused and they need some time.


    Sometimeter,


    "Most likely all of you have the question why I am telling you this right now. Well, because many people from other worlds already came to our because they wanted to snatch that core from us. Fortunately we still have three years before that core will appear. But the unfortunate news was that those people already came to our and they already began to search for the core."


    " What!!!!! " Hearing this you can say that everyone of those warriors be very shocked. At first it was very shocking that many others also had simr situations like us and they also had many Warriors like Eden blue. Then they also get to know about the core. But now the saints are telling them that those people from other worlds want to snatch our core and make our world disappear. It was natural for everyone to react like this after hearing this news. All of them are unable to maintain calm. But fortunately Saint Markus already handled the situation.


    "Calm down. As I told you, we have 3 years to prepare for that. Those people from the other world already went back to their world after getting this news. So we have 3 years to prepare to fight against those people from the other world."


    " Actually you don''t know but some days ago a person from another world already interfered in ourpetition but fortunately our student was able to handle him. From that moment we became sure that some people from those others were already present in our world. So that time we immediately contacted those prime humans and from them we were able to get to know everything that was happening in the Eden blue."


    " Also the most important thing was that all of those people from other worlds were very strong. Not only that, most likely they also have Warriors who already break through to SS-grade or SSS-grade. With that you can imagine how dangerous those people were. Because of this I am telling you that we did not have much time to prepare for the war."


    " But even if it was very dangerous we need to fight for the core. At any cost we need to save that core. Because of this, I am contacting all of you."


    " At any cost we needed to protect our homnd from those enemies." Finally, Saint Markus exined to everyone the real goal of this meeting. Right now all those Warriors needed to be powerful so that when needed they could fight against those people from the other world to protect their own.


    You have to say that already all of those A-grade warriors became angry when they heard that someone wanted to snatch their core. So it was natural that all of them wanted to fight with those people and kick them out of their.


    "Fortunately the good thing was that those prime humans were ready to help us. As you know, they already were very powerfulpared to us and because of this, they also have space bridges that connect them with many differents. Unfortunately we won''t be able to use that but they could use that. So after talking to them the naturally agreed to help us with the red limit breaker."


    " Yes, hear it right. They have that type of limit breaker in their world and it wasn''t like us. As you know, it was very rare for us to find limit breakers in the Dungeons but it wasn''t the same for them. They will provide us with those limit breakers, but they wanted to ask to help them in their war. Actually we still did not do anything about that but we immediately did not agree with them. Because of this we held this meeting to know about all of your thoughts about this matter." Markus exins that to everyone.


    _________To be continued__________

 Chapter 370 370 - Sudden Phenomenon

    "After thepetition they wille to our world and give us those limit breakers. But 6 monthster we needed to send some warriors to their to help them. Even though we did not know with whom they wanted to war, I can tell you that it will be dangerous to participate in the war."


    " If I really have a choice then I really did not wanted to ept their offer but we also did not have any choice because most are unable to break through because of the strong barrier and also theck of high grade limit breaker."


    " Because of this, I wanted to hear all of your thoughts about this matter. Should we ept their offer or not?" Saint Markus told everyone.


    As expected after hearing all of this exnation those Warriors became very serious. Actually it was true that because of theck of high grade limit breakers almost everyone of them was unable to break through to the next grade. But if they really epted the offer of those prime humans then they needed to participate in the war that could be dangerous for everyone and they could also lose their life in the battle.


    But on the other hand if they did not ept the offer then they wouldn''t get a high grade limit breaker and also their chance to break through to the next grade was very slim. So as you can see that it was a serious matter and everyone needed to think about it carefully.


    Fortunately, Saint Markus gave all of them some time to think about it and after that they will once again hold a meeting and that day they need to be told their decision. With that the meeting is finally over and everyone begins to leave the meeting room one by one.


    In the main hall room of the Warrior association, many B-grade and other Warriors were also present. But everyone became confused after seeing all of those A-grade Warriorsing out from the meeting room. This instantly made everyone very curious to know why they went inside of the meeting room. But unfortunately they did not get any information about the meeting.


    Right now if you are wondering why the saints only decided to tell those A-grade warriors, then it is because those prime humans only wanted help from the A-grade warriors and higher grade warriors. Because of this, they only called those A-grade warriors for this meeting.


    ________________________


    Central City,


    Alena''s house,


    Right now only she was present in her house because her sister already went to Venus city. So except those maids and Butlers, who take care of the house you won''t see anyone present in the house.


    Everyone of them worked silently because they knew that Alena was preparing to break through. So like any other day they were busy with their work but suddenly something unexpected happened. Suddenly every worker present in the vi began to feel pressure. But that isn''t there because the pressure keeps increasing and increasing. In just a few minutes the people around that area also begin to feel pressure. Sometimeter you can see that the whole central city begins to feel that pressure.


    Instantly, every Saints got notified because of this sudden phenomenon. Without any dy those saints instantly use the teleportation device toe to the central city. And the moment they came to the city they also felt the pressure. For a second they thought a S-grade Monster attacked the central city but a few minutester they understood that it wasn''t the case.


    Phenomenon like this only happens when someone is able to break through to S-grade. With that they instantly became very excited and quickly began to search about that person. At this time the grandfather of Alena suddenly remembers that Alena, Maria and Aria, all three of them are preparing to break through and most likely one of them has already seeded. So after some investigation they quickly inform that it was Alena who released this pressure.


    Wasting no time, all of the saints began to fly in the sky and then went toward her vi. While going toward her vi they notice people who are unable to tolerate the pressure be unconscious. Fortunately, those A-grade warriors also came back to the central city and they handled those matters. Even though all those Warriors are also feeling the pressure, it does not make them unconscious.


    Sometimeter all the saints already came toward her vi and they could finally see that above the vi a dark cloud was circling around. All the saints quickly bring all those maids and Butlers outside of the vi and they silently wait outside of the vi for Alena to stabilize her condition. It will take her some time to do that.


    "Haha¡­ finally after Mira, someone once from the younger generation once again was able to break through to S-grade." John became happy that finally someone from the young generation was able to break through to S-grade. Everyone became very excited after realizing that.<novelnext></novelnext>


    ___________________


    1 hourter,


    Finally the phenomenon was over and Alena was able to stabilizer condition and she can now control her pressure. After stabilizing her condition, she finally opened her eyes and saw that she was in her room but the walls of the room all began to crack because of her pressure. She just smiled and got up from the ground.


    Before anything she wanted to check the condition of those maids and Butlers. So wasting no time she quickly came out of her room. But unexpectedly she saw that no one was present in the vi. She instantly uses observation techniques to observe her surroundings and only then she gets to know that everyone is most likely already outside of the Vi. She also feels the presence of those other saints. So wasting no time she quickly came out of the vi to meet her grandfather and the others.


    ____________________


    Tony, Alexa, Elena and the others who were in Venus City previously didn''t feel the pressure. Because they were too far away from the central city. But they also got the news that something most likely happened to the central city and because of this they quickly came to the warrior association. Actually not only them but many other Warriors also came to the warrior association to know about the details.


    But previously the warrior association was also unable to answer them because the people from the headquarters were busy handling the normal people who became unconscious because of the pressure and the saints went to handle the matter.


    They once again try to contact the headquarter and only then are they able to know that most likely the saints already handle the matter. Because right now the pressure finally Vanished.


    "Haha¡­ well, most likely grandpa and the other saints already take care of the trouble. Still, I am really curious to know what happened to the central city." Tony said that. Not only him but everyone is also very curious to know about that.


    You can also see Gloria, Fiona and many other students who also live in the central city toe to the warrior association. Tony and his friends went toward them and then informed them everything. Gloria nodded hearing that. Well, she has full confidence in the saints and she already knows that they could handle everything. Still they were also very curious to know about this matter.


    Suddenly themunication device of the warrior association began to ring. Instantly one of them picks up themunication device and they begin to talk with the warrior from the headquarters. The warrior from the headquarter in from them all the saints have something to reveal to everyone but they will do that tomorrow after thepetition. But one thing the Saints already inform everyone that it was a proud moment for all of humanity.


    Really all the Warriors who heard that became confused. Nobody is able to understand why this is a proud moment for humanity. But most likely today they won''t get any information and they only get to know about this tomorrow. So one by one everyone began to leave the warrior association.


    _____________


    "Alexa, what do you think that grandpa and his friends wanted to reveal after thepetition?" Tony asks Alexa.


    "How can I know? Most likely all of them are very happy about this. I already tried to call grandfather but he did not pick up my phone. Most likely he was busy about this matter, " Alexa said. Actually not only her but Tony and the others also try to contact their grandpa and grandma but none of them got an answer.


    "Well, forget about that. Right now Alexa you should focus on your match tomorrow. James is already able to improve himself this much and it will be a top fight between you and James. So right now you should only focus on your match." Jeni said that. Everyone also agrees with her because it is natural.


    _________To be continued__________

 Chapter 371 371 - Where Is Sam?

    "Why Sam still didn''te back from the dungeon?" Tony asked that question. Tomorrow will be the final match between Alexa and James but still Sam did note back from the Dungeon.


    "Did he forget about tomorrow''s match?" Jeni said that.


    "I don''t think he forgot about that match." But Tony didn''t think that Sam would forget about the match.


    All of them are going toward the cafeteria after finishing their training. So while going toward the cafeteria they talked about Sam, who still had note back from the Dungeon.


    "Well don''t worry about it I am 100% sure that before the match he wille back." Elena said that. Except for Alexa and Sam, Tony and the others present there.


    "Sigh, we really are still unable to reach the same power level as Sam. Who could have thought that he was a peak D-grade warrior. On the other hand we are just intermediate D-grade warriors. Really, he always stay ahead of us." Tony sighs after saying that. Well actually not only him but you can say that everyone of them has the same dream that was to defeat Sam in a fight. But looking at the situation they don''t think that it was possible.


    Actually not only them, even Gloria was also very confused because Sam still had note back from the Dungeon. It surprised her that Sam decided not to fight in thepetition. After hearing that she also wanted to forfeit from thepetition but unfortunately she was unable to do that. It also surprises her to know that Sam has already be a peak D-grade warrior. She was very proud of her brother and also happy for him. But on the other hand she was also worried about him.


    Don''t know why but most likely trouble just followed Sam everywhere and because of this, she was worried about him. It wasn''t that she did not have any confidence in her brother, you can say that it was exactly the opposite. She has full confidence in her brother because he was a genius. Previously he taught her and her parents about the energy mode. This technique is simr to the spirit technique but it ispletely different and way more powerful than spirit technique.


    Unfortunately she wasn''t able to use that technique in her use while she used her spell, but while she fought closebat this technique really became very helpful to her. While thinking about that she remembered something and became very curious. Because previously before going to the Dungeon Sam told her that aftering back from the Dungeon he will teach her something.


    Because of this, she was also very curious to know what Sam wanted to teach her. He already told her that it will be a very powerful technique. Because of this she was very curious but at the same time she was also very happy that her brother knew some powerful technique that could protect his life from any danger.


    ''Now,e to think of it, I don''t know why but I always feel that Sam wants to be stronger as quickly as he can. It was like he wanted to fight against the time. But why is that? Why did he want to be powerful this quickly? '' Gloria thought that. Well not only her but everyone who knows Sam could feel that he wanted to be stronger as quickly as he could.


    This is one of the mysteries about Sam that nobody knows about. They also previously asked him about this but Sam just smiled toward them and did not say anything.


    ''Sigh, my little bro has be very mysterious.'' Gloria sighs after thinking that.


    "Gloria, what do you think about today''s incident?" Suddenly Fiona came to her room and directly asked her about today''s incident. Actually they also went to the Dungeon and just today they came back from the dungeon. But whileing toward their hotel room they suddenly feel a powerful aura. Instantly they went to the warrior association and only then they got to know that something happened to the central city.


    Like everyone they also thought that monsters would attack the city but fortunately it wasn''t the case. Not only that but sometimeter those Saints also told everyone that they have something to reveal, but they will do that only after tomorrow''s match. So you can say that all of this makes everyone very curious. But fortunately they did not have any idea about that matter.


    "I already talked to some Warriors and they informed me that when we feel that powerful aura, the people in the central city also feel that but they got affected by that and became unconscious. Fortunately nothing happened to anyone. But still it was really an unexpected thing. Why did all those people suddenly be unconscious?" Fiona said that. Well actually not only her but any Warrior who present in the Venus City did not have any idea about that pressure that they felt earlier.


    That wasn''t your normal pressure but it was a pressure from a S-grade warrior. So it is natural that many people will get affected by that.


    ____________________


    Next day,


    Today was the important day that everyone was waiting for. Finally today is the final match. Right now if you look at the time you can see that it was 8:00 a.m. but most likely everyone present in the Venus City is already excited about today''s match and because of this you can see the big line outside of the stadium where the match will be held.


    Actually not only him but even those students who will be fighting today are very excited. After the annual collegepetition everyone trained and gained experience in the Dungeon and with that they became powerful and also able to reach the final. So right now the only step left is to win the match.


    Tony, Jeni and the other people already started toe toward the stadium. Fortunately for those students who participated in thispetition they did not have to wait in the line and they could directly enter the stadium. With that Tony and his friends did not waste anymore time and directly entered the stadium. It is unfortunate that they were unable to qualify for the final match but at the same time they were also very excited for their friend. They have the full confidence in Alexa that she will win this match easily.


    But the main thing that they were worried about, Sam still did note back from the Dungeon nor did he contact any of them. Because of this, all of them are just looking at their phones. They tried to call him but it was telling him that he was out of service.


    Actually not only then did Gloria, Fiona, Hina, Victor and Alena also search for him. Alena also came to the stadium but she was with other saints. She already noticed her student Gloria but she did not find Sam. She already knows that the student has already be a peak D-grade warrior, but after that he also decided to forfeit from thepetition. Well he can understand why he did not want to participate but then why he still didn''te to the stadium. At least he should present in the stadium to support his friends and his sister.


    _________________


    While everyone was worried about him, Sam just came out of the Dungeon with a happy smile. Actually yesterday he wanted to leave the Dungeon but suddenly he met a big group of Kobolds and because of this he was unable to leave the Dungeon yesterday. If you are wondering why he was happy because this time he also found many good things after killing those Monsters. He found a technique scroll and also a limit breaker. So it was natural for him to be happy after founding them.


    But when he opened his mobile to look at the time, he instantly startled. He saw that it was 9:20 a.m. and only 30 minutester the match would start. Westing no time he quickly went toward the public bathroom to freshen up. After changing his clothes he directly brought out his car and then started going toward the stadium. He already promised everyone that before the match he will present in the stadium. Because of this he was in such a hurry that he forgot to contact his friends and family.


    But fortunately the dungeon wasn''t far away from the stadium. With that in just 15 minutes, he was able toe to the Dungeon. Not only that, only at this time he brings out his phone to call Tony. He doesn''t know if Tony or James will fight in the final. Because of this to confirm that he quickly called him.


    Tony, who was sitting in the stadium and thinking about Sam, also already became surprised when Sam suddenly called him. He instantly answered that phone and quickly told everything to him that he wasn''t going to participate in the final match. James got qualified for the final and you will be one who fights Alexa.


    _________To be continued________

 Chapter 372 372 - Final Match

    Finally Sam reached the stadium. But he had to say that he also became quite surprised after looking at the crowd in the stadium. It was like even though many people did not have the seat to sit down but they still wanted to enjoy the match.


    Sometimeter he Finally found his friends and sat down with them. Well beforeing to the stadium he also called his sister and his parents and told him that he had alreadye back from the Dungeon. Gloria after hearing that became cheerful.


    Fortunately the match still did not start. Around 10:30 a.m. the referee went to the battle ring and only then he announced for thepetition to start. For the first match it will be the early D-grade warriors. Kenny and Mark were the finalists. Kenny was from the Royal Academy, while Mark was from the White Tiger Academy.


    Both of them came to the battle Ring with a grand entrance. The moment both of them start walking toward the battle ring many people present in the stadium begin to cheer for both of them.


    It also did not take that much long for both of them to start fighting the moment they got the signal from the referee. You can say that right now nobody could tell who will be the winner because nobody has the advantage in this match. Because of this, an intense atmosphere was also created by both of them. Those people present in the stadium are enjoying that feeling.


    ________________


    1 hourster,


    You can say that for 1 hour an intense fight happened between them but finally as you can see Kenny most likely had the advantage.


    She instantly confused Ray toward his enemy. For almost 1 hour she did not use this technique because her opponent also had a good instance and it would be tough to confuse him. But currently the situation is different. She and her opponent are already exhausted and because of this most likely he won''t be able to react on time.


    Instantly that confused work against her opponent and hepletely got affected by that. Kenny did not let go of this chance. She also instelly reacted and came close to her opponent and attacked him. With that her opponent was already injured and sent outside of the battle ring.


    The medical team already reacted on time and the referee also came to the battle ring. Finally he announced Kenny the winner of this match and also winner of the early D-grade warrior''s. For first tost she remained undefeated and also won the match.


    Medical team quickly took a mark toward the medical room while Kenny started going toward the resting room. Even though she was injured, she was already healed by the medical team and with that she started going to the resting room. At this time the construction team already started their work and began to repair the battle ring.


    Jeni already told them their location and most likely Kenny will be there after freshening up.


    It took 15 minutes for the construction team to repair the battle ringpletely. With that it was time for the intermediate D-grade Warriors to fight. The referee once again came to the battle ring and called Alexa and James toe toward the battle ring.


    Once again both of them entered the battlefield with a grand entrance and after that both of them started going toward the battle ring. This time most likely 70% of the people begin to cheer for both of them. Both of these students were powerful and everyone wanted to know who would be the winner of this match. As you know, after the annual collegepetition both of these students became famous and because of this, many people cheered for them.


    At this time both of the students came to the battle ring. But both of them maintain a seriousness from the start. They know that it will be a very heart fight. Right now both of them were only focusing on defeating their opponent and because of this they did not react after hearing those cheers.


    The moment the referee gave them the signal, both of them Vanished from their ce and instantly a huge impact was created. But it did not stop there not long after that once again an impact was created. Well actually all of this impact was created because both of their swords were shing against each other.


    This time both of them fully used their spiritual energy while covering their full body with the spiritual energy to fight each other. They also use their body technique while also using their attack technique.


    Normally those people who have lower grades are unable to follow their moves but fortunately a big screen was present in the stadium that showed them the fight in slow motion. But Sam and others were able to follow the moves so they could see that most likely from the start both of them started using their strongest techniques.


    Suddenly, one Alexa bes three and everyone of them sewing their swords toward James. But James also wasn''t slow. He also uses his strongest move, the destroyer sh. With that a very strong sh was created by him that directly went toward all those Alexa. Against that strong sh those three Alexa were unable to fight back and they instantly got hit.


    James thought he also hit the real Alexa but unfortunately he was wrong. All of those were just Mirage images of real Alexa. But at this time the real Alexa wasn''t present there. She already came behind James and while James wasn''t expecting, she instantly attacked him.


    Really James did not expect that but fortunately he has his armor and he also uses a body protection technique while using the spirit technique. With that his defense already became so powerful that a normal attack won''t be able to do anything to him. But as you know that Alexa also did not attack with just a normal attack. She already uses The Spiritual energy while attacking him.


    With that once again a huge impact was created but this time James got sent backward. He also felt the power behind that impact but fortunately that did not injure him. Alexa at this time already came in front of him and was about to attack him once again. James at this time also reacted on time and he also tried to counter attack her. But in front of her Intense swing James was unable to do anything and you once again got sent backward.


    Not only that he also coughs blood this time because this attack really hit him hard. He did not get injured but because of the impact he began to cough blood. But in the next second he jumped away from that ce because Alexa once again came in front of him and was just able to attack him. James is finally able to stabilize himself and wasting no time he also starts counter attacking her.


    _______________________


    3 hourster,


    For at least 3 hours both of them fought like that. Sometimes Alexa got in a bad position while sometimes James was in a bad position and got attacked by her. So like this they fight each other and after 3 hourster you can also see both of their armor cracked and not only that they also became quite injured. But fortunately it wasn''t that serious because from the start they used their body protection technique while using the spiritual energy because of this their defense already increased.


    But it wasn''t the only case right now. Both of them are very exhausted because of continuously using their techniques and continuously fighting like this. With that both of them decided to use their final attack and the winner will be decided by this attack.


    "Boom!!!" Instantly a huge explosion happened because both of their strongest attacks shed against each other. With that ayer of smoke also created and nobody could tell who was the winner and what happened after that shed.


    Everyone present in the stadium was now holding their breath because they also wanted to know who was the winner. Alexa''s parents and even James''s parents also wanted to know who was the winner.


    Fortunately it did not take that much long for theyer of smoke to disappear and finally everyone got to know who was the winner of this match. As you can guess it is Alexa who is able to win this match. But she was now sitting down on the battle ring while panting heavily. On the other hand James already became unconscious and right now lying down on the battle ring.


    The medical team already reacted on time. Only at this time did the audiencee back to their senses and the moment they see Alexa, who is the winner, they begin to cheer loudly for her.


    ____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 373 373 - Epic Fight

    Gloria and Fiona were the finalists of the intermediate C-grade warrior. Gloria also limits her strength to intermediate C-grade warriors. But still there was a difference between that. But Fiona is still excited to fight her. She also wanted to know how much she improved, and how much the gap between her and Gloria.


    Once again with a grand entrance both of the students came to the battle ring. Butpared to the previous matches this time almost 99% people begin to cheer loudly for both of the students. Who doesn''t know the strength of Gloria and Fiona. Everyone knows that between those other students Gloria and Fiona were the strongest. Because of thispared to those other matches everyone was waiting for their matches.


    Aftering to the battle ring both of the students already became serious about their fight. Where Gloria was standing you can feel that the temperature was going down but on the other hand where Fiona was standing you can feel the temperature begin to rise. Most likely this will be an epic battle between these two fighters.


    The referee already went out of the battle ring and after that he instantly gave them the signal. Instantly the whole ground of the battle ring turned to ice. But Fiona is also ready for that and she instantly jumps. One more interesting thing that happened was that her sword that she was already covered in spiritual energy began to show a red color. After that suddenly the whole sword turned into a me sword.


    Fiona swings her sword toward Gloria and the me shes created by that. It went toward Gloria. But most likely Gloria was also ready for that because instantly an Ice wall was created in front of her.


    At this time Fiona alreadynded on the ground that instantly melted because of the temperature. She uses her movement technique and already came toward Gloria to attack her. But the moment her sword was about to hit her. Gloria turned into ice. After that she appears far away from Fiona. Really this thing surprised Fiona. Who could have thought that Gloria has this kind of move. But she also doesn''t know that Gloria was also very surprised the moment she saw her me sword. Who could have thought that you now will be able to create something like that.


    Even though Fiona was surprised, she once again reacted quickly and went toward Gloria to attack her. But her attack only hit the Ice wall. Also one more thing was that the moment her attack hit the ice wall it instantly got destroyed by that attack. With that you can imagine how powerful was her attack that she was able to destroy the ck ice.


    But Gloria also wasn''t slow instantly snow began to fall from the sky. This instantly makes Fiona very alert because she is already familiar with this technique. She quickly began to shout and the me of her sword began to increase and it already covered a whole area. Fortunately, because of that, she did not get hit by the snow.


    But Gloria already uses this chance to get close to her and she just about to attack Fiona with her ice touch. Well it is also simr to that snowfall. The moment it touches the enemy, the enemy will freeze. Fiona seems to notice that and because of this she quickly jumps away from that ce before Gloria attacks her.


    Once again Gloria and Fiona maintain a distance between them. The whole ground of the battle ring already turned normal. But suddenly Gloria cast her spell and two Big ice Golem golem was created by that. She sent them toward Fiona but she already reacted. Once again using her movement technique she already tries to get behind Gloria and attack her. But unfortunately Gloria already expected that and because of this she suddenly vanished from her ce and instead one of her, one Golem appeared. Her attack hit the Golems.


    Even though that ice golem tried to catch her attack but unfortunately it got destroyed. The other one already gets close to her and attacks her. This time you now weren''t able to react on time and got hit by the golem. Because of this she went backward but instantly stabilized herself and once again jumped away from her ce. Gloria already gets close to her and once again about to attack her with her freezing hand.


    Once again they maintain a distance. At this time If you look at Fiona, then you will notice that she was injured by that attack because she already uses her body protection technique while using the spirit technique to increase her defense. With that she did not get injured by that punch.


    Fiona, wasting no time once again, begins to swing her sword toward Gloria. Because of this, me shes one after another going toward Gloria. But Gloria also wasn''t slow; she began to shoot those me shes with her freezing ray. Instantly both of the techniques sh against each other and that almost created a smokeyer. But even with that both of the warriors did not stop attacking each other.


    _________________


    While both of the warriors were fighting each other, all the audience, teachers, guild leaders and even those saints got surprised by their power. Who could have thought both of these Warriors who were in their third year, already reach this kind of power level. With that nobody could doubt that both of these Warriors were the strongest students between all the college students.


    Who could have thought that Fiona was able to turn his sword into a me sword. Everyone knows that she has a great control over the spiritual energy and because of this she is also able to create ayer of spiritual energy. But never anyone thought that she would be able to change the nature of spiritual energy. You can say that even Sam was shocked by that because it wasn''t the energy mode where he could easily change the nature of The Spiritual energy. But she was already able to do that and we proved to everyone that she was the second strongest student between all those college students.


    You can say that to everyone Gloria already was a genius but who could have thought that she will also reach this kind of level over her ice control technique. Who could have thought that she would be able to travel through the ice. Because of this when for the first time Fiona was about to hit her, Gloria instantly went far from that ce while creating an ice clone. Also for the second time she shocked everyone when she created those ice golems and not only that she could exchange her ce with the ice golem.


    Really both of their powers surprise everyone. Almost everyone forgot that Gloria was suppressing her real powers. Everyone present in the stadium can feel the intense fight between Ice and fire. Who will be the winner? Nobody knows that but one thing everyone knows is that this was the best fight they have seen.


    Those Guild leaders already started going with each other about the invitation. Everyone of them wanted to invite both of these Warriors to join their group. But they also weren''t sure if both of these Warriors wanted to join them. There was a chance that both of these Warriors joined the warrior association because if they did that they would get guidance from the saints. Because of this they were discussing this.


    Sam on the other hand is very confused because previously he and his sister fight with each other but most likely she never uses her real strength against him. Or it could be that she does recently got those techniques and because of this she previously did not use them.


    Actually not only those humans but even those aliens or you can say people from the other world got very shocked. Who could have thought that these humans would reach this kind of power level even though their level was low. Even though all of them weren''t able to do those kinds of moves if they didn''t use their full power. They became sure that  this to humans would get the chance to improve themselves or they went to their world then this to humans will be very strong that could easily defeat them.


    All those people from the other world quickly take note about both of these Warriors. If they really attack all the humans then they must take this to humans as their ve. With that they will have strong subordinates.


    ___________


    Both Gloria and Fiona didn''t know anything about those other world people. Right now both of them justpletely focus on their fight. Until now both of them try to attack each other but because of their quick reaction none of them are able to hit each other. Right now nobody can tell how long this fight willst.


    _____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 374 374 - Saint Alena.

    The temperature of the surrounding area dropped very quickly and snow began to fall out from the sky. But Fiona already reacted and increased the power of her me sword. With that me switch she was able to protect herself from the snow. But, Fiona underestimates Gloria. The snowfall has already increased. Even those people who were in the stadium can feel the chillness in the air while they were protected by the barrier. With that you can tell how dangerous the technique was. Also the interesting thing was that she didn''t even use her full power. She only uses the power of an intermediate C-grade warrior.


    Right now you can say that Gloria was using the full power of an intermediate C-grade warrior. Because of this the power of the snow suddenly increased and even when Fiona wanted to defend herself but she was unable to dodge from that snow. If you are thinking that she should jump away from that ce, then that option also wasn''t avable. The whole battle ring was affected by that snowfall. In this situation she can only defend herself from the snow. Because even if she got touched by one snow she would immediately freeze. Also one more thing was that the snow prevented her from using her movement technique.


    But sometimeter looking at the power of the snow she decided to take this because she knows that if things continue like this then she will immediately get defeated by her. With that she decided to take risks. She begins to control her full power and then immediately uses her movement technique. Actually she wanted to get close to Gloria and then attack her. Not only the movement techniques she also uses her full spiritual energy to use the body protection technique.


    When once snow touched her she immediately felt the freezing effect that immediately decreased her speed but she decided to continue like this. But unfortunately even though The Spiritualyer protects her and prevents her body from freezing. But in front of those massive snowfall she was unable to defend herself and in the end she got frozen by those snow.


    ______________________


    "Ladies and gentleman, we finally have the winner. Gloria Kainer finally won this match easily. As expected from our strongest student. She wins her fight easily while not giving her opponent any chance to attack." The referee finally came to the battle ring and then announced Gloria as the winner of this match.


    At this time the medical team already came to the battle ring and they began to heal Fiona. Well, she wasn''t that much injured but it was just they helping her to recover from that frozen state.


    Everyone present in the stadium began to cheer for her. As expected she was the strongest. But really this fight was an epic fight. Here anything could happen. For sometime everyone thought that Fiona could win this match but in the end Gloria proves everyone wrong and wins the fight. Sam and even his friends were also cheering for both of them. You should not also forget about Fiona because she was the second strongest student. She also proves to everyone she really was the second strongest student.


    Gloria went toward Fiona and both of them then shook their hands. Both of them smile at each other.


    "Haha¡­ I really have a long way to go to reach your level." Fiona said that.


    " Well, you really surprised me with that move. I can feel that you will also breakthrough to peak C-grade." Gloria said that. After that both of them got off the battle ring and they started going toward the resting area. Well at this time everyone is cheering for both of them.


    _____________________


    At this time in the VIP room, you can see those guild leaders talking about Gloria and Fiona. Really both of them were the strongest. They wanted to join their organization. They wanted to increase your power. But on the other hand they didn''t want other guilds to approach them. Because of this, they were discussing it.


    While all of them were busy talking about both of the students in the other VIP room, you can see all those saints were sitting. They really became proud after seeing the power of those students. Before Gloria and Fiona join the college they almost lost their hope to gain powerful students who could also motivate the others to work hard. But fortunately Gloria and Fiona really did that. Not only that, they also show everyone why they are called the strongest.


    Currently Saint Markus is waiting for those in the audience to calm down. Yesterday you already announced to everyone that he has something to announce today and because of this, everyone stayed in the stadium even after the match was finished. So right now he can see that every person present in the stadium is waiting for him toe to the stadium and then announce. He really made everyone very curious about what he wanted to announce.


    Saint Markus also did not want to wait any longer and because of this, he finally started going toward the battlefield. On the other hand Alena, who is also going with him, already messages Gloria and congrattes her. She also said that she was really proud of her. Not only Gloria but she also messaged Sam and told that she was also proud of him. Really, who could expect that having both students will make her this much proud.


    While she was going toward the battlefield she already noticed Sam and his friends. Not only that, she also already noticed her younger sister in the audience. This year her sister joined the college and the main thing was that she was a big fan of Gloria. But when she also got the information about Sam she also became his fan. Who could expect that both of her students will motivate younger sister to work hard and be powerful.


    Sometimeter Saint Markus already came to the battle ring. At this time everyone became silent and waited for him to announce what he wanted to say. They just cannot wait to hear what he has to say to them. Well everyone knows that it must be an important matter and because of this Saint Markus wanted to announce it like this.


    "I know that everyone is very curious to know what I wanted to say. Westin no time I just wanted to say that after a long time we once again have a power house. I think many of you still did not understand what I wanted to say. Actually in simple matters I wanted to say that we humans once again have a saint. She just recently was able to break through to S-grade. Most likely a few days earlier everyone already felt the energy fluctuation from the central city. So I wanted to say that it was because our Saint was breaking through at that time and because of this you feel that pressure."


    " Before telling her name I wanted to say that it is the happiest thing for us that we get a new Saint. She and Saint Mira were ssmates. But it wasn''t there because most likely we will have two more saints."


    " Two more of her ssmates right now are busy breaking through. By their hard work I can tell that most likely they will also seed. We humans once again have a Power House to fight against those Monsters."


    " So wasting no time, let ''s wee our new Saint, Saint Alena."


    Saint Markus started his exnation and after some timeter he already finished his exnation and then called Alena toe to the battle ring.


    Right now you have to say that almost everyone who looked at the battle ring was surprised and at the same time they were very happy. The moment they got the news that they have a new Saint, they wanted to shout out loud and wanted to cheer for the new Saint. But all of them hold back to see the face of their new Saint.


    Finally, the moment they saw Alena, all of them began to cheer loudly. Right now not only the stadium, you can say the whole Venus City or you can say the whole human world who is also looking at the battle ring, cheering for her. They once again have a new Saint. The most important thing was that she also very young and she has the possibility to be more stronger than those other saints. Just with this news every human being present in the Eden blue except those who wanted to harm humanity.


    ________


    "What!!!!!! I can''t believe it. Haha¡­" after saying that Tony and the others also begin to cheer for her. But you can say that the same was most likely maintaining his calmness. He already knew that his teacher went to the closed door, breaking through the process. And from the first he has the full confidence in Alena, that she will be able to break through. But still it was a surprising thing that she was able to break through this quickly.


    _______To be continued_________

 Chapter 375 375 - 1 Month Later

    1 monthter,


    After thepetition and the announcement you say not many important things happen. Because of this, Sam once again went back to the dungeon. Actually you can say that not only him but Alex and the others also went to the dungeon. As you know that don''t likely everyone knows that Sam was a peak D-grade warrior, because of this he went on his own in the dungeon.


    Actually not only them, but Gloria, Fiona and even their ssmates also win back to the dungeon. Also the fourth year students already graduate from the college and they already join their favorite field. Some of them join the guilds, while some of them join warrior associations or college associations. So everyone joins a different field after they graduate from college.


    On the other hand, Alena became busy with recent things about those people from the other world and also those people who most likely spy on the dark association. The dark association wanted her student to die, because of this you can naturally guess she was angry and she wanted to find those people who work for the dark association.


    But most likely no one knew that almost every person from the other world went back to their World after thepetition. As you know that for them The Spiritual energy present in the Eden blue was very low and because of these they also cannot properly train here. Also they cannot easily enter the A-grade or S-grade Dungeons. Because of this almost everyone went back to their world. But unfortunately nobody from the warrior association knows about this.


    Also one more thing was that Saint Markus already got the report from those A-grade warriors. Some of them agreed to help those prime humans but some of them did not want to help those prime humans. The number of the wonders to help the prime humans were greater, because of this, it was decided that they will heal the prime humans. But Saint Markus also had one condition from the prime humans, that before agreeing with them they needed theplete detail about the matter where they needed help. Only after getting the details will they decide if they want to help or not.


    Still now, nobody receives any response from the prime humans. Alena also became shocked after knowing all this type of knowledge after bing the saints. Who could have thought that those old 9 saints kept this type of secret. Until now no saints have opened their mouths to the public to tell them about these secret things. Well she also supports that it was the right choice because everyone gets to know about all of this then it could bring disaster.


    Unfortunately after bing a saint, Alena got a lot of work. Because of this she did not get her chance to go to the Dungeon with her students. But Sam and Gloria already told her not to worry about that. Also Hina and Victor already became peak B-grade warriors.


    ___________________


    29 days ago,


    One day suddenly Sam called his parents and his sister. It instantly makes everyone confused and at the Same time very excited. Because previously he also called them and taught them about the energy mode. That energy mode was a great help for Hina and Victor.  Because of this, they Once again became very confused why he called them.


    Sam also did not waste anymore time. The moment he saw them he quickly told them about the true spiritual energy. Fortunately he can teach them how to control the true spiritual energy. Unlike his origin spiritual energy he can teach them about this and because of this he called them.


    What can you expect? This brings a huge shocked expression to everyone. Who could have thought that the spiritual energy they have in their body wasn''t pure.


    With that beforeing to the Dungeon Sam already teaches them about the control of true spiritual energy. Even though it wasn''t as strong as his, it was enough for his parents and his sister to get used to the true spiritual energy and also became powerful after using that spiritual energy. Also beforeing to the Dungeon he told his friends and his teacher about the energy mode. He still did not want them to learn about the true spiritual energy or origin spiritual energy because of this he only taught them about the energy mode. But before that everyone needed to promise that they wouldn''t publish this news.


    __________________


    So right now Sam has alreadye back to the Kobold Dungeon. He already killed many of those Monsters but he still did not want to stop and wanted to collect loot as much as he could. Not only that because for the one month he did not go outside of the Dungeon, he also absorbed The Spiritual essence from those spirit crystals.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2300/2200)


    Spiritual energy: (3700/3700)


    Strength: S- / 515


    Agility: S- / 510


    Physique: S- / 507


    Intelligent(mental power): S- / 500


    Spirit: S / 540


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (D+) (peak)


    Potential: Rare


    Upgrade point: 25M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Fast sword (grade B)


    Tri sword technique (grade B)


    Neo sword style (Grade B)


    Invisible shot (B-grade)


    Multiple shot (B-grade)


    Rapid shot (B-grade)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)


    Regeneration (Grade B)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    Right now you can see that almost every technique has already be b-grade. Also right now he has enough points to fuse one of his techniques, sword techniques or the archery techniques.


    But the thing was that he wanted to fuse both of these techniques and because of this he also collected the upgrade points after killing those Monsters. Well you can say that one month ago it was quite tough for him to kill all these Kobolds, but after 1 monthter you can say that he already became very good at controlling the origin spiritual energy and with that he was easily able to kill those early C-grade Monsters.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter you can see that right now Sam was facing a group of 10 furious Kobolds. All of those Monsters were furious because Sam already killed five of those Monsters and right now he was approaching those 10 Monsters.


    Those Monsters even though were very furious but the thing was that they were unable to find the attacker. This thing also makes them more angry. Well, some did not care that he just quickly finished all those Monsters and after collecting the louds he left that ce.


    But he didn''t know that just after he went away from that ce some people instantly came to that ce.


    "From the first tost I stayed close to this ce but I did not see anyone who killed those Monsters. Likely that person was using some kind of stealth technique and because of this, I was not able to find any trace of that person. But boss I think we could find that person because most likely he will deactivate his still technique after this tough fight. We just need to find out about that person so that we can attack him." Suddenly one person who was in ck cloth said to the person beside him.


    "You are right. Quickly tell all of our subordinates to find out about that person but we also need to be careful because many other fighters came to this floor. I don''t want it to attack some person who has a strong background or who has a warrior who is hiding in secret and protecting them." The boss quickly told his subordinates.


    ________


    Well, Sam was not aware of that group of people who wanted to find his trace. Actually he did not even care about them even though he knew that. He just only focuses on collecting the crystals and loots from those Monsters. But at the same time he is also thinking that he should go to the ghost Dungeon.


    From the first when he came to the Kobold Dungeon, he was using his money to buy those spirit crystals and because of this you can see his spirit stats also increase. But you also wanted to save money to buy some good techniques and because of these he decided that aftering out of this dungeon you will go to the ghost dungeon. Also for one month he did not see his parents and because of this he also wanted to meet them.


    _______To be continued___________

 Chapter 376 376 - Improvement

    2 monthster,


    In these two months two major things happened. Maria and Aria also break through to S-grade. Really, this is the best news for humanity. Previously many peak A-grade warriors tried to breakthrough but nobody seeded in that. As you know this is most probably because of the strong barrier and theck of a high grade limit breaker. But after Mira, Alena became a saint. After Alena, Maria and Aria be S-grade warriors. The strength of humanity once again increased.


    Finally three of them get to know about many important things that they weren''t aware of earlier. They also get to know about other people. Not only that, finally they could enter those S-grade dungeons. Even with a strong group of peak A-grade warriors you can enter the S-grade dungeons, but still it was very risky to fight against those Monsters and because of this rarely any Warrior wanted to enter the S-grade dungeons. So like everyone they also did not enter these dungeons. But after bing an S-grade they could enter the dungeon.


    Only after entering the dungeon do they understand why all these S-grade dungeons, call the supreme Dungeon. Compared to any other normal dungeon, all these supreme Dungeons were very big in size and not only that monster inside of the Dungeon was also very strong. All these supreme Dungeons have only two floors. In the first floor you will meet monsters who were very close to bing S-grade monsters, because of this, those monsters have more power than those other Monsters.


    Unfortunately humans could not absorb The Spiritual energy directly from the air. Because inside of the supreme Dungeon you can feel the huge amount of spiritual energy.


    Any S-grade warriors will enter the Dungeon alone or they could make a team with other S-grade warriors. With that the danger of the Dungeon became less. Killing any monster in this dungeon was very hard. Not only were they strong but they also had intelligence and this made the Killing very hard.


    After Maria, and Aria became S-grade warriors, it was decided that they would also ept the offer of those prime humans. Well right now they have more Saints and with that they did not have to worry about human safety. The prime humans also already send the details of that enemy. After reading the details all the Saints get to know that the prime humans were fighting against Demons.


    Don''t think those demons came from hell. Actually like any other species, these demons also were a different species. They wanted to take over the Earth of those prime humans and because of this, A war between the prime humans and those demons was going on. At first after knowing the details the saints did not want to participate in the war but then because they had new three saints they could participate in the war. But the main thing was that before participating in the world those prime humans will send them those high grade limit breakers. It was a good thing because after using that many Warriors we were able to break through.


    Not only that, those prime members also send 9 Red limit breakers to those Saints. As you know, except for Mira, Markus and the others became S-grade warriors many years ago and most likely they already reached the limit. It was just breaking through that grade difficulty and they did not have any strong limit breaker. Also if you wanted to forcefully break through then it could also bacsh. Because of this none of them try to break through. Fortunately with these red limit breakers they could try to break through once again.


    Other than those red limit breakers, those prime humans also send many blue limit breakers. Because of this, after 2 months you can see many Warriors who just recently were able to break through.


    Even though those prime humans could get the blue limit breaker easily from their Dungeon, it was very hard to find the red limit breaker. Because of these they only send 9 limit breakers to those humans.


    So currently you can say that John and the other saints were busy in breaking through while Alena and the others took care of the Eden blue. Fortunately after getting those blue limit breakers many Warriors will be able to be S-grade warriors. But still it was hard to break through and because of this even 2 monthster after receiving those blue limit breakers no one was able to break through to the next grade.


    Also even though those prime humans send 500 blue limit breakers to Eden blue, it wasn''t enough for every peak A-grade warrior. Because of this, the Saints also did not give everyone those blue limit breakers.


    Other than that,


    Not any particr important thing happens in the Eden blue. Currently you can say that many people are working hard. All of them got the news that the warrior association had blue limit breakers but they will only give those Warriors who will not betray humanity and have the strength to break through.


    ________________________


    Those 4th years already graduated from the college and because of this 3rd year already became the 4th year. Sam and his friends became first year students. Once again around the August month the college entrance exam will be organized.


    For the 3 months after finishing the annual college gradepetition, every student started to work hard because they also wanted to break through as quickly as they could. The power of Alexa and her friends has already be strong. Not only that, Alexa and her friends are very close to breaking through. But before anything they wanted to solidify their foundation and only after that they wanted to break through. On the other hand they have no idea about Sam. Thest time Sam contacted them was when he came back from the Dungeon to meet his family. After everything was over, he once again went back to the Dungeon.


    Not only that Kenny and Tina already became intermittent D-grade warriors. Dan and others were very close to breakthrough. Also the main thing was that after learning the energy mode all of them can feel the power behind that attack and it became one of their favorite attacks while fighting those Monsters. Right now killing those Monsters bes very easy and because of this they are able to advance this fast.


    ______________________


    Alena, Aria and Maria went to the S-grade dungeons. Even though it was a tough fight, they were finally able to kill many monsters and they also got to see the loot that they got after killing those Monsters. They have to say that this Monster really drops very good loot. But they cannot just stay inside of the Dungeon because they also have a lot of work to do after bing a saint. As those nine saints were busy breaking through, because of this, now only they could protect the city.


    Fortunately the main thing was that those people from the other world did not attack or do anything in this world nor did those people from the dark association also decided to attack the city.


    ______________________


    Right now if you look at the Base city. Then you will definitely go to a small city even though it has be very popr. But in this city you can see some who were in his old house, meditating in a room. If you are wondering why he was doing that because he also did not absorb crystals. Well then the good news was that he was trying to break through to C-grade. Nobody knows about it and because of this he also did not want to stand in the limelight. As you know that he was getting targeted by those dark associations or even he could get targeted by those people from the other world and because of this he did not want to stand out.


    But actually not only him, on the other hand if you look at Gloria she is also already very close to reaching the limit of peak C-grade warrior. On the other hand Fiona already became a peak C-grade warrior. Really the rivalry between these two girls will force them to work hard.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Everyone knows that Sam already went to the Dungeon. But nobody has the information that Sam was present in the base city and he was trying to break through. Even though for normal people in Eden blue, finding a blue limit breaker was very hard but it wasn''t the same. As he already found a yellow limit breaker but after using the supreme upgrade he made the limit breaker to a blue limit breaker. So now using that blue limit breaker, he was trying to break through.


    Before anything you should know that in Eden blue, the red limit breaker was the rarest one. While on the Earth the ck limit breaker was the rarest limit breaker.


    _______________To be continued________

 Chapter 377 377 - Early C-Grade

    "As you know that our Saints were trying to break through, so this time me and my friends will be incharge of the warrior association. Currently those prime humans help us by giving limit breakers. But they also want us to help them fight those people who want to take over the Earth. Because of this, I want all of the people who got selected to go to the earth to increase their hard work. Currently those prime humans do not tell us when they need our help, but they can ask for our help anytime." Mira said that to everyone who was now present in the warrior association.


    Well not everyone got selected to go to the Earth. They also need to think about their and because of this, Saint Markus already selected some Warriors before he got busy in break through. So today Mira called all those Warriors who got selected by Saint Markus.


    Currently they are in the warrior association. Alena, Maria and Aria also present there. Right now only four of them are in charge of the warrior association all over the world. Even though it was quite tough for them, somehow they were able to manage.


    Currently no serious situation is happening in the Eden blue. Because of this, they are able to maintain order. You can say in these two months they already checked every human being in the Eden blue and they didn''t find any people from the other world. With that they also rx a little. Not only that, they are also trying to find out about the warrior who still has connection with the dark association. Fortunately, because of the memory of Gustav, they were able to find those traitors. They captured all those traitors and then punished them. With that the situation became normal. With that, those saints got the time to be busy in their breakthrough.


    __________________


    Sometimeter,


    All those Warriors who came to the warrior association, right now already went to the training room that the warrior association provides them. Because the war could be dangerous, Saint Markus and his teammates went to the Dungeons and collected as many A-grade crystals as they could. Not only that, they also collected many S-grade crystals.


    Because of this all those Warriors did not have to worry about the crystals and they could only focus on breaking through. Mira and the other girl also get S-grade crystals from the Saints. With that it also helps them to increase their power and maintain the order in Eden blue.


    _________________________


    On the other hand,


    Sam is already trying to break the barrier of D-grade. He can already feel why this is the first toughest grade. Even though using the blue limit breakers he is still facing some difficulty while breaking the barrier. Also one more thing was that after using the origin spiritual energy the power of the barrier also increased because of that. Sopared to any other normal Warrior, he needed to use more power to break the barrier.


    As you know, he did not want to give up and because of this, he was attacking the barrier with his full force until he gotpletely exhausted. But he could take some time to recover his full energy and once again attack the barrier. At this time, he waspletely unaware about the outside matter. He also didn''t know anything about the war. Previously the warrior association didn''t publish the news about the war, and because of this, he didn''t know.


    He was very close to a breakthrough. You can say that, if he once again attacks the barrier with full force, he will be able to break the final barrier. But unfortunately, he needed some time to recover his full energy. So, he was now resting. Actually, when you are able to feel the barrier of your grade, you can send your consciousness into your inner world. From outside your body will look normal, but at this the consciousness of the body already went to the inner world and fought with the barrier.


    Fortunately, he was using the blue limit breaker. Because of this, he could use more powerful moves and his attack already increased in power because of the blue limit breaker.


    It took him 1 hour to recover his full energy. So, wasting no time, he began to prepare his final attack. Suddenly, a sword that looked like his yer appeared in his hand. Instantly he begins to control his spiritual energy and wasting no time sends all the spiritual energy into the sword. Completely focused on thest part of the barrier and using his strongest move, the supreme sh. Well afterbining those three techniques he got the ultimate technique called supreme sword technique. It was a technique created by master Draco. And the strongest move of this technique was the supreme sh.


    With that he used all of his power. He instantly came in front of the barrier. That powerful attack with that barrier and instantly a huge impact was created by that. You can feel the whole ce shaking. Most likely Finally with this attack he could break the barrier.


    Even though at this time because of using his full power he was feeling weak but he did not let go of the sword. Fortunately because of the blue limit breaker he got some strength and using that he kept holding that sword.


    Finally after struggling like this he was finally able to hear the cracking voice. Suddenly in front of him a crack appeared and after that the whole ce started to break down like a ss. At this time Sam''s consciousness automatically came back to his main body. If you thought that he would feel witness because of using the full power but it wasn''t the case. At this time Sam was feeling the change that was happening inside of his body.


    He can feel that his inner world began to increase and new barriers were also created. Not only that, just when that barrier had already finished he began to feel a huge amount of power. Fortunately, he waspletely focused on that and because of this, he was able to stabilize his condition. He stayed like this for sometime and only after this he slowly opened his eyes.


    After that you get up from the ground and begin to feel the change inside of his body. He was feeling very light at this moment and not only that he can also feel the power of early C-grade warriors.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2500/2500)


    Spiritual energy: (4500/4500)


    Strength: F- / 000


    Agility: F- / 000


    Physique: F- / 000


    Intelligent(mental power): F- / 000


    Spirit: F- / 000


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (C-) (early)


    Potential: Rare(+)


    Upgrade point: 80M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 more use)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)


    Invisible shot (B-grade)


    Multiple shot (B-grade)


    Rapid shot (B-grade)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)


    Regeneration (Grade B)


    [ Remark: You just now have some strength to protect.] "


    Finally he became an early C-grade warrior. Finally he became a high grade Warrior. Wasting no time he quickly summons those two robots. Before anything he needed to get used to his new strength.


    ____________________________


    Sometimeter,


    He finally finished his training. Only at this time did he began to look at his status screen. Right now he has 50M upgrade points. He already fuse his three sword technique, but he still didn''t fuse his archery technique. So he wanted to do that but at the same time he can see that the plus sign (+) appears beside his potential. With that he became sure that right now he could also upgrade his potential to legendary grade, like his sister. But the main thing was that he had enough upgrade points.


    So after some thinking he decided to upgrade his potential and only then he will try to fuse his sword techniques.


    _________________________


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2500/2500)


    Spiritual energy: (4500/4500)


    Strength: F- / 000


    Agility: F- / 000


    Physique: F- / 000


    Intelligent(mental power): F- / 000


    Spirit: F- / 000


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (C-) (early)


    Potential: Legendary


    Upgrade point: 0


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 more use)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). "


    Well, in the end level to do both of them. To upgrade his potential he almost needed 50 m upgrade points and then he used 30 m points to fuse his archery techniques.


    ____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 378 378 - Alenas House

    Sam went back to the central city for sometime. After that he has some important things to do. He also needed to meet his teacher. After she became an S-grade, she almost stayed busy handling the warrior association. Even though he doesn''t know the reason behind this. Because most of the saint Markus and his teammates handle matters rted to the Warrior association, because he was confused.


    Sometimeter, he came back to his house. His mom and dad went to the warrior association to sell their loot and they also had a meeting with their teammates. On the other hand Gloria and Fiona went to the dungeon together. Both of them were peak C-grade warriors, so both of them went to the same dungeon together.


    _____________


    "Hey man, how have you been? Did youe back from the dungeon? We really missed you. Me, Jeni, Alexa, Elena, Kenny and Tina went to the 2nd floor of the goblin dungeon, while Dan and the girls went to the first floor. Me and the girls came back, but most Dan and the girls will need some time." Tony said that.


    Well, Sam called Tony. Then he got to know that Tony also came back from the dungeon. Also one more thing, his energy mode really helping them in the dungeon. Mostly Alexa, and Tony using that technique very much.


    Well, Sam was happy that his technique helping them. But he was thinking one more thing. Should he teach them about the true spiritual energy or not. As you know the danger was approaching toward the Eden blue and he doesn''t want anything happen to his close people. Actually, he also wanted to meet Alena and teach her about then true spiritual energy. But at the same time he also needed to be careful.


    Because he didn''t want any person who has connection with the dark association or other world learn this. That could be Dengerous for the humanity. Because of this, he needed to think twice before teaching anything. But he has full confidence in his parents, sister, teacher, and friends. Because of this, he also thinking about teaching them. But at the same time using the true spiritual energy wasn''t easy if anyone didn''t get guide from him.


    Sam able to use that because of his system. But when he teach that to his parents and sister, at this they unable to control or circte the true spiritual energy, but fortunately using his origin spiritual energy he helped them to circte the spiritual energy. With that they finally able to use the true spiritual energy. With that he became sure even if anyone wanted to use this technique, they needed help from him or his system.


    One thing was that after teaching the teaching that technique he didn''t neede to worry about his family. They will be safe even if the situation was different. Even if they unable to win the fight, they will at least run away from that ce. As you know the using true spiritual energy any power of technique will increased. Because of this, he has the full confidence.


    __________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam hung up the call. Tony just came back from the dungeon. Because of this, he was also very tired. At this time he just about to get up from his bed, but suddenly he got a call from his teacher. He quickly pick up the phone.


    "Hello, teacher. How are you?"


    "I am fine Sam. How are you? Did you finallye out from the dungeon." Alena asked.


    " I am also fine teacher. Yes, i5 just came out from the dungeon."


    " Good. You should rest tomorrow. As you know that we needed to give our body some rest." Alena said that.


    " Don''t worry teacher."


    " Actually, i am calling you because I wanted to invite you and your family in my house. Today is my sister''s birthday. Uncle and aunty alredy with me and we are going toward my hoser. So, you just go toward my house. I am sending you the location. Also, Gloria will came to my house. She already came out of the dungeon. So she will directly go toward my house." Alena exin.


    Sam was quite surprised when he heard teacher Alena inviting his family in her house. As you know Alena was the granddaughter of Saint John and because of this, he was quite surprised.


    "Okay, teacher no problem." Sam said that after hanging up the phone. Well, today he doesn''t have anything to do. So he can just go to their ce. Actually, not only him, Jeni, and the others and even Fiona and some others students also get the invitation. But it wasn''t a big party. It was just Alena''s sister wanted to meet them, because of this, she invited them.


    ______________________


    '' Me and your dad going toward Alena''s house. I think you already inform you today is her sister''s birthday. I also get to know that she was a big fan of your and your sister so she really wanted to meet both of you. Beforeing to the birthday party you should also select some good gift for her. She will be giving the college entrance examination this year.'' sometimeter Hina send him this message. Actually, she want him to select some good gift for her.


    ''ok,'' Sam said that and after that he already left his house and going toward the shopping mall. But the main thing was that he wasn''t good at buying gift. After some thinking he decided to buy something that could help her in dangerous situation. So after leaving the shopping mall he directly went toward the cksmith association. He began to look around the cksmit association and try to find something that could help her.


    But even after searching carefully he did not find anything that good. With that he decided to forget about buying things from the cksmith association. If he was still in the base city he could just as old man Henry to make something for him but unfortunately he was now in the central city. Also he did not have that bond with the cksmith in the central city.


    At the end he decided to buy something from his system shop. After looking at his systems of he decided to buy a ne that will increase the defence of the user. Not only that in critical situation it will also release a protection barrier and that will protect the user for at least 5 minute. Even though this thing was very costly that almost cost him thousand gold coins but he only like this thing and without thinking he bought that.


    _______________________


    Most likely teacher Alena already make the arrangement for lunch in her house and because of this she invite him at this time. So wasting no time he quickly left his house and then started to going toward the direction that Alena send him.


    While he was driving his car he also got a call from his sister and she told him that she was also in her way toward the teacher Alena''s house. She called him because she did not have that much confidence in his gift and because of this, she called him and ask him if he needed any help in buying gift.


    Really this make his speechless. Most likely his mom and his sister did not have confidence in his gift and because of this both of them reminded him to select good gift for the birthday girl. He assured his sister that he already bought a good gift.


    While driving he was thinking about those defence tsments that he saw earlier. You could ced that on a human being or nay object. That tsments will instantly created a barrier around that thing when that thing will be in danger. It will automatically created that barrier and even a S-grade monsters will face difficulty when he try to break that barrier. But those things were very costly. He needed to use 60k gold coins to buy those.


    '' Fortunately, I already have 50k gold coins and I just needed 10 k more gold coins.'' actually in this 2 months he did not used his gold coins and he just saved those. Actually he wanted to buy a observation technique that will inform him about his enemy. But unfortunately the technique was very costly that almost needed him 1 million gold coins.


    ''Well, I can just safe more, but I needed to buy those tsments.'' Sam decided to buy those thing because if he wasn''t came outside of the Dungeon and his parents and his sister face any danger, then it could save their life. But he instantly did not bought those. He will do thatter after when he will go back to his house with his family and his sister.


    It took him at least 30 minutes to reach Alena''s house. As expected the house of the saints wasn''t your normal house it was a big vi. Also one more thing was that the whole vi was protected by many Warriors.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 379 379 - Mysterious Necklace

    Sam was now in Alena''s house. Not only him, you can say that his whole family was present in her house. Right now except his family, Alena, Fiona and Alena''s sister are present here. Previously Gloria and Fiona directly came to her house. Unfortunately Saint John wasn''t present here and he got to know from his teacher that Saint John was now preparing to break through.


    Really this news was very surprising because he could guess that breaking through to SS-grade was most likely very hard. All the 9 saints became S-grade many years ago, and it wasn''t that they didn''t reach the limit. But even after reaching the limit they are unable to break through to the next grade. It shows us how hard it was to break through to SS-grade. Because of this many Warriors also thought that S-grade was the maximum limit any could reach. But all of them are wrong.


    Sam at this time also gets to know Natalia. This year you will graduate from high school and because of this she is also giving the college entrance examination. More surprising theme was that Sam, Fiona and Gloria were her idols. Sam called the 1st year''s demon, while Fiona and Gloria called the strongest queens. Sam almost pukes the water of his mouth when he hears the nickname. Who gave him this type of title?


    Well now came back to the main case, after finishing their lunch Natalia suddenly asked some for a sparring match. She wanted to know the difference between her and him. It wasn''t that Sam had any problem with that, so he naturally agreed with her.


    Natalia was already able to reach the early D-grade before the college entrance examination and this shows everyone how talented she was and how much she worked hard. Even if someone had talent but if he or she did not work hard then they won''t be able to reach this kind of power.


    Hins and Victor also came to the training room because they also be interested when they hear that Natalia wanted a sparring match. But before the fight started both of them and even Gloria came to him and said to Sam that he shouldn''t use his full Power.


    Sam was really speechless about this. Really his family members did not have any confidence in him or any trust in him. You will naturally hold back against her and not use his full power. But still he assures them that he only uses the same power as her so that she does not get hurt.


    With that both of them came to the training room and Alena became the referee of their match. Which point she quickly gave them the signal to fight and instantly Natalia used a confused ray against Sam. This was apletely unexpected thing for everyone but still her attack did not do anything to him. As you know that he can also use the light control and because of this he could protect himself from those light type attacks.


    Natalia did not know that and she already used her original attack toward him. Even though she could use the light control like her sister, it wasn''t her main attack spell. She instantly releases a green ray toward Sam. Sam thought that it was an air control attack, but actually he was wrong because Natalia can use the rare type element, the nt element attack.


    When she thought Sam was confused right now she decided to use her most powerful attack: the life sucking ray. But unfortunate for her Sam quickly reacted and dodged that attack. After that he came behind her and was ready to attack her.


    Even though it shocked her very much, most likely she already prepared for that because instantly a tree appeared in front of Sam and behind her. Actually before attacking some with the life sucking Ray, she already started to power to create a small nt behind her. Fortunately she did that because it really protected her from his attack.


    But at this time Sam just smiled after looking at that tree that suddenly appeared in front of him. After that he vanished from his ce. This time Natalia got more alert and she created more nts around her and those nts were ready to attack any enemy. But unfortunately suddenly she felt a hand behind her. With that the match was finished and Alena announced the winner of this match.


    Natalia just sighs with this easy defeat. Really she underestimated the power of Sam. She previously thought that even though she won''t be able to find Sam if he uses the concealment technique, if she created those trees around her, then it could protect her from his attack. But unfortunate for her, even her tree wasn''t able to react while Sam came behind her.


    _____________________


    Around 8:00 p.m.


    You can see that Tony and the others and many other people are already present in the vi. The birthday party already started and one by one everyone gave Natalia her gift. At this time, Tony and the others were talking with Sam. They were discussing the next Dungeon that they will go to next. Unfortunately Sam won''t be able to go with them. But that didn''t disappoint Tony and the others, on the other hand it increased the fighting power in them. They quickly wanted to break through so that they could also go to the dungeon with Sam. It has been many days since they came to the Dungeon together. They have to say that when Sam goes with them in the dungeon, they feel extra protection.<novelsnext>please visit </novelsnext>


    At this time, suddenly Alexa told them that they know about other people in the world. She just recently got informed by her grandfather about those other world people. She also gets to know about the prime humans and the earth.


    "Hmm, I also recently got to know that. Really this makes me very surprised that except us, there are many other people who are from differents." Tony said that.


    " Well, I got to know from teacher Alena. Right now we don''t have any people from the other world on our. They already search every human being present in the Eden blue and unfortunately they did not find any clue about those other world people." Sam said that, but he did not tell them about the motive of those other world people.


    But at this time he also told him that he suspected that previously one of the people from the other world participated in the annual college gradepetition. He exins to them about the green aura and the strange feeling while fighting that warrior in thepetition.


    After hearing that you can say that Tony and the others became very surprised because most likely that was the first person who was able to fight with Sam in equal strength. And Sam needed to use his full power to defeat that opponent. But right now they hear from Sam that that person was from another world. Everyone of them became very surprised naturally.


    ________________________


    Around 10:00 p.m. after finishing the dinner party everyone started to leave the house. Sam and his family also leave Alena''s house. Right now only Alena and Natalia are present in their house except those workers.


    At this time Natalia begins to check all the gifts that she received from those people. He received many expensive gifts but she also received a mysterious gift from Sam. That made her very interested and curious from the start so wasting no time quickly went toward her sister. She asked her about that ne. Just looking at this you can say that it wasn''t your normal ne.


    Alena also became very surprised after seeing that ne. She never sees something like this but Sam gives Natalia this, so Alena has the full confidence that it wasn''t anything dangerous. Fortunately there was a description about this item. Both of the sisters begin to look at the description but the more the reading the more they be surprised.


    The name of this ne was the defense ne. This ne will increase the defense power of the user and not only that it will also created a barrier around the user when she or he will be in a danger. Even if it was a S-grade Monsters, it won''t be able to break the barrier for 30 minutes.


    Right now both of the sister looking at each other. After reading the description you can say that both of them were speechless but Alena knows that Sam wasn''t person who like to prank.


    "I think we could try the the barrier. I will wear this and you can just try to attack me." Both of the sister decided that day will check the truth about this defence ne.


    They don''t know that Sam already expected that and if he get to know about this then he will just smile. Fortunately this defence barrier will instantly activated when the user life will be in danger.


    _____________To be continued__________

 Chapter 380 380 - Mysterious Sam

    Alena is about to attack Natalia with her full power. Even if the difference barrier was not activated she would stop that attack. But because she wanted to check the defense ne she only focused on attacking Natalia. Natalia on other hand did not make any more; she just stood there without doing anything.


    But really, when she feels the power of her sister she almost gets scared. The pressure release from an S-grade is really very powerful. Fortunately, Alena did not release her full pressure and because of this, Natalia Still standing. But still, Natalia feels that she is about to die. At this time shepletely forgot about the difference barrier and she also already forgot that it was just a sparring match to check the defense ne.


    Natalie already closed her eyes and she was ready to fill the pain. But suddenly at this time the ne begins to shine and she also feels warm. Not only that at this time if she opens her eyes, then she will see a Energy barrier in front of her. With that the attacks from Alena hit the energy barrier. Instantly a huge impact was created by the sh but Natalie did not feel anything. All this time she was just closing her eyes and ready to face the pain but after waiting for sometime when she did not feel it, only then did she open her eyes.


    Only then Natalia noticed that right now in front of her smokeyer was created. That instantly makes her very confused because she doesn''t know what happened. But only then is she noticed that Energy barrier in front of her and instantly she understands that it was the energy barrier that suddenly activated and protector from that attack.


    Alena on the other hand was fully focused on the attack and ready to deactivate that attack anytime if the energy barrier did not get activated. She also became very surprised when that energy barrier got activated and even when her attack hit that barrier it did not do any damage to that barrier. Really she became very speechless after realizing this. Who could expect that that defense ne will created Energy barrier that will stop an attack of an S-grade fighter. Not only that when she looks at Natalia she can see that Natalia did even feel the impact that was created by the sh.


    "Really, this boy always stays mysterious. How he got something like this is aplete mystery. Most likely even grandpa did not have something like this even though he cleared the S-grade dungeon." Alena was really surprised. At this time, she also has a gift from Sam.


    Actually Sam previously wanted to buy only one defense ne for Natalie but then he thought that his teacher could be in danger when clearing those S-grade dungeons, because of this he bought two of those things. But he bought a defense ring for Alena.


    Alena smiles after realizing the power of this defense ring but she immediately did not equip that ring. She has some n about this ring so she put that in his storage ring and then went toward Natalia. She can see that her sister was really scared when facing her attack. Where it was natural to be scared after facing an attack from any S-grade warriors. But except her students Sam and Gloria.


    "Sister, did you see that barrier? How did senior Sam get this kind of thing? Even grandpa did not have something like this." Natalia quickly after this question but Alena just sighs after hearing that.


    " Well even I don''t know from where he did this kind of thing. You can say that this boy was aplete mystery to me the moment I saw him. Previously it was reported that he had the lowest potential but suddenly he has now a rear grade potential. Not only that he also has many mysterious techniques that nobody knows about. Sigh, I just hope one day he will trust me and tell me everything from where he got this kind of thing." Alena said that.


    On the other hand, when Natalia heard that Sam was aplete mystery to her sister or you can say even those saints. It really increased her curiosity over her idol. You can say that most likely everyone''s know that previously some had the lowest potential but somehow he now has rare potential. But still with a rare potential he could only reach C-grade or B-grade. But most likely, Sam will prove everyone wrong and he has the chance to S-grade.


    ___________________


    On the other hand Sam and his family have already reached their house. Currently his parents and his sister were very curious about those who think that he gave Alena and Natalia. Sam just smiled after hearing their question. He just simply told them about the power of those two things and also he brought out 3 more defense rings for his family.


    Not only that he also decided to give his friends these defense rings. With that he did not have to worry about them when they were in danger.


    Sometimeter Sam came back to his room. He was now thinking about something that he didn''t know why he was feeling that his teacher was hiding something from him. Most likely even his parents did not know anything about it.


    But fortunately Tony and the others are also curious about it. They also suspect that something their family is hiding from them. Even though they did not know the full thing, they were able to gather information. All of them get to know that most likely Saints and many Warriors will go somewhere to help those people fight against their enemy. Not only that, most likely those people keep something to us and because of this, the Saints wanted to help them.


    Even Tony and the others were unable to guess anything after getting all this information, but Sam could easily guess. Most likely the Saints and those Warriors will go to the other world. Most likely those people give something to us that will be helpful for humanity, because of these the Saints also wanted to help them.


    So you can say that this is the thing that Sam was now worried about. He doesn''t want anything to happen to the Saints or those human Warriors. Because of this he was nning to do something. Actually before knowing that he did not have any intention of buying something for the saints or those Warriors who will be going to the other world. But after knowing all of these he decided to buy something that will be helpful for everyone when they go to the other world.


    Currently he is very weak and you won''t be able to help the saints. So only this is the way he could help them. Nobody was aware that a big danger was approaching Eden blue. Only Sam was aware of that and he wanted to prepare for that but still before that he also wanted to straighten the power of humanity so that they could also survive that disaster. He already said that most likely only 2 yearster the core of this will appear and because of this, the danger will also appear 2 yearster.


    ''I will buy those things even though it will cost most of my gold coins. But I could just stay in the Dungeon together with those gold coins so I did not have to worry about that. I just hope it will protect all these human Warriors and the saints when they go to the other world. Also most likely it was something dangerous because of this the saints did not say anything to anyone.'' Sam thought that.


    Sometimeter he brings out his crystals from his inventory and then begins to absorb those. Fortunately all this time he was hunting those early C-grade monsters, because of this he has the early C-grade crystals.


    Sometimeter,


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2700/2700)


    Spiritual energy: (4800/4800)


    Strength: E- / 065


    Agility: E- / 060


    Physique: E- / 069


    Intelligent(mental power): E- / 060


    Spirit: E- / 060


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (C-) (early)


    Potential: Legendary


    Upgrade point: 0<novelsnext>please visit </novelsnext>


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 more use)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade).


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)


    Regeneration (Grade B)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 381 381 - Go Back To The Base City.

    A few dayster,


    Sam was going toward the base city. His parents and his sister already went back to the dungeon. You also have something to do before that he already bought all those defense rings for his family and friends. Not only that, he also gives those saints something like those defense rings, but they have limited use. Not only that as you know that he is already able to guess that most probably some Warriors are also going toward the other world so to ensure their safety he also brings out a healing zone Tsment and Strength tsment.


    That healing zone would create a zone that will recover every injured Warriors faster than before. And the strength tsment will increase the power of those Warriors for sometime.


    So you can say that both of these things were the trump card. He doesn''t want anything to happen to those Warriors who will be going toward the other world. As you know they were going because those people mostly helped humanity.


    Well, while buying all of these things he almost used all of his gold coins. Well, he didn''t care about that. He could collect those gold coins once again . So he doesn''t need to worry.


    Also one more thing was that before his family went back to the dungeon, he helped them while controlling the pure spiritual energy. As you know, without his help it was quite tough to control that spiritual energy. He doesn''t know when he wille back, so before anything he wanted to make sure that his family and friends stay safe.


    He also teaches about the pure spiritual energy to Tony and his other friends, Alena, and Fiona. These are the people that he trusts and because of this, he also teaches them. As you know that the danger was approaching toward them and because of this, he wanted them to also prepare themselves to face the danger.


    You have to say that as usual when they are about to learn about the pure spiritual energy, all of them are very shocked. It was natural that nobody from Eden blue knew about it. But all of them trust Sam so without any hesitation they also decided to learn that.


    With his help he was able to control the pure spiritual energy but the control was very weak. Everyone needed some time to master this control.


    On the other hand after teaching them that pure spiritual energy Sam finally sighs in relief. With that he became sure that all of them will be safe even if they face any danger. Also one more thing was that even though they won''t be able to teach as Sam, but when they are able to master this technique they could teach someone about the true spiritual energy and they could help those people to learn this technique. But still it will be very tough for that person to master this technique without Sam''s help.


    Now if you are wondering why he did not tell everyone about this technique then it was because as you know there are many people who have connections with the other world or the dark association. So he doesn''t want those people to know about pure spiritual energy. Because of this, he did not want to teach everyone about this technique.


    ____________________


    Finally after finishing all of his previous work he was nowpletely and because of this, he was going back toward the base city. Many of you already guessed the reason. Yes, Sam was going back to that city and after that he will go back to the E-grade dungeon.


    If you are wondering why a low grade dungeon, then it was because he still did not forget about that weird symbol and that weird rock that protects that symbol. As you know that this symbol has a veryplicated design and with that Sam was yours that you will need much more spiritual energy.


    Also by looking he can tell that until now no other what you are finding about this weird symbol and the weird rock. So you can say that he already became a C-grade warrior, so it was now the perfect time to check that weird symbol.


    Actually he never forgot about this thing and because of this, many times he also wanted toe back with this and to check these but he decided to wait and only when he became C-grade, he woulde back. So you can say that the time had alreadye and because of this he was also already going toward that dungeon.


    Previously he also searched in the warriorwork or even also tried to search in the library of his Academy, but unfortunately he did not find anything and without it he became sure that most likely even those Saints did not know anything about it.


    Aftering back to the base he directly went toward that dungeon. He did not want anyone to recognise him and because of this he was also wearing the mask. With that he finally enters the Dungeon and wasting no time he increases his speed.  His main goal was to reach the boss room, only then he will check that thing.<novelsnext>please visit </novelsnext>


    After entering the dungeon, you can say that Sam justpletely ignored those Weak monsters. Those monsters weren''t even able to do anything to him and because of this, using his full power he went toward the boss room.


    In just 3 hours he was finally able to reach the boss room. Also after entering the room he just easily killed those Monsters and only then was he ready to look at that weird symbol.


    '' Still nothing happened to the rock of this symbol.'' After looking at that symbol he bes surprised because even after all this time nothing happens to that symbol or that rock. Sam thought that and wasting no time he didn''t ce his hand on that symbol.


    One thing was clear that it was a teleportation symbol and most likely because of this symbol The Monster was able to respawn in the dungeon. So he wanted to find the mystery behind the symbol.


    The moment he started to channel his spiritual energy he began to feel a sucking  and force. Like his spiritual energy got sucked away by this symbol. Not only that, that symbol also began to glow. Sam who was previously ready to face any type of situation was now quite afraid because of this symbol. Because this symbol almost uses his 90% spiritual energy and because of this, he quickly takes out a health potion and gulps it down. Instantly he once again lost his spiritual energy.


    But right now Sam wasn''t focused on his spiritual energy. Because right now in front of him that symbol was beginning to glow and the power of glow just became bigger and bigger. The lighting out from that symbol begins to shine very much that almost makes him blind.


    Because of that Intense light Sam just closed his eyes. But then when he suddenly opened his eyes he became speechless because currently he wasn''t in the dungeon. Right now he was in the middle of a big forest. The trees were so big that he could even see the sun and not only that, most likely those trees were also not normal.


    Sam at this time didn''t panic. He maintained his calm and then began to observe his surroundings. Fortunately he was already wearing the armor and he was already attacking the enemy.


    ''Before anything, I need to find out about this ce only then I can make any decision. By looking at this I am sure that I wasn''t in the base city of the central city. By looking I could tell that all these trees are very different and these trees were strongpared to trees that you usually see in Eden blue.'' Sam for that and instantly begins to climb in the tree.


    Well you know where he was right now so this will be the best. After reaching the top of the tree he was able to look around but unfortunately he could also see the forest everywhere. You cannot see any city near this forest.


    ___________________


    Sometimeter,


    Fortunately after finding everywhere he suddenly found a water source and he built a camp near that.


    ''Why didn''t I see any animals?'' Sam thought that. You can say that all this time he was searching around but he did not see any type of animals in this forest. It was like a silent forest where you could hear your own breathing sound. He didn''t even see any type of bird flying in the sky and this is a really confusing thing for him.


    After making his camp, he decided to look around once again, but at this time suddenly something unexpected happened. Out of nowhere he got attacked by someone. Fortunately, he already was in alert mode, because of this, he was able to react on time.


    ________________To be continued______________

 Chapter 382 382 - People With One Horn

    Fortunately, Sam was able to dodge that attack. But this instantly makes him alert. He quickly tries to find the person who attacks him. Even though it was a deep forest, using his spiritual eyes he was able to find that person or you could be a monster. The monster was a Goblin but it wasn''t your normal Goblin. The color of that Goblin was blue and the eyes of that Goblin were glowing in red and ck color. Also, even from this distance Sam could feel that the monster was a D-grade monster.


    But unfortunately that monster attacked Sam. That Goblin once again about to attack him but Sam already vanishes from his ce. Using his full speed and concealment technique, Sam became invisible and came behind that monster. Using his yer he instantly killed that Goblin.


    After killing that Goblin, Sam was just about to observe his surroundings when something unexpected happened. He noticed that the Monster suddenly dropped loot and not only that the dead body of that Monster did not fade away.


    ''Why has the body of this Goblin not faded away? '' he thought of that question but nobody could answer that. With that he did not think that much and quickly collected the loot and the dead body. After that he left that ce. He needed to find the existence of this forest and also needed to find how he could go back to the Dungeon.


    Fortunately Sam was using his stealth technique, because not long after he began to advance he already felt many monsters. All of those monsters like that previous Goblin were early D-grade monsters. But one thing he noticed is that most likely all these goblins were powerfulpared to those goblins that you can find in Eden blue.


    This time some did not kill those goblins because he wanted to know where those goblins were going. Most likely they were going somewhere, so Sam also decided to follow those Goblins.


    Previously there were only five goblins but right now you can see more and more Goblins joining them and they are going in the same direction. Previously they were walking but right now they were running in the direction. All of this really confused him very much but he did not do anything and just silently followed those goblins.


    ''Where are they going? Why are they behaving like this? '' Right now Sam was thinking about this type of question but who could answer him? It wasn''t that he could just ask those Goblin where they were going. Because of this, he just did not think that much and just silently followed these goblins.


    ''I have to admit that this forest was very big. I ran for almost 1 hour but still I did not see the exit of this forest. But still those goblins did not slow down. Why is that? '' well it has been 1 hour since those goblins began to run but still now they did not reach anywhere and those goblins keep running. Because of this, Sam was quite confused.


    But he did not need to stay confused for that long because 30 minutester finally able to realize why those goblins were running previously. Finally Sam was now out of the forest but that wasn''t there in front of him he could see many people who were also wearing armor from head to toe, were fighting those goblins. Those goblins are most likely also the reinforcement of the Goblin force.


    Sam wasn''t sure if those people who were fighting those goblins were humans or not. But one thing was that he won''t interfere in their fight. First he needs to understand the situation and only then will he make his move.


    In front of him he could see 20 people who were fighting those goblins. All those people were releasing the aura of an early D-grade warrior. But right now those 20 people are facing at least 50 goblins at the same time and it became quite hard for them to kill all of those problems. It wasn''t that they did not kill the goblins but it is unexpected for them when they notice the reinforcement of those goblins.


    All those 20 people used their full part to fight those goblins and they also killed 25 goblins already but the remaining 25 goblins managed to injure them. Well it was normal because all those 20 people were very tired after fighting this many goblins. But they also know that they cannot give up or they will die by those goblins.


    Sam watched all of this from a distance and did not interfere with their match. But sometimeter he became sure that those people weren''t humans even though they have the human figure. Because when some of those people got injured by the goblins, Sam was able to get a clear picture of one of the people and those people had one short horn in their head. With that Sam bes sure that these people weren''t humans.


    But then the main question was whether he should help those people or not. As you know, he already has so many other people in the world, and he did not have any good impression on those people so he was thinking about that. But then he decided to help them because right now he was in a condition that he needed help.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    He cannot see any City or something like this even when he looks far away using his eye technique. Also he doesn''t know how he could go back to his own world. So because of all of this he decided to help those people.


    But the main thing was that he cannot suddenly appear in front of them so he decided that he should attack those goblins from behind. While those 25 goblins were fighting those people Sam decided to deactivate his concealment technique. After that he begins to create me spears and shoot them toward those goblins. As you know, Sam''s me was already upgraded and right now it was green. Power of that film already increased because of using the origin spiritual energy.


    Because of this the moment those attacked he does goblins this instantly burn that goblins. Those 5 goblins didn''t even get the chance to react or they did not get any chance to make any sound. Less than a second, they just turn into ash.


    Even though those goblins did not get the chance to react, those other goblins already noticed that something or someone attacked them from behind and already killed 5 of their teammates. Only then those goblins looked behind and saw a person.


    "Roar!!!!" They instantly became very angry at Sam and then began to Roar. Some of those Goblins just about turned around toe towards Sam, but suddenly at this time many fireballs begin to go toward those goblins. One by one everyone of those goblins got hit by the fireballs and it didn''t even take a second and all of those goblins turned into Ash. Sam continued to attack until he did not kill thest Goblin.


    You can say that all this time those 20 people just stand in their ce with a speechless expression. All of this thing happened so quickly that all of them didn''t get the chance to realize what was happening. They took some time to realize what was happening and only then did they begin to react. All of them are very shocked because they did not think that they would find someone who could kill those goblins in just one second.


    But the moment they realize that they be very alert because what if that person also attacks them. But surprisingly it was the case because that person was just walking toward them. This made all those 20 people very alert and they were ready to defend themselves. But surprisingly when that person came in front of them he brought out a potion, and gave that to your friend who was seriously injured.


    They thought if they should take that potion or not but when they noticed that the person had no malicious intention they decided to take that Potion.


    "Thank you very much for your help." Suddenly one of those people began to say thanks to Sam. Not long after that one by one everyone began to say thanks to him.


    "No problem," Sam just answered them. After that he signals those people that they should help their friend with that potion.


    Really it surprised everyone once again that red potion instantly heals their friend. It wasn''t that they did not have potions, but it was their first time to see something like this. Instantly their friend who was previously injured stands up and then begins to say thanks to Sam.


    Actually Sam decided to help them because he saw previously how this person was protecting his friends from those goblins. That person uses all of his strength to protect them but in the end that person got seriously injured. Really this thing makes him interfere and help those people from danger.


    ________To be continued__________

 Chapter 383 383 - Oni Human

    Currently Sam and those people are running away from that ce. Actually previously when some killed all those goblins he thought that everything is over and no more Monster wille out. But he was very wrong because not long after that more and more Goblins began toe out from the forest and that time Livia the horn girl who was the leader of her and her teammates decided to run away from that ce. They also told Sam to follow them because they did not want Sam to face those monsters because of them.


    Well, Sam could easily take care of all those blue goblins, but he did not do that and decided to follow the people. He needed to find the exit of this ce so that he could go back to the base city. Not only that, you also wanted to know where he was right now because he cannot see anything around himself. He could only see The barrennd and the forest. Other than these two, he did not see any other thing.


    Finally after running for 20 minutes they came very far away from those goblins and right now they are safe from those goblins. All this time Sam did not said anything, and just silently followed them.


    "Haha¡­ we are sorry that you needed to face this danger because of us. We thought that we could easily handle those goblins but who could have thought that they would call for reinforcement. We never expected this and because of this, we face this type of problem." At this time Livia said that to him.


    If you are wondering about Livia, then she called herself the oni human, and has a small horn on the left side of her head. Compared to Livia, her teammates have bigger horns. These are also very confusing things for Sam but he instantly did not ask that question to her. The main mission of Sam was to find out the name of this ce and find the exit from this ce.


    "Mister, mister, mister!!!" Sam who was busy in his deep thinking suddenly came back to his senses when he heard someone calling him. He saw that it was Livia, who called him.


    "As you can see that sometimeter it will be night and it wasn''t good to fight monsters at night so we decided to build a camp in this ce. If you don''t have any problem you could join us. If you join us it will be our pleasure because we want to repay you for your help." Livia says that to him.


    Sam did not decline the offer. He decided to agree with her because he also wanted to know many things from her and her teammates. So his main priority was to build a good rtionship with them and only then he could get the answers to his questions.


    ______________________


    Sometimeter,


    You can see that right now all of them are sitting around a campfire while one of them is cooking their food. Actually all of them were very curious about Sam because from the start they wanted to know more about Sam. Until now Sam did not show them his face and because of this, all of them are very curious. Livia and her teammates already remove their helmet and you can see they are faces but they cannot see the face of Sam.


    Even though they told Sam to remove that mask, Sam did not want to do that. Before anything he needs to know if he was right now on a different and also if humans are present on this or not. Even if humans are present on this, then what was their Status? He wanted to know everything.


    At this time you can say that Sam told them he made up a story that there was some problem on his face and because of this he cannot remove his mask. The most interesting thing was that everyone of them easily believed that and because of this they no longer told him to remove that mask.


    At this time except the cook in Livia and the others one by one introduced themselves to Sam. Sam was very surprised when he got to know the real identity of Livia. Livia was the princess of the Oni n. While all of her teammates were her friends. They came here toplete the mission of Goblin hunting but unfortunately they met a situation like this.


    At this time, Sam asked them about many things that he didn''t know. Also one more thing was that the forest that he previously spawned, called The forest of dead. Nobody knew how deep this forest was. While telling all of this Livia also asked about Sam''s country, but didn''t say anything. Livia didn''t force that, it was like she felt that Sam did not want to talk about that so she did not force on that. He was their savior and she doesn''t want their savior to feel ufortable.


    ____________________<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    ''So even if I travel with my full speed I will only be able to reach the city one dayter. Also this isn''t the Eden blue. Really, sigh even if I reach the city I will face the problem where I need to show my ID to the city guard. This is the real problem.'' Sam was thinking about this. He doesn''t know what to do about the ID that he needs to show after reaching the City of this oni human. Even though he could just enter the city using his superior stealth technique, he still wanted to solve the problem about his ID.


    At this time while Sam was thinking about this, Livia who was also guarding the tent while her teammates were sleeping, already noticed that Sam was thinking about something. Even though he was wearing a mask, you can say that it was a woman''s instinct that she could tell that Sam was worried about something.


    She went towards him and asked what he was worried about. Sam was thinking about the ID only then realized that he wasn''t alone in this ce and Livia was also guarding the tent.


    "Actually I lost all my staff in the forest of the dead and because of this, I don''t know what to do." At this time Sam remembered that Livia was a princess so she could really help him in this matter. And as he expected after hearing his problem Livia just smiled.


    " Haha¡­ you don''t need to worry. If you go with me in the city then you don''t need to show your ID. And after entering the city you could easily make your id card once again or you can also recover that ID card. So don''t worry about it. " Livia assured him that he doesn''t need to worry. With her help he could easily enter the city.


    " Really¡­ Thank you very much. Haha¡­ for a moment I forgot that you are a princess," after hearing her word Sam said to her with a joking tone. After that both of them started talking about various things but mainly they were talking about those Monsters. Sam gets to know much information about the monster in this ce. But he still wanted to know more information about this ce and the only way to get all that information was to go to the library. In the library He could get to know everything.


    _________________


    Next day,


    Livia and the others alreadypleted their mission so it was time for them to go back. So wasting no time, all of them begin to run toward the city. But still it will take them one day to reach the city.


    Also one more thing was that, don''t think the barrennd was safe, because this ce also feels like Monsters. But fortunately Livia and her friends Know a shortcut. So using that way they could avoid those powerful Monsters and reach their city.


    But still they faced many D-grade, E-grade and F-grade Monsters. But none of those monsters are able to fight against Sam. He doesn''t want to waste time while fighting the monster, because of this, the moment he notices those monsters he just kills them. On the other hand Livia and her teammates were speechless at first but then they got used to it. They began to think Sam was the real monster, while those goblins and those other monsters were ying tools for Sam.


    This time because of his help their journey was very smooth and injust 18 hourster they already came in front of that city. At this time Sam already saw a big line of people entering the city. But fortunately he wasn''t needed to stand in that line. Because of Livia''s princess status, Sam and the others didn''t even have to wait and they just directly even the gate.


    You have to say that the moment Sam entered the city was very surprising. Who could have thought that a city like this exists where you cannot see any modern buildings or anything like that.


    ____________To be continued_________

 Chapter 384 384 - Terraria

    You have to say that the moment Sam entered the city was very surprising. Who could have thought that a city like this exists where you cannot see any modern buildings or anything like that. Everywhere you can see ancient style architecture. But you can also find the electricity so all of this really surprises him very much.


    "Did you get a surprise?" Suddenly Livia asked him. She can tell that Sam was surprised even though he was wearing a mask.


    Sam nodded. He was really surprised. Well, this type of scenery was very rare. Because of this, he was very surprised.


    "I know our city has a different architecture style,pared to those other cities. We prefer to use Titan wood to build our houses. But you can find those brick and cement houses in all those other cities." Livia said that proudly.


    After hearing that Sam didn''t react, because the main thing was that he did not know anything about the Titan wood. So he didn''t know how to react after hearing that but he could tell thatpared to those brick or cement houses this Titan wood was most likely stronger and also hearing her voice it seems it was also a rare thing.


    Sometimeter, Livia and her friend said goodbye to Sam. It was time to separate. Sam also said goodbye to them and after that he left that ce. Fortunately he brought the technique called allnguages. Because of that technique he was now able to read all the words of this city.


    It took him sometime to find the library but he finally found it and using his concealment technique he entered the library. Currently, as you know, he did not have any type of ID card and before making his ID he needed toplete information about this world and the libraries the best ce to gain information.


    After entering the library he selected some books rted to history and after that he found a good ce. Most likely nobody will disturb him, so he began to read all those books.


    ____________________


    ''Sigh, who could have thought that toplete those books I would need 4 hours. Fortunately, the library is still open.'' So after 4 hours he finished all those books and then left the library. Finally he has knowledge about this world.


    As you expected this wasn''t Eden blue. This world is called Terraria. Not only that, he also found that many people from different races lived here. Like the Eden blue 1000 years ago this ce got attacked by the Monsters but fortunately they were also able to kill those Monsters and then gain the power to fight those Monsters. All of these things are most likely simr to the Eden blue. This Terraria was 20 times bigger than the Eden blue.


    Humans, elf, dwarf, Oni human, and beast humans, these are local people of this. From the start they were living on this.


    He also gets to know about the 7 demon kings from the Nether world. They were the reason that 2000 years ago they got attacked by those monsters. Those monsters were the subordinate of those demon kings.


    Those demon kings were very powerful but fortunately the powerhouses of this world were able to force those demon kings to escape from here.


    The most important thing was that in this world you will also find Dungeons but they are very rare and dangerous. Like the Eden blue you will not find those dungeons inside of the city. You need to search for those dungeons outside of the city. Well if you want to read why, then it was because previously many times Monster was able toe out from those dungeons and nobody wanted to reach. They are like trying to build a city around the dungeons. Even though those Warriors are able to fight those Monsters, this world also has normal people, so for these normal people it will be very hard to stay around the Dungeon.


    But as you can see, even though they did not go to the dungeon, they could still find the loot after killing the monster outside of the dungeon. Because of this nobody has any problem even though they did not find that dungeon.


    Now this world also has Warriors. Those people who are able to gain the power to fight against those Monsters called warriors. But the most interesting thing was that this world has a different power levelpared to Eden blue.


    " Mortal warrior ( F-grade to D-grade)


    Special warrior C-grade to A-grade)


    Elite Warrior (S-grade to SSS-grade)


    Master warrior<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Legendary warrior.


    (??).  "


    This information he got from the book. The most powerful Warrior of this party was a legendary level warrior. Well everyone believes that there are more warrior levels but they are just unable to achieve that.


    Now back to Terraria, this world has much more spiritual energypared to any other. Not only that, the people of this already know about the differents. Also it was said that most likely they were the first who got attacked by the Monsters and only they have the information about those demon kings.


    After searching very long you can say that Sam also found Eden blue. But Eden blue was in the 3rd lowestbel category.


    "This has Early Elite grade warriors. But nobody was able to break through to the next grade. "


    Because of this they put the name of the Eden blue in the third category of their weak list. Actually they also found that those others follow the warrior level from F-grade to SSS-grade. Other than that only some of the is away from the true Warrior level and only they follow that level.


    The weakest of this list has the power level of a special grade warrior. This was the who just recently awakened their spiritual energy and because of these they also got attacked by the Monsters.


    So after reading all of this he found out that most likely this Terraria was the first world which has awakened In The Spiritual energy and also gets attacked by the monsters. The strongest warrior of this has the power level of legendary Warrior. Also those demon kings that he read about, have the same power level as them.


    _____________________


    ''Sigh, now I know that this also has humans so I could register myself as the human of this.'' actually to make an id he needs to go to the warrior association. There he needed to reveal his true identity and only then was he able to make his ID. So now it was clear that this world has humans so he could go to that ce to make himself an ID.


    So he started walking toward that ce. You have to say that this ce was much biggerpared to the central city. Well even though if he uses his power then he will quickly reach the warrior association but he wants to take it slow. He wanted to enjoy the scenery of this ce.


    Really all this information makes him very confused and also at the same time makes him very excited. Actually many of thes like Eden blue didn''t even know about Terraria. Even though thoses know about the different walls, they did not know about Terraria.


    Also one more thing previously he suddenly got to know about a that was called the earth. It was a that fell with humans and those humans called themselves the prime humans. Actually even those prime humans did not know anything about Terraria and because of this, they thought that they were the first humans who awakened their Power.


    ''Really all of this makes me very excited and I really wanted to read more about all of this. Sigh, before doing anything I need to make my ID. With that I don''t have any problem even if I left the city.'' Sam was thinking that while going toward the warrior association. Also one more thing was that the rtionship between those other races on this was good. It wasn''t that they did not have war between them but everything was solved when those demons King attacked this.


    ''Fortunately this oni humans has good rtionship with those humans and with that I could easily create my id as the human identity.'' Sam was thinking this while going toward the warrior association.


    But at this time Sam waspletely unaware that one of the powerhouse of the oni city already noticed him. But because he did not release any malicious intentions, PowerHouse did not do anything to him.


    ''Nowe to think that previously the goddess told me that a monster was approaching toward the Eden blue. I already got to know the reason because he wanted the core of the Eden blue. Now I am thinking that that Monster wanted to beary level Monster. It would be good if I found any details about that monster in the library.'' Sam thought that.


    __________To be continued___________

 Chapter 385 385 - Id Card

    "How can I help you?" The oni receptionist asked Sam.


    "I would like to register myself." Sam answered that.


    " Ok, no problem. Wait a minute." After that the oni receptionist gave Sam a paper and told him to feel the details about himself.


    Wasting no time Sam began to fill in the details of the paper and after sometimeter, gave that paper to the receptionist.


    You have to say that the receptionist is surprised when she looks at the details. Because in the details she could see that Sam wasn''t a oni human. He was only a human. This really surprised her very much, but she did not show it. She professionally handled the matter and after that told Sam to go to the next room. Here they will check the spiritual energy of Sam and which grade he was in right now.


    Aftering to the room Sam saw a crystal ball. The examiner told him to put his hand on that ball. Instantly that ball begins to shine. Sam doesn''t know what will be his result but he was sure that the result will show him that he was a C-grade warrior or you can say special warrior.


    Sometimeter,


    After everything waspleted Sam already had the warrior ID card in his hand. Before anything the receptionist told him to drop a blood on that ID card. For a minute he was surprised because why would he drop his blood On The ID card, but then the receptionist told him if he drops his blood on the ID card then the ID card will be merged with his body, and he did not need to worry about losing the Id card.


    The moment Sam heard that, he suddenly realized most likely previously Livia and her teammates also realized he was lying. After just releasing he didn''t know what to do.


    Well, Sam didn''t waste anymore time and dropped a blood on the id card. Instantly, that card vanished from his hand. But surprisingly he can still feel the id card. Really, what an amazing thing.


    "


    Name:- Sam Kainer


    Race :- Human


    Grade :- Special


    Spiritual energy:- special. "


    This is the information you can see in the card. After everything was finished he didn''t waste anymore time, and left the warrior association. Right now, he got the I''d card, so he could easily sell these items that he got after killing those blue Goblin.


    After searching for some time he finally found an actuation house. He decided to go there. Even though he doesn''t know how much money he will get after selling those, it will most likely be enough for him to rent a hotel room and eat some food.


    ____________________


    "Hello, Is there anything you wanted to buy?" The receptionist asked him.


    "No, I came here to sell some loot that I got from the blue Goblins." Sam said that to the girl. Well, actually he wanted to know if he could sell those or not. As you know it was only a special grade monster, because of this, he has his confusion.


    Fortunately, the receptionist smiled and told him to show those loot. Sam was wasting no time bringing out all those loots that he got after killing the blue goblins.


    Looking at those loots the receptionist girl was surprised for sometime but then she professionally handled the matter. She begins to count the money one by one that Sam will get after selling those loot.


    Sometimeter,


    Some finally left the auction House after getting the money from it. The money in the Terraria was gold coins or silver coins. Well, the moment you get to know this he was quite surprised, but then he didn''t know how to bring those gold coins that he had in his system shop. Because of this he decided to sell those loot and finally get two gold coins.


    "1 spirit coin = 100 tinum coin<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    1 tinum coin = 100 good coin


    1 gold coin = 100 silver coin


    1 silver coin = 100 bronze coin."


    This was the currency of Terraria. With that now he had 2 gold coins. Most likely it will be enough for him to book a hotel room.


    So before anything he decided to search for any hotel room which has a free room. After finding he finally found a room that needed him to spend 20 silver coins for one night. The room is quite small but it was enough for Sam to spend the night. Also with an extra 5 silver coins he will get lunch and dinner, tomorrow''s breakfast and lunch. Well with that Sam decided to book this room for 2 days. As you know, he really wanted to go back to the library to find more information about this new world. Not only that as he gets to know this Terraria was most likely the first that awakened The Spiritual energy and also they have much knowledge about many others, some most likely they will also have information about that Monster that he previously saw in his dream.


    ___________________


    Well, Sam was resting in the hotel room, he doesn''t know but many people already know about him and they are really curious about him. Well you also don''t know that from the moment when he left the warrior association some people were already watching over his movement.


    Usually, Sam will easily detect all of this but unfortunately those people who observe his movement are more powerful than him. Because of this, Sam did not get to know about this. Some of the people mostly wanted to know why a human came to this city and then decided to register himself. But some of those people have other motives.


    Previously, Levia after reaching her home told her father about Sam. This made him very curious about that person and because of this he decided to send some of his subordinates to observe that person. Before anything he wanted to know if that person had any motive, while he got close to his daughter. As you know, he was the king of this city and because of this he needed to know about everyone that came to his City.


    One more person who is also observing Sam. It was the grandfather of Livia who sent his subordinate to watch over Sam. You can say that he was the most powerful person in this city and the moment Sam entered this ce the grandfather of Livia already became aware of that. He also became more curious about this person and because of this he sent some of his subordinates to observe Sam.


    ______________


    Sam ispletely unaware that three groups of people are watching over him. After resting for some time he decided it was time to eat some food. He went to the dining area of this hotel. So right now he was eating his food while deciding what to do next.


    ''Well, for today I will only go to the library.'' Sam decided that for today he will only go to the library. You will think about the next n tomorrow. But one thing was that he was worried about his parents, his sister, his teacher and his friends.


    ''How are their conditions? Did they already get to know that I wasn''t in Eden blue anymore? What will be their reaction after knowing that? Most likely every one of them worried about him.'' Currently Sam was thinking about this type of question.


    He just sighs. Well he also needs to find the way where he will be able to go back to Eden blue. This is also an important thing that he wanted to find in the library. He was sure that there would be some way where he would be able to go back to his.


    Sometimeter,


    After finishing his lunch he already started going toward the library. This time he did not use his concealment technique and entered the library normally. After showing his ID card, he got permission to read the book in the library.


    So some one second begins to search for those books that will help him right now. After finding those books, he began to read those books carefully.


    Currently Sam who wanted to only spend his time reading those books, didn''t know that trouble was on his way. The trouble was also on his way toward the library.


    _____________________


    ''Even after reading all of this book, I didn''t find anything. Is there no information about that monster?'' Sam began to think that.


    You can say right now here most finished 5 books about the Monsters, but still he did not find anything about that monster he previously saw in his dream. But he did not give up and decided to read the remaining book about the Monsters. Sam just once again  tries to focus on the book but suddenly he hears something.


    "Mister, Sam. Hello, Mr, Sam." Out of nowhere he heard that from behind. He instantly turned around and saw that it was Livia and her friends.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 386 386 - The Jealous Kevin

    "Mister, Sam. Hello, Mr, Sam." Out of nowhere he heard that from behind. He instantly turned around and saw that it was Livia and her friends


    "Hello, Princess Livia." Sam Greet them. He was quite surprised that Livia and her friends were here.


    "Did you finally make your id?" Livia asked him this. Well, after hearing that Sam was quite speechless. He doesn''t know if he shouldugh or cry. But he didn''t let it show. Naturally answer them that he already made his ID.


    After that Livia and her friends also sit down beside him. Actually all of them came to the library to look for something. Recently they epted one more mission. In this mission they need to find some medical nts. So they came to the library to learn about those nts.


    After talking sometimes all of them became busy with their own work. Sam was looking for the details of the Monsters while Livia and her friends were looking for medical nt information.


    While he was reading the book he suddenly felt a hostile aura toward him. This instantly makes him surprised and he quickly stops reading his book and then begins to observe the surroundings. Only then he noticed a person who came with Livia, looking at him with hostility.


    It made Sam confused for some time but then he decided to ignore that person. But it seems when he looks at that person that person also seems to notice him. That person''s thoughts are we''ll take him seriously or ask some questions. But when he notices Sam just ignores him that makes him more angry.


    The name of that person was Kevin. He was a childhood friend of Livia. Naturally he was a special grade Warrior. Yesterday he suddenly got to know that Livia faced a danger, where she could lose her life. After knowing that he decided to join Livia in her adventure. Also one more thing was that from childhood he has a crush on Livia. Because of this, he decided to tag along with Livia and her friends.


    But he was quite annoyed because from yesterday Livia was talking about a person who saved them. You can say that he was feeling jealous when Livia was talking about another person.


    Sometime ago, Livia epted a mission to search for medical nts. Well, only when she shows this mission to her father does he allow her to go for this mission. Compared to The Monster hunting, searching for a medical nt was easy and because of this he allowed her.


    But before anything livia and her friends wanted to know about all the details about those medical nts and because of these they came to the library. But who could have thought that Kevin will meet that Sam person in this library. Not only that he also saw that Livia became very happy the moment she saw him. It makes Kevin more jealous. Because of this all this time he was looking at Sam with hatred. But who could have thought that Sam will just ignore his presence.


    ''I really wanted to show this person who is the boss in this town.'' He really wanted to teach Sam a lesson but unfortunately they were now inside of the library and you cannot do anything like fighting inside of the library. This is the order from the king that you should maintain the peace inside of the library. So you can say that because of this Kevin did not do anything.


    On the other hand, Sam ispletely unaware of any of this. Even if he got to know these he just did not care about that. Before anything he needs to find about the Monsters and also he needs to find a way to go back to his home.


    ________________


    30 minutester,


    Livia and her friends finally finish reading the details of those medical nts. So they wanted to finally start the mission. But suddenly they noticed that Sam was still focusing on his book. He didn''t even look at anyone. Most likely he also just forgot about the time while reading the book.


    Livia felt it quite funny, but she decided not to disturb him. But most likely Kevin has another n. From first tost he was also sitting beside Livia. Really it made him very jealous of Sam so he decided to break the focus of Sam. When Livia and her friends tried to put all those books in their original ce, Kevin acted like he was falling down and then hit Sam.


    Sam, who waspletely focused on his book, suddenly felt pain in his head because it suddenly smashed into the table. He suddenly looked toward Kevin who was still acting.


    "Ouch¡­ I am really sorry. I didn''t think this would happen." Kevin also began to say sorry to some while acting like he was in great pain. But most likely everyone present there knew that he was just acting. A special grade Warrior like him won''t receive that much pain.


    You have to say that Sam was also quite speechless when he looked at the acting of Kevin. He just also thought about what problem he had with him. Sam doesn''t think that he made this person before. At this time Livia also came to him and began to say sorry for Kevin.


    "Well don''t worry about it, I did not receive that much injury or anything like that." Sam that and once again looking at his book. It was nowpletely clear to everyone that Sam wanted to read his book. So none of them wanted to disturb him. They left the library but something is still confusing for two people.


    For Livia she was thinking how Kevin fell down on the other hand for Sam he was thinking why Kevin was showing a hostile aura. Actually not only Livia but her friends were also very confused. None of them thought that Kevin would fall down easily.


    On the other hand, Kevin, who was following Livia and her friends, was thinking how he should deal with Sam. After some deep thinking he finally decided what to do. Before anything he needed to go with Livia to finish this mission. Only then he will feel relieved.


    _____________________


    Only around 5:00 p.m. Sam finally finished reading all the books. You can say that from 1:00 p.m. he was present in the library but finally finished reading all the books.


    Unfortunately this time he also did not find anything rted to the monster but he found something that made him very curious. There are some groups of Monsters that rarely show themselves but all of them are very powerful. Well unfortunately 200 years ago the Terraria for thest time got attacked by those Monsters but still, those saints were able to kill those monsters.


    Unfortunately Sam was unable to see any picture. Because of this, he was feeling quite lucky because what if this is the monster that he was looking for. But he cannot do anything at this moment. With that he decided to leave the library.


    Sometimeter he once again came back to his hotel room. But this time he noticed something that some people started to follow him the moment he left the library. Instantly he thought that those are the people from the warrior association. Because of this he became quite surprised and wasting no time he directly did not go back to his hotel room. After visiting Many ces and walking round and round he finally lost those people and came back to his hotel room.


    ''Now who are those people?'' Sam began to think that.


    _____________


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Health: (2800/2700)


    Spiritual energy: (4900/4900)


    Strength: E / 075


    Agility: E / 070


    Physique: E / 070


    Intelligent(mental power): E / 070


    Spirit: E / 070<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    [System remark:- S > A > B > C > D > E > F.]


    Grade: (C-) (early)


    Potential: Legendary


    Upgrade point: 0


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 more use)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade B)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade).


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)


    Regeneration (Grade B)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    Sometimeter he was now looking at his status screen. Even though he was in a different location, he cannot lose focus on increasing his strength. So he began to absorb those crystals that he got after killing those blue goblins. Not only that he also began to absolve the body of those goblins.


    ____________To be continued____________

 Chapter 387 387 - Mission

    2 dayster,


    For 2 days you can say Sam only focuses on the library and absorbing those crystals. Other than these, he did not do anything. Most likely because of this those three forces that observed him from the first day, decided to leave him alone.


    From the first Sam did not show any weird behavior and because of this all those three forces decided to leave him alone. But the oni king and his father, the previous king, got curious. Why is Sam spending most of his time in the library? Also through their subordinate they get to know that Sam was reading about various Monsters and not only that he was also reading about different worlds.


    Truly this makes both of them very curious. But one thing was that Sam wasn''t a threat to the Oni Kingdom. Because of this, both of them did not take any action against Sam.


    But one thing made both the king and his father very angry and jealous. Currently, Livia only talked about Sam. This makes both of them very jealous of Sam but what can they do? But they also thought that they needed to show that boy that he should not get too close to Livia. Because of this, the king told Livia to invite Sam to their house.


    Livia, who wasn''t aware of the true intention of his father and grandfather, began to jump in joy. After that with a happy smile she left the meeting room. But really trouble wasing toward Sam.


    _______________


    Now came back to our Sam, as usual after waking up in the morning he decided to go to the library. But he suddenly realized that right now he has only 1 gold coin left.


    ''Sigh, before anything I should hunt more monsters so that I can get more money from them.''


    Sam thought that. So he decided to postpone his reading time and decided to go hunting. So wasting no time he decided to go toward the Warrior association. Actually he wanted to know if he would get a mission or not. In Eden blue only when you will be an early D-grade warrior, you select a mission from the warrior association.


    Not only that previously he also heard that Livia epted missions. Now remembering that he became sure that he will get a mission in the warrior association.


    Sometimeter,


    When Sam finally reached the warrior association he could see many people present in the warrior association. Also if you are thinking that he was the first person to wear a mask all the time then you are wrong. There are many people who are also doing that so that they could hide their identity.


    Fortunately the receptionist who previously helped him to make his ID was now free. So wasting no time he quickly went toward her.


    "Hello, sir, how can I help you?"


    The Receptionist girl after noticing Sam quickly asked that. Well she also remembers this person because a few days ago this person came to them to make his ID and the most interesting thing was that he was a human. Even though she did not tell anyone about this, it really made her very curious why a human came to the Oni Kingdom.


    "Actually I wanted to know how I can ept the mission?" Westing no time Sam quickly said that to her.


    Hearing that, you can say that the receptionist girl became quite surprised but then she quickly told him how he can ept missions. Actually he needed to go to the first floor where he would find the mission board. After selecting the mission from the mission board, he needed toe back here and then show her that mission so that she could approve that.


    Sam quickly said thanks to her and after that he began to go toward the first floor of this Warrior association. Well just aftering to the first floor he realized that the first floor was also full with people like the ground floor. Also he already noticed the mission board and started to go toward that.


    Around that mission board you can see many floating screens where you will find the mission. For the first time he saw something like this. He also began to look at all the missions and after searching for some time he finally found a good mission.


    He quickly brought out his ID card then put that ID card on the mission screen instantly and that mission vanished from the mission board. Sam after that did not waste anymore time and already came to the ground floor and walked toward the receptionist girl.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    After some time waiting he finally came in front of the receptionist girl then handed over his ID card. The receptionist looks at the mission that he selected. But the moment she looked at the mission she got scared. Instantly she carefully looked at Sam and started to think if he had some brain loose or not.


    Sam did not select any normal mission. He selected a mission where he needed to kill 20 Fire bulls. Those Bulls are intermediate special grade monsters. On the other hand Sam was only an early special grade Warrior. So this already shows her that most likely Sam has some brain loss or something like that.


    "I think you selected the wrong mission." The receptionist girl did not approve of that and quickly said that to Sam.


    Hearing that Sam became confused. How could he select the wrong mission? He quickly takes back his ID card and then looks at the mission.


    ''Nah, this is the mission I selected. Why did she say that? '' Sam thought that and then told that receptionist girl,


    "This is the mission that I selected."


    After hearing that the receptionist girl became speechless. Most likely she was sure that he had some brain loss.


    "Mr, Sam¡­ I think this mission isn''t suitable for you. I think you underestimated those me Bulls. They are one of the dangerous Monsters." Instantly the receptionist girl said that to Sam.


    Finally some realize why she said that previously. Most likely she cannot believe that Sam will select a mission like this.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry I don''t have any brain loss or something like that. But I have the confidence so don''t worry about that." He said that to the receptionist girl and only after that the receptionist girl decided to approve that mission. After that she gave his ID card back but still asked him if he was ok with this mission.


    Sam just began tough after hearing that. But he once again said with a confident tone that she did not need to body because he loved his life more than anything and he also did not want to lose his life. After saying that he left the warrior association. The receptionist girl only sighs. She just hopes that he will be okay.


    ____________________


    After leaving the warrior association Sam began to go toward a restaurant. Before going for the hunting you wanted to eat something and he also wanted to buy something that he will eatter. But one thing was that from the moment he left the Warrior association, he already sensed some people were stalking him or you can say observing his movement.


    Even though these instantly make him very curious why those people are doing something like this but he did not show it. He normally went to the restaurant and then began to eat his food. After that he also ordered some food that he wanted to take.


    ''Are they waiting for me to leave the city so that they could deal with me?'' but even while he was eating he could feel those people. Actually all those people were using some kind of stealth technique, but unfortunately in front of Sam those techniques could not do anything. Because of this Sam already senses them.


    '' Haha¡­  most likely some people will die today.'' Sam thought that while going toward the entrance.


    But at this time suddenly he heard a voice that he was very familiar with. Because this is the voice of Livia. But really how did she get to know that he was here. At this time Sam turned around so that Livia wasing toward him, but she wasn''t alone. He can also see two maids with her. But the moment they got very close to him he became instantly alert. Because he cannot change the power of those maids.


    This instantly made him very nervous but he did not let it show. Most likely this was his second time feeling like this. Previously he felt this kind of pressure when those shadowguard of Aria used their pressure.


    It wasn''t that he was scared. Well, facing a situation like this makes him nervous for sometime, but then he instantly recovers. Because he has full confidence in his concealment technique. So because of this he once again showed his confidence while talking with Livia.


    ________To be continued_________

 Chapter 388 388 - Time To Catch Some People

    You have to say that this confidence makes those two maids quite surprised. Even though they did not release their full pressure but they still release some of their pressure and normally any special grade Warrior won''t be able to tolerate that pressure. Even if they try to not show any difort, one thing is that this sudden pressure will make them scared. But unfortunately for both of these people they did not see any fear. They solve the exactly opposite thing: confidence.


    ''Why is he so confident?'' You can say that both of these maids are now thinking of that question. Actually both of them were battle maids that the king selected for her daughter. Previously because Livia was very close to losing her life the king decided to appoint these two battle maids.


    So right now both of them always stay with her. Even if she didn''t want to, both of the battle maids will stay with her. This is the order from the king. Not only that, even Livia''s grandfather also supported this. So she did not have any other option.


    On the other hand Livia wasn''t aware of this. She was happy that she finally found him. As you know, her father told her to invite Sam. Because of this she was very happy and began to search for some. As usual she went directly to the library but she was surprised because she did not find Sam there. After that she began to look around but still did not find any clue about him.


    In the end she decided to visit the warrior association because yesterday Sam said that he needed to go hunting. After remembering that she directly went to the Warrior association. They are she get the information that Sam already epted the mission and most likely going to the forest.


    Because of this, she and the battle maids quickly came toward the city gate to find him and they finally found him.


    "Hello, Livia. Are you in a hurry?" Sam asks that.


    "Haha¡­ no, actually I was looking for you and because of this I came to the city gate while running." Livia said that.


    _________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally leaves the city gate. Before leaving the City he already agrees with Livia to go to her house.  The king invited him for dinner so it would look bad if he did not ept that. But still one thing was unclear  to him, that was, why those two maids were looking at him or you can say observing him that much. He doesn''t think he gets contact with Livia that much or he shows any I''ll intention, then why are both of them looking at him like this.


    ''Well, just forget about it.'' well he did not want to think about that matter so he justpletely stopped thinking about that and fully focused on going toward the barrennd. Actually those monsters live in the middle of the forest and the barrennd. So he just needs to find them.


    So he did not show any hurry and normally began to search for those Bulls. But at this time some of those people were very impatient . Well most likely they wanted him to get away from the crowded area as quickly as he could. As you know that Sam wasn''t alone who came to the forest or came to the barrennd for hunting or finding resources. Because of this you will find many other Warriors in this ce and because of this those people don''t want to do anything in front of those people.


    On the other hand, Sam could already guess that most likely those people wanted him to get away from the crowded area. Well actually he was doing that. There were two reasons behind this. One was to lure out those people and the second one was to find the Bull Monsters.


    But unfortunately still now he did not find any clue about those Monsters. Fortunately those Warriors present in the barrennd are present in the forest and didn''t hide information. They helped him and told him about the ce where he could find the Bull Monsters. After thanking them Sam once again begins to advance.


    But this time the important thing was that little while little he was leaving from that area. Not many people wanted to face those bulls and because of this not many people epted this type of mission.


    _________________


    "Finally the target was out of the crowded area. Boss this is the right time we should attack the target.," Suddenly one of them said to the boss of that group.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "Shut up, you fool. Don''t be careless about it. Even we attacked him because he was alone, but he still had his strength and without it good also created destruction that would attract those other Warriors. I don''t want anything to happen like this. Just wait a little when he will be more far away from those Warriors, only then it will be the right time to attack him." The boss of that group exined his n to everyone.


    You have to say that after hearing that his subordinates also agree with him and they decided that sometimeter they will start their action.


    Sometimeter,


    Even though Sam was confused all this time why those people still did not make any more but he waited patiently and without showing any sad or scary look. He just maintains his speed while searching for those bulls.


    But most likely that person and his teammates are unable to stay hidden. The moment they observe that they could not see any people around them except Sam they decided to instantly attack him.


    But they didn''t know that Sam was also just waiting for this. The moment he realizes that those people areing toward him. Sam suddenly stopped and did not move from his ce. Actually this could be an experiment for him so he wanted to know how much his senses have been increased.


    On the other hand you can see 10 people that already reach him and their attack is already about to reach him but at this time Sam instantly disappears from his ce. Before disappearing he suddenly looked toward those people and just smiled at them.


    You can say that instantly this makes all the people present there be alert. The main problem was that they didn''t even find any trace of Sam. Instantly this makes the boss of this group very hungry. Suddenly, at this time, his subordinates got separated because they also needed to search for his clue.


    But nobody knows that Sam from the start did not move from his ce. He just silently stood there and looked at the reaction of that person. Even though that person and his subordinates are trying to look for him, Sam just stands there quietly. At this time he notices something that don''t know why but he feels that previously that mask is the gang leader, even though wearing a mask on his face, but doesn''t know why Sam still feels that he previously heard this voice.


    He began to think about it. He was sure that he did not hear it in the warrior association or in his hotel. So it means he only hears this voice in the library. But here is the main question, who is this person? Nobody could answer that but as you know that Sam will find out about that answer.


    So right now aftering back to his senses, he decided not to waste anymore time. Right now you can see that the leader of this group is also searching for his clue.


    Sam instantly appears behind the person and wasting no time quickly attacks. Also because Sam wanted to make that person unconscious, he did not use his full power. Only 20% of his power and it was enough for him to make that person unconscious.


    But this wasn''t because those two people present in that ce became alert. Suddenly out of Nowhere their boss went unconscious. But they did not find anything or even notice anything. Because of this right now they are looking around themselves carefully but unable to find anything.


    Sam, on the other hand, put all the loot in his inventory and after that he decided to deal with those other people. Also one more thing was that only one person was enough so he was thinking of killing all those other people. But after some thinking he decided not to kill all the Warriors.


    He once again appeared behind those two people and wasting no time once again attacked both of them. Once again he did not kill them and just made them unconscious.


    As for those remaining people he will just kill them. So wasting no time he began to go toward those other people. Fortunately this ce wasn''t that crowded and because of this nobody saw how people were hanging down from the trees. Sam put them like that. Well their face facing the ground while their feet facing the sky.


    ___________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 389 389 - Information About The Client

    At first Sam thought he only captured some people and killed the remaining people but then he also needed to know about the main motive of these people so he directly did not kill them. For now he makes all of them unconscious and only after knowing their motive, he will decide his next movie.


    So right now he put all those people in the Same ce. He decided to wake up one of them so that he could interrogate that person. Wasting no time he quickly did that.


    The person suddenly moved his eyes and slowly started to open his eyes. But the moment he opened his eyes he instantly saw the face of Sam. That instantly made me very alert and he wanted to move from that ce. But unfortunately for him he is unable to move right now. Not only that he also realized that he was also unable to make any sound.


    At this time when Sam realizes that the person finally wakes up, wasting no time he begins to go toward that person, and aftering in front of him he begins to beat that person. Punch after punch, he was continuously punching that person. Also you should not underestimate those punches because he also uses the origin Spiritual energy while punching that person. So as you can expect, all of those punches were really painful.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now finally Sam stops punching. In front of him you can see a bloody person. Really those punches make his condition like this. Only then Sam removes the cloth from that person''s mouth.


    "If you are wondering why I suddenly attack you, then it is because I don''t want to hear any kind of nonsense. Now forget about the past ande back to the present. Tell me every detail. Why are you following me? Who gave you the order? I don''t want you to hide or lie to me about all of this information. If you think that I won''t be able to detect your lie then you are wrong, because I have a technique that could help me detect a lie."


    Sam said to him. He had to say that the person was scared. Most likely that person also did not expect a harmful and normal kid like Sam, could be this dangerous. Most likely from now on the name of Sam will give him trauma.


    " I .. cough¡­ .cough¡­ I am Jack. A normal mercenary. Anyone could hire me if they had money. Cough¡­ cough.. a few days ago a person suddenly came to us and gave us the money. He wanted us to follow you and if you had any chance to leave the city then attack you, and make you unable to walk. Me and my subordinates received that Mission 2 days ago. Cough¡­ cough¡­ even though my client tried to hide his identity but fortunately I was able to notice a clue about that person. That person has some rtion with Duke. I notice an emblem in his body that only belongs to the Duke and his family members."


    After saying that, that person began to cough blood once again. Sometimeter he stops and then begins to think once again. That person knows that currently he wasn''t in a condition to negotiate with Sam, also most likely Sam won''t let him go like this. Even if it tries to like Sam it will just kill him. After thinking very hard he suddenly remember two more details,


    "Ah¡­ yes, I remember two more details about that person. Most likely that person has green eyes,  and he was a special grade Warrior."


    The person finally finishes exining about his client. After that he became silent and worriedly looked at Sam. Now he knows that his life is in Sam''s hands. If he wanted to, he could easily kill him. So right now he did not say anything and just silently looked at Sam.


    On the other hand after getting all this exnation Sam begins to think. As he guessed, most likely all of this because he became familiar with Livia. It could be her brother or cousin or something like that who is targeting him. Most likely they did not like him and did not want Livia to talk to him.


    ''Because of this, I always preferred to stay away from the beautiful girls. Many problems will arise if you get close to a beautiful girl. Sigh,'' Sam thought that. Now he has begun to think about what to do with these people.


    Even though they did not have any motive to kill him, they still have the motive to break his hand and leg, and it will indirectly kill him. So after Sam thought some also decided to do the same thing. Only after deciding that he looks toward those people and wasting no time does he begin his punishment.


    One by one everyone of those people begin to wake up because of the pain. Sam was big and broke everyone''s one hand and one leg. After finishing all of this he did not waste anymore time and once again started searching for the bull.


    _________________


    Finally 1 hourter,


    Currently Sam Finally found those me Bulls. He needed to go Deeper in the barrennd only then he found those Bulls.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Most likely he also was the first person toe here. He could also see many more people around this ce. But well he could just focus on his own hunting. Fortunately the ce was filled with bulls and because of this, he decided to make some distance from those other fighters.


    Also one more important thing was that from the first he was using concealment techniques so nobody still noticed him. So he makes some distance from those other Warriors and then brings out his night (bow). Not only that, at this time he suddenly uses his telekinesis technique to stop the movement of the Bulls. After that, wasting no time, he quickly shot arrows. As usual the arrow was fully coated in origin spiritual energy and within intense speed it already pierced the head of one bull.


    So like this, Sam begins to kill many more Bulls. But you also should not understand bulls because killing them wasn''t easy. Sam is only able to kill them because of the origin spiritual energy. But still when those bulls noticed that they were unable to move their body they quickly set their whole body on fire and in this case it was very hard to kill them. But fortunately Sam did not feel that type of problem. When those bulls were fully allowed he only needed to use 3 arrows instead of one arrow. With that he could kill that bull.


    ________________


    "What!!!! What is happening? Who is killing those Bulls? Why is the number of those bulls decreasing?"


    Only sometimeter those Warriors finally notice that the number of the bulls already decreases. It instantly made everyone alert because they did not find anyone who killed them or they did not see if any bull left this ce.


    "Guys, do you know why something like this happens?" Those Warriors discussing this with each other.


    Actually the bulls were decreasing because some of the bulls already felt the danger of Sam and they quickly escaped from this ce. These bulls have intelligence and they could tell that most likely someone was an invisible and strong enemy killing them. Even though they were both headed, they also know when to retreat.


    Sam who also saw this became surprised by the intelligence of those monsters. But he just did not care about that. Because he alreadypleted his mission. But it doesn''t mean you will go back; he just started to follow those bulls.


    ___________________


    4 hourster,


    Finally Sam finished his hunting and he decided to leave this barrennd. Also he did not want to cancel the concealment technique. What if someone decided to attack him because he thought Sam was weak and they could get good loot from him. So to ignore that kind of thing, he decided to go toward the city.


    ''What should I bring when I go to Livia''s house?'' while going back toward the city he was thinking about this question. Most likely you will also meet the king and because of this, he wanted to give a good present to Livia. Sometimeter he decided that he will give Livia a full box of high grade health potion. Most likely this will be the best gift for her.


    Actually after reading all those books in the library some good easily tell that most likely his health potion that he bought from the system shop was high level them any other thing. So he decided to give her that.


    ________________


    When Sam was going toward the city he didn''t know that the culprit who previously appointed those mercenaries to attack him, was now waiting for the news.


    ______To be continued_______

 Chapter 390 390 - Kings Palace

    Currently the culprit behind all of this is now waiting in his room for the news. If Sam was here then he could easily recognise this person because it was Kevin who previously showed hatred towards Sam. As you can guess, Kevin was from the house of Duke. A few days ago he went to those mercenaries and told them what to do.


    Actually it was quite hard to move against someone inside of the city and because of this, he told those mercenaries to do everything when Sam left the city. After waiting for 2 days he finally today got the news that Sam did not go to the library and was going toward the warrior association.


    Not only that after leaving the warrior association Sam also went toward the city gate so it was naturally proven that Sam most likely epted some type of hunting mission.


    Kevin got all of this information from those mercenaries while they followed Sam from the shadows. Kevin after knowing all of this became very excited because finally he could punish that person. Actually he was very jealous of Sam. From childhood he wanted to marry livia but unfortunately she did not show interest in him. But suddenly after an incident she just started talking about Sam. Hearing about Sam from her mouth really makes him very jealous and at the same time very angry. So because of all of this he decided to do this.


    But unfortunately even after waiting almost 2 hours he did not get any information from those mercenaries.


    "Did something happen? Why aren''t they informing me? Did they still not get any chance to attack him?" Suddenly Kevin was thinking all of this. Unfortunately for him, even if he waited the whole day, he would not get any information from those mercenaries.


    _____________


    On the other hand, after finishing his mission Sam decided to look for other Monsters. Well he also needed to collect the crystals and also at the same time he also needed loot that would give him money. But most likely suddenly everyone present in the ce where they were hunting those me bulls became confused and curious. Because of this he stopped hunting those Monsters and decided to look for other Monsters.


    He did not need to go that far because sometimeter he once again found some Monsters. Vicious vulture, these were the monsters that he was able to find. These monsters were flying in the sky, and the most dangerous thing was that they could control the wind element. With that they could create airdes and attack any one from distance. Not only that they could create any type of attack with the wind element. The most powerful vultures could also create cyclones or any other dangerous attack like that.


    So Sam found those Monsters. Fortunately these Monsters were only intermediate special grade. Because of this, he will not have any problem.


    Once again Sam brings out his night (bow) and shoots toward those monsters. Everyone of those arrows were coated in origin spiritual energy. It was like they broke the sound barrier and instantly hit those Monsters, who were flying around in the sky. Most likely those Monsters previously searched for their prey. But unfortunately they came prey to Sam.


    With that he is easily able to kill two vultures at the same time. But this instantly makes those remaining vultures very alert. They instantly begin to use their wind element to protect themselves from the unknown enemy that they are unable to find. Right now those Monsters are using their full eye power to search for the enemy but unfortunately for them they won''t be able to notice Sam.


    Sam on the other hand once again shot 3 hours in the same direction. Those 3 arrows quickly hit a vulture one after another and this easily pierce the defense of that Monster and finally kill him.


    But Sam did not stop there; he instantly attacked one more monster. This time it was quite hard to kill that Monster because the monster was just dodging his arrows. But in the end he was finally able to kill that monster. Those remaining 10 vultures already escape from that ce the moment they realize that they won''t be able to fight against their unknown enemy.


    ''Sigh, they escape.'' Sam sighs the moment realize that that those monsters escape from this ce. Then he begins to collect the loots and the body parts of the Monsters.


    ______________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam was fighting some Monsters that looked exactly like a rabbit. But they weren''t.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    All of these Monsters called the bloody rabbit because they like to eat human blood. Not only that, killing them is also very hard because all of this Monster has the fast regeneration technique and because of these they quickly heal. Also one more thing was that all those monsters could use their own blood as weapons.


    Also had this time If you look at some then you can see that he was fighting those monsters while he wasn''t in his concealment mode. Well it was because all these Monsters were only early special grade monsters, and also as you know that using that technique could give him a headache and because of this he is right now fighting those Monsters without using the technique.


    But actually the main thing was that he didn''t even need that technique because he could just easily kill these rabbit Monsters. As you can see, those rabbit Monsters tried to attack him from a distance with their blood element but unfortunately Sam was faster than them. He also came toward them and then attacked them. This way he is already able to kill 30 of those vicious rabbits.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally stops. Well, it looked like it was time to go back. He still remembers that he needed to go to the house of the king because he invited him for dinner so he did not want to bete. Fortunately he still had time so wasting no time he quickly activated his concealment technique and then which was full speed started going toward the city.


    While going back toward the city he also noticed some people talking about some people among each other. At first Sam was just ignoring them while going to the city but more and more Warriors were talking about this so it also made him very curious.


    After searching for a good location he deactivated his straightening and then went toward one person and asked him what happened. The person did not get surprised because more and more people were talking about this. So he began to tell what was happening.


    Actually some time ago a Warrior group found some peopleying down near this area. All of them are badly injured and all of them have broken legs and broken hands. Most likely it was done by other people. Fortunately that group of Warriors quickly took action and because of this, those people were able to save their life.


    After hearing this Sam quickly understood what was happening. Most likely some group of warriors found those mercenaries and after that they helped those people to go back to the city.


    ''Tch¡­ really they were lucky.'' Sam thought that and after that he once again started going toward the city. Well actually he did not care about those mercenaries. But really they were lucky and because of this, they were able to save their life.


    But the most interesting thing was that those people who saved the lives of those people thought that it was the work of the Terrorist group. Really this is the most funny thing Sam hears. But he did notment on this.


    __________________


    Around 6:00 p.m. Sam left the hotel room. If you look at him right now then you can see that he was wearing a ck coat, ck suit and ck shoes. Previously Livia told him that she would pick him. Because of this Sam was now going toward the Library  where she was waiting for him.


    After sometimeter when he reached the library he could already see that she was waiting for him near the library. Also this time she and the maid weren''t present there. With them you can also see many guards. Livia was quite cute right now, but Sam instantly began to observe his surroundings and started thinking. He was thinking about the previous trouble that he was likely to face because of her. So he also wanted to know if you will face more problems. As you know, beautiful girls mean disaster.


    Most likely Livia notices him. So, she began to wave her hand. Sam also waves back and then walks toward her. After that they get inside of the car and then begin to go toward the king''s pce.


    He has to say that even though everyone present in the Terraria mostly focuses on hunting and other things rted to the warrior, they still have cars and other advanced things. It was just that they did not use these things that much.


    ________To be continued_______

 Chapter 391 391 - Talking To The Strongest Warrior

    Finally Sam came to the king''s pce. But the most surprising thing was that even though this pce was also made of titanwood, the whole architecture style was truly beautiful. So Sam became very amazed by the beauty of the pce.


    But instantly he came back to his senses when Livia told him to follow her. Only then Sam came back to his senses and began to follow her. On the other hand, Livia and her maid understand that Sam has be amazed by the beauty. Because of this, they smile a little.


    Only after some time did they go to the hall room of the pce. Well, Livia told him that the king was busy, but he wanted to meet him at the dinner table. Until then, her grandfather wanted to meet him.


    Sam was surprised once again, why did the previous king also want to meet him? Is this because he also wanted to say thank you? You don''t know anything and because of this he could just only agree with her. After that Livia told him to wait there, and she will bring her grandfather.


    So, currently only Sam and Emma were present in the hall room. You can say that a awkwards atmosphere was created in the hall room. Just looking at Emma, you can tell that she was interested in talking but Sam could feel that she was observing him. This makes him very curious why she is observing him like this?


    So unable to hold his curiosity he decided to ask her about it. But when he was about this she justpletely ignored him and did not say anything. Sam could just sigh. Really, he wasn''t good at handling such a girl.


    But fortunately that situation quickly broke because Livia, sometimeter, came back with her grandfather. But instantly Sam once again felt that he was being observed by someone and not only that he also felt a powerful aura present in that room.


    Naturally he can guess, it was the grandfather of Livia who observed him like this. Also if it was any other normal people then you will get immediately scared by that powerful aura. But fortunately it was Sam and he did not show any difort in his face. He naturally greeted that old man.


    On the other hand Perry, the grandfather of Livia and the strongest warrior of this Kingdom, gets surprised when he notices that Sam did not show any difort in his face. Because not everybody is able to stay calm even in this situation. So after noticing this he began to smile.


    "Haha¡­ Sam boy, sit down." He told Sam to sit down.


    " First of all, I really wanted to thank you for saving our princess from danger. She was really a proud full girl who did not want to bring any guard while going to the hunting mission. So if it isn''t for you then anything bad good happened to her. " Perry began to tell all of this to him.


    Naturally after hearing all of this Livia was embarrassed Sam just smiled. After that Perry also asked about his home and his situation.


    Only at this time Sam knew that he could not just make some lie because any powerful person could feel his lie.


    "Actually I came from a human city but unfortunately due to circumstances I suddenly appear here and don''t know how to go back to my city." Like this he began to answer Perry''s question with half truth and half lie.


    On the other hand if he decided to lie then Perry could easily detect that. So he has a good impression of Sam because even though that kid wasn''t telling him the whole truth, at least he wasn''t lying about his condition.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry about that. Our oni race has a good rtionship with the human so you could use the teleportation portal to go back to the human City.perry said that.


    Sam just smiled a little. Even though he could go back to the human city, he won''t be able to go back to his home. But the main thing was that he should trust these people and tell them that he came from another world. As you know that some did not trust anyone that easily and because of this he did not tell anyone about his real situation.


    "Also, I heard from Livia, that you are very interested in the information rted to the Monsters and the other worlds." Suddenly Perry asked that.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "Yes, actually I am very excited to get the information about these two things." Sam also said that he was interested.


    " Ha ha¡­ But unfortunately you won''t be able to find all the books rted to the other world and the monster in the library. Hmm¡­" after saying that he began to think about something very deeply. On the other hand Sam naturally guesses how Perry got to know about him. Most likely it was Livia who told him.


    "Hmm¡­ how about this, you can use the royal library because you will find more books in this library than the normal library. If you really wanted to know about these two things then you should visit the trousers in the library. But the restriction was that you cannot learn those forbidden techniques present in the library.


    "Perry


    "Haha¡­ consider this a gift from me." After saying that Perry gave him a coin. It waspletely different from a gold coin or any other coin because it was called the royal coin and with that he could easily enter the royal library.


    "Really¡­ Thank you very much. I don''t even know how to express my gratitude to you." He said that sincerely because right now there could be a chance that he finds about the monster in the royal library and also he could find about the way to go back to his. So with this he decided to go to the Royal library but not right now.


    At this time, Perry talks more about his Kingdom and the people present here and you have to say that at the end he has a good impression of Sam. That boy did note to this Kingdom with any bad intention and just looking at the team you can tell that he was now quite helpless. It''s really interesting how he suddenly came here and was unable to go back to his City. But sometime something like this happens and because of this he also thinks most likely because of Sam''s bad luck this happens.


    ___________________


    Finally sometimeter Sam and the others decided to go to the dining room. Even though the king was busy, every night he came back to his home for dinner. Sam already meets him and the king already asks about his situation and condition like Perry. But like before Sam answers all of them while staying calm.


    Also at this time the king gets to know that some love books and his father already give him the permission to go to the Royal library. For a moment he became very angry that his father allowed him to go to the library but when he got to know that he could read any book except those forbidden techniques and other techniques, only then the king sighed.


    1 hourter, right now Livia is taking him toward the royal library. With this he coulde back to this ce anytime without getting lost. You have to say that the royal library was much bigger than any other library and you can also find many books in this library. Also the ground floor was filled with those types of books rted to the monster and the others.


    Sam did not have any n to learn anybat technique or any other technique, he could just read those books rted to the Monsters and the others. So without wasting any time Sam decided to take some of those books rted to the monster. Because the king told him to stay in the pce for today so at this time Sam could just read all these books.


    "But what is the problem with this family? That king and her wife, the grandmother and her grandfather, everyone from the start observing me like I am sometype of rare animal." Sam was thinking about this.


    _________________


    Sometimeter when Sam and Livia went back to their own room, they don''t know a meeting was helding on the hall room. The meeting was between the king and his father. The queen and the previous Queen also present in that meeting room. Now all of them are talking about Sam and his character.


    "I can tell you that by his behavior he has a good character. But the most interesting thing was that even after facing my pressure he is showing his confidence." Perry told that to everyone. You have to say that after hearing that every one of them became surprised because Perry was the strongest person of this Kingdom but Sam was still able to maintain his calmness in front of him.


    _______To be continued__________

 Chapter 392 392 - Finally Found The Information

    "It isn''t that he didn''t lie, but at the same time he is also telling us that truth. It is just that he did not tell us the whole truth. Previously he told Livia that he lost his ID card but as we know that hepletely lied about it. But most likely he also understands that we cannot lose our ID card. This makes me curious why he did not have an ID card." Perry said that.


    Currently, the king and his father Perry were discussing about Sam. It is clear that he did not have any bad intention toward Livia or the kingdom. Also because of this both of them did not show any hostility toward him. But really it makes both of them interested to know about the whole truth of Sam.


    Previously, Livia told them that she met him in the forest of the dead. He suddenly appears and then saves them. So both of them were thinking if some leave around the forest of the dead. Well because in every City or in everything then it was natural that every person when they reach the age of 16, they will get an ID card. But some did not have the ID card beforeing to this Kingdom so it was naturally a method to be curious about.


    "Well, forget about it. When he will be able to trust us, he will tell us everything. But I am more interested in why he wanted to find out about Monsters and also the other world. I don''t know if you noticed or not but it looked like he was in a hurry." Perry said that. Only then the King became surprised because he previously did not notice that. Actually previously the king only observed Sam''s intention, so other than that hepletely ignored the other things.


    ________________


    When both father and son are discussing about Sam, Sam, on the other hand, spends his time in the royal library. Compared to the normal library, the collection in the royal library was naturally very big and most likely here you will get the information that he wanted to find.


    Livia and Emma, already left the library. Right now only Sam was present in the library. Most likely he also wanted to spend his whole night here.


    One by one Sam already read many books. He didn''t even know when he fell asleep. He only woke up the next day when Livia came to the library and woke him up.


    ________________________


    2 dayster,


    For two days Sam only spent his time in the Royal library. He also eats his lunch and dinner here. Well, this even makes the king and his father very curious. Because nobody could have expected that Sam would spend two days in the library. They really wanted to know what information he was searching for. Is the information really that important or does he just love reading?


    On the other hand,


    Sam, Livia and Emma were in the library. Both Sam and Livia were reading books while Emma was watching over them.


    Sam at this time was seriously looking at that big book. It is called The Monster encyclopedia. This is the part 4 that he was reading up. But one thing was that he almost lost hope that he would find any information about that Monster that he previously saw in his dream.


    ''The goddess told me that this Monster is approaching toward the Eden blue. So, this Monster naturally exists but then why can I find any information about it? Is it some kind of rare or legendary Monster that did not have any information?'' Sam was thinking all of this while reading this book.


    As he expected he did not find anything in this book. He just sighs. Even after reading all of this book he did not find any information about the monster and that made him very frustrated.


    ''Today will be thest day I will spend my time in this library. I also need to focus on my level because I also need to fight that Monster that was approaching toward the Eden blue.'' Sam decided that today will be hisst day, if he did not find any information about the monster today then he would only focus on leveling up.


    With that decided, he once again focused on reading. On the other hand even if Livia wasn''t interested in reading, but to spend her time with Sam, she also decided to read some books. But even with that she quickly gets bored. But when she looked at Sam she could see that he was very serious about reading. Naturally it also made her very curious to know why he was this much serious.


    But like others she was unable to hold back her curiosity. So, she asked him,


    "Sam, which type of Monster are you searching for? I can see that you did not find anything about the monster and be very frustrated. You can tell me about this and I can also help you." She said that to him.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Sam who waspletely focused on his reading only then came back to his senses.


    "Actually, I am trying to search for a very big Dragon. Most likely it was some kind of legendary or ancient monster. Because of this I still haven''t found any information." Sam told her about the description of that Monster that he previously saw in his dream.


    After hearing that, Livia quickly gets up and then begins to go after. Thispletely made Sam confused but he decided to wait for her.


    5 minutester,


    Livia came down from the second floor with three books. Also the most interesting thing was that those three books looked very old. This once again makes Sam very curious. Most likely Livia already guess his curiosity, so she told him,


    "Well, these are the oldest books in our library about monsters. We can try to find it in these 3 books. I don''t know if we will find about that Monster or not, but if it really was a legendary or an ancient monster then we will definitely find that Monster description in these 3 books." Livia told him.


    You can say that just after hearing that Sam became very happy that he almost hugged her. But, he controls himself. Because instantly he felt a killing intention from behind and that was Emma who instantly wanted to kill him.


    "Cough.. cough¡­ Thanks for your help Livia." He thanks her.


    " Haha.. it is ok. Well me and Emma could also help you." Livia said that. After that all three of them begin to search for 3 old books. Emma and Livia already find many monsters that look like dragons, but they weren''t the monsters that Sam was searching for. So like that all three of them looked at the books.


    You can say that after 2 hours, Sam and Livia already finished reading the first and second part, but unfortunately they did not find anything. Sam also already lost his hope to find the Monsters.


    ''Most I should not waste my time searching for that monster. I should only focus on leveling up and at the same time also find a way to go back home.'' Sam was not thinking about this when suddenly Emma brought her book in front of him.


    Sam subconsciously looks at the picture of the monster. Instantly came back to his senses and almost jumped out of his seat. Looking at the surprise reaction you can say that both Emma and livia became surprised because who could have thought that he would jump out of his seat.


    If you are wondering why he did that because finally they found the description about that monster. The picture that Sam was seeing in the book looked exactly like the monsters that he saw in his dream. Both Emma and Livia also became curious, because of this both of them also came close to him and then began to look at the details of the Monsters. Now all three of them begin to read the details of the Monster.


    [ This is the prime dragon. This dragon also has a second name and they are called the eater. Everyone of this dragon will have the power of a peak mortal grade monster, the moment they are born. After that they will begin to grow in power. If you give them enough time then they could also be mythical Monsters. Also only some of those monsters were able to reach the cosmic level.


    These Monsters were also very intelligent. They always stayed hungry and wanted to eat everything that came into their path.


    Some of these monsters did not have the potential to reach higher levels and they also needed outer help like the core to reach theary level. But after reaching theary level everyone of this Monster will evolve and even if they did not have that much potential, they could easily breath through to the next grade.


    The most dangerous thing was that these monsters could release the cosmic rays. This is the most powerful attack. This attack uses all of their spiritual energy and creates the cosmic ray. Even when they did not reach theary level they could easily destroy a with this single attack.


    5000 years ago when the Terraria first got attacked by the Monsters, these prime dragons also attacked this. But fortunately those Monsters were weak at that time and the Warriors were able to kill those Monsters.]


    _________To be continued___________

 Chapter 393 393 - Getting Information

    You have to say that after reading the description about that monster, Emma, Livia, and Sam be surprised. Emma and Livia were the one who became more surprised than Sam.


    "Hmm¡­ Really, those prime dragons were very powerful. So this is the monster that you are searching for?" Unexpectedly all three of them suddenly hear a voice from behind.


    Instantly all three of them became surprised and then quickly turned around. The moment they turned around they saw that it was the king and Perry, who were standing behind them.


    "Father and grandfather, what are you doing here? And when did youe here?" Livia suddenly asked.


    But you can say that Sam also wants to ask that question to both of them. You can say that all this time he was very alert about his surroundings but still he did not feel both of them when they came to the Royal library. Not only that he can also tell by Emma''s expression that she also most likely did not since both of them.


    "Haha¡­ when you kids were searching for the monster, we came here. " The king said that after he turn toward Sam and said,


    " I have to say that even me and my father were surprised because we never thought you were searching for these prime dragons. Even though I don''t know why you are searching about this monster, I wanted to tell you that because these dragon''s were very powerful and like to attacks. Thousand years ago war broke out between those prime dragons and the people from the Terraria. Even though it was quite hard, finally the people from the Terraria at the time found the nest of those prime dragons. With that dayunch A surprise attack and with that they killed many of the prime dragons. After that you can say that you will really hear about those prime dragons."


    " Actually not only as but many other civilizations also know about the prime dragons but fortunately at that time we were able to win the war. But still we are unable to kill all the dragons and the Dragon King that time is also able to flee from that. Even though we tried to search for those dragons, in the end we did not find anything. But one thing was for sure that still now those dragons were alive. In recent years we are able to hear many cases where those prime dragons attack a. Not only that, we also get to know that the prime dragon likes to attack any when it is very close to evolution."


    The king exins all of this information about the prime dragons. These were the information that he will not find in the book. But suddenly at this time Sam asked the king,


    "Sir, do you know if these Monsters have any kind of weakness or not?"


    The king had to say that he also became surprised by this sudden question. Not only him but those other people present in the library also became surprised by the sudden question.


    "Well, actually this Monster has one type of weakness. Before I tell you I should tell you about that monster characteristic. The Monster has a very high defense that any normal weapon or any type of normal attack could not do anything to him. It was like his whole body was made of some kind of armor. But fortunately even though his whole body was protected by the armor, his main weakness was his neck area. Only this area wasn''t protected by some kind of armor or something like this."


    " If you ever face this kind of Monster then you just need to attack their neck and it will kill those monsters instantly. Haha¡­ also don''t worry if that Monster decides to attack our then it will be dead instantly. Previously even when we did not have this much power we were able to win against those monsters but suddenly we have many power houses that could kill those monsters easily." This time it wasn''t the king who answered, it was the previous King Perry who told all of this.


    After hearing this you can say that Emma and Livia begin to smile. They were really proud that they were born in Terraria. But at this time Sam was thinking something. Most likely the king and the previous King also not is that and that asked Sam what he was thinking about.


    "Can you tell me about the evolution of a? What is this evolution and what would happen after the evolution?" Sam asks that.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    " Well, as you know that monsters will only appear on thoses which awaken The Spiritual energy. So the core will absorb The Spiritual energy from the first day. At first everything will be normal but there will be a day when the core won''t be able to absorb more spiritual energy. This will be the start of the evolution. After that the core of the wille outside and the whole will evolve with that core. When the evolves, the living being present on that will also benefit from that. They will also evolve with the."


    " But this''s evolution also came with him. Well in this process the defense of the whole became less around the core. If the warrior of the did not defend that core then anybody from the other coulde to that and steal that core. Well, you won''t be able to directly steal that core but with a special device you could do that. But this will instantly bring disaster to that."


    " Everyone living on the will get affected by that. Most likely every living being will die because the atmosphere will not be able to support the living being on that. On the other hand, that person who was able to get the core, could use that core as a crystal and then absorb the power of that core. Normally only those people who did these were the people who were very close to breaking through toary grade. Absorbing the core will instantly power anyone. That person or that Monster will instantly be aary grade Monster or Warrior."


    The king finally finished his exnation about the evolution process of any. Really after hearing all this information Emma, Livia and Sam say thanks to both of them. Really today they get to know a lot of information that they previously did not know.


    Butpared to Emma and Livia, Sam was the one who got more benefit from the information. He finally gets to know about the reason and the monster that will be attacking his. With that finally he could prepare himself to face that monster. So finally it was time for him to focus on hunting to increase his power.


    Most likely the prime Dragon will be near theary level so if he wanted to win against that Monster then he also needed to reach that level. So because of this it was time for him to focus on hunting and power up.


    Well he still has to find the way where he will be able to go back to his home but he had 3 years time before that Monster will appear and because of this he wasn''t in a hurry. Even though he knows that his family, friends and teacher will be worried about him, if staying here could make him powerful then he will do that.


    ''Even though the king did not say that but most likely before any reached the limit and the evolution process started, the core put the restriction on the whole, most likely because of this nobody powerful from the other able to interfere with that or attack that. Most likely the core will restrict the power level of that person.'' Sam thought this.


    Actually he was right. He could find this information in the book. Well because of the restriction or protection nobody from others was able to attack the Eden blue until now. Even though those people were powerful, the moment they came to Eden blue, their power level would be restricted. Because of this all this year nobody from the other did anything to Eden blue.


    But right now they were waiting for the evolution process to start. As you know, they came to Eden blue because the moment the process started they were instantly able to use their full power and with that they could instantly take that core with them. Also because of this, many of those people already went back to their. The Eden blue still have the restriction and staying on that will not make them any stronger.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    After finally getting the information Sam already wanted to go outside of the city but it was already night time and he could only go outside tomorrow.


    __________To be continued________

 Chapter 394 394 - Hunting

    Next day,


    Early in the morning, Sam left the king''s pce. Even though Livia wanted toe with him, but without telling her he left the pce. As you know that while hunting he did not want the extra burden. While hunting he just wanted to only focus on hunting.


    Well but before going to the barrennd or the forest he went to the warrior association because he wanted to see if you would find any type of mission or not. He already decided to go outside to kill those Monsters so why not ept some mission while killing those Monsters?


    So aftering to the warrior association he began to look at the mission board seriously. After looking at the mission board he finally found the mission and wasting no time he quickly took those to the mission. One mission was to kill those blue goblins and the other one was to kill those me Bulls.


    Well, you can say that once again the receptionist asked him if he really wanted to take the mission where he needed to kill those me Bulls. But well what can she say because in his record she could also see that he also previously epted this type of mission.


    After everything was over he finally decided to go outside of the city. But one more thing was that before going out of the city he also observed the surroundings carefully but did not find anyone following him this time. You should know that he did not forget about the previous matter where someone hired those people toe after him. He still remembers that case and he is also trying to find out about the main mastermind behind all of this. But it seems the mastermind was quite careful and because of this it took him some time to figure out the identity of the true mastermind.


    Well now came back to the main matter,


    Wasting no time using his full speed and concealment technique, he quickly came to the forest of death. But here he needed to search for those blue goblins because as you know those goblins were very sneaky. Also, one more thing was that in this forest you will not only find these blue goblins but you will also find many other Monsters.


    It wasn''t that he had any problem with those other monsters. Even if it is another Monster but that doesn''t matter to him he will just kill them in order to collect the loot. He didn''t even advance that much, at this time he instantly met some new Monsters. Those Monsters looked like frogs. Butpared to any normal frogs they were bigger in size, not only that the color of those frogs was also purple.


    Fortunately, Sam already knew about these Monsters they called the poisonous frogs. Their whole body was full of poison, not only that they could also split poison from their mouth. They could also shoot poison balls from their mouths. Any humans needed to be careful while fighting them. Even if they got lightly touched by those frogs, it will immediately affect that human.


    But, Sam was fully covered from head to toe. Not only that he also got a technique called poison resistance. This was a passive technique that he recently got from his system shop. Well, yesterday he bought this skill because of the poisonous Monster that he will face in the forest or in the barrennd.


    Well as usual because of his concealment technique those Monsters are unable to notice him so Sam uses this chance to attack those Monsters. Also, those frogs were early C-grade monsters. The most effective way to kill them was to attack them with his fire control technique.


    He suddenly circtes his origin spiritual energy and after that, he created many small fireballs. But as usual, you should not underestimate the fireballs because the color of those fireballs was green.


    Wasting no time,


    He instantly shot those fireballs toward those frogs. In front of him, those ten frogs instantly got hit by the fireballs. None of them even get the chance to react. They can only let out a painful cry and after that, their whole body got burned by the mes.


    Most likely an old river was near that area and because of this, Sam could see those frogs. But the most interesting thing was that most likely the painful cry from those frogs also attracted the attention of those other Monsters.


    Suddenly, at this time from his left direction. Instantly he saw that some snake-like monster instantly came out from that direction. Most likely they got attracted after hearing the sound of those frogs.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Right now if you look at the snakes then you will see that they did not have that much bigger sizepared to any normal snake. Well, you can say that they have average size. Not only that, but these snakes were also poisonous. They called the snake poisonous and the poisonous frog was their favorite food. Also, they were the only monsters that did not get affected by those poisonous frogs.


    You can say that the moment Sam noticed those Monsters he did not stay ideal and created more fireballs. He once again shoots those fireballs toward those snake Monsters. Once again those monsters could only feel that something hot wasing toward them but before they could react they already started to burn after getting hit by the fireball. Those snake monsters also let out a painful cry before their body got burned by the Fire.


    Sam at this time quickly collects all the loot. Well, he quickly collected those wounds because he could also see that many warriors seemed to starting in his direction. They also seem to get attracted just after hearing the sound of those Monsters. Because of this Sam quickly collected the loot and then left that ce. Also if you are wondering why he used the fireballs toward those Monsters because what if their body could be useful? But actually, it wasn''t. They only use those poisonous frogs or those poisonous snakes to make poison.


    Sometimeter Sam already found that old river and he was now advancing while following the river. Even if it was for those Monsters but besides the river you will find many Monsters like those animals. Because of this, he was not following the river while advancing toward the deeper forest.


    You have to say that his luck was quite good because he also found more poisonous frogs and those poisonous snakes. Not only that but he also found some Bluefish. Usually, those blue fish only have bigger sizespared to any normal fish but they also have a special attack called the water bullet. They could attack anyone with those water bullets from a distance and you have to say that the water bullets were very dangerous and could also kill you.


    But as usual, he did not get spotted by those Monsters and he used this chance to attack those Monsters. But this time he decided to attack those blue fish with his arrows. Even though the fire could kill those Monsters but you can use the body of the bullet fish and not only that but those fish could also use the water to save their life. Because of this, the only best way to kill those monsters is to use his arrows.


    ____________________


    It was been 4 hours,


    In these 4 hours, you can say that Sam met many of those snakes, frogs, and those blue fish. Unfortunately, even though he still did not find those blue goblins, it doesn''t mean that he did not get benefits after killing those other Monsters. Not only that but he also found the clue that most likely those blue goblins were very close to him. So because of this, it won''t be long before he will finally kill those blue goblins. Also, one more thing was that most likely if he advanced more then he would meet powerful Monsters.


    But one thing is that he will not meet those Epic level or thoseary level monsters in this forest. But he still needs to be careful around this forest. Currently, he was still in the outer area of the forest and because of this only meeting those special-grade monsters.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    Sam was now eating some food. He didn''t even eat his morning breakfast and because of this, he was now hungry. But at the same time, he is also very alert about his surroundings.


    Sometimeter, after everything was finished he finally got up and once again began to advance or you can say search for those blue goblins. But as you know that he already found the clues so it did not take that much time to find those blue goblins. But most likely he wasn''t alone who found these blue goblins. Many other Warriors also found out about this and right now all of them were fighting those blue goblins.


    Even though Sam became quite disappointed when he found those other Warriors, he knew that even in the situation he needed to kill those goblins. So wasting no time he also began to shoot his arrows toward those Goblins.


    ________To be continued_________

 Chapter 395 395 - Killing Those Blue Goblins

    As you know, the body of those blue goblin''s could be useful and because of this he was only using his bow and arrow to kill them. But he also needed to be careful about those other Warriors because what if they wanted to take his loot. Because of this he is also very careful about those Warriors.


    But yeah he already came far away from those Warriors and right now he was killing those goblins from a distance. Also one more thing was that you can only see if you goblins in front of Sam. Most likely those other Warriors already killed most of the goblins and because of this only this few goblins remain.


    But Sam did not get disappointed because if he wasn''t wrong then the reinforcement of those goblins would be here in a few minutes. So you can say that he was just waiting for the reinforcement of those goblins.


    After collecting all the loot and those dead bodies Sam once again begins to wait for the reinforcement of those goblins. Well actually he also doesn''t need to wait that long because only 10 minutester he could hear the voice of those goblinsing out from the forest.


    Also one more good thing was that many of those Warriors already left this ce so right now only few of them are waiting for those reinforcements. Sam is already preparing to shoot his arrow.


    Using his spiritual vision the moment he was able to spot those goblins he began to continuously shoot his Arrow toward those goblins. Using his new technique as you know the power of those arrows already increased but not only that he could also make those arrows invisible. So right now all those invisible deadly arrows coated with the origin spiritual energy, very quickly came in front of those goblins and then pierced through their skull.


    It was like those arrows didn''t even feel any resistance against those goblins and it easily pierced through their skull. One by one many of those goblins fell down. Will it almost alert those other goblins but they are also unable to defend themselves. Sam already shot his arrows towards goblins and as usual they also fell down in the ground.


    Well you should know that the goblins did note from only One direction they came towards this ce from different directions. Sam was only killing those goblins in One direction so from those other directions you can see those blue goblins wereing. Those other Warriors didn''t even get the chance to look toward that direction where Sam instantly killed those goblins.


    The moment those blue goblins appear they already spot those warriors. Wasting no time those goblins instantly start attacking those Warriors and because of this, those Warriors were also busy defending themselves from those goblins.


    ____________________


    After 20 minutester,


    You can say that the situation bes stable for those Warriors. Only now were they able to handle the situation properly and those goblins did not have the upper hand right now. But in this process those three groups of Warriors already became injured.


    But at this time they only know one thing that they needed to leave this ce. Nobody could guarantee them that no more reinforcement woulde toward them. If the reinforcement of the goblins once again toward them, then it could be a disaster for them. Their condition has already be very serious and right now they need to get away from this ce.


    ___________


    "Guys, get ready we will be leaving this ce. Those other two groups already left this ce. Now we are the only ones left. Our situation is very bad and to leave this ce. We could stille back here after healing up but before that we need to go to a safe ce to recover." Suddenly the captain of the third group began to tell all of his teammates to get ready to leave this ce.


    As you hear those other two groups already left this ce and now only they were left in this ce. After hearing that all of his teammates get up from the ground and wasting no time they begin to leave the ce.


    But at this time suddenly one of his teammate said that,


    "Captain, don''t know why but previously I am sure that I also notice goblins that also appear in thete direction. But did you notice that we did not see any monsters that came from the left direction? Is there any group of warriors who killed them but I don''t think so I saw any group of people in that direction. Really it makes me very curious but I also could be wrong about this."<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    " No you are not wrong. Previously I also noticed some monsters that appeared in the left direction but after that I did not see any monsters that came from that left direction toward us. Well I was just above to go to that direction but before that we got attacked by those blue goblins and because of this I also forgot to look toward the direction. But I am also sure that I didn''t notice or see any group of Warriors that went toward that direction. So that means something most likely happening in that direction."


    At this time the captain of that Warrior group also said that.


    Really after hearing that everyone present in that Warrior group became surprised and also very curious. What could be the reason that those monsters from the left direction did note toward them.


    Is there any kind of new Monster that hunts goblins? Or those goblins killed by some unknown group of Warriors. Right now all of those people are thinking this type of question but they still did not stop their escape.


    On the other hand the main culprit behind all of this is also resting. You also deactivated his concealment techniques. After killing all of those goblins that came in front of him he was now resting so that he could also kill those next group of goblins. Well he was sure that more goblins wille toward this ce because previously he had already seen goblins calling for reinforcement.


    So because of this he was now preparing himself to face those goblins. Also the good thing was that he was now alone in this ce. Those Warriors already left this ce and most likely they were also injured. With that Sam bes sure that those people will note back to this ce that quickly. But he cannot guarantee that more warriors will note to this ce.


    ''Well, right now I could only increase the number of my arrows so that I could kill as many goblins as I can. But at the same time I also needed to remember about those loot so that those other Warriors did not steal my loot.'' Sam thought that while he was resting.


    ________________________


    "Captain, let''s go back. We are ready to face those goblins once again. We still need to kill many more goblins to fulfill our mission and most likely those reinforcements have alreadye." Previously that group of Warriors who left that ce because they wanted to recover, right now once again wanted toe back to this ce to hunt those goblins once again.


    The captain also agrees with his teammates and because of this, they begin to go toward that direction. But one thing was that the more they came toward that ce the more they became surprised. They almost reached their previous ce but they did not find any goblins in that ce.


    But looking at the surroundings they could tell that most likely something already happened and those goblins got killed. That whole ce got destroyed by something or by someone. They could also see the blood of those goblins.


    Instantly all of this makes them very speechless and surprised at the same time. What could happen to this ce? When they left this ce, it wasn''t like this. But most likely something happened and because of these the surrounding ce got destroyed like this.


    They could see those trees that were still burning, and they could also see those big holes in the ground. Also looking at the scenes they could tell that all of this happened recently. Because of this they became more alert.


    "Quickly guys, try to search around and see if we could find any clue or not." Quickly at this time the captain told his teammates to look around.


    But unfortunate for that team the main culprit behind all of this already left this ce. He already came very far away from that ce.


    Also if you are wondering what happened then it was like this, previously those blue goblins did note alone in that ce but with them some Goblin captains also came to that ce. So right now a big battle urs in that ce.


    _______________To be continued_____________

 Chapter 396 396 - Rock Monkeys

    Unfortunately that group of warriors in the end did not find any clue about what happened. This made that group confused and surprised at the same time. This really wanted to know what happened when they weren''t in this ce.


    At this time other people also appear in that ce to kill those blue goblins. But like the first group, those people also became surprised and confused at the same time. They also did not see any blue goblins nor could any monster in that ce but they could see the destroyed ground of that ce.


    "Did you guys do this?" Those new Warriors ask that group of Warriors


    "Haha¡­ we also just recently came here but after that we did not find anything and our situation is also like yours. We also try to search for any clues. But we did not find anything and because of this we also don''t know what happened here. But looking at those destroyed ground, those trees and everything, I can tell that most likely a big battle happened. This could be a fight between two Monster parties or a fight between a group of Warriors versus a group of Monsters." The captain of that group of Warriors said that.


    Actually not only him but everyone thinks that it was a fight between a group of Warriors and a group of Monsters. But what if they get to know that this wasn''t the case because all of this happened between a warrior and those monsters.


    ______________________


    Now at this time our main culprit already went far away from that ce. Currently he is also facing a new group of Monsters. Those Monsters called the Bloody rabbits. Well these rabbits have the same size as normal rabbits but the moment they notice any Warriors they willpletely change and instantly attack those Warriors.


    These monsters were very dangerous because they could also use their blood as weapons. Not only that but these Monsters could suck your blood from your body like a vampire. But unfortunate for those Monsters they didn''t even get to know who was killing them.


    Not only those early C-grade Monsters, but even those intermediate C-grade Monsters also present there. If it decided to find normali then it could be time consuming and he could also get injured. Because of this, he was fighting those monsters using his concealment technique.


    He didn''t even give the monster a chance to run away and instantly kill those Monsters. The body of those rabbits could be useful and because of this Sam also did not use the fire control technique. He was killing those monsters using his sword.


    Like this you can say that he already killed 50 of those Monsters and finally after killing thest Monsters he began to collect the loot and those dead bodies. After collecting everything the moment he was about to leave that ce, he suddenly felt something.


    Instantly he looked toward that deep forest. Well he decided not to go that far into the forest. He already came very far away from the entrance of the forest and he did not want to wind that far away inside of the forest. As you know that it was a very dangerous ce and he could also meet those Elite or those Epic Monsters. Even if they are unable to see him, it could be dangerous for him.


    As you know that even if those monsters didn''t notice him, their attack could also affect the surrounding atmosphere. Because of this it will be very risky and dangerous for him to meet those Monsters.


    But when he was just about to leave that ce he suddenly felt a powerful auraing from the deep forest. Instantly this made him very surprised and also curious but he decided to forget about that. Well, those aura could be from those Warriors or could be from monsters.


    Because of this, he quickly left that ce. Right now he once again begins to search for any type of Monsters. Also one more thing was that he already deactivated his concealment technique. He wanted to give some time for his body to get rest. As you know that he was using this technique from the moment in the forest and because of this, he deactivated that technique.


    __________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam quickly jumps away from his ce. Instantly that ce where he was previously standing got crushed by the Rocks. Currently he was facing those Rock monkeys. Those monkeys could use the rock element. Not only that, killing those monsters was also very tough because the defenses of those monsters were very strong.


    So right now he was getting attacked by those monkeys from every direction. All of those monkeys were also early C-grade monsters, but most likely those intermediate C-grade monsters were also here.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Those monsters just kept attacking him from every direction and because of this he did not get any time to counter attack those Monsters. Those monsters wire fast and also had strong defense and because of this, killing them was very hard.


    But, Sam already killed 5 of those Monsters. This time he also decided to fight those monsters using his yer. Even though the defense of these monsters was very high, when Sam uses his origin spiritual energy, he can easily kill those monsters. So like this you already killed 5 of those monsters. Most likely because these other monsters got alert and because of this, they just continuously attacked him from every direction.


    But, Sam also wasn''t slow and he already dodged those attacks. Not only that he already came in front of two Monsters and instantly swung his sword at them. You can say that in less than a second he already swung his sword five times, with that he killed those monsters easily.


    But Sam did not stop there he quickly jumped away and using the movement technique Plus his full speed he came in front of those other monsters. Like this he also killed them.


    "Aho Aho!!!!!" Most likely this instantly angered those other Monsters and because of this, they started to attack him crazily. It was like those Monsters became mad and they did not even care if they hit their own teammates.


    But Sam already coated his whole body with his spiritual energy and he also instantly used the telekinesis to control 5 of those monkeys to attack their own teammates. Not only that, once again using his full speed came behind Those 5 monkeys. Right now those 5 monkeys under his control are attacking those other monkeys crazy and because of this many of those monkeys already got injured.


    But Sam did not stop there. He did not kill those 5 monkeys at first but he decided to kill those other monkeys that were injured by those 5 monkeys.


    Actually right now he could only control 5 monkeys or five early C-grade monsters. If he wanted to control more monsters, he would get a headache. Also control means you will control the whole body of that monster. But he only decided to control the movement of that Monster than he could control many of those Monsters.


    Sometimeter,


    You can say that Sam already killed almost everyone of those monkeys. But unfortunately out of nowhere those intermediate C-grade monsters came out and they also decided to attack him. Fortunately he already increased his defense and because of this he did not get injured by those monkeys. But at the same time you also did not get any chance to attack those Monsters.


    This new monkey was more powerful than those previous monkeys and because of this they just continuously attacked him. Because of this Sam also did not get any chance to control any of those monsters.


    Normally it was impossible to win against those intermediate C-grade monsters, because of this, without wasting anymore time he decided to activate the concealment technique. Suddenly, he vanishes in front of those monsters, which instantly makes those monsters shocked. But at the same time, instantly one of them got attacked, not only that he split into two parts.


    Those other 5 Monsters instantly became alert because of this. But they are just confused. Which enemy is attacking them? But not only that suddenly all of them also feel that something or someone is preventing them from moving. This once again makes those Monsters very alert and angry at the same time. But Sam did not give them any chance. He already came in front of these monsters and then using his 60% origin spiritual energy he attacked those Monsters one by one.


    _________________


    1 minuteter,


    After collecting all the loot Sam left that ce. But he did not go that far away. One more thing was that he was fully exhausted and because of this he needed some time to recover his energy and stamina. Because of this, he decided to find a good ce for a very good rest and at the same time he did not have to worry about those Monsters. Unfortunately he did not find anything so he decided to make one. Instantly he makes a hiding ce that is surrounded by those trees and from outside you won''t be able to find that hiding ce.


    _________To be continued_______

 Chapter 397 [Bonus ] 397 - Decided To Help

    "Captain, these Dragons were very powerful. Most likely we needed to wait for the reinforcement." One person said that to the person beside her.


    If you look at both of them then you can easily tell that both of them were oni human. They also weren''t alone. You can see 48 more people with them. But the situation of those people wasn''t good. You can see that some of them already got seriously injured and some of them were slightly injured.


    If you are wondering about these people then these people were from the Oni Kingdom. All of these people were Elite grade warriors. They came to the forest of the dead to hunt monsters. Naturallypared to those other Warriors (special grade Warriors) they naturally came deeper in the forest.


    You can say that everything was going normal but until suddenly something unexpected happened. Previously they were hunting those Earth lizards. Those monsters were also Elite grade monsters. So you can say that a fight between both of the parties was going on and both of the parties had simr strength and because of this it took all of them some time to kill those Monsters.


    After killing those monsters when they were just about to collect the loot and the dead bodies something unexpected happened. 8 of their teammates got attacked by dragons. Suddenly out of nowhere 10 Dragons began to attack them, and the most terrifying thing was that those dragons were Epic grade monsters.


    Previously those Warriors thought that even though those Monsters were powerful they were still able to kill some of them and because of this, previously they did not call for reinforcement and just attacked those Dragons. As you can guess, this is the biggest mistake they have made. Because of this, already 25 people got seriously injured and they weren''t in condition to fight.


    It was fortunate that nobody died until now. The captain of the group also realized his mistake and he instantly called for reinforcement. But even though he calls for the reinforcement, those reinforcements are only able to instantly appear there and because of this, right now the captain of that group tells him they should hide away from those Monsters until their reinforcement does note.


    The ten Dragons were very powerful and until now that group of Warriors was unable to kill one of those Dragons. They also noticed one more terrifying thing was that those Dragons could recover from their injuries very quickly and this is one of the most terrifying things about those Dragons.


    Right now if you look at those 10 Dragons that are flying in the sky above their head then you will notice that those Dragons have no injuries on their body. With this you can imagine how quickly they recover. Just only one minute ago they were able to seriously injure two dragons, but unfortunately those Dragons quickly recovered from those injuries.


    Not only that, most likely those Dragons also be interested in those Warriors. Those Dragons are very intelligent and then know that the Oni humans were very weakpared to them. Because of these Monsters while ying with them and did not instantly kill them.


    _____________


    "You are right. But most likely those Dragons already marked us and we won''t be able to leave. Still we can try to hide ourselves until the reinforcement does note." The captain said that and they quickly hid themselves.


    Fortunately some of the spiritual warriors are still able to fight and they instantly cast invisibility spells on them. This instantly makes them invisible and instantly makes those dragons angry and confused. But those spiritual Warriors did not waste anymore time and at the same time also created a tunnel that will lead them to a safe ce.


    On the other hand Most likely because those Dragons unable to find them they instantly let out their angry roar and also let out their aura. At this time, many Warriors suddenly feel that aura. Even those Warriors in the outer part of the forest are able to feel this.


    Only then the captain sighs in relief and he quickly injures teammates to drink the health potions. With that, those people will be able to recover from their injuries and we will be able to get back to full health. But the most important thing was that they did not have that much health drink. Because of this, they are also unable to use those potions freely.


    On the other hand those Dragons when unable to find them they begin to let out me from their mouth and then begin to burn the surrounding area of that forest. You have to say that the whole area got destroyed by those Dragons and right now you can only see those charcoal and those trees that are still burning. Those mes were so powerful that they also burned the ground. With that you should easily guess how powerful those Monsters are.


    ______________________<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    You can say that those people have to wait for at least 45 minutes and only then the reinforcement finallyes. Only then those people came out from their hiding ce. They did not waste anymore time and began to attack those Dragons once again.


    Fortunately those Dragons did not leave this ce and they have been searching for them. Because of this, those Dragons didn''t leave this ce. Most likely those dragons were searching for them.


    Once again those Dragons when they noticed warriors they did not waste anymore time and began to attack those warriors with their me. But this time that group of Warriors were already prepared to face that me.


    __________________


    If you are warning what Sam felt previously from the deep forest, then it was that aura of those Dragons previously he felt that. At that time naturally he became shocked and at the same time became very curious. After feeling that aura, he can tell that it was natural from a powerful monster. Because of this he instantly forgot about going deeper in the forest. Even though he has full confidence in his concealment technique still why take Risk.


    But he was 100% sure that something most likely happened in the inner area of this forest. If you were wondering why then it was because a few minutes ago he saw some people going to depend on the forest. Also just looking at them you can tell that all of them were in a hurry. So with that he became 100% sure that something seriously happened inside of the forest.


    You once again focused on those monsters that he will be able to kill. He did not n to go deeper in the forest and because of this, he decided to roam around in that area and kill those monsters that he will find in that area.


    _________________


    Sometimeter after killing the poison snake that was an intermediate C- grade monster. But fortunately using his stealth technique, the Monster was unable to see him and using this channel killed that monster.


    After killing that monster he was now collecting the load and also burning the dead body of that monster. Even though the poisoned snake was dead, its body could still spray poison and because of this, he was now burning that dead body.


    But when he was just to leave that ce after collecting the dead body he noticed something. At this time he noticed some peopleing toward his direction from the deep forest. Most likely it wasn''t that they wereing at him, it was just that they wereing out from the forest.


    Sometimeter he was able to see those warriors. But just looking at them he became surprised and shocked because right now the situation of this person was very bad. At least 90 Warriors were present there but you can say that many of those Warriors were already seriously injured and the remaining warriors were slightly injured.


    At this time some look at those injured Warriors and he could see that those Warriors were bleeding continuously and if this kept going on then they would surely die. But looking at this situation their teammates were helpless because they did not have any potion right now. They previously used those to hunt those 10 Dragons and you have to say that all of those potions got used in that situation. Because of this all of those warriors were helpless in this situation.


    Most likely those people did not notice Sam who was collecting his loot. Well it was natural because he was using the concealment technique. But he could also see the condition of those Warriors, and he can already tell that those Warriors will surely die if they do not go to the city quickly. But most likely in the situation they also won''t be able to travel this quickly.


    ''Sigh, I should help them.'' Sam thought this. He decided to help those warriors. Even though in normal situations those Warriors did not need any help from him, who was just a special grade warrior but right now the situation was different and because of this, Sam decided to help them.


    _______To be continued____________

 Chapter 398 398 - Sam Vs Kangaroos

    Even though Sam decided to help them, he instantly did not appear in front of them. He made some distance between themselves and only after that he deactivated his skill. After that he began to walk toward that direction.


    Also one more thing of that from the start he was wearing his mask. So you can say that nobody will be able to find out about his real identity.


    So like that he was going toward that direction and sometimeter he could already see those people. Right now even though people were seriously injured but because of the aura they were releasing, no monster attacked them. But still with that they were unable to walk faster and because of this it was quite risky for those injured Warriors.


    Most likely those groups of Warriors also notice Sam. Also Sam did not hide his power, so they could easily tell that he was a special grade Warrior.


    But don''t know why Sam instantly saw that those people already became alert the moment they noticed him. Well you can say that it was natural for them to be alert because right now they were in a weak state and they could get attacked by their enemy.


    But Sam did not show any suspicious behavior and just nodded at them and about to pass through them. He was showing them that he just did not care about that; he just only focused on his hunting. He doesn''t know if this n will work or not but he could only think of this n to help those people.


    Most probably those Warriors also think that he is just focusing on his hunting and because of this the captain suddenly called him.


    ___________________


    Sometimeter,


    Something unexpected happened. You can say that all those Warriors who were previously seriously injured and if they did not get healed then they could also lose their life, but currently the situation is exactly the opposite.


    Everyone of those warriors were nowpletely healed. Everyone was very surprised because they did not think that drinking those health potions would heal thempletely.


    You can say that the captain of the warrior group was the most surprised one. Previously even though he knew that it could be dangerous he decided to ask help from that Warrior who was just about to pass through them. Currently they already used all of their health potions, and the situation of his teammates was very serious. So he could only ask help from that Warrior.


    Surprisingly, Warrior did not say anything and brought out many health drinks. After that that warrior went inside of the forest. This instantly made all of those people very suspicious but right now they did not have the time to get suspicious. Even if they did not take those health potions, they will die, even if it wasn''t a health potion, they will die eventually. Because of this his teammate decided to take those health potions.


    But at this time surprisingly all of them gotpletely healed after taking those potions.


    _________________


    "Captain, we need to find out the identity of that person. We should really thank that person because of his help. Please captain at any cost unit to find out the identity of that person." Currently the teammates of the warrior group are telling their captain to find out about the identity of that Warrior.


    "Don''t worry about it. I also wanted to say my thanks to that person. Because of him I still did not lose my teammates and this is really a big thing. Don''t worry, after going back to the city I will use my full power to search for that person." The captain of the warrior group said that.


    _________________


    At this time,


    Sam already came very far away from that ce and right now his destination was the barrennd. It wasn''t that after killing those me Bulls he would leave the barrennd. He already decided that he will spend 7 days in this forest and the barrennd.


    Well, he could also spend most of his time here but unfortunately he needed to submit the mission. Those missions have a time limit of 7 days and because of this he needed to go back to the city.


    Sometime letter he already came out of the forest of death and already entered the barrennd. But it was thatpared to the forest finding monsters in the barrel and will be much easier.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    He didn''t even advance that much but he already found some mortal grade Monsters. Wasting no time he quickly killed those monsters and began to advance toward the barrennd. As you know that his target was those special grade Monsters, so he just did not care about those mortal grade Monsters. But he was still killing them because he could also absorb the body of those Monsters and he could also sell the loot and the body parts of those Monsters.


    4 hourster,


    Finally Sam already came deeper in the barrennd and right now he already fought those special grade Monsters. He fought 5 Vicious Kangaroo. These were the monsters that had spikes in their hand and with that they punched their enemy. Not only that they were very fast and they could jump higher than anyone. They were also very strong.


    Previously, he decided to fight those monsters without using the concealment technique and because of this he also got injured while fighting those Monsters. Fortunately there wasn''t any serious case and because of this he was able to kill those Monsters. But one thing confirmed that those monsters were very dangerous.


    Fortunately because of using the original spiritual energy the power of Sam also increases and he also uses telekinesis to stop the movement of those Monsters. So like this he killed those 5 monsters and after that he decided to rest for sometime.


    Even though he was resting he was very alert about his surroundings. Because in this barrel and he will not find any good ce to hide himself, he created his own hiding ce.


    ____________________


    ''It will be great training for me to fight those Monsters.''


    Sam decided to find the mode of those kangaroos and fight them. Well you can say that he just recently only used his concealment technique to fight those Monsters and because of this, this time he wanted to fight those Monsters without using that technique and these kangaroos were the ideal Monsters. It wasn''t that he have some kind of suicide intention but he just wanted to train himself.


    With that after sometimeter recovering his full power and stamina he decided to find those kangaroos. Most likely he was now the territory of those kangaroos and because of this, he didn''t even need to find that long when he saw 3 more kangaroos.


    He also attracts the attention of those kangaroos and then approaches them. Those kangaroos also get angry because of his provocation. The moment both of the party came close to each other, Sam instantly punched toward the first Kangaroo. The kangaroo also punched him. So both their punches shed. But the power behind Sam''s punch was greater and because of this, that Kangaroo sent flying backward.


    But at this time those other Kangaroo already came close to him and just about to attack him. Sam instantly crouches down and then punches with both of his hands.


    Both of the kangaroos could tell that those punches were very dangerous, because of this both of them instantly jumped away from that ce. But at this time the first Kangaroo already came above his head. He was about to attack Sam with his tail. But fortunately Sam already noticed that and he also got away from that ce.


    But the 2nd and 3rd Kangaroo already punched him from left and right direction. Sam one second jumped away from that ce. Both of those kangaroos were unable to stop their punches and because of this, both of their punches shed against each other.


    Sam quickly uses this chance toe close to those Monsters and attack them. This time he uses 50% of his spiritual energy to punch those two Monsters. This time both of the kangaroos were unable to defend themselves and got killed by Sam. But the remaining one was already above his head and he was about to attack him with his tail once again.


    Sam once again ducked. But this time the kangaroo did something unexpected. Most likely he already knows that Sam will have dogs and because of this, the moment hends on the ground he jumps toward Sam once again.


    Sam also did not expect this and because of this he was just about to get hit by a punch from that Kangaroo but fortunately instantly he uses the telekinesis technique to stop that Kangaroo. After that he did not waste anymore time to punch that Kangaroo and kill him.


    ''Sigh, they were really tough opponents.''


    Sam thought that and he began to collect the loot and the dead body of those Monsters.


    To be continued____________

 Chapter 399 399 - Surprised King

    6 dayster,


    In the barrelnd you can see that a person was running after those me Bulls. Most likely those bulls were afraid of that person and because of this they tried to escape from that person. But unfortunately suddenly they stopped moving, and at this time that person got close to them. Wasting no time he quickly swung his sword toward those Bulls.


    As you can tell, it was Sam who was killing those Bulls. For 6 days he was spending his time while killing those Monsters in this betternd and in the forest. Today was thest day he will kill those monsters because he also needed to go back to the city tomorrow to submit the mission.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (12100/12100)


    Spiritual energy: (12000/12000)


    Strength: 1200


    Agility: 1198


    Physique: 1210


    Intelligent(mental power): 1170


    Spirit: 1200


    Status points:- 500


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Special) (Intermediate C-grade)


    Potential: Legendary


    Upgrade point: 100M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( cooldown for 6 month)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade A)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade).


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Telekinesis: (C-grade) (+)


    Berserker (C-grade) (+)


    Light control (Grade C) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B) (+)


    Regeneration (Grade B)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    As you can see, this was his new status. Well he also got surprised after seeing the upgrade of his system. Who could have thought that aftering to this new World system will also upgrade. Not only that he also gets benefit from that because his health and spiritual energy also increased. Right now his system has be simple to understand and Sam really likes that.


    His system also before upgrading gives him a reminder that it was because Terraria was the first world to get spiritual energy and also because this has strong spiritual energy and the limitation was also higher than any other, his system will be upgraded and try to match with the new.


    Get this type of notification before his system is upgraded. Not only that but this upgrade was permanent so he did not have to worry about anything.


    Also the important thing was that he also uses his supreme upgrade once again to upgrade his absorption technique. With that his dragon devour became an A-grade technique. With this now he could also absorb the A-grade monsters. Not only that he could also absorb those peak special grade crystals.


    One more thing you should know is that in this Terraria even though everyone has the same absorption technique to observe those crystals, they did not have the same crystals as the Eden blue. At Eden blue you will find crystals from F-grade to S-grade, but here you will find Mortal grade crystal, or special grade crystals, etc.


    But even if an early special grade Warrior tries to absorb a peak of special grade crystals then he won''t be able to do that. Fortunately, like the Eden blue, here you will also find that every grade was divided into three stages. With that you also have early, intermediate and peak stage crystals.


    C-grade means early special grade. But this early special grade was the first stage of the special grade. But as you know that in Eden blue that C-grade decided into the tree stage, but this wasn''t the case. Because of this you will directly get early special grade crystals. If you give these crystals to an early C-grade warrior or peak C-grade warrior, then both of them could absorb that crystal and get the spiritual essence based on their absorption technique. But no early special grade Warrior was able to absorb peak special grade crystals except Sam.


    When he was the early C-grade warrior, if he could absorb any of those peak special grade crystals then he would get 7 to 9 status points. At that time if he absorbs any intermediate C-grade crystals, then he will get 4 to 6 status points. And when he tries to absorb those early special grade crystals, he will get 1 to 3 status points.


    Actually all of this happens because of his system. Or without his system help you will get only 1 Status point, If that time he tries to absorb those early special grade crystals.


    Actually the main thing was that Terraria did not have those early C-grade or peak C-grade stages. But his system is still able to help him divide those things and with that he could get that many status points right now.


    ''Really, all of this wasplicated. Fortunately I did not have to worry about anything because my system will help me to identify them.'' as you can see that Sam did not have to worry about all of thisplicated thing. His system easily helps him to identify the grade of the Crystal and with that he also gives him the status point that you will get after absorbing that crystal.


    Also the most important thing was that right now in this area after killing the monster he will only get a special grade of crystals. He did not get any strength crystal or agility crystal like he got in the Eden blue. He simply gets a crystal that will give him Status point and he could put Status point at his own choice.


    Because of this you can see that the new feature of his system is the status points. Right now he had 500 status points and he could put those Status points at his own choice but he decided to hold himself and did not upgrade his status.


    ____________________


    Now came back to the main matter,


    All of this happened with him in these 6 days. All of this information he also got directly from the system and because of this he was quite surprised but then he was happy about the new upgrade of his system.


    Now he was chasing those mes Bulls. Actually those monsters already feel that they won''t be able to win against him and because of this they try to escape. But Sam did not give them any chance and like previous time he once again used his telekinesis technique to stop their movement and then quickly came in front of them and swung his sword toward those Monsters.


    In front of his powerful attack those monsters were unable to defend themselves and they easily got killed by him. After that he collected the loot and also directly absorbed the body of that monster. After absorbing the body he gets one status point.


    Well he already had many dead bodies of those monsters in his inventory and he could easily absorb them anytime but he did not want to do that. He wanted to sell those body parts and wanted to collect some money from them. Because of this he did not absorb the body of those Monsters.


    __________________


    When Sam was busy killing the monster in the barrelnd and the forest, something already happened in the Oni Kingdom. The crown Prince of the Oni kingdom already came back from his adventure. Not only that he also told his father about his dangerous adventure this time.


    The king, after hearing that, also gets surprised because nothing like that previously happened and this is a really unusual thing for those monsters to attack anyone in another''s Territory. Those monsters really did not leave their territory.


    Also if you look at the Oni prince then you can see a familiar face. If Sam was here then he would instantly recognise this person because he was the captain of that Warrior group that Sam previously saved while giving them those potions.


    He also quickly asks his father about that mask Warrior. Unfortunately the king was unable to understand about the mask courier and because of this, things became like this. For 5 days the crown Prince used his power to search the whole Kingdom to look for that mask Warrior. But in the end, unfortunately he did not find anything.


    The king was also quite surprised about that mask Warrior who helped his son. But unfortunately he did not have any information about that Warrior.


    But don''t know why at this time the king remembers about Sam who also wore a mask all the time. So he showed the photo of Sam to his son, and instantly the crown told his father that he was the one who had helped them previously. After hearing this you can say that the king doesn''t know what to say. Previously Sam helped his daughter and now he also helps his son and his teammates.


    ________To be continued________

 Chapter 400 400 - New Home

    Sam instantly turned around and hit the Kangaroo with his sword. The Kangaroo did not even get the chance to react and finally died by the attack. Also one more thing was that to fight those kangaroos he actually deactivated his concealment technique. Actually not only those kangaroos but even fighting those other Monsters in this barrennd he mostly fights normally.


    ''Sigh, it was time to go back.'' Sam thought that and after collecting the loot and the dead body he decided to go toward the city gate.


    Well today was thest date to submit the mission and because of this he needed to go back to the city. Also it won''t be long when the sun will go down, because of this he began to use his full speed to go toward the city gate.


    Still it takes him 5 hours to reach the city gate. When he reached the city he could still see so many people entering anding outside from the city. So like those people he also went toward those City guards and after showing his ID he finally entered the city.


    ''Most likely I need to rent a house.'' Sam decided to rent a house because booking a hotel will give him some trouble and because of this he wanted to rent a house. But before anything he needed to go back to the warrior association to submit the mission.


    It took him 10 minutes to reach the warrior association and after entering the warrior association he directly went to the receptionist center. Aftering in front of the receptionist he quickly showed his ID to that receptionist.


    This receptionist girl wasn''t familiar with him and because of this she got quite surprised by his behavior but when she looked at the ID card she realized that this person most likely wanted to submit his mission.


    So after taking his ID card she looked at the mission that he had taken. But you can say that she became speechless after looking at the missions. This person clearly was just a newly special grade Warrior, but he dared to take missions that were above his league.


    But looking at that person she could tell that most likely this person alreadypleted the mission. So she nodded at him and told him to bring out the loot.


    Sam did not waste anymore time and instantly gave her the storage ring that had all the loot. Even though the girl was quite surprised, she did her work professionally and after that she gave the reward to him. She also gave some extra money because of that extra loot. But at this time Sam wasn''t done. He also brought out some more loot and told her that he wanted to sell them.


    This one second made that girl surprised but as you know that she was professional and she professionally handled that situation and after counting all of those roots she gave him the money that he will get after selling those loot.


    Sam sold various body parts of the Monsters not only that he also sold many other loots that he got after killing those Monsters. After everything was done, right now he has two tinum coins.


    __________________


    After everything was done he left the warrior association and went toward the residential area. But one thing he was feeling was strange that the moment he entered the city he was feeling like he was being observed by all the people in this city.


    ''Why are they behaving like this? I did not think I did something that would make them behave like this so it was most likely someone else. But did those people mistake me for that person?'' Currently while going toward the residential area Sam was thinking about that.


    Unfortunately nobody was there to tell him the information but one thing was for sure he will get to know about that. Sometimeter he came to the residential area and then went to the residential office.


    Fortunately even though every house in this ce was made of Titan wood, everything else was the same as a modern city. With that he is easily able to rent a house. Also he needed to give 5 gold coins every month for the rent. As you can see, it wasn''t that expensive and because of this he easily booked that house for 1 year.


    After that the worker of the residential office showed him the rental house and after everything was over he was now finally alone in his new home.


    ''Most likely I still need to go back to the Royal library to find out about the method that will send me back to my. Unfortunately previously I was busy trying to find out about that prime dragon and because of this I did not get the time to look at this thing. This time I need to look at that method.'' Sam was thinking of going back to the Royal library and finding out about the method that will send him back to his home.


    ________________


    Unfortunately for Sam when he was now resting he didn''t know that the king and the prince already knew that a mask Warrior already entered The Kingdom. Both of them already get the news. Not only that after further investigation they also get to know that the warrior also submitted his mission in the warrior association. Not only that, that person also rented a new house and after that he was now resting in his house.


    The king got all of this information from his subordinates. Even though The Prince did not get all the detailed information, he knew that the person had alreadye back to the kingdom so he quickly told his father to call that person in their pce.


    "Haha¡­ you did not tell me that if it was really Sam then you should tell your sister to call him in the pce. She will most likely be happy after hearing this." After hearing his son''s request the king began to smile and said that.


    Even though he did not like that his daughter got close to Sam but most likely she would be the best person to call him in the pce and because of this the king told his son to tell his sister about this. Even though his son got confused after hearing these, he still decided to listen to his father.


    __________________


    On the other hand, Sam did not know anything about this. Right now he was looking at all the crystals that he got after killing those Monsters and not only the crystals but he was also looking at the dead body of those Monsters. As you can guess that he was now nning to absorb those things to increase the status point and then increase his status.


    So after deciding that he did not waste any more time and one by one he decided to observe all of those things. Because of the system he could tell that some of those monsters were early C-grade, while some of them were peak C-grade. Because of this while absorbing them he also gets different status points from them.


    You can say that in these 7 days he has already collected many of those loots and because of this it takes him much time to absorb all of those crystals and the dead bodies of those Monsters. Really he has to say that his absorb  technique was really helping him in the situation while absorbing those dead bodies  of the Monsters. He also gets points after those dead bodies and this is really a good thing for him.


    You can say that it almost takes him 3 hours to absorb all of those crystals and the dead bodies. Now if he looks at his status screen, then he will see that he got 1k status points. Really he could get more Status points but unfortunately he decided to sell many of the dead bodies of the monsters and because of this right now he had only 1k status points.


    After that he decided to put equally 200 Status points in every stat.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (14100/14100)


    Spiritual energy: (14000/14000)


    Strength: 1200 + 200 = 1400


    Agility: 1198 + 200 + 2 = 1400


    Physique: 1210 +200 = 1410


    Intelligent(mental power): 1170 + 200+ 30 = 1400


    Spirit: 1200 + 200 = 1400<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Status points:- 500 - 32 = 468


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Early Special) / (peak C-grade)


    Potential: Legendary


    Upgrade point: 00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( cooldown for 6 month)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade A)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade).


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)


    Berserker (B-grade)


    Light control (Grade B)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade)


    Mind protection: (B-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)


    Regeneration (Grade B)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    _________To be continued__________

 Chapter 401 401 - Reading Books

    As you can see, he tries to maintain all of his stats at 1400. After that right now you can see his status. Also one more thing was that he uses all of his upgrade points to upgrade all 3 of his techniques to B-grade. You can say that to all of those techniques he almost used all of the update points and because of this right now he had zero upgrade points.


    '' Sigh, finally I am feeling I have some strength in this new world.'' Sam thought that. Even though he knows that he is just an early special grade Warrior, he finally gains some strength to defend himself.


    _________________


    On the other hand Livia went on a mission. She didn''t know that her big brother had alreadye back home and he was now waiting for her.


    Currently she was in the forest of the dead and doing her mission. But Emma was with her. She won''t leave Livia anytime. She will always stay with Livia.


    Currently Livia was with her friend and they were hunting the Vicious rabbits. They took this mission one day ago and they need to submit it tomorrow. But most likely they alreadypleted the mission and because of this, after some timeter they could already go back to the city.


    Sometimeter,


    "Emma, do you think I will be able to meet Sam here?" Livia asked that question to Emma. But Emma was unable to answer that because they did not know which type of mission Sam had taken and what if he already went back to the city afterpleting his mission. Because of this she was unable to answer that question.


    "Sigh, you are right. But still it would be good if Sam epted my offer and came to the forest if dead with me toplete the mission. With that both of us can hunt many Monsters." Livia murmured  that. Emma, after hearing this, doesn''t know what to say. But she can clearly feel that Livia always bes happy when she talks about Sam.


    But at this time none of them noticed that one of her teammates was now looking at her with hatred. It was Kevin who was now getting jealous when he saw that Livia was only talking about Sam.


    Right now he just cannot tolerate that person. From childhood he always wanted to stay close to Livia, but unfortunately right now she was only talking about another person that just came to the city recently and the most important thing was that person was a human.


    ''Just you wait Sam Kainer. I will make you vanish from this Kingdom.'' Kevin for that in anger. Actually he already tried to do that but unfortunately those people were not able to seed on that and also they got seriously injured.


    With that Kevin knows that person has some strength but he was a son of Duke and with that he did not have to fear anything. You already decided that after going back to the city he will prepare everything to make that person disappear from this city. So because of this he has now started to n what to do after going back to the city.


    Well it was unfortunate for Kevin that he didn''t know the crown Prince of the kingdom already wanted to meet Sam and wanted to thank him. He was the savior of the crown Prince and most likely this will give Sam extra protection in the kingdom.


    ________________


    Now came back to the Oni Kingdom,


    Sam was now resting. It was now time for him to rest. As you know, it was his routine that aftering back from his hunting he would rest his body. But at the same time he will use this chance to read in the library to find out about the way that will send him to his.


    But at the same time he also needed to be careful about it. Sam already knows that most likely the king already suspected him and they already know that he lied previously. Because of this, he did not want to get more suspicious.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    '' I need to be careful about this. I should not make anyone more suspicious about my identity.'' Sam thought that while you were going outside of his home.


    After some resting you can say that he was fully charged and because of this he was now going toward the library even though it was evening. Fortunately using his ID card he could rent a book for 7 days. So he decided to use that and bring as many books as he can about this matter.


    ''I still need to find out about that mastermind. But really it is still confusing me. I don''t think I had made any connection with the Duke or anyone rted to the Duke before meeting the king. So how did a person from the Duke''s house want to harm me? Does that person know me because he was a part of Livia''s group? I need to find out about this.'' Sam was thinking all of this while going to the library.


    Well this is the natural thing. Aftering to this new world he always took care and he did not think he would make anyone angry so how did someone target him? So it was natural that he would think that all of this happened because of Livia. As you know that beautiful girl means trouble. Even if someone did not believe that, Sam always believed that.


    Well nowe back to the main matters. Sam already reached the library and after that he already went to the normal book section. As you know that as an outsider of this city he was allowed to go to the technique section or any other special section. Well not that Sam has any kind of problem with that. Also he did not think that those techniques were necessary for him.


    You already begin to select all those books. You can say that in just 5 minutes he already selected 15 books rted to that matter. Previously because he was only focused on finding information about that monster he did not read these books and because of this he was now selecting those.


    So after everything was done he rented those books for 7 days and came out of the library. Well at this time if you are thinking why he did not go to the Royal library, then it was because he felt awkward in the royal library. Also he did not think it would be a good thing that he would visit the Royal library that much. This could also bring many questions to the king and he did not want because of him the king will face those types of questions.


    ___________________


    Next day,


    You can see that right now Sam was going to the library once again. Not only that if you look at his face then you will see a dark circle in his eyes. Actually yesterday he spent all of his night reading those books and because of this he had those dark circles under his eyes.


    But one thing was that he had already finished those books and he did not find anything rted to that matter. He wanted to find a way that would send him to his but unfortunately he did not find anything about that. You only find more information about the differents and what type of different thing you will find in thoses.


    Well while reading those books you can say that Sam was also quite surprised that people of the Terraria have this kind of information about another. How did they have this kind of information even if they did not visit that? Or is it that they already visited thoses but nobody is able to know about this?


    ''Most likely, the people of the Terraria have some kind of technique that could tell them about the that is able to awake In The Spiritual energy. Not only that, most likely they also have some kind of technique or some kind of device that could send them toward those others. Most likely those people that came to Eden blue previously used these kinds of techniques. I just need to find that technique or that device and only then I can go back to my home.'' Sam thought all of this.


    Actually, currently he has be very curious how those people came to the Eden blue previously? Definitely they used some kind of technique or some kind of device that was able to send them toward the Eden blue. So because of this, he wanted to find out about that technique or the device or that process.


    ________________


    While Sam is going toward the library, Livia already reaches her home. Not only that she also already met her brother. You can say that after her father and mother, she loved her brother the most. So she instantly became happy the moment she saw him.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 402 402 - Troublesome Day

    2 dayter,


    Currently in the Duke''s house. Kevin was talking with his subordinates. He was telling them what to do. But he waspletely unaware that today Sam will go to the king''s pce. He also gets invited by the Crown Prince. He just knows that today the Crown Prince asked some people toe to the pce because he will introduce his savior to everyone.


    The savior of the crown Prince saved his team when they were about to die and because of this, the crown Prince wanted to thank his savior.


    Even you can say that Kevin was surprised then wanted to meet that savior who saved the crown Prince''s teammates.


    But at the same time he also wanted to seed this time. As you can easily guess, he was telling his subordinate what to do that could make Sam look like a traitor and with that the king should eliminate him. So he was telling his subordinate what to do to make Sam look like a traitor.


    _________________


    On the other hand,


    Sam was now inside of his house and absorbing those dead bodies. Previously he did not absorb all the dead bodies and today he wanted to absorb all the dead bodies. He is also nning to go back to the forest of the dead and the barrennd. Also this time he wasn''t nning toe back to the city that quickly.


    At this time if he did not find that type of mission then he will not ept that type of mission. Actually he wanted a mission that could give him 1 month or 2 months time. With that he could focus on hunting The Monster for 1 month.


    Actually he was nning to go to the danger zone today but unfortunately don''t know why but the King suddenly told him to go to the pce and Livia sometime ago came to the library and informed him about this. You can say that after hearing that Sam became confused once again because why would the king want to meet him once again?


    So because of this he will also need to go toward the pce sometimeter. Before going to the pce he wanted to absorb all those dead bodies to increase his power.


    _________________


    2 hourster,


    Today you can see that in the King''s pce many people were present there. All of them got invited by the crown Prince because he wanted to thank his savior in front of everyone. Because of this you can see many Novels also present there. Not only then but you can also see many powerful Warriors and also the teammates of the Crown Prince were present in that party.


    Sometimeter Sam also already reached that party and you have to say that the moment he entered the king''s pce he was quite surprised and became curious at the same time. He got invited today and suddenly he could see that the whole king''s pce was decorated like this. Most likely the king was organizing some kind of party and because of this he also got invited by him.


    After realizing that Sam rxes a little and then finding a good spot just sit down in that ce. As you know that he doesn''t know anyone in this Kingdom except Livia and her teammates. But unfortunately he did not see them at this party and because of this he just sat down on that corner.


    ''I should use this chance to spend my time in the royal library for today and try to find information. Why didn''t they say anything about going toward another? Is this some kind of secret technique or special device that helped them to do this and because of this day did not inform about this in those books.'' Sam was thinking about that information.


    Even though he already read at least 25 books, he did not find any information rted to this. You can only get information about those others and many different other information but you won''t get any information that tells you that you could also travel to thoses. So because of this Sam was feeling frustrated.


    At least when he previously wanted to search for the information about the monster he found some clue about that but unfortunately this time he did not get any type of clue after reading those books.


    ''Sigh, I really wanted to ask Livia about this but most likely, this will bring me trouble.''


    Sam was thinking whether he should ask Livia or the king about this or not. But most likely asking the king could we cross his limit and because of this he should ask Livia about this. But here was the second problem.


    What if after hearing all of this she became suspicious of him. What if give the clue that he wasn''t from this? So because after thinking all of this he was now deciding what to do.


    _____________________<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "Sam!!!"


    Sam, who was busy thinking , suddenly came back to his senses after hearing that call. He instelly looked in front of him and so that it was Livia and her friends. Everyone looked at him with a smile. Most likely it was funny for them how much Sam concentrated on his thoughts.


    "Sorry about this. It is just I am thinking about something and that was very serious. So did you guess how toplete your new mission? Which type of mission did you ept this time? As I hear that Livia wasn''t permitted to ept a dangerous type of mission," Sam asked.


    " Yea¡­. We already havepetitive admission. Well even though the king previously did not want to give the permission but in the end because of sister Emma finally Livia got the permission to ept that type of mission and we just recently came back afterpleting the mission." One of them begins to exin to him about this.


    Well Sam also has to say that because of sister Emma''s protection, most likely Livia didn''t have to worry about those special grade Monsters or any other dangerous situation. Even though he did not know the full power of Emma, he could tell that she was very strong.


    ________________


    Sometimeter everyone is now looking at the stage. Without gear the king came to the stage and then began to announce that it would be his son who wanted to make an announcement.


    Once again everyone present in that pce begins to p for the crown Prince. The Prince just smiled at them and then came to the stage.


    "Well most likely many of you already know that something happened to the forest of the dead. Most likely something or someone making those monsters behave like this.  Well forget about that and nowe back to our main matter. As you know, I wanted to thank my savior and because of this, I organized this party. Before calling my savior I wanted to save what he did for me and my teammates."


    " After a tough battle the condition of my teammates is very serious and if they did not get healed quickly they could also die. But fortunately at this time that person suddenly came to us and gave us healing potions. I think when you are wondering why it is a big matter because if you see me at this time then you could also help me. Well the big matter was that that person did not know that I was a prince. He could just avoid us but that person did not do that he gave us those precious potions. Also you also know that those portions were Supreme grade potions. With that you can imagine how much you need to buy those potions."


    " But that person without caring about the cost gives us those potions. With that me and my teammates instantly healed. Because of this, me and my teammates wanted to show our gratitude to that person and because of this, I organized this party."


    All this time everyone was listening to Prince''s exnation. But at the same time one of them is feeling very weird. But at this time he suddenly looked at the prince very seriously and only then did he remember that that face was familiar with him.


    Instantly you can say that Sam has the idea to leave that ce as quickly as a can. Most likely that prince wanted to call him on the stage. Because he remembers that person. That prince or you can say the captain of the warrior group and his teammates were the one whose condition was very serious and it was Sam who helped them that time.


    But most likely Sam did not get the time to leave that ce. At this time the prince already announced his name and then told him toe toward the stage. Not only that you can see that light also showing on him. With that everyone could see who the person was.


    ''Sigh,'' Sam just sighed and then with a helpless expression began to go toward the stage.


    ______________________


    30 minutester,


    Finally everything was over and Sam was now enjoying the food. You can say that right now everyone who came to this ce knew that he was a human but as expected nobody was unsatisfied with that. As you know, both humans and humans have good rtionships. Because of this, those oni humans didn''t care about that.


    You have to say that after the prince and his teammates show their gratitude and also give him some rewards, Sam just leaves the stage but it wasn''t there. One by one many people begin to approach him and all of them begin to ask about him. All of them are very curious about him.


    So you can say that to get away from all of this he needed at least 30 minutes and right now thanks to Livia and Emma he was now in apletely different ce where nobody was able to find him and he was just enjoying the food.


    ______To be continued______

 Chapter 403 403 - Leaving The City.

    "How could he be the savior? Why does this beggar get those supreme health potions? Even though I was unable to get those potions, then how was he able to get those? " Right now Kevin was wondering about this.


    You can say that he was very shocked when the Crown Prince and his teammates expressed their gratitude to Sam. This instantly made him a VIP person and Kevin was really speechless after realizing all of this. Sometime ago he just made a perfect n to get Sam punished by the king but most likely that won''t be possible.


    ''I am still going to make you a traitor of this Kingdom. With that the king won''t have any choice except to punish you.'' Even though it became really difficult, Kevin still decided to go with his n.


    But right now he knows that he needs to be careful about this and also needs to wait for some days. Well not that he was in a hurry.


    Currently for a few days Sam will get attention from everyone and also these few days it will be really difficult to go with his n and because of this Kevin decided to wait for some days.


    ''It is your luck that you be a VIP person of this Kingdom. You can still enjoy your life in the city for one month and after that this will be over for you.'' Kevin thought that and once again began tough like a maniac.


    ___________________


    Sam at this time ispletely unaware that one monthter he will face trouble. But even if we get to know this he will just not care about that. As you know, even though he was on apletely different, this Kingdom has many powerful Warriors but he still has confidence in his technique and with that he has the confidence to escape from any type of danger.


    Currently if you are wondering about him then he is now in the royal library. Once again he came to the library with Livia and you once again began to read books.


    Livia and Emma once again be surprised after seeing this and at the same time they also get very curious. Because Sam was previously able to get to know about those prime Dragons and the danger of those Dragons. So this naturally makes them more curious.


    ''What type of information Sam is searching for? Is he once again searching for information about Monsters?''


    Right now both of them are thinking this type of question but they did not disturb Sam or ask him about this. They were now silently looking at him and they could see that this time Sam was collecting many books about the others.


    Instantly that makes them very curious because why would Sam suddenly need those types of books? Is he just interested in those others? Once again they begin to think about this type of question but unfortunately they did not disturb Sam.


    Well even if they asked him they won''t get the proper answer.


    Livia and Emma decide to leave him alone because they also need to inform the crown Prince about this. So both of them left the library leaving him alone.


    _________________


    '' It is really fascinating that the people of Terraria have all kinds of information about others who are able to awake In The Spiritual energy. They even have detailed information about Eden blue. But not only that but they also have information about the earth. Sigh, it isn''t the same earth.''


    You can say after getting all this information Sam was very surprised that people of the Terraria were able to gather that type of information. How they gather all that information.


    This is only possible when you will go to that and find out the details of that. As you know that without going to any ce you won''t be able to give any detailed exnation about that ce. With that Sam was sure that the people of the Terraria had any kind of technique or device that could send him to his home.


    Even though he could just ask the king about this, he did not want to do this because it would make him more suspicious and it could also bring him trouble. Because of this he did not tell anyone about this and just silently read those books and tried to find that process that could send him back to his home.


    He was so busy reading that he did not notice that it was already the next day. Only when Livia and Emma bring something for his breakfast does he realize that it was already the next day and previously he justpletely meant the party arranged by the prince.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But fortunately Livia seems to guess his thought and because of this, she told him that he did not have to worry. Yesterday she already told his brother that he was busy reading books and his brother also did not mind that.


    ________________


    ''I wille back hereter.'' As you know, today he wanted to go to the danger zone and because of this he already decided to leave the royal library and go to the warrior association to receive any type of mission that couldst for one month or two months. After finishing his breakfast he said goodbye to the prince, the king and those other people.


    Sometimeter he came to the warrior association and directly went toward the mission board. In the mission board you can see many different missions disying also one more thing that you could select your mission by selecting the specific grade. Means which grade mission you wanted to takepletely depends on your choice.


    But at the same time they also have some kind of limitation and because of this Sam right now won''t be able to choose any Elite grade mission. This rule was created so that no people after bing overconfident select a mission that he won''t be able to handle and will just die.


    _________________


    After looking at the mission board very clearly, he did not find any mission that couldst for one month or two months. It''s really disappointing but what can he do right now? So wasting no time he quickly left the warrior association but this time a twist happened.


    The moment Sam left the Warrior association, he instantly used his concealment technique and with that his order and his presence justpletely disappeared.


    You can say that after the previous experience he was now careful about this type of matter. Because of this, when he decided that it was time to hunt, he always hid his face and his aura. With that nobody is able to guess where he is right now and they won''t be able to follow him.


    Don''t know why but this time he has the feeling that some people will follow him and because of this, he used this technique. With this nobody will be able to follow him and even if they try to follow him they will just die by his hand. This time he already decided that he will take care of those small fries who were watching over him or trying to harm him.


    Actually he was right because this time also many people wanted to follow him but unfortunately they were unable to find him. Those people were from the duke''s house. They were Kevin''s subordinate, and they got the order from him that they should follow Sam when he goes to the danger zone.


    Because of this, they are waiting outside of the warrior association and they already notice Sam who is entering the warrior association. But unfortunately they have been waiting for 1 hour but still they are unable to find some who just went inside of the warrior association.


    "How long did this person need to select any mission in the warrior association? It has been 1 hour since you entered the Warriors but still he did note out from the association? Is he selling some loot or something like that?"


    You can say that right now those people who were waiting in front of the warrior association, already became very bored and because of this, they were discussing among each other.


    ___________


    On the other hand, Sam Who already left the city did not know anything about this. Even if we get to know about this he will just take care of those people. Fortunately he was using the concealment technique and because of this most likely nobody followed him.


    Even though this time he did not get any type of mission but one thing was clear that this time he will only focus on killing the monster without caring about any mission.


    ''Not only those crystals but I will also focus and collect the dead bodies of those Monsters. It will give me more status points and with that I could also increase my power.'' Sam already decided that this time he will kill as many Monsters as he could kill in this forest of death.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 404 404 - Fighting A B-Grade Monster

    Sam was fighting those poisonous frogs. Everyone of those frogs didn''t even get to know how they died. You can say that right now Sam wasn''t leaving anyone alive. He was killing those Monster as much as he can


    After collecting the loot and those dead bodies he once again begins to advance. Well in those loots sometimes he gets materials, and crystals. You can say that until now he did not get any techniques from those monsters. Also even though he was getting some rare materials that could be used to make good armor or anything like that, he was interested in those materials. He could just buy those from his system shop and because of this he only sold those things.


    But previously he got to know from Livia that if you find any Dungeon then you will get many good things. He will only get those techniques from those Dungeons. Not only those techniques but he could also get armor, swords, and much more loot that he won''t be able to receive after killing those monsters in the danger zone. But finding the Dungeon was very hard and if you aren''t lucky you won''t find the dungeon.


    ''Most likely when I go deeper in this forest only then will I find any dungeon. But still it really surprised me that finding a dungeon was very hard in this ce while it waspletely the opposite in my world. Sigh, everything was different here.''


    While Sam was finding more monsters he began to think about that danger and the danger zone. But as you know that he did not likeplicated things and because of this he justpletely stopped thinking about those and once again searching for the Monsters.


    Sometimeter he once again found some Monsters but unfortunately some Warriors were fighting those Monsters and because of this he quickly left that ce to find more monsters. As you know that he did not like to interfere with anyone''s fight.


    Most likely he was lucky, we got not far away from that ce you once again find some Monsters. Also one more thing was that those Monsters were intermediate special grade monsters. Just feeling their aura you can tell that.


    ''Wow, would I be able to fight those B-grade monsters? I should try. Even if I won''t be able to kill them, I could still escape from that ce.'' after thinking that Sam decided to attack those Monsters.


    But before attacking those Monsters, he quickly channels 80% of his spiritual energy in his yer. But still with that power he wasn''t sure if he could kill those monsters or not. He calms down and thenpletely focuses on those Monsters.


    He decided to attack one Monster and if he was able to kill him, only then he would attack those other Monsters. Wasting no time aftering in front of that monster he quickly attacked him. Well those Monsters were the Wind wolves. They could control the wind element to attack their enemy. Those Monsters have strength, agility, andrge spiritual power. But it was just that they have weak defensepared to their strength or agility.


    The moment yer hit that wolf, that wolf howled in pain. But he didn''t react. yer already pierced through his body. At this time, Sam for the first time feels some resistance and because of this he quickly increases the power of spiritual energy. The moment his spiritual energy increased the sword easily cut that wolf into two parts.


    All of this happened Less than a second and because of this, those other wolves didn''t get the chance to react. But in the next moment when they realize that someone or something killed one of their teammates, everyone bes very alert and they have already created air des around them.


    After summoning those air des they instantly did not attack because they still did not know the location of their enemy. They were now searching for the enemy. But unfortunate for those Monster Sam already came far from that ce.


    After using 88% of his spiritual energy he was now very exhausted. Because of this, he came far away from that ce to recover his spiritual energy. At this time he was using the Energy recovery technique with his full power and because of this he was also recovering his spiritual energy faster than before. He did not want to use the potions, but actually he did not want to depend on the potion to fight Monsters. He only used them when the situation was very critical.


    Fortunately because he was far away from that ce those other wolves were unable to discover him and using this chance he was recovering his full energy. But right now if you look at his face then you will see the excitement. Who could have thought that using almost 90% office spiritual energy he could kill a B-grade monster. Also he could tell that the wolf was an early B-grade monster. Still it was a huge achievement for him.


    Sometimeter,


    The moment Sam recovered his spiritual energy he instantly went toward those whole once again and attacked one more wolf. Even though that wolf was alert all this time and searching for the enemy, and he also had those air des around him, he was still unable to react to that attack from Sam. Also Sam using his 90% spiritual energy kills that wolf. But in the next second many air des came towards his ce.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But Sam already reacted and quickly escaped from that ce. But all this time those other wolves did not stop attacking. Even though they were unable to see the enemy, they started attacking in every direction. You have to say that those attacks were really powerful because those trees and those grounds were easily destroyed by those air des. But unfortunately those wolves weren''t sure if they killed the enemy or not.


    Right now only two of those wolves remain. So Sam decided to kill those wolves but while taking his time to recover his energy. He did not show any hurry in this matter. If he shows any impatience then it could also be dangerous for him and he could also lose his life.


    But yeah he also won''t wait that long. What if suddenly another Warrior came to this ce and killed those remaining wolves. He did not want that and because of this he also won''t bete that long.


    30 minutester,


    Finally after finishing those remaining wolves he was now collecting the loot and the dead bodies. After everything was done he quickly left that ce.


    Also one more thing was that Sam decided not to go far away from this ce because he already met those intermediate special grade Monsters, what if he met more powerful Monsters? Because of this he decided not to go into the forest.


    __________________


    Sam doesn''t know that just after he left that ce after collecting the dead bodies of those wolves, some people came to that ce. The most interesting thing was that right now if Sam looks at them then he will recognize them. It was Livia and her teammates who came to that ce. Yes, they also came to the danger zone to finish their mission that they just recently epted.


    "Sigh, most likely a fight has already happened. I hope that no Warrior gets hurt by the Monsters." Livia said that. After they begin to search for Monsters that they wanted to kill to finish their mission.


    Also because Emma got the courage toe to this ce. They already know that they will meet those intermediate special grade Monsters and because of this if Emma wasn''t with them, then they would nevere to this ce.


    ___________________


    Sam ispletely unaware of this. But even if he gets to know about this then he will just not care about that. As you know that he already takes this as a challenge to kill as many monsters as he can in one month.


    Sometimeter he already found more early special grade monsters, so wasting no time he began to kill them. As you can see, killing those early special grade monsters became easy for him. So right now he just did not want to waste anymore time and quickly kill those Monsters as quickly as he can.


    Also while killing those monsters he deactivated his concealment technique. As you know that right now he did not require that technique and because of this he fights those monsters without using his concealment technique.


    Well, fighting like this, he already kill many monsters and it has already been one day since he started to kill those Monsters. Right now he was resting after making a ce to hide himself. Unfortunately in this forest update he did not find any good ce to make a hiding ce to rest because of this he created one.


    To be continued_____

 Chapter 405 405 - Iron Bears

    "Bomm!!"


    Suddenly an explosion appeared. Currently Sam is fighting 5 Liper.  They look like leopards but at the same time they could also control The lightning element and because of this they got the name Liper.


    It could be very tough to fight those monsters if Sam decided to fight them normally and because of this, he fights those monsters while using his stealth technique. But when he killed one of them, those other monsters got angry because of this and they began to attack their surroundings.


    Those monsters are intelligentpared to other monsters and because of this, they know that most likely their enemy was hiding and because of this, they decided to attack everywhere around them.


    Because of this, even though Sam used the concealment technique, but still, it became very hard to kill those monsters. Sam decided to fight those monsters from a distance. He already brings out his Night.


    After costing his arrow with his spiritual energy he shoots that arrow toward those Liper. But he just did not shoot one arrow. One by one in just one second you can say that he should have almost 8 arrows toward those 4 remaining Monsters.


    But he wasn''t able to hit all four of them. These monsters have high intelligence but at the same time they also have higher instinct. Because of this two of those monsters already feel the danger. They use their full power to jump from that ce and because of this those two monsters did not get killed by those arrows.


    But Sam already expected that and because of this, the moment he saw them jump away from that ce, he once again shot Arrows toward those monsters. Fortunately, his arrows be invisible the moment he shoots them. Because of this, those two Liper feel the danger once again but this time they are unable to react on time and finally get killed by those arrows.


    Finally, Sam sighs in relief. After that he began to collect all the loot and the dead bodies. But the moment after collecting those things he was just about to leave, he suddenly felt more presence around him. Instantly he uses his spiritual vision and that time he is able to see the aura thates from the distance.


    Currently even though he was in the forest of death but because of using the spiritual vision he could still see the aura that monsters or any Warrior release from their body.


    With that he instantly saw more aura of Monsters. Most likely those monstersing toward his ce and because of this instantly he once again became alert and already ready to shoot arrows.


    2 secondster, he saw two monsters running toward his ce. Those Monsters weren''t Liper. They are called the iron bear. But the most confusing thing was why were they running like this?


    Sam at this time instantly did not suit his Arrow toward those Monsters because he also wanted to know why they were running like this. Those monsters already pass through him and are still advancing. Sam begins to follow those Monsters.


    Sometimeter,


    Those two Monsters finally came to a ce. Sam also followed them but when he came to the ce where those two monsters suddenly stopped moving, he became very surprised because right now in front of him he could show 10 more iron bears like this. One thing you should know about this Monster is that they have iron like defense, not only that they could also turn their whole body and theirs into iron while attacking their enemy.


    So you can say that those monsters are very strong but at the same time they are also very strong. Even though they were fast,pared to any other Monster they weren''t that fast.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Right now in front of him, Sam could see those 12 iron bears standing there and they were looking at the tree in front of them. But the three also wasn''t your normal tree.


    This tree was very big andpared to any other normal tree in that forest history was also very thick. And the main thing was that in the top of the tree you can see a beehive.


    That beehive was the home of the wild Bee of this forest. Also it looks like that beehive already full of wild honey that those iron bears wanted to eat. Because of this, all of them gather in this ce.


    Even though those wild bees were dangerous and they could also kill any Warrior or any Monster but their attacks were useless against those iron bears. As you know, those bears could turn their body into iron and because of this, those bees are unable to do anything against them. So you can say that those iron bears were the natural Predator of those bees.


    _____________________<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    ''Wow!!! Who could have expected that I would find wild honey in this ce? But it could be dangerous. I should wait until those bears make their move. I am also very curious about the taste of those wild honey. As I read earlier, those honey could also strengthen your body. So I really wanted to try that.'' Sam thought this while looking at those beers and that beehive.


    Most likely those wild bees also spot those iron bears and because of this, everyone of those monsters is ready to attack those iron bears. At any rate they wanted to protect their honey. But at the same time those iron bears already fully coated their body in iron.


    They were ready to break the tree so that they could get the beehive. Naturally those bees wanted to protect their home and because of these they were also ready to attack their enemy.


    Wasting no time, those bees quickly approach those bears. They are already using their power stings. Using their full power they approach those bears and most likely those beers are also ready for that.


    Those beers also swing their ws toward those bees. So instelly the shes between those bears and those bees happen.


    Sam looked at this fight from a distance without moving from his ce. But he had to say that those bees were very dangerous because even though those iron bears have strong defense, they could still get injured by those bees.


    So right now it was making Sam very curious who will win this fight in the end. Also he was maintaining the distance between him and those Monsters because he did not want to get attacked by those Monsters.


    Even though those wild bees have strong agility and strong sting power, unfortunately they did not have strong defense and because of this those bears could kill them easily.


    Like this, those bears and those bees are fighting each other. Those 12 bears fighting those countless bees. Even though bears could not get that much injured by those bees, still against those countless bees some of the already got seriously injured and because of this each also getting frustrated for those beers.


    Because of this, those beers are also going toward the three to destroy the tree. They also know that to kill all those countless bees was impossible. Because of this, they just simply wanted to collect the honey and then leave this ce.


    __________________


    "Boom!!"


    Sometimeter those were sessfully able to destroy the tree. At this time without caring about those bees and their attack, they instantly went toward the beehive. They quickly broke the honeyyer, and then began to run away from that ce.


    But those bees still did not stop attacking them. Those were also known that most likely sometimeter those wild bees will stop attacking them. So right now without fighting back they just continuously focus on running.


    Sometimeter actually that happened and those wold bees simply stopped attacking those bears and then went back toward their beehive.


    ______________


    Sam also started to follow those bears the moment they decided to leave this ce. As you know, he mostly prefers fighting those big monsterspared to those small bee-like monsters. It was simply annoying to fight this type of Monsters. In front of those countless bees he needed to use some kind of technique like his fireballs, only then he would be able to leave that ce without getting injured. But still it was tough to leave that ce without getting injured while fighting those types of Monsters.


    Because of this, he simply followed those bears. Most likely those monsters are now going toward their safe ce. They also did not want to get attacked by any other Monsters, when they were going to eat their food and because of this, now they were going toward their territory.


    Sam also follows them all this time. At this time he was just thinking about what to do. Because most likely when they will enter their territory they won''t be alone. So after thinking about it, he decided to attack those monsters right now.


    To be continued_________________

 Chapter 406 406 - Barren Land

    ''It will be very difficult to kill those when they will activate their iron skin. I need to kill them before they activate that technique. But still it will be difficult to kill all these ten monsters at the same time.''


    Sam thought that but at this time he was already prepared to shoot those Monsters. Right now he was mostlybining some of his skills to attack those monsters so that he could kill those 10 monsters at the same time.


    Before anything he quickly came toward those Monsters. You can say that he already came in front of those Monsters and instantly uses his confused ray toward those Monsters.


    This will make those monsters confused for 1 minute and this will be enough time for him to kill them. He just hoped that in this confused state those Monsters did not use their iron skin technique.


    At this time he uses his telekinesis technique to stop the movement of the Monsters, instantly he shoots those arrows toward those Monsters. But at the same time he uses the telekinesis technique to increase the power of those arrows.


    One by one in less than a second, he shot 10 arrows toward them. He also uses 70% of his spiritual energy to shoot those arrows. But it didn''t end there. At the same time he instantly uses his sun ray toward them.


    You can say that right now it was still quite difficult to change the nature of his origin spiritual energy. Because of this he decided to attack those monsters this way.


    You have to say that all of this happened very quickly that those monsters didn''t even know what happened. At first they got prated by those arrows but the next second they got shot by the sun ray. Sam quickly brings out his spiritual Energy recovery potion. He quickly gulped it down.


    But all this time he only focuses on those Monsters. He didn''t know if this was enough to kill them but fortunately he was just thinking. Previously all those arrows were already able to pierce through those monster''s heads and in the next second those sun rays finally killed them.


    You can say thatpared to his fire control technique less uses his light control technique. But it was before when he was in the Eden blue. But right now the situation is different. If he did not want to burn the body of the monster then this is the best way to kill those Monsters.


    ''I should use the light control technique from now on.'' Sam decided to use the light control technique from now on. Actuallypared to his fire control or his archery the power behind Those light control techniques was weak, and because of this previously he did not use this technique.


    But fortunately right now because of his origin spiritual energy he did not have to worry about that. Also he could control the body of those monsters using his telekinesis so it will be easy to kill those Monsters.


    Now you should know that if Sam was now fighting an intermediate special grade monster, then his telekinesis technique will be less effectivepared to when he was fighting those early special grade Monsters. He could control the body of those early special grade Monsters easily with his telekinesis technique but it is still difficult to kill those monsters just only using the technique. Also if the monster has higher spiritual energy then they could also break from his control.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    One by one the bodies of those bears fall down on the ground. With that it became sure to Sam that he already killed those Monsters. Because of this, he once again activated his concealment technique and then went toward those dead bodies of the Monsters.


    He quickly collects the dead body and the loot of those monsters. But at the same time he instantly collects the honey. After putting everything in his inventory he once again began to advance.


    But Sam didn''t know that previously because he killed those bears very quickly, some of the honey already fell in the ground, and not long after he left that ce you can see many bearse out. Everyone was attracted by the smell of the honey but unfortunately for them they were unable to find any honey. Even right now if they attack the beehive, they won''t get any honey.


    ___________________


    Sometimeter you can see the sky has already be dark. At this time Sam finally came out from the forest of the dead. Well right now he wanted to kill the monster in the barrennd and because of this, he came out from the forest.


    Beforeing to this barren ce, you already rested for some time. Because of this right now he was in his full energy to fight the Monsters once again. Also you can see the moon that was in the sky and because of this, Sam also uses the power of the moon. This instantly increases power and other stats.


    But also like any other ce right now in this night time you won''t find those weak Monsters. Night was the time for the Predator to hunt their prey. So right now you will only see those powerful Monsters.


    Not long after he began to advance, suddenly he saw some Bloody Hyena. This Monster has a bigger size than any normal hyena and not only that day were very thirsty for blood. Also these Monsters have poison in their mouths. If they bite anyone, then he/she will get immediately poisoned by that.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But before those Monsters could make any move, Sam used his confused ray toward them. Not only that he also instantly uses the sun ray toward them. With this Monster did not even get the chance to react and they got hit by those attacks.


    Those run rays instantly pierced through the head of those monsters. Because of this, those monsters got killed by his attack. Also previously after making them confused he also uses his telekinesis technique to control those monsters.


    With the same eliminated those monsters without getting exhausted. He still began advancing in the barrennd and searching for more Monsters.


    ___________________


    Sam doesn''t know that using those types of techniques at the same time he already makes some Warriors very shocked. As you know that he wasn''t alone in the barrennd and because of this while he was attacking those Monsters, many Warriors were also near that ce.


    But really all of them got surprised when suddenly they saw that out of nowhere those Monsters were getting attacked by someone or something and not only that, when those monsters died and Spawn the loot, they naturally saw that those loot and the dead body suddenly vanished from their ce.


    So it was a natural thing for those warriors to be speechless.


    ________________


    Sam on the other hand was now searching for those Monsters, and it doesn''t really matter to him what those people were thinking about this. The only thing he cared about was to kill the Monsters and then collect their loot and the dead bodies.


    But that wasn'' end there because he is still needed to search for more monster.


    _______________


    4 hourster,


    After killing thest wolf Sam decided to rest for sometime. One thing you should know that all this time he was fighting those moon wolves. As usual, those monsters already have more power in the presence of the moon. But fortunately Sam is also able to power because of the power of moon technique.


    Right now he was resting and eating his food. He will still continue to hunt sometimeter after recovering his full energy.


    At this time he doesn''t know but many things already happen with those other Warriors who previously saw the dead body of those Monsters suddenly vanish. Unfortunately they did not have any proof. Because of this many people did not believe them but some of them believe that. So you can say that right now a rumor about a Ghost Warrior was


    A Ghost Warrior who was born because of his spiritual energy. Also he could attack anyone without alerting that person or that monster. So with that the identity of Ghost Warrior already became famous and many of the people already wanted to know about the ghost warrior.


    Sam wasn''t aware of that or even if they told him this he would just smile at them. He never liked a nickname like this but still he won''t be able to do anything with those nicknames.


    After resting some secondster Sam  gets up to find Monsters and then kill them. It was time to find those Monsters once again.


    Most likely his luck was good because not long after that he already found me Bulls. As you know how hard it was to find those monsters but right now he suddenly found those Monsters. Naturally because of this he was thinking that his luck was good.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 407 407 - Unknown People

    Sam deactivated his concealment technique while resting. Currently he was in the barrennd. He already killed those me Bulls earlier and now he was resting.


    Even though it was night time but because of the power of moon technique he was already energetic. But still he wanted to rest his body and because of this, he stopped hunting. But he had to say that hunting in this barrennd was easierpared to the forest.


    In the forest of the dead, you cannot tell which way the monster will attack you. Also, the forest was so deep that even the moonlight did not reach the forest. Because of this, the power of the moon technique wasn''t useful inside of the forest. You can only use this technique when youe in contact with the moonlight.


    So he rested for sometime while also eating his food. Even though he wanted to try the honey right now, it will bring him danger if you use it right now. With that he decided that after going back to the city he will use that.


    Suddenly you can say that Sam was thinking about his home Eden blue. What was happening? Also he was thinking about those saints and those warriors who most likely prepared themselves to go to another.


    What happened to them? Also how was his family and friends right now? You can say that thinking all of this, he became sad. Well it is natural that you will feel like this because still now he did not know how to go back to his.


    The condition of the Eden blue wasn''t that good. Most likely after 3 yearster the core of the will appear and the prime dragon will attack the Eden blue. Not only that dragon but those people from the other worlds are also looking for the chance to steal the core of the.


    So after thinking all of this he just doesn''t know what to say. Even though he was feeling sad, he knows that feeling sad won''t help him. He visits to find the way to go back to his home.


    ''This time after going back to the city I will spend some days looking for information. If it is necessary then I need to ask the king about this. Sigh, I still don''t know how they will react when they will get to know about the truth. Sigh,'' after thinking all of this Sam just released a deep breath.


    ________________


    While Sam was resting he didn''t know that a group of people was advancing toward his tent. If Sam saw them, he would immediately recognise them. Because it was Livia, Emma and the others. They were now advancing toward his direction.


    They just need to kill some more of those me bulls and only then they will finish their mission and they could go back to the city. But right now they were searching for those me bulls but they did not find anyone.


    "Sigh, even after searching all this time we did not find those me Bulls? Where did those bulls go?" Livia said that with a frustrated tone.


    Actually not only her but all of her teammates were also frustrated about this. Also one more thing was that Kevin wasn''t present in her group. Actually he wasn''t part of her team and because of this, she did not tell him. Emma was enough to protect her.


    "Sister Emma, did you sense any of those me bulls around us?" Suddenly Livia asked Emma.


    Livia called Emma, sister Emma. Emma was her grandfather''s student, and because of this she called her sister. Not only her but even the prince also called her sister Emma.


    "Unfortunately most likely around us you will not find any me Bulls. Most likely someone already killed those Monsters and because of this, until now we did not find any of those Monsters." Emma said that.


    Now all this time she was observing and scanning her surroundings. With that she could already tell that there are no me Bulls around them. But at this time Emma found something that made her serious. She did not reveal it to Livia.


    Currently you can say that probably 2 km away from them she senses some people. It could be any other Warriors but that was in the case. You also thought that those people were just regr Warriors but when she tried to sense them carefully, she found dark aurasing from those people.


    ''Are they rted to the dark abyss? Also why are they looking toward us?'' Emna began to think.


    If you think that Terraria was danger free then you are wrong. They also needed to face many dangers that most likely warriors from the Eden blue won''t be able to fight.


    So if her guess was right then it could be dangerous for Livia. Fortunately, she was here to protect her. Also most likely those people were thinking that she was just a special grade Warriors.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    ''I really captured them and only then will I find out the truth. But, most likely those people were from the dark abyss.''


    ''Now the main question was why are they here and why are they looking in this direction? Did theye here for Livia? Most likely it was the case,''


    Emma was still observing those people and she could tell that those people were just continuously staring in their direction. They thought that nobody will able to find them from the distance but it was unfortunate for them. Emma already finds out about them.


    While Emma was observing those people while advancing with Livia and the others, she instantly felt something or someone used some kind of scanner thing. But it wasn''t in there she once again I will to feel that and with that she became sure that it was a scanner like thing. Also it wasing from a different direction.


    She quickly turns around and then focuses on the direction. Only then she found that not far away from them she could sense a person. But this time this person wasn''t from the dark abyss. Also she was very familiar with this person. Just looking at the aura of that person she already recognised him.


    ''Is he using some kind of device to detect the enemy or life from around him?'' she thought that.


    But she once again did not inform Livia about this. With that they just normally advance toward the direction of that person.


    ________________


    Sam, who wasn''t far away from them, was already looking at the life detector machine. A few seconds ago his device gave him the signal that some people wereing toward his direction. But fortunately there weren''t any Monsters. Most likely they are Warriors and because of this, Sam rxes a little. But still, he didn''t let go of his guard.


    You already activated his spiritual vision. With his spiritual vision he could also see in dark ces so it was easy for him to see in the night.


    This time using his technique he suddenly spotted many aura of warriorsing toward his direction. Also mostly those people were just normal Warriors. Because of this Sam immediately stops using the technique.


    While looking at those people and their aura, Sam was quite surprised because don''t know why he felt that he was familiar with their aura. It was just he cannot remember where he felt those aura previously.


    But Sam did not need to think that long because sometimeter he already recognised everyone of those people.


    Livia, Emma and her teammates, when they reach very close to Sam''s camp, only then they suddenly notice the camp. They also notice a person beside the camp. At first they were unable to recognise that person and because of this, they instantly became ready to fight.


    But at this time Emma told them not to worry that person wasn''t an enemy. Also the important thing was that he was resting here normally, they were the one who came toward his camp.


    After hearing all of these, those people suddenly begin to feel embarrassed. They were already ready to attack that person because they for a second thought that it was their enemy. But after Emma assured them, they rxed.


    But at this time If you look at Livia, then you can see that she was naturally excited because she already recognised that person. She already senses the aura, and with that she already knows who this is.


    Wasting no time she quickly began to run in that direction. This makes all her teammates speechless except Emma. When they hear the name, they understand why she was shouting like this and begin to run toward the direction.


    "Sam!!! I am Livia." Livia told that to Sam while going toward his direction.


    Sam, who was ready to attack those people, also gets surprised after hearing that. Only then he was able to recognise everyone. Only then he realized that it was Emma, Livia and her teammates.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 408 408 - Abyss Human

    "Sam!!! What a coincidence." Livia aftering in front of Sam, said to him.


    Sam on the other hand was quite surprised when he noticed Livia and the others. He did not think that he would meet them in the barrennd. Well not that it wasn''t possible he just did not expect this.


    Finally he rxed a little and then he also greeted Livia and the others.


    __________________


    Sometimeter,


    Right now you can see that Livia, Emma and the others were sitting with Sam and all of them eating their food right now. Well, Livia and her teammates also decided to rest for sometime. Even after searching they did not find those me bulls and because of this They were quite exhausted. So they immediately agree with Livia, when she told him that they should rest for sometime.


    At this time, Livia and her teammates were asking him questions about his hunting and mission. They instantly get surprised when they hear that Sam came here without epting any mission. This time he came here with one goal. He just wanted to kill those Monsters and also wanted to get those loot.


    But still you can say that right now not that many people came to the danger zone without epting any mission.


    At this time Sam also asks them about their mission and only then he gets to know that they got the mission to kill me  bulls. They already killed 90% of those require me Bulls but suddenly they did not find any of those me Bulls and because of this, they need to wait for tomorrow to kill those me Bulls.


    After hearing this Sam just coughs a little. Because most likely he knows the reason why they did not find those me Bulls. Actually he was killed and because of this, most likely those remaining me Bulls already escaped from this ce. But he did not say that to them and decided to stay silent.


    At this time he also tells them about his hunting. Which type of monster he hunts all this time because it has been 10 to 12 days since he came to this hunting zone to kill those Monsters. While telling them he did not say the exact number of those Monsters because even he didn''t know the exact number. But, he still did not say that. He just gives them a number of those Monsters.


    __________________


    Even sometimeter everyone was resting and they were talking about various things. Even though Sam was listening to them, he was also focusing on the life detection device.


    Mainly he wanted to know if any Monster came near his base or not and because of this, he was always looking at the life detection device.


    At this time when he was looking at the device he suddenly noticed Emma was serious and she was looking in the right direction.


    ''What happened? If I remember correctly then from the first she was looking toward that direction? Did somethinge toward this ce from the direction and because of this, she is this much serious?'' This makes Sam very curious.


    Actually he already noticed Emma looking toward the right direction from the first but previously he did not think it was anything serious, but right now it looks like it is a serious matter.


    Most likely because he was staring at Emma like this she also sensed him and because of this she turned around and looked in his direction. She saw Sam looking at her with curiosity.


    But, she didn''t think that much and turned around. Right nowpared to Sam, she has more important matters to handle. Because of this she justpletely ignored him and then once again started to look in that direction where she was feeling the aura of those people.


    Right now those people are slowly advancing toward their direction. Because of this, she was very serious and you can say that she was also ready to take action against them.


    Suddenly at this time, the life detection device begins to vibrate. Everyone present in that ce was surprised when they heard that. Why do things suddenly begin to vibrate like this? Everyone except Sam was thinking like this. Even Emma was surprised after hearing that sudden sound.


    Sam got up from his seat and then began to walk toward the device. Right now everyone present in that ce is looking in his direction with their curious look. Sam did not say anything and just now looked at the device.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    At first he thought that it was most likely Monstersing near them but then he noticed that it wasn''t the life signal of monsters. Those are the life signs of humans or you can say Warriors.


    So he instantly thought that those Warriors were most likely passing through this ce but then he noticed those Warriorsing toward their direction with some suspicious behavior. They weren''t walking normally but they were advancing toward this ce with cautiousness. This instantly makes him very surprised and also makes him very curious.


    ''Who could be those people whoe here like this?'' he thought.


    "Sam, what is that sound?" Livia aske that question.


    Only then Sam realized that he wasn''t alone. While still focusing on the life detection device he answered her question.


    "This is a special device that could detect the life sign of anything. With this I could detect the life sign of a Monster or the life sign of warriors. With this in advance I could prepare myself. Even if any Monster or any of my enemies try toe to my ce stealthily, they will still get detected by this device."


    You have to say that after hearing this Livia and the others became very surprised. Even Emma bes surprised and then instantly realizes that most likely that device detected the life sign of those abyss humans.


    "Why is it vibrating like that? Did some Monster decide toe near us or are they just warriors?" Livia asked that.


    "After looking at the life sign I could tell that it was some Warriors who were approaching in our direction. But, it is just¡­ " after saying that sentence Sam suddenly stops.


    "Don''t tell them anything." Before he could finish that sentence he suddenly heard this in his mind. Instantly Sam bes surprised and he already guesses who this person is.


    "Why did you stop? It is just what?" Livia asks that with a curious tone because beforepleting the sentence Sam became silent and this made her more curious.


    "Nothing, well he wanted to tell you that those people are more powerful than you and your teammates. So he is just surprised because he also did not expect those powerful people to be roaming around in this ce."


    Before Sam could tell her anything, Emma suddenly said that.


    "Ohh¡­ well it isn''t a new matter because to find those powerful monsters they needed to go deeper in the barrennd. So it ismon to see powerful Warriors passing through this ce." Livia answered that and with that she lost her interest. Not only her but almost all of our teammates lost interest.


    But right now only Sam and Emma are talking about this matter. All this time Sam was only looking at her direction. He wanted to know the real identity of the people that approached them. Why did Emma not let him tell the truth to Livia? Also, are those people the reason for her bing serious like this?


    "I also don''t know the real identity of these people but I could tell you that those people are most likely rted to the Abyss. Beforeing here I already sent those people and I also saw the dark spiritual energy that came out from their body. Most likely those people wear clothes rted to the Abyss. Because of this I called them the Abyss human. Also the most serious thing was that those people most likely wanted to do something with Livia. They were targeting her and because of this all this time I was just watching over those people. I don''t know when they will try to attack us and because of this, I am watching over those people."


    Emma knows that Sam was curious and because of this, she decided to tell him about those abyss humans.


    After hearing all of this Sam also could tell that it was a really serious matter. But then suddenly he had a question in his mind. Did those people belong to the dark association? Because only those people could use the dark spiritual energy.


    ''Most likely I needed to capture someone to get information out of him. But if those people were strong then I need to escape from this ce.'' Sam already decided that if those people were stronger than him then he would just escape from this ce.


    ''How did you be sure that they were targeting Livia and others? Those people could have also targeted her.'' Sam asked this.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 409 409 - Weird Emma

    ''How did you be sure that they were targeting Livia and others? Those people could have also targeted him.'' Sam asked this. Well, he did not ask that to Emma, he just asked that to himself. Because he was sure that the mastermind who previously wanted to harm him most likely will send his subordinates once again after him. So it could be that those people were the subordinate of that mastermind and they wereing here to capture him or something like that.


    But he did not say that to her and just looked at the life detection device. He also did not tell Livia and his friends that those people wereing toward their direction. Because most likely he did not need to make any move. Emma would be enough to handle them on her own. Most likely she was just waiting for a chance to attack those people.


    ''I should still tell her not to kill all of them because we need the truth before we kill them. If it is possible I also wanted to know about the mastermind. I don''t think these people n this on their own.'' Sam thought this and after that he immediately tried to contact Emma using his telekinesis technique.


    Fortunately sessfully able to talk to her and he already told her not to kill them before knowing their main Motive.


    Emma agreed with him but she also told him to cover for her. She needed to take care of those people and Sam needed to cover that time for her. So that nobody suspects anything wrong.


    ________________


    Sometimeter,


    Emma already left the camp after telling them that she needed to check for the location of those me Bulls. At that time Sam also joined the acting and told her that she should go in the right direction because previously he saw some me bulls in the direction.


    With that nobody will suspect them and Emma could easily finish her work.


    Even Sam also wanted to go to that ce but it could make everyone suspicious and also he didn''t know how powerful those people were and because of this he also did not want to take risks. Also he knows that Emma was a Elite or epic grade Warrior, with that she will be enough to handle those people if those people also weren''t Elite or Epic grade Warriors.


    10 minutester,


    Emma came back. Aftering back she told everyone that she found some clue about those me bulls and most likely they could find those monsters in the direction. But they need to wait for sometime because those Monsters weren''t that close.


    Livia and others already noded after hearing that and with that they will rest.


    At this time If you look at Sam then you can tell that he was very curious to know about those people. Actually he saw in his life detection device that suddenly a person, most likely Emma appeared in front of those people and then suddenly she took them out of the range of his life detection device.


    So because of this Sam wasn''t sure how the condition of the people was or where she put those people.


    He tried to ask her but she didn''t respond. This makes him very curious. Why did she ignore him? What is the problem with her? Did something happen when she went there?


    He also uses his spiritual vision but even with that he could tell that everything is normal then why she is ignoring him like this. It was like she did not want to answer his question and because of this she was now ignoring him.


    '' It makes me more confused. Why didn''t she tell me the truth? Is she also part of the group or something like that? But I don''t think so because I cannot feel any dark spirit and energying out from her? Then why is she ignoring me like this?''


    Right now Sam was thinking this type of question but he was still trying to contact Emma. Sometimeter when he realized that most likely she wouldn''t tell anything to him, he just decided not to ask her about this.


    ''Shit, because of this I should not trust anyone. I should try to find out what happened earlier in that ce.'' Right now Sam wanted to find out what happened to those people. Did the escape from this ce or Emma already kill them?


    He wanted to find out about this because he wanted to know the truth about those people. Also he wanted to know if those people were rted to the dark association from his world or not. What is the dark association already know about the abyss and the main Territory of the dark association was in the Abyss.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Before anything you also need to find more information about the Abyss. All of this he just sighed. Really aftering to Terraria, he just kept getting surprised and surprised. How much new information he will get in this new world.


    ''Nowe to think, is there anyone who had supreme observation or supreme concealment techniques?'' Sam really wanted to find out about this. But unfortunately he doesn''t know how to find out about this. If some people really had that type of technique then it could be dangerous for him. But even if they did not have that type of technique they could still spot him because of the energy fluctuation while using his techniques.


    __________________


    Sometimeter suddenly left his camp seeing that he sensed some Monster that he wanted to kill. Livia and the others didn''t get the chance to say to him that they wanted to tag alone. Sam did not give them any chance to talk and left the camp.


    Most likely Emma already knows why he left the camp like this. But she wasn''t worried about that.


    On the other hand,


    Sam already brings out his life detection device and then begins to look at the device. If those people are really alive and nearby then he could spot them. If they really die only then he won''t be able to spot them.


    He began to search around that ce but even after searching that long he did not find anything.


    He was using his spiritual vision technique to search around. Even if Emma killed those people, he would be able to detect them because if anyone died, it would take some time for their body aura to fade away and because of this he was using that technique to find those people.


    But even after finding that long he did not find anything, most likely those people already escaped from this ce or they already got eaten by some kind of Monsters.


    ''Really this Emma makes me very curious. Is she really rted to those people and because of this she helps them to escape from this ce? But most likely it was because if she really was part of the group then she could easily capture everyone. Then most likely she already killed all those people and threw their dead body in front of these monsters.'' After thinking all of this Sam just sighs.


    Right now you can say that he already knows that he needs to be careful around Emma. Most likely he should not trust her after this. She could also be an enemy that is just looking for the right time to attack him.


    After deciding sometime he decided not to go back to the came because it could be dangerous for him right now. So wasting no time using his full speed he went inside of the forest of death. Right now staying on the barrennd could be dangerous for him and because of this he quickly enters the forest.


    But just after entering the forest he did not stop there. He just kept going deep in the forest so that she was not able to find him that quickly. Also he was already using the concealment technique so that she did not find any clue about him.


    Even if he was confident in his concealment techniques, he still did not want to stay on the barrennd. What if he got attacked by her the moment he decided to rest after fighting those monsters.


    Even though right now Livia and the others could get confused and suspicious because of this sudden move but he did not care about that. Right now he wasn''t that powerful where he could protect himself from those powerful Warriors and because of this he could only escape or you can say tactical retreat.


    ''Most likely Emma already guessed that I left that ce and I won''t be going back. I hope that I do not get attacked when I go inside of the city or if I try to use the royal library. With that most likely staying in that city could be dangerous for me, but staying outside of the city will be more dangerous and because of this I needed to stay inside of the city.'' Sam knows that staying outside of the city will be more dangerous for him right now.


    Outside of this Kingdom He could get attacked by anyone at any time. So if he wasn''t prepared at that time then he could also lose his life and Sam did not want that.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 410 410 - Coming Back

    15 dayster,


    Right now you can see a person who was fighting those Kangaroo monsters in the barrennd. As you can see that it was some was fighting those Monsters. Also he wasn''t using his concealment   technique to fight those Monsters. You can say that Sam considered this monster as his fighting partner and because of this he did not use concealment techniques while fighting these Monsters.


    You can say that he already knows the attacking pattern of those monsters and because of this he could easily dodge the attack of those Monsters.


    Suddenly one Kangaroo came behind him and just about to attack him with his tail. But Sam already senses that and jumps away from that ce.


    But he quickly turned around and swung his sword toward that Kangaroo. Even without using the spiritual energy to coat his sword he is easily able to kill that Kangaroo.


    After killing that Kangaroo Sam did not stop there, one by one he also began to kill those kangaru while also dodging the attack of those kangaroos.


    _______________________


    "Well, let''s go back."


    Sam said that and began to go toward the entrance of the city. It has been one month since he came to this danger zone to fight these Monsters. So you can say that his mission to kill the monster for 1 month ispleted and right now it was time to go back.


    As usual while going back he could see many Warriors who wereing or even going back from the danger zone toward the city.


    Looking at all of this you can say that Sam remembers about his home but what can he do right now? But he already decided that after going back to the city he will focus on finding out about the information.


    In this one month you can say that Sam already killed countless Monsters and also received many resources from those Monsters. But, you can say some did not like them and because of this he almost sold all of those resources and he got gold coins. But he did not sell those skills and other things that he got after killing the Monsters.


    But still most likely finding any skill in this ce was even harder than Eden blue. He only gets those after buying a lucky talisman. But even with that it was difficult because he almost killed 100 monsters and only then he received this skill and because of this you can imagine how hard it used to be to get any skill in this danger zone.


    ''Sigh, next time I need to find a Dungeon. Really those Dungeons make me curious. How were the Dungeons in Terraria different from the Dungeons of Eden blue? I really wanted to know this but before that I need to find a dungeon. Also most likely there weren''t any low grade dungeons.'' Allen already read about the Dungeons and reading that information he could tell that even though you will get to see a Dungeon if you go deeper in the forest of death, it was dangerous for him right now.


    The danger was out of his league. So because of this Sam just released a deep breath.


    Sometimeter he already enter the city,


    But when he entered the city he could feel that something was different. Previously he did not see this much decoration in this city but right now suddenly he could see those shops and the other things got decorated.


    This made him very curious so he asked a guard about this. Only then he got to know that the oni festival wasing and because of this everyone in this Kingdom was preparing.


    In the oni festival, they will pray to their Oni God and some lucky people will receive blessings from the oni God. So you can say this is the reason.


    Instantly this news made Sam quite curious but then he said to himself that he cannot get distracted this time. Right now his mein priority should be finding information. He was sure that he would get some information about world travel in the royal library.


    Fortunately he already had permission from the king and with that he did not have to worry and he could enter the royal library. Even though he cannot ess the main area of the library, he just did not care about that area. Right now he is only interested in finding information about world travel.


    ''Hmm¡­ I should also search about those Abyss people.'' He still remembers 15 days ago those people called abyss humans going toward his camp. Emma did something and because of this hepletely lost any trace about them.


    But from that day he was very curious about those abysses. Not only that, you can say that he almost met an abyss human. And it wasn''t any pleasant meeting.


    Compared to those Warriors from the dark association who also use the dark spiritual energy, these abyss humans were much more powerful. They have the perfect mastery over dark spiritual energy. You can say that that person was very powerful and almost he would have seeded in killing Sam, but unfortunately using the origin spiritual energy he absorbed that dark spiritual energy and also killed that person.


    So because of this he is also curious about abyss humans and at the same time he also wanted to find why those humans suddenly attack him?


    He got attacked by that abyss human two dayster after escaping from Livia and her group. Most likely it could be rted to him or it could be rted to Livia. Because he doesn''t think that the mastermind who previously wanted to harm him could send those people.


    But it was possible that he sent them but at the same time it is possible that previously those people came to that ce to attack Livia. She was the princess of this Kingdom so it is natural that she had many enemies who wanted to kill her.


    ____________________


    Sometimeter he came back to his house and after freshening up he also began to eat some food.


    4 hourster,


    He finally woke up from his sleep. You can say that previously he was very tired. For this one month he just continuously killed those Monsters without resting that much and because of this he was mentally exhausted.


    After this four hour rest he was now fully recovered from that exhaustion.


    ''I should go back to the Warriors association and see if I could get anything after selling those loot.'' as you know that he almost sold all the loot in his system shop. But he did not sell all of them and he still has some of the loot.


    So he wanted to see if he could get anything after selling them to the warrior association.


    But before anything he quickly began to absorb those crystals one by one. For this one month he did not use any of the Crystal or anything to power up. He just only collected those crystals and right now it was time to absorb them. As usual while absorbing those crystals his body felt very rxed. He likes this feeling very much.


    "Status,"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (16600/16600)


    Spiritual energy: (16500/16500)


    Strength: 1400 + 250 - 1650


    Agility: 1400 +250 - 1650


    Physique: 1410 + 250 - 1660<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Intelligent(mental power): 1400 + 250 - 1650


    Spirit:1400 +250 - 1650


    Status points:- 00


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Special) (intermediate) / (early B-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 700M


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( cooldown for 5 month)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon devour (grade A)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)(+)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B) (+)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)(+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)(+)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    As you can see that he almost uses all of his Status points and right now he already became a B-grade warrior. He easily broke through to B-grade. Not only that he is also very close to bing an intermediate B-grade warrior.


    But it wasn''t just the case. As you can see he was able to collect 700 M upgrade points and with that he could upgrade his techniques once again. But right now the main thing was that he could also upgrade his potential. He was really waiting for this. He really wanted to upgrade his potential and wanted to see what would happen when he did that.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 411 411 - New Technique

    When he tries to upgrade his potential it shows that he would require 500 million upgrade points to upgrade his potential.


    ''Isss¡­ why the hell upgrading my potential needed me so many update points?'' some thought that. Well he did not think that he would need this much upgrade points to upgrade his potential.


    So he did not upgrade his potential and decided to upgrade his techniques. His absorption technique has already reached A-grade. So he decided to upgrade his other B-grade techniques. He wasn''t sure how much upgrade points he would need so wasting no time he quickly clicked on the plus (+) button.


    But you can say that he once again became surprised because once again he needed 500 million upgrade points to upgrade his b-grade techniques to A-grade. Once again this puts him in a tough situation.


    He only thought that most likely he will need 200 to 300 million update points but who could have thought that he will need 500 million upgrade points. With that he won''t be able to upgrade that much technique. So he began to think about what to do at this moment.


    Right now he could also increase his potential. Increasing his potential he will not face any type of pressure when using those powerful techniques. Not only that he will also be able to learn any of those techniques faster than anyone. But the main thing was that all of this he could do using his system so as you can tell that actually he didn''t need his potential to be upgraded. The only thing you will get after updating his potential that would be he will not have any limit for his growth.


    After thinking for some time, he decided to fuse his stealth and spirit concealment technique.


    Superior stealth (B-grade) + superior spirit concealment (B-grade) = Superior concealment ( C-grade)


    "Superior concealment


    [Using this technique your aura willpletely disappear. Nobody will be able to find you even if they are in front of you. They won''t be able to tell you about your grades or power, until you do not allow it. Alsopared to earlier, right now you don''t need it to use that much spiritual energy to maintain this technique. It will cost you 800 spiritual energy/ minutes. It will also put less pressure on your body and with that you can use this technique for a long time. Only people with the superior observation technique could find you.]"


    After fusing both of these techniques he got the superior concealment technique. The new technique allows him to use all the features of both of those techniques at once. Also this technique cost him less spiritual energypared to before.


    With that you can say that he was happy. To fuse both of these techniques he needed 200 million upgrade points and he used the 500 million upgrade points to upgrade his light control technique.


    If you are wondering why he did that then it was because he was now mostly using that technique to kill those Monsters. He wasn''t using his sword or fire or even archery technique to kill those Monsters. So because of this in the end he decided to upgrade the light control technique.


    The moment you upgrade that various information and experiencees to his mind and he just absorbs those experiences and information. It took 5 hours to get used to those experiences and new information.


    Now his mind and body experience that he uses the light control technique for a decade and he already mastered  that technique. Not only that he also unblock many of the special features of the light control technique. So much information and experience over the decade came to his mind.


    After 5 hours he finally opens his eyes, but when he opens his eyes he has a calm expression. He was happy but at the same time was very excited to use the new light control technique but then he will do that sometimeter. Right now he just came back to the city so he should give his body some rest before he could go to the danger zone.


    So with that he sighs.


    '' I should buy that technique.'' At this time Sam opens the system shop and then looks at the price of a technique.


    This was an observation technique that will tell him about anyone''s information, not only that it will also show him if that person was an enemy or a friend. To buy this technique he needed to use 10 million gold coins. Fortunately he already had that much gold coin so he decided to buy that technique.


    Also to learn those techniques he needed a legendary potential and he already had that. So wasting no time he quickly bought that technique and quickly learned that.


    But at this time he suddenly remembered something. He brings out his armor or you can say the full body armor. In this one month he got hit by many monsters many times and because of this right now he needed to repair his Armor. But unfortunately he did not have that much gold coin in his systems from which he could repair that.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    ''Sigh, it''s look like I need it to find a ck Smith in this Kingdom. I just hope that you will be able to repair this armor.'' Sam just hope that a ck Smith in this Kingdom could repair that.


    Well, his Armor wasn''t like those normal arms that the people of the city use. His armor was a special armor that he bought from the system shop. So he wasn''t sure even if he found a cksmith, will that person be able to repair that or not.


    So after some timeter, he left his home and then began to look for a cksmith in this Kingdom. Fortunately he did not need to find that long because he already found the cksmith association near the warrior association.


    Aftering inside of the cksmith association he quickly asks the owner of that ce if he will be able to repair that or not. You have to say that as usual those dwarfs were the owner of that ce. But the owner of that ce got surprised when he looked at that armor. He never saw a normal like this and he was shocked because he wasn''t sure if he would be able to repair that or not. But fortunately he called his father and when that old man looked at that armor he just got excited and shocked at the same time.


    "Who can expect that I will see a neon artifact?" That old man said that.


    He exined to his son about the neon artifact. This type of artifact is created based on the user. At first the maker needed the blood of the user and using that blood the maker would make armor and those other things. The most interesting thing was thatpared to any other normal this type of will is powerful.


    ______________


    "Brat don''t what do you? I could repair that. Your armor wasn''t the first Armor that I repaired. So don''t worry about that," that old man said to Sam and some good feel the confidence in that old man.


    _______________


    Finally after everything was done Sam came back to the library and then began to collect the books that you want to read. After selecting all the books he left the library and then walked toward his home.


    But suddenly he felt something. He suddenly felt many people following him from the moment when he left the library. This made me very shocked and surprised at the same time but he did not let it show in his face. He just acted like he did not care about those people and did not care about them.


    ''Most likely the mastermind previously wanted to harm me once again nning something and because of this he sent his subordinate to find me. I just hope that these people could give me the identity of that mastermind.''


    Sam thought that when he was going toward his home. But he does not directly go toward his home. Near his home he already found an empty alleway. Right now because of the night time you can see that the alleway became a scary ce.


    But Sam did not care about that; he just entered that alleyway. Also one more thing was that those people who were following him were B-grade warriors. Because of these most likely those people following him and they also have the full confidence that they will be able to capture him.


    __________________


    "Now this will be thest time I will ask you. Tell me everything you know about the mastermind who was nning and who also send you after me,"


    Right now if you look at the alleway, then you will find that everyone of those 9 Warriors got killed by Sam. Right now only one person was alive and Sam was asking him those questions.


    Previously that person decided to not to reveal anything and because of this Sam already broke his hand and leg. But unfortunately that person was unable to tolerate the pain and he decided to reveal everything he knew about the mastermind.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 412 412 - Frustration

    ''Why this Kevin person decided to target me? I don''t think so, have I had a conflict with him? Sam is thinking about this.


    From that person he already got to know that it was Kevin Galen who was after him. He was the son of Duke. The main thing was that he didn''t even know that Kevin. Right now he was just thinking about this. He already killed that person and came back to his house.


    After getting information from that person he was sure that most likely that Kevin person was nning something big and it could be dangerous for him. So he was thinking what to do.


    '' Most likely it is also dangerous to approach the king or anyone right now. So I should also avoid the royal library. Sigh, it will be a loss for me because I could get the information I needed from that library easily.'' Sam thought that.


    As you know, it could be dangerous for him to approach the king because of Emma. So he decided to rely on himself. Also mostly you won''t be able to stay in this city that long if that Kevin person decided to attack him using his power. But then he needs to prepare for that.


    Before anything he needed the information about those other kingdoms in this world. He wanted to know the location of the human Kingdom because it will be a safe ce for him. So he decided to go back to the library and pick that book which would tell him about the location of those other kingdoms.


    _________________


    While Sam was in his home and reading those books, Kevin wasughing like a maniac in his house. Because his first n ispleted. Right now he just needs to seed on his second part and with that he could kill Sam without any problem.


    He already knows that those people will be killed by him. You can say that it was his expectation that Sam kill them but this was his n from the start. Right now he has proof that Sam killed someone inside of the city. But this wasn''t enough to kill some because as you can see those people were following him. So he needs to seed on his second n.


    He already called his subordinate,


    "Are you guys ready for the second n? I already waited a month for that person toe back to the city." He asked his subordinates if they were ready or not.


    Everyone of them nodded. With that all of his subordinates left the room. On the other hand Kevin once again began tough like Manick.


    "Just you wait for Sam Kainer. In Just few days you will be dead. The king will personally kill you and Livia will begin to hate you. Haha¡­" after saying that Kevin began tough.


    But one thing he wasn''t aware of was that Sam already got information about him. Actually previously those people who attacked Sam were trained people. They train like this so that even in a serious situation they won''t say anything about their client. So Kevin has the confidence that Sam did not know anything but unfortunate for him. Sam gets to know all the information about him using the mind control technique. He uses the technique while torturing that person and because of this, he is able to get all that information.


    _______________


    Next day,


    Sam went back to the library, and already returned all the books. Fortunately he already got the general idea about those other kingdoms and also their location. So right now he could leave the Oni Kingdom to go toward the human Kingdom without any hesitation.


    But as you can see he did not instantly leave the city because until he got the time he also wanted to find information about world travel. Unfortunately he did not get any book from the normal library that could tell him how to travel to another World.


    ''Most likely, it is an important thing and because of this nobody will publish about it in the book. Sigh, looks like I need to talk to the king or I won''t be able to know about this. But talking with him could be dangerous. Because with that he could suspect me.'' Sam releases a deep sigh, after thinking all of this.


    Aftering back to his house he was thinking what to do. He cannot just recklessly approach the king''s pce because it could be dangerous for him. What if Emma tried to attack him. He won''t be able to defend her again so it will be very dangerous for him.


    On the other hand that library most likely did not have any information about world travel so the only thing he could do now was to go back to the danger zone. Most likely he could only do that to get away from the city.


    ________________<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But, right now, not only Sam and Kevin but two more people were aware that someone was targeting Sam and Sam already killed those people that were following him previously.


    He was the strongest warrior of this Kingdom and his student. As you can guess it was Perry and Emma who were aware of this.


    Perry could easily observe him from a distance, so he was already aware of that. On the other hand Emma also observes Sam from the moment he enters The Kingdom. She already knows that most likely Sam suspects her of being a criminal, and because of this, he previously escaped from that ce in the danger zone.


    By his cautious behavior Emma also gets surprised, and then suspects sometimes. Because of this, when he came to the city she decided to watch over him. Actually even though she previously did not tell what she was able to get to know from those people, she just wanted to assure him that he did not have to worry about that.


    But unexpectedly he was getting followed by some people. The most shocking thing was that she already recognised those people because she already saw them in the Duke''s mansion.


    "Is this the Duke also targeting Sam? But why? Is this because he is greeting the sudden fame?" Emma begins to think why did those people from the Duke''s mansion attack Sam.


    Also the most important thing was that Sam was already aware of those people. Most likely this was in the first attack. So after noticing all of this she was thinking what to do when she suddenly got notified by her teacher.


    Wasting no time she instantly went to her teacher. Most likely her teacher also knew something and because of this he quickly called her.


    ________________


    "So, you are telling me Viton Galen dare to approach the Abyss humans. He already sent them to capture Livia?" Emma''s teacher asked her.


    " Yes, teacher. I got this information from those people. Also they have the motive to capture Emma. So most likely he wanted to use her as bait, so he could ckmail the king and you." Emma told him this.


    After listening to this, Perry began to think deeply. All this time he was busy breaking through and because of this, he did not watch over the kingdom. But something like this happened and it was a pretty dangerous thing if it is really true.


    Abyss humans were pretty dangerous because they use dark spiritual energy and they also have a connection with those Demons. So it was pretty risky to approach them and most likely Viton needed to pay some price to approach those people.


    But the main question was why he did that and why he wanted to capture Livia? Also most likely Viton Abyss humans.


    "Where is he right now?" He asked.


    "Unfortunately, he wasn''t in the kingdom. 7 days ago he went outside of the city and still now I did not get any news about him. So I wasn''t sure where he was right now." Emma answered him.


    " But, teacher, I noticed something today. Some people that I previously saw in Duke''s mansion, following Sam. I don''t know why they were following him but I think this wasn''t the first time." Emma told her teacher.


    " Hmm, I also noticed that. But Sam easily handles them. But then the main question was why did he get followed by those people? Most likely we need to interrogate Viton." Perry said that.


    ____________________


    Sam waspletely unaware about this. Right now he was busy looking at those books that he recently bought from the library. Well you can say that he still did not lose the home to find information about world travel. So because of this he is still searching for the information. But unfortunately still now he did not get any information. Because of this he was getting frustrated because he quickly wanted to go back to his home but he was unable to do that. He just quickly wanted to find a way to travel back to his home.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 413 413 - Sudden Visit

    Next day,


    As usual Sam was reading those books when he suddenly got surprised and instantly became alert. Suddenly, he saw Emma standing in front of him. This made him shocked and then instantly he became alert. Even though he did not let it show that he was already ready to bring out his weapon and then attacked her.


    But he did not do anything. Right now Sam was just looking at her while she was also doing the same. For a moment, none of them talk to each other and just continuously stare at each other.


    ''How did she enter the house?'' This is the main question that Sam was thinking about. She just appeared here; it was like she got teleported to his house. Because of this, he bes shocked but then what if she decided to attack him and kill him. As you know, he has already been targeted by the Duke''s house. So he won''t get surprised if Emma also decided to attack her.


    But fortunately nothing like that happened. Emma who also observing Sam finally said to him,


    "Teacher, wanted to talk to you."


    After hearing that Sam became confused for a second, but then remembered that Emma''s teacher means Perry, the strongest warrior of this Kingdom. After his son became the king of the kingdom that person decided to only focus on the powerful.


    So right now you can say that only a handful of people know about him and know about his power. Most likely many people also think that he was just an old king who did not have that much power but those people were wrong. Right now this old man was the strongest warrior of this Kingdom.


    Now back to the main matter. After realizing that it was the old king who wanted to meet him, Sam became shocked this time.


    ''Why did that old man want to meet me? Is this some kind of n for Emma? Should I believe her or not?'' instantly he thought of this kind of question because he wasn''t sure if she was telling the truth or not. But it is also possible that she was telling the truth and that the old man really wanted to meet him. But then the main question was why he wanted to meet him? Actually you can say that he did not have a bad impression on that old man because he was the one who previously allowed him to read in the royal library. So you can say that he has a good impression of that old man.


    Even though he was thinking all of this he did not let it show in his face. He just calmly nodded. After that Emma told him to follow her so some decided to follow her.


    Actually you can say once again because of his superior concealment technique he has the confidence and because of this he decided to follow her. Even if this was a trap, he will just escape from that ce using this technique. Because of this he was following her with confidence.


    Actually Sam didn''t know but Emma was very surprised by that confidence. She still cannot figure out why he was so confident. Sam maintains the confidence even when previously he talks to the king. Most likely he has some kind of technique and with that he has confidence to escape from anywhere. Emma guessed that. Without anything like this Sam won''t be confident like this.


    ____________________


    Sometimeter, he came inside of a normal house. This house was close to the Royal pce. Because of this you cannot think that a person like the old king will live here.


    Looking at this, Alex became suspicious but he still maintained his calmness. But you can say that he already prepared himself, used his technique and escaped from this ce.


    But fortunately he did not need to escape from that ce because it was really the old king who lived here. Sometimeter he came to the hall room where he already saw the old kings sitting and waiting for him.


    After notice the old king told him to sit down. So Emma and Sam sit down beside the old king.


    "How are you? I did not see you for 1 month. Did you spend your time in the danger zone for 1 month?" The old king asked Sam.


    Hearing that Sam nodded. But you can say that he was looking at the old with curiosity. The old man already understands that and because of this looking at those curious eyes he just begins tough. Even though Sam did not let it show outside, the old King could feel that Sam was very tense. Because of this, the old man began tough.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "Haha¡­ don''t need to be tense that much. It isn''t like that I will kill you but I will eat you. Brat, I just called you because I wanted to ask something so you don''t have to be so alert that much."


    The old man said that with a smile.


    After hearing that you can say Sam became confused because what did this old man wanted to ask him. Even though he was still alert, he was rxed a little.


    "Before anything I wanted to ask you, did you have any enemy in this Kingdom or did you have any type of concrete with someone?"


    The old man asked him.


    You can say hearing that question Sam bes surprise for a minute but then he answer,


    "No, I don''t even know that many people in this Kingdom. Previously I spent my time in the library and right now I spent my time in that zone and I also did not think that I have conflict with anyone. In the danger zone I also avoid those other Warriors and hand alone so I didn''t think I would have that kind of conflict with anyone." Sam said that.


    Old king Perry nodded after hearing that. You already expected this answer because it is actually true. He has the technique to know if any person is telling the truth or not. Sam was telling him the truth so with that he became sure that Sam also wasn''t aware why he got followed by those people.


    " Actually, when I was observing the city I noticed that some people were following you. So I thought you had some kind of conflict with someone." He said that. Old man Perry didn''t tell them that those people belonged to the Duke''s house.


    "Actually I was also confused because this was the first time I got followed. Previously when I went outside of the city I also got followed by some people but even after torturing them I was unable to get any information from them. So currently I am also confused about this matter." Sam answered that but he did not say that he already got all the information from those people.


    But this time when he said that he did not get any information from those people, old man Perry could tell that it was a lie. So that means Sam is already able to get information from the people and most likely he is already aware of the Duke''s house.


    "I think you already meet those abyss humans. They are very dangerous and if they try to do something in our Kingdom then it will be aplete disaster. Because of this I was quite serious this time. I was trying to find the mastermind who sent those Abyss humans. That time I noticed those people following you. Also you don''t need to worry if you did nothing wrong then nobody will try to do anything to you. This is my promise and also be careful when you go outside of the city."


    The old man could tell that Sam did not want to talk about the Duke''s house. Well, it is natural that he did not want to talk about it because it could also bring him trouble.


    "Can you tell us about this Abyss human? Why are they so dangerous?" Sam asks that. Even though he already got the basic idea about them from the books, he still wanted to know from the old man.


    After hearing that question the old man begins to tell him about those Abyss humans. You have to say that the more Sam was hearing the more he became serious. Could have thought that those people would be very Vicious.


    As he already knows that those people rte to the Demons and because of these they also offer sacrifice to those Demons. The sacrifice could be an oni human or Human or anyone. They will capture that person and then start the ritual for the sacrifice. In this ritual that person who got captured by them and used as a sacrifice, will start to lose his life force. Not only that, even the soul of that person will get consumed by the demon.


    After hearing all of this naturally Sam became serious. Even though those abyss humans use dark spiritual energy like those direct associations in his world, they are more vicious than those dark association Warriors.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 414 414 - Wating For The Festival

    "So, as you can see why I am serious about those abyss humans. I think they are targeting Livia. The more pure royal blood they will sacrifice, the more reward they will get from the demons."


    After saying that, old man Perry stopped talking. But at this time you can say that Sam already guessed many things after hearing all of this. And he is definitely sure that mos t likely someone from this Kingdom approached those people and then previously told them the location of Livia.


    Sam doesn''t know if his guess was right or not, but it looks like old man Perry did not have any intention to tell him about this. Because of this he also did not ask him about this. Most likely this is rted to the royal family and because of this, old man Perry did not want to reveal anything rted to the royal family or something like that.


    "Hmmm¡­ from now on stay careful, because those abyss humans could also target the people close to Livia. So you should be careful in the danger zone." Old man Perry said this.


    "Don''t worry, I always stay alert in the danger zone." Sam nodded. It is possible that he could also get attacked by those abyss humans.


    " Well,e to think of it, you are still spending your time in the library. Did you need some information from the library once again? Then why don''t youe to the Royal Library? I am sure you will not find that much in those public librariespared to the Royal Library." Old man Perry said that.


    " Well, most of the time I spend my time in the danger zone and just recently came from the danger zone so I did not get the time toe to the Royal Library," Sam said. The old man nodded.


    After that, the old man began to smile and told Sam to go toward the dining room because it was time for lunch. Sam also did not object because as you know that even if they poison his food, he already has poison resistance so he won''t get affected by that.


    _______________________


    "Teacher, what do you think about him?" Emma asked the old man.


    "Hmm¡­ he is ok. Also, most of the time he told me the truth. But he already finds out who the mastermind is, and because of this, he wants to avoid answering that question. Most likely he thought we also have some connection with this case.


    Other than that I did not think he has some kind of connection with any other third party and came here to spy. But still, we cannot be sure because of this we still need to be alert about this. You can say that because of this I told him to read in the royal library because with that we can easily watch over him."


    Old man Perry told Emma. After hearing that Emma nodded.


    __________________________


    ''Most likely they still thought I was a spy and because of this, they wanted to watch over my movements and because of this, he allowed me to read in the royal library.'' old man Perry doesn''t know but Sam already guesses what is the reason for him to allow Sam to use the royal library.


    As you know, in the Royal Library you will find more informationpared to any other library and normally people did not have ess to this ce. Even if he saved Livia, he should not get ess to the Royal library but somehow he got ess, and even the old king told him he could easily enter the royal library.


    Just thinking about this you can feel that something was wrong here and most likely because they want to watch over his movement they allow him to stay in the royal library.


    Sam only has ess to the general knowledge section of the royal library so nobody has to worry that he will learn their secret techniques. Because of this, he also gets easy ess. If those people thought him a spy from the human kingdom, he guessed that it could be a possibility that because of this, he got easy ess.


    ''Sigh, forget about this.'' After thinking that Sam released a deep sigh. Right now he has more important things to do. Even if those people thought of him as a Spy and wanted to watch over him, he did not have any problem with that. He could also use that chance to use the royal library as much as he can to find the information that he was searching for.


    ______________________<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    5 dayster,


    [In the year 1022 of the new Ara, people from the Terraria finally found a way to travel to another world or get information about that world.


    As a first World to awaken The Spiritual energy you can say that the people of Terraria get the advantage and they finally found a way to travel between two worlds.]


    You can say that after that day, Sam spent most of his time in the Royal Library and after 5 days of working hard he Finally found this information. But unfortunately, it did not mention the process but with this, he already became sure that people of the Terraria already have a way to travel between two worlds.


    Unfortunately other than this he did not find any other information and most likely he will not get any information from all of this book even if he tries to search more.


    ''Sigh, the main thing was that I am not sure if normal people have ess to that world travel process to travel in another world. If anyone from the Terraria has ess to that then it will be easy for me to use that. But if it wasn''t the case then it could be a problem for me.'' Sam releases a deep breath after thinking about this.


    He just needs to find out about this matter and with that, he will decide his next n. With that, he left the royal library and went back to his house. One thing was that he already became sure that the old man told him to spend time at the royal library because he wanted to watch over him. Except for the time when Livia came to the Royal Library, you always felt someone staring at him. Sometimes it is also annoying. But Sam was able to endure that.


    As you can see, the whole city was decorated because of the oni festival. Even though it wasn''t started, the whole Kingdom looked very beautiful because of this. Right now everyone in this Kingdom is busy preparing for that festival. As you already know that every Oni human will pray to their god and some lucky people will get blessings from God.


    ''I should go hunting after watching this festival. It really makes me very curious how they received a blessing from God. I really wanted to see that.''


    Sam is also very curious about this festival so he decided that he will stay here until the oni festival is finished. This festival will go on for 7 days and on thest day they will pray to their god. Also, the good thing was that from tomorrow the festival will start, and because of this, Sam is also excited about this festival.


    Sometimeter he came back to his house. But he suddenly felt something was strange and because of this, he instantly did not enter his house.


    He only approaches the house after activating his concealment technique. Not only that, but he also looked around his house using his spiritual vision. With that, he saw that right now from his house a ck auraing out. This only makes him very shocked because why the hell happened to his house?


    Fortunately, he did not have to think that much because using the secret passageway that only he knows about, he entered his house. Actually, recently he built a secret way to enter his house so nobody is aware of that.


    Using that passageway he directly went inside his bedroom. Fortunately, he did not find anyone in his bedroom. He began to observe his bedroom and he was already sure that some people had alreadye to his bedroom.


    At this time he was already using the spiritual vision and with that, he became sure that he would find them in the hall room.


    He slowly came outside of the bedroom and finally found the reason behind all of this. Right now in front of him, he could see ck people or you can say, abyss humans. Right now they were creating a weird symbol on the floor. Not only that but they almost destroy everything around themselves.


    Even though Sam was curious about that symbol, he needed to take care of those two abyss humans as quickly as possible. Fortunately, those two people did not release the aura of an elite grade. They were epic.


    Sam already brought out his yer and then came behind them. He swung his sword 30 times toward them. Also, each swing is filled with his spiritual energy. Actually, he did not want to take reach and because of this, uses almost 80% of his spiritual energy while attacking them.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 415 415 - Going Back To The Old Mans House

    Instantly one of them got cut into pieces while the other one lost his leg. Sam did not kill him because he wanted to know why they came here and many other things. That other one didn''t even realize when he got killed. That person who just lost his leg, at first did not realize that. But then his body suddenly fell into the ground, only then he realized something happened to his body.


    Well you can say that for a few seconds, he did not even feel the pain and because of this it was confusing for a few seconds why he fell into the ground like this. But then when he once again tried to get up from the ground he realized he was unable to feel his leg.


    That person quickly looked toward his leg, only then he noticed that the ce was full of ck blood and he also did not have his legs. Only then suddenly a pain came to him and he began to scream in pain. The pain was so much that it almost made that person unconscious.


    Sam looked at all of this while standing in front of that person. But unfortunately he was using his concealment technique and because of this, that person was unable to see him. But at this time Sam quickly brings out a healing potion and sprays some potion into his legs.


    If you are wondering why he did that, well he did that to stop the bleeding of that person. As you can see, the blood finally stopsing out. But really looking at those ck blood he was thinking why this Abyss humans called humans if they did not have red blood.


    On the other hand, finally the pain began to fade away slowly and that person who was about to be unconscious once again regained his consciousness. Only then he realized that the bleeding had already stopped and the pain also went away somehow.


    That Abyss human just thinking why something like this happens when suddenly a person appears in front of him. Normally it was Sam who appeared in front of him.


    By habit he wanted to jump away from that ce to make a safe distance, but unfortunately he was unable to do that. On the other hand, handsome instantly uses the telekinesis technique to control his whole body.


    Suddenly that abyss human wants to use some other way to get away from that ce but then he realizes that his body did not listen to him. Not only that at this time finally Sam ask him,<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "Tell me all the details. I won''t ask you a second time so you should start exining why you are here and who sent you here."


    Even though that abyss was unable to control his body, he was using his full force not to release information. But unfortunate for him at this time Sam attacks that person with the mind control technique. With that finally that personpletely became a puppet and then began to exin all the details.


    30 minutester,


    Sam finally kills that person and after that he cleans his room. But even with that he was very serious right now because all the details he got to know from that abyss human made him this much serious.


    Who could have thought that if he did note back to his how is this quickly then he needed to face far more danger than this. Actually previously those two people created a summoning symbol in his house. This summoning symbol is directly connected to the Abyss world. Also one more feature of this symbol was that it will vanish or you can say it will disappear when they willpletely make this symbol.


    So with that you can guess how much it could be dangerous for him because any of these Abyss humans appeared in his house and also killed him.


    Both of those warriors were only just special grade warriors, both of them already using their life force to create this symbol. Actually this type of symbol needed them to use their life force and both of them used that. But unfortunately for those people Sam came back to his house and killed them.


    Westing no time he quickly destroys that symbol and only then he finally sighs in relief. But then immediately he knew that he needed to leave this house because the owner of this house gave the people the extra key to open his house. Actually he has one key and the owner of the house has another key to his house. So with that you can understand how those people appear in his house.


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 416 416 - Complicated Situation

    ?


    "Did something happen brat? Why are you so serious? Also what is that ck stuff on your body?"


    The old King once again asked Sam what happened.


    "Sir, you didn''t observe the kingdom? Also, can you observe the whole Kingdom at once?" Sam did not answer him but asked a question.


    "Well I am discussing something with Emma so I did not use my observation technique. Also yeah I can observe the whole kingdom at once. When you use my observation technique I can see everything that happens around the kingdom and also every person in this Kingdom will put in that observation. But why are you asking this? "


    The old king said that he could observe the whole Kingdom. After hearing this some became rxed a little because with that it will be much easier to find those abyss humans.


    "Actually when I left your house and came in front of my house, suddenly I felt something was wrong in my house. So I carefully entered my house and then I found that someone entered my house. Most likely the owner of that house gave them the key to enter the house.


    But it was an important matter because those people are the most important thing you should know. Those people aren''t your normal people because they were abyss humans. Actually, I have a technique that helps me to see the spiritual aura of anyone. So using the technique when I look at those people I can see ck auraing out from their body.


    Also when previously those people try toe toward our camp I also use that technique so I am sure that those people have the same aura as those people who previously tried to attack us in the danger zone.


    Now back to the main matter, those people created some symbols in my house. I don''t know what it was but one thing was clear that those people were most likely doing something dangerous. So without any reservation I killed one of them and then interrogated the other one.


    That one told me that they were creating a summoning symbol. With that more abyss humans could enter the city without any problem. After hearing that I did not waste anymore time to kill that person and came here."


    Sam exined everything that happened in his house some time ago.


    On the other hand, the old king and Emma, after hearing that, instantly became shocked. How did this happen? Because even though the old king did not observe the city right now, still this wasn''t enough time for those Abyss humans to enter the city. Also if Sam was really telling the truth then it is a very dangerous thing for everyone.


    The old king already knew that Sam was telling the truth so he instantly got up from the seat and quickly came in front of Sam. He began to check those ck stuff that was on Sam''s body. With that he finally became sure that he was really telling the truth and he really gill those abyss humans.


    Instantly you can say that the old King became very angry because he did not think that the security around his kingdom would be so weak that any abyss humans could enter the city. But then he calmed down and asked Sam if that person told him anything about their n or how they entered here.


    "Yes sir, he told me that they had a n to attack everyone in this Kingdom during the oni festival. Because of these they already created that type of summoning symbol around the city. They were waiting for tomorrow to attack everyone in this Kingdom while everyone was busy with the festival.


    Also one more thing was that even though they did not tell me how they came to the city but they did tell me that someone from this Kingdom and his subordinate also participated in this n. Most likely because of this nobody in this Kingdom finds about those abyss humans.


    Already many Summoning symbols had been created. Most likely those symbols were created inside of the house of those people who also have connections with those Abyss humans. But still I don''t know why they tried to create that symbol in my house. "


    Sam exins all of this thing that he got to know from that Abyss human. After exining all of this he just released a deep breath. As you can see, he is also very serious about this.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    If Sam did not go earlier in his house then those people will most likely sessfully create the summoning symbol and after that they will leave the house. So like this he won''t be able to get to know about that symbol. So if those Abyss humans really came to the kingdom tomorrow and attacked those people then old people would naturally kill them. But at the same time you will also search about this ce from where those Abyss humans came to the city. So like this he will be put in observation and also he could be a spy.


    After thinking all of this, Sam just sighs. But then it was a relief that he came here and exined everything to the old king. Even though he wasn''t sure if this old man was with those people or not, one thing was that he was already prepared to leave this city if those Abyss humans really attacked.


    Also one more thing was that from the start Sam was already ready to use his concealment technique. He wasn''t sure if this old man or Emma was with those people or not because of this he was ready to use his technique to escape from here.


    On the other hand the old King began to think something after hearing all of this. When he heard that someone from this Kingdom brought those Abyss humans into the kingdom then he naturally thought about the Duke. So most likely he brought those people inside of the kingdom and not only that his subordinates also participated in this n.


    Just thinking all about this makes that old man very angry that he wanted to just kill that Duke right now. Instantly pressure began to release from his body that almost crushed Sam. But then he realized that and he stopped releasing the pressure.


    "Sam, sorry about that. It is just that I really wanted to kill some people right now. How dare they participate in this n to harm their own kingdom." The old King apologized to him but you can tell that he was really serious when he said that he wanted to kill those people.


    Sam on the other hand, who was just about to drop to his knees, finally able to breathe. For a moment he felt like someone put a mountain on his head and because of this he was also unable to breathe. For the first time he experienced the power of a warrior of this world. Compared to this pressure, the pressure of the Saints in Eden blue was nothing.


    At this time give him a ss of water and Sam gulps down the water. Finally he sighs in relief.


    "Emma, we had some important things to do. Also go to the king and tell him about this. We need to find the ce where they created those symbols."


    The old king told Emma what to do right now. Emma on the other hand after hearing the order just about to leave the house. But suddenly Sam told them something.


    " Hmm¡­ actually I remember something. Previously that person told me that if they really sessfully created those symbols, then the symbols will automatically be invisible. You cannot find that symbol until you did not use some technique to see the spiritual energy."


    Suddenly Sam remembers this and quickly informs the old King about this.


    "Hmmm¡­ Ok. Also right now it will be unsafe for you to go back to your house. You should stay in another ce for today." It was really unsafe for Sam to go back to his house today and because of this working told him to stay in another ce. Sam nodded after hearing that. He already had the n to stay in another ce for today.


    Emma finally left the house and on the other hand the old king began to use his technique to observe the whole Kingdom.


    Other hand, Sam also left the house because right now he also needs to find a house that is safe for today.


    ''Most likely sometimeter the search team will begin to search everyone for those symbols. Sigh, everything once again bes veryplicated. Really did the walking know that it was the duke''s n for all of this.'' Sam thought this. Even though he did not tell that it was the duke, who nned all of this, he was sure that the old man and Emma already knew about this if they really interrogated those abyss humans previously.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 417 417 - Search Finished

    ?


    As Sam expected, sometimeter already many warriors began to search everyce of the kingdom. Even though Sam already told the old man about the location where Abyss humans created the symbols, it will be best for everyone if they search the whole Kingdom.


    Also not only that right now the old man is also using his technique to observe the whole Kingdom. He was observing all the people who are now behaving suspiciously by this sudden search.


    It has been 1 hour since the search had already started and you can say that his subordinate already found those houses where they saw the summoning symbols of the Abyss world. Even though some of those people were Nobles but still they got arrested by those Warriors. Right now the old man did not want to leave any person who has participated in this n.


    One by one all those ces discovered the same thing previously told him. But most likely not only those ces have those summoning symbols. Because his subordinates are also fine then in many other ces that Sam did not tell him.


    Everyone of those people who participated in this n most likely rted to the Duke. Even they wanted to use their rtion with the Duke to get a from this but unfortunately it was the order from the old king and even the Duke unable to do anything against the old king.


    The old King also told his subordinate to search the Royal pce and the Duke pce because what if they will find those symbols in these ces. But unfortunately his subordinates did not find anything in the Duke''s pce and the Royal pce. With that you can say that the Duke was very careful and he did not have a summoning symbol in his house.


    On the other hand, the Duke still did note back to the kingdom. This made that old man very angry because he just now wanted to capture that man and just kill him. Unfortunately Duke did note back to the kingdom and most likely he already knew that he would lose his life if he came back to the kingdom.


    "Sir, we found something in the duke''s house. After investigating this house, we were able to find some clues. The clue told us that moves likely some people of Duke house have connection with those Abyss humans. We already arrested the son of Duke and also those other workers present in the Duke''s pce. But unfortunately we did not find Duke or his wife."


    Suddenly when that old man was thinking about something he suddenly received this call from his subordinate.


    " Hmmm¡­ good to bring them here. I wanted to ask them something."


    The old king responded and then hung up the call.


    With this it became clear that the Duke already has some kind of connection with the abyss humans. And most likely he nned all of this. Right now it could be a possibility that everyone present in the Duke mansion was rted to this case.


    _________________


    You can say that because of this sudden action from the royal house every normal person present in the kingdom became surprised. One day before the festival, the royal guards decided to search like this. The Royal guard only told them that it was an order from the king so everyone needed to follow that.


    Sam at this time was in a hotel room and did not go back to his rented house. Right now he is just hoping that those search teams find all the symbols that were created in this city. With that tomorrow will be no problem and nobody needs to fear those Abyss humans.


    At this time he was also thinking about the Duke. How did that person have connection with the abyss humans? It is a very mysterious matter not only that he was most likely helping those abyss to create those symbols and because of this until now nobody gets to know anything about this.


    ''Most likely the old man stays busy in his cultivation. Because of this most of the time he was not able to observe the whole city and mostly Duke used this chance to do his work. But still I really wanted to know what I did to them and because of this, they were attacking me like this?'' Sam thinks why did he get attacked from the Duke''s pce.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Sometimeter when Sam was once again beginning to focus on those books suddenly he heard a knock on his door. This made him curious and he began to walk toward the door to see who was that person that was knocking on his door. Even though he was curious, at the same time he was already alert. Right now the situation of the kingdom wasn''t good and because of this he was alert like this.


    Fortunately beforeing in front of the door he already heard the voice. It was Livia. She was now calling him to open the door.


    Sometimeter Livia already told him why she came here. Actually it was the old king who called him because he needed something to talk to him. After hearing that Sam did not waste anymore time and then leaves the hotel with Livia.


    While going to the house of the old King Sam noticed that most likely even though sometime ago every person in this Kingdom got searched by the royal guards but it did not make them angry or create a huge impact on them. As you can see, all of them were excited because of tomorrow''s festival and because of this they also prepared themselves.


    Nobody could tell who would be receiving the blessing from God and because of this the whole Kingdom was preparing themselves to pray to God tomorrow.


    On the other hand, Sam has already reached the house of the old king and both of them enter the house. But this time he just not only saw the old king but you also saw many other people present in that hall room. He can also see the king and his subordinates present here.


    __________________


    "Thank you Sam. If it wasn''t for you then it could be very dangerous for all the people in tomorrow''s festival. Everyone could get attacked by the abyss humans if we did not find the symbols. Also because you were to find those corrupt novels of this city. They were using their power to do bad things and we also found many clues about it. Everyone of them will be beheaded by me."


    At this time the king said that while thanking Sam. As you can tell that it was most likely because of him they were able to save themselves from a dangerous situation like this. But still everyone could get attacked from the outside even if those abyss humans didn''te inside of the city.


    "Also we hear how you get attacked by the Duke and his son. But from now on you don''t need to worry about anything because we are already handling this matter. Even though we are unable to find the Duke, we already capture his son and from him we already get all the information.


    Actually he has a very dangerous n and he is also supporting his father''s n. Actually he wanted to show you as a spy and because of this he sent those people to create that type of symbol in your house. So even if those abyss humans are unable to kill you, it proves to everyone that you have some kind of connection with them.


    But you don''t need to worry, we already handle that matter and we have already started our search for the Duke who wasn''t present in the City."


    The King also said that. Even though Sam was really curious to know about the reason for that son of Duke to attack him, he did not ask that much. Most likely from now on heat doesn''t need to worry about getting attacked by anyone or followed by anyone. But still you can say that until the Duke did not get captured, nobody from this Kingdom was safe.


    What if the Duke had a second n and he wanted to use that if the first n failed. Fortunately after thinking this the king already increased the security and also if anyone did not perform their work properly then they will be sent to jail. Also not only that the old king will stay careful until the festival is finished.


    Most likely those abyss humans decided to attack the city because of the blessing ceremony. Most likely they have some kind of n and because of this, they decided to attack this time and did not attack the kingdom previously. But unfortunately if the Duke did not have any second n then he wouldn''t be able to attack the kingdom. Also one more thing was that not only the old king but many other people also observed the Kingdom almost all the time.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 418 418 - Festival

    ?


    Right now, a person was sitting in a chair when suddenly one more person appear on that room and told him,


    "Sir, your n has already been discovered by the king and he has already destroyed all the summoning symbols and also captured all your subordinates. Your son also gets captured by the king."


    As you can tell, it was the duke and the person that gave him the information was a spy, who worked for him.


    "Tch!!!! Useless brat. I already told him to stay careful. But he did not listen to me. He also sent those two abyss humans to do something. He should just die." Duke said that after hearing the report. After that the spy went away from there.


    At that time one more person appeared in the room but this time it was a girl. Actually it was the wife of the duke who appeared in the room. Aftering in front of the Duke she told him,


    "I know that you are angry at your son but you need to save him."


    After seeing that she left the room. Well you can say that in front of her even the Duke did not dare to say anything. He only sighed. Fortunately he already has a second n and most likely with that he could rescue that brat.


    Really the duke was very curious about that person who discovered summoning symbols. Definitely it was on the king or anyone from the Royal pce.


    ''Well, if the old man still had the power then he could easily discover that but right now he is already very weak. Then who discovered those symbols?''


    The Duke began to think about this. Actually the old King did not show anyone how powerful he was right now. Actually he showed the public that he was weakpared to before and because of this, he was living like that in a normal house. Because of this, the Duke also did not know the power of the old man.


    Suddenly the duke called someone and instantly that person appeared in front of him. He told that person something and after that that person left the room. Instantly you can see a cruelugh appear on his face.


    ''Haha¡­ even if I am unable to attack the kingdom from the inside, I could still attack the kingdom from the outside. Also be ready to lose your daughter, she will be a great sacrifice to the demon god.''


    After thinking that, the duke begins tough like a maniac.


    ________________________


    Nobody from the kingdom knows anything about this. Right now if you look at Sam then he was in the royal library and once again reading many books and trying to find the information about the Abyss world and demons.


    Actually he already confirmed that he won''t get the information about the process that will send him back to Eden blue. With that he stopped searching for that information.


    Actually aftering into the royal library he first searched for that information and he already searched all the books rted to that matter and unfortunately he did not find the process in which he will be able to go back. Because of this, he just stopped reading books rted to that matter.


    If you are wondering why he wasn''t frustrated? then you are wrong. He was very frustrated right now but what can he do at this moment? Because of this, he calmed down. Getting frustrated or getting angry won''t help him. When the festival was over, he could go to the old man and ask him about this.


    Sam already knows that most likely the king and the old man already know that he was reading books rted to the other world. So right now if he asks the old man about this most likely he will not suspect anything. Even if that old man''s hospital anything but Sam needed to take the risk.


    Right now he was reading the details about that abyss world. Actually that abyss world was apletely separate space where those Abyss humans live. Other than that you can also see the demons in that ce. Those abyss humans pray to those demons. For them those demons were the god, because of this, they also sacrificed people for those Demons.


    You have to say that in the royal library Sam already gets to know a lot of information about those abyss worlds and abyss humans.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    It is like that you won''t be able to go to the Abyss world. But it is really dangerous to go to that ce because that ce is full of dark spiritual energy. That energy will directly affect you and it will immediately attack The Spiritual energy inside your body. With this the dark spiritual energy will work like a slow poison.


    Not only Warriors die from that but it could also make you insane. Many people after getting affected by the dark spiritual energy lose the ability to think and they just be a mindless monster.


    After reading this information you have to say that Sam was quite surprised. Because as you know, he was very familiar with this. In Eden blue those association warriors also did the same thing and they also used the dark spiritual energy.


    ''Then is the headquarter of The Dark association present in this abyss world? Then it also has a possibility that everyone of those elders and the leader already became very powerfulpared to the saints in Eden blue.''


    Sam thought that. Well this is a very serious thing because suddenly the Eden blue has the restriction over him but when the core will appear on the surface, the whole Eden blue will be restriction free. So that time those people who went there to collect the core, will use their full power and in this time the dark association could also take the chance to attack Eden blue.


    Just thinking all about this makes some very worried. Fortunately he has time and in that time he needs to be powerful so that he can protect his home.


    _____________________


    Next day,


    Sam who was sleeping in the royal library suddenly got awakened by the sound of a drum. For a moment he became alert, but he realized that today was the festival and most likely because of this day ying the drums.


    He got up from the ground and after that he left the Royal pce. Right now Livia and the others are also preparing for the festival and because of this he could easily leave the Royal pce without telling them.


    But you have to say that the moment he came outside of the Royal pce he saw how beautiful this ce became. The whole Kingdom was decorated and everything looked so beautiful.


    Fortunately the festivals still did not start and because of this you cannot find that much crowd. Sam uses that chance toe back to his home. Fortunately he did not find anyone in his house right now.


    ''Most likely the owner also got arrested by the guards.'' Sam thought that when he entered his home. Before anything he needed to fresh up himself and then you also needed to prepare for the festival.


    _______________________


    The blessing ceremony will be held around 7:00 p.m. Actually for these 3 days the blessing ceremony will be held around 7:00 p.m.


    As you know that currently in this Kingdom you will find many people and everyone of them wanted to participate in the blessing ceremony. So in one day it wasn''t possible for every person of this Kingdom to participate in the blessing ceremony.


    Sam was now looking around the street also thinking if he should participate in the blessing ceremony or not. Even though this makes him very curious, at the same time he knows that he wasn''t an oni and the main thing was he wasn''t from this world Terraria. So he wasn''t sure if he should participate or not because it could also create a side effect.


    ''Nowe to think of it, I already met a goddess previously. She is the one who sent me to this world and also gave me the system. If I think like that then I already receive a blessing from the goddess.'' Sam thought this. Actually he wasn''t wrong because he already received the blessing from the goddess and that was the system. Not only that, the goddess also appears in his dream two Times. After realizing his dream she also helps him and also warns him about his future.


    With that some could easily think that he already received the blessing from the goddess. Well he stopped thinking about that and just now enjoying the festival. The good thing about the festival was those food shops and Sam trying every food one by one. Even though he wasn''t hungry like before, he wanted to try every food in this festival.


    To be continued_____________

 Chapter 419 419 - Statue Of The God

    ?


    At evening,


    Every Oni human was now going toward the temple of their god. They''re going toward the temple in full celebration. Actually, like this, they wanted to wee their god, so that he would protect them.


    Sam is also at this time going to the temple with those other oni humans. Even though he was very curious about the God of these oni humans, he did not ask anyone about this.


    Actually, he wanted to know if anyone saw the oni God or not. Because he did not think that intelligent beings like those oni humans will believe in God until they get the proof. But unfortunately, he did not ask that question to anyone because it could also create travel. But most likely he thinks that you will get information about this in the royal library.


    Because he did not try to search for this previously he did not know anything about the God of Oni. But he still remembers that he saw some books rted to this matter so he already decided to read those books after going back to the Royal Library.


    Also, one more thing was that he also wasn''t nning to stay in the Oni Kingdom that much. But you will leave this Kingdom when the situation will be stable and he does not have to worry about the Duke of his subordinates.


    A person like the Duke who ns something like this and even the King did not get to know about this most likely has a second n prepared. So he will not leave the kingdom until that problem is solved.


    ''I am really weak. I need to go back to the danger zone. Right now I should only focus on getting powerful. Even if I get to know the process of going back to Eden Blue, I will not go back to Eden Blue. Compared to Eden Blue, most likely staying here will make me powerful quickly.''


    Sam thought that. Actually, it is natural that he became more powerful while staying in the ce. He was getting more resources after killing those Monsters. With that, if he stays in this ce and just focuses on increasing his power he will naturally be powerful in a short time.


    Because of this, I have already decided to go back to the danger zone when the festival is over. Even though he could go back to the danger zone right now, he did not want to do that right now. Don''t know why but he has a feeling that if he leaves the city right now than me he could face a danger that could also kill him.


    As you know that some always trust in his instincts and because of this he decided to leave the city only after the festival was over.


    While thinking all of this they already reach the temple of the Oni God. But when some looked at the temple he was shocked because the temple was very big. It was bigger than the Royal pce and not only that the architectural style of this ce was more beautiful than the Royal pce.


    Really he never expected something like this and because of this, he got a shock like this.


    "Haha¡­ did you get surprised? Well, it is natural that the temple of our god will be this big. So that even if all the people of the Oni Kingdom decided toe to the temple it would not have any problem."


    Suddenly a person after looking at his shocked face told him this. After hearing that Sam came back to his senses and nodded.


    At this time he also began to observe his surroundings. Actually, he was very alert and trying to find any abnormal people around the oni humans. But even after searching for suspicious people, he did not find anyone. But that does not mean you will rx.


    While observing the people around him he already saw many familiar faces. He also saw some people that he was familiar with from the warrior association, you also saw the teammates of Livia and even saw the king, Livia, the crown Prince and some other familiar persons also present here. Every one of them is also going to the temple while celebrating and singing songs for their god.


    After that, they begin to enter the temple. You have to say that it was a really big ce where most likely all the people from the Oni Kingdom would be able toe. Even though if that really happened this ce will be very congested but he could tell that this ce was built like that.


    Finally, he was able to see the statue of the god of oni. He became shocked after looking at the statue because he did not think that the god would also look like an oni human. He previously thought that the god would look different. But who could have thought that the god of Oni would look like this?<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Finally, the sound of those drums stopped after they came inside of the temple. Inside the temple beside the statue, you can also see many priests. They were chanting some mantras for their god. Because of this, everyone became silent and they did not disturb those priests.


    In a few minutes, the blessing ceremony will start and because of this, those priests also prepare.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, the blessing ceremony will be starting and one by one many people sit down on the floor while facing the god of Oni. Even the king and those other people sit down on the floor. Only Sam did not know what to do at this moment but in the end, you also sat down.


    At this time he suddenly hears the voice of the priest who talking something,


    "As you know that today is the blessing ceremony where our god will give his blessing to his people. So I hope everyone present in this room starts to pray to God while we will also start the ceremony."


    After saying that those priests also sit down in front of the statue and then once again begin to chant something.


    At this time Sam already saw that every Oni human already closed their eyes and began to pray to their god. But Sam did not do that; he just focused on the statue of the god. He wanted to know how the statue of the god would give them the blessing.


    ''If the god of Oni is the same as the goddess then I will ask him about the goddess. Unfortunately, the goddess did not tell me her full name but still I hope I could find information about her. Sigh, before that I needed to be lucky to talk to the god of oni.''


    Even though Sam has this n but as you know that to be sessful in this n he first needed to talk to God. He even wasn''t sure if the god woulde here personally to give the blessing or not and because of this, instantly he forgot about that Idea.


    For a moment, the whole temple became silent. Even those people who were unable toe to the blessing room because of the short space did not make any sound. They also sat down in their ces and started praying to the oni God.


    ''Nowe to think of it, I did not see the old man. Most likely you will also believe in the oni God, then did he note here because he is now observing the whole Kingdom so that nothing happened to the kingdom right now?''


    Sam suddenly thought of the old man in this room this afternoon. Almost everyone from the royal family already came here so it was quite surprising that the old man did note here.


    Actually, if anyone decided to attack the city right now then nobody would be able to do anything against them. Because right now most of the royal guards and the City guards are also present in the temple. Every one of them also wanted to receive a blessing from God and because of this, they came here.


    ''The main question was if Duke had any second n or not. But my instinct tells  me that person definitely had a second n and most likely he will follow his second n.'' Sam was thinking about this but then suddenly he stopped thinking because he always became speechless when he looked at the statue right now.


    Right now every one of those oni praying to their god while closing their eyes and because of this, none of them are able to see the scene. At first, that statue suddenly moved and right now it was glowing in white color.


    But in the next moment, he became very alert but then he did not think anybody was able to do anything right now. Almost every powerful warrior of this Kingdom is present this year and nobody will attack or anything like that in this situation.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 420 420 - Attack

    ?


    You can say that it was a really unimaginable thing that the statue would glow like this. But then suddenly something more unexpected happened because not long after that some oni humans present in that room begin to glow.


    All this time, Sam was using his spiritual vision to look at the statue, but other than the spiritual energy that the statue was releasing he did not notice anything strange. Right now when he looks toward those people who are also glowing, he bes surprised.


    Sam could see the spiritual energy of those people begin to increase rapidly. Even though he did not know what will happen after they receive the blessing, most likely everyone will break through and all get very close to breaking through.


    ''How the hell is the Spiritual energy going inside of them like that?''


    As you know that the people of the Terraria also used those crystals to absorb The Spiritual essence from them to be powerful. So they are also unable to observe The Spiritual energy directly.


    But right now using his spiritual vision he could see the spiritual energy entering their body and because of this, all of their spiritual energy increased rapidly.


    ''Will I also receive the blessing?''


    After noticing all of this Sam begins to think if he could also be able to receive the blessing from the God of Oni. But most likely he wasn''t that fortunate because he did not receive any blessing from God.


    Sometimeter,


    Other than those people who receive the blessing from God, those other people already open their eyes. But none of them said anything and just kept silent in that room. Now in this situation, nobody wanted to disturb those people who were receiving the blessing from God.


    At this time suddenly something unexpected happens that makes Sam curious. Suddenly many warriors present in that room became serious and wasting no time they quickly left that ce. By looking at the serious expression you can tell that something most likely happened and because of this, they became very serious.


    Unfortunately, Sam did not know what happened and not only him but many other people also did not know what happened. Even the king left that ce even when Livia and the crown Prince were receiving the blessing from God.


    Even though all of them became very confused, none of them made any sound to maintain the silent atmosphere in the temple. Sam on the other hand already left the temple because he also wanted to know what happened.


    When he came outside of the temple he suddenly saw that many Warriors of the Oni Kingdom were now going toward the entrance gate.


    ''What happened? Did something happen and because of this, they were going in that direction?''


    Sam began to think that while he was also going in that direction. Previously you can say that almost every warrior of the Oni Kingdom went to the temple, but right now you can see almost all those city guards and those warriors were also going toward the gate.


    Also, one more thing was that Sam could easily tell, every one of those warriors was very powerful.


    ''Did they sense danger or something like that?''


    Sam thought that while he was also trying to observe. But he was only able to find out what was happening when he came close to the city gate.


    The moment he came close to the city gate he instantly felt the aura of many warriors, but the serious thing was that he felt many spiritual energiesing from outside of the city.


    ''What is happening?''


    Sam is thinking about this question. He only gets the answer when he climbs to the top of the city Wall.


    ''Why the hell are there so many monstersing this direction?''


    Instantly he saw many monstersing toward the Oni Kingdom. From low-grade Monsters to high-grade Monsters, you can find those monsters.


    Every one of the Monsters nowing toward the kingdom. Most likely because of these the warriors of the Oni Kingdom became much more serious. Most likely they are already able to sense all those monsters'' aura. Because of this, wasting no time they left the temple and came to the city gate.


    "Warriors of the Oni Kingdom, as you can see those monsters most likely wanted to attack our Kingdom so we needed to kill them at any cost.


    We cannot let them enter our city on this special asion. Right now many of your children''s also receiving the blessing from God so we should not let those Monsters disturb them at this important time.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    So warriors, let''s be ready to fight those Monsters."


    At this time the king was also present there and he said that. After hearing that every warrior present there nodded. They also did not want those Monsters to enter their city on this special asion.


    Instantly all of those Warriors are already preparing their attack to attack those Monsters. Fortunately, those Monsters were still far away from the kingdom and this gave those Warriors some time to prepare for their attack.


    All of those long-distance Warriors already started to attack those Monsters and those Warriors who fight in closebat prepared to fight those Monsters in closebat.


    '' Sigh, just recently a problem was solved but then now a new problem appeared that could destroy the kingdom. Did the Duke was the mastermind behind all of this?''


    Sam already predicted that this could also be a n to attack the city. He was also ready to fight those Monsters. Even though he wasn''t powerful like those other Warriors, he could kill those weak Monsters so that those powerful Warriors focused on the main Monsters that could be a threat to the kingdom.


    He also begins to prepare his attack and the moment those Monsters get close to the kingdom he decides to attack those weak Monsters. Using the spiritual vision he could easily tell which one of those monsters was weak or strong.


    With that right now you are shooting sun rays toward those monsters. He did not stop just after shooting one sun ray.  He was now continuously shooting sun rays using his fingers.


    Fortunately, those weak monsters were unable to save themselves from those attacks and they instantly got killed by those attacks. Instantly 20 dead bodies of those Monsters fell to the ground. But it seems those other monsters did not care about that because they were just normally advancing toward the kingdom. But, some timeter those monsters also began to increase their speed.


    Sometimeter,


    In front of those continuous attacks, you can say almost 3000 monsters got killed. But for those other Monsters, it was nothing. Also, at least 30000 to 35000 Monsters were trying toe toward the kingdom and because of this, every one of those Warriors was serious.


    None of the warriors got careless in this situation and wasting no time they also began to attack those Monsters once again.


    So like this, you can say that those warriors were fighting those Monsters. Even though it was nighttime, every one of those Warriors could easily see in the dark.


    Sam on the other hand, just continuously attacked those Monsters but still, he wasn''t able to kill that much monster. But fortunately, he wasn''t alone and many other people were also attacking those monsters.


    At this time,


    Many fighters already jump from the city world and right now they are going toward those Monsters. Instantly the shes between the humans started.


    All of the people present are beginning to fight those Monsters but even with that many of them already gotten injured but none of them got seriously injured.


    Fortunately, the medical team was also present there. They were ready to help those Warriors anytime if they got injured fighting those Monsters.


    ____________________


    Unknown to any Warriors, who are fighting those Monsters, a person was present in that ce. He did not get close to the city gate. He already noticed those Oni humans fighting and already killed many of those 6Monsters.


    "Haha¡­ I really wanted to see how long you all are able to hold on in this current situation. Even though those Abyss humans are unable to invade the city from inside, those monsters should be enough."


    As you can guess, it was the Duke''s subordinate. He already got the order from the duke toe here and look at the situation. Also if you look beside him then you can see one more person present there. Unfortunately, that person already became unconscious.


    Just looking at that new person you can tell that it was the son of the Duke, Kevin. Unfortunately, right now every one of those Warriors was busy fighting those Monsters. Because of this, none of those Warriors were able to feel them.


    Actually, that person got the duty to rescue Kevin from the prison and he already did that and carried the unconscious Kevin here. Also as you can tell that he is already sessful on his mission. Right now he was observing the war between those Oni humans and those Monsters.


    To be continued____________

 Chapter 421 421 - Going Back To The Temple

    ?


    "Tec!!! Stupid Oni, why didn''t you just die."


    That person who got sent by the duke to rescue his son was now observing those Oni humans. But the thing was that right now those Oni humans are winning against those monsters.


    Even though the number of those monsters wasrger, but Those Oni humans still won this fight. Because of this, he became very upset. Right now if you look at him then you can tell that he wasn''t an Oni human. Compared to any Oni human or any humans, that person was short in height. Even though right now he was hiding his face but if you look at him then you can see those red eyes like those Monsters.


    Suddenly the Oni kings were also attacking two Monsters at once and because of this, that person thought that the king should die in this battle. Actually, he did note alone in this Kingdom. And hisrades came to the kingdom but unfortunately, suddenly all of them got killed and only he was alive.


    ¦Ñ¦Á§ád¦Á---n?¦Ía| §ãom So wasting no time after taking the son of Duke he left the kingdom. Actually, Duke also had one n to kidnap Livia but unfortunately, that did not happen.


    "Warriors, just a little longer, and after that we will be able to kill all the Monsters."


    On the other hand, right now you can see the king was killing those Monsters easily while he also told those other Warriors that with only a little longer and they will be sessfully able to kill all the Monsters.


    You have to say that after hearing that every one of those Warriors started to cheer. Even though many of them already got injured, fortunately, the medical team is already doing their work and stabilizing the injuries.


    On the other hand, those remaining Monsters were powerful. Well, you can say that every one of those Warriors was elite or epic orary level, while the king was in the legendary grade.


    So the main thing was that right now they were facing those legendary grade Monsters. Along with those other grades Monsters. Fortunately, only three of those legendary monsters came here and because of this, the king was fighting two of those Monsters while thoseary-level Warriors were fighting one of them.


    Fortunately, the Oni Kingdom was a powerful Kingdom where you will fight many powerful Warriors and because of this, they are able to handle those powerful monsters like this.


    Previously you can say that they need to face those 6000 Monsters but right now only 50 of them are left. Because of this, every warrior who fights those monsters instantly gets a boost in their power. Every one of them quickly wanted to finish the fight so that they could also go back to the temple.


    Actually, the blessing ceremony still did not end and many of them still received the blessing from God and because of this, every one of those Warriors also wanted to go back to the temple.


    __________________


    "Void sh,"


    If you look at the king then you can see the king, then he was injured but those are just light injuries on the other hand he is already about to kill one of those legendary grade Monsters while the other one furiously attacks him.


    But suddenly the king used that move and instantly that Monster got hit by the void sh. Just imagine how powerful this technique was because instantly the body of that Monster split into two parts.


    At this time the king also did not wait and kill the other one. With this, he instantly turned his attention toward that remaining legendary grade Monster and he could see that even then it is very hard for thoseary grade warriors to handle a Legendary grade monster.


    The king instantly went in front of that Monster and then also attacked him. Even though the legendary Monster and the king were in the same grade, the king was more powerful than those Monsters and because of this, he was able to easily kill those Monsters.


    ______________


    Sometimeter,


    "Warriors, we finally won this fight. Yea!!!!"


    Finally, every one of those Oni humans was able to kill all those Monsters and right now because of this, they were celebrating.


    "Everyone of those Warriors who are now seriously injured should get treated first and after that, you will go to that temple. On the other hand, those Warriors who received light injuries should get treated immediately and only after that, will be able to go to the temple.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Also before going to the temple, everyone should know one more thing: you should not tell anyone present in the temple about these Monsters. It could cause chaos on this happy asion and because of this, we should avoid that."


    King said that to everyone and every one of those Warriors nodded. Even Warriors who got seriously injured also wanted to go back to the temple but it was an order from the king and they needed to follow the order.


    Also, everyone knows that if they really told about these Monsters to those people who are inside of the temple then it could really cause chaos, because of this, they also did not want to tell anyone about this.


    After that, every one of those Warriors came inside the city and then went separate ways. Those heavily injured Warriors already going with those medical teams, wild those lightly injured Warriors already got treated by the medical team because of this right now they are going back to their house to freshen up, and after that, they  will once again go back to the temple.


    Actually, you can say that even though using the health potion could really recover their injuries but it did not fully heal their body. And this could be very dangerous because like this there will be a time when your body is unable to tolerate any longer and breakdown.


    Because of this the king already ordered everyone that if they really got injured they should avoid taking the health potion. They have the best medical team and with that, they should rely on those people.


    Only the superior health potion could heal their body fully but still, it was very costly, and not every potion maker could make this. Only some very talented and professional potion makers could make them. Because of this, normally people like to use those normal health potions.


    ___________


    "What happened earlier? Why do you and those other Warriors leave the temple like this?"


    Right now when those Warriors came back to the temple they immediately got questioned by those people present inside of the temple. Even though people did not receive blessings from God, they still looked at the ceremony with respect.


    But really all of them are very confused because some time ago all these Warriors suddenly left the temple in a hurry. So everyone knew what happened and why they left the ce like this. Everyone knows that if it wasn''t any serious case then nobody would leave the temple like this so they quickly asked those Warriors who just came back.


    "Actually,......¡­.,"


    They begin to exin why they suddenly leave the temple like this. Actually, the king came up with this exnation. Because of this, right now every one of those Warriors is exining like that so that nobody could get suspicious.


    You can say that after hearing the exnation those people really begin to think because they do not know if it is possible or not. So in the end they decided to believe those Warriors because those Warriors who previously left the ce were powerful Warriors of their Kingdom so most likely it is possible.


    "Sigh," on the other hand, all of those Warriors sigh in relief.


    _________________


    Sometimeter, the blessing ceremony finally was over. If you look at the time then you will see that it was already midnight so you can say that this blessing ceremony goes on like this for 6 hours. Finally, those people begin to leave the temple one by one.


    Tomorrow those people who did not receive the blessing will Once again go back to the temple because there was a chance that tomorrow they will receive the blessing from God. On the other hand, those people who already received the blessing should now try to stabilize their condition. Also, one more thing was that if a person previously received a blessing from God then he will not receive a blessing from the god once again.


    "Father, did something happen? I also heard some rumors that many people and even you suddenly left the temple."


    This time the crown Prince asked the king.


    "Actually, we got attacked by those Monsters. Many powerful Monsters also try to attack and invade our Kingdom but we sessfully kill all those Monsters."


    This time the king did not intend to hide the news of those Monsters from the crown Prince. The crown Prince was the next king of this Kingdom so he should know all of this before bing the king of the Oni kingdom.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 422 422 - Tracking The Enemy

    ?


    "What, how did that happen? Did you find the mastermind behind the attack? I don''t think it is normal that those monsters suddenly decided to attack our city like that."


    You have to say that the Crown Prince already understands that that attack was caused by someone because normally those monsters never attack or leave their territory like that.


    It only happened when a beast tamer or any other person did something to cause those Monsters to leave their territory and attacked the city like this.


    You can hear this question. The king became proud that his son quickly understood the situation.


    "No, unfortunately only those monsters attack, other than them, no Warriors attack our Kingdom. So we are unable to confirm the identity of the mastermind as you know that we have many enemies. But I can already guess one person who likely caused all of this."


    " Who is that person? Did I also know that person?"


    After hearing that there was no clue about the mastermind, the crown Prince got disappointed but then when he suddenly heard that his father had some kind of clue about the mastermind he instantly became excited to know about the mastermind.


    "Most likely it was your uncle Ker who was behind this monster''s attack."


    The king said that he suspected the duke or you can say Ker. It is really possible that he was behind all of this.


    "What??? What are you saying? Why would he do something like this?"


    You have to say that after hearing this the crown Prince became very confused and shocked. He cannot even imagine that his father will say something like that.


    "Sigh, most likely you don''t know anything about the recent incident. Well known that it was your fault because I told everyone not to reveal anything."


    p¦Ánd¦Á---no¦Í?1,§ão§® "Sigh, actually one day ago before the festival we got to know that Ker joined hands with those Abyss humans. Not only that he already brought those Abyss humans into our Kingdom and they already created many Abyss summoning symbols.


    The n of those abyss humans was to attack our Kingdom during the festival. Not only that, they wanted to capture as many people as they could so that they could sacrifice them to those Demons. You also don''t know that those abyss humans also try to attack your sister as you just did.


    They wanted to kidnap her but fortunately, Emma was there and she already handled those people. Because of this, nothing bad happens and we also get to know about the mastermind behind that case.


    Most likely he will also try to use your sister as a sacrifice for the demon god of those Abyss humans. So with all of this, I could easily conclude that he was most likely behind today''s attack."


    The king told the crown Prince all the things that happened previously.


    You have to say that all of this really makes the crown Prince speechless. At first, he had a shocked face because he couldn''t believe his Uncle Ker could do something like that. Then when he heard that his sister got attacked previously and not only that they also wanted to kidnap her and also used her as a sacrifice, finally this thing made him very angry.


    Fortunately, he calmed down. Livia wasn''t far away from them. Because of this, he calmed down.


    On the other hand, the king could easily tell that his son was angry like him. You were just about to say something when a Royal guard suddenly came to him and then suddenly whispered something.


    On the other hand, the Crown Prince, Livia, and Emma, all suddenly looked in his direction because they also became curious and wanted to know what that Royal guard was telling him.


    1 minuteter the king dismissed the Royal guard and then told his family to go back to the Royal pce. All of them started going toward the car when the crown Prince once again asked him,


    "Father, did something happen that made you so serious?"


    " Actually, it is confirmed that Ker is behind all of this. As you know, after that incident we already arrested everyone that was rted to Kepler. Because of this, we also arrested his son and put him in jail.


    But right now the main thing was that I got notified by the Royal guard his son wasn''t present in the jail anymore. With that, it is confirmed that he was behind all of this."


    After saying that the king smiled a little.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The Crown was about to say something and also got confused after looking at his smile. Because right now the situation was very serious then why did his father suddenly smile?


    "Let''s go back to the Royal pce and I will tell you why I am smiling there."


    The king seemed to notice that his son was looking at him with a curious gaze. But he instantly did not reveal anything and he will only reveal it after going back to the Royal pce.


    After hearing this the crown Prince became more confused because he cannot understand what was his father''s n and why he was smiling like that. He couldn''t understand anything, so he could only nod and then all of them started going toward the car that was waiting for them.


    ________________


    "Sam, haha¡­.. brat, I did not think your n would work. From where do you get that artifact that even I am unable to detect? Haha¡­ I just wanted to see the faces of those people. They thought that they could take a person from the Royal pce easily. Haha¡­ stupid warriors."


    Inside that old man''s house, you can see Sam and the old king were now sitting there. The old king wasughing heavily because their n seeded. With that, they could easily get to know about the location of their enemy.


    ''Sigh, to buy this artifact I use almost 1 million gold coins. But then it was really fascinating that even a powerful Warrior like the old King wasn''t able to detect anything.''


    At this time, Sam thought that. Actually yesterday he gave them that effect and told him that they should put it on that son of the Duke. Sam has a feeling that you will try to pull some trick to rescue his son. Because of this, I brought that tracker and gave it to him.


    With that, you can easily guess why the old man wasughing like that. Their n seeds and with that, they will also know about the location of their enemy.


    "I just can''t wait to teach that brat some lessons."


    The old man just cannot wait and teach that Duke some lesson.


    After that, both of them looked at the tracking screen where they could see that their target still did not reach the base. Most likely they were still going toward their base because of this, the green dot on the screen still moving.


    "Hmm¡­.. Did they make their base around the Forest of Death? This is the case and because of this, going toward the forest of the dead. But still, it was a very unimaginable thing that someone built their base around the forest of death."


    Right now both of them are looking at the screen while the old man said that because he was also very surprised when he saw the green dot on the screen going toward the forest of death. This is the case that they built their base around that ce.


    When they are busy looking at the screen, suddenly there is a knocking sound on the door. Sam gets up and then opens the door. For that, it was Emma, the king, the General, Crown Prince, and five more people.


    Everyone knows about the tracker. And because of this, they came here quickly to learn about the situation. Also, even though Sam didn''t want to share the information about the  tracker with everyone, the King told him that they were the most trusted people, and because of this, those people also got to know about this.


    But after opening the door he is surprised to see the Crown Prince. But he didn''t say anything and just nodded. Actually not only him but the Crown Prince was also very surprised after looking at him. But in this situation, none of them ask any unnecessary questions.


    All of them sit down in the hall room and everyone starts looking at the big screen that is ced in the hall room.


    "Hmm¡­ did they make a base near the forest of death?"


    Looking at the screen the king also became very surprised and he asked that question.


    "Most likely because of this, we were unable to find him. It is really unimaginable that someone would build a base near the forest of death." This time the army general said that, while still looking at the big screen.


    Finally, sometimeter, they suddenly saw that the green dot finally stopped. After that, it was like he did not move from that ce.


    "Huh?.... They were entering there and it wasn''t showing anything." It was quite confusing but then the king guessed what was happening.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 423 423 - If He Is A Spy?

    ?


    "Most likely that is the hiding ce of the people."


    The crown Prince said that.


    "General, quickly gather our soldiers. I did not want to dy anymore and wanted to approach there as quickly as possible. I have a feeling that today''s attack wasn''t the only one that we need to face."


    The king said that. The general, after hearing that, already went outside to gather their soldiers. Actually not only the king but even the old man and Emma also thought that today''s attack wasn''t thest one.


    ''Previously they wanted to kidnap Livia for sacrifice. So I don''t think that they will give up like this.''


    Three of them are thinking about this. Actually not only three of them but those other people who know about those abyss humans and the Duke, also think the same thing.


    It would be really weird if the Duke suddenly gave up on this. Most likely to create those summoning symbols that abyss humans take almost 6 months.


    ¦Ñ¦Á§ád¦Á---n?¦Ía| §ãom So as you can see that after nning 6 months about attacking The Kingdom during the festival and also trying to kidnap The Princess at that time will he just stop because his first wasn''t sessful?


    Nobody thinks so, and because of this, they were also very serious. Fortunately, today that much more powerful Monster did note out of the forest of death, but the problem was that tomorrow they could once again get attacked by the Monsters and this term what did they try to bring Monster from the barrennd also and would all of those monsters be powerfulpared to yesterday?


    It will be a disaster and not every warrior will be able to handle them. Also, the most dangerous thing was that, if those Abyss humans also decided to join and attack the kingdom at this time.


    ''I did not want something like this to happen where I use my people. I quickly need to capture doing and near to know how they control those Monsters to attack our Kingdom like that.''


    King did not want anything to happen to his Kingdom and because of this, he quickly wanted to capture all of those people.


    _______________________


    At this time Sam was thinking something while looking at the location where that green dot was showing right now. You are already familiar with that ce because previously he found a cave near that ce and there he spent his night.


    ''Nowe to think of it, are those people Oni humans or Abyss humans?''


    Actually that time he suddenly saw some peopleing out from a cave next to that cave. That time he just thought that they were normal oni Humans and like him they also stayed in the cave to spend the night.


    But that time Sam noticed something but he thought it was normal because of this, he did not react that time. Actually, around midnight he saw those people leave the cave and 1 hourter they came back but this time they weren''t alone.


    This time Sam saw one of them was carrying a person on his back. That time Sam thought that that person was their teammate and he just became unconscious. But now if he looks at the details then it looks like it wasn''t the case.


    ''Did those Abyss humans also prison there and that time they carried that person to use him/her as a sacrifice?''


    Right now, Sam begins to think about this.


    ''I have to know about that ce.''


    With that Sam decided to go to that ce before the soldiers and the king because he was very curious to know if that time he just let that happen.


    On the other hand, the king, the old man, and even Emma were busy, so nobody noticed that Sam had already left that ce.


    Actually, right now the old king was telling the king and the general what they needed to do after going to that ce. They cannot recklessly attack that ce because that ce will definitely have  trapped on it.


    "Also those abyss humans are most likely present there. I don''t know what type of rtionship Duke had with those Abyss humans, but it looks like they have some kind of friendly rtionship and with that, I am sure that those Abyss humans will present there."


    Like this, the old man was now telling them What to do after going to that ce. At this time the old man also told Emma to watch over Livia.


    "These two days will be dangerous for her. If my prediction was right then those Abyss humans and monsters will Tower City tomorrow and most likely that time those Abyss humans will try to kidnap Livia. So I want you to watch over her every time."<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The old king said this Emma. After that, he turned around to at the Crown Prince,


    "Actually not only Livia, but you also needed to be careful because those people could also try to attack you. Previously we get the information that they wanted royal blood as a sacrifice to satisfy their demon god.


    So attacking is also possible if they are unable to do anything to Livia. You should always bring the shadow guard with you during these 2 days. Even though I know you have full confidence in your strength, this is for your safety and this is also my order."


    The old king gave it to his grandson. Other hand, after hearing that he needed to carry the shadow guards with him, the Crown Prince became quite surprised, but then he was about to tell his grandfather that he will be okay, and he has full confidence in his strength. But right now it was the order from his grandfather and he cannot disobey that.


    "Also, Sam I want...¡­"


    At this time the old king turned his head toward the ce where previously Sam was standing. But the moment he turned around no one was in that ce. Instantly observe his room but still he is unable to find Sam.


    "Huh? Where is Sam right now? Did he leave this ce?"


    The old King asked the others. Previously he was busy discussing the n to attack those people and because of this, he did not see him Leaving the room.


    Hearing the question Emma and the others finally noticed that Sam wasn''t present there. They quickly search the whole room but then they notice that the door was unlocked and most likely Sam already left the room.


    "Emma, try to contact him. Why did he suddenly leave like that? Did something happen or did he want to do something?"


    He said to Emma to call Sam right now.


    "King, actually I have one confusion. Why are you and the worker telling all the ns in front of an outsider? Also, the most important thing was that he wasn''t an Oni human. What if he also spies on the duke? Now you already know what was our n and because of this, he quickly leaves the ce to inform the Duke about this."


    Suddenly the army general asked the king, why was he discussing something important in front of the outsider.


    "Haha... you don''t have to worry about that. I have full trust in him. You don''t have trust in me?"


    The old kings said that.


    " No, sir, I have full confidence. But it is just that I am thinking what if the Duke sent him? What if he also helped the Crown Prince and princess to gain the trust so that he could easily enter The Kingdom."


    Once again the army general said that but this time you can say that the old man was getting angry.


    " Now this will be yourst mistake so don''t repeat that. As I said I have full confidence in him so now just shut up."


    This time the old man said this whole thing, releasing his pressure. Instantly that army general was unable to break for a moment and kneel. Fortunately, the old man stopped releasing the pressure. Only then the army general was able to breathe.


    "I¡­ am sorry sir."


    At this time the army general said that while gasping for breath.


    ''Who could have thought that the old king was this much powerful? Fortunately, we didn''t say that Sam was a spy.''.


    At this time the other people who were also present in the room just sighed. Fortunately, they weren''t the ones who said that. Or their condition could be like the army general.


    "You, don''t have to worry. I know that you are worried about our Kingdom''s safety, but have we already tested him and we came to know that he wasn''t a spy? So nobody has to worry about that. Also, the tracking device that you are looking at, he was the one who gave us that."


    At this time the king said that to the general. With that, the general finally understands why they have the full trust that he wasn''t a spy.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 424 424 - Small Monsters?

    ?


    At this time If you look at Sam then you can see that he was using his full strength to go toward that ce. Using his concealment technique he already left the kingdom and already came to the danger zone.


    It almost takes him 1 hour to reach that ce. At first, if you look around that way then you will find that everything was normal. Not far away from him, you can also see many monsters also roaming around that ce.


    So in one word, everything seems normal but then the green bot was showing in that ce.


    ''Finally found it.''


    He began to search for the cave where he previously spent his night. Fortunately, it did not take him that much time to search for that ce. After going inside the cave he first checked the cave very carefully.


    But unfortunately, he did not find anything except a small bird. It looked like an owl that was inside the cave and looking outside of the cave.


    You can say that this was his first time seeing a small Monster like this. As you know, most of the time he faced big monsters that were very bigpared to normal animals.


    ''Is this owl also a monster?''


    If you look at that owl, then you will think that it was a normal animal but then in this forest of the dead, you will never find a normal animal roaming around.


    Sam became very curious to know about that owl but then he did not do anything. Before checking the owl he also needs to check his surrounding area.


    Sam also knows that recklessly going to the enemy''s best will be a dangerous thing because they most likely already put many traps around their base. Also because of this Sam did not recklessly try to search for the enemy base.


    Before anything he wanted to confirm the location and only then would he think about his next n. So right now he was also like the owl looking outside of the cave.


    He already checked the cave very carefully and did not find any type of hidden door inside it. With that now he was observing the small mountain that was beside that cave.


    As you know that previously he saw some peopleing out from that mountain and most likely those are the people that were subordinates of the Duke. So he was now searching for that ce.


    Sam was already using the night vision to look around and sometimeter he found something. He found some suspicious Monsters around the mountain that was beside him. Every one of those monsters was very small in size like a normal animal and this made him very confused.


    '' I don''t think there was any Monster who was the same size as the animal. Also, the eye of the monster did not glow red. Those are definitely not monsters.''


    Sam is already sure that the owl and those small monsters that he saw in the mountain wasn''t a real monster. Until now the basicmon thing in those monsters was the red eye, but when he looked at those small monsters he saw the green eye so with that he became sure that those are not Monsters.


    ''But the question is why are they there? Did those people put them here?''


    This is the main question that he was now thinking about. Really could not understand why those weird monsters were roaming around that ce.


    He already uses his spiritual vision to look at the owl and only then does he notice something that makes him shocked. The owl was a spiritual animal or you can say Monster because his whole body glowed in blue energy which means the spiritual energy, but then he noticed a thin spiritual line that went toward the mountain.


    Not only the owl but at this time he also looks toward those other small Monsters and everyone has the same thing. Their whole body was glowing in blue color but at this time you can also see a thin line that went in some direction.


    ''I should follow that thin line.''


    Sam decided to follow that thin line. So, wasting no time, he quickly leaves the cave and begins to follow that line. At this time he did not notice that I would most likely feel something and began to look around carefully but unfortunately, he did not find anything or anyone.


    Sam on the other hand followed that line and sometimeter he was facing the mountain, but didn''t find anything like an entrance to that ce. With that, Sam became confused because he could still see the thin line going inside that mountain.


    ''I am definitely sure that those people are hiding inside of the mountain but I just cannot find the entrance. Most likely I need to search for that cave that I previously saw.''<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    With that Sam returns from that ce. Actually using his spiritual energy he only saw the solid ground of the mountain, so no hidden entrance was there.


    Sometimeter he came back to that ce from higher he started his investigation and this time he started to look for that cave. Fortunately, it did not take him that much time to look for that cave, he still remembers what happened that night clearly and because of this, he also clearly knows the location of that cave.


    Instantly he went to that ce but was surprised the moment he entered the cave. Compared to the outside, the moment he entered the cave he saw many of the small animals or Monsters in that ce and everyone was looking at the entrance.


    Without blinking they just only looked at the entrance.


    ''What are these little things? Why do they behave like this?''


    Really everything just makes him very confused. But as you know that using his concealment techniques he did not have to worry about anything. He just carefully began to enter that ce and sometimeter he came very deep inside that cave. Fortunately, because of the spiritual vision he could also see at night and because of this, he was able to look around himself.


    In front of him he could see the wall but using his spiritual vision he suddenly saw a ce that wasn''t solid.


    ''I am definitely sure this is the ce and most likely that is the entrance. Now the question is how will I be able to enter that ce? ''


    eaglesnov?1,§ão§® Aftering in front of that hollow ce Sam started to think about how to open that thing without alerting anyone. Also don''t know why but at this time he also saw some small Monster looking in that direction. Most likely they feel something but are unable to confirm their prediction.


    ''before anything, I should know about all of this small Monster and because of this I needed something.''


    After saying that Sam left the cave to bring something.


    ___________________


    On the other hand inside of the kingdom you can see that the king and the army general already gather their soldiers. They were preparing themselves to go to that ce and kill everyone who was the mastermind behind today''s attack.


    Many of the soldiers were very confused because the king ordered them toe here without alerting anyone. So every one of the soldiers got confused but they just over the order and came to the Royal pce without alerting anyone.


    "I know many of you are very confused about why I suddenly called you here. Before telling you the reason I wanted to ask you, do you feel angry that those monsters decided to attack us in this special situation? "


    The king asked that and everyone nodded after hearing that.


    "Yes!!"


    Every one of those soldiers got angry at those Monsters because today was the day to pray to their God and on this special day those Monsters dare to attack them.


    " Good, now what if I told you that this was a n attached by someone? I know this is a surprising thing but this is true. Those monsters did not attack us without any reason. It was nned by someone and because of this, those monsters attacked us. It was like some people controlled the mind of those Monsters and because of this those Monsters became mindless and attacked our Kingdom.


    I think many of you already noticed while fighting those monsters that today it seemed that those monsters became dumb. They weren''t like they usually fight. With that, it is confirmed that someone or some people are controlling their minds to attack our Kingdom.


    Now back to the main matter. We already found the location of those people and because of this, I called all of you here. So prepare yourself because sometimeter we will go to that ce and kill all the enemy of our Kingdom,"


    The king exined everything to the soldiers so that they also had a clear understanding. As expected the moment they hear that it was done by someone they be angry once again.


    But then when the King was able to find the location of those enemies they instantly became happy. Every one of them is ready to fight those enemies that interfere on a special day like this.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 425 425 - Report From Sam

    ?


    "Teacher, I already contacted him. But he only said that he had something important to do and also told the King to wait for some time before going toward the danger zone."


    Emma said that to the old king.


    " Hmm¡­ did he go to the danger zone? Sigh, what a reckless move. This could be dangerous for him."


    The old man said that and sighed. Actually, not only he but Emma was also quite worried about Sam. He helped them many times and because of this, she did not want anything to happen to him.


    "Do you think he really went to the danger zone? Why would he do that when he knows that it could be dangerous?"


    Emma asked that question.


    "Well I also don''t know the answer but I think he found something and wanted to confirm it. Most likely this is the case and because of this, he went to the danger zone quickly. Right now we just can only trust him that you will be okay. Previously when he was facing the king or even me he did not show any nervousness which means he has something and he was full of confidence. So we can just hope that you will be okay."


    " Emma told the king about this. He should also know about this."


    The old man said that and Emma quickly vanished from that ce. The old man at this time looks at the sky where you can see those two moons.


    _______________


    "As I predicted, those small Monsters are the traps set by the enemy. Well, let''s try to open the door or I can wait."


    After thinking for some time, Sam decided to wait a little. At this time something really interesting happened. Seriously after going outside he got a monster but did not kill it. So like that, he brings that Monster inside the cave and throws it toward those small monsters.


    "Piu.. piu¡­ piu."


    Instanally like this, those small monsters let out a sound. Not only that but instantly those Monsters turned into blue light and attacked the Monster that Sam brought here from the outside.


    ''So, not all of them are attacking the monster. Those small monsters who weren''t attacking let out that sound. Is this some kind of security system ced by those enemies? So are there some kind of small animals who also work as CCTV cameras?''


    Sam thought that. Actually, by looking at the behavior of those small monsters he came to this conclusion.


    As he expected, sometimeter someone already came out of that hidden door. That person came alone.


    "Shit, how did this Monstere here? Sigh, I need to bring those small monsters once again."


    That person said that while going toward the dead body of the monster that Sam brought to this cave. He put the dead body inside his storage and then suddenly brought out small Monsters from his storage ring.


    ''That means those small monsters weren''t alive. Did they create those artificially?''


    After hearing the word of the person and also seeing that he brought out those small monsters inside from his storage ring, Sam became sure about one thing, most likely those small Monsters weren''t alive.


    It really surprised him that someone could create a Monster like that artificially.


    Sam did not waste any more time and already took action. He instantly uses the telekinesis technique toward that man. With that, he gained full control over the body of that person.


    Like that, Sam controls that person toe in front of him. After that, while Sam was still invisible, he put his hand on that person''s head. As you can guess you were using his mind control technique to get information about the base.


    All this time,


    Those people who got controlled by Sam were in a difficult situation. Just when he was about to go back to the base he was suddenly unable to move. Suddenly his body began to walk on its own and standing in front of the wall.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    ''What happened? Did someone do something to me?''


    Like this, he begins to question himself but he is unable to do that for long because sometimeter he suddenly bes unconscious when Sam uses the mind control technique. The only thing he felt before bing unconscious, was that someone ced his hand on his head.


    It did not take him that long, and after that, he once again controlled the body of that person and sent that person inside the hidden base.


    Sam on the other hand did not immediately enter the hidden tunnel. He first needed to report all of this to the old man, only after that he would decide what to do at this moment.


    "Today tell the king that they should note to this ce because they will not find anything here. Most of the enemy went to the Abyss world. Most likely all of them have very important things to do in that world. So in the base, you can only find some Weak Warriors and the son of the Duke.


    But one thing was that this whole ce was full of traps. Before anything you need to worry about those small Monster traps. There are three types of small monsters, one of them works as the CCTV camera, one of them works as the warning sound, and thest one works as the attacking force.


    You need to worry about them because the moment they see any year or Monster that wasn''t registered in their system they will immediately take action.


    But it was just a trap outside of the base. Inside the base , they had a more dangerous trap. At first, after going inside of the base you will find that after going sometimeter the whole ce bes quite dark and you won''t be able to see anything even using the night vision technique.


    Actually, at this time the dark spiritual energy checks the person who was in the base. At this time If you did not have any type of dark spiritual sign then you will get attacked by the dark spiritual energy instantly.


    But it did not stop there because sometimeter you will find the dark rock Golem. As you can tell, those Golems were created by dark spiritual energy andpared to any normal Golem they were very dangerous.


    I think there are many more traps but I wasn''t able to discover them. So told the king and his soldiers to be careful about all of this. Also, I get the information that previously the duke was talking with some people about today''s attack and they are also nning to attack the kingdom tomorrow.


    I am not sure but most likely they will also send those abyss humans tomorrow."


    With that Sam finishes his exnation to the old man. After that, he did not waste any more time in the danger zone. He left that ce. As you know, he already decided toe back here after finishing the festival, so until then he will stay in the kingdom.


    _____________________


    " I am not sure but most likely they will also send those abyss humans tomorrow."


    The old man became very serious after hearing thest sentence from Sam. You already predicted that most likely they will attack the kingdom once again and this time it will be more dangerous than the previous attack.


    ''But, really I didn''t think that he would get all this information in just a short time. This Brat was full of mystery. Also still I don''t know why he was trying so hard to protect the city that he wasn''t even familiar with.''


    The old man was very surprised when he got a report from Sam, but at the same time, he was really confused because Sam did not have any responsibility to help the kingdom but he was still doing that and also participating in this. Most likely if it wasn''t for him then they will not get to know the location of their enemy. Also, he was the one who previously found out about the summoning portal.


    So you can say that if it wasn''t for Sam then this Kingdom would have already been destroyed by those Abyss humans.


    "Emma called him here."


    At this time, the old man told Emma to call the king. Emma instantly Vanished from that ce and came to the Royal pce. You can see that inside the Royal pce, those soldiers and even the king and army general were waiting for the report.


    The moment all of them looked at Emma, everyone became curious to know what information that person sent them. But most likely she did not have any intention to tell them. She just came in front of the king and told him something and with that, she and the king vanished in front of that ce.


    "Stay here, I am going to meet my father."


    The king said that before leaving the pce.


    To be continued____________

 Chapter 426 426 - Discussion

    ?


    Next day,


    Once again the whole Kingdom was full of excitement. The festival was still going on and as always around the evening those people who previously did not receive the blessing will go to the temple and pray to their god.


    But at this time some people in the kingdom were fully alert. Everyone knows that today once again those Monsters will attack them, but this time, those Abyss humans will also try to attack them.


    But all of those people were ready to face those enemies. If you look around the city gate then you will see that the security around the city gate has already increased.


    Also, one more important thing was that nobody revealed the news that they would get attacked or yesterday they already got attacked by those Monsters. Actually, those Warriors did not want to make those normal people worried about this, so they did not reveal anything.


    At this moment the king and all of his soldiers are also ready to take action anytime. Those people in the city are already observing their surrounding area and the moment they will notice something suspicious, they will immediately contact the king or the army general.


    At this moment, in the Royal pce, you can say Livia was very confused. She could see that everyone was serious today. Her brother, her father, and even Emma were in a serious mood today. She already understands most likely something happened, none of them telling her anything. They just only said one thing: that she should not leave the Royal pce or the kingdom.


    _________________________


    "Sam, what do you think about their motive?"


    Currently, you can see Sam was in the old man''s house. Both of them discussed the motive of those people who wanted to attack their city.


    "Even though I did not know the original n, I could predict something. As you told you earlier that those Abyss humans sacrifice the life of any living person to their demon god, most likely they also wanted to do that with the Oni Kingdom.


    If we did not find out about their first n then most likely it will be the scenario. But fortunately, we were able to find those summoning symbols, so right now they are attacking us from the outside.


    Most likely this time they really needed sacrifice at any cost and because of this, they were targeting the Oni Kingdom. I don''t know if the Oni Kingdom was weak or not, but most likely the Duke also has some connection with that.


    It also looks like they really wanted to sacrifice as quickly as they could, because of this, they also did not shift their focus toward other kingdoms. Most likely they were in their final stage and because of this, they only attacked the Oni Kingdom."


    Sam told all of this to the old king. The old King also gets surprised after hearing all of this because he also thinks the same thing.


    Previously many times those Abyss humans tried to attack their kingdom but when their attack failed, they always shifted their focus toward other kingdoms. Previously never those abyss humans attack any Kingdom like this.


    Actually yesterday after getting all of the reports from Sam the old King already called the king. After that three of them also take quick action and already without saying anything to anyone go toward that ce.


    They were already aware of those small Monsters so they awarded those Monsters and also came in front of the hidden door of their base. Like how Sam created a disturbance, they also created a disturbance like that and with that, they already captured one of the security guards.


    They also use the mind control technique and with that, they confirm that Sam was telling them the truth. Actually, even though that trusted Sam will not tell them lies but still they wanted to verify. Sam was still an outsider, so he can also decide to hide some important news. Because of this, they wanted to confirm it but in the end, they also got the Same information that Sam already gave them.


    Also, one more thing was that yesterday they also got to know that the Duke and his wife went to the Abyss world, but nobody was sure when they came back from the Abyss world.


    Because of this, three of them decided not to do anything right now.


    __________________________


    "Actually to tell you the truth I am very curious about all of these Demons. You told me that those Demons can also use dark spiritual energy?"


    Suddenly Sam said that to the old man.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "Hmm¡­ where actually it has been many years since those Demons appear. Don''t know what happened but 100 years ago after thest battle with everyone in Terraria, those demons decided to go to the Nether world and never came back.


    With that we thought everything would be over, but then those abyss humans were created. Also in front of those Demons those Abyss humans look like ants. Even if you are wanted to fight a Mortal grade demon, while you are a special grade Warrior, then winning against them will be very difficult even though they have lower grades than you.


    Actually, those Demons most likely have some technique that could directly absorb The Spiritual energy from the air and turn that spiritual energy into dark spiritual energy."


    The old King exins some basic things about those Demons and tells him how those abyss humans appear in Terraria.


    ''I really wanted to see their dark spiritual energy.''


    Actually, Sam was very interested in the dark spiritual energy that those demons use. Actually, previously he did something that made him very interested.


    He clearly remembers that those people in the dark association in his world have a dark aura around them because they use the dark spiritual energy.


    Aftering here and meeting those Abyss humans notice something that makes him curious. He noticed that the aura around those Abyss humans was much darker than those warriors in the dark association.


    Most likely because of this, those Abyss humans were much more dangerous. Actually, he also searched about this in the royal library and there he got to find something.


    [ Human body is unable to observe that much dark spiritual energy because of the negative energy that harms the body of the humans. If anyone tries to forcefully absorb the dark spiritual energy then he will have side effects because of that.]


    After reading this Sam bes sure that most likely those Warriors in the Dark association have some other way that wasn''t written in this book. Because they were able to reach the S-grade. Naturally, they had some other way to absorb the dark spiritual energy but most likely they still did not save themselves from the side effects.


    So because of all of this, you can say that Sam was quite curious about those demons.


    "I don''t know if you are able to meet those Demons or not. But if your luck is bad and you meet those Demons and if you are alone, then never fight those Demons. Even if you have the confidence to win against them, the thing is that those Demons have a technique that instantly changes the spiritual energy inside of your body. You needed a high defense to protect your body from those attacks. Even Elite or Epic grade warriors got affected by that.


    Those Demons will turn The Spiritual energy into dark spiritual energy and instantly something will happen to your body. The Spiritual energy that turned into dark spiritual energy will go into overload and you will get affected by that.


    e¦Áglesn?¦Íel Fortunately, those abyss humans were unable to use that, and because of this it was safe to fight those abyss humans."


    The old man said this to him. Sam nodded after hearing that. Sam was sure about one thing: everyone in Terraria absorbs normal spiritual energy. But he noticed something different while he was observing the king of the old man.


    Most likely both of them were the ones who can only use pure spiritual energy. Or it could be that they needed to reach a limit and only after that they could absorb the pure spiritual energy. But none of them uses the original spiritual energy. Not that he told anything about this to anyone.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    Both of them spent the time like this while discussing about those Demons and those abyss humans, they did not notice, but it already became evening, and everyone in the kingdom once again went toward the temple to pray to God.


    At this time, except for some of the people, all the citizens in the kingdom went to the temple. Livia also wanted to go there but Emma stopped her.


    King, the army general, and all the other people who know about the attack are already preparing to go toward the city gate. Without any dy, they started going toward the city gate. This really surprised Livia. But even asking Emma about this she did not get any answer.


    _________To be continued_________

 Chapter 427 427 - War

    ?


    Instantly every Warrior present in the city already came to the city gate. Every one of them is already ready to attack those Monsters that areing toward the city. The most serious thing was thatpared to yesterday, today the number of those monsters was greater and they were more powerful Monsters.


    At least 50000 Monsters wereing toward the city while they only had 6000 strong warriors who would be able to fight against them. With that, you can imagine how difficult this fight will be.


    "Everyone get ready, don''t let those monsterse near our Kingdom. At any cost, I needed to defeat all those monsters so that they were unable to harm more people."


    At this time the king told all those Warriors to get ready to fight those Monsters. Every one of those Warriors of the Oni Kingdom already gets serious after looking at those Monsters.


    Every one of those long-range Warriors is already preparing their attack to attack those Monsters from a distance. One by one every one of those Warriors chooses a different direction to attack those Monsters. Some of them took those flying Monsters while some of them chose those ground Monsters. Every one of them is just waiting for the right time to attack those Monsters.


    Little by little those Monsters already came very close to the kingdom and at this time those long-range Warriors wasting no time quickly attacked those Monsters.


    "Boom!!!"


    One by onerge explosions appeared because of those long-range attacks. But at this time not only did those Warriors just attack them but at this time those Monsters also attacked them and because of this, a collision happened between them.


    Fortunatelypared to those Monsters, those Warriors prepared their attack from the start, and because of this, the power behind their attack was greater than those Monsters. So in the end it was the warriors who got the upper hand and those attacks hit those Monsters and created thoserge explosions.


    "Roar!!!!"


    Instantly those Monsters let out angry roars at the same time. They instantly increase their speed to go toward the kingdom but at the same time, they also start running toward those Monsters.


    At this time you can see many of those monsters already died from those long-range attacks. Most of the Warriors target those flying Monsters because they would be more dangerouspared to those ground Monsters. So before anything they wanted to kill those flying Monsters and only then would they shift their focus on those ground Monsters.


    But unfortunately, they are unable to kill all those flying Monsters. On the other hand, the fight between those ground Monsters and those Warriors already happened.


    Every one of those Warriors already starts killing those Monsters. The good thing was that those Monsters got controlled by someone and because of this, they were fighting like robots without any intelligence. Those Warriors used this to their advantage to kill those monsters but still, it was difficult.


    Sometimeter,


    Already you can see many Warriors got injured but none of them gave up On the fight. Those long-range Warriors also help them from behind and it gives those closebat Warriors some time to recover.


    With that, they once again approach those Monsters and start fighting with them.


    eaglesnov?1,§ão§® At this time even though those monsters got controlled by someone but still they were able to use their skill. Those poison Monsters already attack those Warriors with their poison ball and poison gas on the other hand those other Monsters also attack those Warriors with their powerful techniques.


    Some of them attack those Warriors with their fire technique, water technique, or any other techniques. Like this, they were attacking those Warriors.


    You have to say that even though Monsters are unable to use their intelligence, all of them are really powerful and because of this, it has also be difficult for them to defeat them.


    This term if you look at the king of the Oni Kingdom, then you will see that he was fighting thoseary-level monsters on his own. He was keeping busy with those monsters so he did not participate in fighting those other Warriors. Not everyone was able to handle theseary-level Monsters and because of this, he was fighting them on his own.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But as you know that the king was a legendary grade warrior and in front of him thoseary-level monsters wear nothing. But it was just that the number was much bigger than yesterday and because of this, it was also quite difficult for the king to defeat all thoseary-level monsters on his own.


    At this time If you look at those armymanders then they are also fighting those Epic grade monsters. Fortunately, no legendary-grade monster participated in this war and because of this, the King was able to focus on fighting thoseary-level Monsters.


    It gives those other Warriors a chance to only Epic and Elite grade monsters. The number of those Elite and Epic grades monsters  was much greater. So almost every one of those Warriors only focuses on Epic and Elite grade monsters.


    Even thoseary grade Warriors are also fighting them. They wanted to kill as many Monsters as they could so after that they could also help the king to fight thoseary-level Monsters.


    At this time If you are wondering about Sam, then he also already participated in the war. From the start, he was using his concealment technique and right now he was killing those Monsters or you can say helping those Warriors to kill those Monsters.


    ''Most likely that person who controlled all of these Monsters did not want any weak Monsters and because of this, he did not control those special grade Monsters.''


    As you can guess on the battlefield you are unable to find any special-grade Monsters. So because of these right now Sam could only help those other Warriors in their fight. Those Monsters were unable to see him and using that chance he was somehow able to injure those Monsters a little or destroy them if they were about to kill any Warriors.


    Like this, he already killed many Monsters but he did not stop them because most likely until now they only killed 5000 Monsters but they still needed to kill those 55000 Monsters.


    _____________________


    Inside the Oni Kingdom, most of the people were already inside the temple and because of this, none of them were aware that a war was going on outside the city. Only some people know about the war and they just now pray to their God that their Warrior wins this war.


    At the Royal pce, Emma was very worried about all the Warriors fighting those Monsters. She also wanted to participate in the fight but at the same time, she needed to protect Livia. Because most likely this will be the chance when those Abyss humans will enter the city and try to kidnap Livia and many more people for their sacrifice. Because of this, she was fully alert all the time.


    "Sister Emma, what happened? Why are you worried so much? Also, where did father and brother go previously? I can feel that every one of you is most likely hiding something from me. Why don''t you just tell me what''s happening?"


    Livia asks with frustration. Right now she isn''t a little girl. She also wanted to know what happened but none of them told her anything, which made her very frustrated.


    "Sigh, we are not telling him because we are worried about your safety. I know that in the afternoon you will do something reckless that could put you in danger and because of this, I wasn''t telling you anything. Currently, you should know one thing that you will be in danger if you leave the Royal pce. There is an enemy who is after you and they want to kidnap you."


    At this time, Emma exins all of this to her. She fully did not say it was the Duke and the Abyss humans who were after her, because it could also make Livia do something reckless.


    Right now Emma was fully alert about those Abyss humans. Because they already know that most likely they will also participate in today''s war, but the thing was that they could also try to attack the kingdom while they were not on the frontline. They could take a secret road toe inside the kingdom and then try to attack all the citizens. This is also one reason she was very worried right now.


    On the other hand, one more person is also right now observing the whole city and also observing the battlefield. As you can see, it was the old king who observed all this. He still did not leave his house and participate on the battlefield.


    Actually, the old King has full confidence in those Warriors of the Oni Kingdom. Because of this, he did not participate in the fight. But he was also helping those Warriors if they were about to be killed by the Monsters. As a mythical Warrior, he could easily help those Warriors from his house.


    If you are wondering why he did not participate in the fight then it was because he was waiting for those abyss humans. He knows that those abyss humans will not try to attack them from the frontline. Most likely they will try to enter the city with a secret road or something like that and because of this, the old king was observing the whole city.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 428 428 - Capturing Those Abyss Humans

    ?


    Unexpectedly at this time when most of the fighters fighting those monsters outside of the kingdom some people enter The Kingdom through a secret door that the Duke prepares for them even before leaving the kingdom.


    Even the king of the kingdom did not know about this secret tunnel. So those 10 people entered the Oni Kingdom. Right now the whole city is empty. Because everyone in the Oni Kingdom already went to the temple of their god and because of this, you will not see anyone in the whole city.


    At this time those 10 people did not wait any longer and quickly started to advance. They are going toward the Royal pce. But at this time more people came out from that secret road and this time those people did not go toward the Royal pce. All of those people without any dy went to the temple.


    Right now if you look at those people then you won''t be able to see their faces. Everyone hides their faces but if you look at them through your spiritual eye or something like that, you will see a ck aura.


    If Sam was present here then he would immediately recognize those people. All of them came from the Abyss world. With that, you can guess every one of them, abyss humans.


    Right now because all the powerful Warriors are fighting those Monsters outside of the city, those Abyss humans take this chance to attack all the people inside of the temple and also kidnap the people inside of the Royal pce.


    Even though every one of those people who are going toward the Royal pce knows that they will face some powerful Warriors when they go to the Royal pce, they also have full confidence in their strength.


    "Hsss¡­ at any cost we need to catch that princess of the oni Kingdom. She will be the sacrifice to satisfy our demon god. Most likely you will be satisfied if we give him a royal oni blood as the sacrifice."


    At this time the leader of 10 people told every one of them what they needed to focus on after reaching the Royal pce. Their main priority should be catching those people inside the royal pce and most importantly catching the princess of the Oni Kingdom.


    Approaching the Crown Prince will be difficult for them, but at any cost, they wanted to capture the princess of the Oni Kingdom.


    Sometimeter they came in front of the Royal pce. But at this time they instantly did not enter the Royal pce because they could also see some guards. Even though most of the Warriors were fighting those monsters outside of the kingdom, still some people needed to protect the Royal pce and because of this, you could still see some Warriors.


    "Don''t worry I will take care of all of those people."


    After saying that one of them vanished from his ce. Not long after that, all those five guards who were protecting the pce gate dropped to the ground.


    At this time If you look at those guards then you will notice every one of them unconscious. Actually not only unconsciously, if you look at their neck then you will see a ck spot in everyone''s neck.


    That person used the dark spiritual energy to make all those guards unconscious and because he was powerfulpared to those guards, they were unable to sense him when he approached them.


    But at this time not only he makes those guards unconscious but if you look at their necks then you can see that those dark spots begin to spread in their bodies.


    At this time that person also signals his teammates and every one of them is also ready to open the gate of the pce.


    But at this time before doing that something unexpected happened. Those 10 people suddenly were unable to move from their ce. Not only that they also started to feel that their body wasn''t in their control.


    One by one nine of them died instantly and the captain of the group remained in that ce. But at this time he was unable to move his body from that ce.


    ''why am I unable to move my body?''


    This was the question that he was thinking about right now. Actually, he did not need to think that much because sometimeter an old man appeared in front of that person and both of them Vanished from that ce.


    As you can guess it was the old king who appeared in that ce. Both of them appeared in his house where that person already saw the captain of the other group also present there.


    "Stay here."


    The old man said that instantly that person became unconscious.


    ''I quickly need  to remove the dark spiritual energy from their body or it will be over for them.''<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    At this time the old King thought that and instantly began to remove the dark spiritual energy from the body of those guards. He went to the temple to bring out the other captain and because of this, he wasn''t able to react on time.


    Westing no time we begin to remove the dark spiritual energy from the body of those guards. Fortunately, it was easy for the old King to remove the dark spiritual energy from their body.


    _______________


    ''With that, they will be saved.''


    The old king thought that and then also called Emma outside of the pce. He did not want to alert those other cards inside of the pce and because of this, he called her here.


    Emma on the other hand aftering outside of the pce got shocked when she looked at those unconscious guards. She was about to ask a question but then the old man signaled her and with that, she finally understood that the prediction of her teacher was right. Most likely those Abyss humans attack them.


    "Inside of the pce and stay alert all the time. I was already able to catch some of them but I am not sure if it will be thest attack or not."


    After saying that the old man vanished from the ce.


    ________________________


    A monster was about to kill a warrior but at this time some suddenly appear behind that Monster and instantly attack that monster. Target the eye of that Monster and use the origin spiritual energy Pierce through the eye of that monster.


    "Shiii!!!"


    Instantly that Monster begins to let out A painful roar. At this time that injured Warrior takes the chance and kills that monster.


    At this time Sam already left that ce to help those other people. Even though he was unable to kill those Epic or Elite grade Monsters, at least he was able to injure them or be able to distract those Monsters if the life of the warrior fighting them was in danger. So like this Sam was helping those Warriors to fight those Monsters.


    At this time If you look at the king then you can see he was panting. You already killed 20ary-level monsters but still more monsters starteding toward him.


    Even though he was tired, that does not mean he will rest at this moment. The king once again recovers his full power after drinking the energy recovery potion.


    Those army generals and those armymanders are also fighting those Monsters. They are also trying to kill as many monsters as they can. They also wanted to help the king and because of this, they wanted to finish the fight as quickly as they could.


    At this moment the medical team and the long-range Warrior team continuously help those Warriors and attack those Monsters.


    So like this the fight was going on and the good thing was that those Warriors were already able to take care of 60% of those Monsters. They just needed to fight like this for a few more times and after this, they will be able to defeat all those Monsters.


    On the other hand, inside of the kingdom,


    The old man already finished introducing those to people and after that he also killed them. From them, he got the information that there are many more of those abyss humans. Not all of them came inside of the kingdom. Right now all of them are waiting in the battleground. They are just waiting for the right time to attack those warriors.


    Not only that, but most likely many more abyss humans will once againe inside the kingdom to attack those people in the temple and kidnap her granddaughter.


    So from then, the old man was waiting for those abyss humans to make their move. At this time even though he was observing the whole Kingdom, at the same time he was also observing the battlefield and also helping those Warriors to kill those Monsters.


    ''It seems that  Duke really thought that I lost most of my power. Because of this he also did not know anything about me and my power''


    To be continued________

 Chapter 429 429 - Lost Control

    ?


    It has already been 12 hours since the war started. But fortunately, those warriors are able to kill most of the Monsters and right now only 20000 monsters are present in that ce. Even though it was a big numberpared to before it was that big.


    Also because the old King also helped them no Warrior died in that war. The old King even though did not directlye to the battlefield but was helping his people.


    If you are wondering why the old king did note to the battlefield, then it is because he is now observing the whole battlefield and searching for those abyss humans.


    Well after interrogating those two captains of the abyss humans, he gets to know that there are more people but not every one of them wille inside of the kingdom. Now all of those people were waiting for the right time to attack the Oni Warriors.


    But most likely some more people wille inside of the kingdom because both of the groups did not give them any response. Because of this, you can say that the old King did not participate in the battlefield. Before anything he needs to solve those abyss humans. Only after that, he will join the battlefield.


    Sometimeter, more people came out of that secret tunnel but they didn''t even get the chance to be happy because instantly the old king came in front of them and without any hesitation killed them.


    After that, he destroys that secret tunnel so that no more people will be able toe inside the city secretly. After that, the old king went toward the city gate and watched over the war.


    He can see many Warriors are in danger so wasting no time he also quickly helps them. The moment those Warriors are about to be attacked by the monster, their body suddenly moves on their own. So like this, the old King also helps all the Warriors if they are in critical condition.


    On the other hand,


    Right now if you look at the king then you can see that he almost killed all thoseary-grade Monsters. Right now only 5 monsters are remaining and it won''t take him that much time to kill them.


    From the start, the king only focused on thoseary-grade Monsters, so that those Monsters did not get the chance to attack those other Warriors. On the other hand, the army general andmander are also fighting those Epic grade monsters. Fortunately, the king was taking all thoseary grade monsters on his own and because of this, it gave them the chance to fight those Epic grade monsters.


    Because of this, thoseary grade warriors focused only on those Epic grade Monsters. Using their full power they were killing as many Monsters as they could and like this they and those other Warriors were able to kill 40000 Monsters in just 12 hours.


    Except for some people, nobody knows that the old King also helped those Warriors to fight those Monsters.


    But nobody was aware that not far away from them many people were hiding and watching the war from a distance. 5 of them have closed eyes and if you look at them with your spiritual vision or try to sense them then you will feel the energy fluctuation.


    Actually, those five people are the main masterminds who control those Monsters. The legendary grade Abyss humans are the one, who is controlling thoseary grade Monsters, while those 4ary grade Abyss humans control those other monsters.


    The more powerful Monster you wanted to control the more power you needed. Because of this, thoseary grade abyss humans didn''t try to control thoseary-level Monsters. Even if they try they could only control a few of them but won''t be able to control a huge group of those Monsters.


    "It is not the right time to attack those Warriors. Just wait a little more and with that when they will be thought that everything is over, that will be the right time to attack those people. Also, don''t send those remaining monsters."


    At this time the captain or you can say themander of the Abyss humans said that to everyone. He is in charge of handling those abyss humans.


    "Boss, we still did not get any information from those three groups. Also, we are unable to contact them."


    Suddenly one of them said that to him.


    " Hmm¡­ most likely something happened to them and because of this, they are unable to contact us. But really it is confusing. Most probably every warrior already came to the battlefield to fight those Monsters but then who would be present in the kingdom who could also kill those or defeat those Epic grade abyss humans that easily."


    Thatmander and even those other abyss humans were also confused right now.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    " Okay right now don''t send any Abyss humans to go inside the kingdom. Don''t know how many people are present in the city and it could be risky for our people. So we just focused on the battlefield."


    Themander said that to everyone. Actually, they don''t know how many people are present inside of the city and whether a group of 10 people would be enough or not, or if they need to send more people. You can say because of all of this themander decided not to send his people inside of the city.


    __________________________


    Some far away from the ce where those other Warriors are fighting, the king was fighting thoseary grade Monsters in that ce. He also did not want to affect those other Warriors and because of this, he brought those monsters to that ce.


    He already lost count of how many monsters he was killed and how many potions he has taken. But fortunately, right now only 5 monsters are alive and he is trying to kill them as quickly as he can.


    Suddenly one of the monsters attacks him with a hyperst but the king already senses that and dodges the attack. But it wasn''t in there that the other Monster also attacked him with their hyper st attack.


    All of these Monsters are monsters that look like tyrannosaurs. The hyper st was their strongest attack and they attacked the king with that. Unfortunately,


    He wasn''t able to dodge all those attacks at the same time and because of this he also got hit by some of the attacks.


    But he already created his energy shield in front of him and even if he did not create that, only got that much injured after getting hit by those attacks. The king already has a high defense and because of this, he doesn''t need to focus on his defense right now.


    At this time the king noticed that those monsters were trying to prepare their attack once again but this time he did not give them any chance. He quickly vanished from his ce and instantly came behind one of those monsters.


    He quickly attacked one of the monsters using a spear and that spear instantly pierced through the body of that monster. But it did not stay there because suddenly the body of that Monster began to burn in a ck frame and injust A second it turned into ash.


    The king also did not stop there; he once again threw his spear toward another monster. But this time the monster instantly attacked that spear with his hyper attack. Most likely they also know that the spear was a dangerous thing.


    But before that attack could reach the king he already vanished from that ce. He wants to go behind one of them again and attack that Monster once again.


    So like this, the king was attacking those tyrannosaurus Monsters. He already killed 3 of those Monsters and now only two of them left but suddenly two of them get very angry because they lost theirrade. Not only that at this time, something unexpected happened, and the control over both of them was suddenly lost. That means the abyss human who controls both of them suddenly loses control and because of this both of the monsterse back to their senses.


    Just aftering back to their senses, the king was about to kill them. But they are already able to think properly and with that, they dodge the attack. This sudden move also surprised the king because previously those monsters did not move like this.


    Not only that at this time most likely those two monsters got the understanding that they have been controlled by someone and most likely because of this, they were fighting those people. Actually, the monsters will have high intelligence when they be high-grade Monsters.


    So aary-level Monster will have a high-grade intelligence and because of this, they understand their situation. They instantly know that the king wasn''t their enemy. Suddenly both of the monsters stand in one ce and then just look at the king.


    The king also looked at both of the monsters and saw  that the eyes that previously were ck were returned to normal.


    ''Did theye back to their senses? Also, what are they doing?''


    The king got confused after looking at both of the monsters. Both of the monsters stop fighting and not only do they also close their eyes. The king got totally confused by this new behavior of those monsters.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 430 430 - Mythical Warrior

    ?


    Suddenly both of them opened their eyes and instantly turned around. They quickly began to run in that direction, which confused the king very much. Not only the king but many Warriors also got confused by this. Sam, the old king, and those armymanders, all of them got confused by their sudden behavior.


    For a moment, the king thought that those monsters wanted to attack those other Warriors but he was wrong. They justpletely ignore everyone on the battlefield and run in that direction. Even those Monsters and those fighters who were fighting also got confused by the sudden behavior.


    King at this time decided to follow those Monsters and with that, he started following them. On the other hand, if you look at those monsters then you will see most likely they found something and because of this, they did not care about anything present on the battlefield. Did you even care about the king who was more powerful than them?


    As you know that the more powerful monsters you will meet the more they will be intelligent. So theseary-level Monsters were very intelligent like a human. so they already know that they got controlled by someone and because of this, they also came to the battlefield to fight that person.


    But right now they came back to their senses and they just wanted to do one thing which was revenge. You heard it right, both of the monsters wanted revenge and because of this, they previously searched for the clue of those abyss humans who previously attacked them.


    Fortunatelypared to any Warriors, every monster has beast instinct, using that they could already find the location of those Abyss humans, even though they were very far away from that ce.


    You can say that the king who was following them was very alert about his surroundings because he also wanted to know why both of the monsters were running like this but sometimeter he seemed to understand why both of the monsters were running like this.


    As you know that he was fully alert about his surroundings and from the start he was observing his surroundings. So sometimes he finally found the presence of those abyss humans far away from the battlefield.


    ''So, they already came to the battlefield but decided to hide. Did they wait for the right time to attack us? Also, why are those monsters going in that direction? ''


    Right now the king was thinking all of these questions but he silently followed those to Monsters. Actually, right now not only the king but even the old King also found clues about those abyss humans. As you know, as a mythical Warrior his observation range was very high, but due to his still being present inside of the kingdom he wasn''t able to cover the full area of the battlefield and because of this he was unable to find those Abyss humans previously.


    But previously he also followed those to Monsters and he also sensed the presence of those Abyss humans. He could sense probably 5000 aura signs of those abyss humans. Not only them but he could also feel many monsters beside them. But the strange thing was that those Monsters did not attack the battlefield.


    ''Most likely, they are waiting for everyone to get tired or exhausted after fighting all of these Monsters and when they will let their guard down, they Abyss humans and those monsters.''


    The old King already guessed what could be the n of abyss humans. Also this time he was only able to feel 6000 monster''s aura.


    On the other hand,


    Those Abyss humans who were hiding got shocked by the sudden behavior of both of the Monsters. But suddenly they notice that those Monsters turn toward them and begin to run toward them. Theypletely ignore every fighter and monster present on the battlefield and juste in these directions.


    That legendary Warrior who previously controlled thoseary-grade Monsters when now recovering his dark spiritual energy. Not only that because both of the monsters are suddenly able to wake up from his mind control, it also has the side effect of the Abyss human. Previously he suddenly began to bleed from his nose.


    "Guys, be ready I think we already got discovered by the king, and as you can see he already got very serious whening toward this direction. Damn, those useless Monsters that areing in these directions. Quickly attack, everyone."


    At this time the leader of those Abyss humans, or you can say that legendary Abyss human, gives everyone the signal to attack those Warriors and both of the Monsters.


    Instantly those Abyss humans and those monsters came out from their hiding ce and instantly began to run in that direction.


    On the other hand,


    Both of the monsters spot their enemy and that makes them very angry once again. They just let out their angry roar and decided to attack that person.


    But unfortunately, both of the monsters did not even get the chance to fight back, because both of them faced a legendary Abyss human.


    "Useless monsters."<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The Abyss human said once again and he already attacked both of the monsters. In front of that sudden attack, both of the Monsters were unable to react on time and both of them got seriously injured.


    But both of the monsters once again stand up from the ground and once again let out an angry roar. They did not care about their life. They just wanted to kill that person who previously controlled them.


    But that abyss human already prepared his attack and most likely with these attacks he decided to finish both of the monsters. But before his attack couldnd on those Monsters, suddenly a very powerful sword sh came in his direction.


    This instantly cancels the attack of that abyss human and it sends him flying. Not only that person but every one of those Abyss humans suddenly got attacked by those sword shes.


    Fortunately, those legendary grade abyss humans reacted quickly and tried to save those other abyss humans. Unfortunately, they were unable to protect everyone, and some of the abyss humans got killed.


    As you can guess the king already came to that ce and he already decided to attack those Abyss humans. Right now if these abyss humans decided to join the battlefield then it could be very dangerous for everybody present on the battlefield.


    ''It is also dangerous for me to face those 3 Legendary grade Abyss humans at the same time. But I won''t be able to prevent those other abyss humans from attacking my people.''


    The king at this time begins to think about what to do at this moment because most likely those 3 Legendary grade Abyss humans will attack him while those other people will try to attack those Warriors.


    It will be really risky and because of this, they are thinking about what to do.


    "Don''t worry about them. I will handle every one of them. Most likely everyone present in this world will forget about me so I should reveal myself so everyone should know that I am still alive. Haha¡­"


    At this time while the king was thinking about what to do suddenly, he heard this voice beside him. Instantly he saw that his father was present there and this instantly made the King very rxed.


    Finally, his father joins the fight and with that, everything will be over.


    "Go, help those Warriors. We already lost some of them and some of them are seriously injured. Just go and help them. I will take care of them."


    At this time the old King said that he will take care of these Abyss humans and those new monsters. On the other hand, the king, after hearing that, did not waste any more time and quickly left that ce.


    Well, everything happened very quickly and the sudden appearance of that old man also surprised every abyss human. They did not have any information about that old man except those legendary grade abyss humans. They already recognize that it was the old king of this Kingdom but what was he doing here?


    They wanted to ask this question but in the next moment, all of them got the answer. The old King did not have any time to waste and because of this he already put pressure on those abyss humans.


    Just releasing his pressure he already killed those Elite and Epic grade abyss humans and those monsters. In front of the sudden dense pressure they were unable to do anything and just got killed by the pressure.


    Right now only thoseary and legendary grade abyss humans andary grade Monster were alive in the ce. But in front of the dense pressure they are also struggling.


    Well, in front of a mythical grade Warrior, nobody was able to do anything. Even those legendary grade abyss humans are struggling.


    At this moment the old King did not waste any more time and quickly created his attack. Suddenly the sky became cloudy and the sky also began to Roar. Not long after that thunderbolts came down from those clouds and hit those abyss humans and monsters.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 431 431 - War Is Over

    431 Chapter 431 - War is Over


    "Now, tell me what is the rtion between you and the Duke of this Kingdom."


    The old man asked the person in front of him. As you can guess, he was the old king of the Oni Kingdom. And if you look at that person in front of him then you will see, it was the Abyss human''s leader. Yes, you heard it right, the old King finally captured the leader of the Abyss humans. You can say after the old King joined the battlefield it did not take that much time to finish all those enemies present on the battlefield. While the old king was taking care of those abyss humans on his own, the king and those Warriors were taking care of those monsters. With that, it did not take that much time to Finish those Monsters and those abyss humans. They killed all the Monsters and almost all the Abyss humans, except the leader. Not only that the leader was even trying to suicide but fortunately the old King prevent him from doing that. He captured that person and brought him to his house at the same time hepletely made sure that the abyss human did not escape. The old king immobilized that person. So, now you can say that except for the head, that abyss human is unable to use his hands or legs. So, right now the old king was interrogating that person. But that person was also stubborn and because of this, until now he did not tell anything to him. But, the old man did not get angry. He already expected that and because of this, he also already. So without wasting any more time, he ced his hand on that person''s head. "Ahhh!!!!!!!" Instantly, that Abyss human began to scream in pain. If you were wondering what was happening then it was the old king entering the mind of that person and because of this, the person was feeling unimaginable pain. But the old King did not stop and already forced more spiritual energy in his head with this that Abyss human finally became silent. That person already lost consciousness. On the other hand, the old man also already entered the brain of the person, and right now he is just searching for the Duke. ____________________


    "Warriors, we finally won this war. But I am very disappointed in myself that I am unable to protect my people and because of this, we lost some of our people in this war. Just after this, we should not face any war. But that does not mean we are weak. I hope every Warrior gets motivated by this war so that they will be more powerful than before. Also don''t worry I already got the location of the main enemy or you can say the mastermind behind all of the attacks. He and his subordinate will pay for what they did. On our special day, like the festival of our God, they decided to attack us. This is unforgivable. Warriors, but we still have thest day to enjoy and go to the temple. Our god will also understand that his children just returned from the war."


    At this time the old king told all of this to all the Warriors who participated in the war. At this time many of them were very angry at their enemy because they also lost some Warriors. But the king already told them those people who lost their lives if they have any family will get protected by the royal family. From now on the royal family will take care of those families. So like this the war was over and everyone finally went back to the kingdom. It has been 23 hours since they started fighting those Monsters. Fortunately, the warriors of the Oni Kingdom were strong, because of this, they were able to fight those many monsters at the same time, and in the end, they also won the fight. At this time, except for one person, everyone had already left the battlefield. That person as you can guess was Sam. He was using the concealment technique and because of this, nobody was able to see him. He was waiting for everyone to leave the battlefield because after that he will begin to start his work. Well, he wanted the dead body of those Monsters because absorbing them could give him many status points. So like this, he already started to put the dead body of those monsters in his inventory and it has taken almost 2 more hours to finish taking all the dead bodies in his inventory. '' Fortunately, everyone left the battlefield and most likely nobody will care about the dead bodies of the monsters.''


    Well, the king already told some of them to take care of all the dead bodies and nobody will care about the dead body, because nobody can absorb them like Sam. So Sam took care of all the dead bodies before those people could do anything. After that, he also did not waste any more time and came back to his house. Even though he directly did not fight the Monsters but for these 23 hours he just helped those fighters to kill those Monsters. He was not fully exhausted and wasting no time after freshening up, he justy down on the bed. It did not even take that much time to fall asleep. 4 hourster around 9:00 p.m. Sam finally wakes up from his sleep. He was not fully rested, but the moment he woke up from sleep, his stomach began to signal to him that he was fully hungry. So wasting no time he also began to walk toward the dining area. Also, you should know that currently most of the people are present in the temple so as usual the whole city was empty. Fortunately, Sam already has food in his inventory so aftering to the dining room he just sits down and then begins to bring out that food. ''Now,e to think of it, the old man was very dangerous. Fortunately, he did not release pressure against the Warriors or most likely I and those other Elite and Epic grade Warriors would be dead. He didn''t do anything, just his pressure was enough to kill those people. What will happen if I face anything like that? Even if I be invisible would I be able to protect myself? It ispletely impossible to save myself if I face any enemy like that.''


    Sam was not thinking about the previous incident where that old man killed all those Epic and Elite grade Abyss humans and monsters, just releasing his pressure. Even though that time he did not release the pressure on the Warriors but Sam still can feel the pressure of a mythical warrior. Most likely this was the first time Sam got that scared after feeling the pressure. There is no way to protect yourself if you face something like that and that makes him very worried about his safety. "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human Health: (18000/18000)


    Spiritual energy: (18000/18000)


    Strength: 1800


    Agility: 1800


    Physique: 1800


    Intelligent(mental power): 1800


    Spirit:1800 Status points:- 00


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Special) (intermediate) / (Intermediate B-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 5k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( cooldown for 5 months)


    Fusion technique Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)(+)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B) (+)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)(+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)(+)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    17:05


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] " After finishing his food Sam came back to his room and already opened his system window. Wasting no time he quickly uses 10 billion points to upgrade his absorb technique to S-grade. Well, he was saving those upgrade points to upgrade his other techniques but at the same time, he wanted to upgrade the absorb technique before anything. As you know, he already had enough strength to fight any special-grade monster and because of this, he did not upgrade any of his other techniques. Almost every time he went to the danger zone, he never used any of his upgrade points and just saved all the update points. Saving 10 billion points wasn''t easy. Fortunately, the war also helped him quite a little because he held the Warriors to kill those monsters and surprisingly he also got upgrade points if those monsters got killed. So like this, he can gather the remaining update points and finally, he has 10 billion points. So before anything after opening the system window, he instantly upgraded the absorb technique. Right now after doing that he has only 5K upgrade points remaining. '' Well, I just needed to kill those Monsters in the danger zone.''


    Well, he doesn''t need to kill those monsters and with that, he will get her once again the upgrade points. Nowe back to the main matter,


    He closes the system window and wasting no time begins to feel the power of his upgrade absorb technique. Westing no time he quickly brought out a dead body of an Elite-grade monster, and began to use his absorb technique on that monster. Sam was now already closing his eyes and enjoying the feeling. But he did not see that the monster in front of him had already begun to fade away. Sometimeter the whole body of that Monster faded away. To be continued______


    Your gift is the motivation for my creation. Give me more motivation!


    Creation is hard, cheer me up! VOTE for me!


    Like it ? Add to library!


    Have some idea about my story? Comment it and let me know.


    Small_Otaku

 Chapter 432 432 - Reward

    ?


    So I won''t be able to absorb those Epic andary-grade monsters. Well, not that I have any problem with that. Fortunately, the number of those Elite grade Monsters is also greater than epic andary grade monsters.''


    Well, you can say that it almost takes him 24 hours to absorb 280 dead bodies of those Elite-grade monsters. Well, you can guess even when he uses the absorb technique with full power he is only able to absorb one dead body of the monster in 5 minutes.


    Because of this, to absorb 280 dead bodies of those Elite grade Monsters almost takes him 24 hours. Well, Sam did not get surprised after realizing that. As you can tell he already expected that.


    Also, one more thing was that as you know that only absorbing the monster that has the same grade as him will only give him one Status point. That means right now he was an intermediate Special grade or more specifically he was an intermediate B-grade warrior. So currently only absorbing the dead body of an intermediate B-grade will only give him one status point.


    So right now if Sam absorbs a dead body of a peak B-grade or early A-grade monster, then he will receive more Status points. If he absorbs the dead body of a peak B-grade monster, then he will receive two Status points on the other hand if he absorbs a dead body of an A-grade monster, then he will receive 3 status points.


    So, like that, absorbing those elite-grade monsters gives him different status points. He was receiving 6 to 14 status points. The point varied based on the power level of the monster.


    Also, one more thing doesn''t think that in that where no special grade Monster participated. He also has the dead body of the special-grade Monsters but this time he did not absorb the dead body of those Monsters. He already increases the level of his absorb technique, and because of this he directly starts absorbing the Elite grade monsters.


    ''Hmm¡­ for a few days, I should go into close-door training so nobody will disturb me during that time. But before that, I should also inform the old King and king.''


    Well currently after getting all the dead bodies of those monsters Sam just really wanted to absorb them without wasting any more time. But the thing was that currently, the situation wasn''t right, and also before doing that he needed to inform the old king.


    Not that it was mandatory but they could also call him for some discussion and because of this before doing anything he wanted to inform them.


    ______________


    "Sir, the king called you to the Royal pce."


    Well, sometimeter when someone was eating his food suddenly someone came to his home and then informed him the king wanted to meet him.


    ''Sigh, as I expected they would call me.''


    So Sam quickly finishes his food and then leaves with that person. The went directly toward the royal pce where he could see the king, the old king, armymanders, the advisors, Emma, and even the prince present.


    When he came to the hall room he could see that everyone was looking at him right now. Even though this did not make him scared, it made him curious. Why were they looking at him like this?


    "Haha¡­ Sam, you must be curious why I suddenly called you here. Don''t worry it is not about another war or something like that. Actually, I called you here to thank you. The whole Oni Kingdom is really grateful that you are able to help us. You are the person who saved us from a big disaster like this.


    You are the person who finds out about those traitors and the abyss humans. You are the person who also helps us find the location of the enemy base. Because of this, we are able to prepare for the war, and in the end, we also win the war.


    Even though you are an outsider, you still help us. You could just run away from the kingdom but you did not do that on the other hand you decided to help us. We really don''t know how to return the favor. In the future if you really need any help just tell me or anyone present in this room.


    You are the best ally we could have. Because of this we finally decided to give you a personal house in the Oni Kingdom. From now on you don''t need it to stay in your rented house. Not only that you will be our forever friend and you do not need to show your ID or anything like that while entering the city.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The most important thing was that I already discussed it with everyone and we were already nning to hold an award ceremony.


    Even though as you can see most of the people are still busy because of the special festival. But today the festival is over and tomorrow I will hold that ceremony."


    The king exined all of this to him. Just after hearing all of this, you can say Sam became quite shocked. He did not think that the king called him for something like that. Sam actually thought that the king was nning to attack the enemy base in the danger zone and because of this, he called for a meeting.


    After hearing the word of the king, most likely he could say that they already did that operation and most likely they also caught the enemy.


    He was not sure about this and he also did not ask anyone about this. But at this time he could see everyone present in the room looking at him with a happy smile. Even those people who previously had a suspicion about him also showed him their smiles.


    "Actually, to tell you the truth, I did not want to get rewarded like this. Actually, I wanted to see that I did not want to get rewarded in front of that many people. Actually, I am not that good at handling situations like this, and also you do not need to reward me.


    You guys let me stay in your kingdom and also I can''t like it here. So you did not need to reward me."


    After saying that Sam looked at the king. He could see the king was looking at him with surprise and just not only The King everyone present in the room was also looking at him with a surprised expression.


    Nobody thought that he would reject the king''s reward. The king also heard a serious expression while looking at him but then he smiled once again.


    "Haha¡­ I already predicted that you will say something like this. But still, you need it to receive the reward. From now on you will be the Nobel ally of our Kingdom. You choose any technique from the Royal Library except those forbidden techniques. Also from now on you could use the royal library''s normal section without any restriction.


    I already have the information that you like to read in the library so I will also give you permission to use the normal section of our royal library without any problem. Other than that you will also receive 50 million gold coins."


    These will be the rewards that the king will give him. Really after hearing about the rewards  that the king wanted to give him Sam became shocked. Even though getting the noble title or permission to use the normal section of the royal library did not make him that excited but when he heard he could choose any technique except The forbidden technique from the Royal Library, it made him very surprised.


    As you know, normally nobody wanted to share their secret techniques with an outsider like him but still the king gave him permission to use any technique from the Royal Library. Also, the most interesting thing was that nobody present in the room opposed the idea. So most likely they also agree with the king."


    After saying that the king smiled. He can already tell Sam was also shocked after hearing that the rewards.


    " Now back to the main matter. We were unable to catch the Duke or his wife or his son. Most likely they already got to know that we already found out the best and because of this before the war was over they escaped from that ce. But fortunately, we already destroyed that base and also captured many of the traitors and Abyss humans from the base."


    At this time the king told him what happened when they attacked the enemy base. Unfortunately, the main culprit escaped. But the good thing was that most likely he won''t be able to do anything to the Oni Kingdom. Most likely not only the Duke but even those Abyss humans got alert and shocked after seeing the power of the old king.


    So from now on they will try to stay far away from the Oni Kingdom.


    "Okay, everyone. Today''s meeting is over and let''s go to the temple to pray to our God for the final time. This is his blessing that we are able to protect our Kingdom. Aftering from the temple I already arranged a small party for every Warrior who participated in the war."


    To be continued________

 Chapter 433 433 - Went To Danger Zone

    ?


    The next day, finally today Sam received his rewards from the king. Even though the king didn''t organize an award ceremony, he still called all the warriors of the Oni Kingdom and in front of them, he rewarded Sam.


    "Many of you don''t know but we get to know about the enemy attack because of him. Sam is an outsider, he didn''t have any responsibility to help us. But he still decided to help us. He is the first person who finds out about those Abyss humans and after that he informs us.


    Not only that he is the person who helps us to find the location of our enemy. So, it is a pleasure to have an ally like this.


    So, I announce that from now on Sam will be the novel ally of our oni Kingdom. Not only that he will also revive and and house. He will also have permission to use the normal part of the Royal Library without any problem. He will also get a chance to learn any technique from the Royal Library except those forbidden techniques."


    The king said all of this when he called Sam on the stage. Everyone is now pping for him. Many of them already know Sam. But then previously only knew that a human who came to their Kingdom helped the prince and princess. But today really it made many of them surprised that Sam was the one who first found out about the Abyss humans.


    So, everyone pped for him when he went to the stage and received the Nobel Ally title.


    Today Emma, Livia, the prince, and the old king are also present in the award ceremony. I have to say that Livia was fully shocked after knowing the truth. She didn''t even expect their Kingdom to be attacked by their enemy when she didn''t even know about it.


    Even though she became sad after hearing that, the old king exined to him that it was for her safety. Only then does Livia rx?


    On the other hand, Sam came down from the stage and after that, he stood there with those other Warriors. Right now the king is also announcing many other people on the stage. Those are the people who give their all to kill their enemy.


    So, like that, 2 hourster finally the awards ceremony was over. King also organized a food fest, so everyone was now enjoying the food fest. Also, those warriors didn''t have any problem because the rewards ceremony wasn''t organized in front of everyone.


    Sometimeter,


    "What is your n, Sam?"


    Livia asked.


    "I am nning to spend most of the time in the danger zone."


    Sam said that. Well, he directly didn''t tell her that he wanted to absorb the dead body of those monsters. Well, he wasn''t sure if anyone would find out about this, what would be their reaction. He didn''t know when to take a chance and because of this, he was nning to go to the danger zone, search for a good hiding ce, and only then would he start absorbing those monsters.


    Actually, as he already knew, the old king had a powerful observation technique and with that, he could observe the whole Kingdom easily.


    "Wanna go to the danger zone together? My teammates and I are nning to go to the danger zone tomorrow."


    Livia asked.


    " Sorry, I am nning to go to the dungeon today. I won''t be able to go with you and your teammates."


    Sam told her that. As you can guess he didn''t want to say anything nor did he n to go with her and teammates.


    "Well, okay. Next time then. But have you already selected a mission from the warrior association?"


    Even though it was quite said that Sam will go to the danger zone today, she didn''t show it. She asked that question to him.


    "Hmm¡­. I already noticed the mission and that makes me interested to do that. Well unfortunately I won''t be able to go with you, so sorry about that."


    " Haha¡­ you don''t apologize. I can also understand that most likely you did not feelfortable around my teammates. Well, don''t worry if we get time we could go to the danger zone together."


    ____________________


    Sometimeter finally Sam came back to his house and he was already nning to shift to his new house. After finishing everything he will go to the danger zone and most likely you will stay there until he does not absorb all the dead bodies of those Elite and special-grade monsters.


    But still, it was quite surprising that the king also gave him a bignd with a pce, and not only that the king also sent some people to take care of the pce.


    Sometimeter he came to his new pce where he could see those guards, the head Butler, cooks, maids, and many more people. Everyone of them waited for him and the moment he came to the pce everyone greeted him.


    The head butler already introduces everyone, and like that, he almost gets to know everyone who will be staying in this pce and will be in charge of taking care of this pce.


    At this time Sam also told the head butler that he will go to the danger zone today and for that, he was told to prepare some food. The head butler already told the cooks about this and they already started preparing food for him.


    Around 4:00 p.m.


    Sam finally put all the food in his inventory and then said goodbye to everyone. He finally started going toward the entrance. Well, he did not want to ept any because he just wanted to focus on absorbing those Monsters. So because of this, he did not want to shift his focus topleting the mission.


    Sometimeter when he finally came in front of the city gate, those guards protecting the gate saluted him. As a noble ally of their Kingdom, he was a very respected person.


    Sam on the other hand did not say anything and just nodded at them. After that, he left the kingdom and then began to go toward the danger zone.


    Before anything right now he needed to find a good ce where he could absorb those dead bodies without any problem and no Monster or any Warrior would disturb him.


    Fortunately, he already knew a very good hiding ce so wasting no time he went to that ce and finally sat down on that ce in a Lotus position. Not only that he also already brings out the dead body of those Monsters.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (18000/18000)


    Spiritual energy: (18000/18000)


    Strength: 1800


    Agility: 1800


    Physique: 1800


    Intelligent(mental power): 1800<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Spirit:1800


    Status points:- 00


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Special) (intermediate) / (Intermediate B-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 5k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( Cooldown for 5 months)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)(+)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Stealth (grade B) (+)


    Superior spirit concealment (grade B)(+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)(+)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    For thest time, he looked at his status and actually, he wanted to see if after absorbing all the dead bodies there would be any problem with his data screen not. Because of this before start absorbing those Monsters he looks at his status. After that, he did not waste any more time and already closed his system and then already began to absorb the dead body of those monsters.


    If you wanted to know the number of those monsters then at least 45000 Elite Monsters were previously present there. Not only that there are at least 10000 special grade monsters.  So absorbing all of this will take him a few months.


    __________________


    Well, it takes him 5 months to absorb all the dead bodies of those Monsters. But still, he instantly did not leave that ce. Well for 5 months he just sat there like that and just kept absorbing those dead bodies.


    Fortunately, he did not forget about eating the food that he had already prepared for at least six months. After that, he also began to increase his stats points slowly. Actually, he did not want to quickly increase his status points because it could also cause him harm. Because of this, he increased his stats points slowly. But at the same time, he needs to adjust himself to the new strength so it also takes him some time.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 434 434 - Finally A-Grade

    ?


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (23000/23000)


    Spiritual energy: (23000/23000)


    Strength: 1800 + 500 -  2300


    Agility: 1800 + 500 - 2300


    Physique: 1800 + 500 - 2300


    Intelligent(mental power): 1800 + 500 - 2300


    Spirit:1800 + 500 - 2300


    Status points:- 477,500


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Special) (peak) / (Early A-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 5k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)(+)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)(+)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    As you can see, he already became an A-grade warrior. That means he became a peak special-grade Warrior. Well, the problem was that he cannot put all the status points at the same time or it could backfire on him. Because of this, even though he has that many status points he is unable to use them at the same time.


    ''Sigh, I need it sometime, and only after that I will be able to put all the status points.''


    Actually after putting 100 status points at the same time he needed to wait at least one or two weeks so that his body gets used to that new power. Because of this, he was unable to get that many status points.


    ''Well, it is decided that until I do not put all the points in my status I won''t go back.''


    Sam already decided that until he did not put all the status points in his stats, he will not go back to the Oni Kingdom. It will take him much time.


    Actually, previously he also faced a problem where he needed almost 2 weeks to get used to that new power. Actually, as you know, increasing his stats means breaking the human limit. So sometimes the body is unable to handle the pressure and at that time your body stays in a critical condition.


    If you put more pressure on your body then it could break down, not only that, you could also die. So, Sam did not increase please stats that much at once. He did not want to put pressure on his body that quickly and because of this, his stats didn''t increase that much even though he had 480k status points.


    Nowing back to the status points, he gains 340,000 status points from the Elite grade monsters and 140,000 status points from the special grade monsters. With that, he gains 480k status points.


    With that, you can get it was a very impressive thing and most likely if he was able to put all the status points in stats, then he would really be a powerful Warrior. He could even break through to Elite or even Epic grade.


    Nowe back to the present matter,


    Sam decided toe out from his hiding ce. For 6 months he was staying in that ce without doing anything and because of this, he was feeling that he needed to use his newfound power to kill the Monsters.


    So wasting no time Sam decided to go deeper in the forest. Currently, he wanted to fight those peak Special grade monsters without using the concealment technique.


    While searching for those peak Special grade monsters, he also meets those early and intermediate special grade monsters. The thing was that it did not even take him that much time to kill all of them. Previously killing all of them or even fighting them at the same time was quite difficult for Sam. But right now the situation ispletely different.


    Fortunately, after going for some time he Finally found A Monster that released the aura of peak special grade or you can say intermediate A-grade monster.


    If you look at the monster then you will feel that it looks like a tyrannosaurus, not only that he also has red and green stripes on his body. Those Red and green stripes represent that this Monster could also use me and poison.


    So with that, you can imagine how dangerous this monster was. Well even though Sam just only wanted to fight an early A-grade monster, unfortunately, he did not find any of those Monsters. Not that he cares about that because even fighting this tyrannosaurus will be enough.


    For some time he observes the monster and only after that when he finds the right time he instantly attacks that monster using his light control technique. Using fire control would be a waste because this monster has fire resistance skills. Because of this, he decided to use the light control technique.


    Also at this time, he uses the telekinesis technique to control the Monster because it could also run away from that ce. As you know, if the monster has the same power level as him then he could easily control that Monster but currently The Monster is more powerful than him and because of this, he won''t be able to properly control that monster. But that does not mean he is unable to stop that Monster from escaping from that ce.


    At this time the monster most likely already realizes that he was in danger and because of this, he is already trying to escape from that ce. But unfortunately for the monster, he was unable to leave that ce for some time and it was enough time for the Sun Ray to hit him.


    "Roar!!!!!!"


    The moment the sun ray hits the body of the monster, It begin to burn the ce. Because of this sometimeter the monster begins to roar in pain. But suddenly at this time the monster is finally able to move once again and he instantly moves away from that ce.


    Wasting no time, he quickly used his both elements to create the poison me ball and Wasting no time quickly shot that toward Sam''s direction.


    But Sam also wasn''t slow; he already created a light shield in front of him the moment he saw that poison frame ball. Now both of the attacks shed against each other. The surrounding area already got damaged because of the impact.


    At this time If you look at Sam then you can see that he was still focusing on that monster. Actually, at this time Monster begins to advance toward him. Most likely that Monster thought Sam won''t notice him or something like that. But in the next moment, Sam once again created a sun ray and shot that toward that monster.


    "Roar!!!!"


    Directly that attack hit one Eye of The Monster. Instantly that ce begins to barn and The Monster let out a painful roar once again.


    Monster has the regeneration skill but still, it is painful for him. On the other hand, Sam was quite curious to know if that Monster was able to heal his eye or not.


    Suddenly one by one many poisoned me balls begin toe toward his direction. Sam did not expect that Monster would attack him even though he was in pain.


    Well, Sam quickly moves away from that ce. At this time he could see that the injury of that Monster was beginning to recover but he was unable to open his left eye which got burned because of the Sun Ray.


    ''So, these Monsters did not have the super regeneration skill.''


    Sam thought that and this time he attacked once again. Once again using the telekinesis technique he stops the movement of that Monster and instantly begins to use the sun ray. Also, one more thing was that this time he put more power while attacking that Monster. Uses 70% of his power to shoot that sun ray.


    The moment it hit the monster, The Monster began to cry in pain but Sam did not stop, a few minutester finally the monster dropped to the ground. Finally, Sam kills that monster.


    But he did not be careless because he could also feel more monster aura, not far away from that ce. Most likely they wereing toward his direction and because of this, Sam became very alert.


    He was just looking in that direction when suddenly a thunderbolt came toward him. That waspletely unexpected and because of this Sam directly Got hit by that thunderbolt. Fortunately, it did not do that much damage to him and Sam already escaped from that ce.


    But not long after that one by one many more thunderbolts came toward his direction. But fortunately, Sam  already


    prepared for this and created many light shields around himself so that he did not get affected by those thunderbolts.


    To be continued ______________

 Chapter 435 435 - Become More Powerful

    ?


    Instantly, Sam shes his sword toward the lightning lizard. As you know that previously he already got attacked by the lightning, those lightning lizards attacked him previously after he killed those Monsters.


    Those lightning lizards also look like the tyrannosaurus but they are smaller and they are Yellow. They could control The lightning element.


    But as you know that Sam already became powerful and wasting no time he already got away from that ce. Not only that he also already attacks toward Those Monsters. This time he already uses 90% of his power to attack those Monsters and those Monsters were unable to react on time and got killed by that.


    Those lightning lizards were only early special grade Monsters. Because of this, it did not take him that much time to kill them.


    After killing all those monsters he did not stop there and was still roaming around the forest. You wanted to fight many more monsters to get an understanding of his power. As you know that he just recently became this much powerful, and still did not have the full understanding.


    While roaming around the forest he also meets many Warriors who are fighting Monsters. But as you know Sam did not want to disturb them so he just left that ce and found some Monster who did not get attacked by any Warriors.


    So like that, he was walking around and sometimeter he already found some Stone Elephants. In front of him, you can see 5 of those Monsters. The most dangerous thing is that those monsters have very terrifying defenses and you won''t be able to kill them that easily.


    The most dangerous thing was that those Monsters already released the power of a peak special-grade monster.


    Sam at this time could feel that those Monsters are more powerful than him and because of this instantly became very alert. But fortunately, he did not want to waste any more time and already uses the concealment technique.


    Those Monsters who were already approaching him became confused because that human suddenly Vanished from that ce and it really made them very confused. They were already using their full observation power to look for that human but unfortunately, they did not find anything.


    Sam is already in front of those Monsters and wasting no time he already attracts them. You already bring out his updated yer and attack those monsters. He uses the supreme sword technique to attack those Monsters.


    "Roar!!!!"


    He did not attack all the monsters at the same time because most likely he wouldn''t be able to kill them like this. He attacked one Monster and that Monster already got seriously injured by that attack. But at the same time, you can also see how terrifying their defense was.


    Most likely he would be enough to kill that tyrannosaurus but this time you can see that the stone elephant only has deep wounds on his body. Right now blood wasing out from that elephant and that elephant was crying in pain.


    But, Sam did not stop there and he began to attack that elephant continuously. In any case, he wants to kill that Monster and shift his focus to those other Monsters.


    All of this happened in under 1 second and even those other elephants were not able to react. They could only hear the painful roar of theirrade and because of this they instantly became very alert and began to observe their surroundings.


    Unfortunately, they did not find anything but at the same time, they suddenly saw their partner already drop dead on the ground. This instantly made them very alert at the same time they started roaring angrily. They begin to look around to search for the enemy who attacked theirrade but unfortunately, they did not find anything.


    _______________


    Finally 1 hourter,


    Sam came back to his hiding ce. He already killed all those Monsters and also took the loot and the dead body. As you can see right now he is already getting used to his new strength.


    Actually, he wanted to eat something before going back to the forest to kill those Monsters. Actually, like this, he wanted to get used to that new power as quickly as he could. Because only after that he will be able to increase his power once again.


    So wasting more time, sometimeter he went back to the danger zone and then began to kill those Monsters once again. He did not attack those monsters that were targeted by some other Warriors.


    Using his full Stealth technique he was killing those Monsters.


    ___________________


    1 monthter,


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (23000/23000)


    Spiritual energy: (23000/23000)


    Strength: 2300 + 300 - 2600


    Agility: 2300 + 300 - 2600


    Physique: 2300 + 300 - 2600


    Intelligent(mental power): 2300 + 300 - 2600


    Spirit: 2300 + 300 - 2600


    Status points:- 477,500 - 1500 - 476,000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Special) (peak) / (intermediate A-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 20k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (B-grade)(+)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)(+)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (C-grade)(+)<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Mind control technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    So in just one month as you can see he already made 20k update points and not only that he already increased his power once again. He became an intermediate A-grade warrior.


    ''Sigh, I will need some time to be a peak A-grade warrior.''


    Sam thought that when he looked at his status screen. Well even though he wanted to use all those status points as quickly as he can but unfortunately, he was unable to do that. It is very frustrating for him so he just sighed.


    But at the same time as you can see he already became once again powerful and because of this he once again needed to get used to that power. But one thing was clear: he did not want to leave the danger zone until he did not be an Elite grade warrior.


    Only after that he will go back to the Oni Kingdom and will also try to search for a way to go back to his world.


    ''Sigh, I wanted to know the situation of my world. How are my family and friends? Did those people from other world''s peoplee to our world to do something?''


    You have to say that Sam was very sad that he was unable to go back to his home where his family was waiting for him.


    He knows that most likely every one of them is very worried about him right now but at the same time he was unable to do anything. But one thing he remembers is that beforeing to this new world he already gave the saints something that will increase the survival rate of those Warriors who will be going to get a new world.


    So right now he just hopes that those Warriors already get back to the Eden Blue. Well but at the same time, he knew that bing sad won''t help him. So he just once again cheered up and then already left the hiding ce to kill those monsters.


    He just began to kill those monsters without stopping and without wasting time. He wanted to kill as many monsters as he could to gain upgrade points. As you know, he still has many techniques to upgrade.


    ___________________


    Currently, you can say that every Kingdom gets shocked when they hear that the Oni Kingdom Suddenly faces something like this situation. Who could have thought that those Abyss humans will be active once again and also attack their kingdom?


    But at the same time, the duke is a criminal of the Oni Kingdom. Not only that, everyone gets to know that the Duke has some kind of connection with the Abyss world and Abyss humans. Most likely he was waiting for the right time to attack the king.


    But one thing was clear after hearing this news every one of those kingdoms became very alert. When those people hear that those abyss humans became active once again they instantly be alert because those abyss humans could also attack them to sacrifice their life.


    Every one of the royal families already became very alert because as you know that royal blood is very useful in sacrifice. So the moment those royal families hear that those Abyss humans try to attack the Oni princess to sacrifice. Every one of them also became very alert.


    _____________________


    On the other hand,


    Everyone in the Oni Kingdom also already knows about the news of the king and almost all the Warriors of the Oni Kingdom. This really makes them very scared and at the same time very much what caused a war like this to happen. They also lost many people in that fight but fortunately in the end they got victory.


    The King personally visited the family members of those people who lost their lives in the world and also told him that from now on the royal family will look over them.


    Not only that, most likely many people after the war became very serious and they began to focus on bing powerful. They did not want to face a second situation like this and because of this, everyone wanted to be as powerful as they could.


    Right now the old king was talking with his granddaughter and Emma. Right now his granddaughter was talking about Sam who still did not contact them even after 7 months.


    After hearing herin even the old man just sighed. The old man tells us that previously Sam most likely already decided to push his limit and became as powerful as he can so all this time most likely he was busy with his training.


    "Haha¡­ calm down. I already talked to that Brat. He was still in the danger zone and killing those Monsters. He told me that he will need some more time and only then will he be able toe back. As I told you earlier after the war many people were already pushing their limits to be powerful and most likely Sam was also doing the same thing."


    The old king said to his granddaughter. As all of them say, Livia liked Sam. But the thing was that they could also tell Sam waspletely a dense guy. Most likely he didn''t even know about this and also he did not know that he got attacked because of Livia.


    The son of that traitor duke attacked him because of her.


    But the thing was that even if Sam got to know about this then he just did not care about this. Currently, Sam does not have the time for love or something like that. because he needed to be powerful and also needed go back to his home world.


    Before anything he needs to kill the prime Dragon. After that, he will rx. This is the reason that Sam is pushing himself to his limit.


    At this time the old King did not say anything but he had a question that he wanted to ask Sam. Why did Sam suddenly be very interested in world travel and other worlds?


    This made the old king very curious but he did not ask Sam about this. He also understands that all of them have some kind of secret that they did not want to share with anyone.


    ________________


    On the other hand, Sam Who just killed the Monsters did not know anything about this.


    ''Sigh, it would be a good thing if I found the Dungeon while roaming around this forest.''


    As you know that he was now inside the forest of death and killing those Monsters nonstop. But you can say that he also wishes to find a Dungeon where he will get more powerful loot. But unfortunately in Terraria finding the dungeon was a very hard matter. Because of this until now he did not find anything about those Dungeons.


    Currently, he was fighting those peak A-grade monsters. At first, you fight them without using the concealment technique but then he begins to use that technique while fighting those Monsters. But the thing was that every one of those Monsters is very powerful and most likely they have the same power level as him.


    Fortunately using the origin spiritual energy he was able to increase the power of his attack and like this, he already killed many of those Monsters.


    At this time he doesn''t know why but he suddenly begins to feel a very powerful aura approaching him. At first, he thought that it was most likely a powerful Warrior who was approaching his direction. But he doesn''t know why at the same time he began to have a bad feeling.


    He became very serious and then began to look in that direction from where he was feeling that. Sometimeter, he already felt that the aura came very close to his location.


    But at the same time, he did not fear anything as you know he was already in stealth mode. He was just curious to look in that direction.


    Sometimeter he already saw that it was really Warrior who came to that ce. But the thing was that the moment you saw that person you will feel that something was different about that person. Because of this Sam already uses the Spiritual vision technique to look at that person. Only then did he understand why he was feeling like that.


    ''Why did an Abyss humane to this ce?''


    Sam thought that. Right now he can see that person was observing the dead bodies of those Monsters and most likely trying to search for the culprit who killed those Monsters. After sometimeter not finding the enemy that person begins to approach those that body.


    Aftering in front of the dead body for thest time that person observes his surroundings carefully and after bing sure that no one is near that ce he begins to do his work.


    Westing no time he began to eat the meat of those Monsters. Just looking at this scene Sam almost vomits. Who could have thought that an Abyss human would eat the meat of the Monsters like this? Also, Sam doesn''t think that you can eat the needs of the Monsters. Those Monster


    s contain the poison and if you eat them like that it will really harm your body. Because of this, Sam was very interested to know why that person was eating the meat of those Monsters like this.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 436 436 - Shocked

    ?


    The moment that abyss human began to eat the meat of that dead monster, his spiritual energy began to increase. All this time Sam was present there and observing that Abyss human.


    ''how the hell is he about to increase his power after eating the meat of the dead monsters? Did those other abyss humans also eat the monster''s meat to increase their power?''


    ''I can still feel the dark spiritual energy from his body, then how the hell is he able to increase his power to the meat of those monsters?''


    Right now Sam was trying to find out the hell this person was able to increase his power just after eating the dead body of those monsters. So, he didn''t leave that ce and silently observed that person.


    "Ahhh!!!"


    Sometimeter, that abyss human began to cry in pain. He ate all 4 Monster''s meat today. You can see the blood was still in his mouth. But suddenly he began to cry in pain. Not only that, at this time Sam noticed that blood started toe out from his body.


    His eyes, ear, and various parts of his body began to release blood.


    ''Is this the side effect of eating the meat of the Monsters? Will he die?''


    Instantly Sam bes quite curious to know what will happen to this person. Normally even if a powerful Warrior eats Monster''s meat, they will be affected by the side effect.


    Also, overseeing the power of that person Sam could tell that this person was aary-level Abyss human. But as you can see he is also very affected by eating the meat of the monster.


    Sometimeter,


    That person finally stopped crying. Smoke also came out from his body. After that, all those injuries began to heal automatically. Most like he had the regeneration skill.


    At this time, Sam suddenly feels the energy fluctuation. That person is now using his spiritual energy to do something. Even though Sam could feel the fluctuation, he didn''t know what he was doing.


    Sometimeter, he saw that abyss human once again stand up. But already all the injuries had healed and he had the expression that nothing happened to him.


    ''Did he use the dark Spiritual energy to release the poison from his body? ''


    Sam thought because right now he could see that person vomiting ck blood. But the most interesting thing was that three moments after that blood touched the ground, it began to burn. With that Sam guessed that that blood was poisonous.


    ''Well, the dark Spiritual energy is a lethal poison, mostly because of this, no poison affected these Abyss humans.''


    Sam came to this conclusion. But he wasn''t sure. He began to follow that person silently. He wanted to know what would happen next. Like this, Sam already came far away from his hiding ce.


    Sometimeter, he suddenly lost his target. That abyss human suddenly disappeared from that ce. Most likely he used some kind of teleportation technique.


    ''Did he find that someone is following him?''


    Sam thought this. He doesn''t know the answer. Currently, he has alreadye to the surface area or you can say the outer area of the forest. Also, the main thing was that the direction he was facing wasn''t the direction of the Oni Kingdom.


    ''Did that Abyss human want to go to the human Kingdom or the Elf Kingdom? ''


    Sam thought this. Even though he was curious he didn''t follow that direction. He just simply came back to his hiding ce.


    He did not want to get in trouble with those Abyss humans until he did not have the power to face them. Because of this, he decided toe back, but at the same time, he already informed the old man about this.


    Fortunately, beforeing to the danger zone he already brought amunication device, and with that he could contact the old man even though he was in the danger zone. With this, he could also ask for health if he was in a dangerous situation. But the problem was that you cannot use themunication device in front of powerful Monsters that are able to change the radio waves.


    _________________________<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "You saw aary level Abyss humans going toward the direction of the human Kingdom and the elf Kingdom? Don''t worry, I will try to investigate this situation."


    After saying that, the old man cut the call and then began to think about it. Well, the moment Sam told him that he saw an Abyss human once again the old man became very alert but fortunately, he did not see that persone toward their kingdom and because of this he rxed a little.


    But still, this need wasn''t that good. What if those people are trying to attack the human kingdom or the elf Kingdom? It will then bring disaster to those two kingdoms.


    Even though humans and those Elves did not have that much good rtionship, both of them have a good rtionship with the Oni Kingdom. Because of this the old man instantly thought he should inform his friends that lived in the human Kingdom and the elf Kingdom. Even if it was just a coincidence still they should stay alert all the time.


    ''Well, what if they try to kidnap the royal blood from the human kingdom or elf Kingdom? They are unable to kidnap Livia, so what if they decided to attack both of these kingdoms to kidnap their Royal blood so that they could use them as a sacrifice for their demon god?''


    Just thinking about this made that old man very serious and he did not waste any more time calling his friends.


    _____________________


    You can say that after getting this news both of the kingdoms became very alert and the security around The Kingdom became very tight. Nobody wanted to face a simr situation like the Oni Kingdom. Because of these they also increase the security so nobody will be able to enter the kingdom without their permission.


    Not only that, but the king of the human kingdom also personally appointed some people to look over some suspicious Nobles that could have a rtionship with those Abyss humans. Even though the king wasn''t sure if it was really the case, he still wanted to take serious action against it.


    So from now on entering the human Kingdom will be very hard like the elf Kingdom. Even though everyone who wanted to enter both of these kingdoms became confused, they did not get to know anything about this matter. Most likely only The King knows about this.


    ''I just hope no demon once againes back to Terraria. I still did not want to face those Demons.''


    The old man thought that. Even though he already became so powerful, he still knows the danger of those Demons. Those Demons are far more powerful than anyone. Even those Abyss humans that were created by those Demons did not have that much power like the Demons.


    Actually not only him but everyone who previously found the Demons did not want to face them for the second time. They almost sacrifice themselves to force those Demons to leave the Terraria and also sell them inside of theherworld. So right now you won''t be able to see any demons in that Terraria.


    On the other hand,


    Sam did not know anything about this but one thing was clear: he was now thinking about those Demons and he also wanted to face a Demon. Actually, he wanted to know how powerful were those Demons that even the old King did not want to face them.


    The old King previously told him that even if he faces a mortal-grade demon right now most likely he won''t be able to win against that. So from that Sam was quite curious about those Demons.


    ''Also, I wanted to visit the Abyss world and the Nether world.''


    Right now he was thinking about this. He wanted to visit both of these worlds and wanted to see the situation of those two worlds.


    ''Sigh, Let''s focus,''


    Sam thought that but then he decided to train. Even though he already became so powerful, he still had to fight aary-level monster. So, he quickly needs to reach that stage and only then will he be able to kill the primed Dragon. He just hopes that nothing happens to his world right now.


    Sam still has 3 years to go back to his world and only then most likely the code of Sam Still has 2.5 years to go back to his world and only then most likely the core of the Eden blue.


    At this time he was thinking how the hell the meat of the monster increased the power of that person. Even though using his absorb technique he could also do the same thing, but he did not eat the meat of the Monsters. So those people have some kind of technique that could make them


    powerful, the moment they eat the meat of the Monsters.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 437 437 - Going Back

    ?


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (36000/36000)


    Spiritual energy: (36000/36000)


    Strength: 2600 + 1000 - 3600


    Agility: 2600 + 1000 - 3600


    Physique: 2600 + 1000 - 3600


    Intelligent(mental power): 2600 + 1000 - 3600


    Spirit: 2600 + 1000 - 3600


    Status points:- 476,000 - 5000 = 471,000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (early) / (intermediate S-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 800


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chances)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)(+)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    2 monthster,


    Sam Decided to go back. Well as you know for 9 months he did not go back to the kingdom. Because of this finally decided to go back even though he did not absorb all those status points.


    But the thing was that he was already able to break through to Elite grade. That means he is able to break through to S-grade. Also after bing S-grade, you can say that he finally feels that a big shackle is removed from his body. He did not feel that way even after bing an A-grade Warrior.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    He can feel that many changes have happened to his body. Fortunately, before going back to the kingdom he decided to stabilize his condition and because of this, he fought those Monsters in the danger zone.


    Well, he was also able to gather many upgrade points, and using them he upgraded his mind control and strength buff technique. Also uses his supreme upgrade to upgrade his sword technique.


    To upgrade his sword technique he almost needed 10 billion upgrade points that were impossible for him to collect that easily. So because of this, he uses his supreme upgrade to upgrade that technique. Most likely to upgrade his other technique he also needs to do the same thing.


    ________________________


    ''This time I should ask the old man.''


    Sam finally decided that he will ask the old man about world travel. Actually, Sam doesn''t think that after helping them in a critical situation like that war, most likely the old man will help him and because of this, he wants to ask that old man about this.


    Almost 3 months and after that this year will beplete and he will have two more years. He needs to go back to his home before that time because 2 yearster the core of Eden Blue wille to the surface area.


    So he just now wanted to find out about the process that will help him to go back to his world. But he won''t go back to his home currently. Because before anything he needs to be powerful and staying in Terraria helps him to be more powerful.


    With that as you can see he began to walk toward the direction of the Oni Kingdom.


    ''Nowe to think of it, what happened, or did they collect any news about that Abyss human that I saw 2 months ago?''


    Suddenly he remembered that person that he saw two months ago. You wanted to know if the old man was able to find any information about that person or not.


    '' Unfortunately, the old man did not tell me anything about this. Well, I could just ask him about this.''


    Sam thought that while going back toward the kingdom. But at the same time, Sam decided that He should leave the Oni Kingdom because he also wanted to visit the human kingdom. But he did not want to visit right now because right now he just wanted to focus on bing powerful.


    Like this, sometimeter he already came in front of the city gate.  At first, the city guard was not able to recognize him but when they looked at him carefully they instantly recognized him and then instantly saluted him. They created a way for him to enter the city without any problem.


    After entering the city Sam did not waste any more time and quickly began to go toward his house. He wanted to freshen up.


    _____________________


    "How are you, Sam? You did not even contact me in these 9 months. But as I told you 9 months ago you need to go to the danger zone with me."


    Right now as you can see Sam was present in the old man''s house. But he wasn''t alone because Livia and Emma were also present there. So at this time, Livia said that to him.


    Sam just smiled. Actually, he remembers that he promised her that he will go with her in the danger zone next time. So he did not have any problem going into danger with her and her teammates.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    Sam directly asks the old man if he knows any information about the Abyss human that he saw earlier. You have to say the moment he asked that question, Livia and Emma became silent.


    They just did not know how to react and because of this, they decided to stay silent right now. At this time, Sam was looking at the old man while the old man was also looking at him.


    "Sigh, unfortunately, the human Kingdom did not find any information. I already informed both of the kingdoms and most likely they have already increased their security. But still, now they did not find anything."


    " Ok,"


    After hearing the answer from the old man, Sam just said okay and then began to think.


    ''Could it be just a coincidence?''


    Sam was thinking about that when suddenly Livia asked him a question.


    "What did you do in these 9 months?"


    "Well, most of the time I spend my time hunting the Monsters and also absorbing the crystals to be powerful. Not only that, but I also found many different types of Monsters when I went deeper into the forest of death."


    At this time Sam shares his experience with everyone. Emma and the old man did not get surprised after hearing that but you have to say Livia became very surprised after hearing that. Most likely she was very interested to meet those new types of Monsters that she never saw.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam left the old man''s house. He did not ask the old man about world travel because Livia and Emma were present there. Because of this, he did not ask that question but he already told the old man thatter he wanted to say something. The old man also didn''t have any objection to that.


    Sam is going toward the Royal Library this time. Well even though he will ask that old man about world travel, that does not mean he will stop going to the library. Actually, he wanted to see if he could find anything or not. Only then he would approach the old man.


    ''What type of technique should I select?''


    At this time Sam also thought about this. As you know, he could select one technique from the Royal Library except for those forbidden or ancient techniques. So he really wanted to know which type of technique was present in the royal library.


    Wall thought that he had alreadye to the Royal Library. As usual, he did not see anyone other than those guards protecting the royal library. After entering the library, collect all the books that you want to read and then waste no time. He began to read those books.


    ___________


    Sometimeter,


    So nobody knows about this information. Did I am the first one to discover this? Then I should have told everyone about this but the main question was'' Will they believe me?''


    Sam was thinking about this type of question. Actually, he is also reading about those abyss humans. But the thing was that he did not find any information where it was informed that those abyss humans eat raw meat of the Monsters.


    So as you can see he was thinking he should tell everyone but the main question was will they believe him? He can tell this topic was very serious for everyone. Nobody wanted to meet those Abyss humans. So suddenly releasing news like that will make many people panic and he doesn''t think that most of the people will believe him because he did not have any type of proof.


    Because of this, in the end, he decided not to s


    ay anything to anyone. With that, he finally stopped looking for information about those abyss humans. You once again shifted his focus to world travel.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 438 438 - World Bridge

    ?


    "Haha¡­ so you are trying to find out about this. Haha¡­ all this time I was very curious to know why you are searching for the other world. Haha¡­ well naturally you cannot find any information about that in the library or any other ce because we did not let it be published so everyone could use it.


    Actually, this is a very secret thing and we did not want any enemy or those abyss humans to find out about this and go to another world. But most likely they already found some other way to do that.


    Well now back to the main matter. I am really surprised that you are searching for this. So are you interested in going to another world? Haha¡­ not that it was rare because I saw many people who had the same wish as you. Many people also wanted to visit another world and learn about their culture and other things.


    Most probably you already read a lot of information about other worlds. As you can see we have their information and we are able to collect that information because many people from Terraria visit them and collect the information about them.


    Sorry, it is just that we cannot tell you how we found out about the world that has spiritual energy. But I can tell you how we travel.


    Actually, we use the world bridge. This is the technique that is created by every saint present in the Terraria. Actually, when we fight those Demons for the first time and force them to leave the Terraria, we gain some confidence and because of this, we decided that we should also attack them back.


    Because of this, every Saint present at the time participated in this matter and we all used our 100% to make this world bridge.


    But the thing was that not everyone could use that because it also put so much pressure on your body so you needed to achieve a minimum level before using that.


    After creating the world bridge we thought that we could easily go inside the abyss world but unfortunately, we did not have the location of that ce and because of this we were unable to go inside. But at this time we found those others who also began to awaken in their spiritual energy. So like this many Warriors from Terraria begin to visit those others and also begin to learn about them.


    Most probably you already read that those other''s people also know about world travel or something like that. Actually, they also learn that from us. Even though we did not teach them the original, it is a simple version and because of this, they won''t be able to travel much farther away from their.


    We also locked The World Bridge and because of this you can say that nobody was able toe to Terraria using the world bridge. Because of this, not many people know about Terraria.


    If you wanted to use that original world bridge then you needed to reach the minimum limit of intermediate Elite grade. Or your body won''t be able to handle the pressure and you will die before going to your destination.


    The further you want to go the more you will feel the pressure. Because of this we did not publish anything about the world bridge.


    Those people on other''s people have the simple version of world travel and because of this, most likely their restriction of the minimum level is also low. Butpared to them as you can see the main thing was very difficult to handle. "


    Right now the old King exins all of this to Sam. Actually for 1 month he stayed in the royal library and once again tried to search for world travel and the way to go back to his world. Unfortunately, he did not find any information and because of this in the end he decided to ask the old man about this.


    Even though there was a risk that the old man won''t tell him or you will be suspicious of him. But still, he decided to ask the old man and if anything bad happened he could just escape using the concealment technique.


    But after asking that question to the old man, the old man justughed. With that Sam understands that most likely he gained enough trust of this old man. Because of this, the old man exined all of this to him.


    ''So if I wanted to travel further away from Terraria then I would face more pressure.''


    After hearing all of this exnation Sam begins to think about it. Actually Eden Blue was very far away from Terraria and most likely to reach his home he needed to be more powerful so he could tolerate the pressure that he will receive during world travel.


    ________________


    "Haha¡­ if you really wanted to use the world bridge, then before anything you need to be powerful so you could handle the pressure."


    The old man said that to Sam. Sam just nodded.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Even though I will need some time to use that world travel but thing is that finally, I got to know about the method and most likely I could use the world bridge. Fortunately, I gained enough trust in this old man. I don''t think they will tell any random person about the world bridge.''


    Sam began to think about this. Sometimeter he left the house of the old man. Now he finally got to know all of these so he could just go back to his home.


    Sam didn''t know that just after he left the house, the old man began to think about those questions and also wanted to ask why Sam wanted to ask about world travel.


    ''Did he really be interested in traveling to another world?''


    He was thinking about this type of question but unfortunately, he did not know the answer. But yeah it was true that if it was any other person that the old man won''t tell him or even he could kill him. This is a very big secret that nobody wanted to share with any random person.


    Fortunately, the old man trusted Sam and because of this, he told him all of this.


    ''Haha¡­ I can see that he really wanted to go to another world and most likely hearing my word he already got the motivation to be powerful as quickly as he can.''


    The old man can see that Sam has be more motivated after hearing all of these. He already guesses that most likely he will spend once again most of his time inside the danger zone to gain those crystals to be powerful.


    ___________________


    On the other hand, Sam came back to his house and he was now resting in his room. You can say that he was now feeling relieved because finally, he got to know how to go back to his home.


    As you know that from the first he was mainly worried that he won''t be able to find any information about that. If he is really unable to find any information then it will be impossible for him to go back. He did not think that he could use the same way to go back to his home.


    Because until now he did not even find any done and he wasn''t sure if every day and then had that type of mysterious symbol or not. So he cannot guarantee that and because of this he was disturbed and really wanted to find out about the information as quickly as he could.


    But fortunately in the end he got all the information from the old man and right now he just only needs to focus on bing powerful so that he could use that world bridge without any problem.


    ''Should I tell the old man about my truth?''


    For a moment Sam suddenly thought of this question. But then he instantly decided that he should not reveal anything about this. The old man already told him that they already locked the world bridge that connected to their Terraria. So right now if he reveals something like this then most likely it will make them very curious and most likely they also think of him as a spy or something like that.


    Because of this he always stayed very careful and did not want to reveal information about this.


    ''Damm!¡­ I should ask the old man about that Abyss human, who gains power just after eating the monster''s meat.''


    Suddenly Sam thought about this. Actually, as you know previously he wanted to find out about this. But unfortunately, he also did not find anything about this. So he wasn''t sure if every Abyss human gained power like this.


    You have to say that this is a very curious thing that Sam really wanted to know the answer to. But one thing was for sure Sam was fortunate that he did not reveal his secret to anyone. If anyone gets to know that he could absorb the dead body of the monster then most likely, he will also be considered as an abyss human.


    To be continued_____

 Chapter 439 439 - Leaving The Oni Kingdom

    ?


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (46000/46000)


    Spiritual energy: (46000/46000)


    Strength: 3600 + 1000 - 4600


    Agility: 3600 + 1000 - 460p


    Physique: 3600 + 1000 - 4600


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 3600 + 1000 - 4600


    Spirit: 3600 + 1000 - 4600


    Status points:- 476,000 - 5000 = 471,000 -5000 - 466,000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (intermediate) / (intermediate SS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 13k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chances)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade B)(+)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (D-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (D-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    3 monthster,<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    As you can see he already became an SS-grade warrior. You have to say that in these 3 months he just only focused on increasing his stats points. Well, he also sometimes went to the danger zone with Fiona and her teammates. With that, he was able to gather 13k upgrade points.


    You have to say that breaking through to SS-grade is really difficult. But fortunately, he already has the limit breaker with him, and using that he was able to break through without any problem.


    Fortunately, it wasn''t Eden Blue where you won''t be able to find a high-grade limit breaker. Because of this, it can be very easy for him to break through to a new grade.


    Nowe back to the present time,


    Right now you can see that Sam was preparing himself. If you are thinking that he is preparing himself to go to the danger zone then you are wrong. This time you wanted to go to the other Kingdom to see their culture and other things.


    Because of this, he was preparing for that. The old King already gave him the list of those kingdoms that have friendly rtionships with the human Kingdom and with that, he already decided to visit all the kingdoms.


    As you know, aftering to Terraria he did not even leave the Oni Kingdom. At that time he was busy searching for a way to go back to his home and also became powerful. But the thing was that right now he already became powerful and most likely finally he has some strength to protect himself. Not only that he already gets to know how to go back to his world.


    But as you know that the prime Dragon most likely would be a peak Epic-grade monster. So even if he goes back to his world right now he most likely won''t be able to do anything to that Monster and because of this he first wanted to achieve that kind of power and only then he wanted to go back.


    ____________________


    "If you follow this route then you will safely reach the human Kingdom. This is the map that I prepared for you so you don''t have to worry about the route. I also mark the safest route for you so you do not make any powerful monsters and get killed by them."


    Sam came to the old man''s house to say goodbye. At this time the old man gave him this map that will be very helpful in this journey.


    Besides that old man, you can also see Livia and Emma. Even though the Crown Prince and the king also wanted toe, both of them were busy and because of this, they also sent their gift to him.


    The king gave him a very powerful armor with a bodysuit. Compared to his present armor this armor is very powerful. The Crown Prince gave me a very strong and powerful sword. The sword was an Epic grade sword while the Armor was aary grade.


    "Hmm¡­ I also wanted to go with you but nobody gave me permission. I just hope youe back here quickly."


    At this time Livia said that. But if you look at her face then you will see that she is most likely holding back the tears that are threatening toe down. From the moment she heard that Sam wanted to leave the Oni Kingdom and go to another Kingdom, she became very sad.


    '' What if he doesn''te back?''


    She began to think about this type of question and because of this she also cried. But fortunately right now she is trying to look normal. She already requested her father and grandfather to give her permission to go with him. But in the end, she did not get the permission because it could be very dangerous for her.


    Not only that she could also bring trouble to Sam. What if those Abyss humans decided to attack them once again? It will be very dangerous because it could also put both of them at risk.


    Livia already understands the danger because of this she did not ask their permission once again. But still, she was very worried about what if Sam did note back.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry. You can say that this Oni Kingdom became my second home. Also, you are my first friend so after visiting all the cities I will quicklye back. Also, you already have my contact number so if you face any problem then quickly contact me."


    After saying that Sam turned his head toward Emma.


    "Sister Emma. I hope you also take care of yourself and Livia."


    " Don''t worry."


    After saying that she also gave him a bracelet.


    " This is the defense bracelet. If right now you faced any dangerous Monsters like those elite or epic-grade monsters. Then the defense barrier will activate around you and you will get hurt by their attack."


    She exined the function of the defense bracelet.


    Finally sometimeter,


    Sam left the Oni Kingdom and finally started his journey toward the human Kingdom.


    ''Haha¡­ who could have thought that I would consider this oni Kingdom as my second home. Previously I wanted to go to the human Kingdom to run away from the oni Kingdom if something unexpected happened to me. But right now I am nning toe back here after visiting all the kingdom. Haha¡­''


    After thinking this Sam also begins to smile. He turned his head and for thest time, he saw the Oni Kingdom.


    _____________________


    '' I think this is the right decision because I did not use the teleportation array. Otherwise, I won''t be able to enjoy all this beautiful scenery.''


    6 hourster,


    Sam thought that in his mind. Right now he could see a big mountain and besides that mountain, he could also see the river. Truly beautiful scenery.


    Before anything you should know that he did not win toward the direction of the danger zone. If you are thinking that only the teleportation array is the way to go to another Kingdom then you are wrong. Because not many people are able to use those arrays and they still travel to another Kingdom.


    Actually, they also have a safe route to go toward the other kingdoms and with that, they do not fear any monsters. But the thing was that sometimes monsters coulde out and because of this, everyone still needed to be careful while going toward another Kingdom.


    Sam was the result of following that safe route. He can also see many other people also following the same route to go toward the human kingdom or most likely to the elf kingdom. With that, he can say he wasn''t alone.


    Most likely many of them were businessmen while many of them are also what years are going toward another Kingdom to finish their mission. So like this, he already saw many different types of people.


    ''If I follow this speed most likely it will take me 2 days to reach the human Kingdom. Well, it is okay because I also wanted to observe my surrounding area very carefully.''


    Sam thought that. He also did not want to reach the human Kingdom that quickly because he also wanted to enjoy the beautiful scenery.


    But one thing was that he also wanted to know which type of monster he would meet in this area. Well, those monsters will be the same as the monster that he saw in the forest of death near the Oni Kingdom. So you can say that he is also very curious about that.


    Also, the most interesting thing was that from the start he was using his observation technique to observe everyone and their status. He finally bought this technique from his system shop. Finally, after so long, he was able to find this technique and with that, he quickly learned it. On the other hand, he chose the energy shield from the Royal Library.


    So right now he is also very eager to use both of the techniques against the Monsters. Unfortunately, right now he won''t be ab


    le to observe the status of those Warriors who have higher strength than him. So to do that he needed to upgrade that technique to his maximum limit.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 440 440 - Human Kingdom

    ?


    " Stone Bull


    Grade:- Early Elite/ Intermittent S-grade


    Health:- 34000/340000


    Spiritual energy:- 30000/30000


    Strength:- 3300


    Agility:- 3400


    Physique:- 3400


    Int:- 3000


    Skill:-


    Stone smash, stone Spears, big stones, stone control, stone body. "


    As you can see, finally using his observation technique he could see the status of his enemy or you can say he can see the status of the monster.


    As you can see right now in front of him you will find a stone Bull, this Monster could control the stone element and use that to attack his enemy. Unfortunately, it was only an early-grade Monster because of this, Sam easily took care of that monster.


    But the thing was that he was now really excited to use the observation technique on those other Monsters. As you know that from the start he wanted some kind of technique like this but unfortunately that time he did not get any technique like this. But right now the situation was different and he already had this technique and with that, he could also see the status of his enemy and the Monsters.


    After killing that Monster Sam begins to advance. Previously he went from the safe route to hunt some Monsters. So after killing those Monsters he once again goes back to the safe route and once again begins to advance.


    You have to say that fortunately every Kingdom created this type of safe route and with that, you can easily travel between two Kingdom. Well, normal people or those people who did not have that much money could not use the teleportation array. Even using the teleportation array was very costly and not everyone can afford that.


    But one thing was for sure while going toward the human Kingdom he finally began to see many humans on the road. Most likely those people are also going toward the human Kingdom.


    Even though he did not talk to anyone, he used his full senses to hear what they were talking about.


    "Did you hear what happened to the Oni Kingdom? Fortunately, we weren''t present in the Oni Kingdom at that time. But still, how can those abyss humans be active once again."


    " Sigh, yeah it is fortunate that we are in the present time in the Oni Kingdom. But who can guarantee that those people won''t attack our Kingdom? As you know that those Abyss humans needed sacrifice for their demon god and most likely they will target all the living beings like us."


    " Now that I think about sacrifice, I already heard a surprising thing: most likely today people are trying to kidnap the royal blood so that they could use the royal blood as a sacrifice for the demon god. Compared to anyone if you are able to use the royal blood then it will be more usefulpared to those other blood."


    " Yea, I also heard that. I just hope our Kingdom did not get attacked by those abyss humans. "


    As you can hear those humans were talking about those Abyss humans and the Oni kingdom. Every one of them sighs in relief that at that time they were not present in the Oni Kingdom.


    On the other hand, sometimeter Sam already ignored their discussion because he started to feel it was boring. None of them discuss any important news about the human kingdom. Actually, Sam really wanted to know about the human Kingdom but unfortunately, he was unable to learn that in the Oni Kingdom.


    At first, he thought that he would get all those answers from the Royal library but unfortunately when he wanted to find that much information about another Kingdom, he did not find that much information, and because of this, you know that most likely to gather information about another Kingdom you first needed to visit that Kingdom.


    So you can say this is one reason he decided to travel around Terraria.


    ________________


    Sometimeter,


    A big eagle suddenly shoots air des toward Sam. But some on the other hand did not move well from their ce he just stayed there. If you are thinking that you wanted to die then you are wrong because he is just waiting for the right time to use his energy shield.


    The moment those air des came closer to instantly activated the energy shield and Instantly those des shed with his energy shield.


    Right now in front of him, you can see a pure white energy shield.


    "


    Wind eagle<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Grade:- intermediate Elite grade/ Early SS-grade


    Health:- 44000/44000


    Spiritual energy:- 45000/45000


    Strength:- 4500


    Agility:- 4300


    Physique:- 4400


    Int:- 4000


    Spirit:- 4500


    Skill:- Wind de, Air control, wind Spears, wind zone, tornado, small regeneration. "


    With that, we were able to stop those wind des. But at this time the Monster is still attacking him. Most likely that Monster did not want to give him any chance to react but unfortunately none of those air des were effective against him.


    Sam on the other hand was looking for a chance to attack that Monster and he already found that chance. Without wasting any more time he quickly created a powerful sun ray and that instantly hit that monster. That Sunray pierced through the skull of that monster.


    Finally after collecting the dead body on the loot, Sam decided to advance once again. Actually, as you can see he wasn''t on the safe route right now. He was feeling quite bored so he decided that he should leave the safe route and go to the human Kingdom.


    But at the same time, he did not want to go deeper in the forest because as you know that he could also meet powerful monsters that could easily kill him. Because of this, he is also roaming around the surface area of the forest that is near the safe route.


    2 dayster he saw the human Kingdom. Without wasting any more time he quickly begins to walk toward the human Kingdom. As usual, he could also see many people waiting at the main gate.


    So he also stands in that line and waits for his chance to show his ID and then enter the human kingdom. At this time he could see many people other than those humans who were also entering the human Kingdom.


    Not only those humans but at the same time he could see many Oni, dwarfs, and other peoples also entering the human Kingdom. Most likely one of them has a good rtionship with the human Kingdom and because of this, they enter the human kingdom.


    Between those people, only those Oni humans were able to recognize him and they also greeted him. Sam also smiled and greeted them back. Fortunately, none of them salute him or do something like that to show their respect. It could be awkward so he was just fortunate that they did not do that.


    2 hourster he finally came in front of those guards.


    "Please show your ID,"


    One of the guards asked him to show his ID.


    Sam wastes no time showing his ID. When that guard saw his ID he was surprised. If you are wondering why he was surprised then it was because the location of his Id was in Oni Kingdom.


    This makes them very surprised but in the end, they give him the permission to enter the kingdom. Well, you can say that it wasn''t rare that people create their IDs in different Kingdom''s. It is just that when they look at the date they are quite surprised.


    With that, he finally entered the human kingdom. Well, he has to say thatpared to the Oni Kingdom the human kingdom waspletely different. Because he could also see many buildings that were created by concrete and cement.


    ''Before I need to search for a ce.''


    With that, he began to look for those hotels where he could book a room.


    __________________


    Around 6:00 p.m. he finally leaves the hotel room and ns to travel around the human Kingdom. Before anything he needed to search for a good restaurant and also look for the warrior association. So he was now searching for a restaurant and the Warrior Association.


    It did not take that much time to find the restaurant and after that, he also found the warrior association. Before anything, he went inside the warrior association to sell those things and get money from them.


    Not only that he also decided to ept a mission where he needed to go to the danger zone to kill some of the monsters and bring their dead body. Fortunately, this mission has a time limit of one week which will be enough for him.


    At this time, one thing he noticed that,pared to the Oni Kingdom he did not see that much epic-grade Warrior present in the warrior association. When he was in the Oni Kingdom he could see many Epic grade Warriors, but in the human Kingdom, he did not see that many Epic grade Warriors. Or he could be wrong because many people also like to hide their strength.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 441 441 - Mission And Royal Cars

    ?


    You have to say that inside the human territory, everything is different from the Oni Kingdom. Even the behavior of those people was different from the Oni humans. But Sam did not have any problem with that, he just wanted to spend some time inside the human Kingdom and after that, you will go to other kingdoms.


    Unfortunately yesterday he did not find any mission and because of this, he was going toward the warrior association once again.


    He just hopes that this time he finds a mission that will be easy toplete. Sometimeter, you already came inside the warrior association and after that, he directly went toward the mission board. He began to look at those missions and sometimeter he Finally found an emission that he could easilyplete.


    One thing you should know is that he did not tell anyone that he already became an Elite-grade warrior. Even the old man didn''t know about this. Because of this, if you look at the warrior ID card then Sam was still a special grade Warrior.


    He did not want to change that and wanted to maintain that. Even though he won''t be able to ept those Elite grade missions, the thing was that he did not actually need to ept those missions right now.


    If you are wondering why he did not do that then it could be very suspicious. And as you can see he also wanted to maintain the low-key character and did not want to get in the spotlight.


    Sometimeter,


    You already went in front of the receptionist and handed in the mission that he wanted to ept. In this mission, he needed to kill and collect the eye of the bloody rabbits. The mission requirement was that he needed to collect at least 500 eyes of the bloody rabbits. For one eye you will receive one gold coin.


    ''Now I wanted to know which type of Monster are those bloody rabbits.''


    It wasn''t that he did not know anything about those rabbits but while he was in the Oni Kingdom, he did not meet those Monsters and because of this he was also very curious to fight those Monsters.


    Those rabbits would use their blood as weapons and not only that they cough also sucked blood from their enemy like The vampire. This is also a reason that he wants to fight these Monsters.


    Also, one more thing you should know is that in this Terraria you will find vampires exist. But the thing was that those vampires didn''t need to drink human blood to satisfy their hunger. This vampire wasn''t some kind of monster in this world. They were like those Oni humans, a different species. Compared to any normal human they are strong. Also, they don''t need blood to survive.


    Even though Allen did not find that much information about those vampires, one thing was for sure not many people wanted to contact those vampires.


    Sam is already nning to visit their Kingdom but at the same time, he will take care, so nothing happens to him. You can say that he also wanted to visit the Elf Kingdom but he didn''t know if visiting all these kingdoms would be possible or not.


    Not everyone has a good rtionship with humans and because of this as a human, he did not know if he could visit all those kingdoms or not.


    ________________


    The receptionist already gave him back his ID. With that Sam already has that mission. The time limit of the mission was 2 weeks. So you can say that he has enough time to go to the danger zone.


    Before anything he wanted to get familiar with the kingdom that he was currently staying in. But one thing was for sure like the Oni Kingdom it was also a very big Kingdom and it will take him time topletely be familiar.


    After leaving the warrior association he began to roam around the nearby area. With that sometimeter you already became quite familiar with this ce.


    But then he did not want to waste any more time and after finishing his food he directly started going to the city gate. While going toward the city gate he could also see so many people also going to the city gate but not only that many people alsoing inside the human Kingdom.


    He also got to know one more thing, for normal people needed to stand in line to enter the city but those Warriors they didn''t need to wait in line to enter the city. Those people just need to show their ID and with that, they could immediately get entry.


    With that, he began to walk toward the city gate when something unexpected happened. This time he heard a sounding from behind. The moment he saw behind him he saw many carsing toward the city gate. But the thing was that just looking at those cars you can tell that most likely some kind of VIPing toward the city gate.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Even at this time those people who are also going toward the city gate or already came inside of the city gate, quickly make a way so that those cars go easily toward the city gate.


    This really makes Sam very confused and curious at the same time.


    ''Who is that VIP that even those Epic grade Warriors make a way for him.''


    Sam for that and he was curiously looking at them. At this time while you also look at the city guard he instantly so that even those City got weekly open the main gate and then salute toward the cars. With that, you can easily tell most likely some important people are going out of the human Kingdom.


    Sam just curiously looked toward those cars but unfortunately, he did not get to know who that person was. But then he also is not that interested to ask anyone about those cars and because of this he just one second begins to walk toward the city gate.


    Even though he did not want to ask any questions about those cars, at this time with his high sense he was already able to hear the discussion of those other Warriors.


    "So someone from the Royal pce is going to the danger zone. Who do you think was inside the car?"


    " Unable to guess but I am sure that it wasn''t in the king. Most likely it could be the princess or the prince. As you know that we really see them out of their car. So most likely they are going to work in the danger zone."


    Like these people discussing those Royal cars. Sam gets quite surprised when he hears those Royal cars going toward the danger zone. Because if they really enter the danger zone like this it will immediately attract many Monsters and this could be really very dangerous.


    ''Sigh, is this the royal family of the human Kingdom did not havemon sense? ''


    Sam thought that. But he did not have to interfere with this matter so he did not care about the royal family. He already came in front of the city guard and after showing his ID he already left the human Kingdom.


    Fortunately, the map that he got from the old king already helped him to locate the danger zone near the human Kingdom. So right now he was following the map to go toward the danger zone.


    ________________


    ''Will I be able to find any dungeons inside the danger zone?''


    He just has this question inside of his head. As you know previously in the forest of death he tried to search for the Dungeon but unfortunately, even after searching the whole ce, he did not find any dungeon.


    Most likely to find them he needed to go deeper in the forest but it could be risky so he did not do that. He was hoping that he could meet a Dungeon near this human kingdom.


    Sometimeter,


    He already came very close to the danger zone and he could already see many Warriors that were also going toward the danger zone, or he also saw many people that were most likely going toward the human Kingdom.


    One thing you should know is that those bloody rabbits were only special-grade monsters, so with that, he will not have any problem killing those Monsters. But don''t think he will just leave after killing those monsters because even though he did not ept any mission, he still wanted to advance in the forest to meet a more powerful monster.


    This time from the start he did not use the concealment technique. So with that just after entering the forest he already got attacked by many monsters. But the thing was that he easily killed those monsters and just kept advancing in the forest.


    It has already taken some time to enter the middle area of the outer forest where he will meet those special grade monsters. Right now he just only needed to find those rabbits, and with that he would start his hunting.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 442 442 - Lightings Lizards

    ?


    "


    Lig htning lizard


    Grade - Peak Special grade/ intermediate A-grade


    Health - (25000/ 25000)


    Spiritual energy - (24000/24000)


    Strength - 2500


    Agility - 2600


    Physique - 2500


    Spirit - 2400


    Skill:-


    Lightning Dash, Lightning Ball, Thunderbolts, Lightning w. "


    As you can see, he was fighting these Monsters. Even though he could easily kill them using his telekinesis, he did not do that because he also wanted to know how strong he had be because of this, without using those types of techniques fighting those Monsters.


    Suddenly two of those Monsters came in front of him, but Sam already noticed them and instantly moved away from that ce, and was behind both of the monsters.


    With that, he did not waste time and swung his sword toward both of the monsters. Even though those monsters could use the lightning element andpared to any normal Monster they were very fast, but unfortunately Sam was faster than them.


    "Chi!!!!"


    After letting out this sound both of the monsters drop dead on the ground. But on the other hand, did not rx; he once again instantly got away from the area. Because at this time you can see many of those monsters present in that ce.


    Suddenly out of nowhere, a lightning ball came toward him but it wasn''t in there because at this time thunderbolt also suddenly attacked him. Sam who was busy dodging those lightning balls, was unfortunately unable to do all the thunderbolts, and in the end, he got hit by the thunderbolts.


    That attack sent him flying backward but Sam quickly stabilized himself and before those thunderbolts hit him once again, he quickly dodged those attacks. Those monsters did not stay ideal using their lightning dash, they already came behind Sam and most likely wanted to attack him using their lightning w.


    But unfortunately for those Monsters, before those lightning ws hit him, a very big energy will be created in front of these Monsters, and in the end, their attack hits that energy shield. Because of that energy shield, he was unable to hit Sam, and as you can see Sam did not receive any type of injury.


    But on the other hand, if you look at the condition of that energy shield then you can see that it already has a crack mark on it. Most likely if they attack the energy like this they will be able to break it.


    But Sam won''t give them the time because he is already preparing Sunray. Instantly the energy finished from that ce and those sun rays came out from his five fingers and directly attacked those monsters.


    You can say that those sun rays were like a lesser beam. They instantly pierced through their skull. With that, all those 5 monsters drop dead on the ground. But Sam did not stop there, he attacked those other lightning lizards.


    But the thing was that some of them were able to escape because of the lightning element. Those Monsters already saw how dangerous the sun ray was. So, the moment they notice that the human most likely wants to attack them with that, without wasting any more time using their lightning dash they escape from that ce.


    ''Really, I also wanted the lightning element. This is the most destructive element. Sigh,''


    You have to say that Sam was really amazed by the speed of those Monsters. He also wanted to learn the lightning element but unfortunately, until now he did not find any technique rted to the lightning element.


    The thing was that some did not want to let those monsters go. So he is already using his movement technique and his full speed begins to chase those monsters. Fortunately, he was faster than those Monsters and already able to catch up to them. At this time he also did not waste any more time and quickly attacked those Monsters which waspletely unexpected for those Monsters. With that, those Monsters were unable to react on time and just died from those attacks.


    ______________________


    After collecting all the loot and the dead bodies Sam leaves that ce. He could already since many Warriors wereing toward this ce so he left that ce. Right now his main target was going toward the deeper area of the forest so that he could meet those Elite-grade monsters.


    While searching for those monsters he already met many of those Monsters. But the main thing was that unfortunately, he did not meet those bloody rabbits even finding those Monsters for this long. It has been one day since he entered the danger zone but until now he did not find those bloody rabbits.


    ''I really need to search for those monsters as quickly as I can so that I can finish the mission.''


    He wanted to finish the mission as quickly as he could so that he could focus on those other Monsters. But the thing was that until now he did not have even the slightest clue about those bloody rabbits.


    "Lightning lizard


    Grade - Early Elite grade/ early S-grade<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Health - (34000/ 34000)


    Spiritual energy - (31000/31000)


    Strength - 3300


    Agility - 3400


    Physique - 3400


    Spirit - 3100


    Skill:-


    Lightning Dash, Lightning Ball, Thunderbolts, Lightning w. "


    Sometimeter he once again met those lightning lizards but this time every one of those lightning lizards was powerful. As you can see, all of those Monsters were early S-grade.


    With that this time Sam was more careful. One by one instantly many lightning balls came toward him. But not only that at this time thunderbolts also came toward him.


    Before they could hit him, an energy shield was quickly created in front of him to protect him from all those attacks. Most likely those Monsters nned to attack him from behind but at this time Sam did not want to hold back so he instantly used the telekinesis technique.


    As you know, if those Monsters were stronger than him, he could only stop their movement for a minute. But every one of those Monsters is weaker than him and with that, he instantly controls the whole body of those Monsters and none of those Monsters are able to move from their ce.


    Fortunately, those Monsters came very close to him and because of this, they were in the control range of his telekinesis technique. He did not waste any more time and killed all those Monsters. After that, you once again begin to advance to search for those bloody rabbits.


    ''Should I ask someone about those bloody rabbits?''


    In the end, he decided that he should ask someone about the bloody rabbits. As you know that he wasn''t that familiar with the danger zone and because of this, even until now he did not find those bloody rabbits.


    But the thing was that right now he needed to search for a warrior and wanted to ask him that question. But at the same time, he wasn''t sure if that Warrior would tell him the truth or not.


    ___________________


    "Haha¡­ I really wanted to go Deeper into the forest to fight those powerful Monsters. Captain please can we go deeper? "


    " No, I did not want to risk our lives. Even if you are feeling confident, you should not risk your life."


    Sometimeter, Sam already found some Warriors who had most likely just finished killing those Monsters. One of them wanted to go deeper, but unfortunately, the captain wouldn''t allow him to go deeper.


    ''I should ask them.''


    Sam decided to ask those people about the bloody rabbits. So he began to walk toward those Warriors.


    Most likely those Warriors also already sense him and because of this they already became alert the moment they notice him. But when they saw that it was a human and most likely he did not have any type of intention to attack them they rxed a little but still there was in their guard.


    With their curious eyes, they saw that a human suddenly came in front of them and just stop moving.


    "Can you tell me where I can find those bloody rabbits?"


    That person asked them that question. For a moment every one of them had a good surprise but then one of them began tough.


    "Haha¡­ for a moment I thought we were facing some kind of bigshot. So it looks like we are facing a weekly we just only wanted to kill some bloody rabbits. Haha.. you weakling you should note to this ce because you will find those elite-grade monsters."


    A person begins to say all of this arrogantly. Most likely just after hearing the question about those bloody rabbits that person considers Sam as a weakling. And in his eyes, he just did not care about any weak person.


    But Sam did not show any reaction after hearing that he was just looking at that Captain and just waiting for her answer. At this time the captain also did not say anything and just curiously looked at him. She also tried to sense his power but unfortunately, Sam was now using the concealmen


    t technique to hide his power and because of this nobody was able to feel his true power.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 443 443 - Pressure And Location

    ?


    The captain of that Warrior group is trying to sense the power level of Sam but unfortunately, she is unable to feel anything. Because of this, she bes very alert because suddenly a person appears in front of them and she is also unable to sense the power level.


    ''Did he actually hide his power? What is his real Motive? Did he want to attack us? Are his teammates already surrounding us? ''


    Instantly, she began to think about all of these questions. Because of this she also became very aware of the surroundings and began to observe the surroundings but unfortunately, she did not feel anything.


    On the other hand, Sam did not know anything about this. Even if he gets to know about this he will justugh because he never thought someone would think like this.


    "Do you know the location of those bloody rabbits I need to finish my mission?"


    This time Sam once again says that to the captain while ignoring the person who is talking nonsense. But most likely his behavior makes that person angry.


    "How dare a weakling like you dare to ignore me? Do you know who I am?"


    Just after saying that, that person instantly came in front of him and punched him.


    This arrogant behavior really surprised everyone, even his teammates were surprised by this behavior. Sam was also quite surprised by that arrogant behavior but the thing was that he easily caught that punch.


    After that, he did not give any time to that person to say something arrogant or some other nonsense. Instantly he uses the telekinesis technique to take control over that person and make his mind control to make that person unconscious.


    You have to say all of this happened in just a second and because of this, nobody was able to react on time. They only saw that the new person easily caught the punch but after that something happened and their teammate just fell to the ground.


    Instantly, those 9 Warriors became very alert and every one of them already brought out their weapon. They were ready to attack at any time.


    "What do you want? Do you want to attack us because of our loot?"


    Suddenly the captain of that group asked Sam that question. Even though she was very surprised when her teammate suddenly attacked that person, she got more surprised when he saw that person easily take care of his teammate and make him unconscious.


    She knows the power of her teammates, and with that, she already guessed the person standing in front of her was more powerful than her or could have the same power as her.


    "I don''t have time to waste with you so just tell me the location of those bloody rabbits."


    At this time Sam said that once again. Sam doesn''t know but at this time when the captain of the warrior group and even those Warriors look at his ck eyes they suddenly begin to feel pressure.


    This was the pressure you will feel when you get stared at by the Apex Predator. This also makes them very alert and at the same time, they are already ready to face a dangerous battle.


    But one thing was that they really don''t understand why that person still saying that to them.


    ''Is he really asking for the direction of those bloody rabbits?''


    ''Should we tell him?''


    ''I don''t know. What if he decided to attack us after getting the answer?''


    ''Guys be careful because I am unable to sense the power level of that person. But one thing was that he was very powerful and with that, he was able to make John unconscious that easily.


    I don''t want any of you to make any reckless moves. Just stay alert and let me handle the matter.''


    Actually, suddenly those human Warriors are discussing this in their mind. They also have some techniques that could help them tomunicate with each other through their mind. Actually, this is pretty normal for those high-grade warriors tomunicate through their minds.


    So the captain of the warrior group told everyone to let her handle the matter. She did not want any of her teammates to make any reckless moves.


    "Sigh, if you don''t know just say that. Why are you wasting my time?"


    At this time most likely Sam already understands that those Warriors already get ready allowed about him and most likely they were thinking that he came here to attack them.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Because of this, he decided to leave that ce.


    ''I should try to approach another group of Warriors and try to ask them about this.''


    Sam decided to approach another group of Warriors.


    On the other hand, he doesn''t know but that group of Warriors was already bing very confused that they don''t know what to say. They still could not understand that the person will leave like this.


    Everyone thought that he just came here to attack them but unfortunately, all of them were confused by this move. But they are still careful because what if that person suddenly decided to turn and attack them?


    But unfortunately, nothing like that happened. They could only see that person vanish into that forest. Even after waiting half hour in that ce, they did not feel anyone near them except those Monsters.


    They also checked the surrounding very carefully but did not find anything and with that they became sure that nobody was near them. And finally realize that most likely that person really wanted to know the location of those bloody rabbits.


    Also, one more surprising thing was that until now their friend John still did not wake up. They already checked his condition and they were sure that he was just unconscious.


    _______________________


    Sam, on the other hand, already came far away from that ce. Right now, finally, he found a group of warriors once again and this time he could see that every one of those Warriors was middle-aged men. Most likely they will not get surprised by his sudden approach because all of them are also very powerful.


    Also before approaching he canceled the concealment technique, so they did not get worried about him. Fortunately, after approaching them even though people became alert for some time, in the end, he finally got to know the location of those bloody rabbits.


    Also, the good thing was that many of those Warriors reacted like that arrogant person. So after Knowing the location he finally leaves that ce after thanking those Warriors.


    ______________________


    ''Sigh, who could have thought that I needed to go in the south direction to find those bloody rabbits.''


    Most likely because of this he was unable to find any clue about those rabbits because right now he was in the east direction of the forest and he needed to go toward the south direction.


    So with that without wasting any more time he began to go in that direction using his concernment technique. He did not want to get attacked by any other Monsters.


    But the thing was that to reach that ce he almost needed 2 days even after using the full speed. It is natural because the size of the danger zone was very bigpared to the human Kingdom. And because of this, he took almost 2 days to reach that ce.


    _____________________


    Sam never thought he would need to travel this far. Fortunately, because of this, he got a two-week time limit.


    So after eating some food he finally began to search for those bloody rabbits. Also, one more thing was that in this ce he could so the ce was darker, and most likely more powerful monsters live in this ce.


    Fortunately, it did not take him that long to search for those bloody rabbits. But the surprising thing was that when he found those bloody rabbits, he saw that those rabbits were eating the blood of other Monsters.


    Well, Sam did not waste any more time and began his hunting. He was already in his invisible mode and with that he began to easily kill those monsters. You have to say that even in this Terraria nobody could use the origin spiritual energy. Everyone used spiritual energy but nobody used the origin spiritual energy and because of this it was really easy to kill those Monsters.


    The most surprising thing was that when he decided to observe those bloody rabbits using the spiritual vision he was surprised because those bloody rabbits have dark spiritual energy inside of them. Most likely because of this all of them were very violent.


    But he did not care about the dark energy because the dark spiritual energy will not affect him, and with that, he began to easily kill these Monsters.


    But the thing was that most likely many monsters got alert by that and they were also trying to search for the enemy that was attacking those bloody rabbits. Many powerful special grade Monsters came to that c


    e, but none of them were able to sense him while he could easily kill them.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 444 444 - No Clue

    ?


    Finally, Sampleted the mission, and with that, Sam decided to go back to the human Kingdom. He also needed to submit the mission because that mission has a time limit and before the time limit he needed to submit the mission.


    Also, one more thing was that he just not only killed those bloody rabbits. When he was killing those bloody rabbits he also met many other Monsters and he killed all of them.


    For now, you can say that he did not meet any of those powerful Monsters and because of this, he did not be injured or something like this.


    2 dayster,


    Finally, he came back to the human Kingdom and directly went toward the warrior association. After submitting the mission and collecting that he also went to the shop area to sell all the other things that he collected after killing the Monsters.


    After killing all of those things he finally got 100 gold coins. With that, he decided to look at the mission board once again. Not that he wanted to ept the mission right now but he just wanted to look at the mission board and see if there are any interesting missions or not.


    You already found many interesting missions but did not ept them right now. He will be resting for today and after that tomorrow he will ept the mission and go back to the danger zone.


    Also as you know that he did notpletely travel All around The Human Kingdom and because of this, he also wanted to do that. He also wanted to look at the interesting things present in the human Kingdom.


    __________________________


    "Did you hear the princess most likely went to that in the zone previously? As you know what happened to the Oni Kingdom, with that the king already appointed a bodyguard for her."


    "Yea, I also heard that it was Miss Emi. She also went with her."


    Right now, Sam was present in the restaurant where he could hear all of this discussion. He wasn''t interested in listening to the discussion but after hearing it, he finally got interested.


    ''So most likely it was the princess who previously went outside of the city in the royal car. Like Emma, this Emi was the bodyguard of the princess.''


    Sam for that but then hepletely focuses on his food. He did not want to involve himself with any otherplicated matter and just wanted to enjoy it here.


    Unfortunately for him, he did not know that the king of the human Kingdom already got information that the royal guest of the Oni Kingdom already came to his Kingdom.


    Nobody from the Oni Kingdom contacted them but it was those merchants or those Warriors who came to the human Kingdom most likely to talk about this and most likely like this the king also got to know about this. Also to verify this, he contacted the king of the Oni Kingdom and with that, he finally became sure that it was the case.


    This instantly made him interested. Really wanted to meet that person but right now the main thing was that he did not know the location of that person. He just only knew that that person came to his kingdom but unfortunately, he did not have any idea about that person.


    You also asked the Oni Kingdom about this but unfortunately, he also did not give him any photos or something like that. The Oni king already promised that he will not reveal his identity to anyone. Not only that he also quickly contacted those other Oni humans present in the human territory so that they also did not reveal any information about their Royal guest.


    ____________________


    "Julien, any suspicious activity around our Kingdom?"


    "No sir, me and my people always stay active for 24 hours and we did not find any suspicious activity around our Kingdom."


    " Hmmm¡­ fortunately we did not find any suspicious activity. But if you find anything suspicious without wasting any time, take care of that suspicious thing. As you know, we already got the information that a powerful Abyss human came in our direction. Right now we do not have any clue about that person but I am thinking that most likely he was waiting for the right time to attack us."


    " Don''t worry sir, from time to time you also check all the surrounding areas and our people always stay active to watch where the kingdom is. The moment we will find any activity we will immediately take care of everything."


    Right now in the royal pce as you can see the king was discussing this with his Soldier. Dost Warriors watching over the kingdom.


    "Also did you find any information about the royal guests of the Oni kingdom? I wanted to meet that person because I heard that he was the person who previously found out about the abyss humans, and he also helped in the war."


    " Unfortunately we did not find any information, sir. We checked all of those on humans but most of them were regr warriors and merchants and we did not find anyone that could be the royal guest."


    Actually, nobody knows that the royal guest of the Oni Kingdom wasn''t an Oni human nor did they know that the royal guest of the only Kingdom was a human. Because of this I still did not find any clue about the royal guest.


    _____________


    Sam who was now traveling in the human Kingdom to get familiar with that Kingdom did not know anything about this. Most likely if he gets to know about this then he will immediately decide to leave the kingdom because he did not want to face anyplicated situation.


    But you can say that he was also very curious because previously he saw that Abyss humaning in the direction of the human Kingdom. But unfortunately still now there was no information about that person and with that, he was thinking if that person went toward the Elf Kingdom.


    But none of them knows that inside the South side of the danger zone of the human Kingdom something really suspicious activity is happening. It was just that you normally did not find that many Warriors went to that ce to hunt for those Monsters. Because of this, nobody gets to know about this.


    Inside the forest, you can see many people with ck cloth doing something. At first, you probably think of them as normal Warriors but if you look at them or try to observe their aura, then you will find that all of them are releasing ck aura.


    __________________


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (46000/36000)


    Spiritual energy: (46000/36000)


    Strength: 4600 + 200 - 4800


    Agility: 4600 +200 - 4800


    Physique: 4600 +200 - 4800


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 4600 + 200- 4800


    Spirit: 4600 + 200 - 4800


    Status points:- 466,000 - 1000 - 465,000<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (intermediate) / (Peak SS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chances)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (D-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (D-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    Sometimeter aftering back to his room, he decided to look at his status. Well for a few days, he did not focus on increasing his power and because of this, he was only able to increase his power that much. But one thing was that all this time he killed those monsters and was able to gather sufficient upgrade points to upgrade his light walk technique.


    As you know that this was the movement technique he was using from the start and this really helped him very much. The moment he uses that technique his speed increases up to times of his normal speed. So with that, you can say he became very fast and because of this he decided to upgrade that technique.


    Not only that as you can see he already sells his old armor at the system shop and with that he brings out the armor that he got from the king. Even though that does not belong to the system shop but still it will be enough for him.


    As you know that he also got a new sword and he decided to fuse yer with that sword. With that, his yer already became a pure ck sword. With just one swing he could feel the power behind that sword.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 445 445 - Human Sacrifice

    ?


    You have to say that the new power of his yer is already enough to kill any special-grade monsters without even using the origin spiritual energy.


    Also using his new upgraded movement technique he could feel how fast he had be. Most likely right now even without using the concealment technique.


    He already became a peak SS-grade Warrior, and it won''t take that much time to reach the next Warrior grade. But before that, he also needed to find the limit breaker that would help him break through the barrier.


    The thing was that aftering to this new world he was feeling that breaking through his hard became harder. Most likely it is rted to the world he was in right now. Terraria was the strongest Warrior world. So it is natural that aftering to this Terraria he will face something like this.


    But fortunately here finding any rare grade limit breaker wasn''t that hard. But the thing was that to find any legendary grade limit breaker, will be not easy. So right now even though he has be a peak SS-grade, to break through to the next grade will be very hard.


    He only has three rare grade limit breakers, but he could tell that those won''t be enough for him to break through to the next grade. So at the same time while hunting those monsters he was trying to search for those limit breakers.


    But unfortunately, his luck wasn''t that good and he did not get any limit breaker these days. Even though he could use the supreme upgrade to upgrade any of the limit breakers to legendary grade, he cannot be sure that only one legendary limit breaker will be enough to break through to the next grade.


    ''Sigh, it would be good if I am able to find those limit breakers in my system shop. Unfortunately, even after searching for a long time, I was unable to find any limit in the system shop. I don''t know where I will find those limit breakers, sigh.''


    Right now Sam was thinking about this. He already searched in his system shop but unfortunately, he did not find any of those limit breakers and because of this he was thinking that it would be good if his system also provided him with those limit breakers.


    Sometimeter after traveling to the nearby area he came back to his room and decided to rest. It is already night time and you also see that the security of the kingdom increases in the nighttime.


    ''Most likely, the king of the human Kingdom is already alert about those abyss humans.''


    Well as he already got the information that the human Kingdom already has the information about those Abyss humans, and also has the information about the war between them and the Oni humans. So he could naturally guess that the king would most likely increase the security.


    Because of this he also did not get the chance to roam around The Kingdom. Well, he can do thatter so because of this he decided toe back to his room and rest for today.


    '' I am really curious about that Abyss human that I have seen previouslying in this direction. Will that person attack the human kingdom or the Elf Kingdom? Also, I wanted to meet those Demons and wanted to know their power.''


    You can say that as a person who just came to this new world, he was curious about those Demons. He already has information that demons are very powerful. But he wanted to fight a demon and wanted to know the power of a human.


    __________________


    Unknown to anyone in the human kingdom or the elf Kingdom,


    Inside the forest or you can say the danger zone that was near the human Kingdom and also the elf Kingdom, in the inner area of the forest you can see some people doing some ritual. Not only that they also have most likely some humans and they use them as a sacrifice.


    Every one of those people was wearing a mask. The mask was like a demon mask. So wearing that they went to those humans that they had captured earlier.


    Right now every one of the humans that got captured by them did not die. They are just unconscious. So one by one they took all those 5 humans and came in front of a statue.


    Right now if you look at the statue then you can see that most likely this was a statue of a demon. But other than that, you won''t find anything different about that statue. It just looks like a normal statue.


    But the thing was that one of those people brought one human and already created a cut on his hand. Instantly blood began toe out from that human. Those people begin to extract blood and sometimeter when they have already enough blood they heal the wound of that person.


    Well, you have to say that most likely those humans wear in a deep sleep. Because when that person got a cut on his hand or when those people extracted blood from his body, that human did not feel anything.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Now back to the main matter, those people with masks take that blood and then begin to drop blood into that statue.


    Suddenly something unexpected happened. Because instantly that statue began to glow in red color and the eyes of the statue became red. It was like that statue came to life.


    Instantly all the blood that those people dropped into his body came into his mouth. But it did not end there.


    At this time those people with the masks begin to create a wound in every human and blood begins toe out from their body. Instantly the eyes of that statue begin to glow more and instantly those human bodies begin to float in the air.


    Not only that at this time the blood thates out from the human body begins to go toward that statue. Every one of that blood went into the mouth of that statue.


    At this time,


    Those people with masks already kneel on the ground. Not only that, but they also started praying to that statue with the weird Mantra.


    As you guess, those people are the Abyss humans. They sacrifice the lives of those humans to their demon god. So their demon god got satisfied with that and gave them more power.


    Unfortunately, at this time no Warrior passed through that ce. Because of this, nobody was able to see anything about this ritual or those abyss humans.


    ______________________


    ''So, if I wanted to reach the elf Kingdom, then the shortest way to go through the danger zone. But unfortunately, nobody wanted to take the risk. Also, this forest is also connected to the elf Kingdom.''


    The next day, Sam was now looking at the information about the danger zone and at this time he found out about this. He did not think that the Elf Kingdom would be this close. Who could have thought that one part of the forest was also connected to the Elf Kingdom?


    ''I am really interested to meet those other spaces like those vampires, elves, dwarfs, etc. Haha¡­ really if it is my previous world then it will be a dreame true. Thought that I would get the chance to really meet these people in real life.''


    Sam just can''t believe that he got the chance to meet these people in real life. Not only that, but the most interesting thing was that he also got a system like those people that he read in the novel.


    ''Nowe to think of it, aftering to this new world I try to enjoy myself like I did before in my previous world. Sigh, I have changed.''


    Sam also thought that while realizing the fact that after being transmitted to this new world he never tries to rx while reading novels or watching anime.


    But as you know that this happens because of those Monsters and those Dungeons. He just always has one thing on his mind which is to be powerful. Even right now he has that same thought because if he was a double to reach the level ofary grade, then most likely he won''t be able to protect this world, Eden blue.


    ''Now,e to think of it, I really wanted to go to the earth that is present in this world. Also, I heard that the people who leave call themselves the prime human or something like that. If I get the chance then after solving the problem in Eden Blue, I will try to go to the earth.''


    He already knew that in this world earth was present and the humans living there called themselves the prime humans. So he was very curious about those humans and wanted to know if this earth was the same as his previous Earth.


    ''Now,e to think of it, before I came to Terraria, I should have tried to get the information about the world where the Saints were nning to go.''


    That time he thought that he would be able to get the informationter but who would have thought that he woulde to Terraria?


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 446 446 - Dead Of The Warriors

    ?


    "What??? How did they die? Are you serious?"


    "Yes, I just only got that news. Not only me but many Warriors know about this."


    " Yes, I also hear that today when Jack and his team came back from the danger zone they found them. But the most horrible thing was that none of them had any blood in their body."


    " Actually not only blood but all of them also had a cut mark on their hand. Also, all of this happens in the inner area of the danger zone."


    " Damn!!!!... Who dares to do something like this to our Warriors."


    " Really, they were one of the best Elite grade warriors we had. Sigh¡­ who did this with this much cruelty? I don''t think it was done by those Monsters because I never saw any Monster like this. Even though a bloody rabbit and some other Monster could suck blood from our body, even if they did that, most probably those Warriors will fight against them and somehow try to escape from that ce.


    But after postmortem, we get to know that those Warriors who just died didn''t even know that they died. Medical reports already said that all of them were unconscious and did not feel anything when someone was sucking blood from their body. "


    " Yes, I also heard the medical report. But at the same time, the medical team already told us that they will need some more time because they also found something more in his body and they need it some time to figure out what it was,"


    " Sigh, I also did not know any Monster who could have done this. Also if you look at their body then you won''t find any other injuries other than the cut mark. With that, we can be sure that it wasn''t done by the Monsters. Most likely it was done by other people."


    " Did those elves do this?"


    " I am not sure. Also even if they did that at least those dead bodies would have injuries all over their body. But the medical report says that other than the cut mark none of them have any type of injuries."


    Sometime ago,


    Sam left his hotel room and then went toward the restaurant to eat something. At first, everything was ok and he was also eating his food but then something happened.


    Sam at first did not show any interest but the moment he heard that 5 humans died in a strange way instantly made him curious about what happened.


    Fortunately, he did not have to ask those people because they were already discussing what happened to those 5 people.


    Every one of those five people was human warriors, they were most likely peak Elite grade warriors. But yesterday something unexpected happened to them and they died because of that.


    They somehow lost their blood and the medical team also checked their body and other than a cut mark on the hand they did not have anything on their body. So nobody could tell with confidence that it was done by some kind of Monster or their enemy.


    Because if monsters or those enemies of the human did that then they would at least have some kind of injuries in their bodies. But unfortunately, the medical team did not find any injuries.


    ''I also did not think that those bloody rabbits could do something like this. If they really did that then at least those dead Warriors would have a mark of their teeth.''


    Sam thought that. As you already know the characteristics of those bloody rabbits. So he knows that if any Monster like them did that then at least they would have the mark of that monster. But other than the cut mark none of them have anything in their body, not even a single injury.


    The most weird thing was that the doctor gave this report that when they were losing their blood none of them woke up from their sleep. Most likely those human Warriors were in a deep sleep and even if they were getting attacked they were not able to fill anything.


    Suddenly at this time, Sam thought about those vampires but then in the next moment, he canceled that Idea. First, those vampires live forever in this ce and even if they did that then at least those human fighters would have injuries in their bodies. They would also have marks of their teeth on their neck or something like this.


    So they also weren''t on the list of the culprits.


    ''Really, which Monster or who could have done this?''<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Sam also became very serious about this matter. Not that he just did not care about this because what if next time he was the victim? Because of this, he was thinking about who could have done this.


    ___________________


    Currently not only those human Warriors and those other Warriors present in the human Kingdom were worried about this. But you can say even the king of the kingdom was very serious about this matter.


    "Martin, did you find anything about this? Any type of clue that will give us the hint about the culprit?"


    The king asked Martin who was now present in the meeting room. Not only Martin but many other people were also present in the meeting room. Actually the moment King here the report he instantly called them for a meeting.


    "Sir, we have not found anything yet. But we have the confidence that we will find the clue sometimeter. The doctor already found something present in the dead body of those Monsters and we just needed to figure out what it was and only then we would be able to know what happened to those people."


    "Hmm¡­ after this increase the security around the main gate and try to observe the surrounding area. Also told every Warrior that they should stay careful. Even if peak Elite grade warriors got killed like this then it would be dangerous for those other Warriors. So I told everyone that they should stay here full right now."


    At this time the king said that to Martin and those other people. Even though it waspletely impossible to stop those Warriors from going toward the danger zone, they should at least be careful and they should increase the number of their group.


    Like this most likely the situation will somehow be safe until the king and his people did not find out who was the real culprit and punish them.


    "Really it was apletely unexpected thing. We have some monsters present in the danger zone who could suck blood from our body but even if those monsters did that at least some kind of clue will remain in the body of those dead warriors. But it shows that none of them have any kind of injury or something like that in their body."


    " I am definitely sure that all these have nothing to do with those Monsters. Most likely it was done by some people or someone. We just needed to wait for the medical term to tell us what they found in the dead bodies and only then most likely we would have a clue about the culprit.


    Until then, increase the security once again and try to see if anyone is trying to act suspiciously."


    The king told that to Martin and Martin nodded after hearing the order from the king.


    On the other hand, if you are wondering why the king wasn''t worried about his daughter who already went inside the danger zone. Then it was because with his daughter he already sent threeary grade Warriors. So with that, the king was sure that she would be safe.


    Not only that the princess also has an artifact that will immediately send her here in the kingdom, the moment her life will be in danger. So because of this, the king wasn''t worried about the Princess.


    "Also try to contact David. You already went inside the danger zone with his teammate. He should at least be aware of the danger that is present in the danger zone."


    The king told Martin. David was the Crown Prince of the human Kingdom and he and his teammates already came inside the danger zone to finish their mission.


    You have to say that like the Oni Kingdom, the Crown Prince of the human Kingdom also did not want to stay home and enjoy the power. He did not want the power of the king, he just wanted to be powerful. The king also did not have any problem with that and because of this, unlike the princess, David always went inside the danger zone with his teammates.


    "Don''t worry sir I already contacted Prince David and told him what happened to our Warriors. Most likely after hearing that case, he wille back to our Kingdom as quickly as he can."


    At this time themander of the army said that to the king. Not only he but everyone present there also thinks like that because eve


    ry one of them already has the Crown Prince''s mentality.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 447 447 - Information

    ?


    You can say that after that incident many Warriors in the human Kingdom be very worried about their safety. Even if peak Elite grade warriors could die like this, then who will protect them? Because of this, they also decided not to go to the danger zone for some days.


    Because of this, a situation like this was created in the human Kingdom. Not only that everyone also can see the security around the human Kingdom also increased.


    "Really, who could have done this? If we are unable to find the real mastermind behind this then it could also be risky for us."


    "Sigh, you are right. Unfortunately, even the doctors were unable to say anything. Or even if they already found out the reason they did not share the information with us."


    "Did you notice that even Prince David came back from the danger zone? Most likely the King already called him back. Sigh, I hope King is able to find the mastermind of all of this as quickly as he can and quickly punish him."


    " Yea, I also hope that the King is able to find the real mastermind as quickly as he can. With that, we could once again start going toward the danger zone."


    As you can see right now many human Warriors are discussing the incident and also they are trying to know if anyone knows about the mastermind or not.


    Sam, who also decided to stay in the Human Kingdom for a few days, is also very curious to know about the mastermind behind all of this. You can say that he already guessed who could be the mastermind but still, he wanted to be sure about this.


    "If I am not wrong then I already read about this in the Oni Kingdom that those abyss humans could do something like this in their sacrifice ritual. But still, I cannot say for sure that it was them who was behind all of this because what if someone uses some kind of other technique to kill the human Warriors?''


    Sam thought this. As you know that the human Kingdom also has many enemies and what is all done by those enemies. Because of this he also wanted to know the report from the doctor to see what was the reason behind all of this.


    ''But at the same time, I can also feel the security already increasing and most likely they are searching for anyone who is making suspicious moves inside the kingdom.''


    He already got to know this because some time ago when he was going toward the restaurant, he already felt that someone was looking at him. It was like someone was observing his movement and with that, he could give that most likely this is the reason.


    ''But I don''t think those people who were behind all of this wille to the human Kingdom.''


    Sam did not think that those people who were the mastermind woulde to the human Kingdom. But it was a good thing that the security increased. Right now if those abyss humans decided toe near the human Kingdom then the king will immediately get to know about this.


    _____________________


    "So they did find something inside the body of those Warriors. It was the dark spiritual energy that they find inside the dead body,"


    Right now inside the Royal pce, the king of the human Kingdom already got the report from the medical team. They Finally discover that a small part of dark spiritual energy was inside the dead body of those Warriors. The amount of that dark spiritual energy was so little that in a normal way, you won''t be able to find dark spiritual energy.


    "So my guess is right. So those abyss humans were behind all of this. I don''t think any Monster who could use direct spiritual energy will be able to do something like this."


    "Yes sir, we also think that it was done by those Abyss humans. But don''t worry sir we already increased the security around our border area and without people really deciding to attack us oring near our territory, then we will immediately get to know about this."


    " But I don''t think they wille near our territory because most likely they also know that we will be able to find them. Because of this, they will try to stay away from the human kingdom. They will onlye to our territory if they gather many abyss humans, and like the Oni Kingdom, they also wanted a war with us.


    But I don''t think this is possible because they just recently lost a huge number of their people and I don''t think they will try to get in a war with another Kingdom."<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    At this time the king said that to his advisor. That visor and the army general also nodded. The king was telling the truth and they also think that most likely Abyss humans won''t try toe near the human Kingdom.


    "We should make a team of powerful Warriors and after that, we should win the danger zone to search that forest carefully. If they are still staying in the danger zone then it could be difficult for any Warrior to go to the danger zone. Anybody could lose them ives against those Abyss humans."


    " Yea, I already thought of these options and I already decided on a team of peak Epic and Legendary warriors. They will be the people who went inside the danger zone to search for those abyss humans. It will be good if they find Abyss humans and kill them. At the same time, it will be better if those abyss humans go toward the elf Kingdom."


    The king said that to everyone. As you know that the human Kingdom and the elf Kingdom had some kind of rivalry and because of this, the king will be happy Eid those abyss humans decided to go toward the elf Kingdom.


    _________________________


    All these days Sam wasn''t going outside the kingdom and because of this, he decided to travel the whole human Kingdom. You also try all kinds of food that you will find in the human Kingdom.


    So like this Sam was spending his days inside the human Kingdom. Currently, if you look at him then he was in front of the Warrior Academy of the human Kingdom.


    Actually not only in the Oni Kingdom but every other Kingdom most likely has a Warrior Academy like this where people get to know how to be a good Warrior. They also needed to achieve a limit. If they are able to achieve the limit then they could easily graduate from the Warrior Academy.


    Right now Sam was curious about looking at the Warrior Academy and he could see many students going inside the Warrior Academy. One thing that he noticed was that all the students in the Warrior Academy were much strongerpared to the students of his world.


    Everyone needed to reach the peak, early special grade Warrior, only then they were able to graduate from the Warrior Academy. Sometimeter he leaves that ce because he won''t be able to go inside the Warrior Academy.


    At this time he doesn''t know, but someone already noticed him, and that person already got surprised after recognizing him.


    If you look at that person then you can see that girl. She was now wearing a blue dress, also with light makeup on her face. If Sam looks at her then you will also immediately recognise that person. Because she was the girl that got approached by Sam and Sam after about the location of the bloody rabbits. She was the captain of the group of warriors who got approached by Sam.


    She was now going toward the Academy but did not think that she would meet Sam. She wasn''t a student in this academy. She just came here to do something but unexpectedly she was able to meet Sam. After some thinking, she decided to approach him because she wanted to apologize to him. She and her teammates really roughly behave with him, and because of this, she wanted to apologize to him.


    With that, she already went in the direction, where Sam went earlier.


    "Hey, listen."


    Suddenly she called Sam like this. Fortunately, she doesn''t need to do that because Sam, who was going in that direction already, can feel that one more person is most likelying toward him. But he didn''t expect that person to call him.


    He also wanted to know who this person was calling him so he turned around and only then he saw that it was a girl that wasing toward him. At first, he wasn''t able to recognize that person but when she got closer, he immediately remembered that girl. She was the captain of that warrior group that he approached to get to know the location of those bloody rabbits.


    After turning around Sam stayed like this. Actually he was very curious to know why that  girl suddenl


    y called him. Did she want something from him?


    To be continued________

 Chapter 448 448 - Nephew Of The Vice President

    ?


    "I am sorry for that day. Me and my teammate thought that you were trying to attack us for our loot and because of this, we also did not tell you anything. I am really sorry about that. Also, my teammate suddenly attacked you, which really made me very ashamed. But don''t worry, he already got punished by our guild."


    Aftering in front of him, she apologized to him for her behavior.


    "No problem. I can also understand that if someone suddenly approaches you it is natural for anyone to be alert."


    Sam said that. Well, actually he did not mind their behavior because it is natural for anyone to be alert if anyone suddenly approaches them. Naturally, they will think like this. Also, he did not mind that their Teammate attacked him because even if that person tried to harm him he wouldn''t be able to do that.


    "Actually me and my teammates came to the cafe next to us. So if you don''t mind, you can also join us. It will be our treat."


    She also said that. At first, Sam did not want to join them because he would feel awkward but then even her teammates also called him to join them so in the end he decided to join them.


    Sometimeter,


    Every one of them already introduces themselves and Sam already knows their name. The name of the captain was Ayana Vance. Other than her you can also see four of her teammates also present there. Every one of them after graduating from the warrior college joined the Gratin guild.


    Not only that Sam also gets to know many other names of the Guild and also knows that they are a guild of being one of the top guilds.


    "So are you already part of some Guild?"


    Sometimeter Ayana asks that.


    " No,"


    Sam answer that.


    " What? Even though you''re this much powerful you did not join any kind of guild. Did you all this time go toward the danger zone on your own?"


    At this time, her teammate asked. Sam nodded hearing that. She also asked him if he had any team or if he went to the danger zone solo.


    But when they got to know the answer every one of them became surprised because nobody thought that he would be going to the Danger zone solo. Because even those powerful Warriors did not have the confidence to go inside the danger zone without any team because anything could happen inside the danger zone.


    It took them some time toe back to their senses and after that, they also asked him if he had any ns to join any Guild or not. But Sam told him that he wasn''t nning to join any guild.


    Well if he was from the Terraria then most likely he would also already join a Guild, but the main thing was that he wasn''t from here and he already knew that he also needed to go back to his world so that he did not want to join any type of Guild or any organization.


    After hearing his answer you can say that every one of them became disappointed because they also wanted to ask him to join their Guild and their team.


    Actually one of the teammates who previously tried to attack Sam without any reason got punished and he won''t be able to go to the danger zone for 1 month. So because of this right now all of them are already trying to search for new teammates.


    "To tell you the truth, we did not like that person. He just recently joined our team. Even though we did not approve of that, the vice President of our Guild decided that on his own. Actually, he was the nephew of the vice president.


    Because of this, we are unable to say anything at this time. But really, who would like a person who had rough behavior like him?


    Most likely if it wasn''t for the president then he will not get punished by anyone. Well, our president isn''t like that. The moment we report what happened to the danger zone he immediately punishes that person for attacking someone without any reason."


    Ayana said that with a happy tone. Not only her but you can see that teammates are also happy. Most likely every one of them became irritated because of that person but right now they don''t need to carry that person with their team.


    "But you need to stay careful. Most likely the vice president will try to take revenge against you. Because of you, his nephew got punished by the president. Because of this, I asked if you are part of any Guild or not."


    Ayana said that. After hearing that her teammates also nodded. They know about the character of their vice president and most likely this could be possible.


    Sam also by looking at their expression could tell that most likely they already know the character of their vice president and most likely this is possible that he will try to take revenge against him. But actually, he just did not care about that person because you will be staying here for a few days after sometimeter he will leave that ce and try to go toward another Kingdom.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Also if that person tries to attack him or tries to take revenge against him he already has the confidence that he could escape from that situation without any problem.


    "Can you tell me more about your vice president?"


    Sam asks this. He did not care about that person but he should at least try to know about the enemy he recently made in this human kingdom.


    " Actually his name is Riton Panthus. He is a peak Epic grade Warrior, most likely he is very close to breaking toary grade. But he is the opposite of our President.


    He is a very arrogant person who most likely did not care about anyone other than himself. You also try to mess with our team, and as you can see he forcefully joins his nephew in our team.


    Not only that, but I also heard many rumors that he also had many dark secrets and many crimes but nobody was able to gather any proof, and because of this, he did not get punished by the king.


    Sigh, I just don''t know why President Aaron still allows that person to stay in our guild."


    Ayana''s teammate said that. Just by hearing his tone, you can say that he was pretty disappointed that the president of their guild still allowed that person to stay there.


    Sam after hearing all of these did notment on this. He did not have any intention toment on others'' matters. It wasn''t his problem.


    ''So, he is a peak Epic grade Warrior.''


    Actually, previously he thought that most likely the vice president will be aary-grade warrior, but who could have thought that he will be a peak Epic-grade Warrior? Even though that person was stronger than him, Sam has the confidence to get away from that person even if he tries to attack him.


    "Thank you for alerting me about this. I will be careful. But most likely we won''t be able to leave the kingdom for a few days because I already saw many people unable to leave the kingdom."


    Sam after thanking them said that.


    " Yeah, actually we also hear that. All of this happened because someone maliciously killed our Warriors. And we already got to know from the president that the king did not want any Warriors to leave the kingdom until they did not solve the problem.


    The king has already prepared a team of strong Warriors and most likely they are already ready to go toward the danger zone to search for the enemy who did all of this."


    Ayana said that.


    " Guys, did you know anything about those enemies who did all of this? As you know, I always went to the danger zone solo so I needed to make sure that I did not face those enemies."


    Sam asks them.


    " Sigh, unfortunately, the president did not want to tell us anything. He already got to know from the king about the enemy but he did not tell anyone about them. Also, one more thing was that the president and the vice president will join that team and will go outside the Kingdom to search for those enemies.


    Actually not only the President of our Guild but you can say that many other presidents of many other guilds also will be joining that team. So at this time, you can stay tension free because the vice president is also busy with this."


    Ayana said that.


    " Ohh¡­ thanks for the information. Most likely the enemy that they will be searching for is very powerful, and because of this so many powerful Warriors got called by the king."


    " We also predict the same thing. Most likely the enemies are ve


    ry powerful and because of this, many powerful Warriors join the team."


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 449 449 - Warrior Team

    ?


    Sometimeter, Sam left the cafe. You also already put their number on his own. But you have to say thatpared to the phones that he used in his old world, everything here was advanced.


    After leaving the cafe Sam begins to roam around the human Kingdom. He was staying in the south part of the kingdom so you can say that he almost became familiar with that part. But he also needed to be familiar with those other parts and it will take him some time to do that.


    The royal families and those important Warriors of the human Kingdom live in the northern part of the kingdom. So he also wanted to go there to look at that ce. Because he heard thatpared to any other part of the kingdom the north part of the kingdom was more safe and also very beautiful. So he wanted to go there and see the ce.


    Sometimeter he came back to his hotel room. It was already night and because of this, he came back to his hotel room. As you know, the security around The Kingdom doubles at night. He did not want to have any problem with them so he just decided toe back.


    After freshening up, Sam finally sat down on his bed in a Lotus position and already started putting the status points in his stats. Instantly the more he was putting the status point in his stats, he was feeling morefortable and warm energy circting inside him.


    So like this Sam was increasing his power andpletely forgot about his surroundings. He only woke up from his meditation around 8:00 a.m. but that also happened because he already set his rm clock and because of this, he was able toe back to reality.


    Before anything he freshens up. After that, he went to the cafeteria of the hotel because he was feeling very hungry. Yesterday hepletely forgot about eating something and because of this, right now he was feeling very hungry.


    On the other hand, Sam did not know but today was an important day because the warrior team that was created by the king left the kingdom. Because of this, the moment those other Warriors get the news they gather around the entrance of the kingdom, and every one of them also looks at those Warriors and will be part of this team.


    Sam who was eating in the cafeteria got confused because he was unable to see how many people there were and he could also see that even the worker of the cafeteria wanted to go somewhere. So he decided to ask them what happened.


    "Sir today the team of Warriors that was created by the king will be going toward the danger zone and we wanted to go there to see them."


    Sam can easily understand why everyone was very interested to go there because he was also very interested to go there. After that, you quickly finish his food and he alsoes to the entrance and begins to wait for the Warriors.


    At this time the ce already became very crowded and every one of them began to wait for the team to pass through that ce. Actually, only the South part of the kingdom has the entrance and exit and because of this, everybody needed toe to the South part of the Kingdom if they wanted to go outside.


    It has been 1 hour but still, none of them are able to see any Warriors. But none of them became impatient because they already got the news that all of those Warriors were using their feet to walk here. So it is natural that they will take some time toe here.


    Fortunately, only 15 minutester Sam already begins to feel a massive amount of energying toward his direction. Just feeling those energies you can tell them all of them belong to those powerful Warriors and all of them will be very powerfulpared to him.


    Right now not only Sam but many other Warriors also already notice them and they finally look in the direction. One by one every warrior began toe toward the entrance and wasting no time they just left the kingdom.


    Fortunately, those crowds already made their way there so that they could easily go toward the entrance without any problem.


    ''Most likely warriors with early Epic grade power are the lowest in the team.''


    All this time Sam also observed all the people going toward the entrance and he could tell that the lowest member of the team was early Epic grade Warriors. Every one of those Warriors did not get irritated or something like that when they passed through those many people.


    Sometimeter finally all of those Warriors left the human Kingdom and most likely they will use their power to go to the danger zone as quickly as they can. Inside the kingdom, you cannot use any of your strong power because it could also cause destruction and that could be very dangerous for the citizens living inside the kingdom.


    So the king forbade everyone that they should not use any type of technique that could cause destruction or something like that. So most likely because of this many of the Warriors also did not use their technique to travel faster.


    ''Sigh, it would be a good thing if I also get to know about the enemy. But most likely the king did not want to reveal the information to anyone. I don''t know how I will get the information.''


    Sometimeter Sam decided to leave that ce and go back to his hotel. We just wanted to know about the enemy but unfortunately, the king did not want to reveal the information and because of this he was also unable to know anything about the enemy.


    Really, he began to miss the Oni Kingdom. If it was the only King then he would at least get informed by him about the enemy. Even though he won''t be able to help anyone in the battle, he could at least provide some help using his concealment technique. Well, most likely using his title noble guest of the Oni Kingdom He could get the information but unfortunately, he did not want to do that.


    He was nning to stay in the human kingdom for 2 months after that he will leave the human kingdom.


    Sometimeter,


    After returning to his room he decided to go back to his meditation once again. Right now he won''t be able to go outside the kingdom and with that, this is the only thing he could do to increase power. So wasting no time he already decided to use his status points once again to increase his power.


    From that day, Sam just only wanted to increase his power other than eating his food and for sometime roaming around the kingdom. While roaming around the kingdom he also meets Ayana and her teammates sometimes and they also roam around the kingdom with him. From them, Sam also gets to know many things that he previously did not know about the human Kingdom.


    Actually when for the first time spiritual energy awakened in the Terraria, the situation of this ce was like the earth where everyone stayed in a different city without any problem. After that every person who awakened their spiritual energy and was already able to break through decided to create a separate kingdom for his people. So like this, every one of the kingdoms was created.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (50000/50000)


    Spiritual energy: (50000/50000)


    Strength: 4800 + 200 - 5000


    Agility: 4800 + 200 - 5000


    Physique: 4800 + 200 - 5000


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 4800 + 200 - 5000


    Spirit: 4800 + 200 - 5000


    Status points:- 465,000 - 1000 = 464,000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (peak) / (early SSS-grade)<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 10k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chances)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (D-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (D-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    As you can see that once again he already added 200 Status points in all of his stats. It has already been 2 days since he decided to do nothing and just focused on increasing his power.


    ''Did those people find anything about those enemies?''


    As you can see he was very curious to know if those Warriors found anything about their enemy or not.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 450 450 - Report

    ?


    ''Did those people find anything about those enemies?''


    As you can see he was very curious to know if those Warriors found anything about their enemy or not.


    Sam was really curious to know about this but most likely until the king did not reveal anything he would not be able to know anything. With this, he just stops thinking about that and only focuses on increasing his power.


    _______________


    1 weekter,


    In this one week many things have already happened. They already came back to the human Kingdom with her. You have to say that all of them were very powerful and just approaching them Sam could feel the pressure that wasing from them. Every one of them was peak Epic grade Warriors.


    Sam also tried to observe them but due to his level being very low, he was unable to see any of their status. But the thing was that he could see that something most likely happened to them. It was clear that they just came back after fighting someone.


    So with that Sam became really curious about what happened to them. But in the end, he did not want to interfere with them and he just ignored them.


    On the other hand, in this one week most of the time he meets with Ayana and her teammates. Well, they really were good friends. With them, you can say that Sam already visited the full kingdom. Not only that right now only they could get any information.


    As you know that Sam wasn''t part of any Guildpared to them he will have problems knowing any information about those Warriors who went to the danger zone. But what if their president decided to contact them and tell them what happened to them? Because of this, he also asks daily if they get to know any information.


    But unfortunately in this one week he was unable to know anything but suddenly today when he once again walked around with them, they finally informed him that they got some information from their president.


    They already found the enemy and they are right now fighting those enemies. The thing was that they were very powerful and because of this it took them much time to finish all of them. But they were already able to kill 80% of those enemies and right now they just needed to kill the rest of the enemy and with that, they would be able toe back.


    Previously The Princess also got attacked by those people but fortunately, her guards handled the matter and because of this, nothing happened to her.


    ___________________


    ''Sigh, it would be good if they directly told you about the enemy but after hearing all the reports I am definitely sure that most likely they were the abyss humans. So they really target human kingdoms and most likely those people died previously because of human sacrifice. So they once again wanted to sacrifice the human Warriors and most likely also wanted to attack The Princess or any Royal blood to satisfy their god.''


    Well even though he wasn''t able to directly know about the enemy but he could tell after hearing all the reports that those people were Abyss humans. And most likely because of this, those people are trying to attack the human Warriors to use them as a sacrifice.


    ''Now the main question was will there be a second war? If that happens then most likely many human Warriors will lose their life.''


    Sam thought that becausepared to the Oni Kingdom he did not see that many powerful Warriors like those peak Epic grade Warriors.


    Because of this, Sam was sure that even if the humans were able to win the war it would be costly.


    ''But will there be any Warrior like the old man present in the human Kingdom who is already able to reach the legendary grade? If someone like him is present here then the casualty will be less and everyone will easily win the fight.''


    Well, one thing he knows is that those legendary grade Warriors will be able to handle this type of War very easily. But the main problem was that not everyone was able to break through to legendary grade and because of this he wasn''t sure if someone like him was present here or not.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    ''Sigh, beforeing here I should ask the old man about this.''


    Unfortunately before leaving the Oni Kingdom, he did not ask this type of question to the old man and because of this he really doesn''t know if someone was present or not.


    For a second, he thought about contacting the old man but then he decided not to do that. Because previously the old man also told him that he will also try to stabilize his condition because he just recently broke through. So most likely he was now busy with his meditation and because of this Sam did not want to disturb him that much.


    _____________________


    Well, Sam doesn''t know but really someone who is already able to reach the legendary grade present in the human Kingdom. He was also like the old man of the Oni Kingdom, a previous king but right now he handed over the responsibility to his son and after that, he only focused on bing powerful.


    Previously he was busy stabilizing his condition because he also just recently broke through but suddenly he got informed by his son that something like this happened and also about those Abyss humans. So he also now is already ready to take action anytime if those people decided toe near the human Kingdom.


    The old King also did not want something like the war to happen to the human Kingdom. He already hears from his old friend what happened to their kingdom and how many casualties they received. So the old King did not want something like that to happen to his Kingdom because as you know, the human Kingdom wasn''t even powerful like the Oni Kingdom.


    Sopared to the Oni Kingdom, the human Kingdom will naturally receive more casualties and he did not want something like that to happen. He will immediately take action if he finds any trace of those Abyss humans.


    Also, one more thing was that he also observed his Kingdom from time to time to make sure that no abyss humans came to his Kingdom and were already nning to attack everyone from inside the kingdom. So he was also observing inside his Kingdom from time to time and at this time he found something quite interesting.


    At this time he found a person that wasn''t releasing his normal aura. The aura that person was releasing waspletely white. So this really made him very curious to know about that person and also one more thing was that person most of the time stayed inside his room.


    Nothing was that using his observation technique he could be sure that that person wasn''t Abyss human. But then the white aura was really mysterious and he really wanted to know about that.


    You have already taken action but he also needs to make sure that no Abyss humans are able to approach his kingdom so right now he is unable to do anything. But you already decided that after solving everything he will approach that person to know about him.


    That person also spent time with some people from his Kingdom. He was also quite suspicious about that because what if he was a spy from another Kingdom and decided to make friends to get information about the human kingdoms and after that inform his client about this? So to make sure nothing like that happens he also observes that person from time to time.


    Sam waspletely unaware of any of these, but fortunately because using the concealment technique the old King wasn''t able to know that when he was meditating inside his room he became more powerful. If the old King also gets to know about these then most likely he will be more suspicious and immediately take action against Sam.


    Even though Sam did not know anything about this but he already guessed something like this could happen so while increasing his strength he also used the concealment technique to suppress his aura. Most likely if he gets to know about the old King that already became interested in him then he will be more alert and try to leave the kingdom. But unfortunately, who will tell him about this information?


    Sam right now has alreadye back. But the thing was that today was his rest time and because of this, he also wasn''t using his status points to increase his status. Even though increasing his strength cannot make him exhausted, it really puts pressure on his body and because of this, he also decided to rest one day every week.


    But the thing was that he really wanted to use all the status points to be powerful at once. But his body won''t be able to handle the pressure and because of this, he nee


    ds this much time to add the status points.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 451 451 - Serious Situation

    ?


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (53990/53990)


    Spiritual energy: (53990/53990)


    Strength: 5000 + 399 - 5399


    Agility: 5000 + 399 - 5399


    Physique: 5000 + 399 - 5399


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 5000 + 399 - 5399


    Spirit: 5000 + 399 - 5399


    Status points:- 464,000 - 1995 - 462,005


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (peak) / (intermediate SSS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chances)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Conceal technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (C-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (C-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Finally became someone who has the strength to protect and also fight the Monsters, but still you have a long way to go.] "


    One weekter,


    As you can see it has been two weeks since those Warriors went to the danger zone and also started fighting those Monsters. Since these two weeks nobody was able to go outside of the kingdom everyone decided to finish all the mission that was rted to inside the kingdom.


    Unfortunately on the other hand Sam wasn''t interested in the mission. Other than sometimes spending time with Ayana and her teammates, he only spends most of his time bing powerful.


    As you can see he already became an intermediate SSS-grade Warrior. If right now the human saints in his world Eden Blue did not break through to SSS-grade or Epic grade, then most likely right now he would be the strongest Warrior present in Eden Blue.


    The thing was that he was now also facing a problem and because of this he decided to stop using his status points right now. Actually he one second reached a barrier and was unable to break through. Right now he was very close to breaking through to intermediate grade, but the problem was that he once again began to face the barrier, and to be able to break through he needed to break that barrier.


    If it was before then using the rare grade limit breaker could help him easily to break through but right now it ispletely different. As you can see he waspletely stuck on the limit of the early SSS-grade Warrior.


    Unfortunately, he was unable to go to the danger zone to search for the legendary grade limit breakers so because of this, he was also unable to break through. Even if he tried to break through using the rare grade limit breaker, it did not help him that much to weaken the barrier.


    So right now he justpletely focuses on breaking that barrier. Nothing was that he also did not have any rare grade limit breaker. He already used all of them and because of this right now he did not have any of those limit breakers that were upgraded and became a legendary grade limit breaker.


    Other than that he already uses all of his Dungeon points to increase his observation level and energy shield technique. Even though because of the concealment technique he did not get to use his energy shield that much, he still wanted to stay updated with his energy shield.


    Because of this as you can say he upgraded his energy shield. Right now he is focusing on breaking through. Until he does not go to the danger zone he won''t be able to find the limit breakers and because of this, it will be much harder for him to break through.


    ''Sigh, I wanted to know if there is any Warrior who breaks through only using his strength, without using the limit breaker.''


    Sam really wanted to know if there was any Warrior who was able to break through without using limit breakers. Because it wasn''t that you were unable to break through without using the limit breaker but it will take you much time and most likely you need to attack the barrier continuously to break through.


    Nowe back to the present matter,


    As you can see Sam was in the meditative position while trying to break through the barrier. But at this time he didn''t know that someone was observing him and that person also became quite surprised.


    Sam did not leave his house for almost one day. Because all this time he was just continuously attacking the barrier. This is the reason that the old king of the human Kingdom got very curious to know why he was staying inside his room.


    Actually through his observation technique the old king just only can see the spiritual aura, other than that he is unable to see anything. So using that technique he could see the white aura that was inside Sam.


    For two days, that person was continuously inside his room, and that made him very curious to know what he was doing right now. Because of this, he decided to leave his house without telling anyone. The thing was that right now nobody would even know if the old king left his house or not.


    Those people would not even get the signal about this. So like this the old man left the Royal pce and used his power to hide his aura, he wasing toward the ce where could sense Sam.


    __________________________


    On the other hand, Sam did not have any idea about this. He is just only busy with his break through and because of this he alsopletely forgets about his surroundings. But that does not mean that he will not be able to react if someone tries to attack him or kill him.


    Even though he was busy with his meditation and breakthrough, he will immediately get to know if anybody gets close to him with malicious intentions.


    But Unfortunately, he was not even able to Sense the old man that got close to his house and right now was also looking at him through his window.


    If you look outside of his room, you will see the old man was flying in the sky and he was looking inside the room through the window. Because he did not have any type of intention to harm, Sam was not able to since that.


    _________________________


    ''Did it be some kind of technique for his mind? Other than that why is he meditating like this? Most likely he was using some kind of technique for his mind control or something like this.''


    After observing him for some time the old King finally came to this conclusion. After staying there for some time the old king decided to leave the ce. Well, he also wanted to see the border area of his kingdom, so he left that ce.


    On the other hand,


    Sam did not do anything that could bring disaster to the human Kingdom so because of this right now the old King did not have any type of intention to interrogate him or capture him.


    Right now he decided to look at the border area but everything is fine and he did not sign up any Abyss humans that wereing toward the human Kingdom. So in the end he decided to disappear into the danger zone and also wanted to see what happened to the human Warriors and their enemies.


    But he also cannot stay there for long because what if at this time those Abyss humans decided to attack the human Kingdom? Because of this, the old King did not want to stay that long inside the danger zone.


    _________________


    On the other hand, unknown to anyone those human fighters who previously came inside the danger zone and right now fighting those abyss humans, already killed many of those abyss humans. Seriously you can say that at least 50 human Warriors came inside the danger zone and after that, they faced those 2000 abyss humans.


    The thing was that they already killed more than 1000 Abyss humans, but the problem was that they still needed to kill many of them and their condition of them also wasn''t that good. Fortunately, none of the human Warriors died but still, the condition of them wasn''t that good.


    The thing was that they did not even get the chance to ask for reinforcement because for 2 weeks they just continuously fought those Abyss humans. If you look at them then you can see some of them have already lost their armor and some of them already have serious wounds in their body. More importantly, all of them were very tired right now.


    "Guys, don''t give up, we just need to kill all of them and with that, we will be able to protect our Kingdom."


    Right now the captain of the human fighters told everyone. But the thing was that none of the human Warriors will back up because if they decided to escape them those abyss humans will naturally shift their focus on the kingdom


    and what if they also get the chance to bring more abyss humans? Then it willpletely turn into a war and nobody wants that to happen.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 452 452 - Serious Situation

    ?


    As you can seepared to the human Warriors the number of those Abyss humans was greater and because of this, a situation was created like this. Even though those human Warriors already killed most of the Abyss humans, they still needed to kill the remaining one and it was very hard for them.


    Most of the Warriors were already seriously injured and because of this, it became harder for them to kill all those enemies.


    The captain of the human fighters was fighting the captain of those Abyss humans. Both of the leaders are fighting while theirrades are also fighting with each other.


    The human leader quickly swings his sword at the enemy, but he also swings his ax toward him. Both of the weapons sh with each other and an impact was created by that. That impact was powerful enough to send both of the warriors backward but they quickly stabilize themselves and once again attack each other.


    Continuously the shockwave was created because of those impacts. Right now you can see the surrounding area already got destroyed because of their sh but both of them just now fully focused on each other.


    On the other hand, those other human Warriors fighting those remaining Abyss humans. You have to say that even though all of them werepletely injured, none of them wanted to give up on the fight and because of this, they were using their all to fight those enemies.


    Those long-distance Warriors once again recover their spiritual energy and attack their enemies while those closebat Warriors, also attack those enemies from close distance.


    Fortunately, not every one of those abyss humans were powerful, and because of this, until now those human fighters are still able to fight them and are already able to kill that many enemies.


    But on the other hand, those Abyss humans continuously tried to attack them with dark energy so that they could poison the human Warriors. Dark spiritual energy will be very little to the human Warriors if they are able to enter their body and because of this the human Warriors are also very careful about that.


    Those Abyss humans use their dark spiritual energy to attack those human fighters. Even if they created fireballs using the dark spiritual energy itpletely turned into ck fireballs and just looking at that you can tell that it is a very Ominous thing.


    Fortunately, every human fighter has their armor and those who did not have it are also fighting those enemies carefully.


    On the other hand, the leader of the human Warriors instantly hit the ground and already coughed blood from his mouth. Previously the leader of the enemy quickly created a big dark sh and with that, the human leader was unable to defend himself from that and hit the ground.


    Completely lost his Armor and you can see the red line on his chest that was created because of the dark sh. But he did not care about that once again channeled his spiritual energy into his sword, and instantly attacked that enemy once again.


    This time he channeled more spiritual energy and because of this he was also able to create a more powerful attackpared to before. With that, he instantly created a very big zen sh.


    Actually, this time not even the leader of the abyss human think that the human leader would react this fast and attack this quickly even though he got injured this much. Because of this he wasn''t able to react on time and finally got it by that attack.


    "Ahhh!!!!"


    He let out a screen and at this time you can see that his arms also got damaged and a very big wound also created on his leg. Instantly ck blood starteding out.


    "I will kill you,"


    This is the first time he got injured this much and because of this, the leader of the army got very angry at the human leader. Instantly he began to shout and the human leader could feel The Spiritual energy inside that Abyss human begin to increase.


    This will be very risky and because of this, the human leader without wasting any more time will begin to attack continuously toward that enemy. But unexpectedly something happened and those attacks did not do that much damage to that enemy. The enemy was still shouting and The Spiritual energy was still increasing.


    ''Dammn!!!!''<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The situation was getting very serious and dangerous right now and because of this instantly the human leader began to worry about that enemy leader. He could feel that the enemy leader most likely already broke through to theary grade and this already became very hard for him to win against that person.


    ''Shit, if I give up right now then myrades will be in danger.''


    The leader of the human Warriors knows that right now if he escapes or gives up On the fight then his teammate will be in a very dangerous situation and most likely all of them will lose their life.


    So he instantly prepared to use his trump card. Previously did not decide to use that because it could also cost his life but right now he did not think about anything and began to use that technique.


    The human Warrior closes his eyes and then you can see the spiritual energy starting to gather around his body. But like that enemy leader, his spiritual energy did not increase but it just came toward his sword. It was like his sword was the one that absorbs those spiritual energies, and because of this the sword also begins to shine.


    At this time the clear sky was alsopletely covered by the dark clouds and those clouds also made a very loud sound. Just looking at the atmosphere you can say that it already turned very dangerous and most likely the human warrior already decided to use hisst attack to kill that enemy.


    The situation most likely would not turn into this if they were able to call for reinforcement but unfortunately, they have to fight those enemies continuously and because of this they did not get the time to call for reinforcement.


    Right now those human Warriors and those Abyss humans already became ever that both of their leaders most likely already using their trump card. Butpared to those abyss humans, those human Warriors about their leaders because they also know that these ultimate techniques could also kill their leader.


    Because of this, every one of those human Warriors started to pray that nothing happened to the leader. But at this time this still did not fight those Abyss humans, because they were using him all to fight the enemies so how could they stop fighting the enemy?


    ____________________


    5 minutester, the leader of the Abyss humans already opened his eyes and it already became dark red. Not only that he is also releasing the aura of aary-grade Warrior.  Even those human Warriors also started to feel the pressure that he was releasing right now.


    At this time the leader of the abyss humans could also see that his enemy was right now closing his eyes and most likely also preparing for his ultimate technique. Also, the thing was that he also felt dangering out from the technique so without wasting any more time he already decided to finish that person.


    Using his speech he already came in front of that human Warrior and already swung the ax toward the leader of the human Warrior. On the other hand, before that ax could hit the human warrior, he already opened his eyes and instantly swung his sword.


    A huge impact was created that sent all the other Warriors back away from their ce. But at this time If you look at both of the leaders then you will see both of them are also very injured and both of them have already started releasing blood from their mouths and noses.


    Compared to the leader of Abyss humans, the human Warrior was seriously injured. This was a really powerful technique but the thing was that he was unable toplete the technique because of the interference of the enemy. This already damages his body. On the other hand, his enemy also became very powerful and this also made him more injured.


    But he was the person who would give up in this critical situation when he could see that the condition of the enemy was also very serious right now. He was nning to use his all to defeat him but he could also feel that he was also losing his strength.


    ''Shit, most likely I already reached my limit and this is only my end. please just a little more so that I could defeat him.''


    He already knows that he already hit the limit and most likely he will get killed by this. But he did not care about that, he was just hoping that his body would give him some more time, and with that, he was hoping to defeat that enemy.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 453 453 - Winning The Fight.

    ?


    The leader of the human Warriors began to lose his strength and the Abyss human got the upper hand. He was ready to kill the leader of the human Warriors. Even though he was injured seriously and we will get affected by the side effect, before that, he wanted to kill the leader of the human Warriors and also wanted to kill those remaining human Warriors.


    After that even if he loses his strength you will not care about that because they will get many dead bodies of those human Warriors and could use them as a sacrifice for their god.


    On the other hand, those human Warriors could also see that their leader was about to get killed by the enemy leader. But unfortunately, they are unable to do anything because if they lose their focus they could also lose their life. In this situation, everyone feels helpless and doesn''t know what to do.


    If they could call for reinforcement then nothing like that would happen and they could easily win this fight over those enemies. But right now they are unable to call for reinforcement and because of this, all of them are in this critical situation where they will also lose their life.


    "Guys try to use your full strength and kill as many enemies as you can. Most likely this is ourst chance,"


    Suddenly one of those human Warriors said that because everyone could see that the situation was good for them and most likely they would die. Before that, they wanted to use their full strength to kill as many enemies as they could.


    Every other warrior also agrees with him and instantly they also begin to use their ultimate technique. Even if they die they wanted to kill those abyss humans and wanted toplete their mission.


    Right now those long-distance human Warriors are attacking those enemies and trying to distract them while those closebat human Warriors are preparing their ultimate skill. One by one everyone prepares their ultimate technique and that instantly alerts all the enemies present there.


    Even the Abyss human''s leader also gets alert by those ultimate techniques. Because if those humans suddenly attacked him then he would naturally die from those attacks. With that, he knows that he cannot dy any longer and instantly uses his final attack on that human leader.


    That attack was so powerful that it sent the leader of the humans backward not only that he also already lost his right hand. As you know, he already lost his arms so he tried to protect himself while bringing both of his hands in front of him and because of this he already lost his right hand. Not only that if very big wounds also appear on his body and he begins to lose blood.


    On the other hand,


    The enemy leader instantly went toward those human Warriors. But unfortunately, before he could reach them those human Warriors already used their final attack, and that instantly killed many of those enemies. In front of those many final attacks, those Abyss humans did not even get the chance to react or counterattack. That almost kills 90% of those Abyss humans.


    "Ahhh!!!! I will kill you all,"


    Looking at the scene right now the enemy leader begins to scream and is already ready to kill those human Warriors. On the other hand those human Warriors after using their ultimate techniques lost the capability to counterattack or fight once again. They are just waiting for their death. But on the other hand, they were also happy that they killed almost all the enemies.


    They just hope that those long-distance human Warriors and those medical teams could escape from this ce.


    At this time the leader of the abyss is already ready to use his final attack once again on those human Fighters and kill them instantly. On the other hand, those human Warriors are already ready to ept their death. Right now every one of them knows that day won''t be able to fight back so they are just ready to ept their death.


    But at this time something unexpected happened that nobody could guess. Suddenly the leader of the Abyss humans stops at his ce not only those other enemies also stop moving. This instantly shocked all the human Warriors because nobody could tell why that was happening to those enemies.


    The leader of the Abyss humans was just 100 m away from those human Warriors but somehow he stopped moving.


    ''What is happening? Why do they suddenly stop moving and be like this? ''<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Instantly everyone began to think about this type of question because nobody could tell why they became like this. But at this time, everyone suddenly saw a person that appeared in front of them. Suddenly in front of those human Warriors, an old man appeared. If you look at that old man he has white hair and also a long white beard.


    This instantly makes those human Warriors more confused because they are unable to recognize that person. But one thing was that they could already tell that it was the old man who was behind all of this. So most likely he is a powerhouse that decided to help them.


    On the other hand, those abyss humans just froze in their ce but not only that, one by one everyone began to turn into meat paste. Just looking at the scene, all the human Warriors were shocked. But more than that the leader of the Abyss humans also bes shocked and right now he also begins to fear that old man.


    He could already see that almost all the remaining soldiers died. Every one of them felt a lot of pressure in their body and most likely that pressure was enough to kill all of hisrades. Most likely this is his time to die.


    But before he could think more, he suddenly lost consciousness. Actually, the old man did not kill the leader of the Abyss humans. He needed to get information out of that person so he did not kill him.


    At this time you can say that those human fighters begin to worry about that old man. What if that old man suddenly attacks them?


    Because of this, everyone began to worry but the moment that old man turned around every human Warrior became rxed because they finally recognized that old man. They also try to salute that person but the old man prevents them from doing that and instantly calls the medical team to take action.


    You also directly went toward the leader of the human Fighters and used the high-grade health potion. This will save that person and also close all the wounds on his body. Also, you should not believe that he lost his hand because he could once again get back his hand but he needed to get the superior health potion.


    The medical team who was behind everyone from the start and also helping recover their injuries finally take action and instantly begin to heal those injured human Warriors. One by one every one of those human Warriors recovers from their injuries. Actually not only the human leader but many other Warriors also lose their hands or legs. It is just that even after losing their Warriors part those Warriors did not stop fighting those enemies.


    "Why didn''t any of you call for reinforcement?"


    " Sorry, those enemies did not give us any chance to contact. Not only that this ce also has some kind of signal blocker and because of this we are unable to contact the human Kingdom."


    One Warrior said that. At the same time after hearing his words, you can say that he respected that old man very much because it is natural. That old man was None other than the old king of the human Kingdom. As you know that he previously entered the danger zone to look at the human Warriors.


    But the moment enter the danger zone and came deeper into the forest he could see the critical condition of the human Warriors. Fortunately reacted on time and because of this he was able to prevent the enemy from killing all of his Warriors.


    On the other hand, the medical team already stabilizes the condition of the leader of the human fighters, not only that they also stabilize the condition of those other Warriors, and with that, every warrior is finally ready to go back to the kingdom.


    At this time before leaving that ce he also told everyone to destroy all the dead bodies of those abyss humans, and only after that did they begin to advance toward the kingdom. Right now in this situation, they will need much time to reach the human Kingdom. Finally, after a long time, everyone became happy and they could rx. So right now using their rxed mind they were going back to the human Kingdom.


    But one thing was that everyone also wanted to know what type of information they would get from the leader of those enemies. Because of this, they also wanted to go back to


    the kingdom as quickly as they could.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 454 454 - Good News

    ?


    Now it hase back to the human Kingdom, so as you know that it has already been 2 weeks since those human Warriors went to the danger zone to fight the enemies but still now nobody knows what was happening inside that zone.


    Because of this, you can say that many people also started to worry about their human Warriors who went to the danger zone. Because they already saw what happened to those 5 people. Because of this many of those humans begin to worry about those human Warriors.


    You can say that even Ayana and her teammates also started to wonder if they were the President. Even though they know that their president was powerful and very close to bing aary grade, they still begin to worry about him. But unfortunately, even in these 2 weeks, they did not get any information about the danger zone and what was happening to them.


    They just got informed one time that the president and the other human Warriors Finally found those enemies and from tomorrow they will attack those enemies. So other than that they did not hear any type of information from the president nor did they hear any kind of information about those other human Warriors.


    Actually, not only them but all those other guilds, the warrior association, and even the king also started to worry about his Warriors. He was thinking of sending reinforcement in the danger zone. Don''t know why but he was feeling that something most likely happened and because of this, everyone took this much longer to finish all the enemies.


    The most important thing was that he was already trying to contact those human Warriors but for 8 days they were unable to connect with those human Warriors and this made the king very worried about those Warriors.


    Because of this, the human King already created a second team that will go to the danger zone as a reinforcement and will help all the Warriors if they were in a dangerous situation.


    He also wanted to go to the danger zone to see what was happening but right now he could not leave the human Kingdom because it could be risky for all the humans present there. Because of this right now he was going toward his father''s house. Only his father could help him in this kind of situation.


    Nobody knows that but his father was already able to break through and became a legendary grade Warrior. Sopared to him the observation limit of his father was also greater and with that most likely he could find out about the condition of those humans.


    So right now he was going to the house of his father. But when he came in front of the house he tried to call his father but he did not get any response. Instantly he decided to use his observation technique, but he was surprised because he could sense no one present inside the room, and that made him surprised.


    Because his father spends most of his time absorbing Spiritual energy and also training. Also if he wanted to leave the kingdom or his house he would at least inform him before doing that. So right now he was very surprised that his father wasn''t in his house.


    ''Did he decide to room around the kingdom or did he already go to the danger zone after sensing something?''


    The king did that but unfortunately, nobody was able to give him an answer until his father did note back. So once again he began to worry because what if his father decided to leave the house without telling him because of the critical situation of those human Warriors?


    Just thinking about that makes him very guilty because he was the one who created those teams and sent them to the danger zone. Wasting no time he quickly came to the hall room and quickly told to gather all the Warriors of the reinforcement team.


    "Warriors it seems that our people are once again facing some kind of critical situation and they are in danger. It is my father I sent only to them without any reinforcement and most likely because of this, all the human Warriors are facing some kind of critical situation.


    Because of this, I asked all of you to gather here. You all will also go to the danger zone and if our human fighters are really in your dangerous situation then you will also use it as a reinforcement and help them to fight those enemies."


    The king says that to every warrior present there and every warrior also begins to agree with him and wasted no time, all of them have already left the hall room and are already preparing to leave the Royal pce.


    But suddenly at this time, every person present in the Royal pce sensed a huge aura approaching toward the Royal pce. Instantly all of them get very serious and are already ready to fight the person who ising there. They already bring out their weapon and already prepare to attack the iing person.


    At this time the king also gets very serious and he also likes those other Warriors ready to fight and using all his power toward that person that ising toward the Royal pce.


    At this time all of them could see in the sky that a person was approaching them. Right now that person was very far away from them and because of this nobody was able to guess the identity of that person but sometimeter when that person got very close to the Royal pce only then every person present in the Royal pce got rxed.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Everyone instantly recognized that it was the old King that wasing toward the Royal pce. But the thing was that it really shocked everyone that the old kings still had this kind of powerful aura. Nobody really expected this from the old king and because of this they also did not instantly recognize the aura of the old king. You can say that even the king also did not realize that it was his father who wasing toward the Royal pce.


    But after recognizing his father he also rxed and waited for his father toe here.


    ''Did he really go to the danger zone right now after solving everythinging back to the Royal pce?''


    Instantly he thought of this question. Actually, not only him but those other people also begin to think about this type of question. They also wanted to know from where the old king wasing back toward the Royal pce.


    Sometimeter the old man finally reached the Royal pce but this time he wasn''t alone. Even though at this time every one of those looking at him curiously but he just came in front of the king and then said to him,


    "Don''t worry everything was settled and our human Warriors wille back sometimeter. Until then take care of this person. He is the leader of our enemy and he also is an Abyss human. Make sure to get every information out of this person and also want to know why those people suddenly started to attack our humans."


    After saying that the old King did not even give any chance to the king to talk. After that, he left that ce and went inside the Royal pce.


    On the other hand,


    Right now not only the king but even those other Warriors were very shocked right now. Who could have thought that the old king would personally take action and solve everything? Not only that, but the old King also brought the leader of the enemy.


    "Guards took him to the mental prison and called every warrior who could use the mental technique. I wanted to have all the information out of this person.''


    Instantly the king told the guards to take that person to the mental prison. This prison was also created by the old King, where nobody will be able to think properly. So even if that person after waking up wanted to die, he won''t be able to think properly in that ce.


    "Sigh, it would be really great if all the King told us what happened in the danger zone and why all the human Warriors took this much longer toe back from the danger zone?"


    Right now everyone is thinking about this type of question. They also wanted to know what happened inside the danger zone. But none of them were there to ask the old King because everyone knew that the old King did not really like this type of behavior. If they wanted to know the information about the danger zone then it wouldpletely depend on the old King if he wanted to tell them or not.


    But at this time if they went to the old king and asked him this question then they could immediately get punished by him. So even though everyone was very curious none of them dared to ask the old King about the incident that happened inside that in the danger zone.


    ____________________


    "Quickly spread the news that our human Warriors are okay, and they are finallying back from the danger zone. With that, we could calm down those people."


    The king said that to his assistant. After hearing that, the assistant also agreed with him and instantly told some of his subordinates to spread the news about those human Warriors who were finallying back.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 455 455 - Warm Welcome

    ?


    As expected when everyone got to know that those human Warriors were okay and they were also finallying back, every human present in the human Kingdom got excited and they were already nning to wee all the Warriors with a warm wee. Everyone began to prepare for that.


    On the other hand,


    Sam already understands most likely everything is over and the human Warriors already take care of all the enemies. But the thing is that he really wanted to know about the enemies and how many of them are present in the danger zone. Because it took the human Warriors two weeks topletely defeat all the enemies and with that, he could guess that the number of those people was most likely higherpared to the human Warriors.


    ''Sigh, until they do note back I will not be able to know anything. Well, I still could have asked Ayana about this but I don''t think so the president of their guild will inform them of anything.''


    Sam thought that and decided to contact Ayana.


    Sometimeter,


    ''As expected they also did not get informed by the president what happened and how many enemies were present in the danger zone. Mostly they were able to easily defeat those enemies because no casualty happened and everyone was okay.''


    Sam thought that but then he also knew that thinking about this was just aplete waste of time so he began to concentrate on his meditation.


    Actually while using those status points he increased his strength, his body became Unstabilized and he needed to be familiar with the new strength to stabilize himself. Because of this, he did not fully concentrate on increasing his power but at the same time after doing that, he also took his time to get familiar with the new strength.


    For 2 weeks as you know that he was just doing this without going to the danger zone so he really wanted to go back to the danger zone to fight those Monsters and also to test his new strength against those Monsters.


    ___________________


    Finally 2 hourster the whole kingdom or you can say the South part of the Kingdom became lively. Because right now as you can see that everyone could see those human Warriors finallying toward the entrance of the kingdom. So this instantly makes all the humans happy and they are already prepared to wee them with a warm wee ceremony.


    The most interesting thing was that the king also presented it to all the human Warriors. Not only the king but at the same time you can see the Crown Prince and The Princess also present there.


    The Crown Prince was quite disappointed because previously he did not get the chance to go to the danger zone, but still, he was happy that the warriors of his Kingdom were ok and they were finallying back.


    Sometimeter the moment those human warriors enter the kingdom everyone present begins to wee them with music and also they have already prepared a flower road for them. This shows how much they are proud of their human Warriors.


    Those human warriors just after entering the city got really shocked that everyone prepared something like this for them. Instantly everyone became happy that the people of the human kingdom really loved them and they also prepared something like this for them.


    Even though right now as you can see they were injured and very exhausted but every one of them instantly began to enjoy the moment. Really they previously did not think that they would be able toe back to the human Kingdom. So they were enjoying the moment.


    At the same time, the king happily began to approach all those human Warriors. The human body enjoying the moment became serious but looking at that King begin to smile,


    "You don''t need to be serious, it was your time to enjoy the moment. You all really make us proud. Even though we don''t know what type of danger you faced inside the danger zone, one thing was clear: you came back after gaining the victory and this is the matter. You all deserve a good rest and after that, I will organize a reverse ceremony for all of you."


    <novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The king happily said that to everyone and after that he told everyone to enjoy the moment while he left the ce with his guards. The Princess and the Crown Prince also left that ce, but it doesn''t matter for all those human Warriors and all the humans that are enjoying the moment.


    Sam at this time also presents there with Ayana and her teammates. You have to say that Ayana was very happy that the president finally came back, not only that they also came back after winning the war against their enemy, so this is naturally a good thing.


    At this time Sam did not say anything to anyone because right now he knows that he should not ask her to ask her president about the details. But he already said that to her earlier so most likely she will naturally tell him the details if she also gets to know from the president about that.


    __________________


    Sometimeter,


    Right now every human Warrior who came back from the danger zone is finally resting. Every one of them already got treated by the medical team and with that, they have already recovered fully. Right now they just need a good rest after that they will once again be energetic.


    On the other hand, nobody knows that right now inside the Royal Pce, you can see a dark ce called the interrogation chamber. Here the king, the old king, the Crown Prince, and some more people were present there. Every one of them wanted to get all the information out of that captain of the Abyss humans.


    Fortunately in this ce, until you do not have the proper protection you won''t be able to think properly, and with that you cannot do anything in this ce. This ce was created by the old king so that while Interrogating they don''t need to face trouble.


    Right now the king was using the mind-controlling technique in that person to get all the information out of him. Because of that mind-controlling technique and also because of that confusion room, the captain of the Abyss humans begins to tell every piece of information.


    They really came toward the human Kingdom to use the humans as a sacrifice for their God. At the same time, they also kidnapped the prince or The Princess from the human Kingdom to satisfy their god. As you know that royal blood will really satisfy their god.


    They were the ones who were the mastermind behind Those 5 Warrior''s death. They use them as a sacrifice for their God. In that process, they just only created a wound and that was enough for their God. Because of that small wound, their God began to extract the blood from all those Warriors.


    Also because they already made those human Warriors unconscious, none of them were able to defend themselves from that, and with that, every one of them lost their blood and died.


    You have to say just hearing the process of many people present in that room became speechless. This was a really very cruel thing to do to anyone. Naturally, those Abyss humans did not care about that because they just only care about the sacrifice and satisfy their God.


    Also, they already prepared that team to hunt more human Warriors but unfortunately at the time, the king of the human Kingdom sent that team of human Warriors toward the danger zone. But even at that time, the captain of the Abyss humans has the confidence that in the end, they will win the fight and then they will use the dead body of those humans to sacrifice.


    But really nothing like that happened and in the end, the human Warriors won the fight. Even though the old King helped in this process, it was still the humans who in the end won.


    At this time when everyone thought that the interrogation was over, the captain of the Abyss humans suddenly saw something that made every one of them be very serious.


    He said that previously they got information from someone who was from the human kingdom. That person was the one who told them about the human Warriors and also he was the one who had information about the princess when she went outside the kingdom.


    Instantly this news makes everyone present there get very serious because none of them thought that they also will have a Traitor. Not only that but most likely that person was from the people who were previously present in the Royal pce when the king was discussing the team of the human Warriors who should go in the danger zone. So with that, you can naturally guess why everyone bes that much more serious.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 456 456 - Danger Zone Once Again

    ?


    "Make sure none of this information gets out of this room. I will need to investigate the traitors, he could be among us. I can predict that most likely that treatment was also present there when I was discussing the warrior team. So I needed to investigate all the people who were previously present in the meeting room. But before that, all you need to do is make sure that none of this information gets out of this room or it will be over for you."


    Currently, the king saves this for every person except the old king and the Crown Prince. The old king is already using his observation technique to look at the bodynguage of those people who are present in that room.


    You have to say that even the current king did not make everyone that much afraid. It was the old King that made them very afraid of him because the aura that he was releasing was very heavy. Fortunately, the old King did not target them with that aura, or it could be over for all of those people.


    But one thing was that the old King did not find the traitor among those people. Using his observation technique he read the bodynguage of those people and he was sure that return was on among those people that were present in this room. Even though all of them were scared, none of them had the bodynguage of a guilty person.


    This meant two things, one, that nobody was the traitor or the second thing was that the traitor was already able to control his expression and his bodynguage that even the old King was unable to read.


    Even though the old King did not know if the traitor could do that or not, for now, those people weren''t traitors. Only because of this he stopped releasing his pressure and let those people go out of the room.


    "Make sure to watch those people. I already observed them but I did not find any of them behaving like a guilty person. This means two things, one, naturally, they aren''t traitors of our Kingdom, second the traitor already learned how to control his expression and because of this even I am unable to find that person.


    Because of this, units send people to watch over them. At the same time also send people over all of those people who were previously present in the meeting. Also, send me all the details about those people who were previously present in the meeting room."


    After saying that, the old King left the room with the Crown Prince. The king just only sighs. He did not think that he would face a simr situation as the king of the Oni  Kingdom. Who could have thought that like the Duke of the Oni Kingdom, he will also have a traitor in his Kingdom? But the thing was that he did not have any clue about the traitor.


    Fortunately, it looks like his father will take action, and with that, he could rx a little. His father was involving himself in this matter so that means it will be easy for everyone to find out about the traitor.


    ''Sigh,''


    He let out a sigh. In this condition, trusting anyone would be very dangerous but the thing is that he already has some people that he can prepare for this kind of situation. And his father also talked about those people and told him to send those people after those people who were previously present in the meeting room.


    ''Now we also have a traitor in my kingdom, the thing was that will that traitor also have some kind of rtionship with those Abyss humans? I need to find out about all of this as quickly as I can so that I can prepare my kingdom to face any kind of War.''


    The king for that and after that, he quickly left that ce and started going toward his secret chamber. In this chamber, only the old King has the authority to enter other than the current king. This chamber was a restricted area for everyone.


    Aftering inside of the room he can already see many people wearing masks suddenly kneeling. Every one of those Warriors got prepared by the old King previously to face this kind of situation. You can trust them fully because every one of them has 100% royalty with the kingdom.


    Actually to do this the old King also used some kind of technique and because of this, those people have 100% royalty with the kingdom.


    "I will give you information about some people and you need to follow those people. You need to follow them for 24 hours and collect all the information about them. Also if you noticed any suspicious movement even for a second you needed to immediately contact me."


    The king began to give instructions to those people. He already ordered them what they needed to do in this situation and after that, he also left the room. Before anything, he now needed to prepare the information of those people and then send that information to his father and also to those Nobel Warriors. This was the name that the old King previously gave those Warriors.


    __________________


    On the other hand, came back to the South part of the kingdom, Sam already finished today''s meditation and after that he also already finished training to stabilize his strength.


    ''don''t know how long we need to wait and after that, we will be able to go to the danger zone. Sigh, still now I did not find any clue about the Dungeon in the danger zone. I wanted to see what would be the difference between the Dungeon and the Dungeon that is present in the Eden blue.''


    You can say that finding the dungeon also was a mission for Sam right now. In this adventure, he wanted to find those Dungeons and wanted to observe what was the difference.


    Even though he did not get that much detail from the Oni Kingdom, he got to know from the old man that every Monster present in the Dungeon was very dangerous and every one of them were very intelligent. Not only that every Monster was very powerful, but most likely they had simr strength as those Demons.


    So because of this, you can say that Sam was also very interested to find out about the Dungeon and after that also wanted to fight those Monsters. But Unfortunately before fighting them, he needed to find out about the Dungeon, and also before that he needed to get permission to leave the kingdom right now. But the thing was that the king still did not give them permission.


    Because of this aftering out of the hotel room he already contacted Ayana and asked her if she was able to get some information about those enemies.


    "Hmm¡­ to tell you the truth I really found some information from the president but the thing was that he told me not to tell anyone about this and I also promised him that I will not share this information with anyone.


    So with that, I won''t be able to tell you anything about those enemies but one thing I could tell you is that all of them are very dangerous and fortunately our human Warriors are already able to take care of all those enemies or it could be very dangerous for everyone living in the kingdom.


    I think you also know about the word that happened to the Oni Kingdom and if our Warriors weren''t able to defeat those enemies then a war like those would happen with our Kingdom."


    Ayana says that. Hearing that Sam just sighed. He also did not expect an answer like this so what can he do right now? After saying thank you he just hung up the call and already started going toward the warrior association.


    They will be able to give him the answer from when he is able to go to the danger zone. So wasting no time he directly went toward that ce to know about the date.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    _______________


    "Yes, now our human Warriors have already killed all the enemies, and now you can go to the danger zone and not have to worry about those enemies. But the thing was that still everyone who will go to the danger zone needed to be very alert about those enemies because anytime they could attack us once again.


    The king also understands that even though he wanted to prevent everyone from going outside of the kingdom but he won''t be able to do that he also gave us permission to allow all the people to go to the danger zone.".


    Just after hearing the news you have to say that Sam instantly became very happy. Without wasting any more time he quickly went to the mission board to look at the mission and after that, he already selected a mission that needed to be fulfilled within 3 weeks. That will be enough time to spend this time inside the danger zone.


    After registering himself for that mission, he quickly left the warrior association. Before anything, he also needed to check out from that hotel room and only after that he will go to the danger zone. But also before doing that he already informs Ayana and her teammates about this.


    Before any of them could respond Sam already left the kingdom and he already started going toward the danger zone.


    _________________


    "Red ant


    Level - Elite early


    Health - (31000/31000)


    Spiritual energy - (34000/34000)


    Strength - 3200


    Agility - 3340


    Physique (vitality) - 3100


    Sp (Spiritual energy) - 3400


    Skill -


    Acid spray, red poison ball, radio wave. "


    As you can see aftering to the danger zone sometimeter he already faced some Monsters. Not everyone was powerful but he had to say that he also faced some Monsters that had the same strength as him.


    As you can see currently he was fighting those ants, he could easily kill those Monsters using his other techniques but he decided not to do that and only used the sword technique and movement technique, he was fighting those Monsters.


    Actually, before anything as you know that he recently became more powerful and because of this he also wanted to stabilize his condition aftering to the Danger zone killing those monsters is the easy way to stabilize himself and get familiar with his new strength.


    Also, one more thing was that when he came outside of the kingdom, he did not see a single person outside the kingdom. So most likely nobody got the news that the king already allowed everyone that they could go back to the danger zone.


    On the other hand, after killing all those ants, Sam decided to advance once again. This time his n was to find those Poison Frogs. This is the mission he gets from the warrior association where he gets to kill those monsters to collect their dead bodies. In making the antidote for the poison, the dead body of those frogs was really helpful and because of this, they were also quite necessary for that type of case.


    But unfortunately, he still did not find those Monsters but he already found many other Monsters like those red ants, brown rabbits, fire dogs, etc. You already face those kinds of Monsters. But all those Monsters were weaker than him, and because of this, it did not take him that much time to clear those Monsters and he also did that very easily.


    _______________


    ''Sigh, who could have thought that I need to search this long to find those Monsters.''


    Only after searching for 2 more hours did he finally find the location of the Monsters. Well, actually those monsters living near the pond are inside the danger zone. Also, don''t consider that pond as a normal pond because it was fully poisonous. But most likely those frogs did not have any problem with that and because of that, they love to stay in this ce.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 457 457 - Frogs Hunting

    ?


    Killing those Monsters was tricky. The moment those Monsters sense their life will be in danger, they will immediately hide themselves inside the pond and that poisonous pond was also protecting them from their predator. Because of this, you cannot find those Monsters other than all these poisonous ponds.


    But as you know that Sam did not even give those monsters any chance to react. He already used a sun ray to instantly attack those monsters with that. That attack was so fast that even those monsters did not get the chance to react and it already killed many frogs at the same time.


    But in the next second those remaining frogs be very alert and they instantly hide themselves inside the pond. Not only that, at this time purple gas also starteding out from the pond, and that purple gas began to cover the whole pond.


    This is one of the attacks from those Monsters. This attack worked as a defense shield for them and also those poisonous gasses were very dangerous. Even for an epic-grade Warrior, this could be dangerous if he did not have an antidote.


    But Sam is already maintaining the distance from the start. He did not want to get close to those Monsters and get affected by those poisons. But the thing was that he was not collecting the dead body of those frogs that he killed earlier.


    ''Really, I could have thought that to make an antidote for the poison we also needed something like this. I can still see that these frogs release poison from their body. I just cannot imagine how dangerous it will be for me if I get in direct contact with the poison.''


    Sam thought that but as you can see he did not even touch those frogs and already put their dead body inside his inventory. With that he did not even need to touch those Monsters he just needed toe close to those Monsters and with that, he could instantly use the inventory to put their dead body.


    Nowing back to the main matter he could still see the poisonous purple gas that still surrounded the pond and most likely it only got clear until those frogs did not think the danger was already over.


    ''Sigh, I need to wait for some time. But at the same time, I could use this chance to kill other Monsters until those frogs did not rx and came out of the pond.''


    With that, he already decided not to waste his time in that ce and use that chance to kill more monsters. He wanted to see how much stronger he became and because of this, he wanted to have a closedbat with a powerful monster. But unfortunately, while killing those frogs, he only attacked them from a distance.


    Even though with that he could feel how powerful his long-distance attacks were, he still wanted to see how much power he had gained so he really wanted to fight in closebat with other Monsters.


    With that thinking, he left that ce and began to search for a big monster who will give him a good fight. Most likely hisck was very good because just some timeter he already found a monster that was already releasing a powerful aura.


    Naturally feeling the aura he could tell that that bear was stronger than him. So wasting no time he also uses his observation technique on that Monster to see his status.


    "Iron Bear


    Grade - Peak Elite grade / Intermediate SSS Grade


    Health - (54090/54090)


    Spiritual energy - (54000/54000)


    Strength - 5400


    Agility - 5100


    Physique (vitality) - 5409


    SE (Spiritual energy) - 5400


    Skill -


    Iron Skin, Iron w, Iron element Control, suppression,"


    As you can see this is the status of that monster but one thing that makes Sam very confused. How did a monster like this appear in that ce where you mostly did not see powerful monsters? Even if you noticed any powerful Monsters, they were only at early Elite grade, or very near to reach that grade.


    So this really makes Sam very confused because he also did not think he would meet a powerful Monster like this. That Monster has perfect control over the iron element and because of this, he could also control the iron element.


    "Howll!!!"


    The moment that Monster notices Sam he lets out an angry roar, and instantly begins to run toward Sam. But the thing was that even though The Monster was approaching Sam, Sam could feel that the monster was still observing him. Most likely from now on he will not meet any stupid Monster or any Monster that did not have that much intelligence.


    With that Sam was very sure that this Monster was quite intelligent and because of this, that Monster did not recklessly attack Sam. Even though he began to run towards Sam but before he could attack him suddenly he created iron Spears.


    Suddenly in the air, those Spears appeared and every one of them instantly went towards Sam. Fortunately, Sam was already ready for that attack. Instantly using his movement technique he got away from that ce and already came behind that monster.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    He also did not waste any more time and quickly attacked that monster.


    "Howll!!"


    Most likely that sudden attack made that Monster very angry. He instantly let out A painful scream. He was bleeding from behind because as you can see the cut mark was present on the back of that monster. Instantly his whole skin turned into iron skin, not only that he instantly turned around and attacked Sam with the Irons.


    Even Sam wasn''t able to react on time and in the end, he got affected by that attack. right now as you can see in his right cheek a w mark. Not only that fortunately, he had armor because of this, he did not directly get affected by the iron Spears.


    Sam already jumped backward and really he did not expect that sudden attack. But he did not care about his right cheek which was bleeding. Once again created a Sunray and made that mood stronger than before and instantly shot that toward the Monster.


    At this time the iron bear already felt the danger behind the attack. He instantly controls the iron to create an Iron wall in front of him and also uses the iron skin technique to make his body defense stronger.


    Unfortunately for that monster, he did not know that Sam increased the power behind that attack and as you know how destructive was the origin spiritual energy. Because of this, the bear already got affected by the attack. Even his iron skin and the iron wall weren''t able to defend him from that attack.


    That sun ray instantly broke through the defense of that iron barrier and also already hit the monster. Even though that Monster wasn''t dead, right now if you look at the condition of that Monster then you will naturally see he already had big wounds present on his chest and right hand get damage seriously.


    Sam did not give any chance for that Monster to react and because of this using his movement technique he already came in front of that Monster using the movement technique. Really this was also an unexpected move and because of this, the Monster wasn''t even able to react properly when that sword hit him.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter after killing the bear, he begins to advance or you can say roam around that area. After fighting and killing that powerful monster he did not notice that many powerful monsters were present in that area. Every one of those monsters that he already killed earlier was at Special grade.


    But it also did not mean that he couldn''t see epic-grade monsters in that ce. As you know that the danger zone was dangerous and something like this really has the possibility to happen.


    Only sometimeter he decided to go back to the pond and wanted to see what would be the condition of the Frogs. He did not mind killing those monsters at the same time but that could also affect the surrounding area.


    This was the reason that he still did not attack those monsters when they had themselves inside the pond. The water of the pond was so dangerous and poisonous that even it would harm the trees around that ce. Not only those trees but even the ground area of the forest will get burned immediately.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    When Sam came close to that ce he already saw the purpleyer of gas already vanish from that ce. Naturally, that means those monsters already came out of the pond and because of this he already decided to attack them without any mercy.


    He brings out both of his hands and instantly every finger of his hand begins to shine. Sun rays came out from all those fingers and instantly they went to those monsters. Even though he created many of those sun rays, the power at the end of those attacks was the same and this time he also increased the power.


    Naturally, it also became more destructive and it easily killed most of the monsters that previously did not get killed. On the other hand, 5 to 10 remaining monsters were just about to go inside the pond, but before they could do that once again something unexpected happened and a light barrier appeared in that ce and prevented those monsters from going inside the pond.


    Naturally, that was created by Sam. He created that using the light element and not only that instantly every one of those monsters got killed. If you are wondering how he was able to kill those monsters that easily then you should know that every one of those Frogs were special-grade Monsters. So with that as you can guess it was very easy for him to kill those Monsters.


    It was just that even though he was powerful he could still get affected by the purple gas of those Monsters and because of this, he decided to fight those Monsters from a distance. Naturally, his n was sessful and he already killed all the monsters present in that pond.


    But unfortunately, that won''t be enough for him toplete the mission, so he once again begins to advance to search for more of those poisonous frogs. Sam already searched the surrounding area very carefully and only with that he found some clue about the next fond or you can say next poisonous pond.


    That wasn''t far away from Sam so he instantly began to walk in the direction. This time if he once again meets those frogs, he will try to finish the fight as quickly as he can. So that afterpleting the mission he also could focus on killing other Monsters.


    Sometimeter he was now already in front of that font and he could already see 50 to 100 frogs present there. So he did not waste any more time and quickly created multiple sun rays. With that, he instance shoots those attacks toward those monsters.


    You have to say, in front of that sudden and unexpected attack, those monsters were unable to do anything, and most of them got killed by the attack while the remaining ones instantly hid themselves inside the pond. Even though this time Sam created the light barrier but before he could create the barrier, Monsters already went inside the pond.


    ''Sigh, once again I needed to wait for some time so that those monsters came out of the pond. Well, I am also getting quite hungry so I should eat something before continuing my hunting.''


    Sam thought that and with that he decided to eat something and rx for some time. Fortunately, because of therge amount of those poisonous frogs, he also has a three-week time limit and because of this, he could take his time to kill those Monsters.


    To be continued_____

 Chapter 458 458 - Careless

    ?


    Finally, sometimeter those frogs came out from the poisonous pond and this time Sam already decided to kill all of them. He did not want to waste any more time on those Monsters and because of this he uses much more original spiritual energy and instantly he killed every one of those Monsters.


    After killing everyone he gets close to those Monsters and also puts their dead body and those in the inventory. But while putting the dead body of those Monsters he was also quite careful so he did not get affected by the poison.


    Even though those monsters were dead, they still released poison from their body. So just after killing them if you wanted to touch their body then it could be over for you or it could be very dangerous for you.


    So after putting all the dead bodies inside his inventory, he decided to search for other Monsters. But one thing was that previously other than that bear he did not find any type of powerful monster in this area so he decided to go deeper in the forest.


    But this time you should notice that from the start Sam wasn''t using his concealment technique while Fighting those Monsters. Normally he did that to save time and to kill as many monsters as he could in a short time. Not only that he also uses that technique when he wasn''t sure if he was able to defeat the enemy or if the enemy was more powerful than him.


    Other than that he always likes to fight without using the concealment technique. Only this way he could gain experience and he did not want to depend on his concealment technique while fighting Monsters.


    But the thing was that normally even though he has many techniques he did not use most of the techniques. He only uses them when he needs help from those techniques and other than that he normally uses only a few techniques.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    He was now going inside the forest and he did not even go that much deeper but he already had a few peak special-grade monsters. But those Monsters weren''t alone. Some fighters were fighting those Monsters and a huge impact was created because of their shes.


    But unfortunately, after looking at that, Sam decided to leave that ce because he did not want to interfere with anyone. But the thing was that even though he wanted to avoid trouble like this, he most likely had trouble like him very much.


    When he was just about to turn around to leave that ce suddenly he sensed something and without wasting time he quickly jumped away. Fortunately, he did that because the ground when it was that ce instantly got destroyed by a big fireball.


    At this time Sam was already very alert and he was also observing his surroundings. Only then he could see that it was done by that fire wolf. That Monster looked at him with an angry expression that made him very confused.


    Sam did not attack that Monster so why did that Monster look at him like that expression? But he did not think that much and instantly attacked that monster with Sunray. The Monster also did not expect to attack and as you know it was very fast. So the monster did not even get a second chance to attack him and already died from that attack.


    Fortunately, it looks like those other wolves did not have any interest in him, and because of this Sam knows that this is the best time to run away from that ce. So he decided to leave that ce but suddenly once again unexpected things happened.


    Suddenly a big explosion appeared not far away from him and because of that sudden impact he also got affected by that. But fortunately using his full power he stabilized himself but then he instantly turned around to see what happened.


    Only after turning around he finally noticed what happened to that ce. Most likely one Warrior uses his ultimate technique toward the captain of those fire wolves. So right now a fight was happening between the fire wolves and those human fighters. Because of the intense fight many impacts were created and the surrounding area also got destroyed by those impacts.


    But as you can see those human warriors or those Monsters didn''t care about the impact, nor did they care about the surrounding area.


    Fortunately, that explosion did not affect him that much, and only got slightly injured. That also happened because of that sudden impact other than that he will be able to stabilize if he is already alert about that.


    ''This is apletely unexpected thing. You cannot predict something like this.''


    Sam thought that. He already came far away from that ce. That will be enough distance from the battle area. Most likely from here he will not get affected by the impacts that were created by the shes.


    At the same time if you are wondering why he get injured then it was because the power behind the impact was really powerful and if you try to feel the power of this monster and those Warriors, then you will feel that each of them most likely already reach the peak special grade or very close to bing an elite grade Warrior.


    Because of this, the impact was powerful enough to injure him. Well, his carelessness is also a reason for those injuries.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    Sam can see it won''t take that much time before those Warriors kill all the Monsters. So wasting no time he decided to leave that ce.


    On the other hand,


    Sometimeter those Warriors already finish all the Monsters. At this time the leader of the group suddenly looked at the ce where previously Sam was standing.


    "What happened? Why are you looking in that direction? "


    Suddenly his teammate asked that person.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    " Well, why are we fighting The Monster? I previously saw someone in that direction and most likely that person also got affected by our battle. I just hope he is okay and did not get that much injured."


    The captain of the warrior group said that.


    " Hmm¡­ I also previously noticed that person but I don''t think he was that much injured. So don''t worry about it."


    He said to his captain and after that, they also began to collect the loot.


    On the other hand, Sam already came from that ce. Most likely because of bing powerful he let down his guard and because of this something like that happened. But one thing was for sure that this was a wake-up call for him. He can''t rx inside the danger zone even though he became powerful.


    Nobody could guarantee him that he would stay safe inside the danger zone. Because of this, he should always be on his guard.


    Well thinking about all of this he did not even realize that he already came very deep inside the danger zone. Suddenly he senses something and instantly Dodge that. At this time he quickly looked at the direction and wanted to know what it was. Only then he saw that it was a stone spear.


    But the moment he tried to search for the source of that spear, instantly he noticed that 10 to 20 more Spears wereing in his direction. The power behind the Spears was most likely to reach the level of elite grade. With that, imagine how fast those spears were.


    They are just about to hit Sam. But Sam is also able to react fast and he already uses his light control technique to create a light barrier around himself. That barrier wasn''t oneyer barrier. Using his power in less than a second he created a 10yer barrier.


    Instantly, all those spears hit that barrier. But none of them were able to break the barrier and because of this, it waspletely safe. But the same did not instantly deactivate that barrier because not long after that one by one many of those stones Spears came toward his direction.


    All of this makes him very confused and he instantly uses The Spiritual Vision to look for the enemy that is attacking him. As he expected, the mastermind behind all of this was the Monsters. They call the stone Puppet.


    If you look at those monsters then you will see that they look like puppets created by stones and they also have the same height as a normal human. Not only that they also have the same mechanism as the stone Golem.


    If you wanted to kill this type of Monster then you needed to destroy the Crystal core inside the head of that puppet. But as you can see this is a really tough thing to do.


    On the other hand, Sam, after finding out about those monsters, already ns what to do in this current situation. Once again those stone Spears hit him but nothing happened to the barrier. But instantly Sam deactivated the barrier and he also vanished from that ce.


    He didn''t use the concealment technique, but he uses the light walk and his full agility. He has already be so fast that even those Monsters are unable to find him right now. Sam already expected that and using this chance he already came behind those Monsters.


    You can see, he already brought out the yer and coated the yer with the original spiritual energy. He did not even waste any more time and quickly swung his sword toward those Monsters. As expected he is easily able to break the barrier of those Monsters and not only that he is directly targeting the head of those Monsters and because of this, he is also directly able to destroy the core of those Monsters.


    He did not even give those Monsters any chance to react and used his full speed to kill those Monsters won by one but everything happened so quickly that no monster in that ce got to know what happened. Finally, after 1 minute, you can see everything is already over.


    Some killed at least 20 of them in just 1 minute. He begins to pick up the loot. Well, for this type of Monster, you will not be able to collect the dead body of those Monsters because the moment you will break the core The Monster will immediately disappear. So because of this other than the loot he was unable to collect the dead bodies.


    But suddenly he became surprised because while picking up the loot he could also see limit breakers. Even though they are just rare grade limit breakers, he finally found them, and not only that this time he also found a technique scroll.


    This is most likely the fifth time he found a technique scroll like this. He also previously found this type of technique scroll but unfortunately, every one of those techniques waspletely useless to him so he decided to sell them to his system inventory.


    He instantly did not look at the description and just put that in his inventory. This wasn''t the time to look at the description and with that, he began to advance once again.


    But he should also remember that he needed to go back to submit the mission or it could be wasteful that he did not get the reward afterpleting the mission. Fortunately, he still has three days. So for 2 days, he will just focus on hunting Monsters, and on thest day, he will go back to the kingdom.


    Adventure and searching for more monsters he already had so many Warriors that were fighting Monsters but this time he was already careful about that so he did not get in the range of those impacts.


    ''Nowe to think of it, I really could find the location where previously the human Fighters and those enemies fought with each other. Sigh, if I just try to find that ce earlier then I should already be able to know about the enemies. Well, just forget about that.''


    For a moment Sam thought that if from the start he tried to find the location, right now he should already have found that location and already got to know about the enemies but unfortunately right now he did not have the time. Because one thing was sure: those human Warriors and those enemies fight deeper in the danger zone.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 459 459 - Surprised

    ?


    ''I should try to search for that ceter. Right now I need to go back to the Kingdom to submit the mission.''


    With that, Sam started going back toward the kingdom. He needed to submit the mission and after that, he will get the reward forpleting the mission.


    Unfortunately, he needed to submit the mission within the time limit or if he wasn''t able to do that then he won''t receive any type of reward from the warrior association.


    ______________________


    "Father, did you find any type of clue about the traitors?"


    Currently, the king of the human Kingdom asked his father about this. As you know, the old King already got all the details about those people who were previously present in the meeting room while the king was discussing sending the human Warriors into the danger zone.


    After getting all the information the old King began to observe those people. Not only the old king but as you know that the king also sent his Royal guards toward those people. So with that, every one of them watched over those people and tried to find any type of clue that would reveal that they were traitors.


    Unfortunately, until now the royal guards did not find anything and because of this, the king came back to his father''s house to ask that question.


    "Hmm¡­ I already found some clues. I just need to confirm if my prediction is right or wrong. Only then will I be able to tell you if they really are traitors or not?"


    The old King said that to the king. After hearing that the king became very surprised and instantly became excited to know about the clue. Not only that he also instantly wanted to know about those people that were behaving suspiciously.


    First, the old King did not want to say anything but then he decided to reveal what type of clue he found and who the suspect was. With that, the Old King began to exin everything to the king.


    You have to say that after knowing all of this the king gets very surprised. Thought that those people would be the suspects.


    ''I should tell the royal guard to watch over them.''


    Actually previously after not finding any clue he decided to call back those guards. But it looks like he should not do that and because of this he already ns to send back his royal guard once again.


    "I never expected you would find those people suspicious. Actually nowe to think of it they really are suspicious, but it is just We previously ignored them."


    The king said that.


    " Nowe to think of it, do you think that we have an interesting person in our Kingdom?"


    " Huh? Interesting person? Is that person also a spy or something like that?"


    " No¡­ I don''t think he is a spy or something like that. It is just that person is really interesting and I just wanted to know if you have any information about him or not."


    The old king said that with a smile. Well unfortunately the moment the King gave everyone permission to go to the danger zone that person already left for the danger zone and because of this, the old King did not get the chance to approach him.


    But when nobody was allowed to go to the danger zone, the old King always observed that person, and really it made me very curious why that person only meditated all the time. He wasn''t able to feel any type of aura leaking out from his body. So this makes me very curious why he meditated all the time like this.


    All this time most of the Warriors most likely get those true crystals from the warrior association or they already have those types of crystals with them. So by absorbing them, they make themselves stronger but on the other hand, that person did not use any type of true crystal to make himself stronger.


    Most of the time he just meditated and this really made the old King very confused.


    On the other hand,


    The king of the human Kingdom also gets surprised after hearing his father''s words. Who could be that person that attracts the interest of his father? You can say that he also got quite interested in that person and because of this, he quickly asked the old king about the description of that person.


    The old King already gave him the description and all the details. He also told him thatpared to any other warriors, that person has a white aura. This makes that person more mysterious and because of this, the old King also gains interest in that person.


    After hearing the details from the old king, his son also got quite confused because he did not think it was possible for someone to have a white aura. It is exactly opposite to the dark spiritual energy.


    A person would have a dark aura inside his body if he uses dark spiritual energy like those abyss humans or those demons. But he never thought a person would have white spiritual energy.


    ''Did he use some kind of other spiritual energy and because of this, his aura was like that?''


    This is the main question that the king was thinking about right now. Because of this he also wanted to ask that person about this but unfortunately, his father told him that he wasn''t present in the kingdom. But one thing was for sure that he would look at the details of that person.


    ____________________


    Sam who was going toward the kingdom did not know anything about this. He already attracted the interest of the old king and even the king became interested in him. The thing was that even if we get to know about this he will just not care about that or you will just escape from the city.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Right now Sam was looking at his system screen or you can say he was looking at the system shop to search for some unique techniques or any other thing that he could find in the system shop. He already sells those unnecessary loot in the system shop and already gained gold coins for that. Well, he was saving those gold coins because he wanted to buy a technique.


    "Short teleportation,"


    This is the name of the technique that he was looking at right now in the system shop. Some time ago while looking at the system shop he suddenly found this technique but the thing was that to buy the technique he needed to have 50 m gold coins.


    This is the reason that he still wasn''t able to buy that technique. Even after saving all the gold coins he only has 1 m gold coins. With that, he doesn''t know how long it will take him to gather those gold coins.


    ''Sigh, it looks like I need to increase my hunting time in the Dungeon to gather more gold coins after killing those Monsters.''


    With that Sam already decided that after going back to the kingdom he will try to search for more missions. Actually, even if he did not find a mission that satisfied him he would naturallye back to the danger zone. From now on his main motivation will be to collect gold coins to buy that technique.


    Fortunately, even if it took him one month or more than one month to gather that much gold coin, he could still use the technique so he did not have to worry about it.


    Nowing back to the main matter while going toward the kingdom he could also see many Warriors that were also going back toward the kingdom. Most likely like him those people alsopleted their mission or they also came to the danger zone without epting any Mission.


    Not all the time everybody selects a mission from the warrior association. Because not every time you will find a good mission that will be able to satisfy you and will also give you good loot. This is the reason that not every time you should limit yourself while hunting those Monsters. You will never expect when you will get good loot while you will hunt various Monsters.


    While thinking all of this Sam finally came back to the kingdom and directly went to the warrior association. After giving the mission to the receptionist he already got the reward for that mission. At this time he decided to look at the mission board. So without wasting any more time, look at the mission board.


    ''I could select that mission.''


    Sam thought that because right now he could see the mission where he needed to kill those bloody rabbits once again and this time the amount of those bloody rabbits already increased. He needed to kill 5000 bloody rabbits, not only that he also got two weal time limits toplete that mission.


    ''Really, but still, why would that person need that many bloody rabbits? Is that person doing some kind of experiment with the dead bodies of those Monsters?''


    Really that mission makes him very surprised but naturally, he already epts the mission. After epting the mission he already left the warrior association and began to walk toward the restaurant. He is already feeling hungry so he needs to eat something in the restaurant.


    But while he was going toward the restaurant suddenly his phone began to ring. He quickly looked at his phone and saw that it was Livia that was calling him. He became quite surprised because all this time she did not contact him.


    "Hello, Livia, how are you?"


    "Hello. I am fine, how are you? When will youe back to our Kingdom?"


    " Haha¡­ I just begin my adventure so naturally it will take me more time and only after that will I be able to finish my adventure and go back to the kingdom."


    "Sigh, I also wanted to travel with you but father did not allow me."


    " It is natural. As you know right now those Abyss humans already became active once again and they are attacking those Royal blood. I don''t think you know that but the human Kingdom also gets attacked by them. Not only that, but they also try to attack the Royal blood. Their main goal is to sacrifice their royal blood to satisfy their god."


    Sam exins all of this to her and naturally, she also understands how dangerous it would be if she decided to travel with him. Most likely she will also put him in much danger, and because of this, she just only sighed.


    " Well, forget about that. Can you guess why I am calling you right?"


    " No,"


    Hearing her word Sam could naturally tell that she has something to say to him.


    " Haha¡­ well, me, brother, and sister Emma going toward the human Kingdom."


    She happily said that to him. Hearing that Sam also gets quite confused because why would shee to the human Kingdom right now?


    "Actually, the human King was invited to visit his Kingdom and because of this, Father told us to go to the kingdom. You will alsoe to the kingdom but it will take him some time toe here while we already begin to approach the human Kingdom.


    Even though I don''t know the main motive of the human king, he told us that he wanted to celebrate that they were able to survive and because of this, they also wanted to arrange a party. But to tell you the truth I also think that the king of the human Kingdom and my father wanted to talk about something and because of this, they also invited us."


    Livia said that. Hearing that Sam also begins to think about this matter. Why would suddenly the king of the human Kingdom, called the Oni king? Naturally, both of them wanted to discuss something and because of this, the human king will arrange a party like this.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 460 460 - True Motive

    ?


    "Don''t worry, I just listened and came back after finishing the mission so I decided to rest for the day. Haha¡­ I have to say that you are also lucky that today I just came back from the mission."


    " Haha¡­ you can say that."


    With that, both of them began tough and sometimeter after talking for some time, they decided to hang up. She is already on her way toward the human Kingdom and most likely it will take her 4 to 5 hours to reach the ce.


    Well not that Sam was busy because as you know he just came back from the mission and he just wanted to rest. He also did not n to absorb the status points today so he will only rest for the day.


    With that, he was already going back toward the hotel room from the restaurant after eating the food. Not only that he also bought some more extra food. With that, he was going back toward his hotel room.


    ''Sigh, next time I should try to look for that ce where those human fighters fight enemies. If I previously remember that I could already search that ce and I already get to know about the enemies. Well, I could do thatter next time when I go to the danger zone.


    But one thing was clear: most likely the enemy was the Abyss humans. Previously when I told Livia about this she also did not deny this. With that, I also became sure that everything was done by the Abyss humans.


    But the thing was how long the king was able to prevent the news from spreading out. The thing was whether the human Kingdom would also have Traitors or not. What if people like the Duke of the Oni Kingdom are also present in the human Kingdom and they also work with the Abyss humans? It will be really bad for the human Kingdom because till now I did not know any information about the traitors, nor did Ayana know about this.


    Even though I am not sure if she was telling me the truth or not, I already try to get the opinion of those other human Fighters and with that, I am sure that nobody has any news about Traitors."


    Sam was thinking all of this while he already came in front of the hotel and wasting no time he already went into his room.


    Well if you are wondering why he did not get a house. because he will not stay in the human kingdom for that long and because of this he also did not rent a house to live in the human Kingdom.


    Right now he just wanted to know what will happen to the human Kingdom and also wanted to be familiar with the human Kingdom and only after that he will leave the kingdom and look for another Kingdom. Even though he already visited 70% of the human Kingdom, still 30% live to visit the human Kingdom and after doing that he will leave the kingdom.


    But the thing was that visiting those 30% areas was quite impossible because to visit he needed special permission from the king. Well, nothing was that he wasn''t expecting to get permission to visit those areas but still, he was hoping without releasing his identity.


    ''I could have asked for Livia''s help. But before anything I needed to talk to her and told her that I wanted to visit those 30% areas. I just hope that she will keep my promise that did not reveal my identity in front of the king of the human Kingdom. Well not that I care if she reveals or not but it will just bring me trouble.''


    With that Sam already decided to talk to Livia about this because only she could help him in this case. But at this time he suddenly remembered that the king of the Oni Kingdom will alsoe to the human Kingdom and what if the king suddenly called him to attend the meeting or something like that?


    ''Well, I will think about thatter. I should now focus on my goal of searching for the Dungeon in the danger zone. Unfortunately, I already asked many people but none of them really know about the location of the Dungeon inside the danger zone. But I am sure that the king or many other people already know about that Dungeon.


    In the Terraria you will find most of the Legendary loot after killing a Monster inside the Dungeon. Not only that you will also find those technique scrolls after killing the monster inside, so I am definitely sure that many people already know about the dungeons. Sigh, it is just nobody telling me or revealing anyone about the location of those ces.''


    It will be good if someone reveals to him the location of the Dungeon inside the danger zone. But most likely not everyone knows about this inside the human Kingdom. Only some people most likely know about the Dungeon.


    Well, it is natural because if everyone gets to know about the dungeon then they will try to challenge the dungeon then, and challenging the Dungeon will be the same as suicide. If you really do not have confidence in your strength or if you don''t have the minimum power to defend yourself inside the dungeons then you should not try to challenge Dungeons.


    Previously the old King told him about this. He also told him that most likely many monsters present inside them that could rival the Demons in strength. With that, you can imagine how dangerous it is for anyone to challenge the monster inside the dungeons.


    ''Well, not that I was in a hurry to find Dungeons. I will take my time to search for those Dungeons. But I have to say that I am really curious about the monster inside the Dungeons along with meeting those demons.


    Really this new world terror you have so many mysteries that I wanted to solve but at the same time I also did not have that much time. I also needed to be powerful and then go back to my home world so that I could protect it from those other world people. I hope that nothing happened to my homeworld.''


    Sam thought this. His family, friends, teachers, etc, were in his homeworld Eden Blue. So he just hopes that everyone is safe right now and nothing happens to them. They just need to wait for a little more time until he does not get powerful enough to fight the danger that is approaching them.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    One thing was clear: he did not worry about those people from other worlds because he could take care of those people but he was thinking about that prime Dragon that was approaching Eden Blue and he also did not have that much time before that Monster already attacked that.


    Also, one more thing was that right now if he goes back to Eden Blue right now then he won''t be able to be stronger than this. His previous world also had a limit and he cannot break that limit using his power. If he really wanted to break the limit then he needed to wait for the to evolve and only then he would be able to break the limit of that.


    So right now if he goes back to the old world right now then his whole strength will get restricted by the. That will instantly prevent him from getting more powerful than this. Sam could guess the limit of Eden blue should be around SS-grade or even SSS-grade grade. But the thing was that he did not find anyone who was able to reach that level.


    This is also a reason that he did not want to go back to his homeworld right now. Before anything he wanted to make sure that he already had enough strength and only then he would go back.


    As you already know that when the core of Eden Blue will appear on the surface area all the restrictions that are present on that n will automatically get unactivated. With that, it will naturally favor those people from other worlds and even that prime dragon that is approaching the Eden Blue.


    __________________


    While Sam was resting right now Livia, Emma, and the crown Prince already reached very close to the human Kingdom. The soldiers from the human Kingdom also came to escort them to their Kingdom. But one thing was that the human king was fully alert about the security. Actually not only The King of the Human Kingdom but the Oni King was also very serious about security.


    Both of them already know that those abyss humans really after royal blood and most likely there is a reason. Right now the Oni King is trying to find out the true motive of those abyss humans.


    Not only he but the old king of the Oni Kingdom also suspected that something most likely deep going on. Why would they suddenly need royal blood to satisfy their god?


    Even though they were getting the answer that it was to satisfy them they are God but naturally, the old king and the king did not believe that. Most likely a very deep reason was behind all of this but not everyone knows about that. Even though Abyss humans did not really know about that very much, only some of them know about that, and because of this, nobody was about to get to know the true motive of those people even after interrogating them.


    "Brother, what do you think about this party? Did you think that something is going on here? I don''t know why but most likely Father and the human King had something to discuss."


    " Hmm¡­ to tell you the truth you are right but don''t try to interfere with this. All of this is most likely rted to those Abyss humans and our safety so we should not try to interfere with this matter until Father did not reveal anything to us.


    Nowe to think of it, you are good friends with the human princess, so did you get to know anything from her? "


    " Sigh, I already tried to ask Natalia about this but she also did not know anything about this. She and her brother also suspected that something was going on between both of the kings but nobody could tell what was going on. But one thing I already confirmed is that the Abyss humans really tried to attack Natalia when she went to the danger zone.


    Everything is the same as my situation when I also get attacked by them. But fortunately, she wasn''t alone in the danger zone because the king already sent powerful bodyguards with her and they took care of all those people when they tried to attack her.


    With that, we could be sure those people are still after the royal blood."


    " Hmm¡­ I understand. Really I cannot understand what is the real purpose of those people. I also did not know why the Duke of our Kingdom joined hands with those abyss humans. Sigh, everything is just gettingplicated."


    Right now inside the car, you can see both Livia and her brother discussing all of this. They also know that most likely something was going on and because of this both of the kings arrange for this meeting.


    Not only that, but they are also very curious about those Abyss humans. Because if those people really just wanted to sacrifice for the demon God then they could easily use any life. They didn''t need the particr Royal blood to sacrifice for their god so this naturally made everyone very suspicious of those people.


    The Crown Prince of the Oni kingdom also previously talked to his grandfather and he was also sure that his grandfather was also investigating this. Most likely sometimeter he will naturally get the answer but still now the old King is just investigating this.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 461 461 - Information

    ?


    "Sigh, finally we reached the human Kingdom. Fortunately, we did not get attacked by anyone whileing toward the human Kingdom."


    Livia said while sighing. Actually, she was worried that they would get attacked by those abyss humans. Because of this, all this time she was fully alert. Actually not only him but the Crown Prince and even Emma were White alert whileing toward the human Kingdom.


    "Haha¡­ you don''t need to worry that much because as you know we have sister Emma with us. Not only that, but my father also sent some peak Epic grade Warriors with us. So, even if we get attacked by those people then we could easily get away from the situation because I don''t think the human King will also stay ideal if we get attacked by those people."


    At this time the Crown Prince said that to her. Livia also agrees with her because really her father and even the human king already assigned some Warriors with them so they did not get into any kind of trouble while going toward the human Kingdom.


    With that Emma, Livia, and David get down from the car and once again a warrior begins to escort them inside the Royal pce. For two days they will be guests of the human Kingdom, and only when the Oni kinges to the human Kingdom, will they leave the human Kingdom and go back to their kingdom.


    With that all of them were escorted to their assigned room and Emma and Livia went inside. Both of them will stay in one room, while David has a different room. They also inform the Warriors that the human king will arrange a party for them so they also need to prepare for that. Actually, the main party will be organized 2 dayster.


    "Sister Emma, I think not everyone knows about the party because I already called Sam and told him about this. But he did not know anything about the party so most likely not everyone in the human Kingdom knows about this party."


    Livia said that to Emma.


    "I already guessed that. The human king will not invite every person to this party because it could also bring danger to us and because of this, you will only invite some people to that party. Well, we could also use our power to invite Sam to this party. But before anything, we also needed to ask him if he was really interested ining to the party or not. Otherwise, it will be inappropriate for us to invite him."


    Emma said that. Livia also agrees with her because this is the truth.


    ____________________


    " So, Livia, Emma, and David have already reached the human Kingdom and they are already resting in their room. Good work. Also, inform Natalia that her friend is already present in the royal pce and she could meet her. She will be happy to meet her friend. Sigh, it looks like she was angry because I stopped her from going to the danger zone."


    The king sighed. Well even though they already killed those enemies, who can give them the guarantee that they will not get attacked by those enemies once again? Because of this, the king prevents the princess from going to the danger zone.


    "Also, did you already inform Andrew? He should try toe back because 2  dayster he also needs to participate in that party."


    The king asked.


    "Don''t worry sir, we already informed the Crown Prince and told him that he also needs to attend that party. He already informed us that he is on his way."


    Hearing that the king nodded.


    " Also, what about the invitation? Did you invite all those people that I told you about? Also, take care that this thing did not get known by any other people. I am only arranging for that party to sessfully establish a good rtionship with the Oni king so that he will agree to our n. So I did not want any third party attending that could do something dangerous and our rtionship just got worse."


    The king asked that to his attendant.


    " Don''t worry sir, we already invited important people, and other than that nobody in the kingdom knows about this party."


    " Hmmm¡­ good. Also one more thing, did you find any suspicious people inside our Kingdom? As you know that we already have traitors among us and I also think that those people will try to do something that will harm our Kingdom and all the citizens of this Kingdom."


    " Unfortunately sir still now we did not find any kind of suspicious people inside the kingdom. Even though some people act suspiciously but after investigating those people we are clear that they did not have any type of connection with the traitors. It is just that we are very curious about a person that also has a very interesting background."


    The attendant of the King quickly said that and after that bring out a file that has the information about that person. You can say that after hearing that the king also became very curious and really wanted to know about that person who made his attendant curious.


    He takes the file and then begins to look at the information about that person. The more he looked at that information the more he became surprised. He never thought he would find a human Warrior that has this kind of background.


    "So what do you think about Sam Kainer? Did all this information get verified by us?"<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    " Don''t worry sir, we already confirm that he really became a warrior under the Oni Kingdom. We already talked to the warrior association present in the Oni Kingdom. They also inform us that in the Sam Oni Kingdom, he just came to the human Kingdom to visit the human Kingdom and get to know about the culture of the human Kingdom. Other than that they also confirm he did not have any type of connection with those Abyss humans.


    Even though we trust them, we still try to send our people to spy on that person and they inform me that most of the time he just stays inside the kingdom and meditates. Other than that he will try toplete missions inside the dangerous zone. So other than this we did not find any type of suspicious movement of that person."


    " Hmm¡­ good. Still, try to look after that person and if you find any type of suspicious movement try to Interrogate him. Most likely I could ask the Oni King about this. He should know about that person."


    The king already decided to talk to the Oni King about this.


    Suddenly he remembered that previously his father also wanted him to find out about a person and that person also made his father very curious. Most likely his father already told him the name of that person but because of this other work hepletely forgot about that person.


    ''I should try to go back and ask about that person once again.''


    With that, the king already decided to go back to the old king and asked about that person. He also wanted to know which type of spiritual energy that person was using and because of this, that person released a white aura.


    ______________________


    "Don''t worry, I already confirm about the traitors. It is just that you need to invite them to that party and we will catch them red-handed at the party. I already managed to gather all the evidence and clues about those people so it will naturally prove them as the Traitors of the Human Kingdom. It is just I don''t know if they already created the dark Summoning symbol or not. But I don''t think it is possible because only those Abyss humans could make them."


    Sometimeter the king already came to the old king and asked him about the traitors. After hearing that question the old King gives him the good news that he already confirmed the identities of those people who are traitors. So he told the king to invite those people to the party so he could personally catch those people. Not only that he also told the king to send his soldiers to the property of those people while those people will stay busy in the party.


    "Hmm¡­ don''t worry Father I already arranged my Royal guards to go after their property. Should we take action right now or wait for the party?"


    " Don''t take action right now because it could also alert those people and they could also escape from our hands. I did not want something like that to happen so only send the royal guards when those people will attend the party."


    All this time the old King instructed the king what to do and when to search the property of those people. After hearing all of these the king also noted and he also naturally thought that right now it wouldn''t be appropriate to send his Royal guards toward those people because they could naturally hide all the clues and could naturally escape from the kingdom right now.


    If they really were traitors and had connections with those abyss humans, they would also have a way to escape from the kingdom if their situation was bad. Because of this, the old King told him to not act recklessly at this time. Every one of them should wait for the right time to attack their enemy.


    "Nowe to think of it, I already told you about a person. Did you search for him or not?  While observing the whole Kingdom I already felt that person came back and right now he was staying inside the kingdom."


    The old King asked the king if he searched for that person or not. He really wanted to know about the details of that person and if it is possible then he also wanted to talk to that person and ask him about his weird spiritual energy.


    "Haha.. father to tell you the truth I forgot about that person and because of this I came back to ask you about that person and his name."


    "Sigh, even after bing a king you were not able to change your habit. You should not forget about the name like this. Now forget about that and the name of that person most likely Sam Kainer. I was already able to see his ID card previously and with that, I got to know his name. So try to search for that person."


    The old king said that while he was busy with his work to observe the whole Kingdom right now. But if you turned around and looked toward his son then he would see a shocking expression present in the face of the king.


    Most likely the old kings somehow are able to feel something that makes the king very shocked and because of this, he turns around to see what is the matter with the king. Only then the king was looking at the file with interest and that made him very interested so without wasting time he quickly controlled that file and pulled that file toward him.


    The king, who just came back to his senses, was not able to do anything and he just looked at the file that was going toward his father.


    The old king interestedly looked at the file but then he became shocked because it was information about that person that he wanted the king to search for. Who could have thought that his son already got the information about that person?


    So without wasting any more time he begins to read the information about that person or you can say about that boy. The more he was reading the information the more weird it became. In the information, the old King could see that in the information it was written that the person was from the Oni Kingdom.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 462 462 - Invitation

    ?


    Next day,


    Yesterday Sam just spent his time in the library. Aftering to Terraria, spending his time in the library became a habit of his. He already knows about the history of this human kingdom.


    Same as the Oni Kingdom, previously when the first human awakened The Spiritual energy and was able to make those Monsters and Demons retreat, he also decided to build his own kingdom, and because of this right now as you can see the human King Kingdom was present here.


    ''Most likely every Kingdom was established beside the danger zone so that the warriors did not have to go to another ce to go to the danger zone.''


    Sam thought that. He did not know about those other kingdoms but he already guessed that those kingdoms were also established beside the danger zone so that all the Warriors of their Kingdom easily get ess to the danger zone.


    Even though this was a risky move, still every king decided to do that because with that every warrior easily got ess to the danger zone and because of this their kingdom was also getting powerful.


    Also, one more interesting thing he gets to know in the library is that after establishing their kingdom they also got attacked by other Warriors who wanted to take over their kingdoms.


    ''Most something like this also happened to the human Kingdom. Did those elves attack the human Kingdom and because of this right now both of their rtionships weren''t that good?''


    Sam thought that but he did not know the answer. He is also unable to see in the library what is the reason behind their bad rtionship.


    While thinking all of this Sam was going toward the warrior association to look at the mission board and see if he could ept any Mission or not. Even though right now he did not want to ept animation but he still wanted to see the mission board and wanted to see if he could find any interesting missions or not.


    ''Before going to the danger zone I should also meet Livia and the others.''


    Sam already decided to meet them because if he did not meet them and directly went into the danger zone then she would get sad. Also if it is possible then he will also ask the Oni king about the true reason for their visit. So he already decided to meet them and he is also nning to do that tomorrow.


    Livia already told him that her father wille to the kingdom tomorrow and he could only meet him tomorrow so he will wait for one more day to meet the king. While thinking all of this Sam already came near the warrior association and was just about to enter the warrior association.


    But at this time something unexpected happened that made him very alert. Suddenly out of nowhere, he felt his presence behind him. It was Warrior who suddenly appeared behind him.


    Fortunately, Sam did not panic. He stayed calm in that situation and he was already ready to use the confused ray and sun ray. Not only that he did not move from his ce nor did that person move from his ce.


    You can say that for a minute both of them state there like this. But Sam was already ready to use the concealment technique. He was sure that the person who just appeared behind him was an Epic grade Warrior. So if a fight really broke out then he would be at a disadvantage.


    ''Who is he? I don''t think I have any type of enemy in the human Kingdom nor did anyone in the human Kingdom know me. So who is this person? Also by sensing him, I am definitely sure that he came here for me.''


    Sam was sure that person came here for him because all this time that person was also observing him. But the thing was that even though that person was trying to know about the power of Sam, he was unable to do that. As you know if you don''t have a superior observation technique then you won''t be able to observe the power level of Sam until he did not show you.


    So this really makes that person alert and he is also ready to fight him anytime. But most likely it was needed because that person already open his mouth to say something,


    "I am Number 5 from the Royal Guard. The king sent me here to give you this invitation card."


    Finally, that person said that to Sam. Only after hearing that Sam rxed a little but then he turned around to see if that person was telling him the truth or not. He also wanted to see the face of that person but unfortunately, that person was covering his face. Because of this, he was able to see the face of that person.


    But one thing was clear: that person was powerful and most likely already became a peak Epic grade Warrior.


    ''What is this invitation card? Did the king Finally find out about my identity as the Nobel guest of the Oni Kingdom? ''


    Instantly, Sam begins to think about why would the king send him that invitation card and also what is this invention card about. But one thing was clear: that person did not tell him a lie. So Sam, without wasting any more time, took that invitation card by hand. But you have to say all this time he was very careful because what if that person decided to attack him when he decided to take the invitation card?


    But in the end, nothing like that happened and after giving him that invitation card that person left that ce. Really the move of that person made him very confused and at the same time, he also became interested in the invitation card.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Before anything, he uses The Spiritual Vision to look at the invitation card, and with that, he bes sure that it wasn''t some kind of trap or something like that. So without wasting any more time, he takes out the invitation letter from the envelope and then begins to read that invitation card.


    It was clear that the invitation card came from the Royal pce because he could also see the royal stamp present on that invitation card. He did not think more and just began to read that invitation card.


    [Dear Sam Kainer. I know you must be very curious and shocked because of this sudden invitation card but I wanted to tell you that you don''t have to worry about anything. Tomorrow I will be at a party because our Warrior was sessfully able to defeat our enemy and because of this I invited some people to the party. You are also invited to that party.]


    This was the thing that returned inside the envelope and really after reading all of this Sam became very confused. Because just reading the invitation card he bes sure that the king didn''t know about his other identity. Most likely Livia and the others did not say anything about him and because of this, the king also did not know he was the noble guest of the Oni Kingdom.


    ''Why did he suddenly invite me to the party? I don''t think he will know me or if I am any important person that needs to attend the party. So why would he invite me to that party? Sigh, most likely I could only get the answer when I will go to the party. Well on the other hand should I try to ask Ayana if she got invited or not.''


    With that, the same began to think if he should inform her or not but then he decided not to inform. It is clearly written on the invitation card that the king did not invite that many people and most likely only some of them got invited to that party. So as you can tell she did not want to have any kind of problem after informing her.


    ''Sigh, this is a really unexpected thing for me that I will get the invitation card for that party. But then I could already tell most likely this king had something to do with me and because of this he suddenly invited me to that party,''


    Now the main question was whether he should attend the party or not but after thinking for some time he decided to attend the party. Well, he has full confidence that they won''t be able to do anything to him because tomorrow the Oni king will alsoe to the party.


    So after reading the invitation card, he put that in his inventory and then went inside the warrior association. Also at this time If you look at his expression then you will see that he maintains a calm expression. Nobody will be able to tell what he was thinking if they look at his face but one thing was clear right now Sam was thinking about that invitation and about the king.


    ''Why did the king invite me this suddenly? What is he nning to do with me?''


    You can say that all the time he was now fully alert and confused about this matter. If it is possible he directly wanted to go to the human king and ask him why he invited him suddenly. But then it is not possible so he just releases a deep breath and then begins to look at the mission board.


    ______________


    "Missionplete sir. I already informed that person and also gave him your invitation card. He expected to be confused and surprised when he received that invitation card."


    Aftering back to the Royal pce that person told the king that he already gave the invitation card to Sam. After hearing that the king also nodded.


    " What do you think about that person? Do you think he is suspicious or something like that? "


    The human King suddenly asked that question to his subordinate. Actually, he wanted to know the opinion of his subordinate about Sam. Still, now he did not ask the Oni king or David or Livia about this. So he did not have that much idea about Sam.


    " Sir, in one word I could tell that he is a very careful person. Not only that he is very alert about his surroundings. Previously when I suddenly appeared behind him he already sensed me and most likely he was already ready to attack me. Fortunately in the end nothing like that happened because I already told my Motive.


    But the interesting thing is that he has some kind of technique that prevents me from knowing his power. I ampletely unable to observe him even though I try to use my observation technique. Even using my full power I am unable to do that and really this makes me very curious to know about the technique that he is using right now.


    Other than that I did not see any type of suspicious movement. As you know that we already observed him and still now we did not find any type of suspicious movement. So I am sure that he isn''t a spy. But it would be good if you ask the Oni king about him. Only then we will get a clear answer about him."


    That royal guard said that to him. After hearing that, the king also agreed that he should ask the Oni king about this. Well, he will do thatter. Before anything, he also needed to inform his father that he already invited Sam to the party


    ___________________


    Right now Sam clearly did not have any idea that the king and the old king of the human Kingdom became interested in him. Also, this is the idea of the old king and because of this, he got invited by the king.


    So as you can see he did not have any idea about this but one thing was for sure you will attend the party tomorrow. Even if he faced any type of danger he would just immediately leave that ce and did not give any of them any chance to attack him.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 463 463 - Oni King

    ?


    "So, you were also invited to the party. Well, it is a good thing you got invited, otherwise, I already decided to ask the king to invite you."


    " Hmm¡­ I can guess that. Really I don''t know why I got invited to the party. I don''t think anyone in this Kingdom knows about me, not if I did something that put me in the spotlight. So as you can see I am very confused about this. I also thought that you or your father already told the human King about it, but most likely this isn''t the case. What do you think? Did they suddenly find out about my identity as the royal guest of the Oni kingdom?"


    " Hmm¡­ it could be possible. As you know that while announcing your name as the royal guest of our Kingdom, many humans also present themselves and mostly they already hear about you. So this is the possibility that they already know about your identity and because of this they decided to invite you."


    " I also think this is a possibility. But still, if you know anything about this matter, just inform me. Because I could see many people observing my movement for a few days. I think they are also searching for suspicious people inside the kingdom and because of this, they also find me suspicious because of my identity. Sigh, as you know that I registered myself in the Oni Kingdom, so this is naturally possible that they also found it suspicious and because of this, they were also observing my moment."


    " Hmm¡­ this is also a possibility. But don''t worry if they try to do anything just reveal your identity and you will be safe. The Oni Kingdom will protect its people at any cost. So you don''t have to worry about that."


    As you can see right now Sam and Livia were talking with each other. Sam already informs her that he also got invited to the party but he is very curious to know why he suddenly got invited.


    But after hearing her word one thing was clear and Sam also knew that, if he revealed The Identity as the noble guest of the Oni Kingdom, then nothing would happen to him if he did not meet the enemy of the Oni Kingdom. As you know that he previously did not reveal The Identity because he did not want to be put in the spotlight. But if it is necessary he will naturally reveal The Identity.


    With that, Sam hangs up the phone and after that, he once again begins to meditate. Well, he wasn''t using the status point to upgrade his stats. It is just meditating helping him to rx. So because of this, he was now meditating. Also if you are wondering when he will upgrade his status then you will do that before going to the danger zone once again.


    As you know that after increasing his status he needed some time to get familiar with his new strength and also be able to stabilize himself, naturally he could do that by only going to the danger zone when he fought those Monsters. This is the fastest way to stabilize himself.


    ________________________


    Next day,


    Once again Sam left the hotel room and this time he once again went toward the Warrior Association. Actually, he wanted to look at the mission board once again and also wanted to sell some loot that became unnecessary for him. Naturally, he could sell that in the system shop but he also needed some money and because of this, he went toward the warrior association.


    ''Hmm¡­ most likely because the Oni king wille here, the king has already increased the security. Well, also I could already feel someone is watching me. Sigh,''


    Sam could see the security once again got increased, and not only that he could also feel most likely someone was following him and watching over him. This really made him question himself if he did something suspicious. He doesn''t think so but still, that person is following him and watching over him.


    Well, he decided to forget about that person and normally go toward the Warrior association. Yesterday he did not find that much interesting mission so he once again came to the warrior association to look for interesting machines that also have a long time limit. He is already nning to go inside the danger zone tomorrow. If it wasn''t for the invitation then most likely he will already go to the danger zone today, but he needed to attend the party, so he will go to the danger zone tomorrow.


    With that, he already came inside the warrior association and already went in front of the mission board. Already saw many Warriors present in the warrior association. Just not only those human Warriors but even many other Warriors were also present in that ce. Well, many Warriors also went to the different kingdoms and also selected missions from that Kingdom.


    So this is natural and he also did not get surprised by that. After looking at the mission board for some minutes he Finally found an interesting mission higher he needed to kill some Helio monster. This is a new type of Monster that was a nt type. Also, he already selected yesterday''s mission where he needed to kill those bloody rabbits.


    After choosing both of the missions he directly went in front of the receptionist and told her that he wanted to take both of the missions. Yesterday he did not take that mission because that mission has two weeks of time limit so he selected both of the missions today. So even though he will not go to the danger zone today, he will still have 13 more days toplete the mission and it will be enough for him.


    Actually, as you know that he already thought of not epting any mission, but in the end he decided to ept the mission.


    Naturally, the receptionist registered both of the missions under his name. Only then Sam brought out those loots and told her that he wanted to sell them. Looking at the loots really, the receptionist was surprised because all of them will be useful for those Elite grade and those special grade Warriors.


    ''How much powerful is he? Most likely he already broke through to Epic grade. Really is a genius even though he is only 19 years old, he is already able to be Epic grade.''<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    At this time the receptionist thought that after looking at the loots that Sam brought out from his inventory. All the loot really surprised her very much. Even though all of them were unnecessary for him, all of them will be useful for those Elite grade or special grade Warriors. But naturally, she did not show her surprised expression and always maintained a professional smile on her face.


    "Let me look at all the loot and only after that can I give you the number."


    After saying that the reason is to begin to look at all the loot carefully. It did take some time but finally, she finished observing all the loot and with that, she already gave him money. After taking all the gold coins Sam already left the warrior association.


    '' Fortunately, I already had that custom-made suite. With that, I did not need to worry about buying new clothes.''


    Naturally, because he will decide to join the party he will also try to go there with proper get up. Fortunately, he already had the custom-made suit that Emma gave him as a present.


    But, it is clear that nobody knows about the party. Well, Sam already observed many people in the Warrior association and also while walking toward the restaurant. All this time he observes many people but none of them know about the party or even if they know about the party they did not show any interest in it. Also, no one talked anything about the party, so naturally, he thought that not that many people know about the party.


    ''Naturally, the president of Ayana''s guild knows about the party. But the main question is did Ayana know about this? I don''t think it is possible until she does not belong to a warrior family or a noble family.''


    While thinking all of this Sam already came to the restaurant and already ordered some food for him. Inside the restaurant, you naturally can see many people who belong to different races. Some of them could be merchants or some of them were Warriors. But it is just that every one of them is present there to eat their food.


    Sam also did not mind any of them and because of this he just began to eat his food the moment the waiter gave him his food. While eating food he also tries to hear the discussion of those people but unfortunately, none of those people talk about the party. But he got clear about one thing many people also thought that previously those human Warriors get attacked by those Abyss humans.


    Right now many people are already discussing this but none of them have a clear answer. Sam is also very curious about that and as you know that he already ns to search for that ce. This time after going back to the danger zone he will try to finish his mission as soon as he can. Only after that he will be free and try to search for that ce where the human fighters fight those enemies.


    ________________________


    Around 5:00 p.m. you can see the beautiful Royal pce that has already been decorated. Many people have already starteding to the Royal pce one by one. Not only that, at this time the security had already increased because the Oni King was also on his way toward the human Kingdom.


    But the thing was that nobody knew about the Oni king who came toward the human Kingdom. Every one of those people knows that this is the king who organizes this party to celebrate their win over their enemy. Also, the king did not invite all the citizens of the human Kingdom. He only invited some important people of the human Kingdom and because of this, you cannot see that many people inside the Royal pce right now.


    If you are wondering about the king of the human Kingdom then he was watching those peopleing to the Royal pce one by one. He was observing all those people so that nothing wrong happened at the party. Also, those people did not know but he already appointed the royal guards around thatmon room for everybody to gather around.


    "Don''t worry about this, I will handle that matter. You should try to rx and present yourself in front of them with a cheering smile. We also need to announce our negotiation with the Oni kingdom. Not only that this is also an important day when we will capture all the traitors of the human Kingdom."


    At this time the worker suddenly came behind the king and told him all of this. Naturally, after hearing all of this from his father the king became rxed. Right now he was waiting for the Oni king toe to his Kingdom. Only then both of them will attend the party.


    "By the way, did that person alreadye to the party?"


    "No, still now he has note to the party."


    "Hmm¡­ to tell you the truth I already asked the old king of the Oni Kingdom. Naturally, he told me that he knew about him, but other than that he did not say anything. He just said that we will get surprised the moment we will be able to know about his identity. So really this makes me more curious about the identity of the person. Sigh, he could just tell me the truth but no he just only confirms about him. Really, he will never change."


    To be continued________

 Chapter 464 464 - Spechless

    ?


    As you can see, one by one every invited person came to the royal pce. Right now all of them are talking with each other in that ce and most likely every one of them is waiting for the king to appear there. But still, now the king of the human Kingdom did not appear in that ce and this surprised everyone.


    But at this time every one of them got informed that one more important guest will being here and because of this, the king was waiting for him.


    After hearing this, all of them were surprised and then wanted to know who this important guest was. Unfortunately, none of them informed them about the important guest, and because of this, they could only just sigh.


    You can see that every one of those people who got invited to the party right now was talking to each other and they were discussing the important guess who will being to this party. None of them know that the people from the Oni Kingdom already came to the human Kingdom. Because of this, they weren''t sure who would being to the party.


    "Haha¡­ Andrew, I never thought you would be this much powerful. If it wasn''t for you I would be dead right now."


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry about that. We already decided to use our all to kill those enemies. But still, what would happen if the old King did note there? Most likely we all die by their hand."


    " Yes, really we are grateful to the old King that he decided to present there and decided to save us. Without him, I would be dead right now."


    " But really who could expect that they will gather that many people? It ispletely an unexpected thing for us and because of this we are also unable to call for reinforcement."


    " Guys, forget about the previous matter. We are already able to defeat the enemy and right now our human Kingdom is safe. We should really celebrate right now. It isn''t that I am telling them not to be careful, I am just telling everyone to celebrate today''s party because who could guarantee that we will not get attacked by those enemies tomorrow?"


    With that, all of them just forgot about the previous matter and decided to enjoy the party right now. They were the warriors who went to the danger zone previously to fight those Monsters. Really still now all of them just think what would happen to them if the old King did note there to save them. Also for the first time many people face those abyss humans. So as you can guess they never expected those people to have that much strength.


    Even though they fight many monsters who have dark spiritual energy,pared to those Abyss humans those Monsters were nothing. Because of this, many Warriors also got surprised. Many of them also got affected by those dark spiritual energies but fortunately, everything is over and they are safe right now.


    "Sigh, guys, I really wanted to know who this important guest is?"


    " Yeah, I am also not sure about that but unfortunately nobody is telling us anything."


    " Well, forget about that because sometimeter we will already know about the important guest. But right now I don''t think you notice but most likely not many people got invited to this party. Only some of us got invited to the party and because of this I also cannot see that many people at the party."


    " Yea, you are right. Most likely the king only invited some people to this party. But the most interesting thing was that I was unable to see the Princess or the prince present at the party. Are they not going to participate in this party?"


    " Hmm¡­ now you are telling me, really we can''t see anyone from the royal family joining the party. Most likely if you are one of them waiting for the important guest and only after then they will join the party."


    As you can see right now those Warriors were also very curious about the important guest, but unfortunately nobody was telling them anything about the important case and the most important thing was that they were also unable to see any people from the Royal family join the party.


    So right now when all of them are enjoying the party none of them know that the old king is watching over every moment of those people. And also those people he suspected as traitors were getting observed by him every second.


    He also ordered the prince and the princess not to join the party until the king did note back. Not did he let anyone join the party because sometimeter something important was most likely going to happen and because of this he also told everyone to prepare for that.


    ''Why is that boy still noting to the party? Did he not n toe to the party? ''


    Suddenly the old King noticed that Sam still had note to the party. Instantly this made him very curious. You wanted to know if Sam would join the party or not.


    You can say that right now the whole Royal pce was under his observation. Actually not only the Royal Pce but its surrounding area also in his observation. He did not want anything to happen while arranging the party and because of this, he observed everything. As a legendary grade Warrior, he did not have any problem observing everything.


    So he decided to increase his observation range to search for that interesting boy. Just after increasing the observation range he already found that person. Right now that person is most likelying toward the Royal Pce but he wasing here while walking. The old king was quite speechless after observing that but what can he do? He just sighed.


    __________________


    Right now Sam who was going toward the Royal pce did not know that he already got observed by the old king. Actually, he was taking his time to go toward the Royal pce and because of this, he also did not take any car or anything like that to go to the Royal pce. He was walking toward the Royal pce and because of this, it took him that much time to reach that ce.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    While going toward the Royal pce he observed his surrounding area because he also wanted to find if any type of trap or something like that was present in the nearby area or not. Because he also did not think the danger of those enemies was already over. What if they also decided to attack the human Kingdom from inside and traitors like the Duke of the Oni Kingdom were also present in the human Kingdom and they also let those enemiese inside the human Kingdom and every one of those enemies already n to attack the human Kingdom?


    Because of this, Sam was very careful while going to the Royal pce. He also wanted to observe the surrounding area while going toward the Royal pce. Fortunately, until now he did not find anything but still, he did not give up. At the same time naturally, he is also very curious to know what will happen after he reaches the Royal pce.


    Suddenly when he went to the Royal pce he heard some sound of cars that most likelying in his direction. Instantly he turned around to see those cars and just looking at the car he could already guess most likely they belong to the royal family.


    Compared to any other Warriors, you can say that every royal family has a different type of car that you can easily recognize. Because of this, Sam easily recognized them and instantly became curious to know who was inside those Royal cars that were going toward the Royal Pce right now.


    ''Mkat likely the Oni king already came to the human Kingdom.''


    Instantly he predicted that most likely it was the only king who was finally going toward the Royal pce and because of this he was able to see those Royal cars.


    Well, it does not matter to him so he just once again begins to walk toward the Royal pce. But at this time he suddenly felt someone watching him but instantly that feeling Vanished.


    Actually, he was right because, from the Royal car, the king of the human Kingdom looked in his direction. This made him very surprised when he suddenly spotted him. The oni kings also saw him walking toward the Royal pce, which also make him very surprised. Who could decide to walk toward the Royal pce at a time like this?


    This really makes him speechless. But because the Oni King was present there, he did not take any action. But unfortunately, he did not know that but the Oni king also noticed him. Like the human king, he was very confused and speechless when he noticed that Sam was working toward the Royal pce.


    Instantly he brings out his phone and then dials his number. The human King at this time became very curious to know who he was calling right now. The human King did not think that it was the princess or prince. It could be the old King that he was calling right now.


    But unfortunately for the human king, the Oni king right now calls Sam.


    _____________


    "Haha¡­ why are you walking like that. Quickly came to the Royal pce."


    After saying that the oni king hung up the call. He did not even give the other party anytime toin or say anything. Really this make the human being very surprised but he did not say anything. With that, both of them go to the Royal pce.


    Sometimeter when they reach the Royal pce you can already see how much the human King increases the security around the Royal pce. They enter the Royal pce when the security checks everything. Both kings get out of the car and instantly the human King wees the Oni king with a grand wee.


    At this time you can say even those people present inside the hall room got surprised and every one of them also came outside to see what is happening. Only then every one of them saw that the human king right now weing someone.


    You cannot say it was your normal wee because it was a grand wee. This really makes every one of them shocked. But only then does everyone realize who is this person. That is the king of the Oni Kingdom. Instantly every one of those Warriors begins to show respect to that person.


    Like their king, The Oni king was also able to reach theary grade and you have to say it was a huge achievement for those Warriors. At this time many Warriors were also very surprised by the sudden appearance of the Oni king but none of them show it. Unfortunately for those people, they already getting monitored by someone and he already noticed when those people got nervous after looking at the Oni king.


    With that, everyone finally came inside the Royal pce, and only then did every warrior get to know who is the special guest that will be attending the party. Also at this time everyone so that the prince and princess alsoing toward the party. But they weren''t alone. The oni prince and princess also present there. They also saw the Queen of the Human Kingdom present there and with that most of the people from the royal family present there.


    At this time everyone was looking at the human King because everyone knows that the human King wanted to announce something and because of this they also look in his direction.


    "I know that everyone is most likely very curious why I arrange this sudden party. I arrange this party to celebrate our win over our enemy. And also my friend Oni King came to my kingdom so I also wanted to wee him with this party. Now I hope every warrior present there enjoying the party. I also have one more thing to announce but I will do the letter so until then everyone please enjoy."


    After saying that the human King begins to walk toward the old King alongside the Oni king.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 465 465 - Surprised

    ?


    At this time as you can see everyone begins to enjoy the party. Both of the kings also participate in the party along with their families. At this time many people also approach the Oni king and show their respect to him.


    All this time the human King notices something that makes him very curious. He can see that the Oni king, Oni princess, and Prince are enjoying the party but most likely they are waiting for someone. This makes it very curious to know about that person and by looking at it that person will join the party. Even though he was very curious, the human King did not ask about this.


    So like this after 10 minutes,


    Well, you can say that not every person has alreadye to the Royal Pce and because of this, at this time many people are stilling to the Royal Pce. At this time along with those people a person enters the Royal pce and that instantly attracts the attention of the human king. Actually not only the human king but many Warriors also get surprised by seeing that person.


    Nobody was able to recognize that person and because of this, they became confused about why he attended the party. But the thing was that he got invited and because of this he was able to attend the party. This instantly makes many Warriors present there curious to know about that person.


    You can say that only some people can recognize him. Human king, the vice president of Ayana''s guild, the Oni king, the Princess, the prince, Emma, and the old King. People instantly recognize him. As you can see, some finally came to the party. Really walking here takes him a lot of time.


    At this time even those guards be confused after seeing that person but they could see the invitation card and with that, it was clear this person also got invited to the party. On the other hand, Sam did not think anything and just entered the hall room of the Royal pce.


    He began to search around and only then he noticed right now many people looking in his direction with a confused look. Most likely everyone wanted to know about his identity but unfortunately for them, he did not have any interest in interacting with that person.


    Suddenly he saw someone waving her hand at him. As you guess, it was Livia. Looking at her Sam also smiles and then begins to walk toward the direction. Once again this instantly made many people shocked because nobody thought that the princess of the Oni Kingdom would know that person. Nowpared to before you can say that all the warriors present there became curious about his identity.


    On the other hand, Sam just ignored those people and already came in front of Livia. At this time he also saw the human king and also the Oni King.


    "Hello, uncle. How are you?"


    Instantly, he greeted the Oni King.


    " Haha¡­ I am okay. Sam, how are you? I already heard from my daughter that you already n to leave this Kingdom."


    "Yea, I will stay here for more days and after that, I will naturally go toward another Kingdom. As you know, I was already nning to visit all the kingdoms and wanted to know about their history and other cultures."


    "Haha¡­ good, good. But you should remember that the Oni Kingdom is your home and we are waiting for you."


    " Don''t worry Uncle. As I told you after finishing my journey I will return to my home."


    Naturally, at this time both of them begin their conversation. For them, it was a normal conversation. But at this time for those other Warriors, everything just bes veryplicated and they are unable to understand anything.


    First of all, nobody knows who this is but then he suddenly came to the party and also he is now beginning to talk to the Oni king. Not only that he also called him uncle. The Oni King also happily talks to him and this makes everyone very confused. Even at this time, the human King got confused. But one thing became sure that the Oni King really knew this person, and most likely he also allowed Sam to call him uncle.


    Suddenly, the Oni king noticed the confusing look of the human king. So he begin tough and then told Sam,


    "Oh¡­ I already forgot to introduce you to my friend."


    With that he introduced the human king and on the other hand looking at the human king he also introduced Sam. He told him that Sam was from his Kingdom. But the thing was that he did not introduce him as the noble guest of the Oni Kingdom. But he introduces him as the friend of Livia.


    "Sam¡­ forget about this old man. Just came with me. I also wanted to introduce you to my friend."


    Suddenly, Livia came there and then took him in another direction. In this direction, you can naturally see The Princess and the prince of the human Kingdom alongside their mother, the queen. They also looked at him with a confused look.


    ___________________


    "Well, so you really know that boy."<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    "Hmm¡­ why would not I. He is my daughter''s friend and to tell you the truth you also have a second identity that I cannot tell you right now. But one thing I could tell you is that he helped me many times. Not only that he really is a genius Warrior and has the potential to be a powerful Warrior like my father."


    The Oni King said that with a smile. He could naturally guess that the human king was very curious to know about Sam but he also did not reveal the true identity of Sam. This is the request from Sam and he cannot break that so he did not reveal his identity in front of everyone.


    After hearing that answer the human King already thought that something was going on here but he did not ask the Oni King Once again. Because he already told him that he will never reveal his identity in front of everyone. So, the human King ns to ask him about this when they will be alone and discussing their terms.


    On the other hand, Livia already begins to introduce some in front of the princess, prince, and queen of the human kingdom. She told everyone that he is a very good friend to her and both to them also teammates who went to the danger zone many times.


    So like this, you can say that for some time everyone became very curious about him but then they could also know that they will not be able to know anything so they just forget about that and once again begin to enjoy the party. Even the human King already decided to ask about himter and because of this he once again focused the party alongside the Oni King.


    On the other hand,


    Sam was now standing with Emma and the prince and the three of them talking about the situation of the Oni Kingdom. You can say that the Crown Prince of the Oni Kingdom, like a big brother to him, considers him a little brother, and because of this, they get along.


    Emma informs Sam about the situation of the unique Kingdom. After the war is over, naturally the security inside the city gets increased and they also begin to take more people and begin to train them to make them strong Warriors who will be able to protect their city. Hearing that naturally, Sam bes happy because most likely with this security nothing like that previous situation will appear in the kingdom.


    On the other hand, both of them also asked him about his adventure. Hearing that Sam exined to them about his adventure. But the thing was that he did not even go that far and because of this, he did not have that much exciting adventure right now.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter everyone already forgets about some and they are busy with their work. Right now those people are eating their food that was also organized by the king. Livia and the others also decided to visit the whole royal pce. The human princess right now told him that she will help to look at the whole Royal pce.


    Both of the Kings already came to another room. Finally, the party was over but he already told every Warrior not to leave the party because he also had something to announce. On the other hand, right now discussing their terms. Both of the Kingdoms have simr situations and because of this, both of them think that it is good to agree with each other''s terms.


    With that both of the kingdoms became friends and they would naturally help each other at any time if the other party needed their help. Not only that, there are many more things that both of them already agree on. Right now nobody will announce this because they wanted to wait for a few more days.


    Actually, the human king also wanted to celebrate the victory with all the people present in the human Kingdom and because of this, he decided to inform everyone about it at that time.


    Now finally both of them finished their work. At this time the human King suddenly asked him again about Sam. Oni King after hearing that question really began to Laugh. But he could also guess that this is the natural reaction of anyone. So he decided to tell him about Sam but he just told him that he needed to promise that he would not reveal his identity.


    _________________


    Sam has no idea about this. Right now he is just talking with Emma and the others. You already told them his next n to visit the dwarfs'' kingdom. They also began to tell him about the specialty of the kingdom and alongside that they also began to tell him about other kingdoms that they also visited.


    Some Kingdom has a natural beauty, well some Kingdom is famous for their good food, etc. Like this day began to tell him about many kingdoms and their specialty but at the same time they also talked about the danger that he could face while going toward those kingdoms. Not only the danger that he will face outside of the Kingdom but he can also face danger in some Kingdom and because of this, they also told him not to visit those ces.


    There are many kingdoms that also did not have any connection without a side world. The most interesting thing was that those kingdoms also did not have a warrior association or something like that in their Kingdom and because of thismunicating with the kingdom was naturally impossible.


    Sam silently hears all of these. Naturally, he had a basic idea about those Kingdoms that he was able to read in the library but he did not have this much information about them. Fortunately, Emma and the others help him with that.


    Livia once again told him that if it is possible she really wanted to go with him on his adventure. At this time even the human princess also agreed with her because she also thought that this was interesting and she also wanted to go on this type of adventure. Unfortunately, they cannot do anything about this.


    At the same time, they already visited most of the royal pce and right now they are going back to the hall room because the human King wanted to announce something important and they also wanted to present it there. So with that right now they are going back toward the hall room. You can say that even the human princess did not have any idea what her father wanted to announce but this really made her very curious. Not only her father but her grandfather also most likely know about this but both of them did not say anything about this.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 466 466 - Explanation

    ?


    "Now I have everyone enjoying the party. Well as I told you earlier that I have something to say and this is the time that I will tell you about that. Well before anything I wanted to tell you why the Oni king came to our Kingdom.


    Actually, I invited him because of the recent attack from our enemy. We both decided to establish some terms that will help each other. Still, now I want to publish those things because I want to publish in front of every citizen of the human kingdom, so I hope until then everyone will stay quiet about it. But one thing I could tell you with these new terms and conditions, both of our kingdoms will receive massive help from each other and it will help us if our enemy decides to attack us once again.


    Right now, back to our main matter, I know that everyone must be very curious about that. So wasting no time I will tell you about this. I think every human warrior who previously went to the danger zone to fight those enemies knows my father when they are and is also able to capture one of them.


    So after taking that person into the integration room, we begin to Interrogate that person. At this time we found many seals in his mind that prevented that person from telling us anything but unfortunately for that person, he really underestimated our power. Because in the end we are able to break all of the seals and we get to know everything.


    Those Abyss humans are ying to open the gate for those Demons and because of this, they needed sacrifice. They wanted to satisfy that they are God so he opened the gate and from using that gate those Demons once again appeared on Terraria.


    Because of this, those people suddenly became very active and they began their hunt. Because of this, they also attack the Oni Kingdom and after that, they are already nning to attack our human Kingdom. The main motive of those people is to gather as many sacrifices as they can to satisfy their god. Also, they were searching for the Warriors becausepared to any normal people the blood of any Warriors is more useful in this sacrifice.


    Naturallypared to any other normal people when a person is able to awaken Spiritual energy and then bes a warrior, his whole body gets enhanced and those Abyss humans want that. Because of this, they also attacked our 5 Warriors previously and used them as the sacrifice.


    Not only that, naturally every one of you knows that they wanted to attack the royal family. Still, we did not know the main reason behind this but one thing is clear: most likely something is rted to the royal family, and using them as sacrifices will make their God immediately happy and because of this, add any call they wanted to attack the royal family and wanted to use them as sacrifice.


    Don''t worry we will try to look at this matter and will try to find the truth about this. Now why I am telling you all about all of this because I wanted to make sure that everyone gets alert about it. When you go inside the danger zone you need to make sure that you always stay alert. Even though we were able to kill our enemy this time, what if they suddenly decided to attack us once again?


    It will be really dangerous and because of this, we need to make sure that we always stay alert while going inside the danger zone."


    After exining all of this the king bes silent for some time because he wanted to give everyone some time to process all of this information. But you have to say that as he predicted those Warriors already have shocking expressions on their faces.


    Nobody thought that those Abyss humans were nning to summon those Demons and because of this, they were searching for the sacrifice. Finally, everyone is able to know why those Abyss humans suddenly be this much active and why they suddenly begin to attack different kingdoms like this.


    All the warriors present there needed some time to process all the information. All this time the king was just silent. He gave them the time that those people needed but at the same time, he already signaled all the soldiers to get ready.


    All the soldiers and those Royal guards already got his signal and because of this, he instantly became alert and already ready to take action. Unfortunately, right now those Warriors are still busy with all that information and because of this, none of them notice that. You can say only some people notice that and Sam is also one of them who notices that.


    ''As I expected, those abyss humans are the main culprit. Also because they wanted to create the gate that connected to the demon realm, they searched for the sacrifice and because of this, they became active once again.''


    Sam thought that. Not only that, he could already guess that most likely something will happen in the next announcement and because of this the king already increased the security and already signaled everyone to get ready.


    So with that, he was not looking at the human king with curiosity. Right now not only Sam but you can see the Oni king, Oni princess, Oni prince, and Emma also notice all of this but None of them said anything.


    "Well, I hope everyone already gets all the information. This is the first important thing that I wanted to say to everyone. Now wee back to our second important matter.


    Well, most of you already guess how those abyss humans are able to sneak attack you. It is impossible to sneak attack us while all of us are very alert about our surroundings and our enemy. Most likely those people already n that before the human warriors reach that ce. Because of this, they are able to sneak attack you.


    If you are wondering why I am saying all of this, while interrogating that abyss human we also get to know about some people that belong to the human Kingdom but they decided to join hands with those Abyss humans. And because of this, our enemy is able to know about our motive and n. Also because of them, those enemies are able to gather, they are reinforcement."<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Once again after saying that you can see every warrior present there became very shocked. None of them are able to believe this news. It is true that they also feel that it is quite suspicious that those people are able to sneak attack even though they always stay alert about their surroundings but right now they finally understand why those people are able to do that. Because they already create that trap for them and because of this no human Warrior is able to know about that.


    All this time the king also observed the expression of all the people present there. He could tell that most of the people had surprised expressions on their faces because none of them could believe this news. But just after he told the news some people also get nervous but they instantly control their emotions and also begin to act like they became shocked after hearing all of this.


    Really unfortunate for those people because the king and the old King were already those people.


    "To tell you the truth it really makes me very shocked because I am also unable to believe that people from my human Kingdom will betray their kingdom and also join hands with our enemy that wants to kill every human and other Warriors. How could they do something like this?


    Because of this I also at first did not believe that but still, we get this news from the memory of that person so I wanted to make sure we did not have any traitors among us. At first, I did not find anything but fortunately, my father was able to find those people and he already told me about all those clues and with that I also began to suspect those people.


    Before telling the name of those people I have to say that I already ced a Royal guard around the whole room so even if you try to run away you won''t be able to do that. Even if you were using teleportation techniques or something like that you won''t be able to do that because we also locked the space and so you cannot use any space-type technique.


    Nowing back to the main matter, those traitors were also present when I quickly began to discuss forming an Elite team to go to the danger zone. I think everyone still remembers that at that time only some people were present in the hall room. With that as you can guess the traitors are most likely among us and also present in this party right now.


    I can already see that everyone became nervous the moment I told them all of this but you don''t have to worry because at any cost I will capture you. Now before capturing all of you and telling your name to everyone, I will reveal your whole n.


    Actually those people inform those enemies about our Elite team and because of this those abyss humans are able to gather an Epic team like that. Not only that, but those people also prevent us from contacting them for reinforcement.


    With that, I will tell you about the names of those people. But don''t worry, I already selected what type of punishment each of them will receive. Also, I want to tell every one of those Traitors that every one of you shouldn''t betray your kingdom even though you are receiving powers in things like helping those abyss humans, but that is not your true power. But I can see that telling you all of this won''t help.''


    After saying all of these the human King paused for a second and after that, he already ordered all the royal guards to take action.


    At this time you have to say everyone present in the hall room was shocked. They also wanted to know about those Traitors and instantly they could already see those Royal guards that suddenly appear in that room. Not only that without even wasting a single minute those Royal guards begin to take action.


    Those 20 Royal guards instantly came in front of 5 people and covered them from every direction. They did not give them any chance to say any path that will help them to escape from that ce.


    Instantly because of their sudden action, those warriors became surprised but then they instantly saw that right now all the royal guards were circling around 5 people. With that, it is clear that those five people are most likely the traitors of the human Kingdom.


    On the other hand, those five people instantly became nervous and scared the moment they saw those Royal guards. Their faces also be pale. Right now just looking at their scared faces you can tell that most likely every one of them is rted to this case.


    But those other Warriors still cannot believe that these five people will be able to do something like this. But one thing was that those people really present the time when the king was suggesting forming an Elite Warrior team.


    Those Royal guards did not even give any chance to those people to say anything and instantly used their power to make those 5 people unconscious. After making them unconscious they begin to carry their body. With that the problem of the traitors already got solved by the king.


    After realizing that every person present in that hall room just releases a deep breath.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 467 467 - Meeting The Human King.

    ?


    Instantly those Royal guards surrounded those five people from every direction so that none of them could run away from that ce. Also at this time, they did not know but the old King already locked the space. So right now even if someone wanted to use a teleportation technique to escape from that ce they won''t be able to do that.


    At this time those 5 people begin to panic and most likely they are trying to say that they aren''t traitors, but instantly King uses his pressure on them, and with that those 5 people almost suffocate. Fortunately, the human King did not release his pressure for long and because of this, most 5 people were once again able to breathe.


    "As I told you earlier we already investigated and found many clues and proof and only after that I came to this conclusion. So don''t make me repeat myself. I really cannot believe that you all will betray your kingdom. Because all of you could just lose our human Warriors. You never thought that they would be able toe back alive. Guards, please take those gentlemen to our special room that we already prepared for them."


    The human King finishes saying that and instantly the Royal guards begin to take those five people out of the hall room. As everyone can give, most likely they will take them toward the interrogation room.


    "I am really ashamed that because of ignorance all of you put yourself in danger while you went to the danger zone. I should take action against it to find out if we had traitors or not. It is just that I always believe that I did not have any traitors in my kingdom. Once again I am really ashamed. But I can guarantee you that I will punish those Traitors in front of the public to show that this will happen to those people, who betray their own kingdom. It will always show everyone what will happen to them if they try to betray their own kingdom.``


    The king finishes saying that and instantly all the warriors present there begin to p for him. Really you have to say for everyone present in that hall room it is a shocking thing that they have Traitors. Also because of them, they face danger while facing those enemies. Also what if the traitors also help those enemies to get inside the kingdom and then those enemies decide to attack the human Kingdom?


    It could be a nightmare for the human Kingdom. Really they just escape from a dangerous situation.


    "Also as I told you earlier from now on we need to be careful. We don''t know if those enemies will attack us once again or not. They could attack us anytime and most likely they will try to enter our Kingdom so that they could attack us from inside. I already increased the security because of this. But still, all of us need to be careful and if you notice any suspicious movement, immediately take action against it."


    The human king said that. At this time everyone present in the hall room also agreed with him because they did not want anything to happen to their Kingdom and they will try to protect their Kingdom at any cost.


    ______________________


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, the party is over and every Warrior present begins to leave the Royal pce one by one. Sam, who at this time was standing with Livia and the others, also told him that he needed to leave because he needed to prepare for tomorrow''s adventure.


    He walked toward the Oni King to say goodbye but before he could say that, the Oni King told him that the human King wanted to meet him. Not only that he also said that he already told about his real identity. Well actually the human king and the old king of the human Kingdom found him very interesting and because of this, they became interested in him.  Because of this, they wanted to meet him. Not only that as the Oni King told about his real identity, the human king and the old King became more interested in him because he is the person who previously held the Oni Kingdom.


    Without his help most likely the situation of the Oni Kingdom will be very dangerous. So after hearing all of this, both of them became interested and because of this, they wanted to meet him.


    After hearing all of this Sam just began to feel most likely all of his previous efforts just became useless. In the end, he also agreed to meet both of them because he wanted to know why the human king and the old King became interested in him.


    With that, he began to walk toward the human king while the Oni king was also going with him. After that, both of them came in front of the human King who was most likely talking with hismander about something.


    After finishing his conversation the human King finally look at Sam and said,


    "Haha¡­ young Sam. It is nice to have you here. Who could have thought that you are the noble guest of the Oni Kingdom? Also, I am really sorry that you did not get treated properly in our Kingdom. As you can see right now we are in a very difficult situation and because of this I increased the security and told them to watch over any suspicious people that came to the human Kingdom."


    " Nice to meet you, sir. Also, you don''t have to worry about that because I can also understand. I think it is really good that you increase security before anything bad happens. With this even if your enemy sends their people inside your kingdom, they won''t be able to do anything."


    " Haha¡­ it looks like you understand. Oni King already told you that my father and I wanted to meet you. So if you don''t have a problem let''s go, my father wants to meet you."


    Sam did not have any problem with that because even if anything happened Oni King is beside him. Also, he has full confidence in his concealment technique. So three of them begin to walk toward the meeting room where you can see all the King is waiting for them.


    __________________________


    Next day,


    Sam wakes up early in the morning and begins to exercise. Even though exercising did not make him powerful but it helped him rx so he is doing that. Today he will go inside the danger zone so he already prepared himself for that.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Sometimeter, he finishes his food and after that, he leaves his hotel room to go to the restaurant to eat something. Yesterday around 11:00 p.m. he came back to his hotel room. The party already finished around 9:00 p.m. and from 9:00 p.m. to 11:00 p.m. he talked to the old king and the human king.


    Well, both of them are really curious about him because he is the person who helps the Oni Kingdom. Both of them also asked him why he registered himself inside the Oni Kingdom. At this time he also told the story that he previously told the Oni king.


    Most likely they believe that story and instantly the old King also asked him about his weird spiritual energy. He told him that this was the reason he became interested in him. Only after hearing that Sam understood why he got invited to the party. Well, he told him that from his childhood his spiritual energy was like that so he also did not know the main reason behind all of these.


    Many doctors already checked his body but they did not find anything abnormal. Not only that, but even the Oni King told them he also did not find anything abnormal in his body, so they are also the reason behind that white spiritual energy.


    Not only that but they also talked about various things and finally around 11:00 p.m. Sam is able to leave the Royal pce. You also said goodbye to Oni King and the others. Today they will go back to their kingdom so he already said his goodbye.


    Now today he will be only focusing on the danger zone and because of this, he did not want to think about any other useless thing right now. But while going toward the restaurant as usual he also looked at the system shop. Well, he is searching for any good technique that could help him in the battle.


    But unfortunately, he did not find that many good techniques in his system shop. He is just about to close the system shop but then he suddenly notices a technique that makes him very curious and surprised.


    "


    Teleportation (D-grade technique)


    [This is the technique that uses spiritual energy and space elements at the same time. Using that it helps his users to teleport from one ce to another ce. The range of the teleportation is 1 km. It also consumes 1000 spiritual energy in every use.] "


    Unfortunately, the level of this technique is low. Because of this, you can see the range of this technique is only 1 km. Sam did not worry about that because he could easily level this technique.


    Without wasting any more time he quickly bought that technique. Actually, he really needed a technique like this that could also help him instantly escape from any ce. Now with this technique, he doesn''t need to worry about that and he could easily escape from any ce.


    Well, he instantly did not learn that technique and put that in his inventory. You will try to learn that after going to the danger zone. This time he finally reaches the restaurant and wasting no time he enters the restaurant.


    ______________________


    Sometimeter he already came in front of the entrance gate and using the entrance Gate he came outside of the human Kingdom. He did not go to the warrior association this time because he already has a mission register under his name so before anything he willplete them and only after that he will go to the warrior association.


    Just aftering inside he did not waste any more time and began to use his speed to travel around. Before anything, he will go to that ce where he will find those bloody rabbits. Monsters that only live in that ce and other than that you won''t find them.


    But even though he is using his full speed he still needed 3 to 4 hours to reach the ce. Well, that ce was far away from the part of the danger zone that was near the human Kingdom. Well, not that heined about this because while going toward that ce he also met many Monsters and many tried to attack him.


    Also, he is not in any Hurry and because of this while going to that ce he also takes his time to fight those Monsters. He already killed all the monsters that previously wanted to attack him. But when it gets more annoying he just uses his pressure to warn those monsters not to approach him. This method really works and because of this while he is resting or eating his food those monsters did not dare to approach him.


    It already takes 4 hours to reach that ce and wasting no time he quickly searches for those bloody rabbits. Before anything he needs to kill those Monsters and only after killing them will he be able to look for the second mission.


    But when he reached that ce, he saw that he was not alone in that ce. He could also see many other Warriors present there and they were also hunting those bloody habits. Even though Sam doesn''t know why those people suddenly came here, he does not care about them and is fully focused on his hunting.


    It is justpared to previous times. This time he will need much more time toplete this mission.


    To be continued________________

 Chapter 468 468 - Increasing Power

    ?


    Sam quickly shoots his sunray toward the bloody rabbit. Instantly that Monster died. Well, this is natural because every one of those monsters is very weakpared to him. Normally as you know he will not ept this type of mission but the reward of this mission is very good and because of this, he epts this mission.


    If he is alone then most likely he already could havepleted the mission but unfortunately, he is not alone there. Because of those other Warriors, he needed that much time toplete the mission.


    Well before going anywhere he wanted to kill those Monsters because of this still now he is in that ce killing those bloody rabbits. Fortunately, after staying in that ce for 3 hours he almost killed 70% of the bloody rabbits that were required in his mission. So he just needs to wait for some more time so that he will be able to finish that.


    But the surprising thing is that why the hell suddenly did many Warriors begin to kill those bloody rabbits? This instantly made him very curious. He already decided after going back to the human Kingdom he will ask the warrior association about this.


    Naturally, when previously he came to this ce to kill those bloody rabbits he did not see that much Warrior killing them. You can say you hardly have any Warrior present in that ce so this really can make anyone suspicious.


    ''I needed to search for the person who posted this mission.''


    Well, many people going to the same ce to kill the same Monster isn''t abnormal, but the thing is that suddenly that many people begin toe here to kill those bloody rabbits really makes anyone suspicious. Because of this, he wanted to look at the details of the person who wanted all these bloody rabbits.


    Nowe back to the main matter,


    Sometimeter once again he finds those bloody rabbits and without wasting any more time he uses Sun Ray toward those Monsters. With that, he instantly kills those Monsters and begins to attack those other Monsters at the same time.


    30 minutester,


    Finally, hepleted the mission and with that, he decided to rest for some time and only then he will go for the next mission.


    It did not take him that much time to recover his full energy and with that, he began to go back to his previous ce from where he started his journey. Now he needed to kill Helio Monsters. This is the first nt-type monster he will face. Also, he already found some details from the warrior association.


    Those monsters could be around Elite grade or they could already break through to Epic grade. Because of this, anybody needs to stay careful around those Monsters. Now if he needs to find those monsters then he needs to roam around the forest to search for those Monsters and this is very dangerous for him.


    This forest is most likely the yground for those Monsters because they could easily control every n so that they would attack you from any direction and you won''t be able to be aware of that. This is one reason that not that many people ept this type of mission; they could lose their life and they did not have the confidence to kill those Monsters.


    As you know that he already has experience fighting this type of monster so because of this he decided to take this mission. At the same time, he is also interested to look at the new type of Monster.


    Once again even after using his full agility, he needed 2 to 3 hours to reach that ce.


    ''Really, I should learn that teleportation technique so that I could easily travel anywhere. Most likely before fighting those monsters, I need to search for a good ce to learn that technique.''


    Well naturally if learn that technique his traveling speed will be much Quicker. Even though that technique only has a 1 km range but upgrading that could increase the range and with that, he already decided to learn that technique.


    He began to search for a good ce to rest for some time and after searching around he finally found a ce that could be a really good ce to rest. Before anything he needs to make sure no monster sneakily approaches his direction. Fortunately, because of this he already has the life detection device and with that, he sits down in that ce and then already brings out the teleportation scroll.


    Instantly using the upgrade points he learns that technique and already he knows how to use the space element to move from one ce to another ce. But after that, he did not instantly upgrade that technique because before anything he wanted to get familiar with that new technique.


    He already decided to practice that technique for some time and only after that, he will go hunting. Because of the technique, you can say that the one-kilometer area bes clear for him. If you look at him right now then you will see he already closed his eyes and looked around.


    But the interesting thing is that even though he just closed his eyes, everything was clear to him and in that 1 km range he could teleport anywhere. So he is now doing that. But really whenever he uses the technique he could see 1000 spiritual energy points getting consumed by this. Naturally, because of this, he won''t be able to use that technique for that long.


    But he did not stop using that. Right now he is just teleporting from one ce to another ce, without caring about that spiritual energy consumption. But one thing he needed to say was that using this technique really needed focus because he needed to pick up the next ce the higher he wanted to teleport. Naturally, the range of his teleportation is 1 km and outside of the 1 km he is unable to see or observe any ce for Teleportation. Well also just forcing on that ce using his mind he could instantly teleport to that ce.


    Only after some timeter can you see that Allen was panting heavily. Really this is very exciting for him and because of this without caring about his spiritual energy, he just keeps using that technique. In the end, he is already very low on spiritual energy and right now resting to recover his energy.


    If necessary then he would have already used the spiritual energy potion. Fortunately, all this time no Monster approached that ce, and because of this he just decided to rest for some time. At the same time, he instantly opened his system screen and without wasting any more time he decided to upgrade this technique.


    Sam begins to upgrade the level. Instantly he could feel more knowledge of that technique begin toe to his mind and he also got experience using that technique. It is like for 100 years he uses that technique and all those experiences suddenlye to his mind.


    Finally, he upgraded that technique to a C-grade. To further upgrade the technique he did not have that many upgrade points.


    At this time he also decided to upgrade the stats point so wasting no time he used the status points to upgrade his stats points. Finally, he began to feel powerful once again and he did not stop this time I just kept upgrading his status. The main thing is that he wanted to know how much you will be able to upgrade his status until he did not reach the limit.


    Surprisingly you can say he already used 1500 status points but still, he did not show tiredness so that means his body can handle more pressure with that. He did not stop and kept increasing his status. With that, it already became the 2500 upgrade he used this time and with that, he already ced 500 status points beside every stat.


    All this time he is feelingfortable and at the same time, he can feel that something heavy is moving away from his body. Not only that he can also see a new strength that suddenly came to his body at the same time he can feel his speech that has also already increased.


    After finishing everything he quickly closed the system window and went outside. Fortunately, he is now present in the danger zone and because of this, he could instantly use his new strength against those Monsters, and wasting no time he already decided to do that.


    Fortunately in the danger zone finding monsters is not that hard. It is just finding a particr Monster could be very hard inside the danger zone but you will meet many other Monsters anywhere in the danger zone so he did not have any kind of trouble finding some Monsters.


    Wasting no time he directly went toward those Monsters and at the same time those Monsters also noticed him so they also just roared and approached in his direction. Monkey Monsters could also use the wind elements so if you aren''t careful then you could easily get killed by them.


    But fortunately, Sam already fought those monsters previously and he already knows about their behavior. Right now 20 of those monsters are approaching his direction. On the other hand, Sam uses his full speed and after that, he vanishes from his ce andes behind thest monster.


    He didn''t even waste any more time and quickly swung his sword. With that monkey Monster did not even get the chance to react and got killed by him. If you look at those monkey monsters then you will see that they are naturally bigger than any normal monkey but at the same time, every one of those monkeys is green in color except their tail. Each of them had a different color of the tail.


    Also, the thing is that every one of them is an Early Elite grade monster. But even with that Sam did not have any problem killing those Monsters.


    After killing the first monster he once again uses his full speed then like this, he begins to kill each of those Monsters. Those monsters did not have the chance to react. Even if some of them already realize that their enemy is much faster than them, none of them are able to do anything because before they could escape from that ce Sam killed everyone.


    ''I shouldn''t use the origin spiritual energy. That instantly kills those monsters. Sigh, I should try to attack the next Monster without using spiritual energy.''


    Sam decided to search for more Monster but this time he will not use The Spiritual energy while using his sword technique. Naturally using the origin spiritual energy his Sword became much more dangerous and it could easily cut any monster. Because of this while killing those monkey monsters he did not feel satisfied and with that, he already decided to find more monsters and that time he will not use the origin spiritual energy to coat his sword.


    ____________________________


    "Few, much better. Really, fighting monsters is the fastest way to get used to your new strength. Fortunately, I did not increase my strength when I was inside the kingdom. With that, just after increasing my strength, I get the chance to stabilize my condition."


    Sometimeter, Sam finishes his hunting. He already killed many monsters and every one of those monsters is at Elite grade. But unfortunately, he was not able to find those peak and intermediate Elite grade Monsters in this ce. He needed to go much deeper than these but he did not do that.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (58990/58990)


    Spiritual energy: (58990/58990)


    Strength: 5399 + 500 - 5899<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Agility: 5399 + 500 - 5899


    Physique: 5399 + 500 - 5899


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 5399 + 500 - 5899


    Spirit: 5399 + 500 - 5899


    Status points:- 462,005 - 2500 = 459505


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (peak) / (Peak SSS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 1k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chances)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (C-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (C-grade) (+)


    Teleportation (C-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Don''t think you are invincible. You just gain some strength to protect yourself from the danger. But you are still a weakling.] "


    " Teleportation


    [This technique helps you teleport from one ce to another ce. This uses the space element to help you teleport. The range of this technique is 10 km. Spiritual energy consumption will be based on the distance you teleported.]"


    As you can see he already became a peak SSS-grade Warrior. He just needs to increase his stat points a little more with that he is able to break through. Not only that as you can see you already increase the teleportation technique.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 469 469 - Helping

    After everything was over he began to search for those Halio monsters. Unfortunately in that mission, he did not see the location where he would find those Monsters and because of this, he first needed to search for those Monsters.


    But searching for those monsters isn''t easy. He already searched that outer area of the forest. Unfortunately, he did not find any clue about them and because of this he finally entered the inner area of the forest or you can say Danger zone where he will meet those Elite or even Epic-grade monsters.


    So naturally he needed to be careful in that ce. Also to not waste his time, he is using the concealment technique. With that, no Monster disturbing him or attacking him. But even after searching for this long, he did not find any clue about them.


    ''Sigh, I should ask for the location beforeing to the danger zone. I should ask Ayana or the warrior association about this so that I would not need that much time to find those Monsters. Once again I should try to approach someone and ask them for the location of the Monsters.''


    With that Sam deactivated his concealment technique. Right now he needed to search for a warrior and asked him about those Halio monsters. With that Sam begins to search for a group of Warriors. Fortunately, not far away from his ce, a group of Warriors fighting some Monsters. Sam decided to approach that group of Warriors.


    When he got close to that ce he saw that group of warriors right now fighting a group of lightning wolves. Those Monsters have the power of lightning and they are very dangerous. They are very fast and also they can control The Lightning element.


    With that, you can see that those Monsters are very dangerous but most likely that group of Warriors had the confidence and because of this, they also approached those Monsters. Those lightning wolves are Early Elite-grade monsters same as those Warriors.


    But if you look at the battlefield right now then you will notice those Monsters have the advantage in this fight. Even though those Monsters had weak defense but because of their speed they could easily dodge the attack of those Warriors. Not only that at the same time, but they also attacked those Warriors with their lightning element.


    Clearly, those Warriors are at a disadvantage because they are even unable to react on time when those monsters attack them from behind. When one of them wanted to attack one of the lightning wolves, that monster suddenly vanished and appeared behind that Warrior while attacking him.


    Fortunately, because of the armor, the Warrior did not get that seriously injured but he could still feel the power behind that attack. Instantly that Warrior turned around to attack that Monster but that Monster already vanished once again. Not long after that, he also saw a lightning balling in his direction.


    Fortunately, the moment he notices those lightning balls, he jumps away from his ce. With that fortunately he is able to dodge the attack from that Monster but this is not over because that Monster still did not give up on him. Once again using his full speed Monster appears behind that Warrior and once again attacks him using a lightning bolt.


    It directly hit the Armour of that Warrior and at this time that Warrior also heard a cracking sound. Instantly his expression changes and he knows that he needs to do something or in the next attack he willpletely lose his armor. Now that will be a terrible thing because after that anybody or you can say any Monster could injure him easily.


    That Warrior instantly decided to escape from that ce and because of this he instantly uses his movement technique with full force to get away from that ce. But unfortunately, even after using his movement technique with full power, he is not that fastpared to those lightning wolves.


    With that even though he tries to escape, the Monster already reaches him and is about to attack, but fortunately, at this time, his teammate helps him. Suddenly that person created a barrier in front of his friend and that Monster was unable to attack him.


    That Monster directly hit the barrier. If you look at the barrier then you will notice this isn''t your normal barrier. This is the spiritual barrier. This barrier also has special features. The amount of force you will put on this barrier will be automatically returned by that barrier. Because of this the moment that Monster hit the barrier instantly he also received damage from that barrier. The barrier attacks him with the same amount of power that the monster used when hit that barrier.


    Really that attack was very powerful because you can see the condition of that monster. Most likely he already has broken bones. That Warrior who is in front of that Monster did not waste it and instantly attacked that monster. With this finally, they are able to kill a monster but that is not over because they still need to kill those remaining 14 Monsters.


    Right now the leader of that group is using her fire techniques to attack those Monsters. Even though those Monsters did not get hit by those attacks, they are also unable to get close to that person. You can say that she already created a barrier around herself and because of that, those monsters were unable to reach her. Even if they try to reach her they will immediately get burned by the green me.


    This is the upgraded version of the film technique and this is really very dangerous because it can instantly burn those Monsters. Most likely those Monsters also know about these and because of this, they did not approach her.


    Just looking at her you can tell she already reached the master level of her fire control. And because of this, she can easily control the fire element that easily.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But not all the Warriors of that group had the same condition as the team leader. Those long-distance Warriors were in bad conditionspared to any other Warriors. They are trying to attack those monsters from a long distance but unfortunately using their full speed those monsters already reach close to those Warriors and attack them.


    Because of this, you can say those Warriors are in the most disadvantageous situation. But still, in a disadvantageous situation like this, they are able to kill a total of six Monsters and only just 9 Monsters remaining. But the situation is like those Warriors did not even get the chance to bring out their potions. And also you can see many of them already in a serious situation where they already got seriously injured by those Monsters and because of this, all of them are in a very dangerous situation.


    Right now only a few of them are able to fight those monsters without getting injured. The team leader is one of them while five other Warriors also fight those monsters without getting injured by them. But the main problem is that they also needed to protect their teammates and it became very hard for them to fight those monsters while at the same time protecting their teammates.


    Everyone knows that they really underestimated those Monsters and because of this, they are in this situation. Also at this time, they are unable to see any Warrior group that will help them. So with that, they did not know what.


    Sam on the other hand watches all of these. He already saw how those monsters had the advantage over those fighters. Those Monsters already seriously injured most of the Warriors and right now it is going on like this then most likely those Warriors could also lose their life. Only 6 of them were able to fight those Monsters without getting injured but it also became very hard for them to fight those Monsters. At the same time, they also needed to protect their friends and because of this most likely, they will on be able to fight monsters like that for long.


    So looking at this Sam decided to help those people. He could kill those Monsters. Sam instantly uses the teleconasis technique and already three of those monsters have lost the ability to control their body. Three of those monsters suddenly stop and suddenly they begin to feel that they are getting crushed by something. The main thing is that they were not even able to make any sound.


    At this time those other Monsters and even those Warriors became very shocked looking at the sudden scene. Nobody realizes how the hell those monsters suddenly stop moving. But they could instantly see all of those Monsters standing in the same ce but in the next second everyone fell on the ground and the ground beneath them began to crack. Blood alsoes out from their body so it looks like those monsters getting pressed by something or someone.


    This instantly makes both Monster and those human Warriors very alert. Even if those monsters did not have that much intelligence, they could still feel the danger. Instantly like those human warriors they also begin to search their surroundings to search for the enemy who did all of this to their friends.


    Not only those Monsters but even those human fighters get scared because of this they also begin to look around very carefully. Actually, everyone thought that it was a new type of Monster that was attacking them and because of this, they became very alert and began to search for the enemy.


    Unfortunately, they did not find anyone but at this time you can see once again two of those Monsters lost control over their body, and this time those Monsters begin to float in the sky. Those monsters are just flying higher and higher. Even if those monsters wanted to howl, they were unable to do that and at this time they were just going higher in the sky.


    They already fly 5 km away from the ground and at this time they suddenly shop in mid-air. Without wasting any more time all those monsters begin to fall. But the thing is that even if they wanted to use their lightning technique to get away from the situation, they still did not gain control over their body and because of this they just began to fall from the sky without even being stopped.


    In under 1 minute, they hit the ground and instantly you can hear that big sound. Not only that the whole ce also got damaged by that and as you can see the cracked mark  present in that ce. All the trees and even all the surrounding things got destroyed by thatnding.


    At this time those other Monsters seem to know that they are in danger and because of this, they wanted to escape from that ce but unfortunately, before they could do that every one of them lost control over their body. Only at this time everyone so that a person came out behind that victory.


    He isn''t a monster. Like those other Warriors, he also is a Human Warrior. At this time If you look at him then you will see his eyes are glowing while he focuses on those Monsters. Naturally, anybody could tell he is the reason behind all of this. So right now that person once again controls all the Monsters and instantly those Monsters begin to fly in the sky and they go upward and upward.


    Once again when those Monsters reach the maximum height, Sam instantly releases the force from them but he still has control over their body and because of this none of those Monsters were able to use their power together in that situation. Because of this as you can see every one of those monsters directly hit the ground and destroy the surrounding area.


    At this time Sam did not directly approach those Warriors. He first approached the ce where those Monsters fell from the sky.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 470 470 - Red Moon

    ?


    He collected the loot from those monsters that he killed earlier. He did not touch those other loots. At this time when he turned around he saw all those Warriors looking at him with confused gaze.


    Sam did not mind that he just went in front of them and then asked,


    "Are you guys ok? I can see that many of your teammates are seriously injured. You should treat them quickly."


    Most likely only after hearing that those people came back to their senses and they instantly began to treat their injured teammates. At the same time, they are really grateful to him and because of this, they also show their gratitude to him.


    Sam instantly did not ask for the location. At first, he waited for them to treat their teammates. Only when they stabilized the condition of their injured teammates did he ask them about the location of those Halio monsters?


    Most of those Warriors after hearing his question got surprised but the main thing was that nobody knew about the location. Except for one person none of them know about that monster and the location where he will find them. At this time the captain of that team said that she knew the location. Without wasting any more time she begins to tell the location of those Halio monsters.


    "Really thank you so much. I have been searching for those monsters for a long time but still, I am unable to find the location of these Monsters. Not only that, but I also have a time limit of 2 days toplete this mission or I will not receive any reward."


    After saying that Sam left that ce. Actually, his guess was right, it was just that he needed to go deeper not only that he also needed to go underground to find those Monsters. Surprisingly these Monsters did not like the Sun and because of this in the morning they hid underground but at night time those Monsters woulde out from their hiding ce.


    ''Did these Monsters absorb the moon''s energy instead of the sun''s energy?''


    Sam thought that while going toward that ce. Well, it does not matter if those monsters came out during the day or during the night. Right now Sam just wants to find the location of those Monsters. First of all, he wanted to see which type of attack and how powerful were those Monsters and after finishing this mission he also wanted to do some personal investigation.


    Because of this, he wanted to finish this mission as quickly as he could. Also as you know from the start he wanted to go to that ce where previously those human fighters fight those enemies or you can say those abyss humans. He wanted to be sure about something so he already decided to go to that ce. But he first needs to kill Halio monsters to finish his mission.


    Finally, after 1 hour of traveling, he came to that ce. Well, he could havee here earlier than this but whileing to this ce he also observed his surroundings and because of this it took him some time to reach that ce.


    The captain of that Warrior group said that previously she saw those monsters in this ce but right now she wasn''t sure if those monsters were still present here or not. Because of this whileing to this ce Sam also looks around to find any type of clue about those Monsters. But looking at the situation Sam could tell that until it did not be night time he won''t be able to find those Monsters.


    So he decided to wait in that ce until it did not be night. Fortunately, he knew how to pass his time because not far away from his ce he could see some Monsters. So he decided to fight those Monsters without using the concealment technique.


    _____________________


    Around midnight you can see those Monsters be wilder. Well, you can say that the moonlight affected every Monster present in the danger zone and around night every one of them became wild like this. Because of this, many Warriors did not fight any Monster around night. Not only that if you go to the warrior association then you can also see a warning that tells you not to fight monsters at night.


    Every Monster has some kind of connection with the moonlight and because of this at night every one of them became like this and also most likely their strength increases at night.


    So like this right now you can see those monsters roaming around everywhere in the danger zone and not only that the number of those monsters also increased. At this time if any Monster got attacked by any Warrior those other Monsters will also join that fight. At that time every Monster had one goal in their mind which was to kill their enemy.


    At this time not far away from that ce where previously Sam was searching for those Halio Monsters, you can see some movement in that ground. The whole area begins to vibrate. It looked like an earthquake or something like that but unfortunately, no other area vibrated like this so naturally this wasn''t an earthquake.


    For some time after vibrating like this, something unexpected happens and you can see some monstersing out from the ground. Just looking at them you can tell they came from the underground. Not only that if you look at them then you will see all of them look like humans but they are bodies made with the roots of trees. At this time If you look at their eyes then you will see they had Golden eyes that were also shining that night.


    Aftering out from the underground those monsters decided to kill some Monsters that were near them. Wasting no time they quickly killed those Monsters and did not even give them a chance to react. If you look at those monsters then you will see that all of those monsters got caught by the tree''s root. Those roots came from the underground and the dangerous thing was that those roots could absorb the life energy from those Monsters.


    Just imagine how dangerous those roots are. So like this, those monsters kill those other Monsters and after that, they also clear the whole area. After cleaning that whole area those monsters finally begin to look at the sky or you can say begin to look at the moon.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Looking at the moon you can see it is quite bigpared to yesterday. Not only that but suddenly the color of that moon changes into a red color. Most likely something would happen today and every Monster knows about that. Because of this the restlessness of those Monsters also increases today.


    Right now not only those monsters, but even those warriors present in the danger zone, could also see the red moon that appears in the sky. But fortunately for those people, this wasn''t their fast time as they looked at the red moon. But one thing was that the moment they looked at the red moon they already became alert.


    Red moon means the power of those monsters will increase and every one of those monsters will try to attack any fighters right now he will see. Because of this, fighters who already know about this are getting ready to attack and defend themselves.


    Not only are those Warriors present in the danger zone but even those Warriors present in the human Kingdom also get alert the moment they look at the red moon. Everyone knows that this means trouble.


    Also, one more thing was that this incident did not get caused by anyone. No one had the ability to turn the whole moon into a red moon so you can say this is a natural phenomenon.


    At this time inside the kingdom, the king already took action and came toward the main gate and also appointed Warriors around the whole Kingdom. Right now monsters could attack them from any direction so they needed to protect themselves from those Monsters while they also needed to kill them.


    Right now inside the danger zone, Sam did not know anything about the red moon. He just knows that this means danger. But why is it dangerous? He did not know anything.


    Right now if you look at him he was still present in that ce and looking for Halio Monster. Fortunately, after waiting until midnight he finally saw those Monsters but at the same time suddenly he saw arge red moon appear in the sky.


    So right now hepletely forgot about those Monsters and just looked at the red moon. He instantly uses the observation technique on that moon but other than? He did not get anything from the system.


    ''What is happening that even my system cannot tell me anything about that? ''


    Right now he was thinking about this. So without doing anything he just silently stayed there and waited. Before anything he needed to understand the situation. The problem was that he won''t be able to contact anyone this time, because it could also alert those other Monsters.


    Suddenly he looks at Halio Monster and for them all of them sit down in the ce that they cleaned earlier. Not only that, every one of those monsters suddenly looks at the moon and somehow when Sam uses The Spiritual Vision he could see a red type of spiritual energy. Everyone is going to eat those Monsters.


    He was very surprised after seeing that but he still did not make any move. Not long after that, he could hear the angry roar of many Monsters. Not only that he could also hear the sound of an explosion. Most likely many fighters already started their fighting with the Monsters and because of this something like that happened.


    Sam did not care about those Monsters or those Warriors. Right now he just fully focuses on those Halio monsters. After absorbing the moon''s energy for some time all those monsters get up from the ground and only after that do they begin to look around themselves. Most likely previously when they observe the moon''s energy they somehow feel that someone is watching over them and because of this, they are right now searching for that person.


    On the other hand, Sam already decided to attack those Monsters. Even though he did not know what was happening, right now he wanted to kill those Monsters and then he will try to investigate this. The best way to attack those monsters is by using his telekinesis technique or his light control technique.


    He decided to go with the telekinesis and light technique at the same time. Well, when he faces a monster that has the same power level as him he cannot instantly crush those Monsters. He can also control their body for some time and because of this at the same time he also uses the light control technique so that he stops their movement and instantly kills those Monsters.


    Right now in front of him, you can only see those three Monsters while those other Monsters already went in the other direction. But fortunately, because of using the spiritual vision, he could still find the Monsters. Those Monsters also previously did the same thing while absorbing the energy from the moon. But it looked like they did not want to observe in the same ce and because of this, those monsters went to a different ce.


    Those three monsters that were looking for other monsters or human Warriors instantly lost control over their body. At the same time suddenly they got hit by fireballs. At first, Sam thought about using the light element but then he decided to use the fire element. This type of Monster fire element will be much more effective and because of this, he decided to use that.


    Also if you look at the fire the color already reaches purple and with that, it bes a very deadly fire that burns everything. This is called hellfire. So the moment those attacked touched those three monsters they did not even get the chance to react or escape from that ce. Even if they try to escape they won''t be able to do that as Sam was controlling their body. So like this, he easily killed those three Monsters and also collected the loot and dead body.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 471 471 - Red Moon (2)

    ?


    After killing those 3 Halio monsters, Sam instantly did not move from his ce. Before anything he needed to make sure that everything was ok. Because he can see the red moon   in the sky. Unfortunately, he did not have that much information about this. But previously when he was in the Oni Kingdom, he was somehow able to read a book about an incident.


    In the incident people saw the Red moon in the sky and after that monsters began to attack their City continuously. The main thing was that even powerful warriors were present there and trying to make those monsters afraid of them but nothing worked against them.


    Previously reading the history book of the Oni Kingdom he found this information but then he did not think this was an important matter and because of this he just ignored it. But now looking at the sky he can tell that he should have read that. With that, he could get more information about this.


    ''Most likely, because of this red moon something will happen to every Monster present in the danger zone, and most likely because of this, they will attack the city or try to attack the Warriors and those normal people.''


    Sam thought this. Actually, he wasn''t wrong because of the red moon, every Monster became blot thirsty. Actually, only those leaving being that directly observe The Spiritual energy will get affected by these red moons. At this time you can say a red color spiritual energy will also stay in the air and absorbing them will make anyone go insane.


    Nobody will be able to think clearly and they will only have one goal in their mind. In that state, they will just want to drink blood from any other living being. Not only that, this red spiritual energy will also increase the overall power and spiritual energy. It''s just that you won''t be able to keep control of your mind. You won''t be able to think properly and because of this, you will be insane.


    Because of this, you can say that none of the Warriors get affected by these because they did not directly absorb the spiritual energy. But on the other hand, all the monsters got affected by this because as you know they directly absorb Spiritual energy.


    Right now inside the human Kingdom, you can say that every warrior already came near the border area of the kingdom. All Warriors right now are present at the border area. Everyone knows what will happen when a red moon appears. Naturally, their Kingdom will get attacked by those Monsters and because of this, they already prepare themselves to fight those Monsters.


    Well every year for one night, a red moon appears in the sky and situations like this are created by the red moon. Also, nobody could guarantee when a red moon will appear or not, and because of this nobody was able to predict this.


    But the moment everyone present in the human Kingdom noticed the red moon day instantly reacted and came to the border area. Every one of them was ready to fight those monsters and they were just right now waiting for those Monsters.


    On the other hand, every normal person''s prison inside the human Kingdom right now already evacuated their homes and went to the stronghold. Actually, the human Kingdom already built a stronghold like this so that if any enemy or Monsters like this attacks their Kingdom, people are able to save their life from them.


    Now those normal people present in the human Kingdom already evacuate from those strongholds and they just now pray that they could survive this disaster. Every year they face situations like this. Every year many Warriors died protecting their kingdom from those Monsters and because of this right now all those normal people are just praying for those Warriors.


    In this wild state, those monsters will not think about anything. They just recklessly attack any living being that has blood in them and do not get affected by the red spiritual energy. Right now not only the human Kingdom but those other kingdoms are also getting ready to fight those Monsters. They are Warriors also ready to fight those Monsters and they are just right now waiting for those Monsters.


    Right now every human warrior fixed their eyes on the danger zone and waited for those monsters toe out from the danger zone. But at this time If you look in front of them then you will see nothing. Right now it was like everything became very silent. You cannot even feel the wind. But everyone knows that this is the silent before disaster so they fixed their eye on the danger zone.


    On the other hand, those Warriors who previously went inside the danger zone right now are using their full power to get away from the danger zone. Staying at this time in the danger zone will be very risky for them and because of this, they wanted to quickly go back to their Kingdom. Everyone using their full power or if they have any type of Escape technique they are right now using that to escape from the danger zone.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But unfortunately, Sam did not know anything about this and he was just waiting to know what will happen to Halio Monster. He could see using his spiritual eye that those monsters were still absorbing the red spiritual energy. The moment that red spiritual energy enters those Monsters'' bodies, most likely it is doing something to them. Even though Sam wasn''t clear what was happening with those Monsters but he could see using spiritual vision that the body of those Monsters right now was glowing red color.


    ''What is this free spiritual energy? What is happening to those Monsters? ''


    Right now Sam was thinking of a question like this but unfortunately, he did not know the answer nor did he have anyone who would answer his question. So right now he did not move from his ce and just silently looked at those Monsters.


    While observing monsters like this he suddenly saw some Warriors running toward the outside of the danger zone. Install he became very curious to know why they were running like that but those Warriors seemed to not want to waste any time so none of them wasted a second in the danger zone.


    ''Why are they running like this? Also, why are they that much scared? Did the red moon behind all of this?''


    Instantly Sam began to ask this type of question to himself but he did not know the answer. He will eventually get to know about this so he also did not hurry to find the answer.


    Also this time he did not try to approach any Warriors because he could see everybody was right now busy running away from the danger zone. So he did not want to force anyone to know about the answer.


    If you minutester right now you can say that inside the Jungle or forest, only Sam was present there while using the concealment technique. Almost all the Warriors left the danger zone. But right now those Warriors who previously went deeper in the danger zone using their full power toe out of the danger zone as quickly as they can. Some of them already used their secret technique to get away from this ce but still, some of them needed a long time to escape from this ce. Until then nobody knew what would happen to them and because of this, many of those Warriors became scared.


    Some timeter Sam notices something unexpected happen in that ce. As you know, most of the monsters have red eyes but if you look at their eyes it looks like their eyes are turning more red. Not only that, but it also looks like in that darkness those red eyes glowing. Every Monsters have this kind of glowing red eyes and at the same time, every one of them shows a furious expression on their face.


    Just looking at this, Sam already knows that all of this is happening because of that ref spiritual energy. The thing was that until now nobody or you can say no Monster moved from their ce and just looked at the sky like that. Everyone is looking at the red moon and this really makes Sam very confused.


    A few momentster, something unexpected happens. Every one of those monsters now instantly begins to run toward the outside area of the danger zone. Without any warning, all of them begin to run and everything in their way gets destroyed. If a tree came their way they also destroy that and just focus on running.


    Fortunately, Sam was able to react on time and because of this, he was able to jump away from the tree before it got destroyed. Right now he did not want to get noticed by those Monsters at any condition. Fortunately, Sam was able to stabilize himself in another ce. From there he was not looking at those Monsters and their behavior.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 472 472 - Insane Monsters

    ?


    After stabilizing himself he is now ready to follow these monsters but at the same time suddenly he feels something. Suddenly between those Monsters, he also felt some aura of warriors. Instantly that made him very interested.


    So he did not follow those Monsters and instantly went to that ce. Just after reaching that ce, he could see the situation of those human Warriors and those other Warriors. Alongside those human Warriors right now you can see many other species, all of them busy fighting those monsters that were attacking them continuously.


    At this time If you look at those Monsters then you will see the madness in their eyes. Right now those monsters do not fear anything and because of this even if you try to make them afraid you won''t be able to do that. Right now they won''t think about anything and just only attack their enemy. Those monsters did not think if their enemy was stronger or weaker. They just only wanted to kill their enemy and then suck the blood of their enemy.


    Nowe back to those Warriors. Some of them were early epic-grade Warriors, while some of them were Elite grade warriors. All of them were fighting those Monsters. Mostly they did not even belong to the same group but right now in a critical situation like this, they decided to fight those Monsters alongside. Anyhow they need to get away from this situation or they will clearly die.


    Those monsters attacked those Warriors continuously and that did not even give them the chance to bring out their health potions. Because of this, you can see those injured Warriors that are unable to recover their health and energy but just needed to fight those Monsters. Nobody in the situation was unable to do anything other than fight those Monsters.


    Those Monsters just continuously attack them and even if those Warriors kill those Monsters but in the next second more Monsters attack them so because of this you can say every one of them bes very injured and as you can see they are also very low on spiritual energy. They previously used their full power to get away from the danger zone but unfortunately, before they could do that they got attacked by those Monsters.


    You can say at least 50 Warriors are present in the ce while they just continuously get attacked by those Monsters from every direction. So right now those Warriors did not get the chance to escape from that ce. Even though it is only a few minutes since those Monsters begin to attack them, killing those monsters is really exhausting for everyone.


    Sam, who was looking at the situation, decided to help those Warriors. Because he could tell that if he did not help them most likely they would die by those Monsters. Instantly he uses the telekinesis technique to control the monsters that were about to attack those Warriors. Those monsters instantly stop moving and that makes everyone very confused.


    Actually not only do those monsters just stop moving, but they also instant around and attack those other Monsters. Instantly you can see the shocking expression present on the faces of the Warriors.


    ''What is happening? Why are they attacking those other Monsters?''


    Instantly they thought of a question like this but unfortunately, they did not know the answer. Most likely they would stay there like this if Sam did not signal them.


    "Why the hell are you idiots staying like this? Quickly try to escape from that ce. I won''t be able to hold them for long."


    He instantly said that to everyone through their mind and most likely after hearing that everyone came back to their senses. They finally understand that all of these happened because someone helped them so they did not waste any more time and used their power to escape from that ce. Fortunately, they already came close to the outside area of the danger zone so it won''t take them that much time to get away from this ce and reach the human Kingdom.


    But the problem was that even if they go outside of the danger zone right now they will get attacked by those Monsters. But at least people from the kingdom could help them and with that, they will be rescued by them. Only when he saw those people already went very far away from that ce. He decided to deactivate the telekinesis technique and move from that ce.


    Right now, he was thinking that he should at least help all the Warriors that are present in the danger zone and unable to escape before those monsters attack them. If they are unable to escape they will be in a dangerous situation where they could also lose their life. Because of this Sam decided to search around the danger zone and if he found any Warrior like this, he would help him. Also, he already had his teleportation technique so if the situation gets very dangerous, he will immediately use that and send those Warriors outside of the danger zone.


    With that, he began to advance. You can still see those monsters that are most likely going toward the human Kingdom. All of those monsters now became insane and like that they are going to work the outside area of the danger zone.


    But at this time Sam did not just focus on those Monsters, he also needed to search for Warriors if they were present here, then they most likely were Fighting those Monsters. With that, he just only focused on finding those Warriors. He was already trying to sense any aura other than Those monsters.


    Right now finding the aura of warriors will be easy but hard at the same time. Easy because everyone Monsterz right now has the same kind of aura, so at this time you can easily sense the aura of any Warriors. It was hard because as you know that every one of those monsters released the same aura, so it became hard for anyone to sense the other aura.


    But Sam was doing that. Without he didn''t even know how much deeper he hade. He just only focuses on finding those Warriors. He was just about to move from his current ce but at this time suddenly he felt some energy fluctuationing from his right direction.


    Without any dy, he went to that ce and saw some Warriors fighting Monsters continuously. Most likely some of them are already seriously injured as he can see thempletely bleeding. Not only that they already lost their armor and their whole body was injured so naturally everyone was in a very serious condition.


    Wasting no time he once again uses the telekinesis technique to control those Monsters. Once again those Monsters around them stop attacking and instantly turn around to attack those other Monsters.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    At this time those injured Warriors finally get some time to rest but you can say that all of them are very confused right now. They were unable to guess how the hell all of that happened. But suddenly they hear something in their mind.


    "Use your health potions and spiritual energy potions."


    Only then did everyone guess that most likely someone was helping them and because of this, they did not waste any more time and quickly brought out their potions. Naturally because of those Monsters continuously attacking them, they are unable to bring out the potions, with that as you can see their condition bes like this.


    At this time while those Warriors were healing, Sam controlled those Monsters to kill those other Monsters. He already killed many Monsters but as you can see those Monsters did not care about that they just wanted to attack those humans. But finally, every one of those humans recovers from their injuries and they are already full of spiritual energy.


    But the problem was that all of them just now needed to leave this ce or they would get attacked by them once again. But living in this ce wasn''t easy for anyone because as you know right now many monsters are just present in that ce and they will continuously attack them even if they try to escape from here.


    So finally Sam decided to use the teleportation technique but the thing was that he did not want to reveal himself so he still maintained his concealment technique. At the same time, he told every one of those people toe closer so that he could directly use the teleportation technique to make them leave this ce. Actually using the teleportation technique not only he was only able to teleport but he could also teleport any people.


    So right now he instantly came in front of those Warriors and wasted no time using the teleportation technique. As you know the range of his teleportation technique already became 10 km so he directly used that and sent every one of those Warriors 10 km away from that ce.


    Fortunately, that area wasn''t that far away from the outer area so with that they could easilye out of the inner area and then directly try to get away from the danger zone. So with that Sam did not waste any more time once again to search for more Warriors.


    ___________________


    "Captain, what could be that person that helped us? We did not even see him or his face but just suddenly came here?"


    Right now one person from that group asked her captain about this. Well after hearing that question the captain also began to think about who that person could be. Unfortunately, he did not know anyone who got you teleportation techniques so he also wasn''t sure.


    All this time you can see everyone running toward the outside area. They did not want to waste any more time so they were running like this. Also fortunately in that ce if you look at those monsters then he will see they weren''t that strong.


    "Unfortunately I also don''t know anything about that person. I am not familiar with anyone who could use teleportation techniques so I am also unable to answer this. But after everything is over, naturally I try to find out about the identity of this person. Fortunately, he was present there and decided to help us otherwise we would be dead right now."


    The captain says that and at the same time those other Warriors agree with him. All of them were very grateful that they were able to escape from that ce because of that person so they really wanted to thank him and show their gratitude.


    With that, all of them already came very close to the kingdom. At this time every one of them could see that fighters of the human Kingdom were also fighting those Monsters continuously. Looking at the scene, they finally sigh in relief. Previously, they really became very scared, and for a minute they thought they would die like this.


    Actually, this wasn''t umon and because of this, everyone was very scared previously. Every year when a red moon appears in the sky many Warriors lose their lives. Some of them lost their lives because of protecting their Kingdom from those monsters while some of them lost their lives because they were unable to escape from the danger zone. Naturally because of this everyone was very grateful to Sam.


    But not long after that a group of warriors once came out of the danger zone. Those are the warrior group that also got saved by Sam and instantly got teleported to the outer area of the forest. After that, using their full power they were able to escape from the danger zone and came here. Every one of those people was at epic grade. But even with that much strength, they are unable to fight those many Monsters that also have the same strength as them


    Those people were most likely very grateful to Sam right now and really wanted to know his identity but unfortunately, that person did not show his face or did note in front of them. Like the previous group of people, they also got called by Sam to gather around, and after that, every one of them disappeared from the danger zone.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 473 473 - Abyss Humans

    Many people suddenly appear in the outer area of the danger zone. Everyone has a confused face right now because they still did not know how they were able to appear here. A second ago all of them were fighting those Monsters. But in the next second, they somehow came here.


    Really they still cannot believe something like that happened to them. If you look at them right now then you will see everyone was injured. A few minutes ago those monsters suddenly started to attack them and from then on they just continuously fought those Monsters. It wasn''t that those Monsters were more powerful than them but because of the number of those Monsters, everyone became like this.


    None of those Monsters bes scared of their aura. You can say that exactly the opposite happened because the moment that they tried to pressurize those Monsters, they became angry. With that, they just continuously attack those Monsters.


    If things were going on like this then they would have died right now. But at the end moments, something unexpected happens and all of them teleport to the outside area of the danger zone.


    "Let''s go guys. As we can tell most likely someone will help us. We will try to know about his identityter, but right now we need to save our life,"


    The captain of that Warrior group quickly said that to everyone and instantly every one of them began to run toward the kingdom. Even though Monsters began to attack them in that ce, all of those Monsters were very weakpared to them. So this time they did not have any problem fighting those Monsters while they advanced toward the human Kingdom.  Well, you can say that not only that Warrior group but one by one many Warrior groups came to the outside area of the danger zone and naturally all of them were very confused about how they appeared there.


    Everyone realizes that most likely some Warriors help them. Because of this, none of them waste their time and with that, they directly begin to run toward the human Kingdom. Just getting close to the human Kingdom they could already see every fighter from the human Kingdom fighting those Monsters. Only after seeing that every one of those Warriors rx a little and then installing join the fight with those Warriors.


    Actually, it will take some time for that red moon to finish and until then every Monster will be like this. Those Monsters will stay insane like this until that red moon is finished from this ce. So they need to protect their Kingdom until the red moon doesn''t vanish.


    _______________________


    ''Most likely, everyone already went back to the human Kingdom. With that, I did not have to worry about those human Warriors right now. I should also go back.''


    After thinking that Sam is also ready to go back. But suddenly at this time, something unexpected happened. Instantly he saw some more people not far away from his ce fighting those Monsters. Normally he would have already reacted to save those people but this time he did not do that. He instantly felt that none of these people weren''t normal people. Every one of them releases a nasty aura. Only those Abyss humans or any other living being like those Monsters, release nasty aura like this.


    So using his spiritual mission he quickly looks at those Monsters and as he guesses every one of those people releases a dark aura. With that Sam already became sure that those people most likely belong to the Abyss humans. So because of this time did not move from his ce and just stayed there.


    Like anyone, those people are also getting attacked by those Monsters. Right now even their dark spiritual energy did not work against those Monsters and the red spiritual energy. Sam could so those people trying to control those Monsters using their dark spiritual energy but in the end, they are unable to do that. The moment those Monsters get hit by the dark spiritual energy, they begin to glow in red color, and with that red spiritual energy takes over the dark spiritual energy.


    ''What are you trying to do? Did they also try to escape from this ce but are unable to do that?''


    Well, Sam thought that those abyss humans most likely face a simr situation as those human Warriors where they are unable to escape from this ce. But unfortunately, he was very wrong because those abyss humans did not face a simr situation as those human Warriors. They came here to control some Monsters using their dark spiritual energy. Right now, those people wanted to extract blood from those Monsters to use in their work.


    As you know only those living beings got affected by the red spiritual energy that directly absorbs the red spiritual energy. So right now other than those Monsters you cannot find the red spiritual energy in anyone. Due to this those abyss humans are trying to control some of those Monsters to bring them back to their base. They wanted to bring them back to their base for extracting the Red spiritual energy.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Naturally, this type of spiritual energy is very useful. They could be used as a power to a potion. That was the reason right now abyss humans trying to control those Monsters but in the end, they are unable to do that and because of this as you can see they are getting attacked by those Monsters continuously. Every one of those Monsters begins to attack them.


    So like this, all of them were in a very serious situation. Not only that, most likely they just recently joined and because of this they did not know that the red spiritual energy could easily cancel the dark spiritual energy and because of this until now those monsters did not get affected by that.


    Escape from that ce that didn''t even have the time to use their teleportation technique or any other technique. Anyhow, they need to get some time to prepare for that. But in the situation as you can see it wasn''t possible for them to use their teleportation technique. Also because of this, you can see the condition of those people became very serious and already one of them died because of those Monsters.


    All this time Sam was just looking at those people without doing anything. He has zero interest in saving those people but you can say that he was quite interested to know why they came here. What are the motives of those people? He is very interested now so he was thinking about saving just one of them and after that using his mind control technique He could get to know the motive of those people.


    Sam already decided to do that but he instantly did not take action because he was just waiting for those Monsters to kill every one of those abyss humans except that leader.


    _______________


    "Sir all of our Warriors from the danger zone somehow were able to escape and already came to our site. They already join those other Warriors and fight those Monsters."


    " It is very good news. But why are you confused like this? We should be happy that our Warriors did not die this time in the danger zone. With that, the power of our human Warriors became strong once again and weak out able to protect our Kingdom from those Monsters."


    " Actually sir, those people report something very interesting that I am unable to understand. They report to me that somehow they direct teleport to the outer area of the danger zone and they are quickly able toe back to our Kingdom.


    Every one of them is sure that someone will most likely help them but none of them knows the identity of that person. Because of this, I am very confused right now because I also did not know any warriors who could use teleportation techniques. Only you and the old King could use the teleportation technique. So I wanted to ask you if you saved those people previously."


    Just after hearing that question, you can say that the human King became very surprised. He did not save those people and was just nning to do that. Also, he did not think the old King took action because he was also fighting those monsters. The old King yed a major role in this case because he mainly killed arge amount of those monsters.


    "Hmm¡­ me or father did not take action this time. So I also don''t know who will take action this time. But it looks like we need to find out about this person and after everything will be over we need to reward him. He saved our people in a dangerous situation like this so naturally we need to reward him."


    The King said that. Actually, right now nobody knows that the old King is also very surprised when those human Warriors suddenly appear in the outer area of the danger zone. Right now the old King is floating in the sky of the human Kingdom and killing all those Monsters around the human Kingdom. Because of his help those human fighters did not meet that many Monsters.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 474 475 - Human Kingdom

    ?


    Sam was still present in the danger zone and looking at the fight between those Abyss humans and those Monsters. Do people just get attacked by monsters in every direction? At first, everything was okay but then as you can see the situation already became very tough for them. Already most of the Abyss humans died. But it looks like some of them are already able to sessfully control the Monsters and right now those Monsters are already helping them to fight those other Monsters.


    ''Even though those red spiritual energies are able to counterattack the dark spiritual energy, most likely it also has a limit and because of this, it is finally able to control those two Monsters.''


    Well now looking at the situation the team leader already decided to retreat. Almost all of his teammates and right now only 5 of them are alive. So, he wanted to retreat but at the same time, he already had two monsters that got controlled by the dark spiritual energy. Because of this, he doesn''t want those monsters to get killed by those other Monsters.


    Quickly told everyone to retreat and those people right now trying to buy time for their team leader to use the dark Teleportation. It will take some time for their captain to create and activate that so until then they wanted to fight those monsters so their captain did not get distracted.


    Sam is also looking at the situation and he already recognizes the symbol that the person was creating on the ground right now. It was the same pattern that he saw previously in the Oni Kingdom.


    ''So, he is nning to use the dark teleportation symbol to get away from this ce. Well, let''s just wait a little longer so that I can take action.''


    Even after realizing that Sam did not take action because he could see some of them were not able to hold those monsters for long. So naturally this early he did not want to take action and wanted those people to get killed by those Monsters.


    5 minutester, you can see two of them already died because of those Monsters and right now those three people alongside those two Monsters were fighting those monsters. Their condition also wasn''t that good, and most likely they won''t be able to hold it that long.


    At this time the leader already finished making the symbol and right now he was just busy channeling his dark spiritual energy into that symbol. He did not focus on those monsters or his teammates. He already knew that most likely all of his subordinates would die protecting him but he did not care about them. His main focus was to take those monsters into his base.


    Most likely those other abyss humans also know that and the thing was that they did not have any problem with that. Actually, none of those Abyss humans have any kind of emotion except anger. So they did not care about that.


    On the other hand,


    Sam already decided to take action because he could already see that symbol begin to shine so most likely it will take him a few more minutes and with that he could instantly activate that dark teleportation symbol. Wasting no time Sam instantly activated the telekinesis technique and those remaining Abyss humans lost control over their bodies. With that, they got killed by those Monsters.


    Actually not only those people but those Monsters also instantly got controlled by Sam. But they are still attacking those other Monsters while Sam suddenly teleports himself behind the remaining Abyss humans. He was still busy channeling his spiritual energy into that symbol so he did not realize that all of his teammates died and he was alone right now.


    Just aftering behind that person, Sam instantly chopped his neck and made him unconscious. Well, you have to say that those Abyss humans arepletely different from any humans or any other living being but they still have something inmon between them and the humans. So naturally with that Sam could also make that person unconscious.


    At this time he also controls those monsters to kill each other and after that, he instantly puts the dead bodies of those Monsters in his inventory. He wanted to give this Monster to the king so that he could check the dead bodies of those Monsters. On the other hand, he did not care about the dead bodies of those Abyss humans. He just takes the captain and instantly using the teleportation technique moves from that ce. Right now everything is clear and also inside the danger zone he did not find any Warrior.


    Because of this, naturally, he came back to the human Kingdom. Coming to the outer area of the danger zone he uses the teleportation technique once again. With that, he already came to the ce where he could instantly see those human Warriors fighting those Monsters. With the unconscious Abyss humans, he did not directly go inside the kingdom. If he did that then it most likely would alert the old king or the king.


    Because of this, he did not do that. Well, he was still using the concealment technique and most likely even the unconscious Abyss humans also get affected by that. Because of this, the moment he appears on that battlefield, none of those Warriors nor those monsters notice them.


    Even the old king who was observing the whole Kingdom did not notice. Even though Sam knew about this, he still did not want to take any chance of him appearing in that ce and after that, he began to use his full power to go inside the kingdom. Most lovely nobody will present in the Royal pce right now as you can see everyone is busy fighting those monsters.


    With that he decided to put that unconscious person in his room and at the same time he will use his power so that an abyss human does not be conscious, while he doesn''t be present here. At the same time, he also locks The Spiritual energy present inside the body of that person. He also puts a spiritual lock inside the mind of that abyss humans. With that, he also won''t be able to say anything about Sam.


    After doing all of this Sam did not directly leave his house. Before anything, he also needed to make sure that he stayed safe while fighting those monsters or helping those human Warriors. Because of this he also wanted to increase his strength right now. Wasting no time he brings out the system window


    With that, he began to use the status points he had with him.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (59990/59990)


    Spiritual energy: (59990/59990)


    Strength: 5999


    Agility: 5899 + 100


    Physique: 5899 + 100


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 5899 + 100


    Spirit: 5899 + 1010


    Status points:- 459505 - 500 - 459005


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (peak) / (Peak SSS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 1k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chances)<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (B-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (C-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (C-grade) (+)


    Teleportation (C-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Don''t think you are invincible. You just gain some strength to protect yourself from danger. But you are still a weakling.] "


    The moment he finished upgrading his status, he suddenly got hit by a powerful energy. At this time he was now fully in afortable situation and he justpletely forgot about his surroundings. Sometimeter, he once again came back to his senses. That time just after opening his eyes he could feel the new strength inside him.


    He can already feel that he could kill those peak Elite grade Monsters without any problem. Not only just his strength but his overall power also increased. But at the same time, he suddenly started to feel the barrier of the Elite grade.


    ''So, I have already reached the limit of peak Elite grade.''


    He already understands that he already reached the limit so if he wanted to be stronger or wanted to upgrade his stats points, then before anything he needed to break through. Unfortunately, he did not want to break through right now nor did he have any rare or legendary limit breaker.


    Without he decided to focus on those monsters that were attacking the human Kingdom. Not only that if it is possible he will also try to finish his mission. With that, he did not think that much and just left his room.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 475 476 - Joining The Battlefield

    ?


    Sam directly came outside of the kingdom and visiting now time began to fight those Monsters. Because using the consment technique he came outside and then began to fight those Monsters. At this time when he noticed no one looking at him or looking in his direction, he directly deactivated the concealment technique and with that he appeared once again.


    You have to say that nobody present there noticed him or noticed any kind of weird thing in that ce. As usual everybody was busy fighting those Monsters and those Monsters also attacking everyone continuously. They just came out from the danger zone nonstop and with that even if those Warriors killed mini Monsters but it did not end. Those monsters will continue to attack like this until they do not kill all the Monsters present in the danger zone.


    ''I really wanted to know if thoseary grade monsters would get controlled by the red spiritual energy or not.''


    Wall fighting, he suddenly thought about them. Actually he was very curious to know the answer to this question. Previously in the danger zone he already notices those Epic grade monsters getting controlled by the red spiritual energy. So, the question was that will it also affect thoseary grade monsters?


    Well he will find out about thatter and once again he begins to fight those monsters. One thing he noticed while fighting those monsters was that many monsters beforeing toward the kingdom just died. None of them even get attacked by anyone but still everyone of those monsters fell down on the ground.


    Really he was very surprised after finding out that those monsters did not die automatically. It was the old king, who killed those Monsters. He was now floating above the human Kingdom and then also killing those Monsters that wereing toward the human Kingdom. He observed the whole human Kingdom so that those monsters were not able to enter the human Kingdom and kill those normal people.


    Even you can see the king with his teammates already came to the battlefield and everyone of them also fighting those Monsters. Everyone of them killed as many monsters as they could so that they could finish this trouble as quickly as they could.


    Right now everyone is fighting those monsters that are attacking the human Kingdom. They also use their full power to kill those Monsters. In a situation like this you can say nobody will hold back.


    4 hourster,


    The king already told everyone to hold on for a few hours because after that the red moon will be Vanished  and everything will be over. After hearing that, everyone became very happy.


    Everyone was fighting those monsters for at least 5 to 6 hours continuously. Because of this many of those Warriors are already very exhausted. But still none of them gave up from the fight. Actually not only just exhausted but if you look clearly then you will see many of those Warriors already got seriously injured.


    Fortunately the old king was present here. With his help everyone gets the chance to use potion to recover their health and spiritual energy. But the problem was how long a person could use the potion to recover his full power. These also put a lot of mental pressure and because of this, even if those people recover they won''t be able to fight using their full strength.


    Sam right now is fighting alongside Ayana and many other people that most likely have simr ages as him. Previously fighting those monsters he suddenly noticed them so wasting no time he quickly went toward them. Most likely Aryana got happy after seeing him. Not only Ayana but her teammates also get happy.


    With that, Sam was not fighting alongside Ayana and the others. Everyone of them got injured but fortunately they also got the time to recover their health. Nobody knows how long they will be able to keep this up but then when they heard the word of the old King they became very happy.


    Ayana and the others fight those special grade Monsters while those other Warriors handle those powerful Monsters. Everyone participated in the fight. Even if they did not have that much strength they could still participate in the fight to protect their own kingdom. Fortunately none of the Warriors lost their life in this fight.


    ''Why is he holding back?''


    This is the question that Alex was thinking right now while looking at the old King that was floating in the sky. The old King has the same strength as the old king of the Oni Kingdom. Naturally Sam knows that if he wants he could easily kill many monsters at the same time. Suppose every human fighters right now facing 1 million Monsters. Most likely the old King could easily killed half of those Monsters at once. Because of this, Sam really wanted to know why the old King holding back or did he saving his strength for something.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Well he did not needed to think that much because sometimeter he already get the answer of this question. Suddenly every fighters present their sense many powerful aura. With that everyone be very alert. Everyone of the most likely those Epic grade monsters finally reached their Kingdom and most likely they alsoing to at them.


    Just after realising that everyone be very alert. Now you can say the real fight will begin. Many people already started to panic just after sending the aura. But fortunately they did not given up or stop fighting those Monsters. They also know that even they were scared, win this fight at any condition.


    Actually as everyone predicted sometimeter finally those Epic grade monsters begin to attack. Just aftering into the battlefield those Monster already make many Warriors panic. Fortunately those Warriors also already prepare themselves to face those Monsters.


    At this time Sam still not using that most likely not every Monster came to the battlefield. Those peak Epic grade Monsters still did not came to the battlefield. So old King most likely waiting for them. Until now nobody know if those red spiritual energy could control theary level Monster or not. So, those Epic grade monsters will be strongest one.


    Well those Monsters begin to approach toward the humans. Not only that everyone of them also prepare to attack them but before they could do that something unexpected happened. Many Monster that about to attack those human Warriors suddenly died out of nowhere. Naturally as everyone can predict to as the old king who help them. These also gave those Warriors the time to attack those Monsters first and they did not wasted the time.


    _________________________


    ''Just a little longer,''


    At this time the old king who observing the whole battlefield said that in his mind. When he looking the situation wasn''t good, he was taking action and directly killed many Monsters at the same time. But other than that he just wait it for something or some Monsters.


    As Sam predicted he could easily killed every Monster present here but he just waiting for some other Monsters right now. He wanted to kill those Monsters the moment they will started to came toward the human Kingdom so until then he wanted to save his spiritual energy. He was nning to use his powerful attack that could easily kill every Monster at the same time. What to do that he needed a messive amount of spiritual energy and because of that, he just only helping when the situation be critical.


    While observing the battlefield suddenly he notice something that make him very interested. He was devine to sure that when for the first time he observe the battlefield he did not sense the aura of Sam. But suddenly right now he could sense him. Not only that, he can also see that Sam was powerful. He was fighting peak Elite grade monsters. Not only that fighting those Monsters he also helping his friends. Looking at this old King smile. Who could have thought that he will able to fight those peak Elite grade monsters.


    Remember the word he heard from his friend.


    ''Haha, don''t underestimate that brat. Even if he previously did not able to directly participate in the war, but he somehow help all the Warriors. Not only that I still unable to understand what type of technique he using to hide his aura. In one word I can also feel he is very mysterious.''


    He still remember this word from his friend. Right now he can really see this Sam person was really mysterious. If his friend wasn''t wrong then a few days ago Sam was just a special grade Warrior, but some how he able to level up and then became a peak Elite grade warrior.


    ''Really interesting. After the war I should also try to ask him what did he do beforeing to the battlefield. I am definitely sure that previously he wasn''t present here. With that I thought he escape from this ce but it look like I was wrong.''


    Actually the old king and event the king thought he died or escape from this ce. But most likely everyone of them were wrong.


    To be continued____________

 Chapter 476 477 - Barrier

    ?


    "Boom!!"


    Sam jumped away from his pce and in the next second, he uses Sunray to kill the Bloody rabbit. But it didn''t end there. At the same time, those wind wolves, Fire vipers, and more bloody rabbits attack him at Once. Every one of them attacked him from every direction so that he did not get the chance to run away from the ce.


    But unfortunately for those Monsters, Sam jumped away. But it did not end there. Those wind wolves and fire vipers attack him with win des and fire breath. Fortunately, Sam already realized that and he already created the energy shield around him. Their attack did not do anything to him and as you can see he also did not receive any type of injuries because of those attacks.


    But those monsters just continuously attacked him one by one. Most likely at any condition they wanted to kill him. Unfortunately for those Monsters, even after continuously attacking that energy barrier they are unable to do anything. Sam on the other hand alreadynded on the ground but those monsters are still unable to do anything. At this time Sam did not attack those Monsters nor did he try to do anything. He just stood there and let those monsters attack him.


    Most likely because of this, those monsters were also getting very angry. Even attacking him continuously is unable to do anything. A single scratch mark also did not appear on that energy shield so this was really frustrating for those Monsters.


    On the other hand, even though he could stay like this, Sam did not want to do that. Instantly uses his SunRay that passes through the energy shield. Well, he could control the energy shield, so easily that attacks passed through the energy shield.


    Those Monsters were just frustratingly attacking him. Most likely they did not even predict that he will fight back. Because of this, they are unable to do anything or unable to react on time. With that, he kills those Monsters.


    After deactivating his energy shield he instantly attacks other Monsters with his mega fireballs. Reallypared to the light element the destruction level of the Fire element was greater. With that as you can see that mega fireball instantly created arge distraction that already killed many Monsters. But at the same time fortunately those Warriors did not get injured by that. Well, this was the risk of using his fire element technique, so most of the time he uses the light element technique.


    Also if you are wondering why he did not use that telekinesis technique right now then he wanted to save the technique. This means he did not want anyone to know that he has this type of technique. Well, you should not expose all of your trump cards at once. Because of this, he also did not show all his techniques in front of any Warriors.


    Not only Sam right now as you can see every warrior present there fighting those monsters. They just need to wait a little longer until the red moon does not disappear. But the good thing was that they just needed to fight those Monsters for at least 2 hours. If you look at the time right now then it would already be 3:30 am, so they just need to wait a little longer.


    After killing those monsters Sam begins to advance.  In a war like this nobody could give from which direction he or he will get Attacked by those monsters. You can get attacked from any direction and you could really get seriously injured by that. Because of this, you can say Sam was on full alert. Because he was not using telekinesis or his teleportation technique, he needed to stay more careful than before.


    But at the same time instantly once again everyone suddenly died. The old King once again took action and killed many monsters at the same time. Right now not only the old me but even the king was also killing those Monsters. As aary-grade Warrior, really those monsters are very weakpared to him and because of this, he kills many monsters at the same time.


    Still, it wasn''t enough to kill all the monsters at the same time. You cannot predict how many monsters are present in the danger zone. So if you wanted to kill every Monster at once using your most powerful attack, you will be disappointed. The only way to kill those Monsters at once was to destroy the whole danger zone. But as you know only 30% of the Terraria we can save while the remaining 70% were in the danger zone. With that, you can imagine that even if someone wanted to clear the danger zone, it would be impossible for him to do that.


    _____________________


    It''s already one hour and they just need to wait for one more hour. But then everybody became very alert. They already have many powerful aurasing in that direction. With that everyone can confirm that finally, those powerful Monsters begin to reach their Kingdom. Not only that but instantly every one of those Warriors already saw many attacksing in their direction.


    Those monsters did not even reach their kingdom ore to the battlefield, but they already attacked them. It wasn''t your single or double attack, at this time from every direction you can see those attacks wereing and every one of those attacks was very powerful. Just sensing the Power behind Those attacks, many Warriors already became very pale.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    But even in that situation, they did not stop fighting those Monsters. They believe in their old king and king. Because of this, those people decided to believe them and fight the monsters that are present on the battlefield. The surprising thing was that those monsters present on the battlefield did not even care about those powerful attacksing in their direction. They will also die from those attacks but none of them care about that. Really, those red spiritual energies can make anybody insane.


    On the other hand, the old king has already taken action. Even before those Monsters could attack the human Kingdom he already took action and already created a barrier around the whole Kingdom. Nobody was able to feel that barrier. Even those Monsters were unable to feel the barrier that was already created around the whole Kingdom.


    Right now nobody will be able to go outside of the battlefield ore into the battlefield from outside. In the next again those powerful attacks already came very close to the battlefield and just when everyone thought they would get hit by those attacks, a miracle happened. At that time everyone so that somehow those attacks did not reach them.


    Instantly all of them looked at the outside area and saw that those attacks most likely hit something invisible and because of this, it was unable to enter the battlefield. Only then everyone realized that it was most likely a barrier that was already created around the battlefield and because of that those attacks were not able to reach the battlefield.


    Even the king was very surprised after realizing the barrier. He already knows that his father will take action because the situation will be very critical if he did not take action at that time. But fortunately, he already took action and already created a barrier that nobody even felt. With that none of those attacks entered the battlefield and everyone could see how powerful the barrier was.


    Every one of those attacks shed against that barrier, but it did not receive any type of damage or it did not have a crack mark on it.


    Normally if those Monsters were able to think they would already be very alert right now. But unfortunately, because of the Red spiritual energy, they did not feel anything. Not only that, but every one of those Monsters also became very angry and began to increase the power of their attacks. As you know that because of the Red spiritual energy, their power most likely increases, not only that most likely they would also receive a massive boost in their spiritual energy.


    Because of this, even though they used arge amount of spiritual energy they still did not be exhausted. Some of those Monsters already increase the power behind their attack and some of those Monsters already reach very close to the barrier. Now they begin to use their spiritual attack to attack the barrier.


    At any condition, every one of those monsters wanted to break that barrier but unfortunately, none of them were able to do that.


    After realizing that those Monsters from outside were unable to enter the battlefield became very excited and wasted no time, they focus on those Monsters that are already present inside the battlefield. Not only that, because right now none of the monsters were able toe inside the battlefield it became easier for those Warriors.


    Right now those Monsters numbers won''t be increasing rapidly so they could easily kill them and decrease the number of those Monsters. It makes them more excited and they waste no time using their full power to kill those Monsters.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 477 478 - Tornadoes

    ?


    Because of that barrier that protects the whole battlefield from the other Monsters that wanted toe inside the battlefield, the number of those Monsters present on the battlefield already decrease and this instantly makes every Warrior very excited. This really gives every Warriors upper hand and because of this, they increase their attack on the Monsters because of this already 60% of the Monsters present on the battlefield died.


    Now those other Warriors are also helping each other and with that now those Warriors have The upper hand. With that, the situation right now became critical for those monsters present on the battlefield. Previously it was those Warriors who were in a pretty bad condition. Fortunately, because of the help of the king and all the King, none of them died and also got the time to recover their energy.


    On the other hand,


    The human King is already preparing for a final attack. Because of this, he was also floating in the sky and already went outside of the battlefield. He was now looking at those Monsters, who were outside of the battlefield. Every one of them was attacking that barrier and trying to break that but unfortunately, none of them are able to do that.


    At this time the king tries to sense if anyary-grade Monsters were present there or not. Surprisingly he did not find any of those monsters so it became quite easy for him to kill those Epic grade monsters. He told his father to leave them monsters and instantly went to those Monsters.


    He instantly came in front of those Monsters. Those Monsters also saw him but none of them feared him or became scared. On the other hand, after looking at him they became angry, and most likely they were also ready to attack him. But the king did not give them the chance and already attacked those Monsters before they could attack him.


    Instantly many tornadoes appear in that ce. Not just one tornado but many tornadoes appeared in that ce and they went in a different direction. Even those Warriors present on the battlefield could feel the power of the tornadoes. Every one of those tornadoes released the power of peak Epic grade. Well if he did not create those many tornadoes then he could at least create tornadoes that reach the power level ofary grade. But since he decided to create those many tornadoes the power level has already decreased.


    But in a situation like this, this was enough. If you look at those monsters then many of them try to counterattack the tornado but unfortunately are unable to do that. Because of the sudden full force of the tornado, many Monsters already got pulled into the tornadoes. Also, every one of the tornadoes created by many win des and every one of those win des begins to attack those Monsters continuously.


    Even if those Monsters have tough bodies, they could also make their defenses stronger. But how long will they be able to defend themselves because those win des just keep attacking them without stopping? On the other hand, the human King maintained every one of those tornadoes and because of this, the power level of those tornadoes did not decrease.


    Fortunately, he had spiritual energy recovery potions with him, and using them he was able to maintain the tornadoes. Like this many of those Monsters already died and the tornadoes already began to advance. The good thing was that none of those Monsters became scared or tried to escape from the ce. Because of this, it bes very easier for every one of the tornadoes to pull those Monsters toward them.


    One by one many monsters already got put into the tornadoes and every one of those Monsters got sliced into many different parts by those air des. Actually, those peak Epic grade monsters put up some fights but even with that it became very difficult for them to escape from the tornado and those wind des. As you know, those des just continuously attacked them without stopping and because of this it also became very difficult for them to escape.


    Even though those monsters were trying to counterattack and try to get away from the tornado, still none of them were able to do that and in the end, they also got pulled by the tornado. Also, one more thing was that nobody was able to make those tornadoes disappear until the king did not stop supplying Spiritual energy to his technique.


    At this time the human King focuses on killing those Monsters while the old King also focuses on maintaining the barrier around the battlefield. Every Warrior present inside the battlefield already saw the condition of those Monsters who were outside of the battlefield. Every one of them rxed a little the moment tornadoes and also saw the king taking action against those Monsters.


    With that, every one of those Warriors only focused on the monster present on the battlefield. Right nowpared to the number of those Monsters you can say the number of those Warriors is already greater and because of this, every one of those Monsters was in a very bad position. But because of the red spiritual energy, none of those monsters showed any fear or something like that.


    Every one of those Monsters now became very furious after realizing their situation and they also attacked everyone furiously. Even with that, they won''t be able to win against those Warriors. As you know, those who are Warriors right now help each other, and with that, their fighting power also increases and they can easily fight those powerful Monsters.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Sometimeter, they already killed at least the remaining 20%, and only 10% of those monsters remained on the battlefield. It will only take some time to kill all of those monsters and with that everyone will be rxed.


    Sam and many other Warriors right now fight those monsters at the same time while helping each other. Ayana and her friends are also fighting alongside Sam. Not only that, the president of their Guild and also the vice president fought alongside each other and every one of them already killed many Monsters at once.


    Right now Sam was using his sword to kill those Monsters. You can really say the origin of spiritual energy is useful against Monsters. He was feeling that he did not kill anyone, he just swung his sword in the air. He felt nothing while killing those Monsters. Sam was feeling like he was cutting butter with his sword.


    Like this you can say 45 minutester if you look at the situation on the battlefield then you already saw none of those Monsters were alive inside the battlefield. They already killed all the Monsters and with that right now those Warriors already sit down on the battlefield. In any condition, they need to recover from their mental exhaustion or they won''t be able to do anything in this condition.


    Really using spiritual recovery potions or health potions, puts so much pressure on his mind, and because of this everyone suffers from a mental headache. But fortunately, they could rest for some time, and with that most likely those headaches will be gone.


    Sam also did not wear any more time and justy down on the battlefield. Ayana and the others also sit down beside him. They also wanted to rest but before anything, they needed to make sure that everything was over. Only after that everyone would be resting. Also because of these none of them went back to the human Kingdom.


    _______________________


    You can say those tornadoes are Really effective against those Monsters. Every one of those Monsters who Previously got pretty close to the barrier, already got killed by those tornadoes, and not only that but every one of those tornadoes is also advancing.


    It even pulled those Monsters toward him. Right now many Monsters are stilling in that direction but fortunately, because of those tornadoes none of those Monsters were able to escape from that and with that, every one of them got pulled into those tornadoes.


    Previously the color of the tornadoes was white but right now if you look at the tornadoes then you will notice that the color of the tornadoes has already turned blue. Everything happened because of the blood of those Monsters. Not only just blue but you can also see the red color present in the tornadoes.


    Even though the Warrior inside the battlefield rxed after killing all the Monsters, the king did not rx. He is using his full strength to maintain all the tornadoes right now. Even though those tornadoes already killed many Monsters, he still did not rx, and also if you look at those tornadoes then you will not feel any decrease in power. So he was maintaining those tornadoes in top condition.


    Many people present on the battlefield were very surprised because most likely for them this was the first time they realized how powerful their king was. Most likely if those people decided to fight those monsters then it could be very difficult for them. They did not believe that they would be able to win this war if the king wasn''t present there. Not only The King, but they also really did not expect their old king to be this much powerful.


    To be continued________


    [A/N:- Guys, join me on Telegram:- https://t.me/+pgSZnSrv9xRiZTI1 ]

 Chapter 478 479 - Finally,

    ?


    Finally, everything was over. Everybody Can See The Sun in the sky and because of this, every one of those Monsters who previously got insane because of the red spiritual energy, already recovered and they also escape into the danger zone after sensing the aura of the old king.


    The old King also did not pursue those Monsters and let them escape into the danger zone. Right now, they need to ensure the safety of the kingdom and also need to check everybody present in the kingdom.


    The king also sighs in relief. Finally, everything was over. Fortunately, his father was present there. Without his father mostly their Kingdom would have lost many human Warriors in that war. If the old king did not make that barrier at the time most likely many Warriors would be dead right now. Even though the king was aary grade warrior, he also did not have full confidence that he would be able to protect everyone on the battlefield.


    At this time the medical team has already begun to take action and one by one they begin to heal every injured warrior present on the battlefield. Well, you can say that the medical team was also present from the beginning but fortunately, they did not participate in the fight. Because of these they were in top condition and with that they handled those injured Warriors.


    Well, you should also know that consuming those potions Was safe but it also has a limit. If anyone crosses that limit then his body will immediately get affected by the side effect. Because of this, every one of those people present on the medical team begins to use their healing power to heal those Warriors. With that none of those warriors will receive any type of side effect and it will also heal their mental exhaustion.


    At this time even though the king was very exhausted like those other Warriors, everything he needed to stay strong. With that as you can see he checks every warrior present on the battlefield. He needs to make sure that everyone is okay, only then he will rx. Actually, not only him but those other people from the council also begin to check everybody.


    While checking those people the human King came to a ce where he saw some people and one of them was very special. That person was the noble guest of the Oni Kingdom. He quickly went in the direction to make sure that he was okay. Aftering in front of him the king saw that he was justying down on the ground while recovering his spiritual energy and also trying to recover from that headache.


    As you can tell, it was Sam who was nowying down in that ce. His eyes were closed but still he was awake. You can tell that someone was observing him but he did not mind that person. Most likely that person checking his condition. Actually, Sam wasn''t even in the position to check who this person was. In this war, you can say he uses those potions too much and because of this, he was not mentally suffering from the headache.


    So before anything he wanted to recover from that headache and only then he would think about other things. If you were wondering why he wasying down in that ce like this. It could be dangerous because what if those Monsters once again decided toe back and attack him? Well actually he has full confidence in the human king and because of this, he wasying down in that ce like this.


    Ayana and her teammate already saw the king and they tried to salute him. But the king instantly told them to rx and rest. He could already see every one of them quite injured so he told them to rest. The medical team will be here in a minute, so until then they should rest.


    "Sir, actually he is awake. But he told me that he had an unbearable headache. Because of this, he is not trying to recover from that headache."


    Well, Ayana said that to the king when he asked about Sam''s condition. Only then did the king understand most likely Sam was suffering from the same thing that many other Warriors were also facing. Actually, this is most likely the first time Sam directly participates in a world like this, and also while fighting those many monsters continuously, he uses those recovery potions very much.


    Because of this, he was feeling that headache. On the other hand, the king after hearing that nodded and told him they don''t need to worry because the medical team will be there. After saying that he left that ce. Nothing happened to them. So he can rx.


    Around 1 hourter, Sam finally decided to get up from the ground. Some time ago those medical teams already came and began to use their healing spell. That healing spell is also very useful against this type of headache. Really when they use that healing spell, Sam really feelsfortable in his head. Sometimeter, the medical team leads that ce but really they help every one of them very much.


    Because of this, after 1 hour Sam finally recovered from that painful headache and got up from the ground. After getting up from the ground he first observed the whole surrounding area. Fortunately because of the medical team right now many Warriors already recovered and they also already went inside the kingdom.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The king also already went back to the pce because he was fully exhausted right now. Fortunately, not everyone left that ce, and those people are now watching over the battlefield right now. They were in charge of the security of that ce while every one of those medical teams and those other Warriors did not go back to the human Kingdom.


    You can say many of those Warriors already became unconscious and many of them already seriously injured. So it wasn''t easy for that medical team to heal all of them in a short time. This was the reason that they still did not go inside the kingdom.


    ______________________


    Sam with his friends also came back to the human Kingdom and he directly went back to his room. After freshening up, he finallyy down on the bed and already fell asleep. Right now in any condition, he needs to recover from this mental exhaustion and also after that, he will visit the Royal Pce while bringing that abyss human.


    Actually, he already talked with the human king and told him that he had something important to say and also he wanted to show them something. The human King became quite curious so he told him after recovering from his injuries and mental exhaustion he could visit the Royal pce.


    Naturally, Sam did not have any problem with that so you also decided to visit the Royal pce after recovering from mental exhaustion. He didn''t even get to know when he fell asleep. Around 4:00 p.m. he finally woke up from his leave. After freshening up himself with cold water, he finally begins to check that unconscious Abyss human.


    Originally that person still did not wake up from his unconscious state. Well, Sam already knows this will happen. Here to make sure that this person stays like this until he does not finish the war. Because of this, he gives that person a potion that will make him unconscious for at least 15 hours.


    Before anything, he eats something and only then he takes that person and leaves his room. Now as the king and most likely some of the people know about his real identity he did not have to worry about visiting the Royal pce. But fortunately, those people did not say it to anyone.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, Sam right now is going to the Royal Pce. This time he took a car to go to that ce. As you know he has abyss humans with him so he did not want to go to the Royal pce by walking while carrying that man.


    The guards present in the Royal pce already got informed by the king so they also did not stop him. With that Sam easily entered the Royal pce and right now he began to wait for the king toe here.


    Like this, after waiting for at least 10 minutes he could see the kinge down. Not only the king but at this time he could also see the old king and also other Warriors who were the members of the council. So every one of those people also entered the Royal pce and at this time the king also came down from the first floor to the ground floor. The moment every one of them came to that ce they suddenly noticed that something or someone was beside Sam.  Every one of those people bes very alert the moment they notice that person.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 479 480 - Explanation

    ?


    "Who is this person? Is he an abyss human?"


    Instantly, one council member asked Sam.


    " I also don''t know who this is. But, yea, he is an abyss human. Yesterday when I was in the danger zone and fighting those Monsters while trying to leave the danger zone as quickly as possible, I met this person. He wasn''t alone there. With him, I saw many other abyss humans.


    Well, at that time I and those other human fighters were trying to get away from the danger zone, but suddenly I noticed those people. Even though it was quite dangerous for me, I still decided to observe those people and with that, I found out, those people were trying to control the monster using their dark spiritual energy.


    Well, at the time every one of those monsters became very insane and it also became quite difficult for those abyss humans to control those monsters. Most likely because of the red moon the dark spiritual energy wasn''t that affecting the Monsters.


    At the time while fighting those Monsters, all of those abyss humans got killed, in the end, he was just about to use the teleportation technique to get away from that ce. I instantly attacked him and most likely because he was already injured because of those Monsters, he was unable to protect himself and with that, I was able to capture him.


    But at that time you can say they are already able to control two Monsters and those Monsters are also fighting those other Monsters while it gives this person the time to create that teleportation symbol and also get the time to use the teleportation symbol. Fortunately, fighting those Monsters continuously, all of them got very injured and I was able to capture him and also kill those Monsters. "


    Sam quickly exins how he found this person and at the same time, he quickly brings out the dead body of those two Monsters. Well, he did not consume or sell the dead body of those two Monsters. So he bring out the dead body and told them that these were the Monsters that finally got controlled by them.


    "What?????"


    It was a shocking matter for everyone that every one of them got very shocked the moment they hear that those Abyss humans trying to control those insane Monsters that got controlled by the red spiritual energy. Every one of them who previously had a happy expression already became very serious. This is really a very serious matter because those Abyss humans involve in this matter and as you know that a few days ago the human Kingdom got Attacked by those Monsters.


    "Sam, did you find anything other than that? I mean did you see anyone other than that present in that ce?"


    Suddenly the king asked Sam this question.


    "I don''t think so I saw anyone other than those abyss humans. Most likely they also came to the danger zone using the teleportation technique and because of this, they just suddenly appear in that ce. The moment they appear in that ce unfortunately they begin to receive attacks from those Monsters continuously. With that, it bes a very dangerous situation for everyone and they are unable to survive.


    So after capturing that person and also taking these two dead bodies I quickly escape from that ce. Fortunately, somehow I was able to get away from that ce, and with that, I directly came to my house to put that person in my house and only then did I join the war. Also don''t worry I already give him a potion that will make him unconscious until I did not give him the antidote so he also did not do anything."


    Sam told him that.


    After hearing that everyone most likely thinks something. Even the king also thinking about the reason behind this. Sam timeter quickly order a person to take that person to the interrogation room and also told Sam if he had the antidote. Naturally, Sam gives him the antidote in the end and with that guard takes that person to the interrogation room.


    "Everyone I think most likely those abyss humans trying to do something after controlling the Monsters. As you know that some time ago they attack the Oni Kingdom while controlling Monster inside the danger zone. Most likely they also nned something like that once again and because of this, they trying to control those monsters who had the red spiritual energy in them. Fortunately, Sam was able to discover that or would be unable to get any information about this.


    Really Sam I don''t know how should I express my gratitude. As you know that our human Warriors sometime ago fight those abyss humans and because of those Traitors they could almost lose their life. I did not want that to happen once again. Really thank you so much. We just right now needed to get information out of that person and with that we were able to know the n."<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    The human king said that to Sam. Actually, not only him but everyone present in the room also begins to say thank you to him. Most likely they would not be able to know about this information if Sam wasn''t present in that ce.


    " Haha¡­ no problem sir. I am happy to help."


    Sam said that.


    "Oh.. Sam actually I wanted to ask you a question. Did you know someone or did you see someone present in the danger zone who could use the teleportation technique?"


    Suddenly the king asked him this question. The moment Sam here that question he began to think why he asking him this question but outside he maintained his calm look.


    "Unfortunately I did not meet anyone like that in the danger zone. But one thing was that fortunately, that person was present there and with his help I was able toe to the human Kingdom. While fighting those Monsters I already reach very close to the outside area of the danger zone but then while carrying that abyss human it became really tough for me to advance more further.


    Fortunately, at the time out of nowhere, I finished from that ce and directly came inside the human Kingdom."


    Sam said that to him. Actually, if it wasn''t that he was able to control his emotion most likely everyone could already tell him that he was lying. Because he could already control his emotion and also told everything with a serious tone while maintaining his calm, nobody suspect that he was telling him a lie.


    "Hmm¡­ sigh, you also did not see that person. Really who was this person that helped our Warrior to get away from the danger zone? If it is possible I really wanted to find this person because we we needed to reward him for helping all the human Warriors. Every year we lose many people inside the danger zone because they were unable toe back.


    As you can see because of the red spiritual energy every one of those Monster be insane and at that time they just continuously attack any Warrior until they did not kill that person. So even if any strong Warrior try to get from that ce but because of the number of those monsters, they would get seriously injured and they died because of this. At that time we were also unable to help them because we need to protect our Kingdom and we were also unable to create a team who will go to the danger zone to rescue those Warriors.


    Fortunately because of the help of that person none of our warriors died inside the danger zone, also in the end we were able to survive and did not lose anyone in this war against those insane Monsters."


    The king exins how they every year lost the Warriors in the danger zone. Because those people are unable to escape from the danger zone when suddenly a red moon appears in the sky. Naturally, it could be very hard for everyone to get away from that ce when those inside Monster will attack you continuously, and even using your full strain those Monsters did not get scared or alert. At that time they just only wanted to attack the human or any living and wanted to kill them.


    "Still if you were able to remember any details, please tell us. It will be a help to find that Warrior who previously help us. Nowe back to our present matter, don''t worry me and my team will try to investigate that Abyss human. With that, I am sure that we will get to know the full n of those Abyss humans.


    I just stop that those Monsters did not n to attack our Kingdom once again. I want everyone to take it carefully and became very alert about those Abyss humans. Also, try to not inform every warrior. Because it could also make many people panic."


    The king already told everyone to increase security and also everyone should stay careful. At the same time, he also told everyone not to directly tell other Warriors about Abyss humans. But they still shoot contact everyone and told everyone that they should be careful in the danger zone or it could be really dangerous for them.


    To be continued________________

 Chapter 480 481 - Telling The Old King.

    ?


    Sometimeter,


    Sam left the royal pce. Well after exining everything to everyone he did not want to stay in the royal pce for that long so after that he left the Royal pce. Even though the king told him that he should stay there for dinner, Sam politely refused. After 25 minutes he finally reached his home or you can say hotel room.


    ''I should stay here for a few days. Before anything I need it to make sure that those abyss humans didn''t target the human Kingdom. Even though nobody told me to do that, I still wanted to do that. So I should stay here for a few more days and only then will I leave this Kingdom.''


    While going toward his room he thought about this. You can say that he could leave this Kingdom anytime but after facing this type of situation he did not want to leave that early. Red moon, Abyss humans, those monsters, etc, everything was very confusing for him right now.


    One thing he previously did not say to the king was that he also already read the memory of an abyss human. You already know the whole n of those Abyss humans. This was also a big reason that he did not leave the Kingdom right now and decided to stay here for a few more days.


    But unfortunately, those previous abyss humans did not know anything about this n. They just only know that they needed to capture a monster using their dark spiritual energy but in the end, as you know every one of them got killed. Only the leader of that group knows about the true n. Actually, their elder wanted those Monsters to experiment with something and with that, he also wanted to make something that will easily spread disease or something like that in the human Kingdom.


    Those Monsters contain dark spiritual energy as well as red spiritual energy so their body will be very important in this experiment. These two spiritual energies will make a deadlybination. Unfortunately, the elder did not tell him the whole n. He just only told him that while they bring those monsters they will immediately start their investigation.


    But at this time the elder said that the spiritual energy present in those monsters will be very important in this mission and most likely he was making something using those two spiritual energies. Because of this, the elder needed to do some experiments on those Monsters who got insane by the red spiritual energy and at the same time got controlled by the dark spiritual energy.


    But the most important thing was that those people nned to attack the human Kingdom once again. Most likely after facing the previous defeat, all of them decided to wait for some time.


    This was the true reason that Sam decided to stay in the human Kingdom. Most likely sometimeter the king will also get to know about that and he will also tell everyone about this.


    ''Why are they trying to sacrifice the lives of those living beings for their god? The old King already previously told me that only recently they became active. After 10 years ago a battle broke out between the alliance force and those abyss humans. After that everything became silent and those Abyss humans did not be that much active.


    Then the main question was why they became this much active recently. Did they find something? Sigh, unfortunately, to get to know about this I need to read the mind of those elders or something like that. This simple group captain or those soldiers did not know anything about this. They were just following the order.''


    Sam was very confused about the true motive of those people. Most likely the old king of the Oni Kingdom knew about this. Well, naturally this was possible because Sam didn''t know anything about this. Naturally, previously he did not get the chance to interrogate the person that the Old King captured after the war.


    While thinking about all of this, he came back to his room. After freshening up he decided to rest for some time.


    _________________________


    "Father, we really did not expect that even in a situation like this those Abyss humans wille to the danger zone to capture those Monsters. I am sure that those people are nning something and most likely they are nning to use that against our Kingdom. I don''t think they require those Monsters for good use. Most likely they needed those Monsters who contain the red spiritual energy and also at the same time the dark spiritual energy to do experiments."


    Previously in the hall room, the old King wasn''t present. So, naturally, the king quickly went to his room and then exined everything to him. The old king who previously meditated instantly opened his eyes and he became very serious right now. Really just after hearing the news of those Abyss humans, anybody will get serious.<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Everyone still remembers the previous war with those Abyss humans. Nobody wanted like this and because of this, they wanted to prevent those Abyss humans from achieving their goal.


    "So Sam finds him in the danger zone. Hmm¡­ don''t waste time. We needed to get all the information from that person. Unfortunately because of those Monsters previously I was unable to observe the whole danger zone or I would have been aware of their presence."


    The old king said that and then both of them instantly started going toward the interrogation room. At that time the Crown Prince also came toward them and asked them what happened. Naturally, the king did not hide anything and told everything to him. So after hearing all of these the Crown Prince also gets serious and with his father and grandfather, he also begins to go toward the interrogation room.


    They could see Abyss'' humanying down in the interrogation room. Well, they still did not use the antidote so that person was still unconscious and you will not wake up until they did not use the antidote.


    But, the old King did not need him to wake up. He could read his whole memory while that person was unconscious. So wasting no time the old King ced him on the head of that abyss human. After that, you can see his hand begin to glow and instantly all the information that was stored inside the head of that Abyss human came to his mind.


    All this time the king and the Crown Prince did not say anything and just stood there silently. This time they didn''t want to disturb him. So both of them just silently stand there. Also other than three of the nobody present inside the interrogation room. As you know some time ago they just captured some Traitors of the human Kingdom. But still, they did not be sure that they did not have more Traitors among them. So, they did not inform anyone about the interrogation.


    Both the king and the Crown Prince looked at the old king with their serious gaze. One thing was clear: the old King already read all the memories that he got of that abyss human. But looking at his serious face anybody could tell most likely he got to know some terrible news. This also made both of them very serious because they also wanted to know what this terrible news was.


    For some time the old king stayed like this. But after that, he came back to his senses and only then he looked toward the king and the crown Prince. The worker did not even waste a single second and then began to exin everything that he was able to get to know from that abyss human.


    It takes almost 30 to 40 minutes to exin all of these in detail. And also after hearing all the details naturally, you can see the prince and the king have a terrible expression on their face. Both of them knew that this was a really terrible situation for the human Kingdom. The Crown Prince started to panic for some time but the Old King instantly stabilized his condition.


    "This wasn''t the right time to get unconscious or start panicking about it. Right now, we need to stay calm and think about what to do right now. If those people really attacked our Kingdom then we will face a rted situation."


    Only after hearing that the Crown Prince calmed down and the king also just sighed. Both of them also knew that this wasn''t the time to panic. In a condition like this, they need to stay strong and think of a n that will be able to protect them from those Abyss humans.


    "We should also inform this to other Warriors. So they also started preparing for this war. Even if this news gets out, that will not affect our soldiers or those abyss humans."


    " I am also thinking the same thing. With just 3 of us, we won''t be able to protect our whole Kingdom. Naturally, we need help and also need to create a powerful Warrior group. Only then we could counterattack those abyss humans."


    Both the king and the old King agree on this. The Crown Prince also did not have any satisfaction after hearing this agreement.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 481 482 - Call From King

    ?


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (59990/59990)


    Spiritual energy: (59990/59990)


    Strength: 5999


    Agility: 5899 + 100


    Physique: 5899 + 100


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 5899 + 100


    Spirit: 5899 + 1010


    Status points:- 459505 - 500 - 459005


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (peak) / (Peak SSS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 chance)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (A-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (C-grade) (+)<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Energy shield (C-grade) (+)


    Teleportation (B-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Don''t think you are invincible. You just gain some strength to protect yourself from danger. But you are still a weakling.] "


    As you can tell he was unable to break through because he was unable to find the limit breaker. Even though he already had a limit breaker, he wasn''t sure if he would be able to break through just using that one limit breaker.


    Also using his superior upgrade he already upgraded that limit breaker to a legendary limit breaker. Even though he wanted to upgrade the limit breaker further than this, unfortunately, he won''t be able to do that because he could only upgrade one thing only one time. This means he could upgrade anything for one time.


    With that, you can guess that he still wasn''t able to discover if he was able to upgrade a legendary limit breaker or not. Until now he did not receive any type of legendary limit breaker from the danger zone nor was he able to find that inside his system shop. Even if he gets a limit breaker they would be at Elite grade or Epic grade.


    Actually, if he used just only Epic grade limit breaker, then he would have needed 5 of them to break through. Other than if he used a legendary limit breaker then he would have at least needed one legendary limit breaker and one Epic limit breaker.


    On the other hand, as you can see using all the upgrade points he upgraded his concealment technique and teleportation technique. Unfortunately upgrading both of these techniques required all the upgrade points he had.


    Sam just came back from the Royal pce and aftering back to his room he decided to upgrade both of his techniques. Not only that he also upgraded the grade of that limit breaker. Actually, this legendary limit breaker was very powerful but still, he needed one more Epic limit breaker. Only then will he be able to safely break through without any problem?


    Right now to break through he would need to break tenyers of the current grade. Just imagine breaking those stillyers will be very hard and because of this he needed that much limit breaker. Most likely after bing an Epic grade, thoseyers will also increase.


    Nowing back to the main matter, only using the legendary limit breaker he could easily break through to 7 to 8yers, but he won''t be able to break thest 2yers and that could be risky for him if he did not instantly break through those twoyers. This could also cause a side effect and with that, he could also lose all of his power.


    Well, many times this type of situation happens and because of this breaking through was a really hard matter for anyone. Nobody tries to break through until they do not prepare themselves fully to break through. Even the saints of Eden Blue previously did not try to break through because of this matter.


    Well, he just sighed and then began to look at his inventory. As usual, he also gets many unnecessary things aftering back from the danger zone. So wasting no time he got into selling every one of those things in his system shop. Well he could have sold those in the warrior association but right now he doesn''t need money so he decided to sell all of them in the system shop.


    With that, he also already had 5k gold coins after selling all of those loot. Right now in total, he had 30k gold coins. He did not n to use those gold coins currently. As you know that he doesn''t require any technique right now so he decided to save those gold coins for future use. Also, he was nning to use those gold coins when he was able to go back to Eden Blue.


    __________________________


    For the rest of the day, he did not do anything and just rested in his room. He didn''t even roam around the city. Right now,  because he was too tired. Using the teleportation technique and also the telekinesis technique at the same time really put heavy mental pressure on his brain. Fortunately, he was used to that type of pain and because of this, he was still able to fight those monsters despite having that much headache.


    Currently not only Sam but most of the Warriors decided to rest for the day. So with thatpared to any other day you can see fewer people present inside the human Kingdom right now.


    Next day,


    After working in the morning, he decided to do some exercise. After finishing his exercise he decided to freshen up and then eat something. Yesterday he did not eat anything, so he was very hungry right now.


    Aftering out of the hotel room he decided to go to the cafeteria and with that, he began to eat food inside the cafeteria. While eating his food suddenly themunication device begins to ring. Thismunication device of the Terraria has the same shape as a mobile phone butpared to them thesemunication devices were more advanced.  Fortunately, they also call this a mobile phone.


    After looking at the number he already recognized that person because yesterday he just saved that number in his phone. It was the human king who called him. This really makes him very speechless but wasting no time he quickly picks up the phone to know what happened and why the king contacted him like this.


    "Hello, Sam, you must be wondering why I called you this early. Actually, I wanted to tell you that today I held a special meeting and with that I also want you to join that meeting."


    "Hmm¡­ no problem sir. I am free today so I will join that meeting."


    "OK¡­ good. Around 5:00 p.m. I will start the meeting so before 5:00 p.m. you shoulde to the Royal Pce. Okay goodbye. "


    " No problem. Also, goodbye."


    Surprisingly the human King did not waste any time and then began to tell him why he called him. Well actually after getting the previous day''s information, he decided to arrange this meeting where he will call all the important warriors of the human Kingdom. Yesterday half of those people were present in the Royal pce when Sam brought that abyss human. Those people are really interested to know what type of information the human being gets from that person. The remaining people were quite curious to know why the king suddenly arranged this meeting.


    Naturally, nobody will miss this meeting because the king personally  called them and told them to attend the meeting. Also, one more thing everyone could tell was that the king was serious about this meeting so naturally this made everyone very curious to know the whole truth.


    Well around that time Sam did not have anything to do, so naturally agreed to join that meeting. With that, he once again focused on eating his food. While eating his food he was also thinking why did the King arrange this meeting. Most likely he was already able to know the whole information from that Abyss human. So naturally he will also try to beat those other Warriors. But Sam just hoped that no traitors were also present in that ce. It doesn''t want this situation like that previous incident happened with the human Warriors.


    Fortunately, he could trust his instincts. While thinking all of this he also notices the people roaming outside the restaurant. Some of them were also worried while some of them were normal people.


    Even though two days ago around night everyone was very scared because of the red moon but right now they have already returned to their normal life. Really those people have no idea about the Abyss humans. Also because of this, they were tension free. He wish he could also be that carefree.


    To be continued_____________

 Chapter 482 483 - Meeting

    ?


    "Yes, I don''t know if they are targeting your kingdom or not, but those people nning something."


    "... "


    "Hmm.. yes, it was Sam who found those abyss humans. He was also present at that time when the red moon appeared. At that time he suddenly found those people who were trying to use the dark spiritual energy to control those Monsters. Most likely the red spiritual energy could counterattack the dark spiritual energy.


    Because of this in the end they were only able to control two monsters. Sam also captured those monsters and also captured the captain of those abyss humans. Well, he was unable to capture those other soldiers because every one of them died by the attack of those Monsters."


    ".... "


    " Hmm¡­ all this information my father got from that captain of the abyss humans. But as you can tell he also did not know that much about the n. Only those elders or the leader of the Abyss humans and Abyss would most likely know about the true n.


    But I can confirm that if those people I will be sessful in that experiment then it could be dangerous for our Kingdom. I hope you stay careful and also most likely those people will attack our Kingdom. I needed your help in that word."


    ".... "


    " Hmm¡­ don''t worry. I will increase the security of the kingdom. I am already nning to create a search team and send that to the danger zone. Those people will try to observe the danger zone for a few days."


    Currently, the human king and the Oni king are talking with each other. The human King tells the Oni king what happened in their Kingdom and what type of information they also get from that Abyss human. Naturally, Abyss humans mean danger and anybody will be serious the moment they hear the name Abyss humans.


    Even though the Oni Kingdom didn''t face a simr situation to the human Kingdom after the war, as you know they were still very alert about those people. The Oni king already takes serious action against those abyss humans. Not only that, but he also created a mission rted to finding clues about those abyss people inside the danger zone.


    You have to say that with that many Warriors begin to take that type of mission and even though they did not find anything or any clue, those people still receive some type of reward and because of this, those types of missions already be famous in the warrior world.


    But at the same time, the Oni King naturally warns everyone even if they find any clue they shouldn''t fight those Abyss humans. It could be very risky for them so even if they found any clue about them they should immediately escape from that ce. That was a clear warning that he gave every warrior present in the Oni Kingdom.


    Now naturally after hearing information like this, the Oni king will be very serious. The human King told him that they also did not have a clear idea about the n of those abyss humans. But the old king was sure that those people were most likely nning something that could create mass destruction in the human Kingdom.


    So right now before anything they need to find out about the n of those abyss humans. Because of these he also agreed to help the human Kingdom in this type of serious situation.


    You also know thatpared to the Oni kingdom, the human king did not have that much Epic grade Warriors. Naturally, if a war between the human Kingdom and those Abyss humans broke out, then the human Kingdom will lose many people in that fight. So as a friend, the Oni Kingdom also decided to help him.


    On the other hand,


    The human King also became happy when he heard that the Oni Kingdom would help them. Really if they did not receive help from the Oni Kingdom, then if the war broke out, they would face a critical situation.


    The human King hung up the call. Sometimeter every one of those important warriors of the human Kingdom wille to the Royal pce. He also needed to discuss this matter with those people. They should also know what type of information they got from that abyss human.


    Sometimeter,<novelsnext></novelsnext>


    Finally, one by one every one of those Warriors came to the Royal pce. The king was already waiting for those people in the hall room. It also takes some time and only then you can see all the important warriors of the human Kingdom present in that room. Before telling everyone the true reason, he began to observe every one of those people present in this Royal pce.


    "Naturally, most of you are very confused because of this sudden meeting. But as you know, some time ago we were able to capture an abyss human. So we already get all the information from that abyss human¡­"


    The king finally begins to tell every one of those people about all the information that they got from that Abyss human. All this time, all the Warriors listened to all those exnations seriously. Sam was present there and he also listened to all the exnations from the king.


    Naturally, it takes them some time to hear all the exnations and also digest all the new information that they got from the king. None of those warriors were smiling right now. All of them became very serious. Immediately they quickly told the king that they wanted to go to the danger zone to search around the whole danger zone.


    Fortunately, the king told them to wait. At this time he also told everyone about his n. Actually, he wanted to create a team that will only focus on observing the full Danger zone.


    "At any condition, we need to find any clue rted to those abyss humans. But everyone, you should remember to never fight those people if you are alone. As you know how dangerous the dark spiritual energy was and those abyss humans. So I don''t want any of you to fight those people if you are alone in the danger zone.


    After going back to your guild you should also try to one everyone. But don''t tell them about that abyss human. As you know, just hearing the name can make anyone very serious or scared. So because of this I did not want those people to be scared or after finding abyss humans do something stupid that could also kill them."


    Naturally, after hearing his n, those people be surprised, but in the end, agree with him. But really at this time, they should try to spread the news to every person living inside the human Kingdom that if anyone notices any type of suspicious activity in the forest they should immediately leave that ce and contact them.


    So like this for some time everyone begins to discuss many different types of ns. All this time nobody noticed that the old King was also present in the room but he did not appear in front of those people. From the first, he just observed those people. As you know, the king still was not sure if all the traitors of the human Kingdom were captured or not, so before starting the meeting he already told the old King to watch over everyone when they came to the meeting room.


    So from the first the working watching about those Warriors. All this time only one person became aware of his presence. Naturally, that was Sam. Well as you know he uses the superior Concealment technique, sopared to his technique that the old king was using that much more powerful. Because of this Sam could easily sense the location of the old king.


    Even though this made me very curious to know what the motive of the old king was, he did not say anything and just silently stayed there. Suddenly at this time, the human king called his name.


    At first, he did not react but then he instantly responded. Actually, the king also asked for his opinion on this matter. In that meeting room, you can say most of the people already know that he was the person who previously brought that Abyss human into the Royal pce and he was the one who told everything about those Abyss humans.


    But still, some warriors were unable to recognize him and when the king called his name they became quite surprised. The most surprising thing was that the king asked for the opinion of that person.


    "I don''t know if it is possible or not but we should try to check every house inside the human Kingdom. As you know the Oni Kingdom also sometimes faces a simr situation like this, where those Abyss humans came Inside the Oni Kingdom and all so created many Summoning arrays.


    Even though you previously already checked all the houses, still we should make sure that nothing like that is present in the human Kingdom. So I would suggest that we should check every corner of the human Kingdom once again.


    They should be our first priority and next, we should try to increase the security around the border area. Also, we should try to observe all the people that areing inside the human Kingdom or leaving the human Kingdom.


    Next, naturally as the king said, we should also create a search team that will observe and search around The danger zone. Those people will observe the danger zone when we will maintain the security of our human Kingdom."


    To be continued¡­.._____________

 Chapter 483 484 - Meeting (2)

    ?


    "Next, naturally as the kings we should also create a search team that will observe and search around The danger zone. Those people will observe the danger zone when we will maintain the security of our human kingdom. Not only that, but we should also try to release missions rted to this type of matter where those other Warriors are also helping us in searching the danger zone.


    With this, it will be easier for us to find any clue about those Abyss humans. Right now nobody knows when those people will attack us and how they will try to attack us, what is their true motive? We don''t know anything. So I think we should stay alert all the time."


    After saying all of this he finally stopped. All this time all of the people present in that meeting room listened to all of his suggestions. Right now they also begin to agree with his n because that will be really helpful.


    They also know that Abyss humans are able to create summoning symbols inside the Oni Kingdom, naturally, it will be good if they try to search the whole human Kingdom once again. Even if they didn''t find anything, they won''t mind that but they will rx. Many of those Warriors did not know anything about those dark Summoning symbols. But those people who know about these know how dangerous they were.


    When anybody using those arrays came to any ce nobody would be alerted. This Summoning array uses dark spiritual energy and also you will not be able to feel any type of energy fluctuation when this type of teleportation array gets used. Very dangerous for the human Kingdom and they should immediately try to search around the whole human Kingdom.


    It was also a good suggestion that they should create a search team and then send that search team to the danger zone to search around the danger zone.


    "I think always suggestions are good. As you know I am already nning to create the search team but we should also do those other things besides creating the search team. Also, we should immediately try to inform every Warrior present in the human Kingdom about a danger that is approaching toward us.  As you know I already n to host a celebration with everyone for our previous win.


    So I think it will be good if we announce the danger that is approaching us. But at the same time, you should already try to look for people who will be good in the search team. Alsomander I will give you the responsibility to create those types of missions higher anybody of our human Kingdom could help us to search the danger zone. But besides giving the mission you should also give them the warning that if anybody found anything very suspicious they should immediately leave that ce.


    Those people should not be reckless and decide to search on their own. Because it could also cost their life. I don''t want anything to happen to my Warriors. Alsomander and all the other Warriors who are present in this meeting room, I want all of you together with your team to try to search the whole human Kingdom. As you know those direct teleportation arrays did not require normal spiritual energy and because of this most likely, we are also unable to sense the energy fluctuation created by those types of teleportation arrays. So it would be good if we try to search the whole Kingdom."


    The king finished saying that and immediately themander of the royal force and those other Warriors present in that meeting room agreed with the king. After that, the king immediately told them to start the operation. With that every one of those Warriors gets up from their seat and then begins to leave the meeting room.


    Sam was also about to go toward the exit of the meeting room but at this time the king told him to stay behind. So Sam right now stayed inside the meeting room while those other Warriors were already leaving the meeting room one by one. They first needed to gather their team and also needed to inform their team about the danger. Well, they will not immediately tell them about the abyss humans, but they will just tell them a dangerous war is approaching, and because of this, they also need to search the human Kingdom.


    Even themander was alreadyte to the meeting room and he was directly going toward the headquarters of the royal force.


    Right now inside the meeting room only The King, the Crown Prince, and Sam were staying. All this time, none of them said anything and just silently looked towards Warrior leaving the meeting room. At this time suddenly the old King also appeared in that ce with a smile on his face. But unfortunate for him Sam wasn''t surprised by his sudden arrival. He was already aware that he wasing in this direction.


    "Haha¡­ it looks like you did not get surprised by my sudden arrival. Haha¡­ Sam, brat, that old Oni king already told you about me. Really this surprise was that you are the noble guest of the Oni Kingdom."


    After saying that, the old King began to smile. Not only that, but even the human King also begins to smile after hearing what his father said to Sam. Only the Crown Prince was surprised the moment he heard that from his grandfather''s mouth. He really did not imagine that same was the noble guest of the Oni Kingdom.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    "Now back to the main matter, I really don''t know how to thank you. We also did not think after the previous incident those abyss humans will try to act again. Who could have thought that they would have such a dangerous motive like that? Even though we are unable to get the full motive, still we can tell this will be too dangerous for our Kingdom.


    Fortunately, you were able to find those abyss humans previously and with that we are able to know about this n and are already about to inform everyone to stay alert all the time. Also, all of your suggestions are good and really we should try to search the whole Kingdom right now. I still don''t know if there are any traitors left in the kingdom or not but this could be a possibility."


    The old king said that with a serious tone. Everyone also agrees with him and the king immediately replies that they should first wait for the royal guards and only then they should start searching the whole Kingdom with those other Warriors.


    Naturally searching the whole Kingdom won''t be an easy task. As you know the whole Kingdom was very big like the Oni Kingdom. So if those other Warriors did not help in this search then it will take more than 2 days to search the whole Kingdom.


    _________________________


    "Soldiers after leaving the Royal pce try to search the whole Kingdom and also tell everyone that this is the order from the king. If anybody tries to defend and says they won''t allow it, then immediately arrest that person. We don''t have that much time so we should immediately start our operation. Also not only as but many others. Your team will also help us in this search so we will try to search the whole Kingdom in one day."


    After saying that, the king signals every soldier to start the operation. Now all themanders, Captains, and even the king immediately started going outside of the Royal pce. The search operation finally started and even Sam was also part of that operation.


    The king already told which team should start their operation from which direction. So this became easy for those people to search their operation and they immediately started their operation as the king said to them.


    Sam and those other Warriors right now going toward the north direction. You will also find the Crown Prince and even Maria the princess of the human Kingdom present in that group. Actually, Maria didn''t know about this but when she got to know that an operation like this was happening she also decided to tag along with the Crown Prince and Sam.


    One by one they came to the border area of the North side. From there they will start the search. Actually, they wanted to start the search from thest. Naturally, people get immediately confused by thoserge numbers of Warriors that suddenly came to that ce. One by one many people also came out from their house to see what was happening.


    At first, none of them thought that those people came here to search the whole Kingdom but then suddenly they became speechless when every one of those warriors began to go toward many houses and all the surrounding directions to search for the dark teleportation array.


    Before they could say anything they also inform them that this was the order from the king and if any one of them tries to show resistance then they will get immediately arrested. The king will tell them the reason behind these but they need to wait for tomorrow and only then will they get to know the reason.


    Naturally after hearing that this was the order from the king nobody dared to stop those Warriors from searching their house and the surrounding area.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 484 485 - Searching

    ?


    So, all those Warriors began to search all the house and all the surrounding. Those people who don''t know anything about the enemy or the danger, naturally very confused about this. But none of them said anything because that was the order from the king.


    Sam, Crown Prince and princess with those other Warriors also searching all that ce. But unfortunately they did not find anything. Naturally it will take a very long time to search all the ces around the kingdom. Well, normal citizens and those other Warriors naturally think that because of tomorrow''s ceremony the king will give an order like this.


    _______________


    5 hourster,


    Sam and others almost search the 50% area of the North side. Still they did not find anything. You can say that after not finding anything they also be rxed but still they need to search the remaining area, and they just hope they will not find anything in those areas. After resting sometime they will search Once again.


    So like this around 11:00 p.m. they finally finished searching the whole North side and fortunately they did not find anything. Everyone of them sighs in relief after not finding anything in those ces. Naturally other than some people like Sam and the Crown Prince, not many people know about the Abyss humans and those summoning arrays belong to those Abyss humans. The people only knew that they were searching for a teleportation array. The enemy could have created those arrays inside the human Kingdom and those people wanted toe to their Kingdom using those teleportation arrays.


    You can say that even the princess did not know anything about this. Well this was the king''s n that not many people should know about those abyss humans and those teleportation arrays. Naturally if those people who level get to know about those Abyss humans, it will make them panic. Also, somehow they still had Traitors in their Kingdom and they get to know about this, then it will naturally be a very dangerous matter.


    Those people will immediately try to remove their trace and we will try to escape from the human kingdom or try to do something that will naturally harm the human Kingdom. Because of this, the king previously told everyone not to tell their team about their true motive.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Sam and his team already inform the king that they did not find anything like that in the North side. Naturally the king also became happy after hearing that. They also inform them that they also did not find anything in the south side. Also he told me to go back to their home for now except some people. Sam and some other Warriors get the order from the king to present in the Royal pce.


    Sometimeter,


    Naturally Sam and those people already came to the Royal pce and they were shocked and his team was also present in the Royal pce. Those are the people who previously attended the meeting so other than them nobody came to the Royal pce right. Naturally the king wanted to save something but he waited for those other Warriors toe to the Royal pce.


    Both of the teams who searched the north and the South side had already arrived at the Royal pce and right now they were waiting for the team who searched the east and west sides. At this time many people want to ask about the result of the North and South side but looking at the serious face of the King they could tell it wasn''t the right time to ask him. But the thing was that that serious face also made many people very confused and they began to think if anything happened in the east or the west side.


    Nobody has any problem waiting for those other Warriors. In the meantime the king already prepared dinner for those Warriors. So Sam and others are now eating their dinner with the king.


    Around midnight finally all those Warriors also came back. Looking at them you can see every one of them quite exhausted and every one of them has a serious expression on their face. Naturally that makes those other Warriors white curious to know what happened to them. They also searched the whole north and the South side but they did not get that much exhausted. Sometimeter, when almost all the warrior finally came to the Royal pce the king final begin to said,


    "Naturally many of you are very confused about the result. Now the good news is that the teleportation array or you can say the summoning array isn''t present in the north or the south side of our human Kingdom. This is very good news and we should be d that nothing like that is present in those areas.


    Most of you don''t know what happened to those Warriors who search the east and the west side. They already exin everything to me so I will exin those things to all of you. At first those people did not find anything. But when they thought they would not find anything and they had already almost finished their search, they noticed something.


    After carefully observing that ce those people get sure that those were the teleportation array. Even my father instantly went to those ces to confirm if those teleportation arrays were real or not. After observing those things he also confirmed that really those are the teleportation array.


    Naturally, you can guess how serious the situation is. Some people created those teleportation arrays in our Kingdom but we did not know anything. Even after increasing the security of the human Kingdom we cannot know anything. Also as you know that other than those abyss humans, nobody will be able to create those dark Summoning arrays or teleportation arrays.


    Even the father already destroyed everyone of those teleportation arrays but still this is really a serious matter. The good news is that right now no Abyss humans present inside our Kingdom. So we did not need to worry about anything. But with those teleportation arrays I became sure that most likely we had more Traitors inside our Kingdom.


    I will naturally investigate this and try to find about all the Traitors of the human Kingdom. You also need to stay careful and if you find any suspicious movement around The Kingdom then you should immediately inform me. Our enemy is already nning to attack our Kingdom so naturally we needed to be alert about this.


    After tomorrow''s ceremony I will inform you about the search team that will go to the danger zone. Me and my father on the other hand will be investigating and trying to find those Traitors. At any condition we need to find out about them so that they would not be able to do anything to our Kingdom that could put us in a dangerous situation.


    Also, I hope everyone of you will be present at tomorrow''s celebration. At that time, all of your main priority will be to stay alert about your surroundings. Try to look for suspicious people and if you find any suspicious activity, then immediately contact me. I will immediately take action. For now the meeting is over, you should go back and rest tonight."


    The king said that and everyone nodded after hearing that. After that one by one everyone began to leave the royal pce. Sam is also about to leave the royal pce, but suddenly the king said that he already prepared a guest room for him, so he doesn''t need to go back. Sam was quite surprised after hearing that. In the end he decided to stay there.


    Sometimeter,


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (59990/59990)


    Spiritual energy: (59990/59990)


    Strength: 5999


    Agility: 5999


    Physique: 5999


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 5899 + 100


    Spirit: 5999


    Status points:- 459505 - 500 - 459005


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (peak) / (Peak SSS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Upgrade point: 00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 chance)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (A-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (B-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (C-grade) (+)


    Teleportation (B-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Don''t think you are invincible. You just gain some strength to protect yourself from danger. But you are still a weakling.] "


    Actually while searching the north area he also went outside of the kingdom. Actually, he wanted to be sure even in the outside area a teleportation array like this didn''t exist.


    To be continued_________________

 Chapter 485 486 - Celebration

    ?


    At the time he also met many Monsters and after killing them he was able to gather some upgrade points. Using them he levels up his technique.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Tonight I decided to stay inside the Royal pce. Actually did not know but the king thought that because of his unique spiritual energy could also attract attention from those Abyss humans and those Traitors. Even though the king, all those Warriors who previously present inside the Royal pce for today''s matter weren''t Traitors, he still cannot be sure about them. So this could be really risky for Sam. So, he decided to tell him to stay in the Royal pce.


    The Oni King also told him to protect Sam because he was a special guest of the Oni Kingdom. This was also a reason that the king told him to stay inside the Royal pce. Sam knows that there was a reason behind this but still he was not able to predict the reason.


    You already ate dinner with the king and those other Warriors, so he directly went inside the guest room and alreadyy down on the bed.


    ''it will be hard for other people to sense those Abyss humans, if they didn''t have high Observing technique. But those Warriors also had an origin spiritual energy like me, then they could easily sense those Abyss humans. Unfortunately I don''t want to tell anyone about the origin spiritual energy. All the most likely everyone in Terraria is using true spiritual energy. Even though this is weakerpared to the origin spiritual energy, it will be enough.


    On the other hand, I am really curious to know who could have superior observation techniques that could detect me.  Most likely some people really have that type of technique and because of these previously the goddess told me to take care of myself from those people. Sigh, being able to tell me in detail then it could be really helpful to me.''


    Whileying down on the bed he was thinking about all this. He doesn''t know if he would be able to meet the goddess once again or not. But one thing was that after reaching theary or even peak Epic grade, he will immediately go back to his world. He was very curious to know the condition of the Eden blue right now, but unfortunately he wouldn''t be able to get any type of news.


    ___________________________


    Next day,


    After waking up he also ate breakfast with the king and his family. Everyone was very happy to have him but still it was quite awkward for Sam. At that time Sam also informs King that he will go inside the danger zone once again. First of all he still did notplete a mission and on the other hand you will also try to observe the danger zone.


    Even though the king wanted to prevent him from going inside the danger zone. He won''t be able to do that. Also, previously the Oni King told him to trust in this situation. The Oni King also told him that Sam has white powerful concealment technique. So, he doesn''t need to worry about that. At the time The Princess and even the Crown Prince also told the king that they would also go to the danger zone. Both of them also wanted to help in this search operation.


    Once again, the king wanted to prevent that, but after thinking something he decided to agree with them. Actually he will send his Royal guards with them so he doesn''t need to worry about both of his children. Also the old King gave them permission to go inside that danger zone.


    "Tomorrow you all good go inside the danger zone. Also don''t forget today is the celebration. Every citizen of the human Kingdom will be celebrated but at that time we need to stay careful and observe our surroundings all the time.


    We aren''t sure who are those Traitors and most likely in the celebration they will also participate. If you notice any type of suspicious movement in those people, immediately inform me so that I could take action against them. Those Traitors could harm us anytime, so at anyhow we need to find out about those Traitors.


    Not just you three but I already told those other Warriors in this celebration. I will also inform you about the danger after the celebration. At that time most likely some people will get behaved suspiciously. Even if it is for a second you should immediately tell me."


    At that time the king told Sam, the crown Prince and The Princess. All three of them also nodded after hearing that. Naturally they knew that the danger wasn''t over and they also had Traitors in the human Kingdom. The people, even though staying in the human Kingdom, will try to harm the human Kingdom.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Sometimeter,


    Sam after saying goodbye left the Royal pce and started going toward the South side of the human Kingdom. As you know in the south side he was staying and also you will find the entrance and the exit. So he decided to go toward that ce to observe the situation until the celebration did not start.


    Well it did not take that much time for him to reach the South area of the human being and after that he decided to observe the whole area. Even though he did not find anything in that area, it is still good to stay alert all the time.


    Naturally the security already increased and those people who were checking in front of the gate also became very strict. Previously their enemy was able to enter the human Kingdom and was able to create a teleportation array. With that it shows those guards weren''t paying attention and because of this themander already told all the guards to be strict while checking those people who wanted to enter the human kingdom or wanted to leave.


    ________________________________


    3 hourster around 1:00 p.m.


    Right now in the central area of the human Kingdom you can see the king was present there. Before starting the celebration he wanted to say something to everyone. Well it is not possible for everyone toe to the central area like those guards. So the king also provided holographic projection that will project his figure in the whole human Kingdom.


    "Finally I am happy to tell everyone that we won the war against our enemy. As you know previously, all Warriors are able to return safely while they finally win against the enemy. It shows us and everyone, even though we did not have that much powerful Warriors but we have Warriors who had powerful will powers.


    Because of their will powers they are able to win a tough war. Even if the situation were very bad for them, none of the warriors gave up. Please everyone I want you to p for those Warriors. Those are the people, who did not think about their life and just fully focused on fighting those Monsters and even the enemy.


    Not only the enemy of our human Kingdom but also because of the red moon we were in a dangerous situation. Anything could happen to us anytime, but fortunately our Warriors handle everything and with that we are safe.


    Only thing I want to tell everyone is to stay careful inside the danger zone. For now you don''t need to worry about the red moon but you still need to worry about the enemy. I will not waste your time for long because this is the time for celebration so we should only focus on celebrating ourselves."


    With that  the celebration finally started. At this time all the Warriors of the human Kingdom begin to p. Not only they just pped after hearing the speech from the king but they also pped because they were also proud of their Warriors. Even though the situation of the Warriors wasn''t good, or even they were in a serious situation, those people gave their all to protect the human Kingdom. Naturally everyone should be proud of those Warriors.


    As the king already decided about the teleportation array and the danger he will tell everyone after the celebration so it did not make those citizens worried about the enemy while celebrating themselves. Aftering down from the stage you also quickly signal all the royal guards to spread around and watch over all the people.


    Sam who is present in the south city can also see the king finally finish his speech. He also pped for those Warriors who previously did not care about their life and just thought about protecting the human Kingdom. They are truly the heroes of the human Kingdom. At this time instantly he could already feel the observation of many Warriors already started. Those were the people who also liked him observing their surrounding area and those people. Sam is also doing that and the moment he will find any suspicious movement, he will immediately contact the king.


    To be continued____________

 Chapter 486 487 - Be Careful

    ?


    Like this, those Warriors observing their surrounding area while the king gives his speech. Today''s main motive was to capture the Traitors of the human Kingdom. Naturally after hearing the speech of the King those people will react somehow.


    At this time you can say the whole human Kingdom participates in the ceremony. Naturally the King already prepared everything for the celebration so nobody doesn''t need to worry about anything.


    Suddenly,


    "Hello it''s me Sam. I don''t know if my prediction is right or wrong, but I found two people suspicious. Previously after hearing your speech for a moment both of their expressions became scared but in the next second they were able to control their emotion and became normal. Really surprised me because at that time you were talking about the human Warriors and how you capture all those Traitors. Normally people will get happy and that time, but both of them got scared."


    Sam who was looking at the South part of the human Kingdom suddenly notices people that behave suspiciously for a moment. When the king tells everyone about the human Warriors and how they capture those Traitors, those two people got very scared for a moment. Naturally Sam after looking at their suspicious behavior didn''t waste any more time and contacted the king.


    After hearing all of these the king was also very surprised that Sam was able to notice that. As you know normally people won''t notice that type of thing. So this was really surprising but instantly he decided to take action against both of them. After hearing the exnation from the Sam, he could tell that those two people were really suspicious. So wasting no time he quickly send Royal guards to capture both of them. After capturing both of them he will take them to the integration room the old king will try to find all the details of their mind.


    Both of them weren''t the first people to get suspected because the royal guards. Capture many people secretly so that those other people did not get to know about this. Those people didn''t not even get the chance to react and instantly got Vanish from that ce.


    Actually the king ordered the Royal guards that they should not alert other people.  As you know that there was a chance that those people weren''t Traitors, Because of this, the king order those Royal guards to act like this.


    Those royal guard silently appear behind those people and then make them unconscious. With that they will now resist while the Royal guards take them toward the Royal pce. This also minimise they risk of alerting those traitors and other people.


    Most of the people right now celebrating with those Warriors who previously went to the Danger zone and defeated those enemies. Not only that but those people also protect the human kingdom while the red moon appear on the sky and those monsters became crazy. You have to say at that time all the citizen of the human kingdom were very afraid of those monsters but fortunately they have warriors who protected them from those monsters without caring about their life. Every citizen of the human kingdom very grateful toward those warriors.


    ______________________


    "All my citizen I know that every one of you are very grateful toward our Warriors. Because of this, I also organized award ceremony for those Warrior. I hope while giving them the award All of you p for them."


    When the king finish saying that everyone present in that ce begin to pped. Naturally they will p for those warriors who protected them from those monsters. So like this this the king begin to call one by one every one of those warriors into the stage and giving them the award for their bravery in the battlefield. Those citizens also showing their support.


    Almost 2 hourster finally the king called Sam''s name. For a moment moment most of the people of the human kingdom got surprised because they did not recognize that name, Because of this that king also begin to said,


    "Haha¡­ I know that many of you did not recognize him, because he is from the Oni Kingdom even though he is a human. But that does not mean he will not receive the award. He also fight those monsters without caring about his life. Most likely only those warriors who participate in that battlefield recognize him. Because at that time not only he killed those monsters but at the same time he also helped many people of our kingdom.


    It is unfortunate that he is from the Oni Kingdom, But at the same time as a human he decided to protect the human kingdom and all the citizen of the human kingdom. Sam naturally proud himself being a human so we should really appreciate his dedication and bravery."<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Most likely the king also understand that those people did not recognize him, so he decided to exin all of this to those citizens. Naturally, after hearing those everyone began to show their enthusiasm. They began to p and also cheers for him.


    On the other hand, Sam already on his way to the stage. As you know even though the holographic image of the king showing in every part of the human kingdom but the ceremony was building in the central part of the kingdom so Sam needed to go to the central part from the souththen part. This take him 5 minutes to reach the central part of the kingdom and he also went toward the stage.


    "As the king said, I am not from the human kingdom but that does not mean I will ignore any human or the human kingdom if they are in dangered. As a human it is my duty to protect the humanity and the citizen of the human Kingdom. Also, i really appreciate the enthusiasm from all of you."


    After saying all of this Sam decided to finish his speech. Those citizens began p when he finish his speech. Sam smile toward them and also ept the reward from the king. Even though he naturally interested to know what reward the king gave him, but he will do thatter.  This wasn''t the right time to open the reward. But most likely the king have something special for him. Because previously he already informed him that he will be giving him a special gift.


    Sam left that ce and went back to the southern part of the human kingdom. Until the ceremony did not over he will observe the situation of the southern part alongside with those other warriors. The princess and the crown Prince also get called in the central part because they will also receive the reward from the king. Even though they belong to the Royal family but in the time of danger they also did not think about their life and just participate in the battlefield. This really is a big matter.


    After that the king also ie everyone that he also organized a dinner party for every citizen of the human kingdom in the central part. They should begin to the central part around night and eat the dinner.


    ____________________________


    "Sir, we capture at least 20 people. Those are the people who previously suspicious behaving."


    "Hmm.. good. Also, did all of you silently captured them?"


    "Yes, sir you don''t need to worry about that. We make sure that nobody was alerted while capturing that people. Every one of those people wearing the interrogation room of the Royal pce and the Old King already started his work to extract the information from those people. We already get the report that not every one of them were Traitors."


    "Hmmm¡­ I already expected that and because of this, I told you all not to alert anyone. Just if you want ours with that I will also move back to the Royal pce at me will ask my father what happened. On the other hand, stay alert all the time. We didn''t know what will happen. What if those real Traitors still present in the human Kingdom alongside with those normal people. Because of this, we needed to stay careful until the ceremony didn''t finished."


    " Yes, sir, don''t worry. We all are observing the surrounding area all the time. We are making sure nobody who behaving suspiciously will get to leave that ce. Also, thanks to our Warriors we are able to Observed the all the corner of the kingdom. They helping us in that matter."


    " This really a big matter. Our enemy ning something for us. They will attack our Kingdom. But we needed to protect our kingdom. If we able to capture those Traitors and get to know the real hideout of those enemies, then it will be easy for us to capture them. Before they could attack us we couldunch a surprise attack so those people did not get the chance to react and we able to kill most of them. "


    The king and hismander began to discuss about the current situation. They already capture many people, but still there was a chance that they didn''t capture the Traitors.


    To be continued______________

 Chapter 487 488 - Trust The Warriors

    ?


    While most of the people enjoying the ceremony, the old king busy in the interrogation room to look the memory of those people. He take the duty to read that memory of those people, so that he could be sure if ther were Traitors or not. So like that one by one he begin to read the memory of those people and like that he already find most of the people wasn''t traitors but three people were very suspicious.


    They could be Traitors of the human Kingdom. Once again the old king carefully reading the memory of those people. Finally he became sure that they were the traitors of the human kingdom. Instantly he inform the royal guards about that and told them to put those people in the prison. At the same time he quickly contact the king who busy in the ceremony. The old king instantly wanted to told the king what he find after reading the memory of those Traitors.


    Fortunately the king instantly pick up the phone and the old king quickly told him about the information that he got from those people. The king after hearing all of this became rx a little and instantly told themander who previously came there to inform the current situation, to what to do. Themander also get quite surprised but then he instantly realized most likely the old king find all the information so he quickly leave that ce.


    Themander quickly infrom the royal guards What to do at that moment. Not only that themander also instantly contact those warriors who also observing the whole kingdom at this moment. Those warriors also needed to make sure that those people did not leave the city at any condition and they also get captured by the Royal guards.


    Naturally, the Crown Prince and the princess also get to know about that and they also quickly inform all the people that present in the southern part. Sam also get to know from themander what is the current situation and themander also told him to make sure nobody leave the city right now. Wasting no time quickly Sam went toward the city gate to make sure right now nobody leave the human kingdom.


    At this time every Warriors and the Royal guards became very alert and careful so that they did not alert those other citizen. They quickly reacted and also begin to find those people that themander told them to arrest. Even though most of the people did not know why they needed to arrest them, But they also did not think that much and just began to search for those people.


    Fortunately, this did not take them that much time to find those people in those crowd. But the real problem was that those people weren''t along in the crowd. So those Warriors did not instantly take action and just waited for the right time to take action.


    All this time those Warriors make sure not to alert anyone. Also sometimeter they already found the right situation to capture those people one by one. Next those royal guards quickly take those people and being to approached the Royal pce.


    Every Warriors get to know about that but none of them became rxed and just wait for the signal of the king. Until the king did not inform them They will not rx and just will stay like that. You can say that the king also wasn''t your if he should told them to rxed or not. He was now waiting for the order from the old king and only then he will inform those other warriors.


    On the other hand, every one who got captured were unconscious so the Royal guard did not have any problem take them to the Royal pce where the old king wating for them.


    ________________________


    "After reading all the memories I am sure that currently we didn''t have other Traitors in our Kingdom. Even though we still have Traitors, but they were outside of the kingdom right now. Most likely they went outside of the kingdom for some important work. I am definitely sure that those people went outside to meet those Abyss humans. We needed those remaining people to get the location of those abyss humans.


    After reading the memory i noticed that none of them know the location of those abyss humans. Only their leaders know about that. Most likely those people who currently outside of the kingdom will need it 5 to 6 days and only after that they will came back to the kingdom. So we just needed to wait for them and the moment they came near the human kingdom we should capture them.


    I am sure about wanting that these are the people who help those enemies to came inside our kingdom and aftering inside the kingdom those people created those teleportation array. With that you can guess how dangerous was those people and most likely if we did not get to know about the Abyss humans and those teleportation array we should not able to get to know about tkjsd Traitors.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Most likely our enemy will also try to create many more like the teleportation array but at that time it wasn''t possible because our warriors already went outside of the kingdom to kill theirrades and also I already became awake at that time. So they quickly leave the Kingdom after realizing the situation wasn''t good for them.


    Right now told every one of those Warriors that they could finally enjoy the ceremony because everything was over and we just needed to take action after 5 dayster. Actually I am thinking that the search team should also try to search for them after going inside the danger zone. If somehow they get to know about their location, then it will be even better for us.".


    The old king exin everything to the king and themander. Naturally both of them also agree with him and they quickly begin to inform the warriors that they could finally rxed and also those people that they previously captured were the traitors.


    Finally after hearing the news every Warriors got rxed and finally they can enjoy the ceremony. Sam also started going toward the central area because everything was over and he doesn''t need to stay in the southern part. On the other hand the king already told him to stay in the guest house because next day he has something to discuss with him.


    _____________________


    "My citizen of the human Kingdom i hope everyone of  you enjoying the ceremony. Finally we are going to finish the ceremony and after that we will go back to our house. But before that I wanted to tell everyone of you that for few days everyone of you stay careful in the danger zone because we once again get to know about the enemies that nning to do something to our human Kingdom.


    Not only that, many people also helping them. Fortunately all the Warriors and the guards help to capture those people and you doesn''t to worry because injust few days we will capture those remaining people and after that we will also attack the enemy base before they will attacked us.


    I know that these most likely a very dangerous information for everyone of you and I could see many of you already got scared because of this but you should trust the Warriors of our Kingdom. Those people already already capture all the dangerous people from our Kingdom and they already present inside the prison of the Royal pce. But I would say you should stay careful inside the danger zone. Because that enemy could also notice this and what if they decided to take action before us.


    This is the reason that you all should stay careful in the danger zone. Also I should inform all of you that tomorrow a team of Warriors once again go to the danger zone to search for the enemy and the moment they will find the enemy we will immediately attack. I did not wanted to give any chance to those people so the moment we will find them we will take action."


    All this time, the King exin everything so that those citizen did not becam scaes and began to panic. Most likely that was pretty bad news for those citizens. Most likely they would begin to panic right now but fortunately the King all the told them he already take action and also send a team of Warrior inside the danger zone tomorrow.


    Only after hearing that information Those people begin to rx because they also have full trust on their warriors and they could finally rx. At the same time you can say everyone very curious to know the identity of those people who captured. Unfortunately the king did not tell them anything and most likely they could only able to know that after the situation was over.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 488 489 - Inside The Danger Zone

    ?


    So like this you can say the celebration came to an end and one by one every person finally went back to their house. But you have to say that most of the people of the human Kingdom trust their Warriors, so when the king said that to trust their Warriors and they didn''t need to worry about that, really those people did that and they became rxed once again.


    On the other hand the old King also sent those people who weren''t Traitors. All this time those people just stay unconscious, so none of them are able to know what happened to them. On the other hand, the real Traitors have already been sent to prison, and they will be staying there for the rest of their life.


    Next day,


    Right now many people once again came to the Royal pce but not everyone came to the Royal pce because the king did not call them. Those Warriors who came to the Royal pce got summoned by the king because the King wanted to create the search team and you will put those Warriors in that search team. So most likely everyone of the Warriors also understands that and they are just waiting for the king to give them the order. With that they will immediately leave the human Kingdom and go to the danger zone.


    "I know that most of you already understand that I called you because you will be part of the search team. Most of you are very good at concealment techniques and not only that some of you already got this type of mission previously so I am really hoping that all of you could make a good search team. I am expecting that you will be able to find those people or you can say those Traitors who were in the danger zone.


    As you know that most likely those people went outside of the human Kingdom to meet those abyss humans. Because they are somehow able to know that we already discover those teleportation arrays and also destroy them. Because of this once again those abyss humans most likely n something and they called those Traitors.


    Really it is a shame for me that in my kingdom that many Traitors are present. But after everything will be over I will make sure that nothing like that once again happens to our Kingdom."


    After saying all of these the king finishes his speech and instantly gives those Warriors the order to go to the danger zone and search for those people. Those people who previously got captured did not know the real location of their enemy, so they needed it to search for those other people who were present inside the danger zone. Because only they know the real location of their enemy and after getting the real location the King all ns to attack those enemies before they could attack them.


    The Crown Prince and even the princess also wanted to go with those Warriors but the king stopped them. Because the Crown Prince or The Princess were not good at concealment techniques and they could also create problems for those other Warriors. Because of this he did not give them permission. But on the other hand as you can see Sam wasn''t present in the Royal pce, because he had already left the Royal pce and already went inside the danger zone before those Warriors left the Royal pce.


    Well he already informed the king that he also wanted to go to the danger zone because he also needed to finish his previous mission and at the same time you will also try to find those Traitors of the human Kingdom. Naturally the human being also did not stop him because he already got to know from the Oni King that Sam was very good at Concealment technique and most likely nobody will be able to find him until he did not reveal himself.


    Already Sam is present inside the danger zone and once again searching for those Monsters that he previously was unable to kill. Really searching for those nt type monsters is quite hard. But you can say that he already knows the location of those Monsters so he just right now is going toward that direction. At this time when he went inside the danger zone he could see that most of the people did note to the danger zone today. Most likely after hearing the king''s order they decided to stoping to the danger zone for a few days.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Those people did not know but this will really help the search team to find the real traitors very easily because if most of the human warriors stay inside the human kingdom then it won''t take them that much time to find the aura of those other Traitors. Sam on the other hand just aftering inside the danger zone begins to observe the surroundings very carefully. You can say that he was fully alert. Not only that he also uses the life detection device. Now with that device this really helps him to observe a 5 to 6 km area without any problem. Because in that area if any people present other than those monsters then he will immediately get to know that and he could immediately check if that person was the traitor or the search team.


    So like that sometimeter he already found those monsters and already began to attack them. Before anything he needed to kill those Monsters to finish the mission so wasting no time he began to continuously attack those Monsters using his fire control technique. Really it was very long since he began to use the fire control technique. Well as you know aftering into the Terraria he most of the time uses the light control techniques so it was a very long time since he began to use the fire control technique like that.


    For those nt Monsters you can say the fire was the deadly thing and this really affected very much. Even though Monster tried to fight back but unfortunately was unable to do that. Because from the start Sam did not give them the chance to fight back and from the study he just kept attacking them with big fireballs and mega fireballs. As you know the destruction that will be created by those fireballs is really because of that you can also see the surrounding area got easily destroyed by those attacks and those Monsters also died because of that. Actually not only those Monsters but many other Monsters also died.


    It had been a very long time since he began to use the fire control technique but he could already see the color of his fire had already be purple and that means it became more deadly. On the other hand he really did not expect the power of the mega fireball would increase so much that it would easily destroy the surrounding area like that. Fortunately other than those Monsters not many people were present inside the danger zone and because of that he also did not have to worry about those other Warriors bing injured.


    Just needed to search for one more Monster and with that he could finish his mission. But most likely searching for that Monster was very hard because even though he was searching for that Monster for a long time he was unable to see any clue about those types of monster in the surrounding area. Most likely they already hid themselves inside the underground because they did not want to get noticed by him.


    ''Sigh, most likely those Monsters already saw the previous distraction that was created by the mega fire balls and because of that they quickly hid themselves and did not want toe out of their hiding ce. But it is really unfortunate for them that I had the life detection device and with that I could easily find every Monster that was around me.''


    Sam thought that and began to look at the life detection device to see the monster that was present near his location. Well unfortunately the life detection device did not show him if the monster was present inside the underground or not but at least he was able to know the location and he could go to that ce to check if those monsters were present inside the underground or not.


    While searching for those Monsters he did not find them but he still did not give up on searching and still decided to look at everyone of those Monsters locations that showed in the life detection device. But at this time he suddenly stopped searching for the monster because in the life detection device he could finally see 5 km away from that ce he could see some life sign that didn''t belong to the monsters.


    So wasting no time he quickly stopped searching for those Monsters and went in the direction to check if that person belonged to the search team or not or they were the Traitors.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 489 490 - Who Is This Person?

    ?


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally reaches that ce and then he tries to find that person. Fortunately because of the live detection device he could easily find that person and already came in front of him to check that person. After observing that person he could naturally tell that he didn''t belong to the search team. But then again he also did not think this person belonged to the traitor group so who was this person and what was he doing here?


    Naturally please make him curious but at the same time he could just also overthink. What if that person was a normal Warrior who came to the danger zone to fight monsters but then again he didn''t think any human Warriors would be leaving the human Kingdom even after getting the order or you can say request from the king. As you know previously the king told them not toe to the danger zone for a few days and this will be a really helpful thing for the search team.


    Wasting no time he quickly uses the spiritual vision to look at that person. Not only The Spiritual vision but he also decided to use the observation technique,


    "Name - Unknown


    Race - Human


    Grade - intermediate Elite grade


    Health - (01000/40000)


    Spiritual energy - (39990/39990) (Dark spiritual energy)


    Strength - 4010


    Agility - 4000


    Int- 3997


    SE- 3999


    Status - Happy, Excited,"


    Even after using the observation technique he won''t be able to get to know what type of skill the opponent has. Well most likely only when you will level up that skill to the maximum level only then he will be able to look at the Skill of the opponents. Most likelypared to those Monsters, looking at the skill of any other people was very hard and because of this, he could only see the skill of those monsters.


    But at the same time you can see Sam instantly became serious the moment he looked at the status or even without using the observation technique he could feel the dark spiritual energy that came out from that person. Also tell you the truth and Sam was very familiar with this type of dark spiritual energy. But still it that quickly he did note to any conclusion and just waited for sometime to observe the matter.


    Beforeing to any conclusion he wanted to look at that person and wanted to find out about his identity. But at the same time why was that person happy and excited? Did something good happen to him and also what was he searching for right now?


    Naturally all of this question came into his mind but unfortunately none of them got answered. Sometime after not finding anything in that ce that person decides to leave that ce and once again begin to advance. Unfortunately he still cannot find anything that he was searching for.


    "Sigh, look like I once again changed the location and only then I could find those Monsters. But who could have thought that in a ce like this I will not be able to find any Monster like that. I just really wanted to recover my health, sigh but before that I also needed to search for those Monsters and only then would I be able to do that."


    While searching for the monster that person  slowly but still because Sam was very close to that person he already heard that and with that he became sure that person was most likely searching for something or some kind of Monster. But right now the main question was what was the monster that he was searching for? Also why did you need the monster to recover?


    Naturally he did not know anything and because of this he decided to not to think about that, and just silently follow that person. At this time, Sam is not only following that person but at the same time, he is also looking at the life detection device to see if any other people like him are nearby or not. Sometimeter, he once again found some life signature, but this time everyone of them from the search team and most likely they were searching in that ce for the traitors.


    Suddenly the person in front of him also stopped advancing. What will be he doing next? Also why would he suddenly stop? Did he also feel the human Warriors, who were not far away from that ce? Sam did not think that was possible because the distance between him and those human Warriors were still 5 km. Also on the other hand even if that person has a powerful observation technique, Sam did not think you will be able to have a technique that will help him observe the situation of the 5 km.


    But then again that person suddenly stops and most likely he also feels something. That person instantly did not react and most likely began to think something. All this time Sam did not disturb that person and just silently waited for him. Sometimeter, most likely that person already decided what to do and because of this, he instantly changed direction and with that he once again began to advance. This makes Sam sure that the person in front of him also feels most likely danger that was ahead if he went in the direction.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    "Why do those human Warriors suddenly begin to appear in the danger zone like this? What are they searching for? Sigh, I wasn''t going to find any clue about those Monsters and not only that most likely sometimeter I will get captured by those human Warriors. Really after recovering my health I will immediately try to use the teleportation array to go back."


    Once again that person begins to murmure very slowly. After searching like this and also avoiding the direction of the human Warriors that person finally came in front of a ce that was quite excited and most likely he already found the ce and the Monsters that he was searching for all the time.


    At this time he did not know but Sam was also beside him and he already got very confused when he looked at those Monsters. As you know they are Monsters who also observe the dark spiritual energy and those types of Monsters called The Spiritual Monsters or ghost Monsters. Naturally the Terraria also have monsters like this and that person from the first searching for those Monsters?


    Now the big question was why would he search for those spiritual Monsters or ghost Monsters? Unfortunately he could only get the answer from that person. But then again he immediately did not take action. He wanted to wait for that person to finish killing those Monsters or what he wanted to do with those Monsters and after that when he tried to use the teleportation array he would take action and capture that person.


    Because of this right now Sam just silently stays there and begins to observe that person. That person knows his limit and because of this, he only goes toward those Monsters who have the same strength as him or weaker than him.


    Naturally he did not attack all those monsters at the same time. He silently began to advance toward the direction and after that he began to search for the monster who was weakpared to him. Fortunately it did not take him that much long to find that Monster and with that he waited for the opportunity to attack that monster.


    So like this after waiting for 30 minutes he finally got the chance and with that he did not waste anymore time to attack that Monster that already came very close to him. He attacked that Monster using his own dark spiritual energy and with that the monster did not get the chance to react. The Monster instantly died because of that attack but then it wasn''t over. The person instantly begins to use the next step where suddenly his whole body begins to absorb The Spiritual energy that wasing from that monster.


    All this time Sam, who was also present there, got surprised by looking at this. Now this is a very interesting thing and most likely that person is absorbing the dark spiritual energy from that Monster to recover his health and other things.


    "Name - Unknown


    Race - Human


    Grade - intermediate Elite grade


    Health - (02000/40000)


    Spiritual energy - (39990/39990) (Dark spiritual energy)


    Strength - 4010


    Agility - 4000


    Int- 3997


    SE- 3999


    Status - Happy, Excited,"


    Naturally at this time, Sam could see the health point of that person already increase while he was absorbing the dark spiritual energy from that monster. After some timeter that person finally stopped because the monster did not have any spiritual energy in his body and it already began to fade away.


    At this time that person begins to look for other Monsters. He did all of this very quickly and also very silently so that he did not alert any other Monsters. That person knew the capability of himself so he did not want to attack those powerful Monsters or attract attention from those Monsters. That person was just now searching for those Monsters who were weakerpared to him.


    To be continued____________

 Chapter 490 491 - Starenge Person

    ?


    All this time, Sam was just observing that person without doing anything. Well naturally he will only take action against that person when he will try to use the teleportation arrey or something like that so other than that he did not do anything and just silently watches that person to wait for weaker Monsters that are using the dark spiritual energy.


    But you can say that the same was really curious to find about that person who was using the spiritual Monster who uses the dark spiritual energy to recover from his injuries and also his health. He was sure that person wasn''t an Abyss human. So that really makes me very confused about the identity of that person.


    If you look at the person then you will see he was now silently waiting in that ce for more monsters toe in that direction. At the same time he did not want to attract the attention of the powerful Monsters so he was doing everything very carefully and only just trying to attack those Monsters who were very weakpared to him.


    Until now he was already able to finish four monsters like that. And with that he already recovered some of his help points and also recovered from those injuries. Unfortunately he did not recover from the injuries fully and most likely because of that he was still waiting for those Monsters and only after absorbing the spiritual energy of these Monsters after killing them would he be able to recover fully.


    It was prevented only after killing the dark spiritual Monsters he was able to absorb the dark spiritual energy that came out from The Monster. Because all this time he was only able to absorb the direct spiritual energy when he killed the Monster and most likely because of this it also took him too much time.


    But the person also knows this is the only way to recover in his peak state and because of this all this time he is just patiently waiting in that ce. Sometimeter once again some Monsters came to that ce who were just special grade Monsters and also they use the dark spiritual energy. Naturally that person did not just instantly attack them because it could also attract the attention of those other Monsters.


    He waited in that ce very carefully and only attacked when those Monsters became very close to him. Instantly he attacked those monsters using dark arrows and those Monsters because already came very close to that person, unable to react or get away from the ce. Really one by one that person created many dark arrows and instantly attacked those Monsters. He did not want to give them any chance to react or fight back because this could also be a terrible matter for him.


    Sometimeter as you can see he is already sessfully in those Monsters and wasting no time he silently approaches them and begins to absorb The Spiritual energy of those Monsters. The absorption ability of the person also wasn''t that first because to absorb spiritual energy from two of those Monsters he needed almost 30 minutes and as you can tell in that 30 minutes many could already happen to him.


    He already left that ce because more monsters already came to that ce after being in the dead body of those spiritual Monsters and also they tried to attack him but somehow he was able to get away from that ce.


    ''Sigh, me and my bad luck. Why those other monsters decided to show up in that ce at that time while I was busy absorbing The Spiritual energy. At least they coulde sometimeter when I already absolved All The Spiritual energy from those Monsters. Sigh, I need to change the ce.''


    After thinking all of this he decided to change the ce because he could already see many monsters alreadying to that ce and most likely every one of them was trying to search for his location. With that, that person already changed the ce and already came far away from that ce. In that ce just after


    But as you can tell he did not notice that one more person was also following him from the first and that person was naturally Sam. He also saw that person most likely wanted to change his ce so to waste time he silently followed him to go to the new ce where that person already found some more Monsters and after killing them he once again began to absorb The Spiritual energy. Like that most likely eating already needed almost 3 hours and only then that person fully recovered from those injuries and also fully recovered his health points.


    "Name - Unknown


    Race - Human


    Grade - intermediate Elite grade


    Health - (40000/40000)


    Spiritual energy - (39990/39990) (Dark spiritual energy)<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Strength - 4010


    Agility - 4000


    Int- 3997


    SE- 3999


    Status - Rx,"


    Finally after 3 hours of hard work he was able to recover in his peak state and right now he was finally able to go back. You already decided to do that and because of that after came to a safe ce he decided to use the teleportation array to get away from that ce. Instantly he uses the teleportation array technique and instantly a round circle symbol appears on the ground.


    Sam who all this time looking at that person looks at the symbol that instantly makes him very serious. Sam was very familiar with that symbol. That was the same symbol that he previously had inside the human Kingdom and the Oni Kingdom. Even that previous Abyss human who wanted to escape from the danger zone after controlling Monsters decided to use this type of symbol. Looking at that symbol suddenly he already became very serious and he already gave that most likely that person has some kind of connection with the Abyss humans.


    Sam, who was silent from the first final, decided to take action against that person and the moment that person wanted to activate that teleportation array he already got heat in his back and that already made him unconscious. Sam did not give him any time to react and already made him unconscious.


    Right now before anything you want to look at the memory of that person so instantly using the telekinesis and the mind control technique he is finally able to control the mind of that person and already begin to read the memory of that person.


    Before anything he already confirms his prediction that the person has connection with the Abyss humans. That person was alone because many people like them are also present and all of them are present inside the abyss. Those people have guilds like the warrior guild called dark guild. Just after hearing the name Sam instantly thinks about those darks that previously represented the Eden blue and that also created much destruction in the Eden blue.


    He fortunately once again focuses on reading the memory of that person and with that one by one he is able to get to know anything about that person and hisrades that are also present inside the. He definitely became sure that that person and those other humans who could use the dark spiritual energy did not belong to this world and most likely everyone of them rted to the Eden blue.


    Sam also gets to know that a headquarter of The dark association or dark Guild also present inside the abyss world. Those people stay in that ce with those other abyss humans. Even though everyone of them were weakpared to the Abyss humans, that does not mean they did not be dangerous.


    Those humans from the first forcefully begin to absorb the dark spiritual energy like those Monsters and because of these they have a gic nutrition with its side effect inside of them. So after reading all this it has already been confirmed that the dark association and the dark guilt belong to the Eden blue and most likely the headquarters of The dark association present inside the Abyss world.


    At the time finally Sam finished reading all the memories and instantly he decided to contact the king to tell him about all of this. The moment the king picked up the phone he began to discuss everything and also told that he was the person that previously acted very suspiciously inside the danger zone. Not only that but he could also use dark spiritual energy and also observe the direct spiritual energy from the dead Monsters.


    Just after hearing that, the King became very serious and ordered Sam to bring that person inside the Royal pce because he would also like to read the memory of that person and also wanted to know why he was present in that ce. Naturally Sam did not have any problem with that so before anything he decided to take that person into the Royal pce and most likely after going there the old king will once again began to look at the memory of that person very carefully to see from higher he came to that ce and also why would he suddenly came to the danger zone.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 491 492 - Surprised King And Old King

    ?


    Right now other than the king only the old king knows about that person. Both of them are waiting for Sam in the Royal pce while sam already on his way toward the Royal pce. He already left the dangerous zone and already came very close to the human Kingdom. Right now he cannot see any people outside of the human Kingdom that much. People thate from other Kingdom and enter the human Kingdom.


    As he already guessed, no human Warriors came out of the human Kingdom after getting the order from the king. They stayed inside the human Kingdom until they did not get the signal from the king that they could once again go back to the danger zone.


    Naturally, when he got close to that entrance Gate many people already got very surprised looking at him and that person that he was bringing with him. Even those peoples who wanted to enter the human Kingdom did not recognise him but the guard of the human Kingdom already recognised him and they already cleared the path for him so that he could enter the human Kingdom.


    After nodding toward those guards he quickly entered the human Kingdom and directly started going toward the Royal pce. It did not take him that much time to reach the Royal pce and just aftering inside the Royal pce he could already see the king and the old King already waiting for him in that ce and other than them he cannot see anyone present in that ce. Most probably both of them did not inform anyone about this.


    Not that Sam had any problem with that. On the other hand the king and the old King directly begin to observe the human very carefully. Previously they really thought that Sam was making fun of them but right now they actually confirm that the person he brought into the Royal pce was a human and not only that they could also feel the dark spiritual energy thates out from that person.


    That really makes both of them very confused because this is most likely the first time they saw something like this. On the other hand Sam was observing both of them and he could tell that most likely this was the first time they saw something like this. With that he could confirm that in the Terraria nothing like that present at the time where humans could use the dark spiritual energy and because of this the king and the old man became that much surprise after looking at that human.


    "Isss!!! I really cannot believe that the inside of this person will have that many injuries. After checking inside of this person I could definitely tell that he most likely forcefully tried to observe the dark spiritual energy and because of this many things happened inside of his body. Many cells of his body got deactivated and because of that he also suffered from the side effect. Not only that the blood of that person also turned into dark blood because of the dark spiritual energy.


    I really cannot believe someone would do something with his body. This has the 100% chance that he will die in a few days but I really cannot understand why would do something like that. They should know that the dark spiritual energy wasn''t made for humans and if you try to forcefully absorb the dark spiritual energy then naturally you will suffer from the side. I am definitely sure that this person absorbed the dark spiritual energy forcefully and because of this he had those injuries. "


    The old King checked the body of that person very carefully and after checking every detail he began to exin what type of change happened inside of that person. Well, at that time Sam did not say anything. But he really wanted to tell them that in their world using this way those dark associations and the Warriors of the dark association are able to be powerful using this way and because of this, all the time those people are just trying to find the source of the dark spiritual energy and want to absorb them.


    On the other hand the old King already took that person into the interrogation room to read the memory of that person. Well even though he could use that technique in that ce but naturally he did not want to do that because anybody coulde inside of the whole room anytime and he also needed a silent ce to reach the memory of anyone.


    On the other hand right now inside the hall room only the king and Sam were present. The king quickly asked Sam where he found that person. Naturally Sam did not hide anything and began to tell him from the start. He told him that after going inside of the danger zone he began to search for those Hilton Monsters and fortunately he already found them. But in the end he does need one more Monster to finish the mission. So because of this he was roaming around the ce where he previously found the Monsters but at the time something unexpected happened and he found the life signal of a warrior present near him.


    So he decided to check if that person was the warrior from the human Kingdom or those Traitors. But who could have given that when he reached the ce he would see none of them but he would see a person from the dark association present there and searching for the dark spiritual Monsters to absorb their spiritual energy.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Naturally after hearing all of these the king also asked him if he saw any people other than that person in that ce. But Sam told him that he was using the life detection device and even using that he cannot see anyone in that ce but yeah he remember sometime he already saw many other life signs and most likely from the Warriors that he sent inside the danger zone.


    "Hmm¡­ most likely I really need to inform those other Warriors of the search team and also inform them about something like this could also happen to them where they could also meet a human Warrior that will be able to use the dark spiritual energy."


    " Hmm¡­ I am also thinking that you should do that because if those Warriors did not know any information about those people then they could mistake them as the citizens of the human Kingdom and those people could also take this chance as their advantage to attack our Warriors."


    But the king did not instantly inform those Warriors because before anything he wanted to ask the old King what type of information he found from that person full stop so right now inside the hall room both of them were waiting for the old king. Even though Sam already know what type of information the old king will get from that person but still he was waiting for that person because one thing you should know the old thing already reach the legendary grade, so naturally the technique or you can say the mind reading technique that he will using most powerfulpared to Sam''s technique, so natural the old king will find more informationpared to Sam.


    On the other hand the old king finally came back 30 minutester. At this time If you look at his face then you will see he was fully surprised and really cannot believe what type of information he got from that person.


    "I really cannot believe this but all of these are true. Really that person forcefully absorbs the dark spiritual energy continuously to bring out the normal spiritual energy that was present inside of his body. That process was much more painful than you can imagine but still those people did that. Also you should know that he wasn''t alone. Like him many people also present but every one of them were inside the Abyss world.


    On the other hand at first those people also have the normal spiritual energy like anyone but then they suddenly begin to absorb the dark spiritual energy and those dark spiritual energy after going inside of their body instantly begin to attack The Spiritual energy that was present inside of the body.


    That process was too painful but those people did not care about that and did something like this to gain more power. Like this there will be a time when those people only had dark spiritual energy inside their body. other than that you will not find the normal spiritual energy inside their body. Even the blood of those people also changes because of the dark spiritual energy. So in one word you can say because of the dark spiritual energy everyone of those humans mutated themselves.


    Like this they also gave the power of the dark spiritual energy and not only that currently somehow those people could absorb the dark spiritual energy from the Monsters who also have dark spiritual energy. Previously, they didn''t know how to observe the dark spiritual energy but somehow they found a technique and after that they began to absorb the dark spiritual energy from the Monsters¡­"


    To be continued_____________


    [A/N:- Hey guys I am really sorry about the previous advance chapters. Actually, I lost 10 of my chapters. Because of this, it be hard for me. I needed to write them once again. But don''t worry, just needed 2 more days, and I will able to write them once again.]

 Chapter 492 493 - Serious Information

    ?


    "Right now those people are also living inside the Abyss world with those Abyss humans. You can say they were the subordinates of those abyss humans. I also got to know that this person not only came to the real world but at the same time many people like him also came to Terraria. Unfortunately those people are not only present in just one Kingdom.


    Most likely you can say that they are the spy of those Abyss humans. Because they could also use the dark spiritual energy so instead of those Abyss humans, these people are the one who created those previous teleportation arrays inside our territory. Because they are humans we naturally ignore them and do not check that much. So using that as their advantage those people previously entered in our Kingdom and at the same time created those teleportation arrays with the help of those Traitors.


    Also this person came near our territory because he wanted to check what happened to our Kingdom. Naturally they can already feel the connection already broken from our Kingdom and because of that those abyss humans send him with his teammates to check what happened to our Kingdom.


    Aftering to the danger zone he gets separated from his team to stay inside the danger zone and if needed he will immediately try to create the teleportation array. As you know that it will take those abyss humans 5 to 10 minutes to create those teleportation arrays and because of that this man stays inside the danger zone and his duty was to create the teleportation array the moment his teammates will give him the signal.


    Unfortunately at that time somehow he went deep inside the danger zone and met some powerful Monsters. Most likely heat will try to attack those Monsters because they also use the dark spiritual energy. Unfortunately that thing backfired on him and his condition became like this.


    Nowing back to the main matter, I can see most likely those abyss humans have already erased some of their memories so they do not remember about their previous world and only follow themands of those abyss humans. But still I tried to use my power and with that I got some information about their previous world.


    Their previous world was like our world but it was much weakerpared to us. Most likely they needed to leave their old world because something happened in that world and they permanently shifted inside the Abyss world."


    After exining all of these the old king became silent. Well, he gave both Sam and the king the time to digest all that information. If you look at the king then you can naturally tell he was very surprised about that and he still cannot believe that humans will try to do something like that to make themselves stronger. Not only is it just destroying the foundation of their body but at the same time the dark spiritual energy continuously affects their body and with that they are only able to live longer.


    Naturally the human body wasn''tfortable with the dark spiritual energy like those Monsters or those abyss humans. That they will continuously get damaged by the dark spiritual energy.


    "I really cannot believe they will try to do that to make themselves stronger. I really wanted to know what happened to their old world that made them do something like that. Sigh, unfortunately those Abyss humans erase all those memories and with that we won''t be able to know anything. But as I told you most likely people like him already came to our human Kingdom. So at any condition we need to capture those people before they could go back to the Abyss world."


    After hearing that naturally the king became very serious and wasting no time he quickly told the remaining Warriors who present inside the human Kingdom right now toe to the Royal pce immediately. This is naturally a very important thing to worry about because those people most likely already entered the human Kingdom and not only that, what if those people have some technique that makes them height from the observation technique of the old king?


    Then it will be a very difficult task if those people once again created those teleportation arrays inside the human Kingdom. Not only that, what if those people instantly report everything that happened to those abyss humans, and that makes those abyss humans very alert and wasting no time quickly attacking the human Kingdom? That will naturally be a disaster.


    The king and the old king on the other hand did not notice the expression that Sam had on his face. Naturally he knows the reason for why those humans decided to shift their location inside the abyss world. It is just that who could expect everyone of those Warriors who previously escaped from Eden blue, came to the Abyss world and be subordinate to those Abyss humans.


    At the same time he was really curious to know if the elders and the leader of the dark association who also came to the Abyss world with those other Warriors lost all of their old memories or not. Because if they did not lose their old memories then it could be very dangerous for the Eden blue. Right now he also wasn''t present inside the Eden blue, what would happen if those Abyss humans with those people from the dark association decided to attack that Eden blue?<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Naturally just after thinking all of this he became serious and also quite worried about the safety of his family and friends. This makes him more serious about increasing his power and quickly goes back to his world to solve all the problems. As you know before he came to this Terraria he already saw many people that came from other worlds and most likely those people were also waiting for the core of the Eden blue.


    ''I just hope that before that core did not appear on the surface area, nothing happened to anyone.''


    He just now hopes that but at the same time he also knows that bing what it is like won''t solve anything. Three of them already started going toward the hall room higher; those Warriors also began to gather one by one.


    After getting the previous sudden call from the king, those people did not waste a single second and quickly came to the Royal pce as quickly as they could. Not only that, they also did not inform anyone because there was an order from the king that they should tell no one about this sudden meeting.


    Aftering to the hall room three of them already saw many Warriors already present inside the hall room but still some people did note to the Royal pce and the king and the others decided to wait for those other Warriors. Naturally even if they did not go inside of the danger zone, those people had many other important things to do and because of that not everyone was able toe instantly the moment they got a call from the king.


    ______________


    Finally after waiting 20 minutes the king started the meeting. He instantly begins to tell that they have some people who look like humans but those people use dark spiritual energy. Also those were the people who were the culprit behind the teleportation array that they found inside of their Kingdom.


    "Actually they are the subordinate of those Abyss humans and most likely they already feel the connection broke from the human Kingdom and because of that the Abyss humans inside the human Kingdom to check what happened and to collect information about the current situation of the human Kingdom. So most likely those people already came inside of our kingdom.


    Not only that, most likely everyone has some kind of powerful concealment technique that uses the dark spiritual energy to make that person hide his real power from anyone. Most likely because of that the city guard of the human Kingdom was unable to find anything suspicious about the humans.


    So right now, our main duty is to find those people and quickly capture them. We cannot let them go back to their kingdom. What if after getting all the information those Abyss humans decided to attack us without wasting anymore time. Naturally that could be free risky for our Kingdom and those normal peoples of our kingdom. So anyhow try to search the whole human Kingdom and try to find those people as weakly as you can.


    Naturally those people use the dark spiritual energy so only that way we can find those people. Other than that those people did not have any type of different appearance from us. So if any of you did not have any type of technique that could help you see the difference in spiritual energy, then it will be difficult for you to find those people."


    Like this the king began to tell everything to those people so that they also became aware of the danger that roaming inside their Kingdom.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 493 494 - Shocked Oni King

    ?


    Once again every Warrior bes active inside the kingdom. After leaving the Royal pce they already started searching inside the human Kingdom for those humans who could also use the dark spiritual energy. Naturally only those people participating in this mission could use techniques like spiritual vision in this matter because other than that type of technique they won''t be able to find those people.


    That does not mean those other people won''t be able to help. Right now they also have the responsibility to observe the situation of all the people inside the human Kingdom. with that if they suddenly found some suspicious people they should immediately react and silently capture those people. With that they should not alert those other people.


    Not only just those Warriors but at the same time you can say the king and even the old King also observing the situation of the whole Kingdom. Naturally as you know the old King has the power to look at all the human Kingdom at once using his observation technique and his observation technique most likely powerfulpared to any other present inside the human Kingdom.


    So naturally he already started observing the situation of the whole Kingdom while at the same time the king also appointed all the Royal guards in that mission to find the suspicious people and bring them into the Royal pce. Naturally, the king also told every Warrior that they should not give this information to anyone in the city because it would also create panic in those normal people of the human Kingdom.


    Right now they just wanted to know in which ce those people decided to hide themselves. Only if they are able to capture those people, then it would be possible to find the real location of those and those Traitors and those Abyss humans. Naturally those people most likely preferred to stay inside of the Abyss world, but if those traitors really went outside of the human Kingdom to meet those abyss humans, then there was a possibility that those Abyss humans also came to the at the time and this would be the perfect time to attack those abyss humans.


    Naturally the king did not inform the search team who were present inside of the danger zone. Most people were busy searching for the flow of those Traitors, naturally because of this he did not decide to disturb those people and justremained Warriors in that mission.


    But at the same time immediately contact the Oni King. The Oni king was his old friend and not only that both of the kingdoms also had a coboration so that was his responsibility to tell his friend about that important matter so that he could also get alert about it. After getting the previous information from that person the king was sure that not only the human Kingdom but those people most likely will try to invite other kingdoms and try to create those types of portals once again or try to do other things that could create destruction.


    Naturally wasting no time he quickly informs the Oni King.


    "Are you serious about this? How the hell did you find those people? I still cannot believe people like that exist in our world. How could someone try to observe the dark spiritual and g that naturally destroy the foundation of their body and also slowly kill their body? It was like taking drugs to make themselves powerful."


    Right now the Oni King naturally got shocked after hearing the information from the human king. Still cannot believe people like that exist who could use the dark spiritual energy to make themselves powerfulpared to any other Warriors. But the thing was that even if those people became powerful they won''t be able to stay like that forever. It was like a powerful drug that makes you powerful for sometime but after that you will suffer from the side effects of the drug.


    "Yea, I am telling you the truth. It was Sam who found those people and wasted no time quickly bringing that person to the Royal pce. After that father decided to read the memory of the person and from that we got all the information. Like you I also cannot believe someone could do something like that. But the thing was that those people wear the one who previously created those dark teleportation arrays inside your kingdom and my kingdom.


    With that you can naturally guess how dangerous those people were and what they can do. Also, I got the information that many people like them came to the Terraria and everyone of them most likely went to various Kingdom present inside of the Terraria. They wanted to use their human identity to enter that Kingdom and try to create the dark teleportation array so that those Abyss humans could easily enter The Kingdom.


    Not only that, they were the people who searched for Traitors. Naturally they were the people who previously contacted the Duke of your kingdom and also contacted all the Traitors of my kingdom. Naturally that is most likely the case and because of that will be previously unable to detect any abyss humans inside our Kingdom and somehow still those dark teleportation arrays got created inside our Kingdom. "<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    The human being told all of this to the Oni king. Naturally, the oni king also agreed with him and with that he already decided to tell every Warrior who present inside of the kingdom to search the right now. He needed to make sure that people like those humans did not enter his kingdom.


    A minuteter after hanging up the phone he quickly told the old king and not only the old king but also the Crown Prince about that. Naturally both of them should also get aware of the situation right now and they just did not tell the princess who already went inside of the dangerous zone right now.


    But the old Oni king instantly contacted Emma and told her everything. Naturally that was a very serious matter and what if the princess got attacked by those people? Most likely Emma and the Oni princess will try to avoid fighting fellow Humans, and those humans could use that as their advantage and do something.


    "I already know Emma about this. She told me that she will be watching over Livia and her teammates. So you can rest assured that nothing will happen to the princess. Quickly called all the Warriors right now in the Royal pce because this is a very serious matter and every Warrior should know about that so they could also help find those people. Also make sure that other than those Warriors nobody gets information about this."


    The old Oni king ordered the king about that and the king Wasting no time to quickly contact everyone of those Warriors that he trusts. You can say that after hearing the news about the human Kingdom, the oni King also became very serious and he also tried to figure out if taitora like that Duke was still present inside of his kingdom or not. Actually the Oni King is also trying to make sure that nobody like that duke is present inside of the kingdom because that could be a very dangerous thing for the kingdom and what if those people suddenly decide to attack his own Kingdom.


    Naturally, after getting called from the king, naturally those people use their full power to reach the Royal pce as quickly as they can. They can tell after hearing the tone of the king that something most likely very dangerous happened and because of that the king told them that quickly.


    ____________________


    "Try to search every corner of the human Kingdom. You find out what happened to those teleportation arrays. It could be possible that the human King already found out about those teleportation arrays but we still need to make sure what happened and also need to know how the hell the king got to know about those teleportation arrays. Until nobody uses the dark spiritual energy nobody will be able to use those teleportation arrays and no energy fluctuation wille out from those arrays so what happened to those are we really need to find about that.


    As you know, this was a very important matter from the boss because he wanted to attack the human Kingdom and after killing all the people of the human Kingdom he wanted to keep the blood to the demon God so that he could open the portal and the demon coulde to the Nether world. So at any condition we need to find out about everything that happened to the human Kingdom and also make sure that you are preparing yourself to escape from the human Kingdom anytime. We don''t know which type of powerhouse is present inside of the human Kingdom so we also need to stay ready to escape from the human Kingdom at any time."


    Right now inside of a dark alleyway, you can see almost 20 people present there and everyone of them normally looks like a simple human. Right now if some or any other Warriors look at them using the spiritual vision then they will be able to know that those people are releasing dark spiritual energy from their body.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 494 495 - Capture

    ?


    None of those 20 people know that the human being already became aware of them and also he already sent warriors after them. Those people aftering inside the human Kingdom first decided to contact those other Traitors, unfortunately even after waiting for a few days they were unable to contact those people so they decided to search their investigation without those people.


    But one thing was that they already contacted the Abyss humans and told him that they cannot contact those other Traitors. Because of this those Abyss humans also told those other humans what happened to the human Kingdom.


    Naturally, none of them know what happened to the human Kingdom because when they left the human Kingdom everything was normal so they did not know anything. But at that time 5 of them decided toe back to the human Kingdom to help those dark humans to find out what happened inside the human Kingdom. Naturally, those dark humans needed the help of those humans. Because of this, those humans or you can say those Traitors decided to send 5 of them inside the human Kingdom to help the others.


    On the other hand, those dark humans have already started their investigation but none of them were aware that the old king was observing the whole human Kingdom right now. Even though they were using their concealment technique to hide from any of those observation techniques, as you know as a legendary Warrior the power of his technique will be massive and because of that even those dark humans wanted to hide they won''t be able to do that.


    Previously those dark humans were able to enter the human Kingdom because at the time the old king was once again busy trying to break through but unfortunately right now he decided to wait before solving the matter only then he will start his breakthrough once again.


    Naturally breaking through will be very hard for him and this could also take him a few years. So before focusing on breaking through, he wanted to solve the problem about those abyss humans. Not only him but the old Oni king also had the same Idea and because of this he also did not focus on breaking through and also helping the Oni king to observe the whole Kingdom.


    Both of them not only observe the movement of the people but they also use their spiritual vision technique to look at the aura of those people. Naturally just observing the movement of their citizens won''t help them to find out about those dark humans. Only using the spiritual vision could help them to find out about those dark humans, so right now both of the old Kings are busy in that process.


    On the other hand, the warrior teams also spread around the human Kingdom and they started searching every corner of the human Kingdom. All of them use their spiritual vision to look for suspicious people who also have a dark aura around them. Unfortunately for those people, it could be a little difficult to find those people because those people also have the same strength as those people so it naturally creates some advantage for the dark humans to hide from those other Warriors.


    But suddenly at this time some Warriors instantly got informed by the king that he noticed some suspicious movement in some ces so he told them to go there and check the situation. Sam was also with those people and just after getting the report he did not waste a single second to go there.


    After reaching the ce he and those other peoples were already using their spiritual vision to look around them. Unfortunately, using their spiritual vision none of them feel any type of difference about the citizens so for a second everyone thought that everything was normal and they were just about to report back to the king. But suddenly sampled them to stop and pointed his finger toward a direction.


    Those other Warriors also looked in that direction and they saw two people with some suspicious movement. Unfortunately, when they try to use the spiritual vision, they see that people also have a normal spiritual aura around them. Naturally that confused those other Warriors but at that time Sam already guessed that those people were unable to see what he was seeing right now.


    ''Most likely this was because the original spiritual energy I was able to fill the difference between them but unfortunately everyone only uses the true spiritual energy and because of this none of them are able to see what I am seeing right now.''


    Sam thought that and at the same time he told him what the king previously reminded them. Those dark humans most likely have some kind of concealment technique, so it could be difficult for everyone to find those dark humans but if they find any suspicious activity in the kingdom they should immediately report the king.


    After remembering that those people did not waste a single second and instantly reported the king and told everything to him. At this time, Sam told the king that he was feeling that something was different about those people so he wanted to capture them. Actually Sam directly did not tell them he could see the aura of those people.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Naturally after hearing that the king also immediately told them to capture those people. After hearing the order those Warriors did not waste a single second and quickly acted. Everyone of them silently approaches those people and waits for the opportunity to capture those people without altering anyone.


    At first after waiting for sometime they did not have the opportunity but sometimeter they got the opportunity and wasting no time they quickly came behind Those to people and did not give a single second to act. They use their power to make those to people unconscious and in the next second 2 Warriors instantly take those to people and directly go toward the Royal pce.


    Actually not only those people but many other human Warriors also capture many suspicious people and they also bring them into the Royal pce. At this time the king already told everything to the old king and the old King was also waiting in the investigation room for those people to bring those suspicious humans.


    Naturally he already knew that many of those people who got captured most likely were the dark humans but he did not tell anyone about this. While observing The Kingdom using his spiritual vision he could saw many people with dark aura, but the thing was that most likely those dark humans also using some kind of technique and because of this, the moment old King look at their aura, in the next second those people immediately got reported and the quickly escape from that ce. Not only that, most likely those dark humans also have good spiritual control and because of this they quickly control The Spiritual energy, so nobody finds out about the spiritual aura.


    Most likely this was some kind of defense mechanism but still it wasn''t that powerful and because of that the old King once again found them, and this time he did not waste a single second and told the king about the location of those people.


    So right now he was just waiting in the investigation room for those people to bring those dark humans. He wanted to read the memory of those people and also wanted to know what kind of technique those people were using.


    On the other hand,


    The search team already came to the inner area of the danger zone and searched every corner of that ce. Not only that, they also use the life detection device that they got from Sam. Sam actually gave them that device so they could get help from that and if any human being or living being other than those Monsters came near them they would immediately get to know about that.


    The most interesting thing was that even though the Eden blue has this kind of device in Terraria you cannot find this kind of device. So you can say that the life detection device was a very interesting thing for everyone in Terraria and those people after getting the device also became very excited to use it. Because using the device they could easily find any people who got near them so that will be very helpful in searching for those Traitors of the human Kingdom.


    Not only that, the human King also got very interested in that life detection device and because of that he also wanted a life detection device to observe and also wanted to make that kind of device inside the human Kingdom.


    For Sam this was really an interesting matter that people inside the Terraria did not have this kind of device while the Eden Blue had this kind of device. Naturally, he also gave that kind of device to the king so that he could examine and make something like that. If you are thinking he should not give that device to them then even if he did not give them the device those people could easily make them becausepared to the Eden blue the technology of the Terraria was much more advanced and because of this, they could easily create that kind of device.


    To be continued_____

 Chapter 495 496 - 20 Dark Humans

    ?


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Sometimeter those Warriors already bring those dark human and they directly went inside of the investigation room. The old King already waiting for those Warriors so after seeing them he be happy and quickly told them to put those humans.


    After doing that those Warriors came out of the investigation room while the old king already starting reading the memory of the people. Naturally not everyone was the dark human and just after reading their memory the old king able to know that. But you can say most of those humans were dark humans and the old king was now busy reading the memory of those people one by one.


    First of all he wanted to know the real location of those Abyss humans. Not only that he also wanted to know where those Traitors were right now. Naturally as the subordinate of those Abyss humans, those dark humans will naturally know the location and after reading their memory carefully the old King already able to know the location.


    But that does not mean he will stop reading the memory because he was very curious about those dark humans so he keep reading the memory of the people. On the other hand sometimeter many more warriors once again came back to the Royal pce and naturally they also brought some more suspicious people.


    After putting those humans into the investigation room, dt Warriors already left the Royal pce, because they still needed to observe the whole human Kingdom. So like this one by one you can saying many people into the Royal pce and the old King reading the memory of those people one by one.


    On the other hand the king was busy observing the situation of the human Kingdom. Right now the old king was busy reading the memory of those people so naturally he will take the lead to observe the situation of the human Kingdom. But the thing was that while he observing the condition of the human Kingdom he did not find that much suspicious people but still he notice some of them behaving suspiciously, so he quickly inform the Warriors to take care of those people.


    Naturally Sam on the others also get notified by the king and they once again going toward the ce where the king told them to go. Once again Sam instantly uses The Spiritual vision technique to observe every person. Naturally at first he did not saw any dark humans but then he notice three more people that behaving suspiciously, not only that he can also dark auraing out from their body.


    Naturally he told the other Warriors to take action against them and everyone after hearing that already agree with him and just waiting for the right time to attack those people. But this time something unexpected happened and those people most likely already noticed those Warriors.


    Not only that, those people instantly take action and already begin to escape from that ce. Looking at that, those Warriors also did not waste a single second and began to chase after those dark humans. Naturally dost dark humans decided to go different directions but unfortunatelypared to them every human Warriors were very familiar with the local area, so you can say that this was the advantage of the Warriors and using that those people were already able toe very close to those dark humans.


    Two of the most likely wanted to use their power to attack them but before they could do that those Warriors already took care of them and made them unconscious. But only the remaining one was able to counter attack and already created destruction in that ce. Instantly he created a dark ball and shot those Warriors. Naturally those Warriors also counterattack and because of that suddenly an explosion appeared in that area and the surrounding thing got destroyed by that.


    Fortunately no human got injured because of that but those houses and the Street got destroyed by that attack. Dark human once again prepared to use his attack and by feeling the energy fluctuation anyone could tell him most likely wanted to use some kind of powerful attack.


    But before he could shoot that attack toward those warriors, something unexpected happened and that dark human suddenly fell down in the ground. Naturally, it was who instantly took action against that dark human and already used the telekinesis technique. Using his full power he instantly gains full control over the dark human''s body and makes him fall down on the ground.


    Not only that you also prevent any kind of movement of the dark human and because of that the dark human is unable to do anything at that time. All those other Warriors at this time already realize that and they already came close to that human and already make that human unconscious.


    "Sigh, take him to the Royal pce."<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    At this time some order one of the warriors and the warrior wasting no time takes that person to the Royal pce. On the other hand inside the Royal pce the old king had already finished reading all the memories of the people and he quickly called the king into the investigation room. Before anything he told them to release those people who weren''t dark humans or Traitors. After that he told him that 20 dark humans were present inside of the human Kingdom and already 17 of them got captured by the Warriors.


    Right now only 3 dark humans need to be captured and with that they will capture everyone of them. After hearing that naturally the king bes happy that 17 of them got captured but at the same time they need to capture three of them and what if those people already realize something suspicious and decide to escape from the city? Because of this wasting no time he just was about to inform all the Warriors about that but before that he saw 3 Warriors once again came to the Royal pce and with them you can also see three more people.


    At this time the old king already uses The Spiritual vision technique to look at the aura of those humans and just after looking at the aura, he became sure that they were the three remaining dark humans.


    "Haha¡­ you don''t have to worry about those dark humans. Everyone of them already got captured and with that you can tell those other Warriors to rest. Also inform everyone that after taking a rest for sometime they shoulde back to the Royal pce. At that time I will finish reading the memory of those three people and with that when those Warriors wille to the Royal pce I will share the information that I got from those dark humans at the time."


    Naturally looking at those three people the old King became happy and quickly told that to the king. Even though the king was quite surprised after hearing that, he then realized most likely those three were the remaining 3 dark humans and because of that his father said something like this.


    He also finally became rxed and quickly told those three Warriors that they should take a rest for sometime. Not only that, he instantly begins to contact every Warriors who via searching inside of the human kingdom for suspicious people to stop their searching because everyone already got captured and they should take rest for now.


    Naturally after hearing that those people also became rxed a little and then they decided to take a rest for sometime because after that they once again needed to go to the Royal pce. But you have to say for a few days many things just continuously happened inside of the human Kingdom and everything was rted to those Abyss humans.


    Really this makes everyone of those Warriors quite irritated about those Abyss humans. Because of those Abyss humans, the king also prevented anyone from going out of the human Kingdom right now so naturally everyone was very irritated about those abyss humans. They were also very eager to know the location of those people so that they could take action and kill those people.


    __________________


    Danger zone,


    On the other hand those search teams already came very deep inside the danger zone right now. All this time they were using the life detection device and naturally that made their work very easy and also they were easily able to know if any monster wasing near them or not. Unfortunately all this time they did not see any other people inside the danger zone other than those Monsters.


    Naturally that part of the danger zone got controlled by the human Kingdom and because of that the people of the human Kingdom naturally were made to obey the order of the king. Even if that person was from a different Kingdom but aftering to the human Kingdom, if he went inside of the danger zone that was under the human Kingdom then they need to follow the rule of the human Kingdom.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 496 497 - Traitors

    ?


    The search team searched the danger zone very carefully and until now they did not find anything. Naturally they know that it won''t be that easy to find those people and they also did not have any clue where they could find those people so this became hard for them to find those people.


    But the search team didn''t give up on their search. Like this today they once again started their searching after getting some rest. Well you can say that the search team is divided into two parts. One team will search the danger zone in the morning while the other team will start searching the danger zone in the evening while those other teams will get the time to rest at that time.


    Naturally even if needed those other teams will also be active at that time but right now this was the most efficient way to search the whole danger zone very carefully.


    So as usual today the team who usually stay active in the morning once again started their searching but this time something different happened to them. As you know that they have the life detection device, so like any other day they observe the device while searching around the danger zone but at this time suddenly they notice some different life signal in the device and that makes them very alert at that time.


    As previously Sam told him that if any people came under the range of the life detection device then naturally it showed a different color and you need to understand that those weren''t monsters. Not only that, he also told them that usually humans show green color in the life detection device.


    Naturally they also saw green spots present in the device and naturally they became sure not far away from them most likely some humans were present there. None of those Warriors wested in more time and quickly informed those other Warriors who were resting right now. After that, all of them quickly go toward that direction but none of them make any sound and silently approach that ce.


    Fortunately everyone has concealment techniques and because of that most of the time they did not get attacked by any Monster while searching around the danger zone. Only you can say those Monsters with the high observation technique are able to sense them and only those monsters will attack them. Other than that none of them get attacked by any other Monster who did not have good observation technique.


    But the thing was that none of them know if those humans have high observation techniques or not but still they use the concealment techniques to silently approach that ce. Naturally they can saw in the life detection device that they getting close to that ce and already after 10 minutester right now they could finally for those humans.


    At this time all of them hide themselves and none of them make any sound so that those humans did not get alert. Those 5 people who appear in that ce also observe the surroundings but none of them find anything. Because of that, once again they get busy with their work. Actually they are trying to connect with those dark humans that previously came to the human Kingdom but even after trying for this long none of them are able to contact them.


    "I think something happened to those dark humans or it could be that the king already found out about those people. What should we do at this moment? Should we go back or try to go inside of the human Kingdom to check what is the condition right now?"


    "I think we should go to the human Kingdom to check what the real situation is. As you know, currently going back won''t help any of us and we really need to know what happened to those dark humans."


    " I am also thinking that this is the right decision because we also wanted to know what happened to those other people. We were unable to contact any of them. Really something happened to the human Kingdom and because of this we were unable to contact any of them and I think you already noticed that even though we were roaming in the danger zone for a few hours we did not see any Warriors inside the danger zone. This naturally shows that something most likely happened and because of this, none of the human Warriors or any other Warriors came to the danger zone."


    Right now those 5 people talking with each other and after talking with each other finally decided to visit the human Kingdom. They already came a few hours ago, and even after spending that much time inside the danger zone none of them for any Warrior presenting at that in the zone. Not only that they did not even sense any human aura. Naturally because of that everyone of them became very confused and wanted to know what really happened.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    With that everyone of them decided to go back and started their journey toward the human Kingdom. None of those people get to know that they are being observed by the human Warriors right now and the human Warriors already take action against those people. Until now they observe those humans very carefully and they try to know if in your them has any kind of dangerous artifact.


    Naturally after sensing the power of those people, all of them be rxed because those humans were weakpared to them so they did not have to worry about that but they still worry about artifacts. Naturally those warriors recognise those people and they know that those were the traitors of the human Kingdom.


    Communicate with each other through their mind and after observing those people for sometime they are still unable to tell if those people have any kind of artifact or not but the one thing was that all of them are going toward the human Kingdom. Even though they could not take action at that time because naturally they will go inside of the human Kingdom and the king will take care of those people.


    But still they did not know at that moment what to do so in the end one of them decided to talk to the king while following those people. The moment the human King picked up the call that warrior quickly told everything to wait for the order of the king.


    After hearing all of these the king naturally became surprised but then he became happy. Not only that he could also guess that those Warriors most likely had some kind of artifact that they got from the Abyss humans. Really if those people have something like that then it could be dangerous for those Warriors so after thinking for sometime he told them they should not take action at that moment and let theme toward the human Kingdom.


    The king decided to take action. So after finishing the call he quickly told the old King about this and the old King also supported his decision. Naturally this could be dangerous for those Warriors and the workers also think that it could be based if the king takes action at that moment. Naturally he could also take action but the king told him that he doesn''t have to order anything and he will take care of everyone.


    Naturally the king knew that he didn''t have to worry because his son could easily handle those people so he just let him do that. On the other hand the king already took action and already went outside of the human Kingdom. Naturally he did not tell anyone because he doesn''t have to do that and we know that nobody inside of the human Kingdom knows that the king has already gone out of the kingdom to take care of some people.


    On the other hand, the search team followed those people silently. From the first, they observe every moment of those people and they try to guess if those people have any type of artifact or not but still looking at their moment they are unable to tell anything. Naturally none of them worried about that because the king told them he will take care of those people so naturally they became rxed after hearing that.


    Those people or you can say the Traitors did not have any idea about that and they just went to the human Kingdom. Because they were very deep inside of the danger zone it took them 5 hours to finallye to the outside zone and sometimeter they could already see the human Kingdom not far away from their ce. all this time naturally they also got Attack by Monsters but they easily take care of all those Monsters.


    Even though they are still present inside of the danger zone they could still see the human Kingdom. Naturally the distance from the ce could be 15 km but because of enhanced vision of the warriors they could easily see the human Kingdom.


    To be continued_____

 Chapter 497 498 - Confused Sam

    ?


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (59990/59990)


    Spiritual energy: (59990/59990)


    Strength: 5999


    Agility: 5999


    Physique: 5999


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 5899 + 100


    Spirit: 5999


    Status points:- 459505 - 500 - 459005


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Elite) (peak) / (Peak SSS-grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 chance)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (A-grade) (+)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (B-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (B-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (B-grade) (+)


    Teleportation (B-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Don''t think you are invincible. You just gain some strength to protect yourself from danger. But you are still a weakling.] "


    As you can see Sam is still unable to break through because he did not have limit breakers to break through to the next grade. But he is already nning to ask for help or nning to go to the danger zone to search for the limit breaker. But as you know the current situation of the human Kingdom, because of that you can say that he wasn''t getting the time to go to the danger zone to search for limit breakers.


    You can say that right now he did not even have the time to see what type of gift he had received from the king previously. Right now he got some time to rest so he decided to open his status and then use the remaining upgrade points that he was able to gather when previously he went inside the danger zone.


    Fortunately using those upgrade points he was able to upgrade his energy shield technique. Other than that he did not have any upgrade points right now so unfortunately he won''t be able to upgrade his other technique right now.


    Now he got the time to rest so he also decided what type of gift he previously received from the king. He takes out the box from his inventory and then opens the box. But the moment he opened the box he was surprised. He cannot believe the king will give him something like this that he really needed at this moment to break through.


    Just after opening the box he saw that two limit breakers were present inside of that box. Not only that he also received Epic grade limit breakers. He received two of them. Naturally after realizing that he received limit breakers from the king he became very happy. As you know how much he needed those limits right now to break through, so naturally after receiving those limit breakers he became happy and right now he doesn''t have to worry about the limit breakers.


    Even though he really wanted to focus on breaking through right now , before anything he wanted to solve the situation of the human Kingdom and only then would he focus on breakthroughs. Not only that he is already nning to use supreme upgrade to upgrade one of the limit breakers to legendary grade. With both legendary grade limit breakers, He don''t have to worry about anything and just easily can break through at that time.


    Naturally it would be good if he received a legendary grade limit breaker from the king, so that using the supreme upgrade he would have to find out if there was really a grade above the legendary grade. Well he could do thatter after finding a legendary limit breaker inside the danger zone.


    Nowing back to the main matter he became very curious to know what type of information the old King was able to gather. As you know the old king reading the memory of those people always time so most likely he already found out about something and because of that he also told everyone to gather in the Royal pce after resting for some time. Actually you can say that not only Sam but most of the Warriors right now are very curious to know what type of information the old king collected from those people.


    While thinking all of this suddenly Sam noticed some peopleing toward the Royal pce. At first he thought those warriors were present inside of the human Kingdoming toward that ce, but after observing carefully he realized that those people were from the search team that previously went to the danger zone to look for those Traitors.


    Right now those Warriors areing toward the Royal pce and the main thing was that they are also bringing some other people toward the Royal pce and most likely those people are the Traitors of the human Kingdom. But not long after that he also sensed the aura of the human king suddenly came back to the Royal pce.


    ''Is the human king previously gone somewhere? Why would hee back with those Warriors at the same time? Did he previously go outside of the kingdom to help those warriors to capture those Traitors?''


    Instantly Sam begins to guess that the king most likely went outside of the human kingdom to help those warriors to catch those people. If those Warriors needed help from the king then there were two reasons behind that.


    First, those Traitors were very powerfulpared to the search team, but Sam instantly canceled that idea because he did not think those people would be as strong as the search team, so that means the king previously went outside of the human Kingdom for the second reason. The second reason was that those people most likely have something like artifacts that they collected from those abyss humans.


    ''Most likely, this is the real reason that the king went outside of the human Kingdom to help the search team. Now I really wanted to know what type of artifact those people previously had with them that even the king needed to take action.''


    Sam thought that and as you can tell he was really curious to know about the battle. But at the same time you can say he wanted to know if the king''s personality took action then why he would be unable to sense any energy fluctuationing from the outside.


    Well, some while thinking all of this the king already came back to the Royal pce and directly went to meet the old king. He already takes care of all those people and right now those search teams are bringing those people into the human Kingdom. Before those people came to the Royal pce he needed to inform his father about the battle with those Traitors.


    Sometime ago as you know he already went outside of the human kingdom to take care of all those traitors. Not only that, at that time he already came close to the outside area of the danger zone. The king just waited for those Traitors toe there. Well he did not have to wait that long and sometimeter he could already notice some peopleing toward that direction.


    Not only that at this time he also senses the search team that was following those people from behind. Unfortunately it looks like those people still did not know anything about the search team. But he did not waste it any single second and instantly released his full power toward those people.


    Those people or you can say Traitors just after about toe out of the danger zone but suddenly all of them put huge pressure on them. The pressure was so intense that they were unable to breathe at that time. But not only the pressure at this time they saw a big sword shing toward them.


    Naturally, just after looking, all of them became very alert but still in a situation like this they were unable to do anything except one of them. Naturally he also got affected by the pressure and for a moment he also had difficulty in breathing, suddenly he brought out a small pill like something. Wasting no time even in that situation he put that pill in his mouth and instantly something different happened to him.


    From his head to everything became ck at that moment and not only that at the same time naturally the king already felt that the person was getting powerful. The power of that person naturally increased rapidly but still it did not reach the level of the king. Most likely because of being able to increase power, that person was able to breathe on that pressure and he suddenly came in front of hisrades and then decided to use the second artifact. Naturally as you can tell everything he got from the Abyss humans.


    To be continued____________

 Chapter 498 499 - Calling The Warriors

    ?


    "Roar!!!"


    In the next second that personte out and angry roared toward the king and instantly began to go towards him to attack him.


    At this time just looking at that person you can naturally tell he already became a monster, not only just a monster but he became a mindless monster that only knows how to attack. Most likely because of this he also decided to attack the king at that time. But the thing was that even though using the artifact that person became that much powerful but he still did not reach the same power level as the king so in the end King just defeated that person with just one attack.


    Most likely those other Traitors wanted to use the same thing but before they could use anything, all of them became unconscious. Naturally the king did all of this and made everyone of those Traitors unconscious. Actually he increased the pressure and because of that those people were unable to breathe and became like that.


    But really who could have thought that even though they begin to be powerful using the artifact that they got from the Abyss humans, but still attacking the king was a mistake. Even though the king already took care of those people and as you can tell taking care of those people was just an easy task for him, if you look at those other Warriors of the search team then you will naturally see that all of them were really speechless after seeing all of this.


    It was really fortunate that none of them decided to attack those people previously. Because if previously they reacted and those people used those artifacts to be like this, you can say that most likely until now some of them already became seriously injured and they could also have died in the battle. Naturally those people previously reach the same level as a earlyary grade warrior, but even with that they are unable to defeat the king and the king easily makes them unconscious.


    So like this the king captures all of them and after that those search teams begin to bring those Traitors in the kingdom. All this time even though the King uses almost his full power, none of the Warriors of the human Kingdom are able to know anything because at the same time the old King created a barrier that prevented anyone from sensing any type of energy fluctuation from outside of the human Kingdom.


    Actually as you know not every warrior of the human Kingdom right now knows about the Traitors and those ck humans and because of these the old King decided to take that action so no one was able to sense the energy fluctuation.


    Also because of this Sam and the other Warriors present inside of the human Kingdom did not feel anything previously. Naturally Sam did not know anything about this but he could already predict most likely the king previously went outside of the human Kingdom to help those search teams to take care of all those people. Right now he just needs to wait for the king to call those Warriors once again inside the royal pce.


    Also one more thing right now Sam was already present inside the Royal pce. This time he was resting in the guest room that prepare for him. So he was already present in the Royal pce and just waiting for the king to call every other Warriors in the hall room.


    On the other hand the old King already heard all the information and then he went inside of the investigation room once again to look at the memory of those Traitors. Naturally the king also has the same technique as the mind reading butpared to the king the old king will be able to extract all the information that was present inside of those people''s heads and because of this the old King decided to take responsibility to read the memory of those people.


    The old King aftering inside the investigation room already looked at those and conscious humans but the thing was that at this time one of them was releasing a dark aura. Naturally that was most likely the person who previously got the time to use the artifact, but unfortunately right now as you can see he was also unconscious.


    ''I really wanted to investigate the artifacts that these people received from the Abyss humans. If somehow those Abyss humans are able to use that kind of thing against our human Kingdom then it could be dangerous for the human Kingdom and the citizens present inside of the human Kingdom.''


    The old King thought that and he already began to read the memory of those people one by one.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    __________________________


    Completely 30 minutester the old King came out of the investigation room and at the same time he quickly told the king to call all the Warriors because he already found a lot of information from those humans and after getting the information everyone will have a clear idea about the army of the Abyss humans.


    With that the king also did not waste a single second and quickly called every warrior toe to the Royal pce as quickly as they could. Not only that, at the same time he already gave the permission or you can say given the order to all the search teams toe back to the human Kingdom. This was also the decision of the old King because after reading the memory of the people he could naturally tell most likely those other Traitors won''t being back and with that the searching did not need to stay inside of the danger zone right now.


    Unfortunately those search teams were not able to present in the meeting because it will take them much more time toe back to the human Kingdom so naturally the king nned to tell them the information once again after this meeting was over. On the other hand everyone of those human Warriors after getting the call from the king begin to go toward the Royal pce as quickly as they can.


    10 minutester as you can see everyone of those Warriors present inside the Royal pce and they are just waiting for the old King toe there and tell them the information. At this time they could naturally see the human King begin toe toward that ce but this time the king wasn''t alone. With the human King everybody could also see the old human king and both of them have a serious face right now.


    Naturally after looking at that everybody could tell most likely they will be getting once again serious information from the king and because of that the king also told them toe to the Royal pce as quickly as they can.


    "I know that most likely all of you already became very curious to know why I called you here this quickly but the thing is that you also know that previously your King already captured some Traitors. Not only that, some of the Warriors of the search team already brought those people inside the Royal pce and I already finished reading the memory of those people.


    Naturally I told your King to call everyone of you so that I could share the important information with everyone. Before anything you also know that those abyss humans created an army of at least 20000 Abyss humans. Not only that, most likely everyone of those abyss humans already were epic grade.


    They could have already attacked us but unfortunately right now themander of those Abyss humans most likely researching something and because of that he also told the other soldiers not to attack the human Kingdom at this time because he was in a very busy research and he did not want to get disturbed by anyone.


    Even most of his own people were confused after hearing that but unfortunately that came under did not tell anything about his research so nobody knew anything about that. But the information I get from those Traitors, most likely they are nning to create something once again that will naturally help them to fight with the human soldiers. But the thing was thatpared to before everyone of those Abyss humans became more intelligent and also because of that they did not attack us until now.


    But that person is already very close to finishing that research and most likely after that he and his teammates will naturally attack our Kingdom. Using the dark teleportation array most likely they already have the n toe inside of the human Kingdom without any disturbance and then attack inside of the human Kingdom.


    But suddenly somehow they lost connection with that and everyone wanted to know what happened to the human Kingdom right now and because of that they also sent those dark humans previously. But not only the dark humans they were also unable to contact those dark humans after sometimeter so in the end they decided to send 5 of those human warriors.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 499 500 - Preparing For The War

    ?


    "Actually our prediction was right. Because those Abyss humans are really nning to attack us when we won''t be paying attention to them. As I told you earlier they already gather there are many soldiers and most likely they are just waiting for the order from their Captain and after getting the order they instantly begin to approach the human Kingdom.


    But fortunately after reading the memory of those dark humans and also the memory of those Traitors I finally have some good news and most likely using that we can take advantage in this situation.


    Actually I am already able to know the real location of those Abyss humans right now. As I predicted earlier they already came to the danger zone and right now they are just waiting for the report of these dark humans and those Traitors. Not only that to fight us they also prepare many types of artifacts this time and you also know that all of those artifacts are very dangerous.


    Right now the present is inside the danger zone in the inner area. Most likely using their dark spiritual energy over the whole area and also because of this right now no Monster is disturbing them in that ce. As you know about their behavior they are already using their dark spiritual energy to control the monster inside the dangerous zone and they are already able to control many of the Monsters.


    Like the Oni Kingdom, naturally those monsters wille after our Kingdom first and then those Abyss humans will attack. Actually I am also able to know why they previously tried to control the monster who got affected by the red spiritual energy. Actually they wanted to make potions using that which are able to mutate any Monster that will be under their control and it will naturally give them advantage.


    Unfortunately, none of them are able to seed on this. But still this time they gather those artifacts that could naturally for a moment be able to increase anyone''s power. Naturally all of this is only possible because of the dark spiritual energy and if any human or any other Warriors who uses the normal spiritual energy will get insane just get using that artifact.


    Many of you most likely don''t know but previously your King went to the danger zone to capture those Traitors that also have those kinds of artifacts with them. One of them also got the chance to use that artifact and at this time that person became insane and hepletely lost the ability to think at that moment. But at the same time you can say that he is already able to reach the power level of a peak Epic grade Warrior or a warrior who is just about to be aary grade Warrior.


    So naturally everyone needed to stay careful about that because most likely those dark humans, and those Abyss humans will also have artifacts like that in this war and this could be really dangerous. Fortunately they did not have that many of those artifacts and not everyone wasb also able to use that for long.


    That artifact only has one time use for only 5 minutes so even if you face a situation like that you just need it to hold on for 5 minutes and after that the person who uses the artifact will naturally suffer from the side effect.


    Most likely only those Abyss humans will not get affected by that but the thing was that even they won''t be able to use that artefact above 5 minutes so anyone who will be facing person like that needed to hold on for 5 minutes.


    Now on the other hand almost they able to gather 10000 Monsters and naturally everyone of those Monster just waiting for they arement and they will naturallye after us. So I already told the king that we should attack those people today.


    This is fortunate that our all Warriors already present inside our human Kingdom and I also already told all the search team to came back to the human Kingdom. Around midnight we will all leave the human Kingdom and directly started going toward the base of those Abyss humans.


    Naturally each only easy because those Monsters and many of those dark humans present in that ce an everyone of them watching their surrounding but still we will be attacking them today. Also one more thing everyone should careful that no normal citizen should able to know about this because it could naturally make everyone very panick.


    Now the good thing is that inside our Kingdom with did not have dark teleportation array anymore because you we already destroy everyone of them and even those dark human once again came to our Kingdom to create them but unfortunate for them we already capture everyone of them. So everyone should rx about that no more dark teleportation array present inside our Kingdom.


    But naturally we need to careful about those Traitors. Because of this I also thinking 10 Warriors should stay behind. Those people will watch over the whole human in the world The other Warriors will go to the war. At this time those 10 Warrior should watch over the human Kingdom all the time and you need to make sure that at this time nobody leave the human kingdom or came inside of the human Kingdom. "<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Saying all of this the old thing finally finish his exnation. Naturally after hearing all of this new information everyone be very serious at this time. Naturally they already know that those people already gather many people but none of them aware of that those people also able to gather those many Monsters.


    Not only that looking at the situation most likely if those people did not get any feedback from those dark humans and those traitor they will naturally attacked the human Kingdom today. Fortunately the old King old already told them that they will be attacking today and not only that he already get to know about the base.


    But naturally right now everyone of them thinking about the artefact that the king instantly begin to show. That artifact which able to gather dark spiritual energy and also increase anyone''s power. Naturally just after realizing that everyone could know that this fight will be very tough but none of them backing up.


    Naturally after that everyone of them begin to leave the Royal pce one by one because they also need to inform their subordinate to prepare for the war. As you know previously the king did not called all the warrior present inside of the human Kingdom. He just only called those Major of Warriors of the human Kingdom and truth those major Warriors naturally every other Warriors will get to know about this and naturally those major Warriors will gather all those human Warriors for the war.


    At this time the king also told every Royal guards to get ready for the war and he also went inside to inform the other Royal guards about this. The Crown Prince also begin to prepare for the world. While the old King exining all of this he also came to the meeting room.


    Most likely right now you can say everyone begin to prepare themselves for the war. On the other hand Samalso already begin to check his inventory.


    ''Sigh, it would be really good if I get the time to break through to next grade. Naturally with this I could able to help many Warriors while fighting those Monsters and those enemies.''


    Naturally Sam was now thinking about this. The unfortunate theme was that he did not get the time to use those limit breaker to break through and right now he also did not have the time to break through. But even with that he already preparing himself to participate in the war like he did before in the previous war. Even if he did not able to help those people directly, he will help them indirectly using the concealment technique.


    __________________________


    Around midnight naturally outside of the human Kingdom as you can see almost all the human Warriors present in that ce. You can say almost 20000 of those human Warriors present in that ce but the thing was that not everyone of them were epic grade Warriors. But still none of them wanted to back down from the fight so naturally they already decided to join the war.


    On the other hand the king already select 10 Warriors who will be watching over the human Kingdom when they will go to the danger zone to attack those enemy. At this time If you wondering what happened to those Traitors or and those dark humans than the king already killed everyone of them. Living them alive only useful and it could be dangerous for the human Kingdom so he already erase them from the world.


    On the other hand if you look at all those Warriors then you will naturally saw everyone of them already prepare to die in this war to protect their human Kingdom.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 500 501 - The Start Of The War

    ?


    All those 20000 human Warriors begin to advance into the danger zone. Right now none of the citizens of the human Kingdom know about this big moment that all the human Warriors are going to war. Naturally that was the order from the king so none of the citizens got afraid or something reckless in their panic state.


    On the other hand the king led all the human Warriors toward the danger zone while the old King also followed them but he was above in the sky. Naturally the king also followed those Warriors in the ground because as you know most of the human body did not have technique that could make them fly and only after bing aary grade warrior you are able to fly in the sky without any technique but other than that you need technique.


    They move very quickly and As You Can see they already enter the outer area of the danger zone. Actually those enemies could also attack them after not getting any response from the dark humans and the traitors, so because of this, Warriors did not want to take the reach and because of this, they just wanted to reach the ce as quickly as they could.


    Almost 2 hourster they Finally entered the inner area. Naturally while going toward the inner area they make many Monsters but at this time because the king was leading all the Warriors he also released his pressure to pressurize those Monsters so they did not attack anyone.


    But naturally he will not do that all the time because as you know those enemies also have people in the danger zone that are looking all over the ce. Fortunately the old king was present there and he will naturally inform the king about this the moment he will meet any of those enemies or you can say the scout team of the enemy.


    Like this they already enter the inner area and are still advancing. After that 20 minutester finally the king signals every Warriors to stop moving. Because he already got informed by the old thing that in front of them was the base of the enemy and around the base the old King also had so many enemies watching over the surrounding.


    So natural he told everyone to stop using any kind of attack at this moment because this could also create energy fluctuation. Instantly everyone of those you want Warriors to stop using any kind of technique at the time. At this time the king quickly signals everyone to spread around that ce because he already told everyone that they will be attacked on the page at the same time.


    Naturally at this time every Warriors also became very alert because as you know those Abyss humans also already control many Monsters and those monsters are also staying around that ce and they are just waiting for the water of the leader of the enemy and with that they will immediately attack the human Kingdom.


    With that every human Warriors spread around that base. Fortunately at this time the old king was present there and he already began to guide every Warrior so that they could also avoid the scout team of the enemy and also at the same time they could avoid any type of Monsters that most likely got controlled by those enemies.


    So like this it also takes them almost 10 minutes to finally go to afortable ce where they are just waiting for the king''s order to prepare their ultimate attack and attack the enemy base at the same time. But the main thing to worry about at this moment was that the moment they will try to use their ultimate attack naturally it will create energy fluctuation and this will automatically alert all the enemies.


    Well, naturally the old King also had a solution for this. As you know that he also has this kind of technique that could create barriers that are also able to block the energy fluctuation. Previously he used that technique and because of that no citizen of the human Kingdom was able to feel any kind of energy fluctuation when the king uses his full power or you can say almost full power against the traitor.


    The moment the king got the order from the old king he instantly signaled every warrior and with that those warriors finally began to prepare their ultimate attack. Fortunately the old King already prepared that barrier or those enemies already got alerted by this because at this moment a huge amount of energy fluctuation created in that ce.


    If any Warrior tries to feel that energy fluctuation at this moment then that would make him naturally feel pressure. Not only pressure but you can say a huge amount of pressure.


    Those Warriors who could use the elementary techniques were already preparing their attack but at the same time those who were able to use the sword or any weapon like that were also using their attack at this time. Like this almost 10 minutester, finally everyone was just ready to attack the enemy base and just waiting for the order of the king.


    Naturally the king did not make them that long and already kept them the signal to attack the enemy base. With that instantly the old king deactivated the barrier and instantly every human Warriors attacked the base of the enemies.


    Naturally everyone of those enemies present there already got alerted by the energy fluctuation but at the same time they also saw so many attacksing toward them from different directions and naturally that made everyone of them alert.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Those attacks from the human Warriors already hit the barrier that those enemies created around their base. The barrier tried to protect the base but unfortunately in front of it the barrier finally broke down and those attacks one by one hit the enemy base.


    "Boom!!!!!"


    A huge explosion appeared in that ce. The explosion was so big that most of the Warriors already got sent flying backward by the impact and shock waves. It was like a hydrogen bomb just fell on that ce and created that much destruction. The whole area exploded due to those attacks and at the same time a huge amount of smoke also created in that ce. You can say that even though it was the night time but for a moment it was like it already became day time.


    Fortunately those Warriors already know something like that could happen so they try to back away from that ce, but they still got affected by that. Well, fortunately that did not get that much injured and already able to stabilize themselves and just right now looking in the direction.


    They wanted to know if they already killed all the enemy. Suddenly the king got informed by the old King that unfortunately many enemies already escape from that ce the moment they feel the energy fluctuation. Even he try to stop those enemies from leaving that ce but unfortunately he was unable to do that.


    "Roar!!!!!!!"


    In the next second those monsters who got controlled by the enemies already begin to roar and they are already going toward those Warriors. Finally those Warriors were able to know almost 40000 of those Monsters got controlled by the enemies and they went toward them. Most likely those people who controlled those Monsters already escaped from that ce and they already gave those Monsters orders to attack those Warriors.


    Not only that, everyone of those monsters already attacked those humans. Fortunately everyone of those human Warriors are already able to stabilize themselves and they also begin to counter attack those Monsters but still in front of those 40000 Monsters naturally those 20000 human Warriors are at a disadvantage.


    Finally you can say the war started. Finally those Monsters and those human Warriors begin to fight with each other. The most important thing was that everyone of those monsters belong to the inner area so naturally they won''t be like those monsters present in the outer area.


    ___________________________


    Naturally Sam also previously attack the enemy bass while using the mega fireball technique but at the same time he already know most likely they won''t be able to kill all the enemy at the same time naturally those Monster will attack them, so he created the second mega fireball and the moment he saw those Monstering towards his direction he already through that mega fireball toward those Monsters.


    As you can tell this was his most destructive technique right now so naturally it already created a huge explosion and already killed many Monsters. Not only that. You can say his fire element Once again increased in power and because of this explosion naturally biggerpared to before. But he did not stop there and once again created many fireballs and just continuously shot toward those Monsters.


    Actually not only him but those other Warriors are also doing the same thing. Everyone of them attacked those monsters continuously while those monsters also attacked them. So you can say many shes also happening because of their attacks shing with each other.


    To be continued______________

 Chapter 501 502 - Reinforcement

    ?


    Sam instantly created a firewall in front of him but at the same time he quickly deactivated the firewall and that firewall turned into a fireball. Those 10 monsters in front of him already got attacked by the fireball but naturally it wasn''t to kill them.


    But Sam naturally used that chance to make some distance from them and already created a big fireball and shot that towards the Monsters. Not just only one fireball but at the same time he uses the telekinesis technique to hold those monsters on to their ce. Fortunately he was fighting Elite grade Monsters and because of this he could still use the telekinesis technique.


    With those 10 Monsters unable to move at that time they directly got heat by the fireballs and not only that using the telekinesis technique he also tried to kill those Monsters and finally he already sessfully killed them. But naturally Sam did not get rxed because of that and directly went toward those other Monsters that were just about to attack the Warriors. Naturally not everyone has takening like this and not everyone was at an advantage.


    Naturally many of the fighters were already in a difficult situation and because of this, Sam decided to join them to fight with those Monsters. Once again he uses the telekinesis technique and also at the same time uses the mind control technique to control the body of those Monsters. Naturally controlling those 20 monsters at the same time wasn''t possible for him for very long. But even for a short time it was enough to give those other Warriors some time to attack those Monsters at once.


    Those Warriors naturally did not waste a single second and attacked those Monsters and with that they were able to kill everyone of them. Already going in the other direction but at the same time he once again created a big fireball and shot that toward that group of monsters. Naturally at this time many warriors were also already close to those Monsters and because of this he was not going to use the mega fireball technique.


    Suddenly he created a big firewall in front of some people. Naturally those people also just about to get attacked by the Monsters. Not only that if you look at their condition then you will necessarily think they were in a bad condition. Fortunately Sam was able to reach that ce in time and was able to help them.


    Sam brings out a spiritual energy potion and gulps down. Instantly he recovered The lost spiritual energy and at the same time he created many sun rays and shot that toward those Monsters. Even though those monsters have already increased in power but because of the dark spiritual energy the intelligence of the monster has already gone lower and because of this they are unable to think properly at this moment and they are also unable to react.


    Everyone of those monsters got heat in their head and finally they died. But he did not rx and he already began to advance.


    On the other hand if you look at thosemanders, then you can naturally see they are also fighting those Epic grade monsters. Even though most likely everyone of those monsters already increases in power but still everyone of thosemanders is fighting them using their full power. Fortunately at this time not that manyary grade Monsters present there. With that right now the king only handled those 10grade Monsters and because of that thosemanders and the other Warriors did not have to worry about them.


    At this time If you are wondering about those Abyss humans, dark humans and those Traitors, they still did not participate in the war and as you can tell most of them already died in the previous attack. Well you can say that most of the abyss humans and dark humans died in the previous attack and right now only half of them remain.


    Right now those enemies are observing the situation from a distance and they are also controlling those Monsters at the same time. Naturally those enemies were also waiting for the right time to participate in the war. Actually they wanted to kill most of the humans through those Monsters and only then they will participate in the war but unfortunately it wasn''t possible because at the same time the old King also present they are and naturally he also helps if the situation gets very difficult for those human Warriors to handle.


    Actually the old kings till now did not participate in the war because he was just a legendary grade Warrior like him also present in the enemy''s side. Because of this he needed to make sure that nobody like that present there and because of this he also was not directly participating in the war but still he was helping those Warriors if the situation got out of control.


    Other than that he is just only trying to save his power so if the situation gets more bad he will naturally take part and will kill as many monsters as he can. But while helping those Warriors he already noticed those enemies that were observing the situation of the war from a distance. Without wasting a single second he begins to search for those people who control those monsters right now.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Did you know that if he is able to find those people naturally he will kill them and with that those monsters who were now under the control of the dark spiritual energy will naturallye back to their natural senses. Even though that does not mean those monsters will stop attacking the human Warriors but it will make theme back to their normal strength and the effect of the dark spiritual energy will naturally make them weaker for sometime.


    Naturally like those humans and other people those monsters will get affected by the dark spiritual energy. Those Monsters also use the normal spiritual energy so while they get controlled by the dark spiritual energy their body already got affected by the dark spiritual energy. So naturally when the dark spiritual energy vanishes from their body, they naturally suffer from the side effects of the dark spiritual energy.


    Unfortunately it looks like those enemies already know that most likely every Warriors will be searching for the people who control the Monsters and because of this those enemies are also trying to protect those people who control the monster at any condition. Many people from those enemy sides already created barriers around them so that nobody could find those people who were controlling the Monsters right now.


    Naturally the old King was busy helping those other Warriors at the same time so it was quite hard for him to search for those people at the same time.


    ___________________________


    Sometimeter even though the old King helped those Warriors to those Monsters but the number of those Monsters were muchpared to those Warriors and many of those Warriors already got seriously injured and needed some time to recover from their injuries. This puts everyone of those Warriors in a disadvantageous situation and if things continue to go like this naturally every human Warriors will die or get seriously injured in the war.


    Fortunately suddenly every Warrior feels a presenceing toward them. At first everyone thought more enemies wereing toward the direction but then suddenly the old King informed everyone that reinforcements were alreadying toward them. Naturally the enforcement came from the Oni Kingdom. As you know both of the kingdoms already established a friendship and with that naturally if anything were like this The other Kingdom is naturally sending their reinforcement to help their Warrior in the war.


    Naturally every Warriors after knowing that became happy because finally the reinforcement joined them and with that the situation will be turned into good. Those Warriors who came there to help them already prepared their attack and they already attacked those Monsters that were most likely going to attack those human Warriors.


    So like that they also join those human Warriors to fight those Monsters. Naturally everyone of those Oni humans could tell that the situation right now was much worsepared to their situation when they also fought those enemies. As you know in that fight there was noary grade Monster present and because of these the king was also able to help them in the battle.


    But this time most likely those enemies were able to control thoseary Monsters and because of these the situation became much worse than before. Only the old king and the king right now upy those monsters, so that theary Monster did not affect any other Warriors at this time. But as you can tell fighting those 10ary monsters wasn''t easy for the king but fortunately the old King helped him from time to time to fight them. And not everyone of those Monsters were intermediate or peak grade.


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 502 503 - Current Situation

    ?


    Finally after reinforcement came to that ce the situation became better for all the human Warriors and with that they also began to have some advantage in that fight. Those reinforcements used the chance to their advantage and already attacked those Monsters and already killed many of those Monsters.


    But not only are they just killing those Monsters but at the same time the medical team also begins to heal all those critically injured Warriors right now. Not that the human tin did not have their medical team but as you know because many of those Warriors became injured and because of this the medical team was able to handle all the injured Warriors at the same time. But fortunately with the help of the reinforcement most likely they will be able to handle the matter.


    Not only those Warriors but even the king who fought thoseary grade Monsters also became a little rxed. But then instantly he focused on those remaining 8 Monsters. As you know, those enemies were able to control 10ary grade monsters somehow and with that the king decided to handle all those Monsters. Fortunately the king was already an intermediateary grade warrior, but on the other hand every one of those Monsters was only at early grade and naturally this was the advantage of the king.


    But the thing that made it quite hard to kill them was the number of those Monsters and most likely they were attacking King at the same time and did not give him the time to kill any of them. But unfortunately for those Monsters, King was already able to king two of those Monsters and already injured two of them seriously. Not only that but at the same time the old King also helped him when the situation became out of control.


    Naturally the king no why did not his father participating the five directly because his father also watching over the enemy and what if the enemy have a person who has the same power as his father then it will be naturally risky for every human Warriors and because of this he know that his father did not participating in the fight directly. But that does not mean the old king did not help anyone. As you can see he indirectly helped everyone while the situation became serious he already killed many Monsters and not only that he also controlled many of the monsters using his control technique and that gave those Warriors the time to attack those Monsters.


    Now because the reinforcement already came to the battleground and because of these the old King also stopped helping those Warriors and directly focusing on thoseari grade Monsters. But he is also observing the condition of those enemies right now and if somehow he feels any powerful presence near those enemies then he will immediately react.


    On the other hand he already attracts many of thoseari grade Monsters and already makes them injured. The thing was that those monsters weren''t able to react on time and because of this many of them already got seriously injured and the king instantly used the chance and killed two of them once again.


    Most likely right now all the enemies also know that the situation wasn''t in their favor and because of this day finally decided to participate in the match and with that everyone of them already preparing their attack to attack all the human Warriors and those Oni humans. Instantly they created many of the dark attacks and already attacked those people.


    But at this time suddenly the old king one second reacted and created a barrier in front of those Warriors so those attacks did not hit those warriors. Not only that if you look at those attacks then naturally you can see everyone of those attacks already creating many powerful impacts but unfortunately none of them are able to do anything to that barrier. Normally it wasn''t your normal barrier because it was created by the old king who uses the power of the legendary grade Warrior to create that.


    Now came back to other matter,


    Those abyss humans still did not know about the existence of the old King because all this time the old king was hiding himself while protecting and helping those Warriors. So all of them just think that most likely those human Warriors created that barrier but with that they could see how powerful that barrier was and wasted no time. Everyone of them began to use their artifact to gain power for a short time.


    Most likely everyone who wanted to attack those humans and those Oni humans wanted to kill them at once and because of this, suddenly from everyone of those enemies a huge energy fluctuation appeared and not only that at the same time those Monsters also had some kind of reaction because of that.


    Suddenly, all of those Monsters have some kind of effect because of the sudden increase in power. Most likely because the people who previously controlled those Monsters also used the artifact, those monsters suddenly also received a direct spiritual boost and with that day became more powerful than before.


    Every warrior present in the battlefield suddenly realized that and for a moment they became worriedabout this, but then the king told everyone in his mind to stay calm. At the same time he already reminded everyone of the n that he already discussed with them previously to how to fight with those people who had the artifact.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Fortunately as you can see the number of those people already became less and because of this this was also an advantageous situation for the human warriors and their reinforcement. But suddenly because of the increased power those people began to create attacks and the attacks already became more powerfulpared to before.


    Everyone of those remaining enemies once again attack the barrier and this time as you can see because of their powerful attack a crack suddenly appears on that barrier. But unfortunate for those people because the old King was much faster than them and he already repaired the crack of that barrier and not only that he also increased the power of that barrier.


    Most likely previously that barrier had that crack mark because all those people attacked that barrier at the same time and you should know that some of those people were also atari grade and because of this they will make that crack. Unfortunately for thoseary grade Abyss humans, even though after using the artifact they were unable to reach the legendary level and that was natural because reaching that level waspletely impossible using any kind of artifact like that.


    Fortunately the old King already took action against those people and he already attacked thoseary grade Abyss humans. Naturally as you can tell most likelypared to before or the previous war the situation already changed. Abyss already predates something like this and because of this they also bring those many people and 5 of them already reach theary grade.


    So with that aa you can naturally tell that the the enemy most likely already preparing for arge war and because of these this time those 5ary grade Abyss humans also participated in the war and naturally if this wasn''t the help from the legendary grade warriors those people would likely already dead right now.


    Sometimeter as you can tell the workers already take care of all those people and kill them. But still the main thing was that he was unable to kill everyone of them and as you can say those people will most likely be the mastermind and all of these.


    The old King is already attacking those people while the king is fighting those Monsters. But at the same time still many of the people from that ce already begin to attack.


    ___________________


    At this time inside of the kingdom those 10 Warriors are already watching over the kingdom but at the same time they already feel a huge amount of energy fluctuationing out from the danger zone. They already know that war is most likely happening. Naturally none of those Warriors rx at this time because anybody coulde to the human Kingdom at this time and what if that person belongs to the enemy group then it will be dangerous for everyone present inside of the human Kingdom.


    At this time many people wanted to enter the human Kingdom but everyone of them left that ce dejectedly because they already can see the main gate already closed and at the same time dost Warriors also observing The Kingdom all the time and because of this even if someone wanted to enter the human Kingdom with other method it will be impossible for them to enter the human Kingdom right now.


    Everyone of those Warriors got the order from the king to watch over the human Kingdom because at this time some enemy could enter the human Kingdom to spread destruction.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 503 504 - Powerful Enemy

    ?


    Came back to the battlefield,


    Finally, all of those enemies also decided to take part in the war because they could already see the situation wasn''t good after the reinforcements arrived on the battlefield.


    Because of these the situation suddenly became more intense because at the same time every one of those monsters also most likely got affected by the dark spiritual energy and suddenly every one of those monsters present there began to glow in dark color. Not only that instantly their power also increased once again and with that those Monsters once again took advantage in this fight. On the other hand, those enemies also use their artifacts from the start the moment they join the war.


    One by one every one of them created an attack with their dark spiritual energy and attacked every one of those human Warriors and the reinforcement team of the Oni Kingdom. Naturally, all of those warriors are busy fighting with those Monsters and because of this, those enemies get the time and chance to attack those Warriors without any problem.


    With that many of them already got injured but fortunately, the old king was present there and suddenly he took action and created a barrier around those Warriors for a second which gave the time for those medical teams to react and they quickly used their full power to heal those Warriors.


    With that, those Warriors once again join the war and have already begun to fight those Monsters but not only that suddenly some of the Warriors also begin to attack those enemies at this time.


    On the other hand, the king already killed 4 of thoseary Monsters but still, he needed to kill the other 6 Monsters and you can say that this became quite difficult for him because suddenly the power of those Monsters also increased because of the dark spiritual energy.


    This naturally makes the king and the old kings very alert because that means someone with a legendary grade also participated in the war and because of this that was possible. Naturally, the king already told the old King to look for that person and take care of him because if a legendary person was behind all of these then naturally only the old King would be able to handle that person.


    Because of this the old King also began to recover his lost spirit and at the same time observe the surrounding area to find that person but most likely that person wasn''t near his observation range and because of this it became quite difficult to search for. Well for a legendary grade person, this wasn''t impossible to control those monsters while he was far away from the battlefield.


    But then these also became quite dangerous for all the human warriors so naturally the old King already took action and after recovering The Spiritual energy he already floats in the sky and then instantly begins to advance on that battlefield. Naturally because of this right now he won''t be able to help those Warriors to fight those Monsters and those enemies but still, if he is able to handle that legendary great enemy he could be able to help everyone in the war.


    Most likely those Abyss humans learn from their previous mistakes and because of this, this time a legendary Abyss human also participates in the war. With that, you can naturally tell how much those enemies while preparing themselves to attack the human Kingdom and kill all the humans and other citizens of the kingdom to use them as the sacrifice for their god.


    Fortunately, the old king was present there and you should know he wasn''t a weak Warrior. He would only have problems if he faced an intermediate legendary grade Abyss human, but other than that he would not have any problems. So he was thinking that or you can say just hoping that the enemy wasn''t that powerful, so that he could easily finish the fight and help those other Warriors in the fight.


    On the other hand, the king even though having a top time but still those Monsters were weakerpared to him but the thing was that because of theirrge number, it quite became difficult. But that does not mean he will give up on the fight. As you can see right now he is already able to seriously injure two of those Monsters while those 4 remaining Monsters also get quite injured.


    The king created a barrier and then instant attack behind him. With that, he can block the iing attack and also instantly attack The Monster who is just about to attack him from behind. But it was not there because those Monsters were attacking him from all directions and with that he was very alert all the time.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Suddenly he disappeared from his ce and with that, he quickly appeared behind the monster and wasted no time quickly attacking that Monster using his attack. Instantly that monster got struck by lightning but it was not there because, at the same time, the king was already controlling the cloud in the sky. Actually from the first he was preparing for his ultimate attack but with that, he needed much time to prepare for that attack. So from the first, he was just waiting for the finish of his ultimate attack.


    If it was before then those monsters naturally feel something different and also feel theing from those clouds but right now they are unable to tell anything because every one of them became insane because of the dark spiritual energy.


    Nowing back to the battlefield, an electric field appears on that ce and every Monster near that ce receives damage from the electric field. But those Monsters even after getting attacked by the electric field were able to counter attack and the king once again created the Energy barrier in front of him to protect him from that attack.


    As you know that he was preparing for the ultimate attack so with that he was able to use full spiritual energy in that fight. Also as you know that it requires him to focus on the attacks it bes difficult but at the same time the moment he will finish that he is just hoping he will be able to kill almost every one of those Monsters. But before that, he wanted to injure those monsters so that they got directly killed by his ultimate attack or if those Monsters did not get injured and stayed perfectly like this then it could be also difficult.


    On the other hand,


    Sam instantly jumped away from the ce. But at the same time, a huge fireball appeared in that ce and directly hit the monster that was just about to attack him from beneath the ground. Right now he was fighting some Monster that was able to attack him from underground and because of this he also needed to stay careful about the vibration that wasing from the underground.


    Not only the judge of Monsters but at the same time he was fighting some Monsters that were able to attack him from the sky and with that you can naturally tell how difficult the situation is for him right now. He needed to fight Monsters that were able to travel underground and also fight those Monsters that could fly in the sky.


    Instantly, light spears begin to fall from the sky, and every one of those Monsters that were able to fly Got eaten by those Spears. But even with that, he wasn''t able to kill everyone. Fortunately, as you can see he wasn''t alone on the battlefield and many other Warriors were also fighting those Monsters with him, and at the same time those Warriors also attacked those Monsters.


    You can say that in this world Sam only decided to use the element technique Because by using the sword he won''t be able to create mass destruction because of this he was using his fire element and the light element.


    Not only the light spear but at the same time many sun rays also appear in the sky and every one of those Monsters gets attacked by them once again. In the next second Sam quickly recovers his spiritual energy using the potion. Instantly he once again felt the vibration, so he jumped upward but this time suddenly Monsters, who were able to fly in the sky, instantly attacked his direction with their wind des.


    Fortunately, before those attacks could hit him he already uses the energy shield and with that, he is able to protect himself. Not only that at the same time, those Monsters from the ground are also most likely about to attack him but he already uses the telekinesis technique and with that, he is already able to control all those Monsters.


    Because of his telekinesis technique most of the Monsters did not able to go back to the ground and with that those Warriors present already take action and already kill those Monsters but naturally, those remaining Monsters came out of his control and already go inside of ground to escape from that ce and attack them once again from beneath the ground.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 504 505 - Black Fireball

    ?


    Finally sometimeter, the old king found that enemy who was also releasing the power of his legendary grade. Naturally he could see that person was busy and most likely concentrating on those Monsters but at the same time he could also see so many epic grade Abyss humans also present there and everyone of them protecting that person.


    Everyone of them already created a strong barrier around that person and right now they are just focusing on maintaining the barrier. Not only that, those people are also looking for an enemy . If they suddenlye near that ce they will immediately react and protect that person at any cost.


    Naturally that legendary Abyss human this time takes action and controls all those Monsters and also because of this, those enemies were able to control theary grade Monstera.


    Naturally the old King while approaching that ce already hid his presence and because of this those people did not know about him and even if that legendary grade Abyss human could feel his presence, but unfortunately he was busy controlling those Monsters and right now he needed to fully concentrate on this. So naturally he is unable to observe his surroundings and with that none of them are able to know that the old King already reached that ce.


    After looking at these the old King already know that he need to take action and most likely these would be the right time to attack them because he could already saw that legendary grade Abyss human using arge amount of spiritual energy to control those Monster so naturally he won''t be able to instantly recover The lost spiritual energy and these would be the right time to attack.


    Well as you can tell that he wanted to take action against that person. Only after killing that person he was able to make everyone of those Monsterse back to their normal self and with that those human Fighters and the reinforcement team won''t have that much problem to handle them.


    So wasting no time he already attacked toward the barrier and also directly targeted those Epic grade Abyss humans. Could already tell before going for the main person he needed to go for those Minions or you can say those Epic grade Abyss humans. So he directly attacked toward that barrier using the fire element and instantly you can see a big and ck fireball directly went toward that barrier. Actually not only that but at the same time you can see many more ck fireballs also appear in the sky and everyone of them also directly went toward that barrier.


    Well first of all you should know that he did not use any type of dark spiritual energy to create that fireball, it was that his control technique already reached the max level and because of these the color of that fireball also turned ck. You should know that the ck fireball was the deadliest fireball above all the Fire element attack.


    Well the moment that big fireball hit the barrier instantly you can see it already got destroyed. Well, notpletely destroyed but because of that next attack that barrier already got destroyed even though everyone of those enemies try to maintain that barrier and already try to use their full power to heal that barrier. Unfortunately that was impossible and as you can see even that barrier began to burn by the ck fireball.


    At the same time every one of those enemies also lost control over that fireball and because of this, they also received an impact because of that. They were just searching for the enemy but they did not get that much time. Instantly many fireballs begin to fall from the sky and all of them could tell the danger that ising from those fireballs.


    Well everyone of those enemies could naturally tell that those fireballs weren''t created by the dark spiritual energy so that means the fire element already reached its maximum limit and because of this, they can also tell the danger. Instelly those enemies reacted and came in front of that legendary grade Abyss human. Even if they lost their life, they did not care about anything. Before anything they wanted to protect that person at any cost so everyone of them directly went in front of that person and shielded him from every direction.


    Not only that at the same time those enemies also reacted quickly and created more barriers. Butpared to before the power of that barrier wasn''t that powerful and also everyone of them created individual barriers. Naturally you can tell thatpared to before the power of those barriers wasn''t powerful and because of this, the moment those barriers got contact with the ck fireball everyone of them got destroyed and not only that even those enemies were also unable to protect themselves.


    Everyone of those Epic grade Abyss humans finally got hit by those fireballs and naturally everyone of them already started to burn by the ck fireballs. Well, actually the old King was already attacking them continuously using those fireballs and because of this, people were unable to escape or try to do anything to protect themselves at that moment.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Even though after getting caught in the ck fireball those people still try to escape or try to destroy that fire that started to burn them, but really everyone of them we are very unfortunate and because of that None of them able to do that and at the same time you can naturally so more fireballs already he those people and with that they begin to burn even morepared to before.


    Suddenly, all of them begin to scream in a crying voice. Right now because they are burning by those ck fireballs, they at the same time feel unimaginable pain while burning. Like this after struggling for almost 10 minutes everyone of them already turned into ash.


    But at the same time that person who previously only focused on those Monsters, most likely able to sense something definitely happened to those Abyss humans. And that means his life could also be in danger. Because of this, he already begins to look for the enemy after opening his eyes and he is already able to find the old King that is not far from his location.


    He could already tell that the old king was also a legendary grade warrior, not only that the power of that person also releasing wasn''t that weak so naturally after realizing all of these he became very serious and instantly reacted from that ce. Actually he could already ck fireballsing toward his direction but fortunately he already reacted and escaped from that ce.


    At the same time the old King also finally started attacking that person using his full power because right now he knows that to kill that person he needs to use his full power. Other than using the full power he won''t be able to kill that person so wasting no time he begins to use the full power.


    From beneath the ground suddenly a fire pir began toe out and everyone of thoseing out from the ground near that person. Well that person fortunately was already able to react on time and he was already able to save himself from those fire pirs but that was over because at the same time he needed to worry about those fireballs that were falling from the sky.


    Naturally, to protect himself he needed to stop using the control technique right now because it also required him to use arge amount of spiritual energy and with that he was also unable to properly defend himself. Not only that but at the same time he is also unable to counter attack so at the same time he is just thinking what to do.


    While thinking all of this he did not notice but he already got hit by a fire pir that suddenly came from the ground. Instantly his body begins to burn by the ck fireball. Fortunately as a legendary abyss human he naturally wasn''t a weak person andto quickly destroy that fire that just began to burn his body.


    Naturally to do this he needed to use the Spiritual energy and at the same time he needed to create the defense barrier around his whole body that was the only way to protect himself right now and using his dark spiritual energy he already created a barrier. But not only that suddenly he could already see many more fireballsing toward his direction, so you already created a firewall in front of him and naturally that was able to protect him from those uing fireballs.


    But the thing was that he won''t be able to maintain that firewall for long and even though the color of the fireball that he was using also dark but as you know he able to do that only using the dark spiritual memory so natural that wall which got created by the dark spiritual energy only able to protect himself from those natural dark hair balls that already reach the maximum limit and already begin to burn the firewall.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 505 506 - Intense Situation

    ?


    You can say that the battle between two legendary grade people was happening far away from the battlefield Warriors fighting those enemies and those Monsters. But still you can say that everyone in the battlefield can feel the impact that was created by their attack.


    Both of them were each other using their full power so naturally impact like this was created by that and right now if you look at the old King then you can see even though he already became injured but the situation wasn''t that serious. On the other hand, if you look at the enemy then you can see his situation was very seriouspared to the old king.


    First of all he was already low on spiritual energy and did not get the time to recover his lost spiritual energy. Not only that the old King also continuously attacked him so naturally he needed to differentiate himself and at the same time he also began to counter attack using the remaining spiritual energy.


    So like this the old King was already in an advantageous situation. Most likely eat this and continue like this then the enemy will naturally die and because of this suddenly he also decided to use the artifact and with that suddenly the power of that enemy increases and once again his condition returns to his peak State.


    Fortunately the old King already prepared for that before that enemy could attract him; he already created a very powerful attack and directly attacked that enemy. You can say the name of that attack thunder me destruction. Well, the old king was not only able to control the me element but at the same time he was able to control many other elements. Well, not only that he could also use the telekinesis technique.


    But until now he did not use any of his other techniques because he wanted to use them when that enemy didn''t expect any kind of attack like this. As you know that because both of them are almost in the same power level and if that enemy also has some kind of technique like that then naturally he won''t be able to injure or kill his enemy using that type of attack.


    But that does not mean he will not use that. He is just waiting for the right time to use all of his power to Attack his enemy. From the start he was just waiting for the right time.


    Because of that thunder me destruction a huge destruction appeared on that ce and that person or you can say that Abyss human did not even get the chance to react or escape from that ce. Actually when those enemies used the artifact they needed some time to adjust themselves. So the old King uses that time to attack that person and naturally that person is unable to react on time.


    The impact was so powerful that even many Monsters and other people also got sent flying by the impact. Not only that, you can say that almost the area over 5 km got destroyed by that attack.


    Naturally the old King knew this only enough to kill that person so he was already preparing his next attack but suddenly deactivated that technique and already created an energy in front of him because arge dark spear suddenly hit his energy shield. Naturally that abyss human attacked him with that.


    Finally you can see how much damage that enemy takes from the previous attack. Almost you can see the bonesing out from his body but at the same time he is also healing rapidly. Most likely this is one of the benefits that the artifact gave him and because of this he was right now healing quickly.


    But naturally the old king was only defeated with just one attack and because of this, the enemy continuously began to attack him.


    Once again a very intense battle between both of them started and right now nobody even dared to go close to that ce. Even though using the artifact that enemy good able to heal himself but that does not mean he will be impossible to kill and you should also know that this artifact only make him like this for 5 minutes and after 5 minutes naturally he came back to his old self and also he will receive the side effect of using the artifact.


    So the old king was also waiting for the time toe so that he could quickly kill that person and then go help those other human Warriors. Wellpared to that Abyss human, the old King already reached the limit of the early legendary grade, because of this naturally he will be powerfulpared to him. Even after using the artifact that enemy won''t be able to reach the same power level as him.


    _______________________


    A very intense battle is also happening between the king and thoseary grade Monsters and the abyss humans. Actually while fighting those Monsters the king already saw one of the Abyss humans also aary grade, so naturally he needed to make that person distract from the battlefield so that none of the other Warriors got killed by him.


    Fortunately he already killed 8 of those Monsters and right now only two of them remain and not only that but those two Monsters are also very injured right now. So he decided to also take action against that enemy and instantly created an attack and directly attacked that person. Not only that suddenly he grabs both of the Monsters without giving them any time to react and goes toward that person.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    If you are wondering about the thunder clouds then he is already able to finish the ultimate attack and using that he already killed those 6 Monsters at the same time and not only just those two Monsters but at the same time he also killed many other Monsters and also many other enemies.


    Naturally he uses arge amount of spiritual energy and because of this for a moment he also get injured by those Monsters but naturally after using the potion and also help from hismander, he able to recover and with that he once again begin to fight those Monsters and not only that at the same time he already able to injured that enemy.


    Only aftering close to that ce did he realize that the person wasn''t really aary great Abyss human. But using the dark artifact he was able to increase his power to that level and because of this he previously also felt quite weird when he looked at that person. Also naturally that person was just only able to reach early grade, so as you can tell the king already has the advantage in this fight.


    Suddenly thunderbolts appear in the sky and everyone of those thunderbolts attack those Monsters. This time those two Monsters unable to do anything and also unable to heal themselves. Actually because of the side effect, those Monsters already got injured and the king also made them more injured so naturally right now those Monsters were in a critical condition and using that he finally killed all the Monsters.


    But the king did not get happy because he instantly attacked the abyss human. That person already got injured by his previous attack and right now because the king is already able to recover his full spiritual energy that person naturally had no chance to win against him even after increasing his power toary grade.


    But still that does not mean, he will give an ab on the fight and using his full power he is also fighting the King all the time. Suddenly everyone got hit by an intense impact. Even the king and that enemy also got hit by that impact.


    Most likely father already found that person and right now an intense battle happened between them. I should try to kill that person as quickly as I could, so I could also help the other Warriors.''


    The king thought that and instantly a thunder doom appeared around that enemy and suddenly that whole ce got struck by a red lightning bolt.


    ________________


    Well if you are wondering why the king worried about the safety of those Warriors, then it was because the situation wasn''t good for those warriors right now. After suddenly facing those powerful Monsters and those enemies they are unable to defend themselves and more Warriors begin to get seriously injured. Even the medical team was unable to heal every one of them and because of this the condition of those warriors were in a very dangerous situation.


    At the battlefield you can see Sam also fighting those Monsters and even attacking those enemies but suddenly because everyone of those enemies and monsters be so powerful even he can also feel the danger and know that if right now he did not do anything then it could be a very dangerous situation.


    So he wasted no time and used the concealment technique to disappear from that ce. Not only that, instantly every Monsters and the enemies who previously attacked got confused by his sudden disappearance. Suddenly some of those Monsters got hit by Sunray. That makes them burn. Not only that at the same time many other Monsters and the enemies also begin to receive damage out of nowhere.


    None of them were able to guess who was attacking them, but as you can tell Sam was the one who took action against those monsters and those enemies. The good thing was that every Traitors of the human Kingdom got killed and not only that even though dark humans already got killed.


    Compare to those monsters and Abyss humans those dark humans and those humans wear the one who received most of the damage and because of this, They also unable to maintain the artifact for 5 minutes and before 5 minutes they begin to receive the side effect of that artifact and with that those people already got seriously injured and the warriors already finish all of them.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 506 507 - Finally

    ?


    Even though some helped those Warriors while using his concealment technique and attacking those Monsters and those enemies continuously, as you can see the situation did not improve that much. Well because of the sudden increase in the power of the Monsters enemies enemies the situation bes like this.


    Naturally everyone knows that they just need to wait for 5 minutes and only then will they have an advantage over those enemies and those Monsters. But the thing was that it was only just 3 minutes and the situation was already very bad for human Warriors. The most sad thing was that some Warriors already died because of those Monsters.


    Naturally everyone was very sad but at the same time they were also angry at those Monsters and those enemies. Even though they felt exhausted and did not have that much spiritual energy, none of them gave up on their fight and used their little bit of remaining strength to fight everyone.


    Naturally, Sam also knows that and because of this he was also helping those people who were in a very dangerous situation and not only that at the same time he is also trying to give the potions to those people who were in a critical situation.


    Fortunately he already knew something like this would happen and because of this, beforeing to the work he already requested the king to prepare arge amount of health and spiritual potions. After hearing that naturally the king that time came to surprise but then he also remembered the word of the Oni king, so wasting no time he prepared those potions.


    Right now he is helping those people but even with that he is still unable to save those people who died because of those enemies'' sudden attack. You can say that Sam also began to feel very guilty and at the same time he was very angry at those enemies. At the same time he was feeling if he was able to collect the limit breaker previously and able to break through then situations like this would not ur in this battlefield.


    Unfortunately right now he is unable to do anything. But he was already working very hard to make sure that nobody died on the battlefield. He also hoped that the king and the old King would quickly finish their fight ande here to help everyone but at the same time they should also stay careful from their Monsters.


    One thing was that sometime ago he also already felt the huge impact that was most likely created by the sh between two powerhouses. Naturally he could tell the old King was most likely fighting someone. Only then Sam realizes because of this old King, unable to help those people previously.


    On the other hand,


    The king already could see the situation of those human Warriors and the reinforcement team, but unfortunately he was also busy killing theary grade Abyss humans. Actually he thought only one of them was able to break through toary grade but unfortunately when he was very close to finishing the previous Abyss human who using the artifact becameary grade Warrior, suddenly at that time 3 more Abyss humans broke through toary grade.


    Naturally as you can tell the forcefully broken through using the artifact and naturally they will receive the side effect but still it will take them 5 minutes and only after that they will receive the side effect. But the thing was that the king did not expect anything like this and with that he was also unable to react on time while those three people suddenly attacked him.


    Fortunately he wasn''t wearing your normal armor. The armor he was wearing right now also increased the power of his defense. Because of this you can say that he did not get seriously injured but if it wasn''t for the armor he would have been already in a critical situation. But the thing was that those sudden appearances of theary grade enemies instantly put him in a difficult situation where he also did not get the time to recover his spiritual energy.


    At this time the king just hopes that every human Warriors and the reinforcement team is able to survive for 5 minutes because after that everyone of them will have the advantage over those Monsters and enemies but until then they need to be alive in the battlefield.


    On the other hand the old King was also already very close to finishing his opponent. It is just that he did not expect that the enemy would use a second artifact the moment he was about to kill him. Using that second artifact most likely the power of that enemy increases once again but then at the same time he can also see most likely the body of the enemy wasn''t able to handle that sudden power and because of this he could also see many cracks already appear in the body of that enemy.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    But that enemy did not care about his body. Right now he just wanted to kill the old king and because of this using the second artifact he did not waste a single second and already attacked the old King continuously. Well unfortunately for that person even with that increased strength he was unable to reach the same power level as the old king and with that the old King was also able to react on time and was already able to counter attack.


    Suddenly once again thunder Dragons appear in the sky and instantly attack that enemy and not only that the whole area is also suddenly hit by a big ck fireball that falls down from the sky. Most likely using the second artifact the mind of that person already became insane and because of this he is also unable to think properly right now. It was like he became a mad Monster who just wanted to kill the old king right now.


    Naturally the old King used that to his advantage and also attacked that Abyss human continuously. Not only that, after that suddenly many thunderbolts and fireballs begin to fall from the sky. Also the old king knew that this was the right time to use the telekinesis techniques so he did not waste a single second and directly control the body of that monster.


    Well, when that enemy suddenly felt the force that was most likely controlling his body and that made him unable to move he instantly became more angry and tried to put more pressure on his body. But at the same time many thunderbolts and the fireballs directly hit the team and that naturally made the condition of the person very serious.


    The old King already finished from his ce and already came in front of that person. If you look at the hand of that old King then you will see his hand already became ck and that directly attacked the enemy. That person did not even get the chance to react or do something because you can see the hand of the old King already pierced through the body of that person and with that the old King already destroyed the heart of that person.


    Finally after all of this the old King killed the enemies. Well he instantly did not go toward the battlefield because using all of these attacks he was already feeling exhausted but he also knew that he did not have that much time to rest, so naturally he quickly brought out the health potion and spiritual energy potion. Using both of them he wants again to recover his peak state and directly go toward the battlefield.


    This time the old king will be able to properly participate in the battlefield and with that the chance of winning of those human Warriors and the reinforcement team already fixed.


    On the battlefield,


    Even though Sam was helping those Warriors but as you know he won''t be able to reach every ce instantly so because of these many Warriors already just about to died by those enemies or those Monsters, but suddenly out of no wire everyone present there begin to feel a pressure that approaching them but at the next second one by one many Monsters and many enemies begin to fall in the ground. Not just they are falling to the ground but if you look at them then you can see that all of them have just died.


    For a second nobody could tell what was happening but at the same time they could already feel that pressure already came very close to them. Only then does everyone realize it was the old king who finally came back to the battlefield and the moment everyone looks at him they once again begin to smile and all of them feeling the hope that they previously lost.


    The old King, aftering to the battlefield, already saw the situation of those human Warriors and those reinforcement teams and just looking at the dead bodies of those Warriors he already became angry. But the thing was that he did not release his special because he also knows right now using that is only helpful because those Monsters and those enemies are using the artifact and naturally they already have dark spiritual energy in their mind and with that nobody will be able to be scared.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 507 508 - The War Is Over

    ?


    Naturally because of the old king that situation already became different for all the warriors right now. As you can see the moment he appear on the better field he already begin to kill those monsters. Well, using his telekinesis technique he already killed most of the monsters and the remaining monsters also get affected by the telekinesis. All those monsters already lost the control over their body and because of these none of them also able to attack any of the warriors right now.


    Naturally, all the enemy present in the battlefield also got very confused by these because until now none of them able to notice the Old King and because of these everyone we can very confused by that sudden movement and when they notice many monsters just begin to fall down on the ground they also be very alert.


    Everyone begin to search for the enemy who previously killed all those monsters but unfortunately for them none of them to find the old king. Actually the old king already flying very high in the sky but still he able to control all the monsters and their whole body. Actually, he could killed all the monsters but he has different n and with that he already begin to control the body of those monsters and already as you can see in the battlefield every one of those monsters stop attacking the Warriors but instantly begin to attack those enemies or you can say those abyss humans.


    All of this happen three suddenly that none the enemy able to react on time and necessarily they also did not predict something like this. On the other hand all the warrior present in the battlefield already sigh in relief the moment they notice that those monsters begin to attack those enemies. Even though most of the Warriors did not notice the old thing but they could already tell most likely the Old king already came to the battlefield and he was doing all of this.


    It wasn''t that they didn''t thing that was the king, But the king was still fighting those enemies and because of these the old king will be the one who helping all the Warriors right now.


    Now came back to the present matter, already the situation of those enemies became very serious. They just getting continuously attacked by those monsters and even if they try to kill those monsters but somehow even if they kill them those monsters still able to attack them and that was the most dangerous thing.


    So like this one by one as you can see already many of those enemies died and only a few of them remaining in the battlefield. Well, naturally they already killed most of the enemies by their surprise attack and because of these right now in the battlefield only few of them remaining and when the Old King taking action those enemies also did not have the chance to escape or counter attacked.


    Even though the effect of the artifact did not went awaybut still those enemies one by one begin to died. All of this happen very quickly that even all the warriors present in the battlefield got surprised but then they naturally became happy. As you know many warriors also died in the battlefield so naturally they also very happy for those warriors that finally the old king take revenge for those warriors.


    On the other hand the king also finally appear on that battlefield but naturally he could already saw already all the enemies died by those monsters and not only that after killing all the enemies those monsters also suddenly fall down on the ground. Naturally the Old King also killed all the monsters after finishing his work. But the thing was that he wasn''t finished there and instantly you can see many fireballs appear on the sky.


    Right now every Warriors could see the whole sky already filled with those fireballs. Naturally every one of them be confused because of that but then in the next second every one of them realized what was the old king nning to do with those fireballs.


    Actually instantly those fireballs begin to fall from the sky and every one of those fireballs directly hit the dead body of those monsters and those abyss humans, dark humans and those Traitors. Actually for the old king every one of those enemies and those monsters were like a virusthat could affect the human kingdom so naturally he wanted to burn everything and with that he already attacked the dead body of those enemies and those monsters and instantly all the dead bodies begin to burn away.


    After that every warriors present in the battlefield begin to cheer loudly. They finally win the war and they already killed all their enemies so naturally it was a time to celebrate their victory and with that they already begin to celebrate that. Well, even though every one of them also very sad about that they already lost some of their friends but still that was the time to celebrate and they were doing that.


    At this time even the old looking and the human king being also became happy after seeing everyone of those warrior celebrating. Naturally The medical team finally also get the time to heal everyone of those injured warriors and they were finally doing that without any type of interference. Well, many of those Warriors in a very bad situation but fortunately because of the help of those medical team they already recover.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Actually some of them also very close to die and some of them already lost some of their body parts. But as you can see because of the strong healing technique every one of them already recover and they even recover their lost body part so with that they already became happy.


    Like this every Warriors begin to rest for some time and after 5 hourster, When most of the Warriors already recover, the king at this time told everyone to carry the dead body of theirrade into the human kingdom because the king will give every one of those warriors a proper farewell so that every citizen of the human kingdom also know the name of their heroes who sacrifice their life to protect all the citizen of the human kingdom.


    Naturally after hearing that every one of those Warriors once again became very sad while they begin to think about theirrades. But at the same time they should also proud of theirrades who sacrifice their life for the human kingdom so naturally they will also be happy when the king will give them a proper farewell and their name will be written in the book of Hero.


    So like this right now every one of those warriors already begin to walk toward the human kingdom. Even the reinforcement team also going toward human kingdom. Naturally they already wanted to go back to their own kingdom but the human king told them as a guest of the human kingdom and also as a hero of the human kingdom they should first go to the human kingdom and after recovering fully they should go back to their kingdom.


    All this time Sam also present there and he also already deactivate the concealment technique. Well you can say that before the old king take action in the battlefield he was continuously helping most of the Warriors but still as you know he won''t be able to present everywhere and with that the situation just keep getting worse.


    Even though not of those people have any kind of rtionship with him but still he began to feel very usless in that kind of situation and naturally for a moment he did not know what to do. Even after having superior techniques he unable to do anything. Fortunately at that time the old king already take action and killed those monsters and those enemies.


    Only then Sam deactivate his technique but then he already fall down on the ground. To help those warriors he already using his spiritual energy in its maximum limit so naturally he will be so much exhausted that he already begin to feel pain in his head and most likely that situation could get worse but before something like that happened the medical team already take action.


    Naturally with that he finally begin to rx and all these time he just resting on the ground. But then after 5 hourster he also going back toward the human kingdom with those other warriors. At this time many of those Oni humans Who came to the battlefield as a reinforcement also recognize him and they also begin to ask him about this situation.


    Naturally as you know that for all the Oni humans Sam was their friend and he also the noble guest of their kingdom. With that most of them also show their respect to him.


    _________________________


    On the other hand all the Warriors present inside the human kingdom already to get to know that they finally win the war and everyone right nowing back to the human kingdom. Not only that they also finally get the permission from the king to announce about these two everyone and with that those warriors finally doing that.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 508 509 - Coming Back

    ?


    Naturally sometimeter as you can see those Warriors finally reach the outer area of the danger zone and a few minutester they can also see the human Kingdom. Not only that at this time they can also see something most likely different about the human Kingdom as they can see many people right now waiting outside of the human Kingdom and most likely those people already notice them and because of this those people looking in their direction with excitement and pride in their eyes.


    Naturally except the king and the old king nobody knows that every citizen of the human Kingdom also gets to know about the war and they finally win the War. So naturally that makes everyone of them confused but then when everyone of the citizens began to cheer loudly for everyone of those Warriors, only then most likely those Warriors understand that everyone of the citizens is doing like this to wee them in the human Kingdom.


    Every citizen naturally gets very shocked when they previously get to know about the war but then they are also able to know that the human Kingdom finally wins the war and every warrior finallyes back to their Kingdom. So naturally they decided to wee all of those warriors like this. Actually those citizens wanted to show their proudness and respect to those Warriors that they finally won the War.


    So naturally everyone of those warriors enter the human Kingdom while being weed by the citizens. One by one everyone of those Warriors went back to their home to rest and the king also already told the royal guards to prepare room for all those reinforcement teams. Naturally those people are also friends of the human Kingdom who came to the battlefield when the situation of the human Warriors wasn''t that good and most likely if it weren''t for the reinforcement team then the situation of the human Warriors would be very bad right now.


    ___________________


    Next day,


    Early in the morning the king announced that today you will hold a farewell ceremony for all those heroes who died on the battlefield. Naturally every citizen and Warriors of the human Kingdom will participate in that moment to say goodbye to those Warriors who sacrifice their life for the human Kingdom.


    Around 12:00 p.m. even Sam was also present there. Even though he did not know most of those Warriors, still she also really respected those Warriors who did not think about anything and just sacrificed their life to protect the human Kingdom and all the citizens.


    Naturally as a good king the human King also told everyone that the family members of all those heroes will be receiving help from the royal family and in future if they needed any help they should immediately contact the royal family and the royal family will help them in any condition. Not only that if any family member of those people wanted to be a good Warrior they could also learn under the royal family.


    Naturally the king did not have the power to bring back those dead Warriors, but still he could at least give all the resources to help the family members of those heroes.


    _____________________


    Aftering back from the memorial ground Sam already decided to focus on his breakthrough. As you know right now he did not have to worry about those enemies and any other thing so he already decided to break through. Still now, he was thinking that if he was able to break through previously then he could at least protect those Warriors who died in the battlefield.


    So right now he did not have anything to worry about and he could only focus on breaking through right now. With that just aftering back to his room he already brought out the limit breaker and already sat down in a meditative position. You already begin to use those limit breakers and already begin to attack the barrier.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    As you know every time any Warrior reaches the limit of his grade, at that time you will naturally feel the barrier or you can sayyer that stops them from advancing further. In that situation they need to break that barrier to advance further than that. Naturally using the normal way it wasn''t that easy to break that barrier as you know that barrier most likely has more powerpared to that Warrior. Only using the limit breaker could they get the extra power to break the barrier so most of the Warriors would prefer to use the limit breaker.


    Before anything Sam is already in a deep meditation and already can feel the barrier. Naturally he could feel the barrier was far more powerful than him and breaking that normal will take much time. Also he wasn''t sure if he would be able to break that barrier or not. The thing was that previously he already tried to break the barrier using those other limit breakers but unfortunately he wasn''t able to damage that much and most likely that barrier also has the ability to recover.


    Fortunately this time he was using a powerful limit breaker and with that the moment he came inside of his consciousness he could already feel that extra power and with that he already began to attack that barrier continuously. Actually using the limit breaker will give any Warriors and extra power that was very useful against this type of barrier.


    He could already feel that finally that barrier begins to take serious damage and it won''t take him that long to break that barrier. But at this time Sam did not realize that it already took him 1 day to do that. At this time naturally he was only busy on this so he also forgot about the time and just focused on this.


    On the other hand the king also announced to the whole human Kingdom that two dayster he will hold the winning ceremony for every citizen and every warrior. Not only that he also invited the Oni king. Because he was the person who also responded very quickly and already sent his people to the battlefield to help those human Warriors. Naturally even if they have that agreement, the Oni King will ignore the agreement in a situation like this where it also confirms that those Oni humans could also lose their life. But fortunately even after knowing all of these the Oni King decided to send those people to help those human Warriors.


    On the other hand he also told everyone of those Oni warriors that until the ceremony they should stay inside of the human Kingdom. He already prepared a very big guest house for everyone and naturally he told them that 2 dayster in the celebration you will also reward them with something so until then they should not leave the human Kingdom. He also informs them he already invited the Oni king and most likely you will also present in that situation.


    On the other hand right now the old king and the king are also present in the interrogation room with those 10 Warriors who previously stayed inside of the human Kingdom to protect all the human citizens and other people. Actually at that time when everyone busy in the battlefield the warrior inside of the human Kingdom also face quite dangerous situation where many people suddenly decided to enter the human Kingdom but fortunately before they could do that all those 10 Warriors preventing that and not only that those Warriors also get to know everyone of the Warriors were also dark humans.


    Actually, as you know, those Abyss humans send many of those dark humans in the Terraria to go to many different kingdoms. So naturally when the battles ur the Abyss humans present in the Abyss world already get to know about that and they also already know that half of the Abyss humans already got killed because of the sudden attack from those enemies. Because of this, those people also order some of those dark humans to forget about their current mission and quickly go to the human Kingdom to attack them.


    But unfortunately for those dark humans, even in a situation like this the human Kingdom wasn''t exactly defenseless as the king already appointed Warriors to protect the human Kingdom when they were busy on the battlefield. Also everyone of those Warriors had already reached the Epic grade. On the other hand everyone of those dark humans most likely already reach elite grade or early Epic grade.


    So you can say that naturally those Warriors had the advantage but suddenly those dark humans began to use the artifact. We did naturally their power begin to increase but still in the end every one of them got defeated by those warriors and like these warriors protect the human kingdom.


    Fortunately those dark humans weren''t able to maintain that powerful state for long as the dark spiritual energy already began to affect their body so before 5 minutes everyone of them got affected by the dark spiritual energy and those injured Warriors at that time used that chance as their advantage to kill everyone of those enemies.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 509 509 - Busy In Breaking Through

    "Huh? So he gets busy breaking through? Sigh, most likely it will take him sometime so he won''t be able to attend the celebration ceremony. Well, actually I cannot believe him for this because after the war I can tell most likely he was also feeling guilty that those people previously died. I tried to talk to him but it looked like he was feeling that if he was able to break through previously then he could at least save those people. Well try to Guard that ce and try to one everyone that not to disturb him while he is busy breaking through."


    Currently the king said that to his subordinate. Well, sometime ago he told that subordinate to call Sam. But his subordinate told him that Sam was right now busy breaking through and because of this, nobody tried to disturb him in a situation like this.


    After learning all of these, the King naturally told the Guard that ce so that nobody would try to disturb him in a situation like this. Actually when someone is busy breaking through if they suddenly lose focus then they will naturally receive a bacsh because of that and that could also kill them. So as you can tell this was also a very dangerous thing and with that it will be dangerous if someone tries to disturb him.


    If you are wondering why the king also know that the Sam was feeling guilty, then previously when Sam came back to the Royal pce because the king told him to stay there until he decided to stay in the human Kingdom, both king and Sam talk for sometime and in that case he able to know what he was thinking right now.


    Well, naturally even the king was feeling guilty because of those Warriors who died. Even he wanted to fully focus on increasing his power so that nothing like this would ever happen but as you know as the king he won''t be able to do that. He also needed to maintain the peace in his Kingdom so he cannot fully focus on increasing his power.


    But the thing was that after the war the old King already fully focused on breaking through like Sam so only when the Old King finished his breaking to the king will he fully focus on breaking through.


    But because the old King won''t be able to help him observe the kingdom so naturally he already told the royal guards to look over the kingdom. Actually he still thinks that many more Traitors could present inside the human Kingdom so he will naturally not let down his guard.


    Also one more thing after knowing that when they were in the battlefield those dark humans decided to attack the human Kingdom also made him quite serious and naturally he was very alert about those dark humans. As he already told the Oni Kingdom, he also tried to tell his other friends that their kingdom also became allowed about that and situations like this did not appear in their Kingdom.


    All the people of the Oni Kingdom after knowing that Sam was busy in breaking through also get sad that they won''t be able to meet him but then they just hope Sam will be sessfully able to break through.


    _______________________


    Actually after this incident you can say that many Kingdom became very alert about that and everyone of them also increased the security in their Kingdom. First of all everyone needed to be alert about those dark humans and not only that they also needed to search if their Kingdom had any Traitors or not. Even the human King seriously did not know that they have that many Traitors, naturally in the end the human Kingdom had many Traitors.


    Because of this everyone of those Kingdom also gets very serious about this as some of them are also able to know that those Abyss humans are targeting many kingdoms because they wanted to kill them to use them as the sacrifice for their god so naturally they will also get very serious about that.


    Currently, nobody knows about the situation of the abyss world, but one thing was that after this incident those people will also not let down their guard. Their kingdom could be the next Kingdom that those Abyss humans will target and if they did not get serious about that, then everyone in that Kingdom could lose their life and those Abyss humans will use them as the sacrifice for their God.


    But everyone of those people who previously fought the Demons and already knew about the power of the Demons was serious about those Demons and at any condition they knew that they needed to stop those abyss humans. Actually all the information about those Abyss humans did not get hidden by the human Kingdom and spread around The World So that everything present in the Terraria would also get aware of that.


    Previously when those Demons attacked the Terraria everything present in Terraria became one to eliminate all the Demons. So natural as you can tell what kind of danger those demons pose and because of this naturally those people who were ever aware of the power of those Demons also became serious about this method. But the thing was that nobody knows the location and how to reach the Abyss world.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Even if they know how to create the dark teleportation array, they won''t be able to use it until they do not have the dark spiritual energy. That Abyss world was in a separate dimension and the whole Abyss world was felt with dark spiritual energy so even if those people go to that ce they will get affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    Only those people who were able to resist the dark spiritual energy, or had any kind of technique that good help them to resist the dark spiritual energy will be able to go to that ce.


    The thing was that currently nobody present in the Terraria knows about the origin spiritual energy. So naturally those people did not know that the dark spiritual energy was also a part of the spiritual energy but somehow it got separated and became like this. But everyone of them present in the Terraria The Spiritual energy they used was superiorpared to the spiritual energy that those others use.


    Actually, as you know most of them have already visited many ces to know about them and already write down every information of that. So that information shows them using superior spiritual energypared to those people and people from those others also did not have any type of technique to extract the true spiritual energy.


    The physique of those people from other worlds did not have that tell them to absorb the true spiritual energy directly so naturally they would require some kind of technique to do that and their body also needed time to adjust in that spiritual energy.


    _________________


    Now came back to the main matter,


    2 dayster the king held the ceremony inside the human Kingdom and every warrior participated in that celebration with citizens of the human Kingdom. Naturally at that time nobody will be able to enter the human Kingdom or they will be able to go out of the human Kingdom.


    Even the people from the Oni Kingdom participate in that celebration but unfortunately the Oni King is unable toe to the human Kingdom but you can say Livia and Emma are able toe back to the human Kingdom and they also participate in the celebration with other Warriors.


    ______________


    "Sister Emma, looks like Sam needed much more time to break through. I really wanted to meet him but disturbing him in a situation like this could be dangerous. But I already talked to my father and he already gave me permission to stay inside the human kingdom for a few days."


    " Don''t worry I already sense the aura of Sam. Most likely he is very close to breaking through to the next grade. Using the limit he was currently continuously attacking theyer right now. But as I told you should also focus on increasing your power because right now the situation of our has also be quite serious as we continuously get Attacked by those enemies. I also hear that this time those enemies also use some kind of artifact that makes them more powerful.


    Really, who could tell us that if those people get a more powerful artifact than that they will not attack us once again? So because of that we should be powerful as much as we can so that in a situation like this one second we would be able to handle those enemies."


    After the celebration was over, naturally Livia and Emma were present inside the Royal pce of the human Kingdom and in that ce both of them talking about those enemies and Sam. Naturally Livia wanted to meet him but unfortunately he was busy so she did not disturb him.

 Chapter 510 510 - Druid Kingdom

    ?


    3 monthster,


    After that previous were it already became three months. In these 3 months, many things also happen. Well, those abyss humans naturally after not being able to capture the human Kingdom directly shit their focus toward other kingdoms and they also n to attack those kingdoms. But that does not mean they will not attack the human kingdom or the Oni Kingdom once again.


    Fortunately, as you know previously the human King did not hide the information so every Kingdom already get to know about those enemies and they already became very alert about that. So they already became very serious about security and other things after the war between the human Kingdom and those Abyss humans.


    So after that naturally those Kingdom became very serious and every one of them also get to know that those Abyss humans sending those dark humans to create those types of direct teleportation arrays and not only that most likely those dark humans also had another purpose that was to contact the traitors of any kingdom.


    Naturally, the human king reveals all this information so that those other kingdoms already get serious about those Abyss humans. Fortunately because of this many of those kingdoms are able to find those dark humans and already kill them. Not only that but at the same time they also destroy all those teleportation arrays that already got created inside of their kingdom. Many of those kings were also able to find many traitors inside their kingdoms and every one of them already got punished.


    So like this, you can say that in these 3 month, most of the kingdoms already destroy all the teleportation arrays that got created by those dark humans. Not only that they also already have many Traitors. But the thing was that for these 3 months suddenly those Abyss humans became inactive and theypletely Vanish from terraria.


    Even though those dark humans created those dark teleportation arrays they got the information that those dark humans already got sent to many different kingdoms before the war between those humans and those Abyss humans. So naturally for these 3 month, none of those Abyss humans decided to do anything against other kingdoms.


    Well, many people also started to think that most likely after the previous war, those Abyss humans suffered heavy damage, because of this, they became inactive, and most likely right now they are busy recovering their strength.


    But the thing was that even after predicting something like that none of those Warriors get rxed because of this. Naturally, everyone knows that most likely those Abyss humans could appear on Terraria anytime and if any Kingdom at the time did not prepare themselves they will naturally be wiped out by those enemies.


    Well, in these 3 months, other than that many more interesting things happened. Right now not only the Oni Kingdom, but many other kingdoms also established friendships between themselves and the human kingdom. Naturally, they did that so everyone could help each other When the situation will be very critical for their kingdom.


    Not only these at the same time the Warrior Association also increase the missions and with that, the Warrior Association also increases the reward of those missions. At the same time, those Warriors around the world right now also focusing on increasing their power because they could also get attacked by those abyss humans next. Naturally, before something like that happened, they wanted to prepare themselves for a situation like this.


    Also many kingdoms at this time support the warrior association when the Warrior Association announced that 6 monthster, apetition will be held in the center of the Terraria. Naturally, that would be your normalpetition and the warrior association after getting support from those kingdoms also prepared some special gifts or you can say resources for the winners.


    On the other hand, every one of those Warriors also got very excited after hearing about thepetition. Every one of them already preparing themselves to be powerful and to face those enemies, but at the same time when they heard about thepetition they naturally also became very excited because they could already predicate the first prize in thispetition will be very useful for them, as it will be able to make them more powerful and naturally who did not want to be powerful?


    So like this in these 3 months, many things like that happened and because of these 3 monthster naturally, you can say that everyone was still preparing themselves for thepetition that will be after 3 monthster. The good thing was that anybody could participate in thispetition and because of this nobody have to worry about anything. Those people just only needed to focus on bing powerful and winning the first prize.


    On the other hand, many kingdoms also created small search teams that will get the mission to observe the danger zone from time to time. Naturally, those people created those search teams so that if a situation where Suddenly many Abyss humans getting back to Terraria those kingdoms will immediately be able to know that and they could immediately take action against those enemies.


    ________________________<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Now on the other,


    If you think about Sam then he already lived in the human kingdom and also already finished visiting two more kingdoms in the Terraria. After the previous world, he decided to stay inside of the human kingdom for a few more days and after that, he already left the human kingdom to go for the next kingdom. Naturally, he will go to those kingdoms that have good rtions with the human kingdom. As he also knows that many kingdoms did not like the human kingdom and if he goes to those kingdoms then he will naturally get attacked by everyone.


    He already finishes visiting two kingdoms that weren''t that far away from the human Kingdom and right now he is on his way toward the next Kingdom. The next Kingdom will be the Druid Kingdom. This Kingdom also has a good rtionship with the human Kingdom and even though people were very close to nature like those elves, they weren''t like them.


    Naturally, everyone present inside this Kingdom has a close connection with nature and most of them were good at using the nature element in their battle. The natural elements you can say all the elements but at the same time those elements needed to be rted to nature. Those people also have the figure as those humans but at the same time, they also have some different features.


    Every one of those Druid humans has blue eyes and at the same time if you look at their forehead then you will see a crystal-type thing on their forehead. It was very small in size but every one of them was born with that and most likely because of this, they keepmunicating with nature.


    So naturally as you can tell he was also very excited to meet those people and because of this, he was already on his way toward that Kingdom. It take him almost 10 days and finally, he reach that Kingdom. Naturally, this Kingdom was far away from those previous kingdoms and because of this, Sam needed that much time to reach that Kingdom.


    The moment he enter The Kingdom he becamepletely speechless because everywhere he could see many Big trees and not only that every one of those trees also have massive health points. Naturally, everything in that Kingdom would be enough to make Sam or any other people who visit the kingdom for the first time will get speechless and surprised.


    Came back to the main matter,


    After entering the kingdom he began to look around and at the time he can also see many buildings but everything in that ce was made with Titan wood, the same as the Oni Kingdom. But naturally, everything present in that Kingdom was full of vitalitypared to the Oni or other kingdoms.


    For Sam, this would be his first time to observe that type of vitality in a kingdom like this. Naturally, he already became rxed sometimeter and after that, he already begin to search for a room where he will be staying for the night. Actually today and tomorrow he will not try to search for the warrior association as he wanted to give rest to his body.


    So as usual he already decided after finding the room he will Rome around The Kingdom to get familiar with that Kingdom. Naturally, after entering the kingdom he could already see the security and most likely after the previous incident with the human Kingdom, even the security inside of the kingdom became strict.


    Before entering the kingdom he already shows his ID card and at the same time, they also check if he was a criminal or not, naturally they are unable to find any type of criminal activity under Sam''s name so they finally give him the order to enter the kingdom.


    To be continued________


    .

 Chapter 511 511 - Epic-Grade

    ?


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (70000/70000)


    Spiritual energy: (700000/70000)


    Strength: 7000


    Agility: 7000


    Physique: 70000


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 7000


    Spirit: 7000


    Status points:- 454000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Epic-grade) (Early) / (Early SSS+ grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 chance)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (B-grade) (+)<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    Energy shield (B-grade) (+)


    Teleportation (B-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Don''t think you are invincible. You just gain some strength to protect yourself from danger. But you are still a weakling.] "


    As you can see right now he already became an epic grade warrior. After that previous war as you know he already became focused on breaking through and he needed almost 15 days to break through to the next grade. After that naturally he already became an epic grade warrior.


    Naturally, Sambegins to use the status points to increase his stats. As you can see in these 3 months he is already able to increase the status points to 7000. Well naturally he wanted to put everyone of those remaining status points in his stats, unfortunately, he was unable to do that because of the body limit and because of this right now he is also not increasing his status points.


    Most likely he will need it at least 15 more days and only after that he could once again increase his stats. Naturally the limit of his body also increases and because of this Sam could easily be able to use 500 status points at the same time but after there naturally it will take him some time to adjust and also in that time he won''t be able to increase his stats points.


    Well, he already became an Early Epic grade Warrior or you can say SSS+ grade Warrior. Naturally right now if he wanted he could easily use the world bridge to go back to his but he decided not to do this. There is still some time before that prime dragon will approach the earth and most likely before that nothing serious will happen to Eden blue.


    Not only that he also wanted to prepare for that prime Dragon because he already knew how powerful a prime Dragon could be and naturally when that dragon tried to attack the Eden blue he wanted to have that sufficient strength to fight back that monster. Not only that Monster but at the same time he also needed to fight those people from others who were also waiting for the core of the Eden blue.


    On the other hand if you are wondering how he was able to know about the information of Eden blue, then because some people from Terraria are still traveling around the whole gxy and with that they also went to many differents where Warriors were also present.


    Naturally those people also went to Eden blue and like this he was able to get to know about the information of Eden blue from those people. Well, one of those people just came back from their world travel and naturally you can get much different from those people.


    ''Sigh, after solving everything if it is possible then I would like to travel like this in the multiverse. I also wanted to see how manys have Warriors like us and how much they are able to increase their strength.''


    Naturally Sam also wonders to do something like this but currently as you know he is just only focusing on increasing his power to fight back all the danger that will be approaching the Eden blue. On the other hand he also met a person like this, who recently came back from world travel and that person has already visited manys like this.


    Unfortunately that person did not have that much information about the Eden blue. Well he just only goes there to see about those Warriors present there and after spending 2 days in that he quickly goes toward others.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    Sam naturally knew about his family and those other people who were also close to him. But it looks like those people from others also decided to leave the Eden blue after realizing that the core of the Eden blue only appears 2 yearster.


    Well, he already became quite rxed after getting all this kind of information so because of this he was also happily traveling to those other kingdoms. At this time he was thinking about a Question, how did those people able to know about the core of the Eden blue? Actually this is the main question that he was thinking for few days.


    ''Well most likely the old king will have some kind of answer about this so after going back to the Oni Kingdom, I should ask him about this question.''


    After thinking all of these he already begins to focus on his surroundings inside of the Druid kingdom. Naturally he could feel the strong vitality present inside of this Kingdom and not only that everyone of those Druids were also good to him.


    Actually, those Druids are also friendly people. Almost everyone of the Terraria were their friends and naturally these people also did not have that much enemy. But that does not mean you should underestimate those people because they were also very powerful and at the same time if you weren''t careful they could also kill you. Also there are many restrictions inside of this Kingdom so even though everyone of those Druids were friendly, at the same time they were also very strict.


    Naturally Sam said the security of that ce also increased and most likely everything happened because of the war. Not only that while roaming around that Kingdom he could already feel he already got observed by many people many times and most likely those people trying to figure out if he was some kind of suspicious person or not.


    Naturally Sam did not mind those strict rules and as you know he will only stay inside of the kingdom for a few days and after that he will naturally leave that Kingdom to look for the other kingdoms.


    On the other hand because he was resting he did not want the warrior association to look for a mission. Before anything he will be familiar with that Kingdom and only after that he will go back to the Warrior association to look for missions that are present inside of that Kingdom.


    One thing you should know is that everything has a different kind of mission and naturally some of the missions were also quite unique and solving them could make you excited. Naturally he also wanted to know what type of mission he would find inside of that kingdom.


    ________________________


    2 dayster,


    Finally he went toward the warrior association but at this time he saw many people also going toward that direction. Not only those Druids, many people like him who came there from another Kingdom are also going toward the warrior association to ept missions from there and after that they will also try to solve those missions.


    He could already see many people from many different races also present there, but not everyone of them most likely like the humans. Some of them also just realizing his identity begin to give him quite an angry look but naturally he will not care about those people and even if they try to do anything he will take care of them.


    So like this Sam also already came inside of the warrior association and after that he did not waste a single second to Look at the mission board. Naturally he came to the warrior association early in the morning so that he would be able to receive some kind of exciting mission, or a mission that could give him good loot.


    So like this, he began to look at those missions and some timeter he Finally found an interesting mission,so wasting no time he quickly took that mission and went in front of the receptionist. That receptionist did not get surprised by these and naturally also took his ID card and then after registering himself with that mission.


    With that he did not want to waste a single second on that ce and he left the warrior association. But at this time Sam waspletely unaware that some people also decided to follow his direction.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 512 512 - Who Are They?

    ?


    After that Sam directly begins to walk toward the entrance of that Kingdom. Naturally at that time he could see so many people like him going to the entrance or many people alsoing inside of the kingdom after finishing their mission. As a peaceful country you will meet different people in this ce and because of this Sam also saw some people who most likely did not like humans and because of this everyone gave him quite an odd stare.


    Not that he cared about them but still if it was possible he wanted to know why those people did not like the humans. Did the human do something and because of this those people did not like them or something like that?


    Naturally he did not know anything about this. Well he could able to know all of these if he get the time to read the history of the human Kingdom but unfortunately after the previous war and also after his break through he decided to leave the human Kingdom so at that time he did not get the time to read the history book of the human Kingdom like he did in the Oni Kingdom.


    So naturally he did not know anything but fortunately the human King already told him to stay careful from some people. Those people attack him the moment they realize his identity. Well he could already see many of those people that the previously human King told him to stay careful. But as you know, even those people who wear dangerous and good weapons attack him anytime but he did not get about that.


    He could easily escape from that ce anytime and not only that he could also attack those people if they try to do anything to him so naturally he also has his confidence in those people so because of this he naturally did not show any fear after noticing those people.


    Like this sometimeter he already came out of that Kingdom and already began to walk toward the danger zone. Naturally the Druid kingdom also built around a danger zone and naturally he was going toward that part of the danger zone and wanted to know what type of monster he would face in that ce.


    Every time he goes to a different Kingdom he will face many different types of Monsters inside of the danger zone. Actually he alsohad a higher mission: he needed to kill some ice bull, and most likely this was the first mission where he needed to kill that type of Monster. Not only that he also did not know that much about those Monsters. Naturally that was a new Monster to him but fortunately the receptionist already told him some information and with that he was now going toward the danger zone to fight those Monsters.


    Naturally the environment of the danger zone is also quite differentpared to those other kingdoms and it will take him sometime to adjust in that ce. Compared to those other parts of the danger zone right now when he came to this part of the danger zone he could feel the temperature of this ce was quite low and not only that the more he began to advance the more he could feel the temperature getting low.


    But the surprising thing was that if he went in a different direction then he would also be able to enter a part of the danger zone but in that ce naturally the temperature would be warmerpared to this ce. Really something like that only good possible inside of the danger zone higher he just needed to go in the opposite direction to get the different type of environment.


    Well now came back to main matter,


    He already began to search for those Monsters but naturally he was now present inside of the outer area and inside of the ce he would only meet those weak Monsters and because of these all this time he was also releasing his aura. He was doing that so those monsters did not disturb him and he was easily able to enter the inner area of the danger zone.


    Actually he also needed to find out about those Monsters and needed to know in which ce he would be able to find those Bulls. Previously the receptionist told him that he would be able to meet those Monsters in near the water source. So inside of the danger zone he also begins to search for the water source.


    _____________________


    3 hourster,


    He finally enters the inner area of the danger zone and he also already begins to look for the water source present in that area. But naturally because he just only enters the inner area he is also only able to meet those Elite grade Monsters. Naturally he did not want to waste his time with those Monsters as the Monsters he was facing was Epic grade. So naturally he needed to go deeperpared to this ce.<novelsnext>I think you should take a look at </novelsnext>


    ''Huh? Why am I feeling those people following me? I can feel their aura from the moment I left the warrior association. At first I thought they also began to go toward the danger zone because they also expect some kind of mission but right now I am feeling that those people are most likely following.''


    Actually sometimeter when he was still searching for the water source, suddenly realized something that previously those people who also left the kingdom with him and went to the danger zone were still going with him and all of them going in the same direction that he was now going. At first he thought that was just a coincidence but right now he did not think that it was a coincidence.


    So naturally he came to the conclusion that those people following him and most likely everyone of them has some kind of Motive. First of all he did not know any of them and also those people weren''t the abyss humans, so if you are wondering why they following him like this then most likely those of the people who also did not like the humans and after realizing his identity they most likely wanted to attack him and because of this, they following him like this.


    Well Sam did not immediately take any action and maintain his natural behavior so those people also did not get suspicious. Before taking any action he wanted to make sure that those people were really following him and also he wanted to make sure that those people had some kind of malicious intention.


    Only after knowing their true motive will he take action. So because of this he did not start attacking those people and just decided to act like he did not notice those people. Also you should know that all of those people are maintaining distance from him. Most likely they were thinking that someone would be able to notice them but unfortunately for those people he could already notice them and not only that he also already read some of their status and already knew the name of some of those people.


    Some of them were elite grade, while some of them were epic grade. Well he already expected that so he did not get surprised and like this he just continuously began to advance and also tried to search for the water source.


    On the other hand, currently Sam did not know but those people were actually looking for a perfect time to attack him. Not only that but those people had the intention to capture him and after that bring him to their Kingdom. They wanted to make him their ve or something like that.


    So you can say that this was the motive of those people but fortunately for those people that Sam still did not know about their motive or he already took action against those people.


    __________________________


    "Naturally I could tell he was searching for some kind of Monster and most likely that Monsters was an Epic grade. So we also need to stay careful about that person because as a epic grade warrior he naturally has powerful techniques and with that if we are reckless we could also get injured by him.


    But as I told you earlier everyone should already prepare to attack anytime and the moment I will give you the signal you are also attacking without wasting any more time. Actually I was thinking when that person found the monster and already started fighting with that monster, naturally that would be the perfect time to attack him as he will only focus on that Monster and with that he won''t be able to do anything to us.


    But still with that as I told you never underestimate your enemy and try to finish that person as quickly as you can. The longer the fight the more dangerous it could be and because of this I wanted to finish him as quickly as I can and at the same time try to not to kill him so that we could bring him to our kingdom. Naturally, we will get rewarded by the elders if we are able to capture that person alive."


    After hearing that everyone of those other Warriors also agree with the leader of that group and with that one second begins to follow Sam. Anybody could have predicted that Sam was most likely searching for Monsters because when he was inside the Warrior association everyone of them noticed that he epted some kind of mission and most likely because of this, right now he was searching for the admission.


    To be continued______________

 Chapter 513 513 - Anger

    ?


    Sam naturally did not know the motive of the people but as you can tell he was also very experience handling situation like this and by sensing those people he could tell everyone of them had some kind of malicious intention, for a second he thought to attack them but then he decided to getting the true motive of those people and he also wanted to be sure that those people following him.


    On the other hand he was also looking for those Monsters but unfortunately until now he did not find any trace of the water body near that ce and nor did he noticed any grade monster in the ce. So he already realized that he needed to go deeper than these and only then was he most likely able to find those Monsters and those other Epic grade Monsters.


    Well but he instantly did not decide to go deeper into the zone and before searching for those Monsters right now he wants to take care of those people. He was now roaming around that part of the danger zone like he was searching for something. Naturally as you can tell he was just acting and also waiting for the right time to attack those people and sometimeter he already became sure that those people were following him so he already decided to take action right now.


    As you can tell he did not want to be considered as a reckless Monsters who attacked any Warriors. So before taking action he wanted to be sure and right now he already became sure that those people were following him. So right now he did not want to waste a single second and already disappear from his ce.


    As you can tell he already uses the concealment technique and at the same time using his movement technique he already came behind all those Warriors. Naturally he came behind those Warriors less than a second and those Warriors already became very alert the moment they saw that person disappear from that ce.


    Most likely they are also just about to take action or do something but before anyone could do anything Sam quickly makes two of those Warriors unconscious. But he did not stop there and already went for those other Warriors. Naturally it did not take him even a second to take care of all those Elite grade warriors. But on the other hand all those Epic grade Warriors already became free alert and naturally they already begin to use their barrier technique or some kind of technique like that.


    Well everyone of those Warriors already knew that someone was attacking them but unfortunately they were unable to find that attacker and because of this, to protect themselves from that unknown and invisible attacker they already created a barrier around them and already they were on high alert. Not only they just created a barrier but at the same time they are also ready to attack the moment they will find any clue about the enemy.


    Right now ten Epic grade Warriors present there and everyone of them is already using their different techniques right now. Those Warriors who were good at using element technique, already created their attack around them and naturally because of this you can also see some of them also had fire balls around them and some other element attacked around those people. Not only that, those Warriors who were good at using weapons already bring out their weapons.


    In one word everyone of them already ready to attack the moment they noticed the enemy but unfortunately for those Warriors even if they try to since the surrounding area with their full power they won''t be able to find any clue about Sam right now. Sam was already using his movement technique and also you should know that after increasing the level of his technique right now he also did not make any sound while using that movement.


    You can say that technique already became like a silent walk technique that did not create any noise while he walked or ran. Using his technique he already came behind everyone of those Warriors once again and just waited for a few minutes to attack them when it would be the perfect time.


    But in the next again he decided to attack them using the telekinesis technique and instantly everyone of those Warriors did not even get the chance to react and everyone of them already got affected by the telekinesis technique. First of all everyone of them lost the control over their body and not only that everyone of them right now also begin to suffocate as the unable to breathe right now. Well at this time he already begins to attack everyone of them and already makes everyone of those Warriors unconscious.


    Well, everything happens in less than a minute and with that he takes care of all those 20 warriorswho previously followed him. In the next second he already begins to use the mind control technique to read the mind of one of those Elite grade warriors. Compared to those Epic grade Warriors, reading the mind of an Elite grade warrior was easy.


    It did not even take him 1 minute to read the mind of that person and he already got to know the motive of those people. Those people belong to the race called the Toron. If you look at them then you will notice that all of them had pink skin color and their eyes were big and round. But that wasn''t it. They also had two horns on their head and by reading the memory of the person he also got to know that everyone of them was also a natural enemy of the humans. Those people also had sharp nails and they were good assassins.


    Most likely because of this every one of them thought they will easily able to capture him without he and get to know about those people, but unfortunately for them as he using the superior technique naturally if any other people near him uses the same technique that has lower quality he will immediately get to know about that and he will naturally able to find in your those person who uses stealth technique or technique like that.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    ''So, they wanted to capture me and then they wanted to take me to their kingdom. This isn''t the first time they did something like this and every time they bring any human to their kingdom everyone of them will get rewarded by the elder giving those people the mission to capture humans. Those people make those humans their ves and also use them as they can.''


    All this information he got after reading the memory of that person and naturally they also nned to attack him and then take him to that elder who previously gave them the mission to capture humans.


    If you are wondering why did the human King allow something like that then everyone of those Toron capture those humans secretly so nobody is able to know about that and after capturing them they also use some kind of technique that also makes that human have the same appearance as them. They called it a makeover technique.


    Sam also get to know that those people use is there blood to use that technique and naturally because they using the blood the technique get much stronger and using normal way nobody will able to find about the difference. So because of this until now the human king did not know about all of this.


    Well, Sam wasn''t sure if the human king knew about this or not but he already decided to inform him as he is also a human and naturally after getting all of this information he really wanted to go to that Kingdom to kill everyone. But unfortunately the king of that Kingdom was aary grade warrior. They also have many supporting Kingdom who also hate humans as those people hate.


    Really after knowing all of this information he was unable to calm down and because of this he already killed those people one by one. Not only that after killing them he also begins to use the fire element to burn their body into ashes. Right now he was very angry at those people but unfortunately he did not have the sufficient strength so once again he felt that he needed to be stronger than this.


    Sometimeter somehow he is able to calm down and with that he once again begins to advance. Naturally before doing anything he wanted to finish his mission and only after that he would talk to the human being. But he also thinks most likely the human kings also know something about this as he previously took actions against them. But most likely the human King did not know about the recent matters and because of this he did not take any action against those people.


    If you are wondering how did he know then previously the human being mentioned him about those people and also told him to stay careful from those people. Even though he did not mention what happened he just only told him that time that those people previously did something horrible that because of this a war also happened between the human Kingdom and those people.


    To be continued______

 Chapter 514 514 - Fighting

    ?


    Finally after 3 hours he found those Monsters. Naturally he could also see many other warriors were also present in that ce. He already expected that but as you know he needed toplete the mission so he needed to kill those Monsters even though those Warriors were also killing them.


    Fortunately only 5 of those Warriors were present in that ce while the number of those Monsters was biggerpared to those warriors. If it was before then he wouldpletely avoid those Monsters because he did not want to interfere with others'' fight but this time as you know he wanted toplete the mission so he also began to advance towards Monsters.


    On the other hand,


    Those 5 fighters are already fighting those Monsters. Everyone of them focusing on their attack and those Monsters. Most likely they are alsopleting some kind of mission and because of this they also wanted to quickly kill all those Monsters as quickly as they can.


    Everyone notices another Warriors alsoing toward them. At first everyone of them became alert but in the next second everyone of them realized that Warrior wasn''ting at them but he already started attacking those Monsters right now. Naturally they cannot get distracted while fighting those Monsters so they once again focus on those Monsters.


    On the other hand not only just those Warriors but previously those monsters also notice him and because of these some of them already begin to attack toward Sam''s direction.


    Right now if you look at the surroundings then you will naturally see that everything was Frozen by those Monsters and not only that those Monsters also attacked those Warriors using the ice beam and they could also control Those ice elements to make ice Spears and attack like that. Also that wasn''t your normal ice as it was blue in color. Naturally every one of them has powerful ice elements that also evolve and because of this, the color of those ice looks like this.


    On the other hand, Sam already notices those Warriors most likely get distracted for a second but those Monsters use that second to take advantage and already attack those Warriors and also those Warriors just barely able to protect themselves using the Energy barrier.


    On the other hand Sam also uses the energy shield to protect himself from the iing attack and not only that at the same time he already uses the telekinesis technique to control those Monsters who are just about to attack him in close distance. Those Monsters already came very close to him and just about to attack him with an ice beam but before they could attack him Sam already controlled their body and in the next second he also attacked those Monsters with fireballs.


    But it look like it wasn''t easy to kill those Monsters because in the next second a ice wall instantly appear in front of those two Monsters and not only that at the Sam


    time same could also feel the control of those Monsters already got free. Actually everyone of those Monsters were powerfulpared to Sam and most likely because of this he was only able to control those Monsters for a few seconds and after that those Monsters naturally broke free from his control and at the same time theirrade also already created an ice wall in front of them.


    Not only that, suddenly Sam jumps away from that ce as Ice spear appears from beneath his foot. Not only that but at the same time many ice beams are also directlying toward his direction. Naturally as you can tell he was getting attacked by many of those Monsters at the same time and because of this those Monsters just kept attacking him and most likely they did not want to give him any chance.


    Fortunately Sam already notices those attacks and because of these at the same time he once again uses the Energy barrier and with that he protects himself from those attacks. But he did not stop there as he also created many fireballs and directly shot that toward those Monsters.


    At this time If you look at those other warriors they also fight those Monsters continuously andpared to Sam those warriors have advantage because of their number and they already killed many of those Monsters. Everyone can also see some of those Monsters targeting that person and they also use that chance to attack those Monsters and naturally because those Monsters weren''t paying attention to them, all of them also receive serious injuries.


    Most likely did one second about to attack those monsters but before they could attack those monsters at this time suddenly many fireballs fell from the sky and at this time every one of those monsters who previously attacked Sam already began to receive serious injuries. But Sam did not stop there as he already came close to those Monsters and not only that he also created many big fireballs and once again shot those monsters.


    Naturally if he was alone he could already kill everyone of those Monsters using sword technique and concealment technique. But naturally in the presence of those Warriors he did not want to use his concealment techniques so with that he fought those monsters using the fire element. Naturally that was okay with him as he could finally use his fire element as much as he can and with that if he was able to hit the limit then he could once again evolve the element power.


    As you know most of the time he uses his sword technique or his light element. But he only uses his fire element sometimes and because of this when he gets the chance he naturally uses his fire element as much as he can.


    Nowing back to the main matter with those fireballs many of those monsters already received serious injuries and Sam also took that chance toe in front of those monsters and attack them using his sun ray and confusion ray. It Looks like those monsters did not expect that and because of these they were also unable to react and time and finally got killed by him.


    Sam did not stay ideal as he already began to advance. But at the same time he could already see most likely he was only able to kill a few of those Monsters. Because right now he wasn''t alone present in that ce as those Warriors also present there and they were also killing those monsters so naturally he would be able to kill only a few of them but naturally he did not care about that.


    We can already predict that finishing this mission naturally takes time, so he already prepared for that and even if they killed all the monsters, they waited in that ce for those Monsters to respawn once again.


    ___________________


    Well, naturally while fighting those monsters Sam was feeling the power of those Monsters who are naturally powerfulpared to him but at the same time he did not give up and just gave up fighting like this. After previously killing those 5 Monsters he once again was able to kill three of them and after that he quickly retreated from that ce as he already got injured by those Monsters.


    But all this time you also observe those Warriors and he could tell that most likely those Warriors were at the same level as those Monsters and because of these they also have quite an advantage in this fight. Even though the number of those Monsters were greater but because those Warriors were fighting those Monsters in a team they also had the advantage that Sam did not have in that ce.


    Naturally those Warriors also notice that the Warrior who previously fought those monsters already retreated from that ce and they also noticed that warriors also get quite injured. Butpared to that Warrior they are naturally interested in those injured Monsters that previously got injured by that Warrior and because that Warrior was present in that ce they already begin to attack those Monsters and like that they are already able to kill many of the monsters.


    Finally after 20 minutes they already killed everyone of those 25 Monsters and with that everyone of them finally decided to take rest. Naturally they fought those Monsters for a long time and because of this, they were also very low on spiritual energy and also they were quite injured.


    On the other hand as they killed everyone of those Monsters naturally they could finally take rest and with that they already begin to recover their spiritual energy and health. Most likely they are also quite interested in that previous Warrior but unfortunately they cannot find that Warrior even after observing their surrounding area.


    Well before anything, everyone of those warriors wanted to know if that Warrior would still attack those Monsters like this or not. Actually they wanted to stop him from interfering with their fight as they wanted toplete their mission as quickly as they could.


    To be continued_________

 Chapter 515 515 - Archery

    ?


    Well at this time Sam already came from that ce and he was now resting to recover his spiritual energy. Even though he got injured by those Monsters, he did not get that much injured and he already recovered his full health so he did not have to worry about that. But naturally as you can tell he was just thinking how long it will take him toplete the mission. Because he wasn''t alone fighting those Monsters and also because of those other Warriors he also took much time to kill those Monsters and was unable to use destructive moves.


    Well, if he was alone in that ce then he would naturally use the mega fireball and also at the same time the newly learned move called The hell zone. But the thing was that all of those moves were very destructive and because of this those other Warriors will also get affected by that and they could also get injured.


    Naturally as you know he wasn''t using your normal spiritual energy and because of this every attack he created using the origin spiritual energy will have more destructive power and it could easily harm anyone who uses true spiritual energy.


    ''Well against those intermediate Epic grade Monsters, winning was quite difficult but really if those Warriors weren''t present there then I would have killed many of those Monsters right now. Sigh, I can tell most likely they are also doing missions simr to these and who knows how long they will take toplete their mission. Should I leave this ce and try to search for another direction?


    I can tell that most likely those Warriors were also quite annoyed that I interfered with their fight but I naturally did not care about that. But the thing was that they could also annoy me when I tried to kill those Monsters and naturally they could also try to steal my kill.''


    Sam was thinking all of this while he was recovering his spiritual energy. Sometimeter, he already decided that he will attack those Monsters from far away from that ce and will try to kill one Monster just with one attack. With that he could kill many Monsters fasterpared to before. And as he needed to collect the core of those Monsters he could use telekinesis technique after killing those Monsters.


    Also one more thing you should know that if any loot came to a perfect range of his inventory then he doesn''t need to touch that loot and even without touching that thing he could put that in his inventory. Recently he discovered that and with that it will be easy for him to collect those cores of ice Bulls.


    If you are thinking about those other Warriors then he also already looked at everyone of their status and with that he already knew that only 2 of them were intermediate Epic grade Warriors, while everyone of those Warriors just an early grade Warrior. So naturally he also had his confidence against those Warriors and after looking at their status he also knew that nobody could use any type of psychic technique like his telekinesis.


    Actually learning psychic techniques like telekinesis wasn''t easy and only few people could learn that type of technique. On the other hand, as you know, he also had observation techniques. So naturally he already observed the status of those Monsters and those Warriors and with that he was already able to know that everyone of those Monsters were intermediate Epic grade while not everyone of those warriors were intermediate grade.


    After that sometimeter when he once again felt those Monsters in that ce he already came to a higher ce and already brought out his Night. Really just after bringing out the Night, he started to feel nostalgic. Aftering to this new world he did not use his archery technique and his bow and really this likely the first time he brought out the night.


    Right now if you are wondering why he decided to use the archery technique than as you can tell his archery technique already at superior grade, right nowpare to his me control or light control, Naturally his archery technique was more powerful and killing those Monster we just one attack only possible while using the bow and arrow.


    As you can see he already came to a perfect location and already brought out those spirit arrows from his inventory. He already uses the spiritual vision and already can see those Monsters that are most likely going towards Warriors to attack them. At this time Sam already targets one of the monsters and wasting no time he quickly shoots an Arrow toward that monster.


    Naturally that Arrow was coated with spiritual energy, not only that but at the same time he also changed the nature of the spiritual energy and that Arrow already turned into me Arrow and that directly went to that monster. That Monster did not even get to see what attacked him and already that arrow Pierce threw his head. With that his body also started to burn and that Monster just fell down on the ground.


    Every Warriors and those Monsters present in the battlefield naturally got confused by that sudden action and after observing that monster only then they realize someone attacked that monster with an arrow and that Monster already died. Naturally those Warriors once again realize that most likely that previous Warrior did not retreat or escape from that ce but he just deserted to attack those Monsters from far away from that ce.


    But then those Warriors once again focus on their own fight and while they could already notice some of those Monsters were not paying attention so they already take the chance to attack those Monsters. Because of their attack, all of those Monsters once again came back to their senses and this time you can say that all of them are very angry and they already begin to attack those Warriors more angrily.


    Just imagine ice beamsing towards Warriors from every direction, not only that this time those Monsters also using more power so naturally The Power of Those ice beams also increased.


    On the other hand none of those Monsters or those Warriors at this time noticed the core of that monster that previously died by the Arrow, began to fly in the sky and started going toward a direction. But it did not even fly that long and already disappeared from that ce. Naturally Sam already put that thing in his inventory and he once again targets one monster.


    _________________________


    Sometimeter,


    While in the battlefield as you can see 10 Monsters remaining and those 5 Warriors right now fighting those 10 Monsters, 15 core of those ice Bulls that died by the spirit arrows already begin to fly and it did not even take a second to Vanish from that ce.


    Actually this time Sam already came close to those Monsters and because of this he instantly put everyone of those cores in his inventory. With this right now he already had 25 cores. Unfortunately, he still needed to collect 75 cores of those Monsters. Only then he will be able to finish his mission and as you can tell if he was alone in that ce he would already be able to collect 50 of those cores, but because of those Warriors he was only able to collect 25 of them.


    On the other hand finally those 5 warriors already kill those remaining Monsters and Sam also notices this time those Warriors were quite injuredpared to before and some of them also already had crack marks on their armor. Naturally you can tell thatpared to before this time the fight was quite hard and because of this everyone of them also quite injured but with that finally they killed all the monsters and naturally they began to rest to recover their health and spiritual energy.


    ____________________


    Next day,


    Finally, all of those Warriors already leave that ce after clearing their mission and also this time Sam did not interfere with their fight. Actually he can already till most likely they are already very close to finishing their mission and because of this time he did not interfere with their match and just decided to look for another Monster at that time.


    Sometimeter aftering back to that ce he could already see that all of those Warriors already left and with that he concluded that they had already finished their mission. Sam finally became rxed as he was finally able to collect more of those cores. Right now he already had 50 of those and just needed to collect 50 more cores.


    He is just hoping this time because those Warriors only present they are he will be able to collect 50 crore. The main thing was that previously when he counted the number of those Monsters he could already tell at least 35 to 40 monsters appeared in that ce so with that he just needed some time and he would finish his mission.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 516 516 - Telling The Human King

    ?


    Finallypleted the mission and with that Sam was now going back to the kingdom to submit the mission and ept the reward of this mission. Toplete this mission he almost needed 5 days. Actually if it wasn''t for those other Warriorsing to that ce you would have already finished that mission in one day or today but unfortunately many other fighters also came to that ce to fight those Monsters and because of this he needed this much time toplete the mission.


    But don''t think that he justpletely wasted his time while waiting for those other Warriors to leave that ce. At the same time he also roams around that ce and also meets many other new Monsters. With that he also gets the understanding of their power and also kills many of those Monsters.


    Some of the Monsters were very tough and killing them wasn''t that easy but in the end he already killed those Monsters. But it could be a dangerous thing for him if many Monsters came to that ce at the same time so he also tried to avoid that kind of group of Monsters and with that he also got quite familiar with that ce and naturally he was also very interested to ept missions rted to those Monsters.


    ''Sigh, having an observation technique that also helps me to see the status of those Monsters and other Warriors really helps me very much and with that I could already see the weak point of those Monsters and Warriors and also I can also get familiar with their power.''


    Sam thought that while he was thinking about those previous Monsters. Actually after getting that technique it really became quite helpful for him to look at the status of those other Warriors and those Monsters and with that he could naturally get familiar with their strength and weakness.


    ''Now,e to think of it, I really wanted to know if I would be able to find a Dungeon in that ce or not. Compared to the previous part of the danger zone, I already came very deep inside this time and not only that the power of those Monsters in that ce also reached intermediate grade. So I really wanted to know if I would be able to meet anyone or not.''


    You can say that he is really hoping to see a Dungeon present inside of Terraria. He really wanted to know what type of monster he would face when he found a Dungeon in that ce. Actually even those to the previous Kingdom tried to search for any information rted to Dungeon but unfortunately nobody don''t know anything and even if they knew about anything they did not tell him.


    Well, actually he could get help from the human king or the Oni king, but actually he did not want their help in the simple matter. Because of this he also did not disturb them and was still searching for any information rted to Dungeon.


    At the same time I am also very curious to know if the which has a dungeon like Eden blue also has some kind of rtion with Terraria or not. Was there Dungeon also rted to Terraria? Will I find that type of mysterious pattern inside of those dungeons?


    I am really curious to know about this because I think every Dungeon present in Eden blue is most likely connected to Terraria and everyone of those dungeons also have simr symbols like the symbol present inside of the base city''s dungeon.


    Not only that but at the same time I also want to know if the Dungeon present inside of Terraria was connected with another or not. Could I search for a simr teleportation pattern in the core area of those Dungeons?''


    As you can tell Sam was really curious to know all these answers, which made him very curious to know but unfortunately he did not know the answer to any of these questions. But he is already sure that every dungeon present inside of Eden blue is rted to Terraria.


    Most likely because of those mysterious stones none of the Warriors previously was able to find any information about the teleportation portal and about any information about Terraria. But when he goes back to Eden blue he already ns to share all of this information with everyone.


    ________________________


    The next day around 8:00 a.m. he reached the kingdom and before anything he directly went to the Warrior association to submit the mission and to ept the reward. Only after that he decided to go back to the inn that he booked previously and to rest there.


    Before going back to the room he also eats some food and only after that he goes back to his room. After freshening up he finally decided to call the human king and told him all the information that he found previously about those Warriors who attacked him previously. Naturally as you can tell he was still angry at those Toron people, and if it was possible then he really wanted to go toward that Kingdom to free those humans that most likely captured and are now working as ves inside of that Kingdom.


    A few minutester, finally the human king received the call and naturally he did not expect a call from Sam. At first he asked about his situation and his condition. So like this only after some timeter Sam finally became very serious and told the human King that he had something important to say.


    The human King could also tell that Sam really has something serious to tell so he also bes serious and with that Sam begins to tell him everything about his previous encounter with those Toron. He begins to tell the human king how those people previously followed from the warrior association and like this they also went outside of the kingdom and also followed him into the danger zone.


    All this time the human king silently hears all of this but at first he really gets very surprised when Sam tells him about his encounter with Toron. Instantly he wanted to know if Sam was able to handle them or if he needed to escape from that ce. But he didn''t interfere with his talking and just listened to all the exnations.


    A minuteter he bes happy that Sam is able to handle them and he also captures everyone of them to know about the motive of those people. Even the human King gets curious to know the motive of those people and with that he curiously hears what Sam exins to him.


    The more he hears about those people and the motive of those people the more he gets very angry. Like this, finally sometimeter, Sam finished the exnation. Naturally, like Sam, the human King is also very angry right now. Actually he already knew something like that most likely happening but even after trying to search for any wasn''t able to find that and naturally after that as you can tell he became busy handling those Abyss humans.


    So because of this after that he wasn''t able to focus on this matter but right now after hearing the exnation of Sam naturally the king became very angry and with that it also proves to him that really all those rumors were true and naturally many humans were getting kidnapped by those people and those people using those humans as ves.


    Just thinking about that made his blood boil and naturally like Sam he wanted to go to the Toron kingdom to rescue those people. But at this time Sam told him to calm down right now in his anger he should not take any decision and discuss with the old King about this matter and not only the old king he should try to talk with other of his friends.


    Because naturally this Toron kingdom also has many friends who were also helping them in this matter and those people are also the natural enemy of humans. So if in his anger the human King decided to attack that Kingdom then it could put the human Kingdom in a disadvantageous situation.


    Fortunately after hearing all of this word the human King also calmed down. He also knew that bing reckless wouldn''t solve anything and he needed to discuss this with his other friends and his father and only then could he make any decision. Even if he decided to go against that Kingdom, that Kingdom had a lot of support from other kingdoms who were also the enemy of the human Kingdom so naturally he needed to discuss this with his friends from other Kingdom and his father.


    At this time the human King also told Sam that he was really grateful that he was able to find all that information. But at the same time the human King told him to stay careful because most likely not only those people will try to attract him but many others will try to attack him after they realize his identity.


    To be continued_______

 Chapter 517 517 - What Is Happening?

    ?


    5 dayster,


    Well in these 5 days Sam already cleared two more missions and fortunately this time nobody tried to attack him or do something like that. But in these 5 days he could feel that some people have already gotten to know about the previous incident that happened in the danger zone with those Toron people. Because of this many people are also afraid of Sam and the moment they notice the escape from that ce or always try to maintain the distance from him.


    Actually not only fear but some of those people who did not like the human had a serious expression on their face. You can say that a tense atmosphere also created between Sam and those people but fortunately until now those people did not try to attack him or do something like that.


    But one thing was clear that most likely those remaining Toron already got to know about this and because of this they somehow left the city. Currently nobody knows why they suddenly leave the city like this. Many people thought that they were afraid of Sam but some of those other Warriors also thought that most likely those Toron people were nning something.


    Sam is right now in the danger zone and this time he already came more deeper into the danger zone. He needed to kill some shadow Hayanas and some shadow leopards. Naturally this was his first time facing Monsters like this and as you can tell everyone of those monsters uses the dark spiritual energy and with that they were able to use the shadow element. Those people or Monsters who use the normal spiritual energy are only able to use the shadow element but normally those Monsters who use the dark element use the shadow element.


    So he received the mission where he needed to kill almost 50 of those haryana and those leopards. But the thing was that killing those monsters wasn''t easy. Because the moment those Monsters feel something was dangerous or something like that they will quickly escape using the shadow technique or they will hide themselves inside the shadow world.


    So this really makes them unable to kill those Monsters that easily. Even though he is already using the stealth technique, because he already killed some of those Monsters, those remaining Monsters already got alert and most likely they already escaped from that ce. So as you can tell Sam needed to find those Monsters once again and this time he nned to kill everyone of them at once but the thing was that because those Monsters were already reaching the limit of intermediate Epic grade, without you can guess how powerful those Monsters were.


    Even though his origin spiritual energy is effective against those Monsters, he also needs to use almost 80% of his spiritual energy to kill a Monster with his one attack. Naturally with that you can give how powerful those Monsters were. Because of this right now he is only able to kill 10 hyenas and 8 leopards.


    Fortunately he had the stealth technique and superior spiritual energy. Because of this he was able to kill those Monsters until now or his situation would be different and most likely those Monsters already seriously injured him or even killed him right now.


    Well the thing was that because those Monsters good uses the shadow element if any Warrior came close to them and then decided to attack them while hiding themselves, they will naturally get to know about this and those Warriors will not even realize when they will get Attack by those Monsters.


    Sam already searching for those Monsters once again and you have to say this time because he was using the movement technique with his stealth technique he wasn''t making any sound and with that finding those Monsters could be easy those Monsters already did not attacked other Warriors or other Warriors did not start fighting with those Monsters. Also the light element was the weakness of those Monsters so this time he was attacking those Monsters with the light element.


    Also the thing was that his telekinesis technique wasn''t that effective against those Monsters because those Monsters were powerfulpared to him. Well that telekinesis technique could be useful or even kill those Monsters if he fully focused on that technique but as you know he only previously used that to prevent those Monsters to move for a second so that he could easily kill them.


    But he also realized one thing thatpared to those other Monsters, Monsters who have element control like this or those spiritual Monsters who usually use the dark element have some kind of affinity thathelp them form this kind of attack. But fortunately you can still attack them using the mind control attack.


    Even though those Monsters have some kind of affinity that protects them, their mind is powerful and only because of this when you attack them using the mind control or simr technique like this they will immediately get affected by that.


    Nowing back to the main matter Sam already came from that ce but this time he did not find any clue about those Monsters even after finding and observing the ce for this long. Most likely those Monsters are now hiding themselves in the shadow world or something like that and because of this he was unable to find them.


    ''Sigh, nowe to think of it I really would be happy if I get an element technique like this. Sigh, but if I wanted to buy them in the systems of then I really need to have at least 50 million gold coins to buy a technique. Well I could buy that but I still did not have that much gold coin right now.''


    Well you can say that one thing he noticed that in Terraria killing those monsters did not give him any techniques or something like that. He almost stayed inside the terrorism for at least 7 to 8 months but even in this time period after killing those Monsters he did not receive any technique like this and this really made him very surprised that he even wanted to know if those Monsters really give any technique.


    Only then he got to know most likely it was because he wasn''t from the Terraria that he was in receiving those types of good loot from those Monsters and until now all the loot he got from those Monsters wasn''t useful to him. Until now he already sold all those loots that he got after killing those monsters so you can say he did not get anything useful in this matter.


    Even though nobody told him but he already gave most likely this is because he wasn''t from the Terraria and because of this until now he did not receive any kind of technique or even a lowest grade of technique from those Monsters.


    Because of this he never hoped to get any good or legendary grade loot from those Monsters. Well suddenly he remembered only two times he received a legendary grade loot. It was in those previous words where he participates and receives loot like this. But still those loot were not useful to him so he already sold them in his system shop and using the gold coin he already bought new armor and other things.


    Also the good thing was that he already increased the level of his yer and night. Right now both his sword and bow once again get powerful and they will be able to contain more spiritual energy and they will not receive any kind of damage when he uses much of his origin spiritual energy.


    Like this 5 hourster when he was resting in the danger zone and still thinking about those Monsters he suddenly noticed some energy fluctuation not far away from his ce. Naturally if it was energy fluctuation from Monsters then he would not be surprised but suddenly he notices all of those energy fluctuationsing from many Warriors and that makes me very curious to know what is happening in that ce.


    He quickly went to that ce to see what was happening to make the energy fluctuate like that. Only after reaching that ce did he notice something strange happening in the ce. Because in that ce he suddenly so a person began to shine and most likely from that person that energy fluctuation was created. Beside that person you can see his team was most likely looking at him with expression and they tried to help him but none of their technique was working.


    Same at this time decided to observe that person very carefully and suddenly he realized The Spiritual energy or you can say the true spiritual energy of that person most likely getting fuse with something and because of that that person was now glowing like that.


    But the thing was that previously the glow was White in coloured but suddenly it already turned into red color and the whole person turned into red in color. Naturally that made everyone of those teammates worried about him.


    To be continued_____

 Chapter 518 518 - Help

    ?


    Right now everyone of those people also begin to use some kind of simr technique Like The Spiritual vision and while they observe theirrade they could also see a different type of aura trying to invade his body. Most likely because of a situation like this happening and everyone became very afraid or you can say what it is about their friend right now.


    But unfortunately for those people they were unable to see what Sam was now able to see. At this time while using the spiritual vision he could see that most likely some kind of Monster or something simr was trying to take over the body of that person and because of that something like that happening to that Warrior. Naturally it was a ghost like Monsters that was trying to possess the body of that Warrior.


    Well right now you can say a fight was happening between that Monster and that Warrior and because of that the warrior was now blowing in ck color. Currently he was losing and The Monster was winning but if the warrior was winning this fight then naturally he would glow in white color.


    But as you can see he was glowing in ck color so naturally The Monster was winning the fight and if things continue like this then naturally The Monster will possess the body of the warrior and that will also kill the warrior''s soul.


    Even though Sam did not wanted to interfere with anyone''s matter but he could naturally saw those other Warriors clearly did not have any idea about this and everyone of them trying to do something that could help their friend but unfortunately none of them working against that ghost Monster.


    At this time Sam also tries to observe the status of that Monster but unfortunately he is also unable to observe the status as that Monster is only present in the body and because of this when he tries to observe that monster he is only able to observe the status of that Warrior.


    Well this time he decided to help them. With that he naturally began to walk toward them. Everyone of those Warriors who were previously busy helping their friend suddenly got alert when they noticed a warrior walking toward their direction. Naturally, all of them thought that warriors would most likely try to attack them in this situation and because of this, two of them came in front of that person and those remaining two people were already preparing their attack.


    But suddenly Sam did not advance and stopped there. He did not even look at those warriors and just directly looked at that person who was now suffering because of that monster. Wasting no time he quickly uses the mind control technique on that Warrior and at the same time he also uses the telekinesis technique. Using both of the techniques instantly makes that person unable to move and at the same time the monster inside of that Warrior also unable to move at this time.


    Naturally as you know most like that had some kind of affinity against telekinesis technique or control technique like that but unfortunately they did not have affinity to protect their mind from mind control attack.


    Naturally everyone became very confused by his sudden action as they cannot tell that he was already using his attack toward that person and that monster. They only saw that person suddenly stop not far away from the direction but at the same time he did not even look at their direction and directly looked at the direction of their friend.


    Most likely they thought he was trying to do something and mostly he was the reason behind all of these so they were already about to attract him but at this time suddenly everyone here heard a painful roaring out from that Warrior. That wasn''t your normal Roar as it was a monster that was roaring right now.


    Naturally, that made everyone alert and everyone of them quickly looked backward toward their friend and everyone could see that right now their friend was fully glowing in ck color and not only that a monster-like face also appeared on his body and that was the monster that roared like this.


    Instantly they quickly turn their head and look at that Warrior and instantly understand that Warrior was doing that and most likely he was attacking that monster and trying to save their friend. Only then they rx a little, but everyone is still very alert at this moment. None of them knew what was happening right now and because of this everyone became very alert and at the same time they could also see the person appear in front of them, naturally a human.


    Well even though people naturally were the enemy of those humans but at this time they could see that humans were helping them and because of this none of them tried to attack some at this time. Well if you look at those warriors then you will naturally see they had pointy ears, and not only that they also had surprisingly a big amount of spiritual energy and Blue eyes.


    Not only that, but all of them also release the same kind of aura like those Druids. Naturally all of them have an affinity with nature and because of this they also have that simr kind of aura of those druids.


    Naturally, as you can guess, all of them were elfs that were also enemies of the humans butpared to those other enemies none of them tried to attack the humans. He already heard from the human King that everyone of those elves already told all the humans that they will not attack them but the humans also should not approach their kingdom or try to do anything with any elf.


    Well at this time Sam fully focused on his mind control and telekinesis. Well you can say that even though telekinesis didn''t have any effect on those kinds of Monsters but in the situation when that Monster tried to possess the body of that Warrior the telekinesis technique helped him very much.


    So because of that right now that Monster was unable to escape from that ce and suddenly something unexpected happened because that Warrior who previously had that dark glow around his body, already began to be White. Just observing that everyone of those Warriors present there could see most likely it was helping their friend and everyone of them begin to hope that humans will help their friendpletely and he will also kill that monster.


    Naturally Sam at this time did not lose focus and he increased the power behind that mind control technique andpletely attacked the mind of that monster. Well you can say that if it was before where that Monster did not affect the warrior, most likely at that time that Monster would still try to escape from that ce but unfortunately right now he was unable to do anything and continuously his mind got attacked by Sam right now.


    Like this after 10 minutester a tense atmosphere was created in that ce and at the same time nobody knew but inside the body of that Warrior, even that Warrior was also trying his best to gain control over his body from that monster.


    So for this 10 minute intense battle also happened between that Warrior and that Monster and at the same time naturally Sam also helped that warrior and in the end as you can see finally that Monster got killed by Sam and that Warrior. Finally that Warrior stopped glowing like this and he already became unconscious and fell down on the.


    Everyone of those other Warriors quickly went toward his direction to check him. Everyone of them finally became rxed the moment they realized their friend was alive and nothing happened to him. Most likely he is just unconscious right now and other than that they cannot find any other thing in him. Not only that the moment they look backward they could also see that human Warriors already disappear from that ce.


    "I think he really helped Mike to fight that monster. But who could have thought that a monster will try to possess his body and situation like this will also appear here. This is mostly the first time we get attacked by this kind of ghost monster in this ce."


    " Actually I also think we should at least try to say thanks. Even though we have a bad rtionship, still he helps us in a situation like this and we are unable to express our gratitude to him. Sigh, we should at least express our gratitude to him."


    " I think we will meet him once again because he came to this part of the danger zone, so naturally he is also present in the Druid kingdom. We should try to search for him inside the kingdom and if we are lucky we could meet him once again. Nowe to think of it, most likely this is the warrior that previously killed all those Toron¡­"

 Chapter 519 519 - Common Monsters

    ?


    Sam already went far away from that ce. After helping those people he already decided to leave that ce and did not even give those people any time to talk to him. But you can say that he was also very surprised because he already recognised those people. Actually every person from Earth who watched Anime or read manga and novels were very familiar with those people.


    Not only that he also knows that all the rumors about his previous lives were true. As those people have a connection with Nature. Not only that, they were very beautiful like he heard in his previous life. Well but still right now you should understand that they were the enemy of the human so did not want to make any friend or have any kind of connection with them.


    But at this time you can say that he was thinking about the monster that he killed previously. Most likely this would be the first time he founded Ghost Monster aftering to Terraria but he can tell by seeing the previous expression of those Warriors that Terraria also had those types of Monsters but until now he did not meet those Monsters. But as you can tell those Monsterspare to The Monster present in Eden blue, very powerful.


    If anybody did not have powerful observation techniques or let down his guard then he would definitely get attacked by those Monsters. He did not think that the warrior who got attacked previously did not have good observation technique but look like he nor did his friend expected that Monster and because of that they also be confused when the body of that warrior begins to glow like that.


    ''But, this is really surprising that a fight between the host of the body and the ghost happened when that Monster tried to take control of that body. Most likely that Warrior did not have any kind of mind control or mind protection technique. I am sure that if he had those two types of techniques then it would be easy for that Warrior to win against that monster.


    But the main thing was that I can also tell those monsters weren''t from that ce. I already observe the surroundings using almost my full power and I also previously came from that direction so how did I not notice if any ghost type Monster was present there? ''


    Naturally as you can tell Sam was thinking all of these while he was searching for more monsters to fight with them. Naturally even though he needed toplete the mission, at the same time he also wanted to be familiar with that part of the dangerous zone and if it is possible you wanted to go deeper.


    But it was just if he did that then it would be very dangerous for him. Even though his original spiritual energy could kill those monsters easily, the more powerful monster he will face the more spiritual energy he needed to use to kill that monster. Because of this even though he wanted to advance he also knew that this wasn''t the right time to do that and he will do that after bing more powerful.


    Sometimeter he already starts fighting a monster. This time he was fighting amon monster that he had already met many times. Fire bull, well he already met those types of Monster even those previous part of the danger zone and right now he could tell most likely these Monsters were the mostmon monster. Not only them but he also meets many othermon monsters.


    Naturally all of those monsters were intermediate Grade and because of that Same needed to use more power and at the same time he was attacking those monsters from a distance. Naturally he was using his archery technique to kill those Monsters. Well beside his sword technique, his archery technique was one of the powerful techniques that also got upgraded by the goddess previously.


    Naturally he wanted to use that to kill those monsters with his single attack and he already knew the weakness of the monster so he was just waiting for the right time to attack them. He already begins to shootbullets toward Monster continuously. On the other hand because of those continuous arrows, those monsters did not even get the reaction or even some of them get the chance but this still wasn''t that fast to escape from that ce.


    But instantly Sam jumped from his ce because in the next moment the ce where he was hiding previously already got burned by a big fireball. Not just one fireball but after that one by one many fireballs starteding toward his direction but he already created the energy shield and with that he will protect himself from those attacks. But you can tell that he could still feel the impact behind Those attacks and naturally none of those impacts created by those attacks were weak.


    Those are the Monsters who were very fortunate to react on time and with that they already came toward the direction and already attacked that direction from where those arrows weregoing towards other Monsters.


    Even though because of using the origin spiritual energy the power behind the energy shield already increased and already became powerful that would protect from anything. But the problem was that because those monsters were continuously attacking him. Not only that because of those convenience attacks sometimeter naturally a crack mark also appears on the energy shield. Sam did not care about that and he was just waiting for the right time to attack those Monsters once again.


    Well, the thing was that previously he already deactivated the concealment technique and because of that those monsters were able to find his location. Now came back to the main method. Finally he got the time to disappear from that ce and naturally those monsters became confused and tried to search for him. On the other hand Sam already came behind those monsters and began to attack those Monsters.


    Sam was using his sword and naturally as you tell he coated the sword with spiritual energy. Even with that killing those monsters wasn''t easy as you can tell they also had strong defense. To kill one monster he almost needed to use 20% of his total spiritual energy and only then he could kill any Monster very easily. But naturally as you can tell if he really was that Monster like that then sometimeter he would be alreadyying down on the ground because of no spiritual energy present inside him.


    ________________________


    "Iss!!! It Looks like a very intense battle happened in this ce previously. Who could have expected even the surrounding area to get burned by the attack and I could also see the result of the impact. Even the ground got cracked by their impact.


    Well almost how many monsters he was fighting previously that he needed to use that kind of powerful technique and most likely this could be also done by the monster naturally. I just wanted to know which Warriors fight which type of Monster."


    Sam already leaves that ce but not long a group of Warriors also present there and everyone of them could see the condition of that ce. So it became very interesting to know which type of Monster and which group of Warriors were fighting them.


    Unfortunately they won''t be able to know the answer and also one more thing that Sam already decided to finish the mission and after that he will go back to the kingdom. He also wanted to know what decision the human king would take after talking with the old king and if it was possible then he wanted to capture a few more Toron people. But unfortunately that wasn''t possible because he cannot find those people inside the kingdom and most likely they already escaped from the kingdom or came inside of the danger zone.


    But as you can tell he still was angry at those Toron people. Not just only them but he also wanted to know which were the other kingdoms that were helping them. It was that after reading the previous memory of the people he was unable to tell which kingdoms that helped them so naturally Sam wanted to know about that so the human Kingdom and all the friends of the human Kingdom became careful about those other kingdoms.


    __________________


    "I naturally understand your point but as you know that we need to collect the proof first and only then we can openly attack them. It was the rule that we created so we won''t be able to go to war with another Kingdom without a proper reason."


    " I also know that but collecting the proof will be difficult. Most likely those Warriors also know about that and because of that they did not do all of these openly. Also in their Kingdom not everyone could enter, so this was quite a difficult task."


    To be continued__________

 Chapter 520 520 - Cant Find That Warrior

    ?


    Now came back to Sam well after staying inside of the danger zone a few more days he finally decided toe back to the kingdom and after submitting all the missions he finally got the reward and with that he already went back to the hotel room that he booked previously.


    Well he decided to stay in this kingdom for at least one month and after that he will go to another Kingdom. First of all he wanted to know what the decision of the human king was and also in this part of the danger zone he already met many new Monsters and he wanted to go deeper and wanted to see how strong the Monsters were here.


    But it looks like the human King still did not decide something and because of this the human King still did not say anything to him. Well he tried to call the human king but it looked like he was also busy and because of that the human King also did not pick up the phone.


    ''Hmm¡­ should I go toward the Toron kingdom? Naturally the king needed to send someone to that Kingdom to get all the information and as I already decided to punish those people I could go to that ce. Not only that, using my technique it will be easier for me to locate all those people that got kidnapped by those people and are now working as ves of those people.


    If it was possible then I also needed to collect all the information about those other kingdoms that were also supporting them and most likely those people also using all those kidnapped humana as their ves.


    But before going to that Kingdom I needed to do some research about it and with that I needed to go to the library of this ce. I just hope I will get some information because in the mobile phone while I search on the inte I am unable to find anything.''


    Well as you can tell Sam was now thinking if he should go to that Kingdom because he also thinkspared to any other people he will be able to go to that Kingdom easily and also able to gather information very easilypared to any of those other Warriors.


    But the problem was that even though he could just go there on his own, he also thought that before making any decision he should talk to the human being and the Oni King. Well you can say that both the kings and the people of the kingdom became very familiar and those people also loved him and respected him.


    Naturally because of these he also thinks that before making any danger is a decision like this he should try to talk to them and also if possible he wants to get a possible better strategy in this situation. But he still thinks thatpared to any of those other Warriors he will be easily able to enter the kingdom. Like this he was eating his food.


    At this time he did notice but suddenly a few people entered that cafeteria. Naturally Sam did not care about those people and just only focused on his food while thinking about his strategy. But if he looks at those people then he will naturally feel them familiar. Also the thing was that those people were the natural enemy of the humans so it could be a possibility that those people will try to attack him.


    But even with that he did not care about those people and just only focused on his food. But at this time he can suddenly feel someone was looking in his direction with curiosity. Well, Sam decided to ignore that because that person did not have any type of malicious intention so he just let them do what they wanted to do.


    But she did not know that the person who looked in his direction began to feel that he was very familiar with that man but he just cannot remember his face or something like that. So while looking in his direction he tried to remember where he saw that person. Actually if you look at the person then you will see that it was the same person who previously got affected by the ghost Monster inside the danger zone and it was Sam who helped that person to kill that monster.


    Naturally his other friends did not noticed his curiosity. After cing their order they just look for a empty and after finding that they all sit down on that table. Also one more thing even though they were enemy of the humans but they weren''t like those wild people who will just attack their enemy who did not even do anything to them.


    Naturally they also know many people present in this city who will do the same thing but unfortunately as you can tell they will not do anything until their enemy will do anything to them. Also as you can tell everyone of them were those elves that previously Sam helped.


    At this time those other elves also noticed a human present in that cafeteria but they just ignored that human and just focused on their food. But unfortunately they are unable to see the phase of that person because right now they can only see the backside of that human. And also that person who felt that person was familiar with him also did not say anything to them because he also thought that he was just over thinking.


    So after some timeter, all of them were talking about various things and mostly they were talking about the incident that happened to them inside the danger zone.


    "Really I cannot believe that we will find a ghost monster in that ce and also the thing was that I already get the information that naturally you cannot find those ghost monsters in that ce but recently some people also encounter the same situation.


    Warrior association also told that most likely recently the ghost Monster appear on that ce and because of that you still cannot saw any other ghost Monsters. Actually those ghost Monster still did not able to find a good territory and because of this still you cannot find that many ghost Monsters. Naturally as you know before anything every Monster wanted to have their own territory and because of that those Monsters right now searching for a good territory that good provide them with good amount of dark spiritual energy and at the same time that ce needed to be out of the sunlight."


    " Really if it wasn''t for that person most likely we would already have lost Jaron. But it also made us understand we should not underestimate any Dungeon and the thing was that we needed to prepare for any kind of situation. Well guys I already told the teacher and she also already told me that she is alreadying to this Kingdom and most likely she will being here in 2 days.


    Not only that she also brings mind control techniques and mind protection techniques. Our teacher told me that to protect ourselves from those kinds of attacks we really need to have a strong mind and need to have the strength of willpower to fight back against those Monsters. "


    " Oh guys I already forgot to tell you that I already tried to search for all the humans that came to the druid kingdom. I did not get to know about all those humans but I was still able to find some information about those young Warriors who came to the druid kingdom.


    But still finding that person wasn''t easy. Most of those people came here and after epting the mission already went to the danger zone. Sigh, who really needed to be lucky to meet that person. I also already told the teacher about this and she also told me that aftering to the kingdom she will try to search for that person. He was a human still he was a savior of us and if it wasn''t for him most likely we would lose Jaron."


    " Well, you are right. Really who could have thought that in the end we will receive help from a human but still not every human was bad. Because of this we should not judge anyone just after not using he was human or something like that."


    You can tell currently they were talking about that person who previously saved them. But unfortunately even though they try to search for that person, in the end they still cannot find any information about that person.


    Naturally, Sam didn''t know anything about this, but even if he get to know about this he will justugh at them because even after searching about him they will not able to find anything. Most likely everyone of them trying to search for a human body at most likely register himself in the human Kingdom so naturally they won''t be able to find any information about him.


    Well on the other hand Sam was busy looking at the system shop. You can say that aftering to the Terraria he is did not receive any type of technique after killing those Monsters so he also thinking that only after killing Monster inside of the Dungeon he will receive loot like that.


    To be continued________

 Chapter 521 521 - Regret

    ?


    If you are wondering how much gold coin he has saved in it already became 500 k gold coins. As you can tell he didn''t use that much to buy that much from his systems other than the potions. Because of this he was able to save that much gold coin and right now he was looking at the system shop so if notice any good technique then he would naturally buy that from the system shop.


    Even though at this time he could feel 1 person still looking in his direction, other than curiosity that person did not show any type of intention so naturally Sam also did not care about that person and just focused on the systems shop. Also one more thing he already sold all those loot that he got this time from the danger zone.


    First of all, most of those that he doesn''t need and he could buy better versions of those loots from the system shops, so naturally he decided to sell everything.


    After looking at the system shop for at least 2 minutes he finally found a technique that made him very curious. First of all, that technique is rted to disguise. With that he could change his face. Looking at that technique he did not waste a single second to buy that because for his next mission or you can say for his next dangerous adventure he really needed that technique.


    Well also he needed a good or more because his old armor got damaged. But the thing was that while he was looking at the armor option he could see that all of those animals were very costly and to buy good armor needed to use almost all of his full coins. Well he buys the technique using 100K gold coins and uses the remaining gold points to buy an armor that gives him extra + 50 protection. Not only just extra defense at the same time it also gives him + 20 extra vitality and it also helps him recover in his health much faster.


    Other than that this armor also has the capacity to absorb almost 70% of the attack that will hit him. Also this has the affinity with element so it will not get damage after getting attacked by any element type of attack. Looking at the special status of that armor he decided to buy it and the thing was that this armor was created by Neo materials.


    Most likely this is one of the strongest materials and because of that he is also getting that much extra special benefit from that armor. As you know that he will not destroy his old Armor. Fortunately he also had upgrade points, wasting no time to select his old and new armor and use the fusion option. Instantly both of the armor fused with each other and that once again increased the power of his new armor.


    Well he was doing all of these in his system so naturally nobody present in that cafeteria knew that nor did they feel any type of energy fluctuationing out of his body.


    __________________


    "Sigh, to tell you the truth I almost charge all those people that belong to the human Kingdom and even though many people like that warrior came to this Kingdom but none of them are that warrior.


    I just home he did not leave the kingdom but still even if he left the kingdom at least we were able to get to know that."


    " I have a feeling that person still did not leave this Kingdom and he was still inside of this Kingdom. Don''t know why I am feeling like this but what can I say as you know most of the time my instinct was right."


    Naturally those people sitting opposite Sam are still discussing that Warrior. Well naturally they also thought what if that person already left the kingdom. But then one of theirrades told that, and also even if he left the Kingdom then would have already got the details.


    Well they already tried to ask for the help of the warrior association and they also told them because that person saved them they just wanted to say thank and express their gratitude. Naturally at first the warrior association did not want to help them because they also think those elves most likely try to search for the person to kill him or do something like that as naturally who did not know humans and elves were enemies.


    But when they told them why they wanted to search for that person only then the warriorsession decided to help them.


    At this time one of the friends is still looking in the direction toward that human that he still feels familiar with. But until now he did not tell any of his friends but he could so right now that the human gets up from his seat and then after paying the bill he is already about to leave the cafeteria. At this time how able to get to see the face of that person and that already makes me very shocked. Because finally he recognised that person and he also understood why he was feeling that person was familiar.


    "Guys, look, that was the same warrior that we are searching for. He was also sitting opposite us but we just did not notice him."


    The moment he finished saying that everyone quickly looked at the direction but at the same time they could only see that Warrior had already left the cafeteria. So they also did not get to see the face but quickly got up from the seat and came outside of the cafeteria to look for that person.


    All of this happened in less than a second but even when they came outside to look for that human Warrior, they saw no one. It looks like that Warrior already uses some kind of technique to vanish from that ce. So disappointed they just came back.


    "Are you sure Jaron? Did you think this human Warrior was the same person!?"


    Aftering back suddenly one of them asks that question to Jaron.


    "Actually to tell you the truth, just after looking at that person I started to feel that I already knew that person. But as you know most of the time we meet human Warriors who try to attack as I also thought he was the person like that but then while he was leaving the cafeteria I suddenly got to see the face of that person and I am definitely sure that it was the same Warrior who helped me previously.


    Even though in the day I was getting attacked by the ghost Monster and I wasn''t in a good condition, at least I could see outside and I also saw the face of that person at that time so naturally I am definitely sure he was the same person."


    Jaron told them that he was 100% sure that this is the same person.


    " Shit!!!!! We just miss the chance to express our gratitude. Who could have thought he would be sitting opposite us but we just did not notice the team and even after looking at him it did not feel anything like that."


    Naturally they begin to regret that even though he was present in the same cafeteria, they did not notice him and most of all this time they were just talking about him. You should know that they also trust their friend.


    ___________________


    On the other hand, Sam did not know anything about this. Just aftering outside of the cafeteria he uses the teleportation technique to vanish from that ce. Actually he did because he already knew one person present in the cafeteria was curious about him and that person could also follow him so he decided to use the teleportation technique and directly came to the room.


    Now finally he was alone so wasting no time he quickly decided to bring out that armor and already the moment he brought out that armor he could feel the power of that armor. The color of that armor was blue but he did not care about that. To tell you the truth right now he wanted to go back to the danger zone to test the power of the armor.


    Well sometimeter he already became rxed and decided toy down on the bed. First of all he needed to decide his next move. Should he go toward the Toron kingdom right now? Or should I wait for a few more days?


    As you can tell you think like that right now but before anything he already needed to discuss. But at the same time he already got the information that some people from the kingdom suddenly left the kingdom previously. Naturally it could be a simple matter if those people weren''t from the Toron kingdom. Now that could be a dangerous thing because in this Kingdom not only he was present. Like him any other human Warriors also present in that Kingdom and naturally even those people did not pose a threat to him but they could harm those other Warriors.

 Chapter 522 522 - Decision

    ?


    Because of that he also needed to make sure that those people did not do anything to those other humans. Well he already told the human King about this and human being already told him not to worry because he already contact all the people that present in this Kingdom and told them to be careful because they could get attacked by enemy anytime so they need to be careful and at the if possible then they should came back to human Kingdom.


    Well with that Sam did not have to worry about those other humans, but it was possible then he should try to observe the condition of the kingdom and if he once again spotted those enemies then he should contact the human king.


    __________________


    "Well as I told you earlier even though this was, I also think that it would be the best choice if I go to that Kingdom and try to gather information. First of all we did not know how many humans got kidnapped by them and what their condition is and at the same time who are those other kingdoms that support them? We also needed to gather more information and I think in this condition I would be the best choice to go to that Kingdom."


    " Hmm¡­ but I still think you should not go because it could be risky for you. Well I get to hear that they have twoary grade Warriors and other than that we still were not able to gather that much information about the kingdom so as you can tell it is a really dangerous thing for you."


    " Don''t worry about that. I also had the confidence that if the situation became very dangerous for me then I could easily escape from the kingdom."


    With that Sam finally finishes his conversation with the human King. In the end it was decided that he will be the one who will go to that Kingdom to gather information. Naturally he also knew it was a very risky thing but in the end he also thought that in a condition like this he would be the best choice to do that.


    With that he already decided tomorrow he will leave the druid kingdom and go for the Toron kingdom. Before anything he also needed to make sure he was already prepared to face any kind of danger and because of this he began to look at the inventory to make sure everything was there.


    __________________


    Currently if you look around them you can see it has already be night time. Naturally in the danger zone you can still see many Warriors who were busy fighting monsters. Well it was a verymon method but at the same time if you saw closely then you will notice around a ce in the inner area of that part of the danger zone some people gather around and everyone of them most likely discussing something very important.


    Well all of them are wearing ck and at the same time they are hiding their faces so nobody will be able to tell their identity.


    "I already told the king. He already said to me that you will be sending someone so we need to wait for that person. Most likely it could be a captain ormando of the army or other Warriors. But one thing was sure that the King most likely trusts that person will be able to handle that human warrior. But at the same time the king already told me we need to make sure we will try to capture those other humans.


    Most likely the human King would already know about this and after that it could be very dangerous for us to stay here. So afterpleting this mission we should leave this ce as soon as we can. Not only that, we also most likely needed to prepare for war with those humans. But at the same time the king thinks that the human kings themselves try to do something like that. Even if he wanted to do that naturally we are also ready to fight those humans and the good thing was that nobody from the human Kingdom knew about our situation."


    " But Boss, what if that person already told the human King about all of these and the human King also already sent someone to look for us or try to do something like that?"


    " Don''t worry the king also already thinks of that and because of this he already told some Warriors to watch over the movement of the human kings and if any other humans try toe for this ce then we''ll immediately get to know about that. Not only that if it was possible then those Warriors will attack those human Warriors if they try to get close to the druid kingdom.


    So until then the king already told us to be careful and around this time we will not try to attack those other human Warriors. Only when the person got sent by the king will reach these ces will we take action and try to kill that person who previously killed our brother.


    Also I already told you to gather his information, did anyone already gather the information or not? "


    As you can guess everyone is most likely from the Toron kingdom and they were nning to attack all the human Warriors that are present in the Druid kingdom. But before attacking all the human warriors they decided to wait for the support of the king and only then would they take action.


    At this time the leader already asks them if anybody is able to gather any information about that human Warrior or not. You can say that all of them are very angry at that body because previously he killed many of their brothers, wanted revenge. But at the same time the king told them the situation could be difficult because they did not know any information about that person and they also did not know if it was just one person or he had a group or not.


    Actually it was verymon that you can see human warriors with other Warriors from other kingdoms. So they also did not know anything about this and because of that the king told him not to take any action and if it is possible try to gather information about that person.


    "Boss we already try to look for all the information about the human Warriors thate to the kingdom but unfortunately because of the warrior association we are unable to do that. So we really did not have any idea and were only able to gather some basic information."


    " Well, I already expected that. Naturally the Warrior association will not support us in this type of matter. Also if those officers of the association get to know about this then it could be a very dangerous case for us and our Kingdom."


    " Yes boss we also know that and because of this we did not try to use any force. Everyone of those people who joined the warrior association have apletely different mindset. It was like after joining the warrior association everyone of them got brainwashed by the warrior association. Even all those Warriors from our Kingdom who joined the Warriors association also had a mentality like this. Unfortunately we also did not have any high merit that could help us to gather any information."


    Well you can say that the warrior association was a different force that could be dangerous for anyone. Even though everyone of the king had some power in the warrior association but still they cannot order around in the warrior association. Also, everyone who joined the warrior association became a different personpared to before.


    Even their friends and family think that they got brainwashed by the Warriors association. Naturally the warrior association has apletely different mindset and you can say that in everything present in Terraria you will find a warrior association. Previously all the strongest people of the Terraria decided to make that Warrior association and they also made the rule that nobody who was able to order the warrior association and from then the warrior association got created and it also became a neutral factor.


    Because of that those people also did not want to make those officers of the Warriors and the and with that they did not use force to gather information. Also if you are wondering about the merits then you will be able to gather merits by clearing the mission of the warrior association. Actually not only the missions but you also need to have some big achievement and everyone of those achievements will naturally give you the merit and like this using the merits you could also ask help form the worried association.


    Naturally everyone of those kings has their own merit but still in that situation if the king wanted to use his merit then he needed toe to this part of the warrior association.

 Chapter 523 523 - Increase Power

    ?


    So those people from the Toron kingdom are waiting for that person that the king sent there to help them but at the same time none of them know that Sam already ns to go inside of their Kingdom to get to know the real situation of that Kingdom.


    Sam is already preparing himself and just waiting for tomorrow to start his mission. First of all he did not know if any legendary Warrior also present there or not and because of this he will take this matter very seriously and he will not deactivate the concealment technique inside of the kingdom. Naturally those legendary Warriors will be able to sense him anytime and because of this he did not want to take that risk to get found out by those people.


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (70000/70000)


    Spiritual energy: (700000/70000)


    Strength: 7000 + 500


    Agility: 7000 + 500


    Physique: 7000 + 500


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 7000 + 500


    Spirit: 7000 + 500


    Status points:- 454000 - 15000 - 439000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also fix based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Epic-grade) (intermediate) / (intermediate SSS+ grade)


    Potential: Legendary (+)


    Upgrade point: 70k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 1 chance)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade B) (+)


    Supreme sword technique (A-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (B-grade). (+)


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (B-grade)(+)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)(+)


    Sonic st technique: (C-grade) (+)


    Strength buff technique: (B-grade)(+)


    Mind control technique: (B-grade) (+)


    Telekinesis: (B-grade)(+)


    Berserker (B-grade)(+)


    Light control (Grade B) (+)


    Observation (B-grade) (+)


    Energy shield (B-grade) (+)


    Teleportation (B-grade) (+)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (B-grade) (+)


    Mind protection: (B-grade) (+)


    Spirit Eye: (B-grade) (+)


    The power of the moon. (Grade: B)(+)


    Regeneration (Grade B) (+)


    [ Remark: Don''t think you are invincible. You just gain some strength to protect yourself from danger. But you are still a weakling.] "


    Finally when he looks at the status he could see he will be once again able to increase his strength. He did not want to waste a single second and with that he used 15000 status points to increase his stats. Naturally after that he felt once again that barrier and that barrier mostly got created because of his sudden increase in power and naturally once again he needed to wait until the cool down was over he would be able to increase his power once again.


    But still disappointing for even though he had that many status points he was unable to use all of them at the same time and that is really disappointing for him. If possible he wanted to use all of those at the same time but naturally that wasn''t possible so that is really disappointing for him.


    Previously it was because he did not have that many status points he was unable to be powerful more quickly but right now the situation ispletely different. Right now even though he had that many status points but because of the limit of his body he is unable to increase his strength that much.


    Actually all this time he already gathered many other status stones and dead bodies of many Monsters but unfortunately he did not decide to absorb them as he already had that much Status point so he thought he would not need those many status points right now.


    That does not mean he will sell them in the system shop. Don''t know why but he had a feeling that he needed all the status points for something big and he was just saving those dead bodies andstones for now.


    On the other hand as you know if you want he could already increase the potential but previously he did not think he will needed to upgrade the potential but right now he was thinking to upgrade that. Actually Sam was hoping that after upgrading the potential it will increase the limit of his body and he could use more status points.


    But he wasn''t sure about this. Also at the same time he did not have that many upgrade points. To upgrade his potential he will need 100 million upgrade points. Naturally as you can tell it was a huge amount of update points and he really needed much time to collect that much upgrade points.


    One thing he noticed in the danger zone was that after killing those Monsters who were weakerpared to him did not give him any upgrade points or any good loot. All of this started to happen 3 months ago and he still did not know why something like that happened to him. This was also a reason he did not want to fight those weaker Monsters who will not give him anything and it will just waste his time.


    Most likely right now his system will only give him good loot after he kills a Monster that was in the same power level as him or powerfulpared to him.


    ''Sigh, if it was possible then I really wanted to talk to the goddess right now but unfortunately it looks like she won''t be able to appear and as you already told me she was facing some kind of danger so I need to take care of myself and need to be powerful as quickly as I can.


    I still did not know why she told me something like that. But I am sure by hearing all those words the goddess not only told me to get prepared for the primed Dragon at that time but at the same time most likely she was telling me about something more dangerous that could happen to me.


    I really wanted to know if I was able to upgrade the system once again or not. If it was possible then I really wanted to upgrade the system and most likely upgrading the system will give me more function and that will be helpful for me. But where could I find this cosmic start that was required to upgrade my system?''


    Sam was thinking all of this. First of all he really wanted to talk to the goddess and wanted to know why she previously told him like that and also he wanted to know where he would be able to find a cosmic star. That will be required to upgrade his system but unfortunately he did not have that thing and he still wasn''t sure if you would find that thing inside the Terraria or not.


    Just by hearing the name he could tell this thing most likely had some kind of connection with the Cosmos and space so he wasn''t sure if he would find that thing in the Terraria or not.


    With that he already closed the system window and decided to rest. But that does not mean he was alert and if anybody right now came near to his ce he would get immediately awake.


    On the other hand, some were thinking about the cosmic star that required him to upgrade the system. If possible you wanted to ask all those old kings but he did not decide to do that because it could be a dangerous thing for him if those people also get to know about this and it could also make many people suspicious if they get to know about this.


    Naturally inside the Oni Kingdom and humans he already tried to search for information about those cosmic stars but unfortunately he did not find any type of information. So he wasn''t sure what it looked like and what it could do.


    _________________


    Next morning,


    Next early morning he woke up and left the kingdom. Well before entering or before leaving the kingdom naturally anybody would need to show their ID card so that they will register themselves. Today while leaving the kingdom he also did that and finally right now began to go in the direction where he will find the Toron kingdom.


    Also one more thing you should know that he was already using the disguise technique so nobody will be able to recognise him as a human Warrior and they will not be alerts about him. Naturally before going inside of that Kingdom he will use the stealth technique to disappear but before reaching the kingdom he was using the disguise technique.


    ''Now the main question was how long it will take for me to reach that Kingdom. I could tell after hearing the previous word of the King that most likely from the skin I will need at least 5 to 7 days to reach that Kingdom even if I use my full speed. Most likely the human King also knew about this and because of this he also told him don''t worry, use his full power and also take rest while searching for that Toron kingdom.''


    Sam thought this while he was searching the right direction where he would be able to reach that Kingdom. First of all, the danger zone in nearby ces did not have that much signal.

 Chapter 524 524 - Elf Warrior

    ?


    "Sigh, why the hell are we still unable to find information about that person even when the teacher is also searching for him? Using the merits, the teacher already gets to know about all those human Warriors that came from the human Kingdom but none of those human Warriors resemble the human warrior who saved us earlier. Guys, what do you think? Do you think he already left the Druid kingdom? Also is it possible that he hid his identity and because of this we thought him as a human Warrior."


    " I didn''t think so because as I remember earlier at the time he wasn''t using any type of technique and I am 100% sure I previously saw that person present in the cafeteria. It is just a really confusing thing that even when the teacher gets to know about all those human Warriors who came from the human Kingdom we are still unable to recognise that person."


    " Don''t worry, the teacher already told me that she won''t give up on this and most likely she was still searching for that person. Even though we are enemies, we still know how to express our gratitude and the teacher also knows that and because of this she is also helping us. Also I think she wanted to meet that person who was able to detect the ghost Monster even though we were unable to detect that Monster at that time."


    Naturally at this time those elves were talking with each other. First of all, they are unable to find any information about that person who previously saved them. Even though their teacher already came they are to help them but even when she uses her merits to look at all the information of those human Warriors but in the end she is still unable to find anything.


    But naturally she told all the students that she will still be searching for the warrior association and until then they should wait and observe the kingdom. Well in this Kingdom still many humans were present. Some of them came to this kingdom for business while some of them came to this Kingdom to ept the mission of the kingdom. So their teacher told them to observe those humans and see if they can find any clue or not.


    Because of this right now, all of them are waiting beside the city Gate. You can say that every Kingdom had one Gate. Well naturally they could have a secret Gate but normally people are able to use that get so they can only use the front to get inside or go outside of the kingdom.


    Now the best ce to observe those humans was the gate. At that time they could naturally so any human who enters or exits the kingdom. On the other hand their teacher is present in the warrior association. First of all, all of them did not have that many merit point So they were naturally unable to get all the information about those humans. But on the other hand their teacher had that merit point and most likely she was using that to get all the information.


    Also you should know if you have high merit points and high achievement then if any other person with high merit tries to search for your information, they won''t be able to do that. Because naturally you also have the authority to maintain your identity as a secret from anyone and naturally because of your merit the warrior association will also do that. But nobody thought he had that much merit like their teacher, so they just hoped their teacher could find information about that person.


    On the other hand if you look inside of the warrior association then you can easily notice a beautiful elf Warrior present in the warrior association and at the same time she was looking at all the names of the human Warriors that came to the Druid kingdom. At first she decided to charge all those normal lists but her students already confirmed to her that none of them were that person who had previously helped them.


    That means that person belongs to the special list so right now she was looking at the special list and because of her merit nobody tried to stop her. If you look at her then you will see blonde hair with pointy ears, green eyes, and she is now also wearing a green dress. The most attractive thing was the vitality that she was releasing. Naturally that shows she was very close to nature ''s energy and because of that she also had that much vitality.


    Naturally many people with special merit came to the Druid kingdom, and it will naturally take her some time to read all the names and look for all those human Warriors. But around this time suddenly a warrior entered that room and quickly came toward her and told her something.


    If you look at that person then you can naturally see she was a receptionist of the warrior association and she most likely had something to tell her and because of this she quickly came to that room.


    After listening to all of these, the elf Warrior naturally became very surprised and at the same time very alert. That person reported to her that someone from the Toron kingdom also came to the warrior association and right now he was using his merit to look at all the names of those human Warriors who present inside the kingdom. Not only that but it looked like he was also searching for someone.


    Unfortunately, he also had high merit, so because of these the warrior association did not stop him to look at all the information. But naturallypared to any of those other people a person from the Toron kingdom was Dangerous, because of this deception came to that elf Warrior and told her this.


    ''Why did they suddenly begin to look at the information about those human Warriors? Did those people once again try tounch an attack toward the human Warriors and because of these they were right now trying to search for their information? Also the receptionist told me that person is most likely searching for someone. Naturally, who is this person that person was searching for?''


    She was thinking all of this but unfortunately she did not know what was happening with those people from Toron kingdom. But she already decided if that person that she is also searching for will be in any kind of danger she will help him.


    Even though she did not like those human Warriors, that does not mean she will not save that person who previously saved all her students.


    After thinking sometime when she was unable toe up with anything she decided to focus on the least one second and at the same time she already told the receptionist to try to inform the association officers about this.


    Naturally even though they could use the merit to look at the information of those other Warriors but at the same time it also alerts those officers because what if suddenly someone tries to look for the information to do bad things. So naturally they will get observed by those officers and even that elf Warrior already received a call from the officer but she already told him that they did not have to worry because she was only searching for a person who previously saved her students, so she just wanted to search that person to express her gratitude.


    But on the other hand those people from Toron kingdom was apletely different matter because everyone of those people belonging to that Kingdom were wild in nature. Not only that, naturally many of them know how much bad work those people do inside of their Kingdom and those people also support the very.


    With that she once again begins to loop at the special list. It almost took her 30 minutes to find a name but the thing was that it was very odd. In the report she can only see the basic report, but other than that she is unable to see the detailed report of that person.


    Naturally that make her very curious so she already take picture of that information and already sent to her students. Naturally she was very curious to know about that person but at the same time she decided to first look at those other names and only then she will try to look at the details of that person.


    Normally in the normal list you can see the details of any person that was register in his Warrior I''d. What your id also use this to register anyone''s achievement. But the thing was that even in the specialist she did not have any problem to look at the details of those people but suddenly she met a person who only had basing information but other than that she unable to read any of the detail information so natural it will make her curious.


    On the other hand all over students already get the information.

 Chapter 525 525 - Sudden Movement

    ?


    The elf warrior doesn''t need to search for that long because her students already confirm that that was the warrior that they were searching for. Most likely that person who only had the name and grade written on the special list was the one who she was searching for.


    With that she did not want to waste a single second and wanted to find more information about that person. She already told the receptionist about this. At first the receptionist nodded and most likely tried to search for the information of that person but then suddenly something unexpected happened.


    That Receptionist has a strange expression on her face. Even though she was using the merit points of the elf warrior, but still unable to get any information about that person. After trying some more time she decided to tell the elf warrior.


    Naturally, that elf Warrior gets surprised by hearing that and at the same time the receptionist tells him even though she tries to use her merit points but she is unable to get any information about that person. The reason was that two people with high merit points decided to hide the information of that person and because of this even she won''t be able to get any information about that person until both of those people who decided to hide the information did not allow that.


    "Can you tell me about those people who decided to hide the information of this Warrior?"


    That elf Warrior asked the receptionist.


    " Yes ma''am, it is actually the human king and the Oni King. Both of them use their merit points to hide the information. Because of that even if you try to use your merit you won''t be able to get any information."


    On the other hand that elf Warrior naturally had a strange expression on her face after getting the answer. She could understand why the human King wanted to hide the information because that person was most likely very important to the human Kingdom but when she also got to know the Oni King also used his merit point to hide the information, now that made her very surprised.


    ''Why did the Oni King hide the information?''


    She really wanted to know about this but to do that she needed to contact the Oni King. Well even though the elves were from the Oni Kingdom. So she could naturally contact the Oni King. So she already knew right now in the warrior association she won''t be able to get any information so she decided to leave the warrior association. But suddenly she remembered that person from the Toron kingdom. With that she instantly asked the receptionist about this and the receptionist also had a strange expression after hearing the question.


    Because like that elf Warrior that person also first looks at the normal list but after looking at the normal list naturally anybody could tell most likely he did not find that person that he was searching for so he also uses the merit points to look at the special list. This was the update and most likely that person is still looking at the special list.


    ra or you can say the elf warrior nodded after hearing that and with that she decided to leave the warrior association. Even though she cannot tell the motive of that person, one thing was sure that something would happen and she did not want her student to get into that conflict.


    At this time she was just about to contact her students but before she could do that her student contacted him. Quickly one of them told her about a strange thing that they noticed right now. Naturally ra told her student to wait there and wasting no time she began to go toward that direction as quickly as she could.


    _______________________


    On the other hand, the human king was preparing himself to go to war and the important thing was that he already sent many people toward the druid kingdom. First of all he needed to bring all the human Warriors present there toe back to the human Kingdom.


    Not only that, Sam before going toward the Toron kingdom also told him that he suddenly noticed that all the people from the Toron kingdom suddenly left the Druid kingdom. So naturally it could be a sign that those people are nning something and because of this the human King did not waste a single second and contacted every human Warriors present in the druid kingdom and told them toe back to the human Kingdom as soon as they can because it could be dangerous for them.


    He already sends many Warriors toward that Kingdom and at the same time he already gets the report that sometimeter all the human Warriors begin to fight with some people from the Toron kingdom. Unfortunately those people most likely underestimate the power of those human kingdoms and because of this it did not take that much time for those human Warriors to capture those people.


    Well naturally after the previous war every human Warriors begin to focus on increasing their power as soon as they can because we cannot be sure when those Abyss humans attack them once again. Naturally not many people know about this and because of that they underestimate the human Warriors.


    Every Warriors that the human King sent toward the druid kingdom were Epic grade Warriors. Also those people from the Toron kingdom weren''t that strong because not everyone of them were epic grade. So naturally it was easy for those human Warriors to defeat those enemies and at the same time they already captured them and sent those people toward the human Kingdom.


    The human King also gets to know that those people most likely did note there to kill them but most likely they''re trying to stop them from advancing. With that the human King became sure that most likely people from the Toron kingdom were really nning something and because of this they did not want any reinforcement from the human Kingdom to reach the Druid kingdom.


    Because of that he told all those Warriors to increase their speed and they already reported that they came very close to the druid kingdom. Not only that, on the other hand people present in the Druid kingdom, at first did not take action or leave the kingdom because the king told him the reinforcement will arrive and only after that they should leave the kingdom. Today they finally get the information from the king that the reinforcement already arrived and with that everyone of them begin to take action.


    One by one every one of those human Warriors begin to leave the druid kingdom. Naturally because all those humans suddenly living in that druid kingdom will attract the attention of many people but none of those human Warriors care about that.


    Right now everyone of those humans who came to that Kingdom knows that most likely the situation was very dangerous and because of this the king told them to leave the kingdom as quickly as they can.


    Naturally at this time many people came to the city Gate to check what was the real situation and aftering to that gate, everyone saw most likely all the humans present in that Kingdom begin to leave the kingdom suddenly. Naturally all of them had many questions but the thing was that they could also see the serious expression of those humans so naturally they could Guess something serious would most likely happen.


    At this time ra also came to that ce and she also suddenly saw everyone of those human Warriors right now living in the kingdom and not only that she could also feel arge amount of spiritual aura. She was definitelying from many Warriors and it looks like those are the human Warriors.


    Naturally, it was a good thing that those humans came here to fight but because those human Warriors did not want to increase the Misunderstanding, they also did not approach the druid kingdom. They maintain a distance from that Kingdom while right now those humans present inside that Kingdom begin toe outside of the kingdom.


    At this time a group of people who are also not far away from that ce begin to get anxious because they could also feel the power of those human Warriors who came to rescue those other humans. Not only that they already got the report that all of their teammates got defeated and they also got captured. Naturally that news made them very anxious but at the same time they hoped that the captain who went inside of the kingdom to look at the information in the warrior association, quickly came outside and told them what to do.


    But they also think in a situation like this they won''t be able to do anything because all of those reinforcements of the human Warriors were Epic grade. So right now a very tense atmosphere is also created in that ce.

 Chapter 526 526 - Toron Kingdom

    ?


    Right now you can see Sam was using his full speed to go toward the Toron kingdom. Naturally he still did not reach that ce because it was very far from the druid kingdom. It has already been 2 days since he left the Druid kingdom. On the other hand he really did not know what was happening inside the kingdom.


    Naturally he was using the concealment technique while advancing. Actually at first he could still see so many people present on the road. But the more he came closer to the Toron kingdom, the more he was getting a dark vibe. He doesn''t know why but he has a feeling that while searching that Kingdom you will naturally find something that will make him speechless.


    On the other hand the human King already told the information about that Kingdom. Even the human King doesn''t know that much about the Toron kingdom, but because previously there was a war between the human Kingdom and the Toron kingdom, at that time naturally the human being sent a spy to that Kingdom and because of that he was still able to gather that information.


    First of all he could be sure that one or twoary grade warriors will be inside of the kingdom. Most likely no legendary grade Warrior will be inside, but still the human being wasn''t sure about this so he told Sam to be careful. As a legendary Warrior those people really have very strong observation techniques and they also had a big range of observation. Naturally because of these the human being also worried about Sam, but Sam told him that he doesn''t have to worry that much.


    Well if you are wondering why he told the human being about this then it was because right now he was able to use the concealment technique for 48 hours continuously. But after that he needed to rest his body for 24 hours and only then could he use that technique once again. Naturally after using 48 hours his body will be in a pressure and he needed to rest his body for 24 hours for that pressure to release from his body.


    Well actually he was hoping that in these 48 hours he will get all those important information about that Kingdom and if possible you will also gather solid truth about those human beings treated as ves inside of that Kingdom and also if it was possible then you will try to know about all those supporters of that Kingdom.


    So like this after one dayter he finally reached close to that Kingdom but at that time he did not instantly go inside of the kingdom. Before anything he wanted to make his body in perfect state and only then he would advance toward the kingdom. But using the spiritual vision he could naturally see the gate or you can say entrance of the kingdom.


    At this timepared to any other Kingdom like the human or druid kingdom he saw a different atmosphere present in this Kingdom and not only that he also saw many people from other Kingdom present in front of that entrance to enter the kingdom. Naturally nobody tries to go inside of a dangerous Kingdom like this where they could lose their life, or get kidnapped.


    Previously the king told him most likely not only the human Warriors but many other people also get kidnapped by the Toron kingdom, and after that they will use those people as their ve or sell those people.


    24 hourster around 1 p.m. he finally decided to enter the kingdom. Naturally at this time he could so guard was present in front of the entrance gate and they observed their surroundings very carefully. But naturally they won''t be able to find out about Sam and Sam easily enters The Kingdom.


    The moment he enters The Kingdom he gets surprised after looking at all those buildings and other things present in the kingdom. Don''t know why but every house present in that Kingdom was ck in color and when observing those houses very carefully he could tell those houses were created by some unknown materials that most likely give them the ck color. At this time he could naturally see many Toron warriors present. Some of the most likely going toward the entrance while some of them entering the kingdom.


    Naturally a part of the warrior association existed in that Kingdom butpared to any other part of the warrior association that Warrior association had a barrier around him and when Sam got close to that Warrior association you can also see thatpared to any other association this part of the association has different kinds of rules.


    First of all you don''t need to enter the warrior association to ept a mission from the warrior association. Not only that at the same time when he observed those people present inside of the barrier, he could tell even though they were also Toron people, don''t know why but everyone of them has some kind of different vibe.


    Sam did not stay in that ce for long and already began to room around The Kingdom. But still now he did not see any other people from different Kingdom and also he did not see any ve present in the street. Well actually he already expected that so he needed to find those humans who get treated as ves and if it was possible he wanted to know which of those other people who also get treated like ves.


    At this time Sam doesn''t know but inside of the Royal pce of the Toron kingdom, a very important discussion was going on about those human Warriors. Actually the king already got a report that suddenly all the humans began to leave the Druid kingdom, not only that, a reinforcement team also arrived near that druid kingdom. Naturally those reinforcement teams came there to safely escort all those human Warriors to the human Kingdom.


    Well that won''t be a big matter if those Toron people didn''t get captured. Naturally the king also gets to know those people that he previously sent to stop if the human King sends any human reinforcement team. But unfortunately all of his people got captured and right now the most likely getting interrogated by the human king.


    "Before anything we need to prepare ourselves for a war because after getting all the memories the human king will be sure what was happening inside of the Toron kingdom. So with that they will naturally try to start a war with us and because of that we need to stay ready and I already contacted all of our friends.


    Before those human Warriors, good will attract us to make sure we take the first lead so it will give us the advantage to win the war. But at the same time everyone needed to be careful because it was possible that the human or even many other Kingdom sent their spy inside of our kingdom.


    So I want everyone to try to find the spy and capture them. Even if they did not want to tell us anything we could just read the memory of those people and with that we could also be sure what other Kingdom was also nning in a situation like this."


    The Toron king exins all of this to those people inside of the Royal pce right now. Everyone of the people were the important people of the Toron kingdom. So he just only contacts those people. Right now he told them what was the currency situation and what happened to those people that he previously sent toward the human Kingdom.


    Naturally because they got captured he was sure about one thing that the human Kingdom would naturally try to start a war after reading the memory of those people. Because of this the king also already told all of his supporters about this and naturally they also sent their people to the Toron kingdom.


    On the other hand, naturally the king knows that most likely the human king or other kings will try to send a spy. The Spy will be incharge of gathering information.


    Now came back to main matter,


    Sam did not know anything about this but at this time he already searched the South part of the kingdom. He did not check those houses present there, he just only checked the roads and the outside area. But after finding those ces he did not see any clue about any humans or other ves.


    "It looks like I need to find the ck market of this area or also try to find every house to find about ves and any clue about those ves."


    But I needed to be more careful because even though no legendary grade Warrior was present inside of this Kingdom butary Warriors still could feel him if he decided to use arge amount of energy at the same time.

 Chapter 527 527 - Slave Collar

    Naturally it will be tough for him to search every house present in the kingdom so he begins to search around the street. Well, it was still tough because it was a beginning for them and he needed to search very carefully so naturally it would take him much time.


    But fortunately using the concealment technique nobody was able to notice him and with that right now he did not have to worry about getting noticed by anyary grade Warrior. He already searched the nearby area of the entrance but after not finding any clue he decided to go for another direction.


    On the other hand he did not know that the king already made all the Warriors of Toron kingdom alert about the spy. But even if he gets to know that he will not care about that. But naturally at this time you can say while searching around that ce he can tell something most likely different about this ce. Don''t know why but this whole ce gives him a different vibe.


    And everywhere he was going he could see the same design of the house with the same color. That also makes him very curious to know about the materials that they use to make their house. Naturally he did not think it was your normal material because while he was trying to observe that house he could suddenly feel some resistance from that house and most likely that material they used most likely had some kind of ability to prevent observation.


    But the good thing was that after using the observation technique he got to know about the material that they use to build their house. Called the dark oak, this tree most likely has the ability to prevent someone''s observation technique. But naturally as you know his observation technique was different from anyone and even that material was preventing him but he could still achieve the status.


    With this he searched around all this time and sometimeter he became quite dejected because until now he did not see any clue about those ves. Now this is very disappointing for him because he thought he would easily be able to find the clue but it looks like that wasn''t the case.


    ''Most likely they became alert and because of this decided to hide all the ves. The king previously told me a ve market is also present here and I should try to search for that ve market.''


    Actually the human king previously told him that he will find a ve market in that ce but until now he did not find that. But he was thinking most likely that a market was present in the central area so after searching this ce he will try to go toward the Central area of the Toron kingdom.


    While thinking that he was still advancing and observing all the houses and other ces. Like this sometimeter he suddenly stopped and looked toward the house very carefully.


    " Oak house


    Durability -(8000)


    Defense - (4000)


    Skill - Resist observation technique, fire and lightning affinity.


    Living beings - 4 Toron warriors, 2 Toron childrens, and 3 human ves."


    While using the observation technique he could see the status of any house like this and there he could see how many loving beings were present inside of that house. Naturally all this time he did not see any house that had ves, they had all of them from different species so even though he took note of all those other ves naturally as you know he was searching for those human ves.


    Finally he found a household where humans were ves. So wasting no time he decided to approach that house. She did not directly enter the house because who knows if they had some kind of trap or not and because of that you will first observe those people and only then will he try to enter the house.


    Sometimeter, he was sure about one thing that every Warriors present there was Elite grade except one. That person was the epic grade warrior. Those two children most likely were a D-grade warrior. Now he is also already able to find those ves, if you want then it was because every one of those family members was present in the backyard of their house and Sam was also right now hiding himself in that backyard and observing everyone.


    He got to see that all of those humans present here were at Elite grade. But at the same time he notices something that makes him quite furious. Everyone of them had some kind of cor around their neck and most likely that was the ve cor. If any of them tried to run or did not obey the order of the owner then the owner could naturally punish them using the ve cor.


    Naturally just after finding that he wanted to kill everyone present there but then he calmed down. He decided to leave that ce and search those other houses. You are thinking most likely from now on in every house you will find human ves.


    Most likely in the previous area those people did not have the ability to support ves and because of that I did not find any clue in that ce. I also need to contact the human being and the Oni King.''


    Naturally he needed to contact them and told them about the ve cor. He needed to know how to remove that ve caller from those human ves so that it did not affect any of them.


    ________________________


    "Around the South area where the entrance of this Kingdom I did not find any of the ves present there and most likely those people present there did not have the ability to afford ves so they did not buy ves. But if you advance from that ce you will naturally get many clues about human ves and I already find that almost all humans were present there and everyone was treated as ves.


    Unfortunately I still did not find the clue about the ve market, but don''t worry I will quickly find out about that. Now the reason I told all of this it was because everyone of those humans had a ve cor in their neck, naturally because of this they cannot do anything in this situation. If they try to do anything they will immediately get punished by the owner.


    So I wanted to know what is the mechanism of The ve caller, and do you know how to remove them."


    Naturally as you can tell Sam was telling the human king about all of this that he found inside of the kingdom. He told the human king until now how many ves he found. Even he was very surprised because after that previous house he already found many other houses and everyone of those houses has human ves.


    He almost found 50 of them and naturally all of them had a ve cor on their neck. Not only that he also saw many marks of injuries present in the bodies of those humans. So naturally that means they are also getting abused.


    Human King after hearing that became very angry but then he calmed down and began to talk about the ve cor.


    " Actually this ve cor has a curse mechanism. Inside of their cor you will find a small pattern will be present and that pattern was the curse pattern. Most likely when our people get captured, those Toron people use their blood and because of that, everyone gets affected by the curse. On the other hand, naturally those Toron people also had control over the cor.


    They could do anything with a ve cor like that. Because that other person won''t be able to do anything and even if he tries to do anything he will get immediately punished by the curse and even the owner of the person could use his spiritual energy to make the punishment more painful.


    Really all this information makes me very angry and I really wanted to go there to punish all of those Toron people. How they treat humans like this.


    Sigh, now if you want to break the ve cor, then you need to use some kind of technique that could break the curse. That was the only way to break those cors. But at the same time you need to remember if you try to forcefully break those ve cors, it will immediately alert the owner of that ve.


    So if you really want to break those things then you need to be careful and do that very carefully so nobody gets alerted. By the way, do you have any technique that would break the curse?"


    " Don''t worry I have a technique so I am going to use it."


    With that Sam finally finishes talking with the human king. So to break those ve cors he needed to use a technique that would break the curse and naturally he already knew what to use in a situation like this.

 Chapter 528 528 - Talking

    ?


    Naturally Sam had a way to free those people from those ve cor. But before that he needed to find his technique really work or not. Also because of that he needed a human ve and needed to use that technique on that person.


    So before anything he once again begin to search for a person. Well the thing was that most of those human ves were in tough situation so it was very difficult to him to approach those people. But fortunately previously when he was searching around those house he moves likely noticed something and because of that he quickly went back to that house.


    Aftering to that ce he could already so a good thing and with that he began to smile. If you are wondering why he was smiling like that then it was because now no one present in that house ept those human ves. Actually previously he saw those people most likely getting ready to go outside but naturally they won''t bring those human ves.


    So that will be a perfect situation for him to approach those people. He wasted no time and quickly enter the house once again and this time he directly approach the backyard of that house. He previously notice that house has to gate. One was the main entrance and the other one present back side of the house where you can see the backyard.


    Naturally he did not wanted to enter the house breaking the main entrance so he reach the backyard. Wasted no time he quickly broke the lock and silently enter the house. The thing was that he already saw the status that right now except those human two more people also present and those two people most likely were the guard of this house. At the same time they also most likely observing those human so they did not do anything.


    So naturally Sam needed to take care those two people before doing anything. With that he now begin to follow the direction and sometimeter he already came behind of those to people. Right now those to people present in front of a room and inside the room naturally everyone of those human ves were kneeling down. Actually if they did not stay like these they will getpunished by those guards.


    Naturally like this everyone in the Toron kingdom himte those humans and those humans unable to do anything in a situation like this. Because of the ve cor they just helpless in a situation like this. Even though they had the power to kill everyone but unfortunately in a situation like this they just force to follow the order of those people.


    Naturally at this time Sam wasted no time and quickly uses the telekinesis technique and control those two person to go toward other direction. Not only that he also uses the mind control technique so everything they will do at this time after sometimeter they will naturally forget about that. Sam uses the mind control technique to control their mind and right now those to people did not have the ability to think about something so you can say they have a nk mind right now.


    Well those humans present inside of that lock up naturally did not get surprised by the sudden movement of those two people because naturally both of them did not stay there all the time and they will get inside of the room to rest like this. But even at that time they unable to do anything because the moment they will try to do anything the curse will activate once again they will suffer from pain.


    Most likely that curse also had some order function where the owner could put order and the ves follow all those order or if he did not do that then naturally immediately the curse will activate once again.


    "Huuu!!! I really wanted to go back to human Kingdom. I really don''t know how long I had been here and get treated like this. Sometime I really wanted to just die. Who wanted a life like this. Unfortunately we unable to send any kind of SOS signal to the human king or most likely he will already attack the kingdom and killed the Toron king."


    "Just looking at the face of those Toron people I really wanted to kill everyone of them but because of this damm cor, everyone of us needed to stay like this."


    " I really don''t know how long we need to suffer from all of this. Really if anyway the human King get to know about this, sigh, but I don''t think so any of us will be able to send message like that in a situation like this."


    " Don''t worry just believe in our human king. Actually I get to know that previously human King already try to search about the Toron kingdom, but then suddenly something unexpected happen and because of that the human being get busy with that.


    When I went outside, I get to hear about this rumour and also recently I hear a good rumour and most likely that will also make you happy."


    " What did you hear? "


    " Is it really good news?"


    " Just calm down. Actually I hear that suddenly a human who went to the Druid kingdom killed meny of those Toron people. He did that very easily and not only that everyone of those Toron people present in that Kingdom also needed to escape from that ce because they also very afraid of that person."


    " What!!!! Are you telling the truth?"


    " Did the human king send that person to the Druid kingdom to investigate?"


    " Unfortunately I unable to hear more than that at that time so I am also unable to tell you anything about that. But the thing was that there will be a chance that after all of these the human King also get to know about all of these and naturally he will take action if he get to know about all of this. Just somehow if I able to get free from this cor, I will just kill those two guards first."


    At this time naturally Sam good also here the discussion. Well at this time he did not appear in front of them because he still wanted to maintain the concealment technique. And also at the Sam time he was thinking how to contact those people when he suddenly here the discussion of those people.


    Naturally by hearing those discussion he could tell everyone of those humans were very angry at those Toron people. Naturally if they get free from the ve cor, they will kill as many Toron people as they can. Sam need to do something about this.


    Because this only good for any of the humans so before anything he needed to make sure that they did not do anything after getting free from the ve cor.


    Suddenly those people who discussing among them became silent because at this time suddenly everyone of them could hear a voice inside of their mind. For a second, they became scared. Naturally it was the natural reaction but then Sam quickly told them to calm down and he was from the human Kingdom.


    "Calm down! The human King send me here to investigate about this Kingdom. I am now standing in front of you but unable to deactivate my technique because the Toron king all the time observing the whole Kingdom and if I deactivate my technique you will naturally get to know about my location and that could be very bad for everyone of you.


    You just need to know the human King already know about all the situation and he also preparing an army to go war with this Kingdom. But before anything he needed to makes your every human was safe so I came here to get all the information about this Kingdom and also know about the situation of all the humans.


    The thing was that I already had a way to free all of you but after getting free from the ve cor, none of you do anything reckless because right now the situation was very dangerous. If you promise me you will not do anything reckless only then I will help you."


    Naturally after hearing this every one present there became speechless but then at the next second everyone of them became happy. finally the human King get to know about the situation of the kingdom and also he already preparing his army to attack the kingdom.


    Naturally everyone of them finally thinking that they will be free but after hearing the word of the person they naturally get confused.


    Sam at this time could already saw the confused face of those people so he quickly told them why they should not act recklessly right now.


    "To tell you that truth human King also unable to attack any Kingdom without solid evidence but fortunately this time he already had solid evidence and because of that he could also attack the kingdom anytime....."

 Chapter 529 529 - Breaking Cruse Collars

    "To tell you the truth, the human King was also unable to attack any Kingdom without solid evidence but fortunately this time he already had solid evidence and because of that he could also attack the kingdom anytime.


    But if you did something reckless before the king came near this Kingdom then it could be dangerous for every one of you. Everyone of you could also died before the human King reach here. So you needed to promise me that after I free you from that cor, you all won''t do anything reckless."


    After hearing that everyone of them finally understand why that person telling them not to act recklessly. Naturally they also understand it could be dangerous for them if they act recklessly after getting free. So everyone of the instantly promise him that they will not do anything.


    "Sigh good. Actually this time we able to capture many of those Toron people. And naturally by reading their mind we could get the solid evidence and with that the human King also easily attack this Kingdom. But as you know these Kingdom also had many supporter so the human king also needed sometime to prepare a great army and much supporter as he can to go war with this Kingdom and his supporters. It will take some time and naturally you all needed to wait until then."


    At this time he told everyone about the real situation right now and after hearing that everyone of them also became happy. Naturally they also understand to defeat this Kingdom and although supporters the human King also needed some time to prepare and great army of Warriors.


    At this time Sam already told one of them to came in front of the railing. Well actually they were present inside of a room that exactly look like a lock up room where you can also see a metal railing present. He told one of them to sit down in front of the railing while he quickly ced his hand on that cor.


    Instantly something miracle happened. Even though people cannot tll what was happening but they could feel energy fluctuation suddenly appear on that ce. On the other hand that person who was now present in front of Sam was mostly surprised one because he could feel something was releasing form his body. It was like a burden that going away from his body. At the same time he could also feel his body getting rx.


    Naturally he did not know what was that person doing and he also get surprised when he understand that person was standing in front of them but unfortunately none of them good saw that person. But the thing was that he was now doing something and that make him very rx right now. You can say for the first time after getting capture by those Toron people, he was feeling like that and at the same time he could also feel his body getting powerful.


    Naturally those other people present cannot tell what was happening, but when they looked at the expression of their friend, they were sure about one thing that he was now feeling very rxed andfortable and at the same time they could also see a sudden crack mark also begin to appear on that cor. Not only that slowly they can also see that metal cor, suddenly begin to turn into a stone and after sometimeter it already broke into many pieces and fell down on the floor.


    Really this makes everyone very speechless and they don''t know what to say after realizing that. They still cannot believe their own eyes but naturally they could see the result and at the same time when they looked at their friend they could see he was crying right now. That person wasn''t crying because he was feeling pain or something like that, he was crying because finally after so long he could feel the freedom.


    "Don''t move and get excited. You need to raise and take time to adjust your body. It Looked like that cor previously prevented your whole strength so after removing that you now had all of your strength and you could use that without any problem. Naturally because it took a long time to recover your strength, you needed to take some time to adjust.


    Also one by one all of youe here I will also remove all of your cors."


    Sam said that and naturally after hearing that one by one those people also began toe in front of him and naturally Sam instantly started to use his technique to break those cruise cors. All this time if you are wondering what type of technique he was using, then actually he was only using the origin spiritual energy all this time and while using that technique as you know he could naturally absorb any of those others spiritual energy that wasn''t the origin spiritual energy.


    He could absorb normal true spiritual energy or even dark spiritual energy without any problem. Also if you are wondering about any cruise, actually it also turns the true spiritual energy into a dark spiritual energy and like that a cruise got created. Also because of that those people who could use the dark spiritual energy will be very good at using this type of technique. Naturally, he still remembers that previously those Abyss humans were mostly using techniques like that to attack the human Warriors.


    Right now when he ced his hand on that cor, he could feel the presence of the dark spiritual energy and wasting no time he began to absorb that and instantly his origin spiritual energy also turning that dark spiritual energy into normal spiritual energy without any problem. But he also did not think that the cor would be turned into stone and then break.


    Sometimeter,


    Right now if you could see then you will notice everyone present there begin to cry and everyone of them also adjusting their new power or you can say they are full power. Not only that, but at the Sam time same already bring out a lot of food and also give them. Naturally because they got treated like ves, they also did not get food that much and also they got abused by those Toron people. So to make them fully heel he also gives them healing potions.


    "Now, as I told you earlier, all of you have already got your freedom but I hope none of you recklessly do anything right now. Actually give me some time and I will create replicas like those cors so that nobody gets suspicious that you already break free from those cors.


    Now the n is that you will still act like you are the ve of those people but at the same time if you can then spread the news among those other humans and tell them to get ready for a situation like this where they need to act. Also if it was possible then tell me how many humans are present inside of this Kingdom and if you know about the supporters of the Toron kingdom, then you can also tell me because it will be very helpful for the human king."


    Well naturally he told them not to act recklessly right now when they get their freedom because the human King still did note near the Toron kingdom, and the lives of those people could be in danger if they decided to act recklessly right now. So because of that he told them not to act recklessly and also asked them to tell those other ves to get ready.


    "Sir, even though I don''t know the exact number, you can say that probably 500 people are present here. But I also got to know about this earlier that not every human got captured from the same Kingdom. Naturally that could make the human Kingdom suspicious so the Toron people also decided to act from many different kingdoms for We previously went to do some business like missions or other business.


    My friend and I were captured in the Falkon kingdom. They are going for an important mission that could also give us a good reward but unfortunately who could have thought while fighting those monsters in the danger zone we will get attacked by those people out of nowhere and because of that we also did not get the chance to fight back.


    But I am sure about one thing that the owner of this house is most likely also a part of the Toron king''s army. Not only him but his whole family is also part of the army and because of this right now they already went to the Royal pce for a meeting. The king most likely suddenly called every one of his trusted Warriors because something unexpected happened and the king wanted to discuss that.


    Unfortunately, other than this I was unable to get any other information previously."


    " Don''t worry this will be enough information for me but really if you know anything about the supporters then you should tell me because it will be very helpful for me."

 Chapter 530 530 - Information

    ?


    Unfortunately they did not know that much information about those supporters so in the end Sam told them to put those cors and then once again told him not to act recklessly right now and decided to act like nothing happened. With that he left that ce and right now naturally as you can guess he was going toward those other houses and seeing if he could free those other humans.


    But the thing was that doing this could also get more dangerous because some of them could really be reckless and do something that they should not do at this time. So naturally you will not try to free everyone of them but he will do that when the human kinges close to the kingdom.


    _________________


    2 dayster,


    Finally Sam came very far away from that Kingdom because he can only maintain his concealment technique for 48 hours and after that he needed to raise almost one day to use that technique once again. At that time naturally if he tries to use that technique once again he will feel pain in his body and at the same time he will feel a headache.


    At the same time he did not want to get detected by anyone so because of this he already came far away from that ce. He could tell the king of that Kingdom to naturally observe the whole Kingdom and see if he could find any spy or not so at this time deactivating that technique in that Kingdom will be dangerous and even if he could escape from the ce but that could be dangerous for those other humans.


    So you can say he already came very far away from that Kingdom and only after that he deactivated that technique. Naturally he was very close to the danger zone so anytime a Monster could attack him. But the thing was that those Monsters will be weakpared to him because everyone will being from the outside area of the danger zone.


    But naturally he needed to hide himself so even if any Toron people pass through that ce they will not notice him.


    In these 2 days he was already able to free 30 of those people but at the same time he also explored the other part of the kingdom even though he wasn''t able topletely explode the whole Kingdom but he still could tell almost 500 to 600 humans were present there and everyone of them were treated like ves. Unfortunately he wasn''t able to free everyone in a short time like this and he was also unable to get any information about the supporters of this Kingdom.


    But he already had a clue how to find out about the supporter so naturally next day when he goes back to that Kingdom he will try to look at that matter and that time he will only focus on that. On the other hand he will also take much time to free everyone of those humans but at the same time he is just hoping nobody from the Toron kingdom notices any difference in those humans or it could be dangerous for them.


    He instantly called the human king and began to tell him everything that he saw and did inside of the Toron kingdom. After hearing all of these naturally the human king was angry but at the same time he became relieved that Sam also had a way to free those people from the curse. But at the same time he also knows that every one of them will be difficult for him because he will not directly approach everyone.


    On the other hand the human King also told him about the information that they find after reading the memory of those people. So the human kings also get to know about the supporters from those memories and he also begins to tell the name of the supporters. Not only that he also gets to know that the Toron king has already contacted those supporters and most likely a few dayster there will be a meeting between them.


    Not only that, the king also informs him about an incident that happened near the druid kingdom. He already sent some human Warriors to help those other humans that are present inside of that Kingdom so at that time that incident happened.


    Actually at the time when everyone of those humans leaving the druid kingdom suddenly they got attacked by some Toron warriors. Unfortunately those people did not know that the reinforcement already arrived in that ce and before they could harm everyone of those humans our human Warriors already took care of those people.


    We also capture those people and already read the memory of the people. But this time the human King also surprise because when he try to look at that memory of the people he get to know those people was searching about a human who previously killed many of his teammates and not only that the Toron king also send his captain into that Kingdom to search for that human and if it is possible then capture that person and bring him to they are kingdom.


    After going inside the Druid kingdom, naturally that Warrior began to search about all the names of those human Warriors but unfortunately he wasn''t able to look up the name of all of them because he did not have that much merit. He was the captain of the army of the Toron king, so from his memory they were able to get much more informationpared to those other Toron people.


    Sam after hearing all of this also gets surprised but at the same time he could tell most likely they were searching for him because he was the one who previously killed those many Toron warriors. But he really got surprised after hearing that people could use their merit to look at information like this.


    Naturally he did not know anything about this but fortunately the king told him that the warrior association was a different force and they most of the time did not support any of them. With that Sam is finally able to get to know about the warrior association present here.


    ________________


    Back to Druid kingdom,


    ra and her students are still thinking about the incident that happened 2 one ago. When one day those humans suddenly begin to leave this Kingdom, all of them naturally know something most likely to happen and because of these humans leaving the kingdom like this.


    This also made her quite curious so she decided to follow them but naturally she maintained the distance from those human Warriors. But suddenly she noticed that Toron warriors came out of nowhere and then began to attack those humans. Not only them but at the same time that person who previously went inside of the warrior association also came out and decided to attack those humans.


    Not only that sometimeter many more people also came to that ce and they also began to attack those humans. Naturally they were the supporters of those Toron people. They already got information about this and with that they came to help those Toron people.


    But unfortunately at the same time the reinforcement team of the humans already came to that ce and a very big warpletely broke out. But the thing was that this time naturally it was the fault of those Toron people and they also began to attack those humans in an open space where everybody could see what was happening. So at this time the Druid king naturally sends people to finish the war and this gives the human Warriors advantage and with that they finally win.


    Right now ra was thinking why those Toron people suddenly attacked those humans and not only that they did not even wait for them to go far away from the kingdom. It was like they were desperate to attack those humans. So naturally she could tell something most likely happened that made them quite desperate and she could also tell everyone of those Toron people have the motive to kill everyone of those humans at the time.


    Fortunately the good thing was that they did not find that person at the time in those human Warriors so naturally they could tell he wasn''t present there. Clera after searching about that person in the warrior association gets to know he most likely already left that Kingdom.


    With that she and her students also decided to go back to their Kingdom because right now they cannot meet, they are saviors and cannot express their gratitude to him.


    ''If it is possible I really wanted to know what Toron people were like. I also get to know that previously they also tried to attack elves. But fortunately because of the queen, all of them were unable to do anything and even their King also needed to escape from that ce. But still I really wanted to know what was happening inside of that Kingdom and why they also put restrictions that nobody was able to approach their Kingdom.''


    Clera has all of this question but unfortunately until she does not go inside of that Kingdom she will not be able to know anything.

 Chapter 531 531 - Finally

    ?


    Finally it was the day,


    The human King already begins to approach the Toron kingdom with his army. Naturally he wasn''t alone and he already had the support of many other kingdoms. So because of that he already began to approach that Kingdom.


    Naturally that big movement attracted the attention of many people and naturally they also wanted to know what was the motive of the human king right now. But naturally they will get to know about that but currently they do not know anything.


    The Oni King also prepared themselves to help the human Kingdom in this war along with those other kingdoms who also decided to help the human Kingdom. Actually the Oni King also wanted to punish the Toron kingdom. Actually not only the humans but it is also confirmed by Sam that even some Oni humans alongside other peoples also get captured by those Toron people. Naturally all of them were treated like ves and because they were unable to contact the outside world, nobody was able to get to know about their situation.


    But fortunately because of Sam he also got to know about that so naturally he really wanted to punish that Kingdom and all the people present in that Kingdom. Actually not only him but everyone of the kingdom who had the report from the human King that their people also get captured by the Toron kingdom, also has the same Motive.


    On the other hand everyone can confirm because the human King told him that they also get to know about all this information after reading the memory of those people that they had captured previously. Not only that from those people the human King also gets to know about all the supporters and he also suspects that the Toron kingdom had some kind of connection with the Abyss humans.


    Even though after reading those memories he did not be sure but still he believed that. On the other hand Sam already informs them about the big meeting that happened a few days ago. At the time many people, most likely all of them were the supporters, came to the Toron kingdom.


    Fortunately because of using the concealment technique, he could easily go inside of the meeting room while nobody was able to detect him. At this time he finally gets to see that many peoples from different kingdoms present their and every one of the most likely representatives of their Kingdom. Naturally the king of those kingdoms was unable toe to that meeting but they sent their representative to that meeting.


    Dark elf, Ice humans, Orks, Goblins, etc. He could see people from those kingdoms also present there and naturally they are the supporters of the Toron kingdom. But just not only those people but at the same time Sam already noticed some mysterious people also present there. Using his spiritual vision at this time he can also see every one of those mysterious people wearing hoodies at that time, releasing dark spiritual energy.


    Not only that, from first tost Sam stayed there to hear the conversation of those people and after that naturally he also informed the human and the Oni King about this.


    Actually, the Toron kingdom naturally expected that the human king would take action at this time because he already captured some of their people and most likely from those people they would get all the truth. So because of this he told them to get prepared themselves because they will need to fight in war. But not only that he also told them they are also nning to attack everyone of those Kingdom who will be participating in that word alongside those humans.


    Other than that the most surprising thing was that even though the Toron king was talking with those other representatives normally but when he was talking to those mysterious peoples, he was talking in a respectful manner. Naturally it shows Sam that the Toron king respects those people or you can say fear those people.


    Most likely not only the Toron kingdom, people from those other kingdoms also know about The Identity of those mysterious people. Naturally, all of them had some fear in their heart, but at the same time we were also very excited about the war right now. Because of this the human King suspected that those mysterious people were the abyss humans or those dark humans who were the subordinates of those abyss humans.


    Everything that they discussed in that meeting already got informed by Sam and at the same time the human king and even the Oni King told Sam that if he will be able to free those humans and those other people that get treated like ves inside of that Kingdom. But at the same time they also told him to remind everyone of those people not to act recklessly and at the same time even if they wanted to fight with other warriors they should wait some more time until they did reach near the Toron kingdom.


    ___________________


    On the other hand, right now many Kingdom already get to know about the uing war and they also get to know the reason why the humans and those other kings wanted to attack the Toron kingdom. Not only that, the human King already sent all that evidence to the warrior association, so the warrior association at this time did not try to interfere with their war.


    As apletely different organization naturally those Warrior associations will try to stop the war and because the human kingdoms are taking initiative to attack the Toron kingdom, he should have a clear answer about that or the warrior association will take action against the human king and the human Kingdom. Not only that if he was not able to show the reason then naturally not only he but at the same time the human Kingdom will get punished by the warrior association and every mission that present inside the warrior association of the human Kingdom will get removed.


    The part of the warrior association present inside of the human Kingdom will also get removed from that ce and everyone of those Warriors of that Kingdom will get their ID card canceled by the warrior association. But it won''t be because at the same time the warrior association will also put the name of the human Kingdom in the cklist and if they won they could also put a bounty and make the human kingdoms as the traitors of Terraria.


    One thing you should understand: the Warrior association had just one purpose. That was to maintain the order of the Terraria and at the same time if the safety of the Terraria got threatened by something, the warrior association would naturally take action.


    Well, most likely you are wondering why then they did not help the human Kingdom and the Oni Kingdom while they were fighting the abyss humans? Then it was because the human king and the Oni king didn''t require their support. But at the same time even though they did not actively participate in the war, they passively helped the human Kingdom and the Oni Kingdom.


    Other than the human king and the Oni king most likely nobody knew what type of help they received from the warrier association and the thing was that that help was really needed at that time.


    Well after the human King gave them the result everyone of those officers of the Warrior association could also tail every information was right and with that they immediately took action and already took down the part of the warrior association that was present inside of the Toron kingdom.


    Not only that, every officer and other Warriors of the warrior association already leave that ce and at the same time they also remove all those missions present there and already put the name of the Toron kingdom in the cklist. That means from now on no warrior association will be open in that Kingdom once again and at the same time every Warriors of that Kingdom will get their ID card canceled.


    None of them have any merits and using that they cannot do anything even if they try to go to other kingdoms. The Warrior eleration already cancels the merit of those people and at the same time right now those people won''t be able to use the merit to do anything inside of theWell, actually many more punishments also receive from those Warriors of the warrior association. But unfortunately Sam did not know anything about that nor did the human King tell him about those punishments.


    Right now the warrior association only put the name of the kingdom in the cklist but other than that they did not consider that Kingdom as the threat. Because of this day just only put the name in the cklist and did not put the name in the criminal list. But it looks like the Toron kingdom already knows about that and because of that naturally none of them feel that much disappointment after when the Warrior association removes them from their Kingdom.

 Chapter 532 532 - Current Situation

    ?


    "All the soldiers get ready as you know our enemy is alreadying to our Kingdom so we also need to prepare to face them. We will never Back down from a fight and in the end we will be the one who wins this fight. Even though the number of our enemy this time is very big, we also have our supporters and with that we will win this fight.


    Everyone of you needed to use your full strength in this war and after winning this war everyone will get rewarded by me. Not only that I already received some resources from our mysterious guest and using those we will be more powerful if the situation became dangerous for us so I hope using all of these you all kill our enemy and in the end we will be the winner,"


    The Toron king giving his speech to the people present there. Naturally he already can guess what was the motive of the human kingdom for their sudden big action. First of all the human king and all the soldiers naturallye toward their direction and on the other hand it looks like the human King already gets all that information after capturing his people.


    Even though it is frustrating that the warrior association already went away from his Kingdom and naturally they won''t help them right now in this war, fortunately he also has confidence in his soldiers and also his supporters. But not only that he also has a Trump card. So with that he has full confidence to win this war.


    Not only that, that mysterious person also told him if they really needed support they would also help them in this war but naturally he also needed to pay for that. Actually at first the Toron king wasn''t sure about the payment but then he already decided about that so he also agreed with that person.


    If you are wondering about the payment then he just needed to ignore when those people would attack the citizens of his Kingdom. Actually as you can give that mysterious person most likely Abyss humans, and then naturally needed blood of living beings to sacrifice to their God. So if the abyss humans help the Toron kingdom then naturally the king also needed to pay for that and that was to give them permission to kill most of the citizens and those ves of the Toron kingdom.


    At first Toron king naturally did not want to agree with that request but then he thought why not ept their agreement if by agreeing with them he will get power and also he will be able to win the war. And also even if those Abyss humans kill the citizens of his Kingdom he won''t get affected by that but he already told them he cannot kill everyone of them because to maintain his Kingdom he naturally needed his citizens.


    But naturally he did not have any problem if those Abyss humans killed those ves. So he gave them the full permission to kill them. On the other hand naturally the human king and those people needed some time to reach his Kingdom so at this time those Abyss humans decided to kill those ves. They will kill the citizenster but before anything they wanted to kill those ves.


    But unfortunately nobody was aware that already all the human ves were free from there , but at the same time Sam also freed those other ves. He also found elves, Oni humans, Beast humans, dwarfs, many more. He still really did not know why the Toron king decided to kidnap those people and use them as ves of his Kingdom.


    Also one more thing the king did not know that when the conversation between that abyss human and the Toron king was going on, Sam was also pres6 there and naturally also knew about their n so he also knew today was the day when those abyss humans will kill the ves.


    Because of that he already took action yesterday and he already sent most of those leaves outside of the kingdom using the teleportation technique. But if you are wondering why the owner of those ves did not allot the king, then it was because he already killed most of them so none of them could create any danger for them.


    Also, as everyone of those people able to free themselves from those ve cors, they also help Sam in this situation and with that they are easily able to kill those people and in the end Sam uses the teleportation technique to teleport most of them outside of the kingdom.


    But that wasn''t over and today he is also doing the same thing and teleporting the remaining one outside of the kingdom to a safe ce. Everyone of those people are waiting there for the human King to reach that Kingdom and after that they will take action or escape from that ce. Naturally Sam won''t force anyone to join the fight.


    But I think that he did not know that those people he rescued also had some people who naturally were the enemy of the human Kingdom. So naturally those people were very confused. Why did that human help them even in a situation like this fire? He could just leave them inside of the kingdom. But naturally he did not do this and helped everyone.


    On the other hand those people already ask those humans present there but unfortunately because those humans did not go to the human kingdom for a long time they also did not know anything about the recent incident so they also did not know about Sam. But one thing was clear they could guess, most likely Sam was the person who previously killed those Toron warriors inside the Druid kingdom.


    ________________________________


    ''I really wanted to kill that King. But even though he won''t be able to detect me, killing him won''t be easy. At the same time if he gets alert at this time then he could also try to escape from that ce using the help of those Abyss humans. So I should not try to alert that person right now. But I really hope that previous evidence will be enough for the warrior association to put the name of the Toron kingdom in the criminal list and also that the warrior association will also help the human Kingdom and those other Warriors in this war.''


    Actually when he was present in that area where the Toron king and that Abyss human were discussing their agreement Sam naturally took video of them and already sent that to the human king and also sent that to the warrior association. But the thing was that because Abyss humans hid his face at that time so naturally he did not know if that would be enough evidence or not to prove that the Toron kingdom has connection with those Abyss humans.


    But really Sam was speechless that those Toron kingdoms had connection with the Abyss humans. Not only that they also help those people to bring sacrifice for their demon God. Those people should know the danger of those Demons. But it looks like they did not care about that and with that they also have connection with those Abyss humans.


    Also another hand Sam was very surprised the moment he found about the abyss humans. After the previous war he did not get to hear any information about those Abyss humans. At that time many people thought most likely because of the loose, those abyss humans decided to hide themselves and not to attack other Kingdom s for a year.


    But really nobody could have expected that those people at the time were plotting something like this and also they have connections with the Toron kingdom. Now the main question was that other than the Toron kingdom, was those people having connections with other kingdoms like that or not. If possible he wanted to know about that answer but naturally he was sure about one thing that normally those soldiers of those abyss humans did not know anything about this and most likely even those captains and thosemandos also did not know anything about this.


    This could be a mysterious mission that only few people know about. Naturally he already gave the information to the human king and the Oni King. They also surprise like him and they still cannot believe that some Kingdom will have connection with abyss humans. Not only that, that Kingdom also agrees with the agreement of those Abyss humans and they will naturallyter kill the citizens of the Toron kingdom without any problem.


    But the good thing was that Sam already rescued those ves and with that none of them had to worry about that thing. First of all they also did not care if those Abyss humans killed those Toron people or not. But naturally they worried about those Demons.

 Chapter 533 533 - Warrior Associations Main Base

    ?


    "As I told you earlier, right now we need to wait for the human king and those other Warriors toe near this Kingdom and only then will we take action. Also I will not mind if you decide to leave this ce but even if you wanted to do that you need to wait for the army toe near this ce.


    Right now the situation is very difficult because the Toron king and many other powerhouses are also observing the situation of the surrounding area. Even though I tried to teleport everyone of you as far as I can, I still cannot guarantee that those people will not be able to find us so we need to be careful at the time.


    Also none of you know this important information. Actually one of the supporters of the Toron kingdom was Abyss humans. It was my prediction that they were also capturing this many people to treat them as ves, because this Kingdom was also using those people as the sacrifice for those abyss humans. I already tried to get the report about all the saves and I am now confirming that previously more than 1000 people were present in this Kingdom and everyone of them got captured by those Toron people.


    But currently as you can tell we just only had 450 people among us and naturally those remaining people got sent to those Abyss humans for sacrifice ritual. So we should also be careful about these people because those Abyss humans are supporting them and naturally these people also have dark spiritual artifacts with them and naturally using them they could even harm us even though we are in the distance."


    Sam finally came to that ce and told everyone about his finding. Actually after sessfully transferring all those people into that safe ce he decided to go back to the kingdom to look at more details about those ves. There he got to know about all this information and he could already guess most likely the partnership between those Abyss humans and the Toron kingdom was very old.


    It was just because they did not allow anyone toe to their kingdom and they also did all of these very carefully so the warrior association also knew about all this information. First of all the Warrior association always stays busy to handle those people who came to the warrior association to ept missions. So naturally those Warriors of the warrior association did not get the chance to find out about all of this information and naturally the king also did all of this very stealthy.


    Not only that he also got to know from the human King that the rtionship between the warrior association and the Toron kingdom wasn''t that good. Naturally the warrior association knew that those people kidnapped many other people to use them as ves, but the thing was that the warrior association did not get any evidence about that even though they knew about this.


    ''I think that part of the warrior association which was present in this Kingdom naturally did not have that trusted Warriors. Those people most likely also helped the Toron king. Otherwise I did not think that if the warrior association won''t they will not be able to stop something like this.


    On the other hand I really like to meet the main power house of the warrior association as the human King already told me nobody knows how powerful this person was. But he suspects that the leader of the warrior association already became a legendary grade Warrior. not only that nobody is also sure about the real bass location of the main headquarters.''


    Actually previously when the warrior association got created. Everyone of those people decided that the leader of the Warriors should build the base in a ce where nobody could find the location and like this the warrior association will be a free force. But on the other hand naturally many people could think why they needed the warrior association.


    Actually the Warrior association was created to maintain the bnce between those Warriors present in the Terraria. If it wasn''t for the warrior association then the Terraria would have already been destroyed by internal wars between those kingdoms. Any Kingdom would have acted without care about anything and they could easily attack those weaker kingdoms to take over them. But naturally everyone of those people fear the warrior association.


    Nowing back to the main matter, Sam was really thinking about what will be the next step for the Warriors after finding out about all of this information. Not only that, he already sent the information that he found some time ago in the warrior association. Now what they will do after that will bepletely dependent on the warrior association.


    Also right now you can say Sam was very worried about this war. Because he was feeling most likelypared to those previous wars these words will be more dangerous because many people will also participate in this war. And also those Abyss humans participating in this matter and naturally they already give some artifact to those Toron people. Even though he tried to search for that information, unfortunately he did not know what type of artifact the Toron king received.


    ____________________________


    Right now in an unknown location, you can see a forest but if you try to go deeper inside of that forest then you will naturally see a Energy barrier was present there and if you enter that barrier you will see a huge building and the logo of the warrior association.


    Naturally this is the main base of the warrior association where you can say the main force of the warrior association train themselves. Compared to any of those other kingdoms you can say everyone present in the warrior association''s main force were very powerful.


    You can say in other times nothing much happened in the main base and because of this all those main fighters decided to cultivate themselves to make themselves stronger. But recently they got all that surprising information and naturally this made everyone be very serious.


    They also get all those proof sent by the human Kingdom so after verifying all of them themanding officer of team c already told one of the soldiers to put the name of the Toron kingdom in the cklist. Naturally putting the name of the kingdom in the cklist means the kingdom will not receive any help from the warrior association and after that the kingdom will be under high observation of the warrior association.


    With that they thought everything was over and because of this they also did not try to stop those human Warriors and those other Warriors. Also they did not send any army to help those human Warriors.


    But sometime ago a mysterious person sent them information about the Toron kingdom. Naturally at first they thought it was rted to very or something like that. But who could have thought that when they read the information they will get to see the connection between Abyss humans and the Toron kingdom. Not only that but also reading the report naturally everyone can guess most likely those Toron people also using their captured people as the sacrifice for those Abyss humans.


    Now this is the most serious crime so instantly they put the name of the Toron kingdom in the criminal list and already someone went toward a hidden room present there to inform the leader of the warrior association. Compared to any of those people the leader of the Warriors really came out of the room and most of the time he stayed there to make himself stronger. Naturally if it wasn''t for a very serious matter none of them would disturb the leader but this time as you can tell it was a very serious matter so they immediately went there to inform the leader.


    Inside the room you can see an old man was meditating and at the same time he wasn''t releasing any type of aura. It was like he was a harmless old man who wasn''t even a warrior. But the thing was that the more you will get close to that old man the more fear you will feel in your heart. You will feel your every instance was telling you to run away from that ce as quickly as you can because that person was really Monster who would attack you and kill you in a second.


    Even that person who came in front of that room was really nervous at this time and if it wasn''t for a serious matter he also did not want to disturb the leader.


    On the other hand inside of the room you can see the old man finally open his eyes when that Warrior gets close to that room. The gate automatically opens and the warrior can finally enter the room. After entering the room he naturally saw that old man but without saying anything he quickly knelt down.

 Chapter 534 534 - Ice Elves

    ?


    "A whole Kingdom after knowing the truth about those Abyss humans still decided to coborate with those Abyss humans naturally needed to understand that by their decision they also put the whole Terraria into danger so they need to be punished."


    After saying all of this naturally that old man once again closed his eyes. On the other hand, the warriors present there also nodded and left that ce immediately. Naturally he understood what the supreme leader of the Warriors wanted to say to him by saying those words so aftering back to the headquarters he already told everyone what to do.


    After that they put the name of the Toron kingdom into the ck criminal list, not only that he immediately gathered an army of Warriors of the Warrior association. Naturally called that army to participate in the war and help those humans to punish those Toron people and their supporters.


    ___________________


    The whole world right now really wanted to know what would happen in that war. Many yearster a war like this is going to happen, because of that they also get excited to know about the result. But naturally as the human being already published the news about those Toron people, the whole world also gets to know about the whole truth about the Toron kingdom.


    Not only that, even the warrior association approves that all those information were true so naturally, this also makes many people very angry because some of their people most likely got kidnapped by those people but naturally they will not participate in the war.


    First of all not everyone wanted to help those humans to win this war so because of these they won''t participate in this war. But not everyone was like them as some of those kingdoms already prepared their army to participate in this war after getting all that information. The main thing was that they also suspect that all those who previously vanished mysteriously most likely got kidnapped by those people.


    Unfortunately the human King did not get the permission to reveal the news that those Toron kingdoms also coborated with the Abyss humans. Because of that nobody is able to get to know about it. Most likely the warrior association had some kind of n with that so they did not give him the permission nor they give Sam the permission to reveal that news.


    On the other hand, naturally nobody knows what the warrior association will do in this situation. But everyone was sure about one thing that the warrior association would not help the Toron kingdom. Toron kingdom in the cklist of the Warrior association already revealed to the whole world so naturally everyone understands the truth because of that.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    That night in the Toron kingdom naturally those Abyss humans decided to go for those ves. But mysteriously they found out that in the whole Toron kingdom not a single ve was present at that time. Naturally that makes every one of those people very alert and they also no most likely someone invaded their Kingdom.


    This even makes the king very alert and right now you can say everyone of those Warriors using their observation technique to find everyone of those people and also trying to find those people who invaded their kingdom. Not only just inside the kingdom but those people also trying to observe the surrounding area outside of their Kingdom but naturally Sam already knew something like this could happen so he put those people in a safe distance so that they did not get in the observation range of those Toron people.


    But still there was a risk that he would get funded by those people. First of all he knows the power of thoseary grade Warriors and those legendary Warriors, because of that all this time everyone who escaped from that Kingdom was on high alert and they were also trying to make their presence as low as they could. Currently Sam is also present in that ce and naturally he was also observing his surrounding area all this time. At this time if he found out anything was wrong then naturally he will take action against that and quickly try to take those people to a new ce as quickly as he can.


    Naturally that will be very hard for him. You can say that transferring those 450 people into this area takes 3 days. All of this happened because he was using the origin spiritual energy but he did not know what would happen if he still used the true spiritual energy.


    At this time naturally he contacted the human king and already got the information that they already came very close to that Kingdom and naturally it most likely took him 5 to 6 hours toe to a perfect ce to attack that Kingdom. But on the other hand you can say the army of those Toron kingdom and their supporters will naturally go out of their Kingdom tomorrow.


    ________________________


    ''Most likely they already found out about the real situation. Now the main question is what will they do after finding out all of this. But all this time I need to stay more careful than before because it could be risky for me. I could easily escape from this ce but I don''t think any of these people will be able to do that so naturally I need to protect them until the human king does note to that ce.''


    First of all, the good thing was that all of those people who previously got kidnapped were warriors so naturally they also had the power to fight with those people. But naturally because they weren''t using their power for a very long time it could be very risky for those people, so naturally Sam will need to take the lead here.


    Also he already told everyone the good news that the human king and the whole army will be near them after 5 hours so until then it is better to stay more careful than before. Not only that he also told them all this time that naturally those people wille outside of their Kingdom and they will also wait for the human king and the soldiers.


    The good thing was that you can see many people present who naturally have hatred against each other but in this situation everyone of them knows that if they want to survive they need to trust each other and only like that they are able to protect themselves. So even those humans and those elves were cooperating with each other. Because of that you can say nothing happened inside of that keep that they decided to choose to hide themselves.


    At this time, suddenly Sam felt something. Actually not only him but many other people also feel that. That instantly makes everyone very alert. Even though people who previously most likely tried to rest already got up from their ce and everyone was ready to fight anytime.


    Sam at this time instantly signals everyone not to do anything reckless and after saying that he quickly disappears from that ce. Actually they felt a huge energy fluctuationing not far away from the location so naturally he wanted to know what was happening in that ce. It could be enemies where the source of the energy fluctuates but still he needs to find out the truth so he is already going toward that source of the energy.


    The more he came closer to that ce the more he was feeling it was not just an energy fluctuation, some timeter when he came to that ce he saw that his guess was right. For he could see many people going toward the Toron kingdom. He already began to observe those people and he already got to know about them. Actually right now all of them are hiding themselves by wearing ck cloaks.


    But by his observation technique he naturally looks at the status of those people he gets to know about them. With that he got to know those were the ice elves. They are going toward the Toron kingdom to support them in this war. By reading their status Sam could tell everyone of them, most likely Epic grade Warriors. Also he could see 300 of those people only present there. So naturally they most likely weren''t the main army. They will key the army and naturally under those people you will find many other Warriors who will also participate in this war.


    Right now going toward the Toron kingdom most likely to get familiar with the situation and also get to know about the current situation. Also one more thing Sam noticed at this time that those people while passing through that ce were also using their observation technique all the time to observe their surrounding area. Fortunately they won''t be able to find those ves.

 Chapter 535 535 - War

    ?


    "Attack!!!"


    As you can see right now, the war has already started and all the soldiers are already approaching their enemy. At this time you can see the human King alongside with other kings. Naturally, all of them wanted to take revenge against the Toron kingdom and those supporters of that Kingdom.


    On the other hand you can see those warriors of the Toron kingdom and the Warriors from their supportive kingdom already begin to run toward their enemy. At this time those closebat Warriors are already running toward their opponent while on the other hand everyone of those long distance Warriors attacking their opponents with their spiritual attacks.


    The thing was that at this time none of those kings or you can say thoseary grade warriors participated in that war. They are just observing the situation of their soldiers right now.


    Right now you can see the human King alongside the Oni King and his supporters also present there and naturally everyone of them is also observing the whole battlefield right now. First of all everyone gets to know that their enemy has a connection with Abyss humans so naturally they need to be careful about this because those people could also control those monsters so naturally at this time suddenly those Monsters could also attack.


    Not only that, they were also at this time trying to search if there were any legendary Warriors present or not. Fortunately until now they did not find anything but naturally the fight only just started so they cannot be sure about that.


    "Lightning Dragon, mega fireballs, water bullets, water dragons,"


    Naturally like this type of spiritual attack you can see in the battlefield and the power behind all of those attacks were very powerful. Everyone wanted to kill as many enemies as they could with their attacks so naturally from the first, they were using most of their full power.


    At this time their enemy also attacked with their spiritual attack so naturally many shes also happened and because of that many explosions and huge impact also created by those attacks. But for everyone of those soldiers that wasn''t nothing as they did not get distracted and still began to advance toward their enemy.


    Everyone of those closebat Warriors are already about to reach their enemie''s closebat force. They are just getting closer and closer and finally they have already started fighting and you can see that all of them have already begun to use their weapons. Finally the war has started and nobody knows what will be the end result right now.


    _____________________________


    Sometimeter,


    "Well, I still cannot find any of those Abyss humans or those dark humans present in the battlefield so they are most likely hiding right now."


    " Don''t worry about that, I already sent a force that will try to search for those Abyss humans and those dark humans. Well I already created that force so that they will not directly participate in the war until those dark humans and those Abyss humans did not join the fight."


    " Good n. But I really hope that all of our people present in their Kingdom get free and they are able to escape from that ce."


    " Don''t worry about that, I already got the report that they already came outside of the kingdom and are just waiting for us. As they finally start fighting with those people they will get this chance to escape from here. But naturally I also got the report that every one of them also wanted to join the fight as they wanted to take revenge."


    " Well I can feel their rage. Naturally if it was me then I would also do the same thing so I wouldn''t have any problem with this."


    " Guys, stay very alert all this time because we still weren''t sure if any legendary Warriors would participate in this war or not. But first of all you should know that those Abyss humans already know that we have legendary grade Warrior so naturally they will also prepare for that. So there is a possibility that those legendary grade Warriors will also participate but naturally they were waiting for the right time to participate in the war."


    " I also think the same thing. But on the other hand I am really confused about the warrior association. Until now they did not give us any response after getting all those reports. As the human King already sent the report about those Toron people and those abyss humans. So they should naturally take action but until now he did not get any response."


    " First of all we should not depend on those Warrior associations and only focus on our fight right now. As we cannot control the warrior association, we should not depend on them in a situation like this."


    Naturally at this time the human king and all of those other kings were talking with each other. They naturally present in the battlefield but because those enemies king''s did not participate in the fight, they were also waiting for those people. But not only that all this time they are naturally using their observation technique in full power and trying to find any type of legendary grade Warriors. Not only that, they are also trying to search for those Abyss humans. But unfortunately as you can tell they did not find any type of trace of those people.


    On the other hand in the battlefield you can see those closebat Warriors already begun to fight with each other and many of them already got seriously injured by their enemy. But fortunately The Spiritual Warriors are already behind them and they are also supporting those closebat Warriors. Not just only those spiritual Warriors but you can say even those archers also helped everyone of their soldiers at this time.


    Well you can say right now in the battlefield a huge amount of energy fluctuation has been created and it is also getting powerful and powerful so naturally even if a person is very far away from the battlefield but he will still be able to feel the energy fluctuation.


    "Boom!!!"


    Instantly a person jumps in the sky and in the next second he shoots a lightning Arrow toward a person and that person is unable to react on time so he already got killed by that lightning arrow. But it wasn''t over as he came to the ground instantly he got attacked by four people from four directions. Naturally he was prepared for that because the moment those enemies got close to him an electric wall got created and instantly everyone of those enemies got killed by that electric wall.


    If you see that person then you will see a blonde here with a strong physique. Naturally everyone of those human Warriors were familiar with that person because he was the president of the Graton guild, president Aaron. Naturally he was a lightning element user but not only that he also mastered short fighting so you can say he can fight while using the sword and at the same time his lightning attribute also helps him in this situation.


    But you can say that he was famous for his lightning de skill, which was the most destructive technique he had. Now came back to the main method naturally after killing those people he did not stay ideal as he went toward those other people who were already about to attack some of the human soldiers. Everyone of the people were around peak Elite grade, while on the other hand those soldiers were just early Elite grade. So naturally they would get killed by those people and because of that president Aaron already shot 3 lightning arrows toward those people and that was enough to kill those 4 people at the same time.


    "Soldiers don''t stay like that and focus on your battle. And any condition we needed to defeat our enemy and take revenge for our people."


    After saying that he vanished from that ce. On the other hand every one of the soldiers also came back to their senses and they once again focused on their battle.


    On the other hand you can see president Aaron already helping many of those other soldiers as their enemy was powerfulpared to them but actually not only him at this time doing something like that. Everyone of those leaders of other guilds also prison there and naturally they also do the same thing like the president Aaron.


    At this time the most interesting thing was that even the vice president of his Guild also helped all those human Warriors. It was quite surprising for everyone but naturally in a situation like this they also appreciate his help and with that everyone of those soldiers begin to concentrate on the fight.


    "Haha¡­ Aaron, why are you taking so much time to kill those people? We need to find those people who had the same power level as a so that they were not able to create that much casualty."


    "Oi!!! Shut up. Naturally I am killing faster than you so you didn''t tell me what to do in this situation."

 Chapter 536 536 - Battle Between Epic Grades.

    ?


    The person who said that was the leader of the Lion guild. Like Aaron he was also a peak Elite grade warrior, and naturally for him killing those Elite warriors was easy. But naturally their main target was those Epic grade Warriors. So you can say they are also killing as much as those enemies and also at the same time they are also advancing toward those powerful enemies.


    Kyle was the name of that person and you can see he already killed two of those Warriors but instantly he went toward those other Warriors.Aaron did not say anything at this time and just smiled while once again focusing on his fight.


    At this time he could already feel the position of those Epic grade Warriors and naturally he did not want to waste a single second hair and with that he directly used his power and directly went toward that direction. Naturally not only him but at the same time Kyle also came toward the direction. Aftering there they could naturally so everyone of those powerful enemies right now fighting theirrades. Not only that they could also see many of the dead bodies of those human Warriors and those other Warriors who supported the human kingdoms.


    Naturally that made Aaron and Kyle angry so they did not waste a single second tounch an attack. Well naturally they were facing the peak Epic grade Warriors. So that those people did not kill those weak Warriors.


    Aaron instantly created a lightning arrow and shot the person who was in front of him. But naturally that attack did not hit that person because he was already able to react and created an energy shield in front of him. But you can say Aaron already expected that so he already came in front of that person and this time he attacked that person using his Sword. But at the same time if you look at the sword then you will see lightning also covering the whole Sword.


    Just looking at that his opponent already became serious and most likely trying to power the energy shield but unfortunately that wasn''t enough to stop Aaron. Aaron''s Lightning sword already broke that shield but at the same time he was unable to hit that person because suddenly he needed to dodge and already came backward. At this time you can see a firewall suddenly appear in front of that person.


    Naturally he got help from other Warriors and not only that at the same time he already prepared his attack and the moment that firewall vanished, he instantly attacked Aaron with a fire Spear. But the thing was that he wasn''t attacking alone and you can see many more attacks alsoing toward Aaron''s direction. Not only that everyone of those attacks release from those peak Epic grade Warriors, at this time even Aaron doesn''t know if he would be able to take all those attacks or not but naturally he would not Back down.


    But the thing was that when he just about to attack, suddenly huge spiritual Lion also appear in front of him and that Lion instantly attack with his spiritual beam. Well actually it was Kyle who attacked at this time as he could summoun animals using his power. Naturally even though Aaron got started for a moment but you also did not slow down and already release his attack and you can see a big lighting sword sh also going toward those enemies at this time.


    "Haha¡­ you guys are finally here. We just thought you will be staying there forever and did not have the courage toe here to face this people."


    "Haha¡­ little Jack what are you saying? Do you think I will get scared because of this people."


    " Enough just focused on those people."


    At this time Aaron and Kyle was standing together but instantly some more people also came to that ce and everyone of them naturally no each other as they belong to the human Kingdom but naturally they weren''t more Epic grade Warriors also starteding towards that ce and with that you can say the battle between the peak Epic grade Warriors finally begain.


    ______________________


    On the other hand everyone present in the battlefield except thoseary grade warriors, good also feel the pressure thating out from those peak Epic grade Warriors. And naturally right now nobody have the courage to approach toward there direction. Everyone of those people was out of their league so naturally they only focusing on there opponent.


    Even though they just only fighting for 2 hours but at this time many casualty happen in both side and many people already lost their life. But naturally that does not mean they will stop attacking each other and with that you can see the fierce battle still going on.


    On the other hand Steel none of thoseary Warriors join the fight so because of that the human king and his supporters who were also at the same grade did not participate in the fight right now. The human king and his friend could easily understand what are those people thinking right now. Most likely they were thinking that the human king and the others will participate in this world before them and with that it will be there chance to attack them sneakly when the human kings and the others will be low on spiritual energy and health.


    This also has a possibility that all of these was the n of those Abyss humans naturally those people will try to do something in this world as they already support the Toron kingdom. The human king and the others until now did not able to find any trace of those people so naturally they don''t know if those people were near the battlefield or not.


    In the battlefield where you can see those peak Elite grade warriors were Fighting a girl with blue hair alongside with his friends also killing or you can say fighting there enemy but the thing was that they were also very injured. Naturally in a war something like this would happened but the thing was that they also did not getting the chance to take their recovery potion at this time.


    She was Maria a warrior from the Oni Kingdom. Naturally Sam know him. She was leading those people to fight those enemies but still with that you can see many casualty happen with those people and two of them already died. Maria suddenly uses her power and 1 km area of that ce already got Frozen by that.


    But that wasn''t over as in the next again you can see everyone of those ice culture of those people are you can say those Warriors who got frozen also begin to get killed. Naturally she could uses the ice element and write now she wasn''t using your normal ice. She was using the red ice.


    But even with that her enemy did not stop and they already aim their attack towards her direction. Fortunately har team already attack toward those other enemies and with that they already take care of those people. But naturally still they did not get the time to rx as they already advance toward those other enemy who most likely about to kill some of theirrades.


    ___________________________


    Suddenly something unexpected happen. The human King at this time suddenly saw something strange happening in the battlefield because suddenly some of those enemies getting killed out of nowhere. Actually not only him but the Oni King and the others also saw the same thing and with that they also bing confused except the human king and the Oni King.


    Both of them very familiar with this kind of attack pattern and naturally no who was doing all of these right now. With that both of them started to smile as because they could also see many of those Warriors of the enemy team also became confused but they already got killed by some unknown person at this time without doing anything or without getting any chance to react.


    Many of those people already about to kill those human Warriors or everyone of those Warriors who supported the human Kingdom but, suddenly everyone of them feel force in their body that preventing from the moving and not only that in the next second they already lost their life. Those people did not get the chance to react or understand what happening to them.


    Not only that suddenly you can see a fireball on a ce and that instantly created huge amount of destruction. that naturally started many of those enemies but on the other hand the human King alreadyment everyone of those human body has not to worry because the person who doing all of these also their supporter so they should not get started by that.


    The human king and the Oni King naturally very confused by those attack pattern the person who doing all of this was very fast and not only that he somehowable to teleport to another ce in Stanley and like that he already able to kill many of those enemies.

 Chapter 537 537 - Joining

    ?


    Naturally they did not know that Sam had that kind of technique or not right now they are very sure that Sam had that kind of technique. Also as you can tell both of them know that it was Sam who was now present in the battlefield and using his technique he was killing those Warriors and also helping their soldiers.


    Actually not only him but at the same time you can see some more people alsoing toward the battlefield and all of them were the ves who previously got captured by the Toron kingdom. Butpared to the previous number you can see right now only 250 of theming toward the battlefield as those other people already left that ce when the human king decided to attack their enemy.


    Naturally nobody would be upset about it because they just wanted to save their life right now after getting the freedom so they naturally had the freedom to choose what to do in a situation like this but you can say everyone of those human fighters naturally wanted to take part in the battlefield because their King and their warriors also present there.


    Naturally after looking at those people the human king and his friends also got happy that they had more people supporting them. Not only that after seeing those people they also became rxed that they were finally able to escape. Even though previously the human King told everyone of them that one of his man already able to release everyone from those ves cors, still at the time most of them quite worried about their people but right now when they can also see their people participating in the battlefield they naturally became happy and with that they once again focus on the battlefield.


    Naturally on the other hand the Toron king and his supporters who at this time still did not join the battlefield also noticed those Warriors who suddenly came toward that ce. First of all they already recognize every one of them because they were very familiar with those people as they abused those people in their Kingdom. Naturally after seeing all of them they were surprised but at the same time very angry.


    Not only that, the most surprising thing for everyone was that everyone of those people was able to escape while they had the ve cors. This was the most surprising thing because until you did not have a technique that was good rted to this type of curse technique, nobody would be able to release anyone from those types of ve cors.


    But unfortunately right now they could see every one of them able to escape from those and also none of them get any type of injuries. The most important thing was that none of those owners were also able to know about this. Because if any of the ves normally try to do anything to that ve cor the owner will immediately get to know about that and naturally that ve will receive punishment because of that.


    But as you can see nothing like that happened and with that naturally everyone became very surprised. Unfortunately for everyone of those people that Sam was present there and he directly absorbed all those curse energy. Naturally that type of energy was rted to dark energy and as you know he had the origin of spiritual energy which can absorb any type of spiritual energy so he could easily absorb curse energy while those owners also did not get alerted by that.


    Now came back to main matter,


    Toron king and his supporters also noticed the strange thing that happening in the battlefield while even though they unable to see who was the person who suddenly interfere with the battle but they could tell that person most likely supporting the human Kingdom and the army because he was now killing their people while nobody will able to notice him or spot him.


    Naturally that makes everyone angry and they could also tell if things continue like this then it could be very dangerous for them so naturally they also know that it was the time for them to participate in the battlefield. But the thing was that before anything they also needed to fight those enemiesary grade Warriors. So they also prepare themselves to fight those people while they try to kill as many enemy soldiers as they can.


    But naturally the Toron king still did not be that much serious about this because he still had his Trump card. actually not only him but he also gives those things to those Elite Warriors of his Kingdom so naturally if the situation required then they will use that thing that they receive from those abyss humans.


    Because of preparation for the war none of them get to hear about the recent information that many people already know about it. None of them know that already the name of the Toron kingdom was put in the criminal list of the warrior association and the warrior association also already sent their warriors into the battlefield to help those human soldiers to fight those enemies.


    "I really don''t know what would happen if you did not tell us all of this information. Also if you did not reveal all that information then naturally we will never get to know that not only your people but our people also get captured by those Toron people. And after getting thetest information I really was very surprised that how can I Kingdom like this decide to support those Abyss humans? Naturally they should know the danger of those Demons and naturally they should also know that everyone of those Abyss humans is trying to sacrifice the life of living beings to open the gate for their God or you can say those Demons."


    " Sigh, really I still cannot believe a Kingdom like this could do that. I just hope the Warrior association after getting all the information takes some action because it would be great to receive help from the warrior association in a situation like this and also we wanted to know what the Warrior association would do after getting that information."


    Naturally right now everyone of those kings alongside the human king is talking among themselves about all of this. It would be really great for every one of them if the warrior association also took part in this war. First of all everyone knows that everyone of those Warriors of the warrior association receive special training so naturally they will be powerfulpared to any of your normal Warriors.


    "Guys forget about all of this thing because most likely those enemies also already decided to take participating the battlefield so we should get going toward the direction,"


    Suddenly the human King said that to everyone and naturally after hearing that everyone also realized most likely those people really already decided to take part and with that they needed to go toward their direction. Also the thing was that all of them present there were naturallyary grade warriors. So they will fight thoseary grade enemies. Because of this you can say all this time they also saved their energy and did not help any of their soldiers in the battlefield.


    But really it is also very regretful that they already lost many of their people. Right now the human king and mostly the other kings are also very sad about that and they are also thinking if they really had a legendary great warrior with them then it would be really great for everyone because those people will naturally be able to help everyone of their soldiers on the battlefield.


    But the thing was that there was a high possibility that when they was busy in the world they are kingdom suddenly got attacked by other people who wanted to take the chains to attack their kingdom. This was the reason that not everyone of their Warriors participated in this war as they also needed to protect their kingdom.


    On the other hand you can see, a confusion really appears among everyone of those people who can see suddenly some of their teammates begin to die. And even though they try to search how those people died, unfortunately in a situation like this they only focus on the fight and because of that they did not have the time to look for the culprit.


    But the culprit or you can say our Sam already begins to help everyone as he is killing those people who are just about to kill his teammates right now. But fortunately he was faster than all of them and he could also use the teleportation technique and telekinesis technique. So now using techniques like that he already killed many of those people but that wasn''t over as he could already see there were too many enemies present here. So, right now Sam was just only focusing everyone of those enemies and

 Chapter 538 [Bonus ] 538 - Flight Between Planetary Grade Warriors

    ?


    Some of the human Warriors at this time suddenly created Energy barrier in front of them because they were facing some powerful enemies but naturally that doesn''t mean they will escape from that ce and because of this fighting with those people and While fighting like this as you can tell the already became very injured.


    At this time If those attack hit them then it would be a serious matter. Fortunately before something like that happened they already created Energy barrier in front of them and because of that they still able to protect themselves but naturally you can see the track mark present on the energy very are and those people won''t be able to maintain the energy very around them.


    First of all everyone of those enemies were around Early epic grade Warriors, while they were just peak Elite grade warriors. Naturally the difference between them was much big and because of these even though they try to fight those enemies but infont of the full power of their enemy the unable to do anything and because of this day also get that much injured.


    Something unexpected happen because one by one everyone of their enemy begin to fall down on the ground. The really did not understand what was happening and why dost Warrior suddenly fall down on the ground but only then they notice that everyone of them already lost their life and not only those people but sometimeter they could also see many of their enemy in the surrounding area also begin to fall down on by one.


    So with that they could tell most likely some was helping them using some kind of powerful technique that also make that person invisible or something like that.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    One by one many huge impact was created that even affected the battlefield but not that much and because of this, many Warriors also get affected as they already send backward by those sudden impact. Even sam could feel the impact that got created suddenly and at this time he quickly stop moving and begin to look toward the direction from where you can see thoseary grade warriors final started fighting and because of that those sudden impact got created.


    Naturally as you can tell it was the human king and his friend who finallye toward those other legendary Warriors. They already start attacking each other and as you can tell everyone of their attack was very powerful.


    ___________________________


    While at this time in the battlefield you can see the fight between Warriors was going on, ek group of people not farmer from that location was now silently observing the battlefield but those people did not do anything and just silently stay. Everyone of them hiding themselves while observing the battlefield.


    Even though they also wanted to participate in the war but right now they had other mission to do and that also very important. Actually those were the people who got selected to watch over the battlefield and the moment they will found any type of clue about Abyss humans and dark they should immediately take action. Not only that they should also try to see the moment of those Monsters because as you know every time those Abyss humans control the Monsters before attacking any Kingdom.


    Because of this as you know they got appointed to look for those dark humans and those Abyss humans. Naturally because of this until now they did not take part in the battlefield and just observed their surrounding area and also observed the movement of those Monsters. of all if those monsters suddenly begin to attack they are soldiers then it could be a dangerous thing for everyone because fighting those enemies was Much harder and right now if those enemies also get help from those Monsters then naturally it could be very dangerous for their soldiers.


    At this time they suddenly feel a huge amount of energy fluctuation and in the next second They almost get blown away by the sudden impact. Naturally nobody was prepared for that and because of that something like that happened to them but fortunately they were able to stabilize their condition. But one thing was clear that thoseary grade Warriors were finally taking part in the battle and because of that a huge amount of impact was created.


    ___________________


    If you look at the human king right now then you will notice he is already fighting one of the enemies who is also aary grade warrior. His opponent used a sword while he was using a spear. But at the same time you can see the whole spear also coated in dark me. Naturally he could change the nature of the spiritual energy after coating the whole spear with spiritual energy and as you know the dark me was the most dangerous me and it could burn anything.


    But on the other hand his opponent also wasn''t staying ideal and he also used the wind element at this time and naturally because of that the speed of those swings became more powerful. Right now a big cross sh going toward the human king but the human King already reacted and he disappeared from that ce. But in the next second you can see a big fire sh going toward that enemy but that wasn''t over because at the same time that fire sh suddenly became much bigger and it just kept getting powerful and Powerful.


    Naturally the human king was the one who controlled that attack and he also increased the power behind that attack. On the other hand all of this happened very quickly and because of these the enemy at this time just could only see that attacking toward his direction. Even at thest minute he tried to avoid that attack but unfortunately he wasn''t that lucky and already got hit by that attack and instantly you can hear the painful roaring out from that person.


    Right now the left hand of that person was burning because of the ck me but that wasn''t it. The armor present in the left hand already melted away and because of that you can see his hand was burning right now. In front of that ck me his armor was not even able to protect his left hand for that long.


    The human King at this time did not waste this chance and using his full speed he already came behind that person. The person was right now roaring jn paying and because of this he did not pay attention to the human king who was already behind him. The human King was just about to attack that person to finish him but suddenly something unexpected happened and because of this he wasn''t able to kill that person.


    Suddenly out of nowhere an ice wall got created in front of that person and naturally the human king hit that ice wall at this time. The thing was that it wasn''t your normal eyes as the color of that ice was ck so naturally that was the ck ice. It is also the highest peak in all the ice control.


    The ck ice element was very powerful and not many people were able to break that or melt it full stop but as you know the human King also using the ck me and the ck me could burn anything and because of that sometimeter you can see the ice wall already begin to melt away.


    But naturally at this time the enemy that he was going to attack earlier had already escaped from that ce and he could not be far away from the direction that person was standing there alongside with another enemy. Just after looking at that person he already recognised him because he was an ice elf. Those people had some kind of rtionship with those elf, but the thing was thatpared to those elf they were much if you''ll and they were also good at using the ices energy.


    At this time the human King could already see an ice beaming toward his direction but not only that at the same time a powerful Sword sh that contains the wind element alsoing toward his direction. Naturally the human King already reacted on time and this time using his full power he instantly created a firewall in front of him but that wasn''t it because at the same time he also controlled the fire element to create a big fireball to shoot toward them.


    On the other hand his enemy continuously attacked his direction without intention to stop but they also another that right now the human King is already preparing an attack for them. At the same time if you are wondering about those other kings who also participate in the battlefield then they are also busy fighting those other enemies and some of them are already able to injure their Enemy seriously. But at the same time they also got injured by their enemy.

 Chapter 539 539 - Unknown Factor

    ?


    Right now as you can see far away from the battlefield some people were present there and everyone was looking toward the direction where the war was happening. Naturally these people also nned to participate in the battle but right now before participating in the battle they had many other things to do and they were preparing for that.


    If you look at those people then you will notice every one of them hiding their face but still if you try to feel The Spiritual energy of those people they will feel that all of them have dark spiritual energy and with that easily you can understand the identity of those people.


    Actually right now they were present in that part of the danger zone to control as many Monsters as they can using their dark spiritual energy and they wanted to use those Monsters to kill their enemies in the battlefield. Naturally it wasn''t like before where they got enough time to control many Monsters so it was so taking them much time to control as many Monsters as they can in that short time so that it was enough to give those enemies hard time and using that chance naturally they wanted to kill them.


    On the other hand you can see in the battlefield many people still have serious injuries and some of them have already died. Butpared to the casualty rate of those human Warriors and their supporters you can say the casualty rate of those Toron warriors and their supporters were much higher. At first you can say both have the same casualty rate but suddenly unknown factors participate in the battlefield and that person was invisible all this time. Because of that unknown factor you can say the Toron warriors and their supporters faced that disadvantage in the battlefield while they were getting killed by that person without even being able to sense him or able to tell him when he will attack them or from whose direction he will attack them.


    That person just appeared randomly and he also did not give them any chance to predict or sense any of his attacks. He just appeared randomly and also attacked them when they were busy fighting their enemy and because of this you can say everyone was now in a disadvantageous position. On the other hand not just only that unknown factor but at the same time everyone noticed many more people also participated in the battlefield and everyone of them also supported those human Warriors and their supporters.


    The most surprising thing was that everyone already recognised The Identity of those people because they were the ves of their Kingdom. Naturally the main question in this matter was how those people were able to get free from those ve cors. Naturally everyone was very curious about that but in a battlefield like this they did not have the time to think about it while they just only needed to fight their enemy.


    Right now the medical team of the human Warriors and those other Warriors are already using their healing technique as much as they can to heal their Warriors right now. Naturally they could also participate in the battlefield but then it could be dangerous for their Warriors because there will be no one present there who could heal them as in a battlefield like this those people did not have the time to use any potions. You can say even those enemies will also not give you the time to use that type of thing that will help you to recover your spiritual energy and health.


    So naturally in a like this the medical team also became an important factor and everyone of those medical teams stay behind of everyone of those Warriors while they constantly use their healing power to heal those seriously injured Warriors right now. But naturally those enemy teams also try to attack those healing teams but fortunately there soldiers are already present in front of them to protect everyone of those medical team members.


    There will be three types of force present in that battlefield. The first force will be the closebat force where Warriors fight in closebat with their enemies. The second force will be the long distance force where everyone of those Warriors who are able to use long distance attack will attack their enemies from a distance. And the third force will be those warriors who will be incharge of protecting their medical team members. Naturally because those medical team members are constantly focusing on using their healing technique they won''t be able to protect themselves at this time so because of that those Warriors present that to help those medical team members.


    On the other hand you can say Sam was now getting wild while killing those enemies. He not only uses the sword technique but at the same time he also uses his spiritual technique to kill as many enemies as he can. Because of using the origin spiritual energy he did not even feel any kind of resistance while he attacked those enemies using his sword. It was like he was cutting some paper or something like that but naturally if he decided to face thoseary grade Warriors then he won''t be able to do like that.


    Also you can say killing those peak Epic grade Warriors was also quite hard for him and naturally he needed to use 100% of his spiritual energy if he wanted to kill them. Because of that he wasn''t using his 100% energy and only using enough spiritual energy that will be enough to injure them while those human Warriors and their supporters will take the chance to kill those people.


    At the same time he naturally uses the telekinesis and teleportation technique and with that you can see some people suddenly getting stopped and unable to move while their enemy takes that chance to kill them. Sam was now constantly using the telekinesis technique to help those Warriors to fight their enemies. If anyone was able to kill any human Warriors or the supporting Warriors naturally at the time Sam immediately uses the telekinesis technique to freeze that person. Not only that if he uses more spiritual energy than naturally he could also kill that person only using the telekinesis technique while that person won''t be able to resist in front of that telekinesis force.


    But naturally killing or attacking arge number of people won''t be easy for Sam. He wasn''t doing that and fighting those enemies while using most of his technique right now. He already uses his mega fireball technique 5 times and you can say the destruction power behind the mega fireball was too much that it already killed many of those enemies at once but at the same time it also destroyed the surrounding area.


    Because of this he also wasn''t using that technique continuously because it could also affect his teammates so naturally he also needed to make sure that they did not get affected by that.


    At this time you also noticed Aaron and those other guild leaders who are also fighting their enemies right now but you can say a tense atmosphere was created in that ce and naturally even those Guild leaders also got injured seriously. So at this time Sam decided to help them so they did not get more injured and already uses the telekinesis and teleportation technique at the same time.


    Using the teleportation technique he already came close to that ce and suddenly uses the telekinesis technique to freeze everyone of those enemies for 30 seconds. Naturally because those people were powerfulpared to him he would only be able to freeze them for 30 seconds.


    On the other hand Aaron, Kyle and the others already noticed something happened to those enemies but naturally this was in the time to think about it and they also knew it was that chance to attack their enemies. They use that chance tounch their full attack toward those enemies and naturally as you can see none of those enemies at this time are unable to move or protect themselves so naturally they will get seriously injured or even some of them will get killed by those attacks.


    Even though at this time many barriers got created in front of those enemies but naturally in front of those continuous attacks those barriers won''t be able to protect those enemies and because those people who created the barrier did not get that much time to use more spiritual power, everyone of those barriers got easily broken.


    "Ahhhh!!!"


    Instantly many of those enemies got seriously injured and they alreadyte out A painful cry while some of them already got killed by their enemies'' attack. But that wasn''t over as Aaron, Kyle and the other Guild leaders used the chance to attack them continuously and at the same time they also tried to attack those people who were present in the distance.


    asionally missing content, please report errors in time.

 Chapter 540 540 - Serious Condition

    ?


    Naturally because those people are much stronger than Sam he won''t be able to freeze for long but that was enough for those other Warriors to attack their enemies and at the same time as you can see because of those powerful attacks many of them already died, but not only that the remaining people already got seriously injured. Those people who were far behind that ce and did not get affected by the telekinesis technique naturally got very angry after looking at these and they already began to continuously attack Aaron and the others.


    But Aaron and the others are also aware of that so they already take action and create as many Energy barriers as they can instantly to protect themselves. Naturally because they suddenly created those barriers it wasn''t powerful so the moment those attacked from the enemy he those barriers you can see the crack mark already appear on those barriers and most likely won''t be able to protect them for a long time.


    Aaron and the others right now are still trying to increase the power of those barriers but it is already toote. But still you can say even though in a dangerous situation like this where they could also get seriously injured or even get killed by those enemies they weren''t worried because they know they have an unknown factor who is helping them in this war and naturally that person won''t stay ideal at this time.


    Aaron, Kyle and the others already predicted The Identity of that person because the human being previously told them about that person who was very good at hiding and at the same time that person was naturally strong. Not only that, that person also previously helped them to fight those Abyss humans. So if their prediction was right then naturally it was Sam who helped them.


    On the other hand Sam already gets close to those Warriors who are attacking Aaron and others continuously and at that time he already begins to use his Sword to attack them. But you can say at this time it wasn''t easy to injure those Warriors because most likely they also understand that someone is helping those Warriors who are also using an invisible technique so naturally they are right now using some kind of variety that also protects them while those only focused on attacking their enemy.


    But because of the origin of spiritual energy you can say he would still be able to break those barriers but naturally he needed to use much spiritual energypared to before. So he instantly begins to channel almost 90% of all of his spiritual energy into the sword and naturally the sword at this time bes darker and if anybody tries to feel the aura of that sword then they will feel the danger thates out from the sword.


    Now came back to the main matter,


    As you can see Sam is already present in that ce and he uses his 90% power to break barriers and he is already able to sessfully break the barriers of 5 people and already injured them seriously. But naturally at this time he did not expect many attacks toe in his direction. Most likely those other enemies at this time already guess the location of their invisible enemy and show they instantly use their attack in that direction whilepletely ignoring those human Warriors and those other Warriors.


    Naturally everyone knew that it would give their enemy the time to stabilize their condition and they could also attack them but naturally before anything everyone wanted to kill that invisible enemy who became an untouchable thing in the battlefield. That person randomly killed their Warriors while their Warriors were unable to react.


    Nowing back to the main matter, Sam at this time already uses most of his spiritual energy and he only barely keeps maintaining the consignment techniques so naturally he did not have the power to use his movement technique to get away from that ce and not have the power to create a powerful Energy barrier in front of him.


    "Boom!!!"


    Instantly a huge explosion was created in that ce and in the next second everyone noticed a person flying backward because of that explosion. Naturally that person was Sam who unfortunately was unable to protect himself and got hit by the attack. Because Sam is unable to protect himself he already faces everyone of those attacks head on and because of this you can see he got seriously injured and is already bleeding from his body.


    Fortunately Aaron and the others did not stay ideal at this time and they already moved from their ce and came in front of Sam at this time. Once again they created an Energy barrier in front of them and this time the power of the barrier naturally strongerpared to before. Everyone of those Warriors beside those human Warriors already finally saw the person who previously helped them and everyone of them got very worried because they could see the serious condition of Sam right now.


    Those Oni humans are naturally very familiar with Sam so they already bring out the healing portion and without wasting a single time they make him drink that. Fortunately it was a high grade potion and because of that all those injuries present in Sam''s body begin to heal rapidly and at the same time Sam already came back to his senses.


    At this time after opening his eyes he could already see his whole armor got destroyed and not only that he was very seriously injured at this time. Fortunately at the same time he realized he was healing rapidly and most likely that was the help he got from those Warriors.


    He nodded toward them and tried to stand up. But instantly at this time Aaron and others told him that he should try to take rest for sometime because he still did not fully recover and naturally that will take him sometime to recover from his injuries. You can say that previously if they did not react on time then it could be over for Sam.


    After hearing this naturally Sam also agrees with them and with that he uses the remaining spiritual energy to use his teleportation technique and go to a safe ce to rest for sometime. Well, even though people already give him the high grade helping potion, but as you can see he still brings out his own potion and gulps it down. The moment he did that he instantly recovered from all those injuries and in the next second you can see he also has spiritual energy.


    With that he already decided to go back to the battlefield and he was just about to do that when he suddenly realized not far from the direction he could sense some spiritual fluctuationing toward the direction of the battlefield. After focusing on those directions he instantly uses his observation technique and with that he already got the report that from the direction many Monster right nowing toward the battlefield and with that he already be sure that those abyss humans most likely already making their move right now.


    First of all this ce was near the outside area of the danger zones so naturally those powerful monsters won''te to that ce. It was only possible when those Abyss humans controlling those monsters came toward the direction.


    Sam calms himself and looks back at the battlefield for a second. Actually he wanted to know the condition of the battlefield and after observing the battlefield for a second he could see the condition of the battlefield. Well you can say because of his help and because of the fighting power of the human Warriors and those other Warriors right now they were at an advantage so naturally he did not have to worry that much and with that he finally decided to go toward the direction of those Monsters.


    Not only that, at the same time you already contact those groups of people who did not participate in the battlefield because they were searching for those Monsters and those Abyss humans. Naturally the human King previously told him about this so he contacted those people so they could also help him to fight those Monsters and if at the same time they found those Abyss humans they will try to fight Back until they did not get help from the king or those other Warriors.


    With that Sam, directly going toward that ce but at the same time he did not know but the human king and those other kings already also since the energy fluctuation wasing out from the danger zone and naturally that also made them very alert at this time. Unfortunately they cannot get careless in a situation like this while they fight thoseari grade warriors.


    They just only hope that those people who got the responsibility to handle those monsters are able to handle those Monsters and prevent those monsters from participating on the battlefield. But you can say if there were presentary grade monsters and Abyss humans, then it would be a different matter and matter in the time if they did not help those warriors they would naturally die.

 Chapter 541 541 - Attacking The Monsters

    ?


    Naturally after being reported by Sam every one of those people already begin to move toward that ce where Sam notices the movement of those Monsters. Actually some timeter when they came close to that ce they can also feel the energy fluctuation thening out from those Monsters.


    All of those Monsters are naturally being controlled by those Abyss humans and they have dark spiritual energy and naturally because of that everyone of them lost their mind and already released their full power and ready to attack anyone anytime. In that condition theye toward the battlefield using their full speed. Right now as you can see from Mortal grade to Epic grade, everyone of those Monstersing toward the battlefield and naturally this will be a very dangerous situation for those human Warriors and those other Warriors if those Monsters also participate in the battlefield.


    First of all you should know the condition of those human Warriors and those other Warriors wasn''t that good and if those enemies got help from those Monsters then it will be very dangerous for everyone of them so naturally this people already ready to attack those Monsters and they did not waste a single second and already attack those Monsters.


    Naturally fast of all they attack those flying Monsters because they will be the real difficult thing to handle. So right now 1000 people present there using their long distance attack toward those flying Monsters while because of their sudden attack those Monsters unable to react on time and naturally because they already lost their mind they also unable to escape from that ce using their own intelligence.


    "Boom!!!!!"


    One by one because of those attacks you can say many explosions were created in the sky and not only then in the next second you can see many deaf bodies of those Monsters falling down on the ground. But naturally even with the situation those other monsters did not get affected and they still maintained their speed.


    Instantly 500 of those Warriors decided to attack those Monsters in closebat while those remaining one will attack those flying Monsters as much as they can because they need to kill those flying Monsters at first before killing those Monsters who are unable to fly. So those 500 Warriors just keep attacking those flying Monsters at this time while those remaining people are already preparing themselves to attack those Monsters in closebat.


    Actually at this time they did not know but Sam was already present in that ce and he was already advancing toward those Monsters. But that wasn''t it he was already preparing to use his most powerful area damage technique and naturally that was the mega fireball technique.


    He was already advancing towards that ce but at the same time you can see a small fireball already appear on his hand and the color of that fire was green. Even though it looks like your normal Fireball, it contains a tremendous amount of spiritual energy. But Sam wasn''t finished there as he kept channeling the spiritual energy into that fireball as much as he could so that he could kill many monsters at once by the damage of the mega fireball.


    Also the good thing was that in a situation like this he did not have to worry about hisbred because in that ce no Warriors were present other than those supporting Warriors who were still far away from his direction. They were also approaching those Monsters but he had the confidence that they would not get that much affected by the mega fireball.


    Sometimeter after finishing the mega fireball he did not waste a single second and threw that fireball toward the center of those Monsters. The moment that fireball got released from his hand it naturally got visible to everyone and at the same time everyone those Warriors who were also advancing toward those monsters naturally felt the tremendous power that was realizing from that fireball.


    Naturally they already predicted these most likely Sam who previously contacted them. Sometimeter that fireball finallynded on the center of those Monsters and naturally in the next second as you can see a huge explosion was created and the whole 5 to 6 km area got destroyed by that explosion.


    Every Monster present in that 6 km range already got killed by that explosion and not only those Monsters who were also near that ce already got seriously injured by that explosion. But not only that because of the impact naturally those other Monsters who were already far away from the direction also got affected. But because everyone of those monsters did not have the ability to think or do anything if their master did not tell him to do, they naturally will not back down even in a situation like this.


    But the thing was that at this time naturally those abyss humans who also behind Those Monsters already saw what happened and naturally they used their power to make everyone of those Monsters angry. Not only that, everyone of them could also already notice those warriorsing toward those Monsters and with that theymand those Monsters to attack those Warriors.


    Naturally those Abyss humans already noticed that everyone of those flying Monsters got continuously attacked by some Warriors and naturally that already killed many of them but that wasn''t it at the same time the other team also approached the Monsters and naturally they had their weapons.


    The thing was that as you can tell right now not everyone of those Abyss humans controlling the monster so naturally they are already preparing their own attack to attack those Warriors right now. Fortunatelypared to the number of those Monsters the number of those Warriors were very few so everyone of those Abyss humans have the confidence to win this.


    But unfortunately for everyone of them none of them consider the presence of Sam while Sam already decided to prepare another attack like this and attack those Monsters. Because of the first attack he already killed most of those Mortal grade monsters and special grade monsters. But naturally the real danger will be those Elite and Epic grade monsters. So once again after recovering his full energy using the potions, he already decided to create another mega fireball.


    Even though you can say he just recovered from that serious state, and even though he was feeling the headache right now, he did not have any other way. Once again as you can see a firewall was created that has tremendous power in it. Until that fireball was in his hand nobody was able to detect that but the moment he threw that fireball in the sky everyone present there already felt the fire ball.


    Instantly many of those dark humans and those Abyss humans try to create an Energy barrier to protect those Monsters but unfortunately they are unable to create that much strong barrier suddenly and because of that the mega fireball easily breaks the barrier andnds on the ground once again.


    "Boom!!!"


    Once again a huge explosion was created and once again the whole 6 kilometer area got destroyed by that attack. Once again you can see at least 1000 of those Monsters got dead because of that attached. But still it wasn''t enough in front of those big armies of monsters so at the same time the same team decided to use another mega fireball.


    But then he notices something strange instantly appear in front of those Monsters. That thing was an Energy barrier that instantly appeared in front of those Monsters and naturally those Monsters also stopped moving right now as they were already preparing their attack. First of all everyone of those abyss humans were sure that other than those Warriors who were approaching in that direction one more enemy also present there and he was the one who created those powerful attacks.


    Sam already killed everyone of those Mortal grade monsters and also most of those special grade Monsters also got killed by that attack. But that wasn''t it because those Elite grade and Epic grade Monsters also got affected by his attacks to Naturally everyone of those Abyss humans who tell the dangering out from his attacks so naturally right now before anything they wanted to spot the enemy and wanted to finish him.


    Even though right now they did not know the location of the enemy but previously they already saw from which direction those fireballs wereing toward those Monsters. So they instantly control all of those monsters to attack in that direction. Those Monsters instantly begin to attack that direction continuously and instantly because of that one by one that whole ce got destroyed by their attack.


    Sometimeter,


    Those Abyss humans finally stop those Monsters because first of all they wanted to know what was the situation in that ce. Right now a hugeyer of smoke has been created in that ce. Because of that they needed to wait for some time for that smokeyer to fade away and only then they could see the destroyed ce but unfortunately at this time even using their observation technique in full power they did not find any enemy present in the direction.

 Chapter 542 542 - A Very Serious Situation

    ?


    Even though right now Sam was attacking those Monsters continuously, the thing was that it still wasn''t enough to kill that many monsters at once and even with the help of those thousand Warriors in that ce he still did not have the confidence to kill all of them before those Monsters joined the battlefield. Also at the same time you should not forget about those dark humans and those abyss humans.


    Right now those people already begin to attack those warriors who are helping him and not only that because of that many of them already got seriously injured. Unfortunately they just only had 50 healers present in that group and because of that the situation was quite dangerous for everyone. Naturally Sam needed to handle the matter so nobody from those warriors died.


    But to do that he continuously needed to attack those monsters using his mega fireball technique and that was very hard for him because it also put a natural mental pressure on him that already began to increase the mental headache that he was feeling right now. Also he also needed to be alert all the time because even though those Monsters and those enemies were not able to locate him, they could still try to search for his ce and attack any random direction suddenly where those people thought that he was present.


    Because of that he already became quite injured because not every time he was able to dodge instantly and because of that the situation of Sam was also very serious. Butpared to those Warriors he was in a good condition and right now he is still preparing to use the mega fireball technique to kill more monsters.


    Wasting no time he once again brings out a health potion and a spiritual energy potion. With that he naturally recovers his health and spiritual energy. The first thing you should notice is that he was now wearing a different armor and because this armor wasn''t his previous armor it was also very low in power so it did not give him that much difference. Well the thing was that he previously got this armor as a reward from the human king and naturally he did not decide to fuse that armor.


    Fortunately at that time he did not do that so he still had armor with him. But the situation of that armor was very serious. You can already see the crack mark present on that armor and not only that at the same time he already noticed some crack mark present in his yer. This was also a big reason that right now he only decided to fight using the spiritual attacks and wasn''t using his Sword right now.


    On the other hand if you think about the number of those Monsters then most likely until now he single handedly already killed 5000 of those Monsters and there were still 5000 Monsters remaining. The king said that he already killed all those weak Monsters but right now because of those remaining Monsters were powerful even many of them were powerfulpared to him so it was getting very hard for him to finish them easily. Even though those Monsters are getting controlled by the dark spirit, it looks like those monsters still react after sensing the danger and because of that, mini of them already begin to counter attack from the direction that they sense the mega fireballing toward them.


    Nowes back to Sam as you can see in his hand once again a fireball appears and naturally he once again uses the mega fireball technique and with that he is already channeling his spiritual energy into that fireball. The good thing was that he was already able to stop those Monsters from advancing toward the battlefield or the situation would be very difficult and naturally it would have already be very dangerous for everyone of those Warriors present in the battlefield.


    Even though they were present those peak Elite or evenary grade monsters, but because of the origin spiritual energy he was able to injure them and using that spiritual energy as his advantage he already killed many of them. Right now he already begins to channel The Spiritual energy into that fireball and naturally he almost channels 85% of his spiritual energy but he does not stop there.


    First of all he also knew that it would not be enough to injure many of those Monsters even if a huge explosion was created. So he also needed to increase the spiritual energy present in that fireball so that it would be able to harm most of those Monsters after releasing the center of those Monsters.


    "Sigh, I don''t know how long we would be able to survive like this. Even though a powerful Warrior helped us to fight those Monsters, I am sure that most likely he was also in a bad condition and if things continue like this most likely we would be dead before we got any help from anyone."


    "Sigh, don''t say it like this. Even if we die we will not have any regrets because at least we already decreased the total number of those Monsters and it will be very helpful for our Warriors to fight them if these Monsters still decided to participate in the battlefield. But as you know my main target was those dark humans and those Abyss humans."


    " Cough¡­ cough¡­ those pieces of shit, they always wanted to create trouble for our Kingdom and if it is possible then they naturally wanted to take our life to use as the sacrifice for their god. But¡­ cough¡­ cough¡­ . One thing you should remember even if you die but before you die you should try to destroy your whole body so that those people won''t be able to use your dead body as their sacrifice."


    " Hmm¡­ don''t worry about that but before dying I really wanted to at least kill as many of those people as I can."


    Naturally right now as you can tell everyone of those injured fighters were talking among each other while they were still attacking those Monsters. Those people attacked those Monsters from a long distance but the thing was that they were also having the same situation like Sam. Because of continuously using their spiritual energy and using the spiritual potion to recover their spiritual energy really puts their body in a very dangerous situation and because of that right now they also have a headache in their head.


    But that wasn''t your normal headache because it just kept increasing and increasing and sometimeter it already became intolerable for anyone but still those people in this condition still decided to fight those Monsters. On the other hand if you look at those people who fight those Monsters in closebat already have a more serious situationpared to them and if it wasn''t for those 50 healing team members present with them it would be very dangerous for everyone.


    But unfortunately only just 50 of those people were present there to heal those people and because of that it wasn''t enough to heal everyone of those Warriors who were fighting those Monsters in closebat. Some of them already broke their armor and their weapons but naturally those people did not stop and used their fist to fight those monsters.


    Some of them already lost their hand or leg and were in a dangerous situation but fortunately those people were getting help from those healers and not only that but their mysterious friend was also helping them while giving them potions. Because of that those people are still alive in a situation like this but the thing was that nobody was sure how long they would be able to survive if they really did not get any help from their king or any of those other Warriors.


    But naturally they also know that simr to their situation, the condition of those people inside the battlefield also has the same situation.


    Now came back to main matter once again a very powerful Fireball suddenly appeared on the sky and naturally that directly went towards Monsters. But this time none of those Monsters or even those enemies were able to create any type of barrier to stop that fireball. If you wanted to know why then it was because before throwing that fireball toward those Monsters Sam instantly appeared very close to those Monsters and only from the direction he should fireball toward those Monsters so naturally this was apletely unexpected matter for everyone.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Compared to those previous attacks, this time a very huge amount of explosions were created that almost destroyed the 8 km area and its surrounding area. Not only that the impact of the attack was very powerfulpared to before and because of that many of those Warriors and even those Monsters got sent flying. A huge amount of impact was created and the power of that impact was so powerful that none of them were able to stay in their previous ce. But on the other hand if you think about the condition of Sam, then he is almost in a serious situation where he is unable to fight any longer.

 Chapter 543 543 - Using Healing Technique

    ?


    Sometimeter you can see the condition of Sam was very serious right now. He barely holds his ground and keeps activating the concealment technique. Actually not only him but the condition of those Warriors is also very serious right now and most likely 2 of them already died at the hands of those Monsters.


    Well, naturally as you know using the mega fireball technique and then also using the spiritual healing potions, really puts his body under a lot of pressure. Not only that at the same time he was having a headache that already became intolerable. It was like his head would explode, but even in a condition like this Sam was still fighting those Monsters while attacking them using the mega fireball technique.


    Because of this you can say those Monsters who did not get affected by the mega fire balls decided to attack toward the direction from where they could see the mega fireballing towards other Monsters. Naturally even though the origin spiritual energy was much strongerpared to your true spiritual energy, you can say that it wasn''t enough for him to injure thoseary grade monsters.


    Those were the Monsters that were out of his league, and previously those Monsters kept attacking toward his direction. Well because of that he was at the time in big trouble. Sometimes he also needed to cancel his mega Fireball to dodge the attack. But naturallypared to him the speed of those Monsters is also greater and most likely they also predict in which direction he will escape. Because of this you can say the situation appears.


    At this time he once again recovered his full spiritual energy but this time he did not instantly attack those Monsters and already came very far away from those Monsters towards other Warriors. First of all,pared to him the condition of those Warriors was much more serious. Two of them already died and many of them already lost some of their body parts while fighting those Monsters and those Abyss humans.


    Naturally they also didn''t get the time to recover or use any kind of potions. Also many of them already lost their weapons and armours while fighting those Monsters and naturally that makes the situation more dangerous for them. Fortunately until now they are still able to survive because of the medical team or you can say the healing team who were continuously healing them and trying their best to recover every one of them.


    On the other hand right now Sam also came towards the healing team because he decided to help them to recover those other Warriors. As you know he also mastered using the light control technique so naturally he could also use healing techniques like them. Also using the origin spiritual energy the power of his healing will be much greaterpared to those other Warriors so naturally wasting no time he already began to use the healing technique towards Warriors who were struggling and trying to kill those Monsters even though their condition was very serious.


    On the other hand in the battlefield everyone is still trying to fight those Monsters even though it could already make them dead. But naturally they have the responsibility to hold those Monsters until the reinforcement team did note there to help them. At this time as you can see some of them are already very close to dying, as they already lost too much blood and not only that they also already lost some of their body parts.


    It Looked like those Warriors already thought that they would die there but suddenly something unexpected happened. Will the healing team already use their healing techniques towards everyone of those Warriors and naturally those Warriors are also aware of that as they can also feel that they were getting healed by their healing team. But naturally that wasn''t fast enough to make them instantly heal and at the same time those Monsters and Abyss humans also did not give them time to recover from their injuries.


    So right now in a condition like that they suddenly feel they instantly begin to heal much faster than before and not only that the speed is just increasing and increasing. Naturally that makes them very startled for a moment, but naturally they also understand someone helping them.


    You can say in the 5 minutes most of those Warriors who were very close to die already recovered they are 50% healthy and not only that they are still recovering from their injury much faster than before and if things continue like this they will naturally recover fully. Well you can say after realizing that the fighting confidence of those Warriors once again increased and they began to fight those Monsters once again with confidence.


    Sam right now focusing on those seriously injured Warriors. Because of his health as you can see those Warriors who already lost too much blood or lost some of their body part and already very close to die already recovering in a very surprising speed and injust 5 minutes some of them already recover their 50% health and with that those people who previously lost their hand org, also once again have them back.


    On the other hand Sam was now fully sweating. He doesn''t know how long he will be able to keep up like this and how long you will be able to fight those Monsters and those other enemies. Also he had the feeling that they would not get any kind of reinforcement in a situation like this. Because as you know the condition of those other Warriors in the battlefield why also like them and right now they are just only focusing on their own fight and trying to survive in the war.


    Not only that, even the human kings and the others were also focusing on their battles while fighting thoseary grade Warriors. Naturally because of that they are also unable to shift their focus on to other ces and only need to focus on their enemy right now. Naturally at this time you can say Sam was already thinking about using the teleportation technique when he realized he won''t be able to attack or help those Warriors much longer and already at his limit. Until then he will try to help them and also at the same time he will try to attack those Monsters.


    Right now if you look at those Monsters then you can notice thatpared to be for the number of those Monsters were match low and everything happened because of the sudden attack of that invisible Warrior and also attack from those other Warriors. They just kept attacking those Monsters while not giving them much time to react and also if those Abyss humans wanted to protect them or wanted to counter attack eat also did not give them that my chance to do that. But still you can say that thoseary grade Monsters and those Abyss humans are getting more chances and because of that they are also attacking those Warriors continuously.


    On the other hand you can see most of those Warriors who fight in closebat have already recovered their health but on the other hand those spiritual warriors were also very close to losing all their strength to fight back. They also like him attacking those Monsters continuously using their spiritual technique. As you can tell that wasn''t enough and also naturally they did not have the power to fight back with thoseary grade Monsters.


    _____________________


    ''Will I need to use the berserker technique and teleportation technique to escape?''


    Right now this is the question that Sam was having. Because even with his help he still cannot have the confidence to win against those monsters so because of that he already decided to use the teleportation technique. On the other hand even after those many attacks you can say that none of thoseary grade monsters get that much injured.


    ''Look like, those dark humans and Those Abyss humans also have the help from legendary grade Abyss humans. Naturally if they did not have the help then they would not be able to control that manyary grade Monsters. Really the big question was will our soldiers be able to protect themselves when these people will interfere with the fight or not?


    It Looks like before the situation gets out of hand I need to use my Trump card.''


    Sam thought that. First of all as you know he stops attacking those Monsters and because of that those Monsters only focus on those other Warriors. Not just only that but at the same time even though the healing speed of those Warriors already increase but still it wasn''t enough to recover them fully and at the same time you should know even if they recover there full health but they won''t be able to recover there full strain that they where using while fighting those monsters.


    Naturally because of that Sam decided to use his trump card. Naturally he wanted to mean that he will be using the berserker technique. First of all it will instantly increase his strength and already make him much more powerful. In that state you will keep attacking those monsters using his increased spiritual energy and power so with that he would be able to create more damage than before.

 Chapter 544 544 - Reinforcement

    ?


    ''It looks like this will be thest chance to use my berserker technique and teleportation technique. With that at least I would be able to save some of those Warriors and at the same time I would be alive.''


    Well the situation was now already theory critical for those Warriors who are fighting those Monsters right now. You can say even with the help of Sam the situation did not get better and already many of those Warriors died in the hands of those Monsters.


    Really all this time Sam once again felt useless that he was unable to protect those Warriors but at the same time he also had the clear understanding about the power of thoseary grade Monsters and those abyss humans. Naturally those dark humans and Abyss humans did not directly participate in this battlefield because they wanted to save their strength to fight the main force.


    So because of this, they only attacked those Warriors who were fighting those Monsters from a distance while the situation got out of hand and naturally because of this you can say the situation of those Warriors already became very critical and many of them already died. You can say that if it wasn''t for thoseary grade monsters, then the situation would be different but really who could expect even for a peak Epic grade Warrior, everyone of thoseary grade Monsters were very powerful.


    It was like the moment anyone would be aary grade Warrior, he will have additional power that will make that person very powerful and even for a peak Epic grade warrior it wasn''t possible to injure thatary grade Monster or Warrior even if they try to use their full power.


    On the other hand if you are wondering how did Sam get to know about this because he already tried to attack those Monsters using his 95% origin spiritual energy but unfortunately nothing happened to them and those Monsters only received light injuries. This really surprised me because nothing like that had happened to him previously.


    Even when he was only Early elite grade Warrior, he was at least able to injure any Early epic grade warrior or monster using his full power but suddenly nothing like that happened to those monsters so because of this Sam also felt hopeless. But as you know from the first when he realized the danger he was already nning to use his trump card and also use the teleportation technique to take those Warriors away from that ce so they did not die in the hands of those Monsters.


    Naturally he did not know how many Warriors you will be able to teleport but naturally he will try his best to teleport them. Right now as you can see he once again returns to the frontline where he fights those Monsters using his fireballs and at the same time using his sword technique.


    Even though you can say his superior sword technique and archery technique were much more powerfulpared to his other techniques, naturally his fireball technique has the most destructive power and because of this he wasn''t using the archery technique and only using the fire control technique. But that does not mean right now he wasn''t using that because beside using the sword and fire control technique he also used the archery technique.


    It wasn''t able to create a huge destruction but still it was powerfulpared to the fireball technique and when he changed the nature of the origin spiritual energy that coated the spirit arrows naturally that Arrow became very powerful and a me phoenix also got created by that arrow. Using those arrows he already killed many of those peak Epic grade monsters. All this time he instantly needed to recover his spiritual energy or he won''t be able to have the strength to maintain his concealment technique.


    But still you can say that the situation did not get better and thoseary grade Monsters right now are also attacking those Warriors continuously. They using their power and defense as their advantage and with that they also able to kill many of those Warriors and they also able to injured Sam very seriously even though they unable to locate his direction full stop actually you can say those Monsters attack just only rely on their instincts and on the other hand they got help from those Abyss humans.


    _____________________


    Suddenly something unexpected happened and 5 of thoseary grade Monsters already came in front of those warriors where Sam was right now. Not only that everyone of those Monsters had a spiritual beam in their mouth and naturally they were already about to attack those Warriors and Sam at this time. By their sudden appearance Warriors or Sam get the time to react and naturally they know most likely they would die in this attack.


    Beside the power and defense of those monsters, they were also very fast. Because of this, naturally those Warriors won''t be able to react on time and with that, all of them already can feel the dangering out from their attack. But the thing was that not only just thoseary grade Monsters but at the same time naturally those other Monsters also preparing their attack.


    Most likely those Abyss humans also weren''t staying ideal and at this time they naturally wanted to finish those warriors. So they also already attack towards Warriors and everybody right now just feeling danger from every directioning toward them and they are just unable to do anything.


    Some of them and the healing team behind them already created barriers around them but naturally everybody knows that in front of those attacked those barriers won''t be able to protect them. So many of them already lost their confidence and will to fight back and already ept their death. Naturally right now all of them have the regret that they are unable to kill all of those Monsters but one thing they were happy about is that they already killed arge amount of Monsters and with that the danger of those other Warriors will be decreased.


    At this time Sam also already created a barrier in front of them but naturally because he was very low on spiritual energy and already suffering from that mental headache he is also unable to create a powerful barrier and also knows that he won''t be able to protect everyone and most likely he will also die in this ce. So at this time he already decided to use the berserker technique.


    "Boom!!!!"


    A huge explosion got created and instantly the whole ce got surrounded by ayer of smoke. Nobody could tell what was happening in that ce but sometimeter when thatyer of smoke began to fade away everyone of those Monsters and those enemies also realized that many people were still present there and none of them were dead right now. But this time their focus wasn''t those injured Warriors but everyone focusing on those other people that most likely appeared out of nowhere.


    Naturally those Monsters weren''t able to think properly because of the dark spiritual energy but on the other hand everyone of those dark humans and those Abyss humans already realize everyone of those new appear Warriors was releasing powerful aura from their body. Not only that, the most important thing was that 20ary grade warriors were also present in that ce.


    The thing was that none of those previous Warriors were dead right now and instantly they could also see those newly appeared medical teams begin to heal those injured Warriors.


    On the other hand you can say Sam who previously just about to use the berserker technique, suddenly feels the energy fluctuation and instantly a powerful barrier also gets created in front of them and naturally because of that everyone of those attacks from those Monsters sh with that barrier. But not only that, at this time everyone looked speechless at the barrier which did not have a crack on it.


    None of them know how the hell that barrier appeared in front of them but the thing was that it was so powerful and it also protected them from the attack of the Monsters. Instantly the surrounding area got covered in a smokeyer and with that Sam and the others unable to see anything. But at this time you can say everyone already felt many presence around them and everyone of them were very strong.


    Not only that, suddenly those injured Warriors and even Sam begin to feel that they are recovering very quickly from their injuries. Sam at this time unable to maintain his concealment technique and already became visible but right now he is still confused by that sudden situation that he did not know what to do. But as you can see he still remains cautious and begins to look around his surrounding area.


    First of all he did not know who was helping them but if his prediction was right then most likely it was a reinforcement team but the thing was that he did not know the human king and the others had prepared reinforcement like that. Because of this right now he was very cautious about that.

 Chapter 545 545 - Advantage

    <h4>Chapter 545 Chapter 545 - Advantage</h4>


    Sometimeter when theyer of smoke faded away everyone of those Warriors finally was able to see the face of those people who suddenly came in front of them and those people instantly created that powerful barrier that protected all those Warriors.


    Naturallypared to anyone Sam became quite confused because he really did not know about those Warriors but on the other hand when he looked at the face of those other Warriors he became quite surprised because everyone of them had a happy expression on their face. Just a few seconds ago all of them had a helpless expression but suddenly that instantly turned into a happy expression and that really makes Sam very confused right now.


    But naturally he did not ask anything and just began to observe those suddenly arriving people. First of all he was unable to see the face of those Warriors because everyone had a mask on their face but naturally he could tell that all of them came there to help Sam and the others. While Sam was observing those people at this time you can say the medical team of those Warriors who suddenly arrived on that ce also began to heal everyone of those remaining Warriors and Sam at this time.


    The condition of all of them was very serious and most likely if they really got hit by that attack then all of them would already die right now. Actually previously those attacks from the Monsters and also attacks from those Abyss humans instantlybined into one attack and naturally that attack was very powerful and even at the time Sam and the others using their full power wanted to create a barrier, still they would not be able to protect themselves from that attack.


    On the other hand right now the expression of those dark humans and those Abyss humans were also very serious after notice in those Sudden Arrival people. Naturally they will also help those previous Warriors and not only that everyone of those Warriors who arrived on that ce also releases a powerful aura. There are alsoary grade Warriors also present and naturally right now everyone of those Warriors without wasting a single second already begins to attack those Monsters.


    The thing you will notice in those Warriors is that most likely every one of those Warriors were around Epic grade and naturally everyone of those Warriors right now targets those remaining Monsters except thoseary grade Monsters. Because those Monsters directly got targeted by thoseary grade warriors.


    On the other hand the medical team was already able to stabilize the condition of every one of those Warriors so they instantly moved from that ce and came towards other Warriors who were right now fighting those Monsters. Naturally they already begin to use their spell on thos3 Warriors. Not only that but at the same time you can say they are also helping those Warriors by using their light element technique.


    On the other hand, Sam and the others without doing anything stay there like this for a few minutes and only then theye back to their senses and already realize that they cannot stay there like this and need to help those warriors here to fight those Monsters. Fortunately at this time most likely every one of them already recovered they are healthy and because their own medical team did not get attacked by the Monsters previously so this still have the power to heal their Warriors and right now with their help most of them already recover.


    So wasting no time every one of those Warriors already get away from their ce and instantly begin to run toward those Monsters. Well you can say that only in a few seconds the situation already changed and right now everyone of those Warriors had The upper hand and naturally they also had The upper hand because their number was greaterpared to those Monsters.


    Those newly arrived Warriors also realize that previously those other Warriors almost killed most of those Monsters and right now only those powerful Monsters remain in that ce. Well that was actually a very good thing for everyone of those Warriors because with that they will not get distracted by those other Monsters.


    Naturally on the other hand every one of those dark humans and those Abyss humans also after seeing all of this already realize the seriousness of this matter so finally everyone of them also decided to participate in the battlefield. Before as you know they wanted to save their power and only wanted to use their full power when they participated in the main battlefield. But right now the situation waspletely different and if those people did not participate in that fight then naturally everyone of those enemies will kill all those Monsters and not only that after that they will naturally target them.


    With that everyone of those dark humans and those Abyss humans begin to attack those Warriors and also alreadye near that ce. The thing was thatpared to before or you can saypared to any of those other battles where those Abyss humans had a great number of people who participated in the flight, right now the situation waspletely opposite and only a few people came there to participate in the battle.


    But everyone of them were around peak Epic grade or intermediate epic grade, not only that 5ary grade Abyss humans also present in that ce. Also, it looks like a legendary grade Abyss human also present there. But naturally at this time when everyone get quite scared after realizing that and try to feel the aura, they can tell that that person who most likely was a legendary grade already low on spiritual energy and not only that by sensing the aura of that person you can say he did not break through normally and most likely break through forcefully because of the unstabilize dark spiritual energy around that person.


    But still after realizing that you can say the expression of some of those Warriors already became serious. Because that legendary grade person would be very dangerous in a battlefield like this where they could kill many of them easily even though they did not break through normally.


    But on the other hand if you see the expression of those newly arrived Warriors then you will see that every one of them had a calm expression after realizing all of this and most likely because of them those other Warriors also got the confidence so that they did not care about that legendary grade enemy. With that they are just focusing on those enemies and those Monsters right now.


    At this time If you are wondering about Sam then he is also participating in the battle but right now he is unable to use the concealment technique and his fire control technique. Because of this he is right now only using the light control technique and the sword technique. First of all you can say right now if he wanted to use the fire control or concealment technique you would feel the headache increase and he would be unable to tolerate that so he decided to not to use that.


    Even though Sam got fully healed, he still had a mental headache and naturally it wouldn''t go away until he did not rest. Well if it was before then he would not get affected by that. But because this time he focused on attacking those Monsters and those enemies continuously using powerful techniques and at the same time trying to maintain the stealth mode really made him exhausted and over used those techniques and because of this right now he won''t be able to use them.


    "Boom!!!!"


    "Roar!!!!"


    Instantly many powerful impacts got created after the shes between The attacks from those Monsters and the attack from thoseary grade Warriors. Naturally the surrounding area also got destroyed and at that time those Warriors who were near them also already escaped from that ce. Naturally every time when thoseary grade Warriors and monsters or you can say those enemies fight with each other then naturally like this explosion will appear and the impact created by them will also be very powerful.


    Some of those Warriors were unable to stabilize their condition and with that they also got sent flying but fortunately those medical teams already healed everyone of them once again and with that those Warriors once again joined the battlefield. The good thing was that because other than thoseary grade Monsters most of them already got injured by the previous attack from Sam and the others so killing them right now did not taking that much time and with that they already killed half of those remaining Monsters and also because of this you can say those fighters get the time to fight with those dark humans and those abyss humans.


    With that, those dark humans and those Abyss humans even after joining the fight did not get the upper hand and naturally that was a good thing for everyone.

 Chapter 546 546 - Wining the fight

    <h4>Chapter 546 Chapter 546 - Wining the fight</h4>


    Finally Sam understood who those people were. Actually those Warriors told him about the identity of those other Warriors who just arrived on that ce. They told him that those people were from the warrior association because they could also see the logo of the warrior association present in all of their armours.


    On the other hand you can say that finally Sam stopped fighting those Monsters and those Abyss humans. Actually he wasn''t in the condition right now to fight because he was fully mentally exhausted and he did not even have the strength to use any of his techniques right now. Naturally that was because he continuously used his spiritual techniques and everyone of them really put a lot of mental pressure in his mind and because of this in the end, his situation became like this.


    Actually not only him, many other people also have the same condition and because of this they are also trying to rest for sometime to regain their mental health. On the other hand you can say that even though newly arrived Warriors did not know but those other Warriors who were there from the first naturally knew about Sam and how his condition became like this so naturally they also did not have any problem and anyint while he decided to rest.


    Previously they were also able to notice in the main battlefield where somebody suddenly arrived on that ce and began to help everyone while that person was still maintaining his invisible state. Not only that aftering here that person also continuously used those powerful techniques and naturally they could also understand why he was feeling like this because of those powerful techniques naturally he was under a lot of mental pressure.


    On the other hand Sam naturally wanted to rest until he did not get back the strength to fight back with those Monsters. Fortunately the thing was that now those Warriors from the warrior association came there, those other Warriors will not have any problem while fighting those Monsters and those enemies so they also.


    All this time you can say Sam was observing the Warriors from the warrior association and one thing he was sure that everyone of those warriors were very powerful. Even you can saypared to any of your normal epic grade Warriors, those people were very powerful and very experienced in this kind of thing. He was thinking how they trained themselves to be like this. Naturally he was sure about one thing that the warrior association put all the Warriors in a tough condition where everyone of them received many dangerous experiences and with that they became like this.


    Most likely because of this most of the kingdoms also fear the warrior force of the warrior association. It wasn''t that those Warriors from the kingdom weren''t experienced enough to fight, but it was just everyone knowing that everyone of those Warriors who join the warrior association will naturally go through some tough procedure and that will make that person turn into a different person.


    Now came back to the main situation,


    You can say with the help of those other Warriors those Warriors from the warrior association already killed most of those other Monsters while they also started to fight those Abyss humans and those dark humans. Naturally they needed to make sure that they did not get affected by the dark spiritual energy. Because that could easily affect them and it will also be very harmful to them in a situation like this.


    Now on the other hand everyone of thoseary grade Warriors already killed most of those Monsters. First of all you can saypared to the number of those Monsters the number of those Warriors were much greater and using that as their advantage they killed most of them while right now the divided into two team where the first team handling those Monsters and the second team handling thoseary grade Abyss humans.


    Fortunately only three of them were present in that ce so naturally those Warriors from the warrior association weren''t having that much problem to handle them. They just need to make sure that those people suddenly did not affect them with their dark spiritual energy and also those people did not get the time to use their dark artifact. Naturally as everyone knows that suddenly they could use their dark artifact to increase the spiritual energy in their body and naturally that also give them additional power and make them more dangerous.


    On the other hand that one legendary grade Abyss human still did not participate in the fight as he maintaining the control over those Monsters but one thing you can say that if that person decided to join the fight then it could be a different situation if those warriors from the Warrior association did not have any kind of support. But the thing was that it looked like those people did not have anything to worry about that person and because of them everyone had a calm expression.


    Sam already thought that they also have support from the legendary grade Warrior but unfortunately he was unable to sense anyone like that present in that ce. Naturally that makes him very curious and at the same time very confused.


    On the other hand the medical team continuously helps everyone of those Warriors to maintain their health. If it wasn''t for the medical team most of them would have already be unable to fight right now and that could be a very dangerous situation. But those medical teams not only help them to maintain their health but at the same time they also attack those Monsters using their light control technique.


    First of all you should know that most of those medical team members who were good at using healing techniques weren''t that good at using the light element. Because of these, those people always stay on the medical team and only focus on their Warriors. But there were many other people who only focused on the attack while using the light element.


    You can say even Sam also only focused on the attack and because of this he wasn''t that much good at using the healing technique and because of this even previously when he tried to heal those Warriors using the healing technique he wasn''t that good at it.


    Sam at this time suddenly thinks about the situation of the main battlefield because he did not know what about the situation of that ce. First of all, what if many more enemies suddenly decided to join the fire and what if Monsters and those Abyss humans suddenly join the fight from another direction? Because it could be a possibility that not everyone of those Abyss humans came from only this direction. Naturally they could also have a possibility toe from a different direction.


    So you can say he was also very worried about the situation on the main battlefield. Because in that battlefield many of his familiar people were also participating and he really just hoped those people did not die.


    _____________


    Sometimeter you can say the situation of that ce already changed and right now everyone of those Warriors have the advantage over those Monsters and those Abyss humans. You should know that most of those Abyss humans are already dead and only those peak Epic grade andary grade Abyss humans remain in that ce.


    Naturally the number of those Abyss humans wasn''t that much and only 500 of those people came there and because of this most of them already dead right now while the remaining people still trying to fight those Warriors but the condition of those people also wasn''t that good and naturally those Warriors using that as there advantage right.


    While on the other hand the fight between thoseary grade monster and Abyss humans vs thoseary grade Warriors were in a tense condition. First of all those other Warriors know that they won''t be able to interfere with those fight and because of this they only focusing on those other enemies and those other Monsters.


    Naturally you can say because of those previous Warriors everyone of those newly arrive warriors get The upper hand from the first and with that they able to kill those Monsters that quickly.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Suddenly a huge explosion was created on that ce because one of thoseary grade warrior attack with a huge thunderball those Monsters and naturally that created that big explosion. First of all you should know that person from the first handling two of those Monsters at the same time and it look like even in a condition like this he wasn''t having that much trouble so naturally you can say he was much strongerpare to those Monsters.


    You can say that he mos likely was a intermediateary grade Warrior. Sam was just surprise after seeing the power of those people. Most likely after looking at them he also have the desired to have that kind of power so that he could also kill his enemy like that without having any type of problem.

 Chapter 547 547 - Danger arrived

    <h4>Chapter 547 Chapter 547 - Danger arrived</h4>


    Right now everyone of those Epic grade monsters already got killed and not only that most of those dark humans and those Abyss humans also got killed by those Warriors and naturally because of that the situation was out of control.


    But naturally at this time nobody rxes because everyone focuses on the fight between thoseary grade Monsters and those warriors. Even thoseary grade Abyss humans also present there who are attacking those Warriors but the thing was thatpared to the number of those Monsters naturally the number of those enemies wasn''t that match and because of these before anything everyone of them also know they need to kill everyone of those Monsters.


    But the thing was that because everyone of thoseary grade monsters and Abyss humans were around early grade, this still wasn''t able to handle those Warriors and because of this the situation was already very difficult for everyone of them. Right now only 2 of those Monsters and 3 of those Abyss humans present in that ce but the situation of them also wasn''t that good and naturally it will only take a few more minutes to kill them.


    Naturally at this time those other Warriors were very happy because with that they did not have to worry about those monsters and those Abyss humans. But at this time If you look at Sam then you can see he was worried about the greater danger that was still present in that ce that almost everybody forgot.


    None of those people remember that a legendary enemy also present they are and that person most likely handled those Monsters previously. But right now as you can see the situation and most of those Monsters already got killed and only two of them were alive, so naturally that person most likely will be attacking them after that.


    Just thinking about that made him very worried and all this time he was very concerned about his surrounding area and trying to find out about the location of that legendary grade enemy. But naturally he needed a superior observation technique to find that person because that person was very powerfulpared to him so that person also has the ability to hide his presence from anyone.


    You can say that all this time he did not participate in the five but he was saving his strength so that if that enemy decided to surprise attack them he should at least count to attack that person to save more people. At this time you also try to warn those other Warriors but naturally everyone is only focusing on the fight.


    Fortunately not everyone was like them as he already informed many of those Warriors and even the medical team was also very worried about this situation right now and they were also preparing their strength to help everyone when that person would attack them. But still you can say for Sam he wasn''t sure if they would be able to handle that person or not.


    First of all you should know that a legendary grade was apletely different league like theary grade. So even if many people ofary grade decided to attack a legendary grade Warrior using their full power they still could not have the chance to injure him if that legendary grade Warrior did not be careless.


    Not only that as you know he also has a very family with the power of the old human king and that old Oni king. By observing their power he could already tell that those people would be able to handle manyary grade Monsters at the same time without any difficulty. But at the same time you can say some were very curious white did not, those were here from the warrior association showing any concern.


    Naturallypared to those other Warriors those people should ever have the presence of the legendary grade Abyss human. But it looks like those people still have the confidence to take that person and because of these many people showing their consent right now and only focusing on the fight. So naturally because of this Sam also wanted to find out what was the real situation with those Warriors and why they were not showing any type of consent right now.


    Actually while thinking all of these he did not even realize but those Warriors already killed those remaining Monsters and not only that they also killed two of those abyss humans and only just one person remaining and that ce.


    Suddenly the air around that ce begins to fluctuate and naturally in the next second you can feel the spiritual energy of that person already begin to increase. Well if you look at the hand of that person you can see a dark artifact present there. Naturally as you can tell it was because of that thing that person suddenly became this much powerful and as you can tell the power of that person just kept increasing and increasing.


    Sometimeter that person already reaches the intermediateary grade. But even with that condition as you can tell the winning of that person wasn''t sure because those Warriors also did notck intermediateary grade Warriors. And even though that person decided to attack those Warriors but he was not even able to counter attack that much and after 5 minutester as you can tell the situation of that person already became very serious and most likely was time for that person toe back to his real self.


    At this time Sam was also very curious what type of side effect will that person receive after using the dark artifact. But at this time you can say he did not even get that much time to think about it because in the next second a huge and powerful energy fluctuation got created and in the next second those who were just able to kill that abyss human were already sent flying backward. If you want to read how something like that could happen then it was because suddenly a person appeared in front of that Abyss human.


    Not only that the moment that person appears everyone isn''t there begin to feel a pressure. That pressure just kept increasing and increasing and with that you can say naturally everyone became sure who that person was and most likely he was the person who previously handled those Monsters and controlled them to go to the main battlefield. But the situation was that everyone of those Warriors already killed everyone of those Monsters and also killed everyone of those dark humans and Abyss humans. Because of this, mostly that person did not want to stay focused on those Monsters.


    You can say that right now in the battlefield suddenly a silent atmosphere has been created because of the sudden arrival of that person. By looking at that person as you can tell he was also an Abyss human. Naturally everyone of them also realize that he was the one who controls those Monsters and everyone of those Warriors except those Warriors from the warrior association already begin to fear.


    That person after appearing in that ce directly began to look at the condition of his subordinate but the thing was that he also realized other than that person everyone of them already got killed so naturally he would already be angry after realizing that. Instantly a very huge amount of spiritual pressure created and that even made Sam unable to breathe that time.


    But as you can tell he is already very familiar with this type of situation and because of this he already prepared an attack for that person. Before that person coulde to that ce he already shot an Arrow into the sky and that narrow naturally came down. You can say that he already got to know where that legendary grade would appear.


    Naturally it was just based on his prediction. He used that Arrow previously and looks like they will be effective in a situation like this because when that person suddenly begins to use the spiritual force he did not realize but an Arrow alreadying toward his direction from the sky.


    In the next second an explosion got created on that ce because that Arrow already hurt that legendary grade Abyss human. But in the next again once again the expression got created and that shocked most of those Warriors alongside Sam.


    He was the person who previously shot that Arrow in the sky but now the main question was that wh second explosion appear on that ce suddenly and not only that it looks like that enemy already got sent flying after getting hit by that attack.


    But the thing was that Sam did not stay like this for that long because in the next second a person appeared in that ce and by looking at the logo and that person as you can tell he was from the warrior association.

 Chapter 548 548 - Gravity

    ?


    Finally you can say everyone of those Warriors understand why those people from the warrior association weren''t taking any tension even after realizing that a legendary grade Abyss human Still present in that ce.


    With the arrival of that legendary grade Warrior you can say right now everyone of those Warriors already became rxed and not only that they already came far from that ce because the battle between both of this Warrior will naturally affect the surrounding area and nobody wanted to get affected by that.


    Because of this, Sam and the others already went far away from that ce but everyone of them very clearly observed that ce to see the battle between both of these people. But at this time If you look at that Abyss human then you can naturally tell he was quite exhausted and most likely that was happening because all this time he was controlling those Monsters. Naturally controlling those many monsters wasn''t an easy task and for that he continuously needed to use his technique and that really consumed a lot of dark spiritual energy.


    So if youpare the spiritual energy than the warrior from the warrior association naturally has the upper hand. But as you know you cannot forget that everyone of those Abyss humans are somehow also able to gain some dark artifact that suddenly increases their power in a serious situation so naturally you need to consider that matter.


    But still you can say that after the arrival of the Warrior from the warrior association everybody became quite rxed and with that everyone of them also hoped that they would finally win this fight so they could also go back to the main battlefield and help those other Warriors present there.


    At this time other than both of those two legendary grade people, everybody was standing far away from that ce and naturally those Warriors from the warrior association were also alongside those Warriors. Sam is also naturally with them and he is just right now only focusing on the battlefield but at the same time he was very worried about the situation that was happening in the main battlefield.


    Many questions were alreadying to his mind and naturally until he did not go back to the main battlefield he wouldn''t be able to rx. Most likely one of the warrior from the warrior association already get to know about his situation so he just smile and told him that he doesn''t have to worry because more help alsoing so with that they had the upper hand in this matter and naturally they would win this fight even if those enemy decided to use some kind of artifact to increase their power.


    Naturally after hearing that Sam and those other Warriors got very shocked because from the first they were fighting those monsters so they naturally did not know anything about the main battlefield. But all this time they were also quite worried about the situation present in the main battlefield and naturally no even though at that time the humans and those other Warriors had the upper hand but still you cannot say for sure how long The upper hand will stay like this.


    "Is this helping from the warrior association?"


    "Haha¡­ no, it isn''t from the warrior association. As you can see we all came from the warrior association and other than that nobody came here. But you can say help from other ces alsoing toward the battlefield and with that you did not have to body about anything. Also themander will naturally try to kill that Abyss human as quickly as he can so that we could go back to the main battlefield."


    After hearing the question of Sam naturally that person from the warrior association already answered that and after hearing that answer even though Sam became quite speechless he did not ask further questions. From the answer he was sure that no more fighters from the warrior association will participate in the war but then the main question was, from which organization do those helping toward the battlefield? Is it some kind of organization or is this help from other kingdoms?


    He really wanted to know the answer of those questions but unfortunately until he did not go back to the main battlefield he would not be able to know anything.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Just when he was thinking about that instantly a huge explosion got created and naturally that almost sent everything around them backward. Fortunately, all of those Warriors already came to distance from the main battleground and because of that they were able to stabilize themselves instantly.


    At this time If you look at that battlefield then you will see that themander of the warrior association already uses his technique and because of that instantly the whole ce around that enemy already got destroyed. At this time you cannot see any type of power of element like ice or fire present in the ce but still you can feel the energy fluctuationing from that ce so naturally everyone good guess most likely that person was using some kind of telekinesis technic or you can say mental technique or some other technique.


    In the next second that enemy decided to create a Energy barrier in front of him but unfortunately before he could do that he once again got pushed into the ground by that sudden force. That force was very powerful that made him unable to move at that moment and already destroyed that ground once again.


    Not only that in the next second that person could also feel the pressure that was now present in his body just keep increasing and increasing and that also making him feel pain at that. Naturally the warrior from the or you can say themander from the warrior association using the gravity technique that instantly makes that enemy unable to move. Well actually themander did not want to give him any time and wanted to finish this fight as quickly as he could so from the start he was using his full power.


    In the next second that person who got pressed into the ground already managed to escape from that ce. Well mostly even in a condition like this that person able to uses the dark teleportation technique but the thing was that in a condition like this he won''t be able to escape that far away so naturally the warrior from the warrior association already find the location of that person and once again created a huge gravity pressure in that ce.


    Naturally on the other hand the enemy already knows you will get attacked by that Warrior once again so before he could get in the same condition he already attacks that Warrior using his powerful attack. Naturally that was a dark ball and that ball was very big and it contained arge amount of dark spiritual energy.


    The moment it got sent toward that Warrior you can say even those people from those other directions could also feel the danger of the dark ball. All of them also suddenly feel a chill in their backside because of that dark ball. That dark ball naturally contains the dark spiritual energy and if they somehow got hit by that thing their body will immediately get destroyed by the dark spiritual energy.


    But before that attack could hit that Warrior from the warrior association he already uses his gravity in full power and because of that dark ball already hit the ground without hitting him. But instantly a full 5 km area got destroyed because of that dark ball hitting the ground. Even the whole ce got affected by the dark spiritual energy and because of these if you look at the whole that got created in that ce it just became ck. Everything that got destroyed previously became ck in color and naturally as you can tell it was affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    On the other hand because themander of the warrior association gets distracted because of that darkness ball, it gives the chance to that Abyss human to escape from that ce and naturally he also already created his second attack and already began to use his attack toward thatmander.


    Suddenly many small dark balls or you can say darkness balls begin to go toward the direction of themander. But that wasn''t it because in the next second even dark spheres begin toe down from the sky and naturally all of them go toward themander.


    Commander of the Warrior association after naturally did not care about anything as he already created a spiritual barrier around him and not only that even though he created that barrier around him he could use his power so he already began to use the gravity power. Those attacks did not even get the chance to get close to themander because everyone of them got deflected because of the gravity and not only that because of that gravity power you can say themander also destroyed the surrounding area where he uses the gravity power.

 Chapter 549 549 - Domain

    ?


    "Ahh!!!!!"


    Right now themander of the warrior association already increased the gravity to its maximum power and because of these you can say the Abyss human was unable to move from his ce but naturally he was struggling to move his body right now even though he was feeling that immense pressure on his body.


    But the thing was that suddenly he began to shout like this and naturally at the same time you can see his whole body also begin to glow in ck color. He was now over using the dark spiritual energy to coat his whole body. Sam and others at this time be very surprised when they see that person now glowing in ck color and not only that a huge amount of energy fluctuation is alsoing out from that ce.


    In the next second everyone of them became speechless because they could see that Abyss human began to move from his ce. Naturally at the same time you can say an energy shing also appears between gravity and dark spiritual energy. Most likely that Abyss human wanted to use his power to cancel the gravity power and wanted to stand up with that but unfortunately the gravity power also wasn''t that easy to handle and because of that shing also happening in that ce.


    Naturally at this time themander of the warrior association also did not show any intention to stop. On the other hand he was already channeling more spiritual energy into his gravity technique and wanted to increase the power of his gravity. He wanted to break his own limit to kill that abyss human.


    But even in a situation like this, that enemy somehow was able to get up from his ce and not only that he was still shouting like this and instantly a huge amount of energy fluctuation got created. At this time everyone thought that most likely that energy fluctuation got created because of that person trying to resist the gravity power but unfortunately all of them were wrong.


    If you were wondering why all of them were wrong then it was because sometimeter something unexpected happened and that already made most of them very afraid. Actually after that huge energy fluctuation that abyss human most likely did not have any strength to resist the gravity power so he already fell down on the ground at the same time as you can tell he was already dead because of the pressure from the gravity.


    But naturally at this time themander of the warrior association did not rx. He can already tell most likely his enemy uses some kind of technique and because of that previously that immense spiritual fluctuation got created. Now the thing was that he wanted to know what that technique was and what would happen because of that. Well, at this time he already told everyone not to move from their ce because that could be dangerous for everyone right now and if it was possible they should also leave that ce right now.


    Naturally Sam and the others instantly get that message from themander but everyone of them became quite surprised by that because they also did not know why themander suddenly told them to move away from that ce. But naturally they did not disobey the order and already moved further away from that ce.


    Well they just move away from the ce and in the next second everyone of them can feel something definitely happened to that previous ce and because of that everyone of them turned around to see what was happening right now. Everyone was surprised at what they saw after that because at this time the whole Sky got covered in dark clouds and not only that instantly the whole area got covered by spiritual pressure. Naturally that pressure came out from those dark clouds and because of that most of the Warriors already became afraid just after seeing that thing.


    At this time they instantly understand why themander previously told them to move backward because he already predicted something like this could happen and not only that this could be very dangerous for them.


    Well at this time while they are thinking about all of these instantly themander takes action and already begins to use his gravity power and has already created those gravity balls. Those gravity balls hold the power of gravity and where themander Sent those balls will naturally get affected by the gravity power.


    Not only that naturally he also uses the power of gravity to destroy everyone of those dark clouds but the thing was that at this time he could also see he was also unable to affect those dark clouds that much and that makes him very serious right now.


    ''It looks like I need to use my full power to destroy all those dark clouds. I am definitely sure that if I give the time to those dark clouds then they will bring disaster to this ce and I could also get affected by that and those dark clouds could also affect the main battlefield right now.''


    He thought that and naturally because of that he already decided to not to surpass his full power. Instantly if you look at that ce using any kind of spiritual vision technique then you can see a very big circle was created around that ce and the thing was that the source of that circle was themander right now.


    Sam already realized what this was because previously he also got to know about this from the old king and the Old king also told him about the danger of that thing. Actually that thing was the domain of the legendary great warriors and naturally anybody who will be present in the domain will get instantly killed if they did not have the sufficient strength to protect themselves.


    Naturally right now themander is also using the power of the domain and he just keeps increasing the range of the domain. First the domain spread around 5 km but then it began to increase and increase andter it already began to affect the whole 50 km area right now. Fortunately, just after realizing that themander is going to use the domain power, everyone of those Warriors already begin to escape as quickly as they can and using their full power they are somehow able to escape from that ce and are already out of the range of the domain.


    Now the thing was that instantly every good and barrier-like thing was present in front of them and inside the world of the barrier was already bing gray. Actually that was the domain that they were looking at right now and also that gray color was the color of gravity.


    Even though at this time Sam and the others were out of the domain, they could still feel the danger and the danger was so powerful that it almost made them feel a chill in their backs. Unfortunately the thing was that right now they could only see a limited range inside the domain and because of that they couldnot tell what was happening with themander and what was the situation of those dark clouds.


    Fortunately at this time you can say only those 50 km area have those dark clouds and because of that when they came outside of the range they did not saw any of those dark cloud present in the sky and with that naturally they also became quite worried about thee on that because don''t know why but when previously those dark cloud suddenly appear on the sky it already giving them a bad feeling.


    ______________________


    "Gravito!!!!"


    Everyone of those Warriors outside of the domain just only heard that shout and naturally they could tell it was themander who was shouting that. Instantly the whole domain begins to shine in gray color and that shining just keeps increasing and sometimeter that already makes them close their eyes because of that powerful light.


    At this time even though they were unable to see anything they could instantly feel pressure on their body and that pressure also kept just increasing and increasing. Sometimeter that pressure already makes them fall down on the ground and even though they are trying to raise the pressure they are unable to do that except thoseary grade Warriors and Sam.


    Naturally Sam at this time already coated his whole body with the origin spiritual energy and because of that that power of gravity and the power of the dark spiritual energy wasn''t able to affect his body and he wasn''t feeling that much pressure at that time.


    Everyone of them stay like that for sometime and suddenly the pressure already got vanish from that ce and not only that everyone of them could also feel the light that make them blind already begin to faded away so sometimeter they will naturally will able to open their eyes.


    10 minutester when they opened their eyes, all of them became speechless just when they saw what was in front of them.

 Chapter 550 550 - Hoping For The Reinforcement

    ?


    10 minutester when they opened their eyes, all of them became speechless just when they saw what was in front of them. The whole area they see right now in front of them has already been destroyed by the previous attack of themander. You can say right now all of them as the whole ce got destroyed and because of that other than the smokeyer that was already created in front of them, they are unable to see anything at this time.


    Even in that smokeyer you can say they can see the area around them but are destroyed because of the previous attack of themander or the previous attack from those dark clouds. Right now every one of them wanted to make sure that themander was safe and he did not receive any kind of damage at this time. Because of this most of the warriors from the warrior association already became very panicked right now to see what happened to themander, but naturally sometimeter every one of them got to see what was the situation in front of them.


    In front of them, they can see the whole area almost destroyed, and not only that but at this time a person is also flying in the sky. First of all, they previously did not get to see what happened to that abyss human because right now every one of them was quite worried about themander. Actually previously when themander used the domain it already covered the whole area and because of that nobody was able to see what was happening inside the domain.


    Because of this, you can say none of them was sure of the condition of the Abyss human. But sometimeter when theyer of smoke faded away every one of them could see what was the situation inside of the ce and at this time naturally themander already deactivated the domain. All of them can see the Abyss human just lying down on the ground without any kind of response so naturally all of them are thinking that he is already dead right now.


    On the other hand, there was amander who was still flying in the sky and at this time all of them could observe the situation of themander who did not receive that much damage. Even though those dark clouds were very dangerous, because themander used that domain he already controlled the full situation and also using his full power he already destroyed all of those dark clouds.


    Because of that themander right now is flying in the sky without receiving any kind of damage. After seeing this Sam and the others already be very rxed. The thing was that at this time every one of them was thinking about going to the main battlefield to support those other Warriors and every one of these reinforcements that came to the battlefield. Because of this, you can say right now none of those Warriors said anything and after just getting orders from themander, all of them went directly toward the battlefield.


    Sam was also very curious about the situation of themander but naturallypared to the situation of themander he was very worried about the main battlefield for naturally he wanted to join the main battlefield as quickly as he could. With this the moment he got the order from themander he did not waste a single second and directly began to go toward the battlefield with those other Warriors.


    At this time themander also did not exin anything to those warriors and because of this they also did not ask anything of him and just silently went toward the main battlefield using their full speed. But you can say at this time every one of them was sure that the legendary grade Abyss human was already dead, also because of this the dark clouds around that ce were unable to spread around the hold battlefield right now.


    First of all, you can say that after the domain got deactivated every one of them already looked at the sky to see those dark clouds but the thing was that when they looked at the sky they did not see any kind of dark clouds in the sky so naturally anybody could tell themander already destroy all those dark clouds. Because of this all of them at that time became quite rxed and with that, they naturally focused on the main battlefield, and the moment they got orders from themander they did not waste a single second.


    _____________________


    On the main battlefield,


    Previously as you know the human Warriors and those supporters of the human Warriors had the advantage in the main battlefield but the thing was that after some timeter every one of them was at a disadvantage because of the increased number of enemies. Actually, sometimeter many more enemies began toe to the main battlefield, and that made every one of those human Warriors and the supporters face a disadvantage.


    Most likely every one of those warriors previously did not appear on the battlefield because they were also waiting for the right situation to join the battlefield. Sometimeter when the situation was very Dangerous and many of theirrades had already been killed, they finally decided to join the main battlefield, and because of that the situation already be the opposite as they got advantage in that situation.


    The kings at this time only focused on thoseary grade Abyss humans and because of that they were also unable to help those other Warriors who already were in a dangerous situation and because of that sometimeter most of them already got dead. But the thing was that sometimeter even in a dangerous situation they suddenly felt an awesome aura of other Warriors.


    At this time for a moment, you can say the human king and the others got Serious for a moment, but in the end, everyone realizes that those Warriors are alsoing to the battlefield to help them. If you are wondering how they were able to know about this then it was because every one of the Warriors who could use the long-distance attack already uses their full power to attack all those enemies.


    Because of that, you can say those Warriors became sure that those were the people who came to that ce to support them. The thing was that on the first day unable to tell who was those warriors but when they got close to that ce every one of them about their origin. The thing was that most of them were the enemy of the humans but still, they wereing toward that ce, and at the same time they were also attacking those Toron people. That naturally surprised most of the human Warriors but on the next second day focused on the battlefield.


    You can say because of the arrival of those new Warriors, the situation once again became in the favor of the human Warriors and all of their supporters at this time. Their Enemies right now are also aware of that so naturally they decided to take action against it because they also knew if they fought like this then it would be very dangerous for them so because of that most of those enemy Warriors decided to use their trump card or you can say those artifacts that they got previously.


    Not everyone uses those artifacts at the same time because they also know that they will also receive a side effect when the 5 minutes are over so naturally not everyone wants to use them at once, you can say every one of those enemy Warriors is also waiting for their reinforcement. But even though they were waiting for very long they did not see any type of reinforcementing out of the danger zone and naturally because of that many of them also got distracted and every one of them also wondered why the hell no Monster came toward the battlefield to help them.


    Even the Toron king who was fighting the human king right now also thinking about this because he already decided with the help of those dark humans and Abyss humans they would naturally win this war and also the Abyss humans already told him previously that even a legendary grade Abyss human will be joining the battlefield so naturally he also waiting for that person.


    First of all he became sure that none of those old kings who were able to break through to legendary grade came to the battlefield and because of that he also became quite happy that with the help of that legendary grade Abyss human they could easily kill their enemy.


    But unfortunately for that person because many of those Monsters and those dark humans will be able toe to the battlefield because all of them right now are dead. Well you can say that previously he telepathicallymanded some of his Warriors to use those artifacts. Actually with this he wanted to buy more time so that the reinforcement arrived at that time.

 Chapter 551 551 - What Happened To Them?

    It looks like the Toron king and all those other supporters already realize something happened to those Abyss humans. Because of this until now they cannot see any trace of any Monstering toward that ce and not only that at this time they are also unable to feel any type of energy fluctuation. At this time most of them already remember the energy fluctuation that they previously felting from the distance.


    At first it wasn''t that powerful energy fluctuation but after sometime suddenly a huge energy fluctuation also got felt by them. At this time naturally those human Warriors and the supporters of the human Warriors already get very worried about the situation but on the other hand you can say Toron king and he subordinate did not worry about the situation as they think that most likely the energy activation got created by the Abyss humans.


    Because of this everyone already thought that sometimeter they will get reinforcement and help from those Monsters but unfortunately it''s already 1 hour but they still did not receive any kind of help and with that they are also thinking that most likely something happened to those Monsters and those abyss humans.


    ''What the hell happened? Why are none of the monstersing out of the danger zone to help us? ''


    You can say the Toron king now thinking all of this question but unfortunately he did not know any answer to that and the thing was that because he was fighting the human king he was also unable to go toward that direction to see what happened.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry you will not receive help from anyone."


    Most likely the human King already knew that he was waiting for the help from those Monsters and those Abyss humans. Because of this he instantly said that to him and the moment he said that the Toron king already realized something most likely happened and most likely this human king was behind all of this. He already realized most likely the human King already got to know about this information and because of that he also sent people too at that ce.


    While thinking all of this he got slightly distracted and the human King uses that chance to send him backward and not only that at the same time as you can see in electric Dragon already trying to attack him. Fortunately he was already able to stabilize his condition and in the next second he created an Energy barrier in front of him.


    That energy very year is still unable to block the full attack from that lightning Dragon and already that dragon broke the Energy barrier and just about to hit him.


    "Boom!!!"


    Naturally at that close distance he was unable to do anything and got hit by that lightning Dragon. But not only that, at the same time he already tried to use his healing technique to heal those injuries because he needed to be in top condition to find the human king. On the other hand the human King also wasn''t staying ideal and already created many lightning spears and lightning bolts. Everyone of those attacks came from the sky and the human king right now continuously attacked his enemy so that his enemy did not get any time to react.


    Naturally at this time the enemy King most likely already realizes the danger and because of this he instantly uses his technique or you can say his secret technique to get away from that ce into a safe ce. But still you can say he wasn''t able to escape that far away and the human King already found his location.


    ''Shit¡­ it things going on like this then we would be really lost in this war and most likely I would get killed by this person,''


    At this time you can say the Toron king also realized that right now most likely he needed to use thecards that he did not use previously to win the war. First of all he already realized that most likely he won''t be receiving any help from those Monsters and those Abyss humans. So now he needed topletely depend on himself and all the supporters.


    Instantly he created a powerful energy beam and shot that toward the human king. Well actually the Toron king could use the Earth power. Naturally that energy beam was the earth beam that could easily turn anything into sand. But the thing was that the human King already escaped from that ce and also at the same time he counterattacked with a lightning bolt. The thing was thatpared to that Toron king you can say the human king was now in a better condition because the whole area got covered by dark clouds and naturally he was easily able to summon lightning attacks from those dark clouds.


    On the other hand it wasn''t that the Toron king was at a disadvantage because as right now they were standing in the earth and as you know because he could control the element of earth he can also control the earth beneath the foot of the human being. But actually the human King was also very careful about that and the moment he realized the enemy King wanted to use that move he already began to fly in the sky and also at the same time he would keep attacking the enemy king until the enemy king did not force them to escape from that ce.


    On the other hand this time suddenly as you can see an Earth wall appears in front of the enemy king and not only that suddenly a hand that was created by the earth element is already going toward the human king and trying to catch him. But naturally before that hand touched the human king he already swung his lightning sword toward that hand and with that the handpletely got destroyed and not only that the human King did not stay ideal they are and already began to go toward that enemy king using his full speed.


    Naturally the enemy King also realized the motive of the human king and the moment he saw the human Kinging toward his direction he quickly gathered arge amount of energy into his hand and then instantly shot the earth beam toward the human king. But the human King also prepared for that and directly swung his lightning sword toward that Earth beam and as you can see instantly a huge impact also got created by that sh.


    But both of them did not stop there as the human King already began to approach the enemy King while the enemy king kept attacking him like this. On the other hand, as you can tell, not just the human King created those powerful impacts but his supporters like the Oni king and those other kings also created that much impact while they were also fighting thoseary grade enemies.


    But the thing was thatpared to before right now the situation was very different with the help of those newly arrived Warriors. Because they also haveary grade warriors and many powerful Epic grade Warriors. Because of these the human king and the others also weren''t that concerned about the situation of their soldiers in the battlefield because they were also getting help from those Warriors and with that the situation already became differentpared to before.


    Right now on the other hand those newly arrivedary grade Warriors handle those people who forcefully break through toary grade using the artifact. But naturally that would be very bad if they did not receive the help from those warriors who just arrived on that ce. At this time you can even see those elves, dwarfs, moon elves, Dog humans, etc.


    Naturally many of them were the enemy of the humans but still they appear here to support them and also helping those human Warriors to fight their enemy really make most of the Warriors very confused. First of all everyone wants to ask those people why they suddenly appear in the ce and also why they are helping them. But naturally they could ask thatter as they needed to focus on the battlefield right now.


    On the other hand some of those Warriors also very worried about the situation in the danger zone because the previously already feel a huge amount of energy fluctuation and really for a second everyone of them thought that someone going to attack them using those kind of spiritual energy but unfortunately until now they did not receive any type of attack. so that really makes them very confused.


    Actually not only then but even their enemy also wanted to know the same thing but naturally as you can tell nobody was in the position to go toward that ce to see what was happening there.


    Now back to the Toron king, at this time you can say he was very serious about the situation. First you already realize that depending on those Monster wounds help them and because of them he already decided tomand everyone of those Warriors who received the artifact to use them.

 Chapter 552 552 - Serious situation

    <h4>Chapter 552 Chapter 552 - Serious situation</h4>


    "Everyone of you quickly uses the artifact. We won''t be receiving help from those Monsters. So we need to depend on ourselves."


    At this time the Toron king instantly said that to everyone and naturally after hearing that everyone of those people who had the artifact did not waste a single second. One by one suddenly a huge energy fluctuation got created because of those Warriors and everyone of them using the artifact right now. Naturally as you can tell, suddenly those Warriors who were just about to attack them or near those people also got startled by the sudden energy fluctuation.


    But that wasn''t the main matter because in the next game everyone of those Warriors became worried about the situation Because they can already see the energy fluctuation of those people just keep increasing and increasing and at the same time their power also increasing. You can say that everyone of those peak Epic grade Warriors already begin to break through to the next grade.


    But that wasn''t over yet because even thoseary grade people like the Toron king also use them?and naturally they are also creating huge energy fluctuations right now. The oni king, human king and the others kings also got startled but naturally at the same time everyone of them realized what happened to those people. They can already see the power level of those people just beginning to increase and naturally everyone of those people also contains dark energy in their body because of the artifact right now. Naturally the dark spiritual energy makes everyone go berserk.


    "Roar!!!!!"


    At the same time many of those enemy Warriors begin to roar like a mad animal and at the same time if you look at their eyes then you will see all of their eyes turn red light those Monsters present in that zone. Instantly those people began to attack those Warriors who were very close to them and naturally not everyone of those warriors was able to react on time.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Some of them already died because of the sudden attack from the enemy while some of them already got seriously injured. Well the thing was that even the human king and the others also had the same problem when they got suddenly attacked by those people. Naturally after using those dark artifacts everyone of their enemy became more powerful and that wasn''t good for the human king and his supporters.


    This instantly sent the human King backward but fortunately he was already able to stabilize the condition and then also created an Energy barrier in front of him. But in the next second as you can tell the Energy barrier got easily broken by the Toron king. Even though the dark energy affected the minds of those people, still for thoseary grade people the rate of the affection wasn''t that much and because of these they can still think properlypared to those other Warriors.


    So right now in front of the human King, as you can tell, the Toron king wanted to kill him at any condition and because of this he did not waste a single second and continuously began to attract him. He already broke the Energy barrier and already came in front of the human king. Even though the human King already reacted and swung his sword, it looked like the reaction speed of the Toron king also increased and because of this he was able to dodge that attack.


    But that wasn''t over as the human King already prepared for him and instantly an electric zone got created and electricity began to spread around from that electric zone or you can say the lightning zone. But before those lightning could hit the Toron king, he instantly coated his whole body with the dark spiritual energy and because of that most of the electricity or you can say the lightning got sucked by the dark spiritual energy. The main characteristic of the dark spiritual energy was that it could absorb any type of element that got created by the normal spiritual energy.


    But naturally the human King wasn''t going to stay like this as he already created distance between him and his enemy. And at the same time as you can see the sword of the human King begin to blow more brightly than before and the electricity or you can say the lightning present in his sword also begin to increase morepared to before. Right now the condition was very serious for human kings and the other Warriors and they also understand that they need to kill their enemy at this time with their full strength because nobody could give them the guarantee that they will be able to survive for 5 minutes.


    Actually the same thing is also happening with the Oni king. As he already begins to use his full strength and because of that as you can tell his spear also begins to glow. Normally the Oni King likes to fight with the fist. But at the same time he also mastered the spear techniques so naturally in this condition he was going to use the spear technique.


    Wasting no time he quickly attacked his enemy just as the human king and his enemy already created an Energy barrier and at the same time as you can tell the enemy was also preparing an attack. It did not even take a second for that enemy to shoot a dark ball toward the Oni king. Oni king at this time already prepared for that and the moment that dark ball just came close to him he already counterattacked using his meteor fist.


    "Boom!!!!"


    A huge explosion got created because of that sh but naturally the enemy wasn''t going to stay ideal and even though he got affected by the impact he was still able to create two more dark balls and shoot that toward the Oni king.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Once again Oni king was able to counter attack one of them but the next dark ball just about to hit him when he somehow was able to dodge that but still got affected by the impact that suddenly got created in front of him. The moment that dark ball hit the ground it instantly created a huge explosion and naturally powerful impact also got created by that. First of all you should know that everyone of those impacts that get created by the dark balls also have dark spiritual energy present in them and because of thispared to any of your normal impact those impacts good affected everyone of those warriors.


    But fortunately the Oni king did not receive that many injuries as his full body was full of strength and because of that his physique was also very strong. So that amount of dark spiritual energy is only able to damage his body and it will only take his one or two health points.


    At this time those newly arrived Warriors helped those other Warriors to fight those people who suddenly became that much powerful in the main battlefield. Fortunately they also haveary grade Warriors with them as they handle those people who also broke through toary grade. First of all only a few of them were able to break through but then right now the number of those people already increased and because of this everyone of thoseary grade Warriors was also feeling the pressure.


    Aaron, Kyle and the other guild leaders are also having the same situation where they are right now facing those enemies who break through toary grade. Actually if normally those people break through then it was impossible for Aaron and the others to fight those people but the thing was that those people broke through using the artifact and because of that you can say Aaron and the other still able to fight those people but naturally to handle one of those enemy almost needed five of those peak Epic grade Warriors.


    Also they needed to make sure that they did not get affected by those dark spiritual energy as those people already became insane and they keep attacking them with the dark spiritual energy. Naturally at this time everyone knows that the effect of those dark spiritual artifacts will be over after 5 minutes but they are also thinking the same thing. What is the inability to survive for that 5 minutes and because of this right now everyone is doing their base to kill their enemy or survive for at least 5 minutes.


    Only after 5 minutes you can say the situation will be over and the human kings and all those supporters will win this war as the side effect of the artifact will affect those enemies. But the thing was that even though enemies got affected by the dark spiritual energy , they also knew that they needed to finish the fight before the limit was over so everyone kept just using the dark spiritually non-stop while attacking their enemies non stop like this.

 Chapter 553 553 - Help arrived

    <h4>Chapter 553 Chapter 553 - Help arrived</h4>


    Sam and everyone of those other Warriors who are getting close to the battlefield already can feel the sudden increase in energy fluctuation. First of all, everyone is very familiar with that type of energy fluctuation as they already experienced that a few seconds ago where those people from the abyss world use those artifacts to increase their power and also naturally that energy fluctuation got created because of the dark Spiritual energy.


    So the moment everyone realized that they became more worried about the situation of the main battlefield and they once again increased their speed. Fortunately everyone of thoseary grade Warriors and that legendary Warrior is already using their full power and naturally they will reach the battlefield faster than before.


    So like Sam, The other Warriors at this time are just hoping thoseary grade warriors and themander quickly reach the battlefield because they will be really a great help in that battle and because of their help naturally every Warriors would be able to kill their enemy faster.


    Actually they would need still 10 minutes to reach the main battlefield and the thing was that even if they were very far away from the main battlefield they could feel that energy fluctuation so naturally that made them more worried about the situation. But at this time all the Warriors from the warrior association told him that they didn''t have to worry because themanders and everyone of those leaders most likely already reached the main battlefield right now so the situation would be good for the humans and those other supporters of the humans.


    Actually they were right because right now themander and everyone of those leaders already reached the main battlefield. Why could they already see those Toron people and their supporters using the dark artifact and because of that everyone of them became more powerful and also became more wild. Naturally all of this is happening because of the dark spiritual energy that is affecting their mind.


    But the important thing was that right now the situation of the battlefield already changed and the humans and those other Warriors were in a very disadvantageous situation. Even though right now the healing team is trying their best to help those Warriors but unfortunately they still weren''t strong enough and also because the number of thoseary grade enemies already increased. That was the reason that the situation was very dangerous for those Warriors.


    Naturally the moment those Warriors from the warrior association and themander realize the situation they did not sing a single second to participate on the main battlefield. At this time everyone of those leaders went towards Epic grade Warriors to help them in their battle and also naturally they could see many people already got seriously injured and many of them already close to death, so naturally they also needed to help those people.


    You can say at this time themander already told them to help those people while he will be the one who takes care of all those powerful enemies present in the battlefield. Instantly he did not waste a single second and created his domain once again. But that wasn''t it because as you can see the range of the domain just kept increasing and increasing and sometimeter it covered the whole battlefield right now.


    Naturally for a moment everybody who was fighting at the battlefield stopped to see what happened. Even though except those people who know about the domain the remaining people did not know what happened, they could still feel something most likely surrounding them and at the same time they also felt quite heavy.


    Not only that, at this time everyone could sense danger from every direction. Naturally even at this time those people who use the dark artifact also stop because they also feel the change happen. On the other hand the human king and the others also realize that and naturally they get very worried for a moment. Because for a moment they thought it was the reinforcement of the enemy but unfortunately everyone of them was wrong because even the Toron king became nervous the moment he felt that thing.


    First of all everyone already knew it was a domain and the second thing was that they could tell that domain was created by your true spiritual energy and no dark spiritual energy present in the domain so with that the human king and the others be rxed a little. But still as you can say it they became surprised and wanted to know who was that person who created that domain and covered the whole battlefield.


    On the other hand themander at this time after expanding his domain did not waste a single second to use his power and instantly everyone of those enemies who used the dark artifact already began to feel the pressure in their body and that wasn''t it because the pressure kept increasing and increasing. Naturally those other Warriors who did not get affected by the pressure really got speechless by that sudden incident but everyone of them knew that that was happening because of that thing that covered the whole battlefield right now.


    Not only that at this time those Warriors also noticed many more new Warriors who suddenly arrived on the battlefield and not only that at this time those people also helped everyone of those seriously injured Warriors. Even the healing team finally got the chance to heal those seriously injured Warriors. Using their full power they somehow stabilize the condition of those people but at the same time every one of them is also very curious about the situation right now.


    On the other hand you can say the Toron king after realizing what was happening already became nervous and most likely wanted to escape from that ce using his full power but unfortunately he did not get the chance to do that as suddenly a pressure hit him. Naturally that wasn''t your spiritual pressure as it was created by gravity so everyone felt the gravitational pressure.


    Even though using the dark spiritual energy he was trying to resist that power, unfortunately none of them were able to move from their ce as they were already pressed down in the ground right now because of that gravitational pressure. Everyone of them struggled using their full strength and naturally because of that you can also see their whole body got covered by the dark spiritual energy but unfortunately even with that condition none of them were able to do anything.


    Not only that at this time you can also see many of them already begin to cough blood and hear the sound of bone breaking. Naturally because of the gravitational power those people were unable to do anything and even their bones already begin to break because of that huge gravitational power that was created by a legendary grade Warrior.


    On the other hand themander if wanted then he could already killed everyone of those people wasting no time but the thing was that right now he could already till those people wasn''t in the condition to fight or do anything and naturally even though everyone of them trying to struggle but after 5 minutester they will get affected by the side effect of using the artifact so he just press them down in the ground while it giving those warriors the time to recover themselves.


    Naturally even though the human king and the others were very worried about the situation but when they realized that the person who uses the domain and attacking those enemies wasn''t nning to do anything to them they started to get quite rxed and also taking this chance they begin to heal themselves.


    Not only that at this time naturally the human king and the others notice those newly arrived people because everyone of them also releases as strong spiritual power as them. They could already see those people helping those seriously injured Warriors and with that they also recognise those people as they have the logo of the warrior association. So naturally because of that everyone of them realized the warrior association also finally made a move and because of that the situation got handled.


    But the most surprising thing was that who could have thought a legendary grade warrior would also take action in this war and by sensing the power and the range of the domain naturally belong to a powerful legendary grade Warrior. Actually everyone of those types of Warriors could use the power of domain but the thing was that the more they will increase their power the more the range of the domain will increase and the more it will be dangerous.


    When they felt the dangering from every direction they could already tell how dangerous that domain was and how big the range was that domain. With that everyone of them became sure that naturally it was a very powerful Warrior who was taking action.

 Chapter 554 554 - Going separately

    <h4>Chapter 554 Chapter 554 - Going separately</h4>


    Finally after 5 minutes you can see everyone of those people who previously used the dark artifact already begin to get affected by the dark spiritual energy as the time limit of those artifacts is already over and naturally they will be receiving much more side effectspared to any of those dark humans or those Abyss humans.


    So if you look at those people then you will see suddenly those people begin to lose blood and not only that it looks like someone also sucking their flesh from their body as they are losing that and sometimeter everyone of those people have a skeleton like appearance. Right now you can say it seems they will not be able to survive after that and definitely at this time the warrior association or any of those other Warriors won''t be helping those people.


    Naturally the Epic grade people were the most affected because they did not have that much strong power in their foundation like thoseary grade Warriors and naturally because of that they also got mostly affected. On the other hand even though the Toron king and the others also get affected by this, naturally their condition was much better. Not only that at the same time if you look at those Epic grade Warriors then it seems slowly those people losing their vitality but unfortunately that wasn''t the case with thoseary grade Warriors.


    Even though all of them also lost blood and also lost their flesh but sometimeter you can say it became stable and naturally right now they did not lose their vitality like those other Warriors.


    On the other hand Sam and those other Warriors also finally reach that ce and naturally they also help alongside with the healing teams. You can say finally they were able to stabilize the condition of their Warriors and with that those people won''t die.


    ________________________


    "Don''t worry, naturally after getting all those reports we won''t just sit down. First of all they really did very Unimaginable things that we cannot expect and even though we have a branch present in their Kingdom we are still unable to know about anything. Naturally it was because the Toron king was doing all of this very carefully and also because of the ve cor, all of those ves were also unable to reveal anything.


    And the most important thing was that those people also collide with those Abyss humans. They already cross the limit the moment they do that and naturally we won''t just let go of those people like this. It was just that we were quitete to reach the ce or the situation would be much better. Naturally award associations alsopensate for that matter and everyone of those warrior''s family members who lost their life in this battle will also receivepensation from us.


    Even though you aren''t able to bring back those Warriors who died on the battlefield, we still hope that this could help those family members. Also beside the Toron kingdom, all of his supporters are also only receiving any help from our warrior association as they already enter the criminal list present in our Warrior association.


    The thing was that even some of those legendary grade warriors present in their Kingdom also wanted to take action but unfortunately the warrior association already took action before them and because of that many of them were able to participate in the main battlefield. Also you can say that every one of those people who also participated in this war indirectly or directly will naturally receive punishment from our Warrior Kingdom.


    On the other hand we will alsopensate everyone of those people who previously left their life as a ve inside of this Kingdom and also did not get the chance to reveal anything. Because of our carelessness those people suffer that much and naturally our Warrior association will take care of that."


    Well as you can tell thatmander right now was talking to the human king and the other king. First of all the human king and the others came to themander to thank him but naturally themander?told them that they doesn''t needed to thank him because it was the fault of the word association that they unable to get to know about this previously or the Toron kingdom and everyone already receive punishment from the warrior association.


    Now when the human king and the others were talking with themander on the other hand you can say Sam and the other Warriors helped everyone of those seriously injured Warriors right now to get better. But naturally they also were very tired and because the situation was already under control they also decided to rest for sometime.


    Finally the intense battle was over and they won that battle. On the other hand you can say Sam was very surprised when he came back to the main battlefield. Actually not only him but many other people also got surprised when they saw those many Warriors present in the battlefield and naturally the thing was that most of them also recognised them. Naturally most of those people were the enemy of them but still those people able toe to the battlefield and also helping them really shocked everyone very shocked.


    _____________________________


    Finally it was time to depart from that ce. Everyone of those people got invited into the human Kingdom to celebrate and naturally most of them already epted that but on the other hand those people who naturally were the enemy of humans did not ept that as they already left that ce with their Warriors. But still the human king and those other kings also showed their gratitude to them and naturally they also told them that if in the future those people needed any type of help they could ask them.


    On the other hand, right now Sam was also talking to the human king and the Oni King. Naturally he won''t go back to the human Kingdom because he still did not finish his journey and he still wanted to go back to the druid kingdom. At first the human king and the Oni King try to pursue to go back to the human kingdom or the Oni Kingdom, but unfortunately when they realize that Sam won''t go back, they just sighed.


    "Take care. First of all we really shoot thank you because if it wasn''t for you we would not be able to get to know about all that information and if it wasn''t for you we also won''t be able to get the real situation inside of the Toron kingdom. Naturally without you and all that information most likely we won''t be able to win this war as we won''t be able to get to know that those people also have connections with those abyss humans.


    It looks like those elves and the others decided to help us because their people also previously got captured by the Toron kingdom. It was you who helped them to escape from that ce and naturally because of that those people also helped us in the main battlefield and naturally as you can tell without their help mostly the situation could be more dangerous for us and the casualties most likely already greater than before.


    On the other hand you should stay careful because it looks like the Abyss humans are already affecting many events in our Terraria and many Kingdoms are also getting connected with those people. Most likely most of the people already know about your information and they should already spread that information to other ces. So naturally you can also get attacked by enemies anytime so with that you really need to take care all the time.


    Also as I told you before you should not go to those kingdoms who were the enemy of our human Kingdom because those people will attack you the moment they see you."


    Naturally the oni King and the human King saying all that to Sam and actually not only them but at the same time those other kings already came to Sam and began to thank him while showing their gratitude. Really everyone of them knows that if it wasn''t that they received help from Sam then the situation would be more dangerous. Everyone of them already told him that he shoulde to their kingdom as they already get to know that Sam was now wanting to visit most of the kingdom in Terraria.


    Sam naturally agrees with that and sometimeter after saying goodbye to everyone he already begins to leave that ce. But at the same time you can say that the human king and the other kings also already told their Warriors to get ready because they will also leave that ce. Naturally, everyone of them first goes back to their Kingdom andter when the human king invites them for the celebration they will also attend.

 Chapter 555 555 - Suprised

    <h4>Chapter 555 Chapter 555 - Suprised</h4>


    Sam did not even advance that much when something unexpected happened. Actually at the time not far from that ce he could see some people waiting for him. Actually he wasn''t sure at first if those people were waiting for him or not but those people just kept looking in his direction so naturally it looked like they were waiting for him and with that he really became curious.


    First of all those people were elf. So naturally he knows that he did not have any type of conversation with elves. Even though he previously rescued some of them from the Toron kingdom, then previously those Warriors already said thanks and expressed their gratitude so he became sure that those people weren''t waiting for him because of this. So the question was why were they waiting for him?


    Naturally wasting no time he directly began to advance toward that ce because he was also very curious to know about the motive of those people. Also all this time he was very careful about the surrounding area and he became sure that except those five people nobody present in the ce so with that he became sure those people did not have the intention to attack him.


    He already came in front of them where he could already see five faces that at first he was unable to remember properly but after looking at them very carefully he suddenly remembered about those people. If you are wondering how did he remember those people then it was because previously when he was in the druid kingdom that was the first time when he encountered those people who were in deep trouble and he decided to help them.


    That was his first time to see an elf, so because of these he was able to remember those 5 people but the thing was that he was unable to feel any type of familiarity with that other person who was also standing with them. Also by looking at that person he was unable to tell the age of that elf. First of all, as you know, every one of those Elf had a very long life so naturally you cannot tell their age by looking at them because all the time they maintain a younger appearance.


    Even though he was unable to tell the age of the person, he was sure that she was aary grade Warrior. So for a moment naturally Sam became very alert, also he was ready to use his concealment technique anytime even though he was feeling the mental headache. But if the situation requires him he will use that technique to escape from that ce as far as he can.


    Now back to the main matter, for almost 1 minute nobody talks to each other and just continuously looks at each other. Naturally both parties were observing each other and wanted to know about the hidden details of each other. But the most surprising thing for that elf was that even though she was very powerfulpared to Sam but still using her full power she was unable to get that much detail about Sam. It was like her observation technique getting blocked by some kind of superior technique and that naturally made her very curious to know why something like that was happening.


    Not only that at the same time she already knew that the other party already realized she was aary grade Warrior and because the human and the elves were a natural enemy she could also attack him anytime. But the thing was that the person in front of her always maintained a confident look and it was like even though he knew that she was powerfulpared to him, he still had the confidence in his power.


    "I was really surprised by your calm expression. Well wasting no time let''se back to the main matter. Naturally as you know your human and it are a natural enemy, and naturally we won''t be helping you in situations like this. But unfortunately you helped my people previously to escape from the Toron kingdom and not only that you also maintained that they were safe until they did not leave that ce safely.


    Also not only that you help my students previously in a dangerous situation and because of this as you can tell I am present here to show my gratitude alongside with my students who are the ones who wanted to meet you to show their gratitude."


    Naturally the women finish saying that all of her students came in front of him and then begin to thank him for the help. Who could have expected that they will receive help from a human Warrior and at the same time the human warrior did not use the chance to attack them. Naturally at the same time they already hear from the teacher that this human Warriors was the one who previously held their people to escape from the Toron kingdom.


    Now naturally after hearing all of this, all of them had a deep impression of this human Warrior and because of this, they really wanted to meet him. Previously after the war was finished they already talked to their teacher and their teacher also naturally agreed with that and because of this right now as you can see they meet Sam.


    At this time one elf suddenly gave him something. Naturally Sam at first did not take that and observe that thing using his observation technique. When he saw that it was just a storage ring he took that thing. At the same time he already looked inside of that storage ring and he became speechless because inside of the storage ring he could see armor, a technique scroll, many healing Potions, and a sword.


    Well naturally he did not care about the armor those other loot ept that techniques scroll. But he did not bring that out of the storage and curiously looked at that teacher of those elves.


    "Don''t worry, that is my gift for you for helping my people in a dangerous situation. So you don''t have to worry about anything and also this is the token that has my signature. In future if you have any problem with my people you can show them this token and with that they will naturally recognise that token as belonging to me."


    After saying that she also brought out a token and gave that to some. Sam after getting the token really became surprised because it was a really weird token. But at the same time when he observes that token using the observation technique he could see something special present in that token. His system calls him that aura signature, naturally that belongs to this elf warrior.


    With that both parties did not waste a second and then left that ce in a separate way. The elves already achieved their goal and because of that right now it was the time to go back to their home. While on the other hand as you can tell Sam naturally was very excited to look at that technique scroll. This was really a very long time since he get a thing like this aftering to Terraria. Even though at first he found one or two technique scrolls after killing those Monsters but unfortunately after that it became very hard for him to get a thing like that and also everyone of those technique scrolls wasn''t useful to him so naturally he also sold them in his system shop to get more gold coins.


    ___________________________


    "Teacher, what do you think about him?"


    While right now ra and her student are going back to their kingdom, one of them asks that question to her. Naturally hearing that question she did not get surprised and then began to give them the answer.


    "Well, you will find a really warrior like that person. Normally if you go in front of a person who was your enemy and also powerfulpared to you then naturally you will show some kind of alertness. But all this time he did not show anything like that and also had a confidence that he could escape anytime or even be able to fight back.


    Naturally that wasn''t the important matter, the important matter was that he decided to help you all and also those people who got captured by those Toron people. Not only that I already here many people of who got capture as a ve also were the enemies of humans but still that person decided to help everyone of them. Not only that, but they also protected them until they did not safely escape from that ce. Naturally it was that he did not care about those types of things and because of this he also previously helped those people even though he knows that most likely he won''t be receiving any help from them.


    I am not sure about his power but one thing I could tell that most likely he had that power to escape even when he faced a warrior like me who was far more powerful than him."


    ra at this time exins all of this to her student who also listens to all of these with interest. Naturally you can say that most likely the first time for all of them to see a human like this who did not care about the enemy.

 Chapter 556 556 - 1 Year Later,

    ?


    [1 yearter,]


    Right now in the human Kingdom, as you can see the people present there have already returned to normal life. Really one year ago many things happened to them and they faced many casualties but naturally they were able to return back to their normal life. Butpared to before, right now more people want to be strong warriors, so that they could also protect their own kingdom.


    Many kids take their training more seriously and also many strong warriors also appear in the human Kingdom. With that, naturally , even though they previously lost many of their Warriors in the war with those Abyss humans and those Toron kingdoms, still the power of the human Kingdom did not decrease as they still had those many powerful Warriors.


    On the other hand you can say that everyone still remembers about the previous war with those Toron kingdoms. Not only just those people but they also remember the war with those Abyss humans. Fortunately after that the human king and every citizen of the human Kingdom became very alert. The human King after that incident naturally took the security measure more seriously and he also searched around the whole Terraria to find out if there were other ces which also have the same condition like the Toron kingdom.


    Even the warrior association helped him with that matter but fortunately you can say that he did not find anything like that. But in that one year you can say many things also happen with the warrior association as they are able to find many Traitors who collide with those Abyss humans, and also help them to sacrifice the lives of the warriors. Naturally because the warrior association became more active they able to find those information about those people and they already punished most of those people and even though some of them still able to escape from the warrior association, but everyone of them already in the criminal list and the warrior association will use their full power to search for those people.


    Other than that, the warrior association with most of the kingdoms also begin their search for the Abyss humans. Naturally everyone knew they needed to eliminate those people to ensure the safety of the Terraria. Naturally at the same time they wanted to prevent the sacrifice ritual of those abyss humans, so that they cannot bring back those Demons.


    Now on the other hand 6 months ago, for the first time apetition was also being held in the Oni Kingdom. The warrior association was also part of thepletion. Human king, Oni king, Tiger king, Druid kingdom, and many other kingdoms also participate in thatpetition. Even the most surprising thing was that many warriors who were the enemy of the human Kingdom also participated in thatpetition.


    Naturally you can say that thatpetition was held because of the warrior association. Well actually the warrior association wanted to Motivate everyone of those Warriors through thatpetition to work hard and also to understand the power of their opponents. Naturally that was a huge step and that really worked. After thatpetition many things happened and many people began to take the training seriously because they naturally wanted to win the nextpetition.


    Nowing back to the main matter, if you look at the human Kingdom then you will see the whole human Kingdom begin to prepare themselves. Well previously it was announced by the warrior association that the nextpetition will be held after 6 months and that it will be held in the human Kingdom. Naturally even though many people did not wanted to enter the human Kingdom because of the safety risk but it was the warrior association who promise them that they will provide full safety for them and if any type of incident really happened to them by the human Warriors then it willpletely the responsibility of the human King to take the punishment.


    Well because of that even the human King was also preparing for the safety and because many people will being in his human Kingdom he was also preparing for the safety. Fortunately the warrior association was also helping the human Kingdom and also everyone of those people who will be entering the kingdom will get checked by the warrior association. You can say that at this time many people could take advantage of this situation to create chaos. Because of this, the warrior association will be in charge of those people. Everyone of those people who right now entering the human Kingdom naturally get checked by the warrior association truly and only when their identity gets confirmed by the warrior association, only then those people are able to enter the human Kingdom.


    On the other hand the human King already prepared many houses for those people who will being to the kingdom and he already prepared the stadium where thepetition will be held.


    Now if you are wondering about thepetition then naturally in thatpetition every one of those Warriors will be facing each other and like that the winner will be decided and the winner will get rewarded by the warrior association. But in thatpetition you need to follow many rules set by the warrior association and if anyone tries to break that rule they will get punished or could even get killed by the warrior association.


    Well you can say that because of the rule many people were also able to rx themselves and with that they could also be sure that nothing serious happened to their warriors. Also the main thing was that even the warriors from the warrior association also participated in thatpetition and naturally that was a huge thing for everyone of those warriors who were really very curious about those Warriors from the warrior association. Everyone really gets amazed when they realize the power of those Warriors and they also finally understand how powerful those warriors were from the warrior association.


    Now if you see the main gate of the human Kingdom then you will see a tough security also present there. Naturally that security was given by the warrior association and at the same time everyone of those people who wanted to enter the kingdom were getting checked by the warrior association.


    Naturally those Warriors have a different linepared to those normal people of the human kingdom or other Kingdom who wanted to enter the human Kingdom. Both parties are getting checked by the warrior association. Suddenly at this time a person came and stood behind the line of those Warriors who entered the human Kingdom.


    The strange thing was that the person was hiding his face. But naturally that wasn''t umon because many Warriors also did the same thing. But naturally when they get checked by the warrior association they need to reveal their Warrior ID card so that they can get checked by the warrior association.


    That person while standing in that line also observed his surroundings very carefully and the thing was that he was very surprised after seeing many people present there. Even though because of the mask nobody was able to see his expression, that warrior had a surprised expression. He can really tell most likely something going to happen in the human Kingdom and because of these he could see those many people and not only that many people from many different kingdoms also going to enter the human Kingdom and that was the most important thing that he became very curious about.


    But naturally he did not do anything and just stayed like that to wait for his turn to show his I''d. On the other hand he also became shocked when he saw those elves who were also present in the line to enter the human Kingdom. Even though it looks like those people really did not want to enter the human Kingdom and felt disguised just after looking at the human Kingdom but still those people present in the line to enter the human Kingdom.


    ''It looks like something really going to happen in the human Kingdom. I should have searched about that earlier beforeing here. Well I could just ask the human King about this but before that I really needed to eat something good aftering back here.''


    That person thought about this. On the other hand it took him 10 minutes to reach in front of the line and finally it was he who stood to show his ID card to those Warriors from the warrior association. Now that was also a shocking thing for him to see those warriors from the warrior association present there. Even though he was really curious about those people, he did not do anything and just when those people wanted to bring him out his identity card he did that, wasting a single second.


    After getting the identity card the person or you can say the warrior who checks the identity card begins to put his card on a device. It only takes 30 seconds to confirm if the ID card was real or not and if the identity present in that card was real or not.

 Chapter 557 557 - Surprised

    ?


    You can say when those people from the warrior association checked the ID card they became shocked for a second. First of all they already recognised the person who gave them the ID card and the thing was that person was already a famous figure in the Warrior association because of his achievement.


    At this time If you look at the system screen of those people then you will see their name and that was showing Sam Kainer. Naturally it was the same who finally came back to the human Kingdom and you can say all these one year he did many things for the warrior association and because of this he became a famous figure in the Warrior association.


    Actually the thing was that after the previous battle with those Toron kingdoms, you can say everyone from the warrior association got to know from those other people that even for a legendary grade Warrior it was very hard to find Sam when he used his concealment technique.


    It is a very important thing for those people and because of this even the higher ups of the warrior association like themanders already decided to provide some important mission to him. Naturally Sam did not reject those missions andpleted them. The thing was that not every time he epted those kinds of missions from the warrior association as he animatedly visited most of the Kingdom present in the Terraria.


    So like this in this one year hepleted many missions of the warrior association which event caused a huge shock for everyone of those warriors from the warrior association. First of all he would be alone when he was doing those missions and also the second thing was that he had a 100% sessful rate in every one of those missions. So naturally because of that many people also begin to admire him.


    You can say in those missions there were many missions higher he needed toplete missions rted to the Abyss humans and those dark humans. Actually not only the warrior association even when he visited a Kingdom and the king realized that fact he also asked for help. Most of the time everyone of those Kings wanted to help him to find if they really had a traitor among them or not.


    First of all as you know he was an outsider and not many people know about him. So this also a huge advantage for him to find out about the traitors. Everyone of those Kingdom who are giving the mission know that most likely Sam also has a powerful observation technique like his concealment technique that gives him the ability to observe any person far better than their own technique.


    Well every time Sam did this type of mission he did not reject them. First of all even though he wasn''t from the Terraria but after staying there for that long he already begin to consider that ce as his second home and also he knows that even though other than those abyss humans, they have still many problem and many danger but if they ignore those people from the Abyss world, then it will be a disaster for the Terraria. Actually not only Terraria but you can say that it could be a danger for others who also awaken spiritual energy.


    So because of this Sam never rejected when Mission was rted to those matters. On the other hand you can say that in that one year he already visited most of the kingdom of the Terraria except those Kingdom whopletely closed themselves and did not have any rtion with the outside world. The thing was that even the warrior association did not have ess to those Kingdom because they did not want any outsider toe to their kingdom.


    But still he received many missions rted to those types of kingdom to investigate them if they had any kind of connection with the Abyss world or not. So you can say that even with that he visited many of those types of kingdom and naturally he already founded a Kingdom like that who most likely had the connection with the Abyss world. Naturally after giving that information to the warrior association the warrior association already took action and already eliminated those Kingdom and everyone of those people who were the main culprit.


    Now back to the main matter as you can tell he was a famous figure for everyone of those warriors of the warrior association, those Warriors who already looked at his information already looking at his direction with a respective look on their face. Wasting no time for every one of those people who present at the gate to check his identity already.


    Naturally that surprised and even shocked many people who were also behind that line. Everyone had many questions about that person and also why those people from the warrior association saluted him like that. But none of them said anything at this moment because they also know that even if they ask they won''t be able to get any information from those people who were from the warrior association.


    Everyone begins to look at that person who is standing there while wearing a full body ck armor along with a ck mask also present on his face. First of all everyone realizes that person could be a warrior from the Warrior association or that could be a person who has achieved many achievements.


    On the other hand Sam after looking at those people did not get surprised because he already got used to that kind of behavior from the warrior. Well you can say that many times hepleted missions which were very dangerous but naturally he did not take any help from the warrior association andpleted that mission .


    There was a time when he also got contacted by onemander of the warrior association and that person told him that they wanted to hold an award ceremony for him but unfortunately he rejected that Idea and told that person that he wanted to continue his adventure.


    After getting his ID back Sam did not wested single second to leave that ce as it looked like those people behind him already became very curious about his identity and even those people who were already able toe inside of the human Kingdom also looked at his direction curiously. As he did not want to be a high profile person so he decided to leave that ce while using the concealment technique.


    ____________________


    "What are you telling me the truth? Really came back to our Kingdom?"


    "Yes, yes sir we just got the report from those Warriors and they told us that that person just entered. Unfortunately we did not know the current location of him as he had already disappeared from that ce."


    Naturally right now one of the elders of the human Kingdom tells all of this to the human king who after hearing all of this bes surprised as he cannot believe that Sam finally came back to the human Kingdom.


    "Haha.. it looks like he already finished his journey and because of this he decided toe back. Well don''t worry about not finding him as if did not want to show his location nobody would be able to find him. Also it looks like we did not get to search for him because he was already in front of our royal pce. Quickly go tell the chief to prepare some good food for him. Also go call Oni King and the others."


    After saying that, the human King did not waste a single second to go toward the main hall of the Royal pce. It looks like Sam has already arrived and was waiting for him right now. If you are wondering about the Royal Guard and other people then naturally they are unable to locate him as he directly appears in that ce.


    "Haha¡­ Sam it is good to see you. I already heard about your achievement from the warrior association. I really cannot believe our Sam will be a famous figure like this that even the warrior association respected you. Finally you finish your adventure and with that you should stay here."


    The human king already appears in the main hall and after looking in his direction he already begins to side with all of these while smiling. Naturally at this time the royal guards and the other people who also present in the Royal pce already realized about the arrival of this new person but at the same time everyone of them also got surprised when they saw the king smiling like that while talking to them.


    Naturally at first none of them were able to hear the name of the person but when they thought about that carefully they already realized what the human king had said previously. Only then did everyone realize who was that person who came there like this. Naturally everyone of them is also very familiar with that person because previously that person also stayed in the royal pce for a few days and he was also a hero for all of them.

 Chapter 558 558 - Meeting Others

    ?


    "Haha¡­ Sam, it is good to see you again, my boy. Really you became a famous figure among the younger generation from my kingdom. You don''t even know how much you influence those people and really right now everyone of them also wanted to be like you who wanted to travel around the world and solve more missions like you.


    Not only that, they also became focused on their training and cultivation to be more powerful so that they could also solve many impossible missions easily."


    At this time you can see the Oni king already came out from the guest room and alongside other kings. Naturally all of them wanted to meet Sam and because of that they quickly came to the main hall where the human king and Sam were talking about various things.


    After looking at the Oni king, Sam smiled. Also at this time you can say that Sam was already using the observation technique to look at the status of everyone present in that ce and the thing was that he could already tell that everyone became more powerfulpared to before. Right now after looking at the status he could tell most likely every one of them is very close to bing a peakary grade Warriors except Oni King and human king.


    Naturally he did not meet all the kings so he cannot be sure about their level but right now in front of him 5 of them present and ept the human king and the Oni King, the three of them were very close to reach that level. You can say not only him but those kings aftering to that ce also doing the same thing and everyone of them became very surprised because they cannot tell anything about his power.


    Naturally the human king and the Oni king know why they are unable to feel anything from Sam. But those other kings did not know anything about that and because of this they also became surprised. At this time the human King told Sam to go to the dining room because he was already preparing food for him while the other kings were also going with him in the dining room. You can say that it was time for dinner so naturally they were also quite hungry and because of this, the human King already ordered the royal chef to prepare arge banquet for them.


    At this time the human king and the Oni king begin to ask him about his missions that hepleted. First of all you can say that the warrior association did not reveal that match about all those missions that hepleted so nobody still did not know about those missions. But you can say everyone knows that all of those missions were hard toplete. Because of this as you can tell, everyone is also very curious to know about that.


    Naturally Sam did not hide anything and began to tell about those missions that hepleted in this year but at the same time you can say he did notpletely tell them about all those missions because even he also knew that he cannot reveal all that information that was very important.


    Naturally at this time the human king and the others were really surprised one by one when they began to hear about those missions. Naturally, who could have thought that he would do that kind of mission and in the end he was still able to seed on those missions even though missions were very dangerous and he could also lose his life in that process. Really it was very fortunate that he had a technique that made him non traceable and really using that as his advantage hepleted those missions.


    __________________________


    "Ohh¡­ most likely because you justpletely focused on your travel and those missions you did not know anything about thepetition. Actually you can say after that previous war the warrior association became more active and they came up with this n. Naturally nobody was against that idea because that will also increase the knowledge of those Warriors about the world and those other kingdoms.


    It also puts pressure on them so that they can prepare themselves and win thatpetition to get the reward. Naturally in the previouspetition everyone already saw those intense battles between those Warriors and those Warriors also gained a lot of knowledge about their opponent and also knowledge about the world. They met many Warriors who had different types of powers and even if they had advantage against those Warriors but in the end they also lost against those kinds of Warriors.


    Now after thatpetition you can say the warrior association already decided that 6 monthster the nextpetition will be held in the human Kingdom. But after thispetition the nextpetition will be held one yearter and the ce will be selected by the warrior association. I can say that most likely through this kind of process the warrior association also wanted to motivate all the Warriors to get powerful because as you know we have the enemy who wanted to bring back those demons. into our Terraria.


    But you can say that after the previouspetition every Warriors who previously participated in thatpetition became more serious about thepetition and all these months they began to prepare themselves.Also if you are wondering why all the kings were able toe to the human Kingdom while leaving their own kingdom then because recently the warrior association also revealed a fact that made everyone very surprised.


    Most likely you also know about that and the thing was that the teleportation portals that could easily send anyone to anywhere easily. To activate that portal we need to use our spiritual energy and the more distance we want to travel the more spiritual energy will get consumed. Because of this, I and The other kings were able toe to the human Kingdom.


    Well you can say everything will use the teleportation portal toe here while the Warriors wille here through normal process. Naturally nobody wanted to risk anything before thepetition so they wanted to save their spiritual energy and did not want to use the teleportation portals.


    Nowe back to you I really became surprised, when previously I get to hear that you started to ept mission from the warrior association directly and also youpleted many hard mission. Naturally at first nobody thought about that much but after the warrior association also began to reveal the news about a warrior named Sam who was able to do that kind of mission without a team and he had a 100% sess rate on everyone of those missions.


    So naturally my people after getting no about you became more surprised and also excited. They really wanted to meet you and wanted to ask about your adventure. Livia also wanted to follow the same path as you but fortunately I was able to stop her from doing that. Sigh, really it looks like she got very influenced by your adventure and wanted to be famous like you throughpleting those kinds of hard missions.


    Actually you don''t know but it looks like not only you but even we also begin to get missions from the warrior association directly that they did not post on the warrior association. Naturally they weren''t doing that because those missions were very dangerous and they wanted to select the perfect team toplete those missions."


    After finishing their lunch the Oni king began to tell him about all of these and really after getting knowledge about all those matters Sam also became surprised. Who could have thought that the warrior association would arrange apetition like this Where anybody could participate until he did not reach theary grade. Not only that at the same time they also provide powerful resources to the winner of thepetition and naturally the previous winner already received a very important thing that almost makes everyone of those Warriors present there to be envious of that person.


    Well he got the chance to enter the spiritual pool for 1 month and you can say The Spiritual pull of the warrior association was a very good ce to cultivate. In that ce the absorption rate will be double and naturally that was a very good ce to absorb those spiritual crystals.


    Not only that, the spiritual pool also helps you instantly stabilize the foundation of your body and with that you do not have to worry about stabilizing and bing familiar with your new power.


    Well if you were wondering why Sam did not know anything about these, then at that time he was doing a dangerous mission where he needed to enter a Kingdom secretly to search if the king had any kind of connection with the Abyss world or not. Naturally the king most likely got to know something about this and because of this the security of that Kingdom became doubled and also the king became more alert. So in that kind of situation really he cannot get distracted by any other thing so because of this he did not get to know about any kind of information about thepetition.

 Chapter 559 559 - Flashback

    ?


    Even though he heard news about this but unfortunately at that time he became busy once again with a new mission. So because of this he did not get that much time to investigate this news and also the warrior association did not tell him anything about thepetition.


    Now came back to main matter,


    Sam goes toward the guest room that the human King already prepared for him in the Royal pce. Even though Sam told him that he did not have to do that because more kings wille to the Royal pce and naturally the whole Royal pce will be busy. But still the human King already prepared the guest room so naturally he was now going toward that guest room.


    At this time you can say that he was thinking about some questions that after hearing the previous news came to his mind. Naturally, all of those kings who did not like the humans and did not want toe to the human Kingdom will note inside of the Royal pce. So where will they live at that time? The human King beside him answers the questions.


    Actually you can say not only the king but even the warrior association is also preparing for this and naturally everyone of those people will stay inside of the warrior association. Naturally even if the human King went to a different Kingdom who was the enemy of his Kingdom, naturally he would also decide to stay with the warrior association. First of all if the situation became critical then he could use the teleportation array to go back to his Kingdom anytime and naturally this was the main reason that every one of those kings and queens wanted to stay with the warrior association.


    Well, at the same time the human King told him that they still have 15 days before thepetition will begin. But naturally people already began toe to the human Kingdom because they also wanted to prepare themselves and also wanted to observe the stadium where he will be fighting.


    Finally after finishing the conversation Sam entered the guest room to rest. But on the other hand you can see he was thinking about an important matter and that was to go back to his own. Naturally it was the time to go back because that danger was approaching Eden blue and not only that he also wanted to know what happened to his after he came here.


    He still remembers that beforeing here he gave everyone of them some protection talisman and also some other thing that will make them survive when they will go to the earth. Even though his teacher and those other Warriors at the time did not say anything, he gets to know after reading the mind of a warrior that they will be going to a new to support those true humans.


    Naturally it was the true human who requested them to help them in that battle or the earth present in this world will bepletely destroyed by the enemy. So naturally he was also very worried about the situation of those Warriors and also it looked like his teacher most likely wanted to participate in that battle. So really he wanted to know what happened to her.


    At the same time his family and friends also could be in danger because of those other world people who likely decided to stay there until the core of the Eden blue did note to the surface area to evolve. Naturally the assumption was that until then nobody will be able to use their full power as they already get sealed. but still as you can tell he was very worried about the situation as even though those people won''t be able to use their full power they still have many artifacts and other things and with that naturally they were very dangerous to Eden blue.


    Well, actually if you wanted to go back then he could easily go back to his right now but before going back to his he naturally needed to visit the Oni Kingdom and also needed to talk to the old man or you can say old king of the Oni Kingdom. Even though he wasn''t sure, he can tell most likely that person already suspected that he wasn''t a person from that. But still the old king did not say anything to anyone and naturally Sam was very grateful for that.


    You are also thinking about the second most important thing. Actually you can say in this one year when he was doing missions in those danger zones and already deep inside of the danger zone, he finally found the trace of the Dungeons present there. Not only that he is also finally able to enter one of them to see what type of monster he will face inside of the Dungeon.


    " shback"


    1 month ago,


    Currently Sam was present inside of the Tigris kingdom. Well, inside of these Kingdom you will see every person present has a simrity with Tigers. Naturally they weren''t wild beasts or something like that but it was just that they have figures like that but also at the same time they have superior strength like tigers. Well they also called the beast humans, and they were one of the strongest among them.


    Fortunately they weren''t enemies of the human Kingdom as the Tigris kingdom was very far away from the human Kingdom and naturally between both of the kingdoms the contact did not establish that much. But still they did not support any of those people who were the enemy of the human kingdom or support those people who were the friend of the human.


    In one word you can say they just did not care about anything rted to that matter so naturally because of that he could easily visit that Kingdom. The most surprising thing was that when he visited that Kingdom he only saw you Warriors who were from other kingdoms present in that Kingdom. Naturally the more he was going further away from the human Kingdom the more he noticed the number of those warriors begin to decrease in other kingdoms.


    Now came back to the main matter inside of this Kingdom naturally the warrior association already present and with that he got the mission from the warrior association to clear some Monsters who already became insane because of the dark spiritual energy. Not only that those Monsters already affected many Warriors who were also present in that area using their dark spiritual energy.


    One more thing you should know is that the warrior association also knows that he has the ability to deal with the dark spiritual energy and dark spiritual energy did not do any damage to him. So naturally in this kind of matter they wanted to get help from Sam and because of that he got the mission at that time. But not only the warrior association but at the same time the king of the Tigris kingdom also came to him and requested him to save his people.


    Naturally he epted the mission and wasted no time to go to the danger zone to help all those warriors who already got affected by the dark spiritual energy. But the thing was that naturally he needed some time to reach there and at that time 3 of those people were already dead and the remaining people were already very close to death.


    Fortunately Sam was able to reach that ce in time and at the same time, the Warriors also sent help. First of all, the Warrior association told him that he should focus on those injured Warriors and only then he should focus on those Monsters. Naturally other Warriors also present in that ce, not only that they will also send people so that the time when he will be busy healing those people those people could support him.


    Naturally at the time he began to use the absorption technique to absorb all those dark spiritual energy from the body of those bodies and naturally in very fast speed you can say everyone of those warriors getting healed. Naturally at the same time those other Warriors supported him so he did not get attacked.


    At the time you can say almost 50 people got affected by the dark spiritual energy because of those 125 Monsters who suddenly became like that. Also you can say the dark spiritual energy wasn''t in the control of those Monsters as the whole surrounding was also getting affected by the dark spiritual energy. Naturally at that time Sam already knew most likely something happened and he really wanted to find what made those monsters like that.


    Fortunately, it only took him 1 hour to solve the problem with those Warriors and with that he finally was able to participate in battle with those Monsters. With that he already begun to fight those Monsters and at the same time he was using the origin spiritual energy to absorb the dark spiritual energy that most likely affecting the other Warriors who right now trying to fight those Monsters.

 Chapter 560 560 - Flashback (2)

    ?


    Sam naturally at that time began to fight those Monsters also at the same time using his origin spiritual energy he also absorbed the abnormal dark spiritual energy that almost affected all the Warriors present there. Naturally because of this the situation of the Warriors became more dangerous and because they were getting affected by the dark spiritual energy, they were unable to focus on those monsters.


    Fortunately with Sam''s help the situation already began to turn around and sometimeter finally Sam killed all those Monsters present there. But he can already feel the situation wasn''t over because not far away from that ce many monsters with dark spiritual energy are still present and even though those Monsters did note toward his direction but most likely they wanted to attack that direction.


    Sam quickly begins to use the original spiritual energy to absorb The dark Spiritual energy from those Warriors so that they could recover themselves. Naturally because of the dark spiritual energy those people are unable to heal normally and also if they try to use the potions, they are still unable to heal themselvespletely and that was the most terrifying thing for them.


    But fortunately sometimeter everyone realizes that the dark spiritual energy from their body begins to release from their body and they also feel rxed. Naturally at the time Sam already finished absorbing all the dark spiritual energy and with that he quickly told all the Warriors who came with him in that ce to look over that ce and also if possible then they should go back to their Kingdom.


    After hearing that naturally those Warriors also agree with that because everyone knows that this person always fights alone and also if they try to stay here and fight those monsters then it will just only increase the burden. Because of this, they have already begun to leave that ce. Even though on the other hand those people from the Tigris Kingdom had many questions but unfortunately none of the warriors of the warrior association gave them a proper answer and even their Warriors also did not give them the proper answer right now.


    At that time, Sam had already begun to fight with those Monsters. Naturally as he expected those Monsters already preparing for dark balls to shoot toward his direction. But fortunately he has already reached that ce and has already begun to kill those Monsters one by one. But sometimeter he realized something most likely happened to those Monsters at that moment because everyone was acting very strange and the dark spiritual energy abnormally began to release from their body.


    So after killing those Monsters he decided to investigate this. First of all you can say that everyone of those Monsters were around Epic grade. So don''t think the battle was easy for him as he needed to use his full power to kill those Monsters. First of all you can say that there were many Monsters who could have killed him if he did not fight them properly and naturally many of them were already seriously injured.


    But fortunately using the concealment technique he already wins that fight and with that he also begins to advance to search for the reason. At that time he was observing the whole surrounding area very carefully so that if he found any type of abnormal trace he would immediately try to find out what was happening.


    But the thing was that the deeper he was going at that time the more he could feel the density of the dark spiritual energy just beginning to increase. Naturally at the time he also sees mini Monsters who use the dark spiritual energy and everyone of them had the same situation where they already became wild like this and they are unable to control their dark spiritual energy right now. Sometimeter finally Sam was able to find out the reason behind all of those.


    Sometimeter you can say he was already able to find a big Gate like thing present in a cave. At first he thought that it could be a hideout for those Abyss humans, but that wasn''t it because at the same time he could feel that it wasn''t a normal cave. Well, at that time he did not think it could be a Dungeon. But after entering that ce he finally understood that it was naturally a Dungeon.


    At first he was really surprised after finding out and naturally wasting no time he decided to go inside that Dungeon. But the thing was that, the moment he entered the Dungeon he could already tell these Dungeons were rted to dark spiritual energy and naturally every monster he would find at that ce would have dark spiritual energy.


    Fortunately no legendary grade orary grade monsters were present in that ce so with that he already began to advance with alertness and naturally he was also able to find many Monsters. But the thing was that everyone of those Monsters present inside of the Dungeon waspletely and familiar to him.


    Sam all this time visited many kingdoms and naturally he also visited many parts of the danger zone where he already fought many different types of dark spiritual Monsters but unfortunately he never faced monsters like those who were right now present inside of the dungeon. Right now fast of all he was fighting those Monsters who look like a dog but unfortunately everyone of them 20 foot tall and at the same time poison and first element attack.


    Not only that they can also fuse both of the elements tocreate poisonous me attacks that are violet in color. Everything that was getting attacked by those dogs already began to burn away and at the same time was already beacon poisonous. Naturally everyone of those Monsters after getting affected by those poisonous mes they also begin to get killed.


    It looks like not only him but some monsters from the danger zone also enter the dungeon. Naturally nobody could notice the team in that state so those Monsters of the Dungeon already notice those monsters in the danger zone and wasting no time they already begin to attack them using their poisonous me.


    Everyone of those Monsters after getting attacked by those dogs also begin to counter their attack but unfortunately in the end something unexpected happens. Those ten dark spiritual Monsters already got burned away by the poisonous me but at the same time as you can see other than the purple bone, Sam cannot see anything in that ce.


    Naturally everyone of those monsters from the outside of the danger zone already got killed by those Monsters from the Dungeon and not only that, even their body and skeleton get poisoned. Naturally even Sam was very curious about that and he already decided to attack those Monsters. But naturally he will use a long distance attack at this time because he really did not want to get close to those Monsters.


    First of all as you know the monster inside of the Dungeon waspletely different from any Monster present in the danger zone. So first he needed to observe them very carefully and at the same time if it was possible then he wanted to know what type of weakness those monsters had.


    Also he already attacked one of those dog Monsters using his sun ray. First of all he really wanted to see how much the light element attacked would damage those Monsters. As you know that normally if you face Monster like that we use the dark spiritual energy then the light spiritual control will be a very effective element against that.


    On the other hand, Monster was already trying to leave that ce but before he could do that he already got attacked. But in the next second you can hear the terrifying cry thates out from that monster. But that wasn''t it once again the attack hit that Monster and with that the Monsters already fell down on the ground.


    You can say that before the second attack could hit the monster, That monster already created a barrier full ofdark spiritual energy in front of him. Unfortunately even though that was a powerful barrier and would have already been able to protect those Monsters. With that you already kill the monster but that wasn''t over as he began to attack those other Monsters one by one and even those Monsters became alert and wanted to protect themselves but in the end everyone of them getting killed by him.


    Naturally at that time Sam already decided that if it was possible then he will go to thest floor to find some doubt in him. But naturally he cannot go recklessly in a situation like this so he begins to advance very carefully and every time he sees a monster he will attack them with full power so that he could kill them, wasting no time.

 Chapter 561 561 - Abnormal State

    <h4>Chapter 561 Chapter 561 - Abnormal State</h4>


    At first you can say that he wasn''t having that much problem to kill those Monsters even though Monsters were much powerfulpared to your normal Monster present in the danger zone. But using the origin spiritual energy he could easily kill them and because of this he easily clear the first floor and already get ready to go to the next floor.


    But before that he naturally needed to recover his spiritual energy and health. Even though killing those Monsters was easy but the thing was that the number of those Monsters much bigger and because of this he also get injured while fighting then and already lost some of his health points.


    The thing was that he really did not know why everyone of those Monsters were that much powerfulpared to you normal Monster and also everyone of them releasing that abnormal dark spiritual energy. Moves likely if it wasn''t for the origin spiritual energy than until now he would have been affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    Fortunately using the origin spiritual energy he already absorb all those spiritual energy. At this time he also needed to became stable because absorbing too much spiritual energy also harmful for his body. So previously to stabilize his condition he uses most of his spiritual energy on those Monsters and kill them.


    _____________________


    ''I really wanted to know how much strong will be those Monsters in the next floor. Those Monsters most likely also have these abnormal dark spiritual energy. I really needed to be careful in that situation.''


    With that he advanced once again and already went to the next floor. The moment he came that floor he could already feel the density of The dark spiritual energy already increased. Wasting no time he once again uses the concealment technique to hide himself and advance in that floor. He did not even advance that much when he already saw some Monster prison there and everyone of those Monsters were intermediate epic grade.


    Fortunately none of those Monsters notice him. Sam already using his observing technique to observe the status of those Monsters.


    "Dark Cat, (Abnormal State)


    Grade:- Intermediate Epic grade / (Early) SSR grade


    Health:- (100900/100900)


    Spiritual energy:- (100000/100000)


    Strength:- 10500 (+100)


    Agility:-?10060 (+60)


    Physique;- 10090


    SE:- 10000


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 10000


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Dark w, Dark vision, Dark beam, Dark healing, Dark speed, Mind confused, Mental Destruction.


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ they are strong."


    As you can see right now in front of him those dark cats were present. Just looking at the status he could already see the abnormal state of those Monsters and because of these they also get an additional boost in their strength and agility. Also if you look at the technique of those monsters then you will see they could easily control the dark element and at the same time they had strong mind attack technique.


    Naturally Sam also knew that he needed to kill them quickly or they could also attack him using the mental destruction. Even though he also already maximized the mental defense technique and also had mental control technique, he did not want to waste that more time with those Monsters because it could also affect him while fighting those Monsters.


    So instantly Sam began to prepare his attack. Naturally he uses the superior sword technique to create a superior sh. At this time even though those Monsters are unable to feel any energy fluctuation but most likely they already begin to feel the danger and because of this, they also be very alert instantly.


    On the other hand, Sam just keeps channeling his spiritual energy into his yer. And if you look at his sword right now then you will see it just absorbing all that spiritual energy and increasing the power alongside that technique.


    Well, in these 9 months you can say he bought many swords and naturally fused those swords with his yer. Every time he fuses Swords, a battle instantly appears in his innerworld where those two swords fight with each other.


    Actually it happened because who would be the dominating one will be decided by that and naturally everyone of those who battle his yer wins all those matches. With that right now the power of his yer also increases very much and most likely because of this it is also able to handle all that power and that amount of spiritual energy.


    Now Sam could already so most likely those Monsters decided to go toward another direction to do something and even though they were very alert at this moment this still, but after not finding anyone even searching with their full power they decided they should advance or do something. Naturally Sam knew that was the chance to attack those Monsters while they already lowered their guard.


    "sh!!!!!"


    Instantly he begins to swing his sword toward those Monsters and you can say in less than a second he most likely swings his sword 500 times. Everyone of those Swing naturally created a powerful sword sh. And everyone of those attacked less than a second began to go toward those Monsters continuously. But naturally you can say the reaction speed of those monsters wasn''t that slow and they already became aware of the danger and most likely wanted to escape from that ce or wanted to find the enemy.


    But even with that none of them were able to survive because the speed of those attacks were much fasterpared to them. With that 10 of those Monsters already died and the remaining 5 Monsters already became seriously injured. But you still begin to use their dark recovery technique.


    Even though at this moment in normal eyes even be able to see anything, if you use the spiritual vision, then you will be able to see that everyone of those Monsters coated in a dark cloth around them and that thing was healing all those injuries very quickly.


    "Dark Cat, (Abnormal State)


    Grade:- Intermediate Epic grade / (Early) SSR grade


    Health:- (1000/100900)


    Spiritual energy:- (30000/100000)


    Strength:- 10500 (+100)


    Agility:-?10060 (+60)


    Physique;- 10090


    SE:- 10000


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 10000


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Dark w, Dark vision, Dark beam, Dark healing, Dark speed, Mind confused, Mental Destruction.


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ they are strong."


    Naturally as you can see how much damage he did to those Monsters, and at the same moment those Monsters use a huge amount of dark spiritual energy to recover their health as quickly as they can. But not only that, everyone of those Monsters are also very alert about the enemy and already begin to search for the trace of the enemy.


    They were also ready to attack anytime but unfortunately for them they were unable to see any enemy while once again they got attacked by those sword bs. This time those Monsters unable to escape or protect themselves and as you can tell in the end everyone of them gets killed.


    ______________________


    ''Sigh, unfortunately they did not drop any technique. But still the quality of those healing potions are very high. Also who could have thought they would drop that many materials.''


    Naturally sometimeter when the dead body of those Monsters faded away from that ce he could already see those loots that were present in that ce. Westing no time he already put everyone of those loots in his inventory and with that he once again began to advance.


    But it looks like the previous battle with those cat monsters naturally attracts the attention of many other Monsters as they already begin toe to that direction with curious eyes. Everyone of them wanted to know what happened there and because of this, using their full power, all of those Monsters also already came to that ce.


    But the thing was that Sam was already aware of that situation and because of this he was also already preparing his attack. Now because the number of those Monsters already increased he decided to use the mega fireball. Naturally because of the origin spiritual energy the power of the mega Fireball also increased. Also the more spiritual energy he will use in that attack the more dangerous it will be.


    Fortunately because of using the concealment technique at this moment he wasn''t releasing any spiritual fluctuation and with that none of those Monsters aware that the enemy who attacked those Monsters previously wasn''t far away from them and also already began to prepare a powerful attack for them.


    Once again as you can see Sam just keeps beginning to channel his spiritual energy into that mega fireball and the fireball keeps getting powerful and Powerful. The color of that fireball already reached Violet. It was just one step away from the dark color and naturally he could also feel that. But the thing was that you should not underestimate the power of those violet fire balls because even though they weren''t as strong as those dark fire balls, the thing was that they were still dangerous. Also there is the ability to burn anything like your hell fireball or you can say dark fireball.

 Chapter 562 562 - Advancing in the Dungeon

    <h4>Chapter 562 Chapter 562 - Advancing in the Dungeon</h4>


    Like this, Sam begin to fight those Monsters while advancing. At that time you can say he already reach the peak Epic grade, and because of this all this time even though he was facing those abnormal monster, he wasn''t having that much problem to fight them. It was just when to many of those Monsters try to attack team at once, he would feel quite hard to fight them because at the same time he need to careful from those dark spiritual energy that trying to effect him, and also most of them can uses the mind control attack and even though they unable to see his position, but after bing alert everyone of them begin to use those technique to kill there enemy.


    The thing was that in the first floor as you know he did not get any kind of reward even after killing those Monsters but in the second floor it waspletely different and after killing those intermediate SSR grade monsters, you can say for the first time he receive a technique from that monster.


    Well, but that wasn''t it because every time when he kill monster he would receive something and none of those loots were ordinary. Naturally even with that he did not store all of them in his inventory because he doesn''t need every one of those loots and because of these he also sold those loot in the system shop to gain the gold coins.


    Now back to main matter,


    He already reach the core area of the second floor where he naturally fighting those peak SSR or those intermediate Epic grade monsters who already reached the limit.


    "Dark Man, (Abnormal State)


    Grade:- Intermediate Epic grade / (peak) SSR grade


    Health:- (110000/139800)


    Spiritual energy:- (139900/139900)


    Strength:- 13990 (+150)


    Agility:-?13989 (+100)


    Physique;- 13980


    SE:- 13990


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 13900


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Dark scream, Cruse eye, Spiritual body, Dark effect


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ they are strong."


    Right now he was fighting those Dark men Who also reached the limit of the intermediate Epic grade. Naturally they were very close to level up and at the same time if you look at the status of those Monsters, then you will notice, they also have abnormal states and also they get more power boost because of the abnormal state.


    Naturally they also master at controlling the dark element and at the same time they could use the curse eye technique and also the dark effect technique. The cruse eye could immediately affect any Warrior. Actually it attacked those Warriors through their spiritual energy and instantly those Warriors would get affected by the dark spiritual energy that entered their body and also instantly started to give them negative effects.


    Naturally Sam also gets affected by that but fortunately he is already able to turn those dark spiritual energy into the origin spiritual energy easily and with that he does not get affected. On the other hand, the dark effect technique where those Monsters suddenly created a zone and if you stay inside of that zone then you will naturally feel the dark spiritual energy in that ce be denser and at the same time everyone of those dark spiritual energy will affect your body.


    The unfortunate thing was that if you did not have any spiritual escape or any powerful movement techniques you wouldn''t be able to escape from that ce. Even if you try to struggle, the dark spiritual energy will already give you negative effects and naturally with that you won''t be able to use your full power in that situation.


    Not only that because those Monsters also got the additional power boost naturally they became more dangerous and the power of their technique also became more powerful.


    Sam, fortunately already far away from those Monsters and all this time he was attacking them using his light element technique. The weakness of those Monsters could be the light element as they are unable to tolerate the light and because of this all this time Sam was using the light element to fight those Monsters beside his Sword.


    Well, even though he was powerfulpared to those Monsters but because of the additional boost those Monsters already reach any close to his power level and because of these the situation already became very hard for him and if at this time he get close to those Monsters it could also naturally all the time he maintaining distance.


    "Shuss!!!!"


    One by one suddenly many sun rays began to call from the sky and the whole Sky became brighter because of those sun rays. Naturally everyone of those Dark men got affected by those lights and at the same time when they got attacked by those sun rays, naturally they began to take more damage.


    "Ahhh!!!!"


    Everyone of them released a painful cry after getting affected by those light attacks. But that wasn''t it because at the same time you can say their body also began to burn. The burning rate of their body just keeps getting faster and faster. On the other hand because of this they are also unable to use The Spiritual body technique where they could turn their body into a spiritual state.


    In this state no physical attack will reach them until you do not attack them using your spiritual energy. But naturally normal spiritual energy won''t be affecting those Monsters as they have those abnormal dark spiritual energy and at the same time because right now Sam was present inside of a dark Dungeon those Monsters have the advantage because of that.


    "Boom!!!"


    Instantly some dark balls came toward Sam. Well actually some monster who was in the opposite direction of Sam and maintaining the distance from him from the start, already began to attack him. Actually they still did not know the real location of Sam but the thing was that they could predict the location and based on their prediction they decided to attack. Even though not everyone of those attacks targeted him, he would still get affected by the impact and because of this, before those attacks could hit him or hit the surrounding area, he already created a big light wall.


    Naturally the area became brighter with the appearance of that light wall and at the same time Monsters who present near that Wall already begin to take damage. Well the thing was that you also needed to have strong light element control and if you did not have that then your light attack won''t be able to do anything to those Monsters.


    ____________________________


    "Dark Man, (Abnormal State)


    Grade:- Intermediate Epic grade / (peak) SSR grade


    Health:- (50000/139800)


    Spiritual energy:- (139900/139900)


    Strength:- 13990 (+150)


    Agility:-?13989 (+100)


    Physique;- 13980


    SE:- 13990


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 13900


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Dark scream, Cruse eye, Spiritual body, Dark effect


    System remark:- Ohhh¡­ you have the power to injure them like this? I am really surprised."


    Naturally at this time he instantly looked at the system screen to see the condition of those Monsters who were in front of him right now because those were the Monsters who got mostly affected. Naturally he ignored the system remark while looking at the status. It is a good thing that he was already able to do that much damage and already he was very close to killing those Monsters.


    Even though at this time he did not know how many Monsters were behind him who just kept attacking him using those dark balls, he knew at this time that he needed to change his location. Using a teleportation technique he already went in another direction and at the same time he uses the telekinesis technique on those Monsters.


    Well, one thing you should know is that telekinesis technique is also very useful against those dark Monsters as it also affects the mind and naturally it needs mind power. Once again he uses full power to use that technique and with those 50 Monsters that previously got seriously injured once again unable to move or do anything.


    Naturally Sam wanted to finish those Monsters in this time and with that after holding them like this he began to attack them. Once again the whole Sky got full with those sun rays, and everyone of those attacks began to fall on those Monsters. Those Monsters did not even get the chance to do anything because they were unable to move and were also receiving damage.


    ______________________


    Finally after killing those Monsters Sam finally forecast on those other Monsters who previously attacked him from his behind. Naturally wasting no time he uses the telekinesis technique and with that those Monsters who were in the range of his technique already got caught by him. But that wasn''t it, as he also began to advance toward that ce very quickly so the range of his technique already went further and those other Monsters were also getting caught by him. Naturally you can say those Monsters struggled with their full strain to move but unfortunately they weren''t powerful and also because of using the origin spiritual energy those Monsters also keep getting damage.

 Chapter 563 563 - Peak Epic Grade Monsters

    ?


    "3 Headed ck Hound, (Abnormal State)


    Grade:- Peak Epic grade / (Early) SRR grade


    Health:- (140500/140500)


    Spiritual energy:- (141100/141100)


    Strength:- 14060(+200)


    Agility:-14029 (+150)


    Physique;- 14000 (+50)


    SE:- 14010 (+100)


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 14000


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Spiritual body, Dark effect, Dark me, Dark st, Strong sense, Regeneration


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ they are strong."


    " Boom!!! "


    Instantly a huge explosion appeared but fortunately Sam was already far away from that ce. That was the dark st that those Monsters attacked toward his direction. Suddenly as you can tell he was on the next floor where he was facing those peak Epic grade monsters.


    Naturally he was still using the concealment technique and those Monsters weren''t sure about his real location but still everyone attacked their surrounding area continuously. Actually they mainly target in the area from where those attacked came toward them.


    But fortunately Sam already realized the danger and he went far away from that ce. He could still feel the impact that was created by the dark ss. Naturally the whole area got destroyed and the whole ce right now already turned dark in color. Everything present in that ce right now gets affected by the dark spiritual energy and naturally because of this they also have that kind of color.


    But that wasn''t over as those Monsters kept attacking toward that direction and all this time Sam did not do anything because he could also feel the dark spiritual energy that was already present in the air and try to affect him. After realizing the danger he went further than that.


    Really everyone of those Monsters after bing like this became more dangerous. It was because of the abnormal state that they were facing and because of this everyone of them also became very wild like this while naturally they got more power boost.


    At this time he was sure about one thing that because of the Dungeon everyone of those Monsters have a situation like this and also the thing was that the Dungeon also helped them so that even if they got injured they could recover faster.


    But one thing was clear that many monsters present inside of these Dungeons weren''t seen outside of the Dungeon. Well the thing was that beforeing to the danger zone naturally he tried to read about many documents about the monster present in the danger zone so because of this he could tell those Monsters didn''t have any kind of information in those documents.


    Not only that he already gets to know by everyone of those warriors who previously encountered a Dungeon like this, that inside of the Dungeon he will naturally meet many new monsters that will also be very powerfulpared to those normal Monsters.


    Sometimeter those Monsters stop attacking, so Sam decided to use that chance to attack them and naturally at this time he uses the mega fireball technique because it has the most destructive power but at the same time he is already preparing to cast the light fall technique. In the technique the whole Sky will get surrounded by the sun ray, and everyone of those attacks will fall down on those Monsters.


    Naturally both of the techniques will require him arge amount of spiritual energy but he did not care about that as he needed to kill those Monsters as quickly as he could. Actually at this time you can say those Monsters most likely already call for reinforcement as they realize the danger of their invisible enemy. Because of this previously they already called for reinforcement and because of this right now many more Monsters also begin toe to that ce and the situation keeps getting dangerous.


    Even he did not have problem facing those Monsters but who could have guarantee that after the number of those Monsters will increase in a huge amount you will not have any problem with them. Also as you know he almost used the concealment technique for 24 hours so naturally he needed to deactivate the technique to rest for sometime.


    Even though he could still use that technique for almost 48 hours without stopping, after using that technique for 24 hours Sam naturally wanted to take rest so that he would not feel any kind of burden. You can say if he uses that technique for 48 hours continuously then after that when he will deactivate technique he will face a serious pain in his mind and also his mental energy will fully get exhausted.


    To save himself from that kind of situation he really wanted to deactivate the technique after using it for 24 hours. Now came back to the main matter naturally only when that mega fireball came out of the effect of his concealment technique, those Monsters suddenly were able to feel the energy fluctuation that came out from that attack and not only that many of them already realize the danger because of their strong sense.


    Naturally many of them already prepared their attacks and wasted no time already attacking toward the mega fireball to counterattack. But unfortunately even though everyone tried to counter attack and destroy the mega Fireball they were sessful as the mega fireball just kept getting closer and closer and not long after that it instantlynded on the ground and a huge explosion appeared on that ce.


    Before that many of those Monsters already escape from that ce but not everyone of them is able to escape and because of this everyone of those Monsters already get affected by that huge explosion that suddenly appears. That explosion just kept getting bigger and bigger while sometimeter it already reached the area of 10 km.


    Naturally everything present in that area got destroyed. Those trees and even the stones and soil got destroyed by that explosion. Most of the Monsters already got killed but naturally not everyone got killed as many of them already escaped while some of them at thest moment were able to escape. But even with that everyone of those Monsters who at thest moment tried to escape already got injured and they really weren''t in a bad condition.


    " 3 Headed ck Hound, (Abnormal State)


    Grade:- Peak Epic grade / (Early) SRR grade


    Health:- (50500/140500)


    Spiritual energy:- (50000/141100)


    Strength:- 14060(+200)


    Agility:-14029 (+150)


    Physique;- 14000 (+50)


    SE:- 14010 (+100)


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 14000


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Spiritual body, Dark effect, Dark me, Dark st, Strong sense, Regeneration


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ they are strong."


    But naturally that wasn''t enough to kill everyone of those Monsters at those Monsters even in a condition like that could fight back. Also before anything you should know that as those Monsters had three heads and because of this everyone of those heads could attack with different types of attack.


    At this time naturally those Monsters get very angry by that previous attack and if you look at their eyes then you will notice it blowing more brightly than before. In the next again and all of them prepare their attack. One thing was that they already released from which direction the attack came toward them so naturally they will be attacking toward that direction.


    One head was already controlling the dark element and using the dark me, the second head using the dark st while the remaining head was already using the mind break technique. At this time not just only one Monster but every one of those remaining Monsters doing the same thing as their 3 heads preparing 3 different attacks.


    With that everyone of them already prepared to attack in the direction from where the mega fireball came toward them. Those Monsters already use the mind break technique and because of this right now Sam even needs to use his mind protection technique in full power at the same time needed to use his technique to create a mental barrier in front of him.


    First of all, as those Monsters using the mind break technique at the same time naturally because of this, a very strong mental break attack was created and if he got affected by that then he could also have the mind zero state. Now on the other hand, because he was already very far away from that ce, he wasn''t able to properly hold those Monsters using his telekinesis technique.


    _______________________


    Naturally those monsters are just about to attack but at the same time they once again feel that pressure in their body that is unable to make them move but this time every one of them realized the pressure wasn''t that beak so they just ignored that and readied to attack. But naturally something unexpected happens as they once again begin to feel danger and that time ites from the sky. Many of them instantly look at the sky but in the next second, you can see this sun ray just keep falling down.

 Chapter 564 564 - Dark Titans

    ?


    3 hourster,


    Finally, Sam deactivated the concealment technique. Not only that but at the same time he hid himself so that he did not get found by those Monsters. At this time you can say he is already facing those intermediate SRR monsters. It was a good thing that he already killed many of those Monsters and also found a good ce to rest and hide himself.


    But at the same time while he was wasting he was very alert about the surrounding area. Not only that naturally he was using the life detection device. One thing you should know is that after previously he gave that thing to the human Kingdom the human Kingdom already developed their own life detection device and naturally that was strongerpared to those life detection devices from Eden blue.


    Now with that almost 20 km area would be under the range of that device and if any living being came in the range of the device it will naturally show in the device. Right now while he was looking at the device he could already see many Monsters that were not far away from his location but at the same time they also weren''ting toward his direction so he could rx.


    ______________________


    ''Now,e to think of it look like every Dungeon in Eden blue has that kind of teleportation symbol on it. But naturally all of them were protected by that undesirable stone so that nobody could find that teleportation symbol. But then would I find something like that in this Dungeon?


    Also if I find a teleportation symbol like this in this then after using that where will it send me?''


    At this time while he was resting suddenly he thought of that question and naturally he was very curious to know if teleportation symbols like this are also present in these Dungeons or not. First he already had the prediction that most likely every Dungeon that got created in Eden blue has teleportation symbol like this but everyone of those teleportation symbol were protected and until if anybody unable to break the rock that covering up the symbol nobody would able to find about that and also came to the Terraria.


    If you are thinking why he thinks like that then because previously he was able to hear a rumor that everyone of those worlds which are able to recover The Spiritual energy has some kind of connection with the Terraria. Even though he wasn''t able to confirm that , he still has a feeling that most likely every one of thoses which have dungeons like this has the same teleportation symbol that could send them to Terraria.


    But at the same time he also recovered that stone that he previously was unable to break even when he became a C-grade warrior. Naturally that was a very powerful stone and he predicted that most likely someone needed to be an Epic or even Elite grade to break that thing. Most likely because of this until now nobody was able to discover about the teleportation symbol and also who could have given something like that was present in thest floor of the Dungeon.


    Now the main question was that will he find something like this in this Dungeon? Also even if he finds that thing will he be able to reveal the teleportation symbol that was present here using his full power? He really wasn''t sure about that because he had the prediction that most likely he needed to reach at leastary grade to break that thing. Also on the other hand he did not tell anybody about that matter because he also wasn''t sure that anything that could be dangerous for everyone so he naturally did not say that to anyone until now.


    But you can say he really wanted to see if something like that was present in thest floor of this Dungeon or not. At the same time he really wanted to find why every Monster present inside the Dungeon has that kind of abnormal state?


    "Roar!!!!!"


    While thinking like this he did not look at the life detection device but he had alreadye back to him since the moment hear the roar of a monster that wasn''t far away from that location. Once again he came back to his senses and became alert. You already look at the device and so the monster was just 3 km away from his location and not just only one Monster but many other monsters also present there.


    Instantly he could also feel many impacts and with that he was sure about one thing that those Monsters most likely fighting against each other and because of these he was previously able to hear that angry roar and also can feel those impacts that are most likely getting created by their attack.


    "Roar!!!!"


    Actually he was right as he was able to hear those kinds of Roar of the monster once again and even in the device he could, most likely those Monsters fighting each other. But he really did not want to interfere in this kind of battle as he was just resting and did not want to use the concealment technique to put a burden on his body.


    Also one more thing you should know: while hiding himself he was using a special kind of potion that hid his smell and a ring that hid his aura. Naturally he buys those things from his system shop and to buy those things he really needs to use a lot of gold coins. But naturally he did not care about that as he spent most of the time inside the danger zone and those kinds of things are really useful in that kind of situation.


    ___________________________


    2 dayster,


    "


    Dark Titan, (Abnormal State)


    Grade:- Peak Epic grade / (Peak) SRR grade


    Health:- (181400/181400)


    Spiritual energy:- (181800/1818000)


    Strength:- 17993(+3000)


    Agility:-17991 (+250)


    Physique;- 17990 (+150)


    SE:- 17980 (+200)


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 17900


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Dark effect, Dark st, Strong sense, Regeneration, Giant force, Destroyer smash, Dark zone, Power punch, power defense, Cruse eyes,


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ they are strong."


    Naturally not far away from his location you can see those huge humanoid figures and the moment he looked at the statue he could already tell what those Monsters. They were the Titans. First of all, it''s really huge. Really he would never have thought you would meet Monster like that which would be over 100 feet tall and not only that just looking at the status you can say everyone of them is very strong.


    Everyone of those humanoid Monsters is fully ck in color and other than those red eyes you are unable to see anything. But naturally you can feel the spiritual or you can say the dark spiritual fluctuation thates out from their body. Those Monsters just destroy everything around them and naturally everyone of those other Monsters from that ce are already scared of those Monsters.


    First of all Sam already knows about monsters like this but you never thought you would meet Monster like this who could use the dark spiritual energy. Previously he already learned about Monsters who called the Titans and naturally they use the normal spiritual energy. So really he was very surprised after getting all that information.


    Naturally those Monsters have super strength and all of their techniques are also very dangerous. Naturally themon thing about those monsters who could use the dark spiritual energy would be they have dark spiritual control. But alongside with that those Monsters also have destroyers smash. Actually right now he could so likely be those Monsters fighting against each other and they really love fighting like that.


    Suddenly when they use that technique you can see their hand be red in color and in the next again that huge spiritual fluctuation also appears in that ce. Naturally using that technique they easily can destroy arge amount of area. On the other hand, status than you can tell them most likely already broke through to the next grade, but unfortunately that was in the case as it was just due to the power boost that they were getting because of the abnormal state.


    But still right now he did not want to take those Monsters lightly and because of this until now he did not attack any of them. First of all he really wanted to observe those monsters to find out about their weaknesses and only then would he try to attack them. Well, if you are wondering about his grade, then in this 4 months he already became a peak Epic grade Warrior after crazy using those status points but naturally at this time he was unable to increase those status as he needed to give his body some time.


    Also he was sure about one thing that baking through the next grade will be very difficult. So he also wanted to take things slowly so that he can get our powerful limit breaker to break through to the next grade without any problem.

 Chapter 565 565 - Fight

    <h4>Chapter 565 Chapter 565 - Fight</h4>


    Sam instantly jumps to change the ce. Previously, he once again created a very powerful mega fireball attack and wasting no time he quickly shot that towards 5 dark Titans. But as you know that even though those Monsters were Epic grade, because of their abnormal state they also get power boost and with that they most likely have the strength ofary grade monsters.


    Not only that, Sam also did not reach the limit of the peak Epic grade or you can say peak SRR grade. So fighting those Monsters in closebat will be very difficult for him even when he uses the concealment technique. Even if those Monsters are unable to find his location but naturally like those other Monsters they will try to attack in various directions and naturally as they have mind control attacks they will try to use that in every direction.


    Even though Sam was not afraid of that mind control attack , at the same time if those Monsters use their dark effect then he needs to focus on his spiritual energy so that he could absorb those dark spiritual energy. Naturally at the time you won''t be able to attack them and those Monsters if somehow able to find his location then it could be dangerous.


    Because of this, he decided to use the mega fireball technique but in the next second he did not stay there as he had already changed the ce and also brought out his bow and arrow. Not only that instantly he began to transfer the spiritual energy into the arrow and the arrow just kept glowing. Naturally because the arrow just became more powerful and at the same time he also transferred the spiritual energy into the superior archery technique.


    "Boom!!!!"


    On the other hand, an instant explosion appeared and the whole ce got covered in dust and also in the next second you can see the huge impact that most likely got created because of that explosion.


    Sam already uses The Spiritual Vision to look at that ce to see what was happening to those Monsters also wanted to know if he was able to kill all the monsters or not. First of all, because of those abnormal states he did not think he would be able to kill them even with that powerful attack that already destroyed the whole 5 km area.


    Naturally the same thing also happens when he faces thoseary grade warriors. But stillpared to before this time he would be able to injure them and that would be enough for him to kill them. Naturally all these time he is also using the telekinesis technique to feel if any monster is alive in that ce or not and also previously before those Monsters could counter attack or do anything he uses the telekinesis technique to hold them.


    Naturally because those Monsters were powerfulpared to him it would be difficult for him to control them for long but even for a short time that would be enough. Instantly he noticed that two of them were alreadyying down on the ground and most likely both of those Monsters were dead but the remaining 3 weren''t present in that ce as he wasn''t able to feel them.


    Instantly begins to increase the range of his telekinesis technique to find those Monsters alongside using the spiritual vision technique to find those Monsters. Even though he did not have an observation technique that was simr to those other Warriors, he still had the telekinesis technique that helped him to observe his surrounding area like this.


    The moment he increased the range he already found those Monsters were much far away from that ce and most likely those Monsters even in that condition were able to escape because Sam did not maintain that telekinesis technique for that long. But not only that, using that technique he could also feel that those Monsters were injured and they were also most likely searching for their enemy right now.


    "Roar!!!!!"


    Instantly you can hear those angry roarsing out from those dark Titans and not only that in the next second you can also feel the earthquake that also appears because of those Monsters. Instantly those Monsters begin to use their dark spiritual energy to cover the holes surrounding the area, so that even if their enemy hides himself he will get affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    Fortunately Sam already knew something most likely would happen after that previous explosion so he already came far away while he was preparing for the next attack. Naturally this time those Monsters already became very alert and were already searching everyone for the enemy but unfortunately they were unable to find any kind of trace or any kind of energy fluctuation.


    But that does not mean those monsters will stay like this as they already begin to use their dark effect and dark control attack to affect the whole surrounding area and the range just keeps increasing and increasing. Sometimeter the range already became 10 km and everything in the 10 km got affected by the dark spiritual energy. But unfortunately Sam, who was outside of the ce, wasn''t affected and when he tried to look at that ce without using the spiritual vision he couldn''t tell any kind of difference. But every time when he uses The Spiritual Vision he can already feel or you can say see the density of dark spiritual energy already increase in that ce and not only that dark spiritual energy mostly trying to affect everything.


    On the other hand he already located those Monsters and was already ready to use the telekinesis technique to hold them once again but before that he needed to fully channel all the required spiritual energy into the arrow and into his technique. Because he wanted to make the attack as powerful as he can he channeled excess spiritual energy but still he did not cross the limit where the arrow could break.


    In the next again he already finished the attack and because of that he instantly uses the teleportation technique to get close to those Monsters and instantly uses the telekinesis technique to hold those Monsters. The moment he did that he also shot the arrow toward those Monsters.


    Naturally everyone of those Monsters who destroying everything and trying to search for their enemy in the surrounding ce already got startled because they suddenly feel that the unable to move but not only that in the next second they could already since and powerful energy fluctuation and that thing which releasing the energy fluctuation justing toward them very quickly.


    Naturally, all of them saw a golden light in front of them but the thing was that all of them could feel the danger that was alsoing out from that golden light. Because of this, those three Monsters already increased their spiritual energy to break free from that telekinesis control and the moment they got about to heat they were already able to break free from the control. But unfortunately not everyone was able to escape as thest Monsters who were unable to react on time already got killed by that attack and the remaining Monsters were able to escape from that ce.


    Unfortunately even with that they were unable to escape from the danger as they could already feel two More Golden lightsing from behind and not only that both of these Golden lights also released the same dangerous feeling as the previous one.


    This time because they did not feel the force that was previously holding them they tried to escape but before they could do that they instantly got shot by other arrows. Even though Arrow wasn''t as dangerous as those previous arrows but still because it counts the origin of spiritual energy it is already avable to damage both of the Monsters as it already pierced through their body. But in the next again those two Golden lights also hit those two Monsters.


    ____________________


    Finally after killing them, Sam waited for the reward that naturally will appear when the dead body of those Monsters will disappear from that ce. That wasn''t only the case as he could already feel more Monster most likelying toward that ce. Naturally those Monsters already feel the energy fluctuation and also know something most likely happened, so they alsoe there.


    He once again begins to prepare more arrows or you can say those spiritual arrows for those Monsters. But that wasn''t it as he already began to use the observation technique, spiritual vision technique alongside with the telekinesis technique. The observation technique will give him the status of those Monsters while The Spiritual vision will give him the appearance of those Monsters and the distance of those Monsters very clearly and also if those Monsters want to attach he could easily control them if those Monsters appear in the range of his telekinesis technique.

 Chapter 566 566 - Core area

    <h4>Chapter 566 Chapter 566 - Core area</h4>


    Finally, he already reached very close to the core area but at the same time you can say the situation became far more dangerous than before. Everyone of those Monsters already reached the limit of peak Epic grade, and naturally they also had their power boost because of the abnormal state and because of these the situation became very dangerous for him.


    Fortunately using the concealment technique and also using the origin spiritual energy he has the advantage. But the thing was that he also could have got injured because of those attacks because even those Monsters unable to find him they could attack him randomly and naturally all the time Sam also needed to worry about the dark spiritual energy that was always trying to affect him.


    Right now, he was fighting some Monsters once again in the end of the inner area. Most likely after killing those monsters he will be able to enter the core area and finally, meet the Boss monster in that ce. But the thing was that in front of him you can see 25 of those monsters who already became very angry because of the previous attack. You can see 5 of them already were dead because of the previous attack and that also makes them more angry as they already begin to affect the surrounding area using the dark spiritual energy and also trying to find out the location of their enemy.


    Naturally all this time Sam also wasn''t ideal as he was already attacking them from every direction using the teleportation technique and that also made those Monsters more confused about his location. Now he just keeps attacking those monsters using the sun ray from every direction and you can say, in a second he could attack them 20 times from various directions while those monsters did not even have any clue about the location of their enemy.


    But the thing was that those monsters could also use the dark spiritual energy and they already created an energy shield in front of them to protect them. Because of this until now even though those monsters were unable to protect themselves, they still did not get killed. But really Sam also wanted to know how long those monsters would be able to protect themselves like this.


    Once again Sam was fighting those humanoid ghost Monsters but naturally all of them were fully ck in color and dark spiritual energy released from their body all the time. Look like this still did not have control over those excessive dark spiritual energy as that already began toe outside from their body. But the thing was that those monsters were very powerful at mind control attacks or body processes.


    Naturally if it was any other than what they are then it could be dangerous for them but unfortunately that was in the case with Sam, as he already injured them even though they were trying to protect themselves using the energy shield. You can say every time when those sun rays shed with the energy shield and impact also got created and that impact even also affected the spiritual body of those ghost Monsters.


    Normal physical attack is only effective against those types of spiritual Monsters but naturally if you use the spiritual energy then it would be effective. Everytime an impact gets created because of the shes, naturally the origin spiritual energy is also present in that impact and because of these Monsters already get injured even though they are trying to protect themselves. Not only that you can see the crack mark that is already present in those energy shields and most likely if Sam continues to attack like this he will be able to break those energy shields.


    Sam is still using the teleportation technique while the light control technique to attack those Monsters from every direction but at the same time you can say he is already beginning to prepare for his next attack. So you can say he was using three techniques at once but naturally that wasn''t easy.


    "Crack!!!"


    Sometimeter finally two energy shield got destroyed and not only that two Monsters who created those energy shield in front of them already got hit by the sun ray.


    "Hassssss!!!!!"


    Instantly those Monsters already release that kind of painful scream. Naturally as you know, the light element was a little enemy for those ghost type Monsters as you can see already the body of those monsters begin to burn and right now they are unable to do anything even using the dark spiritual energy to heal their body.


    The ce where the sun ray created a hole in their body already begins to burn but sometimeter you can see the burning already spread around the whole body of those Monsters and naturally like this those Monsters begin to fade away from that ce while still screaming like that.


    But for Sam he still did not rx, as he needed to kill more monsters and with that he still began to attack like that toward those other Monsters. Also you can say that only 15 minutester he stopped attacking those Monsters using the teleportation technique or using the sun Ray technique.


    Naturally everything happened so quickly that those monsters did not even get the chance to realize what happened. Sometimeter they suddenly realize that they stop getting attacked by the enemy and it looks like the enemy wasn''t nning to attack them. But naturally those monsters did not let their guard down. They are still very careful about the surrounding area and observing the surrounding area very carefully to see what was the n of their enemy.


    But in the next again everyone of those monsters begin to feel dangering from the sky. Everyone looked at the sky instantly to see what was happening. But the moment this Golden light came toward them, all of them got afraid and could also feel the dangering out from those Golden lights.


    Even though they wanted to escape, unfortunately it was toote for them to escape as everyone of those Golden lights began to fall on the ce where those monsters tried to escape.


    "Sssssss!!!!!! Boom!!!!!!"


    Continuously everyone of those Golden lights began to fall on that ce and naturally one by one the please also began to explode the moment those golden lights began to fall on those ces. Naturally it was an attack that was created by Sam previously and all the time he was waiting for this chance when those monsters were able to react on time to attack them.


    He already cracked almost all the energy shields and even if those monsters try to use their full power in the short time they won''t be able to protect themselves and naturally that was happening in front of him. Even though those Monsters using their full power or you can say the remaining power to power of the energy shield, this still unable to protect themselves from those continuous Golden light that begin to fall on that ce and not just only it affecting directly but it could also affect those Monster indirectly as it already created those impact which also full with origin spiritual energy and naturally that also very effective against those type of dark spiritual Monsters.


    On the other hand as you can see Sam wasn''t nning to stop as he already began to prepare those types of attack once again and with that he already began to prepare. Nothing was that it will take him 1 to 2 minutes to prepare that attack and the more he will begin to channel The Spiritual energy into the technique the more powerful it will be. Naturally previously he used 40% to 50% of his spiritual energy but this time he did not have that much spiritual energy so he only uses 30% spiritual energy into the technique.


    Naturally it won''t be powerful as those previous Golden lights but still it would be effective against those Monsters. With that many More Golden lights once again appear on the sky and everyone of those Golden lights begin to fall on those Monsters once again alongside with those previous Golden lights. Naturally for a second everyone of those monsters thought that was unfortunately that was in the case as the golden light still began to fall on them and naturally you can see many of them already got seriously injured and unable to use the energy shield once again in this case.


    _________________________


    Sometimeter, as you can see already most of those Monsters were dead and only 6 of them remained in that ce. But at the same time you can see Sam already came behind those Monsters and in the end he once again attacked them using the sun ray.


    Finally he already killed all the Monsters and he can see the loot begin to appear instead of the dead body of those Monsters. Using the telekinesis technique he already put all those loots in his inventory and with that he finally decided to rest to recover all the Spiritual energy. Not only that because all this time he was protecting his mind from the mental attraction of those Monsters, you also needed to recover his mental state back to normal.

 Chapter 567 567 - Boss Monster

    ?


    ''Damm!!!!''


    After thinking that Sam instantly jumped from that ce and the ce already got destroyed. But that wasn''t over as instantly he could begin to feel a mental attack and that was very powerful that almost made him unable to fight and got affected by that.


    Fortunately he was able to stabilize the condition as he already teleported from that location. With that he is able to get away from that mental attack but he instantly uses the telekinesis technique to control that monster. But the moment he tried to do that he could also feel and prevent thating out from that Monster and most likely that Monster was also trying to do the same thing. With that a sh already begins to happen between mind forces.


    If you are wondering about the monster then right now Sam was fighting the Boss monster. Previously after killing all the Monsters he already came to the ce where he already found the Boss monster. Naturally killing those previous Monsters wasn''t easy and aftering to the core area, naturally he felt far more dangerous Monsters which already reached the limit and because of the abnormal power boost they also became more powerful.


    But still, somehow after killing those monsters he came to that ce where he already found the Boss monster. But naturally you can say the Boss monster wasn''t alone as he also has his Minions around him and everyone of them most likely protecting the area while the Boss monster resting or sleeping. Because of this at this time he decided to attack those Monsters at once and because of these he already began to prepare his most powerful long distance attack.


    Naturallypared to his fire control or light control attack the archery technique was far more dangerous but it did not have that much area effect so to get the area effect he would use the me control technique. But in this matter he directly wanted to attack the Boss monster so he began to use the superior archery technique and already began to prepare his powerful Arrow using those spiritual arrows.


    Sometimeter instantly when the arrow got out of the concealment technique instantly every Monsters could feel the energy fluctuationing out from that Arrow and not only that everyone could also feel the danger that was alsoing out from that arrow. Even the Boss monster could also feel the danger and at the same time everyone already saw in the sky a golden light that had already begun to shine very brightly and was alreadying toward the direction of the Boss monster.


    Naturally the speed of that Arrow was too much for that Boss monster to react. Previously the Boss monster wasn''t ready and because of this he wasn''t able to react on time and in the end you can see the arrow already hit the Boss monster. First of all you should know that the arrow also had a light element and because of thispared any of your spiritual Arrow that would be much more dangerous for the Boss monster which has the dark spiritual energy.


    Also if you look at the Boss monster then you will notice that he is also a huge Titan. Right now the Boss monster already began to cry in pain but it wasn''t over as more Arrow also began toe toward his direction. But this time the Boss monster already became alert and he already noticed the arrow alongside those other Monsters.


    So this time everyone of them already prepared the energy shield in front of them and not only that some of them already began to use the dark beam to counter attack that arrow. Naturally a sh also happened between those dark beams and the Golden arrows. Naturally you can say everyone of those dark beams are trying to affect the spiritual energy but unfortunately everyone of those arrows are full with origin spiritual energy and naturally with none of the dark spiritual energy able to affect.


    2 secondster, you can see that everyone of those dark beams are unable to counter attack those arrows, and everyone of those Golden arrows already hit the energy shields. But this time it is unable to break the energy shield as most of the energy already got used to counter attack those dark beams. But naturally that wasn''t over as many More Golden Arrow still begin toe toward the same direction and one by one everyone of those Arrow begin to hit the energy shield and naturally every time the energy will get Attack by those Golden it also begins to show the track mark on it.


    On the other hand the Boss monster was somehow able to stabilize his condition and because of this he already notices the situation and wasting no time he also already attacks toward those Golden arrows that almost broke the energy shield. He also released a dark beam and directly that dark beam went toward those arrows pierced through the energy shield and directly hit those golden arrows.


    This time you can say those Golden Arrows were unable to counter attack that dark beam because it was much more powerfulpared to those previous dark beams and with that everyone of those Golden Arrows got destroyed. But on the other hand that dark beam directly went toward the ce from where those arrows begin toe toward the direction.


    ____________________


    On the other and you can say previously Sam almost uses most of the energy in the first attack and because of this arrows that he shoot after that wasn''t that much powerfulpared to that first arrow which almost take half of the health of that Boss monster, those other Golden arrows wasn''t that powerful but you can say he still begin to shoot those Eros too at that ce to destroy the energy shield and naturally he wanted to see if he could kill more Monster or not.


    Fortunately he had alreadye a long way and it gave him the time to recover his spiritual energy. He already begins to use the spiritual recovery technique alongside he is already trying to observe the situation of that Boss monster.


    "Dark Titan, (Abnormal State) (Boss)


    Grade:- Peak Epic grade / (Peak) SRR grade


    Health:- (103490/183490)


    Spiritual energy:- (170000/182990)


    Strength:- 17999(+300) (+100)


    Agility:-17999 (+250) (+100)


    Physique;- 17999 (+250) (100)


    SE:- 17999 (+200) (+100)


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 17999 (+100)


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Dark effect, Dark st, Strong sense, Regeneration, Giant force, Destroyer smash, Dark zone, Power punch, power defense, Cruse eyes, Telekinesis, High Observation.


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ You will die."


    Naturally if you look at the status of the Boss monster then you can see that alongside the power boost they were getting because of the abnormal state they also have the additional power boost. Naturally that makes that Monster far more powerful and dangerouspared to those other Monsters.


    On the other hand you can see that the Monster had high observation and also telekinesis techniques that did not show if you look at the status of those other monsters so naturally the Boss monster only had those techniques and naturally that was powerful.


    ______________________


    On the other hand the Boss monster alongside those other monsters already begin to search for the enemy because they werepletely sure that the previous attack did not kill the enemy and because of this the Boss monster already told all the Minions to spread around and search every direction very carefully. At the same time he was also taking his time to heal those injuries.


    Naturally, all of those Monsters begin to search around that ce very carefully while the Boss monster was also using his observation technique but unfortunately you can say until now they did not find anything. On the other hand, naturally Sam once again teleported to a different ce which was very far away from that ce and because of that no Monster until now was able to find him but in the end you can say he also traveled to know about the situation of these monsters.


    Naturally he could only tell about the situation of those monsters which were present in his observation range but unfortunately he cannot tell what was the situation of the was Monster and those other Monsters that were already out of his observation range.


    But at the same time he had already recovered most of his spiritual energy so he was already preparing to attack the Boss monster once again and this time he already had a n of what to do. Sometimeter after recovering his full energy he began to prepare that previous attack using almost 70% of his spiritual energy. On the other hand, naturally those monsters are still trying to find out the location of their enemy but even after looking for the whole ce they are unable to find anything about the enemy and this makes the Boss monster more angry because he was not able to find the enemy even using his technique in full power.

 Chapter 568 568 - End of Flashback

    <h4>Chapter 568 Chapter 568 - End of shback</h4>


    "Dark Titan, (Abnormal State) (Boss)


    Grade:- Peak Epic grade / (Peak) SRR grade


    Health:- (83490/183490)


    Spiritual energy:- (100000/182990)


    Strength:- 17999(+300) (+100)


    Agility:-?17999 (+250) (+100)


    Physique;- 17999 (+250) (100)


    SE:- 17999 (+200) (+100)


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 17999 (+100)


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Dark effect, Dark st, Strong sense, Regeneration, Giant force, Destroyer smash, Dark zone, Power punch, power defense, Cruse eyes, Telekinesis, High Observation.


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ You will die."


    After sometimeter as you can see the situation of the boss Monster. On the other hand you can say the situation of Sam also wasn''t that good as even though that Monster did not able to tell about his real location but because of those powerful attack he also get affected after the impact got created and also right now to kill that monster his really needed to use a huge amount of spiritual energy to prepare those powerful attack. But fortunately the good thing was that he was already able to kill those other Minions of the Boss monster and right now he is just only fighting the Boss monster who also just keeps attacking the surrounding area after not finding the real location of the enemy.


    The Boss monster also knows that most likely his enemy was using some kind of invisible technique and because of these he decided to attack every ce in his surrounding area so that the enemy who became invisible also gets affected by that.


    But naturally you can say the Boss monster also wasn''t slow and as it already is more intelligentpared to your normal monster he is really able to escape many attacks thate from Sam toward him. Sam is unable to continuously attack that monster with his powerful attack so because of this using that chance that Monster is also able to affect Sam.


    Now back to main matter,


    Fortunately Sam already evacuated his previous location because in the next again not far away from that location a huge destruction appeared because of the dark beam of those Monsters thatnded on that ce and also already destroyed the surrounding area and naturally the ce where Sam was hiding himself, also got destroyed.


    On the other hand Sam already came to a different ce and once again after recovering The Spiritual energy he was already preparing his next attack. But at the same time he was already prepared to escape from that ce if the next attack of those Monsters came to that location.


    _______________________


    "Dark Titan, (Abnormal State) (Boss)


    Grade:- Peak Epic grade / (Peak) SRR grade


    Health:- (8490/183490)


    Spiritual energy:- (8000/182990)


    Strength:- 17999(+300) (+100)


    Agility:-?17999 (+250) (+100)


    Physique;- 17999 (+250) (100)


    SE:- 17999 (+200) (+100)


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 17999 (+100)


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Dark effect, Dark st, Strong sense, Regeneration, Giant force, Destroyer smash, Dark zone, Power punch, power defense, Cruse eyes, Telekinesis, High Observation.


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ You will die."


    Finally after some timeter you can see that he was very close to killing the Boss monster and the Boss monster at this time was in a very serious situation. All this time he just keeps getting attacked by Sam while he is unable to know the real location of his enemy. Because of this continuously he began to lose his health point and in the end you can see the health point be like this.


    Most likely the Boss monster once again began to prepare a dark beam, and wanted to attack the location from where he received the attack previously but before he could do that a mega Fire Ball instantly came toward him and that Monster unable to escape or do anything when that mega fireball hit him.


    "boom!!!"


    Once again a huge explosion appears because of that mega fireball and not only that you can say instantly many Golden lights already appear in the sky and everyone of those Golden lights begin to fall on the same ce continuously. Well, San wanted to finish the monster as quickly as he could and because of this he began to attack like this wasting no time.


    Naturally, using those techniques continuously he was really feeling exhausted but still he was already very close to kill the Boss monster so these once again increased his speed of attack and once again powerful mega fireball went toward that ce. Actually before the Boss monster could do anything he wanted to kill that Boss monster and wanted to finish the Dungeon.


    Sometimeter,


    "Dark Titan, (Abnormal State) (Boss)


    Grade:- Peak Epic grade / (Peak) SRR grade


    Health:- (590/183490)


    Spiritual energy:- (800/182990)


    Strength:- 17999(+300) (+100)


    Agility:-?17999 (+250) (+100)


    Physique;- 17999 (+250) (100)


    SE:- 17999 (+200) (+100)


    Intelligent - 80


    Casting speed - 17999 (+100)


    Technique:-


    Dark element control, Mind break, Dark effect, Dark st, Strong sense, Regeneration, Giant force, Destroyer smash, Dark zone, Power punch, power defense, Cruse eyes, Telekinesis, High Observation.


    System remark:- Just run away, haha¡­ You will die."


    With the final attack Sam finally kills the Boss monster and with that you can say he finally finishes the dungeon. The moment he did that he already fell down on the ground and began to pant. Once again after so many dayster he fought in a serious situation like this. Once again you can say that he finished a Dungeon where he could have lost his life but fortunately because of his luck he was able to kill the Boss monster.


    Like this after sometimeter he finally got the strength to get up from the ground and all this time the good thing was that no Monster came near that ce as they would never do that until they did not get the permission from the Boss monster. You can say even after the Boss monster was dead, the monster wille to that ce as they always follow the rule that was set in the dungeon.


    Because of this, Sam uses this as his advantage to recover his strength to move around and also to find out about the mystery of that Dungeon. Sometimeter he was already able to get up so wasting no time he quickly picked up all the?and put them in the inventory. Only then he began to search around that ce to find those teleportation symbols and that?stone. Naturally to find that thing we need to search very carefully around that ce as it won''t be easy for him to find something like that.


    Actually right now where he found the Boss monster previously the whole area also had a rock like appearance so finding a particr Rock wasn''t easy but the good thing was that he already knew how to discover if something like that was present here or not. But that could be risky as he was now inside of a cave. But in the end he still decided to use his method and with that he began to attack every ce inside of that cave. Small torge items have already begun to attack him and all the same time he is naturally also very alert about the surrounding area.


    First thing he did not know even if he would find the indestructible stone or not. But naturally he began to attack the surrounding area and sometimeter he finally stopped attacking. Unfortunately in that ce he did not find anything but you can say that he almost destroyed everything present there. That could be risky because as you know he was inside of a cave and that thing could have fallen.


    Because of these he decided to stop attacking but suddenly he suddenly noticed something and that instantly made him excited. He instantly went toward that ce and only then he became sure that it was really the indestructible stone and most likely the pattern was protected by that stone right now.


    "shback end."


    Back to the main matter, finally you can say the shback ends. But Sam, who is thinking all of this all the time, is still thinking that even after using all of his attacks he is unable to do anything to that stone and with that naturally able to get to see the teleportation portal that was protected by that stone.


    So all this time you are also very confused to know how powerful he has to be to destroy that stone and to activate the teleportation portal and also the big question was what will happen when he will use that teleportation portal. Naturallypared to anything this was a question that he was thinking all the time after clearing that Dungeon but until now he did not find anything. Also the good thing was that he did not reveal anything about that matter.


    Naturally he did not want to give anyone that information until he was insured about that matter. Even though he could tell the teleportation portal inside of that stone, he still wasn''t sure about that so he did not inform anyone.

 Chapter 569 569 - Livia’s friends ?

    <h4>Chapter 569 Chapter 569 - Livia''s friends ?</h4>


    "Sam!!! Here.. how are you? Really it been a long since we met. Do you know that I am also participating in thispetition? Not only me but my sister Emma, Maria, and?brother also participated in thispetition. Do you know, not everyone is able to participate? This time father alongside other kings and queens, and the warrior association came to a conclusion that only the top 10 warriors from each warrior grade will be able to participate in thepetition.


    Unfortunately with that you won''t be able to see the huge fight that happened 6 months ago. Anybody could participate in thatpetition that time so warriors from all over the world also came to our Kingdom and participated in thatpetition. Really I got to see many different people in thatpetition and everyone of them also had different types of power. Unfortunately, after taking that 10th position I was disqualified from thepetition, because my opponent was too powerful for me. But don''t worry this time I already prepared myself and grandpa also helped me to prepare myself for thispetition. So I am already nning to win the first position this time.


    Also sister Emma was the second position holder of the previouspetition. But this time I am really sure that she will be winning thispetition. Unfortunately brother previously did not participate in thepetition as he was busy with something but this time you will be participating in thepetition and I really hope that you will also get the first position. Nowe to think of it, will you also participate in thispetition?


    If you participated in thispetition then definitely you will win the first prize. You already defeated those powerful monsters so naturally those Warriors are only able to win. That will be a very interesting thing and I will show everyone that my friend will easily win thepetition."


    Next day,


    Livia finally meets Sam and as you can tell she non stop saying all of this to him. Sam, just did not say anything and just silently listened to all those exnations from her. Naturally he knows Livia likes to talk like this, so he did not stop her. Emma, and Maria who were beside her just sighed. Because they are also very familiar with this kind of personality of Livia.


    But on the other hand you can say both of them were also surprised when they noticed Sam. First of all, all of them also hear all those impossible talks that Sam previouslypleted and naturally they also wanted to know about those kinds of missions that he previously got from the warrior association.


    Compared to Maria, Emma was mostly surprised. First of all, even though she was unable to tell how powerful he had be, the thing was that she had a feeling thatpared to before, most likely he had the strength to defeat her. Naturally she wasn''t sure about this but she has a feeling like this.


    Sometimeter all four of them went to the dining room and began to eat their food. Naturally the human king hosted all of this so they did not have to worry about food. On the other hand, they get to know that all the kings right now are busy in a meeting. The warrior association held that meeting because from tomorrow thepetition will start and most of the participants have alreadye to the human Kingdom.


    ______________________


    After finishing their food, Sam decided to visit the whole human Kingdom alongside Maria and the others. Naturally, Maria, Livia, and Emma yah to hide that true appearance because everyone knows about them and if they go out like this then it could be dangerous for Maria and Livia. Also normally when they go out of the Royal pce they will get escorted by the royal guards but this time because Sam was present there, the human king and the Oni king give them the permission to go out without any kind of escort from the Royal guards.


    Also you can say right now the human Kingdom was the safest ce. Many powerful Warriors are present there and naturally all of them observe their surroundings so casualty did not happen at that time. Already the warrior from the warrior association already got appointed in the human Kingdom and every time they will petrol the whole human Kingdom so no danger appears.


    Maria, Livia and Emma, after changing their appearance, already went outside alongside Sam. Naturally at this time Livia and Emma wanted to show him there other friends who were leaving not far away from the Royal pce. So both of them take Sam and Emma toward that ce. Sometimeter you can see many pces present in that ce and in front of the pce you can see many Royal guards that definitely came from other kingdoms. Everyone protects those ces because the royal families are present there.


    At this time when Sam looks at the symbols present in those ces he already gets the idea about those people who present inside of those pces. Livia and Maria take him toward the ce of the Druid Royal family. Naturally the royal family was present inside of that ce and the royal guards of that Kingdom protected that ce all the time and they were very alert about their situation.


    When four of them appear near that ce every guard bes alert but instantly when Maria and Livia are so true, those guards rx and naturally give them the way to enter the pce. Usually no royal family was willing to stay in this kind of pce where they could lose their life or anything like that could happen to them but during thepetition they really needed a ce to raise so the human king and the Warriors creation prepared the pce for those Royal families from other Kingdom.


    It looks like the Druid royal family decided to stay in that pce as they already came inside of the pce. Sam already saw many people present there and everyone of them naturally doing their own work. The butler who escorted them inside of the pce already told him to wait for a minute and he will inform the princess about them.


    __________________


    Sometimeter, five peoplee to the hall room where Sam and the others were waiting for them. But when Sam looked at those people he was surprised because he could see not only the Druid princess, but the elf princess, the Tigris princes, the Dwarf princess and the Dragonite princess also present there. Naturally he was very familiar with all of them as he had already entered their kingdom previously to do some kind of mission from the warrior association.


    Butpared to the appearance of those people he was mostly surprised because of their identity. As the elf, dwarfs and Dragonite Kingdom did not have that much good rtionship with the human Kingdom but still those people decided toe there, naturally this made Sam surprised.


    But instantly when Livia started to talk to them Sam became sure that everyone of them was familiar with her and looked like they also had a good rtionship with Livia.


    "Don''t worry, they became friends of Livia. Even though I was worried previously, after getting no them I became sure that none of them have any kind of malicious intention toward her."


    Suddenly Sam heard that in his mind and naturally as you can tell it was Emma who said that to him. She also noticed the surprise look of Sam and she decided to exin. You can say at first even she was also very surprised about this but after getting to know those people carefully she became sure that none of them had any kind of Motive while bing friends with Livia and Maria.


    Sometimeter,


    "Guys, let me introduce you to Sam. As I told you he is Sam Kainer, the famous Warriors. Naturally he is also my best friend and he was the one whopleted those difficult tasks from the warrior association without any problem."


    Livia suddenly introduces Sam to everyone and the moment everyone gets to know about Sam they be very interested in him and instantly begin to look at his direction. Naturally they began to observe him very carefully but sometimeter everyone of them had a surprised expression as they were unable to tell anything about him even after using their observation technique. Sam could easily tell when they used their observation technique on him but he did not say anything and just nodded at them.


    Finally sometimeter, Sam and all of them went outside of the pce and it was decided that they would visit the whole human Kingdom. But you can say Sam already feels everyone of the shadow Warrior that is protecting those princesses. Even Livia and Maria also had shadow Warriors that were hiding themselves and naturally ready to take action anytime if the life of Maria and Livia was in danger.

 Chapter 570 570 - Beauty Of He Human Kingdom

    Naturally, they began to look at everything that was happening in the human Kingdom right. Compared to before right now you can say the human Kingdom was fully crowded with people because of thepetition. Many people from many different Kingdom also begin toe to the human Kingdom because of thepetition and as they cannot use the teleportation array of the warrior association because that also causes them a huge amount of spiritual energy consumption, those people already came to the human Kingdom before thepetition started.


    But on the other hand you can say even those people who weren''t that close to the human Kingdom are also roaming around the human Kingdom right now without any kind of problem. First of all you can say the word association takes the responsibility of their safety so everyone knows that they will not face any kind of problem. But at the same time all the humans from the human Kingdom are also very good to everyone.


    First of all the humans were verythat this time thepetition will be organized in their Kingdom and at the same time, the king already promised everyone that after thepetition every human will receive some kind of reward from the warrior association. Same thing also happened with the Oni Kingdom. Every Kingdom where thepetition will be organized will be receiving resources from the warrior association and the other kingdoms and naturally every people of that Kingdom will get that.


    On the other hand you can say the humans are also very proud of their Warriors who will be participating in thepetition. Previous year they were also able to get one fast ce in the peak Epic grade match. Naturally, they also have confidence in their Warriors.


    Sam, Livia and the others naturally roaming around the human Kingdom while enjoying all of these. It was like a festival for everyone and because of this the humans and all the other people present in the human Kingdom also enjoyed all of these. The whole human Kingdom also got decorated.


    "Really, beautiful. It was like the festival of the gods. But it was much more beautifulpared to that time as the warrior association also participated to decorate our Kingdom. Really cannot recognise all of these ces that I am very familiar with."


    Maria said that while she was enjoying all those decorations and the beauty of her kingdom. Actually not only Maria but even Sam got confused for a second about those ces but fortunately he was already able to recognise everyone of those ces. But naturally in this one year many things also change and because of this at first it was quite hard for him to recognise those ces but after looking around carefully he already recognised those ces.


    At the same time you can say Sam was very curious about those friends of Livia and Maria. Even though they did not have a good rtionship with the human Kingdom, it looks like they are also enjoying all of these. Also it looks like they really were good friends of Maria and Livia. They were talking among each other while Sam did not participate in their conversation.


    Around that time he was busy observing the surrounding area and observing the security that was provided by the warrior association. You can say he already feels the observation of many Warriors that present on the street of the human Kingdom right now. Naturally those people most likely belong to the warrior association and they have the responsibility of safety so all the time they will observe the human Kingdom and the moment they will find any kind of suspicious movement, they will immediately take action against that.


    Also it looks like Maria most likely also came out for the first time out of the royal pce like this so naturally she also enjoyed being alongside those other princesses. But you can say Sam was very confused about those other princesses. He can understand the human king and the Oni king, who gave the permission to the human Princess and the Oni princess toe outside with him as they trust Sam. But why the hell did the elf princess, Druid princess, and the others get the permission from their family toe along with them while they did not have any kind of escort.


    Even though they had the shadow team who followed them all the time, still those people will only take action when the Life of The Princess will be in danger.


    ''Most likely, because of the security of the warrior association, those royal families did not think that much about the safety so they only sent the shadow team to protect all those princesses.''


    Sam guessed that. Actually that was the case. As every one from the royal family knows that this time the warrior association is taking the responsibility of the security so nothing will happen even if they try to go outside without any kind of protection. Also the good thing was that because tomorrow will be a very big day, you can see the security became stronger and alongside that every person also became more excited about tomorrow.


    Unfortunately Sam decided not to participate in thepetition because he needed to focus on something and wanted to break through as quickly as he could so that he could go back to his. First of all you can say when he looks at those decorations and all those atmospheres he suddenly begins to remember all those moments that happened in the central city when the annual collegepetition also happened. He also remembers that he and his friends were roaming around the central city like that before thepetition.


    Naturally he was missing his home and really wanted to go back as quickly as he could. But fortunately he still had some days so before that he wanted to see thepetition and if it was possible then go back to Oni Kingdom to meet the old king. Before anything he had some question that he wanted to ask that old man. Only after that he will ask that old man to send him to his world.


    You can say he already thinks that the old man already knew that he wasn''t from Terraria and came to Terraria from another. Even though you cannot hear any kind of rumors that a person from another is able to visit Terraria, that wasn''t impossible. As people from the terrier were able to travel to others, naturally it was also possible for any other people toe to Terraria.


    ____________________


    "Any update about the movement of those dark humans? Did they do something that could be dangerous?"


    Emma suddenly asked that question to Sam. Naturally she asked him those questions because she also knew most of the time Sampleted missions rted to those dark humans.


    " Well, at first you can say after the previous war, people who had the connection with Abyss humans or those dark humans, became more alert. So finding if they had any connection with those people was really hard. Even though you get the report that I had a 100% sessful rate on those missions but not every time I was able to seed on that as I also needed to get help from the warrior association in that matter. But I could tell you one thing that right now those abyss humans already decrease their movement and it looks like they almost went back to their Abyss world.


    But definitely that was in the caves as I already solve many missions that show me that those people are still present in Terraria. But look like after those previous wars they also suffered a very huge casualty and because of these right now they did not want toe into the LimeLight and because of these they also tried to hide themselves while trying to achieve their goal. But naturally the warrior association is also very alert about those Abyss humans, and any condition they won''t be given those Abyss humans the chance toplete their goal.


    But not only that, you can say the good thing happened after the war that many other Kingdom also became alert and every fighter or you can say the word warriors also became serious about their safety and the safety of their Kingdom. I think you also get to know that many more people began to join the warrior association to get Elite training so that they could also be more powerful Warriors and had the strength to fight Back those Abyss humans."


    Sam exins all of this to her while he almost finishes eating his food. Right now all of them are present inside of a restaurant. Naturally that wasn''t your normal restaurant, as it was called the warrior restaurant. Also it was a five star restaurant and because of this Maria and the others agreed toe inside of the restaurant without any problem.

 Chapter 571 571 - Going Back

    ?


    "Well, around this time you can say even the Oni Kingdom became very serious about those people and naturally our king already increased the security. Also will be very careful about those dark humans who could easily hide themselves.


    Unfortunately for any of those people because even if the try toe to our Kingdom they won''t be able to do that as the king already increases the security in the main gate and every people who wanted to enter the Oni Kingdom to go through those strong observation.


    But you can say not only inside the kingdom but we also became very alert about outside of the kingdom and because of these almost in every month the king will send the team to the danger zone to find if any suspicious people near the kingdom or not and even if they able to find any kind of trace of dark spiritual energy they would immediately inform the king and the warrior association.


    Fortunately until now nobody able to discover any trace like this so we can sure that those dark humans and those Abyss humans did not get close to our Kingdom. Also as you told I also think that most likely they suffer arge amount of casualty in those war. Because of these they did not wanted to reveal themselves that easily and right now they just hiding themselves.


    But really I hope that they just did not get those blood offering for their demon God. Also it really makes me wonder which Kingdom will support those kinds of people who need blood offering for the demon God."


    Emma says all of this to Sam who also listening all of this without saying anything. But you can say Sam already expected that kind of result as even for him to trace the dark spiritual energy became very hard because most likely every one of those Abyss humans or those dark humans right now already decided to go back to hiding.


    At this time while both Emma and Sam talking about all of this thing you can say Maria and her friends were talking among each other. If it was before then naturally they would talk about other thing but this time the natural begin to talk about Sam and you can say the Princess of the Elf kingdom along side with those other princesses has a strong curiosity about Sam.


    So natural you can say all this time they asking various question about him to Maria and Livia. Both of them also begin to answer everything that they know and they also telling everyone of them how did Sam previously help them to fight those Abyss humans. Also how did he help their Warriors when they could lost their life.


    ___________


    "What!!!! So he is the warrior who find about the motive of the Toron kingdom."


    Sometimeter, everyone of them get to know the most surprising thing. As you can tell even though they know that most likely it was a human warrior who discover about the motive of the Toron kingdom, but actually they did not get to know about that person that much. But right now they surprisingly get to know about the person who yed a big role in that war.


    Naturally that makes them more interested about that person. But unfortunately Maria and Livia did not able to give them the answer of when some decided to leave their Kingdom and decided to start his adventure. They told him that they did not get to call him all the time, because he wasn''t free every time and alsoter when he started to receive missions from the warrior association he became more busy.


    "Ohh!!! Guys, I remember something that previously when he was in my kingdom he also stay in our royal pce and I got to know is that he is very interested in books rted to old Monsters and book rted to other worlds. I also became busy with him reading about those books and really we get to know many monsters. At that time I get to know about one Monster that Sam was very curious about and that was the prime Dragon.


    Don''t know why but at that time I can feel after learning about that dragon Sam became more excited and only after that he stop reading books about the Monsters. After that he started to read books about other worlds. So, I predicted most likely he also very interested to travel thoses and wanted to see what kind of monster he will find in those ces."


    Livia exin all of this to everyone and naturally after hearing all of these Maria and the others became quite surprise that they never thought Sam will be interested in this type of matter. Well they could understand why he wanted to read book rted to the Monsters but not every people was very interested in other which did not have better environment than him and naturally if they go to those ces they won''t be able to became powerful as they will face many restriction in those ces.


    On the other hand, Sam did not had any idea which type of thing they were talking about but sometimeter he after finishing his food already told everyone that it was time to leave the restaurant. So wasting no time everyone of them begin to leave the restaurant and naturally they already continue there adventure in the human Kingdom.


    While traveling around they already get to know that the warrior association also prepare houses for everyone of those contestants who will be participate in thispetition. Not only that the warrior association also providing those participant with better training environment so that they could also prepare themselves for thepetition.


    Naturally at this time Sam asked everyone that if they did not wanted to practice. Most likely only then everyone of them begin to show Weird expressions. Naturally he could tell by one nce that everyone most likely forget about the training or mostly they already finished they are training and because of this, they were quite rxed.


    But then even Maria told everyone that they should go back to their pce because they also needed to prepare themselves for tomorrow. So with that even Sam also go back with Maria to the human pce where naturally the king already prepares the guest bedroom for him.


    While going back toward the Royal pce you can say he was also thinking about some important matter that he really needed to ask the old human king. Actually previously the old king told him that the space bridge that got created and using that you can go to the other was very difficult and you need to be very careful while using that because you could easily lost your way.


    So Sam was thinking how could he able to know which was the right direction to go. Previously because he knew that warriors were able to use the space bridge he did not ask that question but right now you can say he already prepared to use the space bridge so he decided to ask the old human king about this as that person also most likely knew he was very interested in this kind of thing.


    But at the same time you are also thinking what kind of resource he should bring back to the Eden blue that would be useful for everyone and naturally after when the core of the Eden blue mutated it would naturally increase the level of every Warriors present there and everyone of them at this time really needed powerful techniques.


    Also he did not think the Dungeons that are present in Eden blue level provide those kinds of powerful techniques to everyone because even as you can tell in the Terraria finding a techniques scroll was very difficult, so he also wanted to prepare for that.


    Not only that, at the same time he already decided after going back to Eden blue he will teach everyone of those people that he knows and have trust in them about the true spiritual technique because using that they would be able to absorb the true spiritual energy from any of those crystals. But he just hoped that they would be able to get at least 30% true spiritual essence from those crystals.


    Well you can say that every one of those spiritual crystals had that kind of spiritual essence in them but naturallypared to the normal essence the percentage of the true spiritual essence wasn''t that match and with that it would be very difficult for them to absorb true spiritual essence from those crystals.


    ________________________


    Sam did not know but when he will go back to Eden blue he will get to know that already many people know about true spiritual energy as it was his sister who decided to teach those people because she also haspletely trust in those people that they won''t use that new power to do bad things.


    To be continued___________

 Chapter 572 572 - Blade King

    ?


    Next day,


    Finally it is the day when thepetition will begin and naturally from the morning you can say the whole human Kingdom became busy because of thepetition. Evenpared to the previous day it became more lively and naturally everyone who came to the human Kingdom to watch thepetition was already preparing themselves to go to the arena where naturally the match would begin.


    The opening of thepetition will start at 8:00 a.m. so naturally before that everyone wanted to present in the arena. Sam also wakes up around 4:00 a.m. and after finishing his practice he already begins to get ready to go to the arena. Well he already got the VIP ticket from the human King so naturally he will go to the VIP section to watch thepetition.


    Unfortunately you can say that he did not get to know what will be the first match in thispetition. The human King only told him that the first match will be very interesting and every participant will go to a ce where they need to fight Monster to collect points. Naturally he is very familiar with this type ofpetition because during the college entrance examination he also did the same thing.


    So naturally he was also very excited to know about thepetition and around 7:30 a.m. he already began to go toward the arena. The human king and queen and all the other people almost went to the battle arena. When he came outside of the royal pce and began to walk toward the arena he could already see the crowd that was also going in the same direction. Not just only those people who came here to watch the match but even many people who came here to do business also became lively and naturally you can save various shops around the arena.


    Sam was already able to reach the battle arena around 7:45 a.m. and after going to the VIP section he already sat down in a corner from where he could already see the battle arena.Fortunately a big screen was also present in the VIP section and with that naturally they were able to see what will happen in the battle even though if they could use their spiritual vision or technique like that they could easily watch the match.


    Many people also did not want to use their technique and also not everyone had strong vision techniques like that so naturally the big screen will be a great help to them. At this time one by one all the participants begin toe to the battle arena. Fortunately the battle arena is big enough to hold everyone of those participants.


    On the other hand inside the VIP section he could already see many people present but fortunately everyone had a different room and with that nobody would be able to disturb him while he will be focusing on the match. Only for the royal family or people with special status. Naturally even if the king did not give him the VIP ticket he would still be able toe to the VIP section based on his status.


    ''Sigh,''


    Actually whileing toward the VIP room he already met many people and many people also recognised him. Naturally not everyone was able to recognise him but those people who had a deep impression on him already recognised him and they already came to him to ask about his situation. Most of the people who came to him to ask about his situation were also present in the war between the human Kingdom and the Toron kingdom.


    _______________


    "Wee everyone, I can already see that the whole arena is full with people and everyone is very excited for thepetition to start. Well, like you I am also very excited for thepetition but before thatte wille our vice president of the warrior association in the battle arena. Before thepetition started he wanted to give some points to all the participants and I hope every participant will take his word seriously.


    Many people most likely did not recognise that person but he is the de king. Most probably most of the people already hear the nickname of this person and this person wanted to give serious pointers to every participant so that they did not risk their life in thispetition."


    Sometimeter,


    A warrior from the warrior association came to the battle arena and he said that to everyone. Naturally the moment he finishes that every person present in the battle arena begins to p for the de king. Who wasn''t familiar with the de King because from children to old man already here about the achievement of this person.


    With that everyone begins to p and also very excited to see the de king in person. All the participants present in the battle arena also be excited the moment they hear the de king will be present there. Sometimeter you can already see a person suddenly appear in the battle arena. Naturally that person most likely uses the teleportation array toe there.


    On the other hand the moment he came to that ce you can say most of the people present in the battle arena already begin to feel the pressureing out from that person. But naturally that did not scare those people as they became more excited to see the de king in person.


    On the other hand The de King aftering to the battle arena already begins to observe all the participants of thispetition. He could already detail most of the people present there were quite excited but at the same time some of them also quite nervous. He just smiles toward those people to make them rx because naturally in front of his presence everyone of those participants is also feeling the pressure.


    "It is good to see that this many people decided to participate in thepetition. Not only that, I can also see many people who belong to the royal family also decided to participate in thispetition. Naturally this is a good thing as we will have more powerful warriors who could protect our Terraria if somehow those Demons or other dangerous creatures came to our world.


    Not only that, I can also see that everyone who participates in thispetition already prepares themselves for the intense battle and is ready to win thepetition. It is a good thing that we have this many Warriors. Now before anything I will tell you an important thing that in thispetition none of you will use virtual reality like the previous time because this time we will use the teleportation array to send you to a part of the danger zone where you will face Monsters.


    Many people most likely get more it about this situation because they could also face powerful Monsters but none of you have to worry about that because we will be always present there to prevent any of those powerful Monsters from attracting or interfering in yourpetition. So none of you have to worry about that.


    But we won''t interfere in thepetition until you do not press the help button. As you already know, the help button that is present in your watch can only be used when your life is in danger or you want to save us. So you also need to know the moment you will use that thing you will get disqualified from thepetition and you won''t be able to get any points after that.


    Not only that I hope everyone that only theary grade monsters won''t interfere with yourpetition so naturally you need to worry about those other Monsters. You can create a team and then participate in thispetition or you can go alone. That ispletely your choice and we won''t interfere with your choice.


    But I should tell you one thing that even if you face a big Monster none of you should underestimate any of them because you cannot guarantee The Monster will do anything surprising while their life will be in danger. So I hope every participant of thepetition stays prepared for that and also we will be counting the kill points based on the warrior grade.


    Also before thepetition everyone of you should know that you cannot use any type of forbidden artifact or technique that could harm the life of other participants. Also killing your fellow participant is not an option in thispetition and if you try to do that you will get seriously punished by the warrior association. Everyone of you after participating in thispetition will be our observation and we will observe you all the time so even if you try to do that thinking you could escape you should stay careful from us.


    As I told you and most probably everyone of you knows that we are doing thispetition to increase the power of the Warriors. So I did not want any of you to start killing each other."


    After saying all of these, the old man already finished his exnation and naturally after that the whole arena once again began to fill with the sound of pping. Naturally everyone thought that most likely like the previous year this time the participants will use virtual reality to go inside of a ce where they need to kill the monster. But unfortunately that wasn''t the case as they will really go to the danger zone where they needed to fight those Monsters.

 Chapter 573 573 - Going toward the Danger zone

    <h4>Chapter 573 Chapter 573 - Going toward the Danger zone</h4>


    Finally when the de king finished exining about the firstpetition naturally every person present in the battle arena became excited about that. The thing was that everyone thought this year everyone would go to the virtual reality to fight the Monsters but they never thought that the warrior association would create a teleportation array to send every participant in the real danger zone to fight the Monsters.


    Naturally, even all the fighters be excited about that as you cannot say they did not have the experience of fighting monsters in the danger zone butpared to the virtual reality had they needed to face the real danger and naturally they could also lose their life.


    So beside excitement you can say they also became quite alert about this. Warriors from the warrior association already announce that every participant will get 1 hour time to decide if they want to make a team or not and only after that they will go inside of the danger zone using the teleportation array.


    Also the good thing will be that everyone will be given the watch that has also the teleportation option if those people decided to praise the help option of the watch. Naturally, if those people really face the danger where they could lose their life they could easilye back to the battle arena.


    Also on the other hand the warrior association already prepared everything and because of this even though people who came to watch the match won''t be going inside of the danger zone but still they could see what was happening inside the danger zone through the monitoring system of the Warrior association.


    At first you can say when everyone here said that the participant will go to the danger zone they became quite surprised and also they became worried about the Monsters who will be too powerful for any of the warriors to handle as thoseary grade monsters.


    Fortunately, the warrior association will be handling all of these as they will prevent those powerful monsters froming inside of the range where naturally those needed to kill the other Monster to get points to win thepetition.


    Now back to the main matter, every participant already decided what to do as some of them already had their own team while some of them created their new team. You can say most of the people also know that if they decided to go inside of this dangerous zone alone then that could be risky and with that they won''t be able to gather that many points. So naturally most of them needed to create a team and they will go inside of the danger zone as a team.


    Livia, Emma, Maria, Ruri, Elisa, Hiori, Tiona and Nisha already decided to go to the danger zone as a team. But you can say that Emma could go to another team as that will be beneficial for her but she also had the responsibility to protect our sister and the friend of her sisters so naturally she decided to go with them in the danger zone and even with that she had the confidence to gather points.


    The Oni Prince Lio, the human prince Jackson alongside with other people also created their own team. Naturally they will also go inside of the danger zone as a team. Not only them but one by one every participant present their begin to join or create teams and naturally in just one hour they already decided what to do.


    All this time all the people present in the battle arena were looking at the participants while they were creating their team and the thing was that everyone also knew that going inside of the danger zone alone would be dangerous and that they wouldn''t be able to gather that many points. The risk of getting eliminated will be high in that matter, and because of this, in the end you can say none of the participants wanted to go inside of the danger zone alone.


    _________________________


    "Haha¡­ I bet if you also participate in thispetition then you most likely decided to go inside of the danger zone alone."


    The oni King began tough like that when he saw his children already creating their own team. Not only him but at the same time the human King also begins tough like that because he also thinks that Sam will definitely go alone if he also participates in thispetition.


    Previously when Sam came inside of the VIP room naturally he was alone inside of the room but sometimeter the human king and the queen alongside Oni king and queen also came to that VIP room and sat down beside Sam.


    Now before anything you should know that Sam wasn''t familiar with those queens as most of the times he just had meetings with the kings and because of this, suddenly when those queens begin to ask him many questions he also begins to feel ufortable and awkward.


    But fortunately the kings most likely understood his awkwardness and with that they decided to talk about what he would do if he also participated in thepetition. Naturally both the kings are very familiar with Sam and they also know you definitely do that as he did not like to create any team.


    "Sigh¡­ Sam if you are also participating in thispetition then it would be good for our Oni Kingdom. You are a warrior of the Oni Kingdom, if you participate in thepetition then most likely we would be able to get first ce in thispetition."


    The Oni King Said that.


    " No¡­ participate in thispetition then definitely he would participate as a representative of the human Kingdom. So don''t think about it."


    Naturally the moment Oni king said that the human King also responded like that and with that both of the kings were having a staring contest with each other.


    "Haha¡­ forget about them Sam. When you areing back to Oni Kingdom. Unfortunately when previously you came to our Kingdom I wasn''t present there as I went to see my mother in a different Kingdom. But I already heard about you from my husband and also from my daughter. So I really wanted to cook food for you to enjoy as you already help my daughter as well as the kingdom."


    " Well, before he goes to your kingdom naturally I also needed to arrange a banquet for Sam as he also helps our human Kingdom so much. Naturally if it isn''t for him then most likely we won''t be able to get to know any information about those Toron people."


    " Haha¡­ you are right. To tell you the truth, many people already came to our Kingdom to get information about you as we told the warrior association to hide the information and also as you begin to receive mission from the warrior association they naturally begin to protect your information and with that even if people wanted to look at your information they did not have the authority."


    Naturally when both the kings having a staring contest the queens begin to said all of this to him and naturally, after hearing thest part he also became surprised as he did not had any idea that his information got protected by the warrior association and even people wanted to see that they did not have the authority do that.


    ________________________


    "Ladies and gentlemen, finally all the participants have already decided how to enter the dangerous zone and I can see that everyone has already created their team and wanted to go to the danger zone like this. Naturally that is a good decision and with that they would be able to gather more points and did not have the risk to get eliminated that easily. So wasting no time, let''s finally start thepetition."


    On the other hand the warrior from the warrior association already came to the battle arena and finally announced that to everyone. Naturally this is the time to start thepetition and with that you can suddenly see in the main battle arena a big symbol created by the de king. Naturally that is the teleportation array and instantly the host of thepetition begins to tell that every team shoulde to that teleportation array one by one as they will get sent to the danger zone.


    While using the teleportation array the teammates needed to hold their hand so that they did not get separated when they went to the danger zone. First of all you can say every one of them will randomly appear in a ce, so if every team wants to appear in the same ce then they need to hold their hand so that the teleportation array sends them to the same ce.


    Finally with that one by one every team already begins to go to the teleportation array and instantly the warrior of the warrior association activates in the teleportation array using the spiritual energy and instantly you can say the team gets teleported to the Danger zone.

 Chapter 574 574 - Checking the surrounding area

    <h4>Chapter 574 Chapter 574 - Checking the surrounding area</h4>


    Emma and the others also went toward the teleportation array and everyone of them held their hand. Instantly, the whole teleportation array begins to shine and alongside with them those other people already disappear from that ce.


    But that wasn''t over as you can see many more people still needed to go to the danger zone and one by one everyone of them was also going to the teleportation array and at once you can say almost 42 to 45 teams were able to go to the danger zone.


    But naturally as you can see the number of those teams is much more and because of this it will need much time to send everyone of them into the danger zone. Naturally, that also very existing work for all the Warriors of the warrior association and because of these the warrior association also prepared a second and third group of Warriors who will take after that work when the first team will get exhaustedpletely.


    On the other hand,


    In the big screen you can see everyone of those teams who are already able to reach the danger zone. Naturally the Warrior association now shows everyone of those teams one by one and with that everyone also gets the situation of those Warriors who are already able to go inside of the danger zone.


    At this time you can see every person appear in a different position alongside their team and the first task of those people will be to understand their surrounding area and after that they will start hunting the Monsters.


    They also needed to understand if the Monsters around them were powerful or not because that would decide if they would be able to fight those Monsters or not. Suppose a team where everyone around Elite grade meets Monsters who are already able to reach the peak Epic grade, naturally that would be an impossible thing for those Warriors to fight those Monsters and at any condition they needed to escape from that ce.


    That is very risky for everyone and also if they did not want to get eliminated just aftering inside of the danger zone they should first understand the situation.


    It is a very good thing that a veryrge area of the danger zone got selected for thispetition and because of this, every team who will be participating in thispetition will being to a different ce and naturally they will not face each other just aftering inside of the danger zone.


    One thing you should know is that a team could also challenge other teams to take the points from them. So naturally every team did not want to meet other teams the moment they came inside of the danger zone.


    Now in the big screen that is present in the VIP room where Sam and the others are looking already showing the situation of those Warriors and naturally sometimeter it already shows the situation of Maria and the others. They sessfully came to the danger zone and right now they are in a ce where just in front of them you can see a river present and fortunately Emma is already trying to observe the situation around her.


    Naturally, before anything she wanted to find the grade of the Monsters that will be present in that area. If everyone of those Monsters will be around Epic grade, they need to be dangerous for Maria and the others.


    Fortunately it did not take her that much time to understand the situation around her and with that she also gave Green signal to everyone. Maria, Livia, Ruri and others also observe the surrounding area all this time but they already rx a little when they get the green signal from Emma.


    See already inform everyone of them that the monster around them will be around intermediate elite grade, so with that they did not have to worry. Emma did not even finish exining the situation when she directly felt the attacking from behind. Butpared to that attack she was faster and already you can see, she disappeared from that ce.


    But it did not over there as in the next second air bullets directly went toward those Monsters that attacked her previously. Emma, naturally, is the one who attacks those Monsters. She attacks those Monsters even without looking at them as she already knows the location of those Monsters.


    "Boom!!!"


    One by one, everyone of those Monsters got hit by the air bullets and naturally at the same time all the ces that the air bullets hit exploded. In the next second you can hear the crying voice of those Monsters but this time Maria and the others already reacted and they also already began to attack toward that ce.


    Fireball, thunder bullets, water bullets, Bloody vines, air des, light Spears, de strikes, one by one everyone of those attacked begin to go towards Monsters and with that naturally those Monsters did not even get the time to do anything or counter attack.


    Once again that area exploded because of those attacks and in the next second everyone of them already can see that they got a point in their watch. On the other hand when theyer of smoke got cleared they finally were able to see the Monsters. Those are the frog Monsters that usually live in the river and naturally those Monsters thought they were able to attack them sneakily.


    But instantly they became alert as one by one they could already hear the sound of those frogs crying. It looks like previously the crying voice of those frogs also attracts the attention of other Monsters and with that those frog Monsters already begin toe out from the rivers and wasting no time they already begin to shoot poison toward Maria and the others.


    Everything happens very quickly. You can say before those Monsters good came outside of the river they tried to shoot toward the direction where Maria and her teammates were also preparing for the counter attacks.


    The first rule of the Dungeon will be that you will never rest and even if you kill a group of Monster you need to prepare to attack the next group of Monster who would probably attack them in the next second.


    Naturally,


    Because of this,


    They are already able to prepare their attacks once again and one second attack toward those Monsters. But it looks like even with their attack they won''t be able to block everyone of those poison bullets. Those Monsters keep shooting those poison bullets that had violet color and naturally everyone also knows that if they got touched by that poison then it would be dangerous if they instantly did not take the antidote.


    Even with just a single touch the poison would immediately affect the nervous system of their body and instantly it will block the cirction of their blood and spiritual energy. So with that you can already tell?poison is also very dangerous.


    Also they are not able to fully counter attack those poison bullets as one by one those Monsters just keep shooting and also you can say by the sh between their attack those poison also spreading everywhere in that ce. The moment those poison falls on the trees, even those trees begin to get affected by that.


    Instantly it looks like the vitality of the trees begin to suck away, buy something and injust 5 seconds everyone of those trees already fall down. On the other hand the moment Maria and the others already realize that they won''t be able to fully counter attack those poison bullets they already created the spiritual barrier in front of them and at the same time Emma also did the same thing.


    But that wasn''t over as she was already preparing the next attack and this time this will be a powerful attack that wille from the sky.


    Instantly, those poison bullets begin to hit The Spiritual barrier in front of them but unfortunately even with their poisonous effect those poison bullets are unable to do anything to Maria and the others. The power of that spiritual barrier already became very powerful as everyone channeled their spiritual energy and because of that a single spiritual barrier was created.


    In the next second you can say one by one those frogs begin to be cut down by the air des that suddenly fall on them. Naturally, Emma, who is doing all of this.


    ___________________


    Sometimeter the danger that previously could affect Maria the others already decreases and because of this they also already begin to attack those Monsters once again and this time they just keep attacking them without giving those Monsters the time to fight back. They wanted to kill them as quickly as they could to show they were not able to call for reinforcement and also naturally they kept getting points the moment they were able to kill those Monsters.

 Chapter 575 575 - Killing monsters

    <h4>Chapter 575 Chapter 575 - Killing monsters</h4>


    Emma and the others begin to follow the river while they advance in that ce. First of all, they decided to follow the river as many Monsters came out from the rivers and naturally they also got points after killing them. Also they decided that after killing some more monsters they will go inside of the forest to kill more monsters.


    Compared to the Monsters of the rivers you can say killing the Monsters of the forest will be far more dangerous as they would be able to hide themselves very clearly in the forest and naturally to attack them those monsters did not need toe out from their hiding ce.


    Until now every Monsters that came out from the rivers needed toe out from the water to attack them and that is the advantage they get while following the river. But the problem is that they also know not every Monster present in the river dide out of the water to attack them as many feast type Monsters also appear and they could naturally attack them, even when they are hiding in the water.


    The good thing is that until now they did not see any other team near them so that is a good thing for everyone. First of all any team or even they could challenge any team for their points and naturally in the challenge both of the team leaders fight each other and the winner will get all the points of the loser team.


    If they meet any team which only had elite grade warriors, then Epic grade Warriors, then naturally they did not have the slightest chance to win that fight. You can say Maria, Livia, Ruri and the others were peak Elite grade warriors, only Emma present there was a peak Epic grade Warriors, naturally if a powerful team like that challenge them then they would needed to ept the defeat


    This is also a reason that they followed the river until now but naturally they need to change their direction after sometimeter because most likely like them many people also did the same thing.


    Sometimeter,


    At this time, Livia and her teammates just kill thest water lizard and with that they already got the points of killing those Monsters. Also they already put all the loot that they get after killing those Monsters in their storage. After that Emma told them that it is time to rest.


    They fight those water lizards for sometime and naturally in that fight they already lose much of their spiritual energy and they need to recover that spiritual energy to fight the next group of Monsters.


    On the other hand, fighting the water lizard also wasn''t easy as those Monsters had the poison element alongside while they could also use the water element. Naturally using the water elements they could travel fast inside the water and instantly they begin to shoot water bullets toward them even without going out of the water.


    Not just water bullets but at the same time you can say they control those waters and try to grab them using the water hands. Also you should know that the color of that water was fully green and it contained deadly poison.


    Like those poisonous frogs, water lizards are also very deadly and naturally they also have powerful poisons. Fortunately, they are already able to protect themselves using the spiritual barrier in front of them and also at the same time Emma takes the lead to kill most of them while the remaining Monsters get killed by Maria and the others.


    If you are thinking that she is taking the chance to get more points then you are wrong. She just decreased the danger of those Monsters and naturally after that she also gave a chance to Maria and the others to attack those Monsters so with that she also did not get that much point.


    Naturally if she joined any group of Epic grade Warriors, then most likely right now she would have much more points but unfortunately she did not decide to join that as she only wanted to follow Maria and the others. Emma did not care about that as her main motive is to protect Livia from this kind of danger. Winning thepetition really doesn''t matter for her.


    Now back to main matter,


    They are already using the life detection device. Naturally that got created in the human Kingdom and other than the human Kingdom only the Oni Kingdom had that technology. Ruri, Elisa and the others naturally get surprised by that device and they really get surprised when they are able to know what is the main capability of that device.


    Evenpared to their observation technique the device is far more powerful and it has the ability to fully observe 15 to 20 km area around. Naturally when they looked at the device screen they could already see many Monsters present in those ces but fortunately none of the Monstersing toward.


    The good thing is that even looking at the device screen they did not find any other life signal other than those monsters so with that they became sure that no Warrior was present near them. At this time only the Monsters who hiding inside the water did not show up in the device but the moment they tried to get out of the water they would immediately get detected by the device.


    The Spiritual wave of the device was not able to enter the water so naturally the Monsters who hid themselves inside the water won''t be able to get detected by the device. But that doesn''t really matter to them as they could already see many Monsters that were alsoing out of the waters and even not far away from the location they could see many Monsters.


    Fortunately, they already found a good ce to hide while recovering their spiritual energy and strength. At the same time they are also deciding in which direction they should go next to kill more Monsters and to get more pointspared to before. First of all this is not easy for any of them to fight arge number of Monsters at once but at the same time to get the points they need to do something like that.


    But suddenly the device began to send them the danger signal as Monsters already came very close to them. Those Monsters suddenly came out of the ground and naturally they came near them using the ground travel technique or something like that.


    It looks like those Monsters already found the location of them so they are alreadying toward them while using the ground travel technique once again. If you are wondering how they knew those Monsters using the ground travel technique, then in the device screen they could see those monsters traveling very quickly and at the same time every one of those trees present there did not have any kind of effect on those Monsters.


    You should know that even those trees have different kinds of signals that you can see inside the device so naturally in the device they could see those monsters did not get any kind of prevention from any of the trees, so with that they get to understand this most likely the case.


    Now the moment everyone realizes that they already became prepared to face those Monsters even though they did not fully recover their Spiritual energy. Sometimeter they could already feel the vibration that naturally came out from the underground and with that it became definitely sure that those Monsters were using some kind Earth technique.


    The good thing is that they could only see 20 of those gray signals that naturally came out from those Monsters. Even though Maria and the teammates did not know about the power of those Monsters but they had the confidence to take them as they know that no powerful Monster would appear in that ce and if a strong Monster would appear in that ce then Emma would already tell them about this.


    After 5 minutester,


    Right now they have alreadye out from their hiding ce and the ground beneath their food has already disappeared. And many mouths also came out from that ce. Fortunately they already jump away from that ce and instantly they begin to attack those Monsters the moment they try toe out of the ground.


    In front of their quick response naturally those Monsters were unable to respond that quickly and with that 6 of them already died and 6 of them got seriously injured. While the remaining Monsters still exist inside the underground and they still have note out.


    Emma, and the others alreadynded on the ground and instantly they can feel the vibration once again present in the ground and naturally everyone of those Monsters who already went inside of the underground once again trying to attack them using the same technique.


    But fortunatelypared to those Monsters, Maria and the others much faster and they were already released from which ce those monsters would naturallye outside.

 Chapter 576 576 - The team of Prince

    <h4>Chapter 576 Chapter 576 - The team of Prince</h4>


    Right now, you can also see that the team of the prince of the human Kingdom, prince of the Oni Kingdom, and some other Prince of different kingdoms also present their. Naturally, as they already reach the Early Epic grade, they decided to start hunting the Monsters that are most likely around Early Epic grade.


    Previously after using the teleportation array they came to an area where they could only find those Elite grade monsters. But as you know they wanted to fight stronger monsters. Most of the time they ignored those Monsters and continued to advance.


    So at first they did not get that much point because they did not kill much of those monsters, but when you can say they began to face those peak Epic grade monsters, they started fighting them seriously as also they were getting points just after killing those Monsters.


    First of all they also know that they did not know how long it would take them to find those early Epic grade monsters, so they did not want to be left behind by those other Warriors. Because of this they already started hunting those Monsters as they could give him some challenge and also after killing them they would get points.


    In the end the points will count and the highest point holder will be the winner of this firstpetition. Actually if anyone participated in this pastpetition individually without any team then he would win thatpetition individually but the thing was different when everyone participated in thispetition as a team.


    So in the end, the total points of the team will also count along with the individual points. Naturally individually someone would get the first ce but at the same time their team would also get the first ce if they were able to earn enough points to get that ce.


    So naturally everyone of those Princes wanted to win thispetition individually and also wanted topete as a team. They did not have to worry about those other grade Warriors warriors as they would have their ownpetition. As you know, from every warrior grade someone will get first ce along with the team who is also able to gather most of the points.


    But at the same time they are also very serious about their surrounding area as if any other team came near them and decided to challenge them then it could be dangerous or it could be easy for them to win more points.


    First of all if more powerful Warriorspared to them came near them then it would be dangerous but if a team that did not have that much powerful Warriors came near them then it would be easy for them to win the points.


    Unfortunately right now they are not able to see each other''s rank so they cannot tell which team and which individual person gets the most points right now. But if thepetition was the same as before then they would be able to know that from yesterday so they did not have to worry about that much until then and wanted to gather as many points as they could.


    Actually the twist of thispetition will be the first position holder and the team who also get the first position will be in a difficult ce because for sometime their position will get revealed by the warrior association to everyone and naturally after that many people will decide to target them and want to get the point from them.


    6 months ago something like that also happened and naturally the first position holder at that time got challenged by most of the people who came after them. Until thepetition is over, nothing can happen and you can suddenly get more points by winning the challenge or you get nothing.


    Because of this, naturally everyone is also very careful about that matter. Sometimeter, they suddenly get attacked by some Monsters which can control the earth element and with that the ground beneath their food already got shifted and Earth spike instantly got created.


    Fortunately everyone of them is able to react on time and with that they already Dodge everyone of those Earth spikes. Not only that, they also get to see the Monsters that are attacking them from a distance.


    Those Monsters called the Grounder. They look like a mouse but they have a bigger shape and also if you look at their face then they have a different kind of facepared to your normal mouse. Those monsters did not have any mouth or something like that but that does not mean they were unable to eat anything.


    The mouth of those Monsters was present in their face but it was present in their stomach. Now naturally those Monsters did not finish attacking them as they began to create more ground spikes and also many of them were already using the ground travel technique toe toward them.


    But even with that those Monsters were just only peak Elite grade. For all those Princes they are already able to change the location of those Monsters through the vibration that is happening in the ground because those Monsters use their technique.


    On the other hand if you are thinking about those ground spikes then it is also unable to do anything to them as they also can feel the spiritual fluctuation the moment it will appear in the ground and instantly with that they are able to dodge that ce to escape from those attacks.


    Also even if they can use the long distance attack but they wasn''t using that right now as they wanted to save more spiritual energy to face more powerful Monsters and also they did not wanted to rest that much to recover their spiritual energy, show the nning to attack those Monsters using their weapons and because of this, they already advance toward those Monsters that still did not escape using the ground travel technique.


    Until now those Monsters did not escape and because of these all those Princes will not give those Monsters any chance to escape right now. Not only just those ground spikes but also you can say sometimes those Monsters also suddenly created holes beneath their feet but fortunately they were already able to dodge those attacks and at the same they already came very close to those Monsters.


    _________________________


    Finally after killing all the Monsters that most likely attacked them all the time they were already thinking about those Monsters that were traveling using the ground travel technique. Those Monster Steel did note out of the ground as they already knew the danger and most likely wanted to escape.


    Naturally, the prince of the human Kingdom and his teammates did not want that to happen so they already begin to feel the vibration that is creating in the ground and already sensing that they already attack the ce where they are able to see 5 of those Grounder. But that wasn''t over and three of them decided to attack other ces where they were still able to feel the vibration while two of them would kill those 5 Monsters.


    Without giving any chance to react, all of them attack those Monsters as quickly as they can and naturally with just 10 minutes they are able to kill all the Monsters and already get the points.


    After that they begin to advance once again but this time as you can see the prince of the human Kingdom and also the prince of the Oni Kingdom using the life detection device to know about the Monsters that present near them.


    Why should they not use the device that could easily help to find Monsters if those Monsters suddenly came near them. Fortunately using the life detection device they are already able to find the next group of Monsters that are most likely 5 km away from them. With that wasting no time they already begin to go toward that ce.


    __________________________


    Now Livia and her teammates came back, they already killed many Monsters and also left the river and already came inside of that deep forest.


    Currently they are fighting some cat like Monsters who naturally have more speed and also they can control the Lightning element. With that those Monsters became more dangerous for them to handle. Not only are those Monsters very fast, but at the same time you can say they also have strong power in theirke and with that they could also give you that lightning kick.


    Fighting those Monsters really wasn''t easy but at the same time those Monsters had weaknesses and that was that they did not have strong defenses. So naturally Maria and her teammates used that weakness to kill them and until now they were already able to kill 5 of those Monsters but on the other hand 15 of them still left in that ce. Naturally this is the first time they faced a situation like this Where Monsters had the advantage of speed and maria and the others taking the defense position.

 Chapter 577 577 - Lighting cats

    <h4>Chapter 577 Chapter 577 - Lighting cats</h4>


    In front of them a powerful spiritual barrier got created and because of that everyone of them did not get hard by those lightning bolts that directly came toward that direction


    But that was not the only attack that those lightning cats used on them as those cats also used their lightning power to instantlye in front of the spiritual barrier and in the next again attack The Spiritual barrier with their lightning ws.


    So naturally at this time Maria and her teammates are only able to maintain the spiritual barrier and wait for the right time to attack those Monsters. Now everyone knows before this type of Monsters who had the advantage of speed they cannot be reckless and they need to wait for the right time to attack those Monsters.


    Emma was the one who created that barrier and naturally she was the one who protected everyone using that barrier. But at the same time you can say she is also looking for the chance to attack them. First of all, if she was alone in that ce then she would definitely take action but this time she also needs to protect everyone of her teammates, so she is naturally unable to focus on those Monsterspletely.


    Suddenly two Monsters that just appear in front of the spiritual barrier and attack The Spiritual barrier using their lighting w, already fall down. Naturally both of them died by the sudden attack from Emma. She instantly uses her attack on those two Monsters the moment they get close to the barrier.


    If you are wondering how she killed those Monsters then it is because she uses the air element to create countless small air des. Those air des directly attack those Monsters the moment they get close to The Spiritual barrier and with that those Monsters did not even have the chance to do anything or escape.


    But it looks like because both of the monsters suddenly died, those other Monsters became more angry and wild and because of that in the next second you can see the attack from those Monsters already increase. One by one many lightning bolts begin to hit The Spiritual barrier, but not only that at the same time all the Monsters attack them from different directions.


    If you are wondering why maria and the others did not attacking at this time then naturally they won''t be able to react in front of the speed of those Monster so they waiting for the right time and the right time will be when those Monsters won''t be able to use their full speed as they would be exhausted.


    That would be the perfect time for them to attack those Monsters and naturally all this time they are just waiting for that time. Naturally they could also take risk to kill those Monsters but why should they take risk in a battle like that where they could just wait and when it will be the right time they will attack those Monsters.


    First of all you should know that Emma was the leader of that group and nobody had anyints about that. Also she was the one who came up with that n so naturally everyone also agreed with that n.


    First of all if you read the details about those lightning cats then you would be able to know that even though those Monsters had high speed and strain the but naturally the defense of those Monsters wasn''t that strong and also the stamina of those Monsters also wasn''t that big.


    Even though those Monsters could use the speed to ovee their defense weakness, unfortunately they did not ovee the weakness of their stamina. First of all because of using the lightning element naturally they consume more spiritual energypared to your normal element and also naturally those monsters did not have spiritual control that could help them not to waste spiritual energy.


    Also the important thing was that using the lightning element naturally required a high amount of spiritual energy along with a high amount of stamina. Both spiritual energy and the stamina of that person will get consumed when that person will try to use the lightning element.


    Because of this you can say every Warriors who could use the lightning element wanted to finish their fight as quickly as they can because besides losing their spiritual energy they also losing their stamina and naturallypared to any other warriors they won''t be able to fight that long.


    Now back to the main matter, those Monsters attacking them for almost 30 minutes so they are also very close to getting exhausted and that would be the time when Maria and the others will take action. Emma, at this time one by one slowly reducing the number of those Monsters, soter Maria and the others won''t have any kind of problem.


    Also if you are wondering would she able to maintain that''s spiritual barrier until that then she would able to do that as even until now she just only uses 30% of his spiritual energy and even if she maintain the spiritual barrier for more than 30 minutes then she would be using only 45 to 50% of her Spiritual energy.


    On the other hand,


    Livia and the others had full confidence in Emma. Because of this, they did not think about the defense or The Spiritual barrier and just waited for the right time to attack those Monsters. Everyone could already see that the speed of those Monsters had already decreasedpared to before but they still wanted to wait a few more minutes and after that naturally they would take action.


    But the thing was that they cannot also dy that long because if those monsters suddenly sense the danger then they would immediately try to escape from that ce. If that happened then it would be hard for Maria and the others to kill those Monsters Monsters when they will feel the danger.


    __________________


    "Sigh, I can tell Emma would have already killed all the Monsters but unfortunately she decided to go with Livia, Maria and their friends. Naturally she won''t be able to get that many points if she stays with that group but also it looks like she really did not want to leave the group.


    Well I can rte to that, as I also won''t be changed by my teammates even if they are weakpared to me. But I can also see most likely they are already nning to challenge all the powerful peak Elite grade monsters. Naturally with that she and the others would be able to get more points and also I hope that would be enough for them to get a position in this battle."


    At this time in the VIP room where you can see some and both the human king and the Oni king sitting with their queens, looking at the big screen that is present in their room.


    Before anything you should know that for all the VIPs they had a choice to watch whoever they wanted to watch. So naturally the human king and the Oni king would choose to watch the battle of Emma, Livia, Maria and their teammates.


    At this time, the Oni king said that with a sigh. First of all he also knows that Emma thinks of Livia as her younger sister, so she will definitely protect her at any cost and most likely this was the big reason that Emma did not join any other team.


    But on the other hand he and his queen also started to worry if Mr was not able to collect enough points to get a position in the top 10 ce. Naturally they hope that Emma would gets a position.


    "Don''t worry about that. I think you already notice thatpared to before, they are fighting more Monsters and trying to kill as many Monsters as they can. Naturally they also wanted to increase the speed and I can see with the help of the speed of them up killing those Monsters already increased.


    Also don''t forget they could challenge any other team to get their points and with that they really had the chance to get the position in the top 10 position so don''t worry about that. But on the other hand as you can see our daughters really became more powerfulpared to before and with the guidance of Emma they really understand the situation more clearly."


    The human king said that. Naturally all the other people present there agree with him as the number of those Monsters really increased . And with that the points that the gathering also increased all this time. Also the good thing was that before participating in thispetition they naturally needed to learn about many monsters so they could also get to know about the weaknesses of those Monsters.


    So naturally they also know the weakness of those lightning cats and just wait for the right time to take the advantage because of the weakness and kill those Monsters.

 Chapter 578 578 - Discussion

    <h4>Chapter 578 Chapter 578 - Discussion</h4>


    Finally, they got the chance to attack those monsters. Right now if you look at those Monsters then you will see they are already very low on stamina as their speed already decreases and also most likely The Spiritual energy of those Monsters also decrease.


    Maria and others this time wasting no time already begin to attack those Monsters using their full power and naturally they did not want to give those Monsters any time to react or escape from that ce. Emma also wasn''t slow as she quickly deactivated the spiritual barrier and also began to kill those lightning cats alongside Maria and the others.


    On the other hand, even though lightning acts very low on stamina and spiritual energy, when they notice that the enemy begins to attack them and has already killed many of their teammates, they decide to use their remaining power as they want to create a strong lightning attack to kill their enemy.


    Unfortunately, only a few of them are able to do that while the remaining Monsters get killed by Maria and the others. Those remaining Monsters also got killed but you can say because they already used the attack the dark clouds already begin to gather about their head. In the next second you can see many lightning bolts begin to go toward Maria and the others.


    Fortunately, Emma already expected something like this and because of this the moment those lightning bolts begin toe toward their direction she already created the spiritual barrier once again. On the other hand, Maria, Livia and others had full trust in her so they did not worry about those lightning bolts.


    Before anything you can say Ruri, Elisa and the others at first did not have that much trust on Emma. Naturally they were also very alert about her at the beginning butpared to before right now they had full trust in that person. Naturally if Emma was a human body then it will take more time for them to trust that person but as she was a Oni human, Ruri, Elisa and the others already gain the trust.


    Now after killing those Monsters and all did you when those lighting bolts faded away from that ce they began to collect all the loot. Not only that but at the same time you can say they already get the points after killing those Monsters.


    ______________


    "Sigh, I really wanted to know whose team is taking the lead right now and who is the first position holder. Naturally the warrior association will reveal the location of that person and the team which also gets the first position in team ranking."


    Livia said that. Currently if you look around them then you will see they were inside a cave. They created that ce to rest. Aspared to resting in a openspace, they would feel more safe inside a cave.


    Naturally, Livia at this time told that to everyone. Actually not just only her but everyone of them also wanted to know about their team rankingpared to other teams. Not only the team ranking but they also wanted to know their individual rankingpared to other peoples.


    "Don''t worry about that, most likely the day after tomorrow will be the day when the warrior association will reveal the ranking and we will be able to get to know who is the current first position holder and which team is the first position holder in the team ranking.


    Naturally after that the person who is the first position holder in individual ranking and the team who is the first position holder in the team ranking will get attacked by many other Warriors continuously. If they really did not have the strength toe to attack they would naturally lose their ranking. "


    " Hmm¡­ you are right but at the same time I am also very curious about the result of our brother''s team. Ruri, even your big brother, was also present in that group, so I really wanted to know what the result was. But really we just needed to wait two more days to get the result."


    Like this, while resting they also discuss other teams. Naturally they are already using the life detection device to look at their surrounding area and naturally if any Monsterse in the range of that device they will immediately get to know about that. On the other hand you really have to say that the warrior association picked a very big area for thispetition as even though one day was already over they did not find any team near them.


    First of all, almost 100k people participated in thispetition and naturally everyone had their own team. So even with that until now they did not meet any other team.


    ___________________


    On the other hand came back to the human Kingdom. Right now many people have gone back to their hotel rooms to rest or to eat something. Because of this if you look at the stadium then it was almost emptypared to before.


    But the thing was that if those people wanted to look at the situation of those Warriors who participated in thepetition then they would naturally need toe back to the stadium to look at the big screen. Because other than the stadium the situation did not start broadcasting thispetition.


    Actually they will start broadcasting this from tomorrow as they also wanted to give every team who participates in thispetition the time to gain some points and only after that the warrior association will start broadcasting thispetition.


    On the other hand every one of those VIP rooms had a different kind of arrangement. First of all they did not have to worry about food as the authority already provided them with food. It was just if they wanted to be raised then they needed to go back to their rooms. Naturally no people from the VIP rooms wanted to do that as they were more excited to look at the screen to see everyone.


    Naturally many people from their Kingdom also participate in thatpetition and they just wanted to know what was the condition of the people and if it was possible then they also want to know the rank of them.


    _____________________


    Currently if you look at the big screen then you can see it was showing the situation of every participant one by one and all the VIPs had more advantage. Naturally they get the chance to observe anyone individually if they want to.


    On the other hand those other people who weren''t VIPs will get to see what the warrior association was showing them. Naturally nobody had inin about that as the warrior association one by one showing every team that participate in thispetition and also if something interesting happening with any team they will immediately show that.


    Until now they already saw many teams who faced many strong Monsters and some of the teams also already faced intermediate Epic grade monsters. It was just that every team wanted to avoid those peak Epic grade monsters on their first day. Even if their team had the strength to face those Monsters they did not want to do that.


    Before anything, all of them wanted to gain some points and only after that they would start fighting those powerful Monsters. Also everyone was waiting for the Warrior association to reveal the ranking to everyone.


    Naturally the first position holder would be in danger after that but this was the rule of thepetition so naturally that team and that individual who got the first position would need to be more careful. Naturally as the position of that team and that individual person will get revealed to everyone they would be needed to prepare themselves to face arge number of people one after another and if they lost then they need to start from the beginning.


    Something you need to know is that if you Challenge a team and that team loses, then that team would lose points that they are holding right now so naturally at the time they would have 0 points. Because of these they would need to start from the beginning.


    If you look at the warrior association that was present in the human Kingdom then you will see every higher ups of the warrior association present there became busy. First of all, they needed to maintain the security of the human Kingdom but at the same time they also needed to maintain the security of that part of the danger zone where every participant was fighting to get points.


    At this time many of their Warriors already get attacked by thoseary grade Monsters. But naturally they were already able to kill many of them and the remaining Monsters got scared. As many legendary grade Warriors of the warrior association also present there. Naturally, all of them had very high positions in the warrior association.


    As those people did not want anything to happen during thispetition they personally went to the danger zone to scare those monsters so that they did not get close to those ces.

 Chapter 579 579 - Invisible Slayer

    ?


    Sam, also did not go back to the Royal pce. He is also present in the VIP room alongside Oni king and queen, human king and queen. Naturally as their daughter and their sons were togethers, because of this, they also did not have to change the camera view present on the screen.


    They could already see that Maria and the others already begin to advance in the forest and even though they were facing many powerful Monsters that they never faced before, they are still adapting in that tough situation while also collecting many points.


    Fortunately until now they did not face any other teams and because of this, they did not have to challenge anyone. First of all facing another team is not a bad thing because it could also give them a chance to gain all the points that the other team had with them. But at the same time it is also risky because if they face a very powerful team then naturally they would be the one who loses all of their points.


    From Maria to Emma, everyone will lose their point individually and in the end they won''t start from the beginning. Because of this, you can say not only just their team but every team that present inside the dangerous zone did not want to challenge other teams that quickly.


    "Really, it is very risky but still the warrior association is able to do that. Most likely that ce is very close to their headquarters or something like that and because of this, they are able to choose that big part of the dangerous zone without any problem and not only that they also scare away thoseary grade Monsters.


    Naturally this is a good thing becausepared to the virtual reality here everyone will have the fear of getting killed and also in that way they will also get the experience that they won''t be able to get if they went inside of the virtual reality."


    Oni king said that. Sam and the queen''s also agree with him but at the same time you can say the queen''s very worried about their daughters.


    But because Emma was present with them, they can rx a little but stillpared to the time when they normally when inside of the danger zone, at that time naturally they would had a shadow team following them so when they would face a very dangerous situation they would still able to escape from that ce with the help of the shadow guards.


    Naturally in thepetition the shadow guards won''t be able to go in that danger zone with any of them and even if they go and decide to show up then naturally every princess will get eliminated from thepetition. Because of this you can say both of the queen''s quite worried about their daughters


    On the other hand if you are wondering why they weren''t worried about their sons, then it was because both of them know the personality of their sons. As both of them like to fight and have the gold to reach the same level as their grandfathers. Most likely because of the same type of personality both of them became friends so easily and not only that they also present in the same team.


    "I also agree with you. Even if that ce was not close to the headquarters of the warrior association, it is still most likely that ce is under the control of the warrior association and because of this, the warrior association decided to teleport every participant in that.


    Even though I cannot tell how manyary grade monsters are trying to enter the range of that ce but most likely some legendary grade Warriors from the warrior association also present there and those people scaring everyone of those monsters so they did not interfere in thepetition.


    Unfortunately we still need to wait 2 days to get to know the ranking. But it would give everyone some time to prepare themselves."


    At this time the human King said that to everyone. First of all he also thinks thatpared to the virtual reality every participant after going inside of the danger zone will have the best experience and as the did not have to worry about their life, because Warriors from the warrior association present everywhere in that ce and if they really faced a dangerous situation those warriors will immediately take action.


    Sam, also agrees with him as he also thinks the same. But at the same time you can say he was thinking about one more important factor that could affect thepetition. Naturally that would be those abyss humans.


    Even those people did not make their appearance for sometime but still there was a chance that those people appear once again and decided to attack every participants then they should be a very dangerous situation.


    So Sam was thinking about that but at the same time he has the confidence in those warriors of the warrior association. But the thing was that he was very interested to know what those Abyss humans were doing right now.


    In these few months he really got many missions rted to those people and because of thatpared to anyone he really has not much information about those people but even with that he cannot exactly be sure about the motive of those people. Previously it was clear as they wanted to sacrifice the life of those warriors to their demon god.


    But naturally after losing that many of their people they decided to hide themselves so that they could regain their power once again. Even though they had artifacts but unfortunately that wasn''t longsting so they cannotpletely depend on those artifacts.


    "Sam.. Sam!!"


    Suddenly Sam, thinking all of this, already came back to his senses when the human king began to call him.


    "Sam, really it would be very interesting if you also participate in thispetition. I am definitely sure you would be able to get the first position without any problem. You can kill those Monsters without any problem using your invisible technique and nobody would be able to find you even if the warrior association decided to reveal your location.


    I am definitely sure that that would be a hrious moment when they will try to show your location to everyone but in the end those people won''t be able to see anything. Really I just cannot imagine what would be the reaction of everyone of those participants."


    The Oni king says that and begins tough. Not only him but both of the queen''s also begin to smile after hearing that. Even previously not many people know about Sam or his power but right now after his achievement many people already know that he was a person who had a very powerful skill that made him invisible and even using their powerful observation technique they were unable to find his location.


    You can say because of this he also gets a bounty. Even though the boundary was present in the ck market, still that news already spread in different kingdoms and even Sam also got to know about that. Unfortunately who released that bounty, Sam did not have any information about that so he really cannot do anything.


    But really it was very surprising for him that he had a bounty, and he also got to know that he had a nickname that was given by everyone after they got to know about his power. Invisible yer, this was the nickname that was given by everyone.


    "Well, aise came back just earlier. I did not have the chance to participate in thepetition and also I did not think I would be able to join thepetition without any problem.


    As all of you told me already thatpared to previouspetition in thispetition not everyone able to participate as before participating thepetition they also needed to pass a test, and also needed to get your permission. So naturally if I wanted to participate in thatpetition then someone needed to give his position to me and I really did not want something like that to happen."


    Sam told that to everyone. This was a truth aspared to before this time not everyone of their Warriors participated in thispetition and also before the mainpetition everyone of the participant needed to pass the test of the warrior association and the test of their own kingdom.


    Actually many Kingdom before the mainpetition decided to choose the best people who had the chance in thispetition and only those people would be participating. Because of this, this time not everyone participated.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry about that because I don''t think anyone would be unhappy if they get to know that the invisible yer wanted to participate in thepetition instead of his position. That person would happily give you his spot. But at the same time the most important question that I wanted to ask you, if you participate in thispetition then naturally you wantt to go inside the dangerous zone without any team?"


    The human King said that. After hearing thest question even the Oni King became curious to know the answer because by knowing the personality of Sam they were sure that even if he participated in thispetition then he would not join any team.

 Chapter 580 580 - Ranking

    <h4>Chapter 580 Chapter 580 - Ranking</h4>


    Finally after 2 dayster the warrior association already began to reveal the rank of every team and those participants. Now every one of those participants could see the rank and naturally the first position holder will have to face many people.


    It did not take that much time and finally everyone can already see the rank of the team in their watch that was provided by the warrior association. Actually not only those participants but every person outside of the danger zone could also see the rank.


    Naturally the warrior association already began to show the rank to everyone and with that one by one everyone could also see the rank of those people and their team. Naturally they already found out the first position holder.


    Not only that but the position of that individual person and the team who got the first position already got revealed by the Warrior association to everyone. Now the most exciting part will be when those other teams will go toward that team or that individual person to challenge him or the team to take all the points.


    Now every person present who is looking at the rank also gets excited about the challenge match. First of all from today the warrior association also started broadcasting so even people from other kingdoms could also see the match on television without needing toe to the human Kingdom.


    So with that all the kingdom that was connected to the?association watched the match with interest and waited for the challenge matches. First of all the warrior association already revealed to them that in these 2 days this is most likely the first time when people will face the challenge match.


    Until now because the part of the danger zone that the warrior association chose for thispetition was very big and because of this, no team faced each other and because of these this would be the first time that a challenge match was going to happen.


    On the other hand,


    Sam and everyone could already see the rank of Livia''s team and their rank individually. It is a good thing that they did not waste that much time and because of this, they were able to enter the rank in top 50. Suddenly they were holding 48 rank in team ranking while individually everyone of them were around 40 to 50. So you can say that was a very good thing for them and because they still had the time so naturally they would be able to increase their rank.


    Mario on the other hand held a much higher rankpared to them as she was already able to enter in the top 30 coil holding the position of 26. On the other hand the team of those Princes was able to enter top 30 in ranking and their holding 25 rank. Individually all of them were around 20 to 30 in individual ranking.


    Unfortunately even after killing those Monsters non stop the unable to reach the top ranking. But currently none of them worry about that as they still have time and naturally they also have the confidence that in the end they would be able to enter top 5 in team ranking and individual ranking.


    Now if you are wondering about the individual participant who gets the first position then he is able to collect 15K Monster points while the team that holds the first position is able to collect 50 k monster points. Naturally, to get the position they just fight those powerful Monsters non stop.


    Back to the danger zone,


    Livia and the others also looked at their ranking while also looking at the ranking of the first position holder. Natural is the position of the person or the team already revealed and they also know right now many people are most likely going toward that ce to challenge those people.


    Unfortunately they did not have the motive to challenge any of them in their current situation. First of all they know about their own strength and they also have the understanding that they won''t be able to win the challenge match against those people so naturally even though the position of the first position holders got revealed they did not have any kind of excitement about that.


    Unfortunately for any participants, they were unable to see the situation of other participants because they did not have any television or something like that that would show them the situation of those other participants.


    ___________________


    On the other hand the first position holder and his team already begin to wait for the challenge match as they also know right now is keeping from that ce only held them because even if they try to hide at this time the warrior association will show their location to everyone so they just silently wait there.


    Not only that team but the team who got the first position also did the same thing as they also did not want to escape or hide. They also wanted to test their strength against those other teams so naturally because of this they waited for the other teams toe to them and challenge them.


    Previous time inside the virtual reality exactly the same thing happened but naturallypared to the real life battle the battle inside of the virtual reality did not give them that much experience and also everyone did not have to worry about getting injured or something like that. Because of this many people also fight recklessly without caring about their own life that they won''t be able to do in this real battle where if they got careless they could also get killed.


    Actually, currently no participants know that the warrior from the warrior association is also present in that part of the danger zone and all the time they are also monitoring them and naturally if the situation became more dangerous they would immediately interfere and would help those people.


    First of all the Warriors'' reaction already promised everyone that they would protect everyone so that they did not have to lose anyone in thispetition. Even if someone tries to kill their opponent, the warrior association will immediately interfere and naturally that person who wanted to kill his opponent will get eliminated along with that person.


    As you know the rule of the spetition is that even if they injure their warriors they should not try to kill that person as that will be a p to the rule created by the warrior association.


    Now back to main matter,


    In the big screen that was present in the battle arena everyone could already see many teams that after getting to know about the?position holder team or the individual who got first position, were already on their way toward those people to challenge them for a challenge match.


    Before anything you should know about the challenge match everyone of their teammates will face each other and in the end that team who would have the most wins will naturally win that match. But in this case the warrior association also created the rule that if a team with 5 people face a team with 10 people then the match will be held between 5 people from each team. With that the remaining 5 people won''t be able to interfere. If they try to do that naturally their own team will get eliminated from that match.


    The individual who got the first position was the prince of the dragonite kingdom. If you are thinking about that Kingdom then those people had the bloodline of Dragon and with thatpared to your normal human they would have massive power in their body. They would have lizard-like eyes and also they could bring out their Dragon wings from their back if they wanted to do that.


    Other than transforming into aplete Dragon they would have almost all the power of the Dragons. Other hand, the team who got the first position was a team of Warriors of various warriors. Those people previously decided to create that team where everyone was from a different Kingdom.


    Naturally at first they also had many problems with each other but after one day they already became familiar with each other and already increased the speed of their hunting. You can see a dragonite also present in that team alongside an elf, a Tigris, an Oni human, a Berserker and a Barbarian.


    Now everyone is waiting for their challenge match. Even though that was really very surprising for them as when they were able to see that they got the first position in team ranking but naturally they instantly prepared their mind to face challenges and definitely they would not lose any of those matches as they had the confidence to win. Also every one of them were peak Epic grade Warriors, they had the confidence to win every one of those matches. Fortunately it did not take that much time for the first team to appear in front of them and naturally that team already began toe toward them with the motive to challenge them.

 Chapter 581 581 - Challenge Match Begin

    ?


    Finally, the first team appears in front of them and already challenges them to a challenging match. On the other hand, the first position holder team epted the challenge without any dy as they already had the confidence to win this match.


    Naturally at this time, everyone present in the danger zone got the notification that the first position holder team had already been challenged by some other team and both parties already epted the challenge. At that moment you can say no other team would be able to interfere in their match and if they try to do that then they will automatically get eliminated from thepetition.


    Naturally, nobody wanted to do that even though many teams already got close to the team but they already decided not to do anything at this moment and will only observe the match between both teams. During the time they also needed to maintain a safe distance so that it did not affect the battle between both of the teams.


    On the other hand, you can say the team who will win this match would get 5 hours rest and during that time no other team would be able to challenge them. Actually, these rules also apply to every team who would win the challenge match with other teams.


    Well, naturally the warrior association makes that rule to give time so that that team is able to recover their lost health and energy. But naturally, they also needed to worry about those Monsters as the warrior association would interfere when those Monsters tried to attack any of those teams.


    Now back to the main matter,


    As both of the teams already agree, notification also appears in both of their matches and if you look at the notification then it was saying that the Warrior Association also agrees with them, and at this time no other team would be able to interfere with their match. The first position holder team had six people in their team while the Challenger team had 10 people so naturally the match would happen between 6 people and the Challenger team needed to select their warriors for this challenge.


    It did not take them that much time to select their Warriors and with that, both of the teams were already ready for their match. During that match, one by one everyone of those Warriors will fight each other and those people who had the most wins will naturally win this match.


    Wasted no time both of the teams sent their first Warrior to face each other. You can see that Barbarian came from the first position holder team while a cat girl came from the other team. Now the Barbarian had more strengthpared to that cat human butpared to the Barbarian that cat human also had more agility and flexibility.


    Also, both of the Warriors were closebat warriors so naturally they will be fighting with their weapons. That Barbarian had a big great sword in his hand while the cat girl had a longsword in her hand.


    Wasting no time both of the warriors already begin to go toward each other. Naturally, the cat girl already came in front of the Barbarian Warrior in just 2 seconds and already attacked him. Even though the Barbarian Warrior wasn''t able to react on time, in the end, he was still able to defend himself, and naturally, impact was also created by both of their shes.


    In the next second, you can see the Barbarian already trying to kick but the cat girl has already disappeared from that ce and already came behind that Barbarian Warrior and once again attacked him. This time the Barbarian wasn''t able to counter attack and naturally he got hit by that sword.


    Even though the Barbarian already got hit, he did not receive that much injury. Naturally, both of them were wearing armor to protect that Barbarian Warrior while that cat girl had already disappeared from that ce so that she could attack from a different direction.


    But at this time you can see that the Barbarian Warrior already swung the sword into the ground and instantly an earthquake appeared in that ce. He created that earthquake so that the cat girl got unstabilized and he got the chance to attack her. Naturally, something like that happened as the cat girl did not expect that kind of attack and she already got unstabilized.


    But she instantly put the sword in her stolen ring and backflipped from that ce. All of this happened in less than a second and because of this, you can say she was also able to get away from the attack from that Barbarian Warrior we were just able to hit her as it was 10 cm away from her.


    But that wasn''t over as the Barbarian Warrior also already noticed that so he already swung the sword once again in her direction. On the other hand, the cat girl once again notices that and instantly crouches down. After that, she instantly brings out the long Sword and tries to attack the Barbarian Warrior.


    But the Barbarian Warrior was already prepared this time and she just hit the greatsword that the Barbarian Warrior uses as a shield. Once again an impact was created and that impact also made that cat girl two steps back away from her ce. Nothing happened to the Barbarian Warrior and he uses that chance to attack that girl once again.


    This time the Barbarian got the upper hand and that cat girl wasn''t able to react on time and naturally, she got hit by that sword. That instantly sent her flying backward and because of the impact, you can see blood already begin toe out from her mouth.


    But she quickly stabilized her condition afternding on the ground and had already vanished from that ce. She came in front of that Barbarian Warrior less than a second and already attacked that person. This time you can say her speed already increased and the Barbarian Warrior wasn''t able to react on time. With that naturally, he was unable to protect himself and got hit by that sword.


    That Barbarian Warrior got sent 10 steps backward by that attack but that wasn''t over as that cat girl once again disappeared and came behind that person and before he could stabilize his condition she attacked once again. Naturally, all this time both of them are using their spiritual energy while attacking so naturally you should not underestimate their attack.


    As the cat girl had the agility, flexibility, and better reaction speed, the Barbarian warrior had the strength, the defense, and more brutality in his attack. Even though that cat girl, through using her full speed, can increase the strength of her attacks, the Barbarian Warrior is able to protect himself even when he is unable to counterattack because of his natural defense.


    The cat girl also knew about this so because of this she wanted to attack him continuously without stopping. She began to attack him from every direction using her full speed and the thing was that the Barbarian Warrior at this time was unable to do anything in front of her speed. But even with that, you can say he did not give up as he was just waiting for the right time to attack that person.


    The Barbarian Warrior all this time thinking very calmly and trying to figure out the next position from where that cat girl will attack him. Naturally, at the time, he would instantly attack that cat girl and at that time he would use more power. Even though in front of those continuous attacks he was feeling pain and blood alsoing out from his mouth because of those impacts he still waited there for the right time and sometimeter when he already got the chance he instantly used the strength to swing his sword.


    This time both of their swords shed and a huge impact was created that also sent that cat girl flying backward. But that wasn''t over as that Barbarian Warrior already jumped toward that cat girl. His sword was fully shining and naturally, he was already about to attack that cat girl. On the other hand, you can see the crack mark present in the armor of that girl. Not only that, blood had already begun toe out from her mouth.


    That previous impact made her feel that she was facing a big wall but naturally, she won''t give up. She could already see that sword just about to hit her. With that, she instantly got away from that ce even though right now her full body was in pain. On the other hand, that attack from the Barbarian Warrior hit the ground and instantly that whole ce got destroyed and an earthquake appeared once again.


    Fortunately, that cat girl already made the necessary distance from that attack so she did not get affected by that attack. At this time you can see she is already gathering her full power once again and at the same time her Sword is also shining.

 Chapter 582 582 - Intense Fight

    "Destruction strike,"


    Instantly that Barbarian Warrior uses his most powerful attack and in the next second you can see a red sword sh get created by that swing and even the surrounding area gets affected by that.


    Everything around that red sh already got into pieces while that sword sh was just going toward that cat girl. At this time all the trees that got in front of that attack also got spit into many pieces. But not just only that but every one present there can also feel that pressure thates out from that attack.


    Naturally anybody could tell that was a very dangerous attack for anyone to handle and instantly that Challenger team got very serious about that. Not just only those warriors but even those warriors from the warrior association also got alert by this and were ready to interfere anytime to protect the life of that cat girl.


    On the other hand all this time that cat girl is also channeling her full spiritual energy into that long Sword and all the time her Sword is also shining brightly. Naturally she wanted to prepare her powerful attack like the Barbarian Warrior and the moment that Barbarian Warrior attacked her with that powerful attack she also did not waste the single second to attack.


    Suddenly, a plus sign got created in front of her and naturally that got created by those sword sh. The color of that attack was blue and naturally it also directly began to go toward that red sword sh from the Barbarian Warrior.


    The most interesting thing was that everywhere her attacks passed through you could see everything present in that ce getting frozen. It was like not only she uses the sword technique but naturally she also uses an element of power during that time and because of this something like that happening.


    Once again the pressure from her attack also got created and even before the sh between both of the attacks everyone present there can already feel both of the pressure. Naturally both of the pressures are trying to overwhelm each other. A battle between both of the pressures already started in that ce and everybody present there can also feel that.


    Now the main thing was that nobody was your who would be the winner of this fight but they can tell one thing, both of the Fighter really uses almost all of their spiritual energy in this attack to create those powerful attacks.


    Not just only those Warriors or those warriors from the warrior association, everyone who watched the fight between both of the teams from outside of the danger zone was also very curious to know who would be the winner of this match. Almost Everyone of them almost hold their breath so that they did not interfere with the match.


    Now everyone of them could see that both of the powerful attacks had alreadye very close to each other and in the next second a sh had already happened between both of them. But not only that instantly that ce got destroyed by both of the attacks and everything around that area alsopletely got erased or frozen.


    Fortunately all the Warriors at that time already distanced themselves from that ce so that they did not get affected by that. Even that cat girl and that Barbarian also uses their remaining power to get away from that ce. Both of them know the power behind their attacks so they also know that something like this would definitely happen.


    Not only that ce got destroyed, you can see even the ground already created a big hole and still it did not stop. The destruction just began to increase and increase. On the other hand everybody present in the danger zone is already able to feel a huge amount of spiritual fluctuation that naturally got created because of the sh.


    It looks like even both of the Warriors really underestimate the power behind the sh and because of this they once again needed to run away from that ce as they did not want to get affected by their own attack and that huge impact.


    First of all in the previous attack both of the Warriors already use almost all of their spiritual energy so both of them know that this will be thest time they would be able to fight naturally even though both of them are running but they are still maintaining both of their attacks. The loser will be the one who would not be able to maintain his or her attack and naturally the attacked will get destroyed by the other attack.


    If you were wondering why then right now both of them are running but at the same time using their full mental power to maintain both of the attacks. When one of the attacks gets canceled naturally that Warrior who created that will also get affected by that. Instantly a huge burden of mental pressure would attack that person and that person won''t be able to do anything.


    During normal attack even though everyone receives mental pressure like this but naturally they could tolerate that kind of mental pressure as they have the capacity but in this type of case when they use their most powerful attack they naturally almost exceed the limit of their own mental power.


    Finally both of them reach a safe ce and right now both of them are fully focused on maintaining their attack. Both of them were already bleeding from their mouths because of the mental pressure but still you can say none of them wanted to give up. If you look at them then you will see both of their armor almost got and naturally both of them also had many injuries present on their body.


    _________________


    "HAhhhh!!!!"


    Both of them shout like this to maintain their attack. You can say the power of the impact that was created because of the sh has already begun to increase and naturally it is also affecting the surrounding area. Almost 1 to 2 km area got destroyed by both of their attacks but because of the impact increasing naturally the range of their impact also increased.


    Right now, those Warriors present there not only feel the powerful impact but at the same time they also feel a huge pressure that suddenly prevents them from moving. Fortunately they have already prepared for that and because of this everyone of them is also using their own spiritual energy to counter that pressure.


    Both of them maintain their attack for almost 1 hour without doing anything but naturally as both of them already use all of their power and also very low once spiritual energy naturally they won''t be able to maintain that long. Even though they were trying their hardest, when you look at the faces of those two people, you can naturally say that it shows the sign that both of them have already reached their limit and at any time they would lose the match.


    Finally, almost 15 minutester, you can see the sign. Both of the warriors already had shaking legs. They were almost out of stamina and strength and because of these they did not even have the strength to stay still like that.


    Butpared to the Barbarian Warrior, naturally the cat girl is already showing signs of losing the match and almost everyone thinks you will lose the match when suddenly something unexpected happens. Suddenly out of nowhere she got excess power and instantly used that excess power to take advantage of the situation while that Barbarian Warrior did not expect that kind of thing from that girl.


    In the next second that red Sword sh got destroyed by that cat girl. Instantly that Barbarian Warrior begins to shout as he already begins to feel the mental pain. Even though he tried to struggle, after 1 minute he became unconscious and fell down on the ground.


    Well you can say that attack from the cat girl also got disappear from that ce butpared to the attack of the Barbarian Warrior she had attack did not get cancel by the other party show she did not receive that much mental pain and with that she able to struggle for that long and when she finally saw that Barbarian Warrior falling down on the ground she became rx and also in the next again she lose her consciousness.


    Fortunately both of their teammates already reacted on time and already took both of them into safe distance. Now that ce got destroyed by both of them so naturally they won''t be able to continue their fight in that ce. On the other hand before fighting they needed to stabilize the condition of theirrades.


    So before starting their next fight they already started doing that. But at this time nobody knows the situation outside of the danger zone. Instantly everybody who watched all these fights from the start got excited and began to cheer but at the same time those people who supported the number one team got disappointed. But still you can say everyone appreciates the good match between both parties.

 Chapter 583 583 - Fight Start

    ?


    Sam even though wasn''t present in the danger zone but he can also already guess the power behind Those two attacks. Naturally both of the Warriors already reach the peak Epic grade and also because of this, both of their attacks were this much powerful.


    Most likely you can say when the sh between both of the attacks happened the impact already exceeded the limit of Epic grade. Because of this you can say that an amount of destruction happened because of the impact and naturally in the end surprisingly the Barbarian Warrior lost and the cat girl won the fight.


    Most likelypact to the Barbarian Warrior you can say the cat girl had muchrger capacity of spiritual energy and because of this, in the end she still had The Spiritual energy present in her body to give a final boost to her attack and with that she was able to win the match.


    Now back to the main matter he can already see that the Warriors from the warrior association did not enter even when both of the participants got that much injured. Actually first of all they cannot reveal themselves and only when those participants call for their help they will interfere.


    The good thing about the challenge match was that after the match when the participants for that match will get injured you can ask for the help from the warrior association. They will naturally send their medical Warriors.


    This was really a good thing about this challenge match and naturally both of the team already called for help. Even though the Challenger team had a warrior who can use light elements, still that person only mastered all the attack techniques and only was able to use low grade healing rays. Because of this, they know that it won''t be enough to stabilize the condition so they also ask for help.


    It did not even take that much time for those two medical Warriors from the warrior association to appear there and wasting no time both of them already started their healing. As you can see both of them using the healing ray and green light alreadying out from their hand while if you look at both of the injured people then you can see both of their injuries already begin to heal by that green light.


    With that nobody has to worry about anything and they also know after the healing will be over their teammate does need to rest for sometime so that they could recover their energy and health in perfect shape.


    Na both of the team already decided that they will start their next fight 30 minutester. Naturally at the time they would also decide their next strategy and also find the next ce where they will start their fight. During the challenge match if both of the team agree with each other in something naturally that would be applicable for that challenge match.


    So as both of the teams already agreed to wait 30 minutes, naturally it was also epted by the warrior association. On the other hand all the teams that previously came close to that ce also get to know about this. Even with that none of the team had any kind of intention to leave that ce as they already decided to challenge the winner of this match.


    Naturally the winner of this match will have all the points of the loser and he will get the first position in this part of thepetition. Even though they would need to wait for a long time so that everyone from that winning team could recover their full energy, still that would be enough for them. As they did not want to waste that much time where other teams could also take action.


    Now at this instant everyone present in the battle arena could see the scene present in the big screen already changed and right now it was showing the team of the person who got the first position in this individual ranking.


    As the first position holder team won''t be able to fight for now so naturally that association decided to show the situation of the first position holder in individual ranking. It looks like most of the people decided to go for the first position holder team and because of this until now no people came to the ce where you can see the team of the first position holder waiting for their challenger.


    But fortunately it did not take that much time for them and they were already able to see the team that already came to that ce. Now after seeing that naturally the first position holder and his team already got excited because of the challenge match but they did not react quickly as right now a situation could happen.


    There would be a one vs one match or could be a team challenge match. Most of the time you can say any team wanted to challenge for the team challenge match but if any team did not have that much powerful Warrior in their team so naturally they could also select for the one versus one match.


    Now the question of that dragonite and his team would be what this Challenger team will do. Will they ask for a team match or individual match? Now that was the big question and because of this they did not react quickly and let the Challenger teame in front of them.


    Challenger team also, not wasting time, came in front of them and they already challenged the dragonite for a one versus one match. As expected for the dragonite because the moment that team appeared in that ce he could already tell not everyone of them reached the peak Epic while everyone of his team members already reached that grade.


    So naturally he did not get surprised and also already epted the challenge. Now just after seeing this every person present in the battery begins to cheer once again. They just finished watching an intense match between two Challengers, but right after watching that match they were once again able to see a challenge match.


    Naturally that was an exciting matter for all the people who came to the battle arena or came to the human kingdom for this kind of exciting match. Now once again everybody who were present in the danger zone got notified by the warrior association that the fight between two teams already got epted and that it will be an individual challenge match where only one person from each team will fight each other.


    "Really the previous fight was very intense and for a moment I thought the Barbarian warrior will win this match as he has the advantage in strength. But still the cat girl surprised us after winning that fight."


    " Hmm¡­ well if we are present inside the danger zone then naturally we would be able to know about The Spiritual capacity of that cat girl and naturallypared to that Barbarian Warrior she had more capacity and in the NC use that remaining power to get the power boost when that Barbarian Warrior is just about to win the match.


    This is really a nice strategy but it could backfire her. There is a 50-50 chance that she would be in a dangerous situation because of that. What finally looked like she did not have to face the backfire and finally win this match.


    Right now I can see the Challenger team that challenged the first position holder did not have that many powerful Warriors in his team and because of this they decided to challenge for an individual challenge match.


    Well, other than this naturally they did not have any other option. But as a Lepris that Challenger really needs to be careful because he would be facing a dragonite. The overall strength of a dragonite warrior was naturally higher than any of them and if that Lepris warrior wanted to win this fight, then from the first he needed to use his full power."


    " Hmm, I also think that the only advantage those Lepris Warriors would have is that they have more ability. But really if that Challenger wanted to win, then from the start he needed to use his full power. But he still needs to be careful about the dragonite as a dragonite warrior has first reaction speed alongside with his high defense."


    Right now, the human king and Oni king are discussing among each other about those to Challenger that were present on the big screen. Actually not only them but everyone of them also knows that.


    Finally after not wasting that much time, finally the match started and from the start the Lepris Warrior began to use his full speed. Also he was using a club weapon. On the other hand, that dragonite uses a spear.


    "Boom!!"


    Instantly, a sh appeared between them. But in the next second that Lepris Warrior disappeared from that ce and he already came behind that dragonite warrior.

 Chapter 584 584 - The Dragonite Warrior Vs The Lepris Warrior

    ?


    Naturally, he wanted to use his speed as an advantage against the dragonite warrior but he should not forget that the dragonite warrior has the first reaction and because of this you can see the moment when that Lepris Warrior about to hit the dragonite warrior, he already jumped from that ce.


    Not only that, in the next again you can see a spear directly going toward the direction. Fortunately that Lepris Warrior once again disappeared from that ce and with that he did not get hit by that spear.


    But when that Spear hit the ground it instantly exploded and a hole was created in that ground. Without you can imagine how much spiritual energy that dragonite Warrior was using and how powerful his Spear had be that it could easily create a hole like this.


    But on the other hand, the dragonite warrior alreadyhis opponent as he once again came behind him and naturally just about to hit him. This time most likely that person is using more spiritual energy and because of these the speed of his attack also increases.


    But the dragonite warrior instantly uses his technique and in the next second you can see that club instantly stop. Actually if you look closely then you will see the dragonite warrior instantly created a spiritual barrier in front of him and naturally right now a sh already created between that spiritual barrier and that club.


    But on the next again that dragonite Warrior already swung his Spear toward that Lepris Warrior. Once again you can see his Spear glowing in red color.


    "Boom!!!"


    This time that opponent of The Dragonite Warrior almost got hit by that attack. Even if the agility of the dragonite warrior did not reach the same level as that Lepris Warrior, but you should not underestimate him as he had better reaction speedpared to that person and also has more power so naturally at this time he using more power and because of this, the speed of that attack also increased.


    On the other hand, Lepris Warrior was very fortunate that he was able to dodge that attack. Because that whole ce got destroyed where he was standing before. Not only that you can saypared to before right now the range of the destruction already increased.


    You can easily tell that it was because the dragonite Warrior increases the power behind his attack. Not only that in the next second you can see one by one many more Spears begin to appear in the sky and all of them directly went toward that Lepris Warrior.


    Naturally it was an attack from the dragonite warrior and all those spears in full speed going toward his opponent. That Lepris Warrior can already see all those spearsing toward him and she is already trying to dodge everyone of those spears.


    But not only that he needed to do Spears but he also needed to worry about that impact that got created when those Spears hit the ground. Because of this even his running got affected by the explosion that happened very close to him and that almost made him unbnced.


    At that time one more Spear directly came above his head and was most likely about to hit him, but fortunately he was still able to react quickly and somehow escape. In the next second, he can see more of Spearsing toward his direction so he decided to use his technique and instantly he swung the club toward the direction of the Spears.


    With just one swing a very big sh got created and that instantly you went toward those spears. Naturally the color of The Spiritual energy was differentpared to that dragonite Warrior as it was showing green in color. Naturally you can say that air elements also affect that attack.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Now that big sh was trying to act as a wall while at the same time counter attacking those Spears and one by one destroying them all. But it looks like the dragonite warrior still did not want to quit as he already increased the number of those spears.


    Naturally, Lepris Warrior also noticed that but he also wasn''t slow as he was preparing for his next attack. At this time that spiritual sh is already destroying all those previous attacks but even he knows that it won''t take long for those Spears to break that spiritual sh.


    One by one he began to release more attacks toward those spear barrages. At this time the dragonite warrior also wasn''t slow and as you can see he also began to continuously release those spears. Every time he swings his sword naturally many spiritual Spears get created by that and everyone of them is alreadying toward the Lepris Warrior.


    On the other hand in this situation the Lepris Warrior is already thinking about retreating from that ce because he already realized even if he continuously attacks he won''t be able to counter attack those spear barrages. So it would be good if he did it from that ce and then attacked the dragonite warrior once again.


    On the other hand you can say the whole 5 km almost got destroyed because both of their attack and the destruction range were still increasing. With that you can imagine how much the impact is getting created because both of the attacks sh with each other.


    Fortunately all the teammates of both of the warriors already went very far away so that they were not able to interfere with both of their fights and also this was a rule of the warrior association higher every teammate rted to maintain a minimum distance of 6 to 7 km when both of the fighters will fight in individual matches.


    The thing was that many Warriors had techniques that could even affect any fight even if they were 5 km away from the main ce. You can say that would be the limit of those warriors and because of this, the warrior association told everyone to maintain almost 6 to 7 km distance from the fighting ce.


    Now back to the main matter as the situation is getting very hard, the Lepris Warrior already escaped and almost came 4 km away from that dragonite Warrior. First of all even though he wasn''t enjoy that much but he was low on spiritual energy so he also need that time to recover The Spiritual energy and also needed to prepare his powerful


    attack so that using his speed he could take advantage.


    On the other hand, because of those spiritual spears, the whole ce where previously that Lepris Warrior was standing got destroyed and naturally you can also see a big hole created in that ce. At the same time a shockwave also got created that everyone present felt.


    Fortunately the dragonite warrior also already noticed that his opponent wasn''t present there and most likely his opponent already went far away from that ce. So with that he decided to recover his spiritual energy. Even though you can say thatpared to any species the dragonite species has the most spiritual reserve from the moment they are born, still that does not mean he won''t be recovering his spiritual energy as he wanted to maintain the peak state.


    So he has already begun to use the energy recovery technique but at the same time already using observation and vision techniques to find out the location of his opponent. He was using the observation technique to observe any kind of spiritual fluctuation that naturally will be created by the opponent when he uses some kind of techniques.


    Not only that, naturally using the vision technique he would be able to find out the location of his opponent if that person was present in his observation range. But it looks like that warrior already found out the range and because of this he was maintaining more distance.


    _______________


    Sometimeter,


    Suddenly you can see the reflection of a weak club appear in the sky and naturally you can feel the spiritual fluctuation thates out from that attack. That was an attack from that Lepris Warrior andpared to those previous attacks these are most likely his most powerful attack.


    Just by feeling Spiritual energy you can tell that big club or you can say that spiritual club contains a huge amount of spiritual energy and naturally it will create a huge destruction. For the second time the dragonite warrior began to feel the dangering out from that attack, so he also did not waste a single second. Because if he does not start preparing for his attack then naturally it will be more dangerous for him.


    Now as you can see suddenly a session of spiritual energy appears in that ce and naturally that dragonite Warrior gathers the surrounding spiritual energy into his spear. Compared to before that weapon begins to sign more brightly and you can tell the spiritual g that inside that weapon already begins to increase.

 Chapter 585 585 - Winner

    ?


    That Lepris Warrior naturally already predicted the dragonite warrior will also use his powerful attack to counter attack. So he instantly uses more spiritual energy into the technique and instantly The Attack bes stronger and more quickly begins to go toward the dragonite warrior.


    The good thing was that he could control the power of the attack and naturally he was targeting the dragonite warrior even though he maintained almost 4 km away from that ce.


    First of all, even if his attack gets counter attack by that dragonite Warrior, he will not be worried about that, but it will be aplete disaster when both attacks from both people will sh with each other.


    Naturally you can say that both of them did not want to continue to fight like this and wanted to finish their opponent as quickly as they could, so from now on they are using more powerful attackspared to before.


    First of all during the match only the Warriors won''t be able to interfere with their match but it could bepletely different for any Monsters who will be in the range of that ce and naturally they would try to attack everyone.


    Because of this you can say everyone wanted to stay in their peak position. Because if his opponent takes the advantage of that Monster while defeating him then it will be legal to everyone so naturally he would get defeated in that match and lose his points.


    It looks like the dragonite warrior also already finished preparing his attack and because of this in the next second when he opens his eyes a spiritual pressure already created around that ce and also he suddenly throws that sphere toward that spiritual club.


    Instantly that spear began to go toward that Spiritual club, but you can say the size of that Spear began to increase and also it began to glow more. The destruction energy present in that Spear already begins to increase and even though it did not hit anybody you can see that the surrounding ce is also getting destroyed by that destruction energy.


    The ground began to crack and everything present in that ce which was very close to the destruction energy already got destroyed.


    Naturally with this attack the dragonite warrior wanted to finish that Lepris Warrior. First of all you can say that even the dragonite knows that even though his opponent won''t be able to defeat him directly, it is also very difficult for him to defeat his opponent as his opponent had more advantage in agility and using that he could easily escape from his attack.


    So he did not want to waste his time on that person that much and also he wanted to challenge those other Warriors that he already can tell wasn''t far away from the location and most likely waiting for that Lepris Warrior to finish his flight.


    The Lepris Warrior also already uses his 99% spiritual energy and instantly the size of the spiritual club increases and also the spiritual energy present in the spiritual club already increases and bes more powerful. Now both of the Warriors are using their full power at this time and naturally all the warriors and even those warriors from the warrior association also wanted to know what will be the result.


    Outside the danger zone right now as everyone is looking at the screen where they can see the fight between the dragonite and that Lepris Warrior. Everyone of them just wanted to know who would be the Last man standing On that ce as everyone can tell both of the attacks were very powerful and anything would happen during that time.


    The people from the Lepris Kingdom and the people from the Dragonite kingdom also wanted to know the result as warriors from their Kingdom fighting each other.


    "Boom!!!"


    In the next second as you can see arge destruction happens in that ce when both of the attacks sh with each other. But both of the warriors were still holding on to their grounds and did not want to give up before their opponent lost this fight so both of them used their remaining spiritual energy to stand.


    You can tell that both of the attacks are very powerful and very destructive as the surrounding area even previously got destroyed by their sh, but it is still getting destroyed and the destruction just crosses the limit of 6 km. Everything present in that range got destroyed. Even those rocks and those dead trees turn into ashes.


    So like this except both of the Warriors every other Warriors already went for a from that ce so that did not get affected by the impact and that destruction and naturally at the same time they can saw how much destruction had happened because of the impact and it still did not stop there.


    Everyone without doing anything just continuously watching the scene in front of them and waiting for the result. Most likely all the Monsters present near that ce also already feel the spiritual fluctuation and they naturally can tell the danger if they try to approach that ce. You can say until now no Monsters try to go close to that ce when the fight between both of the parties happen.


    Finally after 30 minutes you can say the destruction is already over and theyer of smoke that previously got created also begins to fade away slowly. At this moment everyone just held their breath and wanted to know who was the winner.


    Not only that both of the team already called for the medical help of the warrior association and the medical team already present there and waiting for the battle to end and only after that they will take action.


    Everyone present there is already using their vision technique. At first using the vision technique they can already see the destruction that created a big hole almost around a 6 km area and everything in that ce got destroyed except one ce where you can see two people standing and facing each other.


    But both of the people did not do anything except facing each other and sometimeter one of them was unable to hold on and fell down on the ground. While the second person is still trying to hold on even though you can see the shakingkes. That person naturally used his will power to stay on like this as he wanted to see if he really defeated his opponent or not.


    Instantly, every warrior present in that ce or present in the danger zone gets the notification where you can see it was telling them the dragonite warrior finally defeated his Challenger and with that he still remains in the first position while he also gets all the points of his opponent. Not only that, in the next second if you look at the ranking board you can see the huge amount of points beside the name of the dragonite warrior.


    Without the teammate of the dragonite warrior and all the people supporting The Dragon Warrior begin to cheer as they became clear who was the winner. And also in the next second you can see the medical team present there begin to use their full power to reach the ce where both of the people were right now.


    First of all naturally they needed to stabilize the condition of both of the people as they would be out of spiritual energy and could be in a dangerous situation because of the previous distraction.


    When the medical team reached the te they could already see the condition of the person. Fortunately you can say the condition of those two people wasn''t that serious even though they were fully covered in blood and fully injured right now.


    But still they did not waste a single second and fully began to heal both of the warriors and also they were really surprised by the destruction that both of the warriors created. Once again you can say that the power limit of that impact or you can say that destruction already crosses the limit of Epic grade.


    On the other hand,


    Everyone who supports The Dragonite Warrior already begins to cheer loudly and even the royal family of the Dragonite kingdom also celebrate as the dragonite warrior wins the match. Naturally it was a very intense match and anything could happen in that match. But the dragonite warrior did not get careless and in the end able to remain in the first ce.


    You can say even Sam, who was present in that ce, was really surprised by the power limit of that distraction which already crossedt the limit of Epic grade. He really wanted to have an exciting match like this while fighting his opponent, at the same time you can say he suddenly remembered about Eden blue.


    Suddenly remembered about that collegepetition where he also had an intense match like this. Well, now back to reality he can also see the point of the dragonite warrior already increasing and he left everyone behind.

 Chapter 586 586 - Next Fight

    ?


    "!!! What an exciting match. I really cannot believe I would be able to see this much intense match this timepared to before. Really you have to say that the Warrior association really took the right decision and because of this we were able to see this match intense battle.


    Naturally inside of the virtual reality nobody would have the fear of getting attacked by the monster and they also did not need to worry about dying inside of the virtual reality. But here in the danger zone they need to worry about those things and because of this they cannot be reckless while fighting their opponent.


    Really only in the real world is it possible where every Warrior always stays alert about their surroundings. Naturally I hope everyone gets more experience by these and with that they be more careful while fighting an opening like this or fighting a monster."


    The human King thought about this while everyone also agreed with him as they were also thinking the same thing. They were also able to see this much intense match because this time the match was going inside the danger zone and every Warrior had the fear of getting killed by the opponent or other monsters.


    Really at this time you can say Sam was thinking why he misses a fight like this where he would naturally feel the excitement. But not like he can do anything at this moment so he just silently watches the match where he could already see the first position holder already regain his first ce while the medical team of the warrior association already take action and begin to heal the opponent.


    Compared to the dragonite warrior naturally you can say the condition of that Lepris Warrior was much worse. Because of this the medical team used more spiritual energy during the time to stabilize the condition of that Warrior. Fortunately after 30 minutes they were finally able to stabilize the condition of the warrior and also that Warrior already started to heal.


    At this time the medical team did not leave that ce as they will wait until the Lepris Warrior does not regain his senses. Only then they will leave that ce full stop actually they wanted to make sure that nothing happened to that Warrior so they will stay there like this.


    On the other hand the dragonite warrior or you can say that the first position holder after getting all the points leaves that ce and he and his teammates are already trying to look for a best ce to rest. Now as they just finished a match those other Warriors won''t be able to challenge them for a few minutes and they wanted to use that chance to regain All The Spiritual not g that they have lost.


    Fortunately until now no Monsters came toward them and with that all this time they did not have to worry about any of the Monsters. But that did not even advance that long when they suddenly got attacked by some acid snakes. Those Monsters have the deadliest poison alongside with their acid like attack.


    So naturally as you can tell they need to be careful while facing those Monsters. Fortunately they were able to react on time and before those Monsters good heavily affected them they already escaped from that ce. They did not have to worry about getting poisoned by those Monsters as they went far away.


    At the same time they will not leave those Monsters and because of this ept that dragonite Warrior all the teammates already begin to prepare their attacks and wasting no time they begin to attack those Monsters one by one.


    __________________


    Now came back to the other part of the danger zone where you can see the first position holder team already preparing themselves to challenge the second person and with that both of the warriors already came in front of them and waited for the time to start their fight.


    Actually both of the people did not recklessly go toward each other and began to observe each other very carefully before attacking. First of all they cannot be reckless in a fight like this where they can also put their life in risk and naturally they could also get killed by the other party.


    Fortunately the Barbarian Warrior already recovered alongside that car girl. Both of them are resting right now while naturally they are also excited to see the next match.


    "First position holder in team ranking, Kevin Liton already I will to defeat his opponent and he still is the first position holder in the individual ranking."


    Suddenly these notifications came to the watch of every participant. Even that first position holder team got surprised when they got the notification but they already became sure that the dragonite warrior or that Warrior who got the first ce in individual ranking wasn''t slow. First of all just some time ago they got the notification that that person is fighting a Challenger but who could expect they will get the notification that he already won that match quickly and naturally everyone became surprised about that.


    As you can see the second person from that first position holder team is already facing the Challenger. Once again you can say that everyone bes very excited because of the match expecting the same intense match.


    Both of the warriors, wasting no time, already started attacking each other and you can see those powerful impacts also getting created. But really none of the warriors gave up. Both of them holding on to the grounds and using their all whole facing each other.


    Both of the warriors right now hiding from the distance as both of them use spiritual techniques. One of them using water technique, and the other one using Fire technique. So you can say that both of them had the element of canceling each other.


    But really they did not want to give up and also you can see that both of their elements have already reached the very high limit as you can see the color of the fire has already turned violet and the water has already turned deep blue.


    Both of them use their element power continuously and the surrounding area also gets destroyed by the impact. You can see that that violet color fire is already burning everything and turning into Ash while that water element is using it as a de while cutting everything thates in front of him.


    __________________


    Once again you can say everyone became excited because of this intense match and they really wanted to know who would be the winner. They are already supporting one of the warriors who are facing each other while many people are also observing them carefully.


    As you know many Warriors were unable to participate in thispetition and those were the people who observed those Challengers very carefully as they wanted to find out the witness or the strength of those people.


    Like this, after almost 1 hourter you can see that person using the water element showing signs of low spirituality energy, but he still did not give up and instantly uses his final attack. Suddenly water drops begin to fall from the sky. Naturally that was a strange phenomenon as you cannot see any dark clouds present in the sky but that person using the water present in the air to create those water drops.


    But that wasn''t only eaten as those water drops the moment touching the ground it became a huge source of water and like this the whole ce began to fill with water. Naturally those water destroying everything and that Warrior who uses the fire element naturally notices all of this.


    You can say that he also wasn''t slow and the moment he found out the motive of his opponent he also began to use his final attack. The temperature of that ce has already begun to increase rapidly and when those water drops are trying to fall in that ce where that person is standing , it is already evaporating as a fire zone is created in that ce.


    But that wasn''t over and the limit of that fire zone began to increase and increase and you can say that fires on the fire element were burning everything. It burns the water present in the air and naturally when those waters try to reach out that fire zone a reaction gets created and you can see the evaporating water in that ce.


    But that does not mean that fires are able to counter attack those waterspletely and like this a battle between those two elements happening continuously. Both of the elements tried to cancel each other but naturally both of the warriors did not want to lose so they used their full power at this time.


    The surrounding area because of the impact almost got crushed and everything present in that ce got destroyed or burned. Not only that you can see even the dark clouds begin to appear in that ce as right now a reaction was happening between the fire element and the water element.

 Chapter 587 587 - Fight Continuously

    ?


    "Water prison,"


    "Overheat,"


    Instantly 2 Warrior uses their powerful technique and instantly you can see the two elements already begin to sh. The warrior from the Challenger team trying to use the water element to create a water prison around his opponent but his opponent already uses the fire element to use his attack and instantly the temperature of that particr zone begins to increase if you look at the ce using your spiritual vision or simr technical like this you would able to see that even the water present in the air getting evaporate by that overheat.


    That wasn''t over as the overheating already began to affect that water prison that was trying to imprison that Warrior. Even though that water in event quickly tries to gather around that ce, unfortunately, because the fire element evaporates the water element, you can see in the end that the water prison begins to fade away.


    Right now not a single beat of water element is present in the area where that fire zone is affected. But naturally, the Warrior who was using the fire element was also near to advance toward his opponent and he was doing it right now because only then he would be able to use the fire zone to affect his opponent.


    But you should not underestimate his opponent as he finally begins to use the water zone where he can control every bit of water that is present in the air.


    Both of the warriors prepare their powerful attack once again and in the next second when theye close to each other you can already see both of them finally attack each other with their most powerful attack.


    The Challenger, using the water element, created a water Dragon that was almost 20 m long. On the other hand, the warrior who was using the fire element also created a fire dragon that was the same size as the Water Dragon.


    But naturally, in this attack, both of them wanted to finish the fight and use 99% of their spiritual energy in this attack. At first, they thought they would finish the fight as quickly as they could but unfortunately, they did not even realize it had already been 5 hours since they started fighting and they could also tell if they did not finish the fight right then they wouldn''t be able to use their powerful attack like this.


    They already feel that The Spiritual energy is only able to support that powerful energy for that long and because of this they decided to finish the fight in this final attack while they created both of the Dragon.


    Now, both of the Dragons are wasting no time already trying to attack each other using their element power. The Dragon of water created a water beam while the fire dragon created a fire beam. Naturally, both of the attacks shed with each other and instantly the whole ce got covered by vapor.


    Not only that, but every warrior who is also present in that area can also feel the impact as it suddenly created an earthquake for a second, and also almost all the trees around them were also broken down by the impact.


    Once again you can say the impact that got created because of the impact already crossed the limit of Epic grade. Because of this, those other Warriors also get affected by that even though they try to hold on to their ground.


    On the other hand, those two Dragons did not stop using their beam. Both of themunch more attacks at each other and every time both of them sh, a natural explosion also urs in those ces.


    Fortunately, even those Warriors who mainly fought already created the distance from that ce so that they did not get affected by that.


    ___________________


    Naturally, most people thought in this battle the fire element user would be the winner as here was the advantage in this match. In the end, something unexpected happens and you can already see that the water element user gets The upper hand and suddenly that water Dragon uses the water beam toward that fire dragon.


    That fire dragon Naturally tried to protect himself but it was already toote for him to create any barrier or counterattack. Because of this in the end as you can see the water beam already begins to affect that water Dragon no and the body of that fire dragon begins to fade away and a rock surface begins to appear in that ce.


    Even though at this time the warrior who created the fire dragon tried to maintain his Dragon at any cause in the end he wasn''t able to seed. In the end, you can see that the whole fire dragon got destroyed and the warrior who maintained the fire dragon instantly received the side effect and he became unconscious.


    Naturally this time the medical team did not go far away from that ce and they already took action. Both of the warriors were really injured this time and the medical team needed some time to stabilize the condition. Fortunately, they were able to do that and with that, those two Warriors already came back to their senses and left the battle ring.


    Now with this, you can say the first position holder team had one win along with that Challenger team who also had one win. Once again the referee asked both of the teams if they wanted to rest or not.


    First of all, you can say that every time the match got epted by the Warrior Association a referee would also affirm in that area so that he kept observing both of the teams and if any of the teams tried to cheat in those battles he would immediately get punished by the warrior association.


    Back to the main matter,


    Both of the teams did not want to wait that long and because of this, they decided to fight because those two previous Warriors wouldn''t be able to fight once again so naturally they didn''t have to wait and send their new warriors to each other.


    Naturally, before starting the fight they already changed the location as the previous location was once again damaged by the battle. In that ce, the warriors from both teams had already begun to face each other and were waiting for the signal of the referee to start the fighting.


    This time they did not voice a single second and gave them the signal to start the fight and both parties already began to attack each other using their weapons and spiritual energy.


    One of them is using a big hammer while the other one is using a spear. The person using the big hammer already mmed the ground with that and an earthquake and spiritual wave were created by that. Naturally, if that other person stayed in the range of the attack he would get affected by that but that person wasn''t that slow as he instantly jumped from that ce in the sky, and also at the same time he threw that Spear toward that opponent.


    Naturally, the speed of the spear is very fast and it just directly goes toward that opponent. One by one that one spear turns into 3 spears. Fortunately, that hammer guy already noticed that and he once again swung the hammer toward those spears.


    "Boom!!!"


    Naturally, an explosion was created by that but the hammer guide did not get that much affected by that as if finally able to counterattack those spears, and also every Warrior prison there can feel the shock wave.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Sometimeter a big explosion appears but the hammer guy already escaped from that ce as quickly as we can and just after realizing that he was saved he instantly mmed that spear into the ground.


    Not only that, but suddenly the Warrior disappeared from that ce, and before that shockwave which was created because of the ground m effect his opponent, using the movement technique, already came close to his opponent and already attacked in his direction.


    This time his opponent naturally did not expect this kind of attack. Even though he already noticed the shock waveing in his direction, naturally did not expect that his opponent would appear in front of him like this. Even though he tries to counterattack using the energy shield or something like that because his opponent is very close to his direction he is unable to do that.


    The attack from that hammer already sends that person flying backward and in the next second, you can see blooding out from his mouth and that person is also greatly affected by the shockwave. Once again his opponent already came in front of him and naturally wanted to finish using this attack, but fortunately, even though in a serious situation was already able to react on time, and even in that condition he jumped into the sky to get from his opponent.

 Chapter 588 588 - Hammer vs Spear

    Chapter 588  588 - Hammer vs Spear


    "Boom!!!"


    This time you can see that Hammer and Spear collide with each other and because of this a huge impact was created that almost sent both of the warriors backward. But both of the warriors hold onto their ground and begin to use more power so that they can break each other''s weapons.


    But unfortunately, you can say the impact also got powerful, and sometimeter both of them even though trying to hold on to their ground still got sent backward.


    Not only that, instantly that Spear user already throws his spear toward his opponent. But this time he did not directly throw that Spear toward his opponent. He first disappears into the sky and naturally, if the angle is correct then from that the spear will naturally fall onto his opponent.


    But the thing was that suddenly the whole ce got covered by a lot of spears that began to appear on that ce. Almost 100 spears appear in the sky and all of those Spears begin to glow in spiritual energy. Naturally, all of those spears were very dangerous and had the power to destroy.


    But don''t think the Challenger who used the hammer wasn''t ready for that as he already stabilized his condition and can see those hundred Spears falling. This time he did not waste a single second and instantly used his technique.


    Instantly his hammer begins to glow in red color and not only that he instantly swings that Hammer toward those spears. It looks like that hammer suddenly hit an invisible wall and in the next second you can see the crack mark that begins to appear in that ce.


    That crack mark begins to spiral toward those spears and in the next second, you can see one by one explosions begin to appear in the sky. Actually, the Challenger who used the hammer created a force that created that breaking force and it gave the illusion that it almost cracked the sky.


    That breaking force already begins to collide with those Spears that also halt the distraction energy and in the next second a battle between both of the energy appears in the sky and one by one both of the attacks begin to nullify each other and those many explosions begin to appear on the sky.


    But that wasn''t over as both of the warriors already realized what was happening in the sky, already going towards each other again while already attacking each other.


    ___________________


    Outside of the danger zone, you can say nobody expected that both of the teams would start fighting without resting. One person from each team just finished their fighting a few minutes ago but who could have expected that the next Warrior would be ready to fight without wasting any more time once again an intense match began to appear.


    At this time everyone can already see therge amount of danger zones getting destroyed because of a match. Not only that surprisingly all this time no Monsters appear on that ce as those other Warriors all the time using their aura, so that no Monsters could appear on that ce.


    Actually, because everyone uses their aura at the same time you can say the power of the energy fluctuation that is created because of thebined aura of those people is naturally very powerful. Because of this until now no Monsters tried to attack that ce or approach that ce.


    Not just those Monsters but even those other teams all this time watching the match between both of these teams. You can say it also gives them the advantage of knowing about the power and weakness of their opponents and naturally they would challenge the winner of this match.


    Like this many teams already came to that ce and all this time they just observed the match without interfering. But you can say that they also know that they won''t be able to stay like this for as long as they need to collect points so that they do not get kicked out of their current position.


    Even though they observe the situation between both of the teams, at the same time they are also hunting Monsters that are not far from that ce.


    Fortunately, you can say that not every Warrior is trying to challenge. Every one of those Warriors who knows that they won''t be able to win is not interested in those types of challenge matches and they only focus on collecting points after killing the Monsters and like this, they continue to kill Monsters and get points because of that.


    On the other hand, as it had already been 6 hours, the person who got the individual first ce was once again challenged by another team and this time he also epted that match. Naturally, everybody present in the danger zone was notified when he epted the match, but not everyone became excited.


    Livia and her team slowly but steadily collected points and as they still had 10 more days they naturally had the confidence to enter the top 10 position. On the other hand, even though they were very curious to know the power of the current first position holder team or the person holding the first position.


    But Emma already told them that they should focus on collecting points. First of all, they did not have the power to defeat any of those Warriors who already reached the peak Epic grade, also if they were just really curious about that and wanted to know about their power while observing them then it would be aplete waste of time.


    Naturally, not only their team but many other teams also think the same thing, and because of this, they just focus on collecting the points.


    Now back to the danger zone,


    Even though many people avoid the fight with those powerful teams, that does not mean they don''t have to worry about the challenging match. Many teams already get challenges like this from the team which also has the same power limit as the other team.


    Like this many teams already go through the challenge match and minimum lose all of their points and need to start from the beginning. Fortunately, they still had 10 more days and with that, those teams focused more on collecting more points without wasting a single second.


    On the other hand,


    In the area where you can see the first position holder team and the Challenger team fighting each other, you can already see almost a thousand Spears appear in the sky and every one of the Spears very quickly going toward the person who is using the hammer.


    That person who uses the hammer is also very injured Like The other Warrior but wasting no time he already begins to channel The Spiritual energy while activating his most powerful technique. Without any second he instantly swings the hammer into the sky once again and naturally once again a breaking sound begins to appear in that ce and the next second you can see the crack mark that appears in the sky.


    Butpared to previous times, this time the number of those crack marks or you can say the number of the cracking force already increased and began to spread toward those spears.


    Now naturally as you know both of the forces are different types of force. One of them was the destructive force while the other one was the cracking force. It did not even take that much time and the sh between both of the forces already appeared and the whole Sky began to shake because of that. But that wasn''t over as the power of the impact had already begun to increase.


    Every Warrior present in that ce gets affected by that and they are unable to stand still while getting affected by that impact force. Most of the Warriors already fall to the ground while the other Warriors try to stay on to the ground but still, they can feel the pressure that naturallyes out from that impact force.


    You can say that it has already been 8 hours since they started fighting and both of them are very low on spiritual energy. Because of this, both of them wanted to finish the fight but still, you cannot be sure who would be the winner of this match as both of their attacks were very powerful, and the collision between the destructive force and that cracking force really created those powerful explosions in the sky.


    Fortunately, a distractive or you can say dangerous impact like those that did not appear on the ground could already destroy almost 20 km of area and everything present in that area would get killed or destroyed by that impact.


    Every Warrior was already trying to stabilize themselves but even with that condition every one of them wanted to know who would be the winner of this match as both of them used so much power in theirst attack so naturally you cannot be sure who would be the winner and who will lose this match.

 Chapter 589 589 - Next challenge

    Chapter 589  589 - Next challenge


    Next day,


    You can say that the battle between the first position holder team and the Challenger team continued even at night and finally, when it was almost 5:00 a.m. they finished their fight. Right now, the referee already told everyone the result, and naturally, everyone outside of the danger zone also knows the result as from the start tost they watch the battle between those two teams.


    The first position holder team had four wins while the Challenger team only had 2 wins. Naturally, because of this, you can easily say that the first position holder team is able to hold on to their title and also get more points. On the other hand, the Challenger team really had a disappointed look on them as they were unable to win this fight and also lost all the points.


    But they did not stay like this for long as from the start they also knew that when they epted the challenging match they should also prepare for that. In a challenge match, anybody could win and anybody could lose, so everyone should prepare themselves to face both situations.


    Fortunately, they still had 9 more days and with that, they decided to start from the beginning. Even though they are only able to reach the same point as the first position holder team, they care about that as they just want to gather points.


    On the other hand, the medical team prepared by the warrior association already stabilizes the condition of every one of those warriors and after that, they leave that ce. Not only those medical teams but every one of those warriors from the warrior association left the ce.


    Both of the teams at this time went their separate way. As you know, after a challenge match the winner of this match will have protection and in that time limit no other team or Warrior would be able to challenge them. Because of this, the winning team does not have to worry about other teams who naturally follow them.


    On the other hand, the Challenger team who lost the match was already going in a different direction. First of all, even though the condition of every one of them was able to stabilize because of the help of those medical Warriors, they still did not want to recklessly fight those powerful Monsters. Because of this, they wanted to search for those Early or intermediate-grade Warriors.


    Every Warrior present in the danger zone already gets to know about the result of the match. Naturally, not many people get surprised after hearing the result as you can say that getting the first position was easy for anyone and the team who was able to reach that ce naturally wasn''t a weak team.


    Livia, and her teammates even though did not challenge anyone at this time and only just killed those Monsters while almost avoiding those other teams, they were already able to enter in the top 30. While they are individual ranking also around the top 40.


    Naturally, they wanted to advance like that without challenging anyone at this time. But suddenly everyone gets surprised when they get the notification from their watch. When they read the notification they could see that it was the team of the human Prince and others and they epted a challenge match.


    Now the moment they get the news they be quite worried but at the same time they also be quite excited. Naturally, Emma, Livia, and Maria had confidence in their little brother/big brother, Naturally they also knew that if those people did not get reckless then they would win the match but still in the challenge match anything would happen and because of this they also quit worried about them.


    On the other hand, outside of the danger zone, as you can see in the battle arena, everybody present in the battle can also see on the big screen many teams right now challenging other teams and many challenge matches begin to appear in the danger zone.


    But not every team matches like this as they also know their limit so most of the time those teams only focus on killing those Monsters without looking for other teams.


    Sam and the others who are present in the VIP room also look at those challenging matches but naturally, at the same time, they also look at the condition of Maria''s team and the team of those Princes. It was a good thing that at first none of them looked for another team and just only focused on feeling Monsters and like this they were also able to enter almost in top 20 or top 30 positions.


    But at this time Sam and the others, looking at the situation of those Princes, suddenly get surprised when another team of those Warriors appears in that ce and also challenges the team of those Princes. Also if you look at those people very closely you will be able to tell that it is also a team of Princes from other kingdoms.


    Naturally, the human Prince and his teammates would not back down from a challenging match like this so they naturally epted the match, and every warrior or you can say every participant instantly got notified.


    Now both of the teams agreed with each other to have a referee and instantly a person from the Warrior Association came to that ce. He would be the referee of this match. Other hand, that person just aftering to that ce has already begun to look for a suitable ce for the match to start.


    It did not take him that much time to find a suitable ce and as you can see everyone already went toward that ce.


    Now from both of the teams, the first Warriors came toward the referee. Both of them will be starting the match, and the referee signals those other Warriors to get away from that ce. Naturally, those other Warriors needed to have a distance from those Warriors who would be fighting each other.


    Now on the other hand the referee already asked both of the warriors if they were ready or not. Naturally, both of the warriors already nodded and with that, the match finally started. Both of the warriors already create distance between themselves and already prepare their attacks.


    One of them used a hammer while the other one was a spiritual Warrior. Both of them used their techniques to prepare for their attack. The weapon user already mmed that hammer in the ground and the ground began to shake instantly and that began to spread around. When he mmed that hammer in the ground you can say that a spiritual wave got created and that began to spread around that ce.


    Naturally, it contains distractive Spiritual energy and if his opponent got hit by that wave then he would receive damage until he won''t be able to get away from that ce. Fortunately, that spiritual Warrior already noticed that thing and he did not waste a single second to escape from that ce.


    Fortunately, he was able to create more distance and without the power of the destructive spiritual energy wasn''t able to be effective that much but you can say he still received injuries because of that. Those types of spiritual energy attack him directly from inside and because of this even if he wears powerful armor he would still receives damage.


    But, in time he did not lose focus and with that, he was already able toplete the technique. In the next again the ground began to shake and instantly a figure began to appear from that ground. It only takes 5 seconds and you can say that a golem appears in that ce.


    More golems begin to appear in that ce and every one of those things directly begins to go toward that Hammer user. Naturally that Warrior also already noticed those golems, but he did not get scared or something like that and in the next second he instantly hit the ground once again, and this time he uses more spiritual energy.


    This time even the grounds begin to crack and the destructive energy that got created because of that m already begins to spread around. This time it did not spread around in every direction and only particrly went straight toward those golems.


    Before anything you should know the difference between those golem monsters and those summoned golem. The summoned Golem did not have any kind of Monster core inside of his body and every one of those thingspletely depended on the warrior who channels in The Spiritual energy.


    "Roar!!!!!"


    Instantly, the first golem was already destroyed by the destructive spiritual energy. Even though that golem tried to struggle and even The Spiritual Warrior tried to recover that golem, as you know the destructive spiritual energy directly affected the inner body you can already see that golem directly broke down into pieces.


    [A/N:- Sorry guys, recently I am unable to update daily as I am suffering from fever and because of this, sometime would feel headache. But don''t worry after recovering from the fever I will necessary update daily.]

 Chapter 590 590 - Next fight

    Chapter 590  590 - Next fight


    A huge amount of spiritual energy gather in that hammer and instantly it begin to shine brightly in red color. On the other hand you can see an army of Golemsing toward that person who was using the hammer right now.


    That Warrior naturally aware of that but still he did not think anything about that and only just focus on his technique. These would be the ultimate technique he would use against those army. First of all even though he had the confidence to destroy many of those golems, he also know his limit and naturally he cannot destroy all those 100 Golems at Once.


    Because of this he also decided to use his ultimate technique and naturally he was preparing for that. Before preparing for the attack he already made sufficient distance from his opponent and without him began to prepare that technique.


    If you look at his opponent he also continuously uses his golem making technique and naturally because of that one after another golem just appears in that ce and directly going toward that Warrior. Also you can say that this time everyone of those golems differentpared to those first Golems.


    Not only just those golems became more powerful but at the same time they also had the ability to control Earth element. Naturally they did not had ability to fully control Earth element, but still they could create some of the attacks using the earth element and even that was dangerous for anyone who will be facing those many golems at once.


    ___________________


    Outside of the danger zone,


    Naturally every one who is watching the fight between this to team did not know who will be the winner of this match. But everyone started to thinking that the team of the human Prince will be lose these match as that person who using the hammer on be able to defeat those many golems at once.


    Because of this, those other people who supporting the other team already became excited. But still you can say that none of them make any noise and the silently watching the TV or the big screen present in the arena.


    Naturally the warrior association showing many battle that was happening in the danger zone but right now everyone already interested in this battle between two teams of Princes and because of this, the warrior association is also showing that battle right now.


    Now in the VIP room the human king, the Oni king alongside with their queens naturally hope that their son''s team wins this match. Everybody who could observe the situation can tell that the teammate of the human prince who using the hammer right now preparing a powerful attack and if he sessfully prepared that attack most likely he would be able to destroy all those golems.


    A very intense moment once again get created between these two people and naturally that also making every one who watches the match more excited.


    On the other hand, everyone can already saw those golems already get very close to that person who using the hammer and they were already using the earth element to create Earth spikes. Not only they shooting those Earth spikes but they also creating Earth bullets.


    Wasting no time, those Golems already shoot toward that person who still closing his eyes as he preparing his attack. Naturally his teammate and everyone of those Warriors who were watching the match became very tense.


    But in thest second when he just above to get hit by those attack something unexpected happen and a destructive spiritual energy instantly came out from his body that instantly destroy all those attack that just about to hit him. But not only that on the second he hit that hammer in the ground.


    But for few second nothing happened that almost make his opponent confused and not only his opponent everyone of those people who did not know anything about his attack naturally get confused. Everyone for a second thought that his attack failed or he was unable toplete his attack.


    But in the next second something unexpected happen as the ground begin to crack and naturally getting destroy by the destructive spiritual energy. It did not spirit everywhere and just only going forward toward those golems.


    ___________________


    "Ahhh!!!"


    This time the spiritual Warrior was unable to evade that attack and he already got seriously injured as the distractly energy begin to effect him. HIs armor already got destroyed and blood started toe out from his mouth. Not only internally but he went receiving damage from outside and because of this you can see those injuries begin to appear on his body.


    Sometimeter,


    The medical team natural take action and already begin to heal that spiritual Warrior as he was in a serious condition. But all the other hand the moment referee announce the result that person who use in the hammer also became unconscious.


    Actually after using that powerful or you can say his ultimate attack he almost lost the strain to stay like this but still he just using his will power to hold on and wait for his opponent to fall down. Only after he realized the referee already announced the result he became unconscious.


    Back to main matter,


    Fortunately, that person who using the hammer did not be that much injured like that other Warrior. So only one medical Warrior would be enough to heal him and recover some of his spiritual energy. With that at least he would be able to wake up and after that he will naturally be able to use the Potions to recover his spiritual energy fully.


    For the next match, the referee already select in new ce for the fight as the previous ce already got destroyed. Before anything you should know that the danger zone was a strange ce as in just one day everyone of those ces which got destroy today would recover and even those trees which got destroyed would recover.


    Naturally, until now nobody was able to figure out how something like that happened in the danger zone but everyone already knew about that so nobody will get surprised when they would notice something like that. Also because of this, everyone fights in different ces after destroying the previous ce.


    Now for the next match as you can already see both of the people are already ready and this time both of the Warriors will be using their spiritual techniques and naturally from the start they make their distance from each other and wait for the referee to give them the signal.


    First of all, one of them has a poison element but his opponent uses the thunder element. The moment both of them get the signal from the referee, they already use their powerful attack from the start. One of them uses the poison ball while the other one uses the thunderbolt. Thunderbolt was easily able to counter attack those poison balls but those poison balls instantly exploded and began to spread poison in that ce.


    One by one everyone of those poison balls exploded and the full ce got filled with poison. On the other hand those thunderbolts could have hit that person using the poison element but before those thunderbolts could hit him he already made distance and once again created his attack.


    He instantly begins to control those poisoned air and directly begins to target that person who is using the thunder element. But naturally that person already realizes that and already creates distance from his previous ce. Not only that he instantly created a huge thunderbolt and directly shot toward that ce.


    First of all the poison user did not use liquid poison and because of this it was very hard for any other element other than air element to hit poisonous gas. The thunder element user also knows about these and because of this from the start he is just targeting the poison user.


    Naturally the poison user the moment realize that a big thunderbolt would hit him he instantly created distance from his previous ce once again and instantly that previous ys got destroyed by that thunderbolt. Not only that you can see a huge hole was created and even the surrounding area got destroyed by that big thunderbolt.


    Not only that, you can say that the whole ce still contains electricity and if that poison user approaches that ce he would still get affected by the electric element present in that ce. Naturally that poison user already knew about these and because of this he already created sufficient distance so that he did not get affected by that.


    On the other hand, he has already begun to prepare his nest attack and this time he will be using liquid poison. First of allpared to the gas poison you can say the liquid poison would be more dangerous but at the time naturally those other elements developed to affect that liquid poison. Using those other elements everyone needed to be careful because those liquid poison could also be sprayed around.


    A purple-colored liquid instantly began to appear in that ce and a tiger-like creature got created by that liquid poison. Instantly that creature begins to go to a thunder element user.

 Chapter 591 591 - 10 Days later,

    Chapter 591  591 - 10 Dayster,


    Instantly you can see the battle between two elements. The thunder element and the poison element shing with each other. Naturallypared to the poison element it was more powerful and because of these The Tiger that got created by the poisonous liquid getting destroyed by the thunderbolt that kept advancing even though that poisonous Tiger was trying to destroy it.


    But you can see that while that poisonous Tiger gets destroyed the poisonous liquid also begins to spread around that area and everything that got covered by the poisonous liquid also gets affected by that.


    Naturally that is the n of that poison user. From the first he knew that he wouldn''t be able to win like this so he needed to use his n to win this fight against the thunder element. Also he already created a thickyer of poisonous fog that would prevent thunder limit users from attracting him directly.


    The poison user knows that the thunder limit could easily defeat him if he uses his full power and instantlyes in front of him. Because of this, from the start he used that kind of safety measure.


    On the other hand that thunderboltpletely destroys that poisonous Tiger but in the next second everyone of those poisonous liquids begin to gather around each other and the poisonous Tiger gets created once again.


    On the other hand, the thunder element user who maintained the distance all this time wasting no time created a thunder Dragon and directly attacked that poisonous tiger. Not only that in the next second he also vanished from his ce.


    _______________


    "Thunder zone,"


    That thunder element user instantly came behind that poison element user. Naturally he is still maintaining the distance from that poisonous fog and in the next second he uses one of the powerful techniques that call that thunder zone. Like fire zone and any other zone in the thunder zone he could attack anything using his thunder element that will be present everywhere.


    That poison element user even prepared himself to face that kind of attack but he naturally did not think that his opponent would attack him like this. Even though he was also trying to protect himself using the poison wall using the poison liquid and also using the poisons zone. Butpared to the poison element as you know the district power of the thunder element was much more.


    Because of this,


    Sometimeter, you can see that the poison element user got paralyzed after getting hit by the thunderbolt. Fortunately his opponent at this time stopped attacking him and told him that he did not die. Nowpared to those previous matches this would be the fastest match that gotpleted.


    Even everyone present outside of the danger zone knows from the start that for that poison user to win against the thunder element user would be very difficult and in the end he is unable to win this match and lose.


    Now with that, the human Prince''s team has more advantage and they had three wins. On the other hand the opponent team could already give up on this match or they could still continue the match even though they would not win this match.


    The captain of the team was thinking what to do at this moment. After thinking for sometime he finally decided to give up and with that the human prince and his team finally won this match. If you are wondering why their opponent gave up On the fight then it was because they already know that they lose these matches and they need to start from the beginning.


    Even though the medical team of the warrior association would heal them, they would still feel exhausted and that would be aplete waste of time for them as they could use that time to kill more monsters and gather points once again.


    ______________________________


    Once again everything present in the danger zone got notified by the Warrior association that the team of the human Prince finally won this match and with that they already entered the top 15 rank. Naturally just after realizing that all those teams that are pretty close to that rank already know that they need it to increase the Killing rate of Monster so that they would be able to reach that kind of ce.


    Livia, Maria, and Emma naturally be happy when they hear that information but in the end they also know that they need to increase the Killing rate of those Monsters.


    On the other hand, it looks like after this the situation of the danger zone would bepletely different as many more people would try to win in challenge matches to get more points easily. Everyone needed to stay very careful.


    Outside of the danger zone,


    Almost everyone had already left the battle arena as they could still watch the match on their mobile phone or in their TV show that did not have to stay in the battle arena all the time. It will be just during that time when they will watch the match on their phone or their TV they would randomly so other people without having any kind of choice to choose any Warrior or their team.


    In the battle arena even though the Warrior association randomly shows those Warriors in the danger zone, still you could get to see your favorite Warrior if you were able to vote for that Warrior.


    Sam also already leaves the battle arena. But he did not go back to the Royal pce or anywhere present in the human Kingdom. He directly goes outside of the human Kingdom as after watching the match of those people inside the dangerous zone he also begins to feel itchy to fight some Monsters.


    Actually not only him but many other Warriors also had the same thought and because of this, they also began to go outside of the human Kingdom. But at the same time when he finally came outside of the human Kingdom he also already contacted the old Oni king. After that he told him that he wanted to talk about world travel.


    Naturally the time is getting closer and closer and he needs to go back to his own world. Fortunately he would be able to stay there for a few more days and after there naturally he needed to go back. So he told the old man that if he was able to prepare everything that would help him for that process.


    The old man after hearing all of these did not get surprised as he already expected something like this. But naturally he did not think that Sam would request him like this and also it looked like he was in a hurry. Even though Sam did not tell him anything while hanging up the call, the old man already knows that Sam will tell him when he will go back to the Oni Kingdom.


    ''Sigh, really I just everything would be alright and everyone in my world would be alright. After clearing all those dangers, I will try to help everyone so that they can be powerful and with that they do not have to worry about those kinds of monsters and those people in other words.''


    Sam thought all of this while he just began to go inside of the danger zone. At this time If you saw around the danger zone then you will not find that many warriors present there. First of all not everyone would be able to leave the human Kingdom right now as they need special permission from the warrior association to do that.


    Fortunately Sam did not have to worry about that kind of situation and with that he could easily leave the kingdom like this.


    ''I would try to go back so that I did not miss thepetition.''


    ________________________


    10 dayster,


    Finally the battle was fully crowded with people and everybody excitedly looking at the battle arena. In the battle arena you can see the de King alone side with many other people from the warrior association there and every one of them already ready to activate the teleportation array.


    Today was the day for thepetition or you can say for the first part of thepetition to finish and with that they will naturally teleport everyone of those Warriors into that battle arena.


    For these 10 days you can naturally say many things happened inside the danger zone. People became more aggressive and the rate of the challenge match began to increase one after another. Even the losing team collecting some points decided to challenge other teams.


    Naturally like this many of them also got seriously injured and they also needed to leave the match. They already got disqualified from thepetition. Some of them needed to leave thepetition as they vited the rules while some of them needed to leave as they did not have the condition to continue thepetition.

 Chapter 592 592 - Team Ranking

    Chapter 592  592 - Team Ranking


    Sometimeter,


    One by one every participant begins to teleport to the battleground. Everyone present in the danger zone already stops fighting those Monsters and naturally they are just waiting for the teleportation array to take them to the battle arena.


    Well you can say previously when they came to the danger zone using the teleportation array, the warrior association at this time marked each of them with a different symbol and naturally using that they could teleport everyone back to the battle arena. Previously everyone of those participants who got this qualification from thepetition came back to the battle in a through that kind of process.


    Naturally not everyone came to the battle arena at once and it will take some time for everyone toe back. But every time when those participantse back to the battle arena every person present in the battle arena cheering for those people. Even if those people were not able to reach the top 10 position or something like that, they still gave them a good show and an exciting match.


    The Livia arena team also came back to the battle arena sometimeter. Not just only them but one by one everyone already came back to the battle arena in just 1 hour. Not only that, the warrior association already prepared the resting room for all of them where they could rest and saw the final result.


    Actually, yesterday they already shut down the ranking result and only today everyone will get to know about the final result. Because of this, not only just those participants but everyone present in the stadium was also very excited to know the result.


    Fortunately the warrior association did not take that much time and already began to show the result on the big screen that was present in the battle arena. Not just that big screen present in the battle but everyone can see that result online or on their TV right now.


    Fromst to first, all those participants that present in thepetition are able to see their ranking. Naturally the ranking was divided into two parts where the first one was the team ranking and the second one was the individual ranking. In apetition like these naturally someone would not choose a team to go inside of the battle in so team ranking is also a big factor in thispetition.


    All the teams naturally looked for their own name in the ranking and even Livia, Maria and the others found their ranking. In the end they can see that they are able to reach top 25 in team ranking. On the other hand the team of the human Prince was able to reach top 5 rank.


    Unfortunately they were not able to reach first ce in team ranking. But the thing was that none of them get disappointed when they look at the ranking. They already expected that because to reach the first ce they would need a huge amount of points and just by killing those monsters they won''t be able to gather that amount of points in these 10 days.


    So from the first you can say none of them aim for the 1st position. Now back to the main matter, the team of that dragonite Warrior who previously got the first position is still able to maintain his position. Not only that, just by looking at the huge amount of points that they collected you can naturally say how many teams get defeated by them.


    In these 10 days you can say at least 6 teams decided to challenge them and naturally they won all those challenges and were finally able to maintain their first position.


    "Ladies and gentlemen, as you can see from the team ranking, we naturally wanted to call the top five position holders into the battle ring so that they received their reward from the warrior association.


    Now everyone naturally wants to know about the individual ranking but it will take us some time to show you the individual ranking so I hope everyone patiently waits for the result."


    A person that came to the battle arena at this time suddenly announced that and after that every person present in the battle arena began to p for those top 5 position holders.


    Those teams already went back to the resting room but when they get called by that person then naturally once again begin to go back to the battle arena. But this time the moment they enter the battle arena everyone begins to cheer for them and naturally that makes everyone very proud at this time.


    The most surprising thing was that many people from different Kingdom were also cheering for them. So that was a really proud moment for everyone.


    " Now everyone please wee our de king, he will be the one who will give the rewards. Also I hope those teams who were unable to get the top 5 position did not get disappointed because you can prepare yourself for the nextpetition and in thatpetition you could get the first position.


    You should not get disappointed because you can make yourself stronger and naturally by doing that you can get the first position or even enter the top 5 position."


    The announcer finishes saying that while everyone once again begins to p because at this time the de king begins to walk toward the battle arena where those 5 teams are waiting for him. Naturally he isn''t alone as many people are alsoing toward that ce and walking behind him. Everyone of them had some kind of thing present in their hand and naturally those are the reward for those 5 teams.


    "All of your teams really put in a lot of effort to get the top 5 position. All the time I observed the performance of your team while present in the danger zone and I am really satisfied that all of you became so much powerful I really had the potential to be more powerful.


    Naturally everyone of you knows that currently our is facing a problem with the Abyss world. They wanted to sacrifice the life of our to open the gate for their demon god and I should tell you one thing that you don''t know about those Demons.


    Those Demons became more powerful just absorbing the negative energy from living beings. Not only that from childhood they would have a strong potential and much more powerfulpared to any of us. Even though all of you read about them in your history book but in the history book you did not read all the truth about those Demons.


    I will not say all the truth about those Demons but you should know that it would be aplete disaster for our Terraria if those Demons were able toe back to our world. Because of this I hope after receiving all these rewards you will focus on bing powerful as it would be really helpful for our to have strong warriors like all of you."


    Saying all of this the de king finishes his exnation and after that one by one he begins to give them their gifts. The good thing was that everyone from those top 5 teams got rewarded by him and naturally that also made everyone happy.


    But naturally they also be serious by hearing the word of the de king. Everyone naturally knows that right now Terraria you''re facing a very dangerous situation. If really those Demons were able toe back to their then it would be aplete disaster for every living being present on this.


    Not just those participants but everyone watching the award ceremony already got serious just by hearing that. Everyone was very worried about their future as they did not know if those Demons would be able to break the gate of hell toe back or not but if they were really able to do that then it would be very dangerous.


    Compared to those people who did not know the strength of those Demons you can say everyone who knew about those Demons very clearly became more serious about these matters and all the time they were really alert about the Abyss world. Because they also know most likely something happened to that world and because of this, those abyss humans became active that much.


    Back to main matter,


    After the award ceremony finally over, every team already wins back to the resting room. Also the warrior association already announced that they will announce the individual ranking after 2 hours and in that time everyone should also finish their lunch.


    As you know the individual ranking will be released based on the warrior grade, so naturally it will take some time for the warrior association to arrange all of these. Also every Warrior team will get time to rest and eat something. First of all you can say in these 10 days none of them get that much time to eat that much, so naturally everyone must be very tired.

 Chapter 593 593 - Individual ranking

    Chapter 593  593 - Individual ranking


    "Ladies and gentlemen. Wee back to ourpetition. Naturally, the team ranking already got published and with that, we already awarded the top 5 teams. Now it will be time to reveal the individual ranking. But naturally revealing the individual ranking will be different from our team ranking.


    The individual ranking will be based on the warrior grade and with that every Warrior will have their ranking ce based on their warrior grade. So wasting no time, let''s start revealing our ranking and we will be starting from the lowest grade."


    The person from the warrior association already finished that and instantly on that big screen you can see the ranking of the special grade. You can say no mortal grade warriors participated in thispetition as they know that even if they participated in thispetition it could be dangerous for them.


    Even though the warrior association did not prevent any of them from participating in thepetition, no Mortal grade warriors decided to participate this time as the Warrior association already announced that they would be organizing the firstpetition in the danger zone where every participant would fight real Monsters.


    This was also a big reason that nobody participated in thepetition. On the big screen, you can already see one by one the names of each of those participants begin to appear and naturally beside their names you can also see the rank.


    On the big screen, you are only able to see the ranking of the top 100 individuals while the remaining people are able to check their ranking using the Warrior Association''s website. But naturally, every one of them would be able to see that after the warrior association finally revealed the individual ranking.


    Now, you can see many names of those participants who were able to enter the top 100 rankings. In the top 100 positions, you can see the names of many participants from various kingdoms, and every one of them just after seeing their results already became happy as they were able to enter the top hundred ranking.


    Even though Livia, Maria, and the other participants who naturally weren''t in that Warrior grade, looked at the screen with interest as they could also see the names of many people from their Kingdom, and naturally that was a proud moment for them. The more people from their Kingdom would be able to enter the top 100 ranking the more they will be proud.


    Like this, it takes almost 30 minutes to finally reveal the ranking of the top 100 special grade Warriors. The warrior association will naturally reveal the elite-grade warrior''s ranking next. So everybody became excited once again to see who would be able to see their name if they were able to enter the ranking.


    Wasting no time finally the warrior association began to reveal the rank of top 100 Elite grade warriors. Just when they reveal the top 100 position you can Livia and the others also searching for their names but they did not find them.


    But they can also see how many people from their Kingdom are able to enter that ranking. From the Human Kingdom you can say 10 people are able to enter the top 100 ranking while from the Oni Kingdom, almost 18 people are able to enter the top 100 ranking.


    Naturally, after that, the warrior association continued to reveal the ranking of those other people, and Maria and the others all the time just waited for their names. You can say that they had the confidence that they would be present in the top 100 ranking so naturally all the time everyone eagerly searched for their name.


    Actually not only them but even the human king or the Oni king along with those other kings also searched the names of their children in that ranking. Every one of them had confidence in their children that they would be present in the ranking and they also had the confidence that most likely their children would be present in the top 50 rankings so naturally when they were unable to see the name of the children in the top 100 they did not be ufortable or something like that.


    Every one of them waits for the top 50 rankings. Sometimeter in the ranking board, you can already see the warrior association finally being controlled to reveal the top 50 ranking.


    10 minutester,


    Livia, Maria, Ruri, Elisa, and others be quite nervous as even though it is already time for the warrior association to show the top 10 ranking they still cannot see their name present there. But none of them said anything and just eagerly looked at the big screen.


    Finally when it was time for the Warrior Association to reveal the top five positions they were able to see their name present there. First of all, you should know that almost everyone had the same points so naturally their ranking would be around each other.


    " 3rd position - Tina, Hiori, and Elisa


    2nd position - Maria, and Nisha


    1st position - Livia and Ruri."


    Instantly every one of them can see the name of them present in the ranking list and the moment they saw the ranking they became speechless as they did not even think that they would be able to achieve that ranking.


    Who thought that they would be able to enter the top 3 ranking? Not only that but even Livia and Ruri were able to get the first position at the same time. The moment the top 3 ranking was revealed, almost every person from that particr Kingdom began to cheer as they could see the name of the princess in the top 3 list.


    Not only that, you can say even the human king and the Oni king almost wanted to get up from their seats to shout and enjoy but fortunately they controlled themselves but you can still see the happiness present in their faces.


    Now in the resting room, you can say Maria and the others the moment came back to them since they also began to cheer as they could finally see their ranking. They never thought that they would be able to enter the top 3 ranking.


    Emma who was present in the resting room naturally became happy after seeing the ranking. First of all, she helped all of them to get points, and naturally from the first she hoped that all of them would be able to get a good ranking position.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, the person from the warrior association once again called the top five position holders into the battle ring as they would receive the reward. At this time Maria and the others naturally go back toward the battle ring with excitement. But as a princess, they also have the dignity to maintain so naturally they did not behave childishly when they finally came out of the resting room.


    One by one every one of those participants came to the battle arena and at this time once again the person from the warrior association began to say,


    "First of all, I would like to congratte all of you for being able to enter the top 5 rankings. Naturally entering this ranking isn''t easy for any of you and all of you work very hard to achieve this. You need to fight those Monsters a long way and also need to fight any other team who likes to challenge you. But even with that finally, all of you are able to achieve these results and naturally, that is a very big achievement. "


    After finishing that he finally told the de King toe to the battle arena once again as he would be the one who awards every one of those participants.


    "It is very good to see that all of you young blood are able to achieve this result even though many experienced Warriors also participate in thispetition. Naturally with that everyone should know that never underestimate anyone.


    On the other hand, I hope every one of you is able to maintain this ranking in the nextpetition through your hard work. In the nextpetition, you once again mention a very difficult situation and I hope every one of you is able to rank like this even when those hard situations try to prevent you from doing that.


    Also as I told every one of those warriors who can enter the top 5 team ranking, you use these rewards to make yourself more powerful but at the same time, you should also think about getting more fighting experience. Fighting experience would be a very important factor for your future development so naturally, you should also aim for gaining more fighting experience."


    After saying all of this, finally the de King begins to give them their rewards. One by one every one of those participants begins to receive their rewards and naturally, every person present in the battle arena is cheering for those participants.


    Even those people who came from different kingdoms also supported those participants. You can say that even if those people got disappointed that nobody from their Kingdom entered the top five rankings, they should still p for those people who at this time received the reward.


    Naturally from the first to thest everyone also saw the match of those people and then actually noticed how much difficulty those people faced to get that ranking. Because of this, it is also the responsibility of those people who came to the battle arena to p for those people.

 Chapter 594 594 - Preparing to breakthrough

    Chapter 594  594 - Preparing to breakthrough


    After the ranking of the Elite grade warriors was finished finally it is the time to reveal the ranking of the Epic grade Warriors. You can say most of the Warriors and most of the people present in the battle ring are waiting for this as the epic grade Warriors really had an intense fight inside the danger zone andpared to those other Warriors everyone of them would try to kill as many monsters as they can and also try to challenge each other.


    So, everyone wanted to find out who will be the Warriors who are able to enter the ranking. Not only that would be the one who is able to enter the top 5 ranking.


    The human Prince and all of his teammates alongside all the other Warriors right now excitingly looking at the big screen. Naturally screens like this present inside of their resting room so they did not have toe outside to look at the big screen.


    At this time Sam and the others were also looking at the big screen with excitement as they wanted to know if people from their Kingdom were able to enter the ranking or not.


    Wasting no time the warrior association already began to show the ranking to everyone and like this one by one they began to show the name of those Warriors who enter the top hundred ranking.


    ___________________


    30 minutester finally the human Prince and all of his teammates were able to find their name in the top 5 ranking. But unfortunately they are unable to get the fast position even though the human Prince and the Oni Prince get the 3rd position.


    But they did not get disappointed as they already expected that. Previously when they were still able to see the ranking of those other Warriors inside the danger zone they already knew how much they were behind every one. But naturally as they begin to challenge other Warriors and also begin to kill more Monsters, their ranking naturally begins to increase.


    Before the ranking disappeared they already saw that they were already able to enter the top 7 ranking so from the start you can say they had the confidence that they wouldn''t be able to see their name in the top 100 ranking but most likely they would be able to see the name in the top 10 ranking.


    After the de king gave the rewards to everyone and once again told him to use the reward to make themselves powerful so that they can also fight those dangers that would have the power to destroy Terraria.


    With that the first part of the warriorpetition was finished and with that the announcer already announced that the second part will be held after 10 days as they wanted to give enough time to every participant who qualified for the next part of thepetition.


    Before anything you should know that to be able to enter the next part of thepetition everyone at least needs to have a ranking around top 500. Only those people who had a ranking around top 500 would be able to enter the next part of thepetition.


    Naturally with that many people already got disqualified from thepetition as they were unable to rank that higher. They did not get disappointed after getting the result. But something opposite happened as it already increased the motivation of everyone of those Warriors.


    With this one by one every person present in the battle stadium begins to go back to their hotel rooms. Most of the royal family would naturally go back to their Kingdom as they did not want to stay in the human Kingdom that much. But even with that the human Kingdom was still crowded. First of all only the royal family came to the human Kingdom using the teleportation array as it still was not avable for normal peoples to use who did not have that much authority or achievement.


    Naturally those people will stay inside the human Kingdom until thepetition is finished and around that time they will stay in the hotel rooms.


    Many participants who got qualified for the next part of thepetition also decided to stay in the human Kingdom as they wanted to find out more about the human Kingdom and with the promise of the Warrior association they did not have to worry about their safety.


    _________________


    Sam finally came back to his room in the Royal pce. He already told the king that he will stay in the hotel room or something like that but naturally they did not agree and with that he once again needed toe back to the Royal pce.


    Sam all this time while going back to the Royal pce listening to the adventure of Livia and her teammates. She was now telling him what type of Monster she faced and how many challenges they also won with their effort. Even though most of the time they try to avoid challenge matches like this but naturally you cannot predict what will happen next and with that they already faced many teams like those who challenge them.


    Surprisingly Ruri and the others also decided to stay in the human Kingdom until the second part of thepetition did not begin. Surprisingly even the family members of those princesses also agree with that and naturally they will be living in the Royal pce alongside Maria and Livia.


    Now that was a very surprising matter for him as he did not expect something like that to happen. But he did not care about anything until nothing happened to the human Kingdom. On the other hand he was now thinking about his breakthrough.


    Actually before going back to his he was thinking about Breaking through to the next grade. If you are wondering about his current grade, then he already achieved peak Epic grade. Not only that he also reached the limit of that grade and right now he just needed a powerful limit breaker to break through to the next grade.


    Breaking through to the next grade or you can say to theary grade wasn''t easy and to break through his naturally required powerful limit breaker. Because of these he was almost searching for an Epic grade limit breaker. But unfortunately he was only able to find one epic grade limit breaker.


    Even when previously he finished killing the Boss monster inside the Dungeon he did not get limit breaker after killing the Boss monster. Because of this, in the 6 months even after reaching the peak Epic grade Sam did not break through.


    Alsopared to any of your normal warriors who also reached the limit of peak Epic grade, he was powerful. Also because of these you can say he seeded almost every one of his missions that was given by the warrior association. If he finds one more lemon breaker like this then he will naturally upgrade them using the supreme upgrade.


    ''I should go back to the danger zone once again and kill those monsters to see if I could get a limit breaker or not. But if I did not get the limit breaker right now then before using the world breach I would request the human king or the Oni king to give me a limit breaker like this.


    Before going back to Eden blue I really wanted to prepare myself to face those enemies who will also be able to use their full power when the restriction of Eden blue will be erased.''


    Sam thought that he had alreadye back to his room. Actually as you know he was very worried about his world as before he came to Terraria he saw many people from differents came to Eden blue and everyone of them waiting for the right time to attack the Eden Blue tosnatch the core off of the when it will appear on the surface.


    Fortunately, in this 6 month''s not only he justpleted those missions or became powerful but at the same time he read many books and many things around those others which also have warriors.


    Even though it wasn''t sure if the Terraria was the first world to awake In The Spiritual energy or not, everyone in the Terraria believe that and without it they also contain many important matters about those others which also awaken In The Spiritual energy.


    Sam suddenly thinks about the teleportation portals that he also finds present in Terraria after killing the Boss monster inside the Dungeon. Now he really wanted to know where it will take him if he uses that teleportation array but one thing he was your naturally he will be going toward a world like the Terraria.


    First of all you also believe that most likely all the world that able to awake In The Spiritual energy and also have Dungeons inside theirs has some kind of connection with the Terraria and because of this, in everyone of those Dungeons you would able to find a teleportation symbol like this that would be connect to Terraria.

 Chapter 595 595 - Fire lizards

    Chapter 595  595 - Fire lizards


    Sam instantly created an energy shield in front of him that was able to block the iing attack from that giant fire lizard. But you can say he did not receive just one attack as 20 of the fire lizards attacked him at Once while he was defending himself from those attacks.


    Naturally, the temperature of that ce has already increased and you can see the surrounding ce also started burning because of those fires. Fortunately Sam had the fire resistance kill as he could also use the fire control.


    But not only that as you know he is also able to use the light control and all this time he is also preparing to use that technique to attack those Monsters. Dual casting naturally was very hard but he still did that.


    He continuously supplies spiritual energy in both of the techniques and naturally The Spiritual barrier technique protects him while creating a protective barrier around himself. At the same time the next technique that he was using required some time to finish and Sam was just waiting for that chance to attack those Monsters.


    On the other hand those Monsters already close the distance between Sam and themselves. With that the power of their attack increased from time to time and even though The Spiritual barrier that protected him from those attacks would be able to absorb all those attacks and did not have any kind of crack mark on it, it would be broken if he did not do anything.


    But at this time you can see Sam did not worry about the situation right. He can already see those light Spears appear on the sky and wasting no time one by one everyone of those light Spears begin to fall down on those Monsters.


    But it looks like those Monsters also already notice those attacks and because of this, many of them were already able to create barriers around themselves like his spiritual barrier. Naturally not everyone of them was able to react on time and those were the Monsters who received most of the damage.


    On the other hand, Sam already knew that this would be the right time to attack those Monsters as they were in a defensive position. He instantly uses the telekinesis technique and that instantly affects all those Monsters that were in the range of that technique.


    Before anything you should know that in these 6 months when he was traveling around the world he did not learn any of those new techniques that he got from killing those Monsters. He already had powerful techniques and naturally he did not need to learn any new techniques at that moment until he did not find any powerful technique that would be helpful for him.


    Instead of that he decided to upgrade all those techniques as much as he can in these 6 months and with that his technique naturally became more powerfulpared to before. With that he could easily do much damage just using his telekinesis.


    He was already able to control the body of everyone of those Monsters who were in the range. Right now at least 6 of those Monsters were in the range. Even though he could affect those other Monsters that are not present in the technique range but still he decided to only focus on those Monsters at first.


    On the other hand he is still using dual casting while maintaining the light control technique and also using the telekinesis technique. He instantly begins to increase the pressure on those Monsters and not only that, using his full power on the telekinesis technique right now to kill those Monsters.


    As he already upgraded the telekinesis technique He can now also able to control the internal organs of those Monsters and with that he is already able to control the hearts of those Monsters.


    Using his power he is already trying his best to destroy the heart of those Monsters. But naturally to do that he requires more spiritual energy and because of that he already stops using the light control technique and fully focuses on the telekinesis technique.


    Even though those other Monsters naturally realize something was happening with those other Monsters, they are already toote to do anything. One by one everyone of those 6 Monsters just fall down and naturally after that their body begins to fade away.


    Even though those remaining Monsters got surprised by these, everyone knows that the reason behind all of this would be that they are human and with that they once again prepare to attack Sam. But Sam at this time was already prepared for that.


    Before those Monsters could prepare their powerful fire st he was already able to stop the movement of those Monsters and in the next second you can already see the sun ray begin to hit those monsters. But it did not instantly kill those Monsters as they have the fire immunity and because of this he naturally needed to use much spiritual energy to kill those Monsters.


    Previously while using the telekinesis technique to kill those 6 Monsters he almost uses 30% of The Spiritual energy. This time you can say he uses 50% of his spiritual energy and only after that one by one those Monsters begin to burn by sun ray.


    But that wasn''t over as he could already sense more Monstersing toward that ce after hearing the roar from those fire lizards. Not only that before they coulde to that ce they already shot their fire st toward the direction where Sam was standing right now.


    But before those fire sts could hit him a firewall got created in front of him and the firewall instantly absorbed those fire sts. Naturally in these 6 months you can say his fire control technique also became powerful and right now if you look at the color of the fireworld then you will see it has already be deep red. It would be called the blood fire and after he is able to surpass the level the fire will turn into hell fire.


    Not only that he instantly uses the teleportation technique to vanish from that ce. First of all, before hepletely killed all those Monsters, those fire sts starteding toward his direction so he did not get the chance to use teleportation technique. And after using that he already came to the direction from where he could see all those Monsters.


    Instantly arge symbol appears in that ce and in the next second everyone of those Monsters who were most likely preparing their powerful attack already begin to blow up. This would be the new technique he learned as it was very useful in a battle like this. The name of this technique was spirit st.


    This technique instantly created a symbol like this when you use that and naturally everyone present in that symbol would be affected by the spirit st technique. Actually everyone who would be present in that symbol instantly felt that the spiritual energy inside of their body began to increase but it did not provide them with any help as the spiritual energy became very destructive.


    Not only that when the spiritual energy present inside the body of everyone would be affected by the technique also get affected by that as the destructive spiritual energy Instantly affects those spiritual energy and turn them destructive energy.


    At that time nobody would be able to do anything or be able to use any kind of technique. Even if they previously using some kind of technique at this time they would bepletely unable to do anything as the spiritual energy would not be in their control and like this The Spiritual energy that already turn into destructive spiritual energy after reaching the limit instantly blow up and if at that time the person who get affected by that unable to do anything naturally his body will just burst.


    Naturally this technique was very hard to use as it also required a huge amount of spiritual energy and naturally needed a huge amount of mental energy to control that technique.


    Fortunately Sam already increased his mental capacity to the peak limit and also as he used the origin spiritual energy technique like this became more dangerous and with that even if many Monsters were able to counter attack that type of technique, did not get the time to do anything.


    Once again using the teleportation technique he went far away from that ce to recover The Spiritual energy and only after that you will go to that ce to kill the remaining Monsters.


    All of this happens in less than a second and with that those remaining Monsters actually did not get that much time to notice anything but when they notice they already saw that theirrades already got killed and the person that they targeted previously already vanished from his ce. They were unable to feel the life energy of the person in front of them so naturally these make them more angry and they already begin to attack everywhere.


    But it was not there, they also used their observation technique to find the enemy. Naturally Sam is already out of the range of those Monsters and with that they are unable to feel him.


    ______________________


    Sometimeter,


    After recovering The Spiritual energy Sam once again uses the teleportation technique toe behind those Monsters. But unfortunately not all of them are present in the same ce as they already spread around to search for their enemy.


    Currently in front of him you can see only three Monsters present and he already begins to use the telekinesis technique to control the body of those Monsters and instantly uses more spiritual energy and in the next second you can see those three Monsters just fall down.

 Chapter 596 596 - A big group of Monsters

    Chapter 596  596 - A big group of Monsters


    After killing those fire lizards naturally he began to advance once again and not long after that he once again saw some Monsters that were also around peak Epic grade. Now you can say handling a small group of Monsters or even an intermediate group of Monster wasn''t that much difficult for him.


    Most of the time he will use the teleportation technique and will use the telekinesis to prevent those monsters from moving and naturally after that he will attack them. As also because of the origin of spiritual energy every one of those attacks became more powerful and with that killing those Monsters wasn''t that hard for him.


    But if he faced arge group of Monster higher at least 100 of them present and tried to attack him at the same time, then it would be more dangerous for him even if he uses the teleportation technique.


    First of all, as every Monster became more intelligent and had a naturally stronger instinct, they would naturally react more quicklypared to other Monsters and obviously be able to find him when he tried to attack them from behind or another direction.


    He won''t be able to kill all of them at once and naturally it will take much time to kill those Monsters in this process. He can also get hurt by those Monsters. Because of these all the time he also tries to avoid facing arge group of monsters but you can say his luck wasn''t that good.


    45 minutes ago he just killed a small group of monsters and after that decided to rest. But who could have thought that you will get attacked by those ork Monsters out of nowhere.


    Not just only those ork soldiers but you can also see those other ork Monsters present in that group. They did not evene close to his direction when they used their spiritual technique to attack him and at the same time those soldiers who most likely were closebat fighters alreadying toward his direction as quickly as they could.


    .c¦Ïm Fortunately Sam already became aware of those Monsters as he was using the live detection device and he was already able to use the teleportation technique to vanish from that ce before those attacked could hit him.


    He already appeared 500m away from that ce. After that, he naturally begins to prepare a mega fireball to shoot toward those Monsters that he can see in front of him. Suddenly he feels the danger andpletely deactivates the mega fireball technique and uses the teleportation technique once again.


    As he expected, as the number of those Monsters increases this much they are naturally able to observe more areas of that ce and the moment he appears 500 m away from that ce those Monsters already sense him and already attack toward his direction. Actually from the first they already prepare their attack and because of this the moment they sense him, they are able to Attack.


    On the other hand, as previously he did not get the chance to choose the ce where he would appear that quickly he did not came that far away from that previous ce full stop but just after appearing on the ce he once again uses the teleportation technique and this time almost 2 km away from that ce he appear once again.


    Not only that instantly he began to create those mega fireballs that already begin to float around him. As he fully focused on the fire control technique you can see you are able to create almost 5 mega fire balls at once and naturally everyone of those fireballs even though look small in size but contain a huge amount of power.


    Sam, still channeling The Spiritual energy into those fireballs as he keeps increasing the power of those fireballs. Naturally he wanted to power up those FireBall as much as he can and only then he will attack those Monsters.


    On the other hand he can already feel that most of the monsters already detect him and most likely preparing their attacks as he can also feel The Spiritual fluctuation. But the thing was that he had already finished preparing his attack, wasting no time. You can see those 5 mega fire balls begin to go towards Monster''s direction.


    Naturally those Monsters can already feel the danger from those mega fireballs and already wanted to avoid those fireballs but not everyone of them was able to do that. Even though most of those Monsters already begin to escape from that ce but before they could wind that far away those fireballs already hit the ground and instantly5 big explosions appear on that ce.


    Sam already uses the teleportation technique to go for a as the range of the destruction already reaches 5 km. But that wasn''t over as the range of the destruction kept increasing and increasing and sometimeter almost 10 km area got destroyed by those 5 explosions and naturally every Monsters who got affected by the explosion already got killed.


    Those remaining Monsters naturally got injured right now and almost 70 of those Monsters were able to survive. On the other hand, Sam is already preparing for his next attack. This time you will be using the rain of fire. Using this technique, naturally rain will appear in that ce and fire will fall from the sky.


    But to use that technique on those Monsters in nature needed to get close to them. Before that he is already able to activate the technique and instantly uses a teleportation technique to get close to them while he channels full spiritual energy into that next attack and instantly the fire rain already appears on the sky and fire already begins to fall from the sky.


    "Boom!!!"


    In the next second the ground where Sam appeared already got destroyed as those ork already noticed him and naturally they did not waste a single second to attack them.


    Fortunately even though Sam was not able to use the teleportation technique at time but he already activated The Spiritual barrier. That barrier is able to protect him but you can see he is still able to fill the impact and that sends him backward. Almost 10 of those Monsters attacked that spiritual barrier at once. This was the reason he was able to feel that strong impact.


    But it wasn''t over as in the next second he began to get attacked by many more ork Monsters. Naturally those Monsters had only one thing in their mind. They just wanted to kill him as quickly as they could so they are using their full power right now.


    On the other hand everyone of their attack contains The Spiritual energy. Even though he is able to protect himself using the spiritual barrier, even his spiritual barrier begins to show the sign of cracking as it is unable to absorb more damage. Right now almost 50 of those Monsters begin to attack him from every direction.


    Sam, at this time just holding on to his ground and doing nothing. First of all he almost exhausted his spiritual energy and at this moment if he wanted to use the teleportation technique then he naturally needed to deactivate the spiritual barrier. That would be dangerous for him and because of this he keeps holding on like this.


    But Sam also knew that he did not need to stay like this forever as he could already see the red clouds begin to appear above that ce and 15 minutester fire began to fall down from the sky. The color of those fires that fell down was almost dark red like blood.


    Those Monsters that attacked him previously already sense the dangering from upward. They instantly know that this was the attack from their opponent and they can also feel the danger. Naturally at this time those remaining Monsters who previously did not attack Sam, already begin to attack upward.


    They already begin to use their spiritual attack to counter attack those fire rain. But naturally even though they were already able to counterattack, many of those fires rained and a huge amount of area got clear but in the next second once again they could see the fire ring that kept falling down.


    Naturally from those red clouds fire rain begins to fall down continuously. Even if they destroy a huge amount of fire rain but still the fire rain would not stop falling until they are unable to destroy those red clouds.


    Unfortunately those Monster Steel did not realize that and they still attacked those fire rain to destroy them. Not only that, everyone of those previous Monsters that attacked Sam previously almost stopped attacking him except a few of them. The rest of the Monsters already begin to use their attack toward those fire rains.


    Naturally everyone realized the danger and it would be very dangerous for them if they really got affected by that so they wanted to destroy that attack as quickly as they could. On the other hand Sam who is still present inside the barrier is just smiling. First of all he maintained both of the techniques right now at once and with that until he did not getpletely exhausted those fire rains would not stop from falling down.

 Chapter 597 597 - Finally!!

    Chapter 597  597 - Finally!!


    Most of the Monsters who use the spiritual Attack all this timeuse spiritual barriers, but unfortunately they were not able to cover the whole area and because of this, most of the Monsters who were unable to use the spiritual attack were not able to create barriers like that.


    Using that chance, Sam already teleports from that ce while those Monsters are already facing the crisis. Most of the Monsters already begin to run away from that ce but as you know the whole fire clouds cover a b amount of area, so you can say that it is already toote for those monsters to run away.


    On the other hand, Sam already appeared 5 km away from that ce and he was just barely able to get away from the range of the fire cloud. The moment heces he just falls down on the ground as he is fully exhausted and only has 1% spiritual energy left in his body.


    Fortunately, he has already begun to use the energy recovery technique and it has already begun to recover The lost spiritual energy. Butpared to before this technique was not that useful to him as he used the origin spiritual energy and using a normal Energy recovery technique he won''t be able to recover the original spiritual energy that much.


    But still he used the technique because he wanted to reduce the mental pressure that he was facing right now. On the other hand he already Stop supplying The Spiritual energy and because of this sometimeter the fire clouds will naturally disappear.


    "Roar!!!"


    At this time when he is trying to recover his mental energy he can still hear the roar of those Monsters. He can already kill those Monsters facing a big crisis as he uses one of the strongest moves of his fire control technique.


    Not only that, the whole area that got affected by the fire rain has already begun to burn. But surprisingly you can see the fire did not spread around the area where the red clouds did not affect.


    The whole ce begins to burn by the fire and in just a few seconds, you can see the whole ce just turn into an empty ground. Other than the ashes of the streets and other things you will be able to see some of those Monsters who are able to survive.


    But the situation of those Monsters also wasn''t that good as they used a huge amount of spiritual energy to protect themselves and protect other Monsters. But even with that the inability to protect most of the ork and with that the number of those ork, already reduced to 30.


    Sam, who is lying down on the ground, also can see the situation. But you can say because of the mental exhaustion he was not able to move from that ce but he also knows that he needs it to quickly recover his mental strength and his spiritual energy.


    2 minutester he is somehow able to recover a little bit of his mental strength and with that he already brings out the energy recovery Potion. The moment he uses that he recovers 100% of his spiritual energy but still you can say he feels the mental pressure as he did not recover the mental energy.


    But fortunately he was able to kill those remaining Monsters in that state and wasting no time he already used that teleportation technique once again and in the next second he appeared in front of those Monsters.


    Just appearing in front of them he uses a confused ray toward those Monsters. That naturally confused all the Monsters that already got surprised by the sudden appearance of their opponent. In the next second he already uses the sun ray, and burns all those Monsters to ashes.


    .c¦Ïm As those Monsters get confused and unable to figure out what was happening to them, they are unable to protect themselves. On the other hand using the telekinesis he already collected all the loot and after that uses the teleportation technique once again to go to a safe ce to rest.


    Fortunately 10 km away from that ce he already found a good ce to rest and with that he already began to meditate. Naturally he needed to recover his mental energy as quickly as he could.


    ____________________


    ''Sigh, it looks like my luck is also quite bad. Who knows how long it will take me to find an Epic grade limit breaker. Even after killing those many Monsters I am unable to find a limit breaker. It looks like even if I kill all the Monsters I would not find a limit breaker. Sigh¡­''


    1 hourter after recovering the mental strength when he began to look at the inventory, he just sighed as he didn''t get any limit breaker. Even a normal limit breaker was out of the question for him.


    But he did not get disappointed with that as he already knew finding a limit breaker would be one of the difficult things in the danger zone. Finding a technique or finding a limit breaker is one of the difficult things.


    ''I just hope that I will find the limit breaker in these 8 days or I need to ask the human king or the Oni king. Well I could also ask the warrior association to find me a limit breaker.''


    Sam was thinking all of these when he already got out of his hideout to kill more Monsters. He had only 8 more days before thepetition started once again. So naturally before that he wanted to finish his adventuring the Dungeon.


    He also did not know after these when he will get the time toe back to the danger zone or even if he came to the danger zone will he find a limit breaker or not. Because of this he is also thinking about asking the human king or the Oni king to give him a limit breaker or he could just ask the warrior association about this.


    Well he still did not decide to ask for their help, that was also an option for him. With that he once again begins to search for more Monsters. Also surprisingly when he went back to the previous ce where he previously used the fire rain, he really got surprised as the ce fully recovered. It looks like the world was helping this ce to recover.


    ''I also need to maintain the distance from the area where I will meet thoseary grade monsters.''


    Right now you can say Sam was already very deep inside of the inner area. But he also maintains the distance from the core area where he will be able to meet thoseary grade monsters.


    Really he did not think he would be able to fight any of those Monsters even though he had the origin spiritual energy. Most likely even using the bersarkertechnique or his stealth technique, he won''t be able to kill any of them.


    You can say the power between an Epic grade and aary grade is on a whole different other level. Even if a peak Epic grade Warrior tries to use his full power he won''t be able to hurt aary grade monster.


    Also as he previously fought those Monsters in the war, he already knows the power of those Monsters. At that time even though he was using his superior concealment technique, and his full origin spiritual energy, he was unable to damage the Monsters.


    ________________________________


    For 7 days, Sam was fighting those Monsters non stop to search for a limit breaker. For 6 days he did not get a limit breaker that made him quite disappointed but still he decided to wait for one more day.


    The next day when he killed an intermediate group of monsters he fortunately saw something that made him very excited. He finally became a limit breaker and not only that the limit breaker was an epic grade.


    Now with that he already became happy and excited that he was already able to find a limit breaker. With that he decided to stop fighting those Monsters then decided to go back to the human Kingdom. For 9 days he spent inside of the danger zone and naturally did not eat that much delicious food.


    As he was also very hungry so wasting no time he decided to go back to the human Kingdom. He did not directly teleport inside of the human Kingdom as it would also require him a huge amount of spiritual energy. Using his full power he somehow was able toe to the outer area of the danger zone and after that he already began to walk toward the entrance of the human Kingdom.


    2 hourster he finally came in front of the entrance and naturally all the guards just after looking at him let him go inside of the human Kingdom. You can say that Sam already gets recognised by those people. People from the warrior association and also from the human Kingdom guard the main gate and naturally everyone of them knows about Sam.


    Now back to the main matter, Sam has already begun to go toward the Royal pce. But naturally justing inside of the human Kingdom he can see the whole Kingdom was fully crowded with people and everyone of them very excited about tomorrow.


    Also during all this time you can say not many people went outside to go to the danger zone. First of all, every participant wanted to stay in their top form. So naturally they also did not go outside while everyone of those Warriors decided to enjoy these 10 days.

 Chapter 598 598 - Competition began

    Chapter 598  598 - Competition began


    Next day,


    Once again everyone present in the human Kingdom begins to go toward the stadium as today is the day when thepetition will begin. Sam, also going toward the stadium alongside Livia and the others.


    Before running things as you know Ruri, Elisa and those other friends of Livia stayed in the Royal pce for these 10 days, but Sam did not get the chance to talk to them that much as he spent most of the time inside the danger zone.


    But one thing he gets to know is that all of them also stay busy preparing themselves for theirpetition. The next part of thepetition will bepletely differentpared to the previous part.


    This will also be thest part of thepetition where everybody warriors will fight against each other. Naturally, the fight will bepletely different for every different Warrior grade. Because of this, the Warrior Association also prepared a special stadium for all those matches. Also,pared to the previous part of thepetition this part will naturally take much more time.


    The thing is that everyone 6 months ago fought against each other inside virtual reality. First of all the warrior association uses the virtual reality show that no Warrior gets hurt in the process but using the virtual reality was not that helpful as most of the Warriors were unable to bring out their full power and also as they did not have the risk to lose their life many Warrior also became reckless and easily get defeated.


    Because of this, this time the Warrior Association already announced that they will not use virtual reality and every 10 to fight against each other.


    Sam on the other hand gets to know from the human King that the warrior association is already preparing battle rings in many different ces. First of all, different Warriors based on their great will fight in those different battle rings, and with that, they wanted to speed up the process of thepetition.


    Sam on the other hand is thinking about his breakthrough process. He already nned to upgrade the limit breaker but he still upgraded the limit breaker as he first wanted to watch thepetition. Really thepetition also makes him more excited.


    _________________________


    One by one every participant already came to the stadium and waited in the resting room. On the other hand, the staff from the Warrior Association are also already preparing the battle arena. First of all, you can say only the final match of each warrior grade will be held on this battle ring inside of the human Kingdom so before that everybody will be fighting in different battle rings in different ces.


    The warrior association also needed to prepare the teleportation ring to do that and they also needed to maintain safety in those ces where they prepared the battle rings.


    Sam, once again inside of the VIP room, already begins to look at the battle ring. The announcer is most likely waiting for all the people to finallye inside the stadium and after that, he will start announcing. Finally after 10 minutester, he already began to say,


    "Ladies and gentlemen, wee back to our annual Warriorpetition. As we already watched the previous intensepetition, we also already had those winners. Now as everyone knows we will be starting the second part of thepetition or you can say the final part of thepetition.


    In thispetition, every Warrior based on their Warrior grade will fight each other. In the end, thest one standing will be the winner of thatpetition. But even with that, that person won''t be able to win the wholepetition. The winner of thepetition will be decided based on both parts of thepetition.


    Naturally, we were all excited about the second part of thepetition and every participant wanted to know their opponent. But before announcing I wanted to tell something that will make everyone excited. This time in many different parts of the danger zone we arranged battle arenas.


    Naturally, sufficient medical teams and also sufficient warriors will be present in those ces to maintain the safety of the ce. So nobody has to worry about safety. With that now I will say the rules of this match.


    The first rule is the same as the previous one: nobody is allowed to kill his opponent. Killing in thispetition is a crime and if someone tries to do that even after getting the warning then naturally he will get punished by the warrior association.


    During the fight, nobody was allowed to consume any type of drugs or potions. You also cannot recover your spiritual energy or your physical strength using the Potions.


    No outside help is allowed during the match. If someone tries to help you during your match from outside then you will naturally get this qualification from thepetition.


    If anyone tries to use some kind of dark artifact then you will immediately get this qualification from thepetition and the warrior association will take action against that person.


    You are not allowed to attack the referee when you are fighting an opponent. Also if you try to cheat using some kind of artifact during the match that you did not inform the warrior association then naturally you will get disqualified.


    This will be the rule of thispetition. Now back to our main matter. There will be 4 groups for every Warrior grade. Naturally, thest one standing from that group will be fighting each other."


    After saying that the announcer stayed silent for some time as he wanted to give everyone the time to consume what they heard. After that, he begins to tell everyone that the warrior association already prepared the chart list. Wasting no time the announcer already pointed his finger toward the big screen present in the battle stadium and instantly everyone could see the first list of special-grade Warriors.


    Naturally in the list, you can see 4 different groups. From group A to group D, and in those different groups you can see the names of different opponents. The warrior association also showed everyone who would be fighting each other.


    While everyone is looking at the list it also makes them surprised thatpared to the previous time the number of those people was much less and not only that in the previouspetition, all Warrior from the special grade fought each other in just one day but it looks like in real life that won''t be possible.


    All the special-grade warriors get the list. They already get to know about their opponent and they also already get to know when they will fight their opponent.


    Livia and her teammates are also waiting in the resting room. They already saw the list of those special-grade Warriors. Not only that it looks like even thoughpared to the previous time the number of those warriors is much less, but still as the fight is happening in real life it will take much time.


    On the other hand, the announcer already told everyone that they will release the next least for the next grade of warriors after the first match of those special grade Warriors. Naturally, it also takes time for anyone to make the list and the warrior association is already deciding what to do with those Elite grade warriors.


    From each group, every one of those Warriors who will be fighting each other already begins to go toward the battle arena. From each group this time only a single batch of Warrior will fight each other. Well, you can say this is the beginning match and because of this, only a single batch of Fighters will be fighting each other.


    Instantly all the people present in the battle stadium begin to cheer for all those participants that begin toe toward the battle ring. Now even if they did not belong to the kingdom where those Warriors belonged, they still wanted to cheer up those participants so that they also get to see an exciting match.


    Well, the announcer already told the team of Warriors from the warrior association to get ready as they will be the ones who are in charge of sending those people to their battle ring.


    Every one of those Warriors already standing on the teleportation array where the announcer told them to stand. With that, the warriors from the warrior association began to channel their spiritual energy into the teleportation arrays, one by one those four teleportation arrays had already been activated.


    _______________


    "I am excited for this. Even though many of those Warriors decided to challenge each other for an individual match still it did not make me that excited. But for thispetition, all of them are already preparing to face each other even if it is their friend. So naturally nobody will be held back during the match and I wanted to see an intense match. I hope Maria also did not hold back during the match even if she faced her friends."


    The human King at this time says that to Sam and the others. The Oni king and the Druid king also agree with that. Surprisingly this time the Druid king and queen were also present in that VIP room.

 Chapter 599 599 - Start of the fight

    Chapter 599  599 - Start of the fight


    Already those Warriors went to their battle arena. Instantly in the Main battle arena where every person is looking at the big screen that shows those for a group of Warriors in different ces. Everyone of them is just waiting for the signal of the refereeto start their fight.


    It looks like the warrior association already arranges for these and with that you can see four matches on different screens. Not only that, every VIP person naturally had the authority to watch particr matches as they wished to watch. But other than that, all the other people also had the opportunity to watch their favorite match.


    Now back to the present, one by one those Four referees give them the signal to fight and wasting no time those already begin to use their attack against each other.


    Before anything you should know that no participants know about the location of those battle rings except those kings and the Warrior association. So you can say if those kings or the people from the warrior association did not interfere then nobody would be able to cheat in this kind ofpetition.


    For the first match both of the Warriors came to a ce where they were surrounded by a forest. Naturally the referee present there already gave them the signal to fight. Both of the Warriors did not even think about their surrounding area and already began to use their weapons to attack each other.


    One of them uses a shield and sword, while the other one uses a big hammer to fight. The hammer user already swung that hammer in full force toward that opponent. But his opponent already brings out his shield and also uses his defense technique to protect himself.


    A huge impact got created because of the sh but the sword did not get sent backward and instantly attack that hammer user. He instantly swings his sword that already begins to release the sword sh.


    But the hammer user also already expected something like that and because of this he instantly jumped from that ce. Suddenly the hammer once again appeared on his hand as previously he put that hammer into his storage ring. Storage ring is a legal artifact that you can use in thepetition. Using that nobody will get punished or something like that.


    One by one you can see big sword shes alreadying toward the hammer user but the hammer user already brings out his hammer and instantly m on the ground. Instantly, a shock wave got created that shockwave naturally felt with spiritual energy and already shed with those sword sh.


    But both of the warriors did not stop there. Both of them using their full speed already appear in front of each other and then already begin to attract each other. The sword user not only just attacks his opponent with his sword but also attacks using his shield, most likely creating some kind of repulsive energy.


    The hammer user on the other hand naturally uses his power continuously and he keeps increasing the power behind his attack and that also begins to affect that sword user. The sword user instantly increased the repulsive power of his shield and with that the moment that hammer hit that shield a very big impact got created that almost sent both of the warriors backward.


    But they were already able to stabilize their condition and once again begin to prepare their attack. The hammer user begins to channel as much spiritual energy as he can into that hammer. In the next second he mmed that hammer into the ground and with that a very big wave got created and that directly began to go toward that opponent.


    Naturally his opponent did not stay ideal. He instantly swung his Sword and in the next again almost 50 sword sh got created into the sky and all of them began to attack that big spiritual wave. Naturally, because of the sh the surrounding area already began to be destroyed but fortunately nothing happened to the battle ring.


    ____________________


    Sometimeter,


    Once again the sword user came in front of the hammer user and attacked him. You can saypared to that hammer user the sword user is faster and with that he already came in front of that hammer user and already attacked him.


    This time the hammer user was unable to defend himself that quickly and because of this he got hit by that sword energy. That sword sh sent him backward. But the sword user did not stay in his previous ce as he was already using the movement technique and came behind that warrior who was still unable to stabilize his condition.


    This time he begins to channel his spiritual energy into that shield and in the next again he attacks that hammer user using the shield. On the other hand, that hammer user was unable to stabilize the condition but he already noticed his opponent was already preparing his next attack.


    So even in that state he already begins to channel The Spiritual energy into his hammer and the moment he is about to sh into that shield, his hammer directly appears in his hand and in that condition he uses his full power to swing.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Now that is a very big explosion that got created because of the sh. This time both of the Warriors were unable to stabilize their condition. Butpared to the sword user you can say the hammer user received more injuries as he previously was not able to stabilize his condition and attacked while still present in the mid air. Not only that he instantly got hit by a repulsive force that instantly made him blood.


    On the other hand the sword user also wasn''t in a good condition. Blood also already came out from his mouth because of the previous impact that also affected his internal body.


    Ten secondster both of them areable to stabilize their condition and this time the sword user already throws his shield toward that hammer user. That shield begins to glow in red color and naturally it contains the distractive energy in it. The hammer user can already feel the dangering out from that shield so he did not want to get hit by that.


    This time he already put the hammer into his storage and uses his full power to jump from that ce. Fortunately he did that in time as the moment that shield hit the ce it already exploded and a hole was created in that ce. That hammer user previously jumped into the sky and this time while present in the air he already brought out the hammer and began to channel his spiritual energy into his next technique then instantly he began to fall into the ground.


    The moment that hammer hit the ground, an earthquake got created in that ce and instantly the sword user began to get affected by that earthquake. Instantly the whole ce or you can say the ce where the earthquake happened got felt with the distractive energy and that affected everything present in that range.


    Naturally the hammer user did not get affected by that and using this change he already closed the distance between him and his opponent. His opponent got affected by the destructive force so aftering in front of him he did not waste a single second to attack him.


    This time that sword user became unstable, unable to protect himself and instantly got hit by that powerful destructive energy. That destructive energy instantly broke the Armour of that sword user and not only that that sword user already got sent backward. The condition of the sword user this time became much more seriouspared to that of the hammer user.


    Even though his armor got broken,pared to that the destructive energy was able to affect his internal organs and because of this, blood was alreadying out non stop from his mouth and even from his nose.


    Using this chance, the hammer user begins to prepare his next attack. This time he did not attack the ground but attacked in the air and in the next second arge amount of destructive energy got created from that and that attack directly going toward that sword user.


    Just about to hit that sword user. The sword user somehow manages to escape. Suddenly his spiritual barrier got created in front of him. But the spiritual barrier already got broken by that distractive energy. Fortunately the sword user gets the time to escape from that ce and in the next again he uses his attack.


    Even though he was in a serious condition he still did not give up on that fight and in the next second you can see almost 100 of those spiritual swords appear in the sky and everyone of them directly begin to fall toward that hammer user.


    This attack is one of the powerful attacks from that sword user and if that has a user unable to protect himself right now then he would get seriously injured more than that sword user.

 Chapter 600 600 - Second battle ring.

    Chapter 600  600 - Second battle ring.


    Finally the sword user gets defeated by that hammer user as he is unable to protect himself against that powerful destructive force that the hammer user created through continuously attacking the air.


    Naturally using the spiritual energy he doesn''t need to m the ground to create the destructive force. Also in this attack you can say he uses all of his spiritual energy and with that the attack became so powerful that the sword user even tried to counter attack using his full power, but still you can say he was unable to do that.


    Naturally the medical team already began to heal that sword user as he was seriously injured because of that destructive force and almost broke his hand and an eye. On the other hand the hammer user is also getting treated by the medical team as he also lost too much of his blood and his body is already covered in serious injuries.


    Both of the warriors did not have any armor on their body as both of them were able to destroy the armor of each other. Because of this, the battle became more risky and they became more injured. In the end, it was realized by everyone that the hammer user had more defensepared to that sword user.


    Now onto the next battle arena,


    You can see both fighters fighting each other while one of them uses summoning technique to someone different powerful creature. Naturally they look like Monsters but everyone of them had a different aurapared to those Monsters.


    On the other hand, his opponent uses his fist to fight. Naturally he uses gloves that are specially made out of special materials that increase his attack power.


    In that fight anybody could tell that the fist user had a disadvantage against those many creatures. But that Warrior did not show any weakness in front of the creature as he fought them using his punches and martial arts.


    Naturally he was showing everyone the power of his martial art while fighting those powerful creatures. Not only that all the time he had the intention toe close to his opponent aspared to him his opponent did not have a strong physique.


    But that thing also wasn''t that easy so before reaching his opponent he needed to defeat those creatures one by one after him.


    lights¦­¦Ïvel.c¦Ïm Suddenly that warrior jumps into the sky and then begins to punch toward those creatures. Because of those punches many powerful destructive forces got created and naturally they went toward those creatures one by one.


    First of all not everyone of those creatures were of special grade. Naturally the summoner is not able to bring powerful Monsters because that would also require him a huge amount of spiritual energy and if he really brings those many creatures to fight his opponent then he would be in a disadvantageous situation as he will not have the strength to fight back.


    Naturally many of those creatures came in front of him to protect him from those destructive forces that were created by those punches. None of those creatures are attacking right now as they are only protecting the summoner.


    On the other hand,


    After killing 10 of those creatures, that fist usernded on the ground and instantly used his movement technique to retreat. First of all he needed to recover The lost stamina and spiritual energy and also he needed to be ready to face the attack from those creatures.


    Naturally, those creatures had different types of power as the summoner did not bring the same type of creature using his technique.


    Some of them looked like rock Golems, naturally they had the power to control rocks, well many of them looked like fire dogs. But none of those Monsters were powerful enough to be present there.


    If you look behind close to that Warrior then you are able to see those powerful Monsters. One of them looked like a human but naturally he had a height of 9 feet. He wore armor and had a sword in his hand. Also if you look behind him then you can see the tail of that creature. Next to him is an ice bear and a big dinosaur-like creature that is able to use the spiritual st or some more dangerous attack like that.


    Those who will be the creatures who were special grade. But they did not attack the warrior as they were only defending their summoner.


    Instantly, you can see many rocks and many fireballs begin to go toward that fist user. Not only those fireballs but the ground around that fist user also begin to get surrounded by fire.


    But you should not underestimate the power of that fist user. He not only mastered fist fighting but instantly he created enough distractive force by using his technique. That instantly counters those fires that are trying to burn him.


    Not only that he instantly begins to punch once again toward those rocks and fireballs that begin toe toward his direction in full force.


    "Boom!!!"


    Once again an explosion appeared in that ce and that happened because of the sh between the extractive force and those attacked from those creatures. But naturally those creatures did not stay ideal as they continuously attacked toward that Warrior while that Warrior also continuously attacked.


    Like this after sometimeter, suddenly that fist user created a big illusion of fist that contained a huge amount of destructive force in it and naturally it already counter attacked everyone of those rocks and those fireballs, not only that it was already approaching those creatures at full force.


    That fist user on the other hand already began to use the recovery technique to recover The lost stamina and The Spiritual energy that he uses all this time. He did not continue to attack as he also needed the time to recover his spiritual energy and stamina.


    Previously , just continuously defending himself from those attacks naturally cost him a huge amount of stamina and spiritual energy. So before anything right now he needed to recover that to fight his enemy. He still did not get close to his opponent and did not get close to those powerful creatures that protected that summoner.


    But on the other hand you can say he had enough confidence that with this attack he would have killed almost all those mortal grade creatures that were trying to counter attack.


    Sometimeter, as he expected, 99% of those mortal grade creatures get killed by the previous destructive force created by that fist user. Also it is able to reach those special grade creatures.


    Fortunately those three Monsters are already able to counter attack using their powerful attacks. Also because of this, right now the summoner almost got exhausted because he also needed to maintain those creatures, already sitting down and started meditating to recover The lost spiritual energy as fast as he could.


    If he is unable to maintain those creatures then naturally his opponent will easily defeat him and he did not want something like that to happen. Every time when those creatures attacked using their technique it also cost him spiritual energy. Fortunately, it did not consume that much spiritual energy.


    Now back to the main matter,


    Suddenly that eye''s beer created an ice beam toward that fist user. Not only that instantly a powerful spirit st also began toe toward the direction of that fist user.


    Fortunately he was already able to recover almost 70% of his lost stamina and spiritual energy and with that he already reacted on time and using the movement technique he escaped from that ce.


    Fortunately he escaped in time as the previous ce already got destroyed and the surrounding area already got frozen. Naturally he did not want to recklessly fight those creatures as it would be fully dangerous and also he was just waiting for the right time to attack that summoner.


    First of all to maintain those creatures naturally that person also needs to use a huge amount of spiritual energy and as he started , naturally anybody could tell he was trying to recover The lost spiritual energy.


    So with that, the fist user already thought about getting close to those Monsters and that opponent. He naturally used his movement technique to get close but it looked like those creatures also weren''t slow as they were able to react on time.


    That humanoid looking creature instantly swings his sword, while that dinosaur-like creature shoots and energy sts toward that direction. Most likely both of those creatures were able to notice him and because of this, they already reacted on time to attack him.


    The fist user on the other hand, already noticed those attacks but he was already toote to react. But still even in that condition he somehow tried to evade those attacks. Fortunately he was somehow able to do that. In the end you can still see he got affected by those attacks and also the crack mark already appeared on the back side of his armor.


    Not only that you can also see he already started bleeding because of the impact.

 Chapter 601 601 - What happened?

    Chapter 601  601 - What happened?


    Sam, naturally became interested in the fight. First of all, it would be his first time to see a warrior who can use the summon technique and also who could have thought a strong fist Warrior would also appear in thepetition?


    But he wasn''t the only person who could use a fist. Many warriors like him are also present in thatpetition and he would like to see everyone of their power. But also he likes to see the different techniques of those Warriors as they will naturally disy their full power in this part of thepetition.


    The human king, the Oni king, and the Druid King talking among each other. He did not get interested in their talking so he just continuously looked at the match. But suddenly something unexpected happened and he suddenly got a notification on his mobile phone.


    Quickly saw the notification and instantly his face became serious. He instantly looked toward those kings and those queens, but it looked like he did not get any message like that, wasting no time getting up from his seat.


    "What happened Sam? Where are you going? Did you want to see thepetition?"


    The Oni instantly notices him while he is going toward the exit of that VIP room. Naturally, as he said that all the other people instantly noticed that and every one of them became curious to know what happened to him.


    He did not tell the truth and just told him that he should immediately go outside to meet someone. After seeing that he did not waste a single second in that room and already came outside.


    The human king and the other people already became suspicious. Naturally, they did not believe the lie of Sam as it could easily be told by anyone that Sam was lying. But the more important thing that makes them curious is why he suddenly became that much tense and serious.


    Unfortunately, none of them can predict what happened to him and why he became that serious suddenly. They have already begun to use their observation technique but even with that, they are unable to feel him.


    Sam, naturally knows something like that would happen so just aftering out of the VIP room he uses the concealment technique. After that, he began to go outside of the battle arena.


    Sometimeter, while everyone was busy looking at the match, Sam on the other hand had already reached the warrior association and could see many people from the warrior association and even the de king present in that ce.


    When some of them noticed the team they somehow became excited but still even with his presence they did not know if they would be able to solve the situation or not. Fortunately, every one of them had confidence in the Warrior Association and all the elders of the Warrior Association.


    "As every one of you gets the message that I sent you, you already know the currency situation of the Viet kingdom. I still wanted to tell you the details so listen carefully, some time ago some of our Warriors that petroleum in the danger zone felt the order of those dark humans.


    Fortunately, none of those Warriors instantly take action as they are still unable to figure out the real situation of that ce. But you can say one thing: we can be sure that every one of those dark humans begins to approach that Kingdom right now.


    But it looks like those dark humans using their dark spiritual energy to hide their presence from every Warrior present in that Kingdom. But fortunately thanks to our search team which is also good at detecting things like that they are already able to notice those people.


    Some of them instantly came back to the kingdom and informed the headquarters about this while turning off those Warriors who stayed back in the danger zone.


    We still weren''t sure about the real situation but one thing you can say a huge number of those dark humans are beginning to approach that Kingdom right now. Not only that, but they also told us thatpared to the aura of those dark humans, they became more, and also it looked like they became more powerful.


    We still weren''t sure if those Abyss humans also present the amount of those dark humans or not but even with that the situation bes dangerous. Most of the strong warriors of that Kingdom are already present in the human Kingdom and even the king is present here so naturally none of them know the real situation of their Kingdom.


    Also as most of our Warriors were also watching over thepetition right now not many Warriors are present in that Kingdom.


    So if those Abyss humans wanted to attack that Kingdom naturally that would be a good situation for them. But at the same time, I think something was strange in this matter as even though not many people are present in that Kingdom right now, they could easily tell the warrior association would easily contact the headquarters and the headquarters would naturally help them while sending enough warriors.


    So why suddenly did arge force of those dark humans begin to approach that Kingdom? I have no idea about that. But I can tell most likely this time every one of those dark humans had different ns in their mind.


    The good thing was that previously those Warriors from the search team did not feel or notice any Monsters along with those dark humans. So that was a really good thing."


    The de King finished exining the real situation and after that, he became silent to keep those Warriors the time to proceed. Naturally, all the Warriors except Sam belong to the Warrior association and all of them were epic-grade warriors.


    Sometimeter, the de king once again started talking,


    "First of all we need to handle this matter as quickly as he can so nobody from that kingdom or other Kingdom gets to know about this. This good easily creates a panic situation among those citizens or those Warriors. It will naturally affect the willpower of those Warriors if something dangerous happens to that Kingdom.


    Not only that, we already promised everything that participated in thepetition that we would try to protect them if at this time those Kingdom face any kind of dangerous situation.


    Because of this, eyes already informed every one of you toe here as quickly as you can. First of all, I would like to go there personally to help the situation but if I suddenly disappear from this ce then naturally that will make most of the kings and other Warriors suspicious about the situation and they will naturally try to figure out what happened that I suddenly disappear.


    Every one of you will use the teleportation portal right now to go toward that Kingdom and after that, you will try to help kill those dark humans as quickly as you can. Not only that, try to interrogate those dark humans to get to know about the real situation.


    But at the same time naturally, every one of you also needed to stay cautious at this time. We need to figure out what was happening and why those dark humans suddenly approached that Kingdom.


    Also, it would be good if you did not inform anyone about this right now as if somehow all the people who are busy watching thepetition get to know about this, then a different situation will be created.


    Also, the headquarters have already taken action and many Warriors also get to know about this situation and they will also go to that Kingdom using the teleportation portal."


    After saying that, the de begins to observe the expression of those Warriors present in that ce. Right now you can say around 200 Warriors are present in that ce and every one of them gets notified by the de King.


    Most likely many people already noticed something about this but still those other Warriors from the Warrior Association can keep them busy watching the match while exining to them that those warriors went to the danger zone.


    All those Warriors the moment here naturally became more serious and with that every one of them already agreed to go to that Kingdom to find out the real reason. With that, the de King already told those Warriors who were in charge of activating the teleportation portal to activate the portal.


    One by one those Warriors begin to use the teleportation portals to go to that Kingdom directly. Sam naturally also begins to go toward that ce, but suddenly he hears the voice of de King. He told him to stop and with that, Sam did not approach the teleportation array.


    "You must be surprised why I stopped you from using the teleportation portal. Sam, I wanted to give you an extra mission. I don''t know why but I am feeling something definitely would happen at this time in that Kingdom.


    I wanted you to find out what is the real reason and also try to find out if those Abyss humans join those dark humans or not. Most likely we are still unable to figure out the real situation in that ce so after going to that ce I want you to find out.


    On the other hand, take this artifact. This is called the summoning card. I put my spiritual signature in that card and the moment you channel your spiritual energy into that card I would immediately get notified about this and I would be able to teleport instantly even without using the teleportation array."


    The de king finishes saying all of these and in the next second, you can see a card appear on Sam''s hand. Sam did not say anything and just nodded after hearing that. With that, the de King finally gives the signal to use the teleportation array.


    _________________________


    "Guys, do you think suddenly some of those Warriors from the Warrior Association were not present in the stadium and suddenly gathered at the association? Not only that I can also tell the de king is present there. Do you think something will happen?"


    " Well, I cannot say for sure as previously when those Warriors needed to go to the danger zone they also gathered on the warrior association to use the teleportation array, and also at that time the de king was present there.


    Most likely The Monster present in the danger zone became more wild and because of this, the de king sent those Warriors into the danger zone to help those other Warriors. We should try to contact the Warrior Association to get to know what happened."


    The Oni king said that. The human king and the druid king instantly agree with that. Not only many kings or queens and many Epic grade Warriors Warriors present in the battle arena already notice that they can also immediately contact the warrior association.


    Instantly, every one of those warriors, all the kings and queens got notified by the warrior association that they didn''t have to worry about anything as every one of those Warriors went to the danger zone to increase the safety of those ces where those battle arenas are present right now.


    lights¦­¦Ïvel.c¦Ïm After hearing that many Warriors told the warrior association that if they needed help then they could also tell them about this.


    "Hmmm¡­ look like you thought this is rted to the danger zone. Most likely the de king wanted to increase the safety of those battle rings."


    " Hmmm¡­ but to tell you the truth I still cannot figure out why some people suddenly leave this ce like that in a serious expression. Not only that, just after leaving the room he uses his technique to escape from our observation technique. What do you think about that?"

 Chapter 602 602 - Capture

    Chapter 602  602 - Capture


    "I don''t know and unable to guess what happened to him and why he suddenly became that tense. Somehow I feel this is rted to the Warrior association but they did not inform us anything as they would have already informed us if something happened.


    Still, I tried to talk to the Warrior Association; they also did not know anything about Sam. So I am not sure what happened to him."


    The human King said that with a sigh. A few minutes ago everyone alongside Sam was just enjoying thepetition. They watch thepetition with interest as they can see many Warriors using their unique powers to win the match.


    But suddenly something happened and because of this, Sam left the VIP room and that made them worried as for a moment they thought something serious happened to him. Unfortunately, until Sam did note back and tell him what happened they would not be able to know anything.


    Now on the other hand,


    Using the teleportation array Sam already came to his destination. Naturally those other Warriors also already begin to observe the surrounding area. Those warriors of the warrior association of the Viet kingdom already came in front of them and with that, they began to go toward the meeting room to see those other Warriors who also came to support the whole Kingdom.


    But, Sam did not follow them into the meeting room as he already got the mission from the de king. After informing all the Warriors that he has a mission to do he leaves that ce and instantly uses the concealment technique.


    First of all, he wasn''t sure if any Traitor or people who had a connection with the Abyss humans were present in that kingdom or not so naturally he did not want to reveal himself.


    He already came out of that Kingdom and already begun to go toward the danger zone. Normally it will take him much more time to find the Warriors who are present in the danger zone but this time he is easily able to find them as many warriors from the warrior association are present in the danger zone and Sam can feel their aura.


    Using the teleportation technique he already teleports to that ce and he can already see those people seriously looking in front of them. If you look in front of them then other than the forest you cannot see anything but naturally if you try to use your spiritual vision then you can see many dark auras.


    Even though those dark aura did not reach the level of abyss humans, it became stronger and became more wildpared to before. Sam on the other hand did not waste a single second to use that teleportation technique to go toward the ce from where he could feel that aura.


    This time he directly appears in the inner area of the danger zone. Not only that he almost appears in front of those dark humans that are present in that ce but fortunately he already uses that teleportation technique once again to make some distance from those people.


    .c¦Ïm Even though nobody would be able to see him or feel him still he wanted to maintain the distance. Only then after appearing in the second ce did he observe those dark humans that were looking toward the direction of the Viet kingdom. But none of them do anything except look in that direction.


    Naturally, by observing them, you will be able to find anything, and to find the real motive of those people he needs to capture one of them to read the memory of that person. But he cannot directly capture one of them as it will make the situation more dangerous so he decided to advance.


    First of all, he needed to figure out how many of those people were present in that ce right now and only then he would think about what to do next. This time he did not use that teleportation technique and using the movement technique he began to advance in the danger zone while observing those dark humans.


    You can say while observing those dark humans he saw the change of those humans. First of all, all of them had red eyes that they did not have before, and everyone had a triangr symbol on their forehead.


    Unfortunately, Sam did not have any information about that symbol so he naturally cannot tell anything about that. But he can tell those dark humans be more powerful and more dangerous.


    Sometimeter,


    He already observed almost all the dark humans that are present in that ce and he became really surprised as almost 5000 of those dark humans right now are present in that ce. All of them had a triangr symbol on their forehead and not only did they do nothing but continuously look toward the direction of the kingdom.


    ''Are they waiting for the order? Also, why did they have a symbol like this on their forehead? I need to capture one of them to get all the answers.''


    Sam was unable to tell anything just by observing them so he decided to capture one of them and after that, he will use the mind reading technique to get to know the answer. With that, he was already searching for the perfect target and after finding the right person while searching for some time he already decided to make his move.


    First of all, he did not want to alert those other dark humans so he will need to finish his work very carefully and very quickly. Using the teleportation technique he already appeared behind that person that was present almost in thest line.


    Fortunately, nobody observed him as everyone was just looking in the direction of the kingdom so he decided to make that person unconscious. Just appearing behind him he used the spiritual energy to Karate chop the neck of that person and with that that person became unconscious.


    Sam instantly uses the teleportation technique to take both of them from that ce to a safe ce where nobody would be able to find them. But he still cannot be sure about the surrounding area so he needs to read the mind of that person as quickly as he can.


    He has already begun to use the mind control technique to get all the memories of that person. 10 minutester when Sam opened his eyes he could already see that the person in front of him had already fallen on the ground and he was already dead.


    Blood is alreadying out from his mouth and ears. Not only that, the triangr symbol present in his forehead has already disappeared and a hole appears in that ce.


    ''Why the hell a barrier like this is present in his mind? Not only that, it also prevents me from remembering that person. Not only that while reading the memory I can still feel that all those memories aren''t true as they were created by someone.


    Fortunately, using the origin spiritual energy I was able to break that mental barrier and somehow be able to get some of the real memory of that person. Still, I cannot say for sure that I got all the memories and I also did not know the real reason behind the triangr symbol.


    Now I can already see it already disappeared and had a hole in his forehead. I am sure that a triangr symbol isn''t a simple thing. I need to talk to the de king.''


    Sam thought that and using the teleportation technique he already came outside of the dangerous zone. First of all, he did not want to risk staying inside of the danger zone. If he tried to contact anyone while staying inside of the danger zone, then many Warriors could get the radio signal of the mobile phone.


    This time Sam did not use the normal mobile phone and brought out the special mobile phone that he got from the Warrior Association.


    That special mobile phone is only present among the warriors from the Warrior Association. Only those VIP Warriors were able to get a mobile phone like that to contact the warrior association without any kind of problem.


    First of all, nobody would have to hack that mobile phone and also nobody would be able to get the signal of that mobile phone as it requires a special stone to use that mobile phone that also uses the battery of that mobile phone. Also to activate that mobile phone you need to use spiritual energy.


    But still, he did not want to use that mobile phone while present inside the danger zone. Sam did not waste any time and already contacted the de king.


    ________________


    "Even after using my mind control technique in full force, I am unable to get to know any information that would be helpful to motivate those people.


    When I try to use the mind control technique I can already feel the mind barrier present in their mind. That mind barrier isn''t simple as it already destroys the mind of that person and also it creates fake memories that previously I got from that person.


    But somehow I was able to break that barrier for some time and I got some memories of the person. Naturally as expected they aren''t the Abyss humans. They are dark humans who work for those Abyss humans. Previously, they were inside the Abyss world, but suddenly they were informed by one old person.


    That old person did not select everyone as not every one of those dark humans was able to talk to that old man. Unfortunately, after that, I did not know anything as even after Breaking the barrier I did not get information rted to this matter. It is like that even in his memory he did not have any memory of that incident¡­"

 Chapter 603 603 - Wired symbol and energy

    Chapter 603  603 - Wired symbol and energy


    "I don''t know how the hell a person''s memory became like this. But during the time when I was controlling his mind to get the answer, I suddenly felt that some kind of power was also trying to affect me. But unfortunately, it wasn''t strong enough to affect me."


    After saying all of this Sam stays silent to give the de king the time to proceed. But one thing he did not tell him was that previously when that supernatural power tried to affect him he needed to fight back using the origin''s spiritual energy and only after that he was able to destroy that energy.


    First of all, he was sure that wasn''t your normal dark spiritual energy or spiritual energy. It was like some kind of other energy. But fortunately using the original spiritual energy he was able to counterattack that.


    " Hmmm¡­ I understand. It looks like things have be more dangerous for everyone. It looks like those people are waiting for some kind of order and only after that will they react.


    Also, it is my first time to hear about a symbol like this that is present in the forehead of those dark humans. I did not know anything about that but one thing is that you most likely that symbol also affects the mind of that person. Most likely it also contains some kind of energy that was trying to be effective previously.


    You also needed to stay alert all the time. You cannot recklessly try to use your mind control technique on those people as more powerful energy could try to affect you."


    " Don''t worry about that. But we needed to inform the other Warriors about that as they could also try to do something like this and get affected by that. Most likely as I am only able to capture a dark human that has only power around Elite grade, that supernatural energy that tries to affect my mind is unable to do that much damage and I am able to counterattack that.


    But, if other Warriors try to do the same thing with those powerful dark humans then it could be very dangerous for them."


    lights¦­¦Ïvel.c¦Ïm " Don''t worry about that, I will immediately contact all the Warriors and alert them about this. Also, try to find out the real motive of those dark humans. We really need to know the motive."


    With that Sam and de King finish their conversation. Sam, on the other hand, put the phone in the inventory and then instantly used the teleportation technique to get close to the ce where he previously saw those Warriors.


    Before anything he wanted to observe those Warriors as it could be that those warriors also get affected by that supernatural energy. After appearing in that ce he directly began to use the spiritual vision that already became powerful using the origin of spiritual energy.


    Also, one more thing previously when using the mind control technique he could see a ck color spiritual energy that also had a reddish color around it. Naturally, that spiritual energy ispletely different from the dark spiritual energy and also it ispletely different from the Red spiritual energy that appears during the red moon.


    At this time, using the spiritual vision he naturally tried to find if those Warriors also had that kind of spiritual energy present in their body or not. Fortunately, after observing all of them, he did not find anything. With that, he sighs in relief and decides to go back to the danger zone to watch over those dark humans.


    First of all, he wanted to see why they were waiting in the part of the danger zone without doing anything and also if they were waiting for the order of someone then he would really like to meet that person who would give them the order.


    ______________________________


    The de King on the other hand already informs the warrior association about this. The headquarters of the warrior association got very serious after getting all the information and immediately contacted all the warriors present in the Viet kingdom to inform everyone about this.


    Every elder of the warrior association present in the headquarters also gets serious about this. First of all, they also did not know anything about that type of symbol that happened to be on the forehead of those dark humans.


    Not only that, but the most important thing was that a different type of spiritual energy was also present in those dark humans that tried to affect Sam previously. Fortunately, Sam is able to counterattack and also knows other Warriors try to use mind control techniques on those dark humans.


    The headquarters already called for a meeting and every elder present there epted the president or you can say the leader of the warrior association. That old man is busy making himself more powerful. Actually, everyone present in the meeting room already expected that so they already started the meeting without waiting for the president.


    First of all, the topic of the meeting is about thepetition that is happening in the human Kingdom. Unfortunately, in the end, they also know that they won''t be able to stop thepetition as it will have a huge impact on every warrior.


    "Sigh, I just really hope nothing happened to those participants during thepetition. This will have a huge impact on those participants. But really it is very concerning that those dark humans now had a different type of spiritual energy present in their body. Could they finally be able to use the Red spiritual energy that they try to gather during the red moon?"


    " Well, this is a possibility as we already know how much those Abyss humans became very active at that time to capture those Monsters who got mutated because of the red spiritual energy."


    " Right now, our top priority will be to find out the real Motive of those people. It could be that they are waiting for the time to attack the Viet kingdom but at the same time, they also know that we will immediately react. So I don''t think those abyss humans became that much of an idiot.


    Previously they already suffered a huge loss and naturally, it will take them time to recover from that. But still, looking at the scene I can tell the situation became more dangerous, and also the main question is, why are those dark humans within that ce without attacking The Kingdom."


    Like this, the meeting among those elders is already going on and they also already decide that they will immediately react and go to that Kingdom. Naturally, not every one of them will leave the warrior association as that could be dangerous if they go to that Kingdom at once.


    First of all, you should know the Warrior Association had many secrets that they did not want to reveal to the world. It couldn''t trigger the destruction so naturally they wanted to prevent something like that from happening. Also as the President is still busy making himself powerful, they need to stay in the Warrior Association to control all the Warrior associations that are present in the  Terraria.


    _______________


    ''it''s surprised me. How the hell did the number of those dark humans suddenly increase like that? I am sure that those people are from my world but even with that only a few of them are present as the remaining people have already been killed by us. So how the hell are those many people appearing?''


    Sam thought that while he was still busy looking at those dark humans that were standing in the same position while looking toward the kingdom from that ce. Other than using a spiritual vision or technique like that, those dark humans did not use any kind of take on me.


    Also during that time, Sam was pretty sure those people did not use some kind of energy other than the dark spiritual energy. But suddenly he thought something. It could be a reckless n but he decided to do that.


    First of all, he will try to capture one of them once again as it looks like none of them still realize that the person that was present behind everyone had already been captured by him and already he was dead.


    After capturing once again you will not use the mind control technique on that person. You will directly use the spiritual energy and transfer it to that person. By doing that he wanted to figure out what type of spiritual and represent inside of that dark human right now.


    Fortunately, as you know his origin spiritual energy can absorb any type of spiritual energy so he has an advantage in this matter. But still, as you know he will not be reckless. Sam also needed a perfect time to capture that person. So, he was just waiting for the right time to capture that person.


    On the other hand, those Dark humans are still standing without moving. For a second you will think of them as robots or something like that. It looks like those dark humans became a puppet or something like that and are waiting for the order to advance.

 Chapter 604 604 - Intense battles

    Chapter 604  604 - Intense battles


    Human Kingdom,


    Human king and all the other people present in the human Kingdom naturally enjoy thepetition. The first part of thepetition is already finished and everyone really enjoys that fight.


    You can say everyone of those people who participated in the first match really showed their full power from the start and because of this, the match also became very interesting to watch.


    Naturally, everybody who participated in thepetition wanted to win and to win they will use their full power from the start. But not just only using their full power they would be able to win. At the same time they also needed to be careful about their opponent and also needed to observe their opponent.


    They need to find out the weakness of their opponent and like this they need to win the match. After the first four matches the warrior association already announced the next group of participant''s names.


    As expected all the matches of those special grade Warriors would be held in different battle rings and like this the warrior association wanted to finish the match as quickly as they could. Also they will show everyone of those matches individually in the battle stadium present in the human Kingdom.


    They already prepared the projector for that and everybody would be able to see all those matches at once. Wasting no time the warrior association already called the next group of participants in the battle ring and after that they began to use the teleportation array to send them toward the battle ring that is present inside of the danger zone or other ces.


    Except all the kings and those Warriors with high credit naturally know the location of those battle rings but they did not tell anyone as the warrior association already told him not to reveal the news to even their family.


    One by one those participants have already got sent to the battle ring and you can see one by one associations already begin to show all those stadiums where you can see the referee already waiting for the participants toe there.


    The warrior association prepared 50 battle rings and because of this, at once 100 people would be able to fight. They could naturally increase the number of the battle rings but if they did that then the safety of those battle rings would decrease and nobody wanted something like that to happen.


    Naturally all those battle rings were protected by the warrior association and they used their power to prevent any Monster from approaching those battle rings.


    If you are wondering what will happen if other Warriors enter that part of the danger zone where the battle will start. Well, the warrior association will prevent all those Warriors if they want to get close to that ce as if they try to do that then the match will get canceled.


    Not only that, all the kingdoms who participate in thepetition already announce to every one of the cities that during the time ofpetition they should not enter the danger zone. Even if the entire danger zone, then they should not approach those ces where they can find where from the warrior association.


    _________________________


    2 hourster,


    The second part of the match is already about to end and the next group of participants are already ready to go to the battle ring. If you look at the battle rings right now then you can see most of the people already win their matches or lose their matches.


    But still if you up them did not finish their matches and those are the matches that became more interesting to watch. You can see both of the participants using various tactics to win against each other and also an intense battle going on between those Warriors.


    You can see many different weapons that normally people did not use and also many spiritual techniques that you won''t be able to find in the human Kingdom. For all the citizens of the human Kingdom who did not have that much information about those other kingdoms really get surprised by looking at those fights.


    They can see many people using various different spiritual techniques like somebody using a technique that could make his body look like a monster and also getting power like that. While somebody using various elements technique that they never had in their Kingdom


    In the battle arena number 39,


    You can see a person that looks like a giant lion naturally using a technique that was able to transform his body into that. He gets powers like super strength, super ws, and other powers rted to that giant lion.


    On the other hand, his opponent uses a giant ax to fight. Intense match going on between these two warriors. The person who uses the weapon already uses his power to create spiritual shes, on the other hand, the person who became the giant lion already swings his ws toward those spiritual shes.


    With that a spiritual attack got created and both of the attacks shed. But that wasn''t over as the person using the weapon already uses the movement technique to get close to that lion and about to attack that lion using his spiritual ax.


    But the Lion already noticed that person and he let out a roar. Naturally that was not a normal roar. This is called The Spiritual Roar that mentally affects anyone. To protect your cell naturally you need to have strong mental protection techniques and also need to stay alert all the time.


    The attack from that lion waspletely unexpected for that Warrior and he really got affected by that roar. Because he was very close to that big lion he also got more affected and instantly you can see blood starting toe out from his nose and mouth. Also for a moment he got frozen into that ce.


    That be cry on uses this chance and instantly swing his w toward that Warrior. Unable to protect himself, that warrior already got sent flying. On the other hand, that lion uses his next attack as he did not want to give that Warrior any chance to fight back.


    A big spiritual w got created by that lion and that attack directly went at that already fallen down in the ground. The moment when that attack was about to hit that warrior, he was able to evade. But still got affected by the impact and once again sent backward.


    Butpared to before this time he was able to stabilize his condition. Even though he was bleeding from his nose and mouth and also received injuries that already broke his bone in the chest area, he was still trying to stabilize the condition as he did not want to give up this quickly.


    For that big lion this is naturally surprising but still he did not waste a single second to use his full speed toe toward that Warrior and was already able to use his gion w attack.


    But this time that person using the weapon already reacted on time and he also counterattacked using his own weapon. Most likely after stabilizing his condition he already started to use that technique and already channeled arge amount of spiritual energy into that weapon.


    In the next second you can already see the big impact that almost destroyed that battle ring but fortunately the battle ring was okay. But both of the warriors used their attacks continuously.


    Naturally the person who uses that lion transformation also gets additional body defense and regeneration power. Because of this, as you can see all those injuries that he received from that opponent already begin to heal but still, that lion naturally wanted to finish his opponent as quickly as he could to win the match.


    _________________________


    During this time, the battle king was present in the main arena even though looking at all those matches but he was still talking about the situation of the Viet kingdom. First of all he was not able to go to that ce and also all the elders that were present in the warrior association were also unable to go there directly.


    If you are wondering why they are unable to go there directly then it is because they also need to watch over all those ces where those battles are going on and also they need to maintain the safety of their Warrior association. First of all everyone knows that the motive of those dark humans that came to that ce naturally isn''t that simple.


    This could be a trap that using those dark humans wanted those elders of the warrior association toe there and at that time those dark humans or you can say those Abyss humans will start their original n.


    Nobody knew the real n of those people so they still did not go to that ce. Actually two of the elders already present in the Viet kingdom, and because of this, those other elders who present in the Warrior association weren''t that much worried. Both of the elders were legendary grades and everyone had full confidence in those elders.

 Chapter 605 605 - Bersarker spiritual energy

    Chapter 605  605 - Bersarker spiritual energy


    Both of the elder already using their observation technique to watch over the whole Kingdom. But unfortunately they did not find anything suspicious around The Kingdom. Even when they try to search for traitors, the actually did not find that much clue.


    Because of this one of the elders decided to go toward the danger zone to watch over that ce while the other elder will stay inside of the kingdom. Even though both of them thing that they did not have to came there at once, even if one of them just came to that Kingdom then they would able to solve the matter, but don''t know why after learning the situation of those dark humans every elders of the warrior association became worried.


    The one elder who go to the danger zone already begin to ask about the current situation. Not only that he already using the observation technique and he can already feel those dark humans.


    As expected everyone of those dark humans present inside the dangerous zone and this time not only just dark spiritual energy but a strange spiritual energy also present in those dark humans. Not only that the most surprising fact was that right now no Monsters are approaching those dark humans as it look like those Monsters are very afraid of those dark humans and because of this, they did not approach their direction.


    This is a very disturbing thing for that elder. First of all he is sure that those people did not using any kind of technic right now as he cannot feel any kind of energy fluctuation from those people and also he is definitely sure that no type of artefact also present in that ce.


    But when he try to observe those Monsters that not far away from that ce where those dark humans right now standing, he can see those Monsters had a scared expression.


    Now this is a very serious thing for to consider and the elders wasting no time already inform every other elders of the warrior association. Hearing that news everyone bes more serious about this matter as nobody still knows anything about this current situation.


    _____________________


    Sam, from the start staying close to those dark humans. Naturally all this time he observing everyone of those dark humans while trying to find out the real motive of them. He already capture the second dark human while did not give any chance to those other dark humans to react.


    After capturing that second dark human he already use the mind control technique but this time he did not try to read the mind of that dark human. This time he try to feel that strange spiritual energy inside of the dark human and you can tell the moment he try to feel that that strange energy already begin to counter attack.


    You can say using the mind control technique he enter the mind of the dark human and instantly that strange spiritual energy came in front of him and already begin to attack. But naturally it did not able to do anything to Sam as he already using the mind protection technique.


    All this time Sam very closely observing that strange spiritual energy and trying to figure out the characteristic of that spiritual energy. First of all you should know that every is spiritual energy like your normal true spiritual energy or the dark spiritual energy, has different kind of characteristic.


    So this time Sam already trying to find out the characteristics of that spiritual energy. All this time that streams spiritual energy was trying to attack him mentally, but it was not able to do anything to him while Sam was already able to figure out what kind of characteristic that spiritual energy had.


    Even though he cannot give 100% guarantee that he will to figure out the characteristic, but you can say he became 70% sure that strange spiritual energy seems to has berserker energy.


    As you know Sam has a bersarker technique, and naturally he is very familiar with that kind of technique and while using that he also know what kind of effect he get. Don''t know why but while trying to observe that spiritual energy he also begin to have that kind of feeling.


    Look like that strange spiritual energy like now working simr to the berserker technique while enhancing the power of the dark human and also this affecting the dark spiritual energy as the dark spiritual energy became more.


    It look like this new spiritual energy working as a booster spiritual energy that increases the power of the dark humans alongside it also enhancing the power of the dark spiritual energy.


    Sam, after finding out did not instantly kill that person or try to read the mind as he already can tell the moment you will try to read the memory of that person some kind of barrier will get trigger and with that that person will died.


    He right now trying to observe that symbol that present in the forehead of that person. At first, he did not able to feel anything butter he already able to found something and with that he already get to know what kind of effect that symbol giving to those dark humans. It look like that strange spiritual energy or you can say that bersarker spiritual energying from that symbol.


    ''Most likely, this symbol working as some kind of storage that giving them that strange spiritual energy.''


    San thought that and this time he already decided to read the memory but before he did that he needed to make sure that person did not die that quickly. Because of this he also using his spiritual energy. Even though he isn''t sure if this will work or not but he decided to give it a try.


    He already begins to channel spiritual energy into the body of that person and it directly begins to enter that person''s body. Sam already became happy sometimeter. Because he can already feel the origin spiritual energy that is able to enter the mind of the person and he can also control that origin spiritual energy.


    With that he directly targets the berserker spiritual energy and sometimeter you can see that the berserker spiritual energy already got devoured by his spiritual energy. Also he already began to attack the barrier and this time it became more effectivepared to before as that barrier was also unable to defend against that origin''s spiritual energy.


    Even though the barrier was created by some powerful person and naturally if anybody tries to attack that barrier forcefully then it will directly kill that person that had the barrier in his mind. It is working like a protective mechanism that would immediately eliminate anyone if they try to search the memory of those dark humans.


    Even though that mechanism already tried to kill that person but before it could do something like that Sam destroyed that mechanism using the origin spiritual energy and with that now he has the freedom to read every memory of the dark human.


    Wasting no time he already began to read all the memories of that person but you can say the more he read the memory of that person the more he became angry and also very worried. Sometimeter, he finally stops using that memory control technique and also at the same time that person falls down in the ground while he is fully unconscious right now.


    For sometime Sam did not even respond and just silently looked at that person that fell down on the ground. Only after 5 minutester he came back to his senses and then immediately contacted the de king. He did not even waste a single second to inform the de king.


    First of all, you should know he did not get to know the motive of those dark humans but he got to know a very particr thing that became far more dangerous. Just thinking about that made him very angry that he wanted to kill everyone of those people who did that to those Warriors.


    _____________________


    The de King who is present in the human Kingdom naturally watches the fight that is happening in the danger zone. Even though it looks like fully focused from the fights, all this time he is talking with those elders that are present in that Kingdom.


    He was able to know the information that until now those Warriors and those elders were able to collect. But one particr thing that made him more curious. All that time, Sam did not contact him and naturally he wanted to learn what type of information he had found.


    First of all everybody knows he has a very powerful technique that even makes him invisible to them, so naturally using that Sam is able to achieve many things that even for him became difficult.


    Because of this he also gave that mission to Sam previously. It has already been 8 hours since all those Warriors went inside of the Viet kingdom. Even though it looked like those dark humans did not want to attack that Kingdom, everybody knew this wasn''t true as those people were most likely waiting for the order.


    Also even though both of the elders present in that Kingdom already wanted to kill all those dark humans, de King did not dy them to do that as nobody was sure about the real motive of those people and also what if it is just a trap?


    Even though he has full confidence in those elders, he still did not want to make the situation more difficult and also if it was possible, then he wanted to bring out the mastermind behind all of this. Even both of the elders also agreed with him after hearing his conclusion so all this time they waited in that ce without doing anything to those dark humans.


    On the other hand, most of the fight between those special grade Warriors was already finished and sometimeter it will be turned off when those Elite grade warriors fight against each other. Because of this, those people are also preparing themselves to fight against each other.

 Chapter 606 606 - Angry Blade King

    Chapter 606  606 - Angry de King


    Well thinking about the situation of the Viet kingdom, the de king suddenly got a call from Sam. Wasting no time he quickly picks up the phone and with that Sam directly begins to tell him all the details that he found out some time ago.


    "This time I did not directly try to read the mind of that person. Before anything I try to see that strangers'' spiritual energy is present inside the body of that person and after finding that strange energy I begin to counterattack using my spiritual energy.


    Fortunately, even though that was a very tough battle against that strange spiritual energy, in the end, I was able to counterattack, and with that, I was also able to observe the characteristics of that strange spiritual energy.


    Don''t know why but I can tell that the spiritual energy present inside of those dark humans has berserker energy inside of them. Most likely because of this every one of those dark humans getting a power boost. But alongside getting powerful they also became wilder and more dangerous and because of this, every one of those various people previously told us that they also felt that those dark humans were wilder.


    I think you still remember the red moon and the Red spiritual energy. Don''t know why but I am feeling that this strange or you can say this berserker spiritual energy has some kind of connection with that Red spiritual energy.


    Most likely those Abyss humans are somehow able to create this kind of method where they can also use the Red spiritual energy. Because of this, they also try to attack those Monsters and try to capture them previously so that they can research the red spiritual energy.


    Not only that I also found out the strange symbol present in the forehead of those dark humans mostly working as a container of those berserker spiritual energy. I can feel the source of the berserker spiritual energy is that simple present in the forehead of those dark humans.


    After doing all of this finally I also got the time to attack the barrier and this time I did not be reckless and in the end, I was able to destroy that barrier without killing the dark human.


    Naturally this time I did not feel any kind of restriction. I already predicted that some kind of mechanism would be created in that barrier and if I try to destroy that barrier forcefully then most likely some kind of mechanism will trigger and the person will die because of that.


    This time as I became more careful I already destroyed that real before it would trigger the trap. After that, I already began to read the memory of that. Unfortunately even after reading the whole memory of the person I did not find anything about the real motive of those dark humans but you can say I found something very serious that will make you very angry like me.


    I really cannot believe that those Abyss humans will do something like this because they are low on manpower. If you are wondering what they did then after losing too many of their people those Abyss humans already retreated.


    But actually, they did notpletely vanish from our Terraria. They just hide themselves so we cannot find them. While we were unable to figure out the motive of those Abyss humans, they already started their operation while kidnapping many warriors.


    Yes, you hear the right. This time they begin to kidnap Warriors. But they did not kidnap them to kill or use their life force to sacrifice. This time after kidnapping all those Warriors, those monsters started doing something strange.


    Unfortunately, I won''t be able to tell you the whole details as even in that memory I did not get the full details. But one thing I could tell you about this person lying down in front of me is a Moon elf one month ago.


    lights¦­¦Ïvel.c¦Ïm After that, he went inside of the danger zone with his team but something unexpected happened and he and his whole team got kidnapped by those Abyss humans. None of them even get the chance to call for reinforcement or do something while those Abyss humans already make them unconscious and take them somewhere that they did not have any idea.


    For almost 7 days all of them were only able to stay awake for even 1 minute. It is like those people that kidnap them using some kind of sleeping technique or something like that and because of this none of them are able to awake from their sleep.


    But fortunately, after 7 days, I will wake up and then notice something. They noticed that they had some kind of weird spiritual energy inside of their body. It is already affecting their body.


    By looking at the memory I can also see a person present at that time in front of those Warriors and most likely he is the mastermind behind all of this or I could be wrong. Suddenly at that time, that person begins to use dark spiritual energy and already begins to transfer the dark spiritual energy inside the body of those Warriors that are already crying in pain.


    This is thest memory I can read as after that none of them had any kind of memory and I am sure after that most likely those Warriors turned into these dark humans. Most likely those abyss humans using some kind of technique can also use the berserker spiritual energy and the dark spiritual energy to get these results."


    After saying all of this Sam became silent as he gave the de King the time to proceed. Naturally, The de King ride now becamepletely silent after hearing all of this as he was still unable to believe what he was hearing.


    At first, when Sam informed him that he was already able to figure out the characteristics of that weird energy, he became happy. Because after getting no information about the characteristics of the weird energy, everybody would be able to find out what kind of effect those spiritual energies will have.


    Naturally, this makes him very surprised when he gets to know that those stranger spiritual energy has berserker energy inside of them, and when Sam also tells him that he thinks this is rted to the Red spiritual energy, the de King also thinks this is possible.


    Not only he but every other person in the warrior association already knows that those Abyss humans previously tried to collect many of those Monsters that got affected by the Red spiritual energy.


    The main thing that Sam did not know was not just near the human Kingdom. Many other Warriors from many other kingdoms also notice simr things like this and naturally not every one of them is able to prevent those abyss humans from doing something like that.


    Naturally, everyone at this time suspects that those abyss humans will be trying to do some kind of research with those red spiritual energies but who could have thought that they would be sessful in their research?


    Now the de King even got very serious after hearing all that information but still, it did not make him that angry after hearing all that information. All this time he just wanted to know if Sam was able to read the memory of the dark human or not.


    When some told him that he was able to break the barrier without killing the dark human, the de king already became happy that most likely Sam already got to know about the real motive. But nobody can think Sam would reveal this kind of information that already makes him so angry that he wants to kill all those abyss humans right now.


    The more he listened about those Warriors who somehow got kidnapped by those Abyss humans and also those people did some research on those Warriors and in the end those Warriors most likely turned into dark humans already made him very angry. Naturally, he believes in Sam and he is sure that Sam did not lie to him.


    All the people present in the same room as the de King already can feel the terrifying aura that has already begun to release from his body. Even all those Warriors from the warrior association and also those royal families that were present inside that room almost began to gasp for breath.


    At this time all of them already begin to feel a huge pressure that almost makes them unable to breathe and they are also unable to create any sound at this moment. Not only that huge pressure but at the same time every one of them can feel the terrifying de intent that is present in the room. Just after feeling that every one of them could tell most likely if they tried to struggle, they would immediately die.


    Fortunately, the de king most likely came back to his senses and already noticed the situation of those other people. He controls his anger. Finally, this gives those other people the time to recover themself when he is still listening to all the reports of Sam.


    "Good work Sam. But right now try not to do anything and I will inform those elders that right now present inside of the Viet kingdom."


    After saying that he told those warriors from the warrior association who were somehow able to stabilize their condition. He told them to take care of all those other people and those in the royal family while he needed to do something. After saying that he directly leaves the room which naturally makes those other people very confused.

 Chapter 607 607 - More details

    Chapter 607  607 - More details


    de King left the VIP room as he needed to contact those two elders present in the Viet kingdom. Also, he did not want to inform anyone right now, and because of this, he did not waste a single second to leave.


    Both of the elders also quickly pick up the phone and he already begins to tell them what Sam found inside the danger zone. Naturally, Like The de King, those two elders also be serious when they hear about that berserker spiritual energy or red spiritual energy.


    Naturally, everybody from the warrior association was already aware of that. Every one of them also knows most likely those Abyss humans will do something after capturing those Monsters who previously got affected by the red moon and Red spiritual energy.


    Who could expect that those people who developed to store those spiritual energies inside those dark humans would also give them a boost in their power and also make them wilder? Naturally, there was also a possibility that those Abyss humans were also able to store the berserker spiritual energy inside of their bodies, and with that, they became more powerfulpared to before.


    So with that both of them get serious. Like The de King, they also thought right now most likely he would tell them what Sam Finally found after he finally broke the barrier that was most likely the mechanism to kill that dark human.


    But the moment they begin to hear the exnation of de King, they almost let out their pressure like the de King. Fortunately, they were already able to control that and with that, those Warriors and those citizens of that Kingdom who got affected and almost unable to breathe for a moment already came back to normal.


    First of all, nobody thinks that Sam will lie to them. During all this time Sampleted many missions and because of these every elder of the warrior association already trusted Sam. So if he told the de King about all of those then naturally those were the truth.


    Both of them can feel why the de King quickly calls them and exins all those details. Naturally after saying all of this, the de King also told them to wait. You will also inform those other elders and only after that they will discuss what to do at this moment.


    First of all, they could naturally take care of all those dark humans but if they really were normal warriors some time ago and just turned into dark humans then this is a really serious matter that they cannot ignore.


    If those Abyss humans found a way to turn normal Warriors into dark humans then they cannot imagine how much chaos it will spread. On the other hand, the de King told them that at anyhow they needed to capture the mastermind. So they need to handle the situation more carefully.


    Those dark humans were just normal Warriors then they needed to find a way to cure all those dark humans.


    ____________________


    de King, after contacting both of the elders wasted no time to contact all the other elders of the warrior association. Once again he began to exin to all of them about all those details that Sam found and as usual every one of them also became more serious and angrier just after hearing the details.


    Not only that, 4 elders already went toward the president who is right now preparing to break through. Naturally, nobody wanted to disturb the president at this time but this situation became more serious and they needed their President right now so that they could discuss what to do.


    On the other hand, after hanging up the call he once again contacted Sam and told him to stay careful as the situation could turn more serious. Fortunately, Sam informs him that right now nothing particr has happened and as usual those dark humans are standing there without doing anything.


    The good news was that he was also able to capture 5 more of those dark humans and destroy the weird spiritual energy present inside their bodies. He makes them unconscious and with that, nobody has to worry that those dark humans will die.


    Sam quickly informs the de King that he will take those 6 dark humans inside of the kingdom so that those two elders can also examine those dark humans right now.


    Naturally after hearing that the de King told him to stay careful it would be good if he was able to do that. They need to examine those dark humans and they need to find how to cure those dark humans so that they can go back to normal life.


    _______________


    Sam, who was still observing those other dark humans, already used the teleportation technique to teleport those unconscious dark humans inside of the kingdom. Also, he did not have to worry about finding both of the elders as he could already feel the powerful aura present inside the kingdom.


    Naturally, he directly teleports to that ce and both of the elders also already got in from the de King. Both of them did not say anything and directly began to examine those 6 unconscious dark humans using their observation technique.


    Most likely both of the elders also have mind control techniques as they have already begun to use them. Sam on the other hand did not do anything and just silently stayed there. But all this time he can feel that both of the elders were very angry.


    Even though both of them are trying to control their anger, they are still unable to properly control it. Also after finally reading the memory of those dark humans, those elders were unable to hold back. This time a powerful pressure already spread in the whole Kingdom.


    Instantly all the Warriors and all the cities present inside of that Kingdom once again begin to be affected by that as they are unable to breathe. Both of the elders were just unable to hold back and wanted to kill the masterminds who did to those Warriors.


    Naturally, both of them are unable to find out how those Warriors turned into dark humans but one thing they can tell after kidnapping those Warriors those Abyss humans naturally did something that made those normal Warriors turn into dark humans.


    They already begin to use their power to control the dark spiritual energy present inside of those dark humans but in the end, it isn''t sessful. First of all, they also realize they cannot do anything to those dark humans as it could also kill them.


    Because of this, both of the elders decided not to do anything to those dark humans. All this time Sam did not do anything and just silently stayed there while observing the elders. Also using the origin spiritual energy he did not get affected by The Spiritual pressure of those elders but he quickly told them to control that as it would kill the citizens or other Warriors of this Kingdom.


    Finally, both of the elders came back to their senses, and with that they just signed. Not only that, they finally begin to ask questions about those dark humans and what type of details he found about them.


    Sam did not hide anything and had already begun to tell them all the details that he found until now. First of all, he found out that even when he previously kidnapped those 6 dark humans none of those other dark humans realized anything or looked backward.


    Those dark humans that are present inside of the danger zone just looking toward the Viet kingdom. It looks like they are only focusing on that Kingdom and because of this, they also did not look backward when he kidnapped those 6 dark humans.


    Naturally, Sam did not want to be reckless so he did not attack more of them. First of all, he needs to figure out how to cure those dark humans, and all the time besides observing those dark humans he also begins to look at the system shop to find the cure.


    But unfortunately, even after finding all this time, he did not find anything. Also, he did not tell anyone but he already looked at the status of those dark humans, and with that, he already became sure that those dark humans were the normal Warriors.


    .c¦Ïm Even in their status, it was showing him those Warriors get affected by the dark spiritual energy and the red spiritual energy. Not only that, the true spiritual energy inside of their body already begins to get absorbed by the dark spiritual energy.


    Also, he found out that those documents slowly begin to lose their life and there will be a time when they willpletely die because of this. Now this is bing more serious and all this time because of this, he is trying to find out how to cure those dark humans.


    After hearing all these details those elders became expressionless. First of all those dark humans were normal Warriors who got kidnapped by those Abyss humans and turned into dark humans. But at the same time, they also lost their life, and most likely those abyss humans wanted to use them as their sacrifice soldiers.

 Chapter 608 608 - The president of warrior association

    Chapter 608  608 - The president of warrior association


    Right now inside of the headquarter of Warrior association,


    All the six elders present there naturally have a tense atmosphere among them. They already hang up the call with de King, and they already get to know what was the situation with those dark humans, Or you can say those unfortunate Warriors.


    First of all it is really hard to believe for anyone that those Abyss humans will try to do something like that. After their previous failure, those Abyss humans were already very slow in number and because of this they started to use this kind of thing to increase the number.


    Naturally this is a very horrible thing to imagine. Not only that, both of the elders from the Viet kingdom already inform that they have already begun to examine the bodies of those unconscious dark humans and they can already tell that the normal spiritual energy is still present inside of those people.


    But the dark spiritual energy and that unknown spiritual and represent inside of their body slowly absorbing their spiritual energy and these also make those Warriors lose their life slowly. Most likely those Abyss humans wanted to use these Warriors as their sacrifice soldiers so that they did not have to worry about their own people.


    Both of the elders also inform that they already try to tell the dark spiritual energy from inside of those dark human''s bodies, but in the end that wasn''t possible as they begin to feel some kind of restriction.


    This makes them more depressed and all this time they really cannot believe that something like that would happen and they did not even get to know about this. For 6 months they have already increased their observation technique of all those kingdoms  but even with that they are unable to find out all of this that happened to those normal Warriors.


    This is a really horrible thing and they cannot imagine how much pain those people are suffering right now. Everyone of those warriors who turned into dark humans, most likely became walking zombies who cannot control their own body as they already lost their full memory.


    Because of this, those 6 elders waited for the elders who went to the room of the President to inform him about all of this. If it was just a normal matter then they would not disturb the president but right now the situation isn''t normal and they needed to inform the president about this.


    Actually all the elders have the hope that the President will give them some suggestions and use that they would be able to cure those dark humans.


    ________________________


    Inside of a dark room,


    You can see an old man meditating without caring about his surrounding area. But don''t think that old man is normal as the whole room contains a spiritual pressure. Sometimeter the main door of that room opened and 4 people entered that room.


    Just looking at those four people you can tell they are the elders of the warrior association. Naturally that old man who is right now mediating is the president of the warrior association. Not only that he is also the strongest Warrior present in Terraria.


    Also even though he is meditating right now he is also very aware of his surroundings. The moment this for the elders came inside of that room, they could already feel The Spiritual pressure present there but fortunately the president already controlled The Spiritual pressure and also those full elders heard the question in their mind.


    It is the President who talks to them using some kind of Mind technique. One of the elders wasted no time to inform them of all the things that were happening outside of the headquarters.


    lights¦­¦Ïvel.c¦Ïm He did not inform the president about thepetition and directly began to tell him about what type of details he found out about those dark humans and also why they came to him.


    Just after hearing all of these the President who all this time meditating, open his eyes and instantly all those who elders kneel down on the ground as they can feel the pressure instantly increases and they unable to be bear the pressure.


    Fortunately the president controlled the pressure once again but this time it did not even say anything and just began to walk outside of the room. Those for elders did not waste a single second to follow the president.


    "Contact all the elders and tell them toe to the meeting right now. I also need to get the whole details about those dark humans. Also contacted Sam and told him that I wanted to talk to him."


    The president said all of these and after he disappeared from that ce. Those four elders already begin to contact all the other elders and also one of them already contacts Sam who is present inside the danger zone.


    "Sam, the president wanted to talk to you."


    After saying that he hung up the call as Sam already has the number of the president so he did not have to worry about that. Sam on the other hand really got surprised by the sudden news but he also did not waste a single second to contact the president.


    First of all, he quickly came back to the danger zone as he wanted to observe those dark humans. Not only that all this time he was also looking at the system shop so that he could find some kind of technique or some kind of other thing that would help him in a situation like this.


    Actually even using the origin spiritual energy he tries to extract the dark spiritual energy present inside the body of those dark humans. But unfortunately that wasn''t possible and he can also feel if he tried to do something forcefully then it would give him apletely opposite effect while killing those Dark humans.


    Because of this, he decided to look for a technique or some kind of other thing that would help him in a situation like this.


    __________________________


    Fortunately he has the system so that he can already see the status of those dark humans. By looking at the status he was able to find out that the percentage of the dark spiritual and representations  inside the body of those dark humans already exceed 70% and only 30% remain true spiritual energy.


    But slowly the dark spiritual energy observing that remaining spiritual energy and when it would be able to do that all those dark humans will die because of that. First of all you need to understand you cannot forcefully expel or absorb The Spiritual energy from any Warrior.


    If that Warrior suddenly lost All The Spiritual energy then he will get attacked by a mental fisher and if he is unable to stabilize the condition at that moment then he could be over for anybody.


    This is also a big reason that he needed to find out how to solve those problems. Now back to the main matter, he already dialed the number of the president and the president was also wasting no time to pick up the call. After that Sam already began to tell all the details that he found until now to the president.


    The president began to ask him about the characteristics and also about the symbol. Not only that the president also ask him if he able to control that symbol or not


    What would happen if someone tried to remove their symbol from the forehead of those dark humans?


    He has been having that kind of conversation with the president and Sam all the time telling him all kinds of details that he found about those dark humans.


    The president after hearing all of this told him to stay here full and after that hang up the call. On the other hand inside of the meeting room of the elders you can see all the 18 elders present there and right now they are just discussing what would be their next move.


    Naturally they also waited for the president as they got informed that the president was talking to Sam right now. de king is also present in that room. Not only that, all the other elders are also observing the security of those ces where you can see those battle rings.


    Fortunately, nobody didn''t have to worry about anything as even though all the elders already came to the headquarters, other people from the warrior association were still present in those ces to protect the safety of those battle arenas and the safety of those participants.


    Now back to main matter,


    Finally the president of the warrior association already came to that room. Instantly all the elders get up from their seats and then begin to salute the president. Not only that everyone of those elderly also thinks about what the president will say about them as they made many mistakes.


    The president already observed the expression of those warriors. Naturally he can tell all the other elders also were serious, after getting the news every one of them trying to find out how to cure those dark humans as they turn from normal humans into dark humans.

 Chapter 609 609 - Hion symbol

    Chapter 609  609 - Hion symbol


    Sam already contacted the president and he already began to exin all the details that he found until now. He also began to tell him the current details that both of the elders told him while examining the bodies of those dark humans.


    First of all, that weird symbol present in the forehead of those dark humans, not only works as a container for that berserker spiritual energy, but at the same time, it also works as a container of dark spiritual energy.


    Also because of that symbol, all of those dark humans had that strong barrier in their mind and it also has the mechanism that if someone tries to break that mental barrier those dark humans will immediately die. Not only that it will also send a signal to the mastermind who put those symbols on the forehead of those people.


    With that, Sam is sure that most likely the mastermind already became alert as he already got the notification the moment the first Dark human died. Because of this all the time he also stayed inside of the danger zone to watch over the whole ce. He needed to figure out the mastermind Who is behind all of this.


    The president all this time without saying anything hearing those details. The more he hears the details the more he can understand the current situation right now.


    lights¦­¦Ïvel.c¦Ïm "Can you tell me about the details of that weird symbol present in the forehead of those people?"


    The president instantly asks some about the symbol or you can say the pattern present in the forehead of those dark humans. Sam after hearing that already begins to describe those patterns.


    Sometimeter, the president already finished hearing the details of the symbol and he already came to a conclusion about that pattern or you can say symbol.


    "That is most likely the Hion symbol. Not only is this symbol used as a container of spiritual energy but it also directly attacks the mind of that person who has that symbol present in his body. Every one of those people who have this kind of pattern will act like a robot and without getting ordered by the mastermind they will not do anything.


    They did not have their feelings. They will not feel any pain or any kind of emotion in that state. Also, mostly those Abyss humans mutated that Hion symbol. If I am predicting right then this symbol also absorbs The Spiritual energy besides the dark spiritual energy.


    Well, you can say this kind of symbol also can absorb the life force of any person. So most likely those dark humans are also losing their life force because of those symbols. Those Abyss humans most likely wanted to be in the lives of those people but also wanted to use them as their puppets.


    Naturally, you won''t be able to find any kind of information even if you sessfully break the barrier as those people will not have any kind of memory present in their minds. But at this time one thing you can do and that would be helpful for everyone right now.


    If you use your mind control technique to control the mind of those dark humans that you capture, you will also feel the connection when the mastermind tries to order those dark humans through telepathy or something like that. Naturally, the mastermind or the person who puts those symbols in those dark humans will be able to contact those dark humans without even appearing in the main ce.


    I will tell one of the elders to stay inside the mind of one of the dark humans. With that, he would be able to immediately inform us if the mastermind tried to contact those dark humans through telepathy or mind link.


    For you, I would suggest you stay inside the danger zone but naturally, you need to be careful as the mastermind is already aware of us. One of them has already died and the mastermind is already aware of that.


    Also, try to find any kind of spiritual fluctuation even if it is a minimum fluctuation that appears in the danger zone. If I am not wrong then those abyss humans could use their dark techniques to appear in that ce and only a minimum spiritual fluctuation would ur in that ce."


    After saying that both of them hung up and Sam went back to his previous ce to observe the whole ce. Naturally after getting to know about the symbol he became more careful and he also wanted to know when the mastermind would try to contact those dark humans.


    Fortunately, the president told him he did not have to worry about that as one of the elders would do that. So, with that, he could just focus on observing the whole situation. Also as the President told him he needs to be careful about spiritual fluctuation that will appear in the danger zone right now.


    First of all, the good news is that the de king already told him that all the Warriors that were present in that Kingdom became aware that something strange was happening inside the danger zone. They are also told by the Warrior Association to Guard the kingdom.


    In one word you can say all the Warriors that are present in that Kingdom already know about the current situation from the warrior association but at the same time, they are also told by the warrior association that they should not contact other people right now.


    Naturally, the Warrior Association did not want to spread the news that could make more people panic about the situation and they did not even inform the citizens of that ce right now. In one word you can say right now inside the danger zone only he and those dark humans could be present.


    But naturally, the scout team that is also watching over the kingdom could alsoe to the danger zone and use their technique that will create spiritual fluctuation. Sam needed to be aware of all of this spiritual fluctuation.


    ____________________________


    Both of the elders are already informed by the president what to do and all the Warriors also get informed by the warrior association what to do in that current situation. First of all, the Warrior Association told everyone to stay alert to use their spiritual barrier technique anytime as it will be useful in this kind of situation.


    One of the elders already begins to use the mind control technique on one of the dark humans. On the other hand, another one naturally uses his observation technique to cover as much area as he can that he could observe. Naturally, the president also told them not to do anything to those dark humans until they did not get any kind of information about the mastermind.


    Those dark humans will not do anything until they do not get thement so they just need to stay there while the president tries to find a way to break those symbols. Naturally, that is a veryplicated symbol and to break that symbol someone needed to have much understanding of that symbol.


    Unfortunately, the president or other elders of the warrior association have that much information about the symbol. First of all, this is a forbidden symbol that you cannot find in any book or any record present in the warrior association. Also if any of them knew about that symbol then even with that they did not have the proper understanding.


    Because of this, the president is already thinking about what to do. The president is now present in the meeting room and told everybody about the symbol. Naturally after hearing that many of them already realized about that symbol as they also hear about that. But unfortunately, they also did not have that much information about that symbol so they will not be able to break the symbol.


    They could try to use their force but that would also risk the lives of those dark humans, and nobody wanted something like that to happen. Because of this, the president is already thinking of calling his friend who most likely has a way to break the symbol.


    He also told everybody that even if they are sessfully able to break the symbol, those dark humans will not immediately get cured. Most likely 70% of their spiritual energy already got absorbed and only 30% of The Spiritual remains in their body. Not only that day, they also have two more spiritual energies present inside of their body so naturally they needed to first extract those two excess spiritual energies from their bodies.


    Only after that, will they heal those dark humans or those Warriors. But you can say even the president isn''t sure if they will be able to recover the life force of those Warriors or not that they lost until now. But one thing is that he was also very angry and wanted to take action personally.


    Also, the first thing they needed to do was to confirm how many Warriors Like That Got kidnapped by the Abyss humans. With that, they will have a proper understanding of this real situation.

 Chapter 610 610 - Monsters

    Chapter 610  610 - Monsters


    Next day,


    In the human Kingdom, once again you can see most of the people present in the battle stadium right now as they are still watching the match of those special grade Warriors. Unfortunately, because of therge number of Warriors, you can say the match was not able to finish in just one day even though this time the warrior association prepared those many battle arenas.


    But nobody has any kind of problem with that as they enjoy the fight between those Warriors. Every one of those fights became very intense and that made everyone more excited about the match and the oue of that match.


    Every Warrior puts their all effort into winning the matches and that makes that match more interesting to watch. At this time naturally, all the other participants who will be fighting next or who are in the next grade, don''t have to present in the battle stadium to participate.


    For today the warrior association already announced to everyone that only after today they will be able to hold the match of those Elite grade warriors. Because of this, you can see most of those participants even though they came to the battle stadium but they did note here to participate as they just came there to enjoy the match between those special grade Warriors.


    All this time, except for those kings, most of the people did not notice the serious matter. None of the kings or any Warriors get informed by the warrior association about the real situation but many of them most likely predicted that something is wrong right now.


    .c¦Ïm If you are wondering why they think like that then it was because every one of the kings previously felt the pressure that naturally came from the de King for a moment. Not only that, but today the de King also did note to the battle stadium and many Warriors from the Warrior Association were also missing from the battle stadium.


    Naturally, other Warriors from the warrior association informed everyone that they won inside of the danger zone to ensure the safety of those participants but not every one of those kings believed that.


    First of all, the de King would not react like this if something serious did not happen. But unfortunately, even with that, he was unable to get any kind of information from the Warrior Association. They are also unable to contact the headquarters right now.


    So this made those kings more frustrated and they wanted to go to the headquarters right now to get to know the real situation. Most likely some of them wanted to use their authority to do that but before they could do that every one of those kings got informed by the warrior association that the president wanted to talk to them.


    ______________________


    "Most of you most likely became very curious to know what is happening with us. This is nothing serious as it is just some trouble that happened to the Warrior Association. But don''t worry we will be able to handle that and if something serious happens we will immediately inform you.


    But one thing I will inform you after thepetition is finished. So until then, you did not have to worry about anything and just enjoy the fight. Also mostly you are wondering about the de King he is already present in the danger zone and he observing those ces where we put those battle rings"


    The president assures everyone that nothing happened and it is just something that happened to the headquarters and because of this, the de King also reacts like this.


    After that naturally, most of the kings calm down. Nobody believed that the president would lie to them so they just decided to trust him. But even with that, you can say the human king, Oni king, and the druid king did not believe. First of all, the president did not tell them about Sam.


    Also, they are sure that the same previously went to the Warrior Association. If you are wondering why then it is because the old human king who, even though preparing to increase his Power, was still observing the whole Kingdom every time and while observing The Kingdom he found the aura of Sam present in the warrior association alongside the de king and many other Warriors.


    Naturally, the human King did not tell anyone about this except the Oni king and the Druid king. So if possible they wanted to call back the president and ask him about Sam. Don''t know why but they have a feeling that the president is most likely lying to them and he is also hiding something.


    _______________________


    "Old friend, how are you? Haha¡­ it has been ages since we talked to each other like this. Also if you were wondering why I suddenly called you then naturally you already predicted that something is serious. Actually, because of this, I contact you as I need your help


    I cannot tell you everything while talking on the phone so I will request you toe to the headquarters of my Warrior association. After that, I will tell you the details and you will also realize why I need your help."


    " Hmm¡­ by hearing your voice I can most likely say something serious. Sigh, you all full you already know I am trying to break through but still decided to disturb me. Sigh, I will be there so just wait for me and if I don''t find anything interesting then I will beat you."


    Like this, both the president and his friend talk to each other but sometimeter they both hang up the phone. This time the president will be getting help from his friend in this matter to break that Hion symbol. As you know he did not have that much knowledge about that forbidden symbol so he asked his friend''s help in this matter.


    The good thing is that until now nothing happened inside the danger zone or to those unconscious dark humans. Also, the good thing was that nobody tried to contact those dark humans as the elder would immediately get to know about that if somebody tried to contact those dark humans using the mind link.


    ''Sigh, just what are these Abyss humans nning? Why did they suddenly be so active and why do they want to summon their  demon god like this?''


    The President who already went back to his room thinking about all of these. Those Abyss humans are most of the time inactive, and because of this many people did not know about them previously.


    It has been almost 100 years since those people tried to do something and because of this, everyone also thought that every one of those Abyss humans most likely died or something happened to them.


    But nobody realizes that those people are trying to do something like this while using the life of the Warriors as a sacrifice for their demon god.


    _____________________________


    "I suddenly feel a spiritual fluctuation far away from the ce where I am standing right now. Immediately using my technique I went to that ce and was surprised by the sudden situation. Suddenly many Monsters came to that ce who also released the dark spirit and g from their body.


    At first, I thought they were most likely normal dark creatures but then I realized that they aren''t normal monsters. First of all, all of them also have symbols like those dark humans on their forehead and also if you try to feel those monsters then you will feel that they also have a simr wild aura to those dark humans.


    So it looks like those Monsters were also sent by the Abyss humans. But like those dark humans, they also did not do anything and just stayed in that ce while looking toward the direction of the kingdom.


    Also, I realize that in many ces inside the danger zone, you will find a strange symbol that is most likely created by those Abyss humans. If you are wondering why then after observing them why I try to put my spirit and age in, it did not respond to me and also previously when those Monsters appear in that ce I notice that kind of symbol of present in the ground.


    It also released a little bit of dark spiritual energy at that time so I am sure this is rted to those Abyss humans."


    Sam immediately told all of these to the president. The president called him to get to know about the currency situation with those dark humans but he did not expect he would get this kind of news.


    Naturally, after getting this kind of news, the president became more serious and he already tried to think what could be the case that those Monsters also came there. With this kind of preparation most likely those Abyss humans wanted to attack the Viet kingdom.


    But at the same time, the president did not think that those abyss humans became idiots. They will naturally not even though most of the Warriors right now aren''t present in the kingdom, birthdays could immediatelye back to their Kingdom and with that, they would be able to fight back. So what is the motive of those abyss humans?

 Chapter 611 611 - Big Explosion

    Chapter 611  611 - Big Explosion


    "Sir, I tried to control the mind of those Monsters and surprisingly I found thest memory of those Monsters. Every one of those Monsters is naturally Monsters from the danger zone and previously when they roamed around the danger zone they somehow saw a bright light and after that, they did not have any kind of memory present in their mind.


    Most likely like those Warriors, these Monsters also get kidnapped by the Abyss humans. Most likely they wanted to experiment on those monsters to see if they could turn these monsters into more dangerous Monsters or not.


    The thing I foundmon in these Monsters like those dark humans, is that they also have that weird spiritual energy present inside of their body and also they have a weird symbol present on their forehead. So naturally these monsters also became puppets as you told me earlier and without getting the order from their master they will not do anything.


    I wanted to ask you if I should kill all these monsters because it could be very dangerous for every warrior if these monsters try to attack the Viet kingdom. As this time they aren''t doing anything, I think we should kill them."


    " Hmm¡­ Well, these Monsters aren''t like our Warrior so you don''t have to worry and you can kill them. Would be the best choice as it will immediately alert the mastermind behind all of these and with that most likely he would reveal himself or try to do something."


    Both the president and Sam finish their conversation while the president gives him the order to kill all those Monsters. Naturally killing those Monsters could be dangerous for any of your Epic grade Warriors or evenary grade Warriors.


    Because of this, this would be the perfect time to kill those Monsters. First of all, nobody knows if the attack of those monsters is still the same as before or not. But one thing anybody could tell is that after getting kidnapped by those abyss humans, naturally, those Monsters became more powerful. So naturally the power of those Monsters also increased then it would be very dangerous for those Warriors if they tried to fight arge number of Monsters like this.


    Fortunately, currently, those monsters weren''t doing anything and some good ones easily used that chance to kill those Monsters. Wasting no time he already began to kill those Monsters. But naturally killing thoserge numbers of Monsters wasn''t easy for him and it also took him almost 4 hours to kill just half of those Monsters.


    But after that in just 3 hours he killed the remaining ones except thoseary-grade monsters. Don''t know why but he had the feeling that if he tried to attack those Monsters like those other Monsters then it could have a different result and his life could be in danger.


    Naturally, this is a sudden feeling that he is having right now because of his instincts, and as you know hepletely trusts his instance over anything. So he decided not to attack thoseary-grade Monsters like those other Monsters.


    He decided to attack them from a distance and with that, he already created enough distance to attack one of them using his spirit arrow. Sam already began to channel his spiritual energy into the arrow and the Arrow just began to coated in spiritual energy and became more powerful.


    Even though the color of the arrow did not change, anybody could tell this Arrow became more powerful and more deadly. Also after using the supreme Archer technique, he created that Arrow that increased its power of that Arrow much more than before, and the speed of the Arrow became much faster.


    Less than a secondter he hit the monster that was almost 5 km away from his location. But surprisingly the moment that Arrow hit the Monster it easily pierced through the body of that Monster but the Monster did not react or do anything unusual.


    But at the same time, you can already see that Monster did not fall on the ground like those other monsters so naturally it did not die. Sam is about to prepare one more attack but suddenly he feels some kind of spiritual fluctuation that instantly begins toe out from that monster.


    Not just that Monster but at the same time one by one those otherary-grade Monsters also begin to release spiritual fluctuation.


    He was 5 km away from the location of those Monsters but even he could feel the pressureing out from those Monsters. Not only just the pressure but you can say he at this time feels much more dangering out from those Monsters.


    Sometimeter he gets to know why he feels like that. Sometimeter he saw one by one those Monsters begin to glow and in the next again they began to blow up and at the same time, a huge explosion already appeared.


    Not only that instantly he can feel the surrounding ce begin to change and mode likely someone trying to put restrictions on the surrounding area. Fortunately, Sam already feels the danger so he already creates much more distance from those Monsters while all the time using the spiritual vision he is looking at those Monsters.


    During that time he also feels that he cannot use the teleportation technique because of the restriction and this also makes him much more serious than before. He is almost 20 km away from those Monsters but he can still clearly see what is happening in that ce where those Monsters begin to blow and then begin to blow up.


    One by one those 20 Monsters already blow up and the next day a huge explosion already appears in that ce. But not just after that explosion appeared but It began to spray around the surrounding area and easily cover the 5 km area while still advancing.


    Sam, already 20 km away from the previous ce, can still feel the danger so naturally he did not waste a single second to retreat. He just continuously uses the movement technique right now to retreat from that ce but at the same time he can already feel the range of the explosion already reach 20 km and most likely it is still going to be sprayed around.


    Naturally, something like that happened as the range of the explosion already began to spread around and sometimeter almost 40 km area got sted because of that explosion. The whole ce was destroyed because of the explosion and right now you cannot see a single tree or anything present in that ce.


    The whole ce almost has a 20 km deep hole in it and everything present in that ce has already turned into ashes. Those trees and even those Monsters that previously got in the range of that explosion already turned into dust and by looking at the scene, Sam even got quite scared.


    First of all, he did not think something like this would happen, and all the time you can say he already felt the power that got released from that explosion already reached the peakary grade. If he got caught in the explosion then he also did not think he would be able toe back alive.


    First of all, he can still feel the restriction that slowly begins to disappear from that ce but at the same time, he can still feel if he tries to go toward the ce that got destroyed by the previous explosion then something more will happen as the berserker spiritual energy or the Red spiritual energy still present in that area.


    Because of this, he did not approach the destroyed ce to see about the casualty and also he is very fortunate that no Warrior right now is present in the danger zone as it could also be dangerous for those Warriors if they got caught in the explosion.


    On the other hand, if you look at him then you can see he is also very injured right now and blood is alsoing out from his mouth. If you look under his armor you will see many ces in his body already turning Red.


    Even though before getting directly hit by the impact he was able to cover his body using the spiritual energy that already increased the defense at the same time because of his armor that also got enhanced by The Spiritual energy, he did not receive serious injuries.


    But the thing is that even though he did not receive injuries that could end his life but previously as he got hit by the powerful impact it already broke many of his bones also he could already see his Armor had already been destroyed and only some remaining pieces of that armor present in his body.


    Sam immediately brings out a health potion and begins to drink that thing to recover his full health. Naturally, at the same time he also observed the surrounding area using his life detection device but fortunately this time he did not feel anything in that area in the range of the device.


    Most likely even those Monsters that did not get killed by the explosion decided to run away as they would also get seriously injured by the explosion. Because of this, he also did not see any Monsters present in that ce.


    Sometimeter after finally recovering he decided to inform the president about this. Not only that he also needs to inform those elders present in the kingdom.

 Chapter 612 612 - Danger

    Chapter 612  612 - Danger


    Inside the Warrior Association,


    Every elder had already been informed by the president that Sam would begin to kill all the Monsters that suddenly came to the danger zone. He also told everyone about the description of those Monsters that most likely get powerful because of the weird symbol and the weird spiritual energy present inside of their body.


    After learning that every one of those elders at first naturally thought what if those Monsters were also rted to warriors, fortunately, the president informed everyone that wasn''t the case.


    Sam, already uses his mind control technique to get to know about the real situation and he already found out that those Monsters were normal Monsters present in the danger zone but somehow they also get kidnapped by those Abyss humans.


    After learning that nobody from the warrior association had anyints as Sam was killing those Monsters. Naturally, they did not want to harm those Warriors who turned into dark humans. If it is possible then they wanted to turn back those dark humans to normal Warriors.


    Because of this, they are also waiting for the friend of their President toe there as he is a professional person for this kind of work. He has almost all the knowledge about this kind of symbol and pattern that you cannot even find in old records.


    The president already told everyone most likely the mastermind wanted to use those dark humans and also wanted to use those Monsters to do something to the kingdom or they had some other n. Naturally, all of them will be focusing on handling those dark humans as they do not want to kill them but on the other hand, if those Monsters also join the fight then it could be dangerous so it would be good if Sam already killed all of them.


    But at this time something unexpected happened. The President of the Warrior Association who was sitting in the meeting room with other elders wasting no time quickly picked up the phone. He can see it is Sam who is calling him and naturally he wants to know the current update of the situation.


    "I already kill every one of those Monsters except those Monsters whose power is already above epic grade. Those are the toughest Monsters you will meet and not only that I did not attack them from a close distance but I can also feel that my instance telling me not to do something.


    It is like some kind of danger will appear in that ce if I try to attack them at that close distance. Because of this I already created distance from those Monsters and only then I decided to attack them from a long distance. At first, everything was okay and I also thought I already killed one of them and at this time I was already preparing to attack the next Monsters.


    But during that time something unexpected happened and every one of those Monsters began to glow alongside the Monsters that almost got killed by my attack.


    All of them begin to glow and some timeter all of them begin to blow up. A huge spiritual fluctuation appeared in the ce and a huge explosion was created because those Monsters exploded.


    The explosion was so powerful that it easily covered a 5 km area and then a 10 km area. Fortunately, I was able to react on time and already create distance from that explosion. In the end, you can say almost 50 km of the danger zone was destroyed because of that explosion.


    Not only that during this time I can also feel some kind of restriction that prevents me from using any kind of teleportation technique. Not only the space restriction but I can also feel some kind of force trying to restrict me to my previous ce but fortunately that force wasn''t that powerful and I can easily break it.


    I am currently standing in front of the destroyed ce but one thing I notice right now is that the berserker spiritual energy is still present in that ce that has already been destroyed because of the explosion I am pretty sure if I try to go to that ce and get touch by that berserker spiritual energy, then once again some kind of dangerous thing will happen."


    After saying all of this Sam bes silent as he also gives the president the time to digest all this news. Well, he also quickly told the president that most likely for anyary grade Warriors that district would soon work but for those other Warriors it would work and this could be very dangerous.


    If they suddenly feel this kind of restriction and are unable to use their technique to retreat from that ce then naturally it could be dangerous as they could also die in that ce.


    Naturally the president after hearing all of these already thought about all of this very carefully and during that time no elders tried to disturb him. Fortunately, all of them also hear the whole report and that also makes them think about this matter.


    Right now the main question is what if those dark humans also have this kind of thing present in their body and what if they also begin to blow up like this? Naturally, that would be very dangerous not for only those Warriors but even for those dark humans.


    Because of this, they can also feel the emergency. If they wanted to save those Warriors who turned into dark humans then they needed it to work pretty quickly so that those dark humans also did not explode like this.


    ___________________________


    "Most likely the mastermind already got to know something that was happening with those Monsters and because of this, he decided to do something like that to kill the person or the Warriors who were killing those Monsters.


    He most likely also wanted to use this kind of thing inside of the kingdom or inside of the battlefield while many Monsters would stay close to those Monsters. Naturally, many Warriors will die.


    But at the same time as you know, the same thing could happen with those dark humans and once again an explosion could appear in that ce. All this time we were just thinking about how to save those people but we never thought that this kind of thing could also happen.


    Fortunately, you are safe and told us the details. I will immediately contact all the Warriors to maintain the distance of almost 50 km and also you need to make sure that you stay safe and maintain a safe distance from those dark humans.


    Given the restriction is much more powerful than naturally, the mastermind could also try to increase the power of the restriction and that would be dangerous for anyone."


    Like this the president told him what to do right now and with that both of them in their conversation. Sam just sighed and after that, he already decided to go back to the kingdom. First of all, even though he just recovered from all those injuries, he can still feel the mental exhaustion and he also needs some time to recover. Because of this, he decided to go back to the kingdom.


    But before he could go back he already informed the other elders who were present in the danger zone to observe all the dark humans and all the Monsters. Naturally, he already can feel the eldering toward his direction mostly because he also feels The Spiritual fluctuation and also feels the distraction that happens in that ce.


    As Sam expected the elder already came in front of him and one second Sam began to tell him all the details. During that time, he already deactivated the concealment technique and because of this, the elder was able to find him.


    Naturally after hearing all the details the elder became very serious but at the same time he also told him to go back to the kingdom to take a rest. During that time you will present near those dark humans and also if those Monsters appear in the danger zone he will try to talk to the president and try to kill those Monsters.


    First of all, even the elderly can use their power to control the body of those Monsters or those dark humans but they cannot prevent those Monsters from exploding like this. So naturally if something like this happened then he won''t be able to prevent that.


    Sam, wasted no time to teleport back to the kingdom. Surprisingly when he gets back to the kingdom he can also see the de King already contacting him. Naturally, that person is also very worried about the situation right now, and even though he is present in the human Kingdom all this time he is just thinking about the situation of the Viet kingdom.


    During that time the good thing was that nobody from the Viet kingdom tried to contact any other person from outside as they also understood if they tried to spread the news then it could have a serious impact on those other Warriors also they did not inform the citizens of their Kingdom about this right now.


    That was one of the best things that they did right and they had already been informed about what happened inside the danger zone a few minutes ago as they also felt the huge spiritual fluctuation and also they felt the huge explosion that appeared inside the danger zone.

 Chapter 613 613 - Back to Human kingdom

    Chapter 613  613 - Back to Human kingdom


    Back to the human king,


    Finally, the first match between those special grade Warriors has already finished and right now the warrior association already called those Elite grade warriors in the battle ring as they will also show the names of their opponents.


    One by one they already begin to show the four groups and also begin to show all the people that present in those groups. Maria and the others were also present in that ce and they could see their names present in those groups.


    Not everyone is in the same group. Also in the end, they needed to win thest match to get to the semi-final and after winning the semi-final day we leveled to go to the final match. So even though they are friends naturally they will not Back down even if they face their friends.


    The warrior association did not waste that much time to show the names of their opponents and one by one every participant can see the names of their opponents. After that, the warrior association also called the first four groups of people from those four groups toe to the battle ring.


    Those 8 participants already went to the battle ring. Like the previous special grade Warriors, the elite grade warriors will also start theirpetition with these four matches at first.


    All the people present in the human Kingdom instantly begin to p for those 8 people who came to the battle ring and naturally, every person can feel that those 8 people are already ready to use their full power to win the match.


    All of them have an intense atmosphere. On the other hand, the warrior association already told them toe to the battle ring as they already activated the teleportation array. Wasting no time, everyone went to the teleportation array and instantly the warrior association began to teleport them to the battle ring.


    After that, those four big screens present in the stadium begin to show those four battle rings one by one those participants have already appeared. It took them 2 seconds to stabilize their condition and at the same time, they could already observe the surrounding area and observe their opponent.


    They are already present in those battle rings and they are just waiting for those participants to adjust their condition. Using the teleportation array will give you a headache and you need some time to adjust that.


    Now back to the main matter,


    After adjusting themselves they are already ready to fight. Every one of those weapon users already brings out their weapons and those spiritual fighters use their spiritual techniques.


    They already begin to channel their spiritual energy into their techniques and with that, all those participants begin to release the spiritual fluctuation. But naturally, nobody attacked each other as the referred did not give them the signal to start the fight.


    The referee before anything asks both of the Warriors if they are ready to fight. Only after getting their approval, did the referee signal them to start the fight.


    In the first group of people, you can see both of the fighters using weapons. One of them is using a katana, while the other one is using two long knives.


    Naturally, both of their weapons are already coated in spiritual energy and the moment they get the signal from the referee they already attack each other. Instantly both of them created spiritual sh that went toward each other.


    "Boom!!"


    An impact was created after both of the shes shed with each other. But not only that at the same time both of the Warriors already use their movement technique toe in front of each other and already begin to attack. The knife user already begins to attack his opponent using both of his knives.


    sh after sh was created by his attacks. But his opponent also did not stay ideal as he also counter-attacked and he also created those big spiritual shes. Naturally at this time, you can see those trees present near the battle ring already getting destroyed because of the impact that was created because their attack shed with each other.


    Suddenly the knife user crouches down and attacks upward with his knife. But the Katana user also wasn''t slow as he already noticed that and jumped backward. But naturally spiritual sh was created. The Katana also swings his Katana toward that spiritual sh.


    But don''t think it was your normal swing. Those people who did not use The Spiritual vision or technique like that only saw that person swing one time but actually, he swung his Sword ten times in less than a second.


    "Boom!!!"


    Once again a big sh happened and a big impact was created in the ce. But both of the warriors did not back down and one second used the movement technique to attack each other aftering in front of them.


    ___________________________


    In the next battle arena, you can see both Warriors were spiritual warriors and one of them used the thunder element while the other one used the light element.


    The thunder element user already created big thunderbolts that were already going toward the opponent. But his opponent also wasn''t slow as he already created the spiritual barrier in front of him and at the same time many spiritual symbols appeared in the sky and the next second you could see the sun ray alreadye out from those spiritual symbols that directly went toward the thunder element user.


    The thunder element used was naturally prepared for that as he instantly began to shout and in the next second a huge thunderbolt came down from the sky and already counter-attacked those sun rays.


    Not only that, but he also controls that thunderbolt to go toward that light element user. It directly hit The Spiritual barrier. But nothing happened to that spiritual barrier that was able to protect the warrior from that thunderbolt.


    The thunder limit used naturally did not stop and continuously began to shoot thunderbolts toward his opponent. At any condition, he did not want to give his opponent the time to react or do anything. Also, he wanted to break that spiritual barrier.


    The light element user all the time fully focuses on his spiritual barrier to protect himself from the thunderbolt but at the same time, he also channels his spiritual energy into his next technique that he will use to attack his opponent.


    It will take some time so until then he needs to protect himself from the thunderbolt. After 1 minuteter you can finally see that the spiritual barrier begins to show the crack mark. But naturally, the thunder element user needs to continuously attack that barrier to be able to destroy thatpletely.


    But he did not get the chance to continue as instantly a big symbol appeared in the sky and from that, a bigser light got shot toward the thunder element user. The user already can feel the dangering out from thatser light so he instantly uses his element power to move away from the ce.


    Everything happened in less than a second and not many people were able to see what happened. But everyone who is able to see what happened in the battle ring already can see the destruction created by theser light. It already melted and created a hole in that battle ring.


    On the other hand, that big symbol is still present in the sky as it did not disappear so naturally light element users will attack once again. Actually, something like that happened and once againser light was created from that symbol and directly went toward that thunder element user.


    This time the thunder element decided to fight back and he created a huge thunder beam toward thatser light.


    "Boom!!!"


    A huge explosion was created because both of the Fighter''s attacks shed. Both of the warriors were already channeling spiritual energy into their attack to get the advantage but naturally, nobody wanted to back down right now.


    Sometimeter they already create distance from each other as both of their attacks have already been canceled. Not only that, they already begin to use their next technique and already begin to attack each other. Once again you can see the thunder element user begin to shoot thunderbolts, while the light element user begins to create light spears that directly begin to go toward those thunderbolts.


    _________________________


    In the third battle ring, you can see one of the fighters using spiritual techniques while the other one using his weapon. His weapon is a gun. While his opponent uses the ice element.


    The gun user already begins to shoot bullets toward his opponent and every one of those bullets is coated with spiritual energy. It already increases the power of those bullets and also those bullets contain a huge amount of destructive spiritual energy.


    Naturally, the ice element user wasn''t slow as he already uses the skill called zero degree and instantly the ground began to freeze in ice. But you already realize before covering the whole ground you will get hit by those bullets so instantly a huge ice wall appears in front of him.


    "Boom!!"


    Those bullets directly hit that ice wall. And you can see the huge impact that was created because a bullet hit the ice wall.

 Chapter 614 614 - What is the real matter?

    Chapter 614  614 - What is the real matter?


    The ice element user naturally just did not prevent those bullets from heating him but at the same time, you can see those ice spears that instantly went toward his opponent and which got created from that ice wall.


    The gun user already realized and he already began to shoot his bullet toward Those ice spears. None of them wanted to back down and because of this both of them were already attacking each other non stop full stop but at this time If you look at the ground of the battle ring you can see the ground had already begun to freeze once again.


    The ice element user besides attacking his opponent also tried to close the whole battle ring so that his opponent did not get the chance to fight back and he could easily defeat his opponent.


    But suddenly something unexpected happened and the next bullet already broke the ice wall. Not only did it break the ice wall but at the same time it directly came in front of that ice element user.


    Fortunately, the ice element user was already able to react on time and he disappeared from that ce. That Warrior uses the ice escape technique and appears in a different ce. But the gun user naturally expected something like this and he already began to shoot bullets in every direction.


    This time he increases the spiritual energy and because of this, the speed of those bullets also increases. The ice element user naturally tries to protect himself by creating an ice wall but every one of Those ice walls gets destroyed.


    "Boom!!"


    Suddenly one of the bullets just after destroying the ice world had already been blown up and an explosion was created in that ce. That ispletely unexpected for that ice element user and because of this, he is also unable to protect himself.


    He was sent backward by the impact of that explosion and you can see he got injured because of that attack. Fortunately, it was only a little bit of injury that he received.  But the gun user naturally did not want to stop attacking and he just continuously began to shoot bullets.


    _________________________


    In thest battle ring, you can see one of the warriors using the metal element and with that, he creates weapons with metals that instantly go toward his opponent. On the other hand, his opponent uses the fire element.


    Instantly a big fireball was created that destroyed all those metal weapons but naturally that wasn''t over as that metal user suddenly created a big spear that appeared in the sky and instantly began to fall toward that fire element user.


    The fire element user already notices that metal spear and he instantly creates a fire zone that begins to protect himself from that metal spear. Also you can see that the metal Spear begins to melt. But that wasn''t over as suddenly one by one big fireballs began to go toward his opponent.


    It looks like his opponent also reacted on time as a big metal wall was created in front of that person and also in the next second a big robot-like thing was created that was made of metal. That metal user naturally uses the iron element.


    He can use his element to create anything. So he instantly created that robot using the metal element and that robot instantly punched toward that big firewall when that big wall suddenly disappeared. Naturally, that attack also contains spiritual energy and in the next second a big sh happens.


    Both of the Warriors used their full spiritual energy in this attack and because of this, that robot and that fireball are still trying to destroy each other. Sometimeter it looks like that robot is going to melt but something unexpected happens as it suddenly looks toward that fire element user and many knives and other small weaponse out from his mouth and directly begin to go toward that fire element user.


    A firewall instantly appeared in front of that fire element user and every one of those weapons before attacking him had already been demolished by that firewall as he already increased the temperature of that Firewall as high as he could. Also using spiritual energy can have a physical effect on weapons.


    Because of that the power of the big Fire Ball already began to reduce and the robot finally got The upper hand on this. He instantly extended his hand toward that warrior and in the next second, both of his hands suddenly began to go towards that Warrior at very high speed.


    Suddenly something unexpected happened as that firewall disappeared and instead of that ce a big Tiger appeared. Before those two hands could punch the firewall or that Warrior that tiger or you can say that fire Tiger instantly began to shoot fireballs from his mouth and naturally the power of the fire was very high.


    __________________________


    The first four matches go on like this while every person present in the human kingdom or even those people who did note to the human Kingdom enjoys the match just watching the TV. Naturally, the warrior association telecast the fights of those Warriors and because of this, even those people who did note to the human Kingdom were able to see the match.


    They can watch the fight of those Warriors differently. Itpletely depends on their mood so they did not have to forcefully watch the match that the Warrior association will show them.


    Everyone in the royal family was also present in the VIP room and they were also watching the match with interest. First of all, from the start, everyone can see thatpared to those special grade Warriors, those Elite grade warriors have more power and because of this the destruction rate also increases.


    Already everybody could notice the surrounding area that almost got destroyed because of the impact or because of their attack. Fortunately, the good thing is that until now no Monster tried to interfere with their match and no participants had to worry about the monster as those people from the warrior association handled that matter.


    Every one of them has full confidence in the warrior association so nobody has to worry about monsters or any kind of other interference. But at the same time, you can say not everyone in the royal family watches those fights with interest.


    First of all, some of them naturally feel that all those fights are quite boring. But none of them say anything as those participants can also impress them with their unexpected moves and at the same time they can also get to see many different kinds of attacks from those participants.


    On the other hand, the human King, the Oni king, and the Druid king are naturally also very curious about the fight because this time their daughter will also participate in the match and all of them want to see how their daughters will perform during the fight.


    "Sigh, Sam is missing all of these exciting fights. But I am really confused about his previous behavior. I am sure this is rted to the warrior association and the weird behavior of those warriors from the warrior association.


    Why did they not say anything to us? Naturally, we also needed to know what was happening and why the Warrior Association became serious like this. Even though the b


    de King already came back but I can already seepletely lost interest in those fights as he did not even look at the screen right now.


    It looks like he is worried about something and all the time he is just thinking about that. I am telling you I am sure that something serious happened and all the people from the Warrior Association are just trying to hide that from us."


    The human King says that to his friends that present in the VIP room. Naturally, both of his friends also agree with him and at the same time the Oni king says,


    " Well this is also my guess that they wanted to solve the matter without alerting anyone but I am sure something serious. On the other hand, I already talked to my father but even he said we did not have to worry about anything.


    Most likely like the old human being my father also got to know what the real situation was but nobody wanted to talk to us about the real matter. I am guessing because the Warrior Association did not want to create chaos by revealing the news, they are trying to hide the news from us. "


    The Oni king said that. The human King and the Druid king also agree with him. Previously it was the old human being who informed them that he also felt the aura of Sam inside the warrior association butter he told him that they did not have to worry about anything as the warrior association would handle everything.


    Naturally, that made them more curious about the real situation but unfortunately they did not get to know about anything.

 Chapter 615 615 - Good news?

    Chapter 615  615 - Good news?


    The de King who was present in the human and looking at the match between those Elite grade warriors did not pay attention to the match right now. All the time he contacted the warrior from the Viet kingdom.


    If possible he wanted to go to that Kingdom to see what the real situation was. He also gets to know all the information about those dark humans and those newly appeared Monsters in the danger zone. He naturally gets to know that the mastermind can control those dark humans or those Monsters to explode and after that, a huge explosion will appear.


    This is a very dangerous thing not just for those Warriors who are protecting the kingdom but at the same time for those Warriors who get kidnapped and turn into dark humans. If possible he wanted to help every one of those dark humans to get back to normal. But unfortunately, until the president was not able to find a way to solve the matter, nobody would be able to do anything.


    After the first four matches one by one everyone, those Elite grade warriors got teleported to a different battle ring for their battle and once again 100 warriors were able to fight at once.


    ''Sigh, I just hope everything turns normal and we can save those dark humans. I can also feel every one of those kings most likely suspect something but unfortunately, we won''t be able to inform them until I get permission from the president.


    Also, I hope Sam is safe right now as he is taking more danger. Fortunately, he is present there and because of him, we can discover this kind of news without any casualty. If normal Warriors try to approach those Monsters when they exclude themselves then it could be over for that Warrior.


    First of all that explosion is normal as it also spreads a restriction force that could prevent you from using any kind of teleportation technique and also it prevents you from using any kind of normal technique. So basically if the person did not have strong willpower and strong spiritual energy then naturally he would not be able to break that destruction force.


    Most likely those Abyss humans want to use this kind of method to destroy the Viet kingdom or they have simr ns like this."


    The de King is now thinking about what could be the n of those Abyss humans. First of all, even if they turn those Warriors into dark humans they will naturally not reveal their trump card like this. Using those new dark humans they could easily kill many Warriors if they once again went to a war with Warriors.


    So naturally the de King that this is some kind of n that those Abyss humans have. Because of this, he is also worried about the real situation and just hopes the friend of the president will quickly appear at the headquarters and give suggestions about those weird symbols.


    During the time when de King thinking all of these, you can see on the screen that present in the battle stadium, one by one all those Elite grade warriors who are also able to rank in the top 100 ranking already started their fight, and because of this,pared to before this became much more exciting for every one of those people.


    Livia, Maria, Elisa, and the others were also fighting with their opponent at this time, and with that, this match became serious for them. From the first everyone uses their full power to defeat their opponent and with that their opponent even tries to fight back but in front of them they are unable to do anything.


    With that, you can see what is the difference between those top 10 rank holders and those other Warriors. The main difference could be the fighting experience. Even though those princesses did not go to the danger zone that much every time they went to the danger zone they would fight with those Monsters until they were unable to fight back.


    Not just only the Monsters but they also always fight with humans who could be more dangerouspared to those Monsters. Because of this, they also have more experience in fighting.


    Unfortunately for them, currently the de king did not even look at the screen or their fight. Suddenly he got a call from the Warrior Association and the good news was that the friend of the president was already present in the Warrior Association.


    Now once again the elders alongside the president are already meeting with the friend of the president. And the president also told him toe to the headquarters using the teleportation array.


    After hearing that, finally, de King sighs in relief. Even though the problem did not get solved, he still had hope in the friend of the president. First of all, the president trusts his friends so naturally the de King also trusts that person.


    "I will be there in a minute,"


    After saying that immediately he hung up the phone and stood up from his seat. This time he did not release his pressure to alert anyone and just silently looked at everyone who was most likely observing him all the time.


    Naturally, he is present inside the VIP room and many other VIP members of the Warrior Association are also present there. Fortunately, all the warriors from the warrior association present in that room already guessed what could happen so they already made a way for the de king.


    The human King, alongside other royal families who are always observing the VIP room Where The de king is present, also gets surprised. Even though The de King this time did not release the pressure, everyone can see the happy face of The de King.


    Most likely something good happened and because of this the de king looked happy. But unfortunately, the de King did not tell them anything and just left the battle arena. Naturally, everybody can guess most likely he is going toward the Warrior Association.


    ____________________________________


    "Most likely something really good happened and because of this, the de King became happy. What do you guys think about this?"


    " I think most likely the problem that the headquarters fishing all this time already solved and because of this, the de King looked happy like this."


    " I also think the same thing but I am very curious to know what kind of problem the headquarters is facing all the time. Unfortunately, it looks like the president still did not interfere with those matters and because of this, it is also taking all the elders this much time to solve the problem.


    Actually to tell you the truth I am also very curious to know what kind of trouble the headquarters faced all the time that made the de King serious like this."


    " Most likely, something could happen in the core area of the danger zone. But I am not sure as you even know that the president is not able to go to the core area. Or the second possibility is they find a strong Dungeon and already send their Warrior inside of that Dungeon."


    Like this most of the royal family or even those Warriors who already suspect something happened to the headquarters thinking like this. Even the human King alongside his friends thinks like this but they also notice the happy mood The de King suddenly has while he talks on his phone. So, for a moment, everyone thinks the problem is already over.


    The de King on the other hand already came to the warrior association and using the spiritual energy he already activated the teleportation array. To go to the headquarters he naturally needed to use a huge amount of spiritual energy to travel that much distance from the human Kingdom.


    But naturally, as you can see he did not worry about that, and after using his spiritual energy he directly came inside of the headquarters. After wasting no time he already begins to go toward the meeting room where every elder and the president along with his friends have already started their meeting.


    __________________________


    "Hion is an ancient symbol that has already been forbidden by us and because of this, you cannot see any kind of history rted to that symbol. Most likely Ortho already told all of you about this symbol and what could be the use of that symbol.


    But those are just the basic thing about that technique as you could do much more. When you create that symbol in anyone that person will be under your control and if you want to kill that person you can kill him with just your thoughts.


    You don''t even have to do anything and just think about that while that person will immediately die. At the same time, that symbol will also already connect itself with your spiritual energy and will have full control over your spiritual energy and your mind.


    Every one of those people who will get affected by the symbol naturally will not realize anything. So it will be aplete failure if anyone tries to wake up that person forcefully if you are unable to destroy that symbol from the body of that person.


    Fortunately because of my master¡­"

 Chapter 616 616 - The only way to save them

    Chapter 616  616 - The only way to save them


    "Fortunately because of my master, I was able to know about that Hion symbol. Most probably you have already forgotten about that person but your president could remember him as the best person who already learned about most of the array and symbols.


    At that time he already showed me what kind of use there is of the Hion symbol. Naturally, we did not experiment with that on any Warrior or any normal person. We just used that on a monster and I was really surprised at that time as the monster just died the moment my master thought about that.


    Not just only the body of that Monster but you can say at that time after putting that symbol into that Monster my master could easily control the whole spiritual system present in the body of that monster. At the same time, he also told me,pared to any of the monsters, if anyone tried to put that symbol on any Warrior or any living being like us then it would be much more dangerous than that.


    At your will, you can reduce the spiritual power of that person or you can suddenly increase the spiritual power of that person. Naturally, it will also reduce the lifespan of the person as using the lifespan of that person you will be doing all of these things.


    So, this makes me very surprised that some forbidden symbols like this once again appear and this time those Abyss humans are able to know about this and they already used it on our people who turned into dark humans.


    After hearing the report I can tell that those Abyss humans are not just controlling the spiritual energy of that person but at the same time they are trying to reduce all the pure spiritual energy from those people and at the same time the dark spiritual energy willpletely control that person.


    All of these things naturally require some kind of energy and it uses the lifespan of that person and because of this, those people will not be able to live for that long. Now there will be good news and there will be bad news.


    The good news is that I am also good at destroying that symbol so I would probably be able to deactivate all those symbols from those dark humans and also be able to erase them from their bodies.


    But the bad news is that even after doing that those people will not turn normal as most of their spiritual energy has already been absorbed or erased by those Abyss humans, and their whole body has already been filled with dark spiritual energy.


    Currently, the Hion symbol not only controls all of these but at the same time it also bnces all those powers and because of this, none of those dark humans feel anything.


    The moment we will erase those symbols from their body they willpletely get back their feelings and it will be very painful for everyone. I just don''t know how many of them will be able to survive that.


    First of all, they will go through this kind of torture because of the dark spiritual energy that already trying to control their whole body and because of the side effect of the dark spiritual energy their whole body is already in a mess.


    The only way to solve all these is to extract all kinds of spiritual energy from their body as quickly as we can. But unfortunately, even for me, that is possible because even if we wanted to do that but because of therge number of those people we would only be able to do that for a few of them before they could get affected by the side effects.


    So because of this, I am not sure how many of them will survive after I erase all those Hion symbols."


    The friend of the president said all of these and naturally everyone present in that meeting room, even the President who was present in the meeting room already had a serious expression on his face.


    After hearing the good news that his friend would be able to erase those kinds of symbols from those dark humans and free those dark humans from the control of those abyss humans, naturally, even the president became happy. But after hearing the next thing, even the president doesn''t know what to say.


    First of all, everyone thought just after destroying that symbol from those dark humans they would be able to save those dark humans and turn them back into normal Warriors. But it looks like that isn''t possible and also they won''t be able to save every one of them at once.


    "Dammit!!! I just really wanted to kill all those abyss humans. Why did they always try to attack us and try to harm us all the time? This time they just already crossed the limit after capturing our people and also turning them into mindless dark humans.


    Not only that, even though we have a way to destroy all those symbols from their body, we do not have a way to save all of them. Their survival will depend on their willpower and we won''t be able to do anything even if we try to do our best.


    This kind of thing makes me really useless and even as a president of the warrior association I feel so powerless that I cannot even save my people."


    Naturally, the president is very angry right now as even though he has the way to destroy all those symbols from the bodies of those humans even using his full power he won''t be able to extract all that spiritual energy from the bodies of those dark humans.


    "Andrew I know It also makes me angry that those people will do something like this with our people and we are unable to do anything. But getting angry won''t help us in this kind of situation.


    We need to act quickly because if I am not wrong then most probably every one of those dark humans is already in theirst breath and only a little of their spiritual energy is present in their body right now.


    The moment every bit of their true spiritual energy gets erased by the dark spiritual energy it will bepletely over for us as even if we try to destroy that symbol and try to extract the dark spiritual energy from their body, we won''t be able to save them."


    The friend of the president told him. Andrew Michael or you can say the president of the Warrior Association also knows about these.


    " Sigh, I know Philips. We needed to act quickly before we did not have any way to save those. But I am telling you the moment I am able to find the mastermind and all of these I will show him the real paint and torture that person."


    And you told his friend Philips all of this and after that, he calmed down. First of all, getting angry won''t help him in this kind of situation. So he needs to stay clear-headed to take action.


    "As every one of you already here, what is the real danger that those dark humans or you can say our own Warriors are facing right now? They are in theirst breath and if we dy any longer we won''t be able to save them.


    Most likely those Abyss humans wanted to use every one of them to destroy the Viet kingdom by exploding them even if we killed those dark humans. If I am not wrong then even if we kill them those Abyss humans who put the symbol on those Warriors will be able to control the spiritual energy.


    So, currently, we have important things to do and that is to bring every one of those dark humans to a safe ce where Philips will one by one erase the Hion symbol. Me and all of you will be busy extracting the spiritual energy from their body as quickly as we can.


    This is only the way to save those people right now so we need to act very quickly. I know that extracting spiritual energy from anyone''s body is much harder but other than doing that we did not have any other way to save them.


    But before that, as you already know not every one of you we level came to the Viet kingdom. Because of this only 7 of you wille with me in the Viet kingdom while the others will stay inside of the headquarters as they need to stay here to maintain the order.


    Because those Abyss humans can also use this chance to attack the headquarters naturally we cannot leave the headquarters at once. Also de King you need to go back to the human Kingdom because we cannot make every one of those royal families or those other Warriors suspicious about our moves.


    I know that you want to help in this situation but at the same time, you need to stay in the human Kingdom. As you know we did not inform any of those Warriors not to make them warriors about the real situation¡­ "

 Chapter 617 617 - More monsters

    Chapter 617  617 - More monsters


    "I also know that president but I wanted to help those dark humans to recover them. It is unimaginable for me to think how much they have suffered and also they are losing their life. While those Abyss humans just use them as their puppet.


    This makes me very angry and if it is possible then I really want to open the gate between our world and the Abyss world. I wanted to kill those people but it is just that we are unable to go to the Abyss world."


    The de King said that with a frustrated tone. Actually not only he but everyone present in the meeting room even you can say Andrew the president of the warrior association and Philips, the array master also angry at those Abyss humans.


    Those people just did not care about the lives of those warriors and turned them into puppets. The most Unimaginable thing is that they would never have known about this if those Warriors or you could say those dark humans had not suddenlye to the danger zone.


    Because of this, everyone present in the meeting room really wanted to kill all those masterminds who were behind all of this. It is just that day unable to open the gate between Terraria and the Abyss world. To open the gate they needed dark spiritual energy and unfortunately, they did not have the dark spiritual energy and because of this, they were unable to open the Gate.


    On the other hand, those Abyss humans use dark spiritual energy that can also help them connect with Terraria and because of this, they are able to travel to Terraria. Unfortunately, no Warrior present in Terraria currently has the power to prevent those Abyss humans.


    "Sigh, I also have the same motive as you but currently we have the more important thing and that is to save those Warriors. But at the same time as I told you, you need to stay in the human Kingdom. This is a very important matter and we cannot reveal it to anyone until we have found a way to help those warriors to return to normal.


    As you can guess not everybody will keep this secret among them and the moment it will spread around all the warriors they will immediately get terrified because of this. Nobody will expect when they will get kidnapped by those Abyss humans.


    Fortunately, all the warriors present in the Viet kingdom also did not know anything about this as they only knew that they were facing some dark humans. Because of this, I am also thinking that we should carry on these missions without telling those warriors. Because I also did not want to reveal these to them."


    " President I also think this is a good idea if we try to do this inside of the Viet kingdom, those Warrior from the Viet kingdom will get suspicious about this and if they are somehow able to know about this naturally there is a possibility that every other warrior will get to know about this by them."


    " Well don''t worry about that as doing these in the outer area of the danger zone would be safe. But really at the same time we need to stay alert so that we do not interfere while we will be extracting the spiritual energy from those dark humans."


    Andrew and all the elders of the Warrior Association right now discussing What to do after going to the Viet kingdom. First of all, they already decided that they would not carry out these missions inside of the kingdom as those Warriors from the Viet kingdom would naturally get to know about this and they did not want to risk anything.


    Fortunately, the outer area of the danger zone would be a safe ce to do this and they already decided what to do. So Andrew wasting no time already selects all the elders who will be going with him inside the danger zone alongside Philips while the remaining elders will stay inside the warrior association.


    "Oh¡­ I forgot to contact Sam. This boy is really a miracle child and because of him we can get to know about all of this. It is hard to believe that without his help most likely we still won''t be able to get to know about this and also we will not have any guesses about the motive of those Abyss humans."


    Andrew says that. Not only him but everyone in the Warrior Association is very grateful to Sam. First of all, every one of them also knows that Sam has a pretty weird technique that makes himpletely invisible to anyone. Even using their full power they won''t be able to find him.


    Also in this 6 month same used his techniques to do many things for the warrior association that also said life of many Warriors. Naturally, only some of those missions were known by some warriors but those Warriors did not know the full details about all those missions.


    Because of this everybody from the warrior association also trusts Sam and they also know that he is the person who will not reveal something like this if they do not tell him to do that.


    The de King, wasting no time, contacted Sam and asked him about the situation. He already begins to hear the details that Sam is telling him but the thing is that the situation isn''t looking good. Because he put the phone on the loudspeaker everybody present in the meeting room can also hear that.


    "Actually more energy fluctuation appeared in the danger zone and every time I went toward those ces I could see more Monsters that had the same weird symbol appearing in those ces.


    This time I naturally did not approach them as I wanted to inform all of you before approaching them. Also, I am really worried about the destruction rate if the mastermind behind all of these also decided to explode those Monsters that just appear.


    One thing I can tell you is that if something like that happened then every one of those dark humans would also get killed by the explosion. So because of the risk, I did not approach those Monsters right now."


    The de King naturally has a serious face and he already looked at the president and waited for him to say anything.


    "Sam¡­ good thing you did that. I am guessing that the mastermind is also waiting to do something like this if he somehow feels that one of the monsters got Attacked by someone. So naturally right now you needed to observe those Monsters.


    Also, the good news is that my friend has already arrived in the danger zone and we finally have a way to save those dark humans. Me and seven elders will go to the danger zone using our teleportation array. We will immediately start our project with those dark humans.


    First of all my friend already confirmed to me that we were able to break those Hion symbols from those dark humans but the thing is that me and all the elders will be busy extracting all the spiritual energy from those dark humans.


    Naturally, it will take us much time to extract the spiritual energy. It isn''t a fast process and as we did not have control over their full spiritual energy we also won''t be able to do that quickly.


    Until then if something like the previous explosion appeared naturally the life of those dark humans could be in danger. With this, we will not have any way to protect those Warriors. So until then, you should just observe those dark humans and those Monsters."


    Andrew quickly told all of these to Sam as he could tell some were most likely pretty confused at this moment and also feeling very helpless. First of all, Sam also knows that those dark humans were normal Warriors a few days ago.


    So naturally he also wanted to save every one of them and because of this, this time he did not recklessly attack those Monsters. Good thing he did not attack them as the result would make him much more guilty than this.


    "Okay.."


    Sam, after hearing the word of the president, rxes a little and both of them hang up the phone. President already told all those seven elders and Philips to go with the teleportation array. Naturally, they said the location to the danger zone, and using their spiritual energy they already activated the teleportation array.


    Normally if any Warrior uses the teleportation array then they would be able to appear in that ce where a second teleportation array is present, but in the headquarters of the warrior association, a different teleportation is also present that was also created by Philips. Using that they could appear anywhere until they have spiritual energy present in their body.


    Going to random ces like this naturally costs much more spiritual energy but nobody cares about that. One by one the president and all the other elders of the Warrior Association already disappear from that ce. The de King also just sighed and then used the different teleportation array to go back to the human Kingdom.


    Even though he is pretty what he is right now at the same time he is rxed a little as the President''s personality is taking action. He has full confidence in the president so because of this, he also simply epts the suggestion of the president.

 Chapter 618 618 - Unconscious Dark humans

    Chapter 618  618 - Unconscious Dark humans


    "de king, did something serious happen with the headquarters? By looking at you we can already tell you are very serious all this time and you did not even enjoy the fight between those youngsters. If you need we can also provide our help as helping the Warrior Association will be our pleasure."


    Sometimeter,


    The de King once again appears in the human Kingdom. But this time he did not directly go toward the battle stadium. He just stayed in the Warrior Association. But during that time all the royal family, like the human King and the other kings and queens, already came to the warrior association.


    Every one of them already suspected something happened with the headquarters and because of this, the de King looked serious. So naturally they also prepare themselves to help the Warrior Association using their full power.


    "Hmm¡­ you all did not have to worry about that as the president already took care of this matter. It is just as I also needed toe here to handle the situation of the danger zone. I am unable to participate there and this makes me worried.


    But I am also pretty sure as the President already taking care of all of these everything will be alright so none of you have to worry about that. Also don''t worry as if we need your help I will immediately contact all of you.


    Also, go back to the battle stadium as it could make those other Warriors suspicious. Naturally, all of you are most likely very curious about what kind of trouble we are facing right now. Actually, this is something rted to the Abyss humans, but previously as we did not want to travel to the president we just wanted to handle the situation ourselves.


    But in the end, the president decided to take care of all of this. Because he takes care of all of these I am pretty sure everything will be alright. Because of this, I also did not tell you previously."


    Naturally, the de King did not want to tell any of them about the real situation but at the same time if at this time he did not tell them some truth then naturally they would be more suspicious about the situation and suddenly try to find out what is happening using their method.


    Because of this, he decided to reveal some truth about the whole situation and naturally every one of those Warriors already epted the truth or you can say half the truth.


    "Don''t worry about that de King. Just tell us when you need your help. Those Abyss humans never learn their lessons. Most likely because most of the warriors of the warrior association stayed inside of the human Kingdom those people decided to create trouble.


    But unfortunately, the president is already taking care of all of these, and with that, I am pretty sure everything will be alright."


    The human kingside that and alongside with him every one present there also agree with that. As everyone expected it is rted to those Abyss humans. But fortunately, the president is already taking care of all of this and they also have full confidence in the president of the Warrior Association.


    The president is also a legend of the Terraria who previously battled with the demon king. Now as he is taking care of all of this matter they are pretty sure everything will be alright.


    ________________________


    Andrew and the others alreadye to the dangerous zone using the teleportation array and they already can feel the huge energy fluctuation present in the danger zone right now. Even if those dark humans and those Monsters did not use any kind of techniques because of their dark spiritual energy spiritual fluctuation already created from them.


    Andrew and the others naturally wasting no time already located the location of those dark humans as they already decided what to do with them. Before anything, they will capture every one of those dark humans but naturally, they will not do anything after that.


    They did not want to alert the mastermind who could explode every one of those dark humans just with their thoughts. Because of this, Andrew decided to go toward that ce alongside 3 more elders. They will be capturing all those dark humans while the remaining elders are already preparing themselves to start the procedure to extract spiritual energy from the bodies of those dark humans.


    Sam is still present in the inner area of the dangerous zone naturally since those big auras. He instantly bes your who could be those people and using the teleportation technique naturally he appears beside the elders who are also preparing themselves to capture those Dark humans.


    Even though those elders and you were not able to find Sam, they already know that someone already came beside them as they feel the energy fluctuation. Naturally, the president instantly signals Sam using his hand that he needs to stay there while he and the other elders take care of those dark humans.


    Sam did not do anything after getting the signal and just stayed in that ce. But he can already see the president and the other elders already using their techniques and that puts all those dark humans into an unconscious state.


    Everything happens so suddenly that even he does not realize what type of technique they have used. But after that, he can also see the president and those three elders already begin to control the body of those dark humans and instantly they begin to fly in the right direction.


    The bodies of those dark humans also begin to fly with them and go with them in that direction. Sam naturally did not follow them as he could easily go there by using the teleportation technique. Also, he already can feel more elders present in the direction so wasting no time he already uses the teleportation technique to appear there.


    After appearing in that ce he also already deactivated his technique and because of this, all the elders who got alert for a second got to rx. After that, they just smile at him and then once again begin to prepare themselves to extract The Spiritual energy the moment Philips breaks the Hion symbol.


    At this time Sam can already see beside those elders of the warrior association who are wearing some kind of cloth that also has the emblem of the warrior association, a pretty tall person with white hair and a white beard present there. He recognizes that person as he also met him previously during the time when the Warrior Association was working on the teleportation array.


    Philips, who already noticed him, just smiled at him and then he was already preparing himself to erase the Hion symbol from the body of those dark humans. At this time you can see a pen-like thing in his hand and he already started channeling his spiritual energy into that pen.


    Sam even became very curious at this moment but he did not say anything and just sat down on the ground to see what was going to happen. Not long after that Andrew and the others already came back to that ce alongside those unconscious dark humans.


    They also already noticed the exam but did not say anything while putting the unconscious bodies of those dark humans on the ground one by one. Not long after that Andrew and the others also begin to prepare themselves to start the procedure to extract The Spiritual energy.


    Sam is naturally also really confused about this situation as he does not know how they will do that full stop but at the same time, he is thinking if he will be able to help them to increase the time of extraction of The Spiritual energy. As you know his origin spiritual and most likely able to do this thing much more quickly than them.


    At the same time, he did not want to reveal his full strength to anyone. But, he will help them as he also wants to save those Warriors who turned into dark humans like this. During that time Sam also felt quite guilty about killing the first dark human.


    Even though at that moment he did not know the truth and did not expect just trying to fight The Mind barrier inside the head of the dark human would kill him.


    Sam Once again went back to his since the moment he began to feel The Spiritual fluctuation that came out from the first dark human that was already in front of Philip. Philip at this time is already using his spiritual pen to draw the cancetion array on the forehead of that Dark human.


    In the next second, a strong spiritual fluctuation appeared in the dark human, and in the next again Sam could already see that the Hion symbol present in the forehead of the dark human had already been erased from that ce. But this is in the end as suddenly he can feel something different and most likely this is very bad for that dark human.


    "Ahhhhhhh!!!!!!!"


    Suddenly that dark human begins to scream like this and you can already see dark blood begin toe out from his mouth and eyes.

 Chapter 619 619 - Sam also helping

    Chapter 619  619 - Sam also helping


    "Ahhhhh!!!!"


    The moment the Hion symbol got released, that dark human began to scream and at the same time, ck color blood also began toe out from his mouth and eyes.


    At this time Andrew already begins to control The Spiritual energy of that person and begins to extract it from the body of that dark human. Before anything, he naturally begins to channel his spiritual energy into the body of that person and after that, he begins to control that spiritual energy to extract all the other spiritual energy present inside the body of that person.


    Like this, he is able to extract all the other spiritual energy. Even The pure spiritual energy that normally any Warrior has in their body also begins to get extracted from the body of that person.


    This is naturally very painful as that person keeps screaming like this. During the time as you can see his whole body also began to bleed and blood already began toe out from his whole body.


    For a second all the elders or even Sam got scared because of these but fortunately, the president already told him to focus on their work and also this is helpful for that person as that ck blood gets out of the body of that person.


    First of all, not only The Spiritual system of that person but even his whole internal system like blood also gets corrupted by dark spiritual energy. So naturally before anything they needed to extract all that spiritual energy and at the same time they needed to extract that ck blood from the body of that person.


    This is very painful for anyone to experience but at the same time, Andrew or those elders did not have any other way to extract The Spiritual energy or the ck blood from the body of those dark humans.


    During that time Andrew also used his power to hold that person in the same ce. Naturally, because he is extracting The Spiritual energy from that person who already went berserker. This is the effect of the berserker spiritual energy and the dark spiritual and ji that is present inside of that person.


    Philips on the other hand already went in front of the next person and at the same time 1 elder already came forward toward that person. Philips did not waste a single second to release that person from that Hion symbol. Like the previous dark human, the same thing happened with that dark human and he also began to scream like this.


    But naturally, the elder also isn''t slow as he already begins to channel his spiritual energy as soon as he can into the body of that person and at the same time anybody could feel the spiritual energy thates out from the body of the dark human.


    ________________________


    Sometimeter,


    All the seven elders and Andrew are already busy extracting The Spiritual energy and all the abnormality present inside of the body of those dark humans. But at the same time, they can only focus on one dark human and because of this, the rest of the dark humans are still lying down on the ground.


    "Most likely I also need to participate in this as we did not have that much time before the mastermind will realize what is happening and after that naturally he will try to explode all the dark humans."


    Philip said that and naturally, he was just about to release the next person from the Hion symbol. At this time Sam who previously just observed the situation already came toward that person.


    "Huh? What are you doing Sam? If you try to extract Spiritual energy from that person like the rest of us then it could be much harder and could also be dangerous for you. You should stay back and let me handle the matter."


    Philip instantly warns Sam that it could be dangerous for him so he should stay back and let him handle the matter.


    "Old man, don''t worry about me. Also just trust me as I could also handle the matter. You just needed to release the Hion symbol. I will take care of the rest of the matter."


    Sam says that to Phillip. Naturally, he did not say anything about his origin spiritual energy as he wanted to keep that secret but at the same time, he could also tell if he did not decide to interfere then this matter could turn more dangerous and the rest of the dark humans will get just killed by the mastermind the movement they will realize what is happening with those dark humans.


    Philip at first did not say anything and just continued to stare at him. Most likely he was trying to understand the motive of Sam but in the end, he just decided to trust him and without wasting a single second he began to release the person from the Hion symbol.


    The moment he did that the dark human naturally got all the emotion back and at the same time he already began to scream. Not only that he already began to go into berserker. Sam on the other hand naturally knew he needed to do something as quickly as he could.


    Wasting no time he already put his hand on the forehead of that person and after that already began to channel the origin spiritual energy into the body of that person. His spiritual energy already begins to enter the body of that person and after that, he already focuses on feeling The Spiritual energy that is present inside of that person.


    He already feels those three spiritual energies that begin to react the moment the spiritual energy enters the body of that person. Naturally, as the origin spiritual energy is the spiritual energy that has all kinds of attributes so every kind of spiritual energy will react with it.


    Philip at this time begins to look at Sam and the dark human. Even though he has confidence in Sam, at the same time he knows this could be a dangerous situation for him. So the moment he feels that Sam already begins to face the danger he will interfere.


    But unexpectedly even after waiting 1 minute, he did not get any kind of reaction from Sam. On the other hand, something unexpected happened and the spiritual energy from the body of their dark human already began toe out of his body.


    But that is not the case. The most surprising thing was that all those three spiritual energies began toe out from the body of that person much faster than in those other Dark humans who also already began to experience the same situation.


    All of this happens because of the origin spiritual energy and at this moment the origin spiritual energy can already control all those three spiritual energies present inside of the dark human pretty easily. Sam also already feels that. So wasting no time he naturally begins to control those three spiritual energies to get out the body of that person.


    For Philip, this is apletely unexpected matter and he still cannot believe that Sam is doing that much faster than Andrew and the other elders of the warrior association.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry about him as I already know he is aplete mystery that we are still unable to understand now. But every time he stacks in any matter you just need to believe him that he will be able to handle that. Now focus on those other dark humans as we need topletely free them from this kind of healing as quickly as we can."


    Andrew, who already extracted All The Spiritual energy and all the dark blood from the body of that dark human and already used a healing potion on that person, can now focus on the other dark humans.


    Philip finally came back to his senses and wasting no time he already focused on the next dark human. Not long after that one by one those elders also already finished their work and they also used the healing potions on those dark humans to help them.


    At this moment if you look at all those Dark humans or you can say those Warriors who are already out of spiritual energy, then you will see every one of them already be unconscious. But at the same time, everyone has already begun to recover from those injuries that appear on their body during the time when the president and all the elders of the warrior association extract Spiritual energy from their bodies.


    The healing potion naturally will help them to recover from their injuries but at the same time, it will help them to recover their lost blood. This is one of the best things about healing potions. If you are wondering why then it is because even if they are able to save those Warriors those Warriors still could die because of the blood loss.

 Chapter 620 620 - Difficult situation

    <h4>Chapter 620 Chapter 620 - Difficult situation</h4>


    Andrew once again begins to extract The Spiritual energy of the next dark human who already got his freedom from the Hion symbol. Andrew uses his full spiritual control to extract The Spiritual energy from that person as quickly as he can. Once again after sending his spiritual energy inside the body of that person, he can already feel those three spiritual energies present inside the body of that person.


    Before anything you should know that the moment he sends spiritual energy inside the body of the person The Spiritual energy or you can say that true spiritual energy of the person already begins to react with that.


    Andrew also uses true spiritual energy and because of this the true spiritual energy present inside the body of the person also reacted with thatpared to the dark spiritual energy or the berserker spiritual energy, you can say extracting the true spiritual energy became much easier for Andrew or those other elders who also using their true spiritual energy.


    But nobody is extracting the true spiritual energy of those Warriors at first because if they try to do that then the dark spiritual energy and the berserker spiritual energy naturally begin to harm the body of those people.


    Also, Philips already told them both of these spiritual energies could also increase the reduction of the lifespan of those Warriors. Because of this, focusing on the dark spiritual energy and the berserker spiritual energy at first.


    One by one every elder also already finished extracting The Spiritual energy of that first group of people and already began to extract spiritual energy from the next group of people. At this time Philip is the one who became more surprisedpared to any of them.


    Becausepared to anyone, even Andrew, you can say the speed of Sam is much faster. While every elder took almost 3 minutes to 5 minutes, Andrew took 2 minutes, and Sam only took 1 minute to extract all three spiritual energies from the bodies of those Warriors whoy down on the ground.


    Naturally, Andrew and the elders did not care about that as it also helped them. Philip is really surprised by realizing that fact but at the same time, he is also happy that with Sam''s help, they are already able to recover 6 of those dark humans and it looks like Sam also did not lose that much stamina or have a mental headache after doing all of this.


    ______________________


    Sometimeter,


    When they almost recover 80% of the people and only 20% of people who still have the Hion symbol, something unexpected happens. Suddenly those remaining people begin to cough blood even though they are unconscious. Not only do they start coughing blood but at the same time, you can see blood already startinging out from their eyes and even from their bodies.


    "Oh no¡­ the mastermind already realized something happened with all the dark humans and most likely he is already using his technique to kill all the dark humans that are still under his control. Andrew, we needed to do something so that all of them would die¡­"


    Instantly, Philip realized the whole situation and he quickly exined that to Andrew. Naturally the president of the warrior association who was already busy extracting The Spiritual energy also suddenly stopped and began to observe the whole situation with those remaining that were humans.


    He can feel the strong spiritual fluctuation thates out from the bodies of those dark humans. Instantly he became very serious because the situation already became much more dangerous than he expected and most likely the mastermind already decided to explode all those remaining dark humans who were still under his control.


    "Philip!!!! Quickly do something or every one of the dark humans will die and even the kingdom will receive huge damage because of that."


    Naturally, Andrew told him to do something at this moment.


    "Shit¡­ right now the only thing I can do is to release every one of those remaining dark humans from the Hion symbol. This is the only way to stop the explosion but at the same time, it will put everyone in their life at risk as we won''t be able to extract All The Spiritual energy from their body at once. I don''t know how many of them will die."


    "Do it. We need to stop the explosion. Also, everyone will increase the number of people. At once all of us will try to extract spiritual energy from 5 people. This is the only thing we can do."


    Naturally, Andrew knows the whole situation and he also knows that even if they tried their hardest they won''t be able to save everyone. But in this dangerous situation, he needed to stay calm.


    Philip at this time instantly uses his domain to cover the area of those remaining dark humans lying down on the ground. After that, he uses his full power and his remaining spiritual energy to increase the power of his technique.


    Every one of those dark humans who still did not get freedom from the Hion symbol already began to shine brightly after getting inside the domain of Phillip. One by one they get freedom from the Hion symbol. But at the next moment, you can see every one of those dark humans begin to scream in pain.


    Philip is already panting heavily. But still, he gathered his strength to tell everyone that he already finished his work and would try to help them after recovering some of his spiritual energy. Andrew and the other elders already increase the number of people and at once they try to extract spiritual energy from at least five people.


    But this process became much slower and because of this you can see those dark humans or those Warriors begin to receive many injuries and begin to lose much of their blood. Right now Andrew and the others are just hoping they are able to save everyone.


    At this time suddenly every one of them also realizes something happening behind them and when they try to observe that direction they see at this moment Sam who is extracting Spiritual energy from the bodies of those dark humans also increasing the number.


    But the number isn''t just 5 or 6. At this time you can see almost 15 people were getting treated by Sam. Now he is using the maximum limit of spiritual control and his spiritual energy to extract spiritual energy much faster. Fortunately because of the origin spiritual energy he can already increase the number of those people to 10.


    Butpared to before this time he is also feeling the side effects. After almost recovering all those 10 people he could feel the mental exhaustion but he did not care about that and went to the next group of people and already started doing the same thing as the previous group of people.


    Sam at first naturally did not want to use his full power. Naturally, he did not want to reveal his full power in front of them but after he realized that if he did not use his full over then most likely except for them those Warriors who just recovered or even those Warriors who did not even recover would die.


    He could just let it be but naturally after that he would feel regret and it would destroy almost half of the kingdom so he decided to use his full power. Now he is crazily using his origin spiritual energy and sending it toward those dark humans who got released from the Hion symbol.


    The moment the origin spiritual energy enters the body of those Warriors naturally all that spiritual energy present inside the body of those Warriors already begins to react with the origin''s spiritual energy and using the spiritual control he controls all that spiritual energy toe out from the body of those people.


    Already he extracted All The Spiritual energy from at least 25 people but naturally, he could see those other Warriors who were still lying down on the ground just shouting as if they did not even have the strength to move what to do at this moment.


    ''Shit¡­ I need to speed up or everyone will just die. It would be good if I really had that domain skill and with that, I could easily help every one of them but fortunately, I am still unable to reach theary grade.''


    Sam for that but he already increases the amount of spiritual energy. You already reached the limit but you can say he wants to break that limit so that he could save as many people as he can at this moment.


    Philip on the other hand already recovered his 90% spiritual energy g but he did not care about anything and had already begun to extract Spiritual energy like Andrew and the others. Naturally, all of them present there already realize that Sam was doing most of the work as he already saved most of those people.


    But naturally, they also know Sam is just a human who will suffer from mental exhaustion. He does not have infinite spiritual energy so they are also breaking their limit and doing what they can to help as many people as they can.


    ________________________


    10 minutester,


    Right now you can see from the kingdom many Warriors already begin to go toward the direction of the danger zone where previously Andrew had taken all those Dark humans.


    Some time ago those Warriors were informed by the de King that they needed to go in that direction to help the President and all the other elders. The de King previously tried to contact the president but he was unable to contact anyone and naturally, this made him more worried.


    He is naturally going to use the teleportation array but before that, he already informs those warriors so that if something unexpected happens they could help the President and the other people present there.

 Chapter 621 621 - Sams situation

    Chapter 621  621 - Sam''s situation


    Sometimeter all the Warriors already reached the area and they already saw what happened. But the thing is that everyone became very confused at this time after seeing that the president and all the elders just now sitting down on the ground while it looked like they had trouble breathing.


    Not only that you can see blood also already starteding out from their mouth and nose. Philip also has the same situation except for Sam. Compared to any of them Sam was in a serious situation as he was already in an unconscious state but at the same time, you can see blood already starteding out from his mouth, nose, and even eyes.


    Naturally, the president and the others also lost their strength to move but they are still trying to go towards Sam to help him in this situation. Every one of them knows that Sam is not present in that ce so most likely they would not be able to save those Warriors. Actually, at thest minute, almost 50 Warriors are still left under the effect of dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy.


    During that time Andrew and the others naturally tried their base but even with that, they did not have the confidence to cure every one of them. But at this time Sam suddenly did something crazy. He quickly began to send his spiritual energy toward those 50 warriors.


    But the thing was that he already reached the limit and Andrew and the others could also till that. They try to stop him but he is already in the process of channeling his remaining spiritual energy toward those warriors, and naturally spiritual energy begins toe out from the body of those Warriors.


    Sometimeter, Andrew and the others also already finished healing those Warriors but they already lost the strength to move or do anything. First of all the problem was that nobody had any technique that could help them to extract spiritual energy like this from another Warrior.


    Naturally, they extract all that spiritual energy using their force and spiritual control. Because of this, they not only require mental energy but at the same time a huge amount of stamina also gets consumed by these and in the end, you can say they have this kind of situation.


    Fortunately, those Warriors who got a call from the de King already came there. Every one of those warriors who can use healing techniques already begins to walk toward Andrew and the others. Not only that, they already started using that technique on them.


    Naturally they also already begin to stabilize the condition of Sam as they can see he is in bad condition and if they did not help him at this moment then most likely he could die.


    Sometimeter, one more person also came to that ce and that is the de King. He also already came to that ce as he was previously unable to contact the president or any person. Fortunately, when he came to that ce he could see those Warriors already beginning to stabilize the condition of the president and everyone present there.


    Not only that, but you also already spotted those warriors who were still lying down on the ground unconsciously. But the thing is that all of those warriors have already recovered from the dark human state. Not only that he already began to observe the situation of the president and the others, and with that he became sure that every one of them most likely used their full power to heal those Warriors.


    ______________________________


    "Everyone be careful because the mastermind is already aware that we have already recovered those Warriors from the dark human state and most likely he will try to use his power to send Monsters or more dark humans who also have a simr situation near the kingdom and we will try to explode the whole Kingdom.


    Even though I don''t know the true n of those people, this could be a possibility and we need to be very careful about this. I just hope we do not encounter any dark human like this who was forcefully kidnapped by those people and then turned into this.


    Also, can you tell me the situation of Sam? It has been 2 days since he fell into aa and still did not wake up."


    Right now Andrew who already came back to the kingdom after solving those Monsters and the problem of those dark humans from the Viet kingdom told every elder that they needed to be careful because the mastermind behind all of these good ns was something more and that would be very dangerous for anyone.


    Also, it has been 2 days since Sam fell into aa and didn''t wake up. This naturally makes Andrew and the others very worried.


    Currently, in the room, you can also see an elder who is standing near the president and he is the best healer they have in their Warrior association. Actually, they also bring Sam into the warrior association as he needs a better ce to recover and naturally, they trust their healer very much and with that, they bring Sam into the warrior association.


    "Sir I already examined his body and I can tell after using the healing technique his full body has recovered from the injuries. But we cannot say the same for his mind. Previously as he exceeded his limit his brain most likely received damage from that and we are now observing him very carefully while trying to heal those damaged brain cells.


    It will take us more days to recover all of them but why he is still in thea is naturally a mystery for me. Usually, even in that state, he should wake up right now but it looks like something is preventing him from waking up."


    The healer said that and naturally after hearing that the president and every elder present in the room became very serious about the situation. First of all, Sam risked his life to save those dark humans but in the end, even though they were able to save those Warriors while turning them into normal warriors, Sam''s condition became like this.


    Even the president felt very helpless in this situation. He feels helpless that he is this weak and in a serious situation like this he cannot take full responsibility. Not just him but all the elders also have the same thoughts in their minds but at the same time, you can say all of them are very angry at those Abyss humans.


    At any condition, everyone wanted to find the mastermind behind all of these and wanted to kill those masterminds.


    ____________________________


    de King already came back to the human Kingdom 2 dayster and naturally, that created quite a disturbance among those Warriors who previously got to know that something happened to the headquarters. But at this time the de King already told them that the situation was already over and the president and the others were already able to take care of the whole situation.


    It is just that he did not exin to them about the situation. Not everyone needs to learn about the situation of Sam right now but you cannot say the same for the human king or the Oni king.


    Both Kings are very close to Sam and naturally, they are also present in the meeting room with de King. After hearing that the situation had already be normal, all of them rxed a little and most likely they could finally focus on the match that was going on.


    Sometimeter every one of those warriors already began to leave the meeting room. They can tell the de King is very tired so naturally they want to give him time to rest. But at this time something unexpected happened with the human king and the Oni King.


    Both of them instantly receive the message from the de King through telepathy. Actually, the de King told them to stay there while they waited for 2 more people. Naturally, that surprised both of them but without making any reaction, both of them decided to stay there.


    First of all, it looks like the de King did not want to inform those other Warriors and because of this, he told them using telepathy. Also don''t know why but both of them felt when de King told them to stay there, it was like his voice filled with pain.


    Well, both of them aren''t sure about that as this could be their imagination. But still, both of them stay there without asking any more questions as the de King decides to meditate for some time.


    ____________________


    Sometimeter, both of the Kings became very surprised when they looked at those Warriors who just came there. One is naturally the old human King while the other one is the old Oni king. Both of them came to the warrior association but at the same time, both of them have serious expressions on their faces.


    Just looking at the expression the human king and the Oni king can tell that something happened and that is very serious.

 Chapter 622 622 - Reveling the Truth

    Chapter 622  622 - Reveling the Truth


    The situation of Viet still hasn''t improved. Even though Andrew and all the elders already take care of those dark humans and every one of those warriors also in the Warrior association because even though they got their freedom they still did not recover from the hellish experience and Philip also told everyone that they need to observe the condition of those people for some time.


    On the other hand, everyone already expected something would happen because the mastermind already found out that all the dark humans had gotten their freedom.


    Naturally, something like this already happened. The number of those Monsters who also have the Hion symbol already increases in the danger zone and every one of those Monsters also suddenly became active as they slowly began toe toward the Viet kingdom.


    Fortunately, two elders from the Warrior Association are still present in that Kingdom. Because of these elders, the president and every other warrior can rx themselves. Both of the elders did not give any time for those monsters to explode and already killed every one of those Monsters.


    They instantly release their domain in the danger zone and the domain of every monster gets erased without doing anything or getting any chance to do anything. Naturally, after that, everyone thought the situation would be normal but it looked like the mastermind still did not want to rest as more Monsters began toe into the danger zone.


    This is a very serious matter but fortunately, Andrew got the report that no more dark humans appear in the danger zone. Not only in the Viet kingdom, but right now Andrew contacts every branch of the warrior association to instantly create a search team and search for this kind of movement inside of the danger zone.


    Nobody can give them a guarantee that something like this did not happen with other kingdoms. Because of this, the warrior association became more active, and even though the number of the Warriors isn''t that much most of them are present in the human Kingdom to take care of thepetition.


    Fortunately, the good news is that other than the Viet kingdom no Kingdom faces a situation like this so this is a great relief for everyone. On the other hand, if you are wondering about the situation of Sam and those other Warriors who are present in the medical unit of the warrior association then the elder who is also a healer naturally is in charge of the medical unit.


    All the time he present inside the medical unit to observe those people full stop first of all the good news is that every one of those Warriors who turned into dark humans already has a stable condition right nowpared to before, and also all the internal injuries getting heal by all the healer present in the medical unit.


    But unfortunately, Sam''s condition is much worsepared to any of them. Under the care of the elder and all the medical staff of the medical unit, all those injured brain cells showed signs of recovery but still, it is very slow. This is the thing that makes Andrew and the others very worried.


    _________________________


    Human Kingdom,


    Everyone in those royal families was alreadyte to the Warrior association after The de King told them that the situation of the headquarters was now normal as the President had already taken care of all the matters.


    But you cannot say that for the human king and the Oni king. As you know the de King told them to stay behind and also wait for two more people who will being to the warrior association.


    But when they got to see who those two people were, they became much more serious. The old Oni king and the old human being came to the warrior association with a serious face. Naturally, both of them have already been informed by the de King that he has some important things.


    He did not want to reveal that in front of everyone because of this they shoulde to the warrior association after winning all the royal family and all those other Warriors will leave the warrior association.


    "What happened to them? Why are you here? Did you also get contacted by the de King?"


    Oni King asked his father.


    "Hmm¡­ I got contacted by him. He told me that he has very bad news for us and also very important news."


    The old Oni king told that to his son and then focused on de king. The de King who always stays silent instantly raises his hand and signals all the other Warriors present in the room to go outside.


    Not only that instantly he also uses his observation to see if any other Warriors are present there or not. The human King at this time naturally seems to understand that the de King did not want anyone other than them to hear anything so he instantly created a sound barrier.


    "Thanks¡­ this will be helpful as I did not want to reveal this information to anyone recently."


    The de King quickly says thanks to the old human king. After that, he told everyone to calm down and finally began to say,


    "Most likely the human king and the Oni king already became very suspicious about this matter. So I will tell you everything from the start as it will help you to understand the seriousness of this matter and also I hope you did not reveal this information to anyone recently.


    A few days ago, some dark humans suddenly appeared in the Viet kingdom. This instantly made all the warriors of the Warrior Association alert. We created a team of Warriors to search around the danger zone for any type of clue about those Abyss humans.


    They are the one who finds those dark humans who suddenly appear in the danger zone and instantly that information is given to the headquarters and from the headquarters I also get to know about that.


    Naturally, the headquarters and I have already begun to take action and have already sent messages to most of our Warriors toe to the warrior association as quickly as they can. Both of you most likely already realized that suddenly a huge number of Warriors began to go toward the warrior association and also Sam went to the warrior association.


    I was the one who informed them and told them toe to the Warrior Association. After that, I give them the mission to go to that Kingdom and if something happens then they should be ready to fight back with those dark humans. On the other hand, I give Sam the mission to search for the motive of those dark humans as you know he is very good at hiding himself.


    The old human King contacted me at that time to get to know about the real matter and I already told him the real matter and also told him to keep that secret from everyone. If suddenly people get to know about that then it could create chaos.


    Most probably the human King did not inform anyone other than the old Oni king. So with that, both of them get to know about this. But I told him not to tell anyone and because of this both of you did not get to know anything about this matter."


    The de King says that while looking at the human king and the Oni king. You can see both the human king and the Oni King finally understand why they did not get any kind of information from their father.


    But at the same time, you can say they can be very serious the moment they get to hear that these matters are rted to dark humans. Both of them also know that the warrior association is now sending most of the Warriors to help thepetition as they want to increase the morality of all the Warriors.


    Even though the human Kingdom helped in this matter, still the warrior association handled most of the matters. So, right now there is a possibility that those Abyss humans get to know about this and they want to take advantage of this matter while attacking any Kingdom.


    "Mostly you also have the same thought as me as I also thought that those Abyss humans wanted to use this chance to attack a Kingdom and wanted to kill as many people as they could as they wanted to use those people as their sacrifice.


    Because of this, those Warriors previously went to the Viet kingdom as quickly as they could. Sam on the other hand already went to the danger zone to observe those dark humans but surprisingly he tells the information about those dark humans thatpared to the previous documents that we saw in the war, this time all those dark humans have something different about them.


    Not only that when he tried to use his mind control on one of the dark humans to get to know about the real Motive he finally found something very important¡­"

 Chapter 623 623 - Real situation

    Chapter 623  623 - Real situation


    "Using the mind control technique when he tries to control the mind of that dark human he will find that two strange spiritual energies are also present inside the body of that person.


    Naturally the first one is the dark spiritual energy and the second one is the mysterious spiritual energy that mostly you are very familiar with. I think everyone of you still remembers about the Red moon incident and everyone of you already knows about the red spiritual energy and when those Abyss humans try to capture those Monsters who got infected by the Red spiritual energy.


    Actually we found simr spiritual energy inside the body of those dark humans and we give it the name berserker spiritual energy. This spiritual energy naturally boosts your overall power but at the same time it also makes you more wild and also controls your mind.


    But after that something unexpected happens when he tries to attack the mind barrier that prevents him from reading the memory of that human to get to know about the real Motive.


    Actually, when he tries to attack the barrier he already feels The suppression, but he still decides to do that and in the end you can say that humans just died. But fortunately after that he discovered that those dark humans were just normal Warriors a few days ago.


    This is the most important thing that previously made me and all the other elders be angry at those Abyss humans. Because those Abyss humans right now are not only trying to attack Warriors for normal people of our Terraria to sacrifice them but at the same time they are also trying to kidnap them to experiment on them."


    de kings like this begin to tell everything that happened in these few days. The human king and the others who present in the room naturally just getting worried de King begin to reveal all this information.


    First of all it is hard to believe for everyone that those Abyss humans right now are trying to kidnap Warriors and trying to experiment on them. Naturally this is a very inexplicable matter and the moment they also get to hear about that they be angry at those Abyss humans.


    But none of them said anything and just silently heard all the details that the de king told them.


    "... So, the President called his friend Philip. Most likely the old human king and the old Oni king are also familiar with him as they are teammates. From him we get to know about the weird symbols that are present in the forehead of those dark humans and those Monsters.


    Those are called Hion symbols. A symbol that is very dangerous and because of this it is also forbidden in the whole Terraria. You won''t be able to find any kind of information about that symbol but somehow those Abyss humans are able to put those symbols in those dark humans and those monsters.


    Instantly, the mastermind and all of these get full control over the body of those dark humans or you can say warriors. It directly begins to absorb true spiritual energy from those dark humans but at the same time it also begins to affect the whole spiritual system of those Warriors.


    The mastermind behind all of these have full control over those dark humans and even with just their thought they could destroy or kill those dark humans. As you already know, those Monsters suddenly exploded and a huge explosion was created that almost reached the 50 km area.


    So it is very dangerous if suddenly those Monsters and those dark humans came close to the Viet kingdom, and exploded like this. At the same time me and all the other elders or you can even say the president  as we needed to save those Warriors.


    Because of this, you can say I was quite worried. But even though this is very risky the president and 7 elders decided to help those dark humans alongside sir Philip.


    But during this time the most important thing is to prevent those dark humans from exploding or dying. At the same time you know how hard it is for anyone to extract spiritual energy from other Warriors¡­ "


    Finally sometimeter he already finished exining everything and also told the human king and the others how they were able to save those dark humans and turn them into Warriors.


    But in the end he also told everyone the condition of Sam and the moment the human king and the others here about, they almost jumped from their ce. As they cannot believe that Sam is in this condition and even the best healer from the warrior association could give anyone the guarantee that he will wake up.


    ______________________


    "Sigh, I know your pain as I am also feeling the same thing right now. I never expected Sam to do something reckless and in the end to save all those dark humans from exploding it is added to over use of his power and suffer from this kind of serious injuries.


    He is now present in the warrior association and we are taking care of him. Now this is bing our number one priority to help him regain his consciousness. Fortunately I already got informed by the warrior association that some of his damaged brain cells have already begun to heal."


    de king said  thest part while you can feel the pain in his voice. Actually not only him but everyone present in that room became speechless and in the next second everyone began to feel the pain of Sam right now. Even though he held many other people and many other people know about Sam, butpared to any of them the rtion between them and Sam is much deeper, they instantly begin to worry about Sam.


    "Please take us to the warrior association. We wanted to see Sam."


    Everyone of them said that they wanted to go to the warrior association right now to see the condition of Sam. Naturally The de King did not say anything after hearing the request as he already expected that.


    Also he knows that the human Kingdom and the Oni Kingdom have a much deeper connection with Sam. So wasting no time he already agreed with the request but before that he also told everyone not to reveal this information as it will increase the trouble.


    The warrior association did not want to reveal the news right now as they were already nning to reveal the news after thepetition was over. The human king and the others naturally agree with him. So wasting no time he quickly told them to stand on the teleportation portal as he will activate the teleportation portal.


    __________________________


    On the other hand in the made any you can already see that this is the second day for those Epic grade Warriors to fight against each other. Naturally everyone wants to win the match and because of this, they put their hundred percent.


    But during the time many people who after finishing theirpetition already came back to the human Kingdom already know something different as they cannot see most of the powerful Warriors and also they cannot see any of the royal family.


    But fortunately before they could take any action they already saw those royal families and those Warriors already came back to their ce. During the time Emma who also already finished her match, alongside Livia and the others notice something very strange.


    First of all they already know that something most likely happened. Because of that, those royal families and everyone of those Warriors who have some kind of legendary achievement begin toe back to their ces in the battle arena. But at this time everyone notices that they cannot find the human king or the Oni king.


    Even both the human and Oni queen who were present in the VIP room alongside the Druid king and queen, became worried. The Druid king already told them about the basic information that they get from the de king but at the same time he is also very confused.


    If you try to observe the aura of human King and Oni king, then you will find them inside the warrior association. But suddenly something unexpected happened as both of them or you can say the aura aap both of them suddenly disappear.


    Most likely both of them use the teleportation array and because of this nobody can now feel the aura of both of them. Fortunately The de King is still present in the warrior association. So they can easily ask him about the matter.


    _________________________


    "What do you guys think happened that made most of the royal family and those strong Warriors to leave their ces like this? I am definitely sure that normally if this isn''t a serious matter then they will just continue to observe the match as it bes much more interesting."


    Maria had all this question in her mind and she also told her friends allo or this.

 Chapter 624 624 - Regain consciousness

    Chapter 624  624 - Regain consciousness


    Right now you can see the human king, and the Oni king alongside both the old human king and Oni king present in the warrior association, and everyone looking at Sam. While in the human Kingdom, an excited environment was created because of thepetition, you can say, a very sad and disappointed environment is created inside the warrior association.


    Even the president was present in that ce and had a helpless expression on his face. The medical report told him that even though all those damaged brain cells are healing, the recovery rate isn''t as fast as it is like his damaged brain cells somehow rejecting the healing ray.


    The elder told the president that most likely this is due to those damaged brain cells also having dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy present and most likely because of this it is also rejecting the healing technique from him.


    All of them have helpless expressions as they cannot help Sam in the tough situation even though that person did so much thinking for the whole Terraria world while protecting and gathering information about those Abyss humans.


    If possible everyone wants to use their full part to help him but even with that, you cannot guarantee that it will help to recover. Right now they can only just pray that somehow all those damaged brain cells heal and Sam regains his consciousness.


    __________________________


    "I know all of you wanted to go to the Viet kingdom or wanted to search for the mastermind behind all of this. But you cannot do that right now as you need to present in the human Kingdom.


    Even though this is a very sad and helpless moment for all of us, we need to just trust in Sam. Also, he did not want to reveal this news to everyone and because of this all the time he did not reveal any kind of information about this.


    I hope all of you also understand the fact that if you did not go back to the human Kingdom then other Warriors could get suspicious and somehow they get to know about all of this news.


    But don''t worry about that as me and my teammates are already searching for the mastermind. First of all, I can say that the mastermind isn''t present inside the Abyss world. Even though they could open the portal between our world and the Abyss world. But if they just stay inside the Abyss world, then they won''t be able to control anybody even if that Warrior or those Monsters have the Hion symbol.


    So most likely the mastermind who can control all of those dark humans or those Monsters present in Terraria right now and we are already trying to search for that person. My friend Philip is also helping me in this matter as he already told me that the mastermind is most likely not far away from the Viet kingdom.


    He could be hiding inside the danger zone or some other ce. You can say even though after cing the Hion symbol they have full control over anybody but at the same time that symbol also has a limit and if the mastermind already went outside of the limit then they would not have any control over those Monsters or any Warriors who have that kind of symbol.


    So don''t worry as I am already using my full power to search for any clue rted to the mastermind. At the same time, both of you and the two of you also need to go back to your kingdom. After going back even though you need to present in thepetition at the same time you need to be aware of the danger zone and if it is possible then you can also create a team who will be searching and observing the danger zone right now.


    Warriors from the Warrior Association will try to cover as much as area they can right now so if at any moment something like this incident urs in different kingdoms we will get to know about this immediately."


    Andrew exins all of these to the human king and the Oni king. Naturally, he also told that to both the old human king and the Oni king. Right now if none of them win back to their Kingdom then this could make the situation more difficult and nobody wants something like that to happen.


    "Sigh¡­ I understand sir. But this makes me very helpless that we cannot even protect a child who is doing this much for us. He did not have to do something like this that could risk his life but still, he is doing all of this while we are just sitting inside the human Kingdom and enjoying thepetition.


    This makes me very helpless. But I also understand your exnation. We will be going back to the human Kingdom before I have a request. If any of you get nothing about anything rted to the mastermind please inform us and also if the Viet kingdom needs any help, do inform us."


    The Oni king said that. Naturally, just by hearing his done, you can say he is feeling very angry but at the same time, he ispletely helpless in this situation to help Sam.


    ________________________________


    "Sir, suddenly an unexpected thing happened as a few minutes ago many Monsters who have those Hion symbols present on their forehead appeared near the Viet kingdom.


    Both of the elders are already taking care of all those Monsters as quickly as they can but it looks like the mastermind of Who is behind all of these wants to strike back while exploding all those Monsters right now.


    Both of the elders already evacuated the area that could be in the attack range of the Monsters. But both of the elders also said that most likely the mastermind is near the Viet kingdom. We are already trying our best to find out about that mastermind but unfortunately, we are unable to get any clue about this."


    " Hmmm¡­ I understand. Be safe at this moment and let both the elders handle all these monsters. At the same time do increase the security of the Kingdom and also if it is possible try to observe every citizen that is now present inside the kingdom. Me and my teammates will be present there so you don''t have to worry."


    After saying that Andrew hung up the call. After that he already informed all the elders about this and one second five of them decided to go back to the Viet kingdom. First of all, even though those Monsters did not pose any kind of trade to those elders but still guaranteed that those abyss humans did not have any kind of n.


    ________________________


    "Sister Emma, what do you think? Don''t know why but it looks like something really bad happened and because of this Father also looks like this.


    I never see him like this and this makes me worry about his condition. Did something happen to my father while we were participating in thepetition?"


    Lovia asks all of these questions to who is now standing beside her while both of them observe the situation of the Oni king. Right now when they observe the Oni king, they can be sure about one thing. Something really happened and that also makes the human being and the Oni king be like this.


    Unfortunately, nobody has revealed all the important news from the Warrior Association. They are trying their best to maintain their calm State. As the mastermind behind all of these already present in the Terraria.


    _____________________________


    "Huh¡­ where am I right now? I don''t think I am familiar with this surrounding area."


    Right now inside of the warrior association suddenly all those dark humans or you can say those Warriors who previously were affected by those abyss humans, one by one already begin to regain their consciousness.


    Even though everyone has already lost so much of their life span, it is very difficult for anybody to recover the lives of those people who have already lost that. Fortunately, Philip also presents there as he uses a symbol that will be helping those Warriors to get half of the life span that they lost. And right now every one of them begins to wake up one by one and all of them are already confused by the surrounding area.


    At first, everything was okay and all the Warriors of the Warrior Association had already begun to take care of those people. But then suddenly one of them began to scream and after that, those other Warriors also began to scream like the previous one.


    Right now every one of those warriors begins to tremble. It is like everyone is afraid of something. Fortunately, all the Warriors who were already present inside of that room began to use their healing techniques that begin to help those warriors to calm down.


    On the other hand, this is a good news to every warriors who all this time very worried about those warriors who finally able to be normal.

 Chapter 625 625 - Reverse Hion symbol

    Chapter 625  625 - Reverse Hion symbol


    "Can you tell us what you remember ?"


    "Sir, I didn''t know that previously I was present inside of the danger zone and with my team doing my missions. We were already pretty close topleting the mission but suddenly something unexpected happened and I lost consciousness.


    After that, if I am not wrong then I woke up for a minute and at that time I saw a dark ce and in the dark ce, I was able to see some lights and also saw some people. If I am not wrong then I am sure that those were the Abyss humans.


    Even though all of them look like humans, I clearly can feel the aura of those people that belong to those abyss humans. I wanted to use my power as I felt restricted, but before I could do anything I suddenly began to feel pain in my whole body.


    It was like my whole body was burning at that moment and not only that but at the same time I could feel that the burning sensation just kept increasing and increasing. I was fully screaming at the time but at the same time because of the payment, I was unable to be unconscious.


    During that time if I am not wrong then I remember that one of them suddenly approached me and after that, I also noticed a strange thing present in his hand. He approaches his hand with that strange thing toward my forehead. After that, Ipletely lost my consciousness and did not remember anything."


    One of the warriors who just woke up and was finally able to calm down began to tell the elders what thest thing he remembered was. Not only him but every one of those Warriors who finally came back to normal also told the same thing but not every one of them was able to see those Abyss humans.


    Fortunately, because some of them have sharp memories, they are able to remember the faces of those people who were present in that dark room during the time when those abyss humans most likely put on the Hion symbol.


    This is a very helpful clue for the elders as they already begin to see the clear picture of those Abyss humans. Naturally, even with that the inability to get the full picture as those Warriors during the time were fully screaming in pain.


    ________________________________


    "Sir, we have bad news. It looks like the mastermind behind all of these wants to destroy the whole Kingdom alongside all the elders and all the Warriors present in that Kingdom right now. I already got the report that a huge number of Monsters appear and every one of those Monsters is approaching the kingdom.


    Not only that by the spiritual fluctuation, it looks like those Monsters ready to explode anytime. Fortunately, none of the Monsters reached the range of the attack of our elders and because of this, until now no explosion appears in that ce.


    But we cannot give the guarantee that from only one direction those Monsters will appear and our two elders will be able to handle those Monsters alone."


    " Don''t worry about me as president and all the elders already going to the kingdom to help everyone. Also, our President and Sir Philip have a way to find the culprit Who is behind all of this.


    Just all of you stay strong at this moment and also be careful. Anyhow indeed to protect all the citizens of the kingdom and also told the remaining Warriors of that Kingdom to stay inside of the kingdom right now. Don''t tell them the truth about the whole incident and just tell him that suddenly the Monsters are getting wild and because of this something like that is happening."


    Currently, inside the Warrior Association, you can see one of the elders talking with a warrior from the Viet kingdom. That Warrior gives him the current news and by just hearing the voice you can tell that person is scared.


    Fortunately, after hearing that the president was taking care of this matter, the Warriors finally rxed a little and he also understood that right now all the Warriors from the Warrior Association needed to calm down all the citizens and the Warriors from the Viet kingdom.


    On the other hand,


    Except for both of the elders, nobody knew that the president and all the other seven elders had alreadye to the Viet kingdom. Andrew and Philip naturally have full confidence in those 7 elders. 9 of them will be able to handle all those Monsters while both of them will try to search for the mastermind.


    Some time ago, Philip suddenly told Andrew,


    "Andrew, suddenly I remember a thing that my teacher told me previously. Unfortunately, I never tried that before so I also forgot about this. If I am not wrong then we can reverse the Hion symbol.


    Naturally, this is a 10yer symbol that is a veryplicated thing and to reverse that symbol I needed to create all 10yers but thestyer needed to be modified by me so that it could give me the location of the mastermind.


    Unfortunately, it will take me more than 1 hour to create thatstyer of the symbol as it is very difficult to modify. So during that time we also need it to be present in the kingdom higher, most likely the mastermind could be near. Only then I would be able to tell if the reverse Hion symbol was working or not."


    Because of these both Andrew and Philip will not be participating in handling those Monsters. But at the same time, they have full confidence in the elders.


    Right now both of them are already working on the reverse symbol and you can say that both of them needed to contribute in that process. To reverse the Hion symbol, you can say Philip needed a huge amount of spiritual energy, and even he did not have full confidence that he would be able to create that on his own.


    Phillip Steel remembers the warning that his teacher gave him while teaching about the Hion symbol. He told Phillip that to create the Hion symbol even for a legendary grade warrior needed to use 50% of his spiritual energy but the most dangerous thing was to reverse that symbol.


    During that time even for a peak legendary grade Warrior needed to use their 200% spiritual energy and naturally because of this, to reverse the Hion symbol is a very dangerous thing to do. Because of this Andrew is also present to help his friend and also provide him with his spiritual energy.


    Even though both of them know this is dangerous, both of them also remember the condition of Sam, and naturally that makes both of them very angry at the mastermind Who is behind all of this. First of all the thing is that they are unable to open the portal between Terraria and the Abyss world.


    This is the advantage that those Abyss humans have and they always try to do something that would put the whole of Terraria in danger. Because of this they also know if this time they are unable to catch the mastermind then that mastermind will escape from the Terraria and will go back to the abyss world.


    Then catching that person will be hard as he could try to hide in that ce. Not only that after catching the mastermind they also wanted to know if there are other Abyss humans who can create the Hion symbol or not.


    _________________________


    "Andrew, by feeling all the aura of those Monsters I am pretty sure that all the Monsters are most likely getting controlled by the mastermind who is near them because of this, the spiritual energy of those Monsters became much wilderpared to before.


    This is only possible when the mastermind stays near those Monsters. Because even though he could easily explode any of those Monsters, to simte The Spiritual energy present inside of those Monsters the mastermind needs to stay near those Monsters or it will be impossible."


    Philip said that. After that, he brings out his spiritual brush. If you observe that brush using your observation technique then naturally you can feel that brush can easily absorb a huge amount of spiritual energy.


    Every one of those array makers has simr things like this and using that they created those arrays and the symbols.


    Nowe back to Philip,


    He brings out a spiritual paper that also contains Spiritual energy. After that, he begins to use his technique and instantly you can feel the spiritual fluctuation. Right now Philip is transferring his spiritual energy into that brush while he already begins to create the firstyer of symbols.


    Sometimeter he is finally able to create the firstyer of symbol and the firstyer begins to shine very brightly. After that, the firstyer of symbols suddenly disappeared from the paper. On the other hand, Philip once again begins to channel his spiritual energy into the brush and then begins to create the secondyer.

 Chapter 626 626 - Domains

    Chapter 626  626 - Domains


    Right now in the danger zone,


    All the nine elders are already present in the danger zone and every one of them has already created their domain. On the other hand, you can say every one of them is already far away from the Viet kingdom.


    First of all, almost 5000 Monsters right now are present in that ce. So naturally if those Monsters begin to explode then the explosion area would already exit 50 km and Sam previously described the power of the explosion, every one of them issue that the whole Kingdom would be destroyed by that.


    Not just the whole Kingdom every citizen and every warrior who wouldn''t be able to escape during that time naturally would die. All the 9 elders who created their domain previously can also feel the restriction that is present in that ce.


    Most likely that restriction was created by the dark spiritual energy that prevented any Warriors from using any type of techniques right now or using their true spiritual energy. But fortunately for all the elders, they did not feel the restriction that much, and because of this, they could easily create the domain.


    But naturally, all of them are present in different ces as nobody can give them the guarantee that from only one direction those Monsters will try to attack. Even though the Viet kingdom is present in the safe zone, naturally it could turn into a danger zone when those Monsters begin to cross the limit of the safe zone and advance toward the kingdom.


    Right now if you look at those Monsters then you can feel every one of them already has a chaotic spiritual energy. Naturally, that is because every one of those Monsters was ready to explode as the mastermind just wanted those Monsters to get in the range of the Viet kingdom.


    Those Monsters get in the minimum range of the kingdom then naturally they would begin to explode and everything present in the kingdom will be over.


    None of the elders at this time killed any of the Monsters because they wanted to kill every one of those Monsters at once so they just waited for every one of those Monsters toe inside the domain. Aftering inside the domain naturally, they have full authority to control the domain and everything present in their domain.


    Only a person with high spiritual energy and the ability to create a domain could escape from another''s domain. Fortunately, none of the Monsters wereary grade. Most likely even though those Abyss humans were sessfully able to turn those Epic-grade monsters into dark monsters, even for them controlling thoseary-grade monsters wasn''t easy.


    Inside the kingdom, all the citizens and all the Warriors naturally did not have any idea about these. Every one of them just knows that currently, the situation in the danger zone isn''t good as the Monsters begin to rampage. Fortunately, warriors from the warrior association will be handling the matter and with that none of them have to worry about anything.


    But at the same time, they needed to maintain order and stay inside of the kingdom. Naturally, those Warriors present in the kingdom also wanted to help the warriors from the warrior association. But those Warriors told them they did not have to worry about anything.


    At the same time if you look outside of the kingdom then you can see every warrior from the warrior association right now protecting the kingdom from every direction while creating barriers around them. Before going to the danger zone all the 9 elders already inform everyone of those Warriors to create barriers around the whole Kingdom from outside.


    Even though all the elders have the confidence to take care of all the Monsters, the kingdom still could be affected by the impact of the explosion. Supporting the whole Kingdom from that type of impact they naturally needed a barrier and because of this all the Warriors already created a barrier around them.


    Some of them with high observation power can already feel the powerful and malicious aura present inside the danger zone. Naturally, only Monsters or Warriors with dark spiritual energy will release that type of malicious aura. But fortunately, all of them have full confidence in their elders.


    ______________________________


    One by one those Monsters already begin to enter the domain of those elders but you can say none of the Monsters feel anything even though they enter the domain as all the elders right now did not do anything. Even though they created the domain, they maintain the aura of the domain as low as they can so it does not create any kind of trouble and alert the mastermind.


    Those elders also hide themselves as they are naturally sure that the mastermind, the moment able to sense them, immediately explodes all the Monsters. Because of this, all of those elders are also hiding themselves.


    Finally 1 hourter,


    Right now inside of the domain of the first elder, you can see almost 500 Monsters already present and by observing the area around him he is sure that other than those 500 Monsters No other Monsters with Hion symbol are present.


    Normally during this time, no other Monsters from the danger zonee close to those Monsters with the Hion symbol. Most likely those Monsters in the danger zone can also feel the dangering out from those Monsters with the Hion symbol.


    ___________________________


    "Boom!!!!"


    Suddenly one of the Monsters began to shine and instantly exploded. But fortunately, the first elder already knows what will happen next so wasting no time he uses the full power of his Gravity domain and instantly uses 500-time gravity on those other Monsters and kills them without any second thought.


    Not only that as the explosion already happened inside of the domain He can now control the effect of the domain using the power of gravity. Even after killing the Monsters, you can see him maintaining that 500 times gravity in that ce as it decreases the power of the explosion which most likely wanted to devour Berserker''s spiritual energy from those other Monsters.


    30 minutester finally deactivated the domain but you can see he is still very alert at this time. He did not expect that one of the Monsters would blow up like this. Fortunately, he already created the domain and with that, he was able to protect himself and also able to stop the explosion from reaching the Viet kingdom.


    But at this time he did not know the moment that explosion happened a huge amount of spiritual fluctuation was created that instantly alerted the Warriors from the Viet kingdom and the elders present in the danger zone.


    Not only that, in the next second every one of them began to shake because of the earthquake that happened because of the explosion, and also not long after that they instantly got heat from a huge wind force. That is because of the impact of the explosion but fortunately, they already created a barrier around them and also the wind force wasn''t that powerful.


    Now the first elder naturally did not waste a single second and instantly gavemand to those other elders to immediately execute their n to kill those Monsters. Immediately all the elders can also see many Monsters begin to shine. So wasting no time, they immediately use the power of that domain to kill those Monsters without any second thought.


    But even with that naturally, they are unable to kill all the Monsters at once. Even though it looks like they kill all the Monsters in a second, you can say they are still different. For the mastermind even a millisecond is enough to explode those Monsters just with his thought.


    Because of this, even though those elders try to kill all the Monsters who are already about to explode or begin to glow brightly.


    _________________


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    "Boom!!!"


    "..."


    "Guys, use your full power to increase the power of our barrier. Most likely all the elders have already begun to execute their n and with that, you can also feel those huge amounts of spiritual energy. Everyone stay ready for the iing earthquake and wind force."


    Write down the leaders of those people of the warrior association who guard the whole Kingdom already told them to increase the power of their barrier as because of the impact a huge amount of wind force that also contains spiritual energy and also the earthquake that also contain The Spiritual energy will try to affect the whole Kingdom.


    They are the ones who are in charge of protecting the whole Kingdom right now. So instantly after hearing that all the Warriors from the warrior association have already begun to increase the power of their spiritual barrier every one of them is ready to face the iing impact of those explosions.


    Fortunately, they increase the power of the barrier as in the next second the whole Kingdom begins to shake very violently. Not only that, if it wasn''t for The Spiritual barrier protecting the whole Kingdom from the outside, then the whole Kingdom would be in a dangerous situation right now.


    Naturally, those earthquakes aren''t normal, and also because those barriers that deflect most of the power of those earthquakes already decrease the power of those earthquakes when they begin to affect the Viet kingdom.

 Chapter 627 627 - Reverse Hion symbol complete

    Chapter 627  627 - Reverse Hion symbolplete


    "Guys, keep holding. A more powerful wind force wille and try to destroy everything. As all the elders already told us to use our full strength. Also, be careful about those earthquakes as they also contain Spiritual energy so naturally we need to protect the whole Kingdom from those earthquakes and those wind forces."


    The leader of the Warriors told everyone to hold on to their ground as more impact would being toward them. Even though they did not go inside the danger zone and stayed outside of the kingdom, they could still feel the energy fluctuation that was created inside of the danger zone one after another.


    As they had already been informed by the warrior association of what would happen with those Monsters. So they naturally can predict that most likely those Monsters begin to explode and all of these impacts get created by those explosions.


    Fortunately, as they fully prepare from the start they are able to reduce the effect of those impacts, and the Kingdom only receives a minimum impact. But naturally, they needed to use their full power to protect themselves and the Kingdom.


    One after another those impacts just went after them. Those impacts directly hit those Energy barriers. Fortunately in the process, 70% power of those impacts got absorbed by The Spiritual barrier and because of this The Kingdom only received a minimum impact.


    On the other hand, all the elders already killed almost all the Monsters with the Hion symbol. Fortunately, they use their domain to suppress the power of those explosions. Because of this, most of the power of the explosion did not spread around and only a small area was affected because of the explosion. Also the power of those impacts wasn''t that much.


    Instantly all the elders contact each other to get to know about the situation on their side. All of them exin that they already take care of all the Monsters who were in front of them but still, none of them can rx right now. What if suddenly more Monsters or more dark humans came to that ce?


    If something like that happened then naturally it would be a dangerous thing for everyone. So naturally they keep activating their domain but this time they already reduce the energy supply in their domain so the power of the domain already begins to decrease.


    All the elders right now are just waiting for the news from the president and Philip. Only after getting news from both of them will they be able to rxpletely. But at the same time, naturally, all of them are also very curious about the location of the mastermind. They also know that most likely the mastermind is near the kingdom right now because of this, he is able to control those many Monsters without any problem and also make them wilder.


    _______________________


    "Andrew quickly channels your spiritual energy. I cannot break my concentration right now or it would be dangerous for me and everyone."


    Andrew and Philip are present on the different sides of the danger zone and fortunately, you cannot find Monsters with Hion symbols in that ce. With that, they just focus on the reverse Hion symbol.


    Philip fully focused on creating theyer of the symbol while Andrew at first did not have anything to do. He just presents there to supply more spiritual energy the moment Andrew uses all of his spiritual energy. During this time naturally, he also feels the energy flow activation that one after another created inside the danger zone and he is sure that those energy fluctuations got created because those Monsters begin to explode.


    Fortunately, he already created a spiritual barrier around them so that did not get affected by the impact of those explosions. Also during the time he can already tell that most likely all the elders already reduced the power of those impacts as even though he wasn''t using that much power those impacts already got deflected and Philip also can fully focus on creating theyers of the symbol.


    Creating the first 9yers wasn''t easy but it also wasn''t that hard for Phillip. During this time the good thing is that he can also rest and also can use the potion to recover his spiritual energy. But the moment he begins to concentrate and create thestyer, he cannot stop in the middle of the work, and at the same time, a huge amount of spiritual energy gets absorbed from his body during the time.


    Already 90% of his spiritual energy gets absorbed and if his full spiritual energy gets absorbed naturally he would lose concentration because he would receive bacsh from that.


    Andrew, wasting no time, instantly deactivated the barrier and then put his hand on Philip''s shoulder. Then he began to channel his spiritual energy. The moment his spiritual energy came to his hand then entered Philip''s body, Andrew instantly felt the session force that instantly began to absorb that spiritual energy.


    During that time you can say Philip was under a lot of pressure and also he needed to use his full mental power to create thatstyer of symbol. To reverse the Hion symbol he needs to fully concentrate and cannot break the concentration.


    _________________________


    1 hourter finally Andrew stopped channeling spiritual energy as Phillip alreadypleted the reverse Hion symbol. With that Andrew fell into the ground and justy down there. He is not fully exhausted as all this time he is just continuously supplying Spiritual energy.


    Almost 10 times he needed to use the Potions to recover his spiritual energy and naturally it got absorbed by the technique of Philip. On the other hand, Philip isn''t in a better condition as he also lies down on the ground and already closed his eyes.


    Compared to Andrew, Philip is fully mentally exhausted and he can already feel the pain. He needed the time to rest and only after that they will proceed with the next n.


    Sometimeter, Andrew even though did not recover all his spiritual energy and mental health, but at this time he realized something. Suddenly all the malicious aura from inside the danger zone vanished and those impacts that they previously received because of the explosion already stopped.


    He already realizes that all the elders already take care of all those Monsters. But at the same time, he is very worried. What if the mastermind went back to the Abyss world?


    "Don''t worry if I am not wrong then after using a huge amount of spiritual energy that person also won''t be able to go back. Even though it only requires a minimum amount of spiritual energy to control anyone who has the Hion symbol, don''t forget at the same time those abyss humans also use two different types of spiritual energy and they also need to control those spiritual energies.


    So most likely the mastermind is still present in our world and like us, he or they are also resting right now. But we cannot rest that much.".


    Philip naturally also realized that. He already gets up from the ground and then begins to use potions to recover his full spiritual energy. But unfortunately, he still does not recover his full mental health and can feel the pain in his head.


    Even in that condition, he did not want to rest right now as he wanted to capture the mastermind or masterminds. Andrew also wasted no time doing the same thing and after that, both of them were finally ready to use the reverse Hion symbol.


    "Andrew, I won''t be able to use it right now as I am very low on mental power. You can use it and I will tell you what to do.


    Fast fully concentrate your spiritual energy into that symbol and then instantly you will feel that you are able to sense everything around you. All the masterminds who created symbols like this will also feel the same thing and they can easily locate all the living beings who have their Hion symbols.


    But for this matter, you naturally won''t be able to detect any of the Monsters or dark humans who have the Hion symbol. Instead of that, you will be able to find the mastermind behind all of this.


    Because I use their Hion symbol and only change thestyer of the symbol, you will directly be able to sense the mastermind. But we need to react quickly because after that the mastermind naturally feels that someone is observing him and will try to escape alongside his subordinate or if he has subordinates."


    Philip told all of this to Andrew and Andrew wasted no time fully focused on the Hion symbol. He fully concentrates on the symbol and naturally begins to channel his spiritual energy into that symbol.


    During that time he already closed his eyes. At first, he did not feel anything but suddenly he felt something and was fully surprised. He instantly begins to feel his surrounding area but not only that instantly he can also feel that his senses are most likely pulling him in a direction.

 Chapter 628 628 - Praying

    Chapter 628  628 - Praying


    Andrew right now follows his instincts in a direction and he can feel that most likely going toward that direction he will be able to meet the mastermind.


    But during that process naturally, he can feel the spiritual energy getting consumed very quickly. But at the same time, Philip was present there, so he was not worried about anything.


    Like this he let his instincts follow in the direction and already he can tell he reached 50 km. But it looks like the mastermind isn''t present in that ce as his instincts tell him to go further than that.


    During the time Philip, who is present with Andrew who is now using the symbol, already ced both of his hands on Andrew''s shoulder and he already began to supply spiritual energy. First of all, Andrew cannot get distracted in this moment so he cannot let the symbol absorb All The Spiritual energy from Andrew.


    He cannot tell what Andrew is seeing right now but the thing is that he still did not find the mastermind. Most likely Andrew is still trying to search for the mastermind. Philip also just hopes that Andrew is sessfully able to find the mastermind.


    Like this 15 minutester,


    Suddenly something unexpected happens as spiritual fluctuation begins toe out from Andrew. But Philip did not get worried about that as he already knew what could be the matter. Not only that instantly he brings out a paper that has an array created on it.


    That is called the teleportation array that he already prepared as right now if Andrew sessfully finds the location of the mastermind then they need to go there as quickly as they can.


    The mastermind will also be able to feel that something is wrong and most likely someone is observing him. You will try to escape and if they wanted to capture that mastermind they needed to act before the mastermind could escape.


    Fortunately, all the time he supplies spiritual energy in that reverse Hion symbol through supplying The Spiritual energy in Andrew''s body. With that, you can say Andrew is still in full health and spiritual energy and with that, he may face any kind of problem using the teleportation array.


    Andrew opened his eyes and before he could say anything he quickly gave him the teleportation array. Andrew also did not ask any questions after receiving the array and just began to channel spiritual energy into that array.


    During this time he instantly thinks about the ce where he previously found the mastermind. Unfortunately, he isn''t able to clearly see the face of the mastermind or be able to see the full surrounding area. Because of this, he isn''t sure if the mastermind is alone or not.


    After receiving the teleportation array, Andrew quickly thinks about the ce. Fortunately, he is very familiar with this danger zone and has already visited that ce previously. Because of this, he already knows where to teleport.


    Actually to use teleportation the person who channels spiritual energy or you can say those people who activate the teleportation array need to think about the ce where they want to teleport themselves or others. As Andrew is very familiar with that ce he will not have any kind of problem.


    Both of them instantly vanish from the ce and already appear inside the inner area of the danger zone. That ce is 80 km away from their previous ce. But that is the important thing as the moment theye to that ce they already sense the malicious aura present there. Both of them are very familiar with this kind of malicious aura, as this belongs to the Abyss humans, or anyone who has dark spiritual energy will release this kind of malicious aura.


    Not only that at the same time, they can already feel The Spiritual fluctuation that is being created in that ce. Most likely those Abyss humans alongside the mastermind, already prepare themselves to escape.


    Now back to the main matter,


    Both of them instantly use their domain and instantly cover the whole area with their domain. The good thing is that the mastermind is most likely fully injured right now and recovering. Even though both of them already feel the powerful aura present there, at the same time it did not pose any threat to them.


    The moment both of them use the domain you can say all the Abyss humans and all the Monsters present in that ce already got affected by both of their domains. Everyone present in that ce instantly gets frozen as they already lost the strength to move their body or do anything in that situation.


    Normally the mastermind who most likely have the same power level as Andrew and Philip could be able to counterattack both of those domains, but as he is already recovering from the side effect he is unable to do anything in that situation.


    ____________________________


    "Few!!!! Fortunately we were able toe here before these people left the ce. Who could have thought they would try to escape this quickly? Most likely those other Abyss humans also help in bringing those Monsters from the Abyss world. Because of this, no one is in full health."


    Philip said all of this with a sigh. Finally, they were able to capture those people and most likely if they came therete even for 1 second, then there was a chance that the mastermind alongside his subordinate already escaped from that ce.


    __________________________


    Suddenly inside the Warrior Association,


    Every Warrior and elder present in the warrior association now praying for the president and Philip. Everyone hopes that the president, alongside his friend, is able to capture the mastermind.


    All this time they are just waiting for the good news but none of them disturb Andrew or Phillip. First of all, Philip already told them that to reverse the Hion symbol he needed to fully concentrate on that matter and also if he or Andrew was going to use that symbol then they also needed full concentration.


    So nobody tries to disturb both of them while they just pray in their heart. It was already 1 hour and 30 minutes but they did not get any kind of information from Andrew or Phillip. But during that time they got the good news that all the Monsters had already been killed by the 9 elders.


    Even though some of them already exploded, all the elders took care of all the matter and with that, the kingdom did not receive any kind of damage. But even with that many citizens of the Viet kingdom got scared by receiving those sudden impacts.


    But fortunately, they became rxed when all the elders fully killed all the Monsters. But even with that nobody is allowed to leave the city during that moment and many Warriors who try to observe their surroundings could tell they or you could sell the whole Kingdom right now fully covered in the spiritual barrier.


    Naturally, everyone can predict those barriers most likely created by those Warriors from the warrior association full stop but at the same time, nobody can feel the presence of elders during that time.


    Naturally, all the elders right now are out of the observation range of the Warriors and because of this, they are unable to feel the presence of those elders. So this makes them very curious to know about the location of those elders.


    Also, they are still very confused about those loud sounds that for a few minutes ago they were able to hear. Not only that after those loud sounds naturally, they received those impacts. Even though none of them are the kingdom received any kind of injuries at the same time all the Warriors could tell, most likely because of the spiritual barrier that protects the whole Kingdom, none of them received any kind of serious effect.


    Not only that during that time every warrior and every citizen began to feel pressure that made them tremble. Nobody knows what is happening and many of them naturally be scared of this. Fortunately, the Warriors from the Warrior Association already predicted something like this would happen so they began to control the whole situation very calmly.


    Those Warriors from the warrior association told every warrior from the Viet kingdom that this was nothing serious as both elders were now handling those Monsters that suddenly began to show signs of madness. Naturally, none of the Warriors said any truth to them.


    Like this, you can say those Warriors of the Warrior Association are somewhat able to manage the situation and all the citizens of the Viet kingdom can fully rx as they also get to know two elders from the Warrior Association handling all the matters.


    As you know other than Warriors from the Warrior Association nobody gets the details of the current situation. Also, nobody announces to those Warriors of the Viet kingdom that the president and seven more elders from the warrior association wille to their kingdom.

 Chapter 629 629 - Unexpected

    Chapter 629  629 - Unexpected


    Fortunately, everything happened so quickly that those Abyss humans even wanted to escape from that ce but they did not get the chance to do that. They never expected that both Warriors would use teleportation arrays this time.


    Actually, except for the mastermind who controlled all the Monsters previously, you can say all the other Abyss humans were there to prepare the dark teleportation array to teleport anytime.


    All the time they are naturally just waiting for the signal from the mastermind. Sometime ago everything went normal but at the same time, they noticed that the mastermind or you can say the elder Abyss human is most likely receiving side effects. Nobody was sure about his condition but they still did not leave their ce as they needed to maintain concentration on the dark teleportation array.


    Like this after sometimeter the mastermind or you can say the Abyss human who was behind all of this right now resting in that ce to recover his strength. They could easily leave that ce using the teleportation array but the mastermind did not want to leave that quickly.


    He has the n to bring more Monsters after recovering his strength and naturally at that time most likely all the Warriors and all the elders from the warrior association will let down their guard.


    Going back to the Abyss world would not help him in this kind of matter as this is apletely different world that ispletely restricted from Terraria. It is just because of the dark spiritual energy and the special ability of the dark spiritual energy they are able to travel through both of the worlds.


    This is also the advantage that they use while fighting against those Warriors who won''t be able to travel to their world. Now back to the main matter, as he did not think that anybody could locate him as some Abyss humans present in that ce who right now created a spiritual barrier around themselves, and that spiritual barrier also has a stealth effect.


    On the other hand 10 Abyss humans were concentrating on the teleportation array. With all of this preparation, the mastermind did not consider that even those elders were able to find him. Even if they are able to find him, then the mastermind would immediately get to know about that and immediately he will signal his subordinate to use the teleportation array.


    But who could have thought that he would not be able to directly feel someone trying to observe him or trying to sense the surrounding area? All this time he was just meditating to recover the dark spiritual energy but 5 seconds ago suddenly he felt like someone was watching him and standing in front of him.


    Instantly he opened his eyes but did not see anyone other than his subordinate. But he was sure that something was wrong. So, he instantly signals his subordinate to use the teleportation array and escape from that ce.


    But who could have thought that they would not be able to escape from that ce even though the teleportation array was just about to teleport them? Most likely all of this happened due to the mastermind''s inability to use any kind of technique. First of all, controlling thoserge numbers of Monsters requires a huge amount of dark spiritual energy.


    Also, he was in charge of those dark summoning symbols that brought those Monsters from the Abyss world. Because of this, you can say, previously he used 99% of his dark spiritual energy and because of this, he wasn''t in the condition to fight anyone or use any skill at that time.


    Both the Warriors who just appear in that ce use that to their advantage and also instantly use that domain power to freeze everything and deactivate the teleportation array. As nobody was able to counterattack and the power of those two domains was Much more powerful, the dark teleportation array instantly got erased from that ce.


    _____________________________


    "Inform everyone that the mission is sessful as we are able to capture the mastermind. I will hold a meeting tomorrow and I would like every warrior from our association, and also the Oni Royal family and the human Royal family, toe to the headquarters tomorrow.


    Every one of them is really worried about the matter so they naturally needed to understand the whole details and also needed to know the whole Motive of those Abyss humans."


    Right now both Andrew and Philip already went back to the headquarters. But naturally, both elders who stayed in Viet for a few days to observe the situation did note back as they still weren''t sure if the situation was good or not.


    Other than them, everyone has already returned to the headquarters. Both Andrew and Phillip are fully tired so they want to reveal everything tomorrow and alsoter they need to observe the memory of those Abyss humans.


    _________________________


    One by one every warrior, even the human royal family and the Oni royal family gets informed by the warrior association that the situation is finally under control and the president tells him that they can join tomorrow''s meeting as he would like to reveal the motive of those enemies.


    Other than the human and Oni king, old human and old Oni king, nobody seems to understand what is happening as the warrior association did not fully tell them about the real matter.


    But if you look at those four people already know about the whole matter then you will notice that all of them are fully happy after learning that matter. Naturally, they will go to the headquarters tomorrow. Also the good thing was that tomorrow there will be no match. Thepetition will be held on the day after tomorrow.


    Livia, Emma, Maria, and both the royal Princes of both of the kingdoms get told by their fathers that they should not tell anyone about this. Naturally both the queens also said that they should not release this news to anyone as it will cause panic.


    Maria and the others naturally are fully confused right now as they do not understand what is happening. But one thing is clear: they will get to know about the full matter of keeping their fathers busy all this time. Not just only then but even the queens also noticed that their husbands most likely did not have any kind of interest in thepetition or enjoy thepetition like they enjoyed before.


    ___________________________


    "I am sorry everyone but I cannot tell you the real matter right now. But the good thing is that the headquarters has already taken care of this matter and finally, it is under the control of the Warrior Association. One thing I could tell you is that if they are unable to handle this matter then most likely we would be in a very serious situation and we would have already lost a kingdom right now.


    But fortunately, everything was under control and we did not have to worry about anything. But at the same time, there is very bad news for all of us. Sam is also involved in this matter as he got in from the warrior association to participate in this matter."


    After saying that the human being paused for something but the moment he said that everyone standing there can already predict most likely something happened to him. Maria almost started crying but she still waited for her father to finish the word.


    "Sigh, it is that Sam participates in this matter and as usual in a difficult situation he helps the warrior association to solve a very difficult matter and because of this, the warrior association is also able to save many people and also a Kingdom that is going to be destroyed.


    But because of using his power without giving his mind any raise he keeps receiving damage but all this time he just ignores that and because of this, in the end after solving the problem he bes seriously injured and currently he is present in the headquarters. Because of this, all this time none of you was able to see him inside our Kingdom.


    He is now in a very difficult situation as even the elder who is The grandmaster of the healing, is unable to do anything that good able to repair those damaged brain cells more quickly. He is in aa, nobody is your when he will be able to wake up.


    Even though the elder already informs us that all the medical reports show him as the body of Sam is fully healed and he is in full health, those damaged brain cells take a very long time and a huge amount of spiritual energy to recover.


    So everyone knows about his condition. I am sorry that I did not inform any of you about this as most likely in the afternoon about him doing something that could create chaos."


    The human King finishes saying that with a heavy heart. Right now you can say he is also feeling very sad and disappointed in himself as he is unable to do anything to recover Sam. On the other hand Maria, and the human Queen who was present in the Royal pce, after hearing all of this, already started crying.

 Chapter 630 630 - Coming to the headquarter

    Chapter 630  630 - Coming to the headquarter


    Princess Maria and the human Queen already begin to cry while the human King is unable to say anything at this moment. He also felt helpless at this moment as he was unable to do anything that could regain Sam''s consciousness.


    Right now the human king leaves his room where you can see the Princess and the queen crying and even the prince has a disappointed face. Naturally, even the prince feels that he is very useless as he is unable to help his friend or you can say his brother who is now in critical condition.


    Even though Sam does not have that much contact with the prince, still The Prince thinks of Sam as a little brother, and naturally after hearing the condition of Sam he feels very disappointed in himself.


    Not just only with the human king''s family, but even the Oni king''s family has the same condition. Livia already has red eyes because of crying and she is already telling her father to send him to the headquarters. Naturally, the Oni King won''t be able to do that as they will only be able to go to the headquarters tomorrow.


    Everyone is having the same situation right now as they are also feeling disappointed in themselves. In a situation like this when Sam needs their help, they are unable to do anything and nobody can give the guarantee that he will be able to regain his consciousness or be able to recover from those injuries.


    __________________________


    Tomorrow,


    Finally the next day, every warrior who got informed by the headquarters already went to the warrior association''s headquarters as quickly as they could. Most of the Warriors are already in the meeting room. Every one of them waited for all the elders and the President toe to the meeting room and about the motive of those abyss humans.


    However, the human royal family and the Oni royal family did not go to the meeting room the moment they came to the headquarters. You can see every one of them right now present outside of the medical room where you can see inside the medical room Sam is lying down in bed.


    One caretaker is present in that ce who takes care of Sam''s daily needs and is also in charge of healing his body from time to time. Because of those brain injuries sometimes Sam''s body will tremble and blood will alsoe out from his nose and mouth.


    Because of this, the president already appointed the caretaker so that if anything like that happened then the caretaker would be able to solve the matter using the healing ray.


    After looking at the condition of Sam, Livia, and Maria already crying once again. Both of them already have red eyes as yesterday they were unable to sleep after knowing the situation of Sam. Even though the queen and the other people present there didn''t start crying, all of them already had tears in their eyes.


    Who can expect when enjoying thepetition and also excited about participating in thepetition, Sam is fighting for his life and nobody can give a guarantee that he will be able to recover or not.


    Most likely at this time the caretaker who was present inside the medical room already noticed the human king and the others. And she already knows that all of them are very close to Sam. So she already went outside of the medical room to give them thetest report.


    Naturally, she notices that all of them have a very sad expression right now as it is natural for everyone very close to Sam. Because of this, she thought giving them thetest news would at least give them some hope.


    "I know that it is a very difficult moment for all of you as all of you are very close to Sam. Everyone, even the president, is also feeling helpless as we are unable to do anything to recover his condition or regain his consciousness.


    But all the time we took care of his injuries and always used our healing ray on him. Most likely because of this, those brain injuries are very difficult to heal even for our elder, but he has already begun to show signs of recovery, and currently, the good news is that 40% of those injuries got healed by us.


    So don''t lose hope as we already know he is a fighter and he has strong willpower. It is just the healing process needed for a very long time. But don''t worry, even our President knows that Sam will wake up. He is a strong Warrior who cannot get defeated by something like this."


    Aftering outside of the medical room the caretaker began to exin to them thetest news and also told them that they should believe in Sam as he won''t be defeated like this.


    Naturally after hearing that the human king and the others get quite happy as they finally get to know that 40% of those brain injuries already got him. With that, there is the possibility that every one of those brain injuries that are very difficult to heal will fully recover.


    "I wanted to ask you, will some have any problem after recovering from those brain injuries?"


    Suddenly the human being asked that question. Not only him but all of them have the same question in their mind. There is a possibility that it will also affect Sam''s memory.


    "Don''t worry because it will not cause any side effects to his memory. The part of the brain that contains all memory did not get damaged previously. Only part of that brain that helps to control our spiritual system gets injured. So naturally he will not have any kind of effect on his memory and also our elder told us that after recovering from those brain injuries he will not feel any side effects using his spiritual energy."


    She told him with a smile as this was very good news. Not only the human kings and the others but everyone present in the warrior association''s headquarters also has the same question in their mind. Fortunately, the elder already told everyone that it would not cause any kind of side effect to him.


    ___________________________


    Sometimeter the human king alongside the old human being, Oni king, and the old Oni king went inside the meeting room. Naturally, they need to present in the meeting to get to know about the real situation. Both princes also came inside the meeting room alongside their fathers and grandfathers.


    Even though every one of them wanted to stay with Sam as both the queens and the princess alongside Emma wanted to stay with Sam, they could just rx. Also, they can tell all of these details to them.


    Inside the meeting room, the moment everyonees inside they can already see many other Warriors present inside of the meeting room and the most important thing is that all of them belong to the warrior association. The de King already notices them and he already calls them to sit beside him.


    Naturally, everyone who knew about all of these was from the Warrior Association. The Warrior Association did not inform any other Warriors who did not belong to the Warrior Association about the previous incident. Also, the good thing is that every warrior from the Viet kingdom thought that the warrior association already handled the rampage of those Monsters that suddenly appeared in the danger zone.


    Nobody gets suspicious or suspects anything wrong with the exnation that they get from the Warrior Association. The warrior association told him that most likely something strange spiritual fluctuation appeared in the dangerous zone that caused those Monsters to be wild. But as the warrior association already handles all the matters nobody has to think about anything at this moment.


    ______________________


    While those Warriors present in the meeting room, Andrew and every other elder alongside Philip present inside the interrogation room where you can see one of the elders using his power to get inside the minds of those abyss humans.


    Yesterday Andrew and the others did not do anything as they were fully tired and needed the time to rest and recover. They are in full health. Because of this, today they begin to get to know about the main Motive of those Abyss humans.


    But the thing is that something strange happened in that process as three of those Abyss humans already died the moment the elder tried to use the mind control technique to get to know about all the memories.


    This makes all of them very serious as they can tell something present inside of those abyss humans, that most likely working as a security system and also working as a trigger that would immediately kill those Abyss humans if someone tries to use the mind control on those abyss humans.


    Most likely all of them also already know something like this could happen and naturally if something like this happens then everyone gets to know about their main motive.

 Chapter 631 631 - The mind control symbol

    Chapter 631  631 - The mind control symbol


    "Proceed with caution. Before anything try to search for the mental barrier that is triggering the death of those Abyss humans."


    "I know the president, but don''t know why but the moment I try to use the mind control technique it looks like the trigger got activated on its own. It did not even give me the time to search for the mental barrier that triggered all of this.


    It looks like someone put some powerful restriction on their mind and the moment one tries to use the mind control technique to control the mind of those abyss humans, it will immediately trigger the reaction, and the Abyss human will die.


    I am already trying to use various methods but even with that, I am unable to stop the death of those Abyss humans. But this time I''m pretty sure that I already feel the mental barrier that creates all of these. Unfortunately, I am still not fast enough to stop that mental barrier and if I try to do the same thing with those other Abyss humans, the natural same thing will also happen to them."


    The elder who uses his mind control technique all the time to search the minds of Abyss humans replies to the president. Until now 3 of those Abyss humans already died the moment he tried to use the mind control technique on them.


    When the first Abyss human dies you already realize something like a mental barrier present in the mind of those people and the moment he tries to use the mind control technique that mental barrier will activate on his own and kill the Abyss humans.


    Naturallypared to any of the Monsters and those dark humans, those Abyss humans know more stuff. So because of this, someone or they most likely put that mental barrier in their mind.


    After hearing this, Andrew and all the other elders present in that room naturally became very serious. Right now, even though they are very close to getting to know about the real Motive of those Abyss humans, unexpectedly this sudden situation appears in that ce where they are unable to read the memory of those Abyss humans.


    ''It looks like those Abyss humans, already expecting something like this to happen and because of this, they already prepared themselves for this kind of situation. There are two possibilities that those Abyss humans have that mental barrier because someone put the mental barrier in their mind or it could be that they put that mental barrier here on their own to defend their Mind from other people.


    But what can we do at this moment as we need to read the memory of those abyss humans?''


    Suddenly the president and all the other elders are thinking what to do as they also cannot think of a good way to read the memory of those abyss humans. The president and all the other elders arepletely confused right now.


    The elder who tried to read the memory of those Abyss humans naturally was the most frustrated one. He is an expert in using the mind control technique but even though all this time he tried to use different methods to send for the mental barrier and wanted to deactivate that mental barrier, it looks like he isn''t fast or powerful enough to deactivate that mental barrier.


    "Don''t try to read the memory of those other Abyss humans. Before doing anything we need to search for a way where those abyss humans will not die when we will try to read their minds."


    Andrew at this time says that to everyone. Even though he and all the other elders wanted to kill those abyss humans. But at the same time, they need to read the memory of those abyss humans. So because of this, they currently did not want to kill them.


    At this time nobody notices but Phillip, who stays silent from the first, suddenly begins to approach the dead body that is lying down on the floor. He crouched down in front of that abyss of humans and put his hand on the forehead of that dead body.


    This naturally confused Andrew and the others. But they did not say anything as they also predicted that most likely Phillip already understood what happened to those Abyss humans. Because of this, nobody asked him any questions as they wanted to give him the time to observe the dead body.


    Philips currentlypletely ignores the curious gaze of those elders and Andrew. He fully focuses on channeling his spiritual energy into the dead body. At first, nothing happened and that also confused all the elders. But sometimeter something unexpected happens as the dead body instantly releases a spiritual fluctuation.


    That spiritual fluctuation was created only for a second. For that second you can say every elder is already very alert and ready to fight back if something unexpected happens. But Andrew, who had been using his spiritual observation technique all the time, did not react like those elders as he already knew that spiritual fluctuation was created because of Phillip''s spiritual energy.


    But that spiritual fluctuation did not contain 100% spiritual energy of Phillip. At this time Andrew also feels the aura of dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy. He is very familiar with both of the spiritual energy, so it makes quotes surprises the moment he can feel both of the spiritual energy.


    But Andrew did not say and just waited for Philip to finish his investigation. Philip on the other hand advances toward those other two dead bodies. Sometimeter the same thing once again happened as one by one two spiritual fluctuations were created. This time those elders were finally able to tell that spiritual fluctuation was created because of Philip.


    After doing his investigation of those dead bodies, Philip finally got up from the ground and then went in front of Andrew. Right now anybody could tell Andrew and all the elders present in that room naturally to know the answer for Phillip and also wanted to know about the spiritual literature.


    "Sigh, the good thing is that I already know what is happening and why those abyss humans instantly died the moment someone tried to use the mind control technique on them. Before telling you about the real reason, I wanted to tell you that I am really surprised once again as I never thought I would see the second forbidden symbol.


    Even though this new forbidden symbol isn''t as dangerous as the Abyss humans and will not do any kind of harm like the Hion symbol, even with this I am very surprised that all of them had the Kriton symbol present in their body.


    Before anything I wanted to tell you that you won''t be able to find that symbol if you try to look at their body normally. Most likely you won''t be able to find that even if you use her observation technique in full power. Because this type of symbol will immediately disappear after you please them on anybody.


    Not only just other people but at the same time you can put that symbol in your mind to create a mental barrier that will immediately trigger your death.


    Most likely those Abyss humans have simr things present in their minds and it will immediately activate the moment anybody tries to use the mind control technique without deactivating the Kriton symbol.


    Before telling you how to deactivate that symbol I wanted to tell you about this symbol. In one word you can tell this symbol naturally created a mental barrier inside of your head. Other than that you will not feel any kind of different from before.


    But this barrier ispletely different from other mental barriers because I think this also contains two spiritual energies. With that, it became a mutated symbol that immediately gets activated the moment anybody tries to use a mental control technique.


    These barriers control your whole brain the moment it gets activated. In less than a second it will immediately shut down the whole mind of that person and because of this, the person will die in less than a second.


    Even anybody trying to prevent that using their spiritual energy, but that person won''t be able to do anything as the whole spiritual system present inside the body of the person will get controlled by that symbol the moment it gets activated.


    Now to deactivate that symbol we needed to once again reverse the whole symbol. Naturally, even if just dark spiritual energy was used in that process, I would not have any kind of problem reversing that symbol. But the problem is that symbols contain two spiritual energies, whether this is the sense symbol that I know or not.


    One thing I can tell is that most likely all the Abyss humans currently possess this kind of mental barrier in their Minds to prevent any kind of information from leaking after getting captured. "


    Phillip exins to everyone about the symbol that is present in those Abyss humans. But I think he did not mention that to reverse he needed to first understand the whole symbol as it could get mutated because of the two different types of spiritual energy.

 Chapter 632 632 - Location of the Symbol

    Chapter 632  632 - Location of the Symbol


    Currently, Phillip has already begun to channel his spiritual energy toward the Abyss human. Before doing anything he needed to understand the basics of that symbol being created in that abyss.


    First of all, he isn''t sure if this is the normal symbol or not. As much he knows that these types of symbols won''t be able to contain a second type of spiritual energy. But right now that is the case as a second type of spiritual energy is also present inside those Abyss humans.


    Andrew and all the other elders watched Phillip without saying anything. Currently, in this matter, they can only depend on Philip who is also the current array grandmaster.


    Most likely only Phillip would be able to understand that symbol present in those Abyss humans. Also, nobody is sure where the symbol is created in those Abyss humans. Even using their spiritual observation technique in full power they are unable to find any kind of spiritual fluctuation thates out from the symbol present in those Abyss humans.


    So most likely that symbol also has the power to hide from this kind of observation technique. Sometimeter, once again everyone feels the Spiritual fluctuation that appears in that ce from an Abyss human. That is happening entirely because of Philip.


    Phillip is now channeling his spiritual energy to find the location of the symbol present in the body of that Abyss human. Using the spiritual energy he wanted to discover the ce where that symbol was created. But at the same time, he can already feel the mental barrier could get activated because of the interference of third spiritual energy.


    Fortunately, he only spent a little bit of his spiritual energy and also he was trying to control his spiritual energy from the start so it did not get in contact with the dark spiritual energy and the berserker spiritual energy. As all those Abyss humans are unconscious they are unable to control the whole spiritual energy in their body. So, it became very simple for Phillip to guide his spiritual energy.


    Sometimeter, When The Spiritual fluctuation appeared in that ce he smiled as he finally found the ce where the symbol was created. All this time he channeled The Spiritual energy and controlled The Spiritual energy to travel the whole body of that Abyss human.


    He wanted to know from where the mental barrier was getting the signal. Sometimeter he finally found the ce and even though he did not control The Spiritual energy to get closer to that ce from where a little bit of spiritual fluctuation was getting created, those two spiritual energies present inside the body of that Abyss human already started reacting.


    Fortunately, the mental barrier did not get activated immediately. Most likely both of the spiritual energy did not consider the true spiritual energy as a threat. But even with that both of the spiritual energy right now created that spiritual fluctuation as a signal that both of them already started absorbing the true spiritual energy.


    Philip already opens his eyes and then immediately ces his hand on the ce from where he previously felt The Spiritual fluctuation. After that, he once again channels spiritual energy and gathers The Spiritual energy in his hand.


    A thickyer of spiritual energy gathered in his hand. He instantly ces that hand into that ce and already begins to use his technique. Before anything he wanted to look at the symbol to observe it and to observe the symbol, he needed to make that symbol visible. So with that, he uses the technique that will help him to make that symbol visible once again.


    The good thing is that this technique will not affect the Abyss human and with that, the barrier would not get activated.


    Everyone present in the room can already feel the second spiritual fluctuation that is much more powerfulpared to before. But this time everybody could tell this spiritual fluctuation created by Philip by using his technique.


    Most likely he is using some kind of powerful technique because of that spiritual fluctuation. Every one of them is already using the spiritual vision technique, with which they can already see a huge amount of spiritual energy already gathered in their right hand.


    Phillip please that hand on the left shoulder of that Abyss human. This made all of them quite confused but none of them said anything or asked any type of question. They already predicted Phillip already found the ce where the symbol was created.


    ____________________________


    30 minutester,


    All this time Phillip continued to use his technique and only 30 minutester he finally stopped using the technique and The Spiritual fluctuation already disappeared from that room. But at this time if anybody looks at the left shoulder of that Abyss human, they will notice the weird symbol that appears in that ce.


    It is like the face of a demon or something like that. Well only from far away you will be able to see that kind of face, but if youe close and then look at that symbol then you will find many patterns that have been created that have the shape of that demon face.


    Fortunately, Phillip used his technique for at least 30 minutes but it did not consume that much spiritual energy. So with that, you can say he was already ready to observe the weird symbol and then he also wanted to know if he could reverse that technique or not.


    ''But, I wanted to know how the hell so many forbidden symbols started appearing with those Abyss humans. Did they get some subordinate who can use this kind of forbidden symbol? If this is the case then this is dangerous as there are many symbols that would bring disaster to our world.


    Sigh, I need to reverse this symbol so that we can get all the memories from those Abyss humans. Only this is our hope right now to find out the current situation of those abyss humans.''


    Phillip thought that and he already sat down in front of that Abyss human. Not only that he already begins to use his special vision technique to read the detail of that symbol that is present in the Abyss human.


    "This will be a long process so I think some of you should go back to the meeting room as we can already tell most of the Warriors that we called are already present in our headquarters. Only some of you should stay here as I could also need your help to reverse the matter. But other than that, five of you should go back,"


    Before starting to use his technique Philip said that to all the elders and Andrew. After hearing his suggestion everybody also agrees with him as they can also tell that all the Warriors that they call are already present in the meeting room and they are waiting for them.


    _________________________________


    "Father, do you know what happened? Why did the president and all the elders not show themselves? Did they also be seriously injured to stop those Monsters previously?"


    Currently, the human Prince already asked that question to the human king. The human King already told the human Prince that he did not get the report that tells him that Warriors from the warrior association receive any kind of injuries or something like that.


    "Most likely every one of them is busy looking at the memory of those captured Abyss humans. As you know everybody wanted to know the full situation of those Abyss humans and also wanted to know their whole n.


    But sometimes there will be special cases where reading memory bes much more difficult and you need a long time to look at the memory of those people. Even me and your grandfather put a mental barrier in our minds so that if somehow we got captured by our enemy or something like that, they wouldn''t be able to break the barrier to get any kind of information.


    But at the same time, this type of barrier is also good to prevent any kind of mental attack from harming you. It also protects my whole mind and body from that kind of mental attack. So I think that most likely the president and all the other elders are also facing situations like this. Also to break that kind of mental barrier you needed a very long time."


    The human King said that his son as he already predicted, was most likely those elders and the president taking this much time because they were trying to read the memory of those Abyss humans. Not only him but most of the Warriors also thought the same thing.


    Surprisingly after 1 hour, everybody could see that 5 elders had alreadye back to the meeting room. It immediately makes them very excited as they already cannot wait to know the whole n of those abyss humans.


    ''Most likely they already seed in knowing the whole n of those abyss humans. But where is the president? Not only that I also cannot see the other elders. Did they still not recover and wanted to rest?''


    Most of those Warriors already think of these types of questions as being unable to see the president or the rest of the elders in that room.

 Chapter 633 633 - Decoding the Symbol

    Chapter 633  633 - Decoding the Symbol


    Inside the interrogation room, Philip fully concentrates on the symbol that appears on the left shoulder of that Abyss human. To reverse that symbol he needed to understand the whole mechanism of the symbol and how manyyers are present in the symbol.


    Not only that he also needed to understand what type of word was used to create those symbols. All this time he was using his spiritual vision technique that helped him to understand the details of these kinds of symbols.


    But you can say all this time he was also having trouble because those symbols were not created by only one spiritual energy. The person who created those symbols uses two types of spiritual energy while creating them and because of this all this time even though Philip uses his technique in full power and also concentrates on that symbol, he is still unable to understand 100% about that symbol.


    It already took 1 hour to understand at least 50% of the symbol. The good thing is that 30% of the symbol is simr to the previous mind control symbol. But after that, everything became weird, and most likely all of those get mutated because of the second spiritual energy.


    Fortunately, Andrew and the other elders were also present there. Right now Philip won''t be able to use portions to recover his spiritual energy. So in that matter, they could help him while channeling their spiritual energy into his body.


    With this Philip doesn''t need to break the concentration and he can fully concentrate on that symbol to understand the 100% details of that symbol.


    Sometimeter, a big fluctuation was created in that ce. Instantly everybody notices that they are most likely going to break free from that concentrated state but they do not get any kind of symbol that it is over so they instantly know something is happening to them.


    Instantly one elder came in front of Philip and then ced his hand on his shoulder. After that, he already began to channel his spiritual energy. Only then you can say that spiritual fluctuation begins to decrease and 2 minutester that spiritual fluctuationpletely disappears from that ce.


    Nobody knows why that spiritual fluctuation appears in that ce, but everybody can guess that spiritual fluctuation is most likely rted to the spiritual energy of Philip or his technique.


    30 minutester,


    The elder who previously provided his spiritual energy can suddenly feel that the absorption rate of his spiritual energy already increased. He also doesn''t know if his spiritual energy will be enough or not so he instantly signals to other elders.


    Nobody knows that Philip is now in a critical condition. Actually, in these 30 minutes, he was already able to decode 70% of that symbol. But suddenly something unexpected happened and the berserker spiritual energy began to counterattack. It absorbs the true spiritual energy from Philip very quickly.


    Most likely like this, that spiritual energy wanted to prevent Phillip from decoding 100% of that symbol. But Philip also did not worry about that as he had full trust in Andrew and the elders.


    30 minutester or you can say 1 hourter,


    Right now all the five elders are channeling their spiritual energy in Philip''s body. Currently, every one of them can feel the absorption rate of The Spiritual energy already increasing. Most likely Philip was already very close to decoding the 100% of the symbol so something like this already started to appear in that ce.


    "I must tell you that when I can get very close to decoding the symbol, an unexpected situation could ur in that ce. Well, you can say even if I created a symbol or array like this and some other people try to decode that array or symbol, then a simr situation will also appear in that ce.


    You can say this is a mechanism that installs in everyone up my symbol to counterattack in your observation technique that would be able to decode them. Naturally, I and all the array masters who created it like this also do the same thing.


    So if you suddenly feel The Spiritual fluctuation already increases then you can start providing me with your spiritual energy. The moment I started decoding the symbol I would not be able to break the concentration or I would need to start from the beginning if I lost concentration at that time."


    These were the things that Phillip told them before concentrating on that symbol. So because of this one by one every elder already started providing their spiritual energy and at this time they can already feel The Spiritual fluctuation already increased. Andrew also prepares himself to provide spiritual energy if it is necessary.


    _______________________


    Sometimeter,


    Finally when Andrew is about to join the elders to provide spiritual energy, The Spiritual fluctuation present in the room instantly disappears, and not only does that finally notice that Phillip closes his eyes.


    He instantly understands that Phillip has already finished decoding the whole symbol. So Andrew instantly signals all the elders to rest and recover their spiritual energy. Right now they should not disturb Phillip. He already decoded the 100% symbol and most likely he is right now thinking about how to reverse that symbol and what could be the most difficult step to reverse that symbol.


    Andrew is very familiar with Philip''s behavior. He also did a simr thing while understanding the Hion symbol. On the other hand, all the elders finally get the time to rx and they already begin to use their recovery technique to recover their lost spiritual energy.


    You have to say that nobody expected the absorption rate of Spiritual energy would be this much. Who could have thought that even though all five of them provided spiritual energy but still every one of them lost 70% of their spiritual energy?


    Nobody expected things like that would happen during this process. Also fortunately Philip did not start the process alone. Fortunately, all of them were present in that ce so that they could help him anytime when he needed it.


    _________________________________


    20 minutester,


    Philip finally opened his eyes. After that, he instantly uses The Spiritual recovery potion to recover The lost spiritual energy and at the same time, he looks toward Andrew with a smile on his face.


    "Haha¡­ I never expected aplex symbol like this would get created by those abyss humans. But I am already able to understand all the details of this symbol and right now I can reverse this. Fortunately, even the whole symbol got mutated because of the second spiritual energy g but the basic foundation of the symbol is the same as before.


    It is just that the fifthyer, eighthyer, and the 10thyer got fully rewritten and to understand thoseyers I needed all these times. Now I need it to reverse all these threeyers. Only then we will be able to control their mind without killing them and we will be able to know the main Motive of those people.


    But old friend I need your help at this time because during the process as you know, the absorption rate would be much higher. Most likely all the elders also needed to help me in that process."


    He told the president and all the elders that he finally understood whichyer he needed to reverse to reverse the whole symbol. Andrew and the others after hearing that naturally became happy but at the same time, Andrew knows that,pared to this process when Phillip concentrates fully on reversing the symbol it would be much more dangerous.


    During that time the absorption rate of The Spiritual would be much higherpared to this time so naturally Andrew was unable to help alone and they needed the help of those other elders. Because of this, Phillip told every elder to recover their spiritual energy and mental energy before starting the next process.


    _____________________________


    "Huu?? Where am I? Why can''t I see anything except the darkness? What happened to me, why can''t I feel my body? Did I just die? Why am I feeling this much restriction in my body?"


    A person suddenly opens his eyes while thinking about all of this. Right now he can only see darkness and other than the darkness he cannot see anything in his surrounding area.


    Even though he is now floating in that dark ce he did not get any kind of response from his body. Fortunately, he can only control his eyes and breathing. That person is trying to understand what is happening to him and why he is in a ce like this.


    But during this time he also feels many restrictions present in his body as it is like someone holding his body. Fortunately, he did not panic in a situation like this and stayed calm. In a situation like this, even he knows that he cannot get careless or start panicking. Before anything he needs to understand what is happening to him and why he is in a ce like this.


    __________________________________

 Chapter 634 634 - Reverse process

    Chapter 634  634 - Reverse process


    Phillip already started the process after all of them recovered their full spiritual energy. This time naturally all the elders also wanted to support their President and Philip in that process as every one of them could tell how much the absorption of The Spiritual energy would cause damage.


    Philip is already able to create twoyers and he already begins to create the thirdyer. Until now the absorption of Spiritual energy was minimal and because of this, he and the elder who provided the spiritual energy did not face that kind of problem.


    But sometimeter, when Phillip after sessfully creating the fourthyer begins to create the reverse fifthyer, he begins to feel the absorption rate already increased and the elder who provides the spiritual energy all the time also can feel that.


    Finally, Philip begins to reverse one of the main mutated patterns of that symbol, it already begins to cause side effects for that.


    _______________________


    30 minutester,


    Right now all five elders already started providing their spiritual energy but still, you can say a huge spiritual fluctuation has already been created in the ce and every one of those elders is already facing a troublesome situation.


    Every one of them is already very close to losing their 100% spiritually but fortunately, Andrew is present there and he already started providing his spiritual energy. Fortunately, it gives all the elders the time to recover their spiritual energy using the spiritual potions.


    Right now, all the elders have already be full of sweat. This time Philip is creating the reverse eightyer and a huge absorption was created. Even though all the five elders provide Spiritual energy, it still looks like it isn''t enough.


    It did not give any elder the time to use any portion, but fortunately, Andrew is present there and he begins to provide his spiritual energy. It gives all the elders the time to recover their spiritual energy after that they once again begin to channel their spiritual energy into Philip.


    On the other hand, if you look at Philip then you will notice he was in a dangerous situation. He is now fully concentrating on the process but if he loses his focus event for a second then it will immediately affect him.


    You will receive a huge mental attack that he won''t be able to prevent. Fortunately, all the elders and Andrew were not providing the spiritual energy and it helped Phillip to maintain his concentration.


    ______________________________


    "I know all of you are very eager to know about the real motivation of those Abyss humans, unfortunately, to know about the real motive we needed to face the mental barrier of those Abyss humans.


    If we try to use our mind control technique to control the minds of those Abyss humans, then immediately a barrier-like thing will get activated that is present inside of those Abyss humans. That barrier will immediately kill those Abyss humans.


    Everything will happen in a millisecond that you won''t be able to react on time and even though previously we tried to prevent that unfortunately we were unable to do that. Fortunately, Sir Phillip told us about that symbol and he also told us this symbol is forbidden.


    Most likely every one of you already knows about the Hion symbol and as you know that is also a forbidden symbol like this mind control symbol. This mind control symbol, even though it isn''t dangerous like that Hion symbol, is also a forbidden technique that will immediately kill the person who has that symbol present in his body.


    It is specially made to prevent any type of mental attack that would reveal the memory of the person who has that symbol present in his body.


    Sir Phillip told us that if this is just a normal symbol then after using a special method We would still be able to prevent that barrier from getting activated but right now as two types of spiritual energy are present inside of those abyss humans, we won''t be able to do anything until sir Philip did not reverse that whole symbol.


    Because of this, it is taking this long. I hope everyone did not get impatient and wait for our President and all the others to finish their process to know about the memory of those Abyss humans.


    The good news is that we already received that Sir Phillip is already able to understand the whole details of that mind control symbol and he also tells us that as he thought earlier that symbol already got mutated because of two types of spiritual energy.


    With that, it is 100% sure that every one of those Abyss humans holds some kind of important information and because of this, the mastermind or even those Abyss humans did not want to reveal that kind of information to us.


    Also, some of you know about the serious incident that happened previously but most of you did not know about this. Fortunately, the president already told us to give you the information. But before providing the information I Hope that every one of you did not reveal this information to anyone as it will immediately create chaos.


    Every warrior with a mind or even a citizen will immediately get terrified after knowing this information. It could be that they will also lose the motivation to grow stronger or to help our Terraria."


    After saying that the elders wait for some time so that every one of those Warriors present in the meeting room digest all the information that he provided them.


    They did not reveal the whole information to those Warriors except a few of them. As they weren''t sure if those Warriors would be able to keep the secret or not. But the thing is that the president already told them to reveal the information to those warriors but before revealing that they should Warren every one of those warriors that none of them were allowed to reveal this information.


    All the Warriors present in the meeting room can already feel the seriousness of this matter and as the elders told them, they already decided not to reveal any kind of information. Even though they did not have any idea about the information that the elder would tell them, all of them nodded and decided not to reveal any kind of information rted to this matter.


    "Everyone of you already knows that previously before those Monsters came to the danger zone many dark humans came to the danger. Even though those dark humans did not approach the kingdom, they are still present in the danger zone and waiting for the order from their mastermind to attack the kingdom.


    But what if I told you that those dark humans weren''t real dark humans? What if those dark humans were normal Warriors a few days ago?


    I can tell it is an unbelievable thing but it is the truth of this matter. All of those dark humans were normal Warriors a few days ago but every one of them got captured by those Abyss humans and then every one of them got through an experiment from those Abyss humans and turned into this.


    After that experiment, those Warriors already became dark humans and they already lost their previous memories as a mental barrier also ced inside of their head.


    Not only that because of that symbol present on their forehead, the mastermind could easily control them even just with his thought that if he wanted them dead then every one of those dark humans would immediately die.


    Not only that, the most dangerous thing is that as two types of spiritual energy have already invaded their body, it is already causing very dangerous things. Because of this, those Warriors are already losing their life span and also losing the true spiritual energy from their body.


    The moment they will lose 100% of their true spiritual energy they will immediately die. Fortunately, we were able to find out that matter, and with the help of Sir Phillip, we were able to prevent any of those dark humans from exploding.


    As you can say there are three types of spirits represented inside the body of those dark humans and the mastermind could easily control the whole spiritual system of those dark humans, he could easily kill all of them just with his thoughts and he could easily control all the three types of spiritual energy to explode at once.


    Those three types of spiritual energy will try to fuse with each other and a side effect will immediately get created by that. If we do not prevent that side effect then immediately every one of those dark humans will explode and from that explosion, a huge destruction will be created that would immediately kill all the citizens and that whole Kingdom will explode.


    Fortunately, we were able to prevent those dark humans from exploding, and also because of the help of our elders, president, Sir Phillip, and brave Warrior Sam, we were able to help those dark humans get back to normal.


    But unfortunately, that process is not that easy, and in the process to help those dark humans who just above get exploded Sam also uses his spiritual energy even after ignoring the limit of his body¡­"


    [A/N:- Hey guys, after this a time skip will happen.]

 Chapter 635 635 - Final match

    <h4>Chapter 635 Chapter 635 - Final match</h4>


    1 monthter,


    Finally, today will be the final match of those peak Epic grade Warriors who participated in thepetition. As you can tell today is the final match so basically the full Kingdom is full of people.


    Everyone was already present in the battle stadium and everyone was very excited for the final match. The final match is between a Dragonite and a human. Surprisingly both of them were finally able to defeat all of their opponents and in the end, they qualified for the final match.


    From the Dragonite kingdom, the prince of that Kingdom is present in the battle now while from the human Kingdom, it is the prince of the human Kingdom who is present in the battle arena. Both of the princes were able to defeat all of their opponents and qualify for the final match.


    Because of this, you can say this became a very interesting match as the match will be happening between two Princes. Not only that, but both of the princes are also very powerful and everybody likes to see who will be the final winner of this match.


    Every one of those Warriors and the royal family from other kingdoms were also present in the battle arena. Even though people from their Kingdom already lost the match, they still wanted to see who would be the winner.


    With these, they were able to motivate people to train hard and win the next match. All the people who have friendly rtionships with the human Kingdom naturally support the human Prince. The same thing is also happening with the Dragonite kingdom. All the kingdoms that have a bad rtionship with the human Kingdom naturally support The Dragonite Prince.


    But both of the princes did not care about any of those people as both of them fully concentrated on their match. From the start, both of them used their full power to win the match and they already started preparing their attack and just waiting for the signal of the referee.


    Kindly the human King alongside other Kings naturally looks toward the battle arena with excitement. On the other hand, most of the Warriors of the Warrior Association who previously provided security in the danger zone where those other battle arenas were created already came back to the Warrior Association''s headquarters.


    They already increase the security around the human Kingdom as today will be thest match and today is a very important day for everyone. The referee before anything asks both of the warriors if they are ready or not.


    Both of the warriors nodded at him with the referee finally giving them the signal to fight. Instantly, the whole Sky was filled with dark clouds. Everything happened so quickly that it made most of the people very surprised but then many people could already predict Who was behind this attack.


    The human Prince is very good at controlling the lightning elements; he is the one who controls those dark clouds. While on the other hand, The Dragonite Prince already uses his mighty force to create a huge shockwave.


    Don''t underestimate that shockwave as it contains Spiritual energy that already has destructive properties in it. The shockwave directly went toward the human Prince.


    Fortunately, before that shockwave could affect the human Prince a thunderbolt instantly came down from the dark clouds in front of the human prince. That thunderbolt instantly destroyed the whole area where itnded. Not only that it also uses its destructive power to counterattack that destructive shockwave.


    The Dragon Prince predicted something like this would happen so in the next second you can see a huge fire dragon created. The color of that fire dragon has already turned purple. Not only that the moment that fire dragon appeared in that ce a huge amount of Dragon force spread.


    Every person present in the battle stadium can already feel that Dragon Force. The Dragon Force is so powerful that many people with weak willpower would have already been affected by that, but fortunately, those Warriors with enough willpower already started counter attacking that force so that it did not affect those civilians and those people with weak willpower.


    That isn''t your normal fire dragon as the fire dragon alongside the fire element has the power of the Dragon force. If you are wondering about the Dragon force then it is the natural force that any dragonite is created from their body as they have Dragon genes present in their body.


    That Dragon force instantly makes that fire dragon almost turn into an original Dragon and also it makes that fire dragon more stronger than before.


    "Roar!!!!!!!!!"


    That fire dragon instantlytched out a huge Roar that once again already started affecting most of the people as that road contained Spiritual energy and alongside the spiritual energy it contained the Dragon force.


    The fire dragon wanted to say by doing this that the opponent in front of him was just an ant. Naturally, the human Prince did not stay ideal as he had already seen that dangerous fire dragon that appeared in that ce.


    So he has already begun to use his next technique to create one of his most powerful attacks. Even though the roar of the Dragon almost cleared those dark clouds from the sky, still arge amount of dark clouds were present in the sky and suddenly those dark clouds began to produce lightning.


    "Roar!!!!!!!!"


    This time no thunderbolts came out from those dark clouds. But instead of that you can see a white light suddenly appear in front of those dark clouds and then directly that begin to go toward that fire dragon.


    From a distance, everyone will just think it is a normal light-type attack. But actually, this is the case as that life got created by the thundermans and a huge amount of energy is present inside of that thunder beam.


    Even for a peak Epic grade Warrior this attack would be very dangerous if he was unable to react on time. Even that Dragonite prince could feel the dangering out from that thunder beam. Instantly a huge fire beam was created by that fire dragon that was already going toward that Thunder beam.


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    Sometimeter a huge explosion was created in mid-air. The whole battle stadium began to shake because of the impact of that attack. But it looks like the power behind that thunder beam is much more powerfulpared to that fire beam. Even though both of the attacks sh with each other, in the end, the thunder beam can erase that fire beam and directly begin to go toward that fire dragon.


    It would have already hit that fire dragon if suddenly that fire dragon did not use the force barrier to protect himself and at the same time it once again attacked that fire beam while creating a huge fireball.


    First of all, both of the Warriors would like to fight each other from a distance so none of them are trying to use their movement technique to get close to each other. This also gives him the time to prepare for their attack.


    10 minutester,


    Both of the Warriors use their movement technique to jump backward. Not only that 50 m area of that battle ring already got destroyed. All of these happened because both of their attacks were able to deflect each other and in the end hit the battle ring.


    If both of them did not maintain their distance, they would have gotten caught in that attack and would be in a serious situation. But fortunately, both of them already reacted in time and created distance from the ce where that destruction appeared.


    In the next second a huge Dragon fire beam was created from that fire again and that already began to go to work the human prince. This time that wasn''t your normal fire beam as it contained almost 70% of the Dragon force alongside with 100% fire element.


    Almost the color of that fire turned ck and anybody could predict how dangerous it had be for the prince of the human Kingdom.


    Suddenly a spiritual barrier appears in front of that prince but that is the only case as more and more spiritual barriers begin to appear in front of the human Prince. This time even though the human Prince is unable to counterattack using his attack,


    Fortunately this time he focused on the spiritual barrier while channeling most of the spiritual energy in that barrier to make it more stronger that would be able to save him from that attack.


    Even though because of that attack almost 5 of the Spiritual barriers had already been destroyed, fortunately those other 5yers were able to prevent that attack from harming the human prince.


    But this is a very exhausting way to protect himself while his enemy could have the strength to still attack him. But other than this in that moment, he also did not have any other technique to protect himself.


    A huge impact got created because of that attacked and that almost sent the human prince backward.

 Chapter 636 636 - The Dragonite Prince vs The Human Prince

    <h4>Chapter 636 Chapter 636 - The Dragonite Prince vs The Human Prince</h4>


    The human Prince finally gets the chance to fight back In a few seconds the Dragon Prince stops attacking him and that allows the human Prince to back away from that ce and instantly attack the Dragonite prince using his thunder beam.


    This time the thunder beam did note down from those dark clouds as it was created by the human prince. You can see he extended his hand toward the Dragon Prince and a huge amount of thunder element got created in that ce that finally turned into the thunder beam.


    The Dragonite prince stopped attacking because maintaining the fire dragon was quite exhausting as he also needed to use the Dragon force all this time. He can already feel he is losing his spiritual energy much morepared to the human prince.


    Naturally, he did not want to get exhausted that quickly so he stopped attacking and instantly jumped back away from that ce. He already knows the human Prince will use these chances to attack him.


    The thunder beam is much faster and the Dragon Prince did not get the chance to create a spiritual barrier. In the end, he needed to jump from his previous ce using full strength to avoid the thunder beam. But as you know the thunder element is very destructivepared to any other element, it is still able to affect the Dragonite prince.


    __________________________


    Using the thunder element and movement technique the human Prince finally came in front of the Dragon Prince and already used the thunder w attack. Both of his hands got turned into the monster''s ws. Naturally, both of the ws were created by the thunder element.


    The Dragonite Prince this time already prepared to counter-attack and he instantly created the firewall in front of him.


    "Boom!!!!!"


    A huge impact was created after both of the attacks shed with each other. Also, it looks like that firewall has Dragon Force in it. Because of this, the moment both of the thunderws hit the firewall, all the dragon force present in the firewall already repelled the attack and at the same time attacked the human prince.


    _________________________


    Almost 6 hourster,


    It looks like both of the princes are already very close to losing their spiritual energy. For 6 hours they continuously fight each other without resting or getting the time to recover their spiritual energy.


    Both of them are already able to destroy each other''s armor and also able to injure each other. Both of them burn marks present on their body at the same time both of them have serious injuries present on their bodies. Blood already starteding out from those injuries.


    Even though both of them have healing techniques, they did not get the time to fully heal their injuries using the healing technique.


    Both of them right now know that they need to end the fight as quickly as they can. Once again both Warriors decided to attack each other from a distance while using their most powerful attack.


    Both of them quickly jump almost to the end of the battle ring and after that already begin to prepare their final attack. All the audience present in the battle stadium and even all the royal family and Kings present in the battle stadium could tell that both of the participants were preparing for their final attack.


    So naturally it was a very tense moment for every one of those people as some of them supported the human Prince while some of them supported the Dragonite prince. Nobody knows who will be the winner so they can only look at the final attack of those participants without getting distracted.


    The Spiritual fluctuation suddenly appears on the whole battle ring as both participants prepare for their final attack. Both of them wanted to finish their final Attack before the other party could finish, and because of this, the spiritual fluctuation just kept increasing.


    If it wasn''t for The Spiritual barrier that was already created by the Warriors from the warrior association, many audiences would have already been affected by that powerful spiritual fluctuation. Both the participants are peak Epic grade Warriors, and both of them used their final attack so they are spiritual fluctuation gotbined and made a powerful spiritual fluctuation that already crossed the limit of Epic grade.


    The whole sky above the battle stadium was fully covered in dark clouds and from those dark clouds, you could already see the thunder element almosting out. But on the other hand, the temperature of that whole ce already began to increase and suddenly 10 fire pirs were created around the whole stadium.


    Not only those 10 fire pirs but at the same time above those 10 fire pirs, you can already see 10 fire Dragons appear and every one of them absorbing a huge amount of spiritual energy while preparing their final attack using the fire element and the Dragon force.


    It seems the human Prince got surrounded in all directions by those fire pirs and those fire dragons, but that does not mean you underestimate those dark clouds. A huge amount of energy fluctuation gets created in those dark clouds as the whole dark clouds containing the thunder element most likely gather in one spot for the final attack.


    Like this, after 5 minutes both of the Warriors did not attack each other as both of them concentrated on their final attack, during the time the Warrior Association already prepared the medical team to interfere in the match the moment the match became dangerous for any Warriors.


    Most likely both participants already forget that they should not try to kill each other. Both of them already decided not to hold back against each other and that could be dangerous. First of all, both of them were already losing blood and as they were preparing for their final attack the situation of those injuries already became serious.


    At the same time, you can say both participants are already very low on mental energy as they continuously use the mental energy to support their final attack.


    After 5 minutester both of them are already ready to attack each other and wasting no time those 10 fire Dragons instantly release fire beams toward the human Prince. Not just those fire beams but at the same time from those fire pirs you can see countless Fireballs started going toward the direction of the human Prince.


    At the same time, 5 thunder balls the size of a cricket ball have already started going toward the direction of the Dragonite Prince. But you should not underestimate those 5 thunderballs. All those 5 thunder balls contain a huge amount of thunder elements and at the same time, the color of those balls already turned dark.


    Almost everything around those thunderballs got destroyed even though thunderballs did not attack anything. The speed of those thunderballs isn''t slow. Compared to those fireballs and fire beams, the speed of those thunderballs is much more.


    This is the final attack of both of the participants and after creating their final attack both participants already use the remaining spiritual energy to create a barrier around them to protect themselves. The Dragonite Prince uses the fire element to create firewalls while the human Prince creates the thundering wall in front of him.


    But this time anybody could tell the power of those walls are weak. It naturally shows that both of them are very low on spiritual energy. Fortunately, the team of Warriors already interferes with the match anytime the moment they get orders from the de King.


    Both participants can already feel the danger that is almost in front of them and both of them are using thest bit of their strength to protect themselves and hope their opponent will get defeated by that attack.


    _____________________________


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    The whole battle stadium was shaken by the vibration that was created after the final attack hit both of the participants.


    That instantly created a huge amount of vibration almost like an earthquake that began to shake the whole battle stadium. Not only that vibration as a very powerful impact also got created and that directly spread around the whole battle stadium.


    For almost 5 minutes all the warriors from the warrior association needed to use their full power to make the spiritual barrier more powerful so that they were able to handle the impact. Even though they were able to repal most of the impact, some of the impact waves already entered the battle stadium and all the people present in the battle stadium felt the impact and its power.


    Almost most of the citizens and most of the low-grade Warriors were affected by that. For 5 minutes everyone thought they were going to die. You can say, around 10% of the impact wave enters the whole battle stadium and even with that 10% impact wave, those people feel like. They cannot even know how they would be if they were directly affected by the 100% impact wave.

 Chapter 637 637 - Strange energy

    Chapter 637  637 - Strange energy


    "Where the hell am I right now? Hello!!! anyone there? Did I just die ande to another world or did I be so blind that I cannot see anything? Why the hell other than the darkness I am unable to see anything? Did someone capture me to experiment on my body? Did someone get to know about my system and that person captured me?"


    You can see a person shouting like this as he cannot see anything other than the darkness around him. He cannot even tell if he is dead or not.


    Hepletely forgot how much time has passed until now and he likes to see a little bit of light in that darkness. At first, that person was fully calm butter he began to panic in that situation as he really could not see anything nor did he feel anything.


    It was like someone fully blocked all of his instincts. So other than the darkness he is unable to see anything or unable to feel anything. Even though he tried to use his power, he realized he was unable to use any of his power. It is like he did not have any kind of spiritual energy present inside of his body.


    Because of this, he thought he once again died and came to this ce. It made him disappointed that he died like this and at the same time he already started to worry about his. He did not solve the huge problem of approaching Eden Blue, nor did he go back to his and contact his family.


    All this time he was just thinking about all of this. Naturally, that person is Sam who is now floating in that dark ce where he haspletely lost sense of direction and doesn''t know what to do in that situation. The situation around him almost made him go insane but fortunately, he tried to calm down.


    As you know at first Sam did not even have the strength to control his body, but right now the situation is different as he finally gets back the strength to control his body and he can feel he is floating in the sky.


    '' Panicking won''t be able to help me in this situation. I need to think of something to get out of this situation. This situation is making me mentally exhausted and I don''t know how long I will be able to keep my consciousness like this without getting insane.


    Don''t know why but even though I am unable to feel The Spiritual energy in my body or the surrounding area, I can tell some type of different energy present in this ce. I should try my best to fill that energy as I feel that would be the only way I would be able to get out of this situation.''


    Sam already tries to use his spiritual energy but unfortunately, he is unable to feel The Spiritual energy present inside of his body or in the surrounding area.


    That almost makes him go insane, but fortunately during the time while trying to feel The Spiritual energy he most likely feels some kind of strange energy present in that ce. But he is unable to feel that energy or have any kind of information about that energy.


    So Sam decided this time to reach that energy as he can feel only that way most likely he would be able to get out of this situation.


    With that Sam finally decided to meditate as he did not have any other way to fill the strange spiritual energy present in that ce. Actually, at first, he thought he once again came inside of his dream world where he previously met the goddess who gave him the system. Because of these at first, he did not panic like this butter when he realized that wasn''t the case. He could not feel anything in that ce, and from that moment he started panicking.


    Like this, even though Sam is floating he is able to cross his leg seat in the meditation position. After that, he tried to clear his mind full of worried thoughts. Fortunately, he can reach the mind zero state sometimeter as he already knows the trick to calm down.


    After reaching the mind zero he finally tried to sense the energy present in that ce. But that wasn''t easy as even though he could tell of a strange type of energy present in the ce, it waspletely differentpared to the spiritual energy, and also because of this, it has be hard for him to feel that energy.


    Even though Sam did not know how many different types of spiritual energy there are, he is sure about one thing: every spiritual energy has something inmon with them. It is just the characteristic of those spiritual energy is different but other than that the most basic thing about those spiritual energy is the same.


    But right now when he tries to use the same way to feel the strange energy, he is unable to gasp. But that does not mean he will give up as he wanted to find that strange energy to get out of that situation.


    Unknown timeter,


    Sam finally opened his eyes. Even though you cannot see anything nor his face in the situation, if you can look at him then you will see he is smiling right now. Finally, he can feel the strange spiritual energy much clearerpared to the previous time.


    Unfortunately, he did not know how long it would take him to feel the strange energy. But the thing is that he can only feel a little bit of that new energy and other than that he is unable to gasp that new energy.


    Before anything he needed to establish the connection and also he wanted to see if he could absorb that spiritual energy inside of his body. Don''t know why but he has a feeling that he would be able to absorb that energy.


    So from now on he will fully focus on meditating but sometimes he will also try to find any kind of source of light in the dark ce. Hepletely lost track of time in the outside world and because of this, he did not know if it was day or night.


    After recovering the mental energy Sam decided to meditate once again while once again he was trying to feel that weird energy present in that ce. That is hard for him to feel that strange energy as it feels like some kind of barrier preventing him from approaching that energy.


    Once again and unknown timeter finally Sam bes happy. He was finally able to feel that energy present in that ce. Also as he already predicted earlier that energy waspletely different from the spiritual energy and even a single beat of simrity wasn''t present in that energy.


    ''So, is this new energy? Did we also have a second type of energy other than spiritual energy? But I don''t think anyone using this energy or even the goddess previously told me about this energy.


    So what is this energy that I feel in this ce and also why I am feeling this much restriction if I try to approach that spiritual energy? Why does it feel like my full body is hurting the moment I try to approach that spiritual energy even though I am not receiving any kind of damage from anyone? ''


    Sam is thinking all of these questions as he doesn''t know what is happening to him. He is trying to approach that strange energy all the time after being able to sense that energy, but unfortunately, he can''t approach that energy.


    Every time he tries to approach that energy he feels like his whole body is burning. Sam is sure that he is receiving any kind of physical damage or damage from any kind of spiritual techniques.


    So why the hell did he receive that kind of pain? Not only that every time he tries to approach that energy you can say he also feels very restricted and even breathing bes a problem for him and he loses his concentration.


    But unfortunately, other than approaching that energy he did not have any other thing to do at this moment. He cannot use his spirituality nor can he use any of the techniques. So, other than approaching this strange energy he did not have anything to do at this moment.


    With that, he once again decided to rest so that his mental energy was able to recover. He was also feeling the burning sensation present in his body, so he was also waiting for that burning sensation to fade away.


    _____________________________


    Finally, Sam opened his eyes and he instantly saw a light present in front of his eyes. But that does not make him happy at that moment as he once again suffers from a burning sensation and also he feels like his head is going to burst.


    He did not know how long he was in that position but once again he closed his eyes to meditate and enter The Mind''s zero state. After that, he was once again able to feel that strange energy present in that. Naturally, he decided to approach that energy but this time he did that very carefully as he did not want to use his mental energy that much and also did not want to feel that burning sensation.


    Sam even forgets how many times he tries to approach that energy but every time he has the same situation and because of this it makes him very frustrated. But all this time while approaching that energy he was also observing his condition and also remembering every detail of those failures.

 Chapter 638 638 - The prison

    <h4>Chapter 638 Chapter 638 - The prison</h4>


    To approach that energy he needed to follow a basic rhythm that he was unable to follow all the time. Every spiritual energy has a different kind of rhythm and to approach them you need to follow that rhythm. Every Warrior from the moment able to absorb the Spiritual energy could easily follow the rhythm and because of this, nobody has any kind of problem while approaching The Spiritual energy.


    But every different spiritual energy naturally has a different kind of rhythm. Even though the main property of the rhythm could be the same, naturally it becamepletely different in other parts.


    Because of this, you can say every warrior who uses true spiritual energy is unable to absorb or use the dark spiritual energy or the berserker spiritual energy. But still, even with that they could follow the basic rhythm of those spiritual energies and because of this as you noticed previously Sam and all the other elders of the warrior association and even the President were able to approach those to different spiritual energies that were inside of those dark humans.


    Because both of those variants havepletely different rhythms other than the basic rhythm, in the end, it takes the president and all the other elders that much time to expel that spiritual energy from the body of those dark humans or you can say those Warriors.


    Fortunately, Sam got to know about this after reading the books in the human kingdom''s Royal Library. He got to know about this matter but then it wasn''t that much of an interesting topic for him as he could use the Origin spiritual energy that is mixed with all the spiritual energy that you can find in any ce.


    Because of this, if you try topare the rhythm of the origin spiritual energy with various types of other spiritual energy then you would be able to find that every one of them has a simrity with the origin spiritual energy. This is also a reason that previously Sam was easily able to exin the spiritual energy from the body of those Warriors and in the end able to save those Warriors.


    All this time, Sam is unable to follow the rhythm of that energy, and because of this, every time he tries to approach that energy he is prevented by that energy. That energy has apletely different rhythmpared to any spiritual energy or evenpared to the Origin spiritual energy.


    All this time he was not able to realize that butter he finally was able to realize that. So after realizing the fact he tries to understand the rhythm of that energy. But don''t think understanding the rhythm would be easy for anyone. You need to have 100% concentration while observing the rhythm of any energy.


    That is the most difficult part for him even though he is able to achieve the mind zero state. While he is trying to fully concentrate to understand the rhythm of that energy he can also feel that his mental energy is getting absorbed rapidly and that is the most difficult part.


    But finally, you can say he can understand the basics of the rhythm, and this time using that rhythm he can get close to that energy. If you are wondering how you can follow the rhythm of the energy then you just need to move your body that follows that rhythm.


    This time he isn''t using his body to follow that rhythm as he is using the mental energy to follow the rhythm while he can approach that energy. Not only was he able to approach that energy but he was able to absorb a little bit of that energy but instantly he came out from that state andpletely lost the mind zero state.


    He is now fully mentally exhausted and at thest moment he is unable to follow the rhythm of it could be that he is only able to follow the basic rhythm of that energy, but Sam still receives damage from that energy, and the same as before his whole body fully burning right now.


    Even though physically he isn''t receiving any kind of damage like this, any kind of spiritual techniques did not affect him. But it is like his mind telling his full body that he is on fire and because of this, he also feels that burning situation all over his body and that is painful for him.


    Because of this even though after opening his eyes he can see a bit of light in front of him, he does not be happy at that moment as he needs to recover the mental energy needed to recover from that burning sensation.


    _________________________


    Unknown time letter,


    He was finally able to recover both his mental energy and his health. Not only that he finally decided to approach the light that he finally could see in that darkness. Sam doesn''t know how long he has been in that position while trying to reach that energy.


    But fortunately, he was able to finally see a light and with that, he started floating in that direction. Finally, in the darkness, he was able to see a bit of light and that instantly gave him the hope to get out of that situation.


    He is now using his full power to approach that light and the strange thing is that the more he approaches the light the more he can feel that some kind of restriction is getting lifted from his body. He feelsfortable the more he goes toward that light and at the same time he can feel that his mind is getting clear every second.


    Finally, when he reaches close to that light he can sense the presence of spiritual energy. That almost lifted a huge burden from his body. As you know previously for a moment he thought he died and came to this ce. But with the presence of The Spiritual energy, he can confirm he is still present in his old world, and also as he predicted earlier that a dark ce is like a prison for him that restricts his body from doing anything.


    Most likely at first it can restrict the physical strength of his body. But from the beginning, he was unable to restrict his mental energy and to use the mental energy he somehow managed to get away from the restrictions and was able to use his physical strength.


    He did that unconsciously and because of this, he also doesn''t know how to use his mental technique to break free from those other restrictions. It looks like somehow after absorbing that little bit of that strange energy his mental energy gains a boost, and with that, he finally manages to create an opening in that prison.


    Sam doesn''t know but all of this that he predicted is true. That isn''t your normal prison as it gets created inside of his mind. All this time he physically wasn''t present there as it was just his consciousness present there.


    After using the Origin spiritual energy continuously during the time when he was saving those dark humans, he already broke the limit of his body and his mind and because of this, he received that side effect that created that present which captured the consciousness of Sam.


    Only people with strong mental energy would be able to get away from that kind of prison. Even though Sam has a strong mentality and willpower, that wasn''t enough for him to break out of that prison.


    Fortunately, because of that strange energy, his mental energy got a boost and became stronger. Also, this is the reason that he was able to create the opening in that prison and finally, he came out from that prison. All the time prison puts restrictions all over his body and that is also the reason he is unable to feel The Spiritual energy in his body.


    The moment he came out from that prison you can say all the restrictions that he previously felt in his body were already lifted from his body and also a warm feeling instantly appeared in his mind.


    ________________________


    Warrior Association headquarters,


    Livia, Maria, and Emma as usual present in the medical room where you can see Sam is lying down on the bed. All three of them already finished theirpetition and with that, they did not want to stay in their home and came to the headquarters to apany Sam in the tough situation.


    Not only three of them but every day the president and many other Warriors will also visit him to check his condition and also to talk to him. The medical report shows that he is fully recovered from the brain injuries but even with that something is preventing him from waking up.


    That could be the side effect of crossing the limit of his mental energy while helping those Warriors. Because of this, the elder suggested to every Warriors that for some time if it is possible they woulde to that medical room to talk to Sam about various things.


    The elder wanted Sam to somehow be able to hear all of these. It could make his willpower more stronger and with that, it is a possibility that he would be able to wake up. Because of this, the elder requests every one of those Warriors to visit him.


    Butpared to any of those warriors, Maria, Emma, and Livia most of the time stay with Sam. Even both the king and queens of the human Kingdom and the Oni Kingdom will apany Sam. Unfortunately, because of thepetition, they are unable to spend most of their time with Sam.


    That is also a reason that both the old Kings are unable to visit Sam much like any other Warriors. First of all, they like to concentrate on getting stronger but at the same time, they need to observe the situation of their Kingdom all the time so that nothing like the incident of the Viet kingdom would happen to their Kingdom.

 Chapter 639 639 - Sudden situation

    <h4>Chapter 639 Chapter 639 - Sudden situation</h4>


    "Beep¡­ Beep¡­ Beep¡­ "


    The instrument that measures the heartbeat of Sam suddenly begins to show the result of the heartbeat of Sam getting abnormally high. All this time the heartbeat of Sam was normal but suddenly it became high like this and that instantly alerted Livia, Maria, and Emma.


    At this moment the caretaker Sam is just about to enter the medical room to see his condition. The moment she entered the room she already saw the condition of the instrument and that instantly made her alert.


    Wasting no time she quickly calls the elder toe to that room as he will be the one who will check Sam. Sometimeter, the president alongside all the elders was already present in that medical room.


    Every one of them can also see the abnormality that suddenly appears on the instrument that measures the heartbeat of Sam. Everyone present in that room has a serious face, as none of them can tell what is happening with Sam.


    The elder who is in charge of healing Sam already uses the healing Ray technique alongside other members of the medical team. All of them have only one Motive right now. At any condition, they wanted to make Sam''s condition normal.


    Livia and Maria get scared because of that abnormal situation. Both of them already thought that something bad was happening with Sam, and it could also have been the reason for his death. Emma at this time also scared Maria and Livia, but she isn''t showing that in her face as she is now handling both of them so that they did not be unconscious.


    Not long after that, the human King alongside other people came there to see what the real situation was. Sometimeter except for the medical team member everyone already came outside of the medical room. Well everyone naturally left the medical room as they did not want to disturb all the healers who were in charge of healing Sam.


    But every one of them hoped that nothing bad happened to Sam. All of them prayed for Sam. Both the queen''s already handling their daughters while both the kings and all the other people are looking toward the medical room with a serious face.


    During that time nobody tried to make any sound as it could make the medical team member district. Almost an hourter, unexpected situations ur that make them more worried. A spiritual fluctuation suddenly urs in the medical room. Also, that spiritual fluctuation ispletely different from the spiritual fluctuation that was created because of using the healing Ray techniques.


    Naturally, none of the medical team members or the elders used any other technique at this moment so anybody could tell that the source of that sudden spiritual fluctuation is most likely Sam. Anybody could tell something most likely happening with his body and that makes all of them more worried about his situation.


    As everyone knows, he suffered a huge damage in his mind. Even though all the injuries healed and his body was in perfect condition, that wasn''t enough for Sam to wake up. But all this time nothing like this situation urred with him and as today that sudden abnormality appeared everyone thought something bad happened to him.


    As the elder previously told everyone all the injuries present in the brain of Sam were really hard for him to heal. So what if those injuries once again appear on his brain? What if he is still suffering from the side effects of forcefully Breaking the limit?


    Everyone thinks like this when they can feel the spiritual fluctuation begin to decrease. Not long after that the elder came out of the medical room but all the medical team members were still present in that room and using the healing Ray technique.


    When the elder came out of the medical room the president and all the other Warriors wanted to get the answer from him. But before they could ask him any question they were very surprised as the elder right now did not have a serious expression on his face. The expression on his face shows apletely different thing that makes every one of them very confused.


    Livia and Maria unfortunately did not see the smile, so they quickly rushed to him to ask about Sam''s condition. Because of both of them, all the other people present in the room also went toward the elder to ask him about the situation.


    "Haha¡­ I told you earlier, that you will not die like this. He has great willpower. If you are all wondering why I am telling you all of these then it is because we found something that is the reason behind all of this.


    Well at first we used the healing Ray technique to heal every injury that suddenly appeared on his body. Butter we realized that is the case with his body. I already scanned his whole body and was able to find that somehow all the cells of his body became more activepared to before.


    Not only does it be more active but at the same time every one of them absorbs spiritual energy crazily. The absorption rate was so high that it almost created spiritual fluctuation. But fortunately, we were able to stabilize the condition. We are able to make every one of those body cells stop absorbing The Spiritual energy like that.


    Previously his heartbeat became like this because all of his body became active. It is a good sign and with that, I can give you the guarantee that he will wake up. Most likely, because of his willpower he is already able to break through from that mental prison that keeps him from waking up."


    The elder gave every one of them that news with a smile. The moment everyone hears that news for a second everyone cannot believe that word, butter everyone feels like a huge burden lifted away from their body.


    Maria and Livia still cannot believe but when they get once again confirmed by the elder they finally get happy and want to rush back to the medical room. But the elders stop them from doing that as currently, they should not disturb all the medical team members.


    Under the healing right the whole body of Sam which was previously active while starting to absorb The Spiritual energy, already begins to calm down. So because of this, nobody should disturb them.


    ________________________________


    Slowly Sam opened his eyes. You can say it is very hard for him at that moment as he feels that someone is putting pressure on his eyes and preventing him from opening his eyes.


    But fortunately after some timeter he finally got the strength to open his eyes. The moment Sam opened his eyes, he almost closed them once again as his eyes did not get adjusted to see the light directly like this.


    It takes him some time to adjust himself and only then he is able to see clearly what is the situation and he also finally gets to observe his surroundings. Sam was very surprised the moment Sam saw all the people who were most likely in charge of healing him suddenly stop whatever they were doing previously and at the same time all of them had confused faces.


    It looks like they still cannot believe what they are seeing right now. Sam also doesn''t know how to respond to them so he just continuously looks toward them while blinking his eyes. Most likely after sometimeter all of them finally get back to their senses and they instantly begin tough.


    The elders and all the other people present outside of the medical room also get confused by that sudden situation. Naturally, they get confused when suddenly they feel The Spiritual fluctuation that previously came out because all the medical team members using the healing Ray, instantly disappear from that ce.


    Nobody at that moment was able to see that Sam already opened his eyes. So they were really confused after seeing those medical team members and at the same time, they were even more confused when they saw the expressions of those medical team members while continuously looking in the direction of Sam.


    Instantly everyone thought something most likely happened to Sam so they were just about to enter the medical room without wasting a single second when suddenly an expected situation urred in that ce.


    Don''t know why but every one of those medical team members suddenly began tough happily while looking in the direction of Sam. Most likely whileughing like this those medical team members also realize that all the elders and even the president enter the medical room so they finally calm down.


    The president and all the other people finally realized why all the medical team members wereughing like that. They can finally do so Sam was looking toward them with his eyes. His eyes naturally showed that he was fully confused about the whole situation.

 Chapter 640 640 - Explanation

    <h4>Chapter 640 Chapter 640 - Exnation</h4>


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, the situation became normal in the medical room and Sam finally got to understand why everyone looked at him like this. For 5 minutes they exined to him what happened to him and why he was present inside the medical room.


    He gets to know that after forcefully Breaking the limit of his spiritual energy he receives serious brain damage that also creates a prevention force that prevents him from waking up.


    Most likely that prevention force was behind that dark ce that worked as a prison for him and prevented him from waking up. That prevention force blocks all the spiritual energy fluctuation of his body and also because he uses the Origin spiritual energy, the prison that previously got created inside of his mind was much more powerfulpared to any other prevention force that previously the elders noticed.


    This was also a reason that all the elders were unable to do anything to help him. Also, he gets to know that even though all the medical team alongside the elder are using the healing Ray skill to heal those brain injuries, they are unable to do that as they are also facing some kind of prevention force that makes any of those techniques to heal those brain injuries.


    Fortunately, even though it took a long time, all the brain injuries had already healed and he did not have to worry about that. The good news was that all the dark humans or you can say all the Warriors were also able to get back to normal even though they still received the side effects from that.


    They are unable to recover their full strength or full lifespan. If previously they were Epic grade Warriors, then right now they just be Elite grade warriors. Not only that, they are only able to recover 50% of the lost lifespan. Even with that none of those Warriors have any kind ofint as it was fortunate for them that they were able to live.


    Who can give them the guarantee that after turning into dark humans they would be able to be normal? That waspletely unexpected for everyone as they still cannot believe that they got kidnapped by those Abyss humans. But also every one of them went to the warrior association as they were finally able to recover them.


    During that time the president also personally busy those Warriors to say sorry. Well, he told everyone that all of these things happened because the Warrior Association did not pay attention to these types of matters. Currently, the Warrior Association does not have any kind of techniques or any kind of methods that would enable them to recover their full life span or able to recover their full strength, but the president already gave them a guarantee that in the future if they are able to find any kind of technique on method like that, naturally all those Warriors will get the chance to recover they are full lifespan and strength.


    Not only that during this time all the Warriors will receive privileges from the warrior associations and they and their families will receive the protection of the warrior association. Not only that after that incident the president already increased the security around all the kingdoms that were under the Warrior Association.


    He cannot let that type of situation happen once again and also he cannot let those abyss humans kidnap the Warriors to turn them into dark humans. Well in one way you can say it is a fortunate thing that those abyss humans decided to act during that time.


    With that, the Warrior Association was able to stop any kind of news spread that could cause panic among all the citizens or even all those Warriors.


    ________________________


    Right now is present in the canteen of the headquarters and he is eating food right now. For almost 1 month he did not wake up and because of this, he was not able to eat anything during that time.


    At that time not many people were present in the canteen as all the elders had something to do alongside the president. But before they leave the medical room the president informs him that after finishing his food he should visit the meeting room as the president will be informing him what happened after he became unconscious.


    In the canteen only the Oni Royal family and the human Royal family are present. Both the old King already visited him to ask about his situation. But naturally, they cannot stay in the Warrior Association''s headquarters for that long as they need to focus on their cultivation to increase their strength.


    "Thepetition is already finished. Fortunately, the Warrior Association prevents any kind of information rted to this incident from spreading as it will naturally cause panic among all the citizens or Warriors.


    But I think the president already decided to hold a meeting with other kings and queens. He also thinks this will be the right time to inform all of them as thepetition is already finished and none of those kings and queens need to present in the human Kingdom to watch the match.


    Also as thepetition is finished the warrior association could easily increase the security among all the kingdoms. I also support this decision as we want to inform all those people so that they be alert.


    We won''t be able to monitor every one of those warriors who will go inside of the danger zone. So, we won''t be able to tell if suddenly some of them get kidnapped by those abyss humans."


    The human King said that while everyone also agreed with him. Naturally, this is the time to inform all of them so that they be alert about this matter.


    Sam did notment anything after hearing these as he needed to get more details about the situation and he also needed to know what kind of information they got after capturing the mastermind. At the same time, he has a question if the mastermind is the real mastermind or not.


    " Sam, will you go back to the human Kingdom or Oni Kingdom?"


    Suddenly Livia asked him that question. Even Sam was surprised after hearing that question as he did not expect that question. But then he told her with a smile that for a few days, he would stay in the human Kingdom and after that, he would go back to the Oni Kingdom.


    Livia after hearing this naturally became sad as she needed to go back to her Kingdom and won''t be able to stay in the human Kingdom. But then Sam soon visited the Oni Kingdom, so sometimeter she once again became normal.


    During the time the Oni King and the human King were already updating him about the recent matters. From them, he gets to know that all the elders and the president''s personality actions capture the mastermind, and not only that at the same time, they also capture more abyss humans.


    During this time nothing serious happened to the Viet kingdom or any of those warriors and citizens of the kingdom. All the elders were sessfully able to prevent those explosions. Also, all the Warriors of the warrior association use their power to block the impact from reaching the kingdom, and with that none of the citizens of the kingdom receive any kind of damage or injuries.


    ___________________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally came back to the meeting room. He went to the meeting room alone while the Oni king and the human King already left the headquarters alongside their queens. Only Maria, Livia, and Emma are present in the headquarters and all three of them are waiting in the guest room for him.


    They will be waiting until Sam does not finish his meeting. The human King already informs him that he will organize a barbecue party for him for his sessful recovery. Not only that, today will be thest day when most of the royal family and most of the Warriors of different kingdoms will be present in the human Kingdom.


    Because of this, the human King did not only miss the party as many people also wanted to meet him. San did not reject the idea and told the human king that he would visit the kingdom after finishing the meeting.


    Inside the meeting room, only the president and Philip were waiting for him. Sometimeter, the president finally began to exin to him all the details from the beginning. He has the right to know everything about this incident and also how they were able to capture the mastermind.


    Andrew exins to him how they were able to reverse the Hion symbol and how they were able to locate the mastermind. During that time all the elders were also sessfully able to suppress most of the power from those explosions and the remaining impact of those explosions got deflected by The Spiritual barriers that were created by all the Warriors from the warrior association.

 Chapter 641 641 - Prison

    <h4>Chapter 641 Chapter 641 - Prison</h4>


    Sam went toward the prison of the headquarters of the Warrior Association. Here he came with Andrew and Phillip. Inside the prison, you can see many criminals present there. But you shouldn''t underestimate any of those criminals. Because inside the headquarters you can only find those criminals who were more dangerouspared to your normal criminals.


    Inside the prison, you can see many people from many different species present there. Every one of them has restrictions present on their body and with that, they are unable to use their power. They didn''t have any connection with their spiritual energy.


    Sam came to the prison to observe those Abyss humans and the mastermind. After observing the memory of those people the president put restrictions on their bodies and put them in prison. The elders put restrictions on their bodies so that they are unable to use their spiritual energy and not only that they also check their whole bodies so that they are unable tomit suicide.


    During the time the president also told Sam about the mind control symbols that were present in those abyss humans. He also told them how it became difficult for them to get the memory of those abyss humans. Fortunately in the end they are somehow able to reverse those symbols and with that day get all the memories.


    Sometimeter,


    You cannot find any of those Abyss humans in the surface area of the present cell. They need to go deeper Inside the prison cell. The deeper you go inside the prison cell the more security will increase.


    As the warrior association wanted to prevent any kind of trouble from happening with those Abyss humans, they put them in the deepest prison cell. Now aftering to that ce Sam finally can see every one of those Abyss humans.


    Not only do they only have the restriction array present on their body but at the same time they get respected by shackles. As none of them needed to eat anything to survive, it became easier for the warrior association to restrict them from moving.


    Except for the mastermind, all the Abyss humans are present in one prison cell. Sam did not want to interfere with those people so he went to the different prison cell where he already saw the mastermind. The mastermind also has a simr situation as those previous Abyss humans.


    Not only that, but Phillip also puts restrictions on the mind of that mastermind so that he cannot think of anything. Also, he posted a restriction that would make that mastermind blind and restrict all the instincts of that Abyss human.


    This is the punishment for every one of those Abyss humans. The mastermind wasn''t even able to sense when all of them entered the prison cell. Sam, also had a wonderful look at the memory of that mastermind so he told the president that he wanted to use mind control techniques on that person.


    Even though the president already read the memory of that mastermind, he still agrees with Sam. What if while looking at the memory of the mastermind Sam found something interesting? Even though the president had full confidence in himself, he still did not want to risk a situation like this.


    Sam came in front of the person and put his hand on the head of the person. After that, he instantly begins to channel The Spiritual energy that activates the mind control technique. The moment he uses the mind control technique, spiritual energy through that technique begins to enter the mind of that mastermind.


    Immediately those spiritual energies begin to affect the brain of the mastermind and one by one begin to break all the barriers that are present in the brain. Those are normal things and aren''t as powerful as the mind barrier that you put in your mind by using some kind of technique or artifact.


    ____________________________


    "Sigh, as you told me earlier, I also did not find that much information as it looks like all the previous information got erased from his mind. Most likely He did That to himself so that we won''t be able to get the previous information that could tell us how the hell they are able to control the berserker spiritual energy.


    But looking at the memory I can tell mostly he isn''t the real mastermind who created those symbols. He just has the knowledge about the symbol and by reading the memory we can easily tell he got those memories from one person but unfortunately, we are unable to get any kind of information about that person.


    With that, it looks like they are still changing those abyss humans will try to kidnap our Warriors once again so that they can experiment on those Warriors. Not just only the Warriors but it is a possibility that they will also try to attack the citizens who have zero chance to fight back.


    Other than that we get the information that to control the mind of powerful warriors they need strong mind control power and most likely the mastermind who is behind every one of these things is a legendary grade. Only because of this, that person is able to interfere with the mind of those Epic grade Warriors.


    But I am pretty sure that if they wanted to control the mind of thoseary grade warriors, then it would be pretty impossible or even if it is possible then it would require a huge amount of spiritual energy and I don''t think so the mastermind would risk it.


    Good thing you all already increased the security around all the kingdoms under the Warrior Association and with that, we would immediately get to know about any kind of kidnapping. Not only that if it is possible try to search for all the missings Warriors who got missing this year.


    I am pretty sure more people could get kidnapped by those Abyss humans. Because of this, we need to make sure we can rescue them the moment theye back to Terraria. But at the same time if it is possible then try to search for a technique that would be able to help us extract The dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy."


    Sam finishes saying all of this after reading the memory of that mastermind. The president and all the elders already told him most of the things that he got to know from the memory.


    But Sam still told them and also suggested they find the technique or create a technique that would help them to extract The dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy.


    Even though for him it is pretty easy to control any kind of spiritual energy, that does not mean he will reveal that secret to anyone. This could be risky and he did not want to reveal any of this risky information.


    ________________________


    Finally, 30 minutester Sam left the headquarters and came back to the human Kingdom. He appears on the branch of the warrior association and after saying goodbye to those warriors from the warrior association, Sam, Livia, Maria, and Emma begin to go toward the human Royal pce.


    During this time Sam observes the situation of the human Kingdom and he is pretty surprised by the decoration. Today will be thest day when everyone from other kingdoms will stay there and as the warrior association and the human king will organize a party for everyone, all the citizens of the human Kingdom want to decorate their whole Kingdom.


    Once again, Sam is pretty amazed by the decoration. It is like the whole human Kingdom became unfamiliar to him and it became more beautifulpared to before. Livia, Maria, and Emma also enjoy the beauty of the human Kingdom. It is like the human Kingdom also preparing for the God festival like the Oni Kingdom.


    Sometimeter,


    Sem finally got that chance to be alone inside his room. He finally gets the chance to digest all kinds of new information that he is able to gather all this time. It took him some time to finally digest all the information and after that, he began to think about what could be his n to help Terraria.


    But he cannot do anything alone and needs the help of other people. So naturally even if he came up with a n he needed to discuss it with the Warrior Association and after that, the Warrior Association would decide if they wanted to reveal that information to anyone or not.


    ''Nowe to think of it, I wanted to know what kind of energy previously found inside of the prison that makes me unable to leave my mind.''


    During all this time he did not get the time to think about that strange spiritual energy, as he previously almost forgot about that. But Sam already wanted to find out about that strange spiritual energy there to also help him boost his mind power and help him recover from that unconscious State.

 Chapter 642 642 - Soul energy

    <h4>Chapter 642 Chapter 642 - Soul energy</h4>


    1 dayster,


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Human


    Health: (179990/179990)


    Spiritual energy: (179990/179990)


    Soul energy - (60/60)


    Strength: 17999


    Agility: 17999


    Physique: 17999


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 17999


    Spirit: 17999


    Soul:- 6


    Status points:- 350,000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also be fixed based on the new status.]


    Grade: (Epic-grade) (Peak) / (Peak SRR grade)


    Potential: Mythical


    Upgrade point: 17k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade ( 2 chance)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Original Dragon Devour (grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    [ Remark: Hmph¡­ Have some strength to protect yourself.] "


    Sam begins to look at his status screen and you have to say he was surprised when he looped at the new soul energy option. Most likely his system also already recognizes the energy that he previously absorbed in that prison.


    '' So, the name of that energy is soul energy. So, what can it do? Does it have simr properties like spiritual energy?''


    Sam was thinking all of these questions when he was able to recognize the new energy. Fortunately, his system also gave him the description of the energy and that was helpful for him.


    "Soul energy


    [ It is a rare energy that is almost imposed to feel. Even if anyone can feel that energy, it would be impossible to absorb. This energy haspletely different characteristicspared to your spiritual energy. Not only thatpared to the spiritual energy the soul energy will be much more powerful as it is rted to your soul.


    If anyone is able to observe the soul energy then he would be able to increase the power of his soul and that would be much more usefulpared to spiritual energy which only increases the power of your body.


    Even if you are able to absorb the soul energy you won''t be able to immediately use that energy as you need to reach a certain limit and only after that you would be able to use the soul energy easily Like The Spiritual energy. But before that, you needed some techniques that are rted to the soul energy to use that energy.


    If someone can absorb the soul energy then it would immediately boost the willpower of that person. Not only just the willpower but at the same time the person will feel that his overall power also begins to increase. ]"


    This is the description of that soul energy. It is hard for Sam to believe that an energy like that is also present but nobody seems to have any kind of information about that energy as they are unable to feel that energy.


    On the other hand, if you look at his data screen then you will be surprised as all the six months he is using his full time to upgrade his status so that he also became more powerful.


    He already reached the limit of Epic grade. Not only that at the same time he also uses the upgrade points to upgrade almost all the techniques. Naturally, as you know he did not decide to learn any kind of new techniques as he wanted to upgrade all of his previous techniques to the limit and he also thought that currently, he did not require any kind of new technique.


    So, because of this in these 6 months, he did not decide to learn any kind of new technique and only focused on upgrading the power of those previous techniques.


    On the other hand, he also uses one supreme upgrade to upgrade the limit breaker to the legendary grade. Previously he found a limit breaker that was epic grade, with that he was able to update the limit breaker and it reached the legendary grade.


    Unfortunately, he needed one more legendary grade limit breaker to sessfully break through. Fortunately, as you know he was already able to find that before the start of thepetition and he already decided to upgrade the limit breaker to break through.


    ''I wanted to know how I could upgrade my soul power. Will using the status point I would be able to upgrade the soul power? But why isn''t it working like any other stats?''


    Actually, during that time, Sam decided to see if he could upgrade the soul power or not use the status points. Unfortunately, he is unable to upgrade the soul power using the status point So this naturally makes him very confused.


    He did not know how to absorb that energy. He wanted to see if his origin spiritual energy was powerfulpared to that soul energy or not. He already decided to look at the system shop to search for a technique that would be rted to soul energy.


    ''Sigh, most likely before anything I need it to search for a technique that would help me absorb the soul energy. Most likely I won''t be able to increase the soul energy Like The Spiritual energy only using the status points.''


    Sam thought that. He already began to look at the system shop to search for a technique that would be rted to the soul energy. Fortunately, he has the search category where he does need to type the soul energy, and the technique rted to that soul energy will immediately appear on the system screen.


    One by one he was able to see the category of those techniques. Absorbing category, attack, defense, etc. Like this many other categories are present in that system screen. Sam before anything selected the absorbing category as he really technique that would help him to absorb the soul energy.


    He thought that many techniques would immediately show up on the system screen but he was very wrong. In the system screen, he can only see 5 techniques. Now this is a very surprising thing for him as he never thought he would only be able to see 5 techniques rted to that soul energy.


    But then he remembered the description of the system where it told him it is a very rare energy and most likely most people were not even aware of that energy. With that, he once again focuses on the system screen to look at the price of those techniques.


    '' What the hell does every one of those techniques start with the price of 100 million gold coins?''


    While looking at those techniques he can see the technique which most likely has the lowest price is the price of 100 million gold coins. On the other hand, the technique that has the highest price needed 10 billion gold coins.


    The price of those techniques was unimaginable for him and he did not know what to buy. But after thinking carefully and also reading the description of those techniques he finally decided to buy a technique that had the price of 535 million gold coins.


    You have to say that for all the six months he saved gold coins for this kind of use. All the time he would try to save as many gold coins as he could and with that he almost had 10 billion gold coins in his ounts.


    Now back to the main matter,


    After purchasing that technique immediately use the supreme upgrade technique to upgrade the grade. Only after that, he decided to learn that technique that immediately consumes 10k status points. Once again that was a very surprising thing for Sam as he just thought only 1000 status would be needed to learn that technique.


    But then immediately the information rted to that technique began toe into his mind. The technique immediately provided him with the information about the soul energy.


    Soul energy is the energy that is present in almost every Warrior or every living being but as normally nobody can feel they are soul they are also unable to feel the soul energy. Even though anybody could use the spiritual energy, nobody would be able to use the soul energy.


    Most likely as he previously suffered from a side effect of forcefully Breaking the limit it put him inside that ck prison that almost has ess to his soul energy. Even that kind of prison won''t be able to restrict the soul energy, and because of this, in the end, he is somehow able to feel the soul energy.


    Actually, if spiritual energy was also present in that ce then it would bepletely impossible for Sam to feel the soul energy during that time. His mind, body, and even his instincts would only try to feel the spiritual energy.

 Chapter 643 643 - Trigon absorb

    <h4>Chapter 643 Chapter 643 - Trigon absorb</h4>


    "Trigon absorb ( S-grade)


    [A technique that helps you contact the soul energy. It will try to establish a connection with the soul energy and your soul. With the help of this technique a bnce will get created with your soul. After establishing the bnce it would be easier for anyone to get contact with the soul energy.


    That soul energy would be much easier for you to absorb without getting any kind of side effect. You won''t receive any kind of side effect every time you try to absorb the soul energy. But for now it would be possible to use that technique continuously for almost 1 hour and after that you need to raise your body so that you have to recover your stamina and your mental energy.


    Using this technique you needed your stamina and mental energy as both of them get consume during the time when you try to use the technique to absorb the soul energy.]"


    As you can see the description of this technique. Even though the grade of the technique already reached S-grade, he would be able to use that technique for only one hour.


    Sam was very familiar with the side effect every time when he tried to absorb the soul energy previously when he was inside of that prison. Because of this, when he looks at the description of this technique he can tell most likely using these techniques he won''t receive any kind of side effect as the bnce will be created.


    Even though he did not know what he would feel when the bnce with his soul would get created. He really did not know if it would feel like the mind zero State or not. But even though he wanted to try the technique right now he stopped himself from doing that as he can already feel Livia is outside of his room.


    Today the Oni king would leave the human Kingdom. Yesterday after the banquet many royal families already left the human Kingdom using the teleportation system of the warrior association. While most of the Warriors who previously came to the human Kingdom without using the teleportation array also already leave the kingdom as they really need to travel to go back to their kingdom.


    Sam also remembers about the meeting that would be held between the warrior association and the Viet king. Even though the warrior association did not want to reveal that information that quickly, they needed to inform the Viet king.


    With this at least the Viet king would be able to be aware of the danger. But at the same time the Warrior association really did not know what would be the reaction of all the Warriors when they would be able to get to know about this. Just everyone hoped that nothing bad would happen after getting the information and also the warrior association did not want that kind of information spread around those normal citizens.


    All the normal citizens after getting this kind of information. Fortunately the warrior association already decided to increase the security among all the kingdoms who were under the warrior association.


    ___________________________


    "Sam, don''t put yourself in danger like this and also if you really need to participate in this kind of danger you should at least be informal so that we can also prepare ourselves and also try to help you."


    " Haha¡­ don''t worry I did not receive any kind information from the warrior association and most likely they will not give me any kind information like this after the previous incident. Also I did not think the Abyss humans will try to do anything this week as they also know that we already know about the motive."


    Suddenly the Oni king and Sam were discussing various matters. First of all, the oni king and also even the human King told him not to put himself in a dangerous situation like this where he could also lose his life.


    Sometimeter,


    They already finished their discussion and it was time to leave the human Kingdom. One by one the Oni royal family begin to leave the human Kingdom alongside their guards.


    Sam on the other hand went back to the Royal pce. Also before going inside of his room he tried to search for a good ce where he would try to break through. At the same time after thinking about it, he decided he would try to break through outside of the kingdom.


    First of all he did not know if during the time when he would try to break through any kind of spiritual fluctuation would get created or not. As you know he did not use the true spiritual energy and every time when you try to break through a spiritual fluctuation would get created. So when you try to break through this time he really did not want to attract any kind of attention.


    On the other hand, Maria asked him if he was free or not. You can say after the previous defeat in thepetition and also after getting to know about the real situation of the Viet kingdom, she really realized how helpless she was when her friend was in a dangerous situation and she did not have the strength to protect her friend.


    With that Maria decided to focus on bing powerful and because of this, she wanted to spar with Sam. After hearing her request Sam naturally did not have any kind of problem with that. So he was immediately angry that today they could fight because from tomorrow he would get busy.


    The moment Maria heard he would get busy, she tried to ask if it was rted to the warrior association or not. But fortunately Sam assured her that it wasn''t rted to the warrior association and these would be rted to his breakthrough. So, she does not have to worry about anything.


    ___________________________


    Around 3:00 p.m. finally you can see in the training ground of the Royal pce a warrior present there alongside with many other people who most likely came there to watch the fight between two of them. Even the queen also came to that ce to watch the match.


    Sam and Maria would be fighting each other. Even though anybody could tell Sam would easily win that match, they still wanted to know how long it would take Maria to get defeated by him.


    The prince suddenly acts as a referee of that match and wasting no time he quickly gives them the signal to start the fight. Instantly the princess disappears from her ce and appears behind Sam.


    Not only that, in the next second you can already see a sword about to hear Sam. Also that wasn''t your normal sword as you can see the thunder element present in that sword alongside the Fire element.


    Maria can control both the elements and she really reaches a mastery over both of the elements. Also she was using her most powerful technique against Sam from the start. The moment everyone thought that sword would hit Sam, they saw that sword somehow pass through Sam''s body.


    That wasn''t only the matter as in the next second that image of Sam began to disappear from that ce. Only then everyone realized most likely that was some kind of after image and the real Sam already moved away from that ce.


    Actually that was the real matter as some already created distance from Maria and not only that he already began to use one of his powerful techniques and that would be the confusion ray. Immediately used that technique to make her blind for a few minutes but he immediately did not use that as it could be dangerous when she would suddenly get affected by that.


    Fortunately Maria already realized what was happening so she instantly canceled the attack and tried to look for Sam. She just turned around toward her left but in the next agent a bright light quickly appeared in front of her eyes and that almost made her blind and unable to think anything.


    Sam sessfully made her confused and that would be almost 3 minutes. Well if she was an Epic grade Warrior, then she would get confused for only just 2 minutes or 1 minute. Well that effect of the technique is also rted to will power. The strong will power you have the short time you need to get from that effect of the confused ray.


    Maria, cough blood while flying backward. Well, Sam quickly came in front of her and punch in her stomach. Even though she was wearing the armour, she can still feel the force behind that punch as the punch also contains The Spiritual energy and his full strength.


    You can already see a mark appear on the ce where Sam previously punched her. Shend on the ground and she was bleeding. For almost 10 second she stay in the ground like that without moving or doing anything. But only then she suddenly began to cough and most likely she already got back to her senses.

 Chapter 644 644 - Maria vs Sam

    <h4>Chapter 644 Chapter 644 - Maria vs Sam</h4>


    Sam did not immediately attack her and give us the time to recover. Because of the pain you can say she was able to wake up from the confusion and already begin to feel the pain all over her body.


    Fortunately Sam gives her the time to recover and only then is she able to stand up. Even though she is already bleeding but at the same time she is already using the regeneration technique to heal herself.


    On the other hand she already begins to look at the previous ce where she tried to attack him but unfortunately after that everything happens very quickly that almost makes her very confused.


    Suddenly Maria disappeared from her ce and this time she did not appear behind Sam or in front of Sam. You can see she was flying in the sky and at the same time dark clouds began to gather around.


    She was preparing for her next attack and in this time she will be attacking him from a distance to maintain her safety and also if Sam decides to counter attack she gets the time to protect herself.


    Less than a second that part of the sky already gets covered in dark clouds and instantly thunderbolts begin to go toward Sam. Maria on the other hand even tries to attack some using the thunderbolt attack but at the same time she also knows it won''t be enough. So at the same time she was preparing for her next attack and because of this you can see in her hand suddenly a ball appear that begins to absorb the thunder element.


    Sam on the other hand did not use the telekinesis technique or any other technique that immediately defeated her. Because of this he decided to use the spiritual barrier technique to create a strong barrier and at the same time decide to use the light element technique to create a strong attack.


    The sh between the barrier and those thunderbolts already begins to appear in that ce. Even though the thunder element has more destructive powerpared to any other element, the spiritual barrier that appeared in front of Sam did not receive any kind of damage and most likely Sam also did not have any kind of problem maintaining that spiritual barrier.


    On the other hand, suddenly everyone can see the left hand of Sam begin to glow and light elements begin to gather in that ce. Anybody could predict most likely he is also preparing for his next attack like Maria.


    Continuously those thunderbolts begin to fall down on that barrier but even with that the barrier did not have any kind of crack mark present on it. Out of nowhere suddenly a big thunder beam appeared in front of that barrier and instantly hit that barrier.


    Nowpared to those thunderbolts anybody could tell by The Spiritual fluctuation that the power of the thunder beam was higher. Almost a big sh appeared in that ce and at the same time if anybody tried to use the spiritual vision technique then they could easily see The Spiritual barrier finally showing the sign of crack.


    From the start Sam only uses 10% spiritual energy to maintain the barrier while focusing on his other attack, because of this, this time the spiritual barrier finally begins to show the sign of getting cracked.


    On the other hand Maria already can feel that she is very close to hitting Sam, so she instantly increases the power of her attack while supplying more spiritual energy.


    With that because the power of the thunder beam suddenly increases, it is able to break that spiritual barrier without any problem while it is almost about to hit Sam. Anybody would have thought that Sam would get hit at that moment but unfortunately nothing like that happened.


    Suddenly a golden beam also hit that thunder beam. Because of that sudden sh a huge impact was created because of that and almost all the people present in that training ground can feel that impact. But even with that everyone thought most likely Sam wood needed to use other techniques to escape from that ce as even though he created that golden beam it was already toote for him to counter attack.


    Unfortunately for everyone just 2 secondster everybody can already see that thunder beam begin to push backward while it looks like that golden beam getting the advantage in that situation. Actually as Sam doesn''t have to maintain the spiritual barrier he can fully focus on that attack.


    This time Sam was using 30% of his spiritual energy and with that the golden beam or you can say the sun beam got a sudden boost of power and was able to sessfully push the light beam backward while getting the advantage in that situation. Using his spiritual energy he was able to gather a huge amount of sunlight in that attack.


    Maria finally can feel the danger and even though she is almost using 90% of our power at this moment, she can still feel some getting the advantage in that situation while it looks like he did not even put all of his effort into the attack.


    Well nobody could me her as some really don''t have to put all the effort in that attack. On the other hand Maria has already begun to think about her next n. She can tell she won''t be able to get any kind of advantage in that situation so she decides to not to waste her spiritual energy and instantly uses the thunder element to escape from that ce.


    Maria appears on the ground and at the same time she uses her remaining spiritual energy to create another lightning beam. She thought that Sam won''t be able to counter attack that quickly so it could be given her advantage.


    Unfortunately for her, suddenly that golden beam that was going toward another direction turned around and instantly went toward Maria''s direction. Before that lightning beam could hit Sam, that golden beam already appeared close to Maria and with that she needed to cancel the attack to escape.


    ________________________


    "Pant¡­ pant¡­ "


    1 hourter it looked like Maria was already out of strength to move her body and because of the Sam decided to finish the fight. During all this time even Sam gives her the time to recover spiritual energy and health but even with that in the end she doesn''t even get that advantage and always can feel the gap between her and Sam.


    Every time when she thought she would get the advantage she always felt helpless in that situation when Sam had the chance to seriously injure her.


    Suddenly the medical team already begin to treat Maria while Sam also sits down in the ground to recover The lost spiritual energy. During all this time he was able to counter all of her attacks. Because of this he did not receive any kind of injury but as he needed to use almost 30% of his spiritual energy all the time he needed to recover that spiritual energy.


    On the other hand the queen and the prince already went toward Maria to check her condition. But it looks like she did not receive that kind of injury so the medical team was already able to heal all the injuries and at the same time as she was using the energy recovery technique it would take her sometime to recover all the energy.


    Only after bing assured that she did not receive any kind of serious injuries does the queen and the prince begin to walk toward Sam to check his condition. Even though all the time he did not receive any kind of attack but even with that they needed to make sure everything was ok. Not only that but also at the same time you can say even the prince has a request and with that he also approaches Sam''s direction with expectation.


    After seeing the fight between Maria and Sam you can say even he began to have the expectation to have a fight like this with a powerful person like Sam. He wanted to know what was the gap between him and Sam.


    With that the prince already came in front of Sam and already asked about his condition. Sam said that he was fully okay so they did not have to worry about that. Only then the prince request if he could also have sparring match with him or not.


    After hearing that request Sam naturally did not answer that as he began to think about what to do. But after thinking sometime he already agrees with the fight but before anything he would recover The Spiritual energy and also as both of them would create much more damage he already informs the queen to inform some Royal guards who would be surrounding the area with spiritual barriers.


    Now that was fully exciting news for the prince as Sam agreed to fight with him. During the time the queen also became happy the moment she heard that news and at the same time she already told one of her subordinates to inform the king and themanders.

 Chapter 645 645 Prince vs Sam

    <h4>Chapter 645 Chapter 645 Prince vs Sam</h4>


    The human king and all themanders also get very interested the moment they get to know that Sam agrees to fight with Prince. Everyone is really interested to know what is the gap between the prince and Sam.


    As you know both of them were in Epic grade, but still if you asked anybody they would tell Sam definitely won this fight. Because of this, all the high officials of the human Kingdom were really interested in that fight.


    Fortunately Sam did not immediately agree to fight with the prince as he needed to recover The Spiritual energy. These also give everyone the time to prepare themselves and also finish their work before going to the training ground. As everyone is pretty busy because of thepetition, they previously did not get that much time to do their work.


    But currently as you can tell they have the time to do their work and with that all the time every one of them is just focusing on their work. The royalmander and the military of the human Kingdom also get informed by the human King to get alert. He increases the security of the human Kingdom and also he has already appointed a search team who will be watching over the danger zone.


    Naturally the human King did not want any of his people to get kidnapped by those Abyss humans. Because of this, if it was possible then he would appoint more search teams in the danger zone but that won''t be possible. Fortunately not only the human kingdom''s Warrior but Warriors from the warrior association will also be watching over the danger zone with that the workload of the human Kingdom did not increase.


    Sometimeter,


    Almost all the High officials of the human Kingdom are already present in the training ground alongside the king. Only the old king, who was most likely focusing on his cultivation, did note out to see the match.


    Also at the same time those Royal guards also surrounded the whole training area and created the spiritual barrier around the whole training ground so that no attacks came outside of the training ground and affected any other people.


    Now both of the Warriors are already preparing themselves for the match. Before anything you should know the prince of the human Kingdom is really good at using the thunderpared to the princess, at the same time he is also very good at using the Spear weapon.


    But during the final match between the human Prince and the Dragonite Prince, the human Prince also shows a different kind of power that he never reveals. Most likely he also has the ability to control the water element. Now as you can tell both the thunder element and the water element would be pretty much destructive.


    On the other hand as you know Sam won''t be using his full power. He won''t be using telekinesis or his concealment technique. He will only just use the elemental power or The Spiritual barrier. Even he will not use his sword technique.


    _________________________


    The moment the referee gives them the signal both of them have already disappeared from their ce and in the next again you can see a huge impact created in the middle of that training ground.


    Both participants attacked each other only using their physical strength. Butpared to Sam as you can see the human Prince receives some damage. Fortunately he was able to hold on because Sam really did not use his full power.


    Both of them once again disappear from that ce and one by one many more impacts like this appear on that training ground. If anybody tries to see the fight without using spiritual vision then they would not be able to see anything.


    One by one they would just only feel the shockwave that was created because of those shes. But for every person who is present in that ce has already started using their spiritual vision.


    They can already see what was happening between Sam and the human prince. All this time both of them only used physical strength but even with that anybody could tell Sam was having the advantage in that match and also at the same time if anybody tried to focus on the human brains that they would see the armor around his hand almost showing the sign of crack.


    Not only that, even some blood present in his mouth that most likely starteding out because of those impacts. Like this almost 5 minutes, both of them are just only using physical strength but the human Prince already realized he won''t get any kind of advantage in this situation.


    With that he decided to use his elemental power and with that this time he quickly uses his movement technique to get away from Sam. Sam also realized that and he really did not have any kind of intention to attack the human prince.


    Even all the time Sam had the advantage in power but in thest moment you can say he almost uses 80% of his power. Also he can feel the strength of human Prince as even though he did not receive injuries like the human face but he still can''t feel the pain in his hands. All this time the human Prince uses the spear while Sam counter attacks him only using his hands.


    ___________________________


    "Lighting re"


    The human suddenly uses that spell and instantly the whole Sky glows in bright white color. Almost everyone present in that ce got blind because of that certain light. Sam who was also preparing to counter attack any kind of thunder attack also did not expect this kind of attack and with that he also needed to close his eyes for sometime.


    That time was actually enough for the human prince to attack Sam with his new attack. Instantly from those dark clouds you can see lightning chains begin to appear and wasting no time those lighting changes quickly attack Sam and capture him.


    His whole body gets restricted by that lightning chain and not only that lighting change instantly begins to send lighting elements inside of his body. Because of the armor Sam even though did not get affected directly from that attack but he can still feel the lightning element that present in his armor.


    The effect of The lightning re already faded away and with that everyone finally was able to see once again. After opening their eyes they needed some time to adjust their vision and only then were they able to see what was the condition.


    Everybody can see some kind of lightning changeing down from those dark clouds that capture Sam. Not only that, it looks like Sam is also struggling with that lighting chain.


    But previously that lightning change did not have any kind of additional effect on that except when it was trying to send the electric shock to Sam. Unfortunately because of the armor nothing like that happened as his Armor has thunder protection.


    Suddenly that whole chain began to channel a huge amount of lightning element that instantly created the thunderbolt around the whole chain and anybody good so that huge amount of thunder elementing down from the sky.


    Less than a second it almost came in front of Sam and most likely just was able to hit him. But fortunately before anything like that could happen Sam destroyed that lightning chain and already went away from that ce.


    Not only that, suddenly Sam, who deserves from the previous ce, appears behind the human prince and already punches him. Most likely the human Prince already senses that attack. So using the lightning element he was able to retreat from that ce before he could get hit.


    But because he suddenly needed to escape he unfortunately had to deactivate the previous attack with that all the lightning chain disappeared from that ce. But the dark clouds did not disappear from the sky as his deal was holding on to those dark clouds.


    The human Prince quickly uses the water element that suddenly falls down from the sky like rain. But don''t underestimate those rain as everyone of those drops of rain turned into small Spears that also fell down pretty quickly.


    Naturally with that he wanted to attack Sam but Sam also already realized the danger of this attack so he created the spiritual barrier around himself. Butpared to the time when he fought with Maria this time you can say Sam uses almost 50% of his spiritual energy to increase the strength of his spiritual barrier.


    Only because of that spiritual barrier was able to protect him from those water drops. But at the same time it looks like the human Prince already realized attacking like this only helps him so he instantly increases the amount of those water drops and with that the power of those water drops also increases alongside the number also increasing.


    Finally because of this The Spiritual barrier also shows the sign of crack. But in the next second that crack disappears because Sam once again increases the spiritual energy.

 Chapter 646 646 - The power of the Prince

    <h4>Chapter 646 Chapter 646 - The power of the Prince</h4>


    The fight going on between Sam and the prince of the human Kingdom. Currently, as you can see the prince of the human Kingdom uses the water element that falls from those dark clouds like a raindrop but each of those raindrops has the shape of small Spears that directly fall on that spiritual barrier, and one by one everyone of those raindrops trying to destroy that spiritual barrier.


    All this time Sam is trying to protect himself while increasing the power of that spiritual barrier. Even though it looked like the prince almost used 70 or 80% of his spiritual energy in that attack, some just needed 60% of his spiritual energy to protect himself from those raindrops.


    At this time using the telekinesis technique he could already have the advantage while the prince could already get defeated by him, but naturally, he did not do that and also he began to decrease the power of the spiritual barrier.


    He did not need to use 60% of his spiritual energy continuously for that spiritual barrier and because of this slowly he began to decrease the power of his spiritual barrier. Sam was preparing for the next attack and because of this, he would not want to use that much spiritual energy to create The Spiritual barrier.


    Probably 50% or 40% spiritual energy would be enough for him to defend himself from those raindrops before creating his next attack. Well, he is not going to use any kind of life-threatening technique like the mega fireball.


    Attacks like that have much more area damage and not only the prince but even the surrounding area would get affected by that. Because of this all this time he was also thinking about what to use in that kind of situation where he did not want to create that much damage and who was attacked also did not have much life-threatening danger.


    Finally, he found one type of attack and that would be using his light element he was going to feel the whole Sky with his light element. He will be going to use the sun ray zone. A temporary zone would be created for some limited area and in that ce some would be able to continuously create the light element attack and attack his opponent with that.


    The Prince could already tell most likely Sam was preparing for his next attack as he already felt The Spiritual fluctuation of The Spiritual barrier begins to decrease. That makes him speechless as he did not think that Sam would decrease the power of the spiritual barrier.


    Naturally, The Prince thought that Sam would decrease the power of The Spiritual barrier The Spiritual barrier would break from his attack but unfortunately, he was wrong. Even though Sam was just using 50% of his spiritual energy he was still able to maintain the spiritual barrier.


    Because of this, after looking at the situation, The Prince also needed to use the next attack so that he was able to defend himself from the attack of Sam, and also the previous did not want to give Sam any chance to prepare for another attack.


    First of all, as you know, water is the best electrical conductor. With that, he will be going to mix both the elements and he will also increase the power of the attack.


    The name of that attack is "Lighting Rain". So the prince already started preparing for that attack. The thunder element present in those dark clouds already began together but they naturally did note down like those thunderbolts or any other attraction. The Prince now mixes those hundred elements alongside those water drops and instantly every one of those water drops begins to fall from those dark clouds.


    For 5 seconds you can say the previous raindrop attack stopped and that almost made everyone present confused. Anybody could feel the huge energy fluctuation in that ce but none of them were able to understand why the prince suddenly stopped the attack.


    This attack made the prince able to learn recently so nobody was aware of that attack. Suddenly once again the whole Sky began to be bright but this time the brightness wasn''t that much that would blind everyone present there.


    Everyone thought most likely that it would be some kind of thunder element attack but when they used their spiritual vision to look at the brightness they were surprised as they could see those water drops begin to fall quickly and one of those water drops most likely releasing the thunder element that increases the destructive power of those water drops.


    "Haha¡­ I never thought he woulde up with an attack like this in a situation like this. Most likely he was already trying to use this kind of attack from the start, but unfortunately from the start, he did not get the time to create this kind of attack.


    But currently, as Sam decided not to use any kind of his technique to counterattack and tried to fight him without using most of his power, our Prince finally got the time to create this attack. By The Spiritual fluctuation, I could easily tell the destructive power of those water drops already increased much morepared to be for, and also as both the elements mix it could be dangerous for Sam."


    " Haha¡­ don''t worry about that I can pretty much tell Sam most likely already guessed the danger of those attacks. So he could try to escape from that ce. Also even though The attacks from our prince are very dangerous if you look at Sam you notice he is still maintaining his calmness. Sam mostly also prepares himself to counterattack."


    Currently, all the high officials of the human Kingdom begin to discuss each other about the fight and many of them thought that with these attacks the human Prince would get the advantage but the remaining people also can see that Sam did not show any kind of expression even in that situation. He is preparing for his next attack and has full confidence in that attack.


    None of those officials were wrong. Sam already notices the danger of those water drops and he also knows if he did not create the spiritual barrier and get hit by those water drops then he would also try to use his arm to protect himself.


    Because of this he suddenly increases the power of his attack and a huge amount of energy fluctuation appears around him. He began to absorb the light element for the next attack and as he increased the power the absorption rate of the light element became much greaterpared to before.


    Also, one thing nobody knows is that even if someone was unable to finish that attack and needed to escape from that attack, he would still have the mind Zero state and wouldn''t need to break concentration. It Looks like the soul energy is also effective in this kind of situation, making him more rxed and giving him the ability to think properly.


    That is the main matter, suddenly the whole spiritual barrier gets covered in Golden light and It begins to shine very brightly, almost blinding all of those people blind who are trying to observe his direction. On the other hand, one by one those water droplets containing the thunder element begin to fall on that ce and one by one explosions already begin to appear on that ce.


    The moment thunder elements hit the ground it instantly burns all the grass present in the ground and also damages the soil of the grounds. You can already see the burn mark present.


    One by one impact also gets created but fortunately, The Spiritual barrier even though showing the signs of getting cracked is still able to protect him from those kinds of attacks while Sam can fully focus on his attack.


    Nobody would be able to see what was happening with Sam because of The gold light but everyone suddenly felt the energy fluctuation suddenly appear in that ce and also that energy fluctuation belonged to Sam.


    In the next again when everyone thought that the spiritual barrier was going to break, suddenly it disappeared and in the same second a huge Golden beam directly went toward the prince. Even though those water drops fall from the sky and every one of those drops has destructive power in them, it doesn''t affect that golden beam that is going toward the prince.


    Less than a second that golden beam appeared in front of the prince and instantly he was just a spiritual barrier that the prince had already created in front of him.


    Well, he wanted to make sure nothing like that happened but even with that as he was using most of his spiritual energy for the thunder drop attack, The Spiritual barrier did not have that much power in it. It only contain the remaining spiritual energy that he wasn''t using during his attack.

 Chapter 647 647 - The gap between them

    <h4>Chapter 647 Chapter 647 - The gap between them</h4>


    "Quickly heal him,"


    The human King gave the order to the medical team to heal The Prince. Actually that previous Golden beam really break that spiritual barrier unexpectedly and the prince also did not get that time to react or escape from that ce.


    Even though The Prince already know something like this would happen and prepared himself to protect from that, he really never expected the speed of those attack to be that much.


    Fortunately because of the armor he did not get that much injured and just only received some light injuries. On the other hand Sam also received some small injuries as previously when he quickly broke The Spiritual very are and attacked the prince with the golden beam he really uses his movement technique to get away from that ce, but still he got hit by those water drops.


    Even though he really try to escape, as he did not use any other technique that could easily protect himself or he could escape from that ce, receive the injury.


    Now back to the main matter, you have to say that this is a really interesting match for everyone andpared to the match that happened in thepetition, this was more interesting to watch. But naturally here even though the prince uses all of his power to defeat Sam, but Sam did not uses his full power and also he was in pretty good conditionpared to the prince.


    With this The Prince suit finally understands the gap between him and Sam. That would also give him the motivation to work hard so that he can also reach the same level as Sam. After getting defeated by Sam The Prince really did not have any kind ofin and just smile after when he realize that he got defeated by him.


    The human king and all the other high officials begin to walk toward Prince to check his condition. But fortunately as did not uses most of his power the power behind that attack wasn''t enough to fully injured him. Because of this, even the Armour of Prince did not grade broken by the previous attack.


    _____________________


    "Haha.. really that was a pretty interesting match. I hope this will give you the motivation to work hard as it show you the gap between him and you. Even though the match between you and the dragonite prince was pretty intense and both of you very close to defeat each other, but during that match both of you have the same level of power so with that none of you most likely understand the true gap of your power with Sam."


    " Don''t worry father. I already understand the gap between me and Sam. I finally understand that I really need to work hard to reach the limit of my grade. I still did not reach the limit of my grade, and and I also really need to work hard on my attacked power.


    During important moments if I got distracted then it would also affect my attack and I really need to prevent something like that to happen. Also fighting with Sam I really understand all of my weaknesses. I also need to work hard to ovee those weaknesses."


    The Prince said that to his father with a smile on his face. He is really satisfy with the sparing match. It really give him the understanding of his own weakness and also help him to understand the gap between him and Sam.


    During the moment when he was fighting the dragonite prince he really did not think that much as both of them had the same power level so both of them really did not think about the limit of their grade.


    At that moment most likely both of them wanted to find the weakness of each other but unfortunately during this time when he was fighting Sam he really understand that while he would be fighting a person who is more powerfulpared to him, he real need to be more careful as that person would not give him the time to observe his weakness.


    Not only that he really needs to work on his speed even though he could use the lightning element that increases the speed of his attack or even his movement speed, but still he realizes that he isn''t fast enough to dodge all those attacks from Sam.


    The human king and all the other people really smile after hearing that the prince also understand the gap between him and Sam. Not only that this fight really helpful for his growth. So the human king and all the high officials went towards Sam to check his condition.


    Even the queen was already present in front of Sam to check his condition. Compared to the prince everyone more body about Sam as you know some just recently recovered from thea. Everyone is thinking what if that side effect once again shows up because of the previous fight?


    Unfortunately none of them have to worry about anything as that previous side effect on be able to affect him once again because of the soul energy and also he already fully recovered.


    When the human King came to that ce he already begin to talk to Sam about the previous match and also inform him that would be very helpful for the prince to grow up and focus on making himself more stronger.


    Sometimeter,


    Everyone of them finally came back to the Royal pce as it was already evening but Sam, Prince and Maria only caused fighting and they really became hungry. So currently as you can see the present in the dining room and the Royal chef is already preparing food for them.


    During that time everyone discusses the previous fights and they also ask Sam about their weaknesses. Sam would be the perfect person to tell them about their weakness. Sam also tells them about all those mistakes that they have made during the sparring match.


    Not only that, he also told them in which way they could improve. So you can say a discussion like this is happening between three of them. While the king and the queen did not interrupt their discussion.


    ___________________


    Sam finally gets the time to rest. He was nowying down on the bed while thinking about tomorrow''s matter. Well, he only informs some people that he will try to break through using the limit breaker, so that when his spiritual fluctuation suddenly appears in the danger zone that did not alert anyone.


    But at the same time Sam was thinking about his safety. Well he cannot give guarantee that he would be okay when he would fully concentrate on breaking through. Most probably in the time he could also get attacked by many Monsters and also what if Abyss humans decided to attack him at that moment?


    All of this would be pretty much dangerous for him so he decided to look at the system shop to search for any kind of safety barrier that would help him in that matter. Actually he was thinking about a barrier or simr thing like this that does not have to consume his spiritual energy to get activated or to maintain that thing.


    Fortunately in the system shop he could already find many barriers like this which do not require his spiritual energy to remain activated. But he wasn''t satisfied after looking at the power of those barriers. He wanted a very like this which can protect him from the attack of aary grade enemy.


    Well he cannot find any barrier like this that could protect him from legendary grade enemies. Because of this, he is looking for a barrier that would at least be able to help him to protect himself from aary grade enemy.


    After looking at all the barriers he Finally found a barrier that would protect him from a peakary grade enemy. But to buy that thing he needed to use 500 million gold coins. Not that he had any kind ofint about this matter as he can tell the high price of that thing was due to the fact that he had the ability to protect himself for 2 days.


    With this finally he can rest assured about his safety as he did not think he would need two days to break through. Now everyone finally doesn''t need to think about the safety he begins to think about the ce where he needed to break through.


    Well fortunately he is already very familiar with this part of the danger zone and he also begins to think of many ces that he previously was inside of the danger zone where he could probably try to break through.


    But he did not want to get noticed by anyone during the time when he would try to break through so he needed to find a ce that would pretty much hide himself from the rest of the Warriors or Monsters. Sam was thinking about those ces but until he did not go inside of the danger zone he won''t be able to confirm if that ce would be okay or not.

 Chapter 648 648 - The Determination

    <h4>Chapter 648 Chapter 648 - The Determination</h4>


    Sam the next day went to the danger zone after informing everyone. Even though the human king and all the other people were very worried about him, they still cannot stop him from Breaking through. But you have to say after hearing that he wanted to break through the human Prince and Maria became more determined to be stronger.


    Compared to Maria the human Prince became more determined that people he will try to break through he needed to reach the limit of his peak Epic grade. He understands that Sam most likely already reached the limit and only after that he decided to break through.


    Reaching the limit not only depends on absorbing the spirit crystals. It also depends on the training and through training you need to reach the limit of that grade. As you know except Sam every Warrior needed to channel The Spiritual energy through training in their whole body to make their body more stronger and more powerful.


    All of those warriors who only focus on physical strength need to channel The Spiritual energy into their whole body through full concentration and at the same time their body will absorb that spiritual energy and make their body stronger. But every time they need to break the limit of their body as only that was the way to make themselves stronger and make their body reach the limit.


    On the other hand those spiritual Warriors will spend most of the time increasing their stamina and only focusing on training with their spells. But as you know there are many spiritual Warriors who also have strength so that they cannot be helpless in a situation where they are unable to use their spells.


    Now back to the main matter, the human king is very happy that both of his children became more determined and he also decided to help them to be stronger. Unfortunately his father is busy cultivating to increase his power or with the guidance of his father both of his children will grow stronger and will get proper understanding.


    The human king naturally knows why both of his children became more determined to be stronger. Previously when they saw the condition of Sam and also got to know what happened to him they had a full helpless expression on their face.


    At this time most likely they realized how careless they were when their friend and brother were fighting a more dangerous situation. It makes them more determined to grow stronger.


    On the other hand, Sam already came inside of the danger zone and he was now in the outside area of the danger zone. But you will not stay in that outside area. Compared to the inner area the number of warriors in the outside area were much more but at the same time the number of those Monsters would be low and everyone of those Monsters would be weakpared to him.


    But because the number of those people will be much greater he did not want to stay there while breaking through. He actually wanted to find a ce between the border of the outer area and the inner area of the danger zone.


    So wasting no time he already begins to go toward that ce. During the time he also met the search team of the warrior association and also the search team of the kingdom. The human Kingdom and the warrior association already appoint their search team inside the danger zone so that they would be able to stay alert all the time and also try to find if any kind of abnormality happened inside the danger zone or not.


    Not just those search teams but at the same time he also meets many other Warriors who already recognise him as he recognise as the hero of the human Kingdom. But Sam just ignores all of them while trying to look for a good ce to hide himself while trying to break through.


    Sometimeter he came to the border area and began to look for everyone in those areas where he could hide himself and nobody would try to disturb him. Unfortunately finding that kind of ce wasn''t that easy and it almost took him 5 hours to just search for that ce.


    Even after 5 hours he did not find a good ce to break through but at the time he decided to create a ce using his power. He created a secret hole in the ground that also connected to a cave. That would be a good ce for him to break through so only after that he decided to rest for sometime before starting the break through process.


    He brings out all the necessary things for the breakthrough process. He brings out all the limit breakers and already uses the supreme upgrade technique to upgrade the limit breakers. Not only that, he also brought out the Potions and already created the barrier array in that ce.


    After finally everything was done he decided to meditate and enter the mind zero state. Well he did that to focus on the breaking through process. He was already holding both limit breakers in both of his hands.


    The Spiritual energy from both limit breakers already enters his body while in the mind zero state he enters the inner world where he is already facing that big barrier that prevents him from advancing to the next Grade.


    Naturally because of his spiritual energy the power of every barrier when he will reach the limit of any Grade would be much more powerfulpared to any other Warrior and because of these to break through those prevention he needed much more power. Only using his own power would he naturally need a very long time to break through that strong barrier.


    Now back to main matter,


    As you can see he uses his full power to attack the barrier. He continuously created the mega beam to attack the barrier and at the same time using his other techniques to fully attack that barrier.


    Other than the concealment technique he uses all of his techniques that could help him in that situation. Even though he was in a soul state, he can use all of his techniques and also the most interesting thing was that because of the soul energy, it seems in the soul state the power of those techniques became more powerful.


    Those mega beams and those Golden beams became more powerful in that soul state. Not only the power of those techniques, but even he was feeling much stronger.


    Really it waspletely unexpected for him and with that he already got the advantage of breaking through the barrier. Almost 50% of the barrier got destroyed by him and even though that barrier tried to regenerate quickly, some also did not give it the chance. Sam was attacking continuously so that he was unable to recover that 50%.


    But the regeneration ability of that barrier is much more powerful. Because of this, you have to say Sam was having a very tough situation. He doesn''t know if he would be able to fully break that barrier without using the power of the limit breaker or not.


    After 5 minutes it ispletely possible for him to break the barrier as he is already able to recover the 30% area which he previously had. And also Sam already started to feel the exhaustion after using his power continuously to attack the barrier.


    Fortunately at this time suddenly he began to feel the extra power that most likely came out of both of the limit breakers and with that he once again had full energy and a different kind of energy also suddenly came into his body. Sam was very familiar with the energy as it came from the limit breaker.


    As you know every limit breaker has the unique energy that is mainly used to break that kind of barrier. Sam westing no time once again begins to attack the barrier with full power. This time all the attacks of Sam became more powerful with thebination of 3 energy.


    As usual the moment the energy of the limit breaker begins to affect the barrier it is already able to prevent the barrier from regenerating that quickly and this also gives Sam the time to create more damage to that barrier.


    The barrier just keeps getting destroyed by all those powerful attacks. Not just The Spiritual techniques but at the same time he was using the physical strength to attack the barrier. Seriously at this time Sam was thinking it would be very helpful if he had a technique that could create clones. With that most likely the damage rate of the barrier would be much more.


    Finally after 2 hourster he can already see that he destroyed almost 80% of the barrier and he just needed to destroy that remaining 20%. Fortunately the energy of the limit breakers is still present in that ce and itb Still prevents the barrier from regenerating.

 Chapter 649 649 - The Spiritual fluctuation

    <h4>Chapter 649 Chapter 649 - The Spiritual fluctuation</h4>


    Sam doesn''t know how long passed but finally you can say he is already able to destroy 90% of that barrier and only the 10% remain. The great thing is that the energy of the limit breakers is still present in that ce and it is still preventing that barrier from regenerating quickly.


    Naturally that energy of the limit breaker provides Sam with additional spiritual energy and additional stamina. But Sam also realized one problem at that time. Because he is using the original spiritual energy, the consumption rate of the energy of those limit breakers bes much more and he just hopes until he does not break that barrierpletely that the energy of those limit breakers stay in that ce.


    Sometimeter finally he broke 99% of that barrier and only just 1%, but suddenly something unexpected happened. He can feel the energying out from those limit breakers mostly disappearing from that ce and he can already see the regeneration ability of the barrier once again begin to effect.


    ''I needed to use my all in this attack or I won''t be able to break the barrier. Not only that I won''t able to break the barrier, i would receive a massive side effects,''


    Sam thought this and decided to use his all in this attack. He didn''t have any choice right now. If he is unable to break the barrier this time, then it won''t be possible for him to break the barrier. Also, previously he already realized that every time he failed to break the barrier or tried to break the barrier, then he would receive side effects.


    You can say for sometime he won''t be able to move his body, or his body in massive pain. Many unexpected things would ur during this time. Sam really did not hope something like that happened to him as he did not think he would be able to handle the side effects.


    Sam fully focused this time and wasting no time he already began to gather energy. This time he was using his most powerful attack and to do that he really needed to use his bow and arrow. Fortunately in his soul state he doesn''t have to bring his real bow and arrow and just can imagine them while those things will appear in that ce.


    Suddenly a bow and arrow appeared in that ce. Compared to any of his long distance attacks, as you know only the archery technique is able to reach supreme grade. Because of this,pared to any of the long distance attacks the power behind his archery attack is much higher.


    Once again Sam enters the calm state and he already begins to channel The Spiritual energy into his bow and arrow. The channeling rate of The Spiritual energy also increased and in less than a second you can say he almost channeled 90% of his spiritual energy into that bow and arrow.


    Both the bow and arrow began to blow brightly after absorbing the spiritual energy from Sam. But at the same time the bow and arrow already begin to release the danger aura. If any Warrior were in front of Sam, then he would get affected by that dangerous aura.


    The most important thing was that his arrow already contained two types of elemental power that fused with each other and because of the soul energy it became much more powerful. Wasting no time he already shot that Arrow at the barrier that was almost able to recover 1%.


    "Boom!!!!!!!!"


    The moment that Arrow hit the barrier instantly a very big explosion appeared in that ce and Sam almost felt he would be dead. Fortunately somehow he was able to protect himself from the impact and also already saw finally the barrier get brokenpletely.


    But that was in the important matter as he can see even his inner world most likely got affected by the previous attack. Almost crack begins to appear on the sky of his inner world. Fortunately with that attack he was able to reach the barrier and instantly the warm energy in his body began to heal his whole body and also began to heal his whole inner world.


    All the cracks that previously appeared on his inner world already got recovered by that warm energy and at the same time his full mental energy began to recover. As you know every time that warm energy enters his body he will feel very rxed. But he didn''t know why he was feeling that this time he was feeling more rxedpared to before and it felt like someone gently breaking all the restrictions of his body so that he did not receive any kind of side effect.


    ______________________


    "What happened? Why the hell a huge spiritual fluctuation appears here? I don''t think any kind of Monster present in this ce would be able to release this kind of spiritual energy. Quickly call all of our teammates as we needed to search the whole ce.


    Also if it is possible then quickly inform the warrior association and the king. Because I don''t think they did not feel The Spiritual fluctuation."


    A group of warriors who just enter the outer area of the danger zone quickly be very affected by the sudden spiritual fluctuation that appears in that ce. Spiritual fluctuation is so powerful that it almost makes them unable to free themselves and almost every one of them feels like they are going to die.


    Fortunately that spiritual fluctuation instantly disappears and with that they are finally able to move their body. Even with that it took them some time to fully recover from the previous matter and also they already became very alert about the situation.


    For a second everyone thought this was some kind of attack from those Abyss humans and because of this, wasting no time they already informed the warrior association and the human King about this.


    Actually not only that team of Warriors, almost every team of Warriors who were present in the danger zone and present in the outside area received a huge impact because of that sudden spiritual fluctuation. Everyone really feels the same thing and because of this, you can see everyone of them fully covered in sweat.


    All the warriors who were present in the inner area of the danger zone got affected by that spiritual fluctuation but it wasn''t that powerful like the Warriors who were present in the outer area. But even with that almost every Warrior present in the danger zone got alert about this matter, and everyone of them already began toe to the outer area to search the whole ce very carefully.


    Naturally nobody wanted those Abyss humans to do something unexpected and that could be very harmful for the human Kingdom. On the other hand, the Warrior association instantly got very alert when they received so many notifications from the Warriors telling them that something very unexpected happened in the danger zone and they should quickly send their team in the danger zone.


    The moment the warrior association gets to know about these, they quickly contact the search team present in the human Kingdom to see what was happening in the danger zone. As you know after the previous incident the warrior association became more alert and with this kind of matter they would react very quickly.


    Actually those Warriors didn''t even need to contact the warrior association as they already felt the huge spiritual fluctuation that suddenly appeared from the danger zone. With that they already contact the search team and they already contact the headquarter to inform them about this sudden incident.


    On the other hand the human King also already sent his team of Royal Guard in the danger zone to see what was happening. If really those Abyss humans appear in the danger zone and trying to do something or trying to capture his people then naturally he cannot forgive that.


    Not only that, the human King already told the old human king about this and both of them used their observation power to see what was happening in the danger zone. Well if you are thinking both of them would be able to easily observe the hold in the zone then you are wrong.


    The distance between the human Kingdom and the danger zone is almost 84 km. And the danger zone processes some kind of energy that also prevents this type of observation force. Actually, both of them would not feel any kind of prevention if they entered the dangerous zone but when they would try to observe the dangerous zone from outside.


    But even with that both of them used their full observation force to see what was happening and if they suddenly received any kind of distracting signal then they would immediately react. None of them naturally want anything to happen with their Kingdom. If really those Abyss humans appear in the danger zone that they would get immediately killed or captured by them.

 Chapter 650 650 - The Strange Barrier

    <h4>Chapter 650 Chapter 650 - The Strange Barrier</h4>


    Sometimeter, you can see a huge crowd in the danger zone. Everybody came there to see what was happening and everyone was ready to take action if really those Abyss humans came to the danger zone and were nning to do something that could harm the human Kingdom.


    But the main thing was that they were unable to find the location of that spiritual fluctuation that happened sometime ago. That spiritual fluctuation appears in that ce for only one second and after that itpletely disappears without leaving any kind of trace.


    It''s really very rming for everyone as everyone bes more like you that most likely those Abyss humans use the teleportation array, and because of that the spiritual fluctuation previously got created. Nobody was sure if that was true or not but they wanted to make sure that everything was alright and nothing bad happened with the human kingdom or any other Warrior.


    Actually even though the citizens of the human Kingdom were not able to learn about the whole situation that happened in the Viet kingdom, everyone could predict most likely something very dangerous happened with that Kingdom and also all of this thing rted to those Abyss humans.


    Because of this everyone became more alert all this time and every time when all the Warriors came inside of the danger zone they would stay alert. If it is possible then they really wanted to observe the whole dangerous zone all the time but unfortunately that was impossible.


    No back to main matter,


    All the Warriors finally begin to leave that ce when the Warriors from the warrior association and the royal guards appear on that ce. They assured those other Warriors that they could leave everything to them and nobody had to worry about anything as they would be able to handle the matter.


    But while going inside of the danger zone they should stay alert all the time and if those Warriors from the warrior association and the royal guards needed any kind of help they would immediately tell them.


    Because of them, finally those Warriors who previously gather on the outer area of the danger zone to search for the real cause of The Spiritual fluctuation begin to go inside of the inner area or begin to focus on their own work. Actually they have full confidence in those Warriors of the warrior association and the royal guards.


    But naturally all of them will stay alert about their surroundings as what if they got suddenly attacked by those Abyss humans?


    Now on the hand the headquarter of the warrior association already got a report about what happened to the danger zone. Immediately all the people of the warrior association''s headquarters already inform all the elders and even the president about this.


    Actually Andrew before going back to his cultivation really wanted to make sure that everything is normal in all the kingdoms that are under the warrior association. Because if he did not confirm about these then he would be able to focus on his cultivation.


    With that the moment they got the report it immediately made them very alert and everybody was already about to go to the human Kingdom. But fortunately the president told him not to worry about that as he already informed the de King to go to the human Kingdom to see what happened in the danger zone.


    Actually de King is still present in the human Kingdom and he is inside the dangerous zone. After getting the report from the president he really began to use his full power to go to the outer area as he is very deep inside of the danger zone right now.


    Before leaving the human Kingdom de king really wanted to make sure that nothing unexpected happened to the human Kingdom and nothing suspicious happened in the danger zone.


    It was a good thing that until now nothing bad happened. But still he cannot give the guarantee that nothing will happen in that ce. Only because of this he is still staying in the Human Kingdom before going back to the headquarters.


    ___________________________


    As anybody could guess, the source of all of this was Sam. When he previously attacked the barrier using that powerful attack it not only created that huge impact inside his inner world, but instantly it created a very powerful spiritual fluctuation that was almost very dangerous for all the Warriors who are still present in the epic grade or lower grade.


    Sam has no idea what is happening currently. The good thing is that fortunately he created that barrier that is also able to prevent any kind of course observing him from outside. Actually this has the power to make him invisible but unfortunately anybody who is able to reach the legendary grade would find him.


    If it wasn''t for the barrier then most likely everyone would have already located him and they would already guess most likely that spiritual fluctuation happened because of him. Not only that all this time you can say the headquarters and the human King most likely forget that previously Sam told him he would try to break through and that could cause a spiritual fluctuation to appear in the outer area.


    Also Sam did not know but it already took him 28 hours for him to break that barrierpletely. For him only a few minutes passed and most likely it will take you more time as the warm energy still present inside of his body ispletely Breaking the restriction of his body.


    During the time he really felt very secure that he never felt before. He did not know something unexpected was happening with his system and because of his system he felt that security. All the status points that he has begin to decrease very rapidly and many changes are also happening with his body right now.


    He did not have any idea what is happening with the system and what is happening with his body. At this time the system also created a very powerful barrier that was almost unbreakable even for those legendary grade Warriors. Not just it would be able to protect but at the same time it would immediately counter anyone who would try to attack Sam right now.


    The most important thing was that the barrier did not release any kind of spiritual fluctuation or any kind of spiritual aura. If anybody present they are right now then that person would feel that barrier did not have any kind of spiritual energy present in it. Actually that person would be right because this barrier really did not have any kind of spiritual energy present in it as it only had the Source energy.


    Sam did not even have any kind of idea about this. Well during all this time Sam already became asleep. He really did not think that he would feel that kind of rxation that would make him fall asleep.


    ________________________________


    On the other hand, in the outer area of the danger zone, the situation began to be normal as the Warrior from the warrior association and the royal guards decided to take action. Not only did they get information that even the de King would havee there to see what was happening.


    With this finally all the Warriors who previously became very alert did not have any reason to be alert like this and they can leave everything to the de king. On the other hand, The de King, aftering to that ce, began to use his full observation power to see what was happening and wanted to see if any kind of trace of dark spiritual energy was present in that ce or not.


    Unfortunately he was not able to find anything but during the time when he observed the full outer area he was able to find a peculiar thing that made him very interested. That did not make him alert because it did not contain any kind of dark spiritual energy.


    But he did not inform anyone because suddenly he remembered one thing that Sam previously told him. Only then he predicates mostly all these things happened because of Sam who is trying to break through already able to break through. That is natural for any Warrior who tries to break through toary grade would cause a powerful spiritual fluctuation like this when they would try to break the barrier.


    He already informs everyone that nobody has to worry about anything as he really did not find any kind of dark spiritual energy present in that ce and with that they did not have to worry about those Abyss humans. Only when everyone bes rxed and begins to leave that ce he begins to approach the ce from where he can feel that barrier.


    The most important thing was that he can feel that the barrier most likely has some kind of power that is also trying to hide itself from the observation technique of those other Warriors. Even thoseary grade Warriors unable to find any clue about that barriers so most likely only that legendary grade Warrior able to find that barrier.

 Chapter 651 651 - Superior Human

    <h4>Chapter 651 Chapter 651 - Superior Human</h4>


    The de King slowly approaches that ce. He can feel the barrier through using the spiritual vision technique. Well, normally nobody would be able to see that area if he did not use spiritual vision or simr techniques like that.


    de King all the time uses the spiritual vision while he approaches that ce and he can already see that barrier. Naturally he did not break the barrier or do something. Well if you are wondering why he became sure that this is the Sam who is inside of that barrier, then it is because Sam previously told him he has a barrier like this that could prevent any Monster or Warrior from approaching his ce.


    Also if anyone tries to break that barrier they won''t be able to do that until that person does not reach the legendary grade. Sam, even though wasn''t sure if anything like this would happen or not, he still prepared himself and because of this he already informed the human king and the de King about this.


    Both of them are present in the human Kingdom and because of this he decided to inform both of them. With the de King did not have any kind of motive to break the barrier. But he already informs the headquarters and the human being about the real reason behind that powerful spiritual fluctuation.


    Naturally, the moment all the elders of the headquarters and also the human King get to know about this they also be rxed and finally they remember that previously Sam also informed them he would try to break through.


    With that they finally became rxed but still at the same time they became worried about Sam''s condition. Even though he fully recovered from thea and the brain injuries, it still makes them worried. Actually they also know that during the time when anybody tried to break through toary grade, it was very risky.


    If that person in the end even uses all the limit breaker and uses his full power unable to break the barrierpletely then the barrier will immediately regenerate and it will immediately cause side effects that could also kill that person.


    Until now many people already receive that kind of side effect and many of them have already died. But even though everyone wants to help Sam in that condition, they won''t be able to do anything to break that barrier or to prevent side effects.


    Every Warrior needed to depend on himself to break the barrier. This is also the reason that the de King did not approach the ce that could immediately break the concentration of Sam. But the thing is that he did not leave that ce as he decided to stay there until Sam did note out from that ce.


    ''Don''t know why I am feeling that if I try to break the barrier, something bad will happen to me. Is this my imagination or is it because this barrier, which was created by Sam, has some kind of additional power that could be able to harm me?''


    The de king thought that when he decided to read near that ce. Don''t know why but every time when he gets close to that barrier, he feels that if he tries to break the barrier then something bad will happen to him.


    He has no idea if it is his imagination or not but he really did not have any kind of intention to see if his instincts are true or not. During the time he just only hopes Sam is able to break through.


    _________________________


    During that time nobody had any idea that the whole body was going through a massive change. His whole body is glowing right now and even his genes are evolving during that time. But Sam really did not have any kind of idea what was happening to him as he just fell asleep.


    Fortunately, hourster the warm feeling began to fade away and Sam also began to wake up from his sleep. He finally opens his eyes and before anything observes surrounding to see if he is outside out still inside of his ce.


    After making sure everything is alright he decided to get up from the ground to see the changes that happened to his body after breaking through. Don''t know why you can save for the first time. He is feeling this kind of rxation after breaking through and also it looks like a lot of burden lifted away from his body.


    He really never felt something like that. He also asked all the elders and even the kings about their experience during the moment they were able to break through, and everyone shared their experience. Everyone told him they feel rxed and they also feel much more stronger and feel some kind of lifted away from their body.


    Sam because of this did not know if this is the same feeling everyone feels after baking through or not. Unfortunately he did not see the change that happened to his body. If at this time he looked at any kind of mirror to see his face then he would immediately notice the change that happened.


    He still had time so he did not deactivate the barrier and just sat down on that ce to look at the system screen. He really wanted to know how much power boost he had received after breaking through. Not only that, he really wanted to know if his system had any kind of change after breaking through or not.


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Superior Human


    Health: (190000/190000)


    Spiritual energy: (190000/190000)


    Soul energy - (150/200)


    Strength: 18000 + 1000


    Agility: 1800 + 1000


    Physique: 1800 + 1000


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 1800 + 1000


    Spirit: 18000 + 1000


    Soul:- 20


    Status points:- 2000


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also be fixed based on the new status.]


    [System remark:- You received an additional boost because you were sessfully able to be a superior human. Compared to any of the normal humans you became the superior race that has much more potential and much more power.


    During your break through the system uses all the status points to evolve your bloodline and make you a superior human. You also sessfully have the option to evolve your bloodline and increase your power.]


    Grade: ary-grade) (early) / (Early RRR grade)


    Potential: Celestial


    Upgrade point:00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (cooldown period for 6 months.)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Superior Dragon Devour


    [As you are sessfully able to be a superior human you also receive the gift that the system already prepared for you from the start.


    From now on your absorb technique you fall into superior technique that could absorb spiritual energy that is present in the whole world. From now on you do not have to rely on the spirit crystals to observe The Spiritual energy.


    Also you can absorb the dead body of powerful Monsters and turn them into status points. But unfortunately for a superior human like you, it ispletely impossible to get a status point or two to observe the dead bodies of those Monsters who weren''t the same power level as you. You can only observe the dead bodies of those Monsters who have the same power level as you or have more power than you.]


    Trigon absorb (Grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    Bloodline skills:-


    Superior Aura


    Superior Destruction


    Superior eyes


    [ Remark: A kid finally turned into a warrior.]"


    You have to say when he looked at the status screen he becamepletely speechless as he really did not expect something like this would happen to him. First of all, he was really able to break through to the next grade but who could have thought he would receive that kind of achievement during that time.


    Really he did not expect he would be able to evolve into a superior human during the time when he is breaking through and also he can tell most likely after bing a superior human he becamepletely different from any normal human or any people who wasn''t able to evolve into a superior race.


    Unfortunately he did not have that kind of knowledge about the matter. But if it is possible he really wanted to learn more about that matter to see what happens to anyone who is able to evolve into a superior race. Not only that he can also see that he received some bloodline skill after bing a superior human.

 Chapter 652 652 - Surprising matters

    <h4>Chapter 652 Chapter 652 - Surprising matters</h4>


    '' Most likely because of the evolution I also receive the power boost. But I am really interested to know about those bloodline skills. Also who can expect all those status points will be used in the evolution process and I just only have 2K Status points left.


    It looks like after bing aary grade Warrior I am unable to absorb the dead body of those Monsters who are weakerpared to me. I can only observe the dead bodies of thoseary grade Monsters or All those Monsters which are powerfulpared to theary grade.


    But I also get to learn from the human being that all the Monsters who are able to be aary grade get an additional boost in their power and also be more intelligent like a human. Fighting them would be very hard for me even though I have the additional boost of my bloodline power.


    Not only that I also need to go deeper inside of the danger zone to find these Monsters as I did not have any idea where I could find thoseary grade Monsters.''


    Sam is thinking all of this while looking at the status screen. This is a really surprising thing for him that he still cannot believe his system will have this kind of feature that is able to upgrade his bloodline to a superior human.


    Not only that while looking at the system remark he can also see that the absorption technique that he mainly used to absorb the spirit crystals or the dead body of those Monsters also evolve.


    Even though the system tells him this is the gift but while looking at the upgrade points he can see all the upgrade points where used so naturally that is also rted to the upgrade or the bloodline skills.


    Sam did not have any idea about this so after sometime he did not decide to think on that matter. But really he feels like he needs to talk to the goddess who gives him the system.


    First of all he did not know why all the bloodlines did not show any kind of grade, and also he never really knew that his potential could upgrade once again and it became celestial. In one word after breaking through you can say Sam became very excited to test all of his power that he is feeling inside of his body.


    Sometimeter,


    Outside of that barrier, as you know, the de King guarding that ce so that nobody approaches that ce or tries to break the focus of Sam, suddenly bes surprised as he can feel the barrier begin to disappear from that ce.


    For a second he became very alert but then he suddenly felt the aura of aary grade warrior. Most likely that person right nowing outside and the de king is very familiar with that aura.


    That made me excited to see the change of Sam as he already can predict that Sam was sessfully able to break through so he did not have to worry about anything.


    It did not take that much time for Sam toe outside. Naturally all the time Sam was just thinking about testing his new power, but the moment he came outside he got surprised after seeing the de King present there and looking in his direction with a smile on his face.


    That made him surprised for a second then he came back to normal and then approached the de king. Actually after looking at the de King for a second he thought most likely something unexpected would ur once again but then when he saw the smile of de king, he did not think something like that would ur.


    _______________________


    "Well¡­ I never thought it would also create that powerful spiritual fluctuation. Well I just thought a small spiritual fluctuation would get created. Also as you get to know my barrier has the ability to hide itself."


    Currently Sam and the de king are talking with each other about the recent matter that happened in the danger zone. After being able to learn what happened when he was trying to break through Sam really became surprised.


    He just only thought previously that a small spiritual fluctuation would be created by that but who could have thought a powerful Energy fluctuation would get created.


    On the other hand Sam did not know but The de King while discussing the recent matter with him can see the change that happened to Sam. First of all he can see the iris of Sam''s eyes became golden.


    This is apletely unexpected thing for him but it looks like that happened when he just broke through and by talking with Sam he became sure that even Sam did not know anything about that. Not only that, actually a more important thing was happening in that ce that Sampletely did not have any idea.


    When Sam approached him his body began to shake for a moment even though he did not know why something like that happened. Not only that he has the feeling that he should kneel down in front of Sam. That is apletely unexpected thing for the de King that he did not know could happen to him.


    The de King is pretty sure that all of this is happening because Sam is using any kind of illusion technique or mind control technique. As the de king ispletely prepared for any kind of attack like this and also he trains himself to counter attack if anyone tries to use mind control or illusion technique on him.


    But this time just by sensing the aura he did not why but his body telling him to kneel down. Well nothing like that happened as Sam did not wear that much time in that part of the danger zone.


    Some get to know even though he thought only 15 minutes passed but he really never thought it already became 28 hours. Because of this, he decided to eat something as he is feeling very hungry right now.


    Sometimeter, both of them separated from each other. Sam is naturally going back to the kingdom while the de king will stay in the danger zone. Even though he and all the other Warriors became for that time but they really cannot be careless.


    On the other hand the de King already informs the headquarters and the human being to tell them what is the real situation and what is the current status. Most of them already became very worried about Sam''s situation.


    When they get to know that everything is okay and he is able to sessfully break through, all of them can be very happy and with that the situation is finally over.


    Sam already came inside of the human Kingdom and directly began to go toward the hotel to eat something in that ce. After that he really decided to go outside of the human Kingdom to test his new power but then it could cause a simr situation like the previous situation so he decided to rest for the day and then use the power tomorrow. Also he needed to meet the king of the human Kingdom.


    ___________________________


    The next day,


    Finally Sam gets the chance toe to the danger zone. Naturally after going back to the human Kingdom he also went back to the Royal pce where he met everyone alongside the human king. Almost for 30 minutes he needed to make them assure that he waspletely okay.


    Currently before doing anything naturally he wanted to use the new power. He will use the additional power boostter. Before anything he wants to try all the bloodlines skills. Sam doesn''t know why but every time when he is approaching any human inside the human Kingdom it looks like that person receiving some kind of pressure or having some kind of problem.


    Even though Sam did not be sure if his prediction or right and wrong as nobody told him anything, but actually Sam was thinking all of this was happening because he was able to evolve into a superior human. Most likely all the pressure those normal humans receive because they have weaker bloodlinepared to him.


    Mainly because of this some kind of suppression is happening. He gets to know about all of these from the human king and Maria who told him that they are feeling some kind of pressure while he approaches them. For Sam that waspletely unexpected as he never knew that and also the second important thing was that he really did not know his eyes became golden.


    That was apletely unexpected theme that he never expected and also it looks like this is the reason behind that change and that change also has additional power in it. Sam did not try anything yesterday as at that time he wanted to restpletely.


    Even though because of breaking through he was able to recover all the mental energy, still he decided to rest for the day. Previously because of forcefully Breaking the limit of his body he received serious side effects. So he really did not want something like that to happen to him once again.

 Chapter 653 653 - Testing the Bloodline Skills

    <h4>Chapter 653 Chapter 653 - Testing the Bloodline Skills</h4>


    Right now Sam is facing many epic grade monsters. But none of those monsters are attacking him all this time because they can feel the power of Sam. This is the reason that all the Monsters maintain the distance between him and them.


    It is just Sam did not make any kind of move right now and because of this all those Monsters even though they get the chance to retreat from that ce they did not decide to retreat and stay there. As you know the intelligence of those Monsters wasn''t that much and because of this, nobody can guess why the hell those Monsters did not retreat while they got the chance.


    Instantly all the Monsters feel a huge pressure that affect their whole body. That pressure directly came to their body while you cannot sense any kind of spiritual fluctuation or spiritual pressure on that ce. That also make all the Monsters very confused as only some of those Monsters get affected by the pressure suddenly.


    Actually Sam is finally using the Superior Aura Right now to see what happens with those Monsters. Instantly after using the skill he can see 10 of those Monsters begin to show some kind of movement. Those Monsters instantly fall down in the ground and it looks like theyparably lose the strength to struggle or do anything in that moment.


    First of all you should know that some did not use his telekinesis technique or any other technique other than the bloodline pressure. So this ispletely unexpected for him as he never thought this kind of effect would happen after using that skill.


    But that wasn''t over as he can feel that he can still increase the power of the Steel if he uses The Spiritual energy. So wasting no time he instantly begins to use the spiritual energy to increase the power of the Superior Auraand in the next second all those Monsters who previously got affected by the Superior Aurasuddenly begin to show some kind of weird expression on their body.


    Actually their bodies begin to shake very violently. If you look at the expressions of those Monsters then you will see that all of them were in pain. Unfortunately all the monsters suddenly feel that pressure that almost makes them unable to do anything and also everyone of them can feel the blood of their body begin to boil.


    Like this, after 1 minute something unexpected happened in that ce that almost made Sam very shocked. Actually for 1 minute he keeps increasing the power of his Superior Aurato see what happens with those Monsters. After 1 minuteter suddenly the body of those Monsters begin to release vapors.


    But the color of that vapor is red and that naturally makes him very confused for a moment. Only sometimeter he realizes that the blood of those Monsters begin to leave the body of those Monsters while turning into vapor. Most likely using the Superior Aurahe can directly affect the blood of any Monsters or any enemy.


    At first every Monsters or any enemy that got affected by the Superior Aurawould naturally be unable to control their body as the blood would be in pressure so their body would be in pressure. After that when Sam would increase the power of the bloodline pressure, naturally it would also affect the blood and somehow that blood will turn into vapor.


    ''I needed to understand this technique as I really did not have that much idea. I hope the system can finally provide me with the description of this technique so that I have a clear understanding of this.''


    Actually Sam previously tried to look at the description of the technique using the system but unfortunately his system at that time did not provide him with the description.


    Because of this, he did not have any idea about that technique previously and also this time he only got a little bit of idea about that technique. But the most surprising thing was that when he previously activate the Superior Aura He really did not need any kind of spiritual energy to activate that.


    During the time he just feels that his blood releases some kind of pressure. Later, he already feels that he can also supply The Spiritual energy into that bloodline technique and most likely with that he would be able to increase the power of that bloodline pressure.


    But even with that it did not require him that much spiritual energy to increase the power of that bloodline pressure. Most likely that technique or you can say that skill did not require that much spiritual energy and even with that it would be able to show the maximum capability.


    Now on the other hand, all the Monsters present in that ce really did not have any idea about the thing that happened with those 10 Monsters. Actually all the time they are most likely observing the surrounding area and observing Sam carefully. If they feel a little bit of spiritual fluctuationing out from Sam they would immediately retreat from that ce.


    But unfortunately none of them feel any kind of energy fluctuation and because of this, they did not show any kind of reaction all this time. But the most surprising thing was that when they notice 10 of theirrades fall down on the ground and stop moving.


    This makes all those Monsters very confused because they don''t know if it was because of that Warrior or not. Not only that, sometimeter from the body of theirrade something like smoke came out and it looked like all theirrades died in that ce.


    Now after realizing that thing everyone of those Monsters decided to retreat and they are already preparing to retreat from that ce. Even though this matter was not rted to that enemy, they still decided to retreat.


    Unfortunately for them Sam is already preparing to use the next attack and that would be the superior destruction. This time instant a huge amount of spiritual energy got consumed by Sam and the next second a huge amount of spiritual energy began to gather in his hand.


    The Speed of the gathering is very powerful as in less than a second it already gathers arge amount of spiritual energy and not only that, even the elemental energy also begins to gather in that ce. Both fire and light elements also begin to gather in that ce.


    During all the time Sam maintains his calm at the same time when almost he can feel the attack is ready, wasting no time he quickly shoots that attack toward those Monsters. In the next second you can see that attack release from his hand as an energy beam that directly went toward those Monsters.


    "Boom!!!!!!!"


    Almost instantly a huge destruction appeared in that ce that almost made him unable to see anything because ayer of smoke also instantly got created in front of his eyes.


    Because of this he instantly stopped the attack as he did not want to destroy many things and what if he suddenly attacked a warrior. So the moment he realized the attack created mass destruction he stopped that attack.


    He stayed in the same ce without doing anything as he really wanted to see what the situation was. Fortunately it did not take that much time for thatyer of smoke to disappear and only then he could see that the almost 10 km area in front of him got destroyed and everything present in that ce also got destroyed.


    Other than the burning ground you cannot find anything. Also a huge hole appeared on that ground. Now that ispletely unexpected for him as he really did not expect using that skill would create this much destruction that is easily able to destroy a 10 km area.


    Even though he has all these powerful techniques, none of them are able to destroy a 10 km area this easily and using his techniques to destroy a huge amount of area also needed a huge amount of spiritual energy. Even though this time he also uses a huge amount of spiritual energy but still he did not expect the ten kilometer area in front of him would get destroyed.


    Also the most interesting thing was that no energy fluctuation appeared on that ce during the time when he released the attack toward those Monsters. While the spiritual energy started gathering on his hand a spiritual fluctuation appeared in the ce but after that it got Vanished when he felt like the attack was ready.


    _____________________________


    ''Shit, did you attack any Warrior? I hope nothing like that happened. Who could have expected that the power of this attack would be so powerful? Most likely using the skill I am able to fuse all of my elements and spiritual energy into one attack and create an ultimate attack.


    I really should not use this attack carelessly as it can also kill my friends. But before anything I really need to check the whole ce.''


    Sam, wasting no time, has already begun to check the whole 10 km area very carefully. All this time he was just hoping he did not injure any Warrior. Fortunately nothing like that happened as after observing the whole 10 km area he did not find any traces of warriors. Only then he is able to rx and6 have the mood to use thest skill.

 Chapter 654 654 - The Skills of superior human

    <h4>Chapter 654 Chapter 654 - The Skills of superior human</h4>


    Sam went to a different ce. As the previous already got destroyed he unable to find any kind of monster in that ce. But before doing anything he already inform the situation that he is trying with his new power and because of this, that destruction appear on that ce.


    Actually he inform them because he did not want them to became alert about that destruction. Now with that everything is done and he came to the new ce to use the final skill.


    This time he did not directly appear in front of those Monsters and maintain the distance between him and those Monsters. Only then he decided to use thest skill, the superior eyes, to see what would happen after using that Skill.


    Instantly he is able to see 360 directions and also for him everything bes very clear. Only then he focused on those Monsters that weren''t far away from his ce. Instantly something unexpected happens as he can see a red spot present in those monsters and not only that suddenly he can feel that he has some kind of power in his eyes that would control those Monsters.


    At this time Sam suddenly realized that all those Monsters instantly stopped moving and everyone of them quickly became very alert. It looks like everyone of those monsters is suddenly scared by something. But that wasn''t it as in the next second when he increased the power of his superior eyes.


    Instantly he can see a strange thing that he can control the spiritual energy that will destroy destructive energy and all that spiritual energy begins to gather in those red spots of those monsters. Like this after some secondster once again something unexpected happened.


    Those monsters suddenly began to show an ufortable expression on their face. Not only that they can suddenly feel that something dangerous is entering their body and they are helpless as they are unable to do anything in that situation.


    Fortunately, the process didn''t take that long when suddenly the body of those monsters began to glow fully in red color and after that one by one their body began to explode. Once again this was apletely shocking thing for him.


    Who could have thought that something like this would happen after using superior eyes. Not only that he can also tell this skill also has the same features as his spiritual vision but those are the basic features of this skill. Not only that but the spiritual energy using those basic features is really minimal and he can tell that this technique is more powerful.


    ____________________________


    "Superior Aura


    [The bloodline skill that instantly releases the bloodline pressure that directly affects your enemy. Only if your enemy has a powerful bloodline as you, only then your enemy won''t get that much affected.


    But other than that all the enemy who didn''t have the powerful bloodline will get affected. Their whole body will be unable to move as their blood won''t directly feel the pressure from you.


    If you increase power of your skill then it will directly froze the blood of your enemy and if you increase our of the skill more than that then it will immediately began to boil the blood of your enemy and sometimeter the blood of your enemy will being out as a vapor and with this your enemy will be dead.]


    Superior Destruction


    [ This bloodline skill is an attack skill that instantly begins to gather The Spiritual energy and all the elemental power that you are able to use in your hand as a form of a spiritual beam. During that time The Spiritual fluctuation would happen but when the attack would be finished The Spiritual fluctuation would disappear.


    As it helps you gather all of your spiritual energy into one ce alongside with the element of power, a huge destructive spiritual beam is created by that. Also the more you use your spiritual energy the more powerful the attack will be.]


    Superior eyes


    [This is also the bloodline kill that is mainly based on your eyes. As a superior human you have the eyes that have the all ability of any spiritual vision. Using those basic abilities you don''t have to use much of your spiritual energy.


    After the basic ability this skill also has the ability to see the weak spot of your enemy and not only that it has the ability to control the destructive spiritual energy directly all the destructive spiritual energy will be sent to that weak of your enemy. You can easily control the amount of destructive spiritual energy that you want to send into that weak spot of your enemy.]"


    Finally Sam can see the description of his bloodline kill that previously his system did not show him. Most likely his system also wanted him to experience all the skills first and only then it provided him with the description of his skills so that he was able to get more details about skills.


    Sam was present inside of the human Kingdom and he was now eating food in the restaurant. While eating he began to look at the system screen and he was really surprised after reading the description of those skills.


    First of all he gets to know that all those skills belong to the superior humans and from birth mostly everyone of them would have this kind of skill. Unfortunately in Eden blue not in the Terraria he gets to know about any kind of information rted to this bloodline and any information about the superior humans.


    So basically he can say nobody knows about the superior humans or any other superior life from Terraria. But at the same time he will be very interested to know if he was able to use the supreme upgrade to update the bloodline of any person or not.


    He would try to do that after his superior upgrade was avable to use once again. But then right now he begins to think about blue. Finally he had the string to fight that true Dragon that was approaching his world and wanted to absorb the core of that world to reach theary grade.


    Not only that, at the same time many other people from many other worlds also came to Eden blue with the same intention. But he already reached that power level and he got the confidence to fight everyone. Even if an army of otherworldly people try to attack his world he would be able to fight them.


    ''But I would really like to know when I would be able to use the zone. As I can tell everyary grade warrior would use their domain or I can say zone to kill their enemy faster than before. I need to talk to the human King about this to see if he can suggest anything to me or not.''


    Sam thought this. But at the same time he is also thinking about going inside of the danger zone but this time he won''t be going inside of the danger zone to check his skills or to break through, this time you will be going inside of the danger zone to findary grade Monsters and try to gather many status points.


    Because before going to his world he wanted to be as powerful as he could so that fighting and army of other world''s people won''t have any kind of problem. Not only that but he also really missed his family and really wanted to know what happened when previously his teacher and mostly many other Warriors were preparing themselves to go to another world to help those true humans.


    Naturally he gets the location of that world where you will find the earth of this world and in the earth you will find the true humans. For sometime he really wanted to go to that world to see if people from Eden blue came there or not.


    Unfortunately he did not want to risk anything just because he was very curious about it. Previously the old Oni king and even the old human being told him that to safely use the world bridge, you should first reach theary grade.


    Many people from other worlds use the world bridge without reaching theary grade, but the thing is that everyone receives the side effect of doing that and also every time they use the world bridge they would destroy the potential of their body. Using the world bridge you will get contact with the dangerous space energy that would try to affect your body all the time.


    Only after reaching theary grade do you have the strength to protect your body fully. Because of this even though previously he wanted to go to the earth to see that world and also to see if people from his came to that Earth or not, he really did not do that.


    Back to the main matter, he is also thinking about going to the Oni Kingdom. As he already promised them he would visit there and also before using the world bridge he had some questions that he wanted to ask the old Oni king.

 Chapter 655 655 - The celebration

    <h4>Chapter 655 Chapter 655 - The celebration</h4>


    Sometimeter he came back to the royal pce and immediately Maria began to ask him many questions about his breakthrough. First of all, she gets to know that during the time when anybody tries to break through Epic grade toary grade, it bes very dangerous for that person if that person is unable to break the barrier even using the power of the limit breaker then immediately he would receive side effects that could even kill the person.


    So naturally she was very worried about him and she also got to know from her father that previously a huge spiritual fluctuation also appeared in the danger zone where most likely Sam was trying to break through.


    She did not get the information that spiritual fluctuation was rted to the process of Sam''s breakthrough and he was already sessfully able to break through. Because of this she instantly begins to ask all these types of questions.


    Sam on the other hand begins to answer every one of the questions with a smile on his face as he really can tell his friend Maria is worried about him and he is trying to make sure she bes assured that he is fully okay. Not only Maria but even the prince and the queen came to that ce to ask him about his condition.


    Everyone is very worried about him as he just recovered from a side effect some time ago and nobody can give a guarantee that during the process of breaking through their side effects won''t affect him.


    Butpared to Maria both of them are already able to learn that he is finally able to break through and with that everything is okay. But still, both of them wanted to make sure that Sam was fully okay and that the side effects did not affect him.


    Sometimeter,


    All the high officials of the human Kingdom alongside the human king and his family present in the hall room. But you can say the atmosphere of that ce is really good. Everyone just came there to see the condition of Sam and to see the youngest Warrior who was able to reach theary grade.


    Naturally many people be very curious to know how he was able to be so powerful this quickly but at the same time they also respect his privacy as Sam previously did not reveal any kind of thing rted to that matter. So, even though they wanted to ask him about the secret, they did not ask that in the end.


    The Human King already said that today a banquet will be held in the Royal pce and Sam will be the main guest of that banquet. Even though he tried to stop him from doing that but human King did not listen to his word and also decided to invite the Oni king and his family.


    He and his family were happy for Sam that he became powerful. Sam Did not know but the human king already got to know from the old Oni king that most likely he was from the other and all this time he was trying to make himself powerful so that he could use the world bridge to get back to his.


    So you can say from the start everyone already predicted that most likely Sam would leave their after reaching theary grade. Who could have thought that this time woulde very quickly? Most likely only Maria and Livia did not have any kind of information rted to that matter.


    _______________________


    Sam, sometimeter went back to his room to rest for some time. Well, around 6:00 p.m. the human king held the banquet and Sam needed to present there as every high official and many other Warriors will be present in that banquet alongside the Oni king and his family.


    During the time Sam tried to stay in his room but after thinking about it, he decided to go to the Royal Library that is present in the Royal Pce. He wanted to see if he could find any kind of information rted to the superior race or not. If he finds any kind of information rted to that matter then it would be really helpful and it also gives him the information on how he can evolve any other people to their superior race.


    Naturally, he did not think using the system he would be able to evolve any other person. So he needed to depend on other things that would help him to evolve his family and his friends into a superior race. That would give them the bloodline skills and at the same time will keep them more potential.


    ''Is it possible that as all the Warriors didn''t have superior bloodline present in their body they felt the prevention force while they were trying to make them more powerful after reaching the legendary grade? ''


    Suddenly he thought of that question as this was possible that every warrior like the old human king who reached the legendary grade and trying to cultivate to make them more powerful became harder for them as they did not have the bloodline of a superior race.


    Really if he was able to find a way to help those people reach the superior race then he would do that. He was very grateful to those people as they helped him many times and most likely if those people aren''t present in the Terraria then he won''t be able to survive on this new.


    _____________________


    The human king not only invites the Oni king and his family but at the same time, he invites the elders and President of the Warriors to that banquet. Even though not every elder wille to the banquet, he just hopes some of theme to the banquet as the banquet is held to celebrate the sessful breakthrough of Sam.


    Even though Sam came to Terraria from a different ce they still think of him as their own. If it wasn''t for him then most likely the human Kingdom would be facing many dangerous situations and could be in a worse state. The human being did not want to think what could happen if he did not get all the information from Sam previously.


    Most likely because of him, the Warriors of the Terraria were able to be alert about the Abyss humans. Also, every kingdom bes very alert about the traitors. Those of the people who stay inside of the kingdom but always try to think of a way to harm the kingdom.


    On the other hand, Sam already came to the Royal Library and began to look for books that would be rted to the different races. But at the same time he also already decided that tomorrow he would go back to the danger zone to search for theary grade Monsters.


    __________________________


    Finally, around the night time around 6:00 p.m., the whole royale ce was full of people and many Warriors were present there to celebrate the breakthrough of Sam. Most likely like the Oni Kingdom, all the people from the human Kingdom also considered him a hero and they wanted to celebrate the breakthrough of their Hero.


    Many high officials of the warrior association headquarters and the warrior associations branch that were present in the human Kingdom were already present in that ce but at the same time, many other people did note to the Royal pce as they increased the security for that night.


    Sometimeter the elders also came to the Royal pce alongside the president. Only 5 of them came to the Royal Pce of the Human Kingdom alongside their president. But at the same time, you can see the special guest Phillip. He also gets invited by the human King toe to the banquet.


    Today the old human King also came out from his cultivation and participated in the banquet. Not long after that, the Oni king and his family also came to the party alongside the old Oni king. But beforeing to the human Kingdom they increased the security of the earth Kingdom and the warrior association helped them to increase the security.


    Finally, the human king and his family also came to the banquet. Everyone was already enjoying the party while talking with each other and discussing various things. Suddenly everyone realizes that the main guest for whom they organize the party is missing from the party.


    As you can guess Sam did note to the party and instantly the human King realized that they did not inform Sam toe to the party. He instantly called his head butler to ask about the location of Sam. The butler told him Sam was still present inside the royal library.


    The moment all the people present there begin tough. Who could have thought that the main guest of their party would still be present in the royal library and not be informed that he also needed to attend the party?

 Chapter 656 656 - Next day

    <h4>Chapter 656 Chapter 656 - Next day</h4>


    Livia and Maria came to the Royal library to inform Sam that he needed to present in the party as everyone was already present in the party. But still, both of them areughing just thinking about the fact that Sam did not get informed by anyone that he needed it to attend the party at this time.


    Sometimeter both of them came to the Royal library and saw that a dozen books were present in the study table and beside those books you could see a person who was reading a book in Full focus. That person naturally is Sam who right now fully focuses on reading the book that is about the different races that are present in the Terraria.


    All this time he was just reading books rted to this particr thing and he already found many books that also told him about many things about those races present in Terraria. Not just only the present thing but he also gets to know about the history of those different races present in Terraria.


    But until now he did not find any information rted to the superior race or something like that. That makes him wonder because if he really did not find any information needed to those superior races then most likely all the people present in Terraria also did not know anything about that.


    But he cannot be sure about that, as it is possible that the old human king has information about this matter. Because of this, he is also thinking about asking the old human king about all of this as it is possible that he knows something rted to this matter.


    "Sam!!!"


    Sam was thinking all of this when suddenly he heard the shout that made him startled for a second. He quickly looks in front of him and sees Maria and Livia. Both of them standing in front of him and also looking at him with a smile on their face.


    For a second he feels weird about that but he quickly turns his head to look at the clock and only then does he realize that he iste for the party. Only then he realizes why both Maria and Livia are standing in front of him with a smile on their face.


    Most likely this is possible because all the people are already present at the party and he is alreadyte for the party. When he looked at the expression of both of the girls he became sure this is the matter and with that he quickly closed the book and then got up from the study table.


    "Haha¡­ well, Ipletely forgot about that. Just give me 5 minutes and I will be ready for the party."


    Sam quickly said that to them and then quickly left the library. On the other hand both girls once again begin tough loudly the moment Sam told them about this. With that both of them also left the library. Even though they are curious about those books, for right now the party is important.


    5 minutester, Sam came out from his room while wearing a ck suit. You can say that after bing a superhero human something also changes about his looks. Compared to before, right now he has be handsome and the ck suit really matches his looks.


    Well for a second both the girls get startled after seeing his look but then they quicklye back to reality and without three of them begin to walk towards the party. In the Royal pce you can say for this kind of party a particr ce was already present and a human king held the party in that ce.


    The moment Sam came to that ce instantly everyone present their notice team and they began to p for him. Finally the main guest of the party was present there and all of them were really happy for him as he was able to break through without facing the side effect.


    But at the same time Sam notices that everyone has a smile present on their face and it looks like they are smiling at him. Naturally he can give the matter because of this he also begins tough.


    Sometimeter,


    One by one all the people came to him and then congrattion for the breakthrough. All the elders of the warrior association and the president also came to him to say congrattions. They also told him that they are really proud of him as he is finally able to break through. They hope he is able to grow strong like this and also help Terraria when it really needs his help.


    __________________________________


    "Next day"


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Superior Human


    Health: (194000/194000)


    Spiritual energy: (194000/194000)


    Soul energy - (150/200)


    Strength: 18400 + 1000


    Agility: 18400 + 1000


    Physique: 18400 + 1000


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 18400 + 1000


    Spirit: 18400 + 1000


    Soul:- 20


    Status points:-00


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also be fixed based on the new status.]


    [System remark:- You received an additional boost because you were sessfully able to be a superior human. Compared to any of the normal humans you became the superior race that has much more potential and much more power.


    During your break through the system uses all the status points to evolve your bloodline and make you a superior human. You also sessfully have the option to evolve your bloodline and increase your power.]


    Grade: ary-grade) (early) / (Early RRR grade)


    Potential: Celestial


    Upgrade point:00


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (cooldown period for 6 months.)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Superior Dragon Devour


    Trigon absorb (Grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    Bloodline skills:-


    Superior Aura


    Superior Destruction


    Superior eyes


    [ Remark: A kid finally turned into a warrior.]"


    Sam is looking at a status screen as he uses the remaining status points to increase the stats points. Today he will be entering the danger zone once again to stabilize his condition right now as he really needs to get used to the new strength.


    Not only that as you know he wanted to find theary grade monster before going to the Oni Kingdom. He did not know if he would get the time to enter the danger zone after going back to the Oni kingdom or not. As most likely he will stay in the Oni kingdom for a week and after that he will ask the old King to use the world''s reach to send him to the Eden blue.


    Because of this before going back to the Oni Kingdom he wanted to see if he was able to find those Monsters or not. Currently he just only needed to find those Monsters as hunting those other Monsters won''t help him. He won''t be able to absorb or get Status points after killing those Epic grade monsters. Well, he can sell the loot in his system shop to get the gold coins but he will think about thatter.


    Every Warrior who came to the party the previous day already went back to their home. Even the Oni king and his family went back to their home. Even though Livia wanted 5o stay there but she did not stay there as she also wanted to focus on getting stronger.


    Actually she already heard about the match between Maria and Sam. From that she already knows that Maria has be more determined to feel the gap between her and Sam. Also it helps her to improve in those matters so that you can say her weakness.


    She also told Sam that she wanted to fight him when he went to the Oni Kingdom. Naturally, Sam epted that as he did not have any kind of problem with that.


    Back to the main matter, Sam is looking at his inventory. He was checking if everything was ready or not. If you look at his inventory then you will only find the necessary things that he would need when he goes inside of the danger zone.


    As you know he only keeps important things in the inventory and besides that he sells everything in the system shop so that he can get the gold coin. So if you are thinking in this 6 he collected many loots in his inventory, then you are wrong.


    Like this sometimeter he went to the dining room to eat. Well you will be leaving the Royal pce after finishing eating lunchb with everyone.

 Chapter 657 657 - Diamond mantis

    <h4>Chapter 657 Chapter 657 - Diamond mantis</h4>


    Sam finally came inside of the danger zone and was already very deep inside the inner area. But until now he did not find any Monster that had the same power level as him. Because of this, he is ignoring those Monsters as they will not provide him with status points.


    But previously aftering inside of the danger zone you also try his new strength while fighting those Monsters and right now you can say he is finally able to stabilize the condition. He already became familiar with his new strength and naturally wanted to find thoseary-grade Monsters.


    Beforeing to the danger zone the human King already told him that finding those Monsters could be hard for him as those Monsters became intelligent after reaching theary grade so they could also hide themselves and easily did note out from their hiding ce.


    Even if anyary grade Monsters were present around him then those Monsters would not show up that easily as they are just waiting for the perfect time to attack him and also using their power to hide themselves from the observation technique.


    Well,pared to any Warriors every monster has the ability to use the power of domain from the start the moment they are able to break through toary grade. So using the power of their domain they could easily hide themselves from this kind of technique that normally Warrior used to find the Monsters aftering inside of the danger zone.


    Even though Sam is using origin spiritual energy, he still cannot find those Monsters. Mostly the reason behind this is that his observation technique did not reach the superior grade. But he did not know if his new bloodline skill would help him in this matter or not.


    Normally the bloodline skill would help him to see the weakness of his enemy and also he can control The distractive Spiritual energy to kill that enemy without using any other technique. But previously he also found after using the technique that it has the ability to observe the surrounding area and also can easily show him the aura of every living being that can use the spiritual energy.


    Because of this, Sam from the start uses the bloodlines skill to find the location of those Monsters. Unfortunately, he did not find anything even after finding it for almost 5 hours. But he did not get disappointed as he realized most likely in that area he won''t be able to find those Monsters and needed to go deeper inside the danger zone, or it could be that even using the bloodlines skills he wouldn''t be able to find those Monsters.


    Like this, he decided to go deeper inside the danger zone but at the same time, he could already see many other Monsters and many other Warriors also present in that area. Naturally, none of them had the same power level as him as they were just Epic grade Warriors.


    As he is using the concealment technique nobody would be able to find him so he did not have to worry about getting recognised by anyone. Sam, already begins to go more deep inside of the danger zone while carefully observing the surrounding area.


    It would be very good if he also found a Dungeon in that ce. First of all, you know that in the human Kingdom except for the human King, nobody is able to reach theary grade, so normally any Warriors won''t be able to give him any kind of suggestion rted to that matter.


    Thinking all of this he did not even realize that he was already traveling for almost 3 hours. With that he decided to rest and also eat something. Sam previously realized that after bing a superior human he did not have to eat anything as he did not feel hungry. At the same time, he cannot let go of that habit so naturally he will eat while resting in that ce.


    ________________________________


    3 dayster,


    "Boom!!!"


    A huge impact was created and almost the 5 km area was affected by that impact. At this time If you look at the center of that ce then you will find that a person while holding a sword shed with a monster that most likely also has armor present in his body.


    The name of that Monster is the diamond mantis which has an almond that also looks like a diamond present in its body. Both of his hands are very short and the Monsters use both of his hands as weapons to attack their enemy.


    Naturally that Monsters is aary grade monster which Sam finally found. Somepletely lost hope of finding any Monsters who were able to reach theary grade but fortunately today he suddenly got attacked by those Monsters when that Monster thought Sam let down his guard.


    Sam was eating and wasting not far away from that ce when suddenly Monsters came behind him and attracted him. Fortunately, his instincts alert him and he instantly uses the teleportation technique to teleport away.


    But it looks like the speed of that Monsters also is first as the moment he notices Sam disappearing from that ce uses the observation technique to find Sam. Also, the moment he finds the location of Sam you can say fill the spiritual fluctuation he instantly uses his full speed toe in front of him and attack him.


    Naturally, this time Sam is ready for that and he also decides to fight using his Sword. His sword was fully coated with his spiritual energy and also he used his superior technique this time to attack the monster. Compared to any technique naturally, the power of the superior technique would be much more powerful as even though he did not even use the full power of his technique he still created that big impact.


    But it looks like the monster is not only just fast but at the same time his defense is also very strong. If you are wondering why then The Monster did not even receive any kind of damage even though Sam uses the Origin Spiritual energy during the attack.


    Suddenly Sam decided to use the superior aura skill on that monster alongside the superior eyes. As he expected instantly that the Monster would get affected, it did not get that much affected like those other Monsters and also it has the strength to resist the bloodline pressure.


    Sam did not increase the power of his bloodline pressure as he wanted to find Monsters only using the sword. He uses that pressure skill to just get the advantage in that matter and also to increase the power of his sword technique. Also using his superior eyes he is already able to find the weak spot of that monster.


    First of all, he gets confused as he is unable to find any kind of rate spot present in the body of that Monster but then when he looks very carefully here will find the weakness that is around the neck area. Not properly the neck area but you can say slightly below the neck area he can see a red area.


    Previously he did not notice that because Sam is using that skill on aary-grade Monster. So it became a problem for him to find the ce but fortunately in the end he will find the weak spot of that monster. With that, he already decided to attack that ce but it looks like without using any other skill or technique he won''t be able to gain the advantage to attack that area.


    Fortunately, he uses the telekinesis technique to hold that Monster for 5 seconds and that time is enough for him to attack that ce almost 20 times in less than a second. He did not know if he would be able to kill that Monster if he attacked that area with just one attack. There is a possibility that the color is that bright as the weak spot of those Monsters also isn''t that big enough.


    So with that, he decided to attack that Monster continuously to see if he could break the barrier without giving that Monster the chance to react or do any other thing. Fortunately, in front of his fast and sharp attack, even though The Monster has defense armor present in its body, the monster still finally receives the injuries in his weak spot.


    Not only that the injury was very deep as it faced the attack of Sam continuously. But when Sam thought he would kill that Monster, that Monster instantly realized the danger and used the domain skill to get the advantage.


    With that,t even Sam gets affected by the domain as he is very close to that ce. He instantly felt the surrounding ce suddenly change and also right now The Spiritual energy that was present everywhere became very dangerous. Naturally that is the ability of that domain and the monster easily uses the spiritual energy to create weapons or any other way to attack him.

 Chapter 658 658 - The power of domain

    <h4>Chapter 658 Chapter 658 - The power of domain</h4>


    Sam instantly can feel the surrounding area change very quickly and in the next second he can see the danger in the present in the air. His instincts also tell him about the danger and warn him to escape from that ce.


    Sam quickly decided to use the superior eyes in full power. Instantly, he can see the dangerous spiritual energy present inside of the domain. Naturally, he can also feel the spiritual energy that is linked with that monster.


    That monster already began to control the power of his domain to kill Sam. But Sam also already began to use the superior eyes in full power. Even though the spiritual energy linked with that monster, he can begin to control the spiritual energy. Using the superior eyes he can also feel the spiritual energy. He already began to control the destructive spiritual energy and began to send the spiritual energy into the weak spot of that Monster.


    Everything happened so quickly that the monster also didn''t expect that. That mantis monster already began to feel the dangerous spiritual energy that entered his body. But even with that he didn''t stop and already began to use power of domain on Sam.


    Sam already began to get by in all the directions. The monster turned the spiritual energy into sharp needles and then began to attack Sam from all directions. Sam already created the spiritual barrier around him but the problem is that inside the domain The Power of The Spiritual barrier already became so low that it did not have the ability to block those attacks for that long.


    Sam also used superior eyes, so it already became very hard for him to maintain both of the techniques. Not only that he also uses the full power of both the technique and the bloodline Skill. With that naturally a huge amount of spiritual energy was consumed during the time but at that time he did not have any other way to protect himself.


    Fortunately because of the origin spiritual energy you can say the power of The Spiritual barrier is still enough to protect him for sometime. Sam reality doesn''t know how long he would be able to maintain that spiritual barrier. Before creating The Spiritual barrier he also received damage, but fortunately because of the armor he did not get that much injured even though he did feel the pain.


    Now you can say both of them are using their full power to kill each other and nobody knows how long both of them would be able to maintain their attack. During that time Sam really wishes to understand the domain as he also knows if he really understands the domain then he would not feel any kind of danger like that.


    But unfortunately he is still unable to understand the basics of the domain so it will take him sometime to fully understand the domain and also the human King already told him that he would give him some suggestions as everyone has different domains so he would only be able to give some basic suggestions about the domain.


    No back to main matter,


    Sam controls the spiritual energy but sometimeter he can also feel the control over the spiritual energy getting weaker as most likely the Monster trying to control the full spiritual energy in that ce. Well, inside the domain The Monster could control all the spiritual energy without any problem, because of thispared to Sam the control over the spiritual energy would be much higher for the monster.


    But don''t think Sam would give up that easily and already begin to give his hundred percent on that superior eye akill and with that he once again feel the control of The Spiritual energy came back to him. But because of that the spiritual barrier once again gets weak and most likely just in 1 minute it willpletely break.


    So currently you can say for Sam he has only 1 minute to kill that Monster or it would be over for him. Also if you are wondering why he isn''t using telekinesis then he also feels that inside the domain he cannot use the technique. His eyes also have the ability to control his enemy but during that time he can already feel the control was very minimal so it won''t give him that much advantage.


    All The Spiritual energy that turns into sharp needles or other attacks that are basically The Monster controlling and attacking Sam, already begin to break the barrier but fortunately it is still able to protect Sam. Already 20 seconds passed and during that time you have to say Sam already controlled a huge amount of spiritual energy that already entered the body of that monster.


    With that you have to say the monster already became injured from inside and most likely if Sam continues to send spiritual energy like this then sometimeter The Monster would explode. But that main problem is that he did not know if before that he would be able to survive or not.


    Because if the spiritual barrier got forcefully broken by all those attacks then he needs to focus on protecting himself and with that he won''t be able to focus on maintaining the superior eyes. But suddenly he realized something that made him worried about the situation.


    Actually he realized that the barrier had already begun to show the sign of a breaking expert from all directions and it looked like in just 5 to 10 seconds the barrier would bepletely broken. It looks like he already miscalcted the timing. Well for him it was also the first time to face a monster who could use the domain and also he did not face anyone inside the domain so basically he did not know that much about the domain.


    Actually the monster is not only able to control the spiritual energy but every spiritual attack or defense technique that his enemy would use in that ce. Basically Sam already became dead if he wasn''t using the Originspiritual energy.


    Also because of this, the monster is forcefully unable to break the barrier that quickly. But from the moment Sam begins to focus on the superior eyes skill The Monster also gets the advantage in that matter as the power of the spiritual barrier already decreases so he can already feel he would be able to break the barrier but naturally that would also take him sometime.


    Because of this,right now even though he already begins to feel that he is losing the strength to fight back or use the spiritual energy, he did not panic or stop his attack. At anyhow he needed to break that barrier and then need to kill that enemy so even in that situation where he could also die before the enemy he did not stop using the attack at 100%.


    Actually if you look at the body of that diamond mantis then you would already have saved the body of that Monster begin to expand. Naturally that is because of the extra spiritual energy that enters the body of that Monster and also damages the body of that Monster from inside.


    The main advantage of Sam in The Spiritual energy that enters the body of that monster isn''t in the control of that Monster so he is unable to control the Spiritual energy. But the spiritual energy after entering his body already begins to damage The Spiritual system that is basically the main thing of any Monster or any Warrior.


    10 secondster, the body of that Monster already expands and that thin diamond mantis turns into a fat diamond mantis. Also it looks like that armor present in his body is unable to suppress the expansion of its body.


    Because of that the monster also gets injured by its own armor. 60% of the spiritual system already got damaged and because of this even though the Monster wanted to maintain the 100% of his attack power, at the time you were unable to maintain that because of that damage to the spiritual system.


    Also this gave Sam the time. Basically one side of his arm already copsed and he already began to receive those attacks from that side. But somehow it is unable to break the armor of his body and as you know the defense of Sam''s body is also high. So this is the advantage he has in that situation and even though he is receiving the attack he can already feel the power of those attacks already begin to decrease.


    But the impact of those attacks already created damage to his body as you can see blood began toe out from his mouth. Not only that as he uses most of his spiritual energy from the start he can already feel exhaustion. Sam can basically tell he won''t be able to maintain the attack for that long. Completely a very tense moment got created in that ce as he really hoped to kill that Monster before he received serious injury.

 Chapter 659 659 - Killing the monster

    <h4>Chapter 659 Chapter 659 - Killing the monster</h4>


    The spiritual energy of the diamond mantis gets consumed more quicklypared to Sam and because of these in the end when they get created in both of them and both of them in a dangerous situation, the mantis gets killed by Sam before he could kill Sam.


    Even though The Spiritual barrier got fully broken in the end and Sam already received injuries after getting attacked by those attacked by the mantis, even the Armour of Sam also showed the sign of getting broken. But fortunately in the end as the spiritual energy of that mantis got consumed more quickly the power of those attacked decreased and with that it was not able to break the armor properly and with that he did not receive that much physical injuries.


    But still he received those direct impacts from those attacks that were enough to internally injure him and also because of this you can already see blood starteding out from his mouth. Fortunately in the end, Sam is able to kill that monster and with that the power of the domain already disappears from that ce.


    In front of him he can already see that monster instantly explode in that ce. You have to say that the explosion was very powerful as Sam needed to use the teleportation technique instantly so that he did not get affected by that explosion.


    At least 6 to 7 km area got affected by that explosion. Fortunately he was able to kill that Monster before he got fully exhausted. Sam was already panting heavily after using the teleportation technique he fully got exhausted and really needed the time to recover his spiritual energy.


    Fortunately he is still able to find a good ce to rest and also he already prepared a barrier that he bought from the system shop to protect himself from the attack of those Monsters. Actually beforeing inside of the danger zone he really predicted something like this could happen to him so because of this, he also bought four barriers for this kind of matter.


    Sam has already begun to use the energy recovery technique. Not only that he already brings out the spiritual recovery potion alongside with the health recovery potion. Even though most of the time he did not use the potions to recover his health or spiritual energy but in this kind of matter when he really needs to recover his health and spiritual energy as quickly as he can he uses those potions.


    ________________________


    Sam hiding himself he did not realize but some warriors already came to that ce where you can already saw the area got fully exploded and only a big hole got remaining that ce. Even the ground got burned by that explosion.


    Everyone of those warriors were Epic grade. Sometime ago I came to that ce to hunt some Monsters. They were already able to find a group of Monster but before they could fight that group of Monster a very loud sound appeared in that ce that also made those Monsters very startled. Not only that in the next again they also get affected by the impact.


    Fortunately that group of warriors already created a spiritual barrier around themselves and with that they did not get affected by the impact which already injured those Monsters. Fortunately sometimeter they can already feel the power of the impact already disappear from that ce. So, deactivate the spiritual barrier and they attack those Monsters without wasting a single second.


    After killing those Monsters naturally those Warriors became curious about that previous impact. So they also went toward the source of the impact and aftering to the ce they got surprised when they saw a big area explode.


    "Most likely a group of warriors or a single Warrior uses their final attack to kill a group of monsters. Only this kind of attack could create this type of destruction."


    One of the warriors said that after observing the surrounding area that got destroyed. Well, actually they did not know that aary grade monster could appear on that ce because of this, they never thought that a battle between aary grade Warrior and monster could happen on that ce.


    "Well, try to all observe the surrounding area carefully. Well that group of Warriors could also need our help as after looking at the destruction I could tell they use a huge amount of spiritual energy. So try to search the whole area very carefully."


    The leader instantly told his teammates to charge the area as he thought that the group of warriors who previously created that destruction most likely uses a huge amount of spiritual energy and because of this, they could be in a serious situation.


    But after some time, all of them told the leader that they did not find any clue about the Monsters or those Warriors, so they think that those warriors were able to retreat from that ce after killing those Monsters. Also nobody thought that those Warriors could get killed because they did not find any kind of clue rted to this matter.


    _____________________________


    The other hand inside the headquarter of the warrior association,


    The president already said that 5 dayster, they will inform the Viet king. As they already informed that the key came to the headquarter 5 dayster but at the same time the president already decided to inform almost all the king whose kingdom is under the warrior association about that previous incident.


    Really the president wanted everyone of those Kingdom to get alert because nobody could give them the guarantee that all the time the warrior association will be present in the danger zone to help them if suddenly those Abyss humans attack them to kidnap them.


    They really initiate to be alert about this kind of matter so that they are able to handle this kind of matter when those Abyss humans attack them. All the elders present in the warrier association also think that would be a good thing as somehow they can tell all the kings and queens who previously came to the human kingdom for thepetition already get quite suspicious about them.


    If they really did not tell the information to the kings and queens right now and decided to tell themter, it could create some problems among each other. Warrior association really did not want anything like that to happen so they already informed almost all the kings and queens to present in the headquarters after 7 days.


    Today the president told all the elders that they should prepare for that big meeting with all those kings and queens. Not only that during that time they should also increase the security in every one of the kingdom who will be participating in the meeting. As the kings and the Queens will be present in the headquarters then naturally they won''t be able to handle if something serious happens in their Kingdom.


    Also at the same time they inform everyone of those kings and queens to inform their Royal guards or their citizens to be careful. The human king and the Oni king also get invited by the headquarter that they should also attend that meeting even though they already know the news.


    Both the kings did not attend the meeting then it could cause more trouble. Many people will get dissatisfied if they are able to learn that both the human king and the Oni king already knew about this news and did not inform any of them.


    "Hmm¡­ unfortunately unable to contact Sam as he is most likely present inside of the danger zone and already switched off his phone. We could just leave the message to the human King so that when Sames back to the human Kingdom he will get notified by the human King about this."


    " Well, this is the only thing we can do right now. But I hope it did not create any more Trouble. I just hope everyone of them did not panic or do something reckless that could create more danger to their kingdoms. "


    " Sigh, don''t worry I have full confidence in everyone of those kings and queens that they will not do anything reckless after hearing this kind of information that could bring danger to their own kingdom. It''s just I cannot be sure if they would be able to inform their Warriors without causing any kind of panic among those normal citizens.


    I really hope nothing like that happened as if those normal citizen able to know about these then it will be very troublesome matter,"


    Currently all the elders are discussing among each other that anyhow they should also inform those kings that they should stay careful and not reveal this kind of news recklessly among the citizens.


    "But I think even though most of the citizens did not get any kind of suspicion about this matter, many Warriors already get suspicious when suddenly the Warriors from our Warrior association begin to increase the security in everyone of the kingdoms. Most likely even all the royal family also get very suspicious and everyone of them is also waiting for our exnation. So I also think this is a very good move that we should inform them as early as we can."


    _______________________

 Chapter 660 660 - Core area

    <h4>Chapter 660 Chapter 660 - Core area</h4>


    "Sir, what do you think about the decision of the headquarters?"


    A high official of the human Kingdom asked that to the king.


    " Naturally this will be very good. As every one of you knows the significance of that previous incident. If the headquarters did not inform those Kingdom rted to that matter then they won''t be able to get careful about this.


    Currently, every one of us needs to be very careful. Even though the Warrior Association already increased the security in the danger zone, you know that they won''t be able to be present in the danger zone. So the only way to prevent this kind of thing from happening is to inform the kingdom about this so that every person in that Kingdom gets careful about this.


    But naturally, at the same time, every king and queen needed to be careful so that they did not reveal this kind of information to those normal citizens. One thing we get to know is that those Abyss humans won''t be targeting the normal people who do not have the spiritual system.


    Most likely they needed people with a spiritual system to turn them into dark humans. But naturally, it cannot decrease the danger. Because I don''t think those Abyss humans forget the idea of life sacrifice for their demon god.


    Because of this, the main thing we can do is to be careful about this. The fortunate thing is that all the Warriors of our human Kingdom are able to understand the significance of this matter and they also understand that if they sprayed that news among normal citizens then it would be troublesome.


    But in the end, I hope everyone bes very alert about their surroundings when they enter the danger zone. "


    The human king said that with a sigh. Well, he just hoped that every one of those Warriors who went inside the danger zone became careful. They should immediately inform them if they see something suspicious inside of the danger zone. Also, every one of those people who most of the time went inside of the danger zone without any team should try to find a team to go inside of the danger zone.


    At least with this, those people who mostly like to hang solo would have someone to support them if they found those Abyss humans.


    "Don''t worry about that sir as every one of our Warriors has themunication device provided by the warrior association. They would immediately contact the warrior association and ask if they felt any kind of suspicious thing inside of the danger zone."


    One of the high officials said that he has full confidence in those Warriors. Not like ago when Sam created that destruction to kill thatary grade monster, that team already contacted the Warrior association and contacted the Royal pce and told him about this.


    Even though at the time none of those Warriors felt any kind of dark spiritual energy present in that ce, they still decided to contact them because they did not want to take any kind of risk.


    "Also before anything I should tell everyone not to spread the news that we already know what kind of discussion will be held inside of the warrior association. As you know most likely we also won''t get informed by the Warrior association if it wasn''t for Sam. So we should not break the trust of the Warrior association."


    The human king said that to every high official present in that ce. The Warrior Association also contacted him and said that he or his high official should not inform any other people from different Kingdoms about this matter.


    The warrior association will naturally release that news among all the Warriors but that will be after the meeting with all the kings and queens. In that, they will select the date when they will release the news among all the Warriors.


    Also, you should know that all the Warriors of the human kingdoms did not know the main matter. The human King just only told him to be careful inside the danger zone as the Abyss humans be active. Because of this, he did not have any problem if those people spared that news.


    '' But, after getting the previous report it could be possible that Sam previously fought aary-grade monster in that ce and because of this, that ce got destroyed like this.


    But I still hope that he would be very careful inside of the danger zone as most of the monsters would be able to use the power of the domain where he was not able to use the power of the domain and needed the time to understand the power of the domain.''


    The human King for that without telling that to anyone.


    ______________________________


    On the other hand inside of the danger zone, you can already see that Sam is finally able to recover The Spiritual energy alongside his health. That previous fight between him and that mantis gave him the idea about the power of those Monsters.


    Even though he already got to know all the Monsters in theary grade would be able to use the power of domain previously as he did not know the power of domain he thought he would be able to defeat them with medium difficulty. But who could have thought that it would be difficult to defeat that one monster?


    He needs to understand the power of the domain and it would be very good if he would be able to grasp the power of the domain when the human king told him about this.


    Now he has already decided toe out from his hiding ce and once again begin to search forary-grade monsters.


    ''But it makes me surprised that I would be able to find theary grade monster in that ce where most of the time anybody would be able to see those peak Epic grade monsters.


    I should inform the human beings about this as if Warriors came to that ce and suddenly met aary grade Monster then it would be dangerous for them.''


    Sam thought that he had alreadye out of the hiding ce after deactivating The Spiritual barrier which was protecting him when he was recovering.


    He has already begun to search once again. As you know finding aary-grade Monster would be difficult so most of the time he just saw those peak Epic grade monsters. But sometimeter he already reached the area which is called the barrier between the core area and the inner area.


    That barrier was created by the old human King as most of the a great Monster would be present in that part of the area. Most likely he would be able to meet most of the monsters in that area and from the start he has the n to enter that area.


    So Sam was wasting no time advancing toward the core area and he already passed through the barrier that was created by the warrior association. That was not created to prevent Monster from entering the inner area but it was created to alert Warriors that from here on they would enter the core area. Also if anyary grade Monster passes through that barrier it will get immediately reported inside of the human Kingdom.


    Because of this reason, you can say Sam also gets quite surprised after meeting thatary-grade monster inside the inner area whereas he still did not reach the barrier. Most likely that Monster was previously a peak Epic grade monster and recently it just broke through toary grade.


    Sam did not even advance that much when he suddenly felt the danger and wasting no time he used the teleportation technique to get away from that ce. Fortunately, he did that as the whole ce got destroyed.


    He could already tell that aary-grade Monster attacked him and he needed to find that Monster that was most likely hiding. Sam also knows that most of these monsters are highly intelligent and they won''te out from their hiding ce that easily.


    Sam already uses the superior eyes to find that Monster and he finds that monster. Before anything you can tell when he enters the core area, he can already tell the surrounding area has already changed. The forest became much denserpared to the inner area and also all the trees became much bigger.


    Unable to reach that part of the area and because of this the whole ce always stays in the dark. In that ce, he can already see clearly because of using his superior eyes and finds the Monsters on top of a tree.


    But when he looked at that monster he became speechless as he did not think he would meet a weird Monster like this. Well, the body of the monster looks like a horse but if you look at the hate it has the head of an owl. These monsters also have the ability to fly and most likely using that ability the Monster is now on top of the tree while looking down on him.

 Chapter 661 661 - Killing the Monster

    <h4>Chapter 661 Chapter 661 - Killing the Monster</h4>


    The name of that Monster is Wind Horse. The Monster has extraordinary control over the wind element, and using the wind element, the Monster could fly easily without making any kind of sound. Also that Monster could control the wind element and create a zone where every living being who needed oxygen to leave could die.


    Fortunately, beforeing inside the danger zone, he gets to know about someary-grade Monster. Instantly Sam can feel the danger and without wasting a single second he teleports away from that ce. Fortunately, he did that as the previous ce once again got destroyed.


    That Monster controls the wind in that area and creates many small wind des that instantly attack that ce and destroy itpletely. Fortunately this time some did not want to take any risk and because of this, he already activated the power of his superior pressure and superior eyes.


    Once again that Monster got affected by both of the skills and already began to fall from the sky. Suddenly Monster got affected by the bloodline pressure that was affecting him and did not give him a counterattack. But for aary-grade monster, it will take only 30 seconds to get over that pressure using The Spiritual energy to cover his whole body.


    Naturally that Monster also already begins to do that but on the other hand, the same already begins to control a huge amount of destructive spiritual energy and transfer that spiritual energy into the weak spot of that monster.


    The weak spot of the monster is present in the back side and this time Sam can see that backside area glowing very brightly in red color it also tells him thatpared to the diamond mantis if he attacks that area then he would get critical damage.


    This time Sam not only transfers the spiritual energy into that weak spot but at the same time, he uses the telekinesis technique to control the body of that Monster so that it is unable to move or do anything during that moment.


    Naturally, even his superior eyes also have the same effect so both of the techniques right now are doing much effect and because of this, even though previously the monster was under huge pressure but still it was still able to move his body, but this time the moment already stopped.


    He already deactivated the superior aura and only focused on the superior eyes technique alongside with telekinesis technique. But he also realized that even with that he needed some time to kill that Monster fully so he decided to attack that monster using his sword.


    But that does not mean he will deactivate the superior eyes technique. He just decreased the power of the telekinesis technique and instantly using the teleportation technique came behind that Monster and already brought out the sword to attack him.


    One after another he begins to attack that monster with his sword. All the time he is just attacking that weak spot and he can already see that Monster already receiving critical damage and also the health point of that Monster decreasing very rapidly.


    But this time he also can tell that he already used 70% of his spiritual energy and if he did not kill that Monster very quickly then he could be at a disadvantage. So hepletely deactivated the telekinesis technique and then only focused on his technique alongside the superior eye skill.


    Naturally if he just only uses the superior eyes then that Monster could have the chance to use the power of his domain. But as he is also getting attacked by Sam''s sword in the weak spot, it already reduces 50% of its health and also The Spiritual system of that Monster gets damaged by the destructive spiritual energy that rapidly enters its body.


    This is the advantage Sam has at this time but at the same time you can say this is also his advantage. If instead of one monster he would face two monsters then he won''t be able to use that strategy. At once he can only focus on one monster and transfer The Spiritual energy that rapidly which also rapidly destroys the spiritual system.


    This is also the reason that he wanted to kill that Monster as quickly as he could so that during that time no other Monster came to that ce. Fortunately, it looks like The distractive Spiritual energy rapidly damages the body of that Monster from the inside and also as the monster receives damage from the outside it is already in a critical condition.


    Sometimeter, Sam already uses 85% of his spiritual energy and Fortunately, The Monster already lost 99% of its health points. With that, he was sessfully able to kill that Monster 1 minuteter. This time Monster did not get destroyed as in the end it got killed by the sword technique.


    Why is it a good thing that this time the monster did not explode and with that he did not have to teleport away from that ce to get away from the destruction? He waited for some time to receive the loot of the monster.


    _______________________


    '' I am very fortunate that these monsters did not get the time to use the domain. I did not know if I would be able to survive in a ce that did not have Oxygen. But I also needed to stay careful as nobody could give me the guarantee that every time I would only face one Monster at a time.''


    Sam is thinking all of this while he is resting to recover the lost spiritual energy and stamina. Well both of the time when he facesary grade monsters, he only faces one Monster at a time so with that he can only focus on one Monsterpletely.


    ''Also I should not go that much inside of this area as I did not want to face all those powerfulary-grade monsters that could easily kill me. At anyhow I needed to only stay on this outside of the core area so that I only face those monsters which also recently entered theary grade.''


    Sam decided to stay in the outside area as he did not want to face those powerful monsters right now which could easily kill him without giving him the time to do anything. Also, he realized one thing: even if he became invisible to those monsters, if those monsters suddenly felt danger they would immediately activate the domain, and inside of the domain even if that Monster did not see him it was still able to kill him.


    Because of this, Sam did not want to take any kind of risk without understanding how to use the domain. While thinking all of this he already recovered almost 70% of his spiritual energy.


    ''Well, nowe to think of it, I think the blood King is still present inside the danger zone and if he is still present in the danger zone then most likely he would be in the inner area. First of all the warrior association already told me that even if those Abyss humans wanted to target warriors and monsters then they could only target those monsters who did not reach theary grade.


    After going back to the Human Kingdom I should also contact the headquarters to get to know about the recent news. Even though it looks like those Abyss humans will get alert about this matter and not try to openly do anything, still nobody can give the guarantee that they will not try to attack Warriors or Monsters.


    Sigh, who the hell gave them the idea to kidnap Monsters and Warriors so that they could turn them into their puppet? I don''t think that I did not get any kind of help from any other people who have knowledge about this. Most likely during these 6 months they received help from someone who had knowledge about those forbidden symbols and only because of this, those abyss humans decided to experiment on Warriors and monsters.


    Also, nobody knows until now how many Warriors got kidnapped by them. It would be very good if we were also able to open the portal that would connect us to the Abyss world.''


    Sam is thinking about those Abyss humans. Even the Warrior Association did not have any idea how many Warriors got kidnapped by them. Also, anybody could tell that most likely those Abyss humans receive help from someone who has knowledge about those forbidden symbols.


    Unfortunately, no Warriors can create the teleportation portal that will be connected with the Abyss world. But thinking all of this suddenly a thought came to Sam''s mind.


    ''Wait, I think I was able to open the teleportation portal that would be connected to the Abyss world. Why did not I think that earlier? I am such an idiot. My Origin Spiritual energy has both properties and most likely using this I can open the portal that would be connected to the Abyss world.''

 Chapter 662 662 - A group of monsters

    <h4>Chapter 662 chapter 662 - A group of monsters</h4>


    Finally, after recovering The Spiritual energy and stamina Sam once again came out from the hiding ce and decided to search for aary-grade monster. Naturally, he did not want to fight with a group ofary grade Monsters as that would be fully dangerous for him.


    Finding those monsters wasn''t easy for him as even though he searched for almost 2 hours he did not find any kind of clue about those Monsters. Well at this time he suddenly remembered the word that previously the human King told him.


    The human King previously told him that when any Monster is able to break through toary grade, aftering to the core area it will naturally select an area that will be under that monster. In that specific area other than thatary-grade monster he won''t be able to find any other monster.


    Well, sometimes a fight between two monsters will ur. That was due to who will be the leader of the specific area and to select the leader both parties will fight each other. Also in some areas, you would be able to find manyary-grade monsters as they will be under the leader who is in charge of the area.


    So most likely he is currently present in the area of that wind horse Monster where other than that wind horse he won''t be able to find any other monster. Naturally, he cannot tell if he finally entered the area of another Monster or not as you won''t be able to find any kind of clue about that.


    Those monsters will use their body sent or something like that to Mark their specific area. So normally you won''t be able to find that but if you can use the spiritual eyes or some vision technique like that then you are at least able to find the clue.


    Sam is currently using the superior eye skill to look for any kind of clue about that. Well, it did not take him that much time to find the clue. Not far away from that ce, he noticed a spiritual aura leaking from that ce and he was familiar with that spiritual aura. It is the spiritual aura of that horse Monster.


    So most likely after crossing that area, he will enter the area of another monster. So wasting no time he quickly crossed that area. Also, he already uses the concealment technique as he does not want to get attacked by Monster without being able to react.


    As you know currently this is the advantage he haspared to any of those Monsters even though they would be able to use the power of domain. Sam quickly brings out the life detector device to see if he would be able to find any monster near that area or not.


    Well, this is a good choice because using that he was able to check at least a 20 km area without any problem. But unfortunately, at first, he did not find any kind of clue about the monster. Naturally, he did not give up on that and continued to search for those Monsters.


    10 minutester he finally found almost 8 life signs. Now that instantly makes him very alert as he could tell most likely every one of those Monsters is under one Monster who is the leader of this area. Now this is a very troublesome matter for him as he did not want to fight this many monsters at once.


    ''I cannot attack them. I needed to wait for the moment so that those Monsters could go their separate ways and only then would I be able to attack them. But I did not know if those monsters had any kind of technique that would be able to help themmunicate with each other or not. Sigh, should I go to another area or try to hunt Those monsters?''


    Now after facing this many monsters at once, it became a very troublesome matter for him and he did not know if he should fight those Monsters or not. If he wanted to fight those monsters then naturally he needed to fight them one by one.


    After thinking for some time he decided that he would try to fight them but before anything, he needed to wait for those monsters to go their separate ways. He cannot fight them at Once.


    ''Sigh, it would be really good if those monsters were also unable to use the power of the domain. Compared to any Warrior those monsters would be able to use the power of domain the moment they break through toary grade. I need to be very careful Monster and if the situation does not look good I should quickly escape from this ce.''


    Sam already decided to fight those Monsters but at the same time he needed to be very careful as he cannot fight 2 Monsters at once and if more than one Monster came to that ce where he would fight one Monster then it would be very dangerous for him. So because of this, he also needed to be ready to use the teleportation technique at any time.


    _______________________


    Sam is busy inside the danger zone but he does not know that in everything all the kings and queens be very serious after they get to know that the headquarters told all of them toe to the headquarters as they want to give them very important information.


    But before anything they also already told every one of them that they should not reveal that information clearly as it could cause serious damage and also can make every citizen worried about their life. Fortunately, the headquarters gave them the hint. This matter will be rted to Abyss humans.


    Naturally after hearing that, everyone became very serious and most of the kings and queens were already meeting with their high officials and all those powerful Warriors present in their kingdoms.


    Naturally other than the kings and queens, nobody will be able to attend that meeting. But still, all the kings and queens wanted to get the opinion of their high officials and also they knew that any matter rted to those Abyss humans would be a very serious thing and they really could not reveal that important news to those normal citizens carelessly.


    Only 4 days left before the meeting will be held inside the headquarters and naturally, every one of those Warriors who get to know about the meeting is very curious to know what kind of information the headquarters will give them. But all of them are sure about one thing, the information will be very serious and they cannot reveal that information carelessly. Also the headquarters already told them they should increase the security in the danger zone.


    After hearing that you can say most of the kings and queens could tell the information most likely rted to the danger zone where those Abyss humans most likely attacked Warriors. So even though they cannot tell what kind of information the Warrior Association will give them, they have already increased the security in their Kingdom and also in the danger zone.


    One thing every Kingdom realizes is that the warrior association''s branch present in their Kingdom most likely created a search team inside the danger zone. So with that, their predictions be more urate.


    _____________________________


    "Sir, as we told you earlier no information will be revealed from our Kingdom that we already know about. Naturally, as you told us if any other Kingdom gets to know about these then it could create a problem for our Kingdom and also for the Warrior Association.


    Also, I already told every warrior and also made you sign the document with their spiritual signature. After that you can rest assured that nobody will reveal the information to anyone and if they try to do that they will receive the punishment for that."


    One of the high officials of the Oni Kingdom told that to the Oni king. Like the human Kingdom, they also make sure that no information rted to that matter goes out from their Kingdom. That could create problems for their Kingdom and also for the warrior association and nobody wanted any kind of problem like that.


    Fortunately, everyone uses The Spiritual signature to sign the document where they won''t be able to break the rules of the document and if they try to do that then they will receive punishment for that.


    These documents were created by the warrior associations and if you sign that document using your spiritual signature then naturally you won''t be able to break the rules present in that document. If anybody tries to break the rules present in the document then that person will immediately get targeted by the Warrior Association and his location will always be avable to the Warrior Association.


    Now came back to the main matter after hearing all of these the Oni king nodded. Even though he had full confidence in his citizens, he still needed to make sure that nothing like that happened.


    Also, he is preparing himself to attend the meeting which will be held after 4 days. The president also told him that after that meeting with every king and queen, they would also reveal the information to all the Warriors but naturally no other citizen would be able to get to know about that other than the Warriors.

 Chapter 663 663 - The Hunting

    <h4>Chapter 663 Chapter 663 - The Hunting</h4>


    Sam almost waited for 3 hours and finally, he could see that one Monster going separate ways from those other Monsters. Naturally wasting no time he began to follow that Monster and sometimeter both of them came to a ce where most likely The Monster wanted to see if any other new Monster entered their area or not.


    The Monster most likely scouting the area that was under them. Naturally, The Monster did not notice that Sam was very close to him and he was already ready to use his techniques to kill that Monster without giving him the time to react or do anything.


    Sam from the first decided to use 100% of his power to kill that Monster as quickly as he could as he did not want to attract those other Monsters which could be dangerous for him.


    Once again he wasted no time to use the superior aura and superior eyes skill. This time he also uses the telekinesis technique and three of these techniques put that monster under pressure. The Monster instantly fell to the ground as he did not have the strength to move right now.


    This time he also increases the power of his superior aura. That naturally pressures the blood present inside of that Monster and that also makes The Spiritual system of that monster unable to work properly. On the other hand, using the superior eyes he is already transferring the destractive spiritual energy inside that weak spot that is present on the shoulder of that monster.


    First of all, that Monster is an Ork. They have high body defense but unfortunately, the weak spot of those Monsters is their shoulders. Only the left shoulder of that monster did not have that strong skin that increases the difference of their body. Targeting that area he transfers those destructive spiritual energy continuously.


    The Monster wanted to make a painful road but unfortunately because of 3 of these techniques the Monsterpletely became unable to do anything and it also already lost the strain to make any kind of sound. Like this, he begins to transfer that spiritual energy for almost 20 minutes and finally, he can see that the monster only has 10% health points remaining.


    Sam deactivated the telekinesis technique and brought out his weapon and already started attacking that monster. First of all, he did not want that Monster to explode. That naturally attracts the attention of those other Monsters and it would be very risky if beforeing to that ce they would use the power of their domain.


    So in the end he wanted to kill that Monster using his sword technique. Fortunately, The Monster is already in a dangerous position as the spiritual system has already been destroyed and with that, he is unable to use the power of domain or any of his skills right now. Not only that, you can already see that blood has already starteding out from the mouth of that monster and the body of that Monster already expanded like a balloon.


    The body of the monster is ready to explode anytime if Sam continues to transfer the spiritual energy. Fortunately, he did not transfer any more spiritual energy and also deactivated his superior eye skills. Right now he is only using the superior aura to control that Monster so that he does not move. Sam already came behind that monster and started attacking that monster.


    Fortunately, as the monster was in a critical condition it did not take Sam that much time to fully kill that monster. But you have to say the moment he killed that Monster suddenly a huge amount of spiritual energy got released from the body of that monster. Fortunately, Sam at that time instantly created destance from that Monster or those destructive spiritual energy could also be dangerous for him.


    ______________________


    Sam did not instantly go toward the ce where you would be able to find those other seven Monsters. Before anything, he immediately recovered that 85% of his spiritual energy that he used to kill that monster. This time he attacked that Monster from a very close destance and because of this time only 85% spiritual energy was used in the process.


    During the attack moment he also already deactivated the concealment technique. Now back to the main matter he needed to recover that spiritual energy and to do that he quickly once again used the concealment technique and after that began to use the energy recovery technique at full power.


    That would naturally take him some time and he hopes that during that time those other Monsters also go their separate ways to scout the area.


    First of all, you should know thatpared to the normal spiritual energy recovering the origin spiritual energy needs much time. So it takes him one hour to recover that 85% spiritual energy and after that he once again uses the life detection device to look for those Monsters.


    Also if you are wondering about the concealment technique which he continuously uses, then actually using the technique he doesn''t need to use that much spiritual energy. This is also the reason that he uses that technique most of the time when hees to the danger zone.


    Now back to the main matter, with the help of his life detection device, he is able to find one Monster that is not far away from his location. Looks like that Monster also came to scout the area under them and this is the chance for him to kill that monster.


    But, even with that, he did not recklessly do anything as in the life detection device he can also see one Monster that is only 2 km away from that first monster. Now he did not know if he should take the risk to attack The Monster or not or if he should wait for some time more to see the condition.


    In the end, he decided not to take the risk and wait for some time more. With that, 20 minutester he can see the destance between both of the monsters begin to increase and 20 minutester the destance between both of them is almost 10 km.


    Fortunately, Sam made the right decision and with that, he did not want to waste any more time to kill that monster. He once again uses the teleportation technique toe close to that Monster but at the same time, he naturally bes very alert.


    He is fully sure that no other Monster is present in that area, but the main problem is that he does not know if those Monsters have any way tomunicate with each other or not. Even though previously while killing that first monster he did not see that Monster using any kind of technique like that he still wanted to make sure nothing like that happened.


    So to do that before anything he needed to destroy the spiritual system of that Monster. To do that just aftering close to that monster he uses the power of superior aura and superior eyes. Instantly a tremendous bloodline pressure hit that Monster and instantly made him immobilized. Not only that he keep increasing the power of the bloodline pressure but he also keeps transferring the destractive spiritual energy inside the body of that Monster.


    This time while transferring the spiritual energy he can tell the monster is most likely very good at using spiritual techniques aspared to the previous Monsters he can feel the spiritual energy of that Monster is much more dangerous and the capacity of The Spiritual energy is also high.


    Once again 30 minutester he finally kills that Monster but instantly he feels something wasn''t right and wasting no time he quickly uses the teleportation technique to get away from that ce. This time he did not even get the time to collect the loot.


    Sam made the right decision to escape from that ce as the boss of that area already felt something wasn''t right as he was previously unable to contact one of his subordinates. So one by one he began to contact every one of his subordinates and at that time he suddenly realized that one more of his subordinates had lost contact.


    With that, the boss uses the teleportation technique toe to the ce where hest contacted that subordinate, and just aftering to that ce he instantly uses the power of its domain.


    Fortunately, Sam was able to escape from that ce before the Monster could affect him using the power of the domain. The power of domain wouldpletely prevent him from using any kind of space element-rted technique.


    ''Sigh, as I thought most likely those Monsters have some kind of other way to contact each other and previously I am sure that one of them came to that ce to use the power of domain when I get the danger rm in my head.''


    Sam thought that. But he also begins to feel fortunate that he is able to escape before getting affected by the power of the domain.

 Chapter 664 664 - Escape death

    <h4>Chapter 664 Chapter 664 - Escape death</h4>


    Sam, using the teleportation technique, already leaves the area of those Ork monsters. Fortunately, it looks like until now no monster has tried to take over the area of the horse monster and for him currently that would be the safest ce to recover.


    Currently, his instincts are also telling him that he is somehow able to avoid a great disaster that could also kill him or make him seriously injured. Sam cannot believe that he would feel that kind of danger. He is very familiar with this kind of feeling as every time he is very close to a death-like situation he would feel like that.


    ''But, I am really surprised that I also did not get to know when that leader quickly appeared. Most likely That leader has some kind of teleportation technique and he already activated the power of the domain beforeing to that ce and because of this, I feel that kind of danger even though at that time I did not spot any monsters.''


    Sam thought that. Previously you can say when he gets worn by his instincts naturally he uses the teleportation technique without any second thought. At the same time, he also tried to observe the surrounding area and he was sure that he did not see any monsters present in that ce.


    This is the reason he could tell that most likely the boss monster already uses the power of domain beforeing to that ce and if he is suddenly able to appear in that ce then Sam would not get any kind of chance to escape from that ce.


    ''Sigh, as I thought I should try to go to this kind of group where I would see manyary-grade monsters. I am sure that kind of monster would have some kind of way tomunicate with each other. I should try to look for other ces to see if I could find a monster that did not have a group like this.


    But anyhow I needed to understand the knowledge about the domain as it became important for me. Without the power of domain I won''t be able to counterattack those monsters'' domain and also until then I should avoid this kind of group ofary-grade monsters.''


    Sam thought this while fully focusing on recovering the spiritual energy. Not only the spiritual energy but he is fully exhausted mentally and before doing anything he also needs to recover the mental energy right now.


    As you know every time he uses the teleportation technique he also uses mental energy alongside the spiritual energy and this time he selected that ce to teleport when his mental Energy was almost very low, because of all of this, He is now lying down on the ground as he is fully exhausted mentally and also won''t be able to use any kind of technique right now.


    He already uses those barriers and with that spiritual barrier created around himself, he will protect himself for 24 hours and also try to make that ce invisible so no enemy would be able to sense that ce even if the enemy isary grade.


    Sometimeter Sam did not even realize when he fell asleep. As you know he was fully mentally exhausted and with that, he was unable to keep himself awake for that long and fell asleep. The good thing is that the spiritual recovery technique keeps being activated by the system which Sam also did not know that the system could do to recover his spiritual energy and stamina.


    ______________________________


    "Unfortunately, sir, I am unable to contact Sam. Most likely he put his mobile phone inside the storage ring and currently he is fighting monsters. But don''t worry I already left the message that he needed toe to the Warrior Association after 3 days for the meeting.


    As you know, he just recently broke through so anybody could tell he would be curious to use that new power to fight monsters and most likely this is the reason that until now he did not pick up the phone and just stayed busy fighting those monsters.


    Sigh, even though I have confidence in him, I still hope he did not be reckless and fight thoseary-grade monsters. Before anything he did not know how to use the power of the domain whereas those monsters would be able to use the power of the domain from the moment they break through.


    Even though Sam has the advantage of hiding himself using the concealment technique, fightingary-grade monsters won''t be easy. If Sam gets affected by the monster domain then it would be very dangerous for him even if he stays in his invisible State."


    One elder of the warrior association''s headquarters told that to the president. The president told the elder to contact Sam and inform him that he needed to be present in the meeting as he also had an important role in that meeting.


    Unfortunately, they were unable to contact him as everybody could predict most likely because he just broke through. He became very curious to use his new power against those Monsters and with that, he did not get the time to pick up the phone to see who was calling him.


    "Don''t worry I don''t think he will be reckless like that where he also knows that he could lose his life if he fights thoseary grade Monsters recklessly. I already told the human King about this and he also told me that he also already informed Sam about the meeting and Sam also assured him that he would be present in that meeting.


    Nowing back to the main matter, were you able to collect all the names of those one year who went missing in these 6 months? This is a very important thing for us to know how many of our Warriors are suddenly missing like that. Also in these 6 months did any of those kingdoms notice any kind of abnormal behavior inside of the danger zone? We needed to gather all of this news as quickly as we could as it would help us to know the current situation."


    Andrew told me that. He already told every elder to look for the information about missing people in these 6 months and also to find if any kind of abnormal situation appears in those parts of the danger zones in these 6 months.


    Even though in these 6 months the Warrior Association created the scouting team to search for any kind of clue rted to those Abyss humans, previously those groups of Warriors of the Warrior Association only focused on finding any clue rted to Abyss humans and they did not focus on other things.


    "Sir, we are already doing that and by the report, I could tell you before the meeting you can have at least the predicted number of those missing people in these 6 months. Also by the report, it is proven that in these 6 months, many abnormal situations got created inside of the danger zone.


    Unfortunately, our scouting team was not able to find that abnormality when they tried to look for the clue about those Abyss humans. Also when those Warriors reported about the abnormality inside the danger zone, we immediately reacted. But unfortunately in the end we were unable to find anything. This is also a reason that previously we did not tell the scouting team to also search about this."


    The elder exins this to Andrew. Well from the start the scouting team inside of the danger zone always trying to find clues about those Abyss humans. So naturally they would not focus on other abnormal things inside of the danger zone.


    But when Andrew got to know about all of this he could instantly tell that in this matter most likely not only just those abyss humans involved but at the same time traitors from Terraria were also involved.


    If you are wondering why he thinks like that then it is because if those Abyss humans personally take actions then naturally the scouting team would be able to find some clue about those Abyss humans. Even if those Abyss humans try to erase the clue rted to them still they won''t be able to erase The Spiritual aura.


    So naturally anybody could tell that every one of those abnormal situations that appeared in the danger zones did not have any kind of trace of Those dark spiritual energies. So with that anybody could predict Warriors who use the true Spiritual energy involve themselves.


    "Sir most likely you also predicted that traitors also involved themselves in these matters and this is the reason that previously we did not find any kind of trace of those dark spiritual energies. It is that finding those traitors will be hard until all the kingdoms do not take action against those traitors. We also needed to discuss this with those kings and queens so that they became careful about those traitors."

 Chapter 665 665 - The Unbreakable defense

    Chapter 665  665 - The Unbreakable defense


    3 dayster,


    Today will be the final day he will stay in the danger zone as he needs to go back to the human Kingdom and then he will go to the headquarters of the Warrior Association for the meeting.


    previously he already got the message from the Warrior Association. Not only the warrior association but the human King also contacted him and informed him that he needed to present at the meeting of the headquarters.


    Sam already knows that headquarters will reveal the information about the previous incident among all those kingdoms who are under the warrior association. But he never thought they would organize the meeting that quickly. He also thinks this is good as every Kingdom will get serious about this.


    Back to the main matter,


    Sam suddenly hides himself while looking at the monster that is in front of him. As you know previously he left the area of those Ork monsters. Because of their number he did not want to fight those Monsters as he did not know how to counterattack the power of the domain, so because of this he went for other areas where he also found many other Monsters.


    Naturally every time he would look for Monsters which werepletely alone. But unfortunately, even with that, he was not able to kill that much monster. Until now you can say he was only able to kill 8 monsters who were also just recently breakthrough.


    This is the advantage he has fighting with those Monsters and also because of this he is able to kill those Monsters without that much problem. Naturallypared to those Monsters who have experience using the power ofary grade, all of those Monsters who just recently breakthrough were much weaker. Even if they can use the power of their domain still they are unable to use the full power of their domain and also they need some time to get used to their new power.


    Sam right now is looking at the Giant monster. The Monster has a giant body and if you look at the face of that Monster then you will notice the face looks like the face of a rhino. This is the monster who has an unbreakable defense. You can say those are the monsters who won''t get affected by most of the spiritual and physical attacks because of the defense.


    But that does not mean you won''t be able to kill them as even though they have unbreakable defense they also have weakness and that is the horn they have in their head. Even though that horn is also very strong and those Monsters use it to attack their enemy, still the ce where the horn is present is the weakest.


    Using the superior eyes naturally Sam could see the red spot present in that ce where you can see the horn. Even after finding the weak ce of that monster, he did not attack that Monster first of all, you should know this Monster ispletely different from your other Monsters.


    So before doing anything he needed to be fully prepared for that and also this time as you know any kind of physical attack or spiritual attack except telekinesis or kind of Mind attack. But the problem is that as those Monsters get very intelligent they also have mental defense present in their head so Sam isn''t sure if that Monster has a mental defense that could also protect that Monster from telekinesis attack or not.


    Fortunately, his superior eyes skill and superior Aura skill arepletely differentpared to any of those techniques and both of the skills will directly affect the body of that Monster and also attack The Spiritual system of that monster. So wasting no time as you can see he already began to use the full power of both techniques on that Monster who did not even get the time to finish his food.


    Some time ago Sam found that ce and he saw that Monster recently killed another monster and looked like he was eating that monster. This is apletely different behavior if you think about the rhino animal. Naturallypared to those animals every one of these monsters is different. This is also the perfect chance for Sam to attack.


    As he did not want to give that Monster the time to use the power of domain or any kind of other attraction, he already began to use the full power of both of his techniques, and that instantly put that monster in a difficult situation. First of all, suddenly huge bloodline pressure begins to affect Monster and every one of his blood cells begins to fill the pressure.


    This time as Sam is using the full power you can say the blood cirction system is also getting affected by that pressure. On the other hand, you can see the huge amount of destructive spiritual energy begin to enter through that weak spot of that Monster into the body and begin to affect the spiritual system directly.


    Everything happens very quickly in just 20 minutes. You can say the monster is facing a very critical situation where he has already lost 90% of his health points. Both the blood cirction system and the Spiritual system are affected by Sam and that is the reason this Monster begins to lose his health that quickly.


    But not only that, something else is also happening. Most likely because of the unbreakable defense the body of that monster is unable to expand and that is also doing much damage to his body and an impact also getting created inside the body of that monster.


    Naturally, as Sam used both of the skills in full power he did not use the concealment technique and also a huge amount of spiritual energy was consumed. Almost 90% of his spiritual energy gets consumed in these 20 minutes and he can also tell that he needs to kill that Monster before he loses All The Spiritual energy.


    Fortunately, because of the unbreakable defense of that Monster, The Monster is also facing the impact that is happening inside of his body, and that also makes the process much faster, and with that he loses his health faster. With this Sam ispletely sure that within 5 minutes The Monster will be dead and he could put the body and the loot inside the inventory and get away from that ce.


    As Sam predicted within 5 minutes The Monster already lost his 100% health and with that, it already died. Sam on the other hand wasted no time to store both the dead body of those Monsters and also store the loot inside the inventory then use the remaining spiritual energy to use the teleportation technique and get away from that ce.


    If you are wondering why he is in a hurry then he already gets the warning signal from the life detection device that more monsters are approaching toward that ce. Those monsters who are approaching that ce are most likely thepanion of the first monster which gets killed by that rhino monster. Somehow they get to know about the enemy and with that they approach that ce.


    Fortunately, he is present in the outer area where the range of the domain of those Monsters is 5 km to 10 kilometers and that is the advantage he has in this matter. He is sure that those monsters are already using the power of the domain but fortunately, those Monsters are 20 km away when his device gives him the warning signal.


    You can say he once again avoided the disaster but when Sam came to his hiding ce he did not rx because he could already see the warning signal in his life detection device. 20 km away from that ce a group of monsters also present and that is a very dangerous thing for him right now.


    Sam did not want to take any kind of risk so he wanted to get away from that ce. Using the remaining 5% of his spiritual energy, he already left that area and came to the inner area.


    Fortunately, he created a hiding ce in the border of the core area and the inner area and he just appeared in that ce when he became unconscious. Just after appearing in that ce Sampletely lost his full mental energy and became unconscious. Once again his system activates the energy recovery technique automatically and with that it already begins to recover The lost energy.


    2 hourster,


    Sam recovers 50% of his spiritual energy as the density of that border area is lowpared to the outside area of the core area. But that does not matter to him as first of all the good thing is that he regains his consciousness and also he can tell that 70% of his mental energy has recovered.


    But even with that he did not want to go outside of that hiding ce and he also quickly ced those tsments that instantly created a barrier. Previously he did not get the chance to use those tsments to create barriers around that ce.

 Chapter 666 666 - Suggestions

    Chapter 666  666 - Suggestions


    Finally, Sam teleported to the outside area of the danger zone and after that, he began to walk toward the entrance of the human Kingdom. He decided he would go inside the danger zone when the meeting was finished and he would go to the Oni Kingdom.


    But before that, he also needed to understand the knowledge of the domain so thatter when he entered the danger zone to hunt for thoseary-grade monsters he did not have to face that kind of problem that he faced this time.


    But also before going to the meeting he wanted to look at the loot that he collected this time and also wanted to absorb those dead bodies. He won''t be able to get any status points if he absorbs the dead bodies of those Epic grade monsters or Monsters who were weakpared to them.


    This is also the reason that he only focused on thoseary grade Monsters as he would only get status points if he targeted those Monsters. Now back to the main matter, it takes him some time to reach the entrance of the human Kingdom as the distance between the danger zone and the human Kingdom is at least 100 km.


    He could easily reach in front of the entrance but beforeing to the entrance he also wanted to observe the surrounding area very carefully so he decided to walk this time and with that, he almost needed 3 hours to reach the entrance.


    During that time he already saw so many Warriors and those Warriors also noticed the team and greeted him. Naturally, they also recognize Sam and some Warriorse toward him to ask about his situation. Everyone in the human Kingdom already knows that Sam just recently broke through toary grade, naturally, they also wanted to get his opinion about their breakthrough.


    Sam is also the youngest person able to break through toary grade. On the other hand, if you are wondering why those Warriors wanted to get his opinions then even though they reach the limit of Epic grade, breaking through isn''t an easy task for anyone. Also, not anyone has the supreme upgrade like Sam which also upgrades the limit breaker.


    This is the reason that everyone wants to make sure that they are preparedpletely before trying to break through. If somehow they were unable to break through they would receive a serious side effect that could also make them seriously injured or they could also die.


    Sam naturally told them to make sure that they prepare more limit breakers and every one of those limit breakers should be Epic grade. Every one of them should prepare at least four limit breakers as they would need that to break through. Finding a limit breaker that is above epic grade will be very hard and because of this, he told him to prepare an epic grade limit breaker.


    Not only that before they start preparing to break through they should also have full mental energy as the breaking through process will consume a huge amount of mental energy. Like this, you can say Sam begins to instruct them about all the things that they will need during the process.


    Also during the time, Sam asks about the situation of the danger zone as he spends most of the time inside the core area so naturally he did not know about the situation of the other area.


    None of those Warriors find that question suspicious as even the human King told them to be careful inside the danger zone as they could also get attacked by those Abyss humans. Even though the human King did not tell them the full incident they told them that those abyss humans suddenly began to attack people inside the danger zone.


    So those warriors also inform him that nothing like that happened inside the danger zone and the human King prepares the scouting that is full of Royal soldiers and the warrior association prepares the scout. So with that those Warriors did not have to worry about anything.


    Sam rxed after hearing all of this as he could tell most likely those abyss humans would not target everyone in those areas that be alert about them. First of all, you should understand that those Abyss humans previously kidnapped those Warriors very carefully so that other Warriors did not get to know about this.


    Most likely the part of the danger zone that is beside the human Kingdom and the Oni Kingdom will be safe for now. On the other hand even though in those other kingdoms the warrior association already increased the security even inside of the danger zone but still if the kingdom itself did not be alert about that matter the warrior association would not have been able to prevent those kidnapped incidents.


    Sam is thinking all of these when hees inside the kingdom and after that, he directly begins to walk toward the Royal pce. Fortunately, he did not have to worry about the house or anything like that as the king already told him that the guest room in the Royal pce would be his home.


    Sometimeter he came to the Royal pce where he could already see that most of the royal guards and other people increased the security and also it looked like a meeting held by the king with all the high officials. Well, Sam did not have any kind of interest in that and he just walked toward his room.


    Even though he had already recovered his full mental health and spiritual energy, he still wanted to rest. Also, he is thinking about observing those dead bodies and also using those spirit crystals to get the status points. He wanted to increase his power as much as he could before going to the meeting.


    _________________________


    1 hourter,


    Sam is now present in the kitchen and eating some food. Maria and the prince also came back from the danger zone and they were very hungry aftering back from the danger zone. Aftering to the Royal pce when they also get to know that Sam just came back and he was resting, Maria quickly calls him, and then every one of them goes to the kitchen to eat some food.


    During the time the prince and The Princess naturally asked about his adventure inside the dangerous zone. First of all, most of the warriors did not have that much information about the core area and also nobody would try to approach the core area even if they had full confidence in them.


    Compared to the inner area the core area ispletely different. This is the reason that even any Warrior who reached the limit of Epic grade did not dare to approach the core area. Sam also begins to share about his adventure and begins to tell them what type of monster he faced and what kind of weakness those Monsters have.


    This will be helpful for them because when they can break through toary grade or before breaking through if they face those Monsters inside the inner area they should attack in the weak spot of those Monsters.


    Even after breaking through toary grade most of the Monsters will evolve and be more powerful but still their species will remain the same and they will have the same weakness. Maria and his brother listen to all of these very carefully as this will be helpful for them.


    Not only that he also told them about the power of the domain of those Monsters and also how much danger anybody could face when they get affected by the domain. First of all, inside the domain, most of the Warriors would not be able to use any kind of technique if they did not have the power of the domain to counterattack.


    Not only that, even The Spiritual energy that is present inside the domain will get controlled by the Monster who created that domain so if they carelessly approach the ce and get affected by any domain of those Monsters then it could be very dangerous for them.


    Maria and her brother listen to all of these with Full focus. All of this information will be very helpful for them when they approach that ce or if they somehow face thoseary-grade monsters.


    Sam told them if unfortunately, they face thoseary-grade monsters then first of all they should try to retreat from that ce. If they are unable to do that then they should try to attack the weak spot of that Monster from the start and should not give that Monster the time to create the domain.


    Sam also told him that when they approach the border area they should stay careful as previously he faced aary grade monster before approaching the core areas. So this is also a very risky situation. Sam already informs the warrior association about this and they also cannot believe that something like this will happen this time.


    Actually none of them get surprised as many times situations like this will ur in the danger zone but they did not think that the same situation will appear in the danger zone beside the human Kingdom.

 Chapter 667 667 - Status upgrade

    <h4>Chapter 667 Chapter 667 - Status upgrade</h4>


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Superior Human


    Health: (194500/194500)


    Spiritual energy: (194400/194400)


    Soul energy - (220/220)


    Strength: 18400 + 1000 + 50


    Agility: 18400 + 1000 + 50


    Physique: 18400 + 1000 + 45


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 18400 + 1000 + 40


    Spirit: 18400 + 1000 + 40


    Soul:- 20 + 2


    Status points:- 00


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also be fixed based on the new status.]


    [System remark:- You received an additional boost because you were sessfully able to be a superior human. Compared to any of the normal humans you became the superior race that has much more potential and much more power.


    During your break through the system uses all the status points to evolve your bloodline and make you a superior human. You also sessfully have the option to evolve your bloodline and increase your power.]


    Grade: ary-grade) (Early) / (Early RRR grade)


    Potential: Celestial


    Upgrade point: 54k


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (cooldown period for 6 months.)


    Fusion technique


    Absorb technique:


    Superior Dragon Devour


    Trigon absorb (Grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    Bloodline skills:-


    Superior Aura


    Superior Destruction


    Superior eyes


    [ Remark: The way to be a powerful warrior.]"


    Sam looks at the system screen after finally absorbing all the crystals he begins to look at the system screen after putting all those status points into his stats. He did not absorb the dead body of those Monsters as he did not want to absorb them inside the Royal pce.


    He will do that after leaving the human Kingdom. Surprisingly, he noticed that after killing those 6 Monsters he almost got 54k upgrade points, apletely unexpected thing for him.


    Previously when he killed those Epic grade monsters you got at least 500 to 1000 upgrade points but this timepletely upgraded to 5000 to 10000. He gets those match upgrade points based on the power of those Monsters. The more powerful The Monster will be the more he will get the upgrade points.


    Compared to every Monster inside the core area the monster he faced in the border area is weak. After killing that Monster previously when he looked at the system he naturally noticed he got 5000 upgrade points. And most likely killing the most powerful Monster gives him 15000 upgrade points.


    This is a very good thing for him but at the same time as you know currently to upgrade any of his techniques he would need a huge amount of upgrade points and to do that he needed to kill more Monsters.


    But at the same time he already decided that before upgrading any of those techniques that already reach S-grade, he will upgrade those other techniques that are still present in the A-grade.


    Even though this time he did not get that much of a huge status upgrade still it will be enough for him. He is already nning to spend some time before going back to Eden Blue. He wanted to make himself as powerful as he could before going back there to support his from any other enemy who wanted to destroy it.


    The good thing is that he already contacted him and he already told him that today he will give him the basic knowledge about the domain. After getting all the basic knowledge Sam needed topletely depend on himself to bepletely able to use the power of domain.


    So he is very excited about that and he is just waiting for the human King to finish the meeting as he is still busy in the meeting for tomorrow''s meeting in the headquarters. Not only that but at the same time the human King already informs him that in these 6 months, nobody from the human King has been missing so that is a very good thing to hear.


    ''I wanted to know if any Dungeons are present in the core area or not. First of all, no Dungeon is present in the inner area so definitely the Dungeon could be present in the core area. Don''t know why but I have a feeling that if I went deeper into the core area then I would be able to see the Dungeon.


    I don''t know if my prediction is right or wrong but most likely every Kingdom which was created beside a part of the danger zone naturally has a dungeon present in their danger zone. Even though it is possible that even that Kingdom isn''t aware of that thing.


    Also, nobody knows how big the danger zone is. Even the president of the headquarters and all the other people who were able to reach thete stage of legendary grade did not advance further than their limit. Previously Andrew told Sam that when he went almost to the end of the core area he most likely saw a barrier.


    First of all, you should know that the president of the Warrior Association and some other old people have already reached thete stage of legendary grade and they just wanted to break through to advance more than that. Currently, in Terraria, nobody knows which grade they will reach after breaking through from the legendary grade.


    Also, every person who reaches the legendary grade can already feel that the breaking through process will be much more dangerouspared to any other grade. This is also the reason that nobody tries to break through recklessly without preparing themselves and also everybody could tell that they still did not reach the limit of their grade.


    This is also the reason that until now nobody has been able to find the end of the danger zone. Also, nobody tries to observe the danger zone from the sky as that could be also risky.


    Sam wanted to find more Dungeons of Terraria and wanted to reach thest floor of the dungeon. As you know previously he was able to find the mysterious symbol inside the Dungeon that he found Terraria for the first time. From then on he wanted to see if he could find more than and be able to reach thest floor to find that kind of pattern or not.


    The main question will be where would he reach after using that mysterious pattern that definitely will act as a teleportation symbol.


    The most interesting thing is that nobody from Terraria is aware of the thing that all the others which able to awaken The Spiritual energy after them and have dungeons present inside of them are connected to Terraria as only the Terraria are able to use the true spiritual energy and every one of those other only uses normal spiritual energy.


    Most likely the purpose of those Dungeons is also to send Warriors to Terraria when they are able to reach the limit of their or something like that. Sam still remembers when he previously taught his family how to use true spiritual energy it looked like they were having a very hard time.


    Fortunately using the Origin Spiritual energy you can say he increased the strength of their spiritual system and only because of that his family in the end was able to use the true spiritual energy and their spiritual system fully turned into a true spiritual system from the normal state.


    So most likely until nobody reaches the Terraria they would not have upgraded their spiritual system and wouldn''t be able to use true spiritual energy which would be much more powerfulpared to normal spiritual energy. Also, he gets to know that the prime Dragon which targets the Eden blue for the core most likely could use the true spiritual energy.


    Now this is the dangerous thing as even if any Warrior who is able to reach the peak Epic grade won''t be able to do anything to that dragon. You can say the difference between normal and true spiritual energy would be that true spiritual energy is 10 times strongerpared to normal spiritual energy.


    This is also a reason that he did not think that his family would face any kind of danger at this time as he already knew that most of the people from others would try toy Low until the core did not appear on the surface area.


    But you can say he is very worried about the safety of his friend and his teacher as previously he did not get the chance to evolve Their spiritual system to a true spiritual system. He just hoped they were safe and also did not face any kind of danger when his teacher went to the other world. The good thing is that most of the time he will try to read various news about variouss that will get updated by those people who like to travel to differents.

 Chapter 668 668 - The Inner world

    <h4>Chapter 668 Chapter 668 - The Inner world</h4>


    Everyone who travels to those differents where spiritual energy awakens has already reachedary grade. During the time he also got to know that only in Terraria if you wanted to use the world bridge then you needed to reach theary grade at minimum for a safe journey.


    Compared to any of those others the world bridge of the Terraria is much more powerful because of the true spiritual energy and anybody needed to reachary grade for the safe journey. Even though during that time some did not get to know the names of those people, it looks like those people really liked to travel through differents and also they published all the details of those others into Terraria.


    In Terraria only Warriors who have merit can know the details of those others and fortunately, Sam also has merit. So in these 6 months, he also looked at the details of variouss and naturally, he focused on the details of his Eden Blue.


    As he expected, many people from differents currently present in Eden Blue are hiding themselves and waiting for the''s core to appear in the surface area. On the other hand, he also gets to know that previously many people from Eden Blue went to the Earth to help those prime humans.


    After getting that report naturally Sam became worried but fortunately, he got to know that 5 monthster when those people came back to Eden Blue they became more powerful. Unfortunately in that process, almost 200 Warriors lost their lives on that other.


    After getting that news for some time he naturally became so shocked that he did not know what to do. That time he wanted to use the World Bridge to go back to Eden Blue. But fortunately, he was somehow able to calm down. At that time he also noticed in the details that the person who published the details of that was also published the names of those Warriors who lost their life on earth.


    Reading those names he rxed a little but even with that he became very disappointed in himself that he was unable to help any of his people when they needed him. First of all, he also knows many of them. Even though he wasn''t that close with those people, it is still very sad that they lost their lives.


    On the other hand, after that, the people of Eden Blue begin to get resources from the Earth and it looks like the Earth also promises them that they will interfere if any people from other worlds try to attack them or do anything.


    This is also the reason that during all this time no people from other worlds try to do anything even though they hide inside Eden Blue. Most of thes did not fear Earth but they also did not want to get into conflict with those people as that wasn''t the right time to do that.


    Sam wanted to get information about his family and friends. You also wanted to know about the information of his Academy and also wanted to know what happened with all those Saints. Unfortunately, he did not get that much information about that as even the person who went to Eden Blue did not have any kind of interest in those matters.


    This is also the reason in these 6 months Sam did not win back to Eden Blue and did not try to break through. As the situation of Eden Blue became normal he could focus on breaking through and finally, he did that.


    He cannot believe it has already been 2 years since he came to Terraria. He still cannot believe that he came to a different and was able to be powerful this quickly and also get all this kind of new information.


    Sam already ns what to do after going back to Eden Blue. Before anything, he would try to evolve The Spiritual system of all the people that are close to him and also he will try to increase the security of his so that they did not get attacked by any other that quickly.


    Unfortunately, he won''t be able to upgrade or you can say evolve the core of Eden Blue like Terraria. The Terria has a core that produces true spiritual energy whereas the core of Eden Blue naturally only produces normal spiritual energy even though that true spiritual energy will be present there.


    For any person who can absorb true spiritual energy but goes to a where only normal spiritual energy will be present, a difficult situation would be created for that person. But if that person keeps patient then naturally he would be able to be powerful.


    ______________________


    If you look at the time it is already 6:00 p.m. and Sam already went to the training room alongside the king. Well, the king will teach him about the basics of the domain. The king previously wanted his father to teach Sam about this but it looks like his father once again became busy in cultivation to reach the limit of early legendary grade.


    This is also the reason that he takes that much time. But aftering to the ce both of them sit down on the ground. The king finally began to tell him the details of the domain.


    "You can think that the domain ispletely a different conceptpared to any of our techniques. The domain would be the concept where you would be able to control all the spiritual energy and you can also prevent your enemy from using any kind of spiritual technique or Spiritual energy.


    Every person has a different domain so they need to depend on themselves to get the full understanding of the domain. Naturally, I will tell you the basics that you need to know to get further information.


    The domain is rted to our spiritual energy. After breaking toary grade every Warrior is able to ess the power that stays dormant inside their body. That Power is rted to the body and to activate That Power you need to connect your spiritual energy with that dormant power.


    That dorman Power is present in your spiritual system or I should say in your inner world. As you know every Warrior would have an inner world and the dormant power is that inner world.


    Most of the Warriors would not be able to realize the inner world until they did not have any kind of knowledge about that. Actually, during the moment when any Warrior tries to break through, they would immediately be transferred to their inner world where they will face the barrier that prevents any Warrior from advancing.


    Only when anybody tries to break through or the barrier gets created when they reach the peak grade would they be able to enter the inner world? But other than that nobody would be able to enter the inner world if nothing abnormal happened to that person."


    After saying that the human King became silent for some time as he wanted to give Sam the time to digest all that information. All that information is shocking for any Warriors when they get to know for the first time.


    Most of the Warriors would never have thought that they would be able to get ess to their inner world other than the time when they did not have to break through that barrier present in their inner world.


    Sam was fully shocked after hearing all that information. First of all, he is already aware of his inner world and he also knows that when anybody reaches the peak grade they will be able to enter their inner world to see the barrier.


    But during this time they would not be able to attack the barrier until the barrier did not finish. Also, the moment you reach any Grade, a barrier will start creating inside that inner world which will be visible when you reach the peak grade.


    Sam is aware of all of these but he never thought that anybody would be able to enter the inner world other than reaching the peak grade. Now he wanted to know how to connect the spiritual energy with his inner world so that he could create his own domain.


    As the human King told him the domain is his inner world that got connected with the spiritual energy and the inner world also is the dormant energy that would be present inside all the Warriors.


    The human King all this time observing the reaction of Sam and he could tell Sam most likely got very surprised after hearing all of this information. But he was able to calm down and with that Sam looked at the human king.


    The human King already understands that some fully digest all that information so he can proceed with other information. So wasting no time he already begin to exin.

 Chapter 669 669 - Basic explanation

    <h4>Chapter 669 Chapter 669 - Basic exnation</h4>


    "I can tell by looking at your expression that you never expected that the power of domain will be connected with your inner world. That is normal because even though every warrior went to the inner world the time when they wanted to break through from that barrier to advance.


    Before telling you how to connect your spiritual energy with the inner world I needed to tell you that the inner world only could get connected with the spiritual energy after you are able to break through twoary grades.


    If you are wondering why then it is because when anybody reaches theary grade The Spiritual energy finally begins to go through the process that we call the liquidation force. Only using the liquidation force would you be able to connect the inner world to reality and you would be able to bring out the power of your inner world and create your domain.


    If you are wondering about the liquidation force, then as you know our spiritual energy almost stays as an energy state. Nobody would be able to touch that until they did not have any special technique to touch the energy.


    It is like the sunlight which you can only see but won''t be able to touch. This is the reason that nobody would be able to connect their spiritual energy with the inner world.


    When anybody is able to break through toary grade they finally get the ability to liquid eyes The Spiritual energy from the energy state. To do this you do not require any kind of special technique. But you need to fully focus on this and you need to have full control over your spiritual energy to turn your spiritual energy into the liquidation force.


    If you have full control over your spiritual energy then you would be able to feel that you can turn your spiritual energy into a liquid state. Naturally to do that you need a huge amount of mental energy as every time you turn your spiritual energy into a liquid state it will consume a huge amount of mental energy.


    When you are sessfully able to turn your spiritual energy into a liquid state you would feel that a different kind of core has been created in your inner world. In that core that liquid state spiritual energy will be gathered and when that core is filled with liquid spiritual energy you are finally able to connect the inner world with reality and finally be able to bring out the power of your domain.


    We called that core the liquid core. As you did not create your domain previously and did not liquify your spiritual energy you needed to fill that liquid core to connect your inner world with reality. But after you sessfully connect that you don''t have to always fill that liquid core with liquid spiritual energy to use the power of the domain.


    Also when any Warrior uses the power of domain you should know that it consumes those liquified spiritual energy, so I think you already notice that no Warrior will lose any spiritual energy after creating the domain. But the moment you will use the power of domain it will consume mental energy and also stamina.


    Also, the more you use the liquified spiritual energy the more powerful your domain will be and the more you have stamina and mental energy the longer you are able to maintain the domain. So with that, you can tell what is the importance of anybody''s stamina and mental energy in this process.


    These are the basics that you should know about the domain and after that, I won''t be able to help you with any of those things. You need to depend on yourself to liquefy the Spiritual energy and create that liquid core inside the inner world.


    Sam, I should also tell you that this process is also very hard and this is the reason most people after bingary-grade warriors will take a very long time to finally be able to achieve the domain.


    I hope this time you did not recklessly go inside of the danger zone and fully focused on liquifying the spiritual energy. The first time when you try to liquify The Spiritual energy you will naturally feel a resistance that will try to prevent you from liquifying The Spiritual energy. But using your mental power undead to break the resistance and with you would be able to finally liquefy The Spiritual energy.


    After that, you would instantly feel that you have a spiritual core or you can say liquid core inside your inner world that definitely will get connected with your inner world.


    If you are wondering about the liquified spiritual energy then currently in theary grade you just need to use that liquified Spiritual energy to use the power of domain but when you reach the next grade you finally will understand the importance of the liquified spiritual energy.


    Well for now you don''t have to worry about that and only need to focus on creating the liquify code and get ess to your domain. Also as I told you earlier everyone has different kinds of domains based on the power of their inner world.


    So I won''t be able to tell what kind of power you will have when you use your domain. Inside the domain, you are able to use every bit of spiritual energy that will be present in that area.


    If your domain has the healing power then naturally those spiritual energies instantly will turn the healing spiritual energy. Thatpletely will depend on the characteristic of your domain and that time you are able to use that type of power which is the characteristic of your domain.


    Suppose you have a domain that has the characteristic of healing so naturally inside the domain even though if you try to use the other technique you can use that but then at that time the power of those techniques won''t be that much. But when you will use any kind of technique that would be rted to healing that would instantly be very powerful and will be very effective inside your domain.


    Also as you know your enemy coulde to attack using his domain and at that time both parties will try to fight each other only using their domain and naturally during that time they will only attack each other using the power of their domain.


    This will only cost them The liquified Spiritual energy so the warrior always needs to be careful because even if he gets the advantage in the end and is able to counterattack his enemy, he could still get attacked.


    So these are the basics of the domain and after that, you need topletely depend on yourself to get ess to your domain. But I could tell that you are able to ess your domain pretty quicklypared to me or any other Warrior. I have the trust in your potential so you don''t have to worry that you need a pretty long time to get ess to your domain.


    Also, the question you asked earlier why those Monsters got ess to their domain the moment they break through them is because they always have the liquid core present in their body and the moment they break through that liquid core would get connected to their Monster core. There could be other reasons but this is the thing that my father previously told me so this is the only thing I know and so I won''t be able to tell more than that."


    After saying that the human King finalist stops talking and he gives the time to Sam to digest all that information. All this time he and Sam were only just present inside the training room. Currently, the whole training room became silent as the human King also stopped talking and gave Sam the time to digest all that information.


    Sam also without any question digested all that information that was surprising to him. First of all, who could have thought that after breaking through to theary grade any warrior would be able to ess the liquid state?


    By the exnation, Sam became sure that the liquid spiritual energy would be important but currently, he can only use that to use the power of his domain. Naturally liquifying The Spiritual energy is only easy as the human King told him and also when he tries to do that for the first time he will face resistance that he needs to ovee using his full mental power.


    Finally, after oveing the prevention force, he would be able to liquefy The Spiritual energy and also finally a liquid spiritual core would be created inside of his inner world. The liquid core would instantly get connected to the inner world and for the first time if you wanted to use the power of a domain you needed to fill that liquid core with liquid spiritual energy and only then would you finally get ess to the domain.

 Chapter 670 670 - Meeting in headquarter

    <h4>Chapter 670 Chapter 670 - Meeting in headquarter</h4>


    Finally, the day for the meeting already came and as you can see one by one every king and queen was using the teleportation portals toe to the headquarters. One by one those Warriors from the warrior association escort those people toward the meeting room.


    Naturally, nobody brought any of them Royal guards or any high officials from their kingdoms as the warrior association only told them toe to the headquarters as they did not want to reveal that important information to those high officials or any other people.


    So from everything then only the kings and the queens came to the meeting. But you can say they did not have any kind of safety problem inside the Warrior Association as the headquarters of the Warrior Association would be the safest ce in Terraria.


    Nobodyes to the headquarters through walking or any kind of other method except the teleportation portal. You can say the location of the headquarters is very hidden and even if anybody tries to search for that headquarters using their search technique or something like that they won''t be able to do that.


    For many of them, this is also the first time toe to the headquarters so naturally those people also get very surprised when observing the surrounding area of the headquarters. The headquarters was a very tall building which had almost 10 floors.


    But the meeting will be held on the ground floor so nobody would need to go to the upper floor. Also headquarters have many secrets that they did not want to reveal to anyone which could also create chaos.


    Now back to the main matter even if those people did not go to those upper floors but still that ground floor is a fully surprising thing for them and they can also feel the density of The Spiritual energy. Also, they realized the moment they came there they entered a rxed state that also made them stay calm. It looks like some kind of energy is also present there which also helps them to rx.


    Most of the Warriors did not know but the Wadia association has many difficult defense systems and also many more symbols present that also provide the density of Spiritual energy and also provide that warm energy that helps anybody to get rxed.


    The president did not want any of the warriors who worked in the warrior association to panic. All of them needed to handle difficult situations so naturally, they needed to stay rxed all the time so that they could think properly.


    One by one those kings and queens went to the meeting room while observing their surrounding area and almost 1 hourter the human King and Queen alongside Sam came to that ce. Once again a warrior went toward them and told them to follow him as he would be the person who would escort them to the meeting room.


    When both of them finally entered the meeting room they could already see many other kings and queens also present there. Most of them instantly look at their direction with interest. The Human King also looks toward them and he already smiles at them as even though many of them have some kind of problem with the human Kingdom but inside these meetings everybody needs to maintain order so that the president does not get disappointed at them.


    2 hourster,


    Finally, the president also came to the meeting room while all the elders were already present there as they were staying there from the start. Even the de King came back from the human Kingdom as the meeting will be very important.


    During this time only three kings tried to maintain their calm expression. The human king and the Oni king alongside the Viet king try to maintain their normal expression. Even before the meeting the warrior association already informed the Viet king about the previous incident and with that the king became very serious about this matter and he also increased the security in his Kingdom alongside the danger zone.


    Who could have thought that while he was present in the human Kingdom his kingdom would face this kind of disaster? Fortunately, the warrior association was able to handle all this matter and his citizens did not face any kind of danger as even those Warriors of his Kingdom did not need to participate in the fight.


    Even with that, he needed to present in the meeting as the meeting will be held with all the kingdom that is under the warrior association and what is the association also wanted to discuss with everyone about some important matters.


    _________________


    "I know that many of you were very surprised because of this meeting and most likely by the previous report you can already predict that the meeting is rted to those abyss humans. If this is a normal meeting then I would not call you toe to the headquarters.


    Before telling you about the main matter I wanted to tell you that I don''t want any traitors to know about our n so this is the reason I only called all of you but even with that it looks like most of you already held meetings with all of your high officials beforeing here.


    So I hope after going back to your kingdom you will think properly before deciding anything as this could create much more destruction. Also, I hope every one of you judges properly those people of your kingdom. I think even though We previously thought those Abyss humans became silent and no more traitors were present in any Kingdoms.


    But we are very wrong. It looks like everything there still has many Traitors who hide themselves very carefully so that even all of you are unable to figure that out."


    After saying that, the president became silent for some time as he wanted to give those people the time to digest all that information and after that, he continued to exin the incident.


    10 minutester,


    " It looks like all of you realize the important problem. I also want all of you to be very careful and try to find those traitors using your full ability as until we do not find those people we cannot give 100% protection to our kingdoms.


    Now wasting no time I will tell you about all the details. But before telling you I hope all of you stay calm even after knowing the full details and also first here all the details that I have to say and then if you have any questions ask me. Also, We previously did not inform you because we did not want any other word here or citizens to be suspicious about this or do something in their recklessness.


    Actually during the time when thepetition was going on we encountered a very difficult situation in the Viet kingdom. A group of scouting teams of our Warrior association who were present in that Kingdom suddenly encountered a group of dark humans who, using the dark teleportation technique, came to the danger zone.


    Naturally, that made all those Warriors very alert and ready to fight but fortunately, those dark humans did not move or attack those Warriors and those Warriors got the time to inform the warrior association.


    I think at that time most of you already realized something happened. That time we were unable to use the full force of our Warrior Association as most of the Warriors of our Warrior Association were present in thepetition to protect the safety of those participants and the entire audience.


    This is the reason all the elders begin to contact some Warriors who would be powerful enough to handle that situation and with that, I think all of you already notice that many Warriors suddenly begin to disappear from the battle arena and go to the warrior association.


    All those Warriors got called by the de King to go to the Viet kingdom. We did not want to disturb thepetition or any of you as that could also create suspicion. The de King gives them the mission to understand the motive of those dark humans who suddenly appear in that Kingdom and also without attacking or doing anything they just silently listen inside the danger zone.


    Fortunately we also immediately called back all the Warriors who were present in the danger zone and immediately many Warriors of our Warrior association surrounded the whole Kingdom and used the protection barrier.


    Now back to the main matter after all the Warriors finally came to the kingdom they naturally went to the danger zone to search for those dark humans. Naturally they did not approach those dark humans recklessly as that could also create more danger so they just observed those dark humans from a distance.


    But during that time they also realize that those dark humans did not even consider the presence of those Warriors as it looked like they just only wanted to look at the kingdom. This ispletely an unexpected matter for anyone and this also makes those Warriors more cautious."

 Chapter 671 671 - Explanation

    Chapter 671  671 - Exnation


    It has almost been 1 hour since the president started exining about the incident that happened to the Viet kingdom. Naturally, he is also taking the time so that everyone can digest all that information as all that information is very important and also veryplicated.


    Fortunately, he already exined most of the things and he was just going to exin to them about the symbol and also what happened in the end.


    "So now as I told you, we are sessfully able to reverse the Hion symbol. That is a very dangerous symbol that was forbidden by us. Fortunately, my friend Philip is also present in that ce and he is very good at symbols and arrays. Only because of his help, we were able to sessfully save those Warriors who turned into dark humans by those Abyss humans.


    But during the time when we already saved 5 or 4 of them most likely the mastermind already realized something was happening and this is the reason that he decided to explode all of those dark humans wasting no time.


    Fortunately, Sam decided to step in without caring about his own life and forcefully break his body''s limit to provide the necessary help to expel the dark spiritual energy and the berserker spiritual energy.


    Only because of his help somehow were we able to manage all the people safely before they could explode. I should tell you that if anybody got exploded then it could also affect the whole Kingdom even though we almost went 100 km away from the kingdom.


    Because of both the spiritual energy and because of that symbol it looks like the range of that explosion also increases and also when one by one those Monsters or those dark humans explode the range keeps increasing and increasing.


    Even those sessfully able to save those people Sam at this time was in a very critical condition and his brain cells got damaged because of Breaking the limit. He was in aa. This is also the reason that most of you realize the de King wasn''t paying attention to thepetition.


    Even our best healer had a very hard time healing that brain injury which almost put him in a condition from which he did not have any chance toe back. Fortunately, because almost all of our healers work at the same time we are sessfully able to heal that brain injury.


    Our Warrior Association naturally was very grateful to Sam that he put his life at risk to save those Warriors. If previously he did not do that then most likely we would have lost those Warriors. But at the same time, I hope he did not put his life in this kind of risk."


    After saying that the president stopped once again as everyone had a shocking expression present on their face. They cannot believe that to save the life of those people Sam put his life at risk. Nobody could give him the guarantee that he would be able to sessfullye back but still, he put his life at risk and really everyone should be grateful for that.


    Most of the people present in that meeting room begin to p for Sam. Before telling the achievement of Sam the president already revealed the name of those Warriors who previously turned into dark humans and got sessfully saved by the warrior association.


    "I am also informing you that we will hold an achievement ceremony for our Sam. He deserves that because of his bravery. Now back to the main matter, during the time when Sam is fighting for his life, we also weren''t ideal. Me and all the elders are nning to find the mastermind and finally, we get the chance to find the mastermind.


    As I told you earlier, alongside those dark humans, many Monsters also came to that ce who also kept their distance from the kingdom without doing anything.


    But at the time you can say because of the previous incident where we saved those dark humans the mastermind got cautious about these and he alreadymanded those Monsters who also have that symbol present on their forehead to go toward the kingdom.


    Actually, the mastermind wanted to destroy the whole Kingdom to show the whole Terraria that they have the power to destroy everything.


    Fortunately, before those Monsters advance toward the kingdom all the elders already begin to take care of them and many other Warriors of the warrior association use their spiritual barrier to suppress the impact so that the kingdom does not get affected by that.


    You have to say even though that was a very difficult thing to do, we were sessfully able to do that and the citizens and the whole Kingdom did not get affected by that powerful impact.


    Naturally, most of the citizens and those Warriors already got alert about the matter but fortunately, we also told them it was just some Monster trying to attack the kingdom so they were killing them, and because of this every citizen and Warrior should stay inside the kingdom."


    ___________________


    Sometimeter,


    " Most likely all of you are wondering why the Warrior Association did not inform you or any other Warrior about this matter.


    Then I think you already can predict why we did not inform you earlier. Everyone enjoyed thepetition and we did not want to affect thepetition or anyone during the time. But naturally if the situation already went out of our hands and we required help we would immediately contact everyone.


    Actually, to any of you, we are just hoping that none of those Warriors and normal citizens get to know about this matter because those normal citizens will not have that much will and many warriors also have weak willpower and will immediately start panicking the moment they hear about this news.


    It will cause unnecessary trouble and it will also show those Abyss humans that they finally achieved their dream and everybody fears them. Butpared to any of the reasons, the main reason is that we did not know who the traitor was and who should be trusted by us.


    This is the reason previously we did not inform anyone and decided to handle the matter on our own. With the help of my friend Philip, we were sessfully able to locate the location of that mastermind.


    The mastermind waspletely trying to blow up the whole Kingdom so during that time he did not expect something like this would happen where he would get immediately spotted by me.


    But even though he did not expect that, most likely he predicted previously that something like this could happen so those other Abyss humans who were present in that ce were already ready to use the dark teleportation array any time.


    Naturally the moment the mastermind realized that he got spotted by someone he already told his subordinate to teleport from that ce. But unfortunately for them after getting the location I immediately used the teleportation array that was also prepared by Philip and immediately came to that ce to stop those Abyss humans. Like this which sessfully is able to capture everyone."


    Once again the president became silent and gave everyone the time. This time most likely after hearing all that news those kings and queens also realize why the warrior association did not inform them as they did not want to alert the Traitors. Naturally, those traitors got alert then something unexpected could ur.


    Finally they rx when they get to hear that the president alongside those elders is able to stop those Monsters from destroying that Kingdom and also finally able to spot the mastermind and capture that person.


    ______________________


    "I have to say those abyss humans most likely prepare themselves for any kind of situation. Prepare a mental symbol that would prevent anyone from getting the information out of their mind. If anybody tries to forcefully break through that mental defense then immediately it would kill that person who has that mental defense.


    Now that is the second hardest part we have to face but fortunately once again with the help of my friend Philip, we were sessfully able to break that mental defense. But this time it requires a huge amount of spiritual energy and also it almost makes all of us and even me get exhausted fully.


    But who is all of this my friend Philip is finally able to reverse the symbol and with that, we are sessfully able to read their memory without killing them. With this one by one, we begin to read the memory of those Abyss humans and also in the end we read the memory of that mastermind.


    But reading the mind of the mastermind makes us speechless as we get to know that he also wasn''t the real mastermind. He was just the leader of that operation and the main objective of them was to blow up that whole Kingdom."

 Chapter 672 672 - Explanation (2)

    <h4>Chapter 672 Chapter 672 - Exnation (2)</h4>


    Finally, the president finishes the exnation and everyone present in that meeting room finally gets to know about the real situation. Except for the human king, Oni king, and the Viet king, every other person has a speechless expression on their face as they really cannot believe that something dangerous like this is also happening.


    Also after knowing the real motive of the mastermind, they became very serious about this. First of all, those abyss humans chose a day when most of the Warriors of the warrior association and even the Warriors of the Viet kingdom were busy in the human kingdom for thepetition.


    They decided to attack that Kingdom during that time to destroy that and also naturally they captured all those people who would die in that destruction. Even if they died in that explosion those abyss humans still can use the dead body to sacrifice. That is the main Motive of those dark humans and those Monsters.


    But at the same time, the president thought that they also wanted to capture more warriors so that they could also turn those Warriors into dark humans.


    "Finally all of you get to know about the real situation and most likely all of you understand the real importance of this matter and why we previously did not reveal that news to any of you. First of all, I could tell without the help of traitors most of the kingdom would already be cautious about this matter when their Warriors get kidnapped.


    So before anything even though we needed to increase the security in the danger zone alongside the kingdom, at the same time we also needed to search for those Traitors. Until we are able to find those traitors, everyone in your kingdom will be in danger because of those people.


    Also, I already told my people to search for those Warriors who disappeared in the 6 months and it surprised me when I got the result. I was able to find out that almost 200 Warriors disappeared in thest 6 months.


    Naturally, we cannot say for sure that all of them got kidnapped by those abyss humans as it is also possible that they died in the danger zone. But for now, we should consider all those people who got kidnapped by abyss humans.


    Also, we should consider that those abyss humans suddenly have someone who has full knowledge about this forbidden symbol and in the six-month day possibility of those forbidden symbols so that they could make themselves more powerful.


    Because of the previous war, those Abyss humans lost a huge number of their people and this is the reason that on the six-month day, they did not do anything that could create another war. Even though we got many clues about them, unfortunately during that time we were unable to be sure that those were the people who were behind Those kidnappings.


    Also as I told you to save any of those dark humans even me and all the elders have trouble previously. Expelling the dark spiritual energy alongside that berserker spiritual energy is pretty hard for any of us. Compared to any of those spiritual energies, we are naturally able to exin the true spiritual energy from the body of that dark human much easier.


    As our spiritual system only can use the true spiritual energy we would be able to control the spiritual energy easily while controlling the dark spiritual energy or that new spiritual energy bes pretty hard for us. This is also the reason that me and all the elders are also working on a technique that would be able to help us to expel the spiritual energy from any of those dark humans.


    I could tell you that those Abyss humans will use those dark humans once again and they will try to blow every one of them to destroy any Kingdom. But fortunately, it looks like after the previous failure those Abyss humans will be silent for some time.


    During all this time all the traitors will be very alert about the matter and impossible. I want everyone to also create a scout team inside the danger zone so that they can observe the danger zone.


    Even though I cannot guarantee that with the scout team and even the scout team from our Warrior Association, we would be able to prevent the kidnapping or not at least if those scout teams find anything like this day could help those people.


    Also, I want every one of you to alert all the Warriors but don''t tell them the real matter. Suddenly you should not trust any of your high officials or any other people. You should search around your kingdom very carefully for any traitors.


    I am sure that many traitors are present inside of your kingdoms. If you are wondering why then we have already captured 3 traitors from the Viet kingdom. Those are the people who also helped those Abyss humans to kidnap their people and also they were the people who told those Abyss humans to attack their Kingdom as the safety wasn''t tough at that time."


    The president finished exining all of these and everyone present in that meeting room also agreed with him. Everybody knows that currently, nobody would give them the guarantee that traitors weren''t present in their Kingdom. This is also a big reason for them not to reveal the main information until the warrior association did not reveal that to the public.


    President already told them that when everybody already became aware of this matter and created a scout team for the danger zone and increased the security in their kingdom, you also revealed the information to the public so that those Warriors and those normal citizens became more alert.


    The president during the time did not tell anyone, he also told the elders toe up with a device that could immediately send help signals the moment anybody faced any kind of problem inside the danger zone.


    As you know that normal phone did not work inside the danger zone as the signal would be pretty bad inside the danger zone. So only using the special phone you could contact anyone. So naturally the president wanted toe up with a technique like this which immediately gives those warriors the chance to contact the Warriors of their kingdoms for health if they suddenly faced a dangerous situation.


    Not only that, the president is also working on finding the traitors in the kingdoms through those spies that he has already appointed in every kingdom. Fortunately, those spies were professional, and with that, the president also did not worry about this matter.


    But even with that, he decided to tell all of them that the warrior association had also already taken action to find those Traitors.


    _________________


    "Fortunately everything went without any problem. Also, it looks like all of them also understand the significance of this matter. Also if they recklessly release that information to anyone then there is also the chance that Traitors will get to know about this."


    After finishing the meeting the president already left the meeting room and he is now talking with one elder of the Warrior Association. That elder is in charge of finding those Traitors. Also, you can say that their operation where quite sessful as they were already able to find many of those people.


    Sam on the other hand was questioned by many of those kings and queens about that previous matter. Even though Sam did not like the spotlight position like this, he could not escape from that ce without exining anything.


    As you can see he also became busy exining the previous situation even though the president already exined. They also wanted to hear the exnation of Sam and wanted that information.


    Sam also begins to tell him how he used the concealment technique when inside of the danger zone to observe those dark humans when suddenly those Monsters also came to that ce. He also told them what happened to the first who instantly died the moment Sam used the mind control technique to read the minds of those dark humans.


    Also like this, he exined about the distraction that appeared when one of the monsters exploded and after that one by one many other Monsters also began to explode. Fortunately, he was able to save himself even though he had the confidence to escape but if he stayed close to that explosion he also did not know if he was able to protect himself or not.


    Also, he already said the power limit of those explosions crossed the epic grade so during that time naturally it became dangerous for him to stay close to that ce. But the most surprising thing was that a restriction force also instantly began to work at that time when that explosion appeared.


    At the time even though he had the teleportation technique and other techniques to escape from that ce but most of the time when he tried to escape he began to feel the restriction. He began to feel that he cannot use any of the techniques but fortunately he was able to escape from that ce.

 Chapter 673 673 - The liquify Core

    Chapter 673  673 - The liquify Core


    Sam went back to the human Kingdom. While the human King and the others didn''te back. President told them to stay for an important meeting. Well the president also told him to stay there but Sam wanted to try liquify The Spiritual energy. So because of this he decided that he will go back to the human Kingdom while everyone will stay in the meeting.


    Sam is right now present in his room and he already begins to meditate to enter the mind zero state. Before anything he needs to find that additional energy present in his spiritual energy that will help him to liquify The Spiritual energy.


    Finding that will be very hard for him as even the even going told him that it could take him almost 7 to 8 months. But as you know he did not have that much time to stay in the Terraria and he needed to go back to his own as quickly as possible to prepare for the danger.


    Naturally not just the prime Dragon but he also needs to protect the Eden blue from those people from other worlds who are also staying in the Eden blue to wait for the right time to attack.


    Fortunately by the recent report Sam gets to know that those people even though previously tried to make some trouble but after finding out about the fact that the core will be released two yearster those people decided to stay silent without doing anything.


    But those people are also preparing themselves to take the core of the the moment it appears on the surface area. They also gather their army while hiding themselves.


    ________________________


    It was almost 3 hours but Sam did not find anything as expected. But he did not give up and still began to meditate and try to feel that additional energy. All this time he did not notice but little by Little a whiteyer began to surround his whole body.


    For almost 5 hours thatyer began to create and after 5 I waster when thatyer fully got created It began to merge into his skins. Naturally Sam did not feel anything as he was fully busy with his meditation.


    That process also needed almost 3 hours and finally that quietyer fully got merged into his body. Sam at this time almost thought about giving up as he decided to rest for sometime and then start his meditation.


    But suddenly something unexpected happened as he suddenly felt an unexpected energy present in his body. Sam almost came out from the mind zero state because of the excitement, but fortunately was able to rx himself and once again focus on feeling the energy that was present in his spiritual energy.


    Sam did not know that previously that quietyer which got merged came from his spiritual core. Normally that additional energy which also helps to liquify The Spiritual energy stays inactive inside the core of any Warrior. To activate that additional energy anybody needed to use their Full focus to feel the energy and create that spiritualyer which is full with those additional energy.


    Also most of the Warriors who use the true spiritual energy naturally have a blueyer around their body but as Sam haspletely a different spiritual energy he had that whiteyer. Also he did not know but most of the Warriors would need 20 to 30 days to activate thatyer.


    It is also because of his talent that he was able to feel that energy injust 10 hours and finally he could start the procedure to liquify The Spiritual energy. But even with his talent he needed a long time to liquify The Spiritual energy.


    Sam uses his full mental energy to control that extra energy to liquefy his spiritual energy. But when he uses the full mental energy he could feel that almost in 2 hours he is only able to liquify 1% of his spiritual energy.


    He wanted to continue with the process but suddenly something unexpected happened and he came out of that mind zero. Almost he lost consciousness because suddenly a spiritual wave effect is mind.


    Fortunately, somehow able to stay awake,y down on his bed as he can tell he won''t be able to meditate. His full mental energy got exhausted and he didn''t know why but he also felt very sleepy so he decided to rest for sometime.


    Sam did not know but that spiritual shockwave got created because something happened in his inner world the moment he was able to liquify 1% spiritual energy. Naturally the human King previously did not tell him about the shockwave as he also did not think the shockwave could be powerful.


    Actually for any Warrior who uses the true spiritual energy the shockwave won''t be that much powerful which would consume a huge amount of mental energy and almost make anyone unconscious. This is because of the origin spiritual energy that the power of the shockwaves increases. Little by little a core begins to be created inside his inner world.


    _______________________


    ''Hmm¡­ . What happened earlier? Why the hell did I suddenly begin to feel so sleepy and also almost lose my consciousness? Nothing I remember is somewhere to sessfully liquify 1% spiritual energy.''


    6 hours when he finally wakes up he begins to think why he previously got that much exhausted and also almost fell unconscious. But before he could think further than that suddenly he could hear the voice of Maria which also called him to eat breakfast.


    Only then do some people realize that they eat it the next day when he wake up from his sleep. Yesterday aftering back from the warrior association he fully focused on liquifying The Spiritual energy so naturally he did not look at the time.


    Sam decided to eat breakfast before starting the meditation once again to liquify the spiritual energy. During the time he also saw the human being who came back and it looked like a human being yesterday already finished the meeting with all those other kings and queens and with the warrior association.


    Naturally Sam wanted to know what type of meeting was held earlier but he did not ask the human King as he can also see the human king did not tell him anything at this time.


    ___________________________


    After finishing the breakfast Sam came back to his room and already informed everyone that he will be busy. Naturally he was busy liquifying The Spiritual energy and also wanted to find what happened to his body that he previously got unconscious.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam once again entered The Mind zero state and this time he did not start the process to liquefy The Spiritual energy. Actually at this time he remembered one thing that the human King told him earlier. You wanted to see if a core really got created inside his inner world or not.


    With that he already begins to focus on the inner world. The Human King already told him that after breaking through toary grade he would easily be able to enter the inner world even though the barrier for the next grade did not get created.


    Naturally when he focused on entering the inner world he somehow entered his conscious state and came to the inner world. In that inner world he suddenly noticed a core that was present. Most likely that 1% liquify spiritual energy created that core and from now on he needed to focus on liquify The Spiritual energy once again to fill that core.


    On the other hand, the human king is currently meeting with all the high officials of his Kingdom. The human King tells them what topic they discussed in the previous day and also what was the decision of the warrior association.


    Actually the warrior association also wanted to create a team of different Warriors from different Kingdom who will be in charge of finding the clue of those Abyss humans. As those Abyss humans also begin to attack Terraria to kill all the people of Terria, naturally the warrior association also thinks that they need to create a force that will be fully focused on dealing with those Abyss humans.


    Those people are getting dangerous and if they also did not prepare themselves then it would have be more risky for them. As those Abyss humans also had the knowledge of forbidden symbols and new spiritual energy, it became also risky for the warriors of Terraria. First of all the need to find techniques that could extract the spiritual energy from the body of those dark humans.


    The warrior association working on that and also everything decided to help them in that process with their own knowledge. This is also an important topic that they discussed earlier and the warrior association also really needed the help of everything with their knowledge.


    Currently the human King is discussing with all the high officials who will be those Warriors who will be going to the warrior association as the body association preparing the team. The warrior association also told everyone that they will train those teams of people.

 Chapter 674 674 - Meeting in the Royal palace

    Chapter 674  674 - Meeting in the Royal pce


    Sam fully focused on liquidity and spiritual energy. Well as he previously informed everyone that he will be there for a few days the human King also did not inform him about the meeting.


    Naturally Sam also has the authority to know about the meeting as the President already allowed him. But because he is fully busy liquifying spiritual energy the human King also did not disturb him at this moment.


    The human King can also understand that Sam is fully focused on liquifying the spiritual energy and most likely he wanted to create the liquify core as quickly as he can. Unfortunately nobody would be able to tell how long it will take for any Warrior to create that Core. Even if they have high talent to absorb The Spiritual energy, they will take almost 30 days to create that core.


    Suddenly the human King, busy in the meeting with all the high officials to select all those warriors, will participate in the training program. All of those Warriors will focus on finding the clue about those Abyss humans and also the warrior association will train them to deal with those Abyss humans.


    Naturally everybody thinks that with the help of everything and warrior association, they would be able to create the technique which would be able to help them extract The Spiritual energy from the body of those dark humans who have that Hion symbol and two types of spiritual energy other than the true spiritual energy.


    Philip also told Andrew he will give every one of those warriors the knowledge about that Hion symbol. Also if any Warrior present in that ce who has better understanding in those symbols or array, then Phillip also teaches them how to deal with the mastermind.


    That does not mean the warrior association will not provide any kind of help as even the warrior from the warrior association is also participating in the training program and also all the elders are ready to get the knowledge about that symbol and those two types of spiritual energy.


    Unfortunately even with that they did not have any other way to create the portal that would be connected to the Abyss world. If they somehow were able to control the dark spiritual energy they would at least be able to create the portal to connect to the Abyss world. Unfortunately no Warrior would be able to control the dark spiritual energy.


    Also Sam doesn''t tell anyone about his idea. Actually if he previously told the warrior association about this then at least with the help of Philip the warrior association could at least try to open the portal.


    As Sam only focuses on liquifying the spiritual energy he alsopletely forgets about that thing. But at the same time Sam wanted to quickly feel The Spiritual core that suddenly got created inside the office inner world.


    Yesterday as you know he was able to create that core and today he is finally able to see that core inside of the inner world. So he already decided to feel the core as quickly as he can to be able to use the power of domain to counter attack any type of Monster who would be able to use the power of domain.


    As you know, to proceed with the liquefaction anyone needed to have  High control over The Spiritual energy, Sam also has advantage in this matter because of the high control over his own spiritual energy. So during all this time he also fully controlled the spiritual energy to liquefy.


    ___________________________


    Yesterday after the meeting with the president every king and queen came back to their Kingdom and before anything they already decided to find traitors. Even though they cannot be sure that their kingdom has traitors or not, they also wanted to be sure that they did not have any kind of people like those who create more trouble for their Kingdom.


    This is also the reason that everything is taking action right now and they also did not inform the high officials. They only inform all the people that they fully trust and with the help of those people they naturally would try to find the Traitors.


    On the other hand none of the kings and queens know that the warrior association also created the team to watch over all those kingdoms and even also watch over those royal families. As you know nobody could give guarantee that any people from the royal family wouldn''t contact those Abyss humans, so the warrior association decided to watch over the whole Kingdom.


    Naturally none of the kings and queens or even the warrior association provide any kind of information with all the citizens of the kingdom about this matter. These naturally create trouble for their kingdom or even if they are the enemy they did not want to create trouble which immediately creates the risk to get found out by the warrior association.


    Even if those people contact those Abyss humans to help them to sacrifice the Warriors but they really fear the warrior association. Naturally all this time the president also did not go back to his cultivation. This is in time to focus on the cultivation as before anything he wanted to solve this matter.


    _____________________


    '' Sigh, I really need a long time to fully fill the liquified spiritual core. I was only able to feel 2% even though I focused on this process for 19 hours. Before anything, I really need to take a rest to recover my mental energy.''


    Actually today Sam did note out of his room to eat lunch or dinner and nobody also tried to disturb him as the human being already informed everyone that currently Sam is on a very important thing.


    This time if anybody tries to disturb Sam then there is a chance that Sampletely loses the concentration to create the liquify spiritual core. Naturally the human King also doesn''t know that Sam is already able to create the spiritual core. The Spiritual core is a very difficult thing to create inside the inner world which also connects your inner world with the outside world.


    So naturally during this time nobody should disturb anybody or focus on creating that spiritual core. Also, the warrior association already told everyary grade Warriors that they should proceed with the procedure with cautiousness. If they somehow got distracted they could also receive side effects of that process.


    The human King also appointed guards outside Sam''s room so that nobody could disturb him. On the other hand, Sam fully focused on the process and he also did not notice any Warriors outside of his room.


    _____________________________


    2 dayster,


    Today is an important day for the human Kingdom. If you are wondering why then it is because the human king called many Warriors into the royal pce for some important meeting.


    That important meeting about selection of those Warriors who will be going to the headquarter of the warrior association to participate in the training program. The warrior association also named the team of those warriors, who will be focusing on dealing with those abyss humans. They will be called the Alpha team.


    Many important Warriors got called by the human King to attend the meeting in the Royal pce and every one of those Warriors was really confused about this meeting. But everyone could understand this matter is very serious as the human King also told him not to inform anyone.


    So they also did not inform anyone about this matter and already one by one those one year began toe to the Royal pce. The warrior association previously told every kingdom that they should at least provide 10 Warriors from everything so that they could create a strong team of Warriors.


    The human King also selected a strong group of 10 Warriors who will be going to the warrior association to participate in the Alpha team. If those 10 Warriors got selected by the warrior association in the selection process then it would be a huge matter for the whole Kingdom.


    At the same time the one association already informs everyone that they will also reveal an incident with all the warriors but naturally they are told it will also take some time. But before that every king and queens shoot at least alert their Warriors that they should be careful in the danger zone.


    Even though they did not reveal the whole incident, they just told him that suddenly those Abyss humans were making some movement and this could be dangerous for everyone. This is just enough for anyone to understand the importance of that matter as every Warrior could understand the danger that those abyss humans possess.


    __________________


    All the 10 Warriors from the human Kingdom already came to the Royal pce and are right now waiting for the king and all the high officials toe to the meeting room. They already got informed by the Royal guards to wait for sometime.


    On the other hand the human king and all the high officials discussing if they should share the full information with those Warriors or not. But suddenly one high official told the human King that they should not reveal the information as the warrior association already told them, they will also reveal the whole information with all the Warriors who will be selected for the Alpha team.

 Chapter 675 675 - Going to the headquarter

    Chapter 675  675 - Going to the headquarter


    "I know all of you are most likely confused right now as to why I suddenly called the 10 of you at this moment in the Royal pce. This is a very important matter so I hope you listen carefully and also don''t try to reveal the information after leaving the Royal pce.


    Some time ago as you know I went to the headquarters of the Warrior Association and there I had a meeting with the elders of the Warrior Association alongside various kings and queens.


    The topic of that discussion was about those Abyss humans. The main thing is that the Warrior Association wanted to create a specialized team that only focused on those Abyss humans.


    There is more information but you need to get selected by the Warrior Association for the team to get all that information as that is very important information that we cannot reveal to anyone recklessly.


    Aftering back from the headquarters I discussed with all the high officials and we decided that we would send 10 of you to the headquarters. After going to the headquarters, naturally, all of you go through a selection process and if you are able to pass that selection process, only then do you get selected by the warrior association for the team.


    Even though I cannot tell you about the details of this topic, I think all of you most likely realize that suddenly the security of our Kingdom increases alongside the security of the danger.


    You should just know that all of these are rted to those abyss humans. As you know anything rted to those people will be very dangerous for them and this is the reason that we cannot recklessly reveal any kind of information. I also want all of you to stay silent about this.


    Also, all the high officials decided that we would also create a team who would be in charge of finding the traitors of our Kingdoms. Naturally, we already caught many of those people and most likely there are no traitors. But we cannot be sure and with that, I also wanted to create a team who will be in charge of finding those kinds of people.


    That does not mean you won''t be able to go outside of the danger zone as even I cannot give the guarantee that only inside the kingdom you are able to find those Traitors. So naturally you also needed to go to the danger zone."


    The king finally finishes exining all of these and all the Warriors present in the Royal pce be very surprised about all of this. Before anything, anybody could tell that this matter was very serious and even the headquarters of the body association personality was taking action while creating the team to deal with those Abyss humans.


    They also knew that anything rted to those people would be very dangerous for their Kingdom and the Terraria so naturally they wanted to get selected by the warrior association for the team so that they could also participate in hunting those abyss humans.


    ________________________________


    After finishing the meeting the human King told those 10 Warriors that tomorrow they would go to the headquarters. Tomorrow will be the day when all the elders will try to select those Warriors from different kingdoms for the Alpha team.


    Also, the human being thinks that suddenly he or any high official should not make any suspicious movements. What if the Traitors or any other people observing the Royal pce also have the technique to get away from his observation technique? He did not want anyone to make any kind of suspicious movement.


    On the other hand, if you are wondering what if those high officials turn out to be Traitors? Then there is no possibility because the headquarters already checked all those high officials of the human. Previously The de king came here to check all the high officials personally.


    The de King after checking all those people finally confirms that nobody has any kind of connection with those traitors or Abyss humans. There could be a person who tries to hide all the memory by using a mental verb or something like that but in front of a legendary grade Warrior, all of these will be pointless.


    ''I hope Father quickly came out from the cultivation as I needed his power. Even though I don''t know if anybody has some kind of technique to hide from my observation technique or not, it could be a possibility that those Abyss humans have some kind of method to hide away from aary-grade warrior''s observation.


    But I think that somebody is helping those Abyss humans. If they really could use those forbidden symbols then they could use them from the start but unfortunately, they did not use them and on this 6-month day suddenly tried to use them. Naturally, this proves to us that those people are receiving help from somewhere.


    Sigh, it would be really good if we were also able to create the portal that would be connected to the Abyss world. With that, we could immediatelyunch powerful attacks into that world to kill as many Abyss humans as we can.''


    The human King did all of this when he finally came back to his room. You can say all this time the human King also worked extra time to ensure the safety of his Kingdom. From the incident of the Viet kingdom, he became very serious about safety and he did not want any kind of harm to happen to any warrior of his Kingdom.


    The good thing is that those Abyss humans will not try to attack any citizen other than the time when they wanted to use the life sacrifice. This is the reason that those people did not want toe inside the kingdom and only tried to kidnap Warriors from the danger zone.


    ''As Sir Phillip told us only those people with a spiritual system could get affected by the Hion symbol. People who did not have the spiritual system or did not match the requirement of that symbol will not be affected by that symbol. This is also a good thing that no citizen or any of those Mortal grade Warriors will get affected.


    But still, I cannot be sure about these and I hope that the warrior association is able to create the technique that also helps us to extract Spiritual energy from any of those dark humans who have already been controlled by those Abyss humans.


    Also who could have thought those many people got kidnapped by those Abyss humans? It is a good thing that all six months the security of the human Kingdom increased and those Abyss humans did not try to kidnap any of those people from the human kingdoms.


    It is really good that from the start I increased the security of my kingdom and also created a scout team to look for the clues of those Abyss humans. This could be the reason that those Abyss humans did not directly try to kidnap anyone from this part of the danger zone.''


    _________________________


    Tomorrow,


    Today is the day when those 10 Warriors will go to the headquarters and the human king will take them to the headquarters as those 10 Warriors did not have permission to go to the warrior association''s headquarters directly.


    Every king and queen has the permission needed to lead their Warriors to the headquarters otherwise nobody would be able to go to the headquarters. Naturally, the human King did not have any problem with that and he would get to see those other Warriors who also got selected by those kings and queens.


    One thing you can say during all this time he did not have any kind of thought aboutpeting with any other Kingdom. He also hopes that other kingdoms also think the same thing as suddenly the risk is very high and the whole Terraria will be at risk because of those Abyss humans.


    Unfortunately for him, not every one of those kingdoms has the same thoughts as him. Even after knowing the danger those people wanted that only their group of Warriors got selected by the warrior association. Even those people would be busy finding clues about those Abyss humans.


    But naturally, their Kingdom could also benefit from that as after receiving the training from the warrior association the power of those Warriors will naturally increase and that would be very helpful for their kingdom.


    At least those kingdoms who have that kind of Motive did not reveal the information to any of those citizens or any of those Warriors. None of those kings and queens ever that all this time they were under the observation of the warrior association and if they tried to reveal any kind of information rted to that matter to anyone or even with their high officials, then they would immediately get punished by the headquarters.


    Fortunately, it looks like nobody has any kind of thought about this and this is a very good thing for Terraria.

 Chapter 676 676 - Limit of peak grades

    Chapter 676  676 - Limit of peak grades


    10 dayster,


    Finally, Sam wakes up from the cultivation and he is now eating in the dining room alongside Maria and the others. At that time the human king told him that he wanted to talk to him about the meeting as he had not been informed earlier as he was fully focused on his cultivation.


    Sam could understand this matter most likely rted to those Abyss humans and the human King did not want to talk about that matter in front of everyone. With that, he already told him that he would go to the meeting room after finishing his food.


    Maria naturally asked him about the cultivation because she was very curious to know why he suddenly decided to stay inside his room for 10 days. Before answering her Sam looked at the human king and only when the human king nodded, did Sam decide to tell the truth to Maria.


    Even if those Warriors who did not reach theary grade know about the liquid core or The liquified Spiritual energy, it won''t create any trouble as they did not have the power to liquefy The Spiritual energy or create the core.


    It is just normal that people did not try to learn about this until they reached the peak Epic grade. Before reaching that level everyone only stays focused on increasing their power so naturally anybody who did not reach the peak Epic grade normally did not know about the liquified spiritual energy.


    But still, Sam wasn''t sure if he should tell the whole truth to Maria or not and this is the reason that before telling her he decided to look at the human King to get his permission. After getting the permission Sam naturally did not waste the time to exin.


    He told Maria about the domain and to activate the domain he needed to liquefy The Spiritual energy with the help of the strange energy that would only be present when anybody would be able to break through toary grade.


    But at the same time, he did not talk about the inner world as the human King also began to exin to her daughter while avoiding the topic of the inner world. Sam could understand why the human King avoided matters rted to the inner world.


    The human King already told him earlier that many people who previously got to know about the inner world and get to know about The liquified Spiritual energy do something reckless that puts them in danger. They try to use their spiritual energy which did not even liquify to control the inner world and doing that would backfire and that person would receive direct side effects from the inner world.


    Even though the human King did not know how that happened he got the report from the warrior association and from that report he could tell the spiritual system of that person could get affected by the side effects and that person also faced the problem where won''t be able to increase his power.


    This is the reason that the human King avoided the topic of the inner word or liquified core. On the other hand, Maria gets very surprised after hearing that but when she gets to know that only by bing theary grade Warrior anybody would be able to have that energy to liquefy the spiritual energy, she gets disappointed about this.


    But then it did not take that much time for her to cheer up. Currently, she should not focus on the liquifying core or liquifying spiritual energy. Her focus is right now to reach the limit of peak Epic grade.


    After the battle with Sam, she and her brother also understand most people would not be able to reach the limit of the Peak Epic grade and already try to break through to the next grade. Only if you are sessful, most of them get affected by the side effects.


    Fortunately, the human Prince also did not do that earlier and decided to reach the limit of the Epic grade. For that, he also asks the guidance from Sam as he is the person who reaches the limit before breaking through toary grade.


    Naturally, Sam also helps the human Prince while using the observation technique and looks at the status of the human prince. Sam provided him with the basic status where the human Prince could see how much he needed to increase his power to reach the limit and what is the limit of that Grade.


    "Name: Zyan Yaton


    Race: Human


    Health: (178980/178980)


    Spiritual energy: (178900/178900)


    Strength: 17901


    Agility: 17898


    Physique: 17898


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 17897


    Spirit: 17890."


    This is the basic status of the human prince and some also provide him with that basic status so that he has a basic understanding of the limit and how much he needs to increase his overall power to reach the limit.


    The human Prince also told him currently he is currently facing some kind of restriction that also prevents him from increasing his overall power. Well, Sam cannot say anything about that as he never faced something like that. But suddenly he understands why the human prince is facing a situation like this.


    Actually for anyone who reaches the peak grade, breaking through to the next grade would be the important goal. During that time the person would not consider reaching the limit of that grade and most likely every warrior of Terraria never considered fully reaching the limit of any grade.


    If from the start they try to do that then most likely it could create a better spiritual system inside of their body. But as they did not do that earlier, if anybody tried to forcefully reach the limit of any grade they would face something like this.


    The more powerful the person has be the more powerful the restriction would be but that does not mean you cannot break that restriction. Even the human Prince can increase his strength and overall power even though that takes much time. But he isn''t in a hurry. He underestimated the limit and most of the time he reality did not consider fully reaching the limit of any Grade.


    Currently, he already decided that before breaking through to the next grade he needed to reach the limit of that Grade. Also as Sam provided him with the basic number of his overall stats, this is very helpful for him to understand how much he needs to work hard to reach the limit.


    On the other hand, if you are wondering while Sam provides him with the status of the human prince or the human king or anybody who did not get surprised about that then you are wrong. Everybody is surprised about this. Sam just provides them with the answer that this is one of the mystery techniques like his concealment technique and this only works on those people who give them permission to observe their bodies.


    Other than that he did not say anything as he did not want to use that technique to help most of the people of the human Kingdom. Fortunately other than the royal family, nobody knows about this matter and this is a good matter for him. Also, he already told the human King that he would help him create a device that would be able to show the limit and how much you need to increase your power to reach the limit.


    The human King only told this matter to the Oni king. They did not even contact the warrior association and this is the reason that Sam decided to help them. Also, he told him that this technique also has restrictions so naturally he won''t be able to use that most of the time.


    But basically, he already held the human King, Maria, and the queen alongside the human Prince. It is also good for them after they get to know how much they need to increase their power to reach the limit and Sam thought that when they would be able to feel the fulfillment after reaching the limit they would remember that feeling and every time they would try to feel that.


    Now back to the main matter,


    Sometimeter after finishing the food, Sam was already present in the meeting room and only the human king was present in that room. Nobody except them was present in that room and also the human King created the barrier around that ce so nobody would be able to hear anything outside of that barrier.


    All this time Sam did not say anything as he could understand the importance of that matter and he was very curious about what type of meeting they had after when he came back from the warrior association. Even though previously he could just stay in the warrior association to participate in the meeting, unfortunately he wanted to focus on increasing his power and focus on unlocking the power of the domain.

 Chapter 677 677 - The main factor

    Chapter 677  677 - The main factor


    Sam came to the headquarters as the President called him. The president called him to join the team that will be focused on dealing with those abyss humans. Even though he told the president that he wouldn''t be able to join the team, the president still told him toe to the headquarters as he had something to tell him.


    Because of this, Sam came to the headquarters. Before he came to the headquarters the human King also told him to look at those people who came from the human Kingdom and Oni Kingdom.


    Those people still did not get selected for the team alongside those other people as they were still in the training. Nobody could give them the guarantee that every one of them would get selected and that was the reason the headquarters also did not tell them about the real incident.


    When Sam appeared at the headquarters one Warrior suddenly came to him and told him to go to the meeting room while he was informing the president. Naturally, Sam could tell in the few days the headquarters became more busy and more crowds were present in the headquarters.


    It looks like even the Warriors from the Warrior Association were also busy in the training to get in the team and that was the reason the headquarters called many of their warriors back to the headquarters.


    Sometimeter the president came to the meeting room and with that, he had already begun to tell Sam about the training process of the Alpha team.


    "Before getting the main team those Warriors near to pass through the training process that was specially made to deal with those Abyss humans. Unfortunately, you won''t be able to join the team butter if you decided to join the team then you would immediately get the captain position.


    Now the reason I call you here is that I wanted to know if you could help us to create the technique that would be focused on extracting spiritual energy from the body of any Warrior.


    As you know previously even for me and all the elders extracting the dark spiritual energy and the berserker spiritual energy was very hard. So this is the reason that we are developing these techniques which would be helpful. Unfortunately, even though almost all the kingdoms are also helping us in this process, we still cannot create that technique as something is missing and this is the reason that I call you here.


    Previously you showed us how easily you could extract The Spiritual energy from the body of those warriors. So I would like your help in this matter."


    President wasting no time, quickly told Sam about this and Sam also began to think about this. First of all, he did not want to tell anyone about the Origin spiritual energy but at least he could help them to create that technique.


    So he already agreed with that and the president went to the room where you could see all the elders and many other people present. Every one of them focuses on finding the missing piece of that technique.


    Naturally, all of them were fully focused on finding the thing that they did not even notice when the president entered the room alongside Sam.


    "John can you show us the technique Sam came here and I would like his help in this matter,"


    John the elder of the warrior association came back to his senses after hearing the voice of the president and with that, he realized Sam also came to that room. He was also present in the danger zone previously when they were trying to extract Spiritual energy.


    Wasting no time John quickly took them toward the second room where you can see a scroll present in the table and in that scroll you can see many symbols that are mostly the process of the technique. John gives that scroll to Sam and with that, both the president and John wait in that ce.


    You cannot say this is the first time Sam has looked at the technique scroll as he also did that previously. As you know not every time he could depend on his system to learn any technique. So he can understand the symbol and wasting no time he begins to read the details present in the technique scroll.


    __________________________


    5 hourster,


    "I think all of you already know thatpared to any other spiritual energy, controlling the true spiritual energy is much easier for us as we have the true spiritual system present in our body.


    Controlling the dark spiritual energy or any other spiritual energy that does not contain true spiritual energy is very hard for us. Previously if you want any, how did I do that, then I send my spiritual energy inside the body of those dark humans and try to send the true spiritual energy present in the dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy.


    Even though those are our different types of spiritual energy, I think that every spiritual energy has something inmon. As I am very good at controlling the spiritual energy, I can since thatmon thing present in those other spiritual energies, and previously I tried to control that to extract the dark spiritual energy and the berserker spiritual energy.


    After reading all this process I can tell all of you are just trying to control the other spiritual energy by force using our true spiritual energy. Also by all of this process, I can tell you would be sessfully able to control those other spiritual energy but still the main thing missing from this process.


    None of you try to understand themon pattern present in all those spiritual energies, which is also the biggest reason that these techniques still have not finished."


    For 5 hours Sam only focused on the process and one by one he understood the meaning of those processes and the reason behind those processes. But all this time he notices that everyone is trying to forcefully control the other''s spiritual energy using their spiritual energy.


    Why did not try to find themon pattern present in those other spiritual energies that were also present in their spiritual energy? If they try to find thatmon pattern and try to control that then naturally they would be sessfully able to extract those spiritual energies much faster.


    So Sam begins to tell all of this to President and elder Jack who is present in the room. Both of them did not leave the room for 5 hours and gave Sam the time to understand the process.


    They be very serious when Sam begins to exin all of these and all this time they also feel that they be stupid to ignore the main thing that Sam pointed out. Even though every spiritual energy is different, still all of them have amon pattern present in them and that would be the main thing that they should focus on.


    Unfortunately, until now they only try to forcefully control those other spiritual energies using their true spiritual energy and that is the reason that they are only able to finish 90% of the process. The remaining 10% would be themon pattern present in those others'' spiritual energy.


    "Haha¡­ I knew it. Talking to you will most likely help us. Sigh, it looks like we are getting old and all of this tension makes us very stupid. This is the main fact we should think about before trying to create the technique but everyone just forgot about that.


    Sigh, from the start we just only focused on the force that would be created by true spiritual energy and which would be helpful to control the others'' spiritual energy. Naturally, we were not able to sessfully create the technique as we were missing the important factor and that would be themon pattern present in all the spiritual energy."


    Taking a deep breath the president exined all of this and instantly he looked at John and told him to tell everyone about this. Well, it is that nobody knows about themon pattern present in all the spiritual energy. But it is just that everybody from the first just thinks about how they would be able to control others'' spiritual energy using force and ignore the main factor.


    "Don''t me yourself. I can understand the pressure you and all the elders are currently facing. Most of all we already lost many of our Warriors who most likely turned into dark humans and you are also developing this technique to help those warriors to turn back into normal Warriors.


    Also it is my duty to help my people as I also did not want any Warriors to die who turn into the experiment of those Abyss humans."


    Sam said that. The president is facing huge pressure alongside the whole Warrior Association and that is the reason that everybodypletely ignores the main factor.

 Chapter 678 678 - The Common pattern

    Chapter 678  678 - The Common pattern


    Immediately all the elders came inside of the meeting room and if you look at the faces of those elders then you will notice that all of them have a speechless expression present on their faces. Like the president and all the other people, all the elders also forget about the main thing in this process and this is the reason that they are unable toplete the technique even though they almost finished 90% of the process.


    Not only all the elders but those other people who also helped them to create that technique realized the main fact. With this sometimeter you can see they came one second back to the first room where they focused on finding out the main problem with that technique.


    As they already find out what is missing from that technique they waste no time and quickly begin to think of thatmon pattern present in all the spiritual energy as that would be the main factor that also helps them to control the other spiritual energy if they enter the body of any Warrior.


    So basically you should understand that even if other spiritual energy enters the body of any Warrior, The Spiritual system would not immediately change and the true spiritual energy would be the main spiritual energy present in the body of that Warrior.


    In this matter, they naturally needed to depend on the spiritual system of the warrior to control every energy that would be forcefully entered the body of the warrior.


    Even if the dark spiritual energy and any other extra spiritual energy enter the body of the Warrior and have different properties present in them still they would be connected because of themon pattern present in them and all the Warriors needed to focus on thatmon pattern to control all the spiritual energy to extract.


    Unfortunately, even though it looks like an easy thing,pared to controlling the spiritual energy, finding out thatmon pattern and controlling thatmon pattern bes much harder for anyone if you do not have the Origin spiritual energy. Naturally, the origin spiritual energy has all the types of patterns as All The Spiritual energy is created from the origin spiritual energy.


    Fortunately, Sam was also present in that ce, and with the help of his spiritual energy, he would be able to help them find out themon pattern between the dark spiritual energy, the berserker spiritual energy, and the true spiritual energy.


    Not only did Sam need to find out thatmon pattern but he also needed to show everyone so that they could also understand themon pattern and use that to eliminate extra spiritual energy from the body of any Warrior. Also currently you can say they would be only focusing on dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy.


    Other than both of these spiritual energies, naturally they did not have any other information. As you know those Abyss humans only use both of these types and this is the reason that the whole Warrior Association wanted to focus on those spiritual energies.


    _______________________


    Currently, you can see two artifacts present in that room, and those two artifacts contain dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy. As no warrior has those spiritual energies, they need to use the artifact to store both of these types of spiritual energy.


    If you are wondering what those years are doing right now then they are sensing both of these types of spiritual energy using their spiritual energy and focusing on finding themon pattern. But finding thatmon pattern is very hard and this is the reason that even after 4 hours they are unable to find anything.


    On the other hand, Sam is also facing a problem that he cannot describe to anyone. His spiritual energy easily gets connected with dark spiritual energy and the berserker spiritual energy. It is 100% connected with his spiritual energy and that is the reason that he is trying his base to understand themon pattern.


    _____________________________


    "Sigh, really I don''t know how long it will take to understand thatmon pattern between those spiritual energies, and also looks like Sam is also facing trouble. Philip, what do you think about this matter?"


    "Andrew, actually we should have focused on this matter from the beginning but unfortunately as we forget about this earlier, we need to focus on that. But even though All The Spiritual energy has something present in it, finding it is very difficult for anyone as we only have a true spiritual energy system present inside our body.


    The good thing is that we have those storage artifacts to store The Spiritual energy and sending our true spiritual energy in those artifacts would mean sending hours of spiritual energy in dark spiritual energy and berserker spiritual energy.


    But as you can see the dark spiritual energy instantly consumes the true spiritual native while the berserker spiritual energy tries to destroy this true spiritual energy which enters the storage artifact."


    " Yea¡­ I am also feeling that but you also notice that for at least 5 to 6 seconds, the true spirit and ji did not get consumed and most likely in that 6 seconds something happened. This could be our spiritual energy getting connected with both of these spiritual energy for 6 seconds but then because of the different properties our spiritual energy gets destroyed or consumed.


    We needed to focus on finding that pattern in those 6 seconds before our true spiritual energy got consumed or destroyed. Unfortunately, the main problem is that 6 seconds isn''t enough for us to understand themon pattern.


    I hope at least Sam can tell us about themon pattern as previously he somehow connected with both of the spiritual energies and he was able to extract them easily."


    The president and Philip are currently looking at all the elders and Warriors present in that research room who are focusing on finding out themon pattern. Not just them, Sam is also present in that room and he is also trying to understand themon pattern.


    After 1 hourter all the elders and all the Warriors decided to rest as they got mentally exhausted. All this time they just transferred their spiritual energy and also all the time the mental energy got consumed so as you can see every warrior present in the research room needed the time to recover The lost mental energy.


    This process could go on for at least one month before they could understand themon pattern. Even though nobody wanted to rush as you know Sam did not want to stay for that long. This is the reason that he pushes himself hardpared to anyone else.


    The good thing is that he also gets a storage artifact that contains the true Spiritual energy and currently all these three spirits are connected fully with his origin spiritual energy. His spiritual energy did not get consumed or destroyed or any other reaction happening so he did not have that much problem and also this is the reason that he did not lose that much mental energy.


    While everyone rested, only three people were present in the research room. The good thing is that Sam did not have to do it as he did not feel that hungry and he could fully focus on the process. Themon pattern between all the Spiritual energy could be themon vibrational force or any other thing.


    Don''t know why but Sam has the feeling that he is already pretty close to understanding themon pattern and this is the reason that he is pushing himself. Naturally, he would not forcefully break his limit as that could also bring him side effects. Also, the president and Philip were present there and if they suddenly noticed abnormal spiritual fluctuation then they would immediately react.


    Both of them did not want anything to happen to Sam as they already knew what could happen if he forcefully broke his limit.


    _________________________


    Next day,


    Sam finally came back to the human Kingdom and wasting no time he came back to his room and already fell asleep. Yesterday he spent time in the research room to understand the pattern. Naturally, at first, he was not able to understand themon pattern even if all these three spiritual energies were 100% connected with the Origin spiritual energy.


    He also thought at least you needed 2 to 3 days to understand that pattern but something unexpected happened when he decided to take a rest and talk with those other Warriors who were also trying to understand themon pattern.


    One by one every one of them exins their findings and that is very helpful for Sam that finally, he is able to find out themon pattern. Wasting no time he informed everyone about that and with that his work in the headquarters waspleted.


    Even though the president and all the other Warriors told him to stay in the headquarters as with these new findings every one of those warriors will try to finish the technique, Sam decided toe back.

 Chapter 679: Chapter 679 - Success

    Finally, with the help of all the elders and all the Warriors present in the research room, they were able to finish theplete technique. Currently, everyone is resting and to finish the technique they almost exhaust their full mental energy.


    Naturally, even the president gets exhausted from helping in that process. So all of them are currently resting. On the other hand, Sam already went back to the human Kingdom and he is fully focused on his cultivation to liquefy The Spiritual energy.


    You already decided that two dayster he will go to the Oni Kingdom. Well, he could just go to Oni Kingdom tomorrow but the president already told him that tomorrow will be a celebration held in the headquarters because they were sessfully able to create the technique.


    Today the president will check the technique and only then you can tell if that technique is sessful or not. This is the reason that today they did not hold the celebration and decided to hold the celebration tomorrow. The president is also going to invite every one of those royal families to help in that process by sharing their knowledge.


    You have to say creating this technique isn''t easy for anyone but it is sessfully able to do that with the help of everyone and except those royal families and the Warriors of the Warrior Association nobody knows about the technique.


    The president already told everyone that they should not reveal any kind of information rted to this technique. If those Abyss humans get to hear about this through those traitors, something unexpected could ur and nobody wanted something like this to happen.


    There could be the chance that those dark humans or you can say those Warriors who turn into dark humans through the experiment suddenly teleport near any Kingdom and without giving any time the mastermind decided to explode those dark humans.


    A situation like this would be very dangerous as it would destroy the kingdom and also kill almost every citizen of that Kingdom alongside those Warriors who got kidnapped by the Abyss humans.


    Finally, every king and queen who knew about this matter could rx and fully focus on finding traitors of their kingdoms. Well, you cannot guarantee that every one of those kingdoms has Traitors but still everybody wanted to make sure that they didn''t have any Traitors.


    Also, the president already informs every king and queen about the sess. This is the reason that even in the human Kingdom you can say the human King has already been busy preparing the team that will be investigating the traitors.


    Not just only inside the kingdom but they will also observe the outside area of the kingdom so that if any traitors stay near or stay inside of the human Kingdom then they would get caught by the prepared team of Warriors.


    _______________________


    ''Sigh¡­ liquefying Spiritual Energy is very hard. Even though I am fully focusing on liquefying my spiritual energy, I am only able to liquefy 40% of my spiritual energy.


    Also, I cannot see any technique in the system shop which also helps me in this process. It also increases the time if I can find any technique rted to this in the system shop but unfortunately, I am unable to find anything.


    Also, I remember that I am a stupid person. Previously I could just easily buy techniques from my system shop rted to extracting energy but Ipletely forgot about this. But then again if I suddenly told everyone that I have a technique like this they would get suspicious about me so it is also a good thing.


    I just hope they are sessfully able to control the dark spiritual energy and the Berserker spiritual energy. Because I think that after the previous incident if those Abyss humans send those dark humans near any kingdom or on any battlefield then they would not give any Warrior the time to extract The Spiritual energy from the body of those dark humans through normal methods.


    Nowe to think of it, I alsopletely forgot to check in my system shop if I could find any teleportation symbol that would help me connect with the Abyss world.


    Normally Warriors are unable to go to the Abyss world as they do not have the dark spiritual energy while on the other hand, Abyss humans can do that because the dark spiritual energy has the property to absorb true spiritual energy.


    But I won''t be able to be present in Terraria all the time so even if I can connect the portal with the Abyss world, when I leave Terraria they won''t be able to connect the portal with the Abyss world. So if possible I should try to look for a technique that would help everyone even if they don''t have the dark spiritual energy to connect with the Abyss world.


    This surprised me. Who is this God who created that separate dimension for those Abyss humans? Even though the old human King previously told me that those demons created that separate dimension but don''t think even for a demon creating a separate dimension is easy.


    I already looked at the systems but did not find any technique rted to creating dimension even though I have the Origin spiritual energy. So who could be the demon who created that separate dimension? Could that demon be the demon God like the Oni God?''


    After 8 hourster Sam decided to eat something and he is now sitting in the dining room while thinking all of this. Maria and the others werepletely busy in their training so they did note to the kitchen. Only Sam is present in the dining room alongside two maids.


    Both of them were present there to serve the food to him. Suddenly in the dining room, a silent atmosphere was created as Sam waspletely busy in his thinking while both of the maids waited for the royal chefs to finish cooking.


    ______________________


    "Sam¡­. I already prepared the team of warriors who will be searching for those traitors. Also, I haveplete trust in those Warriors who got selected for this team as I thoroughly checked them and their activity and I am 100% sure that they aren''t rted to those Abyss humans.


    They will start searching tomorrow. Some of them will start searching inside the kingdom while some of them will start searching outside of the kingdom. On the other hand, I already appointed my shadow guards to search inside the Royal pce as we have many people in our royal guards so I needed to check everyone thoroughly.


    Even though all of them previously searched and we did not find anything, still I cannot give the guarantee that they did not have any kind of connection with the Abyss humans.


    Also impossible if you see any kind of suspicious movement in any of the people inside the Royal pce you should contact me immediately. Currently, the warrior association is already able to create the technique so the training of the Alpha team will be started and the process of selection will also start.


    I think that those kingdoms who did not have any kind of connection with the warrior association even though the Kingdom present in the Terraria most likely have a connection with Abyss humans."


    The human kingside that while taking a deep breath. Sam doesn''t know but previously most of the kings who had a connection with the Warrior Association already tried to contact those kingdoms that did not have any kind of connection with the Warrior Association.


    Unfortunately, those kingdomspletely closed themselves from the outside world so nobody could directly contact them and it looked like they also did not have any intention to join the warrior association.


    Naturally, those kingdoms did not get protected by the Warrior Association as they needed topletely depend on themselves. Naturally, even though many things or even the warrior association arepletely dissatisfied with these kingdoms, they cannot take action against them without any reason.


    So, not just human kings but many other Kings also think that those kingdoms could have established a connection with Abyss humans. Everyone just hoped with the creation of the Alpha team they would be able to discover any clue rted to this matter and that would be a reason for any Kingdom to take action against those kingdoms.


    Sam was listening to all of this but at the same time, he did not tell the human King that he also went to a Kingdom like this previously to search if those kingdoms had any kind of connection with the Abyss humans or not. He went to the kingdom where you can say people who have the habit of Drac.


    But you can say those are the hybrid between Drac and humans and they could walk around in the sun.


    They don''t have to drink blood from humans or anything like that but previously he did not find any connection with Abyss humans. But at the same time, he already finds two kingdoms that have a connection with Abyss humans. But after the war with the Human Kingdom and all the other kingdoms, it looks like those kingdoms also stopped that connection with Abyss humans.


    This was the reason that the Warrior Association did not take action previously but most likely they would take action right now. What if those are the kingdoms that provide those Abyss humans with that forbidden knowledge?

 Chapter 680: Chapter 680 - Coming back

    2 dayster,


    Finally, Sam teleports to the Oni Kingdom. As he had the authority to use the teleportation portal in the warrior association, he came to the Oni Kingdom.


    So many dayster finally he came back to that Kingdom from where he started his journey and from where he got that warrior ID card. After opening his eyes he looks at the surrounding area and he can see various people present in the teleportation room who are most likely in charge of watching over the teleportation portal.


    Most of them were Oni humans. The moment they noticed it was Sam every one of them had a happy smile present on their face. Instantly, everyone began to greet him. First of all, as you know, everyone in that Kingdom thinks of Sam as their Hero and on the other hand, all the people of the warrior association are already here about the achievement of Sam.


    Sam also talked to them with a happy smile on his face and with this came to the main hall of the warrior association. The moment he came to the main hall he could already see the crowded ce. Those Oni humans submitting the missions are taking new missions, etc.


    The ce is fully crowded and you can only find a few outsiders. Those people also took missions from the Warrior Association as they also wanted toplete the mission.


    Basically, everybody is busy with their work and that could be the reason that at first, nobody pays attention to Sam. Sam doesn''t mind that and he just walks toward the exit of the warrior association while two Warriors of the warrior association follow him.


    Suddenly a group of Oni humans came in front of him and already noticed him. Sam thought that they would not recognize him and we would just ignore him like everybody else. He was fully wrong about this as the moment those group of Warriors noticed him and most likely recognized him, they just looked at him with a speechless expression.


    Those Warriors could not believe that Sam was present in front of them but it did not take them that long toe back to their senses and instantly every one of them began to greet him. That most likely created themotion and all the other people present in that hall room also looked in that direction to see what happened and why suddenly that group of warriors began to greet that person.


    _________________________


    ''Sigh, it looks like nobody will forget me, and even though all this time I was traveling around the world everyone still remembers me. Traveling around The Kingdom would be much more difficult if most of the time they came to me like this.


    I should try to go to the Royal pce to meet the king and everyone and only then I should travel around the whole Kingdom. ''


    Sam wanted to travel the whole Kingdom once again so he came back to that Kingdom so many dayster. He wanted to see what kind of change happened all these days.


    Well, he did not directly teleport into the Royal pce and just walked toward the Royal pce. During this time many people recognize him and one by one also greet everyone and talk to them. Everyone who recognized him was very happy that Sam finally came back to their Kingdom.


    First of all, everybody in the Oni Kingdom knows that Sam is a warrior from their Kingdom, so you can say their Kingdom is the home of Sam. Now somee back to their home so this is the reason that everybody who recognized him became that much happy.


    Some new people do not recognize him but when they look at those other people they get surprised and begin to happily greet him and talk to him makes them startled. First of all, not many people know what Sam looks like. So even though they know Sam is the hero of their Kingdom still they do not recognize him.


    "Uncle, who is he? Why is everyone greeting him like this, like he is a VIP person? By looking at him I can say he is a human. I don''t think we would show this kind of reaction even if the royal family of the human Kingdom came to our Kingdom."


    One Oni human asked that to the old person beside him. He is new to the kingdom so he did not know anything about Sam and his achievement. The old man who is beside him who also has a happy smile on his face instantly stops smiling and looks at that person with a frown.


    "Are you familiar with our Kingdom? Most likely you just came to work with the man. This is the reason you don''t know anything. Even though he is a human you can say he belongs to our Kingdom and he is the hero of our Kingdom. So naturally he is very popr evenpared to the royal family of the human Kingdom and we love him very much."


    The old man said that with a smile and only then did the young man who was beside him understand who that human was. Sam on the other hand has already left that ce.


    _____________________


    Livia who was fighting with Emma suddenly stopped fighting as one maid came inside of the training room. First of all, if there isn''t any emergency, no maid will try to do anything like this, so this is the reason that both of them stop fighting to see what happens.


    "Princess, did you hear that our Hero finally came back? I got the report that he was alsoing toward the Royal pce."


    The maid said that with a smile on her face. Even she is happy that Sam finally came back. Livia at first did not understand what the maid was talking about but then she realized.


    The hero of the Oni Kingdom is Sam and by the smile on her face, Livia could easily tell that Sam finally came back and is currentlying to the Royal pce. Not just only her but even Emma who is also beside her was surprised and then began to smile.


    Both of them decided to end their sparing and decided to freshen up. The maid also told them that the royal shape had already begun to prepare a banquet for Sam and the king also told everyone to prepare themselves for the celebration. As after so many days Sam came back, this is the time to celebrate.


    _________________________


    After 6 hourster,


    Sam finally came to the Royal pce. He did not even have to wait outside of the gate as the guard present at the gate instantly opened the door the moment he noticed Sam. That guard had also already been informed by the king that Sam wasing.


    The moment came inside the Royal pce he was surprised because Emma and all the other people present there with smiles on their faces and it looked like they were preparing to wee him.


    This scene makes him very warm as even though he is very far away from his family he could say that he has a second family in this new who loves him this much.


    _______________________


    "Haha¡­ finally you came back. I also hear that you previously fought with Maria and her brother. Me and my brother also decided that we would fight with you. We also wanted to know our limit and how much we needed to improve to reach the limit of our Grade.


    Also impossible please tell me about all the adventures that you have all these days when you travel around the whole Terraria. You previously promised me that you would tell me everything when you came back to the Oni Kingdom.


    Also, can you tell me how many Abyss humans you have killed? Also if possible tell me about the weakness of those people as I got to know from my father that those people once again started to make their moves and I like to kill them."


    In the garden where the king prepared the celebration, you can see all the royal family alongside the old King present there, all of them enjoying the celebration. All the high officials and all themanders were also present in that celebration to wee Sam. Those people and their families also agreed with him one by one.


    For everyone to be able to talk to Sam is a very big matter as he also is a big person who is a powerhouse. He is the youngest person to reachary grade. So naturally everyone wants to make sure that they have some kind of connection with him and if possible they also want to invite him to their home for dinner.


    During all this time Livia did not leave his side and just asked him about his adventure and all those other questions.

 Chapter 681: Chapter 681 - Talking with the Old king

    ''Sigh¡­ I am fully tired. Who thought the king would arrange a big party like this to wee me? If I had known that earlier I would have stopped him from arranging a party like this. I thought I could cultivate at night but unfortunately it looks like I need to do my cultivation tomorrow.''


    Sam thought that as he was fully tired. At that celebration, you can say everyone wanted to talk to him and one by one came to him and talked about various things. Sam also could not ignore any of them as they wanted to talk to him so naturally he continuously talked with everyone.


    Suddenly he is present in his bedroom and wasting no time heys down on the bed. Naturally, he thought he was able to cultivate to liquify The Spiritual energy but looks like he won''t be able to do that as he is fully tired.


    _____________________


    Next day,


    Today Sam woke up earlier and already finished his basic exercise. Well, those basic exercises became his habit that he would always do in the morning. Only after that, he will eat his breakfast and then focus on his cultivation or any other work.


    The king, queen, and everyone were also present in the dining room. The maids of the Royal pce served the food while everyone enjoyed the food prepared by the Royal chefs.


    "Sam¡­ I wanted to ask you if you are free today. As I told you, me and my brother also wanted to fight with you to get to know about our limit. I hear that after fighting with you Maria has understood the gap and also she has improved very much."


    During that time when they are eating suddenly Livia is extremely uncertain if she and her brother can fight or not. Sam previously wanted to reject that idea but then he agreed with them. She is also his friend and previously even the king also asked him if he could fight with all of them.


    So with that Sam agreed to fight. Not just only The Princess and the prince but even Emma was also eager to fight him.


    ''Sigh, it looks like I also won''t be able to focus on my cultivation today. Well, I could do that from tomorrow as for a few days I am just busy with my cultivation. Before going back to my I should enjoy my time here as I don''t know how long it will take me toe back here.''


    This is the reason that he also agreed to fight with them and with that, it was decided that after they finish breakfast they will fight with Sam. The king instantly told one of the shadow guards to prepare the training ground for the fight and also told the medical team to be prepared.


    Sam is only going to use his full power against anyone but still, they need to prepare the medical team. First of all, Livia and the others will be using their full power against him, so even if Sam did not get injured, they could get injured.


    __________________________


    "Old man¡­ after a few days I will be requesting you to use the world bridge as I wanted to go to a. Most likely you already predicted that I came from a different and that was the reason that previously I did not have a warrior ID card.


    Also, this is the reason that previously I did not tell you the whole truth about me as I came from a different and at that time I was quite cautious.


    My Eden Blue is facing a danger that will be enough to destroy the whole. Currently, everything is normal because the core of the still does not appear on the surface area. But most likely you already know from the report that many people from variouss are already present on my and waiting for the core to appear on the surface.


    I need to protect my from those people as nobody would have enough power to protect them. I am grateful to you as you previously gave me all that information. That information is very helpful for me to understand my enemies.


    I previously really didn''t know the significance of the core of a but I understand it right now. Naturallypared to Terraria where anybody could get true spiritual energy, people with normal spiritual energy will have a hard time breaking through the barrier to reach theary grade.


    Also, I will be telling you how I came here but I will tell you and the king at once so you just need to wait. If possible after finishing my fight I would like to talk to you about this.


    Currently, I am here because I need some help from you. Is there any technique you have that could increase the process to liquefy the Spiritual energy?"


    Sam after finishing breakfast came to the room where the old king was cultivating to increase his power. Naturally most of the time nobody would disturb him but as Sam just came back, he had permission to visit him.


    Sam, after finishing breakfast, came to the old king to tell him that he needed to prepare the world bridge as Sam would be using that a few dayster. Not only that he also wanted to ask the old King if he had any technique that could increase the process to liquefy The Spiritual energy or not.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry my child I already predicted something like this when previously we asked you about your origin. I can also feel at that time that even though you are telling us the truth you did not tell us the whole truth.


    Don''t worry about all of this and also I am interested to know how you came here without using the World Bridge. At that time, to use the World Bridge you did not have the capability. If you used that you could get seriously injured or even be dead.


    Also, I am sorry to say this but to liquefy the spiritual energy you need topletely depend on yourself as nobody has any kind of talking like this. Also don''t worry because in the process of liquifying The Spiritual energy, you notice the importance of liquefying spiritual energy.


    Also, this makes me surprised that you came here from Eden Blue. That is the that recently awakened The Spiritual energy and right now this is facing a very critical situation. If you need any help then tell me as I will help you in this critical situation.


    I already read the report about this and I already know that many people from differents are already present on your and are just waiting for the core of the to appear on the surface area. Your is very close to breaking through and if it is sessfully able to do that then a new power level would be added to your.


    Unfortunately, as I told you earlier when the''s core came to the surface area the restriction over your whole would vanish and that would be a dangerous situation for your whole. Many people from variouss will try to get that''s core.


    That would even make an Elite-grade Warrior reachary grade instantly. But I think you already know the side effect of this as those people who would reachary grade like this are only able to use the power of domain as they won''t be able to awaken the hidden property present in their spiritual energy which would be held by them to liquefy the spiritual energy."


    The old king said all of this. Well, Sam already expected this so he did not get surprised but you have to say thest information surprised him as he did not know about this. Those people who forcefully break through toary grade like this won''t be able to use the power of a domain.


    So even if anybody attacked his during the time who also already reached theary grade through this kind of process he did not have to worry about those people. First of all, you should understand the power of domain is an overpowering thing that anyary-grade Warrior has.


    If you put 10 intermediateary grade Warriors who are unable to use the power of domain and put a warrior who can use the power of domain but is an earlyary grade Warrior, then those 10 Warriors will have a very hard time against that one person.


    With this, you can realize how overpowering the power of Domain is. Naturally Sam before going back to his wanted to achieve That Power of Domain and want to use that as his advantage against those many people who try to attack his for the core.

 Chapter 682: Chapter 682 - The Pressure

    Next day,


    Yesterday as Sam expected he did not get to cultivate as he was fully exhausted after fighting Livia, the Prince, and Emma. All three of them use their full power to fight with him so that they also have a better understanding of their power.


    After the fight, Sam also helped them to understand how much they were far away from the limit of their grade. He also told them why they were unable to reach the limit of their grade that quickly. He also told them how they would feel when they truly reached the limit.


    This would be very helpful for all of them, not just the three of them but even for the king and everyone present in the training ground to get to understand that.


    First of all, everyone gets to understand that any Warrior who would be able to reach the limit of their grade would be much more powerful when he breaks through to the next grade. Not only that with these, that person also has much more power to break the barrier that prevents all the warriors from advancing to the upper grade.


    Well, Sam did not tell them everything as he wanted them to find out what would be the benefit when they would sessfully reach the limit. On the other hand, after going back to the Royal pce he also provides three of them with their basic status as it will also be helpful for them.


    Today he already told everyone that he would be busy so nobody would disturb him. Even though he wanted to spend his time with everyone before going back to his, as you know he had the important thing to do and that is to unlock the power of the domain.


    Unfortunately, no technique would help him to liquefy The Spiritual energy more quickly. This is the reason that it is taking him that much time but still if he looks at the report of those other Warriors then he would feel he is very fastpared to anyone. That is also happening because of his Origin spiritual energy.


    From early in the morning Sam went into seclusion. Nobody would disturb him at this time as even the king told everyone not to disturb him as he would be doing something very important. Even though the king and even the old King wanted to help him unfortunately they wouldn''t be able to help him as Sam needed to depend on himself too.


    Sam right now controls that additional energy present in his body and that energy is used as a filter where The Spiritual energy turns into a liquid state. The process is very slow but he also needed to maintain his Full focus all the time. Sam is currently in his inner world and looking at the liquid core.


    Fortunately, 60% liquid spiritual energy is already present in that liquid core. Without wasting a single second if he only focused on his cultivation then he would be able to liquify 9 to 10% of his spiritual energy.


    Sam did not know but if any other Warrior got to know about these then they would immediately be very shocked for those Warriors in one day even if they cultivated for 24 hours they would only be able to liquify 4 to 5% of their spiritual energy.


    During all this time Sam also observed that liquified spiritual energy contains more powerpared to his Originspiritual energy. Unfortunately, the human King previously told him that he wouldn''t be able to use the power of that liquified spiritual energy. You wanted to know what is the difference between normal spiritual energy and liquid spiritual energy.


    One important thing he also notices is that the more he liquefies The Spiritual energy the more his inner world gets stronger. He also feels a strong connection with his inner world that he did not previously feel. Previously to enter his inner world he needed to wait for the prevention barrier to be created.


    But currently, he could enter the inner world easily and his inner world is getting bigger and bigger, and many more things are also appearing in his inner world. Everything inside of his inner world would be under his control so if he wanted an Ind in that in our world it would immediately appear.


    But that thing would need to liquefy spiritual energy. Also, the second important thing is that he tries to feel what kind of specialty his inner world has, but it looks like until he fills the core 100%, he won''t be able to feel that.


    All this time Sam did not know but if anybody came near to his room then that person would immediately feel pressure. That isn''t your normal spiritual pressure or your bloodline pressure. It is apletely different pressure that could be more dangerouspared to bloodline pressure or spiritual pressure.


    Fortunately, the king already predicted something like this could happen so he did not let anyone approach his room and also the old king suppressed that pressure. On the other hand, if anybody came inside of the room and saw Sam then they would immediately notice his whole body glowing right now.


    This is also an effect of the liquified spiritual energy but Sam did not know anything about this as he wouldn''t feel anything different until he did notplete The Spiritual core. But when he would do that he would feel the benefit of that liquified spiritual core.


    Came back to Sam, 15 hourster he decided to stop as he felt mentally exhausted. Even though he could continue, he wanted to rest for some time before continuing to do that. Already he is able to liquify 8% of spiritual energy.


    ''Sigh, I also wanted to go to the danger zone to fight with those Monsters but before I go to the danger zone I wanted to unlock my power of domain. As even the old man previously told me, this power of domain would be very beneficial for me if I wanted to fight those people from other worlds and that prime Dragon.


    First of all, a''s core appearing on the surface area is a very rare thing. So I don''t think there are many people who can reachary grade or even if there are any people present who reach that grade or not. But even with that, those people can destroy my as I don''t think anybody would be able to fight them.


    The limit of my did not even reach the peak Elite grade. So this would be hard for anyone but I hope those prime humans or those Warriors from ours could be able to help us.''


    Sam thinks about all of these while he is resting. Well, he still worried about his as he did not know if those people from other worlds would stay silent or not. What if they decided to attack the whole to control the whole before the''s core appeared?


    Even though until now nothing like that happened he still worried about this. Also, the main thing is that he did not trust those prime humans. First of all, there are many humans present on Earth and the Saints from Eden Blue are only able to contact some people from a Kingdom.


    So he isn''t sure if those people would help them in critical condition or not even though he got to know warriors from his went to the earth to help them. Just thinking about all of these makes him more worried. But he believes in all the people of his, he believes in every saint, his family, friends, and his teacher.


    _________________________


    "Father, what is Sam doing in his room? Early in the morning suddenly I feel a pressure that almost makes me unconscious. That ispletely different from the spiritual pressure that we use in our battle. That pressure feels much more dangerous and much more dangerous to me."


    Livia asks that to her father. Naturally, she did not know anything about the liquified spiritual energy or did not have that much knowledge about the domain so she became curious to know what was happening with Sam.


    " Don''t worry Sam is now trying to unlock the power of domain and this is the reason that pressure like this would appear from his room. Actually, during all this time he also did not have control over that pressure. Only when he would be able to unlock the power of the domain he would have full control over that pressure.


    You are right that pressure is more densepared to our spiritual pressure and more dangerous. If you use that pressure on any enemy then you can easily kill that enemy if that person did not counterattack using his pressure. It would immediately affect the spiritual system of your enemy and that would be enough to deal with your enemy. "

 Chapter 683: Chapter 683 - Inside the danger zone

    2 dayster,


    Livia and Emma will be going inside the Dungeon alongside some Royal guards. Even though the Oni king and the Warrior association appointed some Warriors inside the danger zone to watch over the whole danger zone, still, he still did not want to put his daughter at any kind of risk.


    This is the reason that he is sending those Royal guards who will be acting as the shadow guards and will only appear when the lives of Livia or Emma are in danger.


    The Oni king also considers Emma as his daughter so naturally he is very careful about their safety. Livia and Emma already leave the Royal pce and go toward the warrior association to meet up with her team. As you know Livia has a team who all the time went inside of the dangerous zone with her.


    Emma even though going with them not all the time will be present with Livia. She also wants to reach the limit of her grade and to do that she needs to fight those powerful Monsters. To do this naturally won''t be able to stay with Livia all the time.


    Unfortunately, she did not have any team like Livia. Most of the time she would go inside the danger zone alone or alongside Livia''s team. Fortunately, she did not have to worry about the safety of Livia. The Oni king already told her that he will be appointed shadowguard to protect Livia, so Emma can also focus on fighting those powerful Monsters.


    Sometimeter they already came to the warrior association and they already met their other teammates. Livia as the leader already went in front of the mission board to select a mission. Even though she wanted to focus on hunting Monsters to get more spirit crystals and more loot, she wanted to see if she could find any interesting missions or not.


    ''I have full confidence in you and your judgment. As you know, currently the whole of Terraria is worried about those Abyss humans and their spies who could be staying inside of our kingdom or in the danger zone.


    I know that you have full confidence in your team but still, I wanted you to be careful around them and try to see if you could find any kind of suspicious movement among them or not. Currently, the situation already puts us in a tough situation where we cannot trust anyone.


    Also, as you know, those Abyss humans can use forbidden mind control symbols to control the minds of warriors, so this is the reason that I wanted you to be very careful around your teammates. Not only that if you find any kind of suspicious movement immediately contact me or contact the Warrior Association.


    Also, the thing you did not know is that previously while reading the mind of the mastermind who was behind the incident in the Viet kingdom, the president talked about a surprising thing.


    Most of the time those abyss humans will try to sacrifice the life of warriors from the royal family. Every member of the royal family would have something specialpared to any other Warriors and that was the reason that previously you also get attacked by those abyss humans.


    Sister Emma won''t be able to stay with you all the time as she also wants to focus on fighting those powerful monsters so that she can also reach the limit like your brother, you need to stay extra careful.''


    Livia, while selecting the mission, remembers all the words that the Oni king says to her before she leaves the Royal pce. She knows that her father just wanted to make sure that everyone from her team did not have any kind of connection with those abyss humans.


    Some Warriors contact those Abyss humans on their own but some of them be the spy of those Abyss humans because of those kinds of mind control techniques.


    Naturally, Livia won''t tell any of her teammates about this as this could also create some problems among them. Also if any traitors present among them that person would be very alert and that could be risky for everyone.


    Livia finally came back to her senses and then began to look at the mission board very carefully to see if he found any kind of interesting mission or not. At first when she did not find anything she decided to tell her teammates about this but before she could tell her teammates, she found an interesting mission.


    The mission is to collect the blood of the fire horse, the bone of the steel tiger, and the White Apples. Now this is an interesting mission and she decided to ept the mission. Sometimeter the receptionist already registered her team for the mission and with that, every one of them was ready to go to the danger zone.


    Emma did not ept any kind of mission this time as she only wanted to fight those peak Epic grade Monsters and wanted to collect as many resources as she could. After fighting with Sam she has a better understanding of her strength and the limit that she needs to achieve to reach the proper limit of that grade.


    But at the same time, she was also very careful and observed Livia''s teammates from the start. Like Livia, she also gets worn by the Oni king. The Oni king naturally wanted her second daughter to stay saved inside the Dungeon and if she also found any kind of suspicious moment, she immediately contacted him or the warrior association and did not do anything reckless.


    Even though the Oni king told her about the shadow guards who would be protecting Livia, the Oni king did not tell her that he would appoint other shadow guards to protect Emma. First of all, if she gets to know about these then she would immediately reject that Idea, and also with this she won''t be able to focus on her fight.


    From childhood, Emma did not want to take advantage of the royal family which adopted her. She always thinks that she should not use those kinds of advantages as she does not belong to the royal family. This is the reason the Oni king did not tell her anything.


    _______________________


    "I hear that hero Sam has alreadye back and he has already gone into seclusion. Did you know why I suddenly went into seclusion? It would be good if he also came inside the danger zone with us as this could be very helpful for us and we could go deeper inside of the danger zone."


    " Yes¡­ it has been so many days since we talked to him. I still remember the first meeting with him. That time we did not think that he would be able to achieve something like this in just one year. Not only that he is also able to achieve so many things. I wanted to be someone like this."


    All the teammates of Livia are currently talking about Sam and every one of them is already Livia if she knows why Sam went into seclusion. They previously thought Sam would alsoe with them inside the danger zone as previously he did and with his help, they were able to go deeper.


    " Father told me Sam is focusing on stabilizing his strength as he just recently broke through. Also even if he came with us, I don''t think we should go deep inside of the danger zone as that would be very dangerous for us.


    If we go deep inside of the danger zone with Sam then it could also increase the burden to him. This is the reason that I didn''t even ask sister Emma to bring us deeper inside the danger zone.


    If we do that then sister Emma or Sam would need to focus on fighting those Monsters alongside ensuring our safety from those Monsters. That would have an early effect on their fighting and the situation could have be very dangerous if many more Monsters decided to attack at once."


    Livia told them that even if Sam came with them she did not think going deeper inside the Danger zone would be a good idea. If she did that then it would just increase the burden on Sam or sister Emma and that is the reason that she did not even ask sister Emma about this.


    Emma all this time did not say anything but by her expression, she also agreed with Livia. As you know the danger zone is a very dangerous ce where anything could happen anytime. There are many Warriors who want to challenge themselves while fighting more dangerous Monsters. Those things would be very reckless as he too just increases the danger.


    After hearing all of these naturally all teammates of Livia also understand they aren''t ready to go deeper inside of the danger zone. If they really wanted to do that, it  just increase the burden of Emma and Sam, and their life could be in danger.

 Chapter 684: Chapter 684 - Fighting Monsters

    Livia and her teammates already came inside the inner area and were already fighting Monsters in that area. They already found some snake Monsters but those monsters were only Early Elite grade. This is the reason that they did not have any problem killing them even though currently they were facing almost 25 of those poisonous snake Monsters.


    But still, you can say they are very careful about the poison of those Monsters. Even though those Monsters are weakpared to them, steel poison could harm them.


    If you are wondering why they fight those weak monsters then the Monsters is the leader of that group, an intermediate Elite grade monster. They wanted to kill that Monster so they fought those Minions as the main Monster hiding right now.


    Suddenly a message poison ball came toward them but fortunately, a teammate of Livia created the barrier instantly to protect them from that poisonous attack. The moment that poisonous ball hit that barrier it instantly exploded and the whole area got filled with poison.


    Fortunately, they can create that spiritual barrier in time or they would get affected by the poison. On the other hand, they already saw that Boss Monsters already appeared in front of them and that Monster was preparing for the second attack.


    Unfortunately even with that Monster won''t be able to break that spiritual barrier as the power of that spiritual barrier already reached the peak Elite grade. On the other hand, Livia''s team is already preparing their attack. Even though they cannot get outside of the spiritual barrier, they could attack Monsters from inside of The Spiritual barrier.


    Before Monster could finish the second attack they already finished their attack and instantly Monster got attacked by various attacks. Thunderbolt, Messi FireBall, Destruction Ray, etc.


    This type of attack could be used even if you are inside the spiritual barrier. Finally, the Boss Monster gets killed and all the Minions also get killed in that process. Livia and others just needed to wait for some time for that poison to disappear.


    They never wanted to hunt Monsters this week but those Monsters attacked them earlier and this is the reason that they decided to hand that Boss monster alongside the Minions. Sometimeter after picking up all the loot, they begin to advance as they want to find those peak Epic grade monsters.


    It already takes them three days to get to that ce even though they use their full speed. Unfortunately, they were unable to use their full speed continuously as they wanted to save their energy to fight any kind of Monster.


    As you know inside the dangerous zone you can find many Monsters who have more speedpared to you so you need to be ready for anything like this. Not only that, all of them also wanted to find those Monsters toplete the mission.


    It is a good thing that they have already gotten used to that ce and they already know in which ce they will find those loots. The good thing is that the mission needs to bepleted in one month and they have enough time to spend inside of the danger zone.


    Livia and her teammates came inside the danger zone to fight as many Monsters as they could as they wanted to increase their experience and wanted to see if they would be able to handle those Monsters easily or not.


    Previously Sam told Livia those Monsters who peak grade could have stat which already reach the limit for the grade. This is the reason that Livia wanted to find a monster like this and wanted to fight that Monster to understand the gap or to understand the power of reaching the limit.


    Emma already went deep inside the danger zone to fight peak Epic grade Monsters. Even though she is worried about the safety of Livia and her teammates, she also knows that not all the time she would be able to present with her to protect her. Also, she needed to increase her power to reach the limit, and only then would she have a greater chance to break through.


    ____________________


    Suddenly two teammates of Livia created a massive firewall and a tornado to attack the monster that had already attacked them.


    Suddenly they''re fighting a group of monsters who already have the power of peak Elite grade. They surrounded them from all directions and while Livia and the others focused on those Monsters from other directions, both of them focused on these directions and they already noticed those 5 Monsters who already attacked them.


    Fortunately, they were able to react quickly and were able to counter the attack of those Monsters but you can still see the power of the attack of these monsters. This is the reason they already prepared more attacks that were able to fully counter that attack of those Monsters.


    But it did not happen as they suddenly felt the vibration from beneath their feet and wasting no time both of them instantly jumped in the sky. Fortunately, in the next second, a veryrge mouth appeared in the area where they were standing.


    This monster is called a big mouth. It is like an insect Monster that has a big mouth and travels underground. The most dangerous thing is that if you aren''t able to feel the vibration then you could be in a very dangerous situation. Those Monsters also have the power to paralyze their enemy.


    That attack is based on the poison element which travels through the vibration force of the ground and if any enemy gets affected directly by that vibration force they would immediately paralyze for 5 seconds to 10 seconds.


    Both of them already know about that Monster so they already jump into the sky and prepare their attack. It did not even take them a second to prepare the attack and they already attacked that monster. Fortunately, they were able to react on time as they had already level 2 injured that monster seriously.


    Unfortunately, this is sessfully unable to kill that Monster as the Monsters already hide themselves in the underground. Both of themnded on the ground but in the next second, they once again got to dodge as this time they got attacked in their left direction by different kinds of Monsters.


    Some time ago, a fight was going on between those Monsters but suddenly those Monsters got attacked by Livia and her teammates and this is the reason that various types of Monsters attacked them at once. But none of them worried about the situation as they already killed most of those Monsters and only 25 Monsters remained in that ce.


    In those 25 Monsters, they already kill 12 of those Monsters. While 5 of them got seriously injured. Livia at this time suddenly created the Fire zone area which instantly began to affect those to Bull Monster which has the element to control the wind.


    Those Monsters can control the wind. Their


    The most powerful attack would be the de tornado but fortunately both the monsters got seriously injured while the other of them got killed by Livia. Only two of them are remaining which is the advantage Livia has at this moment.


    ''Sigh, after fighting these Monsters I could tell none of them reach the limit of the grade and this is the reason I can kill them very easily. Even though they are also peak Elite grade monsters, I am more powerful than them and this is the reason that I have the advantage.''


    Fighting those Monsters, Livia gets disappointed because none of those Monsters can reach the limit of their grade and they are even weakpared to her.


    Both the Bull Monsters tried to create the tornado but she did not give them the chance and instantly burned them by turning the whole ce into a me zone. A massive fire pir appeared in that ce which instantly bore both of the Monsters before they could create a tornado.


    On the other hand had teammates even though did not have the advantage like her but still every one of them worked as a team while killing those other Monsters. The good thing is that everyone fights a group of Monsters which is also beneficial for them.


    First of all, fighting Monsters and observing their various tactics any Warrior would have a better understanding of those Monsters and they would also have a better understanding of their power.


    Not only that after killing both of the Monsters Livia did not instantly join the fight of her teammates. She is observing her teammates. She wanted to make sure that none of them had any kind of connection with the Abyss humans. Even though she had full confidence in her teammates, she still wanted to make sure everything was okay.


    Livia uses the spiritual vision to find out if any of them have any kind of technique that releases dark spiritual energy or something like that, which should be enough proof. Fortunately, she did not find anything like that and she can also tell she did not need to help her teammates to deal with those Monsters.

 Chapter 685: Chapter 685 - Golden eye cat

    2 dayster,


    Livia and her teammates are already able to collect everything that is required for the mission. In these 2 days they search for those things in the danger zone and after collecting all of these they begin to focus on fighting.


    Unfortunately they were unable to find thest thing that would be required to finish the mission. To collect the golden eyes they need to hunt the Golden eye cats. Those Monsters have the same size as your normal cat and they would onlye out from their hiding ce at night.


    Compared to a new Warrior those Monsters have more agility and you can say they already reach the limit of peak Elite grade in agility. Not only that, those Monsters also have the element to control the light element.


    With this hunting those monsters isn''t easy and they could also hide themselves very carefully. That would be tough work for any Warrior to find those Monsters. Even though Livia and her teammates search almost the whole danger zone where they could find those Monsters, they are unable to find them.


    Fortunately they have enough time to find those Monsters and this is the reason that none of them get worried about this. For all day they fight peak Elite grade monsters and many of those Monsters have one stats reach the limit. Livia and her teammates also try to fight monsters 1 versus 1 but in that fight they realize they are having a very hard time.


    Fortunately everyone uses the potions to recover their spiritual energy and health. With this they are finally able to kill those Monsters. First of allpared to any Warriors those monsters would have much more powerful regeneration technique but even with that they are unable to recover their spiritual energy that faster and this is the reason that Warrior has the advantage.


    After the fight everybody already realized how important it is for them to reach the limit. Most of the time Warriors will fight those types of Monsters in groups and that would be the reason that they previously did not notice that much of a gap between them and those Monsters who truly reach the limit. But if they fight those Monsters in one version one match then they would understand the gap.


    Back to main matter,


    It is already night time and everybody is recovering their spiritual energy and health without using the potions. This takes them sometime but fortunately almost everyone of them is able to recover 80% of their spiritual energy and health. At this time Livia is discussing those Golden eye cats.


    "We searched almost all the areas where we could find these Monsters but it looks like those Monsters be more careful and even around night time that did note out. Even though they have the advantage because of the night time where they could easily hide themselves but even using our spiritual vision we are unable to find them.


    Most likely, those monsters came out if we searched them in groups. But if we search them individually then it would be very risky for us as I am definitely sure that those Monsters have one stat which already reaches the limit.


    So I already decided that everyone is a team of three people and divided into two teams. Kenny will join the team of Tina while I, Kion and Millen would create a team as you know we just have two more ces where we could search for those Monsters and even if we did not find anything that means those Monsters already changed their previous hiding ces.


    Also everybody should already prepare their life detection device as it would be very helpful for us to search any Monster who would be near us. At night time as you know those Monsters would be more wild and many monsters who had the advantage would try to attack us.


    This is the reason that I want everyone to be careful. Don''t be reckless while searching for those Monsters as you can get attacked by other Monsters suddenly if you did not pay attention to your surrounding area.


    Also almost be ready to use your spiritual vision as it will also work as the night vision. Not only that, as you know there are many monsters who could control the nt or there are many monsters who could attack you through the ground, so everybody needs to be careful about them."


    Livia finishes the meeting and she has already decided to divide her whole team into two teams and both of the teams will go in different directions. Actually she thinks that those monsters previously did note because of the number of warriors.


    As you know those Monsters also have the monster instincts that would alert them if they got attacked by powerful Warriors or enemies. So even though Livia and her teammates did not reach the limit of the peak Elite grade, if they really encounter those monsters then it would be easy for them to handle them.


    Even though those Monsters have the advantage in agility and in light control they have weak defense. So if somehow they got attacked by any of them it would be very dangerous for them. This is the reason that Livia thinks those monsters did note out as they realize the danger.


    Back to the main matter, nobody had any problem with the arrangement and also Kion and Millen did not have problem with the arrangement of Livia. First of all they have full confidence in their captain and also in themselves so even if they encounter a group of Golden eye cats they could kill them.


    With this sometimeter after recovering the full spiritual team divided into two teams and then went into different directions. But during the time when they were searching for those Monsters they also needed to be careful about other Monsters.


    First of all, in the night time many dangerous monsters woulde out from their hiding ce and those Monsters would have much more advantage in the night time.


    Fortunately all of them had the life detection device and they were already using that to search for the Monsters who were near them. As you know the advantage of that device is that they can observe almost 10 km of area around them, and they immediately get alert if any powerful Monsteres near that area.


    Livia and the team did not even take that long when they already found some Monsters who were 5 km away from the location. Fortunately they were only able to find three of those Monsters. So wasting no time they quickly use the movement technique to approach that ce while almost trying to make no sound.


    During all this time naturally they also looked at the life detection device to ensure that those monsters did not have any kind of backup. After getting sure about this they wasted no time to finally use their attack to kill those Monsters wasting no time.


    ____________________


    "Guys, be careful. I am already able to see 25 Monsters 7 km away from our location. Not only that, those Monsters quickly change their ce. It looks like those Monsters have an advantage in their agility. I am not sure if those Monsters are the Golden eye or not but we need to make sure that we did not be reckless while fighting them.


    We will approach that ce slowly while everyone of you will prepare your strongest attack. We need to kill as many as we can at once. This will also give us the advantage to injure those other Monsters."


    Livia, almost around 2:00 a.m., is able to find 25 Monsters who are only 7 km away from the location. Fortunately they are unable to find any other Monsters and with these they can be sure that those Monsters did not have any other backup.


    The good thing about this life direction device is that it could even detect The Monster who travels through the underground. But unfortunately for any Warriors it would be hard to understand if that Monster is present in the surface area or underground.


    Livia and her teammates approach that ce very slowly so that they createce noise and also they are already preparing their most powerful attack. Not only that they are also trying to control The Spiritual fluctuation by controlling that spiritual fluctuation using their spiritual control technique.


    Every time any Warrior or any Monster uses any kind of technique or skill they would create spiritual fluctuation. Which would be enough to alert any Monster or any enemy. This is the reason they are also trying to control the spiritual fluctuation so those monsters did not escape or attack them.


    Like this after sometimeter they finally came close to those Monsters and it looked like they were able in to control the spiritual fluctuation to minimum level. Even though those Monsters already feel The Spiritual fluctuation but they could feel The Spiritual fluctuation are very far away from them so they did not try to go toward that direction.

 Chapter 686: Chapter 686 - Danger approaching

    After getting close to that ce Livia and her teammates are finally able to notice those Monsters using their spiritual fission and they be happy as they could show those Golden eyes cats in front of them. It looks like Livia''s strategy was right.


    Because even though those Monsters notice The Spiritual fluctuation, they did not think it would be closed to them as they could feel the spiritual fluctuation very light and most likely the source of The Spiritual fluctuation very far away from them.


    One thing you should know about those Monsters is that they did not pick up fights with any other Monsters or any Warrior on their own. Those Monsters would only try to attack any Warriors if a Warrior or that group of Warriors try to attack them first.


    Livia and her teammates already prepare their most powerful attack and they are just waiting for the order of their captain to attack those Monsters. Livia did not recklessly attack those Monsters as she wanted to wait for the right time to attack them.


    Naturally at this time they did not notice the life detection device. If they notice that device then they would notice a very important thing. Everyone focuses on those Golden eye cats and after some time waiting in that ce Livia finally gets the perfect chance to attack them.


    Three of them instantly use their most powerful attack on those Monsters and as those Monsters did not pay attention toward them, they are unable to react on time when they finally notice those attacks which have alreadye very close to them.


    Three of them did not attack in the same direction as it would be useless for them to attack in the same direction. First of all, those Monsters have weak defenses even though they are very fast.


    Instantly 3 big explosions appeared in that ce and ayer of smoke also got created in that ce. Three of them did not stop there as they were already using the spiritual vision to see if they were finally able to kill some Monster or not.


    Naturally they also believe that they won''t be able to kill those 25 Monsters at once as even if they attack them suddenly without giving them the time to react, those Monsters have fast reaction speed which would help them to escape.


    All of them are right. They were not able to kill those 25 Monsters at once even though they managed to injure all of them because of the impact. Actually those 25 Monsters when they notice those powerful attacks which get very close to them, first of all they created ayer of barrier around their skin using the light element and after that they use their full speed to escape from that ce.


    Even though few of them were able to escape, they still were not able to escape from the impact of those explosions which also contain The Spiritual energy and that would be enough to injure them.


    Livia and her teammates already know about these and this is the reason that they are already using their movement speed to go toward different directions. They wanted to finish those Monsters who somehow to escape without giving them the time to fully escape from that ce.


    First of all, if those Monsters get very far away from them, then nobody would give them the guarantee that they would be able to find them. This is the reason that they waste no time when they notice some Monsters who are able to escape, getting chased by them.


    But don''t think those Monsters would not attack their enemies even if they got seriously injured. Instantly you can see many light Spears appear in the sky and not only that manyser beams also shoot towards their direction.


    Fortunately, all of them prepared for this kind of situation and they already created the spiritual shield in front of them, not only that they also used to attack.


    Livia once again created the fire zone and this time she created that zone 1 km away from her direction. There you can see two Monsters who are already looking toward higher direction and using theser beam. Fortunately she already created the spiritual barrier and not only that using the fire zone she created a Wall of fire around that ce.


    After creating the war fire in that whole ce she instantly began to feel that ce on fire. On the other hand her two teammates also begin to use their long range attacks in full power dodging the attack of those Monsters. Naturally dodging all those attacks wasn''t possible for anyone but still because of the spiritual barrier and their armor they did not receive that much injury.


    Finally after 10 minutester you can see all those 25 Monsters got killed and Livia and her teammates finally can focus on collecting those loot.


    "We need to look for others as we don''t know if they will find Golden eye cats or not. Not only that, we need to make sure that while they are fighting other Monsters they do not get attacked by more Monsters. let''s go,"


    Livia decided to go toward that other direction where her second team went to find those Golden eye cats. Actually they are fully sure  that they won''t be able to find any other goldeneye cats in that ce.


    First of all, previously a very powerful spiritual fluctuation was created in that ce because of those attacks and even if other Goldeneye cats stayed near that ce they would immediately escape.


    Sometimeter,


    Livia and her teammates are already getting close to their second team who most likely still did not find those Golden eye gets or did not attack them. If you are wondering why then it is because when Livia and the others were going toward that ce they did not sense any huge spiritual fluctuation which would appear if her second team really found those Monsters or attacked them.


    Unaware to anyone two very powerful monsters who are already able to break through to early epic grade already cross the border which divides the area of those Elite grade monsters and those Epic grade monsters.


    Even though there isn''t any powerful barrier present in that area, normally Warriors who didn''t reach Epic grade would try to go toward that ce. Also if you are wondering the property of the barrier then naturally it is to prevent any powerful Monster from going toward the area where you find Monsters weakerpared to them.


    But because this is just a singleyer barrier it is unable to prevent those powerful Monsters from going toward the other side. This is the reason those Monsters came out from the area of those Epic grade monsters. Actually both of the Monsters came there to hunt for food.


    First of all because of the night time they already became very wild and also continuously under pressure getting released from their body. As they became while they did not care about the pressure and wanted to just hunt food. They did not even advance that much when they suddenly noticed a huge energy fluctuation.


    As you know after breaking through any Warrior or Monster would get an increase in their instincts and sense, the Monsters also are able to find that huge spiritual fluctuation which is almost 15 km away from their location.


    The meaning of those huge spiritual fluctuations could be a group of monsters fighting each other or Monsters fighting Warriors. Both the monsters did not care about that as first of all they can be sure that they did not have danger even in their while. These make them more excited and they want to just hunt for their food.


    Livia and a teammate did not even notice the danger while approaching the previous location where they killed those Golden eye cats. Sometimeter, Livia and her teammates already find their other team who without doing anything are just waiting in a ce.


    At this time, Livia is also using the life detection device and she also noticed not far away from that location a group of monsters present. She already predicted that the group of monsters could be Golden eye cats. Most likely her second team is also waiting for the right time to attack those Monsters.


    It is a good thing that her second team already controls the spiritual fluctuation and already makes it minimum. Not only that, she could tell everyone of them releasing a spiritual fluctuation right now which indicates that all of them are already preparing their powerful attack for those Monsters.


    Livia already contacts her two teammates and three of them instantly prepare their attack while controlling the spiritual fluctuation. To do this naturally they need to focus very carefully or that won''t be possible for them. Not only that she did not want to startle her second team.


    This is the reason that she instantly did not approach the second group and just decided to wait far away from the second team.

 Chapter 687: Chapter 687 - Uncomfortable

    "Be ready to use your movement technique anytime as I can tell some of those Monsters would escape. We need to kill those Monsters in any condition so that we canplete the mission."


    Livia alreadymands her 2 teammates. Even though they could see 15 Monsters in front of them, you cannot be sure that you would be able to kill all of those Monsters at once.


    First of all those Monsters have quick response speed and also even though all the warriors sure that those Monsters did not notice them, there is a chance that before any attack to reach them those Monsters would escape from that ce.


    She told that to her teammates using telepathy. Fortunately her second team already noticed them. With this they will not get startled. This is the reason that Livia already told her other 2 teammates to be ready to use the movement technique anytime.


    Naturally did not attack recklessly and waited for the perfect chance where those monsters were doing other work. Suddenly if you look at those Monsters then you will notice those Monsters looking toward the moon and somehow their body glowing from time to time.


    If Sam was present in that ce then he would already notice by reading the status of those Monsters that they have the skill to absorb moonlight. Those Monsters have the blessing of the moon and this is the reason that they would alwayse out from their hiding ce at night.


    3 minutester, wasting no time, Livia''s 2nd team already attacked in four directions towards the Monsters. As those Monsters did not pay attention to them and most likely focused on absorbing the moonlight, they at first were unable to react on time.


    They only notice the powerful spiritual fluctuation and the dangering out from those attacks almost 1 secondter but that is already toote for those Monsters who were in front of those attacks. But even in that situation those Monsters try to use their movement technique in full power while also trying to use the element technique to protect their body.


    Once again a huge explosion was created in those ces where those attacksnded. Livia and her two teammates did not even waste a single second in that ce and they already used the movement technique. If you are already why then from the first they use the spiritual vision technique and they already noticed some of those Monsters able to escape from that ce.


    _________________________


    30 minutester,


    "Sigh, we were able to kill all of them. But I don''t think we would be able to meet other Monsters right now as I am definitely sure many Monsters would say the energy fluctuation and would also feel the impact of the attack. So definitely those Monsters would try to hide themselves.


    But that does not mean we would be careless. First of all there are many monsters who be more wild at night time and those Monsters definitely react after sensing the explosion. Before doing anything right now we should try to focus on recovering our spiritual energy."


    After telling this Livia and all of har teammates decided to go back to their hiding ce to rest. First of all, even though this time they did not get injured, that does not mean they are okay to fight other Monsters. Livia and her two teammates already use almost 75% of their spiritual energy and that would be the reason that they need to recover their Spiritual energy.


    Also you cannot be sure that every time you would face a small group like this. They could be a group of 80 monsters who attacked you at Once. So everybody needed to be careful about that and after picking up all the loot they decided to go back to their hiding ce.


    Somethingter,


    They came back to their hiding ce and already ced the life detection device in two directions. That would tell them about all the Monsters around them.


    But unaware to anyone those shadow Guards who from the first watching over Livia already became serious as they could tell danger was approaching at that ce. As you know the range of the observation taking of those people would be much higherpared to Livia and the others.


    Actually they already sense both the monster who most likely came to this area after breaking through the barrier. This isn''t an umon thing in that ce but still this is a very dangerous thing for Livia and her teammates. Fortunately there are other warriors also present in that ce and some of them are also high in numbers.


    ________________


    "Captain, don''t know why but I am feeling quite ufortable. It is like something is going to happen to me. I have been feeling that for quite some time. Previously I thought I would feel like this because of those Monsters around as I became sure that I was feeling this ufortable feeling because of another reason.


    First of all, sure that if we all attacked those Monsters even if it is a very big group, then we would be able to kill them or able to escape. So I don''t know why I am feeling ufortable."


    Almost 1 hourter when everybody had almost recovered their lost spiritual energy and stamina, one of them decided to say that to Livia. After hearing that everybody present in the team became serious about this. First of all, everybody knows about the skill that their teammate possesses.


    She poses a skill that would alert her if her life is in danger before the danger could reach her. So, after hearing that she is feeling ufortable, everybody bes serious because they also think that these ufortable feelings did note out from those Monsters who are around them.


    As she said everyone in the team also believes even if they are unable to fight in a group of monsters they would be able to at least escape from that ce. Definitely that wasn''t the reason to feel ufortable.


    If you are wondering why did not anybody thought that it could be a coincidence then it is because Their teammates are very familiar with this ufortable feeling. Naturally there are various reasons that anybody could feel ufortablepared to those ufortable feelings when any danger approaches a ce she would feel a different kind of feeling.


    "Guys, quickly observe the life direction device. I don''t know if our device will sessfully be able to tell us about the danger or not but we need to be careful about this. As you know, around night every Monster bes more powerful and more and more so we need to make sure nothing dangerous happens to us."


    After saying this everybody bes very alert about their surroundings and they also bring out 2 more devices. Unfortunately they did not have the device which was recently created by the warrior association and which also has a range of 50 km. Even though previously the king told Livia to bring that new device but she did not bring that.


    ______________________


    "Beep¡­ Beep¡­ Beep¡­ "


    Sometimeter those four devices begin to vibrate and everybody instantly observes those devices. In those four devices they could already have so many Monsters around their ce but definitely those are the reason for that vibration of the device.


    Actually everybody who had this kind of device could also set the power limit in the device and if any Monster who already broke through from the power limit came inside the range of the device then the device would begin to vibrate like this.


    Instantly everyone notices a dot which is showing brightly in those 4 devices and it also shows everyone that those two Monsters exist in the previous ce where they kill those other goldeneye cats. This naturally alerts everybody and they did not know what to do in that kind of situation.


    "Guys I think we are in a serious situation and we should repeat from this ce. First of all by looking at the device I could tell many other Monsters also trying to keep distance from those to Monsters and those two Monsters definitely looking at the previous ce where we had those Golden eye cats.


    I don''t know if those monsters woulde toward us or not, but we should try to prepare ourselves to fight those to Monsters."


    Livia did not even finish saying that when suddenly something unexpected happened. Instantly everyone of them was able to hear the sound of an explosion not far away from the ce and in the life detection device they could also see Green Dot present in the ce where they notice those Monsters.


    Those green dots representing the life of Warriors and everyone of them were around Elite grade warriors. Like them they are also ten in number. By the explosion everybody became sure that those Warriors already attack those Monsters and that Monsters are also reacting very quickly as it just instantly disturbs you and appears in a different ce.

 Chapter 688: Chapter 688 - Help and Danger

    Livia and her team understood a group of warriors fighting a group of monsters. But when they looked at the life detection device they also noticed many more Red Dot appearing toward that ce.


    Everybody became sure that those would be the reinforcement of those Monsters who sneakily approached that ce without alerting any Warriors. Currently that group of Warriors is fully focused on fighting those 10 Monsters and by looking at the life detection device you can easily tell they already killed 5 of those Monsters and only 5 remaining.


    Livia did you know what to do at this moment. First of all she already realized a very dangerous thing. Those two Monsters who are the real danger not from that ce but somehow those other Monsters and those Warriors did not notice those two Monsters.


    Nobody could give a guarantee that those to Monster will stay like this as it could be the case that those to Monsters are waiting for the right time to attack those Warriors and those Monsters. As you know that all the Monsters would attack each other.


    "Guys, the life of those Warriors would be in danger if those Monsters attack them. Even though I am not 100% sure, I am 50% sure that those warriors are around our level so definitely it will also be difficult for them to fight those Monsters who already break through to the next grade.


    For now we have an option. We can retreat from that ce or we can approach that ce to help those Warriors. I am definitely sure that sometimeter when everybody will notice those two Monsters, those other Monsters will try to escape from that ce.


    Around that time the life of those Warriors will be in danger, as they will not get the time to recover Their Spiritual energy and their health."


    Livia exins that everyone and everybody also knows about this matter. But they did not know if they should help them or not. So they decided what to do sometimeter when they finally decided to help those Warriors.


    First of all they did not notice any other Warriors near those Warriors so that means those Warriors are still in danger. Also in the afternoon, the life of some Warriors is in danger . How can they leave that ce like this?


    No time everybody began to use their movement technique in full power to go toward that ce. All this time they are also observing the life detection device. Fortunately those Warriors already noticed those Monsters who wanted to attack them sneakily.


    Unfortunately, some of those Monsters already attack them during the time and those Warriors are unable to protect themselves and finally get seriously injured.


    Naturally their teammates also help them so that they get the time to recover their health and The Spiritual energy. All this time none of those monsters or none of those Warriors notice those Monsters who are Coldly looking toward their direction.


    Well they could easily attack those Monsters or those Warriors but it looks like they also enjoy the fight between those Monsters and those Warriors. Because of this season they also control The Spiritual aura that the previous release released from their body.


    This is the reason that those Monsters and those Warriors did not notice them even though they are very close to their location. On the other hand, Livia and her teammates already came very close to that ce but they also did not instantly react.


    First of all using the life detection device they found out the location of those two Epic grade monsters. Naturally they did note very close to that ce as they did not have that much confidence in their stealth technique and they also knew that those powerful Monsters would have powerful observation techniques.


    Livia and her friends decided to maintain a safe distance from that ce while observing the situation. But everybody is ready to attack anytime the moment those two Monsters will interfere.


    "Guys, I know that it will be risky but I want everyone of you to attack those two Monsters with your full power at once. As you know, the difference between an Epic grade and Elite grade is high. But still if we are able tobine our attack and create a very powerful attack then we have a chance to kill those Monsters. So be prepared yourself but suddenly don''t let out any spiritual fluctuation."


    Livia told that to everyone. First of all spiritual fluctuation would instantly alert everyone. None of them wanted to do that as they are hiding at this time. She just told everyone to be prepared to attack anytime. Less than a second anybody would be able to finish their most powerful attack but to do that that person will need a huge amount of mental energy.


    Naturally everybody knows about this but suddenly in this situation they have only this choice. Like this after sometimeter those two Monsters notice that those groups of Warriors wear in danger as they already got seriously injured and only three of those Warriors fight those 8 Monsters in front of them.


    They did not want to meet the chance so they decided to reveal themselves while instantly a huge spiritual pressure released to that ce that instantly froze those Warriors and those Monsters. Even though that pressure did not make any of them breathless but still a huge burden instantly put in their body.


    Sometimeter when the pressure lifted everybody noticed big Monsters that look like horsesing toward that ce. Still a spiritual pressure releasing from their body and anybody could guess those Monsters already break through to the next grade.


    Those two Monsters slowly approached toward that ce and on the other hand those Elite grade monsters slowly backed away from that ce. Those Warriors did not know but the moment those powerful Monsters appear in that ce those other Monsters begin to feel much pressure in their body and they can already tell the danger present in that area.


    By looking at those two Monsters those Elite grade monsters could easily tell those two Monsters also have the intention to attack them. And this is the reason that they feel a very dangerous sensation all over that ce.


    Unfortunately those Monsters did not even retreat that far when suddenly something unexpected happened as suddenly the whole area exploded and every Monsters present in that ce were unable to react on time. Monsters who have the special spiritual energy that has the property to explode anything the moment they will use their various techniques.


    Previously one of those Monsters shot a light beam toward those other Monsters and the moment itnded on the ground around those Monsters this instantly created the explosion zone. At this time those Warriors did not react. They be very scared at this time.


    Even though those two Monsters did not fully kill those other Monsters but they already seriously injured everyone of those Monsters. This is the reason that they finally focus on those Warriors who are most likely shaking due to fear.


    But those to Monsters did not even waste a single second to prepare their attack. A very powerful spiritual energy fluctuation began to appear in that ce and anybody could tell the power of that attack already broke through to epic grade.


    Suddenly 3 of those Warriors who previously fought those other Monsters somehow came back to their senses and they instantly shouted to everyone to create the spiritual barrier in front of them. Even though almost everyone became fully injured, somehow they were still able to recover some of their spirituality and GN with that they instantly created a spiritual barrier in front of them.


    Almost 10yers of spiritual barrier were created in that ce. But you still cannot give them the guarantee that they would be able to protect themselves from the attack of those two Monsters. First of all they already realize the attacks of those Monsters would affect a huge area.


    Also even if theybine they are full power they are not sure if they will be able to break through to the next grade or not in their current situation.


    Almost all of them are shaking due to fear and already know that they are going to die. But still none of them gave up On The hope to survive. Fortunately at this time something unexpected happened. Those to Monsters already attached to those Warriors when suddenly a very powerful spiritual barrier got created in front of that 10yer barrier.


    Not only that a very powerful spiritual fluctuation got created and by sensing the fluctuation you can tell it already reached the Epic grade. Livia and her teammates finally made their move and they instantlybined their technique to create that powerful barrier.


    First of all, they aren''t even sure if that 10yer barrier would be able to protect them or not. This is the reason that they finally decided to create that powerful barrier so that at least they could save those Warriors from getting killed.

 Chapter 689: Chapter 689 - Helping

    Livia and her teammates maintain the distance between them and those Warriors. 5 of them maintain the spiritual barrier while 5 of them focus on those two monsters. Mostly those two monsters also get confused by the sudden appearance of that powerful spiritual barrier.


    With its intelligence, the monster already understands the spiritual barrier created by the other party because he can since the spiritual fluctuationes out from different directions. Actually not only those two Monsters but even those warriors also got surprised by the sudden appearance of The Spiritual barrier.


    Butpared to those monsters they understand quickly that most likely some other Warrior decides to help them and this could be the chance for them to recover the lost spiritual energy and health. Wasting no time, they bring out spiritual energy potions and health potions.


    On the other hand, both the monsters kept attacking the barrier as they wanted to break that barrier and then wanted to kill those people. Definitely if they wanted to break that barrier which was created by 5 of Livia''s teammates and Power had already reached Epic grade, then both of them needed to attack the barrier at once.


    On the other hand those five teammates of Livia naturally use a huge amount of spiritual energy to maintain the barrier but they don''t have to maintain that barrier for that long as their other five teammates are already preparing their powerful attacks and they are also nning tobine the attack and make it into one power attack.


    1 minuteter, finally , all of them were ready to attack those Monsters and they wasted no time. They attacked in the same direction and everyone of those attacks gotbined and created into a huge spiritual being whose power limit already crossed to epic grade.


    For those monsters this is apletely unexpected thing as they fully focus on breaking the barrier and injust 1 minute you can already notice the crack that appears on the barrier. Naturally even those Warriors inside of the barrier got scared once again the moment they noticed the crack.


    But this time they did not freeze due to fear. Even though they are scared, they want to recover quickly so that they can help those other warriors. Fortunately all of them take high grade potions and it will take them just only 1 minute to recover their full spiritual energy and full health.


    But in just 1 minute when all of them notice the crack start appearing on the barrier and it looks like suddenly both the monsters increase the power of their attack, they already know that most likely they need to fight once again.


    Fortunately nothing like that happened as instantly a spiritual beam went toward those Monsters and those Monsters didn''t even get the time to react. They are able to sense the danger at thest moment and that isn''t enough for them to escape from that ce. So naturally they can only create barriers like things in front of them to protect themselves.


    Unfortunately even though they could create a spiritual barrier like those warriors, in thest moment they were unable to put that much power in that barrier and the power of that barrier isn''t high.


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    A huge sh appeared in that ce between that barrier of monsters and that attack. First of all you should understand that even though the power of the barrier wasn''t that high, the power limits of that barrier were Epic grade. So definitely breaking that would not be easy and that is the reason that big explosions instantly appear in that ce.


    The part of the explosion was so much that instantly the barrier that was present on the opposite side already got destroyed by the impact of that explosion. Fortunately, those other Warriors have already recovered some of their spiritual energy and that would be enough for them to escape.


    As the barrier got destroyed those 5 warriors who maintained the barriers did not waste a single time again to bring out the spiritual potions to recover the spiritual energy.


    ___________________________________


    20 minutester,


    For 20 minutes you can say Livia and her 4 teammates continuously using their attacks. That is the reason the power of that attack stays in Epic grade. Finally after 20 minutes they are able to destroy the barrier and a huge explosion once again appears.


    Almost 1 km area got destroyed because of that attack and everything got surrounded by ayer of dust and smoke. Livia and her 4 teammates quickly retreat while their other 5 teammates appear on to their previous ce.


    Livia and her 4 teammates will be recovering thest spiritual energy while their other five teammates are already using the spiritual vision to see if those Monsters are dead or not.


    Even they know that they won''t be able to kill those Monsters like this. Definitely those monsters somehow escaped from that ce but still they wanted to make sure at least they were able to injure one of them. Actually as they thought they were unable to kill those Monsters.


    Even though those Monsters did not get that much time to react when the first time the attack reached them butter they got enough time to increase the power of the barrier and also get enough time to retreat from that ce.


    The good thing is that they also got injured due to the huge impact of the explosion. Actually they are also trying to find the location of those Warriors who are attacking them like this. Unfortunately because of theyer of smoke and dust they are unable to see anything that much. Also as they be more intelligent they will not act recklessly.


    Sometimeter theyer of smoke and dust begin to fade away and everybody can notice how much damage they have created in that ce. A huge hole got created in that 1 km area and everything present in that ce already got destroyed.


    Unfortunately they did not notice any body of the Monsters present in that ce. They already expected that and because of this they quickly began to search for those two monsters. It did not take them a minute to find out the location of those Monsters through using the life detection device.


    They have good things to find out the location of those monsters so naturally they will be using that. If you are wondering why they previously did not use that then because of the previous explosion and impact a huge energy fluctuation also got created in that ce and the ce also contains arge amount of spiritual energy.


    That would be enough to malfunction the device. This is the reason that everyone waited until thatyer of smoke did not get clear. After finding out the location of those Monsters naturally they did not waste a single second to create their attack.


    But this time those Monsters also already notice those Warriors who previously attack them. Just after noticing those warriors they already begin to prepare their attack.


    Instantly huge amounts of spiritual energy begin to gather in the mouth of those Monsters and in less than a minute they have already prepared two white balls present in their mouth which contain tremendous destructive spiritual energy.


    Less than a second they shoot those two white balls. The moment both the white balls leave their mouth a huge energy fluctuation gets created and instantly both the white balls turn into two big energy beams.


    Those 5 warriors who were preparing their attack and ready tobine did not even get the chance to do anything as they already felt the danger that was already in front of them. Wasting no time they quickly canceled their attacks and created a powerful spiritual barrier in front of them with theirbined power.


    But they did not get enough time to make that barrier more powerful. Livia and those 4 warriors who are recovering The lost spiritual energy also notice those two powerful spiritual beams which instantly appear in front of the teammates and waste no time hitting that barrier, 5 of them get very worried.


    They quickly begin to use their movement technique to get close to that ce to help their teammates.


    But during the time nobody noticed those two monsters also getting closer. Both the Monsters wanted to finish those Warriors and from a close distance the power of their attack would be more powerful so they closed the distance between them and those Warriors.


    Livia and her teammates did not notice anything as they were fully focusing on maintaining the power of that barrier so that they did not get killed or get seriously injured.


    But all this time mostly they forget about those 10 Warriors who were previously the first group to get attacked by those two Monsters but fortunately because of the help of Livia and her teammates they were able to escape from that ce.


    Actually they did not escape from that ce, they just went into a safe distance to recover their full spiritual energy and health.

 Chapter 690: Chapter 690 - Finally Relief

    The ten Warriors instantly created that spiritual barrier bybining their power but not only that they also prepared an Attack bybining their power. These also give those 5 warriors the time to retreat from that ce.


    "Boom!!!"


    Suddenly, a big sh appeared in that ce. The second Monster who previously also attacked The Spiritual barrier increased the power of his attack and created that big explosion. The barrier was instantly destroyed by that attack.


    Fortunately all the Warriors have already retreated from that ce. Livia and her teammates already retreat toward those 10 Warriors. First of all, none in of them no in that situation needed to depend on each other so that they could kill those Monsters.


    They won''t be able to kill those two Monsters just only lie on their own team. Also escaping from that ce is also impossible in that situation. Livia doesn''t know but all the shadow Guards are ready to attack both of the Monsters.


    But as the king told them not to reveal themselves until the situation did not be very serious so they kept hiding. Those other teams already prepared their attacks and this time they fully focused on that attack. A huge spiritual beam which contains the power of a fire element, and a wind element instantly went toward one of the monsters.


    Those ten Warriors release their attack the moment that second Monster destroys the spiritual barrier. Actually when they noticed those 5 Warriors escaping from the ce they decided to fully focus on the attack and with that spiritual barrier also got easily destroyed. Livia and her teammates also did not Back down.


    They also begin to prepare their attacks bybining their power. On the other hand the first Monster already noticed the dangering towards his direction so this Monster instantly created a spiritual beam to counter attack that danger. On the other hand the second Monster already disappears from his previous ce and instantly appears behind those warriors.


    This is apletely unexpected thing for anyone as they did not expect those monsters could also use the movement technique. The Monster did not waste a single second to attack them. Livia and her teammates forcefully cancel their attacks and instantly create the spiritual barrier.


    Fortunately bybining their power they were able to create the barrier which did not get destroyed the moment the attack from the monster hit the barrier.


    "Guys, we need to retreat as we won''t be able to fight these Monsters in closebat. If possible try to alert the second team as they fully focus on attacking the first monster."


    Livia quickly told everyone and one of them who went that using telepathy already informed the second group. But you can say retreating from that ce isn''t easy. First of all both the group of warriors attacked both the Monsters which needed all of theirbined power.


    This is a very serious situation for them. Even for a moment they cannot be reckless or lose their focus. Not only that rapidly their spiritual energy and stamina got consumed by those attacks.


    At this moment suddenly one of the warriors decided to use the confused ray technique. But that Warrior also was not sure if that technique would work or not. First of all, every powerful monster who has high intelligence and high will power will not get affected by the confused Ray. But in that situation they needed the chance to retreat.


    Wasting no time that Warrior instantly created that confused ray technique naturally before using that she already told her team to close their eyes. Not only that but at the same time they use their movement technique in full power. The 2nd group of warriors also uses that chance to escape.


    Somehow that confused ray attack works for that second Monster and makes that Monster confused for 5 seconds. That time was enough for those Warriors to get far away from that location. On the other hand the first Monster who finally stabilized his condition already noticed those Warriors escaping from that ce so he wasted no time to create a very powerful attack.


    ___________________________


    4 hourster,


    Currently, Livia and all the other Warriors were in a serious situation. Almost all of them got injured and already lost the strength to fight back. Only 5 of them remain in that ce while they maintain the spiritual barrier to protect all those 15 warriors.


    In these 4 hours they continuously fought those Monsters but unfortunately that wasn''t an easy thing and also during that process they got seriously injured and they also already got fully exhausted and lost the strength to move around.


    Those 5 Warriors who were still standing also weren''t in better condition. First of all they are also seriously injured and also they are fully exhausted both physically and mentally. But in the situation they did not know what to do other than maintaining that spiritual barrier to protect all of their friends.


    Livia during the time naturally thought about what Sam would do in that situation. Sam would naturally do something miraculous that would save all those Warriors present in that ce. Unfortunately he isn''t here, not even sister Emma isn''t present in that ce. This is the reason that she is thinking very hard and trying to think how to escape from that ce.


    Suddenly, something unexpected happened that killed both of the Monsters without giving them the time to react. Actually 2 Warriors suddenly appear in that ce and they instantly appear  behind those Monsters. Both the Warriors did not use any kind of element attack and only used their swords.


    Using their weapons they kill both of the monsters who keep attacking toward the barrier and almost destroy half of the barrier. All of this happened in less than a second that both the monsters did not even get the chance to react or do anything.


    After killing both the monster both the warriors disappear from that ce and once again hide themselves in the shadow. First of all, every shadowguard has a super hiding technique and this is the reason that Livia and her teammates did not find any of them even using their observation technique in full power.


    ______________________


    "Pant¡­ pant¡­ pant¡­ captain!!! Do you know who saved us from those Monsters? We did not even get the time to look at their faces."


    One of Livia''s teammates who still has consciousness asks that question to Livia. Actually almost everyone of them thought they were going to die because they already lost the strength to fight and even though 5 of the teammates were trying their best, they also know those 5 Warriors were only able to maintain the barrier for that long.


    But in thatst moment that unexpected situation happened which also saved their life. First everyone did not believe what they were seeing but when they finally realized both the Monsters got killed almost everyone of those warriors lost their consciousness.


    "Sigh¡­ I don''t know. Like everyone I also did not get the time to look at their face or recognise them. But it looks like both the Warriors already leave that ce as even in the life detection device I am unable to see anything. Sigh, it could be that both the Warriors were going toward the deeper zone and somehow noticed our battle and decided to help us.


    Really appreciate those warriors for helping us. We really did not expect we could face a serious situation like this where we almost lost our lives. Really it is true that inside the danger zone anything could happen and even in the ce where every Monsters are weakpared to us, we should not be careless."


    Livia says that while releasing a deep breath. First of all she is also rxing on the ground and trying to recover her lost spiritual energy and already using the recovery technique to recover her lost health. It is a great relief for everyone that both the powerful Monster got defeated.


    But you can saypared to those other 10 Warriors, the group of Livia once again feel the gap between them and those Monsters and once again realize that their decision is right. They need to focus on reaching the true limit of their grade and then they need to break through.


    Even without reaching the limit they could try to break through but as Sam told Livia, if she did that it would be great for her potential. So, she already decided to do that alongside all the teammates. Also nobody from her teammates noticed that all the time, even during the battle Livia observed the movement of every one of her teammates.


    It is a great relief for her that she did not notice any kind of suspicious movement among her teammates. But in the end they decided to go back to the kingdom as in that situation they should not stay in the danger zone for that long.


    Even though after recovering The Spiritual energy and health they could try to hunt once again, but that would be stupid thing to do as they did not have their armor and their weapons got destroyed.

 Chapter 691: Chapter 691 - Poisonous Centri

    Emma is currently facing peak-grade monsters. All these days she continues fighting those Monsters. Well, previously she did not pay that much attention when she came inside of the deepest part that those Monsters already had a stat which already reached the limit of the epic grade.


    Naturally, she did note inside of the danger zone alone. Previously she woulde inside with her team. She woulde inside of that part of the danger zone with the prince but after the king told her to protect Livia, she almost stoppeding in that part of the danger zone to face those Monsters.


    So you can say she finally came back here after a long time. Also as she did not have any team made right now she was facing quite a problem while fighting those Monsters. Some Monsters have superior strength or some Monsters have superior agility, naturally unable to win against those Monsters that easily.


    Emma also did not fight any group of Monsters at once as they were fighting those Monsters one by one so that she did not get killed. Currently, she is alone inside the dangerous zones so she needs to be extra careful.


    After fighting those Monsters for all these days she also finally realized the power of the limit when anybody was able to reach that. In one word all those fights were helpful for her. Also as she did not have any kind of mission she could only focus on those Monsters from the first.


    Suddenly Emma is hiding herself as in front of her you can see five Monsters who look like Cetriprid. Those Monsters are called the poisonous Centri. Their bodies are full of poison. So even fighting those Monsters is quite difficult because if you somehow can break the defenses of the Monsters then immediately poison woulde out from their body.


    In front of her are those 5 monsters going in the left direction. Emma waited for any of those monsters to get away from the team so that they could fight. Those Monsters have superior agility and their defense also most likely reaches the limit. Fortunately, they also have weaknesses. Those Monsters were not able to see or hear anything.


    Those Monsters react by sensing the vibrations. This is the reason that she did not move in that situation andpletely hid. She cannot recklessly attack those Monsters as she creates any attack that would immediately create Spiritual fluctuation who is also creates the vibration and those Monsters immediately sense her location.


    "I needed to wait. I hope one of them somehow got separated from the team which would be the perfect situation for me to attack. As those Monsters have superior agility it is also very difficult for me to kill them that easily.


    Somehow I needed to damage those Monsters in my first attack which also gave me the advantage. I also need to destroy those two antennas. Only then those Monsters willpletely lose their ability to find anything around them and that would be the perfect situation for me to attack them.''


    Emma decided what to do. First of all those Monsters have two antennas in their forehead which also help those Monsters to fill the vibration and locate their enemies. If she can destroy both the antenna then those monsters will lose the ability to find anything around them and that would give her the advantage.


    But this thing also isn''t easy as instantly those Monsters will begin to release a poison that would create ayer around their body. This is the defense mechanism those Monsters have.


    Anybody who would try to attack those Monsters in closeparison needed to be careful about that matter as that would be very dangerous to those warriors. Fortunately, Emma did not n to get close to those Monsters and already nned to maintain a safe distance from those Monsters.


    First of all, the good thing is that she already knows the safe distance that she needs to maintain. She needs to maintain at least a 2 km distance from those Monsters so that she does not get affected by the poison of those Monsters.


    While she was thinking all of these she also fully focused on those Monsters. As she expected, sometimeter two monsters got separated. Both of the Monsters are going in different directions. Currently, those Monsters are 5 km away from Emma but fortunately using the life detection device she doesn''t have to move from her ce.


    Actually in that 10 km area not only those poisonous Centri monsters, but other Monsters also present, and most likely both those Monsters going in that direction. They wanted to hunt for their food.


    Fortunately, she maintains the minimum distance from those Monsters, and with that, she could use her technique. She extended both of her hands and instantly The Spiritual energy around that ce began to absorb into the space between both of her hands. In less than a second a very small ball was created.


    But don''t judge that attack based on the size as that ball contains a huge amount of spiritual energy and the ice element. She wanted to use her most powerful attack and that attack was called the Freezing Beam. Instantly the surrounding area begins to get cold as the temperature of that energy ball already reaches near absolute zero.


    Emma did not get affected by that and she just fully focused on creating that attack. Naturally, she did not know if she would be able to damage the antenna of those Monsters or not even with her most powerful attack. But she will try that and instantly she needs to change her previous ce.


    The Attack range of those Monsters is around 3 km but the observation range of those Monsters is around 8 km. Naturally, the moment she begins to prepare the attack those Monsters already feel the vibration that was created because of the spiritual fluctuation.


    Fortunately, she already finishes the attack in just 5 seconds, and wasting no time she shoots that freezing beam toward those monsters. She directly targets the antenna of the first monster. She naturally did not want to target both monsters at once.


    On the other hand both the monsters already sense the vibration that was created because of the spiritual fluctuation and are already going to use the movement technique to reach that ce to kill their enemy. But unfortunately in the next second, they hear the strong vibration that almost appears in front of them which is also enough to make them feel danger.


    Instantly both the monsters reacted and created a poison barrier in front of them. A barrier like a spiritual barrier was created in front of them but that barrier contained the poison element. Compact your normal spiritual barrier a poisonous barrier is different as this barrier also contains poisonous energy which immediately creates a counterattack by spreading poison around that area.


    __________________________


    The Monster which is very close to that freezing beam is unable to maintain that spiritual or you can say poisonous barrier for that long and it got destroyed. That Monster got hit by the freezing beam. On the other hand, the second Monster already escaped from that ce using the movement technique and alreadye to the ce where previously Emma hid.


    Fortunately, she had already left that ce and came to a different ce. The moment she attacked those monsters she used her movement technique in full power to escape from that ce. That is the reason she was able to get away because if she did not leave that ce at that time then it would immediately be a dangerous situation for her.


    The moment that Monster appeared in that ce the whole area got turned into a Green zone which immediately began to poison everything in that area. That Green zone contains the poisonous element that instantly begins to affect everything.


    The trees, the ground, and everything begin to get affected by the poison and you can already see the effect of that poison as those trees and everything present in that area already died. Only those rocks and other things which did not have any effect by the poisonous element did not have any kind of effect.


    On the other hand, suddenly many ice Spears were created in front of that first monster. Because of that previous attack, that whole ce got Frozen by the ice element and nobody could guarantee that the attack was sessfully able to damage the Monster or sessfully able to freeze the Monster.


    But Emma did not want to wait a single second so she immediately created the second attack. She did not want to give that Monster the time to react or do anything and this is the reason that she instantly began to attack that Monster using Those ices Spears. Also she immediately leave that ce once again as the second Monster once again on that ce.

 Chapter 692: Chapter 692 - Retriting

    Emma already retreated far away from the ce. Currently the first poisonous Centri already created ayer of poisonous gas to protect himself. Thatyer of poisonous gas also works as a barrier to protect that Monster from any outside attack.


    It is justpared to any normal attack, thisyer of smoke did not have that much difference and this is the reason that all the time that Monster needed to move from his ce to protect himself from those attacks from Emma.


    On the other hand the second monster was already shooting poisonous balls toward all those ces where it was able to sense the vibration which got created because of the spiritual fluctuation.


    Because of this, Emma is unable to stay in the same ce even for a second. She just moved from one ce to another ce to escape from that ce. She can''t stay in one ce for that long as the 2nd monster is attacking her direction continuously.


    The first monster on the other hand was unable to escape from his location. From the first he greeted Emma continuously and already lost half of his health. Using his most of the power he was able to create the poisonousyer around him.


    On the other hand, those 10 shadow Guards are ready to attack anytime to help Emma. But as the king told them not toe out until the situation became unstable for Emma.


    Emma can feel she just needed to attack the Monster a few more times to kill that first monster. She is already thinking about retiring after killing the first Monster. Killing that first Monster already took much of her Spiritual energy and she didn''t have the confidence to kill the 2nd monster as more Monsters could alsoe to that ce.


    Currently, she is unable to observe the life detection device. But, that didn''t mean she let down her guards and fully on those monsters. She also continuously uses the observation technique to observe the surrounding area. This is the reason that she can also sense the location of the 2nd monster.


    _____________________________


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    Sometimeter, a huge explosion was created in that ce. Actually Emma uses her most powerful technique and this time she channels as much spiritual energy as she can. This time she not only uses the ice element but at the same time uses the water element. Using both of the elements she created that powerful spiritual beam which destroyed that area.


    The whole area got frozen injust once again everything that got frozen was already destroyed. With that the first Monster finally got killed. But Emma did not have the time to rest or celebrate the victory as the second Monster already became more wild the moment the second Monster noticed the first Monster got killed by her.


    Emma at this time gathers most of her spiritual energy to use the movement technique. As you know those Monsters have superior agility so getting away from the ce is very hard for her. But she needs to escape at any condition so she needs to distract that Monster so that she gets the time to escape from that ce.


    Once again, a poisonous ball hit the ce but fortunately Emma already went to a different ce. This time she did not instantly begin to create the attachment as she wanted to get the time to create her attack.


    On the other hand if you are wondering why she stopped creating attacks then it is because she did not want to create The Spiritual fluctuation to create the vibration that would immediately alert that second monster.


    Naturally, the second Monsters got confused the moment it stopped sensing the vibration. But that does not mean it will stop attacking. First of all the monster already gets the pattern of its enemy. With this Monster already bing the shoot in different directions at this moment even vibration already stopped creating in that ce.


    On the other hand, Emma is already 8 km away from that ce. First of all, even though she did not get out of the observation range of that Monster, fortunately she already came out of the category of that Monster which was already created in that ce. The second Monster already created the poisonousyer around that whole area and instantly the 5 km area got  with the poison.


    ''I needed to vibrate so that the monster got confused and unable to locate my current location. I also need to do that very quickly as the moment I try to create the Monsters of vibration and attack toward my direction.''


    Emma thought that. She did not instantly create the attack. She waited for the right moment to create the attack. The second monster after creating thatyer of poison already went towards a different ce and in one second a poisonousyer got created.


    Fortunately Emma didn''t present near that range of poisonousyer. The Monster did not go in her direction; she could still hide herself. It Looked like the monster was still trying to find the enemy but after sometime attacking in a different direction when the monster still did not get any kind of movement. The Monster thought that the finally gone from the ce.


    Once again using the movement technique The Monster came to a different ce at this time the monster did not create the poisonousyer because he already thought the enemy had already gone from that ce. Fortunately because of the weak sense the monster did not notice but Emma hid very close to that monster. The distance between them is around 100 m.


    Emma almost stopped her breathing so that it also did not create the vibration that would immediately alert the monster. Fortunately that Monster did not stay in that same ce for that long and once again began to crawl toward the right direction. From that direction The Monster was able to sense the vibration.


    That vibration got created because of some other Monsters or some other Warriors. With that the monster goes toward the direction to hunt the enemy. Also before anything you should know every living being created a different type of vibration. So those monsters are already very familiar with the vibration pattern that was created by the same species of monsters.


    That also helps them not to attack each other and recognise each other.


    _________________________


    ''Somehow the situation bes better for me as I don''t need to use the attack to distract the monster. I also need to wait until the monster really does not leave this location.''


    Emma really did not expect this kind of situation would appear. Fortunately, The Monster is able to sense other Monsters or other Warriors so it is going toward that direction. With that she just needed to wait until the monster went far away from that location.


    Emma wasn''t aware of the 5 of actually creating that vibration by using their technique that also created strong spiritual fluctuation. Naturally, all those shadow Guards wanted to create the chance for Emma to get away from the location. Because if they did not do that then Emma would be in a very difficult situation.


    First of all the vibration not just only got created because of a moment or spiritual fluctuation, but when she breathed it can also create a very weak vibration. This is also the reason the moment that Monster came very close to Emma, she stopped breathing.


    Nobody could guarantee that Monster was from that location at that moment so this is the reason that those 5 warriors created the destruction so that Emma was able to get away from that location.


    _____________________


    Sometimeter,


    Emma finally gets the time to rest to recover her Spiritual energy. She already takes that because even though she most of the time maintains the distance from those poisonous Centri Monsters but still she got affected by the poison when both the monsters created the poisonousyer.


    She is just waiting to recover her Spiritual energy and her health and she has already decided to go back to Oni Kingdom. Almost for 8 days she was just hunting those Monsters so it was time to go back and absorb those spirit crystals.


    During the time she also already remembers what Sam told them previously. Actually they need to prepare a huge amount of spirit crystals because they won''t be able to absorb all the essence of the crystals right now. But they still needed to try their best to go abroad. To do that they naturally require a huge amount of mental energy.


    ____________________


    Sam on the other hand finally opened his eyes 8 dayster. Actually for all these eight days he just liquefying The Spiritual energy. Sam just only rests when he already exhausted all the mental energy and needed to recover the mental energy to continue with that process.


    Sam before anything went inside of the bathroom to freshen up and after that he decided to go toward the dining room because in these 8 days he consumes a huge amount of energy, and to recover that he needs to eat.

 Chapter 693: Chapter 693 - Good news

    Sam is currently in the dining room and he is already eating a lot of food right now. For these 8 days he stayed busy on liquidity and spiritual energy and did not know about the current situation. Sam gets to know that Livia, Emma, and the prince went inside of the danger zone.


    Three of them after fighting him became more focused on increasing their power whilepletely forget about Breaking through to next Grade. All of them understand the importance of reaching the limit of their grade and they are eager to reach the limit.


    On the other hand the Oni king is only responsible for the matter that currently appears in the danger zone. Suddenly the king got notified by the search team that some monster entered the barrier which prevented one zone to another zone. Suppose like the situation when he went to the border area of the Epic grade monsters he suddenly found a monster who already reached theary grade.


    So situations like this begin to appear in the danger zone continuously and the king is busy with that kind of situation. First of all not every warrior would be able to handle those kinds of monsters.


    This is the reason that he already informs all the warriors to be careful inside the dangerous zone because this kind of situation appears continuously and also informs the search team if they notice something like this then they should immediately kill those Monsters.


    But this isn''t that much of an important matterpared to those abyss humans. Fortunately like the human being he also increased the security of his Kingdom from the start and even in the danger zones and until now nobody found any kind of trace about those Abyss humans.


    With this they did not have to worry about Abyss humans. Back to the main matter, the king also informs him that he has good news but he did not tell him. Sam is naturally unable to predict what kind of good news the king would tell him.


    Sam is much eager to go inside of the danger zone to test his new power. Actually he is finally able to liquify The Spiritual energy to 100% with that he is finally able to connect the inner world to reality. It is just he needed to finish the final work and that is to find out the property of his inner world.


    To do that he needs to go inside of the danger zone and use his new power to hand Monsters and only then he would be able to understand the property of his inner world. Sam naturally wanted to go inside of the danger zone right now but before going toward the danger zone he wanted to visit the king as the king wanted to tell him the good news.


    ________________________


    "Haha¡­ Sam you finally came out from your room. I know that it is pretty hard for anyone to liquify The Spiritual energy that quickly but I also have confidence in you that you are able to do that in no time. You don''t have to worry about that matter that much because even without the domain you could hunt monster.


    It is just those Monsters able to use the power of domain and it became pretty hard for any Warrior if they did not have the power of domain to counter attack those Monsters."


    The king said that because he did not think that Sam was already able to liquify The Spiritual energy to 100% to feel the liquify core. So he decided to say that so Sam did not get disappointed in himself.


    Actually as no Warrior has any kind of technique rted to this matter and is near to depend on their potential to use the hidden property of their spiritual energy to liquefy the spiritual energy, many of them got pretty disappointed in themselves and that could be a big problem for any Warrior.


    You can say if any Warrior suddenly lost confidence in himself then it will be pretty hard for that kind warrior to be able to liquify the spiritual energy. The Oni king already knows about many Warriors who have this kind of situation and even if they try for almost 5 to 10 years they are unable to create the liquify core or fill the core.


    "Don''t worry about this."


    Sam said that with a smile. He already can tell the king is pretty worried about him so he just told him so that the king could get rxed.


    "Haha¡­ I know that you won''t get disappointed that quickly. Now back to the main matter, the reason I call you here to inform you about the good news. Actually as you know the headquarters told us to send our best Warriors in the headquarters so that they could get selected for the Alpha team.


    Afterpleting the technique sessfully the headquarters put all those Warriors from all the kingdom in much more hard training and finally 2 days ago they selected Warriors for the Alpha team. From our Kingdom we send 10 Warriors and the good news is that 6 Warriors already got selected for the Alpha team.


    Not only that, from the human Kingdom 5 Warriors got selected. The human king already told me to inform you of this good news. Also even though other Warriors did not get selected for all these days they also receive the special training from the headquarters and that is also beneficial for them.


    I already told those four Warriors toe to the Royal pce. Actually even though I already created the search team alone side with the warrior association, I still need a second force to be prepared to fight Abyss humans anytime. The search team would only focus on finding any clue and would try to prevent if they naturally find any kind of clue.


    But we also needed to prepare a main attraction to deal with those enemies and that is the reason I call those four Warriors. Those 4 warriors alongside with other Warriors would be the main force of our Kingdom to deal with Abyss humans. Not only that, I am also thinking about giving them a special training session that would be beneficial for them.


    Father also agrees to this idea but unfortunately he won''t be able to present there.


    On the other hand, the second good news is that after searching our whole Kingdom we basically did not find any clue about any kind of traitors. But naturally we cannot be careless because of that and I already told the search team to be careful because even if they did not find right now any kind of clue about the traitors but that does not mean they won''t be able to find themter.


    Even though I have full confidence in every citizen of my kingdom, I still wanted to make sure nothing like the previous situation happened once again. Also I created a second search team who would be focused on observing most of the Warriors who went inside of the danger zone.


    As you know we did not have any kind of information of what those warriors do after going inside the danger zones so I prepared the team. But naturally they won''t try to interfere with anyone''s personal matters or anything like that.


    They will just observe as many Warriors as they can who go inside of the danger zone and try to find out if they have any kind of connection with the Abyss humans or not.


    I created the second team with all the Warriors from my Royal pce. They are my shadow guards that I personally guided from their childhood and this is the reason that I have full confidence in them."


    The Oni king exins all of these while Sam listens to all of them without interfering. After hearing the news that the warrior from the Oni Kingdom and Human Kingdom Got selected, Sam is also happy. Not only that, the king told him that he did not find any clue about any traitors inside the kingdom, also good news to hear.


    But Sam also thinks that that does not mean the search team should get careless. Because what if those traitors were able to find something suspicious and decided to hide themselves. This is the reason that the search team should be very careful and should not be careless or let down their guard.


    On the other hand some also finally understand why the Oni king created the sound barrier suddenly outside of the conference room.


    Those presence most likely belong to those shadow guards who prevented anyone from entering the conference room and also the king created that sound barrier so nobody would be able to hear anything. All that information about Oni King exining him is basically very important.


    The Oni king did not stop there as he also talked about other matters of his Kingdom. He also tells him that from the start he already told the search team to search about all the high officials and their connections. Nobody could give him the guarantee that those high officials did not have any connection with those abyss humans.

 Chapter 694: Chapter 694 - Worried

    Sam has alreadye to the danger zone. The king also told him to be careful in the danger zone as recently abnormal things have been happening inside of the danger zone continuously so even in the core area it could be abnormal.


    First of all, those search teams didn''t enter the core area as none of them areary grade warriors. So what is happening in that area? Nobody knows about that. But the good thing is that there are many Warriors present in the Oni Kingdom who are already ready to break through but it is the king who told them to stop.


    After listening to the exnation of Sam the king already informs those warriors to reach the limit first and only then they should try to break through. After reaching the limit they would have more power to fight against that barrier which prevents them from Breaking through.


    Sam on the other hand did not directly go to the core area. The Oni king told him to observe the danger zone and if possible try to look at all the Warriors present in the danger zone and to see if anybody had any kind of abnormality.


    This is the reason that he did not directly go to the core area and traveled in the danger zone only using the movement technique and his concealment technique. Until now he did not use the power of domain. First of all, even though he would be able to find out the property of his inner world just by only trying on those weak Monsters he wanted to do that in those powerful Monsters.


    This is the reason that he did not try to use the power of the domain and just hiddenly approached the inner area of the danger zone. As aary grade Warrior, he has almost a 30 km area under his observation technique. Unfortunately, the range of seeing the status is only 5 km.


    Only when any Warrior or Monster came to that 5 km area from Sam, Sam was able to see the status of that Monster or that Warrior. Naturally, Sam used both of the properties of his observation technique and by looking at those statues he became more sure those people did not have any connection with Abyss humans.


    Naturally, if those people have any kind of connection with those Abyss humans, he would already find any kind of clue about them after looking at the status of those people. But still, Sam cannot be sure that everybody also has a clean status like this.


    Naturally to cover the whole danger zone ispletely impossible for him and he would only be able to cover the area where he is traveling right now.


    '' I hope after going inside the core area I didn''t find a group. Even if I am able to use the power of domain I am still unable to get a better understanding of my domain and the poverty of my inner world. So it would be better for me if I did not meet a group of monsters.


    On the other hand, if any Monsters from the core area enter the inner area then it will be much more dangerous. Fortunately, most of the Warriors will always stay in groups and it also increases the chance for them to fight thoseary-grade Monsters.


    But I did not know what would happen when they encountered the power of the domain from those Monsters. I hope they can counterattack. On the other hand, I am really curious to know why those monsters would try to go back to the inner area even after breaking through toary grade. I hope the old man can give me the answer to this question.''


    Sam is curious to know about this because most of the time no Monster would try to do that where they would not get any kind of benefit. Most of the time you can say anyary grade Monster would not try to go back to the inner area where The Monster would not receive any kind of benefit as the spiritual energy of the inner area would be much weakerpared to the core area.


    So this is confusing for him but he previously forgot to ask the king about this. But he already decided to ask the old King after going back to the kingdom because by that time he would already be able to find out the property of his domain and would try to go back to his.


    Naturally, he did not forget about his main target and wanted to go back to his as quickly as he could. But before going back to his he wanted to figure out the property as nobody could give him the guarantee that after going back to his he would be able to use the power of the domain.


    First of all, if his prediction is right then there is still the restriction present in Eden Blue, and with that he won''t be able to use most of his power. The highest power level of Eden Blue right now is Early Elite grade. So definitely he won''t be able to use his full power until the restriction is lifted from Eden Blue.


    Also, this is the reason that he wanted to go back to his as quickly as he could. Suddenly because of the restriction he did not have to worry about those people from others. Those people are also facing the restriction and their power would be in suppression. So naturally he didn''t worry about that because he also had confidence in every saint.


    But nobody could give him the guarantee that when the restriction was lifted from the ce, even those Saints would be able to protect Eden Blue from those people from other worlds.


    ''Sigh, really the more I thought about Eden Blue, the more I became worried. Currently, I should try to focus on finding out the properties of my inner world. At any condition, I need to master the power of domain because that would be beneficial for me when the restriction of my is lifted.


    Even though I have full confidence in taking down those warriors from others still using the power of domain, it would be easy for me to handle those kinds of situations. Also, I need to think about that prime dragon that is targeting my.


    First of all, even though I was able to see the future, I did not know if only one Dragon was targeting my or not. What if more Dragon targets my then it would be very dangerous for everyone during that time.


    Even though I will not have any problem fighting those Monsters those Monsters naturally pose a sufficient danger to kill most of the people on my and I really cannot let that happen.''


    Sam did all of these and after that, he once again began to use the observation technique. The more he is thinking about his the more he gets worried. But the only thing stopping him from rushing toward his is the restriction force that is still present on his. The restriction force will be applied to every Warrior so the saints of Eden Blue will have the chance to handle them.


    Also, knowns will try to send arge army.


    Back to the main matter he already came almost to the center of the inner area. Normally any Epic grade Warriors would take almost 2 hours to reach that ce but as he is also using the observation technique to look at the status of those warriors, he takes almost 4 hours to reach that ce.


    Sam decided to eat something before advancing once again. Even though after bing theary grade warrior he did not feel that much hungry, he did have it for him to eat. But that also gives him the chance to observe the surrounding area and during that time he also tries to find out if any kind of abnormality is present near him or not.


    Not far away from his location, you can see a group of 10 Warriors and from 2 km away from them you can see a group of 3 Warriors. Like this, in that kilometer area, you are able to find many groups of Warriors who are focusing on their work and do not know that Sam is observing them.


    Even though the range of looking at the statue is 5 km, that does not mean he would not be able to feel the aura thates out from The Spiritual energy.


    So if any Warrior or any Monster releases the dark spiritual aura, then he would immediately know about that. Also not just only the Monsters or those Warriors will release the dark spiritual aura. As you know there are many artifacts of those Abyss humans which also contain dark spiritual energy and those things could also release the dark spiritual aura.

 Chapter 695: Chapter 695 - White Nova

    ''The good thing is that I did not find any person who released any dark spiritual aura. But as I was unable to observe the hold in the zone I still cannot be sure that the Oni Kingdom did not have any traitors among them.''


    Currently, Sam has alreadye close to the border of the inner area and is already ready to enter the core area of the danger zone. All this time he observed his surrounding area and did not find anyone with dark spiritual energy.


    It is a good thing but he still cannot be sure that the kingdom did not have any traitors. But he was not worried about that because he already informed the king about these and the king already informed the search team.


    Everyone present in the search team continuously observed all the Warriors in the danger zone so he did not have to worry about that. Currently, he is preparing himself to face thoseary grade monsters.


    He is very excited because finally, he can use the power of domain and also can understand his inner world by fighting those Monsters. It is just that he did not know whose territory he would enter after crossing the border. As you know many Monsters have more subordinates in their territory while some of them like to stay alone.


    Before entering the core he decided to check his inventory once again. After looking at all the potions and other necessary loot he is ready to enter the core area. Wasting no time he crossed the barrier and while crossing the barrier he coated his whole body with spiritual energy.


    Compared to the barrier that is present in the outer area and inner area, the barrier present here is much more powerful and if you do not coat your body with spiritual energy you can also take damage.


    The moment he enters that core he already feels the density of spiritual energy present there. Unfortunately, no Warriors have the ability to absorb The Spiritual energy directly. This is also a big mystery That Sam wanted to solve and he also wanted to find a technique that would help him in that matter.


    No back to the main matter,


    He can already tell him most likely entered someone''s territory and most likely that Monster already got his presence. So Sam became extra careful and already began to use the observation technique to feel the spiritual aura around him.


    He did not know what type of monster he would face and what type of power that Monster had. But fighting anyary-grade monster isn''t easy. First of all, they are more intelligentpared to those monsters present in the inner area or outer area. So there is also a chance that the monster uses the power of domain from the start so that he does not get time to react.


    Also, he already deactivated the power of concealment technique. Naturally, he wanted to fight the monster without hiding himself. You cannot say he became reckless, it is just you know the character of those intelligent Monsters.


    Sam did not even advance that long when he suddenly noticed a spiritual aura. Naturally, he can tell it belongs to the monster of that territory and most likely he is lucky because he can only feel one spiritual aura. That means he doesn''t have to worry about facing a group of monsters which could be dangerous.


    Wasting no time he also began to go toward the direction of the monster and he already began to prepare his attack. You can see a small white ball begin to form in his left hand. That is the white Nova attack that he just recently learned. That white Nova is one of the attacks of the me control.


    He already reached the peak stage of fire control and this is the reason that the me already became White. This attack is very powerful evenpared to the mega fireball technique. You can say if the mega fireball can destroy almost a 10 km area then the white nova can destroy almost a 50 km area.


    It is just that to prepare for that attack he needed to use a huge amount of spiritual energy and currently he almost uses his 60% spiritual energy to prepare for that attack. Fortunately, he has a range of 50 km so he could attack any enemy even if he is 50 km away from that monster.


    He wanted to attack that Monster from that distance and wanted to see if that Monster could counterattack. Also, you should not underestimate the power of those Monsters because they also can attack from that much distance. It is just the power of the domain that has limited range and to use the power of the domain The Monster needs toe close to their enemy.


    In just 30 seconds he alreadypleted the attack and wasting no time he directly threw that white ball toward the monster. The moment that ball got thrown out it already began to go toward the monster. The speed of the attack is very fast.


    Not just only Sam but on the other hand The Monster which already senses his presence also begins to prepare his attack. That Monster can control the thunder element and with that, he already has a huge amount of thunder element in his mouth and is ready to shoot that thunderball toward Sam.


    It is just thatpared to that Monster Sam is much quicker and this is the reason before he could release the attack The Monster already sensed the danger that came close to him. Wasting no time he reacted and quickly shot that thunderbolt toward that white ball which had alreadye close to him. In just 2 minutes that white ball crossed 49 km and was just about to reach that monster.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Instantly a huge explosion appeared in mid-air but even with that the White Nova attack did not disappear from that ce. The Monster currently has a very serious face because he also understands the attack is very dangerous and can kill him.


    Also, he knows that in that situation even if he tries to use different attacks it won''t be useful against that powerful attack. Without wasting time he uses the power of the domain and the 5 km area gets turned into his domain.


    Instantly that Monster begins to control the surrounding spiritual energy and begins to attack that white Nova. But you can still see the power of that attack because it still did not disappear and every one of those attacks got eliminated by that white Nova.


    But suddenly a huge amount of thunder came down from the sky and it just began to attack that white Nova. The Monster decided to use a huge amount of spiritual energy to create that attack because he wanted to destroy that white Nova.


    "Boom!!!"


    The sh between both of the elements instantly appears in that ce and if it is in for the power of domain The Monster would already get eliminated. Fortunately, The Monster uses the power of domain and can control all the spiritual energy present in that ce so it also has the ability to restrict that attack.


    Sometimeter, that white Nova and that thunder Dragon shed once again, and instantly a huge explosion appeared in that ce which destroyed everything around that area. Fortunately, The Monster already created a big barrier in front of him and also uses more thunder elements.


    Only using that the monster was able to save himself from the impact of that explosion which almost destroyed the area in front of the monster. All the trees and everything got destroyed by the explosion and The Monster understands the power of that attack.


    The monster became very exhausted as almost 70% of his spiritual energy got used to stop that white Nova and this is the reason that he just deactivated the power of the domain. But unfortunately, the monster forgot about a very important matter and that is the Custer of that white Nova did not get defeated.


    Sam, previously already predicted that something like this could happen so using the teleportation technique he came close to that ce and he could already see the ss between his white Nova and the thunder element.


    He also uses a spiritual barrier to protect himself from the power of that impact and he also noticed that even the area inside of that domain of the monster got destroyed because of the explosion. Even if that Monster or any other Warrior can control the spiritual energy inside their domain, they still cannot prevent this type of destruction from destroying anything.


    They would be able to just suppress the power of the explosion but this time to do that the monster would need to use all of his spiritual energy and liquify spiritual energy. But during that time the monster fully focused on protecting himself so he was unable to do that and the impact of that explosion already affected the outside of the domain.

 Chapter 696: Chapter 696 - The Power of Domain

    The moment The Monster deactivated the power of domain Sam deserted to activate the power of domain. Instantly a spiritual fluctuation appeared in that ce and the 10 km area was surrounded by a spiritual domain. This time the spiritual fluctuation ispletely different from before.


    First of all this time, he is using liquid spiritual energy so definitely The Spiritual aura will be different. Sam, who can feel the connection between himself and the inner world, is surprised the moment he uses The liquified Spiritual energy to create the domain. It is like the surrounding area turns into his inner world and he has full control over that area.


    The monster who does deactivate the power of the domain instantly got alert because he already noticed the moment Sam activated the power of the domain and his instincts were warning him about the danger that was present all over that ce.


    Not only that the monster suddenly begins to feel strange spiritual energy that is much more dangerouspared to true spiritual energy and also the monster can feel he does not have any connection to that new spiritual energy. The restriction force that appears on the ce is very powerful which makes the Monster unable to use any of his techniques.


    Sam currently did not even do anything but the monster began to feel The Spiritual system inside of its body begin to get affected by that strange spiritual energy. It is like The Spiritual energy getting out of the body and The Monster did not have any control over that.


    The Monster fully focused on controlling the spiritual energy that was getting out of his body as he already uses 60% of his spiritual energy so he did not have that much spiritual energy present in his body. And if the spiritual energy got out of his body like that then in just 10 minutes The Monster would be unconscious because he would not have any spiritual energy present in his body.


    The Origin Spiritual energy instantly begins to absorb All The Spiritual energy present all over the surrounding area alongside the spiritual energy that is present inside of that monster. Also, the absorption rate of the Origin Spiritual Energy is very high so this is the reason that the monster became that alert and tried to control the spiritual energy inside of its body.


    Sam, on the other hand, did not do anything and was just trying to feel the power of his inner world. First of all, he feels that he has full control over a 10 km area and everything present in that area could get destroyed by him.


    ''Why the hell am I unable to find the property of my domain? It is like my inner world or my domain did not have any property. Is this because I have an origin in spiritual energy?


    As I remember, the king previously told me every time anybody was able to use the power of the man they would be able to feel some kind of different property present in that area which is also the property of the inner world of that person. But I don''t know why but I am unable to feel any kind of different property present in my surrounding area.''


    Sam is currently trying to feel the property of his inner world or you can say of his domain but unfortunately, he did not find any kind of different property about that area. It is just being able to feel the Origin spiritual energy that is present all over the 10 km area.


    Not only that he can also feel the origin spiritual energy begin to absorb The Spiritual energy of the surrounding area and Sam also feels The Spiritual system that the monster has. Everything that has spiritual energy is under his control and he is able to feel everything that has spiritual energy.


    '' If I am not wrong then I look like the monster trying to stop the absorption of The Spiritual energy but it looks like he is unable to do that as my spiritual energy is much more powerful to control the true spiritual energy of that monster. Unfortunately, I am unable to find the property but I would like to see what would happen if I try to use it in your mind and take it inside of the domain.''


    Sam thought about what would happen if he tried to use any technique inside of the domain. He decided to start with the basic fireball. First of all, he can tell the monster isn''t in any condition to fight back as the monster is fully trying to control the spiritual energy of his body that is getting absorbed by Sam.


    Sam without wasting a single second tried to use the fire control technique and while using the technique he already targeted that Monster and tried to create fire in the body of that monster.


    Normally this is quite impossible for any Warrior to create this type of attack directly to their enemy. Even if that person has full control over all the spiritual energy inside the domain but still as the enemy can also use the spiritual energy even with the restriction force present in that area, that person won''t be able to create this type of attack directly to the body of the enemy.


    But surprisingly the moment he targeted the body of that monster a fire appeared in the whole body of that Monster which also started the monster. This is apletely unexpected thing even for that Monster as he never thought directly the fire would appear on its body.


    "Roar!!!!!!!"


    The Monster begins to cry in pain and at the same time, the body of the monster begins to get burned by the fire that appears on the body of that monster. This time Sam tries to observe the situation of that Monster as he has full control over the area so he can get a full view of what is happening.


    Currently, the fire that appears on the body of that Monster already begins to burn the whole body of that Monster and it looks like even the defense of that Monster is unable to do anything to that fire. Not only that, the most important thing is that the spiritual energy of that Monster somehow gets absorbed by the monster and the power of that me gets bigger and bigger.


    Because of the huge restriction force, The Monster is naturally unable to use any kind of technique so it just tries to save itself by running but unfortunately, nothing happens. Sometimeter The Monster already falls to the ground as itpletely loses the strength to fight back.


    From the star The Spiritual energy gets absorbed by the Origin spiritual energy and when the fire appears in the body of that Monster the absorption rate bes much higher. With this, in just 4 minutes The Monster is already out of spiritual energy.


    Not only that, the defense of that Monster was unable to do anything in front of the heat of that fire. It Looks like the fire is also getting powerful by the surrounding spiritual energy that keeps going toward the fire and making it more powerful.


    Sam also has a shocking expression on his face because he never thought he would be able to kill that Monster that easily with just the basic technique of me control technique. Who could have thought that suddenly all the Origin Spiritual energy would try to increase the power of the fire and also the spiritual energy of that Monster would get absorbed like this?


    After making sure the monster is dead Sam deactivates the power of the domain as he already uses almost 10% of The liquified Spiritual energy to maintain that domain for that long and two use the attack. The consumption rate of the liquified spiritual energy will depend on how long Sam would activate the domain and how much powerful attack he would create.


    ''I am really surprised to see this kind of damage just after using a basic attack. But I can also feel that I would be able to increase the range of my domain if I try to use more liquified spiritual energy. but I don''t know the maximum range of my domain. Also looks like because of the excitement I use a lot of power this time.''


    Sam thought all of these because he did not think the 10% liquified spiritual energy get absorbed because of the attack or the time. He predicted most likely this time because of the excitement he did not notice how much energy he used and this is the reason that the domain has a range of 10 km.


    Sam this is the reason decided to already think about controlling the range of his domain as he did not want to use that much spiritual energy by increasing the range of his domain. Increasing the range of the domain would be helpful if he faces arge number of Monsters at once but while facing a single monster he should just minimize the range of the domain.

 Chapter 697: Chapter 697 - Fight between monsters

    Sam is currently facing a group of Monsters. In front of him you can see those green Monsters which look like Goblins. But they aren''t Goblins. Those Monsters called the Sub Goblins. These monsters are totally different speciespared to the goblins and they have control over the poison element.


    Not just only the poison element but those monsters could also use the Earth elements. Those Monsters will attack you from a distance and will try to maintain the distance from their enemy as they aren''t good at fighting in closebat. Those Monsters have more spiritual energy and more stamina but they also have the weakness about their defense which is very weak.


    As you know those goblins have many different power systems where some of them will attack you from closebat while some of them could also use power of element. But everyone of those Sub goblins only have the power of this element and will always attack you from a distance.


    Also the skin color is more brightpared to your normal goblins so you can easily tell the difference between both the species of goblins. Currently, Sam is waiting for the right time to attack those Monsters. He is using the concealment technique. On the other hand, those Monsters fighting a different monster.


    That Monster is a big snake. But the most important thing is that the snake Monster ispletely red in color and has control over the me element. Normally most of the snake Monsters will have control over the poison element but these monsters arepletely different and they call the fire snake.


    Those snake Monsters can also try to spray poison but instead of poison ava like liquid wille out from their body which is very dangerous as it could easily burn everything like the surrounding area which already got burned by those attacks.


    Sam did not want to participate in this fight as first of all he could feel the Snake Monster ispletely out of the league of those Sub Goblin Monsters but it looks like those Sub Goblin Monsters did not care about that. The reason could be the boss Monsters of those goblins.


    Actually the Boss monster still did note to that ce and only those Minions fighting that snake. But naturally those Minions did not have the strength to kill that snake monster. But still it looks like those goblins did not care about that and they were still attacking continuously towards that snake Monster who created a fire wall around himself.


    Not only that fire wall surrounded the snake from all over the direction but at the same time Sam can easily feel a huge amount of spiritual energy begin to gather in that ce where that snake is most likely preparing a new attack. As those Goblin Monsters continuously attacked that firewall that snake Monster also needed to maintain that fire wall.


    ______________________


    ''As I thought the Boss monster was hiding himself and waiting for the right time to attack the snake monster. It Looks like even though that snake Monster has superior strength and agilitypared to those goblins, the snake Monster did not have the same level of spiritual stamina as these goblins.


    This is the reason that the snake monster increases the power of his attack and tries to kill more Monsters as quickly as he can. I can also feel a powerful aura not far away from that location and most likely that spiritual aura belongs to the Boss monster.


    Is this Boss monster waiting for that snake to deactivate the domain? Most likely this could be the case as inside the domain I could already see that snake monster killing those goblins easily even if those gobbling time to counter that by using their own domain.''


    First of all you should know that all those goblins breakthrough toary grade and this is the reason that they can also use the power of domain.


    Unfortunately the monster in front of them is much more powerful and because of this reason even 8 of them are trying to counter attack the power of the domain of the snake using their own domain but in just one minute the domain of dozens goblins got destroyed by the domain of the snake monster.


    Sam can easily tell the power of that snake Monster most likely already reached the next grade or reached the limit of the Early Grade.


    ''I am not sure if any intermediate grade Monster will try to attack those early grade Monsters, so I am thinking most likely that Snake Monster will reach the limit of the early grade. ''


    Actually Sam isn''t wrong as the snake Monster really reached the limit of the early grade. This is also the reason that those Goblin Monsters who just recently broke through to early Grade did not have any advantage in the fight and getting killed by the Snake Monster that easily even if they were trying to use their power .


    Sam, getting happy after realizing that as he knows that if he uses the power of domain he would immediately get control over the whole area. But then he still did not have the confidence that he would be able to kill that snake monster in one attack or not like the previous monster.


    First of all the previous Monster already lost half of his health and already lost 70% of his spiritual energy and this is the reason that just after using the power of domain Sam was able to kill that monster in just 20 minutes. But this time the situation ispletely different as he could tellpared to that previous monster. The stamina of that snake Monster or those goblins is high.


    Also Sam is very interested to know the power of the Boss monster of those goblins. First of all, that Boss monster is near that area. By using the observation technique he already noticed that it was Monster who most likely maintained the distance of 10 km from that snake monster.


    Unfortunately it looks like that snake Monster did not notice the Boss monster and The Spiritual fluctuation that appeared near that Monster. That Boss monster most likely preparing a powerful attack but if that Snake Monster keeps activating the domain then the attack from that was Monster won''t be that much effective.


    This is the reason, the Boss monster of those Goblins still did not release the attack even though a huge energy fluctuation already appeared in that area which Sam can already feel. Even if the observation range of that snake Monster is low and isn''t busy in the fight then most likely the snake Monster would already have noticed that fluctuation.


    Unfortunately, the snake monster is currently fighting those Minions and trying to kill them as quickly as he can. He already killed 100 of them and just 8 of them remain in that ce and it will take that Monster only one or two minutes to kill those 8 Monsters.


    The fight between those snake Monsters and those goblins goes on for almost 3 hours and the end is near. Also the most interesting thing is that the boss Monsters of those goblins did not care about the life and death of those sub Goblin soldiers. Because if that was Monster really cared about them then he would have already attacked the snake monster.


    ''Now, I really wanted to know what type of attack the Boss monster will use. Definitely , Monster will use both the elements to prepare that as I can already tell the type of different element present in that area which is almost 20 km away from this ce. Not only that, I can also tell that the attack distance of those Goblin Monsters is high.''


    Sam at first gets curious why did not that was Monster attack that snake monster. But then he predicted that and with his help he once again began to fully focus on the fight.


    The fight is getting more and more intense even though only 8 of them are present in that ce. But as the snake Monster fights those groups of sub Goblins for almost 3 hours, the snake Monster also gets very tired. Any condition the snake Monster wanted to kill everyone before losing all spiritual energy which also got used to maintain the observation technique.


    Not only that, the Snake Monster is also trying to find out the Boss monster by using observation techniques.


    Unfortunately now the snake Monster is unable to find the Boss monster and he also predicted before killing those Minions he won''t be able to meet the boss. So he once again increased the power of the domain using the liquify spiritual energy. Naturallypared to any Warriors those Monsters have something more which also helps them to recover The liquify Spiritual much quickly.


    But even with that nobody would be able to maintain the power of domain for that long as it needed the mental energy. But then Snake Monster did not have that much mental energy so naturally he wanted to kill every one of those remaining Monsters before his mental energy got exhausted.

 Chapter 698: Chapter 698 - Getting Better

    '' I need to wait a little longer than I will get the perfect chance to attack them as I could already see the snake Monster already exhausted after fighting those many Minions on the other hand even though the boss Monsters of these goblins have the advantage but still as it did not attack The Monster from the closed distance the snake Monster still have the chance to protect himself.


    But I wanted to see the battle between both of them while using their power of domain. Even if theypletely exhaust their spiritual energy, they will still have the liquid spiritual energy. I wanted to see who would have the advantage while battling against each other using the power of the domain.''


    Sam is curious to know what will happen when both of the monsters use the power of domain to attack each other. Even though currently both the monster maintains the distance or you can say the Goblin Monster maintaining the distance from that snake monster needed to get close to that snake Monster to use the power of domain.


    Not everyone or any Monster has the ability like Sam to increase the limit of the domain that much. Only monsters in legendary grade would have that much advantage using the power of a domain.


    Sam, on the other hand, can feel that Goblin Monster is most likely trying to get close to that snake Monster after exhausting himpletely as it will also give him the advantage. But you should not underestimate that snake Monster as he already knows from that location he won''t be able to kill that or seriously injure that Goblin Monster. So he also needs to get close to that Goblin monster.


    All this time while protecting himself that snake Monster is trying to get close to the Goblin Monster but it is just the Goblin monster attacking that snake Monster continuously.


    After 1 hour it finally looks like both the monsters will get close to each other in their domain range. First of all, he could already feel the snake Monster ispletely exhausted but that does not mean the sneak Monster gave up On the fight as it still has the Fighting spirit. The Goblin Monster also got injured but those are just light injuries.


    Even though the snake monster likes to fight any monster in closebat that does not mean he does not have any kind of long-distance attack and using that he is trying to attack the Goblin Monster to counter those attacks from the Goblin monster.


    Both the monsters already decided to use the power of the domain but at this time you can say that the sub-Goblin Monster has the advantage because he did not get that exhausted like the snake Monster who already uses 95% spiritual energy.


    Suddenly a huge attack hit that snake monster who was trying to use the movement technique to get close to that Goblin monster. This time the attack was so powerful that even though the snake Monster tried to retreat from that ce, it did not be sessful and already got injured by that attack.


    But it did not finish there as during the time Monster already entered the range of his domain and wasting no time instantly a domain got created by that Goblin monster.


    Now it ispletely unexpected for the Snake Monster as he did not expect at thest moment he would face a dangerous attack like that which also already injured him seriously even though he tried to protect himself. It is just that he already exhausted most of his spiritual energy so he was also unable to create a strong firewall in front of him that quickly.


    On the other hand, the moment the snake monster enters the domain of the government monster he begins to get attacked. The Goblin monster did not waste a single second and just began to attack the snake Monsters from all over the direction.


    This ispletely a disadvantageous situation for that snake Monster as first of all, he did not get the time to use the power of the domain and on the other hand, he had already been seriously injured by that monster.


    In this condition even though he tries to protect himself, unfortunately, he is unable to get ess to the power of the domain, and also because he has almost exhausted normal spiritual energy he is unable to use any kind of normal technique to protect himself.


    Not only that, even the restriction forced that snake Monster to get more injured and in just 30 minutes the snake Monster gotpletely defeated by that Goblin monster.


    Sam who watched the battle from the distance from first tost was disappointed as he did not get to see the battle between both the monsters while using the power of the domain. First of all both the monsters have the same power limit so naturally if they can fight using their power of domain then naturally it would cause more destruction to the ce.


    But Sam will not waste a single second on that ce even though he is disappointed and even though he is still using the concealment technique he instantly uses the power of a domain that instantly covers a 5 km area.


    The Goblin Monster just deactivated the power of domain but he did not even expect that a power of domain will instantly appear in that ce and he will instantly get affected by the power of domain.


    Instantly a huge restriction force affects the Goblin Monster and not only that the Goblin Monster can also feel the huge pressure that was created by the Origin spiritual energy. This is apletely unexpected situation for the Goblin Monster as he never thought he would also face the same situation as the Snake Monster.


    ________________________


    After killing that Monster Sam already picked up all the loot and then decided to advance. Previously he did not use the power of domain for that long and with that, he just only uses 8% of his liquified spiritual energy. With that, he would not have any kind of problem.


    Like this, for almost 5 days Sam stays inside of the danger zone to fight thoseary grade Monsters. Most of the time when he notices a group of monsters he will try to avoid them or try to attack them one by one by waiting for the right time to attack. These 5 days help him understand the power of his domain and he also gets better at using his domain.


    It is just the main problem he is facing right now that is he is unable to recover Spiritual energy that quickly. To even recover 10% of his spiritual energy he would need almost 5 hours and that is very problematic for him. This is the reason that most of the time he decided to use the power of domain in the end where he did not have any other choice.


    ''I think as this also did not have that much original spiritual energy I am unable to recover that quickly the liquified spiritual energy. As the Origin spiritual energy is the source of almost all the spiritual energy like the true spiritual energy or the dark spiritual energy, it takes me that much time to recover the liquified spiritual energy.''


    Sam thought that. Currently, he is resting to recover The liquify Spiritual energy. 3 hours ago he just finished fighting a group of monsters and that almost made him use 25% of his liquid spiritual energy. These are the reasons that he needed to wait until he recorded full spiritual energy to battle once again.


    But Sam also wanted to go back to the human Oni Kingdom. First of all, he already stabilized his condition and can easily use the power of the domain. That means this is the time to go back to his and he is eager to do that.


    Also, he wanted to absorb all the crystals that he got this time after hunting those Monsters. First of all, you won''t be able to buyary grade spirit crystals from the Warrior Association as even they did not have those crystals, so he needed to depend on himself for those crystals.


    Before going back to his he wanted to increase his stats as much as he could. After going back to his he will be facing a war so he wants to prepare himself for that. On the other hand, Sam is curious to know if he would be able to use the Origin spiritual energy like that on his or would be able to recover The liquified Spiritual energy or not.


    Unfortunately, he did not know the answer to those questions until he did not get back to his.


    ''I hope everyone is okay. But I wanted to see the expressions when they realized I finallye back after so many days. I am fully sure my parents and everyone who cares about me were very sad when I suddenly disappeared. I did not know how I would be able to exin them but I hope they will forgive me.


    On the other hand, after going back to my I need to tell everyone about the true spiritual energy and also about variouss who also have the same situation like our Eden blue.''

 Chapter 699: Chapter 699 - Kings Announcement

    3 dayster,


    Currently, Sam is going back to the Oni Kingdom. First of all, he already hunted enough monsters for now as he also needed to go back to his. The most important thing is that he already became good at controlling the power of the domain and previously he also tried to use the maximum limit of his domain before leaving the core area.


    If he uses the maximum limit then the range of the domain would be almost 30 km and that is a huge limit for him. Inside the domain, he is able to control everything and with that, he can attack multiple Monsters at once without any problem.


    Unfortunately to do that he is almost required to use 30 to 40% of his spiritual energy and the longer he will maintain the domain the more he would need to use liquified spiritual energy. To recover that much liquified spiritual energy he needed a long time and this is the reason that he would not prefer to use the power of the domain to its maximum limit.


    Back to the main matter after leaving the core area he once again enters the inner area and once again begins to observe the surrounding area and all the Warriors and monsters present in his range. Before leaving the Terraria he wanted to make sure nothing happened so before leaving the danger zone he also decided to observe once again.


    The good thing is that he did not feel any kind of abnormality around the border of the core area and the inner area. As you know any Epic grade Warriors will have very difficulty facingary grade monsters. This could be the reason that the king already told the search team to pay attention to the border area.


    This one dayter he finally came out of the danger zone. First of all, he thoroughly observed the inner area but did not find any kind of abnormality among those warriors or those Monsters. So, in the end, when he already came close to the exit of the inner area he decided to use the teleportation technique to directlye outside of the danger zone.


    First of all, he did not think any kind of abnormality would appear in the outside area of the danger zone, and even if an abnormality appeared in that area the search team would immediately get to know about that.


    '' One thing I forgot to inform the warrior association is that there is a possibility to open the portal to the Abyss world. But I don''t think they would be able to seed on that as they did not have ess to the dark spiritual energy directly so creating the portal would be impossible without me so this is also a good thing.


    I won''t be able to dy any longer. But I already decided toe back here after solving the problem on my. Only then I would try to create the portal that would be connected to the Abyss world. But I am really surprised about those dark humans from my who directly went to the Abyss world.


    I am really curious to know how they get ess to that world without using the powerful world bridge. First of all, I don''t think that the Abyss world has restrictions like Eden Blue. Even legendary grade Abyss humans are present in that world so naturally getting ess to that world is very hard for anyone.


    Not only that, even if they get ess to the world bridge by using the dark spiritual energy or something like that, still I don''t think so previously those dark humans had enough strength to tolerate the pressure from the world bridge.


    Unfortunately when I try to read the memory of those dark humans previously I am unable to get any kind of information rted to this matter. It is like they already forgot about Eden Blue. This could be rted to those Abyss humans. Because only they have ess to their world and most likely they are the reason that those dark humans are able to get ess to their world.


    On the other hand, the situation is very serious right now as nobody would be able to tell the difference between a dark human or a warrior who forcefully became a dark human. There is no difference between them and this is the reason that it is very tough to decide who is the real dark human.


    I should try to contact the Warrior Association and ask them about these because they could be a chance for those dark humans to decide to use these to their advantage. On the other hand, I hope the Alpha team prepares themselves to face those Abyss humans and dark humans.


    I still remember the president telling me even if the Alpha team was not able to break through toary grade, they would still be able to help fight those dark humans or those Abyss humans. But I don''t think those Warriors of the Alpha team will have enough strength to recover those Warriors who forcefully turn into dark humans.''


    Sam is now going back to the kingdom while thinking about all of this. As you know he will be going back to his world so he is naturally what it is about the situation of Terraria. Currently, the situation of Terraria is very serious as those Abyss humans got ess to some forbidden knowledge and this is the reason that they would also be able to forcefully turn warriors into dark humans.


    Sam did not know what would happen when he went back to his. But he just got home, nothing bad happened and he will also try toe back to Terraria after solving the matter in the Eden blue. Not only that he is also thinking about bringing the Saints into Terraria as that would be beneficial for everyone.


    ''After going back to my the first thing I need to do is help all of my people to get ess to true spiritual energy. While previously I helped my parents and sister I also noticed that they have a very hard time getting ess to true Spiritual energy.


    Most likely because from childhood, they turn their spiritual system into an ordinary spiritual system that only has ess to ordinary spiritual energy. So naturally if anybody tries to forcefully change their spiritual system into a true spiritual system then it would be very hard.


    This could be also the reason that all the people with ess to ordinary spiritual energy did not face that much trouble while breaking through.''


    Sam already decided that after going back to his he would try to help most of the people to get ess to the true spiritual energy.


    You can say if you put a person with ordinary spiritual energy who is able to break through to early Elite grade and a person who has ess to true spiritual energy and also breaks through to Early Elite grade, then the person with ess to true spiritual energy will be stronger.


    ________________________________


    While Sam thought of all of these he did not realize that he already came close to the Oni Kingdom. Not only that he also did not realize that everyone present outside of the kingdom was going inside of the kingdom through checking and talking about something important.


    When he got close to the main gate he came back to his senses and also at that time he was able to realize that those people were talking about something that he previously did notice. Those people are talking about the announcement of the Oni King.


    Now this makes him very curious to know what the announcement is, so wasting no time he already entered the Kingdom and then went back to the Royal pce. Well, the Royal pce almost became his second home like the Royal pce of the human world so naturally, he did not have any problem directly teleporting inside the Royal pce.


    Naturally, most of the people who were present inside his room to clean the room were surprised but when they realized it was Sam they rxed. Sam did not realize people would be inside his room. He just smiled at them and then came outside of his room and let them do their work.


    If you are wondering if anybody would be able to directly report inside the Royal Pce then you are wrong as the Royal Pce also has a barrier that protects the Royal Pce from all over the area.


    Only if you are able to get the code of the barrier, which ispletely impossible if the king did not give you the code, then you could sessfully teleport inside the Royal pce without any problem.


    Sam did not have a problem because he already got the code from the king. Also the moment he came inside the Royal pce the king already got to know that someone directly teleported inside the Royal pce and he also knew it was Sam because other than him and his father only Sam had ess.

 Chapter 700: Chapter 700 - Discussion

    Sam has already contacted the Oni king. He is also curious to know what is the announcement that the king made that also makes all those people very curious about that. He could have asked that to those people but he decided to directly ask the king as he was able to give him the correct answer.


    Currently, the king is not present inside the Royal pce as he is busy talking with the warrior association and all the search teams that were created to search around The Kingdom and the danger zone. Sam unfortunately was unable to find the king and already got informed by one of the maids that he went to the warrior association.


    With that Sam just sighs and then goes back to his room to freshen up.


    ___________________________


    Livia, Emma and the prince are currently present in the Royal pce and all of them are currently fighting with their training robots. They also have training robots like that butpared to those robots anybody would prefer to fight other Warriors as that will give them more excitement in their fight.


    Fortunately with the help of the warrior association suddenly the training robots also got upgraded and with that fighting them did not get that much boring. On the other hand not just only them you can say most of the royal Guards or even the shadow guards train in their secret rooms as the king already told them to train harder.


    Now nobody could ck off even if they did not have duty today. First of all the Oni king wanted everyone to reach the limit of their grade as that would be beneficial for them and also when they would be able to do that they would also receive additional help during the time when they would try to break through.


    Fortunately Sam already exined to the king what would be the sensation when anybody would reach the limit of their grade. When anybody would reach the limit that person would feel that he finally got full. Suppose all the Warriors are the water bottle and Pouring water is warrior grade. So suppose suddenly that water bottle represents peak Epic grade.


    That person poured water into that bottle and like this when that person would be able to fully fill that bottle he would reach the limit. Unfortunately that water bottle has some prevention factor which also prevents that bottle from fully filling. If you pour what is into that bottle it will juste out of the water bottle but the water bottle will not get fully filled.


    You just need to pour more water into those bottles so that the size of that bottle gets back to the original size and only then you are able to fully fill that bottle.


    So like this you can say all the Warriors also have that kind of prevention factor present in their spiritual system which also prevents them from fully reaching the limit that quickly as from the start they did not try to reach the limit of their grade. It just makes that prevention factor more strong and which is the reason that currently everyone is facing that kind of problem.


    Currently even those Warriors are unable to absorb spiritual essence from those spirit crystals but they still needed to do that. This is the only way to reach the limit and destroy that prevention factor present in their body. Naturally it will also take a long time but nobody has any kind of problem with that.


    ___________________________


    "I was really surprised when I heard that our Hero able to reachary grade. Who could have thought that our Hero will be the youngestary grade warrior. Really I think nobody would be able to match him even in 100 years. First of all he already reached the limit of his grade before trying to break through.


    Really he also reaches the limit of his every grade while the moment we reach the peak grade we would try to stabilize our condition then would try to break through. Really it never crossed our mind that we also needed to reach the limit of our grade."


    " Yes, you are right, if we did that from the start then we would not face this kind of problem that we are currently facing right now. Sigh, but the good thing is that I already started to feel that my strength increases a little bit alongside my spiritual energy.


    Currently we need to increase our overall power like this but naturally that will also take much time. Well we should not hurry as the king already told us before trying to break through we should reach the limit as that would be beneficial for our body. "


    " I get to hear that our prince and princess also Got inspired by our Hero. Now both of them are also training very hard to reach the limit. Previously we were all just waiting to find a limit breaker that would help us break through our limit but suddenly we just forget about Breaking through as we need to reach the limit."


    Currently inside the Royal pce mini Royal guards who are training in the training field discussing things like this among them. They really admire Sam as the hero and as the youngest person to reach theary grade. Not only that they also admire him because from the start Sam would reach the limit of any grade before trying to break through.


    That also inspired every guard to reach the limit before they would try to break through. You can even say the king caused this matter the moment he got free time.


    But you can say as they have the prevention matter present in their spiritual system it is very hard for them to reach the limit and to do that they need to absorb a huge amount of spiritual essence to increase a little bit of their power.


    But nobody cares about that right now and also the warrior association begins to supply more missions that would be rted to collecting spirit crystals. The thing is that except the royal family and all the people who belong from the Royal pce most of the Warriors did not know about this and it also made everyone of them very curious.


    Before anything you should know the king already check everybody who always present in the Royal pce and only after bing sure that nobody have any kind of connection with the Abyss humans, he decided to reveal them the important news and also this is the reason that ept those people from the Royal pce nobody knows anything about this.


    Even though all the Warriors get very surprised after getting those missions continuously, that also makes them very interested as the reward also bes high. None of them realize that giving all those missions also has two reasons.


    The first reason is the main reason where it will also help those people from the Royal pce to reach their limit and the second reason is that if any traitors really present in their Kingdom that would also make those people very curious and somehow they would be able to show themselves to get information rted to this matter.


    The warrior association and the king are also waiting for that moment when those people will show themselves because of curiosity and that would be the end for those people.


    Suddenly the king is present inside the Warriors association and he is discussing something important with the search team and with the incharge of that Warrior association''s branch. Naturally they already created a barrier around themselves which also prevents any kind of sound from leaving that ce.


    "I hope you already know the second purpose of us while we release those missions rted to spirit crystals. If there are any traitors present in our Kingdom that would naturally make them very curious and those people will also try to show themselves to get answers.


    Everyone of you just needs to stay careful and if you find any kind of people like this they naturally need to capture those people. We should not forget the possibility that those traitors also have some kind of artifact or special symbol that would help them to hide their dark spiritual aura.


    Don''t forget that those Abyss humans suddenly get ess to these forbidden symbols and they already have many dark artifacts."


    The Oni king instructed everyone about this. Naturally everyone nodded after hearing those instructions. They will increase their observation to search for this kind of abnormality. Sometimeter one by one every one year who belong to the search team begin to give their report to the king and the incharge of the warrior association.


    Suddenly the king was present in that ce with just some shadow guards. Normally he would call everyone of them inside the royal pce where those high officials would be present and in that ce those Warriors would give them the information. But as he still was not sure about those high officials he decided toe inside the warrior association to get the report from those search teams.

 Chapter 701: Chapter 701 - Status

    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Superior Human


    Health: (194500/194500)


    Spiritual energy: (194400/194400)


    Liquify spiritual energy - (10000/10000)


    [To increase the limit of liquidity spiritual energy you need to reach the maximum limit and then need to break through the limit. You won''t be able to increase the limit by using status points or upgrade points.)


    Soul energy - (220/220)


    Strength: 18400 + 1000 + 50


    Agility: 18400 + 1000 + 50


    Physique: 18400 + 1000 + 45


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 18400 + 1000 + 40


    Spirit: 18400 + 1000 + 40


    Soul:- 20 + 2


    Status points:- 00


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also be fixed based on the new status.]


    [System remark:- You received an additional boost because you were sessfully able to be a superior human. Compared to any of the normal humans you became the superior race that has much more potential and much more power.


    During your break through the system uses all the status points to evolve your bloodline and make you a superior human. You also sessfully have the option to evolve your bloodline and increase your power.]


    Grade: ary-grade) (Early) / (Early RRR grade)


    Potential: Celestial


    Upgrade point: 119K


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (cooldown period for 2 months.)


    Fusion technique


    The power of domain (Only consume liquidity spiritual energy.)


    Absorb technique:


    Superior Dragon Devour


    Trigon absorb (Grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    Bloodline skills:-


    Superior Aura


    Superior Destruction


    Superior eyes


    [ Remark: Finally the little man have the ability to protect.]"


    Sam is currently looking at the status screen as after being able to use the power of domain he really did not look at the status. He did not be that much surprised when he saw that he won''t be able to increase the liquify spiritual energy limit by using the status points or the upgrade points.


    Fortunately his system already told him how to increase the limit. Before anything he needed to reach the current limit of the spiritual core that is present inside his inner world. After that he would need to break through that limit by using additional force that would be created when he tries to liquify more spiritual energy.


    This process is very tough because previously when 100% liquefied spiritual energy got filled in the spiritual core Sam already felt that he was unable to liquify more spiritual energy or even if he tried to do that he was facing some kind of restriction. That restriction is present in his spiritual core which also prevents him from breaking the limit of that current spiritual core.


    This is the reason Sam isn''t surprised after looking at the remark of the system. Sam decided toe back to the menu of his system where he opened the inventory to look at all the loots present in his inventory.


    It did not take him that much time to find out all the things that are present in his inventory. The good thing is that currently he has almost 420 spirit crystals which would help him increase his overall power and also he really hopes to increase his power before going back to his.


    Unfortunately the warrior association did not have more spirit crystals ofary grade. As you know most of the Warriors are trying to break through toary grade and it is also very risky for them to search for thoseary grade Monsters.


    On the other hand those Warriors who were able to break through did not have that much time to collect more spirit crystals to sell in the warrior association.


    Even if those warriors collected arge number of spirit crystals, those people will not give those crystals to the warrior association as they will use those crystals to increase their overall power.


    First of all even after breaking through those Warriors have trouble killingary grade Monsters, on the other hand  they will not try to attract a huge number of monsters, which is also very risky for them.


    Sam after looking at those crystals also begins to look at those other loots present in his inventory. He has a set of armours that he bought recently from the system shop and those armor wereary grade Armours. Other than that he already upgraded the power of his weapon and also sold those unnecessary  in his system shop.


    He also has two technique scrolls which he didn''t learn. First of all he wanted to increase the limit of his current technique to the maximum limit and wanted to learn those other techniques after those current techniques.


    '' Sigh!!! I really did not know if I would be able to liquify spiritual energy even after going back to my or not as the Eden blue has the registration which even works for any Epic grade Warriors. But I have no idea if that also works for me or not or even if it works then would I be able to liquify The Spiritual energy or not.


    First of all, most of my spiritual energy and other things will be locked due to the restriction force and my power level will be set based on the limit of my. During this time I won''t be able to absorb or do anything with those crystals of legendary grade.


    Most of my techniques will be used in that time but I just really hope that I would still be able to liquify the spiritual energy as that would be able to help me break through the limit of my spiritual core.


    Also, It would be really helpful for me if I get to know about the date when the core of my wille to the surface area but unfortunately it looks like this isn''t possible. Also after the previous encounter I did not see the goddess.


    I really did not know what was happening with her or if she was facing some kind of danger or not. But if I remember correctly then she previously told me that she won''t be able to contact me once again because of some kind of problem she is facing at that time which is also risky for her.


    First of all I am really curious about the identity of that goddess and also why she helped me. She came to my dream two times to warn me about the danger and also told me to get powerful as quickly as I can. Did she predict some kind of danger more powerful than legendary grade enemies? I really wanted to ask all this kind of question but it looks like this isn''t possible.


    But I really need to prepare myself to face the danger that the goddess previously told me and to do that I need to make myself. But at the same time I cannot leave behind my family and all the other people whose life could be in danger during the time when I would face the danger or the danger came to me.


    I think that danger would have some kind of connection with the system and that Goddess and this is the reason that Goddess told me to get powerful.''


    Sam is currently thinking about all of this after finishing looking at the inventory. You needed to understand that without the help of the system or the goddess he won''t be able to begin that much power that quickly. Because of this he is really grateful to the Goddess who gave him the system. Unfortunately he is unable to answer all those questions that he has in his mind.


    Also if he thinks about the word that the goddess previously told him when they meet for the second time then it also indicates a great danger which could be more powerfulpared to any legendary grade enemy. Even the old king or the president of the warrior association did not have any idea if any Warrior grade existed after the legendary grade or not.


    Even if there is a warrior grade after the legendary grade, then the question is how many grades are present after the legendary grade. All this question made him curious but unfortunately nobody would give him the answer and also to get answer all those questions he needed to first break through to legendary grade.


    There is a possibility that there are more Warrior grades which are still undiscovered as nobody is able to break through from the legendary grade to reach that stage. Also during the time he suddenly remembers about the strange symbol which is also present in the Dungeon that he found in this Terraria.

 Chapter 702: Chapter 702 - Taking about Eden Blue

    Today is thest day when Sam will be staying in Terraria. He already informed the old king that he wanted to use the world bridge to go back to his. As he already told everything to the old king and everyone, nobody was surprised but everyone got pretty sad after hearing that.


    First of all, nobody knows how long Sam will take toe back to Terraria and also as you know there is a time difference between differents. So nobody knows how long it will take him toe back to Terraria. But the old King, before doing anything, already told him toe to him as he would tell him about the technique where he would be able to use the world bridge.


    Sam still now did not tell any of them how he came to their world previously. This is the mystery That everyone wanted to solve but unfortunately, Sam did not want to tell anyone as it could also bring unknown disaster to their. Fortunately, the old king and everyone who is close to him will be able to get to know about this after hees back to Terraria once again.


    This is the reason that those people did not have any problem with that and also he did not reveal that matter in front of everyone. Only some selected person knows about this and he has full confidence in those people that they will not betray or reveal that information in public.


    Sam is currently present in the dining room where he is eating his food alongside Livia, Emma, Maria, and some other people. The Oni king is not present there. You can say everyone present there is around Sam''s age and every one of them came to the Royal Pce of Oni Kingdom to celebrate the celebration which was held by the king to say goodbye to Sam.


    The important announcement that the Oni king previously announced is about the celebration that will be held in the Royal pce and the celebration many important people will be present. Naturally normally nobody would be able to enter that celebration until they did not get invited.


    First of all, you should understand that revealing the news of Sam being an outsider who came to their world using some kind of method without even reaching theary grade will cause some problems.


    Nobody wanted anything like that to happen. This is the reason that only those people who are also aware of that get invited to that celebration by the king. Normally all those important people would be present at the celebration as everyone wanted to say goodbye to him.


    Also as this is the daytime you are unable to see those people but you can see Maria from the Human Kingdom and some other people present in that ce.


    First of all, those people discuss various things with Sam. First of all, they are very interested to know about the where Sam belongs and Sam also without any hesitation answers them about his.


    You already told them they would be able to collect information about this through those articles which got published in their world by some people who like to travel to different worlds.


    But even with that none of them got satisfied because they wanted to hear about Sam''s from his mouth. So Sam is big and to discuss how his looks and also how the people behave on his. First of all already told everyone that on his you won''t be able to find any other species other than humans and on their, they also have safe zones and danger zones.


    But to collect spirit crystals or any other louds none of them needed to go into the danger zone as everybody from his would like to avoid the danger zone where the danger is much morepared to those Dungeons which also present inside the safe zone. From those Dungeons they collected all the spirit crystals and all the loots.


    On the other hand, if they kill any monster in the danger zone they would not get anything and the dead body of the monster would stay Still in that ce. Alsopared to the Monster of the Danger Zone The Monster of the Dungeons is much more peaceful. The Monster of the danger zone is much more wildpared to them and nobody knows why those Monsters became like this.


    But if you asked Sam about this then he currently has an answer about this.


    First of all, Sam was also very curious about this question and did not have any answer about this but aftering to the Terraria and getting an understanding of those different spiritual energies he came to understand that there could be a strange spiritual energy present in the danger zone which also affects those Monsters.


    Those could be the Berserker spiritual energy that is also present in Terraria but where Terraria gets affected by that spiritual energy in some specific moment most likely the dangerous zone of Eden Blue gets affected by that spiritual energy every moment and this is the reason those Monsters became like this.


    Also, the most important thing Sam needs to do is to research the spiritual system of any Warrior which the Warrior created the moment he was able to absorb The Spiritual essence from the spirit crystals. Unfortunately, he still was not able to discover a technique that would increase the limit of their potential.


    Now back to the main matter Sam also told them the history of their and how those Monsters appear in their ce. He also informs them that from the start he did not have any idea thats like Eden Blue also existed.


    This is the reason that when he was first able to encounter people from others he became very surprised and did not understand why the spiritual aura waspletely different from any other people.


    Emma and all the other people present in the room also noticed one thing the moment Sam began to describe his he also became very sad as he has been present in Terraria for a long time and this could be the reason that he is sad as he is unable to meet his family.


    After understanding that nobody asked about his family that much and just asked about his education and other different things about the Eden Blue.


    First of all, they are very curious to know why he came to their and how he came there. Unfortunately, they did not get any answer but nobody from the start expected that they would get the answer. But some told them about various things about his which were also interesting for them.


    After hearing all of these you can say everybody present there also wanted to visit his and want to experience those Dungeons which they were unable to experience on their.


    Nobody was able to fully discover the whole danger zone and this is the reason that money and the others also did not meet any Dungeons inside the danger zone. You can say in Terraria meeting a Dungeon could also depend on their luck but at the same time even if they encounter any Dungeons they need to be very careful because the monsters inside the Dungeons are very powerful.


    This ispletely different from the Dungeons and the Monsters of Eden blue. This is also the main reason that everybody wanted to visit Eden Blue and wanted to experience fighting inside the Dungeons. Unfortunately, to attend Blue they need to reachary grade and currently, this is impossible for them as they will need a long time to do that.


    Other than that he also exins about all the Warrior associations and all the other associations present on his. He also told him about his entrance examination and then about his Academy which he previously joined beforeing to Terraria. He also told them about his family and friends. He told him about his big sister and also about his teacher.


    All this term you can say everybody did not question anything and just silently listened to his exnation. Everybody noticed that while telling those things and became very happy as they were very close to him. But in the end, Sam just releases as he suddenlyes to Terraria leaving behind his.


    As he already told them about thepetition and also about all those other world people, naturally Maria and the others well understood the reason for bing worried.


    "But if you think carefully then this is also a good thing for me because my will be reaching the limit soon. It willpletely go through a transformation. During that time the core of my wille into the surface area and as you know many people from other worlds will try to attack my during the time to get the core.


    Livia and sister Emma, I think both of you already know about this as we already discussed with your grandfather previously.


    Every has a limit where after reaching that limit that will go through a different transformation where it will receive the benefit and after fully going through that change the will be more powerful and the spiritual energy will be more densepared to before.


    Every living being on that would go through a different kind of change during that time and also the restrictions that would be present on my would be gone during that time. This is the reason that I am worried about the situation but fortunately, the old man already told me that I still have some time before my reaches the limit and the corees to the surface¡­ "

 Chapter 703: Chapter 703 - Increasing stats

    " All the Saints are able to break through to S-grade or you can say early Elite grade before anyone and they are also able to save our from those monsters who suddenly appear on our. All the saints were the one who established the warrior association and all those other associations that would be necessary to maintain the peace of our.


    Like this they also created those Warriors schools and Academy where they also appoint other Warriors to teach students about the danger of those Monsters and characteristics of those Monsters.


    The same thing I also notice present in Terraria. But here many people could graduate from the warrior Academy on our. You won''t be able to graduate early even if you learn everything from your house or something like that.


    This is mandatory for every Warriors to present in the warrior association for 4 years and only after that any student would be able to graduate. But that does not mean those students are unable to kill monsters inside the dungeon or go to the danger zone.


    First of all inside the Academy everything became dependent on the merit points which you can collect bypleting the missions provided by the mission hall of The Academy. You will find various kinds of missions like our Warrior association. So even if anybody is not good at fighting, that person would be able to select another kind of mission which would provide merit points.


    I think I already told you about my entrance examination and also told you about all the people from the dark guilds. Those guilds were created by some Warriors who wanted to destroy our but in the end those people got destroyed by us and we almost killed everyone of them and destroyed almost everyone of their stronghold.


    Unfortunately even if we try to read the minds of those people those people would not be able to tell us about the real masterminds behind the dark guilds. Previously the saints told me they only fought the mastermind or you can say masterminds for two times. After that those people suddenly disappear and nobody knows about their location.


    Even when we are able to locate the real stronghold of those dark guilds, we are unable to capture the real mastermind and all the elders of the dark association. On the other hand most of you will get surprised after knowing the truth about those dark humans. Actually those dark humans belong to our and basically those are the people who previously disappeared from Eden blue.


    After reading the mind of those dark Warriors we are just able to understand that the mastermind and all the elders of the dark association present in a different dimension which only they could ess. Unfortunately if that person tries to open that  that would be connected to that different dimension it will be impossible for that person to open that.


    It looks like those dark humans or you can say dark Warriors also needed to get the permission from the mastermind to ess that different dimension and if anybody is controlled by someone and that person tries to open the gate which will be connected to the different dimension it bes impossible.


    First of all, the dark spiritual energy is present inside of that dark Warrior and it looks like if anybody tries to enter that different dimension getting controlled by someone then it bes impossible to be called the mastermind able to check if the person who is trying to open the gateway is under control or not.


    I really never thought that those people would be able to open a pathway that would be connected to the Abyss world. If it is possible then I really like to read the mind of those dark humans but it looks like aftering to that world those dark humans became the Minions of those abyss humans. Not only that, it looks like their spiritual energy bes more chaotic.


    They almost forget about their previous world and just beplete robots who just only listen to the order of those Abyss humans."


    Sam is currently telling them about the dark association. He still did not know how those people were able to get ess to the Abyss world. Even if they have spiritual energy same as the dark Spiritual energy, Sam is 100% sure the dark spiritual energy that is present in Eden blue ispletely from the dark spiritual energy of the Terraria.


    Maria and the others all this time did not say anything and just silently listened to all of this. They never thought that those dark humans would belong to Eden blue but they also somehow get ess to the Abyss world. At this time most of them also predicted something that Sam already predicted previously.


    It looks like those abyss humans also got the idea to turn warriors into dark humans after researching those dark humans who came to Terraria from Eden Blue. It looks like they notice something interesting in the body of those dark Warriors and this is the reason that they also get the idea and try to turn normal Warriors into dark humans.


    But Sam did not stop there as suddenly Maria and the others began to ask him various questions about his family and all his friends. This time you can see Sam excitedly telling everyone about his family and friends whom he cares about. Not just only them but he also told all of them about the personal teacher or you can say Alena. She is also the youngest person to reach the Elite grade.


    This isn''t surprising for anyone present in that room that those people from Eden Blue will need that much time to break through to early Elite grade. First of all the density of spiritual energy of Eden Blue is very low and you won''t be able to find loot that would be beneficial for you.


    Like this, sometimeter they finish the discussion and 1 Sam goes back to their room that was prepared by the king. Sam also finally gets the time to go back to his room and he already decided to increase his status before enjoying the party.


    The human king, the president of the association, and many other people already decided that they would be present at the celebration to say goodbye to Sam. Currently, you can say everybody has already be very busy with the safety of their own kingdom and people inside the danger zone.


    Sam is also going back to his and nobody knows how long it will take them to meet him and this is the reason that today they will be present in the Royal pce of the Oni Kingdom.


    ________________________


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Superior Human


    Health: (195050/195050)


    Spiritual energy: (194990/194990)


    Liquify spiritual energy - (10000/10000) (Full)


    [To increase the limit of liquidity spiritual energy you need to reach the maximum limit and then need to break through the limit. You won''t be able to increase the limit by using status points or upgrade points.)


    Soul energy - (220/220)


    Strength: 18450 + 1000 + 63


    Agility: 18450 + 1000 + 62


    Physique: 18445 + 1000 + 60


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 18450 + 1000 + 40


    Spirit: 18440 + 1000 + 59


    Soul:- 20 + 2


    Status points:- 00


    [System remark:- System upgrade due to a new world. Not only that host''s health and Spiritual energy will also be fixed based on the new status.]


    [System remark:- You received an additional boost because you were sessfully able to be a superior human. Compared to any of the normal humans you became the superior race that has much more potential and much more power.


    During your break through the system uses all the status points to evolve your bloodline and make you a superior human. You also sessfully have the option to evolve your bloodline and increase your power.]


    Grade: ary-grade) (Early) / (Early RRR grade)


    Potential: Celestial


    Upgrade point: 119K


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (cooldown period for 2 months.)


    Fusion technique


    The power of domain (Only consume liquidity spiritual energy.)


    Absorb technique:


    Superior Dragon Devour


    Trigon absorb (Grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    Bloodline skills:-


    Superior Aura


    Superior Destruction


    Superior eyes


    [ Remark: Finally the little man has the ability to protect.]"


    Sam is currently looking at the status after increasing his overall stats. He did not instantly use all the spirit crystals to turn into status points as he wanted to save some of those spirit crystals.

 Chapter 704: Chapter 704 - Dimensions Watch

    Finally, it is time for Sam to go back to his and because of this, you can see the human king, the president of the warrior association, and some other people who yesterday attended the celebration that was held by the Oni king.


    All of them were present in that ce to say goodbye to Sam and to make sure nothing unexpected happened when they opened the world bridge. As you know Sam did not reveal this information to that many people and this is the reason only some of them are present in that ce and he also has trust in those people that they would not disclose his real identity.


    But one thing he is sure of is that after knowing his real identity those people also previously got very surprised and every one of them also has the same question like the human king or the Oni king. How did hee to that ce without using the World Bridge? When he previously came to that ce he couldn''t use that world bridge toe to Terraria as it would immediately destroy his body.


    But as he already promised everyone aftering back from his he would tell everyone about the truth so everyone did not him to reveal the truth at the same time Sam did not know but every one of them who got to know about his real identity begins to think that his has some kind of mechanism or anything like that which most likely directly connected to Terraria.


    As Sam reveals the information about those dark humans, they begin to suspect more after hearing that information as those dark humans from Eden Blue somehow directly came to the Abyss world.


    Even though nobody has any idea about dark spiritual energy or if there is any technique that would help those people who could use the dark spiritual energy to directlye to the Abyss world or not, even with that every one of them began to suspect that something present in Terraria which directly connects this to Eden blue.


    Nobody knows that but even Sam is very confused about those dark humans but he did not tell anyone about this. First of all, you already predicted that most of them would suspect that he also came to Terraria using some simr kind of method that those dark humans used toe to the Abyss world.


    But Sam doesn''t think this is possible as he is the only person who is able to discover that teleportation symbol in the dungeon.


    You already decided after going back to his and solving everything he will also try to look at those destroyed dark association''s headquarters as his aspect he would find some kind of information in those ces rted to this matter. But he did not have that much confidence that he would find anything in those ces as previously those ces got destroyed by the saints.


    But Sam has a second n and that is to directly go to the Abyss world next time when hees back to Terraria.


    ____________________


    "I hope you already learn how to open the world bridge. As you can tell this is a veryplex pattern that was discovered by our ancestors. Our technique is very powerful and difficult and this is the reason that not everybody could use this technique.


    There are many others that are most likely able to use techniques that would help them to cross others but unfortunately, those techniques are just basics that are unable to help them to freely travel to any.


    Also, this is my important treasure and I am giving you this."


    After saying that the old Oni king gave a watch to Sam which was a congrattion from your normal hand watch. This did not show you the time and instead, it has a red button in the middle. Naturally, Sam did not know about this watch but almost everyone present in that ce was surprised when that old King brought out that treasure and gave it to Sam.


    Everyone knows the details of the treasure and this is the reason that they were very surprised.


    Sam also notices the surprised expressions of those people and these also make him more confused. Fortunately, the old King did not waste that much time and already began to exin the details.


    "This is called the dimension watch. I got this 50 years ago after hunting a monster that has the ability to control the space element. Fortunately, that Monster underestimated me and I was able to kill it. After killing that Monster I got this watch and this is a very useful treasure that would be helpful for every person who likes to travel through world bridges to go to differents.


    If you press that red button then immediately the receiver which you need to select would get notified that you are in danger and that person would immediately notify you about your location even if you are present on a different and far away from Terraria.


    By looking at you I can tell most likely something very dangerous is approaching your and this is the reason that all this time you are trying to be powerful as quickly as you can. While facing the danger, if you feel like you are in a difficult position, immediately use this watch and I wille to your location immediately.


    Also, I already set the receivers of this dimension to watch. The moment you press that red button every one of us will immediately get to know about this. So don''t try to put your life at risk as we are ready to help you. I did not want to see you be that much injured like before when you underestimate yourself and put your life in danger."


    The old Oni king said thatst sentence with a sad tone. Actually not only he but almost everyone present in that ce felt the same thing when previously Sam was in aa. At that time every one of them felt useless as they were unable to protect a child who put his life in danger to save their.


    " Yes, Sam, don''t try to put your life in danger and if you feel you are in a difficult position immediately use that as we will be ready to help you anytime."


    One by one everyone present there also begins to tell Sam to use the dimension watch. Even Maria and the others also begin to tell him. Even though none of them could use the wall bridge to help Sam, they also have confidence in their family.


    Not only that, you can say this also gives them a huge motivation to make themselves more powerful as quickly as they can so that if Sam faced a serious situation they would immediately be able to help him.


    After hearing all of this Sam becamepletely speechless as he did not know how to express his gratitude. He never expected that people would care about him this much and also that the old King would give him a precious treasure. He did not know how to express his gratitude.


    But he is very grateful for that. He did not know what type of danger he would face after going back to his so this thing could be very useful in a time when he was unable to control everything and needed help.


    But it did not stop there as one by one everyone present there began to give him some precious treasure which would be a life-saving thing If he was put in a difficult situation after going back to his. He told him that he didn''t need this precious thing but none of them listened to him.


    Even though most of the citizens of that did not think like that, everyone present in that ce thinks of him as the hero of their as without his help most likely they would be in a different situation.


    You can say that without his help nobody would be able to know about those Abyss humans, dark humans, and those other serious things which put the life of Terraria in danger. Nobody would ever expect that they have some people who have a connection with those Abyss humans and those people always try to harm their kingdom.


    This is the reason that everybody is giving him those life-saving things as they are worried about him. Livia and Maria almost started crying as they were going to say goodbye to their friend and did not know how long it would take them to meet him once again. Emma also had tears in her eyes but she did not start crying like Livia or Maria.


    You can say Sam already be her little brother and her little brother needed to go back to his to eliminate the danger that could also destroy his even though she was present in that ce she was unable to support her little brother and even if he faced a very dangerous situation she did not have the strength to support.


    Just after thinking all of these make her very useless in that situation and that also makes her clenched her fist tightly. Fortunately, she was still able to maintain her poker face so nobody realized anything.

 Chapter 705: Chapter 705 - World Bridge

    "Hey, guys don''t worry I promise you that I wille back here quickly after solving the problem on my as I also needed to solve the problem of Terraria as this became my second home. I hope until I do note back every one of you can reach the limit and sessfully be a powerful Warrior.


    Aftering back from my we will have many things to do to protect Terraria and I want everyone to be ready for that. There are many difficult challenges that all of you need to face and in your current situation, you won''t be able to help us.


    So, don''t get sad because I am leaving. I am just going to solve the problem of my home and if possible I would like to bring my friends to this new world alongside my family so that they can also be more powerful. Until then I hope you all will focus on your training and be a powerful Warrior."


    Sam said all of these with a smile to Livia, Emma, and Maria. All of them are present in that ce and as you know, all of them are very sad that Sam is leaving right now. But after hearing his words you can say everyone began to smile and instantly reply that he did not have to worry. They promise him that when hees back he will be surprised by their progress.


    After talking with them for some time he decided to talk with the human king, the Oni king, both the old king and the elders, and the president of the warrior association.


    "I know that I still did not be a legendary grade Warrior but I still have a n that would help Terraria. But without me, that is only possible so I hope every one of you waits until I do note back. Also, I am grateful that all of you helped me in all the dangerous situations as without all of your help most likely I would be dead right now.


    I think the old Oni king and the Oni king suspected my identity from the start but they still did not show any of these and were able to ept me. I can say because of their help I am able to stay in Terraria without any problem. I will never forget that help. Also, all of your reality teaches me many things that would help me to face danger on my.


    I received much help from all of you during the time when I wanted to activate my power of domain and I am grateful for that. Without any of your help mostly I still won''t be able to activate the power of the domain. Also, I am grateful that all of you gave me those precious treasures. Also don''t worry if I face a serious situation where I can tell that I did not have the chance to win.


    I would immediately contact them using the dimension watch."


    Like this Sam began to express his gratitude to everyone. Naturally after hearing all of these, everyone present began tough as they never expected Sam would express his gratitude like this.


    But at the same time, every one of them told him that he didn''t have to express his gratitude because instead every one of them was very grateful that he came to their and because of him most likely those Abyss humans were still unable to destroy any Kingdom.


    Finally, all the elders of the warrior association who are preparing the world bridge are able to open it and instantly you can see a blue portal appear in that ce. Beneath that blue portal, you would be able to see a strange pattern which is the pattern of the world bridge and that is veryplicated to make.


    Fortunately, all the elders of the association help in the situation, and with this in just only three hours they can create that world bridge sessfully. Sam also already learned how to create the World Bridge.


    Now this is the time to say goodbye to everyone. During this time Sam also had tears in his eyes. Every one of them almost became his second family and right now when he needs to leave to go back to his he begins to feel very sad.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry my boy. Just quickly finish the trouble of your and quicklye back. After that, I like to discuss many things with you and also want to know what type of n you have to face those Abyss humans.


    Until then you don''t have to worry as we would protect our at any cost and would try to investigate any kind of suspicious movement in the danger zone. So until then, you don''t have to worry and just focus on solving the problem of your."


    The president of the warrior association said that with a smile as he could tell Sam still feels worried that he did not solve the danger of Terraria. Most likely hearing that Sam calms down.


    ______________________


    Currently, if you look at him then you will notice he is wearing a special kind of body armor that was created by the Warrior Association to use the World Bridge.


    During the time when he uses the world bridge, he will face many space fluctuations that could be dangerous and even if he reachesary grade, it still could be dangerous for him so to protect any warrior from those kinds of fluctuations the Wadia association created that special body armor.


    Sam for thest time said goodbye to everyone and then began to walk toward the blue portal that was in front of him. Aftering in front of the blue portal he stopped for a second. Actually, before anything he needed to coat his whole body with spiritual energy. Only after that, he is ready to travel through the world bridge.


    Once again before entering the world bridge he turned around and waved his hand toward everyone. All of them also waved their hands and with that, Sam did not waste a single second to enter the portal. The moment he extended his hand toward the portal he instantly felt an additional force that sucked his body from that ce and instantly he came to a different ce.


    For almost 1 minute Sam just closed his eyes. He is unable to see anything because he can only see white light in front of him. It takes his eyes 1 minute to adjust and only then he notices the surprising thing that is in front of him. In front of he can see a blue bridge and if he wanted to see the end of the bridge, he was unable to see it.


    In front of him, you can also see a thickyer of fog present and this is the reason that he just only has limited vision in that ce. During all this time Sam maintains the coating of spiritual energy in his body as he already can feel the pressure just aftering to that ce and this ce should be called the entrance of the world bridge.


    Suddenly he just needed to travel through that bridge which is in front of him to go back to his. But this is also very dangerous because this ce ispletely separate from any. In one word you can say this dimension is the gateway to all thes who get ess to spiritual energy.


    Except for Terraria, there are many others who can get ess to this dimension but they just only get ess to the basic dimension and can only travel a limited distance.


    ''I should focus on my surroundings very carefully because I did not want to get lost and reach a different. If I remember correctly everyone told me that aftering to this ce I just needed to follow the bridge that has the color blue and should ignore all the other bridges.


    Also if I remember correctly then the president also told me in the midpoint the pressure would suddenly increase and that time I needed to be very careful because many space fluctuations would get created and if I was not careful I could also get seriously injured by those space fluctuations.


    Also if I remember correctly the president told me I would need almost 3 days to reach my. I don''t have any problem with that. ''


    After thinking all of this Sam did not waste a single second and once again checked his inventory. Fortunately, he still has ess to his system and this is the main reason he is very confident to cross the world bridge.


    After checking everything is okay and also checking his status is also okay, Sam finally decided to start his journey toward his. At this time Sam is also observing the surrounding area and he can also see many other bridges but every one of them has different colors.

 Chapter 706: Chapter 706 - Eden Blue

    Suddenly the bridge began to shake violently. Sam who is currently present in the bridge can also feel the vibration that is happening in the bridge and he already knows the reason for that vibration. He already came to the midpoint of the bridge and the space fluctuations began to appear in that ce.


    Every one of those space fluctuations is powerful because the moment it appears Sam would feel danger but fortunately the power of the fluctuation did not directly target his location. That special armor given by the warrior association is very useful in this kind of situation. But the coating of The Spiritual energy is the main reason behind the safety of Sam.


    If instead of Sam there were other Warriors present then that person would have already gotten injured by the space fluctuation. Even if that person coated his whole body with spiritual energy but still in front of the power of space fluctuation that coating wouldn''t be useful and that person would get injured.


    But because Sam isn''t using your normal spiritual energy the space fluctuation only just makes him feel danger and other than that it is unable to injure him. But even though he did not get injured, he could still feel the pressure that was created every time the space fluctuation appeared in that ce.


    Sam did not know how long he needed to wait in that ce but he decided to fully focus on maintaining the coating of The Spiritual energy. Even the president of the Warrior Association was unable to give him suggestions about the space fluctuation.


    Nobody knows how long it will take for the space fluctuation to disappear from that ce. Sometimes it just only takes 1 minute but sometimes it could also take one day for the space fluctuation to disappear from that ce. During this time it is very risky for anyone to travel through that bridge.


    First of all this world bridge is a separate dimension where it is connected to variouss and those fluctuations appear every time any Warrior tries to cross the bridge to go to a different.


    _____________________


    Eden Blue,


    It has been 3 years since Sam disappeared from Eden Blue. All of his friends have already be third-year students of the Royal Academy. On the other hand, Gloria already became a warrior and was also able to reach A-grade. Not only that, she is very close to reaching the S-grade.


    As she uses the true spiritual energy it takes her much timepared to any other warrior to break through. But she did not have a problem with that because even though she is just an A-grade warrior, even a S-grade Warrior would not try to fight her. First of all, during these 3 years, she became more ruthless and cold toward everyone except her family, friends, teacher, and her brother''s friends.


    During these 3 years, many things changed in Eden Blue. First of all every warrior of Eden Blue gets to know about variouss who also get ess to Spiritual energy and they also get to know that there are many Warrior grades. Not only that, they also get to know that their has a restriction that also protects them from those people from other worlds.


    Even though they are unable to predict what is the reason behind those Warriors from another world appearing on their, every one of them is sure that because of the restrictions of their, those people are unable to use their full power which would be very dangerous for them.


    Teacher Alena already told Gloria about the power of the people who are able to break through from S-grade. As you know 3 years ago there were many Warriors who got selected to go to the earth to help those prime humans. During this time all the Warriors of Eden Blue get to realize that there are many Warrior grades.


    During this time they also realize the power behind Those Warrior''s grades. Not only that, Alena already exined to everyone how dangerous the battle was but fortunately all the Warriors of Eden Blue have the protection that is given by Sam to every captain.


    Because of that protection, those people did not die on that battlefield where it is 100% sure that most of the people who came from Eden Blue would die. But fortunately, Sam is able to help them to protect their lives. These also teach them an important lesson and that is to not be reckless on a battlefield like that where they do not know anything about the power limit of their enemy.


    When everyone thought that everything would be over and they would be able to get help from the prime humans but they were wrong because after the war it looked like those prime humans became more interested in those artifacts that were able to save the Life of those Warriors from Eden Blue.


    Fortunately, all the saints already predicted something like this could happen and this was the reason that they were able to save their life. They instantly evacuate that ce ande back to their where they have the protection of the restriction force of their.


    Even though they did not get to know about the real reason behind those people who are targeting their, one thing they do get to know is that those people are waiting for something and when that thing appears on their it will be a battlefield. There are many warriors from differents present on the but everyone is currently hiding.


    In these 3 years all the saints captured many people who were from differents and like this, they were finally able to learn about the real reason. They already know that their has reached its limit and it will evolve soon. To evolve the''s core will appear on the surface area and every person from another is waiting for that core.


    After getting informed about the truth every warrior of Eden Blue became very serious. First of all, during that time, the restriction force of the Eden blue will disappear and every Warrior will be able to use their full power during that time.


    That is a very dangerous thing for them as none of these saints have any confidence that they would be able to win against those people who most likely already reach a new warrior limit.


    But that does not mean they will give enough on that and in these 3 years every one of them just continuously trained to increase their overall power so that they could also face the danger that would soon appear on their.


    Unfortunately, even though all the saints try to look for a technique that would be able to lock the space of their it looks like this isn''t possible for them. First of all, they have lower power limitspared to those people from differents so those people are able to break the barrier of their space even if the saints lock the whole space of theirs.


    You can say not just only those Warriors but every student of the Warrior Academy also became serious about this after they got to know about this. Who could have thought that their was going to face a danger like this?


    Now except for these matters, you can say every saint is alone with many different Warriors also trying to focus on the reason behind the disappearance of Sam. If the report is correct then thest time Sam was present in the base city''s dungeon. But after that suddenly he disappeared from that ce and even though they almost searched the whole Eden blue, they did not find any clue about him.


    Even when they searched the danger zone to look for any kind of clue about him they did not find anything like that. Naturally, everyone suspects that the disturbance of Sam is most likely connected with those other world warriors. But it is just that they are unable to be sure about this.


    Naturally, the disappearance of Sam made every one of his close friends worried about him. Every one of them wanted him toe back but unfortunately in these 3 years, they did not find any kind of clue about him. But even with that none of them gave up and are still looking for any kind of clue about Sam.


    There are many people who almost forget about him as in these 3 years he did not make any kind of appearance but there are also many people who would never forget him because of him they can stay alive on another. Without the help of those artifacts which were given by Sam none of those Warriors would have been alive.


    If you suddenly go to the Royal Academy you would be able to see a statue of Sam who is referred to as the hero of the Royal Academy and anybody could also see the achievement of Sam. Compared to 3 years ago all the friends of Sam also matured. Everyone knows about the danger to their and with this, the training is very hard.

 Chapter 707: Chapter 707 - Meeting

    Currently, Elena and the others are going toward the Academy. You can say once again this is the time for the annualpetition for all the Warrior Academy. Even though they are facing a dangerous situation right now, that does not mean they will stop the annual Warriorpetition.


    Even though many people already told all the Saints to stop organizing thepetition none of them agree with that as if they do that it will demotivate every Warrior and everyone. In this current situation, they need to maintain their confidence and this is the reason that thepetition is still going on.


    There are many people who are excited about thepetition but Elena and the others aren''t that excited. First of all, they did not even want to participate in thepetition but their teacher told them to participate in thepetition. This is the reason that they are participating in thepetition.


    You can say when Sam suddenly disappears from Eden Blue, all of his friendspletely lose their enjoyment and most of the time they will just stay serious or focused on increasing their power. Sam helped many times to save the life but when he suddenly disappeared none of them were able to do anything and until now they did not even find any clue about Sam.


    This makes them feel very useless and this is also a reason that they be that serious and only focus on increasing their power. ept those new fast and 2nd year students, the third year and the fourth year students do not know about Sam and they also know about his sudden disappearance.


    Even though those people weren''t his friends, still Sam was one of the strongest warriors they had seen. Most likely if he is present here right now then he would have already reached B-grade or A-grade. Unfortunately, he suddenly disappeared and most of the people predicted the reason behind his disappearance could be those other world people.


    Suddenly every student knows about those other world people and they also know those people are still present on their but they are just hiding and because of the restriction of their,those people are unable to use their full power. All the saints decided to publicize this news so that every Warrior became aware of the danger that they were going to face.


    Even though for some time there was chaos among all the humans,ter the saints were able to handle the situation. The good thing is that everybody after knowing about all of these became much more seriouspared to me and every one of them tried their best to prepare themselves to face the war that wasing toward them.


    Unfortunately, nobody knows the exact time when the''s core is going to appear. Previously those prime humans did not share that much knowledge about this and this is the reason that none of them know about the exact time. But all the saints predicted this year could be the time when the core will appear on the surface area.


    Even though none of them are able to find the location of those other world people, they can still observe the movement of those people who appear on their or leave from their using teleportation. This is the reason that this year the''s core could appear. Recently all the saints noticed a huge activity of those people.


    It is just that they are unable to discover the location of those people. Most likely those people from other worlds have some kind of technique or artifact that is able to help them to hide their presence. There could be a possibility that those people are hiding among those normal citizens.


    This is the reason that all the Saints are also always trying to observe almost every citizen of their.


    _________________________


    While Elena and the others are going toward the Royal Academy, Alena is currently present in the meeting room alongside other saints. The topic of the conversation is about the uing annual Warriorpetition.


    Everyone wanted to maintain the safety of thepetition and they did not want anything to happen during thepetition. This will be remembered 3 years ago when those people from other worlds quickly appeared. They also try to interfere with thepetition, this is the reason that they increased their safety during thepetition.


    First of all, from the moment that the location where thepetition is going to be held they send many warriors to surround the ce and always observe the surrounding area. There could be a chance that people from other countries will try to do something during thepetition.


    Saints John tells them the reports that those Warriors sent to him who are present at the site where thepetition is going to be held. Naturally, they also selected some dungeons which were also part of thepetition.


    "Every day those Warriors check the condition of those Dungeons and I am pretty sure no other World people would be able to enter the dungeon. Also because of our cameras that are also able to work inside the Dungeons, we would be able to observe everything that is happening inside of the dungeons.


    Not only that, like every year we would send more Warriors to stay inside of those Dungeons as if any participant posed a danger those warriors would be able to help them.


    Even all of you already know about the details of Dungeons but still, if you want you can look at the current report that is given by my people. I put them inside the Dungeons to monitor if any kind of change happens inside the Dungeon. Fortunately, nothing suspicious happened inside the Dungeons and also they were able to evacuate all the Dungeons.


    Other than that we need to maintain the safety of our and this is the reason that we cannot fully focus on thepetition during this time. If we put most of the power in just one area then the other area of our would be in a vulnerable situation. We still do not know when those people from other worlds are going to move, but we need to be ready for anything."


    After finishing, he said that he gave everyone the report that his people sent him. Every saint wasting no time begins to look at all the details. Naturally, all the Saints won''t be staying in the same ce during the time ofpetition. Only two of them will stay in that ce while the others will spread around the whole.


    Every person present in the room naturally thinks this is a good n because you cannot give guarantee that only the ce where thepetition will be held will get attacked by those other world people. Those people could also attack other ces if the safety of those ces decreases.


    __________________________


    Alena after finishing the meeting already came outside of the Warrior Association and currently, she is going to Earth our personal training hall which is also present beside the Warrior Association. That training hall is the property of the Warrior Association and this is specially made for Alena. Suddenly inside of the training hall, you can see one person who is currently meditating.


    Alena already knows about The Identity of that person as it is Gloria who is waiting for her teacher. Gloria was already able to break through to early A-grade and she wanted to stabilize her condition. The best way to stabilize her condition will be fighting her teacher or fighting Monsters.


    But as one of the strong Warriors, she also has the duty given by the warrior association and her teachers so she won''t be able to go inside the Dungeon. After graduating from the Royal Academy Gloria decided to join the Warrior Association alongside her teacher.


    "Congrattions on the sessful breakthrough. Mostly you are the youngest person able to reach early A-grade this early. I am proud of you full stop but I can also see that you are unable to stabilize your condition. Don''t worry I will help you to stabilize the condition and also get used to the new power that you achieve after breaking through."


    Alena said that to Gloria who finally opened her eyes and stood up from the ground. After looking at her teacher Gloria revealed a small smile and then became serious once again. Well, this is very rare for Gloria to smile like this as most of the time she will maintain her poker face and that also keeps away many Warriors who want to talk to her.


    First of all, most people know how violent she is and most of the time if anyone tries to get close to her, that person will immediately get attacked. This is the reason that most of the warriors will stay away from her. Naturally, everything happened from the moment she got the news that Sam disappeared.

 Chapter 708: Chapter 708 - Sparing

    Sam worked on that world bridge for almost one day and still he did not see the end of that bridge. He already expected something like this so he did not get disappointed or something like that. But during all this time he experiences many space fluctuations but fortunately he is able to tackle everyone of those graduates and only receives some light injuries.


    You can say the more he walked toward his the power of the space fluctuation began to increase but previously the old King told him when you reach very close to the end of the bridge the power of the space fluctuation would decrease.


    Unfortunately it looks like he still did not reach the end so the power of the space fluctuation just increased. Also during all this time he already noticed those other bridges which also have different colors. He did not see anyone in those bridges and also he doesn''t know why but his observation technique wasn''t useful in that ce.


    First of all the range of the observation taking has already decreased so he can only observe those bridges which are very close to his bridge. But even with that he can feel fluctuations that appear on those bridges.


    ''I am very curious to know what kind of bridge would get created when those people from others would use the basic world bridge to travel to my or any other. I don''t think those bridges would face this kind of fluctuation that I am facing right now.


    Even the president of the warrior association already confirmed that other than Terraria no other will reach the level ofary Grade. Even if that has that grade, to reach that power level the warrior would need to face a very difficult situation.


    So I don''t think those basic world bridges have this kind of limitation where you need to reach at leastary grade to travel. Compared to any of this world bridge I think the strange symbol that is present in the Dungeon of my is more powerful.


    I just needed to put my spiritual energy in that symbol to activate that and I would automatically transfer to the Terraria. I am really curious to know if those others which are also able to activate the spiritual energy would have some kind of connection like this with Terraria or not.


    I should inform all the saints or all my family about this because they really deserve to know about this. On the other hand if it is possible I would really like to bring them to Terraria where they would be able to get used to true spiritual energy and The Spiritual system that they develop would be more powerful.


    Even though everywhere any one would find all kinds of spiritual representations,pared to Terraria if any Warrior tried to develop a true spiritual energy system on my it wouldn''t be that powerful or able to mature that much as the normal spiritual system development.


    I would really like to see how much they improve. There is a possibility that teacher Alena, sister Fiona and all my friends also get to know about the true spiritual energy. I hope this is the case because previously I did not get the chance to teach them about true spiritual energy.


    But on the other hand I did not want to spread that news everywhere because it could also cause disaster. Even though all those previous people from the dark association almost teleported themselves to Abyss world, nobody could give guarantee that they did not have connection with Eden blue.


    If any people from Abyss world also target Eden blue then it would be much more dangerous. I just hope they did not target Eden blue.''


    Sam is thinking about those dark humans and the dark association that was previously present in Eden blue but currently those people most likely present in Abyss world. Sam is still unable to be sure that everyone of those people went to Abyss world.


    There is a possibility that those people still have a connection with Eden blue and there are many people who once again begin to use dark spiritual energy.


    First of all there could be a chance that those Abyss humans try to attack differents to get their sacrifice for their demon God. Nobody knows how those Abyss humans selected their sacrifice but there is a possibility that those people will try to attack differents. This is also the reason that Sam is worried about the safety of his.


    ''Sigh, the more I think the more I would get worried. Currently I should stop thinking about all of this because I just needed one or two more days to reach my. I just during the time nothing happened.''


    Sam thought that and once again started his journey. 1 hour ago he once again faced a space fluctuation and this time even though he tried to protect himself using his spiritual coating but in the end he still received damage. He suddenly felt some kind of force entering his body and began to damage him.


    Fortunately it did not stay that long and this is the reason he just only lost some of his health points.


    ______________________________


    Eden Blue,


    Suddenly in the training room of Alena you can already see people fighting each other and one of them is Gloria while the other one is Alena. Both of them are currently sparring.


    Every time they sh with each other a powerful impact is created that is also able to damage the surrounding areas and all the things that are present in their surrounding area. Fortunately a spiritual barrier had already been created in that ce which also prevented those impacts from getting outside of the training room.


    If any other Warrior came inside of the training room then that person would notice something is different with Gloria and Alena. Both their spiritual energies are different and this is the reason that the power of those impacts is much morepared to those impacts which were created by using ordinary spiritual energy.


    That person who uses ordinary spiritual energy would also face a massive pressure that got created because both Gloria and Alena are using true spiritual energy. In these 3 years you can say Gloria and her family decided to teach some of the trusted people about true spiritual energy.


    Sam already expected that and he also expected most likely his family would teach those people who are trustworthy because suddenly their is facing a dangerous situation. This is also the reason that all the people who are able to use true spiritual energy could also rival those Warriors who have upper Grade then them.


    Back to the main matter, both of them use true spiritual energy and in these 3 years both of them have already turned their spiritual system into a true spiritual energy system. Gloria instantly created an ice field, but Alena isn''t slow as she already created a zone of electricity. Naturally Alena isn''t using her full power which would be overkill against Gloria.


    The power of the electric field is able to stop that ice field which already freezes most of the training ground. But Gloria already expected this so she did not stop there and already created eyes Spears from those ices which got created in the training field.


    But at this time Alena already began toe toward Gloria using the power of element and also using her movement technique. Even though she is not using her full power, she is still very quick and in just 20 seconds Alena came behind Gloria.


    Not only that, she created a thunderbolt just above to hit Gloria. Gloria was even too unable to react at one time but already knew something like this would happen so she already created an ice world behind her which instantly got destroyed by that thunderbolt.


    The moment that ice world got destroyed Gloria disappeared from that ce using the ice escape technique. It is like a teleportation technique but she is only able to travel a limited distance and also if that ce only has ice she would be able to use that ice escape technique.


    Gloria appears almost 500 m away from Alena. Not only that this time she created ice Golems. Those ice Golems instantly surrounded the whole area. Those golems would be able to use the ice element to create ice Spears or ice beams. The weakness of those Golems is their chest where you would find the core.


    Gloria needed to use almost 30% of her spiritual energy to create those four golems. This is the reason that just after creating those four golems she already feels quite exhausted. But don''t think Alena will go easy on her.


    She already appears 50 m from Gloria and those golems. Not only that she already created thunderbolts and began to attack those golems without giving them that time to react.

 Chapter 709: Chapter 709 - Weaknesses

    Gloria once again using the ice escape technique got away from the previous location and the previous location already got hit by a massive thunderbolt. Not just only that, but those four golems that Gloria created earlier almost got destroyed by Alena.


    Alena already destroyed two of them and only two of them remain in that ce. Unfortunately, those two ice Golems are unable to use ice escape techniques. This is the reason that both of them are still present in front of Alena.


    Both the golems once again attack Alena with ice beams. Compared to ice Spears you can say ice beams are more effective. Using the ice both the golems wanted to freeze her or at least stop her movement.


    Unfortunately, nothing like that happened in that ce as Alena already disappeared and in the next moment a massive thunderbolt once againnded on that ce and this constantly damaged both the golems.


    Everything happened so quickly that Gloria still did not appear. But it did not take her that much time to appear at the next ce where she just after appearing used an ice beam. That attack is more powerfulpared to those golems.


    Naturally, she targets her teacher but don''t underestimate Alena. Even though she was just focusing on those Golems, the moment Gloria attacked her, Alena already noticed that and instantly disappeared from that ce. In just Millisecond she could disappear from any ce to another ce after turning her body into a thunder element.


    Don''t think this is easy because you also need to understand that the thunder element is more destructive so not many people are able to do that. Fortunately, she already mastered controlling the thunder element so she did not have any problem and already came behind Gloria. The moment she came behind Gloria she instantly created a thunderbolt to attack her.


    But this time this attack isn''t the same as before. If you are wondering why then it is because in the next second that thunderbolt did not attack Gloria from behind but instantly appeared in front of her. While a second thunderbolt appeared behind Gloria. Everything happened in just 1 second Gloria did not react that well.


    Even Gloria tries to protect herself by creating a wall behind her but unfortunately this time the attack is different. The world that Gloria created behind her got destroyed by that thunderbolt but at the same time, she is hit by that thunderbolt from her front.


    _________________________


    "As I told you earlier, you need to increase your reaction speed. Other than that I think you will not have any problem facing monsters who already reach the Early S-grade or peak A-grade. Other than your reaction speed, the second most important thing is that you need to increase the power of those golems.


    I already noticed that only two of those golems have reached the standard limit but those other two Golems are unable to reach that standard limit. Because of this I only target those to golems who reach the standard limit. I think you already noticed how much time it takes me to destroy those two golems while it did not take me that much time to destroy those other two golems.


    I also know that you wanted to create your other attack but unfortunately inside the training room, you won''t be able to do that. But that does not mean you just only rely on those attacks. The good thing is that you are still working on your physical strength and because of this, you don''t have any problems in closebat.


    But as I told you, you will have problems if you face multiple enemies at the same time, so you need to think of a way to win against multiple enemies.


    The thing is that you are also able to use the same method as your brother to coat your hand gloves with your spiritual energy and also instantly change the nature of the spiritual energy into an ice element. This is a good thing because with this your punches will be more effective."


    Alena is currently telling her students about the weakness that she still has. But don''t think because of this anybody would be able to do something like Alena. First of all, you need to remember that she is also using true spiritual energy which also makes her more powerful and faster.


    Using that the power of the element even became stronger so because of this you should not think that any normal Warrior will be able to do the same thing as Alena.


    Gloria without saying anything just listened to all those exnations and all those exnations were beneficial for her because with this she could ovee those weaknesses and she didn''t have to worry about facing the powerful.


    "I have a mission for you. If possible tomorrow you need to visit the Royal Academy as thepetition will start tomorrow so I want you to bring the team that will being from the Royal Academy to the ce where thepetition will be held. I know that you did not want to visit the Royal Academy as it will bring back the memory of Sam but still, this is an important mission for you.


    I did not trust anyone so I can only trust you about this. Currently, we do not know how many people from other worlds came to our world and there is a chance that those people are also hiding among us while we are unable to tell any kind of difference between them and our normal people.


    Well, this will be a great chance for all their friends of Sam to meet you as I think every one of them did not want to participate in thepetition but it is just their teacher telling them to participate and this is the reason that they are just participating. If possible I want you to motivate them to win thepetition.


    Also, this will be the chance for you to visit your mom and dad. I know both of them are also busy because they are just focusing on searching for the clue of your brother but the family should stay close to each other as it will also increase their willpower."


    Alena told all of this so that Gloria did not get sad and understood that this time she was sending Gloria because she did not trust those other Warriors. Nobody can give her the guarantee that those people did not have a connection with those other world people or those dark association people.


    You can say in these 3 years many things happened while people from the dark association also suddenly became active. Naturally, they are unable to do anything as every time they try to do anything they will get killed but it looks like those people from the dark association became wilder and did not care about their lives.


    You can think they became suicide bombers who just have only one thing in their mind and that is to destroy Eden Blue. If you are wondering why then only 15 days ago a person from a dark association who suddenly appeared in the middle of a city tried to blow himself up. Fortunately, the warrior association was able to kill that person before he did anything.


    Not just only that but in these 3 years many simr cases like this also appear. First of all, these also make the warrior association very confused because they are unable to understand the motive of those people from the dark associations. Previously at least they have a basic understanding of the motive of those dark associations but this time they are unable to predicate anything.


    Not only that, even after capturing many of those people from dark associations they are unable to find out the location of the headquarters which is a very terrible thing at this moment.


    First of all, they don''t know why these newly appeared people from the dark association became that wild but one thing they noticed about them was that they did not care about their own lives and also those people became like robots who most likely did not feel any kind of pain or anything like this.


    Previously Saint Mia also had a problem when she tried to look at the memory of those people from the dark association. During that time she could tell that a strong protection was present in the minds of those people and if it got triggered the people from the dark association immediately would get killed.


    In one word you can say currently that Eden Blue is in a very dangerous situation. First of all they need to worry about those people from others, and also they need to worry about those people from dark associations who suddenly became more active.


    Nobody could predict why something like this is happening but one thing is clear: everyone needs to prepare themselves to face the disaster that will be approaching.

 Chapter 710: Chapter 710 - Losing health

    Sam is resting now. This time you can see the injuries became more serious and he almost lost 30% of his health points. Fortunately, the space fluctuation did not stay in that ce for that long and this is the reason that he just only lost 30% health.


    Even though he is wearing that body Armor currently facing that space fluctuation you can already see cracks begin to appear on that body armor. That body armor already reached the limit previously while Sam was facing the space fluctuation.


    Even though Sam already coated his whole body with spiritual energy even with that body armor got damaged by the space fluctuation.


    ''Sigh, I don''t know how long I needed to stay on this world bridge before reaching my. I just hope the power of the space fluctuation did not increase further than that. Even though I only lost 30% of my health, my body still feels the pain which is enough to make me unconscious.


    If I suddenly became unconscious then it would be much more dangerous for me to survive in this ce because at that time I won''t be able to maintain my spiritual coating. Even though The Spiritual putting is trying to absorb as much damage as it can but stillpared to the power of the space fluctuation my spiritual energy did not be that much powerful.


    I want to understand why the old King told me it would be suicide for any Warrior who did not reach theary grade to use the world bridge. I am using the Origin spiritual energy coating alongside I have a powerful Armor that is developed by the warrior association to survive this kind of space fluctuation and the main things that I already reached theary grade,


    But in the end, I was still facing this kind of danger and I did not know what would happen if I tried toe here without reachingary grade. I don''t think I would be able to survive in this ce even if I used my whole spiritual energy to protect myself.


    Also when the space fluctuation appears, I can feel that something is working as the prevention force that is also stopping me from using my domain power.


    I don''t know how much it will be useful if I can use my power of domain but in front of that space fluctuation, I am unable to use my power of domain. I can tell that the space fluctuatespletely on a different level and I would only be able to match that power level if I was able to break through to legendary grade.''


    Sam already checks the whole body armor. He just releases a deep breath after looking at all those crack marks that appear on the armor and also just thinking about those sudden damage makes him feel scared about the space fluctuation.


    He did not receive any kind of attack or something like that. He just only felt a vibration force that instantly began to damage his body and he instantly began to feel so much pain in his body that he almost became unconscious. Not only does the space fluctuation damage his body but it also increases the pain sensation of his body.


    He wondered what would happen if any person tried to use the world for a short distance or if that person did not reach theary grade. Previously he forgot to ask that but by his experience, he could tell even that the warrior who tries to use the world will receive the same kind of damage and that person could receive damage more frequently.


    As you know he crossed a huge distance and this is the reason the size of the bridge is that long and he did not face those space fluctuations frequently. Even the president of the warrior association from Terraria told him he would receive space fluctuation which would depend on the distance.


    He also understands why the old King previously told him that if anybody is able to reach legendary grade then it would be easier for that person to travel using the world''s breach to any. Also, one thing he understands is that those people who release those articles about differents most likely reach the legendary grade.


    Only this could be the matter because without these people won''t be able to travel that match to satisfy their curiosity.


    _____________________


    ''Sigh, I did not know how much time had passed since I came inside this world bridge. After facing those space fluctuations and facing the pain I don''t know why but I am feeling that the time in this ce suddenly stopped.


    Nothing unfortunate happened to me because I needed to go back to my as quickly as I could to solve the matter of my. It is possible I also like to learn those basic teleportation methods which are able to help those other world warriors to travel to my without facing this kind of danger.''


    If possible Sam wanted to learn the basic teleportation technique that those Warriors from others use toe to Eden Blue. Even if that technique has a limited distance that anybody could travel, if that technique is really useful then it would be a huge help for every warrior of Eden Blue.


    After finishing all of this Sam once again gets up from the ground. One thing he realized while present in this bridge is that the regeneration ability of his body also decreases and even if he tries to use any kind of potion or any registration technique it won''t be that useful for him right now.


    Sam already knows about all of this because previously the president and all the other people told him who uses the World Bridge. So he already knew about this and he also knew that to regenerate he needed to depend on the self-reservation ability of his body.


    Now back to the main matter, he once again begins to advance. All this time he was just walking on the bridge because he was unable to use the movement technique and even if he used that he did not want to use that. Currently, if he uses the movement technique then he will face danger.


    The thing is that any kind of technique that helps him fly or move faster is only useful as during the time suddenly the surrounding space energy will try to control his body.


    So there is a huge chance that he will suddenly be kicked out from the blue bridge where he is present right now. Sam did not want anything like that to happen as it would be more dangerous and the president and everyone already knew him if something like that happened then he could also lose his life.


    Nobody could give him a guarantee of where he would appear if he used those bridges instead of the blue bridge. Also, the moment he leaves the bridge something unexpected happens and he will immediately teleport to a different ce. That time he doesn''t have to wait for anything that he is facing on the blue bridge. He just immediately appears in a different ce and that ce could be random.


    There is a possibility that if something like that happened then Sam would instantly appear in the core of the Sun, or some simr situation like this happened to him. This is the reason that all the time without using any kind of technique he just focuses on walking toward the end of the bridge.


    ________________________


    Eden Blue,


    Suddenly Gloria came back to her house where she was present in her brother''s room. At this time If you look at her or if anybody looks at her then that person would be surprised because she is crying right now. Even though she always maintains her cold look, she is still very disappointed in herself that she is unable to do anything to help her brother.


    Every time shees back to her house she will cry like that after reaching her brother''s room. Not only her but both her mom and dad also do the same thing. Even though her dad will not show tears in front of everyone, he feels very sad just thinking about his son.


    Victor and Hina already told Glory that they wille back today around night so until then she is just alone in her house. All this time she will spend her time in her brother''s room. She misses her brother very much and wants to hug him once again.


    During this time she also started to remember those precious moments that she spent with her brother. Just thinking about them also makes her happy.


    He was a miraculous person who every time would do something that nobody could have expected. Also because of him, you can say she, her family, and many other people became more powerful.


    Without Sam''s help, nobody would be able to survive when they went to Earth to help those prime humans who turned out to be traitors.


    Alena already told her some good news and that is those prime humans just using ordinary spiritual energy so this time Alena wasn''t worried about anything if she needed those people once again she would kill them.

 Chapter 711: Chapter 711 - Closer to the endpoint

    ''Sigh, it looks like I already came toward the end.''


    Sam thought that while recovering from the injuries. This time he loses almost 20% of his health. Butpared to before the power of the space fluctuation already decreases. He still remembers that some time ago he almost lost 50% of his health.


    ''I think that the previous part was the center point of this bridge. Unfortunately, I won''t be able to Mark that center point because I did not notice any kind ofndmark around that area, and also when I try to observe the surrounding area I feel like everything is the same as before.


    Sigh, currently I just hope I am able to reach my. But I cannot imagine how much any normalary grade Warrior will lose their health points when they use the world reach to travel this kind of long distance. ''


    Mostly because of this, previously the president and even the old King told him that noary-grade Warrior wanted to use the world bridge as they already knew about the danger. Actually before using the world bridge, you needed to get permission from the warrior association or the king of that Kingdom.


    So the president or any king would not support anyary-grade Warrior using the world bridge. This could be very harmful for that person and if that person is unable to maintain the spiritual coating then it could also take the life of that person.


    Fortunately, he gets the permission as everybody has confidence in him and by hearing his story everybody already knows they won''t be able to stop him. Even if they try to stop him he will try to activate the world bridge on his own.


    This could be also the reason that before using the World Bridge he also received life-saving loot from many people as they worried about his safety.


    ''I am thankful for all of these life-saving loots and also for this specially made armor that they give me to protect my life. I don''t know what would happen to me if I did not get this armor or did not have any idea about the world Bridge.


    Even using the Origin spiritual energy to coat my whole body, I did not think I would be able to survive in this ce and I would already get exhausted.''


    Sam thought that. The good thing is that he already recovered 80% of his health and needed some time to recover the rest of his health. All this time you should know that he continuously maintains that spiritual coating. Even for a second, he did not deactivate that coating because the moment he deactivated the coating he would receive massive damage from the surrounding space.


    Back to the main matter,


    He used that World Bridge for almost 5 days. It Looks like previously the president gave him a time limit of 3 days based on the power limit of legendary grade. Unfortunately, as he did not reach that limit he needed almost 5 days to reach the endpoint of the bridge.


    But even with that Sam did not know how long it would take him to reach the true end, where he would meet the portal that would immediately take him to the Eden Blue. But one thing is clear after realizing that he is very close to the end he already feels extra energetic.


    Suddenly he wanted to go back to his as quickly as he could so that he would be able to meet his parents and all the other people that he cared about. Everyone must be worried about him. But at the same time, the main problem was that he did not know how long time had passed on his.


    He just has a basic idea about the time difference between both thes so this is the reason he is sure this is the time for the core to appear. But even with that, he did not get the exact time difference.


    ____________________________


    "I already told you our son is very brave and he is a miraculous person. You just need to trust our son. I think even if he gets kidnapped by those people from others, he would escape from that ce. I have full confidence in my son that he will be able to do that.


    Also, you know how strong the true spiritual energy is where even if we face any peak A-grade warrior we would not have any problem in our fight. So just think what would happen when anybody would fight our son who has more powerful spiritual energypared to the true spiritual energy."


    Victor tells his wife to have confidence in their son. Almost it has been 3 years since Sam disappeared from Eden Blue and they did not get any kind of clue about him.


    Sam previously informs them about his origin spiritual energy and also shows them how powerful the Origin spiritual energy is. Because of this, Victor has confidence in Sam.


    Hina and Victor are present outside Sam''s room. Both of them look at Gloria who is present inside Sam''s room and she is looking toward Sam''s photo while tears fall from her eyes.


    She is very sad that her brother suddenly disappeared and she is unable to find any kind of clue about what happened to him. First of all, you know for a few years, she and her brother did not have a good rtionship butter they became closer and suddenly this kind of thing happened where she once again lost her brother.


    Even though Victor and Hina want to console her, both of them are unable to do that as they are very sad about that matter. Fortunately, Victor is trying to stay strong as even if he breaks down, nobody would be present there to support his wife and daughter.


    After hearing that Hina just nodded but you can still see the tearsing out from her eyes. She is very worried about her son. She did not know what his condition was right now. What is he eating? What kind of people he is dealing with? All of these questions made her more worried.


    __________________________


    Alexa, Elena, and the others suddenly go toward the mission hall of The Royal Academy to ept the new missions that they previously noticed present in the mission hall. You can say the moment they lose their friends suddenly every one of them changes and from then every one of them just focuses on getting themselves powerful.


    Fortunately, Gloria already helps them to change their spiritual system into a true spiritual system which also makes them more powerfulpared to any of your normal Warriors. But it did not make them happy but it did exactly the opposite thing.


    First of all, Sam is the one who discovered the True spiritual system. This makes them more powerfulpared to any of your normal warriors but the main problem is that the main person isn''t present in that ce.


    Nobody knows about his current condition. What if he is facing a dangerous situation where he can also lose his life?


    Unfortunately, even if Sam was facing a situation like this none of them would be able to help him in this kind of situation. Their friend just always helps them and always puts his life in front of them if they face any kind of dangerous situation. Currently, when he needs their help none of them are able to do anything.


    This is also a reason that from then none of them wanted to rest even for a day. They would just always stay busy doing missions or fighting. All of their teachers and family members always try to stop them from overworking, but unfortunately, none of them seed.


    This is also a big reason that all of their teachers forced them to participate in thepetition so that at least they would take their time to prepare themselves. But fortunately, even in this kind of situation Alexa and others will not stop their work.


    As you know thepetition will be starting from 2 dayster but even in this situation Alexa and the others decided to ept the mission as they have confidence they wille back before thepetition.


    Not only Sam''s friends but all of those students from 3rd year to 4th year will always try to ovee their limit to reach a new power limit. First of all, they are currently facing a dangerous situation where they could lose their life against people from others. It is just that they did not work as hard as Alexa and the others.


    Well, not anybody would be able to do that as you can say that a true spiritual energy system not only just increases the power of spiritual energy but at the same time increases the strength of their bodies so they were able to train like this.

 Chapter 712: Chapter 712 - Sudden incident

    Alexa and her teammates already selected the mission. This time they did not select any hard mission because that would take much time toplete and they did not have that much time. Well, they could just go inside of the Dungeon without selecting the missions but they are just selecting the missions to get some merit points and their main motive is to fight those Monsters.


    This time this selected the missions rted to heart Grass. They need to collect 1000 heart Grass. They also need to collect superior-quality heart Grass. Normally you will find hearth Grass inside most of the Dungeons which has forest like environment but you won''t be able to find the superior quality hearth Grass in every Dungeon.


    The grass has the size of a heart shape and normally you will find it in green or blue color. But every superior quality hearth Grass has a purple color. Finding those grasses isn''t easy but it isn''t impossible for them as they already know the location where they will find those grasses.


    But Alexa, Elena, and their friends did not know but their teacher had already been informed by the mission hall''s charge. Most of the people of the Royal Academy already recognize Alexa and her friends so the person in charge of the mission hall is also familiar with them and he immediately contacts every one of their teachers.


    Every one of their teachers or you can say even the one in charge of the mission hall that Alexa and her friends would always put their lives at this kind of risk and would not rest even for a day that is necessary for their bodies.


    Everything started to happen from the moment Sam and even the in charge of the mission hall tried to exin to Alexa and her friends that they were resting but none of them listened to him.


    Elena and the others also get told by their teachers but even those teachers get ignored because they did not want to take any kind of rest as they wanted to grow more powerful. This is also the reason that the in charge of the mission hall will always alter all the machines the moment he gets informed that Alexa and her friends areing toward the mission hall.


    Now back to the main matter, Alexa as the leader of that group already told everyone to go back to their house and prepare themselves as they will be leaving for the dungeon tonight around 8:00 p.m.


    Elena, Kenny, and others did not say anything and all of them agreed with Alexa. After that, one by one they begin to separate and go back to their houses. Even though they would always stay inside the Dungeon or always stay busy with their training, they would also spend their time with their family.


    Today they will be going inside the Dungeon once again so before going inside of the Dungeon naturally they wanted to inform their family and also wanted to prepare everything for the Dungeon.


    _______________________________


    Alena is currently busy in heart training inside the training room that is present in the Royal Academy. After bing an S-grade Warrior she almost did not spend her time inside the Royal Academy as a teacher but she will stille back because she still is a teacher of the Royal Academy. What if suddenly came back to the Royal Academy?


    Because of this, every day she will spend some time in the training room of the Royal Academy.


    After changing the spiritual system to a true spiritual system she faces some problems at first. She almost faces unimaginable pain. During the time she felt that her body was breaking apart at every moment and she was also able to feel everything.


    Fortunately, even in that condition, she did not lose consciousness and this is the reason that she was sessfully able to learn the true spiritual energy system. Naturally, true spiritual Energy is very miraculouspared to normal spiritual energy.


    Even if she created a basic Attack by using the true spiritual energy it would be more powerful if any other Warrior created that Attack by using most of their spiritual energy.


    But she did not tell anyone about the true spiritual energy or the process of changing their spiritual system into a true spiritual energy system. First of all, Sam is the one who invented that method so without his permission she did not want to reveal that important information to anyone.


    All this year she is just waiting for Sam toe back because she also has the confidence Sam will decide to teach that to everyone that he trusts.


    On the other hand, if you are wondering why she is also working that hard then it is because she knows the current situation of her and also previously she went to earth to help those prime humans. In that ce, she gets to know about various things which are also enough to make her fully focus on her training to increase her power as quickly as she can.


    First of all, there are many powerful Warriors who have already broken through to the next grade from S-grade. Those people have a huge differencepared to any S-grade warrior. Naturally from those prime humans, she also gets to know why those people are targeting others targeting their Eden blue.


    At first, even she thought alongside every other warrior that they would receive help from those prime humans but unfortunately in the end they were wrong as those prime humans tried to attack them at thest moment. Really if they did not have the artifact that was given by Sam to protect them most likely everybody who went to Earth from Eden Blue would have died.


    Those people at first wonder how to approach friendly so that they have the advantagepared to any other Warriors but when they realize those warriors from Eden Blue have something that is also able to protect them from those peak special grade Warriors. This was a huge matter to them. This is also the reason that those prime humans decided to attack those Warriors from Eden Blue.


    First of all, they thought it was developed by Eden Blue and that it had the power to protect themselves from special-grade Warriors. What would happen if they got the technology and tried to develop that? They have the confidence that they would be able to improve the quality of those artifacts so this is the reason that they attack.


    Alena also had one artifact like that which was given by Sam to her and most likely this artifact is far more powerfulpared to those defects which were given to those other Warriors by Sam. If you are wondering why then she was able to protect herself from even an intermediate Elite grade warrior.


    Fortunately, she did not tell anyone about this and she just only used that one time during the time when she was present on Earth.


    Naturally, she did not know anything about Elite grade or special grade, she just got to hear from a prime human that the powerhouses of their or the powerhouse from their enemy already reached a power limit which was enough to destroy Eden Blue without any reinforcement.


    ''If possible I wanted to know the limit of my artifact that is given by Sam. Unfortunately, I won''t be able to examine this artifact until he does note back or until our gets attacked by those people from others. Many people after knowing the truth be very scared as they will always think today will be the day when they will get attacked.


    This is a very serious thing for every citizen of my as these also create chaos and many people begin to panic in every small matter and that is also very problematic. They need to prepare themselves to face those people from others and also those citizens who are only able to fight, needed to stay strong in the time of war.''


    She is thinking all of these while she is resting right now to recover the stamina that she lost. Even though she did not have a strong sparring partner, the warrior association already developed those training robots which also have the power limit of S-grade.


    She was fighting those robots and currently, she was just recovering her stamina when something unexpected happened. Suddenly the whole training room began to shake. Not only that, but suddenly a huge fluctuation appeared which was enough to put pressure on her body.


    For a second she is unable to proceed with what happened but instantly uses her power to stabilize the condition and instantly wears her armor. Currently, she is very serious as she wants to know what happened, why suddenly that kind of spiritual fluctuation appeared, and why everything began to shake violently.


    Wasting no time she already began to fly in the sky. She is the only one who feels that as every living being on Eden Blue already feels that energy fluctuation they also get affected by that earthquake that appears all over Eden Blue.

 Chapter 713: Chapter 713 - The Gate

    All the saints suddenly went toward the source of that vibration. Naturally, everyone knew it wasn''t normal as almost everyone present in Eden Blue could feel the energy fluctuation that also appeared alongside the earthquake.


    Well, it would not be that serious if they weren''t familiar with this spiritual fluctuation or you could say the energy fluctuation that appears alongside the earthquake. This is the first time that day faced this kind of energy fluctuation which was already enough to put pressure on those S-grade Warriors.


    ''I just hope those people from others aren''t behind all of this. But I don''t think they would be able to do that as they are also facing the restriction and the core of our still did not appear on the surface area.


    If I am not wrong, when the core appears on the surface area some extraordinary thing will happen which will be enough to announce the appearance of the core of the. Also, those prime humans previously told us that when the core of the appears every living being on the will receive a blessing from their.


    But currently, I am not feeling anything so definitely this isn''t happening because the core appears. What is happening right now? I just stop nothing dangerous happens which could put our life in danger,''


    Saint John thought all of this while also going toward the source from where the earthquake appeared and from where he and all the other Saints could sense the energy fluctuation.


    Currently, none of them know that even those people from others are also able to say the energy fluctuation, and previously when that energy fluctuation and the earthquake appeared they also felt the pressureing out from the energy fluctuation. This also put them in a very serious position as they never thought anything like this would happen on a like this.


    Naturally, all of those people suddenly hid themselves as though they could have tried to fight with those warriors of Eden Blue but that would be unnecessary because they also have many otherpetitors who also came to Eden Blue for the same reason.


    Because of this in these 3 years, they just stay silent and increase the strength of their group. Now in a situation like this, they also wanted to go toward the source to see what happened but that would also reveal their identity so they did not want to risk that.


    Even those people from the Abyss world or you can say those people who were able to use the dark spiritual energy did not go toward that ce recklessly. First of all every citizen of Eden Blue begins to panic. They almost thought that the war would finally happen and because of this they began to panic.


    Fortunately, all the Warriors of the Warrior Association did not go toward the source; they began to take care of the situation. Before anything they need to help those people so that they can rx.


    Fortunately, when those citizens got to know that this wasn''t a warning of the war they began to calm down. But even with that, they were very scared as they did not know what happened and why they felt this kind of danger. Suddenly, all of them just hoped that all the saints would handle the situation and also told him what happened.


    This is also the reason those people from others did not do anything as they also hoped that those saints would reveal what actually happened and if misery they would also check that ce after when those Saints finished their observation.


    _________________________


    Everyone who goes toward the source uses their full power. They wanted to reach that ce as quickly as they could. Fortunately, every one of them began to feel the energy fluctuation which almost scared every one of them and began to decrease in power and the power of the earthquake also began to decrease.


    Now this is good news for everyone but still, before anything they need to find out what happened and why something like this suddenly appeared.


    Using their full power somehow all the Saints were able to reach that ce in just 30 minutes. Alena, Saint John, and Saint Mia were the first ones to appear in that ce as they were close to that area. When everyone also came to that ce they suddenly saw a weird situation that also made them confused.


    But naturally, none of them let down their guard, and all of them prepared to fight back if anything dangerous appeared in that ce. If you are wondering what weird things appear in that ce, then when they reach that ce all of them could see a light which suddenly appears in that ce.


    Other than that white light that appeared in that area they did not see anything and when everyone came close to that ce they could still feel the energy fluctuation which already decreased in power and it did not put pressure on their body. The weird thing is that when they focus on that ce using their vision technique they can also see space begin to crack on that ce.


    Like this, in just 10 minutes the energy fluctuation already disappears from that ce but the light is still present in that ce and also all those space cracks begin to increase in size which is enough to make them very serious and every one of them is already preparing for their attack.


    Even though none of them knew if this was also the same kind of teleportation technique as those people from others or not, or if it was apletely different thing or not, they wanted to prepare for everything.


    Slowly time passes and the crack begins to increase in size. First of all that crack appeared out of nowhere in the air and it already reached 15 feet in size.


    "Everyone prepare yourself. Even though we did not have any kind of information about this, we need to prepare for everything. If this is also a teleportation technique used by those people from others then the moment they appear who will handle them as they will be in restriction of our?


    But even if it is the case then we need to handle the situation as we did not know what was happening in this ce."


    Saint John told that to everyone and every one of them also agreed with him. Not only did they prepare their attack but they also already increased the power of their attack. If more people from others appear in that ce then they would immediately take care of those people without giving them the time to fight back.


    Fortunately, when those people appear on their they would immediately face restrictions so this is the advantage all the saints have in this matter.


    ___________________


    It has been 50 minutes since that situation appeared and currently the size of those cracks has already reached 20-ft and most likely they have already reached the limit as the light begins to disappear. Once again it takes almost 10 to 20 minutes for that like to disappear and the moment that light disappears something unexpected happens.


    A very big door almost 20 feet tall appears in that ce and instantly everyone present close to that Gate begins to feel pressure Once again which makes them serious and they are already ready to attack. Even though they begin to feel the pressureing out from the gate, fortunately, it is very serious like the previous pressureing out from the energy fluctuation.


    Sometimeter slowly that begins to open which makes everyone very alert. Currently, all of them were wasting no time fully focusing on that gate and they wanted to see what would happen or you could say what would appear from that Gate.


    Suddenly, all of them begin to hear the sound of footsteps getting closer and closer. Almost 5 minutester they can see somethinging out from that Gate. But none of them are able to see who ising as they are unable to see anything inside the gate even though the big gate is fully open.


    Even if they try to use their observation technique or vision technique in full power they are unable to see anything. It is like some kind of force preventing them from looking inside of that ce and this is enough to make them more serious and they are just ready to attack.


    Fortunately, it did not take that long for them to see a human figure most likelying out from that Gate. For a moment everyone thought once again of warriors from others appearing on their.


    Instantly Saint John gives everyone the signal to attack the moment that human or you can say that person from anotheres out from that Gate. Everyone of them also already ready to attack the moment that human figure will came out from the gate.

 Chapter 714: Chapter 714 - Sam?

    Sometimeter every one of them can already see the human figureing out from that Gate. They already be very serious because currently all of them are feeling the pressure that is most likelying out from that human figure.


    For a moment everyone thought that humans most likely are prime humans whoe toward their for the''s core. So they just wait for that human figure toe outside of the gate and instantly they will attack that human figure.


    Naturally, the moment that human figurees out from the gate he will automatically get restricted by the restriction force of their and it will be their chance to attack that person.


    Every saint also hid themselves because they did not want to give that person that time to react or do anything that would give that person that chance to escape from that ce.


    Like this, 5 minutester that figure finally said his foot outside of the gate, and instantly all the saints who were waiting for the chance immediately attacked that person without giving him the time to do anything.


    That person did not even get the chance to do anything when he instantly got attacked by those saints from all over the direction.


    Once again a very big spiritual fluctuation appeared in that ce and at the same time a huge explosion also appeared in that ce. From the Saints, all the sayings maintain the distance so that they do not get affected by the effect of the explosion.


    _____________________


    "Boom!!!"


    "Don''t stop attacking as I did not want to give that person any chance to do anything. As you know this person is powerfulpared to us and most likely he also has a technique or artifact which could help him escape from that ce or could be dangerous for us."


    Saint John told everyone to keep attacking. Nobody could give him the guarantee that with their firstbined attack, they were able to kill that person or be able to injure him.


    Previously when they went to the Earth, they also got to know every one of those people who already broke through from S-grade had superior defense so because of this, Saint John did not want to take any kind of risk.


    Like this, they just keep attacking that ce without stopping and they almost attack like this for 30 minutes. 30 minutester, they stop attacking because Alena and some of them already begin to feel exhausted after using so much spiritual energy from the start. In every attack, they wanted to give their 100% so naturally huge amounts of spiritual energy also got consumed during that process.


    "Were we able to injure him?"


    Saint Mia quickly asked that question using their mind link but nobody could answer that question. First of all, even using the spiritual observation technique they are unable to feel anything and also even if they use the life detection device they would not be able to find anything.


    The life detection device that they are using also has a loophole, and by using that many Warriors could also hide their presence. So they did not know if using that would be useful but Saint John decided to use that to see if he would get any kind of result or not.


    ____________________________


    By the attack from those saints, almost a 10-kilometer area was destroyed. Everything present in that area has already been destroyed because of the explosion and right now a huge hole also appears in that area. Other than ashes you won''t be able to find anything.


    Slowly theyer of smoke which previously created because of the explosion begins to fade away and finally everyone gets the chance to see what is the situation of the ce and if they are able to kill that person or are able to injure him.


    During this time they are also very allowed about the surrounding area because there could be a chance that a person previously able to escape and currently present in a different direction and ready to attack them. Fortunately, after using their observation technique continuously, they did not find any kind of spiritual aura around them.


    Fortunately, everything happens in an open field which won''t be able to affect the citizens. This is also the reason that they freely attacked that ce. Now slowly thatyer of smoke feeds away and slowly they can see how much damage they have caused by using their attacks continuously.


    Saint John did not get happy when he began to look at the life-detection device. Unfortunately, he did not find any kind of life present near them. This is a very important thing to worry about so he already contacted everyone and told them the situation.


    ________________________


    "Cough¡­ Cough¡­ Can you guys at least give me the time to reveal my identity? Fortunately, I was somehow able to survive because I don''t think anyone would be able to survive this kind of attack just after getting affected by the restriction force.


    Please don''t attack me again and let me reveal my identity. I am wearing body armor which hides my face so just let me show my face."


    Saint John, Saint Mia, and the others are once again ready to attack the same ce when they suddenly hear all those words in their mind. This once again makes them very startled. First of all, they never thought that person would be able to contact them by using the mind link.


    First of all, all Saints already use a very strong mind protection technique all the time which also restricts any Warrior who has the mind control technique or technique rted to mind from doing anything.


    But somehow this person is able to contact them by using the mind link. This is naturally a very serious matter but suddenly everyone bes confused when they hear that voice. Don''t know why but the moment they hear the voice they can tell they are very familiar with that voice.


    This is naturally a very important thing as they became sure these voices did not belong to any person from Earth as it did not give that kind of familiarity. Also as that person says it is true that they did not give that person that time to reveal his identity.


    Previously they were only able to see a person who came out from that Gate whose face was covered by a helmet or something like that.


    With this, they did not instantly attack that person this time and gave that person time to reveal his identity. On the other hand, the whole ce was already clear and they could already see a strange thing appear around that person. By looking closely they can tell it is some kind of spiritual barrier that protects that person.


    When that person noticed everyone finally stopped attacking him he was able to rx. Without wasting any time he quickly began to remove the helmet that he was wearing all the time.


    ___________________________


    All of them became very shocked that they did not know if this was true or not. Instantly everyone begins to feel that they are present in some kind of dream. They cannot believe what they are seeing right now.


    In front of a person slowly walking toward their direction and if you look at the person you will see a very familiar face. Every saint knows that face very much but unfortunately, 3 years ago that person suddenly disappeared and from then they just tried to find any kind of clue about that person.


    Every one of them just has a speechless expression. Even Alena did not know if this was true or not or if this kind of trap was set by those people from others or not. She and all the other saints saw Sam''s face. Naturally, this is a very confusing matter for them and they did not know if this is real or not.


    For almost 3 years they tried to search for his clue but unfortunately, they did not find any kind of clue. But suddenly he appeared in that ce and he was the person who previously released that dangerous pressure.


    Sam on the other hand finally rxed when he saw the confused face of every saint. Not only that he also already noticed his teacher who is present among all the saints and she also has the same expression as everyone.


    Most likely they still cannot believe if it is Sam or not and just thinking about this makes him smile. Alena came back to her senses the moment she saw that person smiling the same as her student who disappeared 3 years ago. Even though the smile and the face are the same as her student, she still cannot believe that this is the real Sam.


    "Stop, don''t advance further than that. Before anything I wanted to verify your identity and only then would we know if you are real or not."


    Suddenly, Saint John said that and every Saint also agreed with him. Before anything they wanted to confirm the identity of that person and only then they would get to know if this was Sam or not.

 Chapter 715: Chapter 715 - Imposter?

    1 minute aplete silence was created in that ce. First of all, they need to understand what is happening as suddenly Sam is present in front of them but they do not know if he is real or not.


    Alena is the one toe back to her senses. She instantly begins to use her observation technique on Sam. But not only that she instantly became alert because this could be a n of those people from others. So before anything he needs it to prove that he is the real Sam.


    "Don''t advance further than that. We don''t know if you are real or not and because of this we need to get some information to decide if you are real or not."


    Alena instantly said that with a threatening tone. If the person in front of her is Sam then it is very good news but if those people from others are trying to act as Sam then this is a serious matter. She cannot bete for this kind of thing.


    Sam on the other hand after hearing all of these just smiled as he already expected something like this to happen. The good thing is that all of them stop attacking him. Sam is also quite exhausted right now.


    The moment he set foot on Eden Blue, he was instantly affected by the restriction force. Not only that but in the next second he got attacked by every saint continuously. During that time the side effect of the restriction force was still working and in that condition, he needed to protect himself from those attacks.


    Fortunately, even though his spiritual energy was restricted, all the techniques were still as powerful as before. So to protect himself he uses a huge amount of spiritual energy to create that powerful spiritual barrier around himself and only like this he can save his life.


    ''This is a good thing that everyone stops attacking me but I don''t know how they wanted me to prove my identity. I wanted to go back to my house to see my parents and everyone and not only that I wanted to look at my status right now.


    But I don''t think in this kind of situation I shouldn''t look at the status and get distracted. What if the teacher and everyone tried to attack me at that time.''


    Sam was wasting no time. But the question is how he will prove his identity. Fortunately, Alena already has a n where it will show everyone if he is the real Sam or not.


    She is going to ask some important questions which only Sam knows except Gloria. Not only that, she already informed Gloria using the mind link. As a S-grade Warrior, she can use her mind link to contact anyone. But to do that she needs to use a huge amount of spiritual energy.


    But in this current situation, she wants to get this kind of help as much as she can so that she gets to know if this person is real or not.


    On the other hand, Gloria who is present in her house alongside her parents instantly got contact with Alena. This naturally made her very confused because she did not think her teacher would contact her like this. She was just going to ask what happened when Alena quickly told her toe to her location. Not just Gloria but if possible she can also bring her parents because Alena needs their help.


    Naturally, all of this information made Gloria very confused but she did not want to waste any more time as by listening to the voice of her teacher she could tell it was a very important matter. So wasting no time she quickly informs her parents and all three of them begin to use their full power to reach that ce.


    They will take some time and during that time Alena already started asking various questions that only Sam knows.


    " Where did we meet for the first time? Also, tell me the date when we meet for the first time."


    Alena asked that question. This is a tricky question that not everybody can answer. Even if those people from others try to search for that information they would not be able to find any information. All of this happens before the entrance examination where Sam participates.


    Hearing this question most of the saints also became surprised because they never thought she would ask this kind of question. Well, there is a chance that everybody will answer if she meets Sam at his house as Gloria is also a student of hers. But at the same time when she asked about the date, everybody rxed a little because nobody would be able to tell about the date.


    Sam after hearing that question also gets quite surprised but wasting no time he already answers the question as it is an easy question. After hearing the answer I don''t know why but it looks like Alena did not get satisfied so Sam just waited for other questions that she was going to ask.


    One by one she begins to ask various questions and Sam begins to answer every one of those questions. During that time many Saints who stayed silent also started to believe that he was the real Sam but they still did not conclude.


    ________________________


    "Is he Sam? What if he is an imposter who got all this kind of information from Sam who got kidnapped by them? I don''t know what to do at this moment."


    Alena using the mind link told everything about this. Hearing that every one of them also bes serious as this can also happen. So nobody knows if he is the real Sam or not. But this time nobody did anything because they were also waiting for Gloria and her family toe to that ce.


    Compared to anyone most likely they would be able to tell if he is the real Sam or not. First of all, even if this is an imposter who got all this kind of information from real Sam by using mind control techniques or something like that, still you are not able to get all the information that happened to Sam from his childhood.


    There is a limitation of the mind control technique. Also, everyone knows that Sam previously had very powerful mind control techniques so they did not think even if they tried to get information by using mind control techniques they would get every information from childhood.


    All this time Sam doesn''t know what they are thinking but he is just silently waiting for the decision. During that time he did not notice but 3 people silently approached that ce and all three of them had surprised expressions on their faces. Hina almost cried after looking at the face but she controlled herself.


    First of all, she did not know if this was the real Sam or not. At this time all the Saints also notice three of them alongside Sam. The moment Sam looked at his family he also got emotional but did not show that because before anything he needed to prove his identity.


    Victor, Hina, and Gloria have a serious face right now as they finally understand why teacher Alena called them that quickly. She wanted them to check if this was a real Sam or not.


    _________________________________


    All of these happen in the ce where that energy fluctuation appears, and those people from others got very confused because until now they did not get any kind of information. Everyone hides among those normal citizens so naturally they also have ess to the warrior association of that.


    Until now the warrior association just told him to stay rxed because the Saints were handling the matter. All of them were very curious to know what exactly was happening but they did not try to approach that ce as who would give them the guarantee that they would not get noticed by those Saints.


    They won''t be able to use their full power on this, so until the core does not appear, everyone needs to stay careful.


    _____________________________


    "I don''t know even if I answer all of your questions you would be able to believe me or not so I decided to show you something that would make you believe that I am the real Sam."


    Even when his family came to that ce, and he answered all the questions of his family members, none of them still believed he was the real Sam. He can also understand why they think like that because there would be a possibility that he is an imposter who reads all of this information by using mind control techniques on Sam.


    "I think every one of you knows that the spiritual aura of any person or anyone will be constant. Even if that person used some kind of different spiritual energy, the spiritual aura will be constant for that person because the spiritual aura is not only connected with the spiritual energy but it is also connected with that person''s soul. So I hope after this you will believe me."

 Chapter 716: Chapter 716 - Spiritual Aura and reunited

    Sam finally decided to reveal his spiritual aura. He did not think that it would be this tough to prove his identity, so from the start he just hid his spiritual aura. But currently in the situation without exposing his spiritual aura, he won''t be able to prove to everyone that he is the real Sam.


    Even though none of them showed any kind of expression in their mind, anybody could predict what they were thinking right now. Even though he answered all the questions correctly, those people still did not believe him. Even his parents and his sister did not believe him.


    ''Well, I cannot me them because anybody could take my identity to act as Sam to get close to them. Fortunately, nobody did that, and even if anybody did that they won''t be able to get the trust of anybody because even I am unable to get the trust.''


    The good thing is that none of them believed him that quickly because what if they did that and anybody from another tried to take that to their advantage? So if you think like that this is a good thing but because of that he is also having a very hard time to prove his own identity.


    '' It is a good thing that nobody would be able to change the spiritual aura. I think I remember correctly the president previously told me even if anybody tries to change their spirit with a different spiritual energy, the aura of that person will stay the same.


    It is just the spiritual aura will be chaotic or will have additional attributes. I just hope they believe me after revealing my spiritual aura. Because if they did not believe even after revealing my spiritual aura, then I don''t know how to make them believe that I am the real Sam.''


    Wasting no time I quickly decided to reveal the spiritual aura. First of all, you should know why he did not reveal that from the start. As you know he already evolved after bing aary grade Warrior so there could be a chance that everybody present there will immediately be unconscious the moment he reveals his spiritual aura.


    First of all those people did not have origin spiritual energy nor did they use the true spiritual energy. So even if he did not evolve to a higher race, they would still feel the pressureing out from his body. Now after bing aary grade and bing a high human, additional pressure also gets released from his body the moment he lets out his spiritual aura.


    Alena and the others on the other hand did not know anything about this but when they heard about these the extreme became serious because they also knew one important thing and that is that nobody would be able to copy the spiritual aura of any person.


    Every person from birth has a different body construction and their spiritual system would be different even if they use the same type of spiritual energy. Completely impossible for anyone to copy the spiritual aura of any other person.


    Hina and Victor do not know why but when they hear that both of them suddenly stop doing anything. Suddenly became very silent and just started looking in Sam''s direction. Suddenly for both of them this person who looks like Sam became very familiar.


    Hina and Victor just clenched their fist, because both of them wanted that person who was in front of him to be their son.


    ___________________________


    Pressure was created from Sam''s body and everybody present in that ce almost kneeled. Fortunately, Sam was able to control the spiritual aura and the pressure that got released from the spiritual aura. So he tries to put the pressure at a minimum level but even with that, he can already see the condition of everyone.


    ''I never thought their condition would be like this even though I said the special level to minimum level. Could it be because they did not have a true spiritual energy system and they also did not have the same bloodline as those humans from Terraria? This could be the matter that they became like this just feeling my minimum pressure.


    But it looks like my parents and my sister already changed their spiritual system into a true spiritual system and if I am not wrong then teacher Alena also did the same thing.''


    Sam is currently observing everyone and thought this. First of all,pared to everyone when he looks at his family and his teacher he already feels a familiar aura. Everyone also begins to use their spiritual aura to counterattack his spiritual aura.


    When his family and his teacher also use their spiritual aura, he is only surprised because he is very familiar with the spiritual aura. With that, he understood all four of them were able to change their spiritual system into a true spiritual system.


    _______________________________


    1 minuteter the same already stopped releasing his spiritual aura. On the other hand, everyone also came back to their normal self as he stopped releasing the pressure. But from the start, they also used their observation technique and the best thing was that they felt a very familiar aura.


    Finally, with that, it is prevented by the fact that the person who is in front of them is the real Sam, and most likely because of this suddenly everybody did not do anything and became silent while looking in his direction.


    Now Sam suddenly became very confused by the sudden behavior of everyone. He thought they would at least react but suddenly every one of them and you can say even his own family also became silent like this. They just look at his direction in that state and that makes him very confused.


    ''Did they believe me or not? Why did they be like this? Did they try to talk to each other using their mind link?''


    Now all of this question Sam is thinking as he did not know why the situation became like this but he did not have to wait for that long to understand what is the real situation. During the time Sam also rxed the moment he can feel that everybody became less serious about him as from the start he just can feel the fighting intended of everyone toward him.


    It did not even take 10 seconds for everybody to react and instantly you can see two people disappear from their ce and instantly appear beside Sam. Both of them are his father and mother and both of them instantly came beside him using their movement technique to hug him.


    Suddenly they did not have to think any longer because they already knew that this was their real son. Hina wasted no time embracing him and already began to cry loudly as she was finally able to see her son 3 yearster.


    Victor naturally is a strong person but in this situation, he is also unable to stay calm. He also came beside his son and wasted no time embracing him. Finally, he was able to find his son. You can say for these 3 years he continuously tried to search for clues about his son but unfortunately did not find anything.


    Like his daughter or his wife, he is unable to show his emotion but from the start, he is also very worried about his son, and currently after bing confirmed that it is his son he is unable to maintain his calm.


    Not just only them but everybody also wanted to do the same thing but they fortunately stopped themselves because they also know thatpared to them the family of Sam is more body about him and they should give them the time to reunite.


    Gloria reacted slowlypared to her father and mother but she also instantly came in front of her brother and wasted no time embracing him. Not long after that, she also begins to cry very loudly because she can finally be free from the burden.


    Naturally, during all this time, Sam did not do anything and just let his family hug him. At this time you can say he also was not able to maintain his calm and you can also see the tearsing out from his eyes. For all this time when he is in the present with his parents, he is also very worried about the safety of his parents and his sister.


    Fortunately, nothing happened to them and they were finally able to reunite.


    They stayed like this for 5 minutes and during that time Alena and the others did not do anything and just smiled looking at the happy scene. Finally, Sames back and they can finally rx about him. Even though they have many questions that they want to ask him, they could do thatter as this is the time for those kinds of questions. Alena finally gets her chance to embrace him.

 Chapter 717: Chapter 717 - Spending time with family

    Almost 2 hourster, you won''t be able to see anyone in that source of the fluctuation. Everyone already left that ce. But not long after they leave that ce you can see many people suddenly appear near that area. Every one of them hid so that nobody was able to find them. Naturally, they are using various hiding techniques.


    Every one of them has only one motive to find out what happened to that ce because previously even every one of them could feel the pressure which almost made them unable to breathe and feel like they were going to die.


    Naturally it is a very serious matter as what if an unknown factor also appears on that for the core, then the situation would be far more dangerous than that. Onemon thing you can see among all those people from others, they will not attack each other even if they are able to recognize each other.


    First of all every one of them knows that they came to that for the core and the final battle will start when the core appears on the surface area. Until then everybody agrees that they will not fight each other as it will also attract unknown attention.


    All of them already know that all the Warriors of Eden Blue searching for them as the restriction force working on the will not be able to use their full power. This is the reason that they did not want to reveal their identity before the final battle.


    This is the reason that even though everybody already became aware of their presence, none of them did anything and just hiddenly began to observe the surrounding area. At anyhow they wanted to search for any clue which would indicate to them what happened in that ce.


    Unfortunately for them, they won''t be able to find anything as previously even though some fluctuation is present in that ce but that already disappeared from that ce, and on the other hand the Saints already removed all the previous clues.


    All the saints also know about people from others present on their and waiting for the core to appear on the surface area. Naturally, this is the reason that they did not want those people to find out what happened in that ce as they wanted to use Sam as their trump card. First of all, everybody already knows that Sam has be much more powerful.


    The moment he reveals his spiritual aura almost everybody bes breathless even though they try to use their full power to counterattack. So this is the reason that they still have the hope that they will be able to win the war and for that reason, none of them wanted to reveal anything about Sam.


    Sam also agreed with that and he already told everyone that tomorrow he would be present in the Warrior Association because he wanted to teach them something important that would be able to help them in the uing war. Not only that all the saints also have many questions that they want to ask him but they also know that today they should give him the time to spend with his family.


    Alena also did not go with Sam and his family as she also wanted to give them the time to spend. Suddenly Sam is present in his house in the central city. Even though Sam did not know what happened during the time when he wasn''t present, he could tell his family almost lost their smiles because of him.


    ________________________


    "I miss your food mom."


    Suddenly he is present in the dining room and eating the food that his mom prepared for him. His father and sister waited in the hall room for him to finish his food. It did not take him that much time but when he was eating the food, he from time to time Praised his mom.


    He misses that food even though in Terraria he has eaten many delicious foods but still misses the food that was prepared by his mother.


    Hina during that time did not say anything just with a warm gaze watching Sam eating the food. Finally, her child is back and she can prepare all of Sam''s favorite foods. Victor already told everyone that today they would be going to celebrate Sam''s return and to do that Hina decided to prepare all of Sam''s favorite food at night.


    Sometimeter, Sam is present in the hall room alongside his parents and his sister. For a few minutes, he did not say anything and just silently observed his family. First of all, he could see everybody had dark circles under their eyes and it also looked like they were pretty tired.


    ''Look like they were unable to sleep while I was away. Sigh, all of this happens because I suddenly disappear without telling anyone. I am a terrible person.''


    Looking at all of these Sam became disappointed in himself. For him, his full family began to suffer like this as anybody could tell none of them were able to sleep peacefully and most of the time most likely they just spent their time in practice.


    "I am sorry sis, Mom and Dad. Previously when I got teleported from my I did not have anything under my control and because of this, I also did not get the time to inform any of you.


    But currently, you don''t have to worry about that because everything is in my control so I won''t disappear like this once again. Now back to the main matter, most likely every one of you is very confused as to why I suddenly disappeared like this.


    Actually, before telling you this, I wanted to ask you if you found any kind of strange symbol or strange thing when you finished thest monster on thest floor of the Dungeons?"


    Before exining what happened to him Sam decided to ask that question to his parents to get rified if anybody other than him was able to find anything on thest floor of those Dungeons or not. However, Sam did not think this was possible because all the symbols were hidden pretty carefully so that nobody would be able to discover them.


    But what if a simr situation appears in those others like the Dungeons present in Base City? This is the reason he asked that question and wanted to know if anyone other than him was also able to find something like this or not.


    Victor, Hina, and Gloria, naturally wait for his exnation. When he apologized. They  stopped him from doing that because they also knew if everything was in his control then he wouldn''t have disappeared like this. But the next question make them very confused.


    One thing is pretty clear: everything is most likely rted to the dungeon present in Base City. As every record told everyone Sam wasst present in that Dungeon. So every one of them begins to think very carefully about this.


    The good thing is that every time even after killing the Boss monster of thest floor they will not be careless and will always search the surrounding area as there could be a chance that a second Boss Monster appears.


    During that time Sam did not disturb them and let them think if they found anything strange on thest floor or not. But sometimeter he did not get any positive answer as his sister and his parents told him that they never encountered anything strange other than the Boss monster on thest floor.


    They will always try to search thest floor after killing the Boss monster but they never find anything strange present in the Dungeon.


    ''As I expected it is pretty impossible for anyone to find the teleportation symbol or the rock present on thest floor. But then what happened to the Dungeon present in Base City? Why am I able to find that teleportation symbol that easily?


    I don''t think anyone from our can destroy the unbreakable rock that hides the teleportation symbol. It looks like I need to solve this mystery alongside solving those people from others.''


    This is a huge mystery that he wanted to solve. Sam is 100% sure that previously that unbreakable Rock did not get destroyed by any Warrior so then what happened in that ce he was able to find that part of the rock alongside also able to see the teleportation symbol.


    Sam did not stay like this for that long as he already came back to his senses. During that time his full family also observed him and by his serious expression, everybody could tell most likely everything rted to thest floor of any dungeon.


    Most likely something really strange is present in every Dungeons. What is this strange thing that Sam is talking about? Why then are they not able to encounter the strange thing even though after killing thest monster they will always try to look around thest floor?

 Chapter 718: Chapter 718 - Strange stone platform

    " By all of your expressions, I could tell that previously even after killing the Boss monster on thest floor you did not find anything suspicious on the floor other than the monster.


    Well, I think you are thinking why I am suddenly asking you questions like this. I am asking you this question because this is rted to my story. Previously I did not tell any of you because I thought if I suddenly reveal that news it could attract some unwanted attention and that will also be dangerous for us.


    Previously when I spent my time inside the Base City''s dungeon, I suddenly discovered somethingpletely unexpected for me. After killing thest monster on thest floor of the dungeon, I decided to rest for a few minutes until I did not recover my spiritual energy and health.


    During this time I also began to search in the surrounding area to see if I was able to find anything valuable or not. Who could have thought that during that time I would be able to find that thing which is the culprit behind my disappearance?


    I saw a stone tform and some part of that stone tform got broken by something. From a distance, I did not think anything about this and just that ce with curiosity as I wanted to know about that stone tform.


    But when I reached close to that stone tform I was very surprised because, from that part of the broken stone, I suddenly saw something very strange. Suddenly I saw a strange symbol present in that broken part of the stone tform.


    Unfortunately, I was unable to study that symbol because I only saw a little part of that symbol while the full symbol was still covered by that stone tform. So I immediately decided to destroy that stone tform but this is the biggest mistake I made because after using my full power I did not get any kind of result.


    It looks like all of my attacks did not even work. The stone tform ispletely okay and did not receive any kind of damage even though I used my full power. So I became very curious about that stone ssroom and that strange symbol. I decided to store that part of the stone tform and came back to search about this.


    Aftering back I already decided to search about that but in the end, I did not find any kind of information rted to this and I did not even find out what kind of material is that stone. I decided to ask all of you about these but then I thought what if casually asking that thing could also bring unwanted attention which could be dangerous for me and all of you?


    This is the reason that I did not reveal any kind of information about this but during the time when teacher Alena visited our house for the first time I tried to ask her butter I realized even though she did not know anything about this. "


    After saying all of Sam became silent. He can see the shocking expression present on his family''s face. All three of them did not expect this kind of answer from him. If you ask them they also previously suspected something that Sam wanted to ask them but unfortunately he never clearly asked them anything.


    But who could have thought that he would discover something this important and this is the reason that he disappeared for almost 3 years. During that time Sam did not say anything and let his family digest all the information as this is very big information for anyone.


    If possible he still did not want to reveal the information but he knows that this is the time to reveal the information to his family and all the people that are very close to him. Naturally all the time he also observed the surrounding area as he did not want anyone other than all those people to get to know about this.


    First of all, he did not know the situation of the Base City''s dungeon. What if people already found out about that strange symbol, but he immediately rejected the idea because, by the expression of his family, he could tell they did not find anything like this inside the Dungeon even though they searched inside very carefully to look for his clue.


    So what happened inside the Dungeon? He really wanted to know the answer. Did you guys find anything when you tried to search for my clue inside the Dungeon?


    "No son did not find anything. After you disappear most of the warrior association have be very active and regrly will try to look for your clue inside the Dungeon and in the surrounding area.


    But unfortunately we are unable  to find any kind of clue other than that you went inside the Dungeon. After going inside the Dungeon you did note outside and this is a pretty mysterious thing for everyone.


    For all these 3 years we tried to search for what happened but unfortunately, we came to the conclusion that you got kidnapped by people from another or something simr like this happened.


    If you observe the surrounding area of that Dungeon''sst floor, then you will notice many stone tforms like this present inside thatst floor but I did not think any of those tforms would be rted to this matter."


    "Also brother can you tell us how you were able to break that stone tform that you were unable to break previously? Is it because previously you were just an F-grade warrior?"


    Victor was the first one toe back to him and instantly answer the question of Sam. For all these three years he and most of the people from the warrior association will always try to pay attention to the Dungeon and they will always go inside of the dungeon to search for his clue.


    Unfortunately, until now, they did not find anything suspicious. This is the reason that all three of them also got very surprised after hearing this. If they weren''t wrong, then previously they already noticed many stone tforms like Sam described inside thest floor, but who could have thought that those stone tforms would be rted to this matter?


    Instantly Gloria asks that question. Now she became curious to know how Sam was able to break that stone tform. Is it rted to the power of Warrior grade?


    "No, unfortunately, I did not think even a S-grade Warrior would be able to break that stone. You can say that I was able to break that stone tform to look at the symbol only because of my strange spiritual energy.


    That tform previously reacted to my spiritual energy and instantly it got destroyed and revealed that symbol. But I did not think it would automatically recover itself and none of you were able to find any kind of clue about this. Most likely even the Dungeon did not want anyone to find out about those symbols.


    Previously I also thought that currently I am a weak Warrior so I should try to break that stone tform when my power level at least reaches D-grade. When I reach that power level I once again decide to visit that Dungeon but unfortunately, I am unable to break that stone tform.


    Later, fortunately, I was able to discover how to evolve our spiritual system and was able to evolve my spiritual system to an upper-grade spiritual system. Only because of this, I was able to break that stone tform and I was able to look at that symbol which is a veryplicated teleportation symbol.


    I don''t know if anybody who did not have true spiritual energy would be able to activate that teleportation symbol or not but it immediately reacted when I previously used my upgraded spiritual energy. I did not even feel anything when I suddenly noticed that all my surrounding area instantly changed and from inside the Dungeon I suddenly appeared inside a forest.


    Ipletely got teleported to a different and this was the first to awaken in Spiritual energy. People from this also always try to look for all the others that are also able to awaken in Spiritual energy.


    It ispletely differentpared to any of thes which awaken Spiritual energy. All the people of that are able to use the true spiritual energy from their birth and they are very powerfulpared to our normal Warriors.


    Fortunately, I received some help and with that, I was able to be a warrior of that. There are many details that happened during that time but I will tell youter about this and also that the''s name is Terraria.


    I would havee back if I was able to reach the minimum level to use the world bridge which would help me toe to my in just 2 to 3 days. "

 Chapter 719: Chapter 719 - Shocking news

    Sam did not decide to tell them about his adventure in Terraria. Well, he did not want to make them more worried. If his family gets to know about those Abyss humans, dark humans, and those other dangerous things about Terraria then they will not let him go back to that.


    On the other hand, Gloria, Hina, and Victor are currently digesting all the information that Sam has given them. Even though he did not give them the full details, all of it is still very serious information which naturally takes them some time to digest.


    Who could have thought Sam would find something like this inside a basic Dungeon? Also, after hearing all the exnations they became sure not just only inside that Dungeon, but probably they would be able to find that kind of teleportation symbol inside the Dungeon.


    But the main question is how they will be able to find that strange tform and that strange symbol. Sam already told them normally it would be very impossible for any of them to find any kind of clue about the teleportation symbol or that unbreakable stone.


    Even though it looks like they have true spiritual energy, who could give them the guarantee that they would be able to break that unbreakable stone to discover that symbol? But at the same time, they be very surprised when they get to know that Sam teleports to the first which is able to Awaken the spiritual energy.


    Sam already gives them the basic information about that and it is really surprising that many people from that also like to travel to differents from time to time to discover what kind of difference those others have.


    Also, he told them that because this was the first time he was unable to appear without creating that fluctuation and that wasn''t your normal fluctuation. That fluctuation was created because suddenly the space of that area began to break apart because of the world bridge.


    Normally something like that would not have happened if he did not use that much spiritual energy during thest moment to open the gate.


    All of this information makes them very speechless. During the time Sam did not do anything and was just waiting for his family to fully digest all the information that he gave them.


    ''I should try to visit the Dungeon once again to see if I would be able to find the tform or not. Is it possible that the Dungeon automatically repairs that tform so that nobody can find any kind of clue about that teleportation portal?


    If this is happening then who is the person who is trying to control the Dungeon and trying to hide that teleportation symbol from anyone? Also is it possible that every Dungeon has this kind of tform which also has a teleportation symbol that is directly connected to Terraria?


    I need to know the answer to all of these questions but currently, I do not have the time to check if they are connected to Terraria or not.


    From tomorrow I should try to look for those people from others. Also, I needed to visit the Warrior Association and also needed to visit the Academy to meet my friends. But the question is where I would be able to meet my teacher? Looks like I also need to call her to know her location.''


    Sam thought about all of this at that moment. Well he wanted to visit the Dungeon of Base City. He wanted to see if that tform would repair itself or not and also what would happen if once again he tried to destroy that tform.


    For today he did not want to go outside as he is fully tired and will be resting today. From tomorrow he will be busy because, for a few days, he needs to meet everyone who is most likely worried about him and also needs to make sure that he is fully okay.


    He also wanted to check the progress of his friends and everyone on his. If possible he wanted to organize apetition to get to know about the power of every warrior after 3 years. Unfortunately, he did not have the time and the annual collegepetition is also near so the Warrior Association will be busy with thatpetition.


    During that time he was also thinking about all the people that he wanted to teach true spiritual energy. Naturally, he did not want to reveal that technique to most of the people as he did not have trust in most of the people. Before revealing that technique to change the spiritual system of their body he will be checking those people one by one.


    But one thing is clear: his teacher already got to know about the true spiritual energy whereas those other Saints did not know about this. Most likely his teacher or his family did not tell them about this as they were also waiting for him toe back.


    __________________________


    Elena, Alexa, and the others alreadye back from the Dungeon. Well as they already know about the location of their mission they are able to clear that in just one day. But when they came outside of the Dungeon they suddenly received Strange news about sudden spiritual fluctuation.


    Fortunately, it is already over as all the Saints already handled that matter. After hearing that news you can say every one of them became very surprised and became curious to know what happened. They instantly contact their teacher to get the information about this.


    But they did not get the answer. Instead, they suddenly get an answer which tells them to wait for a surprise. Surprise will be given to them tomorrow so that they need to rest today. Also, don''t try to ignore that message as the surprise is very important for everyone.


    Now this is a very confusing thing for them as they did not know what to say after hearing all of this. Not just one or two but all of their teachers inform everyone of them about this.


    "Guys I don''t know what is the surprise that my teacher or all of our teachers are talking about. But I think this could be important for us. I don''t know if all the teachers are telling us the truth or not or if this could be a trap like usual, but my Instinct telling me this time is going to be a very big surprise."


    Alexa, the current team leader, suddenly said that to everyone and none of them don''t know why but they also have the same feeling as her. With that, they did not waste that much time. They quickly finished their business inside the mission hall of their Royal Academy and after that, they decided to go back to their home to rest.


    But one thing is clear: they really wanted to know what kind of surprise they will get tomorrow.


    ____________________________


    "It is still unbelievable that Sam suddenly came back with a huge fluctuation. Not only that the moment he revealed his spiritual aura, I almost lost my breathing for a second. One thing I could say is that he became very powerfulpared to asking and most likely he would be the trump card to deal with those enemies from others.


    We should not let this information be spared. Because if somehow those people from others get to know about this they would try to take a more careful approach and there could be a chance that they will call more people from their."


    " Yes, you are right I also think the same thing


    Fortunately during the time no other Warriors were present in that ce so if we had not said anything about this nobody would have known about this. Also, I already think of an exnation that we need to give to all the people."


    " Is a very good idea that you came up with an exnation as it would be able to help everyone to rx. But on the other hand, I am very curious to know what happened with Sam as he became that powerful that quickly. Also needed to ask him why that powerful fluctuation previously got created in that ce."


    " Haha¡­ don''t worry he already promised that he will be going to tell us what happened tomorrow so we just need to wait for tomorrow. But I am sure about one thing Sam would be the main factor who will change the course of the war."


    Currently, all the Saints are discussing among each other about the topic of Sam. Alena was also present in that ce even though she could just go to Sam''s house. But she did not do that as she wanted to give Sam and his family the time to spend and some already told her that they would meet her tomorrow. So during that time, she will ask about all the details.

 Chapter 720: Chapter 720 - Restricted

    Next day,


    Sam woke up early in the morning and already decided to start his training. As you know it became his habit to train early in the morning. Not just him but his sister and his parents also already woke up from their sleep and started practicing.


    Today Sam is also very excited because sometimeter he will be going to fight against his full family. They could start their fight right now but he decided to fight them after they finished their training. At that time he will also try to adjust to this new restriction.


    Yesterday Sam did not get the time to see how much power he was able to bring out in this restriction of his. So today he needed to first figure out about this and only then would he be able to fight with his family.


    From his physical strength to all the spiritual energy he used to see how much he got affected by the restriction force and he could tell almost every one of his statuses got restricted by the restriction force currently his power limit has be the same as an SS-grade warrior.


    Now this is quite surprising for him as he did not expect this. He previously thought his power level would be the same as an S-grade Warrior, so why does he have the same power level as an SS-grade warrior?


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Superior Human


    Health: (194500/194500)


    Spiritual energy: (194400/194400)


    Liquify spiritual energy - (10000/10000)


    [To increase the limit of liquidity spiritual energy you need to reach the maximum limit and then need to break through the limit. You won''t be able to increase the limit by using status points or upgrade points.)


    Soul energy - (220/220)


    Strength: 4999 (19400 + 50)


    Agility: 4999 (19400 + 50)


    Physique: 4999 (19400 + 45)


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 4999 (19400 + 40)


    Spirit: 19400 + 40


    Soul:- 20 + 2


    Status points:- 00


    [System remark:- Your stats got restricted due to the restriction force of your. You will be able to use your full power when the restriction force is lifted or you will go to another.]


    [System remark:- You received an additional boost because you were sessfully able to be a superior human. Compared to any of the normal humans you became the superior race that has much more potential and much more power.


    During your break through the system uses all the status points to evolve your bloodline and make you a superior human. You also sessfully have the option to evolve your bloodline and increase your power.]


    Grade: ( Intermediate Special grade/peak SS-grade) / ary-grade) (Early) / (Early RRR grade)


    [System remarks:- Your grade got restricted because of the restriction force of your. You are only able to use the power of a peak SS-grade warrior.]


    Potential: Celestial


    Upgrade point: 119K


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (cooldown period for 1 month.)


    Fusion technique


    The power of domain (Only consume liquidity spiritual energy.)


    Absorb technique:


    Superior Dragon Devour


    Trigon absorb (Grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    Bloodline skills:-


    Superior Aura


    Superior Destruction


    Superior eyes


    [ Remark: Finally the little man has the ability to fight. But you are restricted.]"


    Sam already looked at the system screen and he was surprised when he saw something unexpected. It looks like the restriction force did not affect his spiritual energy as it already has the original number as before. So he can use his full spiritual energy as it did not get affected.


    Not only that but his liquified spiritual energy also did not get affected by the restriction force so he could use the power of domain without any problem. Looks like his health also did not get affected by the restriction force so this is a plus point for him.


    On the other hand, he just needs to figure out how much power he would be able to bring out during the time when he will use his techniques. This is the reason that he started practicing all the techniques one by one.


    Not only that he also needs to figure out how much power he will bring out after using the bloodline skills. Those arepletely different from any of his techniques. So Sam was already hoping that he would be able to bring out the full potential of all the skills.


    ____________________________


    ''Sigh, it is an ufortable feeling while I am unable to bring out my full power. It looks like suddenly I am facing some kind of force that restricts my movement. This is ufortable for me but it is a good thing that I would be able to bring out the full power of my domain skill and alongside that, I would also be able to bring out the full power of my bloodline skills.''


    4 hourster finally Sam stops training and in the end, is able to figure out how much power he would be able to bring out during the time when he will be using his techniques. Unfortunately, he is unable to bring out the full power of any of his techniques but that ispletely different when ites to his power of domain and all of his bloodline skills.


    One thing he is very confused about is that even though his spiritual energy did not get affected by the restriction force but still unable to bring out the full power of any of the techniques using spiritual energy. It looks like even though his spiritual energy did not get affected but still, the restriction force affected all the techniques.


    Well for now this is enough for him as until the core did not appear on the surface area he had the confidence to protect his from any kind of dangerous thing and also heard the confidence that even if the restriction force got lifted he would be able to solve the matter quickly.


    _____________________


    During the time when Sam is checking his techniques and power, he does not realize that every time some kind of powerful spiritual fluctuation will be created and that will also affect his family even though he tries to maintain the power of those fluctuations.


    But this did not make his family discouraged as it is a very good thing that Sam became powerful. He is a miraculous child who is able to create miracles like this. You can say after realizing all of these all three of them also became more motivated to fight with Sam using their full power.


    After sessfully being able to change their spiritual system into a true spiritual system somehow they are able to realize that their limit has already increased and who doesn''t want to reach That Power limit where they do not have to worry about this kind of danger that roams around their?


    After sessfully installing the true spiritual energy system they also realize that their body got released from a very powerful burden. They never knew something like this could happen while using ordinary spiritual energy.


    ''I wanted to see how much Sam has progressed after going to another. As he already said he has the strength to protect his from any kind of danger right now so I wanted to see how powerful he has be.''


    Gloria, Hina, and Victor thought about this as they wanted to see how powerful Sam had be.


    ____________________________


    Sam did not know what his family was thinking about but he already decided to finish his training as he decided to go back to his room to freshen up. After that, he will try to set up the barrier around his training room so that during the time when he will be sparing with his family no spiritual fluctuation will go outside of that room and nobody will get notified.


    He did not want to bring any kind of unwanted attention right now so he will be going to do that. Also, one thing he is that previously when he only focused on using his techniques the surrounding walls of the training room also got affected by his spiritual aura and Spiritual fluctuation.


    Now this ispletely unexpected for him and this is the reason that he will be going to set that barrier around that training room to be able to protect the whole room from this kind of damage. With the help of the system shop, he would be able to buy those artifacts to create the barrier around the whole room.


    On the other hand his family still did not finish their training. Before the main fight they wanted to warm up. Naturally they will not exhaust themselves.

 Chapter 721: Chapter 721 - New items

    "Sam, why am I feeling different after entering the training room? "


    1 hourter finally it is time for Sam''s family to spar with him. All three of them enter the training room where some people spar with his family. After entering the room all three of them suddenly feel something is different in that room and Gloria asks that question to him.


    " I Found out that my spiritual aura is also causing damage to our house and the training room so I decided to create a barrier around the training room so that it wouldn''t affect the surrounding area and our house would not get damaged by our spar."


    Sam answers the question of a sister. Naturally, his family after hearing that question became surprised but they already expected something like this as even though they also feel that much pressure, there is a possibility that the pressure will also begin to damage their house.


    Gloria will be the one who is fighting him and Sam already told her to get ready. He already told her to wear the armor during the fight. Gloria did not have any problem with that as she already knew her brother had already be very powerful so he wouldn''t be able to fight properly if he just worried about her safety.


    But when Gloria is about to equip her armor, Sam stops her. This confused her but the confusion did not stay that long as Sam already exined to her.


    "Forget about this older I have a new armor for you and this will be the best armor for you."


    Sam already bought 3 armor for his family and every one of the armor has the capability to defend against peak Epic grade Warriors. Unfortunately, even though he wanted to buy more powerful armor he was unable to do that as the price of those armor was very high.


    Gloria, hearing that, naturally became surprised but she did not reject the idea as she already knew that her brother giving her that armor meant this armor had the strength to protect herself from a strong enemy.


    Not just Gloria but Sam instantly brings out 2 more pieces of armor and gives them to his parents. Not just armor but he also brings out weapons for his family. His mom is a powerful Archer so he brings out a very powerful bow and spiritual arrows. For his father, he brought out a very powerful sword of Epic grade.


    The name of that sword is Dawn while the name of that bow is Star. On the other hand, for his sister, he brings out a ne that has the ability to increase the difference of her sister and also increases the power of every elemental skill she has.


    This is also an epic item. Not everything he buys from the system shop as he also found them during the time when he was hunting in the danger zone. Not just only that ne but at the same time he also gives her a staff that increases the power of every element skill.


    On the other hand, he also gives two more nes to his parents which have the additional ability to increase the difference of their body. Now both the ne and the armor have the ability to absorb any kind of physical or elemental attack. But those three nes have the additional defense ability to protect their Mind from any kind of Mind attack.


    ''If possible I also wanted to give them something to protect from any kind of soul attack but even I did not have any technique rted to the soul energy so I was also unable to ess any type of artifact like that.


    I need to evolve my techniques or need to search for techniques that would use my soul energy. But even without any technique, I can use my soul technique to increase the power of my techniques so I already know how powerful the soul Energy could be.''


    Sam is thinking all of this while his family suddenly changes their outfit to those armors. Well, he also gives them the time to adjust themselves to those new armors and their new weapons. Fortunately, the restriction force did not apply to those armor or those other artifacts.


    None of them directly release Epic grade power so it did not get restricted by the restriction force of Eden Blue. On the other hand, all three of them are currently adjusting themselves using those new things that they received from Sam and you can say in one word every one of them is amazed after receiving those items.


    Not just only their defense but they can also see their attack power also increases. Gloria is currently practicing with those new things and she can instantly tell that her ice element power already increased. It already became very powerfulpared to before and she wanted to know how much damage she could cause right now.


    Not only that but at the same time she begins to feel the effect of her mind bing more calm. Looks like this is also the effect of that ne that Sam gave them. On the other hand, Sam just smiled after looking at the amazed face of his family. It looks like after filling the effect of those new items all three of them became very surprised.


    Gloria needed almost 20 to 30 minutes to adjust herself and she finally became ready to fight with Sam. Sam on the other hand also already prepared to fight with his sister and he also already equipped his armor. As his sister will be using an ice element he is also going to use the fire element.


    Now that will be a fight between both the elements who are opposite to each other and that will be a very exciting match. Sam already told her sister he would be going to use the fire element and after hearing that Gloria naturally became more serious and also began to feel the excitement.


    While both of them are ready to spar with each other, both of their parents are standing in the right corner of the room. That would be the spectator zone and Sam also reced one more barrier in that ce so that the spectator did not get affected by any kind of impact that would be created during the sparing time.


    Both Hina and Victor are really happy after looking at the smile of their daughter. It has been a very long time since she smiled like that. Even though the same thing applies to both of them, they are really happy that everything has be normal once again and their son has alreadye back.


    From that corner, Victor will be acting as a referee of that match and both Sam and Gloria are just waiting for his signal. Victor, like a professional referee, asked both of them if they were ready to fight each other. Sam and Gloria nodded and with that, their father gave them the signal to fight.


    "Ground freeze,"


    "Cold wind,"


    "Ice rain,"


    Gloria wasted no time instantly casting her three strongest techniques. Fortunately, she became an expert in using multiple techniques at once. Even with that, the main thing is that she is unable to bring out the full potential of those three techniques.


    Even with that instantly the training ground begins to freeze and not only suddenly cold wind begins to appear in that ce and the temperature of the surrounding area begins to drop rapidly. Suddenly if you look at the ceiling of that training room you instantly see clouds begin to appear in that ce.


    All of this happens in just 1 second. Gloria did not want to give Sam any time to react or attack her. Because of this, from the start, she decided to use her full power. Even Alena would have problems facing this kind of attack even after bing an S-grade.


    The training ground begins to freeze rapidly while on the other hand, the cold wind also begins to freeze the surrounding area. On the other hand from those clouds snowfall has already begun to fall and you should not underestimate those snowfall as they also have the ability to freeze anything instantly the moment it touches them.


    Normally anybody would get worried after facing this kind of powerful attack. As anybody could directly tell all these three attacks trying to freeze them. But if you look at Hina and Victor or even Gloria, then you will notice all three of them did not have any kind of worried expression on their faces. Instead of that they have curious expressions.


    Three of them wanted to know what would be the next move of Sam. How will he protect himself from this powerful attack? Well, they did not have to think for that long because something unexpected already appeared the moment the ground began to freeze rapidly.


    The 100m area around Sam did not get frozen. All those snowfalls that begin to fall on that ce begin to get vaporized instantly and on the other hand, those cold winds the moment appearing in that area instantly change into warm winds.


    Even though Gloria thinks she is fast, Sam is faster than her. He already created the fire zone around himself and that 100 M area is under the effect of the fire zone. It is just Sam did not directly bring out the fire element but even with that heat already began to release from that ce and that is enough to stop that ce from freezing.

 Chapter 722: Chapter 722 - Gloria vs Sam

    Gloria already realizes that Sam uses his techniques and because of this the area around him does not freeze or even the snowfall vaporizes the moment ites into contact with that ce.


    '' It looked like some kind of force felt in that ce and it instantly vaporized all the snowfall. When did he use his technique? I did not even feel any kind of energy fluctuation. ''


    Gloria thought that but she was not going to stop her attack as this time she instantly used the ice teleportation technique to get close to Sam. In the next second, she again uses one of the powerful attacks, the Ice beam.


    Instantly a huge amount of spiritual energy gathered in her hand and in the next second she shot that beam toward Sam. Sam who previously did not do anything and just observed Gloria already began to feel the power of that attack and this time he decided to increase the power of that fire zone and instantly the area around him got covered in fire and a firewall was created.


    The moment the firewall was created the temperature began to increase rapidly. But Gloria even after realizing that did not stop she just increased the spiritual energy behind that attack and made that ice beam more powerful.


    "Boom!!!!!"


    A huge explosion appeared in that ce the moment that ice beam and that firewall shed with each other. Both the elements instantly begin to affect each other and also as both of the elements are exactly opposite to each other power of the explosion already increases.


    Even Gloria could get affected by that explosion but fortunately, she was able to hold on to the ground and still focus on the ice beam. During that time she also realized one thing: the ne and the new armor also protected her from the explosion.


    But one thing Gloria already realized was that just with one ice beam she would not be able to win against Sam. With that, she already decided to teleport from that ce using the ice escape technique/ ice teleportation technique. This technique only works if the surrounding area has ice.


    Sometimeter after realizing she did not get any kind of advantage in that matter she instantly escaped from that ce. On the other hand, the whole area was covered in vapor. Sam naturally could use that time to attack Gloria but he wants to give her the chance to attack so he just decides to create the fire dragon.


    Sam did not leave his ce and after realizing this Gloria already began to recover The Spiritual energy using her spiritual energy potion. Not long after that, she was already ready to use her most powerful technique and that would be the Ice lock.


    Instantly, many circles begin to appear in the air of that whole training room. Not just only that instantly the temperature once again begins to decrease because of the circles which now release the cold air from it.


    "Roar!!!!!!!"


    On the other hand, all three of them instantly hear the powerful roar of a dragon. That roar belongs to that fire dragon that Sam already created. That fire dragon ispletely created with the fire element and it is already flying in the sky while looking in Gloria''s direction.


    Unfortunately, because the height of the training room was so big, the fire dragon was not able to fly much higher than that. The fire dragon already begins to put spiritual energy in his mouth to prepare for the attack but at the same time, Gloria also begins to use her full spiritual energy to that attack.


    All of the circles that appear around that whole room begin to glow brightly in white color and the temperature begins to sh. Because of the fire dragon, the temperature begins to increase while because of the circles, the temperature begins to decrease. So it shes with the temperature.


    In the next second, the fire dragon already released a fire beam toward Gloria, but she already prepared for that, and instantly an Ice wall was created, and in the next again every one of those circles that appeared in the air began to release ice beams directly toward that Dragon.


    Not just only that dragon but it is also targeting Sam who also already created a barrier around himself to protect himself from those attacks. On the other hand, once again the Dragon begins to Roar after getting hit by those attacks. Once again the Dragon begins to gather spiritual energy to attack those circles but those ice beams are also trying to freeze the dragon.


    ___________________


    "Boom!!!!"


    Gloria is very close to losing the fight as her ice wall has already been destroyed but fortunately, she is able to create 10yers of Ice wall. That fire beam is really powerful as it instantly begins to destroy those ice walls easily, but fortunately in the end she can stop that attack and in the next, she once again uses the escape technique to escape from that ce.


    During that time because of the continuous attack from the circles, the fire dragon also received much damage and it already became an ice statue. But even with that Gloria isn''t happy about this because she already knows Sam did not use his full power.


    But she cannot do anything with that as Sam already told her he won''t be going to use his full power. But this time Sam did not stay ideal and he already began to use the movement technique to get close to Gloria to fight in closebat.


    Naturally, he wanted to see how much she had progressed in closebat. Gloria already notices Sam so she instantly brings out her sword which instantly begins to glow. Gloria instantly coated that sword with spiritual energy and instantly changed the nature of the spiritual energy to the Ice element.


    Sam also already brings out his Sword and in the next against a sh once again between both the Sword. Sam uses 20% to 30% of spiritual energy to coat that sword. With this or did not get destroyed easily.


    "Boom!!!!"


    ______________________________


    Gloria instantly backweb and in the next again she swung the sword backward as Sam already came behind her. Sam already expected this as he also protects himself using his sword as a shield. But in the next again he jumped from the ce because Gloria already kicked toward his direction.


    ''Well, she already improved her closebat power alongside her long-distance attacks. She also improved her sword technique. This is good that she is able to use both sword and Ice elements at the same time and also able to damage that much. The damage rate could be the same as before if she had more spiritual energy.


    But one thing I could tell is that the power of the element is already increasing.''


    Sam already observed all of these but did not say anything. This time he also decided to use the power of the fire element to coat his Sword and once again the battle between both the elements appeared in that ce.


    During the time when both of them are fighting you can say their parents who were present in that safe corner also observing the power of Sam. By looking at his expression anybody could tell he wasn''t using his full power.


    Not only that he just only used the file element from the start butter he started using his Sword technique. Badi begins with the fact that both of them can tell he did not bring out the full power of his sword technique.


    Both of them can also understand why he is doing that because he did not want to harm Gloria and he already told every one of them from the start that he won''t be going to use his full power.


    This naturally did not disappoint anyone. First of all, it is Sam who became this powerful so naturally, they are also very proud of him. Who doesn''t want their children to be powerful so that their parents do not have to worry about them?


    Now back to the main matter Gloria already uses the escape technique once again to create distance between both of them. During all this time she is thinking very fast about her next move. Her brother became so much more powerful and because of this, she was also trying to push herself harder. She did not want to disappoint her brother.


    ''Should I try to use that technique but I am still unable to master it properly? But I should try this because I have full confidence that Sam would be able to counterattack and also if possible you will give me some pointers.''


    Gloria also learned one more powerful technique but she was unable to master that technique properly and because of that she did not use that technique from the start. But fighting her brother she decided to use that because she has full confidence Sam will not get affected by this and if possible she wanted to get pointers about that move.

 Chapter 723: Chapter 723 - Confused Students

    Gloria already saw Saming toward her direction, so she did not think that much and already channeled more spiritual energy toward that sword, and in the next second a huge spiritual fluctuation appeared in that ce. Saming toward the direction also was surprised for a second because he did not think a huge fluctuation like this would appear suddenly.


    On the other hand, Gloria did not care about that and in the next second, she pierced that Sword in the ground. Instantly the power of the fluctuation once again increases and in the next again the temperature of that whole room begins to decrease very rapidly.


    "Absolute zero,"


    This is the name of that move that she is using right now. The whole training room began to get frozen. Not just only the floor but all the surrounding area was frozen by that attack.


    Sam previously got very curious to know what was happening so he slowed down a bit and in the next again he saw everything that instantly happened. Sam can tell this is a very powerful move but at the same time when he looks at the expression of his sister he already notices she is exhaustedpletely and it looks like she did not have more strength to put in that attack.


    All this time he was already observing the surrounding area. So, he can also tell even though the surrounding ce is getting frozen by that attack but at the same time this technique or you can say this move has its ws.


    Sam already decides his next move and before the surrounding area of Sam getspletely frozen or that affects Sam, he instantly uses the fire zone in full force. In the next second, a fire dragon also appeared in that ce.


    "Roar!!!!"


    That fire dragon let out a powerful roar and in the next second the fire dragon shot a powerful fire beam toward Gloria. Gloria at this time almost exhausted 99% of her energy but still, she had 1% of energy left.


    She can already feel the dangering out from that energy fire beam. Wasting no time she uses that 1% spiritual energy to create the ice barrier. Unfortunately that ice barrier was destroyed instantly, and Gloria was also affected by the side effects.


    ___________________________


    Finally, the spar between Gloria and Sam is already finished and you can see the result. Sam is currently carrying Gloria out of that previous ce toward his mom and dad.


    Fortunately, he was able to stop that attack at thest moment and with this Gloria did not get affected that much or became injured. The injuries she received were because of the side effects that she received after the ice barrier got broken. Also, she already uses her 100% spiritual energy so she does not have the mental strength to stay awake currently.


    '' Fortunately, I was able to install the barrier around the whole room or I don''t think this training room would be able to tolerate the damage from our attacks.''


    Because of the barrier around the whole room, the training room in the end did not get any kind of damage even after receiving those powerful attacks. Even though there was some damage that the barrier received, he was already able to recover that damage of the barrier just using spiritual energy.


    _______________________________


    " Sister, you became very powerful. I am also having a very hard time and I think if you fight any of those Early S-grade Warriors, you could be able to win that match if you fight like this."


    1 hourter, Gloria finally regained her consciousness. She already knew she lost the fight but Sam did not want her to be disappointed so he said that. This is the truth because every one of those Early S-grade Warriors will just only have a normal spiritual energy system in their body.


    Compared to normal spiritual energy any person who uses the true spiritual and more advantage and the power of the technique would be more powerful.


    This is the reason Sam told me that to Gloria. If possible he also wanted to teach Gloria and his parents about the Origin spiritual energy. But, the problem is that he did not know if their body would be able to handle that or not.


    The Origin spiritual energy ispletely different from any kind of spiritual energy. So there is a risk that if anybody tries to change their spiritual system into Origin spiritual system, that person could get affected by that and it could also make that person crippled.


    This is the reason he did not want to teach anyone about the Origin spiritual energy and also he thought using true spiritual energy would be enough for his family.


    __________________________


    "Thanks for thepliment but I needed to improve myself because I wanted to bring out his full strength while fighting me. But at the same time, this makes me proud that my brother became this much stronger."


    Gloria can already tell Sam is trying to cheer her up and she also smiles because of this. But this is the truth she would be happier when she is able to bring out his full strength when Sam fights her.


    But this is also a good thing that Sam became this powerful. She did not know why but while fighting Sam she could tell he was more powerfulpared to any of those people from others. In these 3 years, there are many times when she gets the chance to encounter those people from others.


    With this, she is already able to predict the basic power level. But during the time when she was fighting Sam, she was able to realize one thing: she was unable to detect what kind of level Sam already reached. But she is able to predict Sam is far more dangerous and powerful than those people from others.


    She also has theplete trust that if Sam wanted then he would have already ended the match before giving her the chance to attack him.


    _______________________


    "I wanted to know what kind of surprise our teacher will be giving us today. I really cannot wait to see the surprise gift but still now nobody calls even though we try to call them. What is happening right now that makes me very confused,"


    In the cafeteria of the Royal Academy, you can see Alexa, Kenny, Elena, and everyone present while eating their food discussing among themselves the surprise that yesterday their teacher told them.


    First of all, in the early morning, they tried to talk to their teacher but their teacher told them to wait as it would take some time for them to receive the surprise gift. That time they just only get that notification from their teacher but afterward they are unable to contact their teacher even though they try to call them for 2 hours.


    None of those teachers picked up the phone and this made everyone very surprised and confused. What kind of gift is their teacher preparing for them? This is the question that they are thinking about right now.


    Just not only that but everybody present in the cafeteria definitely can tell something is different today. The atmosphere of the whole Royal Academy ispletely different and it looks like the whole Academy is preparing for a celebration or something like that.


    From early in the morning the staff of the Royal Academy begin to decorate the whole Academy. This is confusing for every student as they did not know why something like this was happening without any kind of notification. Even when they try to talk to any teacher about this, many of them get any kind of answer.


    Sometimeter,


    "My dear student, it is nice to meet all of you. I know that every one of you must have be very confused because of the sudden change that is happening in the Royal Academy. But you just need to wait a little longer to know what is happening right now. Not only that but our headmaster will also be present today so I hope everyone gets ready for that.


    Sometimeter our headmaster will be present here and you will be the one who will tell everyone what is happening right now. For those first-year and 2nd year students, this could not be a surprise as they did not know anything about this but this will be a surprise for every 3rd year and 4th year student."


    Suddenly every student present in the Royal Academy heard that announcement. The vice principal of the Royal Academy announced that but unfortunately he also did not give them the full details.


    Naturally, after hearing the announcement, every student became very surprised and confused at the same time. First of all, they would rarely see their principal. Most of the time he would stay in the warrior association as he is also a saint. So there are many people who still have not seen their principal face to face.

 Chapter 724: Chapter 724 - Control technique

    2 hourster Sam already finished sparring with everyone and he was currently resting in the training room. Not only that but you can see Gloria, Hina, and Victor also present in that room and all of them are just waiting for Sam to exin about their power and their improvement.


    After defeating Gloria, Sam waited for some time to recover The lost spiritual energy and also gave both of his parents that time to prepare themselves. Both of his parents also already reach intermediate A-grade.


    Sam was surprised by the achievement of his family. But in this current situation, Sam is still worried about his family as you know even if they reach S-grade, they would still be in a dangerous situation when the war breaks out.


    But as he is here right now so naturally he will help his family to be more powerful. He wanted to see what would happen when the core of Eden Blue upgraded itself.


    Previously when he was in Terraria, he also got some information that told him that every time any''s core got upgraded, every living being on that would get rewarded. So definitely he wanted to know what kind of reward everyone would receive after the core gets sessfully upgraded.


    ______________________


    "I am really happy that all of you have be this powerful and I can also tell my sister is very close to breaking through to S-grade. She already reached the limit of peak A-grade.


    She just needed the opportunity to get powerful limit breakers so that she would be able to break through to S-grade. Mom and Dad both of you also became powerful and the true spiritual system also evolved the limits of your body.


    Both of you are also ready to break through to peak A-grade. But during the spar I also noticed one thing that mom has trouble bringing out more spiritual energy and the same thing is happening with Dad.


    Previously I noticed my sister also having the problem but somehow managed to bring out 80% of the power of her spiritual energy but in both of your cases, you are only able to bring out 60 to 70% power of your true spiritual energy.


    This is in the problem of the true spiritual system or there isn''t any problem with any of you. Currently, you are using true spiritual energy which is strongerpared to ordinary spiritual energy. Because of this all of you also needed stronger spiritual control techniques which you won''t be able to find on our.


    Every one of you already knows the importance of The Spiritual control technique as it helps us to control the spiritual energy to bring out more power. All of our techniques are based on ordinary spiritual energy and that is the reason that you are unable to control 100%  true spiritual energy present in your body.


    Don''t worry about this because I already have a powerful spiritual control technique which I also bring out from Terraria. With the help of those techniques, I have full confidence every one of you would be able to bring out the full power of your spiritual energy and every one of your techniques. "


    After finishing exining the reason Sam quickly brings out 3 spiritual control techniques from his inventory.


    Well, he previously did not think about this matter but after fighting with his family he came to realize that the inability to bring out 100% power of any of the techniques is the inability to control the true spiritual energy using their technique which is only based on ordinary spiritual energy.


    The good thing is that their techniques would be able to use any kind of spiritual energy but they properly needed to control the spiritual energy. Even with that he already prepared more techniques for his family and every one of those techniques was created based on true spiritual energy.


    All three of them were surprised when Sam quickly brought out those techniques one by one. Actually, from the moment they are able to change their spiritual system into a true spiritual energy system, they also realize that problem.


    They just think that they are unable to control their spiritual energy properly as it will take them some time to control 100% of their spiritual energy. Naturally, as they are unable to control hundred percent spiritual energy they won''t be able to bring out full power in any of their techniques.


    In these 3 years, Sam wasn''t present with them to tell them about the problem so every one of them who was able to change the spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system thought that as they using a new spiritual energy system it would take some time their body to adjust with the new spiritual energy and only after that they would able to bring out hundred percent power.


    Unfortunately, this is in the case of the technique that they use only based on that ordinary spiritual energy and this is the reason that they are unable to control the true spiritual energy which is far more powerfulpared to ordinary spiritual energy.


    Not just only that at this time Sam also begins to give them pointers about their techniques which he thinks they could improve more than that. But before doing anything like that everyone needs to learn those new energy control techniques.


    Fortunately, it won''t take them that much time to learn the energy control technique. He purchased those books from the system shop and the system also simplified the technique book. With this simplified technique book, all three of them are able to learn energy control techniques faster.


    "Sister, I could tell the final move that you wanted to try against me still had not beenpleted. You still have so much trouble using that and the main reason could be that you are unable to control your spiritual energy properly. You needed to forcefully channel The Spiritual energy as it did not naturally channel.


    The same thing is also happening with Mom and Dad as they are also doing the same thing. The main problem with this forcefully channeling is that it also puts pressure into all of your body and The Spiritual energy gets out of control."


    Listening to his pointers, all of them also felt very grateful. In these 3 years of being unable to figure out why they did notplete all those moves finally they were able to understand.


    ____________________________


    "I think it is time for you to visit the Royal Academy as the teacher already informed me to tell you that the Royal Academy is already close to finishing its preparation to wee you.


    Also, all of your friends got notified by their teachers that they will get some special reward today. So from the early morning, every one of your friends is waiting in the Royal Academy to know what this special reward is.


    Not just only your friends but everyone in the third year and 4th year are also very confused right now as they also wanted to know why the Royal Academy began to decorate like this.


    The teacher already told you to go to the academy as even the principal will attend The Academy today to wee you properly. She also told me to go to the academy with you so quickly get ready as we need to go to the Royal Academy."


    Around 2:00 p.m. after finishing lunch Gloria told Sam she had already been informed by her teacher. Alena can directly give that news to Sam. But before anything she first wanted to hear the exnation from Sam why he disappeared 3 years ago.


    Even though she is happy right now as Sam sessfully came back, at the same time she is also angry at Sam because she always told him not to do anything reckless. But even after her warning he decided to do something reckless.


    ''Sigh!!!''


    Sam releases a deep breath. He already can feel the anger of Alena. He also doesn''t know how to face his friends as all of them would be very sad. But he also knows that he needs to meet everyone and exin to them why he suddenly disappeared.


    Not only that he also needs to visit the warrior association as he already told everyone that he will be visiting the warrior association today and will give them the proper exnation. Also, he has a n to teach everyone about the true spiritual energy system.


    But herees the next problem as he does not know how much time it will take for all of them to change their spiritual system into a true spiritual system. Sam already asked Gloria what happened when teacher Alena was changing the spiritual system.


    Gloria already informed him during that time she almost became unconscious for 2 months. Not only that, in the first month everyone who tried to take care of her situation got worried.


    From time to time the blood woulde out from her body and by the expression of her anybody could tell she was also in pain. Sometimes she would also vomit ck stuff.

 Chapter 725: Chapter 725 - Gifts

    '' Changing the spiritual system would be very painful for everyone but after they are sessful it will be a great help for them. But the main question will be how long they will take to change the spiritual system and I also think if they did not have more willpower then it could backfire.


    The more powerful anyone became the more hard it became for them to change the spiritual system. Even with that, I need to discuss this with every saint.


    Currently, the problem would be how long it will take. The situation on our isn''t good right now, so if this thing takes much time, then a problematic situation could ur. So before deciding anything I need to talk to them and only then I would think about what to do.


    I did not know how to exin to everyone but I needed to face them and needed to exin to them what happened to me and I waspletely helpless in that situation.


    Also, I wanted to see how much they progress as I get to know that they also will change the spiritual system into a true spiritual system.''


    Currently, Sam is thinking all of these while he is sitting beside Gloria who is driving the car. Even though they could directly go to that ce by flying, Gloria wanted to go there using her car, so they are going like this.


    During the time both siblings talked about various things that happened to them. Sam is also very curious to know what kind of adventure she did in these 3 years. Well beforeing with her, Sam also talks with his parents and he gets to know that from the moment he disappeared her sister became very cold and she would always me herself for his disappearance.


    She almost forgets to rest and always puts her body under a lot of pressure. Sometimes the pressure already got overloaded and she became seriously injured. But even with that, she did not stop putting her body under that kind of pressure.


    The main thing is that she almost forgot to smile and most likely she smiled for the first time when Sam told them about his adventure.


    Sam is currently ming himself for all of these because he can also tell not just only his sister but everyone who cares about him suffers the same pain. The same thing also happened with his parents so he med himself for all of this.


    Fortunately, everything will be okay right now as he already has a way to travel through any, and also even if he disappeared he would at least be able to contact them.


    "Sister, I got to hear from Mom that you wanted to go inside the S-grade dungeon. Well, why don''t we go inside the Dungeon the day after tomorrow? "


    While discussing their adventure, suddenly Sam remembers that previously his mom told him that his sister wanted to go inside of an S-grade dungeon. But unfortunately, Alena was quite busy so she did not get the time to bring her inside the Dungeon. Also, Gloria''s team wasn''t ready to go inside the S-grade dungeon.


    "Really!!! Well, I wanted to go inside the supreme dungeons, as I wanted to see what kind of Monsters anybody would face after going inside of those supreme dungeons.


    But unfortunately, the teacher has been very busy for thest 3 years and she didn''t even get that much time to teach me or give me pointers. Sigh, you probably did not know that much about the incident that happened on Earth.


    Teacher Alena participated in that incident. Fortunately with those things that you gave everyone to save the life from those Traitors prime humans. Those people became Greedy and wanted to kill every one of our warriors to get all those artifacts.


    From that moment the teacher became very serious about this matter and aftering back she also became busy to increase her strength. Also, the number of those people from others just keeps increasing.


    Every time we would be able to feel energy fluctuation when those people from others appeared on our but they would just immediately disappear and we would lose the trace of those people.


    Sigh, those people know how to hide because we are still unable to find any kind of trace about those people."


    Gloria exins all of this while taking a deep breath. Really, who could expect that those prime humans would do something like this, and also what kind of pressure did their teachers face when they were on that? Not just only that aftering out from that she also got to know her student disappeared and that was a hard blow for her.


    But, sometimeter Gloria this is not to think about any of these as suddenly Sam already came back. Not only that, anybody could tell him he is very powerful evenpared to those people from others.


    Just thinking about this makes her feel rxed that her brother will take care of everything. Also, she would be the final level to control a hundred percent spiritual energy that previously was very hard for her to control.


    Gloria previously talked to her teacher rted to this matter, and from her she also gets to know the same thing, that she is also traveling, controlling her spiritual energy. Alena was the one who was somehow able toe up with that way to forcefully bring out almost 80% of their spiritual energy.


    But that isn''t an easy process. In that process, mental energy and stamina will be consumed more rapidly. This is the drawback of that technique. Fortunately, Sam has the energy control technique that would be suitable for true spiritual energy. With these, they will not have that problem.


    ____________________


    It won''t take them that much time to reach the Royal Academy as they already came very close to the academy. At this time, Sam is focusing on the system screen.


    He was looking at the system shop because he wanted to prepare some gifts for every one of his friends and his teacher. First of all, he already prepared The Spiritual energy control technique for everyone as that would be necessary for every one of them to control the spiritual energy.


    But other than that he also prepares armor and weapons for everyone. He is just thinking if he should prepare more, but at the same time, he is also thinking about all of his ssmates and seniors who are still present at the Royal Academy.


    He did not have any connection with those juniors so he did not think about them but he should try to at least do something that will help those ssmates and those seniors.


    Because of this Sam is thinking about what to prepare for them that would be beneficial for them as he did not want to give them techniques like that he will be giving to his friends and his teacher. Fortunately, he has enough gold coins.


    At this time Gloria, who was driving the car, became very curious when she looked at her brother. She could see her brother looking at the ceiling of the car for a few minutes.


    By looking at his eyes she could tell him most likely was thinking about something so she did not disturb him. Even though Sam almost exined everything to them, she still did not think Sam told him about all the kinds of dangers that he faced.


    ''Is he thinking about Terraria? Should I try to ask him if he is in any kind of trouble?''


    Gloria at first hesitates to ask but then she decides to ask Sam if he is facing any kind of trouble.


    Sam, who was only focusing on the system screen with his serious face, also got started by the sudden question from his sister. For a second he was unable to understand why she asked him that question but he instantly understood mostly as he was only causing problems on the system screen.


    While seriously looking at those products present on the system screen, his sister thought he was likely thinking about something seriously.


    "Haha¡­ sister you don''t have to worry as I am not thinking about any kind of troublesome things. I am thinking about what kind of gift I should give every one of my ssmates and every one of the seniors who are still present at the Royal Academy.


    Even though I did not have that much contact with everyone during my first year, I should still try to help them. That would be beneficial for them. With this, I am just thinking about what to do."


    Sam exined to Gloria why he was serious. Gloria, after hearing that, rxed but she did not think her brother was thinking about this. But then if he wanted to prepare a gift for every one of his ssmates and those seniors she also didn''t know what kind of gift he should prepare for them.

 Chapter 726: Chapter 726 - Who is he?

    '' This will be the perfect gift for all of my ssmates and the seniors. If I am not wrong then these will also give them a huge benefit. But before anything, I also needed to discuss these with all the teachers as they needed to create these arrays in every training room.''


    Finally, after searching for so long, Sam found the thing that would be the best gift for every one of his ssmates and the seniors. Not only that but even those juniors can also use these gifts to their advantage and they will receive a huge benefit from that.


    " Spirit array


    [ The array will instantly increase the density of any area where it will get created. Not only will the density of The Spiritual energy increase but at the same time every living being who will be present in that area will also receive the blessing of this array.] "


    This is the description of this array. Even though the description did not provide details about what kind of blessing those people will get, he can predict what kind of gift they will receive.


    First of all the body strength will be increasing in that array. Their physique will also increase. The Spiritual energy system present in their body will also get nourished by this.


    With this, he finally decided to buy the method to create that array and he already had a happy smile as he was able to find the gift. Gloria also seems to understand that Sam already found what kind of gift you will be giving to all of his ssmates.


    Unfortunately, Sam did not tell her what kind of gifts you would be giving them. He just told her he would be creating the same thing inside of their training room. So she doesn''t have to worry about anything.


    Gloria became confused after hearing that but she did not ask more questions because she already knew her brother would not say anything until she did not reach the Academy. Fortunately, they only take 5 more minutes to reach the Academy.


    ''Is everyone going to the auditorium? ''


    Sam expected that many people would be present at the gate to wee him but he was unable to see anyone. So most likely they already went to the auditorium room as the principal is also going toe.


    The moment their car reaches in front of the gate Gloria smiles at him. This made him quite confused but he did not say anything and just waited for the guards to open the main door.


    Outside of the gate, two Guards were present. They instantly begin to open the gate after recognizing the car. Even though she already left the Royal Academy, everyone from the Royal Academy knows her and the number of her car.


    ''Hahaha¡­ I did not expect this.''


    Sam thought that and began to smile. If you are wondering why he is smiling then the moment both the guards open the main door he instantly sees many people present there. He did not know if all the students present there were there but he could tell all the faculty were already present there and every one of them looked at their car with excitement.


    Sam instantly noticed his teacher alongside the principal of the Royal Academy. Both of them are also present in that crowd and approach their car.


    Currently, every student became very confused because they did not know why every faculty member had that happy smile on their face. Even their principal, vice principal, and teacher Alena were also present there.


    At this time many students already recognize Gloria''s car but that makes them very confused. Naturally, Gloria is a legendary student of the Royal Academy and she is also following The legacy of her teacher. But even with that those people who recognize that did not think it would call that excitement among all the faculty.


    Alexa, Elena, and the others are also present in that ce and they are also confused right now. They also did not think that because of sister Gloria, those faculty present there. Not only that, they can also see many ex-students present in that ce.


    _________________________________


    "Are you ready? Everyone is present here to wee you."


    " Hmm.. Well, to tell you the truth I am feeling quite nervous. "


    Sam is feeling quite nervous after seeing those many people present to wee him. But he prepares himself to face them.


    "Haha¡­ don''t worry everybody is present here to wee you and they will be happy to meet you once again. So, let''s go,"


    After saying that Gloria opened the car''s door and went outside of the car. Instantly all the students who were very curious about the car looked at their legendary senior. They instantly thought of all of this preparation to wee their legendary senior.


    Those juniors instantly begin to cheer for the legendary senior. For those first-year and 2nd year students this will be the first time they are going to meet their legendary senior. They already met their other legendary seniors but they did not meet Gloria.


    But all those third-year and 4th-year students were quite excited to meet Gloria once again but they did not think the same thing as those juniors. This isn''t because of their senior Gloria.


    Only then did everyone present notice the car''s door open once again and a figure came out of the car. For all those juniors who previously cheered for their legendary senior Gloria also noticed that person who came out of the car.


    Not only that, they also notice that the principal and all the faculty suddenly begin to advance toward the car. Now this is their time to be confused. Don''t know why but every one of them had the feeling that all the faculty and all those ex-seniors were happy to make that second person who came out of the car.


    Even for those third-year students and 4th-year students, this became quite a mystery as they were also unable to recognize that second person. But you cannot say the same thing for Alexa and her friends. Even though for a second they were also unable to recognize that person, it did not take them that much time to recognize the second person.


    But the thing is that they still cannot believe what they are saying right now.


    ''Is this a dream?''


    This is the question that everyone is thinking about right now in their mind.


    On the other hand, both Gloria and Sam already came in front of the car and looked at those people with a smile on their faces. This is also the first time when everybody notices Gloria''s smile once again. For those 3rd year and 4th years students this has be more of a mystery.


    Even though Gloria previously did note back to the Royal Academy, every one of them got the chance to meet her once again in the warrior association. During that time they never smile like this. Everyone knows why she became like this.


    But the main question is why is she currently smiling like this? This is the question every one of them thought and every one of them also knew that the reason behind could be that second person. With this, they begin to observe that second person very carefully. They wanted to find out the identity of that second person.


    On the other hand, the prediction of those juniors became correct because every one of those faculties began to approach the second person and not long after that suddenly the principal came in front of the second person and hugged him. Now this ispletely unexpected for everyone.


    At this time all the faculty even though did not read the same thing as the principal but they began to wee him. That second person also began to thank them with a happy smile. At this time those ex-students also approach that second person and begin to wee him. Alexa and her friends also began to approach but at this time all of them have a confused face right now.


    "Are you present here or is this a dream?"


    Alexa out of nowhere asked that question aftering in front of that second person. While the person answers them with a smile.


    ''Who is he?''


    Now this time all the students present in that ce can be early confused as they are unable to understand what is happening right now. Why does everyone present begin to act like this? It looks like Alexa and others are already able to recognize that person while they are unable to recognize that person.


    Fortunately for the students, the principal and all the other faculty already noticed their confusion. Every one of those faculty looks at each other and then smiles once again. Anybody could tell those students were unable to recognize Sam.


    " Haha¡­ by looking at their confusion I can understand that none of you are able to tell what is happening and why we are behaving like this. We already expected this from all the new students but we thought all the third-year and 4th year students would not be able to recognize him."

 Chapter 727: Chapter 727 - Pitiful Sam

    " Haha¡­ by looking at their confusion I can understand that none of you can tell what is happening and why we are behaving like this. We already expected this from all the new students but we thought all the third-year and 4th year students would not be able to recognize him."


    One teacher said that after looking at the confusing faces of those third-year and 4th-year students.


    "Haha¡­ teacher Nitin you cannot me them as it has already been 3 years since theyst saw him."


    " Well, let''s not waste our time. Everyone I know is very confused right now because of all of this. Every one of you wants to know the identity of this boy. He is also one of our strongest students. Unfortunately, 3 years ago he somehow disappeared.


    By the surprised face of all the third-year and fourth-year students, I can tell every one of you already recognizes him. But as the 2nd year and 1st year students did not know anything about him, let me introduce him once again.


    The person in front of you is Sam Kainer, the brother of our legendary student Gloria Kainer. He is the Hero of Eden Blue. Also, he got the nickname miracle maker from all the saints. He is the pride of our Royal Academy."


    The principal or you can say Saint John Mayer said that to everyone with pride in his voice. He is really proud that Sam is a student of the Royal Academy.


    On the other hand, after saying that he and all the other teachers just look at those students. They wanted to see their expression and those students did not disappoint them.


    First of all, those third-year and 4th-year students, after hearing the words of those teachers, already realized the identity of that person. It also became sure after hearing the word of the principal.


    So even before the principal told The Identity of Sam, the third-year and 4th-year students had a surprised face as they still couldn''t believe Sam was present in front of them. On the other hand, those first-year students and 2nd-year students naturally were unable to understand previously even after hearing the words of those teachers.


    They only realize The Identity of that person after when the principal introduces Sam to them. Almost all of them have surprised faces that are fun to see. They really cannot believe that they are seeing their legendary senior who disappeared 3 years ago.


    He is the person who got the hero medal from the Warrior Association. He is the person who got the nickname called miracle maker as without his help many Warriors or even those Saints could have lost their life when they went to the earth.


    Those second-year and 1st-year students also learn about all the achievements that Sam achieved in that short amount of time. He is the person who previously did not have the talent to be a Warrior butter he is the person who became so strong with his hard work.


    Many of those first-year and 2nd your students wanted to follow the same path as Sam. Unfortunately, they never get the chance to meet that legendary senior. But right now that legendary senior who disappeared mysteriously somehow appears in front of them.


    "Haha¡­ this is hrious after looking at your surprised face. But don''t worry he is back right now so you will get to meet him many times and I can see many of you also saw him as your idol. All of you can also get his suggestion as I should tell you he is also a very good teacher.


    Now wait for the main matter. Every one of you should go back to the auditorium hall. Me and all the other teachers will also be going there alongside everyone so let''s go."


    The principal said that to everyone. Even though many of those students wanted to talk to him or ask him any question, after hearing the word of the principal they began to go toward the auditorium hall. But from time to time they will look behind to see their legendary seniors.


    You can say today is a special day for every Royal Academy student. First of all not only do they get to meet the legendary senior who disappeared 3 years ago but at the same time they also get to meet those other legendary students who already graduated from the Academy.


    ______________________________


    "Hey, guys, it''s really good to see all of you."


    Sam is still present in his previous ce while Alexa, Jeni, Elena, Tony, and the others surround him. At this time Sam said with a smile.


    But instead of getting an answer in the next second, he got punched in the stomach by Alexa. But it did not end there as one by one Elena and the others also began to attack him.


    "Guys¡­ listen to me first, "


    Sam is surprised by the reaction which calms them down, but it looks like they did not have the n to stop attacking. Well, who could me them? All these three years every one of them just worried about his safety and felt angry at their uselessness.


    If possible they wanted to bring back their friend but unfortunately, they did not have that strength. On the other hand, Sam already came back but did not even contact them. Just realizing that made them more angry and they did not even want to hear any kind of exnation and just wanted to beat him right now.


    Gloria, Fiona, Alena, and Principal John were also present in that ce but none of them interfered in this matter. Instead of any kind of worry, everyone has a smile on their face. As it looks like they are also enjoying Sam getting beaten down by his friends.


    15 minutester,


    Sam is currently sitting on the ground while all of his friends are looking at him with angry expressions. Now in this situation, Sam did not know what to say. He is just trying to smile to rx the situation.


    "Don''t you have anything to say?"


    Suddenly Alexa says that to him.


    "Well, hehe¡­ I know I have many things to say,"


    Sam isn''t angry at anyone as he can feel their anger. He knows that he deserves this for making them worry about him.


    At this time Tony suddenly extended his hand toward Sam, Sam grabbed that hand and then stood up from the ground. Instantly all of his friends did not give him any time to react and hug him. Alexa, Elena, Jeni, Kenny, and all the girls already begin to cry. For all these years they wanted to know about Sam''s situation, but fortunately, he had alreadye back and that is a great relief for everyone.


    Every girl did not cry because of sadness or something like that but they were just crying because they were really happy to be able to see their friend once again. Tony and all the other boys don''t cry like those girls but they are also smiling.


    "Guys, don''t worry I will not disappear like before. Please stop trying or it will make me cry also."


    Sam, now facing those crying girls, did not know how to stop them. He is just trying to rx the mood by saying all of this but it looks like after hearing that those girls begin to cry more loudly.


    Sam instantly turned his head toward his sister to ask for help but his sister just smiled at him without doing anything. At this time when he turned his head toward his teacher he got really scared because of the look his teacher was giving him.


    He is familiar with that look. Every time Alena wanted to beat him she gave that look. Now she is doing the same thing and Sam can also feel her anger.


    ________________________________


    Sometimeter finally everything calmed down. But still, Sam is unable to rx as his friend continuously asks him many questions.


    "Ok¡­ ok¡­ everyone I will tell you everything but before let''s go to the auditorium hall. I can see the principal already went to the auditorium hall. After finishing this we will get the time to talk about this so let''s go."


    He already promised everyone that after finishing the wee ceremony that is going to be held in the auditorium hall you will be going to tell every one of them what happened to him and why he disappeared without telling anyone.


    "After finishing your business with all of your friends you shoulde to the training room as I have many things to ask. Not only that, I also wanted to see how much you have progressed in these 3 years."


    Alena says that and leaves that ce with Gloria and Fiona. By hearing her words Sam could easily tell, she wanted to beat him.


    "Haha¡­ you deserve this,"


    Tony and the others begin tough as they also understand the situation.

 Chapter 728: Chapter 728 - Grateful

    "It is good to see all of you once again. I can see my ssmates are still confused about me and I can also see all of my seniors, I hope every one of you is okay.


    I can tell my ssmates and all my seniors why I suddenly disappeared. I don''t even know why something like that happened previously when I went inside the Dungeon and I did not disappear. I just tell you to go to a new.


    Even though I cannot tell you the details about that, I can tell you that the is more dangerouspared to our. Somehow I was able to survive on that all these years and somehow I was able to make many friends on that who also helped me to be powerful.


    Only after reaching a certain level did I get the technique that finally helped me toe back to my and be able to meet all of you once again because of that. I hope all of you are working hard because all of you know that our is facing danger right now.


    To help you I also bring a gift for all of you but I will not tell you about this currently as that would be a surprise gift for every one of you. I need to first talk to the principal and all the other teachers to create that and only then will every one of you get to know about this.


    I also have some techniques from that but to use all those techniques all of you need to reach a certain level so unfortunately I won''t be able to give you those techniques currently."


    Currently, Sam is exining his disappearance to all his ssmates and all the students of the Royal Academy. Previously the principal asked him to say something to all of them and also impossible he asked him to motivate all of them.


    All the students somehow begin to feel more pressure the moment they get to know about the danger that they are facing. So the principal and all the teachers will be grateful if he is able to motivate everyone.


    Fortunately, Sam was already prepared for this and as expected the moment he told them he brought gifts for all of them, all those ssmates and all those seniors became very excited. Not just only them but those juniors also be excited to see what kind of reward their seniors prepare for them.


    "I also know from tomorrow every one of you will be participating in the annual collegepetition and I hope all of you give your 100% in thepetition. All the teachers already told me that most of you begin to feel pressure after realizing the danger of our.


    But this isn''t the time to be demotivated after feeling the pressure. Even in this pressure we need to work hard to be powerful so that we could also help our warrior associations and all the other Warriors."


    Like this, sometimeter, Sam had already finished his speech and everyone present in the auditorium hall was pping for him. You have to say after hearing his speech most of the students be motivated to work hard. Also, Sam already told him if possible he also wanted to see all of their performances.


    After hearing that many juniors who saw him as an idol felt motivated. They wanted to impress their idol and if possible they wanted to get his pointers about their strength.


    On the other hand, all the teachers did not know anything about the gift that Sam prepared, but after hearing his speech they also became curious to know what type of gift Sam prepared for all the students. Fortunately, they don''t have to wait for that long as Sam already told them you will be discussing something important after the speech.


    Sometimeter the principal already told everyone the wee ceremony was over so everybody could leave the auditorium hall. They also prepare a banquet so every student should enjoy the banquet.


    On the other hand, Sam, all the teachers, all the ex-students, and all of his friends are currently going toward the meeting room. Sam told him to go there as he was finally going to show everyone what type of gift he prepared for all the students.


    __________________________


    "This is the gift that I have prepared for every student of our Royal Academy. Not just only the students but every teacher and every one of my seniors would also be able to use this gift. This is the spirit array. This increases the density of spiritual energy of any ce and also that spiritual energy begins to nourish our bodies.


    There are many more benefits which all of you need to find on your own as if I told you then there will be no surprises for you. But one thing I could say is this will be very helpful for all of you. I hope all the teachers could help me in this project as we needed to build the spirit array in every training ground which all of you and all the students would use.


    Other than that I also prepare something for my academy and this is the thing called the protection barrier. This is also an array that we needed to create in the center of our Academy. This array creates a barrier around our Academy. I can guarantee that during the time when the war breaks out our Academy will be safe if something abnormal does not happen."


    Sam finally shows both the gifts that he prepared for the Royal Academy. But when he looked at the faces of those teachers and all the other people he saw that everyone had a surprised face. It Looks like they are very surprised after receiving those gifts.


    "Sam¡­ I don''t know what to say about all these gifts. But I trust you so you do not have to worry as I will immediately start the operation to create both these arrays. But can I ask you for a favor? Can the warrior association also be able to use both these arrays?"


    Currently, the principal had already gotten up from his seat, hugged him, and also asked for a favor. After hearing the favor Sam justughed because he already prepared the same thing and many other things for the warrior association so they definitely could use both the array.


    "Haha¡­  sir you don''t have to worry as I also prepare many more things for the warrior association and naturally the warrior association is also able to use both the array as we also need to create more ces which would be safe during the war.


    Naturally, I will be going to the Warrior Associationter and I will discuss these with all the saints. I wanted to create some strongholds which would be the safest ce and where we would be able to evacuate all the people so that none of them get affected during the war.


    Our Royal Academy will also be a stronghold and the moment the war broke out I wanted every family member of our students and all of our teachers present so that they would be safe."


    Really after hearing all of these all the teachers did not know how to express their gratitude. Even Alena, Gloria, Fiona, Alexa, and the others also have gratitude in their heart. Sam is the miracle maker and will be the one who alwayses first when they need help.


    Now naturally in this tough situation, the warrior association and almost every warrior is thinking about the safety of their family and all the other people of their. They are also thinking about creating strongholds but who could give them the guarantee that those will not get destroyed by those people from others?


    The warrior associations already decided to use those artifacts that they received previously from Sam but unfortunately, even with that, they did not know how they would be able to create strongholds that would be able to protect every citizen of Eden Blue.


    Now in this dangerous situation where nobody knows if they would be able to survive or not or if they would be able to fight back or not, where many people always begin to panic about their safety, Sam once again came with help which would be helpful for every living being of Eden blue.


    "Also not only that there is one more array that I want all of you to create in the center of the Royal Academy. This array is called the summon array. When our enemy will try to attack the Royal Academy that arrival will immediately activate and it will summon a spiritual beast to fight back."


    Sam prepares all of this to protect the safety of his Academy. Naturally, he also prepared all those arrays for the warrior association. So that they could also protect the safety of the whole Eden Blue.

 Chapter 729: Chapter 729 - The Meeting is over

    Suddenly inside the meeting room, only the teachers of the Royal Academy and Sam are present. At this time he describes all the three arrays that he previously told him they should create inside the Academy.


    He decided to start from the easiest array and that is the spirit array. After that the protection array and after that the Summoning array. Naturally, all those areas are veryplicated and it isn''t easy for anyone to understand that quickly.


    It is a good thing that Sam is present there as he is just patiently waiting for them. He also knew that nobody would be able to learn that quickly as they did not have the help of any cheat system like himself. Naturally, those people will take some time to understand theplicated process of those arrays.


    All the students along with Gloria and her ssmates already came out of the meeting room. Even though none of the teachers or Sam told them to go out, they decided to do that. Alexa and all of her friends don''t have to worry about all those arrays or need to learn about the process of those arrays.


    Even if they wanted to learn about them, then Sam would just teach them about them. Not only that, the main thing is that everybody thinks if they still stay inside the meeting room then it would be an awkward situation for everyone.


    Even though Sam nor any teacher showed any kind of restriction, still those people came out of the meeting room. But naturally, every one of them was also very curious about those three arrays, and first of all, they wanted to use the spirit array as quickly as they could.


    First of all, they wanted to know what this spirit array would do. What is the specialty of this spirit array? Not only that they also wanted to see those other arrays and wanted to see about their ability.


    ___________________________


    "Gloria, my darling, I miss you very much,"


    On the other hand, senior Fiona instantly hugged Gloria while trying to kiss her on the cheek. But Gloria just grabbed her face with her left hand. Well, this ismon among both of them. Also, it is true that they are meeting once again after a very long time.


    Previously even though Fiona wanted to meet her Gloria did not want to meet anyone at that time and only stayed busy with her training or trying to clear the Dungeons.


    "Haha¡­ who could have thought that Sam would suddenly appear out of nowhere. For 3 years we have tried to search for any kind of proof that would give us some kind of understanding about Sam''s disappearance.


    Unfortunately, we did not find any kind of clue and also the warrior association almost charged the whole but even with that they did not find any kind of clue. But after that 3 yearster suddenly he came out from another.


    Also do tell me if I am not wrong then most likely he became more powerful. Is he strongerpared to you or not?"


    Fiona asked that question to Gloria who did not mind her words and clinginess.


    " Well, he already told us what happened to him but I will not tell you anything because I have already told all of you that he will exin after finishing his business.


    Nowing back to the second matter, Sam already told us that he somehow got teleportation that did not even leave any kind of trace. This is the reason that we are unable to find any kind of clue about that person.


    Also to tell you the truth, some already became very strong that even if all the Saints try to attack him he will not get injured and can beat all the Saints. Except for some Warriors of the warrior association, nobody knows about the powerful spiritual aura of Sam."


    After hearing the answer you can naturally tell Fiona to be very surprised. Also, it looks like she did not believe thest word of Gloria as she did not think Sam was able to defeat every saint. Gloria also already realized that but she did notment about this matter.


    ______________________


    "I hope with this every one of you finally understands the basics of these three arrays and don''t worry I will be present when you have already started preparing those arrays.


    Principles are if it is possible then I hope we could start our work from today. We did not have that much time as nobody would give us the guarantee that tomorrow we would not face those people from others. So as quickly as he can we need to create a much more safe stronghold like this."


    Sam told the principal he wanted to start working on these 3 arrays today. Nobody could give anyone the guarantee that those people from others will not attack at that time or not try to attack the humans.


    The principal and all the teachers immediately agree with his suggestions as they also think that they should start working on those three as quickly as they can. After discussing with all the teachers, all of them came to the conclusion that they should start preparing for the defense barrier which would immediately create a strong barrier around the Royal Academy.


    "Before anything we need to clear the center of our Academy as I can see in the center, we have a fountain. We need to remove that alongside that found in we need to clear the surrounding structure. It is a good thing that in the center we did not have any kind of building.


    It is also a good decision that we should start preparing with the protection barrier as this would be the main array which would only focus on defending our academy from the attack of those Warriors from others.


    Principal John then appointed some people from today who will be clear at the center of our Academy. During that time I will be spending my time with my friends and I don''t think today we will be able to create the array early in the morning to help every one of you create the array.


    Also Principal John after spending some time with my friends I will be visiting The Guardian association. So don''t worry, naturally, I will also prepare this kind of array for the guardian association."


    " Don''t worry about that. I am also really grateful for your help as you did not know all the saints and you can say almost every human on our thinking about how to save their life in the war.


    The warrior association previously had the idea that we should build a stronghold underground but even with that,  nobody could give us the guarantee that those strongholds would be able to protect every human from those warriors from the others.


    Now with this protection barrier, I wanted to create as many strongholds as we could. I would immediately go to the Warrior Association to tell everyone about this and I would discuss with everyone to prepare all the ces that would act as a stronghold during the time of war.


    On the other hand, I would immediately appoint some people to clear the center area of our Royal Academy. So don''t worry, just spend your time with your friends as they miss you very much."


    With this Sam finishes the discussion with every teacher and finally begins to leave the meeting room. But he did not even advance that much when he suddenly heard the voice of his teacher who told him to meet her after spending time with his friends.


    '' Don''t worry I know¡­ I know. I also miss you very much so definitely are you going to talk to you after talking with my friends.''


    With that Sam leaves the meeting room. The moment he left the meeting room he did not see but every teacher, even the principal, sighed in relief. You can say not just only them but every human of Eden Blue was under pressure.


    All this time nobody knew how to protect themselves in the time of war. But finally, they have a method to protect all the humans who won''t be able to fight back during the time of war. Also, they receive help from the miracle maker who just appeared. Who could have thought that in the end, they would still receive help from Sam?


    Naturally, all this time Alena had already begun to feel proud of her student but she did not let it show on her face. But she is also really thankful that her miracle-maker student once again came up with something that can protect almost every human who did not have the power to fight back during the war.


    Immediately Principal John told every teacher to appoint some people to clear the center area of the Royal Academy while he will be going back to the warrior association to discuss this with all the saints.


    Principal John also asked Alena if she wanted to go to the Warrior Association or not but she rejected the idea as she wanted to talk to her student. Principal John also realizes why she rejected him. He did not have any problem with that so he just smiled at her and left the ce.

 Chapter 730: Chapter 730 - Spending time

    Sam is currently in the cafeteria eating his food with all of his friends. Finally, all of them get the time to spend with each other and also every one of them gets the time to ask all the questions they have in their mind.


    "How did you disappear 3 years ago? Also before disappearing you did not tell anyone about this."


    Alexa was the first one to ask the question but just after she asked the question everyone instantly focused on Sam. All of them wanted to know the answer to that question.


    "Well, guys, to tell you the truth even I did not expect that I would disappear or you can say I would get teleportation like this. Well, I did not tell any of you that when for the first time I went inside of the Dungeon of the Base city, I found something mysterious on thest floor after killing the Boss monster.


    I found a tform which was made of stones. One part of that tform got broken by something and because of that, I can see some kind of strange symbol. That makes me very curious to know about that symbol so I try to destroy the tform to get the full clear of that symbol.


    Unfortunately, even after using my full strength, I was unable to leave a scratch on that stone as it was unbreakable. Then I thought most likely after bing powerful I would be able to destroy that tform to get the full view of the stranger symbol.


    I decided to search about the tform and also try to search about that strange symbol. I also did not tell that news to anyone because at that time I feared that if I tried to ask that question I would attract a lot of attention that I did not want to happen in my life.


    So with these, I did not tell anyone about this even though I did not tell my teacher or any of you about this. I just secretly started my operation about that symbol and that stone tform.


    But even with this, you can say I did not have any kind of achievement except one. The achievement is that I found somewhere to figure out what that symbol could be.


    That symbol is a teleportation symbol that has manyyers on it but one of theyers looks the same as the pattern we have in our Warrior association. Even though I am not sure, I just thought that it could be a teleportation portal.


    Later because of the annual collegepetition and many other things I forget about the strange symbol. But as you know after that one by one many things happened and those people from the dark association also started doing many things that could risk the lives of all the humans on our.


    I begin to feel that stone tform and that strange symbol could be a passageway for those dark association''s Warriors. So I decided to investigate on my own without telling anyone.


    It is a good thing that our Warrior Association already destroyed all the bases of the Dark Association but still as you know we get the news that the leader of the Dark Association wasn''t present on our and most likely went to some other.


    So I thought that symbol could be the way for those dark humans. I did not want to risk any of your life so I unfortunately did not tell any of you about this and go back to the Dungeon once again.


    Well as you know that time I also invented a technique and alongside the spirit technique of our Royal Academy, I thought most likely I would be able to destroy that tform finally and would get to know the symbol.


    But I still cannot believe that even using my full power I was unable to leave a scratch on that tform even though at that time I already reached a C grade. But I suddenly thought something and began to channel the true spiritual energy directly into that rock or the stone tform.


    Surprisingly that time the stone tform finally showed signs of breaking. Now that is very interesting for me and wishing for no time I quickly broke that whole stone finally I could look at the full symbol.


    Even though I am not an expert at creating symbols, I could tell that it is a veryplicated symbol which most likely has 10 to 20yers present in it but I am still not sure if this is correct or not.


    At first, I thought I would just see what would happen if I channeled my spiritual energy into that symbol but I did not think the moment I began to channel my spiritual energy my body would suddenly be unable to move from that ce and my spiritual energy automatically transferred to that symbol.


    The symbol suddenly begins to blow very brightly and it almost makes me go blind for a second. I am unable to see anything or observe anything around me. It did take some time for me to regain my vision and when I already regained my vision I saw I was present in some kind of forest.


    Somehow I have already teleported to a new and as I told you before, nes are far more dangerouspared to our."


    Sam told them in detail what happened to him and why he did not get the chance to inform anyone. All this time his friends just listen to his exnation without saying anything but it looks like they also get quite hurt when they hear he is secretly investigating something dangerous without telling them.


    But they can also understand why he did that because as you know from the first everyone knows that Sam is very good at hiding himself and even if he faces powerful enemies he would be able to escape from that ce.


    But that ispetitively different if they got involved because if they faced a powerful enemy, then Alexa and the others would be a burden to him.


    "Sigh!!!!! I really cannot me you but you should at least tell us that you are doing something dangerous so that we could also stay prepared to help you.


    Even though we know that at that time we weren''t that powerfulpared to you at least we would immediately help you If that situation happened in front of our eyes."


    Alexa just sighed deeply. In this matter, nobody could me him but at the same time, they also felt very helpless that they weren''t able to help him when he was facing something like that.


    " I am sorry guys that I did not tell any of you. I am already nning to reveal the news to all of you. I just thought before telling every one of you I should try to check if that symbol works or not or even if it works where I would be teleported to.


    I did not inform you because I thought you would also put your life in danger to save me. Also if the teacher and others get to know that I am doing something dangerous they would try to stop me. This is also a careless thing I did, so I am sorry about that.


    But don''t worry guys, I already came back and this time even if I disappeared I will have a way toe back immediately and also I will inform every one of you if something dangerous happens to me."


    Sam apologized to everyone. For him, all of them go through that kind of situation. Every one of his friends almost went crazy when he suddenly disappeared from Eden Blue.


    They almost try to openly attack those people from others as they thought they kidnapped Sam. Fortunately, all the Saints were able to handle the situation.


    But the problem was that even though all of them at that time did not do anything, they already decided to be powerful so that they could kill every one of those warriors from others who kidnapped him.


    Not just only then but almost every person from Eden Blue thought he got kidnapped by those people from others. Even the Warrior already started going after those people from others to get any kind of information about him.


    Like this, there were many times when Warriors from body association fought with those people from others. You have to say the artifacts that Sam gave to every one of them were life-saving things for everyone.


    Without the help of those artifacts, you can say those people from the Warrior Association would be dead right now.


    Fortunately, Saint Markus, Saint John, and the others finally decided to discuss this and they also decided to take action if they found those people from others. With this the search team got created.

 Chapter 731: Chapter 731 - The Real Danger

    Sam already finished exining about Terraria and as he expected everyone of his friends got ready excited after hearing about Terraria. If possible they also wanted to go to that to see what is the difference between Eden blue and Terraria.


    Sam also told him he made some friends in Terraria and they also wanted toe with him to his so that they could support him. Unfortunately none of them reach the limit of Warrior grade which will help them travel through the world bridge.


    The most important thing is that Sam also exins to them about all the warrior grades of Terraria which arepletely different from Eden blue. The warrior grade of Eden blue ispletely basic.


    This is really surprising news for everyone and he also exins to everyone in detail why those people from others want to get the core.


    This exnation is really helpful for everyone as they finally understand why those people wanted to get the core. They also understand what would happen if those people from others were able to get the core.


    Everyone became very serious after hearing that every living being of Eden Blue would be in danger if those people from others finally get that core. But they weren''t the only danger that Eden blue was facing right now.


    Huge Monsters are alsoing toward their s. They are the real danger as they are more powerfulpared to those people from others and also those Monsters did not have any n of controlling their or something like that.


    Those Monsters simply wanted to get the core andter they will destroy thepletely. Getting the core is the shortest way to reachary grade, and even if anyary grade monster or warrior absorbs the core they will also have improvement in their power.


    They directly won''t be able to be legendary great even if they are in the peak grade. But, they will be able to have massive improvement in their power.


    ____________________________


    "I really did not expect we are facing this kind of danger. We are still expecting those people from others to be our main enemy but those Monsters who areing toward our are the main enemy."


    Alexa said that seriously but at the same time you can see the helpless expression of everyone. First of all, even if they got to know about all this kind of danger, they did not have that much strength which would help them during the war.


    During the war every one of those people from others will not get restricted by the restriction force so definitely they will be more powerfulpared to their Saints. There could be a possibility that even all the saints will have problems during that time so what will they be going to?


    Sam who observing the expression of everyone can also feel everyone of them feeling very helpless so he told them,


    "Guys, I know that we are facing serious danger which is very risky for our. But don''t worry, I am here so I already prepared everything which would help everyone to be more powerful in a short time.


    But this process isn''t easy as in this process you all needed to work more harder. I also told all of this to my family and they are also ready to work hard to be powerful."


    Sam told him that he already prepared a shortcut technique which would help them to get powerful in a short time but that isn''t an easy process.


    Alexa and the others just after hearing that became once again excited. Every one of them finally realizes that their friend is with them who is a real miracle maker. Just aftering back to his he already prepared something which would be able to help every living being of Eden Blue to be safe.


    Sam smiles after looking at their excited faces once again. Wasting no time he quickly brought out 10 storage rings. One by one Alexa and the others take the storage ring. They are very excited to see what is inside those storage rings.


    "Haha¡­ I can see everyone is very excited so don''t waste any time and quickly see what I have prepared for everyone."


    Sam told them mysteriously. Naturally after hearing that Jeni and the others waiting a single second begin to see what is inside those storage rings.


    But before even looking at those items present in the storage ring, everyone became very surprised when they noticed the space inside of the storage ring. Even those high grade storage rings of Eden Blue did not have that much big space.


    Not just only that but the moment they channel their spiritual energy into the storage ring, they begin to feel some kind of bonding created between them and those storage rings.


    All are those special storage rings that Sam has for all of them. Those storage rings will note out from their finger if they did not give the permission. Also nobody other than them would be able to ess those storage rings.


    Jeni, Kenny and everyone naturally became very excited after feeling the bond between them and the storage ring but they calmed down and then decided to look at all the items that Sam prepared for them.


    At this time one by one Sam begins to exin the details of all the items and the more they hear about the details the more they get excited.


    Who could have thought that they would get those kinds of exciting things? Not only that but they also realized the speciality of those storage rings.


    __________________________


    "Really we don''t know how to express our gratitude but I have to say you are really a miracle maker who will alwayse out to help us when we are in danger.


    Man, now after getting all these items I really did not want to participate in thepetition as I wanted to fully focus on my cultivation to get more powerful.


    I should try to talk to my teacher as they could also understand that we get all these kinds of things from you so definitely we should put more focus on bing powerful without wasting our time in thepetition."


    Tony said that. Actually not only him but everyone of them also begin to think the same thing after getting all those items from Sam.


    Who doesn''t want to be more powerful and wants to help their to ovee the danger which their is going to face.


    "Well, I don''t know if they will agree or not but you should try to talk to them. That you just participate for a few rounds and after that you just surrender yourself. Butpared to this I would prefer the first option. There is a possibility that they will also agree with all of you after hearing what all of you are going to do."


    Sam also thinks that there is a possibility that their teacher will agree with them. With this Sam and his friend spend some time together and finally it is time for him to go to see his teacher.


    During the time his sister already told him that she will be training with Fiona and the others. Also she asked him if she could teach about the true spiritual energy to her best friend Fiona.


    Sam naturally did not have any problem with that as she is a very good person and definitely she did not have any kind of connection with people from others or those people from dark associations.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally Sam is standing in front of the training room which makes him remember those memories of him when he joined the Royal Academy and will alwayse to that training room to train with his teacher. Sam really enjoyed those days with everyone.


    "You doesn''t have to stand their as you can came inside,"


    While Sam is busy thinking about those old memories, he suddenlyes back to reality after hearing that word. Alena was already present inside of the training room and the moments and approach that ce she already noticed that.


    With this finally Sam entered the training room and he could finally see his teacher who was most likely waiting for him for all these hours. Now Sam is quite nervous after meeting his teacher after so many years but at the same time he also misses her very much.


    "It''s been a long time since we met the teacher. I really miss you very much. I am really sorry that because of me you also begin to suffer."


    Wasting no time Sam kennel down and said all of this to his teacher. He really never thought of making his teacher that much worried but he also never expected something like this would happen.

 Chapter 732: Chapter 732 - Meeting Alena

    Alena did not say anything after hearing all of this and just looked at Sam. Sam also on the other hand is still kneeling down on the ground. He did not know if his teacher forgave him or not.


    Some secondster, Sam can already hear the footsteps of Alena. Sam still did not get up from the ground and stayed like this when suddenly Alena crouched down and hugged him.


    This instantly surprised Sam and he quickly tried to look at his teacher. Only then did he notice the tearsing out from her eyes. Just after looking at it, Sam began to feel more guilty. He never thought because of him his teacher would cry like this.


    Fortunately, sometimeter she calmed down. All this time some did not do anything and just stayed like this with his teacher. In that situation if he tries to exin more she could get angry or it will take more time for her to calm down.


    Because of this without saying anything he stays like this and finally she rxes. Not only that, she also begins to check if he is fully okay or not. Only after checking did she finally rx and smile.


    "From the first I know you are a reckless boy. But I also know that you would not be that reckless which would risk your life. Whatever thing happened in that Dungeon, I know you did not have any control over that thing.


    If really people from others attack you, you are able to get away from that ce. So from the first, I know something most likely happened that also made you unable to do anything, and that did not rte to those people from others.


    From all these years I continuously try to search for your clue and also try to find what happened inside the Dungeon. But unfortunately, I was unable to find anything.


    But as you told me before about the stone tform, I also noticed that thing when I tried to search for your clue inside the Dungeon. To tell you the truth I also even try to break that thing because I don''t know why but I begin to feel that is quite suspicious.


    Unfortunately, even with my strongest attack, I am unable to do anything to that tform. I also even inform all the other saints about this. They also try to attack that at once but in the end we have no results.


    After this, we also begin to find this kind of suspicious thing inside every Dungeon. I cannot say in every Dungeons because there are still some Dungeons which did not have that kind of suspicious thing but after hearing your exnation I could say those Dungeons can also have those things but they are just hidden.


    Can you tell me what those things are? Do all of those Dungeons have the same thing as the dungeon of Base City?"


    Alena told all of this to Sam and also asked questions about those teleportation tforms that she and all the other Saints find in almost every Dungeon.


    Unfortunately, after using their full power, they are unable to leave a scratch on the stone tform and that makes them very serious about that matter. Because of this incident, you can also say they began to increase the security around every dungeon.


    You can say almost every Saints was under pressure because of this and also because of those people from others. Who can give them the guarantee that those tforms will not cause any kind of damage to their? What if those are the tforms behind Those Monsters going Berserk anding out from the dungeon?


    "Actually teacher, even I did not know if those tforms connected to Terraria or not. This also really makes me very curious about those tforms. Even though I tried to search for information rted to these I did not find any kind of information in Terraria.


    To tell you the truth I also have friends in the Royal pce in Terraria and I also try to read almost every book written on this matter in the royal library. I also already tried to ask all the powerhouses of that, but unfortunately, they did not even have any kind of information rted to this.


    Normally there are many people who like to travel to differents but they will use the world bridge technique.


    But my prediction is that every one of those stone tforms is connected to Terraria. There could be a chance that those tforms are connected to different areas of Terraria.


    But if you try to ask me who created those teleportation portals then I also need to give you any kind of answer as I didn''t even find the answer."


    Actually, Sam tries to find information rted to those teleportation portals that could be present in every dungeon on his. But unfortunately, he did not find anything and with that, he became curious to find the answer.


    This is also a reason that he wanted to meet that goddess but unfortunately, she did not appear after the previous meeting.


    _________________________________


    "Terraria has many different kingdoms and they mainly have dangerous zones where they will hunt those Monsters. Compared to any other the main difference is that Terraria has many dungeons and finding those Dungeons isn''t easy.


    Even if you are able to find Dungeons, you need to be more careful when you go inside the dungeon because the danger will increase. The Monster became more powerful inside those Dungeons.


    Also in Terraria, you will find many different kinds of species that are like us. They also have human kingdoms but at the same time, those other species also have their kingdoms. "


    Sam begins to detail the details of Terraria. Alena without asking any questions just listened to all the exnations about that and she became very curious to visit that.


    Sam already told her that every person from that has a true spiritual energy system. If she and the others who also have the true spiritual energy system went to that, they received a massive boost.


    Not only that, Sam also begins to describe the details of those people from others who most likely came to their to snatch the''s core.


    Some time ago as you know Sam also read the report which was made by one of the elders of the Warrior association from Terraria about his, so in that report, he also got to know about those people from others who came to Eden Blue.


    After reading the report he got to know one good thing and that is that those people who came to Eden Blue did not have ess to the true spiritual energy system or they did not know anything about that.


    This is also a reason that even though their did not have a restriction that would limit their Warrior grade, they would still feel restricted when they tried to break through toary grade. True spiritual energy could be a lethal weapon against those people from others.


    _________________________


    "So, you are telling me thatpared to those people from others we need to worry about those prime dragons who are approaching our. Not only that, those prime Dragons also have ess to a true spiritual energy system.


    They did not have any kind of intention of controlling our but they had the intention to destroy our to get more power after consuming the core. Sigh, I did not know what to say.


    Fortunately, you are present here and you already prepared those arrays to create strongholds. Also, I could tell you already became much more powerful and you also know about all of this. So definitely you are already prepared to face those dangers."


    Alena said with a sigh. She did not expect that those people from others weren''t the real danger. Compared to them a very powerful Monster approaching their.


    "Well, I could assure you that I would handle those Monsters and those people from others as much as I can and I will not cause them to destroy our or do something that could damage our.


    But even with that, we need to be careful. As you know there are many people on our who do not have the strength to fight against those people or escape from them. So definitely in any condition we need to evacuate those people in the strongholds.


    I am already nning to discuss this and also nning to look at the teleportation symbol that is present in our warrior association. If possible I wanted to teleport everyone inside the stronghold the moment the core began toe to the surface area.


    But at the same time, we need to make sure those people from others did not go inside of those strongholds."


    Sam begins to tell his n to save the people of their.

 Chapter 733: Chapter 733 - Discussion

    After talking with Alena about the various facts about those people from others, Sam already decided to go to the warrior association alongside his teacher. Before that, both of them are currently going toward the main gate Gloria is waiting for them.


    She will not go to the warrior association with them as she has something to discuss with Fiona and all of her friends.


    After saying goodbye to Gloria, Sam and his teacher finally begin to begin to fly toward the warrior association. On the other hand, both of them did not know but the news about some had already begun to spread almost the whole.


    First of all, you should know everyone from Eden Blue knows about Sam as he is the miracle maker. Everyone respects him and there are many people who also like to meet him. The moment Sam revealed himself in front of those students in the Royal Academy, many students and staff already spread the news about him.


    Don''t know why but there are many people who just after hearing the news begin to feel quite rxed. From the moment the warrior association reveals the true intention of those people from others, many people are unable to rx even for a second as they are just thinking about the war and what will be their situation during that time.


    Not just only that, even they were unable to be sure if the Saints could fight those people or not. Everyone also gets to know about the restriction force that is present on theirs. They also get to know that people from others get restricted by the restriction force and because of this, they are unable to use their full power.


    All the saints on the other even though reached the limit of S-grade nobody could be sure if they would be able to break through or not during the time when the core would appear on the surface area.


    This is the reason that many people were unable to rx even for a second. But the moment those people begin to hear the news about the miracle maker who suddenly appears once again and also it looks like he already nning to create strongholds which would able to protect them from those people from others, those people naturally begin to get excited and finally can also rx.


    All the saints present in the warrior association also get to know about this matter but none of them try to stop the news. First of all, they also know what was the situation with all the people of their.


    There are many people who already lost their motivation. Those people already lost hope of surviving the disaster. So after getting the news about Sam when those people also begin to show the signs of getting rxed, it is naturally a good thing.


    Also beforeing to the warrior association Saint John told everyone that Sam told him even if those people from others got to know about the strongholds they would not be able to do anything or even try to invade those strongholds.


    Sam will the help of the warrior association will make the strongholds that would protect the people from Eden Blue. Other than the people from his he would not allow any other people from differents to enter those strongholds.


    ________________________________


    "I am really happy that Sam came back once again. He is the savior of our. Whenever our faces Sam''s kind of danger he will be the first to help.


    We already nning to use those artifacts given by him to create strongholds that have the power to protect everyone from those people from others. But even with that previously we did not have any idea how to protect all the people from our.


    Now once again returned to his and somehow he also prepared to create strongholds that would protect everyone and he also nned to make our Warriors more powerful in a short time.


    Sigh, I just hope those people from others did not try to do anything even though Sam gave us the guarantee that those people will not try to do anything. Even if that tries to do anything he will handle them at once.


    Nowe to think of it I don''t think principle John mentioned what kind of power level Sam reached until now. But I think looking at your expression even you do not know anything about this as Sam did not say anything rted to this."


    Currently, Markus and all the people in the meeting room discussing the information that Principal John told every one of them.


    After hearing about those protection barrier arrays those saints became happy as they finally had a way to protect everyone from the danger of those otherwolders.


    "I know this is a surprising thing but I also hope that all of us be more careful and also start to alert every one of our Warriors. Even though Sam has given us the guarantee we still cannot tell what would happen and what if those people try to attack another City when we are present in a different City.


    So we need to increase the security force and at the same time, our forces will be needed to stay alert all the time. Even for a second if they notice some kind of suspicious movement they would need to contact our Warrior association instantly.


    "Not only that but Sam also previously told me he prepared some gifts for everyone. I want to know what kind of reward he will give us. At the same time, I wanted to ask him about that where he suddenly got teleported."


    _______________________________


    "Everyone all of you needed to be very careful. I think all of you already get the news from those humans. Their miracle maker returns. Even though he did not have any kind of information about that person from those people we get to know that he is the one who previously somehow gave some artifacts to the group of those Warriors who also went to the Earth.


    With this, he gets the nickname miracle maker as without those artifacts nobody has the confidence that they would be able to survive those attacks from prime humans.


    Even an attack from peak Elite grade did not have any kind of effect on those artifacts. So definitely after these, we need to be very careful and if it is also possible then we should try to get alongside those normal people.


    If it is possible then we should also try to go towards strongholds after when those humans finally prepare those strongholds. I wanted to see what kind of power those strongholds have and if those stronger have the power to protect those people from our attack."


    " Boss, don''t worry as I already told my subordinate to spread around and stay alert all the time. They would immediately infamous the moment they will get to know any kind of information rted to this.


    Also don''t worry even those Early Elite grade warriors from this are unable to tell if we are their enemy or not. We just need to make sure we did not leave any kind of clue that will give them the hint about our original identity."


    " Hmmm¡­ also not just only as but every one of those groups of people from others most likely gets the news about this and I wanted to see what will be the reaction of those people.


    If I am not wrong then those people also gather a huge force from their and every one of them also preparing for the moment when the core will appear on the surface area.


    I don''t know if those people have the device that we have with us or not but we need to grab that core at any condition as our Queen needed that to be more powerful."


    Currently, you can see a group of elves discussing Sam and they also already appointed their subordinate among those normal people from Eden Blue. It is just all this time no Warrior from this able to discover their real identity so they did not have to worry about that.


    Even though they get to know about that miracle maker, they also do not think that highly about that person. Even though this is a very interesting matter for everyone to know how the hell that person was able to gather those artifacts, at the same time they are could be a possibility that a miracle maker also received those things from someone.


    So they needed to make sure that they did not reveal their identity before the war and also if possible they wanted to go inside the strongholds alongside those normal people from this.


    Not just only that group of people but suddenly many people from differents already get the information about that miracle maker and everyone really be very careful because they already very close to get the core as this year that core will be came out to the surface area.

 Chapter 734: Chapter 734 - The gifts

    "It''s good to see all of you once again. I am sorry to make all of you worried about me for 3 years. I think you already know the story but still, I going to tell you what happened to me that day that I did not have anything under my control and I did not even get the time to contact anyone for help,"


    Sam is currently present in the warrior association and he is with all the saints. When he first came inside the meeting room one by Saint Markus and everyone hugged him.


    After that, finally, the meeting started and he finally began to discuss what happened that day that he did not even get the opportunity to tell anyone to help him.


    Saint Markus and everyone listened to his exnation very carefully as they also wanted to know what exactly happened to him that day and he did not even get the time to contact them.


    Sometimeter you can see the serious face of everyone as they also realize that those stone tforms that they find inside those Dungeons were the main reason behind all of this.


    Even they cannot believe that those tforms are hiding the teleportation portal that is most probably linked with Terraria. Even though Sam was not sure about this, he predicted the possibility.


    He also told everyone that for now, they don''t have to worry about those stone tforms as no Monsters wille out from those portals or anything like that. Most probably those people who created the Dungeons or if there is someone who created those portals, then that person wanted to hide the teleportation portals.


    "I know this is also a serious matter but for now we should not worry about those. For now, I will tell you about those people who came to our.


    I get to know that every one of you already knows what is the real motive of those people. They wanted to Steal our''s core. But I don''t think any of you know what they are going to use that for.


    As I told you there is apletely different Warrior grade present in Terraria. Based on that Warrior grade those people want to reach theary grade after absorbing the''s core.


    You can say thatary grade is a whole nother level that our isn''t ready to face. Anybody who reaches that limit would easily be able to destroy our whole even without bing serious.


    I will tell you about that Warrior gradeter. All of you must be wondering why those people wanted to get that''s core and how it would help them to beary-grade warriors.


    Every core could also work as a limit breaker but that is apletely overpowering thing that would easily break the limit of any Warrior until that person did not reach theary grade.


    But naturally, as those people trying to break through forcefully this will give them bacsh. Normally people in Terraria never try to do something like that even though they are just very close to breaking through.


    If anybody tries to forcefully break through then the foundation of that person will also get damaged by the Bacsh. Even though he will be aary grade warrior, you will have to increase his power further than that and also he will only have limited opportunity to use the power ofary grade.


    You can say after reaching ntari grade every Warrior will have a special power that would be much more dangerouspared to any technique. Unfortunately, those people who will be breaking through forcefully would not have ess to that Power.


    But even with that as you know many people still came to our as they wanted to steal the''s core. First of all, it is because those people also did not have any chance to get through to that Grade.


    There could be a chance they are facing the restriction of their but for most of thoses, this isn''t the case. Their''s core already evolved and those people will not feel the restriction force when they try to break through toary grade.


    Unfortunately, it is just that they did not have enough power to break through. You can say to break through to thatary grade you need a special spiritual system that we also did not have present in our body.


    Every person in Terraria did not use our spiritual energy as it is just normal spiritual energy. This is the lowest grade of spiritual energy and with this spiritual energy, you don''t have the opportunity to break through that barrier which prevents those warriors from breaking through thatary Grade.


    Every''s core will work as the limit breaker in this matter and this is the reason that those people wanted to get our''s core. But don''t think this is the only danger we are facing right now.


    In front of the real danger that we are facing, those people from others would be weak ants or something like that. The real danger we would be facing would being out from space.


    A Monster is approaching our and that Monster is the real danger that we need to face in time. That monster even without getting the''s core can destroy our or kill everyone, even those people from others.


    Even if those people were able to recover their full strength they would be no match against that monster. The name of the monster is the prime Dragon and he looks like this."


    After describing the prime Dragon, Sam begins to show everyone how it looks and what kind of power that dragon has. Now for the first time, even those Saints begin to feel hopeless in this situation.


    Some of them almost begin to panic but fortunately, Alena is present there. She already can see some of them begin to panic after hearing the description of those prime Dragons.


    "Why are you panicking like this? Why the hell do all of you have this kind of expression that we already lost the war and we did not have any chance against those Monsters?


    Don''t forget we still have my student Sam. And if I am not wrong then he has the confidence to face that Monster and those people."


    Most likely all the saints only came back to their senses after hearing that word and only then were finally able to rx. Now this is the time for them to be embarrassed. Theypletely forget about Sam.


    Only after hearing her words do they remember him. Sam already told them that he is already prepared to face every danger so definitely he has the confidence to face those Monsters or those people from others.


    Instantly everyone looked at him as they wanted to know the answer. But, unfortunately, Sam did not say anything. He just smiled after looking at their faces.


    "Don''t worry about that and just leave everything to me. But for now, we will discuss our main motive. I think Saint John already told every one of you about the protection barrier array and those defense arrays. I immediately wanted to create a team that would bepletely focused on creating those arrays in the strongholds.


    Suddenly we did not have any time to waste and we needed to act very quickly as we did not know when that code would appear on the surface area. There could be a possibility that tomorrow or the day after tomorrow that core suddenly came out of the inner area of our.


    We need to react quickly. Also, I think all of you wanted to know what kind of gift I would prepare for all of you. This is the gift that I prepared for all of you."


    After saying that Sam began to bring out all the gifts that he prepared for them. First of all, he prepared the protection barrier array and the defense array. But not only that he also brings out strong armor, weapons, many Artifacts, and tsments.


    After that, he also brings out the method of breaking through to the next Grade. But he did not want to give them that method as it would be risky for them and those people also did not have the true spiritual energy.


    "This is the method which would help you back through to the next grade, but for now this isn''t useful for any of you as you did not have ess to the true spiritual energy.


    Before anything, I should tell you that I have a method that can turn your spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system. But unfortunately, I won''t be able to help any of you to change the true spiritual system currently as it requires a huge amount of time and I don''t know how long it will take¡­"

 Chapter 735: Chapter 735 - Strongholds

    Saint John and the others already begin to check all the gifts that Sam has already given them. Saint Markus also informs Sam that they already selected those ces which would be turned into strongholds.


    When they previously discussed this they also already prepared the team of Warriors who were just waiting for their orders to immediately evacuate those ces and make those ces ready.


    Well, Sam also told everyone that they should not reveal the secret of those arrays to anyone other than themselves as this could be dangerous. He told everyone that he had a method that would be able to prevent those people from others from entering the strongholds.


    Because of this, he doesn''t want those people from others to get to know about the method. Naturally, everyone also agreed with that and with these, they did not decide to reveal any kind of secret about those arrays.


    Wasting no time Markus already brought up the map and began to show him those ces which got selected to be the strongholds during the war.


    At the same time, Markus told Sam that they are already able to evolve the teleportation system of their Warrior association, and with this, they also have the confidence to teleport those people inside those strongholds the moment something unexpected happens.


    Unfortunately, there is a problem that is impossible to resolve. The problem is to do this kind of thing they require a huge amount of energy source which they did not have. Even if they used nuclear energy or something like that they still did not have enough energy to do this.  now


    But after hearing that Sam just told him not to worry about the energy source as he already has a great idea about the energy source. With this everyone bes rxed once again and they can fully be focused on creating the strongholds.


    " We will wait for some time. It will take some time for every warrior to prepare those ces and also evacuating those people could be a problem as many people naturally became very excited about the strongholds and they wanted to see how we created those strongholds.


    But as you told us they could be people from others who are also hiding between those normal people. So I already told every warrior that they should not let anyone approach those ces. "


    Markus said that to Sam and he also agreed with that. With this Markus and the others also get the time to ask him questions about that new where he visited. First of all, this is surprising for everyone to know that this is the first that awakens Spiritual energy.


    Not only that, the spiritual energy present on that is highpared to their normal spiritual energy. They also be very curious to know about true spiritual energy and how much the difference between true spiritual energy and ordinary spiritual energy.


    Sam begins to tell them what is the difference between these two spiritual energies. At the same time, he also begins to tell them that he has a technique but that will require a long time.


    The problem is that they already break through to S-grade. This is the reason that their body will need more time to adjust to the true spiritual energy and if they do not adjust themselves to this new true spiritual energy system then it could also be risky for life.


    In this situation, Sam did not want to take any kind of risk. But even without changing their spiritual system into a true spiritual system, he has a method that would be able to help them break through to the next grade the moment restriction is lifted from their.


    Markus and the others became surprised after knowing the difference between the spiritual energies. This is very unfortunate for them that they won''t be able to change their spiritual system into a true spiritual system but this is okay.


    In this situation, they always need to stay careful and they cannot waste that much time and who knows how long it will take them. But they also became very excited after knowing that there was a method that would be able to help them.


    Even though this would be more useful if they had spiritual energy present in their body, still this is enough for them as with these they at least would be able to break through to the next grade.


    __________________________


    "Let''s go to the first ce which is close to our location. I will show all of you how to create those arrays. Even though all of you already have the method to create those arrays, I will show you and after creating those arrays I will ce a new type of array which will help us identify those people from others.


    Well, I could just teach all of you about this but I did not have the method with me so I will show you."


    Sam and the others already begin to leave the warrior association as they get the report from the first group of warriors that the first ce which is not far away from the warrior association is already ready.


    Those Warriors who suddenly came to that ce already evacuated all the people from that ce and they already prevented anyone from approaching that area which would be turned into the stronghold.


    This is natural for everyone to be these match excited as this would be the ce that would be able to protect them from those people from others. At the same time, they also know that they should not disturb those Warriors while they are working.


    Between those people of Eden blue you can see many people who most likely came from differents have serious expressions. They are already ready to use their observation technique in full power the moment those Warriors begin to create the strongholds.


    Now the main question is how they are going to create the strongholds in that ce. Many people already ask those Warriors but unfortunately, none of them answer anything and just tell everyone the saints will be the one who creates those strongholds.


    Not just one ce but all over Eden Blue have the same situation and people like this already surround the whole area to know about the strongholds.


    ___________________________


    Sometimeter everyone already saw some people in the sky who were descending from the sky in that ce. The first ce which is near the Warrior Association is a stadium. This is a huge indoor stadium which also is a fighting arena of the Warrior Association. This ce is very big and also has many facilities so definitely this is going to be a good stronghold.


    Markus and the others can already see the crowd that surrounded the whole stadium but fortunately, their warriors were able to prevent those people from approaching the stadium.


    "Everyone I know that all of you are very excited to know about the stronghold but currently we will not tell you anything about this as you know that there are many people from others present among us.


    But don''t worry after finishing the strongholds we will tell you about the facilities and also we will tell you about the interesting matter. Until then I hope nobody causes any kind of problem for us.


    As you can see we already have our miracle maker back with us so definitely we are going to make powerful strongholds that would be able to help us protect all of you from those people of others."


    Markus is currently giving the speech while Sam and the others have alreadynded in the sky. At this time Sam already begins to use the observation technique to observe every one of those people present around the whole stadium.


    Now first of all he wanted to know how many people from others are present around that area and if there are any people hiding inside the stadium or not. With his powerful observation technique, this isn''t hard for him.


    One thing he knows about those people from others is that they would have different kinds of spiritual aura. Every person from Eden Blue has a different kind of spiritual aura.


    This is the thing that would be helpful to identify those people from others and it did not take him that much time to already observe the 10 km area around the whole stadium.


    He already found many people from others who were hiding among those crowds. By looking at those people he could tell they are also most likely trying to figure out the strongholds and they are also trying to use their observation technique.


    Unfortunately for them, they would not be able to find anything even if they used their observation technique. On the other hand, the good thing is that inside the stadium he did not find anything and also those people from others did not ce anything, which should help them monitor the array.

 Chapter 736: Chapter 736 - Start the process

    Saint Markus and everyone alreadye to the center of the stadium. At that ce, Sam finally brings out all the necessary things to create those arrays. Everyone at this time naturally observed those necessary things that would be needed to make those arrays.


    First of all, everyone will need spirit stones. Also, those spirit stones aren''t your normal spirit stones. He brings those things from Terraria and they will be also working as the energy supplier for all the arrays.


    After that, they will also need the special brush called the spirit brush to create those arrays. Anybody who will be creating on those arrays needs to have spiritual vision which would help that person to see the color of different spiritual energy or something like that.


    The person needs to have full mental and physical strength during the time and also needs to have full concentration on that process. During that time if somehow that person got distracted then it will cause some side effects and that person will be needed to start the process from the beginning.


    The ink that the person will be using to create those will be the spiritual energy. Channeling spiritual energy into the brush will create spiritual ink which would be used to draw those in that area.


    So wasting no time Sam brings out that spirit brush and already begins to concentrate. Only after entering the focus state does he begin to channel The Spiritual energy into that brush. All this time he already activated The Spiritual vision technique which helped him to see the spiritual energy.


    The color of his spiritual energy is white and naturally, he is seeing the white color. Instantly he can also begin to feel that his mental energy is getting consumed and during the process when he starts drawing the array the physical energy will also get consumed.


    During this time all the saints also activated their spiritual vision technique. Fortunately, all of them have simr techniques which help them to see the color of Spiritual energy.


    Even though that isn''t as powerful as sam still it will be enough. Every one of them naturally can feel the fluctuation that directlyes out from that brush and finally when Sam started drawing they saw the white color.


    They also maintained a distance from the center so that they did not disturb Sam during that process. But it surprised them when he made those drawings in that center area. It would be the first time for them to get to know about this kind of process where they could use their spiritual energy to draw something like this.


    Also, one more thing that is very important for this process. The person who will be drawing those needs to have full control over the spiritual energy. If you did not have control over the spiritual energy then the drawing could get destroyed or something like that.


    Alena and the others pay full attention to Sam while he draws those patterns in the ground. At first, everything is okay and they also do not see anything different in Sam but sometimeter when they look at his expression they can see he is already panting.


    Well, he is physically and mentally getting rapidly consumed during the process so this is natural for him. Fortunately, he was already ready to finish the first pattern so after that he could take some rest and start the next pattern.


    20 minutester finally Sam stopped drawing and justy down on the ground. He was fully exhausted mentally and physically. He needed the time to recover both energy and only then would he be able to start the process once again.


    During this time all the saints observe the past pattern that Sam draws on the ground. Even though Sam only drew the past pattern, they could still feel the energy fluctuation that came out from that first pattern. But it still didn''t even finish as they also needed to put the speed stone.


    Alena came back to her senses and then approached Sam who was justying down on the ground. Wasting no time she began to use the healing Ray technique. Even though this will not recover his physical or mental energy, at least it will decrease the pain that he is feeling in his head.


    10 minutester,


    Sam finally opened his eyes and then told everyone that this was the negative point of creating the array. Their spiritual energy, mental energy, and physical energy will be consumed during that process.


    But even if that happened they were unable to stop in the middle. Before anything, they at least needed to finish the pattern and only then they would be able to rest.


    He will take some time to recover fully so at that time he begins to exin to them about those spirit stones and other necessary things for this process. Hearing the exnation of the spirit stones everyone became surprised and excited.


    Sam previously told him not to worry about the energy source because he has those spirit stones that would work as an energy source. The more powerful the spirit stone is, the more power it contains.


    ____________________________


    "What is this spiritual pressureing out from the stadium?"


    "I think they already started creating those arrays and because of these The Spiritual fluctuationes out from the stadium and we begin to feel the spiritual pressure."


    " Yeah, I also think they already started creating a stronghold. I just hope this sessfully creates a strong holder. After that I also get to know they will be going to different ces to create more strongholds."


    "Naturally they will do that as you know they wanted to protect every one of us so naturally they would need to create more of those strongholds."


    "Well at this time we should stay silent as we should not disturb them during this process. Even though we did not know how they created those arrays, I think during this process nobody should get distracted."


    "To tell you the truth, when all the Saints came out of the stadium we should try to ask them if they needed any help from us. Naturally, they are doing all of this for us and all the humans of our. This is our duty to help them if they need something."


    Currently, everyone who presents outside of the stadium can feel the spiritual pressure and The Spiritual fluctuation thates out from the stadium.


    Everyone became very excited but unfortunately, nobody got to see what all the saints are currently doing right now. But one thing is clear: they should not try to disturb those saints during this process and because of this everyone present there already begins to create less sound.


    Everyone is also ready to help the Saints if they need something from them. All the Saints work hard to protect all the humans of theirs so naturally, it is their duty to help the Saints if they need something.


    But at this time not only just those humans of Eden Blue but at the same time those people from others also observing the stadium are unfortunately unable to see anything even using the observation technique.


    Not just only that the moment spiritual pressure appeared in that area they also began to feel danger. First of all, they could tell the spiritual fluctuation that appears currently is very powerful. It already makes them very afraid but still, they try to observe the stadium.


    Unfortunately for them, they would never be able to see what was happening inside the stadium as Sam already ced a blocker around the stadium. This will prevent anyone if they try to use the observation technique. Not only that they will also work on those electronics and other things that could be used as a spying device.


    All the Warriors of the Warrior Association also became very curious to know what was happening inside the stadium but they also had a duty that was very important.


    So once again they begin to tell everyone not to make that much sound which could disturb the Saints. This time nobody disagrees with them.


    Sometimeter everyone can already feel the power of the energy fluctuation already decrease but the spiritual pressure is still present in that area. 45 minutes after that the spiritual fluctuation once again increases and The Spiritual pressure also increases at the same time.


    Now this is also a very interesting thing that makes everyone very curious to know what exactly is happening inside the stadium.


    Inside the stadium,


    Alena and the others did not have any kind of information about what was happening outside the stadium but they focused on Sam who 45 minutester once again started creating the second pattern. He is still creating the defense array which would create the barrier around that ce.


    That barrier has five different patterns and Sam is currently creating the second pattern. Once again after sometimeter, they can see Sam already began to sweat.

 Chapter 737: Chapter 737 - Excitement

    Finally after 2 hours Sam sessfully was able to create the barrier array. All The Spiritual fluctuation thates out from that array already disappears the moment Sam sessfully creates that array.


    Suddenly he was wasting on the ground and everyone was also present there and waiting for his recovery. Currently, Sam needed to ce those spirit stones into their required ce and with that the array will beplete.


    The person who will be creating the array will have the control to activate that barrier anytime. Even if that person is very far away from that ce, he could still activate the barrier without any problem.


    As everyone uses the spiritual energy to act as an ink to create the array so naturally after finishing the array everybody will feel the connection between them and the array.


    Once again 20 minutester after recovering The lost spiritual energy Sam finally ced those spirit stones into their required ce. The moment he put thest spirit stones a huge spiritual fluctuation appeared but it only stayed for 1 second after that it disappeared.


    Finally Sam smiled and signaled everyone that hepleted the array. Markus and the others also finally begin tough after getting the signal from Sam. Finally they created a strong hold. Even though Sam still needed to create two more arrays,pared to the barrier array those two arrays will not take that much time.


    "Do you want to try the power of the barrier? Then go out of the stadium and I will activate the barrier."


    Sam can see the excitement of everyone and most likely some of them also wanted to try the power of the barrier. So with that he and everyone begin to fly in the sky and then get out of the stadium.


    Naturally all the people who still present outside the stadium once again get startled by that sudden spiritual fluctuation. But it did not take them that much time to begin to cheer loudly because everyone of them could already see all the saints outside of the stadium and with these they already predicted most likely they alreadypleted the process.


    "Everyone I am happy to tell all of you that our first strong hold is ready and we just try to see the power of the barrier. Everyone please evacuate from your current ce. We are going to attack the stadium to see the power of the barrier that would be present around the stadium."


    Markus gave the good news to everyone and he also told them to retreat from that ce because it could be risky for them. They are going to attack the barriers even if the barrier did not get damaged or anything like that an impact will get created and everyone of those people could get injured because of that impact.


    Understanding the situation instantly those people who previously surrounded the stadium begin to retreat from that ce. Not just only them, all the Warriors of the warrior association also begin to retreat.


    They almost maintain a 500 m distance from the stadium and those Warriors of the warrior association also decided to create a barrier in front of them which would be able to prevent those impacts from injuring them.


    But not only that many people from the media also already ce their camera around the whole stadium so even if they aren''t present near that area, at least they could capture the footage.


    Almost every person in Eden blue suddenly pays attention to those news channels who are present in that ce. Everyone wanted to know the power of the strong hold and they also wanted to know if those strong hold would be able to protect them or not.


    Sam who is also beside his teacher wasting no time already activates the barrier and instantly less than a second a barrier gets created around that whole stadium. A white color barrier was created around the whole stadium; everybody could already feel a huge energy fluctuation from that barrier.


    Those normal people and those who maintain their distance from that stadium already begin to cheer once again the moment they see the barrier covering the whole stadium.


    Now with this Sam also gives all the saints the signal to attack the barrier. So everyone and even his teacher, wasting no time, begin to prepare their strongest attack. One by one powerful spiritual fluctuation begin to create on that ce.


    All the people who watching this also began to feel the spiritual fluctuation and The Spiritual pressure. In front of those many powerful attack nobody knows if that barrier would able to survive or not. But everyone of those people in that situation just hoping that barrier able to survive.


    In the next second, Markus and everyoneunch their attack to at the barrier and one by one those attacked begin to hit the barrier.


    "Boom!!!!"


    One by one huge explosion got created on that ce. Fortunately around that area you won''t be able to find any buildings. This is also the reason the decided to attack the barrier to check it''s power. Markus and everyone just continuously attacking the barrier without stopping for a second.


    Like this almost 30 minutester finally this stop attacking. Fortunately Sam decided to create a huge barrier around the whole area which able to protect those normal people and those Warriors from the impact. But the surrounding ce around that stadium already got destroyed because of the impact from those explosion.


    30 minutester a hugeyer of smoke and dust got created in that ce so nobody able to see what is the result. But after sometimeter everybody already can see the result which make them very happy and some of them already started crying.


    Everybody could see the barrier did not receive any kind of damage. They did not even so any kind of scratch present in that barrier so definitely their attacked did not do anything. Stay tuned to M|VL|EM|PY|R


    "Haha¡­ everyone as you can see the power of the strong hold so none of you have to worry about your safety during the war."


    Markus begin to feel quiet awkward after looking at the destruction, but he calm down and then said that happily to every people who looking toward that direction to see the result.


    Hearing his word everyone finally begin to cheer. Even those people who watching the event in TV also begin to cheer loudly because of the sess.


    "Now everyone you can go back to your home and rest. We still needed sometime to prepare the stadium and many other strong hold. During that time I hope nobody approaches those ces. "


    Markus say that and once again went inside the stadium alongside everyone. On the other hand those Warriors of the warrior association once again surrounded the whole stadium to prevent anyone from entering the stadium.


    You have to say during the time those people from others who hiding themselves among those normal people also notice the power of the barrier but the thing he was that they did not know if that barrier would able to protect those people from their attack or not.


    As you know they got restricted by the restriction force and unable to use their full power so what would happen when they will be recovered there full power and when they will try to attack the strong hold?


    Those people already report that to their superiors and after hearing that their superiors not to do anything at this moment. Some of them also did not think that much about those strong holds. They hsve full confidence when they will recovered they are full strength they would able to destroy those barrier.


    Sometimeter,


    All the news channel already begin to show the result and they also talk with various people who previous the present in that area to know their opinion about this.


    Everyone begin to told their opinion and by hearing those opinion anybody could tell they are very excited about this. Those people who previously very worried about their own safety or about the safety of their family can finally rx.


    ______________________


    Victor, Hina and Gloria with her friends also looking at the news and they are also very excited that finally the strong hold ispleted. Naturally, Gloria and her parents is very proud of Sam. With this he would able to save million of life of their.


    Naturally not every people would able to fight those people from other and only if you up them would have the chance to fight them. The warrior association already told every Warriors that only warriors who reached A-grade will be join the frontline when the remaining people will be stay inside the strong holds.


    Well everybody could understand why the warrior association give them the order. As everybody know that because of the restriction force those people from other got restricted but actually they are more powerful evenpared to their saints.

 Chapter 738: Chapter 738 - Finally complete

    Finally, aftering inside of the stadium Sam already became busy creating those other two arrays. Compared to the first array this won''t take that much time. Alena and everyone naturally paid attention to the process when Sam was creating those arrays.


    Nobody wanted to meet any kind of details during that process as they did not want to make any kind of mistake. Even though they did not know if those people from others would be able to damage the barrier or not as they got restricted by the restriction force. Only after the core appears on the surface area will it get free from the restriction force.


    But all of them also have confidence in Sam. He is the reason that many of the Warriors were able to save themselves on that Earth when they got betrayed by those prime humans.


    Back to the main matter,


    Sam once again brings out the spirit brush and begins to channel spiritual energy into that brush which turns into ink. Once again he enters the focus state and already begins to draw the next array.


    __________________________


    Currently, nobody knows the situation of those people from others. As you know already many of them came to Eden Blue. Everyone was just waiting for the core to appear on the surface so that they could also get back their full power.


    Many of them can be very serious after looking at the power of the barrier. But many of them naturally decided to ignore it as they did not think that much about the barrier. First of all their main focus will be the core, those people did not want to get distracted right now.


    One thing is clear: after using the core naturally they would be able to reach a powerful level that will have the strength to destroy anything so naturally those people will not care about the barrier. First of all many of them also did not want to destroy Eden Blue as they wanted to rule the whole.


    Hina and Victor are currently present in their house and washing on the new techniques that are given to them. Some time ago, both of them decided to stop their practice to look at the news channel that showed them the stadium.


    When they saw the barrier which was created by Sam able to withstand those many powerful attacks and did not even have any kind of scratch, they became very proud and at the same time very excited.


    First of all,pared to their own life they are also very worried about the lives of those normal people who would be in apletely dangerous situation during the war. Nobody knows how many powerful enemies they will face during this time.


    Of them, even though they did not have the strength of Gloria or Sam, at least both of them had the confidence to survive the disaster.


    After getting those new techniques from Sam their confidence also increased as gaining full control over the true spiritual energy naturally will make them more powerful. After these, their survival rate naturally will increase.


    "To tell you the truth, I want Sam toe back and spend some more time with us. Unfortunately, our son is a really important person and he also has the strength to protect all the people of our.


    This makes me proud but at the same time, I am also worried about him. If possible I did not want him or Gloria to put their life at risk. But unfortunately, both our children are talented and both of them are also very powerful warriors.


    Also, most likely only our son has the strength to defeat those people as he said handling those people would not be a problem for him. It is just if possible I wanted to see the full power of a person. I wanted to understand the gap between us and him."


    Victor as a parent naturally did not want Gloria or Sam to put their life at risk but unfortunately, that won''t be happening. Because of this, he and his wife also trained very hard so that they could be more powerful and help their children.


    But at the same time as a father, he is also very proud of his son who became that powerful. Also, he already told him that he has the power of domain which would be an ultimate move that would handle those enemies in less than a second.


    Now Victor wanted to experience the power of Sam. He wanted to know the difference between their power limit. Also if possible he wanted to see the power of the domain which is the ultimate move of Sam.


    But at the same time, the good thing is that Sam has a thing that would be helpful for him if the situation became out of hand and he required the help of those powerful Warriors from Terraria.


    _________________________


    Gloria, and Fiona who are also training or you can say sparing against each other are also really happy that finally the first stronghold is ready. Even though their Royal Academy will also turn into a stronghold, the problem is thatpared to the stadium the Royal Academy is that Big.


    Also a good thing you know that Fiona also gets to learn the true spiritual energy system and Sam also already told Glory to teach her those new techniques that he gave her.


    Naturally, Fiona is only able to use those spell techniques but Sam already prepares some other techniques for her. Sam already knows the character of Fiona so he also did not have any problem when he got to know she was able to learn true spiritual energy.


    Compared to Gloria, she has more problems controlling spiritual energy. So definitely she needed to put her Full focus on that energy control technique.


    Currently, both of them are sparing against each other to get to know about their current limit. After almost 4 hours they continuously spar and then stopped. Fiona already can notice all the mistakes that she makes and also all the shorings that she needs to ovee.


    The most important thing is to improve the energy control technique and with that, she already decided to learn that technique. Fortunately, this new energy control technique isn''t that hard to understand.


    This new energy control technique has 50% simrity with their previous technique while the remaining 50% understand on her own.


    Fortunately with the help of Gloria she learned the remaining 50% in just 2 hours and with this, she could finally start trying to control the energy present in her body.


    _______________________


    Around 8:00 p.m. finally Sam finished both arrays. He just needs to install the spiritual energy aura of normal people. You will naturally also add The Spiritual aura of his family, friends, and everyone who can also use the true spiritual energy.


    Naturally, they are different so they would not get ess to the stronghold if he didn''t allow that. Alena and the others finally can rx after seeing theplete array of the stronghold.


    But at this time they can always see someone activate one of the arrays and instantly they can feel someone or something checking their body. Fortunately, Sam already told him not to worry so they did not do anything and left the array to check their spiritual energy.


    After registering their spiritual energy he decided to check the spiritual energy of those normal people and The Spiritual energy of those warriors. Fortunately, Alena was present in that ce because with her help he would be able to register the spiritual aura.


    As she has the spiritual analysis which she can transform from the ordinary spiritual energy, he naturally has a different spiritual aura. By registering her spirit Sam could not have any problem giving ess to his friends and everyone who uses the true spiritual energy.


    Naturally, he also thinks about those people from others who are currently present in that crowded area. Even though it was already 8:00 p.m., those people still did not leave that area and they still wanted to see the result.


    During this time many people from others have already retreated from that ce. Staying in that ce for that long could be dangerous as they did not know anything about that miracle maker. Also, their superiors wanted to hear all the details that they could not tell him on themunication device.


    The good thing is that none of them know about the matter of registering spiritual energy. Sam, this is the reason that did not mention anything about this to anyone. If somehow people from others get to know about this then it could be really dangerous for all the saints.


    But at the same time, a risk is still present. Sam won''t be able to present in every area. It Looks like he still somehow manages to im that if by mistake those Saints register The Spiritual aura of these people from another then it will be aplete disaster.

 Chapter 739: Chapter 739 - Request

    Alena, John, Markus, Mira, and the others already spared around. Currently, they are in charge of making those arrays in different cities. In every City, they wanted to make one stronghold so that they could easily evacuate all the people of that city into that ce.


    Naturally, this will also take a long time. But other than that they did not have any other way to create those strongholds. On the other hand, today is the first day of the annual collegepetition.


    Even though none of the Saints were able to present in thepetition, nobody had any problem with that. As everybody knows all the Saints are currently busy creating the stronghold so definitely they will need the time to focus on those projects.


    Fortunately, they still have strong A-grade warriors among them and they are in charge of the annual collegepetition. Even Glory also got invited to thatpetition and she already came to the ce where every person was getting checked by the warrior association.


    Naturally before starting thepetition the warrior association will check the power level of those people and after that they will start the firstpetition.


    Fiona was also present in that ce and alongside Gloria both of them observing those participants. This makes them feel nostalgic as a few years ago they were also doing the same thing and whenever they participated in thepetition they naturally hoped to get the first position.


    But unfortunately from the moment those people from others came to their the situation became very different. Many people already lost their willpower to fight in this kind of situation.


    Many students did not even show that much interest in getting the first position as they were also thinking that they would get attacked by people from others in thepetition.


    But this year it ispletely different because Sam is present there. You can say all the students who participated in the annual collegepetition became very excited when they heard that all the first position holders would get a gift from Sam.


    It looks like his presence is enough to make those participants excited so Gloria and Fiona can also see the excitement of the people 3 yearster.


    It''s been a long time since students who participated in thepetition became that much excited and everyone wanted to get the first position.


    Sam has alreadye to the battle arena of the central city. Students from all over the world came to that ce to participate in thepetition. At this time many people also wanted to see the face of Sam and if possible they wanted to talk to him as many of them see Sam as their idol.


    Not only Sam but they can also see many of the year''s legendary seniors who are also present to observe their match. Sam on the other hand finally finished giving his speech and came beside his sister and sat down.


    "What do you think Sam? To tell you the truth, it has been a long time since all the participants became excited like this. In these 3 years, not many people got excited like this and the number of participants was also very low.


    I have to say you are the reason that this year many people participated in thepetition and they were also excited like this. Everyone wanted to get the first prize that you prepared for all the first position holders.


    So what do you think about them? Do you think this year our Academy will get the most first position? Also, what do you think about the progress of those participants?"


    Fiona asked when Sam sat down beside Gloria.


    "Well, I can naturally feel that every participant most likely be over excited after hearing the reward that I prepared for them.


    Also, I can feel why they did not want to participate in thepetition. Well most likely everybody fears that when they participate in thepetition day will unfortunately meet those people from others and that would be very risky for their life.


    But most likely after getting the news of the strongholds, most of the people finally became rxed and they could finally ovee their fear. Also to tell you the truth, not only our Academy but I can also see many other people who most likely progress very much in their power.


    So it is very hard to tell who will get those first positions. But one thing I am sure of is that if anybody wanted to defeat the students of her Academy then they would need to work very hard.


    Also defeating my friend would be very hard for any of those people as even I am going to train them personally so I don''t know if anybody would be able to defeat them or not."


    It is very hard to tell who is going to be the final winner but one thing he is your or you can say he is confident that nobody would be able to defeat his friends that easily. He also promised his friends that he would train them personally and also spar with them.


    "Really¡­.. hahaha, then this will be going to be more interesting. I wanted to see if anybody would be able to defeat your friends or not. But at the same time, I have a request that I wanted to tell you."


    Fiona said that. She has something very important that she wants to ask Sam.


    " No problem sister. What is your request? you can tell me,"


    Sam also became very interested to know what she wanted to request.


    " I get to hear from Gloria that both of you are also sparing. So if it is possible I want to join the training session as I also wanted to increase my power and I also wanted to know the gap between my power and your power.


    Also, I still did not thank you because of the present that Gloria gave me. I am very fortunate that I got to learn true spiritual energy butter I got to know you are the person who came up with the technique to change our spiritual system.


    I am grateful for that as with this I don''t think I would be able topete with Gloria. Also, I got to know that my spiritual control needs to be upgraded with other techniques so if it is possible then I would also want to practice The Spiritual control technique that you gave to Gloria."


    First of all Fiona also wanted to join the training session with Sam so that she would also get to know the power gap between them and also get pointers from Sam. Who doesn''t want to improve their power?


    On the other hand, she is very grateful that she got to learn the true spiritual energy system as with this she could fight with Gloria. But currently before trying to use the spiritual control technique which Sam gave to Gloria, Fiona naturally needed to get the permission of Sam.


    "No, problem sister Fiona. I don''t have any problem if you want to learn The Spiritual control technique but I can tell you that all the techniques that I gave to my sister will not be useful for you so don''t worry I will search if there is any technique which should be suitable for you."


    Sam already knows that Fiona is also among those people who get to learn the true spiritual energy system from Gloria. Sam knew the character very well so he did not have any problem.


    Now as she mentions the technique Sam begins to think he should also prepare some techniques for sister Fiona. Sister Fiona is also very powerful so definitely she needed some technique that would make her more powerful and before anything, she naturally needed to gain 100% control over spiritual energy.


    _______________________________


    "Sister, I want you to alert all the Warriors of the Warrior Association to stay careful because I could already sense some people who are not from our. Those people belong to others and it looks like they came to the stadium to see thepetition.


    Until they did not do anything, not try to engage in any kind of fight with them but if those people try to attack our people or something like that then don''t worry I will immediately handle them. But still, quickly alert all the Warriors so that they can evacuate people if that is required."


    1 hourter when the examination process is still going on in the battle arena, Sam unexpectedly says all of this to Gloria using telepathy. Now just after hearing that Gloria became very serious as she also used the observation technique from the start but unfortunately she did not notice anything.


    It seems her brother can easily detect those people from others. So without wasting a single second she quickly informed the in-charge of those warriors of the warrior association.

 Chapter 740: Chapter 740 - Who doesnt want to protect his family?

    The warrior association immediately became alert after getting information about those people from other worlds. One by one Sam also told them the description of those people and with this Warriors already spotted those people.


    But none of them do anything at this moment as Sam already told them not to do anything. If those people just came here to enjoy the match then they should let them enjoy the match.


    But if they try to do anything Sam will immediately take action so nobody has to worry about anything. Sam told Gloria that when she is able to fully master the spirit vision technique that he buys from the system, she would also be able to spot those different spiritual auras easily.


    Anything from his system would be more powerfulpared to any other technique. But even with that, Gloria and Fiona are trying to use their previous vision technique and observation technique to see if they found any kind of clue on those people who are from differents.


    But unfortunately, it looks like their technique isn''t working in this matter. Both of them are unable to find any kind of clue about the spiritual aura in those people. It looks like those people are normal humans without any spiritual energy but they trust Sam fully so naturally those people are hiding their spiritual energy.


    "Sister I will leave sometimeter as you know I also need to create those arrays in our Royal Academy. But before leaving this ce I will give you a tsment.


    If those people try to do anything after I leave this ce then immediately channel your spiritual energy into that tsment. This will immediately alert me and I will immediately teleport here.


    Also, don''t worry I will not spend that much time in that process as I am only going to create one array today. Tomorrow I will finish the remaining two arrays."


    Sam said that to Gloria as he needed to leave that ce sometimeter to reach the Royal Academy and create the defense array.


    Because of thepetition, he needed to be present, as his teacher told him, which is naturally a good thing for every student who participates in thepetition.


    Because of his presence, many people became excited about this year''spetition and you can say many people are also already targeting Alexa and the others. First of all, everyone knows Sam will not participate in thepetition but he will train his friends.


    If possible, those seniors and the students who are the same year as Alexa and the others wanted to fight them to see their power. Alexa, Tony, and the others can also feel the fighting intent of everyone.


    Naturally, they did not get scared after feeling that kind of intense stare from those people. Instead, they became very excited and wanted to fight them. Looks like this year''spetition is going to be exciting like the first year''spetition.


    Fortunately fighting between participants will be held in the third stage of thepetition. Sam will be able to present in the arena to see the fight between his friends and other participants.


    Hina and Gloria suddenly fight with those fighting robots in their training ground. Those training robots arepletely different from your normal robots as some also buy them from the system shop.


    Even though the power limit of those robots is around Early A-grade, both of them still can feel the difference between them. But that does not make them disappointed as it also helps them understand their weakness and can help them improve on their techniques.


    Today early in the morning Sam already created the defense array around his house alongside three different arrays. Who doesn''t want to protect his family and who doesn''t want his family to be powerful so that they could also protect themselves?


    Because of this, he also created that array which instantly began to gather arge amount of spiritual energy and turned the density of the spiritual energy denserpared to the surrounding area.


    Not only that, he is also going to create an array that will help those ordinary spiritual energies to turn into true spiritual energy. As that will take a long time to create, Sam decided to do that the next day after finishing today''s work.


    Sam''s parents or his sister did not even get surprised when he created those arrays and told them the description of those arrays. He is a miracle maker who can create this kind of miracle.


    ______________________________________


    ''Sigh, even though I wanted to create a powerful barrier around the whole Eden Blue, but to do that I would require a huge amount of spiritual energy that ispletely impossible for me to have.


    If the people decided to help me in this matter then there could be a chance to create that kind of Massive spiritual barrier around the whole. But I don''t want to disturb them for this kind of reason as I have the strength to solve all the problems right now.


    Currently, I should try to focus on creating more strongholds. Only after finishing all the dangers of Eden Blue, I would focus on this project. At the same time, I need to investigate those people from the dark association.


    It looks like some of them became active once again this year and I think there could be a connection between them and the''s core. Did those Abyss humans from Abyss world send some of the dark humans to Eden Blue so that they could also get the''s core?


    If this is the case then I needed to be careful about them as I did not know when the restriction force would be lifted from Eden Blue and how many forces would try to attack to get to the''s core.


    But in every situation, I need to take care and give necessary. I will try to use the power of my domain to take care of those people immediately so that I can also prepare myself to face those prime Dragons.


    It would be really good if I get to know where those Dragons are right now. If I am not wrong those Dragons will always travel around the whole space. They don''t have to breathe in space and if they reach theary grade they also awake in the power of space.


    Sigh, even though I have full confidence dealing with those people from others, I still needed to be careful about those prime Dragons.''


    Sam is currently in his concealment technique while he is traveling around the whole stadium and all the ces that got selected for thepetition. This is the supreme technique that he uses most of the time but after bing aary grade Warrior he uses that technique so that he could challenge his limit.


    Before leaving the arena Sam wanted to see if any of those people from others try to do anything that would bring trouble or not. There could be a chance that those people did not do anything as he was present there.


    Because of this, he decided to turn on the invisible state to see if those people did anything or not. But it looks like those people did not have any motive or even if they had some motive they did not do anything currently. There could be a chance they are waiting for the perfect time.


    Because of this, he also gives the teleportation harassment to his sister. He already put his spiritual signature in that tsment. So the moment Gloria channels spiritual energy in that tsment, he would immediately teleport to that area.


    Not just Gloria but he also gave the same thing to his friends and told them only to use that if they find any kind of suspicious thing that could be dangerous for everyone.


    Now 30 minutester Sam finally decided to leave the battle arena. He directly flies toward the area where Gloria is present alongside Fiona. She directly told them using the mind link and after that, he left that ce without alerting anyone.


    Gloria and Fiona were surprised a little but they immediately calmed down once again focused on thepetition.


    _________________________


    Suddenly inside the danger zone, you can see arge number of people gathered and they are listening to the report of their superior. Those are the people from differents and every one of them is ready to attack Eden Blue to get the core.


    As suddenly the restriction force is present none of them try to do anything and just wait for the perfect timing to attack. Not only them but many other people from differents also build their camp inside the danger zone which is safer for thempared to the safe zone.


    This also is a major reason that nobody can find any kind of clue about them. Even those saints did not think about this and only checked the danger zone if some Monsters got out of control.


    Well, it is normal for anyone to think that nobody will try to hide themselves in the danger zone but actually, they forget that those people belong to differents and their power limit got restricted by the restriction force.

 Chapter 741: Chapter 741 - Stronghold in Tolon City

    Alena is present in Tolon City. She came to that ce using the teleportation system of the Warrior Association and not just that city but almost 20 cities around Tolon city are under Alena.


    She did not know how long it would take her to create all those arrays but she will try her best to finish them as quickly as she can.


    If you are thinking about what would happen if those people from another decided to attack her at this time then she is already preparing for that. First of all, Sam already gave her the artifact which would immediately create a barrier around herself and all the Warriors that she wanted to protect.


    The range of that artifact is 1 km and every person who she wants to protect will have that barrier around them. Not only that but she also gets the teleportation tsment from Sam which would immediately alert him and bring him here if she channeled spiritual energy into that tsment.


    Not just Alena, but almost every warrior under the warrior association received some gifts from Sam which also helped them to be strong for a limited amount of time.


    He actually gives them some portions, which will immediately increase their overall power from 30 minutes to 1 hour. As you know even if he wanted he would not be able to make them break through in that short amount of time so he decided to give them those potions, which would be useful if they faced some kind of danger.


    You have to say it is fortunate that Sam always saves his gold coins without buying anything from the system shop. Only because of this, he was able to purchase all of these without any problem.


    Currently, all the people of Tolon City have already be aware that Saint Alena came to their city and she is going to create the stronghold of their City. It is just the Warrior Association that told everyone not toe outside for today as they did not want any kind of disturbance when they were fully focused on creating the stronghold.


    Only those reporters got permission from the Warrior Association. Because of this, you can only see those reporters around that area which got cleared by the Warriors and Alena is already preparing to create those arrays.


    This isn''t a big city and you won''t be able to find a big ce like the stadium of the central city in this ce. Because of this, Alena decided to select thergest ce in the city which is the warrior school of that city. Not just that Warrior school but some of the surrounding area will be turned into strongholds.


    Alena took the minimum ce that would be required to hold all the people of the city. Alena suddenly meditated inside the school while those Warriors of the warrior association surrounded the whole ce and also created a barrier around that ce so nobody could distract her during that moment.


    Not everybody is Sam, who is easily able to enter that kind of focus state without any problem. For Alena, first, she needed to clear her mind and only then would she be able to enter the focus state.


    Outside of the ce those reporters maintain the distance from that ce but they still show that whole area that should be turned into the stronghold from all over the direction.


    The Warrior Association permits those reporters so that normal people and those Warriors who would not be able to fight against those people from others could feel safe after looking at the strongholds.


    There are many people who almost lost the willpower to fight back or do anything after knowing about the information about those people from others. So the warrior association hopes that these people are also able to be normal.


    The Association did not know but the n is working. Every citizen of Tolon City already became excited the moment the warrior association announced the stronghold.


    Because they did not want to disturb the body association during this time, none of them tried to go outside of the home and just only watched the news channel. Finally, everyone in the city could rx.


    Not just people from Tolon City, but those other cities that are under Alena also became excited and they wanted Alena to create the stronghold in Tolon City as quickly as she could and thene to their city.


    Even though many people know that won''t be possible. First of all, creating those strongholds requires a huge amount of spiritual energy, and probably the Saints also needed the time to rest to recover that much spiritual energy and mental energy.


    Those people who understood all of this just wanted every saint to stay safe and safely able to create all the strongholds around the safe zone. They did not want any Saints to put their life in danger because of this.


    ______________________________


    After entering the focus state Alena brings out the spirit brush and begins to channel The Spiritual energy into that brush which instantly turns into deep blue ink. After that, she opens her eyes and then finally begins to draw the first stage of the defense array.


    The moment she begins to draw the array she can already feel her mental energy and physical energy also getting rapidly consumed alongside The Spiritual energy. But she suddenly did not think about anything and only focused on finishing the first stage of the defense array.


    Nobody is present inside that school currently so nobody can distract her. But at the same time, some of them are already waiting outside of the school and waiting for the first stage of the array to beplete.


    After the first stage of the array will getplete they will immediately rush into the school and will immediately use their power to heal Alena.


    As they know the mental energy and the physical energy will rapidly get consumed during that process so naturally after finishing the first stage there could be a chance that Alena suffers from a serious headache.


    Because of this, Sam also prepared some high-grade spiritual potions which would immediately recover 100% of their spiritual energy.


    During that time every warrior around that school can feel the energy fluctuation and the pressure that continuously stays on that ce because Alena created the array. 1 hourter finally the power of that fluctuation decreases and those people who are waiting for Alena to finish the first stage, instantly approach her.


    Fortunately, she did not be unconscious after finishing the first stage and justy down on the ground while panting heavily. She was almost out of breath.


    At this time she also felt that someone was hitting her head continuously with a big hammer and someone froze her body. With this, she also lost the strength to move her body.


    Fortunately, those people already reached her position, and wasting no time they quickly helped her to drink those two potions. Not only that, all the healers instantly begin to use their healing Ray on her so that she would be able to recover the mental energy that she lost during that process.


    One minuteter Alena''s breathing became normal and she already began to meditate to recover her mental energy. Healing even helps her to recover her mental energy but the speed isn''t that fast. Fortunately, meditation is currently the best way to recover mental energy.


    ______________________________


    Markus, John, Mia, Mira, and every other Saints who are straight around all the safe zones are already facing the same problem but none of them are given off or anything like that. Even though they are facing this kind of problem, they continue to create those arrays.


    In the end, it almost takes them 8 hours to create those three arrays. After that, all of them decide to sleep to recover their mental energy. During the time all the Warriors of the warrior association naturally protected them while creating the barrier around them.


    But actually, those Warriors of the Warrior Association don''t have to worry. Before sleeping all the saints told all the Warriors toe inside the stronghold while telling all the reporters to go back from that ce. After that, they instantly activate the barrier and then decide to sleep.


    If you are wondering why they decided to send those media away from that ce then it could have be dangerous for those people in the media. What if those people from the other decided to attack this time when those Saints wouldn''t be able to fight back?


    But don''t think all the Warriors of the body association went inside the stronghold. Many Warriors of the warrior association are still outside of the stronghold and roaming around the whole city.


    First of all those Warriors or you can say the captain of those Warriors groups have the artifact of Sam which would immediately period around them so because of this they did not have any kind of fear while roaming around the whole city.

 Chapter 742: Chapter 742 - Motive

    _________________________


    In this 8 hours,


    Sam already came back to the battle arena to see the progress of thepetition. He already created all the array inside the Royal Academy and only after that, he came back.


    It looks like the first stage of thepetition is still going on. In the first stage of thepetition, every Warrior needed to fight a Monster whose level was higher than theirs.


    The more time they would be able to survive against those Monsters the more they would get points. Also don''t worry about their safety as those Warriors fighting those Monsters inside the virtual reality who give them 100% real experience of fighting.


    With this none of the participants had to risk their lives against those Monsters and also they could finish the fight more quickly.


    Also, the good thing is that the same previously improved virtual reality became 100% simr to reality and with that, those Warriors even after going inside the virtual reality do not feel any kind of difference.


    With this virtual reality at the same time, many people would be able to fight those Monsters without any problem. In these 8 hours, all the first-year students had already finished their fighting.


    The total number of participants is around 20000 and only 10000 can qualify for the next stage. Fighting against those Monsters who are one Grade above you naturally isn''t easy.


    Currently, the second-year students are fighting those Monsters inside the virtual reality and they''re also very close to finishing their fighting. Compared to the first-year students, the total number of participants in the second year is around 25000.


    Already 7000 participants were disqualified from thepetition. While 8000 students were able to qualify for the next stage. All the remaining participants are still fighting those Monsters and it looks like in just one hour those people will finish their fight and with these, the third-year students can finally fight those Monsters.


    "Did you face any kind of travel during that time?"


    Gloria was exact to Sam when he sat beside her. Even though she knows her brother is more powerfulpared to any saint, she is still worried about him.


    "Don''t worry I alreadypleted the array in our Academy and I just needed to do the finishing work. Also, what is the report about those people from others? Did they try to do anything suspicious?"


    Sam naturally is curious to know about the movement of those people from others. Unfortunately, Gloria told him that those people did not make any kind of suspicious movement and just tried to act like normal humans who just came here to enjoy thepetition.


    ''Hmm, I don''t know if this is true or not but I don''t think those people wille here just to enjoy thepetition. Did they have some kind of other n? If possible I should try to catch one of them to know about their motive.''


    Sam did not think those people woulde to the battle arena to just enjoy thepetition. So definitely there is a motive behind these and he wanted to know what that Motive is.


    He decided to approach one of them and decided to kidnap that person. Only this way he would be able to read the mind of that person. Even if that person has some kind of mental barrier he would just directly disable that barrier to know what is the true motive.


    But he did not act recklessly as he did not want to alert any of them. He did not know if those people from the other knew about his power or not. There is a chance that they know about his power.


    Because of this, he did not directly use the concealment technique. At this time even though Sam did not show any kind of abnormal reaction he could already feel some people most likely trying to observe him.


    They continuously use their observation technique toward him to observe him. Unfortunately for them, they aren''t capable of doing that.


    It is just if Sam wanted he could already attack those people mentally but he did not do that and let them do what they wanted to do. If possible he wanted to see what they would do after finishing their observation.


    ____________________________


    Sam is right as those people from the other did not juste there to enjoy thepetition but they have some other motive that they wanted to achieve. It is just that Sam is an unknown factor. Before anything they wanted to know about his thread level.


    Even when previously Sam disappeared from that ce none of them decided to do anything as they also knew about the special move of Sam. He has a special stealth technique and with this, even those Saints will have a hard time finding him.


    This is the reason those people did not do anything even after not finding any clue about Sam. Fortunately, 8 hourster they were once again able to observe him, and this time they wanted to find out about his power limit. Only after finding out will they think if they should execute their n or not.


    _________________________


    "As expected Boss, all those Early Elite grade warriors from Eden Blue already spread around various cities and they already started creating those strongholds. With this, we should not have any problem if we wanted to execute our n in the central city."


    Inside the danger zone in a hidden ce you can see a group of Warriors with strange clothes sitting beside each other and one of them suddenly says that to the person who is beside him.


    The person beside him is the captain of their group and he is wearing full body armor alongside a helmet. Anybody could tell just by looking at him that he is very powerful.


    "Don''t act recklessly as they are" is that unknown factor present in the central city. As you know he somehow came back from a different and we did not know what kind of change he achieved on the different.


    Terror or Terror or something like this is the name of the. But even after consulting about that with The King, we were not able to find any kind of information. So even the king told me to stay careful and not to do anything recklessly at thisst moment.


    We just need to wait for a little longer andter for the''s core to appear on the surface area. Other than that we should not attract that attention. Because of the restriction force, we are unable to use our full power but when the restriction force is lifted, we will immediately take action.


    Not just only me but those other people also waiting for that chance to attack. I also already get the reward for the stronghold that gets created by those Elite grade warriors.


    Compared to that unknown factor, every one of those Elite-grade warriors takes much time to create those strongholds. Unfortunately, we won''t be able to know the power limit of those strongholds as even using the still technique I don''t think they would be able to approach those ces.


    Back to the main matter. I don''t know how long that unknown factor will stay in the ce but we cannot be careless. In any condition, they cannot lose those artifacts."


    ______________________


    Sam did not know anything about those artifacts nor did he know about the n full stop but he already noticed one thingpared to everyone: a group of people mostly be more cautious.


    At first, he thought this was normal butter he realized that it wasn''t normal. Why the hell those people became that much cautious and why the hell does it look like those people are trying to hide something?


    Using the concealment technique he already came close to those people to observe them and this time he noticed those people looked like they were trying to hide something from him.


    Fortunately, he did not have to wait that long to know what was inside the storage ring that they wanted to hide. One of them suddenly receives a call from someone. At this time Sam also notices the curiosity of everyone the moment that person gets the call.


    "I received the order from our boss who told us to execute the n even without approaching the center area. As you know we have that unknown factor and with him, it will be hard for us to approach the center area."


    It looks like that person can also use telepathy or simr techniques like this which help him to talk to everyone in their mind. He informs everyone what is the order of their Boss.


    It looks like after getting the order from their Boss, everyone who previously cautiously observed his previous Direction finally rxed a little. But none of them know Sam also became very curious to know about this artifact.

 Chapter 743: Chapter 743 - Control

    ''Are they talking about me? I be an unknown factor because I know how much power I have gained after going to the new. But I wanted to know what those artifacts are. Because they are secret missions I could not do any of them.


    Fortunately, with my telepathy, I could easily hear their words even though they were talking with each other using their mind link. I need it to find out how many are there with that kind of artifact.


    I needed to act quickly as I could see their superior already giving them the order not to wait for that long.''


    Sam already decided to capture all those people from others but he needed to do that without alerting anyone.


    What if they have some kind of dangerous artifact and the moment they be alert they immediately use those artifacts to harm everyone in the stadium? Because of this, Sam needed to act very carefully.


    He quickly informs Gloria of all of these using telepathy. She became fully shocked after hearing all of these and immediately wanted to take action. But Sam told her not to do anything as he would be taking care of those people.


    After saying that Sam quickly disconnects the mind link and then begins his work. He needed to kidnap all of them without alerting anyone. Even though this will be quite hard as those people sitting beside those normal people.


    If anything goes wrong then a panic could also create among those normal people. So with this, he approaches the first person and without wasting a single second chops his neck to make him unconscious.


    But instantly he uses the telepathy technique to control the body of that person. Using the telepathy technique he could easily control the movement of the person and with this, nobody gets to know that person is already unconscious and it is just Sam controlling the body of that person.


    Fortunately, he could sense only 30 people present in that ce who were from differents. With this, he began to start his work and begin to control the bodies of those people one by one.


    _________________________


    "Everyone be very alert as I get to know that those people from differents have some kind of bad motive. But don''t worry Sam is already taking action. It is just we need to make sure none of those normal people get any kind of suspicion about this or a troublesome situation could get created."


    She immediately contacted all themanders of the word association and told them to be very careful. Many of them became scared the moment the year those people from differents had some kind of bad motive.


    But fortunately, Sam was already taking action so they could rx about that. One thing is that day observing the whole stadium very carefully but even with that I am unable to tell anything different about any of those people.


    Even though they wanted to know how Sam would take care of those people, they were unable to find anything even using their observation technique in full power.


    _________________________


    "Sister quickly came to the basement as I will control those people to go to the basement. I already have full control over all those people from differents who are present in the stadium."


    30 minutester,


    Finally, Sampleted his work and he quickly told Gloria toe to the basement of the stadium as he would be taking all the people that he controls toward that ce.


    At the same time, he told her to inform all the Warriors to be very careful as there could be more peopleing to the stadium to confirm what happened. So everyone should observe every one of those people whoe inside of the stadium or leave the stadium.


    On the other hand, Gloria, Fiona, and 10manders of the warrior group of Warrior Association came to the basement. At this time they could already see a group of people walking toward that entrance.


    For a second, everyone bes very alert and ready to attack anytime but fortunately, Gloria stops them and tells them all of them are under Sam''s control.


    "Don''t worry, everyone is in my control so you can rest assured about them."


    At this time, suddenly Sam appears in that ce, and with this, all of them finally enter the basement of the stadium. This would be the safest ce where they could interrogate everyone.


    ______________________________


    On the other hand, everything ispletely normal in the stadium as nobody knows what happened. Suddenly the second-year students are very close to finishing their fight and with that, all the third-year students are also getting prepared for their match.


    With this virtual reality, nobody has to worry about dying and can freely attack those Monsters. Unfortunately, the pain they will feel inside the virtual reality will be the same as in the real world.


    "Guys don''t know but I think something happened. But I could be wrong. Did you guys notice something suspicious?"


    Suddenly Alexa said that to her friend who was also with her and waiting for their time.


    "Nowe to think of it, I noticed something important that every warrior for a second became very alert and some of them also began to panic. But then they rx.


    Previously I thought something happened to him but now you are telling me I think this is pretty suspicious."


    " Not only that, I also suddenly noticed 30 people suddenly leaving the stadium at once. Even though this could be a coincidence."


    " Did you guys notice that sister Gloria and sister Fiona also disappeared from their ce? I also noticed I came back most likely finishing the array in our Royal Academy but suddenly he also disappeared."


    Alexa and the others begin to get suspicious that something happened. They are discussing with each other using their mind link.


    First of all, they are also very careful because there could be a chance that those people from differents also try to interfere with their match. But this time they also have full trust in Sam. They also think most likely something happened and Sam is already taking care of that matter.


    ____________________________


    Sam did not know that all of his friends had already be suspicious and began to think something happened in the stadium. They would be like those other Warriors would not notice anything but unfortunately, because of their new observation technique, they notice those.


    Sam on the other hand is already reading the memory of those people using his mind control technique and he is pretty speechless by the n of those people. He already knows the purpose of those artifacts.


    "Sigh, I did not expect these people to go this far so that they could have the full chance to get to the core of our. I think you already know about the artifact. The moment they activate those artifacts, many spiritual shockwaves are created.


    Their range will be very limited and our Warriors who are far away from that ce would not be able to sense anything.


    Now those spiritual shock waves immediately affect the minds of those people who have the spiritual energy system. It will immediately break the defense barrier of their mind and after that, we will also affect the spiritual system.


    In one word I could tell they would be sleeper cells for those people of others. None of those people who will be affected by this shockwave would be able to know anything about this.


    The superior who orders them to do that will have control over those sleeper cells. That superior wanted to use those people during the time when the core would appear and every one of them would evacuate into those strongholds.


    Also not try to read the minds of those people as they have some advanced mental defense in their minds. We should immediately activate it if you carelessly try to read their mind.


    The most interesting thing is that none of them know the base of their superiors who are present on our. From the moment theye to our, they get the task of hiding themselves among our normal citizens while using the concealment technique.


    Because of this until now nobody has been able to find any kind of clue about them as not only people from this but many people from others are also doing the same thing. Even though they did not know anything about their main base, they had the contact of their superior.


    Sigh, it would be really good if I could get to know the base of those people as I would immediately take care of them. But most likely those people were also very careful so that they did not reveal their base.


    Even though I did not get to know about the location, I got to know that almost 20,000 of their Warriors have alreadye to our and they are hiding. Not only that they also have some kind of coboration with those other people who are also from differents so that before the core could appear on the surface area none of them have any kind of conflict."

 Chapter 744: Chapter 744 - Uselessness

    Sam finishes exining the motive of those people. After hearing the exnation, all of them were shocked as they did not think those people from the other would try to do something like this.


    First of all, they already have 10000 warriors, and not just only them but like many other people from many differents also have the same force who are hiding themselves.


    Just hearing the number of those Warriors made them serious about this matter and also those people have a n to affect those normal humans on their. All of this is unforgivable.


    Unfortunately, those people who hid themselves among those normal people did not know the location of their main base and they just contacted their superior through their special contact device.


    With this Sam already told all themanders to take care of those people while he quickly came out of the basement. Currently, he decided to observe the whole city to see if any more of those people were trying to do anything or not.


    Not only that, he also informs those Warriors who protect the saints when they are making the array to inform them about this matter.


    Gloria and the others who are currently present in the basement are in a bad mood right now. First of all the main problem is that they are unable to spot those people from others even using their observation technique in full power.


    On the other hand, those people trying to do something like this would affect those normal people even if they hide themselves in the stronghold. All of this makes them feel very helpless as they are unable to do anything.


    If Sam wasn''t present here right now then naturally they would not be able to find anything about this. With this, those normal people would have already been affected by those shock waves and they would be under the control of the mastermind behind all of this.


    "Boom!!!"


    "Shit, I really cannot believe those people will try to do something like this. They already know they are more powerfulpared to war. But even with that, they wanted to create more opportunities for them.


    This makes me feel very useless in this situation. First of all, we are unable to spot them and secondly, there are many Warriors who hide themselves among our normal people.


    What if those people who spread around our whole decided to do something like this which affects our people? "


    Fiona punched the world which almost got destroyed while she said all of this. She is really angry at those people but at the same time, she is also feeling helpless. Not just only her but everyone present in that room felt the same thing.


    "Fiona, calm down. Even though we are useless, we should not lose our calm. Also don''t forget Sam is here and he already told me that he could easily take care of those people.


    It is just that he told me to wait for a few more days. Sam is waiting for the stronghold to finish and only then  make his moves until then we need it to maintain our calm."


    Hearing that Fiona finally calmed down. She also has full trust in Sam so if he said that to Gloria then he has the way to deal with those people. At this time Gloria also told everyone not to reveal this information to anyone as this is very crucial to his n.


    But it is just Gloria at this time observing thosemanders of the warrior association very carefully as even though she has 99% confidence none of those people will betray them there is 1% they would do something like this.


    Basically because of this, she does not want to reveal any of the news but it is just she is unable to hold on after seeing Fiona''s rage. She can understand why Fiona became this angry. Her little sister was also present in the battle arena as a participant and her family was also present in the battle arena as an audience.


    _________________________


    Sam already started observing the whole city and already found many of those people but it is just he did not take any action against them as he did not field any kind of suspicious movement.


    He also read some of their memories by making them unconscious and he got to know those people are from differents and they did not know anything about that artifact.


    Those people who decided to use those artifacts are from Lustar. Everyone on their also are human but even as humans they have this kind of Motive against other humans.


    Sam thinks all of this while he is still observing the people one by one. Fortunately, he did that as he got to know there are many who are from that same and they are also waiting for the right time to use those artifacts.


    The good thing is that those people only have the motive to affect all the people who came to that city. As most of the people are present in that city so definitely they are going to Target the area where they will be able to find most of the people and there will be a low risk of getting noticed by any Warriors.


    ____________________________


    "Sister, I already take care of those people. Quickly send some people outside of the battle arena as I catch more people who also have the same Motive.


    With this none of you have to worry about anything. Only people from Lustar have a n to affect our people like this. I also read memories of those people from variouss. I get to know except those warriors of Luster nobody knows about this n.


    Currently I will not go back to the battle arena as I will still observe the whole city and after that I will be going to the cities where our saints are creating the arrays. We needed to quickly create those strongholds so that I could advance with my n to take care of those people.


    It looks like today I won''t be able to go back. So please tell Mom and Dad about this as it looks like they are busy right now andter I will not be able to contact them."


    " Hmmm¡­ take care. Also, don''t try to push yourself that hard. I know that we are going through a dangerous situation but you should not risk your life to protect everyone."


    After Sam was informed that he was only going back to the stadium or his house, Gloria already became worried about him. As a warrior of Eden Blue, she naturally wanted to protect the and every person on her. But as a sister of Sam, she did not want to put her brother''s life at risk.


    Those people present in the basement feel useless but nobody would be able to feel the sadness of Gloria. Her brother from the moment came back from the new just thought about protecting Eden Blue. To do this he could even put his life at risk.


    But in the end, she is useless as she does not have the power to help her brother in this matter. She did not even have the power to help her teacher to create those arrays.


    ________________________


    Sam can already feel the sadness of his sister but he cannot do anything in the situation as at any condition they need to finish the stronghold quickly so that he can advance with his n.


    He has the array that would be able to detect every citizen of Eden Blue. After that with the help of the teleportation array, he would immediately teleport every one of those people inside the stronghold and then he would immediately take care of those people hiding among those normal people.


    This is the n he has in his mind and he didn''t even tell anyone about this. Previously he just told his sister he had some big n but to do this first they needed toplete those strongholds.


    Currently, you will be going to see his teacher and after that one by one, he will visit everyone who is currently focusing on making those arrays. Previously when he created those arrays he used extra spiritual energy.


    The more spiritual energy he uses, the longer that stronghold willst. He also told about everyone who made those arrays and because of this, he wanted to know about their condition.


    Making those arrays isn''t easy. Only if you are an array master you would feel this thing easy but as you know Sam or those saints aren''t array masters. So naturally these will be hard for them.


    Only after noticing those people taken away by those Warriors does Sam rx and use the teleportation technique to vanish from that ce. He directly teleports himself outside of the ce where his teacher is currently resting.

 Chapter 745: Chapter 745 - Serious matter

    "Damm¡­ as I thought most likely our people got discovered by that unknown factor. Did those guys make some kind of mistake that they got spotted by that unknown factor?


    Most likely this could be the matter as I told him to start the operation without any dy. Most likely someone made some kind of mistake and with that my n got revealed and those guys got captured."


    " Hmmm¡­ leader these must be the matter. It is also impossible for those Warriors to catch our people that easily. Most likely the unknown factor helped in this matter and only because of that did our people get captured."


    " Yes leader, I also think like that. At the same time, I wonder if that unknown factor has some kind of method to spot our people or not. We did not have any idea where he went previously.


    Some of our people already checked the dungeon from where he vanished but unfortunately, we did not find anything."


    "Is a good decision that we did not reveal our location to them. If they knew about that then those warriors would have already tried to attack our base right now. It is a good decision that we separate our army and our spy."


    Currently, people of the Lustar who are hiding themselves in the danger zone are discussing their spy who most likely got discovered. Some time ago they tried to contact everyone but unfortunately, they were unable to contact and most likely they had already been killed or captured by those warriors.


    Unfortunately, they did not know how the hell those people got discovered but there could be a possibility that some of them made some kind of mistake, and because of this, they got spotted by those Warriors.


    " Currently tell everyone who is hiding among these normal people not to do anything right now. There could be a chance for every warrior right now to observe the movement of those normal people to find our people.


    So, if our people do something suspicious then they will immediately get discovered by those Warriors. I don''t want to lose my people more than that, so order them to stay low for now."


    The leader quickly told his subordinate to inform those spies to stay low for now and not to do anything suspicious. All the Warriors of Eden Blue most likely already got alert and they were observing every person. At this moment if their spy does something suspicious they will immediately get caught by them.


    ''Sigh, if possible I wanted to know more details about this unknown factor but unfortunately nobody could get any kind of information about the unknown factor. Even those Saints did not say anything.


    I wanted to know if he came back from any of thes whose people are currently present here and wanted to attack his.


    Also, I want to know about his power limit. My people already told me that even using their full power they are unable to tell how powerful that person is.


    Sigh, I just hope everything goes ording to my n or it will be dangerous for us. Those people from others are going to find a chance to attack us and eliminate us.''


    The leader of the warriors from Luster just hopes everything goes ording to his n. Even though some of the people have already been captured and there is an unknown factor present among those warriors of Eden Blue, he still has the confidence to get to the''s core.


    He needed to be very careful as those people from others were also waiting for the chance to get that core. Even though kindly nobody is attacking anyone and trying to maintain the peace, they are doing that so that they are not discovered by anyone and when the core would appear on the surface area they would naturally need to fight each other to get the core.


    _______________________________


    "Boss, I got the report that some of our people suddenly lost their consciousness. Not only that, they also notice that the Warriors of the Eden Blue capture some spies of the Luster.


    Because of this I already told everyone to stay low for now as we have unknown factors among those people and we reality did not have that much information about that person."


    " Hmm¡­ you did the right thing as currently we are very close to getting to the core and we cannot be reckless right now. We need to advance very carefully so that we do not make any kind of mistake and the time when the core will appear on the surface area we should be the first one to get the core."


    On a different side of the danger zone, you can see a base of Warriors who are also from differents. They also sent their spy to mix with the normal people of this.


    Some time ago their spy already told them that they suddenly got unconscious and they also noticed that local Warriors captured some spy from Luster. This makes them very alert.


    Well not just only them but everyone hiding themselves in the danger zone already got the news and they be very alert after hearing the news. As you know Sam at the time almost made every one of those spies unconscious to get to know they were memories.


    With this, those people already got very cautious about this matter and told their spies to stay low. They are very close to getting the core and currently, they cannot make any kind of mistakes that could cause them to lose the core.


    Even though everybody worries about unknown factors, at the same time they also have confidence in their army. Even if that person is at the same level as them or higher levelpared to them but against those many people none of them thought that person would be able to survive.


    They did not consider those Warriors of Eden Blue as a threat. Only those saints should be able to fight back or give them some trouble but other than that they would not be able to do anything.


    __________________________


    Sam, who already came to Milton City, did not know anything about those but even if he did, he would not care about them. Before anything he wanted to focus on creating the stronghold as after creating the strongholds, he would start taking care of those people from others.


    Fortunately, in 5 hours he already created two strongholds and currently, he is resting before starting the process of creating Array once again. Well, he isn''t alone as Warriors from the Warrior association alongside him are protecting that ce from the outside and not letting anyone in.


    One of them came to Sam and was already informed that all the saints wanted to talk to him and by hearing your tone anybody could tell they were serious.


    Sam without wasting a single second contact everyone. Even though he did not know if they already started the process or not, he still decided to contact them and fortunately, every one of them quickly responded.


    "Don''t worry I informed those Warriors that some of those people from differents decided to use their artifact to affect our people but I already discovered that and took care of those people.


    I already informed the headquarters to inform all the Warriors of the warrior association and even those normal Warriors to be careful and observe their surroundings during this time. The moment they find any kind of suspicious movement they should immediately get in from the warrior association.


    Those people wanted to control our people so that they have more chances to get the core, and if we tried to do anything they could use those people to stop us. But don''t worry about that, I already take care of them."


    After hearing the exnation naturally everybody sighed. Fortunately, Sam was present at that moment and he had already taken care of those people. It is apletely unexpected matter but they should expect this kind of thing from those people from others.


    First of all, Sam became an unknown factor for everyone and nobody knows if he is a threat or not. Because of this, those people try to control those normal people who would not be able to protect themselves to use them against Sam or them.


    "As I told all of you before we needed to focus on creating the strongholds in every city and after that, we need to evaporate every single citizen inside the strongholds. I have something that would help me immediately take care of those people who are hiding among us.


    But don''t try to push your limit as that could backfire. In this current condition, every one of you needs to stay healthy. Also, try to rest as mental health is the main factor in this matter."


    Even though they need to quickly create those strongholds, that does not mean anybody should push their limit and harm their body. Before anything, they should try to take good rest to recover their mental health as mental health is the main factor.

 Chapter 746: Chapter 746 - 25 cities

    Alexa, Tony, and others even though they already suspected something happened unfortunately did not get informed by anyone about this. Also, they are preparing themselves for thepetition as the second year is very close to finishing their fight.


    "Guys, even though we don''t know what is happening outside, all of us should trust Sam. With him here we did not have to worry about the safety of our people. So we should focus on ourpetition as the second year is very close to finishing their fight."


    Tony suddenly said that after thinking for some time. Even though he is very curious to know what is happening they can know about the informationter so for now they should focus on thepetition as their friend is here. With Sam, they don''t have to worry about the safety of anyone.


    _______________________________


    5 dayster,


    ''Sigh, I can create 25 strongholds. I am very curious to know about the status of other saints. I need to rest as I am feeling fully exhausted right now.''


    Some after finishing thest arrayy down on the ground while resting. In these 5 days he already covered 25 cities and already created 25 strongholds. He is the fastest person to create that many strongholds in just 5 days.


    The problem is that he is suffering from a headache and to recover from that headache he needs to rest right now. So he decided to think about those matterster. But currently, Sam did not know that he already created amotion among all the citizens who finally received the benefit of those strongholds.


    As you know every one of Eden Blue waited for all the Saints to finish creating the stronghold as quickly as they could, he was able to cover 25 cities in just 5 days. Those people became very surprised and this became an enjoyable moment for them. One by one cities begin to celebrate.


    Thest city where he is resting right now also has the same situation but none of them decide to celebrate right now as all the Warriors who protect the stronghold from outside already informed everyone that Sam will need to rest and during that time they should not disturb him.


    First of all, everybody knows that creating those strongholds needed a huge amount of mental power alongside spiritual energy and physical power. Also every time after creating the strongholds or you can say creating those arrays every Saints needed to take a rest.


    You can say Sam''s presence is now enough for anybody to make them feel safe. He is a miracle maker for Eden Blue.


    Not just only people of those 25 cities but everyone in Eden Blue gets to know about this information. Even those saints also know about this information and they are really happy that 25 cities will have their stronghold.


    Unfortunately, none of them is close to Sam in terms of creating those arrays. In these 5 days only able to cover 8 to 9 cities or a maximum of 10 cities. But this did not make them disappointed as they knew about their power limit and they also knew the warning of Sam.


    Even if they wanted to push their limits while creating those arrays, they should not do that as that would be dangerous for their body. In this current dangerous situation, they should not do something like this as all the people of Eden Blue will need them during the war.


    If their condition bes very serious then they would not be able to fight if suddenly the core appears on the surface area. So because of this, they are only able to cover those many cities.


    _________________________


    "I am really worried about our son but at the same time, this makes me proud that he is helping all the citizens of our and he is already able to cover 25 cities.


    Most likely all the people in the cities would be happy right now as they would not face danger during the war. But it is just that I did not know Sam''s condition right now. Gloria told us that whenever anybody created those arrays they would need to take a rest.


    I just hope our son did not do anything reckless and take rest from time to time."


    Hina said that with a smile after she finished reading the news. Well, not only her but Gloria and Victor also have the same situation as her. On the other hand, if you want to read about their location then all three of them are currently roaming around the central city.


    The Warrior Association already informs every group of Warrior about the incident and that makes those Warriors very serious. If those people from others decided to do something like this it would be very dangerous for everyone and even the miracle maker would face the problem during the war.


    All three of them decided to help in searching for any kind of suspicious movement among those normal people and those low-level Warriors. First of all, many people from others are hiding among themselves.


    Unfortunately, it looks like the observation technique or the vision technique of the Warriors of Eden Blue is not powerful enough to help them locate those people and this is the real problem everyone is facing right now.


    But fortunately, in this matter, Sam already said something to Gloria. He told Gloria to learn the new vision technique that he already gave her before leaving for work.


    Those techniques use the true spiritual energy and make those vision techniques more powerful and with this even if those enemies try to hide themselves there. Fortunately, Sam already gathers information about those people who came to his to steal the''s core.


    So all three of them and not just three of them but even Fiona and Alena wanted to learn those vision techniques as quickly as they could. Unfortunately, they still have not mastered The Spiritual energy control technique, and also mastering those new techniques which directly uses true spiritual energy isn''t easy for them.


    Alexa and her friends are currently sparring with each other inside the training room that Sam prepared for them. Inside the training room, you can see everybody fighting each other to feel how much they have improved.


    ____________________________


    ''If possible then I wanted to know the condition of my student as I know his character more than anyone. He is a person who will do anything to protect his family and friends.


    He is not a hero but also he did not like anyone to suffer in front of him so he would always try to help others. I just recklessly did not put a burden on his body because we are slow.''


    Alena finally finished the stronghold for her 10th number of cities. Like anybody, she is alsopletely resting right now to recover All The lost energy and during that time she was thinking about Sam.


    Even though Sam told everyone not to push their limits which are dangerous for them at the same time he can do the same thing without telling anyone.


    Naturally, she knows Sam has a big n to take care of those people from others, and to do that they need to finish the strongholds as quickly as they can.


    At this time one Warrior who is protecting her from staying outside of the stronghold already enters the stronghold and then brings an energy drink to her. After drinking that energy drink she began to feel quite repressed and deserted to y on the ground like that.


    Currently, none of them have the opportunity to go back to their home to rest and thene back. If they want to rest, they will rest like that to recover their lost energy.


    ''Also, after finishing all the cities in my area I would need to focus to master the energy control technique. Only after that, I was able to learn the observation technique and the vision technique that Sam gave to me.


    Even thoughpared to the normal spiritual energy the true spiritual energy is much more dense. So controlling them isn''t easy and they need the time to fully getfortable with the true spiritual energy.


    During the time when she was creating those arrays, she also felt the consumption of Spiritual energy which would increase every time she was able to create some powerful array.


    Even though she wanted to stop those spiritual energies from spreading out like this, unfortunately as her control over the spiritual Energy is very low she is unable to do that.


    ______________________


    ''Well, I am feeling energetic. Currently, I should try to contact every saint and know about their situation. Also, I need to visit those cities where they already created those strongholds so that no problem situation could appear in those ces.''


    Sam after working up from his sleep begins to feel quite refreshed. Naturally a good sleep will help him recover his mental strength. With this he also decided to contact every saint.

 Chapter 747: Chapter 747 - Second stage of the Competition

    B-grade Dungeon Forest Dungeon,


    Inside of the Dungeon Alexa, Tony and the others will be fighting Monsters. As you know the more monsters they will kill the more points they will get and in the end the result will be decided based on the points they have collected.


    After the previous fight they got 5 days to rest. In these 5 days naturally none of them wasted a single second and always practiced their techniques. The good thing is that previously Sam already gave them a huge amount of spirit crystals which he brought out from the Terraria.


    All those spirit crystals naturally contain the true spiritual essence which is much more helpful to thempared to those normal spirit crystals. First of all the crystals present in Eden Blue only contain the normal spiritual essence which is not useful for them after they upgraded their spiritual system into a true spiritual system.


    It would take them a huge amount of spirit crystals to increase their overall power or to break through. Because of this Sam decided to give them a huge amount of spirit crystals. But at the same time he also told everyone not to rush to absorb all those crystals.


    First of all, even though they already have a true spiritual energy system in their body, they never absorb those true spiritual essence. Their body is not used to adjusting when suddenly the amount of true spiritual energy increases rapidly.


    This is the reason he told everyone not to rush anything and also he told at first most likely they will have some problem when they try to absorb those crystals.


    So in these 5 days Alexa and the others naturally use those spirit crystals to increase their power as much as they can. But unfortunately in these 5 days they were unable to break through or reach the limit.


    The reason is that even though they have a huge amount of spirit crystals, their body is unable to bear the pressure when suddenly the amount of the two spiritual energy began to increase rapidly.


    They felt a huge amount of pain and they also feel that their body is also getting cracked during that time but fortunately they are still able to increase their powerpared to before and with these they naturally have the confidence to win this round.


    The good thing is that they will be entering the Dungeon as a team. Currently every one of them is waiting with those other third year students for the signal to enter the Dungeon.


    Naturally Warriors of the warrior association already enter the Dungeon and they are just hiding inside the dungeon. They would not appear until the life of those participants isn''t at risk.


    Now back to main matter,


    As no Saints going toe to announce the start of thepetition those peak A-grade warrior became in incharge of thepetition. Gloria is one of them alongside Fiona. You can say both of them are very famous among all the Warriors because of their strong power and strong talent.


    Wasting no time Gloria instantly gives everyone the signal to start thepetition and with this every third year students begin to enter all those Dungeons that have been selected for thispetition.


    Inside everyone of those Dungeons which got selected for thepetition you will find 7 floors. In thest floor you will find those Early C grade monsters while in the sixth number floor you will find peak B-grade monsters. Thest floor is the boss floor and this is the most difficult floor.


    Alexa and her friends also enter the Dungeon and wasting no time they begin to advance toward the direction they have selected. Not the story but all those groups of Warriors who enter the Dungeon naturally spread around the whole floor.


    But at the same time you can say every participant also needs to stay very careful because they could also get attacked by their fellow participants. The time limit for this stage of thepetition is 8 days and during these 8 days the team who have collected more points will be the winner.


    In the previous stage of thepetition they got points based on the time they needed to finish their Monsters. The more quickly they killed the Monster the more points they had got but in thispetition this ispletely different as the more Monster they will kill the more points they will get.


    Alexa and her friends already came very deep inside of the Dungeon and they were already searching for a group of Monsters. Well they did not look for any monster in the outside area as there are many people who will do that and it will be hard to find a group of monsters.


    Also none of them wanted to stay on that floor for that long as their main target was the third floor and the fourth floor. In the third floor they will meet those peak C Grade monsters while in the fourth floor they will meet those early B-grade monsters.


    Also there is an important thing and that is the more powerful Monster they will kill the more points they will get. So definitely like them thos Warriors who also have confidence in them with targeted Monsters in second floor and 3rd floor.


    There is nobody who is able to break through to B-grade, so because of this nobody has the confidence to target 4th floor to seven floor. They will only target the second floor and 3rd floor. Well before anything you should know the ground floor is the safe zone so you would not be able to find any Monster there.


    Back to the main matter, Alexa and her friends did not even take one second to kill that group of Monster. They already realized how powerful they have be. Also who doesn''t like the feeling when they are able to control their spiritual energy.


    When you are unable to control your spiritual energy and if you try to use any technique most of the spiritual energy will just be lost during the time and only a small part of the spiritual energy will be present in the technique and with that you technique would not be able to bring out that much power.


    So definitelypared to before right now as they have more control over the true spiritual energy they are able to kill those monsters just once again without giving them the time to move or do anything.


    Elena, Jeni, Kenny, and all the long distance attackers did not even have to prepare any kind of attack as their friends already killed those monsters. With these continuously advancing.


    Now outside of the Dungeon if you look at the main stadium you can see many big screens present there and in every one of those big screens the warrior association showing everyone the performance of those Warriors.


    Naturally many people will get curious about Alexa and her groups. First of all they belong to the Royal Academy and also they are the friends of Sam. Even though none of them know if it is true or not, everybody predicted Alexa and her friends will receive more benefits from Sam.


    So because of this, this year many people are paying more attention to their group. This really makes everyone very speechless when everybody can see that their group doesn''t have to use their 30% or even 20% power to kill those monsters on the first floor.


    Most likely they just using 10% of their power and only 6 of them were fighting, But even with that surprisingly they able to kill those monsters in just one second.


    At this time anybody could tell most likely all 10 of them ispletely different from any peak C-grade warrior. There are many Warriors who also have the same power level but even those people taking 2 minute to 3 minute to kill a group of Monsters where at least 20 to 30 Monsters were attacking them.


    ____________________________


    "As expected, look like they also getting better at their energy control. But I am really curious to know if they able to use all the techniques that Sam given them or not.


    But I don''t think it would be easy for them to use those new techniques at this time when they did not even have 100% control over their spiritual energy. It would be good if Sam was present there to guide them during their training. Fortunately they got your guidance."


    Fiona told all of this to Gloria who is beside her and she also looking at the big screen where it showing Alexa and her groups who killing those Monsters  easily.


    Gloria after hearing that also smile but at the same time she also know if Sam was present there are then Tony and the others would be more powerful.


    Actually as a Sam ispletely busy with his work to creating the strong holds them told her to guide his friends during this time. Even though Gloria isn''t good as tham but as you know she directly got pointers from him and both siblings will fight each other everyday when they would get the time. So definitely she have better understanding in her own power.

 Chapter 748: Chapter 748 - Visiting Alena

    "In which city are you right now?"


    " Yatton City,"


    " Ok, I will be there in a minute,"


    Sam quickly called his teacher and asked about the city where she is right now. After getting the name of the city he hung up the phone and then called all the Warriors of that city toe to that ce.


    Now the stronghold isplete for thest city; those many Warriors don''t have to stay in that ce for that long. Sam has a mission for some of them so he called every one of them.


    Sometimeter all the Warriors of the warrior association came to the stronghold. Currently, every one of them is surprised and bes very curious to know why Sam suddenly calls all of them.


    " By my sudden call, all of you must be surprised but we have a serious situation right now. I don''t know if any of you heard the news about the incident that happened in the annual collegepetition or not.


    If you did not know anything about this do try to learn what happened there as the Warrior Association already published the news for everyone. But after getting the news don''t try to reveal that news to any normal people as that would be a troublesome matter.


    The reason behind I call you is rted to this. As I alreadypleted the stronghold, not every one of you currently needed to stay in this city so I wanted to create a group of Warriors who would be in charge of observing the movement of every person inside the city.


    Well, the others would go to the ce where suddenly thepetition is going on. Those people who will be staying in the city and will be in charge of observation need to stay very careful as those people from the others have the ability to hide themselves among our normal people.


    Because of this, previously none of you were able to find the clue about those people even after searching that much. So naturally even at this time, I don''t think any of you would find the clue about those people but I wanted all of you to observe the whole city very carefully.


    I want all of you to observe the movement of every single person in the city. The moment you feel any kind of suspicious movement among those people you immediately contact the warrior association or contact me."


    Sam begins to tell his instructions to those Warriors and finally 4 minutester finishes exining everything about his n. He already created two groups of Warriors.


    The first group will be staying in this city while observing the moment of every single person who is inside that city. Well, the other group already began to go to the warrior association to use the teleportation array of the warrior association.


    Sam already said goodbye to everyone and he already uses the teleportation technique after locating the aura of Alena. This helped him immediatelye to the ce where his teacher was resting right now.


    Even though Sam already gives them high-grade potions that would be able to help her recover those lost energy instantly he tells her not to use those things carelessly. Excessively using those potions would be enough to damage the foundation of any Warrior.


    Alena is surprised for a second but she immediately notices it is Sam who came to that ce and most likely he uses some kind of teleportation technique. Only then does she get up from the ground and then approach Sam.


    When Sam saw her approaching in his direction, he immediately decided to use the healing Ray technique. Even though Alena was trying to hide her expression, she was unable to hide that pale face she had.


    Because of this, Sam already can predict what happened, and wasting no time he already begins to use the healing way technique. Because of the Origin spiritual energy the power of the technique is much more powerfulpared to your normal technique.


    Alena did not even get the chance to say anything as Sam had already begun to use that technique on her and instantly she felt a rxed sensation. Even though previously Sam already told her and every saint that they should not be over, hardly any of them are resting.


    They would rest which is enough for them to fully recover from the exhaustion state and after that day will start once again. Even Alena is doing the same thing and because of this all this time she feels a headache in her head which almost feels like her head will burst out.


    Fortunately, when Sam begins to use the healing Ray, this immediately simtes the power of Alena and she bes more rxed. Without even realizing she falls asleep even when she is just standing in front of Sam.


    Fortunately, Sam got her and then ced her on the ground. Well, she needed a good rest before starting once again so because of this Sam decides to help her to sleep.


    __________________________


    6 hourster,


    Sam is currently meditating inside the stronghold which is alreadypleted and Alena is still present but she is lying down on the ground. Slowly she regains her consciousness and opens her eyes to understand what just happened to her.


    All of this happened so quickly that she did not even get the time to understand what happened to her. Fortunately, when she got up from the ground and saw the face of Sam who was busy meditating she already understood what happened.


    First of all, the mental headache has already disappeared and that is really good news. She also began to feel more rxed. It is like for almost 1 year she did not sleep and finally got the time to sleep. She also began to feel full and energetic after that good rest.


    She needed a good rest toe out from the burden that her body was feeling all the time. Only at this time, she notices Sam slowly opening his eyes.


    It is already 9:00 p.m. so you can already see stars in the sky. At this time, Alena once again wanted to say something to Sam, but Sam did not give her any chance again and immediately told her to freshen up. After saying that he also leaves the ground as he also needs to freshen up.


    ______________________________


    "Teacher, it is a really good thing that you are already able to cover 11 cities. But as I told you before, you don''t have to put your body in that much burden but it looks like you did not listen to my words.


    Sigh, I also wanted to create the strongholds as quickly as I could but we should not rush in this kind of situation which could be dangerous for us."


    Sometimeter both of them are currently present in a restaurant and at this time Sam tells all of this to Alena. But it is just that Sam did not know if Alena would listen to him or not. He just hopes she listens to him.


    "Also teacher I already observe all the strongholds that you created. I have to tell you to already master all the arrays that are required for the stronghold. Currently, you don''t have to worry about the strongholds and you could advance further than this."


    Sam naturally doesn''t want his teacher to feel a burden because of this situation. This is the reason he said all of this to her and after that, both of them began to eat their food.


    During all this time, Alena did not say anything and just silently listened to Sam''s world. She also knew that she should not put her body under that much pressure but at the same time when she heard the incident that happened in the central city, she decided to ignore the pressure that her body was feeling.


    At this time even though she did not say anything just by looking at her eyes anybody could tell she was observing Sam and was proud of him. You already became so powerful that currently, she needed help from his student.


    "Teacher, I am going to see all the Saints. So I would not be able to stay here for that long. Before leaving the city I wanted to give you some instructions that you need to give those Warriors of the Warrior Association and those other Warriors."


    He began to give her the instructions. Sometimeter, Sam already called John and asked about the location. This was the time to say goodbye to his teacher and with that she came to her and said goodbye.


    After wasting more time he once again uses the teleportation technique to reach the next city where Saint John is working right now. Just a breaking to that ce Sam did not disturb Saint John who is focusing on creating thest array.

 Chapter 749: Chapter 749 - Puppets

    Alexa and her teammates finally came to the second floor and they were already facing 20 Monsters who were attacking them from various directions. Every one of those Monsters attacked them from the sky.


    Naturally for all the closebat warriors fighting Monsters who could fly was very troublesome. But don''t forget Jeni and all the other spiritual fighters until now did not attack those Monsters. This is their time to shine.


    Before anything they already created a spiritual barrier around them which already protects them from those spirit beams. Instantly one by one you can see those powerful attacks go out from them and those attacks are enough to kill those 20 Monsters without giving them the time to run away.


    _________________________


    Main battle arena,


    Almost all the crowds began to cheer once again when they saw how easily Alexa and the others killed those Monsters who could fly. This could be troublesome for any other group of Warriors but it looks like their group did not have any problem facing monsters like this.


    Gloria is also thinking about those spells. Actually by looking at the quality of the spills she can tell none of them using any technique which they learn from Sam.


    All of the techniques that Sam provided are much more powerfulpared to those attacks. But at the same time, this is a good thing as you know every one of those techniques requires true spiritual energy and currently none of them have full control over their spiritual energy.


    Because of this if they carelessly use those techniques then they could be exhausted in no time. If something like that happened then it could also affect their points.


    But at the same time, she is already observing The Spiritual barrier that Elena created around them. If anybody who has a powerful observation technique can observe that spiritual barrier then they will notice The Spiritual barrier is much more dangerouspared to any other spiritual barrier.


    Normally when anybody masters The Spiritual barrier they would be able to create a 20yer spiritual barrier but Elena created a 30yer spiritual barrier and it did not even reach the maximum level which is because she did not have full control over the spiritual energy right now.


    If Gloria isn''t wrong then most likely if she or anybody who has that true spiritual energy would use The Spiritual barrier while having full control over spiritual energy they would be able to create almost 50yers of the spiritual barrier.


    Now she is very interested to know the answer so she is going to ask Sam about this. If she is wrong then her brother already has full control over the spiritual energy and he also already masters that spell. So definitely she will get the right answer from him.


    Well, Gloria is not wrong that she could get an answer from Sam but unfortunately, if she observes The Spiritual barrier that was created by Sam then she will be surprised because those are more powerful.


    Now back to the main matter, while observing the second stage of the examination she also did not forget about those people from other worlds. So naturally from time to time, she will ask all the Warriors if they found anything suspicious or not.


    Not just Gloria but all those peak A-grade warriors also doing the same thing. Their main priority is to protect the lives of everyone while capturing those people from others.


    Gloria and Fiona even though did not know how to spot those people from others fortunately Sam already told them after mastering the new observation technique they would be easily able to tell the difference and could easily find those people who were currently hiding among those normal people of their.


    So Gloria and Fiona are also trying their best to master the observation technique that was given by Sam. As they did not have any system like Sam naturally it would take them some time to learn that technique.


    _______________________________


    "Fiona, did you notice anything suspicious among our people?"


    "Fortunately until now, I did not find anything suspicious. But if some of our people decided to betray us then it would be a very serious matter for us."


    "Hmmm¡­ I also know that because of this we should not reveal anything about this as even Sam told us to secretly investigate this. I also hope nobody from our betrays us in a situation like this to gain more profit.


    Nobody has any idea what would happen if somehow those people from others or those Monsters sessfully were able to capture the core. Fortunately, Sam already told me that it would immediately make ourpletely weak and all the living beings on our immediately suffer the same thing as our.


    You can say we somehow link with our so if our can evolve itself then we will receive the blessing from our but somehow if our is unable to evolve and somehow bes weak, we also face the same situation.


    Because of this he also told me if we found anyone like this then we should not kill them and capture them. We need to make sure those people understand what could happen to them if they support those people from others.


    Also, be very careful while observing the surrounding area as Sam also told me people from the dark association became active once again."


    " Sigh, yeah you don''t have to worry about that as I did not want to face those people right now. I think Sam already mentioned that those people suddenly became puppets of some other people. Most likely those puppets came to our to get the core for their masters."


    "Yes, not only that, those people have many artifacts that could be very dangerous for our and our people. Sigh, I wanted to master the observation technique as quickly as I could so that I could spot those people who were hiding themselves."


    Fiona and Gloria discuss with each other using their mind link. Both of them also get additional missions from Sam. Sam tells him to observe every Warrior of their Warrior association or other Warriors.


    There could be a chance that those people have some connection with those people from others or what if their people got controlled by them? Anything like this could happen so they needed to make sure to find those people if something like this happened.


    With this both of them while observing their surrounding area also observe all the Warriors and their movements. Fortunately, until now, they did not find anything suspicious.


    But the problem is that they are unable to leave the central city right now as thepetition is going on and both of them are responsible for their safety. Because of this both of them cannot be sure if they did not have any traitors like this or not.


    _________________________________


    "Currently told everyone toy low. We still did not get any kind of sign that told us that the core would appear on the surface area. The core is already very close to appearing on the surface area but it will take some time. So before that, we should not be reckless.


    That unknown factor became a danger for all of us and I did not want that unknown factor to discover my people before the war. All of our people are hiding among those local people. Our spy could be helpful during the war so told him not to make any kind of suspicious movement.


    Haha¡­ we should thank those people from Lustar. Only because of them were we able to know that the unknown factor could detect our people and most likely he already got information about their motive."


    A group of Warriors who are also from differents discuss the current situation and this time the leader tells hismanders to tell everyone of their spy hiding among those local people not to do anything suspicious.


    Every one of the spies would be a powerful factor when the core appears on the surface area so before that the leader did not want his people to find out.


    "Don''t worry leader, we already contacted every one of our spies and told them toy low. But actually, we also have a different kind of group that could be dangerous for us. I already observe those people and this made me when I saw those people releasing a dark spiritual aura even though they are humans."


    " Hmm¡­ I also hear about that group of people and the most surviving thing is that it looks like those people did not have any kind of feeling or anything like that. Naturally, those people could be dangerous for us but don''t worry most likely right now those people are also hiding themselves."


    The leader and hismanders also discuss those dark humans or you can say those people from the dark association. There is no more dark association. Everyone from the dark association already became a dark human who became the puppet of those Abyss humans.


    Until they did not have any kind of big achievement they would not be able to have their thinking and they would always need to follow themand of their superiors. In one word you can say they are the puppet of those abyss humans.

 Chapter 750: Chapter 750 - 10 days later

    10 dayster,


    The main arena is fully crowded with people. Everyone is very excited as today is thest day for those participating to finish their hunting. Currently, the organizing team of the annual collegepetition already provides the ranking list every year.


    In the first-year ranking the Falcon Academy was in the top position while The White Tiger Academy held the second position and the Royal Academy held the third position.


    In the second year ranking The White Tiger Academy held the top position, the Falcon Academy held the second position and the Royal Academy held the third position.


    But in the 3rd year, the Royal Academy held the first position the Falcon Academy held the second position and The White Tiger Academy held the third position.


    In 4th year ranking once again the Royal Academy holds the first position The White Tiger Academy holds the second position and the Falcon Academy is the third position holder.


    In the first year and 2nd year ranking you cannot see that much difference between the top three ranking holder teams. They just have 100 to 200 points difference. But if you look at the third-year and 4th year ranking then they have a huge difference in their points.


    Currently, Alexa and her team are the first position holders from the Royal Academy. None of the teams from the third year were able to match their team ranking. Naturally, everyone already predicted in the end they would be the one who would hold the first position.


    If you look at the screen you can see Alexa and her teammates still did not stop killing those Monsters. So naturally they are not going to stay like this and it will rapidly increase.


    Coming to the 4th year ranking you can also see the huge difference between second and third-position holderspared to the first-position holders.


    You have to say all the fourth-year students from the Royal Academy naturally got motivated by Sam and with the help of the advanced training room they were also able to increase their power more than before.


    ______________________________


    It is already 3:30 p.m. and thepetition will stop around 10:00 p.m. Until then every participant naturally will try to increase their ranking.


    If you look at the big screen you can see Alexa and her teammates fighting those intermediate C-grade monsters. Closebat Warriors and long-distance Warriors help each other to kill those Monsters.


    Anybody can notice their team''s y. Everyone is aware of their team''s power. None of them have any problem supporting each other during the time when they fight those Monsters.


    Currently, they are facing 10 wolves. Those Monsters have the ability to control the shadow. Currently, Alexa and her teammates are present inside the cave while hunting those monsters.


    Naturally, for any other warriors, this would be a very big matter to fight those Monsters while they have the advantage. But you can see Alexa and her teammates fighting those Monsters without any problem.


    Every one of them has a high reaction speed and they are also already using their newly learned observation technique in full power. These also give them the time to react more quickly and even if any Monster tries to sneak attack them they can react and able to avoid the attack from those Monsters.


    Suddenly a 20 small circle appears on the ceiling of that cave and instantly countless light beams begin to fall towards Monsters. But not just only Elena, Jeni, and the others also use their long-distance attack to attack the Monsters.


    _______________________________


    "Well, most likely even those fourth-year students would not be able to win against Alexa and her teammates. It makes me surprised to see how much they have increased their power in these 3 years."


    " Hmm¡­ this is a really good thing for our Academy and also for all of humanity. In the future, we will once again have a group of strong warriors. I hope with the help of Sam when we can solve everything they will be able to progress much furtherpared to their current power limit."


    Currently, all the teachers of the Royal Academy are discussing with each other while looking at the performance of Alexa and her teammates. Today almost every teacher is present in the battle arena to support their students.


    Sam is also already present in that ce as most of the Warriors request him to present there. As you know all the saints are busy creating those strongholds so in this time no Warriors try to disturb them and hope to see them in the battle arena.


    But as Gloria told every one of them Sam would be present today so many of them already requested him once again to stay there. You can say Sam also has the reputation same as any Saints. Not just only that most of them also consider him the powerful Warriors evenpare to those Saints.


    Sam at this time also looking at the big screen to see his friend''s performance. This makes him very proud that every one of them can grow this much in these 3 years and every one of them is also very close to breaking through to the next limit.


    Unfortunately, he would not be able to help any of his friends to be much powerful which would be helpful during the war. Even using those powerful splits crystals none of them would be able to reach the Epic grade.


    But every one of them had the chance to reach the peak special grade before the war. Sam at this time not just only looking at the performance of his friend but also looking at the performance of all the participants.


    At this time Gloria suddenly came to him and then began to report to him all the information she and her people collected in these 10 days. In these 10 days not just only do they observe the movement of those people present in the battle in or in the central city, but at the same time, both Gloria and Fiona also observe the warriors of Eden Blue.


    They find five people who have suspicious activities but unfortunately, both of them are unable to get any kind of clue if they betray them or not. Because of this they quickly told Sam so that he could do something about this.


    Both of them no Sam has a very powerful mind-reading technique which would help him to read the minds of people without any problem. Also as Sam already told them there could be people who have strong defense systems installed in their minds so to read the memory of the people anybody needed to advance with caution.


    Sam after getting all that information instantly searches for those people and fortunately, every one of them is also present in the battle arena. He needed to the minds of those people very cautiously so that he did not alert any other Warriors and only after making sure if they were traitors or not did he reveal information to everyone.


    This is a very serious matter because he created the strongholds which would help every citizen of Eden Blue to enter the stronghold without any problem but that would be problematic for all the people of others.


    So in this matter if they have some traitors among them that would be pretty much dangerous for any human. During this time most of the Warriors will be busy dealing with those enemies.


    So during that time if those traitors tried to harm those normal citizens or those other Warriors who were weakpared to them then it would be a very serious matter. None of those people developed to protect themselves from those powerful Warriors.


    "Don''t worry I will handle this matter but make sure nobody hears any kind of information about this. Before anything we need to make sure that they betray us. Without confirming anything we should not reveal any kind of information rted to them.


    Just observe the surrounding area. I will be approaching those people while bing invisible and making sure to knock them out and read their memory. If possible try to call them inside the basement and tell him that I have something important to discuss with them."


    Sam at first thought approaching them silently and then read the memory. But this could be problematic. If those people suddenly became unconscious then it would naturally cause some problems.


    So it would be safe if Gloria called those people inside the basement where he will able to read their memory without any problem.


    If they betray them naturally who will take care of those people but if they did not have any kind of intention like this then Sam already prepared a speech that he will tell them. With this, he did not think anybody would have any kind of problem. Gloria instantly agreed with his n and instantly told those 5 people to go to the basement.

 Chapter 751: Chapter 751 - End of the second stage

    Finally, the second stage of thepetition ispleted and everybody who participated in thepetition gets informed by the warrior of the warrior association to stop hunting.


    One by one they teleported to the main arena which was naturally a surprising thing for Sam. He still remembers that previously the teleportation system of the Warrior Association wasn''t that advanced and to teleport many people at once would be impossible for the teleportation system.


    But it looks like in these 3 years they have already improved the teleportation system and with that easily every participant coulde to the main arena without any problem.


    The medical team was already ready to take action before any participants coulde to the main arena. Today was thest day for the second stage of thepetition so naturally many people became reckless and wanted to kill as many monsters as they could in that short time.


    Many people already seed at that but not everyone is as lucky as them as many of them also got seriously injured because of their recklessness. But none of them wanted to take help from the Warriors who were present to help them anytime.


    Because of this, the medical team instantly takes action the moment those people get teleported into the main arena. Before anything, those medical Warriors begin to use their healing Ray to stabilize the condition of those people.


    Fortunately, none of them received any kind of injuries that would be harmful to their life and with this, the medical team was able to stabilize the condition of the participant in no time.


    Most of those injured Warriors Still bleeding aftering to the main arena but right now they already healed. Fortunately, the medical team decided to take action that quickly, and also it is fortunate that the teleportation system became that much advanced, able to teleport every participant in no time in the main arena.


    Sam became very curious to know the range of the teleportation system of the Warrior Association. As you know he is going to use a teleportation array to teleport every local person of Eden Blue inside the stronghold while he takes care of those people from others, so he is naturally very curious to know the range of the teleportation system of the warrior Association.


    Some time ago, Sam came back from the basement and alongside him, you can see those 5 Warriors who previously went inside the basement.


    None of those people remember anything that happened to them inside the basement. Sam exined to them that they were quite tired so they went inside the basement to rest for some time.


    Now Gloria and Fiona naturally be very curious to know what happened inside the basement. First of all, by looking at those warriors both of them can tell those 5 Warriors most likely did not betray them. But still, they wonderfully hear the full details from Sam.


    Sam at this time just signals to them that he has something important to tell them but he will do thatter. Currently, as all the participants begin toe to the battle arena naturally Gloria and Fiona will be in charge of revealing the ranking and that will take some time.


    "I will exin all the details about those 5 Warriors but before that, I need to do something. It looks like I won''t be able to present here for some time so if anybody asks for me tell them I have something important to do."


    Sam, using the mind link, told all of this to his sister and after that, he decided to leave the battle arena.


    "Guys, congrattions I already saw your performance inside the Dungeon and I can proudly tell all of you have massive improvement. Unfortunately, I have something important to do right now so I won''t be able to talk to you.


    After finishing my work I will contact you so until then I hope you rest properly and recover from those injuries and recover your lost energy."


    Sam before leaving the arena also talked to his friends using the mind link so that they did not get disappointed that he wasn''t present there.


    Alexa and everyone be startled for a second but then they realize it is talking to them through using the mind link. It looks like he has something important to do and because of this, he decides to leave the arena.


    By hearing his tone anybody could tell him naturally had something important to do so none of them had any problem with this but naturally they wanted to talk to him. They have many questions that they want to ask him but they can do thatter. Until then they need to recover from those injuries and they also need to recover The lost energy.


    "Sigh, Sam became fully busy aftering back from Terraria."


    " Hmmm¡­ well who can me him? He is our only hope to survive from those people of others. He naturally needed to observe those strongholds and needed to make sure that everything was ok so that no problem would appear in the future."


    "Hmm, you are right. Only after he came back did we get the hope to survive in this war. Not just only but every human of Eden Blue suddenly ced their hope on Sam and as you know our Sam would not disappoint anyone."


    "I think this time he also wants to observe the stronghold. Naturally, someone called to see if the stronghold was ready or not. To tell you the truth I am really curious to see the power of the stronghold.


    Sam already told us that none of us will have any problem inside the stronghold during the war. Not just that, if anybody tried to attack the stronghold during that time they would receive a counterattack and we wouldn''t have to do anything.


    Who is just only needed to make sure that inside the stronghold, nobody panics or recklessly does anything. We need to maintain order inside the stronghold during the war."


    Jeni and the others suddenly talk about Sam and the strongholds. Everybody naturally knows Sam is very busy all these days because of those strongholds. Even though they had full confidence in their Saints, Sam still needed to observe those strongholds and needed to make sure everything waspletely okay.


    At this time, many Warriors and many teachers who are present in the arena can also see only Gloria and Fiona alongside those other peak A-grade warriors present in that ce but unfortunately, they are not able to see Sam.


    Now this makes many of them very curious to know what happened and why he left the arena. Most likely Gloria can read their thoughts as she already begins to tell everyone Sam has very important work to do and because of this he is unable to present at this moment.


    Not just only those warriors but everyone present in the stadium naturally expected Sam to be present but when they got to hear Sam have something important to do, none of them had any kind of problem with that. They also know Sam is very busy with the work of the stronghold. Not wanting to interfere with that work as the strongholds are important for their survival.


    "I am proud of every participant as from first tost I observed the performance of every participant and I could tellpared to the previous year everybody was able to improve rapidly and if all of you continue to grow like this, all of you have the opportunity to be the powerhouse of our Eden Blue.


    Many of you needed to forcefully leave the second stage as you got suddenly attacked by Monsters or became reckless to do something dangerous. I would not me all of you but I already told all of you that you should not get reckless inside the Dungeon.


    Because we have our Warriors inside the Dungeons all of you can survive this time but what would happen if this wasn''t apetition and all of you would be alone inside the Dungeon?


    I hope every one of you does not be reckless like this once again. I hope every participant and every Warrior should know that suddenly our needed a strong Warrior not just to protect our from those Monsters but from the people of others.


    Even if we were able to survive this war, there would be no guarantee that those people from others would not try to attack us. They could naturally Once again go back to our to take revenge and I hope all of our Warriors and all the students can grow strong enough to fight back before that.


    The Warrior Association will naturally help everyone in this matter and not only that, the good news was that the Warrior Association decided to give more resources to every Warrior Academy.


    Those Warriors who already graduated from the Warrior Academy could directlye to the Warrior Association to use those resources. Our Saints tell you the full details about this so if anybody bes curious about these they just need to wait until our saints be free."

 Chapter 752: Chapter 752 - Nightmare monster

    Sam, after leaving the battle arena, already uses the concealment technique to search for some Warriors. Until now he did not tell anyone what happened inside that basement but by looking at his expression anybody could tell something serious happened.


    Fortunately, Sam doesn''t have to leave the central city to finish his work. He is searching for Sam Warriors and if he does not save those Warriors then they would be a huge problem for every human of Eden Blue.


    Using his observation technique in full power it did not take him that much time to search for those Warriors. Using his observation technique he can fully cover the whole city and every human being present in the city would be under his observation.


    He already finds those Warriors so wasting no time he uses the teleportation technique to reach those Warriors. Sam searched for 5 Warriors but unfortunately, those 5 Warriors were not present at the same ce.


    They are present in different ces around the central city so one by one, he needed to visit those ces to get those Warriors.


    Using the teleportation technique he already came behind the first warrior who was watching over the city in the North side alongside 5 more Warriors. They watched that part of the area.


    Sam instantly did not do anything and just silently stayed in that ce. Sam did not want to startle those other 5 warriors. Because of this, he waited for some time to capture that Warrior without alerting anyone.


    Fortunately, only 10 minutester he got the chance to capture that Warrior. Instantly control that Warrior using the mind control technique and then make him unconscious. But it was not toote that Warrior fell.


    Sam caught that Warrior and once again began to use the mind control technique to invade the mind of that warrior. Sam''s consciousness already enters the mind of that Warrior and he directly begins to go toward the center of the mind.


    At first, he did not see anything but the more he felt the restriction force. Unfortunately, the restriction force was not able to do anything to Sam, and with the same easily able toe to the center of the mind.


    In that center, he already saw a worm-like monster. That Monster unfortunately did notice him. Sam, without giving that Monster any chance, instantly attacks him using the telepathy technique.


    Using telepathy hepletely gets control over that Monster and after that, he instantly begins to burn the monster using the me control technique. The Monster did not even get the chance to do anything and it just burned to ashes.


    All of this happens in just 5 minutes and after killing that Monster Sam finally deactivates the mind control technique. This time he once again uses the observation technique to see the status of that Warrior.


    Looking at the status he did not see anything abnormal and with this he could say the Warrior was fully recovered. Unfortunately, that Warrior is still unconscious and will need 5 to 4 minutes to regain his consciousness.


    Sam helps the warrior to sit down and then he disappears from that ce using the teleportation technique. He came quite far away from that previous ce and only then did he bring out a crystal which is also the memory crystal that he received after killing that monster inside that Warrior''s mind.


    The name of those Monsters is the nightmare monster that can control the mind of any person if the person does not have a strong mental defense. When those monsters go inside of your body, you will not be able to remember anything and your body will be fully under the control of that monster.


    All the people who will get affected by those Monsters would not do anything suspicious until the monster does not get any kind of order. Because of this, nobody would have to find anything different about that Warrior who got affected by the nightmare monster.


    Suddenly Sam instantly crushed that memory crystal that he got from that Monster and instantly he got all the memories of that Warrior. One thing was that every person who gets affected by the nightmare Monster would easily be able to detect another person who has the same condition.


    Naturally, Sam wanted to know if there were any other warriors who also had the same condition as them by reading the memory of that Warrior. It''s like those other 4 Warriors have already met this person. But not only that he also made 3 new faces and those three people were affected by the nightmare monster.


    Sam once again uses the teleportation technique toe behind the second person. Fortunately, it looked like that person was already alone and his teammate had already gone in a different direction. Wasting no time, Sam already started his operation to kill the nightmare monster.


    __________________________


    "Sigh, really your brother is so mysterious. Minute by minute I am just getting more curious to know what happens inside the basement. I already tried to ask those 5 Warriors but unfortunately, they were unable to give me any answer."


    " Well, that is true. Even before going to Terraria, Sam was a mysterious person. But aftering back from that it looks like he has be more mysterious. Also, I am facing the same situation as you as I also wanted to know what happened to those 5 Warriors.


    Also why the hell do none of them remember anything? Even after using the mind control technique, I am unable to get what happens inside the basement.


    I can say even those 5 Warriors are curious to know what happened to them as thest memory they have is that they somehow appear in the basement.


    It is just Sam telling them that because of the excessive work, all 5 of them be very tired ande to the basement to rest. They did not have any other memory before that. So there could be a possibility that Sam already removed all the memories."


    Gloria naturally knows the characteristics of her brother. Not every time he will reveal all the secrets but he will eventually do that sometimeter.


    Naturally from the start she and Fiona also wanted to go to the basement to see the interrogation but unfortunately because of thepetition they were unable to do that. So they did not have any idea what happened to them and why they came outside without having any kind of memory rted to that matter.


    This is the reason that even Gloria begins to feel quite annoyed but in the end, she just releases a deep breath as she already knows her brother and naturally Sam will tell them what happened after finishing his work.


    Currently, both of them have already returned to Gloria''s house. Both Hina and Victor are currently present in another training room and they are using their new absorption technique to absorb those new spirit crystals.


    Gloria and Fiona did not disturb them and came inside Gloria''s training room. Fiona naturally is not surprised, feeling the density of The Spiritual energy and the only true spiritual energy present in that ce.


    But it did not end because she also knew the whole house was a stronghold and this could be more powerfulpared to those other strongholds. Naturally, Sam did all of this. Fiona has ess to Gloria''s training room while Alexa and the others have ess to Sam''s training room.


    Without the ess, you can say nobody would be able to enter their household. If someone tries to do that then their person would immediately get captured or get killed by the defense system.


    No back to the main matter, both of them getting ready for a sparring session. The second stage of thepetition is alreadypleted and they also already give rewards to all the top three position holders students.


    10 dayster the final stage of thepetition will start and that would be much more importantpared to the previous two stages. During thepetition, they would not get the time to practice, so now they finally get the time they will fully use the time to focus on their practice.


    Not only them, but even Alexa and her friends also wanted toe to Sam''s training room. But unfortunately, they just came back from the Dungeon so they would need to rest for today.


    But none of them forgot that Sam already told them you would contact themter and told him what happened during all this time. This is also a reason that they wanted toe to his house but unfortunately, Gloria told them to rest.


    _____________________________


    Gloria and Fiona did some light exercises before starting their sparring session. But before they could finish their light exercise they immediately got contacted by the Warrior Association.


    It makes both of them be very serious. Without wasting a single second both of them receive the call of the Warrior Association.

 Chapter 753: Chapter 753 - Explanation

    Finally, Sam captures thest person and once again using the mind control technique he is able to kill that nightmare monster. Unfortunately, he still did not be rxed as he still needed to read the memory of that Monster to see if there were any other Warriors who were also affected by the nightmare Monster or not.


    5 minutester,


    ''Sigh, fortunately, I am already able to help everyone who got affected by the nightmare monster. This is a very serious thing that our people are getting affected by this kind of Monsters which have the ability to control the mind of that person.


    I am still not sure if there are any more Warriors who got affected by the Nightmare Monster. Looks like I need to observe every Warrior one by one.''


    Reading the memory of that monster Sam bes sure he already helped everyone who was affected by the nightmare monster. He cannot guarantee that there are no other Warriors who get affected by the nightmare monster.


    If he did not solve this matter then it could be a huge problem for Eden Blue. Even during the war, all of the people who got affected by the nightmare Monster could be a dangerous factor for every person who did not have the strength to protect themselves.


    Because of this, Sam already ns to observe every warrior of Eden Blue. But he will not do that instantly as even with his full power he is not sure if he would be able to observe everyone.


    Because of this, he decided to wait for all the saints to finish their work. Only then with the help of the saints, he will do that.


    Finally, he can go back to his home. Sometimeter, when he was already in front of his house and just about to enter the house, he suddenly heard the phone ring. Sam quickly brings out the phone from the pocket to see it is Gloria who is calling him.


    Now Sam became serious once again because he already knew his sister would not contact him if something serious did not happen. So he immediately picked up the phone.


    "Sam, something abnormal is happening around our central city. Many people suddenly became unconscious. The Warrior Association already spotted 15 of our Warriors who somehow became unconscious and after waking up none of them have any kind of memory of today."


    Gloria instantly exins to him what happened and only then she bes silent.


    "Oh, don''t worry about that. I am already outside of our house. I will exin to you what happened to them so just rx and tell the Warrior Association that none of them have to worry about anything."


    Sam already understands most likely because he makes those Warriors unconscious like this, the warrior Association already noticed this and thought something serious was happening.


    Gloria on the other hand became surprised after hearing his words. But she did not think that much as Sam already told her that he would exin everything. Also by hearing his exnation anybody could tell he naturally knows something about all of this.


    Sam already entered his house and he went directly toward his bedroom. Before anything he wanted to freshen up. During that time he already messaged every one of his friends toe to his training room.


    ________________________________


    30 minutester,


    Sam finally finishes his dinner along with his sister Fiona, his friends, and his family. Every one of them finally came to his house as everyone wanted to know what happened during all this time.


    Even Hina and Victor became very curious to know what was happening all this time. Gloria previously informs them that Sam has something important to tell everyone. Also as Sam once again came back to his house after so many dayster, naturally Hina wanted to prepare a good meal for him.


    Sometimeter everyone came to the hall room and finally everyone was waiting for Sam to reveal to them what happened all this time. Gloria and Fiona did not tell anyone about those people who had some suspicious movement and they previously thought those people betrayed them.


    "Well, before I exin to you what happened today, I should start exining from the beginning. During the first stage of thepetition, I suddenly noticed some people from another who were behaving suspiciously.


    I continuously observe them and like this I was able to find out they have some ulterior motive. Those people previously wanted to use their special artifact that would immediately attack the mental defense of every person around that artifact.


    Using those artifacts, those people from others wanted to control our people and wanted to use them during the war.


    Fortunately, I was able to find out their motive and with that, I was able to prevent those people from achieving anything. After that, I told sister Gloria and sister Fiona alongside some other Warriors to watch over the surrounding area and observe the movement of every person inside the central City.


    On the other hand, I became busy creating a stronghold so for 10 days I was unable to present in thepetition. During the time fortunately nothing serious happened and nobody was also able to find anything suspicious.


    During that time, I did not inform anyone except sister Gloria and sister Fiona that both of them also needed to observe our Warriors. When I was on the previous many people could control other people so because of this I also thought there could be a chance that our people also get controlled by those people from others.


    But both of them need to do that very carefully so that nobody could get alert. Both of them not only observe the movement of every person in the central city but they also observe the movement of every warrior.


    Like this, they can find 5 Warriors who are also present in the battle arena and in charge of watching over the surrounding area. Those people previously had some suspicious movements and because of this, sister told me to check them.


    So I called those 5 Warriors inside the basement which would be the safest area where nobody would be able to know what happened.


    In that ce, I first make them unconscious and then use the mind control technique to invade their mind to see what happened. I wanted to read their mind but I never expected that when my consciousness would be inside their mind I would be able to see dangerous Monsters.


    I saw a nightmare Monster inside of their mind and instantly I understood what actually happened to them and why they behaved suspiciously. Before anything, I should tell you about the nightmare monster.


    In Terraria you can find those Monsters in a particr ce for the dark spiritual energy is much more densepared to spiritual energy.


    In that ce, you will find this kind of Monster who can directly attack your mental defense and if you do not have a strong mental defense then those Monsters will immediately enter your mind and will fully control you. You don''t even feel anything.


    Normally those Monsters will attack other people on their own but if you can control them then you can also use those Monsters to control other people. Naturally to control those monsters you also needed to have dark spiritual energy."


    After saying all of these, Sam became silent for a minute. He gives them the time to digest all of the information. During that time Gloria and Fiona can already predict what happened to those people and also when they hear about the dark spiritual energy, they suddenly think about those people from the Dark Association.


    "It looks like sister Gloria and sister Fiona already predicted what happened to them and who was behind all of this. Your prediction is right as those people from the Dark Association or we should say those puppets of the Abyss humans are behind all of this.


    They somehow bring those monsters to our and after that use them on those warriors who have weak mental defenses. With these people, they have full control over those warriors but do not even realize anything.


    Previously using the mind control technique when I enter their mind I can see those Monsters and waste no time killing those 5 nightmare monsters. After killing them I get the memory crystal from them and without it, I also get to know about other Warriors who also have the same condition.


    A person who gets affected by the nightmare Monster would be able to remember other people who also have the same condition. Because both of them will feel some kind of connection between them and like this, I am also able to know about other Warriors who have the same condition.


    Because of this, I was unable to attend the award ceremony previously as I went to deal with those Warriors."

 Chapter 754: Chapter 754 - Explanation (2)

    "Those dark association''s people are somehow able to go to that Abyss world. After going to that ce almost every one of them became the puppet of those Abyss humans.


    Those abyss humans are Minions of devils, currently targeting every living being of Terraria to sacrifice them for their god.


    If my prediction is right then they came here to get the code as they wanted to have aary grade warrior. During these three years, those people suffered a huge loss against the Warriors of Terraria.


    This is also a reason that previously I told sister to watch over every warrior. Dark spiritual Energy is very difficult to handle and they also have the most probability to control the mind of another person."


    Finally, Sam finished exining everything. He gives them the time to digest all this information as he also knows to digest all this information they will need much time.


    First of all, controlling other people is a really serious thing. If you have a weak mental defense then you could get controlled by those people and this is something to worry about.


    Everyone present there has a serious expression right now as they think about the safety of their family and other people. But fortunately, Sam is once again able to save everyone and it looks like he already has the n to check every warrior of Eden Blue.


    __________________________


    "So by finishing all those Monsters you be sure that there are no other Warriors among us who have the same condition?"


    Fiona asks that question to Sam.


    " Sigh, unfortunately, I cannot give you a guarantee. It could be changed that many other people also have the same situation and get affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    It is just those people who most likely did not meet these people who also have the same condition and with this, I am unable to get any kind of information rted to them.


    I can only give you a guarantee after checking every human of our Eden Blue. But as you can tell even for me this will be very hard.


    Because of this, I will be waiting until all the saints have finished their work. In this matter, I need their help to check every human. Even using your observation technique you would not be able to tell if anyone got affected by those nightmare Monsters or not.


    There are two ways to detect those people but unfortunately, we won''t be able to use the first method to discover those people. The second method is to use our mind control technique to observe their mind one by one. Only this way we were able to detect if they got affected by the nightmare Monsters or not."


    Gloria and the others also think even for Sam this will be a very hard thing to do. He should also take help from all the saints. He won''t be able to cover all the safe zones that quickly if he just uses the mind control technique.


    In this matter he needs help. But at the same time, everyone bes very curious to know about the first method but unfortunately, it looks like Sam did not have the n to tell anyone.


    Sometimeter, Alexa and the others already went back to their home while Sam also went back to his room. Today he did not want to work as he was tired and needed a good rest.


    Just aftering back to his, he became so busy that he did not even get the time to spend with his family or rest. Because of this, he decided to rest for today and then he will go back to his work tomorrow.


    ___________________________


    The next day,


    Sam finishes his morning training and also the sparring session with Gloria and Fiona. Suddenly he was eating his breakfast. After finishing the breakfast he will directly go to the city where his teacher is currently present.


    Not only that he also informs all the other Saints that today he has something important to discuss with them so using the teleportation technique they shoulde to the city where Alena is right now.


    Naturally, he needed to give them the news about those nightmare Monsters. Not only that, he also decided to reveal his n to them.


    " Son, I know you''re fully busy right now keeping your strongholds and fighting those people from others. But don''t overwork yourself as that could be risky for you."


    Hina, who was also present in the dining room said that with a worried voice. Even though she knows her son is powerful, she is still worried about his safety. It would be really good if some other person could bear those responsibilities instead of Sam. Unfortunately, only Sam could bear those responsibilities.


    "Don''t worry mom. Naturally, in this dangerous situation, I would not be reckless which would put me in a dangerous situation. Also, we just needed to wait a few more days and after that, none of our humans had to worry about the war.


    I am just thinking how long it will take the''s core to appear on the surface area. Even using my observation technique I cannot feel the''s core. But I could tell day by day the restriction force was bing weaker.


    So in this situation only after finishing the strongholds I could be rxed and spend time with all of you."


    Sam naturally knows his family is worried about him but in this situation, he cannot do anything. The war is getting closer and closer. So before the work, he needed to ensure the safety of every human of Eden Blue.


    __________________________


    Sam already teleports to the city where his teacher is waiting for him. On the other hand, Gloria and Fiona once again went back to the training room for their training purpose. Today Tony and the others will be joining them.


    Not just for the annual collegepetition but Tony and the others also wanted to prepare themselves to help during the war. If they want to do that, then they cannot bezy. They need to use their hundred percent in their training. Sam already gives them enough resources to make them powerful so they should not waste any more time.


    Compared to any other ce practicing inside Sam''s training room is much more helpful for them so they already came to the training room. Not just only that, Gloria and Fiona also told them they would have a sparring session so they should prepare themselves.


    __________________________


    Danger zone, Luster camp,


    The leader discusses with all themanders about the restricted force that is getting weaker and weaker. Naturally, the core gets closer to the surface area but is unable to tell where it will appear and how long it will take to appear on the surface area.


    Not only that, they also discuss the movement of Warriors and everybody knows those Warriors suddenly observing the movement of every person around the whole safe zone.


    As you know those Warriors did not have the ability to see the identity of those people of others who were hiding themselves, so they carefully observed the moment of every human in their observation range.


    In this way, they wanted to find those people who behaved suspiciously and if it was necessary they would take action or immediately inform the headquarters.


    All of the information they got from their spy. The leader also told all the spies that currently they should not try to behave suspiciously as that could blow up their cover. They should try to hide themselves as much as they can as the leader has the n to send those people inside the stronghold alongside other humans.


    Not only that but every person from others has the same discussion among each other and everyone already informs their spy to stay low. Some of them also get to know about the sudden abnormal situation that happened to some Warriors in the central city.


    Those Warriors somehow became unconscious and it looks like they are also unable to remember anything. This is an abnormal thing but it looks like the Warrior Association did not have the n to reveal anything. Hearing all the information those people don''t know why but started to think about the unknown factor. ____________________________


    The unknown factor or you can say Sam did not know any of the information but even if he gets to know all of these he will just ignore them.


    Already Sam teleports himself to the Pr City. Yeah, not just only Sam but every saint is also already present. For today none of them decided to focus on the stronghold as every one of them naturally became serious about the information that Sam would provide them.


    Because every one of them needed to create those strongholds none of them was able to know what was happening right now. So you can say every one of them is interested to know the currency situation of Eden Blue.

 Chapter 755 : 755 - Elimination round

    The third stage of the annual collegepetition had already started and once again the main arena became fully crowded. The Warrior association and the organization team already decided that this year thepetition will be only held inside the main arena.


    This will give all the other teams a huge time to prepare themselves as thepetition will start in the first year. Tony and the others will naturally get much time.


    No 4th year or 3rd-year student almost appears on the first day. Everyone is currently practicing to make them prepare for theirpetition. The organization team already told them if their prediction was right then it would take them 5 days to finish the first year and 2nd yearpetition.


    The third stage of thepetition is divided into two parts. The first part will be an elimination round where every first-year student has already been divided into four groups. In the elimination round 5 students will face each other and thest 3 standing will be the winner.


    Naturally, everything has changedpared to 3 years ago. Now one by one the announcer begins to call every participant from the first year toe to the main battle arena before starting thepetition.


    The whole arena became fully covered in the sound of pping. Everybody was very Happy seeing those first-year students and naturally, everybody was waiting for an exciting match.


    After some introduction and speech from Gloria one by one those participants begin to go back to their waiting room. Sometimeter the organization team will provide the list of the group where it will show which Warrior is in which group and who will be the first people to start the match.


    Today in the stadium you can already see 10 battle arenas. With this 50 people will be able to start their match at once. Sometimeter the organization team already provided the list of the four groups and every participant waiting in the waiting room also can see the list.


    Everybody is already preparing themselves for their match. Sometimeter the organization team already provided the name of the people who will be starting the match. From every group, a team will being to the battle while an additional two teams will being from Group D.


    Once again the stadium was fully covered in the sound of pping and cheer. Everybody weed those participants and tried to cheer them up. The announcer already told them to go to their battle arena.


    Somethingter,


    Finally, the whole stadium became silent as the match started and every participant waited for the signal of the referee. It did not take them that much time to start the elimination round.


    During the time Gloria and Fiona who are present in the stadium even focus on the battle arenas but at the same time, they also focus on those Warriors and try to observe them.


    First of all, it looks like even if they have other Warriors who got affected by the nightmare Monsters, those people did not realize that some people with the same condition already got cured by Sam.


    There could be a chance that those people from the Dark Association or you can say those dark humans would try to affect more Warriors using the Nightmare Monsters. Because of this both of them also alerted the warrior association and told him to increase the security around the whole safe zone.


    They cannot let that happen once again where their people would be under the control of those dark humans. Not only that, Sam also told him to be careful because when he previously cured those people it would already alert those dark humans who have control over those nightmare Monsters.


    Even though there is a low risk, those people will try to do something reckless but still it would be good if nothing like that happened. There could be a chance that those dark humans control those other Warriors who are already under their control to do something that would be dangerous for those warriors.


    At this time Sam is alongside all the saints creating a stronger hold and the good thing is that they are already able to cover 70% of the safe zone. They just only needed to cover the remaining 30% safe zone and with that, they would be able to rx.


    Currently, if you look at the condition of saints then you will be surprised. Everyone pushed their limit and did not rest that much because they wanted to create many strongholds as quickly as they could.


    After hearing the previous incident about those dark humans and nightmare Monsters, they became more worried and began to put more pressure on themselves.


    In this condition, none of them wanted to think about themselves. They wanted to save their Warriors and their people in any condition. Only by creating a strong hold around all the safe zones would they be able to rx and with this it will also be easier for Sam to handle other matters.


    Also, most of the warriors who previously protected those saints helped the warrior association to observe the whole safe zone. Only 5 to 6 Warriors are currently in charge of protecting the Saints and every one of them has the defense artifact with them.


    But Saints on the other hand already told those Warriors that he doesn''t need their help and they should help the Warrior Association to watch over the whole safe zone.


    Sam also knows all the saints currently pushing their limit but he is also helpless in the situation as it is true that the more quickly they are able to finish the strongholds, the more quickly he will be able to solve the dangers hiding among those normal people.


    To the main matter, Sam already finished one more Stronghold and after activating the stronghold he decided to rest inside that ce. You can say after creating these many strongholds he already noticed that currently, he did not need as much spiritual energy and mental energy as he used before.


    It looks like the more he became experienced in creating those arrays the more he would be able to use less spiritual energy.


    Not just Sam, but every other saint also notices that and this is a good thing for everyone. Previously they would need 90% spiritual energy and mental energy to create one stronghold, whereas currently, they would need 60 to 70% spiritual energy and mental energy to create one stronghold.


    With this, they would still have the strength to protect themselves. Even though they wanted to dismiss those 5 Warriors who were present around the stronghold to protect them, Sam rejected the idea.


    He rejected that idea because when they were fully focused on creating those arrays anything could happen and at that time, they would not be able to protect themselves.


    The good thing is that Sam provided all the Saints with the artifact which helped them to recover their spiritual energy much faster. Well, he was finally able to find the artifact inside the system store so he bought that and gave all of them.


    ___________________________


    From group A to group D the first people who qualified for the second round already got chosen and the remaining people who got disqualified already left the battle arena.


    Everyone present in the stadium was very excited because of the exciting match, so everybody used their full power from the start and tried to eliminate each other.


    With this, those people who qualified for the next round also left the battle arena and the announcer already told the second group of people toe to the arena 5 minutester. Naturally, if they go on like this, then it will take 2 to 3 days to finish thepetition of the first year.


    Gloria and Fiona alongside all the other Warriors suddenly discussing among them about the situation. They already got the report of their Warriors and the report is negative. Fortunately, until now no suspicious activity appeared around the safe zone.


    ____________________________


    "Guys, I can already feel the restriction force getting weaker and weaker. I think we just need to wait a few more days to see the core of this. Sigh, I am getting bored staying here where I did not even have the opportunity to increase my power and the restriction force also restricted my power.


    Fortunately, we don''t have to wait that long. But at the same time, we need to worry about those people from others. Really like us, they are also waiting for that moment to attack and grab the''s core.


    To tell you the truth it would be really helpful if moremanders came to this to support us. I am not worried about those people on this but I am worried about those people from differents."


    " Sigh, you are right but as you know we cannot do that because of the unknown factor which most likely can detect us. The leader already told us that he was already discussing with all themanders on our and it is possible he also wanted to bring more helpers."

 Chapter 756 : 756 - Suspicious warriors

    Currently, thest batch of first-year participants is fighting each other in the elimination round. The second-year students are also waiting in the waiting room as today they will also start their elimination round.


    Some third-year and 4th-year students also came to the stadium to watch over the fight of their juniors. Even though many of them like to focus on training, you should not ignore your juniors.


    Tony and the others also came to the stadium and they also supported their juniors who were fighting in the battle arena. You can say their presence makes many of their juniors happy. Many of the year juniors saw them as their idol. So naturally they be happy when they see Tony and his group.


    Like them, many other students from 3rd year and 4th year came to the stadium. Finally, thest match of the elimination round is finished and those participants who got this qualify already left the battle arena while the whole crowd is present in the stadium caring for those people who finally qualified for the next round.


    Tony and his group are also cheering for their juniors as they fight well. Looking at their fight they also started to remember the first time when they entered the annual collegepetition. That was a really fun time.


    10 minutester the announcer finally told everyone that one hourter the match of the 2nd year student would be starting and until then they would be repairing the arena.


    Tony and his friends got the time to eat something so they came out of the stadium and decided to eat in a restaurant near the stadium.


    "Guys, I think all of you notice that currently we have better vision and we just need to master this technique to spot those people from others. If possible I wanted to know which kind of technique those people used that help them to hide their presence from our observation technique."


    "Well, I am also very curious about that because if we get to know about this kind of technique then it could be helpful for us. Unfortunately, we did not know anything about this and it looks like Sam also did not have any interest in their technique."


    " You cannot me him as he is fully busy preparing those strongholds. Naturally, you will not be interested in those techniques. He already told us that he had a n to capture or kill all the spies hiding among us. But to do this he needed toplete those strongholds."


    " Sigh, we are useless as without Sam we would not be able to protect our people. Fortunately, we have Sam and with this, we were able to create those strongholds that would protect our people in the war."


    "Guys, did you guys find any suspicious things around the central city? Sam already told us to observe our surrounding area and if possible to observe those warriors. I did not want our people to get controlled by those dark humans using the nightmare Monsters."


    Currently Tony and the others are discussing with each other about the situation. Not just only them but every one of Eden Blue is grateful to Sam as without his help they would not have the chance to survive in the war.


    Tony and the others also get the mission from Sam to observe the surrounding area and if they find any kind of suspicious movement they should immediately contact sister Gloria or sister Fiona. Nobody knows how many Warriors were affected by those Nightmare Monsters.


    Jeni suddenly got a message from Sam and just after looking at that message, she became fully happy. Tony and others instantly got curious about her reaction.


    "Guys, actually I messaged Sam and asked him about the situation of the stronghold. He just replied to me and told me that almost 75% of our safe zone already has a stronghold. Only a few more days will be needed toplete the strongholds all over the safe zone."


    Jeni wastes no time giving them the good news and this makes everyone very happy. Creating a strong hold all over the safe zone is not easy but it looks like everyone is working very hard as they are already able to cover 75% of the area.


    ______________________________


    A Group of people came to the Base city. They lookpletely normal. By sensing their power level anybody could tell they are around intermediate Mortal grade. They are going toward the Dungeon of Base City.


    Even though the situation of Eden Blue ispletely differentpared to before, still all the Warriors have ess to the Dungeon. So that group of people did not have any kind of problem when they wanted to enter the dungeon.


    After showing their ID card they Finally enter the Dungeon. None of them behave abnormally and just continuously advance toward the entrance of the next floor. They were using the full speed of a Mortal-grade warrior while going toward the entrance of the next floor.


    Everything inside the Dungeon ispletely normal except the group of warriors who are not normal. From the moment they entered the dungeon, they were using their observation technique to search if any powerful Warrior was present in the ce or not.


    That group of people belongs to the Zeston. They came inside the Dungeon as they wanted to find the mystery of the unknown factor. Everybody knows that the unknown factor was somehow able to transfer to a different when he came inside this Dungeon.


    So, because of this, that group of people came inside the Dungeon and their target was thest floor. It is just they did not want to make anyone suspicious so they acted like your normal Mortal-grade warriors.


    Like this, The Finally enters the second floor and one second uses the observation technique to observe the whole floor. Once again they can find only those Mortal grade warriors.


    After finding that, all of them already decided to use their full power to go to the next floor and it would only take them five minutes to reach the entrance of the next floor.


    For this only from the first floor to thest floor, they only needed 5 hours. They took 4 hours and 40 minutes to reach the second floor and after that, it did not take them that much time to reach thest floor as they finally began to use their full power.


    It looks like somebody already killed the Boss monster as they did not see anyone inside the Boss room. Wasting no time, 6 of them already begin to search around the whole washroom while the remaining four people are present in front of the entrance to prevent any other Warriors froming to that floor.


    Everyone searched very carefully. They did not want to ignore any kind of small details so they fully focused on searching around that room. But unfortunately for them, they were not able to find anything.


    "Damm¡­ as our people already say we would not be able to find anything unusual inside this Dungeon. I wanted to kidnap that unknown factor to get all the information."


    One of them became very frustrated and said all of this with his frustrating tone. Not only them but many other people from differents also wanted to find a method that could easily send anyone to a different.


    Everybody knows that after going to a different that unknown factor became very powerful so they also wanted to get that kind of opportunity. Unfortunately, they did not know how the unknown factor traveled to the differents.


    "Guys, calm down. From the first, you already know this won''t be easy as even those local Warriors tried to find clues about that unknown factor previously but they did not find anything inside this Dungeon.


    But after that unknown factor came back he already confirmed he was somewhere to teleport to a different from this Dungeon. So, I am sure there is something present inside of these Dungeons which will also help us to travel to a different."


    The leader of the group exined to everyone that it would not be easy and that they needed to search very carefully while not losing their patients. If searching for that clue would be easier then all those local Warriors would have found clues about the unknown factor.


    Most likely his exploration helped his teammates to calm down. They once again begin to search and this time they start searching using different methods. First of all, if there is something present inside of these floors then definitely it will take spiritual energy to get activated or something like that.


    On this day channeling their spiritual energy into everything present on that floor. While touching those trees and walls they channeling Spiritual energy. Now, this is a method that previously Alena or anyone did not use.

 Chapter 757: Chapter 757 - Unusual Platform

    Every one of them begins to channel their spiritual energy into everything present on that floor. But even after doing that for almost 3 hours none of them find anything which makes thempletely helpless.


    At this time the Boss monster also already respawn. But they already take care of that monster without giving him the time to react. Now came to the main matter, some of them already decided to go out of the Dungeon as they did not think it was possible to find anything inside the Dungeon.


    But the leader of the group still has some hopes. But he also knows after all of these there is only a small possibility that they would be able to find anything.


    While the rest of the team is resting right now the leader is already thinking about where he would be able to find that thing inside of that floor. First of all, he is sure the spy gave him the right information because the unknown factor said in front of everyone that he disappeared from thest floor.


    So definitely something is present in that ce that hides himself and none of them sense that. Using the observation technique most likely is not helpful in this condition. From the first day using the observation technique but unfortunately, they did not find anything unusual.


    But instantly a thought came to his mind that almost made him happy and jumped. Fortunately, he controlled himself and then instantly went toward the center area of the Boss room.


    Not far away from that center area finally that person came in front of that stone tform that is not your usual thing. Compared to the surrounding area this thing ispletely unusual.


    ''I don''t know if my prediction is right or wrong but this thing is not normalpared to the surrounding area. I should have realized this from the start but unfortunately, I did not realize that.


    Bute to think of it, previously when searching around this area we also tried to send spiritual energy inside of that tform but it did not react so We previously ignored that stone tform.


    Now there could be a chance that this thing is rted to the unknown factor''s disappearance. But at the same time, I could be wrong in this matter.''


    Now the leader did not know if that stone tform is rted to the unknown factor or not but he still thinks there is a possibility that the stone tform is rted to the unknown factor''s disappearance.


    The leader did not instantly call his team as before anything he wanted to make sure that he was right. From outside he was unable to see anything so he decided to cut that stone tform and see if there was something beneath that stone tform or not.


    With this, he instantly brings out his sword and swings that sword toward the stone tform. The leader did not think it would be hard to break that stone tform so he did not even activate any technique as he has full confidence in his physical strength.


    But this is a big mistake he makes as in the next second he feels an impact in his body and also can hear a breaking sound. He realized there was no scratch in the stone tform but his sword had a crack mark on it.


    He used his full strength previously to break that stone tform. Using full strength makes him feel the impact on his body and also the sword has a crack on it.


    Now that makes himpletely confused and fully surprised right now. He did not think this was normal and that it was rted to the unknown factor''s disappearance.


    Even though he did not use any kind of spiritual energy previously, he uses his physical strength. The leader is a peak special-grade Warrior. So definitely this thing is not normal that after receiving a powerful swing from a peak special grade Warrior it did not have any kind of scratch mark on it.


    This time he became more serious and instantly activated his technique. He decided to start with his strongest technique as he quickly wanted to find what was beneath that stone tform.


    The leader wanted to cut that stone tform in half. So he swung the sword from upward. Using his full physical strength and spiritual energy he attacked once again but in the next second a huge impact was created which sent that person backward.


    Not only that, but that sword already turned into powder and the leader also received serious injuries because of the repulsion force.


    All of his teammates who were far away from the location instantly got alert and wasted no second quickly came toward the leader. The leader is currently lying down on the ground with blooding out from his mouth and his both hands are badly damaged.


    All of his teammates just looking at his situation became serious and instantly used their observation technique in full power to see what kind of enemy attacked their leader.


    Unfortunately, they did not find any enemy but there could be a possibility that the enemy already hid himself. There also is a possibility that the enemy is from a different.


    The healer of the team already begins to heal the wound of the leader. The leader at this time is in serious pain so he is unable to do anything. Sometimeter fortunately his situation stabilized and he finally canmunicate with his teammates.


    Instantly his teammates ask him many questions but in the end, he just answers them with a no, as none of them are able to predict the correct reason behind his situation. This instantly made every one of them surprised as they also did not think their leader would get injured by any enemy.


    The leader begins to exin how his situation became like this. He began to exin them from the beginning and he also told them he previously used his full strength. Now this is apletely unexpected thing. A stone tform did not even have a scratch mark on it after receiving the full power of the leader.


    Not only that, when the leader uses a spiritual technique using his full power the leader is the one who got injured while the leader is sure the stone tform did not have any kind of scratch mark on it.


    Sometimeter they are already in front of the stone tform and they can already see that their leader was right. They are unable to see any kind of scratch mark on that stone tform and they can also see the remaining part of that sword which has already been crushed into the prouder.


    The leader instantly warns everyone that they should not attack that thought carelessly. Even if someone wanted to attack, they should attack that thing from a distance. Nobody should be careless like him, which would be serious.


    Naturally, everyone wanted to see if it was true or not. One by one they begin to use their attack on that tform but in the end everyone begins to realize that none of their attacks are working.


    The stone tform ispletely okay even though the surrounding area has already been destroyed by their attack. One of them also tries to use healing Ray and many different techniques on that stone tform but in the end, the result is the same. None of them seed in putting a scratch mark on that thing.


    "Pant¡­ pant¡­ pant¡­ what is this thing? Even using our full power and ourbined attack we were unable to leave a scratch mark on it."


    " Pant¡­ pant¡­ this thing makes me fully confused as I never see things like that which did not have a single scratch mark even after receiving that many attacks."


    " Sigh, fortunately, we were able to maintain a safe distance or we would get seriously injured because of the repulsion force. Attacking that thing ispletely dangerous without proper safety.


    As our leader said, this stone tform is rted to the unknown factor''s disappearance. Unfortunately, we cannot even leave a scratch mark on that thing."


    " Sigh, guys I don''t think we would be able to do anything. We already used all of our methods even though we tried to use our spiritual energy at once but in the end, the result was the same. There could be a chance that only our Elite grade warriors would be able to find what is this stone tform."


    " I also think the same thing. I don''t think any of us would be able to find anything as we were not even able to leave a scratch mark on that tform. So we should leave the dungeon then and contact our seniors."


    In the end, every one of them already realized none of them would be able to find anything as they did not even leave a scratch mark on that tform.


    So they decided to leave the Dungeon and contact their seniors. There is a possibility that only they were able to find something on that floor.

 Chapter 758: Chapter 758 - Suspect

    After realizing that they would not be able to find anything they decided to leave the Dungeon. But none of them realize that previously those impacts also attract the attention of some other Warriors.


    As you know there are many Warriors who also wanted to find out the truth about that Dungeon as from there Sam disappeared previously and somehow reached a new.


    When that group of Warriors from another leave The Boss room another group of Warriors enter that room to kill the Boss monster. But everyone was fully surprised as they could already see the whole room destroyed.


    Not only that, they suddenly feel a repulsion force that sends them toward the entrance of the third floor. The Dungeon will automatically repair the damage of the boss room but at the time no Warriors would be able to present in that ce.


    Because of this, the Dungeon sends those Warriors outside of the boss room. On the other hand that group of Warriors already understands why suddenly they got sent outside of the room. They did not have any problem with that but the destruction of this naturally did note from any normal Warrior.


    The leader of the group instantly remembers that group of warriors who leave the room when they are about to enter the room. The leader instantly became very serious and he already began to discuss with his teammate about that matter.


    In the end they decided to inform the Warrior Association about this. Even though they did not know if this destruction was rted to people from others or not, they still decided to inform the Warrior Association.


    The Warrior Association already told everyone that those people from others have some powerful technique that also makes them hide from the observation technique of the saints. So there could be a possibility that those groups of warriors who caused all of this were from differents.


    That group of warriors of Zeston already came to the second floor and they were already very close to the first floor. They would not contact any of their superiors inside the Dungeon.


    None of them know that a group of Warriors already suspect them and decide to contact the Warrior Association.


    _______________________


    "What? Is this true?"


    " Huh¡­ What happened Gloria?"


    Gloria who was present in the stadium suddenly got contacted by the elder of the Warrior Association who is also in peak A-grade warrior. The elder instantly told Gloria about the incident that happened in the Base city.


    All the elders of the Warrior Association became in charge of handling the matter around the safe zone as all the saints became busy creating the stronghold. Naturally, they don''t have to contact Gloria but she is also the person who has achievements like those elders and she is the big sister of Sam.


    Because of this one of the elders decided to inform her about all of this. Gloria after hearing all of the details became very shocked and serious about this matter. After hearing all the details she also begins to think there is a 90% chance those Warriors belong to another.


    Even though there is a 10% chance that people from Eden Blue went to that floor to find the teleportation portal. But at the same time, Gloria did not think any of their people would do something like this in this dangerous situation. Almost every warrior of Eden Blue focuses on getting powerful to survive in the war.


    Fiona, who is next to Gloria, is surprised by her sudden reaction so she instantly asks her what happened. Gloria told her all the details and that also made Fiona very serious.


    Gloria informed Sam about this matter but she did not call him and just sent him a message. She also did not want to distract him when he was focusing on creating the stronghold.


    ___________________________


    ''Sigh, fortunately, we are already very close to finishing the stronghold. Only after that, I will be starting my main mission to capture those people who are hiding among us.''


    Sam is currently resting right now. He just finished a new stronghold and is currently recovering The lost spiritual energy and mental energy. He is very happy because he and all the saints are already able to cover 88% of the area of the safe zone.


    Few more days they would be able to cover 100% of the area. Suddenly at this time, he brings out his phone to contact his family and his sister. At this time he noticed a notificationing from his sister.


    Instantly contact Gloria to ask what happened. Gloria''s message is that she has some important information to tell him.


    __________________________


    "Ohh¡­ so people from differents are already bing interested to know about the method which I used to go to a new.


    Well, don''t worry about them. First of all, I am sure none of them have ess to true spiritual energy. But even if they have ess to the true spiritual energy they would not be able to do anything that would help them to find out the real teleportation array.


    If I am not wrong then that group of warriors from differents try to attack the stone tform using their full power. But unfortunately, they were not able to do anything and in the end, they decided to leave the Dungeon.


    There could be a chance that they would contact other Warriors and those Warriors will alsoe inside the Dungeon."


    "So what should we do right now?"


    "Hmm¡­ contact the Warrior Association and tell them to contact Warriors who are currently in charge of the Dungeon''s security. Currently, they do not have to take any kind of action.


    Also if possible contact our Warriors and tell them not to go to the Boss room. There could be a chance more Warriors like that from others will alsoe to that dungeon. So going to the boss''s room could be risky."


    " Okay¡­"


    "Hmm¡­ also told them they don''t have to worry about anything because after finishing the stronghold I will take care of those people. Until then they don''t have to do anything."


    Sometimeter, after getting all the details about thepetition Sam decided to hang up the phone. It is a good thing that tomorrow the 3rd year student will be fighting for the elimination round.


    Unfortunately, he would not be able to present in that ce. Also, he did not want to contact the saints to tell them about the incident. They were already a huge burden and he did not want to increase the burden. He also told Gloria to inform the Warrior Association that they should not inform any Saints about this.


    ''Hmm¡­ well I already expected something like this would happen but did not think that fast those people would be able to find the stone tform.


    But they would not be able to find anything else that did not have sufficient strength to leave a scratch mark on the stone tform. Well currently I should let them try destroying the stone tform but I hope many of our warriors get injured in this case.''


    Sam is not worried about that stone tform or the teleportation array. He has full confidence that the stone tform will not get destroyed and those people will not be able to find anything. It is just that those people can be dangerous for the warrior of Eden Blue. With this none of the Warriors of Eden Blue should go to the Boss room.


    ______________________________


    "Sir, we already found a strange tform inside the Dungeon. But unfortunately, we are unable to do anything even using our full power. It feels like that tform is indestructible and because of this we decided to inform you asking only if you have the power to destroy that tform and find out the true reason behind the unknown factor''s disappearance."


    That group of Warriors already came outside of the Dungeon and they already left the Dungeon. There could be a chance that some people be suspicious about them so they decide to leave that area and only then they contact one of their superiors.


    That person is amander of their army. Thatmander after hearing all the details becamepletely surprised as he also did not think a mysterious tform like this would be present inside of that Dungeon.


    "Good work. But currently, all of you should stay low. There could be a possibility that some Warriors already contacted the Warrior Association and all of you be suspects.


    Don''t worry as all of you will get rewarded because of this achievement and from now on you don''t have to worry about that tform as I will be handling that matter. If possible try to hide yourself and leave that city."


    After saying that, themander hung up the phone. On the other hand that group of Warriors be happy when they hear that they will get rewarded because of this achievement. Instantly the leader told everyone that they would be leaving that city right now.

 Chapter 759: Chapter 759 - Observing the Elders

    Finally, today is the day when Tony and others will be fighting for the elimination round. They already came to the battle arena and waited in the waiting room to get to know about their group.


    The organization team is already preparing the chart where that will show the names of the people who are in those 4 groups. It takes some time and finally, the organization team has already revealed the list.


    Jeni, Elena, Tony, and the others are already able to see their groups and for the elimination round none of them will be facing each other. One by one the organization team called all the teams for the elimination round.


    Today surprisingly Sam is also present in the battle arena to see his friends fight for the elimination round. Well, he finally got free time toe here. The good thing is that he and all the Saints are already able to cover 90% of the area of the safe zone. Discover hidden stories at m,v l''e-NovelBin


    Well at the same time as you know currently Sam only has the ability to detect those people from another so he needed toe back to the stadium to see if any of those people from differents were trying to do something suspicious or not.


    If his prediction is right then those people from others are also able to predict that he has the ability to notice them. So there could be a chance when those people see he is not present in the stadium, those people will try to do something dangerous.


    Not just only that, but what if those people from the Dark Association, or you can say those dark humans try to use the Nightmare Monsters to control more people?


    Even though Sam was not able to find any other person who was affected by those nightmare Monsters, he is still sure about one thing those people will not face any kind of danger until the core does not appear on the surface area.


    First of all, you should know that the dark humans controlled those people so that they could use those humans during the war as their shield. They wanted to use those humans so that they didn''t have to lose their life and with that, they could get the core easily.


    So before the corees to the surface area those people will not try to do anything. The dark humans already got notified because those previous nightmare Monsters got killed by Sam. But even with that they will not try to do something suspicious at this moment and if possible they are already controlling those people to stay very low so that he is unable to discover them.


    Also, Sam is what it is about the base city. That city already be the attraction of many people from differents because of him and there could be a chance that all the people of that City will be affected by this.


    The thing is that many people will be able to find out about the tform present in the boss room and they will try to contact their superior as they would not be able to do anything to that tform.


    This could also be a chance for him to capture some of those superiors and get to know about the location of their main base. Sam and all the other Saints are sure about one thing those people from differents already built their base in Eden Blue.


    Unfortunately, all the Saints were unable to find their base while Sam did not get the time to search for their base. Currently, he just finished a meeting with all the elders of the Warrior Association.


    As the saints are unable to handle the Warrior Association right now those elders are currently handling all of these matters. He told everyone that from now on they should contact all the Warriors who are present inside Base Dungeon.


    Not only that he also told him that if possible try to alert everyone that even if they go inside the Dungeon they should not be careless in any condition. There could be a possibility inside those Dungeons they can meet those people from differents and that will be risky.


    ____________________________


    "Don''t worry, I already observed every elder of the warrior association and I am 100% sure that none of them were affected by the nightmare Monster or they betrayed us.


    Also a few more days and after that I will immediately take action and try to eliminate all the people of the differents who are hiding among us."


    Sam is currently talking with Gloria and Fiona and informs them about the meeting. He not only meets them to allow them but he also meets them to observe everyone.


    During the meeting, he looks at their status one by one and by reading their status he is sure none of them were affected by the nightmare Monster or none of them betrayed Eden Blue.


    During the time the elimination round already started and Sam focused on the match alongside Gloria and Fiona. Thest 3 standing will be the qualifier for the next round. Many people already team up with each other to defeat other people.


    He can also see his friends present in the battle arena and none of them having any problem defeating the other participants. It also looks like those other participants avoiding them or some of them trying to attack them while teaming up.


    ____________________________


    "The unknown factor once again appears in the central city and there could be a possibility that he already knows about the incident at the Base Dungeon.


    There could be a possibility he woulde inside of the Dungeon to capture us so currently we should not go inside of that dungeon. We just need to wait for the right time because the unknown factor would not be able to stay for that long as he also needs to focus on creating those so-called strongholds."


    Currently, one of the superiors from the Zeston already talked to his people and told them to hide them around the dungeon but don''t approach the dungeon right now.


    They already get the information that the unknown factor is already present in the central city and there could be a chance that the unknown factor came there so that he could take the chance toe to the Base city and try to capture the people who are trying to find the truth about his disappearance.


    "Sir it looks like not just our people but there are many other people from differents also hiding around us. There could be a chance that they also want to enter the Dungeon."


    " Hmm¡­ don''t worry about them. As you know before the core did not appear on the surface area nobody would fight. In this situation, nobody wanted to attract the attention of the unknown factor.


    This is also normal for those people also try to find the truth about the unknown factor''s disappearance. But don''t forget our main Motive. We did note to this to find out the truth about that unknown factor''s disappearance.


    We came here to get the core. If there is a chance that those people are somehow able to find the truth and use that to go to a different, then this could be a chance for us to get to the core without any problem."


    Not just people from the Zeston but people from many others also present themselves and all of them wanted to enter the Dungeon to find out the truth. It is just that all were also worried about the unknown factor so they did not immediately take any kind of action.


    During that time naturally, those people are aware of those other people who also have the same motive as them. But in this situation, nobody will try to fight each other. None of them wanted to make those warriors alert about them.


    Unfortunately for them, Sam did not n toe there to catch them. Before anything he ns to finish all the strongholds so that he can immediately take action and capture all the people who are hiding. Only after that, he could use those people to get to know about the main location of their base.


    There could be a chance that if he tried to search for them he would already found out their location but that would take a long time and Sam did not want to waste that much time.


    _____________________________


    Sam currently enjoying the elimination round with his sister. With this, those participants keep fighting against each other and keep eliminating The other participants. Finally, around 10:00 p.m., the elimination round is about to finish.


    Suddenly Sam gets up from his seat and instantly activates the observation technique. That also made Gloria and Fiona serious and they also began to use the observation technique to find out what happened.

 Chapter 760: Chapter 760 - Meteorites

    Sam without saying anything begins to fly in the sky at full speed and within a second he already disappears from that ce. Gloria and Fiona even though did not know what happened they could predict that something serious happened that made Sam that much more serious.


    Read new adventures at m_v-l''e-NovelBin


    Even though they wanted to go with him, they did not think they would be able to follow him. Sam is currently going at his full speed which would be impossible for Gloria and Fiona to match.


    Sam on the other hand just kept flying and sometimeter he almost came out of the Earth. Some time ago, he suddenly felt a dangerous aura. Naturally, he did not think that dangerous aura belonged to any of those people from the other.


    There could be a chance that the prime Dragon alreadyes close to Eden Blue. Because of this, he decided to go toward the direction from where he was able to sense the aura.


    Sometimeter he came to outer space. Normally for any Warrior it ispletely impossible toe to outer space but when any Warrior can reach theary grade it bes possible for that person toe to outer space.


    Instantly he began to feel a peculiar sensation and he is very familiar with that sensation. As you know the restriction force is present on only Eden Blue so the moment he came out of Eden Blue he was already free from the restriction force and was able to recover his full power.


    Westing no time he uses the observation technique in full power. At first, he was not able to notice anything but sometimeter he instantly noticed two Meritorite already falling towards Eden Blue.


    Without wasting a single second he instantly uses the power of the domain and in the next second, he crushes those two meteorites. But the dangerous aura he felt before naturally did not belong to those two meteorites. Those prime Dragons are present in that ce.


    Currently even using his full power he is unable to feel the aura of those dragons. The good thing is that he could still stay in outer space and doesn''t have to breathe. The liquified Spiritual energy also helps him to breathe. It created a barrier around him and inside that barrier the liquified spiritual energy created oxygen.


    ''I am sure that those prime Dragons have alreadye close to our. But it looks like they have some kind of technique that helps them to hide. Are they also waiting for the core to appear on the surface?


    Well, I think this is the possibility that they are waiting for the core to appear on the surface area and only then they would attack our. Most likely they will also get affected by the restriction force.''


    After spending almost 3 hours in that ce he decided to go back to the central city. Sam did not know but he was actually right as those Monsters already reached his but because the restriction force was still present on the they did not approach that.


    Those Monsters have a special technique that helps them teleport and using that skill they already teleport far away from Eden Blue. One of the prime dragons wanted to see if there were any Warriors who had the ability to fight back or not.


    Even though they are Monsters, they have the same intelligence as your normal Warrior. With this they did not want to approach that recklessly.


    Sam on the other hand already came back to the stadium using the teleportation technique. The moment hees to the VIP room he can already see Gloria, and Fiona alongside some other Warriors looking in his direction seriously. All of them get worried as he previously without saying anything just disappears from that ce.


    "Sam, what happened? Why did you suddenly react like this also some time ago everyone suddenly felt a powerful impacting from the sky.


    We almost thought we would get attacked by the people from the other. But fortunately, it looks like they did not do anything so we are just waiting for you."


    Gloria asked him what happened and he reacted like that. For a second she and everyone thought that those people from the other did something that made him serious like this but look like that wasn''t the case.


    First of all, they already prepared themselves to fight back when they suddenly got hit by that powerful impact that came toward them from the sky. Instantly Gloria and the others fly to the sky and use their observation technique but unfortunately they do not find anything.


    "Hmm¡­ don''t worry nothing like that happened. I was able to sense meteoritesing toward our so I reacted like this to destroy them. All of you previously felt the impact because I destroyed those meteorites."


    Sam did not tell them the truth and just told them that he had gone to outer space to destroy two meteorites. Everyone after hearing that bes rxed and they also feel happy that Sam was with them.


    None of them are able to sense anything. So if Sam did not take any kind of action then there could be a possibility arge number of areas could get destroyed.


    __________________________________


    "Boss, what happened, why did we feel the impacting out from the sky? Did someone fight in the sky or something like that happen?"


    "Hmmm¡­ I don''t think the impact came out from the sky because of the fight or anything like that. I already used my full power to observe but I did not find anything like that. I already contacted the spy. They are also unable to provide me with any kind of exnation about this.


    Even though I am very curious to know what happened, we should not act recklessly right now as there could be a chance of those people and that unknown fact being able to find our location.


    Even though I am not worried about them, if they are able to find our location then the war will break out. Before the core came to the surface area I did not expect anything like that to happen."


    Not just only people in the central city but almost everyone in Eden Blue was able to feel the impact. When Sam destroyed those two meteorites, the impact spread everywhere, and because of this everyone was able to feel the impact.


    Many of them already contact their spy and it is impossible. They also try to contact each other to know if any fight broke out or not. But it looked like that wasn''t the case as none of them had any kind of information about a fight.


    On the other hand, Sam already contacted all the saints and told them the same thing that he told his sister and told him not to worry about anything.


    ____________________________


    After the incident, everything became normal for one second and most of the people naturally focused on the elimination round. Sam also already went back to create a stronger hold. They were very close to finishing the stronghold so naturally, he did not want to waste a single second at that time.


    Gloria and Fiona also finally get the time to train. Even though they were requested by the Warrior Association to stay in the stadium when those participantspeted against each other.


    Both of them are very famous among the younger generation so the Warrior Association wanted them to stay in the stadium to motivate all the participants. Almost everyone in Eden Blue knows that both of them have the possibility to break through the S-grade. Both of them have the chance to be the youngest S-grade warrior.


    Hina and Victor all these days did not even go out of their house as most of the time they spent in training. Sam already provides them with a huge resource that he collected from the Terraria. With this, both of them did not have to go out to collect resources.


    During this time many people ask the Warrior Association about the incident that happened some days ago where they suddenly felt the powerful impact. Naturally without hiding anything the Warrior Association provides them with the details.


    When everyone gets to know about the incident and the reason behind it everyone begins to feel Lucky Sam was present in the central city at the time. There could be a chance that he would not be able to notice those two meteorites if he fully focused on creating the stronghold.


    From them, those spies who hide among those people are also able to give that information to their people, and with this people also finally get to know the reason behind that powerful impact.


    It is a good thing that no fight broke out during the day but at the same time all those people from others were able to predict the power level of Sam.

 Chapter 761: Chapter 761 - Two group of people meet eachother

    After the previous incident, it has already been 10 days since Sam left the central city and already came to Rusan city. In these 10 days, he and every saint already created 28 more strongholds and with that, they just needed to create 10 more to finish a stronghold all over the safe zone.


    If you look at John and the other saints then you can easily tell none of them most likely take rest during all these days as just looking at them you can tell they are fully exhausted.


    For all these days they are just resting to recover their mental energy and their spiritual energy. Other than that most of the time they will just spend just creating those strongholds. You can easily see the dark circle under their eyes.


    Sam also has the same condition and from the beginning, he has most of the burden to create a stronger holdpared to any other saints so he is also exhausted the same as those Saints.


    But you can say all of them are very happy right now because if nothing unexpected happened they would be able to finish the remaining stronghold in just 2 days.


    Well as they are very close to finishing creating the strong gold he also told Markus and others to take some rest. Sam also takes some time to rest properly and at this time he also contacts the Warrior Association to get to know about the current situation.


    The Warrior Association told him that the situation waspletely normal as before as nothing unexpected happened during these 10 days. In the central city, thepetition has already advanced to the next part.


    In this second part every participant will fight against each other and from this only four people will get selected for the semi-final from each group and the winners will be selected for the finals. Well, this will take some time as the first year already started thepetition. From today thepetition will start.


    After hanging up the phone Sam also called his family and his sister to know about their situation. His mom told him that she, his dad, and his sister are training inside their house alongside sister Fiona.


    Alexa and others are also present there as his training room is better for them to train. Also, it looks like his sister already decided to go inside of a S-grade dungeon alongside his mom and dad.


    All these days they increase their power so suddenly they just want to know how much they have improvedpared to before and if they have the power to fight against those S-grade monsters.


    Unfortunately Alexa and the others would not be able to follow them inside that Dungeon. But they already n to go to a dungeon whose power limit is early A-grade.


    Well after hearing all of these Sam did not worry about their safety. Even if none of the novels fight against those Monsters who are powerfulpared to them, they would not be in any kind of danger as he already gave them the artifact to protect themselves.


    The defense artifact that he gave them can automatically activate himself to create a spiritual barrier around them. At the same time, they could also activate the barrier by channeling their true spiritual energy. Compared to the artifact that he provided the Warrior Association all these artifacts are more powerful.


    But as you know even though he has those powerful artifacts, his family or any other Warriors should notpletely depend on those artifacts. To protect themselves they needed to depend on their strength.


    Sam told his mother that they should go inside three dayster. If nothing unexpected happens in 2 days he would be able to give them surprising news and if possible he can also tag alongside them inside the Dungeon.


    With this, after talking with his mother for some time he already hung up the phone and then decided to call the Warrior Association as he previously forgot to ask about the situation of Base City.


    If he is not wrong then previously those people from others did not make any kind of memory because they thought he had the n to capture them. Naturally, those people would get the news from their spy that he had already left the central city and had alreadye to this city to create Strongholds.


    Those people will take this chance to go to the Base city. But the question is if any of them would be able to find anything or not. None of them have his inventory option or Origin spiritual energy.


    He did not think that even using true spiritual energy there was a chance to break those stone tforms or those things that protect the teleportation symbol in everyday Dungeons.


    Also, he has an experimental do but before that, he needed to finish the problem of his. Most likely it will take one or two months for the core to appear on the surface. The restriction force already decreased but unfortunately, it still isn''t enough for him to recover his full power.


    Back to the main matter, the Warrior Association already informed him that as he instructed them almost everyone from that city already to the central city and they also told the Warriors of the Warrior Association to go out of the city. Only some of their people stay inside that city but all of them just hide themselves.


    Those people observe the activity around the Dungeon which is the main objective of those people from others. Well, there is a possibility that every one of those people who wanted to find out the true reason behind his disappearance already knew why all the people of the city evacuated that ce but he did not think those people would care about that.


    First of all, those people have advanced stealth techniques that also help them to hide themselves or their power from your normal observation technique of Eden Blue. Even though none of those people have the superior concealment technique, their technique is enough for them to hide from those Warriors.


    Fortunately, it looks like no casualty happened with those Warriors of the Warrior association and there could be a possibility that those people who came inside the Dungeon were already able to find those warriors but none of them decided to do anything.


    Find more chapters on m_v l|e-NovelBin


    One thing Sam issues is that there are many spies even inside the city where he is right now and those people naturally observe his movement from outside of the stronghold.


    Nobody would be able toe inside the stronghold or approach near the stronghold but they could still make sure he is present in the ce by observing the fluctuation that gets created every time when he bes busy preparing those strongholds.


    ______________________________


    Sam''s prediction is right. Many people from the Zeston alreadye inside the Dungeon alongside theirmander and everyone is already present in the Boss room while observing the stone tform in front of them.


    Some of them already decided to attack that tform but unfortunately, none of them were able to do any kind of damage to that thing. This naturally makes the remaining people fully surprised and even themander gets fully surprised.


    The subordinate of themander who attacked the tform is around peak Elite grade, but even with that nothing happened to that tform. Themander instantly signals subordinates to attack that tform together.


    With these, the power of their attack will be increased and they could create more damage. Themander thought with this he would be able to find out the reason behind the unknown factor''s disappearance.


    But at this time themander suddenly told everyone to be silent as he was able to feel the aura of other people who most likely just came inside the Boss room. Those people alsoe toward their direction for the purpose of destroying the tform.


    Themander already attracted the attention of many Warriors from others and thoses also saw their powerful Warriors inside the Dungeon. Who doesn''t want to find out the reason behind the unknown factor''s disappearance?


    Themander instantly signals all of his subordinates to get ready because there could be a chance a fight breaks out between them. Naturally, those people also came inside the Dungeon for the same objective. Nobody knows what those people will do but themander will be ready to fight anytime.


    It did not take that much time for the second group of people toe to the center area of the boss''s room and they also became very startled. They also did not think they would be able to meet those warriors from the Zeston still present inside that Dungeon.


    The second group of Warriors also became ready to attack as nobody knew if those people from Zeston would attack them or not. At this time the leader of both groups advancing toward each other.

 Chapter 762: Chapter 762 - Finally completed

    2 dayster,


    Today Sam, Alena, and everyone finally get the time to rest properly. All of them finally finished thest strongholds and with that, they were able to cover the 100% safe zone.


    All of them are currently resting while activating the stronghold. They need a good rest toe off from that exhausted state.


    Sam, after resting for 6 hours, had already left the city. He went directly toward his house. He needed to give them the good news before they entered the dungeon. It did not take that much time to reach his house and he could already feel the presence of his family alongside sister Fiona.


    Most likely because they will be going inside the Dungeon tomorrow they decided to rest today to give their body the proper rest. This is a good thing because all these days they just continuously put pressure on their body while training, so giving their body that requires rest will help them to increase the strength of their foundation.


    After entering the house he already greeted everyone and then went inside of his room. Before anything he needed to freshen up. After that, he came to the dining room where he could see his mom already preparing food for him.


    If you look at the time it is already 8:00 p.m. so his family also decided to eat alongside him even though they usually eat their dinner around 10:00 p.m.. at this time If you look at the expression of Gloria or the others then you can already see the waiting for Sam''s answer about the stronghold.


    Well, Sam did not want to maintain that suspense, just smiled at them and then confirmed that they were already able to cover 100% of the area of the safe zone. With this, he can finally start his operation but before that, he needs the help of all the saints to find out how many Warriors got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Also, he needed to visit the headquarters of the Warrior Association because there he would be able to find the teleportation system of the Warrior Association. He wanted to modify the teleportation system of the Warrior Association which would immediately teleport every citizen of Eden Blue inside the stronghold.


    But he should not make any kind of mistakes while teleporting those people because he did not want any of the people from differents to also teleport inside the stronghold.


    '' Sigh, I already use most of my gold coin and with this, I am unable to buy the advanced teleportation system from the system shop that would be able to teleport every citizen of Eden Blue without making any kind of mistakes.


    Sigh, I can only modify the teleportation system of the Warrior Association. But before that, I also need to study the teleportation system of the Warrior Association.'' Discover hidden stories at m,v l''e-NovelBin


    Sam did not know about the teleportation system present in the Warrior Association. 3 years ago that teleportation system was just in the basic phase so he did not have that much interest in that time but after returning to his he did not even get the time to visit the headquarters.


    Fortunately, he has the time right now so he is going to use that to modify the teleportation system if it is required to be modified and also he needs to start his operation as quickly as he can.


    "So are you going to start your operation tomorrow? Because we will be going inside the Dungeon so I don''t think we would be able to go inside the stronghold."


    While Sam was thinking about the teleportation system Fiona suddenly asked that question to him.


    "No, before starting my operation I also have some important work to do, and to do that I also need the help of our saints. Well, you can take the time to go inside the Dungeon but if it is possible thene out of the Dungeon within 10 days because I think within 10 days I would be able to solve everything and from then I would be able to start my operation."


    Sam doesn''t even know how long it will take him to modify the teleportation system but he already at least it will take him 10 days. So he told them toe out of the Dungeon within 10 days.


    Not just his family he also has to inform the Warrior Association so that they inform everybody as to who went inside the Dungeon toe outside of the dungeon within 10 days.


    There is a problem. If the Warrior Association suddenly told everyone toe out of the Dungeon like this then it would make those people from the other very suspicious. Fortunately, he came up with a n and he is going to inform the warrior association to say that thing to every Warrior.


    "Don''t worry, as you know this term we are going inside the supreme Dungeon. We went inside the Dungeon to see how much we have progressed these days as you know normal Monsters suddenly did not pose any kind of threat towards us."


    Gloria said that to assure him that they woulde out of the Dungeon within 10 days. She told him the truth because even for their parents those peak A-grade monsters did not pose any kind of threat. A monster who uses true spiritual energy ispletely differentpared to a monster who uses normal spiritual energy.


    Unfortunately, Sam won''t be able to bring them to the Terraria where they would be able to check the limit against powerful Monsters. He also thinks this will be a good thing for them to test their limit against those S-grade monsters.


    At this time Sam also asks them about their training and if they face any kind of problem during the time or not. Both his parents tell him that they are already able to control 50% of their spiritual energy without any problem. They also practice those techniques that he provides them.


    They have some problems understanding those techniques so Sam instantly begins to solve their problem so that they can fully understand. Gloria and Fiona also share their doubts about their Techniques.


    Sometimeter Gloria also began to tell him about the current situation. Because she and Fiona wanted to focus on training they stopped going to the stadium but they were still getting information about the surrounding area.


    Fortunately, nothing suspicious happened during the days and the second stage of thepetition already started. Well, the good thing is that currently Gloria and Fiona don''t have to go to the stadium because all the Saints will be able to attend the stadium.


    Sometimeter Sam went back to his room. He did not contact the Warrior Association or the Saints because he decided to contact them tomorrow. Suddenly he has something important to do.


    You will be looking at the system shop to see if he could find the required resources to modify the teleportation system with the money that he has currently. From the moment he came back to his he just kept spending all the money to help his so in the end he only had 10k gold coins left in his system shop.


    Before anything you should know inside the system shop everything is very costly so he did not know if he would be able to afford anything within that money or not. Fortunately, he is lucky today because sometimeter he Finally finds a manual about the teleportation system or you can say teleportation array.


    That is an advanced teleportation array manual. Fortunately, he knows the teleportation array and because of this it only takes him 3 hours to finally understand the manual properly.


    Before anything he needed to understand the teleportation array that is present in the Warrior Association. Naturally, it would not be that advance so he needed to modify that to make it an advanced teleportation system.


    The Warrior Association is able to modify the previous teleportation system aftering back from Earth where they get some knowledge about their teleportation system.


    ______________________________________


    Alena and the others also finally came back to their house and today they will also go to the headquarters of the Warrior Association because Sam told them to go to present there as he has some important things to tell them.


    The good thing is that currently, nobody reveals the news that they are already able to cover the 100% area of the safe zone. There could be a possibility that if those people from others get to know about this, then they will try to do something to harm the citizens of Eden Blue.


    This is a good decision. Because 10 dayster he already decided that he would be telling every Warrior to stay outside of the dungeon because the Warrior Association had some important information to tell everyone.

 Chapter 763: Chapter 763 - Observing the teleportation array

    The next day,


    Sam had alreadye to the headquarters and he was already observing the teleportation system of the Warrior Association. As he expected the teleportation system is a teleportation array.


    To use the teleportation system you first need to register your spiritual energy with the teleportation system and after that using the teleportation system you can tell about anywhere.


    Suppose you are far away from that ce and want to use the teleportation system then you need some people who will be sending the spiritual energy into the teleportation system and will help you to teleport.


    Unfortunately, the teleportation array is a basic array. Even though the Warrior Association already modified the array, it still did not reach the advanced grade. Now with the help of the manual he already understands how to modify the teleportation array.


    As you know he wanted to use the teleportation array to use that to teleport every human of Eden Blue inside the stronghold. To do that he first needed to observe The Spiritual energy of every human of Eden blue.


    The good thing is that even though those people from others have normal spiritual energy the spiritual aura ispletely different from the humans of Eden Blue. So he needed to register the right spiritual aura of every human of Eden Blue.


    Well, he also needed to register The Spiritual energy of his family but they already go inside the Dungeon so he will do that after theye back from the Dungeon.


    The teleportation array was created with 5plicated arrays and Sam observed them one by one and all redetect detected the faults of those arrays. He takes note of those faults as he is going to modify those arrays based on that.


    Alena and the others also already came to the headquarters but they suddenly met with all the elders of the warrior association to get to know about the current situation of their. Sam told them he would need some time to observe the teleportation array.


    Sometimeter, Sam already decided how to modify theplete teleportation array which would immediately help teleport every human of Eden Blue inside the stronghold. Also, one more thing he also needed to register the spiritual energy of the stronghold.


    So that even if the strong hold gets activated those people could teleport inside the strong hold without any problem. After when those strongholds will get activated nobody would be able to enter the stronghold until they did not get permission.


    Even if someone tried to use the teleportation technique or anything like that they would not be able to go inside the stronghold.


    _________________________


    Alena and the others were also just able to leave the room toe to the room where Sam was observing a teleportation array. But Sam has alreadye to the meeting room. He did not start modifying the system because before that he wanted to talk with the Saints.


    "As I told you earlier after finishing creating the stronghold I wanted to take action so that we can easily find out how many spies we have among us. But to do that we needed to teleport all of our people inside the stronghold so that they would not face any kind of problem.


    Because of this, I also instructed the Warrior Association to inform every Warrior that they would need to stay outside of the Dungeon 9 dayster. 9 dayster the Warrior Association had some important information to reveal so they would need to stay outside of the Dungeon.


    Now back to the main matter, most likely all of you wanted to know how we will teleport everyone inside the stronghold. Because of this, I decided to observe the teleportation system and I already know how to modify the teleportation system which would help us teleport our people inside the stronghold.


    Just after doing that immediately all of us need to take action to capture those people who are hiding among us. Some of those people also have the same power limit as you but don''t worry I am also present here and I would capture those people.


    There could be a possibility their main force also came out of their hiding ce to attract us. But none of us worried about that. If I am not wrong then those people will note out from their hiding ce because they did not want to lose their force before the core appeared on the surface area.


    There is also a possibility that those people who hid themselves among our people did not know anything about their base location.


    As you know previously I captured some of their spies but unfortunately, I did not get to know about the information about their base. But at least with this, we would be able to capture those people who are hiding them among us.


    But before that, we also have one more important thing to do. I already told you about the nightmare Monster so we also needed to take action about this. We did not know how many people got affected by those Monsters so there could be a chance that when we send them inside the stronghold those dark humans immediately gain control over those humans to attack other people.


    We also need to solve that problem. But everything would be easy when we were able topletely modify the teleportation system because I already n to deal with these two matters after modifying the teleportation system.


    If possible we would try to deal with every spy from another. After that, we will immediately go inside the stronghold and observe every human one by one to know if they got affected by the nightmare Monsters or not.


    Unfortunately without using the mind control technique, we would not be able to find out about those Monsters. This is the reason I told him we needed to deal with this matter very carefully. During that time all the Warriors of the Warrior Association needed to stay active because they needed it to prevent those people from doing anything.


    Also, one more thing I need to tell you that before doing all of these we need to check every warrior of our Warrior Association. Because I did not know how many of our people got affected by those nightmare Monsters or if there were any Warrior who betrayed us or not


    If I wanted to do that alone then it would naturally take me much time so I want all of you to do that during the time when I will be modifying the teleportation array.


    Don''t worry, to modify the teleportation I will not require your help as the array isn''t thatplicated like the array of our stronghold. I don''t want to get distracted at this moment so you need to make sure nothing happens."


    Sometimeter, Sam already started the meeting, and one by one he began to exin his n. Everyone present there heard about his n with interest as he also wanted to know what n he had in his mind.


    After hearing his n everyone also agreed with that but at the same time, they became very worried about the safety of their people. Evenpared to those people from others they needed to worry about their people who most likely got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Sometimeter one by one they leave the meeting room and Sam directly begins to go toward the teleportation system room. Alena is going with him. She will be in charge of protecting the room and preventing anyone from entering the room to disturb some.


    Markus and the others at this time will immediately check every warrior present in the headquarters one by one. But they also needed to make sure that none of them made those Warriors alert as if there were some Warriors who got affected by the nightmare Monster or betrayed them, then they would immediately try to escape or die to bring trouble for them.


    Markus fortunately already has a n to deal with this and at the same time, he told Sam that he can fully focus on modifying the teleportation array.


    _________________________________


    "All of us will be checking all of your progress. So I told everyone toe to the auditorium room as we will be checking their progress one by one. As we did not have that much time to check your progress throughbat we will be checking using our observation technique."


    Markus already informs every warrior of the headquarters that they need toe to the auditorium hall as he is going to check every one of their progress by using the observation technique.


    In this way, nobody will get suspicious about that. Because this is not real that someone would check the improvement of other Warriors by using the observation technique like this. Using the observation technique they can check how much spiritual energy that person has and how much improvement that person has madepared to before.

 Chapter 764: Chapter 764 - Modifying the Teleportation array

    Sam has already begun to modify the teleportation array. That teleportation array currently has five different arrays. Sam started modifying the first which is the array to select location.


    Unfortunately, even aftering back from the Earth, the Warriors upgraded that array but it still did not have the ability to reach all over Eden Blue. The range of that array is limited.


    Sam is currently modifying that array as he will be increasing the range of that array to the whole Eden blue. Not only that, the mandatory teleportation range would be the stronghold. He registered in every one of those ces where you can say those strongholds are present.


    All this time he is fully focused on modifying the symbol that hepletely forgot about time and he is spiritual energy. This is also a side effect of his focus but fortunately this time he did not need to use that much spiritual energy to modify the first array.


    Before modifying the second array he wanted to recover The lost energy. Even though those are not your advanced array who could give you the guarantee that you would only need a small amount of spiritual energy to modify them?


    There could be a possibility that he would need to use 100% of his spiritual energy to modify them. Because of this, he likes to stay prepared for all kinds of situations.


    Alena is unable to tell what is happening but she can already feel a powerful energy fluctuation. That fluctuation appears when Sam begins to modify the teleportation array but suddenly it disappears.


    Currently, she can see Sam begin to take rest to recover thest energy so she came to him and asked about his situation. During the time when she also focused on creating the Stronghold, She naturally faced the situation where she could be unconscious because she was very close to losing All her spiritual energy.


    So she immediately helps Sam if a situation like this appears. But after hearing her questions he just smiled at her and told her that everything was okay and he already sessfully modified the first array. He is going to give her the details afterpletely modifying the teleportation.


    Alena also knew Sam would tell her about the detailster so she did not ask anything and let him focus on the manual. Sam once again brings out the manual from the inventory to look at the second array.


    In the manual, he can see many methods to create the second array but he wanted to use the best method which would be useful right now to modify that second array. Fortunately, after searching for some time he already found the correct method.


    The second array is the array that has the ability to carry living beings. Without this array, nobody would be able to teleport. Even if the teleportation portal is working, nobody would be able to teleport anywhere.


    Now as this is not your advanced array this teleportation array has a limitation. At once only a limited number of people could teleport from one ce to another ce.


    When the number of people crosses the limit of that array the teleportation array will not work. Also from the moment the number of people starts to reach the limit all the people will feel the side effects of the teleportation array.


    Suppose the limit of that teleportation array is 10 people. From the moment 9 people or 10 people would try to use the teleportation array at once they would feel the side effect. After teleporting everyone felt very dizzy.


    Naturally, Sam needed to modify that array to increase the limit of the living being and also he needed to take care of the side effects. There could be a chance that all the saints also needed to use the teleportation array so definitely at that moment they cannot get affected by the teleportation array where they lost the ability to fight.


    You already started modifying the second array. During the time he also needed to make sure that nothing happened to the connection between the first array and the second array or the second array with the third array. The connection is the main thing that connected all those arrays at once and created the teleportation array.


    Now Sam first focuses on increasing the limit of living beings. Nowpared to before this is hard and to modify this array he also needed to use almost 40% of his spiritual energy.


    As you know he wanted to teleport every living being of Eden Blue at once. To achieve that he needed to increase the limit of the teleportation array so that every one of them could easily teleport inside the Strongholds without any problem.


    Alena who was present there instantly became worried as she could already feel the strong spiritual fluctuation that appeared in that ce. The Power of The Spiritual fluctuation is much more powerfulpared to before and she can easily predict that this time Sam is using much more spiritual energy.


    But she did not take any kind of action because she could already see Sam was not showing any kind of difort even in that situation. So everything is under his control. Find exclusive stories on m_v l|e-NovelBin


    Now Sam on the other hand finally able to increase the limit of the living being but at the same time he needs to modify that part of the array which can create side effects. It would be impossible topletely erase the side effect but fortunately, he can decrease the effect of the side effect.


    So naturally he going to decrease that to the minimum level where everyone would have no problem even if they got affected by the side effects. Impossible they would only feel dizzy for a second but after that they would recover.


    ________________________________________


    "Well, the first array rted to the range of the teleportation array and I already modified that teleportation range so that we can easily teleport anywhere on our.


    The second array is rted to the limit of living beings that can use the teleportation system at once. I already increased the limit so that every one of our humans can easily use the teleportation system at once.


    Previously if the number of people reached the limit when they used the teleportation system then they would get affected by a side effect. Unfortunately, I am also unable to erase that side effect.


    But I already decreased the effect to the minimum level and currently even if a normal person gets affected by the side effect they would only feel dizzy for 1 minute and after that, that person would recover.


    Unfortunately to modify the second array I almost needed to use 50% of my speech well energy so I decided to take some rest before modifying the next array. I already observe the next array and the next array also is a vital array.


    The next array is rted to detection ability. With this array, we can detect the living being and the non-living thing. Without this, we won''t be able to detect the difference between a human and a rock.


    Also after modifying this, I started registering the spiritual aura of our people. This is the array that helps us to teleport anyone by registering their spiritual energy.


    The fourth array is rted to the control. Without this array, we won''t be able to control the teleportation array as it will work on its own. Currently, this teleportal system would not be able to support the whole system if we tried to teleport every living being inside the stronghold. Because of this, we need to upgrade this so that we will not face any kind of problem during this time.


    Now came to thest which you can see is the most vital array. This array is the energy consumption array. Naturally, I need to upgrade that because currently, that array would not be able to support the whole system.


    Now you can notice thest one called the connection array. This array connected all these five arrays and created the teleportation array."


    After modifying the second array Sam decided to rest to recover The lost 50% spiritual energy. It alsoes with the unexpected for him that he will lose that much spiritual energy during that time.


    At this time he decided to exin the details about those arrays to his teacher. Alena did not know anything about those array but after knowing all of this she bes surprised. She also understood that if Sam wanted to support his idea then she naturally needed to upgrade the array.


    With its current capability, the array would not be able to support the n of Sam. First of all, it has a limited range, currently, the teleportation array only be able to teleport a limited number of people, if they try to increase the number then the teleportation array will not work.


    Other than that there could be malfunction during the time when they would try to connect with the stronghold.

 Chapter 765: Chapter 765 - The Third array

    Sam after finishing exining about the teleportation array already begins to focus on recovering The Spiritual energy. On the other hand, Alena processed all the information that Sam gave to her.


    It is incredible that the teleportation array contains all of this array and without any of them the teleportation array would be useless. Also, she gets to understand why Sam wanted to modify the teleportation array.


    Currently, the teleportation array did not have the range that could cover the whole Eden Blue. Sam already modified that part of the array to increase the range of the teleportation array.


    The teleportation array can also only teleport a limited number of people which won''t be helpful in Sam''s n. Because of this, Sam decided to modify that part of the array. Also, it is good that Sam already modified the part of the array which also creates side effects.


    If he did not modify that part of the array then there could be a possibility all the people who use the teleportation system could get affected by that. After getting affected by the side effect they would lose their ability to fight back.


    Now recovering The Spiritual energy. Well nobody could give him the guarantee that to modify the next array he doesn''t need that much spiritual energy. So before anything Sam wanted to make sure he was fully prepared for any kind of situation.


    When Sam and Alena are present in the teleportation system room, Markus and all the other saints have already called all the Warriors who are currently present in the headquarters to meet them.


    Unfortunately, they cannot call all the Warriors into the headquarters because that would immediately decrease the power of their defense and there could be a chance those people from others take the chance to create trouble.


    Naturally every warrior who came to the meeting room was surprised about this currency situation. Every one of them thought that all the saints had some important information to tell them and because of this, they called all of them into the meeting room.


    They are currently waiting for Markus and the others. While Markus and the others are currently preparing themselves to check all those Warriors present in the headquarters one by one. They need to do that without alerting anyone.


    Enjoy more content from m-v l''e|-NovelBin


    Markus decided to go back to the meeting room while the remaining 9 Saints were present in 9 different interrogation rooms. Markus needs it to send 9 people inside of those rooms. Also, the good thing is that he already came up with the speech that he is going to give all the Warriors which will not make them suspicious about this matter.


    "It is good to see all of you working so hard. I know that our is currently facing a serious situation but we cannot fear that. If our Warrior Association gave up fighting at this time then almost all the Warriors would lose their motivation and determination to fight.


    We need to stay strong in this situation. Also, I think Sam already informed you but I still want to say that 9 dayster, me and all the Saints wanted to share the good news with every warrior.


    Now the reason why I call everyone here is that I wanted to check all of your progress. After Sam gave us all those resources I did not get to see how much all of you progressed so today me and my teammates finally got the time to check all of your progress.


    Unfortunately, we did not have the time to check your improvement through sparring matches. That would take some time. Because of this all of us decided to check all of your improvement by using our observation technique.


    As most of you already know about these, wasting no time, all of you should create 9 lines. Except Me and Alena, all the other sayings waiting for you in different interrogation rooms where they will check your improvement.


    After this we will also get to know how much you have improved and if you need any kind of help or not. Before the war I wanted every one of you to stay prepared to face any kind of situation and if it is possible you also need to participate in the main war."


    Markus finally finishes his speech and every Warriors present in the meeting room begins to p. Every one of them finally understood why they got called into the meeting room. The saints wanted to check how much they had improved these days.


    It is true that they did not have that much time to waste as they also needed it to go back to the duty so the methods that the Saints are going to use to check their improvement is a shortcut. Even though using that you cannot get the full details about the improvement of anyone, but for now that will be enough.


    After that, one by one day we can create 9 lines and one by one those warriors begin to stand in those lines. Markus finally told the first 9 Warriors to go toward those rooms.


    John and others finally get to see those line Warriors who came to their room so wasting no time they begin to check them. To make everything real the Saints started checking through their grades. With these, they also get the idea of how much they have improved inparison to before.


    You like this they also get the chance to use the mind control technique to invade inside their mind. After that, they begin to go deep inside the mind of the Warriors and sometimeter they reach the core area of the mind. There everyone of them can see those memory fragments but fortunately, they did not see any nightmare Monster.


    So they confirmed that those 9 Warriors did not get affected by the Nightmare Monsters.


    _______________________________


    Sam did not know what was happening outside his room but he had already recovered his full energy and once again went in front of the teleportation system to start modifying the next array.


    Once again selected the method to modify the third array. Using this array you can detect the difference between a human and a non-human or other thing. Without modifying this array the teleportation system would not be able to detect the difference between the local people of the Eden blue and the people from others.


    This is also a very important array and Sam already predicted that to modify these he also needs to use a huge amount of spiritual energy. Naturally, he wanted to teleport every local person of Eden Blue inside the stronghold using the teleportation system.


    To achieve this he needed to modify that array and also after that he needed to register the spiritual aura of every one of those people. The good thing is that after modifying there would be an option where he would be able to register the order of the local people of Eden Blue.


    As you know every local people of Eden Blue has a simr type of spiritual energy. To find that simrity to register into the teleportation array and after, he also needed to register his spiritual energy alongside his family and teacher who also uses true spiritual energy.


    Sam finally entered the focus trade and after that, he was already erasing the previous array. Well, he wanted to create that array from the first because the current array is full of mistakes and he cannot modify it using the previous array.


    Erasing any array is not that hard but at the same time, you need to use the correct method so that you do not affect the other arrays. It took him some time but finally 10 minutester he was able to erase the previous array.


    After that, he finally began to create the third array from the star. Sam already begins to channel his spiritual energy inside the speed brush. After that, he already started creating the array.


    Alena maintained the distance from that ce already and we began to feel the powerful fluctuation that once again appeared in that ce. One thing she was sure of was thatpared to before this spiritual fluctuation became much stronger.


    She just home nothing happened to Sam also she is ready to use her spiritual energy if Sam needs her help. The Spiritual energy of Sam consumed rapidly during the time but he did not care about that matter as he fully focused on creating the third array.


    To create the third array from the beginning Sam needed almost 3 hours. This time he is very close to losing all of his spiritual energy but fortunately, before all of his spiritual energy is consumed he is able to finish the array and justy down on the ground.


    This time he almost uses 75% to 80% of his spiritual energy to create that array. Even though the final process where he needed to register The Spiritual aura all the local people of Eden Blue still did not finish but he could do thatter.

 Chapter 766: Chapter 766 - Affected warrior

    Without disturbing Sam and Alena, John and the others observe all the Warriors one by one. Fortunately, until now, they did not find anyone affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    But still, none of them became rxed because of the guarantee that there were no warriors who were affected by the nightmare monster. Because of this, even though they almost observed 70% of those Warriors who were currently present in the Warrior Association, they still needed to observe the remaining 30% very carefully.


    Sam already told him how to deal with those nightmare Monsters if they found anyone affected by them. Also, be sure to collect the memory crystal after killing the nightmare Monsters as that would help them to get the memory of that Monsters.


    All this time everybody can feel the powerful spiritual fluctuation that is most likelying out from the teleportation room but Markus already told him none of them have to worry about that. Sam is currently working in the room so it ismon that Spiritual fluctuation would appear.


    Well, they did not tell every Warrior that Sam is currently modifying the teleportation array. They just inform everyone that the teleportation array has some problem and Sam is fixing that problem.


    Markus even wanted to help all the other saints observe those warriors, but he also needed to stay outside to maintain order among those Warriors. He also observed all of them from the start as he wanted to find out if any of them had any kind of suspicious movement or not.


    Sam, on the other hand, already finished modifying the third array and is currently resting to get back his spiritual energy. He just hopes while he will be modifying the next he does not get that much exhausted. The good thing is that the third array ispleted and he just needs to register The Spiritual aura of all the people of Eden Blue.


    That would be a vital process but he can worry about thatter as currently he needs to focus on modifying the remaining two arrays. Thest array Which connected all those is easy to modifypared to those other arrays. So Sam is not worried about that.


    The good thing is that he just needs to register The Spiritual energy of one person who uses ordinary spiritual energy and belongs to Eden Blue. With this, the third array can automatically recognize everyone who has the same spiritual energy.


    Sam is currently looking at the manual to modify the next array which is rted to the control over the teleportation system. Without modifying this array he won''t be able to teleport those many people inside the stronghold at once.


    If he puts more burden on the teleportation system then it will go out of control and nobody will have any control over the teleportation system. Without proper control, you won''t be able to teleport to your selected location.


    Well, he doesn''t have to erase that array to start from the beginning. So he doesn''t have to use that much spiritual energy that he used previously to modify the third array. Around 1 hourter after recovering his full spiritual energy, Sam came in front of the teleportation array and then entered the focus state.


    Once again after challenging The Spiritual energy into the spirit brush he began to erase those parts that needed to be modified. Once again a spiritual fluctuation was created. Compared to before, the spiritual fluctuation is not that powerful.


    _______________________________


    In which room Saint Mira observed those Warriors, something serious happened that made her serious. All this time she was unable to find any of those people who got affected by the nightmare Monster.


    She and all the other saints are very close to finishing their observation but something unexpected happens. The person who came this time has some problem inside his mind as you can predict he has already been affected by the nightmare monster.


    Without wasting a single second she already sends the consciousness inside the mind of the warrior. During that time the person is already asleep. So Saint Mira did not have any problem invading his mind.


    She keeps approaching the core area of the mind where she would be able to see the nightmare Monster that has full control over that Warrior. Currently, the nightmare Monster is in an inactive State, because of this, the warrior has full control over his full body when that Monster is activated The Monster will control that person.


    A worm-like Monster is present in that ce and you can see many tentaclesing out from that Monster which is connected to the brain of the person. Mira will not use any kind of technique that could create much destruction because this would destroy the mind of that person.


    Fortunately, she is very good at mental attacks so wasting no time she quickly began to use the telepathy technique to get full control over that monster. Not only that, she creates many des using the mind''s energy.


    Because of the telepathy technique, The Monster is unable to move his body or do anything while those des begin to cut those tentacles one by one. She first destroys the connection between that Monster and the mind of the person.


    It takes her 1 minute to do that and finally, she can directly attack those Monsters without affecting the mind of the person. If she tries to directly kill that Monster then it would also affect the mind of that person and it could get seriously damaged.


    He once again created those mind des attacking that monster with them. Fortunately, even though that Monster is a dark spiritual Monster the power of that Monster is only around B-grade. So, Mira did not have that much problem killing that monster in just 1 minute. Continue reading at m|v-l''e -NovelBin


    Finally, 1 minuteter she can see the body of that Monster begin to fade away. But she did not leave the mind of the person as she waited for the memory crystal. It takes some time for that Monster to fade away from that ce and the memory crystal to appear on that.


    After grabbing that memory crystal she finally began toe out of the mind of that person. Surprisingly when she came out of the mind she still had that memory crystal. Sam already told everyone after when he killed the nightmare Monster the person who got affected by the nightmare Monster would not be able to remember anything.


    Naturally, the warrior in front of her will also forget everything so she already prepared what to say to him. Sometimeter the person finally regains his consciousness and he bes fully confused because he is unable to remember why he is present in that ce.


    Mira exined to her that he came to that ce to check whether he had any problem with him or not but fortunately, he did not have any problem. He overused his mental energy and because of this, his mind received some damage.


    One thing Mira is sure of is that the person did not betray them. She also looks at the memory of the person and with that, she can be sure about this. She told Warrior to go to the Restroom.


    ''I should inform everyone about this.''


    This is a pretty serious matter and she naturally needed to inform everyone. So wasting no time she begins to contact everyone by using her mental power. Sometimeter everyone gets connected to the mind link and then she begins to exin what happened.


    Except for that Warrior, until now other Warriors appear in that ce who got affected by the nightmare monster. Also, Markus from the start observed those people and until now he did not notice any kind of suspicious moment from anyone.


    But the important thing is that they already found a person who got affected by the nightmare Monster and that person belongs to the Warrior Association. So there is a chance that many other Warriors also have the same situation.


    Sam did not know anything about this. But he is also very curious to know the result of the observation. By knowing this important information Sam could decide what to do.


    Sam already finished the 4th array and once again he rests to recover The lost spiritual energy. Alena is currently telling him what happened. Previously she also got contacted by Saint Mira about the person who got affected by the nightmare monster


    Sam instantly got serious after hearing that but fortunately, Saint Mira already takes care of this matter and with that, he doesn''t have to worry about anything. Also, he wanted to know what kind of information Mira would get after absorbing the memory crystal.


    Well, there could be a chance that they will get to know about all the other Warriors who got affected by the nightmare monster. At the same time, it would be very helpful if they were able to find the location of the people.

 Chapter 767: Chapter 767 - 10 affected people

    John and the others naturally became serious after getting the information from Mira. At first, they really cannot believe that the warriors of the Warrior Association will get affected by those nightmare Monsters but it looks like they already get affected by those nightmare Monsters.


    Well, there is a possibility that even though those Warriors have high mental power, what if those dark humans decided to attack them using the mental attack and those nightmare Monsters using the chance decided to affect them and came inside of their mind?


    This is the possible case anybody could think of right now. First of all, you should know that not everyone can join the Warrior Association. Even if any Warrior after graduating from the Warrior Academy decided to join the Warrior Association then they would go through some hard training.


    Now even though only 10% of people remain in that ce who needed to get checked by them, after the previous incident none of the Saints became rxed. They seriously observed those warriors.


    Mira on the other hand already put the memory crystal inside her student as the next person alreadyes inside the room so she would need to check that person.


    Like this already 20 minutester when only a small group of people were left in that ce once again a person who had been affected by the nightmare Monster was discovered by Saint John.


    Saint Markus made sure none of those people left that ce. There could be a possibility that those dark humans after realizing that those nightmare Monsters getting killed will try to control the remaining people who also get affected by the nightmare Monster to leave that ce.


    But he is present there to prevent anything like that from happening. Also, only 10 people remained in the ce who needed to get checked by them. Now 9 people have already entered the notification room and only one person remains.


    Markus decided to check that person on his own and with that everything will be solved. Markus fortunately did not find anything inside the mind of that Warrior so the person is fully okay. After praising him because of the improvement, he told him to go back to his work.


    Sometimeter, those nine people also came out from the interrogation room and they also went back to their work. Now finally they could say everyone present in the Warrior Association is not affected by the nightmare Monster or none of them betray them. With this, they can trust those people.


    Mira and the others also came out from the integration room and everyone went toward the meeting room. Inside the meeting room, they begin to discuss how many people they have found who were affected by the nightmare monster. In the end, 10 people were affected by the nightmare Monster and they already collected the memory crystal from them.


    They just needed to look at the memory crystal to see if they would be able to find the identity of other Warriors who also have the same situation as them. Also if it is possible then they needed to know the location of those dark humans so that they could capture those dark humans.


    "Sigh, it is unbelievable that our people get affected like this. But as previously sent told us there could be a possibility that those dark humans before sending those nightmare monsters decided to attack our Warriors with their mental attacks to weaken their mental defense.


    Well, we need to give Sam all of this information but unfortunately, he is still focusing on modifying the teleportation system. The good news is that he is very close to finishing modifying that and after that we would immediately be able to start our operation."


    " Well, I am just thinking, what if those dark humans decided to attack more people after today''s incident?"


    " Hmm¡­ I think they will not do that because they already know that Sam would be able to find them. Also before the core did not appear on the surface area none of them would try to show up.


    Every one of them came to our to get the core so definitely they were going to wait until the core did not appear on the surface area.


    But still, there could be a possibility they will sneakily attack our Warriors so we need to make sure everybody stays very careful and does not go to any ce alone. Even though we have confidence in our Warriors, those dark humans can team up against our Warriors to make them get affected by the nightmare Monsters."


    " I am also thinking the same thing. It looks like we still need to talk to everybody but at the same time mind ister we need to prepare ourselves because we would be using our full power to find the identity of those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    During this time, we fully need to focus on that while Sam would be focused on dealing with those people from others."


    "Well, I just hope everything goes ording to n because I did not want any unexpected situation to appear at this time. Also, I think every one of you remembers that previously Sam told us those people from the other were not the real danger but the real danger still did note to our.


    In this situation, Sam carries most of the burden. We cannot go on like this as we also need to support him. We need to prepare ourselves to face the situation. During the time when everybody will teleport inside the stronghold, we will immediately start our operation and will try to finish as quickly as we can.


    But at this time we also needed warriors to help us. To do this we also need to search all of our Warriors. We only search those Warriors who are currently present in the headquarters but still need to search those other Warriors of the Warrior Association."


    All the Saints are currently discussing what to do. Well, one thing is that they feel very helpless as Sam carries most of the burden. Because of this they also wanted to help him in the situation.


    Sam already told him to take care of those people after going inside the stronghold. They need to find out how many people were affected by those nightmare Monsters but only after going inside the stronghold, they would be able to search those people at once. Before that, they also needed loyal people who did not betray them or were not affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Instantly all of them decided that they would be visiting various branches of the warrior association and at the same time those Warriors who were currently appointed to guard the safe zone would be checked by them. They will do thatter because before that they wanted to check every 4 years in those branches of the warrior association.


    ______________________________


    Sam did not know any of these but he already finished the 4th array. He once again started to study how to modify thest array. Thisst is the energy consumption array. Without modifying this he would not be able to activate the teleportation array even using high spirit stones.


    But the more powerful the teleportation array would be. So he is currently increasing the amount of the required spiritual energy. But there could be a problem because not everybody would be able to use the teleportation system.


    Fortunately, Sam already took care of that matter as he already decided to use the spirit stone to recharge the teleportation array but at the same time, one person who will be activating the teleportation array would need to use some of his spiritual energy.


    Sometimeter, Sam recovered The Spiritual energy and after that, he began to modify the next array. Now this is also very hard, the same as the third array. The good thing is that he doesn''t have to erase that to start from the beginning so he would not be required to use his full spiritual energy.


    The powerful spiritual fluctuation appeared once again and his teacher became worried about him. From 15 hours focusing on the teleportation array without resting. All this time she did not do anything because she waspletely helpless.


    She was already ready to channel additional spiritual energy but Sam already told her that he would not require additional spiritual energy. Even though she wanted to help her student, her student did not need her help.


    This time she bes bored once again because the energy fluctuation is simr when Sam modifies the third array. Sam already told her the importance of all those arrays. So after feeling the spiritual fluctuation she did not get surprised. Same as the third array thest array is also very important and these will also require a huge amount of spiritual energy to get modified.


    You can say this is the power source of the teleportation system so naturally if the power system is notpleted the teleportation system would not work. Other hand, thest array would be the connected wire that would connect all those arrays.

 Chapter 768: Chapter 768 - Inside the S-grade dungeon

    Markus and the others are also present in the Teleportation system room. Sam already finished modifying the whole teleportation system and called everyone to introduce them to the new teleportation system.


    Previously, Leon, David, and Marry were the ones who modified the teleportation system. But they did not know about this new teleportation system and even after observing the new teleportation system, they were unable to find out the features of this new teleportation system.


    It is natural for them not to understand because Sam uses the advanced method that he gets from the system. Sam gives them some time to observe the teleportation system while he is recovering The lost energy.


    Sometimeter, he finally began to exin about the new teleportation system and he also told them that currently he needed to register the Spiritual energy of the Warriors of the Eden Blue.


    Well, he doesn''t have to register The Spiritual energy of every Warrior as he could just register the spiritual energy of one person, and automatically all the person who has simr spiritual energy will be able to use the teleportation system.


    But at the same time, Sam is thinking about bringing a person who has very low spiritual energy and also does not have the talent to be a warrior. In one word he also wanted to bring a normal person inside that room to register The Spiritual energy.


    All the saints also needed to register their spiritual energy. Wellpared to those normal people naturally after bing an S-grade Warrior anybody will have different spiritual energy so he also needs to register The Spiritual energy of the saints.


    Alena also needs to register her spiritual energy as she has apletely different spiritual energy. On the other hand, he already called Alexa. She also has different spiritual energy so naturally, she also registered that.


    After knowing about all the new features of the teleportation system, everyone was very surprised because they did not think that the range of the teleportation system would be able to cover the whole Eden blue.


    Every human of the Eden Blue would be able to use the teleportation system at once without any problem and with these teleporting them inside the strongholds would not be a problem.


    Sometimeter,


    Markus and Alena already register both of their spiritual energies. With that, every Saint can use the teleportation system without any problem. Markus already called one of his Warriors to register The Spiritual energy.


    John went outside of the Warrior Association as he needed to bring normal people inside the headquarters and he will be picking up Alexa. Sam already told her to get ready.


    Finally with this Sam could rx. With this, there will be no problem teleporting every Warrior or you can say every human of the Eden Blue inside the strongholds. If possible he wanted to use the teleportation system right now but he also needed to wait. Many warriors are currently present inside the Dungeon and they would being out of the Dungeon before the announcement day. Enjoy exclusive chapters from m-v l''e|-NovelBin


    If possible Sam also needs to find out the location of those dark humans. Compared to any of those people from others, those dark humans would be able to create much more damage to Eden Blue and he did not want them to do anything like that.


    The good thing is that those abyss humans will note to this as they will not consider this as worthy of their time. As you know, most of the warriors of Terraria would not consider using this kind of method to be aary grade warrior.


    Using this method you willpletely damage your foundation and you can only be an Earlyary-grade Warrior without having the liquify spiritual energy.


    No Warrior who has knowledge about theary grade would want to damage their foundation. Who doesn''t want to use the power of domain which is the most powerful skill after anybody reachesary grade?


    ___________________________


    Gloria, Fiona, Hina, and Victor alreadye inside the S-grade Dungeon. They already found a group of monsters but they did not immediately attack them. Even though all of them have confidence in their strength, fighting a group of monsters would be reckless as they did not know if they would be able to fight them or not.


    Using their observation technique they search for a single Monster and will be attacking that Monster to know what is the power difference between them. Well, Gloria always spars with his teacher but unfortunately, Alena is also a warrior who uses true spiritual energy so she would be naturally powerfulpared to any normal Warrior who uses normal spiritual energy.


    Alena is the one who told her that she could visit the S-grade dungeon as it would give her the experience. There could be a chance they will get a limit breaker. We should be helpful to Gloria and Fiona.


    Well, did not tell them about the limit breaker that he has with him because previously he already checked their status and they still did not reach their limit. Without reaching the limit they should not try to break through.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, they found a monster who looked like sleeping right now. The Monster looks like a lion but it has to head. It is the berserker lion. Both the heads of the monster can use two different elements. Fire and wind are the elements that this Monster could use.


    Not only that the monster is very powerful alongside his defense. The weakness of that Monster is the joint between both heads. If they are unable to kill that Monster using the normal will then they need to attack the weakness to kill that monster.


    Gloria and Hina already started preparing for their attack. Hina is already using her bow while charging the arrow with spiritual energy. She is going to use the distractive arrow which immediately creates arge area of destruction.


    That technique contains a huge amount of spiritual energy inside that Arrow and the moment that Arrow hits something the energy will immediately burst out and destruction will happen.


    On the other hand, Gloria is preparing to use the ice beam. It is the modified version of The Spiritual Beam which contains the ice element in her hand and it creates the beam which immediately freezes everything. The moment The beam touches anything the temperature of that thing will immediately drop and ayer of eyes will be created.


    Victor and Fiona are also ready to attack but they are waiting for Gloria and her mother to attack the monster. Both of them already came in different directions and waited for Gloria and her mother to attack that monster.


    One more thing is that both Gloria and Hina will continuously attack that Monster so both Fiona and Victor also need to use their long-distance attacks as getting close to that Monster could be dangerous for them.


    Even if the monster did not pose that much danger, they could get hit by the attack of Gloria and Hina. Victor is going to use the Giant sh while Fiona is going to use the Destruction punch. Both of them get both the techniques from Sam and you have to say both techniques are very powerful.


    Unfortunately, as they did not get full control over their spiritual energy they would not be able to bring out the full power but at least for right now, the current power of their technique would be enough.


    Hina and Gloria target 2 different heads of that Monster and wasting no time they both release their attack. As the monster is currently sleeping, this would be the right time to attack the Monster. Both the attacks already came in front of the monster when the monster felt the danger and opened its eyes.


    Unfortunately, he was unable to react on time, and before he could avoid the danger his two heads had already been hit by both attacks. But Gloria and Hina did not stop attacking. Gloria continuously releases her ice beam while Hina also uses the rapid short technique.


    "Roar!!!!!!"


    They can already hear the painful roar of the monster. It Looked like the monster, already struggling to protect himself, wanted to escape from that ce. But, Victor and Fiona also begin to attack The Monster using their long-distance attacks.


    Sometimeter the ce got filled with ayer of smoke but unfortunately, none of them knew if they were sessfully able to kill the monster or not. Gloria and the others stop attacking as they first want to confirm if they sessfully killed the monster or not.


    But instantly a huge fireball went toward Gloria and Hina. That fireball contains both the fire element and the wind element. The wind element fused with the fire element and enhanced the power of the fireball. The power of the fireball has increased alongside it bing much faster.

 Chapter 769: Chapter 769 - Taking a Big Step

    Alexa already came to the teleportation room and she already registered her spiritual energy. With this everything is ready and they don''t need to wait for the day when they are going to announce news about the strongholds.


    Sam after that sends Alexa back to the training room where she was training with everyone by using the teleportation portal.


    "Well, we already solved one problem but we still have a bigger problem with us as we did not know how many of our people get affected by the nightmare Monsters. Do try to look at the memory of those nightmare monsters to see if there are other people who got affected by the nightmare Monster or not.


    But it makes me surprised that so many Warriors of the headquarters were affected by the dark humans. Also, we need to visit all the branches of our Warrior Association because we did not know how many of our Warriors were affected by those Nightmare monsters.


    Fortunately, we have 8 days and during these 8 days, we need to cover all the branches. During the time when we will teleport everyone inside the stronghold, there should be no one from our people who got affected by the nightmare Monster or betrayed us.


    When I will be going to teleport everyone inside the Strongholds I will not be able to focus on what is happening inside the strongholds. Only every one of you needed to handle all the problems inside the strongholds.


    Also during that time, I would already give you control over the teleportation system where even if nobody is present to activate the teleportation system you can automatically activate it.


    I am pretty sure when we take a huge step like this those dark humans will try to do something and because of this I am telling you that during that time we should not have any people among us who got affected by the nightmare Monsters because those people needed to handle those warriors or normal humans who got affected by the nightmare Monsters


    Also, tell every one of our Warriors to stay very alert because those dark humans already got alert that 10 Nightmare Monsters already got killed and there could be a chance that they would try to affect more people.


    Compared to those Warriors who did not work in the Warrior Association, those dark humans will get more advantage if they try to affect those people who are from the Warrior Association."


    Sam told them all of this. After that, they already begin to bring out all the memory crystals and then begin to read those memory crystals. Even Sam, Alena, and Markus helped in this matter.


    ______________________________


    "Well, currently those people mostly already got controlled by those dark humans, and even if you call them they would note to the Warrior Association. Well, this is going to be the perfect chance for me to use the teleportation system.


    I forgot to tell you that by using the teleportation system you can locate any individual who has the same spiritual energy as the registered spiritual energy. It is just I don''t know if I would be able to forcefully teleport that person or not because to teleport a person forcefully that person needed to have weak willpower.


    There could be a chance that those dark humans try to do something to the women I try to forcefully bring them inside the Warrior Association so it would be good if I send all of you toward those people."


    Sam told them that even though he could locate those people who were affected by the nightmare Monsters he wouldn''t be able to bring them forcefully inside the Warrior Association.


    First of all, even if those people did not have that much willpower, the main problem would be when he tries to teleport them inside the Warrior Association, those dark humans could try to do something that would be dangerous for those Warriors.


    "Hmm¡­ Sam, I also think this would be a good idea if you teleporter us toward those people. We would immediately make them immobilized so that those dark humans did not get the time to do anything. Just after appearing in front of them we also try to use our mind control technique to forcefully invade their mind to kill the nightmare Monsters."


    Alena agrees with his n. Markus and the others also think they will be good ideas.


    Some time ago they finished looking at those memory crystals that they got from those Nightmare Monsters and from there they got to know about many other warriors who also get affected by the Nightmare Monsters.


    They are able to identify 20 Warriors who were affected by the Nightmare Monsters. 8 of them belong to the Warrior Association while the remaining 12 belong to some guilds.


    As 10 of them are going to take action they are already preparing themselves to immobilize those Warriors the moment they appear on that ce. Sam is currently searching for those individual people using the teleportation system. As the range of the teleportation system is the whole Eden blue it wouldn''t be a problem.


    Sometimeter he found 20 warriors who are currently present in various ces. He already signals all the saints. After that, he immediately activates the teleportation system and then immediately teleports all the saints to various ces. Find your next read at m_v l|e-NovelBin


    10 saints appear in 10 various ces. The moment they appear in that ce they instantly use their power to immobilize the warrior in front of them. They did not even give a single second to those in front of them to move or do anything.


    Immediately all of them make those Warriors unconscious and then invent their minds using the mind control technique. They quickly begin to go toward the center of the mind where they already find the nightmare Monsters.


    It looked like those dark humans were already trying to destroy the mind so they immediately needed to act or the minds of those Warriors could get destroyed. Before anything they needed to destroy the tentacles of those Monsters that connected to the minds of those Warriors.


    One by one every one of them begins to destroy those tentacles and after that, they directly begin to attack the worm monster in front of them. All of them tried to finish those Monsters as quickly as they could because they needed to go to other ces where more people were also affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Fortunately, those Nightmare Monsters did not have that much attack power, and with that, they were killed easily. After retrieving the memory crystal all the Saints immediately leave the mind of those Warriors.


    Aftering out of their mind they help those Warriors to sit down. Immediately they disappear from their ces. Sam already got signals from everyone so he immediately teleports them to the next location. Aftering to the next location they once again did the same thing while immobilizing the warrior in front of them and then making them unconscious.


    5 minutester, all of them came out of the minds of those Warriors. Once again those Warriors sit down and then disappear from that ce. Naturally, their sudden action already attracts the attention of many other Warriors but none of the saints exin anything to them.


    On the other hand, Sam already teleports those people who got cured by the Saints. Alena and everyone once again begin to read those memory crystals to know if there are other Warriors who also have the same condition or not.


    _________________________________


    "What is happening with those people? They suddenly appear and then disappear. Does anyone know any kind of information about this? Those Warriors of Eden Blue started to make uspletely annoyed with their sudden action.


    Even our spy is unable to get any kind of information as none of the people from the Warrior Association reveal anything about this. We need to wait to see what kind of exnation the Warrior Association will give everyone."


    Those people from the others who are present in the danger zone also got the news about the sudden action of those saints. Itpletely made everyone very surprised when they got these reports from their spy.


    Many people from Eden Blue suddenly became alert and serious about this and every one of them wanted an exnation from the Warrior Association. First of all, everyone wanted to know if some kind of dangerous situation appeared or not. Many of them also started to panic after getting the news about the sudden actions of those saints.


    Fortunately, those people from the other already got the news from the Warrior Association that they will be exined what is happening but before that none of them should get worried about this situation as everything is under control and no dangerous situation appears.


    The saints will be giving them the exnation after sometimeter until then they should not get worried. Now this news makes every one of the people from the other also very curious, as they also wanted to know what was happening with those saints.

 Chapter 770: Chapter 770 - What is this register?

    It looks like those dark humans already began to take action as they began to control those humans who were affected by the nightmare. But with the quick response from the Warrior Association, they were able to control those Warriors before they could do something dangerous.


    Finally after solving everything all the Saints came back to the Warrior Association. They have new memory crystals and the moment theye to the Warrior Association they begin to read the memory of the memory crystal.


    Sam is also present there and he is also ready to find those individuals who will be present in that memory. Surprisingly everyone after reading those memory crystals told Sam that they already take care of all those Warriors who are present in that memory.


    They did not find any other person present in those memories who got affected by the nightmare Monsters so in one word they can say they already take care of everyone who got affected by the nightmare Monsters. But Sam did not think this was over. He wanted to make sure after observing every human of Eden blue.


    Well, he will do that after teleporting everyone inside the strongholds but right now it is a good thing that they already solve the problem with those warriors.


    It ispletely unexpected that they would be able to find some people inside the Warrior Association who were affected by the nightmare Monsters and through their memory they would be able to find those other Warriors and be able to cure them.


    You can say the dark humans already take pretty quick action and are ready to kill those Warriors but fortunately, with the help of all the saints, situations like that did not appear. Also if a situation like that appears then Sam will forcefully teleport that person inside the warrior association and he will immediately take action.


    Normally if you try to teleport anyone forcefully then that person will show restriction but in this matter, those Warriors are already under the control of those nightmare monsters. so they did not show any kind of struggle when he teleported those people inside the Warrior Association.


    ____________________________


    "Sir, already many people got scared because of our sudden action. They tried to ask the Warrior Association what happened as they thought most likely some people from others were doing something and the Warrior Association was taking action against them.


    Many people already begin to panic but fortunately, we are somehow able to control the situation by telling them that nothing like that happened and it is just all of you trying to capture some people.


    Would you like to tell everyone that everything is ok because I thinkpared to me your word will be useful in this matter."


    One of the elders of the Warrior Association came to the meeting room and said that to Markus. Well, everyone present in the room was also surprised after hearing that but still, it was their expectation. Also, it is true thatpared to the elders the word of the saints will be more useful.


    "Don''t worry and call all the media. I will exin what happened."


    Markus did not have any problem with that so he told the elder to call the media. The elder nodded and after that left that meeting room.


    "Well, to tell you the truth I did not think those dark humans would not do anything after losing this many of their Monsters. There could be a possibility that those people are already trying to attack our normal citizens or our weak Warriors.


    Tell every warrior of the warrior associations alongside all the other Warriors to get alert about this matter. Also when giving a speech in front of the media try to warn everyone. In this period, nobody tried to do anything reckless that could put them in danger. And everybody stays out of the Dungeon 7 dayster because we have a special announcement for everyone."


    Sam told him that there was a possibility those dark humans had already taken action. Not only that if this time those dark humans would not be able to affect those powerful Warriors then they naturally try to affect those normal citizens and normal Warriors.


    Not only that he also told Saint Markus that while giving the speech he should warn everyone. In this period, nobody tries to do anything reckless or try to show extra breviary.


    Also if possible announce to everyone that 7 dayster they will have a pretty big announcement to make and to do that every human of Eden Blue needs to stay out of the Dungeon.


    ________________________________


    "Alexa, why did Sam suddenly call you and tell you to go to the Wadia Association? Did something happen in the Warrior Association? Also, do you know anything about that recent incident that is happening around our?


    I already read the news that all the saints are suddenly appearing and disappearing in many ces and during that time they are also making some people unconscious. I am curious to know what is happening."


    Jeni suddenly asked Alexa who just teleported inside the training room. She did not even realize when she got teleportation. Previously when anybody got teleportation they would at least be able to feel the teleportation process. But this time she was not even able to feel anything and her surrounding area just suddenly changed.


    On the other hand, Elena and the others almost got into a fighting position the moment Alexa got teleported inside the training room but fortunately, they did not attack and also realized it was Alexa. Everyone then became very surprised that the teleportation system would be so advanced that it was able to teleport Alexa without alerting anyone.


    Alexa who finally came back to her senses also became very curious to know about the teleportation system and she wanted to know why the hell previously told her to register The Spiritual energy. First of all, she wanted to know what these registers mean. Unfortunately, Sam did not exin anything and just teleported her to the training room.


    "To tell you the truth guys I also did not know why I got called in the Warrior Association. Previously after finishing talking with Sam, eye got picked up by Saint John and went to the Warrior Association without knowing anything.


    I thought after going to the Warrior Association I would be able to know anything but at this time I could see everyone present in the room very seriously and I also noticed a normal citizen present inside that room.


    Unfortunately, I can feel the situation is very serious so I did not ask any questions. Even Grandpa at that time was very serious so I did not try to talk to him. Sam sometimeter called me and I went in front of a weird array.


    Sam told me to stand in the middle of that array and then use my spiritual energy. He called that process registering my spiritual energy and I still did not know what this process was about. But then after registering the spiritual energy, he told everyone that everything was finally prepared and they could take action.


    After that, he just came to me and said thank you. I was just going to ask him some questions but before I could do that I got teleported here. Everything happened so quickly that I did not get the time to react but I was only able to feel the teleportation process when suddenly I felt a force covering my body.


    Naturally, I could take action by using my willpower to destroy that force but I am already familiar with that force. So like this, I came back here without knowing anything. Also, I did not know the actual reason behind the action of our saints.


    But I am pretty sure that everyone matches for some serious reason and because of this, they decided to act like this which also makes many people scared. It looks like none of them have any kind of choice other than these. Sigh,ter if we get the time we should try to ask Sam. Currently, he is fully busy so we should not disturb him right now."


    Alexa after exining all of these releases a deep breath. She won''t be able to imagine how much pressure and burden Sam is carrying right now. Not just pressure from those people from others but also pressure from those Monsters who approve of their.


    From the moment he came back to his he was just thinking about the safety of everyone and also he was doing all of this to make sure none of the humans of Eden Blue received any kind of injuries.


    Also, he is already nning to take care of every spy who is present among them. Those people hide themselves using their special technique among those normal Warriors and humans. Really if it was possible they also wanted to know about the hiding techniques of those people.

 Chapter 771: Chapter 771 - The diffrence

    Sam is currently observing outer space. Well as you know some time ago he felt the presence of those prime Dragons. So there could be a possibility that those Monsters try to attack once again.


    Even though those types of attacks would not kill every living being of Eden Blue, at least all those normal people and those Warriors who did not have the capability to defend against those types of attacks would immediately get killed.


    Because of this, Sam decided to observe outer space. All this time he was using the concealment technique so that nobody could find him. There could be a chance those monsters would not show themselves if they felt his aura. Because of this, he hides his aura.


    For almost 7 days he stayed around outer space to observe the surrounding area but fortunately, until now, he did not find any trace of those Monsters. But there could be a possibility that those Monsters have some kind of technique that helps them to teleport to different ces or something like that.


    Well with these today he will be going back to his as today his family will being out of the Dungeon. Gloria and the others already finished their adventure in The S-grade dungeon.


    Sam was curious to know about their adventure as he wanted to know if they faced any kind of danger inside the Dungeon or not. Also, he wanted to know the difference between an S-grade monster who uses normal spiritual energy and a peak A-grade warrior who uses that true spiritual energy.


    All the saints on the other hand already checked all the branches of the Warrior Association one by one and they already found more people who were affected by the Nightmare Monsters. But fortunately, those people had already been cured by the saints.


    Unfortunately, it looks like those people from the warrior associations did not know anything about those other people who also get affected by the Nightmare Monsters. When all the saints looked at the memory crystals they did not find any kind of memory about other people who have the same situation.


    Tomorrow will be the day when they will be announcing the strongholds and they will start their operation. One thing Sam did not tell anyone is that he can already feel the core very close to the surface area. Compared to anyone present in Eden Blue, only he is a person who breaks through toary grade.


    Also from the moment he came back to his as you know even though the restriction force affected him it only made his power to SS-grade. It was not able to suppress Sam''s power more than that. But currently, Sam already got back his intermediate Elite grade power.


    Even though he needed much more time to get back his full power, still that current power is enough to show the sign that the core is getting toward the surface area and the restriction force is already decreasing. It did not know if those people from the other also got back their full power or not.


    This is also a reason he quickly wanted to start the operation so that every human of Eden Blue did not face danger.


    ___________________________


    Gloria and the others alreadye back from the Dungeon and they start going back to their house. Fiona also after saying goodbye to them begins to go back toward her house. For all these 9 days they fight those S-grade Monsters.


    First of all, they realize that even though it looks like those Monsters also have the same power level as them, still those Monsters have some advantage. But still, as they did not fight those Monsters alone they were able to kill them without any problem.


    Fighting those Monsters also helps them get familiar with their techniques. As you know, fighting monsters is the easiest way to get familiar with your techniques and by fighting them you can also get the chance to increase the level of your techniques.


    Currently, all of them are fully exhausted as for these 10 days they just keep fighting those Monsters. They needed some time to recover their mental energy. But at the same time, all of them wanted to know about the current situation of their.


    Sam told him tomorrow would be an announcement from the Warrior Association and everyone in Eden Blue needed to present during that time. There are many Warriors who also go inside of the Dungeon but those people also get informed by the Warrior Association that they would need toe outside.


    The Warrior Association will also send their people today inside the Dungeons to tell people who are currently inside of the Dungeons toe outside. Tomorrow is a very important day for everyone. Tomorrow will be the day when Sam and the Warrior Association will start their operation.


    Sam did not want to dy the operation. He did not want to give those people from the others or those dark humans the chance to do something that could harm the life of the humans of Eden Blue.


    __________________________________


    "Well, from the start we stayed very careful while fighting those Monsters. At first, we meet a horse-like Monster that also has a horn in its foodhead. You can call it simr to a unicorn but it isn''t as beautiful as a unicorn.


    Me and mom attack that Monster from a distance while Dad and Fiona attack that Monster from a closed distance. We did not face or try to fight any group of Monsters as we did not want to take any kind of risk.


    Every time we just search for a single Monster. This is also a reason that we take much more time. You cannot easily find those Monsters and also you need to stay very careful because those Monsters also have the ability to notice you.


    Many times we got noticed by a group of Monsters but fortunately, we were able to retreat from that ce and did not try to fight back. In the end, we came to the conclusion that those Monsters have the same power level as us but they still have some advantages. If I fight a monster in a one versus-one fight, then I will have the chance to defeat that monster."


    Gloria begins to share her experience inside the Dungeon. Hina and Victor are also present in the hall room and share their experience with Sam. After hearing their experience Sam did not get that much surprised as he expected something like this from the start.


    You should know that there is a huge difference between normal spiritual energy and true spiritual energy. So definitely Warrior who uses the true spiritual energy will have the superiority against anyone who uses the normal spiritual energy.


    But during this matter, as those Monsters can break through to S-grade, they have some advantage against Gloria and the others. Well, this is natural because after breaking through to S-grade anybody would get a power boost.


    Well after knowing their experience Sam is already thinking about bringing them inside those Dungeons once again as that would be the best ce for them to train. Also, he thinks that after Eden Blue is sessfully able to evolve more Dungeons will appear and those Dungeons will be more powerful.


    At this time Gloria and his parents also asked him about the current situation. Sam told him about the teleportation system and also told him that they already found many people who were affected by the Nightmare Monsters and all those people belonged to the Warrior Association.


    Those dark humans were the ones who wanted to use those Nightmare Monsters to control Warriors and most likely wanted to use them during the war. But after tomorrow''s operation, Sam is sure that they will be able to solve every person who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    His family would be able to help him in this matter. So he already told his family about the n and also told Gloria to inform Fiona about this. All the saints also inform almost all the A-grade warriors.


    Tomorrow all those warriors would be present in the Warrior Association. As you know, even though all the saints were powerful, they would not be able to cover the whole area at once and those dark humans could use that chance to harm those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Because of this, they decided to inform all the A-grade warriors. They still did not inform those Warriors as they would be informed sometimeter. Those Warriors would be needed to present in the Warrior Association around 6:00 p.m. where the Saints will tell them why they called them.


    Naturally after hearing that his family wanted to help those people who were affected by the nightmare Monsters. Gloria also instantly informs Fiona about this. Sam also told him that during all these days they check all the branches of the Warrior association and also find many other Warriors who have the same situation.

 Chapter 772: Chapter 772 - Telling them the real situation

    "I want all of you to prepare yourself for a heavy duty. Tomorrow all of you need to help us. All of you most likely have questions about why we wanted your help and what this is about.


    Before that all of you already know about our recent action that almost made everyone panic. Even though we told everyone that nobody has to worry about anything, that is actually wrong because currently we are really facing a very dangerous situation where our people get affected and controlled by people from others.


    A monster that uses the dark spiritual energy called the nightmare Monsters affected our Warriors and took control over their brain. You would not be able to find any kind of different movement of those people who got affected by those Monsters and you also would not be able to find any kind of different spiritual energying out from their body.


    You are only able to find out about those Monsters if you use your mind control technique to enter the mind of that affected Warrior and go to the center area. Where you will see the nightmare Monster which affects our Warriors.


    All of you are very confused because the moment youe to the Warrior Association we check all of you and also we use our mind control technique to check if you get affected by the nightmare Monster or not. Only after confirming none of you get affected by those Monsters can we trust you."


    After saying that Saint John can be silent for some time as he gives all those Warriors the time to digest all this information. As you know none of the Warriors know about the current situation or about those Nightmare Monsters. So this is pretty big information for everyone.


    Currently, 400 peak A-grade warriors, 600 intermediate A-grade warriors, and 870 early A-grade warriors are present inside the Warrior Association as every one of them got called by the Warrior Association. 3 years ago the number of peak A-grade warriors was around 100 to 200, but it already became 400 in thest 3 years and this is a huge improvement for Eden Blue.


    No back to the main matter, all of them get called because they would need to help in this matter. Before theye to the meeting room they also get checked by the saints and only after confirming that none of them get affected by the nightmare Monsters. Only after confirming that the saints decide to start the meeting.


    Vena, John, Markus, Lio, Alena, Mira, and every saint currently present in that room and by looking at their serious expression anybody could tell this was really a serious matter. Now all the Warriors after getting the information about those Nightmare monsterspletely became speechless and for a few seconds they really cannot believe that their Warriors also get affected by monsters like this.


    Not only that some time ago the saints cured many of those Warriors who got affected by the nightmare Monsters. But none of them know about this. Anybody could understand why they did not get informed by the Warrior Association as the Warrior Association first needed to make sure that none of them got affected by the Nightmare Monsters.


    Markus and the others observe the expressions of all the Warriors and they can already see their confused expressions, surprise expressions, and worried expressions. Sometimeter every one of them finally calmed down. Markus decided to proceed with the speech after seeing that everyone calmed down.


    "I know that this is pretty big information and none of you get informed by the Warrior Association. Actually as you can understand we weren''t free before and we were also able to get this information sometime ago.


    With this we started searching about all the Warriors who got affected by those nightmare Monsters among our Warrior Association. To check the headquarters and all the branches of the Warrior Association takes some time and we did not get the time to check all of you.


    You can understand we cannot recklessly reveal this news as it would cause a huge problem. People will start to panic and they could do something stupid that could also bring danger to their life.


    Also the main problem is that those dark humans or you can say those warriors who are the masterminds behind all of these can immediately get to know when we cure someone from those Nightmare Monsters.


    So previously they are also a risk that those dark humans immediately try to do something that could bring danger to those Warriors who got affected by the nightmare Monsters. Because of this, we did not want to take a huge step to solve this matter as we weren''t prepared before.


    But right now we are already preparing for everything and because of this we also called everyone to help us in this matter. First of all none of you have to worry about those Monsters and those Monsters were around C-grade to B-grade. You would not be able to find more powerful monsters than them.


    Now if you want to wonder what we are prepared for this time then first of all I wanted to give you the good news that all the Strongholds of our Eden blue arepleted. This is the important factor and the second thing is that we already modify the teleportation array.


    If you are wondering what this teleportation array would do, then with the help of the teleportation array we can now bring every one of our people inside the Strongholds at once without any problem.


    As all of you know tomorrow will be the announcement day and on that announcement day we are going to announce that we have already sessfully built all the strongholds and none of them have to fear anything. After that immediately we will bring every one of our people including us inside the strongholds.


    The moment we will being inside of the strongholds we will start our operation. All of us including all of you will be checking the minds of those people present inside of the strongholds one by one.


    Discover hidden stories at m,v l''e-NovelBin


    As you know, to observe all of our people we won''t be enough even if we use our full power. We need all of your help. Without your help we won''t be able to do anything. This is the main reason that we called all of you."


    After seeing that Markus became silent once again. He already exined to everyone what the real reason was that he called them inside the Warrior Association. Currently every warrior present in the Warrior Association has serious expressions.


    Every one of those Warriors finally understands the gravity of this matter. This is really a very serious thing as they really needed to find out those people who got affected by those Nightmare Monsters. Any condition to find those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Not only are their lives in danger but they would also bring danger to others and in a serious situation they cannot let that happen.


    All the Warriors present in that ce naturally have no problem helping in this matter as they also understand if they were not able to solve this matter quickly then there could be a chance that those people who got affected by those Nightmare Monsters would do something that could kill them or bring danger to other people.


    Aryan and ever since can see the serious expression of everybody. At this time, suddenly Sam signals Markus to tell them the news. Naturally they should also be aware of this thing because it will make them feel happy as finally they don''t have to worry about those spies hiding among them.


    "Now, I know this is a pretty serious situation but none of you should lose your calm. All of you needed to handle this matter calmly. Now I have good news to give all of you.


    Actually previously we did not know about those Nightmare Monsters when we started building those strongholds. At that time we started building strongholds as quickly as we could because we had other ns.


    Actually we have a n to deal with those spies who are hiding among us and among our people. As usual this could bring danger to everyone so we did not tell anyone about this.


    Also all of you should predict that those people from others have some kind of advanced technique that helps them hide very deeply that even our observation technique is unable to detect anything.


    But even with that those people would not be able to replicate the same spiritual energy as us. The tower observation technique is not that advanced to see the difference in The Spiritual energy between those people and our people. Fortunately our miracle maker Sam has the ability to see the difference and he can easily tell if they are our people or people from others


    After finishing the strongholds we have already decided to teleport all of our people inside the strongholds and after that we will be taking action against those people from others. First of all, those people would not show their real strength right now.


    First of all, everyone was waiting for the core to appear on the surface area, and before the core did not appear on the surface area everybody wanted to stay low as they did not want to lose their army¡­.."

 Chapter 773: Chapter 773 - The important day

    The next day,


    Today is the day when the Warrior Association is going to announce something very important and because of this every person from Eden Blue is very curious to know what will be the important announcement.


    Those people from other worlds also send their spies to know what the Warriors Association is going to announce that they already told every year 10 days ago to get prepared for this.


    Every Warriors of Eden Blue is currently present outside of the Dungeon as all of them got informed by the Warrior Association. Even though everybody is very curious because if that was your normal announcement then they would not need toe out of the Dungeon but it looks like this is very serious information.


    Naturally, this is not possible for every warrior toe to the headquarters so they just went toward the branch of the Warrior Association present in the City. Well, not everybody needs toe there but still, it would be good if those people came toward the branches of the Warrior Association.


    Every one of those branches of the Warrior Association became fully crowded with Warriors. At this time you can already see those Warriors of the Warrior Association all maintaining the order but at the same time, they are observing those people who came to the Warrior Association.


    None of those people know what is the real reason but still they were informed by the saints that today they have to be extra careful. Also, those Warriors have already been informed that they will teleport inside the strongholds. Not just only them but everyone from Eden Blue will be teleporting inside the strongholds.


    It could be possible that many people will start to panic after going inside. Also, those warriors have that duty to protect everyone and make sure none of them do something reckless that could put their lives in danger.


    But at this time you can say many people are also missing. Well, only a few warriors noticed that but at the same time, they thought those could be present in the headquarters or something like that so they did not think that much. You should know that even though the warrior association called A-grade warriors inside the warrior Association, they still did not call everyone.


    Warriors who got chosen by the Warrior Association already went to the designated strongholds. Every one of them is already ready to take action the moment they get the signal.


    __________________________________


    All the currently waiting for the saints to make their appearance. Around 12 p.m. finally, all the saints make their appearance at the headquarters, and that instantly broadcasts everywhere. Even if you did not go to the Warrior Association, you can still hear the important information.


    One by one everyone makes their appearance and all the people present in the headquarters wille to them by pping. At this time one thing most people ignore is that Sam is not present with the saints. As you can predict he is present in the teleportation room and he is just waiting for the signal of the saints to teleport everyone.


    There could be some people who have strong willpower and to forcefully teleport those people you need to have more willpower than those people. Because of this, Sam decided to stay there.


    Alexa and the others who were also present in the headquarters were surprised when they were unable to see Sam. Not only that they also did not so sister Gloria, sister Fiona, Aunt Hena, and Uncle Victor. They also try to contact them but they are unable to reach them and this makes them very surprised. Fortunately, Sam told him not to worry and just stay prepared to teleport.


    ________________________________________


    "I am really curious to see what those people are going to announce. Given my prediction is right, most likely they are going to announce the strongholds. Tch, if possible I wanted to attack those strongholds and destroy them. Currently, the situation is not allowing me to attack them.


    Also, what are the situations of our opponents? Are they doing anything? If they try to do anything, stay if we are because they could also try to use this chance to attack us."


    One of the leaders of the Lustar told his subordinates. If possible he wanted to attack those strong holes but unfortunately, the situation is not allowing him to do that. But you can easily tell he is also very curious to know what kind of announcement those warriors are going to make.


    "Sir, we are already watching over them. Like us, they also did not make any move and most likely they also sent their spy to get to know the information about this announcement."


    " Hmmm¡­ it is good that they did not make any move but still, told our people to stay alert. I don''t want anything to happen to our force. The restriction force of this already became much weaker and it will only take a few more days for that core to appear on the surface area. Before that, I did not want anybody from our force to do something that could weaken our force."


    That person did not want to fight anyone right now as that would weaken their force. But that does not mean they are scared of those other people from differents. If those people try to do something then they will also counterattack.


    Now not just only those people but everyone of those people from others who are hiding themselves around the danger zone, paying attention to the announcement. All those people already send all the saints to get all the information.


    All those people from the differents already got the information that they did not see the miracle maker or you can say the unknown factor among those saints. There could be a chance of that person hiding so every spy became very alert.


    But one thing is that none of them send any people from their main course inside the safe zone. If somehow any of them get captured then there would be a possibility that those saints can know the location of their base through those people. Because of this, they did not send their people from the main force inside the safe zone.


    You should know that the world bridge that they used to travel from one to another is not advanced and this also has limitations. They would not be able to bring so many people at once and because of this, in these 3 years, they bring their army from their little by little.


    ______________________


    "Good afternoon everyone. I hope all of you are doing okay. I can also feel that in these few days, all of you have improved and are ready to face the uing war. This makes me proud that I have fellow citizens of Eden Blue like this who are rted to fighting those people from others to protect our.


    Now all of you must be wondering why the Warrior Association suddenly informed you that all of you needed to present here today. Then it is because we have very serious information to give all. We have good news and alongside that, we also have bad news.


    The bad news is that the restriction force has already be weaker and we already predicted that in a few days, those people from the differents will try to attack us. The core of our is already close to the surface area."


    After saying that John became silent for some time and let the people digest all the information. Sometimeter already many people started freaking out and panicking. Those Warriors of the Warrior Association handle those people.


    "Calm down everyone. I know this is a very serious situation but none of you needed to get about this. Most likely all of you already can predict why me and my fellow saints are present here and decided to arrange these.


    Well, the good news is that we have already finished preparing all the strongholds. In every City, we have a strong hold where all of you will be staying during the war. The strongholds have the feature to protect against the attack of those people from others and they also have the feature to counterattack those people who are going to attack our strongholds.


    Not every person will be able to enter the stronghold without permission from us. So don''t worry about those people from others even if they try to enter our strongholds. They would not be able to do that.


    Now before discussing more information with all of you, I wanted to give you the second piece of good news. We are going to take all of you inside the strongholds to make you familiar with the strongholds. At the same time, we will also try to show you the strength of our strongholds.

 Chapter 774: Chapter 774 - Start of the mission

    "Some of you most likely already saw the power of the stronghold previously afterpleting the first stronghold. We all tried to attack that but in the end, it did not have a scratch on it.


    With this, you can imagine the power of the stronghold. But not only that, our miracle maker already promised that the stronghold is more powerful than that. As you know all the enemies who came from another got restricted because of the restriction force.


    So definitely some of them are more powerfulpared to us but we trust our miracle maker and he already told us not to worry because none of them would be able to destroy our strongholds in any condition. Even if they try to attract our strongholds they will counterattack from our strongholds.


    No one would be able to enter the strongholds until we did not permit them. So none of you have to worry about those enemies as they would not be able to enter the strongholds.


    This is the reason that we decided to call all of you and tell all of you to stay out of the dungeon. Recently we also modified our teleportation system and currently, we can teleport every one of you inside the strongholds at once.


    So be prepared everyone. All of you are going to teleport inside the strongholds. So, don''t try to panic when you feel something happening to you. Also, we have already activated the strongholds."


    After saying that Markus instantly sends a signal to Sam. Sam after getting the signal without wasting a single second instantly begins to use the spiritual energy. One by one he locates every human of Eden Blue. Well, he is instantly able to locate those humans of Eden Blue as every one of them has the same spiritual energy that registers in the teleportation system.


    With that in the next second, he instantly selected the people who were going to be selected strongholds. Naturally, he cannot teleport every human inside one stronghold so he needs to divide them and send them to different strongholds.


    Everything waspleted once again and from the start, Sam did that. He can teleport everyone. Sam was just waiting for the signal and the moment he got the signal he instantly activated the teleportation system.


    Outside the headquarters,


    The moment Markus finishes his speech instantly every human present in that ce begins to glow. Not just those humans present in the headquarters but every human around the safe zone begins to glow. In the next second, they already disappeared.


    Sam who finally finishes teleporting those people inside the strongholds instantly teleports outside the stronghold and can already see those spies who most likely try to run away from the headquarters.


    Unfortunately for those people, Sam is waiting for this moment. He instantly uses the telekinesis technique to control those people and make them unable to do anything. There could be a possibility those people would try to suicide but Sam cannot let that happen without getting information out of them.


    After making them unconscious he instantly began to fly in another direction and every time he noticed any spy, he instantly controlled those people and made them unconscious. Like this, he captures all the spies of the central city.


    After cing them inside the interrogation room he instantly went to a different city to do the same thing. Now as he doesn''t have to worry about the safety of the people of Eden Blue, he can freely try to capture those spies.


    He also realized very quickly that those people from others did not even get the time to report that. Like this, he instantly came to the base City and instantly noticed all the spies present there. All the time he used concealment techniques so nobody would be able to find him.


    Just after finding those spies he controls them using the teleconnect technique and makes them unconscious. Every one of those people from differents or around early Elite grade. So Sam did not have any problem capturing those people.


    ___________________________


    "Sir, we lost contact with our spy present in the central city and many different cities. Everything happened so quickly that they did not even get the time to report back. Something most likely happening with our people and we needed to do something."


    "Damn it. I should already have predicted this is a trap set by the miracle maker. Quickly told our spies to get away and try to hide themselves. We cannot let them get captured. There could be a possibility all of our people who lost contact with us already got killed or captured by that unknown factor."


    One person from the Lustar reports that theirmander. Themander instantly understands this is a trap set by the unknown factor and currently, there could be a possibility all those people who lost contact have already been killed by that unknown factor.


    Not only people from Lustar, but every other person from differents also had the same situation when they lost contact with their people. They instantly told their remaining people to hide themselves.


    But unfortunately for them. Sam can easily find those people and can easily capture them. He is doing that right now but at the same time he killed many people who tried to attack him or you can say try to destroy their surrounding area by attacking random directions.


    Even though when the war happens everything will get destroyed but still before the war he wanted to prevent those people from destroying anything. One by one he began to visit every city and then began to capture every person that he could find present in that city.


    But in the end, he would not be able to go to every City that quickly so using that chance those people also can hide themselves by going to their base. Naturally, there could be some people who know about their base and those people who try to run away. Many of them already try tomit suicide but Sam prevents that from happening. Discover hidden tales at m,v l''e-NovelBin


    ___________________________


    Inside all the strongholds you can see the moment those humans came inside the strongholds they immediately became Amaze. Everyone of them became very excited and they wanted to roam around the stronghold but before they could do that something unexpected happened.


    Suddenly there so many Warriors begin to surround them and then begin to make them unconscious. They even noticed one Saint present there and the Saint also doing the same thing. Before any of them could understand what happened all of them got unconscious.


    Well in this situation making them unconscious would be the best solution to find out the people who are affected by the nightmare Monsters. As everyone helped in this process it did not take that much time and only in 1 minute they made every one of those humans unconscious.


    The same thing happens around all the 10 strongholds and immediately after making them unconscious, every one of those Warriors alongside the saints begins to use their mine control technique to invade the minds of those people one by one.


    Naturally, at once they would not be able to cover all the strongholds so it is a good thing that before teleporting them Markus already told them not to panic and try to explore the strongholds. At least it will make those people calm down.


    But there could be a possibility that those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters aren''t present in that ce. But you can say all the saints are doing their best and trying to invade the minds of those people as quickly as they can.


    All the Saints currently invite the minds of those B and C-grade warriors. They would not be handling those other people as those other Warriors can handle that while they will be going to different strongholds. This can quickly cover all the strongholds.


    It is a good thing in the first strongholds that did not find anything so immediately they disappeared from that ce and came to defense strongholds. Sam already gives them control over the teleportation system and by using that they can immediately teleport to different strongholds.


    Once again aftering to those new strongholds they and those other Warriors present begin to make those humans conscious and after that, they once again begin to observe every one of them to see if any of them got affected by the nightmare Monsters or not.


    Naturally, it will take them some time to observe all the humans around the whole safe zone. But fortunately, they already have those many A-grade warriors as their support. With this, they would not feel that much pressure.


    All the dark humans already can feel those Nightmare Monsters getting killed by those warriors, but at the same time, they can also feel some kind of additional force interfering with their control over those Nightmare Monsters. With this even if they wanted to kill those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters they would not be able to achieve that immediately.

 Chapter 775: Chapter 775 - Capturing most of the people

    The restriction array Sam created at thest minute without telling anyone. Well, he created that array to restrict the control of those dark humans over those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Because of the restriction array, you can say those dark humans even wanted to do something by controlling those humans but unfortunately, they can also feel that the control over those dark monsters became so weak that they would need much more time to get proper control over them.


    All the Saints get to know about this today and this makes them sigh in relief. They did not know if they would be able to cover all the strongholds in that short time and what it was during the time those dark humans were already trying to kill those humans or trying to make them do something. Fortunately, after hearing about the restriction array, everyone became happy.


    Sam told him he created that array 2 days ago without telling anyone as he did not need that much time to create that array.


    All the saints are currently using their full power to search for those humans present inside the strongholds. Surprisingly they already found many of them who got affected by the nightmare Monsters. Naturally, without wasting a single second, they kill those Monsters and after that immediately leave the mind of that person.


    On the other hand those A-grade warriors also already found many of those humans who got affected by the nightmare Monsters and they are also doing the same thing as the saints.


    But you can say all of them are very careful after realizing the fact that those many people were affected by the nightmare Monsters. They can say that the lives of those humans on their could be in danger if they did not get to know about this matter even aftering inside the strongholds.


    It is a good thing that none of those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters get to realize this n of the saints. Also, this is a good thing that those dark humans did not make those other humans who also have those Nightmare Monsters inside of their mind to do something that could harm the Eden Blue.


    Sam on the other hand teleported from one City to another city and just aftering to the new city, he would immediately use his observation technique to cover the whole city. In front of Sam''s observation, nobody was able to hide.


    So he immediately uses the telekinesis technique to control those people and make them unconscious. Well, he could directly kill them but before that, he wanted to know if any of them knew about the location of their base. Also impossible he wanted to know the power of their army.


    On the other hand inside the danger zone, all those people from others already can predict what is happening inside the safe zone but many of them decide to make any move. None of them wanted to reveal themselves before the core appeared on the surface area.


    Even though many of them are concerned about the safety of those spies as some of them also are their family members, they do not want to make any move right now as they cannot get captured by the unknown factor. Everybody became sure that the unknown factor can easily find out about the location so this could be a dangerous thing if they go inside of the safe zone.


    All the supreme leaders of their army even be sad after realizing the matter but they cannot do anything at this moment as they did not want to make any move before the core appeared on the surface area. But one thing they already contact their by using something simr to the dimension watch.


    This is not as advanced as the dimension watch of Sam but it helps them to contact their.


    2 dayster,


    All the Saints are finally able to cure everyone who got affected by the nightmare Monsters and finally, they can say they would not have any kind of problem right now. But still, none of them decided to bring those people outside of the strongholds.


    First of all, they still did not get the signal from Sam and also there could be a risk that the moment they came outside of the stronghold they would get attacked by those people from the others.


    "I know every one of you is most likely very confused and also surprised about our action but as you can understand we did this to spot all the people who got affected by the nightmare Monster.


    Those people from others use those Monsters that affect your mind and they can control your body without you realizing it. Because of this, who decided to bring all of you inside the stronghold and decided to cure all of you?


    So for now none of you have to worry about anything as we already take care of those Monsters. But we cannot bring you outside of the stronghold as suddenly Sam or you can say the miracle maker hunting those spies from others. I hope all of you did not panic and stayed calm."


    Markus decided to give his speech to everyone. It is a good thing that everybody has already calmed down. But still, there could be a possibility some of them started to panic as they would not be able toe out of the stronghold so he decided to tell everyone What Sam was doing right now. With this, everybody will understand why they need to stay inside of their strongholds.


    Currently, every one of those people thinks that they are fortunate. First of all, all the saints were able to cure all those people who were affected by the nightmare Monsters. On the other hand, miracle makers also begin to capture those who are hiding themselves.


    __________________________________


    Finally, one dayter Markus and the other Saints get the signal from Sam and Sam tells him toe to the Warrior Association''s headquarters. The headquarters is also safe and you can already see many Warriors of the Warrior Association present in that ce. All the Saints came to the headquarters and then went to the meeting room where Sam was waiting for them.


    "The good news is that I capture almost every person from others who hide themselves among our people. But I don''t know if I can capture everyone or not because I am unable to cover the whole safe zone at once.


    Well, the next is we need to read the memories of those people to see if they know about their Base or not. But even with that, I wanted to find out the power of their army that they are hiding on our.


    If possible I also wanted to know if their is thinking about sending more people or not. I am unable to bring all of them to the headquarters but I have already brought them to thest stronghold.


    Naturally, I need all of your help to read their memory as I alone would not be able to read their memory. I think reading your memory would not be easy as every one of them would have some kind of protection present in their mind. Don''t worry I will try to solve this matter and with this, all of you need to help me to read their memory."


    Send exins to them the current situation where he already captured most of the people from others and sent them toward thest stronghold. He did not tell about any people inside that stronghold as he wanted to use that stronghold as a prison.


    "Also I think we should not let out our people outside of the stronghold as there could be a risk that they would get attacked by the people from others. Naturally, those people will try to do something like this after losing so many of their people.


    Also, we need to worry about those dark humans as they would be the most lethal force. Because of this, I did not want to take any kind of risk. Also, what is the current situation about all the people who are present inside the Strongholds?"


    Sam told him thatpared to any of those people those dark humans would be the most dangerous force. Those people will try to kill everyone and can use them as their sacrifice. So Sam is currently searching for those people. Naturally, he also wanted to know the current situation of the strongholds.


    All the people inside the Strongholds get confused and start to panic because of the sudden action. So Sam wanted to know if they were able to calm down or not.


    "You don''t have to worry about that as we already handle them. Everybody already understands that staying inside of the Strongholds would be helpful for them.


    They also know that we did that I think because if somehow those dark humans get to know about this then there could be a chance those people who previously got affected by the nightmare Monsters would be already dead right now."

 Chapter 776: Chapter 776 - The protection array inside the mind

    After getting the information about the current situation Sam became relieved that none of them did anything that could harm their life and the lives of other people. It is also a great thing that all the people after knowing the truth were able to control themselves and also decided to stay inside the strongholds until they did not solve the matter.


    Alena and the others also inform him that they already have many memory crystals but previously they did not get the time to look at all the memory crystals. Before looking at the memory of those spies they also needed the time to look at those normal crystals to see if they would be able to find the location of those dark humans or not.


    Sam did not have any problem with that and it would be a good thing if they would be able to find the location of those dark humans.


    He is sure that those dark humans did not have any spies among those normal humans. Compared to anyone, people with dark spiritual energy would have a hard time hiding themselves and even if they had the ability to hide themselves still they would not do that.


    Everyone in the world decided to participate in this rather than sending their spy among those normal people. If it was the previous dark Association then this could be possible but unfortunately, those people from the dark Association already be the dark humans and they are currently in the control of those Abyss humans.


    Sam just worried about those Abyss humans. If any of them came to his then it would be more dangerous. Anyone with dark spiritual energy is more dangerouspared to people with normal spiritual energy. Also, those Abyss humans have arge amount of dark spiritual energy present in their bodies so definitely they would be able to create more damage to their.


    Like this, they finally finished the meeting and Sam decided to inform his family that he had already finished his operation and was ready to interrogate those people. Well, his family also previously helped the saints to find those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    With these, they are present in their house which also turns into a stronghold by Sam. The central city where he is right now has three strongholds. His house, his Academy, and the stadium of that city. Naturally, he sent most of the people to the Royal Academy and the stadium.


    He did that so that the stronghold did not be so crowded that it would also be hard for those other Warriors to control the crowd. After informing his family he also informs his friends and asks about their current situation.


    Jeni and the others inform him that they are currently okay and also help those people to stay calm. They also help observe those people.


    Hearing all of this Sam can rest assured that nothing is going wrong with his n and he can fully focus on those people that he captures. If possible he also wanted to negotiate with those people so that they could leave his and note back when the core appeared on the surface area.


    Even though the possibility is very low, he still wanted to do that, and to do that he also needed to find the location of their base.


    ______________________________


    Sam came to thest stronghold and already began to interrogate those people that he captured. Fortunately, none of them are able to be conscious and remain unconscious. You have to say the control over Sam is solid.


    The power difference between him and those people is prettyrge and because of this, he was able to sessfully control them.


    Now Sam has already started looking at the memories of those people one by one. But the problem is that it will take much more time. Even though he has the ability to read the minds of those people without any problem, the problem is that it will take him time to go inside their minds and read their memories.


    This is also the reason that he asked for the help of those saints in this matter. But unfortunately, all of them are busy looking at the memory crystals.


    Sam already entered the consciousness of the first spy. Aftering inside of the consciousness Sam instantly feels the restriction force that is trying to bind him but unfortunately, it does not work against him as he instantly destroys this attack by using the power of domain.


    The restriction force was still present in that area but it did not work with the power of the domain. Sam is trying to find out what kind of mechanism is present inside the minds of those people. He is already aware of what kind of thing could be present inside the mind of any people and he is just trying to search for that.


    As he thought, sometimeter he already found an array inside the mind of that person. That array releases the repulsive force and it looks like it is also locking all the memory of that person. Before he was able to read the memory of those people he naturally needed to destroy that array.


    But he needs to do that pretty carefully as it can also kill that person. Even though in the end he wanted to kill those people, why should he kill them if he was able to destroy the array without killing any of those people?


    Sam instantly enters the focus and then begins to read the array present inside the mind of that person. As expected that array is not that much-advanced array like the array he saw inside of those people who previously got kidnapped by those Abyss humans in Terraria.


    But he still wanted to make sure nothing went wrong so he decided to look at the system and Finally found A manual you double to find this kind of array and their creation process.


    Fortunately, Sam was able to gather that much gold coin beforeing to his, and with this, he was able to buy many things without any problem.


    Now in the focus, he already gets to know about the mechanism of that array, and with the help of the manual he finally gets to know how to destroy that array without harming the person. He needed to unlock the fastyer and then needed to use his spiritual energy to erase the secondyer.


    The array is a twoyer array where the first array is the protection array which is also responsible for controlling everything in the mind of that person. Fortunately, Sam is currently concealing himself by using the concealment technique. That technique also helped him have his spiritual aura and this is the reason that the first array still did not get triggered.


    Now he finally begins to unlock the first array but he also instantly realizes it will take him some time to unlock that first array. He needs to pretty carefully open that array as the array is directly connected to all the memory of that person.


    First carefully erase the energy source of that array and then begin to use his spiritual energy to unlock the array. Fortunately, it worked in the end. With this finally, the person is free and he will not lose his memory or will not lose his mind and be a dumb person.


    After that, he finally focused on the secondary which is also more dangerous. This is the array that is responsible for creating that repulsion force. Not only that he also gets to understand the array and also has the ability to kill that person so that even if anyone can unlock the first array he would not be able to get any kind of information as the person would be dead.


    He once again begins to use the focus state to get to understand about that array and with the help of the manual he finally gets to know how to erase that array. Compared to before this will be more dangerous and will take more time.


    Finally, after 25 minutes, he was able to erase that second array. With this, he can finally read all the memories of the person and try to see if that person knows about the location of their base or not.


    Sometimeter, Sam came back to his consciousness. He already read the memory of that person but in the end, he did not find any kind of useful information other than the information about the army that alreadye to Eden Blue and was most likely hiding


    The good thing is that not many people would be able toe out from the world Bridge that those people used toe to Eden Blue from their. The world has a limited number and because of this in these 3 years, those people send their people in small groups.

 Chapter 777: Chapter 777 - 5,000 memory crystals

    Currently, all the people from others already cut their connection with their spy. Most of them already got captured and only a few of them were able to get away. But even with that nobody can give them the guarantee that they will not get captured by the unknown factor.


    Now everybody can naturally tell that those warriors of Eden Blue will try to extract the memory of their spy to know about their army and to know about their location. It is a good thing that none of them spy away from the food force of their army and their location.


    From the start, it was decided that all the spies would not get that much information because this kind of situation could ur. But still, you can say many people became very sad and wanted to attack those humans of Eden Blue.


    Some of them wanted to rescue those spies as they were their family members. Fortunately, the situation did not allow them to do that. Currently, you can say all those Warriors of the others who hid themselves in the danger zone naturally did not have any connection with the safe zone and they did not know anything that was happening inside the safe zone.


    Even though this was a very big disadvantage for them, still all themanders already told their people to get ready because the restriction force also became much weaker and it would not take that much time for the core to appear on the surface area. At that time they can take their Revenge against those people by killing their people.


    Well, taking the core of their would naturally make them miserable, and currently, everyone wants that to happen. All themanders already contacted theirs. They are directly unable to send the message but they just signal their that something dangerous happened to them and they are people and impossible. They need more people.


    Now back to the main matter,


    All those people who are hiding in the danger zone also already decided to increase their surveince alongside the power of the barrier that is present around their Bases. First of all the unknown factor has the ability to find them even though they use their powerful stealth technique.


    So there is a big possibility that the unknown factor was able to find the location if he came to the danger zone.


    But at the same time, many of them are curious to know what is happening inside the safe zone. Before They lose contact with their spy, they get to know that every human of Eden Blue got teleported inside the strongholds.


    Now this is a confusing action. Even though there could be a chance that those Warriors and then unknown factors did that to capture their spy but don''t know why, all themanders feel that this is not the whole story. Also if this is the case then after capturing the people they would naturally release all the people from the strongholds. Experience more content on m v|l e''-NovelBin


    By reading the report anybody could tell that those people of Eden Blue already have an advanced teleportation system that can immediately teleport everyone inside the Strongholds. So if those Warriors only focused on capturing their people, then after capturing all of them they would have already released their people.


    Unfortunately for them, nobody would be able to get the information as they already lost the connection with the safe zone and none of them decided toe out of their hiding ce to go to the safe zone. They would only do that when they get the signal about the core appearing on the Surface area.


    _________________________


    Sam does not know anything about these and even if he gets to know about all of them he will just not care about them. Eventually, he decided to search for their location but he would do thatter because before that he needed to read the memories of those spies.


    He already read the memory of 100 people but he still has many more people who are still unconscious and he needs to read their memory. Unfortunately, now he did not get the location of their base. Also, all those spies only have basic information about their army which only came to this 3 years ago.


    After 3 years the spy decided to hide alongside the people of Eden Blue while the remaining people decided to build their base on this. After this, They lose connection with that other force, and the spies are only contacted by their superiors throughmunication devices.


    But Sam still did not give up because he still had many people and he just hoped he would be able to know the location of those people or even able to get hints about the location of their base.


    Sometimeter after finishing reading the memory of 25 people he decided to rest to recover the mental energy alongside his spiritual energy. Well if those people did not have those kinds of different mind protection arrays inside of their mind then it would be very easy for them to read their memory.


    But he noticed that every one of those people had some kind of array present inside their mind and every one of those people from differents had different kinds of array present inside their mind. This is the reason that he almost loses his 70% spiritual energy during all this time to unlock those arrays so that those spies do not die.


    Now back to the main matter, Sam is wondering about all the saints and his teacher who is currently busy reading the memory crystals. They will also need some time to finish all those memory crystals. Previously all the saints informed him of the total number of memory crystals and the total number is around 5,000.


    This is not a big numberpared to the total number of people of Eden Blue but just think 5000 of their people got affected by those Nightmare Monsters and those dark humans decided to use them during the war to get the advantage and to sacrifice those people for their benefit.


    Those 5,000 people who previously got affected by the nightmare Monsters would not even know that they caused much destruction. Those dark humans can use those 5000 people to kill more people when they go inside the strongholds.


    It would put the life of everyone inside the stronghold in danger and there could be a high possibility that many people would have died in that process. Not only that they can also use those 5000 people to take hostesses and use them to ckmail Sam and others.


    Fortunately, everything goes ording to the n and he doesn''t have to worry about those people who got affected by the Nightmare Monsters. But one thing you wanted to know is if any people from Eden Blue got kidnapped by those dark humans or not. Because this can also matter.


    So he did not disturb his teacher and the others while they read the memory crystals. Now if you are wondering why he did not take help from other Warriors then they would not be able to help him because those are present inside the minds of those people.


    First of all, to break the array they would need a huge amount of spiritual energy, and that amount of spiritual energy only a Saint has. This is the reason that he just only asks for the help of his teacher and other Saints.


    Sometimeter one person who belonged to the Warrior Association came to him while giving him an energy drink. Well, Sam is currently lying down on the ground to recover his mental energy.


    After taking the energy drink Sam decided to ask that person about the situation of their. They are currently observing the whole safe zone without going outside of the strongholds.


    Going outside of the stronghold is dangerous for now so they would be doing that while staying inside the strongholds. Now what you are from the Warrior Association inform Sam about the current situation of the safe zone.


    They already send surveince drones around the whole safe zone. Now those drones are watching over the whole safe zone. Currently, you would not be able to find any activity around the safe zone. Also, they are trying to search for any clue that would tell them there are more people from others.


    This is good news but still, Sam cannot rx. Even though he wanted to capture those people before they could do anything ormit suicide still he did not believe that he would capture all of them. First of all, he needed to read the memory of every one of the people that he captured and only then he would be able to tell if he captured everyone or not.


    Sometimeter after recovering the mental energy once again starts reading the memory of those spies. It is a good thing that as he got familiar with those currently he did not need that much time and that much spiritual energy to break them.

 Chapter 778: Chapter 778 - Calm before Storm.

    5 dayster,


    Alena and all the others continuously focus on reading the memory from those memory crystals and they already get to know about many things from those memories. But unfortunately, none of them get to know about the location of those dark humans and that is the thing making them frustrated.


    They were already able to read half of the crystals but they would still need 5 more days to read the remaining 2500 memory crystals. Naturally, all of them also wanted to help Sam to read the memory of those spies but they also needed to read the memory from those memory crystals as that would also be important to know the location of those dark humans.


    Until now by reading the memory from those memory crystals they get to know how those Warriors got affected by the Nightmare Monsters and also what are the things that they have done when they got controlled by those dark humans.


    Fortunately, those dark humans just use those humans as their spies by controlling them. Before the war, none of the dark humans wanted to expose any of those Warriors who got affected by the nightmare Monsters and this is the plus point in this matter. Because of this, until now none of those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters died or did something dangerous.


    They also get to know that some of those Warriors recently got affected by those Nightmare Monsters. From the moment Sam discovers about those Monsters, those dark humans also begin to attack more Warriors, and all those Warriors get controlled by the nightmare Monsters.


    Unfortunately, even though those Warriors who previously were affected by the nightmare Monsters met those dark humans but unfortunately, they did not get to know about the Base location of those dark humans. As you can tell, those dark humans also maintained the secret from those over the years as they also thought this kind of situation could ur.


    They already try to contact Sam and also get to know that some already read the memories of 500 people but unfortunately, he still needs to read the memories of the remaining 3000 spies.


    Now this is a very surprising thing that this many spies were hiding among those normal people and nobody was even able to know about this. Without the help of Sam, there is no possibility that any Warriors of the Warrior Association would be able to find those spies.


    Sam on the other hand also decided to take some rest. He was already mentally exhausted along with his physical exhaustion. This is the reason he decided toe back to his home higher so he can already see his family.


    Well, Gloria, Hina, Victor, Fiona, Alexa, and all the other friends of Sam get permission to use the teleportation system and they also have permission to travel to the house of Sam which is also a stronghold.


    Every one of them just needed to find the link between them and the teleportation system and by channeling spiritual energy into that link they could immediately teleport from one ce to another ce.


    Naturally, they can also go outside of the stronghold but none of them wanted to do that as this could be risky for them and they did not want to put more burden on Sam. This is not the time to be reckless.


    On the other hand, Sam is taking some rest despite the danger. He can already feel the core of theing toward the surface area. But at least it will take 20 to 30 days for that core toe to the surface area and that would be enough time for him to read the memory of every one of those people alongside if possible he wanted to find the base location of those people from others.


    But that is the important matter as he also needs to find the location of those dark humans and those prime Dragons. He is 100% sure that those Dragons are already present outside of their and waiting for the right time to attack their to destroy everything.


    Before the core did not appear on the surface area nobody would be able to Harm Eden Blue from outside of the Eden Blue. First of all a protectionyer is also present because of the core and also the restriction force that also restricted those Monsters.


    On the other hand, Sam is worried about those dark humans as if somehow any Abyss humans came to his then it would be a huge disaster and during that time he already decided to contact the people from the Terraria so that they came here to help him. But before that, he wanted to find out if there was any possibility for those abyss humans toe to this ce or not.


    It is a good thing that all the people of Eden Blue already make themselvesfortable inside the stronghold and none of themin about anything. Some uneducated people naturally try to go outside of the strongholds but unfortunately, those people get punished by the Warrior Association because of their recklessness.


    Some of the people already thought the danger was over so they could go outside and it was just the Warrior Association forcefully making them stay inside of the strongholds. But after receiving the punishment all those people did not mention going outside of the stronghold once again.


    ______________________________


    Sam is currently flying outside of the atmosphere to go to outer space to observe the surrounding area. By going there he will bepletely out of the restriction force and will recover his full power and that would be enough for him to observe the surrounding area.


    Naturally, he wanted to make himself and his prepared to wee those Monsters and their attacks. Unlike any other Warriors from a different, those monsters did not have the mentality to rule over that.


    Same as those dark humans, those Monsters also have the wish to destroy thes. Actually after consuming the core of the if those monsters try to consume the whole then they would receive more power boost.


    Like this, those prime Dragons make themselves powerful. But this is also a very long process and you would not be able to find this kind of that is about to evolve. But the thing about those dragons is that they can sense if any is about to evolve or not if they are close to that.


    Somehow those Dragons get to know about Eden Blue and this is the reason those Monsters are also nning to attack the and destroy everything.


    Those Monsters also observe the restriction force and the barrier of the which is getting weaker and weaker because the core appears on the surface area. Naturally, the moment they will feel the restriction force and the barrier gone from the they will immediately attack using their full power.


    Now Sam came outside of outer space to find any trace of those Monsters but unfortunately, he did not find any trace and it looked like those Monsters were maintaining their distance from the.


    Sometimeter Sam decided to go back as he did not find anything and it would be best if he used that time to recover his lost mental energy and physical energy. But there is one thing that makes Sam worried. Somehow the situation became very calm. None of the enemy makes any kind of move and this feels like the calm before Storm.


    ____________________________


    All those bases of the people from others already became much stronger as those people used their powerful defense systems to hide their bases and make them powerful. There could be a possibility that the unknown factor decided to search for them in the danger zone after not finding any kind of information about them inside the safe zone.


    If you are wondering why previously nobody was able to find the location then you should remember the size of the danger zone is three times biggerpared to the safe zone and even all the saints are unable to roam around the whole danger zone because you can also find S-grade monsters in those ces. It is just that Monsters will not try toe out from their hiding ce that quickly.


    Some of thosemanders from others already received the signal from their and the signal informing them that more people would being to the but it would take some time.


    But at the same time, they should not depend on the reinforcement as at once not many reinforcements would be able toe to Eden Blue because of the restriction of the world bridge.


    But even with that everybody became happy that they would decide to help from their and impossible they would have a powerful Warrior as theirmander alongside them during the war.


    Naturally, many of them wanted to know the situation of their spy who got captured by the unknown factor but unfortunately, they did not have any kind of information about those remaining spies who were somehow able to escape from hiding themselves. None of them wanted to make any move at this time.

 Chapter 779: Chapter 779 - No movements

    A group of people are currently present in the danger zone and the strange thing is that everything around them has already be dry. They look exactly like your normal humans but the difference is that they have dark spiritual energy inside their body.


    As you can predict they are the dark humans who are also hiding themselves inside the danger zone. Even though none of them felt any kind of fear, they got orders that until the core did not appear on the surface area they needed to hide themselves, and while hiding they needed to control the local humans of that.


    Unfortunately because of the warrior association and Sam, they were unable to seed in that. Currently one of them reports back to their superior. All those dark humans came to that from the Abyss world. Naturally, those Abyss humans have full control over those dark humans.


    Somehow those Abyss humans get to know that the code of Eden blue will be appearing in the surface area and this is the reason that they send those dark humans to that.


    Unfortunately, they were unable to seed on the second goal. They finally report to their superior about their superior''s response that they will send someone to lead them during the time when the core will appear on the surface area.


    ______________________________


    Outer space,


    A group of Monsters which are the size of half of the moon suddenly enter The Milky Way gxy and they already appear near the Eden Blue. Those Monsters instantlye to use their observation technique on that. Sometimeter they teleport from that ce.


    As you can predict, those are the prime Dragons who target Eden Blue to get to the core of the and absorb the whole while destroying everything. If any of them were able to do that then they would be much more powerful.


    Unfortunately, the restriction still exists around that and because of this none of them are able to observe what is happening inside that. The restriction force also prevents them from looking inside.


    On the other hand, teleporting created a distance where nobody would be able to sense them. Well previously they almost got found out by a warrior of the and with these they decided to keep that minimum distance.


    One of them previously decided to get close to the to see if there were any Warriors who could sense them or not and only then did they meet that person who was just about to sense him.


    Fortunately, they already have the teleportation mark present near Jupiter which helps them appear in that area instantly just using their teleportation power. Now from time to time, they woulde close to that to see if the restriction force is still present or not.


    It looks like the restriction force is still present and with these, they became sure that it wasn''t the time to attack that. But they also get the good news that the restriction force already became very weak and it would not take that much time for them to appear on the surface area.


    Currently, the core still maintains the barrier around the whole which protects the from any kind of attack from outer space. Until you did not have any kind of special attack you would not be able to break the barrier created by the core of any around itself.


    Sam who was previously present inside the Warrior Association instantly felt danger and wasting no time he directly teleported outside of the Eden Blue. But as usual, he did not see anything in the outer area.


    ''Sigh, if possible I wanted to kill those Monsters right now but it looks like those Monsters are very intelligent, and before the core did not appear on the surface area they would not do anything like those other people from others.''


    While thinking all of this he is already going back to his City.


    ''Sigh, I read memories of this many people but I still was not able to get the location of the base of those people. None of the spies knew anything about their Base as the moment they came to Eden Blue they decided to hide themselves in the safe zone.


    Even after knowing about the details about those connection devices I don''t think I would be able to contact any of those people who are currently hiding themselves inside of their base.''


    You can say Sam bes pretty frustrated after not finding any clue about those people from others. He can directly try to search around the whole safe zone. With this, he became sure that nobody was present in the safe zone.


    But still, Sam is not sure about this as you know those people have some powerful hiding device that helps them to hide themselves even from his observation power.


    But there is always a second possibility and that is those hiding themselves in the danger zone. Unfortunately, Sam did not get the time to take action about this. First of all, all the saints are still busy looking at the memory from those memory crystals and it will take them more time to finish the memory of those memory crystals.


    So during this time, he did not want to go inside of the danger zone recklessly as what if the first possibility came through and if somehow those people from others get to know that he went inside the danger zone they will try to do something that destroys everything except those strongholds.


    There is also a possibility that all Saints came out of the strongholds to fight post people and this will make them seriously injured. Also if he leaves the safe zone like this then there would be a possibility those people who are present inside the stronghold begin to panic or something like that situation would appear.


    Because of this, he also waited for his teacher and everyone to be free and only then he would have the time to search around the danger zone. But the problem is that he would not be able to cover the hole in the zone in one day. It would be easy if he had his full power but for now, it would not be easy even though he became a peak Elite grade warrior.


    ''Sigh, when my teacher and everyonee back to the strongholds after finishing their work I will immediately tell them to handle this matter and I will be going to search for those dark humans on my own. At any condition, I need to capture or kill those dark humans.


    Continue reading at m|v-l''e -NovelBin


    ____________________________________


    Currently, if you look around inside the stronghold you will notice that many warriors who did not have the duty to observe the whole strongholds, started their training, even though they were inside of the strongholds.


    Everyone wanted to stay prepared for any kind of situation that would appear. Even though at first everyone stayed inside the Strongholds, for now, everyone was able to adjust themselves.


    Everyone gets notified by the Warrior Association that the restriction force of theirs is already bing weaker. In no time the core of the would appear on the surface area. Because of this, everyone finally decided to adjust themselves inside the strongholds and wait for everything to be over.


    But one thing is that all the elders of the Warrior Association worried about the situation as until now they did not see any other movement from any people from others. All the elders know that all saints and even Sam are currently searching for the Bases of those people from others.


    Unfortunately, none of them are able to find anything even after reading those many memory crystals or those many memories of those spies. On the other hand, all the people who previously got affected by the nightmare Monsters finally came very close to recovering fully.


    Nightmare Monsters even though they were not able to injure them or injure their brain that seriously still it is enough to make them feel weak. But the good thing is that the medical team already told them that everything was okay and they would be able to recover their strength after resting for a few days.


    The Warrior Association also announced to everyone that they already captured all the spies hiding inside the safe zone. This also makes most of the people feel very scared as none of them even get to know that they are living with those people from others.


    Those people also can look like humans or they are humans while having a powerful hiding ability that also hides their spiritual power and makes them look like normal citizens.


    But fortunately, the miracle maker already solved everything and everyone is happy that they have a miracle maker like this. After surviving this war everyone would prepare a big  fo fest for everyone.


    [A/N:- Hey guys, I hope you''re doing ok. I have good news for everyone. 10 Different users can get 10 FPs. So, redeem the gift using the redeem code. The code number is <ABDHYY594U6TR45PA>.]

 Chapter 780: Chapter 780 - The Good news

    Finally, Alena and the others were able to finish all those 5,000 memory crystals. It takes them 10 days to read those many memory crystals. Without wasting a single second all of them just read the memory from those memory crystals and this is also a reason that they became so exhausted that just after finishing reading thest memory crystal all of them fell asleep.


    Sam also stopped reading the memory of those spies and decided toe here to see the situation of those Saints. At this time one Warrior who previously prevented anyone from disturbing any Saints already informs Sam that all the saints fell asleep 8 hours ago.


    So it looks like they would need more time to recover thest mental energy. With the same decided to leave that ce and before leaving he also told the Warriors who were present there not to disturb any Saints.


    Sam alreadye back to thest stronghold and he once again became busy reading the memory of those spies. In these 10 days, he was already able to finish reading the memory of 500 people. Well if it wasn''t for those barriers present in the minds of those people Sam would have already finished reading the memories of all those people.


    Unfortunately because of those mind protection barriers, Sam is only able to read the memories of 500 people. He could push himself by using potions. But he did not want to do that right now as what if that would also leave some kind of side effect inside of his body?


    Other than that he also did not want to make himself fully exhausted so that he would not be able to react when something unexpected happened to his.


    Currently, from time to time he will also go outside of the to see around outer space. From time to time you will feel dangering out from outer space so he needed to go there to see if he could find those prime Dragons or not. Other than that he also petrol around the whole safe zone to see if he could find any people from others or not.


    Well, he can give those responsibilities to other Warriors but he did not think any of them would be able to help in this kind of situation where they did not have the power to find out those people from others who hid themselves using powerful techniques.


    Not only that is also very risky because those dark humans decided to attack them and control their Minds by using the Nightmare Monsters. This is the reason that he decided to take all those responsibilities on his shoulders. Not only that he also needed to visit all those strongholds from time to time to see if the situation was good or not.


    All the people who know about all of these are feeling useless at this moment and none of them know what to do. Sam takes all kinds of responsibility and nobody can predict how much burden he is feeling but still, he does notin. On the other hand, none of them were able to help him. These make many of them feel very useless.


    Even Gloria and the others also feel the same as those people of the Warrior Association. Even though Sam did not tell everything to them still they can predict he took most of the responsibility as he did not want any of them to go outside of the strongholds and put their lives in danger.


    None of them know how much burden he is feeling on his shoulders but unfortunately, none of them have the power to help him. This also makes both of his parents worried alongside his sister and his friends. They also know that Sam also reading the memories of those people that he captured and he wants to find out the Base of those people from others.


    ________________________________


    Finally, 12 hourster all the saints wake up from their sleep and every one of them finally finishes refreshing. Immediately they realize that they are still present inside the warrior association and it looks like they already finished reading all those 5000 memory crystals.


    Discover exclusive tales on m,v l''e-NovelBin


    Immediately they told all those Warriors who previously protected them and prevented any other people from disturbing them to go back to their work. After that, they also contacted one of the elders and told that person to report what happened when they were asleep. Also, they asked how long they were asleep.


    The elder immediately responded that all of them had been asleep for 20 hours. During that time nothing particr happened except Sam came to that ce and told everyone that nobody should disturb them.


    After hearing that Markus told the elder to go back to his work when he and the others decided to visit all the strongholds to see the situation of those ces. Alena immediately contacts her student.


    "Yes, we all finally wake up from sleep and we already feeling refreshed right now. We will being to your ce but before that, we wanted to visit all the strongholds to see the condition.


    There we will be discussing what kind of information we are able to find after reading those memory crystals. Also until the new should take rest I get to hear that you did not even take a rest and try to put your body in overwork.


    I know that you wanted to read the memory of every one of these people, but still, currently, you taking too many responsibilities alone and this is harmful to your body. Suddenly you should try to rest and leave everything to us."


    Alena already gets to know the situation of Sam and the warrior of the Warrior Association also informs them what kind of responsibility Sam takes on his shoulders. They also inform them that Sam only takes rest for 2 to 3 hours. Naturally, this would be very harmful for Sam. So, Alena told him to rest until she did not go to that ce.


    Markus and the others also support her decision because they also begin to feel useless when they get to hear Sam take those many responsibilities off his shoulders.


    _________________________________


    3 hourster,


    Alena and all the other saints finally came to thest stronghold and immediately went to the room where Sam was resting. Well, Sam already wakes up when they enter that room.


    "Well, at first we were unable to find anything by reading those memory crystals. But while reading those memory crystals we get to see that after the previous incident, all those dark humans begin toment on those Nightmare Monsters to control the body of those warriors and make them hide themselves.


    Also by reading those memory crystals, we get to know that those dark humans have a n to destroy our Warrior Association during the day when we decided to teleport everyone inside the strongholds.


    Not only that those Nightmare Monsters also have the n to explode every one of those Warriors by making they are spiritual system unstable but it looks like none of them are able to seed in their n.


    Other than that we just only able to know the identity of other Warriors from our who also got affected by the nightmare Monsters. Well, but we already handle all of them and every one of them is free right now.


    So we became disappointed that we were unable to find the location of those dark humans but it looked like we weren''t that unlucky. Because even though we are unable to get to know the location of those dark humans it looks like some of those dark humans also get in contact with Warriors who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Well previously those affected Warriors also brought many resources from our Warrior association to those dark humans and it looks like those Warriors also helped those dark humans to cover their clues.


    Many of those dark humans contact regrly with those affected Warriors. But they never take any of those warriors to their base. So even though we be happy after finding out this new information in the end we are still unable to find the location of those dark humans.


    Well, we already lost hope of finding the location of those dark humans but you could say Alena is lucky in this matter because reading thest memory crystal she was able to find something very suspicious.


    She finds a location from where one time one of those affected Warriors was able to see dark humansing out. Not just one dark human but many other dark humans were present in that ce. So even though we did not know if that is the location of those darkness or not still we suspect that if we try to search around that area we would able to find some clue about those dark humans."


    Markus and others beforeing to that ce also discussed among each other the memory that they found after reading the memory crystals and in the end everybody became sure that they did not find any location of those dark humans. But Alena at this time informs them about the suspicious memory that she finds reading thest memory crystal.

 Chapter 781: Chapter 781 - Entering the building

    " We need to find out if those dark humans are present in that ce or not. It would be a good thing if those dark humans existed in that ce. Find out if that is the Base of those dark humans or not."


    Sam also getting thest information became happy because if he found those dark humans in that ce then he would be able to solve them. With that, he instantly asked about that ce where previously that affected Warrior met those dark humans.


    Alena quickly told him about the ce and Sam instantly went outside of the room to go toward the teleportation. Aftering to that ce he instantly begins to find out about that ce. The ce that Alena told him is around the border between the safe zone and the danger zone.


    With the help of the teleportation system, he is already able to locate that area but unable to locate that ce exactly as he is, the teleportation system can only locate that city but only able to locate that specific ce. But Sam has no problem with that.


    Sam instantly turns around and sees his teachers and the others are present there so he just quickly tells him that he will be going to that city and will check if those humans are present there or not. Well even though he already checked that city while searching for those spies at the time he did not pay that much attention.


    Alena and the others also wanted to go to that city alongside Sam but instantly Vena stopped everyone.


    "All of you should stay here because if we go to that ce it would be a burden for Sam. First of all, we did not know the power of those dark humans and also I think every one of you already feels the restriction course bing weaker.


    If those dark humans suddenly are in their full power or be more powerfulpared then it would be problematic for us to handle them and it would also increase the burden on Sam. First of all, as you know, he has the ability to get away from any ce without getting caught.


    Also, he is more powerfulpared to us. So, he should have the ability to deal with those people as he already told us that he has experience fighting those dark humans. So we should not increase the burden of Sam but we can still monitor the City by sending our drones."


    After hearing Vena''s words everybody also realizes that they are making reckless decisions that can increase the burden of Sam. It is true that none of them know if those dark humans are more powerfulpared to them or not. So in this way, if they recklessly go to that ce and find out those dark humans are more powerfulpared to them then it would create a problem for Sam.


    Sam with his weird concealment technique can get away from any kind of ce and naturally, he is more powerful andpact than any of them so he would not have a problem dealing with those people as he already has the experience.


    With this immediately contact the Warriors present in the city''s stronghold. They told them to send the drone toward that specific area.


    Sam alreadye to that ce and already used the concealment technique. With this, he began to go toward that ce. He already predicted where he could find that ce as previously his teacher told him that in the memory she saw the barricade and also behind that ce she saw a Mountain.


    With this Sam tries to search for the same area like this. Well unfortunately he did not find that kind of ce in the area even though he could already see those mountains and the barricade. Suddenly he got a call from his teacher and his teacher quickly informed him to go in the right direction.


    Sam without asking any questions began to go to that ce. He already predicted his teacher would find that ce by using drones. Sometimeter after hearing the instruction of his teacher Sam finally came in front of the ce where previously his teachers saw that affected Warrior meet those dark humans. Experience exclusive tales on m v|l e''-NovelBin


    Without wasting a single second he began to use the observation technique in full power to see if he could find any kind of dark spiritual energy or not. Surprisingly the moment he uses the observation technique he already found the trace of dark spiritual energy inside of that building.


    This looks like an under-construction building but the moment he approaches that ce he instantly feels that this building is not normal. Don''t know why but he feels that some kind of barrier is present in front of the building but using the observation technique he is unable to find anything about this.


    Instantly he uses the Spiritual vision technique that helps him to see the barrier that is present around that building. Sam reports that to his teacher and then begins to search around that ce to see if he can find any opening in that barrier or not.


    First of all, he did not want to alert anyone who would be present inside of that building. Fortunately, beforeing back to his, he got to know a lot of information about this kind of array. So he also knows how to break this kind of barrier. But to do this he needed to find out the source and their source is the weakest area of this barrier.


    But the problem is that the source could be in the middle of this barrier so in that case, he needed to find out any weak ce of this barrier. But even if he was unable to find that, then he needed to create the weak ce on his own. If he can find any weak ce in that barrier then he can easily break that part of the barrier to enter that barrier without alerting anyone.


    Now using both his observation and spiritual vision technique he begins to search around that area but in the end, it looks like he would not be able to find any weak ce in that barrier. So in the end he decided to create the weak ce on his own.


    First of all, he found a good ce from where nobody would be able to see anything. After finding that ce he instantly begins to channel his spiritual energy toward the barrier. First of all, you should know that the barrier is created with dark spiritual energy but because Sam is using the Origin spiritual energy, Sam will not have any problem creating the weak spot in that barrier.


    The moment Origin spiritual energy came into contact with that barrier it instantly got mixed with that barrier without any problem and nobody would be able to find anything.


    Sam can already feel that spirit inside that barrier and he began to channel more spiritual energy toward the barrier. Like this sometimeter, he already sent 10% of his spiritual energy inside that barrier.


    He can already feel the connection that is already created in that barrier and he already begins to absorb the dark spiritual energy present in that area. Sometimeter, from that part of the barrier dark spiritual energy already gets consumed and currently, the Origin spiritual energy is already created and opened for Sam.


    Sam without wasting a single second enters that barrier and then begins to advance toward the entrance of the building. At this time he uses the spiritual vision to see if any kind of array is present in that entrance or not. Well, unfortunately, he already found the trap array present at the entrance.


    Now once again he can use his spiritual energy to destroy the trap array but he did not want to waste any more time. He decided to enter the building from the second floor where he could see a big window that was also open.


    He will not recklessly go inside the ce and before going inside the ce you will check very carefully. Sam at this time already noticed that the moment he came inside the barrier he lost the connection with his teacher. It Looks like some kind of jammer is also present in that area.


    Not only that but he can also feel a restriction force the moment he tries to fly but unfortunately that restriction force is weak. Sam destroyed that restriction force by using the part of the domain and after that, he already came toward that open window.


    After that, he began to use the spiritual vision to see inside the room. Fortunately this time he did not find any kind of array present in the room so wasting no time he entered that room. After that, he slowly began to approach the door of the room.


    Sam has already begun to use the observation technique to see if anyone is currently present outside that room or not.

 Chapter 782: Chapter 782 - Dark humans

    After observing the surrounding area Sam did not find any presence of anyone in that area but even with that, he is very careful. Slowly after opening the door, he decided to advance toward the next room where he could feel the dark energy is more dense.


    Aftering inside the second room he can see some kind of strange pattern present on the floor and this is most likely the source of the barrier that is present outside of that building.


    Well, he did not do anything with that barrier and left the room while following the third room where once again he could feel the dense spiritual energy. Aftering to that room he once again saw a strange pattern present in the room and he instantly sent the spiritual energy inside that pattern to see the connection.


    Instantly he felt the connection that on the ground floor, every door and window had some kind of barrier and this pattern connected those barriers. It looked like some kind of signal barrier that would immediately tell every dark human that someone entered the building.


    After that, he was just about to leave that third room to go to the stairs to go to the third floor. But before that, he became insanely surprised because he began to feel some prisons of human life. Those present suddenly appear on the third floor and the ground floor. Most likely those dark humans use the dark teleportation to appear there.


    Instantly he began to go toward the third floor to see what was happening there. The third floor of that building is under construction so you would not be able to see any proper room in that ce. Aftering to that ce he already saw three dark humansing toward the stair to go toward the second floor.


    Without giving them any chance to do anything he instantly makes them paralyzed by controlling their body using the telekinesis technique and also instantly uses his mind control technique to make them unconscious.


    Those three dark humans did not even get any time to do anything and they just fell on the ground. But Sam told you that they did not make any kind of sound. After that, he quickly uses his mind control technique to enter the mind of one of the dark humans.


    Sam''s consciousness instantly enters the mind of that person and without any problem, he begins to advance toward the center of the mind where he would be able to find all the memories. Naturally, he could already feel some kind of restriction force but that did not affect him.


    Sometimeter when he came close to the center he could already see a barrier present in that area which is also linked with the life of that person. Most likely if someone tries to forcefully break that barrier then the person will die. Fortunately, Sam did not do anything that could make that person that.


    He slowly begins to observe that barrier and already notices the strange pattern present in the center of that barrier. Now he needed to decode that array to unlock that barrier that was present in the mind of the dark human. Now it will take him some time and at the same time, those other dark humans could get alert by this.


    So he decided toe out from the mind of that person as first needed to take care of those other dark humans. With these, he left those three people on the third floor and quickly came to the first floor where he could already sense the presence of those 5 people.


    He did not know what they were doing but when he came inside the room where he felt the presence he saw those five people doing some kind of ritual or something like that and beneath them, you could see an array.


    Sam takes action immediately. Once again without giving them any time to react, he uses the telekinesis technique alongside the mind control technique to make those people unconscious. But something unexpected happened instantly. Your next journey awaits at m v|l-e''-NovelBin


    The array that was present on the floor instantly began to glow and without giving Sam the time to do anything it already faded away from that ce. Sam once again begins to use the observation technique in full power. But this time he did not find anything suspicious around him so even though he did not know what happened he decided to take those people back to the Stronghold.


    With this Sam immediately uses the teleportation technique to bring those 8 people inside the stronghold where he can already see his teacher and the others waiting for him anxiously. Most likely because he suddenly lost connection with his teacher all of them became worried. But it is a good thing that none of them decided toe to that ce.


    Alena and the others who were anxiously waiting for Sam instantly calmed down when they saw Same to that ce. In the next second, they also be surprised when they see 8 people lying down on the floor.


    They asked who they were and Sam answered that they were dark humans. Now that made them very surprised then and became happy that Sam was able to capture those dark humans.


    "Well, I don''t know why I was previously unable to feel that ce but I think that is because of some kind of weird array present in that ce which protects that ce from my observation technique. But previously I also only looked for those ces so I most likely ignored that ce after not finding any spy.


    Now back to the main matter of when I entered that area I suddenly lost connection with my teacher as some kind ofwork jammer was present in the ce. After that I somehow enter the building which is protected by many arrays and if anybody recklessly enters that area that person could immediately get killed or captured by those dark humans.


    There are many traps present in that ce. When I was about to think that I would not be able to find anything I suddenly felt the presence of those people and immediately I got them without giving them any chance to do anything.


    But even in this matter something unexpected happened as previously those five people were doing something and in the middle of them I noticed a strange array. I have no knowledge about that array so I am unable to tell what it was. But when I capture those 5 people that array suddenly glows and disappears from that ce.


    Now to know about all the secrets I need to read the memories of those people but I would not rmend any of you to do that because some kind of restriction force is present inside of their mind and with your normal spiritual energy it would be dangerous for you to enter their mind.


    As you know dark spiritual energy has the power to influence other''s spiritual energy and when you enter their mind the dark spiritual energy will immediately begin to affect your consciousness. Because of this, only I would be entering the minds of those people to find out the truth."


    After seeing that some immediately bring those people toward the interrogation room. At this time suddenly


    Alena tried to stop Sam from doing that but unfortunately, Sam did not stop even after hearing her words. Alena thought she could do that because she had true spiritual energy. But, unfortunately, she would also face the same danger inside the minds of those people.


    Without giving them any time to do anything Sam instantly enters the mind of the first person that he previously entered. Once again aftering in front of the barrier he begins to observe the array present in the center of the barrier. To destroy that barrier he needed to decode that array.


    Fortunately, he already looked at the array manual that he bought from the system shop and also looked at the array manual that he got from Terraria. Both of these manuals help him understand the pattern which is a veryplicated mind control pattern and only the dark spiritual energy can be used in this process.


    To decode that array he needed to unlock the array Sam needed to destroy the energy source of that array. With this, he instantly enters into the focus state and begins to use his spiritual energy to interfere with that array.


    Naturally, that is a very dangerous thing but because this is Origin spiritual energy Sam did not face any kind of problem. With that sometime Sam has already found the energy source.


    There is a pattern of that which is the connector between the dark spiritual energy of the dark human and that array. Immediately Sam destroys that connector to stop the energy supply. The next moment the whole barrier was destroyed and Sam was able to advance toward the center area.


    Sam finally came to the center area where he could already see the memories of the person and he needed to connect his consciousness with those memories.

 Chapter 783 : 783 - Real plan of dark humans

    Alena and the others are currently looking at Sam''s direction seriously. At the same time, they are also worried about him. A huge spiritual fluctuation also appears in that ce making them more worried about him.


    Well, everybody already predicted that some kind of Mind protection is present inside of those people so definitely Sam will try to fight back and try to open that mind barrier. This is the reason that they are worried about him as they don''t know if he would be able to unlock that barrier.


    For almost 30 minutes that fluctuation was present in that ce but after that It began to disappear and 10 minutester itpletely disappeared from that ce. Only then do they notice that Sam begins to open his eyes.


    But none of them disturb him. They just look in his direction with curiosity as they want to know if he is sessful or not. At this time Sam also notices them and smiles at them.


    He was sessfully able to read all the memories of that dark human and he already got to know many things about that dark human. Naturally, he still needed to read the memory of those other people but before that, he needed to exin to his teacher and the others what he found inside that dark human''s mind.


    "As I expected he naturally came from the Abyss world. But at the same time, he is just a puppet without any thought or any freedom to do anything on his own. Those people from the Dark Association who were able to escape went inside that ce. After that day they became the puppet of those Abyss humans.


    Things that I already exined to all of you. I will exin to you in more detail but I will do thatter. Now I know that this dark human came to our 1 year ago and after that, he decided to make that ce as they make that base alongside those other dark humans.


    Unfortunately, this is not the real base of those dark humans as this is just a sub-base. But the main problem is that these 8 dark humans alongside some other dark humans are the masterminds behind Those nightmare monsters.


    They are the ones who affect our people and then put those nightmare monsters inside of their minds. Unfortunately, none of them have full control over those Nightmare Monsters as they are just puppets who follow the orders of their superiors.


    It is just that they came back to their base this time to do something dangerous. Unfortunately, that dark human is not part of this process but he has the idea of what his other partner is going to do and with that, I also get the basic idea. They are preparing for something that would immediately increase the amount of dark spiritual energy on our.


    I also get to know that they have a second base but that is present inside the danger zone. Unfortunately, I would not be able to find anyone in that ce other than these 8 people as this is just their second base which they use to hide themselves.


    Unfortunately, it looks like I would not be able to get more information than that as most of the memory has already been erased before I was able to read them. It looks like those other dark humans already predicted that something like this would happen and with that, they already decided to erase some of the memories that inform us about the main base.


    I don''t know what they are preparing that would immediately increase the amount of the dark spiritual energy but I hope able to prevent that from happening as I already make them unconscious. Also, I need to read the memories of the dark humans to get the full information about this. I don''t know if any of them know about the location of the main base or not.


    On the other hand, they also have a powerful mind protection barrier inside their mind that prevents this kind of thing from happening but unfortunately, that is useful in front of me. But still unlocking that barrier requires a lot of spiritual energy so I need some time to rest to recover that spiritual energy."


    After saying that he became silent and gave them the time to digest all the information. This is a lot of information that they would need time to digest. Alena and the others take some time to digest all the information and after getting all the information all of them be very serious.


    First of all, if those people are able to be sessful in their process then it would be a really bad thing for every human. If the amount of dark spiritual energy increases on their then it would affect all the people.


    Immediately it begins to affect the mind of everyone and because of that many people will do some reckless thing that would put them in danger or also it will cause destruction. Alena and the other saints did not have any technique that would help them prevent the dark spiritual energy from spreading.


    But fortunately, they were able to react on time and were already able to capture those people before they could do anything. It looks like those dark humans already decided to do something like this the moment they lost the connection with all the nightmare Monsters that affected all those warriors.


    After taking some rest Sam already recovered from The lost spiritual energy and he once again began to read the mind of the second person but this time he was already familiar with those barriers he took less time to unlock that barrier and get the memory of the person.


    Like this, he began to read the memory of those 8 people but it already took him 5 hours to read those memories. During that time, Alena and Vena only decided to stay in that ce while John and the others were watching over the safe zone.


    They decided to petrol around the whole safe zone. Who could give them the guarantee that those dark humans will not try to do something like this once again? More than that they also lost their people and that would make them more angry and with this day naturally would try to do something more dangerous.


    Even though they are unable to find those people as they are very good at hiding, they would still try to feel the presence of any person around the whole safe zone. The good thing is that all of the people are already present in the Strongholds. So right now if they find the presence of any person then it would mean that that person belongs to a dark human or a human from others.


    7 hourster,


    Sam finally recovered thest spiritual energy and he already exined what he found after reading the memory of all those people. As he read the memories of those 8 people one by one he had a good understanding of their n and he also got to know how they wanted to affect the spiritual energy of their.


    Those 5 people previously performed the ritual that would affect the spiritual energy of their. The array previously present in the middle of those people is the which has the ability to affect the whole spiritual system of the.


    If they are sessfully able to perform the ritual then the dark spiritual energy would be already increased then there could be a chance that all the people present in the strongholds have been affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    Sam has the ability to extract the dark spirit from those people but if he tries to do that with all those people of Eden Blue then it would be impossible for him to do that in a short time. At least you would need one month to fully do that as it would require a huge amount of spiritual energy.


    "I already know their real n and fortunately I am able to prevent them from performing the ritual. If somehow I am unable to reach that ce and those people are sessfully able to perform the ritual then it would immediately affect our whole atmosphere as the amount of the Spiritual energy would be decreased and the amount of the dark spiritual energy would be increased.


    That would immediately affect the mind of our people and anything could happen at that time. It Looks like those dark humans wanted to affect the minds of our people. After doing that they wanted to increase the rate of destruction of our.


    Even though I am unable to know the real location of their base, I still have some important information about those dark humans. The moment we clear those Nightmare Monsters, those dark humans already give them the order to interfere with the spiritual system.


    Not just to affect our people but it will also affect their advantage. They n to use that advantage during the time when the core will appear on the surface area."

 Chapter 784 : 784 - Riana

    " But that array would not work in every ce. In Terraria they would not be able to use that array for this kind of thing as the true spiritual energy will immediately affect the array. But unfortunately as we just only have normal spiritual energy present on our we would be in a disadvantageous situation if they were sessfully able to perform the ritual.


    The good thing is that I already know the location of their second base. I will be going there to see if I find any kind of clue or not. I also wanted to see if those dark humans take any kind of action after this or not. The good thing is that they would not be able to perform that ritual from the danger zone and to do this they need toe to the safe zone.


    So during the term, I hope every one of you petrol around the whole safe zone. If any kind of suspicious thing happens then immediately contact me. Even if those people have some special technique that helps them to hide their power, in this situation they would not be able to use that.


    It is just don''t recklessly try to do anything with those people as if you face those dark humans then it could be dangerous for you. First of all, all the people of the Dark Association after bing a dark human got powerful dark spiritual energy inside of their body. Previously you can say they forcefully absorb the dark spiritual energy.


    Because of this, most of the time they would not be able to fight for that long, and always their health would get affected by the dark spiritual energy. But after this event everything changed as currently, they have a spiritual system that helps them create the dark spiritual energy and also that dark spiritual energy is more powerfulpared to the dark spiritual energy present on our.


    Back to the main matter,


    After telling his n Sam already disappeared from that ce alongside his teacher. Both of them wanted to visit their families. Gloria also wanted to see if her sister was okay or not. Well, the good thing is that her sister is with Gloria and the others, and with this, she can rx about her safety.


    Both of them came inside Sam''s house. Both of them already feel the presence of everyone present in their house and with that, they begin to go toward the timing room where everyone is present right now.


    Gloria, Fiona, Victor, and Hina just came back. But they will not be staying there for that long as after staying there for some time they will immediately go back to their work. Alexa and the others are also present in the ce. Well, they could stay inside the stronghold but here they will get the chance to improve themselves so they did not want to waste a single second.


    All of them already noticed Alena and Sam. A person suddenly gets up from the seat and directly runs toward Alena. She is the sister of Alena. She is in 2nd year at the Royal Academy.


    Her name is Riana. Well, she knows that her big sister and her grandpa are only busy so she obediently came to this house as this is the safest ce. First of all, she can live with her seniors who also help her during the training time, and other than that she can also meet Gloria and the others who motivate her to train hard.


    Riana at first did not notice Sam but when she finally stopped hugging her big sister, she finally noticed one more person standing beside her sister. Only then did she realize it was Sam who was standing beside her big sister and this almost made her jump in surprise.


    Sam just smiled after looking at her silly behavior and then went toward the dining table. He said beside Tony and already began to eat the food. Even though he did not require the food after bing aary grade over a year but can still register the food made by their mother.


    Alena and Riana once again join them and with that, they begin to focus on their food. At this time Alena also introduces Riana to Sam. It should be the first time Riana will be meeting Sam.


    "Senior Sam, is it true you went to a different? Did you face a powerful Monster inside of the? Can I visit the new with you?"


    At first, Riana felt shy but after getting familiar with Sam she began to ask questions one after another without giving him the time to respond. Alexa and the others begin tough after looking at her behavior. Even Alena just shakes her head with a smile on her face. She already expected this kind of behavior from her little sister.


    You can say Riana wanted to be like Sam and Gloria. She wanted to make her big sister proud of her. Also, she wanted to be as powerful as Sam. Sam and Gloria are her idols so naturally she also did the same thing when she first met with Gloria.


    Sam begins to answer those questions one by one when she finally stops asking questions. At that time she also realized her behavior and her face became red.


    "Yes, it is true that I went to a different. You are able to face more powerful monsters. Even those monsters from the supreme Dungeon would not be able to fight those Monsters from that.


    Other than that I am already nning to bring all of you to that new but before that, we need to first finish all the troubles of our. Also don''t worry about the trouble on our as in just a few days everything will be over.


    Before that you just need to focus on your training and your seniors will help you if you have any problem."


    _____________________________________


    Sam did not inform the dark humans and their n to his family as that would make them more worried and there was a possibility they would do something reckless. He just told them that he was still busy looking at the memory of the spy that he captured.


    After that around 7:00 p.m., he came out of the house and then instantly teleported back to thest stronghold to see the condition of those spies. He already creates a restriction array around those spies so even if they regain their consciousness none of them would be able to do anything. Even if they try tomit suicide it will bepletely impossible for them to do that.


    Finally, aftering inside the instigating room he already notices some of those spies trying to break free from the restriction but unfortunately, none of them seed where those other people also regain their consciousness but they just stay silent without doing anything.


    Every one of them finally noticed Sam. Instantly many of them became angry and wanted to attack him but unfortunately for them. None of them can do anything because of the restriction array.


    Sam just looked at them and after checking the condition of those people he came out of the room without saying anything or without reacting to their behavior. You will take care of the peopleter but first, he needs to go to the second Base of the dark humans.


    Sam once again instructs all the Warriors present in that stronghold to stay alert and if anything happens they should immediately contact the Warrior Association. After that, he directly came to the headquarters and already met with his teacher.


    Alena also came back to the Warrior Association as she also needed to petrol around the safe zone. At this time Sam informs her that he will be going to the second Base. After informing her he immediately disappeared from that ce and came to the previous building of those dark humans.


    Well, he could try to search for that ce inside the danger zone but that would take some time so because of that he came back to that building to search for the teleportation symbol present in that building. Sam is going to use the teleportation symbol to go to that ce directly.


    As you know, because of the Origin spiritual energy he did not have any problem controlling the dark spiritual energy so because of this he decided to activate the teleportation portal to go to the second base.


    After searching for some time he finally found the teleportation portal which was present in the second. Aftering in front of the teleportation portal he begins to channel The Spiritual energy and the teleportation portal begins to get activated.


    The important thing is that the teleportation portal is only connected to that second base of those dark humans. It would be really good if he directly went to the main base of those dark humans just by using the teleportation portal. But it is not possible. Finally, the teleportation symbol begins to glow brightly. It is fully ready to use.

 Chapter 785: Chapter 785 - Destruction of the second Base

    Sam came in second ce. Just aftering to that ce, he can feel the restriction force and the dark spiritual energy that is present in that area and is already trying to affect his mind. Unfortunately, it did not work for Sam.


    On the other hand, Sam has already begun to use the observation technique to look around that whole area and he also wanted to find if he could find any other teleportation array or something like that in that area or not.


    He began to use his full power to observe that whole base. At this time normally anybody could get restricted by the dark spiritual energy. But that does not happen with Sam as it is like he is present in a normal ce where the spiritual energy wouldn''t try to do anything to him.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, he was able to observe the whole base and this is not that much bigpared to the previous Base. The Surprising thing is that this hiding ce was created by the Dark Association''s Warriors during the time when the saints captured or killed those people from the Dark Association.


    They created this base to protect their life but not everyone knows about this second base. Most likely those previous documents connected with those dark Association''s Warriors. Well, he can think about thatter as he already begins to feel the density of the dark spiritual energy that suddenly increases.


    He instantly tries to search for the reason behind all of this. At this time using the spiritual vision he finally finds the source from where the Spiritual energy spreads around that whole area.


    Not only that suddenly he began to feel some kind of restriction force trying to prevent him from moving or something like that but unfortunately, it did not work against Sam.


    Only for a few seconds, he felt the restriction force but after that everything became normal. But the density of the dark spiritual energy still begins to increase in that ce. Now he was already able to find out the array that caused all of these but he did not know anything about that array.


    It does not look like a teleportation array or barrier array, so what is this? But some did not know anything about this so he decided to take help from his system. Instantly he began to search for rted knowledge about that array inside the system shop and sometimeter he finally found something.


    Unfortunately to get the knowledge he almost needs to use 5k gold coins. In this top situation, Sam decided to use the remaining gold coins to buy that knowledge and instantly get the manual rted to dark spiritual energy arrays.


    Sometimeter, Sam is finally able to find knowledge about that array. This array has the ability to turn normal spiritual energy into dark spiritual energy by changing the property of The Spiritual energy. However, the array is notpleted as it is just a prototype.


    ''Sigh, most likely before going to the safe zone those people experiment with the spiritual energy here. By looking at the prototype, it looks like they were somehow able to seed in their experiment and they decided to go back to the safe zone.''


    Well, this could be wrong but Sam predicted something like this happened here. Also, all this time Sam was trying to find clues about other dark humans but unfortunately, he did not find anything.


    Most likely, other than those 8 people, nobody knows about this ce. But Sam did not believe that. He was just about to turn around to go toward the array when suddenly something unexpected happened.


    This time he directly begins to feel a restriction force begin to be effective and try to stop him from moving. This time the part of the restriction force is very powerful. Also, the restriction force prevents him from using teleportation or something like that.


    At this time he also begins to feel the vibration that appears on that base. Sam instantly begins to use the power of the domain that immediately destroys the restriction force and after that, he begins to use the observation technique in full power to see what matters.


    Instantly, something suddenly appeared inside the base and that quickly approached toward his direction. Not only that, with his observation technique he is able to find out that one person is also present outside of the base and that person is the reason behind that restriction force.


    It looks like that person already got to know about him and wanted to kill him by using the restriction force. Sam did not move from his ce as he wanted to see what kind of thing was approaching his direction.


    He did not need to wait for that long because one minuteter the vibration increased and he could finally see the monster that opened its mouth and was already ready to shoot his attack toward him.


    But Sam who still has the domain activated instantly increases the range of the two men and that instantly affects that Monster and kills the monster without giving it the time to react. The moment The Monster got killed he immediately teleported outside of the base but unfortunately the moment he came outside he did not find anyone.


    The dark human who previously tried to distract him looked like already felt the danger and he had already decided to run away from that ce to save himself. Sam did not decide to chase after that person as that person could also use teleportation.


    With this he deserted to return to the second base and after that decided to destroy everything present in the second base. Once again using the power of domain he began to destroy everything and after 1 minuteter you would not be able to find anything present in that ce.


    Only then did he decide to check the surrounding area. There could be a chance that the main base of those dark humans is near that second base. So he decided to observe the surrounding area but even 10 minutester he did not find anything.


    __________________________________


    "So there is someone present among those humans who can prevent the dark spiritual energy from affecting his mind. Looks like the unknown factor is powerful and has the ability to kill us. Fortunately, you were able to run away before that unknown factor could capture you.


    The Monster that I sent inside that base instantly got killed without even getting the time to do anything. Looks like we won''t be able to do anything until the core is not happy on the surface area."


    Currently one of the leaders of those dark humans said that after hearing the report from the dark human present in front of him. That leader is the one who sends that Monster inside that second base and that person who is standing in front of him is the person who is trying to use the restriction force on Sam.


    He is the mastermind who wanted to control the spiritual energy system of this to take advantage of that. But unfortunately, that did not seed and also he found out that the enemy had the power to counterattack the dark spiritual energy.


    _____________________________


    "What happened in that ce? Did anyone know any information about that?"


    "Sir we did not try to approach that area as it could be dangerous for us. There could be a chance that a fight urs between two other groups of Warriors from others."


    " No, I don''t think you guys notice but the moment I feel the vibration I also feel the amount of the dark spiritual energy increases for a moment. So definitely something unexpected happened to that area but I don''t think it would be good to approach that area carelessly. Immediately told our people to maintain a distance from that area and try not to approach that area."


    Themander of the Lustar wanted to know what happened. Some minutes ago suddenly the whole dangerous zone began to check violently and in the next second with a high observation technique also felt the amount of dark spiritual energy increase.


    This immediately makes them very curious to know what happened but at the same time approaching that area could be dangerous so everyone tells their people to maintain their distance even if they try to find out what happened.


    ____________________________________


    Sam has alreadye back to the Warrior Association. He did not want to waste more time in that ce as he was still reading the memory of those people that he captured. But aftering to the warrior association he immediately told some people to watch over that area.


    Alena and the others also got informed by the Warrior Association that Sam had alreadye back. All of them immediately began to teleport inside the Warrior Association as they had some questions to ask about the previous incident that happened some minutes ago Find exclusive stories on m_v l|e-NovelBin

 Chapter 786: Chapter 786 - Dark snake

    Sam begins to exin to them all the information that he found this time. You also inform them about the monster and the present he feels outside of that second Base. Unfortunately, he was unable to capture that person and already killed that monster.


    Sam already brings out the dead body of the monster. The moment he brings out the dead body the dark spiritual energy instantly increases in that ce. But before fortunately Sam already uses the power of domain and using the power of domain he already controls the dark spiritual energy.


    Only then everyone present in that room is able to rx. For a moment everyone became scared as they thought they would get affected by the dark spiritual energy. But fortunately, Sam can stop that dark spiritual energy from affecting them.


    Only then everybody gets to see the dead body of that Monster which looks like a big snake but it has to head. The Monster has a dark shell cover on his body. But even with all of these, The Monster is dead right now. Now everyone is naturally very interested in knowing the process of killing that Monster but Sam did not exin this.


    "This is a Monster called the dark snake. These Monsters belong to Terraria but I did not think that those dark humans would be able to bring this Monster inside our. As you can tell these can use dark spiritual energy and they also have a dark spiritual energy core inside their body.


    They also have powerful defenses. They are also very fast and they can use the dark element. Fighting those Monsters is very difficult if you are not able to counterattack them or able to avoid their attack.


    But as those Monsters have dark spiritual energy, it bes easy for all the dark humans or those Abyss humans to control this type of Monster if they have powerful mind control techniques or something like that.


    Looks like I was quite wrong. Previously I thought those dark humans would not be able to bring out any Monster from Terraria. They have the chance to control monsters from our but it looks like they decided to bring out the Monster from Terraria.


    Please give me a very bad warning because I am very familiar with the attack pattern of those Abyss humans. I will tell you details after dealing with the trouble of our what happens in Terraria but I can tell you that most of the time those Abyss humans will control arge number of Monsters to attack every kingdom.


    It Looks like those dark humans wanted to follow the same process and they are already able to bring out more Monsters from Terraria who are more powerfulpared to our Monsters and more dangerous.


    There could be a chance that they would try to control more Monsters on our and when the code appears on the surface area they will attack everyone using those Monsters. It will give them an advantage and also they will try to use that advantage to get the core.


    But don''t worry it looks like they won''t be able to seed in affecting the spiritual system of our. Recently they were just able to finish a prototype of this ritual but unfortunately, it looks like it still has not beenpleted and those five people previously also did not have a 100% chance to seed in that ritual.


    But even with that during the war, inform every one of our Warriors who will be joining us to fight those people from others that they should also focus on defending their Minds from this kind of attack.


    Now even though I am unable to capture that person who is trying to restrict me from doing anything, I already gave that person a warning and it looks like those dark humans would not try to do anything like that once again. Naturally, before the core did not appear on the surface area nobody wanted to lose their force and did not want to get discovered by us.


    So like those other people from differents, the dark humans will also try to hide themselves. I just did not know how long it would take the core to appear on the surface area. Even though day by day I can feel the restriction force getting weaker still it will take some time for that core to appear on the surface area.


    I already informed our Warriors to send their drones in that way and observe the surrounding area. Even though there could be a chance that those drones got destroyed, I still wanted to see if we could find any kind of suspicious movement in the danger zone or not.


    Even though I am not sure, it could be a possibility that people from the other are also hiding themselves in the danger zone. I just recently wanted to quickly finish reading the memory of those people, so I did not have the time to search in the danger zone.


    Also, our drones will not work in the danger zone very well as thework in that area is weak so I also did not tell the warriors to search around the danger. But at least with the help of those drones, we would be able to find precious movement around the border City."


    After exining all of these and also about the monster Sam finally became silent and gave everyone the time to digest all that information. Sometimeter suddenly John asked him about other Monsters who can also use the dark spiritual energy and those monsters belong to Terraria.


    "Unfortunately I did not know that many monsters can use dark spiritual energy. I only know if you up them but there could be a possibility that those dark humans will not bring those real Monsters who have the natural dark spiritual energy core.


    They also have some illegal process that can help them turn any Monsters into a dark spiritual energy monster. This is a very dangerous thing and this is the reason that I want everyone who will participate in the war to be very careful about this.


    Other than that I only know if you up them like the ghost Monsters or the Monsters who can use the dark element like those dark snakes or the Monsters who can use the shadow element like shadow cats. Other than that more Monsters can also use the dark spiritual energy but unfortunately, I did not get the chance to meet those Monsters.


    But don''t worry, I already have the book about those Monsters that I bought from Terraria to have a better understanding of those Monsters. At least that information would be able to help us if our Warriors face those Monsters."


    _____________________________


    In that part of the danger zone where Sam destroyed those second ways already got surrounded by the drones and those drones watching over the surrounding area alongside that base.


    Even Sam did not know if they had more bases like this or not. But one thing is clear: those people will try to use the Monsters against the Warriors of Eden Blue and those Warriors of others.


    It looks like a very tough situation is going to appear during the war. All the Warriors of Eden Blue not only have to worry about the Warriors of others but they also have to prepare for those Monsters who can take their life in a single second.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam sometimeter decided to go back to thest stronghold to read the memory of those remaining people. Mira, Alena, and three more people also want inside thest stronghold while the remaining people will be patrolling around the wholesale. Even the safe zone does not have any such species movement right now but still nobody could give them guarantees that nothing like that would happen.


    But all of them already told Sam that after finishing their work they will try to visit him and if necessary they will also help read the memory of those captured people. With this without wasting a single second Sam already went to the stronghold.


    At this time, none of them know that because of the previous incident of Sam all those people who are trying to think about making a move have already stopped there.


    They were not there to go to the safe zone right now as they did not want to attract the attention of the unknown factor who could easily destroy an area like this. Also, they can already feel the amount of dark spiritual energy which increases rapidly. Now even though it once again became normal but still nobody wanted to recklessly make any move.


    Sam at this time aftering to thest stronghold once again visited those people first and after looking at their condition he decided to tell his teacher and the others about the defense mechanism present in the head of these people.


    If they wanted to help Sam then naturally they needed to learn how to unlock those barriers. With that, they can help in this process.

 Chapter 787: Chapter 787 - Should we help him?

    "Should we go to Sam''s to help him? I already know many people from differents came to this so that they can get to the core of that."


    " No, I don''t think we needed to go there as Sam is alone to handle those people. First of all, you should know that he already reached theary grade before going back to his so he is easily able to use the power of domain even in restriction force.


    So we should trust Sam that he would be able to handle everything. But still, I am very worried about him, and like you said I also wanted to go to his to help him. But that will take us too much time and who can give us the guarantee that during that time no sudden serious situation will appear on our?


    First of all, even though abyss humans and those dark humans have stopped appearing on our, there could still be a possibility that those abyss humans are targeting our and waiting for the right time to bring out their force.


    From the start as you know those abyss humans already lost many of their people so definitely they were not going to attack that quickly as they also needed the time to prepare themselves for this kind of matter.


    It is just I don''t know if those abyss humans will interfere in this matter or not. First of all, there could be a chance that they will also involve themselves so that they can create a powerful person withary-grade power. But even with all of this, I have full confidence in Sam."


    Currently, the human king and the Oni king from Terria are talking with each other about helping Sam. However, the human Oni king does not think that they would need to help Sam in this matter as Sam has enough power to handle this situation.


    Back to Eden Blue,


    Sam did not know any of these. But, indeed, he does not need their help. He has enough power to handle everything on his own but he is still worried about the safety of those people because of those prime Dragons and those dark humans.


    First of all, only those dark humans can affect most people who are currently inside the strongholds. Dark spiritual energy is a very surprising thing that can even go through those Strongholds easily as it is just spiritual energy.


    Explore more at m,v l''e-NovelBin


    But after that, those dark humans can affect the minds of those people who do not have that much powerful protection inside their minds or their bodies to help them get away from the effects of those dark spiritual energies.


    On the other hand, those primed Dragons arepletely and unexpectedly a matter of who stays away from Eden blue but it looks like from time to time they get closer to that and want to see if the restriction force is still present or not.


    Unfortunately every time he can send those Monsters outside of the atmosphere but when he goes outside of the he is unable to find them. It looks like those Monsters also can hide themselves and that ability is strongerpared to those people from others.


    On the other hand, he already killed those 8 dark humans after getting all this information and after realizing that those 8 people would not be used after that. First of all, he read the memory of those 8 people so after reading the memory those 8 people became useless.


    So Sam already killed those 8 people. Now he is present in thest stronghold to read the memory of those captured people. Alena and the others also help him while the remaining saints travel around the whole safe zone to see if the situation is okay or not.


    For Alena, Vena, and Mira, it bes very hard to destroy the barrier present inside the minds of those spies, and not all of them have the same kind of barrier present inside your mind.


    All of them have different kinds of barriers present inside their mind and this is the reason that all of them also take that much time to unlock those barriers without affecting the person. The good thing is that none of them will be affected inside the minds of those people. Fortunately, none of those spies have any kind of connection with the dark Spiritual energy.


    The good thing is that John and the others will alsoe there to help them in this process as they also want to finish the integration process as quickly as they can. Nobody can tell when the core will appear on the surface area but everyone can feel the restriction force just be weaker and weaker.


    The good thing is that normally those people from the other would not be able to recover their full power until the restriction force did not fade away. The restriction forces even to be weak but it still has the power to restrict every warrior from destroying the power level.


    Many of those people from others also waited for this situation and only when they became sure the restriction force hadpletely faded away.


    On the other hand, the dark humans who are present in the main base have already confirmed that they once again lost 8 of their people and it looks like they got captured by the unknown factor. One of the people tried to restrict that unknown factor when he suddenly came to second base but unfortunately, that person waspletely unsessful in this matter.


    With this, they won''t be able to affect the spiritual energy present on this. Everyone already feels for a few seconds the dark spiritual energy suddenly increases but sometimeter it bes normal once again.


    ____________________________________


    2 dayster,


    John and the others also decided to join Sam to read the memory of the captured people and with this, they were already able to read the memories of 70% of the people who were captured by Sam.


    They already have many memories about their and the of the spy. They also get to see that from the start those spies weremanded by their superiors that they should not contact them that easily.


    None of them went inside the main base that was present in Eden Blue and only contacted their superiors through the connection device. Other than that everyone also gets to know how those spies can hide themselves among those normal people.


    Every one of those people from differents has different kinds of techniques. But it is just that all those techniques have the same property which helps them hide their full power.


    People without powerful observation techniques would not be able to find the real power of the people and as none of the people from Eden Blue have the powerful technique, they are unable to find out about those people from others.


    Other than that they also get to know that from time to time they will always send the information about the safe zone to their headquarters. In these 3 years, the number of those spies also increases rapidly as every month or you can say every 2 months some of their people wille to Eden Blue.


    The technique that those people used toe to Eden Blue was not able to bring many people at once. At once 10 to 20 people would be able toe to their. That is the limit for one month and if they wanted to use that technique once again then they need to wait 2 months.


    All the spies also have the n that during the war they will try to use those humans of Eden Blue to get an advantage so that the Warriors of Eden Blue do not try to do something. They wanted to use the life of those humans of Eden Blue as bait and wanted to get the core of the without any problem.


    But unfortunately, none of them will be able to do that. Also, all the saints became angry at those people after being able to know all of these. If possible they wanted to kill all of the spies as they just wanted to use their people as a tool to gain advantage during the war.


    But Sam stops them from doing that. First of all, he wanted to use those spies during the war. He did not have any kind of sympathy with the spy as the spy or just ruthless. Those spies did not consider the life of the humans of Eden Blue worthy of their time and also wanted to use them as their tools. So Sam is going to do the same thing.


    Sam wanted to use them to decrease the destruction rate of their. Naturally, during the war, every one of those people will be able to get back their full power and in that time they will try to destroy everything around them.


    This will increase the destruction rate of their and even if none of those human''s lives get affected by these but still, it will affect their.

 Chapter 788: Chapter 788 - Earthquake

    Suddenly the whole Eden blue began to shake very violently. All the people who are present inside the Strongholds are also affected by that and are unable to stabilize themselves.


    All the buildings or you can say all the structures present in Eden Blue begin to shake violently and sometimeter every one of those structures begins to break and start falling on the ground.


    One by one every structure got destroyed but fortunately, nothing happened inside the strongholds. Also as the strongholds already activated the barrier around them none of the people inside the stronghold received any kind of injuries.


    All the people of Eden Blue became very curious to know what happened as suddenly they got affected by that powerful earthquake. Well from time to time they will get hit by an earthquake, but previously those earthquakes weren''t as powerful as this earthquake.


    This instantly makes many of them scared. Everyone wanted to know what actually happened and why suddenly a powerful earthquake like this appeared on their. Many people already predict what could happen and why the earthquake appeared and became this powerful.


    Those people already predicted the core of the would already appear on the surface area. They aren''t wrong but they aren''t right. This is indeed happening because of the''s core, but it still did not appear on the surface area.


    It is just the warning signal from the core that it wille to the surface area. Also, the restriction force present in Eden Blue is already close to breaking down. The moment the core appears on the surface area the restriction force will immediately disappear.


    Everyone from others instantly became active. Everyone wanted to know the location from where that earthquake spread around the whole of Eden Blue. They wanted to find the source of that earthquake but the earthquake already disappeared and this finding will be difficult.


    First of all, immediately the situation will be very different. This will be thest signal that the core will give everyone and next time it will immediatelye out without giving any signal.


    So with this, every person from others bes active in searching for the source of the earthquake. The good thing is that within three days the core will appear on the surface area. So nobody has to wait that long.


    Currently, almost six different groups from differents are present in Eden Blue. Alongside them, the dark humans are also present so you can say almost 7 groups of different people are present in Eden Blue. Every one of them began to search around the whole danger zone to see if they would find any clue or not.


    Even though none of those people can get back their full power, their current power is enough for them to observe the danger zone. With this, all of them began to observe the whole danger zone but in the end, they did not find any clue about the source of the earthquake in the danger zone.


    First of all the area from where the earthquake appeared will get destroyed and you can also see the clear signal that that is the source of the earthquake. Unfortunately, it looks like the source of the earthquake is not present in the danger zone so naturally, they need to enter the safe zone.


    But the main question is whether they should enter the safe zone right now or not. The core will need three more days toe out to the surface area and before that, there would be a chance that the unknown factor will try to stop them when they enter the safe zone.


    Immediately after thinking, many of those people decide that they will only enter the safe zone when they can recover their full power. The moment they will recover their full power they would not have to worry about anything. They can also deal with that unknown factor so before that they did not want to risk anything.


    But it looks like not everybody didn''t have the same n. Many of those people already became excited after getting the signal from the core. Immediately they decided to send a group of people inside the safe zone to find out the source of the earthquake.


    Even if those people are unable to survive after going inside the safe zone, at least they need toplete the mission to find out the source of the earthquake. You can say that those people are like puppets who just only have the mission to follow the order and who will send those people inside the safe zone.


    Even if they lose those people they will not care about them that much. So like this from different directions, you can see many people begin to enter the safe zone. Every one of them only has the goal of finding the source of the earthquake.


    The Warrior Association who sent their drones around the safe zone instantly became alert the moment they noticed those movements. This instantly createdmotion among all the Warriors who were present in the Warrior Association''s headquarters.


    They immediately report that to their superiors and their superiors immediately report that to the saints. One thing is that everybody has already made it clear that the earthquake is rted to the core of the. Also, it looks like the core is very close to the surface area and this is the reason those people from the other decide to make their move.


    All the Saints also got the report and they immediately told everyone to get ready to face those people. But they also immediately did not give them the order as they were also waiting for Sam to tell them what to do.


    On the other hand, the dark humans also make their moves while sending their puppets inside the safe zone. You can say even though they are unable to control any humans from Eden Blue, they decided to shift their focus on those other Warriors from others.


    Immediately they begin to control those people and send them inside the safe zone to search for the source. This immediately alerts many Warriors from others as they did not expect their Warriors to do something like this.


    Theypletely ignore the orders of their superiors and instantly use their power to go inside the safe zone without caring about anything. At this time every one of those people also has a wild look present in their mind. The eye color of those people also changes into Red like a beast.


    With this, those dark humans control those people and make them mindless beasts while sending them inside the safe zone. They did not decide to make them dark humans as that would take much time. So using those Nightmare Monsters would be enough in this situation. Also, it looks like those Warriors did not even realize when they got affected by those Nightmare Monsters.


    These also immediately create amotion among those people from others. First of all, they realize this is not the work of those people from Eden Blue. This is the work of some people who also came to that with the same intention as them.


    But unfortunately in that situation, nobody would be able to tell who is the mastermind behind all of these as they did not know anything about the dark humans. Also, those people from others lost their connection with their spy the moment every human of Eden Blue got teleported inside the strongholds.


    So they also did not know that many humans of Eden Blue also go through these kinds of situations.


    Many of their people already went out but fortunately, they were able to capture most of those people and only a few of those people were able to escape and enter the safe zone. After capturing those people they begin to observe and try tomunicate with them.


    But unfortunately in the end they realize that every one of those people is most likely under the control of some other people. Immediately many of them begin to use the mind control technique to see what is happening inside the mind of their warriors.


    On the other hand, the Warrior Association already contacted every stronghold and immediately gave every person the signal that they should not panic in the situation. They told him it is just a signal from the core so they do not have to think about anything and rx.


    Sam, who was also observing the situation, already decided to make a move. But one thing he realized was that the core still did not appear on the surface so naturally the main force of those people from others will not be entering the safe zone. Also, it looks like the core is very close to the surface area.


    Because of this, those people from others decide to make some moves. Sam also immediately told the warriors of the Warrior Association to send their drones and try to find the source of the earthquake.


    He did not know if that would be helpful or not but there could be a chance for those people entering the safe zone to find the source of the earthquake as from there the core will appear on the surface area.

 Chapter 789 - 789 - Killed

    From all directions, all those people from that other enter the safe zone and all the time maintain cautiousness. None of them know from where they will get attacked or if those Warriors of this get alert or not.


    Because of this, they are always trying to lower their presence. Not everyone has the concealment technique, but those people who have the technique are already using that to hide themselves.


    With these, they try to find the source of the earthquake but finding that ce would not be easy as none of them are from where that earthquake appeared. But one thing they are sure of is that the closer they get to the source of the earthquake, the more destruction they will be able to see.


    With this, all of them advanced to search for the source of the earthquake. At this time many of the monsoon got contacted by their base and they also got to know about the incident that happened to their base.


    Immediately that news made them very serious as none of them thought something like this could happen to them. Everyone is sure that none of the warriors of Eden Blue would be able to do that.


    So that means another group of people who also came to that with the same intention decided to attack their old people and were able to control many of their people.


    Their superiors already told them to stay very careful. Currently they not only have to worry about the Warriors of the Eden blue or the unknown factor, but at the same time, they need to worry about people who came to that with the same intention.


    All themanders of those Warriors from others can already predict the group who decided to attack their people. Actually from the start they also stay alert about the people who came to that with the same intention.


    Like this when they also create their base inside the danger zone they also get to know many more people did the same thing. With these, all themanders decided to contact each other and every one of them came to the conclusion that they would not fight each other until the core did not appear on the surface area.


    But during that time there was a group of people that none of themanders were able to contact and also those groups of people were very dangerous as every time somebody tried to approach them they would get killed.


    That group of people is the mastermind behind all of these. Currently, all thosemanders are also looking at those people who got affected by mind control and the people who are trying to help those people.


    Those people who can use the mind control technique already use the technique to control the minds of those affected people. Like this, the consciousness of those people already entered the minds of those affected people and with this, they also decided to go toward the Central area.


    The moment they came to the central area they could already see a monster like that present in that area and it was eating all the memories and all the tentaclesing out from the body of those Monsters destroying the mind of that person.


    Sometimeter,


    Somehow they can kill those Monsters but unfortunately, this instantly triggers something, and instantly all the effective people begin to shake. Look like the moment those dark humans get the signal that one of the monsters died they immediately decide to kill those other people.


    This immediately makes themanders and all the other Warriors be very serious and they already begin to use their techniques to help their people but in the end, they are unable to save every one of those affected people. Only some of them got saved by them.


    The same thing happened with all the people who came from others, and this made every one of them very serious about this matter. First of all, everybody understands that the danger is not just only from the unknown factor but also from that group of people who previously did not try to contact them.


    Meaning that they already became very angry when they saw the condition of those affected people who were currently lying down on the ground. Blood starteding out from their eyes and ears. Not only that, butter all of their eyes turn white and they stop breathing. In one word all of them died.


    This makes many of them feel very helpless as they are unable to help their people in this kind of situation. But at the same time, this incident makes most of them angry and they already begin to search around their surrounding area to find any suspicious thing.


    On the other hand, all the dark humans naturally did not kill those Warriors who went inside the safe zone. They control those Warriors to find the source of the earthquake. Also, it looks like the monster also has some capability as the moment those people enter the safe zone somehow they disappear.


    Using those Nightmare Monsters the person who controls the Nightmare Monster can also use one of his techniques. So those dark humans who are controlling those Nightmare Monsters immediately started to use their stealth techniques.


    But even with that, they would not be able to hide from Sam. Every one of them would be able to find out about this sometimeter. Currently, Sam and all the other Warriors are looking at the big screen where you can see the picture that all the drones are seeing right now.


    All the Warriors using the drones suddenly looked around all the safe zones. They also already found the source of the earthquake as that city had already been destroyed by the earthquake. Fortunately, the stronghold did not receive that much damage.


    Other than that they already saw the movement of those people from others. Many of them already disappear from their ce but anybody could tell those people most likely using some kind of technique that makes them invisible.


    On the big screen, you can already see those people look like they are trying to search for something but none of them can find anything.


    "Are they searching for the source of the earthquake?"


    One of the elders asked that question to Sam. Not that he had any doubt but still he wanted to know if this was the case or not.


    "Hmm¡­. I won¡¯t be able to give you the correct answer without reading the mind of those people but by their sudden action, I can feel that there is some kind of connection with the earthquake. With this, I previously told everyone that those people were most likely trying to search for the source of the earthquake.


    I don¡¯t know how much the source of the earthquake is connected to the core of our but what if the core will appear near the source of the earthquake? First of all, those people already experience this kind of situation where they try to steal the core of others to increase their power.


    So by these, I can tell there is some kind of connection between the core and the earthquake. But we cannot let those people advance like this. As I told all of you, none of you will leave the Warrior Association.


    I will be handling all of this on my own and all of you will just only tell me the location of those people. Also, I think more people enter our safe zone and we are just unable to see them as they use the stealth technique."


    " But, we cannot let you go on your own. I have already let you go in many dangerous situations but this time I will being with you. What if something dangerous happens to you? As your teacher, it is my duty to protect my student.


    I know that you are currently the strongest among us but still, I don¡¯t want you to leave me here while you will be risking your life."


    Some already told everyone that they would be leaving the Warrior Association but he already told everyone that they should not leave the Warrior Association right now. Well, this is not the time for them to leave the Warrior Association. Also leaving the Warrior Association could be dangerous for them.


    But it looks like Alena did not want him to leave on his own this time. All the time when Sam left the Warrior Association he did something dangerous and that made her very worried about him. First of all, he is her student and she cannot rx inside the Warrior Association when her student will put his life in danger.


    "Teacher, please listen to me. As you can see this is not the time for the war. Those people only came inside the safe zone to search for something so this is not that much dangerous. I just need to capture those people or make sure they go out of the safe zone.


    Please stay here. First of all, I did not know if those people were able to recover their full power or not. Also, I don¡¯t know how powerful they arepared to you. So I cannot bring you outside the stronghold in this situation. Please this time let me go on my own and I promise you that next time I will bring all of you to help me."

 Chapter 790 - 790 - Cancel the mission?

    Finally, Alena permits him to go outside of the stronghold alone. But she also told him that if he faced any kind of danger then he should immediately contact the Warrior Association. He should not risk his life. Sam promised him that if he faced that kind of situation then he would immediately contact the Warrior Association.


    Now, Sam already teleported outside of the stronghold and he was already flying in the sky, and beneath him, he could already see many people who just entered the safe zone. Most people are trying to lower their presence and there are many warriors, who are currently using some kind of stealth technique.


    Sam instantly uses the observation technique. It is a good technique that not only helps him to see the status of his enemy or other people but it also helps him to find the enemy who is even invisible right now.


    One by one he can see the name tag of all the people who are currently trying to hide themselves while searching for the source of the earthquake. Not only did he say the name status but at the same time he can also feel Spiritual energying out from those Warriors.


    He did not instantly attack those people because he first wanted to make sure that he would capture every one of them and not let any of them escape from that ce. To seed on this n he needed to find out the location of every person present in that ce.


    So using the observation technique he is currently trying to find out the location of every warrior who is present in that area. Fortunately, he was able to recover some of his power and that also increased the observation range.


    At this time none of those people who were currently trying to find the source of the earthquake were able to notice that Sam was flying above them. Even if they observe the surrounding area they are unable to find Sam as Sam is already using the concealment technique.


    He will not be wasting any of his time dealing with those enemies. If it was before and this is not the situation where his could get destroyed, then there could be a chance he would show up himself. But this is not the time.


    It takes some time to find out all the people present in that ce. Fortunately, everyone is in the range of his telekinesis technique. Also during the time when he is trying to find out the location of the people, he senses the spiritual energying out from those people.


    By sensing The Spiritual energy one thing he became sure that none of them reached the same power level as him and this is the advantage he has with him. None of the people were able to resist the telekinesis attack.


    Without wasting a single second Sam decided to make his moves. He uses the telekinesis technique in full power. All the Warriors present in that ce were immediately affected by this. Instantly all those people feel the force that suddenly affects them and makes them unable to move or let out any sound.


    Not only that, the power of the force begins to increase and sometimester, all of those people reach the stage where they are unable to breathe. One by one those people begin to fall on the ground as they be unconscious after not being able to breathe.


    Even if those people are from differents, they still need to breathe oxygen to stay alive. Some use days to make everyone unconscious. But at the same time, he sensed some more people who came to that ce.


    Once again he observes those people very carefully and finds out those people releasing some kind of different spiritual aura. He is already familiar with this kind of thing as when the people from Eden Blue got affected by those Nightmare Monsters, they also released this kind of spiritual aura.


    Naturally, he can already predict those dark humans most likely behind those people. It looks like those people also got affected by the nightmare Monsters. But Sam did not have any sympathy for those people. First of all, they belong to a different and they came to his to attack and get the core.


    So Sam decided not to waste his time on those people who were trying to help them. He once again uses that telekinesis technique. This time he uses a huge amount of force behind the telekinesis technique and that is enough to kill all those people. Those people did not even get the time to register or struggle.


    After dealing with those people who were affected by the nightmare Monsters, Sam decided to observe the whole city once again to see if everything was clear or not. After bing confirmed about this he decided to take those unconscious people inside the Warrior Association.


    Naturally, he will restrict them and will make sure that none of them would be able to use their power inside the Warrior Association. Using his teleportation technique he brought all those people inside the warrior association and immediately told all the Warriors to take the people inside the interrogation room.


    The interrogation room is very different from other rooms present in the Warrior Association. First of all a restriction is present in that area where nobody would be able to use any kind of spiritual energy other than the person who is the creator of that array.


    With this, he became sure that none of those people could do anything even if they regained consciousness. Naturally, he could just kill those people but as you know he is not a person who likes killing.


    Sometimeter,


    You already came to the second area where he can already feel the presence of many other people and those are the people who came from differents. Like the same group of people, those people were also trying to find something around that city but unfortunately, they did not find anything.


    Once again Sam uses the observation technique in full power and in just 1 minute he discovers the location of every person who is present in the City. After that, using his full power, he locates all of them and uses the telekinesis technique.


    Once again he is very fortunate that those people are inside of his telekinesis range. But the bad thing is that not every one of those people is in the range. Some of them are currently outside of the city and those are the people who are not in the range.


    So to capture those people Sam uses the teleportation technique toe outside of the city. The moment he came outside of the city he instantly used the telekinesis technique once again.


    _________________________________


    "Sir!!!! Something unexpected happened with our Warriors who went inside the safe zone. We lost our connection with them and we were unable to contact them."


    "Immediately tell our warriors that they are in a dangerous situation. This could be the work of that group of people who came to this with the same intention as us, or this could be the work of an unknown factor."


    One of the warriors of Luster immediately contacts his superior and tells him that he lost connection with 10 of his people. The superior or you can say themander after hearing that news became very serious and told that person to inform every one of the people who were present inside the safe zone to be very careful.


    Not just that group of people but those other groups of people from differents also got informed about this as their people also lost their connection. Immediately they contact all of their other Warriors who are present inside the safe zone and make them alert about this.


    Some of them thought that as they made their Warriors alert about this, the unknown factor or if there were any other group of Warriors who were targeting them would not be able to do anything.


    Unfortunately, they arepletely wrong as in the next second immediately they got the report that once again many of their warriors lost connection with them. Immediately these made every one of thosemanders be very serious and they currently did not know what to do in the situation.


    Should they have immediately canceled the operation and told all the Warriors toe back or should they have told their Warriors to continue the mission? Sometimeter, some of thosemanders immediately contacted their Warriors who were present inside the safe zone to forget about the mission and immediately retreat.


    But not all themanders give the samemand. With this even though many of those Warriors immediately retreat from that ce and are already trying to escape from the safe zone, you can still find many other warriors just became more alert.


    Currently, those dark humans also know about this because many of the people whom they control to go inside the safe zone immediately lose connection and many of them have already died. These also make those dark humans serious about this matter.

 Chapter 791: Chapter 791 - Angry commander

    "Sam, I can already see many of them look like they started to retreat from their location. There could be a chance they already try to leave the safe zone. It looks like as you capture those people they lost connection with their main base and with that, the main base decided to inform all the other Warriors and tell them to escape.


    We can still see many of them decided to stay in that ce and they just be more alert. There could be a chance they will immediately attack the moment they feel something is suspicious. Be careful about this."


    Alena immediately informs Sam of what is happening around the safe zone. Immediately she notices the movement of people who enter the safe zone. She can see some of those people immediately going back from the direction where they came inside that direction.


    With that, she immediately informs Sam about this. Sam after knowing this information did not be surprised because he already expected something like this. First of all, those people send their people inside the safe zone to find out the source of the earthquake.


    But he already captured many of them so this will alert those people and they will call back the people who are present in the safe zone. Before the core did not appear on the surface area nobody wanted to lose their force.


    But he was surprised when he got to know that there were many people who did not leave the safe zone. It looks like those people still have confidence in their strength and anyhow they wanted to find out the location of the earthquake.


    Sam did not have any problem with that. Also, he already decided not to change those people who wanted to escape from the safe zone. If possible he wanted to prevent anyone from discovering the location of the source of the earthquake.


    Those people who were retreating from the safe zone did not pose any danger. Because of this, he decided to focus on those people who still exist inside the safe zone. Also, it looks like many of those people also got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    Those dark humans are currently controlling those people to find out the location of the earthquake. But some did not have that much time to deal with those people or help them. With that when he will get to see those people he will immediately kill them.


    With that Sam once again leaves the warrior association and uses the teleportation system to directly go to the next city. Aftering to the ce he immediately uses the observation technique.


    Immediately he got to know the location of those people present in that ce but it looked like every one of them became very cautious. He can see two groups of people present in that ce.


    Every one of them is also alert about their surrounding area and looking at their bodynguage anybody could tell they are ready to attack anytime. But unfortunately for them, Sam will not give them the time to counterattack.


    Once again he uses the telekinesis technique and with that, he immediately gets control over those people who are present inside that city. Without giving them a single second he controls their body and in the next second makes them fully unconscious.


    Even though he feels the resistanceing out from the bodies of the people, none of them can fight back against the force. With this Sam once again makes them fully unconscious. But he did not rx as he still needed to observe the surrounding area of that city.


    ___________________________________


    "Sir, even after we alert our people we are still losing contact with them. It looks like this is still unable to escape from the unknown factor. Suddenly one of our people was also able to contact us and he informed us that somehow all the people present around him became unconscious.


    They were not even able to sense anything around them. The person most likely tried to say something more before he could do that so we lost connection with him. So it looks like that person also gets attacked by the unknown factor."


    " Damn it!!!!!!! Who is this unknown factor? Why the hell did he need to interfere with our matter? Just wait. The moment I can regain my full power I will immediately deal with you.


    Also immediately contacted all the remaining force and told him toe back. We already know that people can upgrade the teleportation system and with that, it ispletely possible the unknown factor will go to those other cities. I did not want to lose more people."


    Themander of the Elden is really angry at Sam. Sam keeps interfering with his n and this makes him very mad. He is just waiting to regain his full power and after that, he will immediately go inside the safe zone to attack the unknown factor.


    He is not alone because all themanders and all the other Warriors also have the same thoughts. They just wanted to recover their full strength. Nobody is happy when they get the news that they lost many of theirrades.


    ___________________________


    Sam did not know anything about this or even if he gets to know about this he will not care about them. Even if those people regain their full power he is not afraid of them. He has full confidence in dealing with those people.


    Well, he is quite exhausted mentally. Using telekinesis not only consumes his spiritual energy but also his mental energy. Compared to the spiritual energy the mental energy is getting more consumed and this is the reason he feels this exhausted.


    Fortunately, he almost captured all the people who came inside the safe zone. But there are some more people who most likely hide themselves. He just needed to find those people and also he wanted to see how many of these people were affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    He already killed many of them but doesn''t know why he feels that he will get to meet many of those people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters.


    On the other hand,


    Alena and the others stay inside the warrior association and all the time they observe the situation of the whole city. Even though they did not get to see Sam, they can already see one by one those people getting unconscious and after that, they would immediately get transferred inside the Warrior Association.


    All of them can tell Sam using his famous concealment technique. This is also a good thing because with that nobody would be able to find him.


    The next day,


    Suddenly everything became normal once again. There is no aftershock of that earthquake and there is no activity inside the safe zone. You cannot even imagine that yesterday all of this thing happened.


    Inside the Warrior Association, you can already see many people who previously got captured by Sam present inside the interrogation room. Yesterday after dealing with all those people Sam decided to rest and he still did not wake up from his sleep.


    Because of this, Alena and the others also did not do anything to those people. Many of them have already regained consciousness. But none of them were able to do anything inside the interrogation room. First of all the array present there restricts them and makes them unable to use spiritual energy.


    Around 1:00 p.m. finally, Sam woke up from his sleep and came back inside the Warrior Association. He already met with his teacher and every saint. After that, all of them finally came inside the interrogation room.


    Sames already and sees many of them try to attack him but unfortunately, he instantly makes them unconscious once again using the telekinesis technique. As all of them were present in the same ce it became easier for him to make them unconscious at once.


    Yesterday he prevented the saints and his teacher from reading the memory of those people. Those people definitely will have some kind of mental barrier that could be dangerous for any of them. Because of this, until he did not check the consciousness of those people he would not let any of them use the mind control technique on those people.


    Currently, Sam is curious to know why suddenly those people make those moves ande inside the safe zone. He can already predict what could be the reason but he still wants to know the correct answer.


    With this, he went in front of the first person and then ced his hand on his mind. Immediately using the mind control technique he entered the consciousness of that person.


    After entering the consciousness he already feels the restriction force but using the domain power he immediately deactivates the restriction force. With this, he began to advance to see what kind of mental barrier was present inside the minds of those people.

 Chapter 792: Chapter 792 - Just 1 more day

    "It is a good thing that none of you try to enter the minds of those people as they have a very powerful and dangerous array present inside their minds. It could kill that person immediately and also could trap anyone who tried to read the mind of that person.


    Fortunately, I am very familiar with this kind of array so I can deactivate that and also finally I will be able to read the memory of the person.


    It looks like all the people from others already get the signal that the core will appear on the surface area. All of this happens because of the earthquake which is also the signal for the core to appear on the surface area.


    The source of the earthquake would be the ce where that core will appear and this is the reason that these people got sent by their superiors to search for the ce. Well, many of them are just sacrificed warriors who have no value in the battlefield and this is also the reason that previously they did not get orders to retreat.


    I still do not know if any of those people will get the location of the earthquake or not but we need to increase the surveince around that area. Send most of our drones to those areas so that we can immediately tell if any kind of suspicious activity appears in the ce.


    Also, from the day when the earthquake appears, it will only take 3 days for the core to appear on the surface area. This is also the reason that those people from others send their people inside the safe zone to search for the source of the earthquake.


    We still have one more day before that core will appear on the surface area. One day I wanted to make everything go ording to my n. I know that those people will immediately try to attack our safe zone the moment they level to recover their power. But I would be prepared for them.


    During that time, naturally, I would not be able to fight all of them alone. I also need the help of all the Warriors of Warrior Association. Currently, we have 7 groups of different people from differents who are targeting the core of our. We also have dark humans.


    The most interesting thing is that many people from differents also got affected by those Nightmare Monsters. It looks like none of those people have any kind of information about these and with this many of their people got affected by that. But don''t worry, I already killed all of them so that they did not affect our people.


    It looks like thosemanders are not stupid when they send their people inside the safe zone. Even though all of them belong to differents, they have some kind of simr technique that has the ability to erase the memory about their base from the minds of the people who came inside the safe zone.


    Even though we have the idea that those people are currently hiding inside the danger zone, we cannot go there recklessly. The danger zone is very bigpared to our safe zone, so it would be very difficult to find them in just one day.


    Also, I don''t know if any of them have the ability to hide from my observation technique or not. Because of this, I did not want to go to the danger zone to search for them. But try to send our drones inside the danger zone."


    Sam already begins to exin what kind of information he can find in the minds of the people. Unfortunately, he is still unable to get the location of the base of those people. Even though he knows all of them are present inside the danger zone, he cannot go there recklessly.


    What if when he went inside the danger zone those people decided to attack the safe zone? Also, what would happen if those humans immediately tried to increase the amount of the dark spiritual energy to control the mind of every person of Eden Blue?


    All of these are the reasons that he did not decide to go inside the danger zone in a situation like this where he does have only one day to prepare himself for the war. But Sam still has full confidence that he will be able to handle every one of those people. During this time all the Warriors of the Warrior Association will be appointed to protect the core of their and let the core evolve.


    It will take 12 hours for the core to evolve. During that time, naturally many people will try to snatch that core but they need to stop that from happening. Akena and the other Saints prepare themselves.


    They will be mainly staying around the ce where the core will appear to protect that area from those people from others. Even though Sam has full confidence to handle those people on his own, you should know a huge number of those people currently present on their. Your adventure continues at m v|l-e''-NovelBin


    Handling those many people would not be easy even for Sam and he will need a long time to handle those people. From the start, you will be using the power of domain to handle those people as he did not want to reach anything.


    He can use his other techniques to take care of those people but why should he waste his time when he could easily take them by using the power of the domain? Because of this, he also fills up the liquid core. But he cannot recklessly use the power of the domain. First of all, you should also know that a group of monsters from outer space are targeting their for the core.


    Both are the real dangers that Eden Blue is currently facing right now. You can say even dark spiritual energy would not work against those Monsters. Sopared to dark humans have considered those primed Dragons as a real threat.


    His power of domain will be a very strong weapon to fight against those Monsters. Naturally, any Monster who can reach theary grade would not try to attack a like this which is going through the evolution process.


    The Monster will only receive a little bit of help from the core, but at the same time, the monster will receive damage in its foundation. This is the reason most of the monsters after reaching theary grade will not try to do something like this.


    __________________________________


    Currently, all those people from differents hide themselves very deeply by using their most powerful concealment array. They just only needed to wait for one more day and after that, they would immediately attack the safe zone.


    So for one day, they need to hide themselves. There could be the possibility that the unknown factor will affect them but even with that, you cannot see that people are scared that much. Many of those people believe that they would be able to handle the unknown factor after recovering their full power.


    Even people from the Earth also came to Eden Blue. Even though they previously promised all the Saints that they would help them during the time when the war would happen, unfortunately, they just lied to them. During the time they just wanted to use those people from Eden Blue for their war.


    ______________________________


    "I know all of you are very worried because of the previous earthquake. But that is not a very big matter. All of you be prepared to see the war in front of your eyes. I know that it would be a very frightening thing for everyone. But in this situation, we will try to stop the war as quickly as we can.


    The earthquake is the signal from our that the core will appear on the surface area. Just one dayter the core will appear on the surface area and as you can predict the war will happen on that day.


    I hope none of my people get scared. All of you are safe inside the stronghold and even if any try to attack you they would not try to destroy the strongholds. You should trust the strongholds as they also have the ability to counterattack those people who will be attacking the strongholds.


    All of you just needed to stay inside that ce for 36 hours. After that, everything will be over and everybody cane outside of the strongholds. I know that it is very hard for everyone to adjust inside the strongholds but we did that to protect all of you.


    During all this time we were able to capture almost every spy hiding among all of you. Because of this, also able to capture many of those people from differents. Currently, I and all the other Saints need all of your support for the war. Don''t worry if it is required then we would sacrifice our life but we will protect our at any cost."

 Chapter 793: Chapter 793 - Panic

    For one day nothing particr happened that can make the Warrior Association alert. They already sent their drones inside the dangerous zone. But even with that, they did not find anything suspicious. Using the drone all the Warriors also try to find out the best of those people from others but unfortunately, they are unable to find anything.


    On the other hand, all the people of Eden Blue are already aware that the core of the will appear on the surface area. They already prepare themselves to see the war and all of them have trust in the strongholds.


    At first, when everyone got to know about the core, they naturally became very scared. But somehow they were able to calm down. They also realize that in the situation they need to stay strong as from them the Saints will be giving their all in the battle. Discover exclusive tales on mvl


    So in this situation, they also needed to stay strong or they could be a burden for all the Warriors of the Warrior Association. On the other hand, all the Saints already came to the source of the earthquake and they decided to stay in that ce.


    They will guard that ce. Who knows if suddenly some people try toe to that area then it could be dangerous. Sam also did not have any problem with that. He is currently watching over all the border Cities from where those people from others will be entering their safe zone.


    If possible today he wanted to go out of the warrior association to find those people inside the danger zone. But he did not want to take any kind of risk. On the other hand, he already expected he would not be able to find anything as those people most likely had some kind of artifact that would hide their base.


    Every one of those people from others appears themselves for tomorrow when they will be attacking the safe zone. Everyone already knows that many people got captured during the process when their people were trying to search for the source of the earthquake.


    The unknown factor became a dangerous thing for everyone who could kill them and also the ability to find them. All of them have the confidence that they will be able to win against the unknown factor tomorrow. With this everyone is just waiting for the core to appear on the surface area.


    You can already see it at 2:00 a.m. but none of the people present in the Warrior Association rx. Everyone observes the situation in their safe zone. Who could give them the guarantee that those people from others would not try to take advantage of the nighttime to enter the safe zone?


    Not just only those people from the Warrior Association, but even those warriors present inside the strongholds are also unable to sleep. Everyone is just thinking about the war that is going to happen on their. Most of the Warriors would not be able to participate in the war and this is a very frustrating thing for everyone.


    Gloria and her family alongside Fiona are also already present in the Warrior Association. Even though Sam tries to prevent them, they have already decided they will also participate in the battle. Fortunately, some already give them the protection artifact alongside the healing artifact.


    Not just them but he uses all of his money to buy those kinds of things from the system shop and give them to everyone. In Front of the people from others, the warrior of the Eden Blue can get easily killed. This is the reason that he gives them all those things to protect themselves.


    The next day early in the morning,


    Once again an earthquake appears on Eden Blue. But this is not your normal earthquake as everyone instantly begins to feel some kind of restriction fading away from their body. All the Saints present at the source of the earthquake also feel the same thing and little by little they can also see some kind of change happening to their body.


    On the other hand, the earthquake that appears this time is not that powerful which could destroy everything, but even with that the remaining buildings and other things could get destroyed if the earthquake stays like this.


    2 hourster all the saints suddenly feel the restriction force whichpletely disappears and instantly everyone feels a huge change appear inside of their body. Markus, John, Vena, and the other saying immediately feel more powerful and they can also see the spiritual energy inside of their body already change.


    In one word everybody can already tell they break through to the next great. Alena did not break through but she also received benefits because of this. She has already be a peak S-grade Warrior.


    But that does not make any of them happy. They receive this kind of benefit but at the same time, the people from others have already recovered their full power. Naturally, they will attack the safe zone.


    As expected the Warrior Association immediately alerts everyone that they already found the movement around the border City. Those people from others already get back their full power and none of them have the thought of hiding.


    Now everyone is full of confidence and they have already decided to attack the safe zone. The core still needed some time to appear on the surface area and before that everyone wanted to go toward the source of the earthquake.


    This immediately made those people from the Warrior Association panic. Even all the Saints begin to panic after realizing the situation. They immediately told the warrior of the warrior association to contact Sam. At this time they got the bad news that none of the people from the Warrior Association were able to contact Sam.


    Sam somehow disappears when the restriction force disappears from Eden Blue. Instantly this makes them panic but they can calm down. Sam is not a person who will be running away from this kind of situation.


    So they need to trust Sam. On the other hand, Alena already informs all the Warriors of the Warrior association to get prepared toe to the city where the core will appear. Now every person from others will be targeting that city to get the core. So they need to defend their core.


    Alena, Gloria, Hina, and Victor, naturally get worried when they get to know they are unable to contact Sam. But all of them also trust him so they decided to think about the recent matter. After getting the order from the Saints one by one everybody else begins to teleport to the city where you can see the source of that quickly.


    Not only that, but when they came to the city every one of them also got a surprise. First of all, they can already feel the power behind all the saints increased. It Looks like not only the people from others but even their saints benefit when the restriction force disappears.


    Sometimeter,


    The people from the others already entered the safe zone and without wasting a single second they are advancing. They are also trying to destroy everything around them.


    For 3 years every one of them just hid so naturally they wanted to release all their frustration. Some of them directly go toward the strongholds present in those cities. Instantly all the people present inside the cities be scared when they look at those people from others.


    Everyone can already see that people from others have already decided to attack the strongholds. One by one everyone is preparing their strongest attack. This frightens many people from Eden Blue. Even if they are trying to maintain their calm, they are unable to do that.


    The warriors present inside the strongholds already came in front of everyone and were ready to use their everything to protect all the people. But at this time everyone watches the power of the strongholds.


    One by one all those attacks instantly hit the strongholds. The people from others use their full power in those attacks. Every one of them wanted to destroy those strongholds. Surprisingly they were not able to do anything even using their full power.


    The barrier present around the strongholds absorbs those attacks one by one. Like this for almost 20 minutes, those Warriors attacked but all of their attacks got absorbed. This makes those people from others be very serious and also they don''t know what to do.


    On the other hand, people from Eden Blue finally can rx after noticing the strong hold did not receive any kind of damage. Also, this thing broadcasts to every stronghold. Sam previously mentioned these so that with this every person inside the strongholds was able to calm down.


    But it did not happen as suddenly those strongholds who are just absorbing the attack from the people begin to glow and in the next second powerful spiritual fluctuation appears. One by one all the strongholds instantly release energy beams toward all the people that previously tried to attack the strongholds.

 Chapter 794: Chapter 794 - Cruel Sam?

    All those people from differents got it by the energy st. It was twice as powerfulpared to their attack and also none of the people got the time to react. Even people inside the strongholds are unable to react. They are still unable to process what happened.


    "Ahhh!!!!!!"


    Enjoy more content from mvl


    Many of those people already begin to scream in pain. You can already see many of the already dead while the remaining people are seriously injured.


    Hearing their screen all the people inside the Strongholds were able toe back to their senses. They instantly realize that the stronghold did not receive any kind of damage in front of those many attacks but at the same time, it can counterattack those people from differents.


    Instantly everyone began to cheer. Just not only them, as this is broadcasted in every stronghold, you can say every one of those people who are currently present inside the strongholds cheering for them.


    For a second everyone lost their fate in those strongholds but all of those are unnecessary. The Strongholds will protect them and they also have the feature to counterattack their enemy.


    Currently, the subordinates of those people who got injured also became angry after seeing these and they also wanted to attack the strongholds. But it looks like someone stopped them from doing that. That person is themander of that group and he instantly told everyone not to do anything.


    First of all, they did not know if they would be able to break the strongholds or not. Also, everyone should realize that in front of those many attacks, the stronghold did not receive any kind of damage.


    With this, the healer of their group already begins to heal those seriously injured Warriors. Sometimeter, they already decided to leave the city without attacking the stronghold. They needed to meet up with their main group.


    Not just only one group of warriors but every one of those groups of warriors decided not to attack those strongholds. This makes every person inside the strongholds happy. Not only that, they also regain their faith in saints and their miracle maker.


    Not just only in those border cities, but many other cities also have the same situation. With this, everyone from others became very serious about those strongholds. They also realize one thing: until they do not attack those strongholds, they will not get attacked by them.


    Many of them decided to ignore those strongholds and decided to search for the source of the earthquake. During all this time, all the saints and every one of the people who came to the Jacron city also noticed all of this. Every one of them also bes happy that none of the people who are present inside the strongholds receive any kind of damage.


    But during all this time you can see all the people trying to search for Sam but they did not find any trace of him. Thispletely makes some of them worried. But all of these are necessary because 5 minutester every one of them is already able to see Sam.


    5 minutester,


    Sam, who previously did not attack any of those people, suddenly appears in the sky of the south city. If you look at him right now then you will see he is wearing his Armor. You are already ready to battle those people from others.


    Unfortunately, he did not know what happened to those border cities butter when those people tried to attack other cities and the Strongholds present in those cities, he was able to notice the defense system of the stronghold alongside the Attack system.


    Unfortunately, he wanted to catch or you can say kill as many people as he could before they could enter the safe zone. But he was unable to do that. Previously when suddenly the restriction of his disappeared he instantly got back all of his power.


    You can say at this time he instantly teleports to an Empty ce. If he did not do that then the Warrior Association could also be affected by the impact. The moment he recovered all of his power, sudden spiritual pressure came out from his body, which can destroy everything.


    The ce where he teleports has already been destroyed. Sam needed some time to adjust his body. It looks like even when he went to outer space he was not able to recover his full power. At that time he was still able to feel some kind of connection with the restriction force but currently, he is unable to feel anything like this. Most likely because of this destruction also appears.


    But Sam is already able to handle everything and with that Sam ispletely ready to deal with every enemy. Currently, he is observing the South City and is already able to find all the people present inside that ce.


    Naturally, he is not worried about the people who are present inside the stronghold which is present inside the South City. Without wasting a single second he uses the power of a domain that instantly covers the whole city.


    Every one of those people presents inside the city or even those people present inside the stronghold instantly begins to feel something different. Everyone begins to feel dangering out from everywhere.


    Compared to those people who are inside the stronghold, all of those people from differents feel more pressure in their body which even makes them unable to breathe. Every one of them can already feel the restriction force that prevents them from using any kind of technique.


    Many of them try to escape by using some kind of artifact but unfortunately, Sam already locks everything. Nobody would be able to go outside of the domain until he did not allow them to do that.


    Inside the domain, Sam already feels every one of those people and looks like he can touch them anytime as they present in front of him. Naturally, Sam did not want to waste that much time. So he instantly burns all of those people. Those people did not even get the chance to do anything as they were unable to move from their ce.


    If you are wondering why he is not showing kindness to his enemies then it ispletely unnecessary for him. Also if you think he is very cruel then you are wrong. First of all those people from differents came to their to get the core of the. Getting the code means destroying the Spiritual system of that.


    Not just only them, they also have the n to capture every one of thes so that they can rule them. So with this kind of enemy, why should he show kindness? He decided to end them quickly by burning them into ashes. Also when he uses the observation technique every one of those people from differents has malicious intentionsing out from their bodies.


    After that, he did not waste a single second on that city and disappeared from that ce. On the other hand, all the people inside Stronghold already can feel the restriction force disappear. This made every one of them very surprised and some of them also got scared.


    But then they are still able to calm down. First of all, they have full confidence the stronghold will protect them from every kind of attack. So they don''t have to worry about anything. Fortunately, none of them noticed anything that happened to those enemies.


    But, Alena and the others saw everything from first tost. Previously they noticed Sam appear inside of that city by the drone that was present above that city. Everyone noticed Sam wearing his armor.


    Not only that, when they notice Sam, they don''t know why all of them also feel some kind of pressure that they can feel even though Sam is not present in front of them.


    This ispletely a different Sam to them. Not only did he release that pressure but by looking at him anybody could get scared. He had a serious expression present on his face. Alena was just about to call him but suddenly something unexpected happened.


    None of them can see the domain which is invisible but every one of them can tell every one of those people from differents most likely get affected by some kind of technique. Not only that, in the next second every one of them begins to burn, and in just 1 second every one of them burns into ashes.


    Now looking at this, every one of those Warriors became speechless. Nobody could think Sam could do something like this. Some of them even became scared of Sam.


    "Do you guys feel bad for those people who wanted to take over our and wanted to snatch the''s core? Don''t think about this. Sam did the right thing. This is a battlefield and they are our enemy. We should not show any kind of mercy to them as they will not show that to us.


    You already realize from the moment they enter our safe zone they try to attack all the strongholds. Naturally after destroying the Strongholds, they were nning to kill our people. So I am telling you once again don''t show any mercy to those enemies."


    Markus can feel the emotion of most of the people and he can tell some of them feel Sam is quite vicious. But he did not think like that. This is a battlefield and Sam did the right thing.

 Chapter 795: Chapter 795 - Attacking the stronghold

    After killing everyone Sam already teleports to another City. Just aftering to that city, he began to use the observation technique. Unfortunately, he only finds five Warriors from others. This time he did not use the power of the domain and just used the telekinesis technique.


    After dealing with those 5 people he once again teleports to another City. But you have to say he is not sure if he will find any people in the city or not. Currently, nobody is present in the Warrior Association as everybody is present around the source of the earthquake.


    With these nobody is present inside the Warrior association to give him the information. Not that he has any problem with that. Sam is also approaching the source of the earthquake. Everybody in the end will be present, so if he goes to that ce he will be able to meet everyone.


    With this, he appears in the next city and instantly uses the observation technique. He is already able to feel 10 people from others. Every one of those people is around peak Elite grade warriors.


    This is also the reason that he will have no problem dealing with those people. Compared to people who reach the Epic grade, dealing with those Elite grade warriors is easy. But you have to say every time he uses the power of domain a huge amount of liquified spiritual energy gets consumed during that process.


    Naturally, he doesn''t have to depend on the power of the domain to deal with those people. Don''t forget he still has his superior sword technique alongside his superior archery technique. But this time he did not decide to use any of them as he will be using the light control technique.


    Instantly he uses the light control technique and you can see a circle appear around him. Currently, Sam is flying in the sky and ten circles appear around him. Everyone in the circle has some kind of symbol around it.


    Those are the light circles. The moment he locates all those enemies, you can already see the sun raysing out from the circles and directly going toward those enemies. Well, he can use the power of domain to deal with those enemies faster, previously after killing those many enemies at once he uses 20% of his liquified spiritual energy.


    So he wanted to recover some of the liquified spiritual energy. As you know,pared to your normal spiritual energy, recovering the liquified spiritual energy is much harder. This is also the reason he decided to attack those enemies without using the liquified spiritual energy.


    All those people who advanced and searched for the source of the earthquake already felt dangering toward them from behind. Every one of them instantly turned around and already saw those sun rays.


    Instantly all those people created barriers around them to protect themselves. Unfortunately, the moment those sun rays hit those barriers, it did not even take a second for those barriers to break down. All those Warriors who were trying to increase the power behind the barriers also received side effects.


    Three of them are unable to react on time but those remaining people are somehow able to protect themselves. Unfortunately for them, Sam still did not stop his attack. Once again every one of them notices those powerful sun rays approaching their direction. Some of them once again decide to create barriers around themselves and this time they use all of their spiritual energy.


    All the remaining people try to run away by using their artifacts or something like that. Unfortunately, this time Sam increased the power behind Those attacks and with this, the speed of those attacks also increased.


    Those people who tried to escape by using some kind of artifact or their techniques did not even get that much time and already got killed. The moment their body gets hit by the sun''s rays, it instantly begins to burn their body. In just 5 seconds their body turned to dust.


    On the other hand, three people are somehow able to protect themselves but you can already see they are seriously injured. One of them already lost their hand. But once again when they face those sun rays, they are unable to do anything and just die. Before they got killed if you can see their face then you can see they haveplete despair on their face.


    After checking the surrounding area once again Sam decided to teleport away from that ce. He is unable to find any presence of other people from others. Once again he uses the teleportation system of the Warrior Association. It is a good thing that he and all the other Saints would be able to use the teleportation system of the Warrior Association automatically.


    Now back to the main matter,


    Sam already contacted his teacher when he came to the next city. He already begins to observe the surrounding area but at the same time asks his teacher about the current situation.


    "We are already ready to face those people but until now we have not found any people whoe near us. It looks like those people still were not able to find the source of the earthquake.


    Also, I don''t know what happened to you but I hope you are okay and don''t put yourself in danger."


    Alena wanted to ask many questions but currently she needed to focus on other things. Previously she also thought her student had be quite wild, but after hearing the exnation from Saint Markus, she also realized that Sam did the right thing.


    Those people from others came to their to steal the''s core and also they already decided to kill many of their people. So killing those people also is a good thing as with these they will have fewer enemies.


    "I will be trying to search for more people while I approach the source of the earthquake. During that time, if anybody has alreadye to that city, try to deal with them."


    Sam told them to stay careful and that if anyone from another came to that ce then deal with those people. Same time he told his teacher to stay very careful with those dark humans. Nowpared to anyone those people can harm his teacher and other people.


    This is also the reason that he wanted to go to the source of the earthquake as quickly as he could. Currently, he did not have the time to look for Warriors who got affected by the nightmare Monsters. He will kill every one of his enemies.


    Aftering to this new city he uses the observation technique and one second can find 20 people. It looks like those people are going to other cities after not finding anything in that city.


    It also looks like some of them attacked the stronghold present inside that city and already got killed. Sam directly flies toward their direction. Aftering about those people he uses fire control techniques to create fireballs and begin to shoot toward those people.


    As you know his fire control technique has already been upgraded to the highest level. It has already be the hell me which has the ability to burn everything.


    Those people who go toward other cities instantly feel danger. Without wasting a single second they created barriers around themselves to protect them. But in the next again they already realize that the barrier would not be able to protect them.


    The moment those fireballs hit those barriers, they instantly begin to burn those barriers. At this time those people who were trying to protect themselves had already noticed Sam and they decided to counterattack. But unfortunately for them, some don''t have to use the barrier or anything like that.


    He uses his fireball to destroy the attack of those people and in the end, those people get hit by those fireballs. Once again after killing those people, he teleports to another City. This time the moment he came to that city he felt a huge energy fluctuation.


    Instantly he realized almost 100 people were attacking the stronghold presented there. But unfortunately, even though they use their full power they are unable to damage the stronghold. The people inside the stronghold at first got scared but when they realized the stronghold did not receive any kind of damage they became rxed.


    Sam at this time did not do anything as the stronghold would automatically counterattack. He decided to use that time to recover The lost spiritual energy. Not only that he also uses a lot of mental energy that he needs to recover.


    After 10 minutes, those people finally stop attacking the stronghold. Every one of them almost uses their half spiritual energy to create their most powerful attack. But in the end, they were unable to do any kind of damage to the stronghold. Not only that in the next again when they wanted to run away from that ce, they instantly realized the stronghold began to glow.

 Chapter 796: Chapter 796 - Spirit Beast

    All themanders already get the report that many of their people are all killed. But they know this is the battlefield where they cannot show any kind of hesitation. Every one of them is currently focusing on finding the source of the earthquake.


    All of them flew in the sky to find the area but at the same time, they were aware that finding the source of the earthquake would not be easy. Also, everyone notices that they are not alone and are searching for the source of the earthquake.


    But none of them fight each other even though they are from differents. Actually, beforeing inside the safe zone all themanders talk to each other and they decide that they will first finish all those Warriors of this Eden Blue and only after that, they will decide who will get the core.


    Every one of them teamed up with each other to fight the unknown factor. You have to consider one thing: even though they got affected by the restriction force, the unknown factor still has the power to kill them or be able to find their people easily.


    Naturally, if they consider all of these then they can tell the unknown factor is powerful. Even though they did not have any idea about the power limit of the unknown factor, everyone became confident that if they teamed up with each other they would be able to handle the unknown factor.


    All themanders also already told every one of their people to hurry up. They should stay close to each other and the moment they feel any kind of fluctuation, they should immediately react. They already lost some of the people and they did not want to lose more than that.


    At this time all themanders also got the report that suddenly the unknown factor disappeared without killing anyone. Looks like after killing theirrades previously he became exhausted.


    They are right as Sam is currently recovering the mental energy alongside The liquified Spiritual energy. He is very interested to see what would happen to those hundred Warriors who attack the stronghold.


    The moment they finish their attack the stronghold begins to glow brightly and in the next second energy has been created by the stronghold and it directly went toward every one of those people who previously attacked the stronghold.


    Everyone already feels the danger and they already try to protect themselves. Some of them created a barrier in front of them, and some of them already had shields that they held in front of them. Some of them also try to use the teleportation technique. In one word everyone realized the danger behind Those energy beams and they wanted to protect themselves.


    "Boom!!!""


    " Boom!!!"


    " Boom!!!!"


    One by one many explosions appear. A hugeyer of smoke was created but you can still see the energy beaming out from the stronghold. Also, every one of those energy beams is twice as powerfulpared to the attack of those Warriors from differents.


    10 minutester, finally the stronghold stops attacking those people from differents. At this time Sam already uses the observation technique. He instantly became surprised when he noticed many life forms disappearing from that ce.


    It could be that they got killed by the attack of the strong hold on them, sessfully able to escape from that ce. Sam is not even sure about this. Sometimeter, theyer of the smoke has already faded away and he can see the condition of the people.


    Many of them already fell on the ground while many of them also became seriously injured. Only 80 of those people were present in front of him and 20 people had already disappeared from that ce.


    Of those 80 people, 20 of them had already been seriously injured while 10 of them did not have the condition to fight back. It looks like only the remaining 50 people can still fight back.


    Those people were also previously unable to notice what happened to theirrades but when finally they were also able to notice everything, they became angry. Even after losing many of their people, they did not fear the stronghold.


    It looks like every one of them became wild animals who currently have the motive to destroy the stronghold and kill everyone present inside the stronghold. Some of them have already begun to use the forbidden technique. Some of them begin to take some kind of pill which instantly increases their powers.


    One by one those 50 people once again begin to prove they are the strongest attack. This time they will not hold back. They will use their 100% power to destroy the stronghold.


    Sam, who is not far away from the ce, bes curious once again. He already recovered all of his spiritual energy but needed some time to recover The liquified Spiritual energy. We can already leave that ce but decided to see what would happen to those Warriors.


    Every one of those people from differents begins to Roar like a mad animal. After that, everyone uses their strongest attack and shoots that too at the stronghold. One by one all those 50 people begin to attack the stronghold using their full power.


    This time they are going to use their 100% spiritual energy. Once again those people who are present inside the stronghold became scared. They just celebrate that their enemies are unable to do anything to the stronghold. But instantly they were able to feel the pressureing out from their enemy once again.


    This time everyone can already tell all those enemies releasing different kinds of pressure. Fortunately all the Warriors present inside the stronghold also begin to use their spiritual aura to counter the pressureing out from those enemies.


    Fortunately, these people who previously got affected by the pressure and having trouble breathing are somehow able to stabilize their condition. Because of this, many of them be scared of those people from others.


    Sam did not me any of them as this was natural for them to begin to be scared. If it isn''t for the stronghold which protects them none of the people inside the strong gold have the capability to win against those people.


    In the next second one by one many explosions appear once again. For almost 30 minutes those people attack the stronghold without stopping for a second. The stronghold all this time just keeps absorbing the attack from those enemies. With this people who are inside the stronghold did not see any kind of crack mark on the stronghold.


    Now that gives them courage. If you look at the faces of those people when they realize that no damage appears on the stronghold, then you will notice every one of the people has a scared expression. None of them thought it could be possible that even after using their full power they would not be able to destroy the stronghold or Leave a scratch mark on the stronghold.


    Every one of them decided to escape from that ce. All of them already begin to use their techniques which would help them to escape. Some of them use their maximum agility to escape from the ce, while some of them use teleportation artifacts.


    But unfortunately for those people, every stronghold could locate their enemy who attacked them. They lock the spiritual aura of those people and based on that they will attack those people.


    Once again the stronghold begins to glow brightly. Everyone present inside the stronghold once again thought the energy beam would get created. That is not a matter this time. Suddenly spiritual fluctuation appears and in the next again everybody for something appears above the stronghold.


    At first, everyone thought it was a Monster but only then did they realize that the Monster-like thing is linked with the stronghold. Only then does everyone realize this could be the spirit beast. They also remember the words of Sam. Previously Sam told everyone when the situation would be in danger if the stronghold would summon a strong spirit beast to handle the dangerous situation.


    Now they can already realize the spirit beast appeared because it became a dangerous situation. That spirit beast looks like a tiger. But it is massive in size. Also, you can see the color of that spirit beast is white. All the ck stripes present in the body of that spirit beast already begin to blow in yellow color and only then does the beast open his eyes which arepletely red.


    "Roar!!!!!!"


    A huge spiritual fluctuation was created in that ce and the next second everyone began to feel a huge pressure. Fortunately, the people inside the stronghold did not feel that much pressure but those people who were present outside of the stronghold felt that pressure.


    Those people who are outside of the strong hold naturally get affected by the pressure. Many of them already freezed in their ce and were unable to move. Everyone feels like they are facing their death.

 Chapter 797: Chapter 797 - Killing More Enemies

    The spirit beast appears in that ce, disappears instantly, and reappears not far away from that ce. In the next again many energy beams went toward all the people who were trying to escape from that ce.


    The speed of that spirit beast was so fast that those people did not even get the chance to react. Less than once again almost 20 people got killed by the spirit beast. The power that the spirit beast is currently releasing has already reached peak Epic grade.


    Many people already disappeared from that ce by using their artifacts or something like that. Unfortunately for them when they reappeared once again they saw they were still present near the stronghold. From the moment the spirit beast appeared in that ce the space got locked.


    Not only that the pressure that keeps releasing from the body of that Monster also makes The Spiritual system of those people get affected. Once again the monster roared and instantly many spiritual beams were created once again.


    The pressure that the people inside the stronghold were feeling previously already disappeared but they already became surprised when they noticed the speed of the spirit beast on the destructive power of the spirit beast. Those people who were trying to escape or fight back did not even get the chance to do anything.


    The spirit beast just killed those people without giving them the time to do anything. Some of the already created barriers around them but unfortunately in front of the powerful spirit beam they are unable to protect themselves.


    So like this in just 30 seconds all the people had already been killed and The Spirit beast began to disappear from that ce. Instantly all the people present in the stronghold begin to cheer. They already confirmed that those people would not be able to do anything to them even if they kept attacking their stronghold.


    Also as this is broadcasting in every stronghold these boost the willpower of everyone. There are many people who get scared very quickly and after watching those things those people calm down. Finally, they can rest assured that they will not face any kind of danger.


    Sam who also saw the spirit beast disappear from that ce also decided to go away from the city to go to the source of the earthquake. He did not know in which city those people from others appeared. But in the end, those people will go toward the source of the earthquake and he also wanted to know if the core already appeared or not.


    Once again using the teleportation system of the Warrior Association, Sam disappears from his ce and then instantly reappears in that city. All the Warriors present in the city be alert the moment they feel an unknown presence appear there. They are just able to attack him but fortunately, the Saints instantly stop them.


    Sam nodded at those people by looking at their quick response. After that, he flies toward his teacher who is also flying in the sky. Every Warrior who has the ability to fly is already flying around that ce to see clues about those people from others.


    Sam on the other hand already begins to tell them about his encounter and also tells them what happened to those people who try to attack the strongholds. After hearing all the reports, those people be happy. First of all a lot of their enemies have already decreased and also they have realized that the people inside the stronghold are safe.


    They would not have any kind of danger if they did note out from the strongholds. But still, Alena and the others think about those dark humans who still have the ability to affect the people inside the strongholds.


    But not every one of them would be able to do that as only people who reached the peak Epic grade would have the ability to affect the spiritual energy inside the strongholds. So if something like that happened Sam would immediately react.


    All the saints who created the strongholds also have a link with those strongholds. Today can immediately detail if something happened to the strongholds that they created. Sam immediately told them to report him if something happened. He did not tell anyone but the stronghold that he created did not have the possibility of getting affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    Sam at this time asks them if they still found any clue about the people from others or not. Unfortunately, it looks like those people still haven''t found the source of the earthquake. But they are already close to that area.


    Many of the warriors are still watching over the drones. They also reported what happened to the cities where they suddenly found suspicious activities. Sam heard immediately after about the cities that currently have suspicious activities.


    After getting the name of the first city Sam did not waste a single second to go to that city. Well, when those people wille to the source of the earthquake it will be quite dangerous for everyone. As you know a lot of people will be present in the ce at once and handling them would not be easy.


    So before that, it would be good if he decided to decrease the number of those enemies. Sam already used the concealment technique. With this nobody would be able to find him. Wasting no time, he already uses the observation technique to find out the location of those people present in that city.


    It did not take him that much time to find out that almost 100 people were present in the city and every one of them was advancing toward the source of the Earthquake. Also by observing The Spiritual aura, Sam became sure that they did not belong to the sames.


    It looks like those people decided to team up with each other to deal with the people from Eden Blue. But unfortunately for those Warriors. Without wasting a single second, Sam uses the telekinesis technique on those people. Not only that, but he also uses the fire control technique to create mega fireballs.


    One by one he began to attack the people with his full power while those people almost lost the strength to move. Even though people try to struggle when they feel that they are unable to move their bodies, in front of the power that belongs to aary-grade Warrior, those people in the end are unable to seed.


    Also, every one of them already saw those dangerous fireballsing in their direction but unfortunately, they were unable to do anything. Some of them have some kind of artifact that could get activated if they just channel their spiritual energy.


    In this situation, even though they are unable to move, those people use The Spiritual energy into the artifact that is already present in their body. Without immediately those people disappear from that ce. But not everyone is sessfully able to escape from that ce.


    Only 5 of those people were able to escape while the remaining 95 people got killed by Sam. He took 10 minutes to kill those people. Also, this time he uses almost 40% of his spiritual energy.


    You have to say controlling those many people at once really consumes a lot of spiritual energy. Compared to the fire control technique, the telekinesis technique is consuming a lot of spiritual energy.


    Sam is surprised but he does not think this is impossible. First of all, he did not lock the face around that ce, people with the ability to use the space element would be able to escape from that ce. He can lock the space around that ce by using the telekinesis technique, but that would consume a lot of spiritual energy.


    Back to the main matter,


    After killing those people Sam goes back to the city where the source of the earthquake is present. After appearing in that ce he instantly asked about the current situation.


    Many people realized it was Sam. They look in his direction with some fear present in their eyes. They saw what happened to that city and what happened to those enemies. Suddenly they notice those enemies have already stopped moving from their ce.


    Not only that, in the next again many fireballs go toward those people and instantly begin to destroy that whole ce without giving those people the time to react.


    Nobody knows what kind of situation those people face before dying but none of them wanted to face the same situation as those people. But somehow they calm down. The miracle maker is from Eden Blue and from the day he came back to his he used all of his power to protect the.


    With this, they should not be scared of a person like this. Once again those people who look at the drones instantly report him about the nearby cities which already have such suspicious activities. Even most of the people from others are currently hiding their activities by using their concealment techniques, but not everyone does that.


    With this, those people from Eden Blue were able to notice the suspicious activity of those people.

 Chapter 798: Chapter 798 - War

    Currently, all the dark humans are also moving. They also already entered the safe zone and are advancing toward the source of that earthquake. Even though until now they were not able to find the source, it would not take them that much time to find the ce.


    First of all, they already affected many people from others and made them their subordinates. With the help of those people, the dark humans were checking those cities to find the source of the earthquake.


    They also already get information about the stronghold and its power. Even though many of them wanted to attack those people inside the stronghold, the leader of those dark humans told everyone not to do that. None of them are sure if they would be able to harm anyone inside that stronghold or not.


    Compared to those people from others the number of dark humans is fewer. So that means they cannot take risks and need to approach the source of the earthquake. After hearing the word of their leader, everyone also agrees with that and you should not forget they are just puppets who follow the order of their superiors.


    Now, also one thing you should know is that they did not activate all of their subordinates through those Nightmare Monsters. Some of the people who are also affected by the nightmare Monster are still present within their group.


    Every one of them subconsciously sends information to the dark humans. As you know when those Nightmare Monsters affect anyone that person would not be able to remember anything. The dark humans who get to know the unknown factor are already killing many people from differents.


    Every one of them also needed to worry about that unknown factor. But the leader already told everyone not to do anything until the war didn''t broke out. They will take the chance when those people from Eden Blue will be fighting those people from others.


    At that time even that unknown factor would not be paying attention to them and using that as their advantage the dark humans will try to get to the core of that. Even though they already ask for help, it looks like nobody from the Abyss world wille to that to help them.


    On the other hand, when Sam is killing a group of Warriors he does not know that already many Warriorse near the source of the earthquake. They already inform their other group and with this, they already begin to advance toward the source of the earthquake.


    Every one of them is already preparing to attack the Warriors of Eden Blue and the unknown factor. Every one of those people who reach Epic grade naturally has more powerful observation techniques so even before reaching the source of the earthquake they are already able l to tell that ce is the source of the earthquake.


    Not only that, those people already found out about the Warriors Eden Blue protecting the city. All themanders also get to know about this and they already told every one of their Warriors to attack that city and destroy everything.


    The core of the will not be affected by this kind of attack. Also, the good thing is that the core still did not appear on the surface area. So with this, they did not worry about the destruction.


    Alena and all the saints instantly feel dangering in their direction. The danger came toward them from every direction and instantly they noticed many attacksing toward them.


    "Prepare the defense,"


    Markus gave order to all the Warriors and instantly a barrier with 20yers was created in front of them. Not only that Markus and everyone already begin to prepare their attack.


    "Boom!!!!!!!"


    Instantly many explosions appear in that area and in just 1 minute you can already see the crack mark present in the barrier. On the other hand, those people from others continuously attack in that direction.


    At this time Gloria and her family alongside Fiona began to use their true spiritual energy to stabilize the condition of the barrier which was instantly able to stabilize the condition and already that crack market disappeared from that ce.


    But all of them continuously needed to supply the spiritual energy and everyone present inside the barrier could already feel the impacting out from those attacks. Gloria and the others directly help the Warriors to stabilize the barrier; they also feel the impact directly into their body.


    Those impacts were so powerful that it could already kill them but fortunately all the Warriors of Eden Blue were able to hold on. Alena and the others continuously focus on their attack and they just wait for the right moment to counterattack.


    They can already see many of their Warriors already became injured because of the impact and those other Warriors also keep struggling to maintain the barrier. Only then did Alena realize that none of them were using the barrier artifact given by Sam.


    She instantlymands every warrior through a mind link. She told everyone to deactivate the barrier as they have a more powerful barrier given by Sam. They did not have to waste their spiritual energy to maintain the barrier.


    Gloria and the others also finally realize this matter and they instantly stop supplying the true spiritual energy. Instantly in just 10 seconds the barrier got destroyed. But before those attacks could reach any of those Warriors, surprisingly an energy barrier was created in front of everyone and this time none of the Warriors used any kind of technique to create that barrier.


    Those defense artifacts given by Sam are finally working and already protecting everyone. The medical team present in that ce is already healing those Warriors who were previously affected by the impact. Alena and her saints finally get the time to counterattack.


    One by one everyone releases their attack toward various directions. Also, she and all the saints are already using their observation technique, and by using that they already can feel the powerful spiritual aura. They already became sure that there were many Warriors present among those enemies who were more powerfulpared to them.


    Fortunately, those people did not attack them. Even though Sam previously told him not to worry about anything but still after feeling the power of those enemies Alena and everyone be worried about the safety of their people.


    But all of them already came back to the exchange and began to continuously attack those enemies. You have to say that using the method of Sam they also became powerful and they were already able to injure many of the Warriors.


    You should realize that not everyone from those enemy teams is Epic a grade warrior or elite-grade warrior. Some people are special-grade Warriors. Those are the people who get affected by the attack of those saints.


    But don''t underestimate those other Warriors of Eden Blue. After realizing a protectiveyer created in front of them they also decided to counterattack. Finally, you can say the war has started.


    Currently except those epic-grade warriors you can say every warrior from differents is already attacking the Warriors of Eden Blue. At this time they also realize that those people did not get directly affected by their attack but they are getting affected by the impact of their attack. Your next chapter awaits on mvl


    Please make them realize that those people were protected by some kind of career and they are unable to break that barrier even using their full power. Only at this time do those people realize the word of those prime humans that those people from Eden Blue have some kind of artifact that can create a barrier around them that can protect them from this kind of attack.


    But even though people will get protected from their attacks, they will not be able to counter-attack and even if they try to attack they will not seed. Most of the Warriors can already feel the power of Warriors of Eden Blue. Every one of them is around special grade Warriors while only a few of them who are called the Saints are around Elite grade.


    After realizing that the fighting spirit of those enemies already increased. None of them wasted a single second and kept attacking their enemy. Fiona, Gloria, and her family also realize that none of them received any kind of damage.


    They also realized even though many of their Warriors did not receive any kind of injury they were getting affected by the impact while they did not get affected by the impact.


    They realize Sam was worried about their safety so most likely he gave them more powerful artifacts. After realizing that Gloria and the others decided to get close to those enemies and attack them. They also realize some of those powerful enemies are getting affected by their attack. All of this happens because of their true spiritual energy.


    If Sam was present in the ce then he would already get to know that almost 100 Epic-grade warriors are present in that ce and none of them belong to the same. This is natural becausepared to Terraria reaching the Epic grade is not easy for other people.

 Chapter 799: Chapter 799 - Frustrated Warriors

    "Ahhh!!!!"


    "Boom!!!!!"


    One by one many explosions begin to appear on the battlefield. Many people lost their lives on the battlefield. Compared to those enemies you can say the situation of those Warriors of the Eden Blue is better.


    Until now they did not have any casualties where they lost the life of their Warriors. All of this happens because of the artifacts given by Sam. But those artifacts are also unable to prevent them from getting injured.


    Naturally, he was unable to provide every one of those warriors with the different artifacts. He gave most of them the area defense artifacts where only one person will have those artifacts and all therades of that person will also have a barrier around their body.


    But that area defense artifacts also have a range limit. But during the battlefield, not many people were able to maintain that range and those people got seriously injured. Fortunately, the medical team is already prepared to help them. Another group of Warriors protects those medical teams while they focus on healing their injuredrades.


    Until now none of those Epic grade warriors participated on the battlefield as they prepared themselves to face the unknown factor. Before they did not kill the unknown factor they would not enter the battlefield as they wanted to save their power.


    But they can already see saints fighting intensely with their Elite-grade warriors. At first, nobody thought those Saints would be able to fight their Elite-grade warriors. But who could have thought those people would get a massive boost in their power?


    Stay connected with mvl


    Early Elite grade and intermediate Elite grade Warriors from differents having problems fighting those Saints. But they also have the advantage in their number and are currently using that to kill as many Warriors as they can.


    But because of those defense barriers around those people of Eden Blue, those people from differents are getting very frustrated. Even though they already have many warriors seriously injured, none of them can kill any of them.


    On the other hand, they already lost most of their special-grade Warriors. Even though those special grade Warriors are just canon folders, still those people from others are losing their force while they are unable to decrease the number of those people from Eden Blue.


    Currently, you can see 3 peak Elite grade warriors and 5 intermediate Elite grade warriors targeting Alena. Compared to any other saint she can create more damage and because of this, they try to kill her as quickly as they can.


    First of all, she also has a powerful defense barrier and she also has a true spiritual energy which those people from others did not have. With this, all of her attacks created more damage and killed more people.


    Even though she is just an Early Elite-grade warrior, she is still able to kill intermediate Elite-grade Warriors. But in this situation, she was facing some trouble but fortunately, Alena did not have to worry about her safety because of the barrier around her.


    Her enemy is currently attacking her continuously. She is trying to avoid those attacks. She needed some time to recover her Spiritual energy. Those enemies also realize that and because of this, they wanted to kill her.


    Alena can try to stay in the same ce while trusting the barrier but in this situation, she should not take any kind of risk. Markus, Vena, and the others also have the same trouble while they fight arge number of enemies and it gets harder for them to kill those enemies.


    If things went like this then they did not have the possibility to defeat any of those people and look like they would also lose their core. This is also the reason that even though all of them are already exhausted after using their 100% spiritual energy, they are still fighting back.


    It already saw awards but they did not see any sign of Sam. Naturally none of them worried about him, but they also realized without his help they would not be able to handle those people from others.


    Gloria and the others are also facing trouble defeating those enemies. The Warriors of the Eden Blue already killed all the canon folders and with that, they focused on those Elite grade warriors. But unfortunately, everyone realized that they did not even have the strength to injure any of those people.


    Not only thatpared to the number of those enemies, they have a low number of people present on the battlefield. This is also a reason that the situation became hard for them. On the other hand, the pressure on the medical team also begins to increase as more people get injured.


    Even though none of them got killed, they keep getting injured. Because of the barriers, none of them would be able to attack those enemies directly but they are still getting affected by the impact of those attacks and those impacts are also enough to make them seriously injured.


    Slowly Warriors of the Eden Blue begin to lose their faith in this battle. It almost took 10 peak A-grade warriors to injure an early Elite-grade warrior. Even though the situation of Gloria and the others is better, this is also feeling the pressureing out from those enemies and they did not know how long they would be able to fight those people.


    But suddenly an unexpected situation happened. Everybody present in that ce instantly feels a huge pressure that almost makes them kneel on the ground. Warriors of the Eden Blue alongside their enemies instantly kneel.


    A huge pressure makes them unable to move and the pressure is so powerful that it makes them unable to breathe. Even those Epic-grade warriors feel the pressure ofing not far away from the location. Every one of them also got affected by the pressure and this almost made everyone very alert.


    _____________________________


    If you are wondering about Sam then he already killed the enemies of the third city where he came from. After that, he was just about to go back to the source of the earthquake and suddenly he noticed something.


    He continuously uses the observation technique and by using the observation technique he suddenly feels many people releasing the dark spiritual energy from their bodying toward that direction.


    Those people have both spirit and original spiritual energy present inside their body so anybody could tell they are the people who got affected by the nightmare Monsters. Sam did not attack them as he wanted to know if the mastermind behind all of this would reveal themselves or not.


    Compared to those other people from differents these dark humans would be more dangerous for anyone to handle so he wanted to take care of those people before going back to the source of the earthquake. With this, he began to wait in that ce to see if he could find any dark humans or not.


    Like this, Sam waited in that ce for almost 2 hours. This makes him very frustrated and he is just about to teleport back to the source of the earthquake when an unexpected situation appears. Instantly he felt pure dark Spiritual energiesing in his direction.


    Anybody could tell those people are dark humans. Finally, they show themselves. Sam naturally uses the concealment technique so nobody can feel him.


    Sometimeter, almost 100 dark humans came to that ce and they had almost 155 people who were affected by the nightmare Monsters. It looks like those people did not want to participate in the battlefield.


    Even though they were going toward the direction of the source of the earthquake, Sam noticed those people did not have the intention to participate in the battlefield. There could be a chance that those people wanted to take advantage of this situation and wanted to steal the core of the when both parties were busy fighting each other.


    Sam did not think only those were the people who came to Eden Blue from the Abyss world. Most likely they have more people and those people trying to approach the source of the earthquake from different cities. With this, he wanted to quickly take care of those dark humans alongside those people who got affected by the nightmare monster.


    Without wasting a single second he uses the power of the domain which instantly covers the whole city and everyone present in the city gets affected by the domain.


    Those people did not even realize when they got affected by the domain but everyone after getting affected by the domain realized that some kind of restriction was preventing them from using their full power and they suddenly began to feel pressure in their bodies.


    The pressure also kept increasing and sometimeter Sam decided to kill every one of them. He once again controlled The Spiritual energy inside the domain and created many mega fireballs that contained the power ofary grade Warrior.

 Chapter 800: Chapter 800 - Sam joins the battlefield

    Sam decided to attack those people. Even though he could wait for more people toe to that ce, you also need to go back to the source of the earthquake. So wasting no time he uses the power of a domain that covers the whole city.


    Everyone present in the city instantly got affected by the domain and everyone already began to feel the restriction force. Those dark humans also feel the restriction force that immediately makes them unable to do anything. Not only that, everyone present in the domain begins to feel that the spiritual energy inside of their body begins to be consumed by the surrounding ce.


    Instantly, the dark humans became alert and then tried to escape using their artifact. Unfortunately, nothing happened to them and they were unable to escape from that ce. In the next second, everybody present in that face begins to burn by the fire that suddenly appears on their body.


    It happens so quickly that it takes some time for those dark humans to realize that their body is on fire. They begin to use the dark spiritual energy to stop the fire from spreading, but unfortunately, it looks like the dark spirit working as a fuel which increases the power of the Fire.


    "Ahhh!!!!!!!!"


    Discover hidden content at mvl


    Everyone began to scream in pain. Unfortunately, Sam did not have any sympathy for those dark humans. Finally, after killing all those dark humans, he decided to go back. But he did not instantly teleport back to the source of the earthquake.


    San wanted to see if he could find more of those dark humans or not. With that, he flew back to the source of the earthquake. Fortunately, he did that because sometimeter he was once again able to feel the presence of dark humans.


    Currently, every one of them is trying to hide themselves and they are already able to sessfully hide as Sam also feels the presence of other Warriors but none of them can find those dark humans.


    He decided to kill all of them without giving them the chance to do anything. It is a good thing none of able to find him and you also maintain a safe distance from the people. In the next second, a huge amount of spiritual energy begins to gather in Sam''s hand. Not only that the element of the spiritual energy also changes in the me Element.


    In less than a second a huge energy fluctuation is created in the ce and you can already see a very small fireball, almost like a ping pong ball currently floating in Sam''s hand. You should not underestimate that fireball even though it is very small in size. One of the powerful moves that has the ability to destroy the whole city in just a second.


    Naturally, he did not want to destroy the whole city and he just wanted to kill those dark humans and Warriors. Also, those dark humans and those Warriors of the others already got alert feeling the powerful spiritual fluctuation. It Looked like some of them were already ready to escape from that ce but unfortunately, Sam did not give them the time to do that.


    He directly shot the fireball toward those people which also took less than a second to cross 5 km distance in a second andnded in the center of the people.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Without giving them any chance to do anything a huge explosion appeared in that ce and in the explosion everything evaporated. All the dark humans and all the enemy Warriors got killed in that process.


    ''Well, it looks like I used too much power this time.''


    After looking at the destruction Sam realizes he uses too much power. Well after that he already began to go toward the battlefield. He did not know that the explosion and the impact of the explosion already affected the battlefield.


    Those epic-grade warriors and thosemanders already got alert in that process and they already began to search for the unknown factor. Unfortunately for them, none of them were able to find any kind of trace of Sam.


    On the other hand, all the Warriors from Eden Blue who lost their hope instantly became happy as they predicted the unknown factor finally came close to the battlefield. Even though none of them is sure if this is true or not, they predicted this would be the work of an unknown factor.


    This is true as this is the work of the unknown factor or you can say, Sam. Sam is also already flying above the battlefield and he is looking at the situation.


    He can already see the situation of the Warriors of Eden Blue is not good. Even though those artifacts that he gave to them protect them from those enemy warriors, unfortunately, they can still get injured.


    On the other hand, this is naturally impossible for those A-grade warriors to kill any of those Elite-grade warriors. This is also the reason that the willpower of those Warriors of Eden Blue getting weaker and weaker. Sam also notices his family fighting those people despite not being able to injure them. It is a good thing that none of them are injured.


    Sam already decided to make his moves. He will not be using the power of the domain as he needs to save, he is liquifying spiritual energy to deal with those prime Dragons.


    Without wasting a single second he began to use the power of telekinesis technique and instantly killed all the remaining special grade Warriors from the enemy team. Those people did not even get the chance to do anything and they just lost their life.


    You have to say that the telekinesis technique could be very powerful in this kind of matter. But it did not happen as one by one many light circles began to appear on the sky and in the next again one by one Sun rays began toe out from those light circles.


    "Boom!!!"


    "Boom!!!!"


    One by one destruction begins to appear on the battlefield and the enemy warriors get killed. Currently, all the Epic grade Warriors from the enemy team have already begun to search for the unknown factor but unfortunately are unable to find any clue about the unknown factor.


    On the other hand, the willpower of those people from Eden Blue already increased. Even Alena and the other saints, who previously felt the pressure somehow became rxed after realizing Sam finally joined the battlefield.


    "Attack your full power,"


    The enemymanders begin to give the order to their soldiers to attack using their full power. In this situation, if they still try to hold back then it would be very dangerous for them. They have already lost arge number of their people.


    Sam is also not slow as he already reacted and created many light spears. One by one those light spears begin to go towards enemies while those enemies also release their attack.


    "Boom!!!''''


    Naturally at this time, Sam is not alone in attacking those people. Every warrior of Eden Blue currently attacking those Warriors from others. One by one many explosions begin to appear in the ce. Many powerful explosions even begin to be created in mid-air.


    Now this is the time to fight back without holding back. Those Epic grade Warriors also join the battlefield and they also begin to use their full power.


    This time countless light circles appear in the sky and light beams begin to go toward those enemies continuously from those light circles. Sam continuously attacked those enemies alongside all of hisrades.


    You have to say that even with the help of those many Epic grade Warriors, the enemy team did not get any kind of advantage in this situation. The enemy team is feeling pressure in the situation.


    "Quickly initiate the operation B."


    One of themanders who were attacking the Warriors of Eden Blue already realized the current situation and he quickly told his subordinate to tell others to start Operation B. After that, themander focused on his attack.


    Sam did not know anything about this but at this time he was happy as they were getting the advantage. He can already feel the counterattack from those enemy teams bing weaker and weaker. Not long after that many people from the enemy were unable to hold on. This instantly makes the attack from those enemy teams weaker.


    ___________________________


    "You already got the signal for the operation B. Let''s move quickly. Ourrades need our help."


    Instantly many Warriors who previously hid themselves came out from their hiding ce and they began to go toward the source of the earthquake from different directions. Almost 50,000 people are present among them.


    Before searching for the source of the earthquake those enemies already made a n. They divided their force and told the second force to hide themselves and wait for their order. Currently, they already got the signal so it means the first team is already facing a life-threatening situation.

 Chapter 801: Chapter 801 - Disadvantage

    In front of those light beams, those enemy Warriors are unable to protect themselves, and in the end one by one they begin to get killed by the light beams. Currently, on the battlefield, a type of massacre appears.


    Finally, everyone present on that battlefield understands the power of Sam. Everyone also understands why previously Sam told them not to worry about the battlefield as he will be handling everything.


    Gloria and the other who previously worried about his safety finally can rx. Everyone finally understands that none of those enemies have the capability to threaten his life.


    They already kill a huge number of enemy warriors and if they continually attack enemy Warriors like this then in no time they will win this war. But don''t know why Alena and the other saints are unable to rx at this moment.


    Even though in front of them almost 20 to 30 thousand people were present and almost 60% of them were killed, they did not think those were the only people who came from those others. This is also the reason that they also observe a surrounding area while attacking those enemies.


    Sam almost kills most of the elite-grade warriors. He suddenly notices something important. Most of the Epic grade warriors escape from that ce and it looks like they already went too far away from the battlefield. Naturally thosemanders or you can say those leaders leading those people from others to attack them escape from the ce.


    Now this is quite suspicious. But he did not think that much as currently he just wanted to kill everyone present on the battlefield. After finishing them he will be searching for those dark humans who are currently hiding themselves.


    Even though there is a little chance that anyary grade Warrior from the Abyss world came to Eden Blue, he still needs to be careful about this. This is also the reason that he did not use the power of domain and wanted to save the liquified spiritual energy. Experience more on mvl


    After killing almost 70% of those Elite grade warriors, Sam already stops attacking. He already exhausted 75% of his spiritual energy. So he needs to recover his Spiritual energy. Before deactivating his attacks, he already told Alena and the others about this.


    He was just about to go in another direction when an unexpected thing happened. The whole begins to shake once again. It looks like the core of the once again giving the signal that it is alreadying out in the surface area.


    All the Warriors of Eden Blue were affected by the earthquake. Other than the saints none of them were able to fly in the sky and they were affected by the earthquake. The good thing is that the battlefield did not have anyrge buildings or something like that.


    But this also gives all those enemy Warriors the advantage. First of all, Sam has already stopped attacking them. On the other hand, most of those Warriors were affected by the earthquake and only those Saints kept attacking them.


    Unfortunately, they were unable to do any damage and also those Epic-grade warriors were easily able to counter the attack from the saints. These give them the advantage and using the advantage those enemy Warriors already injured most of the Warriors of Eden Blue.


    When they noticed that those special grade Warriors were affected by the earthquake, without wasting a single second targeted those special grade Warriors. In a situation like this, even Sam is unable to create a barrier in front of those Warriors.


    One by one many big explosions appeared in that ce and the impact of those explosions already affected those Warriors. The good thing is that they did not directly get affected by the explosion. One by one every one of those Warriors was sent backward.


    Those team leaders who have the artifact instantly begin to channel more spiritual energy toward those artifacts given by Sam. With this instantly a huge barrier was created in front of those Warriors and this barrier is more powerfulpared to before.


    The medical team quickly responds and they already begin to heal those injured Warriors. This time those injuries are quite serious and it will take some time for those medical Warriors to heal.


    Enemy Warriors on the other hand did not stop for a second and then continuously attacked those warriors. Fortunately because of those powerful barriers this time many of them didn''t even receive any kind of impact on anything like that.


    But the problem is that every one of those leaders can feel a huge amount of spiritual energy getting consumed by those artifacts. The problem was that they did not know how long they would be able to keep activating the barrier.


    The saints are currently busy fighting or you can say trying to injure those epic-grade warriors. Unfortunately, none of them seed in this. If Sam did note to that ce then nobody wanted to imagine what could happen to them.


    Fortunately, Sam is present in that ce and he takes the lead role to protect everyone and to kill those enemies. First of all, you should know that everyone knows that Sam is currently just recovering Spiritual energy. So until then, they were somehow able to hold on.


    This is also the reason that even though it is very frustrating that none of the Saints were able to defeat the enemy warriors, they did not be anxious about this. They just needed to hold on until Sam did not recover his spiritual energy.


    They have to consider that from the moment Sam came back to Eden Blue he was taking most of the burden to protect his. Today also because of his help they did not have any kind of casualties except some injuries.


    None of their people died on the battlefield. This is a huge achievement during the war. Also, they needed to depend on Sam to kill those enemy Warriors. Without Sam even if they have those artifacts, none of them have the confidence to be in this war. Even if they did not get killed during the world, they would not be able to protect the core.


    This is also a big reason that everybody understands the importance of Sam. He is a miracle maker.


    Sam did not know what people present on the battlefield thinking about him, currently, he is focusing on recovering his spiritual energy. But at the same time, he also observed the situation of the surrounding areas.


    ______________________________


    10 minutester finally Sam recovered his 100% spiritual energy and wasting no time, joined the battlefield. He can already notice the situation on the battlefield the moment he stops attacking those people from others.


    Naturally, he did not think this was the fault of the Warriors of the Eden Blue. Instead, he thinks that he has those brave Warriors who are ready to put their lives at risk to save their.


    Almost everyone bespletely exhausted and injured because of the continuous attack from those enemy Warriors. Even all the saints be exhausted from fighting continuously.


    He instantly saw almost all the enemy Warriors attack the Warriors of Eden Blue once again. But unfortunately for those enemy Warriors, a powerful barrier was created in front of every warrior.


    "Everyone tries to recover your spiritual energy and leave everything."


    After he finishes saying that you can already see a counter fireball speaking to fall from the sky. Sam once again uses his powerful move using the fire control technique. This is the fire rain which can create a fireball like this.


    On the other hand, the enemy team became serious once again and already felt the danger falling toward their direction. They already stop attacking the warrior of Eden Blue and instantly create a barrier.


    "Boom!!!"


    The moment those fireballs begin to hit those barriers, many big explosions begin to appear in that ce and you can already see the condition of those enemy Warriors which suddenly became very serious. Those enemy Warriors also realize the power behind Those fireballs that are falling toward them.


    Also, they realized none of those fireballs were normal. They noticed that some of the barriers had already begun to get burned by the fire that appeared on those barriers. As you know Sam already reached the hell me level which can burn everything. Using that ability he could even burn an Energy barrier like this.


    Now back to the main matter,


    Sam continuously begins to use the fire rain technique while every warrior of Eden Blue takes these chances as their advantage to recover The Spiritual energy. Most of them are exhausted both mentally and physically.


    Also, those medical teams are already able to stabilize the condition of those seriously injured Warriors. They are also very exhausted. But fortunately, the miracle maker has alreadye back into action. This is amazing how easily he was able to handle those enemy Warriors.

 Chapter 802: Chapter 802 - Dark spiritual energy

    From the moment Sam joins the battlefield the situation once again reverses and currently those enemy Warriors are facing the disadvantage. In front of those fireballs are those enemy Warriors trying to protect themselves but this is not easy.


    Not only are they facing those fireballs falling from the sky but at the same time they are facing a pressure that almost makes them unable to do anything. They use their full strength to maintain the barrier and protect themselves.


    Unfortunately in a situation like this, they are unable to bring out their full power. Those Epic-grade warriors are in better condition but still, they are facing pressure. They are the ones who keep channeling spiritual energy to maintain the barrier to protect themselves from those dangerous fireballs.


    Many of them already got affected by those fireballs and they did not even get the chance to struggle or do anything and their bodies just burned into ashes. That was a frightening thing for everyone and this is also a reason that at any cause they did not want to get in contact with those fireballs.


    But even in the situation, many people from those enemy warriors became reckless and somehow tried to attack the direction of those Warriors of the Eden Blue. Unfortunately for those Warriors Sam instantly increases the pressure on those Warriors and makes them unable to move on to anything.


    Naturally getting affected by the sudden pressure none of them were able to do anything and just got killed by those fireballs. Almost the remaining 4000 Warriors are currently focusing on defense.


    Even in that condition, you can say those people have something in their mind. When those epic-grade warriors try to maintain the barrier those other Warriors despite pressure try to create their attack. Naturally, they did not want to die like this.


    Sometimeter,


    The crack mark present in the barrier of those enemy Warriors is just getting bigger and bigger. For almost 5 hours they can protect themselves from the attack of Sam but unfortunately, after 5 hours they already lose a huge amount of spiritual energy and don''t know how long it will take them to recover.


    In front of the powerful attack from Sam even though they can protect themselves for 5 hours and 5 hourster itpletely bes an impossible event for those Epic-grade warriors. They also became fully exhausted and didn''t know how long they would be able to maintain those barriers. Explore hidden tales at mvl


    Naturally, Sam is also waiting for this chance to kill all of them. But it looks like those people have some other n inside their mind as suddenly those Epic grade Warriors deactivate the barrier and in the next second, a very powerful attack directly went toward the direction of those Warriors of Eden Blue.


    Every one of those enemy warriors uses their hundred percent spiritual energy to create that attack. Except for those Epic grade warriors everyone uses their 100% spiritual energy in that attack and because of this that powerful attack was created.


    That spiritual beam is so powerful that it has already reached the peak Epic grade. Even those Epic grade Warriors from the enemy team would not be able to defend themselves against that powerful spiritual beam. Naturally, those people wanted to kill those Warriors of Eden Blue.


    Sam also already feels the danger behind that attack which has the ability to kill many Warriors of Eden Blue. The power behind that attack already reaches the limit of peak Epic grade which is very dangerous as it has the ability to kill many Warriors of Eden Blue.


    Even if they did not directly receive the attack, the impact will be so powerful it will crush their body. Fortunately, he reacted on time and instantly deactivated the telekinesis technique. After that, he instantly created a powerful Energy barrier in front of those Warriors.


    Those Warriors on the other hand for a second already thought they were going to die. Even though they have the barrier which protects them all this time, they still don''t know why but they have the feeling they are going to die.


    Only Gloria and the others who have more powerful defense Artifacts did not feel like this but also said that the attack was very dangerous. Many of their people will die if they get hit by that attack.


    Using the spiritual energy that they just recovered, everyone instantly created a powerful barrier in front of them. Not likely by the sudden action some other Warriors were also able toe back to their senses. They also instantly use their 100% spiritual energy to create the barrier alongside Gloria, Fiona Hina, and Victor.


    One by one all the Warriors who previously were not even able to move because of fear already came back with their senses and they also began to create barriers. But unfortunately in the end they notice those barriers getting destroyed easily. It was like those barriers did not even put any kind of resistance against that spiritual beam.


    The distance between them and that spiritual beam already decreased to 100 m and they were just able to heat them when suddenly that powerful Energy barrier was created in front of the Warriors.


    "Boom!!!!!!!"


    A very huge explosion appeared in that ce which almost destroyed a 10 km area. The destruction happened because of the sh between the barrier and that powerful spiritual beam.


    The moment that destruction appears in that ce everyone present inside the barrier also feels the impact which almost makes them backward. Not only that, they can already see the whole ground begin to be destroyed by the destruction.


    It is a good thing that Sam was able to create that barrier in time or those warriors would die. Fortunately, nothing like that happened. Also, the whole ce is now covered in ayer of smoke. Every Warrior who finally can rx wants to see how much destruction that attack has caused.


    On the other hand, Sam already brought out a spiritual energy potion and gulped it down. He already consumes 80% of his spiritual energy and he needs to recover that energy as quickly as he can.


    In just 5 minutes he finally recovered the full 100% spiritual energy and began to use the observation technique. Sam wanted to see the condition of those enemy Warriors and also wanted to see the condition of those warriors of Eden Blue.


    Even though many people got injured because of the impact, at least they are safe right now. Also, it looks like those enemies already use this chance to escape from that ce. Except for some people, most of them already went so far away from that ce that even his observation technique was unable to detect them.


    Those remaining people are also trying to escape from that ce. Sam cannot let that happen. Without wasting a single second he once again uses the telekinesis technique and also uses the sun ray.


    ___________________________________


    Finally, 30 minutester, that area begins to clear and everybody can finally see the destruction. Naturally, everyone wanted to know how much area got destroyed by that explosion.


    Sometimeter, they finally noticed that almost 10 km of the area had been destroyed by that explosion. Because of the explosion, the whole ground evaporated. Only then did everybody realize how lucky they were that they were not affected by the explosion.


    Finally, Sam stops using the concealment technique and he already appears in front of everyone. He began to check the condition of those warriors. He also checks the condition of his family and sister Fiona.


    Only after that, he began to check the condition of his teacher and all the other saints. It is a good thing none of them got affected by the explosion. That was a really powerful attack that would have killed many Warriors of the Eden Blue.


    Sam instantly told everyone to recover their power as quickly as they could. They still did not win the war and it looked like those enemies were already nning something. Also, many of their enemies have already escaped from the ce.


    After telling them to recover their overall power as quickly as they could, Sam decided to check the condition of that city. It is a good thing that all the people evacuated from that city.


    Sam begins to fly around the whole city while also using the observation technique to see if he can find any other enemy near the city or not. Unfortunately, he did not find anyone.


    Those people are most likely hiding right now or have already gone far away from that ce. Also, he wanted to know what happened to thosemanders. Naturally, you should not underestimate those enemies as they would once again try to attack them.


    Before that every Warrior needed to recover their spiritual energy and only then could they fight Back those enemies. When he observed the whole city he also found out the dead bodies of some other Warriors who were already far away from the battlefield.


    Something or someone kills them and it also looks like dark spiritual energying inside from their body. It Looks like they got killed by the dark humans.

 Chapter 803: Chapter 803 - Power Amplifier

    Currently, if you look at the battlefield then you would not be able to see anyone as every enemy warrior is already dead or escaped from that ce. Using this chance every warrior of the Eden Blue recovering their health and spiritual energy.


    The battles still are not over and they need to prepare for those enemies once again. Those enemies will be attacking them once again and this time this will be more dangerous.


    Sam also uses this chance to recover The Spiritual energy but during that time he also watches over the surrounding area. He already found some dead enemy Warriors who had dark spiritual energy present in their body.


    This means those dark humans are present near that ce but using the observation technique Sam is unable to find any kind of clue about those dark humans. This is the reason he did not be rxed and kept searching for those people.


    ''How long it will take for the core to appear on the surface area? Also when those primed Dragons are going to attack?''


    Currently, Sam is thinking about all these types of questions. As you know from the start he is Saving liquified Spiritual energy to use the power of domain against those prime Dragons.


    But until now he did not find any clue about those Monsters. Sometimeter after not finding anything he decided to go back to the battlefield to see the situation of those Warriors.


    It is a good thing that they did not have any casualties during the war. Fortunately, he prepared those artifacts. You can say even when he was present in Terraria, he was thinking about the war, and because of this, he was preparing those artifacts.


    Almost one artifact caused him to use 5 to 10 million gold coins. Currently, almost a hundred of those artifacts are present on the battlefield and because of those artifacts until now the Warriors of the Eden Blue did not have any casualties.


    But there is a drawback which is that anyary grade Warriors would be easily able to break the barrier created by those artifacts. Also if those Epic-grade warriors team up with each other and create an attack whose power level already crosses the epic grade, then they would also be able to break the barrier of the artifacts.


    If the barrier got broken then the artifacts would immediately be affected. It would not be able to work properly and would not be able to create a powerful barrier like this once again.


    Fortunately, until now, nothing like that happened but he still cannot give the guarantee that nothing like that would happen. This is also the reason that every time those Epic-grade Warriors alongside those Elite great warriors created those powerful attacks he interfered. Sam did not want to take any kind of chance.


    ''Where are those dark humans hiding right now? Also, what is the n of those enemy Warriors? I think they would still try to attack us as a team. Their main priority will be to kill me and all the Warriors of Eden Blue.


    Sigh, it would be really good if next time all those enemy Warriors decided to attack at once. With this, I would be able to finish them more quickly and after that, I can shift my focus to those Monsters.''


    Sam wanted to focus on those prime Dragons. But because of those enemy Warriors, he would not be able to do that until he did not kill all of them or win the war. This is the reason he wanted that next time when those people will try to attack them once again their whole army wille at once.


    Those enemy Warriors wanted to get the core of Eden Blue at any condition. It is because even if the did not have anyone who was able to reach Epic grade, after consuming the core that person would immediately be aary grade Warrior.


    This is the reason that at any cause those people wanted to get the core. On the other hand, if you are thinking what would happen if some Warriors from Eden Blue try to consume that core?


    If any warrior of the Eden Blue tries to consume the core then he will also be aary-grade Warrior. But as a warrior of Eden Blue, he will immediately face bacsh that would immediately destroy his foundation and his spiritual energy system.


    But you can say Sam is still worried about this. He cannot guarantee that no one from his would try to get the core to be powerful. There will be no guarantee that none of them will be greedy. Greed is a very dangerous thing that can make a good person turn into a bad person.


    Fortunately, Sam has already prepared something. He did not even tell his teacher or anyone about this n. He will be creating a barrier around the core the moment it appears on the surface area. It is just he needed to know in which ce that core will appear on the surface area.


    Sam did not want to take any kind of chance. If the situation bes critical then he would put the code inside the inventory.


    Now back to the main matter,


    He checked the condition of those Warriors. Sometimeter he also came in front of his family and checked their condition. None of them receive any kind of injuries and they are also already able to heal 80% of their spiritual energy.


    It is a good thing that they did not receive any kind of injuries. During the war, he was really worried about his family. This is also a reason he wanted to kill every one of those enemy warriors as quickly as he could.


    "Did you receive any kind of injuries? Let me check your body,"


    "Don''t worry Mom, I am okay. Those people were not even able to talk to me so I did not receive any injuries. But mom and dad you need to stay careful. The next time those people will being to this ce once again it would be more dangerous as I think they will be bringing their whole force that time.


    Also, even beforeing to the battlefield, they will try to attack these ces to kill all of us. At that time all of you needed to stay very careful. You already have the link with the teleportation system so I want all of you to escape from this ce the moment you feel the danger.


    I promise you that I will handle all the matters but you all need to stay safe or I would not be able to handle anything."


    " Sinh, don''t worry son. We already told you the moment we will be facing a dangerous situation like this we would immediately escape from this ce to go inside the stronghold. We know that if we stay in this ce then we will be a burden to you."


    " Haha¡­ your mom is right. You don''t have to worry about this. Also don''t worry as we already get the link to the teleportation system, we will also bring all of our people from this battlefield."


    Sam is currently talking with his father and mother. Naturally, both of them are very worried about his situation but after seeing he did not receive any injuries both of them became rxed.


    Sam told them the next battle would be very dangerous and when they faced a dangerous situation they should immediately escape from that ce using the teleportation system of the Warrior Association. He already gave them the link and also told them to bring all the people present on the battlefield inside the stronghold.


    Even though Hina and Victor feel helpless in the situation, it is true that if they did not escape from that ce after facing a situation like this then they would be a burden to their son.


    After this Sam suddenly brings out two talisman papers. You can also see aplicated array present in that paper.


    "Mom and Dad, this is the power amplifier. The moment you channel your spiritual energy inside that paper it will immediately boost Your power for 10 minutes. I hope both of you use this when you face danger. Also, I created many of those talisman papers, and tried to share them with every Warrior." Your next read awaits at §Þ??


    Sam did not buy that talisman paper from the system shop as he did not have any gold coins right now. As you know he has an array manual. Inside that manual, he was able to learn many arrays and their applications. There he was able to find that power amplifier that boosts the power of any person for 10 minutes.


    But after that 10 minutes, that person will also feel a weakness that would make that person unable to move or do anything. So he also told him that if they needed to use the talisman paper, then before the effect of the array was finished they should teleport away from that ce.

 Chapter 804: Chapter 804 - Planing

    Far away from the source of the earthquake currently those dark humans gather around. Not every dark human was present in that ce as they did not want to stay in one ce at once. One thing they became sure of was that the unknown factor was very dangerous and he had the ability to kill all of them.


    Currently, they would need the help of abyss humans. Unfortunately, none of them confirm that they wille to  Eden Blue. Because of this, those dark humans did not approach the source of the earthquake directly.


    Even though they became the puppets of those abyss humans, that does not mean they lose their intelligence. Currently, that group of dark humans is nning What to do. They cannot just sit around, andter those Warriors of the Eden Blue protect the core.


    "I already got the news that those people from others decided to do something more dangerous. Most likely every one of them decided to join the battlefield. Compared to before this time a huge war will break out.


    We should try to take advantage of the war and get close to the area where the core will appear. We need to make sure that we do not get spotted by any of those people."


    " Don''t worry I will be handling that matter. Also, I already control many of those people from others. During this time I can control them to buy us more time so that we can get to the core."


    " Everything is okay but we still did not know about the unknown factor. From the start, nobody was able to feel his presence but he was present on the battlefield and he was the one who killed every enemy warrior. Naturally, we need to be very careful in this matter."


    " I think we should not immediately take action as it will naturally attract the attention of those enemy Warriors and those Warriors of the Eden Blue."


    Like this, they are discussing what to do at this moment. They also cannot take the risk of attacking those strongholds. That would attract the attention of the Warriors.


    "Well, we can try to attack those strongholds when all of them will be busy fighting their enemy. If we somehow can sessfully break the barrier of the strongholds then we would have a huge advantage and those Warriors would not be able to do anything when we would take the core."


    " Hmm¡­ this is a nice n, we should proceed with this. During this time no Warrior would be able to pay attention to those strongholds and we will be using that chance to attack those strongholds. I wanted to see the defense ability of the strongholds."


    After deciding what to do, they also inform all of their otherrades. Everyone after hearing the n supported the idea as that would be a good thing. If they were somehow able to break those strongholds and control those people inside the strongholds, then those Warriors of the Eden Blue, or even the unknown factor would not be able to do anything to them.


    ____________________________________


    On the other hand,


    Inside the danger zone, you can see almost 100k Warriors gather around. Sometimeter more people also join those people. If you look at all those neers, then you will notice all of them were injured.


    This is natural as they just return from the battlefield. They are somehow able to protect their life. Instantly all themanders ask them what happened on the battlefield and what is the situation about their people.


    "Nobody can survive attacks from unknown factors. Fortunately, something unexpected happened during thest moment and we were able to take advantage of that to get away from that ce. We thought that an unknown factor was going to chase us but it looks like he did not chase us."


    One of them immediately told what happened on the battlefield. Now hearing the news that everyone on the battlefield had already been killed made most of them very angry.


    " Calm down, this is a time to be reckless. First of all, every one of you should know that we did not have any danger from those Warriors of the Eden Blue. Even those Saints will not be a problem for us.


    But this unknown factor is the main problem we are facing right now. Nobody knew about his power limit and we did not know if he had the ability to handle all of us or not.


    Also, it looks like the Unknown factor has some kind of technique that makes him invisible. During the battle, we tried to use our observation ability but we were unable to find his location.


    Other than that he has various powerful attacks and I still believe he still did not use his full attack. We did not know what would happen during the battlefield but I want all of you to give your 100%.


    Not everyone is from the same but we decided to team up with each other to deal with those Warriors of the Eden Blue. At any condition we need to defeat all of them and only then can we decide who is going to get the core.


    Before that, I hope we did not have any problem regarding that matter. This time we need to attack them very carefully."


    Like this, those people from others are also discussing the n.


    _____________________________


    Sam did not know any of this, nor did he care about those people and their ns. He just wanted to kill them as quickly as he could so that he could focus on outer space to deal with those prime Dragons.


    In this situation, he cannot even go to outer space to look for those Monsters. What would happen if those enemy Warriors decided to attack when he would be present in outer space?


    Look like while they were focusing on the battlefield those enemy Warriors decided to destroy all the scouting drones. This is also the reason they cannot tell what is happening in other cities. It is a good thing that until now no suspicious thing happened in the cities.


    "Did you find any information about those dark humans or those enemy Warriors?"


    "No sir, we already contacted all the Warriors present inside the strongholds but none of them feel any kind of activity around them. So nobody can give us any information regarding this matter. But sir, we canunch the drones once again."


    " Hmmm¡­ that would be a good thing to do. Instantly do that and try to cover all the cities so that we can get the report about the current activity."


    Experience tales at §Þ??


    Markus on the other hand told the Warriors present on the battlefield tounch all the drones once again. 5 Warriors immediately teleport back to the warrior association and they instantly begin tounch those drones and then teleport them in various cities.


    With this at least they would be aware of the current activity around that city. Everyone also wanted to find out the activity of those enemy warriors and those dark humans.


    _________________________________________


    "Sir, we already sent the scouting drones to every city and also made them invisible."


    " Good. Try to search around all the cities to see if you can find anything or not."


    Markus excitedly said to those Warriors who were present in the Warrior Association.


    Currently, you can see Fiona, Gloria, and her family distributing those talisman papers to every warrior present on the battlefield. After that, they also exin to them the characteristics of those talisman papers. They also told them that only in a situation where they did not have the chance to handle anything they should use those talisman papers.


    But it will only be effective for 10 minutes and after 10 minutes they should immediately leave the battlefield. 10 minutester if they still stay around the battlefield they will be a burden to other Warriors.


    Everybody understands all of this and they also agree with that. Alena and the others also receive the talisman paper. Sam gave them those papers and he also told him they were more powerful and the effect of those talisman papers would be activated for 30 minutes. But after that, they will immediately be unconscious.


    So if they are forced to use those things then before the effect of the talisman paper ends, they should immediately leave the battlefield. Nobody had any problem with that but at the same time, they became worried about Sam.


    You can say all of them feel very helpless in a situation like this. First of all, he was unable to kill any of those enemy Warriors until Sam did not join the battlefield. Without Sam, they would have already gotten killed right now.


    Even after receiving those artifacts they are unable to do anything to those enemy Warriors. Sam carries all this burden on his while even though they are aware of that, but none of them tremble to help in this matter.


    All the saints also know why Sam is looking toward the sky. They still did not forget the word of Sam, where he told everyone the real danger still did note to their. When the real dangeres, the destruction rate of their would already increase.


    Those Monsters will not care about anything other than getting the core. They will destroy everything that will try to prevent them from getting the core.

 Chapter 805 - 805 - New artifacts

    "Sir, we found some movement around Frank City. But we were only able to detect the moment for 1 minute and after that suddenly those people vanished from their ce. We are still monitoring the whole safe zone and will immediately inform you when we will find more movements."


    One Warrior from the warrior Association immediately told Markus about this and Markus immediately informed Sam about this. Sam, after hearing that information, instantly uses the teleportation system of the warrior association to go to that city.


    Currently he does not know how long those people from another world will take to attack that ce once again so during that time he should try to decrease the number of enemies as much as he can.


    Naturally he already uses the concealment technique to hide himself and only then he teleports to that city. Aftering to the city he immediately uses the observation technique in full power.


    At first he did not find anything and already decided to go out of the city butter he realized he was able to find some presence of dark spiritual energy. It is just that he did not find any sign of living beings. He still decided to investigate that portion.


    ¡¯Did those dark humans have something that can conceal their presence? Did the receive any kind of help from Abyss world?¡¯¡¯


    These are the questions he is thinking right now while advancing toward that ce. It only takes him 1 minute to reach that ce and he immediately uses the observation technique.


    Immediately saw the names of many dark humans appear in that ce. Surprisingly if he did not use the status viewing option of the observation technique then he would not be able to feel any presence of living beings.


    ¡¯Now I am definitely sure they have something that can hide their presence even from me. Most likely they received help from the Abyss world. Well if any Abyss humanse here, then it will be more chaotic.¡¯


    He recklessly did not attack them as he wanted to find out how many of them were present in that ce. Sometimeter, Sam is able to be sure that almost 500 people are present in the City. He did not see any abyss humans present in that, so he did not waste a single second to attack them.


    He once again uses the telekinesis technique. The moment he did that, he already got control over all the people present in that area.


    "Ahh!!!!"


    In the next second you can hear many cries of those dark humans who are getting crushed by Sam. But he did not kill all of them as he also wanted to know what kind of technique they are using to hide themselves.


    Except for 10 people, he killed everyone. Only after that he decided to read the memory of those 10 people. Naturally those people also have mind protection barriers present in their mind but none of them are able to work against Sam.


    Sam is already familiar with that kind of barrier so he is easily able to describe them and then reach the center of their brain to get all the memories. Finally he found out why those people were able to hide themselves.


    From the moment they realized the unknown factor became the real danger they decided to ask for help. But it looks like no Abyss humans have the interest toe to that. But even though they did note, they sent some helpful artifacts.


    Those people send the present concealment artifact. It is a very powerful artifact which requires the spiritual energy of aary grade Warrior to get activated. They were recently able to discover those artifacts. This is also the reason that Sam did not know anything about that artifact and those Abyss humans previously never used those artifacts.


    Unfortunately no warrior of the Eden Blue blue would be able to use that artifact. That artifact required dark spiritual energy. But the drawback of that artifact is that even though it will conceal the presence of those dark humans, you are still able to feel the presence of dark spiritual energy in that ce.


    ¡¯Fortunately, I was able to get the information before those dark humans attacked any warriors from Eden Blue.¡¯


    He sighs in relief that he is able to discover that artifact. Now this is quite a troublesome artifact. If he really did not have the ability to see the status of his enemies then he would never think those dark humans hiding that ce.


    With that wasting no time he finished the 10 remaining dark humans. But the moment he killed those 10 dark humans he instantly remembered something that almost made him frightened.


    Nowe to think of it he was able to feel the presence of dark spiritual energy not far away from the battlefield. Other than the dark spiritual energy he only notices some dead bodies of enemy warriors.


    That time he did not use the status viewing option of the observation technique. What if those dark humans really exist in that ce and they are just using the artifact to hide themselves?


    Immediately he teleports back to the battlefield to see the situation. The moment he came back he rxed a little. Fortunately nothing happened to those warriors of Eden Blue. But he immediately went toward the ce where he previously felt the presence of dark spiritual energy.


    Immediately aftering to that ce he once again felt the presence of dark spiritual energy. Without wasting a single second he uses the status viewing option to see around that ce.


    As he expected, one by one he can see the names of 50 dark humans present in that ce. All of them are hiding themselves and look like they are also giving the information of the battlefield to their base.


    Without wasting a single second he uses the telekinesis technique and the fire control technique to burn them.


    "Ahhhhhh!!!!!!!!!"


    Immediately all the Warriors present in that ce became allowed when they heard the painful screams of those dark humans. Immediately everyone of them became ready to battle. Alena and the others even came to that ce from where they could hear the painful cry.


    Only when they appear in that area are they able to see suddenly 50 people appear in that ce and all of them get burned. In the next second Sam also deactivated the concealment technique.


    They were quite surprised by his sudden appearance but at the same time they are really curious to know what actually happened to that ce.


    "Well, they are the dark humans who hide themselves near our ce and give award information to their base. They are able to get something that helps them hide from my observation technique.


    Fortunately I was still able to find them. When I went to that city to deal with those suspicious movements I did not notice anything at first. I was only able to feel some dark spiritual energy present in the ce but other than that I did not feel anything.


    Only then I realize that there are almost 500 dark humans hiding in the ce. Naturally I deal with all of them and only then I get to know they are able to get some artifact that helps them to hide from my observation technique.


    But don¡¯t worry about that as I am also able to know that drawback. They would be able to hide their presence but you can still feel the presence of dark spiritual energy in that ce. So, during the time when we will be fighting those enemy warriors, pay attention to your surrounding area.


    The moment you find any kind of presence of dark spiritual energy immediately retreat from that ce. Those dark humans did not have the n to attack us directly. They wanted to attack while we were fighting those enemy warriors.


    Readtest stories on NovelBin.C?m


    Not only that it looks like they are also nning to attack the strongholds while we will focus on fighting those enemy Warriors. Those dark humans wanted to use our people against us to get the core without any problem.


    Immediately alert all the strongholds and tell our Warriors present in those strongholds to immediately contact us the moment they are able to feel something suspicious. Also told those five people inside the warrior association to stay there as we really needed some people to monitor other cities.


    The situation keeps getting dangerous and we really need to handle all of this very carefully. It is really a good thing that previously I did not ignore the ce after not finding any presence of living beings other than the dark spiritual energy.


    Only then I was able to discover those people and also able to get to know about this n. It looks like those dark humans have already decided to divide and go to all the cities where we created the strongholds.


    So immediately inform those 5 Warriors to watch over all those cities where we created the strongholds. If required send more people inside the warrior association to help them ...."

 Chapter 806 - 806 - Drawing array

    "At any cost, we need to be ready to face those dark humans. After informing all the Warriors who present inside the strongholds, told them not to inform other people present in the strongholds.


    I don¡¯t know what kind of reaction those people will have but this can alert those dark humans and they can change their n. The world is able to pay that much attention to them, so if possible we need to find those dark humans before those enemy Warriors attack us."


    Sam already told everyone his n and everyone also agreed with that. Naturally during the war, Sam would not be able to pay attention to those dark humans and if those dark humans try to do something to those strongholds, then he would not be able to help anyone.


    Enjoy exclusive chapters from NovelBin.C?m


    Also one thing that everybody knows that other than Sam they would not be able to help in this matter. Even though they did not know how powerful those dark humans are, fighting them would be recklesspared to those enemy Warriors.


    There is no difference between those enemy warriors and those dark humans except the dark spiritual energy. The dark spiritual energy has the power to affect their mind. Unfortunately none of them have any powerful mind protection technique that would help them to defend their Mind from getting affected by those dark spiritual energies.


    Actually Sam already brought out the array manual and began to look for something that can help in this matter. He did not know if he was able to find anything or not but at least he should try to search for any kind of array that would give them enough mind protection power to resist the dark spiritual energy.


    During the time when Sam was searching for such an array, Markus, Vena, Mira, Alena, John and all the Saints already started informing all the Warriors present in the strongholds. They informed them about the danger and told him to stay very careful.


    Every Saints told them to observe their surrounding area and if they really found something suspicious or if they were able to find a difference in spiritual energy then they should immediately contact them or the warrior Association.


    They also send more than 200 people inside the Warrior Association. With only those 5 people it is impossible to watch over the wholesale zone so they decided to send more people inside the warrior Association.


    Without 205 warriors they will have the chance to watch over all the safe zones. Other than that they also inform all the Warriors present in the battlefield to stay careful about this matter.


    On the other hand, Sam keeps searching in the manual for an array that can increase the mind power to resist against the dark spiritual energy. All this time nobody is disturbing him. Even his mum and dad alongside his sister also present in that ce but none of them disturb him. They just silently watched him.


    Finally 30 minutester it looks like Sam found something as finally he smiles after hearing the information about the array that he is looking at right now. By the description he can tell this array will give a good mental defense. Using that array anybody can increase the defense after Epic grade.


    Naturally creating that array is quiteplicated but fortunately in the manual he can get the detail process to make that array. Only then he lifted his head from the book and saw his parents alongside his sister present in that ce.


    He just smiles at them and then without saying anything brings out the spirit brush from his inventory. After that he begins to channel his spiritual energy into that brush and finally the brush is ready to draw the array.


    Naturally he was not going to create the array on any human as he still needed some practice. So, he began to create that array in the ground. As he expected, even though he can get the details of the process in the manual, creating that array is not easy.


    During the drawing he needed to maintain his focus and also needed to maintain the bnce. If somehow he was unable to maintain the bnce, then he would not be able to draw the array.


    Because of this, he did not want to get distracted even for a second during that time. On the other hand his family already understands these so all this time they did not say anything and also tried to prevent anyone from disturbing Sam.


    After 5 times creating that array he was sessfully able to create that array in his six trials. But he still did not stop there as still wanted to practice creating that arra.


    In just one hour he is sessfully able to master that array and he already has the confidence to create that array in every Warriors who present in that ce. He is going to create that array in their hand which would immediately increase their mental difference alongside their body difference.


    That body difference would not be useful against direct attack but it will prevent spiritual attack affecting their body.


    But before creating that array on everyone he immediately called the warrior association to get to know about the currency situation. Gloria and the others also present in the ce but all this time they did not say anything.


    "Sigh, it looks like this still did not find anything."


    Sam said that while releasing a deep breath. Only then he began to exin about the current situation to his family and also told them to take care of the surrounding area.


    Compared to those other warriors they should stay more careful as there could be a chance that those enemy Warriors or humans target them because they are rted to him.


    Only then did he tell his family toe in front of him. His father, without saying anything, came in front of him. Sam on the other hand once again enters the focusted and then begins to draw the array in his father¡¯s hand.


    Finally in just 10 minutes he had to create that array. After that his mom also came in front of him. Sometimeter, all of his family alongside his teacher and sister Fiona already have that array present in their hand.


    Sam on the other hand is it to rest to recover The lost spiritual energy. Compared to The Spiritual energy consumption when he created the strong holds this time the consumption rate is not that high. This is the reason that he was able to create the array just after finishing practicing.


    Naturally to create that array on everyone will be quite troublesome, but other than that he did not have any other way to create that array on everyone. His teacher or any other things try to learn that array then it will take them much more time. So it would be best if he decided to create those arrays.


    ___________________________________


    "Everyone stay prepared. We will be attacking them the moment the core will appear on the surface area. Until then we will not do anything and let them let their guard down.


    Even if we are unable to win the war against the unknown factor, at any cost we need to steal the core of the. So, prepare yourself."


    Onemander of those enemy Warriors told everyone about this. Even with thatrge army they did not have the confidence to win against the unknown factor after realizing the power of the unknown factor.


    But as you know their motive is not to win the fight but to steal the core. But the current problem is right now nobody knows how long it will take the core to appear on the surface area. They still did not get the signal. So because of these none of them enter the safe zone.


    Actually not just only those enemy Warriors but even those dark humans already waiting for the war to get started. As they wanted to use that chance to attack the strongholds to get control over all the people present in the strongholds. Unfortunately, nobody knows when the core will appear on the surface area and when the war will start.


    Everyone is already using the artifact that they receive from their superiors. Even though it requires almost 100 people to channel their spiritual energy , artifacts activate that. Unfortunately other than that, they did not have any other way to hide themselves.


    They already got the report from there Warriors who were hiding near the battlefield. Those people previously inform them that the unknown fracture alongside with other people came near them to see those dead bodies of their enemy Warriors, but during the time none of them were able to since the location of those dark humans.


    With this everybody bes sure that they would be able to hide themselves from the unknown factor. But suddenly they got some bad news. They hear that almost 500 people got killed by the unknown factor alongside all the people who previously watched over the battlefield.

 Chapter 807: Chapter 807 - The core coming out

    "Inform all our people to stay very careful and not to make any mistake. It could be that those previous people made some mistakes and got discovered by an unknown factor. In a situation like this, we cannot make any mistake."


    The leader of the dark humans did not think that the unknown factor was able to find them even after using the artifact given by their superiors. Because of this, they thought their people previously made some mistakes and this is the reason they got discovered by an unknown factor.


    "Sir, we should also try to send more people to the battlefield. We needed some people in that area to watch over the battlefield. also we needed to know the current situation of those warriors of Eden blue.


    I don''t know if we would be able to sessfully break the strongholds or not, so we should also try to think of a second n. We cannot just depend on a single n.``


    " Don''t worry I already prepare the second n. Inform everyone that if they are really unable to break the strongholds immediately they should go to the battlefield. We will be targeting those people present in the battlefield and mostly we will be targeting the family member of the unknown factor.


    With this even if we are unable to get the people inside the strongholds, the unknown factor would not be able to do anything to us."


    As Sam is really those dark humans nning to target his family as they know that if they somehow are able to control the family member of the unknown factor, then nobody would be able to stop them from getting the core of Eden Blue.


    On the other hand, Sam did not know about any of this. But as you know he already predicted something like this could happen so he already told his family to stay very careful. Naturally, even with the artifact present with them Sam is worried about them.


    So he reminds them from time to time to go out of the battlefield the moment this changes the situation is not good for them. If they stay in the battlefield in the dangerous situation, then he would not be able to fully focus on the battlefield.


    __________________________________


    2 hourster,


    Almost 50% of those Warriors present in the battlefield have the array present in their hand. This wasn''t easy even for Sam to create those many arrays. But fortunately somehow he already seeded on this.


    During the time when he was creating those arrays he felt the energy consumption rate already decrease. Most likely as he became more better at creating those arrays he can decrease the energy consumption to create those arrays.


    Only because of this, almost 50% Warriors present in the battlefield have that array present in their hand. Sam is currently recovering The Spiritual to help those remaining 50% people.


    All the saints currently watching over the whole battlefield. They are also trying to find any sign of dark spiritual energy around that ce. Until now they did not find anything but it did not make them rx.


    On the other hand, all the Warriors who went back to the warrior Association watched over the wholesale zone using the scouting drones. Unfortunately until now they did not find anything.


    On the other hand, those Warriors inside the strongholds already got in form by the Saints and the warrior Association about this. After that everyone became very careful and began to observe their surrounding area.


    Naturally none of them went outside of the strongholds. Everyone of those Warriors spread around the whole strongholds and with that they were able to cover every direction to see if they could find anything suspicious or if they were able to find the dark spiritual energy or not.


    _________________________________


    All the dark humans currently already present in their appointed city where they will be attacking those strongholds. But everyone maintains the distance from the strongholds. Even though they will not get noticed by anyone but they still maintain the distance.


    All of them are currently waiting for the order of their leader to attack the strongholds. They are also waiting for those Warriors from others to attack those Warriors of Eden Blue. Only at the time they would be directly able to attack those strongholds.


    Suddenly, all of those dark humans receive the order from their superiors to stay careful as some of their people have already been killed by unknown factors. Their superiors also told them not to make any mistake and focused on maintaining The invisible state.


    Other than that all the superior told him to slowly advance toward the strongholds and slowly leak their dark spiritual energy. Directly attacking the strong goes would not be able to give them any advantage as they already know what would happen if they directly attacked all those strongholds. Because of this, they need to use some other methods.


    Unfortunately they did not know that the Warriors present inside the strong holds currently observing their surrounding area to find any sign of dark spiritual energy. The moment they are able to find any sign of dark spiritual energy, they would immediately contact the Saints and the warrior Association about this.


    Now came back to the battlefield,


    Finally Sam recovered The lost spiritual energy and with that he once again came back to create those array in those remaining people present in the battlefield. It almost took him 1 hour to finish creating the array of those remaining people.


    If you wanted to know the number of the force of Eden Blue, then they have 5000 people present in the battleground. Everyone of those people are A-grade warriors. Also one more thing you should know that previously it did not have that many A-grade warriors. This is also possible because of Sam''s help.


    This is also the reason that he did not take that much time to create an array of those people. But it still took him almost 8 hours and fortunately in those 8 hours they did not get attacked by those enemy Warriors.


    On the other hand in those 8 hours they already feel the sign of core. In one area they can already feel the density of The Spiritual energy increases and somehow when they get close to that area they would feel ufortable.


    At first they did not know if all of this was happening because of the core or not, but when Sam confirmed that all of this was happening because of the core, they also became aware of that.


    On the other hand after finding out the ce from where the core will appear on the surface area, Sam immediately takes action and creates an array around that ce. He did not tell anyone about the details of that array nor did anyone ask him about this.


    "Everyone stay very careful. As the core finally came out, those enemy Warriors naturally attacked us with their full force. I could say they are just waiting for the core to appear on the surface so that they can achieve their goal.


    You should know that their goal is not to defeat us, but their goal is to get to the core of our. At any condition we cannot let that happen. But at the same time as I already told everyone, if you force yourself to use the energy amplifier, then before the effect of the energy amplifier is finished, everyone needs to leave the battlefield.


    After the effect of the energy amplifier is finished you would not be able to fight those enemy Warriors once again for almost 2 hours. During those two hours you would be a burden for all of the other Warriors, so I once again tell everyone to go out of the battlefield immediately."


    After saying all of these Sam decided to ask the saints about the recent situation. Suddenly when he was about to ask them Markus came in front of him and immediately told him that the Warriors of the strongholds were able to find some movement around Hiten City.


    After hearing that Sam immediately connected that city using the teleportation system of the warrior association and immediately teleported from that ce. It is a good thing that he has already recovered his lost spiritual energy.


    Aftering to that ce he immediately uses the observation technique alongside the status viewing option of the observation technique. That shows him the status of those dark humans who are currently hiding themselves and most likely they already came close to the strongholds.


    Not only that it seems those dark humans are already releasing their dark spiritual energy to interfere with the spiritual energy present in the strong hold. Before taking any action he first searches for those dark humans. As he wanted to know how many of those people were present in that ce.


    It did not take him that much time and he already found out almost 500 to 600 people were present in the ce. Once again wasting no time he uses the telekinesis technique to cover the whole area.

 Chapter 808: Chapter 808 - Enemy appear

    Once again the moment he uses that telekinesis technique he is already able to feel the presence of every living being in that area. It is a good thing none of them have any kind of resistance, so without wasting any time he begins to control all those dark humans.


    Not only that but in the next second many light beams were created and directly began to kill those dark humans without giving them the time to do anything. All of this happens in just 20 seconds.


    After killing all those dark humans Sam immediately did not leave that ce as he still wanted to find if there are more enemies near the stronghold or not. Sometimeter after bing sure there was nobody present in that ce he decided to go back to the battlefield.


    All this time none of those people present inside the strong hold are able to feel anything but somehow they suddenly hear louds screams. In the next second they also saw many people appear not far away from the strong hold. But it looks like all of those people have already died.


    This makes all of them very surprised as none of them know what actually happened to that ce. Fortunately all the Warriors who previously watched over the whole area begin to tell him that all of those are enemies and they already got killed by their Hero.


    The moment he came back to the battlefield John instantly went in front of him and immediately told about the second city which also had the same situation. Once again Sam connected the city using the teleportation system and immediately appeared in that ce.


    _________________________________


    All the Warriors of others already began to go toward the battlefield. Naturally they would not be using the safe zone to go to that ce as that would be risky. The unknown factor can attack them before they could reach that ce. This is also the reason previously all themanders told the Warriors to start operation B.


    As you know there are many people who also bring many artifacts which can affect the space. Using those defects, thosemanders wonder how to create a gate or something like this. That gate would be connected with the danger zone alongside that city.


    Themanders wanted to use that method to directlye near the battlefield. They also noticed that more drones appeared in the sky and those drones were watching over the safe zone.


    "Everyone gets ready. The moment we will be appearing on that ce we would immediately release our attack to the battlefield. We needed to attack from that ce as we did not want to give those wars between blue and  as we did not want to give those Warriors of Eden Blue any chance to survive."


    With that, all of them begin to go toward the gate that they have created. But the problem is that at one time only 500 people would be able to travel. After that it will take 30 seconds and only then other people who developed ite out of the gate.


    Because of this, those people who can use the stealth technique or those people who can make them invisible will be going fast and those people who did not have any technique like that will be goingst.


    Naturally it will take them some time to gather their full force in that area so during that time those people who already came to that ce needed to make themselves invisible.


    ___________________________________


    Sometimeter,


    Sam once again came back to the battlefield. This time his teacher already told him about another city in the same situation. People in the city also became quite confused because sometime ago they naturally felt the dark spiritual energy present in that ce but suddenly they were unable to feel anything.


    Sam after hearing all of these also became quite confused but wasting no time he quickly came to that city to see what was actually happening there. Aftering to that city he also uses the observation technique alongside the status viewing option of the observation technique.


    Now he notices that naturally no dark humans are present near the stronghold. He is able to find some dark spiritual energy which is already outside of the city. Wasting no time he went toward that direction. Aftering to that ce, Sam immediately takes action and immobilizes everyone of those dark humans.


    Without giving them the time to do anything he killed all of them except two people. He is going to read the memory of the people to see what is actually happening and what kind of order they got from their superiors.


    Sometimeter, he already got all the memories of those dark humans. so he already killed both of them.


    "So it looks like those dark humans have already found out that I am able to find them despite them using those artifacts to hide themselves. Because of this everybody who passed the present in front of the strongholds already began to retreat."


    Once again he came back to the battlefield and immediately told all the saints about this.


    " Those people have two choices. One is to wait for those enemy Warriors to attack them so that we would not be able to focus on those dark humans. The second one is that they would try to target the people present in the battlefield. I don''t know which option they will choose but still told everyone to stay very careful. I¡­."


    Sam did not even get the time to finish his word when he suddenly felt countless energy fluctuations and in the next again many attacksing toward their direction. Naturallypared to anyone his reaction speed is much faster so wasting no time he already created a powerful spiritual barrier in front of them.


    His sudden action already attracted the attention of those people as they still did not feel what was wrong. But those people also did not take that much time to understand what actually happened. They also already got the danger signal that almost came close to them.


    Fortunately Sam already created the barrier in front of them which is currently defending them from those countless attacks. Immediately all the Warriors prepare themselves to battle.


    "Boom!!!!"


    One by one many explosions begin to appear the moment those attacked big into sh with the barrier created by Sam. Every Warrior can see the power behind Those attacks even though they did not receive the attack but they can still feel the impact of those attacks.


    Sam can also feel the power behind Those attacks, but he did not have any problem blocking those attacks. As aary grade Warrior it became easier for him to handle those attacks. But the problem is that from who is the direction those Warriors will go to attack.


    Instantly all the Warriors became alert about their surrounding area and they were already ready to react anytime the moment they found the sign of their enemy.


    Not long after that they already feel the signing from the left and right direction. But it is just those attacks stilling toward them. It looks like some people decided to stay in distance while attacking them like this.


    Sam who focuses on the barrier also feels the spiritual aura of those people whoe to that ce. One by one he can already feel many spiritual aura. As he expected it looked like this time all the people of the enemy force were going to attack them.


    It looks like they also notice the core already about to appear in the surface area. So those people did not want to waste a single second. On the other hand Sam was thinking how to handle those many people.


    Even he is not sure how to kill that many people at once. Naturally not going to use the power of domain as killing those many people will consume almost all of his liquify spiritual energy and he really did not want something like that to happen.


    Naturally he needed to depend on his other techniques but as arge number of people were present in that ce he did not know how long it would take him to kill them. Also using the telekinesis technique to control all of them would be a foolish thing to do. It will immediately consume his whole spiritual energy and he also cannot give guarantee that he would be able to kill everyone.


    Sam was thinking all of this while the enemy Warriors one by one were alreadying to the battlefield. Currently the number of those attacks has also decreased. It looks like not many people maintain the distance to attack them.


    Sam immediatelymands everyone to spread around that area as he is going to deactivate the barrier. Without any question those people already spread away from that ce and immediately Sam deactivated the barrier.

 Chapter 809: Chapter 809 - Countless Arrows

    Well maintaining the barrier Sam would not be able to fully focus on the fight so he decided to deactivate the barrier. The moment Sam deactivated the barrier all those attacks instantlynded on the ground which instantly destroyed that whole ce.


    In the next second Sam also disappears from his ce. He already uses the concealment technique and already gets close to those enemy Warriors. All the Warriors of Eden blue also prepare to attack. One by one, they also create their attack and 2 minutester they already begin to counter attack.


    "Boom!!!!!!!"


    Currently the sh already started to appear in that ce between those attacks from the enemy Warriors and their attacks. Everybody can naturally feel the power behind Those attacks which can easily kill them but none of them are worried about this.


    On the other hand Sam already got close to those enemy warriors and wasting no time he instantly created ultimate mega fire balls and directly began to shoot toward those enemy Warriors.


    Those Warriors can also feel the dangering out from The Fire balls. So they have already stopped attacking and are already trying to escape from that ce. Unfortunately for them even if they run away from that ce the explosion range of that fireball will reach them.


    But before those fireballs could hit the ground or hit any of those enemy warriors, Sam already came in front of his people who were still present close to each other. He immediately created a barrier once again.


    Actually, the explosion range of the fireball can also affect those warriors of Eden Blue. Their barriers which protect them, can also get destroyed by the explosion as the power limit of that explosion already reachesary grade.


    This is the reason Sam reacted that quickly and came in front of his people to protect them. Naturally those enemy Warriors are not as lucky as them. The moment they get hit by those fireballs or those fireballs hit the ground, one by one 10 very big explosions appear in the ce which have the power to destroy the surrounding area without any problem.


    In front of those attacks many people already got killed, some of them trying to protect themselves using the barrier but in the end, they still got seriously injured.


    ________________________________


    Almost 1000 people were killed previously. On the other hand, Sam cannot keep using those fire balls. On the other hand he already deactivated the barrier and once again told every warrior to attack those enemy Warriors.


    Using this chance some already came this far away from the Warriors to attack them from a distance. Naturally he can fight those people in closebat. But that would not help him to kill many enemies at Once.


    Aftering to that area which is quite far from the battlefield  Sam decided to bring out his bow. You should not forget currently other than the sword technique, his archery technique is also avable to reach the superior grade.


    Alsopared to his fire control technique or light control technique, his Archer techniques are also avable to reach the superior grade. Also using that technique he can feel the energy conservation is lowpared to the light control or the fire control technique.


    Without wasting a single second Sam began to attack those people. He already began to use the rapid short technique alongside. Instantly because of the rapid short you can see countless arrows appear in the sky. All those arrows directly went toward the direction of those enemies.


    Also you can just see the number of those arrows also increases. Actually Sam uses a duplicate technique that can create more arrows. One Arrow can create 5 of those duplicate copies.


    But you should not think that those duplicate arrows would not be able to do anything. Currently even all the Warriors of the Eden blue really get amazed by those arrows that approach toward those enemies.


    "Ahhhhh!!!!"


    Almost everyone already feels the dangering out from those arrows. So they immediately stopped attacking and created a barrier around them to protect themselves from those arrows. But the power of those arrows is enough to destroy those barriers around those Warriors and like this one by one many people got it by those arrows.


    One by one you can hear the painful scream of those people. But Sam did not stop there. On the other hand those enemy Warriors also begin to start counter attacking those arrows. Most of them directly target those arrows, while other people target those warriors.


    "Ahhhhh!!!!!!"


    ____________________________


    Sometimeter Sam stops attacking those people and to recover the spiritual energy. He began to use the energy recovery technique alongside the potions. On the other hand he became very curious to know the situation of those enemies.


    He will do that after creating more rain of arrows. This time he is going to change the nature of the spiritual energy and make them fire arrows. It is a good thing that the archery technique is one of the strongest techniques which have this kind of damage ability.


    Not only did it need less spiritual energy but at the same time it had more damage abilitypared to his other techniques.


    Injust 5 minutes he recovered Spiritual energy and once again started attacking those enemies. Naturally before attacking he uses the observation technique to know the location of those people. It is a good thing that currently those people still did not fight the Warriors of the Eden blue in closebat.


    In just 5 minutes many Warriors of Eden blue got injured by the attack of those enemies. But they still did not lose the capability to fight back and as you know they can use the power amplifier anytime. It is just that they did not want to use the power amplifier that quickly.


    Once again in front of those reign of arrows those enemies needed to deactivate their attack and needed to focus on protecting themselves. Even though those other enemies who aren''t present in the attack range, instantly try to destroy those arrows by their attack, but this is not easy.


    The speed of those arrows are very fast which did not give them that much time to react. In the blink of an eye they can get attacked by those arrows.


    This is the reason that they cannot be careless even for a second. Also as you know Sam did not use normal arrows so the defense capability of those arrows was also high.


    _____________________________


    "Attack!!!!,"


    Suddenly the enemymanders give orders and instantly you can see many big fire balls and other attacks directly begin to go towards those Warrior of Eden Blue.


    Naturally thosemanders and most of their people maintained the distance from the battlefield and they also did not get affected by the range of those arrows. Even though they can already see the destruction ability of those arrows, they also wanted to finish those warriors of Eden Blue.


    So you can say that like this the intense battle broke out between the enemy Warriors and the Warriors of Eden Blue.


    It is just the condition of those Warriors of Eden Blue is not that good as they can''t even injure those enemy Warriors. Even though they feel helpless in that situation, they also know their main goal is to protect the core which already appears on the surface area.


    Everyone surrounded the core while attacking their enemies. Naturally none of them uses the power amplifier at this time as they are waiting for the right moment to do that.


    Suddenly they can see many powerful attacksing toward their direction. Everyone of them created barriers around them to protect themselves but those barriers instantly broke the moment they got contact with those attacks.


    But even with that none of the people gave up as they are still trying to create more barriers. Unfortunately, they finally got hit by those attacks. It is a good thing that those enemy Warriors did not attack them whilebining their attack.


    Individually they attack those who are Warriors of the Eden blue. This is the reason that none of those attacks are able to cross the power limit ofary grade. Sam, who was alerted by this, immediately increased the rate of those arrows. Not only that he also changed the nature of those arrows to fire arrows.


    It looks like those enemy Warriors became mad as even though they were getting killed by his attack but none of them stop attacking the warrior of Eden Blue. At any condition they wanted to kill those Warriors to get the core and leave that area.


    Currently all the leaders already increase the rate of spiritual energy which activates more powerful barriers around them. Only because of these are they able to survive in front of those powerful attacks. But how long they would able to maintain the barrier is a question that nobody know the answer.

 Chapter 810: Chapter 810 - Suspicious

    It has already been 5 hours since those enemies started attacking them. Many of their Warriors already got seriously wounded but fortunately because of Sam they got the time to recover.


    Naturally in that 5 hours the number of those enemies also decreases because of continuous attack from Sam. Previously even after receiving the attack from Sam those enemies tried to focus on those Warriors of Eden Blue, which in the end backfired them and they already lost almost 10,000 of their people.


    That was a huge number and everyone of those people were around Elite grade. Because of this, currently every one of them is also focusing on defending themselves against The attacks from Sam.


    But they actually underestimated the attack as they thought using abined barrier they would be able to protect themselves but unfortunately even thosebined barriers getting crashed by those arrows. Not just only the rain of arrows, but those enemy Warriors also get affected by the rain of fireballs.


    Those Epic grade warriors also interfere to protect their Warriors from those attacks. But they can also feel the power behind Those attacks which can easily burn or break their barriers. This is the reason they needed to use full spiritual energy to maintain those barriers.


    Now the question was how long they would be able to stay like this. The question is also applicable for Sam. But this time some already decided to create the healing zone that will also help him recover The Spiritual energy.


    Alongside that he is also using the potions. This is the reason that in less than a second he can recover his spiritual energy. Even though like this his body will feel the burden, but in a situation like this he did not have any other way to recover The Spiritual energy much quicker.


    ''I should really ask for help. But currently that would not be possible for them toe here. At least that would take them three days toe here and we really did not have three days.''


    Sam began to regret that he did not ask for help. Naturally you should not forget that he can ask for help from Terraria. But it was already toote to regret it as even if those people started using the world bridge they would need 3 days to reach that ce.


    Fortunately he already decreases the number of those enemies and it looks like some of those enemies have already begun to retreat from the battlefield. They lost a huge amount of their Warriors, and in front of those continuous attacks they did not even get the chance to do anything.


    Because of this, even thosemanders told everyone to retreat from that ce and recover their spiritual energy. But the problem is that in front of those attacks, finding the chance to retreat from that ce is not easy.


    Still with the help of those Epic grade warriors somehow they can retreat from that ce, but not everyone is able to do that as in the end they get killed. Sam also immediately stops attacking them the moment he realizes most of those people have already escaped from that ce and currently nobody is present near the battlefield.


    He is going to take the time to recover The Spiritual energy alongside the mental energy that gets consumed continuously all this time. Currently Gloria and the others who present in the battlefield naturally worry about Sam.


    His spiritual energy is not infinite but still he continuously attacks those Warriors for 5 hours. Because of this, they became worried about him. But unfortunately in that situation they also would not be able to check his condition while Breaking the formation.


    Among those A-grade warriors only Gloria, Fiona, Hina and Victor are one with true spiritual energy. Then it stays in that ce to protect the core.


    Those people present inside the warrior Association can already see the destruction of the battlefield and they really wanted to go back. But until now the saints did not give them permission. The Saints still told him to watch over the safe zone to see if they can find the moment of those dark humans or not.


    Because of this, those 205 Warriors are still present inside the warrior Association. On the other hand, the same already came close to all the Warriors of Eden Blue to check their condition. He can already see most of them already got seriously injured and even the medical team became fully exhausted healing them continuously.


    Most likely the next time everyone of them really needed to use the power amplifier. He immediately told everyone from the warrior association toe back and to get ready to use the power amplifier. Hearing that many warriors wanted told him that they can still fight but unfortunately in that situation they are unable to say anything.


    Without Sam they would have already been killed by those enemies. They were not even able to injure that much Warriors while those enemy Warriors have the ability to kill any of them.


    In the end even all the saints decided to use the power amplifier and they really wanted to see how powerful they would be after using the power amplifier. Sam only told him that it will increase their overall power, but how much it will increase their power nobody knows about that.


    On the other hand those 205 people present in the warrior Association already came back to the battlefield and everyone of them were already ready to use the power amplifier. They did not take initiative to attack those enemies.


    You can see in the battlefield that for a few minutes everything became fully silent. It was silent before the storm. In that silence all the people of Eden Blue prepare themselves to use the power amplifier the moment those enemy warriors will attack them.


    It did not take that much time for those enemy Warriors to recover their spiritual energy and full health. Naturally they cannot bring back those dead people. Currently they have already lost 20,000 people. Only a single person was able to kill 20,000 people while they were not even able to kill a single person from Eden blue.


    __________________________________________


    10 minutester the battle started once again and once again those enemy warriors took the initiative to attack those warriors of Eden Blue. Naturally once again Sam uses the spiritual barrier to protect everyone.


    This time he did not decide to leave that ce and maintain the barrier until those enemy warriors did not enter the battlefield. Once again those enemy Warriors begin to enter the battlefield and injust 20 minutes you can already see a huge number of those enemy Warriors present in the battlefield.


    Not just only them but even those Epic grade Warriors alongside thosemanders also flying in the sky. Everyone of them once again determines to kill every Warriors of Eden blue.


    But this time the moment they came to the battlefield they saw something different. This or none of those Warriors of Eden Blue attacking them. Currently, the unknown factor maintains a barrier around all the Warriors.


    Now this makes most of them very surprised as most of the time the unknown factor will stay hidden while attacking them. But why the hell did he present there without hiding himself? This is the question that everyone has right now.


    Some instantly thought of the unknown factor facing some difficult situation, but none of thosemanders thought like that. Everyone can feel something most likely happening inside that barrier. They also notice those Warriors of Eden blue currently holding something.


    Everyone of them currently closed their eyes and channeled The Spiritual energy into the talisman paper that they received from Sam. It will take some time for their overall power to get amplified. During this time Sam will be present there to help everyone and defend themselves.


    Naturally even thosemanders and those other Warriors were unable to figure out anything but who wanted to waste that chance. Instantly one by one every Warriors begin to attack that ce. Almost from every direction Sam is currently receiving the attack. Even thosemanders and those Epic grade warriors also started attacking toward that direction.


    You can saypared to those other warriors they did not use their full strength as they felt something was different. It did not seem that those Warriors of the Eden blue were recovering their spiritual energy or something like that, then why the hell did they stop attacking them.


    All of this really made them very suspicious, so they did not use their full power. They wanted to use half of their power and if the situation suddenly became different they could retreat using the remaining half power.


    All the Epic grade Warriors doing the same thing as thosemanders and only a few Elite grade warriors doing the same thing.


    At the same time then notice that even after receiving those many attacks from various directions the barrier created by the unknown factor did not broke. Even if they saw the crack appear on the barrier it instantly recovered.

 Chapter 811: Chapter 811 - Conceal the spiritual energy

    The ufortable feeling of those warriors is increasing and increasing. Until now the unknown fact did not do anything other than maintaining the barrier around that ce. On the other hand all those people of Eden Blue just keep their eyes closed.


    All of this became very mysterious to everyone, but in that battlefield everyone thought this would be the chance to kill all of them, and this would be the chance to injure the unknown factor.


    They can see the crack that appeared on the barrier created by the unknown factor, but the unknown factor immediately recovered that barrier. This naturally makes those people happy that day and can finally destroy the barrier created by the unknown factor. So they happily get close to the unknown factor to destroy that barrier and to kill everyone.


    Only a few Elite grade Warriors maintain the distance from that ce alongside all the Epic grade Warriors. Don''t know why but they feel something is not right in that ce so they keep their distance.


    They also saw the unknown factor and did not even pay attention to their direction. The unknown factor looking at the direction of his own people. It is like he did not even care about them.


    The barrier created by the unknown factor already showing the sign has broken down, but even in that situation it looks like the unknown factor did not pay attention to that.


    Actually Sam really did not pay attention to them as he fully focused on the people of Eden Blue. Even he wanted to know the limit of the power boost of the people. He never used that power amplifier so he did not know anything about that.


    Also he not only created that barrier to protect those people but he also wanted to conceal the Spiritual aura that came out from those warriors. They could be chance after noticing the powerful spiritual aura those people decided to escape once again.


    He cannot let that happen. So, he decided to maintain that barrier while letting those peoplee close to that ce. Even if those Warriors of the Eden blue did not get that much power boost after using the power amplifier, he can take that as an advantage to kill everyone of them.


    Sam once again brings out a potion and drinks that to recover Spiritual energy. Once again all the cracks that appear on the barrier disappear from the barrier. But this simple act immediately made those people who came to that ce think that he has some problem and because of this he did not attack them and was trying to maintain the barrier.


    Naturally, this increases their hope and they at any condition want to break the barrier. Even though none of the Epic grade warriors are currently helping them in the situation, they did not worry about that. They have full confidence they would be able to break the barrier if theybined their attack.


    "Boom!!!!!"


    One by one Many explosions keep appearing in that ce and many big explosions also destroy the surrounding area. But even in the situation they can see the barrier did not get broken down.


    This does not make those Warriors give up and they also use potions to recover their spiritual energy. After recovering The Spiritual energy they once again begin to use their full power to attack the barrier.


    For almost 30 minutes those people keep attacking the barrier without getting any advantage. On the other hand Sam kept maintaining the barrier for that 30 minutes. Only then he notices everyone begin to open their eyes one by one and the moment they open their eyes a huge spiritual fluctuation appears in that ce.


    It is a good thing that he already covers that whole area with a barrier which is also preventing that spiritual fluctuation from spreading outside of the barrier. Everyone of them just after opening their eyes can feel the power that they never felt before.


    Currently they feel like they can destroy anything. Only then do they notice the miracle maker looking at the direction while maintaining a barrier around them. Outside of the very area they can already see those people from others who keep attacking the barrier.


    Don''t know why, but this time all of them have the feeling that they would be able to kill those people outside of the barrier.


    Alena and all the saints also open their eyes and they also release a powerful spiritual fluctuation. They can also see the shocking expression of Sam. This is natural for Sam to get that much shock because currently all the saints are releasing the power of peak Epic grade warriors, while those other Warriors are releasing the aura of peak Elite grade warriors.


    So after using the power amplifier they got that much boost in their power. That ispletely unbelievable for Sam. But he quickly came back to his senses and then smiled at them. All the Warriors present in that ce already notice the smile on his face and after notice they also smile at him.


    The Saints are also smiling at him. If you wanted to know the reason behind the smile then it is because those people outside of the barrier did not even know what was going to hit them. But at the same time everybody needed to remember that they only have 10 minutes to kill as many people as they can.


    Suddenly, Markus raises his hand, the moment he does that all the Warriors instantly prepare themselves to attack those Warriors outside of the barrier Sam is also at this time ready to deactivate the barrier the moment Markus will give him the signal.


    _____________________________________


    "Sir, do you know what is happening inside the barrier? Don''t know why but I did not feel that muchfortable after looking at those people who suddenly opened their eyes. I am suddenly feeling like they have be much more dangerous."


    "You are not alone as we are also feeling the same thing. Also did you notice the smug smile currently present on their face. I really did not feel anyfort after looking at their smiles."


    " Well, don''t panic and don''t get afraid just by looking at their smile. Even though we did not know what was happening inside the barrier, we should have confidence in our strength and we will get the core at any condition. Prepare yourself, the moment those people wille outside of the barrier and immediately attack them."


    All the Epic grade warriors who maintain the distance from their main force are currently discussing this. Naturally even though they did not feelfortable looking at those people of Eden Blue, that does not mean they became scared.


    They already prepared to attack those people the moment they came outside of the barrier. At this time they notice Markus'' hand and instantly all the people be serious and it looks like they are ready to attack.


    The moment Markus lowered his hand immediately the barrier deactivated and all the people inside that ce instantly attacked all those enemies who were previously trying to break the barrier.


    All the Saints at this time did not stay in that ce and directly went toward those Epic grade warriors. You can say only then everyone present in that ce feels The Spiritual pressureing out from those Warriors of Eden Blue.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Finally the Intense battle started with the big explosion. All the Warriors just aftering outside of the barrier instantly begin to attack their enemies. All those close to Warriors bring out their weapons and begin to attack their enemies while those long distance Warriors maintain the distance and attack them with the long distance attack.


    Gloria instantly uses the absolute zero skill which begins to freeze the whole ground alongside all the enemies that got frozen. She is one of the people who was able to break through to Early Epic grade. Naturally everyone of those enemies are around Elite grade, so they were not even able to resist against that attack.


    But not everyone is able to reach the Early Epic grade. Only a few of them are able to reach that power level while most of them reach the peak Elite grade . But in that condition that was enough to make them take the advantage of that situation and they were already able to kill many of their enemies.


    Naturally the moment those enemies feel the pressureing from their body, they get distracted and use the chance that the Warriors of the Eden Blue sessfully killed many of them.


    Fortunately somehow other people are able toe back to their senses and they also begin to fight back. Finally the epic battle started where those enemy Warriors fighting a group of Warriors with the same power level as them.


    Butpared to them those people of the Eden blue have more advantages. First of all those enemy Warriors are exhausted after attacking the barrier for all that long. Some of them did not even recover their full energy. While on the other hand those people from Eden Blue will have infinite energy for almost 10 minutes.


    During this time they will not feel any kind of exhaustion. Naturally, all of them are going to use that chance to kill as many Warriors as they can.

 Chapter 812: Chapter 812 - Snowfall

    Fiona and Gloria are currently massacring those enemies as everyone of the around Elite grade. On the other hand both the girls were able to reach  Epic grade. Because of these Elite grade enemies unable to fight back against them.


    Alsopared to normal Warriors both the girls be more powerful because of the true spiritual energy. While using the strongest attack absolute zero Gloria already killed 1000 of those enemy Warriors.


    Everything happened so quickly that none of them got the time to escape from that ce. The moment Gloria uses that technique the temperature around the 5 km area instantly decreases and that 5 km area gets affected by the absolute zero.


    Thousands of people have already been killed and there are more people who have already frozen. All those people can feel their body getting frozen. All those people trying to struggle to break through from that state but unfortunately are unable to seed on that.


    Naturally Gloria would notte that happened as she instantly broke all those frozen statues or you can say those frozen enemies.


    Naturally that was quite terrifying for everyone but that does not mean they will give up. Instantly the many people begin to attack Gloria using their fireball skill alongside other techniques. There are many people who already came close to her thinking she would not be able to protect herself from a closebat attack.


    Unfortunately for them Gloria suddenly disappeared from her ce and in the next second everyone of those people who came close to her got hit by an ice beam. First thing you should know that currently Gloria has absolute control over the ice element.


    She can travel through thatyer of ice that appears on that ce. She instantly disappears from her previous ce and appears behind Those Warriors and attacks them who is the ice beam attacked. That instant makes those Warriors get frozen while on the other hand she also releases her ice beam attack towards iing attack.


    "Boom!!!!"


    A massive explosion appeared in mid air. But everyone of those attacked got destroyed by the ice beam. On the other hand Gloria already begins to prepare her next attack which would be more affectingpared to the absolute zero.


    That is also her second most powerful attack. Instantly the clear sky begins to fill with dark clouds and in the next second the temperature of that surrounding area once again begins to decrease. It has almost reached minus 20 degrees and already snow has begun to fall down from the sky.


    All those people with high observation technique instantly became scared as their instincts told them to run away from that ce as quickly as they could. Currently they feel danger from every direction but unfortunately they do not know what the real danger is.


    None of them consider snow as a threat and they are just trying to find out the danger that is making them so scared. This is one of the big mistakes they have made because the moment their body gets contact with those ice immediately they begin to freeze.


    They did not even get the chance to do anything. Immediately many people noticed the dangering out from the snow so they tried to use their own attack to destroy it. Unfortunately in this situation many of their attacks even get frozen.


    Only then is everybody able to realize the danger of those snowfall. Compared to before this time the range of that area is almost 10 km. Everybody inside that range has already begun to escape from that ce to get away from those snowfall.


    But unfortunately it is already toote for them. The situation already made them unable to leave that ce and they got in contact with the snow. In the next second, all of them begin to get frozen.


    Same thing also happened with Fiona but as you know she did not use the elemental power. She uses her sword to kill those enemies without giving them the chance to do anything. With just one swing she can create a massive size of sword sh that can easily kill all the people around her. The range of that attack is around 2 km.


    Other than that she can also feel her speed be much faster so most of those enemies were not even able to see her when they were getting killed by her. Countless sword sh currently going toward those enemies and without giving them the time to react. None of those enemies were able to protect themselves in front of those attacks.


    Suddenly, Fionanded between the enemies. The moment hended on that ce and poke the ground with her sword, immediately a vibration appeared on that ce. All the people present around the 2 km area instantly get affected by the vibration which suddenly passes through their body and immediately bes big and destroys their internal organs.


    Suddenly, Fiona notices some Attacking in her direction. She wants again to disappear from her ce and appear in front of those Warriors who attacked her. Giving them no chance to do anything she attacks them.


    You can say none of those enemies are able to resist the power of the sword attack. They get killed while Fiona feels that she is just cutting some paper or something like that.


    Naturally as she also felt that she did not lose any spiritual energy nor did she get exhausted, she became more excited and began to kill more enemies. Almost 4 minutes have already passed. They still have 6 more minutes before they need to go out of the battlefield. But that time was enough for them to kill more enemies.


    Hina and Victor are also able to be early Epic grade warriors. Both of them also selected a different ce to kill those enemies. Hina from the start immediately began to shoot arrows toward those enemies which turned out very destructive.


    Not only do they kill those enemies very quickly but at the same time very big explosions also appear in those ces. Don''t think getting close to her will give you any advantage. The moment some enemy Warriors get close to her they instantly get killed by the arrow thates out from the sky.


    This is one of our skills that is called The Guardian arrow. This will kill the enemy that came close to you to attack you. Suddenly she shot an arrow toward the sky. In the next second almost 10000 arrows begin to fall from the sky. All those arrows coated with spiritual energy. This is one of her techniques called the multiple arrows.


    Like Sam, those arrows immediately injure and kill those enemies. Many of them have already created barriers around them but many arrows are even unable to protect them.


    But she still did not stop there and continuously used that multiple arrows skill to shoot arrows in different directions. Naturally to summon those 10000 arrows she needed to use a huge amount of spiritual energy.


    But currently as she did not feel any consumption of her spiritual energy she can easily create those arrows. Not only is she using the multiple Arrow skill but at the same time she is also using the star st.


    She needed to shoot one arrow into the sky and in the next second every living being around that area will get attacked by arrows. Those arrows will be so fast that in the blink of an eye it will be pierced through the body of those living beings.


    Victor is also not slow as he is also using the same method as Fiona to kill those enemies. Not only that he also uses rage skills that make him faster and more powerful. Like a wild beast, he just killed those enemies. Those enemies did not even get the time to do anything.


    Many powerful sword shes are created by him which are easily able to kill those enemies around him. Not just only that, those sword shes also contain a huge amount of spiritual energy which the moment getting contact with any Monster immediately very big explosions appear in those ces.


    Fiona and Victor use almost the same type of attack to kill those enemies. But you can say because his experience is much morepared to Fiona, Victor is already able to kill many more enemiespared to Fiona.


    But don''t think this is apetition. They just wanted to decrease the number of those enemies as much as they could in those 10 minutes. They are already used for minutes to kill almost 5,000 enemies.


    Everyone of them just have only 6 more minutes and in those 6 minutes they would use their full power to kill more enemies so that in the end Sam did not feel that much pressure to handle them. If possible they already wanted to finish everyone so that Sam can directly focus on those prime Dragons that are approaching toward their.

 Chapter 813: Chapter 813 - Alena vs 3 Epic grade warriors

    Not just only Gloria and the others, but every Warriors of Eden Blue currently attacking those enemies using their all. Even though not everyone is able to create an impact like Gloria and the others, they still give their all during the fight.


    It is a great thing that all the people who reach the Early Epic grade already told them to focus on other people while they will be dealing with more people. As you can see there is a huge gap between Elite grade warriors and Epic grade warriors. Because of this even though there is just one person facing almost 2000 Elite grade warriors, they are still unable to get any advantage in the situation.


    This also reduces the pressure on remaining people from Eden blue. They are also able to team up with each other to deal with their enemy and it really bes more effective to deal with their enemy.


    You can see those closee back to Warriors already fighting many of those enemies alongside their teammate. Also you should know that not everyone from the enemy team is able to reach the peak limit. So even those enemy Warriors facing pressure in the situation.


    One by one they already became very surprised when they saw how much damage Gloria and others have created. But it also gives them hope to win this fight and this also increases their motivation.


    Because of this, those enemies also get affected as they get distracted and also it looks like they lose some of their will power. Taking advantage of the situation they are able to kill more of those enemies.


    Currently you can see Alena facing threemanders at once. Compared to any of those Warriors you can say only she has true spiritual energy and that also makes her the most dangerous person in that ce. Each of her attacks was able to create much more damage that three of them needed to team up with each other to handle her.


    But even in that situation she is handling those 3 enemies without any problem. One enemy suddenly appeared behind her and attacked her. The Sword of the enemy just reached 10 m away from her when she suddenly disappeared. Not only did she disappear, but at the same time 10 Alena appeared in that ce.


    Currently she has full control over the light element and she can also create after images. Not only that immediately all those 10 Alena attack that person. Currently that person is not alone and he has two teammates. Actually , teammates are also facing the same situation.


    Naturally they keep attacking those after images but unfortunately none of them can tell which one of them is the real enemy. But from time to time they face the attack of their enemy which has already be dangerous as it already destroys the Armour of those enemy Warriors and also makes them seriously injured.


    Naturally killing those people would not be easy even for Alena. But she is trying her best to kill everyone. Not just she created those after images, but she also attacked those enemies using her sun Ray attack. It is one of her strongest attacks alongside the light beam.


    Suddenly all the after images disappear and in the next again everyone of them saw a huge light present in front of them. It did not give them the time to react or do anything and all three of them got it by that light beam.


    All three of them instantly got affected by the light beam as you can already see the injuries already increased and their body was also getting burned by the light beam. Fortunately they are somehow able to protect themselves.


    But unfortunately for them Alena is not going to stop attacking them and she keeps maintaining that light beam. But, Alena is not just going to depend on that attack. She also has infinite energy so naturally she is going to use more attacks.


    The whole ce got covered in many light circles and in the next second more light beams began toe out from those light circles. Now from all over the direction those 3 enemies are receiving attack. Those attacks naturally were more powerful than not giving them permission to do anything.


    But you have to say that killing them is not easy as it has already been 5 minutes but she is still unable to kill all of them. Suddenly she did not know the status of those people as she kept attacking them from all over the direction.


    During the time she maintains the observation technique which also informs her that those three people still did not die and because of this, she keeps attacking them. Suddenly nobody is even able to help the three of them as they are also fighting other saints.


    Naturally in just 5 minutes the situation changes for all the enemymanders and those Epic grade Warriors. Suddenly, Alena noticed some Attacking toward her direction. But before those attacks could hit her, something unexpected happened and a light barrier got created in front of her.


    Not only was it able to protect us but instantly that light barrier created a counter attack. That counter attack instantly sent a huge powerful light in toward the direction from where she received that attack. Actually those Elite grade Warriors who previously maintained the distance from the battlefield are currently trying to help those Epic grade Warriors.


    Unfortunately they did not think less than a second they would be able to receive the counter attack which almost made them lose their life as they already became seriously injured. On the other hand, Alena stops paying attention to them and once again fully focuses on those 3 Warriors.


    On the other hand, Markus also fights an enemy and both of them fight using their long distance. But you have to say that Markus is in a disadvantageous position. Naturally his enemy is experienced in that power level, but Markus needed some time to adjust himself in that level.


    Fortunately in just 3 minutes he was able to adjust himself and only then the intense fight appeared between both the Warriors. Both the Warriors evenly match in their power, but sometimeter you can already see Markus getting the advantage because of his infinite energy while his opponent already feels exhausted because of using those powerful attacks.


    The opponent will not give up that quickly so the opponent is still attacking him while Markus depends on himself. You can say the same situation happens with every saint except Alena.


    All 12 saints fighting those Epic grade warriors using their all. At this time If you want to read about the remaining Epic grade warriors, then they already went toward Sam to fight with him. Naturally, everybody wanted to use this chance to kill him.


    Sam also fought all of them at once but as you can see he did not face any kind of difficulty fighting those people. On the other hand those enemies feel the pressure while fighting him. Until now they were not even able to hit him, but on the other hand all of them already got seriously injured.


    But one thing they did not realize that Sam until now did not use his full power as he just kept ying with those enemies. Actually he was paying attention to the battle of the Warriors of Eden Blue. So he did not pay attention to those warriors who were trying to kill him.


    Alena disappears from her ce once again. It looks like those three Warriors even after getting seriously injured have some strength to be able to escape from that situation and also counter attack her. Those three alreadybined their attack to attack Alena.


    Unfortunately for them she was able to react before their attack could hit her. Once again 100 after images appear in that ce and instantly they begin to receive attacks from every direction. Not only that, suddenly this saw a huge light Dragon appear in the sky and the Dragon instantly opened his mouth and released a Powerful light beam toward them.


    This is the strongest attack of Alena, and she has already killed two of those Warriors. Only one of them is able to survive but before that person could escape from that ce, Alena appears behind that person and instantly shoots a sun ray.


    With the sessful she was able to kill all three enemies. She instantly went to those other saints to help them. Also before anything you should know thatpared to those other Warriors of Eden Blue, all the Saints would be able to maintain their power for at least 30 minutes.


    Alena already took 15 minutes to kill those three Warriors and after killing them she instantly went to other Saints. She did not get the time to observe the battlefield to see the condition of the warriors of Eden Blue.


    Alena appears beside Mira and instantly attacks the enemy in front of her. The enemy is not ready for the sudden surprise so he is also unable to protect himself.

 Chapter 814: Chapter 814 - End of enemy warriors

    As Alena appears in that ce the situation has already changed and both of them are currently having the advantage over the enemy. The enemy began to feel powerless against both of them and in the end, he got seriously injured.


    The moment Mira is about to kill him, that enemy somehow disappears from his ce. It Looks like he uses some kind of artifact rted to teleportation to escape from that ce. Both of them did not chase him. On the other hand, they went to help other Saints.


    But the problem is that both of them did not have much time so they needed to move quickly if they wanted to kill more enemies.


    ____________________________________


    Currently, Sam alreadyes inside the strong gold which is vacant, and every warrior teleports to that stronghold from the battlefield. It is a good thing that he already told the medical team to stay prepared. The moment those people came inside that stronghold, all of them became unconscious.


    Not only that, all the medical team members after checking those warriors also told him that they were suffering from Spiritual energy overload. It is a good thing that they are already able to stabilize the condition of all the Warriors.


    Fiona, Gloria, Hina, and Victor are also present in that ce and all four of them also be unconscious. It is a good thingpared to those other Warriors, they are in better condition.


    The medical team after checking them told him that they would take almost 5 hours to regain consciousness. On the other hand, those other Warriors most likely would take 10 hours to regain their consciousness. Now this is a good thing that everybody isn''t in serious condition.


    ''But, who could have thought that after using the power amplifier they will level to achieve that kind of power level? Will this thing also work for me or not?''


    Sam is really surprised when he thinks how powerful everyone has be after using the power amplifier. But he did not know if that thing would work for him or not. After bingary-grade Warrior those things could be useless for him.


    Sam also became rxed when the medical team was able to stabilize the condition of all the warriors. The moment those Warriors teleported inside the stronghold and became unconscious, all of them started bleeding from their mouths. For a second, Sam became scared.


    But it is a good thing nothing happened to them. Well, he can now go back to the battlefield to take care of all the other enemies. But before that, he also told another group of medical members to stay ready as the saints would teleport there, and they would also have the same condition.


    He was just about to go back to the battlefield when he got notified by the Warrior Association that around a stronghold those dark humans were doing something. Without wasting a single second he teleports to that city.


    The moment hees to that city he instantly uses the teleportation technique to get close to the stronghold and then uses that telekinesis technique. He did not want to give those dark humans the time to do anything. Not only that, in the next second he begins to use the fireball skill to kill everyone.


    All of this happens in just 5 seconds. Previously those Warriors and those people inside the stronghold became quite terrified. Everyone became rxed when they got to see those dark humans already dead.


    Some of the dark humans reveal themselves during the time when they are trying to interfere with the stronghold''s spiritual energy. But Sam did not stop there as he teleported to another city and once again aftering to that ce, he began to kill all the dark humans.


    _________________________


    "How is he here? Did he already kill those enemy Warriors? Quickly inform our remaining people to go toward the battlefield. It looks like other than attacking those Warriors present on the battlefield we would not be able to do anything."


    Themander of the dark humans already became mad when he got the report that the unknown factor one second killed many of his people. These also make him very confused about the battlefield.


    He still did not get the report that the battle was over so naturally the war was still going on. Then how did he kill his people? Well, the leader did not want to think that much and he already told everyone to go toward the battlefield.


    He became really angry at the unknown factor and he wanted to kill the family member of that unknown factor. Naturally, every Warrior from others and even those dark humans know about the family member of the unknown factor.


    Those dark humans also know that the family members of unknown factors are also present on the battlefield. With these, they finally decided to interfere on the battlefield to kill or you can say to control the Warriors of Eden Blue. Unfortunately for them, they did not know the current situation on the battlefield. When they reach the battlefield, they will receive a huge surprise.


    _____________________________________


    Finally, 10 minutester he already deals with all the dark humans. Naturally, a huge amount of spiritual energy gets consumed during that process. They continuously begin to use the telekinesis technique and the fireball technique to kill everyone.


    Sam instantly decided to teleport back to the battlefield to see the condition of all those enemy Warriors. The time is also almost over for all the saints. But at the same time, he is very worried about the condition of the saints. He did not know if they would also have the same condition as those other Warriors or not.


    But, in this situation, he cannot do anything. With this, he teleports back to the battlefield and also brings out a spiritual energy potion. After recovering The Spiritual energy began to observe the situation of the battlefield.


    Previously those people who were fighting him had already been killed. But it looks like the Saints were not able to kill all the people as we can still see some people present on the battlefield. Every one of them was seriously injured but as all the Saints already teleported back to the stronghold, they were currently going toward the core.


    They are also recovering from their injuries but unfortunately for them. Sam will not give them the time to do anything. This time he uses the power of domain. Those enemy Warriors who are recovering from their injuries while advancing toward the core, instantly be alerts.


    None of them can do anything and they are also able to feel a strange spiritual energy present around them. But unfortunately for them, they instantly begin to realize that their body begins to get burned.


    ''Sigh, I just there are no more enemy Warriors. I begin to feel the danger of approaching my. I need to fight those Monsters in outer space as fighting them inside my could affect my.


    But I also needed to deal with those dark humans. If I leave the without dealing with them then there would be a chance they will do something Dangerous.''


    After thinking this Sam instantly contacts the Warrior Association. Those people present inside the Warrior Association instantly begin to tell him about the current situation.


    Currently, they did not see any kind of activity near any strongholds. But, this awesome activity is approaching the source of the earthquake. They are unable to be sure if they are dark humans or not. Those unknown people just appear for a second and then once again disappear.


    "Don''t worry. Just try to follow those people. If I am not wrong they use some kind of invisible technique or their artifacts to make themselves invisible."


    Now who could have thought Sam would receive good news? If those dark humans are approaching the battlefield, then it is good news for him. Then he did not need to search for them all over the safe zone.


    Using the concealment technique Sam disappears from his ce and currently, he is just waiting for those dark humans to reach the battlefield. But he also told the warrior association to inform all the warriors inside the strongholds near the battlefield to observe their surrounding area very carefully.


    The moment they feel any kind of spiritual fluctuation or the presence of dark spiritual energy they should immediately contact the Warrior Association. Sam wanted to be sure that those people were approaching the battlefield.


    You already use the observation technique to cover the whole battlefield. At first, he did not get any information but 10 minutester suddenly he got notified by the Warrior Association that many Warriors near the battlefield were able to feel the presence of dark spiritual energy.


    But they are only able to feel the dark spiritual energy for 30 seconds. After that, the dark spiritual energy disappears from that ce.


    Not just those Warriors. There are many other Warriors who also begin to inform the Warrior Association that they suddenly feel the presence of dark spiritual energy for a few seconds but after that, the dark spirit disappears.

 Chapter 815: Chapter 815 - Hell flame

    All the dark humans are getting close to the battlefield. But the more they got close to the battlefield the more confused they became. They were not able to feel any kind of spiritual fluctuation which ispletely impossible.


    Even though they are far away from the battlefield, during the war naturally everybody will use their powerful techniques, and that will create powerful spiritual fluctuation. Also, those Warriors from differents are more powerful so the range of their spiritual fluctuation would be more than those warriors from Eden Blue.


    Unfortunately, they still did not feel any spiritual fluctuation. Which makes them very confused and at the same time, makes them alert about this. But as themander told them to advance toward the battlefield everybody naturally did not ask any question.


    On the other hand, even themander of the dark humans became confused about this matter. He did not know if the war was over or not. But still, he wanted to reach the battlefield to see the condition. There could be a chance that those people from others once again decide to retreat.


    This could be the reason that the unknown factor gets the time to go after those dark humans. Themander predicted something like this would happen so he still wanted to reach the battlefield so that at least he could affect those Warriors of Eden Blue.


    __________________________________


    Sam, who is present on the battlefield, continuously receives reports from the Warrior Association that those dark humans are getting closer to the battlefield. Currently, those dark humans did not even try to maintain the invisible state which also makes some of them visible to those drones.


    Like this almost 1 hourter,


    All the dark humans had already gotten close to the battlefield. Naturally, they once again focus on channeling dark spiritual energy in those artifacts which make them invisible to anyone. In their invisible state, they begin to approach the battlefield to fulfill their mission.


    But the more they got close to the battlefield the more they became confused. Not only are they unable to feel any kind of spiritual fluctuation, but they are also unable to feel any kind of Life sign present on the battlefield.


    Finally, all the dark humans enter the battlefield and they begin to search around the whole area. They can see the destruction that appears on the battlefield which already destroys everything in the City.


    That ce became a barrennd with no life sign. Nobody could even guess that that was a city. Also, all the people of that city have already evacuated to another city.


    "Sir, we already searched the whole area but did not find any sign of Warriors of Eden Blue. They are good because they already died or got teleported back to their strongholds. Should we stay in this ce and try to reach the core?"


    " Hmm¡­. Did anyone know the location of the unknown factor?"


    " No, sir, until now none of our people got attacked by the unknown factor. There could be a chance that the unknown factor also went back to the strongholds to recover from the injuries. Naturally, nobody knows the condition of the unknown factor as most of the time he stays invisible.


    There could be a chance he became seriously injured and went back to the stronghold to recover from those injuries. Also, he is the main force who has the ability to kill those people from others, so naturally, if he got seriously injured those Warriors of Eden Blue will also hide themselves."


    " Hmm¡­ this can be possible. But at the same time is it possible that they will go back to strongholds without protecting the core? Naturally, they know that everybody is trying to steal the core of their. They also know what would happen to them if some people from others got the core.


    After knowing all of this, will they not try to protect the core?"


    " Sir, what if those people decided to create a barrier around the core like they did to protect all the humans of Eden Blue."


    " This is also a possibility. Told some people to approach the core to see if they were able to find any barrier or not."


    Currently, all the dark humans are confused because they do not know what happened on the battlefield. In the end, after finishing discussing with all the leaders they came to a conclusion, and one leader told a team to approach the core to see if they were able to find a barrier or not.


    Immediately one captain told his team to approach the core. They immediately approach the core but the moment theye 100 m away from the core, they realize that a barrier is present in that ce.


    Themander and all the captains alongside all the dark humans observing the direction also saw that their people got stopped by some invisible barrier. Immediately themander told some more people to go toward that area and started channeling their dark spiritual energy.


    Dark spiritual energy has the ability to affect normal spiritual energy. This is the reason that themander was told previously to channel their spiritual energy in those strongholds. He is going to use the same method to see if that is affecting or not. Chapter Read:


    Instantly thousand people approach toward the core and everybody begins to channel their spiritual energy. But everybody begins to feel the resistance. Even though they are trying to interfere with the spiritual energy present in that barrier, unfortunately, they are not even able to channel their spiritual energy inside that ce.


    Themander after hearing that immediately told all the dark humans to channel their spiritual energy. At any condition, they needed to get the core. Only themander and all those people who maintained the artifacts did not help in that process.


    At this time themander also hoped that the unknown factor did not appear in that ce. This could be dangerous for them if that unknown factor suddenly appears in that ce.


    This is also the reason that themander observed the surrounding area very carefully. The moment he finds any kind of spiritual fluctuation, he will immediately take action.


    Unfortunately for themander, Sam is already present near them. Already ready to act but at the same time he decided to see if those dark humans were able to interfere with the barrier present around the core or not. You should understand that the barrier is also created by the origin of spiritual energy.


    From the moment those people came to the battlefield Sam observed them using the status viewing option of the observation technique. He noticed some people went toward the core and they got stopped by the barrier.


    After that, a few more people approach the barrier and only then the dark spiritual energy fluctuation appears in the ce. But it was not there. 1 hourter almost all the dark humans begin to channel their dark spiritual energy.


    This time he did not even need to use the observation technique to feel the dark spiritual fluctuation. As almost everyone was using dark spiritual energy, a huge fluctuation was created in that ce.


    As Sam created that barrier he also has a link with that barrier. He can immediately tell when something would happen to that barrier. Until now, no particr thing happened to that barrier. It''s working fine and that dark spiritual energy was not even able to affect the barrier.


    Like this, he decided to observe for one more hour. In that 1 hour those dark humans continuously channel their spiritual energy but in the end, the result is the same. They were not even able to interfere with the spiritual system of the barrier.


    This naturally makes them very frustrated and even themander of those dark humans decided to join other dark humans. But unfortunately for them even with that, they were not able to seed on that.


    On the other hand, Sam already decided to make his move. He is already able to feel powerful fluctuationsing out from outer space. He needed to quickly deal with those dark humans to go outside of his to deal with those primed Dragons.


    Without wasting a single second, he uses the power of a domain that instantly covers that whole area. All the dark humans present on the battlefield did not even get the chance to do anything when they got instantly affected by the domain.


    All the dark humans begin to feel the restriction and the Spiritual energy present in their bodies getting consumed by something. The restriction prevents them from doing anything. They were not even able to use the teleportation technique or something like that.


    Suddenly, a ck me on the body, and instantly begins to burn those dark humans. In a situation like this, those dark humans didn''t even get the strength to scream or make any sound. One by one everybody begins to get burned by the hell me.

 Chapter 816: Chapter 816 - Prime Dragon

    Those dark humans are unable to do anything in a situation like this where they can''t even move their bodies. Every one of them in the end died. But you can say Sam still did not rx. Who can give him the guarantee that there are no more enemies present in Eden Blue?


    Also, what would happen if those people already called for reinforcement? Because of this, he did not be rxed and told the warrior association to watch over the whole safe zone.


    During that time he went back to the stronghold to see the condition of all the saints. Every one of them is currently unconscious but fortunatelypared to those other Warriors they are in much better condition. They will also take around 10 hours to regain their consciousness.


    After making sure every one of them was okay, Sam decided to visit all those strongholds that previously were almost able to get attacked by those dark humans. He needed to make sure none of those strong holes had any problem. Chapter Discover:


    ____________________________________


    ''Finally, it is time.''


    5 hourster, finally, his family woke up. Unfortunately, his teacher and all those other Warriors will need more time to wake up. After making sure everyone waspletely fine Sam told him that he was going to outer space.


    Naturally the moment his mom and dad heard that, both of them became worried about him. From the start, Sam told him that those Monsters are the real danger that their will face. Now Sam is going to fight those Monsters and that naturally makes his parents worried about him.


    But, Sam assures them he will be careful. After wasting no time, he teleported back to the battlefield. Once again after making sure the barrier present around the core did not get affected by anything, Sam decided to go to outer space.


    Naturally, he also informed the Warrior Association to stay very careful. With these Sam finally begins to go toward outer space. If you look at him then you can see he has already be very serious. He can already feel the danger approaching his.


    It looks like the primed Dragon did not have any thought about hiding his presence. Because of this, Sam can easily feel the presence of that Monster present in outer space.


    Sam came to outer space as quickly as he could and immediately began to approach the direction of the monster. Sam''s speed has already be the speed of light. With this, he is going in the direction from where he can sense the presence of that monster.


    Until now he was only able to feel the presence of one monster. So he is not sure if one Monster ising toward his or not. Not only that, while feeling the presence of the monster, he doesn''t know why but he also feels that the Spiritual energy of the monster is very different.


    The Monster also releases pressure that can affect the mind of every living being in Eden Blue. The Monsters are like a natural Predator of every living being.


    The moment Sam feels the Spiritual energy of that monster he is also able to feel the evil presence in it. It is most likely the chaos of spiritual energy. It is very differentpared to your normal spiritual energy or your dark spiritual energy.


    Other than the destruction The Monster did not have anything in his mind. Also because of that spiritual energy Monster also gets an additional boost. So naturally fighting the monster would not be easy.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, he can feel the presence of that monstering closer to his direction. At this time using the spirit vision he finally saw something that suddenly blocked the sun. It is a very huge thing that almost blocks the whole sun. In front of that thing, Sam is very tiny.


    "Roar!!!!!!!!!"


    Instantly that Monster let out a huge roar. Almost everyone present in Eden Blue also hears that sound. Not only that it also began to affect the mind of every living being in Eden Blue.


    Naturally, Sam was not affected by that. He just looked at that Monster very carefully. He is ready to attack that Monster anytime. Most likely Monster also already noticed him.


    A huge white fireball was created and it directly went toward Sam. The size of the Fire Ball is 50 times biggerpared to Sam. Naturally, Sam is not going to stay ideal. He also already uses the sun ray attack. Naturally, he also created a very powerful sun ray attack.


    "Boom!!!"


    A huge explosion was created in outer space that almost affected all thes present in outer space. The impact created by both attacks almost affected the surrounding area. Both the monster and Sam keep attacking each other.


    Naturally, until now Sam also did not use the power of domain as he wanted that Monster to get close to him. He also gets to realize the power behind the attack of that monster. He has to say that that attack created by the chaos of spiritual energy is really powerful. If he was your normal Warrior then he would have already died even if he reachedary grade.


    Suddenly The Monster disappears from his ce and appears behind Sam. Sam also already noticed that huge Monsters appear behind him so he also got teleportation from his previous ce. At the same time the moment that Monster came behind him, he also felt some kind of restriction force.


    Not just only the restriction force but he also feels the force also trying to affect his mind. It is a good thing that nothing happened to him and he was also able to get away from that monster. Even those Monsters with true spiritual energy would not be able to fight that prime dragon.


    Once again that Monster attacks Sam the moment he appears far away from that monster. Sam also quickly responds and disappears from his ce. Hees close to that Monster and instantly uses the telekinesis technique.


    Naturally, The Monster also feels the restriction force that immediately affects him. He can feel his body getting restricted. But in the next again some begin to feel that the monster can move his body even though he is using his full power to control that monster.


    It Looks like even though Monster did not reach theary grade, it still has the ability to release this kind of attack. But naturally, Sam is not your normal Warrior and he uses more Origin spiritual energy.


    Instantly power behind the telekinesis technique increases and The Monster who is almost about to break through from the restriction force gets restricted.


    "Roar!!!!"


    Once again that Monster let out a powerful roar. Most likely he wanted to affect the mind of Sam by using that attack. Unfortunately for that monster, he would not be able to affect Sam''s mind.


    Sam is easily able to protect his mind from this kind of attack. He also created a fireball that directly hit that monster. The Monster is fully ck and you can see those red eyes. The Monster also continuously releases pressure which can generate fear inside of anyone.


    Suddenly the body of the monster begins to blow in red color and the next second the fire that is almost about to burn his body disappears. The Monster uses the Dragon Force attack to destroy that fireball.


    Unfortunately for that Monster, some keep attacking that monster with the fireballs and he uses his powerful move. He created those ultimate mega fireballs. Naturally, the size of those fireballs is very small but all those fireballs contain a huge amount of spiritual energy that destroys Eden blue in any second.


    Like this, he began to attack that Monster well, that Monster trying to escape from him. The Monster can also feel the dangering out from the fireballs. Some of those Meteorites also got hit by those fireballs and it immediately burnt those meteorites.


    Naturally, Sam uses the hell frame that has the ability to burn anything. The Monster finally realized the dangering out from those fireballs and he also realized that if he wanted to get the core of that then he needed to kill that small person.


    Suddenly he once again disappears from his ce and appears far away from Sam. The moment The Monster disappeared Sam also created a huge fire dragon. The moment he felt the presence of that Monster once again he shot that fire dragon toward that monster.


    Sam also brings out a spiritual energy potion. Using that he immediately recovered The Spiritual energy. On the other hand the size of the fire dragon also almost reached the same size of that prime dragon.


    That Monster can also feel the power behind that fire dragon. A huge amount of chaos and spiritual energy gathers in that Monster''s mouth and the next again that Monster also releases a fire beam toward that fire dragon. On the other hand, that fire dragon keeps approaching that prime dragon.


    "Boom!!!!!"


    Once again a huge explosion appeared in that ce. But you can see that the fire dragon still did not get destroyed by that fire beam. Not only that it looks like that fire dragon also absorbing that fire beaming out from that prime dragon.

 Chapter 817: Seriously Injured

    "Boom!!!!!"


    The fire dragon already opens his mouth and tries to swallow the prime dragon. In the next second, a huge explosion appeared. But Sam did not rx. Countless light circles appeared in that ce that surrounded the whole area.


    In thest second the prime Dragon teleports away from his ce. Because of this, even though the Monster received injuries, it did not get killed. Some instantly created those 50000 light circles to attack The Monster the moment he was able to sense the location of that monster.


    Sam did not even waste a single second and instantly attacked toward his direction or you could say behind him. The Monster appears behind him and already attacks him with a destructive me breath attack. You need to understand that attacks have the ability to destroy Eden Blue without any problem.


    But Sam already realized the danger and he already escaped from that ce. Once again he uses the teleportation technique but still maintains all the light circles. Those 50000 light beams directly went toward the monster. Once again the monster feels the danger behind Those attacks.


    He created a powerful barrier around him. One by one many explosions begin to appear in that ce but you can see that Monster did not get injured by any of the attacks. The barrier created by the monster is able to protect the monster.


    Sam on the other hand already uses the telekinesis technique. That sudden attack instantly affected The Monster and also made him deactivate the barrier.


    "Roar!!!"


    One by one those light beams begin to hit the monster and The Monster begins to let out a painful roar. But unfortunately, Sam will not show any kind of sympathy. This time he begins to channel his spiritual energy to create one of the distractive attacks. Suddenly the whole area began to flow brightly and in the next second a sword created by the light element directly went toward the monster.


    The Monster already realized the danger of that attack but at the same time, he realized he would not be able to teleport in time. Already came close to The Monster when he tried to evade the attack.


    Unfortunately for that monster, his both legs already been cut by that attack.


    "Roar!!!!!!!¡¯¡¯


    Once again that Monster let out a painful roar. Also t already starteding out from that ce. Something unexpected happened instantly. The Monster begins to glow and all the injuries in his body begin to disappear. Not only that, suddenly it seems The Monster begins to recover his legs.


    The aura of that Monster also suddenly changed. It became more evil. Looks like the monster finally became angry at Sam. He wanted to kill Sam under any condition. The Monster already entered a berserker state.


    ________________________________________


    Continue your adventure with NovelBin.C?m


    "I am really worried about my son. We just continuously hear those terrifying roars. Most likely he already faces the prime Dragon. As his parents, we did not even have the capability to help him."


    "Sigh, don¡¯t worry about our son. We should trust his ability. Even though I also feel very useless, in a situation like this we can only trust our son and his capability."


    "Yeah, don¡¯t worry mum. We should trust our brothers. As you know he is already able to make many miracles. So this time I have confidence that he will make one more miracle."


    Inside the stronghold almost every Warriors already regained consciousness. Even all the Saints regain their consciousness. Every one of them also hears those frightening roarsing out from outer space. Everybody already realizes that the miracle maker has finally begun to fight the real danger of their.


    Currently, every warrior praying for the miracle maker to win this fight. All the people inside the strongholds did not know what was happening, but they were also praying so that nothing happened to their.


    It has already been 10 hours but they are still able to hear those frightening roarsing out from outer space. Sam is still fighting that monster.


    _______________________________


    If you¡¯re wondering why he is not using the power of domain, then he wanted to wait for the perfect chance to use the power of domain. First of all, as the Monsters are very big, to the affected monster he need to uses 100% liquified spiritual energy. He did not want to take any risk.


    Also before using the power of domain, Sam wanted to see the power of that monster. Sam already realizes that monsters are very different and very powerful. Even as aary-grade Warrior, there is no guarantee he would be able to win this fight if he was a normalary-grade Warrior.


    Fortunately, because of the Origin spiritual energy, he still has the advantage over that monster. But even with that, you can already see both the monster and the human became seriously injured. Sam already lost the armor while the Monster already lost one hand and two legs.


    The Monster alreadye out from the berserker state. But still, there is a chance he would be able to enter that state once again. On the other hand, Sam already has many broken bones. But both of them continuously fight each other. Currently, both of them have only one motive to kill each other.


    Sam also continuously drinks spiritual energy potions and health potions. One thing he has to consider is thatpared to him the health point of that Monster is really big. You can say it is a super Boss monster of peak Epic grade.


    Sam also without holding back uses all of his techniques to attack that monster. The Monsters also do the same thing and because of this from time to time those powerful explosions also get created. They almost destroy a not far away from Eden Blue.


    Suddenly Sam appeared above that Monster and he instantly hit that monster with his sword. The moment he hit the monster, The Monster let out a painful road and in the next second he got sent downward. At this time, Sam is also using the telekinesis technique to increase the following rate.


    But sometimeter The Monster once again was able to regain control over his body. But you can already see that big sword mark present on his backside. The Monsters were also very close to losing his hand.


    On the other hand, Sam is already creating an ultimate mega fireball. He created five of them and shot those 5 fireballs toward that monster. This time he increases as much power as he can behind Those attacks. Naturally, these also increase the speed of those attacks.


    The Monster who just somehow became stabilized felt the danger. In this situation, the monster is somehow able to protect himself from the first fireball. But he still needs to avoid those 4 remaining fireballs. Also one second The Monster is veryte to use the teleportation technique. Also after hiding continuously The Monster felt exhausted.


    Sam on the other hand did not rx. He already disappears from his ce and appears behind that monster. This time he also uses the concealment technique. After appearing behind that monster he once again begins to channel spiritual energy into his sword. Once again going to use the spiritual sword attack to kill that monster.


    The more he channeled spiritual energy into the sword the more the short began to glow brightly and the height of that sort also began to increase. One thing you should realize is that everything happening very quickly means that the monster is still unable to dodge all those FireBall.


    He is already able to avoid three fireballs and only two fires remain. But something unexpected happened. The moment he was about to dodge those two remaining fireballs, suddenly Sam exploded both the fireballs and two very big explosions appeared in that ce.


    That did not even give that Monster the time to do anything and once again because of those two Powerful explosions The Monster became seriously injured. On the other hand, he fully focused on increasing the size of his sword.


    It Looked like Sam wanted to reach the same size as that monster. But this process also consumes a huge amount of spiritual energies, the Monster is about to search for him when he suddenly appears in front of the monster, and without giving that Monster a second, he attacks that monster.


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    Instantly, he checked the status of that monster. Sam wanted to know how much damage he needed to do to kill that monster. Surprisingly The Monster already lost 90% of his health. So Sam came very close to killing the monster.


    The Monster most likely realizes that. He somehow stabilized his condition. After that, he instantly releases a fire beam toward Sam. This time he did not focus on Sam. The Monster already realized he would not be able to win against Sam. So he decided to attack the Eden Blue.


    If he was not able to get the core then at least you destroy that.

 Chapter 818 - 818 - Planetary grade?

    "Sam!!! Please stay safe."


    Gloria, Fiona, Elena, Alena, Hina, and all the other people almost begin to cry after hearing those powerful Roarsing out from outer space. Nobody knows the condition of Sam. But everyone feels the pressureing out from that Monster even though The Monster is very far away from them.


    This makes them very worried about him. Not only are they feeling very helpless, but at the same time, they are also feeling anxious about Sam. All the Saints currently prevent Alena from going to outer space. Feeling the pressureing out from the monster, she is unable to control herself.


    She almost tries to use the second power amplifier to go to outer space to help her student. Sam is not just only a student but he became a little brother to her. How can a big sister rx when her brother is fighting a very dangerous Monster?


    Markus and the others are currently preventing her from doing anything. But you can see, Alena is still struggling. She even tries to fight back, but everyone can prevent her from doing anything reckless.


    Everybody also wanted to help Sam in a condition like this. But they did not know if they would be able to help him in this situation or not. What if they became a burden to him and he was unable to focus on the monster while trying to protect them?


    Thinking of all of this, everyone decided to stay there. But you can see everyone has already brought out the power amplifier given by Sam. Actually, before going to outer space, Sam gave every one of them the power amplifier once again.


    "don¡¯t use these recklessly as it will increase the burden on your body. Also, there could be a possibility that your foundation got damaged because of this. But during the time when I will be present in outer space, I would not be able to protect our from those people from others.


    I still did not believe that I was able to kill all of them. There could be a possibility that some people are still hiding in the danger zone and they would try to bring back reinforcement. I hope if something like that happens all of you use those power amplifiers to deal with the people.


    Also, I already created a barrier around the core. So for now all of you can focus on the battle without thinking about the core. Nobody would be able to break that barrier and this is my guarantee."


    Those are the things that Sam previously told every one of them before going to outer space. This time he only provided the power amplifier to those saints. Doctors already told him that those other Warriors after using the power amplifier already have some damage present in their body. Continue your journey at NovelBin.C?m


    It will take them one month to recover from those damages. Even using the high health potion, they would need one month to recover from those injuries.


    ____________________________________


    Currently, many drones from the Warrior Association are roaming around the danger zone. Naturally, those drones wanted to find any kind of clue about those people from others.


    As they fully focus on the danger zone, they are also able to find some hidden bases present in the danger zone. Naturally, those are the base of those people from others. But even in those bases, they did not find any movement or suspicious things.


    But as Sam told them to watch over the whole danger zone, they would not ignore this order. Until Sam does note back to Eden Blue, they will search around the whole danger zone like this.


    But they did not know that some people inside the dangerous zone are currently hiding themselves. They use their stealth technique to hide from those scouting drones.


    If you look at the people then you can see their condition is not good. Some of them have lost many of their body parts. Some of them have serious injuries. Well, they are thest survivors of the battle. All of them were able to escape from the battlefield.


    But they already lost everything. They just want to escape from the in any condition. They already forget about the core of that. In a situation like this, they should focus on saving their life instead of getting the core.


    None of them are from the same. All of them are from differents. But they stay with each other to survive in a situation like this. All of them aremanders and all theirpanions have already been killed in the war.


    Just thinking about all of these makes them very scared. What if that unknown factor suddenly appears in front of them and kills them? Just thinking about this makes them very anxious and scared.


    At this time, suddenly everyone feels a huge pressure. That pressure almost crushed them. All of them feel that a huge predator is currently looking at them. In the next second, they also hear those roars. Almost everyone can see a huge eye looking in their direction. Well actually that Roar feels with fear energy makes them hallucinate.


    In a situation like this, almost every one of them lost the willpower to survive. They are just currently waiting for their death. They already realize that they would not be able to survive in a condition like this. Also, they did not know anything about that roar and the pressure of a monster.


    But all this time they still stay hidden. The good thing is that they already try to contact theirs. They told them to open the world bridge as they wanted to go back to their. But none of them know if they will go back to their or not.


    Also, they did not hear the roar just one. One after another they begin to hear those roars. Every time they begin to hallucinate about a monster that almost swallows them. It was like a torture to them. They were not even able to recover fully from the war. They are still mentally exhausted but in a situation like this, they are getting crushed by the pressure.


    ______________________________________


    Currently outside of Eden Blue,


    You can see some instantly appear in front of the monster and this time he once again attacks The Monster using the spirit sword. The Monster also releases a fire beam, the moment he feels the presence of Sam.


    Once again a huge explosion appeared in that ce the moment the sword hit that fire beam. But you can already see some easily cut that fire beam. But the problem is that he needed to destroy that fire beam, if he did not do that then his would get destroyed.


    His sword suddenly began to glow brightly. After that, you can already see that the fire beam got destroyed, and not only that the sword already appeared in front of that Monster, and without giving that Monster any chance it pierced through the body of that monster.


    "Roar!!!!!"


    Once again the monster let out a painful roar. But as you can see he still did not die after receiving the attack. The sword that pierced his body already disappeared and the wound present in his body also began to heal.


    Suddenly, the monster begins to glow. Sam already can feel the power of that Monster begin to increase. Wasting no time, he began to gather a huge amount of fire elements and in the next second, he created 10 ultimate mega fireballs.


    All the fireballs instantly went toward that monster. One by one, 10 explosions appear on the ce which already have enough strength to destroy any of those surroundings.


    Sam also begins to use the spiritual energy potion to recover his spiritual energy. But at the same time, he observes the condition of that Monster to see if he will feel that Monster or not. Somehow he felt the life presence of the monster became weak. Because of this, he decided to see what happened to that monster.


    The ce where those explosions appeared was already filled with smoke. It already became very hard to see anything. But some instantly use the spirit vision technique to see the condition of the monster.


    The moment he observed the monster he became very serious and in the next second created a very strong barrier. Fortunately, he was able to react very clearly because in the next second a huge explosion appeared in that ce. A very powerful ck me came out from that monster and it directly hit the barrier created by Sam.


    Fortunately, Sam was able to react on time and also able to put more energy into the barrier. The moment the barrier got hit by that me beam, a crack already appeared on the barrier. In the next second, he is also able to feel pressureing out from that monster.


    Sam is very familiar with this pressure. It is a pressure from aary-grade monster. But the problem is that the life presence of that Monster is very weak.

 Chapter 819: Chapter 819 - Domain

    ''What is happening? Why the hell did the life presence of that Monster be weak but the monster became stronger? Did the monster use some kind of technique to use his life force to break through toary grade?''


    Same begins to think about all these questions but he instantly disappears from his previous ce. The Monster instantly releases a powerful fire breath. But Sam had already gone to a different ce by teleporting from the ce.


    He has the confidence to not get injured after receiving that attack. Why should he risk it? Instantly created a massive fireball and shot that toward the monster. The Monster also counter attacks that fireball using his fire breath.


    "Boom!!!!"


    Once again a very big explosion appeared in that ce. On the other hand, Sam continuously attacks that monster. He did not want to take any chances and wanted to kill that monster. But the problem is that in a situation like this, he will not use the power of domain.


    First of all, he wanted to know if that Monster would stay like this. Currently, both of them are attacking each other. Continuously, many explosions begin to appear in that ce. But you can still see the advantage of Sam.


    First of all, even though he is an earlyary grade Warrior, he still levels up himself and on the other hand, he also has the power of domain. On the other hand, it looks like the monster did not have the power of the domain.


    Because of this, currently, Sam is waiting for the perfect chance to use the power of the domain. The good thing is that the monster is currently only focusing on him. Looks like the monster wanted to kill him before targeting Eden Blue. The Monster already has full confidence to defeat Sam after bing that much powerful.


    Like this, for 12 hours they keep fighting. Sam on the other hand keeps using his potions. Only after using them was he able to recover his Spiritual energy quickly. But on the other hand, he can already feel the power behind Those attacks from the monster already bing weaker.


    Even though The Monster has arge amount of spiritual energy resourcespared to Sam, after fighting for 12 hours it looks like the monster has already begun to get exhausted.


    Finally, Sam can use this chance to defeat the monster. For five more hours, they continuously fight like this. But after 5 hours you can already feel the life presence of the monster be weaker and it looks like the monster also became quite exhausted. Now this is the time to counterattack using his full power.


    Without testing a single second he quickly uses the spirit sword and this time uses his full power to attack the monster. Sam is more powerfulpared to that Monster and also because of the origin spiritual energy that attacked already cut the wing of that monster.


    Not only that, but instantly countless light beams begin to attack the monster. The Monster keeps letting out a painful roar. But Sam did not focus on that. Finally, when he realized the monster had already be fully exhausted and was not even able to bring out 10% of his power, Sam decided to use the chance to kill the monster using the power of the domain.


    Instantly the whole ce got converted into the domain. The Monster already realizes the danger that ising out from everywhere. Not only that instantly The Monster began to realize the Spiritual energy began to get consumed by the surrounding space.


    Instantly all of this makes that Monster very scared. Finally, for the first time, Sam also sees the fear present in the monster''s eyes.


    But, Sam without wasting a single second begins to use his whole element to attack the monster. The surrounding ce begins to burn the monster. Not only that, countless light beams also began to hit the monster. The monster realized in this situation he was unable to do anything.


    He was not even able to move from his ce nor was he able to use any kind of technique. He was not even able to use the teleportation technique to run away from the ce.


    On the other hand, Sam uses all of his liquified spiritual energy. Currently, rapidly his liquified spiritual energy is getting consumed. To kill a monster like the prime Dragon, he needed to use his 100% liquified spiritual energy.


    ____________________________


    Everyone present in Eden Blue begins to panic the moment they feel that powerful pressure. Compared to before right now the pressure almost makes them unable to breathe. Fortunately, after 5 minutes, the pressure disappeared from that ce.


    But this already makes everyone very anxious. Almost all the people begin to think about their miracle maker who is currently fighting that monster in outer space. Alena and everyone already have pale faces after getting affected by the pressure. For 5 minutes they also got affected by the pressure.


    Fortunately, it looks like because they are inside the strongholds, the pressure is not able to kill anyone.


    You can say that under pressure like this, those normal people would die.


    "Let me go. My student needs my help. I need to help him. He is fighting a powerful Monster like this while I am waiting here for him without doing anything. Even if I die I need to help him. Please let me go to help him.


    We cannot wait for him."


    She is trying to break through but unfortunately, all the saints are still holding her. They did not want to let her go. She will be in danger and could be a burden to Sam.


    Gloria and the others begin to tremble the moment they think about Sam. Every one of them also became worried about Sam and wanted to know his condition. Against the powerful Monster like this what he is doing right now. Something bad happened to him. Thoughts like this begin toe to their mind.


    For some time they even wanted to go outside of the to help Sam. But at the same time, they also realize, Sam still has the chance to run away from that ce but if they suddenly approach that ce then they would be a burden to him.


    "Teacher¡­. Please calm down. My brother still has his chance to escape from that ce. Don''t forget that his concealment technique is so powerful that even when he was a D-grade none of you was able to find him.


    So please believe him. Currently, if you go outside of the then you can put him in reach alongside your life. Just trust him and wait for him. I have full confidence in my brother that he will be able to defeat that monster."


    Gloria even has the same condition as her teacher, but she also understands she needs to remain there so that she does not be a burden to Sam.


    Looks like only after hearing her Alena also realized this matter and she finally calmed down. But tears stille out of her eyes. Not only Alena, but at this time even Gloria, Hina, and the others were unable to hold back those tears. Victor tried to stay strong but in situations like this even he started crying.


    Suddenly all of them hear a loud explosion. The explosion was so powerful that it almost made them unable to hear anything for almost 5 minutes. 5 minutester everyone became very confused about this explosion. Naturally, these explosions also came out from outer space. But how did it have this loud sound which almost made them unable to hear anything?


    10 minutester,


    Everyone became very confused. The inability to hear any kind of sounding out from outer space. What happened, nobody knows. Was Sam finally able to defeat the monster? They did not know anything about this. But everyone is trying to believe this is the possible case.


    Like this, they waited for almost 1 hour. But even after that, they did not hear any sound, any pressure, or anything like thising out from outer space. Naturally, they also have scouting drones that look present in the atmosphere to find any kind of activitying out from outer space.


    Suddenly, one scouting drone finds something falling from outer space. Immediately all the people in the Warrior Association also notice that but they are unable to see what this thing is. The thing is fully covered in fire. So they immediately control the scouting drone to get close to that thing.


    Only then did they realize it was a human falling. Because of the gravity, you can already see fire around that person. Immediately they contacted all the saints and told them about this. They already think this is Sam. Because only he went to outer space.


    _______________________________


    "What?!!!"


    Markus, who is trying to control Alena, instantly screams like this the moment he hears the report of the Warrior Association. Not just Markus, everyone present here the report. Alena just after hearing that got telepod away from that ce. This time nobody was able to stop her. She instantly uses the teleportation system of the Warrior Association.

 Chapter 820: Chapter 820 - Shocked

    Alena already teleports to that ce and instantly begins to fly in the sky. Using her full speed she came to that ce and already saw something falling. When she got close to that thing she already noticed it was a person falling.


    Aftering closer to that person she finally realizes it is Sam. Without wasting a single second she approaches him and quickly holds him. Fortunately, she was easily able to hold him. Only at this time, did she notice Sam is currently unconscious.


    But the good thing is that he is still breathing. So there is nothing to worry about. Without wasting a single second, she quickly brings him inside the strong holder and the medical team instantly approaches her and then begins to treat Sam.


    Currently, they can see Sam is fully covered in blood. Without wasting a single second they first stabilize his condition and heal those wounds. After that, they begin to heal him fully so that if he receives any internal injuries, injuries will heal immediately.


    At this time Markus and the others also immediately teleport into that ce and they already saw the condition of Sam. The moment Glory and the others came to that ce, Hina almost began to cry loudly. Gloria also begins to cry But she is trying to assure her mother everything will be okay.


    Looking at Sam''s condition, Victor almost had a heart attack. Once again he felt useless. His son put his life in danger while he was unable to do anything to help him. Now looking at his situation like this almost makes him lose his breath.


    "Don''t worry. All the injuries he received have already been healed. It is just due to using potions continuously that he received some internal injuries which we are currently focusing on healing. On the other hand, he is fully exhausted both physically and mentally.


    It Looked like his brain stopped working. But fortunately, that would not affect him. He just needs a good rest before waking up."


    Alena also begins to heal him using her healing Ray. After checking his condition, she instantly told everyone. Only after hearing all those things everybody can rx a little. But they would still worry about him until Sam did not wake up.


    _____________________________________


    "Hail to the miracle maker!!!!"


    The Warrior Association informs all the people present inside the strongholds that their miracle maker has alreadye back. Even though he received some injuries, he was already in better condition and needed some time to recover from those injuries.


    Other than that it looks like the miracle maker already takes care of the real danger of their. With these, they did not have to fear the space monster that was targeting their.


    The moment those people who are present inside the strongholds get to know about this, they instantly begin to cheer for Sam. Finally, everybody can rx as they do not need to face any more danger. Finally, their would be able to evolve.


    But despite all of that enjoyment, Jeni and the others who present insight sent home became very worried about Sam''s condition. They did not go to Stronghold where currently Sam is being treated by the medical team, so they became very worried about him.


    They also have the same situation where they begin to feel useless. As a friend of Sam that did not even help him in any matter. But it is a good thing that he did not have any kind of serious injuries.


    ________________________________________


    The next day,


    Compared to yesterday, today everything became more normal. Even though all the people are still present inside the strongholds, none of those people are feeling the pressure of war. Everything is finished and they will be going outside of the strongholds, when the core of their will sessfully be able to evolve.


    The Saint told him even though the miracle maker already killed all the enemies but still, they wanted to make sure there were no more enemies present on their.


    All the people also agree with that. Because they could be a chance for those people from others waiting for the chance to attack them. What if they go outside of the strongholds and immediately get attacked by those people from others?


    On the other hand, Markus and the others begin to check the whole safe zone thoroughly. They did not want to miss any spot. Not only that, they also decided to go to the danger zone after finishing taking the safe zone.


    Alena is still staying with Sam alongside Hina. But other than them everybody already became busy watching over the core of their. Victor, Gloria, and Fiona also went back to the battlefield.


    You have to say that when every Warrior once again came back to the battlefield, for a second they were almost unable to recognize the battlefield. At this time they also realize the core is protected by some kind of barrier. Naturally, everybody had already been notified by the Warrior Association that it was the miracle maker who put the barrier around the core.


    Even though there is a low chance that anybody would be able to break the barrier, still all the saints decided to send them to the battlefield. All those Warriors will be staying there until the core does not evolve sessfully.


    Compared to yesterday, Gloria and the others are in better condition. They already got the report that Sam is currently sleeping. He did not have any life risk right now. With this, they can rx and focus on their duty.


    But during all this time none of them know that all thoses who send their people to Eden Blue already became shocked the moment they realized that all of their people got killed inside that.


    Who can believe a weak like this would be able to defeat all those warriors? The people from Earth also receive the news and this makes them very shocked. All of their people got killed and there were no survivors.


    Thest message they receive from their Warriors who asked for reinforcement. Unfortunately, this would not be possible right now. Even if they send reinforcement. They would only be able to send 10 to 20 people at most. If those people from Eden Blue really can kill those many strong Warriors then naturally they would not send more people to that to die.


    But at this time they are also unable to believe this news. Because when those people from Eden Blue came to their to help them, they noticed only three people who were able to achieve early Elite grade. Other than that everyone was a special grade Warrior.


    So howe they were able to kill those many Warriors and even their Warriors previously asked for help? In a situation like this naturally, nobody wanted to be reckless. They also did not forget about the artifacts that those people from Eden Blue had. Previously those artifacts were able to make those people invincible in the battlefield against their enemies.


    Even those Epic-grade Warriors were unable to destroy the barrier created by those artifacts. Naturally, the disease is also the reason they wanted to get those artifacts and also attack their. Unfortunately, it looks like they underestimated Eden Blue.


    ___________________________________


    The next day,


    Markus, John, Vena, and 2 more saints decided to go to the danger zone to search for any survivors from the Enemy team. Naturally, they have the power amplifier and this is the thing that gives them the confidence to deal with those enemies.


    They did not want to have any kind of hidden danger. Because of this, all five of them instantly went to the danger zone and all 5 of them went in 5 different directions. All five of them have the confidence to take care of those powerful enemies even if they face them alone.


    First of all, they did not think a huge number of those enemies remained. So this gives them the confidence to go in a separate direction all alone. Also, all five of them would immediately contact each other the moment they would find anything suspicious.


    The remaining 7 Saints will be staying inside the safe zone to watch over the battlefield and the whole safe zone.


    Also, the good news is thatpared to before today the condition of Sam got better. The mental exhaustion he had already showed the sign of getting recovered. But it looks like he would still need a lot of time to recover from the mental exhaustion.


    At this time nobody can realize that the body of Sam is not just only recovering the mental energy but at the same time, his body begins to glow in white color.


    His body automatically tries to recover the liquified spiritual energy. Due to low-quality spiritual energy, it will take him a lot of time to recover the liquified spiritual energy.

 Chapter 821: Chapter 821 - Surrender themselves

    Markus and others thoroughly searched the danger zone but until now they did not find any kind of suspicious movement in the danger zone. Naturally, there is also a possibility those survivors have some kind of techniques to hide from the observation technique of those Saints.


    This is a possibility because previously those people used this kind of technique to hide themselves. Well, those people should have more powerful hiding techniques. Because of this, the saints were unable to find any kind of clue about them.


    But that does not mean the Saints will give up. They are still searching in the danger zone. Even if those people try to hide themselves, they naturally will leave some kind of trace and all the Saints are currently looking for that kind of trace.


    On the other hand people present in the battle area also observe the core still present in the mid-air. The core evolves while the surrounding spiritual energy also evolves.


    Naturally, everybody is ready to react anytime the moment they feel anything suspicious. This is a very important time for the whole Eden Blue. Nobody wanted anything to happen to their.


    Gloria and the others who are present on the battlefield also ask Hina about the condition of Sam. All of them can rx a little when they hear that Sam''s condition has already be betterpared to yesterday. All the physical injuries have already healed. He also did not have any kind of internal injury.


    But somehow Sam is taking a long time to recover from the mental exhaustion. Alena, present in the ce, can still feel the mental energy of Sam has not recovered. This is the only reason that he is unable to wake up.


    She even tried to use her healing rat technique in full power, but unfortunately even with that recovery rate of the mental energy did not increase. Because of this, she is worried about Sam. But at this time she did not tell anyone about this and just told everyone that he would still take some time to recover. At least Sam is not facing any kind of danger right now.


    __________________________________


    "Guys quickly came to my ce. I am currently present around 5390titude. I already searched this whole ce but did not find anything. But when I was just about to leave this ce I found some footsteps present in this ce.


    There could be a chance that you are able to find some survivors around this ce."


    Saint John contacted every other saint present in the danger zone and told them toe to his location. Sometime ago he found some footsteps present in the ce. As usual, he searched the whole ce very carefully but did not find any presence of humans on the Warriors.


    He just only found those Monsters present in that ce but he did not care about those Monsters. When he was just about to leave that ce he suddenly saw some foot marks present in that ce. So immediately he contacted everyone toe there.


    Markus and the others without wasting a single second quickly came to that ce and instantly went to the area where they found the footsteps. Immediately they begin to follow those footsteps.


    Currently, they are present in the barrennd where you would not be able to find anything other than those Monsters. But it looks like those footsteps are currently going toward the forest not far away from that location.


    All the saints naturally be ready to face any enemy. Also, they are using their observation technique in full power. At any condition, they wanted to know if they had some enemy present in that forest or not. They keep following in their footsteps.


    Sometimeter they already enter the forest. Surprisingly the footsteps vanish from the ground aftering inside the forest. It looks like aftering inside the forest the person who left those footsteps uses some kind of technique. Immediately all of them begin to search in different directions.


    Markus also told other saints present in the safe zone about this. Naturally, they have full confidence to take care of those enemies but what if suddenly reinforcements of those enemies appear on their? Because of this, Markus decided to inform others about this.


    For 2 days they found the whole forest thoroughly but unfortunately, they did not find any sign of Warriors from others. With this, they decided to contact the Warrior Association and told them to send scouting drones to that ce.


    Scouting drones will be present in that ce for 24 hours and will be searching the whole area to search for any clue about Warriors from others. Suddenly at this time, when they contacted the Warrior Association, one Warrior from the Warrior Association told them that they found some trace of the base of those people from others.


    Immediately that person gives the location of the ce. Markus and others wasted no time teleporting to that ce. Markus also told that person to send scouting drones to their previous location and the scouting drones needed to stay there 24 hours and search the whole area very carefully.


    ____________________________________


    "Sigh, it is a good thing we decided to build the hiding ce underground. It Looks like they previously found some clue and because of this, they came here to search for our location."


    " We should deal with those people as I did not think any of them would be able to fight with us."


    " Shut up!!! Don''t be stupid and don''t do anything reckless. You did not know what I noticed when I was present on the battlefield. All those Saints use some kind of artifact and suddenly all of them became epic-grade warriors just like ourmanders.


    Not only that, all of them reach the limit of Epic grade. They also have unlimited spiritual energy and stamina. You cannot even realize what kind of situation was created because of this. That unknown factor did not even need to take any action against us, as those Warriors of Eden Blue became powerful enough to deal with us."


    " Sigh, yeah we cannot be reckless. I already told every one of you that we needed to hide ourselves and wait for our to send reinforcements or take us from this. But there could be a chance that our already abandoned us.


    First of all, we should forget about the idea of the core of this. Most of the Warriors of this will be present there. Other than that, in our current state, we would not be able to survive for that long.


    Also, did you forget about those powerful roars and spiritual pressures that almost killed us? So it would be best if we stay here like this. I did not know what was happening outside but I just hope our did not abandon us." Discover exclusive tales at M-V-L


    Hearing this question everybody also begins to doubt. They also did not know if they would be able to go back to their or not. They already lost all of theirmanders and all of theirpanions.


    Until now none of them got any kind of response from theirs so even though they hoped that they would be able to go back to their, they also started to doubt this.


    "Listen everyone. I know that it is a hard truth but if we get abandoned by our then we need to surrender ourselves to those warriors of this. At least with these, we would be able to survive. But before the core did not evolve, we should not approach them.


    In this situation, there could be a chance that they will immediately attack as soon as they find us. So we need to wait until the core does not evolve. This would be ourst chance to save our lives. We would not be able to stay here like this."


    After hearing these, everybody bes silent. This is a hard truth, but at the same time, it is also true that if they want to save their life then they need to approach those Warriors of this.


    But they should not be reckless about this. Currently, the core of this is still evolving. What if the moment they reveal themselves, they get attacked? Because of this, the best timing would be when the core evolves sessfully.


    Normally nobody wanted to face a situation like this and wanted to go back to their. But unfortunately, they did not get any kind of response from their and they did not know if they would be able to go back or not. It is not possible for them to open a world bridge on their own.


    So even though they did not want to agree with the n, they also knew this would be thest n, so you need to follow it to save their life.


    [A/N:- Hey guys, use this <ABDHYXQCYXHLBNA7A>  redeem code to get 10FP. Only the first ten people would be able to redeem 10FP.]

 Chapter 822: Chapter 822 - Sudden situation

    The whole Eden Blue began to shake. This time a different type of earthquake appeared on Eden Blue. All the saints present in the sky even get affected by these and they almost fall. Fortunately, they were able tond safely.


    Instantly every Warrior begins to feel very weak. Likely, they have already lost their power and be normal humans. Sometimeter a huge pressure also began to affect all the Warriors of Eden Blue.


    People inside the stronghold are already unconscious after getting affected by that pressure and losing their power. Inside thest stronghold where you can see Sam, Alena, and Hina with some other Warriors, all of them also be unconscious except Alena.


    Only she is somehow able to maintain her consciousness and try to help everyone who falls to the ground suddenly. This instantly makes her very scared. First of all, she feels like he lost all of her strength, on the other hand, she has to activate her healing Ray technique.


    She immediately tried to contact other Saints. Instantly they also confirm that they also have the same situation as her. Alsopared to her they cannot even use their spiritual energy to activate any technique.


    Markus and the others present the dangers of not just only trying to find a safe ce to survive but at the same time, they notice those Monsters present in the danger zone are also well affected by these. One by one those Monsters also became unconscious. Not just only that, it looks like those Monsters also lose all of their strength.


    "What is happening? Why the hell do we lose our power suddenly? Did something happen to the core?"


    Instantly every one of them thought about the core and thought something happened to the core. But, Alena instantly reported that the barrier around the stronghold did not disappear. It looks like only all the living beings got affected by these and other than that the strongholds did not get affected by this.


    After hearing this all of them sigh in relief. Sam already told them before going to outer space that that area present around the core is the same as the stronghold. Not only the same but you can say it is much better than the barrier present in the Strongholds.


    Then herees the main question, what is happening right now and why are they suddenly affected by this? Everybody already knows this is rted to the core but why does something like this happen and did anything happen to the core?


    At this time, Saint Tony reported that all the people present on the battlefield also got unconscious. But he can already see the core still present in that ce. It is just some kind of pressure currentlying out from the core. He almost fell unconscious. Because of this, he maintains a distance from the core.


    Hearing all of this everybody became sure that all of this was rted to the core but none of them knew what was happening. The earthquake has already stopped but the pressure is still present. 10 hourster, it became even more difficult for all the saints to maintain their consciousness.


    Discover stories with M-V-L


    Everybody is trying their hardest to stay away. After 1 hour everybody became unconscious alongside Alena. Before losing consciousness she felt some kind of energy enter her body and instantly she was unable to hold on and became unconscious.


    ________________________________


    Alena begins to regain her consciousness. She slowly opens her eyes and so she isying on the ground. Instantly, she got up from the ground. She notices that by mistake damaged the ground and already a palm mark appeared on the ground.


    Now this is very surprising for her. After getting up from the ground she realizes that she already got back her full power. But that is the only case. When she tried to feel her power, she realized that she had be more powerful. Looks like she already broke through to the next Grade.


    Now this is surprising but she did not have the time to be happy about this. She instantly checks Sam and Hina''s presence in that room. After making sure both of them are okay, she instantly checks all the other Warriors present in the stronghold.


    Finally, she can rx as everybody is okay. She instantly contacted other saints. But nobody answered her phone. Without wasting a single second she quickly teleports to the battlefield to see the situation of the ce.


    First of all, she wanted to know why she felt that kind of pressure previously and how the hell she became that powerful. All of these rted to the core so she directly came to the battlefield.


    But surprisingly when she came to that ce she noticed the whole battleground hadpletely changed. Previously that ce was fully destroyed because of the war. All the buildings and everything got destroyed in that ce. Currently, if you look at the ce then you will never think this is the same ce where that war happened.


    The whole ce was covered with trees and grasses. Without wasting a single second she quickly tried to approach the center of that ce to see the condition of the core. At this time she noticed all the Warriors present inside that forest. All of them are okay as none of them receive any kind of injuries.


    Surprisingly when she came to the center she did not see any sign of a core. It disappears from its ce. The barrier is still present in that ce, but the core is not present there. Also, it looks like because of the barrier no trees can grow in that ce.


    At this time she suddenly receives a call. She quickly picked up the phone and saw Saint Markus contact her. Immediately she told everything and also asked about their situation. Markus told her that they werepletely okay and they also noticed that they had be more powerful.


    The good thing is that none of the monsters regain their consciousness. Alena on the other hand quickly told him what happened to the battlefield. Now after hearing all of this he naturally became very surprised. But in the end, he came to the conclusion that the evolution wasplete and the core had already gone back to its position.


    But the question is whether this happened or not. At this time, Alena noticed Saint Tony also came near the core. Also using the observation techniques she noticed all the Warriors present inside the forest begin to move. It Looks like they also begin to regain their consciousness.


    Alena told Saint Tony everything. Saint Tony is also surprised and in the end, he also agrees with Markus. Looks like the core went back to its position, in the center of theirs. Looks like the evolution process is alreadypleted.


    Not long after that, all the Warriors also approached toward the core. It looks like all of them have already regained their consciousness. She quickly told everyone that they could go back as finally everything was finished. Hearing that naturally, everybody bes very surprised and begins to cheer.


    Finally, the war is over and they are sessfully able to protect their. Nobody is able to get the core of their and sessfully evolve their. All those Warriors also noticed the change that happened inside their bodies. Most of them became powerful and broke through to the next grade.


    Gloria, Victor, and Tina without wasting a single second teleport Back to thest Stronghold. Naturally, they are worried about Sam. But they realize that Hina and all the Warriors present in that stronghold have already woken up.


    But unfortunately, it looks like Sam still has not recovered his mental energy and because of this he still has not regained consciousness.


    _____________________________________


    "I am happy to announce to everyone that finally our sessfully evolved. I think everybody already noticed the change happening to their body. All of these happened because our sessfully evolved. Also, it looks like previously we got affected because our evolved sessfully.


    So nobody has to worry about that matter. I hope everybody still stays inside the strongholds. Except for the Warriors, all the citizens needed to stay inside the strongholds.


    All the Warriors needed toe out of the strongholds. Now everything is finished, they have to take responsibility to take care of the situation. Because of those people from others most of our city is damaged, so we need to take care of all those things."


    Markus finally decided toe back to the safe zone. First of all, he and the others did not find any clue about those survivors from others. Also, their sessfully evolved. Naturally, they have the responsibility to take care of the situation.


    He also announced the news so that everybody can hear that and can rx. Now that their has evolved sessfully, they do not have to fear anything. Nobody would be able to steal the core after this.


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 Chapter 823 Waking Up

    Every warrior present inside the stronghold already came outside of the stronghold and they began to help to take care of those surrounding areas. Not just only the battlefield but most of the city was affected by the war.


    Not only because of those Warriors of others, but also because of the earthquake. So, those Warriors begin to take care of those matters. As the core finally evolves, nobody has to stay on the battlefield which has already turned into a forest.


    Gloria and Fiona decided to rest alongside all the Warriors who were previously present on the battlefield. Every one of them previously used the power amplifier but just after regaining their consciousness they once again went to the battlefield to stay alert and ready to attack their enemy anytime.


    It did not give them the proper time to rest. Even if those Warriors feel that they have broken through after the core evolved sessfully, still they need to rest to recover their mental energy.


    Jeni and the others decided to help those other Warriors to take care of their cities. They help other Warriors to clear those destroyed buildings and other things present in the cities. With the help of those Warriors, it did not take them that much time to clear those destructions.


    All this time, Jeni and the others also feel that all of them are recovering their spiritual energy much faster than before. Most likely this is also because of the core. They also felt the air around their be clear. A lot of changes happen to their after the core evolves.


    Despite all of this they also worried about Sam. It has already been 6 days since he became like this. Nobody knows how long it will take him to recover his mental energy. Some time ago, Alena, who went to thest Dungeon to check on her student, already reported to everyone that there was good news.


    Looks like Sam also received help from the core. Somehow the mental energy of Sam begins to recover. Previously, the recovery rate of the mental energy was very slow and if things stay like this then Sam would need almost 6 months to recover his spiritual energy. But currently, Sam is already able to recover 2% of his mental energy.


    Maximum he would take 3 months to recover his mental energy. At least hearing this news, everybody can rx a little. On the other hand, many people did not know what happened to the miracle maker after he took care of those enemies and the monster.


    Many people wanted to know about Sam and many people wanted to meet him. Unfortunately, they did not get any chances. Even the Warrior Association did not provide them with any information.


    ______________________________________


    "We can take the chance when the core evolves sessfully to attack those people. But if we did something like that then we would have no chance to escape from this ce or to save our life."


    "Yes, you are right. I also support you. First of all, we did not know that much about the unknown factor. There could be a chance he did not get that much affected when the core evolved sessfully.


    Every one of you should realize that the unknown factor previously did not use any kind of artifact or anything like this to take care of ourmanders and ourpanions.


    It Looks like the where he went helped that person to be that much more powerful. It is our bad luck that we did not have ess to that and did not know how to break that stone n to get ess to the. If possible I also wanted to go to that to be powerful.


    But nobody can indeed give us the guarantee that unknown factors would not attack us if we decide to attack them."


    " Sigh, I know that I was wrong. Well, I wanted to escape from this ce. As We previously predicted, it looks like we have already been abandoned by our. I did not know what to do in this situation.


    I am sorry that I put all of your life at risk. Just staying like this almost makes me mad. It is like my mind is trying to tell me to attack those people. Sigh, fortunately, you can stop me from doing anything reckless.


    Also, I think your idea is good. We should surrender ourselves to them. At least these will give us the chance to survive. Even if they put us in prison, at least we did not have to hide like this."


    " Hmm¡­ No worries. We can understand your situation. Who could have thought that we would get abandoned by our? The moment they realize that checking the core of this would not be easy or could be dangerous for them, they decide to forget about us.


    Also as We previously discussed. We should have one more day before surrender. In these 10 days, they will also get the time to clear all the destroyed area."


    Inside the danger zone, all the people who were able to survive the war are currently discussing surrender. One of them had previously almost done something reckless and almost tried to enter the safe zone the moment he realized the core of that evolved sessfully.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    During this time all the people will be affected by this and they will lose their strength for some time. One of them wanted to take that chance to attack them. Fortunately, all the other people present in that ce immediately stop him from doing anything reckless.


    There is a chance they would get the chance to kill those Warriors of Eden Blue, but what if the unknown factors suddenly appear there? It would be very dangerous for them. Also, nobody will give them guarantees that the unknown factor will be affected by this.


    First of all, realize that the power of the unknown factor is at a whole different level. They have no chance of surviving against him. Because of this, nobody also wanted to take any kind of risk about this.


    Also, on the other hand, decided to wait for 10 more days before surrendering. They should not recklessly reveal themselves. The hostility of those Warriors of Eden Blue still did not decrease. So there could be a possibility all of them get killed.


    __________________________________


    Markus and the others did not know anything about this. They alreadye back to the safe zone and decided to rest for one day. Naturallypared to any other warriors, all the saints are the ones who were mostly affected. Because of this, Markus and others decided to take one day''s rest.


    The next day every one of them also begins to help those other Warriors to take care of those destroyed cities. They begin to clear everything so that normal people will not have any problems aftering out from the strongholds.


    Naturally rebuilding all of this will take time but at least they did not have any casualties in this war. Alsopared to the destruction they have predicted, only 30% of the destruction happens.


    All of this thanks to Sam. It is just that he still did not Regan; he is conscious. But the good thing is that the recovery rate of Sam''s mental energy has already increased. Looks like all of these are also happening because of the core.


    None of them realized one important thing about the spiritual energy present there. It has already evolved. But unfortunately, they did not feel the difference between the spiritual energy.


    __________________________________


    20 dayster,


    You can see a person lying down on a bed. Looking at the person anybody will think the person is sleeping. He is not. It is Sam who is currently present in that ce.


    His parents had already taken him back to their house. Currently, he is present inside his room. Slowly Sam began to open his eyes. The moment he opened his eyes he instantly became alert.


    He was almost unable to recognize the surrounding area. But fortunately, it did not take that much time to recognize his bedroom. Only then did he rx. Only then does he notice that he is present in his bed and looks like he just woke up?


    Sam calms down and begins to think about what could happen to him. Thest thing he remembers is fighting that Monster outside of his. The moment he uses the power of the domain a huge amount of energy consumption appears.


    Even though the monster was unable to fight back, killing that Monster was not easy for him. It looks like the monster has a very powerful defense. This is the reason that it almost takes him a long time to kill the monster and during that time he continuously uses his power of domain.


    Because of this a huge amount of liquified spiritual energy got consumed and in the end, he can tell he almost uses 100% of his energy. Fortunately during that time he was already able to kill the monster.

 Chapter 824: Chapter 824 - Dream?

    Sam begins to observe his body. He can tell that he already recovered the liquified spiritual energy and also it looks like he has be powerfulpared to before. Now this is very interesting for him as he did not know how he became powerful.


    "Status"


    "Name: Sam Kainer


    Race: Superior Human


    Health: (20,0000/20,0000)


    Spiritual energy: (20,0000/20,0000)


    Liquify spiritual energy - (15000/15000) (Full)


    Soul energy - (220/220)


    Strength: 20,000


    Agility: 20,000


    Physique: 20,000


    Intelligent(mental power + Casting power): 20,000


    Spirit: 20,000


    Soul:- 1,000


    Status points:- 00


    Grade: ary-grade) (Intermediate) / (Intermediate RRR grade)


    Potential: Celestial


    Upgrade point: 119K


    Techniques:


    Special technique:


    Supreme upgrade (cooldown period for 2 months.)


    Fusion technique


    The power of domain (Only consume liquidity spiritual energy.)


    Absorb technique:


    Superior Dragon Devour


    Trigon absorb (Grade S)


    Combat techniques:


    Balor boxing ( grade A)


    Supreme sword technique (S-grade)


    Supreme archery technique (A-grade).


    Concealment technique:


    Superior Concealment technique (S-grade)


    Movement technique:


    Light walk (grade A)


    Spiritual techniques:


    me control (A-grade)


    Origin Spiritual energy control (A-grade)


    Sonic st technique: (A-grade)


    Strength buff technique: (A-grade)


    Mind control technique: (A-grade)


    Telekinesis: (A-grade)


    Berserker (A-grade)


    Light control (Grade A)


    Observation (A-grade)


    Energy shield (A-grade)


    Teleportation (A-grade)


    Passive techniques:


    Energy recovery: (A-grade)


    Mind protection: (A-grade)


    Spirit Eye: (A-grade)


    The power of the moon. (Grade - A)


    Regeneration (Grade S)


    Bloodline skills:-


    Superior Aura


    Superior Destruction


    Superior eyes


    [ Remark: Finally the little man can protect.]"


    Surprising that he already broke through to intermediateary grade. Not only that, the most surprising thing is that the soul power somehow increases. All of this really surprised him.


    But it looks like he can predict why he became that powerful. Looks like the core evolved sessfully and he also got rewarded because of this.


    Sam closed the system window and went to the bathroom. After freshening up, he decided to check his house. Naturally, he wanted to know the situation of his.


    Surprisingly, when he was just about to leave his bedroom, the door of his bedroom opened automatically and you could see it was Gloria who entered the room. She almost got shocked the moment she saw her brother standing there. She is almost unable to believe what she is seeing right now.


    "Hi,"


    Only when Sam talks to her, does Gloriae back to her senses, and instantly tears begin toe out from her eyes. Finally, her brother is conscious. Without wasting a single second she quickly hugged him.


    Previously she was holding a tree that had already fallen. But it looks like Gloria is not worried about that. On the other hand, Hina asked what happened. Currently, she is present in the kitchen room when she suddenly hears the sound of something breaking.


    She already called Gloria''s name, but she did not get any response which made her curious and she also came to see what was happening. Only then did she also be surprised the moment she saw her son standing in front of her? Gloria is currently hugging her brother.


    Without wasting a single second, Hina also approaches Sam and then hugs him.


    Sam on the other hand did not know what happened but one thing is sure all of his family members are worried about him.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally gets all the reports about his and also about his situation. It has already been one month since he lost consciousness. At first, his situation was very critical. But, Alena stabilized his condition. Even with that, she notices that the recovery rate of the mental Energy is very low for Sam.


    He would need almost 6 months to 7 months to recover his mental energy. Fortunately, the core sessfully evolved and it also helped him to recover his mental energy.


    Sam also gets to know what happened after he became unconscious. First of all, during the time when the core evolves sessfully, everybody bes unconscious. When they region their consciousness they also notice that they be powerful.


    This is the same as him, as he also became powerful. All of these happen because of the core. Other than that, previously the saints went to the danger zone to search for the survivors.


    At first, they found some clues, but after that, they did not find anyone. Which makes them focused on other things. As the core evolved they did not have to worry about the core.


    Surprisingly when everything is over and they also begin to redevelop their, suddenly some survivors of the war contact the Warrior Association. All of them are Warriors from differents but it looks like all of them wanted to surrender themselves.


    With these, the Warrior Association immediately takes them into their custody and after interrogation, everyone is able to find out that their decides to abandon them. This is the reason that they decided to surrender themselves and also decided to save their life like this.


    Every one of those Warriors is currently present inside the prison of their. Naturally, nobody wanted to forgive those people from others but as they surrendered themselves nobody thought it was necessary to kill those people.


    Hearing all the reports about the Sam bes surprised but he is also happy that everything is good. He did not have to worry about anything. With this Sam also decided to contact his friends. Alena is already on her way toward his home.


    ________________________________


    '' Why did I see a girl present inside some kind of prison? Who is this girl? Even after trying with all my full power, I was unable to see the face of that girl. But when I get close to that girl I feel very familiar.


    It Looks like I know that girl but I am unable to remember her. Nowe to think of it, that girl quite looks like the goddess that sent me to this. Is the goddess captured by someone?


    I did not know what was happening. Everyone told me that I was unconscious for almost 1 month. But for me, it is just 1 hour. All of this makes me very confused.


    I did not know what was happening and why I saw something like this. I still remember that I was able to touch everything in that dream and everything feels very real.


    Also at that time when I was present inside the prison, I could see the girl looking in my direction. But it looked like she did not have any intention to talk to me. Also, what are those people that I saw? Just looking at them I can tell they are very different from your normal people.''


    Sam finally came back to his room and began to think about the dream that he saw. Well, he did not think that was a dream because everything felt very real. Inside the dream, he still remembers that he is even able to feel pain.


    Previously after sessfully killing that monster, Sam somehow appeared in the ce. But the problem is that he became a ghost or something like this which did not have a physical body.


    But even with that he can touch everything other than those humans or you can say those people who look like humans. He saw that he was inside a prison where some strange people brought a girl inside.


    All this time the girl did not resist or try to do anything. Also, it looks like even though those people are bringing her inside the prison, those people are maintaining some distance from her. It looks like those people still fear that girl or something like that.


    When that girl enters the prison all those people instantly leave that ce. It was a big prison where other than that girl you would not be able to see anyone. The light source of that prison was a candle.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    At this time Sam thought he was dreaming so he tried to hit himself which made him feel pain. But unfortunately, he is unable to use any kind of techniques or Spiritual energy. Fortunately, he was able to feel a familiar energy present in his body and that was the soul energy.


    You also try to leave the prison which became impossible for him. It Looks like some kind of force is preventing him from going outside of the prison. Only then when he came back to that ce where you can see the girl, did he suddenly notice something.


    The girl looked in his direction. At first, he thought the girl was looking at other things. But in that direction other than him you would not be able to see anything. Sam even tries to talk to that girl. But the girl did not respond.


    Who is also very confused. He did not know if that girl was able to see him or not. Like this, he saw that girl sit down in a meditative position and then begin to meditate. At this time suddenly he began to feel the energy inside his body getting exhausted and like this, he lost consciousness. When he opens his eyes he finds himself present in his room.

 Chapter 825: Chapter 825 - Explanation

    Sam finally meets his friends. Everyone hugged him and they asked about his health. Even though their''s core evolved sessfully, none of them became rxed as Sam did not regain his consciousness. Fortunately, he regained his consciousness and this finally made everyone rx.


    Currently, Sam is present in the hall room with his family, his teacher, all of his friends, and his sister Fiona. Well, you have to say sister Fiona became close to his family. Compared to her own house she would spend most of her time there.


    Fiona also became happy the moment she heard Sam regain his consciousness. On the other hand, if you are wondering why they were present in the hall room then it is because everybody wanted to know what happened to him.


    They also wanted to know the battle against that monster. Naturally, even though they did not see the monster everybody could tell the monster was the real danger of their. Even facing those Epic-grade warriors did not make them that scared.


    Sam began to describe to them the characteristics of the monster and also he began to exin to them about the Intense battle between him and that monster. Everybody listened to the exnation very seriously. They cannot even imagine how much strength they would need to kill that monster.


    Also who can expect that Sam will face a monster who is as big as the sun? Like this, for 30 minutes Sam describes to them the battle.


    You have to say, while hearing about the battle everyone got the impression they were really scared about the strength of that Monster but fortunately, they can rx as Sam has already killed that monster.


    The most frightening thing was when that Monster was able to increase his power while burning his lifespan. It looks like in the end the monster only cares about killing him. He did not even want to get the core at the time as the monster just only wanted to kill Sam at any condition.


    With this finally, he finishes exining about the intense battle between him and that monster. When he finishes exining everything he can see the face of everyone. Everyone has a shocked expression present on their face. They never expected the battle would be that much intense.


    The sure thing is that even if they use the power amplifier against that monster, they would never be able to win against that monster. Even without using his lifespan to break through The Monster is so powerful that it can easily kill any of those enemy Epic-grade warriors.


    Sam asks his teacher what happened to those people from others who surrendered themselves. Alena tells him that those people are currently present inside the prison. It looks like those people got abundant by their and because of this, they did not have any other choice.


    Sam shows his curiosity to visit those people. He wanted to know if those people had any other intention other than this or not. Alena instantly agrees with him as she is even very curious about this. Unfortunately, previously when Saint Mira tried to read the minds of those people she became sessful.


    Compared to Saint Mira, all the people are powerful and they also have powerful mind defenses. Because of this, nobody knows about the intentions of those people. This is also a reason that the Warrior Association is currently observing those people very carefully.


    Even though all of them are present inside the prison, who can give them the guarantee that none of them would try to do anything?


    Other than that he also asked about the development of his. Even though none of the people were affected during the war, you cannot say that for all the buildings and other things present on their.


    Because of this, Sam wanted to know how much they were able to reveal. Alena told him that all the Warriors are currently focusing on that. They are already able to reconstruct 50% of those buildings and those houses.


    As the situation is good right now the normal people also came outside of the strongholds. They are also helping in this process alongside those Warriors. But you can say people present in the Warrior Association''s headquarters are always observing the safe zone and the moment they would find any kind of suspicious movements, they would immediately teleport everyone inside the strongholds.


    Hina, Alena, Gloria, Fiona and all the girls currently preparing food for them. 30 minutester everybody started eating in the dining room. They discussed various things while eating. At this time Sam is observing everyone. Finally, he can see everybody is happy and they are enjoying themselves. He is happy that he was able to keep those smiles and did not let those smiles be affected by the war.


    Sometimeter every one of them came to the Warrior Association. First of all, Sam wanted to see those people from others, and other than that he also promised all the saints that he would help them to change their spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system.


    Finally, as everything is over all the Saints can begin the process as it will take them much time. Even Sam did not know how long those people would take. First of all, all of them have already broken through to the Elite grade. Any person after breaking through to the Elite grade would need much time to be able to change their spiritual energy system.


    Saints Markus and everyone also greet him when Sames to the Warrior Association. All of them also express their sincere gratitude. They were finally able to survive and their did not get affected by the war because of him.


    At this time he also told Markus and the other sayings to get ready. He is going to help them change the spiritual energy system but at the same time, he gives them a warning as it will take them much time.


    After hearing that, Markus told him to wait for a few more days. Actually before focusing on bing powerful, every saint wanted to reconstruct everything on their. They are also going to arrange a big party for every warrior who participates in the war.


    Naturally, they wanted to celebrate their victory against those powerful people who could easily kill them. For 3 years everybody knew about the existence of those people from others, but none of them were able to do anything.


    But after 3 years everything is finally over and they can fully focus on bing powerful. At this time Sam also gives them the information that they are easily able to be Epic grade warriors. The Limit of their has already increased to Epic grade. Also, The Spiritual energy present in their evolves and it currently has true spiritual energy present on it.


    A mix of normal spiritual energy and true spiritual energy is present on their. Sam already can predict why he takes that much time to recover his mental energy. Actually, to recover his mental energy he also needed to recover the liquified spiritual energy.


    But previously the rate of the true spiritual energy present on Eden Blue was very low. Because of these, he would take that much time to recover The liquify Spiritual energy. Fortunately, with evolution the rate of the true spiritual energy increases and he can recover the liquified spiritual energy.


    Well, he did not tell them about the power of domain or the liquified spiritual energy. Knowing all of these would not matter to them. They should just focus on bing Epic-grade warriors.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Sometimeter,


    Sam, alongside Alena, recently went to the prison to see those people from others. Markus and the others also wanted toe with him but they became busy with other work. Currently, they are also helping in the reconstruction.


    Even without getting closer to the people Sam already uses the observation technique. He wanted to find out if any of those people had any kind of malicious intention or not. Fortunately, none of them have any kind of malicious intention.


    All of them don''t know why but have a peaceful expression present on their face. It Looks like they are enjoying their current life despite being present inside the prison.


    Well, who can me them as they did not have to fear the unknown factor? They can just rx inside the prison without losing their life. Even though life inside the prison is not rxing, they are happy that they did not have to lose their life.


    Suddenly all of them hear footsteps approaching toward them. Everyone who previously focused on meditation became curious. They wanted to know who was approaching them.


    Normally other than those people who give them the food, nobody would approach them. They also know that the Warrior Association would observe them 24 hours. It is normal because the Warrior Association is unable to read their mind. So nobody from the Warrior Association knows their true intention.

 Chapter 826: Chapter 826 - Surprised

    When Sam goes to the prison he can see the surprised expressions of those people. Everyone already recognizes Alena, but they do not recognize Sam at first.


    "He is the miracle maker of our. He is going to read your mind to see if you have any kind of n or not."n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Alena introduces Sam to them. In the next second, you can see all 5 of those people have a scared expression on their faces. Alena did not be that surprised as from the stars you know that every one of them fears Sam. But Sam bes surprised looking at their sudden expression.


    Well, it is normal for those people to be that scared as from the start they wanted to avoid meeting the unknown factor. Currently, the unknown factor is standing in front of them and this is naturally a serious thing.


    What if the unknown factory decided to kill them? They would not be able to do anything in front of the unknown factor. Just thinking about all of this makes those people very scared. They already begin to tremble in fear.


    "Don''t worry I am not going to kill you if you don''t have any malicious intentions against my."


    Even though Sam did not know the true reason for their fear, he could predict that those people most likely did not want to die. They are the survivors of the war, so they naturally notice the destruction caused by Sam.


    Sam without wasting a single second instantly uses the telekinesis technique to control one of them and then instantly uses the mind control technique. The moment he uses the mind control technique he already feels the resistance but that did not work against him.


    His consciousness already enters the mind of that person and Sam begins to approach the Central area of the mind. It did not take him that much time as that person did not have any kind of mental barrier present in his mind.


    Aftering to the center of the mind, Sam already noticed all the memories present. Without wasting a single second he began to read all the memories one by one to know the true intention of those people.


    At this time those remain for people looking at theirpanion with sadness. Even though Sam assured them he was not going to kill them, none of them believed that. Every one of them thinks Sam is going to kill them. Because of this, everyone became sad.


    But surprisingly they noticed 1 minuteter Sam regained consciousness and the body of theirpanion fell to the ground. But theirpanion isn''t dead. He just lost consciousness.


    Sam instantly did the same thing with those other people. 5 minutester Sam finally read all the memories of those 5 people.


    Sam gets up from the ground and then begins to leave the prison. His teacher without saying anything also began to follow him.


    Sometimeter,


    "I already read the memory of those people and I became sure that they did not surrender themselves because of some other intention. They indeed surrender themselves to protect their life. Every one of them got abandoned by their.


    They have no hope to return to their and because of this, they decided to surrender themselves. At least if they surrender they would not need to hide like this. So every one of you can rest assured about those people.


    Still, I would say keep monitoring them for a few months. Even though they did not have any intention, what if suddenly their decided to contact them? What if a teleportation portal suddenly appeared in the prison to take those people back to their?"


    Sam already told everyone what he found after reading the memory of those people. Only after hearing all of these can everybody rx. Finally, they did not have to worry about those people from others.


    Sam on the other hand leaves the Warrior Association alongside his teacher. He wanted to visit all the cities to see the condition of the cities. It would not take him that much time as he would be going to use the teleportation system present in the Warrior Association.


    Both of them begin to visit all the cities one by one. The good thing is that not every city was affected during the war. All the cities which are far away from the source of the earthquake were not affected by the war. Only those cities present close to the source of the earthquake were affected.


    Not only were they affected because of the war but they were also affected because of the earthquake. Also sometimes those people from others try to attack the strongholds. So like this, those cities got damaged. The good thing is that everybody is currently helping each other to reconstruct those cities.


    Sam on the other hand already came back to his house after finishing all the cities. It was already 9:00 p.m. when he came back to his house. When he came inside his room he could already tell his sister alongside Fiona practicing in the training room.


    Looks like his mom and dad are not present there. Sam finallyy down on the bed and decided to look at his system. It''s been a long time since he opened his system like this. You have to say aftering back from Terraria, he almost stopped looking at his status or his inventory.


    You once again look at his status. Sam can see he already has enough points to upgrade some of his techniques. On the other hand, when he opened the inventory he was surprised. Inside his inventory, he can see the dead body of that monster. Fortunately, the body of that Monster is divided into many parts.


    Other than that he can see other loot like techniques, scroll, new potions, new items, etc. He decided to read the description of those things one by one.


    Sometimeter,


    He was surprised because he got the technique that would help him control the Chaos spiritual energy control. Naturally, he is going to fuse that thing with his origin spiritual energy control. Other than that he received the technique called shadow control. He would be able to control the shadow.


    Not only that he can see he has 20 evolution potions. Just one drop of those potions would be able to evolve the bloodline of any person. That means Gloria or any other warrior take those potions, then there could be a chance they would be a superior human like him.


    Even with that, he cannot give the guarantee that they will be superior humans like him. There could be a chance that they would reach the limit of human potential where they would get a power boost. There is a low chance for them to sessfully be superior humans.


    Other than that he receivedary-grade body armor. He also received a sword and 5 rebirth potions. Now thest item is very special as it can bring back any person from death. The condition is that the person dies in 24 hours. If it already crossed 24 hours then he would not be able to revive that person.


    Now this is a very important thing that would be helpful to him. In this dangerous world, anything could happen anytime and anybody could lose their life anytime. With the help of those potions, he can help those people.


    Like this, he finally decided to bring out those stats crystals. He is going to use them to increase his power. Looks like killing that Monster already gives him 5,000 stats crystals. This is a matter of fact because he never received that many crystals just by killing one monster.


    _________________________________


    5 dayster,


    For 5 days even Sam decided to help those people to reconstruct those damaged cities. Naturally, everybody became happy after receiving help from the miracle maker. But everybody also tries to rest him. He just recovered so he needed to rest. Unfortunately, Sam did not listen to any of them and decided to help.


    In these 5 days, almost 90% of the reconstruction ispleted. Because of this, the Warrior Association also decided to hold the celebration tomorrow. They already announced to every human present on their that tomorrow there will be a celebration.


    The Warrior Association also decided to hold that celebration in a ce that has the mark of the evolution of their. As you can predict, the celebration is going to be held in that City which is turned into a forest.


    Every citizen of the city decided to move out of that city. This is the battlefield where everything happens and this is also the ce that shows them that they can win the war without any casualties. This is the reason that they decided to keep that forest like this.


    Also because of the density of The Spiritual energy present inside that ce, it would be a good training ce.

 Chapter 827: Chapter 827 - Celebration

    Today is the day when the Warrior Association will be celebrating their victory. Every citizen of Eden Blue is invited to participate in that celebration. Also, they renamed the city which was converted into the forest into the forest of the beginning.


    This is the ce that bears the evidence of their''s evolution. This is the ce where they win the war against those people from others. This is the ce that is targeted by a dangerous Monster that can easily destroy their.


    This is the ce where the Warrior Association is going to organize the celebration. Today around 10 a.m. you can already see a lot of peopleing to that area as the celebration will start in the morning. There will be many dancing and singing shows alongside many other things that will be present in the celebration.


    Almost every warrior who participated in the war already came to that ce. Every one of them was specially invited by the Warrior Association, as they are the heroes who did not think about their own lives while deciding to participate in the war.


    Only the saints alongside the miracle maker and his family did not appear in that ce. Sam and the others are currently present in the Warrior Association. Sam wanted to know the situation of their before participating in the celebration.


    There could be a chance that during this time suddenly world bridges open on their. This is also an important matter that the Warrior Association observes every day. But the good thing is that they did not see any sign of suspicious things like this on their.


    Jeni and the others already called Sam and told him toe to the celebration. They already came to the forest at the beginning. Not just only them but everybody from the Royal Academy alongside all the other Academy waiting for Sam.


    Who doesn''t want to meet the miracle maker who is the hero of their? He is the person who can protect them and prevent any kind of casualties during the war. He is the person who first created those strongholds. Without his help, there is no chance that any other saints would be able to create those strongholds.


    He is the person who without thinking about his own life begins to fight everyone and even fights that dangerous monster. Naturally, if they did not have a person like Sam who protected them from every danger, the Eden blue would have already been destroyed.


    Currently, many kids are performing on the stage. All the people present there enjoyed their time as time like this came into their lives. Suddenly some people appear in that area which instantly attracts the attention of everyone present in that ce.


    Everybody became excited the moment they noticed those people who arrived there. It is Sam and his family who just came to that area. Instantly everybody present in that ce cheered for them. They not only were cheering for Sam, but they were also cheering for his family.


    Gloria, alongside his mom and dad, is also called the hero of their. They also showed extraordinary performance during the war. They led almost every A-grade warrior during the war.


    Gloria and Fiona went to meet their friends while Hina and Victor also went to meet their colleagues. Sam on the other hand went to meet his friends alongside all the students of Warrior Academy who were eagerly waiting for him.


    One by one many people came to him for an autograph. Many people wanted to talk to him as they wanted to see their Hero. Like this, finally, 1 hourter everybody calmed down. Sam alongside his friends also begins to enjoy the show of the children.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Like this around 1:00 p.m. finally, it is time for lunch. The Warrior Association already prepared lunch for everyone. Also, almost every citizen of Eden Blue participates in that celebration. Because of this, the forest at the beginning is filled with people.


    But there is no problem managing those people. One thing everybody also notices is that the size of that forest from the beginning also increases after evolution.


    At this time one person from the Warrior Association announced to everyone that around 3:00 p.m. all the heroes of the Eden Blue will get awarded by the saints and the miracle maker. After that, everybody will give their speech to everyone. Even the miracle maker will give his speech to everyone.


    Normally many people do not like this kind of speech but today is different. Today they will be listening to the speech of their heroes and most of all the miracle maker will give his speech.


    Everybody is happy except one person and that is Sam. Well, this ispletely unexpected for him. Most likely his teacher arranged this. He already said that he did not like to give speeches like this but it looked like his teacher did not listen to him.


    Alena and the others who are present beside him begin tough after realizing his situation. They also know that Sam did not like to give speeches like this in front of everyone. There could be a possibility it got arranged by teacher na.


    "Hahaha¡­ don''t worry, I don''t think our Hero would fear a speech like this. Just look at those children who are happy to listen to your speech. You don''t even know that whenever we meet any children, they always ask about you.


    It is like you became a god-like figure to them and everybody just joined your cult."


    Tony all of these with a smile. He enjoys the Misfortune of Sam. But it is true that every time they go outside of their house, they will meet many people who want to know the situation of Sam and it is impossible that they also want to meet Sam.


    Sam became speechless after looking at his friend who was enjoying his misery. But what can he do at this time?


    "Sigh, forget about all of this. Tomorrow I wille to my house as I have a very important matter to discuss with all of you. This is important because this is rted to making you stronger. Also at this time, I will tell all of you some good news."


    Sometimeter, Sam suddenly told all of them that tomorrow they needed to visit his house as he had some important information to give them alongside the good news.


    Jeni and the others who previouslyughed while enjoying the misery Sam instantly became curious the moment Sam said all of this. But none of them asked any questions about this as everybody knows Sam would not give them any information even if they asked.


    Not just only his friends but he also told his teacher Alena, and sister Fiona toe to his house tomorrow. He told every one of those people who have the true spiritual energy system. He is going to give them the evolution potions.


    Naturally, he trusts all of them and because of this, he is going to help them to be more powerful. But he won''t be able to guarantee that all of them will be superior humans. But at least by using those evolution potions, everyone would be more powerful.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, all the Saints and miracle maker Sam already came to the stage. Everyone present in the celebration is focusing on the stage right now. Everybody did not want to miss a single moment.


    "It is nice to see all of my people. I am really d that all of you arepletely safe and we did not have any casualties. It is fortunate that we finally won the War.


    Naturally, every one of you knows all of this happened because of our miracle maker. So I want everybody to p for him. We wanted to show him our gratitude."


    The moment Markus said that the whole forest of beginning filled with the sound of pping. Sam became quite shy after seeing those many people cheering for him.


    "It''s been 3 years since we were able to enjoy our life like this. For 3 years we have feared those people from other worlds as they could attack us anytime to take over our. Fortunately, before the core appeared on the surface area all those people were restricted by the restriction force of our.


    But even in this situation, they have the chance to attack us. I think many of you did not know but all those people from others bring so much reinforcement from their.


    Everyone hid themselves in the danger zone where normally we did not roam around. As every one of you knows, those people have some special techniques or artifacts which also help them to hide from our observation.


    Because of this in these 3 years, we were unable to find any clue about those people. But not just only them...."

 Chapter 828: Chapter 828 - Reward ceremony

    "Because of this in these 3 years, we were unable to find any clue about those people. But not just them, we also have to worry about those dark humans. I think many of you did not know about those dark humans. They are the people who previously belonged to the Dark Association but somehow they turned into more powerful and became dark humans.


    They are also the people who want to get to the core of our. Not only that, they also wanted to destroy our as we are the old enemy of the people. But fortunately, I can say we survived everything and defeated everyone.


    This is naturally a huge matter to us. Also, we should thank our miracle maker as because of him we can do all of this. Without his help, it is impossible for us to survive the war.


    I also wanted to show my graduation to all the people who previously participated in the war despite all of them losing their lives. Please everyone p for our heroes who put their lives in danger to protect our."


    Once again all the people present in that ce begin to p for every one of those Warriors who previously participated during the war.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    " Now let''s wee all of our heroes."


    Markus finally told all the people who previously participated in the war toe toward him. One by one all the Warriors begin to approach the front area. During this time all the people present in that ce pped for them.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, you can see almost every A-grade warrior who previously participated in the war. One by one they were rewarded by the Saints and Sam. Sam also decided to give them the gift that he prepared for them.


    You can see Gloria, Fiona, Hina, and Victor also present. Currently Tony and the others begin to p for all of them. Every one of them really should feel gratitude as without the help of those people it ispletely difficult for any Saints or miracle maker to protect their.


    One by one those Warriors get rewarded and every time all the people present in that ce p for all those heroes.


    Like this one hourter, finally, the award ceremony is finished. This is the time for Sam to give his speech and after that, all the heroes will be giving their speeches one by one.


    If this was your normal time then naturally nobody wanted to hear a long speech from any of them. But the time is different and everybody is also excited to hear the speech of all the heroes.


    "It is good to see that all of my people are okay. I know that all of you go through a dangerous situation where anybody has the chance to lose their life. Despite going through that kind of situation none of you lose your hope and this is also a big reason that we can survive the war.


    Now our is already evolving and I can say this is also the time for us to grow strong. I hope all of my people will use this chance to train very hard. I don''t want any of my people to go through the same kind of situation where anybody from another can threaten our lives.


    I wanted to show everyone from others the strength of our. I have full confidence in my people that they would be able to do this.


    I also found out a good thing. Compared to before, currently every one of you, despite your potential, can increase your familiarity with your technique much faster. I know that many of you already realize this.


    This is the perfect chance to use these advantages to increase your power. Also uses the training facility of the Warrior Association. These will also help you to increase your power faster."


    After saying all of this Sam finishes his speech. Even though this was quite awkward for him, he finally finished his speech and you have to say everyone looked like they got motivated after hearing his speech. Everyone began to cheer more loudly the moment he finished his speech.


    At this time even all the Saints can feel their blood boiling after hearing the speech of Sam. It is true that they also wanted to increase their power and reach the power limit where nobody from others could threaten their life.


    "I forgot to announce to everyone that I also have a special reward for all of you but to achieve that special reward you also need to achieve something. For 6 months I will be observing the improvement of every one of you.


    6 monthster I will be deciding who would qualify to receive my rewards. So I hope in these 6 months everyone will work very hard and improve themselves."


    The moment he finished saying that everybody became very confused and curious. Even Alena and the others did not have any idea about this. They also wanted to know about this special reward but it looks like Sam did not want to reveal anything about this.


    Sometimeter,


    It is the time for all the heroes to give their speeches. Other hand, the Saints also discuss something. Actually, they also got the idea to hold apetition 6 monthster. This would be the perfect chance for them to hold thepetition.


    In thispetition, anybody here below S-grade would be able to participate. This will also give everyone more motivation to work hard and Sam can also observe the improvement of all those people in thatpetition. Naturally, Sam did not have any problem with this.


    At this time he also asked about the annual collegepetition. As you know previously the annual collegepetition did not get the chance toplete. After hearing his words, Markus and the others decided that they would continue the annual collegepetition.


    But it will be one monthter as those students will need some time to prepare themselves.


    __________________________________


    Sam is currently roaming around the forest from the beginning. He really cannot believe this kind of forest would appear in the ce. Also, all the destruction that previously happened on the battlefieldpletely disappears the moment the forest appears on the ce.


    You can also find a water source present in that forest which is filled with spiritual energy. This is called the spirit water which is very beneficial for any Warrior if that person brings the water.


    Other than these he can also feel all the trees have additional spiritual energy present in them and the density of The Spiritual energy also makes that ce perfect for training.


    He did not even have to use any kind of array to increase the density of that ce. You can say this forest has the same facility as the training rooms of the Warrior Association.


    But at this time he also began to think about an important matter. What if more powerful Dungeons would appear in that ce? As you know previously the limit of their was around S-grade, because of this, only those S-grade Dungeons appear on their.


    But currently, the situation is different and the limit of the also increases. So definitely there is a chance that more powerful Dungeons will appear on his. It is a good thing that he will be staying there for a few months. He just hoped in that those few months every saint would be able to increase their strength to handle this kind of matter.


    "What are you thinking? Did you face any kind of trouble?"


    At this time Gloria suddenly came behind him and asked that to him. She can see her brother most likely thinking something important. So she wanted to know if he was facing any kind of problem.


    "Don''t worry, sis. I am not facing any kind of problem. It is just that I think that we would need to increase our power very quickly. As the limit of our increases, more powerful Dungeons will appear on our.


    Nowe to think of it Ipletely forget about you alongside Mom Dad and sister Fiona, who went inside the S-grade dungeon. How was your experience inside the Dungeon? If possible I also wanted to go inside the Dungeon to feel the atmosphere present in that Dungeon."


    Sam assured her that he was not facing any kind of problem. But he also became very curious about the adventure of his sister when she went inside the S-grade dungeon.


    Naturally, he would be curious about this. He did not even get the chance to go inside of those Dungeons. Previously when he still did not teleport to the Terraria, he also had the wish to go inside of those S-grade Dungeons. But after that, everythingpletely changed. So suddenly as he had the chance, he also wanted to know about the Monsters present inside those S-grade Dungeons.

 Chapter 829: Chapter 829 - Successfully evolution

    One by one A-grade warriors finish giving their speech. You have to say that every time all the other people present in that ce show their appreciation. Like this two hourster, everyone finishes giving their speech.


    Once again the cultural program continues and this time all the saints are even present in that ce to enjoy the cultural program.


    The next day,


    Today is the day when Sam is going to give his family and other people the evolution potions. He already called his teacher, friends, sister Fiona, and his family. Every one of them is currently present in the training room and waiting for him to tell them the important news.


    "This is the thing that I wanted to show all of you. After killing that prime dragon I got this thing and this thing called the evolution potion. Just one drop of this potion is enough to purify our bloodline.


    I already use this thing and I can tell I be more powerful and my bloodline also bes powerful. Suddenly I also have a special skill called bloodline pressure. I wanted to give this thing to all of you so that you can also purify your bloodline.


    I did not tell anyone about this because except for all of you, nobody would be able to use the true spiritual energy. Spiritual energy also ys a vital factor in this matter. Because of this I only called all of you."


    Sam finishes exining why he called every one of them here. But you have to say that when he finished exining all of this, everyone became very shocked. They never expected something like this. Bloodline evolution is a very unknown thing to them. They never thought something like this could be possible.


    Naturally, they also wanted to ask why he did not tell other saints. Only then do they realize that except all of them, nobody would be able to use the true spiritual energy and this is the reason that Sam would not give them the evolution potion.


    Sam already prepared 14 potions for them. Well, he can mix that drop of evolution potion into water and he did that. One by one he instructed them what to do. Gloria and the others sit down in Lotus position to meditate.


    Sam told him that the moment they drink those evolution potions, they will feel strange energy present in their body. At that time they control their spiritual energy to go toward the strange energy.


    One by one everyone begins to follow the process. Sometimeter Sam bes surprised as he can already see 14 people in front of him begin to glow brightly in white color. Every one of them already takes the evolution potions.


    He did not know if all of them would be able to be superior humans or not. But at least they would receive strength after using the evolution potion. Also, he realized one thing after using the potion, nobody would be able to use that once again in the next 12 months.


    If anybody tries to use that then that person would receive bacsh. It will directly destroy the foundation of the people and also spiritual energy of the person will also be affected by this.


    _______________________________


    "I don''t think I take this much even if I am unable to remember anything. But I wanted to know how long it will take to finish the evolution process. It''s already been 12 hours but it looks like the process is still going on and it will take much time."


    It''s been 12 hours but Gloria and the others are still going through the evolution process. Sam did not know how long they would take so he just decided to wait for them. Sam is present there to help them if they face any kind of problem.


    But the problem is that even after 48 hours, none of them showed signs of waking up. The evolution process is still going on. But 48 hourster he realized that something starteding out from the body of those people.


    It is like the waste of their body finally begins toe out. He is familiar with this thing because he also went through the same situation.


    Sam predicted that almost 12 hours would be needed for them to wake up. Well, his prediction is right. Finally 12 hourster the white glow present in their body begins to disappear. After that one by one begin to open their eyes.


    Everyone became confused for a few seconds but finally, they remembered why they were present in that ce and what they were doing. Before they can do anything, all of them get hit by a nasty smell which almost makes them vomit. Only then do they realize that all of them were covered in dark things?


    Sometimeter,


    Everyone finally came back to the training room after freshening up, also able to observe the status. He begins to check the status of everyone. Instantly he became happy. Every one of them already received the power boost because of their new bloodline.


    As you can predict, all of them became superior humans and all of them have the same benefits like his own bloodline. He can see the same bloodline skill present in them.


    "Congrattions to all of you as I can tell every one of you became a superior human. I think all of you already noticed the power boost all of you receive. That is because of your superior bloodline. Other than that I think all of you have knowledge about some skills which were your bloodline skills."


    Hearing that Gloria and the others became happy. Naturally, every one of them begins to check their body to feel the difference. Every one of them can feel the energy resources present in their body already increase and somehow The Spiritual energy present in their body bes stronger.


    They already notice the power boost they have received. After hearing the word of Sam they also notice the information present in their mind. That information came to their mind automatically.


    One thing Sam noticed was that none of them had three bloodline skills like him. All of them have one bloodline skill. Most likely because he has the Origin spiritual energy he receives 3 bloodlines skills.


    One by one Gloria and the others begin to use their new power so that they can be familiar with their new power. All this time Sam is observing them. He wanted to know how much power they would be able to bring out using the bloodline skill.


    All the physical Warriors receive the destruction fist while all the Spiritual Warriors receive the energy booster. Both of them are the bloodlines of superior humans. But surprisingly none of them receive the bloodline pressure.


    Sam thought at least one of them would receive the bloodline pressure. But it looks like the bloodline pressure is something unique that not everyone can get. Naturally, he checks the power of everyone and he can say currently they can bring out 10% power using their bloodline skill.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    _________________________


    "Sigh, one after another he surprised us. I never thought something like this would happen. Who thought we would be able to evolve our bloodline like this? I can already feel the difference in my body. But Sam already told us that we would be able to feel more difference when we would be fighting Monsters.


    I am excited to visit the Dungeon to fight those Monsters."


    " I also agree with you. I also wanted to feel my new power against those Monsters and wanted to see what is the specialty of our bloodline."


    " Well, you are right about one thing, Sam is a miracle maker. From 1st year he just kept surprising us. Only because of him are we able to use the true spiritual energy. Now only because of him can we evolve our bloodline.


    I don''t know if you would be able to help him in this kind of matter or not. But I wanted to use this opportunity to make myself powerful so that if Sam needed my help I would be present there. I did not want to feel helpless like before."


    Jeni and the others are currently discussing with each other. All of them are very surprised after going through the evolution process. Beforeing to Sam''s house they thought Sam was going to give them some kind of advance training n or going to train them. But he never expected he would give them the evolution potions.


    From 1st year they just keep receiving help from Sam. But unfortunately, they were never able to help him. All the time he would put his life in danger to protect them and this made them very helpless. Every one of them wanted to at least achieve the power to help Sam.


    Everyone knows that from the first day, Sam bears the burden to protect their. Without his help, they would not be able to protect their. To protect his Sam also continuously put his life in danger.

 Chapter 830: Chapter 830 - Good news

    Sam fights with all of them so that they can get used to the new power. One by one he started fighting with them. Compared to his friends, the fight between him and his parents, Gloria, Fiona, and Alena was more intense.


    None of them tried to hold back during the spring session. They used their full power and wanted to injure Sam. Unfortunately in the end they were unable to do anything. One thing everybody also realizes during the sparring session. That is the bloodline pressure that Sam continuously uses on them.


    Sam wanted to know if any of them would awaken the bloodline pressure skill or not. As you know this is a very effective skill that even works against a powerful monster. All those Monsters who did not have powerful bloodlines would be affected by this skill.


    Unfortunately, after the sparring session, he once again looked at their status but was unable to see the bloodline pressure present on their bloodline skill. Most likely waking up bloodline pressure is not easy.


    On the other hand, all of them already get used to the destruction fist or the power booster. Also, none of them realized that whenever they released their energy fluctuation, additional pressure came out from their body.


    Even though none of them were able to use the bloodline pressure skill, still a pressure came out from their bloodline which they would be able to notice when they would fight any Monster or anyone whose bloodline is not in the same level as them.


    At this time he also told every one of them that they needed to go inside the Dungeon to fight those Monsters. Everybody also agrees with that. This time Sam will also go with them inside the S-grade dungeon. As you know he never went inside those dungeons, so he wanted to know what those dungeons looked like.


    He also wanted to find out if any kind of strange teleportation symbol was present inside those Dungeons or not. With this it was decided five dayster they would be going inside the Dungeon. In these 5 days, everybody should focus on getting familiar with their new strength and also trying to improve themselves.


    Sam on the other hand told the other Saints toe to the meeting room of the Warrior Association. It takes them some time to reach that ce.


    "I wanted to tell all of you that after 15 days I will be starting to help you to change your spiritual energy system. During that time, I want all of you to restpletely.


    Don''t put any kind of pressure on your body. Other than that, try to meditate every time to maintain a calm state. When all of you will be going through the changes, you will be feeling much pain. Before that I want all of you to prepare yourself.


    Also 5 dayster I will be visiting the S-grade dungeon alongside my family, friends, teacher, and sister Fiona. So I would not be present at the time. But if anything serious happens to our, immediately contact me."


    Sam already exined the reason for the meeting. He will go inside the Dungeon 5 dayster. So during that time, he would not be able to help those saints to change their spiritual energy system. He will do that aftering out of the dungeon. During all this time, everyone needs to restpletely without putting any kind of pressure on their body.


    Sam knows that this can be hard for them as currently, all the saints are also helping to reconstruct their. But as all of them will we go through a torturous process. Before that, they need topletely rx their mind and body. Also, meditation would help them to maintain their calm state. This is only very effective during the time when they will go through that torturous process.


    Markus and the others be surprised when they hear that for 15 days they would not be able to do anything and needed to restpletely. But the problem is that if they wanted to change their energy system then they needed to follow the order of Sam.


    Fortunately, the situation of their is already normal and they do not have any kind of danger right now. If they face any kind of danger they would immediately contact Sam. So after thinking all of these all of them agree with the n of Sam.


    With this Sam went back to his house while all the saints also went back to their previous ce. At least today they can continue their work. So before they focused on meditation every saint wanted to finish their work.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    ___________________________________


    "I know that we all go through a lot of things but I am proud of my people who did not lose their hope and willpower. Even in this dangerous situation, we fight back using our full power.


    Because of this I also think that our students who were previously unable toplete the annual collegepetition should get the chance toplete their annual collegepetition. Because of this, one monthter the annual collegepetition would continue.


    We already revealed our and only a few things are left. In this one month, I have full confidence that we will be fully ready to enjoy the annual collegepetition once again.


    I want to support our students in the annual collegepetition. Our students are the future of our. They needed to have more willpower. I can tell that all of our students also wanted to finish the annual collegepetition.


    Naturally, all the Saints also think the same thing as those students. So after 1 month, we would continue the annual collegepetition.


    Now came the second good news that I wanted to give everyone. 6 monthster the Warrior Association will be holding a warriorpetition where any Warrior would be able to participate.


    I think you already remember the thing your miracle maker told all of you. You would be regarding you after observing your improvement. So after that, we discussed among ourselves and we decided that we would organize apetition for every Warrior to participate.


    Except for those people who will reach S-grade, everybody has the chance to participate in thepetition. I hope every one of you starts to prepare yourself for thatpetition. Even though we did not know about the gift of the miracle maker, we are sure about one thing: the keeps have the capability to increase your power.


    So for 6 months, I want every one of my Warriors focused on improving themselves. Remember all of us will be present there to help any of you. Also, our Warrior Association would be avable anytime. So if anybody wants to use the training facility of our Warrior Association, they can use that without any problem.


    Other than that, the forest of the beginning is one of the best ces for training. All of you can also use the forest of the beginning for your training."


    John with all of this finishes his exnation. Some time ago he decided to give a speech to everyone. All the news reporters broadcast all the information about Saint John.


    You can say even some of those reporters be excited about thepetition. It is a good thing the annual collegepetition will continue one monthter. But the most interesting thing about thispetition which will be held 6 monthster.


    Even if Saint John did not tell them about the gift, everybody wanted to get the gift from the miracle maker. First of all, everybody already predicted that every gift from the miracle maker would not be normal. Even those A-grade warriors who participate in the war, already receive gifts from Sam.


    All the gifts help those Warriors to improve themselves. These also make all the Warriors want to get the gift from the miracle maker.


    After hearing the news from Saint John, everybody became fully excited about thepetition. Also, it looks like all the warriors of their would be able to join thepetition.


    Naturally, they will try to improve themselves in these 6 months and if anybody can be a S-grade Warrior, that would be a good thing for their.


    _________________________________


    All the students from the Warrior Academy became excited once again. Naturally, all of them wanted to continue the annual collegepetition. They were unable toplete the annual collegepetition because of the war. But this time they wanted toplete the annual collegepetition.


    Fortunately, these also give them one month''s time to prepare themselves. All of them wanted to work hard for one month so that they could win thepetition. As their evolves, they will be able to increase their power more quickly.


    So naturally everybody wanted to use this chance to improve themselves and perform better in the annual collegepetition.

 Chapter 831: Chapter 831 - S-grade dungeon

    Jeni and others are also getting prepared to visit the S-grade dungeon. Naturally, they would not be able to go inside that kind of powerful Dungeon, but with the help of Sam, they would be able to go inside the Dungeon.


    Sam wanted to bring every one of them so that they could also get experience in fighting those Monsters. Also, he wanted to see how much they could progress while fighting those Monsters. This is the reason that he is also taking his friend inside the S-grade dungeon.


    On the other hand, Gloria and the others are getting ready to go inside the Dungeon. Compared to the friends of David, all of them already have experience in fighting those Monsters.


    Previously when they came inside they never tried to attack a group of Monsters and always tried to search for a single monster. Because even though they have the confidence that normal monsters would not be able to defeat them, those are the Monsters who are S-grade. Naturally fighting them would not be easy.


    Sam already came back from the warrior association and told everyone to get ready. Before going inside the Dungeon, Sam informs everyone about this and also tells him that if they face some kind of dangerous situation, they should immediately contact him.


    10 minutester,


    Using the teleportation system of the Warrior Association Sam and the others already came in front of the S-grade dungeon. This should be the first time that Sam would enter this Dungeon which was previously called the superior dungeon.


    Well, he can already tell the difference between a normal Dungeon and the Dungeon in front of him. First of all the Dungeon is very big and also in front of the Dungeon you can see the big Gate. Normally in front of the Dungeon, you would not be able to see something like this.


    Also continuous pressure of S-grade releasing from the Dungeon. Because of this, many people who did not reach a sufficient level to handle the pressure would not be approaching the superior dungeons.


    At this time, Sam already noticed those Warriors of the Warrior Association who were present near the Dungeon to prevent anyone from entering the Dungeon. Before entering any superhero Dungeon you need to get permission from the Warrior Association.


    Naturally, many people want to challenge superior Dungeons, and because of this many people already lose their lives inside those Dungeons. The Warrior Association put guards around those Dungeons so that something like this did not happen once again.


    All the guards instantly salute Sam and Alena. Both of them have that kind of respect from every warrior of the Warrior Association. Naturally, those people will show their respect to Alena, as she is the Saint. On the other hand, Sam''s reputation is above any of those Saints.


    Sam and Alena greeted those people and also asked about the situation of the S-grade dungeon. Both of them wanted to know if any kind of abnormality appeared in the Dungeon because of the evolution or not.


    "Ma''am, until now we did not find any kind of abnormality appear inside the Dungeon. Even though we did not enter the Dungeon, we also did not find any kind of fluctuationing out from the Dungeon. So we cannot be 100% sure that nothing abnormal happens inside the Dungeon."


    Alena after hearing the response of the warrior in front of her nodded. It is natural because none of the saints get the time to enter these superior dungeons, and because of this nobody can tell if some kind of abnormality appears inside the dungeon or not.


    "Well, don''t worry about that. If any kind of abnormality appears inside the dungeon, I will handle that. Also, it looks like aftering out of this dungeon, I need to visit all the superior dungeons."


    Sam said that to Alena. Naturally, Alena is not worried about the abnormality. She has full confidence in Sam. After hearing his word Alena nodded and with that, they finally began to approach the Dungeon.


    Jeni and others can already feel the pressureing out from the Dungeon. But it looks like because of their evolved bloodline and true spiritual energy, they did not get that much affected. This is also an advantage they have over any other Warriors.


    Sometimeter,


    All of them finally enter the Dungeon. They instantly notice the surrounding area changes. You can see volcanoes present in that area alongside Lava also present in that area. Sam already told everyone to stay very careful while he was already using the observation taking to search for Monsters.


    Well, it looks like he did not have to search for that long because Monsters were already approaching their direction. Sam already told everyone to get ready to fight those Monsters. Jeni and others will be handling one Monster. All of them will be responsible for handling one monster Gloria, and Fiona will be fighting one monster.


    Hina and Victor also will be fighting one monster. Well, anybody could think this would be dangerous for them but actually, this will also give them the experience. Also because of their new power boost Sam has the confidence that they would be able to handle those Monsters.


    Alena will be handling three Monsters in advance. As she already became an intermediate Elite grade warrior, there would be no problem handling those Monsters. Currently, 10 monsters are approaching them. Sam will be handling those remaining Monsters. But he did not have the n to kill any of them.


    Jeni and the others instantly feel the pressureing out from The Monster but the pressure does not affect any of them. They just only feel light pressure present on their body but at the same time, the monster in front of them feels the bloodline pressure.


    Even though Elena, Jeni, and others did not have the bloodline pressure skill, whenever they used any technique they would release the bloodline pressure.


    "Roar!!!!"


    The lizard-like monster in front of them instantly became angry after feeling the pressureing out from those humans. The Monster can easily tell that 10 humans present in front of him are weak. Despite that, those 10 humans released that much powerful pressure.


    Instantly a huge firewall was created in front of the monster which blocked all the attacksing out from Jeni and others. But the monster is not ideal. In the next second The Monster quickly jumped into the Lava near them.


    Look like those red lizard Monsters have the resistance against fire element. Because of this, many of them are having problems going through the Lava.


    But this instantly made Jeni and others be very alert and they instantly created a barrier in front of them. Fortunately, they reacted very quickly as the next again a huge fireball hit the barrier. But it did not and there were continuously many more fireballs approaching the barrier.


    The good thing is that everyone uses their spiritual energy to maintain the barrier. Because of this, the barrier can survive those attacks from the Monster. But you can already see the crack mark appear on the barrier and everybody can tell they would not be able to maintain the barrier for that long.


    Instantly they begin to activate their other techniques. The moment they notice The Monster stop attacking them using the fireballs they deactivate the warrior and use theirbined attack on the monster.


    The Monster justnded in front of them when instantly thebined attack approached him. But the monster isn''t slow. He is also able to react quickly and also uses a fire beam.


    He created the fire beam from his mouth which directly shed with thebined attack of Jeni and the others. At this time both parties can feel the power behind their enemies'' attack. Naturally, both parties did not want to back down and they were using their full power.


    Suddenly, Jeni, Elena, and all the spiritual Warriors instantly use their energy booster to increase the power behind their attack. All of this happened so quickly that the monster also did not get the time to react or do anything.


    Thebined attack instantly destroyed the fire beaming out from that Monster and directly went toward the monster. The Monster can already feel the dangering out from The Attack so he tries to jump away from the ce.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    "Roar!!!!"


    You can already see a tail present in the ce where previously Monsters were standing. Even though The Monster tried to escape from that ce by jumping into theva, he was unable to react that quickly. The tail of the monster got hit by thebined attack which is enough to separate that tail from the monster.


    The Monster is currently roaring in pain in the Lava. But it looks like the regeneration of the monster is already helping him to regenerate another tail. But how could Jeni and others let that happen? They once again use theirbined attack.

 Chapter 832: Chapter 832 - Killing S-grade Monsters

    Gloria instantly froze the monster in front of her. Fiona on the other hand already appears in front of the monster and attacks The Monster using her powerful sword attack. Both of them were also fighting a monster and because of theirbined attack, they already injured that Monster very seriously.


    The Frozen Monster after getting hit by Fiona''s attack got broken into pieces. Finally, both of them can kill one monster. But it did not exist as at this time one more Monster approached them.


    Sam, who handles those Monsters, sends one Monster in their direction. Gloria, without wasting a single second, uses the ice beam to attack the monster. But this time the monster was able to react quickly and created a fire beam that instantly shed with the ice beam.


    But as you know Gloria is not alone. Fiona already uses the movement technique to appear behind the monster and instantly uses her attack.


    "Roar!!!"


    Monster was already able to sense the danger behind him but unfortunately, he was unable to react quickly. He already got hit by that sword sh. The sword sh has enough power to create a very big wound. But it looks like the regeneration ability of the monster has already begun to work and the wound is healing.


    Naturally, The Monster got destroyed, and because of this the fire beam that he maintained previously already got destroyed and the Ice beam already hit that monster. But the monster did not freeze. He just feels pain in his body after getting hit by the ice beam.


    All the monsters they are fighting have the fire element present in their body which instantly gets affected by the ice beam and because of this, The Monster begins to feel that much pain. Using that chance Fiona once again appears in front of the monster and attacks him.


    This time the monster, despite the injuries, was able to react. He created a firewall in front of him and also quickly jumped into the Lava. Naturally, Gloria and Fiona would not let that monster escape from that ce.


    Both of them keep attacking in the direction where the monster jumps into the Lava. But it looks like the monster has already gone far away from that ce. Instantly both of them sense danger from behind and jump away from their ce. Good thing they were able to react on time because in the next again the ce where both of them were standing got destroyed by two fireballs.


    It looks like the monster became stronger the moment it jumped into the Lava. The Lava also makes the fire element of those Monsters powerful. The Monster did not stop there and continuously attacked both Fiona and Gloria using his fireballs.


    But 1 minuteter suddenly Gloria created a barrier in front of her which got hit by those fireballs continuously. You can already see the barrier in front of Gloria begin to show signs of breaking down.


    But this time using this chance Fiona already appears in another direction. She once again attacks the monster. Instantly 5 powerful sword shes were created and directly approached that monster. The Monster already tried to escape but before he could do that he got hit by those sword bs.


    But it was not there as Gloria already uses the ice Dragon technique and instantly a powerful ice dragon appears in front of the monster and almost bites the monster. The power of that ice Dragon already makes the Lava solid.


    All of this happened so quickly that the monster was unable to react in time. One thing you have to say is that after getting the power boost and the bloodline skill both Gloria and Fiona became more dangerous.


    This time while using the ice Dragon Gloria already uses the energy booster which has enough power to free the whole Lava pool. The Monster already got frozen but you can already see the frozen Monster begin to tremble.


    The Monster keeps struggling to bake free from thatyer of ice. On the other hand, Fiona already appears above the monster. This time she is going to use the distraction first. You can already see her hand bing red and a very powerful pressureing out from that hand.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Without wasting a single second she punched that monster. The moment she punched that monster almost for a second she thought the bloodline skill was useless. She already punched The Monster but unfortunately, nothing happened.


    Not a single explosion appeared in the ce. 5 secondster, she already realized she was wrong. The whole body of the monster begins to globe brightly and already the Red line appears on thatyer of ice. In the next second the whole body of that Monster blew away. Only then did she realize the power of the destruction fist.


    After killing that Monster both of them finally get the time to rest and recover their spiritual energy. Fortunately, Sam did not send another Monster toward them.


    Jeni and her friends already killed the first monster. In thest minute, they also use the bloodline Skill which gives them the inner power to kill the monster. Previously Elena and the others who use The Spiritual techniques attack and Monster uses their energy booster. But Tony and the others were not able to approach that Monster because of theva.


    Fortunately because of senior Gloria the Lava pool already got frozen. Only then do Tony and the others get the chance to approach that Monster and attack that Monster using their destruction fist.


    All of them also notice that for a second nothing happened to that Monster but in the next again many red lines appear in that Monster and The Monster blew away.


    All of them became fully exhausted and needed the time to rest. Good thing Sam also did not send another Monster toward them. Well, Sam already knows the limit of his friend. It is a good thing that they are already able to kill one monster.


    __________________________________


    Hina and Victor fight the monster in front of them. Hina maintains her distance from that Monster while attacking Monster using her archery techniques. Victor Monster from the closed distance.


    You can already see the monster in front of them already got seriously injured and also the monster did not even get the chance to recover. Both of them continuously attack the Monster from both directions which makes the Monster unable to do anything.


    Continuously those powerful arrows hit that monster. Every one of those arrows already became more powerful and the sharpness also increased. Because of this despite the body difference of that Monster, all the arrows can pierce through the body of that monster.


    On the other hand, all the sword attacks from Victor already injured that Monster from behind. Most also did not get the time to escape from that ce. Like this, finally with the final attack from Victor both of them can kill the monster.


    But it did not because Sam instantly sent one more monster. Fortunately, both of them are already preparing for this. Hina instantly creates a barrage of arrows and shoots those toward the Monsters. All those arrows were enhanced by the energy booster which was easily able to destroy the attacks on the monster and hit the monster.


    The monster just approached Victor and was about to attack him, when he sensed the danger. Quickly try to counterattack by attacking those Arrows. Unfortunately unable to bring out full power behind his attack and also Victor uses that chance to attack the monster with his distraction fist.


    2 secondster the monster begins to Roar in pain as you can see the Red line already appears on that monster. Previously, the moment Victor attacked him nothing happened to the monster about to hit Victor.


    But before he could do that he began to roar in pain and those red lines appeared on his body. But it was not there as in the next second those Arrows also hit the monster one by one.


    Because those Arrows got enhanced they also hold a huge amount of spiritual energy in them. The moment they hit the monster, they easily pierce through the body of that monster. Only then in the next second a huge explosion appeared in that ce. The body of that Monster instantly exploded into pieces.


    Only then do both of them sigh in relief and instantly begin to use the recovery technique. Sam and Alena already handled those other Monsters and killed all of them. Alena did not even feel that much trouble while fighting those Monsters.


    She is easily able to kill all those Monsters in less than 10 minutes. She also uses the energy booster and realizes the power behind the energy booster. Every one of our attacks became more powerful and they were easily able to destroy two monsters at once.


    Despite powerful defenses, those Monsters are unable to protect themselves from any of those attacks.

 Chapter 833: Chapter 833 - Fighting experience

    It takes Jeni and the others some time to recover their lost spiritual energy. After that, all of them finally begin to search for another group of Monsters. Jeni and the others are very excited after killing the first S-grade monsters.


    It is a huge achievement for all of them. Every one of them also finally understands the gap between them and those Monsters. Despite all 10 of them fighting a single Monster but still all of them are at a disadvantage.


    At thest moment, Sam also helps them by getting that Monster injured. Only because of this, they are to kill that monster. Despite all of this, none of them feel disappointed because everyone realizes that they aren''t ready to face those powerful Monsters.


    There is a huge gap between them and those Monsters. Most likely after that every time they will need the help of Sam to kill those Monsters. But at least Sam directly did not kill any of those Monsters. Sam just helps them when he notices The Monster getting the advantage and his friend is in danger.


    On the other hand for Gloria, Fiona, Hina, and Victor this is a good experience. Previously when they came inside the S-grade dungeon to test their power, none of them were able to attack any of those Monsters openly. They need to search for a single Monster.


    Alena understands that killing those Monsters would not be useful to her but at least killing those Monsters makes her get used to the new power. She is already able to be familiar with the energy booster and her power boost.


    It is just she needs to face a more dangerous situation like this where she can bring out her full power to kill those monsters. Sam can also understand why Alena is disappointed after the fight.


    But even he did not have any way to help his teacher. Currently, this is the strongest dungeon, present in Eden Blue. Because of this, they would not be able to find a more powerful Monster than that.


    But one thing is clear because of evolution more powerful terms and monsters will appear on their. At that time Alena will get the time to use her full power against those Monsters.


    _____________________________________


    Sometimeter,


    They already find a group of monsters who look like eagles but their full body is covered with fire elements. Those Monsters are around 10 feet tall. Those Monsters already noticed Sam and the others and already began to approach that direction.


    Sam and Alena are the first ones to react as both of them need to handle most of those Monsters. Gloria, Fiona, Hina, and Victor also aren''t slow. All four of them also begin to approach those Monsters. They are also divided into two teams and already notice 2 Monstersing in their direction.


    On the other hand, Jeni, Elena, Kenny, Tina, Tony, and the others notice one Monstering in their direction. The good thing is that Monster has already been injured by Sam. But still, they should not underestimate that monster. First of all, even before approaching them the monster already released a very big fireball toward them.


    But it did not as in the next second The Monster also released 5 more fireballs. The good thing is that because of the injuries, The Monster is unable to bring out its full power. On the other hand, Elena and others also already created a 10yer spiritual barrier in front of them.


    The moment the first fireball hit the barrier a huge impact was created and almost every one of them was sent backward. But naturally despite the impact all of them hold on to their ground and focus on maintaining the barrier. Like this one after another, those other fireballs also begin to hit the barrier.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Sometimeter you can already see every one of them already backed away from the previous ce. The good thing is that they are still able to maintain the barrier in front of them. The barrier is already showing signs of getting broken down.


    Naturally the monster in front of them even though became injured by Sam, but the monster is still dangerous for them. Instantly a sun ray hit The Monster.


    "Chiii!!!!"


    The Monster instantly let out A painful cry. That was the attack from Sam. The good thing is that it also distracts the Monster and gives Elena and the others the time to prepare for their attack. Less than a second all of them prepare their attack and begin to attack that monster.


    All those spiritual Warriors had already begun to use the energy booster to increase the power behind their attack while the physical Warriors had already begun to use their long-distance attacks. This time they should not get close to that Monster as they can even get affected by the attack from their teammates.


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    A big explosion appeared in that ce which almost created ayer of smoke. Elena and others already bring out their spiritual energy potions to recover The Spiritual energy they have lost. The moment they recover The Spiritual energy activates their techniques and attacks the same ce once again.


    The good thing is that they reacted on time as the monster, despite getting hit by theirbined attack, wanted to counterattack. Fortunately, before that Monster can create his attack he once again gets attacked by those humans.


    You have to say that every one of those attacks that got enhanced by the energy booster has the power to injure that monster. Even though the injuries are not the same level as those injuries which were given by Sam, still those injuries are enough to make that Monster feel pain.


    Also from time to time, the monster feels that his body is being controlled by someone. From time to time the monster is unable to move his body and because of this, Elena and the others also get the time to attack that monster.


    ___________________________________________


    Gloria and Fiona even though they did not have any technique to fly in the sky, but you can already see that Gloria created a huge ice tform. Currently, both Gloria and Fiona are standing on the ice tform, and from there both of them attack the monster in front of them.


    Naturally Monster already can feel the surrounding temperature begin to decrease because of those ice tforms. Because of this he also wanted to destroy Those ice tforms.


    But doing that is not easy as in the next second a huge explosion appears in the mid-air. The ice beam from Gloria already hit the fire beam of that monster. Fiona also uses distance to appear behind that Monster and already attacks that Monster using her sword. Naturally, both of them are going to use the same tactics to 5 those Monsters.


    Hina is currently shooting Monsters using her arrows continuously while Victor is also creating sword shes. Both of theirbined attacks already injured that Monster.


    ___________________________________


    Alena already killed 5 Monsters advance by using her full power. Even without using her full power, she can kill those Monsters easily but she this time decided to use her full power to kill those Monsters.


    Less than a second all those Monsters turn into ashes. Even though those Monsters have high me resistance capability but still none of them can still protect themselves.


    But she did not stop there because, in the next second, 20 more Monsters approached her. Alena reacted quickly and instantly created a thousand light symbols appearing in mid-air. From each of those light symbols in the next agent, you can see the sun''s rays begin toe out and directly approach those Monsters.


    Those Monsters who are just about to attack Alena already can feel the dangering out from those attacks. Some of them even try to escape but unfortunately, Alena can easily control the direction of those sun rays. One by one she attacked all those monsters.


    Despite those Monsters struggling to escape unfortunately in the end every one of them got killed. Despite their high resistance against fire, they are unable to protect themselves from those sun rays. Alena did not even use the energy booster while creating those attacks.


    Sometimeter, finally, all of them kill the monster they are facing. At this time, Sam told every one of them that for today this is enough and they should take some rest. If you look at the surrounding area you can already see the artificial sun present in the sky already beginning to go down.


    Naturally fighting those Monsters takes a lot of time. But the good thing is that all of them have good experience against those Monsters and also make them stabilize their condition. All of them became very familiar with their bloodline skill and the bloodline power boost.


    Even Jeni and the others, despite getting help from Sam, are enjoying themselves while fighting those Monsters. The experience against those powerful Monsters will help them to improve themselves.

 Chapter 834: Chapter 834 - Hinas past

    1 weekter,


    It''s been one week since Sam and the others went inside the S-grade dungeon. During that time, all the saints just rest their bodies without doing anything. Sometimes they will go inside the warrior association to check if everything is okay or not. Other than that they will also sometimes observe the situation of the safe zone.


    But, they did not put pressure on their body. As Sam told them to restpletely they followed that order from Sam. One thing you can say is that everyone is very excited to know what will happen when they will change their spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system.


    But one thing they needed to prepare themselves for the painful experience. Sam already told him that they will go through a painful experience while they try to change the energy system.


    During that time even though they did not put any pressure on their body naturally they also observed the change that was happening to their. Somehow all the Monsters present in the danger zone are getting powerful.


    It looks like those Monsters also receive blessings from evolution. Even though none of those monsters directly break through to intermediate Elite grade, still, those Monsters still be powerful. If their prediction is right then those Monsters will eventually be intermediate Elite grade monsters some monthster.


    But naturally, they are not worried about that. First of all, alongside those Monsters, all the Warriors will also be powerful. All the saints will also work hard to be more powerful. So they have the confidence to deal with those Monsters. Naturally, some Warriors also think using this chance the Saints should increase the limit of the safe zone.


    They should take control over many areas in the danger zone which will increase the size of the safe zone. But the Warriors did not know that it would create problems for all of them.


    First of all the Warrior Association continuously observes the situation of the safe zone and also observes the danger zone. Other than that many Warriors also focused on reconstructing the destroyed City.


    In this time if all the Saints became busy in taking control over the danger zone then it would create many problems. They would not be able to instantly create buildings in that area. All the ces in the danger zone have a unique energy that also creates those Monsters.


    Now it is unknown to everyone how those Monsters in the danger zone appear in that ce. Many people think they were created naturally in the danger zone. Many of them think like the Dungeons, somehow those Monsters appear in the zone.


    The problem they will face is rted to this. Even if they take control over the danger zone then they would not be able to stop those Monsters from appearing in that ce. Previously the Saints already tried to take over some areas in the danger zone butter they realized that they were unable to stop those Monsters from appearing in that ce.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Naturally, those ces will be uninhabitable. None of them also know how to stop those Monsters from appearing in those ces. It seems all the danger zones have some kind of unique thing that makes those Monsters appear in those ces.


    This is the reason that the saints already rejected the idea of those Warriors. Even if they control the whole danger zone, they would not be able to stop those Monsters from appearing in those ces. Because of this they should only focus on their current safe zone and try to make the safe zone more powerful.


    On the other hand, 2 monthster all the Warrior Academy and Warrior School will be open. If you want 2 monthster then it is because one monthter the annual collegepetition will continue. To finish the annual collegepetition they would need at least one month.


    During that time, everybody should enjoy the annual collegepetition. Also as you know 6 monthster there will be a warriorpetition where every Warrior wants to participate. Because of this, they also wanted to give all those teachers of the warrior schools and Academics the time to prepare themselves.


    Currently, most of the Warriors who already finished helping in the reconstruction went inside the dungeons. Most of the Warriors wanted to familiarize themselves with the new power that they received from their.


    Every one of them also wanted to find out how much time they needed right now to improve themselves. Because of this, once again all the Dungeons became crowded with Warriors.


    Also, the number of the Warriors began to increase in Eden Blue. It Looks like because of evolution many people are also able to awaken their potential to be warriors. Naturally, those people also started going inside the Dungeons.


    Those are also the reason that the Warrior Association is currently fully busy. People from the Warrior Association did not even get the time to focus on themselves. Naturally, everybody knows that in 20 to 30 days everything will be normal. But still, in these 20 to 30 days, everyone will stay busy dealing with those matters.


    There are still many people who did not have the potential to be warriors, still those citizens also receive benefits from evolution. Their bodies became stronger.


    Currently, you can also see many Warriors spending their time inside the forest from the beginning. That ce is the perfect ce for training. Also, the most important thing is that even if they destroy that area it will automatically recover in 1 hour.


    Naturally, anybody can predict all of these happenings because of evolution. It Looks like the forests of the beginning receive blessings from their and because of this, even if they destroy those surrounding trees, and other areas, they will automatically recover.


    _______________________________


    "Markus, do you know how long Sam will take toe outside of the Dungeon."


    "Well, as you know he did not go there alone. This time he goes inside the Dungeon so that he can help his friend and family to improve themselves. It will take some time for him toe outside of the Dungeon."


    "Sigh, to tell you the truth I also wanted to go inside the dungeon. I also wanted to see how powerful we have bepared to those Monsters inside those supreme Dungeons."


    "Well, I also wanted to experience that. But as you know Sam told us not to do anything so we would not be able to go inside the Dungeons. Nowe to think of it, we should change the name of those S-grade Dungeons.


    First of all, if my prediction is not wrong then more powerful and dangerous things are going to appear on our. So we should not call those S-grade Dungeons the supreme Dungeons."


    "Hahaha¡­ you are right. Really should not call them Supreme Dungeon anymore. Sigh, one thing makes me worried. How long will it take to change my spiritual energy system into a true spiritual system?"


    "Well, not only you but every one of us is also worried. I am not worried about the painful torture that I am going to go through. We did not even know how long we would need to change our energy system. What is during the time something unexpected happens to our? This is the thing that makes me worried."


    "Well, guys, you should not get worried about that. One thing you should know is that Sam will be present at that time. Also, Alena would be present and both of them would be able to handle all of these until we did not sessfully change our energy system."


    "Hmm, you are right. Both of them will be present; they are to handle everything. Even though it looks like we are putting more burden on Sam, we are helpless."


    "Well, don''t worry about this. Instead, we should feel proud of Sam. He is a miracle maker for our. Really who expected that Sam would be powerful like this and would be the person who would save our like this?


    Haha¡­ we cannot believe that we even wanted to use Hina''s previous connection to help us in this matter."


    "Hmmm¡­ now you mention that I wanted to know if Sam knew about his mother''s past or not. I think we should discuss this with Hina. Sam already has the power to handle everything. So she should not hide anything from his family."


    "Hmm, you are right. We should discuss this with Hina."


    Markus and all the Saints are currently discussing all of these in the Warrior Association. Naturally, all of them wanted to go inside the Dungeons to test their power in front of the Monsters. But at the same time, they got an order from Sam that they should rest fully. Because of this, they would not be able to go inside the dungeon.


    Other than that, it is a really good thing that even though they wouldn''t be able to do anything when they are going through that painful experience to change their energy system, Sam will be present there. With him, their will face no danger.

 Chapter 835: Chapter 835 - Outside the Dungeon

    Sam and his group begin toe out from the Dungeon. It has already been 10 days since they came inside the Dungeon. In these 10 days, Sam helps everyone except his teacher to fight those Monsters.


    You have to say that during these 10 days, everyone can improve themselves and also get familiar with their new power and new techniques. They are already able to stabilize themselves. All of them have a better understanding of their strengths.


    Jeni and the others were also able to improve their strength during these 10 days even without observing any crystals. They are very close to breaking through to the next grade. You have to say that under the pressure of an S-grade dungeon and those monsters, all of them will improve.


    Even though all the time they would receive help from Sam but even with that fighting with those S-grade monsters gives them enough experience to improve themselves. It is also a good thing that they have a better understanding of their power.


    Every one of them finally came out of the dungeon. The good thing is that in front of those S-grade Dungeons, you would not be able to find any other Warriors. You are only able to find those Warriors of the Warrior Association who prevent other Warriors from entering the S-grade dungeon.


    Aftering outside of the Dungeon Sam told everyone to go back to their house to rest. Everyone needed to race today and tomorrow. They should not start practicing before that as they already put much pressure on their body. They should give their body the proper time to rest.


    Alena, Fiona, and his friends after saying goodbye to him already went back to their house. Alena helps them to teleport back to their house. Other hand, Sam and his family also came back to their house.


    Sometimeter,


    Currently, you can see Sam and his full family present in the dining room. Hina prepares some food for them as she is also feeling hungry. Naturally, all of them also rest sometime beforeing out of the dungeon. With this, I still have the energy to cook something.


    At this time Sam begins to tell what kind of mistakes they have made inside the Dungeon. When they were present inside the Dungeon he did not say anything to anyone. Naturally, inside the Dungeon nobody will get enough time to practice and correct their mistakes.


    Because of this, he did not interfere with their battle. Currently, as they are outside of the dungeon this is the perfect time to tell them about their mistakes. Gloria and the others listen to his reports very seriously.


    Well, naturally the reports of Sam will be helpful for them as with these they would also be able to find out their own mistakes and they would be able to correct those mistakes.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam finally finished telling them about the mistakes and also told him to rest for now. He also went back to his room and justy down on his bed. Naturally, he also needs to contact those saints but he will do that tomorrow. For today he did not want to go outside of his house.


    ____________________________________


    Alena, Fiona, and the others also came to his houseter at night. Sam called them there as he also wanted to tell them about their mistake. Well, Sam doesn''t have to say anything to Alena. First of all, unable to fight any Monster who can give her pressure so in that situation Sam would not be able to tell about the mistakes of Alena.


    But except for Alena, he began to tell everyone about their mistakes and also told them to correct those mistakes. He also told his team that sometimes their coordination wasn''t good. Because of this, they also face danger while fighting those Monsters.


    1 hourter he finally finished telling everyone about the mistake. After that, they came back to the dining room as Hina had already prepared food for them.


    ___________________________________


    The next day,


    After eating breakfast Sam decided to go back to the Warrior Association. He also told every saint toe inside the Warrior Association. Naturally, today isn''t the day when he is going to help them to change their spiritual energy system.


    He just wanted to see the condition of the Saints. He wanted to check if any of them put pressure on their body or not. Also at the same time aftering inside the warrior association, he told those Warriors to give him the report of the current situation of their.


    One warrior of the Warrior Association immediately gives him the recent report of their. After reading the report Sam became rxed as nothing suspicious happened to Eden Blue.


    Even though those Monsters inside the danger zone are bing stronger, he is not worried about that. It is natural for them to be stronger because the already evolved. The power limit of the also increases so it is natural for those Monsters to be stronger.


    But the good thing is thatpared to Warriors of Eden Blue, the improvement of the Monsters is quite slow. Also, he has full confidence in all the saints that they can easily take care of those monsters even if he is not present there.


    Sometimeter,


    All the Saints already came to the meeting room and Sam began to check all of their conditions. One by one he uses the status viewing option to check the status of Saints.


    10 minutester he smiled. He became sure that all the Saints did not put any pressure on their body during these 10 days. Every one of them just restspletely. He can already see that all of them are in a rxed state. But still, he wanted to start the forces 5 dayster.


    "For these 5 days, I want all of you to meditate. When all of you will be changing your spiritual energy system, you need to have a rxed mind. Your mental energy will get consumed during the process but you need to hold on during the time.


    For these 5 days if all of you meditate it will help your mind to be more rxed and that would be helpful when all of you will be going through the painful process to change all of your energy system."


    All the saints nodded after hearing his words. Sam decided to go back to his house as he wanted to start his practice. From the moment he came back to his, he did not get the time to focus on himself.


    Finally, he can focus on himself and try to improve himself. Even though because of the restriction he is unable to use the power ofary grade, still even in this situation, he would be able to improve himself.


    But suddenly Markus asked them about his parents. Well, Sam did not think that much and told him that both of his parents were currently present in the house. Later both of them also wanted to visit for a stop.


    Markus nodded after hearing that. Sam on the other hand already teleports back to his house. After that, he directly went toward his training room and then focused on meditation.


    Now before anything he needed to check the control over his spiritual energy. As you know, even Sam receives help from his when his evolves. Because of this, he wanted to see if he had full control over the spiritual energy or not. With this, he began to focus on controlling the spiritual energy.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    ________________________________


    "We should call Hina and Victor."


    "Hmm, I also think we should call them as I think both of them should reveal all the information about their past. Currently, they don''t have to fear anything as Sam has already be strong enough to handle everything. I don''t think there will be anyone who could threaten Sam."


    "Haha¡­ I also think the same. Sam already became so powerful that there would be no problem if Hina revealed all the truth."


    All the Saints discuss all of these among themselves and then decide to call Hina and Victor toe to the Warrior Association. All the Saints think that this is the right time for both of them to reveal every information to their children.


    Both of their children are talented. One of them is already close to bing an S-grade Warrior. While the other one has already be so powerful that nobody knows about his true power limit. So in that situation, Hina and Victor should reveal all the information to their children.


    Hina and Victor are currently present in their house while watching the news. Suddenly Victor notices his mobile phone begins to ring and when he looks at the mobile phone he sees the call is from Saint Markus.


    Immediately he picked up the phone. Saint Markus on the other hand instantly told him toe to the Warrior Association. Well, both of them also have control over the teleportal system of the Warrior Association. So they should directly teleport to the Warrior Association.

 Chapter 836: Chapter 836 - Scared Hina

    Hina and Victor be confused when Saint Markus tells them toe to the Warrior Association as they have something important to discuss. Normally all the Saints will always contact their son, but this time Saint Markus contacted them.


    Naturally, both of them are confused about this but they still immediately use the teleportation system of the Warrior Association to directly teleport to the Warrior Association.


    Aftering to that ce one Warrior approached them and told them to follow him. Both of them wasting no time begin to follow that Warrior and sometimeter theye inside the meeting room where they can see all the saints currently present.


    This made them more confused as they did not expect all the Saints would be present there. Both of them try to think why all of them are present in that ce but they are unable to think anything.


    "Well, I''m sorry for suddenly calling both of you inside the association. I know that yesterday you just came back from the dungeon and most likely you are right now. It was just previously that we discussed something and because of this we called both of you as the discussion is rted to Hina and her past."n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Markus said this directly. On the other hand, the moment Hina and Victor hear that both of them be shocked. You can even see Hina begin to tremble.


    Hina has a very tragic past and because of this, she did not want to remember any of this. The moment Markus said all of these, she instantly remembered all those past. Because of this, she began to tremble. Her breathing also became unstable.


    All of this happens because that memory is like a Nightmare to her. If possible she did not want to remember any of this. At this time suddenly Victor holds her. He can tell his wife has begun to remember all of her past. With this, he came to support her.


    Sometimeter,


    With the help of Victor finally, Hina calms down. Markus and the others also sighed in relief. All of them realize that Hina is still unable to ovee her memories. All those memories still haunt her like a nightmare.


    Hina and Victor are currently looking at all the saints to know about their motives. Why do they suddenly bring out the past of Hina? Previously they were the ones who told him to forget about the past of Hina. Then suddenly why do they bring out the past?


    Also at this time, they realize that Alena, Mira, Aria, and Maria are not present in that ce. They are the ones who did not know the past of Hina. Because of this, Markus did not call them. He did not want Hina to feel ufortable in front of them.


    Markus, John, and the others know that Hina didn''t want to remember about her past. Because of this, they did not want to make this situation more difficult for her.


    "Sigh, it is a good thing that both of you finally calm down. I know that suddenly bringing out the past Hina makes her remember about all the past. I am sorry about this. This is not my intention.


    I and the other saints discussed one thing and we concluded. I think it is time to tell Sam and Gloria about your past.


    I know that this could be very sudden for both of you to adjust yourself. But we think Sam is already ready to hear the past of his mother. He and your daughter have already be strong enough to handle themselves. Not just only them but both of you also became strong warriors so I think even both of you should not fear the past.


    I don''t think there is anybody who can harm Sam. So because of this, we came to the conclusion that both of you should reveal the truth to your children."


    Markus exins the reason for bringing out the past of Hina. Hina and Victor hear all the exnations without making any sound. Finally, both of them can understand why Saint Markus contacted them and why suddenly he brought out the past of Hina.


    Both of them also realize that Saint Markus is telling them the truth. Their children had already be powerful enough to handle themselves and did not have to fear anything. Also as all the Saints think, there is nobody present right now who came to Sam.


    "If possible you can also ask Sam to investigate this matter. I think he has the technique to travel through others. He can easily go back to your and see what is the condition of the.


    I don''t think Sam would have any problem investigating this matter. As you know our is already evolving and the limit of our power has already increased. So there will be changes that will happen to our.


    I think our also reaches the same power level as your previous so I think we are also able to reach the same power level as those people who previously tried to kill you. Not just who is but even you can also reach the same power limit. Because of this, I don''t think you should be afraid of those people."


    Hina and Victor also realize that all those are the truth. Previously all the saints knew about this matter and told them not to bring out these matters to anyone as that would be dangerous for their nning.


    But now everything has changed on their. Theirs already evolved and the power limit of their already increased. Now both of them also can reach the same power level as those people who previously tried to kill Hina.


    They should not forget they have Sam. He is the person who can handle everything when nobody thinks that anybody could harm him. Sam became so powerful that even a monster like that prime dragon was unable to do anything to him.


    "Sigh, we already understand your intention. It is just as you can tell Hina would still need some time. Only when she would be able to stabilize herself would we decide what to do. Until then I hope none of you mature anything about this Sam."


    " Don''t worry. If we wanted to reveal any of the information then we would have already called Sam. As we did not want to reveal any information about this we did not call him here."


    ________________________________________


    "Sigh, it looks like Hina is still unable to work on the fear. She is still suffering from those memories. It looks like because I bring out those matters she once again begins to remember about those things."


    Markus said that with a sigh. He also did not expect the reaction of Hina. He thought that somehow Hina weed the fear of her past.


    " Don''t me yourself. We did not expect her to still be scared of the people. But I think we should give them some time."


    All the Saints present inside the meeting room also did not expect the reaction of Hina. Because of this, they decided to give her some time. Well, it would be good if she was able to decide that before all of them became busy with their things.


    As you know after 5 days everyone will receive help from Sam to change their spiritual energy system. So if she can decide before that it would be really good. All of them would be able to help her make her unable to remember all the things.


    __________________________________


    Hina just aftering back to her house Almora broke down in tears. She is really scared of those memories. If possible she wanted to forget about everything. But she also cannot me any of those Saints for bringing out all this matter.


    Even Victor is present there while trying to support her with a helpless face. He also cannot me any saints. Naturally from the start, they know that in the future they need to reveal all of this to their children. At that time both of them were just waiting for their children to be powerful enough to handle themselves.


    Naturally, both of them already became powerful enough to handle themselves and Sam became so powerful that they did not even know about his true power level. So this is the perfect time for them to reveal the information.


    Sam and Gloria who also present in the house instantly since the presence of Hina and Victor. Both of them sense the sadness of Hina. Compared to Gloria, Sam can also feel that his mother is scared of something. It looks like she is crying right now.


    Normally both of them would not try to observe their parents like this. It is just that both of them suddenly feel two people appear in their house so they use the observation technique to see who they are.


    Gloria and Sam did not waste a single second to approach their mother to see what happened.

 Chapter 837: Chapter 837 - The Past of Hina

    "What happened?"


    Both Sam and Gloria asked their father. Victor just sighed. He already expected his children toe there as their mother is crying right now. As you know she still has not decided if she would like to tell their children the truth or not, because of this, Victor just told Hina what about her family and began to cry.


    Sam and Gloria from their parents'' room. Both of them could tell they didn''t tell them the whole truth. It Looked like he was hiding something but as he did not want to talk to them about this, both of them did not force him.


    Both of them are curious to know what happened to their mother. Also where they went previously. He wanted to contact the Warrior Association about this but previously his father told him not to search for this.


    Now this makes him more confused but he agrees with his father and does not contact the Warrior Association. It Looks like both of them use the teleportation system of the Warrior Association to go somewhere.


    On the other hand, both of them also could tell that their father, even though did not tell them the whole truth, wasn''t lying to them. It Looks like their mother is crying because she remembers about her family.


    "Sister, do you know anything about our mother''s family?"


    Sam asks that to Gloria. From childhood, he did not get to meet any of his mother''s family members. Even though his father previously told him that all the family members of their mother died inside the dungeon, he currently wanted to know the truth about them.


    Unfortunately, even Gloria did not know anything about the family members of their mother. Like Sam, she also hears from her father that all the family members of their mother died inside the dungeon.


    After hearing the answer Sam sighed. It Looked like even his sister did not know anything. At this time he wanted to go to the Warrior Association to check about this matter. But he decided to wait for his father and mother to tell them about this.


    ______________________________________


    The next day,


    Both Gloria and Sam are currently present in the dining room for breakfast. At this time suddenly both of their parents told him that sometimeter the saints woulde to their house as they had something to tell them.


    Gloria and Sam look at each other as if they did not know what their parents wanted to tell them. But it looks like it is rted to their mother''s crying. Around 10:00 a.m. Markus and all the saints came to their house. Only Alena, Mira, Aria, and Maria were not present there as Markus did not contact them.


    Hina can feel ufortable in front of those many people. Because of this, Markus did not tell them toe there. All of them can already see the confused faces of Gloria and Sam. Well, this is natural.


    Sometimeter,


    "Both of you are confused right now. Well before telling you anything I wanted both of you to be silent about this. I think both of you can tell your mother did not want to talk about this matter.


    This is also a reason that we did not call The other saints. It can make her ufortable. Previously both your father and mother went to the guardian association to meet us.


    We told him that this was the time for them to talk about the past of his mother. Both of you have already be strong enough to handle yourself so both of you will not have to worry about anything."


    Markus after saying that became silent as you wanted to give Sam and Gloria the time to digest all of this information. Naturally, Sam and  Gloria were surprised after hearing all of this.


    Sam was not surprised when he heard that both his parents went to the Warrior Association yesterday. On the other hand, Hina looked at her children with teary eyes. Even though she is not showing, inside she is very anxious. She is thinking what if her children did not ept her after learning all the truth?


    Both Sam and Gloria most likely realized the concern of their mother. Gloria already got up from her and came toward Hina and sat down beside her. Sam also did the same thing to assure her mother that she did not have to think about anything.


    Hina rxes a little after seeing both of her children sitting beside her. But she still isn''t in the condition to tell anything. Well, that is natural. Because of this, Saint Markus already told Victor to start telling Sam and Gloria about the past of Hina.


    ____________________________________


    " 33 years ago, I met your mother for the first time. I already told both of you about this. At this time your mother just lost her family. Well, I did not tell you the truth.


    Actua-Actually, your mother is not from the Eden Blue¡­"


    "shback"


    33 years ago, Ratus,


    You can see a girl who is around 20 years old currently going back to her house. If you look at the face of the girl then you can tell she is Hina Strom. She is from Ratus.


    She just came back from the Dungeon Raid. This also awakened The Spiritual energy 700 years ago. You can also see Dungeons present in that ce. She just came back from the Dungeon after finishing the dungeon raid.


    After saying goodbye to her team she decided to go back to her house. 1 hourter she finally reached her house where you could see one person who was around 33 years old present inside the kitchen room.


    The face of the person is simr to Hina. She is the mother of Hina. Beside her, you can see a little girl who is around 5 years old holding her clothes while her mother is cooking food.


    Sometimeter,


    Hina also came inside the kitchen to help her mother. But her mother told her to y with her sister. Hina smiled at her sister and then both of them went to the hall room to y. The name of her sister is Natalia Strom. The name of her mother is Rury Strom.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Hina''s mother is not a warrior and because of this, she did not focus on training and other stuff. She is just a normal housewife and likes to take care of her family. On the other hand, Hina''s father was also a warrior. He is a warrior of the Warrior Association of that.


    Hina wanted to be a warrior like her father. She did not have as much talent as her father. Even with that she did not give up on her dream and worked very hard. The name of her father is Michael Storm.


    Well, the Storm family is a happy family with four members present in it. Unfortunately, Michael stays busy most of the time because of the work of the Warrior Association. Because of this even though it is already around 6:00 p.m. you cannot see Michael in the house.


    As a warrior from the Warrior Association most of the time he will stay busy with his work. You will get only a little time to spend with his family. But still, his family did not have any kind ofint about this. All of them know that their father is working very hard because of them.


    Their father is an orphan so he wanted to provide everything to his family and because of this he always worked hard. This is also a reason that everyone from the Storm family supports Michael.


    Around 9:00 p.m. everything is ready and they are just about to start their dinner. Like every other day, they did not think Michael woulde back to the house today. Two days ago Michael already told him that he would be going inside a new dungeon that appears on their.


    So toe out from the Dungeon he will need almost 10 days. Because of this, they did not expect Michael to be present there and just about to start their dinner. When suddenly something unexpected happens.


    Suddenly they hear the ringing Bell ringing. Hina got up from her seat and then went to the front door to see who it was. She was surprised because she noticed it was her father. Open the door and Michael quickly came inside the house.


    Hina was just about to ask him something but Michael did not even give her any time to ask any question while instantly going toward his house. This naturally surprises Hina. Not just her but Rury, who has note to that ce to see who it is, was surprised by the strange behavior of Michael.


    "Don''t worry about this. It Looks like your father is in a bad mood. Give him some time to recover."


    Rury said this to assure Hina. But even she has be worried about her husband. She told Him to go back to the kitchen room to eat dinner. But Rury did not go back to the kitchen as she went directly toward her bedroom.

 Chapter 838: Chapter 838 - Tragedy

    "Can you tell me what happened? Both of your daughters are worried about you."


    Rury after Michael. You can see Michael lying down on his bed while tears fall from his eyes. Rury, after realizing it, quickly came to him and then hugged him.


    She did not know what happened to her husband but one thing we can predict is that something bad happened to him. Both of them stay like this for 10 minutes. Finally, Michael can calm down.


    "Sigh, looks like from now on I will not be a warrior of the warrior association. As you know we already went inside the Dungeon. But something unexpected happened there.


    This time we did not even enter that much deep inside the dungeon when suddenly we met a group of shadow cat Monsters. You know how rare those Monsters are.


    Even though that was an intense battle between us, Monster was finally able to kill all of them. During that fight, I and many other Warriors got injured and decided to rest. Naturally, after killing those monsters we get some loot.


    I don''t know what kind of loot we get after killing those Monsters. Butter because of this something unexpected happened. I was unconscious before but when I recognized my consciousness I noticed that everything was destroyed.


    I quickly got up from my ce and wanted to see what the current situation was. At that time I noticed that the surrounding ce was fully destroyed. I thought all of this happened due to some monster. With this, I already prepare myself for Monsters.


    Sometimeter,


    I was shocked because, in front of me, I could see the dead bodies of mypanions. I check their condition and I can tell all of them are dead. Sigh, I almost lost control over myself.


    Now I can maintain my control and begin to advance while observing the dead bodies of mypanions. While observing the dead body I be shocked because looking at those dead bodies I can tell that you did not get killed by any Monsters.


    All of them have different kinds of wounds present in their body. After observing them more carefully I became sure that it looked like a fight between them appeared in the ce and in the fight both parties got killed.


    I was unable to believe in you as I did not know why something like this happened in that ce. Still, I try to find out what is happening in that ce. Like this sometimeter I suddenly hear a sound of fighting not far away from my ce.


    I quickly reached that ce to see that both the captains of our team were fighting each other. I did not try to interfere between them. At this time I hear the conversation between them. It looks like both of them are fighting each other because of a technique that they will use after killing those shadow cats.


    That was a shadow maniption technique. Naturally, this is a very real technique but I did not expect because of this technique will ur in our team. Both the captains ordered their subordinates to fight each other and like this, all those people died.


    I cannot see that both the captains were seriously injured. I did not know what to do in that situation when suddenly one of them came close to me. It looks like he thought I was going with both of them to kill each other and take the technique.


    He instantly attacked me. Fortunately, I was able to dodge. At this time the second captain quickly appeared in that ce and attacked the first captain. It Looks like as the first captain got distracted, the second captain got the perfect chance to attack him and with this attack, I noticed The Sword of the second captain pierced through the heart of the first captain.


    I waspletely shocked. I did not know what to do at this moment and at the same time I am not. The second captain suddenly fell to the ground and lost consciousness. At first, I thought about helping him but at the same time, I did not know if I should help him or not.


    Suddenly I hear footsteps appear in that ce. So without wasting a single second I quickly left that ce and came out of the Dungeon as quickly as I could.


    Sigh, I do not know what will happen after this. It looks like the second captain will target me as he did not want anyone to reveal the truth about this matter. Naturally, he would try to silence me."


    Michael said all of this. Rury on the other hand is unable to believe that all of these happen inside the Dungeon. Not only that, people from the Warrior Association try to fight each other because of a technique. This is an unexpected thing.


    Hina at this time is present outside of her parent''s room and she also hears everything. She also becamepletely shocked after hearing all of this exnation. She is also unable to believe that a situation like this would ur between the teams of the Warrior Association.


    _______________________________


    The next day,


    Rury and Michael came down from their bedroom. Naturally, both of them try to maintain their normal smile in front of the children. Natalia did not know any of those things that happened to her father. So she just smiles happily because her father is present there.


    Michael maintains a smile on his face but inwardly he is anxious. He did not know what would happen to him. He decided to visit the Warrior Association to see the reaction of the elders of the Body Association.


    Sometimeter after saying goodbye to his family, he went to the Warrior Association. There could be a chance before he goes to the warrior association the second captain will try to attack him to silence him.


    But situations like this did not appear. When he came to the Warrior Association he tried to contact the elders. But unfortunately, he was unable to do that as the Warriors told him that all the elders were busy right now.


    Michael decided to wait in the warrior association to meet the elders. From 11:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., he just waited inside the Warrior Association but he still did not get the chance to meet the elders.


    Because of this Michael decided to go back to his house and came to the Warrior Associationter. Like this, he came back to his house and also informed his wife that the elders did not meet him or say anything to him. His wife tries to tell him that nothing will happen to them.


    But she did not even finish her word when something unexpected happened. Suddenly both of them hear a loud sound around their house and the next again the front door of their house is broken by someone. Not only that instantly many Warriors of the Warrior Association enter their house.


    All of them releasing their spiritual aura. Michael was instantly startled. But in the next second, he quickly covers his family with his spiritual energy. Only after that his wife and his daughters can breathe one second.


    "Soldier Michael you''re under arrest for killing yourpanions inside the dungeon. You and your family are under arrest."


    At this time suddenly Michael hears a familiar voice that tells him that he is under arrest. He quickly looks in the direction and sees that it is the second captain who is present in that ce and all those Warriors who are present in that ce are the subordinates of the second captain.


    Michael can already predict why something like this happened to him. At this time he was just about to say something to the second captain when something unexpected happened.


    "Dare to resist the order of the Warrior Association. Under martialw, you and your family are going to be executed here right now."n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    After saying that the captain instantly attacked Michael using his strongest attack. All of this happened so quickly that Michael did not even get the time to do anything. He can already feel the dangering out from that attack and one thing he is sure that he will die because of that attack.


    But before that attack can hit him something unexpected happens. Unexpectedly someone quickly came in front of Michael and that attack quickly hit that person. In the next second blood spread in the whole ce.


    Michael and the children are finally able to see who it is that protects them. Only then did they notice it was Rury who quickly came in front of them and the sword of the second captain pierced through her body. Michael is unable to believe what he is saying right now. In the next again he almost lost control in rage. A huge energy fluctuation appears in that ce.

 Chapter 839: Chapter 839 - Escape

    "Please, protect our daughters."


    Looking at the condition of Rury, Michael became angry and he was just able to attack the second captain. But this time, Rury suddenly paid that to Michael, so that he could run away from that ce.


    After hearing the word of his wife Michael who was just able to attack the second captain came back to his senses. In the next second, he quickly deals with his daughters and then in the next second, he uses his power to st away the world behind him and then run away from that ce.


    Naturally, he wanted to save his wife, but even his wife told him to protect their daughters. The second captain naturally did not say ideal. He already begins to attack Michael while chasing him alongside his subordinates.


    The second captain wanted to kill Michael under any condition as Michael was the person who saw the second captain killing the first captain. At any condition, he cannot let him leave.


    Naturally, Michael is focusing on running away from that ce. Compared to him the second captain is powerful and because of this he already became injured after getting attacked. You can say it is his willpower that makes him hold on. He cannot fail in a situation like this where he needs to save his daughters.


    Unfortunately, the situation did not favor him. Suddenly many attacks began toe toward him. Michael tries to create a barrier around himself and his daughter, but unfortunately, before he can create the barrier some of those attacks hit him which also injures Natalia and she falls to the ground.


    Natalie did not even get the chance to say anything and already became unconscious. Blood also already starteding out from her body. Looking at her condition both Michael and Hina begin to cry. Hina instantly begins to struggle in her father''s hand.


    Michael did not let her go. Naturally looking at her youngest daughter''s condition, he already broke down. But he cannot stop there. If he decided to stop there then his second daughter would die at the hands of the people. At any condition, he needed to protect his daughter.


    You can already see his blood starting toe out from his eye. If eyes be red. Naturally looking at the condition of Nataliya he became very angry and wanted to kill those people. But in this condition, he needed to escape.


    He began to overuse his spiritual energy to bring out more power. It had already begun to destroy his body and because of this sometimeter Red lines appeared on his body and blood starteding out from those red lines.


    In the next second, he also created a huge explosion behind him which created ayer of smoke and gave him the chance to create more distance from the captain and his subordinate.


    Sometimeter,


    Currently, he is present inside a park and trying to hide himself and his daughter. But looks like those people who were chasing him previously already expected him toe there. They also already came to the park and began to search for him.


    "Hahaha¡­ do you think it is possible to hide from me? You and your daughter are going to die. Don''t try to struggle to make your death painful. Your second daughter is in my hand. You wanted to protect her then came out from your hiding ce."


    Suddenly the second captain came to the ce while holding Natalia in his hand. Natalia is unconscious while blood ising out from her forehead. Previously she got attached in her back which made her fall to the ground and she received a wound in her forehead.


    "Dad, please bring Nataliya. I will try to buy your time and you came to bring Natalia to the hospital. I cannot let my sister die in front of me."


    Hina is crying right now while telling her father to save Natalia. She was going to distract those people and told her father to use that change to save Natalia.


    "No, I cannot let you do that."


    At this time Michael is also crying right now but he also doesn''t know what to do in that situation. Naturally, he cannot let his daughter act as a decoy. First of all, there is no possibility that it will work. After thinking for some time Michael already decided what to do.


    All this time Hina is trying to go out from her hiding ce to save her sister. It is Michael who is holding her so that she doesn''t do anything reckless.


    "I am going to ground 5 to 1. If you still do note out at that time, I am going to kill your second daughter by separating her head from her body."


    The second captain once again said that. After hearing that Hina decided to use her skill toe out from the hiding ce. But naturally, Michael expected something like that to happen, so he quickly told her to calm down.


    "Hina, I know that looking at your sister''s condition you wanted to protect her. But I cannot let you act as a decoy. Now I have a n and you need to follow my n. I am going to attack them and using this chance, you need to save your sister and run away from this ce."


    Michael told that to her daughter and in the next second he disappeared from his ce. He did not want to give her daughter any time to say anything. Hina became shocked after hearing the sudden n of her father.


    But, she already came back to herself when suddenly she heard the explosion. This is not the time to stay ideal. Even though she wanted to protect her father, she also needed to save Natalia. So without wasting a single second, Hina also uses her movement technique to approach Natalia.


    It Looks like by the certain attack of Michael even the captain bes injured. Natalie is already separated from his hand and currently, she is lying down on the ground. Hina quickly appears in front of her and then quickly picks her up. Using her full power she begins to escape in a different direction.


    She can already hear the sound of an explosion. It looks like Michael is going to use her full power to buy her time to escape from that ce. Michael uses his full power to kill those people but naturally, that is not possible.


    Even though because of his surprise attack already I will make them injured. Those are light injuries. In the next second, the second captain and all of his subordinates also begin to attack him.n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Looks like at this time the second captain also notices Hina and Natalia are not present there and both of them are already running from that ce. He quickly told the subordinates to follow them and kill them.


    But Michael already expected that so he tried to attack that person who was just able to go in the direction of Hina. Unfortunately for Michael at this time the second captain deflected his attack and in the next second attacked him.


    On the other hand, Hina uses her full power to escape from that ce but sometimeter she can already feel someone following her. It Looks like that person wanted to kill him as she also can feel the Malicious intention of that person.


    Suddenly a fireball hit Hina. That attack was powerful enough to send her flying. Nataliya also separated from her. She is not wearing any armor which is the reason you can already see her back already burned by that fireball.


    Hina also fell to the ground. The attack was powerful enough to make her seriously injured. But even in that condition she suddenly wanted to get up and wanted to approach Natalia.


    Unfortunately in the next second, a big fireball appeared in front of her. Somehow she was able to roll away from her previous ce but an explosion appeared in that ce which sent her flying and she hit a tree.


    This time the explosion was very powerful and because of this she became more injured and already began to lose blood rapidly. She did not even have the strength to get up from her ce right now.


    Due to her willpower,she is trying to get up but unfortunately, she is not sessful in this. In the next again she can already feel her eyes be heavy and look like she is losing consciousness. In the situation, she also noticed that the person who previously chased her was already approaching in front of her and most likely about to attack her.


    She already thought she was going to die. Naturally, there is no hope. Looking at the situation of the family Hina almost broke down. Unfortunately, she is also unable to maintain her consciousness. When that fireball was just about to hit her, Hina noticed something appear in front of her. She didn''t even know what it was, but the next second she lost consciousness.

 Chapter 840: Chapter 840 - Flashback end

    When China opened her eyes she found out that she hade to Eden Blue. She doesn''t know what happens when she bes unconscious but somehow she is alive and present on a different.


    "shback end"


    "Like this, I found your mother. A Portal appears in front of me and from that portal, your mother suddenly falls. It took her 5 days to regain her consciousness. From the moment she regained consciousness, she began to cry and wanted to go back to her.


    Unfortunately, we did not know how to send her back to her. Also, we found out the danger she was facing beforeing to our. Saint Markus and the others also came to us and then talked to us. They told us not to reveal this information to anyone as that could harm Hina."


    After saying all of this Victor bes silent. On the other hand, Glodia and Sam have a surprised face. It is unbelievable that their mother belongs to another. Not only that she also feels that kind of situation where loses her life.


    Also, this is the first time this year that someone who belongs to the Warrior Association, like their Warrior Association can do something like this to hide his evidence.


    The whole house has already begun to vibrate. Not only that you can already feel the temperature of the surrounding ce begin to decrease. Both Gloria and Sam are very angry after finding out the situation of their mother.


    If possible they wanted to go back to the to kill everyone. Not only their mother but their grandparents and their aunty who were around 8 years old got killed by the people. All of this makes both of them very angry.


    Suddenly, Hina hugged both of them to make them calm down. She is really happy that her children do not hate her because she belongs to another. But at the same time, she did not want her children to make any reckless decisions. Compared to Gloria she is more worried about Sam.


    "Please, Son¡­ Don''t do anything reckless."n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    At this time she also said that to Sam. Sam finally calmed down. But you can say he already ns to go to that to kill everyone who hurt his mother and her family.


    _____________________________________


    The next day,


    Today Hina and everyone were present in the dining room and sitting for their breakfast. Well, you can say today she is very happy because finally, she did not have to hide anything from her children. Even though she did not know what happened to her, she already considered that everyone died during that time.


    If possible, she naturally wanted to go back to that to find her sister and her parents. But you can say she did not have that much hope. On the other hand, Markus and others also feel a huge burden lifted away from them.


    With this, all of them can finally rx and prepare themselves to change their spiritual energy system. On the other hand if possible Sam wanted to find that but before that, he wanted to help every Saints to change their energy system. Only after that, he will try to find that.


    Sometimeter,


    Fiona also came there to practice with Gloria. With this, both of them already went inside the training room. Hina and Victor also went inside the training room to practice. Sam also did not say ideal as he needed to increase his power.


    Even though he is unable to find any Monster that can give him status points or upgrade points. At least he can increase the control over his spiritual energy and also make his power of domain stronger.


    _______________________________________


    Four dayster,


    During these 4 days, nothing particr happened in Eden Blue. Even though the danger zone is already changing because of the evolution of the, this is not a problem that the Warrior Association can''t handle.


    Except for Alena, every saint will be changing their spiritual energy system. Naturally before helping them Sam already checked all of them and only after that, he became sure that none of them would use this power to do anything harmful.


    Today is the day when all the saints will go through the process of changing their spiritual energy system. With this, all the saints already instructed every warrior inside the Warrior Association what to do during the time when they would not be present there.


    After that, all of them came to an Empty ce. That would be a good ce for them to go through the process to change their energy system. First of all, this is very far away from the locality and you would not find any people there.


    Currently, every saint is sitting in a Lotus position on the ground. Well, Markus built a secret training chamber in that ce. Currently, every one of them is present inside that training chamber.


    All of them listen to the instructions of Sam. Sam is telling them what to do and how they are going to change their energy system. With this, all of them begin to meditate to focus on the spiritual energy present inside their body.


    Sam is not alone in that ce. His family and his teacher are also present in that ce as they are going to help him. Every one of them came in front of one Saint. After that, they put their hand on their body and then begin to channel their spiritual energy.


    Before anything they need to extract all the normal spiritual energy from their body. For Sam, this is not a problem but Gloria and the others are facing difficulty. During all this time always Saints who are going through the process can feel their spiritual energy going out from their body but at the same time, a strange energy enters their body.


    Almost 1 hourter Sam and the others already finished helping 5 saints. All of them already extract The Spiritual energy from the body of the Saints and then also put true spiritual energy inside their body.


    Now all the Saints needed to hold on until their body didn''t be familiar with the true spiritual energy. Not only that but their whole body also needed to evolve due to the true spiritual energy. Naturally, nobody knows how long it takes to go through that process but until then Sam is going to present there.


    Markus and others who could already feel a strange energy present in their body did not feel any kind of pain except the headache. Well, naturally it will take some time for them to feel the pain when their body will begin to regenerate the normal spiritual energy.


    During that time the normal spiritual and you will get absorbed by the true spiritual representation in their body and at that time they will feel the pain. Naturally, it would bepletely different if they were A-grade warriors. But as they already be intermediate Elite-grade warriors, it will be a tough process for all of them.


    3 hourster finally you can see all the same people currently going through the process of changing their spiritual energy system. Gloria and the others already became tired after helping Sam in this process. Naturally, Sam could help every saint without receiving help from his family and his teacher, but this was also going to be helpful for them so because of this he asked them to help him.


    Sometimeter,


    He can already tell that the Saints have already begun to feel the pain. Even though for now the pain is tolerable, from time to time the pain will increase and sometimeter it will be intolerable.


    That would be the toughest time for the Saints. Also during this time all the saints needed to hold on without losing any of their consciousness. They need it to use their willpower to stay awake.


    Hina and the others already teleported back to their house. Only Sam and Alena are present in that ce. Both of them decided to observe all the Saints for a few hours. Naturally at this time If they saw any saints facing some kind of problem then they were going to help them.


    The next day,


    Yesterday all the saints were able to tolerate the pain in their bodies but today every one of them can already feel the pain increasing and bing intolerable. Naturally, they are not going to give up. Also for all the same, they did not even know how long it had been since going through that process.


    All this time Sam was present there as he observed all of them. Sam can also tell today the pain in their body increases. He is ready to help all of them the moment he finds any of them pressing any kind of problem.


    Like this 7 hourster suddenly blood starteding out from the mouth of Aria. But Sam instantly came in front of her and began to heal her. With this finally, she stops bleeding. Not long after her one by one everything is also facing this kind of problem.

 Chapter 841: Chapter 841 - Activity in the danger zone

    It has already been 15 days since saints began to go through the process of changing their spiritual energy. In these 15 days, you can already see the change that happened to the Saints. It looks like all of them are losing weight.


    It Looks like their aura is also bing weaker. Well, it is normal for anyone to think that every one of them suffering from some kind of illness but all of this happening due to currently they are going through painful torture.


    For 15 days everyone tried to hold themselves back from bing unconscious due to the pain. David cannot even imagine the level of the paying that they are feeling right now. The good thing is that none of them became unconscious and are still holding on.


    If they be unconscious it can be risky for them. From time to time he also heals them as they will start to bleed from their body. Every one of them already has red lines present in their body. Those are the crack marks that appear on their body as The Spiritual energy present inside their body wants to burst out from their body.


    The good thing is that Sam is present in that ce and he was healing them so that nothing serious happened to them. In these 15 days, he did not leave that ce and all the time focused on the Saints. Alena, Hina, and the others also came to that ce from time to time to look at the condition of all the saints.


    One thing you need to say is that the situation of those Saints is more dangerouspared to the time when Alena also changed her spiritual energy system. Not only that, she is also unable to imagine how much pain they are tolerating right now.


    There could be a chance that all of them will be conscious due to losing their mental energy. But fortunately, Sam already created an array after looking at the array manual which will also help them to recover the mental energy. Well because of these until now none of those Saints loses their consciousness.


    In these 15 days, Alena already handled many matters rted to those Monsters and rted to Dungeons. Looks like those Monsters after bing powerful became wild and wanted to attack the safe zone. Fortunately, she already took care of those Monsters and also she went inside those Dungeons from where Monsters were about to break out.


    As you know from time to time then you have to kill the Boss monster inside those Monsters or those monsters will be able toe out from the Dungeons. Because of this from time to time, she needs to go inside those Dungeons to kill the boss Monsters. There are no other S-grade Warriors.


    Even though all the Warriors begin to improve very quickly, still none of them are able to break through to S-grade. Even though with evolution it became easier for any of them to be powerful but still breaking through to S-grade is not easy.


    Unfortunately, the quality of the limit breaker also did not increase. Well, Sam already predicted that when more powerful Dungeons will start to appear on their, the quality of the limit breaker will also increase.


    ___________________________________


    Currently, if you look at the dangerous zone then you can see the situation of the danger zone be dangerous. Suddenly many Monsters begin to approach the safe zone. All of those Monsters are around S-grade. As you know those Monsters can directly observe The Spiritual energy present on their so they don''t have to absorb any of the crystals.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    This is also a reason that they be that powerful that quickly. Well, currently those Monsters wanted to attack the safe zone to take over the safe zone and kill all the humans. Even though some time ago Alena already handled those Monsters naturally it did not stop those monsters.


    Those Monsters still want to attack the safe zone. It Looks like after bing powerful, all of them already forget about the powerful humans that they faced before. Not only that you can also see many more new Monsters begin to appear in the danger zone.


    All those Warriors present in the danger zone already notice these and they instantly alert the Warrior Association. The Warriors Association already called Alena and told her everything that was happening in the danger zone.


    Without wasting a single second Alena quickly teleports herself to the danger zone. The good thing is that from only one direction are those Monstersing toward the safe zone. At this time, suddenly Gloria and Fiona also appear.


    Alena Beacon is surprised after suddenly noticing them but instantly Gloria exins to her why she came to that ce alongside Fiona. Both of them also get the news that Monsters from the danger zone are going to attack the safe zone.


    Naturally, both of them know that Alena is going to fight those monsters so both of them decide to teleport to that ce to fight those Monsters. During these 15 days, both of them are busy fighting each other and they also notice thatpared to them, they already improve.


    But it is just that both of them did not decide to go inside the S-grade dungeons. With this, they decided to fight those Monsters who were going to attack the safe zone. Naturally, that could be dangerous for both of them but both of them wanted to test their limits in front of those powerful Monsters.


    Both of them reached the limit of their current grade. They are easily able to break through but it is due to that they are unable to find any powerful limit breaker, both of them unable to break through to the next grade.


    The good thing is that Sam already told them he was going to provide them with a powerful limit breaker but as he is busy right now he would be able to do that after all the saints are sessful.


    With these Gloria and Fiona instantly came to that ce and requested Alena to let them fight those Monsters. At first, Alena did not want them to fight those Monsters as that would be dangerous. Sometimeter she decided to let them fight those Monsters.


    Naturally, she wanted her students to be powerful as that would also make her proud. Also as he is present in that ce naturally both of them are not going to face any kind of danger. Both of them already fight S-grade monsters. So with these, both of them already have the experience.


    Fiona and Gloria be happy after getting permission from Alena. Both of them instantly prepare themselves and instantly disappear from their ce. They already begin to approach those Monsters who are still far away from the safe zone.


    It takes them 10 minutes toe to the ce where they already see these Monsters. Naturally in front of them not just only those S-grade monsters, but there were Monsters with lower grades also present. Both of them decided to attack those Monsters fast and then decided to attack those S-grade monsters.


    Without wasting a single second both of them begin to use their powerful attack on those Monsters. Fiona already disappears from her ce and appears in the middle of those Monsters. You can already see she already punched the ground using the destruction fist.


    It already begins to affect those Monsters who are present in 200 m. Just once again those Monsters begin to explode without getting the chance to do anything. On the other hand, if you look at other ces then you can already see many of these monsters have already be Ice statues. But you were not in there as you can already see dark clouds begin to gather around.


    "Roar!!!!"


    Naturally, those Monsters also became angry by their Sudden attack. Even those S-grade masters became angry and in the next second everyone of those Monsters began to attack Fiona and Gloria.


    The good thing is that both of the already expected attacks so both of them have already moved away from their previous ce. It is just that attacks from those S-grade monsters still have the ability to affect them.


    "Boom!!!!"


    One by one many explosions appear in that ce but all this time both Fiona and Gloria can protect themselves. Not only that, you can even see that both of them also begin to counterattack. Fiona already begins to create sword shes while from those dark clouds snow already begins to fall.


    Both of those powerful attacks from Gloria and Fiona unknowingly release their bloodline pressure. This also affects those monsters. Even those S-grade Monsters getting affected by this.


    Normally Spiritual pressure affects the body or mind of any person. But it looks like the bloodline pressure directly affects the blood of those Monsters. In front of those pressures, those Monsters begin to feel powerless. Naturally, those S-grades were trying to hold on and also counter-attacking.

 Chapter 842: Chapter 842 - Influenced

    Both Gloria and Fiona already attacked those monsters. By Fiona''s attack, you can already see she can kill almost 100 of those Monsters whose powers were lower than S-grade. All this time those S-grade monsters were also attacking them.


    Fortunately, both of them were able to save themselves by dodging those attacks. Well, the good thing is that those Monsters just recently became S-grade monsters because of this both Gloria and Fiona did not have that much of a problem.


    Well, those Monsters still had not gotten used to their new power, and on the other hand, Alena had already begun to take care of those powerful Monsters who already be intermediate S-grade monsters.


    Well for both of them handling those Monsters would be very difficult and because of this Alena decided to handle those Monsters while letting Gloria and Fiona handle the other Monsters. Well, Fiona and Gloria are already able to kill most of those lower-grade Monsters and it wouldn''t take them that much time to fight S-grade monsters.


    It is just during all this time both of them need to stay very careful. Not only do they need to worry about those A-grade or other-grade monsters, but they also need to dodge those attacks from S-grade monsters.


    Those other Warriors from the Warrior Association were already surprised when all of them noticed how easily Gloria and Fiona were dealing with those Monsters. Even though powerful Monsters attacked them all the time, both of them were still somehow able to save themselves, and until now they did not receive that many injuries.


    None of them thought that they would be able to survive against those S-grade monsters. Even for a warrior who reaches peak A-grade, it is impossible to deal with those S-grade monsters. Because of this all of them be very shocked when they see how both of them can deal with those lower-grade monsters even though both of them continuously get attacked by those S-grade monsters.


    It looks like those other warriors also decided to join in this fight. Sometimeter, you can already see those Warriors targeting those lower-grade monsters while Fiona and Gloria begin to target those S-grade monsters.


    Currently, they are facing 5 of those S-grade monsters while the remaining Monsters have already been killed by Alena. Fiona created a big sword Sh which also turned into 5 sword bs and went toward those two monsters who were about to attack her.


    Good thing she was already able to react on time and created the sword sh. Naturally, her attack contains a huge amount of spiritual energy. In the next second, you can already see five big explosions appear. Those two monsters got attacked by those 5 sword bs. But Fiona did not stop there and created more sword sh.


    This time she also created a cross-shaped sword sh. One by one those attacks begin to hit those two S-grade monsters. Well, even though those Monsters at first can protect themselves,ter in front of them many attacks they are unable to protect themselves and begin to get hit by those attacks.


    You have to say that even after bing S-grade monsters their defense already increases but in front of those attacks that contain the true spiritual energy even those Monsters are being received damage. Like this, after 2 minutester you can already see those two Monsters already received serious injuries.


    Both of them already begin to bleed but fortunately, the healing skill of those already got activated and those two Monsters begin to heal. Well, but Fiona is not going to keep them that much chance so she already closed the distance from those to Monsters and already came in front of the first monster.


    The good thing is that those two Monsters still did not make their move. Using this chance Fiona came in front of one Monster and then attacked that Monster using her destruction fist. All of this happens just once again which hardly gives that Monster the time to do anything.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    But the second Monster already came back to his sins and instantly counterattacked. Fortunately, instantly Fiona her whole body with spiritual energy. That instantly increases the defense of Fiona. She was already sent flying because of that attack.


    On the other hand, the first monster who got hit by the destruction fist also wanted to counterattack after realizing that nothing happened to him. But 5 secondster, when that Monster was about to create a powerful attack to hit Fiona, suddenly the Monster realized that he was unable to extract spiritual energy to create any move.


    Also, the monster realized that redline started to appear on his body and in the next second a huge amount of pain began to affect him.


    Not only that, the spiritual energy inside of the Monster begins to get affected by the red line. Somehow the monster began to feel that the spiritual energy wanted toe out from his body. Suddenly the body of the advance began to bleed.


    At this time the second Monster already went after Fiona after sending her backward. But Fiona has already stabilized herself. She already moves away from her ce afternding on the ground and after that, she once again brings out her sword. The moment the second Monster came close to her she instantly attacked that monster.


    And on the other hand Gloria already killed the first monster. She just fighting the next monster who already became seriously injured. Gloria once again uses the ice beam attack and the monster in front of her gets hit by that.


    If you are wondering how she can kill those monsters then it is because The Monster already got injured by The attacks from Alena. Because of this, Gloria can kill that Monster without any problem.


    On the other hand, the second Monster did not get injured by Alena, because of this you can see even after facing a powerful attack from Gloria, The Monster did not get killed. Even after facing that powerful ice beam, that monster is still alive right now.


    Well, Gloria once again attacks that Monster using the ice beam. This time the monster also counterattacks and already moves away from this ce.


    _____________________________


    Alena all this time watching the fight between those Monsters and Gloria and Fiona. Well, she has to say that both of them have already improved so much that facing those S-grade Monsters did not make that situation dangerous for them.


    Not only that, looks like those other Warriors who got influenced by Gloria and Fiona also gave their hundred percent against those Monsters. You have to say that all those Warriors already have many of the Monsters under the influence of Gloria and Fiona. This is a good thing for them and also for humanity.


    Sometimeter, Alena also interferes because it looks like both Gloria and Fiona are already having trouble facing those monsters. Sometime ago more monsters began toe to that ce and because of this, the situation became dangerous. Even though both of them finally have the strength to kill S-grade monsters, both of them still do not have the train to many monsters at once.


    Because of this, Alena decided to interfere and already began to kill those Monsters. Naturally, she did not take that much time and just once again already killed all those monsters. Well, she did not kill any of those lower-grade monsters.


    As those Warriors are currently fighting those Monsters she did not want to kill those Monsters. Well in this kind of situation, many Warriors will gain motivation and also be able to improve themselves much faster. Because of this, she did not interfere with their fight and only just began to kill those S-grade monsters.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, the situation is under control and all those monsters who previously wanted to attack the safe zone have already been killed. Alena discusses something with those Warriors from the Warrior Association who are present in that ce.


    During that time, Fiona and Gloria try to recover the spiritual energy and mental energy that they have lost during the fight. It is a good thing that both of them came here to fight those Monsters. First of all, this will also tell them how much improvement they have made until now, and they can use their full power without holding back.


    Even during the time when both of them were spirited against each other, they were unable to use their full power. Naturally using the full power would make them injured and that is the reason that they did not use their full power during the fight.


    Sometimeter Alena came to them and then praised them for their improvement. Well, you have to say that after bing Saints Alena did not get that much time to spend with Gloria. Also, she already graduated from the Academy so because of this Alena also did not get that much time to meet her.


    But still, you can say she considers Gloria as her small sister so she is always ready to help her. Alena begins to tell them what kind of mistakes they have made during the fight. Both Fiona and Gloria listen to this very carefully because this will help them improve themselves.

 Chapter 843: Chapter 843 - Markus wake up

    Markus begins toe back to his senses. His eyes begin to open slowly and sometimeter he opens his eyes. At first, he became confused about his surrounding area butter he realized he was still present inside the training room where he previously started to meditate to change the energy system into a true spiritual energy system.


    At this time, suddenly Sam came in front of him and then smiled at him. Sam can feel the change that happened to Markus. Well not just only him but even Markus began to observe his own body to feel the change.


    He bes more powerful and doesn''t know why but he has the feeling that finally he has something that previously was missing from his body. That was the effect of true spiritual energy. Compared to your normal spiritual energy the true spiritual energy is more dense.


    At this time he is about to say something to Sam when suddenly he notices that his body is covered in mud. Those are the waste of his body that got released from his body when his spiritual energy system sessfully evolved into a true spiritual energy system.


    Without wasting a single second he instantly went inside the bathroom to clean himself. Sam on the other hand finally sighs in relief. First of all, it has been 2 months since all the Saints focused on changing their spiritual energy system.


    For all these two months, Sam did not leave that ce and continuously healed every saint. Finally one of them regains his consciousness and also the spiritual energy system already evolves into a true spiritual energy system.


    Not only that surprisingly the moment The Spiritual energy system changes into a true spiritual energy system, all the injuries that previously almost killed Markus heal automatically. Not just only Markus, he began to feel that change happening with every saint. It looks like all of them are also very close to changing their spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system.


    Sometimeter, Markus finally came out of the bathroom. He is smiling right now after feeling the change that happened to his body. He also can feel that all of his techniques became stronger. It looks like all of these are happening because of the true spiritual energy.


    He wanted to use the spiritual energy to see the effect of his techniques. Aftering in front of Sam, Markus asks him about the time limit. Only then did he get to know that for 2 months he was present in the ce and also going through that painful torture.


    After hearing it has been 2 months Markus became shocked. Well he thought it had already been one or two years. When he was going through that painful torture, at first he was able to stay conscious and also could tell how much time had passed.


    But slowly the pain was increasing and sometimeter he already forgot about the time and did not know how long time had passed. Because of this, he thought it had been 2 or 3 years. The good thing is that it is only 2 months.


    Naturally, he asks about the situation of their. But, unfortunately, even Sam did not have that much information about the recent activity. But he can tell one thing nothing serious will happen until now or he will get informed by the Warrior Association.


    For all these 2 months he did not leave that ce or contact the Warrior Association, because of this he did not know what happened in these 2 months. On the other hand, he also told Markus that his teacher would being there sometimeter.


    If Markus wanted to test his power then he could taste against Alena. Both of them will have true spiritual energy and also Markus needed some time to adjust himself with the new spiritual energy. Fighting would be a good thing for Markus to be familiar with the new spiritual energy.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Sometimeter,


    Alena came to that ce and congratted Markus. She also can rx that everything went sessfully and nothing unexpected happened to him. But still, nobody can be rxed until all the Saints do not evolve their spiritual energy system.


    At this time, Markus told Alena about the sparring session. Naturally, she did not have any problem with that and she was also eager to fight Markus. She also wanted to know how powerful he had be. One thing she is sure of is that when their sessfully evolves all the old saints receive more benefitspared to Alena, Aria, Maria, and Mira.


    Unfortunately, Sam would not be able to join them as he needed to be present in that ce to help other saints. Even though all those saints finally begin to heal, they still have serious injuries that require his help.


    If he leaves that ce and somehow one Saint begins to feel the energy overload then the life of that person would be endangered if he did not help that person. Because of this, he did not want to leave that ce.


    _______________________________________


    Both Markus and Alena came outside of the ce and decided to go to the danger zone to fight without holding back. The danger zone would be the safest ce for them as they did not need to think about the distractions.


    Even though it can create problems for those Monsters, both of them did not care about those Monsters. With this, both of them directly use the teleportation system of the warrior association and then teleport outside of the safe zone.


    Without wasting a single second both of them instantly begin to activate their techniques and in the next second both of them disappear from their ce. Markus was a physical Warrior and he always preferred to fight in closedbat.


    Naturally, Alena did not want to give him that time to close the distance between them. Even if he changed his spiritual energy system recently, there could still be a chance that she would get seriously injured by that attack.


    With this, she disappears from her previous ce and creates some distance. In the next second, you can see a huge sun ray going toward Markus. Markus already felt the dangering out from that attack but he still did not stop approaching Alena. He already expected she would escape from her previous ce, so he changed his direction and directly began to go toward Alena.


    In the next second, he saw that Attacking toward him and he also could feel the dangering out from the attack. But the danger did not make him scared or anything like that. Instead, he became excited, and in the next second, he punched toward that sun ray.


    He uses his whole physical strength alongside full spiritual energy to reach the maximum power of his technique. In the next second a huge explosion appeared in that ce. Ayer of smoke got created but Alena already knew what happened so she instantly attacked that ce once again.


    Markus easily destroyed her previous attack and not only did it look like a huge amount of fist force came in her direction. Naturally, she created the barrier in front of her to save herself, and also in the next second countless light beams began to go in that direction of Markus.


    Alena could tell Markus did not want to hold back and wanted to use his full power. So because of this, Alena also decided to use her full power and already created almost 10 light circles beside her. In the next second light beams begin toe out from those light circles and go toward the direction of Markus.


    Markus already felt the dangering out from those light beams but he did not stop there and in the next second coated his whole body using the body protection technique. Instantly ayer of spiritual energy appears in his body and he also begins to punch toward those light beams while approaching Alena.


    But this time it is not easy for Markus to destroy those light beams that easily. This time even Alena is also using her full power so naturally it would not be easy for him to destroy those attacks.


    During all this time, the Warrior Association became very alert and already about to go toward the direction from where they began to feel those vibrations and powerful energy fluctuations.


    Fortunately, at this time Sam already contacted the Warrior association and told them none of them had to worry about anything. It is just Alena and Markus fighting right now to test their power.


    Only then people from the Warrior Association can rx and they also inform all the other guilds and other people about this matter. Naturally many people from the safe zone can already feel the energy fluctuation that is present inside the danger zone and also can feel the dangering out from that ce.


    Many of them already became scared but fortunately, the Warrior Association informed everyone that they did not have to worry about anything.

 Chapter 844 Chapter 844 - Mad people

    Markus and Alena did not continue to fight for that long as both of them already realized that they already destroyed their surrounding area and this could also reach the safe zone if they continued like this.


    Because of this, sometimeter both of them stopped Sparring and decided to end the fight. But all this time you have to say Markus became familiar with his new strength. You already realize that whenever he uses his technique he can bring out more powerpared to before.


    Naturally, as the spiritual energy suddenly bes stronger the control over the spiritual energy already decreases. With this, he was unable to bring out the full power of any of his techniques.


    But that will not be a big matter to him as he already decided to focus on regaining control over the spiritual energy. With these both of them already teleport back to the training room where Sam and other Saints are still present.


    At this time nobody knows but everyone who was previously present near the area where Alena and Markus were fighting already sighed in relief. Naturally, everybody gets to know from the Warrior Association that currently two saints are sparring with each other.


    But the power that they feel all this time already makes them scared. Unknowingly all of them were shaking. Fortunately, Alena and Markus still control their spiritual aura, and because of this those people still did not feel all the pressure.


    Not only that all this time they can also feel The Spiritual fluctuation getting bigger and bigger and sometimeter they need to retreat from the previous ce. There is a good chance that all of them will be affected by the impact and because of this, they quickly retreat from their previous ce.


    Even the Warrior Association became rxed when both the saints stopped fighting. All this time they were present near the border area and trying to maintain the barrier so that nobody present in the safe zone was affected by the impact.


    At first, everything was okay butter it became very hard for them to maintain the shield. The Spiritual fluctuation in the power behind Those attacks already reached the level where it could easily injure those Warriors from the warrior Association. This is also a reason that everybody became worried, some of them already contacted Sam.


    Fortunately, Sam did not have to take any action as before both of them had already stopped fighting and had alreadye back inside the training ground. At this time he immediately healed those other Saints. It Looks like until they do not sessfully change their spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system, they will still bleed like this.


    When Alena and Markus came to that ce both of them already noticed that John and the others were bleeding and Sam was currently healing them. Alena without wasting a single second begins to heal those Saints. Unfortunately, Markus did not have a technique that could heal others.


    Even though he has a technique that could recover his health, unfortunately he did not have any technique that could heal others.


    "What do you think about the time limit that all of them will need to change their spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system?"


    Sometimeter after healing every one of them when three of them decided to rest, Markus asked that question to Sam. Alena also became interested as she wanted to know how long everyone would need to change their spiritual energy system.n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    "Unfortunately even I don''t know how long they will take to change their spiritual energy system. It will depend on the strength of the foundation and the capacity of The Spiritual energy.


    But I could tell that everyone has a strong foundation and because of this every one already shows signs of regaining their consciousness. If I am not wrong then it will take 5 to 10 days for them to wake up.


    I have to say that Saint Markus has the strongest foundationpared to them. Because of this, he was able to regain his consciousness first. Also, we already pass a dangerous situation where all of you have the chance to lose your life.


    Even in this painful torture all of you hold on using your full willpower. I am really d that all of you are able to do that. Also, I think you should rest right now as I can tell you''re pretty exhausted right now."


    While exining all of this Sam also observes the situation of Markus. We can tell every cell in his body wants to rest. Looks like Markus finally realized that he was that much exhausted. Previously because of the excitement he already forgot about his exhaustion and already overused his power and mental energy.


    With this after saying goodbye to Sam and Alena, Markus teleports back to his house and then falls asleep. It did not even take him 1 minute to fall asleep.


    On the other hand inside the training ground, Sam has the current situation of their. His teacher informs him that there is no dangerous thing happening to their and everything is under control.


    Well, only those Monsters present in the danger zone decided to attack the safe zone after bing powerful. But still, the situation is under control and she already deals with those Monsters.


    Also, there is no sign of powerful Dungeons appearing on their. Naturally, it will take some time for powerful Dungeons to appear there. The good thing is that some already believe that before that almost every Warriors of Eden Blue will improve themselves.


    He already predicted that the number of the S-grade warriors would increase. One thing he did not tell Gloria or his family was that he already found out that some kind of strange energy was present inside the body of his family and even sister Fiona had that energy.


    It Looks like when the Eden blue evolves it not only makes all of them powerful but also gives them energy that will help them to break through. Some already observe the nature of that energy and he can tell it is not harmful. Also, the energy is simr to the energy that is present inside the limit breakers.


    So definitely not just his family or sister Fiona, there are many other people who have that kind of energy and they just needed to utilize that energy to break through to S-grade. Unfortunately, he became busy helping those Saints, or he could already help his family and sister Fiona to break through.


    During the time when all of them went inside the dungeon, he already noticed that the energy present inside their body would get stimted when they fought those Monsters. Naturally, he still did not know the reason behind this but he is sure that he would be able to find out how to simte that energy to help his family and sister Fiona to break through.


    But not only that he needed to inform those other peak A-grade warriors about this so that they did not search for the limit breaker. None of them needed the limit breaker as with the help of that energy all of them can break through.


    _________________________________


    "It looks like after bing powerful some people have already be quite arrogant and decided to follow the dark path. The cry rate would have increased but fortunately, our Warriors from the Warrior Association already deal with those people.


    It looks like we need to increase the security around the whole safe zone. Well, I already did that and because of this, I am already able to prevent situations like this from happening. But still, there are many people who be mad after bing powerful. It looks like those people already forgot to be human and became a beast.


    I already put those people inside the prison and decided to give them level 3 therapy to make theme back to their senses. Well even if they did not work then they can spend the rest of their life inside the prison.


    Discover stories with empire


    Because of these I also think that we need to increase the rules and regtions of our Warrior Association. Well, naturally that can also leave a bad impression on all the Warriors. But we need to inform them that they only need to follow those rules and regtions for 2 months.


    Because of this, the situation has already be normal. Also because of this, we are able to find out more people who be mad after bing powerful. This makes me surprised how the hell those people be like this. It Looked like that was the true nature of those people and they were just unable to get out there through nature because of their weakness.


    Now as they became more powerful they naturally wanted to bring out their true nature. Unfortunately for them, until the Warrior Association is present in Eden Blue, none of them would be able to do anything."

 Chapter 845 Chapter 845 - Waking up

    As Sam predicates, those other Saints regain their consciousness after 10 dayster. One by one, they regain their consciousness. After that naturally they went inside the bathroom to freshen up.


    Sometimeter,n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Markus also came to that ce alongside Alena. Naturally he is also interested to see the reaction of all the saints. As he expected, all of them are currently showing their shocking expressions. They did not expect they would feel this kind of change happening to their body.


    Naturally none of them became used to their power so they would need some time to be used to their power. This time Markus or Alena wouldn''t be fighting them, Sam decided to fight them.


    Well even though all of the minutes rest right now it looks like because of the excitement they already forget about their exhaustion. Because of this, Sam decided to fight them.


    Well, Markus and Alena also wanted to participate in this but Sam told him they can do thatter. Well, first of all none of the Saints were used to their power while both of them were already able to stabilize themselves. If both of them also wanted to participate in this then the other saints would not get that much chance to stabilize their power.


    Markus and Alena did not have any problem with this. But both of them will be present there to stabilize the surrounding area. Both of them still remember what happened previously when both of them spar with each other. That they did not realize about the destruction and the impact, the next day, they already get to know about all of this.


    Well, because of this, both of them decided to stay in that ce to surround the area with a barrier and minimize the impact and damage. Sam did not have any problem with that and with this all of them instantly teleport in the danger zone.


    Well to minimize the impact they also went more deep inside the danger zone. Well they also already inform the warrior Association. So that all the Warriors who are present near the border area can move away from those ces.


    The Warrior Association immediately takes action and already informs all the Warriors who are present near the border areas. At this time Sam and the others already came inside the danger zone and both Alena and Markus already created a huge barrier around that ce.


    They already kill all the monsters present in that ce. After that both of them create some distance from that ce as they did not want to interfere with the fight between Sam and all the saints.


    ____________________________________


    2 hourter,


    At this time you can see all the Saints currently panting on the ground. After fighting Sam for 2 hours all of them finally begin to feel exhausted. From the start they used their full power against Sam. Well, they did not have to worry about injuring Sam.


    Because of this from the start they use their full power and in just 2 hours their situation bes like this. All this time some naturally did not fight back and just defended himself from those attacks. But even with that in just 2 hours all the Saints be exhausted like this.


    Actually those Saints also suffer because of the previous exhaustion that they forget about because of their excitement. At this time Sam already told him to go back to their house to rest.


    Even though they only fight him for 2 hours, in these 2 hours they still get used to their power. As they were using their full power from the start it is natural for them to get used to their power. They can also feel the density of their spiritual energy. They can also feel every time they use any of their techniques they would feel a huge amount of power wille out from their attack.


    Unfortunately they are also able to feel the control over their spiritual energy already decreases. Because of this, all of them also realize that they need to practice increasing their control over their spiritual energy.


    1 hourter,


    Finally after so many dayster Sam was able toe back to his home. He did not have to worry about the safety of any saints. With this he cane back to his house and he can also rest.


    Gloria and the others are not present inside the house. Everyone of them went inside the Dungeon. Well, Sam can contact themter as he already knows where they are right now.


    _____________________________________


    2 dayster,


    All the saints already came back to the warrior association. Naturally they wanted to know about the situation of their. All the Warriors after seeing them be happy and begin to tell them what happened during all these days.


    The good thing is that nothing dangerous happens and no other Dungeon appears in that ce. Even though monsters inside the dangers don''t be powerful, still they are not on the level of Alena or any other Saints.


    But the thing is that the number of those S-grade warriors increased while on the other hand the number of S-grade warriors did not increase. First of all, everybody still did not realize the unique energy present inside their body. Also, they did not find any limit breaker which can help them to break through.


    Sam did not know but many people already try to break through without using limit breakers but none of the people are able to simte the energy present inside their body to break through. Even using a limit breaker that they have with them is unable to help them in this process.


    Well, after hearing all of this Markus and others became serious because they expected that the number of S-grade warriors would increase as everybody received some kind of blessing from their. They already expected those people who already reached the limit of peak A-grade would immediately be S-grade Warrior.


    But unfortunately nothing like that happened. so all of them begin to worry about this. First of all they were not able to collect that much limit breaker from earth when they went there to help those Prime humans.


    As you know all during the time they fight the enemies of those Prime humans and also not long after the end of the fight they needed to escape from the ce because those Prime humans targeted them.


    Because of this, even all the Saints did not know how to help those people. But None of them lost any hope because of Sam. Actually Alena already informs them that Sam has something to tell everyone about this matter. So they just need to wait for Sam toe there.


    Sam is currently present in his house and just woke up from his sleep. It Looks like even though after bing aari great Warrior he needed less sleep, but after staying awake for almost 3 months he became exhausted. Because of this, he slept for almost 2 days.


    It even makes Alena worried when she is unable to contact him. But when she came inside his house and checked his condition she became rxed as she realized Sam was just sleeping.


    After waking up from his sleep Sam freshen up and then went to the kitchen to prepare some breakfast for him even though it is already 11:00 a.m. but as you know it is still morning for him.


    Readtest chapters on empire


    During that time, he suddenly notices that he has so many miss calls from his teacher. Immediately he called his teacher to see what happened and told her that he was sleeping and because of this he was unable to pick up her phone.


    ___________________________


    "Well, don''t worry I already checked you and found out you''re just asleep. Well I can understand because you stay awake for almost 3 months. That would be impossible for me or any other person.


    Don''t worry about this. Also today I contacted you because of the previous method that you wanted to discuss with me and all the saints. They already find out the number of those S-grade begins to increase but unfortunately until now no humans are able to break through to S-grade.


    So they''re hoping that you can give them some suggestions to solve this matter and also help those people to break through."


    " Don''t worry teacher, I already decided to meet them. Well if you can then tell them to wait for 10 minutes as I am just preparing my breakfast. I just woke up from my sleep so I am still quite hungry."


    " Haha¡­ don''t worry. Just eat your breakfast and thene to the warrior Association."


    With this Sam hangs up the phone and then begins to prepare his breakfast. Well, he also felt quite hungry so he needed to prepare much more food for him to satisfy his hunger.


    At this time suddenly he felt very nostalgic. It must have been a long time since he felt hungry like this. Before he went to the Terraria he always ate like this but after going there everything changed. The more he began to be powerful the more he realized that he did not be that hungry. There could be a chance that the surrounding area is also affecting his hunger.

 Chapter 846 Chapter 846 - Special energy

    "I think none of you realize this, but all those people who previously were peak A-grade have some energy present inside their body. That energy is simr to the energy that came out from the limit breaker.


    You can naturally tell all of these happen because of the evolution of our. The evolution not just only makes them reach the limit but also gives them that energy which will also help them to break through.


    It is just if our helps them to break through immediately then it could be dangerous for their foundation. Because of this, all of them have that energy present inside their body.


    Now everyone needs to simte that energy to break through to S-grade. But I already hear that many people already try to do that, unfortunately, none of them can simte that energy.


    Well, I can already tell why they are unable to simte the energy as before anything they needed to figure out the difference between their spiritual energy and that special energy present inside their body. After that, they need to control their spiritual energy to get in contact with that special energy and like this, they need to simte the energy to help them to break through the barrier.


    I already n to help my family to break through as I can tell all of them have already reached the limit and it looks like all of them also have a special energy inside their body.


    If my prediction is right then everything would go ording to my n and also we can use that method to help those other Warriors. But one thing I should tell all of you is not to reveal the information directly to those people as I also get to know that the crime rate begins to increase as people begin to be powerful.


    Because of this, don''t reveal information to the public and only reward those people who have achieved enough achievements.


    Also teacher can you tell me the recent record about the criminals and the crime rate? I get to know that somehow those people get to hear that all the Saints were busy and they would not be able toe out. Because of this, they became fearless."


    Sam already exins about the special energy that he feels inside the body of Gloria and the others. He also told him how to simte the special energy to break through. But that would not be an easy process and because of this, until now no one was able to break through to S-grade.


    Naturally, he also told him not to reveal this information to the public as the crime rate increased and many people be arrogant after bing powerful. Those people already lost their qualification to follow the path of Warriors. Naturally, Sam did not want to help those people to be more powerful.


    Only those people should break through who have enough achievement. On the other hand, he asks his teacher about the crime rate and also what is the current situation of the criminals.


    "Well as you know we already captured many of those criminals but it looks like because the news about the saints spread among all the people, the number of the criminals began to increase.


    They began to realize that they did not have anybody to stop them other than me. They just need to avoid me and with this, they can keep continuing with their crime. I don''t know how but it looks like those people somehow get some kind of techniques that help them to hide their aura.


    Naturally, that is not working for me but it is working against all the other Warriors of the Warrior Association. Also, I am unable to present every ce at the same time so this is the reason that the crime rate begins to increase. But I can rx because now we have all the saints here.


    It is time to punish all of those criminals and make sure that all the other Warriors and those normal people also realize what would happen if they decided to follow that kind of path. We needed to be strict in this matter. Otherwise, the moment we focus on increasing our strength those people will get the chance tomit crimes like this once again."


    Alena exins the current situation and she also exins why the crime rates suddenly increase. It looks like those people somehow get to know that all the saints are currently busy and would not be able toe out for a long time.


    Even the miracle maker became busy and only Saint Alena would be present in the Warrior Association. Naturally, she is very dangerous but as she would not be able to be present in every City, those people be fearless and decide to increase their crime.


    Hearing all of this, every saint bes angry. This would be the first time they hear something like this. Naturally, this would be the first time that every one of them went into seclusion like this at once. Because of this, they previously did not face this kind of matter.


    Fortunately, there are no major casualties. Even though those people try to have many people and even try to kill many people because of the Warrior Association they are unable to do that openly.


    But as you can tell it is the time to stop all of those people and put them inside the prison. Also, they needed to make sure that everybody realized what would happen to them if they followed the same path as those criminals. Also, every one of the criminals will be entering the cklist of the warrior association and will not receive any kind of reward from the Warrior Association.


    3 monthster they would be participating in thepetition. Unfortunately for now none of those people who are entering the cklist would be able to participate in thepetition.


    "Inform all the branches of the warrior association to prepare themselves as we would immediately take action against those criminals. Those people disappointed me. I never thought our people would do something like this when we were busy.


    What would happen if we went to another? What would happen if all the scenes went to that and there was nobody present on our to handle those people? That would be a disaster for everyone.


    I did not want to imagine what kind of situation would happen at that time. We need to increase our manpower and also need to make an example to everyone that if they follow the path of the criminal then they need to stop being a warrior. They already lost the qualification to be a warrior."


    John all of this with a disappointed tone. First of all, there is the possibility that they would go to another to take their revenge or something like that. Now during those times, the situation of their would be dangerous because of their people who begin to follow the path of criminals.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    The most important thing was that after surviving that kind of war how can these people be criminals like this? Did they be that arrogant after bing powerful?


    Sam also began to think about all these types of questions and because of this, he also told everyone they should also check the mind of the people to see if they got affected by anything or not. There is a possibility that those people got affected by something and became criminals like this after getting affected.


    Naturally, everyone supported his idea because even they did not expect something like this to happen after they survived that kind of disaster. They already mentioned to everyone before going into seclusion, that they should not be careless and arrogant.


    Even if they became powerful because of their, they still needed to work hard as the situation of the will change and more powerful Monsters will appear on their.


    _______________________________________


    Around 5:00 p.m. Sam finally came back to his house. At this time suddenly his sister called him. It Looks like she already came outside of the Dungeon and also noticed that she got a call from Sam.


    Gloria informs Sam that she and their parents wille back to their house sometimeter. They just came outside of the Dungeon and are currently approaching the Warrior Association. Even though they can directly use the teleportation system of the Warrior Association, none of them decided to use that.


    Sam did not know but when he was busy helping all the saints, Gloria, and the others discussed among each other about the use of the teleportation system of the Warrior Association.


    In the end, they decided not to use that teleportation system until they did not face any kind of dangerous situation or emergency. Even Alena agrees with this matter. First of all, using the teleportation system would naturally need to use the energy created by the spirit stones.


    Compared to them all the Warriors of the Warrior Association needed to use the teleportation system to do their various work all the time. Because of this, all of them decided not to use the teleportation system until they did not face any kind of dangerous situation or emergency.

 Chapter 847 Chapter 847 - Time to breakthrough

    Gloria and the others came back to their house and already met Sam who was preparing food for them. As they already know that they will being back, Sam decides to cook food for them.


    Well, he already finished preparing all the food, so sometimeter you can already see everyone present in the dining room. It has been a long time since Sam cooked food for anyone and also this would be a long time since everyone from his family will be eating the food prepared by him.


    At this time, suddenly Sam began to tell everyone that tomorrow they did not have to practice or do anything like this. Every one of them already reached the limit of peak A-grade. Now it is time for them to break through.


    Hearing that Gloria, Hina, and Victor instantly became happy but at the same time, they don''t know if Sam has limit breakers with him or not. Naturally, they did not expect him to have everything even though he is the miracle maker.


    Unfortunately for them, Sam has many limit breakers with him to help them break through. But he is not going to use any of those limit breakers. As you know, all of them have some kind of energy present inside them which is simr to the energy present inside the limit breaker, so none of them needed any kind of external help to break through.


    Sam did not exin to them about the special energy present inside their body. He did not want any of them to try to do anything reckless to simte the special energy present inside their body. If in recklessness they did something wrong then it can be dangerous.


    Tomorrow he is going to exin to them about the special energy and also instruct them how to simte the special energy. If you are wondering how Sam can find out the method to simte the energy, then it is because when he uses those powerful limit breakers he does the same thing to simte the energy present inside the limit breaker after absorbing them.


    Gloria and the others became confused as some did not answer their question about limit breakers. He just told him to stay ready and today they should rest properly. They should not try to do anything and should give their body and minds rest.


    Well, Gloria, Hina, and Victor noticed that Sam did not have any wish to exin to them about the limit breakers, so they did not ask any questions about this matter to him once again. They just agree with him as it ismon that before you want to break through you need to give your body and mind a proper rest.


    Sam also told Gloria to inform sister Fiona. Well, unknowingly she also became a part of their family. Most of the time she would not spend her time with her family. Most of the time she will spend her time with Gloria.


    At this time Gloria suddenly asks about the situation of the saints. Same told them about the condition of all the saints. Everyone became happy when they heard all the saints were finally able to evolve the energy system into a spiritual energy system. Naturally, all the saints became more powerful, and with this, their became more safe.


    ____________________________________


    The next day,


    "Good morning sis,"


    Around 6:00 a.m. Gloria came down from her room and went to the kitchen to prepare some food for her family. Sometimes she also prepares breakfast for her family after finishing her training. But as today she is not practicing, she decided toe to the kitchen room early to prepare breakfast.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Surprisingly Sam is already present in that ce and looks like he is making some coffee for him. Gloria greeted him and came beside him. Both brother and sister begin to prepare Omelette toast alongside the coffee. That would be breakfast.


    During this time Gloria answers all the questions of Sam. Sam asks her about the dungeon raid. This time how much Monster they have killed and also how much deep they have gone inside the Dungeon.


    Gloria told her that they could easily roam around the first floor. Naturally, those Monsters can still give them problems as they still do not have the power to face arge group of Monsters at once. But at least she and Fiona can face almost 4 Monsters at once. Compared to them both of their parents can face 3 Monsters at once.


    With this, you can already tell 4 of them have already improved themselves. Unfortunately because of the level gap, they are still unable to fight those Monsters easily. Even though they have the strength to fight those Monsters, it would only be useful when they would fight one against one.


    Gloria also exins that this time they went to different Dungeons and faced a dry climate. All the Monsters that they have are normally present around the desert area. Naturally, these also increase the difficulty for them. Sand makes them slow. But in the end, they are still able to kill those Monsters.


    _________________________________________


    Sam and his family are ready. Fiona also already came there and Sam decided to teleport all of them inside the training room that all the Saints use to evolve their energy system.


    That would be an ideal ce as it is very far away from the locality. So even if any kind of unexpected situation urs during that time nobody would be able to know about this and Sam would handle everything.


    Surprisingly, the Saints are also present in that ce. All of them also wanted to see how Gloria and the others simted the special energy present inside them to break through. Naturally, all of them are busy handling those criminals. Yesterday they captured many of those people and also announced to everyone that they had alreadye out of seclusion.


    A huge amount of people were captured by them and all of them are currently present inside the prison of the Warrior Association. Sam told him to monitor the minds of those people to see if they got influenced by something or not.


    There is a possibility that all of them got influenced by something and because of this, they decided to do something like this.


    Yesterday they did not get the time to observe the minds of those people but they can do thatter. For now, the important matter is to see how Gloria and the others simte the special energy present inside them. Sam told them to observe the process as this would be helpful for them.


    Fiona and everyone are surprised when they see all the saints present in that ce. But at this time, Sam told them not to worry about those Saints. They are just present here to observe them and to see how they can simte the energy present inside them.


    Now this makes them understand why all the saints are present in that ce, but at the same time, they can be confused about this. They begin to think that those saints wanted to see how they would be able to control their true spiritual energy during the time when they would focus on breaking through.


    Well, they are not wrong but when Sam begins to exin about the special energy present inside them and all the people who reached the peak A-grade. Now, this is really surprising news for everyone. They did not expect to have some kind of special energy present inside their body.


    They are not going to use the limit breaker and only going to use that special energy alongside their true spiritual energy to break through. At this time all the saints maintain distance from them, as none of them want to disturb Gloria and the others during the time when they will be focusing on the breakthrough.


    Victor already sat down in the lotus position and then closed his eyes. Sometimeter, he became focused andpletely entered his inner world. He can already see the barrier in front of him. That is the thing that prevents him from breaking through.


    Victor, even though wanted to attack that barrier, held himself because he wanted to know the n of Sam. At this time, Sam also did not waste any time and then began to instruct him how to simte the special energy inside his body.


    Well, Sam did not have to instruct in the control of spiritual energy. So because of this, he only begins to instruct him to stimte the special energy present inside him.


    Victor before doing anything needs to find the special energy present in his body. With this in his focus, he began to roam around the inner world to find the special energy.


    He can already see the source of the Spiritual energy but unfortunately, he still did not find the source of the special energy inside his body. But naturally, he cannot give up on this. Following the instruction, he began searching for the special energy.

 Chapter 848 - Breakthrough

    3 hourster, Victor finally can feel something other than the spiritual energy inside his body. All this time as you know he entered the inner world and he was searching for the special energy present in his body.


    But until now he did not find anything like that. Naturally, that does not make him give up. Victor keeps searching for the special energy present in his body and like this after 3 hourster finally following the instruction of someone he can find a presence of another energy in his inner world.


    He controls his consciousness to go toward the directions where he can sense that other energy. It did not take him that much time and he could finally see the source of the special energy in his body.


    In front of him, you can see a golden ball present. That golden ball contains special energy and is currently floating in his inner world.


    Instantly Victor begins to try to control that special energy present in front of him. At first, he was unable to feel control over that special energy. Sometimeter finally he can feel that he has control over that special energy and instantly begins to control that special energy toward him.


    At this time Sam and everybody who was observing Victor, became serious the moment they noticed that Victor began to glow brightly in golden color. Sam instantly observes his father to see if any kind of dangerous thing happened to him or not.


    But fortunately, nothing like that is happening right now. Not only that he also finds out that other than the spiritual energy and another energy is also present in Victor''s body. Most likely this is the reason that he began to glow brightly in golden color.


    Sam quickly informs everyone so that they can rx about this. After that, he and everyone focused on Victor. Now after finding that special energy, it is time for Victor to control that energy and to break through from his current Grade.


    The good thing is that everybody is experienced with this matter as they already use this kind of special energy produced by the limit breaker to break through. Victor needs to do the same thing with this special energy.


    Inside the inner world of Victor,


    Victor already came in front of that barrier which prevented him from Breaking through to the next grade. Now he is controlling both his spiritual energy and that special energy and instantly attacks that barrier in front of him.


    Naturally, he would not say ideal just attacking one time. He just wanted to see how much damage he would be able to do to that barrier in front of him. Also, you should know that from the moment he changes his spiritual energy system into a true spiritual energy system, the power behind Those barriers also increases.


    Sometimeter a huge explosion appeared in that ce and the next again Victor noticed that the barrier in front of him had been damaged heavily. One part of that barrier instantly got destroyed. But naturally, the barrier instantly begins to recover by its regenerating ability.


    But Victor already became excited after finding out about this. Now he became fully excited and wasting no time began to control both the energy to create more attacks. Without wasting a single second he began to attack that barrier in front of him.


    One after another, explosions begin to appear in that ce, and the barrier in front of him gets damaged by all of these. But Victor did not stop attacking the barrier. He will not stop until he is sure that he already destroyed the barrier in front of him.


    All this time Victor did not know but a huge amount of energy fluctuation came out from his body. Everybody already understands that Victor finally starts attacking the barrier present in his inner world to break through. Gloria and the others already start praying so that Victor is sessfully able to break through.


    As you know if somehow he is unable to break through them he will bacsh. Compared to them Sam is full of confidence that his father would be able to break through sessfully. Not only that he also observed his father from the start. Until now nothing excessive happened to his body and even though a huge amount of energy fluctuation came out from his body, Victor is fully calm.


    Not only that in the status of his father, Sam can see his father is excited right now. This makes him confused but he can ask his fatherter. Through that status screen, he became sure that his father would be able to sessfully break through.


    Like this, after 2 hours, the energy fluctuation increases and bes more dense. But at the same time, Sam says that his father is very close to breaking through. Most likely he is just one hand away from the chance to break through.


    Inside the inner world,


    Victor did not stop even for a second and kept attacking that barrier in front of him. Even though he can feel the mental exhaustion, he did not feel any kind of spiritual energy exhaustion.


    These also give him additional motivation and with this, he keeps attacking the barrier in front of him. Because of those explosions, ayer of smoke was created in front of him, and with this, he was unable to tell how much time he would need to destroy the full barrier.


    But to check that thing he did not want to stop the attack so he kept attacking that barrier. Like this suddenly he begins to feel something is different. But even with that, he did not stop attacking. Like this suddenly his body even inside his inner world begins to blow brightly and at this time he is unable to maintain his attack.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    He begins to feel fully rxed right now and can also feel and warm energy present in his body. But it was not there and sometimeter he began to feel that something was happening in his body. Somehow the Spiritual energy reserve begins to increase as his whole body begins to change.


    Actually, he did not know but his real body was also going through the same situation where it became fully covered by a golden glow. Only Sam and all the saints can maintain their observation. Gloria and the others already close their eyes as they are unable to look at Victor.


    Like this 2 hourster finally that golden glow from Victor''s body begins to fade away. At this time everybody notices that some kind of ck stuff is present in Victor''s body. Instantly, everyone creates distance from Victor. Victor on the other hand already came back to his senses and slowly he opened his eyes.


    After opening his eyes he notices that Sam and the others are far away from his location. For a second he bes confused but in the next second when he gets hit by that nasty smell that almost makes him vomit, he understands why everybody maintains their distance from him.


    Without wasting a single second he quickly got up from the ground. But as you know he did not have full control over his power. Something unexpected happened and he got blown away by his power. Fortunately, Sam already uses the telekinesis technique to control Victor.


    Only then Victor gets the chance to stabilize himself, and he is finally able to go inside the bathroom without any problem. On the other hand, Saint John already uses his power to clean that area and all that ck stuff came out from Victor''s body.


    Sometimeter,


    Victor came out of the bathroom and finally, everybody could talk to him about his experience. Victor without hiding anything began to tell how much time he had needed to search for that special energy and how he was able to control the special energy.


    How he can control that special energy to break through and what kind of situation happens when he uses that special energy alongside his spiritual energy.


    Explore new worlds at empire


    Victor begins to share all of these with everyone which makes everyone very interested and surprised. Well, naturally, he needed that much time to find that special energy. But at the same time, they did not think that he would need that much time to control that special energy.


    The most important thing is that by using the special energy he can easily damage the barrier present in his inner world. Even using the special energy present inside the limit breaker nobody would be able to damage the barrier present in their innerworld that quickly.


    Victor also begins to share everyone''s feelings when he can control that special energy. He feels like it is a part of his body but at the same time, his body is not familiar with that energy. At first, he felt very ufortable when he was able to regain control over that special energy, but sometimeter his body became family with this and he did not feel that much ufortable.

 Chapter 849 - Capturing criminals

    Sometimeter,


    You can see Gloria and the others also begin to meditate while following the same process as Victor. Victor was also present in the ce to help them if they needed his help.


    All the Saints decided to go back as they finally figured out about the special energy and already understood that the special energy can help anyone to break through easily. As you know they are busy and they have other work to do so they are unable to stay there for that long.


    Only Alena, Mira, and Aria decided to stay in that ce so that they could help if Gloria and the others needed their help. They also wanted to find out if they had anything like that special energy inside their body or not.


    Unfortunately for them, Sam already informs them that only those people who reach peak A-grade have that special energy inside their body. Naturally, that special energy was given by the when it sessfully evolved. Because of this, none of those people who reach peak A-grade can break through directly to S-grade.


    Naturally, something stops them from breakthrough and because of this, all those people get special energy. On the other hand, all the Saints directly broke through to the next grade the moment their sessfully evolved.


    Because of this, Sam did not think any of the saints or those people who could break through to the next grade would have that special energy present inside them.


    Back to the main matter,


    Gloria and the others also enter their inner world. After that, they follow the same process as Victor while searching for the special energy present inside their inner world.


    As expected they easily did not find any trace of that energy present inside their body but that did not make them give up on this. Like Victor, almost 3 hours are needed for them to find the source of the special energy and two more hours need them to control the special energy.


    After that, every one of them finally came in front of the barrier that prevented them from Breaking through. While simting both the special energy and The Spiritual energy, every one of them begins to attack the barrier in front of them.


    All this time all of their bodies begin to glow in golden color. Victor also realized what happened to him when he was also trying to break through. Like this three hourster finally the golden glow from their body begins to fade away.


    The energy fluctuation that previously appeared in the ce also begins to disappear and in the next again The Spiritual aura of S-grade Warriors appears in that ce.


    Not long after that Gloria and the others slowly open their eyes. Victor and the others already made quite a distance from that ce because of the nasty smell. Gloria and others after regaining their consciousness did not think it was second and quickly went toward the bathroom.


    Once again as they did not have that much control over their spiritual energy and strength, they almost broke the training ground. Fortunately, Sam can stop them using his telekinesis technique.


    Sometimeter,


    Alena and the others begin to congratte Gloria and the others for being able to break through to S-grade. At this time naturally, everybody wanted to test their power as it would be the best way for them to get used to being a S-grade Warrior.


    All of them realize the huge difference between a peak A-grade and an early S-grade. You can say their strength has increased 50 times since they became S-grade Warriors.n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Your journey continues on empire


    Naturally for any ordinary Warrior, it would be 20 times but for Gloria and the others they can be 50 times stronger after breaking through. All of these happen due to true spiritual energy and their bloodline.


    At this time Gloria suddenly came in front of her teacher and requested that she spar with her. Alena did not have any problem with that so she also agreed with the sparring match. At this time Hina and Victor also approach Aria and Mira for a sparring match.


    Both of them also did not have any problem with this so both of them also agreed with Victor and Hina. That only left Fiona. She did not know how to approach Sam and ask him about the sparring match. But looks like she did not have to do that as Sam already told her to get ready to fight him.


    Naturally, none of the fighting inside the training room as it will easily get destroyed by their power. Sam once again decided to hold the fight inside the danger zone. Naturally this time the fight would not be that match serious as before.


    Sam still decided to contact the Warrior Association and inform them about the sparring match. The good thing is that this time none of those Saints would fight each other but they already informed all the Warriors present near the border City to stay careful.


    Those people who are present in those border cities which are close to the area where Sam and everyone are going to fight each other naturally became surprised. Everybody wanted to know who would be fighting each other. This time they get to know that none of the Saints would be fighting each other so the impact would not be that powerful.


    But still, the Warrior Association told everyone to stay careful and prepare to activate the barrier to protect themselves from the impact. Unfortunately, the Warrior Association did not inform any of them about this, and also none of them wanted to approach the area where the fight would be going on.


    ___________________________________


    Markus and others already get to know about this but none of them became worried about this. This is because Sam would be present in that ce and he would let dangerous situations appear in the ce.


    Everyone is currently observing the activity of those people who got cklisted by the Warrior Association. They waited for the right moment to capture every one of those people but before that all the Saints howwless those people had be when every one of them was busy.


    Until now the Warrior Association officially did not reveal to everyone that all the Saints finally came back to the Warrior Association. Because of this, only some of those people know about this.


    Because of this, none of those criminals know that they are already being observed by the warriors from the Warrior Association. Even though those people get to know that many people like them got captured by the body Association, it looks like somehow every one of them became fearless after bing powerful.


    Most of the people are around peak A-grade. Because of this, those people have the confidence that they would be able to handle those from the Warrior Association. This is also a reason that they keepmitting criminal activities.


    If you want to read about their criminal activities then using their or you can say abusing their power. Naturally even with that none of them dare do something that can directly attract the attention of the Warrior Association. None of them wanted to attract the attention of the miracle maker.


    Unfortunately for them sometimeter some of the people who were just about to rob a bank formittee crime instantly got captured by the Warriors from the Warrior Association. Somehow after looking at those warriors from the Warrior Association, none of those people became scared. It look like they wanted to fight with the people and wanted to use that chance to get from that ce.


    Unfortunately for them, before they can do anything suddenly every one of them begins to feel a huge pressure on them. The moment they feel the pressure they lose the ability to fight back or do anything.


    Sometimeter,


    All the Saints were almost able to cover 50 cities like this and already capture all the people whomitted crimes. Finally, those people also became scared when they noticed that the Saints were also present.


    Naturally, Markus and others did not do anything and just told those other Warriors from the warrior association to put those people inside the interrogation room. Before punishing those people all the saints and even Sam would be present there to interrogate those people.


    Naturally, activities also alert all those 50 cities, and looks like those other people whomit crimes from other cities also get informed about this. Because of this, the Warrior Association decided to officially announce all the saints. Before that Markus and others wanted to capture as many people as they could.


    _______________________________


    The next day,


    You can see the real Association currently fully crowded with reporters. Those people came to that ce as the Warrior Association in from that they had something important to reveal to everyone.


    Naturally, none of the reporters wanted to miss this and wanted to find out what information the Warrior Association wanted to give them.

 Chapter 850 - Information and good news

    All the reporters who came to the Warrior Association naturally are confused right now. Some of them even try to ask those Warriors from the Warrior Association about this. Unfortunately, none of those Warriors from the Warrior Association said anything to them.


    15 minutester, the elder of the Warrior Association came in front of all those reporters and finally told everyone to stay silent. Naturally after looking at that elder all the reporters begin to ask many questions.


    But hearing the word of the elder everybody bes silent and begins to focus on the elder. Everybody wanted to know what kind of information the elder wanted to give everyone.


    "It is good to see all of you are doing okay. Now every one of you must be wondering why I called all of you here and why we also told you to broadcast about this. Then it is because we have good news that we wanted to share with everyone.


    Before giving you the good news I wanted to say something about the recent matter which became dangerous for our humans. Some time ago we just fought against those people from differents and after that, we were sessfully able to help our to evolve.


    As our can evolve sessfully it also helps many of us to be more powerful. Some people instantly became A-grade warriors after getting help from the. But it looks like this also creates a serious issue for every human.


    We did not expect that many of our people would go mad like this. After bing powerful those people somehow begin to follow the criminal path. They somehow wanted to show their dominance to everyone and also as our Saints be busy in their training, those people think that they would not want to stop them.


    Those people even stop fearing the Warrior Association. The good thing is that even with that, those people remember that they should not cross the limit which can alert the warrior association to contact the miracle maker.


    Even with that day by day, the rate of criminal activity begins to increase. If we are not wrong then those people will also create a criminal organization that would contain all the criminals.


    Naturally, our people be busy handling those matters and also they be busy capturing those people. Because of this, the situation of Dungeons and the Danger Zone became serious.


    Many of you did not realize but many times Monsters from the danger zone try to break free and want to enter the safe zone. Fortunately, Saint Alena was present at the time and she was the one who handled all this matter.


    Unfortunately, she was also unable to help capture the criminals because all the Warriors from the Warrior Association became busy handling those criminals, and Saint Alena became busy killing those Monsters from those Dungeons.


    It looks like many of you already forget that if we did not kill the Boss monster for a certain amount of time then some kind of reaction would appear and the Monsters from Dungeon will alle outside of the dungeon.


    Saint Alena became busy handling those matters and this is the reason that she was also unable to focus on those criminals who somehow becamewless and began to increase their criminal activities.


    But none of those people realize that the Monsters from the S-grade were just about toe outside of the dungeon. Fortunately, Saint Alena was able to react in time and kill all those Monsters. I think many of you already forget what happens when those Monsters from the Dungeone outside of the dungeon.


    Evenpared to those Monsters present in the danger zone, those Monsters who just came outside of the Dungeon will be more dangerous. They will receive a power boost and also somehow they will be more vicious.


    Because of this, it is our duty as a warrior to clean the danger to protect our safe zone from those Monsters. I hope every warrior who is hearing all of these bes alert about this. I know that all of you wanted to focus on your training right now but at the same time you should also think about the danger that could appear on our from those Monsters.


    Now came those people who became criminals and began to abuse their power. Is a good thing that until now they did not kill anyone but they already made many people seriously injured.


    Fortunately, the good thing is that yesterday we were able to capture almost every one of those people who began tomit crimes. Even though we suspect there are more people like them present among us, don''t worry as we would be capturing them in no time.


    We already have the detailed information about all those people so even if those people try to hide them they would not be able to do that."


    After saying all of these the elder became silent. The elder wanted to give everyone to digest all this information. Not just those media reporters but those people who also heard the news on TV and phones needed some time to digest all of this information.


    Naturally,pared to those powerful Warriors, low-level Warriors, and normal humans became affected because of those criminals. On the other hand, most of the Warriors became busy with their training as they wanted to increase their power.


    Unfortunately because of this they also ignore killing Monsters. This is the reason that somehow those Monsters from the Dungeon were able toe outside of the Dungeon.


    Fortunately, everybody could rx as Saint Alena was present there and she already handled all those monsters. Compared to any of these monsters everybody bes scared when they think about those Monsters from S-grade dungeons.


    They naturally did not want to expect what kind of situation would appear when those Monsters from S-grade Dungeons came outside. Everybody remembers that every monster from Dungeons will get additional power the moment theye outside of the dungeon.


    At the same time, everybody almost bes happy when they get to hear that the Warrior Association captures a lot of those criminals. Instantly those reporters wanted to ask many questions rted to this.


    "I know that all of you have many questions rted to this but I wanted to tell you the good news that I wanted to give you will solve all of your problems. So wasting no time I wanted to reveal this information that all of our saints finally came out from their seclusion.


    Not only that, they were the ones who captured most of the criminals using their power. Yesterday we were almost able to cover 80% of our savings and already captured many of the criminals. Now please wee our Saints. They would be the ones who will give you the remaining information."


    After they finish saying that the elder quickly leaves the stage and not long after that one by Markus and the others begin toe to the stage and then they sit down. Suddenly all the reporters focused on all the Saints. This naturally matters to everyone. The moment all those people who watch TV or mobile get this news, they be excited.


    On the other hand, those remaining people who follow the path of criminals became pale, almost every one of them became scared the moment they got the news from the Warrior Association. Some of them even begin to tremble the moment they get the news.


    Even though the miracle maker did not take action personally still in the presence of those Saints, naturally none of those people who followed the path of the criminal had the confidence to win.


    Don''t know why but those people can even feel the pressure the moment they see the Saints approach the main stage and sit down. Actually, even though John and the others did not release any of their pressure many people still begin to feel the pressure of the movement as they observe John and others.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Sometimeter,


    Markus takes the microphone and finally begins to say,


    "It is nice to meet you once again. As the elder told all of you we already capture many people who follow the path of criminals. Actually, we can give this information to all of you many days ago but we decided to wait to take action against those criminals.


    It is just some of those people who decided to hide themselves. Some of them even kill themselves. Because of this, we were not able to capture all of those people.


    Now I am happy to tell everyone that we have already captured many of those people and put them in the interrogation room. Before deciding what kind of punishment we would give them we wanted to check the memory of those people.


    We wanted to know if some kind of situation happened to them and because of this they decided to follow the criminal path. We have a prediction that something affected the minds of those warriors and because of this, they decided to follow the path of criminals.


    Stay tuned to empire


    So we would not be told about the punishment that will be given to the people. As we wanted to interrogate them."

 Chapter 851 - Prison life

    Sam and the others already came back to the training room and after that, every one of them decided to go back to their house. Gloria and the others already finished fighting Sam and the others and finally, they have proper control over their power.


    They also understand how much stronger they have be when they break through to S-grade. For all of them, this is a huge matter. It is an unexpected thing for them that they would be able to break through that easily.


    The hardest thing was finding the source of the special energy present inside their body. After that everything became easy. This would be the first time everyone notices that they can easily destroy the barrier.


    Now the good thing is that everything is finished and every one of them can go back to their house. Sam decided to go back to his house alongside his family. He already told sister Fiona to go back to her house but she should remember not to reveal anything right now.


    Regarding this he has a n and because of this Sam did not want anyone to reveal their power. Fiona and the others did not have any problem with that. Alena also decided to go back to her house to meet her sister. Naturally after bing Saints she also became busy and got only a few times to spend her time with her sister.


    Fortunately, her sister did notin anything about this and also Alena already had a n to arrange Sam as her sister''s teacher. He would be the perfect person. Also, Sam did not know but her sister is a big fan of the miracle maker.


    _______________________________


    Gloria and the others decided to go back to their room to freshen up and during the time Sam decided to watch the news. He already knows that the remaining saints are currently announcing their arrival and also announce the interrogation of those people who decided to follow the criminal path.


    Now this is a big matter even for Sam and he wanted to interrogate all those people. Before anything he wanted to find out if those people got influenced by anything or not. There could be a chance that all of those people were influenced by something.


    There could be a chance that those people were influenced by dark spiritual energy or simr things like this. There are many things present that can directly affect the mindset of any person and with these, the person willpletely change.


    So before deciding the punishment of those people who begin to follow the criminal path all the saints and Sam wanted to interrogate all those people. During all this time, Sam also decided to approach those people from others to ask them if they had anything to do.


    As you know all those people are currently in prison but all this time none of them have shown any kind of disappointment or anything like this. Instantly it looks like those people who are present in the prison get used to the prison life and have already befortable.


    This is a surprising matter even for Sam. He did not expect those people to enjoy prison life. Now there are two possibilities. The first possibility is that all those are just fake. Those people from the other wanted to do something and they just used that prison life as cover for them.


    But the second possibility is that he is enjoying prison life. If the second possibility is true then it looks like they already know that they got abandoned by theirs and if they wanted to survive on this then they needed to follow the rules of the Warrior Association.


    Sam decided to visit them before interrogating those people who decided to follow the criminal path. Now back to the main matter, Sam can already see the saints are giving their speech in front of those reporters.


    It looks like this is a shocking matter when those reporters and all the other people get to know about the arrival of the saints. Not only that they also get to know that the Saints secretly capture a huge number of those people who begin to abuse their power.


    This is a big relief for those normal people and those low-level Warriors. Because of the criminals, the lives of those normal people and those low-level Warriors be hell. Slowly those people also begin to lose their trust in the Warrior Association.


    But finally, all the saints came out from their seclusion and already captured a huge number of those people who began to abuse their power.


    Naturally, Saint John also told everyone that they were already watching over those other people who still had not been captured by them. Saint John also told all those people who were currently abusing their power toe to the warrior association and surrender themselves.


    With this, at least the punishment of those people will decrease. But if they did not surrender themself and got captured by the warrior association, then the punishment would not be light.


    Naturally by saying all of these Saint John wanted to scare those people who are currently following the path of criminals. You have to say that even though Saint John did not know because of him many people already became scared and they already decided to go to the warrior association to surrender themselves.


    One thing all those people realize is that those saints are back so definitely the miracle maker would be back right now. Seriously everybody gets to know that the miracle maker went into seclusion alongside all the saints. But as every saint currently present in front of the media and also told him about their return, definitely the miracle maker would be back right now.


    Even though those people previously did not fear those Warriors from the Warrior Association, everything is different right now and nobody wants to face the miracle maker or any of those Saints. But it looks like even though most of those criminals decided to surrender themselves, there are Sam people who did not want to surrender themselves.


    The reporters present in that ce ask many questions regarding those criminals and regarding the punishment that the Warrior Association is going to give all those criminals. Saint Markus at this time told those media reporters that the punishment would be dependent on the crime rate of those people.


    Naturally, before anything they are going to check the minds of those people. They will be doing that to make sure that none of the people get influenced by something. Like this sometimeter the meeting between the saints and those reporters is finished.


    With this John and others begin to leave the room. On the other hand, those media reporters begin to tell everyone about this with a smile. Finally, they can also rx and dy those saints to handle the criminals.


    Sometimeter Gloria and the others present inside the dining room to eat some food as every one of them is feeling very hungry. The good thing is that Sam has already prepared food for them. Sam already knows something like this is going to happen to them.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Even though none of them feel any kind of restriction during the time when they are attacking the barrier inside their inner world, it consumes a huge amount of stamina which needs some time to recover. Now in this time naturally Gloria and the others will be hungry.


    Sometimeter,


    "Today none of you are going to train inside the training room. I want all of you to rest today and start your training tomorrow. All of you just broke through today so you should give your body the proper rest.


    Also, you would not go inside the S-grade dungeon until you did not increase your control over your spiritual energy. All of you most likely realize that the control over your spiritual energy has already decreased. So in this situation, I don''t want any of you to go inside the dungeon.


    If required then I would be sparing with all of you but I want everyone to get used to your new power. Also, increase the control over your spiritual energy."


    Sam already told his family that none of them is allowed to practice today and also none of them is allowed to go inside the Dungeon for a few days. As they just break through to S-grade, they would need some time to regain full control over their spiritual energy. Experience tales at empire


    Also even though they somehow got familiar with their strength the familiarity is low. So before anything they increase the familiarity.


    Around 8:00 p.m. Sam decided to go to the Warrior Association. Markus and John are present in the ce while the other Saints are handling other matters. Except for Alena, everyone is present in that ce. If you are wondering about Alena, then she is resting in her house.

 Chapter 852 - Visiting the prison

    Currently, every one of them is discussing the special energy and what they should do with this. Naturally, nobody knows about the special energy that is present inside those peak A-grade warriors.


    But they cannot also reveal this information to everyone as first of all the situation of their is not good right now. Many people be unstable after bing powerful and at this time If those people somehow get to know about a method to be more powerful then that would be dangerous for everyone.


    "I think we should not directly reveal this information to anyone. I think we can use this as a reward system. Only those people who will have the highest points will get rewarded by us and the reward will be information about the special energy."


    " Hmmm¡­ but based on what, we will give the river to them? Naturally, we need to think of some kind of mission that will reward them."


    "Not only that, I think before giving this kind of reward, we need to check the minds of those people who somehow became unstable like this. I think all of you notice that every one of those people who became like this somehow became A-grade warriors.


    Every one of those people were previously B-grade warriors, but somehow every one of them became A-grade warriors. This is a really big surprise for everyone. Also, this could be the reason that those people lost their stability.


    So before giving any of this information we need to make sure that our other people did not suffer from this kind of situation."


    " Don''t worry about this as I already decided to read the minds of the people after finishing the meeting. I wanted to see if those people were influenced by something or someone.


    There could be a chance those dark humans are somehow able to influence those people by using their dark spiritual energy. Even though we cannot be sure about this, this is a possibility."


    "I already decided to talk to those people from others. I wanted to ask them if they knew about other people who are also like them from others or not. Even though I did not have that much expectation, I still wanted to see if I could get any kind of information from them or not."


    Like this after talking with each other for 30 minutes everyone. It was decided that they would use this information about the special energy as a reward. Only those people will get to know about those who have enough achievements and also those people who did not show any kind of instability.


    Sometimeter,


    Every one of them decided to go toward those people from others. Everyone wanted to know if those people had any kind of information rted to this or not. Sometimeter they finally came inside the prison cell. They can already see all those people from others currently present inside their prison.


    All those people already noticed Sam and the others. They instantly get up from their bed. Naturally, every one of them also became very confused about the sudden visit of all the Saints and the miracle maker.


    "None of you have to worry about anything. We already know none of you have any kind of ulterior motive against us. It is just that we came here for information."


    Markus said that to everyone to make sure that none of those people from others became scared and did not give them any information. Sometimes people be afraid or something like this and forget about much information that they know.


    It looks like those people already rxed after hearing the word Markus. But everyone is still looking at Sam. Everyone was mostly worried about the miracle maker present in front of them. Naturallypared to any of those saints, the miracle maker is the real danger that they need to be worried about.


    __________________________________n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Sometimeter,


    Markus already told them the reason. After hearing this, everyone from the others became serious and everyone began to think very carefully. Even though both parties cannot trust each other that easily but in this situation those people from others know that they need to trust those Saints.


    Markus already told him that if they were sessfully able to give them the information then the punishment of the people would decrease. Now this is really good news for all those people from others and because of this, every one of them started thinking very carefully about this.


    "I am sorry I don''t know anything about this as I never find any information on my."


    "Same, I also did not have any kind of information rted to these." Explore stories on empire


    Except for one person, all of them one by one told those saints that they did not know any information rted to this. Naturally, all the Saints and even Sam be disappointed after not finding any information regarding this.


    But at this time some notice that thest person who until now did not give many answers is still thinking about something. He quickly signals John and the others to stay there and wait for that person.


    Even though John and the others thought that this was pointless, they still decided to stay there to see what that person would say.


    10 minutester,


    "If I am not wrong then mostly I hear something regarding this matter. Compared to any of those people I would say my evolved recently and because of this I have more information rted to this.


    It has already been 80 years since my evolved like your. So we still have the history that tells us what happened after our sessfully evolved.


    First of all, we also get attacked by other warriors from others, naturally, we can defend ourselves and in the end, our sessfully evolves. Instantly this gives everyone present on that a gift which also helps every warrior of my to be powerful.


    After that nothing particr happened and everything went normally. At this time if I am not wrong then something simr happened to my where people begin to get overly excited or begin to follow this kind of thing. People begin to abuse their power.


    During this time our people from the Warrior Association decided to capture those people and also interrogate them. They also research those people very carefully and in the end, most likely they can find out the reason behind all of this.


    First of all, you should know that the density of The Spiritual energy has already increased. It is just not every human or other species would be able to handle the density which suddenly increases.


    The density of The Spiritual energy increases so quickly that it does not give our body the time to adjust to it. Not only that, in this dense energy, there is other energy also present. Dark energy is also one of them which is present in this Dense energy.


    As our body is kindly unable to handle the pressure right now it also begins to affect our body. Not just our bodies but even our minds are affected by this. Somehow the spiritual energy inside our body began to decrease the defense of our body which also made us vulnerable in front of that energy present in that sense spiritual energy.


    Like this our mental defense also bes weak and the dark energy instantly begins to affect our minds. Well, you should not say only dark energy but even our spiritual energy also begins to affect our mind.


    Naturally at this time if you give your body time to adjust with the surrounding density then you would not face this kind of problem. But it looks like when the evolved it already helped many people to be powerful, not only that many people after feeling the power wanted to be more powerful and decided to train hard.


    Which is bad for their body. Directly decrease the defense of their body and also they begin to get affected by all those kinds of spiritual energy. Somehow all those people will begin to follow The viin part while abusing their power will give them satisfaction.


    I did not know if all that information was true or not but if I am not wrong then I read all the information beforeing to your. At this time I became interested in the evolution of any so I read the details and got to know about all of this."


    After saying all of these thest person also became silent. Sam and the others after hearing all of this did not say anything and directly left the prison. Everybody is thinking about all the exnations of thatst person. One thing they are sure of is that there is some kind of truth in that exnation.


    Naturally, the density of The Spiritual energy suddenly increases and the body of all the people does not get that much time to adjust to the surrounding density. In this situation, many people once again decided to train very hard.

 Chapter 853 - The truth

    "I think he is telling the truth. From the moment our people indeed received power from the they did not stop even for a second. Somehow they began to focus on training more than before and wanted to increase their strength as much as they could.


    Naturally, there is a chance that they got affected by the Spiritual energy present on our which directly affects the minds of those people. It is just I don''t know if they got affected then why they begin to follow the path of criminals?"


    " I think it is because thatpared to any other spiritual energy the dark energy would be the one that will affect our mind. So I am thinking that as the density of The Spiritual energy decreases the defense of their body the dark energy present in the spiritual energy directly begins to affect the mind of the people.


    Because of this, those people are unable to think anything properly and begin to follow the path of criminals. It is a good thing that none of them enter the final stage where they almost forget about everything and bepletely mad.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    It is a good thing that we will find out about all of this. But still before deciding anything we need to observe those people and only then can wee up with an exnation."


    Naturally, they somehow feel the word of the people from others is true, and most likely because none of those people give their body the required time to adjust to the spiritual energy, those people receive Bacsh from The Spiritual energy and because of this, the situation bes like this.


    Naturally, they begin to approach those people as they already nned to read the minds of those people to see what kind of problem they have in their minds. Sam is also in prison at that ce and he also already uses the mind control technique to enter the mind of one of the people. Explore hidden tales at empire


    It did not take him that much time to enter the consciousness of that person and directly begin to go toward the center of the mind of the person. Well all this time when he approached the center of the mind, somehow Sam did not feel a single thing present in that ce.


    Naturally, every warrior has some kind of mental defense present inside their mind which also prevents them from getting controlled by any mind control attack or something like that. Unfortunately, this time when some approached the center of the mind he did not find anything like this.


    Naturally, he is surprised about this but at the same time, he already expected something like this to happen. Sometimeter, it finally came to the center of the mind of the person and began to read the memory of that person. Fortunately, the central area is not affected by anything.


    But the problem is that the moment he tries to extract the memory of that person something unexpected happens. Suddenly the surrounding area begins to change and also dark energy begins to appear in that ce.


    It did not take Sam that much time to absorb the dark spiritual energy and only then he began to read the memory of that person. Like this sometimeter Sam came outside of the mind of that person.


    Previously he told everyone not to read the minds of those people until he gave them the green signal. Naturally, nobody can give anyone the guarantee that they would not find any kind of dangerous thing present inside the mind of those people if they got influenced by something.


    This is the reason that Sam decided to first check the memory of those people and only then he will tell everyone if they should read the memory of those people or not. Markus and the others instantly ask him what he found after reading the memory of that person. Also, did he face any kind of abnormality when he read the mind of that person?


    Everyone began to ask him this kind of question. Sam just waits for them to finish asking all these questions.


    "First of all, I can say that those people from others are telling us the truth. If I am not wrong then really those people got affected by the density of The Spiritual energy and also the dark spiritual energy.


    I already read the memory of the person and from that memory, I can tell that in these few months, he did not do anything other than training. Most of the time he spends in the Forest of Beginning while training his body.


    It looks like the forest of the beginning also has some kind of healing property which also helps those people who train in that ce to recover their stamina and health more quickly. Because of this most of the people who came to that ce only focused on their training without thinking about anything.


    That person also spent most of his time in that forest from the beginning. But some days ago he decided toe back from the forest of the beginning. At first, he did not feel anything but suddenly he noticed something unexpected happen to his body.


    Unfortunately, it was already toote as the defense of his body already decreased. I also noticed that he was unable to think anything properly. At this time most likely that person got affected by the dark energy and it directly began to affect the thinking ability of that.


    Like this 30 minutester, finally, that person bes normal but the mindset of the person has already changed. He has already been affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    It Looks like the dark energy increases the negative thoughts in his mind and because of this, the person is unable to think anything properly and begins to abuse his power. Fortunately, I already absorbed the dark energy present inside the mind of this person, and looks like after these the person would need a good rest to recover from all of these.


    For now, we need to expel the dark energy present inside the minds of those people one by one. Naturally, it will take us a long time but still this is the only way to help those people.


    Also previously when I entered the mind of that person I did not feel anything wrong other than I did not feel any kind of barrier prison there to prevent me from approaching the center area. Like this, without any problem, I reach the center area.


    At that ce when I try to extract the memory of the person, suddenly the dark energy which previously affected the mind of that person appears there and begins to attack me. In the end it is unable to do anything, and I already expel that energy."


    Sam told what happened during the time when he went inside the mind of that person. He also told them what kind of information he was able to find after reading the memory of that person. With this information, he finally became sure that those people did not follow the path of evil by their own choice.


    Everyone became like this because of the influence of dark energy. Naturally, like The Spiritual energy, the amount of dark energy also increases on their alongside the density of the dark energy increases. Naturallypared to before the energy also became powerful and it will easily affect the minds of those people.


    Somehow after hearing all of this Markus and the others sigh in relief. Naturally, it is good news for everyone because their people did not be evil and began to abuse their power. It is just because those people wanted to increase their strength more quickly, they just got affected by the density of The Spiritual energy and became like this.


    They just need to help those people to get out of that situation and with this everything would be normal. Naturally, they also needed to capture those remaining people who still had not been captured by them. John and 4 more saints were given the duty to capture those people by Sam.


    This time he and the remaining Saints would be focused on helping those people toe out of the effects of the dark energy. On the other hand, they also needed to announce these to everyone so that they also realized that they needed to give their body the proper race to adjust to the surrounding density. They cannot just focus on their training without resting.


    They already decided to announce this information tomorrow and until then every one of them will be trying to recover as many Warriors as they can. With this wasting no time Sam already came in front of another person and put his hand on the forehead of that person.


    This time he doesn''t have to use the mind control technique and he could just directly send his spiritual energy inside the mind of that person to detect the dark energy and then absorb the dark energy.

 Chapter 854 - Capturing more people

    You can say that night Sam and others did not rest even for a second. They continuously begin to expel the dark energy from the minds of those people who are influenced by the dark energy.


    Naturally, this is not an easy thing for them to exin the dark energy from the minds of those people. Alena also joins them sometimeter when she gets to know about this.


    The good thing is that only a little bit of dark energy influences those people. Because of this, even though expelling dark energy is not easy for anyone, as only a little bit of dark energy influences the people, the saints did not take that much time to expel that dark energy.


    The next day, Your next chapter awaits on empire


    Finally, around 10:00 a.m. all the Saints get the time to rest. Yesterday around 10:00 p.m. they started expelling the dark energy from the minds of those people and it had already been 12 hours.


    You can already see that everybody has be exhausted. Normally they can stay awake and won''t feel any kind of exhaustion. But as you know yesterday they fully focused on expelling the dark energy which is a very hard process. Because of this, all of them became mentally exhausted.


    They would need the time to recover. Until then they also told all the Warriors who are present in the warrior association to take care of those people. Also, don''t let those people out of the Warrior Association until they do note back.


    With this one by one John and others went back to their house to sleep. Sam also goes back to his house. The good thing is that he already noticed that his parents and his sister are currently present in the dining room.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam also begins to eat breakfast with his family. At this time he also exined to everyone why he was unable toe back yesterday. Hearing the exnation Gloria and the others became very worried about this.


    They are also working hard from the moment they realize that they have be powerful with the help of their.


    "If I am not wrong then every one of those people who are around peak A-grade and unable to break through could not be able to get affected by these. First of all, they have that special energy present inside them. That special energy will give them additional production from this kind of thing.


    Because of this, all of those people who get influenced by dark energy are not around peak A-grade. They just recently broke through to A-grade. Not only those other people who also have the same situation can get affected by these.


    Naturally, everybody needs to understand that their body also needs time to adjust to the surrounding spiritual energy. You cannot just put your body in this kind of torture. With this naturally, your body is not able to protect you from this kind of thing.


    Previously I also checked the body of the people and I realized that somehow their foundation also got affected by these. The good thing is that they can still recover the damage that appears on their foundation but I am definitely sure that if they continue to stay like this then they woulde to a situation of they would not be able to recover."


    _________________________________


    Sam went back to his room to rest. Even though he is not feeling that much exhausted but still decides to rest to recover the lost mental energy and spiritual energy.


    While Sam and all the other saints are resting, all the people who previously got orders from the Saints already begin to follow those remaining people who got influenced by the dark energy. Even after getting influenced, those people still fear all the Saints.


    Because of this, somehow those people decided to hide themself. Unfortunately, they are still getting discovered by those people from the Warrior Association. People from the Warrior Association watched over them from the start and just waited for the order of the Saints to capture them.


    Around 4:00 p.m. finally, all the saints came back to the Warrior Association. Immediately those Warriors who follow those remaining people who got influenced by the dark spiritual energy already inform them about their recent activity.


    Hearing this all the saints decided to act. They immediately told those people not to react or do anything until they did not reach that ce. Naturally, the Saints did not want the Warriors of the Warrior Association to directly attack those people.


    First of all, those people who were influenced by the dark energy will not hold back when they fight against those Warriors of the Warrior Association.


    It would be different when those Warriors of the Warrior Association were fighting those people. Naturally, they will try to hold back. Because of this, all the saints decided to participate in this.


    Around 8:00 p.m., finally, everyone came back to the Warrior Association. Alongside them, you can see many more people getting captured by those Warriors of the Warrior Association. Every one of those people was influenced by the dark energy and naturally, they needed to heal.


    Sam also finally came back to the Warrior Association and currently, he is observing those people who just recently recovered from the influence of dark energy. Sam wanted to know if those people had any kind of side effects.


    It is possible that they would receive some kind of side effect after getting in by the dark energy. But fortunately, Sam did not notice anything like this. He only found that some cells in their head were just able to get damaged but because they were able to expel the dark energy nothing bad happened to those people.


    But still, none of them are allowed to go back to their house until Sam does not permit them. Naturally, those people who are present in the Warrior Association already get to know what happened to them. At this time they also recover all the memories and almost feel guilty about all the things they have done.n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Fortunately, Sam told him that they did not have to think about this as they were influenced by the dark energy. Currently, they should focus on resting. They should keep their body the time to adjust to the surrounding spiritual energy. With this Sam decided to approach those newly arrived people to help them.


    ______________________________________


    "With this, we already capture all of those people who got influenced by dark energy. We still cannot give a guarantee that these are the only people who were influenced by dark energy.


    There could be a chance that many more people also got influenced by dark energy. It is just that none of them abused their power. We did not have any kind of information about them.


    Sigh, even if we try to observe every human then it would take us a huge time. Also other than this, we did not have any other way to find out if any of them got influenced by the dark energy or not. Do you have any way to find out about this?"


    Markus all of these to Sam and also asks him if he knows how to find out about those people who got influenced by the dark energy.


    "Hmm¡­ I have something but I don''t know if it will help us or not. Fortunately, we still have one person who did not get recovered by us. Before anything I need to check the device on that person to see if it will work or not."


    After saying all of this Sam decided to bring out the live detection device. Naturally, this is not your normal life detection device. This is the device created by the human king in Terraria. This life-detection device also has a way to find dark energy.


    Sam used that device on that person who still did not recover. He would have already been recovered by the Saints but suddenly some remember about the device and he stops the Saints.


    With this, he instantly activates the device and you can already see everyone present in the warrior association. You can see all the Warriors showing deep blue color. While all the Saints showed light blue color. At this time Sam and all the same weekly noticed the direction where that person is right now and saw that person also showing a deep blue color.


    But suddenly they noticed in the deep blue color they could also see a ck color. Sam sighs in relief. Finally, he can say for sure that by using this device they would be able to find out all the people who got influenced by the dark energy. Also at this time, John informed everyone that sometimeter they once again needed to inform the media to broadcast this news.


    Naturally, everybody needed to know what happened to those warriors. All the family members of those Warriors who got influenced by the dark energy became fully shocked when they got to know that those people began to abuse their power.

 Chapter 855 - Telling everyone

    "All of you must be wondering why suddenly we call all of you once again inside the warrior Association. Actually we found something after investigating those people who begin to abuse their power.


    Currently we have good news and we have bad news. Good news is that none of those people who abuse their power did something like this on their own. You can say they got influenced after getting affected by the dark spiritual energy. Also we already help them to recover from that influence.


    The bad news is that there are many people who can also get affected like this by the dark spiritual energy.


    All of you must be wondering why something like this is happening. Before telling you we should start from the beginning. Actually from the moment everyone receives help from our to break through, we be more focused on our training to be stronger.


    Unfortunately, because of this everyone of us forget about a very important matter. We forget about resting our body so that it can adjust itself with the surrounding spiritual energy.


    Everyone of you can tell that the density of The Spiritual energy increases from the moment our sessfully evolves. Unfortunately we be so busy in our training that we did not even give our body the proper rest that it would need to adjust itself with the surrounding atmosphere.


    With this everyone of us gets affected by the density of The Spiritual energy. Many of you most likely already feel that somehow all of you have traveled absorbing spiritual energy.


    It is natural because our body gets affected by the density of The Spiritual energy as it is unable to adjust itself. Our foundation is also getting affected by these and receiving damage. Most likely all of you already realize how bad it is. What would happen if your foundation got seriously damaged by this.


    Now back to the main matter, all of you must be wondering why those people begin to abuse their power and also what is the connection between this matter and those people who started abusing their power.


    First of all the connection is that all those people also did the same thing as everyone of you. It is just that everyone puts more pressure on their body. Because of this, their foundation already got damaged.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Not only that, the body differences of those people also begin to decrease. In this situation even if they try to use any kind of body protection technique, that could not be useful as they already have a weak body.


    Now as you can understand the defense of their body begins to decrease, it also begins to affect the mental defense of these people. Also all of you should understand not just only The Spiritual energy but the dark spiritual energy and many different types spiritual energy also increases.


    They be more powerful and as those people begin to lose the mental defense they had previously, the dark spiritual energy begins to affect the mind of those people. You can say that the more the mental difference gets weaker the more dark energy is able to affect the mind of those people.


    Negative thoughts begin to affect everyone. They did not have the ability to think about anything properly at this moment. They already lost their consciousness and a second kind of personality appeared in their body. That second personality is full of evil and they begin to abuse the power of those Warriors.


    Fortunately, somehow we will find all of these and also be able to help all of those people toe back to their senses."


    After saying all of these Markus became silent for a few seconds. Naturally he wanted to give everyone the time to digest all of this information. Even those people from news channels needed some time to digest all the information.


    30 secondter,


    "Now before anything I want to talk to everyone of those people who are the family members of the people who previously began abusing power. I hope everyone of you is currently watching this broadcast.


    I think all of you have already heard my exnation and already know what happened to your family member. Most likely meaning of you already feeling ashamed after seeing the behavior of your family member. As you can understand none of them were conscious at this time.


    They did not even know what they did while they were affected by the dark energy. I hope if any of you are angry with your family member or begin to hate your family member, then please forgive everyone of them.


    Nobody predicted something like this would happen and this is a really dangerous thing for all of us. I am not just only asking those family members. But I am asking everyone to forgive those people who abuse their power.


    None of them were in their consciousness. Also the same thing would happen to you and one thing I could say for sure that all of you needed to give your body proper rest for a few days. If you continuously put your body impression like this, then all of you will go through the same situation.


    I hope everyone understands the seriousness of this matter. For now every Warriors should give their body almost 15 days proper rest. In these 15 days none of you have the permission to put any kind of pressure on your body.


    Many people are most likely present inside the Dungeon. But don''t worry the warrior Association will inform everyone of them. All of you just need to follow these duties for 15 days and after that all of you can start training once again. You just need to give your body the time to adjust itself with the surrounding area which suddenly changes.


    Now I also wanted to ask everyone of you if you have any kind of information about this kind of people who began to abuse their power or suddenly began to show a different kind of personality, then immediately in from the warrior Association.


    Naturally we cannot be sure that we are able to help every one of those people who are affected by dark energy. Because of this if any of you suddenly feel that the person beside you begins to behave suspiciously, then immediately contact the warrior Association.


    During these 15 days as I told you you are not allowed to practice anything but all of you should meditate properly. During the meditation don''t use any kind of technique. You just need to meditate to maintain your calmness.


    Naturally you do not get the chance to examine everyone and tell what is the situation of your body right now. One thing I could say is that after a proper rest all of you will feel that some kind of burden has been lifted away from your body."


    Saying all of this, Markus finally finishes the exnation. Beside Markus, you can also see all the other saints are also present in that ce. Naturally, all of them also have the same Idea as Markus. Sam is also present in that ce and naturally all the people from the news channel also show the expression of Sam.


    Back to main matter,


    One thing you can say after hearing all this information, all the people who are currently watching the news became silent and did not know what to say in this matter. This is apletely unexpected thing for all of them. They never thought something like this would happen to them because none of them rested properly.


    Without wasting a single second everyone of those people decided to stop their training. Naturally they also already got called by their family member who also told them toe back to their house to rest. Suddenly the warrior Association begins to receive different calls from the family members of those people who are currently present in the warrior Association.


    Naturally as everybody finally understands what happened, they also begin to worry about all the people who are currently present in the warrior association.


    Experience new tales on empire


    On the other hand,


    Meaning those media reporters have many questions that they wanted to ask the saints. Markus and others did n''t have any problem with this and they let the people ask all the questions.


    Finally 30 minutester the meeting is over and one by one all the saints already leave that ce. They will not go back to their house as before anything they decided that they would observe the whole safe before doing any other thing.


    As they would not be able to cover the whole safe zone at once they decided to go into a separate direction. With this, they would be able to observe the whole safe zone. At this time, Sam also told glory and the others to rest. Even thoughpared to any of those people all of them are in good condition, still Sam decided that it would be good if they decided to rest.

 Chapter 856 - Serious condition

    "It is really surprising that I still did not get to know about those many people who begin to act suspiciously. It is a good thing that hearing the information, all of our people became serious and they informed us all of this."


    "Sigh, it is really an unbelievable thing. Even though this is a good thing that everyone is working very hard, because of their hard work they could be in danger. It is a good thing that we can find out about this. At least with this, we would be able to help everyone."


    Inside the Warrior Association, John and the others are busy helping those people who are affected by the dark spiritual energy. Some time ago they finished exining the reason and not long after that, they were informed by many people that more people also began to act suspiciously.


    Immediately the Warrior Association takes action and brings those people inside the Warrior Association. After that, John and the others use the mind control technique and find out that those people also got affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    He is really an unbelievable thing. Hey never thought even those people who did not abuse their power could get affected by the dark spiritual energy. It is a good thing that with this they could tell every one of their people working very hard, unfortunately, this also became a dangerous thing for everyone.


    Fortunately, they were able to find out about this. They did not want to imagine what would happen to those people if they were unable to find out about this. There could be a chance the foundation of the people has already been destroyed. In the end, those people can also die.


    You have to say that the information about this matter caused a very big sensation among all the people. Many people became very scared after hearing all this information. Those people who did not get affected by the dark spiritual energy immediately decided to take rest.


    All of them already decided to rest for almost 20 days before starting their training. On the other hand, the Warriors of the Warrior Association already went inside those Dungeons. Many Warriors went inside those dungeons, and naturally, the Warriors of the Warrior Association wanted to inform them and needed to bring them outside of the dungeon.


    The next day,


    Compared to yesterday, today everything finally calmed down. The good thing is that every Warriors yer decided to take a rest. When they heard the suggestion from the Warrior Association, those people decided to take a rest for almost 20 days. At the same time, many of those people also visited the Warrior Association or the Medical Association.


    Before anything, all of those people wanted to make sure that many of them were affected by the dark energy. Fortunately, only 5% of those people got affected by the dark energy or were just about to get affected by the dark energy. Other than them the remaining 95% of people are saved.


    Immediately Sam came to the Medical Association and then helped those 5% of people. Well, the good thing is that those people just started getting affected by the dark energy so it did not affect them that much. With this, those people did not have that much damage in their potential.


    Sam even told his parents and sisters to rest. He even visited Alexa and the others and told them not to practice for 20 days. Naturally, the annual collegepetition would be starting once again.


    Alexa, Elena, and the others did not have any ns to participate in the annual collegepetition. First of all, you need to understand that even 4th year students would not be able to challenge them. Because of this all 10 of them feel that they should not participate in thepetition.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Well, Sam also did not have any problem with this. He just told him that they should rest properly for 20 days. Sam did not directly go back to the Warrior Association or his house. He decided to spend today with his friends.


    Somehow Sam just became busy once again. Because of this, it became hard for him to spend his time with his friends and family. Also, he already started searching for that from where his mother came to Eden Blue. Before going to the he wanted to spend his time with his friends and family.


    _________________________


    "Sigh, this is an unbelievable thing. Whoever thinks working hard can also be dangerous. Fortunately, you and all the saints were able to find out about this."


    Tony said that while releasing a deep breath. Well, even they cannot give the guarantee that they would not get affected by the dark spiritual energy. Even if they do not participate in the annual collegepetition, all of them want to be powerful.


    Because of this from the start they also worked very hard. Fortunately, none of them get affected by the dark spiritual energy as from time to time they will also take rest. Even if they just take rest for one day at least with this they only receive a little bit of damage in their foundation.


    Sometimeter all 11 of them decided that they would be visiting the movie theater. Well, this will be a long time since he will be enjoying his day with his friend like this. He still remembers that for the first time when he came to the city and got to know Elena and the others, he also went outside the Academy to rooms around the city like this. He already remembers those nostalgic moments.


    __________________________


    Naturally, Sam already checked the status of his friends and after looking at the studies he became sure that none of them were affected by the dark energy. But their bodies have already started receiving damage from the dark spiritual energy and the density of the normal spiritual energy.


    So they should immediately stop putting pressure on their body as it will make the situation worse. First of all the body difference will be decreasing and secondly the foundation will get seriously damaged by these. If the body difference and the mental defense are affected by these then they will easily get affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    If the foundation got damaged by this, then there would be a chance that they would not be able to follow the warrior bath. Because of this, it is really necessary for all of them to rest their body.


    Sam also told him that if he got time he would be visiting their home. The family members of his friends wanted to meet him so as their good friend it was their responsibility to meet those parents.


    Like this around 8:00 p.m. finally he decided to go back to his house. Hina, Victor, and Gloria are currently present in the hall room and looking at the TV. They are looking at the news channel to see what is happening right now.


    Naturally, all three of them had already been informed that they needed to be raised for 20 days. Take and also see in the news channel how many people got affected by the dark spiritual energy and how many people are very close to getting fully controlled by the dark spiritual energy.


    Even three of them became worried after the year about the number of those people who got affected by the dark spiritual energy. Almost 5000 of the people were affected. Not only that, the news channels also begin to show the report about those Dungeons with dark spiritual energy.


    It Looks like those people who previously went inside those Dungeons were mostly affected by the dark energy alongside those people who were present close to that Dungeon. The simrity between those people who be mad and begin to abuse their power is that all of them have traces of dark energy present in their minds.


    Sam did not waste a single second and helped everyone. You can say that evenpared to those people who begin to abuse their power, the situation of the people who go inside those dungeons with dark spiritual energy bes much more dangerous.


    It looks like even though some show people trying to protect their minds using mind protection techniques, unfortunately, their body is already affected by dark spiritual energy. The foundation of those Warriors has already been seriously damaged by the dark spiritual energy.


    Not just only the dark spiritual but even the normal spiritual energy began to affect the body of the people. Even a muscr person bes thin. It Looks like everyone has already lost their physical strength.


    Extracting dark spiritual energy from the body of those people was a very dangerous thing to do. It looks like dark energy is also beginning to affect the energy system of those people. Fortunately in the end Sam can extract the dark energy from the body of the people. But those people needed some time to recover. They almost needed 2 months to restpletely.

 Chapter 857 - A normal day and birthday party

    10 dayster,


    Finally, everything is over as they are already able to help every one of those people who got affected by the dark spiritual energy. Also, everybody decides to take a few days rest and give their body the proper time to adjust itself to the surrounding density of spiritual energy.


    During that time, many people also came to the Warrior Association and the Medical Association to get checked. 90% of those people did not get affected by the dark spiritual energy but only 10% of those people somehow got affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    But finally, almost every person in Eden Blue is free from the effect of dark spiritual energy. Also, those people who previously went inside those Dungeons where you would only find those Monsters who can use dark spiritual energy, have already begun to recover.


    Those are the people who get more affectedpared to any of those other Warriors. Fortunately, none of them decided to abuse their power or did something that could make them regret it.


    All those people currently present in the Warrior Association while those previous people who were abusing their power have already been released. But none of them is allowed to practice or do anything for 20 days. You have to say that, at first, those people were confused butter they realized what they did.


    Now that was a pretty bad experience for everyone. Fortunately, they were able to ovee that. It is a good thing that during all this time nobody lost their life or any casualty like this happened. Because of this, those people who were affected by the dark energy were able to recover quickly.


    For the first 5 days, Sam was busy but after that he became free. So in these 5 days, he decided to ask those people from others about the from where his mother came to Eden Blue. As you can predict he is searching for Ratus.


    Unfortunately, it looks like none of them know anything about that. Well even though it made him quite disappointed, he did not give up on this. He still has a Trump card. Actually, he has amunication device that can help himmunicate with the human king and the Oni king.


    As you can predict it is themunication given by them when he decided to teleport from Terraria to Eden Blue. Well, Sam decided to see if he could find any information regarding that without contacting them, unfortunately, it looks like without contacting them he would not be able to find out about that.


    At any condition, he wanted to go to that to deal with that person who previously almost killed his mother. It is just before going to that he needed to stabilize the condition of his.


    Sam already predicted that a few dayster because of the evolution of their new Dungeons would appear on their. He was just waiting for that and also wanted to see if any other mutation appeared in the danger zone or not.


    There could be a chance that new Monsters appear in the danger zone and like 500 years ago portals begin to appear on their and from those portals Monsters begin toe out. This is the reason that he did not contact the human king or the Oni king.


    _____________________________


    Around 5:00 p.m. you can see Sam and his family going somewhere. Sometimeter, you can see they almost reach someone''s house. Actually, they receive an invitation from Fiona and her family. Today is her birthday and because of this, her family decided to invite them as Fiona almost became the second daughter of Hina and Victor.


    Not just only then but even Sam got invited to that party. Naturally because of Sam, all of them became close to each other. With this, one by one everyone began toe to Fiona''s house.


    One thing you should know is that until now the Warrior Association has not announced the breakthrough of Gloria and the others. Before anything they wanted the situation to calm down. Naturally if suddenly those people who got affected by the dark spiritual energy hear about this news, they will be anxious.


    Previously the Warrior Association could give guarantees about the mentality of those people. But after getting affected by the dark spiritual energy, nobody can keep a guarantee about their mentality. So there is a chance those people got affected by these and somehow they started training once again while putting more pressure on their bodies.


    Because of this, Sam and everyone decided to wait for a few more days before announcing about that. Even Alexa and the others did not know about this. Even though he has full trust in his friends, he decides until the Warrior Association does not reveal anything he will not tell anyone about this.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Now back to the main matter,


    Around 7:30 p.m., they finally reach Fiona''s house. Fiona and her father came there personally to receive Gloria and her family. Compared to Sam or their parents, Gloria is more familiar with Fiona''s friend.


    At this time, Fiona''s father also came to Sam and personally greeted him. For now, you can say the reputation of Sam is much greaterpared to the saints. So who doesn''t want to meet him and make connections with him?


    He is the person called the miracle maker and he is the person who is currently the strongest present on their. Even all the saints would not be able to defeat him even if they teamed up with each other.


    Sam is the person who previously protected all of them from those Monsters. He is the person who helps everyone to build those strongholds. He is the person who did not think about his life and fought a powerful Monster that almost killed him. All of this achievement really makes him more respectable.


    Sometimeter all of them finally came inside Fiona''s house. The good thing is that they did not see that many people present in that ce. Well, Fiona already informed them that they did not invite that many people. Also as she already knew Sam did not like that much attention, she already informed him about this. Only those people who are close to her and her family got invited to that party.


    Normally, only a few warriors will celebrate their birthday party like this. But as suddenly everyone did not have permission to train or do anything that could put pressure on their body, everybody decided to rx. This is the reason that Fiona''s family also decided to arrange the birthday party.


    Sometimeter,


    Alexa and all of his friends also came there alongside their family members. They also came to Sam and greeted him. They also created his family. Like this, one by one everyone gets to know each other.


    Sam and his friends on the other hand decided to roam around the hall room. Currently, they are discussing various things. Also from time to time, Sam also tells them about his experience when he went to Terraria.


    He already told them how Terraria is different from Eden Blue. How it is difficult for them to find traces of a dungeon inside Terraria. How dangerous it is to go inside the Dungeon on that. Also, he talked about those kingdoms present on that.


    Even though Terraria is mode in formpared to Eden Blue, that still has various Kingdoms. The good thing is that the Warrior Association has the responsibility to maintain peace among all the kingdoms.


    On the other hand, Alexa, Tony, Jeni, and the others also talk about their adventure during all these 3 years. Even though most of the time they were depressed that they were unable to find any information about him, this did not make him give up On anything. Instead all of them result in working very hard to be powerful.


    They had already gone inside all the D-grade Dungeons. Not only that, they also go inside almost every C-grade Dungeon. Naturally, they receive help from their teachers. All of them also begin to talk about various Monsters that they have faced inside those dungeons.


    Sometimes they also needed to fight Monsters inside underwater. Naturally fighting them was dangerous and because of this they always attracted the attention of those Monsters and brought them to the surface area. This is the best way to 5 those Monsters who stay underwater.


    You really have to say that during that time every Warrior was very serious. Nobody knows where and when they will get attacked by those people from others. They already get to know the motive of those people and because of this, for these 3 years, almost everyone stays in fear.


    Finally, everything is over and everybody can rx. At this time Tony and the others also told Sam that it was possible they also wanted to go to differents.

 Chapter 858 - Alexa vs Tony

    Almost one monthter, finally, everyone gets permission from the warrior association to start their training. Finally, the Warrior Association did not have to worry about the safety of the people.


    Every one of those warriors already became strong both physically and mentally. In this situation, getting affected by dark Energy is very low. This is the result that everybody wanted. With this finally, they can go back inside the Dungeon or start their training.


    Gloria and Fiona decided to train for a few days before going inside the Dungeon. Hina and Victor also have the same n as them. 4 of them naturally n to go inside those S-grade Dungeons.


    Because they already be S-grade Warriors, it would not be useful for them if they decide to go to those A-grade dungeons. Because of this, all of them wanted to go inside those dungeons. But before that, they need to ovee those weaknesses that previously Sam told them.


    First of all, all of them have low control over their spiritual energy. They also need to practice their techniques by using their new power. Through this, they will get familiar with their techniques and will be able to bring out more power behind their attack.


    Until now the Warrior Association did not announce the news about Gloria and others. Well, the Warrior Association wanted to wait for a few more days. Markus also decided that he would be helping those other Warriors to break through to S-grade.


    But naturally, those people needed to have enough achievement, and also the Warrior Association will be checking the background of those people. If you do not have a bad reputation or anything like this, you will easily receive help from the Warrior Association.


    Unfortunately, there are many people with bad records. Those people will not receive any help from the Warrior Association. Naturally, they can try to find limit breakers to break through. When they use limit breakers to break through, the special energy present inside their body will disappear automatically.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Back to the main matter,


    Sam is currently present inside his room and he is meditating right now. As you know from the moment he came to Eden Blue, he became busy with many different works. He also did not get the time to focus on himself to improve himself.


    Currently, he wants to achieve full control over his spiritual energy. These would be the key to bringing out the full power behind his attacks. On the other hand, he also decided to help his friends to train. He also decided to bring them inside a Dungeon.


    Even though all of them have a part to protect themselves, suddenly they tell Sam to bring them inside a powerful Dungeon. Well, none of the movies entered the annual collegepetition.


    Even if they did not enter the annual collegepetition, you can easily predict who would be the winner. Even though from the moment Eden Blue evolves, many people begin to be powerful. Still, all of them would qualify for the final match if they participated in the annual collegepetition.


    Because of this, at that time Jeni and others wanted to stay inside the dungeon. Naturally, none of them is interested in the annual collegepetition. Compared to the annual collegepetition, all of them are interested in facing Monsters.


    One thing you say is that after their evolved, The Monster inside those Dungeons also began to be powerful. On the other hand even though until now he didn''t see any sign of a new Dungeon, Sam is 100% sure that a new dungeon would appear on their.


    ________________________________


    Alexa and Tony are currently fighting each other while Jeni and others present there to observe them. Sam is also present in that training room to observe both of his friends. Naturally, he wanted to see if he could find the weakness of Toni and Alexa.


    Both of them would be happy after getting his opinion about their improvement and their weaknesses. Who does not want to know about their weaknesses and wants to improve on that matter?


    Because of this, both of them ask Sam to be present there. On the other hand, if you are wondering about the teachers of Alexa and the others, then none of those features have any problem if their students receive help from the miracle maker.


    Alsopared to any of the teachers, Sam''s help and opinions are more useful for all of them. Sam, who already decided to take his friends inside the Dungeon, is also thinking about the annual collegepetition.


    Once again he got an invitation from the Warrior Association as a guest during the annual collegepetition. Fortunately, he did not need to stay there every day.


    Back to the main matter,


    Tony and Alexa are closed-distance Warriors. Even though both of them can also use long-distance attacks that they learn from Sam, both of them still prefer to fight in closebat.


    Both of their weapons are currently glowing in sky blue color. Both of them also create powerful impacts on the surrounding area after when both of their attacks sh against each other. Fortunately, Sam is present in that ce and he is already over the whole battle with a barrier.


    With this, none of those impacts will be affecting the surrounding area and both Tony and Alexa can fully focus their mind on the fight. Both of them quickly back down and once again disappear from their ce.


    In the next second, once again both of them sh against each other. Like this, both of them continuously attack each other and try to gain the upper hand against each other. The problem is that both of them already know about each other and this is the reason both of them did not get the upper hand.


    1 hourter, suddenly Tony got distracted for a second and Alexa used that chance to get the upper hand. It sends him backward and Alexa, without giving him the time to adjust himself, uses the movement technique to approach Tony.


    After approaching Tony, without wasting a single second Alexa begins to attack him. Less than a secondter, she almost swung her sword 20 times toward Tony. Naturally Tony also did not stay ideal and he also counterattacked.


    It is just as he did not get to stabilize himself he is still unable to protect himself properly in front of those attacks. Even those he was able to count attacked a few swings, but in the end, he once again got hit by those sword swings.


    "Boom!!!"


    In the next second, Tony hit the ground, and a huge impact was created on that ce. The ce where hended also got covered by ayer of dust. At this time Alexa did not try to attack him. She just wanted to know Tony''s situation right now.


    2 minutester finally theyer of dust began to fade away and only then did she get the chance to see what kind of situation appeared with Tony. Tony had already gotten up from the ground but the ce where he was standing right now had already been destroyed.


    The cement and bricks present in that area have already been destroyed and a huge hole appears in that ce. But on the other hand, if you look at Tony then you can see he is quite injured as he is already bleeding.


    Fortunately, Alexa gave him enough time to heal from those injuries. Not only that, you can see Tony''s fighting speed suddenly increase. Tony already realized due to his mistake Alexa got The upper hand at that time.


    Your adventure continues at empire


    So he is already determined not to make mistakes like that. Even if he bes exhausted he will not get distracted like this. With this even if he is out of spiritual energy, he can just use his physical strength to fight back.


    Once again both of them decided to approach each other and this time it looks like both of them also bring out more power behind their attacks. Both of them use a lot of techniques at once while they approach each other. Two huge energy fluctuations appear in that ce.


    It Looked like both of them wanted to see who would win this final and who would lose this fight through this final attack. Both of them already became exhausted after fighting for 1 hour. Well, not that they became fully exhausted but still they decided to finish the fight with their final attack.


    In the next second a huge explosion appeared in that ce. Not just only that explosion but the impact which was created by that explosion almost destroyed everything present in the training room. Fortunately, Sam already created a barrier around both of them and because of this, the impact was not able to affect the other area.


    Sam already deactivated the barrier when he noticed the impact was already reduced. Currently both Tony and Alexa are holding on. None of them wanted to back down.

 Chapter 859 - Earthquake

    Both Tony and Alexa are exhausted but it looks like Alexa has the advantage in the end. After getting affected by Alexa''s attack Tony receives some damage and that also gives her the advantage.


    In the end, he was unable to hold back and sted away from that ce. Fortunately, Sam already reacted and appeared behind Tony before he could hit the wall behind him. Not only that he already brings out the healing potion and gives that to Tony.


    With that, the spar is finally finished and Alexa is the final winner. Jeni everyone came toward Tony and Alexa to see their situation. Naturally, none of them wanted their friends to get seriously injured. Your next journey awaits at empire


    Fortunately, both of them are okay and both of them already use healing potions and self-recovery techniques. With this, in no time both of them recovered from the injuries that they had received during the sparring session.


    "Both of them have already improvedpared to before. To tell you the truth I can tell both of you also ovee those weaknesses that I previously told you about. Still, I think it will take some more time for both of you to ovee those weaknesses properly.


    During the time when Tony attacks Alexa, I notice some disturbance in his spiritual energy system. It looks like spiritual energy in your body wasn''t in your control. Opportunity only happens for a few seconds and after that everything bes normal.


    Nothing is that you already got affected by these and every time you use a technique simr things happen to your body. These also prevent you from bringing out your full power.


    Naturally, these also affect your body and with this, it will consume your stamina much faster than before. If I am not wrong thenpared to Alexa, Tony is feeling muscle pain or something like this after. Well, this is also happening because somehow your muscles get affected by the Spiritual energy.


    Naturally, to ovee this you needed to focus on your spiritual energy control. It Looks like your spiritual energy control is still weakpared to the power of your spiritual energy. But I can tell you will easily ovee this.


    The next matter is that, sometimes during the fight, you will get distracted. This is also a reason that Alexa gets the advantage and manages to injure you that quickly. Even though you try to fight back after losing your stability, it would be hard for you or any other person to fight like this.


    Alexa on the other hand has good control over her spiritual energy. It looks like did not bring that much spiritual energy while trying to reach the maximum power behind her techniques. This also prevents you from bringing out your full power.


    Other than that I also noticed that you did not properly channel your spiritual energy into your whole body. As I told you before, this thing will help you increase your power more than before. You can say this will also give you a sudden power boost.


    On the other hand, try not to forcefully use your spiritual energy like this. It can damage your body. Before anything you need to ovee the ends and also need to focus on naturally bringing out the required amount of spiritual energy that will help you bring out the full power of your techniques.


    During the fight, if you try to forcefully use more spiritual energy, it can also harm your body."


    With this, Sam finally finishes exining the weaknesses and mistakes both of them have made during the fight. Tony and Alexa noted down all the details that Sam told them. Well, all that information is very important for both of them.


    Sometimeter,


    Tony and Alexa are currently resting not far away from the main battle ring. Beside them, you can see Kenny, Tina, and The others are present. Well, all of them are currently focusing on the battle ring where you can see Jeni and Elena are present right now.


    This is the time for Jeni and Elena to fight each other. All of them will be fighting each other and Sam will be the referee and observer. This is Sam''s Idea as with this he also gets to know how much improvement his friends have made.


    ____________________________________


    For the whole day, Sam just acts as a referee and the observer. From first tost he observed the sparring session between his friends. Like this, whenever his friends finish sparing, he will tell them about the mistakes they have made and also tell him about their weaknesses.


    Finally, around 8:00 p.m. everyone had already finished fighting each other and it was time to eat something. After fighting each other for that long, all of them felt very hungry. All this time none of them leave the training room to eat something and this is the reason all of them are feeling very hungry.


    All of them decided to go to a restaurant to eat something. Now it is rare for them to go to a restaurant like this. As you know most of the time Tony and the others will focus on their training and they naturally did not have that much time to go to a restaurant to eat something.


    But, sometimes they also needed to rx. Also, Sam is present with them so naturally it is time to celebrate. Like this around 8:30 p.m., every one of them leaves the training room and then begins to go toward the restaurant.


    If you are wondering about the training room then it is present inside the Royal Academy. Fortunately, not far away from the Royal Academy, you can find many restaurants.


    ______________________________________


    Currently, John and the others are in the danger zone to see what kind of mutation happens to those Monsters. Daily those Monsters getting powerful. Sometimes even Markus and the others also became envious. Those Monsters can easily absorb The Spiritual energy without needing to absorb those crystals.


    It ismonly different when those humans want to absorb spiritual energy. This is also a reason that those Monsters can rapidly improve themselves. Many of those Monsters already reached intermediate S-grade. Many of them even try to attack the safe zone, but fortunately, all the Saints easily handle those Monsters.


    But the surprising thing is that even with that the number of those Monsters did not decrease. This is a mystery to everyone about how Monsters are born. Why does their number never decrease?n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Previously many people also tried to find out about this but in the end, they did not find anything. On the other hand inside the safe zone, from the moment all the Warriors get permission to practice once again, many of them already decided to go inside the Dungeons to fight those Monsters.


    Naturally, everybody wanted to see how much they had improved after their body got adjusted to the surrounding atmosphere. Everyone can already feel the improvement in their status. All of this happened due to their body getting adjusted to the density of spiritual energy.


    __________________________________


    Sam on the other hand contacted Markus. Actually, Sam wanted to find out any kind of details when he saw Eden Blue for the first time. There could be a chance that she brings something here that will indicate the location of that.


    Until now nobody was able to tell the location of that and this is the reason that until now Sam was not able to go to that. Also, Sam is confused about one thing that he wants to figure out.


    You wanted to know how his mother suddenly came to Eden Blue. Sam wanted to know if there was any reason behind this. What if his mother and everyone did not know about that motive? Well, Sam also begins to think about those kinds of questions. Unfortunately, he did not get the answer to those questions.


    Sam came back to his senses when suddenly he heard the voice of Alexa. With this Sam once again focuses on his food. It took them some time to finish those foods and after that, they decided to leave the restaurant to go back to their home.


    But before they can go back to their home something unexpected happens. Everybody began to feel a powerful energy fluctuation that appeared on their. The whole world was affected by an earthquake. Immediately Sam told everyone to stay very careful. On the other hand, he immediately flies in the sky and then directly goes toward the direction of the earthquake.


    The sudden appearance of that earthquake made him serious. Naturally, he wanted to see if some kind of danger appeared on his or not. Actually not just only him, but not all Saints also begin to fly toward that ce to see what is happening.


    They can also use the teleportation technique, but the problem is that they do not know the location of the ce where the earthquake appeared. With this, it would be safe if they decided to fly to that ce.

 Chapter 860 - New Dungeon

    Sam, Markus, John, Alena, Veena, and all the saints finally came to the ce. This is the ce that is the source of the earthquake which already affected the whole once again. Even the danger zone is getting affected by the earthquake.


    At the same time, everyone can also feel that a spiritual fluctuation also appears on their. The source of that spiritual fluctuation is not any technique or anything like that. From the moment the earthquake begins to affect the whole spiritual fluctuation also appears.


    "Sam, can you tell us anything about this?"


    Markus asks that question to Sam. Naturally, none of them can predict what is happening right now. So they decided to ask Sam to see if he knew anything about this or not.


    Unfortunately, Sam shook his head. Even he did not know what was happening right now. With this, all the Saints became more serious. Every one of them already prepared themselves to fight. Nobody knows what is going to happen and if suddenly Monsters begin to appear in that ce they would need to kill those Monsters.


    Fortunately, the source of the earthquake is not present in the locality. It is a huge empty ground where the source of the earthquake is present. Even with that, all the humans present near the source of the earthquake had already been evacuated from their houses.


    Finally, some timeter the power of the earthquake began to decrease. But the city which is near the source of the earthquake already got affected by the earthquake. All the tall buildings have already begun to fall apart. It is a good thing that the Warrior Association already evacuated everyone from that city.


    Sam is trying to understand what is happening. But sometimeter he finally figured out what was happening. Actually, all the time he is using the observation technique in full power. At first, he is unable to figure out what is happening even though he can feel the spiritual fluctuation in the ce.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    But sometimeter finally he began to feel the surrounding spiritual energy getting absorbed by something. Not long after that, a spiritual aura also appeared in that ce which belonged to peak S-grade Warrior.


    Before he can predict anything, suddenly a structure begins to appear in that ce. Instantly he told every saint to back away from the ce. Naturally, John and others are surprised, but wasting no time they quickly create the distance from that ce.


    Sometimeter, they also finally begin to see a structure begin to appear in that ce. Magically that structure appears in that ce out of nowhere. Only then everybody understands what is happening. Finally, a new Dungeon appears and every one of them can already fill the power of the Dungeon.


    Definitely, this is a peak S-grade dungeon. Currently, a powerful spiritual aura instantly fills that whole ce. Not only that, but the surrounding area also begins to get affected by that structure. All the life force begins to get absorbed by that structure alongside The Spiritual energy.


    Well, except Sam, Alena, Maria, and Aria, Markus and the others did not be surprised. This is natural whenever a new Dungeon would appear. Only then they are thinking about how stupid they have be. From the moment that earthquake appears in that ce, they should recognize the pattern. Every time Newton appears in that ce, it will have the same pattern.


    Markus informs the Warrior Association. He also told the elders of the Warrior Association to inform everyone what is happening right now. Many people will get scared after facing this situation. Naturally, those people needed to know the truth so that they could calm down.


    Finally, all the Warriors of the Warrior Association can rx after getting the information from the saints. It is just a new Dungeon. If you are wondering why they are rxed after hearing about that new dungeon, then naturally it is because of Sam and all the Saints. Every one of them has full confidence in their Saints and their miracle maker.


    The elders of the Warrior Association already contacted all the news channels and told him to broadcast this news to everyone. Not only will they broadcast this news but also Warriors from the Warrior Association already have the responsibility to tell every one of those people who are currently not paying attention to the new channels.


    Alexa and everyone who also became very worried about this situation became rxed when they finally heard what was happening right now. It is just a new Dungeon appearing on their.


    Not just them, many other Warriors also have the same reaction. Many of them even begin to me their stupidity. Naturally, this is not the first time when a dungeon appears like this. So, they should have known what was happening. Unfortunately at that time, they were unable to think anything properly.


    Hina and Victor also became rxed after hearing about the Dungeon,pared to those other warriors, both of them were unable to bepletely rxed. Their son is present in that ce, so how could they rx? Even if they had full confidence in their son, they would never be able to rx until Sam did note back to his home.


    Not just them, Gloria also has the same situation. She also immediately came back to her house alongside Fiona. Both of them immediately told Hina and Victor that both of them would be going to that ce to see what was happening.


    Compared to any other Warriors, it would be safe for them to be there. After hearing that Hina and Victor also decided to tag alongside them. As S-grade warriors, they would be more usefulpared to those other Warriors. So they begin to fly in the sky to reach that ce. What if Sam and the other saints needed some help?


    Gloria already contacted Sam and asked him about the situation. Sam informs her that a structure begins to appear in that ce and looks like it will take some time for that structure to getpleted. That is the structure of the Dungeon. Currently, he and all the Saints are just waiting for that structure to getpleted.


    Gloria after hearing that nodded and also informed him that she, Fiona, and their parents were going toward that ce. Hearing that Sam became speechless but he did not stop them.


    Sometimeter,


    Hina and the others finally reached that ce and also already met all the Saints. Except for them, you would not be able to find any other warriors who are unable to break through to S-grade.


    Even though many Warriors from the Warrior Association wanted to stay in that ce to support the saints, unfortunately, all of them already got orders, and with that, every one of them needed to leave that ce.


    For 2 hours they just observe that structure slowly appearing in that ce. Gloria and the others naturally became surprised when they saw a dungeon begin to appear in that ce. For them, this would be the first time they saw something like this.


    This is a surprising thing for everyone. At the same time, they can also tell a huge amount of spiritual energy is being consumed continuously. It is just the inability to figure out what is this thing that absorbs that spiritual energy.


    Naturally, they are unable to feel any Monster present in that ce but still, they can feel the spiritual energy getting consumed like this.


    "Spiritual energy is getting consumed because the structure of the Dungeon needs to make itself familiar with the spiritual energy. Also, Spiritual energy would be needed to activate the Dungeon properly. Without The Spiritual energy naturally the Dungeon would not be able to appear in that ce."


    Markus sees all of these after seeing Gloria and the others be confused.


    Finally, the structure ispleted and all the previous effects have already begun to disappear from that ce. The earthquake that previously affected the whole safe zone and the whole already disappeared 30 minutes ago. The Spiritual fluctuation that was present all the time instantly disappeared from that ce.


    The Spiritual energy that was consumed by that structure has already recovered.


    Naturallypared to those things everybody pays more attention to that structure which is present in front of them. That''s why looking at the structure from outside anybody can tell it is an S-grade dungeon. First of all the design of the structure ispletely differentpared to your normal structure.


    Other than that continuously the aura of the S-grade warrior was released from that ce. Gloria and the others who just recently became S-grade Warriors also begin to feel pressureing out from that Dungeon. All of them feel that pressure because the Monsters inside the Dungeon are more powerfulpared to them.


    Naturally, they did not be afraid. Instead, they became very excited about this new dungeon. Finally, they can get to fight more powerful Monsters. But the thing is that none of them knows who will be going inside the Dungeon.

 Chapter 861 - Inside the new dungeon

    Finally, the structure of the new Dungeon ispleted and Sam and the others can go inside that Dungeon. Naturally, not all of them will go inside the Dungeon at the same time. After discussing it was decided that Sam, his family, Fiona, Markus, Veena, Alena, and Mira would go inside the Dungeon.


    The others will present outside of the dungeon. When some and the others wille out from the Dungeon those remaining saints will go inside the Dungeon. But before going inside the Dungeon, Sam told his family and sister Fiona to get ready.


    Before anything they need to prepare for any kind of situation. Naturally, Sam told them to see if they had everything ready or not. Gloria and the others one by one check everything present inside their storage ring.


    They have armor and their weapons. They have healing potions and spirit potions. They have some other life-saving artifacts given by Sam. With this, every one of them is ready to go inside the Dungeon.


    Markus and the others also check everything. It will be a long time since they will go inside the Dungeon like this. Naturally after bing powerful even those S-grade Dungeons, where you can only find those Early S-grade monsters, became meaningless to them.


    They didn''t have to use their full power to defeat those Monsters. Because of this, they cannot even use their full power. Finally, the new Dungeon appeared and this also made them excited. Naturally, after these new Dungeons, many more Dungeons like this will appear once again.


    Everybody is excited about those Dungeons. On the other hand, Sam told the Warrior Association to observe the situation in the danger zone. There is a good chance that powerful Monsters also begin to appear in the danger zone and just after appearing in the danger zone, those Monsters can try to attack the safe zone.


    Maria and the others became serious about this. Maria and Aria will be staying in front of the Dungeon so that no other warriors try to approach that ce or try to do anything. While the remaining saints will be observing the whole safe zone alongside the danger zone?


    Only after that, Sam told everyone to get ready. 5 minutester they finally begin to enter the Dungeon one by one. There could be a chance that after entering the Dungeon they will get separated. Because of this, Sam already gives everyone amunication device that he got from Terraria.


    With that everyone is ready and they finally enter the Dungeon. The moment they enter the Dungeon the surrounding area instantly changes and somehow they enter a dark cave or something like that.


    Sam already activated his observation technique. He can tell there are no Monsters in front of them. With that, he signals everyone to follow him. It is a good thing that after entering the Dungeon, nobody gets separated from each other.


    Gloria and the others begin to follow Sam. Sam at this time already created a light ball to illuminate the whole alleyway. 5 minutester they can already see a source of light not far away from their location. But before they could approach that ce, all of them suddenly became alert.


    Monsters are present in that direction. Gloria and the others can also feel those Monsters. But the good thing is that all those Monsters are around Early S-grade. With this, they carefully begin to approach that ce.


    "Sam, be careful. Whenever you enter a new Dungeon, you would be able to see arge number of Monsters almost trying to break out from the dungeon. We previously tried to find out why something like this happens when we enter a new dungeon. Unfortunately, we were unable to get an answer.


    One thing we were able to find. Whenever a new dungeon appears there is some kind of strange energy present inside the Dungeon. That strange energy is connected to the Boss monster. The more time will pass the more powerful that energy will be.


    It will also affect all the Monsters and make them more powerful and more wild. This is also a reason that whenever a new Dungeon appears, we cannot send inexperienced Warriors inside the Dungeon."


    Markus even before entering the Dungeon told all of this to Sam. It is a good thing that he told Sam before entering the Dungeon. In front of him, Sam and all the Warriors can already feel a huge number of monsters. Every one of those Monsters is outside of this cave.


    He already uses the observation technique and also uses the status viewing option. With this, he can already see the abnormal status of those Monsters. He already told everyone about the abnormal status of those Monsters and told everyone to be careful.


    Sam did not know what kind of energy was present outside of this cave. So there could be a chance that energy will try to affect their mind. So he already told everyone that they should activate the mind defense technique.


    One thing he bes sure that his family and Fiona would be able to handle are those Monsters. So he told them that they could take the lead to fight those Monsters. Naturally, Sam would be present there, so none of them have to worry about anything.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Markus and others also did not have anyints about that. Other than these they also think these would be a good experience for Gloria and the others. They just recently became S-grade Warriors, so naturally they also needed to experience all of this.


    Gloria, Hina, Victor, and Fiona be excited after hearing Sam''s approval. All of them already begin to activate their techniques alongside already begin to channel as much spiritual energy as much energy as they can to reach the limit of their techniques.


    Four huge energy fluctuations appear in that ce. In the next second except Alena, all the other Saints begin to feel some kind of pressure. Well, as you can tell this is the bloodline pressure.


    Even though Gloria and the others did not have the technique that would help them directly release the bloodline pressure, at least whenever they use any techniques they would release some of their bloodline pressure.


    Sam uses his pressure to eliminate the effect of the bloodline pressure. Only then Markus and others did not feel the pressure. Naturally, all of them became confused about this. But there is ready to ask about thister,


    On the other hand, the situation of these monsters is different. Naturally, Sam did not cancel the pressure that those Monsters are feeling right now. With this many of the Monsters are unable to maintain calm. Many of them have already begun to fall because of those pressures.


    The pressure that those Monsters are feeling right now does not affect them externally, all of them are affected internally. Many of these monsters already fall because of the pressure.


    Fortunately, sometimeter the pressure disappeared. But before those Monsters can rx or do anything, Gloria and Hina already release their attack.


    Both of them are long-distance attackers. So naturally, they take the lead to attack those Monsters. Gloria uses her ice beam attack while Hina uses her Radiant Arrow attack. One attack can freeze anything and the other one has the ability to destroy anything.


    Naturally, both of them target separate directions. All of this happened so quickly that those Monsters did not even get the time to stabilize themselves. In the next second , all those Monsters who are currently present in front of the cave entrance already be frozen statues.


    Not long after that, you can easily hear 4 to 5 explosions appear which almost shake the whole cave. Both of them 5 minutester stop attacking and Fiona and Victor finally take the lead and alreadye outside.


    Naturally, they already feel there are many other Monsters who did not get killed. But always be seriously injured. Both Victor and Fiona instantly approach those Monsters and begin to kill them one by one.


    Normally, killing them would not be easy for them, as those Monsters already became seriously injured, and it became easy for them to kill those Monsters. Gloria and Hina also came out of the cave sometimeter.


    Naturally, both of them can see a huge number of those Monsters already got killed, but using their observation technique they can still feel many other Monsters who are approaching that direction. Wasting no time both of them targeted those other Monsters who were approaching that ce.


    Sam and all the Saints also came outside of the cave. They finally get to see the structure of the first floor. It is like a barrennd with minimal trees. But you can see some mountains far away from that ce.


    It looks like there are also some Dragon-like Monsters present in that ce. Well, those exactly are not Dragons because they are not giving the same aura as your normal Dragon. Those Monsters are called  Dagvern, a hybrid race between wyvern and dragon.

 Chapter 862 - Inside the 3rd floor

    Sam instantly alerts Gloria and the others that another group of monsters is approaching them. They alreadye deep inside the Dungeon after killing those Monsters who were present in front of the cave.


    Naturally, Gloria and the others already feel that those Monsters are behaving strangely. He did not even get scared after filling the power of Sam and the others. Not just only that, but sometimes those Monsters even try to attack Sam and all the saints.


    Despite serious injuries, those Monsters were counter-attacking. It looks like those Monsters don''t even know if they died or not. They just wanted to kill those humans and wanted to go through that toe out of the Dungeon.


    For Gloria and others, this would be the first time that they saw something like this. Even Sam is surprised because this is also his first time seeing a situation like this. Not just only one or two Monsters, but it looks like every monster inside the Dungeon became like that.


    Sam, also already feels the strange energy present in the ce. That strange energy has a simr kind of property to dark energy. But the good thing is that the energy did not try to affect any of them. That energy only affects those Monsters.


    Finally, Gloria and the others can use their full power to deal with those Monsters. Previously after bing S-grade Warriors, it became easier for them to kill those Monsters inside those S-grade Dungeons. Only the boss Monsters can give them a tough fight.


    Only facing the boss Monsters will make them realize that they still need to improve. Until now they did not have the confidence to challenge the Boss monster on their own. But facing those other Monsters did not put them in that kind of situation.


    Those Monsters who were present in front of the cave were the same as those Monsters present inside other S-grade dungeons. But the more Deeper they go, the more difficult the situation bes. Also, Sam and the others decided to advance while leaving them alone.


    Sam also agrees with that because he does not think any of those Monsters have the capability to harm them. As you know his family and sister Fiona still have those defense artifacts. They just did not activate those defense artifacts.


    On the other hand, Sam, Markus, Alena, Mira, Veena, and John already came inside the inner area. They advance very quickly. Sam did not take any action against those Monsters until they did not attack. He is only here to observe the situation.


    Sam from the start, tries to figure out about the strange energy present in that ce. He is already able to feel the simrity between this new energy and the dark energy. But like the dark energy, this new energy did not try to affect any humans or any of them.


    It was like that strange energy avoiding them. This is the thing that surprised him. Well, other than that, he already notices that Alena and the others instantly Wipe out every monster in front of them.


    Well, this is natural as every one of those Monsters is very weakpared to John and others. Like this, it did not take them that much time to advance toward the core area and then toward the entrance of the next floor.


    Stay updated through empire


    1 hourter,


    Finally, Sam and everyone came in front of the entrance of the second floor. No time they use the entrance to go to the second floor. Once again Sam can already feel a lot of Monsters present in front of the entrance.


    He once again told everyone about this. This time Mira and Alena take the lead and attack those Monsters. Both of them are enough to wipe out all of those Monsters who are present in front of the entrance.


    When they came inside the second floor Sam noticed the environment which is the same as the first floor. Well, they did not think that much and just began to advance. Naturally, as they expected all the Monsters present there are intermediate S-grade monsters.


    Even though Alena and Mira instantly kill every one of those Monsters, both of them can also feel those Monsters be powerful.


    3 hourster,


    Finally, they decided to rest for a few minutes. They will be entering the third floor where they are expected to meet those peak S-grade monsters. After that, they would be meeting the boss of this dungeon. Naturally, everybody is very excited about meeting the boss.


    They wanted to see the power of the boss and wanted to know if they needed to use their full power or not. Naturallypared to your normal Monster The Boss monster will be different. They will have more power and killing them would not be easy even for a person who is in a simr power grade.


    On the other hand,


    The Monsters inside the first floor had already begun to respawn. Because of this, even though Sam and all the Saints already wiped out all the Monsters that attacked them, once again Monsters appear in that ce, and currently Gloria and the others fighting those Monsters.


    Naturally, they needed to use their full power against those Monsters. The deeper they are going, the more difficult the situation bes for them. But even in that situation none of them became scared. First of all, they can easily protect themselves by activating those defense artifacts. Also, fighting those Monsters makes them happy.


    ______________________________


    Outside of the Dungeon, Aria, and Maria already stopped all of those reporters and other Warriors who became interested in the new Dungeon and came to that ce.


    Naturally, even if they did not stop those people, none of them dared to go inside the Dungeon. Nobody wanted to die. It is just that they be amazed after looking at the structure of this new Dungeon. Also, every one of them can feel the pressureing out from that Dungeon.


    Fortunately, they maintain a good distance from that dungeon which also decreases the pressure. The news channels are already broadcasting about this to everyone. Naturally, many of those people have different kinds of expressions after hearing the news.


    Many of them became scared, while many of them became excited. All those people showed different kinds of expressions after hearing the news. If you are wondering why many people be scared, then it is because those people are thinking that there will be a time when more powerful Dungeons will appear and those saints will not be able to protect them.


    Alexa and the others also became serious after hearing the news. First of all, with this, they can finally tell that the danger of their is already beginning to increase. The Monsters inside the Dungeon will be more dangerous.


    In a situation like this, naturally, they also needed to focus on their power. They need to increase their power so that they can also fight with all the Saints. They also wanted to see what it feels like to go inside a newly arrived Dungeon. But naturally, that will also increase the burden on Sam. So none of them try to go inside the dungeon.


    The Warrior Association is currently divided into two groups. The first group of people maintains the order between all the humans present in the safe zone. While the other group observed the danger zone very carefully. All the saints, who did not go Inside the Dungeon also helped them in this matter.


    Naturally, they also told the Warrior Association not to tell anything about this to anyone. Even if no powerful Monster appears in the danger zone, people will start to panic the moment they hear the news about this. Naturally, nobody wanted to face that kind of situation so the Warrior Association did not inform anyone what those remaining saints were doing right now.


    __________________________________


    Finally, Sam and the others alreadye inside the third floor. The scenery of the third floor instantly changed and it became a Rocky area. Definitely all the Monsters inside this ce already change. All the Saints already be serious the moment they enter the third floor.


    Alena and Mira also realize that they need to use a lot of power to kill all those Monsters who are present in front of the entrance. Even though they did not use their full power, this would be the first time they used that kind of power against those S-grade monsters.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Naturally, this is a sign that those Monsters already be more powerful and they need to stay very careful. Markus and the others are also fighting those Monsters.


    Like this, all of them went in different directions. They wanted to kill those monsters separately and then they decided to meet at the entrance of the Boss room. Sam also decided to go separately as he wanted to observe that dungeon.


    He can already see that all the Monsters are differentpared to those Monsters that they have faced on the previous floor. But none of those Monsters trying to attack him as he is invisible in front of them. He did not want to fight any of those Monsters. He just came there to observe.

 Chapter 863 - Targeted by Dungeon

    Suddenly in the sky, you can see a lot of Monstersing toward the direction of Sam. All those Monsters are the lightning eagle Monsters. Monsters are very big. Those monsters are approximately 30 feet tall. All those Monsters are yellow and you can also see thunder-like symbols present in their feathers.


    All those Monsters are peak S-grade monsters. Naturally, all of them already wanted to attack Sam and kill him. A huge energy fluctuation also appears in that ce. If you look at the sky then you can already see it became cloudy. The sky is filled with dark clouds.


    This is a dangerous situation. Even if Markus and the others face this situation, then they would be in danger. In front of those many Monsters even they will be seriously injured.


    Instantly, energy fluctuation begins to increase. Sam also noticed all those Monsters currently glowing brightly. Naturally preparing their attack. But Sam did not do anything and just stayed there. He wanted to feel the power behind their attack. He wanted to know if his defense would be able to protect him or not.


    In no time those Monsters release a huge thunder beam. Almost 200 Monsters are present in front of him. All those Monsters release their attack andbine into one attack. Instantly, the power of that thunder beam already broke through SS-grade.


    Even Markus and the others who are present on the floor also feel the use of energy fluctuation. Everyone became very surprised and also became curious to know what happened. But, none of them stop their fighting.


    Sam is present in the direction from where they can feel the energy fluctuation. Because of this, they decided to ask Sam about this. With this, all of them once again focus on those Monsters who are in front of them.


    "Boom!!!!!!"


    A huge explosion appeared in the mid-air. The moment that thunder beam hit Sam that big explosion appeared on the ce. The whole 3rd floor was even shaken by that explosion. All the trees beneath Sam had already been destroyed by the impact.


    Almost a 5 km area was destroyed. Just imagine that the attack did not even reach the ground, but still, the 5 km area got destroyed. What would happen when that attack directly hit the ground?


    On the other hand, those lightning eagles stop attacking and every one of them observes the direction of Sam which has already been filled with ayer of smoke. Well, it looks like those Monsters already consider Sam as a dead person.


    If you are wondering why then it is because none of them can sense the spiritual aura of Sam. Because of this, those Monsters decided to concentrate on those other humans. Naturally, they wanted to kill every human present on that floor and after that, they would try to leave the dungeon. Your journey continues on empire


    Unfortunately for those Monsters slowly thatyer of smoke faded away and you can see Sam currently observing his body. Other than the shirt that he was wearing previously, he did not lose anything.


    Sam quickly wears new clothes after that he instantly releases his spiritual aura. Subconsciously he uses the concealment technique. Because of this, those monsters are suddenly unable to feel the aura of Sam.


    The moment he deactivates that technique all the Monsters once again sense him. Everyone became angry once again and once again every one of them began to glow brightly. They are once again going to attack Sam.


    But this time some will not give them the chance to attack him. Without even giving them any chance he instantly creates a huge light beam. That light beam instantly covered every one of those Monsters and in the next second, you could already see that all those monsters all stood in the dust.


    Using the telekinesis technique he picks up the loots and puts them inside his inventory. Well also from the start he was using the concealment technique, but then he decided that he should also experience the power of those Monsters. So he decided to deactivate that technique. But he did not expect that many Monsters would target him like that.


    ''is the dungeon trying to kill me like this? There could be a chance that the dungeon can tell I am the most powerful here. So it looks like the Dungeon wanted to eliminate me as quickly as he could.''


    Sam doesn''t know if his prediction is right or wrong, but somehow he feels that this is the truth. Not long after killing those lightning eagle Monsters, he once again feels a group of Monsters approaching him. Once again, a huge group of Monsters, filled with almost 100 to 150 monsters.


    Sam was surprised once again and decided to check those Monsters. It did not take him that much time toe in front of those monsters. Currently, he can see almost 120 rock golems approaching his direction. The size of those Rock Golems is around 50 feet.


    Every one of those Golems has red eyes. Using their red eyes, those Golems are observing Sam. If youpare those Golems with other Golems, that Sam inside those other dungeons, then you can feel a huge difference.


    First of all, almost every one of those Monsters has a red mark on their forehead where you will find the core of the monster. Naturally, to kill those monsters, you need to destroy those cores. The monster in front of him did not have that kind of thing on their forehead.


    Fortunately using the observation technique, Sam already can tell where those monsters have the core. Those Monsters still have the core in their forehead. It is just from outside you would not be able to tell anything.


    From outside the whole body of that Monster will look the same. If Sam is not wrong then to bring out the core, the Warriors first needed to destroy the upper shell of that Monster. Only then would they be able to kill them?


    Sam did not want to waste that much time so he decided to kill every one of those Monsters. Once again he uses the sun beam. With this, all the monsters instantly got turned into dust.


    Sam was also thinking about how many Monsters he needed to face. First of all, even if he releases spiritual pressure those Monsters will not be affected by it. It looks like the minds of those Monsters already got affected by that strange energy that they are unable to feel anything.


    Sam decided next time he would use the bloodline pressure to see what happened. Will those monsters still get affected by the bloodline pressure or not?


    At this time, Alena and everyone present on the third floor finally can sigh in relief. After feeling that much pressure continuously makes them worried. At this time they wanted to rush towards Sam to see what happened. But before they can take any action once again the Spiritual fluctuation disappears. It looks like Sam already handles everything.


    Well, they already expected these but they just wanted to know the source of those powerful energy fluctuations. Some time ago even all the saints also felt the danger after sensing the energy fluctuation.


    ________________________________


    Countless light circles appear in the sky and in the next again countless light beams begin toe out from those light cycles and attack the Monsters beneath Alena. She is currently facing a group of 20 Monsters. All those Monsters are scorpions-like Monsters. But the size of those Monsters is very big.


    This was the first time she saw those big Monsters. Althos Monsters are very poisonous and those Monsters continuously attack her to poison her and kill her. Unfortunately, none of them are able to affect Alena. Also, in front of those many light beams are those monsters currently struggling to survive.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Unfortunately, in front of an intermediate Elite-grade warrior or Early SS-grade warrior, those Monsters are unable to survive. In the end, all of them got killed. Alena sighed in relief and decided to collect all the loot.


    She already came close to the core area. Naturally, she is not dying to fight those Monsters. It is just continuously she gets attacked by those Monsters. It looks like the dungeon did not want to give her any time to rest. Because of this, the Dungeon keeps sending monsters toward her.


    But Alena easily deals with those Monsters. It has been almost 5 hours since she fought those monsters. Because of this she also begins to feel exhausted. With this, she brings out the defense artifact from her storage ring and then activates the artifact.


    Suddenly she wanted to rest for a few minutes to recover her lost spiritual energy and mental energy. Also as she expected not long after that, a group of 50 Monsters are approaching her. Sometimeter she can already see the description of those Monsters.


    Those Monsters look like Giant camels. Naturally, All those Monsters have furious expressions on their faces and also it looks like they are ready to attack her.

 Chapter 864 - Killing Monsters

    Gloria is fighting a group of giant humanoid monsters. Well, you cannot say their humans have human-like figures. Instead of a human face, those monsters have a round face that is also covered by a shell. You can only see two eyes. Other than that, the bodies of those monsters are also filled with those shells.


    Naturally, those shells worked as armor for those monsters. Those monsters are also very strong and they can also usesers. They can createsers from their eyes. All those monsters are 60 feet tall. Those will be the tallest monsters that they have faced.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    But naturally, Gloria is not afraid of those monsters because of their size. Behind her, you can already see 5 of those monsters already turned into frozen statues. Some of them had holes in their chests while some of them did not even have a head.


    She just needs to kill three more monsters. After killing 5 monsters, she already gets to know about the weakness of the Monsters. If you did not have the ability to break the defense of the Monsters, then you need to use the weakness of that monster.


    The eyes of that Monster are not protected by any of those shells. You need to target those two eyes. Naturally, this is not easy as those monsters have the ability to createsers from their eyes.


    Other than that, you can also use mind control techniques to get an advantage over those monsters. Even though those Monsters are physically stronger and have powerful defense, the mind control attack would be very useful against those Monsters.


    Unfortunately, Gloria did not have to use mind control techniques on those monsters. Once again, she uses the ice beam to attack the monster in front of her.


    Those monsters are just about to attack her using theirser eyes. That area was filled with smoke. Theser collided with the ice beam and ayer of smoke was created.


    Gloria had already used her movement techniques to disappear from that ce. She appears behind a Monster. At this time, another Monster faces in her direction. Wasting no time, she created an ice Dragon. The size of the ice dragon is around 100 feet.


    Even though it consumes a lot of spiritual energy, she wanted to make the ice Dragon that big. Naturally, those eyes contain a huge amount of spiritual energy and ice. Without giving that Monster the time to do anything, the Ice Dragon already froze.


    After that, the eyes of the Dragon did not attack those Monsters and flew upward. In the next second, that dragon began to go downward. At this time, all those monsters gather in one ce and the Ice Dragon also falls down on that ce.


    Sometimeter,


    You can see two monsters currently struggling to attack Gloria. The other two Monsters have already been killed by her and only those two Monsters remain in that ce. Both of them have already lost their eyes, and they even lost their body parts.


    After freezing their body, destroying that part of the body is very easy. Naturally, Gloria did that to those monsters. She also destroyed both of their eyes. Wasting no time, she quickly froze both the Monsters. Find your next read on empire


    5 minutester, you can see the whole ce has been frozen by Gloria. Suddenly, all those frozen things begin to crack. In just 10 seconds, everything starts cracking and breaking apart. All those Monsters also begin to crack and, sometimeter, the bodies of the Monsters turn into small ice.


    With this, she already kills all those monsters and just waits for the loot. It did not take this loot to appear in that ce. After collecting them, she decided to look for a good ce to rest.


    Gloria is still present on the first floor. Looks like she did not enter the inner area. Those monsters inside the outer area are not her opponents. If she was like your normal Warrior, then naturally she would not even be able to room freely in the outside area.


    First of all, she has a true spiritual energy system and, secondly, she also has a new bloodline. All of this makes her very powerful and because of this, those monsters inside the outer area aren''t her opponents.


    "I am wondering how many monsters mom and dad have killed. Also, what is Fiona''s situation? I hope she did not be reckless and enter the inner area. We had already promised Sam that without him, we would not be entering the inner area.


    On the other hand, I''m really curious about what Sam, the teacher and everyone else are doing right now. I just hope nothing abnormal happens inside the dungeon."


    Gloria thought all of this while searching for a resting ce. It did not take her that much time to find a good ce to rest. Instantly, she begins to meditate and uses the recovery technique to recover her spiritual energy and mental energy.


    15 km away from Gloria, Hina, and Victor are currently also fighting a group of monsters. They are fighting a group of centipede monsters. The size of those monsters is around 20 feet. These, many have countless legs and they also have a sharp mouth to eat anything and also to shoot poison toward their enemy.


    The whole Monster can also release a red gas that is very poisonous and can easily kill anyone. Other than that, those monsters can even shoot acid-like liquids from their bodies which have the ability to burn anything.


    In one word, those monsters are very dangerous. But you can already see that both of them have already killed 20 of those monsters. Currently, only two of them remain in that ce.


    Hina instantly shoots an Arrow which instantly turns into countless Arrows and all those Arrows also begin to glow brightly. Not only does she use multiple arrows, but she also changes the nature of the Spiritual energy. With this, you can tell all those arrows are turning into me arrows.


    But it was not there as she once again shot an Arrow, but this time she shot that Arrow at the sky. That arrow also glowed brightly while going upward in the sky. Sometimeter, it suddenly stopped in mid-air. After that, suddenly a huge change happened to that arrow.


    The arrow began to glow more brightly and in the next second, some kind of figure also began to appear around that arrow. You can already see that the figure is like a bird. This is the Phoenix Arrow technique that Sam teaches his mother.


    Instantly, that phoenix created a huge amount of energy fluctuations that also appeared in that ce. That phoenix, without wasting any more time, begins to go toward the monster in front of her.


    That Monster had already be alert, facing those many arrows. Protecting himself in front of those arrows became very difficult for him. But in the next, I could feel more dangering toward him. Unfortunately, the monster was unable to do anything and got hit by the phoenix alongside those other Arrows. A huge explosion also appears in that ce, which shakes the whole ce.


    Victor, not far away from the location, also has the same situation. You also decided to kill the monster using his most powerful attack. Victor already jumps at that Monster, and instantly he shes his sword toward the sky.


    In the next second, countless sword shes begin to fall from the sky. All those sword shes get created by his technique and targeting that monster. All those attacks by Victor contain a huge amount of spiritual energy.


    Naturally, you cannot also ignore the strength and the sharpness of those attacks. Those attacks are enough to kill any of those normal S-grade monsters. But he did not end there. In the next second, he swung his sword toward that monster.


    Instantly, a very powerful red sh was created from that swing and directly went towards that monster. The Monster was unable to protect himself and got hit by that red sh. Instantly, his body and his hand which tried to protect his body from that attack are cut into two parts.


    Not only that, but those other sword shes that keep falling on that monster instantly cut that Monster into many pieces.


    With this, he finally kills that monster. Naturally, he began to approach at the direction of his wife to see her condition.


    Fiona, who also has an almost 20 km distance from Victor and Hina, also already kills a lot of monsters. Naturally, even though she is the one who previously wanted to get permission from Sam to enter the inner area, she is still present in the outer area. Even though she had full confidence in her strength, she still decided to wait for Sam to go to the inner area.


    Naturally, as you can expect, because of her power, she can roam around in the outer areas without any problems. She had just recently killed a group of 5 monsters. After killing them, she decided to rear and then search for more monsters.

 Chapter 865 - Boss Room

    Suddenly, Gloria, Fiona, Hina, and Victor begin to feel a huge fluctuation appear on the first floor. Even though that energy fluctuation did not affect them, it looked like something happening with those monsters. Every one of those monsters began to glow in red. Experience more on empire


    Not only that, it looks like those monsters even lost the ability to fight back. Currently, even those monsters who are just about to attack them freeze in their ce. Even those monsters who are flying in the sky begin to fall.


    Naturally, all of this made Gloria and the others very serious. None of them know what is happening to those Monsters, but they decide to use this change to kill as many Monsters as they can. They did not know if this was good or not. Because of this, they decided to decrease the number of those monsters.


    It is a good thing that all those monsters are unable to move or attack. Using this chance, all four of them instantly begin to kill those Monsters.


    Sometimeter, almost all the monsters present on the first floor are killed by four of them. They did not even rest for a single second and continuously killed those monsters to decrease the number. One thing they can tell is that the energy fluctuation is still present in that ce and because of this, those monsters are still unable to move.


    They did not know if the respawn rate of those monsters would be affected by these or not. All four of them are also waiting for those monsters to respawn. But after waiting for almost 30 minutes, they notice that until now none of those Monsters who got killed by them respawned. It looks like even the respawn rate of those monsters is affected by this.


    At that time, they had already finished all the monsters present on the first floor and also went to the entrance of the ground floor. They did not want any monsters to go through that entrance to enter the safe zone. They will kill every Monster who wille to that ce.


    Naturally, they are very curious to know what is happening right now. What is this sudden energy fluctuation? Why do those monsters suddenly stop moving from their ce? Why suddenly does the respawn rate of the Dungeon get affected?


    All of these questions make them fully curious, but they can get the answer from Sam. Currently, they just need it to make sure that none of the Monsters will go through that entrance to enter the ground floor.


    _________________________________


    Some time ago, before those energy fluctuations appeared on the first floor, Sam and all the saints had already killed almost all the monsters on the 3rd floor. While killing those monsters, Alena and the others also enjoy their hunting time.


    Finally, they can realize how powerful they have be. Finally, they use full power against those monsters. With this, in the end, every one of them met in front of the entrance of the boss''s room. Now the Boss floor, or you can say the Boss room, will be very differentpared to those other floors.


    Now, fighting that boss can be very challenging for them. Sam would not have any problem with this but, as you know, he just went there to observe everything. Alena and the others will be hunting that Boss monster. But the thing is that they did not know the strength of that Boss monster.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    There could be a chance that the Boss monster has a simr power to an SS-grade warrior or monster. For normal monsters, getting that kind of power boost is impossible, but as you know, all the Boss monsters get help from the Dungeon and, naturally, they can get a power boost like that.


    Not only that, as you know, also a strange energy is present in that ce which also causes all the monsters to be more powerful. So, naturally, there is a chance that the Boss monster will not get killed easily by them. There could be a chance that all of them need to team up with each other.


    Finally, they went in front of the door that would lead them to the boss''s room. You can already see both the doors present in front of them have different kinds of patterns in them. You can also see skeletons present on that door and some strange patterns alsoe out from those skeletons.


    Sam and everyone else could also feel the strange energy somehow increasing in that ce. Using the spirit vision technique, they can already tail the boss room filled with that strange energy.


    Sam, at this time, told everyone to stay behind him. He will be the one who opens the door. Well, there could be a chance that something unexpected would appear in that ce the moment they opened the boss room''s door. Because of this, Sam opens the door.


    The moment they open the door, they feel a huge energy fluctuation appear in that ce. It looks like some kind of pressure is also present in that ce that is trying to affect everyone. Unfortunately, it is not that useful.


    The moment they entered the Boss'' room, which was quite dark, instantly fire torches present inside that room began to burn. In less than a minute, the whole room became visible to everyone. It is a huge room filled with many statues.


    At this time, if they look in front of them, they can also see a tform where you can see a big chair and a big monster sitting on that chair. That Monster has a dog-like body, but it sits like a human.


    Sam can already see all those statues present in that ce also being affected by the strange energy and somehow, that Monster''s statue in front of them is the source of the energy. The whole statue is filled with that red energy. Red lights were going toward those other statues of that big monster.


    At this time, suddenly, the eyes of the Dog Monster begin to glow. At the next second, the door of the boss''s room closes automatically. Instantly, Alena and the others jumped backward. They did not want to face a situation where monsters would attack them from all directions.


    Except for the statue of The Dog Monster, every one of those statues of various monsters begins to crack. Less than a second, all those statues became living monsters. One by one, all the Monsters let out a furious roar.


    Alena and the others can tell those monsters are looking at them angrily. You can say almost 10000 of those monsters were present in the ce. In less than a second, those 10000 Monsters became alive.


    Naturally, those are the Minions of the Boss monster. Every one of those minions is around peak S-grade. Alena and others did not want to waste a single second. Now this is the fight they are waiting for. They will be using their full power to defeat those enemies and, after that, they will be fighting that Boss monster.


    None of them have to fear losing their lives as Sam is present in the ce. This is also the reason that they can be reckless while fighting those monsters. Without wasting a single second, every one of them begins to attack those Monsters who also already shoot their attacks toward them.


    In just a second, one by one, many explosions appear in the ce because of the sh between their attacks. None of those Saints receive any of those attacks, but you can already see many of those Monsters got killed by their attacks.


    The attack of the Monsters was canceled when their attack shed with the attack by the saints and, like that, those Monsters died.


    But those other monsters did not care about that and once again released their attack on them. Naturally, as those many monsters attack them at once, it also creates a huge energy fluctuation in that ce.


    Fortunately, Alena has already created a barrier around all of them, and also those other Saints use their most powerful attacks toward those Monsters. In the next second, one by one, many big explosions appeared in that ce. Even Alena, who created the barrier, also created countless light circles that appeared on the whole ceiling of the Boss'' room.


    In the next second, countless light beams begin toe out from those light circles. Like her, all saints begin to use their powerful techniques to kill those Monsters. On the other hand, the barrier created by Alena is enough to protect themselves from the attacks of those Monsters.


    But 5 minutester, you can already see cracks appear in that barrier. At this time, Alena brings out the defense artifact given by Sam. That would also create a barrier around them, but this time she did not have to use spiritual energy to keep activating that barrier.


    Previously, she did not use that as she wanted to fight those Monsters without relying on any artifact. But currently, she can tell that would be quite a troublesome matter. So in the end she decided to use that.

 Chapter 866 - Finally the Boss monster appears

    Sometimeter,


    You can already see that Alena and the others have already killed half of those Monsters who tried to attack them. Naturally, those other monsters did not stay ideal and they continuously approached them. None of those monsters have any kind of expression, even if theirpanion gets killed by their enemies.


    It is like they did not have any kind of emotion or anything like that. Currently, monsters present in that ce just want to kill all the humans. You have to say that the situation was quite dangerous at first. Sam even needed to help them to kill some of those monsters.


    It is a good thing that Alena activated the barrier given by Sam. Only because of this is she able to maintain that barrier even after getting continuously attacked by those monsters. Also, after using their full power continuously, all of them be exhausted. This would be the first time they became that exhausted.


    It will take 5 to 6 hours to kill the remaining Monsters if the Saints continue to attack them like that. Naturally, Sam is always watching over that statue of a dog, or you could say that humanoid dog. One thing he is sure of is that even that statue is also alive.


    Suddenly, while looking at that statue using the spirit vision, Sam can see that the density of the red energy around that statue has already increased. Not only that, the red energy alongside the spiritual energy also became quite chaotic. Sam was definitely sure that something was happening with that statue.


    It is just him just waiting for the monster to get there. He wanted to know the power of the Boss monster. At this time, Sam remembered something. 3 years ago, he got to know from his parents that every time a new Dungeon appeared a simr chaotic situation would happen inside the Dungeon.


    But they just need to kill the Boss monster to stop all those chaotic situations. So Sam is wondering what would happen if they killed the Boss monster right now.


    Well, it looks like Sam did not have to wait for that long for the Boss monster to appear there. Sometimeter, once again, Alena and the others kill more of those Monsters.


    They decided to rest and recover the lost spiritual energy. Well, all of them have full confidence in the artifact given by Sam. So, while resting, none of them have any problems.


    Suddenly, the whole ce began to shake. The good thing is that they instantly begin to fly in the sky. With this, the Saints did not get affected by the violent earthquake that suddenly appeared in that ce.


    "What is happening? Why did the whole floor begin to shake like that?"


    Vena says that in frustration.


    " Be careful, it looks like finally it is time for the Boss monster to appear there. I don¡¯t know if all of you will see this or not, but the red energy or the special energy instantly became very violent.


    One thing I have be sure of is that the statue of a humanoid dog is the source of that strange energy. Currently, from that statue, that strange energy is released very quickly and also the whole room gets filled with that red energy.


    Don¡¯t worry, I have already eliminated the effects of red energy. I think all the monsters will immediately get affected by these, and somehow they will be more powerful. Most likely, the Boss monster is watching your battle all the time. The Boss monster realized all those Minions would not be able to win against you, so basically, he is trying to increase the power of those Minions.


    Unfortunately, I have already eliminated that red energy before the Boss monster can affect those other Monsters. Most likely, this made the Monster more frustrated and finally, the Boss monster decided to show himself.


    I don¡¯t know what the power level would be of that Boss monster, but one thing I am sure of is that the fight would not be easy for any of you. I don¡¯t think you can fight that Monster on your own.


    As you know, the dungeon is also helping the boss monster, so there is a possibility that the power level of that monster will be highpared to yours."


    Sam exins all of this to everyone. Actually, he can already see that crack mark beginning to appear on that humanoid dog statue. Naturally, the red energy continuouslyes out from that statue but all that red energy gets absorbed by Sam.


    Sam did not have any problem observing that spiritual energy. With this, none of these monsters received any kind of power boost.


    Alena, Markus and the others became serious after hearing Sam¡¯s exnation. Finally, it is time to face the Boss monster. All of them can already feel the tension. All of them are also waiting for the Boss monster. Naturally, nobody knows the power level of the Boss monster.


    Compared to the normal Monsters, the Boss Monsters will be more powerful. But at the same time, a strange red energy is also being created by the bottom monster, which definitely also increases the power of the Boss monster. Because of this, nobody can give a guarantee that they will be able to fight the Boss monster on their own.


    They did not have to wait for that long to see the statue of that humanoid dog alreadye back to life like those other Monsters. Instantly, all those monsters who were about to attack Alena and the others already began to go toward that dog monster.


    One by one, all those monsters began to let out their roar. It looks like all those monsters trying to celebrate something. Naturally, the earthquakes that previously appeared in that ce have already disappeared. Sam quickly called every one of them and with this everyone came back to their senses.


    They should not get distracted at this moment as they can also use this chance to kill those monsters.


    "Boom!!!!"


    One by one, many big explosions appear in that ce and in those explosions many of those Monsters, or you can say Minions of the boss Monster, get killed. But those Saints¡¯ fight stops there. They once again prepare themselves to attack those monsters. This time, suddenly, a powerful red light hits the barrier that protects them.


    "Boom!!!"


    A huge explosion appeared outside that barrier and almost the whole ce was destroyed. But as you can tell, the barrier did not have any effect. Finally, Alena and the others can tell what happened.


    The humanoid dog Monster is currently looking in their direction while a redseres out of his eyes. But they never expected that the attack would be that fast. Sam already uses his observation technique to see the status of that monster.


    "Sigh, the good thing is that the Monsters are not that powerfulpared to you. But the bad thing is that these monsters have arge amount of spiritual energy and look like this is not your normal spiritual energy. Spiritual energy is also mixed with that red energy."


    Observing the status of the monster, Sam told everyone. With this, they can at least rx. Stay tuned to empire


    "Markus and Veena will be dealing with that Boss Monster while we will all be dealing with those other Monsters. Be careful everyone, as I can tell, even though Sam is helping us somehow, other minions are also getting powerful."


    n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    John said that everyone, after observing those monsters and the Boss monster who kept attacking them. Actually, he is not wrong because Sam did not mention one thing. Even though he had already absorbed all that red energy that wasing out from that monster, as you know previously, he saw a string-like thing that connected those Minions with the Boss monster.


    Through those, the red energy keeps going towards Minions and, naturally, that also increases the power of those Minions.


    Hearing the n, everyone agreed with it. With this visit, they have already moved from their previous ce. Markus and Veena instantly appear in front of the boss and, without giving the Monster any chance, they attack him.


    But, the reaction speed of the Boss monster also increases. The Boss monster already tries to create a barrier in front of him to protect himself from those attacks. Unfortunately, Markus and Veena had already expected that, so they easily change their position and attack that Monster once again.


    All of this happened in less than a second and also the Boss monster had already created a barrier around his head. Unfortunately, he did not create the barrier around his stomach area. With this, he instantly got hit by those attacks.


    Markus and Veena did not stay ideal and in the next second they once again disturb you. Even though the Boss monster has arge amount of spiritual energy, one thing both of them realize is that the Boss monster still is not as powerful as them.


    They are going to use this as their advantage. Naturally, only one of them can try to fight that Monster on his own, but that would be quite dangerous and also time-consuming.

 Chapter 867 - Killing the Boss monster

    Markus and Veena attack The Monster at the same time. A huge fluctuation created it in that ce the moment they created their attack. In the next second, a big explosion also appeared the moment The Monster got hit by the attack.


    "Roar!!!"


    In the next second, you can also hear a loud roaring out from that boss monster. Using the observation technique, both of them can easily see. With theirbined attack, they have already destroyed the left side of that monster.


    But, in no time, the Monster begins to regenerate. After realizing this, Veena and Markus were not ideal and instantly began to attack that Monster once again. Suddenly, the size of Markus increased. You can say it is like a Hulk transformation where his whole body increases in size and, at the same time, you can also see those muscles.


    Veena, on the other hand, instantly gets coated in fire. It is like she became a fire human. In the next second, both of them disappear from their ce and appear on the left and right sides of that monster.


    The Monster has also already released his eyeser once again. This time, the Boss monster targeted Veena and Markus. But before thatser can hit Markus or Veena, both of them also counterattack.


    Markus punched toward thatser beam. Veena attacks that monster, creating a fire beam. In the next second, two more explosions appear. But it did not end there, as both of them reached in front of the monster and instantly attacked the monster.


    The Monster got sent backwards and once again he got seriously injured. Unfortunately, the health of that Monster is prettyrge and this is also a reason that killing that Monster is not easy.


    On the other hand, Alena and the others are fully focusing on those minions. Even though all those Monsters became powerful, still none of those Monsters reach the same power level as them. It is just as they be strong, killing them also requires more spiritual energypared to before. They need it to use more strength to kill those monsters.


    Came back to the Boss monster,


    The monster got covered in a big me. Veena appeared behind that Monster and instantly that whole Monster got covered in that big me. But it did not end there. Markus already appears above that monster. Currently, he is falling down on the monster.


    It looks like Markus using gravity to get more strength and velocity. As the monster has more health points and also strong regeneration technique, killing this Monster would not be easy. But that does not mean both of them will give up.


    If you are wondering why that Monster did not retreat from that ce despite getting attacked by Veena, actually, the monster is already trying to struggle to retreat from that ce, but the me which covers the whole Monster is also working as a prison to hold that monster. This is the reason that, even though the monster is getting burned, he is unable to retreat from it.


    Suddenly, the me disappears. But before the monster can do anything, Markus already appears above his head and punches him in the next second. The punch was so powerful that it created a huge shockwave.


    The ground beneath that Monster had already been destroyed by that punch. Even all the surrounding things like pirs and other things also flew backwards because of the shockwave.


    The Monster, on the other hand, fell down on the ground and also that whole ce got destroyed because of the body impact. Naturally, Markus and Veena would not stop there. Veena once again appears in front of that monster. Read exclusive content at empire


    She instantly ced her hand on the stomach of the monster. Suddenly, the whole area became red and in the next second a huge explosion appeared. That explosion appeared in the stomach area where she ced her hand.


    If you look at the monster right now, then you can already see that area has been burned and all the internal organs are turning into coal. Once again, the monster let out a painful roar. Despite bing powerful because of the red energy, The Monster is unable to do anything. It is just because of his health and spiritual energy that The Monster is still alive right now.


    It looks like the regeneration technique is automatic. That whole ce begins to glow brightly and the whole area begins to get repaired. But at this time the monster furiously looked toward Markus and Veena. Both of them are about to attack him once again.


    But suddenly The Monster created a barrier around him and in the next second he also jumped from his ce. The Monster realizes one thing. Those humans in front of him are very powerful. It became impossible for him to fight them on his own.


    But even after realizing this, The Monster did not back down. Instead, The Monster became very furious. Suddenly, both the hands of that Monster begin to glow in a dark color and, in the next second, both Markus and Veena feel like they are unable to move.


    Not only that, in the next second, both of them feel like some kind of danger approaching them from behind, but using the observation technique, they are unable to feel anything. But they aren''t saints just by name.


    Finally, both of them realized what was happening. The monster in front of them has the ability to control the shadow. The Monster uses his technique to control both of their shadows and, with these, both of them are unable to move right now. Also, it looks like the monster attacking them using his shadow techniques.


    Instantly, both of them begin to coat their whole body with spiritual energy. In just 2 seconds, both of them coated their whole bodies in spiritual energy. After that, both of them begin to channel spiritual energy in their whole body and in just 5 seconds, both of them break through from the restriction force.


    Fortunately, they reacted quickly because, in the next second, a shadow dragon almost passed through their shadows. Both of them realize that and can already tell the monster has the ability to attack them through the shadow world. Naturally, this would be problematic.


    But, both Markus and Veena are not worried about that monster. Once again, both of them disappeared. This time, not just only them, but even the monster in front of them also disappears. The Monster, this time, uses the shadow technique on his from his ce.


    The shadow element is also one of the strong elements that only a few people can use. Because of this, you will not see many people who can use the shadow element or have any technique rted to the shadow element.


    Even though the monster has an advantage because of the shadow element. The Monster is not powerful enough. This is the reason that, even though for a few times, he is able to avoid attacks from Markus and Veena. After that, instantly the Monster became restricted by the me once again.


    Once again, the monster begins to cry in pain as his whole body gets burned. It looks like in this situation he cannot even ess his shadow world. This time Veena did not release that Monster and Markus continuously attacked that monster in that condition.


    If it was your normal early SS-grade monster, The Monster would have already died. Unfortunately, as a Boss monster, it has a huge health bar. But the good thing is that even with the regeneration technique of that monster, The Monster loses his health pretty quickly.


    On the other hand, the red energy which previously connected all those Monsters with the Boss monster has already been destroyed. Because of this, Alena and everyone instantly felt that the Minions in front of them had already be weaker.


    The killing rate also increases. Alena and everyone have finally already killed 90% of those monsters. Currently, only 10% of these monsters remain in that ce.


    ______________________________n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Finally, 15 minutester, they had already killed the Boss monster alongside all those minion monsters. Instantly a huge fluctuation appeared in the Boss room. Even Sam became startled.


    He also did not expect that energy fluctuation. Not only that, he can tell somehow that energy fluctuation is rted to the disappearance of red energy. The red energy present in the room begins to disappear rapidly.


    Alena and the others sat down on the ground while every one of them panting. After the war, they did not get the chance to use their full power. Finally, aftering inside the dungeon, they get the chance, and you can already see everyone beginning to be exhausted.


    All the dead bodies of the Monsters begin to disappear one by one. Many loots begin to appear in those ces. Naturally, none of them pay attention to those loots. Every one of them focused on Sam, who was currently searching around the whole boss''s room. Actually Sam is searching for the altar where he can find the teleportation symbol.

 Chapter 868 - Finding teleportation Altar

    At first Sam did not find anything even after checking the whole Boss room. Fortunately, just when he was able to stop searching for the teleportation symbol, Sam noticed something in the middle of that room.


    You would not be able to find any pir or anything like this. In the middle of the Boss room he noticed a tree that is quite different from those other trees.


    Even though from outside everything will look the same. But after using the spiritual vision technique you would be able to see the difference. First of all, spiritual energy is dense in that area.


    Well even though it is natural that many trees will also absorb spiritual energy, the consumption rate of the spiritual energy is not that high for those trees. Also if you look at that fake tree, then you will notice that somehow a barrier or something like this is present around that tree.


    After looking at all of this anybody can tell that this tree is very different. This is also a reason that Sam became suspicious about that tree.


    Surprisingly he did not notice Markus and the others looking in his direction with curiosity. Like him they are also using their observation technique and spiritual vision technique. Unfortunately, none of them were able to find anything.


    With this they can only watch him. Even though Sam did not tell them what he is doing right now, everyone of them already understands what would be the matter.


    "I think from mortal grade to S-grade dungeon, everyone has some kind of teleportation portal in it which is connected to Terraria. Unfortunately, I am unable to tell why those teleportation portals are connected to Terraria, and why all those teleportation portals are hidden from us."


    This is Sam''s word. Markus and the others still remember those words and with these they can already predict that Sam is searching for the teleportation portal in that Boss room.


    Like this, for almost 30 minutes, Sam searched that whole room desperately. Unfortunately he did not find anything. All this time, Markus and the others are also observing the surrounding area and also trying to find any kind of suspicious things.


    Unfortunately, in the end, none of them were able to find anything and everybody thought that they would not be able to find anything inside that room.


    Alena even wanted to tell Sam to stop searching about that tform or you can say the teleportation symbol. But suddenly Sam began to smile and wasting no time he began to approach toward the left direction.


    This startled her, but she already understood that somehow Sam found something.


    The good thing is that even though it has already been 45 minutes you would not be able to see any monsters in that ce. This is the advantage of the Boss room. They already killed the Boss monster and until they did not leave that room no other monster would respawn.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    __________________________


    1 minuteter,


    Sam is currently standing in front of a tree. Alena and all of them became confused about that tree. None of them are able to find any difference about the tree but they can see Sam is watching that tree carefully.


    "Is this tree rted to the teleportation portal?"


    Suddenly Alena asks Sam.


    "I don''t know what this tree is different from all the trees present here. I can even see the energy barrier around the tree."


    Sam told that to his teacher while still looking at that tree. Naturally he can just directly approach that ce but he wanted to know if there was any danger.


    Using the spiritual vision Sam is trying to find out about the weak point of that barrier. Well it was not easy because it looks like the barrier has anotheryer of spiritual coating.


    Fortunately 10 minutester, he was finally able to find the weak point of that barrier alongside that energy coating. Aftering to that ce he generally puts his hand on that ce and then begins to transfer his spiritual energy.


    At this time, Alena and the others did not disturb him but they are trying their hardest to find out what the difference Sam is seeing right now. Unfortunately they are unable to find anything.


    Like this they were just waiting for Sam to do his own thing when unexpectedly something happened. Actually 10 minutester when the spiritual coating of that ce got destroyed, Alena and the others finally feel the spiritual barrier in front of them.


    Out of nowhere that barrier appeared in front of them. On the other hand if you wanted to know how Sam destroyed that spiritual coating, then it is easy for him. He just transfers his spiritual energy into that spiritual coating which instantly begins to absorb the spiritual energy and like this the spiritual coating gets destroyed.


    For 1 minute a huge fluctuation appeared in the ce but after that everything became normal. At this time he also looked at his teacher and all the other saints.


    Sam for the surprise face of everyone. He quickly tells them what happened. Alena told him that suddenly a barrier appeared in front of them. Finally they can also see the density of the spiritual energy in that ce.


    Sam understands that all this time the spiritual coating is also hiding that whole barrier from everyone. Even Alena and the others were unable to see anything until now.


    Sam, once again focuses on approaching the weak  of that barrier. After reaching that ce he once again begins to transfer his spiritual energy into that barrier.


    Once again 10 minutester the barrier began to crack and in no time the whole barrier disappeared from that ce. Well, once again a huge energy fluctuation appears in that ce.


    But sometimeter everything became normal and Sam finally saw a tform or teleportation alter. There is no tree present in that ce. It looks like the previous tree was just an illusion.


    Sam and everyone approaches that alter appear in front of them. Saming in front of that altar ce is hand on all that to feel the altar. He can tell for sure that this is the same thing that is present inside the Base city''s dungeon.


    Your next journey awaits at empire


    This stone or you can say the altar which is present above the teleportation portal is indestructible. As you know he read the description even before going to Terraria.


    "Sam, can I attack this altar to see if it is really indestructible or not?"


    Suddenly Markus came to Sam and asked him. Sam did not have any problem with that so he told him to do that.


    Sam and everyone retreated from that ce and also created a barrier around them. Markus begins to prepare his strongest attack. Once again his whole body begins to change. The height of Markus increases to 5 feet.


    The whole body of Markus showing his muscles. At this time, Markus'' right hand begins to glow brightly. After that his whole body begins to glow brightly.


    He begins to channel as much spiritual energy in his whole body alongside he also transferring as much spiritual energy as he can to his techniques. Naturally huge energy fluctuations appear in the ce.


    Those previous two energy fluctuations which appear when Sam destroyed both the energy coating and the barrier is nothing in front of that energy fluctuation.


    1 minuteter Sam can even feel spiritual energy around Markus begin to change and begin to be very destructive. Like this five minutester finally he is ready and wasting no time he jumps at that altar.


    "Star st,"


    Is the name of this technique. The moment it touched that indestructible, a huge explosion appeared in that ce. The impact was also so great that every tree around that ce got blown away.


    Even the ground around that ce began to crack and in no time a very big hole got created. Almost a 10 kilometer area around that ce got destroyed. Fortunately Sam and the others were flying in the sky from the start while creating that barrier around them.


    Sometimeter, theyer of the dust and smoke begin to clear. Finally everybody can see that Markus is currently touching that indestructible Altar. It looked like he wanted to find out if there was any kind of damage or not.


    Alena and the others also became curious. They also wanted to know if after receiving that powerful attack if that alter still received any damage or not.


    Everyone of them quickly came to that ce and began to check the condition of that altar carefully. Unfortunately they did not find any kind of crack or anything like that in that altar.


    Suddenly at this time Saint Veena told Markus and John that three of them should attack that altar at once. Look like hearing that Idea Markus and John instantly agree with her and once again Alena and Mira retreat from that ce alongside Sam.

 Chapter 869 - Unexpected situation

    Three of them instantly begin to prepare their strongest attack to attack that altar. Once again Sam created a barrier around the remaining saints. Well, also he is curious to know if they would be able to damage that tform or not.


    Sometimeter, three of them release their attack which one by one hits that altar.


    "Boom!!!"


    In the same ce, three big explosions appear one by one. Instantly the destruction around that ce increases and the whole that previously got created in the ce also bes deeper.


    This time the impact was much more powerful which affected a 30 km area at once. Everything present in that area was destroyed. Enjoy exclusive adventures from empire


    The shockwave is also very powerful and can even affect Alena and Mira. Fortunately, both of them are present inside the barrier created by Sam. With this, both of them did not receive any damage.


    But three of them can already see the destruction that happened because of those three attacks. The whole ce was filled with ayer of smoke. Theyer of smoke is very dense as you can also see dust and other things present in thatyer of smoke.


    Markus, Veena, and John even got blown away by their attack and the impact of their attack. Fortunately, Sam helped them to stabilize themselves and also created a barrier around them.


    With this, all of them tried to see what would happen to the altar. Sometimeter, finally, theyer of smoke faded away from that ce. Everybody can finally see the altar but surprisingly once again nobody can see any kind of damage appear on that altar.


    Also, somehow the ground beneath the altar did not get destroyed even after those attacks. Sam previously thought even though they are unable to destroy the altar they can damage the ground beneath the altar.


    It looks like he was wrong. Except for that ce, you can see a big hole appear in that ce. Naturally, even Sam wanted to attack that altar to see if he could destroy it, but at the same time, he thought would the dungeon be able to tolerate the impact of his attack?


    ''Come to think of it, I hear a crack sound. I''m not imagining anything. But if I look around now then I would not be able to see anywhere that has any kind of crack.


    Is it possible that the dungeon begins to get damaged by their attack? I think this is possible and I should stop them from doing this. Nobody knows what would happen if a dungeon got destroyed. For now, I did not want any kind of trouble.''


    Sam decided to stop Markus and the others from attacking that altar. He did not want the dungeon to get destroyed by their attack.


    There could be a chance, if something like that naturally happened that something bad happened to their. So because of this, immediately approach them and tell them not to attack the altar.


    Hearing the word of Sam, Markus and everyone also agree with him. Even though they did not notice any kind of crack around them, there is a possibility that if they continuously attack like this then the dungeon will begin to crack.


    Naturally, nobody wanted anything like that to happen. First of all, nobody knows what would happen if a dungeon got destroyed. So it would be better if they left that dungeon.


    With this Sam, everyone rests for a few minutes. At that time he came near that indestructible altar and touched that altar. Once again he got the single that he can easily put in his inventory.


    It looks like the force that created those alters and also protected those teleportation symbols, did not work in front of his inventory. He did not decide to put that altar in his inventory.


    _______________________________n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Sometimeter they leave the boss room and then go downstairs to the third floor. When they came to that floor, surprisingly, they could see that all the monsters present on that floor had already be free from that Red energy.


    All those monsters maintain their distance from them after sensing the spiritual aura. 6 of them did not face any of these monsters while going toward the second floor.


    This time they use their full speed to go there. Sam is also worried about his family so naturally he wanted to go to the first floor as quickly as he could.


    But at the same time, he has confidence in them so he does not directly teleport. Before going there he also wanted to see the condition of the second floor and the third floor.


    The monsters present on the third floor have already be normal and already maintained a distance from them. The same thing also happened on the second floor.


    This time they did not take even one hour to reach the second floor. They only take 30 minutes to reach the second floor and once again take 30 minutes to reach the first floor.


    But the moment they reached the first floor, everyone was surprised. First of all, they instantly notice there are no monsters present around them.


    Not only that Sam can already sense the whole floor and the surprising thing is that other than his family he was not able to sense any monster. Now this is a very surprising thing.


    He and everyone approaches Gloria and the others. Gloria and everyone are finally able to sense Sam and the others. With this, all of them became rxed and just sat down on the ground.


    All the time they are roaming around the whole first floor to make sure that there are no monsters present there. All this time they did not face any monster but still none of them became rxed even for a second.


    With the arrival of Sam and the saints, they can finally rx. Sam already came close to them and noticed all of his family members and sister Fiona currently lying down on the ground.


    It looks like all of them are exhausted. Well, he gives them some time to rest and recover their mental energy and spiritual energy.


    Sometimeter,


    Gloria reveals everything that happened to the first floor. Everyone bes surprised after hearing what happened on the first floor. Who can think that suddenly all the monsters will stop moving?


    "I think that it happened because suddenly all those strange spiritual energies stopped transferring. That would be the reason that the huge spiritual fluctuation appears on the first floor and all the monsters stop moving."


    Sam told that to everyone and everyone also agreed with him. Sam also told Gloria what happened to the boss''s room. He also told how they were able to find a new altar present in the boss''s room. How was he able to find that altar which was hidden from everyone?


    Hearing all of this Gloria and the others be surprised. But the good thing is that everything is over right now and they can finally go back. They also told Sam that some time ago the whole dungeon began to shake very violently.


    Most likely that has happened due to all the saints'' attacks that alter. Everyone also thinks this is possible. At this time they also thought it was a good thing that this top attacked the altar. They did not want to experience what would happen after destroying the dungeon.


    There could be a chance a more dangerous situation would appear on their. What if monsters who are even more powerfulpared to Sam appear in that ce? There is an infinite possibility that could happen if they destroy that dungeon.


    With these, they finally decided to go out of the dungeon. Sometimeter, finally one by one came out of the dungeon. Instantly Sam bes surprised because in front of him, he can see a huge crowd pointing their camera toward them.


    It Looks like those people are from the media and all of them came here to interview all the saints who went inside the dungeon.


    "Don''t worry about them. Let me handle them as I am very experienced in handling this kind of situation."


    Markus can see the troubled face of Sam. So he told him not to worry about anything and let him handle the media. Maria and Aria immediately came to them and asked if everything was okay or not.


    They also told him that some time ago the whole dungeon began to shake. They immediately contacted all the remaining saints and told them toe there. They thought some unexpected situation would appear inside the dungeon, and a monster was going toe outside.


    Because of this, both of them were also very serious all the time. Did not even finish talking when suddenly the remaining saints teleported to that ce. All of them watch over the whole danger zone and also deal with some monsters.


    But suddenly they got notified by Saint Aria that something unexpected happened to the dungeon. Immediately, he uses the teleportation system to get there.

 Chapter 870 - Back to Home

    "Well, everything is over. So none of you have to worry about anything. Also, please arrange some guards in front of this dungeon. I don''t want anyone to go inside this tension because of curiosity.


    As anybody can tell, these dungeons are very dangerous. Until nobody does breaks through to S-grade, that person will not be able to qualify to enter this dungeon."


    Sam told this to John. Saint John had already contacted the warrior association and told them to put some warriors in front of the dungeon. After that, Saint John also tells Aria and the others that they will tell them everything about the monsters and what kind of situation they have faced. Before that, they need to take some rest.n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Aria and the others did not have any problem with that. Except Aria and Maria, all those other saints have already gone back to the danger zone.


    Markus and the others, after saying goodbye to everyone, go back to their house. Now all of them are mentally tired and need a good rest to recover their mental energy.


    Fiona also goes back to her house after saying goodbye to Gloria and the others. Sam and his family directly teleport to their house and his family, without wasting a single second, go back to their room.


    You could say all three of them are very tired. All this time, the 3 of them, alongside Fiona, watching over the whole first floor. They did not even rest for a single second.


    All this time they were just thinking that if they took some rest, those monsters would take the chance to go out of the dungeon. Because of this, they roam around the whole first floor all the time.


    Sam did not have any problem with that. He also went back to his room. Well, even though he was not tired like those other people, he still decided to rest for a few hours.


    They came back to their house around 12 p.m. and Sam woke up from his sleep around 3:00 p.m. Sometimeter, he came downstairs and saw no one was present there.


    Looks like his sister, mom and dad are still sleeping right now. He decided to prepare food for them. Naturally, they would be hungry after waking up from their sleep.


    Sometimeter, Read exclusive chapters at empire


    ''Tomorrow I will contact the human king. Only they can give me the location of that. I will stay here for a few more days to see if there are any other new dungeons or not. After that, I will immediately go to that.''


    Sam thought about all of this while he was cooking food for his family. He was unable to get any information about the from where his mother came to Eden Blue. Well, this is natural, because if those people from the other did note to their, then they would not even have any kind of information rted to that.


    Because of this, if he wanted to know about that from where his mother came to Eden Blue, then he needed to contact the human king or the oni king. Only both of them can help him in this matter.


    He has already decided to contact the human King tomorrow. After that, he will stay there for a few more days before teleporting to that. Before going to that, Sam also wanted to see if any new dungeons appeared on his or not.


    Even though he had the confidence that all the saints would be able to handle everything, still before leaving his he wanted to make sure everything was okay.


    But at the same time, he was thinking about how to tell this news to his family. He was definitely sure that his mother would be anxious and immediately try to stop him from going to that.


    There could be a chance that his sister wanted toe with him to that. But unfortunately, he would not be able to bring anyone with him using the World Bridge.


    ''Sigh, I needed to assure them that I would be okay, and they did not have to worry about it.''


    _____________________________


    Around 7:00 p.m., his sister, alongside his mum and dad, came downstairs and three of them became surprised when they noticed Sam was present in the hall room.


    Looks like his mom and sister are preparing themselves to go to the kitchen to prepare some food. Sam told them instantly that they did not have to prepare any food as he had already prepared food for them. Hearing that, they just smiled and then all of them went to the dining room.


    Sometimeter, they came back to the hall room and sat down. At this time, Sam decided to give them information about the second floor and the third floor. He describes the situation of the second floor as the same as the first floor.


    They will find exactly the same monsters on the second floor. But when they go to the third floor, everything will be different. First of all, the surrounding atmosphere will change alongside the scenery.


    Naturally, they would need to face new monsters and, once again, they need to find out the attack pattern and the weakness of those monsters. Sam told them about all the monsters that he had seen earlier on that floor.


    Naturally, there could be a chance that there were other monsters present in that ce as he only went in the straight direction. So he is not aware if there are other monsters in those other directions.


    Gloria, Hina and Victor became serious after hearing all of this. Naturally, if possible, they also wanted to go to the 3rd floor and then go to the boss''s room. But before that, they need to prepare themselves and also need to increase their strength.


    Only after that will they have the ability to go to the boss''s room. Sam also begins to describe to them in detail what happened inside the boss began. He told them how they saw only statues inside that room.


    But suddenly those statues begin toe into life. How those monsters have a thin red line connected with the Boss monster. How was the monster supplying them with the strange red energy that increased the power of those minion monsters?


    All of this naturally amazed his family. After that, Sam told them how they defeated those monsters. Also, it looks likely at that time when he absorbs all the red energying out from that monster, that energy fluctuations appear on all the floors present inside the dungeon.


    That strange red energy is behind all the abnormal things that happen inside the dungeon. Because of that strange energy, those monsters suddenly stop moving and somehow the respawn rate of those monsters also gets affected.


    During that time, Gloria, Hina and Victor ask many questions about the monsters and about the situation. Sam answered all the questions.


    "Also, what happened to that altar?"


    Gloria asks that question to Sam. She wanted to know if they were finally able to destroy that altar or if the altar was still present inside that room.


    "Well, as I told you before. That altar is created by an indestructible material. Even all the saints were unable to destroy that thing after attacking the thing at once.


    In the end, every one of them also wanted to attack that altar. Fortunately, I stop them before they can do something like that. It will directly damage the dungeon and there could be a chance that the dungeon will be destroyed by the impact of their attacks."


    Sam told them that the altar was still present inside the boss''s room. Also, if he is not wrong, then the damage present inside the boss'' room is already reconstructed and even the barrier once again appears around that altar alongside that energy coating.


    That energy coating is the thing that helps that barrier and the altar hide from others. From outside, nobody would be able to find anything in that ce.


    They would be able to see trees present in that ce. Also, if he is not wrong, then even if someone tries to go toward that ce, then other than the tree, that person would not find anything.


    Naturally, all of this makes Sam very curious. First of all, he is really curious who created these dungeons and why all those altars and teleportation symbols are present inside all the dungeons.


    Unfortunately, he did not have anyone that he could ask those questions. It would be good for him if he was able to meet the goddess once again. But it had already been 3 years, but he still had not met the goddess after that previous meeting.


    ____________________________


    The next day,


    Markus and the others went to the warrior association and watched over all the situations that happened when they were not present.


    Fortunately, nothing serious happened and only some monsters from the danger zone tried to attack the safe zone. But they have already been killed by other saints. Other than that, they also get to know many people trying to get close to that newly arrived dungeon.


    But the moment they came close to that ce, all of them became unconscious because of the pressure.

 Chapter 871 - Sending message

    "As usual, every time a new dungeon appears, this kind of thing will happen. It would be good if Sam was able to find out about that strange energy.


    Every year, somehow, those monsters get affected by those strange energies, and they will get the power to break out of the dungeon. Previously, we had already tried to bring out monsters outside the dungeon. Unfortunately, all those monsters did not survive outside the engine.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    But I am definitely sure, because of that strange energy, those monsters could survive outside the dungeon."


    "Hmm¡­ you are right. If we get to know how to counterattack or destroy the connection of that strange energy, then I don''t think any of the monsters will be able toe out of the dungeon.


    Unfortunately, even though we had already tried to search for that strange energy and the reason for those monsters getting the ability to go outside, we did not find anything.


    Well, I can understand that we did not have that kind of power to find out about this. Because of this, I also think only Sam would be able to find out about this."


    "I also think the same thing. But we should not force people to do anything like that. I can say that from the moment he came back to Eden Blue, he did not get that much time to rest.


    One after another, he became busy with many matters. If I am not wrong, then most likely he is also worried about these new dungeons.


    He would be observing the whole safe zone more than before. Naturally, he is worried about the new dungeon and the monsters of the dungeons."


    "Well, all the thinking about that teleportation altar. I am thinking about what to do about that thing. First of all, Sam had already informed us, that after we came out of the dungeon, everything would be normal, and even that doubleyered dungeon would be recovered automatically.


    Naturally, we would not allow anyone to enter the dungeon. Still, I wanted to know if we will say when you are in danger because of that or not."


    "John, I don''t think we will face any problems because of that teleportation altar. All of you must remember we have Sam with us, and he already gave us the guarantee that there would be no monster that came out from another."


    Veena said that to John. Inside the warrior association, you can see those saints discussing all the things that they have found inside the dungeon.


    Naturally, those other saints will also go inside the dungeon tomorrow and, before that, they want to collect as much information as they can. They also wanted to kill the Boss monster, but unfortunately, nobody knew how long it would take for the Boss monster to respawn.


    "It would be good if Sam was present here right now. As we finally came out of the dungeon, I suddenly began to think about a serious matter.


    Until now, we did not publish the news about Gloria and the others who had just made it through to S-grade. We need to arrange a press meeting for Gloria and the others.


    On the other hand, we need to select a group of warriors who also reach the peak A grade. Those warriors needed to find that special energy inside their body and use it they needed to break through.


    If required, we should approach Sam about this. Naturally, we should not select randomly. As Sam told us before, we need to go through a selection process to select those warriors.


    Even after the rechecking, I am sure that there are no traitors among us. But still, I wanted to make sure that nothing like that happened to our warrior association.


    It is true that our people also need to be stronger. All the time, those monsters are present inside the dungeon and the danger zone is getting stronger and stronger. Not every time will we be able to protect those warriors. Find adventures at empire


    So, because of this, everyone needs to improve themselves. Unfortunately, it looks like even after using the limit breaker, nobody can break through sessfully. I think that special energy also absorbs the special energy from those limit breakers.


    Sam previously told us that the special energy present inside the warriors is the same as those special energies present inside a limit breaker."


    "I also think you are right. We should talk to him about this. Also, it would be good if we checked our warriors once again and selected some people. Also, I think it would be good if we decided to arrange the press meeting 5 dayster."


    At that time, Maria and the others would get the time to go inside the dungeon ande out of the dungeon. For them, the first floor and the second floor would not be a problem.


    But from third base, everything will be hard but not impossible. Naturally, they can easily kill those monsters on the third floor. It is just inside the third floor that most of the monsters will create a huge group before attacking anyone.


    Maria and the others did not have any problem with that, and they also agreed to go inside the dungeon today.


    10 minutester,


    All the saints who will be going inside the dungeon disappear from that ce. They go back to their house to prepare themselves. It has been a long time since they fought like this against any monsters.


    You have to say that all of them are very curious and also excited. It''s been a long time since they got to use their full power. Even during a fight when they fight each other or Sam, they do not get the chance to use their full power.


    __________________________


    The next day, Sam came downstairs around 8:00 a.m. and he could already see his family waking up from their sleep. His sister is not present there and most likely she is busy with her training.


    Only Victor and Hina are present at that ce and both of them are preparing breakfast. Well, Victor helped Hina. Sam did not decide to disturb them and went back to the hall room to sit down there.


    Sometimeter, Sam''s mom called him to eat his breakfast. At this time, Gloria also came to the dining room aftering back from the training room.


    "Well, you are going to the Warrior Association? I wanted to spar with you. Coming back from the dungeon gave me a lot of experience which also enlightened me. Because of this, I wanted to spar with you."


    Gloria said that to Sam. Sam smiled after hearing that.


    "No problem."


    Well, he did not have anything to do today, so he could just spar with his sister.


    _______________________________


    Back to Terraria,


    The human king and the Oni king were surprised after suddenly receiving the message from Sam. Both of them became startled and immediately became serious.


    They thought Sam had sent them a message because he was in a dangerous situation. But fortunately, they calm down and look at the message. Normally, no person would be able to read that message as you can only see some messy things.


    Actually, those are the codenguages. As you know, the distance between Terraria and Eden Blue is very long. Also, they did not have any bettermunication than those.


    The human king and Oni king instantly became busy understanding the message sent by Sam. They wanted to know if Sam was facing any kind of danger or not. Also, they did not tell anyone about this.


    Maria and others would be worried about him. Because of this, both of them did not tell this news to anyone. They did not even contact each other to share this information.


    Naturally, Sam wanted to know the location of the Ratus. Also, if it is possible, then he wanted to know more information about that.


    It is a good thing that many people from Terraria like to travel to others like this. Now, because of those people, people from Terraria can collect information about others.


    Sam also, on the other hand, did not tell anyone about this. He did not want to inform his parents or anyone about this. Sam is also waiting for the right moment to give them this information. Before that, he wanted to receive a reply from both the kings.


    The thing is that he did not know how long it would take for both kings to send him the information. It is like wirelessmunication that can travel anywhere.


    There is a chance that people from others will also receive the information, but until they do not know how to decode the codenguage, they will not be able to know anything.


    This is also a reason that Sam is not worried about those others. If possible, he wanted to go back to Terraria to get more information about Ratus. But that will not be possible for now.

 Chapter 872 - Excited about the entrance examination

    Gloria created a very powerful ice beam and shot toward Sam. But Sam doesn''t have to do anything. He just simply created a barrier in front of him and the ice beam hit that barrier.


    Instantly, a big impact was created on that ce. Sam did not get affected by that impact. You can say that he did not even feel that impact as the barrier in front of him deflected all the impact toward Gloria.


    Fortunately, despite feeling that much impact, Gloria is still able to hold on and continue to use the ice beam. She wanted to break the barrier in front of Sam.


    Unfortunately, she realized it would not be possible. Instantly, she disappears from her previous location using the ice escape technique. The ground beneath Sam had already frozen and Gloria appeared behind Sam.


    Unfortunately for her, Sam had already noticed her. Instantly, he turned around and attacked her using a fireball. Even though he only created one fireball, you should not understand that fireball.


    Naturally, Gloria also did not underestimate that fireball as she could already feel the dangering from that fireball. She instantly creates an ice wall in front of her and also uses the ice escape technique to escape from that ce.


    The next second she appeared 200 m away from Sam. On the other hand, a huge explosion also happened in the ce where she had appeared previously. That whole ce melted away. Not only that, you can also see a hole also created in that ce.


    Naturally, all of these happened due to that fireball. That fireball contains a huge amount of fire energy alongside spiritual energy. The moment it touched that ice wall, instantly it blew up. Fortunately, Sam controls the impact of the technique using the telekinesis technique.


    On the other hand, Gloria instantly created 2000 ice Spears and shot them toward Sam. Unfortunately for her, the barrier was still present in front of Sam. Gloria finally noticed that, so she stopped creating those Ice Spears.


    Instantly, she gathered a huge amount of ice in her hand. Once again, the surrounding temperature begins to decrease and a sky-blue colored ball begins to appear in Gloria''s hands. That ball contains only ice elements. Suddenly, she throws that ball toward Sam.


    Sam did not dodge or do anything and just curiously looked at that ice ball. Well, this time something unexpected happened. The barrier in front of him almost got frozen away by the attack. Not only that but in the next second, many ice Spears attack that barrier.


    "Boom!!!"


    Suddenly, Sam disappears from his ce and appears not far away from that ce. On the other hand, you can see an ice dragon. A huge mouth of an ice dragon suddenly appears beneath that ce and tries to attack him. But Sam is already able to sense the danger.


    "ck ice prison."


    Gloria once again appears behind Sam and this time she uses the ck ice to attack him. Compared to normal ice, ck ice is the toughest. To break the ck ice, you need to use more power.


    Gloria, on the other hand, instantly controls the ck ice, and suddenly, from all directions, that ck ice covers Sam. Not only that, it also creates a prison for Sam. Gloria did not stop there.


    In the next second, she created a huge ice beam attack. This time she uses a lot of spiritual energy to create that ice beam to attack. He wanted to prevent Sam from escaping that ce by using the ck ice prison and also wanted to make him be a frozen statue.


    But that would not be possible. In the next second, Sam destroys that ice prison even without using any other technique other than his fist. Even if he did not use spiritual energy or soul energy, he would still be able to win by just using his physical power.


    With just one punch, he destroys that prison and also instantly punches toward that ice beam. This time he coated his hand with spiritual energy before punching that ice beam.


    "Boom,"


    A huge impact was created on that ce the moment his punch hit that ice beam. The whole trade also got covered in ayer of smoke. Gloria instantly retreated from the ce.


    Suddenly, Sam appears behind Gloria and instantly punches her. Gloria senses the danger. She instantly created a barrier behind her. But the barrier, in the next second, got destroyed.


    "Ahh!!!"


    Gloria also got blown away by that attack. But Sam did not stop there. Before Gloria can fall on the ground. He already appears behind them and this time once again punches her. Explore more at empire


    ____________________________


    "Frozen time."


    Gloria uses her most powerful attack. Instantly, a dome-like shape was created around Sam by those ice elements. In the next second, everything inside the door began to get frozen.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Even Sam got frozen away by that ice dome. On the other hand, Gloria has alreadynded on the ground, and she is panting right now. Gloria is fully exhausted.


    She was just about to check that ice dome, but suddenly she noticed someone standing behind her. She turned around and saw it was Sam.


    With this, the winner is decided. Gloria did not think that much and justy down on the ground. Finally, the sparring match was over. Gloria would need something to recover her full spiritual and mental energy.


    Sam did not say anything and just sat beside her. Well, even though he did not use even 20% of his power. But still, he was happy that his sister had be powerful.


    Naturally, she just recently became an S-grade warrior. So, she didn''t even reach the limit of early S-grade. Sam already ns to help his family to get those crystals to increase their overall status.


    He had already decided to go inside the dungeon and kill as many monsters as he could. On the other hand, the main problem is that there is no Epic-grade dungeon.


    Because of this, the saints would not be able to get any of those crystals. Even with the arrival of the new dungeon, they would not be able to increase their status. With this, he decided to give some of the crystals that he had with him and also decided to see if he could buy those crystals from the system shop.


    Before going to that new, he had already decided to go inside that new dungeon, then once again. He wants to kill as many monsters as he can and, after that, he will be selling all that loot inside the system shop to get gold coins.


    ____________________________


    Sometimeter,


    Gloria finally recovered 60% of her spiritual energy alongside her mental energy. With this, she gets up from the ground and also begins to drink the energy drink given by Sam.


    Sam, after that, begins to tell her all the mistakes and the weaknesses that he will find during the fight. Naturally, she needs to improve in those matters, so that nobody will be able to take advantage of those weaknesses.


    Gloria noted down every one of those weaknesses and those mistakes. But for now, Sam told her to rest. She had just finished the sparring match, so naturally, she would need to give her body the proper rest.


    If you look at the time, it is already 6:00 p.m.  Both of them, after freshening up, went to the dining room to eat something. Hina already expected them to be there so she had already prepared some food for them. But she and Victor decided to rest for today.


    They will start practicing tomorrow. But tomorrow Gloria is forbidden to train. This is also a reason that Sam agreed to fight her.


    Sometimeter,


    All four of them are currently in the hall room and looking at the news. Well, the news channels are telling everyone about various things. The good thing is that many people begin to advance more quickly after their evolves.


    Many people begin to awaken their spiritual energy. Many new talented students have also begun to appear. Those news channels also begin to talk about the entrance examination.


    Due to all of these recent matters, the entrance examination has already been postponed, and it will be arranged 8 monthster. Before that, as you know, the Warrior Association would be busy preparing for the annual collegepetition and the Warriorpetition.


    After finishing bothpetitions, only then the Warrior Association and themittee of the Warrior Academy can arrange the entrance examination.


    You can say Sam is also excited about seeing the entrance examination. He wanted to see the potential of those students and the improvement of the students.


    He already expected all the students who would be participating in the entrance examination would be able to improve themselves much morepared to students in previous years.


    Other than that, he is also thinking about whether he should advance the bloodline of all the saints or not. He had already made them more powerful, and he did not know if he should do that or not.


    After thinking for some time, he decided to postpone that matter. For now, all the saints would be okay. They already have true spiritual energy. So they should just get used to that.

 Chapter 873 - Sams message

    Back to Terraria,


    The human king and the Oni king were busy decoding the message sent by Sam. That was the immediate thought about going to his, but after that, they decided that they should first decode the message.


    If he requires their help, then he can ask directly for that. At this time, he does not need to send that kind of message to them. Naturally, this is rted to other things. This is also a reason that, before doing anything, both of them wanted to decode the message.


    They had already told theirmander, then every high official, that for a few days, both of them would be busy. Well, if there is only a serious matter, both of them should be informed.


    Like this for almost one week, both of them continuously focused on decoding the message. Finally, both of them can read the message sent by Sam.


    [I hope you are doing okay. Well, I am giving you the good news that everything is solved on my and I will be back to Terraria after handling everything on my.


    Before anything, I wanted to tell you that those dark humans also try to take advantage of our by trying to steal the''s core.]


    Just after reading these, both of them became surprised and at the same time very serious. Both of them know what this means. This means those Abyss humans were also involved in this matter.


    Both of them thought the situation on Sam''s mostly became very dangerous. But, it looks like, despite the dangerous situation, Sam has already handled everything.


    [Well, as you can predict, I handle those dark humans. The good news is that those Abyss humans did not involve themselves in this matter. Discover more content at empire


    From the moment I came to this, I naturally tried to handle them and have already destroyed the ns of those dark humans. Because of this, those dark humans also ask for help from those Abyss humans.


    Unfortunately, those Abyss humans did not participate in this. They only send some more dark artifacts. But even with that, dealing with those dark humans was very dangerous.


    Compared to those other people from others, dealing with those dark humans was very dangerous. From time to time, those dark humans try to harm all the people of Eden Blue.


    Aftering to this, I directly started creating a stronghold where everybody can stay safe without getting affected by war.


    It looks like those dark humans realize that they will not be able to affect the strongholds and, because of this, they decide to control the minds of many people from our.


    Those warriors did not even realize that they were affected by those dark humans. Those Nightmare monsters affected all those people from my.


    Fortunately, I was able to find those monsters and with these, one by one, I killed all those monsters alongside some other warriors. But still, those dark humans did not stop trying to kill our people or, you could say, to be spared chaos.


    Other than those dark humans, we have many other people from many differents. Like those people from Earth who call themselves the prime humans. Other than them, there are also people from the Elvana.


    Unfortunately, none of those people were able to survive against me and my people in the end. In the end, all of them got killed by us.


    It looks like those people, in the end, realize that they will be going to die. But even in that situation, those people did not lose hope and tried to contact their home to send help.


    Unfortunately for any of them, their decides to abandon them. Because of this, 99% of these people were killed during the war and only a few of them able to survive were already surrendered themselves and present in our prison.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    It looks like those people realize that surrendering themselves would be a better thing than trying to survive on their own. Don''t worry, I already read the minds of the people and I can tell that they did not have any intention of harming me or my people.


    Like this, our is sessfully able to evolve. One by one, all people from my get rewarded by the after evolution. All those Early Elite grade warriors, breakthrough to intermediate Elite grade. Other than that, the density of spiritual energy also increases.


    So you do not have to worry about me or my people. I require some help and because of this, I said to contact you.


    I needed information about the as I would be going there to deal with those people. Well, you did not have to take any action against theses as those people aren''t worthy of your time.


    The name of the is Ratus and I need information about this. First of all, I needed to know the location of that and also all the information about that.


    Well, aftering back to Terraria, I will inform you why I wanted to know the location of this. Also, if possible, this time I will be bringing my family or more people to Terraria.


    Also, I have pretty interesting information to give all of you. I will do that aftering back to Terraria. What is the situation in Terraria?


    Did those Abyss humans still try to attack warriors? Or were you able to find any other people who had already betrayed the warrior association? I hope nothing like that happens. Also, I told this information to the human king and the Oni human king.]


    Like this, finally, both of them finish the letter. Well, both of them finally smiled after reading the information. Well, Sam is a hero of their country and, because of him, both the King was able to save all of their people from that kind of disaster.


    Naturally, both of them are very grateful to Sam and if both of them are ready to help him in this kind of matter, it is a good thing that he already handles everything on his.


    After reading the letter sent by Sam, both of them be confused about one thing. They were unable to understand why Sam wanted to know the location of Ratus. Naturally, both of them will be sending information about that.


    On the other hand, both of them are also curious to know the power of those prime dragons. Unfortunately, Sam did not send them any information rted to those monsters.


    Well, they can just ask him when he wille back. Both of them became happy when Sam told him that he was going toe back after finishing every matter on his.


    Also, both of them already expected that the human king/Oni human king would also get informed by Sam. Only both of their kingdoms are close to Sam.


    With this, both of them finally came out from the library while burning Sam''s letter. Well, they did not want to leave any information about this. Sam has already be an important figure on their and, with these, he also has many enemies.


    Even though both of them did not think they had any traitors, both of them still did not want to inform anyone about anything regarding Sam.


    If he was seriously bringing his family this time, then his family members could be in danger the moment they came here.


    With this, both of them destroyed all the traces about thatter and also destroyed the code given by Sam. After that, both of them decide to search for information about the Ratus.


    ____________________________


    Back to Eden Blue,


    Sam did not know that he had that kind of bounty on his head in Terraria. Well, even if he gets to know about this, he will not care about it.


    It had already been one week since he sent the message to both the human king and the Oni human king.


    Both of them most likely have already got the message and are already searching for Ratus. Sam just hopes that the distance of this is not that far from Eden Blue.


    ''I don''t think the distance would be the same as the distance between Terraria and Eden Blue. I think this Ratus, will be closer and with this, it would not take me that much time to reach that.


    But this time, while using the World Bridge, I needed to be careful as I did not want to identally create any energy activation that could alert any enemies. I need to be careful about these and also need to control the energy fluctuations created by the World Bridge.''


    Sam already knew that previously, when he came back to his using the world bridge a huge energy fluctuation was created which also alerted all the saints and almost every warrior in Eden Blue.


    Naturally, he needed to control the energy fluctuations before using the World Bridge. Fortunately, he already knows how to do that, as previously both the old kings told him how to do that.

 Chapter 874 - The meeting

    Currently, inside the warrior association, Sam is present in the meeting room alongside all the saints. Everyone went there to discuss those chosen warriors of the warrior association.


    Those people will receive help from them to break through to S-grade. On the other hand, if you are wondering about those other people, then all of them have already decided that after 2 months they will announce this news to everyone.


    Other than that, they had already decided to announce the news about Gloria and the others to everyone. Well, they decided that they would share this information with everyone.


    That would make everyone very curious, but at the same time, the Warrior Association would also announce that if warriors wanted to receive help from the Warrior Association to break through, they needed to have enough achievement.


    Naturally, many people will be disappointed after hearing this. But everybody needs to understand that they have just survived a disaster. Where because of their carelessness, they could just be a mindless fool.


    This is the reason that the Warrior Association wanted to take this action. Other than that, the number of people who reach the peak A Grade is not that high.


    So all those people who are at that power level could work hard in these 2 months to qualify to get help from the Warrior Association.


    Other than that, almost 90% of those people have the qualification to get help from the warrior association because of their achievements and also as they participate in the war.


    But 10% of these people did not do anything like this and those people would be the ones who needed to achieve those achievements to get the help.


    On the other hand, they could just directly choose all the people from the warrior association, but they decided to choose only some of them. Before anything, they wanted to see what kind of behavior people would make after breaking through to S-grade.


    Also, they wanted to see the reaction of those other warriors of the Warrior Association. Only after that will those other warriors get selected.


    3 hourster, the meeting finished and everybody decided that around 6:00 p.m. they would be calling all the media to announce the news about Gloria and the others.


    _____________________________


    "Also, what do you think about those people from others?"


    "Hmm¡­ as discussed earlier, they would be present inside the prison for 6 months. After that, if we found their behavior was right, and they did not have any motive for attacking our people or anything like that, we would release them.


    In 6 months anything can happen. In 6 months, naturally, those people can have different motivations. What if they suddenly be motivated to attack our people? Also, what would happen if they were suddenly able to contact their people?


    Because of this, it would be based on observing them for 6 months, and after that, we would decide if we should release them or not. But one thing is clear: even if we release them, they would not be properly free."


    "You are right. I also agree with this. Even though for now they did not have any kind of motivation like this and just wanted to survive by surrendering themselves, this thing could easily change the moment they would be able to contact their.


    Those people decided to surrender themselves after realizing that their had abandoned them. But if they are suddenly able to contact their and their also helps them, then naturally they can try to attack our once again."


    "Hmmm¡­ well forget about those people from others. I am worried about those monsters who grow stronger every day. It will not be long before those monsters can reach the same power level as us.


    The probability is that those monsters looked like they did not have any kind of limitations. They are just growing every day."


    "Don''t worry about that. I already checked all those monsters and I can give you the guarantee that if those monsters wanted to reach the same power level as you, then it would almost take them five years if something unexpected did not happen.


    Naturally, there could be a chance that somehow powerful monsters, who have the same power level as you, will appear in the danger zone. Well, we still did not know that much about the monsters present in the danger zone. Recently we were just able to observe the whole danger zone.


    But I think everybody has already noticed that the price of our is beginning to increase. I think it will take some time for our to be stable and at that time the size of our will increase.


    The size of the safe zone and the danger zone would definitely increase. At that time, many things can happen in the danger zone. Naturally, many monsters can directly appear in the danger zone via those portals that previously brought those monsters to our.


    But don''t worry about this, I have full confidence that before that all of you will be able to increase your power. Even though you are unable to get any kind of crystals of your power level.


    But still, all of you can absorb those crystals that you got after hunting those peak S-grade monsters. With those, you are still able to increase your power.


    Also, one more thing everybody should be careful about. More dungeons will appear on our. It could take some time, but I am definitely sure about this. Also, SS-grade will definitely appear on our.


    Before that, I want everyone to be as powerful as you. We need to stay prepared for every kind of situation."


    Sam said all of this to everyone. Everyone also agrees with him because they also know that this is the truth. Even though it can take some time, more powerful dungeons will appear on their as the power limit of their increases.


    Stay updated via empire


    Definitely, everyone needed to be powerful enough to handle all these matters. Sometimeter, everybody decided to go to the observation room where you could see those warriors of the warrior association observing the whole safe zone using their drones.


    The good thing is that time is also helping those people to advance those drones. First of all, he would be increasing the energy capacity of those drones and would also use those spirit stones as a new power source for those drones.


    After this, you want to make sure that those drones have the ability to find anyone, even if that person or that monster is using some kind of invisible technique.


    On the other hand, it looks like those previous drones also are not working properly because of the density of spiritual energy. The previous energy source was affected by the density and with this, they decided to increase the energy capacity alongside the new energy source.


    The crime rate in Eden Blue is not that high. Normally, you can only find some people with a corrupted mind doing some dirty work. But the moment they get fined by the Warrior Association, they will get punished.


    Other than that, everybody knows that almost 24/7 they would get observed by the warrior association.


    _________________________


    Sam went back to his house and this time you can also see his friends are also present at his house. All of them came to his house to get some pointers about their techniques, and they also wanted to know how much improvement they had madepared to before.


    Not just them, almost everyone wanted to get his opinion about their improvement. Alena also asks him to spar with her. Naturally, she wanted to know how much improvement she had made and Sam was the best person to tell her about this.


    Naturally, the roles have already reversed. Previously, she was the one who always checked Sam''s improvement. But right now, everything has changed, and it is Sam who checks Alena''s improvement. But she did not have any problem with that.


    She even brings her sister there to get help from Sam. For now, time is the best person they have with them who is more powerfulpared to them and also gives them all the suggestions that can help them to grow stronger and ovee their weaknesses.


    Sam did not directly go back to his bedroom as his friends were present there, so he decided to meet his friends. But after going downstairs, he was unable to find them in his training room. Only then did he decide to check other training rooms.


    He finally found them inside his sister''s training room. That training room was built for Gloria. Sam is already nning to have more training rooms for sister Fiona and even his friends.


    It looks like all of them like to train here more than they would train in their own training room. Not that he has any problem with that. This is also a reason he decided to build new training rooms.


    Aftering inside the training room, he notices his sister fighting with Fiona, and all of his friends are watching the fight between both of them.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om

 Chapter 875 - Curious

    Sam is not surprised after seeing the fight between his sister and sister Fiona. But naturally he also became curious as after bing S-grade warriors, this would be the first time both of them will fight like this


    Jeni and others maintain the distance from both of them. It is a good thing that they maintain the distance but as the training room is not that big all of them can still get affected.


    You can already see the barrier in front of them which they try to maintain already shows the sign of broken down. This is normal as in front of attacks created by S-grade warriors, they would not be able to maintain the barrier for that long.


    Sam instantly appeared beside them and created a strong barrier. Jeni and everyone be surprised for a second but then notice it is Sam.


    Finally all of them became rxed and just smiled at him. None of them anything and just focused on the match between Fiona and Gloria. Finally all of them can watch the match without thinking about protecting themselves.


    Fiona and Gloria previously also maintained their power so that they did not affect Jeni and the others. Both of them also noticed Sam, so, finally they can use their full power to fight each other.


    Fiona instantly coated her whole body with spiritual energy. She after that disappears from her ce and appears above Gloria. She is already about to punch her. Naturally this is not your normal punch as she is using the destruction punch.


    But don''t underestimate Gloria. She already uses the energy booster and in the next second, created a very powerful ice beam.


    "Boom!!!"


    A very powerful sh appeared on the ce and also that created a big explosion. The whole ce got filled with ayer of smoke. At this time, Sam and the others can feel the energy fluctuation present in that ce.


    That means both of them are still present in that ce and still trying to defeat each other. But sometimeter both of them got blown away from that ce. As both of them used the bloodline power it already created a strong explosion.


    Both of them instantly stabilize themselves and once again disappear from their ce. This time Fiona tries to use an old trick by using the confused ray attack. But unfortunately that did not work against Veena.


    "Boom!!!"


    Once again a sh appears between both of them. But this time Gloria did note close to Fiona. She maintains the distance while you can see a huge ice dragon currently trying to crush Fiona. On the other hand, Fiona keeps punching that ice dragon.


    Injust 15 seconds the dragon turned into dust. But Fiona did not rx and instantly disappeared from her ce. This time she already brought out her sword. In the next second, she created many sword shes.


    Gloria is also not slow and she also counterattacks by her own attack. One thing you should know is that both of them still did not use their full power as nobody wanted to kill each other.


    For almost 3 hours both of them fought like this, but finally both of them became exhausted. With this both of them wanted to finish their fight with ast attack. Instantly both of them create distance between them.


    Both of them after that activate their bloodline techniques and begin to channel as much spiritual energy as they can. Using the energy booster Gloria is channeling her spiritual energy to her attack.


    Fiona is also doing the same thing. She is also channeling spiritual energy to the destruction punch attack. Two powerful energy fluctuations appear in that ce and Jeni and the others instantly begin to feel pressure.


    Even though they feel the pressure for almost 5 seconds but for that 5 second they almost feel that they are going to die. Fortunately Sam handled the situation.


    On the other hand, both Fiona and Gloria did not focus on any of them as Sam was present in that ce. 5 secondster, Gloria already released that powerful ice toward Fiona.


    The size of that ice beam became so big that Fiona would not be able to attack Gloria from another direction. She can only advance straight. Fiona already coated her whole body with the spiritual energy and in the next again disappeared from her ce.


    "Boom!!!!!"


    Read new chapters at empire


    Huge impact was created the moment Fiona punched that ice beam. Naturally that ice beam tried to freeze her but the destruction energy present in her punch destroyed the effect of the ice beam.


    Simr situations appear many times but this time it looks like both of them are using their full power. The whole training room began to shake violently.


    Fortunately Sam already installed barriers around the whole training room which would be able to protect the whole training room from getting destroyed.


    Back to the main matter, Jeni and the others can already imagine how powerful was that impact created by that sh. None of them have the courage to feel that impact.


    The main thing is who would win this fight. Unfortunately, sometimeter suddenly Sam decided to step in. The situation keeps getting dangerous for both of them. Both of them can get seriously injured so wasting no time he quickly steps in.


    Using the telekinesis technique he controls both of them and also this cancels both of their attacks. Gloria and Fiona did not even struggle and both of them already became unconscious.


    After fighting for that long both of them have already reached their limits. But it looked like both of them did not want to give up and still wanted to fight back. This is also the reason that Sam decided to step in. He instantly uses the healing potions to heal both of them.


    Jeni and others quickly came toward both of their sisters to see their condition. It is a good thing that Sam already uses the healing potions to heal both of them.


    All the injured are present on their body instantly getting healed. But both of them did not instantly open their eyes. They would need some time to recover the lost mental energy. With this Sam decided to take both of them to Gloria''s bedroom.


    Sometimeter, finally he came back to the training room and told his friend that they can start their training. Well, Sam called his friends to help them practice. Even all the teachers of his friends rmend them to learn from Sam as he would be the best person to make them more powerful.


    Sam was really surprised after hearing that. You also cannot say anything about this. Also as their friends naturally he wanted his friends to be powerful enough to defend themselves.


    Situation of their keeps getting dangerous and more dangerous monsters will keep appearing on their. In this situation all of them needed to be powerful more quickly so that they did not lose their life.


    _____________________________n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Around 4:30 p.m.,


    Once again inside the warrior association you can see people from various media channels are present in that ce. Not just them , you can also see many peak A grade warriors also present in that ce.


    All of them got contacted by the warrior association toe there. Naturally, all of them became very surprised and wanted to know why the warrior association contacted them. But until now the Wadia association did not tell them anything.


    At this time Sam and his family alongside sister Fiona appear on the warrior association. Sam already asked about the meeting. One person from the Warrior association told him that the meeting still had not started as the saints were waiting for him.


    With this Sam went to the meeting room to meet with all the saints. After that all of them begin to go toward the room where all those people from the media and all those warriors are present.


    The moment they enter the room all the people get up from their seats to show their respect. Immediately those people from news channels begin to take pictures of all the saints. But this time everyone of them also noticed that alongside the miracle maker they can also see his family and Fiona is present in that ce.


    Instantly that makes everyone very curious. Miracle maker present at a meeting like this is a normal thing for everyone. But this will be the first time that Gloria and the others would be present at that ce.


    Naturally everybody became very curious but as Markus finally began to talk, all of them focused on his direction.


    "I would like to thank all of you foring to the warrior association. As you can tell I have pretty important information to tell all of you.


    Most likely all of you already notice the family member of the miracle maker alongside Fiona, actually this time the important news is about them. Because we finally have some warriors who are able to break through to S-grade¡­"

 Chapter 876 - Exited and Nervous Warriors

    Well, we did not inform any of you because at that time most of the warriors were affected by the dark spiritual energy.


    At that time if we suddenly inform everyone about this then that could also create a bad effect. But this is the right time to announce that finally, we have our S-grade warriors."


    After saying this Markus is silent and gives everyone the time to digest all this news. All the news reporters and all the peak A-grade warriors present in the room were surprised after hearing that news.


    Every one of them begins to p to congratte Gloria and the others. Also not just only them, but all those people who are currently watching the news channel became happy that finally, they have more powerful warriors.


    At this time many people even be envious towards Gloria and the others, but at the same time, everyone needs to understand one thing that they are the family members of the miracle maker. So it is natural for them to receive help from him.


    But after hearing this information many people begin to think when they would be able to reach that power level. Except for those peak A-grade warriors, everybody is able to break through to S-grade when their evolves sessfully.


    Naturally, everyone became very confused and none of them were able to understand why they were unable to break through to S-grade. But then they decided to stop thinking and focus on their training.


    But unfortunately still now none of them are able to break through. Even though they collected many limit breakers with the help of those limit breakers none of them broke through. These even make many of the people very depressed.


    For some time everyone thought that it would be impossible for them to break through to S-grade. Almost everyone begins to think that they have already reached the limit of their potential and with this, they would not be able to be S-grade warriors.


    __________________________


    "I hope everyone calms down. Now it is good news that we finally have S-grade warriors, but at the same time, I wanted to give everyone the next good news.


    The warrior association or you can say the saints will be decided to help those peak A-grade warriors to break through to S-grade.


    Naturally, I know that except for all of you, everyone receives some kind of help from our when our evolves sessfully. None of you know that all of you also receive help from our.


    But I will not say anything about this for now. Most likely all of you are thinking why I did not want to tell you anything about this. Then it is because I did not want any of you to put your life in danger.


    The moment I reveal this information, all of you will try to train on your own and that can put your life in danger without proper guidance. Because of this, we decided to help all of you in this matter.


    But at the same time, I have or you can say we have some requirements. I wanted to help only those people who have enough achievement or you can say meet the requirement to receive help from us.


    Many people did not meet the requirements to receive help from us. We have many people who after reaching peak A-grade almost stop following the path of a proper warrior.


    Enjoy new tales from empire


    I cannot say they started abusing their power but I could say that they began to use their power to enjoy their life. I hate the kind of people who just want to enjoy their life without caring about the lives of other humans.


    Before anything, everyone should know that the moment we decide to follow the path of warriors, we decide to protect our humanity even if it requires our lives.


    I hate those kinds of people who became warriors just to enjoy their life. I am really ashamed because during the time when we required the help of our people to face those people from others. When we did not know if we were able to survive or not. None of those people decided to help us.


    Like a coward, those people just decided to hide and leave all the responsibility to others. This ispletely unexpected from any warrior. I don''t want you to put your life in danger. But as a warrior, you should not back down from a fight like this where your can get destroyed.


    Because of this, me and all the Saints, and even your miracle maker decided that we should only help those people who made the requirement. In 14 days all those people will be notified by the warrior association.


    After receiving the notification from the Warrior Association all of you needed toe to us. Me and all the Saints will guide you to break through.


    But before this, I should warn every one of you. Don''t try to do anything stupid after hearing all of this. Don''t try to use more limit breakers for now as that could be risky for all of you.


    On the other hand, if you are a peak A-grade warrior and did not get notified by the warrior association, then you did not meet the requirement to receive help from us. But naturally, you can change that by your achievements. We have many tasks that all of you need to fulfill to meet the requirement."


    After saying all of this Markus finally finished the exnation. At this time all those peak A-grade warriors present in the meeting room became surprised. At the same time, all of them became excited and nervous.


    All of them became excited to receive help from the Warrior Association to break through to S-grade. But at the same time, many of them begin to think if they meet the requirements or not.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    But not all of them thought like this. By hearing the exnation of Saint Markus all those people were sure about one thing. Saint Markus wanted to target those people who did not help their even during the war. Those people are just enjoying their life using their power. They did not even think about helping others.


    With this, those people have confidence that they will receive the notification from the Warrior Association. But at the same time like them, all those people who made the category that Saint Markus discussed earlier became very depressed.


    ____________________________


    "Also before finishing the meeting, I wanted to say one thing to everyone. From now on Gloria, Hina, Victor, and Fiona will be called elders. I hope everyone shows them respect."


    After saying this Markus and everyone get up from their seats and begin to leave the meeting room. Those news reporters instantly begin to click photos of every one of them.


    Sam and his family alongside Fiona already go back to their house as the meeting is finished. Markus and the others became busy with their work.


    One thing you should know is that there are many S-grade dungeons. Because of this, all of them became busy clearing those dungeons.


    Not only that as the current size of their begins to increase from time to time they also need to observe the situation of the danger zone. The monsters present in the danger zone almost became peak S-grade monsters.


    Well, it looks like those monsters did not have any bottleneck or anything like that and every day they would be powerful. This is also a reason that they need to observe the situation of these monsters.


    On the other hand, while observing the situation in the danger zone, many of them became confused about one thing. When for the first time their n got attacked they saw many dragons and people with wings to attack them.


    Right now they did not see any of those things inside the danger zone. This makes them very confused.


    ___________________________


    2 dayster,


    Sam came inside the warrior association and today those selected warriors from the warrior association will receive help from him to break through. Well, Sam could just send his parents or his sisters to help them, but he decided to go there to make sure everything went smoothly.


    ''Sigh, I don''t know how long it will take to receive the message from the human king and the Oni king. I hope both of them have already received the message and have already decoded it.''


    Sam at this time hopes that the human king and the Oni king already receive his message and both of them are already able to decode the message. He is eagerly waiting for their message.


    Thinking all of this he already teleported to the warrior association and after that, he went to the training area alongside all the Saints. At this time he can already see those warriors are waiting in that ce wearing their training suits.


    Markus and everyone decided to present there to see how Sam would help them. They did not want to call him to help in this matter. Naturally, Sam also needs to focus on his training. Because of this, this time they decided to observe very carefully.

 Chapter 877 - Sams instruction

    All those Warriors from the warrior association are eagerly waiting for Sam. Finally, when he came to the warrior association, every one of them became happy. But all of them instantly control themselves and once again begin to meditate, to focus.


    Markus had already told every one of them that during this process all of them needed to stay very focused, or they would not be able to break through.


    Until now, Markus or any other saints did not tell them anything about the special energy present inside their bodies. Naturally, there could be a risk that they would try to sense that special energy on their own.


    Sam had alreadye inside the training room and could already see those Warriors of the warrior association waiting for him alongside all the saints. Even his teacher is also present in this ce.


    After greeting every saint, Sam decided to tell all those warriors to open their eyes as he had something to discuss.


    "I know that all of you most likely want to break through. I already know many of you already try to use limit breakers to break through, but unfortunately, none of you are able to break through.


    Also, most likely all of you are wondering why, except all of you, everyone received some kind of help from the when the evolved sessfully.


    Actually, this is not right. Like everyone, all of you also receive a benefit from our. It is just that none of you can realize the benefit. Every one of you has a special kind of power that will help you to break through.


    That special power also absorbs the powering out from the limit breakers and because of this, previously, even if you tried to use the limit breaker you would not be able to break through.


    Now the reason we did not tell this information to anyone is because it could also harm you. If you forcefully try to control that energy, then a side effect will affect your whole foundation, and you can even lose your power.


    Suddenly, the energy inside your body can overload, and you can blow up like a balloon. Because of this risk, we did not tell anyone about this information. Also, I hope every one of you, after receiving help from us, did not inform any other Warriors about this.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    First of all, those Warriors need to have enough achievement to receive help from the warrior association. You know that not every one of those peak A-grade warriors tries to help our during the time when we are facing those people from others.


    Every one of you put your life in danger to save our. Those people just abandoned everything and just wanted to enjoy their life. If possible, I wanted to extract all the special energy from those people, but unfortunately, this is not possible.


    This is the gift that every one of you received from the, so I would not be able to do anything against this. But this is also bing a bottleneck for everyone. Until you do not get ess to that special energy and are not able to control that energy, you will not be able to break through.


    Now back to the main matter, I would be instructing all of you and all of you just need to follow my method without doing anything. In this, the first and most important step is to find the special energy inside your inner world.


    Now that 30 of you are present in this ce, I would not be able to watch over 13 people at the same time if something unexpected happened. Because of this, we will be doing this while dividing all of you into 3 groups. Every group will contain 10 Warriors."


    After exining all of this, Sam became silent for a few seconds to give everyone the time to digest all this news. 1 minuteter, he finally began to call the names of those Warriors who got selected in group A.


    All those Warriors remain in a meditative position while the remaining people get up from the ground and create some distance from that ce. Sam doesn''t allow all of them to observe their colleagues while they follow his instructions.


    After that, Sam began to give his instructions to those ten Warriors.


    "All of you need to enter the focus state. Don''t think anything unnecessary and enter the focus state."


    After seeing that, Sam became silent once again and let those warriors enter the focus state. Fortunately, all the Warriors are familiar with the focus state, so in just 5 minutes, every one of them is able to enter the focus state.


    "Now try to send your consciousness to your inner world. I know all of you are already family with the inner world. Every time we try to break the barrier that prevents us from breaking through, we unconsciously enter our inner world.


    This time, all of you need to enter the inner world intentionally. Trying to feel that inner world in your body. At first, naturally, you are not able to find anything, but if you stay focused you are able to find that your consciousness somehow enters a different ce."


    After saying that, Sam waited for all those Warriors to enter their inner world. At this time, he was already using the observation technique to make sure to observe the situation of those Warriors.


    Currently, all the remaining Warriors and all the saints observe the situation of the Warriors and some very carefully. The saints naturally wanted to know how some would guide them to break through.


    Almost 30 minutester, finally, the spiritual energy present inside those Warriors began to fluctuate. Even though the fluctuation only appears for 1 second, Sam already feels the fluctuation, and he can detail what is happening.


    Look like, one by one, all those Warriors of the warrior association begin to enter the inner world. It is a good thing that everyone is able to find the inner world and also be able to enter the inner world.


    "Now, all of you can feel what is happening inside your inner world. Naturally, you can easily find the barrier and your spiritual energy. You are even able to find the source of the spiritual energy.


    But for now, all of you need to search for the source of that special energy present inside your body. If you are wondering how to fill the special energy, then the moment you get close to the special energy you are able to feel the difference.


    So, until none of you are able to find any kind of different energy present inside your inner world, all of you need to roam around your inner world. As I told you before, this will not be easy and this is the most important and difficult process."


    Sam has already told everyone what they need to do right now. With this, all those warriors who hear the instructions of Sam already begin to search for the different energy present inside their inner world.


    At this time, Sam also told the remaining people present in the training room not to disturb those who were trying to find the source of the special energy. If possible, they should not use any of their techniques to avoid creating energy fluctuations.


    Sam already begins to tell the saints why he told those Warriors about all of these and also why he gave those instructions. Sam began to exin everything.


    ______________________________


    "At this time, keep checking the spiritual energy present inside the bodies of those warriors. All of you needed to stay ready to help those Warriors anytime.


    While searching for the special energy, those Warriors will suffer from energy overload. Naturally, we need to help those people to get away from the energy overload by continuously using our spiritual energy to release that excessive energy present in their body."


    Sam told this to those saints while maintaining his focus on those warriors. After 6 hours, one of them finally found the source of the special energy.


    Immediately, Sam instructed that person not to get distracted. Sam immediately told that person to focus on that special energy and try to control that special energy.


    As he finds the special energy from now on, he will be able to feel the special energy inside his body. That special energy is a part of his body.


    As he is already able to find the special energy, he would also be avable to control that special energy. But he should not get distracted.


    Not long after that, once again, one warrior was able to find the source of the special energy and, once again, Sam instructed that person.


    Like that, in 2 hours, all of them were able to change the special energy and Sam had already instructed every one of them about what they needed to do after that.


    Sam is currently waiting for those warriors to get proper control over the special energy. After that, he would give them the next instructions. At this time, all the Saints realized one thing. When Gloria and others are able to find the source of the special energy, a big energy fluctuation also appears in that ce.


    But this time nothing like that happened. All of them were surprised about this. It looks like Sam already understands their confusion and, because of this, tells them that all of this happens because of true spiritual energy.

 Chapter 878 - Sending invitation and new dungeon

    None of the saints knew that for one week all the peak A-grade warriors were worried. But only a few of them weren''t worried about anything. As from the start, they knew that they did not abuse their power and, with this, they had full confidence they would receive help from the warrior association.


    With this, in one week, one by one, those people begin to receive an invitation from the warrior association.


    But at the same time, many people, even after waiting for one week, did not receive any kind of invitation from the warrior association and all of them understood that they did not meet the requirement to receive help from the warrior association.


    But most of those people who did not receive the invitation also knew from the start that they would not receive any kind of invitation. Those are the people who hide like a coward, and did not help their during the war.


    Those are the people who use their power for their own benefit. They would never use their power without thinking about their benefit.


    People like them are not worthy of receiving any kind of help from the warrior association. Many of them instantly became depressed and even wanted toin to the Warrior association.


    Unfortunately, that would only backfire on them. Nobody wanted to go against the warrior association. With this, those people can just ept their fate.


    Many of them even thought about doing charity work to get recognition from the warrior association. Many of them are also thinking about approaching those Warriors who will receive help from the warrior association and offer them money and other things.


    Naturally, all those people are corrupted and this is also a big reason that they would not receive any kind of help from the warrior association. Those people already try to contact other peak A-grade warriors to know about their situation.


    But the thing is that, many of those people did not even pick up their phone. Actually, those people had already been informed by the warrior association that they should not try to contact those people who did not receive the invitation.


    All those warriors who received the invitation from the warrior association also receive the name of the people who did not receive the invitation. Among them, only 20 people still have the chance to receive an invitation from the warrior association.


    Those 20 people are not cowards nor do they use their power for their own benefit. It is just those people who epted only a few missions from the warrior association.


    Because of this, the warrior association had already told them that even though they did not receive the invitation, they still had the chance to receive the invitation.


    But at the same time, they also told him not to contact those people who are also like them, and did not receive any invitation from the Warrior association.


    On the other hand, Saint John even called the media once again and told them toe to the warrior association around 6:00 p.m. Saint John has some important information to give everyone.


    ________________________


    Once again, around 6:00 p.m., everyone focuses on the TV or their mobile to look at the broadcast. You can see in the broadcast that all those news reporters were present inside the meeting room of the warrior association and every one of them was waiting for Saint John.


    Saint John did not make them wait for that long and already came to the meeting room around 6:10 p.m.


    "Good evening to all of you. First of all, as you can predict, we have already sent invitations to those Warriors who will be receiving help from us. Everyone needed to take a rest.


    I want all of you to rest your body and mind. Breaking through to S-grade would not be easy and, before that, all of you need to stay prepared mentally and physically.


    Don''t put any pressure on your body from now on. Justpletely rest until you do not get called by the warrior association. But one thing you should know is that if we are able to find out that your body isn''t in perfect condition, then you will not receive help from us.


    I hope every one of you will strictly follow my instructions. I am telling you this because it will be very helpful to all of you.


    Now the reason I called all the media once again to the warrior association to inform everyone that after Elder Gloria, Elder Hina, Elder Victor and Elder Fiona, we have our first group of people from the Warrior association who have broken through to S-grade.


    Unfortunately, none of them will be able to present here right now. They just recently broke through. So, before anything, they need to stabilize their condition.


    It is very good news for our and because of this I wanted to share this news with everyone. We know that after our evolves, everything begins to change.


    The power limit has already increased alongside the density of spiritual energy. The quality of spiritual energy also increases. Monsters from the danger zone keep getting stronger day by day.


    Continuously, those monsters begin to attack our safe zone. Fighting those monsters bes more dangerous. But with our first group of people who broke through to S-grade, we can finally reduce the number of those Monsters and also stop those Monsters.


    Also, all of you need to remember one thing: from now on we will have more powerful dungeons. So we needed stronger warriors to handle those dungeons.


    Even though all of you have us and your miracle maker, one thing you need to remember is that not every time we will be able to help all of you. Our keeps getting dangerous day by day.


    We will not be able to tell what kind of change will ur on our. I want every one of my people to be people to handle any kind of situation.


    Except peak A-grade warriors, none of those other Warriors have this kind of problem, so they can naturally break through using the limit breakers. But at the same time, I don''t want all of you to forcefully break through to the next grade.


    Remember that before breaking through you should try to reach the limit of your Warrior grade.


    There could be a chance that, once again, people from others will try to attack us to take revenge. But I want everyone to prepare themselves to face those people from others without any problem.


    I want all of you to have the strength to fight back without receiving any help from us. Only then can I say, or you can say, all the saints and even miracle makers will be happy."


    John finished saying all of this. He gives every one of those news reporters and those people who are currently watching the live broadcast some time to stabilize themselves.


    After that, John asked those who reported if they had any problems or not. Instantly, many of those reporters raised their hands. All those reporters had various kinds of questions.


    Apart from those unreasonable questions, John answers every one of those questions. It looks like those reporters have already be very curious to know how they help those Warriors from the warrior association to break through.


    Unfortunately, they did not receive any answer from John. John just told them one thing, was that if those people who wanted to receive help from the warrior association did not rest properly, then there was a chance that they would never receive help from the Warriors.


    After seeing all of this, Saint John finally finished the meeting. All the media present in the meeting room at first did not say anything. But 2 minutester, all of them came back to their senses.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    __________________________


    Sam is currently present at his house and helping his parents to train. His parents will be going inside the S-grade dungeon. Before this, he wanted to make them more powerful and because of this, he is currently helping them.


    Like this, suddenly he stops training his parents and immediately teleports outside his house. The whole world begins to shake once again. Using the teleportation system of the Warrior association, he directly teleports to the source of the earthquake.


    Markus and the others also immediately went to that ce. None of them said anything as they could already expect what was happening right now. As they expected, 2 hourster a new structure appeared in front of them.


    A new dungeon finally appears on their. But this time, the power level of the dungeon is lowerpared to the previous dungeon. Immediately, they contact the warrior association.


    Sam decided to go back as he did not have any interest in that new dungeon. But Markus and the others would not be able to ignore that thing. They decided to go inside the dungeon.


    The warrior association also sent Warriors to that ce. Those Warriors will surround that ce to prevent anyone from approaching that dungeon.

 Chapter 879 - Decoding the messages

    '' Finally!!!!,''


    Sam exma with joy. He finally receives the messages from the human king and the Oni king. Finally, he can get to know the location of that Ratus.


    Wasting no time, Sam focused himself to decode the message given by both the kings. At this time he already told his family not to disturb him.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Gloria and the others were surprised after hearing his sudden request. But none of them have any problem with this so they told him not to worry about anything.


    You can say that Sam went into seclusion to decode the messages given by both the kings.


    _____________________________ Discover more stories at empire


    It has been 10 days since the new S-grade dungeon appeared on their. At first all the Saints went inside the dungeon and were able to find out the Boss monster of that dungeon is around early S-grade.


    This dungeon has only two floors. In the ground floor you will face those Monsters while the next floor is the boss floor. Those Warriors of the warrior association who just recently broke through to S-grade, decided to go inside that new dungeon to face those Monsters.


    Fortunately all of them are already able to stabilize themselves. Also those saints begin to observe the remaining Warriors of the warrior association who did not receive their help to break through.


    For one week they will be observing those remaining Warriors. On the other hand, all those Warriors who received invitations from the warrior association decided to follow the instructions of the Warrior association.


    Everyone of them wanted to receive help from the warrior association at any cost. They use everything they can to break through but in the end they are unable to break through.


    As you know at first everyone thought they reached the limit of their potential butter they realize that this is not the matter. It is just that they did not know the correct way to break through.


    During this time, those people who did not receive any kind of invitation already try to contact those other Warriors who received the invitation. Unfortunately those people were not able to contact anyone.


    With this those people realize that they would not be able to use any other method to break through. This makes them despair.


    Those 20 people who did not receive the invitation because of their low achievement begin to take more missions from the warrior association. They wanted to increase their achievement as quickly as they could to receive an invitation from the warrior association.


    Other than this all the students once again became ready to participate in the annual collegepetition. Naturally, not just those students but almost everyone became excited once again.


    It is a good thing that everything became normal and they can enjoy everything like before. The annual collegepetition will be the firstpetition that they will enjoy after the war.


    Everybody also bes very curious about the improvement of the students. Everyone wanted to know how powerful those students have be and how much Intense fight would appear during the annual collegepetition.


    From tomorrow the annual collegepetition will be starting. With this the warrior association and all the warrior Academy became busy to prepare for this. As usual all the students already came to the central city.


    The warrior association already increases the security in the central city. The annual collegepetition will be going on from the third stage. Except for Elena and the others, everybody only participates in the annual collegepetition.


    Alexa, Tony and the others on the other hand wanted to graduate early as they did not think that the Academy would be able to teach them anything. Compared to them they would be stronger under Sam''s guidance.


    It is just Sam telling him not to graduate early. From the moment they would graduate early they would need to ept missions from the warrior association.


    Even if they did not join any guild or any association, it is mandatory for every Warriors to receive any missions from the warrior association.


    Because of this, he told his friends not to graduate early and try to focus on their training while they are still students of the Royal Academy. Tony and the others agree with that n so they decided topletely focus on their training.


    Two days ago they already went inside the B-grade dungeon. For at least one month they will be present inside the dungeon and kill as many Monsters as they can.


    Two dayster Gloria and the others will be entering the dungeon. Previously Sam was helping them because of this, but Sam already felt their improvement. He became sure that everyone was ready to face those Monsters.


    Gloria already gets to hear about the new dungeon but she and her parents did not want to go inside that New dungeon. They should first go inside the dungeon that they are familiar with. Fiona also supports this matter.


    But at this time everyone be confused when suddenly Sam told everyone that they should not disturb him for 7 days. This made everyone of them be very confused but none of them asked him any question.


    One thing everybody realized is that this is an important matter and Sam did not want anyone to disturb him during that time. They can get to know about thister after he finishes that matter. So until then nobody will disturb him.


    On the other hand if you are thinking that decoding the message is easy then you are very wrong. This is a very tough process. Both the human and Oni king have different kinds of codenguage.


    Both of them use their unique codenguage, so that even if someone is able to find those codenguages, none of them are able to figure out anything.


    It will take him at least two weeks. Fortunately before he came back from Terraria he already received two catalogs from both the kings which will help him in this matter to decode those messages.


    __________________


    2 dayster,


    Gloria, Hina, Victor and Fiona already became ready to go inside the dungeon. Surprisingly today Sam did not be busy with his work and decided to help them check all the things.


    After making sure that everything is okay Sam said goodbye to everyone. After that Gloria and the others leave the house and directly begin to go toward the warrior association. Sam on the other hand once again came back to his room and once again brought out those catalogs and those messages from both the kings.


    Before anything he wanted to decode the message from the human being. Even though he is that expert in this matter, one thing he realizes is thatpared to the codenguage that the human king used, the Oni king''s codenguage is much more difficult.


    Because of this he decided to decode the human king''s message. Markus and the others also did not disturb him as they also also got informed that he would be busy.


    _____________________________


    Two weekter,


    Sam locked himself inside his room and did not evene outside until it was not necessary for him. For 2 weeks he just focused on decoding the message received from the human king. Good thing is that not only that message but he was also able to decode the message given by the Oni king.


    Ratus is not far away from your sr system. xxxxx, this is the location of that. Naturally if you use the world bridge then you would arrive on that in one day.


    The highest power level of the is peak Elite grade. Compared to any other the corruption rate of the is high ...."


    Like this, Sam finally gets the location of that and by using the world bridge he can directly create the bridge between his and Ratus.


    Naturally even though he instantly wanted to go to that, he will be waiting for his family toe outside of the dungeon. Sam finally decided to rest.


    ________________________


    "Don''t worry I am okay. It is just that I be busy with some work and finally able to finish the work. No no this is not rted to our. So you don''t have to worry about safety or anything like that."


    Sometimeter, Alena calls her after getting the miss call from Sam. She instantly asks him about his situation and also asks him why he became that much serious. She thought this is something rted to the safety of their.


    Fortunately nothing like that happened so she can rx. Sam told her that when his parentse out of the dungeon, he has something important to tell everyone.


    This makes her quite curious but she knows that Sam will not say anything about this. After that she began to tell what happened in these 2 weeks. What is the situation of that new dungeon?

 Chapter 880 - New monsters

    Sam is present in the warrior association and watching over all those Warriors who receive help from the saints. The first group of people had already been invited by the warrior association and every one of them received help from the saints.


    Sam naturally did not interfere with these nor did he disturb anyone. He just silently observes their status. Many people can be reckless and because of this, the energy inside their body can overload.


    Naturally, he did not want something like this to happen and because of this, he observed the status of those people. Fortunately, all those people did not do anything recklessly.


    All of them just follow the instructions of the saints. Now this is a good thing for everyone. All those people suddenly enter the focus and all of them enter their inner area.


    All of them needed to find the source of the special energy in their body. But this is not easy. Also, it looks like many of them are unable to maintain the focus state for that long.


    Fortunately, those people just needed to recover their mental energy and they could start from the beginning. Markus told him to rx and don''t think about anything unnecessary.


    __________________________


    On the other hand, Sam decided to see the situation in the danger zone, so he decided to teleport himself to the danger zone.


    Currently, the size of their is beginning to increase, and naturally, this will increase the size of the danger zone and the danger zone will be more mysterious.


    Even though for now the Warrior Association is able to observe almost the whole danger zone, it would not take that long for the danger zone to be more mysterious and more dangerous.


    It looks like the first group of people from the Warrior Association who already became S-grade warriors got the duty from the Warrior Association to stay in those border cities to fight those Monsters. Enjoy exclusive adventures from empire


    Continuously many Monsters trying to invade the safe zone. Naturallypared to humans those Monsters did not have any problem while breaking through. Because of this, this kind of situation appears.


    It is a good thing that only those Early S-grade Monsters are trying to invade the safe zone.


    Sam did not stop there and directly entered the danger zone. Naturally, the moment he enters the dangerous zone he feels like the density of The spiritual energy already increases. Look like this is also a reason that those Monsters advanced that quickly.


    Sam slowly begins to observe the area around him and also begins to absorb all the Monsters present in those areas. Every kind of Monsters is present there and it looks like some new Monsters also appear in the danger zone.


    Sam looks at the status of those Monsters and gets to know the details of those Monsters. As you expected all those Monsters recently appeared on his.


    Now this is an important thing and this also makes him quite alert. First of all, there could be a chance that like those new Monsters, some powerful Monsters also appear in the danger zone.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    What if when he goes to Ratus, Epic-grade monsters suddenly appear on their? That would be dangerous for everyone.


    Because of this Sam bes serious and begins to advance more deep inside the dangerous zone. At this time he was also thinking about many Monsters that he read about in history but did not see on his.


    One of the Monsters is a dragon. Those Monsters also previously attacked the humans of Eden Blue, but until now Sam did not think he saw any of those dragons or anything like dragons.


    Previously, he thought those Monsters were hiding themselves inside the danger zone, but now he knows that that is not the matter. This also makes me quite surprised and curious to know about the details of those dragon Monsters.


    Unfortunately, he did not find any kind of details about those dragon Monsters and some more Monsters like those dragon Monsters who previously appeared on Eden Blue but after that, they disappeared.


    While Sam is busy observing the situation of the danger zone, his family and Fiona are currently present inside the dungeon.


    Currently, all of them are hunting monsters separately. Even though none of them reached the limit of Early S-grade or Early Elite grade, they still wanted to hunt those monsters separately to increase their experience.


    Naturally, they wanted to improve themselves while fighting those Monsters. Without facing this kind of difficulty they would not be able to improve themself.


    Fortunately, none of them went that far away from each other. Well, they decided to maintain a 3 km to 4 km distance from each other but if necessary they would immediatelye close to each other.


    Naturally, even though all four of them are powerfulpared to most of those early Elite grade monsters, when they face arge group of Monsters that would be very dangerous and they can lose their life if they try to fight those Monsters.


    Because of this, they would not go that far away from each other and always maintain that distance from each other.


    You can see that Gloria is fighting a group of 5 Monsters. All those Monsters are Thunder Eagle Monsters. Those Monsters are 10 feet tall and the whole body of those Monsters is filled with thunder.


    Naturally going close to them or fighting in closebat also can be dangerous for anyone. Fortunately, Gloria did not fight those Monsters in closebat.


    As usual, she only uses her ice element. Suddenly the ground beneath her feet began to freeze. Almost the 500 m area around her got frozen by the ice element.


    Everything present in that area also got Frozen by the ice. Those monsters reacted on time and they already started flying in the sky. Because of the thunder element, those Monsters are fast and they also have quick responses.


    This is the reason those Monsters did not freeze. Immediately countless thunderballs begin to go toward Gloria. Not only that, the whole sky has already be dark, and dark clouds are present everywhere.


    It looks like those Monsters also have the ability to create thunderclouds. The whole ce was covered by those thunderclouds and in less than a second those Monsters began to control those dark clouds to release thunderbolts.


    One by one minute thunderbolts begin toe out from those dark clouds and begin to destroy a whole area that is frozen right now.


    Naturally, those Monsters wanted to kill Gloria without giving her the time to do anything. But those Monsters underestimate the speed of Gloria.


    See already escaped from that ce using the ice escape technique and also she is preparing for her attack. She does not instantly attack those Monsters and once again uses the ice escape technique to disappear from her current ce and reappear close to those Monsters.


    Immediately she attacks those Monsters using the ice beam. A very big eye beam directly goes toward those Monsters. The speed of that attack was so fast that those Monsters were unable to react on time.


    Don''t underestimate those Monsters. Immediately they begin to gather the thunder element around their body and immediately their body begins to glow brightly.


    Well, those Monsters wanted to use their body as the source of the thunder to protect themselves from the ice beam. Unfortunately, not every one of those Monsters was able to react on time.


    Two of them had already gotten frozen and immediately those Monsters began to fall. Gloria immediately created an ice spear. That Ice spear immediately went toward those two Monsters and in the next second, the body of those Monsters got broken by that ice spear.


    Well, this is one of the ways to kill your enemy without giving any pain to your enemy. Those Monsters did not even realize how they died and none of them even felt any kind of pain.


    But those remaining Monsters already came back to their normal state and immediately retreated from that ce. It looks like those Monsters already realize the danger and want to get as far as they can.


    Unfortunately for them, Gloria already begins to chase those Monsters. She already started flying toward those Monsters and instantly a huge ice beam was created by her.


    This time she uses more spiritual energy behind that attack and with these once again she is able to kill one of those Monsters. But the remaining Monsters already use their full power to get from that ce.


    Gloria uses her full speed and is already able to get close to those Monsters. In the next second, she uses the ice wave technique. Immediately an invisible wave directly affects those Monsters and those Monsters instantly begin to feel pain in their body.


    Those Monsters already noticed Gloria and wanted to use their power to turn their body into a source of thunder. Unfortunately, they were unable to do that this time. Those Monsters begin to cry in pain and the next second suddenly their bodies begin to freeze.

 Chapter 881 - Sams information

    15 dayster,


    Gloria and the others finally came out of the dungeon and they already came back to their house. Not just only them but even Alexa and the others are also present outside the dungeon.


    Because of this, Sam decided to tell them about his departure. He did not want to call problems for his friends and family this time because of this, you will be informing everyone before going to Ratus.


    Sam called everyone toe to his house. All the Saints, Fiona and his friends came to his house to know what kind of information Sam wanted to share with everyone.


    As you know, other than them he did not have anyone close to him, so he did not think he needed to inform other people about his departure. It would be good if, other than his friends and family, nobody knows about his departure.


    This thing can create problems for the and because of this, he did not decide to inform everyone about this.


    Alena, Markus and the others came to his house one by one. Fortunately Markus and the others did not have to watch over those Warriors today.


    Everyone was already very curious to know what kind of information Sam wanted to share with them. Even Gloria and the others did not know what kind of information he wanted to share.


    __________________________


    "I am d that all of you came here. Actually I wanted to talk about my departure. I will be leaving Eden Blue for a few days or you can say a few months."


    Sam did not want to waste that much time so he directly told the news about his departure to everyone. The moment he shares that news everyone has a surprised face.


    Gloria,Hina and Victor immediately became worried and immediately began to ask him about his sudden decision. First of all, he wanted to know where he would be going and why he suddenly decided to leave the.


    "Well, actually this time I would not be going back to Terraria. I will be going to a new that I got to know sometime ago.


    I already found the location of Ratus. So this time I will go to that. I think all of you can understand why I wanted to go there."


    He directly told everyone that he will be going to Ratus. Alexa and all of his friends, Alena, Maria, Aria and Mira were surprised but at the same time they were also confused about this.


    If you look at Markus and the others, then you will notice all of them have shocking expressions. Even though Mira and the others did not know about these but John and the others already can understand why Sam wanted to go to their.


    Hina almost started crying but fortunately Sam quickly handled her. Immediately told him that he needed to go there to search for his grandparents and his aunty.


    "I will also go with you."


    Immediately Gloria to Sam. Both Victor and Hina also immediately told him that they also wanted to tag alongside him.


    "Unfortunately I would not be able to take any of you with me. First of all, the technique I am going to use to go to the would be dangerous for all of you until you do not have my power level.


    I am not using the technique that those people from others use toe to our. Because of this, I would not be able to take any of you.


    I know that all of you are worried about me but don''t worry everything will be okay. I already got the information about that and I could say that there is no one present there who is more powerful than me.


    I already contacted Terraria and got information from Terraria about that. So with this none of you have to worry about anything."


    Sam began to assure everyone that he would be okay so they did not have to worry about anything. Alena and others don''t even know why Gloria and the others became this much serious, but they understand one thing that all of these are rted to Sam and his family.


    It looks like even Saint Markus and others also know about this. Alena and the others decided to ask themter.


    For now they understand one thing that the can be dangerous for Sam. But Sam gives them the guarantee that he would be okay and there is no one present on that who is powerful than him.


    They also get to know that they are techniques that Sam is going to use and would not be able to take any of them. Even none of those saints were able to travel with him.


    Now this thing makes all of them be quite depressed. Both his parents and his sister immediately became depressed and they really begin to feel very useless right now.


    All of them know what kind of danger Sam is going to face but none of them would be able to help him. They really thought they finally had the strength to help Sam. Unfortunately they still needed to improve themselves.


    "Please son, don''t go there. You should forget about everything. We did not have to involve ourselves with that."


    Immediately Hina began to pursue him not to go there as it could be dangerous for him.


    Well, Sam assured him once again that he would be okay and they did not have to worry about anything.n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    ___________________________


    "Is there no way we can go there with you? Is there no way we can help you if you require our help?"


    Markus asks that question to Sam. Unfortunately Sam answers him that there is no way they can travel with him.


    With this all of them can just sighed. They really did not want to help him in this matter but unfortunately they are powerless.


    Well, in the end none of them were able to persuade him not to go there. Sam''s decision is final. On the other hand, Sam also assured his parents that they did not have to worry about that much.


    Discover hidden stories at empire


    Also he already has a life saving method given by the human king and the Oni king. If he really faced any kind of danger he would immediately contact them and those people woulde there to help him.


    "Well, I know that all of you are confused about this Ratus. You can just think this is an important for me and my family. So because of this, I will be going there.


    Also this time I decided to tell everyone of you so that none of you got worried about me."


    He told that to his friends and his teacher so that they did not be worried about him. Also it willpletely depend on his mother if she wants to reveal this information or not.


    But at the same time, Sam did not know what would be the reaction of his friends when they would get to know about this.


    ____________________________


    In the end, one by one everyone leaves his house as the meeting is over and he already told everyone the information that he wanted to share.


    He told everyone that 2 dayster he will depart from Eden Blue. Before that he wanted to spend his time with his family so that they did not be worried about him.


    When everyone leaves his house Sam decided to share more detailed information about that that he was able to find. He didn''t share that information before because his teacher and his friends where they are who did not know anything about Ratus.


    As everyone leaves his house, he decides to share this information to his family, so that they do not be worried about him and they get to know the situation of Ratus.


    ___________________________


    The next day,


    Everything is normal in Eden Blue. Nobody knows the information of Sam''s departure. It is a good thing that they did not get to know but still the warrior association decided to announce Sam will go into seclusion.


    For 2 days, all the saints decided to not to invite any of those warriors to help them to break through. On the other hand, all those Warriors who already broke through already went to the border area to fight those Monsters who were trying to invade the safe zone.


    This will give those warriors the chance to stabilize their condition and also get a better understanding of their own strength. At the same time all of the need to focus on regaining control over their spiritual energy.


    After breaking through, all of them lose the control over their spiritual energy which they need to increase once again.


    Other than those people who did not receive help from the warrior association, all the other people are happy that finally the warriors of the have begun to get stronger.

 Chapter 882 - World Bridge

    Today is the day when Sam will be using the world bridge to go to Ratus. To do this he needs an empty ce. A world bridge will create spiritual disturbance and he would sometimes stabilize the disturbance.


    Gloria, Hina, Victor, Fiona, Alexa, all of his friends, Markus, and all saints are present in the ce to see the process.


    Sam finally begins to clear his mind to enter the focus state. 5 minutester, finally he entered the focus state and then Sam began to circte his spiritual energy to activate the world bridge.


    As usual, this thing will almost consume 90% of spiritual energy. Sam is prepared for that. Already activated the technique by circting the spiritual energy.


    Immediately a huge spiritual fluctuation appeared in that ce. Not only that, in front of him a portal suddenly appeared.


    The surrounding ce instantly begins to get destroyed the moment that Portal appears in the ce. Fortunately, Sam uses a spiritual potion to recover his spiritual energy and immediately begins to control the world bridge.


    All this time a huge amount of spiritual energy was consumed by that portal. Markus and the others who already maintain a 5 km distance from that ce also got affected by these.


    All of them instantly begin to feel a huge pressure in their body and that pressure just keeps increasing and increasing. Not only that they also feel The spiritual energy present inside their body getting consumed by that portal.


    All of them tried to shield themselves using the energy barrier and even using the barrier given by Sam. Unfortunately despite all of these they still feel that the spiritual energy is getting consumed.


    Even though that consumption onlysts for 5 minutes, everyone feels that they have already lost 95% of their spiritual energy. The good thing is that the consumption was not based on the warrior grade or it would be very dangerous for Tony and the others.


    5 minutester Sam is able to control the energy consumption of the portal and with this, everyone finally can breathe normally.


    Even some did not expect this kind of reaction would appear this time. Like previously when he created the world bridge, the human king and the others protected Livia and the others from this energy consumption.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, his family and everyone recovered their spiritual energy. But one thing you can say is that all of them finally understand the danger of the portal.


    They understand why Sam previously told him that none of them would be able to travel with him. This made his family and everyone worried about his safety.


    But Sam already assured everyone that you would be okay as this time the distance from Eden Blue to Ratus isn''t that big. So this time he doesn''t have to face that kind of danger that he faced previously.


    Hina and the others, in the end, decided to trust him. But one thing you can say is that they wanted to help Sam and impossible wanted to prevent him from going to that.


    But unfortunately, they would not be able to do that. Even though Hina did not want her son to put his life in danger, at the same time she also wanted to know about her family.


    What happened to her mother and father and her sister? How was she able toe here previously?


    She was thinking about this kind of question.


    "Well, don''t worry about me as I will try toe back as quickly as I can. Before anything I need to find out what happened to that."


    After saying that Sam said goodbye to everyone and finally entered the portal. The moment he enters the portal the portal begins to fade away. In just 5 seconds that portal disappeared from that ce.


    As usual, the moment Sam entered the portal he already coated his whole body with spiritual energy. This time he did not know what kind of situation he was going to face. But he hoped that this time he would not face that kind of dangerous situation that he faced previously.


    Sem finally began to advance. Already energy disturbance appears on the ce and begins to affect it and begin to pressure him.


    However, due to the energy coating, Sam did not suffer. The good thing is that as this time the distance is short, he would not need to suffer that much.


    ____________________________


    Gloria and the others go back despite all of them worried about Sam. It Looks like they became more determined to practice and make themselves powerful.


    Markus also already told the warrior association to inform everyone that the previous energy fluctuation only appears because they are practicing their techniques.


    If Markus wasn''t wrong, then almost everyone on this would be suffering from energy consumption and would feel the pressure of the World Bridge appearing in that ce.


    This situation already appeared previously when for the first time Sam came to this using the world bridge. Because of this, Markus came up with this lie. .


    He nor any other saints did not inform anyone about Sam''s departure. On the other hand, all of them also became determined to train harder.


    All of them also decided to go into seclusion. But before that, they also need to help those remaining Warriors to break through.


    The good thing is that already many people are able to break through with their help and all those warriors currently present in those border areas hide those Monsters who continuously attack the safe zone.


    Every time a monster breaks through to S-grade, that monster will go crazy and will attack the safe zone like this. Sam previously told him that when they break through something happens to their body which makes them very crazy.


    The energy inside those Monsters will go overload. Also most likely The spiritual energy all the humans have attracts those Monsters.


    Fortunately, finally, their begins to get stronger. Finally, those peak A-grade Warriors are able to break through to S-grade.


    Naturally, that does not mean they should be rxed. Dangerous situations could appear anytime. What if those people from another decided to take revenge and attack them?


    This situation also makes those Warriors more serious and at any condition they want to improve themselves as quickly as they can.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    ________________________________


    Two dayster,


    Sam already crossed 70% of the bridge and already came close to the end of the bridge. Finally, the energy disturbance begins to decrease.


    Currently, Sam is trying to recover The lost spiritual energy as quickly as he can. Also, he did not deactivate the energy coating present in his body.


    Sam at this time also thought that he needed to control the energy fluctuation created by the world bridge. He did not want to attract that much attention after appearing on Ratus.


    Even though previously when using the world bridge he appears on Eden blue he is unable to control the energy fluctuation, but this time he is confident to control the energy fluctuation.


    Before reaching the end of the bridge, take control of the energy fluctuation. Previously the human King already told him the method and Sam needed to follow that method.


    Around 12 hourster he finally came close to the end of the world bridge. He can already see the entrance not far away from that location and also the energy disturbance has already decreased to the minimum level.


    Sam instantly did not approach the entrance and decided to use spiritual energy to take control of the energy fluctuation.


    The process of taking control over the energy fluctuation is not easy but after 1 hour he is finally able to take control over the energy activation of the world bridge that would appear on Ratus.


    The process was very difficult but finally, he was able to do that while following the instructions of the human king.


    Sam quickly gulped down the spiritual potion with this in just 10 seconds he already recovered his full spiritual energy.


    Wasting no time, Sam approaches the exit of the world bridge.


    ______________________________


    Inside the danger zone,


    Suddenly a blue portal appeared in that ce. All the Monsters present in that ce instantly became startled.


    For 5 seconds spiritual fluctuation appears in that ce but suddenly it also disappears. But even for 5 seconds that spiritual fluctuation was enough to make those Monsters alert.


    Some of them already died getting affected by The spiritual fluctuation. The remaining monster already created distance from that ce and looked worriedly toward the portal.


    Suddenly a human figure began toe out from that portal. Slowly that human figure bes clear to the Monsters and 1 minuteter all those Monsters can finally see that human figure.


    Find more chapters on empire


    "Roar!!!!"


    Instantly those Monsters let out angry roars. It looks like after looking at that human figure those Monsters already be Furious and wasting no time they instantly attack toward that direction.

 Chapter 883 - Gallen City

    Sam became startled the moment he noticed those attacks. Fortunately, a barrier was created in front of him, and light beams hit those monsters one by one.


    Sam did not even look at the Monsters and kill them. The portal behind him had already disappeared, and Sam finally got the chance to examine his surrounding area.


    He is in some kind of forest which is filled with monsters. For a second, he thought he was inside a Dungeon, but after looking at the two suns in the sky, he became sure that he was not present inside a Dungeon.


    Sam instantly uses the concealment technique and then begins to fly. It looks like he is in the danger zone.


    Sam needed to find out the safe zone and then needed to search for his grandparents and aunty.


    While trying to search for the safe zone he also observed those Monsters present in that ce. He already discovers many new Monsters but he is not interested in them.


    He is interested to know the power level of those Monsters. As you know the more you will go deep inside the dangerous zone or Dungeon, you will face more powerful Monsters.


    The more you go toward the outer area, the more you will face weak monsters. Sam, because of this, tries to find out the power level of these monsters.


    Finally, he realizes that he is going in the opposite direction. He was just about to turn around to go in the correct direction when something unexpected happened.


    He suddenly detects some different life signatures or you can say spiritual aura. Instantly, Sam approaches that ce, and he notices that a group of 20 humans are present in that ce, and those people are currently fighting a group of Monsters.


    Those people have different kinds of body suits or, you can say, body armor present on their bodies. Naturally differents will have different kinds of armor and other things.


    Those people are currently fighting a group of slime-like Monsters. But those Monsters have different shapespared to your normal slime. It looks like those Monsters have humanoid figures.


    Even those Monsters have jelly-like bodies, but you would not be able to see through that body, and also it looks like those Monsters can absorb spiritual attacks.


    Some of those humans, or you can say warriors, attack those Monsters using their fireball and other spiritual attacks. Unfortunately, those Monsters absorb all those attacks.


    But it looks like those humans did not be worried about anything. Also, only 5 of them are fighting those groups of Monsters.


    Three of those Warriors continuously attack those Monsters while getting absorbed by those Monsters. At this time, the remaining two Warriors approached those Monsters from different directions.


    It looks like those Monsters are unable to detect those two Warriors as they only focus on those three Warriors.


    Suddenly, those two Warriors attack the Monsters in front of them. Instantly those Monsters begin to get frozen. It looks like those two Warriors can use the ice elements.


    Finally, the remaining 3 Warriors stop attacking them and begin to approach them. Aftering close to those Monsters, 3 of them begin to pierce through the chest area of those Monsters and bring out a ball-like King from their body.


    That was the monster core. Sometimeter, after bringing out all The monster core, those warriors decided to leave that ce.


    "Boss, we already collected enough monster cores. I hope we got a good reward this time."


    "Hmm¡­ I also hope that. If we count then we have almost 500 of these Monster corrs. With this definitely, we would get more reward.


    Not only that, we are also able to collect many more rare ns that can give us more resources from the medical association."


    With this, that group of Warriors decided to go back. It looks like those Warriors came inside the danger zone to clear a mission or something like that. They alreadypleted their missions, and with this, it is time to go back.


    ____________________________


    One dayter,


    That group of Warriors had already reached the safe zone, and after showing their Warrior ID card, they entered the safe zone without any problem.


    Those people directly decided to go to the Warrior Association to submit all the items needed toplete the mission.


    20 minutester they came to the warrior association near the entrance of the danger zone. They went in front of the receptionist and then submitted their mission items.


    10 minutester, everything was finished, and finally, all those people came out from the warrior association with a happy smile. It looks like they got a huge reward this time after submitting the mission.


    The leader decided to divide the rewards, and like this, they finally decided to go back to their house.


    Unfortunately, they did not notice that Sam also came inside the safe zone alongside them, and from the start, he was following them.


    Sometimeter, Sam finally got the chance to capture one of them to read the memory of that person. Before anything, he makes that person unconscious, and after that, using the mind control technique, his consciousness enters the mind of the person.


    5 minutester, Sam leaves that ce. On the other hand, 10 minutester, the person who became unconscious regained consciousness.


    "Huu? What am I doing here? Did something happen to me?"


    After saying that the person instantly begins to check his whole body. He even checks his storage ring. But in the end, he did not find anything missing and also he did not see any kind of injuries in his body.


    "Sigh, it looks like the exhaustion affects me and I somehow fall unconscious. Well, this is natural. I should quickly go back home to rest properly."


    With this, that person begins to go back to his house unaware that one more person is still following him.


    _____________________________


    Using the advanced train, that person travels almost 600 km in just 4 hours. On the other hand, Sam also followed that person to that city and finally separated from that person aftering to that city.


    The name of that city is Gallen City. The main thing is that this city has the headquarters of the Warrior Association, and you can say this is the central city of the whole safe zone.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Naturally, Sam got all of this information from that Warrior. Unfortunately, when he tried to search for information about his grandparents and his aunty, Sam did not find any kind of information rted to them.


    But he did not get disappointed. For now, he wanted to find out the important information about that city. He recklessly did not want to go inside the Warriors association.


    He also wanted to know the name of the second captain that previously attacked his grandfather and his mother. Naturally, only after collecting all this information would he be able to decide what to do after that.


    But naturally, no random person can give him important information about that whole city. Even that person whose memory got read by Sam did not know that much about his own City.


    Well, he only knew the basic history of his city and did not know any important information. Sam wanted to find out how many Warrior families were present in that city and had high power.


    Other than that you also wanted to find out about the function of the warrior association of this. You wanted to know if those people also have saints like Eden Blue or not.


    Naturally, all this thing would take him some time, and because of this, he decided to search for a ce to rest. Fortunately, the memory of the previous Warrior already helped him to know about some hotels that did not require any kind of identity card to get a room.


    Sam approaches one of them, and 1 minuteter, he finally gets a room. Beforeing to that ce he also took money from some Warriors. Naturally, he did not have the money of that.


    [A/N:- Stealing isn''t good.]


    Finally, after finishing his food, he decided what to do next, but before that, he wanted to rest. He wanted to recover from the exhaustion that happened due to traveling through the World Bridge.


    The next day,


    After leaving the hotel room Sam already uses the concealment technique and then decides to approach the Warrior Association.


    Only that would be the ce to find important Warriors. Because of this, Sam decided to approach the warrior association.


    Stay connected via empire


    Fortunately, following the memory of that previous Warrior, it did not take that much time to reach the warrior association. As he is invisible, nobody can see him, and he can easily go inside the warrior association.


    But when he is about to pass through the main entrance he notices some sensor is also present in that main entrance. Those sensors are present there to detect the identity of any Warriors who will be passing through that main entrance.


    Actually, if any warrior with a criminal record wanted to pass through the main entrance to enter the Warrior Association, the Warrior Association would immediately get to know about this.

 Chapter 884 - Searching around

    Sam came inside the warrior association. As usual the warrior association is fully crowded. Everyone is doing their own work. Naturally none of the team is able to notice as he is invisible to those people.


    Sam decided to search for some important Warriors. First of all, he did not think he would be able to know anything from those normal Warriors.


    Only a strong Warrior family or people with many achievements or you can say those old people would be able to give him much better information about the storm family.


    Seriously after reading the memory of that Warrior he became confused because it looked like that person did not even know about the Strom family.


    A family like this did not even exist. Sam predicted that the second captain would be present behind all of these. Because of this he wanted to find out the identity of that person alongside he wanted to know the situation of his grandparents and aunty.


    It has already been 33 years since his mother went to Eden Blue. In these 33 years many things can happen.


    On the other hand, Sam is trying to hear the conversation of warriors. It looks like some new Monsters appear in the danger zone as many people are discussing this.


    Other than that most of the people talking about their missions and other things that did not make Sam interested. Sam is just waiting for a person with enough achievement or a strong Warrior to enter the Warrior association.


    Like this, he even thought about approaching the high officials of the warrior association. But it looks like those people who have the control over the warrior association are not present inside the Warrior association.


    Also it would be reckless if he decided to approach those people without any proper n. Before anything he wanted to find out what happened to his grandparents and aunty and only then he would be punishing that second captain for his crime.


    Sam also needs to know who previously sent his mother to Eden Blue. All this question naturally makes him serious and he is currently observing every Warriors who enters the warrior association or leaves the warrior association.


    After staying there for 3 hours, he finally notices a powerful group of warriors enter the warrior association. From head to toe those Warriors were covered in their body armor. They also hold their  weapon like a knight.


    The captain of that group, the Warriors , already reached peak Elite grade. Those other warriors are around intermediate Elite grade.


    It looks like those Warriors just came out from the Dungeon. Even though he did not notice any injured Warriors but still you can just tell this looking at their situation.


    When they enter the Warrior association, many people already create a path for them to go toward the receptionist. None of the warriors say anything and advance toward the reception .


    Sometimeter,


    Finally those people begin to leave the warrior association and Sam begins to follow them. He wanted to read the memory of those people to know if they have any information about the storm family.


    Like this, Warriors also decided to go their separate ways.


    ________________________________


    "Did that person use some kind of device that removes the memory about the Strom family?"


    Sam is currently quite frustrated because he did not know anything about his grandparents or his aunty. It look like those Warriors from that did not have  a single beta information about T


    Strom family.


    Fortunately this time he got some better information from that person. As he expected, that person that he decided to follow belongs to a warrior family and he can also find some old Warriors.


    Currently they are not present in their house and because of this, Sam decided to leave that house.


    He began to think that the only way he could find anything about his grandparents or aunty is that he needed to target the warrier association. Only targeting the warrior association he will be able to know everything.


    But in the end he decided not to do that. What if the person who is the main culprit somehow gets alerted about this? Because of this he decided to wait for a few days.


    At least the good thing is that he is able to know more information about that and about that city. You also get to know how many powerful Warrior families are present in that city.


    He also gets to know how many of those Warriors have good reputation and good achievement.


    Sam wanted to approach those people to interrogate them. Even though he does not know if he will get any answer or not, at least you will get to know the identity of the second captain.


    It''s been 33 years and because of this even it became hard for him to find out the identity of the second captain.


    ____________________________


    "Sigh, finally I get to know some information."


    The next day,


    Yesterday Sam was very depressed that he did not get to know about anything but in the end as he got to know about many Warriors and those powerful Warrior families, he already decided to interrogate people from Warrior families.


    Naturally that does not mean he will directly attack anyone. He only tries to attack the head of those families and finally from one of them he gets information about his grandparent and aunty.


    By reading the memory of the person he became sure that there was a Strom family 33 years ago. Also the head of the family was Michael storm.


    But something unexpected happened to the family and somehow all the family members disappeared. This makes many people very surprised and even the warrior association tries to search for clues about those people.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Unfortunately none of them were able to find anything in the end. Also as his grandparents weren''t that much famous, slowly many people begin to forget about them.


    Naturally many of them are getting affected due to his grandparents missing. So why should those people try to remember his grandparent?


    The warrior association also stopped searching about them and in the end people decided to forget about the Strom family.


    Not only that, he also gets to know the identity of some important Warriors from the Warrior association. Now those people can help him to get more information.


    Unfortunately still he was not able to get to know the identity of that second captain. It Looked like that person was very alert about these and easily did not reveal his identity.


    But the second captain previously worked for the warrior association and this is also a reason that Sam decided to approach those Warriors from the warrior association.


    Enjoy exclusive adventures from empire


    Sometimeter,


    After leaving that Warrior family, Sam directly began to go toward the direction of the Warrior association. Before anything he wanted to read the memory of any worker of the warrior association.


    At least that will give him the basic knowledge about the Warrior association. Also if possible he can also get the location of those Warriors from the warrior association.


    But Sam did not know that his action already created many of those families bing alert.


    The head of their family somehow got affected by something and all of them became unconscious. Even though they did not have any kind of injury present on their body, it is still a serious matter.


    Immediately they try to contract the warrior association and also one of their other family members.


    __________________________


    The Warrior association suddenly became very alert after receiving reports from those Warrior families and respected Warriors.


    Naturally they cannot ignore any of that information and this makes the warrior association be very alert. They immediately decided to increase the surveince around all the warrior families.


    Also they try to find out if something unexpected happened in their nning or not. Those Warriors also even begin to contact their superiors and tell them about everything.


    In just one hour many people from the warrior association get to know about this. Those high officials of the warrior association also began to attend the meeting.


    Sam at this time did not know what was happening inside the Warriors association. Even if he gets to know about this he will not care about anything.


    Sometimeter he reached the warrior association. But he suddenly became surprised as he could see that somehow the surveince around the warrior association increased.


    But he did not think that much and already appeared inside the warrior association using the teleportation technique.


    When he came inside the warrior association he became surprised because somehow those people inside the Warrior association were getting checked by those Warriors from the warrior association.


    All those people have the same kind of uniform and the uniform has the logo of their warrior association. With this Sam can easily produce those people from the warrior association.


    But the question is that, why suddenly they begin to examine those warriors present in the warrior association? Also what are they checking?


    He decided to wait and see what happened.

 Chapter 885 - Competition

    "Did you hear the suprememander will be going inside elite-grade dungeons? This time he invited many Warriors to tag alongside him.


    It looks like he is going to organize apetition inside the Dungeon. Whoever kills most of the Monsters will be the winner and we will get rewarded by the suprememander."


    "Yeah, I am also thinking about joining the raid. Haha¡­ the suprememander is generous to organizepetitions like this.


    We should try to participate in this and see if we can win thepetition or not."


    "Sigh, I would not be able to join thepetition. Me and my party still could not enter Elite Grade dungeons."


    Inside the Warrior Association, many people are currently talking about apetition that is going to be held by the suprememander.


    The suprememander is the head of the warrior force of the Warriors Association. All the elders of the Warrior Association appointed him as the suprememander because of his achievements.


    Many people became excited after hearing about thepetition. Even though the number of those Elite grade warriors isn''t that high, still all those people who are able to break through to Elite grade are already nning to join thispetition.


    Everybody is feeling grateful to their suprememander. They think the suprememander is generous to organize apetition like this.


    Sam also hears what they are saying. You also know about the suprememander as he read the memory of those Warriors.


    It has been 45 years since the suprememander joined the warrior association as a warrior, and by his equipment, he finally got promoted to suprememander.


    Unfortunately, Sam was not able to get more information than that. On the other hand, he is observing all the people who became excited about thepetition.


    Thinking if he should tag alongside those people or not. It has already been 3 days since he came to this new but until now he did not find any kind of information about his grandparents or his aunty.


    This makes him quite frustrated and also makes him quite angry. His mother already told him about the history of the Storm family.


    The Strom family was from an ancient Warrior family, but due to an ident, only his grandfather left the family. But still, the reputation of the storm family was great inside the warrior association.


    Unfortunately, right now, he did not even find any kind of information about an ancient Warrior family like this.


    Family members from the storm family put their lives in danger when, for the first time, those Monsters appear on this. This is the reason that they also get respected by the warrior association.


    Unfortunately, it looks like all the history about the Strom family has already been removed. Naturally, this would not be possible without help from the warrior association.


    Fortunately, Sam calmed down. He needed to act carefully so that he did not allow the enemy. Before anything, he needed to find out the identity of that second captain, and only then would he get to know what happened to his grandparents and his aunty.


    Two dayster the suprememander called everyone to present in front of that Elite grade Dungeon. Because of this, one by one those Warriors begin to leave the warrior association to prepare themselves.


    Naturally, none of them will be participating in thispetition without a team. Because of this, everybody wanted to discuss with their team the battle n and also wanted to prepare themselves for thepetition.


    On the other hand, Sam became quite curious about the supreme Elder. In the end, he decided to tag alongside those other Warriors.


    Before anything, the supreme Elder joined the warrior association 45 years ago, and he knows about the history of the Storm family.


    If possible Sam will be reading the memory of the suprememander.


    ''I wanted to know which kind of technique they use to erase the memory from anyone''s mind.


    I am sure those people from the Warriors family know nothing about the Strom family, somehow they forget about that.


    The warrior association is also involved in this matter.''


    Without the help of the Warrior Association, no one can do something like this. Also to affect these many people and even those warriors would not be easy for anyone.


    Only if you have that much power, will you be able to do something like this. But Sam did not think that the second captain had that kind of power.


    ___________________________


    For 2 days Sam decided not to attack any other warriors. He already realizes that security around that city has already increased. This is definitely rted to his work and this is the reason he decided to wait for thepetition.


    He did not know, but for 2 days, the situation was very serious inside the warrior association. Continuously, the Warrior force of the warrior association searched around the whole city to find out about the abnormality.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    In the end, they did not find anything, and also, in these 2 days, no more Warriors were affected. Because of this, for 2 days, the warrior association decreased the security as today is thepetition held by the suprememander.


    Because of this, the suprememander appointed many of those Warriors inside the Dungeon.


    Those people will not interfere with other Warriors during the battle. But those Warriors of the Warriors will interfere immediately if the lives of those people are in danger.


    Around 10:00 a.m. you can already see almost 500 Warriors currently present outside the dungeon and waiting for the suprememander to give his speech.


    The Supreme Commander did not take that much time when he noticed everyone was already present there.


    "I can see that all of you are very excited about thepetition. I am also excited to see your battle against those Monsters.


    As I told everyone before, the person who will be able to collect the highest points will be the winner.


    You would be able to collect points after killing those Monsters and also you can collect points gathering their loot.


    Inside the Dungeon, as you know, there are many rare nts and many rare resources present. You can also get points by collecting those resources.


    Other than that, I already appointed Warriors from the Warrior Association. None of them will interfere with your fight until you do not face any real danger.


    Only when your life will be in danger will they interfere and save you. But it will also indicate that you have already been disqualified from thepetition and you will only receive points based on what you have collected at that time.


    With this, I hope all of you will take care during thispetition and not be reckless."


    After saying all of this the suprememander finishes his speech.


    All the Warriors present in that ce begin to p for the suprememander. All of them became excited once again after hearing the speech of the suprememander.


    Many of the Warriors also admire suprememanders. The Supreme Commander is around 70 years old. But nobody will say that he is that much old.


    He still has a fit and muscr body. He has white hair and a white beard. Only based on that people will think he is not a middle-aged man.


    Besides the suprememander, you can see another person who is the firstmander. The authority of the firstmander was lower than the suprememander, but still, he was respected by many people.


    After the suprememander, he has the authority to control those Warrior forces. Other than that he is also the captain of team zero.


    This is the Elite warrior team of the Warrior Association.


    At this time the firstmander observed all the Warriors present in that ce with his sharp eyes. It Looked like the firstmander wanted to find suspicious people.


    There are many people who currently have helmets on their faces. Normally, nobody would be able to see their face, but based on the warrior ID card, anybody will get to know about The Identity of these people.


    Also, nobody will get permission to enter if they do not show their Warrior ID card. Naturally, nobody wanted any criminal to enter the Dungeon.


    What if that criminal makes the situation dangerous for everyone?


    Because of this, before entering the Dungeon, everybody needs to show their ID card.


    Sometimeter,


    One by one all the Warriors began to show their ID card before entering the Dungeon. Many of the people are nervous and many of them are excited about thispetition.


    Naturally, everybody wanted to win thepetition, but at the same time, they also knew the danger of this dungeon.


    Two hourster, finally, all of them got permission to enter the Dungeon as there was no criminal present among them.


    The suprememander already gives them the signal to enter the Dungeon.

 Chapter 886 - Miraculous Plant

    All the Warriors finally enter the Dungeon. The suprememander also told him that he would be waiting for them outside the Boss¡¯s room.


    Those people who will be able to reach the boss room will receive additional rewards from the suprememander.


    This announcement made many of those warriors excited. But not everyone has the capability to reach the boss¡¯s room.


    The Boss monster will be more powerful than a peak Elite-grade monster. Because of this, those people who did not reach that Power limit did not want to challenge that Boss monster.


    Currently, the suprememander, alongside the firstmander and some warriors of the warrior association, is looking at the direction of those Warriors.


    "Sir, why did you suddenly arrange thispetition?"


    The firstmander suddenly asked that question to the suprememander.


    "Well, suddenly many new resources begin to appear inside this Dungeon. The Warrior Association wanted to collect those resources.


    But we would not be able to send that many Warrior forces inside the Dungeon. Because of this, I decided to arrange thesepetitions.


    There are many resources that even we did not know the property of those resources. But previously, we get to hear that there is a miraculous nt inside the Dungeon that can even bring back a dead person.


    We already sent some Warriors, but in the end, we were not able to find anything like this.


    But they also reported that the size of the Dungeon is very big and they would not be able to search the whole dungeon like this."


    The Supreme Commander exined why he arranged thepetition. Actually, through thispetition, he wanted to collect as many resources as he could from this Dungeon.


    The firstmander finally understood why the suprememander suddenly arranged thatpetition.


    At this time, nobody noticed that for a second, the firstmander had a different kind of reaction on his face. But he quickly controls himself and maintains his previous face.


    "Even though our main priority will be collecting as many resources as we can, at the same time, watch over those Warriors.


    If they face any life-threatening situation, our Warriors should immediately react and help them.


    I need to go back to the Warrior Association for a meeting. You would be in charge of maintaining the safety of all the Warriors."


    After saying that the suprememander flew in the sky and then began to go toward the warrior association.


    On the other hand, the firstmander suddenly changed his expression the moment the suprememander left that ce.


    He is looking at the suprememander¡¯s direction with hatred. It looks like he does not want any of those other Warriors to look at his expression, so he immediately changes his expression.


    "As I discussed before, all three of you will be captains for this 3 floor. Alpha you will be in charge on the first floor. Beta will be in charge on the second floor, and the gamma will be in charge on the third floor.


    I will be going to thest floor and waiting for any Warriors to reach that ce. The Supreme Commander also told me that he woulde back in one or two days.


    Also if any of you face any kind of problem or notice any kind of abnormality inside the warrior association, immediately contact me." Find your next read at empire


    The firstmandermands the 3 Warriors in front of him, and those three Warriors immediately salute him and leave the ce. Three of them immediately enter the Dungeon.


    Only then did the firstmander suddenly begin tough like a maniac.


    "Hahaha¡­ I really wanted to get that miraculous nt. With this, I would not have to worry about my life anymore.


    Why should I give those kinds of resources to the warrior association?"


    Whileughing like that the firstmander also said all of this. He wanted to get all those resources. You can say he bes very greedy to get all the resources from the Dungeon.


    10 minutester, he also finally entered the Dungeon. After entering the dungeon, he begins to go in the right direction.


    Sometimeter the firstmander came to a ce where you can see 10 more Warriors are present.


    "It is a good thing that all ten of you decided to participate in this. Also, it is good that none of you have any kind of criminal record under you.


    I was already ready to interfere with the result, but fortunately, nobody was able to detect anything suspicious.


    Now back to the main matter, all of you needed to search for those Warriors who collected rare resources.


    Try to collect as many as you can and then give me the signal. We cannot make the suprememander suspicious about this.


    Because of this, the moment you are able to collect those resources, you should put them in a storage ring.


    I hope all of you finally understand your mission. All of you also need to make sure after getting all the loot, contact me immediately."


    The firstmander also finishes his speech by saying all of these. All those 10 Warriors in front of him nodded after hearing his order.


    Those are the subordinates of the firstmander, and the firstmander appoints those people to go inside the Dungeon.


    The firstmander naturally did not know anything about that miraculous nt or any of the other resources, but the firstmander already understood something important was going to happen, and because of this, he told his team to stay ready and enter the Dungeon.


    _____________________________


    Naturally, none of those Warriors who enter the Dungeon know anything about this. From the moment they enter the Dungeon, they be busy hunting Monsters.


    All those people who will be approaching the next door begin to go toward the direction of the entrance.


    None of the triple wanted to waste the time fighting those Monsters present on the first floor.


    Naturally,pared to the monsters of the second floor or the third floor, they would only receive a little bit of points after killing those Monsters inside the first floor.


    Because of this, all of them directly you want to go to the second floor or the third floor.


    Continuously all of them also release their power so that none of those Monsters approach them. None of them wanted to be busy with those Monsters inside the first floor.


    Like this, you can see a group of warriors currently fighting 5 Early Elite grade monsters. It Looks like fighting those 5 Monsters is not that hard for that group of Warriors.


    Because of this, in just 10 minutes, all of them were able to kill those 5 Monsters. Killing those Monsters that group of Warriors did not be rxed and also began to search their sounding area very carefully.


    n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    ____________________________


    Team Alpha already spared around the whole first floor. They hide themselves so that no Monsters or warriors are able to notice them.


    Continuously observing those Warriors. All of them are ready to act anytime the moment those warriors will face any kind of danger.


    On the other hand, Team Gama and Team Beta also went to their positions.


    On the other hand, the firstmander already came to the second floor. He did not take that much time toe to the second floor using his full speed.


    Well, aftering there, he decided to search around that whole second floor before approaching the third floor.


    The firstmander also did the same thing with the first floor. Naturally, he would not be able to search for that miraculous nt that easily.


    This is also the reason that the Warrior Association decided to organize apetition like this. Their warrior force would take a long time to search for that miraculous nt.


    At this time the firstmander was thinking about contacting that person who previously told the warrior association about that miraculous nt.


    From the suprememander, he gets to know that that person also enters the Dungeon. The good thing is that the firstmander already gets to know the identity of the person from the suprememander.


    Naturally, the firstmander would not directly approach that person, but at least he can watch over that person to see what he is going to do.


    That person would try to bring that miraculous nt to get more points. The firstmander can use that chance to collect the miraculous nt.


    Also, if you are wondering why the Warrior Association did not approach that person, it is because after reporting back, that person was admitted to the hospital.


    There, he asked if he was able to survive. But it is just that, he told those people he was only able to find only one of those nts.


    Also, as he was injured, the warrior association did not think it would be appropriate to approach that person for the miraculous nt.

 Chapter 887 - Natalia Strom?

    Aftering inside the Dungeon everybody focuses on different kinds of Monsters. But, you can say all of them wanted to kill as many Monsters as they could.


    Those people who will only stay on the first floor naturally know that they will receive fewer pointspared to those people who are present on the second floor or third floor.


    That does not mean they did not want to win thepetition. Because of this, all those people present on the first floor already decided to kill as many Monsters as they could.


    Only if they did something like this would they have the chance to win thepetition.


    Many other people are also searching for various resources present in that dungeon. Some of them had already collected some good resources from the Dungeon.


    Some of those resources are special ns that would be useful for the medical association or some special crafting material for the cksmith association.


    All of this will give them points, so they do not want to miss any of the things.


    It has already been 5 hours since those people came inside the Dungeon, and most people who wanted to go to the second floor or the third floor finally reached the second floor.


    Those people who will stay inside this floor naturally begin to focus on those Monsters but the remaining people once again begin to advance.


    If possible they want to reach the entrance of the third floor today.


    Among them, you can see a warrior team fighting a group of lightning birds. Almost 50 lightning birds attack those Warriors while only ten Warriors are present in that ce.


    Those ten Warriors continuously attack Monsters. 5 of them are closebat Warriors, while the remaining five are long-distance Warriors.


    But don¡¯t think those closebat Warriors did not know how to create long-distance attacks. Using spiritual energy everything is possible.


    Among them, you can see a person who is attacking the Monsters, but at the same time, you would not be able to see her face.


    Somehow that person hid her face from the start. But her teammates did not have any problem with that. Well not just only her, there are many other Warriors who are also doing the same thing for different reasons.


    But one thing you can say is that none of them have a criminal record, and this is the reason they got permission to enter the dungeon.


    On the other hand, the firstmander had already reached the third floor and was approaching the boss room.


    At the same time, he decided to observe the whole 3rd floor as much as he could to see if he could find that miraculous nt or not.


    One thing you should know is that finding these kinds of things would not be easy for anyone. Even if you have the observation technique, you would not be able to find this kind of resource that easily.


    It is like even the Dungeon wanted to hide those things from anyone. On the other hand, the firstmander also wanted to know if there is anyone able to find any different resources or not.


    Actually, if you want to know why he sent his subordinate inside this dungeon, then from the start, the firstmander realizes that something is going on with this suddenpetition.


    This is the reason he decided to send those subordinates and wait for his signal. But the firstmander did not know that one more person followed him inside the Dungeon.


    But when that firstmander came to the third floor that person decided to stop following him and decided to stay on the third floor.


    As you can predict it is Sam who followed that firstmander from the start. You also get to know why the suprememander suddenly arranged thispetition.


    Sam also gets to know the real motive of that firstmander. He also saw how that firstmander told his subordinate to search for the miraculous nt and, if possible, follow that person who previously found that nt.


    After that, Sam stops following that person because the firstmander will go to the boss¡¯s room, and he can go thereter. Even he became quite excited about the new resources appearing inside this Dungeon.


    As he was inside the second floor he began to search around that whole floor. During his search, he also realized the size of that second floor.


    It is huge. This is the reason that the warrior association allows many people toe inside the dungeon.


    During that time, he saw many of those Warriors fighting those Monsters and trying to advance toward the entrance of the third floor.


    But Sam is not interested in any of those people until he does not meet that group who are fighting those thunderbirds.


    Actually, if you are wondering why he became interested, then it is because of that person hiding his face. From the start, some already observe all those people present on the first floor and second floor who are trying to hide their faces.


    Using the observation technique you also saw the status of the people to know the real reason. Some of them have injuries present on their face, while some of them hide their face because they do not want to reveal their identity.


    Naturally, Sam did not care about those people; it was just he used to be curious about those people who were hiding their faces.


    For example, when he met that group of Warriors who were fighting those Thunderbirds, he decided to check the status of that person hiding her face.


    But the moment he did that he becamepletely shocked. He cannot believe what he is seeing right now. For a second, Sam thought he was seeing something wrong, and he was hallucinating.


    "Name - Natalia Strom


    Age - 38."


    The moment he saw the name of the person he couldn¡¯t believe what he was seeing.


    But sometimeter Sam was able to calm down. Before anything, he wanted to know if this was really his aunt or not.


    Is she really Hina¡¯s sister? Sam did not know the answer but he decided to follow her and observe her.


    If she really is his aunty then what about his grandparents? Where are they right now, or did they get killed by that second captain? Sam is thinking about all these kinds of questions.


    Well, he is thinking that something unexpected happened. Somehow, previous Monsters called for reinforcement, and instantly, the number of those monsters increased to 60.


    Until now they already have killed 30 of those Monsters. But it was not easy for them to kill that many Monsters at once.


    Even though those Monsters are weakpared to them, because of their huge numbers it became quite difficult for them to kill those Monsters that easily.


    Your next chapter awaits on empire


    Sam naturally observes his aunty and he can tell she is getting exhausted. Even though at first he did not want to interfere with their fight, in the end, he decided to help them.


    n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    When that group of Warriors once again decides to prepare themselves to fight those Monsters, something unexpected happens. Suddenly, one by one, those Monsters got hit by a sun ray.


    In the next second, those monsters get vaporized. Once again those Warriors became shocked the moment they noticed what happened to those Monsters.


    Instantly they also became alert. They thought some other group of Warriors decided to interfere with their fight.


    Now this is a serious thing as nobody knows what is the motive of that second group of Warriors. But even after waiting almost 10 minutes, they did not find any presence of another group of Warriors near them.


    This made them quite confused, but in the end, they decided to retreat from that ce. Naturally, Sam follows them. If possible, he wants to read the memory of his aunt to see if she is real or not.


    2 hourster,


    It was already nighttime, and all those Warriors, alongside Sam¡¯s aunt,y, decided to rest. They did not want to continue fighting those Monsters during nighttime.


    Also, they are very close to the entrance of the third floor, and from tomorrow morning, they will start hunting those Monsters present on the third floor.


    From then, the real challenge will start for all of them. They wanted to prepare themselves mentally and physically to fight those Monsters inside the third floor.


    After eating some food, those people were discussing the previous incident. None of them know what happened and how those Monsters got killed.


    But one thing is clear: some other Warrior helped them to kill those Monsters. But why would someone do something like this?


    This is the thing that makes them very confused.


    Sam just smiled after hearing their discussion. He is also resting not far away from that group of Warriors. Also, those people did not know that Sam was also making sure no other Monsters approached that group of Warriors at this time.

 Chapter 888 - Another group of Warriors

    It has been 2 days since Sam started following his aunt. Her team already came to the 3rd floor.


    Not just them but many other people also came to the third floor and everyone focused on killing those Monsters as much as they could.


    At the same time they were also searching for resources around the third floor and they already found some of those resources.


    It looks like most of those resources are familiar to them but they also found some unknown resources. They did not know how many points they would get because of those resources but at least it can increase their points.


    Compared to them Sam already knows about all those resources by using the status viewing option. But he decided not to appear in front of them or say anything about those resources.


    Before anything he wanted to know if that person was really his aunt or not. Naturally he has many questions but results to wait for the end of thepetition.


    On the other hand he also noticed that subordinates of the firstmander had alreadye to the third floor following a group of Warriors.


    Most likely among them one Warriors is the one who previously found that miraculous nt and because of these that person got followed by those subordinate of the firstmander.


    Sam already thought about going toward that firstmander and attacking him. Don''t know why but he did not like that person. There could be a chance that he was the person who was the second captain 33 years ago.


    But he cannot be sure about this.


    On the other hand, his aunt and her teammates did not receive help from him anymore as he decided to not to interfere with their fight.


    It also makes them forget about that previous incident.


    __________________________


    "Tomorrow we will cover the east area as if I am not wrong then we would be able to find more resources around that area."


    "Hmm¡­ I''m not sure about this but I don''t have any problem with this. But the same time I can say that we needed to stay very careful.


    Like us there are many other Warriors alsoing to the 3rd floor and there is a possibility they will attack other Warriors to get their resources."


    "Hmmm¡­. You are right. We need to stay very careful about this."


    Currently Nataliya and had tea made discussing that tomorrow early in the morning they will go toward the east area.


    Actually they find those resources while going to at the east area and because of this the captain of the team decided that they will only go toward the east area.


    If they really wanted to get the first ce then not only they need to focus on killing those Monsters but at the same time need to focus on collecting those resources.


    Natalia did not say anything to anyone and just nodded her head. Even though she was currently resting with her teammates, she did not reveal her face to anyone.


    Her teammates already try to gain her trust, but unfortunately in the end they are unsessful. The captain also told everyone not to disturb her.


    At this time nobody knew what she was thinking and because of this, they decided to ignore her.


    Sometimeter they decided to eat their foods and after that they will also rest. At night time they decided not to hunt those Monsters as that can became dangerous for them.


    Like this around 3:00 a.m. suddenly all of them became very serious. All of them can feel that another group of warriors enter their observation range.


    Definitely those Warriors also already sense them. But still those people approaching their direction. This make them very serious and all of them already prepare themselves to fight those group of Warriors.


    Sometimeter, currently both the warrior group facing each other and a tense atmosphere got created in that ce.


    Naturally that second group of Warriors came there to attack that first group of Warriors to get their resources. They decided to choose the night time as they are good at hiding.


    Before Natalia and others were do anything those second group of Warriors instantly disappear.


    They uses they are hiding technique to make themselves invisible. Naturally Natalie and the others became very alert about these and begin to use their observation technique in full power.


    In the next second one of them instantly attacked toward his right direction.


    "Cling!!!"


    A sh appear on that ce. One Warrior from that second group of Warrior decide to attack that person. Fortunately that person able to counter attack.


    Sam is currently flying in the sky and watching all of this. He can see both the group of Warriors without any problem.


    Even though that second group of people became invisible for Natalia and the others, for him this is not hard to find them.


    He is just observing his aunt. She can use the ice element and thunder element attacks.


    She instantly begin to frozen the whole ground, but in the next second some flying knives came toward her direction.


    But before those knives can reach her instantly those knives get destroyed by the thunder that suddenly appears around her.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Using her technique she also created a thunder zone and nobody would be able to enter that zone to attack her. Inside that zone she is safe and just needs to find the location of those enemies.


    But it look like those people who are currently hiding themselves are also have some kind of technique that can also hide them from the observation technique.


    This is the reason fighting them became hard for Natalia and the others. Because of the good reaction until now they able to counter those attacks from that second group of Warriors.


    At this time, Sam suddenly noticed a group of Monsters begin to approach that ce after hearing the sound of fighting.


    Well this is natural. As monsters can easily get attracted by this kind of battle. But at the same time normal people not try to attract the attention of those Monsters during night time.


    But because of the battle those Warriorpletely forget about those Monsters. They just focus on those other warriors.


    Sam decided to take action against those Monsters. He decided to kill them instantly by controlling their whole body using the telekinesis technique.


    But a unexpected situation appear on that ce the moment he uses his attacked. Both the warrior group got affected by these and in the next second theg begin to hear the painful cry of those monster.


    Immediately both the team stop fighting and begin to search around to see what happen. Only then they notice those Monsters floating in the mic and in the next second one by one those Monsters got killed.


    Instantly all of them begin to feel pressure to their body and the pressure was so much that it almost makes them unable to breath.


    To finish those Monsters as quickly as we can by change he also uses the bloodline pressure. This is the reason that he got this kind of reaction from those two groups of Warriors.


    Look like that second group of Warriors misunderstand the current situation and thought another powerful Warrior is present with that group of Warriors.


    Instelly those second group of begin to escape from that ce. Even though they first have the confidence to defeat that group of Warriors but because of the appearance of the unknown factor, in the end the decided to forget about attacking those Warriors.


    Natalia and the others on the other hand became very confused and serious at the same time. Once again someone help them but that person did not appear on that ce.


    One thing everyone of them sure that this person is stronger than them. The captain of that group even try to talk to Sam. Unfortunately Sam did not appear in front of them.


    ________________________


    Finally 20 dayster,


    Natalia and her teammates got the chance to advance to the boss room. From outer area to core area they kill all the monster and finally able to advance to the next road.


    When they came to that ce they saw some other Warriors also present in that ce. Naturally all of them also came to that ce before them.


    The suprememander at this time smile at Natalia and the others and told him to rest.


    Sometimeter they will be fighting that Boss monster and before that every one of them needed to rest and make themselves physically and mentally prepared to battle the boss monster.


    At this time the suprememander and the firstmander observed all the Warriors who were able to reach that next floor one by one.


    At this time the suprememander told them that tomorrow they will be fighting the Boss monster. Until then they would be wait for other Warriors.

 Chapter 889 - Facing minions

    Sometimeter, two more groups of Warriors were also able to reach thest floor, and all of them also greeted the suprememander. It is finally time to enter the Boss room.


    "Before entering the boss room I wanted to exin to everyone the rules. I and the firstmander will not help you to fight the Boss monster and those Minions.


    All of you needed to depend on your own strength to find the Boss monster alongside those Minions.


    But as sure that you would not be able to fight that Boss monster alone, you can fight that Boss Monster as a team.


    This time, the firstmander and I will observe all of you, and all of you will get points based on your own performance.


    Even if you kill the Boss monster, if you have a bad performance, you will not get that many pointspared to that person who is unable to kill the Boss monster but has a good performance.


    So make sure that you forget about your own rivalry for now and focus on killing the Boss monster alongside all the Minions of the Boss monster.


    Naturally me and the firstmander will help you if we see the situation bing very dangerous. But remember, the moment we enter the fight, all of you will get eliminated."


    Everyone understood what the suprememander wanted to say. Naturally, they expected something like this.


    With this, one by one, they begin to enter the Boss''s room. The suprememander and the firstmander also enter that room but they end.


    On the other hand, no other group of warriors came to that ce. There could be two possibilities. The remaining group of Warriors had already been eliminated, or they did not have that much confidence to fight the Boss monster.


    "Sigh, I already expected something like this, but still, I expected more groups of Warriors to reach here."


    The suprememander sighed. But the firstmander did not say anything after hearing that.


    Actually, he did not. He was thinking about his subordinate who still had not reached that ce. The firstmander wanted to know what happened to them.


    If possible he wanted to go back to the 3rd floor to see if his subordinate was able to find anything or not.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    __________________________


    Natalia and all the other Warriors, after entering the boss room, became very surprised. Like the size of those floors, the boss room also is very big.


    It''s surrounded by many pirs, and those pirs, you can see those fire torches. Those fire torches are the source of the light in that room.


    Naturally, that would not be enough for them to see clearly in that room, which is filled with darkness. Every one of those Warriors begins to use their night vision technique.


    With this, the room became more visible to them, and all those Warriors began to search for the Boss monster.


    Unfortunately, even 5 minutester, they did not find any sign of boss Monster or any of those Minions.


    But these did not make them impatient. This kind of situation is normal inside the Boss room. It looks like from the moment anybody enters the boss room, the Boss monster will immediately know about these and he will observe those intruders.


    Like this, all those who were Warriors already came far away from the entrance, but still, they did not find any sign of Boss Monster.


    One of them is about to say something, but before he can say anything, suddenly a powerful roar appears in that ce.


    Immediately, they begin to feel mental pressure, and many of them almost lose their consciousness. Fortunately, many Warriors are also able to react the moment they begin to feel the mental pressure.


    Only then they can rx a little and also immediately help those remaining Warriors.


    Definitely, this is not your normal roar. Some kind of mental power is used in this roar.


    Immediately the whole floor began to Shake violently. Everyone became very alert.


    But 1 minuteter everything became silent once again. But this time, only for 2 minutes, everything became silent, and after that, immediately, all those Warriors began to hear the roar of those Minions.


    It looked like those Monsters surrounded them from every direction. Naturally, this situation can be more dangerous. The Warriors immediately reacted.


    They immediately decided to retreat and decided to only attack those Monsters behind them.


    Getting surrounded by those Monsters would not be a good thing for them and they needed some opening.


    With this, they immediately turn around and begin to attack the Monsters behind them.


    In just 5 seconds the intense battle between those Warriors and those Monsters appear on the scene.


    Those Monsters have the advantage because of their number but don''t underestimate those warriors.


    The good thing is that before those Monsters could get close to them, those Warriors reacted quickly. Because of this, they are already able to get the advantage and also kill almost 30 Monsters at once.


    But they still need to kill the remaining 850 Monsters. All those Monsters are around their power level, but not every one of them reaches the limit of their power level.


    This is also an advantage those Warriors have over those Monsters. But naturally, not every warrior is as lucky as them.


    Fortunately, those remaining Warriors at least also helped the other Warriors to retreat from that ce. This will also count as a good performance by the suprememander. so naturally everyone wanted to perform like this.


    None of them worried about losing their life as the suprememander was present in that ce, so nothing would happen to them.


    Somehow, those Warriors were able to create an opening and finally were able to retreat. But none of them became rxed and began to attack those Monsters who almost came close to them.


    Naturally, this is not over until they did not kill those minion Monsters. Finally, you can say the intense battle appeared in that ce.


    The suprememander and the firstmander are currently looking at the battle between those warriors and those Monsters with interest.


    At this time, the firstmander saw some people who had good talent, and they could be his subordinates. He already decided to invite them to join his team.


    But at the same time, he is also observing those warriors who can pose a threat to him. If you are wondering about the power level of the firstmander then he is around peak Elite grade.


    Butpared to those other Warriors he is quite different because even though he is unable to break through to Epic grade, he is able to reach the true limit of peak Elite grade.


    Naturally, he wanted to know how many people there were who could pose a threat to him. If it is required he will take necessary action against those people.


    Even though that would not be easy as many of them belong to powerful backgrounds but still at least he would be able to save himself.


    The firstmander was thinking all of this but did not notice that the suprememander suddenly looked in his direction.


    Almost for 1 minute, the suprememander looks in his direction and has a serious expression. But one minuteter the suprememander once again focused on those Warriors.


    Even though the firstmander did not notice anything, Sam, who is currently beside them, already noticed this, and this made him very confused.


    Why would suddenly the suprememander look toward the firstmander like this? Did something happen between them?


    Sam begins to think about this type of question. On the other hand, using his own observation technique, he can sense the Malicious intention of the firstmander.


    ''It looks like the suprememander is also able to feel something like this. Will he take any action against this?''


    Sam became curious about this but then he decided to focus on his aunt. Currently, the Warriors who are fighting those Monsters are already in a tough situation.


    But as they are working together, somehow they are able to ovee the tough situation and get the advantage over those Monsters.


    8 hourster,


    Almost 500 Monsters were killed by those warriors. But at the same time, after fighting those Monsters for 8 hours, those Warriors became very exhausted.


    But naturally, these did not make them give up on this. Before anything you should know that they are not your noob. They have faced simr situations many times.


    All of them needed to survive in the end and also needed to fight the Boss monster. Even though they are unable to kill the Boss monster they would at least be able to perform better to get more points.


    Natalia and her teammates are also attacking those Monsters continuously. Finally, they got some time to rest and recover their lost spiritual energy.


    At this time another team begins to cover them and continuously attack those Monsters.

 Chapter 890 - Malicious intention

    Finally, are Warriors able to get the advantage over those Monsters. Actually the suprememander can already see the condition of those Warriors and he can tell those warriors would not be able to survive for that long.


    He decided to help them and also told him they did not have to worry about getting eliminated.


    Actually, those Warriors who are currently finding those minion Monsters did not think that they will face this many Monsters at once.


    Normally during the time when they fight any Boss monster, they only face a maximum of 100 Monsters. This is also the reason that with this big group they thought that this time they would not have that much problem fighting the Boss monster.


    Unfortunately, they realize that they really underestimate the Dungeon and the Boss monster.


    The Boss monster has these many Minions and these also show the power of that Boss monster.


    Until now the Boss monster did not even make any move but now everyone also begins to worry about that Boss monster. Many of them even started to doubt that they would be able to fight back.


    The suprememander can already tell that many people have already begun to lose their confidence. He became disappointed after noticing this.


    At least with his presence everyone should be able to fight those Monsters without thinking about dying. But even in this situation many of them begin to lose confidence.


    That is a really disappointing thing. Still the good thing is that those Monsterspletely did not lose their confidence and are still fighting those Monsters.


    Among them the suprememander also found some Warriors who are very talented. The suprememander even decided to approach those people to invite them to his team.


    __________________________


    "Roar!!!!!!"


    2 hourster they are finally very close to killing almost all the Minion Monsters. Only 100 of these monsters are left in that ce.


    These also make those warriors quite happy. Unfortunately for them, before they can be more happy suddenly the Boss monster takes action while releasing the spirit roar.


    Immediately many of those Warriors got affected. Immediately they fall down on the ground and almost lose their consciousness. Many of them begin to feel dizzy.


    Only a few of those Warriors were able to protect themselves. They also immediately created barriers around them and those other Warriors.


    It looks like none of those minion Monsters got affected by the spirit roar and using these as their advantage those Monsters almost attack them.


    Fortunately 20 of those Warriors were able to stay conscious and did not get that much affected by the spirit roar.


    But not long after that those Warriors begin to feel the pressure. Naturally those minion Monsters continuously attack them and try to break the barrier around them.


    On the other hand, they also finally notice the Boss monster. The Boss monster is a giant. That giant is also holding a very big hammer.


    Giant did not even take any action but still every Warriors can feel the power of that giant. This immediately makes many of those Warriors lose their full confidence.


    How can they fight back in a situation like this? Immediately their advantage already became their disadvantage.


    They did not know how long they would be able to fight back with the minion Monsters and if they would be able to protect themselves from that giant Monster or not.


    At this time Natalia is also trying to maintain the barrier around her and her teammates. She also notices that giant monster. Butpared to those other Warriors she did not lose her focus or confidence.


    She is even already thinking about a n to attack that giant monster. It is just 5 of her team that got unconscious. The remaining four people also became dizzy.


    They will take some time to recover. Until then she needs to protect her friends.


    The suprememander and the firstmander already became serious and both of them are ready to take action. Actually at this time even the firstmander did not know if he would be able to wind against that Boss monster or not.


    Even though he had the confidence that he would be able to take care of all those Minion Monsters, he did not have the confidence to single handedly defeat that Boss monster.


    "Don''t worry I am here. I will take care of that Boss monster if the situation bes more dangerous."


    It Looks like the suprememander already can tell what the firstmander is thinking. But at the same time you can say the suprememander is quite disappointed at the firstmander.


    At least he expected better reaction from the firstmander but even the firstmander got startled after feeling the power of that Boss monster.


    __________________________


    Finally 20 minutester Natalia can rest as all of her friends became normal and they also decided to maintain the barrier around them. Natalia decided to rest for a few minutes to recover thest spiritual energy and then decided to attack that Boss monster.


    Even though she did not have the confidence to defeat that Boss Monster, at the same time she knows that the suprememander is here and he will not let her die.


    At any condition she wanted to win thispetition to get acknowledged by the suprememander and get more resources. She needs to fulfill her goal at any condition.


    On the other hand the situation of those other warriors isn''t good. Even though the Boss monster did not take any action but just standing there, that Boss monster put pressure on every warrior.


    Also already many of them all lose their confidence to fight and this makes the situation more dangerous.


    In this situation suddenly Natalia created a very powerful spirit beam. She uses 90% of her spiritual energy behind that attack and created that very powerful spirit beam.


    Immediately a huge explosion appeared on that ce which almost sent all the Warriors backward.


    The impact was so powerful that those pirs around them got destroyed. Fortunately the ceiling did not fall down.


    Even the Boss monster somehow got injured by these attacks. In the next second, immediately everybody can hear the angry roar of the Boss monster.


    But that is the only matter. At this time everybody can also see almost 40 Monsters got killed in that spirit beam.


    At this time all of them focused on Natalia''s direction. They did not expect this mysterious girl to be this much powerful.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    But at this time you can say somehow many other Warriors also got back their confidence and they also decided to use their full power.


    Naturally, that was Monster also noticed Natalia and most likely wanted to attack her. But Natalie is not afraid of that Boss monster and she already gulped down a spiritual potion.


    She already recovered her spiritual energy and once again began to prepare her to attack.


    As that was Monster only for causing on Natalia these also give those other Warriors the chance to retreat and also prepare their attacks.


    That was Monster immediately disappears from his ce and immediately appears in front of Natalia. He is just about to swing his big hammer toward her.


    But before he can do that suddenly Natalia counterattacks. Once again a very powerful spirit beam was created by her and directly hit that Boss monster.


    Not only that, suddenly the powerful attack of those other Warriors hit those minion Monsters. One by one many explosions appear in the ce that begin to destroy the whole room.


    Even the suprememander got shocked after seeing the destruction. He immediately took action so that the ceiling did not fall on those warriors.


    But the suprememander noticed that the ceiling did not fall down or show any sign of falling down.


    Because of this the suprememander rxes a little and focuses on Natalia. He really did not expect to see a brave girl like her who directly attacked that Boss monster.


    He even needed to acknowledge that the spirit beam was very powerful. Even that firstmander beside him would not be able to survive against that spirit beam.


    Naturally the suprememander is ready to take action anytime. But suddenly he became serious the moment he sent the malicious intention of the firstmander.


    Looks like that firstmander wanted to do something bad to that girl. Unfortunately for that firstmander, the suprememander is present there and he already realizes the motive of that firstmander.


    This made the suprememander be more disgusted. If possible he wanted to take action against that firstmander.


    Actually the suprememander already here the firstmander is involved with a lot of illegal work. Unfortunately until now nobody was able to prove that and because of this the firstmander did not get punished by anyone.


    But if that firstmander really decided to harm that girl then the suprememander would immediately take action.

 Chapter 891 - Terrifying Boss monster and Black Gas

    The help from the suprememander gives everyone the time to recover their spiritual energy.


    Even the Boss monster went flying backwards and did not get up from the ground for 5 minutes. Even though it is a short time, it is still enough for all the Warriors to recover their spiritual energy.


    They already killed all the Minions, and finally, they need to fight that Boss monster. Naturally, nobody has the confidence to fight the Boss monsters on their own.


    Just feeling the spiritual pressure of that Boss Monster everybody can tell they would not be able to fight that Monster alone.


    5 minutester,


    Everyone begins to prepare their attack and carefully observe the direction of the Boss monster.


    "Roar!!!!!"


    The Boss monster instantly let out a furious roar. Immediately, a huge shock was created because of that roar.


    But before that shockwaves could reach those Warriors, a barrier was created in front of them. Those Warriors were ready to take action anytime.


    On the other hand, the boss monster immediately gets up from the ground and angrily looks toward those Warriors.


    Suddenly, almost 2000 fireballs appear in that ce and directly go toward those Warriors. But it was not there as, at the same time, the whole room began to shake.


    It looks like the monster is also preparing for his next attack. But the Warriors already created barriers to surround them from all over the direction.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    All those Warriors who can create The spiritual barrier are currently using their full power to maintain the barrier. One by one those fireballs begin to hit those spiritual barriers.


    You should not understand the power of those fireballs. One by one, a huge impact is being created on that ce, and those people who are trying to maintain the barrier are also feeling the impact.


    Those people also feel the pressure in their body which keeps increasing and increasing.


    The remaining people who cannot use the spiritual barrier are currently observing their surrounding area very carefully. The Monster is preparing for the next attack and they need to protect themselves and those other Warriors.


    Suddenly the whole ce begins to get covered in darkness. All the fire torches present in that room had already been destroyed, and the darkness began to cover the whole room.


    You cannot say it is normal darkness as a ck gas covers the whole room. Immediately all those people who maintain the barrier begin to feel more pressure.


    Some of those various almost got destroyed, but fortunately, those Warriors were able to hold on. Currently, they are using their full power to hold on as they know that they cannot get affected by that ck gas.


    The moment any Warrior or humanes into contact with that ck gas, immediately that human will lose the ability to control his body.


    The mind of that human would not be able to control the whole body, and like this, one by one, the human will lose all the ability. He would not even be able to move from his ce, he would forget how to breathe.


    He will lose his hearing ability or his vision. The spiritualwork of any Warrior will immediately get affected by this ck gas, and immediately, the spiritualwork will get destroyed.


    That Warrior would not be able to channel spiritual energy all over his body and that spiritual energy will only stay in one ce.


    The spiritual energy will also go overload and it will continuously begin to grow. Sometimeter, the body of that human would not be able to handle that spiritual energy.


    In the second, the body of that Warrior would explode. Because of this, nobody wanted to get affected by that ck gas.


    At this time,


    The suprememander continuously observed those warriors and wanted to know their next move. He is also ready to help those Warriors.


    The ck gas is a very dangerous thing for any Warriors.


    The good thing is that the suprememander is still able to see everything very clearly. But the firstmander kindly looked in the direction with confusion.


    He did not know the result. But at this time he also hoped that some of those Warriors died.


    Sometimeter,


    The ck gas begins to fade away from that ce. Only then does the firstmander get to see that all the warriors are still able to maintain the barrier around them?


    But all those Warriors who previously maintained the barrier almost became unconscious. They use their 100% power to maintain the barrier all this time.


    Slowly the barrier around them begins to disappear. At this time the remaining Warriors immediately reacted and approached the Boss monster.


    The long-distance Warriors instantly use their attacks. Among them, you can see some of them are archers while some of them are spell casters.


    Even those closebat Warriors begin to use their long-distance attack. One by one those Warriors continuously attack the Monsters while approaching toward him.


    It looks like the monster is about to prepare his next attack but he is busy dodging those attacks from those Warriors.


    In front of those many attacks, even the Monsters begin to feel danger. In this situation, he cannot be careless.


    He even began to use those fireballs to protect himself. Not only that but even a big firewall was created in that ce.


    But it looks like the monster is unable to put that much power behind that firewall. In just 10 seconds, that firewall begins to get destroyed.


    Not only that, those fireballs are also unable to stop those attacks from those warriors. But the monster will not give up like this.


    He is also trying his best to dodge those attacks and maintain the firewall in front of him.


    The Monster was surrounded by those Warriors from all over the direction. Because of this, he needs to maintain the firewall from all over the direction. He cannot focus on only one single direction.


    At this time, the monster finally got hit by those attacks. But you can already see the terrifying defense of the monster.


    _________________________


    During the time when those Warriors are attacking the Boss monster, the remaining Warriors who previously got exhausted already get the time to recover their spiritual energy.


    Naturally, they also wanted those other Warriors to attack that monster. Once again they bring out spiritual potions and health potions.


    10 minutester they also join those remaining Warriors and continuously begin to attack the Monsters.


    Almost for 30 minutes, they continue to attack that monster. 30 minutester, everyone begins to feel exhausted, so they immediately retreat from that ce.


    They cannot take the chance to get close to that monster. On the other hand, none of them know the condition of that monster. They also cannot be sure that they will finally kill that monster.


    Ayer of smoke was created on that ce that covered that whole area. The surrounding area has already been destroyed and a huge hole was created in that ce.


    Fortunately, the ceiling of that room still did not show any sign of falling. This is the reason that all the Warriors can attack that Monster without worrying about anything.


    Those Warriors previously thought the suprememander maintained the ceiling so that they could fully focus on the Boss monster.


    Unfortunately, none of them realize it is another person who is helping them in this situation. Naturally, nobody was able to detect that person.


    Even the suprememander was unable to detect that person even though he was using the observation technique in full power.


    Sometimeter,


    All the Warriors are currently recovering Their spiritual energy and trying to recover their lost stamina and mental energy.


    But suddenly something unexpected happened. A huge shockwave was created in that ce and immediately went toward those Warriors.


    The shockwave came toward them out of nowhere. They did not even get the chance to do anything.


    Immediately all the people got affected by that shockwave and immediately began to feel dizzy. Only then they get to hear the angry roar of that monster.


    It looks like the Boss monster uses a high-frequency voice to Roar this time, and because of this, none of them are able to hear the roar of that monster.


    The dizziness begins to affect their thinking ability and they are unable to think anything properly. Some of them even fall on the ground.


    Those people begin to feel headaches and the headache keeps increasing. Naturally, The Monster uses the mental attack and it looks like this time, he uses his full mental power.


    Theyer of smoke from that ce already got clear, and finally, you can see that Monster is present in that hole. The Monster already jumped and came to the surface area.


    It Looks like the monster became seriously injured because of those attacks. He already lost half of his body.


    But it looks like the monster also has a regeneration technique that helps the Monster to generate the body part that is destroyed.

 Chapter 892 - Attacking the first commander

    Naturally, all the Warriors did not want to give any time to that Boss monster. Unfortunately, they really underestimate the Boss monster.


    Suddenly that Boss monster disappeared from his ce. All those attacks from the Warriors just hit the empty ce.


    Immediately, all the Warriors became very alert, and immediately, they created a spiritual barrier around them.


    Unfortunately, before they can fully create all the spiritual barriers, they immediately get hit by countless fireballs.


    All of this happened so quickly that those warriors did not get the time to do anything. Those previous spiritual barriers also begin to get destroyed, and one after another, many explosions also appear in that ce.


    Those Warriors, even in that situation, are trying to protect themselves and trying to fight back. Unfortunately, in the end, all of them became seriously injured.


    Finally, they realize the power of that Boss monster. They finally begin to be scared of that Boss monster.


    Even though previously the Boss monster got seriously injured, currently, the Boss monster is fully recovered using his regeneration technique.


    The suprememander immediately takes action and immediately creates a barrier around the Boss monster.


    The life of those Warriors are in danger and he cannot let that Boss Monster kill those Warriors.


    At this time any of those Warriors already became seriously injured and unconscious. Many of them had already lost their armor andy down on the ground while covered in blood.


    Fortunately, the suprememander reacted on time and prevented them from dying.


    The remaining Warriors sigh in relief and they begin to help those other injured Warriors to retreat from that ce.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    One thing is clear: they had already been eliminated from thispetition as the suprememander interfered with the fight.


    But at the same time, they know that it is because the Boss monster is very powerful. Even though many groups of Warriors are present there, the Boss monster is still more powerful than them.


    They could not even reach the Boss monster if they had not received help from the suprememander before.


    Because of his help, they are able to defeat those Minions and get the chance to fight that Boss monster.


    Natalie also helped her teammates to retreat from that ce. Fortunately, she is in better conditionpared to her teammates.


    At this time the firstmander was also trying to help those Warriors. Naturally, as the suprememander already took action, he cannot stay there without doing anything.


    Because of this, even though he was unwilling to help those Warriors, he still decided to help them.


    But at the same time, he was also looking for a chance to harm those Warriors without alerting anyone.


    While observing those Warriors fighting that Boss monster, he already finds out some people who are in the same power level as him or even more powerful than him.


    Naturally, this made him quite jealous, and if possible, he wanted to kill those people. But the problem is that as the suprememander is present in that ce he would not be able to do that.


    Because of this, the firstmander looked for the right time to harm those people without alerting anyone.


    But as there are many Warriors present in that ce, getting a chance like this is very rare.


    Sometimeter, the firstmander is present beside Natalia who is trying to help her teammates to stabilize their condition. Some of them became unconscious and she needed to help those people.


    The thing is that the firstmander is looking for the right time to attack that mask girl. Natalie and her teammates are quite far away from those other Warriors.


    Because of this, the firstmander decided to approach them and ask the girl who was hiding her face.


    She is one of the people who is more powerful than the firstmander and can be a threat to him.


    He did not think that girl would be his subordinate as some time ago he already asked her that, but she just replied to him with a cold look.


    The firstmander hated this kind of look. Because of this, he became furious and looked for the chance to kill that girl. This would be the perfect time to finish that girl as currently that girl is injured and cannot be able to use her full power.


    The suprememander had already killed that Monster and it would not be long before that Monster would disappear.


    At this time something unexpected happened. Natalia''s teammates had already be unconscious.


    The firstmander thought this was the perfect time to attack that girl. But before he can do anything, suddenly Natalia turns around and a powerful spiritual beam directly appears in front of that firstmander.


    All of this happened so quickly that the firstmander did not get the chance to do anything. He immediately got hit by that spirit beam.


    Immediately a huge impact affects the body. His whole body began to feel pain because of the impact.


    The Armour of that firstmander was able to protect himself for a few minutes, but after that, the armor instantly got destroyed.


    His body begins to get burned by the spirit beam. If it continues like this then the firstmander will immediately disappear from that ce. He will turn into ashes.


    For the first time, the firstmander felt true despair. He already feels that he is going to die. At this time he did not have any way to protect himself.


    Fortunately, something unexpected happened. Suddenly, the suprememander came behind the firstmander and immediately created a barrier.


    Immediately that spirit beam hit the barrier but was unable to break the barrier. Like this, for 2 minutes, that spirit beam continuously hit that barrier.


    The suprememander maintains the barrier. But he is also very confused about this sudden situation. Why did that girl suddenly begin to attack the firstmander?


    Did this firstmander try to do something to her?


    The suprememander did not immediately me that girl and began to think like this. He begins to think this firstmander tried to do something to her.


    Sometimeter,


    The suprememander immediately told all the Warriors to go back to their ce when he and the firstmander approached Natalia.


    Natalia is currently panting on the ground while looking at that firste under with pure hatred. This thing makes the suprememander even more confused.


    But the firstmander who is able to stabilize his condition is sent with killing intent. He wanted to attack that girl to kill her.


    How can she attack him like this?


    Because of the suprememander, the firstmander still did not attack that girl.


    Both of them came in front of Natalia and suddenly the suprememander asked,


    "Why did you suddenly attack the firstmander? Did he do something to you?"


    The firstmander beside him almost became shocked. How can the suprememander say something like this to that girl who just tried to kill him?


    Most likely, the firstmander wanted to say something, but the suprememander immediately signaled him to stay silent.


    "Cough¡­ Cough¡­. Cough¡­ It looks like your luck is very good. Because of the suprememander, you did not die."


    Even in that exhausted state Natalie still looked at the firstmander with pure hatred. She said all of this to that firstmander, and after that, she began to remove her cover.


    Naturally, the firstmand wanted to reply, but he also held back when he looked at that girl and began to reveal her face.


    Actually, he even became confused about the identity of that girl. He is also unable to understand why the girls suddenly attack him like this and why she looks in his direction with this kind of hatred.


    Sometimeter, finally, Natalia revealed her full face.


    "Do you remember me? I would not be surprised if you are unable to remember me.


    But I think you would remember me if I told you my name. My name is Natalia Strom.


    Haha, haha¡­. I can see by your reaction that, most likely, you already understand my identity. Haha¡­ haha¡­. I am that little girl that you wanted to kill 33 years ago.


    Haha, haha¡­ looking at your reaction I can tell you finally remember what happened 33 years ago and what you did to my father.


    Do you still remember him? My father is Michael Strom. I don''t think you will forget him.


    Today I will take revenge for my sister. Because of you, my sister died, and I will take revenge for her. Do you think the suprememander is here and you would be safe?


    Haha¡­ I already expected something like this. So I already prepared myself to face situations like this."


    At this time Natalia said all of this to the firstmander. Looks like the firstmander already realized The Identity of Natalia.


    The moment he heard the surname of Natalia, he becamepletely shocked.

 Chapter 893 - I am Sam Kainer

    Hearing Natalia''s name even the suprememander became surprised. Naturally, he knew about the storm family that disappeared 33 years ago.


    The storm family waster announced as a traitor. The Warrior Association also takes action and immediately erases all the information about that family.


    Now hearing that Natalia belongs to the family and even that she is the daughter of Michael Strom naturally makes the suprememander very shocked.


    But at the same time, immediately, the suprememander became serious about this matter.


    Even though he can see that Natalia has pure hatred against the firstmander, and he went telling how the firstmander was the one who killed her big sister, he did not want to forgive her.


    First of all, the Storm family is considered a traitor. She cannot let her escape from that ce. She went to try to attack the firstmander and this is a serious crime.


    The suprememander immediately thought of capturing Natalia and then taking her inside the Warrior Association.


    Actually, the suprememander even thought this was the only way to save Natalia right now.


    First of all, the firstmander is an official appointed by the Warrior Association. Attacking the firstmander is a serious crime and the firstmander can immediately take action against this.


    Even he, as a suprememander, would not be able to stop the firstmander.


    The suprememander was about to say something, but before that, something unexpected happened.


    The firstmander immediately created a lightning beam. He directly attacks Natalia with that beam.


    Naturally, the firstmander did not want Natalia to reveal more information than that. With this, he decided to eliminate Natalia. He did not want to lose his position as the firstmander.


    All of this happened so quickly that even the suprememander did not get the time to react. But he immediately tries to react by creating a barrier in front of Natalia.


    The firstmander looked at Natalia with a smug smile on his face.


    '' Haha¡­ even though it is unfortunate that I did not get to y with you, as you belong to that family, you should just die.''


    The firstmander thought this while looking at his lightning beam appearing in front of Natalia.


    The firstmander did not think about getting punished by the suprememander.


    First of all, he is an official member of the warrior association, and as Natalia is the one who first attacks him, he can easily take action against her. It will be considered self-defense.


    Even though the suprememander wanted to create the barrier in front of Natalia, it was already toote and she was just about to get hit by that lightning beam.


    Natalia, on the other hand, did not have any fear in her eyes. It looks like she already epted her death. But even in that situation, she looked at the firstmander with pure hatred.


    At this time those other Warriors were also looking in the direction. Almost all of them be confused when they hear the identity of Natalia.


    Because of the Warrior Association, all those people also forget about the Storm family. Everybody can understand Natalia wanted to kill the firstmander.


    Suddenly everyone became shocked when the firstmander attacked Natalie like that. All of them already thought Natalie was going to die.


    But something unexpected happened. The suprememander who was about to create the barrier even became shocked by the sudden situation.


    Suddenly, The lightning beam which was about to hit Natalia, immediately bounced back toward the firstmander.


    Not just only the suprememander but even the firstmander, who had a smug smile on his face, was shocked by that sudden situation.


    But he quickly came back to his senses and tried to protect himself. Unfortunately, it was already toote for him to protect himself.


    "Ahhhh!!!!"


    In the end, the firstmander got hit by his own lighting beam. That immediately sent the firstmander backwards, and his whole body became paralyzed because of the lightning.


    You can already see those burning marks present on his body alongside the firstmander, who has already started bleeding. The firstmander let out a painful cry.


    Only then the suprememander came back to his senses and he immediately checked the condition of the firstmander. He can see those serious injuries.


    Fortunately, the firstmander did not die and already brought out the health potion.


    At this time even those other Warriors became surprised and confused by the sudden situation. Natalia did not have the condition to counterattack or do anything, so how did the lighting beam bounce back toward the firstmander?


    Immediately everyone began to think about this question. But they did not have to think for that long as they could already see someone appear in front of Natalia.


    Even Natalia, who is ready to ept the death, bes surprised. She can also see the human figure appear in front of her.


    The person appearing in front of him is 6 feet tall. Sometimeter the figure of that person became clear to her.


    That person was wearing a white shirt with ck pants. He has ck hair and quite a handsome face.


    Somehow, the moment Natalia looked at his face, she suddenly noticed the simrity of her big sister in that face. Naturally, this makes her very confused.


    On the other hand, the suprememander immediately became very serious. First of all, suddenly, a new person appears in front of Natalia, and his instincts begin to warn him about that person.


    The suprememander can tell the person in front of him is very dangerous. Even though the suprememander is unable to feel the power level of the person, he is definitely sure about this.


    "Who are you?"


    Immediately the suprememander asked that. But it looks like the person who appeared in front of Natalia did not have any intention to reply.


    That person just turned around and brought his hand toward Natalia. Immediately, Natalia''s body began to glow brightly, and all the injuries in her body began to disappear.


    All this time, Natalia continuously focuses on that person. Even though for a second she became confused then she understood that person began to heal her. But this makes her very confused.


    She is unable to understand who this person is and why he suddenly helped her.


    In just 1 minute, all the injuries in her body disappear. On the other hand, somehow that firstmander got back the strength to stand up and approach the suprememander.


    The firstmander also saw that new person who appeared in front of Natalia and was currently healing her.


    He also tries to use the observation technique to feel the level of the person but is unable to feel anything. That surprised him and also made him very alert.


    The firstmander decided to stay close to the suprememander. Somehow the firstmander tells them that this new person is very dangerous. It looks like even the suprememander is serious.


    If that was a normal person, then the suprememander would have already taken action, but somehow, the suprememander did not attack him and just seriously looked at that person.


    Finally, the person turned around. This makes the suprememander very alert and ready to attack anytime.


    "Well, old man, you did not have to worry about anything as I did not have the intention to attack you. Before anything let me introduce myself.


    I am Sam Kainer. I would not be surprised if you did not hear about my family. Well, I did not have the intention to tell you the reason.


    But the most important thing is that my mother''s name is Hina Strom. I think you can already predict I am rted to this person as she is my aunt.


    So I cannot let you attack her or capture her. I hope all of you can leave this ce as I did not have the intention to attack any of you. Also, Don''t force me to attack you. I can guarantee that that would not be good for any of you."


    Sam decided to reveal his identity and also told his mother''s name. The moment he revealed that not just only the firstmander, but even Natalia became shocked.


    She could not believe what she was hearing right now. How can Hina Strom have a son? She is her big sister who died 33 years ago.


    But in this situation, she did not decide to ask any questions. Suddenly not just Natalia but everyone present in that ce began to tremble.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Somehow everyone begins to feel fear. It was like an unknown Predator looking at them and ready to devour them.


    Even the suprememander has the same situation, but on the other hand,pared to any other warriors, the firstmander is in bad condition.


    He had already fallen on the ground and was shouting in pain. Suddenly that firstmander began to feel a headache that kept bing stronger. Other than that his whole body begins to feel the burning sensation.

 Chapter 894 - Proving his identity

    "Well, consider this as a warning. I don''t want anyone to have malicious intentions toward my family. Now, if you excuse me, then it is time for me and mine to leave this dungeon.


    But before leaving this ce I hope the suprememander selects your people by thoroughly checking the background of your people.


    I did not expect a person like this to be a part of your Warrior association and also be the firstmander."


    After saying that Sam disappeared from that ce alongside Natalia. Naturally, he uses the teleportation technique toe outside of the Dungeon.


    On the other hand, finally, everyone present in the Dungeon sighs in relief. Finally, the pressure lifted away from the body.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    At this time all of them were covered in sweat. That was a really horrible experience for everyone. For the first time in their life, they face a situation like this.


    Even the suprememander has the same situation as those other Warriors. He also finally sighs in relief.


    At this time, he looked at the firstmander, who had already be unconscious.


    The suprememander quickly checks the condition of the firstmander and realizes that he ispletely okay.


    But during that time, he reviewed all the words said by Sam. First of all, The Identity of Sam is an important factor in this matter.


    It looks like he belongs to the Strom family. The Storm family is one of the Hero''s families who sacrifice themselves to protect humanity.


    33 years ago, something unexpected happened, and the storm family somehow disappeared.


    Michael Storm, the head of the family at the time, was considered a traitor to the warrior association. But it was never mentioned what kind of crime he did to get the traitor title.


    The Warrior Association, after that, erased the information about the Storm family. They use their power to erase the information from the mind of every person.


    Only some selected people know about this. The suprememander is one of them who knows about the Storm family and also knows Michael Strom.


    33 yearster, suddenly, Natalia Storm reveals herself and attacks the firstmander. Surprisingly she showed her pure hatred toward the firstmander and also med him for the death of her big sister.


    The suprememander, even though don''t know if this was right or wrong, decided to investigate to find out if the firstmander was rted to this matter or not.


    Remembering the words of Natalia Strom, it looks like the firstmander is really the main culprit.


    But at this time a new person appeared and that was Sam. The moment he appears the suprememander begins to feel the danger.


    Sam did not even take any action but even with this, the suprememander and almost all the Warriors got affected by these.


    Not only this, before leaving that ce Sam even told the suprememander to search the background of his subordinates.


    The suprememander was sure that Sam was talking about the firstmander. If it was another person, then the suprememander would not believe anything.


    If it was the firstmander then the suprememander believes that he is the person that can do something like this.


    Before this, many times, the suprememander gets to hear rumors about the crime of the firstmander. Unfortunately, due to no evidence, the Warrior Association was unable to punish the firstmander.


    Because of this, the suprememander already decided that he would thoroughly check everything and also try to find out what actually happened 33 years ago.


    One thing he realizes is that the new opponent or enemy that introduces him as the family member of the Storm family is really dangerous.


    There could be changes that the saints could not be able to do anything to him. The aura and pressure that the suprememander faced some time ago really made him realize that no Saint would be able to win against Sam.


    On the other hand, Sam already takes Natalie outside of the Dungeon. Natalia has already been fully healed. But all this time she is still cautiously looking at Sam''s direction.


    She cannot believe that Sam is her nephew. From childhood, she knew that her sister died 33 years ago. This is also a reason that she wanted to take revenge on that firstmander.


    Sam can already read her thoughts even without using the mind control technique. He just smiled and told her,


    "It is true I am Sam Kainer, the son of Hina Strom and Victor Kainer. I came here to find information about my grandparents and my aunt.


    Hehe, it looks like I am lucky that I already will meet you, Aunty."


    Sam once again introduced himself but it looked like Natalia still did not believe him. This is natural, Sam is already preparing for this.


    "Well, Aunty, I can see that you still did not believe me. I already know something like this happens. I already have something that will provide my identity, but before that, we should change our location."


    Even though Sam quickly wanted to make her believe that he was really her nephew, before that, they needed to leave that ce.


    Natalia, some time ago, attacked the firstmander of the Warrior Association, and definitely, the Warrior Association got alert. They will try to pursue them and, if possible, try to capture them.


    Because of this, they should change the location. Even though Natalia still did not believe him, she also knew that they should change the location.


    With this, she once again hides her face and then begins to go away from that ce. Sam begins to follow her.


    Sometimeter, they came inside an old mansion. That old mansion is very far away from the locality. This could be Natalia''s secret base.


    Actually, Sam predicted the right thing. This is the secret base of Natalia. This is one of the safest ces for her.


    She has already contacted her subordinates, and they are ready to attack anytime. This is also the reason that she decided to lead Sam toward that ce.


    Sam feels a restriction force the moment he enters the mansion. He already realizes some kind of array is present there that can restrict the spiritual energy of any Warrior.


    Unfortunately, that would not work against him. Also, he can already sense the presence of many other people around that ce. Those could be the subordinates of Natalia, and every one of them is ready to attack anytime.


    Sometimeter,


    Both Natalia and Sam are sitting opposite to each other. At this time Natalia is holding a phone and looking at the video.


    If you look at the video then you will see Hina is introducing herself alongside her family.


    "Hello, I am Hina Strom. They are my family. This is my husband Victor Kainer. This is my daughter, Gloria Kainer, and this is my son, Sam Kainer.


    I don''t know if it is Mom or Dad or even Natalia who is looking at this video, but I hope Sam sessfully reaches you.


    I am missing all of you. 33 years ago I somehow came to a new called Eden Blue. After that, I did not have any way to go back to the Ratus.


    Even though I miss all of you, I really be helpless in this situation. Fortunately, I met a good family, and even the Warriors on this decided to help me.


    I decided to forget about my past and focus on my family. Even with that, I am unable to do that. Every day, I will think about all of you. I will think about your condition.


    Mom, Dad, and Natalia, I really miss all of you. I really wanted to see all of you once again. Unfortunately, I don''t know if it is possible or not.


    Fortunately, my son has already be powerful enough to travel from one to another.


    I tried to stop him from going there as that would be dangerous, but he deserted to find out about his grandparents and his aunty.


    I don''t know if you are able to believe what Sam is saying right now or not, but I remember that when I was a child, my father told me a code.


    He told me that if any day I had a problem and would not get recognised by them, then I could use that code.


    The code is 54327. Also, my sister''s other name is Juju. I gave her that name."


    With this, the video is finished. In theter part, you can see Hina''s tears. She really wanted to meet her family once again.


    From the moment Sam announces that he will visit the Ratus, Hina bes worried about him but at the same time, bes hopeful of finding her family.


    On the other hand, the moment Natalia finished watching the video she was unable to hold any longer and quickly came toward Sam and hugged him tightly.

 Chapter 895 - What happened 33 years ago?

    Sometimeter,


    Natalia finally calmed down. Even though at first she did not believe Sam, after hearing Hina''s words, finally believed that Sam was her nephew.


    With these, she also signals her subordinate to stand down. Naturally, she wanted to know all the truth about her big sister and where she is right now.


    She already asks all these questions to Sam and Sam begins to answer all these questions one by one.


    He already informed her that he is not from this. He came here because he wanted to search for his grandparents and his aunty.


    How 33 years ago his mother went to Eden Blue. Also, he got to know about his grandparents and his aunty just recently.


    Sam told all of this to Natalia. Sam also asks about her situation and the situation of his grandparents.


    Naturally, Sam wanted to know what happened 33 years ago after his mom got teleported to Eden Blue.


    How did his grandparents survive? This is the question that he wanted to know more than anything.


    What actually happened that day that even sent Hina to Eden Blue?


    "33 years ago, when that second captain attacked us and already sent his subordinates to kill us, naturally we already thought we were going to die.


    I was a little girl back then, and naturally, I became very scared. I don''t know if I would be able to survive or not.


    At first, Dad decided to hold back those Warriors and let my sister and my mother run away from that ce with me.


    But it looks like those enemies did not want to let us leave. They begin to follow mom and sister.


    Mom also decided to hold back those Warriors and wanted to create a chance for my big sister and me to run away from that ce. But even with all of these, nothing goes ording to the n.


    That second captain and his subordinate capture my mom and dad and they are just about to kill my sister when something unexpected happens.


    Suddenly, spiritual fluctuations appear in that ce. That startled the second captain and he instantly created a huge spirit beam toward big sister.


    Big sister tried to protect me by acting as a shield. But just after getting hit by that spirit beam, suddenly, big sister disappears from that ce.


    Me and my parents all thought my big sister died in that attack. That broke my heart but I was helpless in that situation.


    Mum and Dad also had the same situation. They were also helpless in that situation. They can only see their daughter die at the hands of that person.


    On the other hand, I still remember thatugh of that second captain. From that moment, I decided that if I was somehow able to survive, I would definitely take revenge.


    Unfortunately surviving would not be possible for me or my parents. The second captain already signals his subordinate to kill me and my parents.


    Mom and Dad try to beg for my life. They wanted the captain to let me go. Unfortunately, that animal did not hear anything and just kicked my mom and dad.


    Naturally, he was enjoying that moment. He was enjoying the more he was torturing us."


    After saying all of this Natalia became silent for a few seconds. She needed some time to adjust her mood.


    Just thinking about that incident made her very angry that if possible she wanted to kill that second captain right now. Sam did not say anything and just let her calm down.


    2 minutester, she started saying once again,


    "We already lost the hope to survive but something unexpected happened once again. Suddenly a person appeared.


    Before any of the subordinates of that second captain could kill us, that person instantly attacked all those people.


    Everything happened so quickly that even the second captain was not able to react on time. I was unable to proceed with what happened in that ce.


    But I came back to myself when I noticed, one by one, the heads of those people began to fall.


    It Looks like that new person who appeared on the scene already killed all those subordinates of that second captain by separating their head from their body.


    Other than the second captain everyone got killed. Naturally, I be so scared that I close my eyes in fear. I thought that person was going to kill me and my family.


    Even 5 minutester when I did not feel I decided to open my eyes. When I opened my eyes I became speechless. Somehow me and my parents are present in a different ce.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    "Protect yourself and hide yourself from the Warrior Association. Those people will announce you and your family as traitors."


    Suddenly, I heard that person say that to my parents and instantly disappeared from that ce.


    I don''t know what happens when I close my eyes in fear. For one thing, I could say that person saved me and my family and also being as far away from that second captain.


    I will try to ask my father and my mother about the situation. Both of them did not want to tell me what happened when I closed my eyes.


    That person teleported me and my family to a very small vige which was very far from the locality. We decided to hide in that vige. Naturally, we even hide our identity and our face.


    7 dayster,


    Finally, the Warrior Association announced us as traitors. Fortunately, at that time, none of those people from the vige were able to recognise us.


    With this, we decided to stay in that vige. It looks like my mother and father did not have any kind of intention to take revenge for my big sister.


    That really makes me very disappointed in them, but at the same time, I understand that both of them made this decision because of my safety.


    2 monthster, suddenly, Warriors from the Warrior Association came to that vige to search for our traces.


    Unfortunately, they did not find anything, and also afterwards, they decided to erase the memory of the Storm family from all those people present in the vige.


    Like this, almost every person on our forgets about our family. The Warrior Association helps a vicious person like this to erase the memory of our family. A family that sacrifices their life to protect humanity.


    Naturally, I did not forget any of this. From then on, I decided to take revenge.


    Slowly I desired to focus on my training and decided to grow strong enough to take revenge. I did not mention Revenge in front of my family as that would make them worried.


    Both my parents told me that they had already forgotten about taking revenge. They did not want my condition to be the same as theirs. They wanted me to live happily.


    Unfortunately, I am still unable to forget the tragedy that happened to our family. I still wanted to take revenge for my big sister.


    Like this, I begin to collect information about that second captain. I am also able to find my subordinates or, you can say, my friends.


    With these, we also created a team, and like that, we began to train. All these people are also facing the same situation as me.


    Somehow that second captain is the mastermind behind all of this. Because of this, we all became good friends, and our motto was to kill that second captain.


    On the other hand, the information that I was able to collect indicates that the second captain had already been promoted by the Warrior Association.


    That firstmander that you saw inside the Dungeon was the second captain who is the mastermind behind the tragedy of our family."


    Natalia once again became silent after saying all of these. You can see tears in her eyes. Not just Natalia but almost all those people present in that ce became sad and disappointed.


    All of them wanted to kill that second captain or, you can say, the firstmander; unfortunately, because of the warrior association, killing the firstmander would not be easy.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally, Natalia smiled and told him,


    "I am really happy that my elder sister is okay. Even though I don''t know how she is able to travel to a different, I am really happy that she is okay.


    If it is possible I also wanted to meet my big sister. It has been 33 years since both of us have not seen each other.


    Also, I am really surprised that my nephew is so powerful that even the suprememander became scared.


    I previously noticed the house scared and serious he had be. I also noticed somehow, a huge pressure appears in that ce, and that begins to affect all the Warriors.


    It would be good if, at the time, you would kill that firstmander. Well, we can do thatter. Before anything, let''s go back to the vige and meet with your grandparents."

 Chapter 896 - Trouble

    Hearing about that firstmander Sam did not be surprised. He already expected something like this and this is also the reason that previously he put that much pressure on that firstmander.


    Naturally, he still was not satisfied, and if possible, he also wanted to kill that person. But before that, he wanted to see his grandparents.


    Fortunately, 33 years ago someone saved his grandparents and his aunty and took them to a vige which is far away from the locality.


    Hardly there are any powerful Warriors or any branch of the Warrior Association. Other than that, his grandparents and his aunty also live in that ce with a fake identity.


    With this, nobody was able to find them. Well, as the Warrior Association also decided to erase the information about the Storm family, this also helped them to hide themselves.


    Looks like his aunty wants to take revenge for his mother. Naturally, Sam''s aunty and his grandparents thought that his mom was dead.


    With this, his grandparents focus on Natalia. They also told Natalia to forget about taking Revenge. Naturally, they did not want their daughter to face a simr situation like them.


    Unfortunately, Natalia never forgot about the incident that happened 33 years ago. Even though she was a little child back then, she remembered everything, and these were also used as fuel for her revenge.


    It looks like she also created a creative team with other Warriors who also somehow got affected by that firstmander.


    All of their family members somehow got affected by that firstmander, and because of this, everyone decided to help her in this revenge.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Natalia had already signaled everyone toe there as he wanted to introduce her nephew to everyone.


    All those people are around her age. Only a few of them are around the same age as Sam and Gloria. You can even see middle-aged people present in that ce.


    Sam already begins to look at the status of those people one by one. Only then does he understand why Aunty only takes the role to kill that firstmander.


    Except Natalia, nobody was able to reach peak Elite grade. Among them, only she has the talent to reach that power level and also be more powerful than that.


    One by one Natalia introduces everyone. This is really a surprising thing for those people.


    Naturally, everyone knows that because of that firstmander, Natalia lost her big sister, and this is also the reason that she wanted to take revenge against that firstmander.


    Suddenly, the child of her big sister appears there and he even saves his aunty from that firstmander.


    Natalia already begins to tell everyone what happened inside the Warrior Association.


    She describes how she was about to kill that firstmander, but unfortunately, the suprememander reacted, and with this, she failed on her mission.


    She also describes to them how she was close to death. But it is her nephew who saves her and takes her out of the dungeon.


    After hearing this, many of the people present in that ce were surprised. Some of them have suspicions about Sam, while some of them be shocked when they hear how easily Sam brings her outside the Dungeon. Some of them did not believe her.


    Sam did not have any problem if they did not believe him or anything like that. He is not here to solve their problem or anything like that. He is there to meet his grandparents and his aunt.


    Sam just nodded at them. When Natalia introduces him to everyone. At this time he can also see many people looking at his direction with hatred and even malicious intention.


    Sometimeter,


    Natalia decided to rest before going back to her vige. At that time she also hopes that Sam gets familiar with everyone present in that ce.


    Unfortunately, it looks like the moment she leaves that ce, everyone begins to ignore Sam. Sam also does not have any interest in talking with those people, so he just finds a corner and sits down there.


    He wanted to recover the lost spiritual energy.


    _________________________


    "What do you think? Is he really Natalia''s nephew?"


    "Sigh, I don''t know. But this is really a shocking matter even for me."


    "Also it is pretty hard to believe that a child like him is more powerful than the suprememander. This is very hard for me to believe."


    "Hmm¡­ I also agree with you. I don''t think that punk has that much power. Looks like the suprememander did not want to take action against them after Natalia revealed her identity.


    Because of this, they got the chance to escape from that ce."


    "I think we should interrogate that punk. We need to find out his real identity. There could be a matter that he is a Spy of that firstmander."


    "Hmm¡­ I also agree with you. We should really interrogate that punk."


    "Sigh, don''t do anything reckless that can hurt Natalia. She just came back from a dangerous mission, and for the first time, I saw her happy like this.


    Don''t do anything stupid that breaks her heart."


    "Don''t worry, old man, we are definitely going to find out the real identity of that person, and with this, Natalia will understand that she just got deceived by this spy."


    Naturally, all those people are, you can say, subordinates of Natalia did not believe Sam, and they even thought of him as the spy of the firstmander.


    Almost all of them agree that they should try to interrogate Sam to find out about his real identity.


    Among those people, many of them are angry at Sam. They wanted to teach him a lesson.


    Among them are those around the same age as Sam and Gloria, who are currently looking in his direction with curiosity. Well, due to the low authority, none of them said anything, but somehow, they also agreed with the interrogation.


    It is pretty hard to believe that Sam would be this powerful, whereas even Natalia, with her potential, takes this much time to reach the peak Elite grade.


    This is also the reason that everyone thought of him as the spy of the Warrior Association or the spy of that firstmander.


    Unfortunately for those people, they did not know that all this time Sam was also hearing their discussion.


    Sam had already expected something like this to happen, so he decided to use the observation technique from the start.


    Sometimeter,


    All of them instantly approach Sam. Naturally, before that, they also tried to surround him from every direction so that he did not try to escape from that ce.


    Among them is one person who is 35 years old and about to say something to Sam, but before that, suddenly, all those people begin to feel a huge pressure and an unknown fear.


    They immediately begin to have trouble breathing. Not only that but somehow, all of them are kneeling on the ground. An unknown fear immediately affects everyone.


    All of them can begin to see everything dark around them and two glowing eyes looking in their direction.


    Just looking at those glowing eyes all of them begin to tremble more than before. But suddenly everyone begins to regain their senses.


    Only then do they realize that those two glowing eyes belong to Sam. On the other hand, the pressure did not disappear properly. But the pressure has already reduced from their body and all of them can finally breathe normally.


    " First of all, I have no interest in all of you. I don''t care about your mission. I just came here with my aunt, and afterwards, I am going to see my grandparents.


    So it would be good if none of you tried to create trouble for me and my aunty. I hope this will teach all of you a lesson."


    Sam said all of this to those people. All this time he maintains a cold look. He did not have any expression on his face. Nobody would be able to tell if he is angry or not.


    Advancing anybody can tell he is dangerous. On the other hand, suddenly, everybody begins to feel that some kind of unknown force is sending them backwards.


    This is really a serious matter for everyone, but at the same time, everyone understands the danger of Sam.


    Even those people who previously suggested that they should interrogate Sam became silent after this incident.


    All of them realize that Natalia wasn''t telling them any lies. Sam is really powerful, and most likely, he is more powerfulpared to that suprememander.


    This thing immediately makes some people scared. Those are the people who previously released their killing intent toward Sam and wanted to teach him a lesson.


    Now as they realized his power, all of them began to tremble in fear. On the other hand, those older people don''t know what to say at this moment.


    All of them just sighed. They understand that they really mistook Sam and underestimated his power.

 Chapter 897 - Lunch time

    Sometimeter,


    You can already see those people maintaining the distance from Sam. They did not want to feel that much fear once again.


    Even though Sam is not paying attention to them, those people who previously said that thing about him or the one who feared him the most.


    They are thinking that Sam will take revenge on them. On the other hand, many people also look at his direction with curiosity and quite interest.


    Among them many of those people belong to the same age as Sam. All of them are really curious to know how Sam became that much powerful.


    Unfortunately nobody has the courage to approach him and ask him about this. They can only observe him from a distance.


    Like this, 2 hourster Natalia still had note back from her room. She is still asleep. Well, nobody tried to disturb her as she needed that rest.


    On the other hand, Sam is still meditating right now as he did not have anything to do. He is focusing on his energy control to get more control over his spiritual energy.


    Suddenly, he felt someonee close to him. But that person did not have any kind of malicious intention or anything like this.


    Sam opened his eyes and saw a middle aged person present in front of him. If he is not wrong then that person is around 50


    5 to 60 years old.


    That person is quite muscr and is around 5 feet 8 inches tall. He is wearing a normal t-shirt and jeans pants. Surprisingly that person has deep green hair. That is very umon in Eden Blue.


    "Well, I am happy to apologize for my previous behavior. Actually, I thought that you came here as a Spy of the warrior Association.


    I hope you did not hate us because of that. Natalia is an important person to ask that we did not want anything to happen to her. Because of this, we thought you approached her with some bad intention.


    Please forgive us as we did not believe you are Natalia''s nephew."


    "Sir, you don''t have to apologize to me. I did not mind this. I already know something like you would happen. This is natural for anyone to suspect me.


    On the other hand, I am d that my aunty has people like you as her support."


    Seeing that person apologizing to him because of their previous behavior Sam told that person he doesn''t have to do that.


    That person is around victor''s age. Naturally, Sam even felt quite embarrassed.


    "I am d that you forgive us. Well, if you don''t mind, you can join us. Well, it is time for lunch so if you did not have any problem you can join us.


    Also if you don''t have any problem we are very curious about you and your mother."


    The person in front of Sam said that to him with a smile on his face. Well, Sam after hearing his request wanted to reject that but in the end he decided to join them.


    Actually Sam is also curious about them and if possible he wanted to know about their lifestyle. He also wanted to know more about his aunty and how she struggled all this year.


    Sam gets up and begins to follow that person. The person at this time also introduced himself.


    He is Jimmy Lawrence. He and his family are present at that ce to help Natalia in her revenge.


    Naturally this makes Sam quite curious to know what happened to uncle Jimmy that he also decided to join his aunty in this mission.


    Sam followed uncle Jimmy to an underground floor and there they came inside a room. Compared to those destroyed rooms in the surface area, all the rooms inside underground arepletely new.


    Both of them enter the dining room that is very big and a very big dining table is also present there. All the people present at the dining table and some of them are also serving the food.


    Naturally the moment Sam entered the ce an awkward situation got created. Sometimes those people were talking about something but suddenly they stopped talking and only focused on Sam.


    Many of them became careless while many of them began to be quite anxious. Many of them begin to look at Sam''s direction with curiosity.


    "Well, everyone, Sam already forgiven us. So I hope everyone treats him like you all treats Natalia. He also wanted to know about us and wanted to know about his aunty."


    Jimmy decided to break the atmosphere. The moment he finishes saying all of these, somehow the atmosphere bes normal.


    Those people who are around the same age as Jimmy also wee Sam with a smile on their face.


    Those people who previously tried to threaten him are now looking at his direction quite awkwardly.


    Sam decided to greet all of them normally and also introduce himself to everyone.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    "Well, I am d that all of you support my aunty all this time. I can tell that all of you are ready to help my aunty anytime in any situation.


    Most likely all of you are curious about me and my family. Well, to tell you the truth, 33 years ago when that second captain or you can say that first came under attack by my mother and her family something unexpected happened.


    Somehow my mother travels through a portal that teleports her to a different. I know this is hard to believe but this is the thing that happened.


    I am not from this Ratus. I am from Eden Blue. I just came here recently to find out about my grandparents and my aunty.


    From the moment I came here I just kept searching for information about my grandparents and my aunty but surprisingly I did not get any kind of information.


    But it looks like I was lucky that I was able to find my aunty. Previously I was following the firstmander inside the Dungeon.


    Before that I already interrogated many people. I don''t know if all of you are aware or not but some days ago some people got attacked or became unconscious.


    Actually I was the one who decided to take action against those Warrior families. I wanted to use my mind control technique to know information about my grandparents and my aunty.


    Before taking action against those Warrior families I even interrogated some other people but unfortunately none of them were able to give me any information.


    These things make me very surprised and at the same time very serious. My mom told me that the Strom family was a reputed family.


    My mother''s ancestors were the heroes who protected humanity. They are also called the family of heroes. But suddenly none of the Warriors know anything about this family.


    Naturally these things make me very curious and I decided that if I wanted to know some information I should try to start searching from the warrior Association.


    While going toward the warrior Association I saw that suprememander and that firstmander. They were talking about thatpetition.


    I became quite interested so I decided to follow them. At the same time I decided that I will try to interrogate that suprememander and the firstmander.


    Definitely as a high official from the warrior Association they would have some information about the Strom family.


    So, like this I went inside the Dungeon and I saw my aunty. Well, at first I didn''t know about her identity but in the end when she suddenly attacked that firstmander and also revealed her identity, I immediately decided to take action."


    Sam while eating his food describes how he was able to meet his aunty and what he did from the moment he came to this.


    All this time everybody present there listened to his exnation without making any sound.


    Some of them even stop eating at that time so as not to disturb him. All of them really became serious after hearing all of this.


    Naturally, the moment he told everyone that he is from another this made all of them surprised. The good thing is that they know about others. It Looks like some people from the Warrior Association have some techniques to travel to others.


    But they never thought that Natalia''s nephew would be from a different. They also did not expect that he would be the one who previously took action against those people to know about his grandparents and his aunty.


    "Can you tell me about your? Well, not everyone knows about others. It was just some time ago that some people from differents came to our for important work.


    Naturally we did not know anything about this. But we for the first time get to know that there are variouss like us who have Warriors.


    That was a natural and surprising thing for us. Really we did not expect you would be from a different. But this also exins why we were previously unable to find any information about Hina."

 Chapter 898 - Problem with the Warrior Association

    "Mom appeared on Eden Blue 33 years ago. I am still unable to find any information regarding this. Even Mom did not know how she teleported there.


    My wasn¡¯t as advanced as your Ratus. The highest power level on our was Early Elite grade.


    But some months ago, finally, our was able to evolve and the power limit of our reached the same power level as your Ratus.


    Other than that I think everything is the same as your. We also have Warrior associations that maintain the order between all the Warriors.


    We have many other organizations like Warrior Academies or Medical Association.


    Not just only on our, but every that awakens spiritual energy has this kind of simr thing.


    But I did not think our had someone like that secondmander who would harm their own people for his own benefit.


    I wasn¡¯t even aware of my grandparents and my aunty. Some days ago, suddenly, Mom decided to tell us the truth, and only then did I get to know about all of this.


    Well, before that, I and all the other warriors were busy protecting our.


    After handling everything I finally got the chance toe here to search for my grandparents and my aunty."


    Sam exins to them how he came there and what is the situation on his.


    Everyone bes amazed after hearing about Eden Blue. Somehow they also became eager to visit Eden Blue.


    At this time, Sam decided to ask about their situation. Naturally, he wanted to know why they decided to join his aunt.


    Jimmy decides to talk about this.


    "20 years ago, that firstmand became mad. Me and my family were present inside the Dungeon and I was helping my daughter to fight some Monsters.


    But I did not expect that piece of shit toe inside the Dungeon and immediately told everyone that everyone needed to obey him.


    Those people who did not agree with this immediately got killed by that person. My wife and my daughter also got killed by that person."


    After saying that Jimmy became silent. Even though he is trying to maintain his emotions, you can still see his tears.


    Not just only him but suddenly everyone has that kind of emotion. Almost everyone present in that ce suffered because of that firstmander.


    "I am sorry. I should not have asked you anything regarding this."


    Immediately Sam decided to apologize to Jimmy. He realizes his own mistakes. First of all, everybody suffers because of that firstmander and this is the reason they decided to join Natalia.


    Now asking questions about this will naturally make them this kind of emotional.


    "Hahaha¡­ don¡¯t worry about this. I already moved down. It is just my life¡¯s goal already to kill that piece of shit.


    If possible that person should not receive any kind of easy death. He should suffer like all the people who suffer because of him.


    He is the person who fears the strong and takes advantage of the weak. At first, many people tried toin to the Warrior Association.


    N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Unfortunately, due to not having any evidence, the Warrior Association did not try to take any action. On the other hand, all those people who previouslyined got killed by that firstmander.


    Because of this, everybody also begins to fear that firstmander. None of them dare toin about him.


    After bing the firstmander he became more cruel to his enemies.


    Even though because of the suprememander, he is unable to take action in front of everyone, unknown to everyone, he will still kill those people and make them disappear.


    Sigh, unfortunately, none of us has the potential to reach that power level to harm that person. Among us, only Natalia has that potential.


    We always try to provide her with all the resources that she requires, and like this, she is able to grow this much powerful. Naturally, she also did not expect to get this kind of chance to get close to that firstmander.


    Unfortunately, the firstmander was still saved by the suprememander. At least you are able to teach that person some lessons. We are really grateful because of this."


    Jimmy, this time, shows his gratitude to Sam. Not just Jimmy but almost everyone is grateful because of that.


    Naturally, everyone is sad as Natalia is unable to kill that firstmander, when they realize Sam, before leaving that ce, teaches that person some lesson to make everyone happy.


    After this, one by one, all the people also begin to introduce themselves. At the same time, they also said thank you to him. All of them also apologize to him once again because of their previous behavior.


    After finishing talking with everyone, Sam realized one thing: that all of them became wanted people. They are considered criminals by the warrior association, and this is also the reason that, except for a few people, they are unable to go to any locality.


    The Warrior Association will immediately try to capture them, and it is possible that they will get killed by that firstmander.


    It was a good thing that aftering to that vige the Strom family acquired a new identity. This helps Natalia acquire her warrior ID card without alerting the firstmander.


    _________________


    "Well, don¡¯t worry about that firstmander. I also hear about him from my mom¡¯s mouth. She told me how that person tried to kill her and my aunt.


    This is also my other mission to take care of that person. But I don¡¯t think just killing makes everyone happy. If I am not wrong, all of you also wanted to reveal all the dirty work of that firstmander.


    Don¡¯t worry about this. After meeting my grandparents, I will help you with this matter. I can easily kill that person but I decided to hold back because of this.


    Before anything, everyone should know what kind of person is that firstmander. The warrior Association that always supported that firstmander also needed to realize what kind of mistakes they had made."


    In the end, Sam assures everyone that he will personally take action against that firstmander. None of them have to worry about anything and leave everything to him.


    The moment he said that silence was created in that ce. None of them could believe what they were hearing. But sometimeter they came back to their senses and immediately began to thank him.


    Some of them are almost unable to hold back their tears. All of them naturally know that, if Sam decides to take action against that person, then he will be able to kill that person without any problem.


    Actually, some of them even thought about asking for his help. But none of them know how to ask for the request.


    Even those Warriors around Sam¡¯s age are also beginning to show their happy expressions. It looks like all of them got motivated by Sam¡¯s words.


    If Sam really took action against that person then they did not have to worry about it. Also, they wanted to reveal to everyone all the bad works of that firstmander.


    After that, Sam also decided to go inside a room. Jimmy showed him the room where Sam decided to rest. Well, even though Sam did not need that much rest as he waspletely okay, he still decided toy on the bed for a few minutes.


    Sam is also nning What to do after that. You can say that he is also very angry at that firstmander and also angry at that warrior Association.


    If it was the Warrior Association from Eden Blue or Terraria, then a situation like this would never appear.


    The moment someoneins about any Warrior, the Warrior Association will immediately create an investigation team.


    Even though the Warrior Association would not punish that warrior without any proof, at the same time the investigation team will try to find out if this is true or not.


    Even though this is more advancedpared to Eden Blue, it looks like the warrior Association of this is quite corrupted.


    Even after so manyints, the Warrior Association did not take any action against that firstmander, which shows everyone how corrupt that Warrior Association is.


    They will try to erase the information about a family that belongs to a hero just because of some word from that firstmander.


    Did not even try to investigate this matter or try to interrogate that firstmander. They just decided to level his grandparents as criminals and also decided to erase all the information about the Storm family.


    Sam naturally wanted to investigate the warrior association. He wanted to see the mentality of those Saints, or, you can say, those people who are in charge of the Warrior Association. Definitely, there is some problem with the Warrior Association.

 Chapter 899 - Creating Array

    Nataliya finally woke up from her sleep and decided to talk to her people. It Looks like she is worried about all of them as definitely the Warrior Association is searching for her, and there is a possibility the Warrior Association wille to that location.


    At that time, she also gets to know that some time ago, when she was sleeping, their people tried to interrogate Sam as they suspected him. They thought he was a spy, and because of this, they did not trust him and tried to teach him a lesson.


    Natalie naturally became quite angry after hearing that, but at the same time, she is happy that, in the end, everything is okay. In the end, she also did not me those people.


    Every one of them was worried about her safety, and because of this, they decided to interrogate Sam. At this time, she also thought that she should have already told everyone how she was able to recognize The Identity of her nephew.


    Normally, at first, she also has confusion and suspicion. But when she got to hear the code all of our confusion went away. That was the code made by their father during their childhood.


    Michael decided to teach both of her daughters that unique code. It is to confirm their identity even if they got separated from their family.


    She did not have any confusion about this, and also, when she was 5 years old, her father created that code. So there is very little possibility that anybody would be able to know about this code.


    On the other hand, she feels familiar when she looks at the face of her big sister. This is the reason that she decided to trust Sam.


    At least Sam forgives every one of them, and also, it looks like they are able to talk to each other. Every one of them told Natalia how Sam exined everything to them.


    How he came to that and what is the condition of his. Sam exins all of this to them. Not only that, they also happily said that Sam decided to take action against that firstmander.


    Even Natalia became emotional after hearing that. She still remembers how easily Sam took care of that firstmander just using his aura.


    She really wanted to kill that person at any condition. Even though somehow her big sister is still alive, that does not mean she will forgive that firstmander.


    But at the same time, she also did not know how to ask her nephew to help her in this matter.


    "Well, don¡¯t worry about us. Sam also already expected something like this to happen. But at the same time, he told us we did not have to worry about anything.


    It looks like he is also nning to create some kind of array inside this ce. You should try to call him."


    Jimmy said all of this to Natalia. Natalie, after hearing that, nodded and decided to call Sam.


    She did not even have to knock on the door because Sam already sensed her.


    Sometimeter,


    Some told his aunt that he would take at least 1 hour to create an array. That array will protect everyone present in the ce and even attacks from peak Epic grade people would not be able to destroy that ce.


    Naturally, hearing that Natalia became excited and happy at the same time. Somehow she already trusts Sam. Actually not just only Natalia but somehow everyone also decided to trust Sam in this matter.


    Sam brings out the spirit brush and then begins to create the array in the center of that old mansion.


    2 hourster,


    Finally, Sam finishes the array. Somehow everyone begins to feel more secure in that ce. Even though they did not know if that array would be able to protect them or not, at least somehow they began to feel the ce became more safe.


    Not only that, but the density of spiritual energy also increases. This is also a surprising thing for everyone.


    On the other hand,


    Natalia decided to take some toward her vige.


    "But the thing is that I don¡¯t know how long it will take us to reach that ce. I¡¯m definitely sure that those people from the Warrior Association have already tried to search for me and your location.


    We would not be able to fly in this situation as the Warrior Association would immediately chase us. Also, we would not be able to use public transportation.


    I really don¡¯t know how long it will take us to reach the vige."


    At this time Natalia said that to Sam. Well, she can already predict that people from the Warrior Association are already trying to search for her location. Definitely, they will try to search everyone.


    At this time they would not be able to use their flying technique or use public transportation. The only way to reach their vige is to walk there. But that will take almost 2 months.


    Natalia became serious after realizing this matter. She also doesn¡¯t know if she and her nephew will be able to reach the vige or not. There could be a possibility that even if the result was to walk there, those people from the Warrior Association would try to check their identity.


    Natalia is thinking about what to do. Naturally, she also wanted to meet her nephew with her family. She wanted to tell her parents that her big sister was okay and she even had a good family. Unfortunately, this situation did not dy her contacting her parents directly.


    "Haha¡­ aunty, don¡¯t worry about this. I can make both of us invisible and nobody would be able to detect us. So we can easily use our flying technique to reach that ce."


    Sam only just smiles after hearing the trouble that worries his aunty. Only after hearing that Natalia came back to herself.


    She also realized one thing during the time when she was inside the Dungeon: she nor the suprememander was able to feel Sam.


    Sam just appeared there out of nowhere. Previously, she thought Sam used some kind of technique rted to teleportation to reach there as he also used the same technique to bring her outside the Dungeon.


    After hearing the exnation of her nephew, he realized one thing all the time: Sam was inside the Dungeon. He was just hiding himself and nobody was able to find him or able to find any kind of trace about him.


    "Is this the same technique that you use when you are inside the Dungeon? Also, are you the person who helps me and those teammates of mine inside the Dungeon?"


    N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Natalia asks that question to Sam. Sam only just smiles after hearing that question.


    After getting her answer Natalia just sighed. Finally, she got the answer to every one of her questions. The unknown person who previously helped her was her nephew.


    "Well, let¡¯s go then."


    In the end, Natalia decided to take some to her vige by using her flying technique. Well, you cannot say flying technique, as any people who are able to break through to Elite grade are able to fly in the sky.


    It is some kind of ability they achieve after baking through to Elite grade.


    Back to the main matter,


    Sam and Natalia already begin to fly in the sky. Sam uses the supreme concealment technique. He also immediately covered his aunty with his spiritual energy and she also became invisible like Sam.


    At this time Natalia is surprised because she can feel some kind ofyer present around her body. Thatyer is very thick and powerful. Fortunately, Sam already exined to her that his spiritual energy.


    With this, Natalia and Shyam begin to fly. Their direction is the vige where currently his grandparents are right now.


    As they expected, sometimeter, when they enter the city beside that mansion, they can already see the Warriors from the Warrior Association searching around that whole city.


    Definitely, those people are trying to search for Natalia and Sam. It looks like those Warriors from the Warrior Association are even trying to search all the houses.


    That immediately makes Natalie worried about the safety of her people. But once again Sam assures her.


    "Aunt, you did not have to worry about the safety of Uncle Jimmy and the others. Well, if you are worried that much, then we can wait for some time.


    Even though I quickly wanted to meet Grandpa and Grandma, we could still wait and see if those people reached the mansion or not. I think that will make you less worried."


    It is natural that without any demonstration it is hard to believe for Natalia that all of her people will be safe. Because of this, Sam suggested that Idea.


    Immediately, Natalia wanted to reject that, but Sam told her that they should wait. With this, she would be less worried.


    Actually, not just only her but Sam wanted to make sure that every person present inside that mansion realized that they would not receive any kind of harm when they are present inside that mansion.

 Chapter 900 - Angry Uncle Kevin

    Sam and Natalia decide to go back to that mansion. But both of them did not enter the mansion. Both of them begin to wait near that mansion.


    They did not want to call uncle Jimmy and the others. Both of them were waiting for those Warriors of the warrior association toe to that ce.


    Fortunately they did not have to wait for that long. Sometimeter 20 Warriors of the warrior Association came to that ce.


    Two of them are around peak Elite grade while the remaining people are special grade warriors. Those two are the captains of those people.


    One captain immediately began to use his loud voice to call for the owner of that mansion toe outside.


    At first nobody came outside of the mansion. Naturally uncle Jimi and the others worried about this situation and if possible they did not want to go outside the mansion.


    If they did not respond then definitely it will cause more trouble.


    ¡¯Sigh, I should have added the array to hide the spiritual aura. Sigh, definitely get to realize the presence of those people inside the mansion using their observation technique.¡¯


    Sam immediately thought that. Well he just only created an array to create a barrier around that ce which will protect them from every kind of attack.


    That will also prevent anyone from going inside or going outside of that ce without having permission. Uncle Jimmy and uncle Kevin, the owner of that mansion, have that permission.


    As those Warriors from the warrior Association did not receive any kind of response they became suspicious and just about to forcefully enter the ce.


    But suddenly the door of the mansion opened and uncle Kevin came outside. But he did not leave the boundary of the mansion.


    "What happened warriors? Do you need anything?"


    Uncle Kevin asks that to those Warriors. At this time he maintains his calmness. He cannot show any nervousness in front of those people. Also he decided to trust Sam on this matter.


    Both the captains already used their observation technique to observe uncle Kevin; they did not notice any kind of nervousness or anything like.


    "We wanted to know if you saw these two people or not. Both of them are wanted criminals who attacked our firstmander."


    One captain said that he immediately showed the picture of Sam and Natalia.


    Natalia who watched all of this naturally became angry after hearing the word of the captain. Fortunately she maintains her calmness. This is not the time to take any reckless action that can put uncle Kevin and the others in danger.


    "No, sir, I did not see any of them."


    Uncle Kevin took the photo very carefully and then replied without showing any other name that he did not know any of those people present in the photo. All this time he tries to maintain his calm.


    Unfortunately he did notice the moment when he looked at the photo of Sam and Natalia, he somehow became nervous even though he immediately controlled himself.


    Both the captains already notice that. After hearing the answer of uncle Kevin both the captains looked at each other and nodded.


    "Well, we will be checking your property."


    Immediately both the captains said that and signal their Warriors to enter the mansion.


    "No sir, you cannot do that without permission. This is my property and you would not enter my property without my permission. I don¡¯t want any Warrior from the warrior association to enter my property."


    The moment uncle Kevin heard that those people wanted to enter his mansion to search he immediately told them that they cannot enter without his permission.


    Both the captains also became suspicious the moment they heard the answer.


    "We did not care about your opinion as this is a very important matter of the warrior Association. If you did not cooperate with our work then we need to arrest you and all the people present in your mansion.


    If I am not wrong then you are trying to hide something from us."


    One captain said that and all those 18 Warriors already surrounded the whole mansion. Immediately both the captains give them the signal to enter the mansion.


    "No!!! Nooo¡­ you cannot enter my mansion."


    It looks like uncle Kevin is unable to keep his calm at this moment. He immediately began to shout at those people. It looks like those two captains and those other Warriors of the warrior Association did not care about his opinion.


    Uncle Jimmy immediately became worried about uncle Kevin wasting no time toe outside the mansion to see what was happening.


    Not only them, even Natalia, unable to keep her calm. She is also about to take action. Sam decided to hold her.


    "Don¡¯t worry. My array did not work. I will personally take action."


    Only after hearing this Natalia decided to calm down. But she is still angry looking at those people from the warrior Association.


    They did not care about whether it was your property or not. How can they be this much selfish? All the time they told everyone to follow the rules, currently they did not even follow their own rules?


    Is this some kind of joke? Are those rules for only those people who are not part of the warrior Association? Did the warrior Association have the right to enter someone¡¯s property without getting permission?


    All these questions came to Natalia¡¯s mind. Just thinking all of this made her hate the warrior Association more than before. She really wanted to question the high authority of the warrior Association about all of these.


    At this time uncle Jimmy and everyone already came outside the mansion. They immediately notice those people from the warrior Association surrounding the whole mansion and they are just about to enter the boundary of the mansion.


    Uncle Kevin on the other hand talks to those in front of him that they cannot enter the mention without his permission.


    Those just looking at uncle Kevin with a smug smile on their face. Also it looks like both of them wanted to take care of uncle Kevin as he did not want to cooperate with them.


    But suddenly something unexpected happened. All those people who just tried to enter the boundary of the mansion immediately got bounced back from that ce.


    Uncle Kevin who was angry shouting at those to the captain also became surprised by this. You can see even those two captains unable to enter the boundary of the mansion.


    Only then uncle Kevin turned around and saw uncle Jimmy closed his eyes and looked like he already activated the array.


    Actually he did not even have to do that as the array would always stay active. But Sam did not tell that to him so uncle Jimmy thought he was the one who activated the array.


    All those Warriors of the warrior Association somehow be confused by these sudden situations.


    Those two captains also finally became serious about this. Both of them previously felt some kind of prevention force immediately hit their body.


    n/?/vel/b//in dot c//om


    They immediately get up from the ground and then notice those people present around the mansion. At first even though both of them were unable to recognise those people, but sometimeter they immediately began to recognise those people.


    Why would they not recognise those people as all those people are wanted criminals? The warrior Association searched for those people.


    "Ohhh¡­. Looks like we really came to the right ce. Definitely sure we would be able to find both of these criminals in this ce.


    Even if they leave this ce, just capture those other people and interrogate them. It looks like this is the hiding ce for all the criminals.


    Who could have expected that we would be able to find all these criminals in a single ce like this?


    Hahaha¡­. We can understand why you did not want to enter your mention. You really dare to mix with those criminals and try to protect them.


    We really need to capture you with those criminals.


    Also it is quite nice you put some barriers around your mansion. It Looks like you¡¯re preparing to defend yourself using this kind of barrier.


    Haha haha, look like you really underestimate the power of our Warrior Association. We really need to remind you of our power."


    One captain said all of these with an arrogant tone. Not just only that captain but every one of those Warriors of the warrior Association somehow became arrogant after realizing that uncle Kevin was trying to protect those criminals.


    Naturally, they have confidence that they would be able to break the barrier around that ce.


    Because of this, both the captains even said with arrogant tone that both of them wanted to destroy the barrier and then going to capture all of them.


    Immediately both the captains signal all of their Warriors to get ready and attack the barrier in front of them.

 Chapter 901 - What happened?

    Immediately, many people inside the mansion begin to pray that nothing happens to them.


    On the other hand, Uncle Jimmy and Uncle Kevin frustratedly looked at those Warriors from the Warrior Association. Both of them also did not know what to do at this moment other than trusting that barrier present around them.


    They didn¡¯t know if they would be able to survive or not. Both of them immediately signal all the Warriors to get ready to fight back.


    Even if the barrier got destroyed by them, they would fight back with those people from the Warrior Association. Uncle Jimmy and Uncle Kevin decided to take care of both the captains; the remaining people would take care of those other people from the Warrior Association.


    Both of them realized one thing: if that barrier got broken away, then they would have to relocate. Even if they were able to defeat those warriors from the Warrior Association present in front of them, they would not be able to survive continuous attacks from Warriors of the Warrior Association.


    Because of this, both of them became serious about this.


    Immediately, one by one, those people from the Warrior Association begin to attack the barrier in front of them.


    Ayer of smoke was created because countless explosions began to appear in that ce. The surrounding area had already been destroyed, and you can already see even the ground around that ce was destroyed.


    Because of those explosions, ayer of smoke was created in that ce, which prevented those Warriors from seeing what happened to that barrier and that mansion.


    N?v(el)B\\jnn


    But before any of those warriors can see what actually happens immediately all of them sense danger.


    Both the captains also sensed the danger and immediately created a barrier in front of them. In the next second, both of them got hit by a spirit beam.


    The power of those spirit beams had already reached the Early Elite grade level. On the other hand, not everyone has those Warriors avable to protect themselves from those spirit beams.


    Some of them immediately get hit by those spirit beams, which send them backward, and all of them begin to cry in pain.


    Even though many people try to escape from that ce by using their quick response and movement technique, somehow they still get attacked by the spirit beam.


    All of this happened so quickly that even Natalia was surprised. She was worried about the safety of Uncle Jimmy and the others, but she also immediately became shocked after looking at the result.


    "Haha¡­ I told you not to worry about anything. That is not your normal protection barrier. That barrier also has the ability to attack back.


    The moment any person attacks that barrier, the barrier defense system will activate, and immediately, it will try to locate the enemy who attacked the barrier.


    After that spirit beam would get created and immediately go toward that person. Also, all The attacks from those Warriors of the Warrior Association already got absorbed by the barrier.


    I told you that everyone will be safe. Also, that barrier would be avable to protect them even if a peak Epic grade warrior tried to attack that barrier."


    Sam can tell the confusion of his aunty so he decided to exin once again. Looks like only this time his aunty became rxed.


    Naturally, all this time, she was still doubting about that barrier even though Sam tried to assure her. She finally began to smile.


    On the other hand, Uncle Jimmy and the others are also unable to see what happens around them, but one thing everyone realizes is that the barriers are still present around them, and none of those attacks from the Warrior Association break the barrier.


    As theyer of smoke covered the whole barrier, they were unable to see what was happening outside, but all of them could hear some kind of explosion appear outside the barrier.


    Naturally, everyone became very confused about this, and they also became very curious. Sometimeter, finally, everyone gets to see what actually happens outside the barrier.


    Somehow, all those Warriors of the Warrior Associationy down on the ground and became seriously injured. Some of them even became unconscious, and all the armor of those Warriors had already been destroyed.


    Just looking at all of this makes Uncle Jimmy and the others very surprised. As you know, they did not get to see what happened, so they did not know why the condition of those Warriors of the Warrior Association became like this.


    But it looks like all those Warriors of the Warrior Association somehow get attacked by someone or something, and none of them are able to protect themselves.


    With this, the condition of those Warriors bes like this. Even though it is a good thing that none of them have any kind of lethal injuries, all of them need to be treated.


    But naturally, Uncle Jimmy and the others did not want to help any of the Warriors of the Warrior Association.


    At this time, somehow, both the captains are able to get up from the ground, and after that, both of them use the healing potions. The injuries present in their body begin to heal.


    Both of them immediately brought out theirmunication device and informed the Warrior Association about this. After that, both of them angrily look at the barrier and look at all the people present inside that barrier.


    Neither of them had that smug smile on their face. They decided to help those other Warriors of the Warrior Association.


    Natalia, at this time, smiling after looking at the condition of those Warriors of the Warrior Association. Naturally, she is very satisfied with the barrier.


    She was very angry at those people from the Warrior Association. So she naturally enjoys the condition of the people.


    Sam also smiled and did not say anything. But at the same time, you can say both of them also did not have any sympathy for those Warriors of the Warrior Association.


    Sam even begins to think, how can people from the Warrior Association be this cruel? Nobody from Eden Blue would try to do something like this if they did not get permission from the property owner.


    If a situation like this urs, then they would immediately contact the headquarters, and the headquarters will tell them what to do.


    Only if it was an urgent situation would they get an immediate response, and the response would also be given by the saints.


    But none of those people from this decided to contact the headquarters. But at the same time, Sam was thinking that the headquarters would give them the samemand.


    Now both Sam and Natalie begin to wait. Both the captains did not dare to attack the barrier once again, and because of this, both of them decided to wait for the reinforcement.


    Sam and Natalie also begin to wait for the reinforcement. Sam wanted to make sure that Natalia trusted him and did not worry about Uncle Jimmy and the others.


    ¡¯Hmm¡­ will the suprememander take any action? There could be a chance that those high authorities will also take action.


    If possible, I really wanted to see the power limit of those high authorities who are in charge of the Warrior Association.¡¯


    Sam is really curious about the power limit of the high authorities who are in charge of the Warrior Association.


    Sam even predicted that the firstmander would alsoe to that ce. Naturally, he will be very frustrated after looking at Uncle Jimmy and the others.


    Naturally, he will try to attack the Barrier to kill Uncle Jimmy and the others. Sam really wanted to see what kind of situation would appear at that time.


    Will he be able to protect himself from the spirit beam or not?


    Actually not just Sam, even Natalia also became curious about this. At this time, she decided to message Uncle Jimmy.


    "Take it easy and trust Sam¡¯s array. This barrier would be able to protect all of you, even if a peak Epic-grade warrior attacked that barrier.


    Not only that, these barriers also have the ability to absorb the attacks and turn them into spirit beams. After that, the barrier will immediately begin to counterattack.


    The condition of those Warriors of the Warrior Association became like this because they also got attacked by the barrier with those power-to-spirit beams.


    Told everyone that they did not have to worry about anything. Sam and I are also watching over everything, so if something unexpected happens, we will immediately take action."


    This is the message she sends to Uncle Jimmy.


    On the other hand, Uncle Jimmy and the others naturally did not know what happened, and they still worried about those Warriors of the Warrior Association.


    They just only saw those Warriors of the Warrior Association looking in their direction furiously.


    Suddenly, Uncle Jimmy receives that message. The moment he saw that message from Natalia, he immediately began to read it.

 Chapter 902 - Taunting the first commander

    As Sam expected, sometimeter reinforcement from the warrior Association already came in front of the mansion.


    Those newly arrived Warriors already surrounded the whole mansion from all over the direction. But none of them attack the mention or do anything.


    Sometimeter, even the suprememander alongside the firstmander appeared in that ce.


    As expected the firstmander instantly became angry when he looked at those people inside the mansion.


    It looks like uncle Kevin and the others did not fear the firstmander or the suprememander anymore. They finally begin to fully trust the array present inside the mansion.


    Because of this when they also saw that firstmander, all of them just smiled at him.


    "Hahaha¡­ just you wait, you piece of shit. You¡¯re going to be killed. Do you think you would be able to escape after what you did to us? We would kill you. We will make sure you do not receive an easy death."


    N?v(el)B\\jnn


    After looking at that firstmander uncle Jimmy and the others unable to contain their anger anymore. One by one they begin to taunt that firstmander.


    Everyone also enjoyed the expression of the firstmander. After hearing the taunt of everyone that firstmander unable to hold back, without even getting permission from the suprememander,


    The firstmander immediately attacked the mansion.


    The firstmander wanted to eliminate everyone inside the mansion. He already recognise everyone of the people as everyone of them rted to his torture.


    He did not want to leave any clue about his illegal work and because of this, he wanted to eliminate everyone.


    Naturally hearing the taunt of uncle Jimmy and the others, the firstmander was unable to hold back.


    "Tarun!!!!!!!"


    Immediately the suprememander angrily shouted at that firstmander. How dare he attack the mention without getting his permission.


    Did he think he could do anything because he is a firstmander?


    Most likely after hearing his furious shout the firstmander came back to his senses and realized what kind of mistake he had made.


    He was about to say something but at this time something unexpected happened. Suddenly that spirit beam created by the firstmander hit the barrier.


    A huge impact was created on that ce but at the same time suddenly that spirit beam disappeared from that ce.


    The suprememander who was just about to say something and even the firstmander who was also about to exin became speechless after looking at that.


    The firstmander or you can say Tarun uses his full power this time to attack the barrier. Naturally he wanted to destroy the barrier and wanted to kill everyone without giving them any chance to escape from that ce.


    How can that spirit beam disappear from that ce?


    Well, unfortunately that firstmander did not get that much time to think. In the next second suddenly a powerful spirit beam appeared in front of that firstmander.


    Without giving him any time to move or do anything, that spirit beam immediately hit that firstmander.


    All of this happened so quickly that even the firstmander did not realize what happened. Only when he realizes that the spirit beam has the power limit of Early Epic grade.


    Immediately that firstmander flew backward and not only that you can hear the painful cry of that firstmander.


    The Armour of the firstmander got destroyed and his whole chest got seriously injured. A hole even got created on his chest area. Fortunately that period beam did not pierced through the body of the firstmander.


    The firstmander immediately fell to the ground. Looks like he already lost the strength to shout or say something. Blood was alreadying out from his mouth and that injured area.


    Fortunately for that firstmander, the suprememander immediately approaches him and uses the health potion.


    Because of this, the injury of the firstmander began to heal pretty quickly. In just 5 seconds the injury heals. But still that firstmander was unable to move his body because of the pain.


    At least he is not in danger. Only then the suprememander got up from the ground and then looked at the mansion with a serious look.


    He already realized the danger of that barrier around the mansion. He did not know if he would be able to break that barrier or not.


    Because of this suprememander immediately signals every one of his people not to do anything reckless.


    Naturally those people from the warrior Association already prepared their attack ready to attack the barrier. Even those previous Warriors of the warrior Association also prepare their attack.


    Only after hearing themand of the suprememander they did not do anything. Except those people who already realize the power of the barrier, everyone curiously looks at that barrier and all those people present inside that barrier.


    All of them wanted to capture those people. How dare they get the courage to threaten the firstmander and also seriously injure the firstmander?


    Only because of the suprememander that still did not attack the barrier.


    It looks like all the people have the confidence to break the barrier. They did not think the barrier would be able to hold on after receiving attacks from all of them.


    The suprememander already came in front of the barrier. Looks like the suprememander did not have the intention to attack the barrier and wanted to solve this matter peacefully.


    "Deactivate this barrier and we can talk peacefully."


    The suprememandermands that to uncle Jimmy and the others.


    Unfortunately for him, uncle Jimmy and the others did not say anything and just smiled in his direction. The answer is clear: they will not do anything like that.


    Not only that it looks like uncle Jimmy and the others did not even think that they are in danger. All of them are just enjoying the show that is happening in front of them.


    This is also the thing that makes those Warriors of the Association angry.


    "Look I know that all of you are pretty angry at the firstmander, but this did not give you the permission to attack him."


    "Hello sir, when will we attack that piece of shit? I think you made some mistake. From the start we just enjoyed the show all of you are performing.


    Hahaha¡­ who can think that piece of shit will have this kind of situation. Fortunately he did not die. It would be aplete waste if he died right now.


    Also I think you people from the warrior Association should realize that you did not have the permission tomand everyone.


    We are not your ve that will listen to all of yourmands.


    I think I make it clear to your people that none of you have the permission to enter my mansion. But it looks like all of your people have some misunderstanding.


    It looks like this thought as your ve or something like that. Hahaha¡­ I would like to see you try entering my mansion."


    Uncle Kevin said all of this with a smug smile on his face. He makes it clear to people from the warrior Association that he and everyone present inside the mansion aren¡¯t the ve of the warrior Association.


    Naturally hearing all of this all the people from the warrior Association became angry. But at the same time they did not know what to say. It is natural that they cannot forcefully enter someone¡¯s else property.


    "Who gave you the courage to hide those criminals?"


    At this time the firstmander who recovered came to that ce and instantly said that to uncle Kevin.


    "Hahaha¡­ well, this is my property and I have the right to do anything. If you have any problem you can try toe here and capture all of us.


    Why don¡¯t you try once again. If you are lucky you would be able to break the barrier."


    Looking at the firstmander, uncle Kevin taunts him once again.


    "You dae¡­."


    Hearing the taunt, naturally the firstmander became angry but he didn¡¯t even know what to say. He did not have the courage to attack that barrier once again.


    "Also I should make it clear that none of you allow me to enter my mansion. Also told your high authority that we are not your ve.


    You people from the Warrior Association can make anyone a criminal. I really don¡¯t know how people can trust an Association like you. You did not even think about anyone.


    All of you are just selfish people. All of you did not even think twice before erasing a history about a Hero¡¯s family. All of you are selfish and can do anything to achieve your goal.


    Well you should leave right now as I don¡¯t have the interest to talk to any of you."


    Uncle Kevin said that to the suprememander and that firstmander. This time after hearing that both of them did not know what to say.


    The firstmander became angry while the suprememander became silent. He already understands which Hero¡¯s family is this.

 Chapter 903 - How is this possible?

    The atmosphere became tense. The firstmander and those people from the warrier Association became more angry after looking at the attitude of uncle Jimmy and the others.


    But on the other hand, uncle Jimmy and the others did not show any kind of scared attitude. It looks like they are just enjoying the show.


    All of them are just waiting for the suprememander¡¯s order. Even though the firstmander wanted to attack once again, he became quite scared after thinking about the consequences.


    Because of this he also waited for the suprememander to give them themand.


    The firstmander also thought about how those people could create that barrier. He did not think he would face any kind of situation like this.


    First of all he realized that all of his attacks got consumed by that barrier. After that, somehow a more powerful spirit beam was created.


    Just thinking about all of these makes that firstmander confused. Not just only that firstmander, even the suprememander was also thinking about this.


    He also doesn¡¯t know what to do at this moment. First of all, he wanted to make sure that none of his people got injured. But even he did not know if that was possible or not.


    Thinking about the characteristics of this barrier he became sure that the barrier has an automatic attack system. During the time when the firstmander attacks the barrier, the suprememander also uses his observation technique.


    He also realizes that the barrier consumes the full attack of the firstmander. After that, a more powerful spirit beam was created.


    "I assure you that none of you will get arrested by us. We just wanted to search for two people.


    Sometime ago, one of them just killed the firstmander. I know that all of you are angry at the firstmander for some reason but as an official of the warrior Association, it is a crime to attack him."


    The suprememander wanted to solve this matter without that many casualties so he was still trying to talk to them.


    "Hahaha¡­ well, we would be really happy if that piece of shit got killed that time. Sigh, you are really lucky to have the suprememander beside you.


    Also as I told your people before that we did not have those people present in our ce.


    So I don¡¯t want you to bother us. Have I told you before I really did not like people from the warrior Association.,"


    This time another person beside uncle Jimmy said that to the suprememander.


    n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Once again after hearing that the firstmander became angry. He is once again ready to attack the barrier but thinking about the consequences he somehow calms down.


    After hearing that the suprememander already understands those people are stubborn and they would not deactivate the barrier.


    Because of this currently everything depends on his decision. Should they try to break the barrier or leave that ce? It will depend on his own decision.


    Actually themander also began to get quite angry at those people. Even though he knows that it ispletely illegal to enter the property of another person without permission, in front of him all the criminals are present.


    Because of this, in the end the suprememander decided to take action. Even though he still has the confusion that he would not be able to break the barrier, that does not mean he would not do anything.


    With this, the suprememander immediately told everyone to take their ce and prepare to attack.


    The moment those people from the warrior Association here themand, all of them immediately began to prepare their strongest attack.


    All those people from the warrior Association are angry at those people inside the barrier. If possible they really wanted to kill all of them for talking bad about the warrior Association.


    Even though none of them understood the topic of that Hero¡¯s family, they decided to ignore that.


    At any condition they wanted to capture those people and teach them the lesson that they should not ignore thement of the warrior Association.


    One by one spiritual fluctuations begin to appear in that ce. Even the suprememander began to prepare his strongest attack.


    There could be a chance that even if those people from the warrior Association attack that ce together they would not be able to break the barrier, because of this, the suprememander also decided to take action.


    Natalia, who is not far away from the ce, became very afraid. From the start she saa everything. She saw how that firstmander got injured and almost died because of the counterattack of the barrier.


    Immediately she became happy and hoped that the suprememander would not interfere. Unfortunately that suprememander once again saved that piece of shit.


    Now as those people immediately began to prepare to attack the barrier, nataliya became worried about this.


    She is not worried about that firstmander or those other people from the warrior Association, she is worried about the suprememander.


    The Suprememander is an Early Epic grade warrior, naturallypared to everyone he is more dangerous. Because of this she did not know if that barrier was able to protect everyone or not.


    "Don¡¯t worry aunty everything will be okay. Also I am present here. If something goes wrong I would immediately take action and teleport everyone from that ce."


    Sam once again assured his aunty. Looks like only after hearing his word Natalia once again became rxed a little.


    At this time she can also see uncle Jimmy and the others are also quite afraid. Because of this, she immediately messages uncle Jimmy that they did not have to worry about anything as both of them are near them.


    It is natural for uncle Jimmy and the others to be that much worried about the situation. Even though from the start they showed their toughness and did not want to Back down, they also did not know if the barrier would be able to protect them from all those attacks.


    They also notice the suprememander also decides to take action which makes them more worried. Evenpared to the firstmander, they are more afraid of that suprememander.


    In the next second, immediately countless attacks begin to hit the barrier from all directions. A huge explosion appeared in that ce which immediately destroyed almost a 10 km area.


    Fortunately all the Warriors of the warrior Association were flying in the sky and also created distance from that ce.


    A big mushroom-like smokeyer also got created in that ce because of the explosion. The whole city began to shake violently because of the explosion.


    Fortunately, only some minor casualties appear in the City. Only those buildings near that mansion got destroyed. But all the people in those buildings had already evacuated from that ce.


    For almost 15 minutes everyone continuously attacked that ce and exhausted almost 80% of their spiritual energy.


    15 minutester those people from the warrior Association stopped attacking as they did not know what was in front of them.


    Were they finally able to break the barrier or not? Will they get attacked by the barrier? Everyone is thinking about all these kinds of questions but at the same time all of them prepare to defend themselves.


    Because of the hugeyer of smoke which almost covered the whole 10 kilometer area they were unable to tell anything right now. Even using the observation techniques they were unable to tell anything.


    Because of this the suprememander told everyone to prepare to defend themselves.


    Almost 5 minutester, finally theyer of smoke began to clear. After looking at the destruction everyone already thought the mansion and all the people inside that barrier had already evaporated by their attack.


    Everything around that 10 km area got destroyed and even a huge hole got created in the ce. Naturally it is impossible for that mansion to survive this kind of disaster.


    But when everyone already became happy and almost had a smug smile on their face like that firstmander, everyone realized one thing.


    Somehow one area still did not receive any kind of damage. Compared to the surrounding area, that ce is still standing tall without any damage or anything like that.


    Only then everybody noticed the barrier and that mansion. At this time they also look at all those people who are present inside the barrier.


    It looks like none of them receive any kind of injuries. They did not even get affected by that big explosion.


    Immediately everyone begins to think if this is possible or not. The never fails situation like this, so it almost makes them speechless.


    The suprememander and the firstmander also have the same situation. The firstmander is currently looking at the ce with hatred.


    How can that barrier be able to absorb their attacks like this without having any kind of damage?


    The barrier did not even have a single crack mark on it. The moment everyone realizes that matter, everyone bes very serious.


    Suddenly the barrier begins to glow which alerts everyone and looks like everyone already realized what is going to happen.


    Some of them are already about to use their barrier or life saving technique to escape from the ce.

 Chapter 904 - The casualties

    Without giving those warriors to do anything suddenly spiritual beams appear in front of them.


    Even those Warriors who were just about to teleport away from that ce or about to use their movement technique, did not get the time to do anything.


    It looks likepared to before the speed of the spirit beam already increases. Not just the speed increases but the spirit beam bes more powerful.


    In the next second countless explosions appear around the whole ce. From the suprememander to all those Warriors of the warrior Association got hit by the spirit beam.


    Naturally the movement of those Warriors decided to attack the barrier, the auto detection system of the barrier already detected all the Warriors who previously attacked.


    It chooses his target and only after that releases the spirit beam. The detection system of the barrier also can detect when Warriors who attack the barrier try to escape.


    This is also the reason in just milliseconds those spirit beams appear in front of those Warriors.


    All those Warriors who tried to create a barrier around them to protect themselves from iing attack, did not even realize when the barrier was destroyed and all of them got hit by the spirit beam.


    Compared to before this time the explosion did not appear in a single ce. One by one the whole area got destroyed. All those buildings which previously did not get destroyed immediately turned into dust because of the explosion.


    Also the spirit beam instantly did not disappear. For almost 1 minute the spirit beams stay on that ce while continuously hitting those Warriors.


    Even uncle Jimmy and the others did not expect a situation like this would ur in that ce. They did not know if they should be Happy or not.


    By looking at the destruction they can already tell those spirit beams weren''t weak. How many people from the warrior Association would die? All of them were thinking about this.


    On the other hand, all those people who already got evacuated from that city became startled once again when those explosions appeared and almost half of the city got destroyed.


    Fortunately there are Warriors of the warrior Association who help those people to evacuate. But somehow all those people begin to feel ufortable.


    They did not know if the suprememander and theirrades killed All those people or not. They decided to approach that ce so that they can create the spirit barrier which will prevent the city from beingpletely destroyed.


    10 minutester, everything calmed down except theyer of smoke. Immediately those remaining Warriors of the warrior Association used their observation technique.


    They are immediately able to sense people around them who are seriously injured and almost about to die.


    But they begin to panic when they realize all those are familiar spiritual aura. Without wasting a single second all of them spread around that ce and approach those people.


    As they thought when they came close to those people they could see those people were theirrades. Without wasting a single second, they bring out health potions and immediately begin to help everyone.


    Like this, one by one, people begin to help everyone and also theyer of the smoke also begins to disappear.


    Sometimeter, you can see the suprememander somehow surviving and he already uses the healing potion.


    Butpared to him the firstmander is in bad condition as he already lost his right leg. At least his other injuries already heal.


    But not just only the firstmander, many Warriors of the warrior Association have the same situation. Just after realizing all of these the face of the suprememander became grim.


    He also did not expect this kind of situation would appear in that ce. He did not expect this kind of casualty to appear. At least none of them died.


    If any of them died, the suprememander would not be able to forgive himself. Because of him those people decided to attack the barrier and their situation became like this.


    After making sure everyone is out of danger the suprememander decided to approach the mansion.


    Continue your adventure at empire


    Even though he cannot see the barrier which one second became invisible but he can tell even after all of these the barrier did not have any kind of crack mark on it.


    ''How is this possible? How were they able to create a Barrier like this? I don''t think it is possible for them to create this kind of barrier.


    Is it the work of that person who suddenly appears beside Natalia Strom? I already tried to search about him but I did not find any information about him.


    It looks like he just suddenly appeared on our. There is a possibility he is not from our. Why would he suddenly appear here? Why would he decide to help these people?


    Is he really the nephew of Natalia Strom? Sigh, I really did not know what to do at this moment. I don''t think I have the capability to destroy the barrier created around this mansion.


    Also even after all of this, none of those people present inside the barrier get affected. It looks like they did not even receive any kind of impact from the explosion.''


    The suprememander can tell all of this is out of his control. He already realizes that he is helpless in front of that barrier. He did not have the courage to tell his people to attack that barrier once again.


    With this after thinking, sometime he decided to retreat from that ce and go back to the warrior association. Before anything all those people who got seriously injured this time needed to get treated.


    The Suprememander also needed to tell everyone of those elders what happened here. The suprememander can only put his trust on those elders about this.


    After approaching in front of the mansion the suprememander thought all of these while looking at uncle Jimmy and the others.


    This time uncle Jimmy and the others did not taunt the suprememander. They just calmly look at the suprememander.


    ''I really did not understand why they hated the firstmander that much? All of them are criminals but if I am not wrong somehow the firstmander is rted to everyone.


    Is there a possibility that the firstmander put fake me on those people to make them criminals? If it was any other person then I would not believe it but I can say that person can really do something like this.


    Looks like I really need to investigate all of this. I can tell they already lost the trust of the warrior Association.


    Looking at them I don''t think any of them have the intention to harm anyone. They are not like any other normal criminal. I really need to search about all of this.


    Also how did they know about the Strom family? Looks like they''re really rted to Natalia Strom.''


    After thinking about all of this the suprememander decided to leave that ce without saying anything.


    Uncle Jimmy and the others expected that the suprememander would say something to them, but it ispletely unexpected for them that the suprememander did not say anything.


    He looks like the suprememander even though quite angry at them but he is also very confused right now.


    But this did not make uncle Jimmy let their guard down. First of all, as many people from the Warrior Association got injured, this is really a serious matter.


    Even though they are unable to see the condition of the suprememander, looking at the destroyed armor they can imagine what happened to that suprememander.


    Definitely those elders of the Warrior Association will take action after this. Now this is the thing that makes everyone scared.


    But uncle Jimmy immediately tells everyone that they should put trust on the barrier. Until now the barrier protected them.


    Even those many people from the warrior Association attack them but none of them receive single injuries.


    It Looks like after hearing his words everyone rxes a little. They decided to put their trust on Sam and that barrier. Uncle Jimmy did not tell anyone that Sam and Natalia did not leave that ce.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Even though he is worried about the situation, he wants his people to trust in themselves and the barrier. Not all the time they should depend on Natalia.


    Because of them she also takes on more burden. This is the reason that he did not tell anyone about Natalia and Sam.


    But uncle Jimmy already asks Natalia, when she will leave that ce. Natalia replies that after waiting some time they will leave that ce.


    Sam and Natalia are currently flying above the mansion. Actually Sam and Natalia did not have the intention to fly from that ce.


    First of all, Natalia already told him that the high authority or you can say those elders will definitely take action against this. Once again Sam suggests to her that they should wait and see what happens.

 Chapter 905 - The meeting

    Aftering back to the Warrior Association, the suprememander immediately called the medical unit to treat All those injured Warriors.


    Naturally, amotion was created inside the Warriors Association. Looking at the condition of those Warriors, the other Warriors of the Association became serious and also became curious to know what happened.


    But none of them dare to ask the suprememander anything at this moment. All of them can see that the suprememander is in a very bad mood.


    Because of this, nobody asked him any questions, and they just focused on their work.


    On the other hand, the suprememander already contacted the elders of the warrior association and informed them about all of this.


    As expected, the moment those elders got to know about this, they became very angry. All of them told the suprememander to wait for a few minutes and they will be there.


    At that moment the suprememander began to think that he should investigate all those people who were dered criminals.


    Without evidence, nobody would be able to directly use the firstmander because this suprememander wanted to use that time to search about this matter.


    Sometimeter,


    The suprememander begins to look at all the documents rted to those people who are dered criminals.


    As he expected, in every one of those matters, the firstmander is involved when he is the person who deres them as the criminal who betrayed the Warrior Association.


    Now are those the truth or not? Nobody knew the answer and the suprememander wanted to find out about this.


    Don''t know why, but he has the feeling that all those are innocent. He just thought that but he also cannot be sure about this. Before deciding anything he needs to search all those matters thoroughly.


    Sometimeter,


    All the elders are currently present in the meeting room and the suprememander is also present in that meeting room.


    Even though the firstmander also wanted to attend the meeting room, he did not have that authority nor did he have the permission.


    The firstmander wanted to make sure that all the elders immediately took care of those people so that nobody could me him for anything.


    Naturally, he did not want to reveal anything rted to those people that would reveal his true nature and his illegal works.


    Inside the meeting room,


    The suprememander began to describe what happened to them from the start.


    He describes how Sam appears in front of Natalia, and suddenly, with just his pressure, he almost makes everyone unconscious. Even the suprememander became unconscious.


    The suprememander also said that he did not feel that kind of pressure even from those elders. The moment those elders heard about that, they became very serious.


    The suprememander would not lie to them so it is naturally a serious matter. After that, the suprememander begins to describe what happens when they approach the mansion.


    He described how that barrier absorbs all the attacks and how it immediately counterattacks all the Warriors.


    Once again everyone became serious. All of them became sure about one thing: that the person who previously introduced himself as the nephew of Natalia Storm could be behind all of this.


    The Supreme Commander already tried to search for that person, but he did not find any kind of information rted to that person. It looks like that person did not have any kind of data.


    There could be a possibility that Sam hides his face using some kind of disguise technique. However, the suprememander did not think Sam should hide his face due to his power level.


    You can say the same thing for those elders who never hide your face. Why should they hide their faces when nobody would be able to threaten them?


    "Were you able to find any information about the Natalia Strom? How could we not find her all this time?"


    One elder asked that question to the suprememander.


    "Yes, I searched for that information. Even though I cannot say for sure if that person is rted to the Strom family or not. But there could be a 60% chance that she is rted to the Storm family.


    When I try to search for her information I get to know that she has a different identity in our database. Also, she identifies herself as an orphan.


    In her record, it was shown that she is from Allen City. But we cannot be sure if it''s true or not. There could be a matter that she hides all the true information alongside her family. Discover hidden tales at empire


    There could be a chance that her parents are also alive. It is just that I don''t know anything about Hina Strom.


    Based on our record, 33 years ago, she is considered dead. So I am unable to understand what is the real rtionship between the person and Natalia Strom."


    The suprememander exined all of these to those elders.


    Based on all of these reports anybody can tell Natalie Strom hid her true information from the start as she wanted to take revenge.


    One thing that ismon in this matter is that the firstmander is also the person who is involved in this matter. He was the person who informed the Warrior Association that the Strom family betrayed the Warrior Association and did something illegal.


    He also presented some illegal work of the Storm family and this is also the reason that the Warrior Association decided to take action.


    The Warrior Association naturally did not want to bring him upon those heroes, and because of this, they decided to erase information rted to the Strom family.


    Now, the main question is, what should they do after that? Should they immediately take action against those people present inside the barrier or not?


    But at the same time, the main question is whether those elders will be able to break the barrier or not. None of them know the capability of that barrier and there could be a chance even those elders got seriously injured.


    The suprememander also suggested to them that they should interrogate the firstmander.


    But one elder immediately told the suprememander they could not do that. That person is rted to the firstmander, and naturally, he did not want the firstmander to get interrogated or anything like that.


    But the thing is that he alone cannot decide what to do in this ce.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    After hearing all of this, that person also wanted to immediately take action against those people present inside the barrier and wanted to kill them.


    But in this matter, his opinion would not be able to do anything. First of all, the firstmander is rted to all those people. The firstmander was also rted to the disappearance of the Storm family.


    Now, someone from the family wants to take revenge on the firstmander, and this is a big matter for everyone.


    Sometimeter,


    It was decided that before taking action against that barrier or people inside those barriers they will try to interrogate the firstmander.


    Despite that elder showing his satisfaction and disapproval, everyone finally came to that conclusion.


    One thing is clear: they recklessly cannot attack that barrier. Even though the elders had the confidence that they would be able to destroy the barrier, this was not the time to be reckless as they did not know anything about that unknown enemy.


    If the suprememander told them the truth, then that person is most likely more powerful than them, and that could be a dangerous thing for everyone.


    One thing is clear: all those people present inside the barrier somehow hate the Warrior Association.


    Even though it is normal for all criminals to hate the Warrior Association, somehow, this matter ispletely different from those other matters.


    The suprememander immediately called the firstmander toe inside the meeting room.


    The moment the firstmander enters the meeting room he immediately gets affected by the pressureing out from those elders.


    Only because of his uncle, who uses his pressure to counterattack those pressures, was the firstmander able to stand.


    "Before you say anything, we have decided that we will interrogate you.


    This matter has already be quite dangerous, and if we do not do anything, then there could be a chance more danger wille to our Warrior Association.


    Don''t worry, we just wanted to know some truth from you. We just wanted to know what happened 33 years ago.


    How did you suddenly find out that the Strom family betrayed the Warrior Association?"


    Before the firstmander could say anything the suprememander told him all of this. Somehow, after hearing all of this, the firstmander maintains hisposer.


    But it is just he wanted to show everyone. Inside he already begins to panic. The firstmander already predicted some situation like this would appear.

 Chapter 906 - We came here to apologize

    The firstmander tries to maintain hisposure while answering all the questions of the suprememander. Unfortunately he did not know but some of those elders already used their techniques to see if he was telling the truth or not.


    With this everyone gets to know that he was lying to them all the time and immediately that makes everyone of those elders furious.


    This time even that elder who is the uncle of that firstmander was unable to do anything. He is also helpless. The situation was already out of his hands.


    From the start he tried to protect his nephew but unfortunately in this situation even he would not be able to do anything.


    The firstmander almost became unconscious because of the pressure. Suprememander also did not show any sympathy.


    He was right from the start. Look like this firstmander reports fake news and makes those people criminals. It is good that all the elders also decide to interrogate the firstmander.


    Sometimeter,


    All the elders became disappointed. Not only they became disappointed at the firstmander but they also became disappointed at their ignorance.


    They never expected that the firstmander would be the one who is the real evil person here. A person like this should not belong to the warrior Association.


    33 years ago the Strom family did not do anything that can be considered betrayal. It is the firstmander who used them and showed fake proof that they made the family criminals.


    Because of his fake report a family who belongs to the heroes suffer. But at the same time it is also the fault of those elders that they did not decide to check this matter thoroughly. They decided to trust that person because of those fake reports.


    Naturally the firstmander also received help from his uncle in this matter. That elder also did not have anything to say at this time.


    Not just only the Storm family, all those people present inside the barrier also became criminals because of fake reports provided by that firstmander.


    From them those people needed to hide from the warrior Association so they did not get arrested. Naturally those people already lost the trust of the Warrior association and this is also the reason those people hate that firstmander so much.


    __________________________


    "Because of you and your nephew those people became criminals and lost their trust in the Warrior Association.


    It is a good thing that those people did not reveal any of the crimes of the firstmander.


    Well I could say that even though they try to prove their innocence but because of this piece of shit, they never get the chance to prove their innocence.


    I really did not know how they would feel. I could tell why they lost the trust in our Warrior Association."


    All the elders decided to use the mind control technique to get all the information that they needed from the firstmander.


    When they got to know everything, all of them became very furious. They immediately told that person who is the uncle of that firste under that because of him and his nephew everything happened.


    Finally they also understand why those people lost the trust of the warrior Association. Because of this, they show that kind of hatred.


    "Sir, what should we do after this? Not just only those people but we also have an unknown person who can bring trouble to our Warrior Association.


    Should we try to approach those people and apologize to them?" Stay updated with empire


    "Sigh, I also don''t know what to do at this moment. I really did not know if we apologize to those people, they will forgive us or not.


    I don''t think that they will forgive us easily. We need to prove with our work that they can be trusted once again and the warrior Association never supports this kind of people."


    "Not only this, it looks like we also needed to recover the history of the Storm family. That is the family who sacrifices their life to protect our humanity. We really cannot just ignore this."


    You can say in this situation every elders begin to feel helpless. None of them know how to restore the trust of those people.


    But the main thing is that if they decided to reveal everything the reputation of the warrior Association will be affected by this. There could be a chance many people stop trusting them.


    This is also a serious matter that they are thinking about. With this, they really did not know what to do at this moment.


    "Sir, I think I should approach them and inform them that we have already captured the firstmander.


    Even if this did not make them forgive us, at least they can feel our sincerity about this matter.


    Also I really think we should publish all of this information to everyone. I know this will affect the reputation of our Warrior Association but as everyone knows how all of you are busy all the time to protect our, they will also understand that all of these happened because of that firstmander."n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    The suprememander suggested that Idea. But the thing is that not everyone agrees with this.


    Even though it is true that all the elders stay busy all the time to protect the from those powerful Monsters, at the same time there is a chance many people will lose their trust.


    While all the elders are discussing this Sam and Natalia are still waiting beside the mansion.


    Both of them did not know if those elders of the Warrior Association would appear there or not. At this time, Sam also asks about his grandparents.


    Natalia begins to tell everything about her parents. It is a good thing she did not inform the warrior Association everything about her when she registered her fake identity.


    At least with this the Warrior Association would not be able to track her parents. But somehow she was still worried about her parents and wanted to go there as quickly as she could.


    5 hourster,


    Natalia and Sam decided to leave that ce. It Looks like those elders of the warrior Association or the suprememander would not take any action after this.


    Because of this, both of them decide to leave that ce. But suddenly Sam noticed some people approaching that ce.


    Natalia immediately became serious. She immediately began to feel nervous. But, Sam assures her that nothing will happen.


    Sometimeter,


    Both of them can already see the suprememander alongside some more people approaching that ce. Uncle Jimmy was also able to sense those people so he came out of the mansion.


    One by one uncle Kevin and the other also came out of the mansion to see what would happen.


    "I know that all of you are angry at us. We are here to apologize to all of you. Because of our ignorance all of you became criminals.


    We really wanted to apologize to all of you because of our ignorance. We really did not know that the firstmander was connected with this kind of illegal work.


    We really did not expect him to do all those things to all of you. I also know that after all of this trusting the warrior Association is not easy for any of you but please give us another chance.


    We already decided to show to everyone all the evil work done by that firstmander. We will inform everyone about our mistakes.


    Please give us another chance."


    One elder this time came forward and said all of this to them. Uncle Jimmy and the others did not expect this kind of situation would appear.


    All of them became surprised when suddenly that elder apologized to them. Not just that elder but almost every elder present in that ce begins to apologize to everyone.


    Now uncle Jimmy and the others did not know what to say at this moment. They really did not expect this kind of situation would appear.


    But as that elder said uncle Jimmy and the others would not trust them that easily. Some of them still think this is some kind of trap of those people.


    Look like the elders also able to understand this so one of the immediately said,


    "Well, we did not want you to deactivate the barrier or anything like that. We just came here to apologize to everyone of you and also came here to inform you that we already arrested that firstmander.


    We already use our mind control technique on that person and with this we already get to know about all the illegal work done by that person.


    Not just all of you but there are many people who got killed by this person. Please trust us this time and see how we punish that person.


    Also if it is possible please inform Natalia Strom about this. I know that all of you try to protect her but we did note here to get any information about her.


    Just inform her that 7 dayster we will be punishing that firstmander in front of everyone¡­"

 Chapter 907 - Meeting grandparents

    "We will announce all the crimesmitted by that firstmander. Because of this, we wanted another chance from all of you.


    As a warrior Association it is our duty to protect all of our humans, unfortunately we did not expect someone from the warrior Association would do something like this."


    After saying all of this the elders said goodbye and then began to leave that ce.


    Naturally, all of them know that gaining the trust of uncle Jimmy and the others would not be easy until they did not prove anything.


    Because of this all the elders and the suprememander decided to leave that ce. Naturally everyone wants to ask questions about Natalia Strom, but this is not the time to ask any questions about her.


    Anybody could tell uncle Jimmy and the others did not have any interest to answer them.


    On the other hand, uncle Jimmy and the others were also confused with the sudden approach of the elders. Really all of them were very afraid sometime ago.


    They thought those elders were going to attack them and they also thought the barrier was going to break. Fortunately it looks like all of them were wrong.


    "Don''t trust them that easily until they do not prove anything. There could be a chance that they wanted to deactivate the barrier so that they can capture us and this can be the trick.


    I really did not trust the warrior Association anymore. At first I thought that except those saints, most of the people of the warrior Association were corrupted. But I got to know that the firstmander received help from a Saint.


    Because of this, I lost trust in them. Until they did not prove anything, until they did not publish that information to everyone, I would not trust any of them."


    Uncle Jimmy said that to everyone. Naturally, none of them are going to believe those Saints.


    On the other hand, Sam and Natalia also be surprised when they hear what the Saints told uncle Jimmy and the others.


    Natalia could not even believe what she was hearing. But in the end, if really those saints reveal the information about the firstmander to everyone, she will also forgive the warrior Association.


    With this Natalia decided that it is the time to go back to her house. She is naturally worried about her parents.


    Even though she never reveals about her parents'' location, there could be a chance that somehow the people from the warrior Association get to know the location of her parents.


    Because of this, Natalia already told Sam that it is time to go back.


    Sam smiled and did not say anything. Both of them immediately disappear from that ce. After that once again both of them begin to fly.


    ___________________________


    On the other hand, inside the warrior Association,


    Inside the prison you can see the firstmander isying down on the ground while he is looking at the ceiling with his desperate eyes.


    He already understands that all of his crimes have already been revealed to everyone and it looks like everyone is not going to forgive him because of this.


    Even his uncle would not be able to do anything in this matter. He just hoped that he did not get killed and receive some light punishment.


    On the other hand, the firstmander also realized that he was unable to use his spiritual energy. Not only that he also feels like he has be a normal human without having the ability to absorb spiritual energy.


    That makes him very scared and you already realize what happened to him. It looks like The spiritual core has already been destroyed.


    Every human has the spiritual core inside their body which is also the reason they are able to absorb spiritual energy.


    At first nobody has a spiritual core in their body as that would be a dormant state. But when you reach a certain power level your spiritual core will be visible to you.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Unfortunately the firstmander was unable to feel that spiritual core. This makes him more desperate. In just a few hours he lost everything that he was able to gather in these 33 years.


    He lost his reputation, he lost his qualification to be a warrior. But you can say that he did not feel guilty about anything that he did to those people.


    Instead, he began to feel very angry at those people. Everything happens because of those people. If somehow he was able to kill those people then he would not face a situation like this.


    It was his mistake that he let those people live. He began to regret that decision. Also he is very angry at the Storm family.


    Even after 33 years that family created trouble for him. Because of Natalia Strom his situation became like this. The firstmander also thought about asking for help from his uncle.


    Even though he was unable to leave the prison, he wanted to kill Natalia Strom. Not only Natalia but he wanted to kill everyone from the Storm family.


    Naturally Sam and Natalia did not know anything about it. Both of them already travel very fast and already came close to the vige fire Michael Strom and his wife are present.


    It takes almost 6 hours to reach the vige. Naturally it is possible because Sam was using his full speed all the time.


    Natalie already became exhausted and because of this, Sam decided to help her.


    Finally Sam reaches the vige where he can see his grandparents. Naturally he became very excited but at the same time became nervous.


    He doesn''t know if his grandparents will believe him or not. This time Natalia can feel the nervousness of Sam. Because of this, she assures him that everything will be okay.


    Like her, both of her parents are going to believe him. Also as he has the video of Hina, he would not face any problem.


    Sam calms down and with his aunty approaches the house. It is a two story building. The house wasn''t that big but it had a beautiful yard.


    When Sam and Natalia approach that ce, both of them can see two people present in the yard and look like both of them enjoying the weather.


    Not just only them but almost everyone in that vige at this time doing the same. As they are old people they did not have any other thing to do.


    Sam asks Natalia about the identity of those two people and Natalia confirms that they are his grandparents.


    As Natalia told him before, both of them already decided to forget about pursuing the warrior path and because of this, both of them decided to follow the path of normal humans.


    Like any old person, both of them are currently enjoying the weather. But even with that it is natural for both of them to immediately notice Natalia when she approaches them.


    Both of them immediately get up from the chair to see who it is. Only then did they notice it was their daughter.


    Rury immediately approached her daughter. She is unable to hold back her emotions. The moment she appears in front of Natalia she immediately hugs her daughter.


    Rury began to cry. Michael also appears there and looks like he also bes emotional after seeing his daughter.


    Sometimeter, both of them finally notice Sam.


    "Who is Natalia?"


    Rury asks that question to Natalia. Rury finally calmed down. Naturally after looking at Sam she became curious to know about his identity.


    At this time she doesn''t know why but she begins to feel some kind of connection with Sam. Looks like Sam resembles someone close to her.


    Not just Rury, but Michael also feeling the same thing. Because of these both of them curiously ask Natalia about Sam''s identity.


    Both of them are sure that Sam is not Natalia''s lover or anything like that. Their daughters were busy taking revenge against that person who made their life like this.


    Even though both of them told her to stop pursuing that dream of Revenge, unfortunately they are unable to do anything in this matter.


    But Natalie immediately did not answer anything and just looked at Sam. She wanted Sam to introduce himself. Sam at this time came in front of his grandparents and decided to introduce himself.


    "Hello Grandma and grandpa, I am your grandson Sam Kainer. I know it is hard to believe but my mother''s name is Hina Strom.


    I am not from this. I came here from a different called Eden Blue. 33 years ago when all of you got attacked by that firstmander, my mom somehow was able to travel through a portal and came to Eden blue.


    She met my father and like this both of them married. Unfortunately she did not know how to travel back and with this she also thought all of you were dead."

 Chapter 908 - Guardian

    For a few minutes, Michael and Rury became shocked and almost stopped moving from their ce. Finally, both of them came back to their senses. Immediately both of them look toward Natalia to know if Sam is telling them the truth or not.


    Natalia nodded at them. She did not get surprised after looking at the situation of her parents.


    "I know Grandma and Grandpa, both of you are most likely unable to believe me. Well, it is natural for anyone to find it hard to believe. But Mom also sent a video dedicated to both of you.


    I think this will be enough to prove my identity to both of you."


    After saying that, Sam brings out his phone and once again ys the video. This time, Sam ys a different video and gives his mobile phone to his grandparents.


    Rury, with her trembling hand, takes the mobile phone and, with her husband, begins to look at the video.


    "Hey, mom and dad, how are you? I know that you would not be able to recognize me as it has already been 33 years. But I am your daughter Hina Strom.


    33 years ago when that second captain attacked us, I came to travel through a portal that took me to this new.


    I was helpless at that moment and almost tried tomit suicide. At this time, your son-inw came into my life, and I was finally able to stabilize my condition.


    Like that, I fell in love with your son-inw, and both of us married. A few yearster, I had a daughter named Gloria, and after that, I had a son named Sam.


    Currently, both of them have be very powerful Warriors. On my, your grandson is the most powerful one.


    For 33 years I never revealed my identity to anyone. ept your son-inw and the saints of our; nobody knows about my identity.


    But recently something big happened and our went through a big war. Due to your grandson, we were able to survive, and after this, I also decided to reveal everything to them.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Both my children already became powerful warriors so I think it was the perfect time to tell both of them about my past.


    I don''t know if both of you are alive or not but I really miss both of you. I don''t know if I will get the chance to meet both of you are not."


    In the video, Hina said all of these, and after that, she began to cry. But she is not the only one who is crying right now. Rury and Michael also started crying right now.


    Sam and Natalia did not say anything at this time and both of them just waited.


    Sometimeter, Hina started saying once again,


    "It is just that your grandson has some way to travel through the, and after knowing about my past, he decided to go back to Ratus.


    You wanted to search for both of you and his aunty. I really did not know if he was able to meet both of you or not, but if he met both of you, then I would be happy."


    Hina once again began to exin all of these, and in the end, she also told the secret code that Michael taught her when she was just a child.


    The moment Rury finished watching the video she was unable to control herself and immediately came in front of Sam and hugged him. Natalia, on the other hand, went to her father and helped him.


    _________________________


    Finally, both of them calm down. Sam, his grandparents, and his aunty are currently present inside their house.


    Both of his grandparents keep asking him about his mom and dad and also about his sister. Sam answered all those questions one by one.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam is currently present inside a room and lying down on the bed. He was feeling quite exhausted after continuously using his spiritual energy.


    Compared to before, he was very happy. He did not have any tension in his mind and just fell asleep.


    At this time Natalia talks to her father about what happened to her when she was inside the Dungeon. She exins everything from the start that happened inside the Dungeon.


    Both Michael and Rury be scared when they get to hear that their daughter is about to die. Fortunately, their grandson appeared at that ce and helped her.


    Now this is apletely surprising thing for both of them when they get to hear that Sam, with just his pressure, almost makes everyone unconscious.


    Somehow both of them begin to feel proud of their grandson. After that, Natalia begins to tell how she gets inside the base, and there he gets to meet Uncle Jimmy and the others.


    She also describes how Sam created the barrier around that mansion which created a powerful barrier around the whole mansion.


    Even when the suprememander attacked that mansion he was unable to do anything.


    Even though all of these are quite unbelievable things, both of them believe in their daughter. One thing both of them needed to acknowledge is that their grandson is powerful.


    It looks like their elder daughter did not lie to them. Finally, many yearster, they became happy and decided to celebrate this.


    Michael immediately went to the market to buy vegetables and other things for the celebration.


    ___________________________


    That day the Strom family was very happy. All this kind of good news is never expected to be received in a single day.


    Also, the good news is that the firstmander or you can say, Sameer Ojha, got captured by the Warrior Association. The elders of the Warrior Association take action, and they also apologize to Uncle Jimmy and the others.


    Just this news is enough to make everyone speechless. Who can expect the elders of the Warrior Association to do this kind of action against the firstmander?


    Everyone needed to acknowledge that all of this happened because of Sam. Without the help of Sam, Uncle Jimmy, and the others would have already been captured by the Warrior Association, and there could be a chance that they would have already been killed by the Warrior Association.


    Not just only them but even Natalia also have the chance to get killed by the firstmander. Both Michael and Rury begin to feel that it is their good luck that all these kinds of good things happened to them.


    Sam, at this time, also asks both of his grandparents about the incident that happened 33 years ago. He wanted to know how his grandparents escaped from that ce.


    "To tell you the truth, we did not expect we would be able to save our lives. My grandma and I had already be seriously injured, and we just about tied in the hands of those people from the Warrior Association.


    Something unexpected happened to us. At that time, I had a locket in my neck, which was an artifact of my family.


    But I was never able to see what kind of artifact it was and I just decided to use that as an ornament.


    When both your grandma and I got seriously injured by that second captain, somehow, my blood came into contact with that locket, and suddenly, that locket began to glow brightly.


    Less than a second a figure appeared in front of me. I am unable to recognize that figure because that figure has a white what is suit with a white mask on his face.


    The moment he appeared in that ce all of my injuries got healed. Not just only my injuries but even all the injuries of your grandmother immediately heal.


    On the other hand, one by one, all those people from the Warrior Association begin to lose consciousness.


    Even that second captain lost consciousness. After that, before we could do anything, suddenly me, your grandmother, and your aunty came to a different ce.


    We did not even get that time to search around that ce to find clues about your mother.


    We begged that person to take us back as we needed to search for your mother. Only then do we get to know that he was the guardian of Strom.


    My great-grandfather infused his spirit in that locket so that when the descendant of the storm family would face any kind of danger, that guardian spirit would appear in that ce and save everyone.


    That guardian told me that he did not find anyone with our bloodline in that ce other than the three of us.


    Also, this vige was our old home, and because of this, that guardian took us here. Naturally, after hearing all of these, we be broken as we thought your mother died in the hands of that second captain.


    Sigh, even though I wanted to take revenge against that second captain, I also did not want to put my family in danger once again ...."

 Chapter 909 - Press conference

    ''Look like I needed to learn the technique that is used by those people from others who came to Eden Blue.


    I think only that technique did not have this kind of restriction. Other than that I did not have any other way to bring my grandparents and my aunty to Eden Blue.''


    Naturally Sam wanted to bring his grandparents and his aunty to his. Using the World bridge technique that he knew would not be able to help him in this matter.


    His grandparents would not be able to tolerate all The spiritual fluctuation created by the space. Sam is thinking about this matter.


    At this time, he also became very curious about the way that he went to Eden Blue. Unfortunately his grandparents did not know anything.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Sam even decides that he will go to that ce from where Hina travels to Eden Blue. What if some kind of clue is present in that ce?


    There could be a chance none of those elders or any other Warriors were able to find anything in that ce, but he would be able to find something.


    You have to say that yesterday it was really a great day for Sam. He was able to meet his grandparents and both of his grandparents already acknowledged him.


    But at the same time he can tell both of his grandparents and even his aunty wanted to know if there is a way for them to travel to Eden Blue or not.


    This is also the reason that Sam wanted to find a way to help them.


    Sometimeter,


    Sam begins to look at the system shop. You have to say it''s been a long time since he opened the system shop. Well from the moment he came to Eden Blue, naturally he decided to focus on stabilizing the condition of his and after that he also decided toe here.


    Unfortunately he did not get that much time to improve himself. But that wasn''t a big matter to him. It is natural that he would not be able to face Monsters who have the same power level as him.


    He already decided that he will be going back to Terraria after finishing his work in Eden Blue.


    At this time, when Sam is spending his time with his grandparents and aunty, the elders of the warrior Association decide to arrange a press meeting.


    It looks like they really wanted to prove to everyone that they can trust the warrior Association.


    They really wanted to prove to uncle Jimmy and the others that it was their fault, that all of them get used because of some fake information.


    At this time a hugemotion also got created among almost all the Warriors. Almost all the Warriors get to know something big happens to the warrior association.


    Naturally all those citizens of Idan City needed to evacuate their city which almost got destroyed. All of this happened due to the suprememander and those other Warriors of the warrior Association attacking the mansion.


    Naturally all the Warriors already got to know about these and many Warriors even came to that ce to see what actually happened there.


    All of them became surprised when they noticed the destruction that happened to that ce. Almost half of the city and the outside area of the city got destroyedpletely.


    Even though the warrior Association is already taking care of that matter and using the earth element technique to repair that area, you are still able to see the destruction.


    The warrior Association would not be able to hide this matter from those Warriors so they did not even try.


    Every Warrior became surprised after finding out all of this. Fortunately even though many of them became curious and wanted to approach the mansion, those Warriors of the warrior Association strictly said to everyone that they did not have the permission to go toward that ce.


    That already increases the curiosity of those Warriors but in the end they would not be able to do anything.


    On the other hand today every Warrior bes very curious as the Warrior Association is going to exin what actually happened to that city.


    Even all the citizens of Idan City are interested in this information. They also wanted to know what actually happened there and why those many people from the warrior Association previously came to their City?


    Did they have some kind of big criminal hiding there? Everyone wanted to know the answer to all these questions.


    Uncle Jimmy and the others also get to know that today the Warrior Association is going to announce something.


    They are already watching the TV where they can see those news reporters and many other Warriors currently present in the meeting room of the warrior Association.


    All of them were waiting for the elders toe. Sometimeter 5 elders and the suprememander came to that ce.


    The suprememander already healedpletely so he did not have any injuries in his body. Because of this nobody would be able to tell that a few days ago he was seriously injured.


    Now back to the main matter,


    All of them instantly get up from their seats and show their respect to those elders and the suprememander. Only after that do they sit down and wait for the elders to exin what happened.


    The suprememander decided to take the lead and told everyone what actually happened to Idan City.


    "I think all of you must be wondering what actually happened to Idan City. I can even tell that many of you wanted to know what kind of enemies we met there.


    Actually, to tell you the truth it is our fault and because of this some situations like this appear in that ce. I will tell you about our faultter.


    Before that it is my duty to exin what actually happened to Idan City. I was the one who led that group of Warriors from the Warrior association to that ce.


    Sometime ago all of you already got informed that we were searching for two people who attacked the firstmander.


    So like this wee to Idan City while searching for those two people. At first everything was normal and we also did not expect to find any kind of clue in that ce.


    But after that we came in front of the mansion that is present in the outside area of Idan City.


    Everything would be good if my people did not show that kind of attitude to the people inside that mansion. Before anything I wanted to apologize to every person who receives this kind of behavior from my people.


    Sometimes my people will use their authority to act against your will. I really wanted to apologize for that.


    From now on I wanted to tell everyone that in future nothing like that would happen. Only if a serious situation would appear would we use our power. I hope at that time everyone can understand the seriousness.


    Now back to the main matter, my people roughlymand those people inside the mansion toe outside and let them search around the whole mansion.


    Unfortunately the owner of that mansion did not want us to enter his mansion. Due to our fault he and those other people present inside the mansion lost their trust in the Warrior Association.


    It is natural for them to not allow us to search around the mansion. Unfortunately our people still try to use their power.


    They even try to attack those people. Sigh, only then something unexpected happens. A barrier appears around the mansion which absorbs those attacks and also deflects those attacks.


    My people immediately got injured by that and I also got to know about this.


    Me, the firstmander and other Warriors of the warrior Association after that went to that ce and we also decided to do the same thing.


    Sigh, I was really stupid. Before anything I should try to know why those people were angry at us. But without trying to know about this event I also did the same thing and tried to attack the barrier.


    Once again that barrier absorbs all those attacks and after that one by one it counter attacks us. This is the reason that half of the Idan City got destroyed."


    After saying that the suprememander became silent as he wanted to give everyone the time to proceed with all this information.


    All those news reporters and all those people who are hearing the news begin to be surprised and at the same time be speechless.


    First of all they never thought that even when the suprememander took action nothing happened to that mansion. Also everyone bes surprised when the suprememander apologizes to everyone because of the bad behavior of the Warriors of the warrior Association.


    Actually it is true that many people receive this kind of behavior from the warrior Association, unfortunately none of them are able to do anything. Naturally everyone fears the warrior Association.

 Chapter 910 - Apology

    "All of you must be wondering why I am saying all of these and why even we try to attack the mansion like that.


    Actually due to our fault some people or you can say some innocent people are dered as criminals by the warrior Association.


    All of these happened due to our negligence and due to fake reports provided by our firstmander.


    Yes you hear it right all of this happened due to the firstmander who provided us with fake information about those people.


    I am really ashamed and wanted to inform everyone that all this time we had someone who did not join the warrior association to save our humanity.


    We never get to realize one person could be this much cruel even though he always told everyone that he has the duty to protect.


    Because of his cruelty all those people suffer and lose their family members. I am really ashamed. I just can''t imagine what kind of situation those people will face after all of this.


    Some of them tolerate the physical torture of the firstmander, some of them lost their family members because of that firstmand.


    Because of this I and all the elders decided to call all of you. We really wanted to apologize to every one of you because of our mistake.


    You can say this is also my fault and you should not me our elders. Our elders stayed busy all the time and did not even get the time to rest.


    Because of this, they naturally did not get the time to involve themselves with the warrior Association that matched. On the other hand, from the moment I got the position of suprememander I really overlooked this matter.


    I am also ready to ept my punishment and I am ready to retire from my position. I don''t think I am worthy of being the suprememander.


    I am sorry that I would not be able to reveal all those illegal words and bad things done by that firstmander but I hope everyone of you can understand why I don''t want to reveal.


    I hope all the media did not disturb any of those family members who suffered because of the firstmander.


    Me and all the elders wanted those people to once again trust our Warrior Association. 4 dayster we already decided that we will punish that firstmander in front of everyone.


    It ispletely impossible to ignore all those bad things done by that firstmander.


    When we went to the mansion as I told you it is my fault that without trying to know why those people were angry at the warrior Association I decided to give the signal to attack the barrier.


    I am really ashamed because of this. Please forgive the warrior Association. You can me me for this.


    Our Warrior Association is also ready to help all those people who lost their house and other things during the time."


    Naturally the moment the suprememander finished saying all of these a hugemotion got created in that ce.


    Not just only inside the warrior Association but every Warriors present in the safe zone currently unable to believe what they are hearing right now.


    Except for some people, many people are really unable to believe that someone from the warrior Association could have be so cruel.


    On the other hand it is also a shocking matter that the suprememander will be leaving his position and ready to ept his punishment.


    Many people be angry after hearing all of this. They really cannot believe due to the mistake of the Warrior Association many people dere as criminals and hunt down by the warrior Association.


    Nobody would imagine what kind of situation those people have face after facing the torture of the firstmander.


    Many people even begin to feel satisfied after knowing the situation of the warrior Association.


    But if they think carefully then it is true that those elders did not have any fault in this matter. Did most of the time stay busy to protect their from those powerful Monsters.


    They did not even get the time to rest properly so how will they get the time to involve themselves with the warrior Association.


    It is also true that as the suprememander, he has the duty to overlook all these matters.


    He should have realized all of this sooner than this and punished that firstmander.


    Like this a bigmotion got created among all those Warriors. But when the suprememander told everyone that he will be ready to ept the punishment and will be leaving his position, then we can feel sympathy for the suprememander.


    One thing everyone needed to acknowledge was that from the moment he became suprememander or even before that the suprememander was always ready to help everyone in any kind of situation.


    Even from the moment he became suprememander he became more active to help people.


    He should not leave his position as suprememander as it is not his fault. All of them shift their anger toward the firstmander.


    Those people even thought about requesting the warrior Association, so that the suprememander did not leave his position.


    On the other hand, Uncle Jimmy and the others are the ones who were much more surprisingpared to any of those warriors.


    They did not think that the warrior Association would arrange this kind of press meeting and would publicly acknowledge their mistakes.


    Not only that, by hearing the word of the suprememander anybody could tell he is sincerely asking for forgiveness. He did not want them to forgive but he wanted them to forgive the warrior association and trust the warrior Association.


    At this time many of those people present inside the mansion begin to cry. Finally, their name will be clear and all the things done by that firstmander will be revealed in front of everyone.


    It is also a good thing that the suprememander did not publicly reveal all those bad things done by the firstmander but at least everyone can have the idea about this.


    "To tell you the truth I also feel quite pity for the suprememander. Well, the firstmander has a connection with one elder and this could be also the reason the suprememander is unable to do anything to that firstmander without any solid proof.


    It is also true that that piece of shit from the start destroys all kinds of proof about him so that nobody is able to tell all those things done by that piece of shit."


    One person currently said that to Uncle Jimmy and the others. Well this is the truth.


    At this time, one elder came in front of the microphone and the suprememander standing beside that elder. Looks like this elder is going to say something to everyone.


    Once again everyone begins to focus on the TV screen or you can say mobile screen. They wanted to know the speech of the elders.


    "As the suprememander told everyone. We really wanted to apologize to everyone due to our mistakes. Many people suffer like this.


    I really never expected someone from the warrior Association would be like this. But I hope everyone trusts the warrior Association once again.


    It is my promise and promise of all the saints that from now on we will thoroughly check every Warriors of the warrior Association.


    All those Warriors who have a bad record and did something cruel will get punished by us. Those kinds of people should not belong to the Warrior Association.


    Give us one month and we will thoroughly check every branch and even headquarter of the Warrior Association.


    Now, I wanted to reveal another important piece of information. We wanted to tell you about a family of heroes, but due to our carelessness and ignorance the history of the family of heroes was destroyed by us.


    I think all of you must be wondering as you are unable to remember any information regarding this. I wanted to talk about the Storm family.


    The younger generation would not have any knowledge about this but the older generation should have knowledge about this.


    Unfortunately due to our carelessness all that information about that family of Hero got sealed away. We really wanted to apologize to Michael Storm, Rury Strom, Hina Strom and Natalia Strom.


    This is the family of the hero. When for the first time our got affected by those Monsters. Many people from this family came forward to help everyone and even sacrifice themselves.


    But once again due to that firstmander the information about that family got destroyed and even got sealed away.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    33 years ago all this happened. That time we really did not believe that firstmander that easily and even tried to search for the true information.


    Unfortunately that person already destroyed everything and we in the end decided to believe the fake information provided by that firstmander.


    Because of this, we even use our to destroy the information about that family. We are really sorry about this and I really wanted to receive punishment because of this."

 Chapter 911 - The commotion

    Michael and the others also have the same reaction as Uncle Jimmy and everyone. They also never thought the Warrior Association would apologize to everyone and that we would give all this information to everyone.


    After hearing that information, anybody can feel the Warrior Association be corrupted, and they will lose their trust in the Warriors Association.


    Despite that, they still decided to reveal all this information. Why would there be something like this? Also, how was that mansion able to survive an attack from the suprememander and Warriors of the Warrior Association?N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Michael and Rury are currently thinking about those questions. Both of them did not have to think that much as both of them had already predicted all those people were also dered criminals by the Warrior Association because of that firstmander.


    Both of them can be sure about these after hearing the word of the suprememander.


    Rury almost started crying after hearing that information. First of all, after so many years, the Warriors Association finally decided to investigate that firstmander.


    If they did this 33 years ago then their family would not have to suffer like this. They did not have to lose their daughter.


    For 33 years they did not have to hide like this. They did not have to fear for the life of their second daughter.


    Just thinking about all those things makes both of them very depressed. Sam and Natalia immediately hug both of them.


    Natalia can understand the pain of her parents. She also feels the same pain as her parents. She also wanted to know why she had to suffer like this when she was just a child.


    Naturally, the Warrior Association would not be able to give any exnation. Even though those elders and the suprememander apologize to everyone, Natalia still cannot forgive them.


    But one thing Natalia understands. All of this happened due to Sam. Only after he came to this did he save her and also create that barrier around the mansion.


    Because of that, those people from the Warrior Association suffer like that, and because of that, the elders get to know about this situation.


    It looks like they already heard the description of Sam, and with that, all of them became alert about this situation.


    One thing Natalie understands about Sam is that he is more powerful than those elders. Even the pressure of any elder would not be able to make a suprememander situation like that.


    Most likely, the Warrior Association decided to apologize to everyone like this because of Sam. Naturally, they were dealing with an unknown enemy, and they did not want to bring danger to the warrior association and their people.


    One thing Natalia needed to acknowledge was that all the elders of the Warrior Association worked hard to protect all the humans.


    Now on the other hand inside the Warriors Association,


    "I know this is most likely a surprising thing for everyone, but it is the truth. Not able to find the correct information. We make these kinds of mistakes, and we want to apologize to Michael Strom and his family.


    Due to our fault, he and his family have suffered like this for 33 years. We really cannot imagine what kind of situation they have faced.


    We even get to hear that he lost his elder daughter during that time. I did not know how to apologize to Michael Strom and his family.


    I wanted to say that if Michael Strom and his family want then we are ready to ept our punishment. We really cannot run away from this as all of these happened due to our negligence."


    Saying all of this, the elder bowed in front of everyone. Not just him but all the other elders also did the same thing. Now this is another surprising thing for everyone.


    "If it is possible, I want to invite Michael Strom and his family toe to Teron City in 4 days.


    We will be punishing that firstmander, and we are also ready to ept our punishment if Michael Strom and his family need it.


    Also, not just the Strom family. I wanted to invite all those people who suffered because of the firstmander toe to that city. We wanted to punish that firstmander in front of everyone.


    Even though we may not be able to undo all those bad things done by that firstmander, at least we can give that firstmander the death penalty."


    _____________________________


    The next day,


    Yesterday was a surprising day for every warrior and every citizen of the safe zone. Nobody expected to receive this kind of information from the Warrior Association.


    Who could have thought that the Warrior Association would have some people like this who are cruel? If this kind of person stayed in the Warrior Association, then they did not require any other enemy.


    That person is enough to destroy the safe zone.


    One thing is clear: everybody has be interested in the Storm family. Except for some people, everybody forgot about the information about the Storm family.


    Today, the Warrior Association will be going to reveal all the information about the Storm family. Naturally, all those people wanted to know all the information about that family of heroes.


    Many people also became quite scared of the Warrior Association after hearing that information. Fortunately, that firstmander will be punished by the Warrior Association.


    What if that person decides to target them and their family members? What if that person targets another family of Heroes?


    Now,pared to 33 years ago, he would be able to create more impact as the identity of the firstmander. Fortunately, that kind of person got captured by the warrior association and was going to be punished by the warrior association.


    Many people don''t know, but some people know that the firstmander has a connection with an elder of the Warrior Association.


    Because of the support of that elder, the firstmander got that kind of courage. All those people who know about this information are really angry at that elder for supporting that kind of person.


    As an elder, he always protects his people. How can he support a person like this who can do this kind of thing without even blinking his eyes?


    This kind of person should have already been punished by the Warrior Association long ago. But one thing became clear for now even that the elder would not be able to help the firstmander.


    The suprememander and the other elders made sure that the elders did not help that person.


    Most likely, the elder also understands that fact, and because of this, from the moment his nephew got captured by the Warrior Association, he did not even visit him.


    During the time when the suprememander and other elders apologize to everyone, he also presents them, and he also bows in front of the camera.


    That elder also realized his mistake, and if possible, he wanted to receive punishment from Michael Strom and the others.


    If required, he will leave his position but still dedicate himself to protecting humanity as his punishment. He will do that until he does not die.


    On the other hand, the Warrior Association is already close to repairing the whole of Idan City. But the thing is that many people already try to visit the mansion.


    Even though all the reporters promised those elders that they were not going to disturb any people from that mansion, if possible, they wanted to interview those people.


    Naturally, they wanted to know what kind of situation they had faced because of that firstmander and how they survived until now.


    They wanted to show all this information to everyone.


    Unfortunately, Uncle Jimmy and the others were not interested in this. Uncle Kevin already told those news reporters that they were going to do that after the death of the firstmander.


    At least these make those news reporters happy. At least they are ready to give their interview, but before that, they wanted that firstmander to get punished in front of everyone.


    Also, All those news reporters finally observe the barrier present in front of the mansion. When those people tried to enter the mansion, the barrier immediately got activated.


    Naturally, nobody dares to attack the barrier after thinking about the consequences.


    They did not think they were powerfulpared to the suprememander, and they did not want to face the same situation as the people from the Warrior Association.


    For two more days, everything went like this. Naturally, everyone waited for the day when that firstmander was going to be punished.


    Finally, today is the day when that firstmander is going to be punished by the Warrior Association.


    The whole city is fully crowded with people, and all those people also want to see the punishment of that firstmander.

 Chapter 912 - Pressure

    Inside the battle arena present in Teron City, you can see the full stadium is fully crowded with people.


    Everyone came to that ce for one reason, and that was to see that firstmander get punished by the Warrior Association in front of everyone.


    Everyone also wanted to see what kind of punishment the firstmander would receive because of his work.


    If you consider their thoughts then everyone wanted the firstmander to receive the death penalty. Even though many people did not share the same idea, nobody cared about them.N?v(el)B\\jnn


    Many families because of that firstmander got destroyed and the survivor of the family became a criminal. They just imagine what they would be like if they faced a simr situation.


    This is the reason that most of the people wanted that firstmander to receive the death punishment.


    It''s already 11 a.m. and the punishment should be started. But it looks like all the elders and even the suprememander are waiting for something.


    Also, the VIP section of the battle arena is empty. For today the VIP section is a book for all the people who suffer because of that firstmander.


    It is just that nobody knows if those people who suffer because of that firstmander wille there or not. Will Michael Strom and his familye to that ce?


    Everybody is thinking about all these questions, but unfortunately, nobody knows the answer. They can just only wait.


    Almost 2 hourster, when almost all the people present in the battle arena became impatient and realized that nobody would being to the VIP section, they realized something.


    Suddenly, some people begin to enter the VIP section one by one. Immediately all those people begin to focus on that ce. All those Warriors used their observation technique on that ce.


    Those news reporters immediately focus their cameras on that ce.


    You can already see Uncle Jimmy and the others present inside that VIP section. All the people from that mansion came inside that VIP section one by one.


    This many people became excited, and everybody also wanted to know what Uncle Jimmy and the others were going to do.


    One thing is clear all the people who suffered because of the firstmander wanted the death punishment for that firstmander. What will the Warrior Association be doing in the presence of those people?


    But the thing is that everybody wanted to know if Michael Strom and his family were present at that ce or not. First of all, everybody is also curious about Michael Storm and his family.


    They are the family of Heroes. Naturally, everybody from that family should be respected by everyone.


    But the question is, will they trust the Warrior Association after suffering for 33 years?


    Even though it looked like all the other people who suffered because of the firstmander came to the VIP section, none of them were able to see Michael Storm and his family.


    Suddenly, a spiritual fluctuation appears inside the VIP section, and in the next again, four people appear inside the VIP section.


    Uncle Jimmy and the others almost became ready to attack. Not just only them but also those people from the Warrior Association who are also ready to take action.


    But they finally realized who appeared in that ce. It is Sam and Natalia with her parents.


    Immediately, Uncle Jimmy and the others rxed, and immediately they got up from their seats. All of them show their respect to Michael Strom and Rury Strom.


    Not just only them but even those people from the Warrior Association begin to show their respect by Bowing down their heads.


    One thing Uncle Jimmy and others need to acknowledge is that because of Natalia, they became together, and because of this, they once again have a family.


    When everyone suffered because of that firstmander, it was Natalia who came to them.


    Immediately all those news reporters who previously focused their camera on that VIP section, focused on Michael and the others who appear on that ce.


    Even in the big screen present in the battle arena you can see the face of Michael Strom and his family members.


    Finally everyone gets to see the face of Michael Storm, The Last descendant of a Hero family. He is the person who suffered for 33 years because of that firstmander.


    He even lost his elder daughter because of that firstmander but in the end he did not get the chance toin or take revenge on that firstmander.


    But today that piece of shit or you can say that firstmander is going to be punished by the warrior Association. Naturally this should be a happy moment for Michael and his family.


    Actually many news reporters immediately wanted to talk to Michael and his family and ask about their opinion. Everybody wanted to know their opinion about that firstmander and the warrior Association.


    One thing is clear that none of those people have trust in the warrior Association any longer. But would they be able to trust the warrior Association once again?


    This is a question that nobody knows the answer to.


    At this timepared to any of those Warriors and other cities present in the stadium, the elders and the suprememander focused on one person particrly.


    From the moment Michael and his family appear in that ce, they just focus on that person. As you can predict they are focusing on Sam.


    They wanted to know what kind of person Sam is and if he is really powerfulpared to them or not. By looking, anybody could tell isn''t that much old.


    His age should be below 25. So the question is how he became that much power? Also, does he really belong to another? Is he really strong enough to defeat all the elders?


    All those elders and the suprememander are currently thinking about all these questions.


    They talk with each other using their mind link and because of this The other Warriors beside them would not be able to hear anything.


    But all of them suddenly be silent when something unexpected happens. Suddenly Sam turned his head and directly looked in their direction.


    Even though the suprememander and the elders are focusing on the big screen, somehow it looks like Sam is directly looking in the direction.


    For a second all of them immediately feel a pressure that almost makes them unable to breathe. Not just only that, for a second an unknown fear appears on their mind which makes their body tremble.


    But Sam already stopped looking in their direction and with this the suprememander and all the elders stopped filling the pressure.


    Everything happened just once again so none of those other people from the warrior Association were able to feel anything.


    But for now all the elders and the suprememander have unknown fear present in their mind. Fortunately they aren''t trembling.


    Now if you are wondering what happened to them then actually Sam sometime ago felt some people looking in his direction.


    Because of these he directly uses his observation technique and is able to find the suprememander and those elders of the warrior Association looking in his direction.


    He pointed his head toward the camera and immediately used his pressure on those people. He just uses his pressure for 1 second but he thinks that would be enough to make those people realize that they should not have any kind of other thought about his family and everyone present in that ce.


    There could be a chance the warrior Association did all of this to make all of theme to that ce. What if this is some kind of trap set by the warrior Association?


    Sam actually did not believe in the Warrior Association. Because of this he just gave them a warning.


    On the other hand you can easily tell he uses the bloodline pressure alongside the pressure of aary grade Warrior.


    Sometimeter,


    Finally everyone focused on the main battle arena. The whole stadium became silent. Nobody made any sound as everybody wanted to see the punishment of the firstmander.


    Finally the warriors of the warrior Association surrounded the whole battle arena and after that one by one all the elders began toe to the battle arena.


    Naturally this is not the time to celebrate or anything like this and because of this, you can see everyone has a serious face.


    Sometimeter the suprememander also came to that ce but behind him you can see the firstmander. The firstmander was equipped with a handcuff.


    Now that firstmand is simply normal human without any spiritual energy. Because of this, the elders or the suprememander did not have to use any powerful suppression tool on that firstmander.


    The firstmander when came to that ce he immediately noticed the crowd present there.

 Chapter 913 - The punishment

    The firstmander already knows what kind of punishment he is going to receive. At this time even his uncle would not be able to save him.


    Because of this, he lost the hope to survive. Currently, he is just a useless person without any spiritual energy.


    At this time, he also noticed a VIP section where he could see all those people belonging to the mansion. Not only that he also saw Michael Strom and his family present on the ce.


    More than that, the firstmander also noticed Sam was present in that ce. The moment he noticed those people he became very furious.


    If possible he wanted to attack those people and wanted to kill all of them. Because of those people, he lost everything. He lost his reputation, he lost his power and everything.


    Even his uncle became helpless and would not be able to help him in this matter.


    The firstmander did not have any kind of guilty expression. Instead, he wanted to kill everyone present in the VIP section.


    Unfortunately, that is not possible for him. On the other hand, he finally came to the stage present in the middle of the battle arena.


    They are he can see other elders are present in that ce. He can easily tell all those elders are angry at him, and also he is unable to find his uncle among those other elders.


    "As you can see he is the firstmander. He is the person who, for 33 years, did all those bad things.


    All the time, he will have everything that can point out his crime, and because of this reason, we are unable to find any solid information about him for all these years.


    Also reading memory of any people without any reason is not appropriate. This is also the reason that he will save himself for all these years.


    We are really going to ask forgiveness once again, and I hope all the people who suffer because of this person forgive the Warrior Association.


    Even though we are unable to undo all the bad things done by this firstmander, I hope every one of you is satisfied with the punishment.


    Now I hereby dere the firstmander going to receive the death punishment."


    The moment one elder said that, immediately, all the elders began to fly in the sky. Suprememander maintaining his distance from all the other Warriors of the Warrior Association.


    Only those elders are currently flying above the stage and the firstmander is currently present on the stage.


    Suddenly, a barrier was created around that whole stage. That barrier is called the punishment barrier.


    In the next second, a very powerful spiritual beam was created in that ce and instantly hit that firstmander.


    "Ahhhh!!!!!!!!"


    In the next second, you can hear the painful cry of that firstmander. Naturally, that firstmander got hit by that spirit beam, and currently, he is unable to protect himself.


    5 secondster, the firstmander stopped screaming. One thing is clear to everyone: the firstmander is already dead right now.


    But still, none of the Saints deactivate the barrier. The barrier is still present in the ce, and only 5 minutester, they deactivate the barrier and The spirit beam.


    Only then does everybody notice the ashes present on the floor of that stage. It did not take anyone that much time to realize what is this ash.


    Naturally, a pin drop silent was created in that ce. For a few seconds, nobody knows what to do after these.


    But 15 secondster, suddenly, everybody began to hear the sound of pping. Only then did they notice the sound of ppinging out from the VIP room.


    Immediately, all the cameras focused on the VIP room, and everybody could see those people who suffered because of that firstmander begin to p.


    Not only are they only pping, but you can see tearsing out from their eyes.


    Only then did those people present in the stadiume back to their senses. They also begin to p.


    One thing is clear: they should not feel any kind of regret or guilt for that kind of person.


    One thing is clear: the firstmander makes the lives of those people present in the VIP section a living hell.


    Currently, not just only those people present in that stadium but also people around the whole safe zone are pping. Everyone feels satisfied with the punishment of the firstmander.


    "I hope this satisfies every one of you. Also, as I told you, every one of you, from now on, every person present in the Warrior Association is going to check by us thoroughly.


    We did not want any kind of people like that piece of shit present in our Warrior Association.


    The duty of our Warrior Association is to protect the humanity at any cost. If required, we will sacrifice our lives to protect everyone.


    A person with a mind like this is not qualified to stay in the Warrior Association.


    The thing is that nobody would be able to understand the pain of those people present in the VIP section. Nobody no what kind of cruel thing the firstmander did to those people.


    But one thing is clear: so many yearster, finally, that firstmander got killed by the warrior association, and this made everyone happy.


    Almost everyone, even Uncle Jimmy and the others, is crying. Finally, the firstmander received his punishment, and all the bad things done by that firstmander came in front of everyone.


    Everyone gets to know why they became criminals by the Warrior Association without doing any kind of bad thing.


    But the question is whether they will be able to trace the Warrior Association once again or not.


    This is the question that nobody knows the answer to. Naturally, all the news reporters currently wanted to talk to those people and wanted to know about their opinions.


    But those news reporters also understand the mentality of the people for now. Those tears are not because of pain. Those are the tears of joy.


    Because of this, none of the news reporters disturbed any of those people.


    "Everyone, please pay attention here. We have one more important piece of information to tell. I am going to leave my position as a suprememand.


    I don''t think I am qualified to take this role. Because of this, I hope the Warrior Association finds someone more qualified than me.


    From now on, I will focus on hiding the Monster inside the Dungeon and the danger zone.


    Also, I wanted to inform everyone that we also captured all the subordinates of that firstmander. Among the many people who did many cruel things like that firstmander.


    All those people will also going to be punished by our Warrior Association. All the elders already decided those people will be going to receive the death punishment.


    I am also ready to ept any kind of punishment that the people present in the VIP section want to give me."


    After saying all of these, the suprememander bowed his head once again and apologized to everyone.


    But something unexpected happens. At this time, those people present in the VIP section decided to respond.


    Well, Michael Storm decided to take the lead in response.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    "Before anything, I wanted to tell you that it is a good thing that you were able to find out all the cruel things done by that firstmander.


    It is a good thing that you will publicly announce everything and even clear the names of all the people who are dered as criminals by your Warrior association.


    It is a good thing that that piece of shit finally receives death punishment.


    But one thing I wanted to say is that your Warrior Association would not be able to give us back our Happy Days. Naturally, we did not expect something like that from your association.


    Also, I could say that all of you are ignorant about your people. I could say almost every person from the Warrior Association has some kind of arrogance.


    I got to know from my daughter that previously when your people approached the mansion, they justmanded Jimmy despite his rejection.


    This clearly shows us that you people from the Warrior Association think that all of you are our superiorspared to us.


    We should always bow our heads in front of you and, if possible, never try to go against your association.


    By the mentality of your people, I can feel that.


    For 33 years, my family and I suffered, and we even lost our elder daughter. But forget about us, Jimmy and the others present here also suffer because of that firstmander.


    After that, they even try to approach your organization to ask for help. Unfortunately, your organization did not help them; instead, they even tried to kill them.


    This one second shows the mentality of your people. I don''t know, despite your promise, what would be the result¡­"

 Chapter 914 - Grateful supreme commander

    "But we can give the warrior Association another chance. As the suprememander and all the elders told us that from now on they will check every Warriors of the warrior Association.


    They should also be aware of this matter. First of all, I know that all the saints always stay busy because they are fighting those dangerous Monsters which can easily wipe out our humanity.


    Because of this, we are really grateful to all of you. But that does not mean the warrior Association became superiors.


    On the other hand, I hope from now on the warrior Association will always take everything thoroughly and not show any kind of ignorance.


    I did not want another family to face something like my situation. You have no idea what kind of situation we have faced for 33 years."


    After saying all of this Michael bes silent and sits down. At this time all the people present in the stadium did not know what to do.


    Everyone just became silent and did not make a single sound. Even those people who wanted to criticize Michael and the others, did not know what to say at this moment.


    It is true that nobody would be able to feel what kind of situation Michael and his family faced for 33 years. What kind of situation do those other people face when they are dered as criminals by the warrior Association?


    Even all the elders acknowledge that they were previously unable to involve themselves and these also make all these mattersplicated.


    The warrior Association shows their ignorance about all those matters. Even when those people went inside the warrior association to get true justice, they were about to be captured by the warrior Association.


    Naturally just thinking about all of this matter, anybody could feel why those people lose their trust in the warrior Association.


    But the good thing is that they wanted to give another chance to the warrior Association.


    One thing everyone also acknowledges about the warrior Association is that all the people from the warrior Association always thought they were the superiors.


    Most of the people get criticized by those people. Naturally many people previously wanted to protest against that but unfortunately they were unable to go against the warrior Association.


    Among those people present in the stadium someone came back to his senses and immediately began to p. This made those other people alsoe back to their senses.


    All of them also begin to p. In Just few seconds the whole stadium became filled with the sound of pping.


    " We are truly grateful that all of you give us another chance. Also we wanted to apologize once again because of ignorance.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    I also really did not know that all of you even approach the warrior association to get justice. I wanted to apologize once again because of the mistakes of our people.


    I wanted to promise you one thing that all those people who have this kind of mentality will get punished by our Warrior Association.


    We always told everyone that we don''t think you are the superiors. All the Warriors have a single motive and that is to protect our.


    You can be part of the warrior Association or any other organization. It does not matter. We should focus on our true goal and that is to protect our.


    Don''t worry, as we promised to all of you we are going to check all of our people thoroughly. All those people who have this kind of mentality will get punished and we will reveal this to everyone."


    At this time one elder got up from his seat and then said all of this.


    Even though nobody knows if they are truly grateful or not, everybody will be waiting for the news.


    They wanted to know if the Warrior Association will really check their own people or not.


    At this time, suddenly Natalia got up from her seat. This immediately made everyone focused on her. All those news reporters immediately told their camera man to focus on that VIP section.


    On the big screen everyone can see Natalia. Now naturally everybody wanted to know why she suddenly got up from the seat and it looked like she wanted to say something.


    ________________________


    "Hello everyone, I am Natalia Strom. As you can predict I am the second daughter of Michael Strom and Rury Strom.


    I have something important to say to the warrior Association. Naturally all the things said by my father are true and I won''t repeat those things.


    I have another thing to say to all of you. This is regarding the suprememander who will be leaving his position.


    I don''t think the suprememander needed to leave his Position. Even though I don''t have any trust in your Warrior Association, there is one thing I also need to acknowledge.


    Me and my people investigate the suprememander and one thing I need is to acknowledge that he is really perfect for that position.


    Until now nobody suffered because of the suprememander and he is always there to help everyone.


    Most likely because of his soft nature the firstmander did not get punished until now. I hope the suprememander stays in his position but bes strict about his people. Not everyone is worthy of your kindness.


    Also I would be really grateful if the suprememander created some way where normal people would be able to approach you if they require your help.


    I think you don''t know but previously me and my people tried to approach you. Unfortunately we will never be able to approach you."


    After saying all of this Natalia sat down. This time the moment she finishes saying that once again every person present in the battle arena begins to p.


    Actually not just Natalia but everyone also thought the same thing. Even uncle Jimmy and the others who previously searched about the suprememander also did not have any problem with the suprememander.


    Actually they even previously thought of approaching the suprememander. Unfortunately approaching the suprememander is not easy for anyone.


    Somehow the suprememander became speechless. He also did not expect to receive this kind ofment from Natalia.


    Not only that, it looks like people present in the VIP section did not have any problem with him. Somehow he began to feel very grateful to everyone.


    Most of all he received Praise from those people who lost their trust in the warrior association and suffered because of the Warrior Association.


    Naturally the suprememander is ready to resign from his position. Even though this is a hard decision and he is very emotional about this, he decided to do that because of his own ignorance about all these matters.


    In this kind of situation receiving this kind ofment from someone who lost her trust in the warrior Association is really an unexpected thing for him.


    Somehow he became emotional after hearing all of this. He was almost unable to hold back his tears.


    He came in front of the stage and then bowed down to everyone. He is really grateful that people still believe in him.


    He is also grateful that previously Natalie and the others trust him more than anyone and try to approach him.


    Unfortunately it is true that approaching the suprememander directly is not an easy thing for anyone until you do not have any kind of authority inside the Warrior Association.


    "I am really grateful for all of your beliefs. I really did not expect that I would receive this kind ofment from all of you.


    From here I promise that I will be strict and we will make sure that a situation like this would never ur.


    Even if anybody gets leveled as a criminal, I will check that matter thoroughly and only after that we wille to any decision.


    Also I will create a way where any normal person can approach me for help. They will not face any problem and can directly approach me."


    The suprememander sincerely began to say all of this.


    Currently not just only the suprememander but all the elders are really surprised after hearing all of this.


    They also did not expect that many people believed in the suprememander and did not have anyints against the suprememander.


    Even Natalia Storm took the lead to say all these things to the suprememander.


    Naturally everybody realizes that they have a lot of work to do before going back to those dungeons and inside the danger zone.


    They need to recheck every person in the warrior Association. They really don''t know how many people are present there who have this kind of mentality.


    All those people are going to be punished by them. Also from now on they will not be this much ignorant.


    On the other hand all this time every elders are observing Sam. Even though anybody did not know why all the elders and the suprememander decided toe to this conclusion, naturally all of this happened because of Sam.


    They also didn''t don''t know that the moment Sam appeared in that ce, he gave warning to every saint.

 Chapter 915 - Studying the World Travel Technique

    7 dayster,


    For these 7 days the warrior Association was busy checking everyone one by one.


    It looks like during the time many people even try to leave the warrior Association but unfortunately all those people got captured and all those people are present inside the prison.


    The news reporters also got the news that all those subordinates of the firstmander also received the death penalty.


    Naturally, like the firstmander, those people did not have to present the death sentence in front of everyone.


    Other than that, almost  40% of Warriors of the warrior Association got captured and all of them are currently present inside the prison.


    Naturally those are the people who did not have the mentality to follow the rules of the warrior association. They are the people who have the mentality of superiority.


    They are the people who like toment on everyone as they think other than them. Those people did not have that qualification to talk to them equally.


    Naturally this also created a huge sensation and the Warrior Association also decided to reveal the name of those people.


    The thing is that almost every person present inside the safe zone really did not expect the warrior Association would take this kind of step and even punish many of their people.


    Butpared to before this time everyone is really happy with the work of the warrior Association. Looks like a revolution going to happen inside the warrior Association.


    The warrior Association is going to keep their promise and from now on nobody has to suffer because of the warrior Association. The warrior Association will be present to help everyone and to maintain the order between all the Warriors.


    Everyone will be avable to get through justice from the warrior association and nobody is going to dere as a criminal without solid proof.


    All this work naturally makes everyone happy but at the same time it is unbelievable when everyone looks at the number of people who got captured.


    It ispletely unbelievable that those many people from the warrior Association have this kind of mentality and look like those people even supported the firstmander.


    At least the warrior Association makes sure that the family members of those Warriors did not receive any kind of criticism from anyone.


    This is not the fault of those families. This is the fault of those people who join the warrior Association and despite knowing the rules and regtion of the warrior Association they have that kind of mentality.


    On the other hand uncle Jimmy and the others can leave normally without fearing about the warrior Association.


    But it looks like they decided to live together inside that mansion as that already became their home and everyone became family.


    They did not want to get separated from each other and will be staying in that mansion.


    The Idan City already got repaired by the warrior association and even the mansion got repaired by the warrior Association. This time uncle Jimmy deactivated the barrier as those people did not show any kind of malicious intention.


    The news reporters and almost every Warriors naturally wanted to know the opinions of uncle Jimmy and the others. But for the seven days nobody disturbed them.


    2 dayster, some news reporters got permission to go inside the mansion to interview Uncle Jimmy and the others.


    The news reporters even try to contact Michael Strom and his family, unfortunately they did not find any kind of information about them.


    It is natural as Michael and his family did not reveal their information to anyone and also they are far away from the modern civilization and live inside a small vige.


    For Natalia all of these are like a dream as she cannot believe from the moment Sam came there everything just happened without any kind of problem.


    The firstmander was captured and all of his crimes were revealed in front of everyone. Everyone gets to know about the storm family once again. The firstmander got killed as he received the death punishment.


    Naturally all of these are like a dream to her. But at the same time she and everyone knows that all of these happened due to Sam.


    The warrior Association did not want to be Sam''s enemy as everyone realized they would not be able to win against him.


    Most likely due to this the Warrior Association decided to interrogate the firstmander and was able to find out all of this.


    Even though Natalia still did not trust the warrior Associationpletely, she still has to acknowledge that the Warrior Association is doing everything as they promised.


    The thing is that the suprememander and the elders even wanted to talk to them personally. They told them that they wanted to apologize to them and also wanted to meet Sam.


    Even though Natalie became worried about these and Michael already wanted to reject them, Sam told them he did not have any problem and they did not have to worry about him.


    Only after hearing his assurance Michael decided to agree with that. The thing is that Michael, Rury and Natalia really be very proud of Sam.


    Michael and Rury really did not expect they will get a grandson like this who will be this much powerful and everything will get solved because of him.


    Natalia also has the same thought. but she also at the same time wanted to ask Sam if there is any way to meet Hina or not.


    Not only Natalia, Michael and Rury also have the same thought. Naturally they wanted to meet their elder daughter and their granddaughter alongside their son inw.


    Even though Natalia already became eligible for marriage but due to revenge she never had that kind of mentality and there are not many people she can trust due to her identity.


    But for now everything is different. Naturally, if possible, Michael and Rury want Natalia to get married. From an early age she suffered and always stayed busy to take her revenge.


    But everything is over and currently she should focus on living a normal life.


    On the other hand,


    For these 7 days, Sam became busy with something. Actually he became busy with studying the teleportation method used by those people who came to Eden Blue.


    He wanted to know if using that method he would be able to bring back his grandmother and grandfather alongside his aunty to Eden Blue or not.


    The world travel method he uses is not suitable for them until they do not reach theary grade. Because of this, he became busy.


    The good thing is that, he already found out the characteristics of the technique and he also found some simrity with his world bridge technique.


    You have to say that the world travel technique used by those people is very low level techniquepared to the world bridge used by Sam.


    But the plus point is that, due to this, even those people who did not reach theary grade would be able to use that world travel technique.


    Sam is currently thinking how to modify that technique as he also finds out some problem with that technique.


    Unfortunately he did not have enough gold coins that could help him to buy a new world travel technique from the system Store.


    But some decide that if he is unable to modify that technique on his own, then he would be focusing on killing Monsters and collecting gold coins.


    The thing is that he almost requires 800 million gold coins to buy a world travel technique.


    Unfortunately for now he only has 500k gold coins. Naturally he can use the dead body of the primed dragon to get gold coins but he did not want to do that.


    He wanted to consume that dead body to make himself powerful. Because of this, he will be using the basic method to collect gold coins.


    Naturally this would not be easy and would take a long time. But Sam was not worried about this. He did not worry about the safety of his family, friends, teacher and everyone.


    Day by day they are also bing stronger and until now no powerful Monster appears in that ce that can harm the humans. The saints have enough power to handle everything.


    __________________________


    Natalia and Sam teleport inside the mansion. For a second both of them were unable to recognise the mansion as the mansion had already be a new mansion.


    Uncle Jimmy and the others became serious the moment they noticed the presence of two people inside their mansion.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    Fortunately they did not attack them and also realized it was Sam and Natalia. The moment they noticed both of them they were unable to hold back their emotion and immediately went toward the both of them.


    From children to everyone just have both of them. Everyone is just saying thank you to both of them.

 Chapter 916 - Inside the warrior Association

    "Did Max stop contacting us? Did something happen to him? I did not find him in his home. It looks like he just disappeared and did not want to contact anyone.


    Sigh, I am getting worried about him. Looks like he was really hurt because his nephew got killed."


    "Sigh, what can we do? We are also helpless in this situation. I really did not expect that person to be this much cruel and have this kind of history.


    Because of him, the reputation of our Warrior Association was damaged. People start doubting us."


    "Not only that, I am really surprised with our people. I really did not expect they would have this kind of mentality.


    Sigh, you have to say that all of this happened due to our negligence. We be busy in our training and dealing with those Monsters.


    I am just hoping that Max did not do anything reckless."


    Inside the warrior Association you can see those elders currently discussing elder Max. From the day the firstmander got punished in front of everyone, Elder Max stopped contacting everyone and he even disappeared from his house.


    Anybody could tell he was hurt. Not long ago he even begged, so that his nephew would not receive the death penalty. Unfortunately all the crimes done by that firstmander give him the death punishment.


    Because of this those elders became worried about elder Max. They just hoped he did not do anything reckless.


    ________________________


    Unknown to everyone, Elder Max is currently present inside the danger zone. But he is not fighting any monsters.


    He is present very deep inside the danger zone and you can see the ce where he is having some kind of strange thing.


    The fasting you will notice, arge area gets clear and a strange symbol is present in that ce.


    Currently, elder Max is present in the middle of that symbol and looks like he was meditating. Nobody knows what he is doing there. But you can feel the spiritual fluctuation present in that ce.


    _________________________


    2 dayster,


    Michael Strom alongside his family going toward the warrior Association. As today is the day when they are going to meet the elders of the Warrior Association.


    Naturally Michael and the others became confused about this and as they did not expect the elder will contact them personally and will request them toe to the headquarters.


    This can be a trap to capture them but Sam told them that they did not have to worry about anything. Even if they prepare some kind of trap they would not be able to capture any of them.


    Sometimeter, Michael and everyone came inside the headquarters and one Warrior took them to the meeting room.


    Sometimeter all the elders are also present there alongside the suprememander.


    Naturally the moment they came inside the meeting room they kept observing Sam. Unfortunately they were unable to find anything about him.


    Suddenly, all of them feel that Sam is a normal human without any kind of spiritual energy. Naturally that is impossible.


    Sometimeter,


    "Michael, I really wanted to apologize to you. As I told you before, me and myrades are really ashamed.


    We really did not expect that because of our ignorance the situation of the warrior Association would be like this.


    With the interference of that firstmander and Elder Max, we did not have any choice to believe them.


    I know that it is impossible for any of you to trust the warrior Association or forgive us, but at least give us the chance.


    I promise you that from now on you will see a different Warrior Association."


    One elder said all of this to Michael and his family.


    "Yes, Michael, we are really sorry about this. Naturally we would not be able to feel what kind of hardship you have faced for 33 years. But please give us another chance."


    Another elder said that.


    "Sigh, I think I already told all of you before that it is impossible for you to make me trust your organization once again.


    But that does not mean I did not forgive your organization.


    From the moment you decided to reveal all the crimes about that firstmander and result to give him death punishment, I forgive your organization.


    But naturally even with that I would not be able to trust your organization.


    I just hope from now on I will see a different organization who does not think they are the superiors and they can do anything.


    I don''t want a second family to face a simr situation like my family."


    Michael answered that while releasing a deep breath. Actually, if possible Michael really did not want to meet those people.


    But he also knew that it would not be possible so he decided to meet them.


    After that those elders decided to talk to Natalia. Same as Michael, Natalia also gives them the same answer.


    But there is still a chance that they would be able to regain the trust of Natalia. Like this they begin to talk to Michael and the others.


    Sam all this time did not say anything to them and just kept observing them. Naturally he wanted to find out if they have some kind of alternative motive or not.


    But until now none of them show any kind of malicious intention.


    Like this, finally those elders desire to talk to Sam.


    "Mr. Sam, can we ask you some questions? Actually we are pretty confused about something and because of this we wanted to ask you some questions.


    Naturally we would not force you to answer those questions."


    The suprememander said that to Sam. By hearing his stone you can see the suprememander showing respect to Sam.n/?/vel/b//jn dot c//om


    Naturally this is the true intention of the elders and the suprememander. They wanted to know the true identity of Sam and if possible wanted to know about his motive.


    "We just wanted to know if you are truly from a different and if you are truly the nephew of Natalia Strom."


    "Hmm¡­ yes I think I already informed you before. I am Sam Kainer. The name of my mother is Hina Strom.


    You must be wondering how this is possible. 33 years ago when because of that person of your Warrior Association my grandparents and aunty suffered, my mom somehow teleported to Eden blue.


    I just recently got to know about your and because of this I decided toe here to meet my grandparents and my aunty.


    But one thing I have to say is that I really did not expect your Warrior association to be like this.


    Huh¡­ we also have a warrior Association on our and I can proudly say that nobody from our has any kind ofint about the warrior association.


    Even though all of you are busy dealing with those powerful Monsters or with your training, I don''t think it is a good choice topletely cut the connection with your organization.


    I am really surprised with this and did not expect that the situation of the warrior Association could be like this.


    But I have to say one thing, your people really taught me something and after going back to my I also needed to check those people."


    Sam said all of this and became silent. It Looks like those people became surprised after hearing his information and they also did not expect Hina Storm to be alive.


    Actually the next question day wanted to ask how he is rted to Michael and the others. They did not have to ask that question as Sam already answered that.


    "Mr Sam, can we ask about your motives?"


    "Hmm¡­ at first my motive was to punish your Warrior association and if possible kill that firstmander.


    But it looks like I did not have to take any action and all of you already did that thing. For now I wanted to spend my time with my grandparents and my aunty.


    Also, don''t worry as I don''t have any intention to harm your warrior Association or anything like that."


    Naturally Sam could tell why they were asking him that question. Because of this, he told him that he did not have that intention.


    After hearing his assurance, somehow those people rxed a little, but still all of them were still worried about him.


    At this time suddenly the suprememander asked him about his power level. Unfortunately for the suprememander, Sam did not answer.


    But in the next second all the elders and the suprememander immediately began to feel and pressure that made them suffocate.


    This would be the first time they felt like that and all of them thought they were going to die.


    Not only do they begin to suffocate, but it looks like The spiritual energy present inside their body is behaving strangely.


    Fortunately Sam only uses his bloodline pressure for a few seconds.

 Chapter 917 - Warning

    All the elders and the suprememander finally get the chance to recover and everyone of them panting.


    More than that, all of them are currently covered in sweat. All of them finally realize the true power of Sam.


    The moment Sam uses the bloodline pressure even those elders begin to feel fear. An unknown fear appears in their heart and somehow they begin to feel that they should kneel down in front of that person.


    Naturally all of these happened due to Sam''s superior bloodline. It is normal for any normal bloodline to bow in front of the superior bloodline.


    Michael, Rury and Natalia were surprised when they saw that. This is apletely unexpected thing for them. They also did not expect the condition of those elders and the suprememander to be like this.


    Finally they realized why Sam previously assured them that nothing will happen to them. As expected Sam is really powerfulpared to those elders who are the suprememander.


    This is the reason that the elders and the suprememander did not decide to go against and hide the firstmander.


    The Suprememander and all the elders sighed in relief. They are really grateful that they made the right decision. They really don''t know if they would be able to survive against that kind of power level or not.


    On the other hand they can easily tell the person in front of them without even using his full power. He just casually uses his pressure which makes them that much unstable.


    All those elders came to the conclusion that Sam is more powerful than them and he is definitely a Warrior who already broke through from Epic grade.


    Just thinking about this makes them be very surprised. At least it is a good thing that they decided to correct all their mistakes.


    With this Sam did not have to take action against their Warrior Association. Definitely Sam did not have any responsibility to protect their humans and definitely that made him more dangerous.


    He can easily kill those elders and easily destroy the whole Warrior Association. The moment something like that happens, the stability of their world will disappear.


    There is a chance he will protect his family but what would happen to those other people?


    Definitely they did not want to imagine what kind of situation would appear on their. This is also the reason they feel very grateful.


    "We are really grateful that you decided to show your true power. Also as we told your grandfather that we wanted to change our Warrior Association so that everybody can trust our Warrior Association.


    So you don''t have to worry about our people as I am going to make the warrior Association the same as the old Warrior Association.


    Everybody will be able to trust the warrior Association once again and the warrior Association will be present there to help humanity in every kind of situation."N?v(el)B\\jnn


    One elder did all of this to assure Sam about their Association. Sam on the other hand did not say anything and just nodded.


    Personally he did not have any problem with those elders or the suprememander. He also knows that even his aunty respects those elders and the suprememander.


    Because of those elders their is still safe from those dangerous Monsters which can easily destroy the safe zone. Because of them, they did not have to worry about those powerful Monsters.


    Because of this, Sam also did not have any problem with those elders or the suprememander.


    Previously he wanted to approach the Warrior Association because of that firstmander. But that person already got killed.


    "Well he would be good if you change your Warrior Association. Not just only for my family but it would be good for every person on this.


    Now I want to ask you an important question. Can you call the uncle of the firstmander?


    I wanted to know why he would support that piece of shit despite his elder position. Because of that person, that firstmander got that kind of courage and my family suffered like this.


    Don''t worry I would not do anything to him. Personally I don''t have any problem with him but I still wanted to ask him about his opinion.


    I really wanted to see the mindset of a person like this who can support his nephew despite knowing all the crimes of his nephew."


    Unfortunately, after hearing Sam''s question all the elders and the suprememander became silent.


    From the start they are fearing that question will be asked by Sam. Naturally they are preparing for this but still this makes them quite scared.


    Still the suprememander decided to take the lead to answer.


    "Unfortunately Mr David, we are unable to contact elder Max. Sigh, from the day the firstmander got killed in front of everyone, Elder Max somehow disappeared and stopped contacting us.


    Me and all the elders already try to talk to him. Unfortunately, Elder Max ignored us. Sigh, we really did not know about his current situation or his current location.


    It looks like he cut all the connections from the outside world and he is not even present inside the safe zone."


    The suprememander replied with regret in his voice. The suprememander could feel the sincerity in Sam''s voice.


    It would be a really good thing If some talk to Max and with this everything would be over and they did not have to fear about anything.


    But the situation ispletely different. Elder Max disappears and nobody is able to contact him.


    What if elder Max suddenly does something reckless to take revenge on his nephew?


    That would be a dangerous thing for everyone. More than anything the person in front of them will be angry if elder Max somehow tries to harm Michael and his family or those people present inside the mansion.


    But in this kind of situation they are really helpless. they really did not have any way to contact elder Max.


    Michael and the others became surprised after hearing about the situation of elder Max. Now this is a concerning thing.


    He is the person who from the start supported the firstmander and because of him the firstmander got that kind of courage.


    Now he is suddenly disappearing and there could be a chance he will try to take revenge. Natalia immediately became serious after hearing this.


    "Oh¡­ so hepletely stopped contacting anyone and you did not have any way to contact him.


    Well, forget about him. But I wanted to say one thing to all of you. Ifter I found out that person tried to take revenge, that would be a big mistake.


    I would never forgive a person if he or she decided to take revenge on my family or uncle Jimmy and the others.


    If possible try to say this to your elder Max. I told all of you that I don''t have any problem with your Warrior Association or any of you.


    If possible I also wanted all of you to change your Warrior Association so that everything became normal and stable.


    But definitely during this time If someone tries to take revenge against my family or uncle Jimmy and the others, then I would not be able to stay ideal.


    At the time nobody would be able to stop me from killing that person and this is my promise to all of you."


    Sam said all of this with a serious tone. He made sure that everybody understood his word, so that they did not try to do something foolish.


    "Don''t worry Mr Sam. We understand and we also know that you have the full right to take action if something like that happened.


    Definitely, we will try to contact elder Max and if he is nning something like this then we will try to stop him."


    One elder said this.


    Sometimeter,


    Natalie and the others teleport back to their home. Natalia already registered inside the warrior Association with her correct information.


    But Michael and Rury retired from their Warrior profession. They did not want to go back to that life and wanted to enjoy their life like that.


    Naturally Natalia or Sam did not have any problem with this. With this, four of them decide to go back to their house.


    The moment they disappear from the warrior Association, the suprememander and all the elders be fully rxed.


    A huge amount of pressure leaves their body. They really did not expect to meet a powerful person like this.


    Naturally, the surprising thing for any of them is that there is a person who is able to break through from Epic grade. None of them know what would be the next power grade.


    Naturally none of those elders are close to breaking through. It is very difficult for any of them to break through.


    But on the other hand, they also know that they should not provoke that person. Because of this, all of them also feel that they need to search for elder Max as quickly as they can.

 Chapter 918 - Strange monster

    1 monthter,


    The situation of Ratus has already calmed down. Everything became normal once again and all the people who were previously used because of the firstmander were already able to leave their normal life.


    None of them face any kind of problem from the warrior Association or any other Warriors.


    All of them can one second go inside the Dungeon and they also once again register themselves inside the warrior Association.


    In one word everything became normal and everybody 1 second began to feel that the warrior Association came back to life.


    Compared to before, the warrior Association already changed and it became more suitable for people to approach the warrior Association if they face any kind of problem.


    On the other hand,


    Natalia, alongside many people from the mansion, decided to train with Sam. Sam begins to guide everyone.


    You have to say that his guidance is very useful as all of them improve themselves and everyone bes happy about this.


    Naturally all of them from their childhood did not think about revenge. You can say they never even imagine they would face a situation like this, where their goal will change into another thing.


    As everything became normal, all of them wanted to follow their previous dream to be powerful Warriors.


    Sam decides to help everyone, alongside he also provides them with a lot of crystals. Same as the people of Eden Blue, Natalie and the others also depend on those crystals to increase their power.


    With this Natalie and the others did not have to go inside the Dungeon for now. Actually even though they wanted to go inside the dungeon, Sam told him to stay inside the mansion.


    Elder Max still did not contact anyone from the warrior association and nobody knew about his situation. What if that person tries to take revenge against those people?


    Because of this, Sam told them for now they just needed to focus on their training and improve themselves.


    Hearing his suggestion, nobody has a problem. So Sam also takes the lead to help them.


    But unknown to anyone, inside the Warrior Association something unexpected is happening right now.


    All the elders recently found out about some suspicious activities inside the danger zone. Even though they went inside the danger zone to search about this, unfortunately all the activities suddenly disappeared.


    This thing makes everyone be very serious. What if some kind of powerful Monsters appear there? Thinking about this makes them be very serious.


    Not only that, all the elders are also worried about elder Max. Nobody wants him to do something reckless that can kill him. Unfortunately, even after searching for him inside the danger zone, nobody finds any information about him.


    Despite that, everyone also feels happy that all those people who previously suffered because of the firstmander and their Warrior Association, once again began to trust the warrior association and once again registered themselves as a warrior.


    Even though the word Association did not know the current activity of Sam, they did not decide to observe Sam or anything like that.


    None of them wanted to make that person be furious. At least even Natalia decided to register herself inside the warrior Association. With this they thought it would not take that much time to improve their image.


    Suddenly one Warrior contacted the suprememander. The suprememander after hearing about the sudden information quickly came inside the meeting room to talk to the elders.


    "Sir, another incident happened inside the danger zone. It looks like my people feel some kind of strange monster.


    Fortunately we did not have any casualties but suddenly arge Monster appeared inside the inner area.


    That monster looked like a giant lizard but we were still unable to determine if it was really a lizard or not.n/o/vel/b//in dot c//om


    The whole body of that Monster was fully dark. During night time, other than those red eyes you are not able to see anything about that monster.


    The most dangerous thing was that monsters can use the shadow element.


    Yesterday, a Monster attacked some Warriors. But after injuring those Warriors that Monster disappeared from that ce.


    Today, sometime ago, a Monster appeared and this time my people were also able to notice that monster.


    It looks like a Monster can restrict your movement by restricting your shadow. He can even travel through shadow and can use other attacks rted to shadow."


    The Suprememander exined about the strange monster that suddenly appeared inside the danger zone and already injured many Warriors.


    Even though until now no casualty appeared on those spots, still this is a very dangerous thing.


    Hearing about that Monster all the elders became serious. This is not the first time they hear about strange Monsters appearing inside the danger zone.


    Sometime ago another Monster appeared inside the danger zone which can control gravity and before that another Monster appeared which had control over the dark element.


    Just by hearing a description anybody could tell that all those Monsters are very dangerous and monsters like this rarely appear inside the inner area or the outer area.


    You would be able to find those Monsters inside the core area but naturally people still did not have the courage to go inside the core area.


    "Sigh, I am really feeling that we are going through a bad phase. Sometime ago we just protected our from Sam Kainer, but the situation did not be normal for us.


    We need to deal with another problem that appears not long after that. Sigh, I am really feeling that our luck has be very bad."


    One elder suddenly said that while releasing a deep breath. As you know the elders needed to focus on their work but unfortunately because of this sudden situation none of them were able to do that.


    Before anything going back to their seclusion or inside the danger zone or the Dungeon, they wanted to make sure the situation of the safe zone is stable.


    One month ago, they just solved a very big problem but who can think that one monthter they will face another challenge like this.


    This time, a strange Monster appeared inside the danger zone. Even though no casualties appear inside the danger zone, who can give guarantee that in future it would not be the matter.


    Even they personally went inside the danger zone to search for those Monsters. Unfortunately, they also did not find anything.


    All these things make the situation be moreplicated. Why strange Monsters suddenly appearing and even disappearing from the danger zone.


    One thing ismon about those Monsters that all those Monsters are darker in color.


    This is the first time they are facing monsters like these and really they don''t know what to do in this situation.


    Sometimeter, the elders begin to approach the danger zone. All the elders decided that they will be staying inside the danger zone for a few days.


    They wanted to make sure that they find out the source of those Monsters and if possible try to eliminate those Monsters.


    Unknown to anyone, inside the danger zone, the ce where elder Max was hiding you can see that big symbol present in that open ground.


    Not far away from the ce you can see a barrier that covers that whole ce and this is the thing that hides that ce from any Warriors.


    Elder Max is sitting in the center of that symbol while 10 Monsters present around him. All those Monsters darker in color and all those have red eyes.


    All those Monsters looking at elder Max without blinking their eyes. None of them even moved from their ce. It was like all those are just puppets and waiting for themand of elder Max.


    Sometimeter,


    Elder Max opens his eyes and looks around him. When he saw those 10 Monsters he started tough like a maniac.


    But one thing you would find strange about elder Max. Previously elder Max had a strong bodybuild despite White hairs.


    But currently he looks like he has be very old and has a very thin body. Anybody would get surprised by looking at him. Not only this if you look at him closely then you can see his skin be pale.


    It looked like he did not have any blood in his body. But it looks like elder Max did not care about that. He began tough like a maniac.


    "Hahahaha¡­ hahahaha¡­.. finally I am ready to take my revenge. Even those who would not be able to survive against these monsters.


    They really thought I would not do anything. I even beg them and even ready to beg in front of everyone. But they still wanted to give my nephew the death punishment.


    After protecting all these humans for 70 years I received this kind of result.


    Huh¡­. I should kill those people who are the reason behind all of this. I will make them feel the pay that I am feeling right now.


    Hahaha¡­. I will not kill them easily. Slowly I will torture everyone of them."


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!